Video-Equipment-Buyers-Guide-1985-86-Daniels ....011
N
II
Panasonic
Make sure the video deck you buy for business is designed for business.
Presenting the Panasonic® AG-2200 VHSTmdeck.
Whether you're selling, demonstrating, or training, it pays to come to Panasonic for industrial video communications.
For agreat- looking picture, the AG- 2200 incorporates an advanced
4- head design. Its quartz- locked direct- drive video heads are wider
than heads in conventional home decks, so they provide the kind of picture quality you'd expect from Panasonic: ultracrisp and vividly colorful. This 4- head design also makes special effects like fast search, slow and still frame extra special. Because what you see will remain virtually free from video
noise in the 2-, 4-, or even the economical 6- hour mode.
And to make life even easier, the
AG-2200 comes with one-touch recording, a9-function remote
control, and afull-function display to show the operational mode. You can also use the AG- 2200's display
in conjunction with its 107- channel cable- ready VHF/UHF tuner for unattended automatic recording.
Of course, the AG- 2200 has all
the inputs and outputs you'd expect from an industrial VCR. Like an 8- pin video connector for direct single connection to a monitor. What's more, the 8- pin connector makes tape duplication easy
because you can connect the standard video and audio outputs
to another VCR. And for easy interface with other industrial video
components, the AG - 2200 also includes BNC connectors.
So before you buy aVCR for your business, make sure you buy a
VCR designed for business. The Panasonic AG- 2200.
For more information, call your nearest Panasonic regional office:
Northeast: Midwest: Southeast:
Southwest: West:
(201) 348-7620
(312) 981-4826 (404) 925-6835 (214) 257-0763 (714) 895-7200
Panasonic
Industrial Company
Beaveronics, Inc.
8 Haven Avenue Port Washington, New York 11050 Tel: ( 516) 883-4414
STUDIO PRODUCTION VIDEO SWITCHING SYSTEMS
Stand-alone Downstream Keyers To Upgrade Your Total System
DSK-6-DL
DSK-4-DLB
Especially Designed
for Character Generators
\>.B..ewreeselea.
For Remote, ENG, and Small Production Facilities
Model 712
12- input, 4- output mix- effects amp with downstream mixer, includes downstream preset and program busses with cut bar, ROB chroma key
OPTION
Downstream Keyer
Various Other Models Offered
Video/key selector permits individual or simultaneous multiple keys
·Keys may be " cut" or automatically faded in or out
· Provides for edge border, outline & drop shadow · Internal Matte generator
· DSK-4-DLB provides for automatic fade to from color black
For Moderate Size Model B1-154
15- input, 4- bus mix / eft/ key amp
,v,th downstream mix/key amp. Many optional features including DSK and quad- split, etc
Facilities
CHECK BEAVERONICS FOR: · Specialized custom switchers · Selected terminal equipment
For Sophisticated Model B1-156
15- input, 6- bus with two full mix eff key systems and dir, pgm and pre busses:
many options available, DSK, quad. etc.
Facilities
eel 1-,444
e _ .
-nee' :iete"rr -11.·s.m.ii.rr.
(Also Available in PAL and PAL- M Versions) ALL BEAVERONICS SWITCHING EQUIPMENT CARRIES A TWO YEAR WARRANTY
MASTER CLOCK SYSTEMS MODULAR DESIGN FACILITATES
FUTURE EXPANSION
FAVÁG
Master Clock Systems
NUMEROUS SECONDARY CLOCKS ARE AVAILABLE INCLUDING THOSE WITH SILENT OIL- BATH MOVEMENTS
Minute or second impulse Table Top
Available with accuracy better than 1second/yr.
EXTRA- FLAT /\ SECONDARY
ee e(e° re · r ·rr rr . · * ·
4)** 00 rr rr
. ·
.rr · er
trier
'\
CLOCK
Decorative Secondary- Clocks
Surface Mtg
Flush Mtg
6 DIGIT DIGITAL DISPLAYS AVAILABLE
····-=
ir'«r ow , 2QM5 2 Dual Unit with Auto- Changeover
Beaveronics, Inc.
eirveEn0Ze PnHuOeNE gDETAWIaLsS:hhiinngton,'New York 11050
Prices and Specifications Subject to Cha nge Without Notice,
TEL: 1516) 883-4414
·
The ProCam" Video Camera with Plumbicon tubes at Saffron" price.
JVC's experience-- and success-- in designing the highest quality and reliability into compact video production cameras is unmatched. Now, continuing this tradition of high performance at an affordable price. JVC
has brought a " highend" teleproduction camera within the financial reach of production people often victimiZed by modest budgets. This time, its ProCam 320.
What apackage! SENSITIVIrri ProCam 320 features three, 2 3" Plumbicon pick-up tubes for incomparable picture quality Arefined f ' 1.4 prism optics system provides horizontal resolution of better than 600 lines at center. A2H vertical contour correction circuit further assures image clarity. And minimum illumination measures only 38 lux ( 3.6 fc) at f1.7, permitting shooting
even in limited or artificial light. Avideo S N ratio of 57 dB. Color output signal ( RS- 170A). Asplit field
color bar generator for consistent color reference. Agenlock circuit for maintain-
ing astable picture while switching or mixing with other signals locked on the same source.
EASY OPERATION.
Several 8- bit data memory chips offer operator conveniences for quick set-up and consistent performance. These include: Auto centering,
auto-black balance and auto-white balance, auto black level stabilization and auto
beam control circuits. Matrix masking for true color reproduction and automatic protection for the pick-up tubes are a few of the many features standard on this new
camera. VERSATILITY. Easy
portability. Outstanding performance in low-level
lighting. High degree of automation. An extensive selection of options and accessories combine to make the ProCam 320 suitable for both studio production, EFP, or ENG; or, indeed, to any application, anywhere, that calls for top quality video production while staying within atight budget.
PROCAM TECHNICAL
SUPPORT. Your ProCam sales representative will be happy to explain the availability and calibre of the ProCam technical support program.
For ademonstration of the ProCam 320 Video Camera, a320 Spec Sheet, or JVC's complete
catalog, call. toll-free: 1-800-JVC-5825
JVC Company of America Professional Video Division 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park. N.J. 07407 JVC CANADA. Scarborough, Ont.
· 19134 JVC Company ot America ProCam is atrademark of US JVC CORP Plumbicon is a registered trademark of North American Philips Corp · Saticon is aregistered trademark of Hitachi Denshi Ltd
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA Professional Video Division
ISSN 0747-6183
BILL DANIELS'
nD
L1AL namlnice
85/86 VIDEO
EQUIPMENT BUYERS GUIDE
The BILL DANIELS' ILLUSTRATED TRADE REFERENCES VIDEO EQUIPMENT BUYERS GUIDE is published by the Bill Daniels Co. Inc., P.O. Box 2056, Shawnee Mission, KS 66201. All rights are reserved throughout the world. Any reproduction or copying, in whole or in part, without written permission is prohibited. All the information published has been developed from specification sheets, price lists, sales brochures and technical manuals provided by vendors and/or their dealers. Prices shown on these catalog pages are furnished for information only -- they are not included as quotations, and may not be the current resale price. Participating manufacturers reserve the right to change specifications, revise prices or discontinue items without notice. While every precaution has been taken to assure accuracy in content, the publisher cannot be responsible for manufacturers claims and representations, nor can any guarantee be made against the possibility of error or omission.
BILL DANIELS CO., INC.
P.O. BOX 2056 SHAWNEE MISSION, KS 66201
1-913-492-9900
C1985 BILL DANIELS CO., INC., WORLD RIGHTS RESERVED
Section IVC 1-292
CAMERAS
Abekas Video Systems, Inc Acme-Lite Mfg. Co. AGO Pacific, Inc. Alexander Battery Co. Ambico, Inc. Amperex Electronics Corp. Ampex Corp. Angenieux Corp. of America Anton/Bauer, Inc
Belden Corp. Bogen Photo Corp Buhl Optical Co
Canon USA, Inc Christie Electric Corp. Cine 60, Inc. Clear Corn Intercom Systems Cohu, Inc. Comprehensive Video Supply Corp. Compu=Prompt Cool-Lux Lighting Ind., Inc
Davis & Sanford Co., Inc. D.O. Industries, Inc Durcom, Inc
EEV, Inc EIA/Electronic Industries Assoc EMI, Inc
Fairchild Weston Systems, Inc For-A Corp. of America Frezzolini Electronics, Inc. Fujinon, Inc.
General Electric Co. Gitzo/Karl Heitz, Inc
Harris Corp. Hitachi Denshi Ltd. Hitachi Denshi Sales Corp. of America
Ikegami Electronics, Inc Innovative Television Equipment/ITE Iris
Javelin Electronics, Inc JVC Company of America
Kapco Mfg. Co.. Inc. Kinotone Eastman Kodak Co Konica USA, Inc.
Laird Telemedia, Inc. Peter Lisand Machine Corp. Listec Television Equipment Corp L-W International
Magnasync/Moviola Corp
Nalpak Video Sales, InciNVS Nisus Video, Inc
O'Connor Engineering Labs, Inc. Olympus Corp. of America Omnimount Systems
Peg America, Ltd Panasonic Industrial Co Peerless Sales Co Palco Sales, Inc. Pentax Corp PEP, Inc Perrott Engineering Labs, Inc. Pivotelli USA Porta-Pattern Inc.
0-Tv Telesync/Q-Co. Industries, Inc. QuickSet, Inc
RCA Closed-Circuit Video Equipment Red Line/Research Laboratories, Inc
Sachtler Corp. of America Schneider Corp. of America Sharp Electronics Corp. Smith-Victor Sales Corp Sony Corp. of America Swintek Telecommunications Div.
Tekskil Industries, Inc Telescript, Inc Total Spectrum Mfg., Inc
Ultimate Support Systems, Inc.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VC-2 VC-3-5 VC-8, 7
VC-8 VC-9-11 VC-12, 13
VC- 14 VC- 15 VC- 16-19
VC-20-25 VC-28, 27 VC-28, 29
VC-30-33 VC-34, 35 VC-38-50
VC-51 VC-52, 53
VC-54 VC-55 VC-58
VC-57-59 VC-80 VC-61
VC-62-65 VC-88
VC-87-89
VC-70 VC-71 VC-72-74 VC-75-78
VC-79-87 VC-88, 89
VC-90, 91 VC-92-107
VC- 1C8
VC- 109-124 VC- 125-130
VC- 131
VC- 132-138 VC- 139-149
VC-150, 151 VC-152, 153 VC-154, 155
VC-158
VC- 157-159 VC- 160-162 VC-163, 288-288 VC- 164-168
VC-167, 168
VC- 169 VC- 170
VC- 171-173 VC- 174 VC- 175
VC-178, 177 VC- 178-202 VC-203VC-206-215 VC-216-219 VC-220, 221 VC-222, 223
VC-226 VC-224, 225
VC- 227-230 VC-231-239
VC-240-249 VC-250
VC-251-254 VC-255, 258 VC-257, 258 VC-259, 260 VC-281-269
VC-270
VC-271 VC-272 VC-273
VC-274, 275
VDO-PAK Videolarm, Inc Videotelecom Vinten/Listec Television Equipment Corp.
Weaver- Steadman Welt/Safe-Lock, Inc. Wireworks Corp Index
Section ii VR 1-116
RECORDERS
Abekas Video Systems, Inc Agfa-Gevaert Inc. Allsop, Inc Ampex Corp. R.B. Annis Co Audico, Inc Audiolab Electronics
BASF Systems Corp. Benjamin Intl Blackbourn, Inc Robert Bosch Corp.
Channelmatic Christie Electric Corp.
EECO, Inc ELCON/TEA Inc
Fuji Photo Film USA. Inc
Garner Industries
Hitachi Denshi Ltd.
Interand Corp.
Jensen Sound Laboratories JVC Co. of America
Eastman Kodak Co
Maxell Corp. of America Memorex/Memtek Products Microtran Co., Inc Mitsubishi Electric Sales America, Inc.
NEC Home Electronics ( USA), Inc. Nortronics Co., Inc
Panasonic Industrial Co Pentagon Industries, Inc. Phasecom, Corp. Pioneer Video, Inc Plastic Reel Corp. of America/PRC Portavideo Intl. Inc. Precision Echo
Research Technology Int'l/RTI
Scotch 3M Co Sonar Radio Corp Sony Corp. of America Sony Tape. Sales Co./Sony Corp. of America Standard/Audiscan Corp
Taber Mfg. & Eng. Co TascarnfTeac Corp. of America TDK Electronics Corp Tektronix, Inc.
Wide Range Electronics Corp./WRE
Xedit Corp. Index
Section ill VP 1-136
PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT
Abekas Video Systems, Inc Adams-Smith, Inc. ADDA Corp. Ampex Corp.
Beaveronics, Inc. Robert Bosch Corp.
Central Dynamics Corp. Channelmatic Chyron Corp Cipher Digital Inc CMX Corp. Convergence Corp Crosspoint Latch
VC-278, 277 VC-278-284
VC-288 VC-288-288
VC-288 VC-290 VC-291 VC-292
VA-2 VR-3 VA-4 VA-5-11 VA-12 VR-13, 14 VA-15
VA- 16 VA-17, 18
VA- 19 VR-20
VA-21 VR-22, 23
VA-24 VA-25
VR-28, 27
VA-28
VA-29
VA-30
VA-31 VA-32-52
VA-53
VA-54 VA-55 VA-56 VA-57
VA-58 VA-59, 60
VA-61-77 VA-79 VA-80
VR-81, 82 VR-83 VA-84 VA-85
VA-86, 87
VR-88, 89 VR-90, 91 VR-92-103
VA- 104 VR-105
VA- 106 VR-107-110
VA- 111 VA- 112
VA-113, 114
VA-115 VA- 116
VP-2 VP-3-5 VP-6-8
VP-9
VP- 10, 11 VP- 12
VP- 13-21 VP-22
VP-23-26 VP-27-29 VP-30-32 VP-33, 34 VP-35-38
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section III VP 1-136
PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
Datum, Inc.
Echolab, Inc EECO, Inc ESE Evertz Microsystems, Ltd
For-A Corp. of America
The Grass Valley Group, Inc. Gray Engineering Lab
Harris Corp.
Image Video, Ltd. Intergroup Video Systems, Inc.
JVC Company of America
Knox Video Products
Laird Telemedia, Inc. Leitch Video of America, Inc.
3M Co MCl/Quantel Micro-script/Scriptovision, Inc Microtime, Inc Mycro-Tek, Inc
California Paltas Corp Panasonic Industrial Co Portac, Inc.
Quanta Corp.
Ross Video, Ltd.
Scriptovision, Inc Shintron Co., Inc. Skotel Corp. Sony Corp. of America
Tech Electronics, Inc Telcom Research
Ultimatte Corp. United Media Corp
Videomedia, Inc Index
VP-39, 40
VP-41 VP-42-47 VP-48-50 VP-51-54
VP- 55-58
VP-59-67 VP-68, 69
VP- 70
VP-71, 72 VP-73-79
VP-80, 81
VP-82, 83
VP-84-88 VP-89-90
VP-91-95 VP-96 VP-97 VP-98
VP-99, 100
VP- 101-103 VP- 104
VP-105, 106
VP- 107-112
VP- 113-117
VP-97 VP- 118-120
VP- 121 VP- 122-126
VP- 127 VP- 128
VP- 129-131 VP- 132
VP-133, 134 VP- 136
Section IV VT 1-216
TERMINAL & TEST EQUIPMENT
ADC Magnetic Controls Co.
Adda Corp. Allen Avionics, Inc. Ampex Corp. Artel Communications Corp Asaca/Shibasoku Corp. of America
VT-2, 3 VT-4, 5
VT-6-11 VT- 12 VT- 14 VT- 13
Beckman Industries, Inc B & K Precision/Dynascan Corp. Blonder-Tongue Labs, Inc Robert Bosch Corp. BSM Broadcast Systems, Inc
Central Dynamics Corp. Channelmatic Cohu, Inc. Comprehensive Video Supply Corp. Comsonics, Inc.
Datatek Corp Dyma Engineering Dynair Electronics Dynatech Data Systems
Faroudja Laboratories, Inc. For-A Corp. of America Fortel, Inc. Foundation Electronic Instruments, Inc
The Grass Valley Group, Inc.
VT- 15 VT-16, 17 VT- 18, 19 VT- 20-24 VT- 25
VT- 26-28 VT-29, 30 VT-31-33 VT-34-36
VT-37
VT-38-41 VT-42
VT-43-45 VT-48
VT-47, 48 VT-49-52 VT-53-57 VT-58-61
VT-62-71
Clifford B. Hannay & Son, Inc Harris Corp. HEDCO/Hughes Electronic Devices Corp Henry Engineering Horizon Intl
ICM Video Ikegami Electronics, Inc Image Video, Ltd
VT-72, 73 VT-74
VT-75-81 VT-82 VT-83
VT-84-86 VT-87
VT-88-98
Intergroup Video Systems Interphase
Javelin Electronics JVC Co. of America
Leader Instruments Corp Leitch Video of America, Inc. Lenco, Inc Link Electronics/TEA, Inc.
3M Co M/A Com Video Systems, Inc. Matthey/TEA, Inc. Merlin Engineering Works Microtime, Inc Multidyne Electronics Mycomp Technologies Corp.
Non- Linear Systems/Div. Kaypro Corp Nova Systems, Inc.
California Paltex Corp Panasonic Industrial Co Palco Sales, Inc. Parma Power Electronics, Inc. Pioneer Video, Inc
OSI Systems, Inc
The Real World Technologies Group, Inc. ROH Corp. Ross Video Ltd
Shintron Co., Inc. Shook Electronic Enterprises, Inc. Sigma Electronics H.A. Solutec Ltd Sony Corp. of America
Tascam/Teac Corp. of America Tektronix, Inc. Telemet/Geotel, Inc. Temtron Electronics, Ltd. Thomson-CSF Broadcast, Inc Trompeter Electronics, Inc.
Utah Scientific, Inc
Video Aids of Colorado Vanco-Chicago, Inc. Vanner, Inc Video Interface Products Videolink/Xantech Corp Videomedia, Inc Videotek, Inc Vidicraft, Inc
SL Waber/SL Industries, Inc World Video, Inc. Index
Section V VM 1-128
MONITORS
Amdek Corp. Asaca/Shibasoku Corp. of America Audiotronics
Barco Electronic n.v./Elector USA, Inc. Barco Industries Inc Beckman Instruments, Inc Robert Bosch Corp. Bourbon Street Assoc./TEA, Inc
Cohu, Inc. Conrac Corp./Conrac Div.
Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc. Draper Shade & Screen Co.
Eiki Intl., Inc. Electrohome Electronics Electronic Systems Products, Inc ELMO Mfg. Co
Galaxy Audio Visual General Electric Co. General Technical Corp Gould Electronics
Hitachi Denshi Ltd. Hitachi Sales Corp. of America Hughes Aircraft Co
Ikegami Electronics, Inc Inflight Services, Inc Interand Corp.
VT-99-103 VT-104, 105
VT- 106-108 VT- 109
VT- 111-114 VT- 115-118 VT- 119-124
VT- 125
VT- 126-130 VT- 131 VT- 132 VT- 133
VT- 134-136 VT- 137 VT- 138
VT-139, 140 VT- 141
VT- 142 VT- 143 VT- 144-146 VT-147, 148 VT- 149
VT- 150-154
VT-155, 156 VT-157, 158
VT- 159
VT- 160 VT- 161 VT-162, 163 VT- 164 VT- 165
VT- 166-169 VT- 170-183 VT-184, 185
VT- 186 VT- 187 VT-188, 189
VT- 190-192
VT- 193-195 VT- 196 VT- 197 VT- 198 VT- 199
VT-200, 201 VT-202-204 VT- 205-207
VT-208-213 VT-214, 215
VT-216
VM-2, 3 VU-4 VU-5
VIA-6-8 VM-9, 10
VM-11 VU- 12 VIA-13
VU- 14 VU- 15-19
VIA-20, 21 VM-22, 23
VU-24 VIA-25-31 VIA-32-34
VU-35
VIA-38 VIA-37 VIA-38 VIA-39
VU-40-45 VM-46, 47
VIA-48
VU-49-52 VU-53 VIA-54
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section VVM 1-128
MONITORS (Cont'd)
Jensen Sound Laboratories JVC Company of America
Kloss Video Corp.
Leader Instrument Corp Lenco, Inc Lucasey Mfg. Co., Inc
MPO Videotronics Mitsubishi Electric Sales America, Inc.
NEC Home Electronics (USA), Inc. Non-Linear Systems/Kaypro Corp. Northern Information Technology, Inc./NIT
Panasonic Industrial Co Pivotalli, USA Proton Corp
RCA Service Co RCA Closed-Circuit Video Equipment
Sharp Electronics Corp. Sony Corp. of America Standard/Audiscan Corp
Tektronix, Inc. Temtron Electronics Ltd
Ultra-Vision/Elector USA, Inc Universal Satellite Corp. University Research Co.
Videomate/Universal Satellite Corp Videotek, Inc. Viscotec Index
VU-55 VIA-58-82
VU-63-65
VIA-88-70 VU-71-73 V51-74, 75
VIA-78, 77 VU-78
VU-79 VU-80 V51-81
V51-82-91 VM-92
VM-92, 93
VM-90, 95 V11-98
VIA-97 VM-98-105
VM-108
VIA- 107-115 VIA-118
VU-117 VIA- 118 VU- 119
VM-118 VM-120-128
VU- 127 VU- 128
Section VI VL 1-112
LIGHTING
Acme-Lite Mfg. Co Ambico Inc. Anton/l3auer , Inc
Bogen Photo Corp Walter S. Brewer Co., Inc BW Lighting Systems
Cine 60, Inc. Colortran, Inc Comprehensive Video Supply Corp. Cool-Lux Lighting Ind., Inc Costume Armour Inc.
Frezzolini Electronics, Inc.
Gitzo/Karl Heitz Inc Graflex/Subsea Corp The Great American Market
Kapco Mfg. Co., Inc Kliegl Bros. Kobold/SAT NEWS, Inc
Lowel-Light Mfg., Inc LTM Corp. of America
ModuLight Systems
Olesen
Perrot Engineering Labs, Inc.
Rosco Laboratories, Inc
Smith-Victor Sales Corp Strand Century, Inc. Strong Int'VBallantyne of Omaha Sylvania/GTE Products Corp
Ultimate Support Systems Inc. Index
VI-2-5 VL-8 VL-7
VIV-L1-08-,219 VL-22-31
VL-32, 33 VI-34-37 VL-38, 39 VI-40, 41
VL-42
VI-43-45
VI-46 VL-47 VL-48, 49
VL-50 VI-51-55 VL-58-78
VI-79-83 VL-84, 85
VI-88, 87
VL-88, 89
VI-90
VL-91, 92
VI-93-97 VL-98-108
VI-109 VL-110
VI- 111 VL-112
Section VII VE 1-128
EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
The Advance Products Co. Inc. American Transport Products Anvil Cases Inc. A & S Flight & Road Case Co.
& FURNITURE
VE-2, 3 VE-4 VE-5 VE-8
Bretford Mfg., Inc. Bud Industries, Inc.
CaIzone Case Co Cases, Inc
Excalibur Industries
Fiberbilt
HOME, Inc.
Kangaroo Video Products, Inc K & H Products, Ltd Kiwi/Northern Mercantile, Inc. KLM Associates, Inc
Laird Telemedia, Inc. Luxor Corp
Morton System Furnishings/MSF
Packtronics/PSI Peerless Sales Co. Porta-Brace/K & H Products Ltd. Premier Metal Products Co
Ouest/Packtronics -- PSI
Smith-Victor Sales Corp Sony Corp. of America Soundolier/American Trading & Production Corp Stantron/lJnit of Zero Corp Star Case Mfg. Co., Inc
Telepak San Diego Tenba, Inc Thermodyne Intl, Ltd.
Ultimate Support Systems, Inc.
Viking Cases
Wheelit, Inc. H. Wilson Co The Winsted Corp Index
VE-7-11 VE-12-23
VE-24 VE-25
VE-28
VE-27
VE-28-32
VE-33, 34 VE-36 38
VE-37 VE-38
VE-39 VE-40-46
VE-48-60
VE-61 VE-62 VE-35, 38 VE-53
VE-54, 56
VE-511 VE-57, 58 VE-59-84 VE-85-92
VE-93
VE-94 VE-95 VE-98
VE-97
VE-98
VE-08-104 VE-106108 VE-100-127
VE-128
Section VIII VRF 1-191
ANTENNA SIGNAL DIST. EQUIPMENT
Alpha Technologies
Barco Electronics/Elector USA, Inc. Blonder-Tongue Labs, Inc Bogner Broadcast Equipment Corp.
VRF-2
VRF-3 VRF-4-17
VRF-18
Carlon Electrical Sciences, Inc. Catel/United Scientific Corp Channell Commercial Corp. Comm/Scope Marketing, Inc
VRF-19, 20 VRF-21-29 VRF-30, 31 VRF-32-43
General Cable Co General Instrument Corp
VRF-44 VRF-45-95
Iris Video Conference Systems, Inc. Jensen Sound Laboratories
VRF-98 VRF-97
Keystone Electronics Corp
Leader Instruments Corp Lemco Tool Corp. LAC Electronics, Inc.
Metrotech Corp.
VRF-98, 99
VRF-100 VRF-101, 102 VRF-103-107
VRF-108
Pyramid Industries, Inc
VRF-109-112
Scientific-Atlanta, Inc
VRF-113-139
Tektronix, Inc. Telemet/Geotel, Inc.
Texscan Corp Times Fiber Communications. Inc Trans USA Corp.
VRF-140 VRF-141 VRF-142-149 VRF-150-180 VRF-181-184
UNR-Rohn/Div. UNR, Inc.
VRF-185-189
Wavetek Corp Wide Band Engineering Co., Inc. Winegard Communication Systems
VRF-170-180 VRF-181-187 VRF-188-191
Abekas Video Systems, Inc Acme-Lite Mfg. Co. ACO Pacific, Inc Alexander Battery Co.
Ambico, Inc. Amperex Electronic Corp Ampex Corp. Angenieux Corp. of America
Anton/Bauer, Inc.
A
Belden Corp.
Bogen Photo Corp. Buhl Optical Co.
B
C
Canon USA, Inc.
Christie Electric Corp. Cine 60, Inc. Clear Com Intercom Systems Cohu, Inc Comprehensive Video Supply Corp Compu--Prompt Cool- Lux Lighting Ind., Inc
D
Davis & Sanford Co., Inc. D.O. Industries, Inc
Durcom, Inc
EEV, Inc.
EIA/Electronic Industries Assoc. EMI, Inc
E
Fairchild Weston Systems, Inc. For-A Corp. of America
Frezzolini Electronics, Inc. Fujinon, Inc.
G
General Electric Co. Gitzo/Karl Heitz, Inc
Harris Corp Hitachi Denshi, Ltd Hitachi Sales Corp. of America
H
I
Ikegami Electronics, Inc.
Innovative Television Equipment/ITE Iris
J
Javelin Electronics, Inc. JVC Company of America
Kapco Mfg. Co., Inc. Kinotone
Eastman Kodak Co Konica USA, Inc
CAMERAS
VC-2 VC-3-5 VC-6, 7
VC-8 VC- 9-11 VC- 12, 13
VC- 14 VC- 15 VC- 16-19
VC-20-25 VC-26, 27 VC-28, 29
VC- 30-33 VC-34, 35 VC- 36-50
VC- 51 VC-52, 53
VC- 54 VC-55 VC- 56
VC- 57-59 VC-60 VC-61
VC-62-65 VC-66
VC-67-69
VC-70 VC-71 VC-72-74 VC-75-78
VC-79-87 VC-88, 89
Laird Telemedia, Inc. Peter Lisand Machine Corp. Listec Television Equipment Corp
L-W International
VC- 157-159 VC- 160-162 VC- 163, 286-288
VC- 164-166
Magnasync/Moviola Corp.
Nalpak Video Sales, IncINVS Nisus Video, Inc.
M
N
VC- 167, 168
VC- 169 VC- 170
0
O'Connor Engineering Labs, Inc. Olympus Corp. of America Omnimount Systems
VC- 171-173 VC- 174
VC- 175
Pag America, Ltd. Panasonic Industrial Co. Peerless Sales Co. Pelco Sales, Inc Pentax Corp
PPeErPr,otItncE.ngineering Labs, Inc.
Pivotelli USA Porta-Pattern, Inc
P
VC- 176, 177 VC- 178-202 VC- 203-205 VC- 206-215 VC- 216-219
VC-2202, 2213
VC-226 VC-224, 225
Q-Tv Telesync/Q-Co. Industries, Inc QuickSet, Inc.
VC-227-230 VC-231-239
RCA Closed-Circuit Video Equipment Red Line/Research Laboratories, Inc
VC- 2V4C0--25409
Sachtler Corp. of America Schneider Corp. of America SSmhiatrhp- VEilcetcotrroSnailcessCCoorrpp..
Sony Corp. of America Swintek Telecommunications Div.
VC-251-254 VC-255, 256
VC-2579, 25680
VC- 261-269 VC-270
VC-90, 91 VC- 92-107
VC- 108
VC- 109-124 VC- 125-130
VC- 131
VC- 132-138 VC- 139-149
Tekskil Industries, Inc Telescript, Inc Total Spectrum Mfg., Inc.
Ultimate Support Systems, Inc
U
V VViDdOeo-lPaArmK, Inc.
Videotelecom Vinten/Listec Television Equipment Corp.
VC-271 VC- 272 VC-273
VC-274, 275
VVCC--227768,-227874 VC- 285
VC-286-288
VC-150, 151 VC- 152, 153
Weaver-Steadman Welt/Safe-Lock, Inc.
VC-154, 155 VC- 156
Wireworks Corp. Index
c1985 Bill Daniels Co., Inc. Shawnee Mission, KS
VC- 289 VC-290
VC- 291 VC-292
VC- 1
ABEKAS VIDEO
319 Lincoln Centre Drive Foster City, CA 94404
(415) 571-1711
SYSTEMS,
INC.
VIDEO SLIDE PROJECTOR
A42 VIDEO SLIDE PROJECTOR
Dedicated to optimum picture quality and ease of operation, the A42
is the most compact and reliable digital still store system. Advanced digital video processing yields high quality images, and a micro-
processor- based control system ensures powerful and easy- to- use features. A built-in 5-1/4" Winchester disk drive provides the safest on-line picture storage available.
FEATURES Virtual Picture Numbering The picture numbering scheme employed in the A42 is completely independent of disk storage locations. Pictures are identified by serial numbers ranging from 0 to 9999 regardless of the on-line storage capacity. The user is no longer unnecessarily burdened with keeping track of the actual picture location on disk.
Backup and Off- Line Storage
The A42 offers the most up-to-date, reliable and cost effective means of off-line storage. Utilizing ahigh speed digital streaming tape drive, it stores pictures on acompact quarter- inch tape cartridge. For the first time, unlimited off-line picture storage is practical due to low media cost and compact size. This facilitates easy transport of pictures from one system to another, or from the studio to the mobile
truck. With selective backup, any number of pictures up to 50 frames/100 fields can be transferred to the tape cartridge. In asimilar
manner, selective restore allows either the entire contents or only selected pictures to be transferred from the cartridge to the disk.
THE A42 LIBRARY TERMINAL
stored on the disk. Unlike most other systems, the A42 makes it possible to recover from mistakes when composing multi- layer graphics, because it automatically saves the previous layer in the other frame buffer. Built-in Test Signals The A42 has the ability to generate digitally multiburst, color bars and other useful test signals to aid in the maintenance and troubleshooting of the system.
Sequence
Three sequences of 100 pictures each can be created using any of the recorded pictures. A sequence can be edited at any time by inserting, deleting or substituting pictures. The forward and back arrows on the control panel allow asequence to be played in either direction, and any item in asequence to be played at random. A sequence can be temporarily exited to perform other functions.
Simple Basic Operation
Regardless of the function selected, operation is always easy. A complete status display is superimposed on the preview video output to provide information to the operator. When apicture is grabbed, it can be recorded as afield or frame, as determined by the field/frame button. When the picture is played back, the system automatically selects field or frame depending on how the picture was recorded.
Digital Interface
An optional digital interface provides composite digital input and output ports. These ports make it possible to interface the A42 to the A52 Digital Special Effects system. Library System ( optional)
The A42 offers the most advanced, yet easy- to- use library system available. Each still on the A42 can be labeled with atitle of more than 60 alpha- numeric characters, including an automatic time and date stamp. Flexibility in searching for apicture eliminates the need to set up categories that other systems require. To group certain pictures together, all that is necessary is to include acommon word anywhere
in their titles. For example, if searching with the word '49ers', any picture that includes ' 49ers' anywhere in its title would be listed on the screen.
Independent Output Channels In the dual channel system, pictures can be recalled to both channels independently. While one channel is displaying a picture, the other channel can be fully used to record, playback or create sequences. Dissolves or vertical interval cuts can be programmed for on- air transitions between the channels. The dissolve rate can be varied from the control panel.
Graphics Compose
The A42 provides excellent multi- generation capability which is essential in the composition of multi- layer graphics. The special graphics compose mode optimizes the use of the two channels for
easy graphics creation. Each layer, or the entire graphic, can be
The A42 library system employs an extremely sophisticated searching algorithm to perform complex searches with unequalled speed.
When all or part of atitle is typed for asearch, the system initiates a word- by- word comparison to find the right picture. Even if the operator misspells or changes the order of the words in the title, the system will find the picture that most closely matches what was typed.
Compatibility
The library system is compatible with all A42 systems. Pictures already on the A42 instantly become a part of the library system. Although pictures without titles are recognized by serial number, atitle can easily be added.
VC- 2
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ACME -LITE MFG. CO.
3401 W. Madison Street Skokie, IL 60076 (312) 588-2776
HOLLYWOOD TRIPODS What aFluid Torq Tripod Head Will Do for You:
Most tripod heads have no control in the panning or tilting action. Their movement is rough and when unlocked the head will just flop loosely. A spring head adds the advantage of spring tension preventing the camera flopping too far. But the new series of FluidTorq Heads provide all these added advantages: (1) camera will remain in fixed position even when unlocked; ( 21 asmoother, controlled movement of the head; ( 31 brakes the fall of the camera without springy bounce; and ( 4) tension controlling the head can be adjusted to the weight and size of the camera.
TWO ECONOMY TRIPODS WITH FLUIDTORQ ACTION
It's not necessary to pay high prices to obtain the advantages of FluidTorq action described above. Two models, one tubular leg and one channel both feature the FluidTorq head described at right at virtually the same prices as tripods with ordinary spring heads.
CADET FT: A strong 25mm tubular leg tripod, 3sections with positive collet locks, leg braces to rigidize legs, and crank and gear elevator column. Also features adjustable tension on elevator column to prevent camera from descending too rapidly. FluidTorq head has smoother action and adjustable tension for both panning and tilting.
MASTER FT: A handsome 25mm channel leg tripod, 3 section with fast lever locks, leg braces to rigidize legs, and crank and gear elevator column. Also features adjustable tension on elevator column to prevent camera from descending too rapidly. FluidTorq head has smoother action and adjustable tension for both panning and tilting.
CADET FT \, with FluidTorq Head '
MASTER FT with FluidTorq Head
/
VIDIPOD CF with FluidTorq II head
VIDIPOD TRIPODS
THREE DIFFERENT STYLE HEADS PROVIDING FLUIDTORQ FEATURES
FLUIDTORQ: Handsomely styled head with adjusting knob for changing head tension from loose for small cameras to tight for heavier cameras. Adjusts both panning and tilting simultaneously. Extra long handle locks pan and tilt. Balances different size cameras to prevent falling or slipping. Smooth fluid movement. Featured on Cadet FT and Master FT models.
FLUIDTORQ II: Large, heavier duty head with added features. Adjusting knob changes head tension to balance camera weight and size. Long handle can be adjusted to different angles. Quick Disconnect facilitates mounting camera quickly and easily.
Separate locking controls for panning and tilting. Smooth fluid movement. Featured on Vidipod CF and TF models. ,
FLUIDTORQ SR: Massive, more deluxe head for larger cameras. Adjusting knob changes head tension to balance camera with spring assist to brake camera under loose tension. Telescoping panhandle to adjust to different lengths with adjustable angle and ratchet lock. Quick Disconnect to mount camera quickly. Separate locking controls. Smooth fluid movement. Featured on Vidipod CS and TS and Dollypod Ill models.
VIDIPOD TRIPODS
·Tubular or Channel Legs ·3 Different Head Styles
VIDIPOD C: Heavy-duty 28mm Channel leg tripod
with large 2-way spring head. Includes leg braces,
crank and gear elevator, lever locks, retractable leg
spikes
$119.95
VIDIPOD GP: Same, with 3- way head without
spring
$119.95
VIDIPOD T: Heavy-duty 30mm Tubular leg tripod with large 2-way spring head. Includes leg braces,
crank and gear elevator, collet locks, swivel feet. $139.95
C- SERIES FLUIDTORQ MODELS
VIDIPOD CF: Same as Vidipod C described above
but mounted with FluidTorq II Head
$159.95
VIDIPOD CS: Same as Vidipod C described above but mounted with FluidTorq Sr. deluxe fluid head.
$174.95
With Wheels: Equipped with heavier race and lock;
bubble level. VIDIPOD CF/R
$ 209.95
VIDIPOD CS/R
224.95
T- SERIES FLUIDTORQ MODELS
VIDIPOD TF: Same as Vidipod T described above
but mounted with FluidTorq II head
4179.95
VIDIPOD TS: Same as Vidipod T described above but mounted with FluidTorq Sr. deluxe fluid head.
$194.95
With Wheels: Including grooved legs, wider braces
with lock, bubble level.
VIDIPOD TF/R
8229.95
VIDIPOD TS/R
244.95
VIDIPOD TP: Same, with 3-way head without
spring
$139.95
Select from the Vidipod series either channel or
tubular leg and which of the two FluidTorq heads to provide the perfect combination for your camera. Then add the optional wheels available on any Vidipod tripod as described
lower right.
ALL VIDIPOD TRIPOD MODELS AVA!!LABLE WITH WHEELS
All of the Vidipod models shown on this page can be
provided with 3" wheels with individual toe locks, double acting locks, and leg angle adjustment for
smoother rolling. Models equipped with wheels have heavier braces with lock, bubble level, and tubular models have grooved leg sections to prevent twist.
See left for fluid head models and prices.
C/R: Vidipod Cwith wheels
$169.95
T/R: Vidipod T with wheels
$189.95
1VIDIPOD TF with FluidTorq II head
L.
no,
VIDIPOD TS with FluidTorq Sr. head (shown with optional wheels)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 3
ACME -LITE MFG.
3401 W. Madison Street Skokie, IL 60076 (312) 588-2776
CO.
HOLLYWOOD TRIPODS
TRIPODS/ACCESSORIES
VIDEO ENSIGN
CADET LINE
, ENSIGN _ LINE
o
TVB
TSB
4
TGB
TLB
BUILT-IN ROLLER TRIPOD SERIES
VIDEO ENSIGN TRIPOD
A most unusual tripod and outstanding value. Same construction as all Ensign models but features square
channel legs for extra rigidity to hold most video cam-
eras plus abuilt-in 3- sec. Unipod. Elevator disassembles from tripod to become independent Unipod for
using outdoors when you don't want to carry tripod. Use tripod indoors; use Unipod outdoors. Includes
spring head which counterbalances camera weight
forward and backwards making an ideal tripod for
video cameras.
$99.95
Square Channel Legs on Video Ensign and TSB are closed in back for extra strength compared to standard channel legs which are open in back making them ideal for heavier cameras.
VIDEO CADET
23mm Tubular leg, 3- sec., 3-way head, crank and
gear elevator, positive collet locks. Features spring
head to counterbalance camera weight plus leg braces for stability. Can be used for small to medium
video cameras
$64.95
JET CADET
Same tripod but without spring head
$49.95
ENSIGNS: A duo of popular tripods featuring heavy 25mm open channel legs, 3-sec. with lever locks, leg braces, crank and gear elevator column with friction control, leg spikes.
VIDEO MASTER: As above with double action
spring head
$74.95
ENSIGN MASTER: As above with standard head
without spring.
$69.95
TVB: 3- sec., 23mm Square Channel legs, leg braces,
crank and gear elevator with friction control, leg
spikes and with double action spring head
$69.95
TSB: Same as above with standard head without
spring.
$59.95
TGB: Same as TVB but open channel legs with
standard head without spring.
$54.95
DOLLYPOD LINE
DOLLYPOD: Heavy duty tripod with its own built-in
dolly. Uniquely designed with low center of gravity
with legfulcrum closer to floor to balance weight and facilitate rolling on 3" wheels with locks. Clutch
Elevator adjusts height by squeezing grip and locks
automatically when released. Head same as Video
King with quick- disconnect, leaf spring fluid effect
panning, heavy spring tilting tension, long adjustable
handle
$189.95
DOLLYPOD II
Same as above but with simpler spring head without
precision movement and no disconnect
$149.95
DOLLYPOD III
Same as above but with large FluidTorq Sr. head ( de-
scribed above) for adjustable pan and tilt tension and
smoother movement
$189.95
TRIPOD ACCESSORIES
VIDEO KADDYKART
Convenient, low priced way to support video camera and VCR. Camera mounts to 3-way panhead on
telescoping tubing for adjustable height. VCR mounts
on strong base with 3" wheels secured by adjustable
strap. Now you can roll your equipment and follow
action. Upright tubing disassembles for use as
Unipod.
$69.95
L. O. DOLLY
Heavy duty dolly with 3" wheels will hold any type or
size tripod and provide easy movement of camera and
accessories. Adjustable clamps to hold tripod legs;
carry handle for portability; each leg spring locks
automatically.
$109.95
ACCESSORY SHELF: Strong wire shelf mounts to
dolly for carrying VTR, accessories
$29.95
SHELVA-DOLLY
Unique medium weight dolly with its own built-in
shelf to hold VTR and accessories. Three 3" wheels
each has plunger lock with toe release. Fits any tripod
with adjustable clamps. Canvas shelf folds up when
dolly collapsed for easy portability
484.95
PODRACK
Wire basket which hooks onto legs of any tripod to
hold VTR conveniently. Measures 13" wide and 4.5"
deep expandable to 8".
$39.95
KWIKSTIK
Heavy duty telescoping Monopod with camera platform to hold still or video camera. Provides steady support with lightweight mobility which can be car-
ried easily and change camera position quickly. 3- sec
with fast lever lock; complete with wrist strap and
rubber tip.
$29.95
VC-4
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ACME -LITE MFG. CO.
BATTERY BELTS/LIGHTS
3401 W. Madison Street Skokie, IL 60076 (312) 588-2776
SELECT FROM 3BATTERY BELT MODELS
Individual battery belts for strapping around the body to connect to and power VCR, cameras, lights, etc. Each cell in separate pockets to distribute weight evenly. All batteries rechargeable sealed lead acid to
provide maximum energy for low cost. Cells are sealed to prevent leakage and can be used in any position; can be recharged in 16 hours up to 200 times from zero. Ideally suited for lighting applications
because low impedance insures longest effective illumination output as well as extended discharge time for other applications. All belts include shoulder suspenders to lighten battery weight.
MODEL 12BB
Basic Battery belt 12V, 5 amp hour. Will power 100
watt light 20 minutes effectively; VCR or camera 4-5
hours. Has standard receptacle for cigarette lighter
plug. Battery circuit fused. Includes 500MA charger
and belt suspenders. Weight 5.5 lbs.
$149.95
MODEL 12BL
Long life Battery belt 12V, 10 amp hour. Same as
above but powers light 45 minutes; VCR or camera
9-10 hours. Weight 11 lbs. With 1.0 amp charger, sus-
penders
$290.00
MODEL 24BB
Heavy duty Battery belt 24V, 5 amp hour. Same
construction as above. Includes 500MA charger and
suspenders. Weight 11 lbs.
$345.00
COMBINATION LIGHT AND BATTERY BELT KITS
BATTERY BEL .T WITH CHARGER
LOW VOLTAGE VIDEOLITES FOR BATTERY OPERATION
MODEL 7PB
12V 100W Light including quartz lamp for plugging into 12BB or 12BL Battery belt or any 12V battery system with 6ft. coil cord with cigarette lighter plug. Fitted with 3/8 stand adaptor ( see shoe fitting below)
$69.95
MODEL 7DL
24V 250W Light including quartz lamp for plugging
into 24BB Battery belt or any 24V battery system with
6ft. coil cord with cigarette lighter plug. Swivel yoke
with 3/8 stand adaptor ( see shoe fitting below). Lamp
75 hours, 3200K
$99.95
PBB KIT
12V 5AH 100W. Includes 12BB Battery belt and 7PB
low- voltage light plus 100 watt lamp, 500MA charger,
shoe adaptor to mount light to camera, pouch to hold
light, charger, suspenders.
$225.00
PLL KIT
12V 10AH 100W. Intended for longer running time. Includes No. 12BL Battery belt and 7PB low- voltage
light plus 100 watt lamp, 1.0 amp charger, shoe
adaptor, accessory pouch, suspenders.
S360.00
PHD KIT
24V 5AH 250W. Heavy duty kit for greater light
output. Includes No. 24BB Battery belt and 7DL
low- voltage light plus 250 watt lamp, 500MA charger,
shoe adaptor, suspenders. Barndoors and diffusing
scrim available for light
$440.00
VIDEOLITE ACCESSORIES
MODEL 7PB
MODEL 7DL
HOLSTER STYLE BATTERY KIT
MODEL PML
Combination 7PB light and lamp with holster- style
battery for carrying over shoulder. 12V 5AH Battery in
leatherette case and shoulder strap includes lamp,
500MA charger, shoe adapter, accessory pouch.
Same specsas 12BB Battery belt.
$225.00
MODEL PBL BOOSTER
Separate holster- style battery and case for plugging
into PML to double running time. Includes 500MA
charger and battery connector
$16(1.00
NO. 4VS
Barndoors, 4- leaf Rotating for
Model 7DL light
$29.95
NO. VSS
Diffusing Scorn for Model 7DL
light
$10.95
NO. 25
Shoe Adapter for 7PB or 7DL to
mount light to video camer$a7.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HOLSTER STYLE BATTERY KIT
VC -5
ACO Pacific, Inc. 2604 Read Avenue Belmont, CA 94002 (415) 595-8588
Superior Performance ·Flat frequency response - beyond 20 kHz ·Low noise floor ·Wide dynamic range ·Excellent directivity -25 dB ( typ) ·High output - (-) 36 dBV/Pa ·Unobtrusive - black chrome housing
Applications ·Analog and digital recording - low noise ·Percussion - wide dynamic range ·Strings - flat frequency response ·Vocal - excellent directivity ·Leslie speakers · Podiums
ACM 48 UP CARDIOD MICROPHONE
Specifications
Frequency Response: 30-16kHz ± 3dB - 20kHz ± 5dB
Sensitivity:
-36 dBV/Pa
Directivity:
180° (-) 20dB at 1kHz
Distortion:
134dBSPL - 1% THD ( 48VDC
polarization)
Noise Floor:
18dBA typical
Preamplifier:
9VDC at 2mA
Special order voltages are available for OEM and volume end users.
Polarization: Output Impedance: S/N Ratio re:
re: Dimensions: Mounting:
48VDC ( 100VDC max) 1K ohms 94dBSPL - 76dB 1% THD - 116 dB 2.5 x . 75 inches 5/8 inch - 27 thread female
Finish:
Black chrome
Matching 13" Black Chrome Gooseneck is available -
AGN13B - $ 19.95 w/Mic Purchase - $29.95 alone
Hook Up:
Unterminated cable
Black - Grnd
Shield - Grnd Red - 9VDC Green - Polarization ( 48VDC) White - Signal DC coupled
nominal - 4VDC
The suggested Pro Net is $259.95. Substantial volume OEM and End User discounts are available.
0.
--ACM-48UP
-20
-,- --,_ -.. s s
-.
Al180°r-
30
Ni.- Id V
ACM-48UP
00
2000
FREOUENCY(Hz)
5000
10000 20000
ACOustics Begins with ACO
DSGN - 85 DS 48UP - 85
VC -6
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ACO Pacific, Inc. 2604 Read Avenue Belmont, CA 94002 (415) 595-8588
The "ALTERNATIVE" Family
of PRECISION MICROPHONE PRODUCTS
ACO 7012 7013 7016 7017 7022 7023 7046 7047 7048
Cross Reference Table
BEtK
GenRad
4133
1560-9532
4134
1560-9533
4135
1560-9534
4136 4145 4144 4165
1560-9535
-
4166 4148*
-
"Similar -- Compare specifications
Ivie
1133*
11-34* -
PRECISION MICROPHONE/ PRODUCTS
PS 9200
PS 9200
·3way operation
9V alkaline battery
AC wall adaptor PS9 -- $19.95
External 6-18VDC
·Over 40 hours battery operation with 4012 preamplifier
·Input connector 5pin ( Switchcraft D5F) or equivalent
·BNC output connector -- AC coupled 10).1 F
·Preamp Supply
28V ± 5% unloaded ( 1.5K source)
5mA/channel maximum
Noise: . 005% peak ( typical)
· Polarization
200VDC ± 2% ( 20 meg source)
60VDC ± 5% ( 20 meg source)
PS 9200 1-9 Pro Net(s)
$326.00
200Vdc Polarization
60Vdc Polarization
28Vdc Preamp Signal
ACM 48UP Only $259.95
ACM 48UP CARDIOID MICROPHONE
Superior Performance ·Flat frequency response -- beyond 20 kHz
·Low noise floor ·Wide dynamic range ·Excellent directivity -- 25 dB ( typ) ·High output -- (-) 36 dBV/Pa ·Unobtrusive -- black chrome housing
Applications ·Analog and digital recording -- low noise
·Percussion -- wide dynamic range ·Strings -- flat frequency response ·Vocal -- excellent directivity
AGN 13B matching gooseneck in black when purchased
with ARM 48UP
$19.95
AGN 13B stand alone
29.95
PS 9048 ·3way operation
9VDC alkaline battery AC wall adaptor PS9 -- $19.95 External 6V-18VDC ·Up to 40 hours operation at 1mA load ·Output voltage: 50VDC no load ± 5%
·Maximum current per channel: 5mA ·Output: 50 µFd non polarized capacitors
PS 9048 1-9 Pro Net(s)
DSGN -- 85 DS 48UP -- 85
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$249.95
50V ( nominal)
VC-7
ALEXANDER BATTERY CO.
4410 W. Elm St. P.O. Box 365 McHenry, IL 60050 (800) 323-3813 ( 800) 892-2265
If you've ever been on location with portable cameras or VTRs, you probably know the frustration of adead or defective battery pack. You know what it can cost In wasted dollars and man hours and missed stories and deadlines. Now Alexander Manufacturing can end all that with this line of quality nickel-cadmium rechargeable battery packs.
Alexander BP20A-11. (Top photo) 13.25 volt, 2.3 AH. Improved, with a5- amp in-
ternal fuse and heavy-duty molded plug.
Replaces these packs: Sony BP20A. Christie 101325A3. Cine BP512FC. Pep V20. Frezzolini FNC-12-2.
Alexander BP60A. ( Right photo) 13.75
volt, 2.2 AH. Replaces these packs: Sony 131,60, Cine BP612FC. Pep V60. Pagpac PP-60.
Alexander JVC-1. (Above) 12 volt, 2.3 AH, Alexander JVC-11 13.25 volt, 2.3 AH. Must be charged by Alexander 20-11 Charger. Replaces these packs: JVC PBP-1. Panasonic LCR-3012. Christie 10625C3, ERS. Cine CBP2.15FC. Pep V44. Frezzolini FBP 12-25. Pagpac PP- 1. Alexander BP90. ( Right) 12 volt, 4 AH. Newly redesigned, Including Improved molded plug. Replaces these packS: Sony BP90. Christie ER6. Cine BP912FC. Pep V90, V9ON. Frezzolini FBP-90. FBP-90FC. Penolt PE90.
BATTERIES/CHARGERS
CHART LOCATES PROPER ON- BOARD PACK
EQUIPMENT
AMPEX BCC 14 BCC·20
CINEMA PRODUCTS MNC 71CP
HITACHI FP- 10 FP- 21 FP- 22 FP- 40S
SK- 81 SK-91
IKEGAMI HL- 78A HL- 79A
ITC- 350
NC KY- 1900
KY- 2000
KY- 2700
PANASONIC AK- 710 AK- 760
PHIUPS LDK-14
RCA TE -76 TK-76B TK-76C TE -86
SONY BVP-300 BVP-330
DXC-1610 DXC-1640 DXC-1800 DXC-6000
THOMSON MC601
TOSHIBA PK-60
ALEXANDER NO 7600
7600 or 7700 7600-11 or 7700-11
7600 or 7700
7603 or 7703 7600 7603-10 7600-11 or 77C0-11 7700 7603-10 or 703-11
7600 or 7700 7600 or 7700
7600 or 7700 7600-11 or 7703-11
7600 or 7700 7600
Alexander 7700. Like 7600, except is equipped to mount on °RSV- type bracket. Replaces: Anton Bauer Pro Pack 14. Alexander 7700-11. Like 7600-11, except is equipped to mount on ORSV-type bracket. Replaces: Anton Bauer Pro Pat 13
Alexander 677 Mounting Bracket. Accommodates 7600 type batteries Rts these cameras: RCA TK - 76. TK - 76B. 1K-
CHARGERS FOR EACH BATTERY PACK
ON- BOARD UNITS
REPLACEMENTS
EQUIPMENT
NC AV/G54500 CR4400U Recorder CRAIOOLU Recorder GC.4800WCR4400U CC/PV4803U HP4000AU
HR4100 Recorder HR4110 Recorder HR4100/CC3350 HR4103/C-71U5 HR4100/C-31US TM41AU Monitor
PANASONIC NV- 8400 Camera NV- 9400 Recorder PV2000/PK300 PV- 2100 Recorder PV- 2300 Recorder PV- 3000 Recorder
RCA TH -S0 Recorder
ALEXANDER NO JVC·1 or JVC·11
JVC-1 or NC- 11
BP90
VC-8
SONY Av-3400 Recorder AV- 3450 Recorder AV3400/AVC3450 AV3400/AVC3400 AV8400/AVC3450
BVH-S00 Recorder BVP-103 Camera
BVP-3C0 Camera BVP-330 Camera BVU-S0 Recorder
evuloo Camera
BVU-110 Recorder BVU-500 Recorder
DXC-1603 Camera
DXC-1610 Camera DXC-1640 Camera DXC-1800 Camera DXC-6000 Camera SL- 340 Recorder SLO-340 Recorder SL3000/HVC1030
SO- 3800 Recorder SO-4800 Recorder
VO-3800 Recorder
VP- 4800 Recorder
THOMSON MC- 601
BP20A-11
BP90 BP20A-11 81.3C
BP20A-11 BM BF20A-11 BP6CA
BP20A-11 BP20A-11
ar,sce
Alexander 7600 Ride Behind is afully re- Alexander CR90-1 Smart Charger. We
chargeable nickel- cadmium 14.4volt, 4AH call it " smart" because it detects when
unit. Equipped with studs for snap- on the battery is fully charged and auto-
mounting on any camera equipped with a matically drops to trickle charge. Will
keyhole mounting bracket. Attach astan- charge any 12-15 volt battery with aca-
dard or short power cable to camera.
pacity of at least 4AH.
Replaces these packs: Christie KR2. Cine Alexander 20-11. Completely recharges
OB4-14, 065-14, 0B5- 14S. Frezzolini BP14. three BP20A-11, JVC-1orJVC-11packs in
PEP H14.
ten hours or less. Cannot harm battery
Alexander 7600-11 Ride Behind. Like by overcharging.
TR7600. 13.2 volt, 4AH unit.
Alexander 20-40. Completely recharges
Replaces these packs: Christie KR1.
two BP90 packs in ten hours or less.
Alexander 7600-10 Ride Behind. Like TR7600, 12 volt. 4AH unit.
Replaces these packs: Cine 085-12. Frezzolini BP12. PEP H12.
Alexander CR76-2. Completely re-
charges two 7600 "Ride Behind" packs in ten hours or less. Cannot harm battery by overcharging.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AMBICO, INC.
50 Maple Street Norwood, NJ 07648-0427
(201) 767-4100
VIDEO TRIPODS
TRIPODS/HEADS/DOLLIES
As\k V-0523
V-0522
Model V-0522 Fluid Head Video Tripod
Internationally recognized by video professionals as the best type of head for steady,
jitter-free videocamera movement, the specially-designed head housing encases fluid
and uses its viscosity to provide the smoothest possible movement throughout a
360° pan or a180° tilt. Tripod has threesection, channeled tubular legs for maximum stability and portability. Folds to acompact 29 1/ 2 inches; extends to afull 72 inches.
$219.95
·
e
V-0502
V-0511
V-0514 V-0512
section legs with channels for extra steadi-
ness. Trigger- release, lever-style leg locks
are designed to open with one hand, for
quick extension of legs with no pinched
fingers. No- mar rubber feet will not slide,
even on smooth surfaces. Panhead handle
also becomes carrying handle.
$89.95
Model V-0511 TLC Square- Leg Video Tripod
Model V-0523 Wheeled Fluid Head Video Tripod
All the features of the remarkable Model V-0522 above, including fluid motion control and fluid head. In addition, has large, smooth
rolling wheels for following the action virtually anywhere. Includes Sure- Stop brakes on each wheel for steady still shots.
$259.95
TLC ( Tilt Level Control) means the video-
camera cannot tilt forward suddenly. Simple
screw adjustment sets large panhead to
weight and balance of individual video-
camera for steady, smooth shooting. Square
leg construction is closed cross-section ( not
open " U") for strength combined with light
weight.
$129.95
Model V-0514 Professional Video Tripod w/VVheels
Model V-0599
Video Dolly
For tracking shots and easy movement of the
video tripod. Screw adjustable clamps securely hold each tripod leg on dolly. Large
size wheels roll smoothly, even on carpeting
or tile floor. Built-in, Sure- Stop brakes on
each wheel hold steady for still shots. Fits most tripods. Folds compactly for easy carrying. Carrying handle makes transport-
ing easy.
$69.95
Heavy-duty, tubular legs are channeled for
maximum stability. Channels along side of
each three- section leg keep each section
aligned with next. Large- size wheels for
following action. Rolls smoothly, even over
shag rugs. Built-in Sure- Stop brakes for still
shots. TLC ( Tilt Level Control), and extra
large panhead for videocameras.
$189.95
Model V-0512 ( without wheels)
All features are exactly the same as Model
V-0514.
$149.95
Model V-0524 Videocamera Shoulder Pod
Complete mobility, yet new steadiness for hand-held shots. Weighs just 3pounds. Any camera can be mounted on the large size mounting bracket; tubes and belt adjust to fit
any body size.
· Hands free operation ·Works on left or right side
·Easy on -- easy off
$59.95
Model V-0502 Video Tripod
Our most economical tripod, yet specifically
designed for the video- camera. Continuously adjustable tilt control helps keep camera steady for smooth pans and tilts. Like our more expensive models, includes center leg braces for added stability. Tubular, three-
Model V-0325 Quick Release Camera Mount
For quick mounting and removal of video-
camera on tripods. Securely attaches to all
AMBICO tripods; however, not required with
Model V-0522 or V-0523.
$9.95
Model V-0515
A VCR caddy and camera support, all in one. Video recorder mounts below, held safely in place with heavy web straps ( included). Videocamera attaches to built-in threesection monopod with full-function head for pans and tilts. Over-size wheels roll smoothly and have built-in brakes for still shots. Includes wrist strap for easy portability.
Reproduced with Permission from Materials © 1984 by AMBICO, INC. Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$99.95 VC-9
AMBICO. INC.
50 Maple Street
Norwood, NJ 07648-0427 (201) 767-4100
CAMERA BAGS/TELE-CINE CONVERTERS/ POWER SUPPLY/CABLES/ANALYZER
V-0431
Videocamera Bags
Designed fora total video system. Dividers allow ample room for videocamera, plus accessories. Practical, good-looking " cater-
pillar" tread design cushions equipment and won't slide on smooth surfaces. Nylon fabric
outer covering resists moisture, mildew, and
abrasion; luxurious, cushioned vinyl nap inner lining is gentle to equipment inside. Accessory pockets for batteries, tapes, and
cables. Tripod can be carried under belting. Web straps adjust for convenient hand or shoulder carrying.
V-0430 Videocamera Bag
V-0431
$49.95
Videocamera and Equipment Bag
64.95
Model V-0610
Tele- Cine Converter
Pays for itself after afew tapes, compared
with the cost of commercial video transfer
services. Image from any 8mm or 16mm
movie projector, or slide projector, passes through precision optics to ahigh- contrast,
rear projection screen. Videocamera shoots image on this screen, which can be color-
corrected, can have narration, music, or
other sound added. If videocamera does not
have macro capability, an AMBICO Macro
Lens Attachment, V-0314 will adapt camera
for use with Tele- Cine.
$49.95
Model V-0605 AC Camera Power Supply Adapter
For use with any VHS recorder not equipped with camera input. Power supply adapter breaks out signal into video, audio and pause. On- off switch has LED indicator light.
$64.95
V-0602 V-0603
Videocamera Extension Cables
Thirty- three-foot cables with 10- pin male to 10- pin female connectors. All 10- pin connectors wired for stereo capability.
Model V-0602 Panasonic Extension Cable
Fits all Panasonic and Panasonic- type
cameras.
$69.95
Model V-0603 JVC Extension Cable
$69.95
Model V-0611 Titling Tele- Cine Converter
Model V-0327
Tele-Slide Converter
Places photo slides on tape without aslide projector. Tele -Slide attaches to video-
camera lens mount. Camera is aimed into
artificial light source or daylight. Video-
camera's zoom lens can crop slides, camera controls can color- correct slides, and sound
or music can be added. Converter can also
transfer color negative film to positive image
if camera is equipped with polarity reversal
switch. Includes adapter rings to fit most
videocameras.
$93.95
Adds another feature to the basic Tele- Cine Model V-0610; titles are superimposed as recording takes place. With Titling model,
transfer letters and clear, flexible plastic
strips are included. Plastic strips fit into slots in front of screen on Titling converter. Titles are spelled out on plastic strips, and they can be moved horizontally or vertically across screen to place titles on movies or slides as
they are recorded by videocarnera.
Kit Includes:
·3 -- color marker pens
·Set of Peel-' N'- Stick letters and numbers
(all black)
·Set of acetate sheets
$59.95
Model V-0329 Cable Analyzer
Solves the problem of finding defective cables in complex cable networks. Checks cables with F, RCA, Mini, and Phone plugs. Each end of cable attaches to tester and any combination of plugs is possible. Test light indicates cable status. Four switch settings test center conductor, outer conductor (ground), and indicate short circuits. $24.95
VC- 10
Reproduced with Permission from Materials CÇD 1984 by AMBICO, INC. Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AMBICO, INC.
50 Maple Street Norwood, NJ 07648-0427 (201) 767-4100
VIDEO LENS ATTACHMENTS
LENS ATTACHMENTS Et MAINTENANCE ITEMS
VIDEO SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ACCESSORIES
Model V-0319 Video Special Effects Kit
Three high- quality, screw- in lens attachments.$59.95
Multi- Imager creates identical multiple images which can be rotated with control arm.
Rainbow- Effect lens turns light sources into dramatic, prismatic effects in all colors of the
spectrum.
Starburst lens attachment makes any point of light become abrilliant star. Kit also includes carrying case with protective pouch for each lens attachment, and adapter rings to fit most video cameras. All handsomely gift boxed.
Model V-0310
Fisheye Lens Attachment
Dramatically widens angle of view. Helpful when shooting in tight quarters. Used close
up, it creates those well-known fisheye cari-
cature effects.
$74.95
Model V-0341 Hemispheric Lens Attachment
Gives apicture area three times larger than
the videocamera's normal wide-angle capa-
bility. Tremendous depth- of- field means
virtually limitless focal length, from directly in
front of lens to infinity. Large precision lens
provides distortion free image with no fish-
eye effect, no barrel distortion, etc. Works
with any videocamera having macro capa-
bility.
$99.95
Model V-0311 Close-up/Wide View Lens Attachment
Atwo section attachment. As aclose-up
allows tight, detail shots; for example, a
wedding invitation card. As awide- view,
takes in the entire shot when camera cannot
be moved back further. Gives 166% %
greater field of view than standard camera
lens.
$69.95
Head- Cleaning Cassettes
Improve picture quality and reduce wear on video heads. Clean entire tape track ( audio
and video) in afew seconds. Specially formulated cleaning fluid included, along with
simple instruction.
V-0732 VHS Head- Cleaning Cassette
$14.95
V-0731 Beta Head- Cleaning Cassette
14.95
Model V.0733
Head- Cleaning Replacement Fluid
For use with Head- Cleaning Cassettes,
V-0732 and V-0731.
$7.95
Model V-0342 Telephoto Lens Attachment
A lighter-weight, more compact and economical telephoto lens attachment. Adds length to the camera's zoom lens, and allows
tight close-ups with asoft focus background that fills entire frame. 1.4X magnification.
$99.95
Videotape-Cleaning Systems
Model V-0990 Lens Guard Kit
Neutral density lens attachment protects camera tube when shooting toward strong light. Prevents " hot spot" burn on camera tube. Also adds contrast for extra-vivid coloring. Kit also includes Clear Optical Lens Shield to protect camera lens f-om fingerprints, dust, spray, etc., while pictures are
shot distortion free. Kit comes in carrying case with protective pouch for each lens attachment, and with adapter rings. $15.95
Model V-0312
Telephoto Lens Attachment
Acts as atelescope to make the longest zoom
even longer. Great for sports action, wildlife,
and travel. Used for close-ups, gives sharp focus on subject with soft focus on back-
ground. 1.5X magnification.
$175.00
Model V-0314
Macro Lens Attachment
For extreme close-ups, less than six inches from subject. A + 4-diopter, high- opticalquality attachment; especially useful for
videocameras with no macro capability.
Necessary when using AMBICO Tele- Cine
Converter with video cameras not designed
for close-up work.
$14.95
All lens attachments are supplied complete with carrying case and adapter rings to fit
most video cameras.
Cleans aT-120 minute tape in less than fifteen minutes, with automatic shut-off at end of cycle. Includes 3.5- ounce bottle of cleaning fluid. Replacement fluid available in 3.5-ounce and 17.5- ounce bottles.
V-0330 VHS Videotape- Cleaning System
$149.95
V-0331 Beta Videotape- Cleaning System
149.95
Videotape- Cleaning Replacement Fluid
For use with Videotape- Cleaning Systems, V-0330 and V-0331.
V-0333 Tape- Cleaning Fluid 13.5 ounces)
$ 7.95
V-0334 Tape- Cleaning Fluid ( 17.5 ounces)
17.95
Reproduced with Permission from Materials 1984 by AMBICO, INC. Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 11
Amperex ® Electronic Corporation
A NORTH AMERICAN PHILIPS COMPANY
Providence Pike Slatersville, RI 02876 (401) 762-3800 TVVX 710-382-6332
CAMERA TUBES
30mm TUBES
X01410 Series Plumbicon® Camera Tube
The Amperex X01410 Series is a1.2" ( 30mm) diameter Plumbicon television camera tube with high resolution leadoxide photoconductive target, separate mesh construction, magnetic deflection and magnetic focusing and internal light bias. It's intended for highest quality usage in X01410L, X01410R, X01410G and XQ1410B types of color cameras, in broadcast, educational and high quality industrial applications.
The X01410 series has increased resolution and internal light bias for reduction of lag under low-key conditions.
X01413, X01415 Series Plumbicon® Camera Tube
The Amperex XC11413 Series is a1.2" 130mm Idiameter Plumbicon camera tube with high resolution lead oxide photoconductive target, with extended red response.
The X01413 Series is interchangeable with the XC11023 Series, however the XI:11413 Series has internal light bias for reduction of lag under low-key conditions.
Tubes of the X01415 Series are identical to tubes of the X01413 Series but incorporate an infrared reflecting filter on the anti- halation glass faceplate.
1" TUBES
X01070 Series Plumbicon® Camera Tube
The Amperex XQ1070 Series is a 1" ( 25mm) high resolution Plumbicon television camera tube with low heater power, separate mesh construction, magnetic focusing and deflection.
The XC11070 Series is intended for use in highest quality broadcast camera equipment.
The X01070 Series is also mechanically interchangeable with 1" diameter vidicons with separate mesh construction and has the same base pin connections.
X01075 Series Plumbicon® Camera Tube
The Amperex XQ1075 Series is a 1" ( 25mml high resolution Plumbicon television camera tube with extended red response, and is intended for use in high quality broadcast camera equipment where infrared filtering is required but not present in the camera optical system.
The XQ1073 Series is identical to the X01075 Series with the exception that it does not have an infrared cutoff filter.
XQ2170 Series Plumbicon® Camera Tube
1" ( 25mm) Diode Gun"" ( Patent Pending) High Resolution Plumbicon(, Camera Tube The XC12170 Series Plumbicon® Camera Tube is a high sensitivity, high resolution, low lag television pick-up tube with lead-oxide photoconductive layer, separate mesh and all magnetic deflection and focus.
It has a new electron gun assembly designed to significantly improve resolution and lag. The electron gun operates in adiode mode. The beam has auniform energy distribution, improved beam acceptance and speed of response, and enhanced resolution. The gun also provides very high beam reserve, minimizing comet tailing and blooming in cameras with dynamic beam control.
N.V. Philips of Holland
Note that while the XQ2170 Series is mechanically interchangeable with the X01070 Series, the " diode gun" requires apositive grid 1voltage ) up to + 20V) and draws a positive grid current of up to 5mA. Cameras designed around X01070 then, must be modified to accommodate this.
X01500 Series Plumbicon® Camera Tubes
The Amperex XCI1500 is a 1" 125mm) high resolution Plumbicon television camera tube which features the Anti- Comet Tail ( ACT) gun designed to handle highlights up to four Fstops over peak white. The internal light bias reduces lag to a minimum. The X01505 extended red Plumbicon tube for best red response incorporates an infrared reflecting filter on the antihalation glass faceplate.
2/3" TUBES
Xia4187 ( 85X0) Plumbicon® Camera Tube
2/3" 117.8mm) diameter Plumbicon television camera tube with Diode Gun for dynamic beam control DBC and low output capacitance for best signal-to-noise ratio. The X04187 R, G, Et B has ahigh resolution lead oxide photoconductive layer, Electrostatic Focus magnetic deflection with high stability ( HS) electrode structure. It requires very low power and has low deflection field damping.
XQ3467 Series Plumbicon® Camera Tube
2/3" ( 17.8mm) diameter Plumbicon television camera tube with a lead oxide, high resolution layer. The XQ3467 R, G. Et B employs atriode gun with Electrostatic Focus and Magnetic Deflection.
X03457 ( 87X0) Series Plumbicon' Camera Tube
2/3" 117.8mm) diameter Plumbicon television camera tube with high resolution lead oxide layer, Magnetic Focus and Electrostatic Deflection ( MS). The X03457 R, G, Et B incorporates the Diode Gun for dynamic beam control DBC, Low Capacitance for high signalto-noise ratio and is only 87.5mm long for smaller cameras.
X02427 Series Plumbicon® Camera Tube
2/3" 117.8mm) diameter Plumbicon television camera tubes with special high resolution lead- oxide photoconductive target, low heater power, magnetic focusing and deflection.
Special features are: · New photoconductive target for increased resolution · " Diode" electron gun for DBC (dynamic beam control) to minimize comet tailing and blooming
X03427 Series Plumbicon® Camera Tube
2/3" ( 17.8mm) diameter Plumbicon television camera tubes with special high resolution lead-oxide photoconductive target, low heater power, magnetic focusing and deflection. Special features are: · New photoconductive target for increased resolution · " Diode" electron gun for DBC ( dynamic beam
control) to minimize comet tailing and highlight blooming · Low output capacitance for high signal to noise ratio
X01427 Series Plumbicon® Camera Tube
The XC11427 is a2/3" ( 17.7mm) Plumbicon television camera tube with high resolution leadoxide photoconductive target, separate mesh construction, low heater power, magnetic deflection and magnetic focusing. The XC11427R, X01427G, and Xi:11427B types are intended for use in color cameras in Field Production, Broadcast Studio, Electronic News Gathering, educational and high quality industrial applications.
1/2" TUBE
X04087 ( 80X0) Plumbicon® Camera Tube
The XQ4087 is a 1/2" (8mm scan diagonal) Plumbicon television camera tube with low heater power, magnetic deflection and electrostatic focusing, assembled with a DT1120 small lightweight deflection unit. Special features are: · Diode electron gun for DBC ( dynamic beam con-
trol), which minimizes comet tailing and blooming ·Low output capacitance achieved by aspecial signal
plate with contact through the window · Low deflection field damping by wall electrodes · Excellent geometry and registration capability · Reduced line pick-up due to side connection of the
mesh · Low power consumption due to electrostatic focus
The XQ4087 tubes are intended for color and monochrome cameras in broadcast ( Electronic News Gathering), educational and high quality industrial applications.
VC- 12
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Amperex ® Electronic Corporation
A NORTH AMERICAN PHILIPS COMPANY
Providence Pike Slatersville, RI 02876 (401) 762-3800 TVVX 710-382-6332
VIDICON/NEWVICON CAMERA TUBES
Mesh Construction
Type X01240 X01241 XQ1280 XO.1285
Length mm / in.
159 6.260
159 6.260
159 6.260
159 6.260
I - Integral S - Separate
S
S
S
S
Focusing
Method M
M
M
M
X(11270/
108
I
M
20PE11
4.235
X01271/
108
S
M
20PE13
4.235
X01272/
108
S
E
20PE14
4.235
X01600/
85
S
E
54152
3.35
Deflection
Method M M M M
M M M
M
Antimony Trisulfide Vidicons
Max Image Size mm (Scan diagonal)
16
16
16.2
15.8
11
11
11
8
Heater
Typical Operation Conditions (2856K Source)
Sensitivity
Response ( 4x3 Aspect)
At Dark
Current Power Current (mA) (Watts) (nA)
Output Signal nA at F.C.
At Mesh Voltage
Amp
Response at 400TV Lines/PH
(%)
Limiting Resolution (TV- Lines)
or
(Line Pair/ mm)
Application Remarks
95
0.6
20
300 at 0.1
425
50
950
65
750 1000
1" X- Ray ( Medical and Industrial)
95
0.6
20
300 at 0.1
425
50
950
65
750
1000
1" Industrial
95
0.6
20
150 at 0.1
425
950
-
60LP/mm 1" Ultra High Resolu-
tion
95
0.6
20
150 at 0.1
425
950
50LP/mm
1" with Fiber Optic Face plate for Medical or Industrial X- Ray Equipment
95
0.6
20
200 at 0.1
400
35
500
2/3" Industrial and con-
sumer CCTV applications
95
0.6
20
200 at 0.1
400
35
500
2/3" Industrial and con-
sumer CCTV applications
95
0.6
20
200 at 0.1
600
35
500
2/3" Industrial CCTV
applications with elec-
trostatic focus
105
0.3
10
120 at 0.1
550
> 20
450
1/2" Miniature, electro-
static focus
XQ1440/
159
S
S4076
6.260
V01442/
160
S
54093
6.299
XQ1274/
108
S
S4075
4.235
X(11275/
108
S
S4092
4.235
XQ1601/
85
S
S4162
3.35
M
NI
M
M
rvi
ro
E
M
E
M
Newvicons
16
95
0.6
-
240 at 0.5
500
50
16
95
0.6
240 at 0.5
500
50
11
95
0.6
-
260 at 0.1
400
35
11
95
0.6
-
260 at 0.5 35 to 55
30
8
105
0.3
-
110 at 0.1
550
> 20
800
1" Industrial CCTV appli-
cation
650
1" Industrial CCTV appli-
cation with fiber optic
faceplate
650
2/3" Industrial CCTV
application
600
2/3" Industrial CCTV
application with elec-
trostatic focus
450
1/2" Miniature electro-
static focus
Type AT1116
KV -12S
KV -19G
Deflection and Focusing Coil Units
Max. Out Side Dia.
(mm)
60.4
Overall Length
(mm)
136.7
Weight (g)
615
Inductance ( mH)
Line Deflection Coils
Frame Deflection Coils
0.78
28
Resistance ( ohms)
Line Deflection Coils
Frame Deflection Coils
Focus Coil
2.4
62
149
46
84
300
0.86
28.7
3.2
146
55
30
80
56
0.9
23
4.6
146
Current ( mA)
Line Deflection Coils
Frame Deflection Coils
300 p- p
43 p- p
160 p- p
25 p- p
160 p- p
25 p- p
Focus . Tube Coils . Diameter
105
1"
120
2/3"
-
2/3"
Remarks
Front load, for B/W and color applications
Front load, for B/W applications
Front load, " Electro Magnetic" for B/W applications
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 13
AMPEX
Ampex Corporation · One of The Signal Companies
401 Broadway Redwood City, CA 94063 (41 6) 367-201 1
ARC 1/2" M- Format VTR/Camera System
The Ampex ARC system utilizes the 1/2" M- format to produce broadcast video and audio quality in a portable package that is superior to 3/4" VTRs. The video recording system is the latest technology in separate luminance and chrominance signal recording, producing superb picture quality generation after generation of post- production processing. The two channels of broadcast- quality audio also feature the Dolby C* noise reduction system for low noise, multi- generation performance.
This lightweight, versatile system is ideally suited for EFP applications. You can shoot and record quickly and easily, then edit and go on the air via necessary time base correction but without dubbing to another format. The self-contained camera/VTR unit can be operated by one person and uses readily available, inexpensive VHS cassettes.
The complete ARC system consists of a camera/recorder unit, a portable VTR, a studio editing VTR and an editing controller. All components interface with each other and are compatible with existing studio equipment.
AMPEX ARC- 10 Camera/VTR
The Ampex ARC- 10 integrated camera/VTR allows one person to cover all the action with comfort, with precision, and with efficiency. It produces 20 minutes of recording time on one VHS cassette. The rechargeable battery gives afull 60 minutes of power.
Weighing less than 22 lbs., the ARC- 10 camera and VTR lock together to form a self-contained system with freedom from connecting cables, shoulder straps, and pack frames. The integrated camera/VTR utilizes microprocessor- based circuitry to provide automatic functions. It features a weatherproof, high power, motorized zoom lens with automatic lens cap when the camera is in stand-by or off. Other features include ahigh sensitivity cardioid microphone that is removable for interviews and a slide-in/out rechargeable battery pack for rapid change in the field.
The camera employed in the ARC- 10 is a 3-tube prism optics camera with automatic beam control, 2- line vertical aperture corrector, black stretch, and corner registration circuitry.
Choose from either a 2/3" Plumbicon* or Saticon**tube. The economical Saticon offers high resolution with 550 lines; the Plumbicon offers higher resolution with 600 lines. Signal-to-noise ratio is 59dB for Plumbicon, 58dB for Saticon.
VTR/CAMERA SYSTEM
ARC- 40
AMPEX FPR-10 Portable VTR
You'll appreciate the flexibility of the FPR-10: it can work as part of the ARC- 10 System while directly coupled with the camera; it can be separated for operation as a two- unit system equipped with a multipurpose video adaptor and used with any camera or video source with a composite output.
The FPR-10 comes complete with two audio tracks, adedicated SMPTE/EBU Time Code Track, abuilt-in Backspace Record function, and a built-in SMPTE/EBU Time Code Generator. The controls located at the rear of the unit are easily accessed.
ARC- 20 Portable VTR
The ARC- 20, full- featured portable VTR, weighing under 20 lbs. offers the user built-in confidence, quality replay capabilities, and much more. ARC-20 complements the Ampex ARC- 10 Recorder/Camera, and it gives afield director instant color playback in even the remotest locations.
ARC-20 can also function as the primary field recorder, serving as an acquisition VTR as well as offering field replay. ARC- 20's light weight and small size make it the ideal match for portable ENG/EFP cameras that operate in atwo-piece configuration.
ARC-20 offers uniquely powerful production capabilities in afully portable VTR.
ARC- 40 Studio VTR
After the ARC- 10 and ARC- 20 have been used for field recording, the ARC-40 provides a full range of post- production capability. With its optional plug-in digital time base corrector, the ARC-40 is ready to play direct to air, or work in a variety of editing situations. Convenient controls, picture- inshuttle, search and jog provide full stand-up editing capability.
The ARC-40 also fits into all types of editing systems arrangements, from the simplest two- machine system controlled with the optional ARC- 30 Editing Controller, to the most powerful multi- machine, multi-format systems. Existing interfaces allow the ARC-40 to work with most popular computerized editing systems.
ARC- 30 Editing Controller
The ARC- 30 is alow-cost, sit-down editor for atwo ARC- 40 editing configuration. Control track based, one-event edits keep its operation simple but flexible. It controls edits between the ARC- 40s in the dub mode, maximizing the M-format multi- generation video quality.
T.M. Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corp.
T.M. N.V. PhiIips ** T.M. Hitachi
VC- 14
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ANGENIEUX CORP. OF AMERICA
7700 N. Kendall Drive Suite 303 Miami, FL 33156 (305) 595-1144 Telex 80-8425
ENG/EFP LENSES
15X9 f/1.5- T1.65
This entirely new lens provides unexcelled illumination because of the extremely high aperture of f/1.5 combined with the outstanding photometric factor of 1.1. This feature is also particularly valuable as it allows the use of the built-in turret operated 2x extended in low light conditions.
Despite the larger lens elements needed to achieve this, the overall weight is only 2.1 kg ( 4.7 lbs.) including range extender turret and servo zoom control.
The image quality is particularly high at infinity as well as at close working distances, to match the improved performance of 2/3" tube
cameras.
The lens is weather resistant with shower- proof optical and servo units. Performance and features of the lens ( such as built-in 2x range
extender turret- choice of pistol grip or rocker- switch zoom control- all weather construction etc...) responds completely to end
user needs.
Price Upon Request
specifications
focal length
zoom range
maximum aperture (see curves below)
image diagonal minimum focusing distance minimum focusing distance with close-up lens horizontal field angle vertical field angle smallest object to fill the screen smallest object to fill the screen with close-up weight ( includes servo zoom, rocker switch control, servo iris, 2x range extender and lens mount)
15x9
with 2x extender
9-135 mm
18-270 mm
15x
15x
f/1.54/1.9 T 1.65-T 2.1
11 mm
0.80 m 31"
0,40 m 16"
51°-33i4°
39°-23/40 36x48 mm
1.4x1.9" 18x24 mm
.7x1"
f/3-f/3.8 T 3.3-T 4.2
11 mm 0.80 m
31" 0,40 m
16" 2612°-2°
20°-11/2°
18x24 mm .7x1"
9x12 mm .4x.5"
2.1 kg 4.7 lbs
2.1 kg 4.7 lbs
15x9 with retrozoom with 2x extender
72-108 mm 14.5-216 mm
15x
15x
f/1.5-f/1.9 T 1.7-T 2.2
11 mm 0.50 m
20"
f/3-f/3.8 T 3.4-T 4.3
11 mm 0.50 ni
20"
603 e-43,4°
471/2:'-3 tie
29x38 mm 1.1x1.5-
323,4°-21 40
243/4 0-13A0
15x19 mm .6x.8"
3.1 kg 6.8 lbs
3.1 kg 6.8 lbs
15x9 with tele-attachment
with 2x extender
64(-n22o5te1m)m
3,5x (note 1)
f/1 .9 T 2.2 (note 2)
11 mm
2 m 61 2'
30-450 mm
15x
f/3- f/3.8 T 3.4-T 4.3
11 mm 2 m 612'
71 2°-21 40
5314°-1314°
59x77 mm 2.3x3"
163 4'-'10 121 2°-3 4°
29x38 mm 1.1x1.5"
3.1 kg 6.8 lbs
3.1 kg 6.8 lbs
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 15
/onion_
Hillier/
One Controls Drive Shelton, CT 06484 (203) 929-1100
PRO PAC 14
PRO PAC 13
BATTERIES
Pro Pac® 14 4 AH, 14.4 Volt Snap-On NiCad Battery.
Fast or slow charge. 4-3/4 lbs. Typical Run Time: 2hours at 25 watts, 3
hours at 18 watts, 4hours at 13 watts
$495.00
Pro Pac® 13 4 AH, 13.2 Volt Snap-On NiCad Battery.
Fast or slow charge. 4-1/4 lbs. Typical Run Time: 2hours at 24 watts, 3
hours at 16 watts, 4hours at 12 watts
$475.00
Corn Pm® 14 2AH, 14.4 Volt Snap-On NiCad Battery.
8hour charge with Lifesaver 8 Hour Quad Universal only. 3-1/8 lbs.
Typical run time: 1hour at 25 watts, 1-1/2 hours at 18 watts, 2hours at
13 watts.
$375.00
Trim Pac CD 2AH, 12 Volt. Compact Snap-On NiCad Battery. Fast or slow charge. 2-1/2 lbs. Recommended for applications drawing under 15 watts. Typical Run Time: 1-1/2 hours at 12 watts.
$225.00
CA-TP. Trim Pac Charge Adaptor.
Snaps onto 12V Trim Pac and allows 1hour fast charging with JVC
KY- 1900 charger.
$45.00
Recommended Applications for Pro Pac and Trim Pac Batteries. The Pro Pac 13 is auniversal battery that will power virtually all EN G /
EFP cameras, VTRs, and monitors. However, the Pro Pac 14 will yield superior performance and capacity on those cameras that can accept the higher voltage. See table below.
TRIM PAC
Pro Pac 14/Corn Pac 14
Pro Pac 13
Ikegami
Thomson Panasonic
Bosch
RCA
Philips
Hitachi FP 15, 20, 21, 22, 40, Z31
Sharp
JVC
Hitachi SIM, 91, 97
Sony Betacam, DXC-K432/4. DXC 6000
Sony 100 Series, 110, 250, BVP3 Harris TC90
Trim Pac JVC KY- 1900
KY- 2000
Hitachi FP10, FP7 Sony BVP-110
PRO PAC 90 PROFESSIONAL VTR BATTERY
The Anton/Bauer Pro Pac 90 is apremium professional direct substitute for the Sony BP- 90 type VTR battery. Unique features include:
unique circuit board design, special fast charge premium cells, individual cell sensing system for foolproof charging, special Triconn' 3- conductor connector ( eliminates need for separate fast charge cable), accessible fuse with spare fuse, and heavy duty molded housing. Can be charged directly with all Lifesaver Chargers.
PRO PAC 90
PRO PAC 60
Pro Pac 90 4 AH, 12 Volt NiCad VTR Battery.
Fast or slow charge; 3-1/2 lbs. Typical Run Time: More than 3hours at
14 watts.
$330.00
SO- 90. Pro Pac 90 To Snap-On Adaptor. Allows Pro Pac to fit any Anton/Bauer Snap-On Bracket; i.e., for on
camera mounting or for wearing on a belt with UniPac holder.
$195.00
Pro Pac 60. 2.5 AH, 13 Volt NiCad VTR/Camera Battery.
Premium professional NiCad replacement for Sony BP-60 VTR/ Camera Battery. High voltage design assures full run times under all conditions. Charge with all Lifesaver Chargers in 8hours . $195.00
UNIVERSAL NICAD BATTERY BELT MODEL 30/13.
30/13 BATTERY BELT
SNAP -ON® NICAD BATTERIES
Anton/Bauer Snap-On batteries are the original equipment power source for virtually every professional video camera manufacturer. Features quick change design for instant camera mounting without cables or connectors. Premium fast charge cells and exclusive all- cell sensing provide 100% reliable charging. Every battery is individually computer tested and shipped with aprint-out. Accessories are available for mounting Snap-On batteries on belts, VTRs, monitors, and other portable equipment.
The ultimate battery belt. Powers virtually all portable equipment, including 30 volt lights and all 13V cameras and VTRs. Unique construction features include leather belt, Lexan ® battery modules, quick release military buckle, and anatomical design. Can be worn around the waist, over the shoulder or bandelero style. Exclusive operating features: 30 volts, 4AH or 13 volts, 8AH switchable; built-in 115/230 volt overnight charger; voltage display, charge indicator; input and output circuit breakers; multiple charge sensors for 100% safe fast charging.
30/13 Battery Belt 30 volt, 4 AH or 13 volt, 8 AH switchable. Built-in 115/230 volt overnight charger. Can be one hour fast charged. 10 Amp circuit
breaker. Waist size: 32" to 48" adjustable. Wgt. 11-1/2 lbs.. .$795.00
CA- 30 Fact Charge Cable Connects 30/13 belt to Lifesaver 1Hour Fast Charger ( LS I- C) .$48.00
VC- 16
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BATTERIES
One Controls Drive Shelton, CT 06484 (203) 929-1100
SILVER SYSTEM. BATTERY AND CHARGER
SVSC SHIPPING CASE (Shown with Silver System)
SILVER BATTERY SYSTEM
Silver Zinc batteries will operate equipment approximately three times longer than NiCad batteries of equivalent size and weight. In many cases an Anton/Bauer SV-13 Silver Battery will operate acamera for
an entire day, eliminating battery change interruptions and the need for spare batteries.
The SV-13 Silver Battery is fully compatible with all Anton/Bauer Snap-On accessories and Snap-On mounts, and will power virtually all
video cameras and VTRs. It is not recommended for lighting applications. Silver batteries cannot be charged with NiCad battery chargers. They can only be charged with the Anton/Bauer SVDC-13 Silver Battery Charger shown and described below.
SV-13. 12 AH, 13.5V Snap-On Slyer Battery
Must be charged with SVDC-13 charger only. Expected life: 80-100
charge/discharge cycles lone year maximum). Typical Run Time: 6
hours at 25 watts. Wgt. 4-1/2 lbs. Individually computer tested and
packaged with computer printout.
Call For Price
SVDC-13 Digital Control Silver Charger
Charges two SV-13 Silver Batteries simultaneously and independent-
ly. Overnight or 5hour charge rate, selectable. Features dual protection circuits, charge rate indicators and green ready lights. Size:
8-1/2" x5-1/2" x10-1/2"; Wgt. 14-1/2 lbs; 115/230 volts, 50/60 Hz.
SVDC-13
$ 1595.00
SVSC Silver System Shipping/Carrying Case
Heavy duty case features custom foam interior that holds one
SVDC-13 Charger and two SV-13 Silver Batteries. Rugged hardware and an outer shell of high density polyethylene fully protects battery
charger during shipment. Size: 18"x 11" x16-1/2"
$250.00
LIFESAVER FAST CHARGER
LIFESAVER 8 HOUR SINGLE
LIFESAVER 8 HOUR QUAD
LIFESAVER® NICAD CHARGERS
The first 100% safe charging systems. Lifesaver circuit safely maintains fully charged battery indefinitely. All Lifesaver chargers feature: 3 automatic charge rates; logic controlled charge monitor circuit;
battery coupled cell sensing system. Integral Anton/Bauer Snap-On
bracket directly accepts Snap-On type batteries, and special Triconn 3 conductor connector accepts Pro Pac 90 and other BP- 90 type VTR batteries.
LSFC Lifesaver Fast Charger
Single position, one hour charger. Accepts all Anton/Bauer 4 AH
Snap-On, Pro Pac 90 and Pro Pac 60 NiCad batteries, and all Anton/ Bauer battery belts. Size; 7-1/2" x6-1/4" x4"; Wgt. 3lbs.; 115/230V,
50/60Hz
$495.00
LSQC Lifesaver 8 Hour Single
Single position, 8hour quick charger. Accepts all Anton/Bauer 4AH
Snap-On, Pro Pac 90 and Pro Pac 60 NiCad batteries. Charges other
brand BP- 90 type batteries at the overnight rate. Size: 6-1/2" x4-1/8"
x3-5/8"; Wgt. 4-3/4 lbs.; 115/230V, 50/60Hz
$295.00
LSQ4 Lifesaver 8 Hour Quad
Four position 8hour quick charger. Independent charge circuits and
LED indicators for each position. Accepts any combination of Anton/
Bauer 4AH Snap-On and Pro Pac 90 NiCad batteries. Charges other
brand BP- 90 type batteries at overnight rate. Size: 10-1/4" x3-5/8" x
7"; Wgt. 3-1/4 lbs; 115/230V, 50/60Hz.
$895.00
LSQ4U. Universal Lifesaver 8 Hour Quad.
Similar to LSQ4 as above but in addition accepts the 2AH Com Pac batteries in any combination with the Anton/Bauer 12-14 volt NiCad
batteries listed with the LSQ4.
$1095.00
MOBILE FAST CHARGER
WIDE RANGE MICROCHARGER
SPECIAL PURPOSE CHARGERS
MFC Mobile Fast Charger
Single position one hour fast or 16 hour overnight charger. Operates
from most vehicles with or without engine running. Accepts all 4AH
12m 14.4 volt Anton/Bauer Snap-On and Pro Pac 90 NiCad batteries.
Features protection circuit that disconnects charger if vehicle voltage
becomes too low. Operates on 10-15 volts DC input. Size: 6" x7-1/2"
x3-1/2"; Wgt. 2-3 / 4lbs.
$495.00
WRMC Wide Range Microcharger
Single position overnight charger. Designed specifically for world travel. Can be plugged into any power source world-wide ( 95-250 volts
AC or DC) and will automatically adjust for proper charging current. Accepts any Anton/Bauer 4AH Snap-On NiCad batterty, as well as a Pro Pac 90 ( with SO- 90 adapt or ).Operates on 95-250 volts AC$1o9r5Q0C0
input. Size: 5-1/4" x4" x 2-5/8" ;W gt. 1-1/2 lbs
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 17
POWER EQUIPMENT
One Controls Drive Shelton, CT 06484 (203) 929-1100
QR-777
SPS-3
QR-DXC-M3A
SNDS
QR-76BC
DIAGNOSTIC AND SERVICE EQUIPMENT
SNDS. Diagnostic Battery Evaluation Unit. This unit can determine a battery's capacity and pinpoint weak cells automatically. This test
procedure will actually exercise the battery and enhance its life. This unit features: digital clock, digital voltmeter/ammeter, switchable
cutoff voltages switchable loads, Snap-On and Triconn ( Pro Pac
90) input, plus external input for camera or VTR as load. Output for
chart recorder. SNDS
$ 695.00
SCD. Silver Cell Equalizer. This unit is designed to enhance silver cell battery life through equal discharging of the individual cells. Features
a digital voltmeter capable of monitoring individual cell voltages as well as a9LED display which indicates the discharge status of each
individual cell. SCD
$595.00
EXTEND. Extender Board for servicing SVDC-13 Silver Charger Control Boards
$ 45.00
WICKIT. Replacement Wicking Kit for SV-13 Silver Battery. . $7.00
SNAP-ON IITM
QUICK RELEASE BRACKETS
QRX. Universal Snap-On Il Quick Release Bracket. This is the basic
Anton/Bauer Snap-On bracket that is the standard of the video
industry and included as standard equipment with virtually all ENG
cameras. Includes electrical contacts, internal wire connections and 4
mounting screws ( 6x32). Designed to be installed on any portable
device allowing use of any Anton/Bauer Snap-On battery. Bracket
measures 4-11/16" x3-3/8".
QRX
$ 75.00
QRX-C. Universal Snap-On II Compact Bracket. Designed for the
new smaller cameras, the QRX-C is fully compatible with all Snap-On
products. Includes electrical contacts, internal wire connections and
4 mounting screws ( 6x32). Bracket measures 4-11/16" x3".
QRX-C
$ 75.00
QR-BVP-3. Snap-On II Quick Release Bracket with integral power
connector and plate for custom mounting on Thomson 601/701,
Sony BVP-300 Series cameras and BVP-3 camera with SONY CA-3
Adaptor. No camera modifications required.
QR-BVP-3
$ 95.00
QR-BVP-1. Snap-On II Quick Release Bracket with integral power
connector and plate for custom mounting on Sony BVP-110. No
camera modifications required.
QR-BVP-1
$ 95.00
QR-DXC. Snap-On II Quick Release Bracket with integral connector
and plate for custom mounting on Sony DXC 1800/1820/1821/6000.
No camera modifications required.
QR-DXC (w/trade-in of existing Sony battery bracket)
$95.00
CIR-DXC-M3. Snap-On II Quick Release Bracket. As above, but for
Sony DXC-M3 camera. Built-in circuit operates low battery level
indicator in viewfinder.
QR-DXC-M3
$ 130.00
QR-DXC-M3A. Snap-On Il Quick Release Bracket with integral
power connector and plate for custom mounting on Sony DXC-M3A.
No camera modifications required.
QR-DXC-M3A
$ 95.00
GR -777. Snap-On Il Quick Release Bracket with integral power
connector for custom mounting on the rear of Panasonic 777, 888, or
555 camera. No camera modifications required. ( Same as Panasonic
WV-PS355 bracket.)
QR-777
$ 95.00
QR-76A. Snap-On II Quick Release Bracket with integral power
connector and special plate for custom mounting on the rear of RCA
TK-76A cameras. No camera modifications required.
GR -76A
$ 130.00
QR-76BC. Similar to QR-76A, but for TK-76B and C cameras.
QR-76BC
$ 130.00
QR-BETA-3. Snap-On Il Quick Release Bracket with integral power
connector and plate for custom mounting on Sony/Thomson
Betacam camera / recorders. No camera modifications required.
GR -BETA- 3
$ 150.00
QR-BETA-1. (As above but for BVW-1 camera)
$150.00
POWER SUPPLIES
The Anton/Bauer SPS-3 and SPS-5 are advanced switching-type power supplies. Superior filtering techniques and design make these supplies the coolest, most efficient and noise free units available to the video industry. The integral Snap-On mount allows these supplies to be conveniently snapped onto the rear of any camera just like a battery pack.
SPS-3. Advanced Switching type 3 Amp Power Supply with
Snap-On mount. Output: 13 volts at 3 amp ( max). Input: 115 volts
AC only.
SPS-3
$495.00
SPS-5. Advanced Switching type 5 Amp Power Supply with
Snap-On mount. Output: 13 volts at 5amp ( max). Has auxiliary 5pin
XLR power out connector. Input: 115/230 volts AC.
SPS-5
$595.00
VC- 18
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
lantommouerl
One Controls Drive Shelton, CT 06484 (203) 929-1100
MICRO CHARGERS/ACCESSORIES
PPSA-D PERPETUAL POWER BELT
CLPA ( Mounted on Camera)
GR-BVP-3
UP, UNIPAC
MICRO CONTROL
MICRO CONTROL COMPACT CONTROL UNIT ( CCU)
Revolutionary new portable camera control system operates over a
standard 3 wire microphone cable, up to 1000 feet long, and is powered by the camera battery.
Micro Control's hand held Compact Control Unit ( CCU) weighs only 1-1/3 lbs. and its companion Camera Decoder snaps onto an Anton/ Bauer Snap-On battery bracket on the rear of the camera. A standard
battery then snaps onto Micro Control's Camera Decoder. The system controls Iris, Master Ped, Red Gain, Blue Gain, Red Ped, Blue Ped, On/Off control for Bars, Auto White Balance, and Auto Iris. In addition, tally/call and a RTS intercom circuit are included. Micro Control draws only 75 milliamps from the camera battery. All control
functions, power and intercom operate over a single microphone audio cable with standard 3 pin XLR connectors.
Micro Control
Available for Ikegami HL -79A- DAL, HL79E, Sony/Thomson BVP 300
Series, Hitachi SK81 / 91, Harris TC 90, Panasonic ReCam, and other
cameras. No camera modifications required. Compact Control Unit:
Panel size is 6" x4-3/8", and unit is 2-1/2" deep; weighs 1-1/3 [fps.
Camera Decoder: 5-1/3H x4-1/3"W x2-1 / 2"D; weighs 1-1/2 lbs. Call or write for specific application information.
(depending on camera model)
$2995.00 to $ 3275.00
Special Twin Cable Miniature, highly flexible cable consisting of one audio conductor and
one coax for video output. Audio terminated with 3- pin XLR male and female; video terminated with standard BNC connectors both ends. These cables may be linked in series for additional length with BNC adaptor.
50 Feet 100 Feet 150 Feet
65.00 96.00 125.30
MICRO CHARGERS
MC- 14 Micro Charger 14 Volts
Miniature wall mount overnight ( 14-16 hours) charger for Pro Pac
14. Must not be used with 13 volt or 12 volt batteries. For 115 volts AC
only
$65.00
MC- 13 Micro Charger 13 Volts
Miniature wall mount overnight ( 14-16 hours) charger for Pro Pac 13.
Must not be used with 14 volt or 12 volt batteries. For 115 volts AC
only.
$65.00
TPMC-12 Trim Pao® Micro Charger
Compact overnight charger for 12 volt Trim Pac battery only. Full
charge in 14-16 hours. For 115 volts AC only
$65.00
SNAP -ON ACCESSORIES
UP UniPac Single Snap-On® Battery Holder
Accepts any Anton/Bauer Snap-On battery. Includes loops ( for any
size pants belt) and integral power cable with XLR-4 DC input connec-
tor. Cameras and VTRs not equipped with an XLR-4 DC input require
SO/XLR adaptor.
$130.00
SO/XLR Snap-On Bracket to XLR-4 Adaptor
Fits any Anton/Bauer Snap-On Bracket. Provides universal 4pin XLR
DC input connection to any camera or other device with an Anton/
Bauer Snap-On Bracket
$ 65.00
CLPA Camera Light Power Adaptor Powers Anton/ Bauer LG-U Light from camera battery. Snaps on between battery and bracket at the rear of any camera. Integral cable plugs directly into LG-U Light Head. Requires 14.4 volt 70 watt bulb.
$95.00
SODAP Snap-On Battery to XLR-5 Adaptor
Compact adaptor snaps onto any Anton/Bauer Snap-On battery or
power supply converting it to a 5 pin SLR female power output
connector.
$40.00
SO- 90 Pro Pac 90 to Snap-On Adaptor Allows Pro Pac 90 to fit any Anton/Bauer Snap-On Bracket; i.e., for on camera mounting or for wearing on a belt with UniPac holder.
4195.00
PPSA-D Perpetual Power Belt- Automatic
Accepts two Snap-On batteries of any type. When the first battery is
depleted, the belt automatically draws from the second. The first bat-
tery may be replaced and the process be repeated providing uninter-
rupted power indefinitely. Features leather belt, military quick release
buckle and Lexan control module with voltage display, circuit
breaker, and 2output connectors for powering acamera and aVTR
simultaneously
$265.00
All Snap-On accessories will accept both Anton/Bauer Snap-On NiCad and Silver batteries.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 19
COOPER
INDUSTRIES
BELDEN
2200 U.S. Hwy 27 S. Box 1980 Richmond, IN 47375 (317) 983-5200
COAXIAL & BROADCAST CABLES
TV Camera Cables
AND CCTV CABLES
Belden TV Broadcast and Closed Circuit TV Camera Cables assure reliable circuit isolation thereby reducing AC hum and minimizing cross-talk between circuits. They are made to with-
stand rugged service and to maintain high conductor insulation resistance regardless of ambient temperature changes.
Major uses for these cables are for controlling, powering and transmitting sound and picture information for monochrome and
color TV cameras as well as for remote control, monitor and cue line systems.
Belden TV Camera Cables are engineered to be lightweight, flexible and easy to terminate. They are manufactured and tested
in accordance with Belden's own rigid and time- proven quality control standards in order to assure outstanding reliability, performance and service life.
Description
Trade &
UL Type Number
9259
59/U TYPE 100% Sweep Tested
5-300 MHz
1354 60C
Standard Lengths
ft.
m
Std. Pkg.
Lb ea
AWG
(Stranding)
[Dia. in mm1
Nom. D C R
Insulalion 8 Nominal Core 0 0
Nominal 0.0.
Inch mm Inch mm
50
100 U - 500
500 U-1000
1000
15 2 30.5 U-152.4 152.4
U-304.8 304 8
2.0 4.0 17 . 0
180 33.5 350
22 ( 7x30) 1761 bare copper
15 Os/ M'
49 21/.km
Cellular Poly-
ethylene 146 371
242 615
No of Shields
and Material
Nom D C.R.
1bare copper 2 . 611/M ' 85(1/km 95% shield coverage
Nom. Imp. (ohms)
Nom Vel. of Prop
Nominal Capacitance
pF ft pFim
Nominal Attenuation
db.
di)/
MHz 100 ft. 100 m
75
78%
I I 17.3 568
1 5
4 . 8
1.3 2.6
10
1.0
3.3
50 2.1
6.9
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION:
100 3.0
9.8
Recommended for camera to reco der to monitor
connections. Stranded center conductor adds
the flexibility needed to resist seve e twisting,
bending and other stresses which occur in many
CCTV applications. Black non-contaminating PVC jacket.
-,....L
59/U TYPE 100 0/0
Sweep Tested 5-300 MHz
NEW 9659 '
%I
1354 60C
50
100 U-500 500 U-1000 1000
15 2
30 5 U-152 4
152 4 U-304 8
304 8
2 0
4 0 170 18 0 335 350
22175301
1761 bare copper 15 Oft fy1 49 21/ km
Cellular
Polyethyiene 146 37
242 615
1bare
copper 260 M· 851/ km
95% shield coverage
75
78% 17 3
Black PVC jacket For CCTV applications
56 8 50 100 200 400 700 900
1000
2 1
3 0 4 5
6 6
89 10 1 10 9
69 9 8 14 8 21 7
292 33 1 35 8
r/. /...._ .,
124(1 BALANCED VIDEO PAIR
9860 -t
2448 30V 60C
500 1000 2000
152 4 304 8
609 6
530 104 0 209 6
16 ( Solid) 11 291 bare copper
· 211/M'
13 811/km
Cellular Poly-
ethylene Color coded white blue
440 11 18
1DUOFOIL + 94% 1tinned copper braid 1311 M'
4 31/ km
100% shield coverage
124
78°. Be- 358 1 .27 .89
tween
10
.89 29
Cond.
20
1.3 43
10.9
50 2.0 66
Shield
100 2.9 9.5
un-
200 4.1 13.5
grn'd.
Black PVC jacket.
i.**it111» IMv . - -·· ... . mm
9290 60C
6/U TYPE
100% Sweep Tested 5-300 MHz
U-500* U-152 4 500* 152 4 1000* 304 8 2000 * 609 6
28 6 294 662
18 ( Solid) 1951
bare copper 751t/M' 24 61km
Cellular Poly-
290 737
ethylene 180 457
2bare copper
braids 2Oft M' 6611 km 98% shield coverage
75
78% 173 56.8 1 19
5 45
Black PVC jacket.
10 .64
50 1.5 100 2.1 200 3.1 500 5.0
900 6.9 1000 74
.62 1.5
2.1 4.9 6.9 10 2 16 4 22.6 243
MIEE4: 1)
6/U TYPE 100% Sweep Tested
5-300 MHz
9248t NU 1354 80C
U-500 500
U-1000 1000
U-152 4 152 4
U-304 8 304 8
156 16 4 30 3 33 3
18 ( Solidi 1951 bare
copper 7511 ,M 24 6f! km
Cellular Poly-
ethylene 180 457
270 686
1DUOFOIL , 61%
1tinned copper braid 5211/M' 17 11 1/ 01
100% shield coverage
75
78% 17 3 56 8 1 19
5 .45
10 .64
50 1.5
100 2.1 200 3.1
Black PVC jacket.
500 5.0
900 6.9
1000 7.4
62 1 5 2.1 4.9 6.9 10.2
16.4 22.6 24.3
VC-20
tPasses the VW- 1vertical flame test.
On· piece ± 10% · Spools are one piece, but length may vary r 10% from length shown.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COOPER
LIN DUST RIE
COAXIAL 8t BROADCAST CABLES
BELDEN
2200 U.S. Hwy 27 S. Box 1980 Richmond, IN 47375 (317) 983-5200
TV CAMERA CABLES AND CCTV CABLES (cont'd.)
Description
BELDFOIL· 59/U TYPE
1000. SWEEP TESTED 5to 300 mhz
Trade 8
UL Type Number
9265
MI
20006 60C
Standard Lengths
ft
m
Std Pkg Lb ea
500 1000
152.4 30.5 304 8 60.4
AWG (Strand-
ing)
[Dia. in mm) Nom D C R
Insulalion 8 Nominal
Core 0 D.
Nominal 0.0.
Inch mm Inch mm
No of Shields
and Material
Nom. 0 C.R.
Nom Imp
(ohms)
Nom. Vet of Plop
Nominal Capacitance
pF1-1 pF m -
Nominal Attenuation.
di)/
db .
MHz 100 ft. 100 m
2cond
PVC
242 615
1pair
-
7611445 22 (7x30)
1
05
137
a x 11.30
tinned
Belfoil shielded 100% shield
copper
coverage
- 51 0 167 -
-
-
1coax 22 ( 7x30)
1.76) bare copper
15.00 M
49.2n km
Cel ular
Polyethylene 1461 3.71
I
1bare
75
78% 17.3 56 8 .4
3 1.3
copper
.8
7 2.6
261/ M'
10
1.0 3.3
851! km
Black PVC jacket.
50
2.1
6.9
95% shield
100 3.0 9.8
coverage
I
SIAMESE TYPE CABLE RG59iU Typo with BELDFOIL aluminum·polyester shielded twisted pair
--...-.. ?-"^- 1,..---
9165+
MMI%-- : -- ----- %I
For Electronic News Gathering (ENG) and CCTV
Applications
20006 60C
500 1000
152 4 46.7 3Pairs
PVC
290 734
3Pairs
-
304 8 91.3 22 ( 7x30) 054 137 x
x
individually
1761 ea tinned
561 14 23
Beldfoil · shielded
copper
100Q. shield
150 AA'
coverage
49 21/ M'
w drain
-
51.0 167 -
-
-
1Coax 22 ( 7x30)
I761
bare copper
15 01/ M' 211 km
Cellular
Polyethylene 14613 71
I
1
bare copper 2611.M' 8511 km
75
78% 17.3 56.8 .4
.3
1.3
.8
.7
2.6
10 1.0 3.3
Black vinyl jacket
100 3.0 9.8
95 0..e shield
coverageI
SIAMESE TYPE CABLE RG59 U Type with BELDFO Laluminum -polyester shield Nos ed pairs
COLOR CODING OF PAIRS. Red Blk., Org. Bm.. Gm. Wh ,. 100% sweep tested 15-300 MHz)
-= _ -
Siamese 7- Conductor EFP & ENG Camera Cable
9166 80C
500 1000 2000
152.4
304.8 609 4
111.9
216.8 485.6
1-Trias 14 ( Solid)
11 631
copper
2.611M' 85b1a/rekm
Cellular 475 12.07
Poly-
x x
ethylene 830 21.1
7.24
28
Two bare copper
braids 1.5 n/M'
4.9 fl/km Per Shield 93% shield coverage
75
79.% 17.3 56.8 50
1.0
3.3
100 1.5
4.9
200 2.2
7.2
500 3.7 12.1
900 5.2 17.1
3Pairs
22 ( 7x30) I761 tinned
copper 151/ M' 4911 km
PVC 054 13 7
Beldfoil 100%
shield coverage over each pair w 22 AWG drain 11.512.,M.
37.71Pkm
51 167
Black PVC jacket CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE: Red Blk.. Wht. Gm., Org. Blue,
-----
12- Conductor EFP 8i ENG Camera Cable
9170 75C
Passes the VW- Ivertical wire flame test
250 500 1000
76.2 152.4 304.8
28.2 60.0 117.0
2Coax. Cables 25 ( 7x33) 1.531
bare copper 31.21/ M' 102.01/ km
Cellular Poly-
ethylene .10 2.54
Overall .490 12.4
1tinned copper over each coax.
6011 M' 19.71/ km 93% shield coverage
5Pairs 24 ( 7x32)
1.61)
tinned copper 241/ M' 7811 .km
Polypropylene .04 1.12
1Beldfoil· 100% shield
coverage
over each pair
drain wire 1811 M'
59 1Q km
75
78% 17.3 56.8 1 .4
1 3
10 1.5
4.9
50 3.8 12 5
100 56 18 4
300 10.6 34 8
500 13.8 45 3
27
Chrome PVC jacket.
88 6
CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE COAX - Black. Black w White Hash Marks. Pairs - Blk. Red. Blk. Wht.. Blk. Gm., Blk Blue Blk Yei
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 21
COOPER
INDUSTRIES
COAXIAL & BROADCAST CABLES
BELDEN
2200 U.S. Hwy 27 S.
Box 1980
Richmond, IN 47375
(317) 983-5200 TV CAMERA CABLES AND CCTV CABLES (cont'd.
Description
14- Conductor Electronic Field Production ( EFP) Camera Cable
_ - -- _
2 Conductor Digital Video Time Code Cable
Trade 8,
UL Type Number
9171 75C
Standard Lengths
ft
m
Std Pkg Lb ea
AWG 'Strand-
ing)
1Dia in mml Nom
D C R
InsulaPon 8 Nominal Core 0.0
lull mm
Nominal 0 D
Inch mm
250 500 1000
762 152 4 304 8
49.7
97.5
196.7
2Coax 22 ( 7x30)
I 761 bare
15coOpfp!erM 49 2!! km
Cellular Poly-
ethylene .146 371
Ch,erall 585 14 86
No. of Shields
and Material
Nom. D.C.R.
1bare
copper
260 M· 850 km
s9h5ie%ld
coverage
over ea coax
Nom. Imp. (ohms)
Nom Vel. of Prop
Nominal Capacitance
pFitt. pFim
Nomina Attenuation
dbi
dbi
MHz 100 ft. 100 m
75
78% 17.3 56.8
1
5
.38
1.0
2.6
10
1.0
3.3
50 2.3
7.5
100 3.0
9.8
COLO CODE OF 2 COAX: elk., 81k. wl-lash Marks.
9180 80C
5Pairs 22 i7x301
I761 timed
copper 151! NI 49 21! km
PVC 054 137
ea
2Cond 16 ( 26x301
11 521
tinned copper 41! M· 131! km
P":
.094 239 ea
500
152 4 54
U-500 U-152 4 57
26 ( 7x34) Data ene
144 366
1481
.049 122
1000 304 8 11 0 tinned
U-1000 U-304 8 10 4 copper
41.01/ M'
134 5fl km
5Pairs individually
Beldfoil . shielded 100% shield coverage w drain
1Beldfoil· 26 ( 7x34)
tinned copper drain wire 23.11rM* 75.811 ,km
51.0 167 --
COLOR CODE OF SHIELDED PAIRS: Blk. Red. 81k. VVht.. Blk. Gm., Bk. Blue. 81k, Yet
COLOR CODE OF 2x16: Org., Vio. Chrome PVC jacket.
100 78°.
13 42 7
Chrome PVC jacket. Conductor Color Code Black, White.
-----=
4- Conductor Video Tape Recorder (VTR) Cable
9176
Su 2668 30V 60 C
500 1000
9175t
Nu 2502
30V 80C
250 500 1000
152 4 304 8
16,8
33.4
2Coax 28 ( 7x36)
1381 tinned copper 651/ M" 2131/ km
Cellular Poly-
ethylene 041 104
Overall 260 360
1tinned
copper 94% shield
coverage over each coax. ( braid)
1Cond
24 110x34) I611 tinned copper
260 M' 851? km
P' C 056 142
762
152 4 304 8
1Shielded
Conductor 28 ( 7x36)
I381 65i? M' 2131) km
PVC 035 89
22.1 45.9 89.4
4Coax 24 ( 7x32)
(611 bare copper 23 911 M' 78 41? km
Cel ular
Poly-
ethylene 051 130 ea
Overall .401 10.19
1tinned copper
94% shield coverage (spiral)
1bare copper 94% shield coverage over each coax.
50
78°,
26 85 3
COAX COLOR CODE Gray PVC jacket Blue PVC jacket
1
Brown PVC jacket
Yellow PVC jacket. Overall Gray PVC jacket.
38
78%
35 114 8
COLOR CODE OF PVC JACKETED COAX'S: Red. Yet. Gry.. Blue.
7- Conductor Video Tape Recorderea (VTR) Cable
tPasses the VW-1vertical flame test.
VC- 22
3Cond 20 ( 26x34)
I971 tinned copper 1014M' 330 km
PVC 069 175
COLOR CODE OF 3x20: Wht, Brn.. Vet Gig),PVC jacket
I
I
I
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COAXIAL ik BROADCAST CABLES
BELDEN
COOPER
INDUSTRIES ·
2200 U.S. Hwy 27 S. Box 1980
Richmond, IN 47375
(317) 983-5200
75 OHM VIDEO COAXIAL RETRACTILE CABLES
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: Strended tinned copper conductor, polyethylene insulation 100% fieldfol, tinned copper serve shield. Nom. cap. 21 pf lt (68.9 pFim). Nickel gray PVC (acket.
CONTROL, AUDIO, PAN AND TILT
Trade & UL Style Number
Retracted Length
Inch
cm
Practical Extended
Length
ft.
m
Std. Pkg. Lb. ea.
No
Of Gond
AWG (Strand-
ing) 1Dia. in
MM1
Insulation Thickness
Inch
mm
Jacket Thickness
Inch
mm
Nominal 0 D
Inch
mm
Nominal Coil O.D.
Inch
mm
9447
6
15 24
2
.61
.18
60C
n
25
058
1,47
.045
1.14
.242
6.15
1.125
28.6
(7x33)
9448
12
30 48
4
1.22
35
60C
9449
24
60 96
8
244
.68
60C
1
25
,058
1 47
.045
1,14
.242
6.15
1.125
28.6
(7x33)
1
25
.058
1 47
.045
1.14
.242
6.15
1.125
28.6
(7x33)
TV CAMERA CABLES AND CCTV CABLES (cont'd.)
13- Conductor Remote Control and Video Cable
Recommended for use in installations requiring external drive signals, tallies, intercom, switching and video operations.
Trade & Ut Style Number
9262f
2594 60C
Specifications: 12-20 AWG (7x28) (. 97 mm) tinned copper conductors. PVC insulated, color coded 1-75 ohm coax. 22 AWG [. 79 mm] stranded bare copper conductor, foam polyethylene insulated. Nom. Core 0.0. . 146-(3.71 mm], bare copper braid shield, 95% coverage, black PVC jacket. Overall tinned copper braid shield 80% shield coverage Overall gray PVC jacket, . 460" ( 11.7 mm) nominal 0.0. Standard Spool Lengths in It 50. 100. 500. 1000 ( 15 2. 30 5. 152.4. 304 8rre)
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed. (Style 2594)
Standard Spool Lengths Std. Pkg.
ft
Lb. ea.
50 100 500 1000
15.2 30.5 152.4 304.8
8.3 16 . 8 83.2 163.2
13- Conductor Camera Extension Cable
Recommended for remote control, closed circuit and cue line applications. STYLE 2497 Specified for the Dage 800 camera and other similar cameras.
tPasses the VW- 1vertical flame test.
9254.t
2497
60C
2-20 AWG ( 10x30) (. 95 mm) tinned copper. PVC insulated. color codea, twisted pad.
Mylar tape wrapped. 9-22 AWG (7x30) [. 76 rem] tinned copper, PVC insulated. 2conductors cabled. BELDFOIL · shield. 2 conductors cabled unshielded, 5conductors unshielded. 2-Foam Polypropylene insulated coaxial cables Nom impedance 75 ohms. color coded
97% shield coverage Overall tinned copper braid shield 83% shield cove%age 550 04 0 mml Nom 0.0. Chrome PVC jacket. Standard Spool Lengths Ill ft. 100 250. 500. 000. 1500 (30 5. 76 2. 152 4 304 8. 457 2nil Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Listed (Style 2497)
Standard Spool Lengths Std. Pkg.
ft
Lb. ea.
100 250 · 500 · 10001i 15001>
30.5 76.2 152.4
304.8 457.2
20.1 45.4 89.0 178.1 269.7
· Spools are one piece, but length may vary ± 20%-0 from length shown.
*Belden US Patent 3.032.604
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-23
COOPER ..inustans
BELDEN
2200 U.S. Hwy 27 S. Box 1980 Richmond, IN 47375 (317) 983-5200
COAXIAL & BROADCAST CABLES
TV CAMERA CABLES AND CCTV CABLES (contd.)
13- Conductor TV Eye Cable
Especially engineered for TV Eye Cameras. Recommended for remote control, monitor and cue line applications.
8282'; 60C
Specifications: 8-22 AWG (7x30)1.76 rrim] tinned copper. PVC insulated, color coded. 1-22 AWG ( 7X30) I76 mm Ipolyethylene insulated conductor 2-18 AWG ( 16x30)11.19 mmj tinned copper conductor. PVC insulated, black and red. 1-RG-58A U cable 50 ohm coax 97% shield coverage 1-72 ohm coax. stranded conductor. polyester tape wrapped 97% shield coverage Chrome PVC jacket. . 470"111.9 mml Nom. 0.0.
Strandard Spool Lengths fl 100. 250. 500. 1000. 1500 (30 5. 76 2. 152 4. 304 8. 457 2 ml.
Standard Spool Lengths Std. Pkg.
ft.
m
Lb. ea.
100 250
500 1000 1500
30.5 76.2 152.4
304.8 457.2
15.0 36.8 73.1 148.2 213.8
28- Conductor TV Camera Cable
Recommended for transistorized TV cameras.
9253t
2511 60C
Specifications: 4-78 AWG ( 16x30)(.1.19 mm Itinned copper. PVC insulated, ring band stripe color coded. BELDFOIL · aluminum-polyester wrapped shield around 4 conductors with stranded drain wire. polyester tape over this shielded group.
21-22 AWG ( 7x30) (. 76 mml tinned copper. PVC insulated, cabled in 3 groups of 7. ring band stripe color coded, one group of 7has a BELDFOIL aluminum-polyester wrapped shield overall with a stranded drain wire, polyester tape over this shielded group.
3 coaxial cables Nom impedance 75 ohms. RG 59 U type with foam polypropylene insulation 85% shield coverage
Tinned copper braid shield. 86% shield coverage. Chrome PVC jacket. 810" ( 20.5 mm Nom. 0.0. Standard SpoolLengthsinft 100. 250. 500. 1000. (30 5. 76 2. 1524.304 8m) 250.5006 1000 ft lengths
20% 0 length tolerance
Standard Spool Lengths Std. Pkg.
ft.
Lb. ea.
100 250 a 500 · 1000*
30.5 76.2 152.4 304.8
42.0 104.4
212.8 411.5
28- Conductor TPE TV Camera Cable
A 75 ohm cable designed to remain flexible in cold weather Recommended for transistorized TV cameras tPasses the VW - 1vertical wire flame test.
8286 80C
Specifications: 4-18 AWG ( 18r30) 11.19 mm Itinned copper. PVC insulated ring band stripe color coded. BELDFOIL
aluminum-polyester wrapped shield around 4 conductors with stranded drain wire, polyester tape over this shielded group.
21-22 AWG ( 7x30)(.76 mm/ tinned copper, PVC insulated, cabled in 3groups of 7, ring band stripe
color coded, one group of 7has a BELDFOIL aluminum-polyester wrapped shield overall with a stranded drain wire, polyester tape over this shielded group. 3 coaxial cables Nom impedance 75 ohms 95% shield coverage
Tinned copper braid shield Black thermoplastic elastomer jacket. . 730 ( 18.54 mm I0.0 86% shield coverage
Standard Spool Lengths in ft 100. 250. 500. 1000 (30 5. 76 2. 152 4. 304 8m) 250. 5006 100011 lengths
·20% - 0 1ength tolerance
Standard Spool Lengths Std. P.C.
ft.
No.
100 250 ·
500 · 1000*
30.5 76.2
152.4 304.8
33.0 80.5 162.1
318.1
*Spools are one piece, but length may wiry + 20%-0 from length shown.
VC-24
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COOPER
INDUSTRIES
BELDEN
2200 U.S. Hwy 27 S. Box 1980 Richmond, IN 47375 (317) 983-5200
COAXIAL ià BROADCAST CABLES 75 OHM PRECISION VIDEO CABLES
The 9231 is a precision 75 ohm Video cable manufactured with rigid control of concentricity and all dimensional tolerances offer-
ing superior return loss characteristics; aquality Video transmission cable which provides exceptional picture definition and elimi-
nates problems resulting from periodicity. It has a noncontaminating PVC jacket for more flexibility. The double braid 8281 75 ohm Video cable is made to tight tolerances for excellent
return loss performance. Our 8279 miniature 75 ohm Video cable is for applications where space is critical. The gray PVC and black
polyethylene jackets are made of non-contaminating, nonmigratory compounds.
Typical Application: Video signal transmission in Color and
Monochrome TV studios. 100% SWEEP TESTED.
Description
Trade
UL Type Number
Standard Lengths
Std. Pkg. Lb.ea.
AWG (Strand-
ing) [Dia. in
mm] Nom
D.C.R
Insula-
tion & Nominal
Core 0.0.
Nominal 0.0.
No. of Shields
and Material
Nom. D.C.R.
Nom. Imp (ohms)
Nom. Vel. of Prop.
Nominal Capacitance
pFift pFim
Nominal Attenuation
db/
(lb/
MHz 100 ft. 100 m
9231.t
60C
500 1000
152.4 304.8
35.3 74.0
20 (Solid)
Poly-
304 7.72
[.81)
ethylene
bare
.198 5.03
copper
9.9(11M'
32.511/km
Tinned
copper, double braid 1.06O/M' 3.50/km
98% shield coverage
75
66%
21
69 .01 .06
.2
.1
.08
3
1 .25
.8
4.5 .45
1.5
10 .78
2.6
Gray non-contaminating
100 2.70 8.9
PVC jacket.
8281.
80C
500 1000
152.4 304 8
37.0 20 ( Solid)
Poly-
304 7.72
75 0 1.81]
ethylene
bare
.198 5.03
copper
9.9fl/M'
32.5(1/km
Tinned copper, double
braid 1.060/M'
3.511/km 98% shield
coverage
75
66'0
21
69 .01 .06
.2
.1
.08
.3
1 .25
.8
4.5 .45
1.5
10
.78
2.6
Black polyethylene jacket
100 2.70 8.9
¡Mee...72AL_
9141
80C
500
152.4 38.2 20 (Solid)
Poly-
305 775 Tinned copper 76
66% 20 65.6 01 .06
.2
1000 304.8 73.6
[.81] bare
ethylene .200 5.08
double braid 1.06(1/M'
1 .08
.3
1 .25
.8
copper
3.50/km
4.5 45
1.5
9.9(11M'
99%
Clear polyethylene jacket.
10
78
2.6
32 5(1/km
shield
(For indoor useonly)
100 2.70 8.9
coverage
r--....--
MInIature
8279.. 80C
100
30.5
31 23 ( 7x32)
Poly- .220 5.59
1tinned
250
76.2
75
[.57]
ethylene
copper
500
152.4 15 0
bare
.146 3.71
96%
compacted
4.5f1/M'
75
66% 21
69 01
.14
.5
1 .15
.5
1 .35 1.1
4.5 .8o 2.6
copper
14.8(1/km
10 1.30 4.3
23.10/M'
Black polyethylene jacket. Compacted conductor combines impedance 100 4.98
16.3
75.9flikm
uniformity of solid conductor and "nick-resistance" of stranded conducto
e=i
9209
80C
U-500 U-152.4 U-1000 U-304.8
14.2 27.3
23 ( 7x32)
I571
bare compacted
copper
19.1 fl/M'
62.7 fl/km
Poly-
220 5.59
100%
75
ethylene
1Duobond II
146 3.71
+ 96%
1tinned
copper
4.511/M'
66%
21
69 01
1
1
45
10
100
14.811/km
Black polyethylene jacket. Compacted conductor combines impedance
unit may of solid conductor and "nick-resistance" of stranded conductor.
.14
.15 .35
.8o
1.30 4.98
.5 .5 1.1
2.6 4.3 16.3
8299
Pkg. wt. ea. .3 lb.
For Use on 923 , 8281, and 9141. Adapter for use with PI-259 connector. 25 in
REQUEST QUOTATIONS ON RO Li CABLES NOT LISTED tPasses the VW- 1vertical wire flame test
. Request Techntcal Data Bulletin 7,8-16 for connector information ·· Peouest Technical Data Bullet,' 7-8-17 for connector information
BOGEN PHOTO CORP.
100 South Van Brunt St. PO Box 448 Englewood, NJ 07631 (201) 568-7771
3124 with 3145 Caddy
TRIPODS
3046
Mini Fluid Head
Measuring just 5" x5" a5" ( excluding handle), this
lightweight, fluid- type damped tripod head pans smoothly a full 360° and features a camera platform
that measures 2%" x3". For convenience and comfort
and to accommodate the widest possible range of
cameras, the Mini Fluid Head comes with a versatile
handle which is positionable on either side and can be separated into two individual segments, each 9" in
length. The Mini Fluid Read can be tilted 45° up and
90° down continuously, with detent at -- 45°, and has separate pan and tilt locks. Vertical drag is continously adjustable.
3063
$ 109.95
Micro Fluid Head
You'll be amazed at the smooth, fluid effect movement of the Bogen Micro Fluid Head, Only 2lbs, including an
adjustable handle. It's perfect for just about any of the new light-weight ( up to 6 lbs.) VCR cameras. It measures 4-1/4" x5-3/4" x2-3/4" ( excluding handle); pans smoothly afull 360 degrees; can be tilted up or down 90 degrees, has pan and tilt locks, and continuously adjustable drag. Platform has adjustable
positioning slot for best camera balance and is designed so that the handle can be on either left or right side.
3126
$69.95
Fluid Head
This lightweight, professional quality, fluid-damped
tripod head is designed for cine and video cameras weighing up to 22 lbs. ( 10 kg). The large, removable,
camera platform has amounting stud that travels in a 31 / 2 " slot and facilitates balancing at the camera's
center of gravity. In addition, there are three locking
detents foc the platform, any of which can be used.
The Bogen 3066 Fluid Head pans smoothly 360° and
the panning drag can be adjusted by means of asimple adjustmen7 screw. Vertical drag is adjusted by alarge
pawl- controlled lever. The tilting range is 60° up to 90° down with the camera under perfect control at all
times. And there's adeterrt which can be set to limit the
downward movement to 45°. Separate locks,
independent of the drag system provide apositive hold in any position.
3066
$ 200.00
Ball Camera Leveller
works like aclaw ball in that you mount it to your tri-
pod, you can remove the camera and head quickly to
mount on another tripod similarly equipped, and you
can level your camera even if you haven't levelled the
tripod. Ideal for use in the field on uneven terrain.
3115
$39.95
3124 Tripod w/Micro Fluid Head
A lightweight all- aluminum tripod our 30111 that's sturdy, stable, versatile, easy to use and easy to carry. It weighs only 7lbs. with our Micro Fluid Head ( Order Code 3126) that features real, fluid- effect action.
3124
.
$ 144.95
3122 Also available in black anodized finish .. $159.50
3129 3145
3011 Tripod with 3126 Micro Fluid Head and 3127 Dolly
Video Tripod Caddy
$ 199.95 $ 24.95
3149
3126 Micro Fluid Head with 3211 Tripod with black anodized finish and
3127 Dolly
$219.50
3046 Sturdy Tripod
An all aluminum double- braced, two- section design with remarkable rigidity and weighing only 7lbs. 4oz. It
extends to a full 73" with the Mini Fluid Head. 19" geared center post. Folds to a compact 32 1/ 2 " for travelling. Legs are furnished with convertible cushion/spike tips.
3046 Cine/Video Tripod w/o Head
$ 144.95
3140/3040 Cine Video Tripod w/ Mini Fluid
Head
$234.95
Universal Tripod
The Bogen Universal Cine/ Video Tripod weighs less
than 12 lbs. yet extends to 66". Legs are furnished with convertible cushion/spike tips. For precise position-
ing, there is a centerpost which permits 9" of extension. The unique variable- angle center brace
system on the tripod allows minimum elevation of the
tripod platform as low as 16".
3068
$ 189.95
3065 Universal Cine/ Video Tripod w/3066
Fluid Head
$ 379.50
3118 Universal Cine/ Video Tripod w/3063
Mini Fluid Head
$299.90
Heavy- Duty Tripod
The Bogen Heavy- Duty Cine/Video Tripod is the ideal
field tripod. Closed length, is only 37 'h" yet it extends to afull 63". It can be set as low as 12". With its built-in
claw ball, the camera head can be levelled quickly under all use conditions. The Heavy- Duty Tripod weighs just 17 lbs. 2 oz.
3061
$2.29 50
3062 Heavy Duty Cine/ Video Tripod w/3066
Fluid Head
$41950
3064 Heavy Duty Cine/ Video Tripod, w/3066 Fluid Head and Cine/Video Dolly $569.50
Cine/Video Dolly
The Bogen Cine/ Video Dolly is designed specifically
for use with the Universal and Heavy- Duty tripods.
Individually braked wheels measuring 5" in diameter, and a unique leg locking system make it easy to
assemble and disassemble for transporting. The tripod
legs are captured in a 38" diameter circle and the
doorway clearance needed for the fully assembled
dolly is only 39 1/ 2 ".
3067
160.00
Auto Dolly
Some dollies require you to brake and release each leg separately. But the Bogen Auto Dolly has abetter way:
when you depress the centrally located foot pedal you
release all three casters. When you lift the pedal, cam action raises the casters free of the ground and the
weight of the dolly and tripod rests on separate feet.
The ideal companion for the 3140 combination, the
Auto Dolly weighs only 6 lbs. and is easily assemble.
Spread from the center to tripod leg socket is 18".
Mounting and dismounting the tripod is accomplished
by cam operated kick- locks. If you need to support a
camera for very low angle shooting, we've thought-
fully provided a European thread stud on the central casting on which you can mount your Mini Fluid Head.
3056
$99.95
This is an ideal adjunct to the 3063 Mini Fluid Head It
3069 Universal Cine/Video Tripod w/3066 Fluid
head and Cine/ Video dolly .
$529.50
VC-26
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BOGEN PHOTO
loo South Van Brunt St.
P.O. Box 448
Englewood, NJ 07631
(201) 568-7771
3020
CORP.
3030/A
3035
4 ·
TRIPODS/HEADS
3040
3050
CS- 1
3025
trip.
3028
3047
3026
The Sturdy 3040
Technal CS- 1 Studio Camera Stand
The 3020 Convertible
Strong two section bi-post design, light-weight aluminum alloy construction, with exceptional sturdi-
Free-wheelingcamera stand gives you great movability for camera placement, then locks into a rock-solid
Maximum shooting height is 74':". The adjustable spread of the legs combined with the reversible center post, which has a removable section, lets you get as low as 14. ( Even minus the center post extension, you can go up to 63", with 6'4" of center post travel). Of course, for real worm's- eye views, just reverse the center post.
Specifications (with 3025 head): Maximum Elevation: 74Y.,". Minimum Elevation: 14". Closed Length: 30!:". Center Post Travel: 171: ". Weight:
6Y. lbs
4114.95
ness built-in. A single, easy to reach locking knob controls extension of each leg. Geared, reversible center post offers 19" of travel, and reverses for low shots or copying. Maximum height is 73", yet it folds to acompact 37". Minimum height without reversing the geared center post is 34 ":". Legs are equipped with convertible cushion/spike tips.
Specifications (with 3047 head): Maximum Eleva-
tion 73". Minimum Elevation: 34!:". Closed Length: 37". Center Post Travel: 19". Weight: 9 lbs., 14 oz.
$184.95
stance for super stability while shooting. Rubber' tipped feet take over from the casters.Fast and easy to adjust, letting you raise the camera to over six feet, or lower it to about afoot above the floor ( with the cross arm reversed). Counterbalancing makes the cross arm easy to move, and the stand can handle an 11 lb. camera with no difficulty. Once the stand is in position, you lock in the rubber-tipped feet for extra stability.
Specifications: Base is on a36" diameter. Clearance height ( for getting through doors fully assembled): 77". Shipping Weight: 45 lbs. Net Weight: 34 lbs. Designed for cameras up to 11 Y., lbs. See sketch for
The Dependable 3030/a
Ideal for location shooting where you need acompact, sturdy tripod ( the 3030/a has three-section legs and a geared center post, which means it provides good maximum, working height - over six feet - then telescopes into a really manageable package for carrying). Leg adjustment is fast and easy, even when
you're wearing gloves, thanks to our exclusive rocker arm leg lock and aspirit level on the shoulder shows you when you're on the level. Convertible cushioned spike tip legs and rigid center bracing hold everything firm.
Specifications ( with 3047 head): Maximum Ele vation: 72 Y. ". Minimum Elevation: 30'4". Closed
Length: 33
Center Post Travel: 11". Weight: 7lbs.
$174.95
The 3050 Automatic
Extension of each leg can be adjusted individually, or all three can be released simultaneously. Triggers let you move from as low as 22" ( 16" from base of pan head to ground), to 67 !:" or higher, built-in spirit level on the shoulder, plus two more levels on the 3047 pan/tilt head. Auto Tripod has independent, continuously variable leg braces that set each leg at a different angle. A sturdy geared center post with 91,:" of precisely controlled elevation. The legs have convertible, cushioned spike tips. The removable 3047 pan/tilt head doesn't come off until you want it to.
Specifications 3050: (Note: weights and dimensions given are for the 3050, including the model 3047 pan ' tilt head, which weighs 2 lbs., 9 oz., and is approximately 6" high). Closed Length with head: 40 ":", Without head: 36". Height with legs spaced:
other dimensions
$249.95
3025 - Lightweight and Sturdy
Separately locked movements on three axes. Perfect for 35mms, and the conical self-adjusting bearing surfaces on the tilt pivots provide more than enough strength to support Hassels and RB's. Thumbscrew movement locks . $21.95
3028 - Unique Locking System
Three axes movement system, including a pan lock.
Camera platform wider for better support of larger
camera bodies and a pair of ratchet- type positive
locking handles that give substantial grip, yet can be
rotated to any desired position
$34.95
3047 - No Slip, Precise Leveling
New idea in tripod head design: removable camera mounting plates that don't slip. Works like a chuck.
The 3035 Work Horse
40 Y,", With legs apart: 67':". Weight: 14 lbs., 2oz. Minimum Height ( Legs at full spread. retracted): 22".
Two fixed bosses seat the mounting plate, while the third opens and closes with a quick acting, positive
You can use Tripod at its maximum height of 7V, feet, then lower it to 22 inches or go to virtually ground zero by opening the legs and revesing the geared center column. Most important, the 3035 maintai. s its
stability at all heights. This stability is enhanced by independent, variable- spread leg braces that also allow you to obtain different angles on each leg.
Specifications (with 3047 head): Closed Length
with head: 38". ( Without head: 32"). Height: ( With
legs spaced 36" apart) 87!:". on Auto Dolly, 7'V.
Weight: 11 lbs. 12 oz. Minimum Height: ( Legs at full
spread, retracted) 22"
$194.95
$244.95
ACCESSORIES
3041 Adapter Plate for 3047 Pan Head ( Y. - 20) . $11.95
3042 Adapter Plate for 3047 Pan Head ( Euro
Thread)
11.95
3045 Carrying Strap for all Bogen Tripods
9 50
3049 Replacement Mounting Plate ( as
supplied with 3047 Pan Head)
11.95
3054 Converter Plate to allow any Bogen
Tripod to accept heads with '4 - 20 socket 11.00
3059 Side Arm for Bogen Tripods
24 95
locking knob. fn addition to an inlaid friction surface, it
also has apositive locking knob. Accessory plates are offered in achoice of U.S. ('4 - 201 or European thread,
add negligible weight to your camera. Each accessory
mounting glee is also socket- tapped for V. -20 and
Euro thread tripod bushings. Separate spirit levels for
each of the two principal tilt axes assure the your
camera can he leveled on any terrain .
$59.95
3026 - Double Action Ball Joint Head
Separate, quick- acting locks for panning and tilting
functions. You can position camera anywhere in a180°
hemisphere. Exclusive feature of this versatile head is
quick release mounting which lets you take camera on
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice,
and off quickly, yet offers positive, fastening
slip- proof $29.95
VC-27
ret.11-11_, OPTICAL COMPANY 1009 Beech Ave Pittsburgh, PA 15233 (41 2) 321-0076 ( 800) 245 - 45 74
MULTIPLEXERS
SERIES ll - MOBILE MULTIPLEXER
SERIES II - MOBILE MULTIPLEXER The Film Chain Without A Dedicated Camera
Active image optical system. The Series II Mobile Multiplexer is afree standing, compact film chain system designed to optically transfer visual dissolve programs to video systems, using two 35mm slide projectors and a 16mm projector.
Non- dedicated camera. The television camera does not have to be dedicated to film chain use. The camera can be tripod- mounted and used on the Multiplexer with its normal zoom lens. A camera mount and quick release device are available if desired.
Normal zoom lens. The camera's zoom lens allows precise image sizing. This includes the option of image size adjustments for mixtures of normal 35mm slides
and TV format slides. No special lenses or close-up attachments are needed to enable the camera to match- up with the optical components of the Multiplexer.
A high quality, three element collimating lens system optically places the aerial image so that the video camera may be used at normal distance settings.
Built in projector lenses. All highly corrected objective lenses for the slide projectors and the 16mm projector are built into the Multiplexer. One lens is used for the pair of slide projectors, which eliminates any magnification problems that might arise from using individual objective lenses.
Ektagraphic III slide projectors. The Multiplexer is designed for use with Ektagraphic Series Ill Eslide
projectors. This projector features easy lamp change, is compatible with most electronic dissolve controls and only aminor modification is needed to adapt these projectors for video use.
Standard loading slide trays. The carefully designed folded optical path allows for the 35mm slides to be loaded into the trays as for normal front projection. This
eliminates the need to " flip" the slides for correct image orientation.
Because the camera has constant access to all inputs at all times, the
slide projectors can be used to provide extra titles for the 16mm film.
620-100 Mobile Multiplexer
$3000.00
Basic unit includes mounting plate to hold 16mm
projector and the optical system for 16mm films.
620-150
Does not include projectors. Includes light diffusion device and neutral density filter holder for slide projectors. Camera mount for 620-100 Multiplexer
240.00
620-180 620-182 620-390
Floor mounting stand for MM II with leveling feet . . . 247.50
Floor mounting stand for MM II with locking casters .261.00
Rolling cabinet for MM II, Shipped from Kansas
282.00
620-400 Ektagraphic E Ill for use on MM II and installed on
original equipment
275.00
VC- 28
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ETLTI-11.1 OPTICAL COMPANY
1009 Beech Ave. Pittsburg, PA 15233 (412) 321-0076 ( 800) 245-4574
MULTIPLEXERS
SERIES III - MULTIPLEXER
SERIES Ill - MULTIPLEXER The Mobile Multiplexer Ill Film Chain Designed to provide top quality transfers from three 35mm slide projectors onto video.
Space requirements. The Mobile Multiplexer Ill is compact in design. Three Ektagraphic Ill slide projectors are placed in a stacked arrangement. Due to the projector arrangement, the actual footprint of the Multiplexer is only 2 x3 feet.
Image alignment. Images from the three projectors are accurately superimposed through the folded optical path. The camera has constant access to all inputs. Beamsplitting prisms are used rather than fragile pellicles or
double- image producing beamsplitting plates. There are no doubleimage problems when using beamsplitting prisms. There are no moving mirrors to worry about.
Slide projectors. The Mobile Multiplexer Ill is designed around the Kodak Ektagraphic Ill slide projectors. These projectors feature easy lamp access and are compatible with most electronic dissolve controls. Brightness modifiers for the three slide projectors are factory installed. Neutral density filter holders are provided should balancing filters be needed.
Alignment controls. Easy to reach controls for alignment and fine tuning drastically cut down on initial set-up time as well as pre-transfer checking. Alignment and adjustment of each projector is precise and independent of the others.
Objective lens.
A highly corrected objective lens is used for all three slide projectors.
The use of only one lens eliminates frustrating magnification problems that arise when more than one lens is used.
Collimating lens system.
A high quality three element collimating lens system optically places
the image so that the video camera may be used at normal distance
settings. No macro or other special lensing is needed for the video camera. The camera's normal zoom lens allows for precise image sizing. This includes the option of image size adjustments for normal
vs TV format slides. The integrity of the optical video relations in the camera design is retained.
630-310 Multiplexer
$2925.00
Accepts 3 Ektagraphic Ill Slide Projectors. No input for 16mm. Does
not include projectors.
630-312 Multiplexer
$3225.00
Accepts 3Ektagraphic Ill Slide Projectors and has a4th input port for a
16mm projector. Does not include projectors.
630-316 Multiplexer
$2600.00
Accepts 2 Ektagraphic III Slide Projectors.
630-150 Camera Mount
$240.00
Fits 630-310, 630-312, and 630-316 Multiplexers. Used for mounting
the video camera instead of afree standing tripod.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 29
Canon
One Canon Plaza Lake Success, NY 11042 (516) 488-6700
J18 x9B IE
J13 x9B IE II
BROADCASTING TV ZOOM LENS
PH13 x6.6B IE
FOR 2/3" TUBE COLOR TV CAMERAS
SPECIFICATI DNS Lens
J25x11.58 I
Application ENG/EFP
J20x8.58 IE
ENG/EFP
J18x9B IE
ENG
J40x9.58 IE
ENG/EFP
J15x9.5B J13x9B IE II
Portable/ENG Portable/ENG
Zoom Ratio 25X
20X
18X
40X
15X 13X
Range of Focal Length 11.5-288mm
23-576mm 8.5-170mm
17-340mm 9-162mm
18-324mm 9.5-380mm
19-760mm 9.5-143mm 9-117mm
18-234mm
With Extender
2X 2X 2X 2X
2X
Maximum Relative Aperture 1:1.6
1:3.2 1:1.6
1:3.2 1:2.4
1:4.8 1:1.4
1:2.8 1:1.8 1:1.6
1:3.2
Angular Field of View
41.9°x32° at 11.5mm 1.8°x1.3° at 288mm 21.6°x16.3° at 23mm 0.9°x0.7° at 576mm 54.7°x42.4° at 8.5mm 3°x2.2° at 170mm 29°x22° at 17mm 1.5°x1.1° at 340mm 52.1°x40.3° at 9mm 3.1°x2.3° at 162mm 27.5°x20.8° at 18mm 1.6°x1.2° at 324mm 49.7°x38.3° at 95mm 1.3°x1.0° at 380mm 26.1°x19.7° at 19mm 0.66°x0.5° at 760mm 49.7°x38.3° at 9.5mm 3.5°x2.6° at 143mm 52.1°x40.3° at 9mm 4.3°x3.2° at 117mm 27.5°x20.8° at 18mm 2.2°x1.6° at 234mm
FOR 1 / 2" TUBE COLOR TV CAMERAS
SPECIFICATIONS Lens
PH13x6.66 IE
Application
Portable/ENG (Hawk Eye)
Zoom Ratio
13X
Range of Focal Length 6.6-86mm
13.2-172mm
With xtender
2X
Maximum Relative Aperture 1:1.4
12.8
Angular Field of View
51.7°x40° at 6.6mm 4.3°x3.2° at 86mm 27.3°x20.6° at 13.2mm 2.1°x1.6° at 172mm
VC-30
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Canon
One Canon Plaza Lake Success, NY 11042 (516) 488-6700
J25X11.5B IE
J20X8.5B IE
BIROADCASTING W ZOOM LENS
J40X9.5B IE
FOR 2/3" TUBE COLOR TV CAMERAS ( Cont'd)
Minimum Object
Distance (MOD.)
Object Dimensions at M.O.D.
J25x11.58 IE 101.9 x76.5cm at 11.5mm
1.5m
4.1 x3.1cm at 288mm 51.3 x38.4cm at 23mm
2.1 x1.6cm at 576mm
J20x8.58 IE 0.6m
J18x9B IE 0.9m
82.1 x60.4cm at 8.5mm 3.9 x3cm at 170mm
40 x29.8cm at 17mm 2x1.5cm at 340mm
80.2 x60.2cm at 9mm 4.5 x3.4cm at 162mm
40.1 x30.1cm at 18mm 2.3 x1.7cm at 324mm
J40x9.58 IE 2.5m
J15x9.5B 1m
205 x154cm at 9.5mm 5.0 x3.8cm at 380mm
103 x77cm at 19mm 2.6 x2.0cm at 760mm
86.2 x64.7cm at 9.5mm 5.7 x4.3cm at 143mm
J13x9B IE II 0.8m
72.2 x54.2cm at 9mm 5.6 x4.2cm at 117mm
36.1 x27.1cm at 18mm 2.8 x2.1cm at 234mm
1in case of 133 type ·2in case of 64 type
Optical Back Focal Distance
Size WxHxL
i 48.2min in air
190x200x370mm
· 1 47.9mm in air
180x175x380mm
· i 48.6mm
133x90x196.5mm
Weight (Approx.)
10kg
8kg
1.7kg
Operation System
Remarks
Servo/manual control
Built-i n extender 2X
Servo/manual control
Bu ilt- inex tender 2X
Servo/manual control
Built-i n extender 2X
48.9mm
280x309x644.6mm
22.1mm in air · 2
41.7mm in air
140x95x140mm 131x96x187mm
30kg 15kg 15kg
Servo/manual control
Built-i n extender 2X
Zoom & Iris: Servo/manual control Focus: Manua, control
Zoom & Iris Servcoon/tmraonl ual Focus: manual
control
Built-in extender 2X
FOR 1/2" TUBE COLOR TV CAMERAS
Minimum Object
Distance (MOD.)
Object Dimensions at M.O.D.
PH13x6.68 IE 72.3 x54.2cm at 6.6mm
0.8m
5.6 x4.2cm at 86mm 36.5 x27.3cm at 13.2mm
2.9 x2.2cm at 172mm
Optical Back Focal Distance
Size WxHxL
Weight (Approx.)
33mm in air
127.5 x80 x168.5 mm
1.3kg
Operation System
Remarks
Zoom & Iris Servcoon/tmraolnual Focus: manual
control
Built-in extender 2X
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-31
Canon
One Canon Plaza Lake Success, NY 11042 (516) 488-6700
P40X18B IE
P18X15B IE
BROADCASTING TV ZOOM LENS
P12X18B IE
For 1-1 / 4" Tube Color TV Cameras
Specifications Lens P40x1 813 IE
Application Field
P18x15B IE
Field/Studio
P12x18B IE
Studio
Zoom Ratio 40 x
18 x
12 x
Range of Focal Length
18 - 720mm 36 - 1440mm 15-270mm 22.5-405mm 30-540mm 18-216mm 27 - 324mm 36 - 432mm
(With ) Extender
Maximum Relative Aperture
2x
1.5 x 2 x
1 5 x 2x
1 2.3 1 4.6 1 : 2.1 1 : 3.1 1 4.2 1 2.1 1 3.1 1 4.2
Angular Field of View
5o.r x39.1 at 18mm
1.4° x1* at 720mm
26.r x20.2' at 36mm
603..07T..4XXX024..75r.°1aa'tt
1440mm at 15mm 270mm
422..44.'x1X.382..
4.at 22.5mm at 405mm
32.4' x24.6' at 30mm 1.8x 1.e at 540mm
50.8x 39.1" at 18mm 4.5x 3.4° at 216mm
35.1' x26.7' at 27mm 3* x2.3' at 324mm
26.7' x20.2' at 36mm 2.3' x1.7- at 432mm
For 1" Tube Color TV Cameras
Specifications Lens P40x13.5B IE
Application Field
PV18 x1 1B IE
Field/Studio
PV12x14B IE
Studio
Zoom Ratio
Range of Focal Length
40 x540mm13.5 - 540mm 27 - 1080mm
11-200mm
18 x
16.5-300mm
22-400mm
13 5-162mm
12 x
20.3-243mm
27 - 324mm
(With ) 1Extender
Maximum Relative Aperture
2 x
1.5 x 2x
1.5 x 2 x
1 1.7 1 3.4 1 1.6 1 . 2.4. 1 3.2 1 1.6 1 2.4 1 3.2
Angular Field of View
50.7' x39.1° at 13.5mm 1.4' x1'at
26.7' x20.2" at 27mm
0.r x0.5' at 1080mm
s3.a7e"Xx2.47r.1a't
at llmm 200mm
42.4.x32.4' at 16.5mm 2.4'x 1.8' at 300mm
32.4' X24.6' at 22mm 1.8.x1.e at 400mm
50.8' x39.1' at 13.5mm 4.5*x 3.4' at 162mm
35.1' x26.7' at 20.3mm 3' x2.3' at 243mm
26.7'x 20.2' at 27mm 2.3' x 1.7' at 324mm
VC- 32
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Canon
One Canon Plaza Lake Success, NY 11042 (516) 488-6700
PV40X13.58 IE
PV18X11B IE
BROADCASTING TV ZOOM LENS
PV12X14B IE
For 1-1 / 4" Tube Color TV Cameras (Cont'd)
Minimum Object
Distance (MOD.) P40x188 IE
2 5m
P18x15B IE 06m
P12x18B IE 09m
Object Dimensions at M.O.D.
211> 158cm at 18mm 53x4cm at 720mm 106 > 80cm at 36mm 27x2cm at 1440mm 922 < 69.2cm at 15mm 49X3 7cm at 270mm 60 9:K45 7cm at 22 5mm 33x25cm at 405mm 45.8 < 34 4cm at 30mm 2.5 x19cm at 540mm 75 5 - 56 7cm at 18mm 65x4 9cm at 216mm 50 3 >, 37 8cm at 27mm 43x3 3cm at 324mm 37 8x 28 4cm at 36mm 33x24cm at 432mm
Optical Back Focal Distance
Size wxHXL
Weight (Approx.)
Operation System
Remarks
75mm in air
280 \ 3G9 \ 648mm
75 3mm in air 260x285x636mm
30kg
Z3°m } Servo manua l Built-in extender
Focus Ins Servo
2 \
27kg
Zoom } Ser ,:o manual Focus Iris Servo
Built-in extender 15 \ . 2 \
78 27mm in air 284 \ 321 5 > 433mm
20kg
Zoom } Servo maruai Focus Ins Servo
Built-in extender 15 \ , 2 \
For 1" Tube Color TV Cameras
Minimum Object
Distance (MOD.) PV40x13.58 IE
2 5m
PV18x11B IE I) .,,,,
PV12x14B IE 0 9m
Object Dimensions at M.O.D.
211 ·< 158cm at 13 5mm 53x4cm at 540mm 106 K80cm at 27mm 2.7 x2cm at 1080mm 92 2X69.2cm at 1lmm 4.9 x3.7cm at 200mm 60.9 X45.7cm at 16.5mm 3.3 X2.5cm at 300mm 45.8 X34.4cm at 22mm 2.5 X 1.9cm at 400mm 75 5x56 7cm at 13 5mm 65x49cm at 162mm 50 3x37 8cm at 20 3mm 43x3 3cm at 243mm 37 ax28 4cm at 27mm 33 >- 24cm at 324mm
Optical Back Focal Distance
Size WxHXL
Weight (Approx.)
Operat on System
Remarks
62 8mm in air
280x 309 x648mm
62.79mm in air 260X2775x710mm
30kg
ZFoocoums
} Servo
marua i
Built-in extender 2 x
Ins Servo
27kg
Zoom Servo manual Focus Ins Servo
Built -in extender 15x. 2x
63 22mm in air 284 x321 5x433mm
20kg
Zoom } Servo manual Focus Iris Servo
Built -in extender 15x . 2x
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-33
CHRISTIE
REFLEX-20R SELECTION GUIDE
ELECTRIC CORP
20665 Manhattan Place
Torrance, CA 90501 USA
(213) 320-0808 ( 800) 421-2955
TW
-
REFLEX-20 BATTERY PACKS & POWER SUPPLY FOR CAMERA EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT MODEL
AMPEX
FPC10 BCC-20
BOSCH
KCFI
HARRIS
TC90
HITACHI
FP15
FP2I/22
SK81/91 SK97 Z31
IKEGAMI
HL79D
HL79E
HL83 HL95 ITC730 ITC730A
JVC
KY- 2000
KY- 2700
KY- 1900 KY- 210 KY- 310
KY-320 KY- 900 KY-950
NEC
SP3A
PANASONIC WV555
WV888 AK30 8100
PHILIPS
LDKI4
RCA
CCDI TK76B,C· TK86
SHARP
XC700 XC800 XC900
SONY
DXC-M3
DXC-M3A BVP150 BVP300 BVP330 BVP3 BVP30 BVWI BVW3 BVW1/BVW3"
THOMPSON MC601
REFLEX·20
SNAP-ON TYPE BATTERY
REPLACES
KS12 KS12
KS12
PROPAC14 PROPAC14
SAFT
KS12
KSI 1 KS12 KSI2 KSI2 KS12
FBPI4
DP40 DP40 DP40 DP40 DP40
KS12 KS12 KS12 KS12 KS12 KS12
KS11
KS11 KSI 1 KS12 KS12 KS12 KS12 KS12
OPY-9N OPY-9N QPY-9N OPY-9N QPY-9N QPY-9N
820
B20 B20 DC-05OU DC-05OU DC-05OU DC-05OU DC-05OU
KS12
KSI 1 KS11 KS12 KS12
KS12
PROPAC14
WV-PS36 WB-PS36 PROPAC14 PROPAC14
FBPI4
KS12 KS12 KS12
KS12 KS12 KS12
PROPAC14 14V BELT PROPAC14
BP14 BP14 BP14
KS12 KS12 KS12 KS12 KS12 KS12
KS12 KS11 KS11 ERS
DC-7/BP-60 DC-8/NP1 BP-65AN BP-65AN BP-65AN BP-65AN
BP-65AN NP- 1 NP- 1 NP- 1
KS12 --
13NARON TYPE
MOUNT
CHRISIIE WEDGE MOUNT
KR SERIES BATTERY
KR SERIES ` AC
ADArTER
BUILT-IN
--
BUILT-IN
KA23
KR2
OR- Fl
--
--
-- KSI
--
BUILT-IN
--
--
CB15
CB2I
KA30
CB91
KA28
CEI97
CB31
--
--
KR2
KR2
--
--
--
--
--
-- KS1 KS1
-- --
BUILT-IN BUILT-IN BUILT-IN
BUILT-IN BUILT-IN BUILT-IN
KA24 KA24 KA29
KA24 KA24 KA24
KR2 KR2 KR2
KR2 KR2 KR2
027 MOUNT
--
--
027 MOUNT
KAI5
KRI
019 MOUNT
--
021 ADAPTER
--
-- --
095 ADAPTER
--
--
095 INCLUDED 095 INCLUDED 095 INCLUDED
-- -- --
-- -- --
KS1 KSI KSI KSI KSI KSI
--
KSI -- -- --
-- -- --
OR- NEC-3
--
WV-PS35S
WV-PS35S BUILT-IN BUILT-IN
BUILT-IN
--
-- -- -- --
--
--
--
-- -- --
--
-- -- --
--
--
BUILT-IN
HM76B/C
KA20
BUILT-IN
KA2I
BUILT-IN
KA27
BUILT-IN
KA27
BUILT-IN
-- KR2 KR2
KR2 KR2 --
-- --
-- KS1 KSI
KSI KSI --
DC65AN/M3
--
--
DC309AN
--
--
DC305AN
KA22
KR2
DC305AN
KA22
KR2
DC305AN
KA22
KR2
DC305AN
KA22
KR2
DC305AN
KA22
KR2
DC306AN
--
--
DC307AN
--
--
HM90A
--
--
-- --
KSI KSI KSI KS1
KS1 -- -- --
HM300
KA22
KR2
KSI
RUN TIME
(PitinutrW
115 80
90
110
120 105 115 110 135
100 100 110 110 100 110
110 135 135 120 120 120 105 105
200
115 105 125 110
120
115 60 75
120 120 140
160 160 140 130 115 125 125 115 85
75
130
KS Battery
·RCA TK-76A, B, C Belt Pack option consisting of one HR1 Battery with BE3 Cable
KA Wedge Mount
KR Battery
KS1 Power Supply KSI fits Christie
or two HR1 Batteries operated in parallel with Dual BBE3 Cable; worn on " B" Belt Run Time: 60 minutes for one pack; 130 minutes for two packs in parallel.
wedge mount.
' · With Wireless Mike.
......
--. . ... -- - ,
HR Series wiBelt
VOLTAGE
30 VOLT 14 VOLT
REFLEX- 20 BATTERY PACKS FOR PORTABLE LIGHTING
WATTS
250 80
REFLEX- 20
BATTERY
HR (TWO) HR1
REPLACES
30V BELT 14V BELT
CABLE
BE7 BE12
TOaPnER(AMMT.E)
24 25
REFLEX-.20 BATTERY PACKS FOR VTR'S
EQUIPMENT MODEL
RBEAFTLTEEXR-2Y0
REPLACES
RUN TIME
(11111ness)
AMPEX
VPR20
1181340A3f --
60
SONY
BVU50
ER6
BP90
240
BVU110
ER6
BP90
240
BVH500
ER6 (TWO)
BP90 (TVVO)
100
V04800
ER8
BP60
145
Model: ER6 ER8 HRi KRI KR2 KS11 KSI2 118E140A31 KSI
SPECIFICATIONS
Norn Voltage: 12 5 12 14.4 13.75 15 13.75 15 13.7 N/A
Approx. Weight: 3lbs. 8oz. 2lbs. 7oz. 5lbs. 8oz. 4lbs. 3oz. 4lbs. 5oz. 4lbs. 1oz. 4lbs. 3oz. 7lbs 14 oz. 3lbs
Approx. Dimensions: 6-5/8 x4-3/4 x1.5/16" 2-314 x5x2-3/4" 7-1/4 x8 x2" 5-1/2 x4-1/2 x2-3/4" 5-1/2 x4-1/2 x2-3/4" 5-1/2 x4-1/2 x2-3/4" 5.1/2 x4-I/2 x2-3/4" 8-1/4 x5-3/8 x2.7/8" 4-1/4 x5-1/2 x4-1/2"
VC- 34
ER6
tagal... 118B40A3t
1 I ER8
tAvailable through Ampex Corp.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CHRISTIE ELECTRIC CORP.
20665 Manhattan Place Torrance, CA 90501 USA
(213) 320-0808 ( 800) 421-2955
TVVX 910-349-6260
REFLEX-20® CHARGERS/ SEQUENCER AND SLOW CHARGERS
REFLEX-20 CHARGERS, SEQUENCER & SLO CHARGERS
KS11 KS12 KR1 KR2 HR1 HR2
ER6 ER8
Six- Port
115/230V 50M0Hz
Charge Cable
GASP 1 CCKS11 CCKS12 CCKR1 CCKR2 CCHR1 CCHR2 CCER6 CCER8
Single Channel
115/230V 50/60Hz
SMT
Charge Cable
CSB12
BUILT-IN CSB8
BUILT-IN
115V t30Hz
DMB
Dual Channel
115V 50/60Hz
230V I115/230V 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
Charge Cable
DMBZ1 DMBZ2 DMCZ
CBB24 CBB26 CBB14 CBB16 CBB8
CB5 CBB11 CBB1
Sequencer
115/230V 50/60Hz
RS1A
REFLEX Charge
Time
20 MIN MAX
40 MIN MAX 20 MIN MAX
Slow Charger
115,230V 50/60Hz
TC1 TC1 TC1 TC1 TC1 TC1 TC1 TC23
Slow Charge
Time
16 HRS MAX
GASP 1 - Six- Port " SMT" Charger
CASP1 · Six·Port
Single Channel
Universal charger. analyzer- sequencer. power supply for any rechargeable battery.
Will charge one ER6, KR2, HFI1*··, or KS12" · battery pack in less than 20
12 lbs.
minutes.
8y, x 14y, x3y," Contact factory for non.
Christie battery charge cables.
15 lbs. 9 X81 /2 x 11'4"
·· · Requires CSB8 for HR1; CSB12 for KS12 batteries.
REFLEX- 2000 FAMILY
"DM" Series Charger
Dual Channel, Multi- Purpose
Will charge any two similar ReFLEX-20 batteries above
21-25 lbs. 9% x81 /2 x11%."
RS1A Sequencer
RS1A Sequencer
Will charge up to 8 intermixed ReFLEX-20 batteries automatically in sequence in less than 4 hours. The Sequencer must be used together with DMB, DMBZ1, or DMBZ2 only.
11 lbs. 8oz. x51 /4 x91,"
TC1/TC23 Timed Slow Charger
TC1/TC23 Timed Slow Charger TC1 will charge ER6, HR1, HR2, KR1, KR2, KS11, KS12.
TC23 Will charge ER8.
20 oz. 41 /2 x21 /2 x1lA excluding wall-mount transformer.
HR SERIES
REFLEX- 20 FAMILY
DM SERIES CHARGER
RS1A SEOUENCER
f
KR SERIES KSI POWER SUPPLY
ER6
DCR1 DISCHARGER
TC SERIES SLOW CHARGER
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
KS SERIES
VC-35
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
IC* 400.
· ·
lb
Newspak Nickel-Cadmium Battery Systems
Newspaks combine the best features of Cine 60 Battery Belts in an On- Board Battery to provide ahigh quality battery for video applications. Built-in Lifeguard Cell Sensors, 50% more accurate than the commonly employed sensors, monitor temperature of the custommatched premium quality cells more efficiently, prevent overcharge and undercharge. This exclusive design assures a longer, more powerful battery life and makes the Cine 60 Newspak the most practical high reliability battery on the market.
The Newspak mates with the standard battery bracket on the rear of most ENG cameras. It connects via an integral banana jack shorty' connector. As a direct replacement for OEM supplied On-Board Batteries, it is fully compatible with the OEM's Fast, Quick, or Slow Chargers. No cables, adaptors, or modifications are required. It also has an auxiliary 5-pin XLR for powering abattery light when required and which may also be used for charging with Cine 60 Chargers.
Newspak U-14
14.4V / 4Amp.- Hr. / 41/2lbs. For all lkegami, Sony BVP Series, RCA,
Thomson, Philips, CP, Harris, Ampex, and Hitachi SK81/91/97, FP-21,
FP-22 Cameras. Direct Replacement for lkegami OPY9N, Sharp XC-70/
80/90 BAT On-Board Batteries.
U-14
$435.00
Newspak U-13
13.2V / 4Amp.- Hr. / 41/2 lbs. For Panasonic (except Recam), JVC, Sony
DXC-M3, Sony Betacam, and all other Hitachi Cameras. Direct
Replacement for Hitachi DP-40, JVC B-20, Sony BP-65AN, Panasonic
SQ13F On-Board Batteries.
U-13
$425.00
NICKEL CADMIUM BATTERIES/CHARGERS
Cine 60 VTR Batteries
The Professional Direct Replacements for Sony BP-90 and BP-60 VTR Batteries. Feature custom-matched premium quality NiCad cells and the exclusive ' Lifeguard Cell Sensors' as used in Cine 60 Newspaks and Battery Belts.
BP-912FC & BP-912S Sony BP-90 Replacements
12V / 4Amp.- Hr. VTR Battery in heavy-duty molded case with non-
shorting type connector and replaceable fuse to guard against
external shorts. Both Fast and Slow Charge models compatible with
Sony BC-210 and all overnite chargers for BP-90 type Batteries.
BP-912FC
$255.00
(For fast or quik charging with all Cine 60 Fast Chargers use BPA Charger Adaptor)
BP-912S Standard Charge Model
$230.00
BP-612FC & BP-612S Sony BP-60 Replacements
13.2V / 2Amp.-Hr. rating for maximum power. Delivers up to ten times
more power over its life than Sony's BP-60. Can be stored in
discharged condition indefinitely. Both Fast and Slow Charge models
can be charged overnite with Cine 60's BP-25C 2-position Overnite
Charger.
BP-612FC
$195.00
(With Cine 60 Lifeguard Fast or Ouik Chargers, use BPA Adaptor)
BP-612S Standard Charge Model
$ 180.00
Cine 60 Betacam Battery NP-4
12V/4 Amp.-Hr./4 lbs. The Professional Replacement for Sony's NP- 1 Battery. Provides more than three times the power. Features premium
quality NiCad Cells and Cine 60's exclusive Lifeguard Cell Sensors. Has automatic reset circuit breaker to guard against external shorts, 4- pin XLR for direct connection to the Betacam's D.C. input. Mates with the Cine 60 MB-4Battery Bracket which can be mounted on the rear of the Betacam with existing screws. Run Time: 2.5 Hrs. for BVW-1, 1.6 Hrs. for BVW-3 Betacam. Can be charged fast, quik or slow with Cine
60 Chargers.
NP-4
$275.00
(Supplied with Overnite Charger, Shoulder Strap and Belt Clip for use off the Betacam)
P4B-4 Battery Bracket
(For the Betacam)
.
$ 75.00
LC4-914 Lifeguard 4- Hour, 4- Position Fast Charger
Has 4independent 1Amp Charging Channels. Each can be changed to
provide single position charge rates of 2, 3, or 4Amps. Use as asingle
position 1Hour Fast Charger for 4Amp. Newspak, OEM On- Board Battery, BP-912FC, BP-612FC VTR Batteries, Betacam Battery...or...as
a 4- position, 4- hour Fast Charger for any combination of these Batteries. Requires BP3XF Charge Adaptors for OEM Batteries, BPA
Adaptor for VTR Batteries, 4P-5P Charge Adaptor for Betacam Battery.
Excellent line and load regulation assures afull charge. 115/220V
switchable. Compact 41/2"x65/8"x71/ 2 ". Lightweight 4lbs.
LC4-914
$695.00
LC-914 Lifeguard 4-Hour, Single- Position Quick Charger
Compact 1Amp. single-channel version of LC4-914 Fast Charger.
Weighs 10 ozs. Charges Newspak, OEM On-Board Batteries, etc. in 4
hours. Requires same Charge Adaptors for OEM & VTR Batteries as
LC4-914 above. 115/220V switchable. Size: 41/4"x27/8"x11/2".
LC-914
S210.00
BP-2C 2- Position Overnight Charger For BP-90 Batteries
Accepts all types. Charges two overnight. Size: 41/4"x2'/8" x11 /2 ".
Weighs 10 ozs. BP-2C 115V, BP-2C-220 220V.
812-2C
ea. $ 105.00
BP-25C 2- Position Overnight Charger for BP-612 Batteries
Same size and weight as BP-2C. BP-25C 115V, BP-25C-220 220V.
BP-25C
ea. $ 105.00
VC-36
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
NICKEL- CADMIUM BATTERY CHARGERS
"Pro" Universal Fast Chargers
Provide safe fast charging without overcharging of 6to 30 volts (5to 25 cell) Fast Charge type batteries. Will recharge a4AH Battery in one hour, 7AH in 2hours. Sensing circuits are utilized and visual indicators on the Chargers provide continual monitoring of Battery status. Manual "Start", automatic cut off at end of charging cycle. Two charge rates, Fast/Slow.
Model No. Input Voltage
Cell Types
9400
115V 50/60Hz
Dor F
9400B "
9422
220V 50/60Hz
9422B
BP2500 115V 50/60Hz
1/2D, 2/3D, D, F
BP2522 220V 50/60Hz "
9400-U 115/220V 50/60Hz Dor F
9400-UB "
Charge Rates 4A/350mA
2.5A/250mA
Charge Conn. 5-pin XLR 4-pin XLR 5-pin XLR 4-pin XLR 3-pin XLR
Size 21/4 "x 31/2"x 8"
1.1
Weight 3lbs.
et
3A/350mA
5-pin XLR 4-pin XLR
ee
33/4 "x 41/2"x 83/4 " " "
Mobile 12VDC Fast Chargers
Using the vehicle's electrical system, these models provide safe fast charging without overcharging 12 to 30 volt Fast Charge type batteries. Equipped with Charge Current Ammeter. LED Indicators for DC input & Charge Mode, "Start" Charge Pushbutton, On-Off Switch and sensing circuits to provide continual monitoring of battery status. Automatic cut off at end of charging cycle. DC Input Cord 3ft. long terminated in AMP lugs for connection to Car Battery or Fuse block. Will recharge a4AH battery in 1hr.. a7AH battery in 2hrs.
Model No. 94DC12A
940C12B 94DC16A
940C30
DC Input Volts/Amps 12-13 5V-7 Amps
12-13.5V-17 Amps
Cell Types Dor F
No. ot Cells
Charge Rate
10. 11 or 12 cells 4A (12V - 14.4V)
D. 2/3D,
10 to 14 cells
2.5A
D, F ( 12 to 16.8V)
Dor F
20 to 24 cells 4A (30V-4A, 7A)
(12- 14.4V-8A. 14A)
Charge Conn Size 5-pin XLR 43,-x43/4"x 7"
4-pin XLR It
5-pin XLR
1.1
5-pin XLR 43/4 "x 4314"x 9"
Weight ;
4lbs.
Awkr eZ MI> îo - ....,. "
18
5lbs.
Single and Dual 14 - 16 Hour Overnite Chargers
Each type occupies an area 43/8 xFe" and is 11/2"high. The dual type will charge two batteries simultaneously. Each charging circuit includes an indicator lamp and flush-mounted charge receptacle. Both types come with 3ft. long power input cord, polarized plug and are fused.
Dual Types Model No. BP-2C BP-2C/220 BP-25C CBP-2J CBP-2J/220
Input Voltage 115V 50/60Hz 220V 50/60Hz 115V 50/60Hz
220V 50/60Hz
Cell Types Dor F
1/2 D, 2/3D
No. of Cells 2to 24 cells
2to 24 cells
Charge Connector 2.1mm DC pin plug
Charge Rate 350mA
*1
250mA
3.0mm DC pin plug "
Single Overnite Chargers
These line-isolated desk type chargers are available for replacing inefficient NickelCadmium Battery Chargers. Each provides a full charge in 14 to 16 hours at the C10 charge rate. Each is equipped with aLED Charge Indicator, 5-pin XLR Charge Cable. C10 Chargers for different Battery Voltages, Charging Rates, and/or Charge Connectors can be made up on special order. To denote a4-pin XLR Charge Cable for any charger listed below, add the letter "B" to the end of the model
number. Charger input is 115/V 50/60Hz. For 220 VChargers add suffix -220V to Model No.
Single Overnite Charger Model Nos.
No. of Cells Battery Voltage
Cell Size/Capacity
1/2A450mAH AA 500mAH 2/3SC 600mAH 2/3C 900mAH SC 1200mAH C1800mAH 1/2D2.0 AH 2/3D 2.5 AH 04.0 AH F7.0 AH SF 10.0 AH
7Cells 8.4V
450-7 500-7 600-7 900-7 1200-7 1200-7 2.0-7 2.5-7 4.0-7 7.0-7 10.0-7
10 Cells 12V
450-10 500-10 600-10 900-10 1200-10 1800-10 2.0-10 2.5-10 4.0-10 7.0-10 10.0-10
12 Cells 14.4V
450-12 500-12 600-12 930-12 1200-12 1800-12 2.0-12 2.5-12 4.0-12 7.0-12 10.0-12
14 Cells 16.8V
450-14 500-14 600-14 900-14 1200-14 1800-14 2.0-14 2.5-14 4.0-14 7.0-14 10.0-14
20 Cells 24V
450-20 500-20 600-20 900-20 1200-20 1800-20 2.0-20 2.5-20 4.0-20 7.0-20 10.0-20
24 Cells 28.8V
450-24 500-24 600-24 900-24 1200-24 1800-24 2.0-24 2.5-24 4.0-24 7.0-24 10.0-24
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-37
IHRI4 630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
C18
1/2A
2/3SC
TSC12
NICKEL- CADMIUM CELLS/ BATTERY MODULES
All Cells meet or exceed Cine 60 standards for heavy duty commercial use. Cell arrays can be assembled to any size or shape to fit your application.
Model No.
Size
Volts AH (Capacity, Model No.
Size
Volts AH ¡Capacity)
1/2A 5AA 2/3SC SC12
1/2A AA 2/3SC SC
1.2V
450mAH
2/3D
1.2V
500mAH
F2/3D
1.2V
600mAH
AA69
1.2V
1.2AH
BD17
2/3D
1.2V
(5)2/3D
6.0V
D
1.2V
(2)D
2.4V
2.5AH 2.5AH 4.0AH 4.0AH
TSC12 (3)SC
2/3C
2/3C
C18
C
BC18 (2)C
3.6V
1.2AH
1/2 ED18
1.2V
900mAH
TD35
1.2V
1.8AH
ED18
2.4V
1.8AH
F-1
(2)D
2.4V
4.0AH
(3)D
3.6V
4.0AH
(4)D
4.8V
4.0AH
1.2V
7.0AH
1/2 D
1/2 D
1.2V
E1/2D (4) 1/2D
4.8V
2.0AH 2.0AH
BF17 SF-1
(2)F
2.4V
Super F 1.2V
7.0AH 10.0AH
F2/30
E018
,E018
SF- 1
F-1
8F-17
1035
8017
AA69 BC18
Custom Packaging and Assembly
Cine 60 packages and assembles Nickel-Cadmium Cells and Battery Chargers into special Packs or Belts to meet your specific requirements. Complete services are available.
Battery Dememorizer
Nickel--Cadmium battery ' memory' is created by
the build-up of excess crystals in the cell. Repetitive long periods of overcharging and shallow discharging can bring about this condition of apparent loss of capacity. The Dememorizer, properly used. will break down the excess crystals in the cell thereby restoring the apparent capacity loss. In the process it will also rebalance the cells to improve the battery's performance. Model No. DM-1214: equipped with solid-state constant current drain device, voltage
sensor, automatic voltage cut off circuit. voltmeter, voltage selector. pushbutton 'start' switch. It will dememorize 12V and 14.4V 1.5 Amp to 20 Amp Batteries.
MCA° EIATIER,
"DEMEMORIZER"
CINE-60
±13 ,1 12 V
t 12V
ACtIVATE
14.4 V
inc. NEW YORK N Y
1114
Battery Cables
Elasticity and rugged hard use is assured by the quality of these cables. Coiled types retracted
are 11 inches long, extended 6ft. They are supplied with OEM connectors. When the equipment's DC input connector is of the nonlocking type, straight 6ft. long cables are specified.
VC-38
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BATTERY BELTS/
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036
BATTERY PACKS
(212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
BATTERY BELTS
Fast Charge Belt
CAT. NO. 12 Volts 8307FC 7007FC
AMPS. SUGG. LIST
4A
5 456.00
7A
596.00
8327FC
8A
672.00
7027FC
14A
1010.00
CAT. NO. 14.4 Volts
8306FC 8306BFC 7006FC 7006BFC 8326FC
8326BFC 7026FC 7026BFC
AMPS. SUGG. LIST
4A 4A 7A 7A 8A
8A 14A 14A
$ 506.00 512.00 616.00 627.00 727.00
760.00 1078.00 1078.00
CAT. NO. 30 Volts 8304FC 7004FC
AMPS. SUGG. LIST
4A $ 673.00
7A
1062.00
CAT. NO. AMPS. SUGG. LIST 30/14.4 Volts Switchable 3014FC 4A/30V
8A/14.4V $ 760.00 3017FC 7A/30V
14A/14.4V 1140.00
Standard Belt
CAT. NO. AMPS.
12 Volts
6307
4A
7007
7A
6327
8A
7027
14A
SUGG. LIST
$ 412.00 555.00 628.00 979.00
CAT. NO. 14.4 Volts 6306 63068 7006 7006B 6326 6326B 7026 70268
AMPS. SUGG. LIST
4A 4A 7A 7A
8A 8A
14A 14A
$ 462.00 468.00 572.00 585.00
695.00 700.00
1034.00 1034.00
CAT. NO. 30 Volts 6304
7004
AMPS. SUGG. LIST
4A $ 633.00
7A
1012.00
CAT. NO. AMPS. SUGG. LIST
30/14.4 Volts Switchable
3014
4A/30V
8A/14.4V $ 712.00
3017
7A/30V
14A/14.4V 1090.00
BATTERY PACKS
Fast Charge Packs
CAT. NO. 12 Volts 9107FC
9707FC 9127FC 9727FC
AMPS. SUGG. LIST
4A
7A 8A 14A
$ 495.00
627.00 710.00 1020.00
Standard Pack
CAT. NO. 12 Volts
AMPS.
9107
4A
9707
7A
9127
8A
SUGG. LIST
$ 450.00 596.00 665.00
CAT. NO. 14.4 Volts
AMPS. SUGG. LIST
9727
14A
20-120/2
20A
979.00 1615.00
9106FC 9106BFC 9706FC 9706BFC 9126FC 9126BFC 9726FC 9726BFC
CAT. NO. 30 Volts
4A 4A 7A 7A 8A 8A
14A 14A
$ 522.00 522.00 649.00 649.00 755.00 755.00
1078.00 1078.00
AMPS. SUGG. LIST
CAT. NO. 144 Volts 9106 9106B
9706 97068 9126 91268 9726 9726B
AMPS. SUGG. LIST
4A 4A
7A 7A 8A 8A 14A 14A
$ 470.00 476.00
625.00 638.00 730.00 730.00 1034.00 1034.00
9104FC 9704FC
4A $ 710.00
7A
1072.00
CAT. NO. 30 Volts
AMPS. SUGG. LIST
CAT. NO. AMPS. SUGG LIST 30/14.4 Volts Switchable 9014FC 4A/30V
8A/14.4V S 760 00 9017FC 7A/30V
14A/14.4V 1140 00
9104 9704
4A
S 665.00
7A
1045.00
CAT. NO. AMPS. SUGG. LIST
30/14.4 Volts Switchable
9104
4A/30V
8A/14.4V S 712 00
9017
7A/30V
OPTION # 8994 220V. Overnite Charger in lieu of 115V Charger in Standard 8. Fast Charge Batteries OPTION #6994 110V/220V Overnite Charger in lieu of 115V Charger in Standard ( Overnite) Charge Batteries
S22 00 44 00
14-30
14A/14.4V 10A/30V 20A/14 4V
1090 00 1815 00
VIDEO BATTERY GABLES FOR CINE 60 BATTERY BELTS/PACKS
VIDEO BATTERY CABLES FOR CINE 60 BATTERY BELTS/PACKS
MODEL NO. Ampex BCC- 4
BCC- 14. BCC- 20 FPC-10. FRC-10 VPR-5 VPR-20
CAT NO. SUGG. LIST
6404 AMP(c)
72.00
6473(c)
72.00
6408(c) 6477(c) 6431(c)
59.00 65.00 59.00
CE1 310. 330. 340
6412(c) S 59.00
Fernseh KCA-90
KCA-100 KBF-1
KCN BCN-5 BC N-20 BCN-21
6423(c) S 59.00
6424(c)
59.00
6400KBF(s) 59.00
6400KCN(s) 59.00
6422(s)
59.00
6430(s)
49.00
6400BCN(s) 59.00
Harris TC-90
6488(s) S 72.00
Hitachi FP10. 11. 15. 20S FP21. 22. 40S. 1020
FP3060. SK81. 90 SK91. SK97
FP3030
6406(c)
6406(c)
6406(c) 6406(c) 6407(c)
S 59.00
59.00
59.00 59.00 59.00
lkegami HL33/35 EC- 35. HL-78. 79
ITC350. ITC730
6410(c) S 59.00
6471(c)
59.00
6471(c)
59.00
MODEL NO. CAT NO HL95. w/Sony Camcorder 6475(c) HL95 w/Hitachi Camcorder 6406(c)
SUGG. LIST S 59.00
59.00
JVC All KY Cameras CR4700U. CR4900U CY8800U CR4400U
HR4100U TM41AU HR2200U. TM22U HR2650U. BR6200U HRC3U/GZ3 562U.
S1000 CR4400LU
6408(c) S 59.00
6408(c) 6408(c)
59.00 59.00
6400JVC(s) 49.00 6400JVC(s) 49.00
6401J7(s) 49.00
6401J8(s) 49.00
6401J3
59.00
6401PV2(s) 49.00
6411(c)
59.00
NEC
MNC60/
MNC61A
6404
AMP(c) S 72.00
MNC71CP 6417-4(c) 72.00
MNC80/
MNC81A
6420(c)
59.00
SPC-3 w/Sony
Camcorder 6475(c)
59.00
SPC-3 w/Hitachi
Camcorder 6406(c)
59.00
Philips LU -14 Video 80
6473(c) S 72.00 6414-4(c) 72.00
(s) Straight 6ft / (cl Coiled 11 retracted 6ft extended
MODEL NO. Panasonic AK710.
750. 760 AU/AK100.
ARC10 BTS700N
CT700 NV8400. 8410. 9400 NV8420
NV9450 PV2100.
2300. 3000 WV555. 777
888(XLR) WV555. 777
888(0) WV3600. WV3990 WV3085. NV3085
CAT NO. SUGG. LIST
6478(c) 5 59.00
6408(c)
59.00
6475(c)
59.00
6401TS2(s) 49.00
6400JVC(s) 49.00
640ONV2(s) 49.00
6408(c)
59.00
6401PV2(s) 49.00
6408(c)
59.00
64WV5(s) 72.00
6478(c)
59.00
6400JVC(s) 49.00
RCA TK76. 76B. 76C TK86
TK710
HCR-1/-2 HC- 1/-2
HR- 1
6476(c) S155.00
6486(c)
72.00
6478TK(c) 79.00
6400R(s) 85.00
6486(s)
72.00
6408B(c) 59.00
Thomson TTV1623 1624 TTV1624P
MC301/501 MC601/701 MC611/613
6408(c) 6408(c) 6408(c)
6408(c) 6408(c)
S 59.00 59.00 59.00 59.00
59.00
Toshiba PK-39 PK-60 PK-36
6474(c) S 59.00
647413(c) 59.00
64PK(s)
59.00
MODEL NO. Videotek VM8/RM8 VM5A/
RM5A
CAT NO. SUGG. LIST 6400KVG 5 59.00 6401KVG 59.00
Sharp
XC300/500 XC320/520/
530 XC700 XC800/900
6418(s) S 49.00
6409(c) 6XC700(c) 6408(c)
59.00 59.00 59.00
Sony
OVO -50/110 6475(c) S59.00
BVP-110/
150
6475(c)
59.00
BVP-300/
330
6475(c)
59.00
BVP-1.
BVP-3.
BVP-30
6475(c)
59.00
BVV-1.
BVW-1
6475(c)
59.00
BVW-3.
BVW-20
6475(c)
59.00
BVM-4050 6475(c)
59.00
DXCM-3A 6475(c)
59.00
VO -6800
6475(c)
59.00
PVM-4000 6400W(s) 59.00
PVM-8000 6400KVG(s) 59.00
KV-8000G 6400KVG(s) 59.00
DXCM-3
6400M3(s) 49.00
DXC1800.
DXC1840
6400M3(s) 49.00
DXC6000
6400M3(s) 49.00
AV3400.
AV8400
6400DXCIs) 49.00
DXC1600
6400DXC(s) 49.00
VO -4800
64000XC(s) 49.00
SLO-340
6400DXC(s) 49.00
SL- 2000.
SL- 3000
6400DXC(s) 49.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-39
6:1
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
Features
· 115/230 Volt built-in Lifeguard switchable charger. Fully charges 4A or 8A Lifeguard Sofbelts or Packs in 4hours, 7A or 14A units in 7hours. Automatically switches to Lifeguard mode to keep battery fully charged.
· Thick-walled, cell-fitted, injection-molded, Sofbelt battery modules protect cells and intercell connections against harsh field abuse.
· Agelessly flexible, soft body-molded, foam-cushioned belt assures lifetime comfort. Soft rounded edges extend beyond mounted battery modules to conform to body contours.
· Individually calibrated precision ceramic cell sensors prevent overcharge, insure full charge.
· Switchable models, 14 volt for Camera. 30 volt for Light
Lifeguard Sofbelt/Battery Pack Data
All Lifeguard Battery Packs utilize the same components used in the 'Lifeguard' Sofbelt.
Battery Protection: Precision cell sensing system assures full charge without overcharge. Automatically discontinues charge mode when full charge is reached. 'Lifeguard' rate prevents self-discharge, heat build-up. Automatic reset circuit breaker disconnects battery from load in case of an external short. Non-resettable thermal fuse.
All 'Lifeguard' Sofbelts, Packs, and Standard Sofbelts may be fast charged with Cine 60's 'Lifeguard' Fast Chargers Models LC4-914, LC4-930, or 'Pro' Chargers Models 9400, 9400-U, Car Chargers Models 94DC12A, 94DC30. Standard Sofbelts have same features and construction of 'Lifeguard' Sofbelts except that the built-in charger is a14 hour overnite charge type and operates from 115VAC. 220 Volt operation is optional.
LIFEGUARD SOFBELTS/PACKS/ STANDARD SOFBELTS
Built-in 'Lifeguard' Charger Charge Time: 4hours for 4Am p& 8Amp Batteries, 7hours for 7Amp & 14 Amp Batteries. Charge Rate: 1Amp, 'Lifeguard' Rate: 150mA Regulation: Line and load regulation Construction: Line-isolated, High Frequency System Charger Cord Integral Operating Voltage: 95-135V/193-250V Switchable
Volts/Amps 12V 4A 12V 7A 12V 14A 13.2V 4A 13.2V 7A 13.2V 8A 13.2V 14A 14V 4A 14V 4A 14V 7A 14V 7A 14V 8A 14V 8A
14V 14A 14V 14A
30V 4A
30V 7A
30V 4A14V 8A
30V 7A/14V 14A
Selector Switch
Output Connector Arrangement
XLR5-31 XLR5-31 XLR5-31. Charge Switch
XLR5-31 XLR5-31 XLR5-31, Charge Switch XLR5-31. Charge Switch
XLR5-31
XLR4-31 XLR5-31
XLR4-31 XLR5-31, Charge Switch
XLR4-31. Charge Switch XLR5-31 Charge Connector
XLR5-31. Charge Switch
XLR4-31. Charge Switch XLR5-31 Charge Connector Amp AN3102-12S-3S XLR5-31 Charge Connector
Amp AN3102-12S-3S XLR5-31 Charge Connector Amp AN3102-12S-3S 130V) XLR5-31 114V1 Selector Switch Amp AN3102-12S-3S 130V) XLR5-31 114V0
Sofbelt Lifeguard Cato LS1204 LS1207
LS1214 LS1304 L51307
LS1308 LS1314 LS1404
LS1404TK LS1407 LS1407TK LS1408 LS1408TK
Sofbeit Standard Cato S1204 S1207
S1214 S1304 S1307
S1308 S1314 S1404
S1404TK S1407 S1407TK S1408 S1408TK
Weight 5', lbs. 72 lbs.
14 lbs. 5'.? lbs. 6tbs.
11 lbs. 15 lbs. 6lbs.
6lbs. 8lbs. 8lbs. 11 lbs. 11 lbs.
LS1414 LS1414TK
S1414 S1414TK
15 lbs. 15 lbs.
LS3004
S3004
11/2 lbs.
LS3007
S3007
15 lbs
LS3014
S3014
11',/z lbs.
LS3017
S3017
15 lbs
'Lifeguard Charger is separate It is not built- into these Battery Packs
Lifeguard Battery Pack
Case Style Size/Weight
LP9107* LP9707*
'B' 4lbs. 'C' 6lbs.
LF'9727
E' 13 lbs.
L1'9108* LP9708
'C 51;2 lbs. 0' 8lbs.
LP9128
IT 10 lbs.
LP9728 ·E* 15 lbs.
LP91(6*
'C 5..lbs
LP9106TK* LP9706
'C 5',.;lbs ' D' 8lbs.
LP9706TK
0' 8lbs.
LP9126
D' 10 lbs.
LP9126TK
0' 10 lbs.
LP9726 LP9726TK
f 15 lbs. E 15 lbs.
LP9004TK
0' 11 lbs.
LP9007
E 14 lbs
LP9014
TS 11 lbs.
LP9017 'E 15 lbs
VC-40
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (21 2) 586-8782 Telex 645647
BATTERY BELTS & CHARGERS FOR PANASONIC & JVC CAMERAS
Why ... Cine 60's Battery Belt?
· You wear it. Its not carried. More comfort. Better balance. · More power than attached equipment batteries · Longer life. It will outlive any Pack style nickel-cadmium battery because of
extremely low cell-to-cell heat transfer. · Always full battery power in cold weather by wearing it under clothing. · Equipment becomes easier to carry by eliminating attached battery's weight. · Unimpeded freedom of movement assured by uniform weight distribution. · Versatility. ABattery Belt can be used to run any equipment that is battery-
powered. It never becomes obsolete. · It can live forever. As battery parts wear out, they can be replaced from the
most complete Battery Parts Inventory ever maintained by abattery manufacturer.
Battery Belt Specifications There are two types of Battery Belts, the Standard Battery Belt (cannot be fast charged), and the Fast Charge Battery Belt. Both have 115 volt built-in overnite chargers and are equipped with circuit breakers. Fast Charge Battery Belts, Series 'FC', are equipped with precision ceramic ' Lifeguard' cell sensors to
permit safe 1or 2hour fast charging. An external Fast Charger is required for fast charging PC' Battery Belts.
Panasonic Run Time ( In Hours)
Model No.
Battery Cable couled(c). straight(s) 4Amps
AK710. 750. 760 ( 12V)
6478(c) 59.00 20
NV-8400 ( 12V)
NV-8410 ( 12V)
64130JVC(s) 4900 35
6400JVC(s) 4900 41
NV-8420 ( 12V) NV-9400 ( 12V)
E4OONV2(s) 4900 3.8 6400JVC(s) 4900 3.0
NV-9450 ( 12V) CT-700 ( 12V)
PV2100. 2300.3000 ( 12V1
6408(c) 59.00 2.5 6401TS2(s) 49.00 10
6401PV2(s) 49.00 3.5
Wv555, wv888 (13.2V) WV777 ( 13.2V) WV3085/NV3085 ( 12V) WV3060/70/NV8420 ( 12V) WV3180/3230/ NV8420 ( 12V) WV3400/NV8420 (12V) WV3600/WV3890/WV3990 ( 13 2V1 WV3700/WV3800/WV3900 112V)
64WV5(s) 7280 28
64WV7(s) 72.00 2.3 6400JVC(s) 4810 2.0
640ONV2(s) eon 28
640ONV2 48.01) 27 640ONV2 49.00 27 6478(c) 59/10 40 6478(c) 59.03 28
BATTERY CAPACITIES 7Amps 8Amps 14 Amps
3.0
40
60
66
70
120
70
82
14.0
6.0
8.0
120
4.7
60
9.4
375
5.0
7.5
18
20
36
56
70
120
46
57
9.2
38
47
76
35
40
70
46
57
92
43
53
84
43
53
84
60
80
120
46
57
92
JVC Run Time ( In Hours)
JVC
Battery Cable
Model No coiled(cl. straight(s) 4Amps
KY-310-U
6408(c)
359.00 2.2
KY-900-U
6408(c)
591)0 1.8
KY-950-U
6408(c)
59110 1.8
KY-1900-U
6408(c)
59.03 2.8
KY-2000-U
6408(c)
5900 2.0
KY-2700-U CV-8800-U
64081c1
6408)M
59,C0 2.5 5900 1.25
S-62-U S- 100-U
6401PV2(s) 6401PV2(s)
49.o) 3.1 4900 3.1
CR-4400-U/LU (UO 6400JVC(s) 49-0) 30
(LU) 6411(C) 5900
CR-4700-U
6408(c)
Hs 22
H13-2200-U
6401J7(s)
5911 4.5
HR-2650-U BR-6200-U
6401J8(s) 6401J8(s)
59.03 45 59130 4.5
HR-4100-U HRC-3U/GZ-S3 TM-41A- U TM-22-U
6400JVC(s) 6401J3(s) 6400JVC(s) 6401J7(s)
4900 4.5 59130 2.4 49.00 30 59.00 1.6
12 Volt Battery Capacities
7Amps 8Amps 14 Amps
3.4
4.5
6.8
2.7
3.3
5.3
2.7
3.3
53
4.8
5.6
96
3.5
4.0
70
4.0
5.0
8.0
2.0
2.5
4.0
5.0
6.3
10 0
5.0
6.3
10.0
4.7
6.0
9.4
3.6
4.5
7.2
7.0
8.8
13.3
7.0
8.8
13.3
7.0
8.8
13.3
7.0
8.8
13.3
4.1
4.8
8.1
5.4
6.0
10.8
2.6
3.3
5.3
Battery Belt Catalog Numbers & Prices (connecting cables listed above)
12 Volt Battery Capacities
Read down column for Cat. No.
4Amps
7Amps
8Amps
14 Amps
Standard Charge Battery Belt
g6307 $412.00 :: 7007 $555.00
g6327 $628.00 (47027 $ 979.00
2-Output Std. Chge. Battery Belt Fast Charge Battery Belt
erB-124S 465.00 # B- 127S 611.00 g8307FC 456.00 #7007FC 596.00
gB128S 680.00
43-1214S 995.00
g8327FC 672.00 # 7027FC 1010.00
Fast Charge Sofbelt:
HS- 1204 522.00 gS-1207 7.00 # S-1208 731.00 # S-1214 930.00
F.C. Lifeguard Sot belt
trl S-1204 612.03 gLS-1207 777.00 # LS- 1208 82C.00 # LS- 1214 1020130
Fast Charger Catalog Numbers & Prices (for the FC belts listed above(
1Hour Fast Charger:
Mobile 12VDC 1Hr. Fast Charger: 2Hour Fast Charger:
Mobile 12VDC 2Hr Fast Charger
4Amos PRICE
::9400 $315130 9400-1.) 39500 gLC4-914 695.00 g94DC12A 395D0
7Amps
PRICE
8Amps PRICE
#9400 #9400-U #LC4-930
e94DC30
S31580 39500
85000
49500
#9400 #9400-11 gLC4-914
#94DC12A
$315110 39520 695.00
395.00
14 Amps PRICE
#9400 #9400-LI #LC4-930 #94C1C30
$31530 395013
850 .00
49500
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 41
1
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
0B5-KY19
JVC ON- CAMERA Et VTR BATTERIES
0135-12JVC
CBP2J5FC
Moo--
o
085-KY19 BATTERY
ON KY1900 CAMERA
I>
Cr--in
CBPA-2J CBPA-5
BJV
BP3XMie
BF3XM
JVC Battery & Battery Charger Selector
These Cine 60 batteries are designed specifically for running JVC Cameras and VTRs. On-Camera Batteries for JVC's KY310, KY9CO, KY950 and KY1900 Cameras are equipped with an integral T-fitting that permits mounting directly on the Camera. No bracket is needed. On-Camera Batteries for the KY2000 and KY2700 Cameras come with 3studs for snap mounting on the keyhole accessory bracket furnished by JVC. Connection to the camera's DC input is made with ashort XLR pigtail cable included with the battery. In
addition they are equipped with an auxiliary 5- pin XLR connector which can be used to power a12 Volt Sun-Gun or battery light at the same time the
camera is being powered. Alternately, when the camera is operating off the VTRs battery, this feature permits the use of the On-Camera Battery to run the Sun- Gun exclusively. All camera batteries are 12 Volts 4Amp-Hours and
BAC-19
OBHRC
with the appropriate Cine 60 battery cable may be used off the camera to run other 12 Volt equipment. Because of the precision ceramic 'Lifeguard' cell sensors used in these batteries, they may be safely and fully charged with various types of Nickel-Cadmium Battery Chargers including JVC's AC Adaptor Chargers #AA-050-Uand gAA-C19-U. Cine 60's Battery Chargers with Charging Adaptor may also be used to safely and fully charge JVC's Nickel-Cadmium Batteries. When in areas where AC power is not available
for battery charging, Cine 60's 12 VDC Mobile Car Fast Chargers can be used for charging JVC's and Cine 60's Nickel-Cadmium Batteries. JVC's #AA-050Li and #AA-C19-1J AC Adaptor Chargers can be used for charging Cine 60's
Batteries. # BAC-19 Charge Adapter is required. Charge Time: For Cine 60 OB Batteries -- 1"2 Hrs. with # AA-050-U; 2Hrs. with # AA-C19-U.
JVC Equip. Model r; KY-310-U
KY-900-U KY-950-U KY- 1900-U KY -2000-U KY -2700-U CR4400U/LU HP4000AU GC/PV4800U AV/GS4500 HR4100 TM41AU HRC-3U/GZS3
BATTERY CHARGERS FOR JVC's BATTERIES
VC- 42
Run Time Hm Battery Cat. a
1Hr. Fast Charger Cat. g
4Hr. Quik Charger Cat e
2.25
085-KY3
2.0
065-KY3
2.0
085-KY3
3.2
065-KY 19
2.0
065-12JVC
2.5
065-12JVC
9400. 9400-U LC4-914
NOTE For charging Cine 60's 0135-KY3. 0B5-KY19 & 085-12JVC w/JVC's F-20 Fast Charger. # BF3XM Charge adaptor is used
LC4-914 (4 Batteries) LC-914
803-4/7
2.1
CBP2J5FC
3.5
CBP2J5FC
1.0
CBP2J5FC
1.5
CBP2J5FC
3.0
CBP2J5FC
2.1
CBP2J5FC
BP2500
LC4-914 NOTE: Use CBPA-2J Charge adaptor for BP2500. For remaining Cine 60 chargers use CBPA-5 Charge Adaptor.
LC4-914 (4 Batteries) LC-914
803-4/7
2.7
OBHRC
9400. 9400-U LC4-914
LC4-914 (4 Batteries) LC-914 803-4/7
JVC DCC-50-U
9400. 9400-U LC4-914
803-4/7. LC4-914 (4 Btryst LC-914
JVC DCC-19-U
LC4-914 NOTE: For 1Hr. or 4Hr charging DCC-50-U & DCC-19-U JVC Batteries. # 13JV Charge Adaptor is used.
803-4/7. LC-914 LC-4-914 (4 Blrys/2 Hrs.)
JVC B-20
9400. 9400-U. LC4-914 NOTE: For 1Hr. 4Hr. or 14 Hr charging JVC's B-20 battery-. #13P3XF Charge adaptor is used
LC4-914 (4Btrys) LC-914. 803-4/7
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
14 Hr. Charger Cat e 4.Q-1
1Hr. 12 VDC Mobile Fast Charger Cat n
94DC12A
CBP-2J (2 Batteries)
40-10
4.0-108 2.0-10B
94DC16
CBPA-2J is
required 94DC12A
94DC12A 94DC16
4.0-10
94DC12A
e\
630 Ninth , venue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
AMPEX/PANASONIC
·
BATTERIES/CABLES
Ampex/Panasonic Battery Data
These batteries, with the specified battery cables, will operate the Ampex and Panasonic equipment listed
below. The run time figures given are based upon the manufacturer's power ratings. Temperature, state of charge, and other factors vary these figures. The Battery and Cable Data for the Ampex ARC-10 and Panasonic AU/AK100 Recams is the same. Later versions of Panasonic's WV-777, WV-888, WV-555 cameras may have a4-pin XLR DC input connector. If so, use Cine 60's 46408 Battery Cable for these cameras, not those listed below.
Ampex/Panasonic Run Time ( In Hours)
Model No.
Battery Cable cailed(c),straight(s)
BCC14, BCC20 ( 14.4V)
6473(c)
AU/AK100, ARC-10 ( 13.2V)
6408(c)
VPR-5 ( 14.4V)
6477(c)
VPR-20 ( 14.4V)
6431(c)
FPC-10 ( 14.4V)
6408(c)
FPR-10 ( 13.2V)
6408(c)
BCC-4 (9.6V)
6404AMP(c)
AK710, 750, 760 ( 12V)
6478(c)
NV-8400 ( 12V)
6400JVC(s)
NV-8410 ( 12V)
6400JVC(s)
NV-8420 ( 12V)
640ONV2(s)
NV-9400 ( 12V)
6400JVC(s)
NV-9450 ( 12V)
6408(c)
CT-700 ( 12V)
6401T92(s)
PV2100, 2300, 3000 ( 12V)
6401PV2(s)
WV555, WV888 ( 13.2V)
64WV5(s)
WV777 ( 13.2V)
64WV7(s)
WV3085/NV3085 ( 12V)
6400JVC(s)
WV3060/70/NV8420 ( 12V)
640ONV2(s)
WV3180/3230/NV8420(12V)
640ONV2
WV3400/NV8420 ( 12V)
640ONV2
WV3600/WV3890/WV3990 ( 13 2V)
6478(c)
WV3700/WV3800/WV3900 ( 12V)
6478(c)
BATTERY CAPACITIES 4Amps 7Amps 8Amps 14 Amps 20 Amps
1.5
2.5
3.0
5.0
8.5
1.0
1.7
2.0
3.4
5.7
1.3
2.1
2.6
4.3
7.2
0.7
1.1
1.4
2.3
3.8
3.2
5.2
6.4
10.0
16.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
12.0
20.0
For Run Time Refer to NEC MNC61A Battery Data
2.0
3.0
4.0
6.0
108
3.5
5.6
7.0
12.0
20.0
4.1
7.0
8.2
14.0
23.5
3.8
6.0
8.0
12.0
20.0
3.0
4.7
6.0
9.4
17.2
2.5
375
5.0
7.5
12.5
1.0
1.8
2.0
3.6
6.1
3.5
5.6
7.0
12.0
20.0
2.8
4.6
5.7
9.2
14.2
2.3
3.8
4.7
7.6
11.7
2.0
3.5
4.0
7.0
11.7
2.8
4.6
5.7
9.2
14.2
2.7
4.3
5.3
8.4
13.4
2.7
4.3
5.3
8.4
13.4
4.0
6.0
8.0
12.0
20.0
2.8
4.6
87
9.2
14.2
Cine 60 Ampex/Panasonic On- Camera Batteries
Cine 60 On-Camera batteries teatuie battery belt style construction. This results in substantially less cell heat generation as compared lo conventional battery packs or blocks, thus providing considerably longer battery life. Ali On-Camera, CC types are equipped with a5-pin auxiliary power output plug that can directly power Cine 60's 14.4 Volt Sun-Gun at the same time the camera is being powered from an integral pigtail vkich mates with the Panasonic or Ampex DC input connector. Batteries will mount on Panasonic's or Ampex's OEM keyhole brackets and may be recharged with the OEM banana plug equipped battery chargers using Cine 60's #BF3XM Charge Adaptors. OnCamera battery 40C-14, 14.4V is used on the Ampex FPC-10 and Panasonic AK100 Cameras. 40C-13P, 13.2V is used on all other Panasonic cameras equipped with the 4WV-PS35S Battery Bracket. Refer to 4Amp column above for run time.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-43
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
SONY BATTERY BELTS/ PACKS/CABLES
Sony Battery Belt/Pack Data
The various batteries listed below provide along-lived reliable source of power for Sony equipment. The battery cables specified provide connection of all Cine 60 batteries to the DC inputs of the Sony equipment. Run time (per charge) is based upon Sony's operating voltages and power ratings. Temperature, state of charge, and other factors may vary these figures. In place of the 12 Volt and 13.2 Volt batteries listed below, anew device, Cine 60's Model No. VR-X in-line Voltage Adaptor permits using 14.4 Volt batteries instead. Connected in-line, it converts 14.4 Volts to 13.5 Volts. With it, a14.4 Volt battery can be running aBetacam at 13.5 Volts while simultaneously powering the new low-drain camera-mounted 14.4 Volt Sun-Gun with 14.4 Volts Use of the VR-X minimizes the need for 12 Volt or 13.2 Volt battery power in the facility to run Sony equipment rated at 36 Watts or less; enhances the use of 14 Volt Sun-Guns (drain 4.86 Amps vs. 8.33 Amps for 12 or 30 Volt Sun-Guns, apower savings of over 3.4 Amps...enough power to run aBetacam an extra 2hours); broadens the application of Cine 60's switchable 30V/14V Batteries for most battery power requirements. This Cine 60 concept of using 14.4 Volts for all Sony Cameras, VTR, and lighting power needs provides apractical approach to reducing the cost of battery power while maintaining the high standard of reliability and long life.
Sony Battery Catalog Nos.
Read down column for Cat. No. Std Chge Btry Belt
2-Output Ski Chge Btly Belt FC Battery Belt
FC Sofbelt
FC Lifeguard Sofbelt
Std. Chge Btry Pack
2- Output Std Chge Btry. Pack
FC. Battery Pack
F C Lifeguard Btry Pack
4
7
8
10
14
Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps
12V #6307 #7007 #6327
132V
06308 . 7008 .6328
14 4V .6306 .7006 06326
. 7027 . 7028 .7026
20 Amps
12V . B- 124S .B-1275 08-128S .6-1214S
12V .8307FC .7007FC .8327FC 13 2V .8308FC . 7008FC .8328FC 14 4V .8306FC .7006FC .8326FC
. 7027FC . 7CQ8FC . 7026FC
12V .S-1204 .S-1207 .S-1208 132V .S-1304 .S-1307 .S-1308 14 4V 0S-1404 .S-1407 .S-1408
.5-1214 0S-1314 .S-1414
12V MS- 1204 .LS- 1207 0LS-1208 . LS- 1214
13 2V .LS- 1304 .LS- 1307 uLS-1308 .LS- 1314
14 4V aLS-1404 olS-1407 . LS- 1408
4S-1414
12V #9107 .9707 .9127
132V
09108 .9708 .9128
14 4V #9106 097136 .9126
.9727 .20-120 .9728 .20-130 .9726 .20-140
12V 0P- 124S 0P- 127S .1)-128S .P-1210 .P- 1214S .20-120/2
12V .9107FC .9707FC .9127FC 132V .9108FC .9708FC .9328FC
14 4V .91C6FC .9706FC .9126FC
.9727FC .9728FC
.9726FC
12V .LP-9107 . 1..P-9707 aLP-9127 132V .LP-9108 . LP-9708 . LP-9128 14 4V .LP-9106 . LP-9706 0LP-9126
0LP-9727 0LP-9728 0LP-9726
Sony Run Time ( in hrs.) w/Battery Belts & Packs
Sony Model No.
Oper. Volt.
BVP-110
14.4
BVP-250
14.4
BVP-300
14.4
BVP-330
14.4
BVP-1/CA3
14.4
BVP-3 / CA3
14.4
BVV-1 /VA- 1 13.2
BVH-500
12
BVW-1
13.2
BVW-3
13.2
BVW-20
12
BVM-4050
12
PVM-4030
12
PVM-8000
12
RSCiSVm-1010 12
RSC-1010
12
SVM-1010
12
SEG-2000
12
AV-3400/AVC 12
AV-8400/AVC 12
DXC-M3
12
DXC-1600
12
DXC-1610
12
DXC-1640
12
4 Amps His.
4.0 2.7 2.7
2.7 4.0 2.7 4.8 0.8 2.4 1.7 1.7 2.6 2.6 1.0 1.3 3.6
2.0 2.4 2.0
2.0 2.6 2.0 18 3.8
BATTERY CAPACITIES
7
8 10
14
Amps Amps Amps Amps
His. Hrs. Hrs. Hrs.
6.5 8.0 10.0 13.0
4.4 5.4 6.8 8.5
4.4 5.4 6.8 8.5
4.4 5.4 6.8 8.5
6.5 8.0 10.0 13.0
4.4 5.4 6.8 8.5
7.8 9.5 12.0 15.0
1.3
1.6
2.0
2.6
18 4.7 6.0 7.5
2.7 3.3 4.2 5.3
2.7 3.3 4.2 5.3
4.3 5.3 6.6 8.6
4.3 5.3 6.6 8.6
1.8 2.0 2.9 3.6
2.1
2.6
3.2
4.2
5.9 7.2 9.1 11.8
3.1 3.8 4.8 6.2
3.9 4.8 5.9 7.7
3.4 4.0 5.7 6.8
3.4 4.0 5.7 6.8
4.3 5.3 6.6 8.6
3.4 4.0 5.7 6.8 6.5 7.6 10.9 13.0
6.5 7.6 10.9 13.0
20 Amps Hrs.
Btry. Cable coiled(c)
straight(s)
20.0
4475(c)
13.7 #6475(c)
13.7
4475(c)
117
4475(c)
20.0
n6475(c)
13.7 #6475(c)
24.0
4475(c)
4.0 #6475(c)
12.0 #6475(c)
8.5
4475(c)
8.5 #6475(c)
13.3 #6400W(s)
13.3 #6400W(s)
57 #6400KVG(s)
6.5 #6400G(s)
18.2 #6400H(s)
9.6 #6400G(s)
11.8 #6400J(s)
11.4 #6400DXC(s)
11.4 #6400DXC(s)
13.3 #6400M3(s)
11.4 #6400DXC(s) 21.7 #6400V0B(s)
21.7 #6400V0B(s)
DXC-1800 DXC-6000 BVP-200 BVU-50
BVU-100
BVU-110
12
3.8
6.5
7.6 10.9 13.0 21.7 #6400M3(s)
12
2.0
3.2 4.0
5.0 6.5 10.0 #6400M3(s)
12
2.0
3.2
4.0
5.0
6.5 10.0 #6428(c)
12
3.5
6.0
7.0 10.0 13.0 20.0 #6475(c)
12
1.8 3.0 3.6
5.1
6.0 10.2 #6400V0B(s)
12
3.5
6.0
7.0 10.0 13.0 20.0
n6475(c)
VO-3800 VO-4800
12
1.6
2.6 12
4.6 5.2 9.1 #6400V0B(s)
12
3.5
6.0
7.0 10.0 13.0 20.1 4400DXCIs)
SL-23000000/ HVC 12
42.70
73.64
49.40 151..77 165..82 2131.54 #6400DXC(s)
SLO-340 KV -8000G
12
2.0
3.4
4.0
5.7
6.8 11.4 #6400DXC(s)
12
1.0
1.8 2.0 2.9 3.6 5.7 #6400KVG(s)
VC-44
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
1
7-1
630 Ninth Avenue
New York, NY 10036
(212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
RCA BATTERIES/CABLES/ POWER SUPPLY/ACCESSORIES
RCA Battery Belts/Packs/On-Camera/VTR Battery Data
These Battery Belts, Packs and On-Camera Battery are for operating RCA's cameras, camera/recorders, and HR-1020 recorder on 14.4 Volts. Original RCA battery
cables will mate these batteries' power output connector. RCA's Charger MI-55711781 (Cine 60's #9400B) can be used to charge the 4A and 7A Belts and Packs as well as the OB4-14 Camera Battery. It can also be used to recharge the 8A and 14A batteries ( which utilize an XLR 5-pin charge connector) by converting the Charger's 4-pin XLR to a5-pin XLR with Cine 60's connector adaptor #4P-5P. Similarly Cine 60's Cat. No. 9400 Charger's 5-pin XLR connector can be adapted to 4-pin with the Cat. No. 55P-44P connector adaptor to permit its use with RCA's batteries. The Run Time ( per charge) figures given below are based upon RCA's power ratings. Temperature, state or charge, and other factors may vary these figures. Cine 60's Cat. No. 94AC14 AC Power Supply is designed to operate the RCA equipment listed below using the specified power supply cable.
RCA MODELP
RCA RUN TIME (In Hours)
BATTERY
BATTERY CAPACITIES
POWER
CABLE
SUPPLY CABLE
Coiled)ci
(straight 8It.]
Straight(s)
4A 7A BA 10A I4A 20A
Models
TK-76
6476(c)
1.5 2.4 3.0 4.29 4.8 8.58
PS6476
TK-713B TK-76C
6476(c)
1.2 1.9 2.4 3.44 3.8 6.87
1.0 1.6 2.0 2.9 3.2 5.7
TK-86
6486(s)
TK-710
6478TK(c)
NCR -MICR-2 6400R(s)
1.7 2.6 3.26 4.3 5.2 8.7 2.6 3.9 4.9 6.6 7.9 13.2 1.4 2.1 2.7 3.5 4.3 7.1
PS6486 PS6478TK PS640OR
HC-1/11C-2 64861s)
2.1 3.1 3.7 5.2 6.3 10.5
PS6486
NR-I
6408B(c)
4.4 6.6 8.3 11.1 13.3 22.2
PS6408
HR-1020
6411B(c)
3.0 4.7 6.0 8.6 9.4 172
PS6411
RCA BATTERY SELECTOR Read down ailumn or Cat e
Standard Charge Battery Belt Fast Charge Battery Bell Fast Charge SofbeN F.C. Lifeguard &Obeli
Standard Charge Battery Pack Fast Charge Battery Pack F.C. Lifeguard Battery Pack
BATTERY CATALOG NUMBERS
4A
7A
84
10A
14A
20A
63068
700613
63268
70268
83068FC 70068FC 83268FC
7026BFC
S-14041K S- 14071K S- 14081K
S- 14141K
LS-14041K LS-14071K LS-14081K
LS-14141K
91068
97068
912613 P-14108 97268 20-1408
910613FC 9706BFC 9126BFC
97268FC
LP-91061K LP-9706TK LP-91261K
LP-979261K
RCA BATTERY F.C. SELECTOR Read down column tor Cat. IHour Fast Charger
Mobile 12VDC 1Hr. Fast Charger 2Hair Fast Charger
Mobile 12VDC 2Hair Fast Charger
BATTERY CHARGER CATALOG NUMBERS
4A
7A
RA
10A
144
204
94008 9400UB LC4-9148
WO 9400U LC4-930
DIDC 128
940C30
940013 9400U8 LC,4-91413
9400 940)U LC4-930
DIDC1213
940C30
On-Camera Battery, #0114-14 For all RCA Cameras. Mounts on any key- hole type battery bracket.
Equipped with 4-pin XLR connector for power output. Requires shorty cable from battery to camera's DC input. Battery Belt style modular construction for maximum cell cooling provides longest life. Reliable XLR connection for trouble-free operation. Refer to 4A column above for Run Time and Battery
Chargers. Use #LC4-914B for recharging 4batteries in 4hours: #9401-4 for 14 hour overnite charging. Shorty Cable #SHB-6476 for TK-76 Cameras.
SHB-6486 for TK-86, HC- 1, HC-2Cameras, #SHB-64781K for TK710 Camera.
#NMB-76
On-Camera Battery Bracket for TK-76 Cameras. Al) metal type. Supplied complete with hardware. No camera modification required.
#94AC14 Power Supply Switching type. line/load regulated, remote sensing, well-filtered. Input: 110/220V 50/60Hz. DC Output: 13.5V 4Amps continuous: 5Amps intermittent: 8Amps momentary. Output Cable: Plug-in 8ft. long. Dimensions: 414" x31 /2 "x81 /2 ". Weight: 5lbs. with 12 ft. input cable.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-45
11-1Ril4 7-1
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
HITACHI/SHARP/THOMSON BATTERIES/CABLES
Battery Belt/Pack Data
These batteries provide along-lived, reliable, trouble-free, and economical source of power for the Hitachi, Sharp, and Thomson equipment. Run Time (per charge) is based upon the manufacturer's power ratings. Temperature, state of charge, and other factors may vary these figures. The battery cables specified provide connection of all Cine 60 batteries to the external DC inputs of the listed equipment. Cine 60's Switchable Battery Belts or Packs in lieu of those listed below. The Switchables provide 8/14 Amps of power for camera/ VTR. and 14.4V Sun-Guns as well as 30V 4/7 Amps of power when needed for 30V Sun-Gun operation.
,
#3014, #3014FC Switchable Battery Belt
Battery Catalog Numbers
Read down column tor Cat. No.
Std Chge Buy Belt
4
7
8
10
14
Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps
12V .6307 . 7007 4327 . 7027
13 2V =6308 . 7008 .6328 . 7028 14 4V .6306 = 7006 .6326 . 7026
20 Amps
2-Output Std Chge Btry Belt FC Battery Belt
FC Sotbed
FC Lifeguard Sofbeit
Sto Chge By Pack
2- Output Std Chge Btry Pack FC Battery pace
12V .8-124S . B- 127S ·= 8-1285 . 13-1214S
12V .8307FC . 7007FC .8327FC . 7027FC 13 TV .8308FC .7008FC .83213FC . 7028FC 14 4V .8306FC . 7006FC .8326FC . 7026FC
'IN =S-1204 .S-1207 . S-1208 13 2V = S-1304 . S.1307 = S-1308 14 4V =S-1404 .S-1407 .S-1408
. S-1214 5-1314
..S-1414
12V . IS-1204 . LS- 1207 . LS- 1208 132V . LS- 1304 . LS- 1307 . LS- 1308 144V = LS- 1404 . LS- 1407 =LS- 1408
= LS- 1214 ..LLSS-- 11341144
12V 132V 14 4V
.9107 . 9108 .9106
=9707 .9127
.9727
=9708 .9128 .9728
.9706 .9126 .9726
. 20-120 . 20-130 . 20-140
12V .P- 124S ·= 1)-127S .P- 128S .P.1210 = 13.1214S . 20-120/2
12 V .9107 FC .9707 FC .9127F C 132V .9108FC .97G8FC .9328FC
144V .9106FC =9706FC =91261-C
.9727FC
. 9728FC
.9726FC
FLiCfeguard Btry Pack
12V = LP-9107 = LP-9707 . LP-9127 13 2V = LP-9108 . LP-9708 . LP-9128
144V =LP-9106 . LP-9706 = LP-9126
. LP-9727 . LP-9728
= LP-9726
Hitachi, Sharp, Thomson Run Time (In Hours)
Hitachi Model No. EP- 10 (13 2V)
FP-11 ( 13.2V) FP- 15 ( 13.2V)
Battery Cable
4
7
8
14
20
coiled(c), straighqs1 Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps
6406(c)
306 5.26 6.13 10.5 17.6
6406(c)
3.06 5.26 6.13 10.5 17.6
6406(c)
2.56 4.4
5.1
8.8 14.67
FP-20S ( 12V)
6406(c)
2.0
3.2
4.0
6.4
11.4
FP-21 (14.4V)
6406(c)
2.3
3.9
4.6 7.85 13.0
FP-22 ( 14.4V)
6406(c)
2.0 3.46 4.0
6.9
11.5
FP-40S ( 12V)
6406(c)
2.2
3.5
4.4
7.0 12.5
FP- 1020 ( 12V)
6406(c)
1.8
2.8
3.6
5.6 10.2
FP- 1030 ( 12V)
6407(c)
35 5.6
7.0 11.2 20.0
FP-3060A ( 12V)
6406(c)
27
43
5.4
8.6 15.3
FP-30600 ( 12V)
6406(c)
35
56
7.0 11.2 20.0
HR- 100 ( 12V)
6421(c)
0.625 1.0
1.25 2.0
3.6
SK-80 ( 14AV)
6405(s)
2.0
3.2 ( Requires No.CA-80)
SK-80A ( 1-12V) SK-81 ( 14.4V)
6405(s) 6406(c)
2.3 3.7 (Requires No. CA-80)
2.2
3.4
4.3
6.8 11.6
SK-90 ( 12V)
6434(c)
1.1
1.9
2.2
3.8
6.7
SK-91 ( 14.4V)
6434(c)
2.0
3.3
4.0
6.6 11.7
SK-97 (14.4V) SR-1 ( 12V) SR-10 ( 12V) SV-340 ( 12V) V-059B ( 12V)
6406(c) 64SR1(s) 64SR1(s) 6400JVC(s) 6459(s)
2.0
3.3
40
6.6 11.7
3.4
5.1
6.8 10.2 17.0
2.5 3.75 5.0
7.5
12.5
3.0
4.7
6.0
9.4 17.0
5.0
8.0
10.0 15.6 25.0
V-089 ( 12V)
6489(s)
16
2.6
3.2
5.0
8.0
V-099 ( 12V)
6489(s)
Sharp XC300/500 ( 12V)
6418(s)
Sharp XC320/520/530 112V) 6409(c)
Sharp XC700 ( 144V) Sharp xC800 ( 14 ovi
6XC700(c) 66440088((cC))
Sharp XC900 ( 144V)
16
26
3.2
5.0
8.0
1.4
22
2.8
44
8.0
16
26
32
5.2
9.1
23.00
3445
40
6680
191..04
24
34
4.8
6.9
11.5
Sharp XA600 (12V)
Sharp XA9C0 (12V)
Thomson MC-602 ( 14.4V)
Thomson MC-301 See JVC KY-2700. Thomson MC-611
6480(s) 6469(s) 6412(c)
40
6.0
8.0
12.0 20.0
4.0
60
8.0
120 20.0
2.3
3.4
4.6
6.9
11.5
MC- 501 See Sony BVP-250. MC-601. See Sony BVP-300. MC- 701. See Sony BVP-330.
MC- 613 See Sony BVP-3 BVW-3
VC- 46
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
BATTERIES/CABLES
FOR IKEGAMI/PHILIPS/ASACA/CEI/CROSSPOINT/FERNSEH/ HARRIS/NEC/TOSHIBA/TEKTRONICS/VIDEOTEK
Why ... Cine 60's Battery Belt?
. You wear it. It's not carried. More comfort. Better balance . More power than attached equipment batteries . Longer life. It will outlive any Pack style nickel-cadmium battery because of the
extremely low cell-to-cell heat transfer
. Always full battery power in cold weather by wearing it under clothing
. Equipment becomes easier to carry by eliminating attached battery's weight . Unimpeded freedom of movement assured by uniform weight distribution
. Versatility. ABattery Belt can be used to run any equipment that is batterypowered. It never becomes obsolete.
. It can live forever. As battery parts wear out they can be replaced from the most
complete Battery Parts Inventory ever maintained by abattery manufacturer.
#3014, #3014FC Switchable Battery Belt
Equipment Run Time (In Hours)
Run Time ( per charge) is based upon the manufacturer's power ratings. Temperature, state of charge, and other factors may vary these figures. The battery cables specified provide connection of all Cine 60 batteries to the external DC inputs of the listed equipment. Those having the letters 'OE' in the catalog number signify that the cable is open ended and requires the manufacturer's mating DC cable connector.
EQUIPMENT MODEL NO.
Battery Cable
ASACA ASW-100 ( 12V)
64020E(c)
ASACA ACC-2000 (±7.2V) 64030E(c)
ASACA ACC-3000 (±14.4V) 64030E(c)
CEI 310/330 (14.4V)
6412(c)
CEP 340 (14.4V)
6412(c)
Crosspoint 6104A (14.4V) 6419(s)
Fernseh KCA-90 (±7.2V) 6423(c)
Fernseh KCA-100 (12V) Fernseh KCN (±14.4V)
Fernseh KBF-1 (14.4V)
6424(c)
6400KCN(s) 6400KBF(s)
Fernseh BCN-5 (12V)
6422(s)
Fernseh BCN-20 (12V)
6430(s)
Fernseh BCN-21 ( 12V) Harris TC-90 ( 14.4V)
6400BCN(s) 6488(s)
Ikegami HL-33/35 (±12V) 6410(c)
Ikegami EC-35 (14.4V)
6471(c)
Ikegami HL-37 (±7.2V)
6400IKE(c)
Ikegami HL-51 (± 12V)
6472(c)
Ikegami HL-77 (±7.2V) Ikegami HL-78 ( 14.4V)
6400IKE(c) 6471(c)
4 7 8 14 20 Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps 0.5 0.86 1.0 1.7 2.86
1.6 2.5 3.2 5.0 9.1 1.4 2.4
0.5 0.8 1.0 1.6 2.8 0.7 1.1 1.4 2.2 4.0
1.0 1.6 3.0 1.6 2.5 3.2 5.0 8.0 1.6 2.5 3.2 5.0 8.0 0.75 1.25 1.6 2.5 3.2 5.0 8.0
1.4 2.24 2.8 4.5 7.4
1.0 1.4 2.0 3.8 1.7 2.85 3.3 5.7 9.5 2.0 3.3 4.0 6.6 11.7
1.0 1.6 2.0 3.1 4.0 6.2 10.5 1.0 1.6 2.0 3.2 5.7
1.0 1.6 1.0 1.6 2.0 3.2 5.7 2.0 3.1 4.0 6.2 10.5
EQUIPMENT MODEL NO. Ikegami HL-79 (14.4V) Ikegami HL-83 (14.4V) Ikegami ITC-240 (± 12V) Ikegami ITC-350 ( 14.4V) Ikegami HL-351 (± 12V) Ikegami ITC-730 (14.4V) NEC MNC-60/61A (±9.6V)
NEC MNC-71CP (±7.2V) NEC MNC-80/81A (12V) NEC SPC-3 (12V) Philips LDK-11 (± 12V)
Philips LDK-14 ( 14.4V) Philips VD0-80 (r12V) Tektronics 1740 ( 13.2V)
Toshiba PK-36 12V) Toshiba PK-39 (- 14.4V) Toshiba PK-60 ( 14.4V) Vdotek VM8/RM8 (12V) Vdotek VM5A/RM5A ( 12V)
Battery Cable 6471(c) 6483(s) 64030E 6425(c) 6410-1 6471(c) 6404AMP(c)
6417-4(c) 6420(c) 64SP3(s)
BCAM(s)
6473(c) 6414-4(c) T1740(s)
64PK(s) 6474(c) 6474B(c) 6400KVG(s) 6401KVG(s)
4 7 8 14 20 Amps Amps Amps Amps Amps 2.0 3.1 4.0 6.2 10.5 2.2 3.4 4.3 6.8 12.0 1.75 2.8 3.1 5.0 6.3 10.0 16.0 1.0 1.6
2.1 3.3 4.2 6.7 12.0 1.4 2.24
1.6 2.5 3.2 5.0 9.1
1.75 2.8 3.5 5.6 10.0 3.4 5.1 6.8 10.2 17.0
1.5 2.4
1.5 2.5 3.0 5.0 8.5 1.9 3.1 1.7 2.6 3.5 5.2 8.8
0.9 1.33 1.5 2.5 3.0 5.0 8.5 2.8 4.2 5.6 8.3 14.0
1.2 2.0 2.4 4.0 6.7 2.7 4.0 5.4 8.5 14.3
Battery Selector Standard Charge Battery Belt
11
Fast Charge Battery Belt
le
Fast Charge Sof belt
Battery Catalog Numbers 4Amps 7Amps 8Amps 14 Amps
12V 13.2V 14.4V ±7.2V
#6307 #6308 #6306 #6314
#7007 #7008 #7006 #7014
#6327 #6328 #6326 #6324
#7027 #7028 #7026 #7024
12V #8307FC #7007FC #8327FC ±7.2V #8314FC #7014FC #8324FC 13.2V #8308FC #7008FC #8328FC 14.4V #8306FC #7006FC #8326FC
#7027FC #7024FC #7028FC #7026FC
12V #S-1204 #S-1207 #5-1208 13.2V #S-1304 #S-1307 #5-1308 14.4V #5-1404 #S-1407 #S-1408
#S-1214 us- 1314 4-1414
San Selector Fast Charge Lifeguard SAIL
Standard Charge Battery Pack
.9
Fast Charge Battery Pack
FC Lifeguard Battery Pack
4Amps
Battery Catalog Numbers 7Amps 8Amps 14 Amps
12V #LS- 1204 13.2V #LS-1304 14.4V #LS- 1404
#LS- 1207 #LS-1208 # LS- 1214 #LS-1307 #LS- 1308 # L5-1314 #LS- 1407 # L5-1408 #LS- 1414
12V #9107
13.2V #9108 14.41/ #9106 ±7.2V #9114
#9707 #9127 #9727 #9708 #9128 #9728 #9706 #9126 #9726 #9714 #9124 #9724
12V #9107FC 13.2V #9108FC 14.4V #9106FC ±7.2V #9114FC
#9707FC #9127FC #9727FC #9708FC #9128FC #9728FC #9706FC #9126FC #9726FC #9714FC #9124FC #9724FC
12V #LP-9107 #LP-9707 #LP-9127 #LP-9727
13.2V #LP-9108 #LP-9708 #LP-9128 #LP-9728
14.4V #LP-9106 #LP-9706 .#LP-9126 # LP-9726 Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
20 Amps
#20-120 #20-130 #20-140
VC-47
11-1R14
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
FILM/VIDEO/SCIENTIFIC "PRODUCTION" BATTERIES
Compact, well-designed and built batteries providing reliable power. convenience and durability for commercials' production, TV. Theatrical Feature Film Production, and scientific on location recording. Most common types are set forth below, for other models refer to Battery Belt and Battery Pack pages in
this catalog.
#P- 124S
t$9108/2FC
12 Volt Double-Duty Battery Packs
Equipped with two (2) 5-pin XLR power output connectors to provide the convenience of two batteries in one. Supplied with the charger built-in the 8,
10. 14. and 20A models. external with the 4A and 7A models which also feature battery belt style construction for longer life. Abuilt-in 15 Amp Automatic Reset Circuit Breaker protects the equipment and the battery in case of an ' external' short. Available in standard charge only. The 20A
model has ahandgrip. All other models come with ashoulder strap and
handgrip.
#9712FC
Battery Rating 12V 4A 12V 7A 12V 8A 12V 10A 12V 14A 12V 20A
Catalog #
P-124S P- 127S P-128S P-1210 P- 1214S 20-120/2
#6312
Dimensi4o1ns111211anier-eWeight
31/e" x41 /2 "x51 /4 " Pe" x41 /2"x81/2"
41/2"x6" x10" 41 /2"x6" x10" 41 /2"x8" x10" 61 /2"x61 /4 "x143 /4 "
41/ 2 lbs. 71/ 2 lbs.
9lbs. 10 lbs. 13 lbs. 22 lbs.
Arri 35-3/35BL-3 13.2V High Voltage Battery Packs
Battery Rating
Catalog No.
Style/Wt Size/Lbs.
Use Fast Charger Model No.
For 12VDC. F.C. from Vehicle.
Use Model No.
F. C. Time
Equipped with two (2) 5- pin XLR power output connectors to provide the convenience of two
batteries in one. Higher voltage assures high speed operation. More power. When used with
13.2V 4A 13.2V 7A 13.2V 8A
9108/2FC 9708/2FC 9128/2FC
*C'/6 176 *E ./10
9400. 9400-U. LC4-914 LC4-930
94DC12A 94DC30
1hour 2hours
1hour
BL-3. 2nd output connector may be used to
13.2V 10A
P-1310
'E'/10
power an accessory, heater burley. etc. Has a built-in overnite charger. charger cord, automatic reset circuit breaker and is available in arange
13.2V 14A 13.2V 20A
9728/2FC 'D'/13 20-130/2 'F'124
9400. 94CO-U. LC4-930
94DC30
2hours
of capacities from 4Amps to 20 Amps. All models. except the 10 Amp and 20 Amp units may be fast charged.
Battery Rating
Std. Chge. Battery Pack
Cat. No.
Fast Chge.
Battery Pack Cat. No.
28 Volt Photo-Instrumentation Battery Belts & Packs
3S power output connector. Belt types are available in 4or 7Amps, Pack types in 4. 7or 10 Amps. Both, except the 10 Amp Pack, may be
Provide 28 Volts at 4. 7or 10 Amps depending on
obtained with fast charge capability as well as
model. Equipped with built-in Overnite Charger.
standard charge. Acoil-cord battery cable with
Charger Cord. Circuit Breaker. and AN-3102-12S-
one end open for adding the equipment manufacturer's mating DC
Style/Wt. Std. Chge. Fast Chge.
Use Fast
For Fast
Fast Charging input connector is also
Size/Lbs. Battery Belt Battery Belt
Cat No.
Cat No.
Charger Model No.
Charging From Vehicle. Use#
Time
available. Cat. No. 6422MW.
28V 4A
9112
9112FC
E / 10
6312
8312FC 9400 9400-U
94DC30
1Hour
28V 7A
9712
9712FC
D/13
7012
7012FC 9400.9400-U
94DC30
2Hours
28V 10A
10-228
Moviecam 24V Battery Belts and Packs
Built to Moviecam specifications. Equipped with 4-pin XLR wired for Moviecam. 12/24V Selector Switch. Built-in Overnite Charger. Charger Cord. Automatic Reset Circuit Breaker. Comes with shoulder strap and handgrip.
Swintek Communicator Battery Pack
Swintek Communicator Battery Pack. Will run Swintek 12 hours on one charge. Has built-in Overnite Charger. Charger Cord. Automatic Reset Circuit Breaker. Comes with integral 2ft. long battery cable terminated in 5-pin XLR which mates with Swintek connector. 12 Volt 1200 mAH rating. Weighs 2 lbs. Measures Pe" x41/2"x534". With built-in Belt Loop, it can be worn on pantsbelt. Catalog No. S-1200.
Battery Rating 24V 4A/12V BA 24V 7A/12V 14A 24V 1fiA/ 12V ?(JA
Battery Pack 9116BFC 9716BFC 12-224B
Pack Style/Wt. Size/Lbs. .C./9
.D713
F'122
Battery Belt 8316BFC 7016BFC
Use F.C. Modele 9400B. 9400-UB 9400B. 9400-UB
For Fast Charging Use Model# 94DC3013 940C3OB
From Vehicle. F. C. Time 1Hour
2Hours
dursibm
Canon Lens Battery Pack
Permits remote servo focus lens operation using battery power. Will operate Lens for approximately 5hours on one charge. Has built-in Overnite Charger. Charger Cord. Automatic Reset Circuit Breaker. Battery-toLens power cables available. One for remote servo focus operation from adistance of 4
ft.: the other. from amaximum distance of 12 ft. Comes with shoulder strap and waistbelt loops. Weighs 2lbs.. measures 2" x5'2" x6". Battery Power Cable Cat. No. 4LCA ft. length: No. 12LCA 12 ft. length. For J13X9B & J15X9.5
Lens. Cat. No. PP13/15.
VC-48
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
Battery Belts and Packs
The following listing provides aguide for most of the film cameras. Battery Belts and Packs for use with Aaton. Bolex, Canon, etc are also available.
MOTION PICTURE EQUIPMENT BATTERIES Et ACCESSORIES
UNIVERSAL BATTERY BELTS AND PACKS:
Wt.
6305
Belt.
8,4V-8AH/12V/16 8V-4A11. Standard Banana Jacks
Lbs,
384- pin Canons, Selector Switch
7
9105
Pak,
8.4V-8AH/12V/16 8V-4AH, Standard 5- pin Canon.
Selector Switch
6
7065
Belt.
84V-14AH/ 12V/ 16.8V-7AH. Standard Banana
Jacks. 38 4- pin canons. Selector Switch
10
9705
Pak.
84V-14AH/12V/16.8V-7AH. Standard 5- pin Canon
Selector Switch
Universals can be supplied with 5and 4-pin connectors in lieu of the 3and 4- pin. Add -Sto the above catalog numbers.
FOR ECLAIR NPR, ACL, ARRI 16SR, 16BL, 35BL, 35-111:
C.t. a
Type a User
8303FC Belt, 12V-4AH, Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon, 5-Din
7003FC 9103
Belt, Pak,
Cannon, Charge Switch 12V-7AH, Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon, 5- pin
Cannon. Charge Switch 12V-4AH, Standard, 3- pin Cannon, 4- pin Cannon
FOR BEAULIEU R- 16B:
Ctit #
Type IL Desc.
6300 8300FC 9100 9100FC
Belt, Belt, Pak, Pak,
7.2V-4AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon connector 7.2 11-4AI-1, Fast Charge, 5-pin Cannon connector 72V-4AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon connector 72V-4AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon connector
FOR ARRI 16S, 16M:
8425
9401SM
6301 8301FC 7001 7001FC 9101 9101FC 9701 9701FC
Pak,
84v- 2.5A1-i, Standard, 5-pin Cannon connector (No Charger)
OyemIte Charger for 08425 Pak, High Frequency Type, 115 Volts
Belt, Belt, Belt,
8.4V.4AH, Standard, Banana Jacks
8.4V-4AH, Fast Charge, 5-pin Cannon connector
8 4V-4AH, Standard, Banana Jacks
Belt, 8.4V-4AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon connector Pak, 8.4V-4AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon connector
Pak, Pak,
8.4V-4AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon connector 84V-7AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon connector
Pak, 8.4V-4AH. Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon connector
FOR ARRI 16S, 16M, 35-2C:
8302 8302FC 7002 7002FC 9102FC
Belt, Belt, Belt, Belt, Pak,
8.4V-8AH/16.8V·4AH, Standard, Banana Jacks, Selector Switch
8.4V-8AH/16.8V-4AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon, Selector Switch
8.4V-14A1-1/16.8V-7AH, Standard, Banana Jacks,
Selector Switch 8.4V-14AH/16.8V-7AH, Fast Charge. 5- pin
Cannon, Selector Switch 8.4V-8AH/16.8V-4AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon
connector
FOR ARRI 16S, 16M, 16SR, 16BL, 35BL, 35-111:
8307
7007
9107 9707
Belt,
Belt,
Pak, Pak,
8.4V/12V-4AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon, Banana Jacks
8.4V/12V-7AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon, Banana Jacks
8.4V112V-4AH, Standard, 5-pin Cannon connector 8 4V/12V.7AH, Standard, 5-pin Cannon connector
FOR ARRI 16SR, 16BL, 35BL, 35.111:
8307FC 7007FC 8327 8327FC
7027
7027FC
9107FC 9707FC 9127 9127FC
Belt, Belt, Belt, Belt,
Belt,
Belt,
Pak, Pak, Pak, Pak,
12V-4AH, Fast Charge, 5-pin Cannon connector 12V-7AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon connector
12V-8AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon, Charge Switch 12V-8AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch 12V-14AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch 12V-14AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch
12V-4AH, Fast Charge, 5-pin Cannon connector
12V-7AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon connector 12V-8AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon, Charge Switch 12V- BAH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon,
Wt. Lbs,
4 4 3 3
0/1 Lbs.
2
10 Oz. 41 /4 41 /2 6 6 3 3 5 5
Wt. Lbs.
7
7
10
10
6
Wt Lbs
51 /2
71 /2 4 6
Wt. Lbi. 51 /4 71 /2 10
10
14
14 4 6 9
9103FC
9703 9703FC
Pak,
Pak, Pak
12V-4AH, Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon, 5- pin Cannon, Charge Switch
12V.7AH, Standard, 3- pin Cannon, 4- pin Cannon 12V-7AH, Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon. 5- pin
Cannon, Charge Switch
FOR ARRI 35BL TYPE I, 16SR, 16BL:
6306 630613 8306FC
8306BFC 7006 700613 7006FC
7006BFC 6326
Belt, Belt, Belt,
Belt, Belt, Belt, Belt,
Belt, Belt,
6326B
Belt,
8326FC Belt,
8326BFC Belt,
7026
Belt,
70266
Belt,
7026FC Belt,
7026BFC Belt,
9106 910613 9106FC 99710066BFC
970613 9706FC 9708BFC 9126
Pak, Pak,
Pak, Pak,
Pak, Pak,
Pak, Pak,
Pak,
912613
Pak,
9126FC Pak,
912613FC 9726
Pak, Pak,
97268
Pak,
9726FC Pak, 9726BFC Pak,
14.4V-4AH, Standard 5- pin Cannon 14 4V-4AH, Standard 4- pin Cannor 14 4V-4AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon
14.4V-4AH, Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon 14.4V-7AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon 14.4V.7AH, Standard, 4- pin Cannon 14.4V-7AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon
14.4V-7AH, Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon 14.4V-8AH, Standard. 5- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch 144V- BAH, Standard 4- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch
14 4V-8AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon. Charge Switch
14.4V-8AH, Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon. 5- pin Cannon, Charge Switch
14.4V-14AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch 14 4V.14AH, Standard, 4- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch 14.4V·14AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch 14.4V-14AH, Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon,
5- pin Cannon, Charge Switch 14.4V-4AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon 14.4V.4AH, Standard. 4- pin Cannon
14.4V-4AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon 14.4V.4AH, Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon 14.4V·7AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon 14.4V-7AH, Standard,, 4- pin Cannon
14 4V-7AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon 14.4V.7AH, Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon
14.4V-8AH, Standard,, 5- pin Cannon, Charge Switch
14.4V-8AH.Standard, 4- pin Cannon, Charge Switch
14.4V-8AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch 14.4V-8AH, Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon,
5- pin Cannon, Charge Switch 14.4V-14AH, StandarC. 5- pin Cannon.
Charge Switch 14.4V-14AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch 14.4V.14AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch 14.4V·14AH. Fast Charge, 4- pin Cannon,
5- pin Cannon, Charge Switch
Charge Switch
9
9727
Pak, 12V-14AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch
13
9727FC Pak, 12V-14AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon,
Charge Switch
13
FOR ECLAIR NPR, ACL, ARRI 16BL, 35BL,16SR, 16S, 16M:
6303
Belt, 84V/12V-4AH Standard, 3- pin Cannon, 4.pin
WI. Lbs.
Cannon, Banana Jacks
51 /2
7003
Belt, 8.4V/12V-7AH Standard, 3- pin Cannon, 4- pin
Cannon, Banana Jacks
71 /2
FOR CP-16, GSMO, MITCHELL S- 35R, HULCHER, PANAFLEX & Other 24V. Cameras:
6310 8310FC 7010 7010FC 9110 9110FC 9710 9710FC 10-224
Belt, Belt, Belt, Belt, Pak, Pak Pak, Pak, Pak,
24V-4AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon connector 24V-4AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon connector 24V-7AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon connector 24V.7AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon connector 24V-4AH, Standard, 5-pin Cannon connector 24V.4AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon connector 24V-7AH, Standard, 5- pin Cannon connector 24V-7AH, Fast Charge, 5- pin Cannon connector 24V-10AH. Standard. 5- pin Cannon connector
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Wt Lbs
7' , 4
4 6
6
WI Lbs
6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8
11
11
15
15
15
15 51/ 2 51/ 2 51/ 2 51/ 2
8 8 8 8
10
10
10
10
14
14
14
4
wt. Lb.. 10 10 14 14
13 13 22
VC-49
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
BATTERIES AND ACCESSORIES
Shoulder Pods
SPECIACANONS:
CAT. NO. 8700
CAT. NO. 8701
Camera or Equrpment Plate 2' ." 01." x .. Weight 4ors
1 ." . 2'.' x '. Weight 2ors
Mounting Provisron Mounhng
9116 2 ." Long Channel
14 Long Channel
131 4168 '.-20.
-dia flat head screws supplied tor both models
Construction
Both models are precision machined aluminum alloy
black anodized cork non- slip surface
Interlocking
Base Assembly
3'. 05, x .. Weoghl 15 ots 2' ,- . I' i> `. WeIghl 8ors
Mounting Provision ... I6 6 ' 020 Mounting Holes '.- 16 6 '..20 Mounlong Holes
Locking Mechanism
Both Model, machined nickel steel dovetail with double pushbutton
safely release
Constructron
Both Models are precision machmeo aluminum alloy complete
Snaplok Mount Cal No 6700 or Cal No 6701
Camer aif ['moment
Plate Only
Cal No 6700A or 67016
Mounting Screws
'.-20 Cal No 67SS1 16 Cal No 67SS2
Snaplok Mount
Mount your camera or device in asecond. Consists of aprecision machined dovetail plate for the camera or device and an interlocking base assembly for the tripod, shoulder pod or support. Allows quick mounting and removal. Once the dovetail plate has been attached to the camera or device and the interlocking base to the support, tripod or shoulder pod, no screws, cranks or levers are required to instantly mount or demount the camera or device. Two models are available, Cat. No. 6700 for medium to heavy weight equipment and Cat. No. 6701 for lightweight equipment.
Lightweight. Adjustable to most body sizes, with soft cushioned shoulder and body supports. Fully adjustable to keep camera in perfect shooting position. Easily removable between takes. Cat. No. 6758-BL for Arri 16BL, 16SR & most flat base video cameras. Requires Arri Offset Eye Piece. Cat. No, 67581K Same as 6758-BL except that body pad comes down to abdomen. For 11(76 and similar Video Cameras. Cat. No. 6750 for Arri 16 and similar flat base
cameras. Cat. No. 6751 for Arri 35.
Focusing Device
Cat. No. 6504. For uninterrupted easy follow focusing by camera man or assistant. Includes 3interchangeable lens scales and 3lens gears.
Cat. No. 6910 'C' Lens Mount Adaptor Cat No. 6910B Bayonet* Lens Mount Adaptor
Lens Mount Adaptors
Precision machined lens mounts permitting the use of Arri mounted lens on cameras with 'C' mounts and Bayonet' mounts.
Offset Motor Base
Agear box providing aflat camera base and low center of gravity for Arri 35. Essential for professional tripod mounting. Cat. No. 6900 Mounts constant or variable speed motors next to camera eliminating need for hi-hat. Cat. No. 6900A -Same as #6900. But with built-in contacts for automatic clapstick on Arri 3511CGS.
Bealieu Battery Pack
Direct replacement for Bealieu battery. 1200mAH capacity provides approximately 2000 ft. pr charge. Compact 41/2"x11/2"x3". Weight 1lb. Equipped with built-in charger, charging cable, camera power cable and carrying pouch permitting wearing it on the waistbelt. Cat. No. 9000-B
Zoom Drives
Remarkably compact zoom motors. Provide
smooth, economical, variable speed zooming at the touch of abutton. Complete with transistorized, rechargeable power supply/hand control unit.
Cat. No. 6601 for Angenieux 12-120 Cat. No. 6602 for Angenieux 12-240 Cat. No. 6603 for Angenieux 25-250 Cat. No. 6604 for Angenieux 9.5-95 Cat. No. 6605 for Angenieux 9.5-57 Cat. No. 6606 for Canon 12-120 Cat. No. 6607 for Zeiss 10-100 Cat. No. 6608 for Angenieux 10-150 Cat. No. 6354 Replacement Charging
Cord for power supply Cat. No. 6355 Replacement Zoom Cable
6Ft Coil-Cord Battery Cables
6401S For Am 16S with 2-pronged molded plug 6401S-5 For Arri 16S with 5-pin battery connector 6401M For Arri 16M with 2-pronged molded plug 6401M-5 For Arri 16M with 5-pin battery connector 6401BL For Arri 16BL with 4-pin battery connector 6401BL-5For Arri 16BL with 5-pin battery connector 6401 SR For Arri 169, 35BL 35-III Cameras 6402V For Arri 35 for variable speed motor 6402V-5 For Arri 35 with 5-pin battery connector 6402C For Arri 35 for constant speed motor 6402C-5 For Arri 35S with 5-pin battery connector 6403 With 5-pin Canon on 1end, with other end
open for equipment mating connector Cables not listed can be made to special order.
VC-50
2AH 16SR On- Board Battery
Custom-designed with special 2AH Cells providing a30% increase in run time per charge. Totally compatible with Arri SR system. No adaptor. special mounting. or special connections required. Double Charger will recharge two batteries in 7to 8hours. At end of full charge, the charging channel cuts off automatically. Battery Cat. No. 12V/2A Weight: 2lbs. Dimensions .2'2" x35/8"x41/2" Dual Charger Cat. No. D-NC2000 Input: 110/220V Automatic Controls: ( per channel) LED/Start Button, Automatic Cut Off Weight: 1'2 lbs. Dimensions: 2" x3' 2" x41/2"
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
O Clear-Com. Intercom systems
Clear- Corn has everything you need to put together a reliable, versatile intercom system...there's no other that can match the results of our 15 years experience providing multi- channel communications to theatre, television, musical, commercial and industrial facilities.
HARD- WIRED INTERCOMS Li 1-8 channels · portable, console and rack- mount
stations · circuit breaker- protected, no-fail power
supplies D volume and sidetone controls at every
station · interconnect with standard mic cable
· 4-channel intercom with 12 x4 assignment matrix
· pre-settable talk and listen monitor functions
D visual "call" signalling D stage announce and remote paging
KB- 112 " Push-to-Ta.k" Speaker Stator
BATTERY - POWERED INTERCOMS Ii ideal for ENG, EFP, and other remote
applications, indoors or out E portable system runs on 12-32 volts DC D rugged, lightweight belt- packs; 1- or
2-channels
SYSTEM INTERFACES Lii rack- mount and portable D interfaces Clear-Com with any 2-, 3-, or
4-wire cameras and lines D individual "transmit" and " receive"
controls D headset test tones for system balancing D AC- 10H holding coil lets you answer
telephone without lifting receiver RTS-type system interface
INTERCOM HEADSETS E complete range of styles for all low- or
high- noise environments D lightweight and rugged E built-in mic switches in flexible booms LI binaural or monaural headphones
PS- 20 Two- Channel Power Supply AC- 10H Telephone Interface
WIRELESS INTERCOM
INTERFACE E partial full- duplex base station
D 1/4 mile range
D "call" signalling D interfaces with hard-wired intercoms
Intercom Headsets (CC- 35 & CC- 55)
IFB SYSTEM (PROGRAM INTERRUPT) L] designed for studio or remote
applications perfect for sportscasters, news commentators, musicians
D accesses up to 8talent El one or two channels of program, select
between continuous or interrupted feed
compact Talent Receiver with miniature earphone D "split-feed" Talent Receiver with binaural headset output
D rack- mount IFB Controller D works with all Clear-Com Intercoms
CP-300 Belt Pack CS- 210 Two- Channel Main Station
CC- 75B
IFB System DLC Series - 4 intercom & 4 IFB channels shown
1111 17th Street CI San Francisco. CA 94107 11 415-861-6666 7 TWX: 910-372-1087 EXPORT DIVISION: P.O. Box 3021:3 Walnut Creek. CA 9456 415-932-8134 L Telex: 176340 CLEAR-COM WNCK
COHU, INC.
5755 Kearny Villa Road P.O. Box 85623 San Diego, CA 92138 (619) 277-6700 TWX 910-335-1244
TV CAMERA
MODEL 2850C LOW LIGHT, SELF CONTAINED ENVIRONMENTAL TV CAMERAS
· Fully Automatic Operation -- Automatic 640,000 to 1Light Range, Beam Control, Black Level, Gain Control with 20 dB Range and Bandwidth Reduction, plus Remote Control Capability
·Gamma Correction -- Selectable 0.35, 0.5, 0.7 or 1.0
·700 TV Lines Horizontal Center Resolution Resolves 10- Shade Gray Scale with 0.05 Lumens/ft2 Highlight Illumination on Image Tube Faceplate
· Underscan and Overscan Capability ... White Peak Clipping ... Internal EIA RS- 170 or CCIR Sync, Jumper Selectable
· Peak to Average Detector for Automatic Light Control
·Dual 75- Ohm Selectable 1or 1.4 Volt Video Outputs
· Environment- Resistant, Sealed Housing with Purge Fitting, Operates under Adverse Conditions and Down to - 40°C
· Genlock
·Bright Light Limiter to Prevent Camera Being " Blinded"
·Options -- Screen splitter for Multiple Camera Display Cable Pre- Equalizer for Output No. 1Gives 4.5 dB of Signal Increase
The Cohu Model 2850C Low- Light Television Camera is designed for reliable, unattended, continuous- duty operation in awide variety of day and night monitoring or surveillance applications such as encountered in airports, factories, parking lots, gates, tunnels, bridges, and traffic areas. The cameras will operate automatically in light levels ranging from bright sunlight to moonlight. A camera can be aimed at direct sunlight, without damage to the tube target, and then aimed at a low- light level area and produce aclear, crisp picture.
2850C
A Bright Light Limiter circuit allows full camera performance under conditions where blooming from intense scene highlights would otherwise make the picture unsatisfactory. The level and amount of scene highlights affected are adjustable. Highlight level can be set from black to maximum white for best contrast and resolution. This feature makes the 2850C well suited for nighttime applications where automobile headlights, abright light being turned on, or aflashlight or spotlight can cause accidental or deliberate " blinding" of the camera.
Adverse environments ( wet or dry, and hot or cold) do not affect the operation of the cameras; they are self-contained and enclosed in environment- resistant housings. In addition to being environmentresistant, 2850C camera housings are tamper- proof; they have no exposed controls.
The camera has afully automatic black level compensation system to provide high contrast video over the light level range. Maximum accuracy of picture black level and white level is maintained with a keyed clamp that compensates for image tube dark current variations as afunction of the ambient temperature. An adjustable white peak clipper limits video amplitude.
Automatic operation and remote control capability are standard features on 2850C cameras. An automatic sensitivity control adjusts a motorized iris on the lens and adjusts the video gain for an optimum picture over awide range of scene illuminations. The iris can also be remotely controlled for manual operation in specific applications. A peak- to- average detector allows the automatic sensitivity circuitry to be set at full peak detection or full scene average detection, or any point in between. Optional remote controls are available for variable focal length ( zoom) lenses and accessories such as pan and tilt units.
SYNC OPERATION ( factory installed) 2800C-200 EIA RS- 170
-300 CCIR -500 Crystal Controlled EIA RS- 170 -600 Crystal Controlled CCIR ACCESSORY OPTIONS ( factory installed) 2800C-700 Screensplitter -900 Cable Pre- Equalizer -071 Front Removal Kit
VC-52
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COHU, INC.
5755 Kearny Villa Road P.O. Box 85623 San Diego, CA 92138 (619) 277-6700 TVVX 910-335-1244
8000 Series
Designed for reliable, unattended, continuousduty operation, the Cohu 8000 series High Resolution Television Camera System provides maximum stability, detailed video information, superior corner resolution, and optimum flatnesss of field. This versatile system has aseparate lightweight camera head and modularized camera control unit.
Typical applications which are ideal for use of the 8000 High Resolution System include virtually any instrumentation or monitoring need in medical, scientific, and industrial fields. The convenient small size and weight of the camera head allows interface with delicate instruments, such as laboratory microscopes. This "go-anywhere" convenience of the camera head, plus the ability to remotely locate the control unit through a single cable connection, suits numerous industrial closed-circuit television applications including inspection, measurement, and test chamber monitoring purposes.
FEATURES:
· 1" IMAGE TUBE for superior resolution quality. · AUTOMATIC SENSITIVITY over 10,000:1 light range. · FULLY SOLID-STATE, with exception of image tube.
· FET INPUT for clear, crisp, low-noise video. · CHOOSE: Up to 1749 lines/frame.
· 8, 16, or 32 MHz BANDWIDTHS, selectable.
· FRONT PANEL CONTROL of target, beam, focus, black level, and power.
· RENDERS ALL 10 EIA GRAY SHADES with only 0.05 footcandle illumination on image tube faceplate.
· LESS THAN 1.5% PICTURE DISTORTION. · ADJUSTABLE Overscan and Underscan, White Peak
Clipper, Gamma/Black Compressor, and Output Video.
· CCU CAN BE UP TO 2000 FEET from camera head. · FULLY PROTECTED with regulated power supplies and
automatic beam cut-off in the event of sweep failure. · TWO BNC VIDEO OUTPUT CONNECTORS. · OPERATES ON 115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz. OPTIONS:
· VARIABLE SCAN RATE GENERATOR MODULE witf, jumper selectable line- locked or crystal controlled synchronization.
· BLANKING GENERATOR MODULE operates from external sync pulse or EIA RS- 170, 330, or 343 video signal.
· SHADING CIRCUIT corrects for non- uniform response of lens and image tube.
HIGH- RESOLUTION TV/ CAMERA SYSTEMS
ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE: When ordering, specify EIA RS- 170 or CCIR sync.
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATIONS
Mounting
8 MHz
16 MHz 32 MHz
WITH Shading
Portable Cabinet 8008-030
Portable Cabinet 8008-031 Single Rackmount 8008-010 Single Rackmount 8008-011 Dua; Rackmount 8008-020 Dual Rackmount 8008-021
8016-030 8016-031 8016-010 8016-011 8016-020 8016-021
8032-030 8032-031 8032-010 8032-011 8032-020 8032-021
NO YES
NO YES
NO YES
8000-200 8000-300 8000-001
OPTIONAL MODULES
Variable Scan Synchronization Generator Blanking Generator Shading Circuit
CABLE from CCU to Camera Head (Specify length)
CA 218 CA 2186 CA 219 CA 2196
Standard Cable
Standard Cable with right-angle connector at camera head Superflex Cable Superflex Cable with right-angle connector at camera head
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-53
VIDEO
SUPPLY CORPORATION
148 Veterans Drive Northvale, NJ 07647
( 201) 767-7990 (800) 526-0242 Telex 13-5139
SI SEttERS
VIDEO CARRYING CASES
Aluminum- covered wood carrying cases provide maximum protection at the lightest weight and lowest cost.
CVC-300-B1 For all portable Beta and VHS recorders with AC adaptor. Comes with partition that allows using the case with many different video units. $139.95
CVC-400-VHS For all VHS and Beta Series II. $135.95
CVC-500E THE EVERYTHING CASE. Comes with layers of foam that allow you to cut out and custom fit cameras, decks, lenses, etc. to suit your needs. $139.95
Outside dimensions of above cases ( not including hardware): 21"L x16-1/2"W x7-1/4"H. Weight 16 lbs. Inside dimensions: 19-3/4"L x15"W x4-1/2"H.
a
tx>10
PROFESSIONAL GAFFERS KIT
UNIVERSAL- POLE SYSTEM
Unique lightweight pole system that offers unlimited possibilities for supporting lights, backgrounds or cameras. Poles and special clamps set up quickly and can be used floor to ceiling or horizontally between two walls.
Model No.
Closed
CUP- 1 Set of two Universal- Poles CUP- 3 Set of two Universal- Poles
47" 8'8"
Extensions interconnect for longer lengths.
Fully Extended
70" 11'
Price $ 99.00
119.00
VCR/VTR MAINTENANCE KIT
COMPREHENSIVE POWER BELT
Contents: 2rolls Silver Gaffers Tape
2" x60 yds.
1roll Silver Gaffers Tape
2" x10 yds.
1roll Black Gaffers Tape
2" x10 yds.
1roll White Gaffers Tape
2" x10 yds.
1roll Masking Tape
3/4 "x60 yds.
1roll Black Masking Tape
3/4 "x60 yds.
1roll Electrical Tape ( Vinyl) 1roll Friction Tape
3/4"x66 ft. 3/4"x60ft.
1roll Double Stick Foam Tape 1/2 "x36 yds.
1roll Cold Shrink Tape
1"x 10 fit.
1each Professional Electrician's Knife
1each Dulling Spray
1pkg. Reusable Cable Tie ( 100/pk)
PGK-1 $99.95
Kit contains all the items necessary to maintain VCRs/VTRs to professional standards. Supplied in convenient carry -along storage box. Contents: · 1each CVS-108 8 oz. can Professional Video Head
Cleaning Fluid · 1each FGJB 6oz. Dust- Off · 25 each CVS-505 Cellular- Foam VCR Cleaning Swabs
· 10 each CVS-504 Professional Video HeadCleaning Tools · 10 each CVS-508 Lint- Free Cloth Wipes · 1each CVS-506 Inspection Mirror with Light · Instructions
CVS-10K $49.95
High- quality battery belts for industrial and
educational video users. Economically priced alternative to broadcast- type power belts, while still maintaining high performance stan-
dards.
Features:
· Extremely durable leather
· Highest- quality NiCad cells · Built·in safety features · Flexible loom cell- to- cell continuity
· Simple trouble- free operation
Model No. CPB-127
Voltage 12V
Rating 7AH
Price
535.50
VC- 54
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COMPU=PROMPT TM Color Computerized Prompting Systems
OPERATOR'S CONSOLE
Microcomputer --8 bit, 6502 based, 2MHz, 64K RAM, ( CP-1000 series) 128K RAM ( 1130XM series), certified to comply with FCC class B limits, Part 15, silent operation.
Operator's Monitor- 7" full color with tuner and video inputs and outputs.
Controller -- Hand-held, cable may be extended, continuous speed control, speed ranges from 1/2 line to 30 lines per second, forward or reverse, start, stop, reset stopwatch.
Software -- COMPU = PROMPT: disk, ROM cartridge, instruction manual, training guide. Word Processor: ROM cartridge, instruction manual.
Text Buffer--CP-1000 series: holds over 1000 lines of text, approximately 20 minutes reading time before needing to reload additional text from disk. CP-1130 XM series: 5500 lines of text, 1hr. 40 minutes reading time.
Floppy Disk Storage-- Disk drive ( for text storage) 5-1/4" single sided, double density, 96 or 180 kilobytes.
Automatic Text Formatting-- Formats 20 character lines, will not break up words, choice of left-justified or centered text.
Character Set Editor-- Operator can create original fonts to be saved to disk and loaded as needed. Several prepared fonts are included, such as Spanish, French, Japanese and several English- style fonts.
On- Screen Indicators--Stopwatch/timer to 1/10 second, line counter, relative position indicator.
Editing--COMPU = PROMPT: On- screen line editor, insert/delete/replace. Word Processor: insert/delete/ replace characters, move, duplicate, delete blocks of text, and search and replace.
Random Access-- Instant reset to beginning of text, instant access for up to 35 pre-set text locations.
Find-- Enter up to 20 characters and instantly find the first occurence in the script.
Printer ( optional) -- Several models available, print speed up to 160 characters per second.
Printer Interface -- Centronics standard parallel with 4K buffer.
Modem Communications ( optional) -- Standard ASCII code. 300 or 1200 baud optional. RS232C Serial Interface ( optional) -- for use with modem.
Video Distribution Amplifier ( optional) -- Provides clean video signal to additional monitors ( one input, four outputs). If more than four outputs are necessary, additional amplifiers can be cascaded.
Power Requirements -- 110V AC 60 Hz. Power Consumption -- 139W Video Output -- 1V p/p, noninterlaced NTSC compatible color composite video. Case -- ATA -rated with wheels, converts to operator console. Dimensions: 26"H x 14.5"D x 19.5W (66cmH x36cmD x49.5cmW) Weight: 37 lbs., ( 16.8 kg) System Weight ( in cases) CP-1000: 75.5 lbs., ( 34.2 kg) CP-2000: 151 lbs., ( 68.4kg)
COMPU = PROMPT OPERATOR'S CONSOLE
COMPU = PROMPT DELUXE COLOR CAMERA
MOUNT SYSTEM
DELUXE COLOR CAMERA MOUNT SYSTEM
Quick Setup -- The COMPU = PROMPT Camera Mount System was designed with a small 7" x 6" baseplate which can conveniently be left on the camera when the prompter is not in use. Once the plate is attached, mounting or removing the system is done in 2-3 minutes. Compatible With Virtually All Camera Systems -- COMPU = PROMPT's mount is completely adjustable on all axes, allowing a wide variety of cameras and lenses to be accommodated.
Balanced Mounting System -- Every size camera will remain perfectly balanced thanks to the ingeniously adaptable counter-weight system created by COMPU = PROMPT. Easy Access To Lens -- COMPU = PROMPT's swing-away mirror allows access to the lens for lens changes or cleaning.
Compact Design For Easy and Safe Storage -- COMPU = PROMPT's specially designed beamsplitter assembly and anti-glare hood fold flat for storage.
MONITOR
· 14" full color, 24.4 lb., ( 11.1 kg.) ·Modified to increase contrast and enhance read-
ability. ·Normal or mirror- image display controlled by rear-
mounted switch. ·Overscan switch vertically enlarges text on the
display screen by 30%· ·Power and video supplied to monitor via duplex
cable consisting of 18 gauge grounded power cable and Beldon RG59 video cable attached every 18". · Power requirement: 110V 60 Hz. · Power Consumption: 58W ·Video Input: 1V p/p NTSC compatible color composite video.
BEAM-SPLITTER ASSEMBLY
·Anti-glare Hood: Made of black Velcro cloth and aluminum, adjustable on three axes.
·Reflective Glass: Negligible optical distortion, 1/2 stop light loss, 70% transmission, 30% reflectance.
·Weight: 5.75 lbs., ( 2.6 kg.)
COUNTERWEIGHTS
·Lead weights with lockdown knob. ·Weight: 22 lbs. each ( 10 kg.)
CASES ( optional)
COMPU= PROMPT Deluxe Camera Mount System is contained in two ATA-rated cases. Large case has wheels and contains monitor, steel rods, cables, hood and mirror assembly. Dimensions -22.5"W x20.51) x23.5"H (57cmW x52cmD x60cmH) Small case contains brass rods, camera mount baseplate and counterweights. Dimensions. 13.5"W x 11"D x 10.5"H (34.5cmW s28cmD x26.5cmH)
SHIPPING WEIGHT
Large Case: 84 lbs., ( 38.1 kg.) Small Case .79 lbs., ( 35.8 kg.)
National Sales and Rental
COMPU = PROMPT PODIUM MONITOR SYSTEM ALSO AVAILABLE
COMPU = PROMPT
FIRST IN COMPUTERIZED PROMPTING 940 N. Orange Dr. Suite 209 Los Angeles, CA 90038 (213) 461-3113
TORONTO -- CIDNEY
440 West 47th Street Suite 2-B New York, NY 10036 (212) 333-7595
VC- 55
BATTERY BELTS
(With Built-In Chargers)
L
OLYMPIC L-13 12V, 13 AMPERE- HOURS (C4457) $279.95
These are the Finest Portable Power Sources available, with extra capacity for extended on- location use. They are made of top quality materials throughout, are very comfortable to wear and are extremely easy to operate and to recharge. Batteries are New Advanced-Technology Cells, made by Panasonic, which provide more running time per amperehour than batteries previously available. All components are Zipper-Accessible, and zipper has double closure devices so you can operate it from either end. Inner surfaces of belt are lined with a "Silky" material, for wearing comfort and to prevent friction damage to clothing. Two alternately-flashing
VIDEO
AND PHOTO
LIGHTING GUIDE
OLYMPIC L-20 12V, 20 AMPERE- HOURS (C4459) $329.95
LED Indicator Lights tell you when batteries need recharging. Older belts rely on mechanical- movement meters, which are easily damaged by dropping. Our Solid- State Electronic System is virtually shock- proof. Output receptacle is cigarette- lighter type. Battery charger is built into the belt, you can't misplace it or forget it! Use these belts to power your light ( or lights) alone, or to power your video camera and VCR, along with your light. You can power a 75- watt lamp for almost three hours with the Olympic L-20, and for almost two hours with the L-13 Model.
There are many more accessories available for the Mini- Cool than those shown on these three pages. Our complete line is illustrated in the Cool-Lux Professional Lighting Guide, a unique introduction to Video Lighting and the Mini- Cool System. This informative document ( 16 pages, full color) can save you many times its modest cost. To get your copy, send $3.50 to the address below. We will include aFREE Certificate worth $5.00 on any purchase of Mini- Cool Lights or Accessories.
(barrux lighting ind. inc.
5723 AUCKLAND AVE N HOLLYWOOD, CA 91601-2207
[818) 761-81E31
VC-56
DAVIS & SANFORD CO., INC.
24 Pleasant St. Box 1002 New Rochelle, NY 10802 ( 914) 632-1636
205 BVH UNIVERSAL FLUID HEAD
· Positive Tilt lock - Tilt
Tension Control in addition
to afull fluid system.
· Autoslip' provides self-
adjusting breakaway free pan
no knobs to adjust). Allows
smooth starts and stops on
all pans, even fast " swish"
pans.
· Extremely smooth pan and · Hydralok' concentric,
tilt movements.
· Camera platform sve x3.4".
hydraulic tilt lock/tension device insures safe locking in
· Leakproof and dustproof sealing
any position. · Designed to accept dual
· 3t," - 16 camera screw
handles, second handle
· Head weight 8pounds
Optional
$1164.00
F-10 FLUID HEAD
Load Capacity
10 lbs.
Tilt Angle
90° Up-90° Down
Pan Rotation
360°
Height
41 /2 "
Width Overall
3',2"
Length
Weight
1-1/3 lbs.
Platform Size 2" n2W'
$59.00
MODEL H-4 SPRING HEAD
Load Capoc?,
25 lbs
Tin Angie
·60'
Pan Rotation
360'
Height
4.4.·
Width
Length
Weight
3io lbs
Material & Finish
Black
Anodized Alum
Features · '0-20 Camera Screw
·Dual Counterbalancing
Springs
·Pan Handle locks both
tilt and pan ·
$99.00
MODEL MI4-1-S SPRING HEAD
Load Capacity
30 ills
Tilt Angle
60° UP- 90° Down
Pan Rotation
360'
\ i1::u1h
Height
Width
Length
Weight
lbs
Material & Finish
Black
Anodized Al um
·Spring loaded tilt to prevent camera dumping'
·Pan and tilt lock independently or each other
·pan handle with adiuslable angle tits ether side
·Leveling base allows 5 tilt in all directions
·Bubble level ·Friction drag adiustrnent ol pan
and till by spring loaded Control knobs
$148.00
MODEL CC CRADLE HEAD
Load Capacity
25 lbs
Tilt Angle · 45'
Pan Rotation
360'
Height Width
8.·
Length
9-
Weight
Sibs
Material & Finish Black Anodized Al um and Plated
Steel Cradle
Feat ures · Removable and adjustable camera plallown for
easy installation and perfect balance Holds tilt
without camera dumping
$84.00
MODEL MN-25 SPRING HEAD
Load Capacity
20 lbs
Tilt Angle
60 up- 90' Down
Pan Rotation
Height
Width Length Weight
360° 5'0"
62er lbs
Material A Finish
Clear
Anodized Alum
MODEL MN-2
4108.00
Same as above except without spring
488.00
MODEL HD-46 SPRING HEAD
Load Capacity Tilt Angle
Pan Rotation
50 it's 70 -Up- 90' Down
360
Height
Platform Size
Weight Material & Finish
6lbs
Slack
Anodized AluM
Internal Torsion Spring to prevent camera dumping
4182.00
MODEL 0 SPRING HEAD
L000 Cap..?, ' 0 lbs
To Angle · 60'
Pan %tali,
360'
Neigh?
Width
Length
deign?
lib
Material & Finish
Black
Anodized Alum
Features · Counterbalancing spring to prevent camera dumping
·Two carnea screw
locations
$42.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HEADS
MODEL FM-25 FLUID HEAD
Load Capacity
25 lbs.
Side Tilt
90° either side
Pan Rotation
360°
Height
Weight
5lbs.
Platform Size
4" x41/ 4 "
Features · 2yr. warranty · Dual handle capability
· Easily visible bubble level gauge
· Extremely smooth
pan 8 tilt movements
w/2 handles
$215.00
MODEL FM- 15
Same as FM- 25 but with lighter
viscosity fluid for cameras under
15 lbs
$215.00
MODEL DSLA LEVELING ADAPTOR
Load Capacity
50 lbs
Leveling adjustment
5°
Height
31/ 2 "
Diameter
6v,"
Weight
2lbs
Material & Finish Black anodized
aluminum
Quick and easy action. Locks
securely
$140.00
MODEL CM CRADLE HEAD
Load Capacity
50 lbs
Tilt Angle Pan Rotation
20 1 Up- 30' Down 360'
Height
Width
Length
1.1"
Weight
nos
Material & Finish
Black
Anodized Alum
$218.00
MODEL CS CRADLE HEAD
Same as above exrent
Load Capacity
00 r,
ength
10
Weight
$218.00
MODEL RTH
TWO-WAY TILT HEAD
Load Capacity Tilt Angle
eigg Rhotottaatl ion
10 lbs up- 90 - Down
360 '
Height
Width weeniiggghht t, h
22ellrb"
Material & Finish Anodized Aluamt
Features · ' Quick Change'
.CFarmcetroa ndragg
to
prevent camera dumping
$85.00
VC-57
dSi
VC-58
DAVIS & SANFORD CO., INC.
24 Pleasant St. Box 1002 New Rochelle, NY 10802 ( 914) 632-1636
THE CHALLENGER
MODEL DG/H4
TRIPOD/HEAD
load Capacity
25 lbs
Minimum Height
34"
Maximum Height
70"
Elevation Adjustment
16"
Geared Center Post
13/ 4 "Die
Leg Diameters Head Tilt Angles
1.8- PA"
60' Up90' Down
Spring Loaded Head
2 Springs
Head Pan Rotation
360*
Weight
8 lbs
Material & Finish
Clear and Black Anodized Alum
Se- Locking Gear Mechanism
$181.00
MODEL DG
·
Same as above except without
·
head
$130.00
DOLLYPOD
GEARED ELEVATION
TROLLEY
load Capably
25 lbs
Minimum Height
48"
Maximum Height
66"
Elevation Adjustment
18"
Geared Center Post
13/ 4 "Ora
One Section Leg
114" Dia
Wheels Weight
5" Dia 15 lbs
Material 8 Finish
Clear and Black Anodzed Aivrrr
$315.00
ale
THE COMPAC
MODEL CG GEAR ELEVATION
TRIPOD
Load Capacity
30 lbs
Minimum Height
32"
Maximum Height
67"
Elevation Adjustment
16"
Geared Center Post
13 /4 "Dia
Outer Leg Section Inner Leg Section
3 /4 " x 114"
Might
7lbs
Material 8 Finish
Clear and Black Anodized Alum.
Adjustable Flat or Pointed Feel
Accepts CW-1 Shp- On Wheels
$120.00
MODEL C
Same as above except with lilt
column center post
$97.00
MODEL AG GEARED ELEVATION TRIPOD
Load Capacity Minimum Height
50 lbs
Maximum Height
58"
Elevation Adiustment
20"
Geared Center Post Outer Leg Section Inner Leg Section Weight
13 /4 "Dia 23 /4 " x 11 /4 "
1- Dia 10 lbs
Material 8 Finish Clear and Black
Anodized Alum
Freeze-proot and stick- proof leg
clamps
$268.00
MODEL A
Sarre as above except with
'Floating Action" spring loaded
center post
$181.00
MODEL ETVG-W
GEARED ELEVATION TRIPOD
Load Capacity
75 lbs
Minimum Height
40"
Maximum Height
68"
Base Spread at Max Ht
60"
Base Spread at Min Ht
36"
Elevation Adjustment
18"
Geared Center Post
13/ 4 "Dra
Leg Diameters
1ix" x 2"
Wheel Diameter
Weight
15 lbs
Material 8 Finish
Clear and Black Anodized Alum
Available with wheels. wheels and spikes, or points
Spht-collar lock or leg extension
$20.00
MODEL D/0
LIFT COLUMN
TRIPOD/SPRING HEAD
Load Iaoanty
15 lbs
Minimum Height
30"
Maximum Height
64"
Elevation Adjustment Litt Center Post
18" 13/ 4 "Die
Leg Diameters Head Till Angle
r70" Spring
Loaded
Head Pan Rotation
360
Might
5 Ms
Material & Finish
Clear and Black Anodized Alum
· Two cantera screw locat.ons
MODEL DRG/0
$128.00
Same as above except iS
elevating post
$130.00
MODEL PSG- 34
GEARED ELEVATION
PEDESTAL
Load Capacity Minimum Height
100 lbs 34"
Maximum Height
55"
Elevation Adjustment
18"
Geared Center Post Weight
13 /4 "Die 30 lbs
Steel Center Column
4" Dia
Base Spread All Swivel Wheels
32" 5" Dia
Material
Cast Alum base steel tube
center post
Finish
Black Baked Enamel
S489.00
MODEL PS-30
Same as above except with
'Floating Action" spring loaded
center pose and central wheel
brake control
$409.00
TABLE OR CART
COLUMN/HEAD
MODEL DG/H4/TM
t °ad Cap.*,
25 lbs
Elevation Adjustment
16"
Geared Center Post Head Tilt Angles
13 /4 "Dia
60" Up90' Down
Spring Loaded Head Head Pan Rotation
2 springs 360°
Weight
5 lbs
Material & Finish
Clear and Black Anodized Alum
$160.00
REDITILT MODEL RIG
GEARED ELEVATION
TRIPOD/HEAD
Load Capacity
15 lbs
Minimum Height
211"
Maximum Height
65"
Elevation Adiustment
20"
Geared Center Post
I3/ 4 "Dia
Leg Diameters
Two-VVay Tilt Head · 90'
Head Pan Rotation
360
Weight Material 8. Finish
46 lbs
Clear and Black Anodized Alum
Head Features · " Quick Change" Camera Screw
· er gixr Drag · One handle locks
pan and tilt simultaneously · Removable Head
$182.00
REDITILT SUPER MODEL RIS
LIFT COLUMN TRIPOD/HEAD
.
lbs
Mill11111,1 Height
28"
Maximum Height
65"
Eievation Adjustment
20"
r.enter Post IKJ Diameters two My Tilt Head
13 /4 "Dia 13 /4 " x 13 /4 "
n90°
Head Pan Rotation
360'
VVeight Material a. Finish
43 /4 lbs Clear and Black Anodized Alum
· ' Ouick Change" Camera Screw
·Ifiction Drag Screw
· line handle locks pan and nIl simultaneously
· Reversible Center Post $99.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TRIPODS
MARK II
GEARED ELEVATION
TRIPOD
Loud Capacity Minimum Height
40 lbs.
40"
Maximum HeIght
84"
Elevation Adjustment
18"
Geared Center Post
VA" Dia,
Two-Section Leg Dia. 1kr" o 11/2 "
Weight
11 lbs.
Material & Finish Clear and Black
Anodized Alum
8257.00
MODEL BD
GEARED ELEVATION TRIPOD
Load Capacity
60 lbs.
Minimum Height
40"
Maximum Height
90"
Elevation Adjustment
30'
Geared Center Post
13/4 "Ora
Upper Leg Section
23/4 - x 114"
Lower Leg Section Weight
1" Dra 14 lbs
Material 8, Finish
Clear and Black Anodized Alum
Freeze.prool and stick- proof leg
clamps
$296.00
MODEL B
Same as above except with
'Floating Action spring loaded
center post
$205.00
MODEL DS- GS
GEARED ELEVATION
TRIPOD/SPRING HEAD
Load Capacity Minimum Height
7 lbs 24"
Maximum Height
se -
Elevation Adjust Geared Center Post Channel Legs
16" 1/2 "dia 3 Sections
Head Tilt
Side Tilt
0° to Kr
Head Pan Rotation Weight
360° 41/2 lbs
Clear and Black
Material 8, Finish Anodized Alum
Features · New toggle leg- lock
· Center braced legs
· Bubble level
· Reversible center post $75.00
TABLE OR CART
COLUMN/HEAD
MODEL MARK II/H4 TM
Load Capacity
30 lbs.
Elevation Adjustment
18"
Geared Center Post
l'x" Dia
Weight
6 lbs
Material & Finish Clear and Black
Anodized Alum
$284.00
MODEL MARK II/TM
Same as above except without
H4 Head
$206.00
REDITILT MOVIE MODEL RIM
LIFT COLUMN TRIPOD/HEAD
Loan Capacity
5 ibs
Minimum Height
28"
Maximum Height
65"
Elevation Adjustment Center Post Leg Diameters
20" I3/4 "Die 13/4 ·· n Pa -
One- Way Head Tilt .n90*
Head Pan Rotation
360*
Weight Material & Finish
43/4 lbs Clear and Black Anodized Alum
Head Features · ' Outck Change Camera Screw
· Friction Drag Screw
· One handle locks pan and tat simultaneously
·Reversible Center Post
$100.00
dB
TRIPODS/DOLLIES/CAMERA
DAVIS S. SANFORD CO., INC.
24 Pleasant St. Box 1002 New Rochelle, NY 10802 ( 914) 632-1636
AND MONITOR MOUNTS
REDITILT PRO MODEL RTP
LIFT COLUMN TRIPOD/HEAD
Load Capacity
10 lbs
Minimum Height
28"
Maximum Height
65"
Elevation Adjustment
18"
Center Post 'h" Dia.
Leg Diameters
Two-Way Tilt Head ± 90'
Head Pan Rotation
360'
Weight
3h. lbs
Material 8, Finish Clear and Black Anodized Alum
· " Quick Change" Camera Screw
·Friction Drag Screw
·One handle set pan and tilt simultaneously
·Reversible Center Post
$73.00
/ I\
REDITILT JUNIOR
MODEL RTJ
LIFE COLUMN TRIPOD/HEAD
Load Capacity
10 ms
Minimum Height
23"
Maximum Height
50"
Elevation Adtustment
16"
Center Post 'A" Dia
Leg Diameters %" n 34"
One- Way Tilt Head ± 90'
Head Pan Rotation
360'
Weight
2% lbs
Material 8. Finish Clear and Black
Anodized Alum
· '' Quick Change' Camera Screw ·Friction Drag Screw
·One handle locks pan and tilt simultaneously
·Reversible Center Post
$52.00
UNIVERSAL DOLLY
MODEL W-4
Load Capacity
50 lbs
Poke to
10" x 21"
Circle Diameter
42"
Wheel Demeter 5" & 3" x 13/16" tread
Weight
7lb,
Material & Finish Clear and Beck
Anodized Alum
For all D & STripod except
C and CG
$94.00
e
SLIP ON DOLLY FOR
COIAPAC TRIPOD
MODEL CW-1
Load Capacity
20 lbs.
Wheel Diameter
Weight
61 /2 lbs.
Material & Finish
Nickel
Plated Steel
Easy on-- Easy off
Screw On Wheels
No tools required
Available with 3" Wheels
& Deluxe Wheels
448.00
REDITILT MINI- 20
MODEL RTM-20
LIFT COLUMN TRIPOD/HEAD
Load Capacity Minimum Height
10 lbs 20"
Maximum Height
52"
Elevation Actiustment
12"
Center Post
hi" De
Three Section Leg
Diameters %" x 34" x '4"
One- Way Tilt Head
I90'
Head Pan Rotation
360'
Weight
2% lbs
Material 8 Finish Clear and Black
Anodized Alum
· >sQuick Change" Camera Screw
·Friction Drag Screw
·One handle sets pan and tilt simultaneously
·Reversible Center Post
$59.00
DOLLY FORAS B TRIPODS MODEL W-3
Load CaC4 cltY Diameter Open
60 lbs Same as tripod spread
Rubber Wheels
5" x 13/16"
tread
Weight
6lbs
Material 8 Finish Anodized Alum
Dolly folds with tripod
·Easily attached to tripod legs and
center post
4119.00
MONOPOD
MODEL MONOPOD/
FRICTION HEAD
Load Capacity
10 lbs
Minimum Height
31"
Maximum Height
72"
Leg Diameters WM Head ± 90 1 One Way Tilt
Pan Rotation
360'
Weight
Ilk lbs
Material 8 Finish
Clear Anodized Alum
· " Quick Change' Camera Screw
·Extension made secure with toggle lock instead of collet tor
strong support
$39.50
MODEL WS-8 CAMERA MOUNT
Camera Load Capacity Height
10 lbs
Tilt Angle ± 90'
Pan Rotation Tubing Length Tubing Diameter
360' 12"
Mounting Screw %"- 20
Material 8 Finish
Black
Anodized Alum
Special Features · " Quick
Change" Camera Screw can quickly convert to
tamper- proof und
MAY BE MOUNTED ON CEILING.
WALL OR TABLE
438.00
MONITOR WALL MOUNT MODEL RWM-3
Test Load Capacity
500 lbs
Tilt Angle ± 30' Down
Rotation
360"
Size
3in larger than monitor
Weight
30 lbs
Material
Steel
Finish
Brown Baked Enamel
$125.00
DOLLY SHELF
MODEL SD-3
Load Capacity
30 lbs
Shape
Equilatenal Triangle
Length of Sides
29"
Rubber Wheel
3" Dia
Weight
914 lbs
Material
Steel
Finish
Baked Metallic Alum
Plugs on and off the legs of tripod
Fits all D & Stripods except A. B
C series
$79.00
tel
MODEL SD- 5 Same as above but with 5" Wheels
$79.00
MODEL UM-1
CAMERA MOUNT
Camera Load Capacity
25 lbs
Tilt Angle
t90'
Pan Rotation
360'
Height
15"
Width
00
Material e. Finish
Clear
Anodized Alum
Options Additional tube length and
brace supports may be Ordered
MAY BE MOUNTED ON CEILING.
WALL OR TABLE
$73.00
.11111111.11.e,'
DELUXE WHEELS DX
Four inch double Ball Bearing Wheels with combined 360° Swivel Lock and Wheel Break, Step on locking lever for Positive lock and release
WHEEL DOLLY
MODEL WD-3
Load Capacity
20 lbs
Folds to
5" x 6" x 22"
Circle Dia
36"
Wheel Dia Weight
Material
41,: lbs Steel
Finish
Baked Metallic Alum
For all Dmodel tripods $46.00
MONITOR CEILING MOUNT
MODEL RCM-1
Test Load Capacity Tilt Angle
500 lbs t30'
Rotation
360'
Size
3in larger than monitor
Weight Material Finish
30 lbs Steel
Brown Baked Enamel
Ceiling plate may be custom made to attach to existing ceiling
$125.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 59
D.O. INDUSTRIES, INC.
317 E. Chestnut St. East Rochester, NY 14445 (716) 385-4920 ( 800) 828-6778
VIDEO LENSES
VIDEO LENSES FOR 2/3" & 1" VIDICON CAMERAS
Rugged - for long, hard use. Lightweight - for handling ease. D.O. combines both in acompact lens built to the most exacting standard in the optical industry.
MANUAL LENSES FIXED WIDE ANGLES LENSES
Catalog Number
Focal
Use
Length
Aperture
FE- 518 Fisheye DO- 3818 DO- 4818 DO- 515 DO- 618 DO- 813 DO- 813 w/o iris DO- 1018 DO- 1213
2/3" 2/3" 2/3" 2/3"- 1" 2/3"- 1" 2/3" 2/3" 2/3"- 1" 2/3"- 1"
5.5mm 3.8mm 4.8mm 5.5mm 6.5mm 8mm 8mm 10mm 12.5mm
f/1.8 f/1.8 f/1.8 f/1.5 f/1.8 f/1.3 f/1.3 f/1.8 f/1.3
Price
S707.00 164.50 142.00 162.00 119.50 72.00 65.00 157.00 98.50
Normal Lenses DO- 1616 DO- 2514 DO- 2518
2/3" 2/3"- 1" 2/3"- 1"
16mm 25mm 25mm
f/1.4 f/1.4 f/1.8
S 46.50 68.00 55.00
Telephoto Lenses
DO- 5013
2/3"- 1"
DO- 7513
2/3"- 1"
DO- 15038
2/3"- 1"
DO- 20035
2/3"- 1"
50mm 75mm 150mm 200mm
f/ 1.3 f/ 1.3 f/3.8 f/3.5
S100.00 150.00 250.00 450.00
High Speed DO- 1795 DO- 2595 LM- 38C1 DO- 4212 DO- 5095
Zoom DOZ-820
DOZ-518
DOZ-13M
DOZ-1019
DOZ-1528
Pinhole PH- 935
PH- 935R
2/3" 2/3" 2/3"- 1" 2/3"- 1" 2/3"- 1"
2/3" 2/3"- 1" 2/3" 2/3"- 1" 2/3"- 1"
2/3" 2/3"
Auto Iris Fixed Lenses
Al- 9
2/3"
Al- 12
2/3"- 1"
Al- 16
2/3"
Al- 25
2/3"- 1"
Al- 50
2/3"- 1"
17mm 25mm 37.5mm 42mm 50mm
f/0.95 f/0.95 f/1.1 f/1.2 f/0.95
8X zoom 11.5-90mm
5X zoom 20-100mm
6X zoom 12.5-75mm
10X zoom 15-150mm
15X zoom 15.225mm
f/2.0 f/1.8 f/1.8 f/1.8 f/2.8
9.5mm Pinhole
9.5mm right angle Pinhole
f/3.5 f/3.5
8.5mm 12.5mm 16mm 25mm 50mm
f/1.3 f/1.3 f/1.3 f/1.4 f/1.8
S270.70 250.00 485.70 160.00 364.50
S275.50 425.00 179.00 716.00
1664.50
$285.00
335.70
$265.00 276.00 242.00 256.00 250.00
MOTORIZED LENSES FOR CCTV CAMERAS
1" Image Format " C" Mount Servo Neutral Density Variable Focal Length
Catalog Number
D005X20A-SND* DOC6X17.513-SNEr DOC10X16A-SND* DOC10X16B-SND*
Focal Length mm
20-100 17.5-105 16-160 16-160
Max. f/stop
1.8171500 1.8-1/1500 1.8-1/1500 2.5-T/1500
MOD M
2.0 1.3 1.8 2.0
Price
$1661.00 1101.00 2896.00 2111.00
·Model Descrlpilon: Auto Iris, 12V DC motorized zoom & focus.
12V DC Motorized Variable Focal Length
D005X2OMD3*
20-100
1.8
DOC6X17.5BMD3* 17.5-105
1.8
DOC10X16AMD3*
16-160
1.8
DOC10X16BMD3*
16-160
2.5
DOC14X2513MD3*
25-350
3.5
·Model Description: Motorized Ms, zoom and focus.
2.0 $1040.00
1.3
961.00
1.8
2576.00
2.0
1991.00
1.7
4002.00
2/3" IMAGE FORMAT " C" MOUNT
Servo Neutral Density Variable Focal Length
Catalog Number
Focal
Max.
Length mm f/stop
DOH6X12.5G-SNE)* DOH10X11B-SNEr
12 5-75 11-110
Auto Iris, 12V DC motorized zoom and focus.
14-1/1500 1.6-1/1500
MOD
1.0 10
Price
S 878.00 1456.00
Accessories 2XE 540E
VC-60
2/3"- 1" 2/3"- 1"
2X extender extension tube set
$ 78.00 47.25
12V DC Motorized Variable Focal Length
DOH6X12.5GMD-3* 12.5-75
1.4
DOH10X11BMD-3* 11.110
1.6
· Motorized Iris, zoom end focus.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
1.0
S 794.00
1 0
1260.00
DURCOM inc
24 Spring Lane Farmington, CT 06032
(203) 677-6306
AMPLIFIERS/HEADSET
M-100 BOOSTER COMMAND
BOOSTER COMMAND
B0-001 BOOSTER ONE
B0-001 BOOSTER ONE Features ·Amplify astandard carbon intercom headset up to 800% · No battery · No modifications
· Independent volume ·Talk switch · New 1/4" male plug
B0-001 amplifies standard carbon head- sets using existing voltage. It senses the proper wiring in most 2 and 3 wire Carbon Intercom Systems. Communications are always
maintained without constant ambient noise in the System. A newly engineered 1/4" male, 3- circuit plug seats snugly
and does not intermit in most jacks. A removable belt clip adds to its convenience.
A Booster at each headset will improve total system performance with a minimum of effort.
The little black box that makes a big deerence. Lightweight, rugged aluminum 3-1/4" x2-1/8" x1-1/8" with a 12 ft. retractable cord. Shp. Wt. 7 oz.
B0-001
$ 79.00
B0-002 BOOSTER TWO Features ·Amplified Dynamic Headsets on
System · No battery · No modifications ·Talk switch · Dynamic or Carbon Headsets
a Carbon
Intercom
B0-002 achieves putting aDynamic or Carbon headset on a
2- or 3- wire Carbon Intercom System without shielded wiring or additional power supplies. Like B0-001, no modifications in wiring are required. Tie mic output is also increased in Booster Two, along with hearing level increases as in Booster One.
Achieving the quality of Dynamic with the reliability of Carbon, expands the life and viability of the Carbon System. At 7.5 oz., this rugged, black aluminum case w/12 ft. cord and plug is awinner.
B0-002
$ 99.00
B0 -002 BOOSTER TWO
M-100 BOOSTER COMMAND Features ·Operates on inexpensive wiring up to 1000 ft. · On/Off switch with LED power indicator · Isolated program audio input source
· Portable, lightweight - under 12 ozs. · 1/4" ring, tip, sleeve intercom jacks ·Operates 6common Carbon Intercom Headsets or more
advanced Booster products using professional Dynamic Headsets · Interconnects with most other intercom systems for expansion
Requirements
Power In: 9-35 VDC/500 m a. 2conductor 1/8" mini phone plug
Carbon Headset: Mic 50 ohms/ Ear 250 ohms Dynamic Headset: Mic 150 ohms/Ear 275-600 ohms
Headsets Ir: 1/4" phone plug. Ring- positive + 1. Tip- negative 1-1. Sleeve - N C.
Program Feed: RCA - type phono plug Weight: 11 5 ozs Case: Molded Stvreie, Black Dimensions: 6 x3.15 x 1.84"
M-100
$145.00
4
Electret Headset for use with the BOOSTER TWO $39.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 61
. EEV, IN r 7 Westchester Plaza ` "P · Elmsford, NY 10523 (914) 592-6050 Telex 6818096
TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES
P8160
EEV TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES _ 2/" LEDDICONSR
Photoconductive camera tubes with high sensitivity lead oxide target, for high definition pick-up in monochrome and color broadcast cameras. Features of
these tubes include very short lag, low dark current and unity gamma. All types have separate mesh connections.
Direct
Type
Replacement
Series
Suffix Letters "
Description
For
P8160
B, G, R, M
Broadcast quality, designed for ENG, EFP and studio cameras.
XQ 1427
P8161
B, G, R, M
Standard quality, designed for ENG, EFP and studio cameras.
XQ 1428
P8460
B, G, R, M
Broadcast quality, diode gun, high resolution photolayer.
XQ 2427
P8461 P8462
B, G, R, M B, G, R, M
Standard quality, diode gun, high resolution photolayer.
Broadcast quality, diode gun. Low output capacitance ( LOO.) contact permitting improved signal-to-noise ratio.
X0 2428 XQ 3427
P8463
B. G. R, M
Standard quality, diode gun. Low output capacitance ( LOO.) contact permitting improved signal-to-noise ratio.
XQ 3438
EEV TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES - 1/2"LEDDICONS R
Type Series
Suffix Letters *
Description
P8470
B, G, R, M
Broadcast quality, diode gun magnetic focus, magnetic deflection, high resolution photolayer for new generation of ENG cameras with integral video recorder.
EEV TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES
All Types Have Separate Mesh Connections. Type
Series
Suffix Letters *
Description
- 1" LEDDICONS R
P8022
B, G. L, R, M, X Variable light bias from light source in socket, front loading.
P8024
RF
Similar to P8022 but with extended red response and infrared filter.
AR
Similar to P8022 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
Direct Replacement
For XQ 1070
XQ 1075
XQ 1074
P8142 P8144
P8145 P8146
P8147 P8148
B, G. L. R, M RF
AR B, G. L. R, M
RF
AR B. G. L, R. M RF AR
Rear loading version of P8022 Series, with variable light bias from light source in socket. Rear loading version of P8024RF, with variable light bias from light source in socket; extended red response and infrared filter.
Similar to P8190 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
Rear loading version of P8025 Series, with variable light bias from light source in socket; highlight overload protection ( HOP.) facilities.
Rear loading version of P8026RF. Variable light bias from light source in socket, highlight overload protection ( H.O.P.) facilities; extended red response and infrared filter.
Rear loading version of P8026AR. Variable light bias from light source in socket, highlight overload protection ( H.O.P.) facilities: extended red response and no infrared filter.
Similar to P8145 but with improved resolution and 190(mA) heater.
Similar to P8147 but with extended red response and infrared filter.
Similar to P8147 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
XQ 1070/02 XQ 1075/02
XQ 2073/03 XQ 1080
XQ 1085
XQ 1083
XQ 1500 XQ 1505 X0 1503
·The complete type number comprises the Series number with appropriate suffix letter/letters as follows
B Blue Channel G Green Channel
L Luminance Channel M Monochrome
R Red Channel X Medical
The letters IG added to the above indicate Industrial Grade
in the case of monochrome tubes, the letter M is usually omitted from the type number
.Registered EEV Trademark
VC- 62
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
EEV, INC 7 Westchester Plaza ' Elmsford, NY 10523 (914) 592-6050 Telex 6818096
TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES
P8496
EEV TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES
All Types Have Separate Mesh Connections
Type
Series
Suffix Letters *
Description
- 1" LEDDICONS R
P8190
B, G, L, R, M
Diode gun tube with variable light bias from light source in socket. Front loading.
P8191
RF
Similar to P8190 but with extended red response and infrared filter.
P8196 P8197
P8442
B, G, L, R
RF AR
B, G, L, R
Rear loading version of P8190. Diode gun and variable light bias from light source in socket. Similar to P8196 but with extended red response and infrared filter. Similar to P8196 but with extended red response and no infrared filter. Diode gun tube with variable light bias from light source in tube base. Rear loading. Low output capacitance ( L.O.C.) version of P8196.
P8443 P8490
RF
AR
B, G, L, R, X
Similar to P8442 but with extended red response and infrared filter.
Similar to P8442 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
Improved diode gun tube with 190(mA) heater. Variable light bias from alamp in the tube base. Front loading. P8490X optimized for digital fluoroscopy.
P8491 P8496 P8497
RF AR B, G, L, R, X
RF AR
Similar to P8490X but with extended red response and infrared filter. Similar to P8490 but with extended red response and no infrared filter. Improved diode gun tube with 190(mA) heater. Variable light bias from alamp in the tube base. Rear loading. P8496X optimized for digital fluoroscopy. Similar to P8496 but with extended red response and infrared filter. Similar to P8496 but with extended red response and no infrared filter
Direct Replacement
For XQ 2070/02 XQ 2075/03 XQ 2070/02 XQ 2075/02 XQ 2073/02
XO 3070
X0 3075 XQ 3073 X0 2170/03
XQ 2175 XQ 2173 XQ 2170/02
XQ 2175 XQ 2173
EEV TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES - 30mm LEDDICONS
All Types Except P8000 Series Have Separate Mesh Connections
Type Series
Suffix Letters
Description
Direct Replacement
For
P8000
B, G, L, R, M, X 30mm diameter, integral mesh.
55875
P8130
B, G, L, R, M, X Coaxial construction, fixed internal light bias.
XQ 1020
P8130H
G, L, R, M
High resolution version of the P8130 Series.
XQ 1020
P8131 P8131H
B, G, L, R, M G, L, R, M
Coaxial construction, variable internal light bias. High resolution version of the P8131 Series.
X0 1410 XQ 1410
P8132
RF
AR
Similar to P8130 but with extended red response and infrared filter. Similar to P8130 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
X0 1025R XQ 1023R
P8133
RF
AR
Similar to P8131 but with extended red response and infrared filter. Similar to P8131 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
XO 1415R XQ 1413R
·The complete type number comprises the Series number with appropriate suffix letter/letters as follows:
B Blue Channel
L Luminance Channel R Red Channel
The letters IG added to the above indicate Industrial Grade.
G Green Channel
M Monochrome
.Registered EEV Trademark
X Medical
In the case of monochrome tubes, the letter M is usually omitted from the type number.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-63
@
EEV, INC. 7 Westchester Plaza
Elmsford, NY 10523
(914) 592-6050 Telex 6818096
TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES
EEV TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES - 30mm LEDDICONS(R)
All Types Except P8000 Series Have Separate Mesh Connection
Type Series
Suffix Letters
Description
P8135
B, G, L, R, M
Coaxial construction with variable light bias. Highlight overload protection ( HOP.) facilities.
Direct Replacement
For
XQ 1520
P8136
B, G, L, R, M
Coaxial construction with fixed light bias. Highlight overload protection ( HOP.) facilities.
XQ 1520
P8137
RF
Similar to P8135 but with extended red response and infrared filter.
X0 1525
AR
Similar to P8135 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
XQ 1523R
P8138
RF
Similar to P8136 but with extended red response and infrared filter.
X0 1525
AR
Similar to P8136 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
XQ 1523R
P8400
B, G, L, R, M
Coaxial construction, variable light bias controlled by an integral potentiometer in the tube base.
XQ 1410
P8400H
G, L, R, M
High resolution version of the P8400 Series.
XQ 1410
P8401
RF
Similar to P8400 but with extended red response and infrared filter.
XQ 1415
AR
Similar to P8400 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
XQ 1413
P8420
B, G, R
P8421
RF
AR
Coaxial diode gun tube with light bias lamp controlled by an integral potentiometer in the tube base. Reduced area scan for improved geometry, registration and noise. Dynamic beam control ( D.B.C.) facilities.
Similar to P8420 but with extended red response and infrared filter. Similar to P8420 but with extended red response and no infrared filter .
XQ 3410
XQ 3415 XQ 3413
P8436
B, G, L, R
Tetrode gun tube with highlight overload protection ( HOP.) facilities. Light bias lamp controlled by an integral potentiometer in the tube base. High resolution photolayer.
P8438
RF
Similar to P8436 but with extended red response and infrared filter.
AR
Similar to P8436 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
P8440 P8441
B, G, L, R, M
RF AR
Diode gun tube with light bias lamp controlled by an integral potentiometer in the tube base. Dynamic beam control ( D.B.C.) facilities.
Similar to P8440 but with extended red response and infrared filter.
Similar to P8440 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
P8450 P8451 P8452 P8453
B, G, L, R
RF AR B, G, L, R, X
RF AR
Coaxial, diode gun tube with light bias lamp controlled by an integral potentiometer in the tube base. Low output capacitance ( L.O.C.)
Similar to P8450 but with extended red response and infrared filter. Similar to P8450 but with extended red response and no infrared filter
Similar to P8450 but with improved diode gun and 190(mA) heater. P8452X is amedical quality tube, optimized for digital fluoroscopy.
Similar to P8452 but with extended red response and infrared filter. Similar to P8452 but with extended red response and no infrared filter.
The complete type number comprises the Series number with appropriate suffix letter/letters as follows:
B Blue Channel
L Luminance Channel R Red Channel
The letters IG added to the above indicate Industrial Grade.
G Green Channel
M Monochrome
X Medical
In the case of monochrome tubes, the letter M is usually omitted from the type number.
-Registered EEV Trademark
VC-64
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
I§ EEV, INC. 7El mWsefsotrcdh,ester1Pol5az2a3
(914) 592-6050 Telex 6818096
Ruggedized Vidicons for Difficult Environments
TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES
P8202
411W
hie P8021
1111W.
EEV TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES - 1" VIDICONS
Separate Mesh, Magnetic Focus and Deflection For Telecine Applications
Type Series 8507A ( P841)
8541A ( P842)
8572A ( P843)
P8e8
Application Broadcast, educational and high quality industrial.
Broadcast, educational and high quality industrial.
Color or monochrome telecine and caption scanning. Can be selected for use in PE24 and PE240 cameras. Available with anti-halation faceplate stud. Color telecine, selected for use in TK28 and similar cameras.
Characteristics
Color response similar to human eye. High sensitivity at all light levels. Moderate sensitivity to red up to 900nm. Short lag.
Color response similar to human eye. High sensitivity at all light levels. Moderate sensitivity to red up to 900nm. Short lag.
High sensitivity but very short lag at high light levels. Resistant to image retention.
High sensitivity and short lag. Signal output and resolution uniform over whole raster.
8038 for TK28
Blemish Standard
1st Grade
Heater Current at 6.3V ( mA)
600
1st Grade
95
1st Grade
600
1st Grade
95
PhotoSurface
Direct
Replacement For
Il
XQ 1042
X0 1240
X0 1291
XQ 1240 4809
EEV TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES - 1" VIDICONS
Electrostatic Focus and Magnetic Deflection
Type Series
8134
Application
Broadcast and industrial, compact monochrome.
Characteristics Industrial grade tube.
8134V1/4811
Broadcast, color, telecine.
Can be supplied in matched sets for RCA TK27 camera.
Uniform sensitivity and geometry for multi-tube color cameras. It can be selected for use in the
red, blue or green channels.
Blemish Standard
Heater Current at 6.3V ( mA)
95
1st Grade
95
PhotoSurface
Direct Replacement
For
ii
ii
BC 8134
EEV TELEVISION CAMERA TUBES - 11/2"VIDICONS
Electrostatic Focus and Magnetic Deflection
Type Series 8480
8480V1/4810
Application
Characteristics
Color or monochrome cameras, telecine and high grade industrial,
Low deflection power, negligible electrostatic focusing power.
Reduced camera size by eliminating focus coil. High resolution.
High quality color cameras such as RCA TK27.
Similar to 8480 but tested to closer limits for signal uniformity, beam astigmatism and other characteristics.
Blemish Standard 1st Grade
Selected
t Specific tube grades and electrical parameters can be negotiated
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Heater Current at 6.3V ( mA)
95
95
PhotoSurface
Direct Replacement
For
BC 8480
BC 8480
VC-65
EIA
ELECTRONIC INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION
2001 Eye St., N.W. Washington, D.C. 20006 (202) 457-4966
Logarithmic Reflectance Chart
TELEVISION TEST CHARTS
Linearity Chart
All are available in 18" x24"
Color Registration Chart
Resolution Chart
Color Registration Chart
(Formerly RETMA Registration Chart).
This 18" x24" Color Registration Chart is used to aid in the alignment
and test of the accuracy of registration of triple- pickup color television
cameras. The fine horizontal and vertical lines on awhite background
permit accurate alignment of the optical and electrical systems of
three pickup cameras. The Chart is mounted on 100 mil heavy paper
board to provide stand-alone stiffness for studio and field use.
Color Registration Chart
$45.00
Linearity ( Ball) Chart
This Linearity Chart is used to help test geometric distortion of atele-
vision camera chain. This is done by comparing on asuitable picture
monitor two- super- imposed patterns; one generated by an electrical
pattern generator, the other by atelevision chart with the equipment
to be checked. The electrical pattern grating frequencies required to
match the chart pattern are 315 kHz for horizontal, 900 cycles for ver-
tical linearity tests. The Chart is mounted on 100 mil heavy paper board
to provide stand-alone stiffness for studio and field use.
Linearity ( Ball) Chart
$45.00
Linear Reflectance Chart
This Linear Reflectance Chart is similar to the Logarithmic Reflectance
Chart described above except that the nine gray scale steps have a
linear relationship to each other, rather than alogarithmic relationship.
(not shown)
Linear Reflectance Chart
$60.00
Logarithmic Reflectance Chart
This Logarithmic Reflectance Chart consists of two gray scales of nine
steps each on 4" x18" mounted on 100 mil heavy paper board to pro-
vide stand-alone stiffness for studio and field use. This Chart, with its
two gray scales of logarithmic relationships, is used in the alignment
and measurement of transfer characteristic of television camera sys-
tems. This is of particular importance in color television systems where
departure from the correct characteristics may result in color error.
Logarithmic Reflectance Chart
$60.00
Resolution Chart
(Formerly RETMA Resolution Chart). This 18" x24" Resolution Chart is used to help measure the resolving
power of atelevision system, or part of it, such as atelevision camera
chain. The Chart is televised by the studio facility under test, and re-
produced on asuitable picture monitor. Horizontal and vertical resolution wedges cover the range from 200 to 800 lines. This Chart was
revised slightly in 1956 and the present printing is on high quality heavy paper board which is extremely " white". Gray Scale Overlay Strips
(10" x1" -- 4each) are provided over the indicated section of this Re-
solution Chart. These highly accurate gray scales are designed to pro-
vide alogarithmic reflectance relationship. The Chart is mounted on
100 mil heavy paper board to provide stand-alone stiffness for studio
and field use.
Resolution Chart
$ 70.00
VC-66
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
rem INCORPORATED
1141 1 Bradley Avenue Arleta, CA 91331 (818) 896-6700
CAMERA ENCLOSURES
0>etr
The Model EVH-22
The Model EVH-22 is a compact, aluminum, environmental enclosure designed to protect a CCTV camera from adverse weather conditions. The EVH-22 will
accommodate most 2/3" and 1" format cameras with fixed, auto iris, and zoom lenses. The unique collapsible- hinged top allows for easy access to the inside without completely removing the cover. A convection air flow system provides air circulation for cooling and anti- fogging.
A thermostatically controlled heater and apositive pressure, filtered, blower system are available as accessories. The blower exhaust flows down across the window to provide both cleaning and weather protection for the window.
SPECIFICATIONS Mechanical
·Construction: aluminum ·Weight: 7 lbs. ( approximate)
·Window opening size: 4" W x4.5"H
780 ·
114" CLEAR PLEXIGLAS
· Camera mounting: adjustable sliding track
450
_ 1 ·Power requirements: 120VAC-60Hz - I
·Optional: 24 VAC or 240 VAC package
FRONT
available
·Cable entry: 3water- tight gland fittings
775
·Maximum inside clearance: 5.5"W x5.251-1
x 18.5"L
·Standard finish: white textured enamel
ACCESSORIES Heater Model EVH-22H
· Blanket type, thermostatically controlled ( closes at 40°F)
· Provides 30-80 Watts of heat ·Available in the following voltages
(specify when ordering): 24 VAC, 120 VAC and 240 VAC
Blower Model EVH-22B · Provides 38 CFM positive airflow ·Thermostatically controlled ( closes at
90°F) ·Available in the following voltages:
(specify when ordering): 24 VAC, 120 VAC and 240 VAC
-
10 75
250
26 00 2200
265 1:64 2 MOLES
Sun Shield Model SS-22 · Lightweight
;et'ess,
·White texture enamel finish
· Protects enclosure from radiant heat V GLAND FITTINGS
· Provides cooling by allowing air
to flow over the exterior of the enclosure
NOTE: Will lower internal temperature of
housing 10°F- 15°F
Additional Options Available ·Tamper proof latches ·Extreme low temperature insulation kit
6 50
25 ,
BOTTOM
The Model SCH-4 Security Camera Housing
The Model SCI-1-4 Security Camera Housing is a "tamper- proof" environmental enclosure, designed to protect a TV camera from vandalism as well as the environment. The enclosure, constructed from heavy gauge sheet metal, can only be opened with the proper key. Once opened, complete access to the camera is obtained for easy maintenance. A track is provided to permit a camera to be positioned and secured in the housing. There are three louvers at the back of the housing for ventilation, and two water tight gland fittings are provided at the bottom rear of the housing for cable entry.
Maximum inside dimensions: (15"L x5-1/8"W x4-1/4"H) Approximate weight: 7 lbs. Finish: White enamel outside, satin black inside
The enclosure is also available with a Sun Shield model SS-4 which should be specified when ordering.
Additional weight: 3-1/2 lbs. Finish: White enamel
CAMERA ENCLOSURES
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
EVH-16
Environmental Camera Enclosure, Inside Dimensions: 13-1/4"L x5-1/2"W x5-1/4"H
EVH-22
Environmental Camera Enclosure, Inside Dimensions: 18-3/4"L x5-1/2"W x5-1/4"H
EVH-26
Environmental Camera Enclosure, Inside Dimensions: 23-1 / 4"L c8-3/8"W x8"H
EVH-32
Environmental Camera Enclosure, Inside Dimensions: 29-1 / 4"L x8-3/8"W x8"H
SCH-4
Tamper- proof Camera Enclosure, Inside Dimensions: 15"L x5-1,8W x4-1/4"H
MCSH
Mini Camera Security Housing
EH- 100
Tamper- proof Elevator Housing
ITCH- 1
Tamper- proof Ceiling Housing
PRICE
$154.00
187.00
258.50
343.20
104.48 73.50
321.50 114.00
ENCLOSURE ACCESSORIES
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
EVH-228-120
Blower for EVH-16 or 22 ( 120VAC-38 CFM)
EVH-22B-24
Blower for EVH-16 or 22424VAC-38 CFM)
EVH-26 Et 32B
Blower for EVH-26 or 324120VAC-105 CFM)
EVH-16/22H-120 Heater for EVH-16 or 22 ( 120VAC-75 Watts) EVH-16/22H-24 Heater for EVH-16 or 22 (28VAC-30 Watts)
EVH-26 Et 32H
Heaters for EVH-26 or 32 ( 120VAC-150 Watts)
SS- 4
Sunshield for model SCH-4
SS- 22
Sunshield for model EVH-22
SS- 26
Sunshield for model EVH-26
SS- 32
Sunshield for model EVH-32
TPL TFX-1
Tamper- proof latch for all EVH Enclosures
Transformer for EVH-22H-24 (28VAC-40VA) Class- II
EVH-IK
Ins. Kit for Extreme High or Low Temp.
ITCH-1RK
T- Bar Ceiling Mounting Rails for ITCH- 1
PRICE $52.50
63.00 71.40 55.13 63.00 56.70 32.50 46.00 56.00 58.00 ea. 5.00
16.00 24.28 20.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-67
INCORPORATED
1141 1 Bradley Avenue Arleta, CA 91331 (818) 896-6700
pr
MOUNTS
SCANNER AND PAN- TILT MOUNTS
V/D VSM w/Strut
POLE MOUNTS
The Model SCB-1 Swivel Corner Building Mount
The Model SCB-1 is designed specifically for mounting aheavy duty scanner or pan and tilt unit to the corner of a " building cap " This unique design includes two adjustable gussets to allow for variations in the thickness of the building cap, and is constructed in such away so that it can be installed from the roof of the building rather than outside. To facilitate " ease of service", simply remove one Bolt and "Swing" the entire P/T unit over the roof for safe and secure servicing. When the adjustments are made, simply swing the unit out into its original position and
re- install the locking Bolt. It's just that easy.
SPECIFICATIONS ·Extension: 24" from face of building to the center- line of Pan/Tilt ·Construction: All Steel, Hell- Arc welded and Zinc plated prior to painting ·Finish: Black Texture Enamel ·Weight: 57 lbs. ·Maximum load: 150 lbs.
SCANNER AND PAN-TILT MOUNTS
H/D VSM
Heavy Duty VICON scanner & p/t mount w/strut
PRICE $ 95.55
H/D VSM-CB
Same as H/D VSM but for mounting on a bldg. corner
161.18
H/D VSPM-6 SM-1V
6" Heavy Duty VICON scanner, p/t pedestal mount
Wall Mount for LID VICON scanners & pan- tilts
37.00 29.00
LID VSPM-6
6" Light Duty VICON scanner Et p/t pedestal mount
SC- 100 Et SC- 124 Light Duty indoor scanner 1120VAC & 24VAC)
SA- 1Et 2
Scanner Adaptors for 2/3" 81" cameras
SCB-1
Swivel Corner building mount
CBPM-9
Control Box pole mount
CBPM-12
Control Box pole mount
29.00 114.50
16.00 420.00
36.00 42.00
The Model H/D VSM-P Heavy Duty
Vicon Scanner Pole Mount
The Model H/D VSM-P Heavy Duty Vicon Scanner Pole Mount is designed
specifically for mounting aheavy duty scanner or pan and tilt on a2-1/4" minimum diameter pole. This unique one-piece design includes an integral strut for added stability and greater load capacity. This mount is designed for use with the Vicon scanner or pan and tilt models: V3OOPT, V310AP, V35OPTV, V353APTV, V355APTV, V38OPTX, V390APT, and V300OPT.
The scanner mounting plate extends 20" out from the pole and is 6" square, with four holes for scanner or pan and tilt mounting. Four 5/16" bolts are supplied with each mount making an easy attachment of the scanner or pan and tilt to the mount.
This all steel heli-arc welded mount is constructed from 2" diameter tubing with a 2-1/4" wide by 14" high pole mounting plate, that has eight 3/4" long slots for the mounting straps (not supplied).
· Maximum recommended load: 125 lbs. ·Approximate weight: 7-1/2 lbs. ·Standard finish: Black Texture
POLE MOUNTS WM-1P HM -1P HM -2P SM-1V-P H/D-VSMP MM- 1P
8" Camera Pole Mount w/universal head 12" Medium Duty Housing Pole Mount 16" Heavy Duty Housing Pole Mount 12" Light Duty Scanner Pole Mount Heavy Duty VICON Scanner Pole Mount 9" to 12" Monitor Pole Mount w/pan-tilt head
PRICE S 53.55
64.58 77.71) 49.88 105.53 65.10
rmtn 1le MIII. 0., ..
MODEL
DESCRIPTION
BS- 3
Ball Socket-- universal head for camera mounts
Mini P/T-Head P/T Head for camera mounting
HM -Head
P/T Head for all housing mounts
SHM-Head
HM -Head with Tamper- proof screws
SHM-1 Kit
To convert an HM -1to an SHM-1
SHM-2 Kit
To convert an HM -2to an SHM-2
MM- Plate
Monitor Plate for 9" to 12" Monitor Mounts
Strut
Strut for all H/ D wall mounts
SHM-Wrench Allen Wrench for Tamper- proof screws
SHM-Screws
Tamper- proof 5/16-18 x1/2" Button Head
Key CP-10
SCH-4 Cam- lock key 10 Ft. Clamp Pack for Pole Mounting
CP-100
100 Ft. Clamp Pack for Pole Mounting
PRICE $ 14.30
5.25 15.75 19.43 33.60 33.60 26.40 35.00
5.50 1.76 4.00 20.00 100.00
VC-68
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
INCORPORATED
11411 Bradley Avenue
Arleta, CA 91331 (818) 896-6700
CAMERA MOUNTS
MOUNTS
EM- 1
CPM-3
WM-2
CCM-1
The Model WM-2 Camera Wall/ Ceiling Mount
The Model WM-2 CAMERA WALL/CEILING MOUNT is a dual purpose mount.
WALL MOUNTING: When mounted on a wall the universal swivel head extends 9 112" from the mounting surface and can be adjusted from a level position to a tilt angle of 90 degrees: will rotate 360 degrees and lock in any position with an Allen Set Screw.
CEILING MOUNTING: When mounted to a ceiling the mounting surface of the swivel head extends down 8" from the ceiling.
POLE MOUNTING: See pole mount section.
This all steel heli-arc welded mount is constructed from 1 1/2" diameter tubing with a 3/16" flange that has three 5/16" holes for mounting purposes.
Maximum recommended load
20 lbs.
Approximate weight
2 lbs.
Standard finish is black or beige texture. Please specify when ordering.
CAMERA MOUNTS
WM-2 CPM-3 CPM-6 CCM-1 EM- 1
9Y," Wall Mount with universal head 6" Pedestal Mount with universal head 9" Pedestal Mount with universal head Camera Ceiling Mount with universal head 9" Wall Mount with pan-tilt head
HOUSING MOUNTS
HM- 1
33.60 30.98 32.00 47.78 12.50
few
HPM-6
MONITOR MOUNTS MM -15 and 19
The Model MM- 1Monitor Mount
The Model MM- 1MONITOR MOUNT is designed to support a9" or 12" monitor on a vertical mounting surface. The monitor support plate is 8 112" square. Slots are provided for securing the monitor to the plate and screws are supplied with each mount to make an easy attachment of the monitor to the plate.
The plate extends 8" out from the mounting surface and is adjustable from a level position to a straight down position and can rotate horizontally 360 degrees.
This all steel heli-arc welded mount is constructed from 1 1/2" diameter tubing with a 5 1/2" diameter 1/4" thick flange that has four 3/8" holes for mounting purposes.
Maximum recommended (balanced) load
40 lbs.
Approximate weight
4 lbs.
Standard finish is black or beige texture. Please specify when ordering.
HOUSING MOUNTS
MM- 1 MCM-2 MPM-6 MM- 15 8 19 MCM-15 8 19
9'.to 12" Monitor wall mount with pan-tilt head 9" to 12" Monitor ceiling mount with pan-tilt head 9" to 12" Monitor pedestal mount w/pan-tilt head 15" or 19" Monitor wall mount 15" or 19" Monitor ceiling mount
48.95 66.55 48.95 95.55 95.55
MONITOR MOUNTS
HM -1 HM·2 SHM-1 SHM-2 HCM-3 HPM- 6
12" Medium Duty wall mount w/parvtilt head 16" Heavy Duty wall mount w/pan-tilt head Same as HM-1, w/Tamper-proof cover 8 screws Same as HM -2, w/Tamper-prool cover 8 screws Housing Ceiling Mount with pan-tilt head 81/2 "Housing Pedestal Mount with pan-tilt head
43.58 62.48 71.40 87.68 65.00 40.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-69
FAIRCHILD WESTON SYSTEMS, INC.
450 National Avenue Mountain View, CA 94040 (415) 493-8001
CCD CAMERAS
CCD120OR CCD1000 SERIES
CCD COMMERCIAL LINE SCAN CAMERA
CCD Industrial Line Scan Cameras
· Charge Coupled Device Image Detectors · All solid state · Small, compact sealed enclosure · Ideal for use in hostile industrial environments · Remote operation ( up to 200 cable feet) · Data rates to 20M pixels per second · Line scan rates to 40K lines per second
The Fairchild CCD1000 series are small, rugged, solid-state line scan cameras designed for incorporation into non- contact electro -optical measurement and process control systems. System design and implementation using the CCD1000 series cameras are simplified due to the requirement of only two clock input signals to completely control operation of the cameras. The sealed enclosure and remote operation capability make these cameras ideally suited for operation in
hostile environments.
The camera can be installed in a water jacket when necessary for environmental protection and located more than 200' away from a control unit/power supply.
The cameras are available in resolutions of 512, 1024, or 2048 elements.
CCD120OR CCD130OR CCD150OR
$ 1200.00 1300.00 1500.00
CCD Commercial Line Scan Camera Systems
Small, rugged solid-state camera. Line scan contains aCCD line scan of 256, 512, 1024, 2048 elements of resolution. A timing control
module, sequential processing module and arugged housing that can be tripod, front faceplate or dovetail mounting.
Complete with Camera Control Unit; CCU provides video output control, video data rate control, exposure control and camera power
supply.
CCD1100C CCD1200C
CCD1300C CCD1500C
$ 2500.00 2750.00
3000.00 4500.00
VC- 70
CCD3000 CCD4001 AUTOMATION CAMERA SERIES
CCD3000 Automation Camera Series
Self-contained camera which makes it easy for industrial users to take advantage of the inherent geometric accuracy, wide dynamic range, and reliability of a buried- channel charge coupled device image sensor. It can be used as arelatively small single- component camera, or be separated into a camera control unit plus a cable- connected
sense head which is robust enough to be mounted onto arobot arm.
The CCD3000 camera is available in 488X380 NTSC resolution. The
CCD3000F includes a fiber optic faceplate over the sensor. These
cameras are also available with an especially high quality 488X380 sensor and are referred to as the CCD3100 and CCD3100F respec-
tively.
CCD3000
$ 3500.00
CCD4001 Robotics Camera
The Robotics camera incorporates a256X256 element non- interlaced sensor with asquare pixel pitch format. It can be efficiently utilized by
aCPU for automatic inspection, recognition and robot guidance. The camera image output may also be displayed on standard monitors.
CCD4001
$ 1750.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
F
R z c, 49 Lexington Si.
·
W. Newton, MA 02165 (617) 244-3223 Telex 922407
SVS-660
·. · ·s :· :
e iE (.b (1'4 qi é ·
DT- 204
MC- 310 AS- 100A ACS 100A MV- 24
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
SVS-660 Digital Video Sensor
·Accurate super video sensor for in and outdoor surveillance application
· Free channel selection from 1to 6 channels by plug-in module ·6 camera inputs and 6 outputs ·64 x64 ( 40961 sensor markers for CCIR; 64 x52 ( 33281 markers for
EIA
· Each sensor marker can be set for write-in/erase by using the lightpen for each channel
·Track function ( triggered sensor markers are automatically displayed on the monitor so that movement of the intruding object can be traced)
·Sensor markers are not affected by environmental light change
(from day time to night time), flash light, intrusion of fly, use of auto iris camera, etc. -- only activated by intruders, intrusion of cars, etc., which invade in the camera scene with target speed and sizes ·Sensitivity controls for picture level and size ·The ACS- 100A with the AS- 100A and SC- 100 is compatible ·Dimensions: 16.92W x5.20"H x 13.78"D ( 430 x 132 x350 mm) (19" rack type)
SVS-660 Digital Video Sensor Main Frame DM- 660 Channel PC Board ( 1per channel required)
$3600.00 900.00
DT- 204 1- Channel Video Sensor
·Compact low price 1- channel Video Sensor for one camera input · Four sensor markers detect the object intruded into the picture
scene ·Size and position of each sensor marker can be varied independently
·Sensor markers display on/off ·Sensitivity control ·Automatic/manual reset function
· Dimensions: 8.46"W x 1.75"H s9.84" ( 215 x44.5 x250 mm) (half 19" rack type)
DT- 204 Video Sensor
$575.00
MC- 310 Multi- Channel Video Sensor
·Simultaneous sensing capability for up to 10 cameras ·Selected channel number shown on TV screen · Built-in sequential switcher with manual over- ride ·Separate alarm relays for each channel plus general alarm relay ·Wide sensitivity setting with built-in test signal ·Connect with ordinary coaxial cable; compatible with nearly all TV
equipment
MC- 310 Multi- Channel Video Sensor DM- 310 Channel PC Board ( 1per channel required)
$1600.00 250.00
ACS- 100A Autocode Switcher
· 10 video inputs ( from camera, VTR, etc.) and one output ·Automatic/manual sequential channel switch ·Automatic sequential time control ( 1-60 seconds) ·Spot channel function
·Up to 16 characters can be freely selected and superimposed onto
the picture scene by way of the built-in character generator, so that
each picture scene is distinguishable and recognizable at a glance ·Two units interconnection providing 20 input channels ·The AC- 100A and SC- 100 are compatible
· Dimensions: 16.92W x 1.75"H x 10.63"D ( 430 x44 x270 mm) (19" rack type)
ACS- 100A Autocode Switcher
$1100.00
AS- 100A Audio Switcher
· Direct- relay type Audio Switcher used with the ACS- 100A ·Up to 10 audio sounds ( up to 20 if 2units are interconnected) can be
controlled and switched with the camera scene by the switching function of the ACS- 100A ·Adjustable audio sound of each channel ·Audio sound with its appropriate picture scene provides extensive surveillance more effectively
·Dimensions: 16.92W x 1.75"H x8.46"D ( 430 x44 x215 mm) (19" rack type)
AS- 100A Audio Switcher
$1100.00
MV- 24 Multi- Viewer
· Pictures from up to 4 cameras can be displayed on one monitor ·Adjustable position of the split borders and of each divided camera
scene horizontally and vertically
MV- 24 Multi- Viewer
$1300.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 71
Frezzolini Electronics Inc.
7 Valley St. Hawthorne, NJ 07506 USA (201) 427-1160 TVVX 710-988-4142
BP- 142 14.4 VOLT
·
POWER SUPPLIES
FREZZI ON BOARDTM BATTERY PACKS "Superior To Camera- Manufacturer- Supplied"
FEATURES:
·Battery mounts direct to camera- manufacturer-supplied Anton/ Bauer bracket or optional Frezzolini® camera battery mounting
bracket. ·No cables or modification required. ·Full 4AH capacity-- only premium selected nickel- cadmium cells
used. ·Custom- designed mounting brackets available. · Rugged welded aluminum case. ·Lightweight 2AH models available. ·Internal fuse Er thermal protection-- internal spare fuse included for
field replacement. ·Complete charge compatibility with camera- factory-supplied charge
systems, or Frezzolini® fast, overnight or multiple battery chargers available.
Frezzi On- Board BP- 12 4AH, 12 volt Frezzi On- Board BP- 13 4AH, 13.2 volt Frezzi On- Board - BP- 14 4AH, 14.4 volt Frezzi On- Board BP- 122 2AH, 12volt Frezzi On- Board BP- 132 2AH, 13.2 volt Frezzi On- Board BP- 142 2AH, 14.4volt
All battery packs have fast charge 11 Hr.) capability.
$455.00 475.00
495.00
275.00 285.00 295.00
FrezziTM Premium- Grade Direct Replacement for Sony BP- 90 Battery Packs
Models: FBP-90 and Fast Charger Model FBP-90 FC
·Full 4AH capacity using premium- grade selected nickel- cadmium
cells. ·Rugged Et serviceable plastic case.
· Fuse Et thermal protection · Internal spare fuse for field replacement. ·High discharge capability to power 100W lightheads.
·Weight 3.5 lbs. ·Complete charge compatibility with:
Sony BC- 210 charger. Frezzi BC- 124S overnight charger. Frezzi MBC-5 8- battery overnight charger Frezzi BC-77UB 1hr. fast charger w/HV fast- charge adaptor cable.
Plus other Frezzi fast/slow multi- battery charging stations.
Model FBP-90 Model FBP-90 FC
$ 275.00 330.00
Frezzi TM Custom- Designed BP-90/FBP-90 Mounting Brackets
BATTERY PACK MOUNTING BRACKETS
Model HM 90
Brackets mount to Anton/ Bauer or Frezzolie, $198.00 battery bracket
VC- 72
HM 90
Betacam Battery Mounting Bracket ( Not Shown)
Model: HMBVV1 Bracket mounts to the upper rear portion of the recorder, and
accepts BP13/BP132 batteries or BP90 when used with HM90.
Model HMBVV1
$ 105.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Frezzolini Electronics Inc.
7 Valley St. Hawthorne, NJ 07506 USA (201) 427-1160 TVVX 710-988-4142
Frezzi TM Dual Channel AC Adaptor and Fast Charger
General: The new Frezzolini Model RPS-2 Dual- Channel combination power supply/fast charger consists of two ( 21 totally independent power sources. Each power source has the capability of either functioning as a precise regulated power supply for ENG Camera/VTR Power or switching over to a ni -cad battery fast charger. Either one or two battery packs are simultaneously fast charged with automatic high- charge termination when the battery packs reach full charge.
SPECIFICATIONS
AC Input
115/230 VAC + /- 10% 50/60Hz
Regulated DC Output
13.25 VDC ( 3.0 Amps Max. each
channel)
Line Regulation + /- . 05% for 10% line change
Load Regulation + /- . 05% for 50% load change
Output Ripple
5.0mV Pk- Pk maximum
Overload Protection
Automatic current limit/foldback
Fast Charge Time
12.0V battery- 75 minutes
14.4V battery- 180 minutes
Size
81/2 "x5" x51/2 "
Weight
8.5 lbs.
Model RPS-2
$ 895.00
. EZIOUre
t
BC-77UB
CHARGERS
RPS-2
Frezzi ru Single- Battery Universal Fast Chargers MODEL BC-77U/MODEL BC-77UB SINGLE- BATTERY UNIVERSAL FAST CHARGERS
General: The new line of Frezzolini Universal fast chargers were specifically designed to fast- charge ( 1Hr.) all models of Frezzolini 'k 12V and 14.4V 2 -- 6AH battery packs. The Prezzi chargers also have the capability to safely fast- charge Anton/Bauer 12V and 14.4V nickel- cadmium on- board battery packs. All chargers are transformertype line- isolated and designed per European IEC-65 safety code specifications. The chargers are constructed of heavy- gauge aluminum in a compact size to withstand abuse in the field. The universal feature of this charger enables operation anywhere in the world. Model BC-77U/BC-77UB $395.00
RPS-3
Frezzi On Board ' NAC Adaptor
MODEL RPS-3 AC ADAPTOR
General: The Frezzolini® Model RPS-3 AC Adaptor is specifically designed to power ENG/EFP cameras consuming up to 50 watts of power. Model RPS- 3is a " State- Of-The- Art" switcher power supply with additional RFl / EMI line suppression filters. AC adaptors mount directly to the Frezzolini or Anton/Bauer Battery Brackets with no modifications or adaptor cables required.
SPECIFICATIONS
AC Input
117/234VAC 50/60Hz + /- 10%
DC Output
RPS-3 13.25VDC at 4A
Line Regulation ( 10% line change) RPS-3 /-. 10%
Load Regulation
(50% load change)
RPS-3 /-. 2%
Output Ripple ( Pk- Pk Max.
RPS-3 10mV
Overload Protection
Automatic current limit / foldback
Weight
RPS-3 2lbs.
Size
5.0" x4.0" x3.4"
Model RPS-3
$ 595.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 73
VC- 74
Frezzolini Electronics Inc.
7 Valley St. Hawthorne, NJ 07506 USA (201) 427-1 160 TWX 710-9 88-41 42
CHARGERS
FREZZITM MULTIPLE BATTERY CHARGING STATIONS "We custom- design per your specific charging requirements"
MODEL MBC-2 ( All Feature Model)
Fast- charges five ( 5) Frezzolini® or Anton/Bauer 12-14.4V nickel-
cadmium battery packs in less than one ( 1) hour while simultaneously charging eight ( 8) additional Frezzolini®, Sony, JVC or Panasonic
VTR battery packs overnight. Universal AC inputs. Deluxe shipping
case available. Weight: 45 lbs.
MBC -2
$2400.00
Intermixed or same packs
MODEL MBC-4A
Fast charges ( 5) Frezzolini® or Anton/Bauer 12-14.4V battery packs.
MBC-4A
$ 1595.00
MODEL MBC-5, Charges Eight ( 9) BP- 90 Type Batteries Simultaneously
·Universal AC inputs ·Compact size ·Line- isolated
·Current-sensing LED's ·Other models available for all VTR or camera battery packs
Charge eight ( 8) BP- 90 type battery packs simultaneously in 14 hours with Frezzolini® Model MBC-5 Charging Station. Universal AC
Inputs. Weight: 8 lbs.
MBC-5
$495.00
4'14
MBC-5
MODEL MBC-4
Fast charges ( 1 Hr.) five ( 5) Frezzolini® or Anton/Bauer 12-14.4V
nickel-cadmium battery packs while simultaneously charging eight additional Sony BP- 90 type battery packs in 14 hours. Universal AC Inputs. Deluxe shipping case available. Weight: 45 lbs.
MBC-4
$ 2090.00
Model F-30 EC power belt powering FrezziLiteTM Model FL- 250 with optional swing- away dichroic filter
OVERNIGHT TRICKLE CHARGERS
BC- 122S ( For FBP-20/44/60)
BC- 124S ( For BP- 90) CR -1 ( Current Regulated For BP- 90 Et BP- 12/13/14) FTC- 12/13/14 ( For BP- 12/13/14)
$ 80.00
80.00 115.00
80.00
Frezzi Tu Power Belts for 30 Volt Sun Gun
30 Volt DC Operation With Frezzi 1M Model F- 30- EC And F-30-EXFA High- Capacity Battery Belts
·Full 4AH capacity using selected nickel- cadmium cells. ·Operates 30V 250W DYG lamp for 30 minutes. · Batteries housed in rugged aluminum cassettes which are mounted
on agenuine leather belt.
·Built-in overnight charger ( 14 Hrs.)
·Model F-30-EXFA has fast- charge capability ( 1 Hr.) w /optional Frezzi ":" BC- 30C fast charger.
·Fuse and circuit- breaker protection. ·Weight: 10 lbs.
Model F-30 EC Model F-30-EXFA
FL250 Lighthead FLDF-101 Swing- Away Dichroic Filter
$545.00 595.00
195.00 88.00
EC- 30
30 Volt DC Operation With Model EC- 30
High- Capacity Battery Packs
·30VDC at 4AH ·Operates 30V 250W DYG lamp 30 minutes. ·Fast charge capability ( 1Hr.). · Built-in overnight charger ( 12 Hrs.). ·Rugged steel case. ·Weight: 10 lbs. ·Premium- grade selected nickel- cadmium cells used.
Model EC- 30 OPTIONAL: BC- 30 One Ill Hour Fast Charger
$ 595.00 395.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
672 White Plains Rd. Scarsdale, NY 10583 (914) 472-9800
2/3- Inch Format Zoom Lenses and Accessories for ENG/EFP, Studio and Field Productions
ZOOM LENSES/ ACCESSORIES
A14x9ERM w/PJ
A3.5 x6.5R M
2/3" Format Zoom Lenses
Model No.
A3.5x6.5RM A7x7RM A10x1ORM Al2x9ERM A14x9ERM A16x9.5ERM
A17x9ERM A22x12.5ERM
A14x8ESM
A17x8.5ESM A30x11ESM A44x9.5ESNI A44x9.5ESM A44x9.5ESM
F
Focal Length
Built-in Extension
1.7 6.5 - 23mm
1.7 9 - 108mm
1.6 10 - 100mm
1.7 9 - 108mm -
1.7 9 - 126mm
2X
1.8 9.5 - 152mm -
1.7 9 - 153mm
2X
2.0 12.5 - 275mm
2X
1.5 8 - 112mm
2X
1.5 8.5 - 145mm
2X
1.6
11 - 330mm
2X
1.2 9.5 - 420mm
2X
1.4 9.5 - 420mm
2X
1.7 9.5 - 420mm
2X
MOD
0.3m 0.3m 1.0m 0.95m 0.8m 0.95m
0.9m 1.8m
0.7m
0.7m 1.7m 2.5m 2.2m 1.7m
Horizontal Field of View
Filter Size
Optional
Converters
Wide
Tele.
68°11' 21°39' 64°18' - 10°03'
82mm -
86mm
0.8X
1.6X
47°30' - 5°03'
72mm
0.8X
1.85X
52°06' 1°45' 52°06' - 4°00'
72mm 77mm
0.8X 0.8X
1.85X 1.85X
49°42' - 3°19'
77mm
0.8X
1.85X
52°06' - 1°39'
86mm
0.8X
1.6X
38°47' - 0°55'
107mm - -
57 °37' - 4°30'
-
56°44' 1°44' - -
43°36' - 0°35' - -
50°44' 0°28' - - -
49° T - 1° 5'
-
49°42
1°12'
-
Optional Weight Pattern Weight Projector
1.4kg 1.6kg
1.3kg
1.5kg
1.5kg
X
1.36kg
1.84kg
X
3.8kg
10.6kg
X
10.6kg
X
9.1kg
X
25.5kg
X
14.6kg
X
11kg
X
Accessories:
Servo Zoom: Extension Cable Grip Zoom Demand Mounting Clamp
Servo Focus: Focus Servo Module Extension Cable Focus Servo Demand Mounting Clamp
Manual Zoom: Zoom Manual Module Flexible Cable Zoom Handle Mounting Clamp
Manual Focus: Focus Manual Module Flexible Cable Focus Handle Focus Manual Demand Mounting Clamp
Model No.
53.5x6.5RM 512x6.6RM 512x6.6ERM 514x6.6ERM 516x7RM
New 1 / 2" Format Zoom Lenses
F
Focal Length
Built-in Extension
1.4 4.8 - 17mm -
1.4 6.6 - 80mm -
1.4 6.6 - 80mm
2X
1.4 6.6 - 92mm
2X
1.4 7 - 112mm
MOD
0.3m 0.95m 0.95m
0.8m 0.95m
Horizontal Field of View
67°22' 62°26' 62°26'
51°44' 49°42'
21°19' 5°43' 5°43'
3°59' 3°19'
Filter Size
72mm 72mm 72mm 77mm
77m
Optional
Converters
Wide
Tele.
0.8X 0.8X
0.8X 0.8X
1.85X 1.85X
1.85X 1.85X
Weight
1.50kg 1.35kg 1.40kg 1.48kg 1.36kg
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 75
DIH
672 White Plains Rd. Scarsdale, NY 10583
(914) 472-9800
1 - Inch and 1-1 / 4- Inch Zoom Lenses for Studio and Field Productions
ZOOM LENSES
P17x16.5ESM
P14x16.5ESM
1 - Inch Format Zoom Lenses
Model No. R14x2.5ESM
Focal Length 1.6 12.5 - 175mm
Built-in Extender
2X
R17x12.5ESM 1.6 12.5 - 212mm R20x10.5ESM 1.6 10.5 - 210mm
1.5X, 2X 1.5X, 2X
R30x16ESM
1.8 16 - 500mm
2X
R44x13.5ESM 1.8 13.5 - 350mm
2X
MOD 0.75m 0.75m 0.75m
2.5m 2.5m
Horizontal Field of View 54°13' - 2°06'
54°13' - 1°17'
62°44' - 3°29'
43036 ,_ 0044,
60 044,_ 0028,
Pattern Proj. OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
Operation
Iris
Zoom
Focus Weight
Servo Manual/ Servo
Servo Manual/ Servo
Servo Manual/ Servo
Manual/ Servo
25kg
Manual/ Servo
24kg
Manual/ 20.5kg Servo
Servo Servo
Manual/ Servo
Manual/ Servo
Manual/ Servo
27kg
Manual/ 25.5kg Servo
1 - 1 / 4- Inch Format Zoom Lenses
Model No. P14x16.5ESM 2.1
Focal Length 16.5 - 230mm
Built-in Extender
2X
P17x16.5ESM 2.1
16.5 - 280mm
1.5X, 2X
P20x14ESM
2.1
14 - 280mm
1.5X, 2X
P30x2OESM
2.2 20 - 620mm
2X
P44x18ESM
2.4 18 - 800mm
2X
MOD 0.75m 0.75m 0.75m
2.5m 2.5m
Horizontal Field of View 54°50' - 2°08' 54060 ,_ 3030 ,
62°53' - 3°20'
46°20 0°47'
50°44' 0°28'
Pattern Proj. OPT OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
Operation
Iris
Zoom
Focus Weight
Servo Servo
Manual/ Servo
Manual/ Servo
Manual/ Servo
Manual/ Servo
25kg 21kg
Servo Manual/ Manual/ 20.5kg
Servo
Servo
Servo Manual/ Servo
Manual/ Servo
28kg
Servo Manual/ Manual/ 25.5kg
Servo
Servo
VC-76
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
_P'UJ
CCTV LENSES
m 672 White Plains Rd. Scarsdale, NY 10583 (914) 472-9800
CCTV LENSES
H6x12.5D
23" Image Format 17;' Mount
Manual Fixed Focal Length
HF5 5A HF9A
HF16A HF35A
5.5
1.6
9
1.4
16
1.4
35
1.7
Manual Variable Focal Length
0.2 0.3 .0.4
0.3
Manual iris and focus
Manual iris and focus Manual iris and focus
Manual iris and focus
77°19'
52°06' 30'45'
H6X 1250
1-18X 125A 1-C7Jxiig
12.5-75
1.4
1.0
12.5-100
2.0
1.0
11-110
1.6
1.0
Servo Neutral Density Fixed Focal Length
Manual iris, zoom and focus Manual iris, zoom and focus
Manual iris, focus and geared zoom ring
3847' - 6°43' 38'47' - 5°02' 43"36' - 4"45'
HF5 5A-SND HF9A-SND HF16A-SND
55 9 16
16to 0.2 T 1500 14to 0.3 T 1500 14to 0.4 T 1500
Servo Neutral Density Variable Focal Length
Auto iris, manual focus Auto iris, manual focus Auto iris, manual focus
77"19' 5206' 3045'
H6X12.5G-SND 12 5-75 H1OXI1B-SND 11-110
14to 1.0 T 1500
1.6 to 10
T/1500
12V DC Motorized Variable Focal Length
H6X12.5GMD-3 12.5-75 H10x118MD-3 11-110
1.4
1.0
1 6
1 0
Lens Accessories
Auto iris. 12V DC motorized zoom and focus Auto iris. 12V DC motorized zoom and focus
Motorized iris, zoom and focus Motorized iris, zoom and focus
38'47' - 6"43' 43'36' - 4'46'
3847' - 6'43' 43'36' - 4'45'
Tele and Wide Angle Converters ( Front End Screw- In Type)
Model
Type
Lens To Be Used On
Focal Length mm
Magnification Factor
524) P= 0.75mm 46(1) P = 0.75mm 434) P = 0.75mm 494) P = 0.75mm
524) P = 0.75mm 624, P = 0.75mm 674) P = 0.75mm
77(1) P = 0.75mm 624) P = 0.75mm 52(1) P = 0.75mm
52(1) P = 0.75mm 674)P = 0.75mm
524) P = 0.75mm 674) P = 075mm
Usable Focal Length With Converter
TCV 52 WC V-52 TCV-70 WCV-70
Model No.
Tele
Wide Tele
Wide Range of Use
cm
Fi6X12 5D
1-16X12 5D HIOX1113 H10X118
Mounting Diameter and Pitch - mm
1" Lens Format Close up Lens
CL12072 CL21072 CL16086 CL5082 CL6082 CL8082 CL12082 CL23082 CL190101 CL 100101
73-120
100-210 78-160 40-50
46-60 57-80 75-120 105-230
92-190 64-100
72 4)P 0.75
72 4) P - 0.75
86 443 0.75 82 4,P 0.75 82 4)p 0.75
82 443 - 0.75
824)P= 0.75 824)P= 0.75 101 chP= 1.0 101 irbp, 1.0
1" Range Extender
CE15 CE20
1.5x ' C' Mount 2.0x ' C' Mount
2/3" Close-up Lens
CL8662 CL14062
50-86 66-140
674)P= 0.75 67 diP= 0.75
12 5-75mm 11 5-75mm 11.110mm it liOmm
Lens to Be Used On
C5x20 C5x20 C8x17 5 C10x16B C10x16B ClOxl 6B C10x16B C10x16B C10x16A C10x16A
15X 08X
16X 08X
46-112.5mm 10-60mm 75-176mm
8.8-88mm
2/3" Range Extender
HE- 15 HE- 20
1.5x 2.0x
' C' Mount ' C' Mount
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
55(1) x41mm 494) x47mm 464) x37mm 524) x59.5mm
54(1) x126mm 654) x145.5mm 724) x145mm
884. x53mm 88(1) x64.8mm 884) x66.8mm
1104. x122mm 114iii x142mm
110d) x122mm 1144) x142mm
H10X11B
0.2kg 0.2kg 0.15kg 0.24kg 0.4kg 0.8kg 0.75kg 0.35kg 0.40kg 0.40kg 1.3kg 1.32kg 13kg 1.32kg
VC- 77
PUJIH
rikri
672 White Plains Rd. Scarsdale, NY 10583 (914) 472-9800
CCTV LENSES - FIXED FOCAL LENGTH AND ZOOM, MANUAL AND MOTORIZED, NEUTRAL DENSITY AND NON- BROWNING (RADIATION- RESISTANT).
H6x1 2.5D
CCTV \LENSES
C10x16A-SN
1" Image Format ' C' Mount
Model
Focal Length mm
Max. 1. Stop
M.O.D. M Description
Horizontal Field of View
Filter Size
Manual Fixed Focal Length
CF8A CF12 5A
CF25B CF25L CF5013 CF5OL CF75A
8 12.5 25 25 50 50
75
1.8 1.4 1.4
0.85 1.4
0.7 1.8
0.2
Manual iris and focus
0.3
Manual iris and focus
0.3
Manual iris and focus
0.6
Manual iris and focus
1.0
Manual iris and focus
3.0
Manual iris and focus
1.0
Manual iris and focus
7719'
54"13' 2843'
28'43' 1435' 1435
945'
524) P = 0.75mm
5243P = 0.75mm 40.54) P = 0.5mm
524) P = 0.75mm 494) P = 0.75mm 824) P = 0.75mm 494) P = 0.75mm
Manual Variable Focal Length
C5X20A C6X17.5B
20-100
1.8
17.5-105
1.8
C8X18A C10X16A
C10X16B
C14X2513
18-144
2.0
16-160
1.8
16-160
2.5
25-350
3.5
2.0
Manual iris, zoom and focus
1.3
Manual iris, zoom and focus
1.5
Manual iris, zoom and focus
1.8
Manual iris, zoom and focus
2.0
Manual iris, zoom and focus
1.7
Manual iris, zoom and focus
3529' - T19' 38'44' -- 7'07' 3909' - 505'
43 36' - 435' 43 36' 435' 28 30 .- 205'
724) P = 0.75mm 584) P = 0.75mm 86(1) P = 1.0mm
101(1)P = 1.0mm 82(1)P = 0.75mm 92(1) P 1mm
Servo Neutral Density Fixed Focal Length
CF8A-SND CF12 5A-SND CF25B-SND CF50B-SND CF75A SND
8 125 25 50 75
1.8 to 0.2 T1500 14to 0.3 T 1500 14to 0.3 T 1500
14to 1.0 T 1500 18to 1.0 T 1500
Auto iris, manual focus Auto iris, manual focus Auto iris, manual focus Auto iris, manual focus Auto iris, manual focus
7719' 54 -13' 28'43' 1435'
945'
774, P = 0.75mm 554, P - 0.75mm 494, P - 0.75mm 494, P = 0.75mm 494, P = 0.75mm
Servo Neutral Density Variable Focal Length
C5X20A-SND
20-100
C6X17.5B-SND 17.5-105
C10X16A-SNO C10X16B-SND
16-160 16-160
1.8 to 2.0 T 1500 1.8 to 1.3 T/1500
1.8 to 1.8 T 1500 25to 2.0 T 1500
Auto iris. 12V DC motorized zoom and focus Auto Iris 12V DC motorized zoom and focus
Auto iris. 12V DC motorized zoom and focus Auto iris. 12V DC motorized zoom and focus
35'29' 719' 724, P - 0.75mm 38°44'-rOT 584) P=0.75mm 43 36' 435' 1014) P= 1.0mm 43 36' 445' 824, P - 0.75mm
Electronic Eye Auto Iris Fixed Focal Length
CF12.5C-EE
12 5
2 4
CF25B-EE
25
1 4
CF50D-EE
50
2 8
Non- Browning Radiation Resistant
0 3
0 3 1 0
CF12 5N CF25N CF5ON C5X3ON-MD3
12 5 25
50 30-150
2 0 2 0
2 0 25
0 3 0 5
0 9 1 8
Auto iris, manual focus Auto iris, manual focus Auto iris, manual focus
Manual iris and focus Manual iris and focus Manual iris and focus 12V DC motorized iris. zoom and focus
54 13'
28 43' 14 35'
824, P = 0.75mm 774, P = 0.75mm 774, P = 0.75mm
54 13' 28 43' 14 35' 24 03'
4 54'
464, P = 0.75mm 434, P = 0.75mm 464, P = 0.75mrn 724, P = 0.75mm
12V DC Motorized Variable Focal Length
C5X2OMD3
20-100
1 8
C6X17 5MD3
17 5-105
1 8
C10X16AMD3
16-160
1 8
C10X16BM03
16-160
25
C14X25BMD3 25-350
35
20 1 3 1 8 2.0 1 7
Motorized iris zoom and
focus Motorized iris zoom and focus
Motorized iris. zoom and focus Motorized iris zoom and focus Motorized iris zoom and focus
35 29' 719' 38 44' 707' 43 36' 435' 43 36' 435' 28 30' 205'
724, P = 0.75mm 584) P=0.75mm 101(6 P= 1.0mm 82(1)P = 0.75mm 92(1) P = 1.0mm
VC- 78
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Diameter mm xLength mm
Weight
55(1) x43mm 54d) x67mm 434, x46.5mm 544) x46.8mm
524) x74.5mm 88d) x75.5mm 524, x74.5mm
0.25kg 0.21kg 0.13kg
0.25kg 0.3kg 1.1kg 0.33kg
824) x171.5mm 604) x142mm
904, x218mm 105.54, x215mm 864) x188.5mm 954, x307mm
1.3kg 0.5kg 1.8kg 22.4kg 1.5kg 2.4kg
884, x53mm 884, x69mm 884, x66mm 88d, x70mm 884) x85rnm
0.35 kg 0.49kg 0.48kg 0.51kg 0.58kg
116x 110x 171 . 5mm 2:4kg
1134) x142mm
1.3kg
130 x120 x213mm 4.0kg
123 x113 x188 5mm 2.3kg
854) x66.5mm 844 x52.5mm 844, x76.2mm
40.24, x45.3mm 464) x34.7mm 49.24, x56.8mm 1224) x226mm
0.5kg 0.34kg 0.47kg
0.18kg 0.13kg 0.19kg 2.0kg
116x 110 x171 5mm 24kg
1134) x142mm
1.3kg
130x 120x 213mm 4.0kg
123 x113 x188.5mm 2.3kg
95d) x307mm
3.0kg
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
Intelligent Vision Systems Operation 890 7th North Street
Liverpool, NY 13088 (315) 456-2615
TN2200/TN2201 Solid- State Automation Camera
100% Solid State Reliability Small Size Low Power Consumption Precise Spatial Geometry
Variable Pixel Data Rate to 350 kHz Standard and to 500 kHz if Specified at Time of Order Placement
Flexible Iiterfacing No Image Burn and/or Lag Drift Free Scanning Integrating Detectors
BLEMISH SPECIFICATION
Maximum 8 black or white pixels at 3() frames/ second 25°C ( 77 ° F) ambient.
LENS SELECTION
Lens selection for the TN2200 is a function of match-
ing the scene observed to the active area of the micro-
sensor. Pixels are located on 0.0018 inch centers and generally may be considered contiguous. Thus, the
image size is 128 x 0.0018 - 0.2304 inch per side. Applying the normal lens formula,
Object Size (OS)
Image Size ( IS)
Object Distance (0D) Focal Length ( FL)
will yield the proper lens selection.
The TN2200 is designed to accept C- mount lenses which have a fixed back mounting flange length of 0. (; 9 inch. The viewing angle can be selected by choosing standard lenses. The following chart lists the ratio of distance from an object to the size of an object for available lenses.
1N2200 ( 128 x128 ARRAY)
Focal Length
mm
inches
Object Size/Object Distance
4.5 6.5 9 12.5 16 17 25 35 50 75 100
0.18 0.26 0.35 0.50 0.63 0.67 1.0 1.4 2.0 3.0 4.0
1.3 0.89 0.65 0.46 0.37 0.34 0.23 0.17 0.12 0.08 0.06
For example, to view a 6- inch object at a 4- foot distance, the object size/distance ratio is 0.5 4 0.125. Therefore, a 50 mm lens is appropriate for this application.
SOLID STATE CID CAMERA
TN2200 Series Automation Cameras, featuring apatented CID Microsensor, compact, rugged design, variable scan rate, and square pixel spacing. Coupled to microprocessor or minicomputer controlled signal processing and controlled lighting, these cameras can provide visual inputs to control quality of small parts, monitor machine operations, sort produce, guide robot arms, gather scientific data, and a host of other applications.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Power Source + 15V at 50 ma
Mechanical
Weight: Fixed Read Cameras
24 oz (670 gr)
Remotable Head Cameras Remote Head Only Remote Body Only
27 oz 8 oz 19 oz
(680 gr) (227 gr) (539 gr)
Lens Mount Standard " C" Mount
1inch ( 25.4 mm) 32 Thread
Camera Mount:
1/4 x20 Tapped Hole
Connector: Amphenol 67- 03- E- 14-12-P
Case:
Dust Tight Aluminum Extrusion
Envi ron mental
Ambient Temperature. 0 to 50"C ( 32 to 123 FI
Altitude:
50,000 ft ( 15,240 m)
Signal-to- Noise Ratio
Temporal SNR Spatial SNR
256:1 typical 25:1 typical
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 79
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
Intelligent Vision Systems Operation
890 7th North Street Liverpool, NY 13088 (315)456-2615
SOLID STATE CID CAMERAS
TN2500 CID Solid-state Video Camera
FEATURES: · Analog and Digital Outputs · Interlaced or Sequential Scan · Antiblooming · No Image Burn or Lag · Non Microphonic · No Operating Adjustments · Operable in High Magnetic Environment · Low Voltage Operation · Two Unit Versatile Construction
General Electric's TN 2500 represents a 3rd generation CID solid-state television camera with 30% higher resolution than provided by CID imagers used in previous GE solid-state cameras. This camera provides both ANALOG and DIGITAL outputs, with several user selectable features; making it an extremely versatile unit appropriate to many applications.
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Line Voltage:
117 VAC ±- 10% 12 VDC ( Optional)
Imager Elements: Pixel Size: Blemish Content:
244 Vertical x248 Horizontal
1.4 x 1.8 Mil ( 36 x46 Micrometers)
Less than 10 Blemishes Total (White and/or Black)
Composite Video Output: Synchronization Outputs:
1Volt p- p into 75 ohms
Horizontal, Vertical and Element Rate Clock
Element Rate Clock Frequency: Digital Output:
4.5 MHz
TTL Compatible 8 Bit Parallel Output
SNR:
43 dB Nominal ( Peak Signal to RMS Noise)
ALC Range:
60,000 to 1with Optional Auto Iris Lens
AGC:
101 with Automatic Bandwidth Compression
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Weight:
Remote Head Approx 12 Oz. ( 341 gms)
Camera Control Unit Approx 57 Oz. ( 1619 gms)
Lens Mount:
Standard " C" Mount ( 1"-32 Thread)
Lens:
25 mm, f1.4 ( Standard)
Remote Head Mount:
1/4-20 Tapped Hole
Connectors
Lens Power--Winchester--SM 2 SN Video Out--BNC
Video In ( Gen-Lock)--BNC
Remote Head--Amphenol HDP20 Series Digital & Control Interface
--Amplienol HDP20 Series
Remote Head Cable:
Standard 5foot Length
Optional-- Extender Cable 10 ft, 20 ft, 45 ft long
REMOTE READ
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ..'.·
VC -80
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
INTELLIGENT VISION SYSTEMS OPERATION 890 7th North Street Liverpool, NY 13088 (315) 456-2615
SOLID STATE CID CAMERAS
TN2505
SOLID-STATE CID CAMERAS
PERFORMANCE FEATURES · Display Format: 11 · Sensor Format: 244 x388 · CID Saturation S/N: 50 · Sensitivity S/N: a) 50 lux (4.5 FC) scene
illumination 46; b) 11 lux ( 1FC) scene illumination 34 · Modulation Transfer Function is Better than 90% · Integral Power Supply: Power Consumption 2Watts ( nominal) · Operating Voltage: 12-35 VDC or 120 Volt with Separate AC Adaptor · Ambient Temperature is 0° - 50°C
The General Electric TN2505 Security and Surveillance camera provides its user with exceptional performance, solid-state reliability and flexibility for security, surveillance and industrial CCTV applications.
The TN2505 is VLSI/LS' based, utilizing an LSI Scan Generator, LSI Preamplifier, and CID ( Charge Injection Device) imager with a horizontal resolution of 388 elements. The performance of this unique camera is quantified by asignal to noise ratio of 50dB. The camera also provides its user with a wide range ALC and selectable 0, +6, + 12dB gain boost.
The GE TN2505 has abuilt-in power supply which consumes less than 2watts of power. Its operating voltage is 12-35 VDC or 110/220 volts with its separate AC adaptor.
All of this, and more, has been neatly packaged in arugged case, only 3" x3" x21 /2 " and weighs less than one pound.
· TN2505 CID Imager 244 x388 pixels ( RS-170 Compatible)
SIGNAL TO NOISE AC PLATE I'L'EUNTINA ION
Loo
· COLOR
NPFRA TURF
120.,
· SCENT CONTRAST 100N
· If 1 · TRANSTAISSION POL.
16
roo 1 no --······,
ROO
--
What The TN2505 With VLSI/LSI Means:
· CID IMAGER
No geometric distortion or miCrOphonicS
· CIRCUITRY
High reliability Performance
· COMPACT SIZE
· LIGHTWEIGHT
· VERY LOW POWER
Easier installation and concealment
Installation on lighter support structures and poles
Permits battery Operation for portability
Virtually no blooming or lag virtually maintainance free operation Can be used with smaller housings Reduced wind load with smaller enclosures Little temperature rise In confined Space
No performance degradation over time
Resistant to shock and vibration
RetrolitS to existing optics
Permits faster pan and tilt motion
Low energy costs
New Dimensions In CCTV
kFEES MOT./ 1003240 SO THREAT, 1ST AROMA° C MOUNT,
;
.5 mom,
Mechanical
1510 men.
· Weight: 13.5 oz.
· Lens Mount: Standard C-
Mount 1.00-32 Thread
· Lens: 25mm Standard
· Camera Mount: 1/4 -20 Thread (top and bottom)
· Video Connectors: BNC
· Power, I/O and Inc
Connectors
· Thorkum Circular
Connectors
ERUPT.. ILLU'ATIN·TIOTE
CID SPECTRAL ITT SPONSIVI TV ITVPICAL I
4TN2505A1 4TN2505A2 4TN2505A3 4TN2505A4
Solid-State Camera Solid-State Camera Solid-State Camera Solid-State Camera
244 x388 Sensor 244 x388 Sensor 244 x388 Sensor 244 x388 Sensor
Line Lock Crystal Control RS170 Sync Lock RS170 H & V Drive
$2,100.00 2,100.00 2,200.00 2,200.00
4TN2505B1 4TN2505B2 4TN2505B3
4TN2505B4
Remote Head Solid-State Camera Remote Head Solid-State Camera Remote Head Solid-State Camera
Remote Head Solid-State Camera
244 x388 Sensor 244 x388 Sensor 244 x388 Sensor
244 x388 Sensor
Line Lock Crystal Control RS170 Sync Lock RS170 H & V Drive
2,700.00 2,700.00 2,800.00 2,800.00
4TN2506A1 4TN2506A2 4TN2506A3 4TN2506A4
Solid-State Camera Solid-State Camera Solid-State Camera Solid-State Camera
290 x416 Sensor 290 x416 Sensor 290 x416 Sensor 290 x416 Sensor
Line Lock Crystal Control Sync Lock H & V Drive
2,100.00 2,100.00 2,200.00 2,200.00
4TN2506B1 Remote Head Solid-State Camera
290 x416 Sensor
Line Lock
4TN2506B2 Remote Head Solid-State Camera
290 x416 Sensor
Crystal Control
100
600
1000
200
4TN2506B3 Remote Head Solid-State Camera
290 x416 Sensor
Sync Lock
LARALLF.TAI MANOMETER.
4TN2506B4 Remote Head Solid-State Camera
290 x416 Sensor
& V Drive
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
2,700.00 2,700.00 2,800.00 2,800.00
VC-81
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
Intelligent Vision Systems Operation 890 7th North Street Liverpool, NY 13088 (315) 456-2615
SOLID STATE CID CAMERAS
TN2507 SOLID STATE CID CAMERA
The TN2507 monochrome video cameta contains an imager of 488 x 388 pixels and is RS170 compatible for domestic applications.
The new camera employs custom LSI circuitry with limited discrete parts, enabling it to be smaller ( 3" x3" x2-1/2"), lighter ( less than one pound) and more rugged than previously marketed monochrome
cameras.
An advanced " safeguard" process and differential readout gives CID imagers several performance attributes, including higher signal output and significant noise reduction. An anti- reflective coating allows absorbtion of incident light rays to agreater degree, therefore gaining more signal current. This contributes to asignificantly higher signal-to-noise ratio for optimum imaging performance.
The TN2507 accepts standard Cmount, auto iris lenses for flexibility. There is virtually no camera adjustment required for operation.
The internal power supply is ahighly efficient design with excellent regulation that allows operation from a 12 to 35V DC source. Separate miniature adaptors allow operation from either 120V AC or
220V AC, 60 Hz.
4TN2507A1 Solid State Camera, 488 x388 Sensor, Line
Lock
$2700.00
4TN2507A2 Solid State Camera, 488 x388 Sensor, Crystal
Control
2700.00
TN2509 SOLID STATE AUTOMATION CID CAMERA
For machine vision applications that require square pixel, 256 x256 x 8bit image data, the TN2509 Monochrome Camera utilizes an imager having 28 micron square pixels which are structured to provide contiguous relationship. A unique electrode structure provides a wide dynamic range with each pixel having a storage capacity of 1,800,000 carriers.
This camera makes extensive use of custom LSI circuitry with limited discrete parts thereby allowing it to be physically small ( 3" x3" x 2-1/2") and light in weight ( less than 1pound).
The camera is fully enclosed and accepts standard C mount lenses. There is virtually no camera adjustment required for operation.
The internal power supply is ahighly efficient design with excellent regulation that allows operation from a 12 to 35V DC source. Separate miniature adaptors allow operation from either 120V AC, 60/50 Hz. or 220V AC, 50 Hz.
Synchronization of the camera is with 5 Volt TTL level, 75 ohm impedance signals consisting of horizontal reset, vertical reset, and input clock. The model 4TN2509A7A requires a10 MHz clock which produces a 5.0 MHz element rate. The 4TN2509A7B requires a 14.318 MHz clock which results in a7.159 MHz element rate.
Inject/Inhibit control is also included for implementation of stop action or image integration. The source of these signals or control points may be remoted by several hundred feet.
SYSTEM INTEGRATION The TN2509 camera as it is received from General Electric is complete with a120 Volt 60 Hz AC adaptor which supplies 24 Volts DC to the camera through its 10 foot interconnecting cable. A standard coaxial cable IRG59/U) with BNC connectors is used to provide video signals to modified 525 line rate monitors. Some monitors may need horizontal frequency adjustment in order to synchronize to camera
video. The TN2509 is intended to be locked to an external clock, horizontal reset, and vertical reset signals which can be generated in the timing and control module.
OPTICAL VERSATILITY The TN2509 has aunique optics centering feature. A machined lens adaptor is mounted to the front camera casting and provides precision optical centering or bore sighting of the CID sensor. A threaded " C" mount lens adaptor and locking ring provides close-up lens adaptation.
TN2507
4TN2507A3 Solid State Camera, 488 x388 Sensor, RS170 Sync
Lock
2800.00
4TN2507A4 Solid State Camera, 488 x388 Sensor, RS170 HEtV
Drive
2800.00
TN2509
TIMING AND CONTROL MODULE An accessory module which generates appropriate timing for external clock, H- reset, V- reset, and Inject/Inhibit is available for the TN2509. The Input/Output signals for the timing and control module
are:
INPUTS AC to 5V DC Supply Inject/Inhibit ( BNC)
OUTPUTS Element Rate Clock ( TTL)
H- Video Flag ITTL)
V- Video Flag ( TTL) Sync to Monitor H- Reset ( BNC) V- Reset ( BNC(
10 MHz or 14.318 MHz Clock ( BNC)
Variations to the standard timing are available for a nominal setup charge. When ordering, refer to TN2509 Timing and Control Module.
VC-82
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
Closed Circuit TV Operation 316 East Ninth Street Owensboro, KY 42301 (502) 685-6200
4TE-44 Series CCTV Cameras
General Electric's 4TE-44 CCTV cameras are designed to provide optimum performance, reliability and flexibility in avariety of surveillance and industrial imaging applications, at a moderate price. Quartz crystal controlled, random interlace or line locked RS- 170 sync, high quality components used in design proven circuits, together with awide selection of one- inch vidicons insure the adaptability of these cameras to most video installations. The 4TE-44 model is intended for indoor applications.
· Patented automatic beam current regulator circuit automatically compensates for normal vidicon aging eliminating the need for manual adjustment.
· Automatic black level clamp precisely maintains setup level over varying temperature and lighting conditions.
· Wide ALC range for automatic operation at varying light levels.
· Superior GE designed and manufactured deflection yoke eliminates need for image tube alignment.
· VTR compatible. · Completely solid state ( except vidicon). · Single, high quality glass epoxy circuit board
with plated through holes for greater reliability. · Component locations are printed on circuit
board to facilitate servicing. · Cable compensator circuit provides improved
performance on long cable runs. · Full sweep failure protection. · Light averaging circuit to enhance background
information.
OPTIONS · External H & V drives ( B models only) · Input voltages
24 VAC 117 VAC 230 VAC 50 Hz · Wide range auto iris lens options 12.5mm f/1.4 25mm f/1.4 50mm f/1.8 · Vidicons Integral Mesh Silicon Target Separate Mesh Newv ico n®
· Sync Crystal controlled random interlace 2:1 interlace RS- 170
CCTV CAMERAS
STANDARD
INPUT VOLTAGE (OPTIONAL) INPUT POWER HORIZONTAL SWEEP VERTICAL SWEEP COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT SYNC VIDEO BANDWIDTH SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO GEOMETRIC DISTORTION GRAY SCALE RENDITION SCAN RATE
CONTROLS
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
ENVIRONMENTAL
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE HUMIDITY LIMITS
MECHANICAL
LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT LENS MOUNT CAMERA MOUNT CONNECTORS SHIPPING WEIGHT SHIPPING VOLUME
II, VAC . Hz · Is , 15,, 130 VAC 56 lir 11 eat. BZ 117V IS /50 FIr W Hz I4p p nlo 75 ohms ()earls trzstel controlled random Interlace 9 MHz Better lhan 40db twooleed)
ot seclure 10 shad, 575 lase 60 !Sr ( standard, 625, hno 50 Fir lonhenall
None Electra Fosys. Bearn Selo, V Sire H S. V Center Scene Averepso. Target llama o,rel), Lots Pooker lotrooktnol. Inter not Frequency ( honsontal hold)
30 ·C to · 60·C 95414
12 34 In Ill Morn) OW to IS 24crro) 3 16 in 02crn1 601. : 271.1
BNC 85 lbs · 31113q, Oties »
ORDER MODEL NUMBER
IMAGE TUBE DESCRIPTION Veil. or,
TE44A TE44B
/iiinnilard Vit -or.
TE44ASA TE44BSA
1. ni-ti S..'os Target
01d1Cor.
Type Number
4531
Sensitivity · Faceplate Illumination Full Video Useable Picture Resolution Automatic Light Control Range
31, Ol)e 125 lines It/ WO I
SPECIAL CIRCUITS Peak White Clipper Automatic Beam Current Regulator Automatic Black Level Clamp High Frequency Beaker Full Sweep Failure Proteciton External Drive Capability . Light Averaging Control ( Scene) Auto Target Target Voltage Linhtet
sit et .... its B ( 44,,it, v'' t" 4'
races . to National Bureau of Standard..
01Sle Wile 70C lines I 250.1./00 1 with 1. 4 1.460 auto Tt, lens
es .. ss -, B Oevionat Not Req d Not arq (I Not Reg 3
TE44ASM TE44BSM
TE44ANV TE44BNV
1 inch Separate Mesh
Vidicon
1 inch Hetero ! unction
(Newvicon * /
B541
S4076
3k 01k BOO lines 10.000 I
e se ett se B Optional se tot se
02k 007k 700 lows 800.000: I with II 4/360 aut4ins lens
e se se
B Optional Not Read Not Req'd Not Reed
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-83
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
Closed Circuit TV Operation 316 East Ninth Street Owensboro, KY 42301 (502) 685-6200
CCTV CAMERAS
4TE45 Series CCTV Camera
General Electric's 4TE45 CCTV cameras provide exceptional performance, reliability and flexibility in most surveillance and industrial imaging applications. A wide selection of one- inch vidicons, combined with the use of high quality components, design proven circuits, including quartz crystal controlled, random interlace or line locked RS- 170 sync, insure compliance with most demanding specifications. The 4TE45 camera is integrally housed in a weather resistant, tamper resistant housing. ·Patented automatic beam current regulator cir-
cuit automatically compensates for normal vidicon aging eliminating the need for manual adjustment. ·Automatic black level clamp precisely maintains setup level over varying temperature and lighting conditions. ·Wide ALC range for automatic operation at varying light levels. ·Superior GE designed and manufactured deflection yoke eliminates need for image tube
alignment.
·VTR compatible. ·Completely solid state ( except vidicon). ·Single, high quality glass epoxy circuit board
with plated through holes for greater reliability. 'Component locations are printed on circuit
board to facilitate servicing. ·Cable compensator circuit provides improved
performance on long cable runs. ·Full sweep failure protection. ·Light averaging circuit to enhance background
information. OPTIONS
'External FISIV drives (B models only) 'Input voltages
24 VAC 117 VAC 230 VAC 50Hz ·Wide range of auto- iris lens options
'Vidicons Integral Mesh Silicon Target Separate Mesh Newvicon®
'Sync Crystal controlled random interlace 2:1 interlace RS- 170
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT VOLTAGE
DIPLIT POWER HORIZONTAL SWEEP VERTICAL SWEEP COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT SYNC VIDEO BANDWIDTH SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO
Grobirnuc DISTORTION
GRAY SCALD RENDITION SCAN RATE
CONTROLS
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
ENVIRONMENTAL
[AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 111114IDTTY LIMITS
MECHANICAL
LENGTH WIDTH HEIGHT WEIGHT UNS MOUNT CAMERA MOUNT CONNECTORS SHIPPING WEIGHT SHIPPING VOLUME
117 VAC. 60Ha I · 10%
15%) lOgnonel). 24 VAC. 6011. (OrPonelL 230 VAC. 500,
12 walla 0 II7V
I5.750/1:
130Ha I4pp into 75 ohms Quartz meet controlled random ' Mariam,
9NH: Bolter than 40db larpohmell
02% ol anctvre height
10 Pledge
525 line. 0/014. ( Pendard) 625 lose 5014a ( op..»
None Electric Focus. Baan, Setup. V Sara H Sims V Center. SOW. A4ea119114d· ndget ( Lunn or Se, Low Peak« ( StreekIng). In»me) Fraguan, ( Honaontel Hold)
-30·C to . 60·C 101)%
25 313 in (64.5cm) 650 In 121 6osnt 5.313 113 7cm1 12 5lb. IS 7kol
· 20 ( 2/ BNC 1 0lb. ( 6Bag/ I7cu
Random unions«
ORDER MODEL NUMBER
NSITO
trp,45A TFA5B
IMAGE TUBE DESCRIPTION
1- inch Standard Vidicon
TE45ASA TE45BSA
I.inch Silicon Target
Vidicon
TE45ASM TE45BSM
I - inch Separate Mesh
Vidicon
Type Number Sensitivity ·
Faceplate lllurnessahon Full Video Useable Picture
Resolution Automatic Light Control Range
SPECIAL CIRCUITS Peak White Clipper Automatic Beam Current Regulator Automatic Black Level Clamp Hite Frequency Peak.e, Full Sweep Failure Protection External Drive Capability Light Averaging Control ( Scene) Auto Target Target Voltage Limiter
Traceable to National Bureau of Standards
7735
.3fc .0Ifc 725 lines 10.000, I
r r r r
a
Optionai r r r
4532
.0151c .0051c 700 lines 1.250,000,1 with 11.4-1360 auto.ITIS lens
r r r r B Optional
Not Req'd
Not Req'd Not ReqUI
8541
.3k .011c 800 lines 10,000:1
r r r
e
B Optional
r
r r
TEA5ANV TEAS/3NY
I - inch Hetero Junction
Vidicon (Newvionne )
S4076
.02fc .0071c 750 lines 800,000,1 with 11.4-1360 auto- Iris lens
r r r
B Optional Not Reci'd Not Req'd Not Rent il
VC-84
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
Closed Circuit TV Operation 316 East Ninth Street Owensboro, KY 42301 (502) 685-6200
CCTV CAMERAS
4TE-50 Site Gard ICCTV Camera The General Electric 4TE-50 series of CCTV cameras present the latest state-of-the-art developments in camera technology. Designed for professional use, they offer high sensitivity over a broad range of lighting conditions and the flexibility
that permits use in most systems where outstanding performance and dependability are of primary importance.
· Beam regulation circuit that automatically compensates for normal vidicon aging, minimizing manual beam adjustment.
· Instant-set that returns set-up and video level to factory preset level for ease in installation and servicing.
· Selectable frequency response booster for extra crisp pictures.
· High resolution, broad bandwidth design for sharper pictures.
· Capability to drive or be driven by other cameras.
OPTIONS
· Automatic bandwidth compression with LED indicator. Optimizes sensitivity and performance at low light levels.
· Full sweep failure protection.
· External drive capability with H&V, composite sync or Gen- Lock.
· Programmable EIA or CCIR sync. · Jumper selectable 117/230V, 60/50Hz power. · Modular plug-in boards with plated through
holes.
· 10:1 automatic gain control. · Filament regulation for extended tube life. · Reversible H&V sweeps.
4TE-50 SITE GARD ISPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL
INPUT VOLTAGE
INPUT POWER
1,35V to 130 VAC 60/50 Hz
230 VAC e 10%60/50 Hz 20 VAC e 10% 50/60 Hz 23 watts
COMPOSITE VIDEO SYNC
VIDEO BANDWIDTH SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO GEOMETRIC DISTORTION GRAY SCALE RENDITION SCAN RATE AGC
1V p- p onto 75 ohms Adjustable from Ito 12V p- p RU-330. RS- 170. CCIR. Internal sync. exlernal KW droves or t3nn-Lock 11 MHz 55db ( weeghted) · 2% of facture height 1G shades 525/60. 625/50. 675/60 213·15 nunornum
OUTPUTS INPUTS TEMPERATURE RANGE
HUMIDITY
%Niece 0-1 drove. V drove. composole sync 75 ohms. OPhOnen H drive. composole sync. Gen- Lock. V drove 1106 ohrnsl
--,3·C to · 60·C 1--n·F lo ·140·F)
95%
CONTROLS & INDICATORS
EXTERNAL
INTERNAL
MECHANICAL
SIZE WEIGHT CONSTRUCTION LENS MOUNT CONNECTORS CAMERA MOUNT
Bandwidth compression indocator power on/off Belch and Ind color, beam. electrocal focus. rnechanocal focus. Instant sel Belch. vale° level, setup V eoze. H son. V center. H center. aulo·target lorno1. low peakong Istreekong). horozontal hold ( 65-1701. HAY reverse, wrote clop. target auto/manual. gamma
1213-L v525"W va75-1.1 ( 305cm a 13 Urn e12101111 9C lbs Ill kg) Aloononurn castongs and extrusoons
BBC Two .." e20 ( one moveable)
Sensitivity:* Faceplate Illumination Full Video Useable Picture (. 25V Video) Resolution ( Typical) Automatic Light Control Range
SPECIAL CIRCUITS Peak White Clipper Gamma Correction Automatic Black Level Clamp High Frequency Peaker Automatic Beam Current Regulator Light Averaging Control ( Scene) Auto Gain Control Automatic Target Control
1- inch Standard Vidicon
7735
1- inch Silicon Target
Vidicon 4532H
1- inch
Separate Mesh Vidicon 8541
1- inch Newvicone
S4076
.05 fc 0.015 fc 750 lines 100,000:1
.002 fc .0003 fc 700 lines 20,000,000:1 with f1.4-f360 auto- iris lens 10:1 AGC amp.
e
1
i
4
e
e
e
e
1
e
e
Not Applicable
e
e
d
Not Req'd
.015 fc .005 fc 1000 lines 100,000:1
i 4 d
e
i I d
i
.003 fc .001 fc 800 lines 20,000,000:1 with f1.4- f360 auto- iris lens 10:1 AGC amp.
I d 4
e
d
Not Applicable e
Not Req'd
*Traceable to National Bureau of Standards
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-85
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
Closed Circuit TV Operation 316 East Ninth Street Owensboro, KY 42301 (502) 685-6200
4TE63 Site Gard II Series
The General Electric Site Gard II series of CCTV cameras offer traditional GE quality and reliability in a 2./3- inch vidicon camera. Incorporating state-of-the-art circuitry plus features not found in other low cost cameras.
· A choice of models for either 120- volt AC, 60 Hz or 24 volt AC, 60 Hz
· Line locked random or Internal 2:1 RS- 170 ETA standard sync.
· Internal beam, focus and target controls.
·Horizontal resolution of 550 lines and S/N ratio of 43dB.
· Automatic Beam Control ( ABC) and Automatic Electric Focus Control ( AFC) maintain clean sharp picture automatically.
· New metal case and design, along with rugged diecast chassis. Rugged construction provides more stability and better protection from RFI.
ELECTRICAL
INPUT VOLTAGE
H SWEEP V SWEEP SYNC EXTERNAL CONTROLS
MECHANICAL
SIZE WEIGHT CONSTRUCTION LENS MOUNT VIDEO CONNECTOR CAMERA MOUNT
PERFORMANCE
SENSITIVITY: FACEPLATE ILLUMINATION
COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT RESOLUTION ALC RANGE SIGNAL TO NOISE RATIO GEOMETRIC DISTORTION GRAY SCALE RENDITION
CCTV CAMERAS
117 VAC, 60 Hz ( j10%) 9watts 24 VAC, 60 Hz (j 10%) 10 watts 15,750 Hz 60 Hz RS 170 or vertical line locked ( switchable) 525 line, 60 Hz Power ON/OFF, mechanical focus W 39/16" xH 3546- xL83/8" 3.7 lbs Aluminum Will accept "C" mount lens BNC Vs - 20
Sic will produce full video 05fc will produce usable picture 1.0 p- p into 75 ohms 550 lines 20,000:1 43 dB Less than 2% 10 shades
ENVIRONMENTAL
TEMPERATURE HUMIDITY
14°F to 122°F (· 10°C to + 50°C) 90%
VC-86
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
Closed Circuit TV Operation 316 East Ninth Street Owensboro, KY 42301 (502) 685-6200
CCTV CAMERAS
4TE-57 Site Gard III Series
The 4TE-57 Site Gard III camera is the ultimate in very low light level cameras available today. Site Gard Ill has been carefully engineered to provide outstanding performance and GE dependability. General Electric's superiority in low light level cameras is known throughout the world. For hands off, 24- hour- a-day dependable service, Site Gard Ill "On Guard"!
· Electron beam coated lens assures highest
contrast and resolution obtainable under the most adverse conditions. · 15 Billion to 1automatic light compensation. · Utilizes reduced blooming, silicon intensified target vidicon. · Cameras are subjected to a 48- hour " burn- in" before final testing.
· Rugged, dust resistant, all- aluminum case radiates heat away from vidicon to enhance tube life.
· Beam regulator circuit that automatically compensates for vidicon aging.
· Selectable frequency response booster for extra sharp display.
· Automatic bandwidth compression. · Sweep failure protection.
· External drive capability with H&V, composite sync or Gen- Lock.
· Programmable EIA or CCIR sync.
· Jumper selectable 117/230V, 60/50 Hz power. · Modular plug-in boards for easy service. · 10:1 automatic gain control ( AGC). · Separately reversible H&V sweeps.
4TE-57 SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL
INPUT VOLTAGE
INPUT POWER COMPOSITE VIDEO
SYNC
*AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL RANGE VIDEO BANDWIDTH *SENSITIVITY
·RESOLUTION GEOMETRIC DISTORTION GRAY SCALE RENDITION VIDICON SCAN RATE AGC SIGNAL TO NOISE CONTROLS & INDICATORS
OUTPUTS INPUTS TEMPERATURE RANGE
MECHANICAL
SIZE
WEIGHT CONSTRUCTION LENS MOUNT CONNECTORS CAMERA MOUNT
117 VAC ± 10% 60/50 Hz 230 VAC ± 10% 60/50 Hz
24 VAC ± 10% 60/50 Hz 23 Watts
1volt p- pinto 75 ohms. Adjustable from . 4V to 1.2V p- pblack to white
RS- 330, RS- 170. CCIR. internal sync, external H&V drives or Gen- Lock
15 Billion to 1
10 MHz
.000004 ( 4x10= 6)footcandles/faceplate illumination for usable picture . 000012 ( 1.2 x 10= 5)full video 650 lines typical 750 lines maximum
+3% of picture height, 1.5% picture height center, 3% corners 10 shades
Silicon intensified target vidicon 525/60, 625/50
20 db minimum ( 10.1) 45 db
External: Power on/off switch and indicator, beam, electrical focus, mechanical focus, video level. set-up
Internal:
V size, H size, V center, H center, target limit, low peaking, H hold ( RS- 170). H&V reverse, white clip. Gamma
Video, H drive, V drive, composite sync ( 75 ohms)
H drive, V drive ( 10K ohms) composite sync. Gen- Lock --20°C to + 50°C at 95% humidity
4.75"H x 5.25"W x 14.12"L (12.1 cm x 13.3 cm x 35.86 cm) 11.2 lbs. ( 5.0Kg) less lens Aluminum castings and extrusions Type " C" BNC Two 1 /4 "x 20
'Traceable To National Bureau of Standards. Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 87
GITZO KARL HEITZ, INC.
34-11 62 St. P.O. Box 427 Woodside, NY 11377 (718) 565-0004
LEVELLING BALLS/TRIPODS
IND
BR221
BC421
BC621
B621
B421
Gitzo Product Features
Top Precision. Hand assembled, literally custom built to your order, to the most demanding European precision requirements, with stressproof light
metals as used in airplanes.
Optimal Stability. Ingenious design with extra solid tubular legs firmly positioned against rigid center part, gives optimal stability without torque, prevents vibration of camera, telescope.
Easy Handling. Deeply anodized ( 1/10mm), corrosion and rust proof leg extensions and center column, glide smoothly and lock firmly on fiber sleeves ( no metal on metal), with soft cushioned locking rings, for easy, foolproof handling without any binding - ever.
Multiple Choice. More than 100 tripods, short or long for portability or height, with rapid reversible sliding column or Cremaillere gearlift column for fine adjustment, thinner or fatter legs for any light weight (35mm, Super 8mm), medium weight ( 21/ 4 ", 6x7cm), heavy ( 4x5", 5x7", 8x10", 16mm), or extra heavy photo, video, cine cameras, equipment.
Interchangeable Heads. More than 30 photo, ball and video/cine pan-tilt heads, with 90° tilts, 360° panning, plus twin heads, counterbalanced heads, fluid heads, levelling balls for video/cine, with strong, but soft touch handles for smooth moving, tight locking in any position.
323BR
505B
Complete System. More than 15 monopods, multipod, copystand, ladderpods, monocolumns, microphone booms, dollies, attachments, cases, protection stands and platforms, plus side arms, shutters, diaphragms, professional cable and remote releases, light stands, etc.
Economical All- Metal Construction. Uncompromisingly solid, virtually indestructible precision mechanism - the result of over 65 years of expert development - withstands the most rugged use, for lifelong durability.
Easy, Minimal Service. Construction unit system of rolled threads, solid steel bolts, nuts and screws, permits easy detaching, cleaning and replacing of any part by user, without any breakable casts or plastic substitutes, without any unrepairable riveting, without any falling apart ever. And the service quota for GITZO tripods is less than 1%.
Scrupulous Quality Controls, Full Warranty Buyer Protection. Each tripods passes the most severe quality controls, to meet the most rigid European precision standards. And, you are protected by the Full GITZO Warranty For Life plus permanent service and availability of parts.
LEVELLING BALLS With LOCKING GRIP, HEADLOCK, For RAPID ADJUSTMENT 01 FLUID HEADS, Without Or With CENTER COLUMN For HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT 221 BR Levelling Ball 2w/Rapid column for Reporter 221 BC Levelling Ball 2w/Cremaillere gearlift column for Cremaillere 2 321 BR Levelling Ball 3w/Rapid column for Studex 321 BC Levelling Ball 3w/Cremaillere gearlift column for Cremaillere 3
421 B Levelling Ball 4for Super Pro Tele Studex, platform 31 /4 "diameter 421 BR Levelling Ball 4w/Rapid column for Super Pro Tele Studex 421 BC Levelling Ball 4w/Cremaillere gearlift column for Super Pro Tele Studex 621 B Levelling Ball 6for Super Pro Tele Studex, platform 41 /4 "diameter 621 BC Levelling Ball 6w/Cremaillere gearlift column 18" for
Super Pro Tele Studex 621 BCL Levelling Ball 6w/Long Cremaillere gearlift column 32" for
Super Pro Tele Studex 622 BF Levelling Ball 6Fw/flat base 41 /4 "diameter, W socket
$139.95 149.95 139.95 149.95 139.95 199.95 339.95 199.95
399.95
499.95 259.95
TRIPODS With LEVELLING BALLS Without Or With CENTER COLUMN For HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
REPORTER, CREMAILLERE 2: LEG DIAMETER 1, For CAMERAS To 10 Lbs. 203 BR2 Reporter Eco Ball 2/Rapid w/2 leg sections 204 BR2 Reporter Industry Ball 2/Rapid w/3 leg sections 220 BR2 Reporter Performance Ball 2/Rapid w/3 leg sections, leg spreading 224 BR2 Reporter Industry Performance Ball 2/Rapid w/3 leg sect, leg spreading 210 BR2 Cremaillere 2 Industry Ball 2/Cremaillere gearlift w/3 leg sections 212 BR2 Cremaillere 2 Industry Performance Ball 2/Cremaillere gearlift w/3 leg sections. leg spreading
$229.95 239.95 279.95 289.95 299.95
339.95
STUDEX, CREMAILLERE 3:
LEG DIAMETER ve, For CAMERAS To 15 Lbs.
303 BR3 Studex Eco Ball 3/Rapid w/2 leg sections 301 BR3 Studex Ball 3/Rapid w/3 leg sections 323 BR3 Studex Compact Performance Ball 3/Rapid
w/3 leg sections, leg spreading
$259.95 279.95
329.95
320 BR3 Studex Performance Ball 3/Rapid w/3 leg sections, leg spreading 310 BR3 Cremaillere 3Ball 3/Cremaillere gearlift w/3 leg sections 312 BR3 Cremaillere 3 Performance Ball 3/Cremaillere gearlift
w/3 leg sections, leg spreading
329.95 349.95
389.95
SUPER STUDEX STANDARD:
LEG DIAMETER 1./e, For CAMERAS To 50 Lbs.
405 B4
Super Studex Compact Ball 4w/4 leg sections
405 BR4 Super Studex Compact Ball 4/Rapid w/4 leg sections
405 BC4 Super Studex Compact Ball 4/Cremaillere gearlift w/4 leg sections
400 B4
Super Studex Giant Ball 4 w/3 leg sections
400 BR4 Super Studex Giant Ball 4/Rapid w/3 leg sections
400 BC4 Super Studex Giant Ball 4/Cremaillere gearlift w/3 leg sections
400/2 B4 Super Studex Giant Eco Ball 4w/2 leg sections
400/2 BR4 Super Studex Giant Eco Ball 4/Rapid w/2 leg sections
400/2 BC4 Super Studex Giant Eco Ball 4/Cremaillere gearlift w/2 leg sections
408
Super Studex Compact Luxe w/5 leg sections
403
Super Studex Giant Luxe w/4 leg sections
add add
9339.95 399.95
539.95 339.95 399.95 539.95 299.95 359.95 499.95
60.00 60.00
PRO STUDEX PERFORMANCE:
LEG DIAMETER 'Pe w/LEG SPREADING, For CAMERAS To 50 Lbs.
415 B4
Pro Studex Compact Ball 4w/4 leg sections
415 BR4 Pro Studex Compact Ball 4/Rapid w/4 leg sections
415 BC4 Pro Studex Compact Ball 4/Cremaillere gearlift w/4 leg sections
410 04
Pro Studex Giant Ball 4w/3 leg sections
410 BR4 Pro Studex Giant Ball 4/Rapid w/3 leg sections
410 BC4 Pro Studex Giant Ball 4/Cremaillere gearlift w/3 leg sections
410/2 B4 Pro Studex Giant Eco Ball 4w/2 leg sections
410/2 BR4 Pro Studex Giant Eco Ball 4/Rapid w/2 leg sections
410/2 BC4 Pro Studex Giant Eco Ball 4/Cremaillere gearlift w/2 leg sections
418
Pro Studex Compact Luxe w/5 leg sections
add
413
Pro Studex Giant Luxe w/4 leg sections
add
9389.95 449.95 589.95 389.95 449.95 589.95 349.95 409.95 549.95 60.00 60.00
TELE STUDEX PERFORMANCE:
LEG DIAMETER ve w/LEG SPREADING, For CAMERAS To 50 Lbs.
505 B4
Tele Studex Compact F3all 4w/4 leg sections
505 BR4 Tele Studex Compact Ball 4/Rapid w/4 leg sections
505 BC4 Tele Studex Compact Ball 4/Cremaillere gearlift w/4 leg sections
500 94
Tele Studex Giant Ball 4 w/3 leg sections
500 BR4 Tele Studex Giant Ball 4/Rapid w/3 leg sections
500 BC4 Tele Studex Giant Ball 4/Cremaillere gearlift w/3 leg sections
500/2 134 Tele Studex Giant Eco Ball 4w/2 leg sections
500/2 BR4 Tele Studex Giant Eco Ball 4/Rapid with 2leg sections
500/2 BC4 Tele Studex Giant Eco Ball 4/Cremaillere gearlift w/2 leg sections
$429.95 489.95 629.95
429.95 489.95 629.95 389.95 449.95 589.95
505 B6 505 BC6 505 BCL6 500 B6 500 BOE 500 BCL6 500/2 B6 500/2 BC6 500/2 BCL6 508 504
TELE STUDEX PERFORMANCE:
LEG DIAMETER ve w/LEG SPREADING, For CAMERAS To 100 Lbs
Tele Studex Compact Ball 6w/4 leg sections
Tele Studex Compact Ball 6/Cremaillere gearlift w/4 leg sections
Tele Studex Compact Ball 6/Long Cremaillere gearlift w/4 leg sections .
Tele Studex Giant Ball 6w/3 leg sections
Tele Studex Giant Ball 6/Cremaillere gearlift w/3 leg sections
Tele Studex Giant Ball 6/Long Cremaillere gearlift w/3 leg sections .....
Tele Studex Giant Eco Ball 6w/2 leg sections
Tele Studex Giant Eco Ball 6/Cremaillere gearlift w/2 leg sections
Tele Studex Giant Eco Ball 6/Long Cremaillere gearlift w/2 leg sections .
Tele Studex Compact Luxe w/5 leg sections
add
Tele Studex Giant Luxe w/5 leg sections
add
9489.95 689.95 789.95 489.95 689.95 789.95 449.95 649.95 749.95 90.00 120.00
VC-88
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GITZO KARL HEITZ, INC.
34-1 1 62 St. P.O. Box 427 Woodside, NY 11377 (718) 565-0004
TRIPODS/HIEADS
380 380/2 384 580
579
680
679 586
100°/0 FLUID HEADS
Fluid Head 3with 100% fluid panning and 100% fluid vertical tilt,
quick release plate, 15" handle, supports 5-15 lbs. Same, with 215" handles
$ 399.96 449.95
Additional quick release plate for 380
19.95
Fluid Head 5with 100% panning, 100% fluid and counterbalanced
vertical tilt, with 3x8" quick and shift release plate, extensible
handle 14-22", supports 10-50 lbs.
1995.00
Same, with 100% fluid panning, counterbalanced vertical tilt,
supports 10-50 lbs
1295.00
Fluid Head 6: Same as 580 w/stronger counterbalance,
supports 50-100 lbs.
2295.00
Fluid Head 6: Same as 579 w/stronger counterbalance,
supports 50-100 lbs.
1595.00
580, 579, 680, 679, with second extensible handle 14-22" .... add
99.95
FLUID ACTION HEAD, BASE 180 Fluid Action Head 1with rapid adaptor, supports 2-7 lbs. 285 Fluid Action Base for 360° Panning of non-fluid heads,
supports 2-20 lbs
$149.95 119.95
VIDEO-CINE HEADS, SPRING BALANCED
155 Video-Cine 1S for Weekend, TotaVSport, Cremaillere 0/1, supports
2-7 lbs
$ 79.95
252 Video-Cine 2S for Total/Sport, Reporter, Cremaillere 1 / 2 ,supports
5-10 lbs.
119.95
VIDEO HEAD,
NOT COUNTERBALANCED With QUICK RELEASE
251
Video 2for Total/Sport, Reporter, Cremaillere 1 / 2 ,
supports 5-10 lbs
$89.95
050 150 250 350 450 450 L 585
SIMPLE VIDEO-CINE HEADS, NOT COUNTERBALANCED Video-Cine 0for Loisir, Weekend, Cremaillere 0, supports 2-5 lbs Video-Cine 1for TotaVSport, Cremaillere 1, supports 2-7 lbs Video-Cine 2for Reporter, Cremaillere 2, supports 2-10 lbs Video-Cine 3for Studex, Cremaillere 3, supports 5-15 lbs Video-Cine 4for Super Pro Tele Studex,
supports 10-20 lbs Video-Cine 4L with longer handle 15", supports 10-20 lbs Side tilt attachment for more than 90°, also suited for Monopods
$ 49.95 59.95 69.95 79.95 89.95
109.95 49.95
550 551 STDL
VIDEO-CINE HEADS With ADJUSTABLE COUNTERBALANCE,
COLUMN For HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
5T Head/Rapid column, 1handle extensible 16-22",
supports 10-65 lbs
5T Head/Cremaillere gearlift column, same handle,
supports 10-65 lbs
5T Head with 2handles
add
$349.95
459.95 59.95
03 103 203 303 400/2 410/2
500/2
VIDEO-CINE TRIPODS With 2LEG SECTIONS
Weekend Eco, leg diam. 3/4", supports 0-3 lbs.
89.95
Sport Eco, leg diam. 7/8", supports 2-5 lbs.
99.95
Reporter Eco, leg diam. 1", supports 5-10 lbs
119.95
Studex Eco, leg diam. 1-1/4", supports 10-15 lbs.
149.95
Super Studex Giant Eco, leg diam. 1-3/8", supports 20-50 lbs.
229.95
Pro Studex Giant Eco w/leg spreading, leg diam. 1-3/8",
supports 20-50 lbs
279.95
Tele Studex Giant Eco w/leg spreading, leg diam. 1-1/2",
supports 25-65 lbs
319.95
203-252
610
810
615 615 L
MONOCOLUMNS With ACCESSORY TRAY: DIAMETER 4", For CAMERAS To 100 Lbs., CHARCOAL FINISH Monocolumn w/Cremaillere gearlift, diameter 11/ 2 ", 35-54".... . . Monocolumn Luxe w/Long Cremaillere genie 3r-68"
$799.00 899.00
03-180 103-180 203-180 03-155 103-155 103-252 203-252
VIDEO COMBI TRIPODS With 2LEG SECTIONS, FLUID ACTION, Or COUNTERBALANCED VIDEO HEAD Weekend Eco/Fluid Action Head 1, supports 2-5 lbs. Sport Eco/Fluid Action Head 1, supports 2-7 lbs. Reporter Eco/Fluid Action Head 1, supports 2-7 lbs Weekend Eco Video Combi w/155 Video 1S, supports 2-5 lbs.. Sport Eco Video Combi w/155 Vkleo is, supports 2-7 lbs Sport Eco Video Combi w/252 Video 2S, supports 2-7 lbs Reporter Eco Video Combi w/252 Video 2S, supports 5-10 lbs
$269.95 279.95 299.95 159.95 159.95 199.95
219.95
VIDEO COMBI TRIPODS
With 2LEG SECTIONS, NON-COUNTERBALANCED
VIDEO Or SIMPLE VIDEO-CINE HEADS
103-251 203-251
Sport Eco Video Combi w/251 Video 2, supports 2-7 lbs. Reporter Eco Video Combi w/251 Video 2,
supports 5-10 lbs
03-050
Weekend Eco Video Combi w/050 Video-Cine 0,
supports 2-5 lbs
103-150
Sport Eco Video Combi w/15D Video-Cine 1,
supports 2-7 lbs
203-250
Reporter Eco Video Combi w/250 Video-Cine 2,
303-350
supports 5-10 lbs Studex Eco Video Combi w/350 Video-Cine 3,
supports 10-15 lbs.
400/2-450 Super Studex Giant Eco Video Combi w/450 Video-Cine 4,
410/2-450
supports 10-20 lbs. Pro Studex Giant Eco Video Combi w/450 Video-Cine 4,
supports 10-20 lbs.
500/2-450 L Tele Studex Giant Eco Video Combi w/450L Video-Cine 4L
supports 10-20 lbs.
500/2-450 LL Same, with 2handles
add
$169.95 189.95 129.95 149.95 169.95 199.95 299.95 349.95 419.95
lees
517/8 608 552
TRIPODS With COUNTERBALANCED VIDEO-CINE HEAD/ COLUMN, ACCESS. SUPPORTS Wire hooks for Tele Studex, set of 3: 2long, 1short Chain between legs for Tele Studex
Intermediate plate for use with large lenses
$79.95 69.95 29.95
810 810 605/2 6TDL
EXTRA SOLID TRIPODS With COUNTERBALANCED
VIDEO- CINE HEAD/COLUMN For HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
Video 6T/Cremaillere gearlift w/chain, leg spreading,
supports 65 lbs
Video 8T/Cremaillere gearlift w/4" diam. center column,
for extra solid support, 5" wheel doly, supports 250 lbs.
Quickchange dovetail attachment for 6T or 8T heads
(specify)
6T or 8T Head with 2handles
add
$ 1399.00 2499.00 399.95 99.95
600 B6F 800 B6F
EXTRA SOLID VIDEO TRIPODS: LEG DIAMETER 11/ 2 " w/2 LEG SECTIONS For CAMERAS To 100 Lbs. And 250 Lbs Video 6T/Ball 6F with chain, leg spreading, supports 100 lbs Video 8T/Ball 6F w/4" diam. center column for extra support, 5" wheel dolly, supports 250 lbs.
$ 799.00 2295.00
TWIN HEADS, BRACKET 584 Twin Heads, for 2cameras of up to 5lbs 539 Twin (Triple) bracket, for 2 (or 3)
heavier cameras of up to 25 lbs.
LADDERPODS And LADDER ATTACHMENTS,
For CAMERAS And PERSONS To 300 Lbs.
598 B Gitzechel4 Ball 4 598 BR4 Gitzechel Ball 4/Rapid
598 BC4 Gitzechel Ball 4/Cremaillere gearlift
598 B6 Gitzechel Ball 6
598 BC6 Gitzechel Ball 6/Cremaillere gearlift
597
Transport wheels for Gitzechel (when collapsed)
599 84 Gitfix Ball 4Attachment
599 BR4 Gitfix Ball 4/Rapid Attachment
599 BC4 Gitfix Ball 4/Cremaillere gearlift Attachment
599 B6 Gitfix Ball 6Attachments
599 BC5 Gitfix Ball 6/Cremaillere gearlift Attachment
$39.95
390
69.95
391
392
491
$ ass.00
492
919.00
1069.00
590
909.00
1059.00
591
pair 59.95
593
299.95
594
369.95
498
499.95
359.00 559.00
516
DOLLIES, COLLAPSIBLE With 3/8" SCREW In CENTER ( Dpvcify Tripod)
With 11/ 2 "wheels, adjustable leather shoes, rubber foot With 3" wheels, adjustable metal shoes With 5" wheels, adjustable metal shoes With 3" wheels, metal shoes, stirrups (specify tripod for adaptors) With 5" wheels, metal shoes, stirrups (specify tripod for adaptors) Same, heavier duty, not collapsible (specify tripod for adaptors) Same, with travelling fixings (specify tripod for adaptors)
Same, collapsible (specify tripod for adaptors) Same, with travelling fixings (specify tripod for adaptors) Tripod adaptors for dollies with metal shoes, stirrups (specify tripod) set of 3 Pan-tilt cradle for dollies 491, 2, 590/4, for monitors, recorders, etc.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$149.95 199.95 249.95
249.95
299.95
399.95 499.95 449.95 549.95
19.95
199.95
VC- 89
HARRIS CORPORATION
VIDEO SYSTEMS DIVISION
P.O. Box 4290 Quincy, IL 62305-4290 (217) 222-8200
ENG/EFP CAMERA
TC-90 ENG/EFP CAMERA
The Harris TC-90 brings out the best in your cameraperson...and your pictures. The just- right camera balance makes sure-footed shooting from even the most difficult angles asnap. And the super lightweight adds to the ease of handling and eliminates fatigue as afactor on long days in the field. Better yet, the TC-90 provides excellent pictures, like astudio camera. It uses three LOC, mixed field 1/2" ( 13mm) diode gun Plumbicon® tubes, an extremely stable f / 1.4 prism and exclusive FET preamps for outstanding picture performance. The TC-90 reproduces colors the way you actually see colors, and the pictures have asharpness and clarity you rarely get from aportable camera. Even the reds are clearly defined. With most cameras, anything red tends to become a little fuzzy; with the TC-90, an exclusive contours-from- re& circuit maintains sharp detail on all red objects.
A terrific balancing act
The TC-90 could be smaller, but we deliberately designed it just alittle longer than it had to be, making it slightly tail- heavy to counterbalance the weight of the lens. It also has alow center of gravity that makes the TC-90 practically cling to acameraperson's shoulder. Then there's the weight, only 8.2 pounds without viewfinder, lens and battery.
It may be the most rugged camera there is.
Lightweight as it is, the TC-90 may be the toughest camera you can buy. Every part was selected or designed to take abeating. The case is built of agraphite composite that needs no maintenance and should never need repair.
FCC radiation certification.
The TC-90 has passed the FCC radiation test with flying colors, and is suitably labelled to conform to Part 15 Subpart JFCC Rules and Regulations for Type A equipment.
Tubes -- smaller is better.
The LOC ( low output capacitance), mixed field 1/2" diode gun Plumbicon tubes used in the TC-90 provide registration performance so much better than 2/3" magnetic tubes that the additional complication of computer- controlled geometry correction is not required.
Pictures with " snap".
From its exclusive f / 1.4 prism to its sophisticated use of Large Scale Integrated ( LSI) circuits, the TC-90 is designed to deliver outstanding picture clarity as well as perfect colorimetry under all lighting conditions.
Auto white balance in 0.3 second.
When the auto white balance switch is activated, with the TC-90's test signal inserted, you will get aperfect white balance for 3200°K scene color temperature. Or, when the auto white switch is activated with scene content, a perfect white balance is achieved for that scene content in 0.3 second. This is stored in memory until reset.
Auto black balance assures perfect colorimetry.
When the TC-90's black balance switch is momentarily activated, the lens iris closes automatically, the blacks are balanced in 0.3 second, and the lens opens to its previous iris setting. This ensures perfectly balanced individual black levels for red, green and blue channels, which are stored in memory until reset.
Comet tail suppression.
The TC-90 employs comet tail suppression circuits to minimize the effects of bright scene highlights.
The TC -90 delivers aS/N of at least -- 60dB.
An outstanding S/N ratio of - 60dB is achieved at light levels as low as 56 foot-candles at f / 1.4.
TC-90
Simultaneous contours from red and green.
Other cameras offer contouring on only one color at atime. The TC-90 provides contours out of green and red simultaneously to enhance image sharpness over awide color spectrum.
Genlock with precise SC/H phasing.
With three LSIs in the RS- 170A sync generator system, timing is quick, accurate and at the proper relationship between horizontal sync and color subcarrier. The TC-90 genlocks to either acomposite color or black- burst signal.
Built-in color bar and stairstep test signals.
The TC-90 has built-in full field or split field color bars that meet or exceed all NTSC specifications.
High-fidelity microphone amplifier.
The TC-90 includes abuilt-in microphone preamplifier to supply line level audio to all VTRs.
Built-in RTS-compatible intercom amplifier. The TC-90 camera head has a built-in RTS-compatible intercom amplifier.
Runs on very little power from abig array of sources.
You can power the TC-90 on DC voltage from + 10.5 to + 15 volts, from any of six sources: 1) two-ampere/hour on- board battery pack; 2) four-ampere/hour on- board battery pack; 3) VTR/VCR battery; 4) an AC- to- DC converter power pack which attaches like abattery pack; 5) abattery belt; 6) any automotive 12- volt DC power supply with negative ground..
You get more than agood view on the 1-1/2" diagonal CRT in the TC-90 viewfinder.
An oscilloscope- type display provides an actual video waveform, which, with a 100% exposure cursor line, lets you make precise manual iris adjustments. You can turn it off when you don't want it. Four LEDs in the viewfinder give you four different warnings: 1) the Vi R / VCR is in record mode; 2) end- of- tape of VTR/VCR not connected to camera; 3) VTR/VCR battery low; 4) on- board camera battery low.
A filter for any type of shot.
The TC-90 has abuilt-in 5- position filter wheel to allow the camera operator great flexibility for color temperature compensation and scene illumination correction.
With the " Smart Package" option, the TC-90 may just be the smartest ENG/EFP camera available anywhere.
Add the exclusive Smart Package option to the TC-90, and you get microprocessor time code generation that lets you record SMPTE and VITC time codes as you shoot. The Smart Package also adds diagnostics, auto centering and encoder balance. No diascope lenses or special test charts are needed for the automatic adjustment of these parameters, only normal scene content is required.
VC-90
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HARRIS CORPORATION
VIDEO SYSTEMS DIVISION
P.O. Box 4290 Quincy, IL 62305-4290 (217) 222-8200
COLOR STUDIO TELEVISION CAMERAS
C SERIES COLOR STUDIO TELEVISION CAMERAS The Harris C Series offers awide range of choices to give you the exact camera configuration that best fits your production needs. Now you can have acamera that is essentially custom designed for your operation. You make the choices...and you get exactly what you want.
The basic C Series model is a manual setup camera with automatics. The C Series also offers afull computer- controlled automatic setup version that features a separate computer in each camera for simultaneous setup and greater flexibility. The basic model may be upgraded in the field to full computer setup capability as your requirements change.
The C Series operates with TV-81 multicore cable, Triax cable or TV-81 mini multicore cable. This gives you the flexibility of utilizing camera cable that may already be in place in your facility or at remote sites. All types of pickup tubes designed for the 25mm format can be accommodated. These include standard Plumbicons® , Diode Gun Plumbicons, ACT Plumbicons and Saticons. Choose the tube that best fits your operating environment. From your local newscast to aremote sports event, the C Series offers alens to "bring it home". 10:1 to more than 42:1 zoom ranges are available from all major lens manufacturers.
·Color fidelity and picture integrity of the Harris C Series cameras are unsurpassed. High resolution with low lag, high sensitivity, low noise, unique contouring from red and green simultaneously, highlight handling that virtually eliminates comet- tailing, and variable contrast give you color as you really see it, and clean sharp video even under the most severe lighting conditions.
·Harris C Series cameras are designed for easy operation from the control panel on through to the camera head.
·The Harris C Series cameras are reliable, rugged and ready to operate over long periods of time with minimal engineering attention.
·In the CSeries computer setup model, 48 operator functions are controlled by the computer and adjusted according to preset parameters. Each camera has abuilt-in independent computer to eliminate camera interdependence in multi- camera installations.
TC-80C TC-85C
Manual Studio Camera without Tubes and Lens
Computer Studio Camera without Tubes and Lens
C SERIES
Camera- head modules are readily accessible for servicing, and controls are front- edge mounted.
Utility panel provides connections for test
equipment and external intercoms, tallys. monitors
· ·
,111
· II
l· ' as
11
U lna mill
111111111111 11111111111
Joystick remote control panels.
Operator's view of Harris C Series tiltable, rotatable viewfinder showing electronicgenerated safe- title area and variable grease pencil window.
-L
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-91
HITACHI
Hitachi Denshi. Ltd.
175 Crossways Park W. Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 921-7200
PORTABLE COLOR CAMERA
FP-5PORTABLE COLOR VIDEO CAMERA The FP-5portable color camera is asingle frequency separation type high-sensitivity color camera using 1/2 " Saticon tube which ensures clear and sharp pictures even in dim light. It also has auto focus, auto/manual iris, auto white balance, character generator, genlock and color bar.
Features Beautiful and Clear Picture Since this camera uses aSaticon tube and abias light just like television cameras used for the broadcasting industry, it is possible to obtain clear pictures with aminimum of afterimage or noise even in dimly lighted scenes. Horizontal resolution is 250 lines at center and S/N ratio is 45dB. Built-in Genlock Unit For EFP and ENG applications, the camera can be used in genlock with other cameras by feeding the genlock input signal to the Genlock connector on the optional Remote Operation Panel.
Auto Focus Functions The auto focus system enables the focus adjustment automatically. Thanks to this function, the focus operation is extremely easy.
CAM/BAR Select Switch Since the color bar generator necessary for studio use camera is built-in, camera output signals or color bar signals are easily selected by the CAM/BAR select switch.
8x Zoom Lens with Macro Function The lens is a8x zoom lens with auto! manual iris. Since it has amacro function, extreme close-up shooting is possible.
Character Display by Microcomputer System Titles, date, time and stopwatch can be displayed in the viewfinder screen and also recorded along with pictures.
Alarm Display on the Electronic Viewfinder
Pheniimena Display
Battery run-down '
_BATTERY
White balance is unbalanced
7.' - BALANCE ,...'
Insufficient illumination
VTR Remote Function The VTR functions: Record, Play, Forward and Reverse Search, Slow, Still, Record check can be controlled from
the camera.
Auto White Balance White balance adjustment is achieved by simply pressing down the white balance switch.
Fade-In/Out Switch The picture and sound automatically fade in or out by one touch control.
Boom-Type Condenser Microphone
Aboom-type unidirectional electret condenser microphone is provided as an accessory. This microphone is removable.
Electronic Viewfinder can be Attached to Right or Left Side The electronic viewfinder can be mounted on either the right or left side of the camera, depending on which side is most convenient for you. The viewfinder can be tilted to any
position.
Low Power Consumption The consumption is approx. 6.8W. As it is low, VTR's battery lasts longer. To reduce power consumption, this camera also has aStandby switch.
Power Consumption: Dimensions: Weight:
Approx. 6.8W ( when the power
zoom, Auto focus and color bar generator are not operated) 81W x172H x286.5D mm ( excluding the electronic viewfinder and accessory microphone.)
Approx. 3.2kg ( including electronic viewfinder and microphone)
$1800.00
Optional Accessories
GM- 5N / P 4.5" viewfinder
SA- 5
Studio adaptor
(for GM- 5N / Pmounting attachment)
C-502CC C-152CC
Camera cable ( 50m) Camera cable 15m
C-501VF VTR cable 5m
C-201VF VTR cable 2m
AP-4
AC adaptor
C-102CT Extension cable ( 10m)
ZL-5WIVI Lens cable kit
OP- 5
Remote control functions; Master black, Iris,
Camera cable select switch, Camera! Bar select
switch, Intercom, Intercom level, Tally, ( max.
cable length; 50m)
$1280.00
VC-92
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
H ITAC H I175 Crossways Park W.
Hitachi Denshi, Ltd.
Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 921-7200
COLOR CAMERA
FP- 7COLOR VIDEO CAMERA High performance and multi- purpose single- tube color camera equipped with a5MHz high band Saticon tube and a 10x power zoom lens.
Features ·CAM/BAR select switch ·Masking circuit ·Auto white balance and preset function ·Turret type color temperature compensation filter and
filter position display ·Built-in genlock unit ·Servo zoom and servo iris type 10x $ 11.6 lens ·VTR interface · High gain select switch ·Independent monitor output ·Low power consumption
The FP-7is developed mainly for broadcasting and sophisticated commercial applications and is provided with high performance and function which are equal to those of a 3- tube color camera. Not only asingle set operation with a VTR but also system operation using several cameras can be performed by combining the camera with the remote operation panel ( 0P-77).
High Resolution Pick- Up Tube
The high band Saticon ( 2/3", 5MHz) offers the wide frequency band width of the luminance signal and high horizontal resolution of 360 lines.
2H Contour Corrector The same 2H contour corrector used in a 3- tube color camera offers high vertical resolution.
High Sensitivity and Signal- to- Noise Ratio A single carrier frequency separation system and a low
noise preamplifier are incorporated to yield a very high signal-to-noise ratio of 50dB. Even when the quantity of light is insufficient at open aperture, setting the high gain switch to + 12dB and using a10x f/1.6 lens enable an object to be shot under subject illumination of down to 23 lux.
Color Shading Correction
The FP-7 is provided with the color shading correction circuit to produce aflat picture regardless of the frequency
separation system. With this circuit, corner color shadings are reduced to a minimum.
Vertical and Horizontal False Signal Reduction The vertical and horizontal false signals are reduced to obtain ahigh picture quality almost the same as that of a 3- tube color camera.
Color Reproduction Since each of four channels ( Y, R, Gand B) is provided with a processing amplifier which controls color signal waveform, the color signals are balanced and the color reproduction distortion resulting from changing a pick-up tube is reduced.
Power Requirements: 12V DC
Power Consumption: Approx. 10W ( incl. viewfinder)
Weight:
10.1 lbs. ( 4.6 kg)
Dimensions:
including lens and viewfinder 3.94"W x8.66"H x9.05"D
(100 x220x 230mm)
$2195.00
Optional Accessories
GM-5N/P
4.5" viewfinder
AP- 60U
AC adaptcr
N10x1OBRM-7(f 1.6) 10x servo zoom lens
ZL-20W
Remote control unit for lens
DP- 10
Battery pack
BA- 7
Battery adaptor
AP- 61
AC adaptor/charger
TA- 1
Tripod adaptor
C-152CC ( 15m) C-502CC ( 50m) C-2010E ( VHS)
Camera cable Camera cable VTR cable
C-201VE ( U-matic) VTR cable
C-5010E ( VHS)
VTR cable
C-501VE ( U-matic) MC- 7 OP- 77U CL- 77
VTR cable Microphone
Remote operation panel Carrying case
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 93
HITACHI
Hitachi Denshi. Ltd.
175 Crossways Park W Woodbury, NY 11797
(516) 921-7200
PORTABLE COLOR CAMERA
mar
Z-31
Z-31 3- TUBE PORTABLE COLOR CAMERA The Hitachi ENG/EFP Color Camera Z-31 is athree- tube auto set-up portable camera for production houses,
schools, business, etc.
The Z-31, a sister camera of the FP- 22, is improved in picture quality, temperature stability, and automatic set-up
adjustments by amicrocomputer. Character display function is newly designed to the Z-31 for ease of camera opera-
tion. Also features prism temperature sensor. Studio accessories and triax digital command systems are all available as
options.
SPECIFICATIONS
HIGH PICTURE QUALITY
Resolution:
Newly developed three 2/3" LOC MS
Saticon tubes are employed. MS:
Electromagnetic focus/ electrostatic
deflection type.
Registration:
New MS Saticon tubes reduce registration errors. Registration compen-
sation circuit is provided.
S/N:
LOC MS type Saticon tubes are employed.
Enhancer:
2H ( standard).
Gamma Correction: Variable gamma correction.
Viewfinder Display:
LED: Tally ( T), Battery ( B), High gain (A), and Write mode ( W). CRT: Signal level ( tiger stripe). Mode: WHT, Gain, and CAM/BAR.
Alarm: DLT OFF, BAR.
Diagnosis: Auto set-up data. Malfunction of automatic set-up: Next required operation is indicated.
ESSENTIAL FUNCTIONS
Mon Out: Level Ind:
Yes Yes ( tiger stripe)
ENC:
I.Q.
Title Memory: Memory Backup:
Yes Lithium Battery
Beam Splitter:
Prism f / 1.4
Pickup Tube:
2/3" LOC MS Saticon
Opt. Filter:
3200, 5600, 5600 + 1/8, ND, CAP
Sensitivity:
f/4 2000 lux
Resolution ( G):
750 TV Lines
Registration:
0.1, 0.2, 0.4%
S/N ( NTSC):
58dB ( typical)
Hi Gain: + 9dB, + 18dB
Enhancer: Bars:
2H EIA Split Bar
ENC ( NTSC):
I.Q.
Z-31 Without Lens, including Auto Set-up Z-31 With 15:1 Zoom Lens and Auto Set-up
$6800.00 8000.00
VC- 94
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HITACHI
Hitachi Denshi. Ltd.
175 Crossways Park W.
Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 921-7200
COLOR CAMERAS
Hitachi FP-50S is especially suitable for: ·All Studio Applications ·Multiplexer Transfers ·Graphics Intense Colors
FP-50S Color Camera
The Hitachi FP- 50S is afully developed new generation color studio camera adopting highly efficient prism optics and three %- inch SATICON · pickup tubes. Features include superb resolution, signal-to-noise ratio and color fidelity even under low lighting conditions.
FEATURES
Lightweight 11.3 kg ( 24.9 lb) compact camera head ( less lens) is very easy to operate both in studio and field.
Excellent resolution %-inch magnetic focus magnetic- deflection separatemesh SATICON tubes ( H9311A) and improved electronics can provide 550 lines of resolution at center and 450 lines at corners.
High Sensitivity and low noise Highly efficient ( F1.4) RGB prism splitter and %- inch SATICON tubes offer 53 dB signal-to-noise ratio at 2,000 lux ( 200fc), F4, 90% reflection, 3,200°K. Further a + 6/ + 12 dB high gain switch offers acceptable pictures up to a minimum of 100 lux ( 10 fc), F1.6.
Low lag Built-in bias light ensures low lag for SATICON · or Plumbicon · operation.
Shading correction To assure flat pictures, adjustable saw- tooth and parabolic shading corrections are superimposed both in the H and V directions.
3 position filter wheel 3,200°K, 6,000°K plus 25% ND filters are included in the filter wheel for color temperature and scene illumination corrections.
Auto white balance In combination with the above trim filters, white balance is achieved automatically from color temperature of 2,000 to 8,000°K, by merely pressing the "AUTO WHITE" button and using a white scene as reference. White balance is retained by an analog IC memory for over two days even after the camera power has been turned off.
Manual white balance ( option) By exchanging an H. detail/Auto white unit for an H. detail/Manual white unit ( option), white balance can manually be corrected to 3,200, 4,000, 5,000, 6,000 and 7,000°K at the trim filter position of 3,200°K.
Color tone control Fine color tone matching is achieved by controlling chroma phase. This does not affect the white balance.
Detail correction Horizontal out-of- green detail correction ensures sharp pictures. 1- line vertical out- of- green detail unit ( option) further adds picture contour crispness.
Internal/External synchronization The camera can be synchronized to the internal sync pulse generator or external drive pulses. The camera can be genlocked to external color composite or black burst signal by using an optional genlock unit. Horizontal pulse timing I + / -3 us) and subcarrier phase ( 0to 360°) adjustments are available.
Blanking width adjustment To compensate for induced errors in recording and post- production processes, horizontal blanking width is adjustable from 10.2 to 11.2 us, and vertical blanking width is adjustable from 18 to 21 lines.
High brightness viewfinder The 5- inch tillable viewfinder features 100 ft- lambert brightness End minimum 500 lines of center resolution, which make camera focusing and framing very easy even under high ambient light. Viewfinder peaking and DC restoration circuits are also provided.
Auto iris With any recommended zoom lenses the camera continuously and rapidly corrects the lens iris to compensate for changes in scene illumination by using mean video level detection. The iris may also be controlled manually from the CCU.
Auto iris closure The lens iris is closed automatically when the camera is turned off or switched to standby, protecting the pickup tubes from highlight damage. The iris is not opened again when the "SHUTTER" button is in the "OFF" position, even if the camera is switched to "OPERATE." Meanwhile the black level of the camera output can be adjusted with no incident light.
Line-up signals Built-in full field color bar generator facilitates the lineup of the camera encoder and color monitor. Synchronized focus wobbling circuitry for tube alignment is also provided.
R, G, B outputs Individual R, G, B outputs at standard level and impedance are provided for chroma keying.
Remote control flexibility The CCU can be separated from the camera head by up to 300m ( 1,000 ft). The CCU also has a remote connector to control " II and B GAIN," " MASTER BLACK," " IRIS" and " AUTO WHITE" from an additional unit.
·Trademark · · Trademark of N.V. Philips
FP- 50S
STUDIO CAMERA SYSTEM
Package Includes:
HP- 50S Camera Head W/3-H9311AJ Saticons VM-508 5" Tiltable Viewfinder
C- 152-CE 15m Camera Cable
CU- 50
Camera Control Unit w / 19" Rack Mount
Adaptor
E-002
Horizontal Detail and Auto White Extender Boards
E-006
Genlock Unit
SVM-50 Service Manual
$7795.00
E-002
E-003 E-006 E-007
ABO-50
ACCESSORIES
H Detail/Auto
White Unit
$1,130.00
V Detail Unit
1215.00
Genlock Unit H Detail/Manual
760.00
White Unit ( Interchange w/E-002 Unit) ABO ( Automatic
1130.00
Beam Optimizer)
900.00
A10x11BRW
LENSES 10:1 11-110mm
A10x11BRM
Auto Iris Servo Zoom 10:1 11-110mm
1700.00
Auto Focus, Servo Zoom . 1,950.00
J10x11HEIS 10:1 11-110mm
3996.00
A14x9.5BERM 14x9.5-133mm 1.7 Auto
Al2x9BERM
Focus Servo Zoom 12:1 9-108mm 1.7 Auto
6315.00
SRD-51 TC-300-50
Focus Servo Zoom Servo Lens Grip Film Chain Adaptor,
4 565.00 451.00
55mm, F2.8 * Required
SCK-51, SR D-51
1,150.00
C-152CE C-502CE
C-103CE C-303CE
CABLES 50' Camera Cable 150' Camera Cable
300' Camera Cable 1,000' Camera Cable
490.00 870.00
1440.00 4100.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-95
H ITAC Fl I175 Crossways Park W Woodbury, NY 11797
Hitachi Denshi. Ltd. (516) 921-7200
FP- 60S Studio Color TV Camera
The Hitachi FP-60S Color TV Camera adopts a newly developed prism optics and three 1- inch SATICON TM pickup tubes, and features superb resolution, signal-tonoise ratio and color rendition. The camera head is of sturdy die-cast aluminum construction and can be used in field applications under severe operating conditions as well as studio use. Features
Prism optics and 1- inch SATICON -- tubes The newly developed prism optics and 1- inch SATICON tubes provide ahigh signal-to-noise ratio of 52 dB and ahigh resolution of 600 TV lines. Built-in automatic beam optimizer Built-in automatic beam optimizer developed by Hitachi extends dynamic range and reduces comet tail. Built-in bias light The built-in bias light reduces lag. Built-in test signals Input and output levels for each module can be easily adjusted by the built-in test signals, also color encoder can be easily set without vectorscopes by special test signals. Tiltable viewfinder The viewfinder is tiltabie and its 7 inch diagonal CRT offers easy viewing. Also a higher grade viewfinder is available for extra high illumination and resolution applications ( option). Dual method for color temperature compensation Color temperature is compensated both by optical conversion filter for high color reproductivity and electrical method for high sensitivity. ND filter is built-in. Built-in shading compensators The built-in compensation circuit for modulation shading and black shading. Built-in iris servo amplifier Light volume coming into the camera is kept optimum by combined built-in iris servo amplifier and zoom lens. Manual control is also available.
PROFESSIONAL COLOR TV CAMERA
Extra video gain Extra video gain 1+6 dB and + 12 dB) is available for applications in low light areas.
Built-in contour corrector Sharp and clear pictures can be obtained through the built-in vertical contour correctors of H- detail and 1H delay types. A 2H- Vertical contour corrector is available ( option).
Auto white balance High quality picture can be maintained for many hours through the use of digital memory automatic white balance.
Painting To get color balance between cameras, " Painting" function is provided. The painting can also be switched off.
Masking amplifier ( optional) Optional masking amplifier is provided for subtle color reproduction adjustment.
Automatic wobbling circuits Automatic wobbling circuits are built-in for easy beam alignment.
Negative G. signal for registration adjustment Negative G. signal is provided for easy registration adjustment.
R. G and B signal outputs Outputs of R, G and B non- composite signals are available as the signals for chroma key.
A level meter Black level and black balance can be easily set by alevel meter.
Built-in color bar generator Color bar generator is built-in for color adjustment between cameras and adjustment of color monitors. Switching of active video and color bar can be made from the remote control panel.
FP- 60S
FP60S-2H FP-60SR-2H
Saticon Prism Studio Camera 3Tube Studio Camera with 1" Saticons, features Prism Optics, ABO, Built-in Test Signals, Painting Controls,
RGB Outputs and 7" Studio Viewfinder
Complete package includes: HP- 60 Camera Head ·11/3)H9325 Saticon VM-701 7" Viewfinder · C-1205 50' Cam. Cable · A-404 1H Vert. Enhancer · CCU- 60 Cam. Control Unit · ROP-60 Remote Panel · C-1103
30' ROP Cable SVM-60 Service Manual . . $25,670.00
Same as above, includes: A424 2H Vertical
Enhancer
27,500.00
Same as FP6OS except with A424 2H Vertical Enhancer and VF-702 7" Viewfinder w/ Rotator
27,900.00
A-401 A- 431N A-407
VF- 702 TA- 60
Accessories Internal Sync. Module Genlock Module Masking Unit
1" Viewfinder w/ Rotator Tripod Adaptor
$287.00 774.00 347.00
1400.00 230.00
Lenses
K10X15RW-1 Fujinon 10:1 15-150mm f18 Auto Iris Lens . . .$3975.00
R14X14ESM Fujinon 14:1 14-196mm Manual Focus, Manual Zoom with Mounting Plate
17,450.00
Servo Focus, Manual Zoom with Mounting
Hardware
19,200.00
Servo Focus, Servo Zoom with Mounting
Hardware
20,450.00
Servo Focus, Manual Zoom with Shot Box
and Mounting Plate
20,100.00
Servo Focus, Servo Zoom with Shot Box
and Mounting Plate
22,350.00
VC- 96
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
1-1 ITAC Fl I175 Crossways Park W Woodbury, NY 11797
Hitachi Derishi, Ltd. (516) 921-7200
COLOR CAMERAS
SK- 91
EFP Color TV Camera
· ULTRA- LIGHT AND RUGGED -- Advanced design of the camera housing with magnesium alloy casting, new construction of the optical and mechanical sub-assemblies and careful selection of the electronic parts have realized the compact, ultra- light and rugged, self-contained, hand-held camera. It weighs only 4.4 kg ( 9.7 lbs.) including 1.5- inch viewfinder and withstands rough handling and environmental extremes. · SHOCK- AND VIBRATION- FREE -- A new shock- mounted optical system, with prism, yokes and tubes packaged as a single assembly, assures registration stability and makes the camera virtually
impervious even to severe shock, vibrations and jolts encountered in transportation. · RF INTERFERENCE- FREE -- Improved shields for tubes, yokes and preamplifiers guarantee practically interference- free operation even in the 120dB electro -magnetic field from MF to UHF. · IMPROVED PRISM BEAM- SPUTTER -- A newly developed, high-speed If 1.41 prismatic, beam-splitter, together with low- noise pre-amplifiers, provides high sensitivity and excellent signal-to-noise ratio. A deviation of optical registration due to temperature changes and abias light shading of the prism are also improved substantially. · ABO ( AUTOMATIC BEAM OPTIMIZER) -- The Hitachi developed ABO circuit greatly extends dynamic range, reduces comet- tailing and thereby
guarantees easy highlight handling.
· SHADING CORRECTION -- Adjustable H / V sawtooth, parabolic and portholing axis shading correction for each color channel, and also V sawtooth modulation shading correction are adopted to assure perfectly flat pictures.
· 2H CONTOUR CORRECTION -- 2- line horizontal and vertical out- of- green signals, level dependent with coring and comb- filtering, are added to R, G and Bchannels to ensure optimum picture sharpness with minimum noise contribution. · GAMMA CORRECTION -- Gamma correction is continuously adjustable in each color channel from 0.35 to 1, which permits easy matching to other cameras. · LINEAR MATRIX MASKING -- A linear matrix masking amplifier is built-in to get high-fidelity color rendition and fine tone- matching among the cameras. · AUTO IRIS -- Automatic iris control by video level detection maintains constant video level under wide variations of lighting conditions.
· AUTO WHITE BALANCE -- White balance is achieved automatically in half asecond by the " AUTO WHT" switch, if a white object is focused in the center of the picture. Digital memory retains the white balance semi- eternally even after the camera is turned off or to standby, or the power supply is ·lisconnected. · AUTO BLACK BALANCE -- Black balance is also automatic by turning on the " AUTO BLK" switch, which closes the lens iris and sets up the video black level in each color channel. Digital memory is used also for this control. · VIDEO LEVEL INDICATOR -- For manual iris operation of lenses, an oversignal indication of tiger stripes is superimposed on the viewfinder display. · AUTO IRIS CLOSURE -- A lens iris is automatically closed for protecting the camera tubes from possible damage due to highlight when the camera is turned off or to standby, and for setting up the video black level when the " AUTO BLK" switch is turned off. · 4- POSITION FILTER DISC -- A filter disc includes 3200° K, 4700° K, 6000° K + 50% ND, and 0% ND filters. These filters, together with the auto white balance and auto iris, provide sufficient color temperature compensation and scene illumination correction.
· POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS -- The SK-91 may be
powered from any of aconventional battery belt an attachable battery pack, a car battery and an AC power adaptor. Low power consumption of mere 20W at single + 12 V DC assures continuous operation in excess of two hours with the battery belt or one hour with the attachable battery pack. · LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE WARNING -- A flashing LED in the viewfinder alerts the cameraman to low battery voltage. · STANDBY/OPERATE SWITCH -- The camera
draws only 5% of the normal power in the "STANDBY" mode. Return to the " OPERATE" mode is accomplished in afew seconds.
· + 9/ + 18dB HIGH- GAIN SWITCH -- Master gain of + 9/ + 18dB operates on the gain of all three color
channels simultaneously and is quite useful for the camera operation under extremely low light levels.
Usable pictures with acceptable signal-to-noise ratio is provided down to 20 lux ( 2fc) scene illumination at +18dB and f1.4. · MASTER BLACK CONTROL -- Master black level control is provided for brightness matching to other cameras. · REGISTRATION CONTROLS -- H/V centering trim pots in R and B channels and R, G, B, R- G and B- G monitor outputs are provided to check and control fine registration. · SPLIT- FIELD COLOR BARS -- A built-in color bar
generator produces split white with 75% and 100% white as well as six hues and black. This makes it eesy to set 100% modulation level in VTR recording. · SEPARATE VIDEO OUTPUTS -- In addition to the two isolated encoded video outputs for line and VTR, aseparate monitor output is provided. This delivers R, G. B, R- G, B- G or encoded video signal by switch selection. · RETURN VIDEO INPUT -- An external synchro-
nous or non synchronous composite video signal may be switched in the viewfinder.
· GENLOCK INPUT - A built-in sync generator can he genlocked to an external color composite or black
burst signal. Horizontal pulse timing and sub -carier phase are adjustable. In aPAL model the genlock unit is externally attached to the camera.
· BLANKING WIDTH ADJUSTMENT -- Both H and V blanking widths are adjustable over awide range to
compensate for the errors introduced into : he recorded video signal in the recording/time base correction/editing process. · HIGH RESOLUTION VIEWFINDER -- A 1.5- inch, tillable, high brightness, high- resolution viewfinder with amagnifying eyepiece assures precise focusng and picture composition. A built-in peaking circuit further assists in attaining sharp optical focusing of the lens. An optional 5- inch viewfinder is also available for studio use.
· VIEWFINDER INDICATORS -- The 1.5- inch viewfinder includes the following indicators: Tally, White Balance, Video Level ( tiger stripe), Battery Voltage and VTR Record. · HI- Fl MICROPHONE AMPLIFIER -- A built-in microphone amplifier accepts a mike having output level from -45 to -60dBm. Two-time- constant limiting amplifier assures natural sounds even when a sound level varies abruptly. · VTR TRIGGER BUTTON -- A trigger button is provided on Ole lens for remote control of a portable VTR. VTR record is indicated in the viewfinder with an LED.
SK- 91 SK- 91P
ENG/EFP Camera
With 2/3" Saticons or Plumbicons, f1.4
prism optics, 2H enhancer and AVO, 9.7
lbs., + 9, + 18dB gain, auto white and
black balance and low 22 watts power
consumption.
$26,700.00
Self-contained color camera package includes:
HP- 91: Camera Head (3) H8398: Saticons VF- 153: Viewfinder 11.5")
DC- 91: Camera Cover DP- 40: Battery
CB- 91: Battery Bracket BC-40: Battery Charger SDM-91: Shoulder Mount TA- 91: Tripod Adaptor CL - 91: Carrying Case MK- 91: Maintenance Kit
SVM-91: Service Manual
Same as SK - 91 package except with XQ-
1427 RGB Plumbicons.
$26,700.00
· N.V. Philips 'Hitachi, Ltd.
PORTABLE ACCESSORIES
DP- 40
Battery Pack
CB- 91A Battery Bracket
BC- 40
Battery Charger
AD- 91 OC -40
AC Adaptor Quick Charger
MC- 80 M crophone
M H-91 Microphone Holder
C- 302A 1 1' Microphone Cable
$ 475.00 95.00 70.00
510.00 385.00 160.00
90.00 80.00
AUDIO ACCESSORIES
RO U-90 Remote Operation Unit
(requires CA- 91H)
OP- 91
Operation Panel
(requires CA- 91H)
CA- 91H Cable Adaptor for OP and ROU
VF- 501 5" Viewfinder vto AT- 91
$5450.00
1550.00 . 890.00
2450.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-97
1-1 ITAC H I175 Crossways Park W. Woodbury, NY 11797
Hitachi Denshi, Ltd. (516) 921-7200
COLOR CAMERA «bum
SK- 97 Full Auto Setup EFP Camera
The Hitachi SK- 97 is an epoch-making, 2/3- inch, 3- tube, portable color camera with full auto setup functions. The camera satisfies all the requirements necessary for a portable camera in EFP and studio applications; ie. excellent picture quality, great ease of operation and extremely high reliability.
The SK- 97 employs the same auto setup system as that of the sister camera SK- 970 for studio portable use, and can be used in combination with the SK- 970. In addition, the SK- 97 can be controlled by the SK- 110 full auto setup studio camera system too.
The SK- 97 weighs approximately 13.2 lbs. ( 6kg) excluding alens in spite of improvement in performance and addition of the auto setup functions.
In addition, when aTX- 97 triaxial adaptor is used together with the above units, power transmission as well as camera control is possible through a single triaxial cable of up to 1.4 miles ( 2.3 km) in case of using aFelten 2 .5 LS/11.5 cable.
Superior Serviceability The pickup tubes are rear -loaded for ease of replacement. In particular, the R and the Bchannel tube can be simply repla ced byremovin gthe top and the bottom cover of the camera respectively .
All of the electronic circuitries are divided by functions into printed circuit boards with silk printing on both sides ,and major circu it boards are inserted into aPCB harness with mother board connection.
Excellent Picture Quality · High Performance Pickup Tubes · High Resolution over Entire Screen - 600 TV Lines at Center
· High Signal- to- Noise Ratio - 58dB ( NTSC); 55dB ( PAL) · Improved Prism Optics · ABO ( Automatic Beam Optimizer) · Encoder with Dynamic Contrast (Variable Gamma) · High- Precision Static and Dynamic Registration
· Linear Matrix Masking
Great Ease of Operation · Auto Iris · Two Filter Disks · High- Brightness, High- Resolution Viewfinder · Viewfinder Character Display · Power Supply Options · Preheat/Operate Switch · -r9/+18 dB High- Gain Switch · Centralized Control Panel · Chroma Keying Outputs · Selectable YIQ/RGB Outputs · SMPTE/EBU Color Bar Output · Hi -Fi Microphone Amplifier · Two-Wire/Four-Wire Intercom System
Versatile Auto Setup System · Zero Method Control · Auto Setup Mode Selection · Data Files · Fault Diagnosis · RCU ( Remote Control Unit) · Auto/Manual Setup by Camera Itself
SK- 97-3A Full Auto Set- Up EFP/Studio Camera For Broadcast Use with LOC D.G. Plumbicon
(X0.3427RGB), Less Lens,
Package Includes SK- 97 Camera Head, Built-in Auto Set-up XQ-3427RGB LOC D G Plumbicons VF- 154 15" High Resolution V.F. w/ Diagnosis Display
AP- 40U A C Adaptor TA- 97 Tripod Adaptor CL- 97 Carrying Case SVM-SK-97 Service Manual Standard Accessories
S39,500.00
Accessories
CB- 97 Battery Bracket DP- 40 Battery ( 2 Hour) BC- 40 Battery Charger for SP-40 C-201VD 2m/ 6ft. VTr Cable 14- pin C-201VC 2m6 ft. VTR Cable for HR- 100 MH-97 Microphone Holder C-400M Microphone Cable RC- 97 Rain Proof Cover
S 95.00 475.00 70.00 280.00 310.00 180.00 80.00 280.00
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT Width
Height
Depth
Weight approx
mm in
mm in
mm in
kg
lb
Camera BSU RCU
100 3.9 210 8.3 76 3.0
280 11.0 180 7.1 360 14.2
355 14.0 350 13.8 160 6.3
6 13.2 13 28.6 3.8 8.4
Digital Command System Available
DU- 97
210 83
When an optional digital command system consisting of the MU- 97 multi adaptor and the DU- 97 DCU is used, all the camera operations can be
MU- 97
30 1.2
remotely controlled from the RCU or the SK- 110's SCU through asingle coaxial cable. The MU- 97 is attached to the camera side cover and the
TX- 97
110 4.3
D1 J-97 of half- rack size is located near the BSU
VC- 98
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
133 5.2 155 6. 1 170 6.7
350 13.8
345 13.6
43
1 .7
8.5 18.7 1.6 3.5
0 .9
2.0
HITACHI
Hitachi Denshi. Ltd.
175 Crossways Park W Woodbury, NY 11797
(516) 921-7200
COLOR CAMERAS
SK- 970 Full Auto- Setup Compact Studio Camera
The Hitachi SK-970 is an epochmaking, 2/3-inch, 3-tube studio camera with full auto setup functions built into acompact size and alight weight of 55 lbs. (25 kg). The camera satisfies all the requirements necessary for studio and field applications; i.e. excellent picture quality, great ease of operation and extremely high reliability.
The auto setup system controls every parameter related to color balance and registration to provide the highest picture quality at all times. In addition, the system controls on-line, real-time compensation for registration errors caused by achange in lens zooming and focusing or in prism temperature, ensuring high picture quality.
Since amicrocomputer is built into the camera, the camera can be set up both automatically and manually either at the camera itself or from an RCU (Remote Control Unit) through aBSU ( Base Station Unit). A DCU ( Digital Command Unit) is also provided to constitute asystem configuration best suited to each application anywhere at any time.
The SK- 970 employs the same auto setup system as that of the sister camera SK- 97 EFP camera, and can be used in combination with the SK- 97. In addition, the SK- 970 can be controlled by the SK- 110 full auto setup studio camera system too.
The SK- 970 features not only high performances but also much flexibility for system configuration.
FEATURES
Excellent Picture Quality · High performance pickup tubes · High resolution over entire Screen -- 600 TV lines at center · High signal-to-noise ratio -- 58dB ( NTSC); 55dB ( PAL) · Improved prism optics · ABO (Automatic Beam Optimizer) · Encoder with dynamic contrast (Variable Gamma) · High- precision static and dynamic registration · Linear matrix masking
Great Ease of Operation · Compact and lightweight system · Auto iris · Two filter disks · 7- inch VF with various functions · Viewfinder character display · + 9/+18 dB high-gain switch · Centralized control panel · Outputs of four pictures at camera · Chroma keying outputs · SMPTE/EBU color bar output · Hi -Fi microphone amplifier · Two-wire/Four-wire intercom system
Versatile Auto Setup System · Zero method control · Auto setup mode selection · Data files · Fault diagnosis · RCU ( Remote Control Unit) · Auto/Manual setup by camera itself
Triaxial Digital Command System Available When an optional digital command system consisting of the MU- 970 multi adaptor and the DU- 970 DCU is used, all the camera operations can be remotely controlled from the RCU or the SK- 110's SCU through asingle triaxial cable and also the camera power can be transmitted through the cable.
The MU-970 is built into the camera and the DU-970 of half- rack size is located near the BSU. When aFelten 2.5 LS/11.5 cable is used, both are separated by up to 1.1 miles ( 1.8 km).
Since an FM frequency multiplexed transmission is used for video, audio and command signals, the system ensures excellent transmission quality, especially high signal-to-noise ratio for video and audio signals and high reliability for command signals. Transmission of the selected monitoring video signal ( PIX/WFM/CK) is possible as astandard.
Superior Serviceability The pickup tubes are rear- loaded for ease of replacement. In particular, the Rand the Bchannel tube can be simply replaced by removing the top and the bottom cover of the camera respectively.
All of the electronic circuitries are divided by functions into printed circuit boards with silk printing on both sides, and major circuit boards are inserted into aPCB harness with mother board connections.
General-purpose electrical parts are selected for ease of maintenance and panicularlly, ICs having asecond source are used.
SK-970-3 Full Auto Set- Up
Self- Contained Studio Camera for broadcast field/studio use with LOC D.G. Plumbicons, Less Lens.
Package Includes:
SK-970 Camera Head, Built-in Auto Set- Up X(2-3427RGB LOC D.G. Plumbicons VF-710 4" Viewfinder
SVM-SK-970 Service Manual
$49,400.00
SK- 970-3 Full Auto Set- Up ENG/Studio Camera Less Lens.
Package Includes:
SK- 970 Camera Head, Built-in Auto Set-up XO-3427RGB LOC D.G. Plumbicons VF-710 4" Viewfinder BU -97 Base Station Unit RU-97 Remote Control Unit SVM-970 Service Manual Standard Accessories
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Width
Height
rrl m in
mm in
$58,900 00
Depth mm in
Weight appro x
kg
lb
Camera BSU RCU
230 9 1 210 83 76 30
455 17 9 180 71 360 14 2
440 17 3 350 13 8 160 63
25 550 13 286 38 84
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 99
HITACHI
Hitachi Denshi. Ltd.
175 Crossways Park W. Woodbury, NY 11797
(516) 921-7200
COLOR CAMERA
SK- 110 Broadcast Quality Camera
CAMERA HEAD ·Highly efficient prism optics: A newly developed
f1.8 prism optics are used in conjunction with 1-1/4" Plumbicon· tubes to provide a high signal-to-noise ratio of 54 dB at 2000 lux and f5.6. The optical filters have been dust- proofed to virtually eliminate dust
problems. ·Six- position ND and color filter discs: Two filter
discs, one for ND filters and the other for color filters have been provided, with independent filter selection possible from both the RCU and the SCU. The discs are servomotor driven and may be rotated in
either direction. ·Improved registration and optical axis accura-
cy: By using an independent four-corner adjustable dynamic registration compensation unit, compensation to within 0.05% over the entire picture area is possible. This can be achieved by means of either the auto-setup or the remote control from the SCU. The compensation data is stored in RAM memory with a back-up battery. The optics, coil assemblies and zoom lens are mounted as aunit to ensure that me-
chanical distortion does not affect the optical system or coil assemblies and to eliminate the effects of external mechanical stresses on registration and optical axis accuracy. ·Comet tails eliminated by ABO ( Automatic Beam Optimizer): The Hitachi developed ABO circuit allows the beam current to be increased up to 16
times versus only 4 times the normal setting for conventional systems, alimitation imposed by considerations of picture quality. This means that comet tails can be eliminated without the usual accompanying misregistration, loss of resolution, and increase in dark current. ·High-performance viewfinder: A bright, highresolution CRT has been used in the viewfinder to provide an easy- to- view image even for outdoor shooting. The viewfinder can be tilted from + 25° to
-45° and rotated + / - 90° to set it at any arbitrary
angle. ·Easy-to- use video select button: R, G, B. minus
G, and two return video signals ( AUX-1and AUX-2) can be switch- selected as the viewfinder video sig-
nal. ·Convenient monitor output on the camera
head: A separate video output has been provided on the camera head to be used for floor monitors, etc. · Red and green tallies: The viewfinder is provided with both red and green tallies, the red one for live shooting and the green one used for VTR recording. · Built-in microphone amplifier: The camera head is provided with abuilt-in microphone amplifier with limiter. The audio output is balanced to prevent the pickup of noise from the camera cable. ·Test signals provided to simplify setup: Test signals are used for easy calibration of the output of each amplifier stage. The signals are applied in sequence, starting from the process amplifier and walking back until the preamplifier is calibrated. The test signals may be applied to the input of the preamplifier first stage, process amplifier- 1and process amplifier-2, and consist of a 100% and 200% level sawtooth waveform which can be used for level calibration as well as verification of gamma, knee point, slope and clipping point. · Designed for easy servicing: The camera head and CCU PC boards are simple to remove and
marked on both sides, making parts easy- to- find for quick servicing or inspection. Another serviceability
feature is acoil assembly that can be removed while the camera is mounted to the dolly.
CCU
·Compact design: The CCU is designed as adedicated camera control unit for computer controlled cameras. Both the video processing section and the computer section have been housed in one compact package.
· Linear matrix masking: A built-in linear matrix masking circuit is provided and ensures faithful color reproduction and easy tone matching among cameras.
·High-performance contour corrector: Compensation signals derived from the R and G channels provide clear, crisp images of even red subjects. The contour correction signals are automatically processed to match the type of subject, maintain optimum compensation and ensure natural images.
·Standby mode operation: Three operating modes have been provided to reduce power consumption and extend the life of the pickup tubes and CRT. HI CCU POWER: Main power supply is switched on; the CCU is operating. (21 POWER: The camera head is on and the heaters of the pickup tubes and CRT are supplied with 50%
of the normal voltage. 13) BEAM: The pickup tube beams are switched on and the camera operates. ·Genlock: The SK- 110 is genlocked to an external sync signal when composite sync and subcarrier signals are applied. Horizontal and subcarrier phases can be adjusted manually. If required, genlocking by means of ablack burst signal can also be provided. ·Built-in SMPTE/VIT color bar generator: A color bar generator conforming to the latest SMPTE standards has been built-in for convenient adjustment of monitors. Also built-in is a VIT color bar
generator, allowing monitoring of the characteristics of the encoder and the transmission line while on the air. ·High- reliability LSI process amplifier: Camera picture quality is greatly effected by the stability of
the process amplifiers used. LS) process amplifiers have been used in the SK- 110 camera to provide stable operation with respect to temperature variations and eliminate variations between channels. They provide both picture quality and high reliability and represent the most advanced step in acamera of
this class.
·Special effects: Ill The horizontal and vertical deflection currents
can be independently reversed, afeature useful in
picking up mirror images. (2) The video polarity of the R, G, and B signals can
be independently inverted. 131 A circuit has been provided which can be used to
provide swinging of horizontal deflection by means of an externally applied low frequency
signal. ·Encoder with variable gamma ( contrast): Gam-
ma control of luminance and chrominance signals is linked and can be adjusted by remote control, making adjustment of the picture contrast very easy, even under such difficult conditions as those encountered outdoors. ·Iris: In the Auto Iris mode the lens iris is automatically adjusted according to subject illumination. In manual mode, the center value and adjustment range of the iris are set by the sense and range controls of the SCU or RCU. This feature makes operation in the studio where light variations are small extremely simple. The iris values are visible on the SCU and RCU LED display.
AUTOMATIC SETUP · Zero method control: The zero method of control
is capable of controlling the R, G. and B channels,
thus eliminating the troublesome manual adjustment of the G channels required in the G channel reference method. The system has been completely automated, and a parallel control system can set up multiple cameras simultaneously in just 2 minutes.
·Control of multiple cameras: By using aDSU for every group of six cameras, up to 24 cameras can be
controlled with just one SCU. By adding aTSU control capabilities can be expanded up to 42 cameras using two SCUs, providing all the flexibility you will
ever need. ·Automatic setup modes: Five automatic setup
modes have been provided; full, registration, color
balance, G- reference, and white balance. These can be selected from to suit the picture conditions at the time. In addition, manual control from either the SCU or RCU is possible, with all normal operational
controls accessible manually. · Data files: Five data files are provided except for the
AUTO data file. Automatic setup data is automatically stored in the AUTO data file. It is possible to
store or erase the manual setup data from the SCU in the five data files by operating the entry or reject
switch. ·Fault diagnosis: Fault diagnosis of the camera
video system, power supply and pulse system is performed automatically to detect failures. Diagnosed
results are printed out on the typewriter. This system has greatly simplified camera maintenance by providing quick and accurate information on failures. ·Quick check: When the SCU Check switch is depressed, registration 1G- reference) and color balance 1G- reference) are automatically checked and, if the required accuracy is not being obtained, the read-
justment is automatically made. ·Scroll display and automatic setup status
display: The results of the fault diagnosis and the
quick check are displayed on a scrolled picture
monitor character display. The scrolling display may be stopped at any desired point for viewing. The
status of the automatic setup function ( controlled parameters and their status) may also be viewed on
the picture monitor character display. ·Remote control: The SCU, TSU, DSU, and CCU
may be connected with just three twisted- pair cables and be separated from one other by up to 1000m (3000 ft I. The CCU and RCU may be connected
using three twisted- pair cables and separated up to 100m ( 300 ft.). If the power supply is provided externally lo the RCU the distance to the CCU can be
extended up to 1000m ( 3000 ft.).
$78,000.00
VC- 100
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
11 ITAC H I175 Crossways Park W. Woodbury, NY 11797
Hitachi Denshi, Ltd. (516) 921-7200
COLOR CAMERA
SK- 110D FULL AUTO- SETUP COLOR TV CAMERA
SCU ( Setup Control Unit) This unit provides centralized camera control functions for multiple cameras.
A power supply on/off, auto- setup, quick check, fault diagnosis, manual control, typeout, picture monitor character display, digital display of lens f-number, monitor picture selection, floppy- disk memory for manual adjustment data, and RCU function are provided for each camera. The picture monitor character display includes controlled parameters and percentage of controlled quantities. The DSU function for six cameras is built into the SCU to simplify the system. However, when controlling more than six cameras, use external DSUs.
DSU ( Delegation Switch Unit) This unit serves as aswitching unit for data lines and video signals when several cameras are controlled by an SCU. It is possible to assign up to 6 CCUs to one DSU which can be located anywhere between the SCU and the CCU. TSU ( Transfer Switch Unit) This unit provides switching for data lines and video signals when several camera groups are controlled by two SCUs. The group is selected in ablock of aDSU and each camera is controlled through the DSU.
CAMERA HEAD
Pickup Tubes 1-1/4" LOC-DG Plumbicon pick-up tube; 750 TV lines; signal-to-noise ratio of 56dB or more. Highly Efficient Prism Optics f/1.8 prism optics.
High- Accuracy Static Registration Auto setup control for camera registration including that for bow and skew distortions in both the horizontal and vertical directions guarantees high accuracy static registration of 0.05% over the entire screen, in combination with Digital Registration Compensation ( DRC) and corner registration compensation which controls four corners independently. High Precision Dynamic Registration By using RLC ( Real-time Lens Correction), the auto setup system controls on-line, real-time compensation for registration errors caused by variations of lens zooming and focusing.
Scrambling Use of Multiple Cameras
Computerized Tube Hour Meter Controlled by the built-in microcomputer instead of a conventional electromechanical hour meter, providing a character display of operating hours on the viewfinder screen.
Dynamic Focusing Circuit
ABO ( Automatic Beam Optimizer)
High Performance 7" VF with Numerous Functions
Built-in Microphone Amplifier/Limiter
Test Signals for Amplifier Calibration A 100% and a 200% level sawtooth test signal are provided to facilitate calibration and setup of each video amplifier. By applying these signals in sequence to the input of the process amplifier-2, process amplifier- 1and preamplifier first stage, it is possible to calibrate the level of each amplifier as well as to verify the gamma, knee point, slope, clipping point, etc. Easy Servicing The PC boards in the camera head and CCU are simple to remove and are marked on both sides, making parts easy- to- find for quick servicing or inspection. Another serviceability feature is a coil assembly that can be removed while the camera is mounted on the dolly.
·1 ® N.V. Philips
CCU
Compact Design The CCU is designed as a dedicated camera control unit for acomputer controlled camera. Both the video processing section and the computer section have been housed in one compact package. The width of the power supply unit is reduced to just a half of 19" rack for compact system configuration.
Linear Matrix Masking
High- Performance Contour Corrector Compensation signals derived from the R and G channels provide clear, crisp images even for red subjects. The contour correction signals are automatically processed to match the type of subject, maintain optimum compensation and ensure natural images.
Standby Mode Operation Three operating modes are provided to save power consumption and extend the life of the pickup tubes and CRT. 1. CCU Power: Main power supply is switched on;
the CCU is operating. 2. Power: The camera head is on and the heaters of
the pickup tubes and CRT are supplied with 50% of the normal voltage. 3. Beam: Beam current of the pickup tube is turned on and the camera operates.
Genlock The SK- 110D is genlocked to ablack burst signal or a composite video signal. Horizontal and subcarrier phases can be adjusted manually.
High Reliability LSI Process Amplifier Output picture quality is greatly affected by the stability of pi-ocess amplifiers. LSI process amplifiers used in this camera provide stable operation against temperature variations and provide no deviation between channefs.
Special Effects 1. The horizontal and vertical deflection currents can
be independently reversed, a feature useful in picking up mirror images. 2. The video polarity of the R, G, and B signals can be independently inverted. 3. Swinging of horizontal deflection is provided by means of an externally applied audio frequency signal.
Encoder with Variable Gamma ( Contrast) Gamma control of luminance and chrominance signals is linked and can be adjusted by remote control, making adjustment of the picture contrast very easy, even under such difficult conditions as those encountered outdoors.
Built- In SMPTE/VIT Color Bar Generator A color bar generator conforming to the latest SMPTE standards has been built in for convenient adjustment of monitors. Also built in is aVIT color bar generator, allowing monitoring of the characteristics of the encoder and the transmission line while on the air.
Computer- Controlled Auto Iris Lens iris is automatically controlled by detecting the average and peak value of the object illumination and calculating the control output data for optimizing lens servo response by a built-in microprocessor.
AUTOMATIC SETUP
Zero Method Control The zero method of control is capable of controlling the R, G, and Bchannels, thus eliminating the troublesome manual adjustment of the G channel required in the G channel reference method.
Expandable System Hierarchy A microprocessor is built in each unit from the SCU to the camera head, so that the system can flexibly be configured from 1- camera chain to a large scale system. By using a DSU for every group of six cameras, up to 24 cameras can be controlled with just one SCU. By adding a TSU control capabilities can be expanded to up to 42 cameras using two SCUs, providing all the flexibility you will ever need.
Automatic Setup Modes Eleven automatic setup modes are provided: AUTO SETUP ( full), COLOR BALance, REGIstration, ()RC AUTO, G REFerence, EXTernal chart full AUTO, EXTernal chart regi AUTO, EXTernal chart color balance AUTO, CHECK, AUTO WHITE, and AUTO BLACK
Fault Diagnosis Fault diagnosis of the video system, pulse system and power supply in the camera head and the CCU of the selected camera is performed by depressing the DIAG switch. Diagnosed results are displayed on the picture monitor and the viewfinder, and can be printed out on an optional teletypewriter, too.
Auto Setup of 38 Parameters Total of 38 parameters of auto setup for color balance and registration including digital registration compensation are avai able for system setup.
Remote Control
The SCU, TSU, DSU, and CCU may be connected with just three twisted- pair cables and be separated from one another by up to 1,000m ( 3,000 ft.) The CCU and RCU may be connected using three twisted- pair cables and separated up to 100m 1300 ft.)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 101
H ITAC H I175 Crossways Park W. Woodbury, NY 11797
Hitachi Denshi. Ltd. (516) 921-7200
CCTV CAMERA
HV-700 Series Camera
ale
11111illillillIIIIIIL
(with Standard Lens)
(with ES Lens)
HV-17L
HV -17L 1" Vidicon Camera
The HV-17L, designed for industrial use, and faithful surveillance is a recent addition to the superb line of Hitachi CCTV cameras. Two features particularly appealing about the HV-17L are its top-level performance and low price. Its sensitivity has been greatly enhanced by aHitachi 1- inch Vidicon, producing faithful scene reproduction despite the absence of adequate lighting. Its superb performance is further ensured by more advanced circuit design such as white suppress and auto- beam circuits. These features render it possible to use the HV-17L in the broad industrial field.
FEATURES
· Enhanced ASC operation range The HV-17L boasts of greatly enhanced ASC ( Automatic Sensitivity Control)
operation . . . 20,000:1. · 1- inch high- sensitive Vidicon
Equipped with a 1- inch high- sensitive Vidicon, the HV-17L provides expert surveillance where there is inadequate lighting. It requires only 3 luxes ( minimum illumination) for thorough surveillance. · Clearest possible image The built-in white suppress circuit assures the clearest, brightest possible images of darkened scene objects even when there is abright object among them. · Auto- beam circuit The auto- beam circuit automatically compensates Vidicon emission deterioration, and eliminates the necessity to periodically adjust the camera reducing maintenance cost. · Easy back- focus adjustment Vidicon back focus can be easily adjusted from the camera exterior.
HV -17T 1" Vidicon Camera
Not Shown
The Hitachi CCTV Camera HV-17T, a highperformance TV camera intended for broad
industrial use, is designed with particular emphasis placed on system application.
Equipped with a Hitachi 1- inch Vidicon, its sensitivity has been sharply improved, assuring faithful scene reproduction in the low light condition. The HV-17T incorporates a2:1 complete interlace synchronizing signal generator, a white suppress circuit, an auto- beam circuit, and other advanced circuit designs to ensure wide- range surveillance capability. Operable by external synchronizing signals, it can be used in combination with other cameras or in conjunction with a VTR, promising expanded
HV-17L 1" Vidicon Camera, 600L, 117VAC 7262A Vidicon Tube, Lens Optional $350.00
HV-17T 1" Vidicon Camera, 6001, 117VAC Internal 2:1, or External Sync. 7262A Vidicon Tube, Lens Optional
$500.00
Lenses
A1214 12.5mm F1.4 wide angle lens $124.00
A1219 12.5mm F1.9 wide angle lens 109.00
A2514 25mm F1.4 standard
99.00
A2519 25mm F1.9 standard
77.00
A5014 50mm F1.4 Telephoto
105.00
A7514 75mm F1.4 Telephoto
168.00
A7519 75mm F1.9 Telephoto
133.00
HV -700 Series CCTV Camera
The Hitachi HV-700 Series CCTV Camera is a monitor television camera which is suitable for awide range of applications.
It is available either as an internal sync type (Line- lock type), an external sync type ( Non-
line- lock type).
FEATURES ·Owing to the use of an automatic sensi-
tivity control circuit, the only necessary camera operation is focusing ( only vidicon tube type).
·Automatic Beam Control ( ABC) Automatic circuitry eliminates need for periodic readjustment of beam throughout life of camera tube.
·A white suppressor circuit ensures faithful reproduction on the video monitor, even for subjects with strong contrast.
·Camera mounting screws are provided at the top and bottom of the camera, facilitating mounting of the camera.
rEach Machine
Model
HV-720
HV-721 HV-725N HV-726N HV-730 HV-731 HV-735N HV-736N
Synchronizing system Line-lock,2:1 interlace Line-lock,2:1 interlace Line-lock,2:1 interlace Line-lock,2:1 interlace Internal/external sync. , 21 interlace Internal/external sync.,2:1 interlace Internal/external sync . 2.1 interlace Internal/external sync. . 21 interlace
·S-t-a--n-d-a-r-d-C-o-mo.osition
Items Camera Lens TV16-16J ( 16mm f1.6) Connecting Plug Mak 60 EE lens connecting clamp 2.50,3.501mm) Operation manual
HV-720/721
0 0
0
·Switchover to external synchronization takes place automatically when an external drive signal is input, hence no switch
operation is necessary.
·The camera is available as a high resolution type for a Vidicon tube or as a high sensitivity type for a Newvicon* tube, to suit the particular applications and place where it is to be used. In total, 8models are
available. All of these employ a 2:1 interlaced scanning system, providing a more stable and clearer image.
·Video monitor available in three versions, 9- inch, 12- inch and 17- inch. The optimum distance for viewing avideo monitor is considered to be about 4to 10 times the height of the screen. This monitor is available in three sizes, 9- inch, 12inch and 17- inch, for applications ranging from close up monitoring to cases where the monitor is viewed from adistance. All three monitors provide a clear, sharp and
stable image.
·Wealth of accessories A wide range of accessories, including vari-
ous lenses, camera case, motorized
pan/tilt heads, automatic video switcher, VTR, and video cable, is available to enable you to upgrade your system in accordance
with the particular applications.
*Trade mark
HV-720 2/3" Vidicon type
HV-721 AC version HV-725N Newvicon tube type HV-726N Newvicon tube type
$240.00
240.00 764.00 764.00
HV-730 2/3" Vidicon type
HV-731 AC version HV-735N Newvicon tube type HV-736N Newvicon tube type
$332.00
332.00 706.00 706.00
Pick-up tube Vidicon tube Vidicon tube Newvicon tube Newvicon tube Vidicon tube Vidicon tube Newvicon tube Newvicon tube
Power supply input Commercial AC power input 24V AC power input Commercial AC power input 24V AC power input Commercial AC power input 24V AC power input Commercial AC power input 24V AC power input
HV-725/726N
0
0 0
HV-730/731
0 0 0
0
HV-735/736N
0
0 0 0
system application. VC- 102
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HITACHI
Hitachi Denshi, Ud.
175 Crossways Park West Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 921-7200
CCTV CAMERA
"REMOTE EYE" SINGLE CABLE CCTV SYSTEM
The Remote Eye is acompact, high-performance CCTV camera system designed for use in awide variety of monitoring applications. As aresult of its single coaxial cable system, the need for involved AC power installation of the camera has been eliminated. This system allows greatly increased customer service, crime and fire prevention in such diverse applications as financial institutions, stores, hospitals, and hotels, while also helping improve managerial capabilities.
CAMERA HV-240/240N This is a black and white TV camera of an internal sync type designed to be used with a multi unit ( MU-240). A 2:1 interlace system employing a crystal oscillator makes for excellent picture. The HV-240 is a high resolution type ( horizontal 550 lines or more at center) of vidicon camera containing an ASC ( Automatic Sensitivity Control) circuit, enabling astable picture to be obtained over arange of illumination between 10 and 100,000 lux. The HV-240N is a high sensitivity type of Newvicon camera ( minimum illumination: 0.5 lux f1.6).
It is provided with an auto iris lens output terminal, permitting fitment of an auto iris lens which automatically regulates the aperture in accordance with fluctuations in illumination.
CAMERA HV-246/246N This is an external sync type of camera which is used in combination with a dedicated sequential switcher ( CS-263/266). The HV-245 is avidicon camera. The HV-245N is a newvicon camera.
SEQUENTIAL SWITCHER CS-283/266 This is a sequential switcher which selects the video signals from several HV-245/245N cameras and then sends them to avideo monitor. It is provided with all the functions necessary for monitoring and recording. Two models, the CS-263 with 3 inputs and the CS-266 with 6inputs, are available.
·Clean, undistorted switched picture. Each camera is driven by the same sync signal, and switching takes place during the vertical blanking period of the video signal, hence there is no distortion of the picture during switching. During automatic switching, it is possible to skip terminals to which cameras are not connected, by operating aswitch. It is also possible to perform video switching manually.
· Interrupt switching function provided. Interrupt terminals corresponding to the camera numbers are provided, hence by connecting an alarm device such as a sensor, the video of the camera corresponding to the place where an alarm was emitted will automatically be selected. Thus there is no risk of failing to recognize an abnormal condition.
·Alarm output function provided. This unit is provided with an alarm output terminal from which an alarm signal is emitted for aperiod of about 5to 30 seconds
in the event of an interrupt input. By connecting an alarm device such as abuzzer or a lamp, the occurrence of an abnormality will be brought to your attention.
·Auto mode return function. The video of acamera switched by an interrupt input can be returned to the auto mode after about 5to 60 seconds ( this time can be continuously varied). It is also possible to return to the auto mode immediately after the interrupt input disappears.
·Can be connected to aTime Lapse VTR. Switching timing can be controlled by an external switching pulse input. As aresult, even when connected to aTime Lapse VTR, the entire camera picture can be recorded without error.
HV-240 HV-240N HV-245 HV245N CS- 263 CS- 266
$350.00 800.00 225.00 595.00 470.00 625.00
LENSES
Wide angle, standard and telephoto lens.. various replacement lenses are available to accommodate the field of vision. ( The photographs shown below were taken at a fixed distance of 5m from the subject.)
HV-240/HV-245
Minimum illumination 10 lux ( f / 1.6 3200°k)
Resolution
550 lines or more a/ center
Horizontal resolution
Dimensions ( WxHxD) 3x2.4 x5.9"
Weight
(76 x62 x150mm) Approx. 1.3 lbs. ( 0.6kg)
4111
I *.,
00)
HV-240N/245N
Minimum illumination 0.5 lux ( f/1,6 3200"k)
Horizontal resolution 450 lines or more at center
Dimensions ( WxHxD) 3.0 x2.4 x5.9"
Weight
(76 x62 x150mm) Approx. 1.3 lbs. ( 0.6kg)
MU- 240
Supply voltage
U-type: 120V AC 60 Hz
E-type: 220V AC 50 Hz
K-type: 240V AC 50 Hz
Power consumption Approx. 10W (When using a
HV-240 or HV-240N) Dimensions ( WxHxD) 3.0 x2.4 x5.7"
176 x62 x145mm)
Weight
Approx. 2.2 lbs. (1kg)
CS- 263
Video inputs
Max. 3 ( HV-245/245N)
Power consumption Approx. 40W ( When using
three HV-245/245N cameras)
Dimensions ( WxHxD) 9.4 x3.0 x10.2"
(240 x75 x260mm)
Weight
Approx. 8.8 lbs. (4kg)
CS- 266
Video inputs
Max. 6 ( HV-245/245N1
Power consumption Approx. 70W ( When using six
HV-245/HV-245N cameras)
Dimensions ( WxH xD) 9.4 x3.0 x11.4"
(240 x75 x290mm)
Weight
Approx. 13.2 lbs. (6kg)
MONITORS
VM-900A 9- inch monitor
Dimensions ( WxHxD) 9.6 x9.2 x9.3"
1244 x233 x235mrn(
Weight Optimum
Approx. 13.4 lbs. ( 6_1kg)
monitoring distance 2to 5' ( 0.5 to 1.5m)
VM-900A
$ 180.00
VM-906 9- inch monitor
Dimensions ( WxHxD) 8.6 x8.6 x9.2"
Weight
(219 x219 x234mm) Approx. 13.2 lbs. ( 6kg)
Optimum
monitoring distance 2to 5' ( 0.5 to 1.5m)
VM-906
$285.00
Used in combination with Time Lapse VTR
*Me
Wide angle lens 8.5mm
0618Cx C81513 C8118EX
812110.2 81211DEX
6 58.8,"
F 8 G FI.1 2-1.1 FLA
Standard lens 16mm
.6160404 2 CI614 C16111DEx
Telephoto lens 50mm
1,1,514C 825I4CES.3 850141 850181E-3 137514C
87518E5.3
SO·wn 50..1 75wn 75.wn
Fl 4 F1 8
Zoom lens 75mm
C621218 C821218ES
12.5- 75444 Fl.8 12 5 - 7544. Fl .8
ine , ype numbers shown are those ot COSMICAR lenses
VM-129 12- inch monitor
Dimensions ( WxH xD) 12.5 x11.2 x12.4"
Weight Optimum
(318 x284 x315mm) Approx. 22 lbs. ( 10kg)
monitoring distance 3to 7' ( 0.8 to 2m)
VM-129
$360.00
VM-173 17- inch monitor Dimensions ( WxH xD) 15.9 x15.2 x11.5"
(405 x386 x293mm)
Weight Optimum
Approx. 37.4 lbs. (17kg)
monitoring distance 4to 10' 11 to 3m)
VM-173
$395.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 103
H ITAC H I175 Crossways Park West Woodbury, NY 11797
Hitachi Denshi, Ltd. (516) 921-7200
BLACK/WHITE TV CAMERA
KP-230/231 ALL SOLID-STATE CCTV CAMERA
The Hitachi KP-230/ 231 is asolid-state black- and-white TV camera which employs asolid-state imaging device instead of aconventional
pickup tube.
The KP-230/231 is designed to be aseparate type of an ultra- compact camera and acamera control unit. KP-230 is DC powered, KP-231 is
AC powered.
FEATURES ·This camera features an MOS two-dimensional photo sensor array
with 384 horizontal and 485 vertical picture elements, developed es-
pecially by Hitachi, as the solid-state imaging device, and this device
provides the high resolution of 450 TV lines and high picture quality. ·The " blooming" can be greatly reduced as compared with acon-
ventional camera. ·2:1 interlaced scanning is employed according to the EIA standard.
·The MOS solid-state imaging device ensures no deflection distortion
or burning, and also alow level of lag. Moreover, the service life is prolonged and the reliability of the camera has been upgraded.
·Max cable length is 10 m. Camera head with incl. cable is 2 m;
camera extension cable is 8m ( option).
·Easy system configuration: the KP-230/ 231 is used with external
units and peripheral units, since the clock pulse, horizontal and ver-
tical sync signals and composite sync signal are supplied from the
camera control unit ( CCU).
·Besides the internal non- line- lock system, external sync may also be
employed. The switch-over to external sync is automatic with the
supply of the external drive signal and so there is no need to operate
any switches.
$2450.00
SPECIFICATIONS Imaging device
Scanning area
Synchronization Scanning system Scanning frequency
Resolution
MUS-type 2- dimensional photo
sensor array with 384(H)x485(V)
picture elements, HE- 98222
6.6x8.8 mm ( equivalent to 2/3-
inch vidicon)
Internal/External sync
2:1 interlaced scanning
Horizontal: 15,734 Hz
Vertical:
59.94 Hz
Horizontal: 450 lines at center
Vertical:
350 lines at center
Signal output Composite video signal,
negative (BNC connector)
1 . 0Vp-p(VS),
75 ohms
sync
Signal-to-noise ratio
42 dB
Minimum illumination
20 lux, f1.4 ( When the HIGH GAIN switch is ON)
Lens mount
C- mount
Camera cable to CCU
2m ( Standard)
Camera mount
1 /4"-20 UNC
Ambient temperature Power requirements
KP-230:
--10 to +50°C ( 14 to 122° F) DC12 +4V
KP-231:
U type E type K type
117V - ±10%, 60Hz 220V±-10%, 50Hz 240V±-10%, 50Hz
Power consumption KP-230: KP-231:
Approx. 4.8W
U type
Approx. 9W
E&K types Approx. 10W
Dimensions ( WxHxD) Camera head: Camera control unit:
45x45x61 mm ( 1.8x1.8x2.4 in ) 200x71 x235 mm ( 7.9x2.8x9.3 in)
Weight Camera head:
Approx. 110g ( 0.24 lb) excluding lens and cables
Camera control unit: KP-230: KP-231:
Approx. 1.5 kg ( 3.3 lb) Approx. 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb)
STANDARD COMPOSITION
·Camera head (with 2m- camera cable)
·Camera control unit ·EE lens connector ·External sync input connector ·Sync output connector ·12V DC input connector
(KP-230 only) ·Operation manual
1 pc
HR10-7P-4P DIN 6- pin DIN 7- pin RM12-BPG-3S
1 pc 1 pc 1pc 1pc 1 pc
1copy
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
·Lenses ·Extension camera cable ( 8m)
VC- 104
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HITACHI
Hitachi Denshi, Ltd.
175 Crossways Park West Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 921-7200
CCTV CAMERA
MOS SOLID STATE CAMERA
KP-120/220 CCTV CAMERA
The KP-120/220 is a black- and-white TV camera employing asolidstate pickup device in the form of aMOS-type 320 ( H) x244 ( V) picture element two-dimensional photo- sensor array, developed by Hitachi, Ltd., to achieve improved sensitivity and blooming characteristics.
The operating principle of a TV camera which employs solid-state pickup devices prevents the actual picture from deflection, distortion or sticking and minimizes lag problems. Furthermore, this type of camera is characterized by long life and high reliability.
And there are even more merits! The KP-120 / 220 is compact and lightweight, and it can be operated easily. All these features render this camera ideal for geometric image processing where its lack of distortion is put to good use, and also for special monitoring applications in high or dangerous locations where the camera's long life and high reliability can be used to the utmost advantage.
EE lens output signals can be fed out.
FEATURES
Compact size and light weight By replacing the pickup tube and coil with asolid-state pickup device, the camera's weight and volume have been reduced to about one-third the corresponding values of conventional black- and- white pickup tube cameras ( produced by Hitachi).
Long service life and high reliability Similar to conventional semiconductor devices, the KP-120 / 220's solid-state pickup device is characterized by minimal aging, ensuring long service life. What apleasing contrast with an outmoded pickup tube whose degree of vacuum was subject to impairment and whose cathode material was subject to deterioration, requiring replacement.
Using asolid-state pickup device also reduces by about 50% the total number of parts used and increases reliability ( compared with other Hitachi cameras).
Applications
· Pipe cameras, underwater cameras, cameras mounted in high locations, monitoring of locations where no maintenance is normally possible · Instrumentation applications, pattern recognition ( geometric readout devices, robots), planimeters, dimensional and flaw inspections · Monitoring of moving objects, monitoring of locations subject to possible strong light, monitoring inside tunnels, pollution monitoring, traffic survey · Monitoring behind buses and trucks, monitoring work with cranes and other machines, monitoring at locations subject to vibration and shock · Shooting in strong magnetic or electrical fields
SPECIFICATIONS
·Pickup device: 320 H x 244V MOS-Type Solid- State device, HE- 97211 · Scanning Area: 6.6 x8.8 mm ( equivalent to 2/3- inch Vidicon) · Synchronization: Internal/External automatic selection · Scanning System: Progressive scanning · Scanning Frequency: Horizontal: 15.72 kHz, Vertical; 59.9 Hz · Resolution: Horizontal: More than 240 lines at center, Vertical: More than 190 lines at center · Signal output: 1.0 Vp-p ( VS), 75 ohms, sync negative ·Minimum Illumination: 10 lux ( 1fc) standard or 5lux ( 0.5 fc) selector incorporated, F1.4 · Signal-to-noise ratio: Random noise; 49 dB ( 4.5 MHz band), Fixed pattern noise; 52 dB ( 4.5 MHz band) · Lens Mount: C- mount · Camera Mount: 1/4" -20 · Ambient Temperature: - 10 to +50°C ( 15 to 122°F) · Power Requirements: 100 V + 1 - 10% AC, 50/60 Hz; 120V + /- 10% AC, 60 Hz, Approx. 5W ( using AC adaptor), 9V DC, 0.3A, approx., 2.7 W ( camera only) · Dimensions ( W x H x D): Camera; 2.4 x1.9 x5.2 in., AC adaptor; 2.6 x2.1 x3.5 in. · Weight: Camera; approx 0.95 lbs. excluding lens, AC adaptor: Approx. 1.76 lb.
No geometric distortion The solid-state pickup device is composed of tiny picture elements- 320 horizontal to the light sensor and 244 vertically. These elements are arranged with precision in the order of microns, and since the video signal is taken out from these unit devices, no geometric distortion occurs regarding the light sensor. It has been impossible to avoid this type of distortion with conventional pickup tubes because the electron beam emitted from the electron gun was deflected by the coil and the light sensor was scanned. This demerit persisted even when some form of electrical compensation was provided.
Reduced lag One undesirable characteristic of pickup tubes leads to lag for avery short interval after the subject image had faded away. This produces a so-called " comet tail effect" when a rapidly moving subject is shot. However, with the solid-state pickup device, this lag has been reduced to avery low level.
No sticking; long service life When the same object is shot over along period or when an extremely bright light is shot, the signals produced may not fade away-- or they may never fade away. This phenomenon is termed " sticking".
However, with a solid-state pickup device, absolutely no sticking occurs-- afeature which prolongs camera service life.
Excellent immunity to vibration and shock The construction and mounting method of conventional pickup tubes and the coil made them susceptible to vibration and shock. By using a solid-state pickup device, it is now possible to upgrade the camera's immunity to vibration and shock to alevel commensurate with other electronic devices and equipment.
KP-120
Includes camera without lens, AC adaptor, connectors for external sync and EE lens, operators manual.
KP-220 Includes camera head without lens, cable, remote control unit, operators manual.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 105
HITACHI
Hitachi Denshi, Ltd.
175 Crossways Park W. Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 921-7200
DK-3000/3300 SINGLE TUBE COLOR CAMERAS
Compact, easy-to- operate cylinder type camera head suitable for combination with surgical microscopes, endoscopes, and biological microscopes. They are approximately 1.5" ( 38mm) in diameter and weigh approximately 0.8 lb. ( 370g).
Resolution of 350 lines, minimum illumination of 25 lux ( 2.5 fc), f / 1.6, and SN ratio of 50 dB. A special circuit enables independent adjustment of red and green color phases and color saturation for the finest color reproduction. A compensation circuit is also built in for sharper pictures.
Special color bar for easy color adjustment of color monitor. LEDs are used for indication of the video level. ALC ( automatic light control) and AGC ( automatic gain control) detect the amount of light at the center of the screen, enabling acontinuously stable picture. Auto to white, ALC, AGC and ABO ( automatic beam optimizer) are provided.
MEDICAL CAMERAS
STANDARD COMPOSITION Camera head with 10' 13m) camera cable ( for DK-30001; with 10' ( 3m) + 23' ( 7m) camera cable ( for DK-3300); camera control unit.
The DK-3300 has a very unique feature, the title generator, which superimposes title, date, patient name, etc. onto the picture screen.
MEDICAL SERIES CAMERAS
CAMERA ITEMS
SINGLE TUBE COLOR CAMERA
DK-3000
DK-3300
Pick-up Tube
2/3"x1
"X 1
Output Signal
NTSC x2
NTSC x2
Synchronization
Internal
Internal External ( GL)
Resolution ( H. Cntr) 350 TV Lines
350 TV Lines
Min. Illumination
25 lux If / 1.4 Max. Gain)
25 lux If / 1.4 Max. Gain)
Vertical Enhancer
1H
2H
A B0
Yes
Yes
Microphone Jack
No
Yes
Character Generator No
Yes
Lens Mount
Camera Head Dimensions
1.5" dia. x7.7"D
1.5" die. x7.7"D
138x 195mm) ( 38 x195mm)
Weight
0.81b. 10.37 kg)
0.8 lb. ( 0.37 kg)
Price $4900.00 $ 9500.00
OPTIONS Camera Cable Tripod Adaptor
7m, 17m TA- 30, TA- 3000
17m TA-30, TA- 3000
ADAPTORS FOR SURGICAL OPERATION MICROSCOPE These adaptors are used for combining a surgical operation microscope with atelevision camera.
DK-3000
ADAPTORS USED FOR COMBINING SCOPE WITH TELEVISION CAMERA
..
Apphcable camera
Manufacture \
DK-3300/3000
For OLYMPUS
0
.
MC- Os
rli
MC - OS
Conversion adaptor
CF 301.mA ST F.Ar% WO1
General
For FUJINON
TVA- 10B
, IVA 01 02
CP 2,ST OL WO OL
For MACHIDA Others
For STORZ WOLF SHIRK°
CA- le- AO 1 10 MA1 -930. 0 ' 1
CP 302rST FLI,IWO FU FOA OB
Applicable camera
Model
Exterior
General
VC-106
ME-90I(CZ)·
6,1,,»11_6
gla
This adaptor is designed for use on CARL ZEISS surgical operation microscopes. It is provided with automatic aperture control and also the aperture can be controlled remotely. The television field is about 70%.
A DK-5050
ME-902(CZ) -
ok :
DK-3300 3000 ZEISS :: 301519
it )
This adaptor is the same as that of
the ME- 901 ( CZ) with the addition of a photography function. By simply
pressing the foot switch, it is possible to take unblurred pictures without interrupting the operation in progress, For a still camera, we recommend the separately available ( at cost) Contax 137MD. Television field is about 70%.
This adaptor is designed for use
on CARL ZEISS
surgical operation
microscopes.
It
has a television
field of approx.
80%.
· Can be used with DK 3000 series using mounting adaptor LM-B48C
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HITACHI 175 Crossways Park West
MEDICAL CAMERAS
Hitachi Denshi. Ltd.
Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 921-7200
CONNECTION WITH A
CONNECTION WITH A
DK-5050/5053 3- TUBE COLOR CAMERA
SURGICAL MICROSCOPE
BIOLOGICAL MICROSCOPE
The DK-5050/ 5053 is a 3-tube color camera with an ultra-compact size, light weight and high performance. It is composed of acamera head and camera control unit, and is ideal for combination with surgi-
cal microscopes, endoscopes, biological and metal microscopes. It has horizontal resolution of 550 TV lines ( NTSC).
When an f / 1.6 lens is used, asignal-to-noise ratio of 53 dB INTSC) can be attained minimum 16 lux ( 1.6 fc) illumination by a high-sensitivity
pick-up tube and a low- noise pre-amplifier.
The camera sensitivity can be increased to 3times or 8times; usable picture is obtained under the illumination of 16 lux ( 1.6 fc) without changing the lens. A built-in contour correction circuit ensures clear and crisp pictures.
The DK-5050/5053 is used with an optional viewfinder and a zoom lens. A compact and high-performance prism and ICs make it possible to reduce the size and weight of the camera. ABO ( Automatic Beam Optimizer) ( only DK-5050) The built-in ABO circuit ensures the dynamic range from dark portion to highlight portion. Built-in auto black and white balance controls with digital memory/ color correction Automatic light control is incorporated to activate the automatic light control device for amicroscope and the auto-focusing device of the zoom lens. An optical automatic setup unit using a microprocessor facilitates a correction of the deviation of the setting during operation. This function has never been used in cameras of this class. Video level is indicated by the level meter on the operation panel, and the video waveform is displayed on the viewfinder screen ( option). Therefore, the adjustment of illumination and lens iris is facilitated even when the ALC is not used. The color bar signal is used as acolor reference signal and facilitates the inspection of color monitor. Remote control ( only DK-5050) Though the standard distance between acamera head and a CCU is 20m, the distance can be extended up to 300m by using a remote operation unit ( option). Inter- communication between a remote operation unit and a CCU are available by headsets ( option).
STANDARD CONFIGURATIONS: DK-5050 Camera head ( 2m cable) x1, camera control unit x1, camera cable ( 18m) x 1 DK-5053 Camera head ( 2.5m cable) x 1, camera control unit x 1
ADAPTORS USED FOR COMBINING SCOPE WITH TELEVISION CAMERA
DK-5050
MEDICAL SERIES CAMERAS
ITEMS
CAMERA
3TUBE COLOR CAMERA
DK-5050
DK-5053
Pick-up Tube Output Signal
% " x3
NTSCx 2 RGB x1
x3 2/3 "
NTSC x2 RGB x1
Synchronization
Internal External ( GL)
Internal External ( GL)
Resolution ( H. Cntr)
550 TV Lines (G. Ch)
550 TV Lines (G. Ch)
Min. Illumination
16Iux(f/1.4 Max. Gain)
16 lux ( f/1.4 Max. Gain)
Vertical Enhancer
2H
1H
Microphone Jack
Yes
No
Character Generator No
No
Lens Mount
Bayonet
Bayonet
Camera Head
3"W x10.2"1-ix 7.2"L 3"W x10.2"H x7.2"L
Dimensions ( 76 x259 x183mm) (76 x259 x183mm)
Weight
2.41b. ( 1.1 kg(
2.41b. ( 1.1 kg
Camera Cable Std. 2m + 18m Max. 20m
2.5m 2.5m
Price $28,900.00
$19,900.00
OPTIONS Camera Cable Tripod Adaptor R.O.U.
R.O.U. Cable
Viewfinder
DK-5050
No
TA- 505
OP- 21A C-152CR ( 15m)
C-502CR 150m) C-103CR ( 100m)
GM- 3B
DK-5053 No TA- 505 No
No
GM- 3B
APO/cable camera Menufacture \
DK-5050/5063
Conversion adaptor
For OLYMPUS
CP 202
01
For FUJINON
General
For MACHIDA
,..
CP A 2
u
1
A
50/ XX
CP AV X
A
WA XX
Others
CP 31,/ MA
A WO
, 202
OL
0 OL
up
u
u,u
';.
i)
ADAPTORS FOR SURGICAL OPERATION MICROSCOPES These adaptors are used for combining a surgical operation microscope with atelevision camera.
Applicable came.. Model
Exterior
ME- 901 ( C2/
IMItie
OK 5050
ME- 902 / CZ)
I ·
.,---
General
This adaptor is designed for use on CARL ZEISS surgical operation microscopes It is provided with automatic
aperture control and also the aperture can be controlled rernotely. The tele vision field is about 70%
This adaptor is the same as that of the
ME- 901 ICD· with the addition of a photography function. By simply press-
ing the foot switch, it is possible to take unblurred pictures without interrupting
the operation in progress. For a still camera, we recommend the separately available ( at cost/ Corday 137MD, Television field is about 70%
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 107
HITACHI
A World Leader in Technology
401 West Artesia Blvd. Compton, CA 90220
(213) 537 -8383
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDERS/ COLOR VIDEO CAMERAS
VT-3P 3HEAD PORTABLE VCR
PORTADECK -- VT- 3A ·Compact VCR under 8 lbs · 3 Heads · Special effects · 11 mode wired remote · Power shut-off feature with compatible Hitachi video cameras · Video dubbing facility for later insertion of titles, etc. · LCD multi display, including memory rewind/stop · Large, functionally spaced LSI ( large-scale integrated circuit) logic controls · DD motors · Noise free editing · Sound on sound · 8 hour recording
· Dimensions: 10"W x 3-3/8"H x 10-3/8"D · Weight: 7.92 lbs. approx. ( including Battery Pack)
TUNER VT-TU3A ·6 program/14 day timer · Instant recording timer · Auto channel lock -- protects against accidental disruption of timer settings ·Simple 1- cable connection between tuner and video deck · Large, easily visible fluorescent time display · Cable ready - 82 channels
·Dimensions: 10"W x3-3/8"H x10-3/8"D · Weight: 7lbs. $1095.00
VT-8P SYSTEM
VT-TU8A
VT-5P 3HEAD PORTABLE VCR
PORTADECK -- VT- 5A ·Lightweight · 3heads · 8hour recording · DD motors with power shut-off feature · Noise- free editing · Sound on sound · Video dubbing facility for later insertion of titles, etc. · LCD multi- display, including memory rewind/stop · 18- function wireless remote control included · Large, functionally spaced LS) ( large scale integrated circuit) logic controls · Special effects
·Dimensions: 10"H x3-3/8"H x10-3/8"D · Weight 7.92 lbs. approx. (including optional Battery Pack)
VK-C3400
VK-C870
TUNER -- VT-TU5A ·6 Program/14 day timer · Instant recording timer · 105 channel tuner · Auto channel lock, protects against accidental disruption of timer settings · Simple 1- cable connection between tuner and video deck · Large, easily visible fluorescent time display
·Dimensions: 10"W x3-3/8"H x10-3/8"D · Weight: 7lbs. $1195.00
VT-8P 5HEAD STEREO PORTABLE VCR
PORTADECK -- VT- 8A ·Compact VTR under 8 lbs. · 5 heads stereo sound · Noise free special effects · Normal speed reverse play · Sound with sound ·Wide range of special viewing effects · Noise-free fine editing ·Date coding · LCD multi- display · " Power Shutoff" · DD motors
· Dimensions: 10"W x 3-3/8"H x 10-3/8"D · Weight 7.92 lbs. (approx.)
VK-C870 SATICON Auto Focus Color Video Camera
· High-performance 1/2" Saticon"4 pickup tube · Sharp f/1.4 motorized zoom lens ( 6x) with macro setting · Auto iris, auto white
balance adjustment · 1" electronic viewfinder reversible for left or right mounting · Unidirectional boom- type condenser microphone · 1.5x teleconversion and 0.7x wide angle conversion lenses available · Fade in/out instant review · Shoulder mount · Character generator ·VCR remote operation for sopria1 effects
· Dimensions: 7-5/8"W x 9"H x 17-7/8"D includes handgrip
·Weight: 5.7 lbs.
$1125.00
VT-TU8A TUNER/TIMER
(Customized Tuning) ·7 prog / 14 day timer · Instant recording timer · 19 mode wireless remote · " Cable Ready" 133- channel tuner · Instant Recording Timer -- activates automatic on/off recording of 30, 60, and 90 minutes; 2, 3or 4hours duration · Dimmer switch for digital timer readout · Quick, single cable connection between tuner and recorder ·Timer backup circuit
·Dimensions: 10"W x3-3/8"H x10-3/8"D · Weight 7lbs. $1295.00
VK -C1500 ONE -HAND MOS COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
· High resolution of up to 300 TV lines · Inner microphone with excellent sensitivity · Instant review of just- shot scenes through the viewfinder in use with selected Hitachi video tape recorders · 2/3" MOS image sensor · f / 1.2, 6x zoom lens with macro function and fixed mount · Horizontal grip · Automatic white balance control
·Dimensions: 4-7/8"W x5-1/4"H x7-11/16"D · Weight: ( without
cable) approx., 2.16 lbs.
$1225.00
VK-C840 SATICON Auto Focus Color Video Camera
The VK-C840 eliminates problems through anew type of CCD ( charge
coupled device) sensor which employs photoelectric signals relayed to aservo circuit employing a high- accuracy analog/digital converter. This then instructs abuilt-in DC drive system to focus precisely on the subject. The auto focus operates in arange of 1meter to infinity, and under virtually any natural or artificial lighting conditions between 10 to 100,000 lux. Manual override can also be used to defeat auto focus operation when desired.
· 1/2" Saticon Ty including striped filter · NTSC 525 lines, 2:1 inter-
lace · Nondirectional microphone · Electronic viewfinder ( 1" b/w
CRT) · Better than 270 TV lines · f / 1.2 special mount, 6x zoom,
macro function, auto- iris lens · Instant review · Power consumption:
4.0W · Dimensions: 4-5/8"W x 5-1/2"H x 10-1/2"D · Weight:
3.08 lbs.
$995.00
VK -C3400 MOS W/COMPUTERIZED AUTO FOCUS
·2/3" MOS image sensor · Full feature special effects · Color viewfinder · Computerized auto focus · Fade in/out, focus in/out functions · Nega-Posi reversal function · Detachable unidirectional gun-type condenser microphone · Time lapse function ( 3seconds to maximum 999 seconds) · Titler provides insertion of title characters (max. 60 letters) at beginning of already recorded scene · Check button confirms operation modes in viewfinder · Warning display informs low battery and underexposure information · Timer readout
start/stop inserts digital time display in 1/10 second increments · " Scene timer", digital time readout in viewfinder informs cameraman of exact length of scene being filmed · Instant review facility ·f / 1.2, 6x, 10.5 to 62mm Zoom, Auto Iris, macro focusing lens
·Dimensions: 7-7/8"W x8"H x 13-1/2"D · Weight: 5.5 lbs. $2095.130
VC- 108
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
1.5 inch Viewfinder
COLOR CAMERA
VTR Adaptor VTR
Shoulder pad
Battery
IKEGAMI HL-95 UNICAM®
If you're confused by the many tape formats and conflicting manufacturers claims, relax. lkegami's new HL -95 Unicam'. is the only universal camera system that accepts all professional on- board VCR formats, 1/4- inch and 1/2- inch, and solves your buying puzzle by putting the picture you want into place.
Engineered to offer performance beyond the most rigid expectations, the HL -95 utilizes new 2/3- inch SM diode gun Plumbicons'. , resulting in acamera with higher sensitivity and S/N ratio, greater resolution, lower operating power requirements and less registration error than previously possible in acamera of its size and weight.
The HL-95 is also available as a stand-alone ENG camera, and in systems configurations using Triax or multi- core cable base stations, or with the ML- 95 ENG Microwave Link. Once you examine the HL-95 Unicam , you'll agree that the system flexibility and picture quality puts it in aclass all by itself. The standard of excellence continues at lkegami.
FEATURES · High sensitivity: Max. 24dB ·Small size: 1650 x95W x250H mm ·Weight: 3.0kg ( Camera + 1.5" VF) · Full shading correction: Black and white · Dynamic focus correction · Flare correction ·Geometry correction ·Color matrix · Knee aperture correction · Viewfinder:
White balance indication Battery warning indication Tally ( REC) indication Gain up indication Stand-by indication Lens extender indication Audio level indication ( CH1, CH2) Tape remaining time indication Filter position indication ·Color bars: Split field, in accordance with RS- 189 ·Sync generator: RS- 170A, adjustable H. V Blanking
· Automatics:
Auto iris
Auto iris close
Auto white balance
Auto beam control
Auto highlight comp ression
SPECIFICATIONS
(RATING)
Input Signal
Return signal: External sync ( GIL):
VBS / VS 1.0V p- p75 ohms Option VBS/BBS 1.0V p-p/0.45V p- p
Power: Output Signal
(using the optional adaptor) DC 12V
Composite signal: Monitor signal: Pick-up tubes: Filter:
Lens mount:
VBS 1.0V p- p75 ohms RGB, R- G, B- G, ENC 2/3" SM Diode Gun Plumbicon
3000°K, 5600°K, 5600°K + 25% ND, CAP Bayonet, interchangeable with HL-79
(PERFORMANCE)
Sensitivity: S/N ratio: Resolution: Registration:
(Deviations of R,B with respect to GI
2000 lux F4.5 60dB More than 650 TVL
Zone 1 > 0.05% of picture height Zone 2 > 0.1% of picture height Zone 3 > 0.2% of picture height
Geometric distortion: Power consumption:
Less than 1.5% 17W
SYSTEM (WEIGHT)
Camera ( includes VF and Shoulder Pad) VTR Adaptor Lens
VTR ( BOSCH 1/4") Battery
Total
3 Okg 0 6kg 15kg 2 9kg
1Okg 9 Okg
Plumbicon : Registered Trademark of N.V. Philips.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 109
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Ave. Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
1/2" M- FORMAT PORTABLE VCR FOR THE HL-95
IKEGAMI HM -100
1/2" Portable VCR for HL-95 ENG Camera
lkegami has succeeded in combining the HL -95 compact ENG camera and anewly developed 1/2" video cassette recorder. The HL-95 with 1/2" VCR is our answer for demanding ENG applications. It incorporates acreative new recording process which may record up to 20 minutes of broadcast quality signal on one NV-Ti20HG VHS tape. This camera system will afford acamera person greater maneuverability in material gathering activities such as news reporting and documentary and sports reporting.
New 1/2 inch Format Features
The HL -95 with 1/2 inch VCR's professional quality results are made partly possible by a special recording process which records Y and 1/0 information on separate video tracks. This means that Yand VC signals are delivered directly from the camera to the recorder. In addition, the I/O signals are multiplexed for even greater freedom from intermodulation.
Also contributing to the outstanding picture quality are the 4 video recording heads and the high tape speed of about 8ips with arecording wavelength of 27,000 cycles per second. Although compact VHS tape is only 1,,2" wide, the M- format recording system delivers broadcast quality video, 2high quality audio tracks, acontrol track, and atime code track all on this space saving, easily available tape.
And the new 1/2 inch VCR gives you afull 20 minutes of recording on one NV-Ti20HG VHS cassette.
HM- 100
Specifications for 1/2" Portable VCR
General
· Power: DC + 12V · Power consumption: 12W ( nominal DC +12V) · Video recording system: 4rotary heads, 2-track helical scanning system · Tape speed: 8inch/sec. ( 204.5mm/sec.) · Recording time: 20 min. ( NV-T120HG VHS cassette) · FF/REW time: less than 5 min. · Tape: NV-Ti20HG VHS cassette · Dimensions (WxHxD): 120mm x237mm x240mm · Weight: 9.0 lbs. (4.1 kg)
Video · Television system: NTSC system, 525 lines, 60 fields · Modulation system: 2 channel Y/1/03 frequency modulation, I/O
frequency multiplexing · Bandwidth: Luminance: 3.0 MHz, - 1dB, Chrominance: 1.0 MHz, - 1dB · Signal-to- Noise ratio: Luminance: better than 47dB. Chrominance:
better than 48dB · Differential gain: less than 5% · Differential phase: less than 5° · Kfactor ( 2T pulse): less than 2% · Chrominance: Luminance delay: 90 nsec. · Inputs: Y/1/0 from camera · Outputs: composite video: 1.0Vp-p, 7511
Audio · Frequency response: 50 -- 15,000 Hz ± 3dB · Signal-to-noise ratio: better than 50dB · Crosstalk: better than -40dB · Inputs: Mic 1 (XLR): -60dBm, 60011, Mic 2 (XLR): -60dBm, 60011 · Output: Headphone: -20 to - 32dB, 812
Environmental · Ambient temperature: 32° -- 104°F (0° -- 40°C) · Relative humidity: 20 -- 85% ( noncondensing) · Operating altitude: 0 -- 10,000 ft. (3,040m) unpressurized
HM 300
IKEGAMI HM -300 Playback and Editing Equipment
Features · M- Format recording can produce broadcast quality results · Yand I/O or NTSC video input and output · Advanced microprocessor control for smooth tape transport and direct
mode operation · Insert or assembly editing · Audio limiter built-in · Yand I/Odirect dubbing input and output connectors for minimal loss of
signal quality · 4servo controlled direct-drive motors · 2audio tracks plus atime code track · Dial search control with jogging capability
VC- 110
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS,
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
INC.
COLOR CAMERA
SC-500 STUDIO CAMERA A new economical professional studio color- TV.
The new viewfinder camera, employs three 2/3" pickup tubes and a prism- optics system to produce pictures of superb clarity and color fidelity. The sturdily built, easy- toservice camera can be relied on to keep performing under the most demanding studio conditions.
Features
· Dynamic focus to ensure superior corner resolution · Deflection distortion corrector for extremely low registra-
tion error · Detail corrector for crisp, sharp images · Black and white full shading correction ·Video matrix to provide accurate color matching between
cameras ·Servo- controlled filter disc · + 6/ + 12dB video gain switch · Dynamic beam stretch · Return video
· Level suppression to accommodate high- contrast scenes · Horizontal resolution ( at G channel) -- 700TVL at center,
600TVL at corners
·S/N ratio -- 57dB/NTSC, with Gamma, DTL off
Automatic Features ·Automatic centering control ·Automatic iris with weighting system ·Auto cap for tube protection ·Auto white and black balance ·Auto black level
·A newly developed non-volatile memory retains all the automatic correction data for several years, even when power is removed.
A zebra- pattern video signal indicator in the 7" viewfinder ensures optimum matching of video signals, and a built-in split- field color- bar generator is provided. A character display in the viewfinder permits easy monitoring of camera status while the camera is being used.
Fully modular construction is employed to simplify service and maintenance. Plug-in printed- circuit boards, divided according to circuit function, are utilized. All major controls are located in front of each unit to facilitate adjustments.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
IKEGAm i
400
ENG/EFP COLOR CAMERA
ITC- 730A
IKEGAMI ITC- 730A
Ikegami introduces the ITC- 730A, acompact, professional, and economical camera capable of consistently producing quality pictures of fast- breaking events. The ITC- 730A is the perfect answer for the costconscious TV station or cable operation that wants a multi- purpose, high- quality ENG/EFP camera that's easy to maintain.
PERFORMANCE FEATURES · Saticon II pick-up tubes ·A built-in high-speed ( f/1.4) prism beamsplitter produces pictures
with excellent sensitivity, resolution, colorimetry, and high sensitivity ( f / 4.0 at 2000 lux) ·A high-performance FET is built into the coil assembly to offer pictures with an excellent signal-to-noise ratio of - 57dB ·A bias light is incorporated to reduce lag, designed especially for critical low- light scenes ·A 2H detail corrector assures an excellent, crisp, sharp image ·The camera employs a deflection distortion corrector to make images with extremely low registration error ·To ensure superior corner resolution, adynamic focus is employed
OPERATIONAL FEATURES ·The lightweight camera head is well balanced on the shoulder, so
there is no feeling of fatigue during extended operation · Rugged camera head: The camera head is made from a tough,
magnesium diecast alloy ·The lens mount is the same size as that on the ITC- 350, ITC- 730
and HL-79D/E cameras. Perfect interchange among lenses is possible-- meaning you can use a wide variety of ENG-type high magnification lenses with any of these cameras ·A servo type auto iris control system is used to enable iris control from peak to average levels, or variable combination of peak and APL ·The auto iris closes automatically to protect the camera pickup tubes from damage whenever the power is cut off ·To maintain optimum video quality under all indoor and outdoor conditions, the ITC- 730A incorporates a color temperature filter wheel. Indoors: 3200°K, Outdoors ( cloudy weather): 5600"K, Outdoors ( sunny weather): 5600°K + 25% ND, CAP: Blind
SYSTEM CONNECTION FEATURES ·A buih-in genlock feature ( standard) makes external sync
(VBS/BBS signals) operation possible by acoaxial cable ·When the supply of genlock signals stop, the camera is automati-
cally switched over to the internal sync operation ·There is easy control of subcarrier phase and horizontal sync phase
at the camera head ·Horizontal and vertical blanking widths can be controlled separately
·SC- H phase relationship meets EIA RS- 170A ·Gamma correction is continuously adjustable in each video channel
to permit easy matching to other cameras ·By connecting the CCU- 730A, a variety of remote control opera-
tions, such as those shown below, are possible
1) Iris 2) Manual/Auto switch-
over of iris 3) Master pedestal 4) R/B pecigstal 5) Painting with R or B- knob 6) Painting with RIB- knob
7) Auto white setting
8) Color bar switching phase 9) Subcarrier phase control 10) Horizontal sync phase control 11) Nor/Mid/High ( 0/ + 9/
+ 18d B) Gain switchover
12) Camera call 13) R / BH- centering 14) RIB V- centering
·The 5-inch viewfinder is equipped with atilting mechanism mount for studio use. ( A 1.5- inch viewfinder for portable use is also
available.)
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT ·The ITC- 730A CCU mounts into a 19" rack, height is 3.5" ·The CCU-730A compensates for cable lengths up to 300 meters.
Cable diameter is 13mm. Cable compensation positions are
15/ 100/200/ 300 meters ·The standard unit can be operated from Camera Head power, a
battery, or other DC power source ·Horizontal phase is automatically controlled by APC ( Auto Phase
Control) system regardless of cable length ·Utilizes apower source with aremote sensing function which auto-
matically supplies afixed voltage to camera head, regardless of
cable length ·RGB signals ( with one channel provided for each), simultaneously
fed out from the CCU, may be utilized for chroma key signals
ITC-730AP Plumbicon(;T. ENG/EFP Color Camera Plumbicons are utilized for better highlight handling characteristics and lowest image lag.
VC- 112
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
COLOR CAMERA
HL- 79E
IKEGAMI HL-79E ENG/EFP Color Television Cameras
The lkegami HL -79E establishes a new standard of comparison for high quality EN G / EFP color television cameras. Although it is smaller and lighter than its HL-79 series predecessors, it uses the same proven and available 2/3- inch pick-up tubes while achieving important performance improvements in the areas of sensitivity, signal-to-noise ratio, registration accuracy, resolution and R.F.I. immunity. Picture quality is further enhanced by new circuit features such as chroma aperture correction, dynamic detail correction, automatic highlight compression and knee aperture correction. The improved performance and picture quality enhancement result in acamera with overall performance rivaling that of the competitor's studio cameras; hand-held or tripod supported versions are available.
The HL-79E is designed for ease of maintenance with a micro computer to carry out self diagnostic functions. The micro computer assesses the camera's operating condition and makes any necessary corrections in ashort time.
The ADC- 79E incorporated in the system prints out a statement of the camera's condition via an RS232C port, thus control of the camera can easily be made for the long term.
FEATURES RFI Immunity Up to 10 volts per meter ( 140dB) from 100kHz to 600MHz for the entire camera surface ( not including lens port).
Chroma Aperture Correction Generates aperture correction signal when Green information is absent from the signal, results in improved sharpness of picture in Red and Blue content areas.
Dynamic Focus Parabolic modulation of electrostatic focus voltage improves corner resolution.
Dynamic Detail Correction Parabolic modulation of detail correction signal improves corner picture sharpness.
Knee Aperture Correction Expands horizontal video frequency response in highlight areas of picture to compensate for aperture correction fall-off due to gamma compression of correction signal.
Performance Parameters Various fundamental performance parameters have been emphasized to achieve the superior performance desired by today's program originators.
Sensitivity Standard sensitivity is 2000 lux at f / 5.0 Maximum sensitivity at + 18d B video gain is 20 lux at f/1.4 ( using 89.9% reflectance chart). Signal-to- Noise Ratio -59dB is achieved with low input capacitance tubes using conventional measuring techniques ( OdB video gain).
Registration Deviation of Red and Blue with respect to Green is within 0.05% in Zone 1, 0.1% in Zone 2, and 0.3% outside of Zone 2as aresult of the Quadrant Geometry Correction Circuit used.
Resolution By operating the pick-up tube in a high voltage mode, center resolution of 650TVL limiting and corner resolution of 500TVL limiting is achieved ( using Diode Gun pick-up tubes, measured at 2000 lux illumination on a standard RETMA resolution chart ). Viewfinder Resolution Crisp, high contrast pictures are assured by the use of an improved cathode-ray tube.
Output Signal Characteristics In accordance with EIA Standard RS- 170A, blanking pulse widths and SC- H phase relationship adjustable.
HL-79ES1 Saticon 3tube, low capacitance HL-79EAL X03427 Tubes HL-79EA X02427 Tubes HL -79E X01427 Tubes
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 113
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Ave. Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
AUTOMATIC FEATURES
The HL-79E is afully automatic camera configured to permit the camera operator to concentrate on artistic aspects with minimum attention required by the camera operators. The automatic features provided are: ·Auto Iris Control ·Auto White Balance ( 2Modes) ·Auto Black Balance ·Auto Iris Closure ·Auto Iris Waiting ·Auto Highlight Compression ·Auto Beam Control
MAINTENANCE CONSIDERATIONS
To simplify maintenance of the HL- 79E, numerous features have been incorporated in the design: ·Electromagnetic Beam Alignment Controls ·Synchronized Focus Wobble Circuitry for Precision Tube Align-
ment ·Deflection Overscan Facility for Accurate Raster Positioning ·Calibrated Video Test Sawtooth Voltages for Video Amplifier
Adjustment ·Sealed and Dust Free Color Splitting Optics ·Monitor Video Output Separate from Line Video Output ·Monitor Video Output with Negative Green Facility for Precision
Registration ·Externally Accessible Monitoring Controls
ACCESSORIES
ADC-79E AUTO SETUP DIGITAL CONTROL
Following functions may be controlled from the ADC-79E Auto Setup Digital Control. 1. Just pushing abutton automatically diagnoses and sets up the
camera simultaneously. This function is useful to check if the camera is ready or not.
a. Registration R/BH cent, R/BV cent, R/B rotation, R/B skew, R/BH lin, R/BV lin, R/B width, R/B Height
b. Level R/G/B gamma, R/G/B flare, Master ped, R/8 ped, R/B gain.
2. Other controls ( manual) Total knee, Total slope, DTL cont, Iris, CAL on, Bar on, Auto iris off, Auto black off, Auto knee off, White clip off, DTL off, Gamma off, Knee off, Tally, Mon sel ( R, G, B, R- G, B- G, R + G + B, ENC), WFM sel ( R, G, B, RG, BG, super, seq, ENC), Chroma aperture off, Auto white cont, Auto white sel, Auto black cont, Diascope on. Iris close, Extender ans.
RDC -79E REMOTE DIGITAL CONTROL
The various functions may be digitally controlled from the ROC-79E Remote Digital Control to match the users' preferences.
Detail cont, Iris, M. ped, R/B paint, R/B ped, R/BH cent, R/BV cent, BAR on, Auto iris on, Auto white cont, Mon sel (R, G, B, R- G, B- G, R + G + B, ENC), Call.
R/G/B flare, Auto knee on/off, Knee cont, DTL off, Chroma aperture on/off. Cable length: up to 100m
LENSES
Canon Canon Canon Canon
Fujinon Fujinon Fujinon Fujinon
J13x9BIRS-II J20x8.5BISS J25x11.5BISS J13x9BIRS-IIW/PP
Al2x9ERM A14x9ERM A17x9ERM A14x9ERM-1P
f/1.6 f/1.6 f/1.6 f / 1.6 with Diascope
f/1.7 f/1.7 f/1.7 f / 1.7 with Diascope
·MA- 79 Multicore remote control system
·TA-79E Triax remote control system ·HL-790A Studio camera system w/6" VF ·VF45-3 4-1/2" Studio viewfinder
·Remote Paint box ( only for HL-79E) ·ML-83/79 portable Micro- Link system
VC- 114
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
BROADCAST COLOR CAMERA
lkegami HK- 302
The Ikegami HK- 302 is the workhorse camera for studios that want network- grade color at an affordable price. With the HK-302, you'll be getting astandard, rugged, reliable studio camera. You'll find the HK- 302 easy to use because it's compact and light in comparison with other studio cameras. Yet, just the right amount of automatic controls have been left to make superb color with aminimum attention from avideo operator.
Performance PICK-UP TUBES The HK-302 uses three 2/3" Low- capacitance Diode- Gun Plumbicons® ( X0-3427).
OPTICAL SYSTEM The color- separation prism is tops in efficiency and performance. We've mounted the yoke assemblies directly on the optical block to prevent any mechanical registration errors. Bias light is introduced through the prism. An IR filter assures correct colorimetry with extended red PbO's. QUALITY COLOR The HK- 302 has an adjustable matrix to improve overall colorimetry of the pick-up tubes and prism, and to provide high fidelity chromatic performance. Both black shading and amplitude modulated shading circuits are employed to produce auniform field.
DETAIL CORRECTOR A 2H- delay detail corrector enhances the picture vertically and horizontally. Noise suppressor and threshold circuits maintain ahigh S/N ratio of 57 dB. DYNAMIC BEAM STRETCH lkegami's DBS ( Dynamic Beam Stretch) circuit minimizes comettailing. SYNC SYSTEM The HK-302 satisfies EIA RS- 170A standards which prescribe relationships for horizontal and subcarrier phases for correct color framing. Horizontal blanking width and vertical blanking width can be adjusted over a wide range. The HK-302 has an internal sync generator. Genlock is possible using VBS or BBS as an external sync signal, or from sync and subcarrier input signals.
Price Upon Request
CONTRAST EXPANSION CIRCUIT Produces a sharper image in fog or haze- 400 TV lines, 50% performance response.
Improves pick-up tube beam landing errors, resulting in excellent corner focus.
VIEWFINDER A tiltable, high resolution 6" viewfinder is standard. A highbrightness, 7" viewfinder is optional.
Easy operations
SET-UP To simplify camera setup, there are four types of test pulses: preamp set, gain set, gamma set, and reference pulse. Speedy and exact setup is possible. The video circuits can be checked with the pick-up tubes turned off or removed. COLOR BAR GENERATOR A split- field color bar generator facilitates simplified encoder adjustments. AUTO IRIS To assist the video operator in fast changing scenes, auto iris circuitry may be activated by aswitch on the control panel. FILTERS Two independent filter wheels contain five sets each of ND filters and color temperature conversion filters. The filters can be selected either manually at the camera head or controlled electrically from the CCU.
CABLE COMPENSATION Video frequency equalization is adjustable in 50 meter steps. Timing is automatically corrected. CCU MULTIPLEXER Digital multiplexing of camera cont.:ol signals vastly reduces the amount of conductors used in acamera cable, thus reducing its size requirement.
LENSES Normally, the HK-302 uses a2/3" studio zoom lens; it can, however, take a1" studio, 2/3" EFP or 2/3" ENG zoom lens. Lenses are easy to mount on the HK- 302's quick disconnect wedge mount.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 115
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
107
BROADCAST COLOR CAMERA
lkegami HK- 322 The fully automatic television camera. IKEGAMI introduces its newest and most advanced studio color camera: The IKEGAMI HK- 322, afully automatic television camera system. The HK- 322's Master Control Panel contains a computer to perform all of the setup functions automatically. Several other TV cameras have computerized automatic setup controls-- but it takes alot more than just acomputer to produce top quality color.
lkegami has that extra something: color technology. So, when you get an HK-322, you're not just getting afully automatic camera -- you're getting excellent picture quality, superior craftsmanship, and many non- computerized, automatic correction functions.
Television cameras aren't just a sideline at Ikegami -- they're the mainstay of our business. And when it comes time to choose the camera that's going to show off your productions best, remember IKEGAMI: the TV- Camera Specialists.
Camera head Camera setup functions performed by the digital control system contained within the MCP. This information is stored in a camera memory system. The camera becomes a " black box", requiring essentially no internal adjustments.
Among the design highlights included are: · Precise geometry of less than 0.1% distortion · Superior registration accomplished digitally resulting in minimal
errors, maintained with 0.05% throughout the entire picture area · Independently adjustable bias lights for R, G and B channels · 8 pre- programmable zoom lens and diascope error correction
modes · ND and Color Correction filter wheels quickly removable
"CASSETTE fashion" for easy maintenance or special effects filter insertion · Zoom lens heater power is available when the head power is turned off · Video and power is provided for avideo prompter system · Dual tally system · Two channel return video · Dual Mic amplifiers ·S/N ratio of 56dB · Horizontal resolution -- 60% performance response at 400 TV lines, center
Camera Control Unit Similarly to the camera head, the CCU's memory system retains the setup control data from the MCP. The " black box" concept permits the mounting of the CCUs out of the control area. Several features are to be noted: · Totally automatic cable compensation for up to 600m of small
diameter multicore cable · Plug in FM Triax system with an operational range of 1500m · Digitally controlled automatic shading correction · R/G/B Detail corrector employs anovel design. Picture detail is no
longer lost in red or blue picture content as is common with the "contour out of green" principle · Chromakey ( option) · Negative video ( option) · Color Corrector ( option)
Automatics Basic automatics, other than CPU setup, include: ·Auto White Balance/Black Balance ·Auto Iris Control ·Auto Cable Compensation ·Auto Pedestal Control ·Auto Detail Level Control/Selection Control ·Auto Optical Cap ·Auto Highlight Compression
Special Effects · H and V deflection reversal, with stored linearity correction · Negative video permits RGB video polarity reversal ·Horizontal deflection modulation for " dream scenes " ·Scene compression and expansion for improving high contrast
and/or hazy scenes ·Various effects may be stored in adata file. Up to 8presets may be
retrieved on command
The Operation Control Panel controls the camera during normal " on air" operation
After initial setup, each camera may be operated by its individual OCP, independently of the MCP.
One Master Control Panel can control up to 24 cameras directly by using aCamera Switching Unit ( CSU). By the addition of a Studio Selector Unit and other CSUs, up to 10 camera groups or atotal of 100 cameras may be controlled by a single MCP. For backup purposes, asecond MCP may be connected in parallel.
In addition, to provide up to 10 studio parallel Automatic Setup capability, additional CPUs may be added for each of the studios.
VC- 116
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
PORTABLE MICRO- LINK SYSTEM
2GHz ( Video, Mic audio, Intercom) ---
IKEGAMI ML 83/79
Portable Micro- Link System for HL-83, HL-79A/D Series and HL-79E Color TV Camera
The Ikegami ML-83/79 Micro- Link System is acomplete high quality wireless television program origination and reception system. At the Camera Station, program audio captured by a microphone, scene video picked- up by an HL-83, HL-79A/D Series or HL-79E television camera, and audio intercom are modulated onto a2GHz band carrier for R.F. transmission up to 1,500 meters to a companion Base Station. The transmitted aural/video signal is received at the Base Station, and de- modulated to base- band frequencies. Command signals and intercom audio are sent to the Camera Station from the Base Station on a 950MHz band carrier. Seven ( 7) channels are available in the 2GHz band and 950MHz band to accommodate multi- camera systems.
Command signals transmitted over the 950MHz wireless link from Base Station to Camera Station include Genlock; horizontal delay and S.C. phase controls are available at the Base Station to correctly time each individual camera's output signal to the video system.
The system permits two- man operation as well as one-man operation at the camera station using a directional electromagnetic horn antenna. In two- man operation, the 2GHz transmitter and 950MHz receiver are removed from the camera's microwave camera adaptor and are attached to aHip Pack that is carried by afollower. The cable between camera and Hip Pack is extendable up to 30m. Thus, the camera operator is permitted to concentrate on the scene, the follower is responsible for the transmission.
Microwave Camera Adaptor ( MCA)
·Easily attaches directly to Ikegami HL -83 system adaptor, HL -79 interface, or HL-79E interface.
·The MCA is compact, lightweight, easy to carry, and supports both transmission and reception of signals to the base station.
·The video operator at the base station has remote control over camera functions and can correct for scene changes.
· System permits use of a program audio microphone. The audio
signal is multiplexed with the video signal and transmitted to the base station.
·The MCA has an intercom circuit permitting direct communication between the camera operator and the base station.
·The 2GHz transmitter and the 950MHz receiver on the MCA both have 7 selectable channels.
·The 2GHz antenna used on the camera has an automatic steering mechanism that can turn throughout afull 360°. Once the direction to the base station's antenna has been established, the antenna will continue to transmit to that point regardless of where the camera operator points the camera. This reduces the effect of multipath. The 2GHz transmitter and 950MHz receiver may be separated from the microwave camera adaptor and attached to the Hip Pack for two- man operation.
950MHz (Command, Intercom)
Triax cable 400m
Video
Audio
CAMERA STATION
-- BASE STATION RX Control Unit
BASE STATION
Base Station
·The base station can be separated from its receiving antenna by up to 400 meters of triax cable ( Belden 9232).
·The video operator at the base station can control the camera function genlock via the camera's wireless microwave link.
·Control over the following camera functions is possible. Analog: Iris, M-ped, R / 6 gain, R/B H cent, R/B V cent, R / 6 ped Digital: Bar on/off, Iris manual on/off, White Bal on/off, Call, Tally
Effective Transmission Area
Once the direction of the automatic steering antenna to the base station's antenna has been established, the camera is movable within the area between points B and C as long as the base station antenna is directed to the camera.
Horizontal beam width of auto- steering antenna: ± 60° Horizontal beam width of parabolic antenna: ± 11°
A
, ,, .. ,"b ,,,0q°6, \-'0 °. '' Í. r. f\--Autoa-nsttenenearing
, , , , 1,, 2 ,' 0' ,, °,
," . '''.---->"-
.
.. ..
RECEIVING PARABOLIC ANTENNA
System Et Components
Camera Station
1. Microwave Camera Adaptor ( MCA) · Head command unit ·WL201T 2GHz transmitter ·WL901R 950MHz receiver ·2GHz auto- steering antenna ·950MHz whip antenna
2. Components for Two- man Operation · Multi adaptor · Hip Pack · Hip Pack pedestal · Hip Pack belt
·2GHz directional electromagnetic horn antenna · Pole antenna
Base Station ·2GHz parabolic antenna ·950MHz 3- element antenna ·WL201R 2GHz receiver ·WL901T 950MHz transmitter ·Camera control unit · Receiver control unit · 19" rack mount
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 117
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Ave. Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
ELECTRONIC CINEMATOGRAPHY CAMERA
EC- 35 The World's First Electronic Cinematography Camera
Performance The EC-35 uses 2/3" Low- capacity diode- gun Plumbicon® pickup tubes.
The EC-35 has a complete micro- processor that will automatically perform all of the set-up functions for you. All you do is aim the camera at the test chart, push Auto Set, and wait for the Set Up light to go off.
The EC-35 has an unusually wide dynamic range that makes the picture look like it was taken with a35mm film camera:
·The camera uses special technology to produce gamma curves that match that of film
·The Knee compression circuit compresses signals from 600% of the rated signal level down to 100%
·A dynamic beam stretch circuit ( DBS) stabilizes highlight signals as much as four stops in excess of normal peak video level
·The EC-35 has extremely high resolution and low noise IS / N over 57 dB rms).
·A dynamic beam focus circuit improves corner focus resulting in sharper pictures from corner to corner
· Image enhancement and out of band aperture correction signals are proportionately mixed, producing exceptionally pleasing picture detail
Lenses
Ordinary video lenses weren't good enough for the EC- 35. A whole new set of lenses have been designed and even calibrated in T- stops -- so that you would feel at home with this camera. The EC-35 has its own set of five, fixed, focal- length lenses interchangeable without effecting registration or color balance. You can also use the special effects filters you already have for your film camera.
Using these superior quality lenses you'll be able to do something you could never do with ordinary video lenses: Use depth of focus to create scenes as afilm camera does. You'll also be able to regulate the light source to create lighting effects that you'd normally use for a film camera.
Convenience
The EC-35, like a35mm camera, is normally used with atripod -- but it can be hand held. It weighs in at about 9.9 kg ( under 22 lbs, with 1.5" VF). It has afocus knob, like that of a35mm camera, which you can use for the " follow focus" method of filming.
Off the tripod, you'll like its balanced feel in your hands. You'll find VTR Start and Return Video controls on the pistol- grip for handy use. You can use the EC- 35 with any production VTR.
The viewfinder is rotatable, positionable in the front or rear of the camera. You have arange of viewfinders to choose from: 1.5", or 6". You can even attach asecond viewfinder for the assistant cameraman.
A new type of geometry corrector, based on quadrant control, makes it easier to set up the registration with exceptional accuracy.
And the EC-35 comes with an arms- length of typical lkegami hightech features: Auto black/white balance will reset color balance for you in response to changes in color temperature. A video level (zebra), shows you 100% white or 70% flesh tone level. A level meter will help you in selecting an ND filter and in deciding the right amount of light, and it comes with ahandy dotline indicator. On the upper portion of the viewfinder is atimer that shows you the remaining VTR tape time.
Lens
Zoom Lens
Fixed Focal Length Lens
EC Camera Lens
35mm Cine Lens Equivalent
Focal Length
T No.
Horizontal ' Angle
Focal Length
T No.
Honi zontal Angle
10.5-- 50mm, T1.6
45.5°-- 25--
T2.8
10.1 °
120mm,
10.1 °
6mm, lOmm, 15mm, 24mm, 35mm,
T1.5 T1.5 T1.5 T1.5 T1.5
72.5 ° 47.5° 32.7 ° 20.8 ° 14.3°.
15mm, 24mm, 38mm, 55mm, 85mm,
T28 T1.6 T1.4 T1.4 T1.4
72.5 ° 47.5° 32.7 °
20.8 ° 14.3°
CANON EJ6
CANON EJ10 CANON EJ 15
CANON EJ24 CANON EJ35 CANON J5x10.5B
FUJINON AF14 FUJINON AF40
6mm Fixed Focus Lens 10mm Fixed Focus Lens 15mm Fixed Focus Lens 24mm Fixed Focus Lens
35mm Fixed Focus Lens
Zoom Lens 14mm Fixed Focus Lens 40mm Fixed Focus Lens
VC- 118
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
TTC -150 System
High grade 3- tube prismatic color camera The ITC- 240 high performance color camera forms the central part of this unique system. Colorimetry, picture resolution and shading are uniformly excellent. A highly compact prism optical multiplexer and automatic light control unit is utilized on a rigid rack frame. Superior quality images are obtained from the slide projector, super/ single 8mm film projector and 16 mm film projector. An opaque card projector can be optionally employed. Field lens system construction makes possible easy, cost saving -camera assimilation in existing systems. Moreover, adjustment is simpler than most competitive systems. S/N ratio better than 47dB, horizontal resolution of 550 lines or better at center.
Pedestal construction on rigid channel base Individual pedestals are provided for each main component. Mechanical vibration originating in one pedestal cannot spread to other units of the island. A standard 19- inch rack is employed for the camera pedestal, the lower half of which is available for accommodating other equipment.
Standard axis height
A standard optical axis height of 1220mm facilitates interchangeable use with broadcast- quality projectors.
SPECIFICATIONS Overall Construction
Floor stand type on channel base with standard 1220mm optical axis height Camera Rack Standard 19" width rack type Optical Multiplexer Fixed half- mirror prism type Auto Light Controller ALC-710 Variable density ND ALC ND Filter Transmissivity 0.92 to 92% Telecine Control (1) Remote/local control selection Panel Function (2) Slide projector lamp on/off; 13) Slide change normal/reverse selection; 14) Slide change; 15) 16mm film projector start/stop 16) 16mm film projector lamp on/off; 17) 8mm film projector start/ stop; 18) 8mm film projector lamp on/off Power Supply Unit 11 IControl relay system; ( 21 24 VDC power supply; ( 3) 2channels Audio input; ( 4) 2channels Audio output; ( 5) Color corrector by RGB Overall Dimension 1512 x 1875 x 1636mm Overall Weight 160 kg approx. Power Requirement 120 VAC, 60 Hz
OPTIONAL AUDIO AND VIDEO MONITOR PANEL Audio Inputs
2 channels, 600 ohms 0 dB unbalanced Audio Outputs
2 channels, 600 ohms 0 dB balanced Audio Monitor
Monitor speaker built-in VU meter built-in
COLOR TELECINE CAMERAS
TTC-150
Video Inputs
G, B, R, ENC, Aux. Erd EXT. G Video Monitor Select
G, B, R, - G, Enc., Aux. Waveform Monitor Mode
G/B, G/R, B/R, Enc., Aux., Ext. G, Super Seq. Video Outputs
(1) Picture monitor output; ( 2) Waveform monitor output
COLOR CAMERA SECTION
TCS-15/24
ITC- 240S TPU-15 TCR-15/24
TCB-15/3 TCP-15/8 TCP-15/16 TMU-15 TRC-15 TRC-1515 TRC-1530 TRC-1540 TRC-1550
Telecine Camera Chassis Consists of: Camera Head Mount Assembly, TMP-15
Prism Multiplexer Jnit, ALC-710 Auto Light Controller, Local Control Panel with
cable, Camera Taking Lens 1F:4.5, 90mm ),
CCU Rack Mountirg Chassis for Head Color Camera System
Power Supoly Unit w/ Color Corrector Telecine Camera Pack Consisting of Rack with Ventilat on Fan, Tally Lamp, Monitor Raining Mount and Blank Panels Telecine Channel Base
Telecine Pedestal for 8mm Film Projector Telecine Pedestal for 16mm Film Projector
Audio and Video Monitoring Panel Telecine Remote Control Unit 15m Remote Control Cable w/ Conn. 30m Remote Control Cable w/Conn. 40m Remote Control Cable w/ Conn
50m Remote Control Cable w/Conn.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 119
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
TKC-990 The High- Performance Telecine Camera With Computer Control
The lkegami TKC-990 is a new multipurpose broadcast telecine camera suitable for " on-line" applications, such as local viewing or direct on- air broadcast and " off-line" applications, such as tele -production and video tape recording. For on-line applications, film characteristics can be uncorrected, manually corrected or automatically corrected. For off-line applications, detailed operator scene- by- scene corrections can be established and stored for retrieval during subsequent playback of the film and transfer to video tape. Outstanding performance and stability characteristics have been incorporated into the TKC-990. Setup, operation and maintenance controls for the camera, as well as color corrections for film types and corrections to normalize projector characteristics are microcomputer controlled and stored. A 6- vector adjustable color matrix permits colorimetry setting to user preferences and match between cameras. The camera's built-in test pattern projector assures standardized setting of geometry and level parameters; simple centralized control of multiple cameras is made feasible by digitally addressing the memories built into each camera's body. A sequential manual setup mode, fully automatic setup mode, as well as a rapid pre- operational auto check of user selected set-up parameters is available.
Performance Features
Optical System ·A built-in pattern projector permits computer control · Large image field lens built into camera body assures long-term
stability of optical alignment · Built-in neutral density wheel with fast attack rate for automatic
light control ( ALC)
COLOR TELECINE CAMERA
·Color separation is accomplished by a prism beam-splitter, with high transmission efficiency, minimum color shading, minimum ghosting and color errors
· Bias lighting to reduce pickup tube lag at low light levels is introduced via the prism. RGB bias lights, individually adjusted, automatically or manually, are utilized
·Yoke is mounted directly on the optical block to minimize registration errors
·An IR filter is provided to assure correct colorimetry
Pickup Tubes
·Vidicon or Saticon® tubes, operated in the high voltage mode are usable to provide high resolution ( 700 TVL at center)
·A new and improved coil assembly together with dynamic beam focus IDBF) to reduce beam landing errors, results in improved corner focus and resolution ( typically 600 TVL in corners)
· Digital deflection and shading circuitry optimizes overall registration geometric distortion and shading performance and also assures ease of tube replacement. The registration is within 0.05% and is stored in digital memory
·Low noise FET pre- amplifier to establish avideo signal with aminimum of - 58dB S/N ratio
Operational Automatic Features
The TKC-990 is capable of automatically correcting the video signal generated to reduce or correct problems due to various film errors. Without prior programming, electronic analysis and adjustment of the R/G/B video signals developed by the camera accomplish auto color balance by correcting white, gamma, and black. The automatic White Balance ( AWB), Automatic Gamma Balance ( AGB), and Automatic Black Balance ( ABB) functions are coordinated with auto level compensation functions which are Auto Light Control ( ALC), Auto White Level ( AWL), and Auto Black Level ( ABU.
Maintenance Conveniences
To simplify manual camera check-out, the TKC-990 is provided with the following:
· For monitoring purposes, the camera provides 2 sets of picture monitor ( PXM) signals, 2sets of waveform monitor ( WFM) signals and the necessary keying signals for type 528 ( or equivalent) waveform monitor
·For precision pickup tube adjustment, asynchronized focus wobble circuit is employed for the beam alignment procedure
· For accurate raster positioning, deflection overscan is available ·A new SMPTE color bar is built in
Specifications:
Camera tube: Optical system:
1" Vidicon tube or 1" Saticon0 tube Dichroic prism system ( Bias light for RGB
built in) ( Pattern projector built in) Image size: 86 x 115 ( mm)
Input signal: BBS Sync
Sc
Output signal: Line output Video monitor Waveform monitor Power requirements: Power consumption:
Tally input: Ambient temperature: Weight:
Dimensions:
0.45 Vp-p, 75 ohm or high impedance 4 Vp-p ( negative), 75 ohm or high impedance 2 Vp-p Isinewavel, 75 ohm or high impedance
4 channels ( VB or VBS), 75 ohm 2 channels, 75 ohm 2 channels, 75 ohm AC 100V, 117, 200, 220, 240V; 50/60Hz 600VA approx. ( incl. picture monitor and waveform monitor) DC 24V or contact closure 0°C - + 40°C 220kg ( approx.) ( incl. picture monitor and waveform monitor) W: 550; H: 1,500; D: 430 ( mm)
VC- 120
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS,
37 Brook Avenue
Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
INC.
COLOR TELECINE CAMERAS
lkegami TKC-970
The TKC-970 is one of lkegami's best color telecine camera systems. Featuring top-quality picture, faithful color reproduction and high reliability, it answers today's demands from professionals for a top- grade telecine camera, adopting 1" tubes with electromagnetic focus and electromagnetic deflection systems. The TKC-970 employs aprism splitting system with 86 x 115mm image size. Thanks to the adoption of space focusing on an object, any dust adhering to the lens seldom appears as such on the picture. When atelecine camera with the same image size is replaced by the TKC-970, related equipment previously used can be employed without modification. By selecting a field lens, the TKC-970 can be freely combined with various projectors. Further, equipment layout planning can be effected with due regard to operability.
TOP-QUALITY PICTURE, FAITHFUL COLOR REPRODUCTION
·By adopting apre- preamplifier system employing high S/N FETs, the S/N ratio has been greatly upgraded to 56dB.
· Registration has also been further enhanced by employing newly designed yoke assemblies and a registration corrector.
·Thanks to adopting dynamic focus, resolution at the corners has been improved. ( 700 lines at center; 600 lines at corners).
·The TKC-970 is provided with ablack shading correction circuit. ·White shading correction is available in three modes. ·A bias light incorporated in the TKC-970 reduces lag in dark picture
areas. ·A crisp, high- quality picture is attained by employing an optical
black and a flare compensation circuit. ·A horizontal/vertical detail corrector with an auto- edge circuit con-
stantly provides appropriate corrected pictures.
VARIOUS AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS
Added to the conventional automatic systems ( ALC, AWL, ABL, optical black, etc.) are incorporated new automatic systems.
·The edge circuit in the detail corrector circuit is provided with auto level control for assuring constant, most rational correction.
·Auto Light Control ( ALC) is incorporated in the TKC-970's optical system.
·Auto Color Balance functions-- Auto White Balance ( AWB), Auto Gamma Balance ( AGB), and Auto Black Balance ( ABB) -- are provided. These balance controls maintain the best color- balance pictures during On- Air.
COLOR CORRECTION CONTROLS
·An optional color corrector unit permits correction of hue and saturation of R, G, B, Y, C, and M respectively. Also, this unit is available in three presetting modes.
·The masking unit is provided for correct color matching among cameras.
·A gamma selector is included on the TKC-970 control panel. Overall gamma of 0.55, 0.6, 0.65 and 0.7 may be applied according to the status of the film material.
HIGH RELIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM
·Since all controls from the exterior are stored in the camera, an abrupt power failure does not require readjustment.
·A digital semiconductor in the control system, including amonitor circuit, greatly enhances reliability.
·Multiplexer control is possible from the camera thanks to the multiplexer select switch on the control panel.
EASY- TO- OPERATE MONITOR SYSTEM Selection is made from the following items through piano- key- touch operation. ·PM Select; R, G, B, R- G, B- G, - G and ENC. ·WFM Select; PRE SUP, PRE SEQ, PROCE SUP, PROCE
PROCE RG, PROCE BG, ENC. ·When the camera power supply is turned OFF and then turned ON
again, PM Select is automatically set to ' ENC', while ' PROCE SEO' is automatically selected on the WFM Select. ·The SEQ indication employs a horizontal system. · Preamp as well as proc amp waveforms can be monitored. COMBINABLE WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT
Two types of field lenses are available, and the projection direction (right and left) for the TKC-970 can be selected, enabling acombination with various projectors. For 16 mm film projectors, an aplanatic TV film lens ( 67 mm, f/2,51 is available.
EASY OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
·A test chart, test pulse, and color bar are incorporated respectively in the optical system, amplifier system, and encoder.
·Preamp and process- amp are composed of separate R, G, B amplifiers of the same structure, greatly facilitating replacement and maintenance.
·Since all dual- in- line IC's are socket types, replacement and maintenance of semiconductors are facilitated.
·The target voltmeter employs digital display. ·The ND filter position is indicated by LED. ·Various check meters for power supply voltage are provided. ·Two timers ( camera operation time display and tube operation time
display) are provided. ·The registration corrector circuit is incorporated for easy registration
control. · Beam discharge at 150% can be easily set with the Beam Set
switch.
VARIOUS PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS
·Camera Tube Protection: Automatic camera tube protection is provided in case of sweep failure either horizontal and vertical scanning.
·Camera tube heater voltage is lowered during Beam- Off. · Should short-circuiting occur, the power supply is restricted by
internal protection, preventing hazards.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 121
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Ave. Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
COLOR TELECINE CAMERAS
Waveform distortion
TKC-970 Specifications Rating
Frequency Rise Time Overshoot Sag
60Hz Less than 2%
15k Hz·250k Hz Less than 0.1µs Less than 10% Less than 1%
Camera tube: 1" Vidicon tube or 1" Saticone tube. Optical System: Dichroic prism system ( light incidence selectable in left or right direction). Image size: 86 x 115 ( mm).
Input signal -- Sync: 4Vp-p ( negative), 75 ohm or high impedance. SC: 2V p- p ( sinewave), 75 ohm or high impedance. Output signal -- Line output: 4channels ( VB or VBS), 75 ohm. Video monitor: 1channel ( exclude for proper), 75 ohm. Waveform monitor: 1channel ( exclude for proper), 75 ohm.
Power requirements: AC 100V, 110V, 120V, 240V, 50/60 Hz. Power consumption: 400VA approx. ( incl. picture monitor and waveform monitor). Tally input: DC 24V or contact closure.
Ambient temperature: 0°C to + 40°C. Weight: 193 kg ( approx.) ( incl. picture monitor, waveform monitor, color corrector). Dimensions: W: 550, H: 1,500, D: 430 ( mm).
Projector lens
Model
Field Lens
16 mm Film Projector
35 mm Slide Projector
1m Field Lens (*800 ^- 920 mm) f = 60 -·- 69 mm
f = 158 -- 180 rnm
1.2 m Field Lens (·1,000---1,120mm) f = 75 -- 84 mm
f = 196 -- 220 mm
*Distance between the pupil- point of the projector lens and the primary image plane.
Example:
Distance Model
1 m
16 rnm Cine
EL NI KKOR 63/3.5 CANON P65/1.4, P67/2.5
35 mm Cine EL NI KKOR 135/5.6
35 mm Slide MASTER 180/4.7
Super 8
*1.2 m
EL NIKKOR 80/5.6 EL NIKKOR 150/5.6 EL NIKKOR 210/5.6 EL NIKKOR 50/4
50/2.8
Performance
Frequency response: 1kHz to 5.5 MHz: + 0.5 dB ( at 100 kHz), below 1 kHz, over 5.5 MHz: falling down characteristic ( aperture off, masking off, detail off, and gamma correction off).
Luminance signal noise: (with respect to encoder output of 0.7V p- p). Hum: Less than - 60 dB. Synchronous noise: Less than - 45 dB. Other
noises: Less than - 56 dB. ( Refer to 4.2 MHz band and aperture off, masking off, detail off, and gamma correction off).
Linearity: Less than DG 5% at encoder output ( APL 10, 50 and 90%).
Gamma -- 11 IStep gamma: 0.7, 0.65, 0.6, 0.55 ( Vidicon). (2) Variable gamma: More than + /- 0.2. ( For step gamma, variable gamma, remote control is possible).Horizontal resolution: Better than 700 lines at center. Better than 600 lines at corners. Modulation ratio at 400 TV lines is more than 50% ( aperture off, masking off, detail off, and gamma correction off) ( with vidicon tube).
Registration -- Area A: Within 0.05%
Area B: Within 0.1% Area C: Within 0.2%
aR e
0 0 co
A)
Geometric distortion: Zone A ( circle in center = 0.8 picture height) 1%. Zone B ( area outside Zone A) 2%. Stability --
(I) Power Stability: Stable operation within + /- 5% of the rated value. (2) Input drive signal stability: Stable operation within + /- 6dB variation. ( 3) Environmental temperature: No adjustment range: After 30 minutes preheating, when the ambient temperature varies by + /10°C in the range of 5° to 35°C, the permissible variation values of the amplitude and pedestal level are within + /- 2% with respect to the performance referred to above without adjustment.
TKC -970 Package
Consisting of -- Camera head with: · 3VFK-7 optical system · Vidicon tubes 8507 · Yoke and assembly · Pre amp unit · Shading unit · Proc. unit · Masking unit · V. detail unit · H. detail unit · Auto black level on auto B unit · Auto white on auto B unit · Pulse unit ·Sync. generator with SC/Sync gen -lock · Monitor unit · Deflection unit ( hand V) · Geometric distortion corrector · Multi board · Encoder 1 · Encoder 2 · ALC assembly · Power supply · Interface · Control Panel · Monitor select panel · Set up panel. Accessories: · module extender · test slide · lamps · tool · service manual Remote Control Panel w/30' Cable Automatic Color Balance Module Color Corrector w/ Remote Control Negative Video Module Optical Axis Tester
VC- 122
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Ave.
Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
MICROSCOPE COLOR CAMERA
ITC- 350M COMPACT 3TUBE COLOR MICROSCOPE VIDEO CAMERA Features
·The three-tube prism optical system offers excellent resolution, sensitivity, and color reproduction.
·A light, compact camera head facilitates compatibility with microscopes and other optical systems.
·Handy operation is enabled by the finecore cable connecting the camera head to the CCU, allowing use at distances of 30 meters ( 100 feet).
·Optimum camera condition is ensured by the unique automatic color balance circuit.
·An extremely high sensitivity is provided by the pickup tube, a2/3- inch MAG-MAG Chalnicon.
· Bias lighting in the optical assembly minimizes image lag. ·Fine-correction circuits are provided for both horizontal
and vertical contour, improving the clarity of the picture contour.
·Sensitivity can be increased by afactor of two to four times, simply by touching the + 6dB/ + 12 dB switch, permitting low light level operation.
·RGB connectors are provided at the CCU to output the RGB signals. These are invaluable for the requirements of high picture quality in image processing, such as analog-to- digital conversion.
·A built-in color bar generator facilitates color monitor adjustment and color tone matching for multiple cameras.
·External sync driving requires only aVBS ( color video sync composite signal) or BBS ( black burst signal), option.
·Internal-to-external sync switching is automatic.
SPECIFICATIONS
Camera Tube:
Chalnicon E5092D ( 2/3" magnetic focus
Optical System:
Scanning System: Sync System:
and deflection type) RGB prism system, f/1.4
2:1 interlaced 50 PAL or 525/60 NTSC Internal sync operation with built-in sync
Video Outputs:
generator or external sync driving NTSC or PAL Video Out
1.0V(p-p) Composite, 2Channels
Monitor Out
1.0V1p-p) Composite, 1Channel
RGB Out
0.7V(p-p), 1Channel each
Sensitivity:
a) Minimum 60 lux approx., f / 5.6/6000°K
b) Standard f/4.0/2000 lux/6000°K
Signal- to- Noise Ratio: 52 dB ( p-erms or better at f/4.0/2000 lux.
G- channel at 4.2 MHz bandwidth, gamma and detail off Horizontal Resolution: f/5.6/2000 lux, G- channel
Power Requirement: Power Consumption:
a) 550 lines or better at center b) 450 lines or better in corners 100/110/120 60 Hz AC or 220/240 50 Hz AC 80 VA approx.
Dimensions ( WHD): Camera head: 3.9 x10.6 x7.2"
199 x270 x184mm)
Control unit: 15.7 x5.2 x14.6"
Weight:
(400 x132.5 x370mm) Camera head: 4.6 lbs. ( 2.1kg) approx.
(less lens and cable)
Control unit: 18.7 lbs. 18.5kg) approx.
Standard Composition
·ITC-350M: Camera head w/3M camera cable ·Control unit ·Service manual
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
1pce 1pce 1vol
VC- 123
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
MEDICAL COLOR CAMERA
37 Brook Ave. Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
MK-309C
COLOR CAMERA FOR MEDICAL APPLICATIONS
The MK- 309C is an extremely compact television camera developed solely for the special requirements of the medical fields. In order to provide high-fidelity color reproduction, the MK- 309C employs three pick-up tubes and prism optics with high- sensitivity. The color splitting prism and circuitry, such as the quality video amplifier and detail correction, provide for faithful color reproduction, unlike less expensive single tube cameras. Furthermore, an adoption of high sensitive CdSe tubes assures quality color pictures even in
low light conditions. The lightweight compact camera head can be used for various
medical requirements such as microscopic, endoscopic, or other special applications. The MK- 309C provides superior results with simple operation by using various automatic functions.
FEATURES
SUPER COMPACT CAMERA HEAD
The camera head of the MK- 309C with three pick-up tubes is small and lightweight in order to permit easier system connection with other apparatus and reduces the space required. The camera head weighs only 1.2kg.
11
4t 01101011 "
411011011dir·
FAITHFUL COLOR REPRODUCTION
The specially designed circuitry of the MK- 309C always reproduce faithful color. The highly sensitive CdSe tubes enable beautiful color pictures, even in low light level conditions, especially in red, which is important since the interior of the human body is primarily red in color. The red reproduction of the MK- 309C is finely tuned to aprecise red shade, and built-in detail correction circuit gives asharp and
clean picture.
SIMPLE WHITE BALANCE CONTROL
With the built-in white balance control, the camera operator can obtain well-balanced, faithful color reproduction by pushing the white balance button on the camera control unit.
HIGH SENSITIVITY WITH LOW LIGHT
The beam splitting system and sensitive pick-up tubes give aclear picture in low light levels. The + 18dB/9dB gain switch can increase the sensitivity 8X/3X, electronically, which is important for both microscopic applications and endoscopic applications.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL
For microscope application, the MK- 309C provides the automatic light density control system. A uniform brightness can be obtained automatically without any manipulation by the camera operator.
EASY DIRECT INPUT TO VIDEO RECORDER
Since the MK- 309C incorporates acolor encoder and sync signal generator, the output signal of the MK- 309C can be directly recorded on video tape. In this way, important and valuable information can be stored and replayed later with aclean and clear color picture.
SIMPLE AND EASY OPERATION
The operation of the MK- 309C is simple. Various automatic functions offer very smooth handling with no special training for operation necessary. Anyone can use this camera system with microscope, endoscope or fiberscope. The only control is the power on- off switch.
BUILT-IN TEST PULSE GENERATOR When the power switch is tuned on, the pulse for setup testing automatically comes on to check the camera operation and monitors.
H & V Detail Corrector Detail correction circuits are incorporated for both Horizontal and Vertcal contours, giving improved clarity to picture information.
Color painting To facilitate color adjustment, an R & B color painting control is provided at the CCU.
SPECIFICATIONS
Rating
Optical system: Pick up tube: Scanning system:
R/G/B prism beamsplitter
2/3" Chalnicon 2:1 interlace; 525 lines; 60 fields 30 frames/sec.
Sync system:
Or
2:1 interlace; 625 fines, 50 fields 25 frames/sec Internal Sync Operation with built-in Sync Generator or External Sync Drive ( Genlock)
Power contamaption: 70VA
Output signal: (1) Color composite (2) RGB video
VBS 1.0Vp-p; 75 ohms; 2outputs V 0.7Vp-p; 1output
431 Monitor out Genlock input signal:
VS 1.0Vp-p; 1output VBS 1.0Vp-p 75 ohms or BBS 0.45Vp-p 75 ohms
Shading compensation: Standard provision
Gamma correction:
Standard provision
Lens mount: Dimensions:
Weight:
Amblent temperature: Power Supply: VC- 124
P- mount Camera Head
74x261x169mm (WxHxD)
Performance
Camera Control Unit 180x250x430mm (WxHxD)
Resolution:
500- lines or better at center ( horizontal)
Camera Head
1.2kg. ( 2.6 lb.)
Signal to noise ratio: 54dB or better (NTSC). 52dB or better ( PAL)
Camera Control Unit 9kg. ( 19.8 lb.)
Sensitivity:
250 lux at F2 0/6000°K
0°C - 40°C (32°F -- 104°F)
Registration:
Maxim 0.1% inside acircle having adiameter of
AC
110V.
220V,
240V
± 10%, 50. 60Hz Prices and Specifications Subject to
Change Without
80%
Notice ·
of
picture
height
INNOVATIVE TELEVISION
6445 De Soto Ave. P.O. Box 681 Woodland Hills, CA 91365 (818) 888-9421 Telex 181028
EQUIPMENT
ITE-30/ITE-40 CAMERA SUPPORT SYSTEMS
Both systems include: a fluid head, tripod and dolly.
SYSTEM ITE-30
The ITE-30 Camera Support System is specifically designed for broadcast, educational and industrial applications.
Handles cameras up to 10 lbs.
ITE-H30 Fluid Head
Provides smooth pan and tilt control. Its counter- balanced design eliminates camera "nose dives." It features a quick- release camera mounting plate, aspirit level and is equipped with a single, adjustable control
handle. Dual handles are optional. The ITE-H30 is compatible with other ITE Tripods.
Capacity: 10 lbs. Counter balanced for 2" Vertical C.G.
Height: 4"
Width: 5"
Length: 4"
Weight: 2lbs
$120.00
ITE-RH30 Right Hand Zoom Handle . .35.00
ITE-T30 Tripod
Features three-section legs with radial locks for extension and contraction. Its elevator column adjusts to 14". An adjustable, lockable spyder provides structural stability. The ITE-T30 is equipped with a spirit level and combination rubber leg tips and metal spikes.
Camera/Head Load Capacity: 15 lbs.
Minimum Height: 24"
· Maximum Height at 40°
Included Angle: 69"
Weight: 6.5 lbs
$130.00
ITE-D30 Completing the system is the ITE-D30 Dolly which provides a stable platform with sufficient radius for proper structural support.
A tripod attachment affords quick set-up and tear-down. Quiet movement is assured by bearing- mounted casters with step- on brakes. A center- locking device offers excellent stability and allows the dolly to
easily fold and lock in place.
Load Capacity: 20 lbs. Folded Length: 19-3/4" Folded Width: 6-1/2" Height: 6"
$95.00
SYSTEM ITE-40 The ITE-40 Camera
designed for both applications.
Support System is studio and remote
This system is specifically oriented toward
cameras weighing up to 30 lbs. and which are equipped with studio viewfinders, larger lenses and rear controls which create high centers of gravity.
ITE-H40 Fluid Head
Counterbalanced for smooth, effortless control. It features separate controls for pan and tilt lock and is lightweight. The ITE-H40 utilizes a quick- release camera- mounting platform. It comes equipped with aspirit level and one control handle. Dual handles are optional. The ITE-H40 is compatible with other ITE Tripods.
Capacity: 30 lbs. Height: 6-1/2" Width: 7-1/2" Length: 6-1/2"
Weight: 7lbs. ( without handle) . . $295.00 ITE-RH40 Right Hand Zoom Handle . .35.00
ITE-740 Tripod
Lightweight, heavy duty system that features two- section, positive cam- locked legs that are indexed for easy length adjustment.
An adjustable, lockable spyder for structural
stability, the elevator column adjusts to 16". Spirit level and rubber-tipped legs are provided. The ITE-T40 will accommodate other ITE Fluid Heads.
Camera/Head Load Capacity: 40 lbs.
Minimum Height: 20-1/2"
Maximum Height at 40°
Included Angle: 66"
Weight: 10 lbs.
$240.00
ITE-D40
Completing the system is the ITE-D40 Dolly. It shares the same features as the ITE-D30 except:
Load Capacity: 50 lbs. Folded Length: 22"
Folded Width: 8" Height: 6"
Diameter: 40" Wheel Diameter: 4" Weight: 9lbs.
$140.00
CAMERA SUPPORT SYSTEMS
-4
e ITE-T30
ITE-D30
41,
11
ITE-T40
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 125
INNOVATIVE TELEVISION EQUIPMENT
6445 De Soto Ave. P.O. Box 681 Woodland Hills, CA 91365 (818) 888-9421 Telex 181028
ITE-TI WOOD TRIPOD (Miller Senior Model) Boll Leveling Bowl
Comero/Heod Lood Capacity Maximum Height Leg Angle Folded Length Folded Width Weight Finish
Optional Accessories
20 lbs. (6kg) 59 in. ( 147.5 cm)
up to 85° 35 in. (87.5 cm)
5in ( 12 5cm) 8lbs. (3.6 kg)
Natural Wood and Block Wrinkle
1435.00
ITE·TS1 Spreader. ITE-CD1 Clow Bolt
ITERFP Rubber Foot Pods
ITE-T2 STUDIO/REMOTE TRIPOD
Camera/Head Lood Capacity Minimum Height Maximum Height Minimum Folded Length Minimum Folded Width Maximum Leg Angle Weight Finish
Optional Accessories
60 lbs ( 27 kg) 29 in ( 72 5cm) 65 in ( 162 5cm)
32 in (80 cm) 7in ( 17 5cm)
35° 12 lbs ( 54kg) Anodized Aluminum and Block Wrinkle
$476.00
ITE-SPS Spike
Set ITERFP Rubber
Foot Pods
ITE-T4 WOOD TRIPOD (Miller Light Pro Mini Model) Boll Leveling Bowl
Comero/Heod Lood Copocity Maximum Height
Leg Angle Folded Length Folded Width
Weight Finish
50 lbs ( 22 5kg) 65 in ( 162 5cm)
up to 80° 40 in ( 100 cm)
61/2 in ( 16 25 cm) 12 lbs ( 54kg)
Natural Wood and Block Wrinkle
Optional Accessories
.625.00
ITE-154 Spreader ITE-CB3 Clow Boll ITE·RFP Rubber Foot Pods
ITE-T5 ELEVATION TROLLEY
Camera/Head Load Capacity Minimum Height Maximum Height Elevation Adjustment Minimum Folded Length Minimum Folded Width Maximum Leg Angle Weight Finish
50 lbs (27 kg) 38 in (95 cm) 56 in ( 140 cm) 18 in ( 45 cm) 40 in ( 100 cm) 81/ 2 in ( 21 25 cm)
34"
17 lbs ( 765 kg)
Anodized Aluminum and
Block Wrinkle
TRIPODS
ITE-T3 ENG. TRIPOD Boll Leveling Bowl
Comero/Heod Lood Capacity Minimum Height Maximum Height Minimum Folded Length Minimum Folded Width Maximum Leg Angle Weight Finish
Includes Rubber Foot Pods: Adjustable Spreader: Spike Set
Optional Accessories:
ITE-CB3 Clow Boll
25 lbs. ( 11.25 kg) 15 in. ( 37.5 cm) 62 in. ( 155 cm) 28 in. ( 70 cm) 6in. ( 15 cm) 80° 7lbs ( 2.25 kg) Block Wrinkle
1350.00
ITE-T6 ELEVATION TRIPOD
Camera/Head Load Capacity
50 lbs ( 22 5kg)
Minimum Height
29 in ( 72 5cm)
Maximum Height
65 in ( 162 5cm)
Elevation Adjustment
18 in ( 45 cm)
Minimum Folded Length
33 in ( 82 5cm)
Minimum Folded Width
81/ 2 in ( 21 25 cm)
Maximum Leg Angle
33 1/ 2 °
Weight
18 lbs ( 8 1kg)
Finish
Anodized Aluminum and Block Wrinkle
$626.00
ITE-T8 ENG TRIPOD Doll Leveling Bowl
Camera/Head Lood Capacity
40 lbs. ( 18 kg)
Minimum Height
20 in. ( 50 cm)
(at maximum leg spread)
Maximum Height
68 in. ( 170 cm)
Minimum Folded Length
34 in. ( 85 cm)
Minimum Folded Width
7in. ( 17.5 cm)
Leg Angle
up to 80°
Weight
1E/ lbs. ( 4.5 kg)
Finish
Anodized Aluminum
and Block Wrinkle
$735.00
Optional
ITE-CD3 Clow Doll
Accessories
ITE·RFP--Rubber
Foot Pads
Includes removable adjustable spyder ( tyrod) assembly quick.
action toggle leg locks leg spikes
ITE-T9 TRIPOD--MINI Doll Leveling Bowl
Camera/Head Lood Capacity
30 lbs ( 13 5kg)
Minimum Height
13 1/ 2 in ( 33 75 cm)
Maximum Height
29 in ( 72 5cm)
Minimum Folded Length
21 in ( 52 5cm)
Minimum Folded Width
7in ( 17 5cm)
Leg Angle
up to 80°
Weight
8lbs ( 3 kg)
Finish
Anodized Aluminum and
Block Wrinkle
Includes removable adjustable spyder (tyrod) assembly
$825.00
Optional Accessories
ITE·CD3 Clow Boll
ITE·RFPI Rubber Foot Pods
ITE-SPS Spike Set
ITE-T10 ELEVATION TRIPOD
Camera/Head Lood Capacity Minimum Height Maximum Height Elevation Adjustment Minimum Folded Length Minimum Folded Width Maximum Leg Angle Weight Finish
Optional Accessories
ITE-T12 TRIPOD Pro Model-- Doll Leveling Bowl
Comero/Heod Load Capacity Minimum Height
50 lbs ( 22 5kg) 24 in ( 60 Cmi
'at maximum leg spread)
maximum Height
65 in ( 162 5cm)
Minimum Folded Length
Minimum Folded Width Leg Angle Weight
36 mn ( 90 cm)
7in ' 17 5cm)
up to 80 °
''
12 lbs ' 54kg,
Finish
Includes removable
Anodized Aluminum cind
Block Wt.nkie
$025.00
adjustable
spyder ( tyrod)
assembly
it
Optional Accessories
ITE CB3 Clow Boll 1TE RFOI Rubber Foot Pods
ITE-SPS Spike Set
ITE-T13 ELEVATION TRIPOD
Camera/Head Lood Copocity
60 lbs ( 27 kg)
Minimum Height
24 in ( 60 cm)
(at maximum leg spread)
Maximum Height
83 in ( 207 5cm)
Elevation Adjustment
Minimum Folded Length Minimum Folded Width Maximum Leg Angle Weight Finish
18 in ( 47 5cm) 36 in ( 90 cm)
9mn ( 17 5cm) 35°
17 lbs 65 kg) Anodized Aluminum
and Block Wrinkle
Includes
adjustable spyoer rtyrod) assembly
.10116.00
Optional Accessories
pir'
air
1TE RFPI Rubber Foot Pads ITE·SPS Spike Set
ITE-T14 FIELD TRIPOD
Camera/Head Lood Copocts Minimum Height Maximum Height Minimum Folded Length Minimum Folded Width maximum Leg Angle Weight Finish
Includes Mitchell base
footpodfspike , spherical boil set
Reproduced with Permission from Material Copyright 1983 by INNOVATIVE TELEVISION EQUIPMENT
VC- 126
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
140 lbs ( 63 kg) 28 in ( 70 cm)
59 in ( 147 5cm) 18 in ( 45 cm)
35 in ( 87 5cm) 9in ( 22 5cm) 33' 7°
26 lbs ( 11 7kg) Anodized
Aluminum and Iliad, Wrinkle $995.00 ITE · H25T Mitchell Adopter
140 lbs , 63 kg) 25 in i62 5cm) 45in , 112 5cm)
34 in , 85 cm) 0 in ,17 5cm)
38° 20 lbs , 9kg) Block wrinkle
$650.00
INNOVATIVE TELEVISION
6445 De Soto Ave. P.O. Box 681
Woodland Hills, CA 91365 (81 8) 888-9421 Telex 181 028
EQUIPMENT
ITE·T20 ELEVATION TRIPOD
Comera/Heod Lood Capocity Minimum Height Maximum Height Elevation Adjustment Minimum Folded Length Minimum Folded Width Maximum Leg Angle Tilt Angle Pon Rotation Weight Finish
20 lbs ( 9kg) 34 in ( 85 cm) 68 in ( 170 cm) 16 in (40 cm) 32 in ( 80 cm) 97 in ( 23 75 cm)
15° ±60 ° 360 ° 8 lbs ( 3 it) kg) Anodized Aluminum and Block Wrinkle
$206.00
ITE-H2 CAM HEAD
Comera Load Capacity Tilt Angle Pon Rotation Height Width Length Weight Bose
Optional Accessories
120 lbs ( 54 kg) opto ± 50 ° 360°
7' 7 in ( 18 75 cm) 9in ( 22 5cm) 10 in ( 25 cm)
25 lbs ( 11 25 kg) Mitchell Type
131286.00
Dual handles wedge adopter telescopic handles
ITE-MT1 TRIPOD For Camera and Microwave Applications
Comero/Heod Load Capacity
Minimum Height Maximum Height Minimum Folded Length Minimum Folded Width
Maximum Leg Angle Weight
Finish
Includes spreader foot pad/spike/spherical boll set Mitchell bose
250 lbs. (112.5 kg)
25 in. (62.5 cm) 43 in. ( 107.5 cm)
34 in. ( 85 cm) 91/ 2 in.
(23.75 cm)
38 ° 33 lbs. (14.85 kg) Aluminum and Block Wrinkle
$1096.00
ITE-H4 TORSION HEAD
Camera Load Capacity Tilt Angle Pon Rotation Height Width Length Weight Dose
40 lbs ( 18 kg) ± 45° 360 °
6in ( 15cm) 6in ( 15 cm) 8in ( 20 cm) 8lbs ( 3 6kg) 13.in ( 4 cm) Clomp
$266.00
TRIPODS/HEADS
ITE-144 ELEVATION TRIPOD
Camera/Head Load Capacity
33 lbs.(15 kg)
Minimum Height
32 in. ( 80 cm)
Maximum Height @ 40°
Included Angle
66 in. ( 165 cm)
Leg Angle ( adjustable)
80° included ( max.)
Elevator Column Adjustment
10 in. ( 25 cm)
Minimum Folded Length
35 in. ( 85 cm)
Minimum Fcdded Width
7in. ( 17.5 cm)
Weight
12 lbs. ( 5.3 kg)
Finish
Anodized Aluminum ond
eolxk
Black Wrinkle
$270.00
ç.
ITE-H4D TORSION HEAD
Camera Load Capacity Tilt Angle Pon Rotation Height Width Length Weight Base
Includes dual handles
40 lbs ( 18 Isg) ± 45° 360 °
6 in ( 15 cm) 6in ( 15cm) 8in ( 20 cm) 8lbs ( 3 6kg) I3/4 in ( 4 4cm) Clomp
$375.00
eggile
ITE-H4 HYDROCAM HEAD
Camera Load Capacity Tilt Angle
Pon Rotation Height Width Length Weight Base
130 lbs ( 58 5kg) up to ± 50 ° 360 ° 8 mn (20 cm)
9 in ( 22 5cm) 9' : in ( 23 75 cm) 23 lbs ( 10 35 kg)
Mitchell Type
Includes dual handles and wedge ()dopier
(requires wedge plate)
$21360.00
e
nie
ago
.0001
ITE-H7 TORSION HEAD
Camera Load Capacity Tilt Angle Pon Rotation Height Width Length Weight Dose Includes dual handles
50 lbs ( 22 5kg) ±45 ° 360 °
8' in ( 21 25 cm) 7' tin ( 18 75cm) 82 in ( 21 25 cm)
13 lbs ( 5 85 kg) 13.in ( 4 4cm) Clomp
11896.00
40100
ITE-H8 MICROWAVE PAN/TILT HEAD
Camera Load Capacity Tilt Angle Pan Rotation Height Width
Length Weight
Dose
250 lbs ( 112 5kg) ±45 ° 360 °
lin ( 17 5cm)
8in ( 20 cm) 9in ( 22 5cm)
19 lbs ( 8 55 kg) Mitchell Type
Mounting plate- designed for standard Lbracket attachment
$996.00
Optional Accessories
Control handle
ITE-H9AC HYDRO HEAD
Camera Load Capacity
30 lbs ( 13 5kg)
Tilt Angle
± 50 °
Pon Rotation
360 °
Height
bin ( 15 cm)
Width
(5 .'2 in ( 16 25 cm)
Length
bin ( 15cm)
Weight
8lbs ( 3 6kg)
Bose
34 in ( 4 4cm) Clomp or Claw Boil
Mounting plate includes standard ITE.OR Quick
Release Adaptor
$1306.00
Optional Accessories
Dual handles
re. eallteloN,
ITE-H10 HYDRO HEAD
Camera Load Capacity
40 lbs ( 18 Isg)
Tilt Angle Pon Rotation
±60 ° 360'
Height
6 2,n 16 25 cm ,
Width
63.1n ( 16 crro
Length
63. ( 169cm
Weight
9lbs ( 4 05 kg'
Bose
13.in ( 4 4cm) Clomp or Clow Bali
Camera Mounting Plate/Quick Release
4 in ( I) x 2 in ( w) ( 10 cm x 5 cm) with 3,8 in ( 94 CM) Slat for mounting cameras with
1/4 In (025 cm) or 3/8 mm, ( 94 cm) screws
Optional Accessories 4%
$1760.00
Dual handles
ITE-H11 FLUID HEAD (Miller Super -8- Model)
Camera Load Capoc Tilt Angle Pon Rotation Height Width Length Weight Bose
Optional Accessories
Claw Boll leveling .01.11.1"
Nale
ego
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
10 lbs ( 4 5kg) ±- 80° 360°
In ( 12 5CM) 3' mr, ( 8 75 cm)
4.n ( 10cm) 2lbs ( 9Ir.g)
Flot $386.00
VC-127
INNOVATIVE TELEVISION EQUIPMENT
6445 De Soto Ave. P.O. Box 681 Woodland Hills, CA 91365 (818) 888-9421 Telex 181028
ITE-H12 FLUID HEAD (Miller Senior " F" Model)
Cornera Load Capoc Icy Tilt Angle Pon Rotation Height Width Length Weight Base
Optionol Accessories
20 lbs (9kg) ± 80 ° 360 °
Sin ( 12 5cm) 4in ( 10cm)
4l/2 in ( 11 25 cm) 5lbs ( 2 25 kg) Flat
$710.00
Clow Doll leveling dual handles
quick- release assembly
ITE-H14 FLUID HEAD (Miller Light Pro Model)
Camera Load Capacity Tilt Angle Pon Rotation Height Width Length Weight Dose
Optional Accessories
30 lbs ( 13 5kg) ± 80° 360°
51/ 2 in ( 13 75 cm) 6V2 in ( 16 25 cm) 51/ 2 in ( 13 75 cm)
8 lbs ( 3 6kg) Flot
$1095.00
Pro Clow Boll leveling dual handles
quick- release assembly
HEADS/PEDESTALS
ITE-H15 FLUID HEAD (Miller V.G. 50 Model)
Cornera Load Capacity Tilt Angle Pon Rotation Height Width Length Weight Base
Optional Accessories
40 lbs ( 18 kg) ± 75 ° 360 °
6v. in ( 16 9cm) 6in ( 15cm)
lin ( 17 5cm) 8lbs ( 3 6kg)
Flot
$1300.00
Pro Clow Boll leveling dual handles
quick release assembly
ITE-H16 FLUID- DAMPENED HEAD
Camera Load Capacity
35 lbs. ( 15.9 kg)
Tilt Angle
± 90'
Pon Rotation
360'
Height
Oin. ( 15 cm)
Width
6in. ( 15 cm)
Length
6in. ( 15cm)
Weight
6lbs. (2.7 kg)
Dose
Pro Clow Doll
Includes Standard ITE-OR Quick Releose Adaptor
Optional Accessories
$1775.00 Dual handles
ITE-H17 FLUID HEAD
Camera Capacity Pan Movement Tilt Movement Drag Temperature Range Counterbalancing
Camera Platform
Pan handles
Base Weight
: ( 18Ibs)8 kg
:360° plus positive lock system
: ±60° plus positive lock system
:Full fluid system
: -- 40" to +65°C
:Static system; 8kg @ 50mm
C of G height
: ±30mm sliding camera plate
for balancing C of G plus
quick release action
:016mm x450mm vertically and
horizontally adjustable
:075mm ball levelling
:2kg
$625.00
ITE-H100FD FLUID DRAG HEAD
Camera L000 Capacity
250 lbs ( 112 5kg)
Tilt Angle
± 53°
Pon Rotation
360 °
Height
81 /2 in ( 21 25 cm)
Width ( less handles)
12 in (30 cm)
Length ( less hondles)
14 in ( 35 cm)
Weight
31 lbs ( 13 95 kg)
Dose
Mitchell Type
Includes telescopic control handle zoom stub handle quick- release lever-oction wedge adaptor (requires ITE-WP100 wedge plate)
$2995.00
Optional Accessories
Right- bond - telescopic handle
IOW
ITE-Pl PNEUMATIC STUDIO PEDESTAL
Comero(Head Load Capacity Minimum Height maximum Height Minimum Doorway Clearance Wheelbase
290 lbs ( 130 5kg; 29in ( 73 75 cm) 51 in ( 127 5cm) 30 in ( 75 cm)
28/2 in ( 71 25 cm)
Dual Wheel Diameter
8in ( 20 cm) ( cost aluminum polyurethane tires)
Steering Wheel Diameter
26 in ( 65 cm ) (vinyl coated)
Steering Mode Coble Guard
Crab and Tricycle Adjustable from 1/8 in 131 CM;
Air Pressure
ta 1in ( 2 5 cm) above floor Pressure (eke( volve opens at
200 PSI representing equivalent
overload condition of 300 lbs ( 135 kg)
Construction
Cost aluminum structure with steel tank and outer column to A5ME Pressure Vessel Safety Code aluminum center column
Weight Mount Fucrush
180 lbs ( 81 kg) Modified Mitchell Type
Block Wrinkle
88850.00
Qo: 0-col Accessories
A- Supply Chorg S, '`·
ITE-P3 ELEVATION PEDESTAL
Camera/Head Load Capacity Minimum Height maximum Height Elevation Adjustment Caster Radius Wheel Diameter Weight Finish
Optional Accessories
Coble guards
Reproduced with Permission from Material Copyright 1983 by INNOVATIVE TELEVISION EQUIPMENT
VC- 128
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
60 lbs ( 27 kg) 31 in ( 77 5cm) 49 in ( 122 5cm)
18 in ( 45 cm) 19 in ( 47 5cm) 1 /2 in (11 25 cm) 36 lbs ( 16 2kg)
Black Wrinkle
$1475.00
INNOVATIVE TELEVISION EQUIPMENT
6445 De Soto Ave P.O. Box 681 Woodland Hills, CA 91365 (818) 888-9421 Telex 181028
ITE-P4 STUDIO PEDESTAL
Camero/Head Load Copocity
140 lbs ( 63 kg) (first 87 lbs [ 39 15 kg)
spring counterbalanced)
Minimum Height
34 in ( 85 cm)
Maximum Height
52 in ( 130 cm)
Minimum Doorway Clearance
32 in ( 80 cm)
Single Wheel Diameter
7in ( 17 5cm)
Steering Wheel
(polyurethane tires)
Diameter Steering Mode Dose Construction Weight
25in ( 62 5cm) Crab
Cost Aluminum
(less camera
bolonce weights) Mount Finish
160 lbs ( 72 kg) Mitchell Type
Block Wrinkle
Optional Accessories
ITE-P7 ELEVATION PEDESTAL
$4900.00
Additional capacity
to 200 lbs (90 kg)
Camera/Head Load Copocity
Minimum Height Maximum Height Elevation Adjustment Coster Radius Wheel Diameter Weight Finish
Optional Accessories
Unit comes equipped with adjustable coble guords
75 lbs ( 33 75 kg) 32 in ( 80 cm)
49 in ( 122 5cm) 18 in ( 45 cm)
19 in ( 47 5cm) 6' 2in ( 1625cm) 45 lbs ( 20 25 kg)
Block Wrinkle
.1925.00
Mitchell Mount Adapter
ITE-P5 STUDIO PEDESTAL
Camera/Head Load Capacity
265 lbs 11 ,.) 25 kg) (first 174 lbs [ 78 3
spring counterbolonced)
Minimum Height Maximum Height
34 in ( 85 cm) 52 in ( 130 cm)
32 in ( 80 cm)
Minimum Doorway Cleorance Dual Wheel Diameter
7in ( 17 5cm) (polyurethane tires)
Steering Wheel Diameter Steering Mode Dose Construction Weight ( less camera
balance weights) Mount ·Finish
Optional Accessories
25 in ( 62 5cm) Crob
Cost Aluminum
180 lbs ( 81 kg) Mitchell Type Block Wrinkle
$6600.00 Additional capacity
to 310 lbs (139 5 kg)
ITE-D3 DOLLY
Load Capacity Folded Length Folded Width Height Diameter Wheel Diameter Weight Finish
90 lbs ( 40 5kg) 26 in ( 05 cm) 12 in ( 30 cm) 7in ( 17 5cm)
42 in ( 105 cm) 5in ( 12 5cm) 17 lbs ( 765 Isg)
Black Wrinkle
$625.00
ITE-D5 DOLLY
Load Capacity Folded Length Folded Width Height Diameter Wheel Diameter Weight Finish
60 lbs ( 27 Isig) 23 in ( 57 5cm)
6 in ( 15 cm) On ( 15 crni 42 in ( 105 cm Sin ( 12 5cmr 7lbs ( 3 15 kg) Block Wrinkle
6366.00
ITE-D6 DOLLY
Load Capacity Folded Length
Folded Width Height Diameter Wheel Diameter Weight Finish
60 lbs. ( 27 kg) 23 in. ( 57.5 cm)
6xi ( 15 cm)
6on. ( 15 cm) 41 in ( 102.5cm)
5in. ( 12.5 cm) 7lbs ( 3.15 kg)
Black Wrinkle
Accessories Available295.00
$
ITE D6G comes equipped with cable guards
$366.00
PEDESTALS/DOLLIES
ITE-P6 STUDIO PEDESTAL
Camera/Head Load Capacity Minimum Height Maximum Height Minimum Doorwoy Clearance Dual Wheel Diameter
Steering Wheel Diameter Steering Mode Dose Construction
Weight
Mount Finish
120 lbs ( 54 kg) 32 in ( 80 cm)
52 in ( 130 cm) 28 in ( 70 cm) 7in ( 17 5cm)
(polyurethane tires) 20 in ( 50 cm) Crab
Cost Aluminum and Fibergloss 125 lbs
(56 25 kg) Mitchell Type Block Wrinkle
$4300.00
ITE-D3G DOLLY
Load Capacity Folded Length Folded Width Height Diameter Wheel Diameter Weight Finish
Includes cabe guards
90 lbs ( 40 5kg) 26 in (65 cm) 12 in ( 30 cm) 7in ( 17 5cm)
42 in ( 105 cm) 5in ( 12 5cm) 17 lbs ( 765 kg)
Block Wrinkle
$666.00
ITE-D7 DOLLY
Load Copociry Folded Lene Folded Width Height Diameter Wheel Diameter Weight Finish
Includes adjustable cable guards
250 lbs ( 112 5Isg) 29 in ( 72 5cm) 15 in ( 37 5cm) 9in ( 22 5cm)
45 in ( 112 5cm) 6"2i0 ( 16 25 cm) 25 lbs ( 11 25 kg)
Block Wrinkle
$1095.00
ITE-D20 DOLLY
Load Capacity Folded Length Folded Width Height Diameter Wheel Diameter Weight Finish
25 lbs ( 11 25 kg, 19 in ( 47 5CM, 12 in ( 30 cm) 9in ( 22 5cm/ 37 in ( 92 5cm) 4in ( 10 cm) 7lbs ( 3 15 kg)
Anodized Aluminum
$120.00
PIE-IS TRIPOD SPREADER (For ITE/Miller -Ti and - T4 Tripods)
This spreader is constructed of sturdy
lightweight aluminum It will retoin tripod legs from o diameter of 32 to 48 inches ( 80-123 cm) Weight is 3 pounds ( 135 kg)
ITE-TS1 ITE-TS4
$295.00 285.00
Reproduced with Permission from Material Copyright 1983 by INNOVATIVE TELEVISION EQUIPMENT Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 129
INNOVATIVE TELEVISION EQUIPMENT
6445 De Soto Ave. P.O. Box 681 Woodland Hills, CA 91365 (818) 888-9421 Telex 181028
ACCESSORIES
QUICK RELEASE ASSEMBLIES
The ITE Quick Release Assembly provides for rapid attachment ond removal of cameras from pon/tilt heads. Positive attachment of
plate to adopter is accomplished by rotating o spring -loaded lever. Inadvertent
disengagement is impossible.
Assemblies ore used in conjunction with all models of Torsion. Fluid and Hydro Heads
WEDGE ADAPTER ASSEMBLIES
ITE-OR
The ITE Wedge Plate and Adapter combination provide for rapid attachment and removal of cameras from pon/tilt heads. Positive attachment of wedge plate ro adopter is accomplished by rotation of o locking screw which make inadvertent disengagement impossible
Assemblies are used in conjunction with model ITE-H2 Cam Head and ITE-H5 Hydro Head
ITE-WA2AVAS
ITE·WP ITE.WIT100
HI HATS ITE-HH6 (Mitchell-Type Mount) Camera Load Capacity Height Maximum Width Mounting Bolt Circle Bolt Attachment Size Finish
ITE-MHH (Miller " Pro Doll" Bowl) Camera Load Copooty Height max,mum Width Mounting Bolt C,rcle Bali Attachment Size F,n,sh
HANDLES
A wide variety of handles and adapters , s available for all ITE Heads
--
---
___,,...1101/
-- =___----1111111111111
300 lbs ( 135 kg) 6in (15cm,
71/ 2 in ( 18 75cm)
61/ 2 In ( 16 25 cm) 3/8 in 194 cm) Black Wrinkle
ADAPTERS
ITE-CD1 Clow Doll Assembly
For ITE H11 H12 to 11 Tripod
ITE-CB3 Clow Boll Assembly
For ITE T3 T4 T8 T9 and . T1 2 Tripods
40 lbs ( 18kg) On ( 15cm
7in (17 5cm) ti 1/ 2 ( 16 25 cm)
3/8 in (94 cm) Black Wrinkle
ITE-H9 10P
For ITE H9AC and H1 0 Hydro Heads to P6 Pedestal
ITE -MHT
For ITE-H1 1 H12 -H14 and - H1 5 Fluid Heads to T2 15 TO T13 ond - T5 5 Tripods and Trolleys
.411t,
CASES
Sturdy h, impact carrying coses are available for au 1TE products Contact ITE for additional
informot,00
ITET3ALL FEET
TRIPOD ACCESSORIES
Rubber Foot Pods Boll Feet ond Leg Spies ore avaFoble for vorous ( TE Tripods Contort ITE for ov000t5,1,ty
ITE C CASES
ITE-WA2 ITE-WP ITE-WP100 ITE-05A
ITE-RH ITE-RH9AC ITE-RH10 ITE-H2/6TH ITE-RHM ITE-RHMT ITE-H910P ITE-H25T ITE-MHT ITE-MHTH ITE-HH6
Wedge Adapter -- H2 Wedge Plate Wedge Plate -- H100 Offset Adapter with Wedge Plate-- Use with H6 Er H100FD for large Studio Cameras
Right Hand Zoom Handle for H2, H4, H8 Right Hand Zoom Handle for H9AC Right Hand Zoom Handle for H10
Telescopic Handle for H2 and H6 Right Hand Handle for H12, H14, H15 and H16
Telescopic Handle for H12, H14, H15 and H16 Adapter -- for H9AC and H10 to P6 Adapter -- for H2 and H6 ton, T10, T13 and P7 Adapter -- for M Heads to 12, T5, T6, T10 and T13 Adapter -- for H40 to T5 and T6 Hi- Hat -- 6" Mitchell Mount
$ 190.00 145.00 146.00
325.00 96.00
115.00 115.00 175.00
80.00 115.00 175.00 115.00
85.00 50.00 165.00
ITE-MHH ITE-CW ITE-RFPM ITE-RFPI ITE-CB1 ITE-CB3 ITE-QR ITE-QRP ITE-SPS ITE-CTH
1TE-CD ITE-CH
ITE-MPC
Hi- Hat -- 6" Miller " Pro" Ball Cup -- adjustable Counterweight Set (40 lbs.) for P4 and P5 Rubber Foot Pad Set -- for Ti, 13, T4 and TB Rubber Foot Pad Set -- for T2, T12 and T13 Claw Ball Assy -- for 11 Claw Ball Assy -- for T3, T4, T8 and T12 Quick Release Adapter Assy Quick Release Adapter Plate Spike Set -- for T2, 16, 110, T12 and T13 Shipping Case for T6, T10 and T13 Tripod with H9AC, H10, H12, H14, H15 and H16 Heads Shipping Case for D3, D5, D6 and D7 Dolly
Shipping Case for H2, H6 and H100FD Heads with Handles and Accessories Molded Poly Shipping Case for 13, T4, T8, T12 Tripod with H12, H14, H15 and H16 Heads
Reproduced with Permission from Material Copyright 1983 by INNOVATIVE TELEVISION EQUIPMENT
VC- 130
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
165.00 200.00
95.00 120.00
65.00 145.00 155.00
45.00 45.00
350.00 310.00
295.00
185.00
915 Washington Street P.O. Box 8346 Reading, PA 19603 (215) 378-9198
REMOTE VIDEO SYSTEM
Two-Way Telecommunication In A Portable Package
Now, with a minimum of
expense and training, full
motion color video conferencing is within reach.
IRIS AM -i. A totally self-contained, live origination/videoconferencing module, designed for use
on cable and broadband local area network systems. Wherever there is aneed for frequent face-
to-face contact between people from different sites, IRIS provides the solution. Without the
downtime and expense of employee travel.
$9725.00
And, there is no need for exotic operator training. The applications are almost limitless:
· School Districts Telecourses
· Campus Based Institutions
· Medical Facilities Consultation Video- Visiting
· Businesses with Multiple Locations Administration Training
· Government Facilities · Municipal and County Governments
Specifications
RM-1 Module Single tube, color camera Tripod Microphones (4) Weight 52 lbs. Height 13.5" Width 20.0" Depth 12.7"
(16.7" when closed for transportation)
Inputs Video- 1.0v pp NTSC composite/75 ohms Audio-4 microphones, 25-600 ohms
or
3 microphones, 25-600 ohms 1line, switchable 600 ohms/less than 10k ohms RF-broadband RF cable input
Outputs Video-baseband, 1.0v pp NTSC composite/75 ohms Audio-600 ohm, line output
or
RF -modulated 6 MhZ audio/video frequency in sub, low, high, mid bands (channel specified by users) Level -- + 40 dBm V to + 54 dBm V
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 131
JAVELIN ELECTRONICS, INC.
19831 Magellan Dr. P.O. Box 2033 Torrance, CA 90510 (213) 327-7440 Telex 19-4860 JAVELIN TR NC
CCTV CAMERAS
CAMERAS
SPECTAR® SERIES General Purpose Cameras -- All models have 2/3" separate mesh vidicon. 10,000:1 weighted ALC utilizes three state of the art chips, and plug-in type PC boards can be disassembled without soldering. Provides 600 TV lines of resolution, vertical phase built in to all units. Can be top or bottom mounted. Lens not included.
Models: SP1810A 117VAC SP1820A 220VAC SP1840A 24VAC SP1861A 12VDC SP1812A 117VAC SP1822A 220VAC SP1842A 24VAC
60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz
Random Interlace $269.00
Random Interlace
269.00
Random Interlace
283.00
2:1 Interlace ( RS-330) 283.00
External/internal sync 283.00
External/internal sync 315.00
External/internal sync 315.00
Low Light Level Cameras -- All models have aNewvicon® camera tube. 100,000:1 ALC -- with auto iris spot filter lens. Resolution beyond 600 lines. Scene illumination 0.05 fc for
usable picture, 0.5 fc for full video.
Models: SP1910A 117VAC 60 Hz Random Interlace
$710.00
SP1920A 220VAC 50 Hz Random Interlace
710.00
SP1940A 24VAC 60 Hz Random Interlace
710.00
Optional Plug-in Accessories (for all Spector® cameras):
SP10 Camera ID-- Adjustable 00 to 99 identification of camera view on the monitor.
SP20 RF Modulator -- Switchable channel 3or 4output for display on standard television receiver.
SP30 Inserter/Splitter -- Combines views from two ext. sync cameras into asingle monitor.
SP40 Video Line Amplifier-- Amplifies the video signal for extended operating distances.
SP50A Mother Board-- Interfaces all options within the camera. 1per camera required.
SP60 2:1 Sync-- Converts random interlace Spectars to RS- 330 2:1 sync operation.
SP65 2:1 Sync-- Converts random interlace Spectars to CCIR 2:1 sync operation.
LL777/LL779
LL777 AND LL779
Very Low Light Level Cameras ( SIT/ ISIT) -- Extremely high sensitivity and low lag. Scene illumination 3.3 x 10 ° fc
(SIT), 2.7 x10 5 fc ( ISIT) for usable picture, 1.0 x10 fc (SIT), 5.4 x10 5 fc ( ISIT) for full video If / 1.4 lens, 75%
highlight reflectance). Full horizontal and vertical sweep-
loss protection circuits. Provides stable operation with high
resolution.
$7775.00
Control for Zoom/Auto-Iris Lenses: CB1430 -- Rack or Desk Top Controller. CB143OR -- Camera Mounted Control Unit.
MINI- SECURITY SYSTEMS As easy to install as plugging in aTV set. 1. JMS-30 Mini System includes SP1810 camera, D1800
dummy camera, VM-9C monitor, 50 ft. of RG59/U video cable and two JWM-9 camera wall mounts. 2. JMS-41 Mini System includes two SP1810 cameras with
two 16mm lenses, one VM-9C monitor, two 50 ft. RG59 / Uvideo cables, 10 ft. of RG59/ Uvideo cable, two JWM-9 wall mounts and MS-4D manual four position
video switcher with room for expansion.
VC- 132
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
JAVELIN ELECTRONICS,
19831 Magellan Dr. P.O. Box 2033 Torrance, CA 90510 (213) 327-7440 Telex 19-4860 JAVELIN TRNC
INC.
CAMERAS/MONITOR
JE-3040A CCTV SYSTEM CAMERA AND CVM-13 MONITOR
The only solid state ( No Tube) color camera designed specifically for CCTV.
Features
· Many Security and Industrial Applications ·Extremely Compact -- 2.5"W x4.4"H x8.6"D · Uses Standard CCTV Lenses · Requires a Single Adjustment ·300 Lines Horizontal Resolution · S/N Ratio of 46dB ·Weighs just 3.3 lbs.
True-to-life color monitoring is important in many different industries: gaming, medical, processing, chemical, robotics, etc. Not only is it valuable in identifying colors, but it is needed when shadows, lack of
contrast or darkness of tone eliminate black and white details. For example, facial features, even in normal indoor light, may be unidentifiable without the full fidelity of color.
Because the camera has 100% solid state electronics, there is no flare or bloom, no light streaks and no trailing in the picture. Additionally,
there is no image retention.
Only solid state electronics and rugged, industrial-type construction can provide the level of reliability required of a system that must be used constantly.
Both the camera and the monitor are designed to be compatible with most other quality CCTV components. The monitor is also compatible
with many computers and can be used for color graphics as well.
JE -3040A
$ 1565.00
CVM-13 MONITOR Features
·Sharp Focus by In- Line Ultra High- Resolution - 260 Horiz, 300
Vertical Lines -- Color Display Tube ( 13") Incorporating 0.31mm Pitch Matrix ·Excellent Terminals for Personal Computers, Micro- Computers and Office Computers · More than 2,000 Characters in Alphabet. Numerals and Graphics
Can Be Displayed with Seven Bright Colors: Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Cyan, Magenta and White ·Compact Chassis Employing Self- Convergence System. The Chassis Has Enough Space for Incorporating Extra Logic Circuit Boards · Bright Picture with Low Distortion is Ensured Thanks to Employ-
ment of High Performance Deflection Yoke and Transformer- less Power Supply ·Lightweight, 25.6 lbs. High Reliability and High- Performance
CVM-13
$550.00
JE-2062 ( U.S. EIA)/JE-2152 ( CCIR)
SOLID STATE B/W TV CAMERA Features
·All Solid State Chip Sensor · No Sensor Burn
· No Residual Image or Smearing · No Distortion
· Not Influenced by Electromagnetic Fields · Long Life ·Vibration and Shock Resistant · External or Internal RS- 170 2:1 Sync
· High Resolution ·Vertical Camera Positioning Does Not Damage Sensor
· Back Focus Adjustment of Chip
SPECIFICATIONS Signal Format:
Synchronization: Internal External Input Voltage Pulse Width
Lock Range
Model JE -2062 EIA Standard Model JE -2152 CCIR Standard
RS- 1702.1 Sync Horizontal and Vertical Drive Pulses 4V RP 20% Vertical 667-10 µsec ± 2H Horizonta16.35-32 µsec Vertical Driving Pulse: HD/262.5 Horizontal Driving Pulse: 15,734 ± 5Hz
Picture Elements Horizontal Vertical
Image Sensor: Scan Area:
Video Output: Illumination
Minimum: S/N Ratio:
Resolution: Gamma:
Pedestal Level: Input Voltage:
Weight: Dimensions
(External/
Recommended Power Supply:
384x 2 485x2 MOS Solid State Equivalent to 2/3 inch Vidicon Camera IV P- P, 75 onms unbalanced
3fc ( 30 lux) using f / 1.4 lens 43 dB or greater Greater than 450 TV lines 0.45 Adjustable, set at 53.5 MV ( 7.51R E) 12 VDC ( Operates from 11 to 14 VDC) 0.66 lbs. ( 300 gr) less lens 2.2"W x1.88"H x4.53"D (5.6W x4.81-I x11.50 cm)
PS816DC tElA) or PS816DX ( CCIR)
JE- 2062 JE- 2152
$ 1325.00 1325.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 133
JAVELIN ELECTRONICS, INC.
19831 Magellan Dr. P.O. Box 2033 Torrance, CA 90510 (213) 327-7440 Telex 19-4860 JAVELIN TRNC
NIGHT VIEWING DEVICES
NIGHT VIEWING DEVICES General Surveillance Models ( Non- Military) Easy to handle. Interchangeable lens fields. Connects and disconnects to different cameras quickly.
Models 221 and 226-- For single lens reflex ( SLR) photographic, 16mm TV, 16mm and 35mm SLR cameras. Focal plane iris, automatic brightness control, batteries, carrying case and manual.
221-- Most versatile of all NVDs. Mounts on tripod. Can be used with biocular viewer. 3X magnification. 2.9 lbs. ( 1.3 kg).
226-- For long distance viewing. Biocular viewer on swinging door type mount with optional adjacent swinging door to attach camera. Tripod mounting. Standard 135mm f/1.8 telephoto lens. Can also be used with 1000mm ( or greater) lenses. 13.5 lbs. ( 6.14 kg).
Model 325--"Pocketscope". Less than 1 lb. (. 5 kg). Very low distortion and reduced blooming when bright light is in field of view. Standard lens 50mm f/1.4.
10.110 2 11.
Night Vision Goggles Complete hands- free vision. Need no supplemental illumination for normal observation. Small infrared light source for map reading, etc. Separate adjustable viewer for each eye. Can be adapted to helmets. Automatic brightness control. 2.0 to 2.7DC battery. Temperature range of 0° to 125°F (to - 65°Fwith optional arctic adaptor.)
Accessories Accessories for various models are similar. Included are biocular viewers; adaptors for photographic and TV cameras ( relay lenses), " C" mount lenses, and for lenses that will not mate with " C" mount lens; batteries and rifle mounts.
Military Models
Fully militarized. Passive operation, no artificial lighting required. Completely self contained and portable. Undetectable. Waterproof, shock and vibration resistant. Nitrogen- filled lenses, automatic brightness control and bright flash protection. Carrying case included.
Model 229-- For long range direct observation and target location. 5000 meter ( 3 miles) range. 7X magnification. Standard lens 255mm f/1.23. Built-in azimuth and elevation scales. Self-contained tripod 12" above ground level. 37 lbs. ( 16.81 kg). Model 230--Small arms sight. Can be rifle mounted. Meets MIL- STD 512, Procedure 1. 600 meter ( 2000 ft.) range. 3.8X magnification. Standard lens 95mm, 1/1.6, f/1.2. 4.5 lbs. ( 2.05 kg).
226
304
Model 230R1-- Same as model 230 with Reticle Illuminator, providing dark to light reticle adjustment to provide contrast against variations in reticle background illumination. Models 240 and 240R1-- Same as models 230 and 230R1 except for longer range- 1200 meters ( 4000 ft.) for use with crew served weapons. 6.2X magnification. Standard lens 155mrn, T/1.6, f/1.2. 8.8 lbs. ( 4 kg). Model 330--Javelin's second generation small arms, short range weapon sight with light weight 25mm micro-channel Intensifier Unit. Meets MIL- STD 512, Procedure 1. 600 meter ( 2000 ft.) range. 3.8 magnification. Standard lens 95mm, T/1.6, f/1.2. 2.8 lbs. ( 1.27 kg). Model 330R1-- Same as model 330 with Reticle Illuminator. Models 340 and 340R1--Same as models 330 and 330R1 except for longer range- 1200 meter ( 4000 ft.) for use with crew served weapons. 6.2X magnification. Standard lens 155mm, T/1.6, f/1.2. 6.1 lbs. ( 2.77 kg).
VC- 134
labollio arum 11.01.4
230
240
340
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
JAVELIN ELECTRONICS, INC.
19831 Magellan Dr. P.O. Box 2033 Torrance, CA 90510 (213) 327-7440 Telex 19-4860 JAVELIN TR NC
PAN/TILTS Et SCANNERS Proven through years of dependable service. High torque motors for smooth, constant pan motion. Lifetime lubrication.
All pan/tilt units have a pan of 350° and a tilt of ±-90°. Accessories such as cable guards, spot heaters, weather proofing, optional gear head speeds and long distance relay boxes are available.
Pan/Tilts
300 SERIES
Model
V300OPT V300 PT V300-115 PT V330 APT V330 APT- 115 V353 APTV VP355 APTV V360 APT V3800 PT V38OPTX V390 APT
Scanners
Model
Indoor Light Duty 20 lbs
·
·
Outdoor Medium Duty 40 lbs
· · · ·
·
Outdoor Heavy Duty 80 lbs
·
· · ·
Low Voltage
AutoScan
·
· ·
· · ·
·
Indoor
Light Duty
20 lbs.
Outdoor Medium Duty 30 lbs.
Outdoor
Heavy Duty
100 lbs.
Voltage
J106 V3200AP V320024AP V3200LCAP V3200APS V320024APS V3200LCA PS V3210AP V3210LCAP V321024AP V310AP V310LCAP V31024AP
· · · · · · ·
· · ·
· · ·
PAN Et TILTS/ SCANNERS
um4iIl tilt ti
V3200 SERIES
Variable Pan & Tilt Speeds
· ·
Explosion Proof
Price
$ 429.00
952.00
1047.00
1045.00
1109.00
1995.00
1787.00 668.00
2980.00
·
2018.00
1517.00
AutoPan
Variable Speed
·
Price
$116.00 139.00 139.00 139.00 139.00 139.00 139.00 213.00 213.00 213.00 521.00 521.00 545.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 135
JAVELIN ELECTRONICS, INC.
19831 Magellan Dr. P.O. Box 2033 Torrance, CA 90510 (213) 327-7440 Telex 19-4860 JAVELIN TR NC
CONTROLS
CONTROLS Zoom Lens Controls-- Provide operating voltages to Zoom Lenses for zoom, focus and iris functions..
Scanner Controls-- Provide operating voltages to control left, right and auto- scan functions for motorized Scanners.
Pan and Tilt Controls-- Provide operating voltages to pan/ tilt to add variable speed, auto- scan and Vector solving.
Dual Station Controls-- Combination lens and pan/tilt controls in two separate control locations to supply operating voltages to asingle Zoom Lens, Pan/Tilt installation.
Viii PT
our
CB1002F
Multi- Drive Controls-- Combined Zoom Lens and Pan/Tilt control in one unit. Provide operating voltages to any one of six different Pan/Tilt, Zoom Lens locations.
OMNI-ACS--Operates in conjuction with the OMNI-100 Tm controller ( SuperSwitcher) to provide full Pan/Tilt, Zoom, Focus and Iris control plus up to 6 on/off functions at up to 100 separate locations.
Model
Zoom Focus Iris
Auto Iris Speed Extender
Left/ Right
Auto Scan
Up/ Down
Variable Vector
Speed
Solving 24VAC
117VAC
Light Medium Heavy Aux.
Duty Duty
Duty Functions
Lens CB100C CB100ZF CB106AC CB108C CB108AC
e
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
· ·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
· ·
·
·
Scanner V1 30AP
V130-24AP V1 35A P
V135-24AP V131-24AP
V136-24AP
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
e
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
e
·
Pan and Tilt V111PT V113APT V115PTV V117APTV V12OPT V121PTV V123APT V125APTV
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
e·
·
e
·
Multi- Drive V1700C V1701C V1702C V1703C V1730C
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
· ·
·
·
·
·
Duel Station V1600C V1601C V1630C
5
·
·
·
e·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
ModuPulse Multi-Station
V1760CS
V1761CS
·
V1762CS
·
V1763CS
·
· ·
·
·
· ·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
ModuPulse Single- Station
V1770C
·
V1771C
·
V1772C
·
V1773C
·
·
· ·
·
·
· ·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
For 220 -240VAC 50 Hz operation specify by adding suffix X to model number.
VC- 136
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
JAVELIN ELECTRONICS, INC.
19831 Magellan Dr. P.O. Box 2033 Torrance, CA 90510 (213) 327-7440 Telex 19-4860 JAVELIN TR NC
DISCREET SURVEILLANCE SYSTEMS Where overt camera systems would be undesirable, Javelin JB16 Series has camera assemblies enclosed in completely mirrored spherical capsules. Clear picture in lighting conditions to aminimum of 1fc scene illumination. Band transmission 5X greater than conventional one-way mirror.
Available for fixed camera position, Auto-Scan, Pan and Tilt and Pan/Tilt with Motorized Zoom Lens.
HOUSINGS Et ENCLOSURES
IN DOOR/OUTDOOR ENCLOSURES From a simple tamper- proof box to an explosion-proof enclosure, there is no requirement that can't be met. Temperatures from - 110° to +750°F. Dust- proof. Pressurized/Non-Pressurized Explosion Proof.
JEH24
A complete line of Housing Accessories-- Heater and thermostat assemblies, blower and thermostat assemblies, insul-
ation. Whatever requirements you demand, Javelin can supply.
JBA16
OUTDOOR SYSTEM ENCLOSURES Both camera and Pan/Tilt or Scanner are enclosed in aclear dome. Provides an operational environment for inexpensive indoor Pan/Tilts or Scanners in outdoor locations. Wind, snow and ice loads are eliminated along with deterioration by weathering.
V8660H
CD29
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
V8000H
VC- 137
JAVELIN ELECTRONICS, INC.
19831 Magellan Dr. P.O. Box 2033 Torrance, CA 90510 (213) 327-7440 Telex 19-4860 JAVELIN TRNC
MOUNTS
Housing Mounts-Wall, ceiling or pedestal models with load limits up to 100 lbs. and with tilt range of 90° and rotation range of 360°.Extensions from 8.5" to 24".
Monitor Mounts-Wall and ceiling models with load limits up to 150 lbs., tilt ranges to 90° and rotation ranges to 360°.Extensions to 22".
SIGNMAOLUNETQSU/IVPIMDEENOT
IP
JPM6
JPM-9
Scanners/Pan and Tilt Mounts-Wall, ceiling or pedestal models with load limits up to 250 lbs.
Camera Mounts - Wall, ceiling or pedestal models with load limits up to 100 Ibs. Tilt range of 90° and rotation range of 360°. Extensions to 17". Javelin camera mounts are recommended for all cameras except SIT/ISIT.
VIDEO SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
Video Motion Detector
Models J3 14MD 117VAC
60 Hz
J314MDX 220-240VAC 50 Hz ( CCIR)
From 2% to almost 100% of screen may be sensitized to
discern movement within or into and out of adjustable
window positionable on screen. When intrusion detected,
provides audio/visual notice and outgoing closures to trigger
other devices. Reads video streaking, repetitive light
changes, noise and power fluctuations to eliminate false
alarms while maintaining sensitivity. Autornitic or manual
reset. Works with black and white or color systems.
RF Modulator
JR F- 10 (video only)- Converts any video signal to RF signals tunable over TV channels 2through 6.
JR F-15 ( NEW)-Audio/Video-Accepts line- level or low-level audio with black and white or color video. Set for standard TV signals for channels 3 and 4. Built-in gain control. Adjustable audio and video and RF levels.
J31 4MD Video Motion Detector JRF1 5 RF Modulator
VC-138
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
3- TUBE CAMERA BY- 110U
JVC
FEATURES
· Extremely Compact & Lightweight -- 8.2 lbs. with Lens and 1" Viewfinder
· Low Power Consumption- 15.0 watts with 1" Viewfinder
· F/1.4 Prism Optical System . 3Newly Designed 1/2" Hi-Voltage
Saticon Tubes · Hi- Resolution of 600 Lines · Excellent Signal-to-Noise Ratio of
54dB · Genlock Input
(through AC power connector) · Auto- Shift Registration · Auto White/Black Balance · Auto Beam Control (ABC) · Auto Black Level Circuit ( ABL) · Servo Iris Control Circuit with Auto Iris
Close · Color Bar Circuit · · 6dB/ 12dB Gain Boost For Low Light · Built- In Color Temperature Filter Wheel · " Hot Shoe" Viewfinder, Lens and
Optional Microphone . Extended Life Memory Backup Battery
BY- 110U
BY- 110U COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
Extremely Compact, Extremely Light. Computer aided design and manufacturing techniques have made possible drastic reductions in size and weight without reducing performance and features. Strength and protection are provided by an aluminum diecast body. Total weight of the camera including lens and 1" viewfinder is only 8.2 lbs. (3.7 kg).
Low Power Consumption. Power consumption is a low 15.0 watts when the 1" viewfinder is used. When a fullycharged DC-C1 1U battery pack is used, the camera will operate for approximately 60 minutes at normal temperatures ( about 77°F). The camera may be powered from a range of 10.5 to 15 DC volts. The BY- 110U has a quick warm-up time and is stabilized sufficiently for normal use about 40 seconds after switching the power on. (Perfect stabilization will require 10 minutes or more.)
Excellent Picture Quality. Three newly designed 1/2" Saticon ( SM) tubes assure accurate color reproduction and 600 lines of horizontal resolution. The BY- 110U
has a superb signal-to-noise ratio of 54dB. The new 1/2" tubes ( H9392) were chosen because of their excellent reproduction quality and compact size. A fast f/1.4 glass prism assures superb resolution and accurate color separation.
Wide Range Of Automatic Functions
Auto Shift Registration ( auto centering). Provides automatic adjustment of vertical and horontal alignment ( shit) of blue and red channels. Adjustment is accomplished by simply flipping a switch on the front panel. The circuit is digital, and registration data is stored in the camera's memory (battery back-up provided).
Auto White Balance Circuit..white color balance can be adjusted automatically by flipping a switch, or the camera can be operated in the "pre-set" position (3200K). White balance data is stored in the camera's memory circuit.
Auto Black Balance Circuit. Flipping a switch automatically closes the iris and adjusts pedestal balance of the individual channels.
Auto Beam Control Circuit. Reduces comet tails in most cases.
Auto Black Level Circuit. The ABL circuit offers sharp black images even when shooting outdoors under bright conditions.
Auto ( Servo) Iris Circuit. The iris responds quickly to objects with varied contrast and slowly for those with little contrast for natural automatic iris operation. A weighting detection circuit controls the video signal level of the upper part of the screen to optimize the over-all brightness when the sky is very bright, etc. To protect the pickup tubes, the iris closes automatically when the Operate switch is off, or when the color bar switch is on.
Extended Life Back-Up Battery. To retain the memory of the digital auto circuits, a back-up battery is employed This allows the camera to retain its white balance, black balance, and auto-shift settings even when the power is turned off. A new long-life battery is utilized for this function and has a rated life of approximately 4years.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VC- 139
JVC
Excellent Operability. Good human engineering went into the placement of switches and other camera controls. Switches are "touch coded" and some are protected from accidental misoperation. The auto centering and auto white/black controls are located on the front panel behind a small door. A diopter is provided in the 1" electronic viewfinder for people who wear eyeglasses. An optional adjustable chest rest is available which improves stability and comfort. The chest rest, model KA111, is similar to the one provided with the KY-210U cameras.
"Hot Shoe" Connection System. To eliminate problems with cables and connectors, the camera head and its portable accessories are designed to connect together without the use of cables. Direct connection is provided for: 10:1 zoom lens; 1" electronic viewfinder; M-K5OU microphone; DC-C1 1U NiCad battery pack. When in operation, the only exposed cable is the VCR cable. This feature not only solves the usual problems associated with cables, it greatly enhances the appearance of the camera, giving it a very " solid" look.
Genlock Circuit. The BY- 110U has built-in genlock facilities for locking up to other cameras in multi-camera operations. Instead of the usual genlock connector on the camera, to save space the genlock input and external power inputs are provided through the AA-C1 1U AC adaptor. Connection between the camera and AC adaptor is provided by the VCR cable (VC-511BU-2). The BY110U will lock to any stable composite video signal or black burst ( B.B.).
Built-in Color Bars. The BY- 110U has a built-in full field color bar generator. Color bars are useful for checking and making adjustments to color monitors and they provide a consistent reference for checking the performance of the videocassette recorder.
Gain Boost For Low Light. The BY- 110U has a + 6dB and 12dB gain booster for operation in low light conditions. Also provided is a level-depend circuit which adjusts the starting point of
3- TUBE CAMERA BY- 110U
enhancement, according to the light level. Together, these circuits enable maximum low light performance with a minimum of noise in the picture. The minimum illumination required is 65 lux (70% video level) with + 12dB of gain. Even at this light level, the picture is quiet, with well defined images and natural colors.
Wide Choice Of Lens Options. The BY110 is available in a variety of configurations and offers a wide choice of lens options. For ENG/EFP applications, the 10:1 HZ- 110U ( f/1.4, 7-70mm) and 16:1 HZ- 116U ( f/1.4, 7-112mm) are recommended.
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
Suggested List Price
BY-Il OUCH 3-Tube Camera Head $3590.00
BY-110UL 10A 3-Tube ENG Package with 101 Lens
4280.00
BY-11OUL16A 3-Tube ENG Package
with 161 Lens
4995.00
AA-C1 1U
AC Adaptor/Battery Charger
250.00
DC-C11U
22AH Battery Pack
130.00
HZ-FM I1U
Manual Focus Control for BY-110UP
265.00
HZ-ZS11U
Servo Zoom Control for BY-110UP
285.00
HZ-110MDPU Motorized 101 Zoom Lens
and Remote
1430.00
HZ-M110U HZ- 110U
Microscope Adaptor
101 ( f/1 4. 7-70r-nm) Servo Zoom Lens
1450.00 680.00
HZ- 116U
161 ( f/1 4, 7-112mm) Servo Zoom Lens
1480.00
HZ-CA11U
C- Mount Lens Adaptor
675.00
HZ-NK11U
Nikon Adaptor
675.00
HZ-TCL11U 1.5X Teleconversion Lens ..
350.00
HZ-WCL11U Wide Angle
Conversion Lens
350.00
KA-110U
Quick Release Tripod Base
100.00
KA-111U
Adjustable Chest Rest
65.00
KA-D5OU
Adaptor for DC-05OU 3.5AH Battery
135.00
KA-130
Mounting Frame for BR- 1600U VHS Deck
120.00
KA-M5OU
Pistol Handgrip for M-K5OU
160.00
M-K5OU
.1-lot Shoe- Microphone
235.00
RS-.. IOU
Remote Control Unit ( RCU)
695.00
1E-1000
Telecine Attachment
480.00
VF-400
4" Studio Viewfinder for BY- 110U
495.00
VC-515U
65 Camera to RCU Cable
335.00
VC-516U
65' Extension Coble for VC- 515U
385.00
VC-511BU-2 14p - 10p Camera to VCR/
2M AC Adaptor Cable
115.00
VC-512BU
14p- 14p VCR Cable
145.00
SPECIFICATIONS:
COLOR VIDEO CAMERA BY-110UCH
Optical System: f/1.4 three-tube RGB prism system
Focusing/Deflection System: Electrostatic focus/electromagnetic deflection
Pickup Tubes: 1/2" Saticon" ( x3)
Encoder: NTSC type ( R-Y, B-Y)
Synchronizing System: Internal: Built-in SSG External: Composite video or black
burst
Lens Mount: Special mount
Sensitivity: f/2.8 at 2000 lux ( 186 fc)
Minimum Illumination: f/1.4, 65 lux ( 6fc)
S/N: 54dB
Horizontal Resolution: 600 lines ( G ch center)
Registration: Zone 1: Within 0.1% ( 80% of picture ht.) Zone 2: Within 0.4% ( picture width) Zone 3: Within 0.8% ( outside Zone 2)
Input Signals: Return video signal: VBS, 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms Genlock Signal: Composite video ( VBS. 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms) or black burst ( B.B., 0.43V p- p, 75 ohms) Microphone: -60dBm, 600 ohms unbal.
Output Signals: Composite Video Signal: 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms Test Signal: R, G, B, R-G, B-G, ENC Audio Signal: -20dB unbalanced Audio Monitor Signal: From video recorder used Video Recorder Control Signal: Contact or 4V supply ( switchable)
Contour Correction: Horizontal: Dual-edged Vertical: 1H, single-edged
Optical Filters: Closed, 3200K, 5600K, 5600K + 25% ND
Gain Boost: OdB, + 6dB, + 12dB
Power Requirement: +12V DC ( 10.5 to 15V), 1.05 A ( camera head only)
Ambient Temperature: -5 to + 45°C ( 23 to 113°F)
Weight: 5.3 lbs. ( 2.4kg)
Dimensions: 4-1/8"W x10-1/16"H x10-7/8"D (104.5 x254.5 x276 mm)
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VC- 140
JVC
ACCESSORIES BY110U
RS- 110U Remote Control Unit For BY110U. Despite its surprisingly low price,
the RS- 110U offers afull range of features and capabilities. Using only one standard rack space ( 1-3/4"), the RS-
110U may be used to power and control many of the functions of the BY-110UP. In
addition, the RS- 110U provides individual red, green, and blue channel outputs from the camera.
HZ-FM11U, HZ-FM12U Manual Focus Control. Rear focus and zoom controls are essential for most studio operations.
The HZ-FM11U (for HZ- 110 lens) and HZ: FM12U (for HZ- 116 lens) are manual
focus units which attach to the lens and to the tripod.
HZ-WCL11U Wide Angle Converter For BY- 110U. This adaptor screws onto the front of the BY- 110U lens to decrease the focal length by 0.7 times
HZ-NK11U Nikon Lens Adaptor For BY110U. This adaptor was designed to enable a wide variety of photographic lenses to be used with the BY- 110U. Using a standard Nikon mount, literally hundreds of special effects lenses become available. Extreme wide angle and extreme close-up lenses are the most popular of this type.
HZ-ZS11U, HZ-ZS12U Servo Focus Control. The HZ-ZS11U ( for HZ- 110U lens) and HZZS12U ( for HZ- 116 lens) are electronic
zoom units which plug into the lens and attach to the tripod. Use with
HZ-FM11U/HZ-FM12U, VF-400 and RS110U to make a complete studio package.
HZ-CA11U C- Mount Adaptor For BY- 110U. Because the BY- 110U uses 1/2" pick-up tubes and a prism optical system, conventional lenses would not normally be able to be used on it. For this reason, the HZ-CA11U was designed. Actually a lens itself, this adaptor enables most any standard C-Mount lens to be used on the BY- 110U.
HZ-TCL11U Teleconversion Lens For BY110U. This adaptor screws onto the front of the BY- 110U lens to increase the focal length by 1.5 times.
TE-1000 Telecine Attachment. The TE1000 Telecine Attachment can easily be attached on the front of the lens of the KY-210 or BY- 110 for the transfer of film images onto videotape. The amount of light is adjusted by the automatic iris of
the lens and, as it is mounted on the front of the lens, it takes up only a small space and makes it easy to use the camera for both normal shooting and telecine operations. It can be used with a wide range of projectors using 8mm, 16mm and 35mm film.
HZ-M110 Microscope Attachment. The HZ-M110 Microscope Attachment is designed exclusively to use the BY- 110 in combination with a microscope made by Olympus, Nikon, etc. for applications such as analysis, research, education, process control and inspection.
HZ-110MDPU 10X Motorized Zoom Lens & Remote Control Unit. The HZ-110MDPU 10X Motorized Zoom Lens was developed specially for the BY- 110. Included with it is a Remote Control Unit; zooming, fusing and iris operation can be controlled from a distance of up to 600m ( 1970 ft). The HZ-110MD is ideal for surveillance, teleconferences, graphics displays, etc.
VF-400U 4" Viewfinder. A large-screen viewfinder is desirable for studio and EFP applications. The VF-400U incorporates a high resolution CRT ( more than 500 TV lines), pan-tilt mechanism, and tally lamps.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407
(201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VC- 141
3- TUBE CAMERA KY-210U
FEATURES
· Outstanding Picture Quality: 650 Lines Resolution, 57dB S/N
· Excellent Low Light Performance: 40 Lux ( 3.8 fc) at · 18dB
· Compact and Lightweight Diecast Construction
· High Quality Prism Optical System · Full RS- 170A SSG with Color Framing
Output · 2H Vertical Enhancement with Level
Depend Circuit · Split-Field Color Bars ( RS- 189A
Standard) · Built-in Genlock Circuit · " Hot Shoe" Adjustable Viewfinder with
Diopter · Numerous Auto Circuits and
Functions · Full Complement of Studio Options
JVC
KY- 210U COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
Excellent Picture Quality. Utilizing three H4101 Saticon tubes ( the same tubes used in the popular KY- 1900U cameras), JVC engineers have incorporated a high quality f/1.4 prism beam splitter to achieve a high resolution of 6501V lines (G channel, center).
Picture sharpness is further improved through the use of a 2H vertical enhancement circuit. As with any enhancement circuit, a certain amount of noise is also enhanced. To eliminate this under low light conditions, a level depend circuit is incorporated which controls the enhancement, so that the pictures produced are sharp and well defined, yet quiet even under gain boost situations. At + 18dB boost, the minimum illumination required is only 40 lux ( 3.8 fc) using the standard lens, which makes the KY-210U one of the most sensitive three tube cameras available today.
To provide the most natural color reproduction possible, a linear matrix masking circuit is employed. Briefly, what it does is adjust the pickup characteristics of the camera to be identical to the human eye, compensating for the negative energy portion of the ideal color characteristics.
(Without this circuit the camera cannot "perceive" the color picture the way the human eye does). Camera performance in bright light is just as important as in low light, and the KY210U contains several circuits which achieve performance not equalled by other cameras in its class.
With the newly designed processing circuitry, the slope circuit compresses 300% video level to 110% so that the gradation in highlight sections is greatly improved.
An automatic black level (ABL) circuit always offers a sharp, black image even when shooting outside under bright lighting conditions.
A NAM-type servo iris circuit including a weighted detection circuit improves pictures taken outdoors in bright sunlight by placing greater emphasis on the illumination of the subject in the lower part of the frame.
Compact, Light & Rugged Construction. The KY-210U incorporates a diecast aluminum body. Extensive use is made of miniaturized components, and the entire camera head weighs only 7.8 lbs. (3.5kg). Controls are logically placed, and protected from damge and mis-operation.
RS- 170A Color Framing. The sync signal generator ( SSG) in the KY-210U conforms to RS- 170A specification. A color framing pulse, required in some editing systems, is output through the VCR connector. This assures the widest range of compatibility today, and with postproduction systems in the future.
Genlock Circuit. To genlock the KY-210U, simply plug-in a stable composite video signal to the genlock input on the camera. The camera will then be locked to the external source. To control the phase ( color shift) of the camera, an adjustment is provided inside the camera to match it with the external
source.
Split Field Color Bars. The KY-210U has a built-in split field color bar generator, meeting the RS- 189A standard. Color bars are useful for checking and making adjustments to color monitors and provide a consistent reference for checking the performance of the videocassette recorder. The advantages of split field bars (as opposed to full field) are as follows: Both 75% white and 100% white are displayed, making it easier to check these levels; The I & Q signals of the encoder are provided and easily displayed on the vectorscope; Virtually all broadcast and high-end production systems use the split field bars.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VC- 142
JVC
3- TUBE CAMERA KY-210U
Newly Designed 1.5" Electronic Viewfinder. The new VF-215U is unique in that it combines the adjustability of the cable-connect type of viewfinder, with the advantages of the direct connect (Hot Shoe) system. The VF- 215U connects directly to the KY- 210U camera head without cables, thus eliminating cable related problems ( such as RF interference, bad connections, etc.) It is also unique in that it is adjustable both horizontally and vertically and has both a flip- up eyepiece and a diopter. The diopter allows the eyepiece to be adjusted for people who wear eyeglasses.
Indications provided by the viewfinder are: Front tally lamp; Video recorder/ camera battery warning; High sensitivity indication; Tape run/tape end warning; Peaking ( with on/off switch).
Wide Range Of Automatic Functions Auto-Shift Registration (Auto Centering). Provides automatic adjustment of vertical and horizontal alignment ( shift) of blue and red channels. Adjustment is accomplished by simply flipping a switch on the front panel. The circuit is digital, and registration data is stored in the camera's memory ( battery back-up provided).
Auto White Balance Circuit. White color balance can be adjusted automatically by flipping a switch, or the camera can be operated in the " preset' position (3200K). White balance data is stored in the camera's memory circuit.
Auto black balance circuit. Flipping a switch automatically closes the iris and adjusts pedestal balance of the individual channels.
Auto Beam Control Circuit...reduces or eliminates comet tails in most cases.
Auto black level circuit. The ABL circuit offers sharp black images even when shooting outdoors under bright conditions.
Auto (Servo) Iris Circuit. The iris responds quickly to objects with varied contrast and slowly for those with little contrast for natural automatic iris operation. The weighting detection circuit compresses the video signal level of the upper screen for smooth iris operation, with the NAM system ( which controls the iris by separate R, G, and Bsignals) guaranteeing the correct response. The iris level can be switched to over ( 0.5/fstop open) the normal setting.
To protect the pickup tubes, the iris closes automatically when the Operate switch is off, or when the color bar switch is on.
Dimensions (with VF- 215U and HZ- 510U)
468 ( 18-7/16")
197 (7-13/16")
294 ( 11-5/8")
314.5 ( 12- 7/16")--·--i
KY-210UPLystem Components
Camera Head 15- Viewfinder 021 Battery Bracket Carrying Case Microphone Holder
Suggested List Price
$6150.00
SPECIFICATIONS:
COLOR VIDEO CAMERA KY-210U
Optical System: f/1.4 three-tube RGB prism system
Focusing/Deflection System: Electrostatic focus/electromagnetic deflection Pickup Tubes: 2/3" Sorticon" (x3) ( H4101) Encoder: NTSC ( IQ encoder)
Synchronizing System: Internal: Built-in SSG conforming to RS- 170A with color framing pulse output External: Composite video or black
bure Lens Mount: Bayonet Sensitivity: f/4,0 at 2000 lux ( 186 fc) Minimum Illumination: f/1.6, 40 lux ( 3.8 fc) (1-18dB switch On)
S/N: 57dB ( Contour correction Off, Gamma 1, Bandwidth 4.2MHz, matrix off, I/Q off)
Horizontal Resolution: 650 lines ( G ch center)
Registration: Zone 1: Within 0.1% ( circle 80% of picture ht.) Zone 2: Within 0.2% ( circle of picture width) Zone 3: Within 0.4% ( area outside Zone 2)
Input Signals: Return video signal: V13S, 1.0V p-p, 75 ohms Genlock Signal: Composite video (VBS,
1.0V p-p, 75 ohms) or black burst (Ba,
0.43V p-p, 75 ohms) Microphone: -52dBm, 600 ohms unbal.
Output Signals: Composite Video Signal: 1.0V p-p, 75 ohms ()C2 from BNC and 14p connector) Test Signal: R, G, B, -- G, ENC
Audio Signal: -52dBm, 6C0 ohms unbalanced 20dBs, unbalanced ( switchable) Audio Monitor Signal: 8ohms, -20dB
VCR control signal: Contact or 4V supply ( switchable)
Contour Correction: Horizontal: Dual-edged Vertical: 2H ( with comb filter) Color Bar Generator: Split bar
Optical Fitters: Closed, 3200K 5600K 5600K Gain Boost: OdB, · 9dB, 18dB
25% ND
Power Requirement: -12V DC(10.5 to 1N), 1.45A
Ambient Temperature: -20 to - 45°C (-4to 113°F) Weight: 7.8 lbs. ( 3.5kg)
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407
(201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VC- 143
ACCESSORIES KY-210U
JVC
FEATURES
· Compact & Lightweight · Remote Control Up To 320m ( 1,050 ft.)
· Built-In Genlock Facility · Serial Data Command System
· Various Output Systems · Comprehensive Functions for
Versatility · Camera Adaptor · Balanced Audio Line
(to & from camera) · Intercom Function
RS-500U FRONT PANEL
REAR PANEL
RS-500U REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
RS-500U Remote Control Unit. So the KY210U color video camera can be used for a wider range of applications both in the studio and on location, we are pleased to offer a remote control unit and a 5.5" viewfinder together with camera cables and lens control units.
Compact & Lightweight. The RS-500U is easy to carry outdoors and takes up so little space that two can be mounted in one EIA rack ( using an optional rack mount adaptor UC-1003U), making it ideal for use in small video vans.
Remote Control Up To 320m ( 1,050 ft.). The cable connecting the camera and the remote control unit can be extended up to 320m ( 1,050 ff.). Even at such a long distance, the RS-500U is still able to supply power to the camera with no other power supply being necessary.
Built-In Genlock Facility. External genlocking is possible with either composite video or black burst signal. SC phase and H phase are adjustable from the front panel of the unit.
Serial Data Command System. With the aid of a microprocessor and 14conductor cable, avariety of remote control operations can be performed.
Various Output Systems. The output terminals accept the connection of composite video signals. RGB signals, test signals, waveform monitoring signals and audio signals.
Comprehensive Functions For Versatility. Power On/Off; Manual iris control; Ws mode selection ( Auto/Manual); Master black level control; R/B black level controls; Auto black balance; Auto white balance; Preset white balance; R/B gain controls; Auto-shift registration; Manualshift registration controls; Sensitivity selection; Color bar On/Off; Contour correction On/Off; SC phase control; H phase control; Cable length compensation; Remote control function lock switch; Intercom voiume control; Call switch
Camera Adaptor. Included with the RS500U is acamera adaptor which mounts on the rear of the camera, and provides connections for camera cable and intercom headset.
SPECIFICATIONS Remote Control Unit RS-500U
Output Signals: Composite Video Signals: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, x2 RGB Signals: 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms, x1each
Test Video Signals: ENC, R, G, B. B-G, R-G, SEQ, AUX
Audio Signal: -20dBm, 600 ohm balanced Intercom Signal: 2-wire system or 4-wire system, line - 10dBm, 600 ohm balanced
Input Signals: Genlock Signal: VBS 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohm (loop-thru output) or BB 0.43 Vp-p, 75 ohms ( loop-through output)
AUX 9gnal: VBS or VS, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, (loop-thru output)
AUX Audio Signal: - 10dB, 10k ohms unbalanced
Intercom Signal: 2-wire system or 4-wire system, line -20dElm, 600 ohm balanced
Tally Signal: Make-contact or power suppty ( 5to 24 V DC, or 6V AC)
Power Requirement: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption: 76W ( incl. camera w/5.5" VF) 24W RS500U only
Weight ( Main Unit) 4.8 kg ( 10.6 lbs.)
Weight (Camera Adaptor): 1.1 kg ( 2.5 lbs.)
Ambient Temperature: -10 to + 45C (+ 14 to 113F)
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VC- 144
JVC
ACCESSORIES KY210U
VF-550U 5.5" Viewfinder. A large-screen viewfinder for studio and EFP applications, incorporating a highresolution CRT. Pan and tilt mechanisms are provided so that the position can be set according to the scene being shot and for the ease of the camera operator.
HZ-516 16X Power Zoom Lens. The HZ516 is a newly developed power zoom lens for use with the KY series cameras. A high zoom range of 16:1 ( 9.5 to 152mm) and max. aperture of f/1.8 will capture any object, precisely and sharply.
HZ-CA23U C- Mount Adaptor For KY Series Cameras. This adaptor fits the bayonet mount of the 3-tube prism cameras ( KY series) and permits use of standard C- Mount lenses.
KA-3Component Adaptor. The KA-3 Component Adaptor is to be used when component signals (Y/R-Y/B-Y or Y/I/Q signals) are required to be output from a KY series color video camera.
· Easy Attachment Onto the Rear of Camera Head
· DC-050 Mount Shoe and 4- Pin (Cannon) Power Supply Connector Provided
· Output Selector Switch for Y/R-Y/B-Y Signals or Y/I/Q Signals
HZ-E512U 12:1 Servo Zoom Lens W/Extender. 9-108mm Fujinon lens. Motorized zoom and iris. Bayonet mount (B type). With 2x extender built-in.
RS-L501 Local Remote Control. The RSL501 Local Remote Control is used for the operation of the RS-500 Remote Control Unit so that the required images can be created while watching the picture. Up to four RS-L501 units can be mounted in the optional UC-P1004 Unit Case which fits in a standard EIA rack. · Single-Knob Control of Iris, Master
Black Level and Preview Switching (make-contact supply) · Control Select Switch · New " Iris Preset Mode" which Enables Fine Adjustment of Preset Iris Value By Up To ±-2f-stops · On-Air/Tally Indicator
HZ-NK23U Nikon Lens Adaptor For KY Series Cameras. This adaptor fits the bayonet mount of the 3-tube prism cameras ( KY series) and permits use of 35mm Nikon camera lenses.
MK-50U " Hot Shoe" Microphone Mounts to side of camera without cable. Power is provided by the camera. Uni -directional. Windscreen. For handheld use, use KA-M50. Can also be used with BY- 110U.
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
Suggested
AA-05OU
List Price
Ac Power Adaptor-- can be
used as an AC power adaptor
for the cornera as well as a
battery charger for the DC-05OU
$ 350.00
B-20 C-20 CB- 20005 DC-05OU
HZ- 510U HZ-E512U HZ-516U HZ-FMI 2U
Rechargeable NiCad Battery :4AH)
Charger for B-20 Battery .
435.00 71.00
Soft Carrying Case for KV Series Cameras
160.00
Battery Pack -- can be attached to the rear of the cornera
285.00
10,1 Servo Zoom Lens (10-100mm)
12x Zoom Lens
(w/2x Extender)
161 Servo Zoom Lens
,or et Cameras
Focus Manual Unit for 121 Lenses
960.00 2260.00 1480.00
370.00
HZ-Z51 2U
Zoom Servo Unit for 12 .1Lenses
415.00
KA-3 M-K5OU
Component VCR Adaptor for KY Carneros
$950.00
Microphone -- this Super-
Directional Microphone snaps directly onto the Camera; Power is supplied from the Cornera Head
235.00
RS- 500U
Remote Control Unit ..
2000.00
UC-1003U VC- 544U
Pockmount Adaptor -- a Blank Panel is provided as standard
Camera Cable ( 20m/65') . ·
130.00 465.00
VC- 545U
Camera Extension Cable (50m/160')
925.00
VC-586U
16' Extension Cable for AA-C19U,
141.50
VF- 215U
1.5" Viewfinder . ·
450.00
VF-550U
55- Viewfinder
665.00
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407
(201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VC- 145
COLOR CAMERA GX-S700U
FEATURES
· Excellent Picture Quality: 360 Line Resolution, 48dB S/N
· Ultra-Low- light Performance: 30 Lux (2.8 fc) ( · 12dB)
· C- Mount 10X Variable-Speed Servo Zoom Lens
· 2Line Enhancement Circuit · Built- In Genlock Circuit · Built- In Color Bar Generator · Built- In Character Generator with
Time/Date Function · Auto Fade In/Out Circuit · Computerized On- Screen Read-Out
Warning System in VF · Stereo Microphone Provided · Snap-On Battery Power System · Simple Operation with Variety of
Automatic Functions
JVC
GX-S700U COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
Excellent Picture Quality. A newlydeveloped 2/3" high-band Saticon tube is employed. Also, a new multiplex crystal filter is installed between the lens and the pickup tube, which minimizes color beat interference, giving clear color pictures. Horizontal resolution of 360 lines is achieved ( excellent for a one-tube camera) with a signal to noise ratio of 48dB. Picture sharpness is further improved by the use of a 2H vertical enhancer circuit, normally found on more expensive three-tube cameras. A switch for the enhancement circuit (contour on-off) is conveniently located for the camera operator. For operation in low lighting conditions, a + 6dB/ + 12dB gain booster is provided. Even under extreme low light, the GX-S700U produces a clear picture with good color reproduction. Lag and comettailing are kept to a minimum through the use of an ABC ( Automatic beam control) circuit and LED bias lighting.
10:1 Zoom Lens. A 10:1 Zoom Lens is included on the camera. The motorized zoom speed is variable, dependent on the amount of pressure applied to the zoom rocker arm. The f/1.8 lens has a zoom range of 10.5mm to 105mm, making it ideal for telephoto operation. In addition, a macro feature is included,
which permits extreme close-ups. Also built into the lens is an automatic iris function which can be switched for manual operation. An iris lock ( AL) is included, which locks the iris at the current setting. This is useful when momentary Ighting fluctuations or strong back lighting conditions occur. The lens has a built-in color temperature conversion fine( to change from indoor (3200K) to outdoor ( 5100K) temperature settings. The GX-S700U is designed to accept awide variety of C- mount lenses without modification.
Genlock. Genlock is very simply a method of synchronizing or locking-up the camera's internal circuitry to an external video signal. Once a camera is "genlockeci", its output can be switched or mixed with the other signal ( or any other signal that is locked to the same source) without any distortion or breakup In the picture. This is of course provided that the synchronizing signd is from a stable source -- like another camera, not aVCR. Without genlock, switching the signal to another signal would create terrible distortion at the transition, and mixing the signals (dissolves, special effects) would be impossible. To genlock the GX-S700U,
simply plug-in a stable composite video signal to the genlock input on the camera. The camera will then be locked to the external source. To control the pnase ( color shift) of the camera, an adjustment is provided on the camera to match it with the external source.
Built-In Color Bars. The GX-S700U has a built-in full field color bar generator. Color bars are useful for checking and making adjustments to color monitors and they provide a consistent reference for checking the performance of the videocassette recorder. When the color bars are activated, the lens iris is automatically closed, if it is in the Auto mode.
1.5" Electronic Viewfinder w/Computerized Warning System. A black and white 1.5" ( diagonal) electronic viewfinder is provided with the GX-S700U. It utilizes an advanced warning/status system which displays, in alphanumeric characters, various indications on the screen. These include iris, pause, tape run, battery alarm, white balance, filter setting, gain switch, etc. This system makes the camera " user friendly" and nearly impossible to make
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division. 41 Slater Drive Elmwood Park. NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VC- 146
JVC
COLOR CAMERA GX-S700U
an error. This feature is especially important for beginners, and those unknowledgeable about video camera operations.
Built-In Character Generator whop Time/Date. A 12-key character generator with 8- hour memory backup time enables titles, dates, and lap time to be recorded over the scene being shot. This feature is especially beneficial when the camera is used for documentation.
Fade-ln, Fade-Out. This feature, normally found on consumer type cameras, was included because it gives the user better scene transitions, when no postproduction equipment is used. Fades can be to and from black, white, or color ( R, G, or B). When used in conjunction with the built-in character generator, effective titles can be produced.
Modular Power System. One very distinctive -- and very important -- feature of the GX-S700U is its modular power system. As it is packaged, the camera can be powered from the VCR's battery using the standard VCR cable (provided). Power consumption is 9.2 watts ( peak at 12V DC). ( Under normal operation, power consumption will be around 8.0 watts.) However, it is the practice of most professionals to power the camera from its own, separate battery. This provides longer operation time, and extends the life of the VCR battery. The GX-S700U can be used with either the NB-P3U ( 0.7 Ah) or the NB-P4U (1.4 Ah) NiCad battery packs which snap directly onto the rear of the camera. This is the same modular power system used with the HR-C3U compact
VHS recorder. The optional charger for the system, the BB-P3U, can be powered from any AC power source in the world, and is designed to quick-charge either battery. The NB-P3U and NB-P4U batteries are optional and are not included in the basic camera package. For AC operation, the optional AC-P3U snap-on AC adaptor can be used, or if a separate adaptor is desired, the AC-04121J can be connected via the VCR cable.
Stereo Microphone Included. Included with the GX-S700U is a plug-in stereo microphone. The single microphone has two pickup elements with slightly different directional characteristics ( the same as you have two ears). The two audio signals are fed through the VCR cable to the individual left and right channels of astereo portable VCR ( like the JVC BR-6200U). If the VCR only has one audio channel, then the two channels may be mixed by flipping the "stereo-mono" switch to the Mono position.
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
Suggested List Price
GX-S700U AC-C412U AC-P3U AP-P3U
BB-P3U
BKT-3U
CB- 100S NB-P3U NB-P4U
VC-235-10U
Color Cornera
Cornera AC Adaptor Snap-On AC Adaptor Snap-On Car Battery Cord
Battery Charger for NB-P3U/NB-P4U Battery Kit (BB-P3U, NB-P4U)
Soft Carrying Case 7Ah NiCad Battery Pack . 1.2 Ah NiCad Battery Pack 33 Cornera Ext Cable (10p - 10p)
$1900.00 65.00 50.00
18.00
93.00
123.00 125.00 30.00
46.00
45.00
Unit: mm (in.)
SPECIFICATIONS
Pickup Tub* 2/3" Static- magnetic Saticon, high resolution type
Color System: Frequency separation color system 5MHz chrominance carrier frequency
Scanning System: 30 frames, 525 lines, 2:1 interlaced
Video Output 1Vp-p, 75 ohms, NTSC
Horizontal Resolution: Better than 360"TV lines
Video Signal to Noise Ratio: Better than 48dB ( contour off)
Minimum Illumination: 30 lux with +12dB gain
Audio Output: CH- 1and CH-2, -20dB, 1K ohm
External Microphone Input CH- 1and CH-2, -72dB/low impedance, 3.5mm stereo jack Headphone Output -6dB/low impedance, 3.5mm stereo jack
Mike Mixing:
CH-1and CH-2mixed by stereo mono sw Lens: Variable-speed power zoom lens, 10:1 (10.5 -- 105mm), f11.8, with macro and auto-shutter
Iris Auto iris/auto lock/manual control Color Temperature Filter Indoor (3200K)/outdoor ( 5100K) switched on lens
White Balance: Preset and automatic Viewfinder: 1.5" Electronic, detachable
Indicator & Alarm: On-screen read-out indications controlled by character generator and microcomputer ( Iris, pause, tape run, battery alarm, white balance, filter, gain, etc.)
Auto Fader: Video/audio or video only to/from white, black, red, green or blue or audio only
Genlock Input: BNC; 1.0V p- p composite ( NTSC) Color Bar Generator: Built-in; full field
Character Generator: 12-key operation character generator for superimposition of titles, dates and lap time; memory back-up time: 8hours
Power Requirement +12V DC from VCR or battery pack Power Consumption: 9.2 watts Weight: 2.95kg with lens, VF, mic, shoulder pad Dimensions: 415(D) x190(W) x238mm(H) w/lens hood, W & shoulder pad
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VC- 147
JVC
VHS COLOR CAMERA/RECORDER BR-C100U
FEATURES
· Extremely Lightweight, Only 4.3 Lbs. · Automatic Iris Control · Compact Electronic Viewfinder · High-Sensitivity Low-Lag Pickup System · 6:1 Power Zoom Lens with Macro
Setting · Direct TV Connection · VHS Compatibility · Shuttle Search · Independent Camera and Recorder
Functions · 3-Way Power Supply Flexibility · Compact Videocassettes
BR-C100U . VIDEOMOVIE
VideoMovie is a single lightweight and compact unit that combines afullfeature camera with aVHS video recorder, for playback as well as recording.
Comprehensive Color Temperature Adjustment. VideoMovie employs a combination of a filter and electronic circuitry to accommodate lighting of different color temperatures.
Automatic Iris Control. When set to the STD position, VideoMovie's iris control system automatically adjusts the lens opening for optimum exposure. The iris setting can be manually adjusted.
Compact Electronic Viewfinder. VideoMovie's supremely compact EVF incorporates a comprehensive warning system which includes an exposure meter, low battery warning, tape-end alarm and five other indicators. The eyepiece can be rotated 180° to accommodate different shooting angles. The viewfinder permits instant playback of newly- recorded tapes for on-the-spot checks.
Audio. A high-sensitivity unidirectional condenser microphone is provided for exclusive use with VideoMovie along with an earphone jack for audio monitoring.
High-Sensitivity Low-Lag Pickup System. VideoMovie can be used effectively under a wide variety of shooting conditions. In lighting as low as 15 lux (1.4 fc) -- about what you'd find in a quiet continental restaurant -- the sensitive Saticon pickup tube and supporting technology, including a bias light, Automatic Beam Control, and lownoise FETs, record normal images with clear, natural color.
6:1 Power Zoom Lens with Macro Setting. A 6-to- 1wide-angle/telephoto range is provided, along with a macro setting for screen-filling close-ups of objects as small as a postage stamp. The zoom buttons are strategically placed for light, natural fingertip control.
Direct TV Connection. VideoMovie includes circuitry for playback of the cassettes it records; no additional recorder, player or adaptor is required.
VHS Compatibility. Because VideoMovie uses the standard VHS tape pattern and signal processing system, its recordings are compatible with all VHS equipment. Compact videocassettes can be played on full-size recorders using a special cartridge which holds the compact cassette in a standard-size cassette shell.
Shuttle Search. For quick accurate access to any part of a tape, the picture can be viewed at three times normal speed in forward or reverse.
Independent Camera and Recorder Functions. For direct five recording onto full-size cassettes, VideoMovie can be used just like an ordinary video camera with any full-size video recorder. In addition, its playback facility allows VideoMovie to be used as a master player for editing or tape-to-tape transfer.
3-Way Power Supply Flexibility. Compact rechargeable Ni -Cad battery packs are VideoMovie's standard power source. To take advantage of other power sources, an optional AC power adaptor ( AA-P1V) and a car battery cord ( AP-Pl V) are
available.
Compact Videocassettes. VideoMovie uses VI-0-C compact cassettes which are one-third the size of standard VHS cassettes. Each cassette holds enough half-inch video tape for 20 minutes of recording.
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
Suggested List Price
BR-CICOU
SF-PIU VC-P1 Ll PM-PlU CB-PI C-P3U CG-P5OU
M-P3U PAZ-230
VHS Color Camera/ Recorcer
Convenien: Shoulder Frame
AN Extenon Cable
Remote Control Unit
Carrying Case
VHS Cassette Adaptor Character Generator Compact a.. Video Monitor
Super-directional Microphone
$1595.00 35.00 13.00 6.00
130.00 55.00
100.00
355.00
62.00
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 231)794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VC- 148
JVC
TM-9060/TM-9010 CCTV System Monitors
TK-10/TK-N10 CCTV Camera Heads
TM-920/TM-122 CCTV Video Monitors
JVC has developed a new series of CCTV systems using more compact camera heads for easier installation and operation.
FEATURES ·Connection between the system monitors and each camera can be
done with asingle coaxial cable ·The 9- inch system monitor incorporates CCUs so that the
construction of amonitoring system is easy: The TM- 9010 has one CCU while the TM-9060 has six CCUs and can perform sequential switching ·Both of these system monitors, the TM-9010 and TM-9060, have built-in CCUs and are provided with apower- save standby mode, with which video output is interlocked with the built-in video sensor ·The TM- 9060 is provided with avideo recording connector, avideo playback connector, an external alarm input connector and a camera No. 1output connector ·The camera heads are both compact, with the TK-10 using a vidicon tube and the TK-N10 a Newvicon tube. A monitor output connector is provided on the camera heads so the angle of view can be easily set when installing the cameras ·The TM- 920 9- inch high- resolution video monitor has been newly designed and can be mounted in astandard EIA 19- inch rack. The TM- 122 12- inch monitor is also available
Preliminary Specifications
SPEC
MODEL
TIC-10
TIC-Nb0
Scanning system
21 interlaced
Scanning frequency
Horizontal: 15625 kHz Vertical: 50 Hz
Synchronization system
External (Special Composite Sync. Signal from CCU)
Video output
for CCU x1Video 0.7 Vp-p 75 Q ( BNC) for Monitor x1VS 1.0 Vp-p High imp. ( PIN)
Horizontal resolution
more than 550 lines (at center)
Scene illumination
min. 3lux (1/1.4) normal 30 lux (1/1.4)
min. 0.3 lux (1/1.4) normal 3lux 0/1.4)
Pickup tube Lens mount
2/3" Separate mesh type vidicon (20PE14)
2/3" Separate mesh type newvicon (S4092)
C- mount (fo TV camera)
Power supply
from video monitor only ( BNC) DC 12 V lo DC 30 V, coaxial cable
Power consumption
max. 9VA ( DC 30 V, 270 mA)
Dimensions (VixiixD)
70 > 70 x150 mm (2-3/4" x2-3/4" x6") without lens
Weight
approx. 0.6 kg ( 1.33 lbs) without lens
SPEC.
ktODEL
Picture tube Horizontal resolution Scanning frequency
Camera control unit Input Output
Power supply Power consumption Dimensions (Wit H xD) Weight
TM-9010
9"
more than 900 lines (al center)
Horizontal: 15.625 kHz Vertical: 50 Hz Yes x1
Camera xl, 1K- 10/N10 only ( BNC) Video ut, VS 1.0 Vp-p 75 Q ( BNC) Alarm ut, contact Low Level ( PIN)
AC 220/240 V 25 W (including camera head ut)
220 x250 x290 mm (8-3/4" x9-7/8" x11-1/2")
approx. 7kg ( 15.5 lbs)
TM-9060 SYSTEM
TK-1 OfTK-N1 0
N o. 1
Coax. Cable 6
· No. 6
TM- 9060
CCTV SYSTEM
TM- 920
TM - 9060
TM- 9010
a%
TK-N10
TIC-10
SPEC.
MODEL
Picture tube Horizontal resolution Scanning frequency
Sequential switcher
Camera control unit Input
Output
Power supply Power consumption Dimensions (W xH xD) Weight
IM-9060
9"
more than 900 lines (at center)
Horizontal: 15.625 kHz Vertical: 50 Hz
Yes x6, Time: Internal 0.5 sec to 30 sec External 0.3 sec to a. Yes x6
Camera x6, TK-10/N10 only (BNC) VTR PB x6 Alarm x6
Alarm auto xr Timer xl
Camera ut, Alarm uf. Timer xt Select x6, Video xl AC 220/240 V
90 W ( including camera head x6) 210 x270 x290 mm
(8-3/4" x10-3/4" x11-1/2") approx. 9kg ( 19.9 lbs)
SPEC.
MODEL
7M-920
TM-122
Picture tube
9", 90° deflection
12" 90° deflection
Horizontal resolution
more ban 900 Ines (al center)
Scanning frequency
Horizontal: 15.625 kHz Vertical: 50 Hz
Input
Video xi, VS 1.0 Vp-p 75 Q ( BNC)
Output (Bridge out)
Video ut, VS 1.0 Vp-p 75 Q ( BNC)
Power supply
AC 220/240 V
Power consumption
22 W
27 W
Dimensions (Wx H xD) Weight
220 x250 x300 mm 300 x310 x330 mm (8-3/4 -x9-7 /WO I - 7/81 111 - 7/13"x12-1 /4"x13") approx. 7kg 115.5 lbu) approx.12 kg 126.51bS)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-149
KAPCO MFG. CO., INC.
1270 Jarvis Ave. Elk Grove Village, IL 60007 (312) 437-5900 ( 800) 323-8551
BATTERY PACS
KW5 FLEXIPAK" WITH VIS -I- VOLT" VOLTAGE INDICATOR
The Most Advanced Belt Packs Available Today . . .
KW5 Flexipak with Vis-i-Voltm
This was ( and still is) the first flexible, yet lightweight pack that is worn around your waist. The case is made of CorduraR, which is virtually indestructible, and features cylindrically wound metal cells, the exclusive Vis- i-Volt feature, and the KAPCO in- line fused receptacle.
· The battery cells are individually wound in their own heavy-duty Metal cylinders · The battery cell construction is so superior, they can't leak in any position · Solid cross- linked polyfoam wraps around cells for maximum protection · The rugged Metal cell cases maximize resistance to shock and vibration · Up to 21/2 years shelf life without needing acharge · Can be recharged up to 1400 times · Provides excellent performance under severe usage and conditions · Cylindrically wound cells are the best you can buy · Exclusive Vis- i-Volt and in- line fused receptacle · Long service life means only pennies per use
KAPCO Power Packs Will Operate: · Portable TV · Video Recorders
· Video Cameras · Radios and Tape Decks · Indoor and Outdoor Power Tools · Test Equipment · Depth and Fish Finders · High Intensity Lighting · Photographic Lighting · CB and other Communications
Equipment
KW5 FLEXIPAK" WITH VIS -I- VOLT" VOLTAGE INDICATOR
S149.95
KW675 FLEXIPAK" WITH LEAD ACID BATTERY AND REGUCHARGER"
S129.95
Unit
FLEXIPAK IKVV5)
Type Of Construction
Flexible fabric belt pack
Average Camera Recorder
Operating Time'
4 to 5 hours
Typical Usage
Medium to heavy
R10 Vis- i-Volt" Provides visual indication of the charge condition of your battery pack. Can be used while charging and using your pack. For 12 volt " lead-aid" packs only. R10 Vis-i-Volr $ 19.95
KF1 Fast Charger
Will fully charge any KAPCO 5to 8amp hour battery pack
in approximately 4 hours. Provides an approximate 50%
charge after only 1hour of charging. UL and CSA listed.
KF1 Fast Charger
$ 19.95
KR201 ReguchargerTM
Connectors C50 Double Receptacle Cord C10 "Y" adaptor
Accessories A20 Accessory pouch P10 Video cart C23 8' plug cord C24 12' extension cord
VC- 150
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$24.95
S 5.95 9.95
16.95 129.95
6.95 9.95
KAPCO MFG CO., INC.
1270 Jarvis Avenue Elk Grove Village, IL 60007 (312) 437-5900 ( 800) 323-8551
BATTERY PACS
KH1 Hande-Pak Thl 1Amp
The Hande-Pak is ideal for powering those smaller electronic devices;
radios, CB sets, test equipment, small portable TVs etc. Durable, vinyl case has astitched loop for attaching to your own belt, and has
abuilt-in receptacle. Complete with charger ( and recharges in only 2 hours). Combine this with the R37 Voltage Converter, and you'll be able to power most of those smaller devices. At alittle over 1pound and 4"H x4-1/2"L x2"W, this is one small, but versatile, battery pack.
KH1 KW1P Walk-PakTN, 3Amp, 6Volt
$ 49.95 39.95
KO8 PowerpouchTM 8Amps
Durable, lightweight, attractive vinyl case with attached shoulder
strap. Comes complete with charger and in- line fused receptacle.
Charges in 12-16 hours. ( Approx. 7 lbs. -8-1/2"H x5"L x2"W)
KO8
$ 119.95
KL08 PowerpouchTM with Vis-i-VoltTM
Durable, lightweight, attractive vinyl case with attached shoulder
strap. Comes complete with Vis- i-Volt feature, charger and in- line fused receptacle. Charges in 12-16 hours. ( Approx. 7lbs. - 8-1/2"H x 5"L x2"W)
KL08
$ 139.95
K12 Shoulder Pack 12 Amps
This pack has a padded cordura case with shoulder strap. The
charger stores inside. Comes complete with charger and in- line fused
receptacle. Charges in 14-18 hours. ( Approx. 12 lbs. - 9-1/2"H x
8-1 / 2"L x3-1/2"W)
K12
$ 169.95
Comes complete with charger and in- line fused receptacle. This is
truly economical, heavy-duty power. Charges in 16-20 hours.
(Approx. 14 lbs. - 8"H x 11"L x6-1/2"W)
K15
$ 159.95
KN2001 Handle-PakTM Ni -Cad With ReguchargerTM
This KN2001 battery packs 4.8 amps at 12 volts. It's the smallest and
lightest weight ni -cad ( only 3-1/4 lbs., 2-3/4"W x 6-3/4"L x
2-1/2"D). It's cased in metallic, padded Cordura® . A detachable
shoulder strap and stitched belt loop make it easy to transport.
Comes with in- line fused receptacle and regucharger.
KN2001
$ 119.95
Battery Comparison
1. Add up the total number of watts used by your equipment. ( Camera, monitor, recorder, radio, etc.)
2. Read across to find the " average" continuous operating time for each Kapco battery pack.
= + P + DI IAVERAGE OPERATING TIME (hours:minutes)
WATTS
KH1
KW5
KO8 KL08
K12 KL12
K15
6- 9
2:00 8:30 12:45 16:00 25:45
10 - 13
1:15 5:30
8:30 11:00 17:00
14 - 17
1:00 4:00
6:15
8:30 12:30
18 - 21
0:45 3:15
4:45
6:45
9:45
KL12 Shoulder Pack with Vis-i-VoltTM
This pack has a padded cordura case with shoulder strap. The
charger stores inside. Comes complete with Visi-Volt feature,
charger and in- line fused receptacle. Charges in 14-18 hours. (Approx. 12 lbs. - 9-1/2"H x8-1 / 2"L x3-1/2"W)
KL12
$ 189.95
K15 Powerhouse' 15 Amps
Plenty of extended running time for your camera, recorder, lights and accessories. The leatherette case has carrying handle and strap.
22 - 25
0:30
2:45
4:00
5:45
8:15
26 - 29
2:15
3:30
5:00
7:00
30 - 33
L20 Quartz Light (100Watts)
2:CO 0:30
3:00 1:00
4:15 1:45
6:00 1:00
NOTE: The above chart is based on afully charged battery pack. Environmental conditions must be considered along with the length of con-
necting cord(s) plus deviations in equipment requirements.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 151
Hinetene
257 10th Avenue
P.O. Box 508 Paterson, NJ 07544 (201) 279-9700 Telex 469-368
35mm PROJECTOR
FP- 30 TV
ACCESSORIES Magnetic Reproducer, 4Track Aperture Air Valve Remote Focus
Remote Focus/Frame Reverse Run Torque Motor Drive, Upper and Lower Reel Torque Motor Drive, Upper Reel only Remote Control Panel Cable per ft. for above Lens Requirements
$ 2400.00 275.00 725.00
1375.00 2175.00 3000.00 1600.00
400.00 3 50
Special Quote
FP-30 TV PROJECTOR The FP-30 TV Projector utilizes the basic film transport and system as found in the professional 35mm systems widely
used for exhibition, and studio applications. The high speed intermittent movement with 5 blade shutter renders the system compatible with 25 or 30 Frame operation. The
system meets all SMPTE specifications.
Precision Projection The FP-30 TV Projector utilizes asingle piece, curved gate
of self-lubricating delrin material. The gate, with delrin runner strips and ceramic guides, provides a film path exactly controlled with minimal pressure, providing high
picture stability with minimal stress on the film.
Optimal Sound Quality The optical reproducer follows all of the state-of-the-art
designs, resulting in low wow and flutter. The rotating
sound drum and the flywheel accelerator provides fast sound stabilization. The high quality slit lens and scanning system provides for high quality sound reproduction.
Audio The FP-30 TV System is normally provided without Pre
Amplification. The solar cell output being easily coupled to Station audio systems. Where a0level signal is required, an audio system can be provided as an accessory.
FEATURES ·Equipped with Column and adjustable Pedestal ·35mm Film Transport ·Fast Pull Down Intermittent 5Blade Shutter ·Step Frame ·Proximity Sensor ( Auto Stop) ·Sound Reproducer, Optical with Solar Cell Pick-up and
Exciter Lamp ·DC Exciter Lamp Power Supply ·Sound Drum Accelerator ·Picture Change- Over Relay, Dowser Control ·Electrical Control System 24V DC ·SMPTE Spec on Jump and Weave ·Spool Shafts and Frictions: 6000' capacity ·Drive Motor: Synchronous 115V, 60Hz, 24 p/s ·Lens Support: Vernier Focus, Lensholder, Set of
Aperture Plates · Light Source: Halogen Lamphouse 250W, 36V, 2 Lamp
System, Automatic Lamp Change
$18,500.00
VC- 152
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HI e
2p 607 1BOotxh5A0ve8n u e44
16mm PROJECTOR
(201) 279-9700 Telex 469-368
FP- 18 TV PROJECTOR For use in TV, film to tape transfers, and special studio systems.
Precision Projection The projector's extremely high picture stability, less than .19% jump and weave, is achieved by the unique Philips grooved disk mechanism, curved gate, and ceramic film edge guides. The intermittent mechanism was developed especially for 16mm film systems using a12 tooth sprocket for film control and protection. This combined with the rotating 5blade disk shaped shutter, dual halogen lamp with automatic lamp change, provides ahighly efficient projection system compatible with 25 or 30 frame TV systems.
Optimal Sound Quality The sound reproducing system follows the pattern of professional standards used in 35 or 70mm reproducers. A rotating sound drum machined to high standards, fitted with asplit damping drum and flywheel accelerator provides for afast stabilization time and provides for less than . 2% wow and flutter. The scanning optics can be adjusted ( by lever) to compensate for standard or non-standard recordings. A manual switch will shift the system from optical to magnetic if so equipped.
Audio The preamplifier module is located within the cabinet. It provides for pre- amplification of selected signals with plugin equalization boards for optical or magnetic signals. The output provides for a + 8dBm signal into a600 ohm load. Each input is individually controlled for balance, with an overall master and abass/treble boost circuit.
FEATURES ·Rack Mounting with adjustable Pedestal, 24V Control
System, Control Panel, built- on Proximity Sensor ( Auto Stop) ·Film Run Mechanism Forward/Reverse ·Crown Groove Intermittent 5Blade Shutter ·Picture Dowser/Change Over, Still/Step Frame ·Curved Gate ·SMPTE Specs for Jump and Weave ·5000 foot Film Capability, Remote Control for all Functions ·24 Frames per second ·Audio: Preamplifier/Line Amplifier Module built-in with +8dBm Output Level into 600 ohm Load B + Power Supply ·Light Source: Halogen Light Source, 2 Lamp Turret System with Automated Change 250W, 24V ·Drive Motor: 110-250V, 60Hz Synchronous · Reel Drives: Friction Drive, 5000' capacity ·Optical Playback: Sound Drum Damping Assembly, Sound Drum Accelerator, Solar Cell, Exciter Lamp, Exciter Lamp Power Supply
$19,000.00
ACCESSORIES Lensholder ( Anamorphic) Aperture Air Valve Remote Focus Remote Focus/ Remote Frame Torque Motor Film Reel Drive, Upper and Lower Torque Motor Film Reel Drive, Upper Only. Remote Control Panel Cable per ft. for above
LENS-SCHNEIDER ( with Iris) CPR- 75 4.5 CPN-80 4.0 CPN-100 5.6 CPR- 105 4.5
LENS-ISCO ( without Iris) 50mm f/1.9 65mm f/1.6 75mm f/1.7
$ 325.00 275.00 515.00
1185.00 3000.00 1600.00
400.00 350
$168.00 225.00 255.00 193.00
$250.00 250.00 265.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 153
EASTMAN KODAK CO.
343 State St. Rochester, NY 14650 (716) 724-4000
KODAVISION CAMCORDERS
KODAVISION SERIES 2000 CAMCORDERS The Kodavision Series 2000 Camcorder is an exciting new
concept in home video movie making. The camera and recorder are combined in one light- weight, easy-to- use unit
that can record images and sound on acompact 8mm video
cassette. And it's battery powered. Because of this new configuration, the entire well-balanced unit rests on the shoulder of the user for ease of operation. With aKodavision Series 2000 Cradle, Model 2020, your movies can be
viewed on your television screen. Or the camcorder can be used with the Kodavision Series 2000 Cradle equipped with an optional Kodavision Series 2000 Tuner/Timer, which will allow the additional capability of recording broadcast programs directly from your television for viewing at a later time. The cradle includes aremote control.
Microphone
Viewfinder
Cassette Door
MODEL 2400 AUTO FOCUS CAMCORDER
Battery Compartment
Features
·Still Frame and Single Frame Advance, 3heads ·Infrared Auto Focus
MODEL 2200
·Date Set-- day, month, year
·Fade In/Fade Out ·Negative/Positive Switch ·Backlight Switch with f/1.5 override
·Black- and-White Electronic Viewfinder ·Viewfinder Indicators
· Light levels ·Counter, to indicate tape usage ·DEW Warning Light, to indicate condensation · Recording Mode ·Indoor/Outdoor Lights ·Battery- Power Low Light · 1/3" Newvicon tube
·6x Power Zoom ·Fully Automatic White Balance
·Auto Iris, variable aperture Low- light capability to 20 lux
·Standby Switch ·Fast Forward and Fast Reverse ·Visual Search ·Counter with " Memory" Feature ·Record Review ·Indoor/Outdoor Lighting Selection ·Tally Light ·Auto White Balance Override Switch
·60- Minute Battery Use/Charge ·Metal- Particle ( MP) and Metal- Evaporated
(ME) Kodak Video Cassettes
· Microphone
MODEL 2200 CAMCORDER Features ·Still Frame, 2heads ·Black- and- White Electronic Viewfinder
·Viewfinder Indicators · Light levels ·Counter, to indicate tape usage ·DEW Warning Light, to indicate condensation ·Recording Mode ·Indoor/Outdoor Lights ·Battery- Power Low Light
· Y3" Newvicon tube ·6x Power Zoom ·Fully Automatic White Balance ·Auto Iris, variable aperture
Low- light capability to 20 lux ·Standby Switch ·Fast Forward and Fast Reverse ·Visual Search ·Counter with " Memory" Feature ·Record Review ·Indoor/Outdoor Lighting Selection ·Tally Light ·Auto White Balance Override Switch
·60- Minute Battery Use/Charge ·Metal- Particle ( MP) and Metal- Evaporated ( ME)
Kodak Video Cassettes · Microphone
Camcorder 2400
$ 1899.00
Camcorder 2200
$ 1599.00
VC- 154
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
EASTMAN
343 State St Rochester , NY 14650 (716) 724-4000
KODAK
CO.
KODAVISION ACCESSORIES
MODEL 2000 CRADLE
The Kodavision Series 2000 Cradle, with the use of aKodavision Series 2000 Camcorder, Model 2200 or 2400, allows
video recorded tapes to be viewed on your television screen. In addition to providing the proper signal to your
television, the cradle serves as an AC adaptor and abattery
charger. This also allows you to dub your recorded images onto standard 1/2" tape on existing VCRs and vice versa. With the addition of aKodavision Series 2000 Tuner/Timer,
the cradle may be used as a VCR to record your favorite broadcast television programs.
Features
·Full set of VCR record and playback controls: Play, Record, Fast Forward with Visual Search, Fast Reverse with Visual Search, Fast Forward/Fast Reverse, Pause/ Still, Frame Advance, Stop, Eject, Tape Counter with "Memory" Feature
·Dust- Cover Protection for Camcorder ·Wired Remote Control ·Battery Charger in Camcorder Plus Spare Battery with
Automatic Shutoff
·Convenient Tape Storage Drawer ·Accepts Optional Tuner/Timer
2000 Cradle
$ 199.00
MODEL 2000 TUNER/TIMER The cradle ( with Camcorder), when equipped with the Tuner/Timer plug-in module, provides the user with acomplete video cassette recorder. The Tuner/Timer module allows the user to record broadcast television programs on 8mm Kodak Video Cassettes.
Features
·105- Channel Cable Ready Capability ·12 Preset Channel Positions ·LED Channel Position Display ·Program Capability: 2programs/2 weeks ·One- Touch Recording: 0, 30, 60, 90 Minutes ·Fluorescent Indicator Panel Display ·Tuner/Cradle Multiconnector
2000 Tuner/Timer $300.00
8mm KODAK VIDEO CASSETTES 8mm Kodak Video Cassettes for use with the Kodavision Series 2000 Video System and other 8mm systems. MP video tape offers an advanced metal- particle coating for
excellent density and sensitivity, and ME video tape offers highest- quality metal-evaporated coating for excellent performance and dubbing.
MODEL 2000 CRADLE
Cat. # 8mm
Product Description
173 3427 MP6-30
100 9455 MP6-60
101 2301 MP6-90
110 7069 ME6-30
111 0592 ME6-60
115 6520 ME6-90
MODEL 2000 TUNER/TIMER
Price
$12.99 13.99 15.99 18.99 21.99 23.99
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 155
KONICA, U.S.A., INC.
440 Sylvan Ave. Englewood Chtfs, NJ 07632 (201) 568-3100
COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
·High sensitivity. The New Cosvicon pickup tube in the CV-301 is so sensitive, it requires only 35 lux for recording, allowing for recording indoors without special illumination
·Very easy to use. There are no complex or difficult adjustments to worry about. The user just turns the 4- position color temperature selector to the appropriate setting (indicate by graphic symbols), focuses and shoots
·Low power consumption. Since the CV-301 consumes only 3.5 watts, recorder batteries last longer between recharging
·Compatible with awide variety of decks. The camera cord can be connected directly to VHS 10- pin connectors and to other VHS and Beta decks easily via an adaptor
CV- 301 COMPACT COLOR VIDEO CAMERA Weighing just 1.8 lbs., the Konica CV-301 is the smallest and lightest color video camera in the world. That's why it was given the name CV, " C" for compact and " V" for
video.
Extremely compact size was achieved by the use of a1/2" New Cosvicon pickup tube, a unique, original optical system, and high density circuit boards. Further benefits of the Konica CV-301's sophisticated optical- electronic system are that the camera is very simple to operate and requires no more than 35 lux for low- light recording. The result is acolor video camera with which anyone can make beautiful recording. From beginners to the experienced camera user, the Konica CV-301 is the ideal camera for today's on- the- go consumers since it satisfies the demand for compact size, light weight and simplicity.
Features ·Ultra- compact, ultra- lightweight design. The use of a
1/2" pickup tube, aunique optical system and densely packed circuit boards made it possible to build a color
video camera this small and this light
Specifications
Television system:
NTSC, Single carrier frequency
separation system
Pickup tube:
1/2 inch New Cosvicon -
Video output signal: 1volt p- p, 75 ohms
Scanning system:
525/60 fields/sec, 2:1 interlace
Horizontal resolution: 270 lines plus
Image S/N ratio:
45 dB plus
Min. required luminance: Built-in microphone: Audio output level: Zoom lens:
35 lux Undirectional electret condenser -20 dB ( 1K ohm) f/1.5 ( f = 10- 30mm), 3X manual
zoom lens, automatic iris, 43mm
filter diameter
Minimum focusing distance: Viewfinder:
0.8 meter TTL optical type, recording indicator, insufficient lighting indi-
cator, battery strength indicator, optional electronic viewfinder
may be added
Color temp. compen-
sation control:
4- step: Cloudy: Sunny:
7000°K 5500°K
Fluorescent:
4500°K
Incandescent:
3200°K
Power requirement: DC12V ( from aportable video recorder or camera AC adaptor)
Power consumption: Temp. range for
operation: Dimensions: Weight:
Approx. 3.5 watts
0°C to + 40°C ( 32°F to 104°F) 2.76" ( W) x9.65" ( H) x5.63" ( D) About 1.8 lbs. ( including 5feet cable. Not including lens hood
and lens cap.)
CV- 301 Compact Color Video Camera
$699.00
VC- 156
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
., ii, !4es /L?TELEMEDIA
Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-5900
INC.®
MULTIPLEXERS/ UNIPLEXERS
The MODEL 5300 OPTICAL MULTIPLEXER provides as many as three separate film images projected for televising by asingle camera. Firstsurface mirrors and precision optics ensure excellent results in color TV applications. An integral field lens provides an intermediate image plane upon which both camera and projector lenses are focused. The field lens mounting is designed to permit insertion of aspecial screen for alignment purposes. The mirrors are shifted by individual electric gear motors through a unique torsion-bar/pitman coupling and
produce an " instant" vertical wipe image transfer. The optical transfer assembly is supported for a48" optical center by a bench pedestal.
The MODEL 5400 OPTICAL MULTIPLEXER is similar to the Model 5300, with the capability of multiplexing up to four separate film images. It has two field lenses to provide intermediate image planes upon which the camera and the projector lenses are focused. The movable mirrors are shifted by acam/aperture coupling but in both the
5300 and the 5400, automatic self- dousing is inherent in the vertical-wipe image transfer so that all unused input images are eliminated.
MULTIPLEXERS
·5300 For three input sources ( Small Image). Includes optical trans-
fer assembly with field lens and cover, bench pedestal and local
control
$2095.00
"5330 For three input sources ( Large Image). Includes optical transfer assembly and cover, bench pedestal and local control. . S3680.00
*5340 For three or four input sources ( Large Image. Less field lens).
Includes optical transfer assembly with cover, bench pedestal and
local control. Three input units may be field converted for fourth
input source.
For three input sources
$3490.00
For four input sources
4220.00
5040 Large Image Field Lens and mounting assembly for 5330, 5340 Multiplexer. ( Required for camera without integral field lens.)
$1105.00
*5400 For four input sources ( Small Image). Includes optical transfer assembly with field lens and cover, bench pedestal and local control. Requires 5041 ND mounting bracket for 410 light control.. . $2735.00
*5500 For five input source ( Small Image). Includes optical transfer
assembly with field lens and cover, and bench pedestal
For four input sources
$3545.00
For five input sources
3910.00
SHELVES AND STANDS ( For Multiplexers)
(For 5300, 5340 and 5400 Multiplexers)
5104 Stand for cameras or projectors with optical center height be-
tween 8-1/4" and 12-1/4". Includes mounting adaptor. ( Specify
camera or projector model when ordering)
$425.00
5107 Shelf for small camera or projector. Includes mounting adaptor. ( Specify camera or projector model when ordering) . $310.00
5108 Stand for camera or projector with height of less than 8-1/4"
from mounting base to center of optics. Includes mounting adaptor.
(Specify camera or projector model when ordering)
$425.00
* Does not include camera or projector mounting shelves or stands.
MODEL 5300 OPTICAL MULTIPLEXER
DIPLEXERS/UNIPLEXERS
5116 Assembly with first surface mirror and field lens. Includes shelves
and adaptors for camera and 16mm film projector. ( Specify camera
and projector when ordering). Requires 50mm camera lens with 3/8"
extender and 3" projection lens. ( Lenses not included)
$1200.00
5116 + 35 Diplexer Assembly -- for two input sources. Includes first surface mirror, field lens, bench assembly and shelves ( desk top
mount) for 35mm slide projector and 16mm film projector. ( Specify
camera or projector, dedicated or dolly- up)
$1790.00
5135 Uniplexer Assembly same as above for one 35mm slide projector.
(Less mirror)
$1075.00
5135m Uniplexer Assembly for monochrome camera and 35mm slide
projector. ILess field lens and mirror)
$540.00
5136 105mm Camera taking lens and 1.57" lens barrel for use with 5135
Uniplexer. (" C" Mount)
$245.00
LENS/EXTENDERS
5015 3/8- Lens Extender for 50mm lens to " C" mount camera a-
daptor
$21.00
5016 Lens Extender Kit ICosmicar)
$52.00
5017 50mm f / 1.4 Lens -- for " C" mount camera, includes lens extender: 3/16" for 2/3" format camera. 3/8" for 1" format camera.
$240.00
5019 55mm lens with Bayonet mount for prism optic cameras.
$1515.00
MULTIPLEXER ACCESSORIES
5021 Test Film Kit Loop. Includes RES, REG, FLESH TONE slides.
RES 16mm film loop
$225.00
5022 Eastrnan Kodak Gray Scale Slide
$700.00
5036 Neutral Density Filter Kit -- 6filters supplied for mounting. For
small image. ( One Kit for each projector recommended)
$110.00
5037 Neutral Density Filter Kit -- 6filters supplied for mounting. For
large image. ( One Kit for each projector recommended).
$235.00
5041 Mounting Bracket for 5050 light control for use with 5400 4- input
optical multiplexer
$45.00
5050 Automatic Light Control -- maintains camera video at p/p. $2185.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 157
!,1s121:71.1?,,. TELEMEDIA INC.®
Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-5900
PROJECTORS
FRONT VIEW 4220 - LOCAL CONTROL
FRONT VIEW 4210
4410 TELOP PROJECTOR
4220 DISSOLVE DUAL DRUM SLIDE PROJECTOR provides a large slide capacity projector with time- controlled dissolve transitions. The 4220 Dual Projector offers the alternate sequencing of up to 160 glass, metal, plastic or paper- mounted 2" x2" slides from a dual configuration of Eastman Ektagraphic E2 projectors. The fade from one slide to the other can be varied, by means of apanel control, from less than half a second up to afull 15 seconds.
4210 DUAL DRUM SLIDE PROJECTOR provides a large slide capacity projector with broadcastquality quick- cut transitions. The 4210 projector offers the alternate sequencing of up to 160 glass, metal, plastic or paper-mounted 2" x2" slides from the dual configuration of Eastman Ektagraphic E2 projectors.
4410 TELOP PROJECTOR for use on an optical multiplayer for converting opaque pictures, such as magazine or newspaper clippings, Polaroid or quick notes. The picture size is 3-1/4" x2-7/16".
PROJECTORS
4110 Eastman Single Drum Slide Projector. Holds 80, 35mm slides.
Includes modified 7" lens and adjustable mount. ( Requires 5107
Shelf or 5108 Stand). ( Use 2508 Remote and 3504 Adaptor for remote
control)
$540.00
4210 Dual Drum Slide Projector. Holds 160, 35mm Slides Includes
lens and adjustable mount.
With 7" lens for Small Image System
$2365.00
With 7'/2" lens for Large Image System
2870.00
With 9" lens
2870.00
(Requires 5107 Shelf or 5108 Stand). ( Uses 2515 for remote control).
(Uses 2513 for remote reconcile).
4220 Dual Drum Dissolve Slide Projector. Hold 160, 35mm Slides.
Includes lens and adjustable mount.
With 7" lens for Small Image System
$4125.00
With 71/2" lens for Large Image System
4625.00
With 9" lens
4625.00
(Requires 5107 Shelf or 5108 Stand). ( Uses 2525 for remote control).
(Uses 2526 for program tone generator).
4410 Telop Projector - Includes 3" lens and two image holders. ( Uses
2510 Remote Control)
$1900.00
ST 1200LTI Elmo Super 8TV Film Projector - Includes 25-50mm zoom
lens, optical and magnetic playback, and magnetic record. ( Requires
5108 Stand). ( Uses 2510 Remote Control and 3518 Adaptor for
remote control).
$1775.00
16-CLLTI Elmo Slotload 16mm TV Film Projector- Includes 75mm lens, optical and magnetic playback. ( Requires 5108 Stand). ( Uses 2510 Remote Control and 3518 Adaptor for remote control). $2640.00
16-FLTI Elmo Heavy Duty 16mm TV Film Projector- Includes 75mm
lens, optical and magnetic playback. ( Requires 5104 Stand). ( Uses
2523 Remote Control)
$2825.00
2230LTI Singer 16mm TV lnstaload Film Projector. Includes 3" lens,
fast forward and reverse mode and Optical Playback. ( Requires 5108 Stand). ( Uses 2510 remote and 3503 adaptor for remote control)
$2595.00
NT-2LTI Eiki Autoload 16mm TV Film Projector. Includes 3" lens,
Optical and Magnetic Playback, and Remote Adaptor. ( Requires
5108 Stand). Uses 2523 remote control
$2585.00
NT-3LTI Eiki Autoload 16mm TV Film Projector. Includes 3" lens, Optical and Magnetic Playback, and Remote Adapter. ( Requires 5108 Stand). Uses 2523 remote control $3110.00
REMOTE CONTROL (All modules use V3" of rack width unless otherwise indicated)
1506 Rack Frame- accepts up to three remote control modules. Blank
filler panels provided, if necessary. Frame is 19" x31/2"x3" ( W xH x
D)
$60.00
2508 Control, Remote - " Off", Ready", " Show", " Forward", and
"Reverse" slide change
$150.00
2509 Control, Remote - for two 16mm TV Film Projectors. ( Dual con-
figuration of 2510 below)
$180.00
2510 Control, Remote - Controls " Off", " Ready", and " Show"
modes
$120.00
2513 Control, Remote Reconcile - ( optional) for Model 4210 Dual
Drum Slide Projector. Adds individual " Forward" and " Reverse"
control of Drum A and Drum B
$120.00
2515 Control, Remote - " Off", " Ready", " Show", " Forward", " Re-
verse", and " Alternate"
$180.00
2516 Control, Remote - for 5400 Multiplexer. Controls input sources
1, 2, 3and 4. Uses 2/3 of rack frame. ( Not required with LTI projector
remote control system)
$120.00
2517 Control, Remote - for 5300 Multiplexer. Controls input sources
1, 2and 3. ( Not required with LTI projector remote control system) $120.00
2523 Control, Remote - " Off", " Ready", and " Show", " Forward",
and " Reverse"
$150.00
2525 Control, Remote - Uses 2/3 of rack frame
515.00
2526 Tone Generator 2528 Control, Remote
350.00 80.00
2533 24 Volt Power Supply - for Uniplexer remote control . NOTE: Consult factory for remote control cables.
190.00
ADAPTORS FOR REMOTE CONTROL 3503 Remote Adaptor for 2230 LTI film projector
$ 75.00
3504 Remote Adaptor for 4110 slide projector
110.00
3510 Universal Remote Adaptor with AC power cord for all projectors
without remote provisions. Includes local controls, " Off" and
"Ready". ( Used with 2510 Remote Control)
150.00
3518 Remote Adaptor for ST 1200LTI and 16-CLLTI Elmo Projectors. 150.00
3520 Remote Adaptor for 16-FLTI Elmo Projector.
150.00
VC- 158
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
12-4esicpi,,,, TELEMEDIA INC.®
Salt Lake City, UT 84119
(801) 972-5900
PROJECTORS/ REMOTE CONTROLS
MODEL 4320 DISSOLVE DUAL DRUM SLIDE PROJECTOR
Provides a large capacity projector, with a time controlled dissolve transition. The dissolve time and the dwell time can be programmed to run automatically. The 4320 Dual offers the alternate sequencing of up to 160 glass, metal, plastic, or paper- mounted 2" x2" slides, from a dual configuration of the new Eastman Ektagraphic IIIE projectors.
Image transfer between sucessive slides is accomplished by ameans of astationary optical beam splitter, thus slides selected from either of the two storage drums share a single, high-quality projection lens. This, together with the use of aquartz halogen light source, makes the projector ideal for color television applications.
The single-chip, programmable microcomputer based electronics allows for user computer interface, an unlimited number of remote inputs, and areal-time sequencer.
MODEL 4300 SINGLE DRUM SLIDE PROJECTOR
Utilizes the new Eastman Ektagraphic IIIE projector modified by Laird for Film Chain use. It holds 80 35mm Slides; and includes modified 7"
Lens and adjustable mount.
Projectors
4300 EASTMAN IIIE Single Drum Slide Projector. Includes modified
7" lens and adjustable mount. ( Requires 5107 Shelf or 5108 Stand.)
Uses 2543 Remote Control.
$ 590.00
4320 Eastman IIIE Dual Drum Dissolve Slide Projector. Includes lens and adjustable mounting hardware. ( Requires 5107 Shelf or 5108
Stand.) ( Uses 2545 Remote Control.) ( Uses 2546 Tone Generator/ Decoder.)
With 7" lens for small image system With 7-1/2" lens for large image system
$4200.00 4700.00
Remote Controls
(To be used for all projectors when the 4320 Dual Drum Projector is used.) ( All modules use 1/3 Remote Control Frame Width unless otherwise specified.)
2540 Remote Control Frame- Accepts up to three remote control
modules. Blank filler panels provided, if necessary. Frame is 19"W x
1-3/4"H x1-1/4"D.
$ 60.00
2541 Remote Control- For 5300 or 5330 Multiplexer. Controls input
sources 1, 2, and 3. ( Not required when LTI Projector remote controls
are furnished.)
$ 120.00
50 Ft. Cable 100 Ft. Cable
46.00 75.00
2542 Remote Control- For 5400 or 5340 Multliplexer. Controls input
sources 1, 2, 3, and 4. ( Not required when LTI projector remote
controls are furnished.)
$ 120.00
50 Ft. Cable 100 Ft. Cable
68.00 120.00
REAR VIEW 4320
2543 Remote Control- For Model 4300 Single Drum Slide Projector.
Controls " Off", " Ready", " Forward", and " Reverse" slide change.
$150.00
50 Ft. Cable 100 Ft. Cable
62.00 105.00
2544 Remote Control- For Model 4210 Dual Drum Slide Projector.
Controls " Off", " Ready", " Show", " Forward", " Reverse", and
"Alternate"
$180.00
50 Ft. Cable 100 Ft. Cable
70.00 110.00
2545 Remote Control- For Model 4320 Dual Drum Dissolve Slide Pro-
jector. Includes all local control functions. Full Width Rack Frame
furnished.
$515.00
50 Ft. Cable 100 Ft. Cable
150.00 250.00
2546 Tone Generator/Decoder-For Model 4320/2545 Dissolve Slide
Projector System
$350.00
2549 Power Supply-24 Volt- For Uniplexer remote control. ( Required
only on Uniplexer with stationary mirror.)
$190.00
2550 Remote Control- For Model 5050 ND Light Wheel.
50 Ft. Cable 100 Ft. Cable
$ 80.00
47.00 75.00
2551 Remote Control- For Film Projectors. Controls " Off", " Ready",
and " Show" Modes.
$120.00
50 Ft. Cable 100 Ft. Cable
49.00 80.00
2553 Remote Control- For Eiki NT-2LT Iand NT-3LTI or Elmo 16-FLTI
Projectors with LTI Modification. Controls " Off", " Ready", " Show",
"Forward", and " Reverse"
$150.00
50 Ft. Cable 100 Ft. Cable
73.00 115.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 159
Ipetercl
usan
3Ed5g2ewRaitveerr,RoNaJd07020 (201) 943-5600
MACHINE CORP.
CAMERA SUPPORT SYSTEMS
"ULTRA" FLUID HEADS
JRA-83M TRIPOD AND FLUID HEAD
JRA83M TRIPOD SYSTEM
The Peter Lisand Company has announced anew, "true-fluid" design camera/tripod head designed exclusively for application in the professional cinematography and video industries. Peter Lisand's true-fluid head is available separately or as part of the total Lisand Camera Support System. Two versions are currently being offered: Ultra Ithe light- duty head 15-30 lbs., or the Ultra II heavy-duty version, 30-50 lbs. (Matching support systems from Lisand are similarly rated.) The head is designed to be compatible with most support systems on the market
today.
FEATURES The key elements in the Lisand Camera Head are its simplicity and positive leak- proof design. The head uses two separate chambers, each filled with a specially-formulated " heavy" fluid, and then permanently, hermetically sealed. The Lisand True- Fluid system allows extraordinarily smooth tilt and pan action every time. The head is capable of tilting to afull 90° vertical position. Separate fluted knobs control the fluid- head's movement offering positive lock and positive drag adjustments across the full spectrum. All parts of the Lisand tripod are of the finest quality. Bearings, for example, are bronze operating in Delrin. This combination was chosen to minimize wear and eliminate metal-to- metal contact. The finish on the Lisand head is acombination of baked-on vinyl and anodized aluminum. Users may
choose where they want their handles. Left, right, or, both sides. There is also the opportunity to choose an optional quick- release or standard tie-down screw for the camera attachment.
·True fluid action maintains asmooth regulated motion by asensitive system without brake shoes, bands, or other mechanical parts to interfere with its operation. Separate positive locks and drag are featured on the pan and tilt. Tilt achieves afull 90° vertical position.
·Sealed leak- proof chamber assures long-lasting, problem free
operation ·Adjustable quick release will counterbalance camera and lens
requirements. ( optional) ·Versatile control -- use right, left or dual handles. ·New reversible foot, rubber-tipped for interiors and standard metal
points for outside use, can be ordered with either of the JRA tripods.
(optional) ·Tripods come with various top castings to accommodate existing
systems. ·Complete the light-duty system with the JRA-83M, a new light-
weight tripod that weighs in at 7lbs., with atotal combined weight of 16 lbs.
These Peter Lisand products reflect our highest standards and are backed with our one-year no- hassle guarantee.
VC-160
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Lewd352 River Road Edgewater, NJ 07020 (201) 943-5600
MACHINE CORP.
TRIPODS
"SIP
LST-80
ULTRA 1TM
MITCHELL TRIPOD
, it4-s· se
VIDEO TRIPOD DOLLY
r JR- A-74
JR- A-74
·The new light- weight Junior motion picture tripod weighs in at a mere 91/2 lbs
· Finely machined tubular aluminum legs and stainless steel parts and nylon bushings. Rustproof and noiseless too!
·Adjustable from 39" closed to 60" open. Flexible leg adjustment ·Rigid construction-- no movement when panning
LST -80
This heavy duty tripod is built for cinema and video weighing ·Only 22 pounds complete with built-in spider assembly · Finely machined tubular aluminum legs and stainless steel parts and
nylon · Rigid construction-- no movement when panning. Will support 200
lbs. or more of equipment · Ideal for studio and location work ·Available in standard, regular, intermediate and baby versions
The Mitchell Type Tripod
·Precision Built -- we use only air-dried selected American hardwoods, finely machined aluminum and steel parts
· Heavy construction -- assures solid base for camera, free of vibration · Fully adjustable-- can be adjusted with hairline precision, all locks
hold legs exactly as you set them · Beautifully finished-- all steel parts plated, all aluminum parts · Spider assembly is available on request ·Available in three models-- Regular, Sawed- Off and The Baby
HEAVY DUTY TRIPOD DOLLY
HI- HAT
Eh,
Heavy Duty Tripod Dolly
· Rugged construction heavy aluminum tubing assures solid base for even the biggest and heaviest movie camera.
·Smooth running -- heavy 5" deluxe rubber- tired swivel wheels glide smoothly and noislessly over any studio or location surface.
· Individual wheel locks -- lucking device on each wheel permits fixed position use.
·Compact -- folds up in seconds from an open- spread diameter of 46" to compact, easy to store unit just 10" in depth.
·Made in two models -- screwdown, and spring- lock systems.
ULTRA 1TM
·A simple, sturdy true-fluid motion picture and video camera/tripod system
·The light-duty tripod weighs only 7.5 lbs.; the total system weighs about 16 lbs., with 15-25 lb. capacity
· Finest quality parts and options to make the ideal system for each user
·Aluminum and Delrin bearings, Delrin and fiber lock and drag shoes offer long-lasting performance and durability
·Tripod ¡ camera head is capable of tilting to afull 90° vertical position
·Positive, independent pan capability of afull 360°
Video Tripod Dolly
·Tripod dolly for smooth silent maneuverability designed for all professional tripod- mounted movie and video cameras
· Rugged construction-- heavy 1/8" wall aluminum tubing assures solid base for even the biggest and heaviest movie camera
·Smooth running -- heavy 4" Darnell rubber- tired swivel wheels glide smoothly and noiselessly over any studio or location surface
·Compact -- folds up in seconds from an open- spread diameter of 46" to compact, easy to store unit just 10" in depth
Adjustable and Fixed Hi -Hat
·A lightweight, precision machined aluminum accessory, the Hi- Hat is fast mounting with three screws
·Adjustable from 71 /4 "closed to 91/2" raised. Legs can be spread to achieve a minimum height of 3 inches
·Hi- Hat can be supplied with all Standard Junior Tops ·A Fixed Hi- Hat is available with an overall height of 71 / 2 " ·T!.a Hi- Hat is economically priced.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 161
Lpe TM 352 River Road Edgewater, NJ 07020 meatncl (201) 943-5600 MACHINE CORP.
TRIPOD ACCESSORIES
35 MM ARRI BALL TOP
16 MM ARRI BALL TOP
MILLER REG. TOP
MILLER " F" TOP
TRIANGLES
7" BALL TOP-NCE
JR FLAT TOP
ask
7" O'CONNOR C- BTOP JUNIOR TRIPOD TOPS
SSP-73
Triangles
· Rugged-- aluminum construction assures solid base for even the biggest and heaviest movie camera tripods
·Compact -- folds up in seconds from an open- spread diameter of 48" to compact, easy to store unit just 14"
· Made in three models-- screw- down, spring clamps, and spike- lock systems
Screw Down Spring
Spike
$132.00 136.00
121.00
Junior Tripod Tops
· Peter-Lisand can supply the Junior Tripods, wood or metal, to fit any
domestic or foreign head
· The tops are first quality aluminum castings and precision machined
for reliable service
· Models include: 35mm Arri Ball Top; 16mm Arn Ball Top; Miller " F"
Top; Miller Regular Top; " F" Ball Type NCE; Junior Flat Top; " F"
O'Connor C- B Top
Prices on Request.
Superior Shoulder Pod SSP-73
· Lightweight -- aluminum and steel construction
· Fully Adjustable -- 6adjustments fit the pod to operator's body, 2
separate adjustments locate camera to operator's eye.
· Easy handling -- Operator's hands are free to zoom and focus.
· Beautifully finished -- All parts are machined and finished to elimin-
ate glare.
·Waist straps provided
$297.00
Quick- Release System
Fast, Fast mounting camera, regardless of size or weight, mounts securely and rigidly to tripod in several seconds. Simply set camera in place and close latch. You're ready to shoot. To remove camera from tripod, just open the latch.
Only Two parts to system. The lower section mounts on any tripod with a1 / 4" or 3/8" threaded thumbscrew. The upper section mounts to the camera tripod socket.
Lightweight. Both the upper and lower blocks ( with the exception of the latch) are precision- machined from aluminum, so that little extra weight is added to the camera/tripod combination.
For Most Cameras. Movie, television, press and view cameras ( or even smaller cameras such as 21/4 and 35mm) can easily be equipped with the Quick- Release system.
Rugged and Long- Lasting. Quick- Release camera mounts are
precisely machined and ruggedly constructed so that they will not
break or wear out-- even under the most demanding of operating
conditions.
LOR-75 $ 175.00
MQR-76 Medium Duty Quick- Release System
Rapid Mounting -- Safety lock system secures camera in place rigidly on tripod or shoulder pod. Detaches instantly.
Lightweight-- The anodized aluminum and stainless steel construction weighs only nine ounces.
Durable-- The precision machined medium quick release provides the accuracy that makes it stand up to all kinds of operating conditions.
MOR76 $ 165.00
VC- 162
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LISTEC TELEVISION EQUIPMENT CORPORATION
39 Cain Drive
Plainview, NY 11803
(516) 694-8963
A-2000 SERIES ON-CAMERA DISPLAY SYSTEM
FEATURES ·Separate remote control module ·Rack mountable disk drive ·Separate keyboard ·50 foot cable ·Optional large character printer ·Provides simultaneous viewing
of on- air story and story editing ·EFP configuration available ·Monitor/Prompter has wide angle hood and
mirror assembly ·Separate linear power supply ·Mounting hardware for all cameras
SPECIFICATIONS
A- 2015W
15" monitor prompter wide angle hood and mirror assembly
Accommodates minimum focal lengths of 15mm on 1-1/4"
format, 11mm on 1" format and 8mm on 2/3" format separate
linear power supply and mounting hardware for all cameras
(Not available as EFP configuration)
Video
Composite video. Standard EIA RS- 170, . 35 to 2V
peak-to- peak
Power
Power from separate power supply, 120V AC, 50 watts
nominal, 65 watts maximum
Monitor
24V DC 1.25A nominal, 1.5A maximum
Video Bandwidth 32 MHz (-3dB)
Resolution
1,200 lines center, 950 lines corner at 40 ft. lamberts
External Controls Vertical scan reversal, horizontal scan reversal, brightness,
contrast
Video Input
One non- looping BNC connector
Dimensions
A- 2015W
Weight: 28 lbs., Monitor Size: 13" x12" x10-1/2", Vertical
Adjustment: 6"
A-2015
Weight: 26 lbs., Monitor Size: 13" x12" x10-1/2", Vertical
Adjustment: 6"
A- 2019W
As above, but with 19" monitor
A-2015
15" monitor prompter with standard hood for zoom lenses with
minimum focal lengths not less than 18mm on 1-1/4" format,
13.5mm on 1" format. Otherwise as for A-2015W, above.
Recommended for EFP configuration
A-2019
As A-2019W above, but with standard hood
A-2015SA
As A-2015 above, but mounted on roll-around dolly.
Recommended for use with lightweight ENG cameras and
small pan and tilt heads. ( No EFP configuration available)
A-2019SA
As A-2015SA above, but with 19" monitor
A-2015CS
15" floor mounted prompter and separate stand with semi-
reflective mirror for conference prompting
A-2019CS
As A-2015CS above, but with 19" monitor
A-2200
A-2210 A-2220
Script Tables Long table, for end to end layout of individual 8-1/2" x11" sheets. Includes 2/3" Vidicon Camera. Adjustable lighting,
and remote variable speed ( forward and reverse) conveyer belt control Short table, for continuous roll type scripts. Otherwise as A-2200 above Optional VDA with five outputs, non- looping. Can be mounted onto script table
A-2100
A-2150 A-2175
ScriptWriter System Script Writer comprising rack mountable disk drive and associated programmed electronics, separate keyboard. Total
disk storage equivalent to 6,120 lines of text, 22 characters per line. Upper and lower case characters with reverse polarity and input from typical typewriter keyboard internal and external Sync standard, video output formatted to produce five lines of text on prompter monitors. Ability to view on-air story and story editing simultaneously. Disk access time less than 1.0 second. Separate remote control module with pause/ start, next story, previous story, story reset and variable speed control with forward/reverse and 50' cable standard Optional large character printer, prints prompter copy to the right with production commands to the left, full 14" carriage with 1/4" high characters
Optional 9" monitors for edit and preview, separate displays For optional VDA, see A-2220 above
A-3300
Special Systems
Universal prompter support system including trapezoidal mirror, hood assembly and cradle for customer provided monitor. ( Accepts 17" x15" x16" monitor).
TELEPROMPTER SYSTEM
A-2100 SCRIPTWRITER KEYBOARD
A- 2015W MONITOR PROMPTER WITH EXTRA WIDE-ANGLE HOOD
A-3300 STUDIO PROMPTER
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-163
L-W INTERNATIONAL
50 West Easy Street Simi Valley, CA 93065 (805) 522-3284 TVVX 286518 BAUD-UR
TELECINE SYSTEMS
TWO 16mm PROJECTORS
SIX SLIDE PROJECTORS
Complete as illustrated, including JVC 310U color camera. Price: $ 39,500.00
ATHENA R
MULTI MEDIA TELECINE SYSTEMS DIPLEXING & MULTIPLEXERS
Up to six in/one out configurations. Novel 3 port, Athena optical multiplexer with 8:1 neutral density wheel and automatically controlled by ca mera electronics, is the heart of this
flexible system. The Athena multiplexer is sealed, prealigned optical and electronic assembly accepting C mount lenses and bayonet mount TV cameras. No projector or camera lenses are used, for the Athena multiplexer prism
and lenses focus on the projector gates; all exposed optical
ATHENA' 6000 UNIPLEX
ATHENA 4500 UNIPLEXR The Athena 4500 uniplexer is identical to the 4500 multiplexer except that it's an in- line right angle uniplex for 16mm film use only. It also features the 8:1 neutral density wheel and controlled iris, but with a single prism input to the camera field. The optical and electronic assembly is also pre-aligned, sealed and back-focused upon the projector's gate. The 4500 can be used with any bayonet mount camera.
surfacés are therefore out of the image plane, greatly
ATHENAR 6000 UNIPLEX
reducing dust and dirt problems. All three multiplexer ports are prism block assemblies and are always open, with any change in projector selection controlled by lamp control; no flip/flop mirror to delay source change or to produce mis registration; also permits any rate of dissolve transition with any projector and the super- imposition of three projectors simultaneously.
The Athena 6000 16mm uniplexer is designed for the ultimate in ease and quality in transferring film to different video
formats. The Athena 6000 Uniplex System employs aclean, vertical rack format to minimize space requirements, to group all controls, function lights and monitor into a convenient and accessible cluster; it features built-in frame counter and picture and wave-form monitor. All components
Added versatility occurs with use of our 2" x2" periscopic
are modular and stocked as complete sub- assemblies.
diplexer, doubling image inputs to any, or all, of the three multiplexer ports. Our 2" x 2" periscopic diplexer, though designed for Kodak Carousel or Ektagraphic use, can be used
to input avariety of slide or filmstrip projectors. When used with Kodak projectors, all projector functions are exposed
and trays can be easily changed, zeroed or manually
BASIC MULTIPLEX COMPONENTS Athena 4500 Telecine 16mm Projector Athena Multiplex Pedestal System Athena Prismatic Multiplexer, Filters & Mount Athena Slide Diplexer and Mount
(accepts one or two Kodak Slide Projectors)
$ 9,995.00 1,800.00
3,200.00
650.00
advanced.
Athena 16mm Plexer Lens
250.00
Additional quality and convenience results from our self-
Athena Slide Projector Plexer Lens
250.00
aligning pedestal and 2" x2" diplexer modules permitting the
Total $16,145.00
interchangeability of projectors into any of the multiplexer
ports. As an example, the configuration can be quickly changed from six 2" x2" slides to two 16mm and two 2" x2"
BASIC UNIPLEX SYSTEM Athena 4500 Uniplex System complete
(less camera)
$ 14,045.00
slides, etc.
While best results generally occur with adedicated camera, easy removal for other uses is encouraged through the use of astandard bayonet mount. Due to the wide ownership of TV cameras, Kodak slide projectors, etc., Athena multiplex systems can be ordered less these components. However, best results usually occur with aturn key system configured to your specific needs, producing abalanced system under our supervision.
TYPICAL ACCESSORIES
Color Camera
$ 6,000.00 -$ 30,000.00
Kodak Slide Projector*
345.00
Kodak Dissolve Control*
550.00
Athena 4500 Remote Control Panel
495.00
9" B&W Alignment Monitor and Mount
500.00
Video Tape Recorder
1,000.00 & up
Camera Control Unit (,exp & color correction)
2,945.00
*Multiplex only.
VC- 164
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
L-W INTERNATIONAL
50 West Easy Street Simi Valley, CA 93065 (805) 522-3284 TVVX 286518
BAUD-UR
TELECINE PROJECTORS
450O R 16mm Telecine Film Transport
The Athena 4500 r+ is designed for use in cable, industrial, medical, training, production and all but the most demanding broadcast television applications.
Electronic control, drive motors and reel drive sub- assemblies are mounted in a rigid horizontal and vertical base plate. Proven performance, ease of maintenance and low price are just afew benefits derived from owning the Athena 4500.
SPECIFICATIONS & FEATURES
· Flickerless projection of 16mm film at all frame rates · Frame rates: 24 frames per second, forward or reverse ( 25 fps) · Film Capacity 50-2000 feet ( 15.2-588 meters) · Unlimited hold time on single frame without damage to film and without
focus drift · Instantaneous change of direction, forward or reverse · Easy Film threading · Projector control panel: Motor Stop, Forward, Reverse, Lamp, Still, Single
Frame, Lighted Switches 1-2-4-6-8-12 frames per second ( 1, 2.1, 4.2, 6.3, 8.3, 12.5) · Optional Remote Control Functions: Same as projector control panel, plus ( optional) single button control of multiple functions or remote location delegation · Shutter: Five- blade, constant speed at all frame rates and still ( 2blades) · Light application time: 30.6% per TV field-5ms ( 50% per TV field-10ms) · Pulldown time: 5.5ms ( 5.3ms) · Cooling system: Separate motor- driven fan and heat filter system prevent damage to film or focus drift, even during prolonged viewing · Drive motors: two DC permanent magnet, servo controlled · Optical and magnetic playback · Sound output: Flat 600 ohm balanced + 8 DBM · Optical frequency response: 100 to 7kHz - ±2dB; signal to noise 60 dB; flutter . 2% DIN; distortion less than . 15% · Magnetic frequency response: 50 to 10 kHz i-2dB; signal to noise 60 dB; flutter . 2% DIN; distortion less than . 15% · Solid state preamp · Light output: Variable, depending upon light source and optical configuration. 750W tungsten halogen standard, other wattages available · Lamp intensity control ( when used with accessory pedastal) · Vertical and horizontal weave: Less than 0.2% of picture width · Focusing: Rack and pinion · Easy projector alignment: Four leveling screws ( when used with accessory pedestal · Power requirements: 105-120 VAC, 60 Hz ( 210-240 VAC, 50 Hz) 10 amps. ( 71 /2 amps) · Optical pickup: silicon solar cell · Dimensions: ( will full reels) 27 3x," high x30.3/8"wide x13 ,,,deep · Weight: Approx. 85- ( 38.5 kilograms) · New solid-state plug-in timing circuit, easily replaced as a unit if necessary · Critical operating parts self-lubricating · Heavy duty optional pedestal. Optical center of lens to base 48" 1.-.50" · High- Low lamp switch · Direct factory service · Safety feature: Indicator light on master switch glows when power to projector has proper polarity
PEDESTAL
ATHENA. 4500
.UBC BCC UUUUUU
SINGLE AND DUAL REMOTE CONTROL PANELS
ATHENA® 4500- DELUXE
Includes pedestal base and one lens, automatic cue system, 2000-
feet reel capacity, EEX300 Watt lamp and one year warranty.
ATHENA®, 4500- DELUXE
$ 11,150.00
ACCESSORIES Remote control panel rack mount 119"/4RU) As above but with frame counter Remote control panel for dual projectors As above but with frame counters Remote control cable ( per foot)
PROJECTION Et EXCITER LAMPS EEX 300W, 120V ( 45001 BSK Exciter
PROJECTION LENSES ( Standard) 2.5 inch f/2.1 3.0 inch f/2,0 3.0 inch f/3.5 3.5 inch f/2,5 3.5 inch f/4,5 4.0 inch f/2.5 4.0 inch f14,5
$575.00 775.00 970.00
1,350.00 1 25
$43.50 6 50
$350.00 450.00 350.00 450.00 350.00 495.00 350.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 165
L-W INTERNATIONAL
50 West Easy Street Simi Valley, CA 93065 (805) 522-3284 TWX 286518
BAUD-UR
TELECINE PROJECTORS
6000 TELECINE
ATHENA® 6000 16mm TELECINE FILM TRANSPORT
The Athena 6000 is designed to meet most professional telecine requirements in NTSC, PAL and SECAM countries. Many of the features and benefits listed below are exclusive to the Athena 6000:
· Slow motion/still frame · Automatically phase- locks to NTSC, PAL or SECAM field
rates · Unlimited hold time in still frame mode · Precision adjustable film gate assembly with 8.73mm x
10.16mm aperture · Cost-effective modular design · Multi-voltage/multi-frequency · Cueing sensor ( stops film) · 50 to 5,000-foot film capacity ( 15.2 meters - 1520 meters) · Remote control option · Automatic lamp change-over · Moderate price · Two year parts and workmanship warranty
The Athena 6000 is totally modular, enclosed in aRTMA rack 19 inches (480mm) wide by 69 1/4 inches ( 1.7 meters) high. Each module contains all related electronics. These modules are sold separately for emergency back-up inventory. All connections are plug-in to further facilitate easy servicing.
Solid-state technology reel tension sensors permit a wide range of reel sizes and film footage, from 50 feet ( 15.2 meters) to 5,000 feet ( 1520 meters). The result is gentle film handling. Upper and lower loop formers combined with an automatic stop feature ( film break) further protects the film.
Dual projection lamps have automatic change-over feature. Illuminated pushbutton on control panel will enter flashing mode if change- over occurs. Dual exciter lamps are also equipped with automatic change- over.
Price includes follow-up visit by Athena Field Service Engineer at no charge, within the 48 contiguous States and District of Columbia, USA. Other locations require only per diem fee plus-transportation.
+BOO BIM UUUUUU
SINGLE AND DUAL REMOTE CONTROL PANELS
ATHENA® 6000
Includes automatic cue system, automatic lamp change-
over ( projection and exciter), 5000-feet reel capacity. ELH
300 watt lamps, two year warranty
$20,250.00
ACCESSORIES Remote control panel rack mount ( 19"/4RU)
As above but with frame counter Remote control panel for dual projectors As above but with frame counters Remote control cable ( per foot)
$575.00 775.00 970.00
1 350.00 1 25
PROJECTION Et EXCITER LAMPS ELH 300W, 120V BSI( Exciter
$19.50 6 50
PROJECTION LENSES ( Standard) 2.5 inch f/2.1
3.0 inch f/2.0 3.0 inch f/3.5 3.5 inch f/2.5 3.5 inch f/4.5 4.0 inch f/2.5
4.0 inch f/4.5
$350.00
450.00 350.00 450.00 350.00 495.00
350.00
VC- 166
Prices and Specifications S·ibject to Change Without Notice.
MAGNASYNC/MOVIOLA CORP.
5539 Riverton Avenue North Hollywood, CA 91601 (818) 763-8441 Telex 67-3199
FILM- TO- TAPE TRANSFER SYSTEM
VIDEOLA® V-400 COMPACT FILM- TO- TAPE TRANSFER
The V-400 COMPACT is designed specifically for broadcast applications which require premium-quality video at an affordable price.
A single unit offers superb video transfers of 16mm films up to 3,000 feet in length. An interconnected pair can provide continuous video from multiple- reel films; the independent video outputs allow clean switching between reels. A dual installation occupies only 14 square feet of floor space.
Except for being limited to 16mm composite-sound films, the V-400 COMPACT offers all of the quality and value of the V-1000. Virtually silent in operation, it delivers superb Flickerless Prism® image quality, with no sign of flicker or jitter. The Videola transport is easy to load, and exceptionally gentle with film. Installation and maintenance are simple and straightforward.
Controls: All controls conveniently placed for minimum lost motion. INCHING button located on transport.
Control Panel: Power ON- OFF, PROJECTION LAMP switch. Selectable 24/25 fps SOUND SPEED switch. MASTER SOUND SPEED switch for sound speed and stop from sound speed. Pushbutton controls for variable speed forward/reverse direction. MASTER pushbutton control for variable speed forward/reverse. Electronic advance/retard control. Composite optical/magnetic audio level control. Exciter lamp switch. Video level control.
Input Panel: Line fuses, two each 10 amp, 3AG type for 120 VAC. Interlock remote input plug for slave operation. Interlock remote output jack for master operation. Speaker output. A/B wind selector switch for each torque motor.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electronics: Power supply and electronics in removable chassis/card cage, mounted on pedestal base.
Transport: Modular dual sprocket servo drive systems. Crystal- controlled or variable sound speed. Hollow " FLICKERLESS PRISM®" type optical projection. All surfaces in critical areas recessed to prevent film damage. Composite optical and magnetic sound pickup. Film breakage interlock automatically shuts off transport and reel motors. Can be interlocked to compatible external pulse source. Manual inching provided.
Film Capacity: 2,000 ft. ( 610m) on lab core or 3,000 ft. ( 915m) standard projection reel.
Optical Response: 50-7000 Hz 3dB, SMPTE or DIN standards.
Wow and Flutter: Less than . 08% RMS or DIN weighted. Resolution: Video system limited.
Projection Aperture: Variable on monitor screen; selectable by adjustment. Transfer Capability: 2fps to 150 forward and reverse without flicker or jitter.
Film Speed: Crystal- controlled sound speed forward 24 or 25 frames per second t . 01% ( 2 . 0024 fps). Pushbutton switch- activated variable speed from less than two fps to six times sound speed in both forward and reverse directions. Controlled acceleration and deceleration for gentle film handling. Interlock mode to external source. Digital displayed film speed.
Torque System: Switch- selectable automatic or manual turn on/off for supply or takeup torque motor.
Audio System: Output- 15 Watts RMS, 8Ohms. 600 Ohm balanced transformer- isolated output for each track and 2,000 Ohm quasi line output also provided. Headphone output automatically disconnects external speakers. SMPTE or DIN equalization. Dampening arm system results in low wow and flutter. Sound head in line with picture.
Picture Steadiness: Typical 0.2%, vertical and horizontal.
Input Power: 115/230 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz, 1200 Watts, typical maximum.
Dimensions:
Height
Width Depth Weight, net, uncrated
4111041mm)
4011016mm) 29"( 737mm) 135 lbs. ( 62kg)
V-400-16 16mm Videola Compact' Film- to- Video On- Line Broadcast System, " Master"
V-400-16 16mm Videola Compact s Film- to- Video On- Line Broadcast System, " Slave"
$39,975.00 $35,975.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 167
MAGNASYNC/MOVIOLA CORP.
5539 Riverton Avenue North Hollywood, CA 91601 (818) 763-8441 Telex 67-3199
FILM- TO- TAPE TRANSFER SYSTEMS
VIDEOLA® V-1000 FILM- TO- TAPE TRANSFER SYSTEM
·Resolution: Video System Limited ·Wow and Flutter: Less Than . 06% RMS or DIN Weighted ·Magnetic Response: 50-10,000 Hz± 3dB, SMPTE or DIN
Standards ·Film Color Correction: Variable Color Temperature
Light Source
The unique Flickerless Prism® optical system allows a smooth continuous film motion, and produces avideo image consisting of frames dissolving one into the next. The transfer is completely independent of television synchronization and scanning rate, so the film can be transported at any speed while the video image remains sharp and clear, with no sign of flicker, jitter or frame lines.
Picture resolution is extremely high. Imaging is by ahigh-grade video camera, using the Videola optics. The machine can be supplied with or without acamera, so the user may employ an existing ENG/EFP camera. In either case, the camera may be readily removed for other purposes.
SPECIFICATIONS
Picture Transport: Modular dual sprocket servo drive system. Crystal controlled or variable sound speed. All surfaces in critical areas recessed to prevent film damage. Composite optical and magnetic sound pickup -- 16mm; optical sound pickup -- 35mm. Manual inching provided.
Sound Transport: Modular dual sprocket servo tach drive system. Crystal- controlled or variable sound speed. Can be interlocked to picture transport or compatible external pulse source. One 16mm edge track or center track SMPTE or DIN equalization. Sound head in line with picture. Manual inching provided. Edge-track heads standard. Interchangeable with optional 3-track ( 35mm) or 2-track EBU (16mm) heads.
Film Capacity: 2,000-ft. ( 610m) on lab core or 3,000-ft. ( 915m) standard projection reel.
Film Speed: Crystal-controlled sound speed forward 24 or 25 frames per second, + . 01% 1 ± . 0024 fps). Pushbutton switch-activated variable speed from less than two fps to six times ( 35mm) or ten times sound speed ( 16mm) in both forward and reverse directions.
Torque System: Switch-selectable automatic or manual turn on/off for each supply or takeup torque motor.
Audio System: Built-in control and mixing facilities for four audio tracks including composite optical or magnetic. Output: 15 Watts RMS, 8Ohms. 600 Ohm balanced transformer- isolated output for each track and 2,000 Ohm quasi line output also provided.
Control Panel: Power ON- OFF, PROJECTION LAMP switch. LOCK switch for sound transport. Selectable 24/25 fps. SOUND SPEED switch for both transports. PICTURE MASTER SOUND SPEED switch for sound speed and stop from sound speed. PICTURE MASTER pushbutton control for variable speed forward/reverse. Electronic advance/retard control for each transport.
Audio Panel: Composite optical/mag level control. Magnetic level controls # 1, #2, # 3. Master audio level control. Exciter lamp switch. Servo iris control.
Input Panel: Line fuses, two each 10 amp, 3AG type for 120 VAC. Interlock remote input plug for slave operation. Interlock remote output jack for master operation. Speaker output. A/ Bwind selector switch for each torque motor.
Electronics: Power supply and electronics in removable chassis/card cage, mounted on pedestal base.
Optical Response: 16mm: 50-7000 Hz ± 3dB, SMPTE standard. 35mm: 50-12,000 Hz ± 3dB, SMPTE standard.
Projection Aperture: Variable on monitor screen; selectable by adjustment. Anamorphic capability standard, manual pan-scan.
Picture Steadiness: Typical 0.2%, vertical and horizontal.
Input Voltage: 115/230 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz. Input Power: 1200 watts, typical maximum.
V-1016/35 V-1035 V-1016
16/35mm Combination Videola ® Console Film- to- Tape Transfer System
35mm Videola ® Console Film- to- Tape Transfer System 16mm Videola® Console Film- to- Tape Transfer System
$69,500.00 52,950.00 49,950.00
VIDEOLA® V-500
A two- plate system for composite- sound films up to 6000' in length, the V-500 includes all of the quality and convenience features of the V-1000 in avery compact form.
Major components, including 16mm and 35mm transports are interchangeable with those of the V-1000. Transport and sound controls are combined in a single, centrally- located control panel. And, of course, the V-500 may be slaved to aV-1000 or other external
system for control.
V-500-16/35 16/35mm Combination Videola ® Console
Film- to- Tape Transfer System
V-500-35
35mm Videola® Console
Film- to- Tape Transfer System
V-500-16
16mm Videola® Console
Film- to- Tape Transfer System
$58,850.00 47,500.00 44,950.00
Options Available at Time of Manufacture:
16mm Sound Module with Two- Track EBU Magnetic Head
in place of standard, add
$1,830.00
35mm Sound Module with Three- Track Magnetic Head
in place of standard, add
1,950.00
35mm Anamorphic Capability with Manual
Pan and Scan
5,000.00
Accessories: 16mm Picture Module with Composite Optical/Magnetic Sound
35mm Picture Module with Composite Optical Sound 16mm Sound Module with Single Track Magnetic Head
35mm Sound Module with Single Track Magnetic Head
$13,750.00 14,950.00 4,450.00 5,250.00
Videola is aregistered trademark of MAGNASYNC/MOVIOLA CORPORATION
VC- 168
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
NALPAK VIDEO
1937-C Friendship Drive El Cajon, CA 92020 (619) 258-1200
SALES,
INC.
TEST CHARTS/SLIDES
.1> 4-'01rAtiv
41>
ACCU -SLIDES
ACCU -CHART" SET
Video Test Chart System for Field and Studio use includes: Color Chart, Logarithmic Reflectance Chart, Resolution Chart, Registration Chart, Linearity Chart.
ACC- 2 Set of 5charts with cover and pouch
$99.50
INDIVIDUAL 9" x12" CHARTS
Grey Scale Chart Basic standard for setting light response characteristics of cameras.
Essential for balancing R, G and B channels in 3- tube color cameras. Chart consists of 2sets of 9neutral grey patches on uniform grey back-
ground. Reflectances vary from 3% to 60% according to EIA Logarithmic ( 21 Law. Dead black ( R 0.5%) patch establishes black level.
AC- GS Grey Scale
$34.95
Color Reference Chart A subjective reference chart for checking color rendition. Consists of
three primary ( Red, Green, Blue) and three secondary ( Yellow, Cyan, Magenta) plus 4grey levels. In color bar format, but not intended for quantiative use. Use to evaluate overall system color reproduction by
comparing transmitter image with original chart. Also for use as afield standard; record image of chart at beginning of each tape and adjust monitor on playback for proper color rendition.
AC -CR Color Reference
$34.95
Linearity Chart Standard EIA " Ball Chart" for adjustment of camera and monitor
linearity. Use with electronically generated grating test pattern for quanitative measurements as specified in EIA RS- 170.
AC -LN Linearity
$19.95
Resolution Chart For evaluation of frequency response of video systems. Adapted from
EIA standard chart, includes resolution targets for 200 to 800 TV lines in center and at four corners. Also, test objects to detect ringing and streaking. Continuous netural grey background for shading adjust-
ments.
AC- RS Resolution
$19.95
ACCU -CHART
Registration Chart Similar to EIA standard chart, used primarily for registration of 3-tube color cameras. Black square grid on white background includes
200-600 line resolution wedges and circular targets for evaluation of linearity.
AC- AG Registration
$19.95
ACCU -SLIDES TM
Provides the same accuracy for use with Telecine set-up and alignment as the standard Accu -Chart system. Accu -Slides are available in either apositive or negative image. They are mounted in a2" x2" glass protected format which is supplied with approved pin registered television mounts and anti- Newton ring optical glass. The Accu -Slide set consists of the same five test patterns as the Accu -Chart set and cornes in acustom designed wooden box. Accu -Slides are also available individually.
ACCU -SLIDES
Test Slides, available as positive or negative AS- ST Set of 5slides complete with wooden box
$80.00
INDIVIDUAL SLIDES
AS- AG AS- RS AS -LN AS -CR AS- GS WB 1
Registration Resolution Linearity Color Reference Grey Scale Wooden Box, holds total of 7slides
$11.00 11.00 11.00 11.00 11.00 39.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 169
NISUS VIDEO,
6329 Lomas NE Albuquerque, NM 87110 (505) 268-4587
INC.
STOP ACTION VIDEO
N- 79E
NISUS N- 79E STOP ACTION VIDEO
Nisus stop- action video, is now available for the lkegami HL -79E broadcast- quality ENG/EFP camera.
Widely- acclaimed Nisus shuttered video is now available on the world's most respected broadcast camera, the Ikegami HL -79E. Dramatic Nisus clarity in real-time and no- motion playback, superior color saturation and an absence of blur during zooms and pans combine with reknowned Ikegami quality to give you the most reliable NTSC-standard video.
FEATURES ·Low- capacitance diode gun Plumbiconsr.. ·Significant performance advantages in sensitivity, signal-to-noise
ratio, registration accuracy, resolution and RFI immunity. ·The Nisus shutter is continuously adjustable from 1/250th to
1/5000th of a second. ·Shutter speed may be changed at any time, either on the camera or
remotely ( with optional CCU), without stopping the camera. · No background smear or loss of color saturation during pans or
zooms. ·Superior image clarity during action sequences. Outstanding dy-
namic resolution. ·The shutter may also be turned off, thus allowing the camera to
be used as astandard video camera.
SPECIFICATIONS Shutter: Shutter system: rotary focal plane shutter with single
opening.
Shutter speed: continuously adjustable from 1/250th to 1/5000th of asecond ( system may be turned off, thereby providing normal video).
Scanning: 525 lines/frame; 60 fields/second with or without shutter. 30 frames/second ( 2: 1interface) with or without shutter.
HIL79E Shutter for HL79E Series
$29,600.00
VC- 170
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
@ffleG1
CAMERA SUPPORT SYSTEMS
100 Kalmus Drive Costa Mesa, CA 92626 (714) 979-3993 ( 213) 627-4057 Telex 685-641
SYSTEM 30 Model 30 fluid head with one handle, Model 55M claw ball metal tripod with
spreader and spike guards
$2098.00
Same as above, except substituting Model 55W claw ball wooden tripod
O'Connor molded system case for above ( 08143)
2019.00 . 179.00
Anvil"ATA" case for above ( 00985)
279.00
SYSTEM 50 Model 50 fluid head with two handles, Model 55M claw ball metal tripod with spreader and spike guards
Same as above except substituting Model 55W wooden tripod
$3129.00 2998.00
O'Connor molded system case for above ( 08143)-- 179.00
Anvil"ATA" case for above ( 00985)
279.00
SYSTEM 52 Model 50D fluid head with two handles, Model 102B Hydro-Ped
Anvil " ATA" case for above ( 00986)
$ 7398.00 449.00
SYSTEM 100 Model 100 fluid head with side loading
platform and two handles,
Model 55M claw ball metal tripod with
spreader and spike guards
$4298.00
Anvilite tripod case and Anvil " ATA" fluid head case for above ( 100C-094 and 55-019) 404.00
SYSTEM 102 Model 100 fluid head with side loading platform and two handles, Model 102 Hydro-Ped
Anvil " ATA" cases for fluid head and Hydro-Ped ( 100C-094 and 102B-112)
$8685.00 664.00
SYSTEM 105 Model 100 fluid head with side loading platform and two hand:es, Model 155W super claw ball wooden tripod with spreader
$4398.00
Anvilite tripod case and Anvil " ATA" fluid head case for above ( 100C-094 and 155-019) 404.00
SYSTEM 105- HD
Model 100C- HD fluid head with side loading platform
and two extendable handles, Model 155W Super
Claw Ball Tripod with spreader
$ 5034.00
Same as above except with Mitchell Base and tripod
4955.00
Anvil " ATA" cases for fluid head and Anvilite
tripod case for above ( 08172 and 155-019)
404.00
CAMERA SUPPORT SYSTEMS
SYSTEM 50
SYSTEM 102
SYSTEM 52
SYSTEM 155 Model 150 fluid head with two handles, Model 155W super claw ball wooden tripod with spreader
$7498.00
Anvilite tripod case and Anvil " ATA" fluid head case for above ( 155B-110 and 155-019)
458.00
Price applies if purchased with Camera Support System
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 171
GUOU
CAMERA SUPPORT SYSTEMS
100 Kalmus Drive Costa Mesa, CA 92626 (714) 979-3993 ( 213) 627-4057 Telex 685-641
FLUID HEADS/TRIPODS
MODEL 30 FLUID CAMERA HEADS
Fluid Head with quick release adjustable camera platform and Claw Ball/Pro Jr Base
with tiedown all assembly, one 10" handle, and counterbalance adjustment
wrench
$ 1395.00
Extra Handle ( 1/2" x10")
70.00
Anvil " ATA" case for above ( 30B-066)
209.00t
MODEL 50 FLUID CAMERA HEADS
Fluid Head with 150 in. lb. counterbalance spring, quick release adjustable camera
platform and Claw Ball/Pro Jr Base with tiedown assembly, one 15"
handle
$2295.00
Extra Handle ( 1/2" x15")
80.00
Anvil "ATA" case for above 1500-1301
239.00t
MODEL 100 FLUID CAMERA HEADS
Fluid Head with 500 in. lb. counterbalance spring, Mitchell base with tiedown
assembly, side loading platform and one 15" handle
43395.00
Same as above except fixed camera platform
3150.00
Super Claw Ball Base for either of above, add
80.00
Extra Handle (5/8" x15")
95.00
Extended Handle ( 3/4" x26") in place of 15" handle, add
70.00
Anvil"ATA" case for above ( 100C-094)
295.00t
MODEL 100- HD FLUID CAMERA HEADS
Fluid Head with 800 or 1000 in, lb. counterbalance spring, Mitchell base with tie-
down side loading platform and one extendable handle
43950.00
Same as above except fixed camera platform
3675.00
Super Claw Ball Base for either of above add
75.00
Extra extendable handle
199.00
Anvil "ATA" case for above
295.00t
MODEL 150 FLUID CAMERA HEADS
Fluid Camera Head with 1000 in. lb. counterbalance spring, Mitchell base with tie-
down assembly, side loading platform and one 15" handle
86595.00
Mitchell to Super Claw Ball Adaptor with tiedown
200.00
Extra Handle ( 15")
95.00
Extended Handle ( 3/4" x26") in place of 15" handle, add
70.00
Anvil " ATA" case ( 150B-110)
349.00t
MODEL 102 HYDRO-PED
Complete Hydro-Ped with black polyurethane finish and Pro Jr top plate .. $5195.00
OPTIONS
Mitchell top plate and white polyurethane finish
N/C
Anvil " ATA" Hydro-Ped Case 1102B-112)
369.00t
HYDRO-PED ACCESSORIES
102B-116 Studio Wheels, set of three 6" Studio- Type Wheels
4390.00
Hydro-Ped Casters
102B-114 3-1/2" Wheels 12 fixed, 1caster)
260.00
102B-115 3-1/2" Wheels ( 3casters)
280.00
102B-004 Pro Jr Top Plate
130.00
102B-016 Mitchell Top Plate
140.00
MODEL 55M- B TRIPODS- Claw Ball
Claw Ball Metal Tripod Complete: ( regular tripod, spreader and spike guards) Claw Ball Metal Tripod only:
Regular ( 56" to 24") Baby ( 24" to 18")
$ 795.00
619.00 595.00
MODEL 55W- B- TRIPODS- Claw Ball
Claw Ball Wooden Tripod Complete: (regular or sawed off tripod, spreader and spike guards) Claw Ball Wooden Tripod only:
Regular ( 60" to 30") Sawed Off ( 43" to 19") Baby ( 22" to 17"
$679.00 495.00 495.00 485.00
MODEL 155W TRIPODS- Super Claw Ball or Mitchell
Super Claw Ball Wooden Tripod (Please specify Super Claw Ball or Mitchell top casting)
Regular ( 67" to 38") Sawed Off ( 58" to 34") Baby ( 38" to 26")
$ 739.00 739.00 729.00
MODEL 30
MODEL 100
MODEL 55M- B, Regular and Baby
MODEL 45 HI HATS
Claw Ball Hi- Hat ( 5-1/2" height)
S155.00
MODEL 145 HI HATS
Super Claw Ball Hi- Hat ( 6" height)
$ 225.00
MODEL 53 TRIPOD Dolly
Tripod Dolly with 6" diameter wheels; choice of: Regular ( 43" diameter) Wide Stance ( 48" d(ameter)
$1195.00 1195.00
MODEL 54 TRIPOD Spreader
Spreader, Internal adjustable with locking pins
$ 169.00
MOLDED CASES- For Systems and Tripods
Fits Systems 30 Et 50 or Model 55 Reg (08143) Fits Model 55 Baby ! 08144) Fits System 30 Et 50, wooden 108174) Fits Model 155 Regular ( 081691 Fits Model 155 Baby ( 08170)
$179.00t 169.00t 184,00f 199.00t 19300f
TRIPODS- Cases
Fit all Model 55 ( Metal or Wood) Regular Length ( 55-019) Baby Length ( 55-020)
Fit all Model 155s Regular Et Sawed off Length ( 155-0221.... Baby Length ( 155-023)
$ 109.00t 89.00 149.00
149.00t
MODEL 51 CLAW BALL/COLUMN ADAPTOR
Claw Ball to Round Column Adaptor (Please specify 1-3/4", 1-7/8", or 2")
$ 195.00
MODEL 21 VIDEO MONITOR SIDE MOUNT
A Universal Side Mount Plate for mounting any monitor beside a video camera, with 2-318-16 screws
tprice applies if purchased with system or tripod.
$175.00
VC- 172
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
laùee'
CAMERA SUPPORT SYSTEMS
100 Kalmus Drive Costa Mesa, CA 92626 (714) 979-3993 ( 213) 627-4057 Telex 685-641
TRIPOD - Components
00896
Retractable Spike Guards ( set of 3)
55-009
Claw Ball Top Casting
155-001 Super Claw Ball Top Casting
155-017 Mitchell Top Casting
08119
Spare Stainless Steel Spike and Nut
08120
Spreader Lock Pins, ea
55B-021 Tripod foot, w/spreader attachment
ADAPTORS
To mate base of Fluid Head to top casting of tripod. 155-024 Super Claw Ball to Mitchell, with tie-down
08111
Mitchell to Arri 35, with tie- down
100C-060 Mitchell to Super Claw Ball, with tie- down
00823
Pro Jr/Flat to Mitchell, with tie- down
50D-062 Pro Jr/Flat to Arri 16
00843
Pro Jr/Flat to Claw Ball with tie- down
$ 29.00 125.00 195.00 195.00 4 50 5 70
8.00
$325.00 295.00 200.00 145.00 125.00 130.00
ADAPTORS AND COMPONENTS
30B-057
.,
.
isr- gs ,,
30B-058
·
a wo,, 30B-067 Fe e
30B-068
i·-.1111MIL_, !,
FOR MODEL 30
50D-123
I iin,
is
50D-096
"Ull
se
50D-095 `118iLe,- ,
50D 131
FOR MODEL 50
FLUID HEAD COMPONENTS
Camera Platforms ( handles not included) For Model 30
30B-057 Lisand adjustable Quick Release Platform Assembly, with
Camera Plate and Screw ( 3/8" - 16")
$320.00
30B-058 Cine 60 adjustable Quick Release Platform Assembly, with
Camera Plate and Screw ( 3/8" - 16")
$320.00
30B-067 O'Connor adjustable Quick Release Platform Assembly,
with Camera Plate with Screw ( 3/8" - 16")
$320.00
30B-068 O'Connor Side Loading adjustable Quick Release Platform Assembly, with Camera Plate and Screw
(3/8" - 16")
$385.00
100C-074
100C-087
.r-e--31Ems _
FOR MODEL 100
150B-109 FOR MODEL 150
For Model 50
50D-123 O'Connor adjustable Quick Release Platform Assembly,
with Camera Plate and Screw ( 3/8" - 16")
$320.00
50D-096 Cine 60 adjustable Quick Release Platform Assembly, with
Camera Plate and Screw ( 3/8" - 16")
$320.00
50D-095 Lisand adjustable Quick Release Platform Assembly, with
Camera Plate and Screw ( 3/8" - 16")
$320.00
50D-131
O'Connor Side Loading adjustable Quick Release Platform
Assembly, with Camera Plate and Screw
(3/8" - 16")
$385.00
For Model 100 or 100-HD
100C-074 Fixed Camera Platform with fixed Camera Screw .. $370.00
100C-087 O'Connor Side Loading adjustable Quick Release Platform with Camera Plate and Two Screws ( 3/8" - 16"). $695.00
For Model 150
150B-109 O'Connor Side Loading adjustable Quick Release Platform
with Removable Side Loading Camera Mounting Plate and
Two Screws ( 3/8" - 16")
$695.00
Handles
08093
Standard Handle for Models C or 30 ( 1/2" diameter, 10"
length)
$70.00
08094
Standard Handle for Model 50 ( 1/2" diameter, 15" length)
08095
$80.00 Standard Handle for Model 100 or 150 ( 5/8" diameter, 15"
length)
$95.00
08122
Extended Handle for Video for Models 100 or 150 ( 3/4"
diameter, 26" length)
$170.00
00816
Dual Video Handle Set for Model 30 or 50 with fixed Single
Point Platform
$250.00
Camera Mounting Plates with Screws
08065
Lisand Type for Models 30 or 50
08066
Cine 60 Type for Models 30 or 50
18137
O'Connor Type for Models30 or 50
08118
Side Mounting Type for Model 50
08107
Side Mounting Type for Models 100 or 150
08106
3/8" - 16" Replacement Screw
00841
1/4" - 20" Replacement Screw
$ 35.00 35.00 35.00 40.00
125.00 3 00 3 00
Bases ( tie-down assembly is included)
08068
Pro Jr/Flat Base for Models 30 or 50
100C-096 Pro Jr Base for Model 100
08067
Claw Ball/Pro Jr Base for Models 30 or 50
50D-060 Arri 16 Ball Base for Models 30 or 50
08121 50D-128 100C-090
Arri 35 Ball Base for Models 30 or 50 Mitchell Base for Model 50 Mitchell Base for Model 100
100C-092 Super Claw Ball Base for Model 100
08108
Flat Base for Models 30 or 50
100C-095 Arri 35 Ball Base for Model 100
$130.00 145.00
130.00 95.00
170.00 150.00 150.00 225.00
55.00 170.00
Replacement Tie -Down Assemblies
08102
Pro Jr/Flat Base or Pro Jr/Flat to Arri 16 Adaptor.
08070
Claw Ball/Pro Jr Base
08071
Pro Jr/Flat to Claw Ball Adaptor
08110 08112
Pro Jr/Flat to Mitchell Adaptor or Mitchell Base Arri 35 Ball Base
08073 08113
Super Claw Base or Mitchell to Super Claw Ball Adaptor
Mitcheli to Arri 35 Adaptor
$30.00 45.00 45.00 35.00
55.00
50.00 55.00
Frices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 173
OLYMPUS
145 Crossways Park West
Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 364-1300 Telex 145-523
PORTABLE VIDEO SYSTEMS
COLOR VIDEO CAMERAS
Ease of operation puts video cameras from Olympus in aclass of their own. Focus, white balance and exposure are all automated to make video photography with an Olympus video camera easy.
Automatic focusing The video cameras from Olympus employ an active autofocus system using an infrared beam.
Continuous, fully automatic white balancing The full- auto white balance control assures properly adjusted color indoors or out.
Automatic exposure The exposure automatically and continuously adjusts to changing lighting conditions.
High resolution, extremely sensitive Newcosvicon pickup tube Exceptional image definition and high resolution are the hallmarks of the Newcosvicon image pickup tube. This tube also offers excellent low- light performance.
VX -305
Don't be fooled by this camera's light weight and easy operation. Inside this slim, 2.43 lb. camera reside the latest advances in electronic automation and pickup tube miniaturization to make it the lightest fullautomatic video camera in the world.
·Detachable microphone · Backlight compensation switch · Fade button ·Auto/manual focus selector ·6X Power zoom lens · 1/2" B/W electronic viewfinder
· Date/time display selector ·Power standby/operate switch ·White balance switch ·Tripod mount
VX-305 Compact Color Video Camera with
Auto Focus 6x f/1.2 Power Zoom Lens
(Macro), VF- KG 1Pistol Grip
$975.00
VX -304
The VX-304 is atop- performance, fully automatic camera that lets you enjoy either the simplicity of point- and- shoot operation or the wide-open creative potential of full-
manual override, ultra- low available- light shooting and a host of automated special
effects. Its truly first-rate performance makes it ideal for professionals and advanced video photographers, as well as beginners.
Full- function viewfinder monitor
You can monitor nine functions essential for
camera operation right on the viewfinder screen with the help of the OK Monitor.
Titling facilities Under a cover on the camera's left side there's a flexible, easy-to- use character generator for titling. With simple keyboard operation, eight different titles can be composed and stored in memory.
FEATURES ·Stereo microphone · Focus out button ·8X Zoom lens ·Zoom lever/Macro setting knob ·Date/Stopwatch display mode selector
· Fade button ·Recording review button ·Recording start/stop button ·Auto/Manual focus selector ·VCR playback control buttons ·White balance selector ·Auto/Manual aperture control ·Stopwatch start-stop/lap-reset buttons
VX-304 Color Video Camera
with Stereo Audio
Recording Capability, Auto Focus 8x f/1.4
Power Zoom Lens ( Macro), VF-KF4 Elec-
tronic Viewfinder
$1350.00
WOODBURY VIDEOLITE
Finally, video lights designed for video. A must for all serious devotees of video photography, for that extra luminosity when it's needed. Without bulky, heavy, hot equipment to make supplementary lighting difficult.
FEATURES ·Cool operation for convenience, comfort,
longer lamp life · Lightweight and compact, a mere 8 ozs. ·3400° K color temperature, correct for
video ·Quartz Halogen lamp for full output
throughout lamp life ·40° light beam covers 99% of video tube
requirements ·Adjustable barn doors for professional
light pattern control
Model 120 for AC operation, provides 80 foot/candles ( at 10 ft.)
Model 12L for DC operation, provides 75 foot/candles ( at 10 ft.) ( requires Battery
Pack and Charger 12B)
Model 12L (DC) Woodbury VideoLite
$ 74.50
Model 12B Battery Pack
149.50
Model 120 (AC) Woodbury Video Lite
74.50
Model 12L Replacement Lamp for Woodbury Video -
Lite
29.95
Model 120
Replacement Lamp for Woodbury Video -
Lite
29.95
VC- 174
Prices and Specifications Sul:Oct to Change Without Notice.
OMNIMOUNT SYSTEMS
10850 Vanowen Street North Hollywood, CA 91605 (818) 766-9000 Telex 181149/West/ LSA
·
101CA
100WB
101SWA
THE 100 SERIES OF OMNIMOUNT ASSEMBLIES
100WA
Wall Mount Assembly, with a maximum recommended load of 70
lbs. · The single- bend tube and clamp/flange unit attaches to the back of the device that is to be mounted.
100WA
$ 69.95
100WB
Wall Mount Assembly, with a maximum recommended load of 70 lbs.* There is a double- bend tube, with a clamp/flange unit tha
attaches to the bottom of the device that is to be mounted.
100 WB
$ 73.95
100WBZ-802
Wall Mount Assembly, with a maximum recommended load of70 lbs. · There is adouble- bend tube. The unit is designed specifically
for use with the BOSE® Model 802 speaker, and includes all
necessary hardware for attaching it to the speaker.
100 WBZ -8 02
$76.50
101RWA/101CA
Both of these models are Ceiling Mount Assemblies with amaximum
rated load of 60 lbs.* The 101 CA has aceiling plat e for di rect mount ing into the ceiling. Where height extensio n is requ ired, use the
101RWA. It is ideal for suspended ceiling installations ,an d mounts securely above the false ceiling line. The coupler has astandard 3/4" tapered female plumbing pipe thread at the open end. A finishing flange " dresses down" the ceiling tile.
101 RWA 101 CA
$ 71.50 69.95
101SWA
Short Tube Assembly, with flange has a maximum reco mm ended load of 70 lbs.* This unit is for close mounting on walls, floors ,or ceilings.
101 SWA
$ 60.50
101STO
Short Tube Assembly, without flange; maximum recommended loa d
of 70 lbs.* This unit comes with nuts and washers, fo r di rect
installation on the mounting surface.
101 STO
$ 52.50
101VDM
Short Tube Assembly; maximum recommended load of 60 lbs."
Available for horn and driver combinations made by some leadi ng
manufacturers.
101 VDM
$ 68.95
THE 501 SERIES OF OMNIMOUNT ASSEMBLIES
All Omnimount models bearing the " L" designatio n are ma de w itha strong but thinner wall tubing, along with a more econom ica l bonding process for the ball and tube.
These models are a cost-efficient and effective alterna ti ve for
light- duty applications. Maximum recommended load on all ofth e 50L Series: 20 lbs."
THE 50 SERIES OF OMNIMOUNT ASSEMBLIES
50LWA Wall Mount Assembly, with a maximum recommended load of 20 lbs." The single- bend tube attaches to the back of th e dev ice that is to be mounted.
50 LWA
$ 38.95
MOUNTS
50LWB
Wall Mount Assembly, with a maximum recommended load of 20
lbs.* There is a double- bend tube, with a clamp/flange unit that attaches to the bottom of the device that is to be mounted.
50LWB
$ 44.95
50LRWA/50LCA
These models are Ceiling Mount Assemblies with a maximum rated
load of 20 lbs." Ideal for suspended ceiling installations, and mount
securely above the false ceiling line. The coupler has astandard 3/4"
tapered female plumbing pipe thread at the open end. A finishing
flange " dresses down" the ceiling tile.
50LRWA
$ 39.95
50LCA
37.95
5OLSWA/50HSWA Short Tube Assembly, with flange, has a maximum recommended
load of 20 lbs." This unit is for close mounting on walls, floors, or ceilings.
5OLSWA
$ 28.95
50HSWA
32.95
5OLSTO
Short Tube Assembly, without flange, maxium recommended load of 20 lbs." This unit comes with nuts and washers, for direct
installation on the mounting surface.
5OLSTO
$ 24.95
OMNIMOUNT SPECIAL HANDLES
50H
For Series 50 Omnimount assemblies. It is for use where frequent
adjusting is required, and makes unnecessary the use of a socket
drive tool. The assemblies that use this handle have a maximum recommended load of about 20 lbs.*
50H
$ 6.40
ACCESSORIES
50PA
1/2" Plumbing pipe for 50 Series- 7/16" x20 locknut.
50PA
$ 9.50
75PA
Adapts standard Omnimount 5/8" x 18 N.F. threaded tube to stan-
dard 3/4" tapered plumbing pipe
75PA
$9.50
500C
1" x13 Internal thread for C clamp bolt. 5/8" x18 Internal thread for
100 Series tubing IC clamp not included)
500C
$9.50
625T1
For Series 50 Omnimount assemblies. It adapts Series 50 tubing to
1375C, 1500C and 75 PA accessories. ( 5/8" x 18 external thread,
7/16 x20 internal thread).
625T1
$8.50
1375MC
Adaptor for use with tubular tripod stands using 1-3/8" diameter
tubing. Omnimount tube and ball assembly coupled to top of stand
affords angle adjustment unavailable with fixed- flange units
1375MC
$ 11.50
1500C
Same as 1375C, except that it is for use with 1-1/2" diameter tubing.
1500C
$ 11.50
4375MC
For Series 50 Omnimount assemblies. It adapts 7/16" Series 50
tubing to astandard 5/8" x27 microphone stand thread.
4375MC
$8.50
"All recommended loads are based on optimum conditions, sensible weight distribution, and proper installation.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 175
PAG AMERICA LTD.
EXCLUSIVELY DISTRIBUTED BY PAG AMERICA
P.O. Box 15194 Asheville, NC 28813 (704) 274-1438 Telex 353-481
BATTERY CHARGERS/ ACCESSORIES
SPEEDCHARGE 6000
Model #9407 · FAST & SLOW CHARGE BATTERIES
AND BELTS · REVITALIZE POOR BATTERIES · CAMERA/VTR POWER SUPPLY
Built-in microprocessor selects correct charge for any NiCad battery or belt ( some Lead Acid) of 10-15 Volts and 2-12Ah capacity. Automatic 110/220V switching. ( Fast charges 4Ah battery in 1hour). Charge via cable mounted XLR-4 pin. PP90 adaptor supplied. Other adaptors below. Models in other ranges available. $ 1095
SEQUENCER 6000
Model #9418
Connects to Speedcharge 6000 to sequentially charge any assortment of 8 NiCad batteries or belts ( and some Lead Acid) in 10-15 volts; and 2-12Ah capacity. Status indicators for all eight channels. Eight PP90 sockets. See adaptors below. $825
SOLO CHARGER
Model #9426
Lightweight low cost overnight battery charger. 400mA charge current for 4Ah ( 12-14V) batteries or belts. PP90 socket. See adaptors below. (7Ah & 10Ah versions available. Also 24-30 volt models) $ 175
10/90 MULTICHARGER
Model #9419
Charges up to ten PP90 type ( 12V/4Ah) batteries overnight simultaneously and
independently. Reduces to trickle charge after 14 hours. Ten PP90 sockets. See
adaptors below. $995
ACCESSORIES AND ADAPTORS
(Other adaptors available)
For Speedcharge 6000 has XLF1-4 pin)
For Sequencer 6000 or SoloCharger ( has PP90 socket)
#9447 XLR-4 socket to PP90 socket adaptor
$31 # 9458 PP90 plug to Anton Bauer clip adaptor
$39
#9468 xLR -4socket to PP60 socket adaptor
$31 # 9455 PP90 plug to XLR-4 socket adaptor
$22
#9442 XLR-4 socket to Anton Bauer clip adaptor ... $39 # 9488 PP90 plug to PP60 socket adaptor
$29
#9469
Stacking Bracket ( stacks Speedcharge and Sequencer)
$ 19
#9472
Stand holds four PP90 batteries for charging
$ 19
#9500
Shipping case for Speedcharge 6000 & Sequencer 6000
$ 349
#9456
#9463 #9464 #9459 #9467 #9482
CAMERA BATTERY CLIPS
PAGCLIP 90. PP90 battery holder converts Anton Bauer back on any camera to accept PP90 battery ( lkegami, Sony, Hitachi, RCA, Philips, Sharp. JVC. Panasonic, etc.. cameras) $ 159
PAGCLIP 90. Battery holder for Hitachi FP-22/SK-97
$ 129
PAGCLIP 90. Battery holder for Hitachi FPZ-31 or FP- 15
$ 129
PAGCLIP 90. Battery holder for Sony M3 PAGCLIP 90. Battery holder for JVC 1900, 310, and 900 cameras
$ 129 $ 129
External mounting bracket for Sony Betacam battery PP3B
$ 72
VC- 176
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PAG AMERICA LTD.
EXCLUSIVELY DISTRIBUTED BY PAG AMERICA
P.O. Box 15194 Asheville, NC 28813 (704) 274-1438 Telex 353-481
PAGPAC BATTERIES/ PAGBELTS/PAGLIGHTS
PAGPAC BATTERIES
PAG batteries are high quality NiCads recommended by and used in most video equipment including Ampex, Fernseh, Hitachi, JVC, Philips, RCA and Sony. (All Pagpac batteries may be fast charged with Speedcharge 6000/Sequencer 6000 or appropriate Solo Charger.)
Batteries with Anton Bauer Mount
#9379
PP79
12 volt 4Ah battery for lkegami HL -79 series and
HL -95, cameras with Anton Bauer mount. Same as
PP86A but has multi- pin connector for charging with
Ikegami fast charger.
$459
#9387
PP86A 13 volt 4Ah battery with Anton Bauer mount.
(Other batteries available or made to order)
Use with Sony M3, lkegami HL -79 series, Sharp, RCA, all Hitachi, Panasonic and others
that accept Anton Bauer mount. ( Similar to Pro Pac" 13.)
$ 423
#9386
PP86
14 volt 4Ah battery with Anton Bauer mount. ( Similar to Anton Bauer Pro Pac" 14.) Use
with Panasonic Recam and Ampex ARC- 10, and cameras listed for PP86A
$449
On Board Batteries
#9390
PP90
12 volt 4Ah approved replacement for Sony BP90 battery. Use to power Sony BVU series
VTR's, Vidtek RM-5A monitor and with PAGCLIP to power most ENG cameras.
$235
#9360 #9318
PP60 PP125
12 volt 2.5Ah NiCad replacement for Sony BP-60 Lead Acid. Use for Sony VO -4800 VTR Can be recharged on Sony recharger.
12 volt 2.5Ah battery for RCA Hawkeye cameras.
$199 $259
#9303 #9394
PP3B PP94
13.2 volt 4Ah battery for Sony Betacam. Run time approximately 1hr. 15 min. in full record mode. External mounting bracket ( Model #9482) required. See Camera Battery Clips
listing
$ 379
12 volt 4Ah battery for Hitachi SK- 97 camera. Mounts on Hitachi factory supplied camera
back
$ 459
#9400
PP100 12 volt 4Ah battery for Hitachi HR- 100 1" VTR.
$ 279
#9302
PP2
12 volt 4Ah battery for JVC KY- 2000/2700.
$449
PAGBELTS
PAGBELTS are deep molded top quality leather encasing 4Ah, 7Ah, or 10Ah sealed NiCad cells with spot welded nickel inter- cell connecting strip Available with or without lightweight internal 14 hour overnight charger ( IC). (PAGBELTS may be fast charged with Speedcharge 6000/Sequencer 6000 or appropriate PAG Solo Charger.)
PAGBELTS WITH INTERNAL CHARGERS
PAGBELTS WITHOUT INTERNAL CHARGERS
(Use Speedcharge 6000 Sequencer 6000)
#9203 #9253
12V.,4Ah Belt ( runs
PAGLIGHT 100 for 26 min ) 12V/7Ah Belt ( runs
$ 621
)19103 a9153
12V 4Ah Belt ( runs
PAGLIGHT 100 for 26 min ) 12V/7Ah Belt ( runs
$ 501
#9283
PAGLIGHT 100 for 45 min )
$ 837
12V/10Ah Belt ( runs
PAGLIGHT 100 for 65 min )
$ 1061
# 9123
PAGLIGHT 100 for 45 min ) 12V/10Ah Belt ( runs PAGLIGHT 100 for 65 min.)
$ 702 $ 945
(Other belts in other voltages and Ah are available)
PAGLIGHTS
Robust but lightweight handlamps tilt on removable handle for bounce light. 1/4" screw bush provided for mounting. Spare bulb and fuses store in handle. Comes with 2 fuses, filter ring, and barndoor holder.
#9800 PAGLIGHT 100 ( 12V/100 watts) ... $ 223 #9820 PAGLIGHT 250 ( 24V/250 watts) ... $ 231
a9801 #9821 #9804
PAGLIGHT KITS 100 WATTS OR 200 WATTS
(Includes PAGLIGHT. 2 bulbs. belt indicated with internal charger ( IC). 3 fuses, and aluminum case.)
#9810 PAGLIGHT Kit 100 ,4Ah ( 100 watt light & 12V/4Ah IC PAGBELT) . $ 957 #9811 PAGLIGHT Kit 100/7Ah ( 100 watt light & 12V/7Ah IC PAGBELT) .. $ 1097 #9816 PAGLIGHT Kit 100 10Ah ( 100 watt light & 12V/10Ah IC PAGBELT) $ 1297
#9823 PAGLIGHT Kit 250'4Ah ( 250 watt light & 24V'4Ah IC PAGBELT) $ 1397 (Other Kits with different PAGBELTS are available)
ACCESSORIES
Bulb for PAGLIGHT 100 ( 100 watts'12 volts)
$ 14 # 9809 Lamphead Accessory Kit
Bulb for PAGLIGHT 250 ( 250 watts/24 volts)
$ 12
( 4 Leaf Rotating Barndoors.
Dichroic Filter for PAGLIGHT 100 or 250). $ 59
and clear Safety Glass) .....
$65
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 177
p anadrocecn ic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
(201) 348-7000
Si SUPER HI- RESOLUTION SINGLE
WV-6000 ENG/EFP
The Si series: Three tube level performance with the economy and ease of operation of asingle tube camera. Designed for the video professional: it is acamera system flexible enough for a myriad of applications -- with advanced engineering never before incorporated in asingle
tube camera.
·2/3" Pick-up Tube ·Weight: 9.9 lbs. ·6MHz Saticon Tube for 420 lines horizontal resolution
·50 dB Signal- to- Noise Ratio ·Full System Operation with internal Gen Lock or optional
WV-RC60 Studio Remote Control ·2lines Vertical Enhancement ( standard) ·Minimum Illumination 20 Lux with f/1.6 12X Servo Zoom ·Color Bars; + 6, + 12 dB and switchable AGC ·Titler, VTR remote, Stereo Mic, F.B.C.
·Up- to-future design with magnesium alloy construction
WV- 6000
$ 2995.00
IMAGE SENSING SYSTEM
FEATURES
MODEL ·
2/3" Pick-up Tube
WV- 6000
(mount)
(c)
Suggested Retail Price-' Weight ( lbs)
Pick- Up Technology Sensitivity ' ( fc) Resolution ' Signal To Noise ( dB) Zoom Ratio Focal Length ( mm) Filter Dia. ( mm) Auto Focus White Balance Viewfinder
$2995 9 9
6 0 MHz SATICON --
2at f16!-' 420 50 12 1
10 5 - 126 72
Auto, 2 Mem 15 B&W"
Character Gen.
Yes
Time/Date
Yes
Stop Watch
Yes
Key Effects
Neg./Positive
Fade In/Out
Yes
Rec/Review VTR Remote Gen Lock w/SCH Adj.
Yes
,
, Yes
Color Bars
Yes
RCU
Yes
R- B Gain
Yes
R- B Master Pedestal
Yes
Audio Video ( BNC) Earphone
Stereo Yes Yes
SPECIAL FEATURES SPECIAL EFF.
JACKS
NOTES KEY: 1. Prices may change without notice
3. Horizontal
2. Minimum lighting
4. 12 dB gain
*Maximum Optional Cable length to VCR: 75 feet
**5" B/W and 1.5" Color Optional
Blank Space= No VC- 178
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
TUBE COLOR SYSTEM CAMERA
panasonic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
Optional Remote Control Unit ( RCU) WV-RC60
Tally Indicator Power Indicator
Cable Length Compensation Select Switch
14- Pin Camera Cable Connector
High Gain Selection Switch
Gen- Lock Input Connector
White Balance Selection Switch
Auxiliary Input Connector
Subcarrier Phase Coarse Switch for Gen-Lock
Video Output Connector
Power ON/OFF Switch ACIDC Power Selection Switch
Intercom Jack Intercom Level Cant ol
Lens Iris Control Total Pedestal Control Horizontal Phase Control for Gen-Lock Subcarrier Phase Fine Control for Gen-Lock Auto White Set Switch Color Bar/Camera Selection Switch AGC ON/OFF Switch
EXT DC Input
Tally & intercom Input Connector Auxiliary Input Termination Switch Gen-Lock Input Termination Switch
SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
ENG Application
Ad, co S1(VVV-6000)
Portable Video Recorder VTR CABLE
EFP Application
DC + 12V COMPOSITE VIDEO BLACK BURST (GEN-LOCK)
BLACK BURST (GEN-LOCK)
+ 12V DC POWER SUPPLY
COMPOSITE VIDEO
Key Camera WV- 1500
COMPOSITE SYNC ) VIDEO OUTPUT
AUDIO AUDIO
AUDIO MIXER
STUDIO Application
Special
1Effects Generator WJ-5600 or
WJ-5500B or WJ-4600B
PREVIEW LINE OUT
VIDEO AUDIO
.. . __ PROGRAM ¡ewV040.410( ,..e,44zsure
NV-9600 or -N-V-9'240
·The model number of Generator is WJ-5600.
WV-6000ST
STUDIO CABLE (30FT) 14C-30
STUDIO EXTENTION
CABLE ( 100FT) 14C-100
RCU wysceo
Special Effects Generator
WJ-5600 or WJ-5500B or WJ-41:60B
tTALLY /INTERCOM ' ·
PREVIEW
BLACK BURST
t
PREVIEW
PREVIEW
BLACK BURST
14c-100
CI
CI rii i·-7,'.7777, · ·
TALLY /INTERCOM
1 VIDEO
RCU WV-RC60
LINE OUT
PROGRAM ·The model number of Generator is WJ-5500B.
STANDARD COMPOSITION ·ENG Color Camera WV- 6000 .$2995.00
WV-6000H: Camera Head WV-VF60: 1.5" B/W Electronic Viewfinder WV-LZ12/12: 12:1 Servo Zoom Lens WV-CC60: Carrying Case WV- 040A: Shoulder Pad WV-MC60: Stereo Microphone
·Camera Head WV- 6000H . .$ 1995.00 WV- 6000H: Camera Head
·Studio Configuration WV-6000ST $3995.00 WV-6000H: Camera Head WV-RC60: Remote Control Unit WV-FV65: 5" B/W Electronic Viewfinder WV-LZ12/12: 12:1 Servo Zoom Lens WV-LK11: Lens Conversion Kit 14C-30: Studio Cable
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
WV- 6000H
Camera Head
41995.00
WV-VF60
1.5" B/W Electronic
WV-VF61
Viewfinder 1.5" CIL Electronic Viewfinder
250.00 550.00
WV-VF65
5" B/W Electronic
Viewfinder
500.00
WV- L212/12 12:1 Servo Control
Zoom Lens
650.00
WV-LK11
Studio Conversion Kit
450.00
WV- M060 WV-Q40A
Stereo Microphone ... 25.00
Shoulder Pad
65.00
WV-PS60
Battery Pack
130.00
DE- 1232
Battery Charger
49.95
WV-CC60
Carrying Case
170.00
14C-30 14C-100
Studio Cable Studio Extension Cable
100.00 165.00
WV-CA14/10 VTR Cable
36.00
WV-CA14/14 VTR Cable
14H -30
VTR Extension Cable .
60.00 70.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 179
Panasonic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
VHS COLOR CAMERAS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
HIGH QUALITY
WV- 3170/6X, WV-3240/8AF, WV- 3240/12X, WV-3245/8AF
These Panasonic cameras offer an array of useful features destined to expand your creative ability.
IMAGE SENSING SYSTEM
FEATURES
MODEL"
WV-3170/6X
,
(mount)
Suggested Retail Price' ' Weight ( lbs)
Pick- Up Technology Sensitivity , ( fc) Resolution ' Signal To Noise ( dB) Zoom Ratio Focal Length ( mm) Filter Dia. ( mm) Auto Focus White Balance Viewfinder
Character Gen. Time/Date Stop Watch Key Effects Neg./Positive Fade In/Out
Rec/Review VTR Remote Gen Lock w/SCH Adj. Color Bars RCU R- B Gain R- B Master Pedestal
Audio Video ( BNC) Earphone
(bayonet) $1195 4 4
5.0 MHz NEWVICON
0.7 at f14 350 46 6 1
12.6 - 75 52
Auto 15- B&W
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Mic In Uni -Do
Yes
2/3" PICK-UP TUBE
WV-3240/8AF WV-3240/12X
(bayonet)
$1300 4.8
5.0 MHz NEWVICON
0.7 at f1.4 350 46 8.1
10.5 - 84 58 Yes
Auto 1.5" B&W
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
(bayonet) $1375 5.0
5.0 MHz NEWVICON
2at f2.0 350 46 121
10 - 120 72
Auto 1.5" B&W
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Stereo
Yes
Stereo Yes
SPECIAL FEATURES SPECIAL EFF.
JACKS
NOTES KEY: C)prices may change without notice C)minimum lighting C)horizontal C)12 dB gain
·ma in, .1rn ,,otiunal cable .ir,t1 ir,qth t', 75 feet
·Ft V./
1'1
(
) 11,1 , 1r
Blank Space No
WV-3245/8AF
(bayonet) $1600 5.5
5.0 MHz NEWVICON
Sensitive Newvicor® tubes resist permanent burning and comet-tailing under bright lights, and give you clear images even under low light conditions. In fact, you can even take sharp videos in candlelight.
0.7 at f1.4 350 46 8:1
10.5 - 84 58 Yes
Auto 1.5" Color
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
Title your videos with the built-in 7- color character generator, or shoot an external title and change the background color. A 2-frame memory function lets you set your messages in advance and display them when you want. Neg/Pos picture reversal adds adramatic effect to any scene.
Other built-in functions such as "Date," " Time" and alapping " Stopwatch" give vital information when recording important events such as birthdays or sports meets. And all these functions can be pre-set on a fold- away control panel. All the controls you'll need to engage them are located conveniently near the viewfinder, so it's a snap to add studio effects to your video creations.
Video and Audio Fade-In/Fade-Out gives your recordings a professional touch, allowing not only video fading to and from black, but also fading of audio input.
Stereo Yes
The viewfinder is movable to the forward/backward direction by 1.2"
and to the left/right direction by 1.6"
for your easy carrying. A look inside ishows the " OK Monitor" in action. It
lets you know of the shooting conditions, and the " Alarm Func-
tion" warns you of any problems during operation.
VC- 180
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VHS COLOR CAMERAS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
LOW COST WITH PANASONIC PROLINE
(201) 348-7000
p aresoniic AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
Portable VTR operations, including rewind, forward, play, slow and still can be performed at the camera with the WV-3240 models, so you don't have to shoulder extra weight that can cramp your shooting style.
What's more, the WV-3240/8AF comes with an 8X Auto Focus lens, so you can shoot your moving subjects and pan without ever losing focus, and do it automatically. The WV-3245/8AF even comes with acolor electronic viewfinder that allows you to see what you are videotaping in full color.
The WV-3240/12X offers a 12X lens, the WV-3170/6X a 6X lens, and all three models are capable of close-up "macro" shooting.
KEY FEATURES ·1.5- inch Electronic Color Viewfinder ( WV-3245/8AF) ·7- Color Multiple Title Displays ·5- MHz 2/3" NEWVICON® ·Ultrasonic Auto- Focus ( WV-3245/8AF, WV-3240/8AF) ·Auto white balance ·Auto- manual IRIS control ·Two position stand-by switch ·Negative/Positive picture reversal ·Time/Date and stopwatch generator ·Video and Audio fade-in/fade-out ·Adjustable diopter on viewfinder ( except WV-3245/8AF) ·Multi- status display viewfinder
FEATURES PLUS
·Adjustable hand grip ·Newly designed shoulder pad ·Remote control connector ·Stereo microphone ( except WV-3170) ·VTR remote control ·Red and Blue gain control
Optional Accessories
10H-30AS
10 Pin Extension Cable 30' Audio ( 2ch)
for all VHS ENG Cameras
$70.00
10H-50AS
10 Pin Extension Cable 50' Audio ( 2ch)
for all VHS ENG Cameras
$110.00
NV- C45
Camera 10 Pin- VCR 14 Pin Cable for VHS
Camera
$60.00
WV- 3203
AC Adaptor
$50.00
WV-3203A AC Adaptor ( Stereo)
$60.00
VP- 10
Tripod for all VHS ENG Cameras . . . . $50.00
WV- T10
Mini Tripod for all VHS ENG Cameras $45.00
WV-AD10 Beta Format Converter Kit
$55.00
WV-AD15
Film/Slide ( Negative/Positive) Adaptor
$150.00
WV-AD16 C- Mount Adaptor
$15.00
WV-LK10A
WV-CR10 WV-CC17 WV-CC26A WV- J10
Lens Filter Kit not for use w/ camera
WV- 3240/12X
$100.00
Camera Remote Control
$65.00
Soft Carrying Case
$50.00
Carrying Case
$125.00
Video Titler
$695.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 181
Feniiummiic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
COLOR CAMERA
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
WV-EX1 CPD Color Camera
The WV-EX1 is the first commercially available Charged Priming Device ( solid state) color camera designed for fast and easy operation. Its compact size lets you carry it anywhere. And you'll want to carry it everywhere when you see all the features that make it a snap to use. And your portable VCR won't get in your way because you can control it right from the camera. You can even name your features and record time and date with a built-in title generator.
1201)348-7000
THE WV-EX1 PROVIDES YOU WITH
·Newly developed CPD technology. Burnless, no electronic image distortion, no warm-up time, and built to withstand shock.
·Advanced color sensor system. A line sequential color differential system and highly precise mosaic color filter.
·A variety of microprocessor controlled functions. Automatic tracing white balance ( A.T.W.), VCR remote control, 41 character titler, and alphanumeric status display.
WV-EX1
$ 1400.00
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
10- pin camera cable ( 8feet) Lens cap SUM- 3, AM3 or AA size dry battery
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES WV- 3203: Power Supply 10H-30AS: 10 Pin Extension Cable
(For Stereo Audio; 33 feet) 10H-50AS: 10 Pin Extension Cable
(For Stereo Audio; 50 feet) WV-LK10A: Lens Filter Kit WV-AD15: NEG/POS Slide Adaptor WV-AD10: Camera- VTR Adaptor for
B Format VTR WV-CC17: Soft Carrying Case WV- J10: Video Titler
1pc 1pc 1pc
$50.00
70.00
110.00 100.00 150.00
55.00 50.00 695.00
7 "
I IMAGE SENSING SYSTEM
FIEATURES
MODEL*
(mount) Suggested Retail PriceWeight ( lbs)
Pick- Up Technology Sensitivity ' (fc) Resolution Signal To Noise ( dB) Zoom Ratio Focal Length ( mm) Filter Dia. ( mm) Auto Focus White Balance Viewfinder
Character Gen. Time'Date Stop Watch Key Effects Neg.t Positive Fade In'Out
Rec/Review VTR Remote Gen Lock w SCH Adj. Color Bars RCU R - 8 Gain R- B Master Pedestal
SOLID STATE PICK-UP DEVICE
WV-EX1
(fixed) $1400
2.9 CPD Sensor
3at f1 4 250 46 61
12 5 - 75 52
Auto- Con:inuous 1 B&W Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes
SPECIAL I FEATURES' 1 SPECI ALEFF.
Audio
cànc Video ( BNC)
U <-)
Earphone
Mic in Yes
NOTES KEY:
1. Prices may change without notice 2. Minimum lighting
3. Horizontal 4. 12 dB gain Blank Space = No
·Maximum Optional Cable Length to VCR: 75 feet **5" B/W and 1.5" Color Optional
VC- 182
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
p anaso
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP '
PORTABLE VHS COLOR CAMERAS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348 7000
MODEL WV-3040 WV- 3050
wf,GHT-72- Lux
Portable Color Video Cameras
·6:1 Power Zoom Lens with Auto- Iris and TCL Auto Focus ( CCD) ·Lightweight ( 2.9 lbs.), Portable ( wrist strap) ·4.3 MHz 1/2" Newvicon -- 300 lines Resolution at Center ·Minimum Lighting Requirement . 75C at f/1.2 ·46 dB S/N Ratio ·Adjustable Viewfinder with 1" CRT
[00, ,,e
FEATURES
1/2"PICK-UP TUBE
MODEL ·
WV- 3040
WV- 3050
IMAGE SENSING SYSTEM
(mount)
Suggested Retail Price Weight ( lbs)
Pick- Up Technology Sensitivity (fc) Resolution Signal To Noise ( dB) Zoom Ratio Focal Length ( mm) Filter Dia. ( mm) Auto Focus White Balance Viewfinder
(fixed) S795 2 4
4 3 MHz NEVVVICON
0 7at 11 2 300 46 6 1
8 5 - 51 49
Auto 1" B&VV
(fixed)
S995 2 9
4 3 MHz NEVVVICON
0 7at 11 2 300 46 6 1
8 5 - 51 49 Yes
Auto 1" B&W
SPECIAL FEATURES SPECIAL EFF.
Character Gen. Time/Date Stop Watch Key Effects Neg./Positive Fade In/Out
WV-3050 PRO LINE
Rec/Review VTR Remote Gen Lock w/SCH Adj. Color Bars RCU R- B Gain R- B Master Pedistal Audio U) àc Video ( BNC) L.) <-, Earphone
NOTES KEY:
prices may change without notice minimum lighting
·maximum optional cable
length to VCR 75 feet Blank Space No
Yes
Yes
Mic In
M IC In
PRICE
WV- 3040 WV -3050
-3 horizontal rï',12 dB gain
" 5- B W and 15- Color Optional
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
WV -Q41
Shoulder Pad
WV-CC18
Soft Carrying Case
WV-LK10A
Lens Filter Kit
WV- T10
Compact Tripod
VP- 10
Tripod
10H-30AS 10H-50AS
30' Extension Cable ( stereo audio) 50' Extension Cable ( stereo audio)
WV- 3203
AC Adaptor
WV- 3203A
Power Supply
WV -AD10
VTR Adaptor for Beta VCRs
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$795.00 995.00
$45.00 50.00
100.00 45.00 50.00 70.00
110.00 50.00 60.00 55.00
VC- 183
p ariasonik
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
PRODUCTION SYSTEM
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
3500 System: WV-3500 Industrial Color Camera w/Gen Lock
The 3500 Production
WJ-3500 System Switcher
JACKS
The 3500 System is composed of the WV-3500, alow cost gen lockable color camera; and the WJ-3500, an economical System Switcher which has titling, SEG and Audio Mixing functions.
The WV-3500 and WJ-3500 are designed to enhance each others usefulness; but both possess complete compatibility with other Panasonic gen lock cameras and SEG's.
WV- 3500
$ 1750.00
WJ-3500 Video Titler
$ 1150.00
FEATURES
MODEL*
2/3" Pick-up Tube
WV- 3500
SPECIAL FEATURES SPECIAL EFF. I IMAGE SENSING SYSTEM
(mount)
Suggested Retail Price , Weight ( lbs)
Pick- Up Technology Sensitivity , ( fc) Resolution ' Signal To Noise ( dB) Zoom Ratio Focal Length ( mm) Filter Dia. ( mm) Auto Focus White Balance Viewfinder
(bayonet) $1750 7 1
50 MHz SAT ICON'"
3at f20 350 46 12 1
10 - 120 72
Auto 15" B&W
Character Gen.
Time/Date
Yes
Stop Watch
Yes
Key Effects
Neg./Positive
Yes
Fade In/Out
Yes
Rec/Review
Yes
VTR Remote
Gen Lock w/SCH Adj.
Yes
Color Bars
RCU
R- B Gain
R- B Master Pedestal
Audio Video ( BNC) Earphone
Mic In/Audir) Out Yes Yes
SPECIFICATIONS:
Special Effects Generator WJ-3500 Color Camera Input:
Video Input Level: Audio Input Level: Output Power
Line Input Video Input Level: Audio Input Level:
Key Camera Input: Video Input Level: Output Power
External Sound Input Mic Input Level: Line Input Level:
Video Output Level: Monitor Output Level: Audio Output Level: Black Burst Output: Effects: Superimpose: Color Selection for Superimpose and Back Color Maximum Cable Length of
CAMERA 1and CAMERA 2: Frequency Response: Gen- lock Range:
Power Source: Power Consumption: Ambient Temperature: Ambient Humidity: Dimensions:
Weight:
Key Camera Pick-up Tube: Scanning: Synchronizing: Horizontal Resolution Automatic Light Compensation: Video Output Level: Signal-to- Noise Ratio: Lens: Power Source: Ambient Operating Temperature: Dimensions:
Weight:
x2, ( 10-pin Connector) 1.0Vp-p NTSC composite/75 ohms -20dB, High impedance 12V DC, Max. 0.6A for CAMERA 1and 0.5A for CAMERA 2
1.0Vp-p NTSC composite/75 ohms, BNC Connector y1 -6dB, High impedance, Pin Jack x1 x1, ( 10- pin Connector) 1.0Vp-p USA TV system composite/75 ohms 12V DC, 0.3A
-72dB, High impedance, Phone jack x1 -20dB, High impedance, Pin jack x1 1.0Vp-p NTSC composite/75 ohms, BNC Connector x1 1.0Vp-p NTSC composite/75 ohms BNC Connector x1
20dB, High impedance, Pin jack x1 0.45Vp-p composite/75 ohms, BNC Connector x1
Mixing, Wipei 3, Wipe. Key
Yes
White, Red, Yellow, Green, Cyan, Blue, Magenta
20m ±1dB at 3.58MHz Sync: 15.734KHz ± 120Hz Burst: 3.579545MHz ± 50Hz 120V AC, 60Hz or 12V DC 1.8A 33W (with color cameras) +32°F to + 104°F (0°C to + 40°C) Less than 90% 400(W) x88(H) x188(D)mm 15.3/4 (W) x3-7/16 "( H). 7-3/8"(D) Approx. 3.14kg (6.95 lbs)
2/3" static focus, magnetic deflection vidicon tube 525 lines/60 fields/30 frames External 2:1 supplied from the system switcher more than 450 lines 10.0001 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms 42dB 2times variable focal lens 12V DC supplied from the system switcher +32° F to + 104°F (0°C to + 40 °C) 89(W) x164(H) x261(D)mm ( incl. lens) 3-1/2 -(W) x6-7/16"(H) y10-1/4 "( D) Approx. 0.7kg ( 1.5 lbs)
Optional Accessories
10H-30AS 10H-50AS WV- 3203 NV- B51 4C-10
WV-AD10 WV-AD15
WV-AD16 WV-CC25
10 Pin Extension Cable 30' 10 Pin Extension Cable 50' AC Adaptor AC Adaptor
Lamera AC Adaptor ( NV- B51) Junction Cable ( 10 ft.) BETA Format Converter Kit Film/Slide ( Negative/Positive) Adaptor C- Mount Adaptor Carrying Case
$70.00 110.00
50.00 135.00
30.00 55.00
150.00 15.00
125.00
NOTES KEY: 1. Prices may change without notice
3. Horizontal
2. Minimum lighting
4. 12 dB gain
*Maximum Optional Cable Length to VCR: 75 feet
**5" B/W and 1.5" Color Optional
Blank Space = No
VC- 184
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PRODUCTION SYSTEM
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
System for Special Effects Without aSpecial Budget
p anasoni.er AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
WV-3500 Industrial Color Camera w/Gen Lock
·Built-in Gen Lock ( BNC and 10 Pin) ·2/3" 5MHz Saticon® Tube w/350 lines resolution · 12X f/2.0 Bayonet Mount Power Zoom · SC/H Phase External Adjustment ·5fc Minimum Illumination; 46 dB SN · Stopwatch/Time-Date Generator ·Multi- Function Alphanumeric Viewfinder Readouts ·Adjustable H and V Blanking
System Applications
;àào·
Color Video Camera WV-3500
Portable Video Recorder
Special Effects Generator WJ-3503
Color Video Camera WV- 3500
Color TV Monitor
WJ-3500 System Switcher
· Low Cost Titler/Special Effects Generator ·Video Mix, Wipe and Key Functions ·Audio Mixing Capability with mic and line inputs · Built-in Digital Gen Lock Sync Generator w/Black Burst
Output · Built-in Seven Color Generator for Background and Key · Integrated Title Camera w/2X Zoom and Title Stand ·Accepts Camera # 1(10P) or line input as Gen Lock
reference · 12 VDC or 120 VAC Power ·Gen Locks WV-3500 through 10P Cable or Coax
Color Video Camera
7-.111"
· .1 ·.... ;6,4,·
Color Video Camera
WV- 3500
rl
--
Special Effects Generator WJ-4500C. WJ-5500B and WJ-5600 Key Camera WV- 1500
-- Color TV Monitor
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 185
Panasonic.
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
COLOR VIDEO CAMERAS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
"800 Series" Three Tube Cameras with Middle Index Prism System
SPECS
W
FEATURES
PICK-UP TUBE
ILLUMINATION REQUIRED: (fc)s
+
9dB ( fc) 5
+
12dB (fc)
+
18dB (fc)
MAX. CABLE LENGTH'
S/N (2000 lux at F4.0)
VERTICAL ENHANCER
HORIZONTAL RESOLUTION'
REGISTRATION (%) 9
POWER CONSUMPTION'°
WEIGHT (lb)*
GAIN SWITCH ( + dB) AUTO CENTERING SET AWC/ABC R/B H-CENTERING RIB V-CENTERING BAR/CAMERA BRIGHT" CENTERING MANUAL/AUTO CONTRAST" INTERCOM LEVEL LEVEL IND. ON/OFF R/G/B SELECT POWER STAND/BY OPERATE
WV-888PRO SATICON `
190° 11 -- 6
1000' 57dB 2H type 650 .1/.21.4
21
19.9
9/0/18 YES
AUTO PULSE CANCEL
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YE YESS
WV-888S1 2 SATICON -
190° 11 -- 6
1000' 57dB 2H type 650 .1/.2/.4
21
WV- 890 PLUMBICON'
190° -- -- 4
1000' 59dB 2H type 600 1 2/.4
21
20.3
20.3
9,0,18 YES
AUTO PULSE CANCEL
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
90,18 YES
AUTO PULSE CANCEL
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
WV-890S1 2 PLUMBICON'
190° -- -- 4 1000' 59dB 2H type 600 .1/.21.4 21
20.7
90 18 YES
AUTO PULSE CANCEL
YES YES YES YES YES
YES 1 YES YES YES YES YES
CONTROLS ON CAMERA
JACKS ON CAMERAS
FEATURES
AUDIO MONITORING EXT DC GEN/LOCK (BNC) INTERCOM MIC PIX/GEN-LOCK ( BNC) PIX OUT ( BNC) VIDEO OUT ( BNC) VTR/RCU (32 PIN)
WV- 555
YES YES or PIX YES YES YES or Gen Lock YES YES
WV-888 PRO WV- 890
YES YES YES YES YES
-- YES YES YES
NOTE: ALL PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL THREE TUBE CAMERAS INCLUDE NTSC YIQ OUTPUT FOR USE WITH PROFESSIONAL 12' M- FORMAT EQUIPMENT
Number Keys In Above Chart: 1. Suggested retail price 2. Studio composition
3. For RCU and with compensator
4. Green signal at center
5. 2000 Lux at 1/4.0 6. Head only = 10.3 lbs. 7. 1/2.8
8. 1/4.0 9. Zone I, II, Ill 10. Camera head in watts
11. Viewfinder 12. Includes WV-037
· Without lens
VC- 186
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COLOR VIDEO CAMERAS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
WV- 800 Series ( 888 Pro, 888ST, 890, 890ST) Cont'd
OPTIONAL REMOTE CONTROL UNIT ( RCU) WV-RC31
FRONT PANEL
000 ?,
11
(201) 348-7000
1:11>armiciiik
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
o o oceoemeoeoáé o
O Power Indicator
13 Power ON/OFF Switch (POWER)
O Tally Indicator ((ALLY)
O O
Intercom Intercom
Level Control (INTERCOM Jack (INTERCOM)
LEVEL)
13 Color Bar/Camera Selection Switch (BAR/CAMERA)
O Cable Length Compensation Switch (CABLE COMP)
13 Auto White/Auto Black Set Switch (AWC/HOLD/ABC)
O Auto/Manual Selection Switch (AUTO/MANUAL)
(1) Horizontal Phase Control for Gen-Lock (H PHASE)
· Subcarrier Phase Coarse Switch for Gen-Lock
(SC PHASE COARSE)
· Subcarrier Phase Fine Control for Gen-Lock
(SC PHASE FINE)
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES FOR WV- 888 PRO/WV-890
WV-LZ30/12 12X Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris, Servo
Zoom, 10-120mm, f/1.6
81,300.00
J13X9B1E2 Canon 13X Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris,
Servo Zoom, 9-118mm, f/1.6, 2X
Extender
84,650.00
J15X95BV Canon 15X Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris, Servo Zoom, 9.5-143mm, f/1.8 $1,400.00
A10X1OBRMV Fujinon 10X Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris,
Servo Zoom, 10-100mm, f / 1.6
81,175.00
Al2X9BERM2 Fujinon 12X Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris,
Servo Zoom, 9-108mm, f / 1.7, 2X
Extender
82,400.00
A14XBERMV Fujinon 14X Zoom, Auto/Manual
Iris, Servo Zoom, 9-126mm, f / 1.7, 2X
Extender
84,875.00
A14X1OBRMV Fujinon 14X Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris,
Servo Zoom, 10-140mm, f/1.7
$ 1,350.00
WV-CA32/10 VCR ( 10 Pin) Cable for VHS VCR
NV- 9400
870.00
WV-CA32/14 VCR ( 14 Pin) Cable for 3/4" VCR
880.00
el Red Gain Control (RGAIN) O Red Pedestal Control (RPEDESTAL) (I(1 Blue Gain Control (BGAIN) · Blue Pedestal Control (Et PEDESTAL)
O Monitoring Signal Selection Switch (ENC/REG/AUX) O Total Pedestal Control (TOTAL PEDESTAL) (J) Registration Switch (R/G/B) (j) -G/DETAIL ON/OFF Switch (-G/DETAIL) 0 Auto/Manual Centering Selection Switch
J) (AUTO CENT/MANUAL) Auto Centering Set Switch (AUTO CENT, SET) al Red Horizontal Centering Control (RHOR·CENTERING)
e(1) Blue Horizontal Centering Control (BHOR-CENTERING) Red Vertical Centering Control (RVERT-CENTERING)
WV-CA32/26 VCR ( 26 Pin) Cable for RECAM
System
$ 120.00
10H-30AS 10 Pin Extension Cable 30' for
WV-CA32/10
$ 70.00
10H-50AS 10 Pin Extension Cable 50' for WV-CA32/ 10
$110.00
14H-30 14 Pin Extension Cable 30' for WV-CA32/ 10
$70.00
WV- 035 Tripod Mounting Adaptor
$90.00
WV-PS36 Detachable Battery Pack (4AH).. $400.00
SQ-13FV Anton/Bauer Quick- on NiCad Battery
(4AH)
$500.00
WV-BC30 Battery Charger for WV-PS36 $70.00
CH- 13V Slow Charger for SQ-13FV $ 100.00
LSFC Anton/Bauer Fast Charger for SQ-13FV
$550.00
WV-PS35S Anton/Bauer Battery Mounting
Adaptor
$ 100 00
WV-PS30 Detachable AC Adaptor
5260.00
STANDARD COMPOSITION ENG Color Camera WV- 890
$9,700.00
WV- 890H:
Camera Head
1 set
WV-VF328:
1.5" Electronic View Finder
1 set
WV-CC34:
Carrying Case
1 pc
WV- 035: Rain Coat
Tripod Mounting Adaptor
1 pc 1 pc
Registration and White Balance Chat ' pc
Color Sheet
PC
PCB Exiende·
1pc
Studio Configuration
WV-890ST $11,000.00
WV- 890H:
Camera Head
r set
WV-VF37B:
5- Electronic Viewfinder
1 set
WV-RC31:
Remote Control Unit
1 set
32A-25 Studio Cable
1 pc
STANDARD COMPOSITION
ENG Color Camera WV -888 Pro $ 7,400.00
WV-888H: Camera Head
WV-VF32: 1.5" Electronic Viewfinder
WV-CC34: Carrying Case
WV-035:
Tripod Mounting Adaptor
Rain Coat
Registration and White Balance Chart
1set 1pc 1pc 1pc 1pc
Color Sheet
1pc
PCB Extender
1pc
UM-31AA Size Battery for Microphone
1pc
',g Instructions
1pc
Studio Configuration
WV-888ST* $8,800.00
W V - 88tsH Camera Head
1se:
WV-VF37 5" Electronic Viewfinder
1set
WV-RC31 Remote Control Unit
1set
o Blue Vertical Centering Control (BVERT-CENTERING)
(J)e Lens Iris Control (IRIS AUTO-CLOSE/OPEN) 32-Pin Camera Cable Connector
(J) Gen-Lock Input Termination Switch (75 /Hi-Z)
· Gen Lock Input Connector (BNC) (GEN-LOCK IN/OUT)
e111
Auxiliary Auxiliary
Input Input
Termination Switch (75 Connector (BNC) (AUX
/11I-Z) INPUT
IN/OUT)
e» Red Output Connector (BNC) (ROUTPUT)
· Green Output Connector (BNC)(G OUTPUT)
) 41 Blue Output Connector (BNC)(B OUTPUT) Video Output Connectors (BNC) (VIDEO OUT)
O Monitoring Video Output (BNC)IPIX OUT)
Tally and Intercom Input Connector (TALLY & INTERCOM)
NV B450 AC Adaptor for WV-888, WV-890 and
NV 9450
$370.00
vtiv mc3 .1 Microphone WV CC31 Carrying Case
$150.00 $250.00
32A-25 Remote Control Unit Cable 125')
8300.00
32A- 50 Remote Control Unit Cable 150'1
8400.00
32A 100 Remote Control Unit Cable ( 100') $600.00
WV-LK30 Lens Rear Control Kit for WV-LZ30/12
$500.00
SPB-2076V Lens Rear Control Kit for J13X9BIE2,
J15X95BV
$950.00
FC-S14 Lens Rear Control Kit for A14X9BERMV
$ 1,350.00
FC-S10 Lens Rear Control Kit for A10X1OBRMV, A14X1OBRMV, Al2X9BERM2
(2X Extender) $975.00
WV-VF32 1.5" View Finder for WV-888 $300.00
WV-VF32B 1.5" View Finder for WV-890
8300.00
WV- 035:
Tripod Mounting Adaptor
Registration and White Balance Chart
Color Sheet
PCB Extende.
1 pc
1 pc 1 pc
1 pc
32A-25:
Studio Cable
WV- 035:
Tripod Mounting Adaptor
Resistration and White Balance Chart
Color Sheet
PCB Extender
Operating Instructions
1pc 1pc 1pc 1pc 1pc 1DC
·Not available in Canada.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 187
Fearinsciciik
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
COLOR VIDEO CAMERAS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
WV- 555A, WV- 555B, WV-555BST, WV-555BHQ, WV-555BN, WV-555BNH
"500 SERIES" THREE TUBE CAMERAS WITH MIDDLE INDEX PRISM SYSTEM
Nte
FEATURES
PICK-UP TUBE
ILLUMINATION REQUIRED: fc)'
+ 6dB/9dB (fc)'
co +
12dB (fc) 18dB (fc)
MAX. CABLE LENGTH'
11. U)
S N ( 2000 lux at F4 0)
VERTICAL ENHANCER
HORIZONTAL RESOLUTION'
REGISTRATION (%).
POWER CONSUMPTION .°
WEIGHT (lb)
GAIN SWITCH ( · dB) AUTO CENTERING SET AWC/A13C R B H-CENTERING RIB V-CENTERING BAR/CAMERA BRIGHT" CENTERING MANUAL AUTO CONTRAST" INTERCOM LEVEL LEVEL IND. ON/OFF MONITOR R-G/Y/B-G POWER STAND/BY OPERATE
WV- 555A *SATICON
140* 15 (6dB)
8
300' 54dB 1H type 600 13 6 174
14.3
6012 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
WV- 5558 WV-5558SP WV- 5558110 WV- 5558N WV-555BNN
SATICON * SATICON ** SATICON tNEWVICON ·NEWVICON ·
140'
140' T 140' 1 140' i 140'
15 (6dB) j 15 (6dB)
15 (6dB) -- (9dB)
-- (9dB)
-
8
8 .
8
--
--
2
2
300'
300'
300'
300'
300'
54dB
54dB
54dB
56dB
56dB
2H type
2H type
2H type
2H type
2H type
600
600
600
600
600
.1 3 6
13 6
1 .3 .6
12 5
1.25
174
17.4
17.4
18
18
14.3
16.1
7.7
14.3
7.7
6012 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
6012 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
6012 YES YES YES YES YES
YES
YES YES YES YES YES
9018 YES
AUTO PULSE CANCEL
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
9018 YES
AUTO PULSE CANCEL
YES YES YES
YES
YES YES YES YES YES
JACKS ON CAMERAS
NOTE: ALL PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL THREE TUBE CAMERAS INCLUDE NTSC Y10 OUTPUT FOR USE WITH PROFESSIONAL I2 M FORMAT EQUIPMENT
FEATURES AUDIO MONITORING
EXT DC GEN/LOCK (BNC) INTERCOM
MIC PIX/GEN-LOCK (BNC) PIX OUT ( BNC) VIDEO OUT ( END)
VTR/F1CU (32 PIN)
... WV-555
WV-888 PRO WV490
YES
YES
YES , YES
I or MX i YES
_
YES
YES
YES
YES
I YES
--
or Gen Lcck
YES
YES
YES
--1
YES 1 YES
Number Keys In Above Chart: 1. Suggested retail price
2. Studio composition 3. For RCU and with
compensator 4. Green signal at center
5. 2000 Lux at f/4.0 6. Head only = 10.3 lbs. 7. f/2.8
8. f/4.0 9. Zone I, II, Ill 10. Camera head in watts
11. Viewfinder 12. Includes WV-037
· Without lens
VC- 188
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COLOR VIDEO CAMERAS
Panasonic
AJDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP .
WV- 500 SERIES ( Cont'd)
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
Optional Remote Control Unit ( RCU) WV-RC32
Front Panel
Power Switch Power Indicator Tally Indicator Intercom Leve Control
Subcarner Phase Coarse Switch Subcarner Phase Fume Control Horizontal Phase Contre
Rear Panel
Gen- Lock Input Connectors
Auxiliary Input Connectors
Video Output Connectors
Tally and Intercom Input Connector
Lens Ins Control
Power Switch Guard
Intercom Jack
Total Pedestal Control Auto Centreing Set Switch
Auto White/Auto Black Set Switch
Color BariCamera Selection Switch
Glee Length Compensation Switch
32-pon Camera Cable Connector
T
Power Cord li/G/B Output Connectors
AU·iliary Termination Switch
Gen.lock Input Termination Switch
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES WV-555B/BN
WV-LZ32/10 PH15X7B WV-LZ30/12 S12X66BRM S12X66BERM S14X66BERM WV- LZ30/12 J13X9B1E2
J15X95BV A10X1OBRMV
10x Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris Servo
Zoom 8-80mm f / 1.4 $ 950.00
Canon 15x Zoom Auto/Manual Iris
Servo Zoom 7-10mm f / 1.4 . 1400.00 12x Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris Servo
$1300.00
Fujinon 12x Zoom Auto/Manual Iris
Servo Zoom 6.6-79.2mm f/1.4
$1275.00 Fujinon 12x Zoom Auto/Manual Iris
Servo Zoom 12x Extender) 6.6-
79.2mm f / 1.4
$2300.00
Fujinon 14x Zoom Auto/Manual Ins
Servo Zoom (2x Extender) 6.6-
92.4mm f / 1.4
$4900.00
12x Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris, Servo
Zoom, 10-120mm, f/1.6 ) WV-AD32
needed)
41300.00
Canon 13x Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris,
Servo Zoom, 9-118mm, f/1.6, 2x
Extender )WV-AD32 needed)
$4650.00
Canon 15x Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris,
Servo Zoom, 9.5-143mm, f/1.8
)WV- A032 needed) $ 1400.00
Fujinon 10x Zoom, Auto/Manual
Iris, Servo Zoom, 10-100mm, f/1.6
1VVV-AD32 needed)
81175.00
Al2X9BERM2
Fujinon 12x Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris, Servo Zoom, 9-108mm, f / 1.7,
2x Extender 1WV-A032 needed) $2400.00
Standard Composition
ENG Color Camera WV- 555A 5
WV-555AH: Camera Head
WV-VF32:
1.5" Electronic Viewfinder
WV- 037:
Tripod Mounting Adaptor
WV-CC32: Carrying Case
Rain Coat
Registration and White
Balance Chart
Color Sheet
PCB Extender
ENG Color Camera Head WV-555BHQ
WV-555BH: Camera Head
WV- 037:
Tripod Mounting Adaptor
Studio Configuration WV-555BST*
WV-555BH: Camera Head
WV-VF37:
5" Electronic Viewfinder
WV-RC32:
Remote Control Unit
A14X9BERMV Fujinon 14x Zoom, Auto/Manual
Iris, Servo Zoom, 9-126mm, 1/1.7,
2x Extender 1VVV-AD32 needed)
$4875.00 A14X1OBRMV Fujinon 14x Zoom, Auto/Manual
Iris, Servo Zoom, 10-140mm, f/1.7
)WV-A032 needed)
81350.00
WV-CA32/10 VCR 110 Pin) Cable for VHS VCR
NV-9400
8 70.00
WV-CA32/14 VCR 114 Pin) Cable for 3/4" VCR
WV-CA32/26
80.00 VCR (26 Pin) Cable for RECAM
10H-30AS
System $ 120.00 10 Pin Extension Cable 30' for
WV-CA32/10 $ 70.00
10H-50AS
10 Pin Extension Cable 50' for
WV-CA32/ 10
$ 110.00
WV-PS37
Detachable Battery Pack 12 AH)
200.00
WV-PS36
Detachable Battery Pack (4 AH)
400.00
SQ-13FV
Anton/Bauer Quick-on NiCad Bat-
WV- BC32
tery 14 AH) Battery Charger for
500.00
WV-PS37 $ 70.00
WV-BC30
Battery Charger for
CH- 13V
WV-PS36 $ 70.00 Slow Charger for SQ-13FV $ 100.00
LSFC
Anton/Bauer fast charger for
WV-PS35S
SQ-13FV
8 550.00
Anton/Bauer Battery Mounting
WV-PS30
Adaptor
8 100.00
Detachable AC Adaptor. 5 260.00
NV- B450
AC Adaptor for WV- 555B and
NV- 9450
5 370.00
WV- 037: 32A-25:
Tripod Mounting Adaptor
Studio Cable Registration and White Balance Chart
Color Sheet PCB Extender
Not available in Canada
ENG Color Camera WV- 555B
WV-555BH: Camera Head
WV-VF32:
1.5" Electronic Viewfinder
WV-PS37:
Battery Pack ( 2AH)
WV-BC32:
Battery Charger
WV- 037:
Tripod Mounting Adaptor
WV-CC32: Carrying Case
Rain Coat
Registration and White
Balance Chart
Color Sheet
PCB Extender
WV-MC31 WV-LK32 WV-LK30 SP B- 2076V
FC-S14
FC-510
32A-25 32A-50 32A-100 WV-VF32 WV-VF32B WV- Q37
WV- RC32 WV- AD32 WV-LZ32/10 WV-VF37
Microphone $ 150.00
Lens Rear Control Kit for
WV-LZ32/ 10
$ 500.00
Lens Rear Control Kit for
WV-LZ30/ 12
5 500.00
Lens Rear Control Kit for
J13X9B1E2, PH15X7B, J15X95BV
950.00
Lens Rear Control Kit for
A14X9BERMV, S14X66BERM
$1350.00
Lens Rear Control Kit for
A10X1OBRMV, A14X1OBRMV, Al2X9BERM, (2x Extender), S12X66BRM, S12X66BERM
975.00 Remote Control Unit Cable 125')
300.00 Remote Control Unit Cable 150')
$ 400.00 Remote Control Unit Cable 1100)
$ 600.00 1.5" Viewfinder for WV-555A,
WV- 555B Series
S 300.00
1.5" Viewfinder for WV-555BN
Series
5 300.00
Tripod Mounting Adaptor for
WV-555A Series, WV-555B Series
WV-555BN Series
S 90.00
Remote Control Unit
950.00
Lens Mount for 2/3" Tube Size
Lens
275.00
10x Zoom, Auto/Manual Iris Servo
Zoom 8-80mm, f/1.4
5 950.00
Studio 5" Viewfinder for WV- 555A
WV-555B $ 450.00
ENG Color Camera WV-555BN
WV-555BNH: Camera Head with WV- 037
WV-VF32B: 1.5" Electronic Viewfinder
WV-PS37:
Battery Pack ( MN)
WV-BC32:
Battery Charger
WV-CC32: Carrying Case
Registration and White
Balance Chart
Color Sheet
PCB Extender
Camera Head WV-555BNH Camera Head with Tripod Mounting Adaptor ( WV9-37)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Panasonic.
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
CCTV CAMERAS
One Panasonic Way Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
WV-140/WV-144 (shown with optional lens)
WV-140/120VAC WV-144/24VAC Black and White 1/2" Vidicon
Key Features
·A choice of models for 120VAC operation ( WV- 140) and 24VAC operation ( WV- 144)
· Compact and lightweight design for versatile mounting · Highly sensitive separate mesh 1/2- inch Vidicon pick-up
tubes in both cameras · Internal or line locked sync system ·Minimum illumination of one footcandle ( 10 lux) with
optional f/1.4 lens ·Automatic light compensation circuit allows use under
awide variety of lighting conditions · Mechanical focus externally adjustable ·Top or bottom mounting flexibility ·Standard C- mount allows for use of interchangeable
lenses ·White clip circuit
The Panasonic WV- 140 and WV- 144 black and white CCTV cameras have been specifically designed to provide reliable, cost-effective operation without compromising on performance quality. The highly sensitive 1/2- inch separ-
ate mesh Vidicon tubes that are incorporated in these cameras offer a minimum illumination of only one footcandle so they perform extremely well under most lighting
conditions. In addition, both cameras offer more than 500 lines of horizontal resolution for highly detailed image re-
production. And, the WV- 140 and WV- 144 can be easily installed.
Reliability is akey factor when purchasing CCTV cameras.
The WV- 140 and WV- 144 black and white CCTV cameras are the result of extensive research and development on behalf of Panasonic to provide high quality CCTV systems
components.
WV-140/WV-144
$ 210.00
VC- 190
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CCTV CAMERAS
p
analkwi c
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
WV- 140 and WV- 144 ( cont'd.)
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201)348-7000
APPEARANCE
Camera Mounting Screw Hole
Camera Mounting Screw Hole
Mechanical Focus Lens (Option)
Power Indicator
Coaxial Cable
Video Output Connector [VIDEO]
Coaxial Cable =IWO
Camera ON/OFF Switch [CAMERA]
Video Output Connector [VIDEO]
amera ON/OFF Switch [CAMERA] AC Power Cord
24V AC Power Terminal Strip
24V AC 60Hz Power Cable
[Rear view of WV-140]
[Rear view of WV-144]
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Source: Power Consumption: Pick-up Tube: Syncronizing:
Line Locked Random Interlace 2 : 1 Interlace Scanning Standard: Horizontal Resolution at center: Signal to Noise Ratio: Gamma Correction: Required Minimum Illumination: Recommended Illumination: Video Output: Ambient Operating Temperature: Ambient Operating Humidity: External Control: Lens Mount:
Dimensions (W) X (H) x (D):
Weights:
WV-140
WV-144
120V AC, 60Hz (108 to 132V)
Approx. am
24V AC, 60Hz 121 to 28V) Approx. 3.2W
I/2"Static Focusing, Magnetic Deflection, Separate Mesh Vidicon (S4152)
Yes
Switchable Internally
Yes
525 lines, 60 fields, 30 frames
More than 500 lines
43dB (Typical with 4.5 Mliz filter) 1.0 (fixed)
More than 1footcandle (10 lux with f1.4 lens used under incandescent light) 10 footcandles(100 lux) 1.0Vp-p composite/75 ohms (BNC connector>
+14°F to + 122°F (-10°C to + 50*C)
Less than 90%
Camera ON/OFF Mechanical Focus, Beam, Focus Standard C Mount
3-9/16" x 1-7/8" x 7-5/8" 190mm X 47.5mm x 194mm]
3-9/16" X 1-7/8" x 7-13/16" [90mm x 47.5mm x 198mml
1.2 lbs (0.55kg)
1.0 lbs (0.45kg)
(including power cord)
LENS INFORMATION
For CCTV camera with a 2"pick-up tube The required lens for the CCTV camera with a 12"pick-up tube can be selected from the following graph depending on the distance between camera and object, and required field of view.
C-Mount Lens
Wide-Angle Lens Adaptor
F = 4 Srnm F = 6mm
F -- 8.5mm MN-815
Standard Lens WV-LM12/2
12mm fl 4
Telephoto Lens WV-LA118
16mm f1.6
Telephoto Lene MN- 518
50mm f18
Wide Angle Lens MN-815
85mm f1 5
WV-CL51 0.5x
for WV-LM12/2)
vz·fitto o.sx
(tor WV-LM16)
--W--H
L
6.4L ,
4.8L
F=-- F = H--
6.4L
4.8L
W = -- H=
W: Width of object ( in feet)
H. Height of object On feet)
L: Distance between camera and object ( in feet)
F: Required focal length (in mm)
F = 12mm (Standard) WV-LM12/2
F = 16mm WV-LM18
20
40
so
80
100
120
L DISTANCE BETWEEN CAMERA AND OBJECT ( eet)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC -191
Panasonic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
VIDEO WATCHDOG MINI- CCTV SYSTEM
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
The Panasonic Mini- CCTV System... the economical " do-it-yourself" surveillance system.
Vidicon Camera WV- 80
,1`
Newvicon Camera WV- 85
Panasonic introduces our Mini- CCTV System. Designed to be apractical, reliable, and economical TV surveillance set-up, the system's most important feature is its simple " do it yourself" installation. Whatever your application is -- home safety, retail sales, manufacturing, business and office use -- the Mini- CCTV System offers ahost of surveillance oriented features that rival costlier, more complex systems. The system's design incorporates some important features. These include, single coaxial cable camera to monitor connection for power and video. This simplifies wiring. The monitor has a built-in adjustable sequential camera switcher. You can connect your Mini- CCTV System to intercoms or alarm sensors in addition to atimelapse VTR for maximum effectiveness. Automatic outputs are provided to wire warning
lights and buzzers. All CCTV electronics are housed in ahandsome, high performance,
desk- top monitor which fits easily into any environment. And the cameras are very compact,
easy-to- mount and attractive. So, if you need a CCTV surveillance system but cannot get involved in costly equipment and installation,
the Panasonic Mini- CCTV System is ideally suited for you.
Optional accessories
mai ,, mmeso
Video Monitor
Additional Camera Adaptor WV- 83
Basic Application
411. Camera
Video monitor
Intercom j
Auimtres lens
Additional comers ad plot WV B3
Remote control bos WV 438
Panning head WV.435
Weather proof housing WV 9S
Wide angle let. VZ 14/1110
hr.
3
Advanced Application
1 4, 4111, 4,
Pannin g head
410b 41liiv
J.
eftt
Time lapse VTR
Vmoindietoor
deZZ.,....,
Camera
''''....../
Sensor
Alarm .192'
Remote control box
Additional camera adaptor
WV-80/KT2 2piece mini camera ( WV-80); 1video monitor; 2piece camera mounting bracket.
$ 995.00 WV-85/KT2 2piece mini camera ( WV- 85); 1video monitor; 2piece camera mounting bracket.
WV- 80 WV- 85
WV- 83
1895.00
Vidicon camera ( with 16mm, f / 1.6 lens) and one mounting bracket
200.00
Newvicon camera ( less lens) with one mounting bracket
595.00
Camera extension adaptor unit permits adding up to three additional cameras to
WV- 95
system. Weather proof housing
250.00 125.00
WV- 435
Indoor panning head
110.00
WV- 438
Remote control unit for panning head
125.00
WV-LA16A (16mm f / 1.61 auto- iris lens
235.00
WV-LA25A (25mm f / 1.41 auto- iris lens WV-LA50A (50mm f / 1.8) auto- iris lens WV-LA8A (8mm f / 1.5) auto- iris lens
245.00 245.00 270.00
VZ-ML10 Wide angle lens
40.00
Newvicon cameras in this series ( Models WV- 85/ KT2, WV-85) Require Optional Lenses. Models WV-LA16A, WV-LA25A, WV-LA50A, WV-LA8A described in optional accessories section.
Virtually Endless Applications The Panasonic Mini- CCTV System can be used for virtually unlimited applications. In the home, you can monitor from your kitchen, your child's bedroom, the front door, or just about any area which could use surveillance. The basic system features three CCTV cameras but for more demanding applications you can expand the system to six cameras. Other important applications include convenience stores, gift shops, or any retail outlet that could use CCTV monitoring, without the high cost of conventional CCTV systems. The Mini- CCTV System is also perfect for light industry, warehousing and educational applications. Thanks to its design, this system requires a minimum of wiring, and its main monitor unit is easy to use and offers high quality perfor-
mance.
Design Your Own System The Mini- CCTV System is simple to install and easy to operate. Just attach the camera mounting bracket to the wall or ceiling, aim the camera and focus. A single coaxial cable between the camera and the monitor carries the video signal from the camera and supplies it with power. The system is completely versatile for it will connect with alarms, intercoms, up to six cameras ( with optional adaptor) and atime lapse recorder.
Key Features CCTV Camera WV-80 ·Single cable connection ·Cable distance from camera to monitor can
be extended up to 2640 ft. ( with proper cable) ·Camera uses BNC connector ·Automatic light compensator allows use under broad variety of lighting conditions ·Excellent picture quality with horizontal resolution of 500 lines ·Compact, lightweight and handsomely styled ·2/3" high sensitivity pick-up tube with minimum illumination of only 1footcandle
CCTV Monitor ·As many as three cameras can be connec-
ted to one monitor/switcher unit ·Video output displays each camera in
sequence or any camera manually selected ·Monitor has a9" ( mea. dia Imonochrome
screen ·Sequential switching interval manually
adjustable from 1to 60 seconds ·Inputs for three monitor controls: inter-
com, alarm sensor and switch · Built-in camera/monitor protection circuit ·Alarm control output for warning buzzer or
chime ·Alarm period manually adjustable from 1to
30 seconds
VC- 192
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
p agiamcmi c
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
CCTV CAMERAS
One Parasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
GENERAL PURPOSE
CCTV CAMERAS WV- 1410, WV- 1414 WV- 1450, WV- 1454
SINGLE CABLE CCTV CAMERAS WV-1600/WV-1650
HIGH PERFORMANCE CCTV CAMERAS WV- 1500, WV- 1504, WV- 1550, WV- 1554
sync, automatic focus control, automatic beam control, adjustable
vertical phase, accepts an optional camera identification generator
board ( WV- Q90), 120VAC, 60Hz.
WV- 1460
$ 735.00
Vidicon CCTV Cameras -- Black Et White
WV- 1410
2/3" general purpose Vidicon Camera with switchable line lock
random interface or internal 2:1 EIA RS- 170 sync, adjustable vertical
phase, automatic focus control, automatic beam control, and ac-
cepts an optional camera identification generator board ( WV- Q901,
120VAC, 60Hz.
WV- 1410
$ 270.00
WV- 1414 2/3" general purpose, low voltage Vidicon Camera with switchable
line lock random interface or internal 2:1 EIA RS- 170 sync, adjustable vertical phase, automatic focus control, automatic beam control, and
accepts an optional camera identification generator board ( WV- Q90),
24VAC, 60Hz.
WV- 1414
$ 270.00
WV- 1500 2/3" high performance Vidicon Camera with 16mm, f/1.6 C- mount
lens, line lock random or internal 2:1 interface ( RS- 1701 or external
sync ( Genlock RS- 1701, black clamp, L.L. Phase, video level control,
accepts an optional splitter board, AGC on/off switch, 120VAC
60Hz.
WV- 1500
$ 370.00
WV- 1504 2/3" high performance, low voltage Vidicon Camera with 16mm,
f/1.6 C- mount lens, line lock random or internal 2:1 interface
(RS- 1701 or external sync ( Genlock RS- 170(, black clamp, L.L. Phase, video level control, accepts an optional splitter board, AGC on/off switch, 24VAC, 60Hz.
WV- 1504
$ 370.00
WV- 1500X 2/3" high performance Vidicon Camera without lens, line lock
random or internal 2:1 interface ( RS- 170) or external sync ( Genlock
RS- 170), black clamp, L.L. Phase, video level control, accepts an optional splitter board, AGC on/off switch, 120VAC, 60Hz.
WV- 1500X
$ 350.00
WV- 1504X
2/3" high performance, low- voltage Vidicon Camera without lens,
line lock random or internal 2:1 interface ( RS- 1701 or external sync (Genlock RS- 170), black clamp, L.L. Phase, video level control, accepts an optional splitter board, AGC on/off switch, 24VAC, 60Hz.
WV- 1504X
$ 350.00
WV- 1464 2/3" general purpose, low voltage Newvicon Camera ( body only;
without lens), switchable line lock random interface or internal 2:1
EIA RS- 170 sync, automatic focus control, automatic beam control,
adjustable vertical phase, accepts an optional camera identification
generator board ( WV- Q90), 24VAC, 60Hz.
WV- 1464
735.00
WV- 1550 2/3" high performance Newvicon Camera ( body only; without lens),
line lock random or internal 2:1 interface ( RS- 1701 or external sync (Genlock RS- 170), black clamp, L.L. Phase, video level control, accepts an optional splitter board, AGC on/off switch, 120VAC, 60Hz.
WV- 1550
850.00
WV- 1554 2/3" high performance, low voltage Newvicon Camera ( body only;
without lens), line lock random or internal 2:1 interface ( RS- 170) or
external sync ( Genlock RS- 170), black clamp, L.L. Phase, video level
control, accepts an optional splitter board, AGC on/off switch,
24VAC, 60Hz.
WV- 1554
$ 850.00
Single Cable Compact CCTV Camera Systems
WV-1600/KT1 Single- cable 2/3" Vidicon Camera with 16mm f/1.6 C- mount lens,
internal line lock random interface, AC power camera control box,
AC 120V, 60Hz.
WV-1600/KT1
$ 350.00
WV-1600/KT2 Single- cable 2/3" Vidicon Camera with 16mm f/1.6 C- mount lens,
internal random interface, DC power camera control box, DC 12V.
WV-1600/KT2
$ 350.00
WV-1650/KT1 Single- cable 2/3" Newvicon Camera ( body only; without lens), Cmount ( optional Auto Iris lens required), internal line lock random interface, AC power camera control box, AC 120V, 60Hz.
WV-1650/KT1
$800.00
WV-1650/KT2
Single- cable 2/3" Newvicon Camera ( body only; without lens), Cmount ( optional Auto Iris lens required), internal random interface,
DC power camera control box, DC 12V.
WV-1650/KT2
$800.00
Newvicon CCTV Cameras -- Black Et White ( Body Only)
WV- 1460 2/3" general purpose Newvicon Camera .( body only; without lens), switchable line lock random interface or internal 2:1 EIA RS- 170
Drone Camera
WV- 1410D Dummy lens, pilot lamp, on/off switch, 3- prong grounded power
cord, 6ft.
WV- 1410D
$ 60.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 193
One Panasonic Way Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
WV-CD10 (shown with optional lens)
WV-CD80 (shown with optional lens)
WV-CD10/80 High Technology Solid State Black and White CPD Cameras
Key Features
·Compact and lightweight design incorporates solid state single- chip Charged Priming Device Image Sensors
·Solid-state components with metal casings provide long life and high reliability
·No image distortion or burn- in ·Very short lag ·Not effected by magnetic fields ·Constructed for protection against shock and vibration ·Expanded CCTV applications include medical, scientific,
military, robotics and general surveillance operations
Built with anew generation of advanced engineering, the Panasonic WV-CD10 and WV-CD80 black and white CPD cameras redefine performance parameters in industrial CCTV applications. Incorporating innovative Charged Priming Device ( CPD) single- chip image sensors, these cameras perform superbly and offer improved maintenance-free operation.
Applications for the WV-CD10 and WV-CD80 CPD cameras are virtually endless. Their design characteristics make them ideal for use in medical and industrial applications-- especially in the new field of robotics-- because
they do not produce image distortion like conventional cameras. In addition, their compact design allows them to be mounted in tight places.
WV-CD10 WV-CD80
$795.00 895.00
VC- 194
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BLACK AND WHITE CPD CAMERAS
p anarecidit
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
WV-CD10 and WV-CD80 ( cont'd.)
APPEARANCE
TV CAMERA WV-CD11
TV CAMERA POWER SUPPLY WV-CD12
Flange Adjusting Ring
Automatic Iris Lens ( Option)
Power Indicator Power ON/OFF Switch
CCTV CAMERA WV-CD80 Automatic Iris Lens ( Option)
Flange Adjusting Ring
Connector for Automatic Iris Lens
Camera Mounting Screw Hole Connector for Automatic Iris Lens
Power Cable Connector (Male 6 pin Connector)
Video Output Connector (BNC Connector)
or
.11.- llor1 I 1,../q.1.7
Pick-up Element: Scanning Area: Synchronization: Scanning System: Scanning:
Horizontal:
Vertical:
Resolution; Horizontal: Vertical:
Video Output: Signal to Noise Ratio: --MinimumIllumination:
Power ord Plug
Power Cable Connector (Female 6 pin Connector)
Camera Mounting Screw Hole
Vertical Drive Signal Input Connector ( BNC Connector) Horizontal Drive Signal Input Connector ( BNC Connector) Video Output Connector (BNC Connector) Camera ON/OFF Switch Power Cord Plug
Internal RS- 170
WV-CD10
I
WV-0080
404(H) x256(V) CPD Type Solid- State
sensor
6.6 x8BmmquivaIent to
area of 2/3" pick-up tube)
IInternal or External ( HD, VD 4VP-p) RS- 170
Progressive Scanning
El A Standard 525 Lines/60 Fields/30 Frames
15.734kHz
59.9Hz
280 lines at center
190 lines at center
1.0Vp-p Composite/BNC Connector
46dB ( AGC ON with 4.5MHz LPF) Usable picture (- 20dB)
1footcandles ( 10 lux) at F1.4 with IR filter
50dB ( AGC OFF with 4.5MHz LPF) Usable picture (- 20dB)
0.5 footcandles ( 5lux) at F1.4 with IR filter
Recommended
10 footcandles ( 100 lux) at F1.4 with IR filter
Illumination: BNC Connector x 1 - Video
Connector6 s: P Connector x1- Power Lens Mount: Ambient Temperature: Power Source: Power Consumption:
BNC Connector x3 - Video, HD, VD
C- Mount +14°F to + 122 °F (- 10°Cto +50°C)
120V AC 60 Hz 7Watts
Power Requirement: Dimensions:
(Excluding Lens) Weight ( without lensT:--
DC 10.5V-40mA 2-11/16"(W) x2-3/8"(H) x4-3/4"(D) (69(W) x60(H) x 120(13) mm) 1.32 lbs ( 0.6 kg)
2-11/16"(W) x2-3/8"(H) x7-3/4"(13) (69(W) x60(H) x197(D) mm) 2.9 lbs ( 1.3 kg)
- - --
Power Supp ly for WV-CD10
Power Source:
120V AC 60Hz
Power Consumption:
15 Watts
Connector:
6 pin connector x 1for
Power Source of TV camera
Ambient Operating Temperature: Dimensions:
Weight:
+14° to + 122° F (- 10°Cto +50°C)
5-1/2"(W) x2"(H) x5-1/8"(D) (140(W) x 51(H) x 130(D)mm) 2.86 lbs ( 1.3 kg)
COMPOSITION OF WV-CD10 · TV Camera WV-CD11 · TV Camera Power Supply WV- 0012
COMPOSITION OF WV-CD80 · TV Camera WV CD80
Auto Iris Lenses [OPTION]
4We
orb
Standard Lens WV-LA16A
16mm, f/1.4 with auto- iris
Telephoto Lens WV-LA50A
50mm, f/1.8 with auto- iris
Lair-
Telephoto Lens WV-LA25A 25mm, f/1.4 with auto- iris
Wide Angle Lens WV- LASA
8mm, f/1.4 with auto- iris
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
1set 1set 1set
VC- 195
parusimic
AUDIO- VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
CCTV CAMERAS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
WV- 1800
WV- 1804
WV- 1850
WV- 1854
High Resolution Cameras-- Black Et White ( Body Only) WV- 1800
1" separate mesh Vidicon camera ( body only, without lens), horizontal
resolution more than 800 lines at center, built-in EIA RS- 170 LSI sync
generator, genlock feature, Automatic Beam Control ( ABC),
Automatic Electronic Focus Control, Automatic Black Clamp Circuit,
Automatic Gain Control ( AGC), Automatic switching of internal/ex-
ternal sync modes, Internal sweep reversal connector for mounting
position flexibility, sweep protection circuit, heavy duty die-cast chassis, 120V AC, 60 Hz
WV- 1800
$875.00
WV- 1804
1" separate mesh Vidicon camera ( body only, without lens), horizontal
resolution more than 800 lines at center, built-in EIA RS- 170 LSI sync generator, genlock feature, Automatic Beam Control ( ABC),
Automatic Electronic Focus Control, Automatic Black Clamp Circuit,
Automatic Gain Control ( AGC), Automatic switching of internal/external sync modes, Internal sweep reversal connector for mounting
position flexibility, sweep protection circuit, heavy duty die-cast chassis, 24V AC, 60 Hz
WV- 1804
$875.00
WV- 1850
1" extended Red Newvicon camera ( body only; without lens),
extremely high sensitivity; usable picture 0.01 footcandles ( 0.1 lux); recommended illumination 0.1 footcandles ( 1lux), low blooming and
low image retention, horizontal resolution more than 800 lines at center, built-in EIA RS- 170 LSI sync generator, Genlock feature, automatic switching of internal/external sync modes, Automatic Beam Control ( ABC), Automatic Electronic Focus Control, Automatic Black Clamp Circuit, Automatic Gain Control ( AGC), Internal sweep reversal connector for mounting position flexibility, sweep protection
circuit, heavy duty die-cast chassis, 120V AC, 60 Hz, optional auto iris and motorized lenses available
WV- 1850
$ 1575.00
WV- 1854
1" extended Red Newvicon camera ( body only; without lens), extremely high sensitivity; usable picture 0.01 footcandles ( 0.1 lux); recommended illumination 0.1 footcandles ( 1lux), low blooming and
low image retention, horizontal resolution more than 800 lines at center, built-in EIA RS- 170 LSI sync generator, Genlock feature,
Automatic switching of internal/external sync modes, Automatic Beam Control ( ABC), Automatic Electronic Focus Control, Automatic
Black Clamp Circuit, Automatic Gain Control ( AGC), Internal sweep
reversal connector for mounting position flexibility, sweep protection
circuit, heavy duty die-cast chassis, 24V AC, 60 Hz, optional auto iris
and motorized lenses available
WV- 1854
$1575.00
WV- 1900
WV- 1904
LUNAR LITE CAMERAS
WV- 1904
1" Low Light Cameras-- Black Et White ( Body Only) WV- 1900
Lunar-Lite low light level camera with single stage Image Intensifier
and 1" Newvicon ( body only; without lens), extremely high sensitivity
operation; usable picture 3 x 10 4 footcandles ( 3 x 10 3 lux); recommended illumination 3 x 10 3 footcandles ( 3 x 10 2 lux), horizontal resolution more than 600 lines a center, S/N45dB, low
blooming and low image retention, built-in RS- 170 LSI sync generator, Genlock feature, Automatic Beam Control ( ABC),
Automatic Electronic Focus Control, Automatic Black Clamp Circuit, Automatic Gain Control ( AGC), Automatic switching of internal/external sync modes, Internal sweep reversal connector for mounting position flexibility, sweep protection circuit, heavy duty die-cast
chassis, 120V AC, 60 Hz, optional auto iris and motorized zoom lenses available
WV- 1900
$6400.00
WV- 1904
Lunar -Lite low light level camera with single stage Image Intensifier
and 1" Newvicon ( body only; without lens), extremely high sensitivity
operation; usable picture 3 x 10 4 footcandles ( 3 x 10 3 lux); recommended illumination 3 x 10 footcandles ( 3 x 10 2 lux),
horizontal resolution more than 600 lines a center, S/N45dB, low
blooming and low image retention, built-in RS- 170 LSI sync
generator, Genlock feature, Automatic Beam Control ( ABC),
Automatic Electronic Focus Control, Automatic Black Clamp Circuit,
Automatic Gain Control ( AGC), Automatic switching of internal/ex-
ternal sync modes, Internal sweep reversal connector for mounting
position flexibility, sweep protection circuit, heavy duty die-cast
chassis, 24V AC, 60 Hz, optional auto iris and motorized zoom lenses available
WV- 1904
$6400.00
VC- 196
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
F banasare AUDIO- VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
COLOR SURVEILLANCE CAMERA
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
WV- 4050 Color Surveillance Camera
*Pick-up Tube : Newvicon
Camera Head
*Minimum Required Illumination: Only 1footcandle
*Horizontal Resolution : More than 270 lines
*Signal to Noise Ratio : Better than 46 dB *Automatic White Balance: on both Camera and RCU *RIB Gain Control: on both Camera and RCU
goo`
*200 meters : Maximum distance between Camera and RCU
*6 Times Zoom Lens OPTIONAL
Controlled from RCU of pan/tilt mechanism
*Applicable with Panasonic CCTV Accessories (WV- 7000 series)
Panasonic
Awc. -
V/HITE BALANCE
RED
aue:
*Industrial Design for surveillance
(Metal Case, Top or bottom mounting)
Specifications
CAMERA
Pick-up Tube : Sync : Horizontal
Resolution : Video Output : Minimum
Illumination : Signal-to- Noise
Ratio : Lens :
Zoom Ratio: Aperture: Mount : Filter Size : Iris : Remote Control :
1/2" 3.9MHz Newvicon 2:1 internal interlace
270 lines at center 1.0Vp-p / 75 ohm BNC connector
1footcandle (10 Lux)
Better than 46 dB
6 Times Ø=9-- 54mm) F1.2 N- Bayonet 52mm Auto/Manual Zoom, Focus, Iris
Remote Control Unit
ir
(RCU. Included)
----liner--
"
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
·Basic System 1
BNC
Coaxial Cable
BNC Monitor/Time Lapse VTR
1DC 12V 1
·Basic System 2
BNC Coaxial Cable
7- conductor control cable
BNC
Monitor/Time Lapse VTR
Controls :
Indoor/Outdoor Select Switch
(On camera) R/B Gain Control (On camera and RCU) Auto White Balance Control (Momentary push button, on
camera and RCU)
Maximum cable Length :200 meters
Power Source :
DC 12V 03A
Dimensions :
85(W) x 81(H) X 252 (Dl mm
Weight :
1.1kg
·Application System ( Outdoor Use)
Outdoor Housing WV- 71608
Monitor/Time Lapse VTR
RCU(W V-4052)
Coaxial Cable
RCU
Power Source : Power Supply : Power Consumption : Dimensions : Weight :
AC 120V 60Hz DC 12V to the camera head 9.3W 138(W) x 44 (H) x 153(D) nun 1.8kg
Pan/Tilt Mechanism W V-7260
·RCU
Remote Control Unit WV- 7360
Auto White Balance Button R. Gain -- B. Gain
WV- 4050 With Remote Control Unit WV- 4051 Head Only WV- 4052 Remote Control Unit WV-LZ80/6 Lens WV-AD16 C- Mount Adaptor
$995.00 895.00 150.00 295.00 15.00
Pan,,somC
k.
11111111
11111111111·1111·111111\ 111,
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
4111111.
VC -197
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
(shown with optional lens)
$1595.00
WV-CD120
High Technology Solid State Color CPD Camera
Key Features
·Solid-state CPD offers extremely long- life and high reliability as compared to conventional tubes
·No image distortion, burn- in, lag, or blooming ·Compact, lightweight construction with protection
against shock and vibration ·Minimum fixed pattern noise as compared to MOS
image sensors ·Broader dynamic range than conventional CCD image
sensors ·A Line Sequential Color Differential System is employed
with a highly precise mosaic color filter on the CPD imaging area to pick-up the 4 primary colors ( Green, Cyan, Magenta and Yellow)
Panasonic complements its already outstanding line of CPD CCTV cameras with the introduction of the WV-CD120.
The WV-CD120 is a quality, compact color camera that offers some of the most advanced features available today.
Incorporating innovative Charged Priming Device ( CPD) single- chip sensors, this camera performs superbly and offers improved maintenance-free operation.
In addition, the compact design of the WV-CD120 allows it to be mounted in areas of limited space.
Applications for the WV-CD120 CPD CCTV camera are virtually endless.
The WV-CD120 is perfect for use in the new field of Robotics because it does not produce image distortion like conventional cameras.
This makes the WV-CD120 a highly accurate camera for scanning, measurement and observation purposes.
Expanded CCTV applications also include medical,
scientific, military, and general surveillance operations.
WV-CD120
$ 1595.00
VC- 198
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COLOR CPD CAMERA
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
°MC PanaS
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
WV-CD120 ( contd.)
SYSTEM (GEN-LOCK APPLICATION)
PREVIEW
PROGRAM
Color TV Camera
VIDEO OUT
BLACK BURST (GEN LOCK)
Multi pin Cable
Color
Power Supply
TV Camera
CIED r VIDEO OUT
BLACK BURST
multi pin (GEN LOCK)
Cable
L--.t
Power Supply
COMPOSITE
Z-16666- 6ó6
66 66 66
o0iióebob000e o
Special Effects Generator (WJ-5600)
Une
APPEARANCE
CAMERA HEAD
Connector for Automatic Iris Lens
Automatic Iris Lens (Option)
Video Output Connector (BNC connector)
POWER SUPPLY
Power Indicator
White Balance Knob
Power Cable Connector ( Female 6 pin Connector)
Camera Mounting Screw Hole
Power Cable Connector (Male 6 pin Connector)
GEN -LOCK Input Connector
<SIDE VIEW>
<REAR VIEW>
2 1111111 Power ON/OFF Switch
«MS
<FRONT VIEW>
-- Power Cord Plug
<REAR VIEW>
SPECIFICATIONS
VILM.1".· 41 . ··········
Pick-up element: Scanning Area: Lens Mount: SyncronlzatIon: Scanning Frequency:
Horizontal Vertical Video Output: Resolution: Horizontal Vertical Gen- lock Input: Minimum Illumination: Recommended Illumination: Light Control: S/N Ratio: The length between Camera Camera and CCU: Power Source: Ambient Temperature: Dimensions:
Weights:
r·Lfwvi .elapply Power Source: Power Consumption: White Balance: Ambient Temperature: Dimensions: Weights:
368 (H) x 496 (V) 6.83 mm (V) *x 9.07 mm (H) C- mount Internal/External 2:1 interlace.
15.734 kHz 59.9 Hz 1.0Vp-p composite/75 ohms ( BNC connector)
More than 250 lines at center More than 350 lines at center VBS 1.0Vp-p/75 ohms 3 footcandles ( 30 lux with F1.4) 120 footcandles (1200 lux with F1.4) Depending on optional Auto Iris Lens used More than 46 dB
Maximum 656 ft. (200 m) (AWG 24) DC 10.5V, Approx. 600 mA (6P connector) +32"F to + 104'F (O'C to + 40·C) 2-11/16" (W) x 2-3/8" (H) X 8-1/4" (D) (69 (W) x 60 (H) x 210.5 (D) mm) (Excluding Lens) 2.09 lbs (0.95 kg) Excluding Lens
AC 120V, 50/60 Hz Approx. 26W (when used 200m cable) (AWG 24) B ( Blue) - R (Red) Adjustable +32"F to + 104·F (O'C to + 40"C) 5-1/2-(W) x 2"(H) x 5-1/8"(D) (140(W) x 51(H) x 130(0)mm] Approx. 2.86 lbs (Leto)
OPTIONAL LENSES
C-MOUNT LENSES
STANDARD LENS WV-LA16A
WIDE ANGLE LENS WV-LA8A
16mm, f1.4 with Auto-Iris TELEPHOTO LENS WV-LA25A
25mm, f1.4 with Autolris
8mm, fl 4 with Auto- Ins
TELEPHOTO LENS
WV-LA50A
10114> .`er,rri.ieed,;
fib ' reiwerfr »me-, 50mm fl 8 with Auto- Ins
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC -199
Panasonic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
One Panasonic Way
PANNING/REMOTE CONTROL UNITS Et RELAY BOXES
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
WV- 7466
WV- 7330
Panning Units
WV- 7220B
Standard Indoor Panning Head, mountable on ceiling or bracket- mount on
flat surface, adjustable panning angle 20° - 320°, requires optional remote
control unit, WV- 7320
$ 186.00
WV- 72306
Deluxe indoor remote controlled Pan/Tilt mechanism head, ceiling or bracket mount on flat surface, adjustable panning angle, tilting angle up 45°, down 45°, pan speed 6.0°/sec., tilt speed 3.0°/sec., supplies 24V AC power to low voltage camera, requires remote control unit ( WV- 7330, WV- 7430, or WV- 7490 with relay box WV- 7435) $ 495.00
WV- 7260
Heavy duty outdoor remote controlled pan/tilt mechanism head, requires
bracket mount on flat surface, adjustable panning angle 10° - 340°, tilting
angle, up 15°, down 60°, pan speed 7.0°/sec., supplies 24V AC power to
low voltage camera and housing, requires remote control unit ( WV- 7360,
WV- 7460, or WV- 7490 with relay box WV- 7465)
S850.00
Remote Control Units and Relay Boxes
WV- 7320 Remote control unit for operating optional WV- 7220 panning head, control on/off ( 24V AC) power for TV camera and panning mechanism, rack mountable with optional rack mount frame $ 135.00
WV- 7330
Remote control unit for WV- 7230 pan tilt mechanism. Controls on;off
(24V AC) power for TV camera, zoom, focusing and iris for zoom lens and
pan/tilt mechanism, rack mountable with optional rack mount frame,
joystick control for pan & tilt
$ 285.00
WV- 7430
Remote control unit for WV- 7230. Controls on/off ( 24V AC) power for TV
camera, focusing, iris for zoom and pan/tilt mechanism, rack mountable
with optional rack mount frames, joystick control for panning & tilting,
requires relay box WV- 7435
S125.00
WV- 7360
Remote control unit for WV- 7260 control on/off ( 24V AC) power for TV camera, zooming, focusing, iris for zoom lens, pan/tilt mechanism, defroster & wiper for outdoor housing, rack mountable with optional rack mount frame, joystick controls for panning and tilting $ 340.00
WV- 7460
Remote control unit for WV- 7260 control on/off ( 24V AC) power for TV
camera, zooming, focusing, iris for zoom lens, pan/tilt mechanism,
defroster & wiper for outdoor housing, rack mountable with optional rack
mount frame, joystick controls for panning and tilting, requires relay box
WV- 7465
S185.00
WV- 7490B
Remote control unit for WV- 7260 and WV- 7230, controls on/off ( 24V AC)
power for TV camera, zooming, focusing, iris for zoom, pan/tilt mechanism,
defroster and wiper for outdoor housing, controls 6 sets of pan/tilt mechanism, zoom lenses and housing, rack mountable with optional rack
mount frame, joystick controls for pan & tilt, requires relay box WV- 7435
(indoor) or VVV-7465 (outdoor)
S395.00
WV- 7435
Relay box, indoor, with 24V AC power built-in for TV camera and pan/tilt
mechanism, for use with 'AN- 7230 pan/tilt mech; A'N- 7430 remote
control or WV- 7490 remote control
S285.00
WV- 7465
Relay box, outdoor, extends control between pan/tilt mechanism and
remote control unit, for use with A'N- 7260 pan/tilt mechanism. WV- 7460
remote control, A'N- 7490 remote control
S350.00
VC-200
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Fwesioorkf
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
CAMERA MOUNTING BRACKETS/ HOUSINGS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
WV- 7060
Model Number & Description
Use With
WV- 7010 Ceiling bracket, light weight, heavy duty, WV- 1000/1000A series fixed focal lines
indoor, universal head
$17.50 WV-7120 Housing WV-1400/WV-1500 series
WV-1600/WV-1650KT 1 series
WV- 7015
Wall bracket, light weight, heavy duty,
indoor, universal head
$25.00
WV-1600/WV-1650KT 1 series WV-1000/1000A series w/fixed focal lens
WV-7120 Housing
WV- 1400/1500 series
WV- 831P Wall bracket, medium weight, indoor
universal head
$40.00
WV- 1000/1000A series w/zoom lens. WV-7130 Housing WV- 1400/1500 series
WV-1600/WV-1650KT 1 series
WV- 7030 Wall mount, heavy duty indoor
$55.00
WV-7220 Pan mechanism WV-7230 Pan/tilt mech. WV-7130 Housing
WV- 7060
Outdoor mount, heavy duty, mounts
on flat surface, has pan and tilt
adjustments
$37.50
WV-7150 Housing WV-7160 Housing
WV- 7120
Dustproof indoor housing, mounts
from top
$60.00
WV- 1000/1000A series w/fixed focal lens
WV- 7130 Dustproof indoor housing, mounts
from top
$100.00
WV- 1000/1000A series w/zoom lens WV- 1400/1500 series WV-1600/WV-1650KT 1 series
WV- 71508 Outdoor camera housing, contains
thermostatically controlled heater &
fan
$350.00
WV- 1000/1000A series w ,fixed focal lens
WV-7060 Mount WV- 1400/1500 series WV-1600/WV-1650KT 1 series
WV- 7160B Outdoor camera housing, contains
thermostatically controlled heater &
fan, built-in defroster
$450.00
WV- 1000/1000A series TV Camera w zoom lens WV-7060 Mount WV-7260 Pan/tilt mech.
WV- Z50 Wiper assembly
$150 00 WV-7160 Camera housing
WV- 1710 Outdoor, drip- free housing for single
cable cameras $ 85.00
WV- 1600 WV- 1650
; WV- 71508
WV- 71608 Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 201
Panae:Mge AUDIO- VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES CCTV CAMERAS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
Model Number & Description
Use With
MN- 518 Telephoto lens f/1 . 8, 50mm w/iris.
$80.00
All Panasonic 2/3" cameras ( except WV-260P and all Newvicon cameras)
MN- 815 Wide angle lens f/1.5, 8.5mm w/iris.
$95.00
All Panasonic 2/3" cameras (except WV-260P and all Newvicon cameras)
KF-LA16A
Auto Iris lens, 16mm, f/1.6 standard. $320.00
KF-LA25A Auto Ins lens, 25mm, f/1.4 telephotc
S340.00
WV- 1050/1050A WV- 1054/1054A WV- 1150/1150A WV- 1154 /1154A
WV- 1050/1050A WV- 1504/1504A WV- 1150/1150A WV- 1154/1154A
MN- 1350/1350A WV- 1354/1354A WV-1650/KT1 WV-1650/KT2
WV- 1350/1350A WV- 1354/1354A WV-1650/KT1 WV-1650/KT2
KF LA50A
Auto Ins lens 50mm, f/1.8 telephoto $340.00
KF-LA8A
WV- 1050/1050A WV- 1054/1054A WV- 1150/1150A WV- 1154/1154A
WV- 1350/1350A WV- 1354/1354A WV-1650/KT1 WV-1650/KT2
Auto Iris lens, 8.5mm, f/1.5 wide angle. WV- 1050/1050A
S350.00
WV- 1054/1054A WV- 1150/1150A WV- 1154/1154A
WV-LA1 6A
WV- 1350/1350A WV- 1354/1354A
WV-1650/KT1 WV-1650/KT2
Auto Iris lens, 16mm, f/1.6 standard. WV-1450 $235.00 WV-1454
WV- 1550 WV- 1554
WV-LA25A Auto Iris lens, 25mm, f/1.4 telephoto.
$245.00
WV-LA50A Auto Iris lens, 50mm, f/1.8 telephoto
S245.00
WV- 1450 WV- 1454
WV- 1450 WV- 1454
WV- 1550 WV- 1554
WV- 1550 WV- 1554
WV-LA8A
Auto Iris lens, 8.0mm, f/1.5 wide angle WV-1450 S270.00 WV-1454
CF-125ASND Wide angle fixed focal 12.5mm f/1.4 with wedge filter and auto iris.
$475.00
WV- 1850/1854 WV- 1900/1904
WV- 1550 MN- 1554
CF-25BSND Standard fixed focal 25mm f/1.4 with wedge filter and auto iris.
S475.00
WV- 1850/1854 WV- 1900/1904
CF-50BSND Telephoto fixed focal 50mm f/1.4 with wedge filter and auto ins.
S485.00
WV- 1850/1854 WV- 1900/1904
C10X16ASND
10X motorized zoom lens, 16mm160mm f/1.8 with wedge filter and auto iris. Auto iris closed circuit (focus and zoom remote
motorized) $ 340 0.00
WV- 1850/1854 WV- 1900/1904
Model Number & Description
Use With
C10X16AMND 10X motorized zoom lens, 16mm160mm f/1.8 with wedge filter, iris, focus and zoom remote motorized
$3300.00
WV- 1800/1804 WV- 1850/1854
CZ- 40C
Remote control unit for C10X16AMND
Auto- iris or manual iris selectable, Iris,
focus and zoom control
$500.00
C10X16AMND
CZ- 50C
Remote control unit for CIOX16ASND,
focus and zoom control
8175.00
C10X16ASND
WJ-14013
Pulse distribution amplifier, bridge
connection input, 6outputs, BNC
connectors
$185.00
Sync Generator
WJ-300B
Distribution amplifier with selectable 1 input to 6 output or 2 channel with 1 input to 3 output each channel. BNC Connectors $ 250.00
All Video Cameras & System Equip.
WJ-901B
Junction box for line view function
from 10p connector to UHF connec-
tors (Video out, H drive, V drive) 4- pin
(tally light and intercom) and 6- pin
(H drive; V drive tally and intercom).
BNC Connectors
$65.00
10H-25 10- pin multiconnector extension cable WI male & female connectors ( 25 ft.)
$70.00
VW- 220P MN- 240P VIN-250P/A MN- 340/341P WV- 350P MN- 360/361P MN- 370P
MN- 1100/1100A MN- 1104/1104A MN- 1300/1300A VW- 1304/1304A
10H-50
10- pin multiconnector extension cable w/male & female connectors ( 50 ft.)
$110.00
WV- 1100/1100A WV- 1104/1104A WV- 1300 1300A WV- 1304 1304A
JC-1B
Junction Cable 10- pin and 2 UHF
connectors.
$27.50
WV- 1100 1100A WV- 1104 1104A
WV- 1300 1300A WV- 1304 1304A
WJ-A01 31/ 2 - Rack Mount Frame
$50.00
WJ- 120P WJ-190P
WJ-140P WJ-500 501P WV- 690P
WJ-601 31/ 2 "H x23/." W Blank Panel
S1 7.50
WJ-A01
WJ-540P/A VY-922/A WJ-120P WV- 612P WJ-545P
ViAb1150/1150A 1AN-1154/1154A WV -1350/1350A WV- 1354/1354A
WV- 1150/1150A WV- 1154/1154A WV- 1350/1350A WV- 1350/1354A
WV- 1150/1150A WV- 1154/1154A WV- 1350/1350A WV- 1354/1354A
WV- 7320 WV- 7330 WV- 7430 WV- 7360 WV- 7460
VC-202
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PEERLESS SALES CO.
1950 Hawthorne Ave Melrose Park, IL 60160 (312) 865-8870
CAMERA MOUNTING BRACKETS
CAMERA MOUNTS SMALL SCREEN HARDWARE
16" - 25" DESK SWIVELS
4000-000
4002-000
4004-050
4005-000
4020-130
4040-130
STOCK fr 4000.000 4002-000 4004.050 4004-090
4005.000
Small, Light Duty Interior Camera Mount for wall, ceiling, or shelf. Die cast aluminum, finished black Larger, Light Duty Interior Camera Wall Mount. Steel tubing, finished black False Ceiling Small Camera Mount. 5" long, finished black
False Ceiling Small Camera Mount. 9" long, finished black
Largest, Light Duty Satin Chrome Interior Camera mount Works equally well on ceiling or wall
14.00ea. 20.50ea. 2000es. 2200es. 3850es.
SMALL SCREEN MONITOR/ RECEIVER MOUNTING HARDWARE
The following three brackets have amounting tray 9" x9'. Products are attached to a random perforated inner tray which is secured with concealed tamper proof screws. Capacity approximately 20 lbs.
1208.000 . Small Screen Monitor Desk Top Swivel and Tilt Security Mount
1180.000 .... Small Screen Monitor Wall Mount. Swivels and tilts with a security tray
29.00ea. 47.25ea.
STOCK
All 4020 Series Mounts are designed for exterior mounting of pan till and scanner units.
4020-130 . Heavy Duty with a13 arm
4020.180 . Heavy Duty with a16' arm
4020-200
Heavy Duty with a20" arm
4020.240
Heavy Duly with a24" arm
All 4040 Series Mounts are designed for exterior mounting. They are provided with a pan tilt bracket for proper mounting of camera housing or scanner unit.
4040.130 4040.180 4040.200 4040.240
Heavy Duty with a13" arm
Heavy Duty with a16" arm Heavy Duty with a20" arm Heavy Duty with a24" arm
1950es. 3150es. 5100es. 7000es.
34.00ea. 46.00ea. 7850es. 97.50ea.
1209-000
1180-000
1180-000 .
Small Screen Monitor Ceiling Mount. Swivels and tilts with a security tray. 12' clearance to ceiling. Order 1445-000
extension column if additional clearance is required
62 00es.
10" TO 16 - MONITOR/ RECEIVER MOUNTING HARDWARE
The following three mounts have atray 15 1 /2 W a 11 1/4" D. Products are mounted to a random perforated inner tray which is secured with a key type locking bracket. Capacity approximately 35 lbs.
STOCK e
1212-000
Desk Top Swivel and Tilt with universal security tray
1153-000 . Wall Swivel and Tilt Bracket with universal security tray
43.50ea. 5150.9.
Nei · 1153-000
1212-000
1183-000
1183.000
Ceiling Mount Bracket swivels and tilts with universal security tray
86.75ea
16" TO 25 - MONITOR/ RECEIVER MOUNTING HARDWARE
DESK TOP SWIVELS
2242-220
2218.000 2221.000 2221-111
Universal Locking Desk Top Swivel for 16'19" receivers. Features random perforated security tray, 21 1 /2 "W x 12' D with key- type locking bracket
.. Non- locking Desk Top Swivel with universal tray designed for all 18" color TV sets. 19 V.' W x 15" D
.. Non- locking Desk Top Swivel with universal tray designed to hold all 19" color Ty sets. 24"W x 13½" 0
.. Non- Locking Desk Top Swivel with beautiful walnut V.000
grain shell designed to hold all 19" color TV sets 24 " W. 13 1/2 D
2225-000 ... . Non- locking Jumbo Desk Top Swivel with universal tray designed to holdall 25' color TV sets. 29 1 /2 "W x 18 '0
1219-000
Non- locking Desk Top Swivel with universal tray designed for all 19" BNV TV sets. 21'W x 10"D
41. 50ea.
1925es. 1925es. 26.00ea.
36 . 00ea. 15.000a.
2416-000 2421-000 2442 220
Non- Locking Desk Top Swivel eliminates need to drill holes in furniture with security glue pad and still provides security from theft. Has universal tray designed for all 16" color TV sets 19 1 /2 " W x 15"D
Non- Locking Desk Top Swivel with glue pad eliminates need to drill holes in furniture and still provides security from theft Has universal tray designed to hold all 19" color TV sets. 24"W x 13 1 /2 "D
Universal Locking Desk Top Swivel for 16".19" receivers with glue pad eliminates need to drill holes in furniture and still provides security from theft Features random perforated security tray. 21 1 /2 "W x 12"D with key- type locking bracket
1429.000
Suction Cup Adaptor for stock M2242-220, 2221-111, 2216.000, 1219-000. or 2221-000 Desk Top Swivels. Eliminates need to drill holes in desk. Add model number of desk swivel selected
to order. Must be factory assembled
850es.
2421 tit
Non- Locking Desk Top Swivel with beautiful walnut wood. grain shelf for 19" color TV and glue pad Eliminates need to
drill holes in furniture 24"W.4 13 1 /2 "D
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
28.00ea. 28.00ea. 49.7509. 34.75ea. VC-203
PEERLESS SALES
1950 Hawthorne Ave Melrose Park, IL 60160
(312) 865-8870
CO.
16" TO 25" MONITOR/ RECEIVER MOUNTING HARDWARE
WALL SWIVEL BRACKETS
16" - 25" WALL BRACKETS CEILING MOUNTS
Peerless offers three distinct styles of wall brackets. Each particular design has
features which could make one most desirable for your installation. Select the proper bracket for your application after comparing their features.
SINGLE ARM DESIGN
FEATURES: Simple design few parts. · Easiest to assemble · quick installation. ·Provides security - cannot be disassembled once receiver is secured. · Provides
good swivel. · Limited to 19" screen size maximum. · Less headroom . arm protrudes below receiver. · Does not look as well ( rpm bottom
STOCK I
2142.210 2142.211 2126-212
Universal Locking Wall Swivel Bracket for 16" - 19" receivers. Tray measures 21 1 /2 " W x 12" D. Key- type lock
Universal Locking Wall Swivel Bracket with fixed 10 degree tilt for 16" - 19" receivers. Tray measures 21 1 /2 "W x 12" D.
Universal Locking Wall Swivel Bracket with adjustable tilt
features. Designed for 16" · 19" receivers. Tray measures 21 "W X 12D. Key- typo locking bracket
5950es.
62.00ea. 81 75ea
. .
STOCK 2171.000
2171-111
2172-000 2173-000
2175.000
SINGLE ARM DESIGN
Non- locking Wall Swivel Bracket with universal tray for all 19" color TV receivers. Tray measures 24"W x 13 1 /2 "D Non- locking wall swivel bracket with walnut woodgrain vinyl tray for all 19" color TV receivers. Tray measures 29 "Wx13 1 /2 " 0 Same as model 2171 except tray has fixed 10' tilt Same as model 2171 except tray haS adjustable tilt from 0* to 15' Non- locking Wall Swivel Bracket for all 16" color receivers Universal tray measures 19 1 /4 " W y 15" D
3300es. 3975es. 3500es. 4500es. 3050es,
DOUBLE ARM DESIGN
DOUBLE Alim DESIGN
FEATURES: Good appearing most of the bracket is behind the TV receiver. · Tray covers unsightly bottom of receiver. · Provides good head clearance. · Somewhat limited swivel. · Not as secure - can be disassembled. · More complex design · More time to assemble and install. · Limited to 21' screen size maximum.
2121.000 2121.010 2116400 2123.000
1100.000
Non- locking Universal Wall Swivel Bracket for all 19' color receivers. Tray measures 24"W x 13 1 /2 " D Same as model 2121, with fixed 10 degree tilt . Non.locking Universal Wall Swivel Bracket tor all 16" color receivers. Tray measures 19 1 /4 " W x 15" D
Non- locking Universal Wall Swivel Bracket for 21" color receivers and 19" units with very large cabinets. Tray measures 25-7/8" W x 15-3/4" D
Non- locking Universal Wall Swivel Bracket for all 19" B/W receivers. Tray measures 21"W x 10'D
35.00es. 3700es. 3250es.
43.75ea. 3050es.
YOKE BRACKET DESIGN
FEATURES: Handles all large receivers with ease. · Unlimited swivel · unlimited
tilt · Provides maximum head clearance. · Good appearing- bracket is behind and over receiver. · Fairly secure difficult to disassemble. · More complex design. ·More time to assemble and install.
1489-170 . Small Yoke Wall Bracket for lb" receivers. Complete with 13" deep random perforated telescoping tray for easy mounting.
Width of yoke adjusts from 13 1 /4 "to 22". Height from 12' to 18'
1419-000 1470.171
Same as stock 01469-170 except without adjustable tray. Yoke attaches with brackets, each side of cabinet on bottom
Yoke Bracket for 19" receivers. Complete with 13' deep adjustable perforated tray for easy mounting. Width adjusts from 22" to 36". Height from 12' to 18'
1470-172
Same as stock 01470-171 above except without adjustable
tray Yoke attaches with brackets. each side of cabinet on bottom
145.00ea. 111.00ea. 150.00ea. 105.00ea.
YOKE BRACKET DESIGN
YOKE BRACKET DESIGN
1170.173 1470400
Yoke Style Mounting for 21" · 25" color receivers or ° the, large products Complete with 13" deep adjustable perfora·
ter' tray for easy mounting Width of yoke adrusts from 22' to 36" Height from 18' to 24 -
Same as stock 01470 173.above except does not have adiustable mounting tray Yoke attaches with brackels.each side of cabinet on bottom
150.00ea. 105.00.a.
CEILING BRACKETS
FALSE CEILING MOUNTS
This is the easy, safe way to mount receivers, monitors, etc.. in areas where you have a2 ' x 2' or 2 ' x 4' exposed grid false ceiling system. What's our secret? We just simply spread the load out over alarge area. Extra safety factors are added to the installation with more tie wires plus asafety cable. Each kit is supplied corn. plete with instructions and all hardware for asafe, simple installation. Yoke style mounting bracket can be extended down to alower position by using 01445 ex ten. skin column.
1449-150 1449-000 1450-151 1450-152
Mount 16" and other small size units utilizing a13" deep random perforated telescoping tray for easy mounting. Width of yoke adjusts from 13 V: " to 22" Height adjusts from 12" to 18'
Same as 01449-150 except without telescoping tray. Unit is mounted by using cabinet mounting plates which attach to the bottom of the cabinet on each side Yoke Bracket designed to hold most 19" color receivers. Includes random perforated 13' deep telescoping tray for easy mounting Width adiusts from 22" to 36" Height from 12" to 18" Same as M1450-151 exc2pt does not have telescoping tray
Cabinet is attached with mounting bracket on each side. on bottom
22000es, 18600es. 225.00ea. 18000es,
1450-1 SJ 1450-000
"v.
Yoke Bracket for 25" receiver ano otner oarge uni is. * uPDile0 complete with 13" deep adjustable width tray for easy mounting. Width adjusts from 22" to 36". Height from 18' to 24'
Same as stock 01450-153 except does not have adjustable telescoping tray for mounting Unit mounts with side cabinet mounting brackets that attach to the bottom edge of the Cabinet
225.00ea. 180.00ea.
STRUCTURAL CEILING MOUNTS
Mount directly to a beam, slab or true ceiling with this structural ceiling mount Yoke bracket can be extended down to alower position by using 01445 extension column.
1459-140
Mount small units using this yoke bracket which is supplied complete with a random perforated adjustable width tray
measuring 13" deep Yoke bracket adjusts in width from 13 1/4 " to 22" Height from 12" to 18"
14500es.
1459.000 1480-141 1480.142
Same bracket as 01459-140 except does not have telescoping mounting tray Units are mounted with side cabinet mounting plates that attach under the bottom edges of the cabinet
Mount 19" color receivers and other products similar in size utilizing thiS adjustable width bracket. complete with random perforated 13" deep telescoping universal tray Yoke bracket adjusts in width from 22" tO 36" Height from 12" tO 18"
Same as M1460141 above except does not have telescoping mounting tray Units are mounted with srde cabinet mounting plates which attach under the bottom edges of the cabinet
11100es, 15000es, 10500es.
1460-143 1480-000
Mount 25" receiver and other items of similar size using this unit Supplied complete with random perforated 13 · deep ad1i/stable width tray Width adjusts from 22" to 36 Height from 18" to 24'
Same as # 1460-143 above except supplied without mounting
tray Units are mounted with cabinet mounting plates that at. tacs to the bottom edge& the Cabinet
VC-204
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
150.00ea. 105.00ea.
PEERLESS SALES CO.
1950 Hawthorne Ave. Melrose Park, IL 60160 (312) 865-8870
16" TO 25" MOUNTING HARDWARE
CEILING BRACKETS
YOKE BRACKETS ONLY
Yoke brackets alone are aVallable for installations where something has already
been provided to support the yoke assembly. Yoke brackets are normally supplied with a lb" mounting hole in the center. 3/4' hole is available when requested.
STOCK 1479.160
1479-000 1480.161
1480.182
Small Yoke Bracket for 16" receivers. Complete with 13" deep random perforated telescoping tray for easy mounting Width
of yoke adjusts from 13 3/." f022'. Height from 12" to 18" Same as # 1479.160 except without adjustable tray. Yoke at.
taches with brackets, each side of cabinet on bottom Yoke Bracket for 19" receivers. Complete with 13" deep ao· justable perforated tray for easy mounting. Width adjusts
from 22" to 36". Height from 12" to 18" Same as # 1480-161 above except without adjustable tray. Yoke attaches with brackets, each side of cabinet on
bottom
120.00ea. 88.00ea. 125.00ea. 80.00ea.
MISCELLANEOUS
CEILING MOUNTS INTERIOR MOUNTING PLATES
SECURITY LOCKS
STOCK lt 1480-183
1480-000
Yoke Style Mounting for 21" · 25" color receivers or other
large products. Complete with 13" deep adjustable per toral cd tray for easy mounting. Width of yoke adjusts from
22" to 36". Height from 18' to 24' Same as II1480-163 above exceot does not have adjustable mounting tray. Yoke attaches with brackets, each side ol
cabinet on bottom
125.00ea. 80.00ea.
1415.000 1416-000
1418-000
Back Up Plate for wall brackets. Mounts on opposite side of wall. Recommended for stock 01470-173, 1470-000 whenever
possible
7.75ea.
Converts Double Arm Design Wall Brackets into a quick mount design. Install and remove receiver bracket assembly from a room easily and quickly. Order with wall bracket
selected. Add to price of wall bracket
12.00ea.
1409-000
1408-000 1397.000
14034100
INTERIOR MOUNTING PLATES
1397-000
1403-000
Inside Corner Adaptor for all Peerless Wall Brackets, except when mounting 23" and 25" receivers
13.25ea.
Sliding Bracket Adaptor for clv5k swivels models 2242.220.
2216.000. 2221.000, 1219.000 and 2221-111 Unit travels 13" Must be factory assembled Add to cost of desk swivel
43.60ea.
Increases swivel of Peerless double arm design wall brackets. stock 02116.000, 2121-000, 2121-010, 2123030. and
1100-000
12.00ea.
1410-000
1414-000
1410.000
Interior/Exterior Wall Mounting Plate. 18" W x 10" H Plate can be used internally or on surface of existing wall to dis. tribute the load over alarger area
12.25ea.
1414-000
Interior Wall Mounting Plate has provisions for 3single gang boxes. Mounts on surface of studs on 16" Centers
18.75ea.
1414-130
1414145
1414-130
Interior Wall Mounting Plate has provisions for 2single gang boxes Mounts flush with face of 2studs with aspacing of 13"
inside to inside
1414.145
Interior Wall Mounting Plate has provisions for 3single gang boxes Mounts flush with face of studs on 16" centers, 14 i/2" inside to inside
EQUIPMENT CABLE LOCK
3054.000
Tie down movable equipment with afive foot, vinyl sheathed aircraft cable security lock. Easily installed. No holes need be drilled in desk top. Requires special key to unlock.
33.00ea.
EQUIPMENT LOCKS
Use these easy to install equipment locks with Peerless yoke style brackets for additional security. When used on adesk or counter they are inconspicuous and hidden from sight. Requires Y. hole drilled in desk or counter top.
3050.000 .
Single unit for-small equipment supplied complete with key.
18.00ea,
18.75ea. 21.00ea.
3052.000
Ties equipment down at 2points. Designed for larger equip. ment.
47.00ee.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
G eit
VC- 205
PELCO SALES,
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave. Fresno, CA 93711
(209) 275-5561
INC.
EHTP-2 EH- 44
CAMERA ENCLOSURES
INDOOR ENCLOSURES
EHTP2 WB CB EH44
Tamper Resistant. Locking drop sides.
Wall Mounting Bracket for EHTP2
Ceiling Mounting Bracket for EHTP2
Tamper Resistant for 2/3" and small 1" cameras wi:h auto iris or fixed focal length lens. Max. camera/lens size: 6.50W x 4.50"H x17"L. Use with EM22 wall mount, MM22 ceiling or pedestal mount.
2/3" CAMERA ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES
EH55
EH55B EH55H EH55HB
Environmental enclosure with sun shroud for 2/3" and small 1" camera. Max. camera/lens size: 5.50W x 5"H x 15"L. All aluminum construction. Use with EM22 wall mount, MM22 or MM103C ceiling or pedestal mount. EH55 with thermostatically controlled Blower.
EH55 with thermostatically controlled Heater.
EH55 with thermostatically controlled Blower & Heater.
1" CAMERA ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES
EH66
EH66B EH66H EH66HB EH66L EH66BL EH66HL EH66HBL
Environmental enclosure with removable lid. Max. camera/lens size: 7"W x 7"H x22"L. All aluminum construction. Use with EM22 or EM102W wall mount, MM22 or MM103C ceiling or pedestal mount. EH66 with thermostatically controlled Blower.
EH66 with thermostatically controlled Heater. EH66 with thermostatically controlled Blower & Heater. EH66 with Tamper Resistant Key Locks.
EH66 with thermostatically controlled Blower & Tamper Resistant Key Locks. EH66 with thermostatically controlled Heater & Tamper Resistant Key Locks.
EH66 with thermostatically controlled Blower & Heater and Tamper Resistant Key Locks.
ACCESSORIES FOR EH66 SERIES ENCLOSURES
S66 WW66 WD66
TI66
Sun Shroud Window Wiper and Washer Assembly
Window Defroster and Defogger. ( Must be used in conjunction with heater assembly) Thermal Insulation
1U36S .E0RO 20.00 18.00
80.00
165.00 210.00 220.00 286.00
210.00 275.00 264.00 330.00 253.00 320.00 308.00 375.00
60.00 260.00 130.00
28.00
EXTRA LONG 1" CAMERA ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES
EH66X
Extra- long environmental enclosure with removeable lid. All aluminum construction. Max. camera/lens size: 7W x 7"H x 33"L. Use with EM22 or EM102W wall mount. MM22 or MM103C ceiling or pedestal mount.253.00
USER
EH66XE1
EH66X with thermostatically controlled Blower.
320.00
EH66XH
EH66X with thermostatically controlled Heater.
310.00
EH66XHB
EH66X with thermostatically controlled Blower & Heater375.00
EH
E6 H66X w6 ith TamX per ResL istant Key Locks.
297.00
EH66XBL
EH66X with thermostatically controlled Blower & Tamper Resistant Key Locks.
363.00
EH66XHL
EH66X with thermostatically controlled Heater & Tamper Resistant Key Locks.
352.00
EH66XHBL
EH66XHBL with thermostatically controlled Blower & Heater and Tamper Resistant Key Locks.420.00
ACCESSORIES FOR EH66X ENCLOSURES
S66X VVW66 WD66
TI66X
Sun Shroud
Window Wiper and Washer Assembly Window Defroster and Defogger ( Must be used in conjunction with heater assembly) Thermal Insulation
66.00 260.00
130.00 30.00
NOTE: Available on Special Order Only
VC-206
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PELCO SALES, INC.
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave. Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
CAMERA ENCLOSURES
EXPLOSION PROOF ENCLOSURES - CERTIFIED
(N.E.C. Class I, Div. I, Groups C,D - Class II, Div. I, Groups E,F,G)
EHX6
Explosion proof, 6" dia. x 24" long, non- pressurized. Use with EM102W wall
mount, MM103C ceiling or pedestal mount
$760.00
EHX8
Explosion proof, 8" dia. x 24" long, non- pressurized. Use with EM102W wall
mount, MM103C ceiling or pedestal mount
825.00
EHX10
Explosion proof, 10" dia. x24" long, non- pressurized. Use with EM102W wall
mount, MM103C ceiling or pedestal mount
Quote
ACCESSORIES FOR EXPLOSION PROOF ENCLOSURES
E700H
Thermostatically controlled heater kit for EHX6 Er EHX8 enclosures. ( Installation
required)
$80.00
EHXS6
Sun shroud for EHX6 enclosure
77.00
EHXS8
Sun shroud for EHX8 enclosure
80.00
EHX8
MT10
` \
A.S...., "
HT10
DUST TIGHT ENVIRONMENTAL ENCLOSURES
E706-16
Dust tight environmental enclosure, 6" dia. x 16" long, all aluminum construction. Use with EM22 wall mount, MM22 ceiling or pedestal mount
$280.00
E706-24 Dust tight environmental enclosure, 6" dia. x24" long, all aluminum construc-
tion. Use with EM22 wall mount, MM22 ceiling or pedestal mount
300.00
E706-24P E706-24 with purge fittings, requires afiltered compressed air supply. Provides
positive pressure internal air circulation E706- 24S Same as E706-24, except Type 304 stainless steel construction
360.00 400.00
E706-24PS E706- 24S with purge fittings
460.00
E708-24 Dust tight environmental housing, 8" dia. 24" long, all aluminum construction.
Use with EM22 wall mount, MM 22 ceiling or pedestal mount
400.00
E708- 24P E708- 24S
E708-24 with purge fittings, requires afiltered compressed air supply Provides
positive pressure internal air circulation
440.00
Same as E708-24, except Type 304 stainless steel construction
500.00
E708-24PS E708-24S with purge fittings
560.00
ACCESSORIES FOR E700 SERIES ENCLOSURES
E700H
Thermostatically controlled heater kit. ( Installation required) $ 80.00
E700B
Thermostatically controlled fan kit for internal air circulation ( Installation re-
quired)
80.00
E700A
Air funnel kit, provides positive pressure air flow across face of front window.
(Installation and filtered compressed air supply required)
160.00
E706S E706SS
Sun shroud for E706-16 Er E706-24 series enclosures
60.00
Type 304 stainless steel sun shroud for E706-24S Et E706-24PS enclosures
90.00
E708S
Sun shroud for E708-24 series enclosures
70.00
E708SS
Type 304 stainless steel sun shroud for E708-24S Er E708-24PS enclosures 100.00
E706V E706VS E708V
E708VS
Sun visor for E706-16 Er E706-24 series enclosures Type 304 stainless steel sun visor for E706-24S Er E706-24PS enclosures. Sun visor for E708-24 series enclosures
Type 304 stainless steel sun visor for E708-24S Er E706-24PS enclosures.
24.00 42.00 26.00
48.00
WATER COOLED ENCLOSURES
MT1OP HT1OV
Medium temperature water-cooled enclosure w/ Pyrex glass for furnace or kilns.
See data sheet for exact temperature ratings. 10" dia. x24" long $ 860.00
High temperature water-cooled enclosure w/Vycor glass for furnace or kilns. See
data sheet for exact temperature ratings. 10" dia. x24" long
1400.00
ACCESSORIES FOR WATER COOLED ENCLOSURES
WCRC
Infrared reflective coating for HT1OV Vycor glass
$100.00
E700A * Air funnel kit, provides positive pressure air flow across face of front window.
(Requires installation and filtered compressed air supply.)
160.00
WCAL * Alarm thermostat kit, provides acontact closure upon internal temperature rise.
(Installation required.)
60.00
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
EHCM * Cradle mount for EH66 for inverted mounting
$ 60.00
EHRC * Relay module for low voltage control of wiper/washer Er camera on/off.
Requires MEH24DT control module
60.00
EB1 EB2
Elevation block 1" Elevation block 2"
10.00 10.00
NOTE: *Available on Special Order Only
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-207
PELCO SALES, INC.
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
If ge PINHOLE LENSES
TV8.5EE
TV8.5ES
TV-J6A M2J8A M26B
LENSES
PINHOLE LENSES
2/3 FORMAT
MFJP9.5 MFJP9.5R MFJP9.5RES
.. 9.5mm wide angle pinhole lens, 13.5
9.5mm wide angle pinhole lens, 13.5 for right angle viewing.
.. 9.5mm wide angle pinhole lens. 13.5 for right angle viewing with ES filter and auto iris
CDS METER MOVEMENT FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENS
2/3' FORMAT
TV8.5EE TV16EE
8 5mm wide angle lens, 11.5 16mm standard lens, 11.6
1 FORMAT
TV12.5EE TV25EE TV50EE
12.5mm wide angle lens. 11.4 25mm standard lens, 11.4 50mm semi-telephoto lens. f1 8
270.00 330.00 QUOTE
260.00 240.00
260.00 240.00 260.00
AUTO IRIS FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES WITH ES FILTER
2/3 FORMAT
TV8.5ES TV16ES
1 FORMAT
85mm wide angle lens. auto iris. ES filter, 11 3260.00 16mm standard lens. auto iris. ES filter.f1 3240.00
TV12.5ES TV25ES TV5OES TV75ES
12.5mm wide angle lens. auto iris. ES filter. 11.3 25mm standard lens, auto iris. ES filter, f14 50mm semi-telephoto lens. auto iris. ES filter. f1.8 75mm telephoto lens, auto iris. ES filter. 11.8
270.00 250.00 250.00 290.00
MANUAL ZOOM LENSES
2/3 FORMAT
MZJ6A MZJ6B MZJ8A MZJI OA
1 FORMAT
6X manual zoom lens, 12.5-75mm. 11.8 6X manual zoom lens. 12.5-75mm. f1 4 8X manual zoom lens. 11.5-90mm. 12.0 10X manual zoom lens. 11-110mm. f1.8
192.00 205.00 274.00 460.00
MZ5A MZ6A MZ6B MZ8A MZ10A MZ1OB MZ10C MZI5A MZ14A
5X manual zoom lens. 20-100mm. 11 8 6X manual zoom lens. 17-IO2mm. f2 0230.00 6X manual zoom lens. 18-108mm. 11 6 . 8X manual zoom lens. 18-144mm. f20 10X manual zoom lens. 15-150mm. 11 8 10X manual zoom lens. 16-160mm. 11.8 10X manual zoom lens. 15-150mm. 12.8 15X manual zoom lens. 15-225mm .12 .81580.00 14)( manual zoom lens. 25-350mm. f35
530.00 990.00 950.00 1010.00 1050.00
3130.00
MOTORIZED ZOOM LENSES
2/3 FORMAT
TVJ6A TVJ6B TVJ8A TVJI OA
6X motorized zoom lens. 12 5-75mm. 11 8 6X motorized zoom lens. 12 5-75mm. fl .4 · 8X motorized zoom lens. 11 5-90mm. 12.0 10X motorized zoom lens. 11-110mm. 11.8
630.00 640.00 710.00 1100.00
NOTE Available on Special Order Only
VC-208
Prices arid Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PELCO SALES, INC.
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave. Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
TV6A
TV8AND
TVJ10AND
`Itammoo
EXTENDERS
LENSES
1 FORMAT
TV5A
5X motorized zoom lens. 20-100mm. f1 . 8
TV6A
6X motorized zoom lens, 17-102mm. 12.0
TV6B
6X motorized zoom lens, 18-108mm, f1 . 6
TV8A . 8X motorized zoom lens, 18-144mm, 12.0
TV10A
10X motorized zoom lens, 15-150mm, f1.8
TV10B
10X motorized zoom lens. 16-160mm, f1.8
TVIOC · 10X motorized zoom lens, 15-150mm. f2.8
TV15A · 15X motorized zoom lens, 15-225mm, 12.8
TV25A · 14X motorized zoom lens. 25-350mm, 13.5
MOTORIZED ZOOM LENS WITH NEUTRAL DENSITY SPOT FILTER
2/3 FORMAT
TVJOAND TVJOBND TVJ8AND TVJ10AND
· 6X motorized zoom lens, ND filter, 12 5-75mm. tl 8 6X motorized zoom lens. ND filter, 12.5-75mm. f1 . 4 · 8X motorized zoom lens, ND fili...r, 11.5.90mm, 12.0 10X motorized zoom lens. ND filter, 11-110mm, 11.8
1 FORMAT
TV5AND TV6AND
· 5X motorized zoom lens. ND filter, 20-100mm, f1.8 · 6X motorized zoom lens, ND filter, 17-102mm, 120
TV8AND TVI OAND
8X motorized zoom lens, ND filter, 18-144mm, f2 .01380.00 · 10X motorized zoom lens. ND filter, 15-150mm, 11.8
TV1OBND
IOX motorized zoom lens. ND filter, 16-160mm, f1.8
TVIOCND . 10X motorized zoom lens. ND filter, 15-150mm, $2.8
TV15AND . 15X motorized zoom lens. ND filter. 15-225mm f2.8 TV25AND · 14X motorized zoom lens. ND filter, 25-350mm, 13.5
720.00 600.00 1200.00 1280.00 1650.00 1700.00 1900.00 2400.00 4950.00
730.00 740.00 810.00 1200.00
890.00 760.00
1750.00 1800.00 2000.00 2500.00 5050.00
AUTO IRIS CONTROL BOX
A1700
Auto ins servo assembly can be added to any motorized lens with " ND" in the part number Allows for fully automatic iris operation with manual override when used with ML26 lens control module
120.00
RADIATION RESISTANT LENSES
1 FORMAT
TV5LRAD · Motorized zoom lens, 30-150mm f27 CF12.5N · 12 5mm wide angle lens. 120 CF25N · 25mm standard lens 120 CF5ON · 50mm semi- telephoto fixed length lens, f2 0
OPTIONS FOR 2/3 AND 1 FORMAT LENSES
LPP F15X F2X
· Position feed-back modification Ilimited models per function) 15X range extender 2X range ext ,, nri , ' ·
' ' Please call factory with manufacturer and model of lens to be used with range extender
QUOTE 870.00 720.00 770.00
100.00 120.00 120.00 120.00
NOTE · Available on Special Order Only
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-209
PELCO SALES,
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave. Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
INC.
PT- 270-P
PT- 175-P
PT- 1250-P
Nr
PT- 570-24P
PAN AND TILTS
INDOOR PAN Et TILTS
PT270P
Light Duty --" Mini". 115VAC operation for loads up to 15 lbs. Requires
MPT115DT joystick control or MPTA115DT joystick control for auto/random
scan operation. Use with PM14 or PM105 wall mount, PM200C ceiling or pedestal
mount
$ 390.00
PT270-24P Light Duty --" Mini". 24VAC operation for loads up to 15 lbs. Requires
MPT24DT joystick control or MPTA24DT joystick control for auto/random scan
operation. Use with PM14 or PM105 wall mount, PM200C ceiling or pedestal
mount
390.00
PT280-24P Light Duty --" Mini". High speed pan and tilt 24VAC operation for loads up to 15
lbs. Engineered for discreet surveillance enclosures. Factory prewired
feed- through for all control functions-- pan Er tilt, motorized zoom lenses, camera
power ( 24VAC) Er video. Requires MPT24DT joystick control or MPTA24DT joy-
stick control for auto/random scan operation. Use with PM14 or PM105 wall
mount, PM200C ceiling or pedestal mount
450.00
PT175-24P Medium Duty-24VAC operation for loads up to 20 lbs. Requires MPT24DT joy-
stick control or MPTA24DT joystick control for auto/random scan operation. Use
with PM105 wall mount, PM102C/PM102A ceiling or pedestal mount
620.00
PT180-24P Medium Duty 24VAC operation for loads up to 20 lbs. Factory prewired feed-
through for all control functions-- pan Et tilt, motorized zoom lenses, camera
power ( 24VAC) Er video. Requires MPT24DT joystick control or MPTA24DT joy-
stick control for auto/random scan operation. Use with PM105 wall mount.
PM102C ceiling or pedestal mount
690.00
IN
PAN Et TILTS
PT550P
Medium Duty/Weatherproof. 115VDC variable speed operation for loads up to
40 lbs. Requires MPT1510 series control modules. Use with PM102W wall mount,
PM102C ceiling or pedestal mount
$ 935.00
PT570P
Medium Duty/Weatherproof. 115VAC operation for loads up to 40 lbs Requires
MPT115DT joystick control or MPTA115DT joystick control for auto/random
scan operation. Use with PM102W wall mount, PM102C ceiling or pedestal
mount
910.00
PT570-24P Medium Duty/Weatherproof. 24VAC operation for loads up to 40 lbs Requires
MPT24DT joystick control or MPTA24DT joystick control for auto/random scan
operation. Use with PM102W wall mount, PM102C ceiling or pedestal mount
PT1250P
910.00 Heavy Duty/Weatherproof. 115VAC operation for loads up to 100 lbs Requires
MPT115DT joystick control or MPTA115DT joystick control for auto/random
scan operation. Use with PM1000W wall mount, PM1000C ceiling or pedestal
mount
1375.00
PT1250DC Heavy Duty/Weatherproof. 115VDC variable speed and autoscan operation for
loads up to 100 lbs. Requires MPT1510 series control modules. Use with
PM1000W wall mount, PM1000C ceiling or pedestal mount
1430.00
PT2000L Extra Heavy Duty/Weatherproof. 115VDC variable speed operation for loads up
to 150 lbs. Requires MPT2000DT joystick control. Use with PM1000W wall
mount, PM1000C ceiling or pedestal mount
2420.00
PT580P
Medium Duty/Weatherproof, extra rugged construction. 115VAC operation for
loads up to 40 lbs. Factory prewired feed- through for all control functions-- pan
Er tilt, motorized zoom lenses, camera power, enclosure accessories Er video.
Requires MPT115DT joystick control or MPTA115DT joystick control for auto/
random scan operation. Use with PM102W wall mount, PM102C ceiling or
pedestal mount. UPP, / HB Options available on special order only.)
990.00
PT580-24P Medium Duty/Weatherproof, extra rugged construction. 24VAC operation for
loads up to 40 lbs. Factory prewired feed- through for all control functions-- pan
Er tilt, motorized zoom lenses, camera power ( 24VAC), enclosure accessories Er
video. Requires MPT24DT joystick control or MPTA24DT joystick control for
auto/random scan operation. Use with PM102W wall mount, PM102C ceiling or
pedestal mount. I/PP, / HB Options available on special order only.)
990.00
PT2501P Super Heavy Duty/Weatherproof. 115VDC operation for loads up to 500 lbs.
Requires MPT2000DT joystick control
QUOTE
EXPLOSION PROOF
PT1250EX Explosion Proof/Weatherproof. 115VAC operation for loads up to 100 lbs. Per
N.E.C. Class I, Div. I, Groups C- D -- Class II, Div. I, Groups E,F,G. Requires
MPT115DT joystick control or MPTA115DT joystick control for auto/random
scan operation. Use with PM1000W wall mount, PM1000C ceiling or pedestal
mount
$1980.00
NOTE: *Available on Special Order Only
VC- 210
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PELCO SALES, INC.
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave. Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
PS7-24
PS- 30-24 CM- 14
CM101W EM102W
PAN AND TILTS
ANTENNA POSITIONING SYSTEM
AP2500
· All Weather/Complete Positioning System. For antennas up to 6 feet in diameter. Designed to operate in wind force of 65-70 MPH and withstand winds of 110-115 MPH. Includes MPT250OR control, with joystick, variable speed & Azimuth/Elevation indicators.
SPECIAL ORDER OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
/PP /SEC
· Position feedback modification. Requires special order control for Preset Position. Four additional conductors required. Available for PT550P. PT570P, PT570-24P, PT1250P, PT1250DC.
· Sector scan modification for PT1250P and PT1250DC permits scanning only within preset limits but allows manual override for scanning outside limits.
/HAD
/HB /FGP /FGT /FG /SS
· Radiation resistant wiring & white epoxy paint for PT550P, PT570P, PT570-24P. PT1250P. PT1250DC. Low level radiation resistant up to 10' Rads.
· Spot & blanket heaters. Allows operations to -50F. For PT550P, PT570P. PT570-24P, PT1250P, PT1250DC.
· Special hi-speed gears: 9 /sec pan speed. For PT570P. PT570-24P, PT1250P. PT1250DC only
·Special hi-speed gears: 4.59 /sec tilt speed. For PT570P. PT570-24P, PT1250P, PT1250DC only · Special hi-speed pan & tilt gears: 9 /4.59 per sec pan/tilt speed. For PT570P, PT570-24P PT1250P. PT1250DC only
· Type 304 Stainless Steel Construction for PT1250P.PT1250DC
4950.00
300.00 220.00
320.00 220.00 110.00 110.00 200.00 QUOTE
SCANNERS
INDOOR SCANNERS
PS7
Light Duty - " Mini" Scanner. 115 vac operation for toads up to 15 lbs. Auto- scan
operation ONLY - 6 ft. line cord furnished. Use with PM14 or PM105 wall mount. PM200C ceiling or pedestal mount
USER 132.00
PS7A
Light Duty - same as PS7. Requires MPS5DT control. Use with PM14 or PM105 wall mount, PM200C ceiling or pedestal mount.
132.00
PS7-24
Light Duty - same as PS7, except operates on 24 vac. Requires MPS524DT control Use with PM14 or PM 105 wall mount. PM 200C ceiling or pedestal mount.132.00
INDOOR/OUTDOOR SCANNERS
PS30
PS30A PS30-24
Medium Duty/VVeatherproof. 115 vac operation for loads up to 50 lbs. Auto-scan operation only - 6 ft. line cord furnished. Use with PM102W wall mount. PM102C ceiling or pedestal mount.430.00
Medium Duty Same as PS30. Requires MPS5DT control. Use with PM102W wall mount, PM102C ceiling or pedestal mount.430.00
Medium Duty. Same as PS30. except operates on 24 vac. Requires MPS524DT control. Use PM102W wall mount. PM 102C ceiling or pedestal mount.430.00
MOUNTS
CAMERA MOUNTS
CM14
Light duty wall mount. Ball/swivel adjustable head Supports up to 20 lbs.
CM16
Light duty ceiling mount Ball/swivel adjustable head. Supports up to 20 lbs.
CM101W CM101C
. Heavy duty wall mount. Manually adjustable swivel head. Supports up to 40 lbs.
Heavy duty ceiling or pedestal mount. Manually adjustable swivel head. Supports up to 40 lbs.
USER 22.00 30.00 74.00
74.00
ENCLOSURE MOUNTS
EM22 MM22 EM102W MM103C
Medium duty wall mount for EH44. EH55. and EH6t: Series enclosures and light to medium weight cameras Manually adjustable swivel head. Supports up to 40 lbs.
Medium duty pedestal or ceiling mount for EH44. EH55, EH66 Series enclosures, and light to medium weight cameras. Manually ade.stable swivel head. Supports up to 40 lbs.
Heavy duty wall mount for ENDO. EH66X. EHX6. EHX8. E706. E708 Series enclosures, and medium to heavy weight cameras. Manually adjustable swivel head. Supports up to 75 lbs.
Heavy duty ceiling or pedestal mount for EH66, E1466X, EHX6, EHX8, E706, and E708 Series enclosures and medium to heavy weight cameras. Manually adjustable swivel head. Supports up to 130 lbs.
38.00 38.00 80.00 80.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
NOTE: Available on Special Order Only
VC-211
PELCO SALES, INC.
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave. Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
MOUNTS
M R- U
MM100W
SCANNER/PAN Et TILT MOUNTS
PM14 PM105 PM200C PM102W PM102C PM1000W PM1000C
Light duty wall mount for PS7, PS7A, PS7-24, PT270P, PT270-24P, PT280-24P.
Supports up to 25 lbs.
$ 22.00
Medium duty wall mount for PS7, PS7A, PS7-24, PT175-24P, PT270P,
PT270-24P, PT280-24P. Supports up to 40 lbs.
24.00
Light duty ceiling or pedestal mount for PS7, PS7A, PS7-24, PT270P, PT270-24P,
PT-280-24P. Supports up to 25 lbs.
18.00
Medium duty wall mount for PS30, PS30A, PS30-24, PT550P, PT570P,
PT570-24P. Supports up to 75 lbs
60.00
Medium duty ceiling or pedestal mount PS30, PS30A, PS30-24, PT550P,
PT570P, PT570-24P. Supports up to 75 lbs
50.00
Heavy duty wall mount for PT1250P, PT1250DC, PT1250EX, PT2000L. Supports
up to 125 lbs. ( ST1 strut recommended for loads over 125 lbs.)
60.00
Ceiling or pedestal mount for heavy duty pan Et tilts -- PT1250P, PT1250DC,
PT1250EX, PT2000L. Supports up to 175 lbs.
50.00
OPTIONAL SUPPORT STRUT
ST1
Optional support strut. Enables EM102W, PM102W, and PM1000W to support up
to 175 lbs. Also increases horizontal stability when two or more are used with
PM102C or PM1000C
$34.00
ADAPTORS FOR CORNER MOUNTING
CM100 SCM100
Corner mount adaptor for EM102W, PM102W, and PM1000W. ( Note: Must order
SCM100 below for use with PM1000W)
$40.00
Strut corner mount adaptor for ST1 strut
30.00
ADAPTORS FOR POLE MOUNTING
PA100 PA102 SPA102
Pole mount adaptor for CM14 and EM22 wall mounts. Minimum pole diameter:
1.50"
$24.00
Pole mount adaptor for PM102W, PM1000W, and EM102W. Minimum pole dia-
meter: 3"
30.00
Pole adaptor for Sil strut. Minimum pole diameter 3"
24.00
PARAPET ADAPTOR MOUNT
PP100
Adaptor mount secures to inside of parapet at least 18" high. Positions equip-
ment anywhere on parapet, including corners. Universal adaptor for medium to
heavy duty Pelco wall mounts. Supports up to 175 lbs.
$125.00
MONITOR MOUNTS
mmi0Ow
MM200P MM300 MRU1
MRU3 MRU4 MRWA MRCA MRU
Universal wall mount for 9" Er 12" monitors. Adjustable horizontally and
vertically. Supports up to 40 lbs.
$ 50.00
Universal pedestal mount for 9" and 12" monitors. Adjustable horizontally and
vertically. Supports up to 40 lbs.
50.00
Ceiling mount for 9" Er 12" monitors. Adjustable horizontally Er vertically.
Supports up to 40 lbs.
QUOTE
Monitor/receiver mount with 32"W x 16.125"D monitor support pan. Designed
for use in educational institutions, churches, hospitals, and homes. Supports up
to 150 lbs.
120.00
Monitor/receiver mount. Same as MRU1 but with a 26"W x 12.25"D monitor
support pan
120.00
Monitor/receiver mount. Same as MRU1 but with a20"W x 16"D monitor sup-
port pan Wall adaptor for MRU series Ceiling adaptor for MRU series
120.00 36.00 22.00
Monitor/receiver mount without monitor support pan. For use with monitor/
receivers with side mounting holes ·
90.00
VC- 212
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PELCO SALES, INC.
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave. Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
IRE V
SHORT DISTANCE CONTROLS, HARDWARE
RELAY BOXES
RB24
Relay box for 24VAC pan Et tilts and scanners. Extends control's operating dis-
tance up to amaximum of 15,000 ft.
$250.00
RB115
Relay box for 115VAC pan Et tilts and scanners. Extends control's operating dis-
tance up to amaximum of 15,000 ft.
250.00
DUAL STATION CONTROL SYSTEM
Dual Station Control System is compatible with all Pelco short distance control modules.
When ordering, specify control series ( priced separately) and components listed below:
MDS100DT " Desk top dual station control module ( 2required, 1per control panel.) $100.00
Select appropriate J- Box ( 1per dual station system)
DS100-24 * Dual Station J- Box for 24VAC systems. Wired for pan Et tilt, zoom lens, auto
iris, and auto/random scan functions
200.00
CONTROLS CAXITRON'
COAXITRON TRANSMITTER Et CONTROL MODULES
MPT9000PZ Transmitter/control with pan Et tilt joystick, zoom lens and 4accessory function
controls. Rack mounted
$460.00
MPT9000CZ Transmitter/control. Same as MPT9000PZ, except desk top model
460.00
MPT9111PZ Computron transmitter/control integrates Compuswitch switching system Er
Coaxitron control system. Same operational features as MPT9000PZ MPT9111CZ Transmitter/control. Same as MPT9111PZ, except desk top model.
Quote Quote
COAXITRON RECEIVER Et SUPPLY OPTIONS
CX9024RX Coaxitron receiver in weatherproof box for 24VAC pan Et tilts with power supply
for pan Er tilt, zoom lens and 4accessory functions. ( 3latching and 1momen-
tary.)
$490.00
CX9115RX Coaxitron receiver/power supply. Same as CX9024RX, except for 115VAC pan
Er tilts.
490.00
AUTO/RANDOM SCAN MODULE
A9024
Auto/Random Scan plug-in module for CX9024RX Coaxitron receivers. .$ 100.00
A9115
Auto/Random Scan plug-in module for CX9115RX Coaxitron receivers. . 100.00
COAX CABLE ONLY 1500 FT. ON RG 59U 4000 FT. ON RG 11
TEST/MANUAL BOARD
CX900TLC System test and receiver manual control board plug-in module for all CX9000RX
series receivers
$100.00
CONTROLS LONG DISTANCE
DIGITAL MULTIPLEXOR
PANELS AND DESK TOP CABINETS
M5CP
Rack panel ( 1.75"H x19"L) for up to 5modules
M5CDT
Desk top cabinet for up to 5modules
$66.00 66.00
CONTROL MODULES
MAD3200 MPT3200 MA3200
Address module for up to 32 locations Pan Et Tilt joystick control module Auto/Random Scan control module
MV3200
Variable speed control module
MLZ3200 Pelco lens control module
MAI3200 Pelco lens control module with Auto- iris
MEH3200 * Enclosure control module ( camera on/off, wiper/washer)
MG3200 * Gate control module ( open, close, stop)
$60.00 60.00 60.00
60.00 60.00 Quote 60.00 60.00
DIGITAL TRANSMITTER
DM3200TX Digital Multiplexor transmitter
$850.00
DIGITAL RECEIVER
DM3224RX Digital multiplexor -- up to 24 function receiver
Note: ' Available on Special Order Only Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$1280.00 VC- 213
PELCO SALES, INC.
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave. Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
SHORT DISTANCE CONTROLS/ HARDWARE
M PT24- PZ
MPS5DT
A111111111111,1111111111111111111116.
1.0110,111011.111M11 unliÑolomiele.«
·
PS506
MINI- LINE SERIES CONTROL MODULES
All Mini- Line Series controls are desk top mounted. Rack mounting is available at additional cost. Specify Rack Kit No. when ordering. R100 ( Single)/ R200 ( Dual)/ R300 ( Triple) $20.00 ea.
PAN Et TILT CONTROLS
For short distance control of 24VAC pan Et tilts -- PT270-24P, PT280-24P, PT570-24P
MPT24DT
Desk top joystick control module
$165.00
MPTA24DT
Desk top joystick control module with Auto/Random scan operation 230.00
For short to medium distance control of 115VAC pan Et tilts-- PT270P, PT570P, PT1250P,
PT1250EX
MPT115DT
Desk top joystick control module
$165.00
MPTA115DT Desk top joystick control with Auto/Random scan operation
210.00
For short to medium distance control of 115VDC pan Et tilts -- PT550P, PT1250DC
MPT1510DT Desk top joystick control module
$165.00
MPTV1510CZ Desk top joystick control with variable speed and zoom lens control. 280.00
MPTV1510PZ Rack mount joystick control with variable speed and zoom lens control.
280.00
MPTV1510CA * Desk top joystick control with variable speed, auto scan, and zoom lens
control. ( For PT1250DC only)
380.00
MPTV1510PAZ * Rack mount joystick control with variable speed, auto scan, and zoom lens
control. ( For PT1250DC only)
380.00
VR1500DT * Desk top variable rate joystick control module ( 3.50" panel height). Specify
rack mounting or desk top.
280.00
For short distance control of PT2000L pan Et tilt
MPT2000DT Desk top joystick control module
$165.00
MPTV2000DT * Desk to joystick control with variable speed
280.00
VR1500DT * Desk top variable rate joystick control module ( 3.50" panel height) Specify
rack mounting or desk top
280.00
SCANNER CONTROLS
MPS5DT MPS524DT
Desk top control modules for 115VAC scanners PS7A, PS30A Desk top control for 24VAC scanners PS7-24, PS30-24
$110.00 110.00
MULTIPLE LOCATION SCANNER CONTROLS
PS506-240T * Multiple position control for up to 6scanners. 24VAC operation for PS7-24
Fr PS30-24
$480.00
MULTIPLE LOCATION PAN/TILT/LENS CONTROLS
PT506-24DT * Multiple position control for up to 6 pan/tilts and zoom lenses for 24VAC
pan Et tilt units
$1100.00
LENS CONTROLS FOR PELCO MOTORIZED ZOOM LENSES
MLZA6DT MLZ6DT
Desk top zoom lens control with auto- iris operation
$420.00
Desk top zoom lens control module with auto/manual iris control for use with
A1700/A1701 auto- iris servo assembly
180.00
ENCLOSURE CONTROLS
MEHDT MEH24DT
Desk top enclosure control module for 115VAC camera on/off windshield
wiper/washer
$70.00
Desk top enclosure control module for 24VAC camera on/off windshield
wiper/washer. ( Requires EH RC in enclosure.)
80.00
NOTE: *Available on Special Order Only
VC- 214
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PELCO SALES, INC.
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
DESK TOP CONSOLES/LENSES
MF5.5
CE600W
MF25A
Desk Top Consoles
CE400W Wood grain console, 7" of vertical rack space CE600W Wood grained console, 15.25" of vertical
rack space CE700W Wood grained console, 28" of vertical rack space
$190.00
280.00 320.00
MODULAR COMPONENTS FOR DESK TOP CONSOLES CE400E Console extender kit expands CE400W horizontally
onefultwidth for each extender added
CE600E Console extender kit expands CE600W horizontally onefulfwidth for each extender added
CE700E Console extender kit expands CE700W horizontally one full width for each extender added
CE45W 45° wedge filler for all consoles* CE9OW 90° wedge filler for all consoles*
$126.00
140.00
160.00 QUOTE QUOTE
BLANK PANEL INSERTS P1 Blank panel, 1.75"H x619"W P3 Blank panel, 3.50"H x619"W P5 Blank panel, 5.25"H x619"W
P7 Blank panel, 7.00"H x619"W P10 Blank panel, 10.50"H x619"W P12 Blank panel, 12.25"H x619"W
$15.00 20.00 25.00
25.00 25.00 25.00
Miscellaneous
INFRARED ILLUMINATORS LL22NS Low light level infra- red illuminator with narrow
spot lamp
LL22WF Law light level infra- red illuminator with wide flood lamp
$800.00 800.00
ACCESSORIES
LL22M
Mounting bracket to mount LL22 on PT500 and
PT1200 Series pan and tilts
PAR56NS Narrow spot replacement lamp, 500 watt
PAR56MF Medium flood replacement lamp, 500 watt
PAR56WF Wide flood replacement lamp, 500 watt
$48.00 80.00 80.00
80.00
Lenses
MANUAL FIXED FOCAL LENGTH LENSES 2/3" Format MFJ4 4mm super wide angle lens, f / 1.4 MFJ6 6mm wide angle lens, f/1.8 without focus MFJ8 8mm super wide angle lens, f/1.3 MFJ9 9mm wide angle lens, f/1.4 MFJ16 16mm standard lens, f/1.4 MFJ16A 16mm standard lens without iris
MFJ16B 16mm standard lens with iris, f/1.6 MFJ35 35mm semi-telephoto lens, f/1.7
1" Format MF5.5 5.5mm super wide angle lens, f/1.5 MF6.5 6.5mm wide angle lens, f[1.8 MF12.5 12.5mm wide angle lens, f/1.3 MF25A 25mm standard lens, f/1.4 MF25B 25mm standard lens, f / . 85 MF40 40mm semi- telephoto lens, f/1.7 MF50 50mm semi- telephoto lens, f/1.3 MF75A 75mm telephoto lens, f / 1.4 MF75 75mm telephoto lens, f/1.8 MF135 135mm telephoto lens f / 1.8 with C- mount adaptor .
$142.00 TBA 70.00 90.00 82.00 22.00 TBA 80.00
$154.00 TBA
102.00 70.00
254.00 120.00 104.00 154.00 124.00 274.00
NOTE: * Available on Special Order Only
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 215
PENTAX CORP.
COSMICAR LENS DIV.
35 Inverness Dr E Englewood, CO 80112 (303) 799-8000 Telex 4322099
COSMICAR EE TYPE AUTO- IRIS LENS SERIES FOR 2/3 AND 1INCH VIDICON CAMERAS
LENSES
1
2
3 5
The EE series of lenses incorporates a CdS
sensor, which measures light volume in variable situations. Aperture size is controlled quickly from the information determined by the sensor. Developed by Asahi
Precision, Co., Ltd., EE lenses are compact
in size and light in weight. Offering a range from wide-angle to telephoto, the lenses are available for both 1" and 2/3" standard vidico.n cameras.
COSMICAR ZOOM LENS SERIES FOR 1/2, 2/3 AND 1INCH VIDICON CAMERAS
1" 1. C21208 2. C22513
3. C25009 2/3" 4. C30814
5. C31621
12.5mm 25mm 50mm
8mm 16mm
f1.4 f1.4 f1.8
f1.4 f1.4
Cosmica- high performance zoom lenses are available to satisfy a wide range of applications. Constructed to the highest
standards of design, Cosmicar zoom lenses are compact and lightweight, enabling a perfect balance with any camera.
Method of operation ranges from manual focus, zoom and aperture control to the exclusive new lenses having remote facilities and incorporating the new auto iris system with peak to average response adjustment.
To establish your exact requirements, please refer to the specification tables for zoom ratio and operation type.
1" 1. C21506 2. C21507 3. C21501 2/3" 4. C31204 5. C31205 6. C31209
7. C31208 8. C31001 9. C31000 1/2" 10. C60800 11. C60801
15- 90mm 15- 90mm 15-180mm
12.5- 75mm 12.5- 75mm 12.5- 75mm 12.5- 75mm 10.5-105mm
10-140mm
8- 48mm 8- 48mm
f1.8 f1.8 f1.9
f1.8 f1.8 f1.8 f1.8 f1.4 f1.9
f1.2 f1.2
VC- 216
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PENTAX CORP.
COSMICAR LENS DIV.
35 Inverness Dr . E Englewood, CO 80112 (303) 799-8000 Telex 4322099
COSMICAR MONOFOCAL TYPE LENS SERIES FOR 2/3 AND 1INCH VIDICON CAMERAS
LENSES
1"
1. C20612 6.5mm
f1.8
2. C20800 8.5mm
f1.5
3. C21211 12.5mm
f1.4
4. C21212 12.5mm
f1.8
5. C22514 25mm
f1.4
6. C22516 25mm
f1.8
7. C25011 50mm
f1.4
8. C25010 50mm
f1.8
9. C27509 75mm
f1.4
2/3"
10. C30401 4.8mm
f1.8
11. C30808
8mm
f1.4
12. C30811 8.5mm
f1.5
13. C31616 16mm
f1.6
14. C31619 16mm
f1.4
is
15. C30900
9mm
f3.4
16. C30901
9mm
f3.4
1/2" 17. C60600
6mm
f1.2
18. C61200 12mm
f1.2
19. C61202 12mm
f1.4
Cosmicar offers awide selection of monofocal, manual iris, lenses to satisfy any applica-
and close-up situations requiring a 75mm lens. Select any Cosmicar lens to suit your
tions from an extremely wide angle view us-
particular application.
ing a4.8mm lens to very distant surveillance
COSMICAR ES AND EX TYPE AUTO- IRIS LENS SERIES FOR 2/3 AND 1INCH VIDICON CAMERAS
7
The conventional automatic iris lenses limit the metering method to either an Average or aPeak response against camera's video sig-
nal level. Now Cosmicar's ES- 3 and EX
Series allows you choices at any optional
picture area where brightness of an indi-
vidual object is extremely adverse, any objects, bright or dark, you want to observe can be delivered sharply in image by adjusting the ALC screw of our ES- 3and EX
response weighting between Average and
lens series.
Peak signal level. As a result, even in a Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
1" 1. C21215
2. C22517 3. C25013
4. C27508
2/3" 5. C30813 6. C31623 7. C30902 8. C30903
1/2" 9. C60601
10. C61201
12.5mm 25mm 50mm 75mm
8mm 16mm
9mm 9mm
6mm 12mm
f1.4 f1.4 f1.8 f1.8
EX ES- 3 ES- 3 ES- 3
f1.4 f1.4 f3.4 f3.4
EX EX EX S EX RA
f1.2
EX
f1.2
EX
VC- 217
C-)
ét,
FOR 2/3 INCH VIDICON CAMERA
Remarks: Symbols in Model No.
ES,EX : Automatic Diaphragm for L.L.L. Cameras by hollow motor
E
EE Iris Control,with CdS.
NR : Without iris and variable focus.
M2
Motorized-Zoom. Focus.
X
Fired Focus
Model No.
Focal Length
mm
C418AX
130410
48
0814
30808'
8
0815B
030811
85
016160NR-2
031610
16
01614
031619' 16
08 14BE X
(C308131 ' 8
C1614EX
(C31623) 16
C814BE
(C308141
8
C 1614E
(C316211 16
C6Z1218 ( C31204) 12.5 - 75
C6Z 1218ES ( C31205) 12.5 - 75
C6Z1218M2ES ( C31207I 12.5 - 75
C 10Z 1120M2ES(C31102) 11 - 110
C934P
,C30900'
9
0934PL
C3090 I
9
0934PE X
030902
9
C934PL EX
030903
9
02V 1616ES
031614 16 32
Relative Aperture
18 16 14 16 I5 16
1 6 14 16 1.4- 360 1.4-360 1.4 - 16 - C 14- 16 -- C
1.8 - 22 1.8 - 360 1.8 - 360 2.0-360 34 22 34 22 34 360 34 36u 16 360
Type
Max. Angular Field of View
Tele Wide
110
Manual Manual Manual Manual Auto Iris Auto Iris EE Lens EE Lens Manual Auto Iris Motorized Auto Iris Motorized Auto Iris Manual
70 30 67 04 38 03 38 03
7o· 30'
38 .03 . 7030' 3803'
8.19" - 4912 8.19 - 49 . 12' 8.19 - 4912
5°34 -5450' 63 47
Manual Auto Iris Auto Iris
63 47 63 47 63 47
Aldo Iris , 20 20 38 03
Shortest Field of View in Back Focusing Closest Distance Focal Distance Horizontal xVertical Length
Tele Wide (cm)
MM
,0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.3 (0.2) (0.5) 0.2 0.3 1.0 1.0 1.0
36 25 16 \ 12 17 \ 12 12 \ 9 14 \ I1 (16X 12) (25X 19) 16 X 12 14 X 11 10x 7 - 59 X44 10 x7 - 59 X44 10 X7-59 x44
2 14 6 10.9 8.3 13.2 14.5 13.2 14.5 13.2 18.4 18.4 18.4
1.5 03 03 0 3
3 I 0
10x 7-103x77 II'9 H-9 11 · 9 II '9
27.20 54 ' 42
17.9 11 8 11 8 11 8 11,8 14.0
Effective Diameter
Front Lens Rear Lens Filter Size
mm
mm
mm P=
25.4 24.0 27.6 10.2 14.0 27.5 14.0 27.5 14.0 43.3
10.4 14.8 12.6 10.8 15.4 15.4 15.4 15.4 15.4 10.5
40.5 40.5 30.5 40.5 43 4.3 67 87 49
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
2.7 2.7 2.7 21.0
7.8 7.8 7.8 12.6
40.5 0.5
Mechanical Dimension
Max. Die Length %Wm
mm
mm
gr.
42 42 42 37 42 46.5 46.5 75.5 75.5 51
32 58 40 25.5 40 51.1 46.7 48 48 go
100 150 120
40 90 154 160 285 265 320
34 46.5
55.5
164
210
164
235
164
270
61
295
Note Fixed Focus
W O Diaphragm For L.L.L. Camera v.S or v 008-1110/ An- Pk Type DC 6V
For L.L.L. Camera VS or V DC9- 18V
1,1,1 Angle Type
S"3 93, Age
gee '
3"
`V` oCr-»
FOR 2/3 tit 1 INCH VIDICON CAMERA
06180 \
020412
ti 5
18 16 u ,
Manua,
B815A
t020800
85
15 16
Manual
B12140-2 , 021211
12.5 ··14 16 0:
Manual
B1218-2 . 021212
125 . 18 16 C ' Manual
B2514C-2 -132518
850 I4A
02251-1 -· 25 · 14 16 C * · Manual
t022516 1. 25 · 18 16 0
iC25011l · 50
14 16 0'
Manual Manual
B50 18A-3 -B75140
tC25010 ,·· 50 · I8 16 CI
tC27509l
75
14 16 0, ·
· Manual Manual _
131214DE X (C21215)
12.5
1.4-360
Auto Iris
625140E S-3 (C22517)
25
1.4 - 360
Auto Iris
B5018AES-3 ( C25013)
50
1.8-360
Auto Iris
B7518E S -3 (C27508)
75
1.8 - 360
Auto Iris
612140E
10212081
12.5
1.4 - 16 - C
EE Lens
B2514CE ( 022513)
25
1.4 - 16 -- C
EE Lens
B5018AE-2
10250091
50
L8 -- 16 - C
EE Lens
B4Z2215A ( C22208) 22.5 - 90 1.5- 22
Manual
B4Z2215AM3 (022209) 22.5-90 1.5 - 22
Motorized
B4Z2215AM2EL ( 022210) 22.5-90 1.5 - 220 Motorized Auto Iris
116 24 , 0.2 l 1
93 59
0.2 1
65 48
03
· 65 48 03
· 35 14 06
35 14 17 52
06 · I 0
17 52 · 10
11 50
1.2
65 °48'
(0.3)
35 ° 14
(0.6)
1752
(1.0)
11 °50 .
(2.5)
6548
0.3
35 ° 14 .
0.7
17 °52'
3.0
1002 - 38' 18
1.5
10 .02 - 3818'
1.5
10 .02 .-3e 18
1.5
i37 · 25 ,
10.2 1
25 · 18
12.9
26 · 19
14.4 '
26 · 19
10.1
28 · 21
16.5
28 · 21 23 · 17
. .. 14.9 18.1
23 · 17 _. 31 -4
18 · 13
185
(26x 19)
14.4
(28 X21)
16.5
(23 X 17)
31.4
(40 x30)
28.3
26x 19
14.4
28 x21
16.5
23 X 17
31.4
18 X 13- 75 X56
16.3
18x 13-75 X56
16.3
18X 13-75 x56
16.3
29.5 39.5 30.7 ' 16.0 -,-i-17.9 1 14.5 35.8 27.0 53.6 30.7 17.9 27.0 41.7 30.7 17.9 27.0 66.0 66.0 66.0
12.4 16.9 14.2 11 6 14.2 96 16.2 15.5 22.0 14.2 14.2 15.5 18.0 14.2 14.2 15.5 19.4 19.4 19.4
_ 40.5 40.5 40.5
· 40.5 46 40.5 58 43 49 49 49 67 67 67 72 72 72
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.75 0.5 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
48 54 42 42 42 42 48 42 62 46.5 62 62
82 75.5 75.5 75.5 75 107 107
42 50.5
50 40 40 40 48 51
79 47.5
51 51
70 48 48 48 154 154 154
B12Z1519M2EM (C21501) 15- 180 I 1.9 - 14(Ï0- 1Motorized Auto Iris] ein .-5628'
2.8
18x 13-202x 151
31.3 I 99.0
17.5
I107
1.0 149.7X 136.7 228
i
·
·
1
1
128 Fixed Focus
170
135
95
100
87
180
130
450
217804CameFroar L.L.L.
290
V S or V DC8 - 18V Av - Pk Type
350
*EX DC8 - I8V
290
275 DC 6V
295
910
1500 DC 6V
1500 (For L.L.L. Camera
3450
V.S or V 1309-18V For L.L.L. Camera V.S or V DC8-12 iAV -Pk Type
PENTAX CORP.
COSMICAR LENS DIV.
35 Inverness Dr. E. Englewood, CO 80112 (303) 799-8000 Telex 4322099
LENS CHARTS
LENS CHART FOR 2 3 VIDICON
Dimension of Objective Filling Image Format
LENS (FEET) DISTANCE
4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 30 35 4405
50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500
4.8mm HXV 7'04' x 5'06"
6.5mm HXV 5 04'x 400
1100
8 03' 8'0V x 601'
1408" x 1100' 1009' x 8'01
1803" x 13'0W 1308"x 1001
22 00" x 1606' 16'02" x 12 02'
29 03" x 22 00' 21 07' x 1602'
36 OW x 27 06" 27 00" x 2003"
45 10" x 34'04' 33 10" x 25'04
5500' x 41 03' 40'07x 3005'
64 02" x 48'01" 47'04x 35'06
73'04' x 5500' 54'01 x 4007
82'06' x 61'10' 60 11' x 45'08"
91'08x 68'0W 67'08" x 5009'
110'00' x82'06" 81'02' x60 11'
128'03' x96'03" 94'09' x 71'00'
146'08x 110'CO 108'03' x 81'02"
165'00"x 123'0W 183'03x 13706'
121'10"x 91'04"
135'04x loroe
366'08'x 27500' 27009"x 2oeCO"
550'03x 41206" 406'01"x 304'07"
733'04"x 550'00' 541'06' x406'01"
916'08' ,, 687'06' 676'11"x 507'08'
8.5mm H xV 401 X 3'01
12.5mm H xV 2'09' x 2 01'
6'02" ./ 407' 4'02" x 3 02
8'0T / 602' 507" x 402'
1004' · 7 09' 7'00' x 5 03"
1205' / · 9 03' 805' / 604"
16 06' x 1205' 11 03" / 8 05"
2008 , 1506' 1400' / 10 06'
25 10' x 1904" 1707' - 1302'
31 00" x2303' 2101 -· 15 10'
3602' ·. 2702' 24 07" · 18 05"
41 .04"x 31 00" 28 01 - 21 01"
46'07' x 34'1V 31 08 · 23 OW
5109' x 3809" 35 02' · 26 04'
62'01' x 46'07' 4202' · 31 08'
72' 05" - 54 04' 4903 · 36 11"
82'09" - 62 01' 56 03 · 4202'
93 02" / 6910" 63 04' - 47 06'
103 06 -· 7707' 70 04 X 52 OW
20700" x 155 03' 14009' x 105'07
31007' x232 11' 211'02"x 158'04'
414 01" x310 07' 281'07' x211'02'
517 OT , 388'02' 352'00-x264'00'
16mm H, V 202" - 107 303' . 205 404' · 3 03' 506 , 4 01' 6 07' x 41V 809' x 6 07" 1100" / 803" 13 09 · 10 03" 16 06" - 12 04' 19 03' · 14 05" 22 00 . 16 06" 24 09' · 18 06" 2706' / 2007' 33 00' / 24'0W 38 06 · 28 10" 4400' · 3300" 4906' · 3701' 55'00' / 41 03' 11000"x 82 06' 16500' x 123 09" 22000"x 165 00' 275 CO' x20603'
25mm
H 104 ·
V 100
20V · 107'
2 09' / 2 OV
3'06' 207
4 02' >. 3 02'
5 07" - 4 02'
700' · 5 03"
8 09" · 607'
10 06' · 7 11'
12 03' / 9 02'
14 00' - 1006'
15 10' / 11 10"
1707' · 13 02'
21 01 · 1510"
24 07" · 1805'
280V · 21 01'
31 08' · 23'0W
3502 · 26 04"
7004' , 52'0W 105 07" / 7902"
140 09' Y 10507
176'00' x 1320(Y
50mm H\ V 008' , 006
75mm H \, 005 · 004
1'O0' · 0 09
0 08' ,, 006
1'04' x 100' 0 11" x 008
109' > 103' 102' , 0'10
201' x 107' 104" '· 100
20W>' 201" 1 10" - 104'
3'06" x 2'or 2 04' · 109'
4 04' x 3 03" 2 11 · 2 02'
5 03 · 311
3 06' , 2 07"
6 OV x 407' 4 01" x 300
TOO" / 5'03" 7 11 · 5'1V
4 08' > 306' 503' x 3 11'
809' · 607' 510' x 4 04"
10'06' x 711" 7 00" x 503'
12' 03' x 902" 8 02' x 601'
14'00" x 1006' 904' , 7 00'-
1510" , 11 10" 17 07 x 13 02'
10'06' · 7' 11" 1108' · 8 09'
35'02' x 2804" 2305' x 1707'
52'0W x39'07 - 3502' x2604"
70'04' x 52'09" 46'11' x 35'02'
88'00" x 66'00' 58 08" x 44'00'
LENS CHART FOR 1" VIDICON
Dimension of Objective Filling Image Format
LENS (FEET) DISTANCE
4 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500
6.5mm
H xV 7 09" x 5 10' 11'08' X 8'0W 15 .07x 1108' 19'06" x 14'07' 23'05' X 1706" 31'03' x 23'05' 39'00" x 29'03" 4810' x 36'07 58'07' X 43'11' 68'04" x 51'03" 78'01' x 58'07" 8711' x 65'10" 970W>' 73'02" 117'02"x 87'10" 136'09' x 10206' 156'03" x 117'0T 17510'x 13109' 19504'x 14805" 390'09" x292'11' 586'01' x439'04" 78106'x 58510' 976 11" ,.. 73203'
8.5mm H· V 511' x 405" 8' 11" x 6'08' 11'11" x 811' 14'11 ."x 11'02' 17'11' x 1305" 23' 10" x 17 11 29'10" x 2204" 37'04" x 2800" 44'09' x 33'07' 52'03' x 3902" 59'09' x 44'09 67'02" x 50'04' 74'08" x 5600' 89'07" x 67'02" 10407x 7804' 119'06"x 8907' 134'05x 10009' 149'04' x 11200" 298'09' x222'00' 44802x 33600" 597'07"x 44800' 74700"x 560 00"
12.5mm
25mm
H 4 00
V 3 00'
H
V
200 x 106'
6'01" x 406' 300" x 2' 03"
801' x 601' 400" x. 300"
10'01' x 707' 500' - 309'
1202' , 901' 6'01' x 4'04"
16'03 · 1202" 8'0V x 601'
20'03" x 15 02 10 01' /' 707'
2504' x 19 OW 1208' - 906'
30'05' > 22 10 15'02 · 1105"
35'06' x 2607" 1709 .. 13 03"
40'07" x· 30'05' 2003' · 1502'
4508' x 3403' 2210 · 170F
5009' x 3800' 2504 - 1900'
60'11' X 4508' 30'05 · 22 10"
7101" x5303' 3506" , 26'07
81'03" x601V 40'07" · 30'05'
91'05" x 68'06' 4508' - 34 03'
10107"x 76'0V 5009 -x3800"
20302' ' 15203' 101'07 X 760V
304 09' x 228 05' 152 04 s< 114 02
406 04" x30407 - 203 02 - 152 03'
508 00 `.· 380 09 254 00 - 190 04
50mm
75mm
90mm
H- V 100 x 009"
H- V 008" > 006"
H· V 0'06" · 005
106' x 1" 01 " 100" , 009' D' 10' ' 007
200' x 106'
104' / 100'
101 -· 010
206" · 1 10' 108 · 103' 104' · 100
300" / 203" 2 00' · 106 - 108 · 103
400" x 300" 208 · 200' 203 · 108
500' / 3'0W 304 -· 206" 209' · 2 01
6 04' / 409' 4 02 · 302 - 306 · 2 07
707 , 508
5 00" / 3'09
4 02 · 3 02
810' / 607' S'il' / 405 - 4 11 / 308
10'01' / 707' 609" / 500
507 -· 402
11'05 -· 8 06 - 707' · 508
604 · 409
1208' · 9 06' 8 05 · 604 - 7 00 · 5 03
1502 · 1103" 10 01 · 707
6 05 · 604
1709 · 13 03" 11 10 · 810 - P 10 · 704
20 03 · 1502 13 06 · 10 01 11 03 · 805
2210 -· 1701' 15 02 · 11 05 12 08 · 906
25 04 / 1900' 16 11 · 12 08 14 01 · 10 06
50' 09" ·," 38' 00 33 10 · 25 04 28 02 · 21 01
76 02 -/ 57 01 50 09 · 3800 42 04 · 31 08
101 07 · 78 01 67 08 · 50 09 56 05 · 42 03
127 00 · 95 02 84 08 · 63 05 70 06 · 52 10
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
160mm
H
V
0 03 · 002
0' 05 · 0 04
007' · 005
009 - 007
0 11 · 008
103 · 011
107 · 102
1 11 · 105
204 · 109
2 09 · 200
302 .204
306 · 208
311 · 211
409 · 306
506
401
604
409
701
504
7 11
5 11
15 10 -11 10
23 09 ·17 10
31 09 ·23 09
39 08 -29 09
VC-219
PEP, INC.
25 West 54th Street New York, NY 10019 (212) 246-2490
ENG/EFP POWER UNITS AND ACCESSORIES
30 Volt DC Portable Battery Packs
F- 30- EC " Frezzi Belt - battery pack. 30 volt. 4AH output capacity. Includes internal battery charger ( 14 hours)
$545.00
F-30-EXFA
" Frezzi-Belt" battery pack. 30 volt. 4 AH output
capacity. Re- charges in 1hour or less with " Frezzi-Fast"
Charger (see below). Also includes internal battery
charger ( 14 hours).
$595.00
BC- 30C
Fully charges 30 volt " Frezzi-Belt" Model F30-EXF
Battery Pack ( above) in 1hour or less. Requires 120/240
volt, 60hz AC input
$450.00
Battery Mounting Brackets
HM300
HM76B / C HM77
Battery Mounting Brackets for BVP 300/330 and
Thompson MC601 Mounts ON- BOARD batteries H12,
H14, L12, and L14
S105.00
Battery Mounting Bracket for RCA TK76B and TK76C
Mounts ON- BOARD battery H14
S155.00
Battery Mounting Bracket for HL77. Mounts ON- BOARD
battery H77
$145.00
Six ( 6) AMP- HR Power Belts
F-12-EXF ( 12V) 6AH Recharges in 1hour or less with PEP model
UF1 Universal Safety Charger also includes internal
battery charger (14 hours)
S475.00
F-14-EXF ( 14.4V)6 AH Recharges in 1hour or less with PEP model UF1 Universal Safety Charger also includes internal battery charger ( 14 hours) $ 495.00
12 Volt OB Lights
FL12V FL12C
Lighthead with cable terminated in 2- pin amp connector
for use with PEP model V90 FAST charge VTR battery.
Includes FAV 100 watt bulb, 1/4 - 20 TV camera mount
stud and removable handle
5195.00
Lighthead with cable terminated in Sony VTR plug in- line connector for use with V9ON standard charge battery. Includes FAV 100 watt bulb, 1/ 4 - 20 TV camera mount
stud and removable handle $ 195.00
FL12G FL12S
Lighthead with cable terminated in 3- pin amphenol connector for use with Bi 2G battery. Includes FAV 100 watt bulb, 1/4 - 20 TV camera mount stud and removable handle8195.00
Lighthead with 24" cable terminated in XLR4 rt. angle
connector for use with PEP model Bi 2S BRICK battery.
Includes FAV 100 watt bulb, 1 / 4 - 20 TV camera mount
stud and removable handle
$195.00
Belt Holsters
BHV BHC
BHG BU
Belt Holster for V90 battery, use with FL12 light
$35.00
Belt Holster for ER6 V9ON battery with retainer for inline DC plug and mate, use with FL12C light
545.00
Belt Holster for ER6 V9ON battery to 3- pin amphenol
output, use with FL12 G light
$55.00
Belt, 2" Leather, cut to length
$25.00
Lamps
FAV FAT FBV
100 watts 11 5volts DC
150 watts 30 volts DC 250 watts 30 volts DC
$30.00 37.00 39.00
Model FL Portable Light
FL30
FLDF-101 FLS-101 FLCM 101 FLCM 102 FLSS-101 FLH-101
Lighthead with 30 volt DC 150 watt. Model FBI lamp,
handle, power cable with plug. ( Lighthead accepts 150 or
350- watt lamps -- see below)
$195.00
Dichroic Filter ( swing away)
88.00
Scrim ( swing away)
44.00
1 4 - 20 Video Camera Mount Stud
12.00
Dove- Tail Film ( cine) Camera Mount
45.00
Lightstand
68.50
Replacement Handle
12.00
VC- 220
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PEP, INC.
25 West 54th Street New York, NY 10019 (212) 246-2490
ENG/EFP POWER UNITS AND ACCESSORIES
ON- BOARD Camera Power
H 12 H14 H77
HAC3
ON- BOARD battery, 4 AH 12 volt $ 400.00
On- BOARD battery, 4 AH 14.4 volt
S440.00
ON- BOARD battery, 4 AH + 7.2 volt for HL77
Camera
$ 450.00
ON- BOARD AC Adaptor, 40 watts 13.5 volts $ 495.00
BRICK Pack Batteries
B12G
812 814
BRICK Pack battery for 12V Sun Gun, 4AH 12 volt with 3- pin amphenol connector $ 395.00 BRICK Pack battery, 4 AH 12 volt with 5- pin XLR S395.00
BRICK Pack battery, 4 AH 14.4 volt with 4- pin XLR $ 425.00
FAST Charge Nicad VTR Batteries
V90 V9ON V60
FAST Charge VTR battery for BVU 50/110, a direct replacement for Sony BP90--will also charge from the BC 210 Nicad charger or overnight charge $ 295.00
Standard Charge VTR battery for BVU 50/110, a direct replacement for Sony 8P90-- will charge from the BC 210 Nicad charger or overnight charge $ 275.00
VTR battery for V04800 etc., FAST charge Nicad $ 210.00
Universal FAST Charger
U F1
HL HS
Universal Safety Charger, 100/120/220/240 volt 50/60 Hz, FAST charges all PEP batteries · $ 450.00
*0N- BOARD models H14 and H12 as well as Anton/Bauer 4 AH Nicad " Snap- on"' batteries mount directly on charger battery bracket for charging. All other batteries require charge adapter cable for connection
Charge adapter cable for 2AH ON- BOARD batteries L12 and
L14 to UF1 charger
$ 30.00
Charge adapter cable for 4 AH BRICK Pack batteries B12G, B12 and B12S and for FAST charge VTR batteries V20, V44
and V60
$ 30.00
HC
Charge adapter cable for V90 FAST charge BVU 50 110
battery
$30 00
HX
Charge adapter cable for B14 BRICK Pack $ 30.00
Battery Charging Stations
BCS 5
Simultaneously FAST charges up to five(5) PEP ON- BOARD or
Anton/Bauer " Snap- on" 4AH Nicad batteries in less than one
(1) hour
$ 1595.00
BCS 90
Simultaneously Overnight Charges up to eight ( 8) PEP V90 N or Sony BP90 batteries $ 395.00
BCS 5/90 Simultaneously FAST charges up to five(5) PEP ON- BOARD or Anton/Bauer " Snap-on" 4AH Nicad batteries in less than one ( 1) hour, and at the same time, overnight charges eight ( 8) PEP V90 or Sony BP90 batteries in twelve ( 12) hours
$2090.00
Overnite Trickle Chargers
N 12H N14H N 122L N 142L N 12S N122S N12C N14X
Overnite ( 14 hr.) trickle charger with Hconnector for 4AH 12 volt ON- BOARD battery 1-f12 $ 75.00
Overnite114 hr trickle charger with Hconnector for 4AH 14 4
volt battery H14
$ 75.00
Overnite ( 14 hr.) trickle charger with L connector for 2 AH
ON- BOARD 12 volt battery L12
$ 75.00
Overnite ( 14 hr.) trickle charger with L connector for 2 AH
ON- BOARD 14.4 volt battery L14
$ 75.00
Overnite ( 14 hr.) trickle charger with SEN connector for 4AH BRICK 12 volt batteries B12G, 1312 and B12S $ 75.00
Overnite ( 14 hr.) trickle charger with SEN connector for 2AH
VTR batteries V20, V44 and V60
$75.00
Overnite ( 14 hr.) trickle charger for V90 and V9ON VTR
battery
$ 75.00
Overnite ( 14 hr.) trickle charger for E314 BRICK battery
$75.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 221
PERROTT ENGINEERING
7201 Lee Highway Falls Church, VA 22046 (703) 532-0700
LABS,
INC.
BATTERIES
NP- 1 NiCad® Battery ·Authentic original equipment. ·Can be charged in about one hour. ·Circuit breaker and thermostat protected.
·Reasonably priced. ·Off- the- shelf delivery. ·Top quality fast charge NiCad® cells.
SPECIFICATIONS Volts ( nominal): 12.0 Capacity Er typical running time:
Available Watts (BVP-1/BVU-1118 (BVP-3/BVU-1) 18 (Thomson) MC- 611 18 (Thomson) MC- 613 18
Amp Hours 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Weight: 1.5 lbs. Size: 7-1/4" x 1" x2-7/8". Connectors: Spring contacts. Charger: Use with Sony/Thomson charger.
Hours .8 .5 .8 .5
$60.00
PE- 62 NiCad® Ampex VTR Battery ·For your VPR-20 ·Direct replacement for the Ampex battery. ·Less than half the Ampex battery price. ·Top quality fast- charge NiCad cells. ·Sturdy lightweight aluminum frame. ·High impact molded case. ·100% quality control inspected, electronically and
manually.
SPECIFICATIONS Volts ( nominal): 13.2 Capacity Et Typical Running Time:
Available Watts 105.6
Amp Hours 8.0
Weight: 8.0 lbs. Size: 8-1/4" x5-1/4" x2-3/4" Connectors: 6- pin Ampex- type connector ( TRW) Minicharger®: Use PE- 8200 or PE- 8204.
Hours 1.2
$495.00
Replacement Batteries ·Top quality lead acid cells. ·Authentic OEM " pigtail" connectors. ·Moderate price. ·100% quality control inspected, electronically and manually.
SPECIFICATIONS
For Your Camera Sony DXC-1600 Sony DXC-1610 Sony DXC-1640
Minipack
PE 39 Pack PE 60 Pack
PE 60 Pack
Nominal Voltage
12 12
12
Capacity AH Running Time ( hrs.)
2.5 . 6
2.5
2.7
2.5
2.5
Weight Obs.)
3 3
3
Charger
Use Sony Charger Use Sony Charger
Use Sony Charger
NOTE: The PE 60 Battery will power the DXC-1640 camera and the VO -4800 Recorder simultaneously for 1 hour. Running time is estimated using a new fully charged battery.
VC- 222
PE 39 $63.00
PE 40 $63.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PE 60 $64.00
PERROTT ENGINEERING
7201 Lee Highway Falls Church, VA 22046 (703) 532-0700
LABS,
INC.
BATTERIES
PE- 200 Kwik-Klip NiCad® Camera/VTR Battery
The only NiCad® battery you'll want behind your camera.
PE200 KWIK KUM or PRB 200 Soap On will power:
Amps. FPR-I 0 Harris
Ikegami: except HL77 JVC: KY310 RCA
Hitachi SK81. SK91 Sony. BVP series. Betacam series Thomson: including Betacam Toshiba PK60
PE201 KWIK KUM or PRB201 Snap On' will power:
Hitachi .except FP- 10, SK·81, SK- 9. JVC: KY- 1900, KY- 2700
Parasonic AK- 710, AK- 750. AK- 760. AK- 100. WV- 777. B-100 Recaer
PE 220 KWIK KLIP PRB220 Snap On' will power:
Harris
Hitachi
RCA: HC- 1
Ikegami: except HL77
Sharp
JVC: KY- 1900. KY- 2700, KV 310.
Sony
Panasonic: AK- 710. AK750. AK760.
Thon-son
AK- 100
·Complete flexibility with Kwik-Klip' or Snap-On- battery mounts.
· Reliable Minicharger° built right in. · Full overcharge safety protection. · Top quality fast- charge NiCad° cells. · Impact resistant all metal case. · Moderate price. · 100% quality control inspected, electronically and manually.
· Dual Voltage 115/230 AC switchable, except PE 220.
SPECIFICATIONS
Volts ( nominal): 13.2 ( PE- 201) or 14.4 ( PE- 200) or 12.0 ( PE- 220) Capacity 8. Typical Running Time:
Available Watts (13.2 V) 52.8
(14.4 V) 57.6 (12.0 V) 26.4
Amp Hours 4.0
4.0 2.2
Hours* 2.3
2.5 1.0
Weight: 4.75 lbs. ( 13.2 V); 5.00 lbs. ( 14.4 V); 2.5 lbs ( 12.0 V)
Size: 51/4"x3" x5" ( 13.2 V and 14.4 V) 4" x2" x51/ 2 " ( 12.0 V)
Connectors: Mates with Kwik-Klip' or Snap-On- battery mounts
Minichargere: Use built-in, PE- 8200 or PE-8204.
$495.00
·Camera run time is estimated using 23 watts.
Will power : Sony VTR's
BVU-50 BVU·100 BVU-110 BVH-500 VO- 3800
With PE9037 KWIP KUM or PRB 9037 Snap On - will power:
Ampex. except FPR-10 Han- is Hitacni: except SR- 1. SR- 10 Ikegarni JVC Panasonic: except B-100 Recarn RCA Sony Sharp Thomson
PE- 90 NiCad® VTR Battery
The industry's most versatile battery.
· Preferred by professionals since 1978. · Direct replacement for Sony BP- 90 VTR battery. ·Can even run your camera.* ·Top quality fast- charge NiCad° cells. · High impact molded case- completely sealed. · Moderate price. · 100% quality control inspected, electronically and manually.
SPECIFICATIONS Volts ( nominal): 12.0 Capacity Er Typical Running Time:
Available Watts
Amp Hours
48
4.0
Weight: 3.5 lbs.
Size: 43/ 4 "x61/ 2 "x 17/16"
Connectors: Authentic Sony pigtail connectors.
Minichargere: Use PE- 38, PE- 8200 or PE- 8204
Hours** 40
$220.00
·When used with the convenient Perrott 9037 batte-ycarrier. will power camera and camera /recorder combinations.
··· Running time is estimated using Sony BVU-50 VTR.
PE-52-4 NiCad® Dual Output Belt
It can run your light or your camera.
· Four hour charger built right in. · Runs 30 volt light with 4AH of power- or runs camera with 8AH of power. · Powers your Perrott Lite' 90 minutes. · Top quality fast- charge NiCad° cells. · Full grain cowhide leather pouches and strap. · Half- inch spacing between pouches for flexibility and comfort. · 100% quality control inspected, both electronically and manually.
SPECIFICATIONS
Available Watts
(14.4 V Camera) (14.4 V 75W light) (30 V 250W light)
115.2 115.2 115.2
Weight: 11.0 lbs. Size: Pouches: 28 1/2"x2" x41/4"
Belt: Adjustable Connectors: 5- pin XLR for 14.4 V, BAH.
Amp Hours
8.0 8.0 4.0
Hours 5.0 1.5 .4
$675.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-223
PORTA- PATTERN
INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 38945 750 North Highland Ave.
Los Angeles, CA 90038 U.S.A. (213) 461-3561 TVVX 910-321-4049 TV CHARTS LSA
CABLES: TVCHARTS
PORTA-PATTERN'
TEST CHART SYSTEM
The PORTA -PATTERN Test Chart System is a convenient. portable 9" x12" chart package for studio or field use. The system has been designed to offer maximum versatility and protection for the Test Charts, thus providing faster, easier camera
set-up and alignment.
The light weight self- standing aluminum Chart Holder provides three point positional alignment. A spirit level is an integral part of the unit's design for horizontal alignment accuracy. Optional Microphone and Light Stand Mounting Adapters allow the system to be stand mounted with the same alignment capabilities.
The system contains one each Resolution. Linearity. Registration and Logarithmic Reflectance Charts. The charts are mounted in recessed, high- impact plastic frames for chart surface protection. Each chart frame is color coded for ease of location in the holder. Charts are placed in order of usage. After use the front chart
can be reversed so all chart surfaces are protected.
014-10 014-11 014-12
TELEVISION OPTICAL TEST MEDIA
EFP Three Chart System with three Black Et White Geometric
Test Patterns, including case
$220.00
EFP Three Chart System with two Black Er White Geometric Et
one Nine- Step Log Chip Chart, including case
250.00
EFP Three Chart System with one Black Et White Geometric, one Log Chip Et one of either Color Bar, BBC #61P Flesh Tone
or Pulse Bar Chart, including case
280.00
001-10" 001-11* 001-1r 001-13*
001-15
001-16 001-17 001-50 001-51 oo1-24001-25" 001-26* ocri-zr 001-28 001-29 001-30 001-31 001-32 001-33 001-34 001-35 001-36 001-37 001-38 001-39 001-40 001-42 001-43 001-44 001-45
Four Chart System with NO adaptors Four Chart System with microphone stand adaptor Four Chart System with light stand adaptor Four Chart System with mic and light stand adaptors (*Includes Chans indicated) Microphone stand adaptor
Light stand adaptor Aluminum frame assembly, complete w/o adaptors Dual system carrying case
Single Chart carrying case Resolution Chart Linearity ( Ball) Chart Registration Chart Nine- Step Log Chip Chart Production Slate Blank plastic chart frame BBC Zone Plate Chart, 525 line BBC Zone Plate Chart, 625 line
Multi- Burst Chart
Window Chart Chess Board Chart Reverse Registration Chart BBC #61P Flesh Tone Reference Chart
Pulse Bar Chart CCIR Linearity ( Ball) Chart
Auto- Registration Chart Lens Focus Chart Line Resolution Chart Full- Field Color Bar Chart Eleven- Step Log Chip Chart Depth of Modulation Chart ( Rev. 1984)
$310.00 325.00 335.00 350.00
33.00
36.00 190.00
85.00 60.00 75.00 75.00 75.00 100.00 60.00 50.00 150.00 150.00 75.00 75.00 75.00 75.00 150.00 160.00 75.00 75.00 75.00 75.00 145.00 110.00 75.00
PORTA-PATTERN DUOCHART' SYSTEMS
ll POP IA PATTERN DUOCHART System is alightweight, durable portable video
test chart package in the convenient PORTA-PATTERN 9" x12" image size. Each chart is recess-mounted on lightweight, heavy-duty expanded PVC Foamex."and hinged to fold face-to-face when not in use. Black Velcro'.provides alight and dirt seal when the system is closed. Each system includes ablack vinyl case for carrying and storage. There are three DUOCHART systems to provide the right information for the required set-up and evaluation. (A) RESOLUTION/LINEARITY. This system contains the standard Resolution and Linearity Charts, The Resolution Image is designed as a standard reference for measuring and evaluating overall camera resolution as well as testing for camera streaking. ringing, interlace and aspect ratio. The Linearity Image is designed for measuring and adjusting scan linearity. The image is amatrix of circles that provide reference when combined with the proper electronically generated grating signal
(B) REGISTRATION/LOG GREY SCALE. This system contains the standard Registration and Log Grey Scale Charts. The Registration Image is designed for adjustment of scan timing ( registration) in multiple tube color cameras. The Log Grey Scale contains two rows of nine paint chips each, providing the range of reflectance from TV white ( 60%) to TV black ( 3%). scaled in increments to approximate the transfer characteristics of the color picture tube.
(C) MULTI-BURST/FLESH TONE REFERENCE. This system contains the MultiBurst Chart and the BBC # 61P Color Flesh Tone Chart. The Multi- Burst Image is a dual range grouping of bursts. The full scan range is from 1MHz to 8MHz in 1MHz steps. The half scan range is from 05MHz to 4MHz in 0.5 MHz steps The bursts are spaced by a solid black bar for separation of burst information on a waveform monitor The BBC # 61P Color Flesh Tone Image has been developed to provide a standard color reference for matching and evaluating cameras after normal color balance is achieved The image is manufactured in close cooperation with the Research Department of the BBC with advanced electronic color separation to assure spectral characteristics and long lasting chromaticity
.. . 0 999 : '' · ·
.. ... ...... .. . . . .. ..
(A)111111111
PORTA -PATTERN'
ELECTRONIC FIELD PRODUCTION THREE CHART SYSTEM
In order to provide a greater range of available test patterns in a package better adapted to the portability of EFP camera systems. PORTA-PATTERN has devel-
oped aThree Chart System which will accept any combination of three charts pres-
ently available in the PORTA-PATTERN catalogue.
The system consists of three protective plastic frames, similar to those used for all individual PORTA-PATTERN Test Charts, uniquely hinged end- to- end which allows the frames to be folded upon themselves, thus providing complete surface protec-
MOM (C)
tion for all three charts, and, when closed, takes up no more space than asingle
PORTA -PATTERN Test Chart.
The entire system is held closed by aVelcro' closure system. and avinyl coated
020-10
Resolution Linearity
nylon case is included to provide a complete Three Chart System in a package
020-11
Registration Nine- Step Log Grey Scale
15" high x18" wide x11/2"thick.
020-12
Multi- Burst BBC # 61P Flesh Tone Reference
VC- 224
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
S130.00 160.00 195.00
PORTA-PATTERN
INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 38945
750 North Highland Ave.
Los Angeles, CA 90038 U.S.A.
(213) 461 - 3561
TVVX 910-321 - 4049 TV CHARTS LSA CABLES: TVCHARTS PORTA -PATTERN
ENG TWO CHART SYSTEM
The PORTA-PATTERN ENG Chart System has been designed to provide basic alignment, registration, color balance and Auto- White balance information for fast
electronic news gathering or field camera set-up. The system consists of a Registration Chart and a specially designed Color Balance Chart, mounted on durable white acrylic. The two acrylic frames are hinged together, and the charts are folded face-to-face when not in use. Black Velcro" provides alight and dirt seal when the system is closed, and the white acrylic has a non- reflective surface for Auto-White balance use.
TELEVISION OPTICAL TEST MEDIA
is controlled by afront panel adjustment and is calibrated by an easily read meter. The PORTA-PATTERN Spherical Transparency Illuminator mounts on any light stand that will accept an 11/ 23" stud. The uni: includes ayoke, hood and transparency holder and 10- foot power cord.
008-10
ENG Portable Two- Chart System. Registration and Color Balance, including Carrying Case
&185.00
PORTA -PATTERN
TEST SLIDES AND TEST SLIDE SYSTEMS
The PORTA-PATTERN Test Slides and Slide System provide the same accuracy and convenience for Color and Black & White Telecine set-up and alignment as the industry standard PORTA-PATTERN Test Charts.These Slides are available in either
a7 x2" glass protected format, for use with slide projectors. or a31/4 "x4" Field Lens
format for use with large image Telecine systems.
002-10P Test Slide System. Positive, 8Slides with Hardwood Case
002-1ON' Test Slide System. Negative, 8Slides with Hardwood Case
(includes Slides as Shown)
002-20
Hardwood Slide Case. 10 Slide Capacity
002-24P' Resolution Slide, Positive
002-24N Resolution Slide. Negative
002-25P' Linearity ( Ball) Slide, Positive
002-25N Linearity ( Ball) Slide. Negative
002-2613* Registration Slide, Positive 002-26N Registration Slide. Negative .
002-27
Nine- Step Log Grey Scale Slide
002-32P* Multi- Burst Slide, Positive
002-32N Multi- Burst Slide. Negative
002-33' Window Slide
002-34P' Chess Board Slide, Positive
002-34N Chess Board Slide, Negative
002-36* BBC # 61P Type Flesh Tone Reference Slide
$ 175.00 175.00
65.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 130.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 15.00 65.00
002-38P 002-38N
002-41P 002-41N 002-43*
CCIR Linearity ( Ball) Slide. Positive CCIR Linearity ( Ball) Slide, Negative .
Depth of Modulation Slide, Positive Depth of Modulation Slide. Negative Fe- Feld Color Bar Slide
15.00 15.00
15.00 15.00 65.00
16MM BLACK & WHITE ALIGNMENT FILM The PORTA -PATTERN 16mm Alignment Film contains the Chess Board Image to be used as a universal test film for operational alignment and evaluation of Telecine
projector optical resolution and geometry. film transport jitter and weave, and trav-
010-10
010-1 1
010-60 010-75 010-99
Spherical Transparency Illuminator, including Hood, Yoke and spare lamp, 117 Volt, 60 Hz. Same as above, 230 Volt, 50 Hz
Note: Above Illuminators shipped via COLLECT AIRFREIGHT ONLY. Vinyl coated nylon fitted dust cover
Test Bench Mount 12 Volt, 50 Watt Replacement Lamp for above
$ 2750.00 2750.00
140.00 woe 17.50
PORTA -PATTERN
8" x10" ILLUMINATOR TRANSPARENCIES
The PORTA-PATTERN 8" x 10" Transparencies represent advanced state-of-theart technology using emulsioned high- impact acrylic. The Geometric Images are direct reading to the camera. There is no glass between the Camera Lens and the Image to cause distortion or Ight loss. The elimination of the normal "sandwich" type of construction prevents buckling of the image surface and moisture collection.
This all acrylic construction eliminates the danger and high cost of breakage under normal operating conditions. Neither image emulsion nor acrylic base is subject to heat distortion or damage under usual operating conditions.
Highest quality photographic reproduction insures accurate resolution and maximum and minimum density stability. Dimensional stability and resolving power are in excess of 0.010 percent. All Geometric Image transparencies include tube scan information to aid in camera set-up. Geometric Images are available in standard positive image transparencies or negative image transparencies for lower Average Picture level.
elling ghosts
16MM BBC #61P TYPE COLOR FLESH TONE REFERENCE FILM The PORTA -PATTERN 16mm Color Flesh Tone Reference Film contains the BBC #61P TYPE Image to be used for subjective evaluation of 16mm Color Telecine
systems
005-10 005-12
005-20
16mm Black & White Chess Board Alignment Film, 50 Feet $ 130.00
16mm BBC # 61P Type Flesh Tone Reference Film Loop
10 Feet . . . .
90.00
35mm B & W Chess Board Aspect Ratio Transfer Alignment
Film 100 Feet
395.00
PORTA -PATTERN
SPHERICAL TRANSPARENCY ILLUMINATOR
The PORTA -PATTERN Spherical Transparency Illuminator provides a laboratorytype test standard in a practical, video- oriented test package It is a unique approach 10 8" x10" format transparency illumination for testing, set-up and evalua-
tion of color television camera systems. A wide range of ultra- stable color temperatures and illumination levels are easily achieved by the use of two front panel controls The modified 20" integrating sphere produces a flat illumination field throughout a cone angle of greater than 20 degrees without any additional adjustments
The light source is alow- voltage. regulated DC controlled quartz iodine lamp that assures aconstant color temperature independent of AC line variations This light source illuminates the interior of the sphere. which is coated with high efficiency
006-20 006-24P 006-24N 006-25P 006-25N 006-26P 006-26N 006-27
006-30P 006 31P 006-32P 006-32N 006-33P 006-33N 006-34P 006-34N 006-36 006-37P 006-37N 006-38P 006-38N 006-39P 006-39N 006-40P 006-40N
Hardwood Transparency Case, 10 Transparency Capacity
Resolution Transparency. Positive Resolution Transparency, Negative Linearity ( Ball) Transparency,Positive Linearity ( Ball) Transparency, Negative
Registration Transparency, Positive . Registration Transparency. Negative . Nine- Step Log Grey Scale Transparency BBC Zone Plate Transparency, 525 Line, Positive BBC Zone Plate Transparency, 625 Line, Positive Multi- Burst Transparency, Positive Multi- Burst Transparency, Negative Window Transparency, Positive Window Transparency, Negative Chess Board Transparency, Positive Chess Board Transparency, Negative BBC # 61P Type Flesh Tone Reference Transparency Pulse Bar Camera Transparency, Positive Pulse Bar Camera Transparency, Negative CCIR Linearity ( Ball) Transparency. Positive CCIR Linearity ( Ball) Transparency, Negative Auto- Registration Transparency. Positive . . Auto- Registration Transparency, Negative Lens Focus Transparency, Positive Lens Focus Transparency, Negative
$150.00 165.00
172.50
165.00 172.50
165.00 172.50 240.00 165.00 165.C4)
165.00 172.50 165.00 172.50 165.00 150.00
190.00 180.00 187.50
165.00 172.50 165.00
172.50 165,00
172.50
Eastman BaSO4 sphere coating
The illumination level is varied by adjusting the light source position inside the
006-42P Line Resolution Transparency. Positive
sphere. employing the principle of the inverse square law. A precision lamp position
006-42N Line Resolution Transparency, Negative
assembly. controlled by anumerically calibrated, vernier knob, enables the selec-
006-43
Full- Field Color Bar Transparency
tion of established illumination levels without the use of alight meter. Constant color temperature is achieved by the regulated DC power source which
006 44 006-45P
Eleven- Step Log Grey Scale Transparency Depth of Modulation Transparency, ( Rev. 19841, Positive
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
165.00 172.50 190.00 275.00 165.00
VC- 225
Mr.fell U* S* A
20 RAINBOW POND DRIVE, SUITE A-2 WALPOLE, MA 02081 / ( 617) 668-8770
MOUNTING BRACKETS
Pivotelli wall brackets are made of the finest materials and offers a 5 year parts
and labor guarantee. You can use Pivotelli Swivel Support Arms with
complete confidence.
All Brackets are available in gloss white
or matt black durable nylon coating. Prices subject to change without notice.
UNIVERSAL STEREO BRACKETS
Wall mounted brackets designed to support two stereo speakers. Maximum weight: 88 lbs. (sold only in pairs)
SINGLE PIVOTELLI
Straight arm wall mounted bracket. Maximum weight: 176 lbs.
DOUBLE PIVOTELLI
12" Double joint flex-arms (24" Total) Maximum weight: 176 lbs.
TRIPLE PIVOTELLI
WITH WALL MOUNT
Provides viewing/listening direction adjustments in all three directions, including tilt.
WITH SCREW- IN BASEPLATES
Model PU $69.50 Pair
UNIVERSAL STEREO BRACKETS
Wall mounted brackets designed to support two stereo speakers. Maximum weight: 88 lbs. (sold only in pairs)
WITH LIMPET BASEPLATES
Model PULUP (7 1/2"-11") $89.50 Pair Model PULUM (11"-17 3 /4 ") $99.50 Pair
12" ARM WITH SCREW- IN BASEPLATE
Model M $49.95
18" ARM WITH SCREW- IN BASEPLATE
Model S $49.95
SINGLE PIVOTELLI
Straight arm wall mounted bracket. Maximum weight: 176 lbs.
12" ARM WITH LIMPET BASEPLATE
MEDIUM (11"-17 3/4 ") Model MLUM $69.95 STANDARD (17 3/4 "-30") Model MLUS $69.95
18" ARM WITH LIMPET BASEPLATE
MEDIUM (11"-17 3/4 ") Model SLUM $69.95 STANDARD (17 3/4 "-30") Model SLUS $69.95 LARGE (27"-47") Model SLUL $69.95
SWING ' N TILT
UNIVERSAL JOINT
,if
For use with 12", 18" and Double Pivotellis To angle the TV, Speaker or Monitor up or down.
MODEL UL
$ 27.95
VC-226
WITH SCREW- IN BASEPLATE
Model D $ 119.95
DOUBLE PIVOTELLI
12" Double joint flex-arms (24" Total) Maximum weight: 176 lbs.
WITH LIMPET BASEPLATE
MEDIUM (11"-17 3/ 4 ") Model DLUM $ 139.95 STANDARD (17 3/ 4 "-30") Model DLUS $ 139.95 LARGE (27"-47") Model DLUL $ 139.95
DOUBLE PIVOTELLI
Light Weight Model 12" Double Joint flex-arms (24" Total) Maximum weight: 22 lbs. WITH LIMPET BASEPLATE MEDIUM (11"-17 3/ 4 ") Model DSLUM $99.95 STANDARD (17 3/ 4 -30") Model DSLUS $99.95
MEDIUM Fits cabinet heights (1117 3/4") Fits cabinet widths (11"-17 3/4") Model TMU $ 179.95 STANDARD Fits cabinet heights (11"-17 3/4") Fits cabinet widths (17 3/ 4 -33 1/ 2 ") Model TSU $ 199.99 LARGE Fits cabinet heights (17 3/ 4 "-30") Fits cabinet widths (17 3/4''-331/2") Model TLU $ 199.95
TRIPLE PIVOTELLI
WITH TELESCOPIC CEILING
MEDIUM
ve
Model TTM
$179.95
STANDARD LARGE
Model US $189.95 Model TTL $199.95
CHOICE OF BASEPLATE?
SCREWTYPE--an effective way to support wood-based equipment. Support is provided by the' H" shaped baseplate to which equipdmeesnitredi.s fastened by four wood screws. Also if wood platform is
LIMPET--The Pivotelli Limpet actually grips the cabinet of the equipment with rubber- lined clamps and is adjusted by you to support equipment in its exact center of balance.
Pivotelli wall brackets mount onto wood or metal studs and masonry walls.
A DIVISION OF Q- CO INDUSTRIES, INC.
104 E. 25th St. New York, NY 10010 (212) 460-9050
VIDEO PROMPTER SYSTEMS
Q-Tv's/SC Monochrome Video Monitors are 100% solid-state with professional quality features which make them ideally suited for use in high quality display applications. The equipment is designed for operation from either composite video sync signals, or from systems in which external sync is provided. Monitor cabinet construction is steel with a baked, vinyl finish.
4.
A compact, economically priced prompting system that is unmatched in performance, versatility and reliability.
.17,...P10/1111 COPY IS EASY.. TOmiAo-ref-To-Pferx. mMEM RV tor PlOPIER wry T1ET·S EASY TO MUM ... FASI PALI CO Ply's VICEOPIOCER SYSTEM. » ZEST' TO 11L15...COMEICIP43.. MITORIALS...EDITOPIPA MS COLIMTLISS OMER »S. IT'L as, mITM TwE nns-wo 1PS.300 PIMPFTER SYSTEMS.
150 4005 » MUST SILL IS WYLY 15150 » OfM. MT S» IS LIKELY II nt MIME 5514m 551054. LOKI 00151 alLIATIC SUITS TO K CUPP Sil
LPPER MISSISSIPPI MALLEY AULf SIMS EXPECT uso. CWO MIS FORECAST CALLS 000 ICISTLY cow wo nu on 5000 olIM WAKE Cf SIO/Et GO KM«. 811151556 lOI UPPER 50·I. MIN OYETIMICAII LOM K. TO 50.
Successful speech presentation starts here with Q-Tv's "Speech- Cue" System. Step behind it and you're in total command of your speech material...in total command of your audience. The " Speech Cue" System provides you with the most favorable conditions for " Face- to- Face"
communications.
No special prompter paper required... No special prompter ribbons necessary...No special typewriter needed.. It all means savings! Use any standard wide bond paper or handy
"snap- packs" for typing prompter scripts.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 227
A DIVISION OF 0.- CO INDUSTRIES, INC.
104 E. 25th St.
New York, NY 10010 (212) 460-9050
VIDEO PROMPTER SYSTEMS
VPS-100 CONSOLE TRANSPORT
We have simplified prompting! By eliminating elements such as the large- size typewriter, special paper, special ribbons, replacing broken keys, typewriter adjustments, and transposing copy, we figured what can't go wrong, won't go wrong.
These unique prompting systems offer the broadcast industry and its allied fields, a versatile, efficient and rapid method for providing prompter copy through avideo signal.
Prompter copy is prepared on standard 8-1/2" x11" single sheets of paper using any manual or electric typewriter. The prompter script is conveniently fed through the aperture of the VPS-100 by means of 'taping' the individual sheets into acontinuous roll; or by placing the individual sheets of copy on the conveyor belt of the VPS-300, thus eliminating the need for ' taping'.
ONE VPS-100 PROMPTER SYSTEM
1VPS-100 Console Transport
1Vidicon Camera w/lens
114" Prompter/Monitor
1Remote Hand Control
125' Coaxial Cable
1Prompter Camera Mount
1Camera Balancing Assembly
1VPS Eye- Line
1Instruction Manual
$4750.00
TWO VPS-100 PROMPTER SYSTEM
1VPS-100 Console Transport
1Vidicon Camera w/lens
2 14" Prompter/monitor
1Remote Hand Control
225' Coaxial Cable
2 Prompter Camera Mount
2 Camera Balancing Assembly
2VPS Eye- Line
1Instruction Manual
$6500.00
ONE VPS-300 PROMPTER SYSTEM
VPS-300 CONVEYOR TRANSPORT
Prompter copy is scanned by the vidicon camera and transmitted to one or more prompter/monitor read-outs mounted on or off camera. The prompter script appears as clearly defined copy. Both units are equipped with a remote hand control for easy operator control.
When used with the VPS Eye- Line, prompter copy is superimposed directly over the taking lens of the television camera for direct " EyeLo- Eye" contact with the viewing audience. The high brilliance image is clearly visible to the speaker but in no way detectable by the camera lens.
The adaptability of the VPS systems over conventional prompting equipment enables you to derive maximum returns both technically and financially because of the reduction in preparation of prompter copy and general running costs.
1VPS-300 Conveyor Transport
1Vidicon Camera w/lens
114" Prompter/Monitor
1Remote Hand Control
125' Coaxial Cable
1Prompter Camera Mount
1Camera Balancing Assembly
1VPS Eye- Line
1Instruction Manual
$5350.00
TWO VPS-300 PROMPTER SYSTEM
1VPS-300 Conveyor Transport
1Vidicon Camera w/lens
2 14" Prompter/Monitor
1Remote Hand Control
225' Coaxial Cable
2 Prompter Camera Mount
2 Camera Balancing Assembly
2VPS Eye- Line
1Instruction Manual
$7100.00
VC- 228
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COMPUTERPROMPTER SYSTEM
A DIVISION OF Ci-CO INDUSTRIES INC. 104 E. 25th St. New York, NY 10010 (212) 460-9050
too VPS-500
THE LIPS- 500
CePUTERPROPFTER
rROM o-TU. fi STOTE OF THE 08T
PRomPT iNG SYSTEM.
0- TU, THE LERDER
VPS-500 ComputerPrompter System
Features ·Word processing capability ·Easy-to- read font · Rapid access to all lines of copy ·The VPS-500 CumputerPrompter is implemented on the
Atari 800XL and 1050 Disk Drive ·Optional printer for hard copy ·Positive or negative display ·Variable speed control ·Multi- language ·Various fonts ·User friendly design
The VPS-500 ComputerPrompter is a new generation prompting system suitable for both production and news applications. The VPS-500 ComputerPrompter is designed to perform the three major functions of production
prompting.
1. Text Entry and Editing 2. Variable Speed Scrolling 3. Variable Fonts
The VPS-500 ComputerPrompter accomplished this and maintains basic simple operation. A prompter operator controls the operation of the VPS-500 with a variable speed control; can call up previous pages, future pages or
re- start present page. No cryptic codes are needed. This illustrates simple keystroke controls.
VPS-500 ComputerPrompter System 1 Computerprompter Mainframe 1 Disc Drive 1 VPS-500 Software Package 1 Variable Speed Script Control 1 Interconnecting Cable 1 Manual
VPS-500
$3600.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 229
PROMPTERS
A DIVISION OF Q -CO INDUSTRIES ,INC .
104 E. 25th St. New York, NY 10010 (212) 460-9050
MINI -Q-PROMPTER II
FEATURES
·Hi- Efficiency Optical Reading Surface for Easy-To- Read Copy ·Copy Reading Surface: 9-3/4" x9-5/8" ·7Lines of Text in Reading Area for " Complete Thought" Preview ·Shadow- Free Lighting Illuminated by Two 50W Hi- Intensity Lamps ·Script Capacity: 30 Feet ·No Special Paper Required. Uses Standard 8-1/2" Wide Bond
Paper
·The Compact Miniaturized Motor is " Sound- Take" Silent ·Miniature Variable Speed Hand Control Measures 4-1/2" x1" with
25' Cable · Universal Camera Mount ·Solid State Circuitry
·Power: 12V Battery- Pack Belt, 5Amps; or AC to DC Power Converter
·Weight: 9lbs. Less Mount
MINI Q PROMPTER QUANTITY
ITEM
1
Mini CIPrompter
1
Hand Control w/25' Ext. Cable
1
Camera Mount
1
Power Cable lunterminated)
1
Equipment Case
1
Instruction Manual
Mini Q Prompter Spare Parts
Hi- intensity Halogen Lamp DC Power Supply
PRICE $2595.00
12.00 150.00
MINI Q PROMPTER
Prompter Paper, Line Continuous form, 300' per roll Front Surface Mirror Optical See-Thru Hand Control w/25' Ext. Cable Power Cable lunterminated)
24.00
35.00 45.00 245.00 55.00
...TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SMALL PROFESSIONAL STUDIO
MVP 706 MINI VIDEO PROMPTER
FEATURES · Simple to Operate ·Compact and Realistically Priced ·Variable Speed Forward/Reverse Script Drive ·Vidicon Pick- Up Camera ·Can Be Located in the Control Room or Studio Floor · Houses a Lightweight 9" Prompter Monitor and Over- the- Lens
Beam-Splitter · Readable from Distances up to 8-10'
· Mounts with Adjustable Bracket onto the Camera Pan and Tilt Head
MVP 706
$ 3700.00
VC- 230
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
QuickSet
3650 VVoodhead Drive Northbrook, IL 60062 (312) 498-0700 Telex 72-4362
SYSTEM 2000 MODULAR TRIPOD
System 2000 was planned and built with the Broadcaster in mind. It will provide efficient, versatile service when used with any Electronic News Gathering ( ENG), Electronic Field Production ( EFP), or film camera. System 2000 is not only limited to broadcast applications. It will provide reliable, stable support for virtually any type of instrumentation requiring atripod: microwave transmissions, laser equipment and electro -optical equipment.
The Basic System 2000
System 2000 starts with aset of basic components: amulti- purpose mounting plate and extendable crutch legs. Revolutionary is the best word to describe the System 2000 mounting plate. Computerassisted design techniques have been used to create aplate which will accept either aball- base or pro junior base. This means that virtually any fluid head can be used without cumbersome or expensive adaptors. In addition, the plate will accept ageared elevation column module.
Crutch Legs -- Strong. Lightweight. Durable. Easy to extend and retract. The basic tripod height is 55" when fully extended, 33" when retracted. A precise calibration scale on each leg assures uniform extension on all three legs when required. Legs are equipped with non- slip rubber tip pads and are designed to accept System 2000's unique retractable spike tip module and or strut assembly.
"Quick- Lock" Leg Locking System -- The most extraordinary design feature of System 2000's crutch leg is its extension locking device. There are no knobs, twist mechanism or protruding handles to strip, freeze or break off on impact. An exclusive cam- action pressure plate assures apositive lock, even with heavy loads on the tripod. The pressure plate is activated and released with a simple, semi- recessed flip lever which has been human- engineered for easy use; even while wearing bulky gloves. The " Quick- Lock" system is astandard feature on all crutch leas.
MODULAR TRIPOD
' Pv.:11
4`>,. , MOUNTING PLATE
"QUICK- LOCK" LEG LOCKING SYSTEM
FIXED/ARM DOLLY
GEARED ELEVATION COLUMNS
Model
020007-1 02000T-3
Q2000D-3
Q2000- EC 02000 SS
Product Code
20010 20050
Description
TRIPODS (All tripods accept pro jr. & ball base heads as well as geared elevator column module. All tripods include extendable struts)
Full Size Calibrated Crutch Leg 75 Lb Cap
Baby Size Calibrated Crutch Leg 75 Lb Cap
22030
23010 22020
DOLLY (Standard non- extendable arms with non- removable 4" wheels and two axis locks)
Dolly
ACCESSORIES
Geared Elevator Column Assembly (Includes ieg brace/strut). 35 Lb Cap
Expandable Calibrated Strut
User Price
$525.00 515.00
170.00
245.00 50.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 231
QuickSet
3650 Woodhead Drive Northbrook, IL 60062 (31 2) 498-0700 Telex 72-4362
(GL) GUICKSET LIGHTWEIGHT
OIT LIGHTWEIGHT TRIPODS
OLT-1 95534 - 2section legs QLT-3 95542 - 3section legs GLT-5 95549 - 4section legs
Load Capacity
Up to 17 lbs.
(7.7 kg)
Height Extended
57" - 72"
(144.8 - 182.9 cm)
Height Telescoped
23" - 31"
(58.4 - 78.7 cm)
(Dependent on model)
Column Rise
16" (40.6cm)
Tilt Angle
60° up, 90° down
Pan Rotation
360°
Weight
7lbs. ( 3.2 kg)
All have anti-drop columns and counterbalanced heads included.
For remote or studio applications. Use with OLD- 1dolly for mobility.
OIT-7TRIPOD WITH STRUTS
OLT-7 95565
Load Capacity Maximum Height Minimum Height Column Height Weight
20 lbs. ( 9.1 kg) 57" ( 144.8cm) 29 'h" (74.9 cm)
16" (40.6 cm) 7lbs. (3.1 kg)
For location and studio work with video cameras. Furnished with Safety Pan/ Tilt Head.
LIGHT WEIGHT TRIPODS/TROLLEY/ HEADS/DOLLY
QLH-7 MINI FLUID HEAD
QLH - 772803
Load Capacity Tilt Angle Pan Rotation Dimensions Weight
15 lbs. ( 6.8 kg) + 1-90° 360° 4" x5" x6"
(10.2x 12 7x 15.2 cm) 45 lbs. (2.0 kg)
Model
QLT-1 OLT-3 OLT-5 OLT-7 OLT-9
OLT-11 OLT-13 OLT-15
OLD -1 DOLLY
QLD-1 95054
Load Capacity
50 lbs. (22.7 kg)
Wheel Size
4" x31."
w/brake ( 10.2 x1.9 cm)
Circle Diameter
35" (88.9 cm)
Folds to
4" x6" x19"
Weight
(10.2x 15.2 x48.3 cm) 8lbs. ( 3.6 kg)
Product Code
Description
95534 95542 95549 95565 95810
TRIPODS & TROLLEY (All include Spring Loaded Counterbalance Heads & Safety Columns)
Tripod. 2Section Legs Tripod, 3Section Legs Tripod, 4Section Legs Tripod, 2Section Legs w/Struts Trolley, Struts. 3" Wheels
User Price
$195.00 205.00 225.00 220.00 265.00
95000 95031 95065
LEGS- NO HEADS (Columns Are Safety Type)
Tripod w/o Column. 2Section Legs
Tripod w/Column. 3Section Legs
Tripod w/Column, Struts. 2Sec Legs (Suggested for OLH-7 Mini Fluid Head)
130.00 145.00
145.00
OLD- 1
95054
DOLLY Dolly,w/4" Wheels
100.00
QLT-9 TROLLEY
QLT-9 95810
Load Capacity
20 lbs. (9.1 kg)
Maximum Height
58 'h" (148.6 cm)
Minimum Height . . . 43-3/8" ( 110.2 cm)
Column Height Weight
16" ( 40.6 cm) 9'A lbs. (4.2 kg)
Wheel Circle
38" ( 96.5cm)
For location and studio work with video cameras. Furnished with Safety Pan/ Tilt Head.
OLH-7 OLH-9 OH- 11
OLCC
OIT-f7 OLT-19 OLT-21 OLT-23
72803 90504 90550
HEADS ONLY
Fluid Head, 10 Lb Cap., Use w/OLT-13 TV Head for Tripods OLT-13. 15 3D Photographic Head for Tripods OLT-13, 15
350.00 115.00 125.00
90055
ACCESSORIES
Carrying Case for QL Tripods (except OLT-9 and 21)
40.00
95580 95540 95581 95560
PHOTOGRAPHIC TRIPODS (All with 3- dimensional pan, tilt and side tilt heads)
" Elevator" 3Section Legs
" Stubby" 4Section Legs "HiBoy" 4Section Legs
"Litt" 3Section Legs (Manual Column Adjustment)
210.00 220.00 220.00
200.00
VC- 232
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
QuickSet
3650 Woodhead Drive Northbrook, IL 60062 (31 2) 498-0700 Telex 72-4362
MEDIUM WEIGHT TRIPODS/PEDESTALS/ COLUMNS/HEADS/DOLLIES
QM T-3 TRIPOD
(OM) CLUICKSET MEDIUM WEIGHT
(FORMERLY " SAMSON")
QMT-1 TRIPOD FOR ENG AND CINE
QMT-1 70150
Load Capacity Maximum Height Minimum Height Weight
70Ibs. ( 31.8 kg) 58"(147.3 cm) 32" ( 81.3 cm) 9lbs. (4.1 kg)
For ENG. EFP, and Cine applications. Use with fluid heads for studio or remote. Add OM dolly for mobility.
GMT -3 TRIPOD
0MT-3 73010
Load Capacity Maximum Height
Minimum Height Column Rise Weight
40 lbs. ( 18.2 kg) 76" ( 193 cm)
34"(86.4 cm) 18"(45.7 cm) 10 lbs. (4.5 kg)
A 3/4 size version is available under 73500.
Maximum Height Minimum Height
55" 1139.7 cm) 21"(53.3 cm)
For studio and remote applications. Use with any OM panhead and dolly.
CIMT-9 TROLLEY
OMT-9 74810
Load Capacity Maximum Height Minimum Height Column Rise Weight Wheel Circle
40 lbs. ( 18.2 kg) 54"(137.2 cm) 36" 191.4 cm) 18" ( 45.7 cm) 13 lbs. ( 5.9 kg) 34" ( 86.4 cm)
For studio applications. Use with any panhead.
QM H-5 CAM HEAD QM H-5 72300
Load Capacity
40Ibs. ( 18.1 kg)
Tilt Angle
30° up, 40° down
Pan Rotation Dimensions
360° 8 1 /2 "x6 1 / 2 "x 41/2 "
(21.6 s16.6x 11.5cm)
Weight
5lbs.(2.3 kg)
Mountings
Y." x20 Camera
Screw. Adjustable Fore and Aft
31 /2 "18.9 cm) Mounting surface
31 /2 "x6"(8.9 x15.2 cm)
3/8" x 16 mounting screw available on special order.
For studio and remote applications. Use with any OM tripod, pedestal or column.
QM T-1 TRIPOD
QM H-5 CAM HEAD
QMH-1 FRICTION HEAD
QMH-13 JUNIOR FLUID HEAD
Model
Product Code
Description
User Price
QM T-9 TROLLEY
OMT-1
OMT-3 op,0-5 OMT-7 OMP-1 QMT-9 OMC- 1
OMP-3 OMC-3
70150
73010 73500 73520 74500 74810 75810
78100 79000
TRIPODS. PEDESTALS, TROLLEY & COLUMNS
ENG,EFP Tripod- For use with OLH-7. OMH-19
OHH-19 or OHH-27 Tripod with Elevator
Size Tripod with Elevator F. Size Tripod with Elev 8 Spike Tips Mobile Pedestal Trolley Stationary Co:umn Unit Includes side arm 8 panhead Stationary Pedestal Elevator Column Unit ifor bench or cart mount)
$335.00 375.00 370.00 456.00 550.00 415.00
265.00 395.00 220.00
GM H FRICTION HEADS
Load Capacity Tilt Angle Pan Rotation Dimensions Weight
25-35 lbs. (11 4 - 15.9kg)
45° up, 90° down 360 °
51/2 "56 1/ 2 "56 1/ 2 " 114.1 x16.6x 16.6cm)
21/ 2 lbs. kg)
QM H-1 72011 Standard Counterbalance Spring ( 25 lb. cap.) QM H-3 72013 Heavy Duty Counterbalance Spring ( 35 lb. cap.)
3/8" x 16 mounting screw available on special order.
For Studio and remote applications. Use with any (1M tripod, pedestal or column.
OM H JUNIOR FLUID HEADS
Load Capacity
30 lbs. (13.6 kg)
Tilt Angle
+ /-85°
Pan Rotation
360°
Dimensions
4" x6" x6"
(10.2 x15 2 x15.2 cm)
Weight
70 lbs. ( 3.2 kg)
QM H-13 72850 Jr. Fluid Head with Pro Jr. Base QM H-15 72851 Jr. Fluid Head with Ball Base QM H-17 72852 Jr. Fluid Head with QM Column Base QM H-19 72853 Jr. Fluid Head with
Pro Jr. Base No 3/8" Stud (For use with QM T-1 ENG/EFP Tripod)
For ENG/EFP and Cine applications. Use with any GM tripod, pedestal or column.
OMH-1
OMH-3
0M1-1-5 OMH-7 OMH-9 OMH-11 OMH-13
72011
72013
72300 72411 72512 72612 72910
OLH- 1 OLH-3 OLH-5 OLH-7
72800 72801 72802 72803
OMH-13 OMH-15 OMH- 17 QMH - 19
72850 72851 72852 72853
OMD-1 OMD-CG
76010 76110
OSH-1
OM- SA
0M- ST 0M-HH
75081
75010
75110 75350
0MA-1 OMA-2 OMA-3 OMA-4
75450 75750 75760 75910
HEAD- FRICTION, CAM & GEAR TYPE
Friction Head w/Counterbalance Spring (Second Control Arm optional OSH-1) Friction Head w/Heavy Duty Counterbalance Spring ( Second Control Arm optional OSH-li Cam Head Still Head Geared Still Head Geared Movie Head Semi- Permanent Friction Head
FLUID HEADS - MINI W), Cap. 10 Lbs.)
Pro Jr Base Ball Base OM Column Base For use with OMT-1 ENG/EFP Tripod
FLUID HEADS - JUNIOR ( Wt. Cap. 30 Lbs.)
Pro Jr Base Ball Base OM Column Base For use with QMT-1 ENG/EFP Tripod
DOLLIES. CABLE GUARDS
Dolly- for use w,OMT-1 and OMT-3 Tripods Cable Guardi:for OMD-1 ISet of 3)
ACCESSORIES
Second Control Handle for Friction. Cam 8 Fluid Heads Side Arm- 12 Offset wistucl to accept Friction Cam 8 Fluid -leads Spike Tips ( Set of 3) Hi- Hat
ADAPTERS
QM Column to P.o Jr Base
OM Column to OH Panhead
OH Column to OM Panhead
Transit Adap>r ( ASA
x8Thread)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
176.00 185.00 465.00 190.00 325.00 305.00 120.00
350.00 395.00 370. 00 350 00
725.00 766.00 740.00 725.00
155.00 37.00
48.00 70.00 66.00 100.00
106.00 60.00 60.00 130.00
VC-233
QuickSet
3650 Woodhead Drive Northbrook, IL 60062 (312) 498-0700 Telex 72-4362
QHT-1 MOBILE PEDESTAL
HEAVY WEIGHT TRIPODS/PEDESTALS/ COLUMNS/HEADS/DOLLIES
%et
OH " SUPER- HYDRO"
FLUID HEAD
·
OH HYDRO FLUID HEAD
GHT-1 TRIPOD W/ELEVATOR
QHH-5 CAM HEAD
OH Et OX DOLLIES
(OH) QUICKSET HEAVY WEIGHT
GHT-1 TRIPOD WITH ELEVATOR QHT-1 53021
Load Capacity Maximum Height Minimum Height Column Rise Weight
150Ibs. ( 68.2 kg) 73" ( 185.4 cm) 33" (83.8 cm) 18" (45.7 cm) 19 lbs. (8.6 kg)
A 3/4 size version is available under OHT-3 53220
Maximum Height Minimum Height
55" ( 139.7cm) 26" ( 66.0 cm)
For studio or remote application. Use with any OH panhead. Dolly provides mobility.
GHP-1 MOBILE PEDESTAL QHP-1 54504
Load Capacity Maximum Height Minimum Height Weight
Wheel Circle
80Ibs. ( 36.4 kg) 56" ( 142.3 cm)
38" ( 96.5 cm) 35 lbs. ( 15.9 kg)
34" 186.4 cm)
For studio application. Use with any OH panhead.
QH AND OX DOLLIES QHD-1 56020
Load Capacity
500 lbs. (226.8 kg)
Wheel Size Diameter
4" x1"
(10.2 x2.5 cm) Wheel Circle Diameter . . 45" ( 114.3 cm)
Folds to
7"x 13"x 28"
(17.8 x33.0 x71.1 cm)
Weight
17 lbs. ( 7.7 kg)
The same dolly w/4" wheels is available in a3/4 size version under QHD-3 56100
QHH-23 FLUID HEADS - SUPER HYDRO QHH-23 52815
Load Capacity
50 lbs.
Tilt Angle
+ /-80°
Pan Rotation
360°
Dimensions
63/4 "x6"x 7"
(171 x152x 178cm)
Weight ( Incl. Handle)
10% lbs.
(4.9 kg)
QHH HYDRO FLUID HEADS
Load Capacity
40 lbs. ( 18.8 kg)
Tilt Angle
+ /-80°
Pan Rotation
360°
Dimensions
6" x5" x6"
Weight
(15.2 x12 7 x15.2cm) 85lbs. (3.9 kg)
QHH-13 52810 Hydro Fluid Head with Pro Jr. Base QHH-15 52811 Hydro Fluid Head with Ball Base
QHH-17 52812 Hydro Fluid Head with QM Column Base
QHH-19 52813 Hydro Fluid Head with Pro Jr. Base No 3/8" Stud (For use with QMT-1 ENG/EFP Tripod)
For ENG/EFP and Cine applications. Use with any OM tripod, pedestal or column.
QHH-5 CAM HEAD QH H - 552304
Load Capacity Tilt Angle Pan Rotation
Dimensions
80 lbs. ( 36.3 kg) 35° up, 45° down
360°
5" x9"x 10"
Weight
(12.7 x22.9 x25.4 cm) 21 lbs. ( 9.5 kg)
For studio and remote applications. Use with OH tripod and dolly for remote, OH and OX pedestals for studio work.
Model
01-1T-1 OHT-3 OHP-1 OHP-3 OHC-1
OHH-1 OHH-3 OHH-5
OHH-7
OHH-9 OHH -11
OHH-13 OHH-15 OHH-17 OHH-19
OHH-21 QHH-23 OHH-25 OHH-27
OHD-1 OHD-3 OHD-CG OHD-5 OHD-7
OSH-1 OSH-2 OH-WPA
OH- ST QH-HH OH-CX OH- 01 OH- 02
OH- MS OH-MSB
QHA-1 QHA-3 PHA- 5 OHA-7 OXA-9 OXA-11
Product Code
Description
User Price
53021 53220 54504 58001 59001
52021 52211 52304
52330
52611 52926
TRIPODS, PEDESTALS, COLUMNS
Tripod with Elevator i. Tripod with Elevator Mobile Pedestal Stationary Pedestal Elevator Column Unit Ifor bench mount)
HEADS- FRICTION, CAM & GEAR TYPE
Friction Head Geared Head Cam Head. Wt Cap 80 Lbs (Second Control Arm Optional OSH-21 Cam Head. Wt Cap 140 Lbs (Second Control Arm Optional OSH-2I Dualok Video Head Calibrated Pan A Tilt Head Verniers on Pan 8 Tilt
$740.00 725.00 980.00 656.00 480.00
480.00 700.00
770.00
1065.00 630.00
1485.00
52810 52811 52812 52813
52814 52815 52816 52817
FLUID HEADS - HYDRO (W). Cap. 40 Lbs.)
Pro Jr base Ball Base OM Column Base For use with 0MT-1 ENG/EFP Tripod
995.00
1040.00 1025.00
995.00
FLUID HEADS - SUPER HYDRO (Wt. Cap. 50 Lbs.)
Pro Jr Base Ball Base OM Column Base For use with OMT- IENG/EFP Tripod
1275.00 1320.00
1305.00 1275.00
56020 56100 56120 56160 56450
75081 55040 65920
55110 55310 55810 57500 57510
59750 59800
55410 55860 55861 55901 69010 69020
DOLLIES, CABLE GUARDS
Full Size Dolly. 4 Wheels "i. Dolly. 4 Wheels
Cable Guards for QHD-1 or OHD-3 Dollies 1.Dolly. 8 Wheels w/Cable Guards Full Size Dolly. 8 Wheels w/Cable Guards
ACCESSORIES
Second Handle for all Fluid Heads Second Handle for OHH-5. 7 Wedge Plate and Adapter Assembly for OHH-5. 7Heads Spike Tips Hi- Hat Column Extension. 18' Quick- Or Instrument Mount. Wt Cap 60 Lbs Quick- Or Instrument Mount. Wt Cap 20 Lbs
MICROSCOPE STAND
Microscope Stand with Tilt Head Base For Above
ADAPTERS
OH Column to Pro Jr Base OH Head to Mitchell Adapter OH Column to Mitchell Base Transit Adapter ( ASA 3'2 n8Thread) OH Head to OX Column OH Column to OX Panhead
430.00 430.00
65.00 825.00 835.00
48.00 60.00
300.00 65.00
135.00 70.00
175.00 160.00
400.00 55.00
115.00 135.00 135.00 115.00
60.00 60.00
VC-234
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without IJotice.
QuickSet
EXTRA HEAVY WEIGHT TRIPODS/ PEDESTALS/COLUMNS/HEADS/DOLLIES
3650 Woodhead Drive Northbrook, IL 60062 (312) 498-0700 Telex 72-4362
(0X) QUICKSET EXTRA HEAVY WEIGHT
QXT-5 TRIPOD WITH ELEVATOR
QXT-5 63020
Load Capacity Maximum Height Minimum Height Weight
200 lbs. 190.7 kg) 85" ( 215.9 cm) 42" ( 106.7cm) 42 lbs. ( 19.1 kg)
A 3/4 size version is available under 63120.
Maximum Height Minimum Height
65" ( 165.1 cm) 30" ( 76.2 cm)
QX MICROWAVE RELAY TILT HEAD
For studio and remote applications. Use with any OX panhead.
QXT-3 HEAVY DUTY FIELD/STUDIO TRIPOD
QXT-3 60450
Load Capacity Maximum Height Minimum Height . Weight
4001bs. ( 181.8 kg) 42 1/2 " ( 108 cm)
25-5/8" ( 64.8 cm) 24 lbs. ( 10.9 kg)
dritallew
Model
OXT-1 OXT-3 OXT-5 OXT-7 OXP-1 OXP-3 OXP-5 OXP-7
OXH-5 OXH-7
QXP-1 MOBILE PEDESTAL
QXP-1 64500
Load Capacity Maximum Height Minimum Height Weight Wheel Circle
200 lbs. (90.7 kg) 60" ( 152.4 cm)
42" ( 106.7 cm) 96 lbs. ( 43.5 kg)
38" (96.5cm)
QX CAM HEAD For remote and studio applications. Use with OX Field Tripod for remote work.
Use with counterbalance pedestal for studio work.
Product Code
Description
User Price
TRIPODS, PEDESTALS, COLUMNS
60420 60450
Heavy Duty Feld/Studio Tripod w/Soike Tips. Wt Cap 400 Lbs
Heavy Duty Field/Studio Tripod Wt Cap 400 Lbs
63020 63120
Tripod with Elevator 3 /4 Size Tripod with Elevator
64500
Mobile Pedestal
64850 Counterbalance Pedestal. WI Cap 150 Lbs
64860'
Counterbalance Pedestal, Wt Cap 260 Lbs
68000
Stationary Pedestal with Elevator
990.00 880.00 1.360.00 1,350.00 2,380.00 4,120.00 5,350.00 910.00
62050
62225 62302
62922 62926
HEADS
Microwave Relay/Tilt Head (Control handle OCH-M optional)
Geared Head Cam Head. Heavy Duty, Wt Cap 35 Lbs (Wedge Plate Adapter included)
Geared Head w/Calibrated Pan. Calibrated Till
Geared Head w/Calibrated Pan w/Vermer. Calibrated Tilt w/Vernier
735.00 1.350.00
2,350.00 1,820.00
2,070.00
OHD-1 OHD-7 01-10- CG
56020 56450 56120
DOLLIES AND CABLE GUARDS
Full Size Dolly. 4" Wheels Full Size Dolly. 8" Wheels and Calve Guards Cable Guards for OHD-1
OX-WPA OX- WP OCH-M OSH-5 OX- ST OX-HH OX-CX
65701 65901 65330 65350 65110 65310 66810
ACCESSORIES
Wedge Plate Adapter Wedge Plate Handle for Relay/Till Head Telescoping Right Control Handle kir OX Cam Head Spike Tips ( Set 0(31 Hi- Hal Column Extension, 18
QXP-5 COUNTERBALANCE PEDESTAL
QXP-5 64860
Load Capacity Maximum Height
Minimum Height Doorway Width Steering Wheel Die. Weight
260Ibs. ( 118.2 kg) 57" ( 144.8cm)
36" ( 91.4 cm) 38 1/2 " (97.8 cm)
30" ( 76.2 cm) 596 lbs. ( 270.9 kg)
For studio application Use with OX Cam or Cradle Heads.
ADAPTERS
OSA- 1
65810
Adapter (or Mitchell Type Camera Base to CM Column
OSA- 3 OXA-5
65840 65850
Spacer Adapter. Between OXH-5 and CIXT-1 or 3 Adapter CMH-3. 7 9Panhead lo Ota-1. 3or OXP-5
OSA- 7
65910
Transit Adapter ( ASA 3.2' x8Thrkadl
OSA- 9
69010
OH Head to OX Column
OSA- Il
69020
OX Head to OH Column
'Additional Counterweights- 40 By, ISpeedy Pcidestal Code Number) aSS 00 ,Ln
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
430.00 835.00
65.00
170.00 110.00
65.00 100.00
80.00 130.00
80.00
130.00 156.00 150.00 130.00
60.00 60.00
VC- 235
QuickSet
CCTV ACCESSORIES
3650 Woodhead Drive Northbrook, IL 60062 (312) 498-0700 Telex 72-4362
Model
Product Code
Description
User Price
PAN AND TILT DRIVES AND ACCESSORIES
ENVIRONMENTAL - MEDIUM DUTY ( Integrated System; Pre- Wired for Power, Lens & Video Functions)
OPTMAS-24
56100
Complete integrated system consisting of pan/tilt driver. camera housing and wall mount. Pre- wired -- For loads 1030 lbs 24VAC Autoscan ( Use with OJAS-24 control.) $1.345 00
OPTM-24 OPTMAS-115
56200 56500
OPTM-115
56600
Same as above -- 24VAC Non- Autoscan (Use with OJ- 24 control.)
Complete integrated system consisting of pan/tilt driver. camera housing and wall mount. Pre- wired -- For loads to 30 tbs. 115VAC Autoscan ( Use with OJAS-115 control-)
Same as above-115VAC Non-Autoscan ( Use with 0J-115 control.)
1.27000 1.34500 1,270 00
INDOOR - LIGHT DUTY
Model ORFD-500
Product Code
PAN/TILT SCANNERS
Description
47670
For RF- Duplex Transmitter/Receiver Required RF Duplex Link - 5 Mi
User Price
6,000.00
OPT15-24
07500
INDOOR WITH AUTOSCAN 24VAC operation for laids to 15 lbs ( Use with OPAS- 15 or WAS- 15 Controls.)
ENVIRONMENTAL - MEDIUM DUTY (Pre- Wired for Power, Lens & Video Functions)
405 00
ORFD· 600
47671
RF Duplex Link . 20 Mr
7.200.00
RADIATION RESISTANT ( 10° Rad.)
CIPT9ORR- 115
58310
RADIATION RESISTANT . 115VAC operation for loads
lo 90 lbs ( Use with OJ- 115 control.)
2.460 00
CIPT3OAS-24
57920
OPT30·24 OPT3OAS-115
57930 57900
OPT30-115
57910
WEATHERPROOF WITH AUTOSCAN · 24VAC operation for loads to 30 lbs Pre- wired ( Use with OJAS- 24 control.)
WEATHERPROOF - 24VAC operation for loads to 30 lbs Pre mred ( Use with 0,1.24 control )1.035.00
WEATHERPROOF WITH AUTOSCAN · 115VAC upef ¡limn ! or loads to 30 lbs Pie Wired ( Use with OJAS 115 control )1100.00
WEATHERPROOF - 115VAC operation for loads to 30 lbs Pre- wired ( Use with 0J.115 control.)00
1.100.00 1.035
ACCESSORIES FOR ABOVE WHEN OWEIM-18 (Wall Mount) IS NOT USED
OECM-30 OEGM-30
57990 57995
ENVIRONMENTAL CONNECTOR MODULE ENVIRONMENTAL GLAND MODULE
60 00 40 00
ENVIRONMENTAL - HEAVY DUTY
OPT9OAS - 115
58000
WEATHERPROOF WITH AUTOSCAN · 115VAC operation for loads to 90 lbs ( Use with OJAS-115 control 1
1550 00
OPT2OORR - 115
56015
RADIATION RESISTANT 115VAC operation for loads to 200 lbs ( Use with 0J-115 control )
· Available in higher capacity and/or stainless steel on special order
4.500 00
· Autoscan available on special order
· 24 VAC available for OPT9ORR on special order.
PRESSURIZED
OPT9OP - 115 OPT500P-115
59220 60020
PRESSURIZED · 115VAC operation for loads up to 90 lbs ( Use with OJAS-115 control.)
PRESSURIZED - 115VAC operation for loads up to 5C0 lbs ( Use with OJAS500-115 control.)
· Available in stainless steel on special order.
· Autoscan available on special order.
3,350.00 4.725.00
BULLET PROOF (STOPS 7.62mm ROUND)
OPT500BP - 115
60070
BULLETPROOF WITF1AUTOSCAN 115VAC operaton for loads up to 500 lbs ( Use with OJAS-500 115 ) 5 100 00
OPT90- 115 OPT9OAS-24 OPT90-24 OPT9ODC- 115 OPT900C-24
59210 58100 59215 59200 59000
WEATHERPROOF 115VAC operation for loads to 90 lbs ( Use with 0J-115 control )
WEATHERPROOF WITH AUTOSCAN · 24VAC operation for loads to90 lbs ( Use with OJAS-24 control)
WEATHERPROOF · 24VAC operation for loads to 90 lbs ( Use with OJ-24 control )
WEATHERPROOF - 115VDC operatron for loads up to 90 lbs ( Use with OJDC- 115 or OJDCVS- 115 controls )
WEATHERPROOF · 24VDC operation for loads up to 90 lbs ( Use with OJDC-24 or OJDCVS-24 controls
1460 00 1550 00 1460 00 1550 00 1600 00
ENVIRONMENTAL - SPECIAL HEAVY DUTY, BULLETPROOF (Integrated System)
OBPC-500
68000
BULLETPROOF - integrated system consisting of pan tilt driver, camera housing and wall/pole mount Pre- wired -- For high security bulletproof requirements.
115VAC with Autoscan ( Use with OJAS500-115 control)
9.00000
CIBPCDC-500
68500
Same as above -- 115VDC variable speed available (Use with 0J500-DC115 or 0J500DCVS-115 control)
9.00000
PAN AND TILT DRIVE ACCESSORIES
ENVIRONMENTAL - EXTRA HEAVY DUTY
P30
58620
Presets/Potentiometers for all 30 lb capacity units
190 00
CIPT200 - 115
56000
WEATHERPROOF WITH AUTOSCAN · 115VAC
operation for loads up lo 200 lbs ( Use with 0J-115 or OJAS- 115 controls )
OPT200DC-115
56050
WEATHERPROOF - 115VDC operation for loads up to 200 lbs ( Use with OJDC- 115 or OJDCVS-115 controls
ENVIRONMENTAL - SPE CIAL HEAVY DUTY
3.15000 4 100 00
OPT500-115
60000
WEATHERPROOF WITH AUTOSCAN · 115VAC
operation for loads up to 500 lbs ( Use with 0,1500-115 or OJAS500- 115 controls )
3.675 00
P90 P2500 ATP- 3090
ATP- 2500
SSDC
58600 60203 58610
60201
59300
Presets/Potentiometers for all 90 lb capacity units
Potentiometers for all 200 and 500 lb capacity units
Arctic Temperature package for all 30 lb and 90 lb capacity units ( Includes heater , insulation and special lubrication )
Arctic Temperature package for all 200 and 500 lb capacity units ( Includes heaters, insulation and special lubrication )
Sector Scan kit for all DC Pan/Tilt Drives
195 00 300 00
255 00
475 00 160 00
OPT500DC- 115
60050
WEATHERPROOF · 115VDC operation for loads up to 500 lbs ( Use with 0J500- DC 115 or 0.1500DCVS 115 controls '
ANTENNA POSITIONER -HARD WIRE CONTROL
4 45000
SCANNERS
LIGHT DUTY ( FOR INDOOR USE)
OLS-115
06000
INDOOR SCANNER 115VAC operation for loads to 20
OPT500AP
65000
WEATHERPROOF 115VDC operation for antenna
lbs ( with 6-h line cord)
150 00
paL:kages u, , ,nd loading to 500 lbs (Complete assembly includes Pan/Tilt Drive. Joystick Control with Variable Speed. Azimuth/Elevation Indicators. Poten-
OLS-24
06500
INDOOR SCANNER 24VAC operation for loads to 20 lbs ( Use with OLSAP-24 control )
150 00
OPT500APT
65001
tiometers and Power Supply.)
7.025 00
RF/TELEPHONE/TWISTED PAIR CONTROL
WEATHERPROOF - 115VDC operation tor Antenna
Package or wind loads up to 500 lbs ( Complete
assembly includes pan/tilt driver, push button
azimuth/elevation control with variable speed. digital
azimuth/elevation readout, potentiometers and power
supply
' 0000 OP
MEDIUM DUTY ( FOR INDOOR/OUTDOOR USE) - Pre- Wired for Power, Lens & Video Functions
OESM - 115 OESM - 24
06010 06015
WEATHERPROOF SCANNER 115VAC Operation for loads lc 30 Os we 66 cord)
WEATHERPROOF SCANNER 24VAC operation for loads to 30 it's ( Use with OESAP-24 control )
595 00 605 00
VC- 236
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
QuickSet
CCTV ACCESSORIES
3650 Woodhead Drive Northbrook, IL 60062 (312) 498-0700 Telex 72-4362
Model
Product Code
HEAVY DUTY
OESH-115
08000
OESH-24
08010
Description
User Price
WEATHERPROOF SCANNER - 115VAC operation for loads to 90 lbs ( with 6- ft line cord).
WEATHERPROOF SCANNER· 24VAC operation for loads to 90 lbs ( Use with OESAP-24 control.)
630.00 650.00
SCANNER ACCESSORIES
Preset/Potentiometer, Arctic Package
OUOTE
VIDEO SWITCHERS ( Manual)
TERMINATED
OTM4 OTM8 CITM12
41040 41080 41120
4- Position Pushbutton 8- Positron Pushbutton 12- Positron Pushbutton
LOOPING
OLM4 OLM8 OLM12 ORM-H ORM-F
42040
4- Position Pushbutton
42080
8- Position Pushbutton
42120
12- Positron Pushbutton
44000 · Rack Mount Option for 4/8 Positron Switchers
44002 · Rack Mount Option for 12 Position Switchers
81 00 137 00 179 00
110 00 156 00 205 00 35 00 30 00
OSD-1
Model
Product Code
Description
MAXIMUM SECURITY, VANDAL PROOF, BULLETPROOF
OMSH
00706
MAXIMUM SECURITY 8
x30"
Any length, width, height ayadaole on special order
User Price
2200 00
ENVIROGARD - FOR EXTREME HEAT CONDITIONS
OEGH
00713
SOLID STATE THERMOELECTRIC COOLING
SYSTEM 40' FdFferentral GC,11,19
side contamination System Jr-crudes camera housing,
thermostat. sungueld ana separate power SUOPIY- WOrkS
on 115.60Hz or 220,50Hz. Internal
8" _x8" 78"
8.500 00
VIDEO SWITCHERS ( Automatic)
HOMING
OHS2 OHS4 OHS6 OH58 OHS12
BRIDGING
44020 44040 44060 44080 44120
2- Position 4- Positron 6- Positron 8 - Position 12- Position
219 00 235 00 284 00 326 00 423 00
SECURITY DOME - INDOOR DISCREET HOUSING
CISD-1 OVC-1 CIVC-2 OVC-3 OFP-1 OTR-1 OPK-1 OWK-1
00900
Indoor Security Dome Holier-9
00910
Coiled Video Cab:e (JHF :o 1_114:)
00920
Coded Video Catde ( UHF to BNC)
00930
Coded Video Cabe ( BNC to BNC)
00940
Acrylic finishing pa:es
00950 'rim kit for hard cradogs
00960
Pendant kit
00970
Wall mount kit
430 00 25 00 25 00 25 00 70 00 70 00 6000 110 00
OBS4 OBS6 OBS8 OBS12
46040 46060 46080 46120
4- Positron 6- Positron 8- Position 12- Position
262 00 305 00 358 00 455 00
LOOPING
OLS2 OLS4 OLS6 OLS8 OLS12 ORM-H ORM-F
45020
2- Position
45040
4- Position
45060
6- Position
45080
8- Positron
45120
12- Position
44001 · Rack Mount · Option for 2/4/6/8 Positron Switchers
44002 · Rack Mount · Option for 12 Positron Switchers
241 00 273 00 332 00 380 00 481 00
35 00 30 00
HOUSINGS AND ENCLOSURES
INDOOR
OITH
27100
INDOOR THEFTPROOF ( 5" x7" x20")
90 00
WEATHERPROOF
OEH-S CIEH-M OEH-L
00700 00800 00805
SMALL ENVIRONMENTAL 6" x6" x22" MEDIUM ENVIRONMENTAL 8" x7" x25" EXTRA LONG ENVIRONMENTAL 8" x7" x36"
170 00 260 00 380 00
PRESSURIZED
OPH-8 OPH-10
00703 00704
PRESSURIZED 8" diameter PRESSURIZED 10" diameter Any diameter and length evadable on Special order
1000 00 250 00
BULLETPROOF (STOPS 7.62mm ROUND)
OBPH
00705
BULLETPROOF 8" x7" x30" Any length width, height available on speoa order
1500 00
HOUSING ACCESSORIES
HEATER AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLIES
OEHH-115 OEHH-24 OPH-H OBP-H
00735 00737 00746 00747
HEATER AND THERMOSTAT assembly or OEH-S. -M, -L ( 115/AC
HEATER AND THERMOSTAT assembly "Jr OEH.S. - L (24VACt
HEATER AND THERMOSTAT assernhly for OPH-8 and OPH - 10.
HEATER AND THERMOSTAT assembly for OBPH and OMSH
BLOWER AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLIES
OEHB-115 OEHB-24 013H- B
00736 00738 00748
BLOWER AND THERMOSTAT assembly 'or ÜEH S LI t 115-JACi
BLOWER AND THERMOSTAT asserrraly 'or
M
24 4C)
BLOWER AND THERMOSTAT asserrraly 'or uí3P ,iir. ,10MSH
60 00 60 00 80 00 80 00
70 00 70 00 105 00
SUNSHIELD ASSEMBLIES
OEHS-S CIEHM-S CIEHL-S CIPH8-S OPH1O-S OMSH-S
00725 00825 00835 00749 00750 00751
SUNSHIELD for OEH-S SUNSHIELD for OEH-M SUNSHIELD for OEH-L SUNSHIELD for OPH-8 SUNSHIELD tor OPH-10 SUNSHIELD for OBPH ar dOMS'-1
WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER ASSEMBLIES
OEHS-W OEHS-WW OEHML-W OEHML-WW
00711 00712 00752 00753
WINDOW WIPER axcescnrk fcr OE H.5 WINDOW WASHER a=esso4 for OEH-S· WINDOW WIPER accrespry lor OEH-M a'c10E.-1-L WINDOW WASHER accessory kor CIEH-M and OEH L
60 00 70 00 80 00 80 00 90 00 95 00
160 00 145 00 185 00 180 00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-237
QuickSet o
CCTV ACCESSORIES
3650 Woodhead Drive Northbrook, IL 60062 (312) 498-0700 Telex 72-4362
Model
Product Code
Description
User Price
LOW TEMPERATURE INSULATION
OEHS-I OEHM-I OEHL-I
00726 00826 00836
INSULATION for OEH-S INSULATION for OEH-M INSULATION for DEFI-L
TAMPER PROOF LOCKS
OEHSL
00734
SECURITY LOCKS ( 2Keys) for OEH-S. - M. - L
ACCESSORIES
GICS-RB
00715
CAMERA SUPPORT· Riser block for cameras with low optical axis For use with ALL camera housings
55.00 60.00 65.00
45.00
20.00
MOUNTING ACCESSORIES
WALL MOUNTS
INDOOR DECORATIVE AND INDUSTRIAL
01B- CS10 01B-40 01B- D
17700 17800 17900
LIGHTWEIGHT, INDOOR 10 lb. capacdy (Adjustable Baia
MEDIUM WEIGHT, INDOOR - 40 lb. capacity ( Pan and Tilt Head included)
DECORATIVE, INDOOR for OPT15-24, OLS- 115 and OLS-24 hidden wall mount.
16 00 30 00 18 00
MONITOR MOUNT
OMM OMM- A
19033 19034
MONITOR MOUNT 00 lb capacity For most monitors up lo 21"
ADAPTER for Wall Mounting
OUTDOOR INDUSTRIAL
180 00 60 00
OWBM-18 OWCB-12 OWCB-18
OWCB-24
17500 17412 17418
17424
ENVIRONMENTAL WALL MOUNT- For Dan/lit drivers 57920. 57930. 57900. and 57910
ENVIRONMENTAL WALL AND CEILING MOUNT (12" long)
ENVIRONMENTAL WALL AND CEILING MOUNT (18" long)
ENVIRONMENTAL WALL AND CEILING MOUNT (24" long)
75 00 65 00 85 00 90 00
COLUMN MOUNTS - HEAVY DUTY
OCM-12 OCM - 24 OCM - 48
17403 17404 17405
HEAVY DUTY FLOOR AND CEILING FIXED MOUNTS 12" long For medium and heavy duty Pan/Tilts or Scanners
HEAVY DUTY FLOOR OR CEILING FIXED MOUNT 24" long For medium and heavy duty Pan/Tilts or Scanners
HEAVY DUTY FLOOR OR CEILING FIXED MOUNT 48" long For rned,urn and heavy duly Pari Tilts or Scanners
65 00 90 00 160 00
PAN/TILT HEAD FOR MOUNTS AND COLUMNS
OPH
15502
HEAVY DUTY PAN/TILT HEAD tor OWC13·12. -18. - 24 mounts and OCM- 12. - 24. - 48 Allows 360 ° rotation and .180° tilt
60 00
MOUNTING ACCESSORIES
OCM OS M
19022 17401
CORNER MOUNT Allows all mounts to be Itzed to 90° au/side corner
SIDE MOUNT · Enables medium and heavy duty Paw Tilts and Scanners to be used with all mounts and columns in standard positron when inverted positioning is not acceptable
35 00 40 00
CONTROLS (Single- Hardwire)
All controls are desk lop in halt or full rack size ( except OPAS -15 indoor pan/tilt control and OLSAP-24 indoor scanner control As ageneral rule. all AC controls ( 115VAC or 24 VAC) are in the 134" · sslim-line" height. DC controls are 3v2" in height. For rack mounting " slimline" controls two one-half rack size controls can be combined together with provided hard-
ware. Rack mounting " ears" are available under model WORM- H to convert ahalf rack size desk unit to arack mounted configuration and ORM-F converts afull width desk toP unit or the combination of two half rack size units to arack mounted configuration
Code Key... 31/2" = 31/ 2 "high unit 134" = 134" high unit
H = V2" rack size F = Full rack size
MOUNTING BRACKETS
Model
Product Code
Description
User Pries
FOR PAN AND TILT DRIVES
OPAS -15 OJAS-15 0.1-24 0.1-115 OJAS-24 OJAS - 115 OJDC-115 OJDCVS-115 OJDC - 24
36800 37810 37510 37500 37800 37700 38200 38300 38320
Paddle Switch (Autoscan) for OPT15 (24VAC) ( Desk top only)
Joystick (Au:oscan) tor OPTS (24VAC) [ 134". H]
Joystick ( Non-Autoscan) for OPT30. OPT90, OPT200 (24VAC) [ 134", 11)
Joystick ( Non-Autoscan) for OPT30. OPT90, OPT200 (115VAC)I1 3 /4 ". H)
Joystick (Autoscan) for OPT30. OPTS°. OPT200 (24VAC) [1 34", H]
Joystick (Auloscan1 tor OPT30. OPT90, OPT200 (115VAC) [ 134". HI
Joystick (Non-Autcscan) for OPT90 ( 115VDC) [31/ 2 ". H]
Joystick ( Non-Autoscan) Venable Speed For OPT90 (115VDC) (31 /2 ". H)
Joystick (Non- Autoscan) for OPT90 (24VDC) [31/ 2 ",
16500 245 00
325.00
250 OC
350 00
270 00 270003
35000
41000
CIJDCVS-24
0.1500-115 CIJDC500-115 OJAS500-115 OJDC500VS-115
ORMC-H ORMC-F
38330
Joystick ( Non-Autoscan) Variable speed. Foi OFT90 (24VDC) [3Y2'. H)
37501
Joystick (Non· Autoscan) tor OPT500(115VAC)[31/ 2 ".
38201
Joystick ( Non·Autosc.an) for CIPT500 ( 115VAC) [31/ 2 ",
37701
Joystick (Autoscan) for OPT500 ( 115VAC) [31/ 2 ". H]
38301
Joystick ( Nan- Autoscan) Venable Speed. for OPT500 (115VDC) [31 /2 ". Fr]
52508 · Rack Mount Option for Controls
52507 · Rack Mount Option for Controls
490112 330 LID 500 DD 395 OD
760 LLD 35no 30410
FOR SCANNER DRIVES
OLSAP-24 OESAP-24
45400 45500
Paddle Switch (Autoscan) for OLS Indoor Scanner (24VAC) ( Desk top only]
Paddle Sw tch (Autoscan) for DES Environmental Scan. ners ( 24VAC) ( 11A'. kl)
9000 16500
FOR MOTORIZED LENSES
OZ LC CIZLC-Al
42500 42600
PADDLE SWITCH Control for all OulckSet Motorized Zoom Lenses Provides separate zoom, locus and iris functions 13 1 /2 " H or 13 /4 ". I-I)
PADDLE SWITCH - Incorporates Automatic Ins control for OuickSet " Spot - Lenses along with separate zoom and focus lunctions ) 3vs".
e Instruct factory to combine with Joystick into single ha width contro if desired If not specified, lens control wit come as a " stand -soie" in a half width desk top enclosure
18500 470-CD
MISCELLANEOUS SINGLE CONTROLS
OWWC OAEM
46510 47000
WASHER/WIPER CONTROL at console panel HI
AZIMUTH/ELEVATION METERS at console panel (Potentiometers P30 P90 or P2500 must be installed in the Pan/Tilt drivers ) ) 31 /2 ". 1-1)
90 CO 450 CD
VC-238
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
QuickSet
CCTV ACCESSORIES
3650 Woodhead Drive Northbrook, IL 60062 (312) 498-0700 Telex 72-4362
Model
Product Code
Description
User Price
Model
Product Code
Description
User Price
CONTROLS ( Multiple)
MULTIPLE DRIVE CONTROLS
FOR OPERATION OF MORE THAN ONE UNIT WITH A SINGLE CONTROL
OMP6-24 OMP6V-24 OMP6-115 OMP6V-115
45010 45015 45011 45016
CONTROL, UP TO 6 PAN AND TILTS COMBINED WITH ZOOM LENS FUNCTIONS. Features joystick with autoscan. lens functions with speed control and 6 pushbutton site select 24VAC [ In rack mount I
1150 00
CONTROL, UP TO 6 PAN AND TILTS COMBINED WITH ZOOM LENS FUNCTIONS. Same as above with
video switching
1400 00
CONTROL, UP TO 6 PAN AND TILTS COMBINED
WITH ZOOM LENS FUNCTIONS. Features Joystick with autoscan. lens functions with speed control and 6 pushbutton site select. 115VAC [ In rack mount
990 00
CONTROL, UP TO 6 PAN AND TILTS COMBINED WITH ZOOM LENS FUNCTIONS. Same as above with video switchino
1.24000
OMP4S-24 OPM4S-115 QMS6-24 QMS6-115
45001 45002 45501 45510
CONTROL, UP TO 4 PAN AND TILT COMBINED WITH ZOOM LENS FUNCTIONS. Features joystick zoom lens control and independent ( select) control for each site Use with any 24VAC pan/tilt [ In rack mount
CONTROL, UP TO 4 PAN AND TILT COMBINED WITH ZOOM LENS FUNCTIONS. Features toystick. zoom lens control and independent ( select) control for each site Use with any 115VAC pan tilt ( In rack mount I
CONTROL. UP TO 6SCANNERS ( INDOOR AND/OR WEATHERPROOF). Drives OLS 24 OESM 24 OESH-24 pn rack mount]
CONTROL, UP TO 6 SCANNERS ( WEATHERPROOF). Drives OESM.115. and OESH- 115 [ In rack mount )
890 00 870 00 680 00 590 00
DUAL STATION CONTROLS
FOR OPERATION OF A SINGLE PAN/TILT DRIVE FROM TWO REMOTE LOCATIONS
ODS-NA ODS-AS
46550 46560
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING A PAN/TILT COMBINED WITH ZOOM LENS. Consists of two separate uots Combines joystick and zoom lens controls Identical con. trois at each of two locations Use with either 24VAC or 115VAC pan/tilt fIn rack mount ]
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING A PAN/TILT WITH AUTOSCAN COMBINED WITH ZOOM LENS. Consists of two separate units Combines pyStICk with autoscan and zoom lens controls Identical controls at each of two loca Sons Use with either 24VAC autoscan or 115VAC autoscan pan/alt
1250 00 1,325 00
COAXSET SYSTEM
RECEIVER
OLVS-R
46730
RECEIVER · One required at each remote site 115VAC required for receiver operation
465 00
CONTROL OF UP TO 5 REMOTE SITES FROM TWO SEPARATE CONTROL SITES - FOR EXTRA LONG RUNS
OLVS-MS
48150
SYSTEM CONTAINS THE SAME ELEMENTS AS THE QLVS-10 for 5Pan/Tilt Sites from two separate con. trot panels Receiver OLVS-R required at each remote site
QUOTE
ZOOM LENSES
MOTORIZED ZOOM
1- INCH FORMAT
017-102M 016-160M
70003 70014
17.102mm Fast, II 8, 6X 16.160mm Fes:, II 8,10X
740 00 1,790 00
./3- INCH FORMAT
012-75M 011-90M 010-100M 017-102M 016-160M
70004 70006 70008 70003 70014
12 5.75mm Fast. fl 8. 6% 11.5-90mm Fast, fl 8. 8X 10-100mm Fas: 11.8, 10X 17.102mm Fast. fl 8. 6X 16.160mm Fast, 11.8. 10X
MOTORIZED ZOOM WITH SPOT FILTER
1- INCH FORMAT
017-102MS 016-160MS
70012 70015
17-102mm Fast, II 8, 6X 16-160mm Fast, 118, 10X
660.00 870.013 1,200 00 740.00 1,790.00
940 00 1,860 00
1A- INCH FORMAT
012-75MS 011-90MS 010-100MS 017-102MS Q16-160MS
70005 70007 70009 70012 70015
12 5.75mm Fast. 118, 6X 11 5.90mm Fast, 118, 8X 10-100mm Fes:, fl 8. 10% 17-102mm Fes:. fl 8. 6% 16 160mm Fast fl 8 10X
MOTORIZED ZOOM WITH SPOT FILTER AND AUTO IRIS
1- INCH FORMAT
017.102MSI 016-160MSI
70013 70016
17-102mm Fag, 118. 6X 16-160mm Fast, 118, 10X
720.00 1.000.00 1250.00
940.00 1.860.00
1090 00 1950 00
TRANSMITTERS - CONTROL OF MULTIPLE REMOTE SITES
2/3-INCH FORMAT
OCST-8
49080
CONTROL OF 8PAN/TILTS WITH AUTOSCAN AND ZOOM LENS FUNCTIONS. Fea],Jres JO,SCP, a .>. aUtOSCan zoom focus iris and lour auxiliary funcbons (In rack mount )
745 00
012-75MSI 011 - 90MSI 010-100MS1
70010 70011 70017
12 5.75mm Fast. fl 8. 6X 11 5.90mm Fast. fl B. 8X 10.100mm Fast, II 8. 10X
800 00 1150 00 1350 00
TRANSMITTER - CONTROL OF ONE REMOTE SITE
OCST-1
49010
CONTROL OF A SINGLE PAN/TILT WITH AUTO.
SCAN AND ZOOM LENS FUNCTIONS. Features Joystick with autoscan zoom focus rss ano our aux diary functions. ( 13 /4 ", hi)
630 00
017-102MSI 016-160MSI
70013 70016
17-102mm Fast. II 8. 6X 16 160mm Fasi fl 8 10X
VIDEO SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
1090 00 1950 00
RECEIVER
OCS-R
49500
RECEIVER · One required at each remote site Specify 24VAC or 115VAC pan/tilt when ordering 115VAC rewired for receiver
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEM ( 12VDC)
675 00
ODA
OVMD ODTG
50000
50300 50211
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER One in, four out with input loop-througi capability Provides cable equalization for long runs
VIDEO MOTION DETECTOR
DATE/TIME DISPLAY GENERATOR Month/Day/ Year/Hour/Minute/Second are displayed on the video monitor
205 00 440 00
450 00
CONTROL OF UP TO 10 REMOTE SITES - FOR EXTRA LONG RUNS
MISCELLANEOUS
OLVS-10
46810
CONTROL OF 10 PAN/TILTS WITH AUTOSCAN AND ZOOM LENS FUNCTIONS UP TO 10,000 FEET. Featuresjoystick with autoscan zoom focus iris camera
power and 10.site rotary select System is addressable Latching memory for autoscan and camera power functions Allows cost effective long distance runs with small gauge wire Use with all 115VAC Pan/Tilt Drivers Remote Box required at each site [ In rack mount I
685 00
RELAY BOXES FOR LONG DISTANCE CONTROL
ORB- 1 ORB- 2 ORB- 3
46750 46760 46770
RELAY BOX for remote contrui of OLS.24 and 01.715-24
RELAY BOX for remote control of OESM-24.0ESH-24, OPT30.24, OPT3OAS.24, OPT90.24, OPT9OAS-24
RELAY BOX fnr remote control of OPTDC- 24
240,00
330.00 365 00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-239
RCA CLOSED-CIRCUIT New Holland Avenue
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Lancaster, PA 17604-3140 (717) 397-7661
CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO EQUIPMENT
TC1005
1" CAMERAS FOR HIGH PERFORMANCE
TC1005 CAMERA FAMILY Standard Vidicon Cameras 600,000:1 Light Range ( Supplied less lens).
Model TC1005/01 1
Optional ther Price 9
995
Dealer Cost
1 - 4 670
5.24 650
25 625
TC1005/01F e
995
670
650
625
Description
High p·Aormence comer.. 800 Ilnee resolution. 1 separate mesh, magnetic focus vidlcon. Internal. 65.170 sync Accept. . sternal 118V drive. sync or compoelte video for Genteel. 24 0, 60 Ha version of TC1005/01
LOW LIGHT CAMERAS 1" Ultricon II ' -- 3.67 x10 ' : 1Light Range with f/1.4 to f/1200 Lens.
Leas Lens or With Fixed Len '
TC1005/U01 1 1725
1155
TC 1005/ U9 TC1005/1/12 TC1005 ,1./24 IC1005/1/49 TC1005,u74
2030 1945 1930 1935 1990
1360 1310 1292 1297 1333
1110
1315 1265 1247 1252 1288
1065
1270 1220 1202 1207 1243
UltrIcon II ¡Silken Tergel) union el TC10115)01 less lens.
Wan 9 0 rnrn lit 4 LIM the lenS WM. 12 5 mm 1,14 auto Ins lens With 25 mm PI 4 auto ins lens Wrth 50 mm PI 8 auto ins lens Min 75 met t,t 8 aum Ins sens
With Zoom Lene and Auto- Iris Controller. Factory Installed and Adlusted
TC1005/U06
3250
2175
2130
2085
TC1005 ,U01 Ultricon II ( Solkon Target) camera won 17 5-105 rnrn ( 6,01,1 8 zoom lens won spot filter and
separate TC1430 Controller
TC1005/UR6
3250
2175
2130
2085
Same as TC1005/U06 but wall TC143OR Control Uno mounted on carnera
TC1005/U10 1 3800
2545
2495
2450
Some as TC1005/U06 but with 16-160 mm 110s l1,18 lens Includes TC1430 Controller
TC1005/URO
3800
2545
2495
2450
Some as TC1005/U10 but with TC14306 Control Uno
TC1005/URE
6400
4270
4115
3960
Some as TC1005/1.106 but yeah 15-150 mm ( 101,1 It, 8 lens. integral remotely controlled extender ( 23 5-235 mm t29) and TC14308 Control Una on Camera
The IC T030 Controller Is for desk top or la kmount Use et hard tetrad systems 01.10 00011 Coln one conlr011er per camera
The 7C143011 Control unit la mo oled on the camera Use trt long need-wired systeme or wolh twotted·pair control systems A separate ontroller such as VIO0C d rester a ) VIO8C for URE camera. m use twisted- pad control system
Will. Auto-Irle Zoom Lens, Factory Installed I Adjusted INo remote Iris control)
TC1005/UT6
2795
1875
1830
1785
TC1005/1101 Ultr¡con II ( Sillcon Target) camera with 17 5-105 mm ( eel 1,18 Auto- Ins Zoom lens
TC1005/UTO 1 3350
2245
2195
2150
Some as TC1005/UT6 but wall 16-160 mm ( 10.11,1 8 lens
TC1005/U12 1 3725
2495
2445
2400
Same as TC1005/UT6 but with 15-180 non ) 1241 el 9 lens
NOTES: Cameras are 120V, 60Hz. For 24V, 60Hz version add suffix " F" to model number (same price). 1. For Newvicon cameras tube type 4906 ( S40761, change " U" to " N" in model number
and add $ 10.00 to cost.
2. Crystal control available on Special Order for basic cameras without lens ( shown in bold type). Add suffix " C" to model number and add $ 10.00 to cost. Crystal control models do not have Line Lock feature. Contact RCA for minimum quantity requirements for factory installed lenses on crystal controlled models.
3. Pre- position addition ( VPPL) available on models indicated. Add suffix " P" to model number and add $240.00 to cost. Other types may be available with pre- position. Contact RCA for requirements.
4. "UT-" cameras require aseparate controller such as the V1002F. If length of run exceeds 1000 ft. use arelay box or asuitable control system.
TC1006
1" CAMERA FAMILY
TC1006 CAMERA FAMILY -- LOW LIGHT LEVEL SYSTEMS · Prepackaged in Integral Environmental Housing
· Designed Tested to Military and Space Environmental Standards
·Round- the- Clock Service
·Three Camera Tube Options
· Factory Assembled, Adjusted and Pressurized
Signal- to- Noise FET low noise amplifier. Better than 43dB.
Automatic Beam Control ( ABC) Eliminates need for periodic readjustment of beam throughout life of camera tube.
Gamma Correction Internally adjustable from 1.0 to 0.7 for enhanced grey- scale rendition.
Video Output 1.1 V p- p composite. Internally adjustable. Fixed lens models have two isolated outputs at 75 ohms. Zoom lens models have one output at 75 ohms.
Auto Black plus Keyed Clamp maintains constant pedestal setup over entire operating range.
Sync EIA RS- 170 in 60Hz models or CCIR in 50Hz models. Phaselocked loop synchronizes camera to power line zero- crossing. Crystal control option available.
Genlock Accepts negative 4V p- p composite sync ( 1to 6V p- p) and negative 4V p- pH Er V drives ( 3to 6V p- p). Will also lock onto composite video. Internal sync in/out and HiZ/75 ohm termination selection.
WITH FIXED LENS Ultricon II Camera Tube ( Newvicon -- see note below)
Model
TC1006/U12 TC1006/U24 TC1006/U49 TC1006/U74
Optional Uur Price 8
2490 2460 24130 2515
Dealer Cost 9
1 - 4
1670 1650 1650 1685
5-24
1620 1800 1600 1635
25 ·
1570 1550 1550 1585
Deuription
TC1005/U01 camera unth 12 5 mm auto Ins lens with biter Same as TC1C06/U12 but wan 25 mm lens Same as TC ,0013/U12 but uth 50 mm1ens Same as TC1006/U12 but wan 75 mm lens
WITH ZOOM LENS
TC10013/U26
3515
TC10136/U20 1 TC1006/U22 1
4395 4070
2345
2930 2715
2270
2870 2645
2195
2800 2570
TC1005/U01 camera wont 17 5-105 mm g6x) I/ 18 room lens with spot Idler
Same as TC1006/U26 but van. 16-160 mm ( 10v) f / 18 lens Same as TC1006/UZ6 but with 15-180 1120) f/1 9 lens
NOTES: 1. For Newvicon camera tube, type 4906 ( S4076), change " U" to " N" in model number
and add $ 10.00 to cost. 2. " UZ-" cameras require aseparate controller such as the V100ZF. If length of run
exceeds 1000 ft. use of a relay box or asuitable control system is recommended. 3. Pre- position addition ( VPPL) available on lens types indicated. Add suffix " P" to
model number and add $250.00 to cost. Other types may be available with pre- position. Contact RCA for requirements.
·Sunshield, TC1366 available, $75.00 User Price.
·For crystal control add suffix " C" to model number and add $ 10.00 to cost.
·For High Impedance Sync input add " M" to model number and $ 10.00 to cost.
VC-240
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
RCA CLOSED-CIRCUIT New Holland Avenue
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Lancaster, PA 17604-3140 (717) 397-7661
CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO EQUIPMENT
TC1040/H ISIT CAMERAS FOR ULTRA LOW LIGHT LEVEL
Intensified Silicon Intensifier Target ( ISIT) Cameras for Ultra Low Light Level Applications Using RCA 16mm low bloom silicon intensified target camera tubes with additional intensifier section. Supplied with factory installed/adjusted zoom or fixed focal length auto iris lenses with spot filters.
TC1040 SERIES - HIGH PERFORMANCE ISIT CAMERAS Cameras include a remote lens control where applicable.
TSP.
Price S
Description
TC1030/H
TC1030/H SIT CAMERAS FOR VERY LOW LIGHT LEVEL
Silicon Intensified Target ( SIT) Cameras for Very Low Light Level Applications. Using RCA 16mm low bloom silicon intensified target tubes. Supplied with factory installed/adjusted zoom or fixed focal length auto iris lenses with spot filters.
TC1030 SERIES - HIGH PERFORMANCE SIT CAMERAS Cameras include a remote lens control where applicable.
Type
Price $
Description
TC1030/H06
TC1030/F108 TC1030/H10 TC1030/HR6
TC1030/HR8 TC1030/HRO TC1030/HRE
7160
7650 8625 7160
7650 8625 10000
TC1030/1-112 TC1030/H24 TC1030/H49 TC1030/H74 TC1030/H
6900 6825 6825 6900 6650
With 18-108 mm ( 8%) 1/1.8 zoom lens. Includes separate TC1430 remote lens controller. Same as above with 18-144 mm ( 8X) 1/2 0 zoom lens
Same as above with 16-160 mm ( 10X) f/1 8zoom lens
With 18-108 mm ( 8%) 1/1.8 zoom lens. Includes camera mounted TC143OR remote control unit. Same as above with 18-144 mm ( 8X) 1/2.0 zoom lens
Same as above with 16-160 mm ( 10X) 1/1. 8zoom lens Includes 15-150 mm ( 10%) 1/1.8 lens with Integral remotely controlled extender ( 23.5-235 mm 1/2.9) and camera mounted TC143OR remote control unit. Use V108C controller. With 12.5 mm 11.4 used local length lens. Same as above with 25 mm 11 4 fixed lens
Same as above with 50 mm 1/1 8fixed lens
Same as above with 75 mm 1/1.8 fixed lens
Less lens. Available on special order for use In constant low light level applications.
TC1036 SERIES ENVIRONMENTALIZED HIGH PERFORMANCE SIT CAMERAS Auto Iris function controlled by lens/camera electronics. Cameras do
not include a remote lens control.*
TC1040/H06
9270
TC1040/H08 TC1040/H10 TC1040/HR6
9800 10750
9270
TC1040/HR8 TC1040/HRO TC1040/HFIE
9800 10750 12200
TC1040/1.112 TC1040/H24 TC1040/H49 TC1040/H74 TC1040/H
9050 8975
8975 9050
8800
With 18-108 mm ( 8%) 1/1.8 zoom lens. Includes separate TC1430 remote lens controller.
Same as above with 18-144 mm ( 8X) 1/2 0 zooms lens Same as above with 16-160 mm ( 10X) 1/1 8zoom lens
With 18-108 mm 61() 1/1.8 zoom lens. Includes camera mounted TC143OR remote control unit. Same as above with 18-144 mm ( 8X) 1/2 0 zoom lens Same as above with 16-160 ram ( 10X) 1/1.8 zoom lens
Includes 15-150 mm ( 10%11/1.8 lens with Integral remotely controlled extender ( 23.5-235 mm, 1/2.91 and camera mounted TC143OR remote control unit. Use V108C controller. With 12.5 mm 1/1.4 fixed local length lens. Same as above with 25 mm 1/1 4 fixed lens
Same as above with 50 mm 1/1 8 fixed lens Same as above with 75 mm 1/1 8fixed lens Less lens. Available on special order for use in constant low light level applications.
Supply Voltage Options
24V, 60Hz 24V, 50Hz 220V, 50Hz 12VDC, 60 fps IRS- 170) 12VDC, 50 fps ( CCIR)
Type Designation Suffix
Add Suffix F Add Suffix FX Add Suffix X (TC1034 Series only) Add Suffix DC ("C" indicates crystal control) ITC1034 Series only) Add Suffix DCX ("C" indicates crystal control)
Remote Control Description - For Zoom/Auto-Iris Lenses
TC1430 Rack or Desk Top Controller Can be used with up to 1000 feet of AWG-18 4- wire cable between
controller and camera.
TC143OR Camera Mounted Control Unit a) Permits long cable runs of up to approximately one mile when used with 4- wire controller such as RCA or Vicon V100C. b) Accepts output from 6-wire Modupulse or 4- wire bipolar receivers used with twisted- pair control systems. C) Can also be used with any external switch closures or relays when such a control system is used, i.e. TC1600 and TC1700 microprocessor controls.
DUMMY CAMERAS
TC1036/HZ6 TC1036/HZ8 TC1036/HZ0 TC1036/HZ2 TC1036/H12 TC1036/H24 TC1036/H49 TC1036/H74
7720 8170 9180 9480 7500 7415 7415 7500
With 18-108 mm ( 15X) 11.8 zoom lens. Same as above with 18-144 mm ( 8X) 120 zoom lens Same as above with 16-160 mm 110X) 11 8 zoom lens Same as above with 15-180 mm ( 12X) f1 9 zoom lens
With 12.5 mm 11.4 fixed focal length lens. Same as above with 25 mm It 4 fixed lens Same as above with 50 mm 1/1.8 fixed lens. Same as above with 75 mm 11 8 fixed lens
TC1501/D TC1502/D TC2011/D
TC2012/D
TC2055/D
60
Dummy TC1501 with pilot light, no lens, 120 VAC, 60 Hz
60
Dummy TC1502 with pilot light. no lens, 24 VAC, 60 Hz
75
Dummy TC2011 Integral power supply format ( 120 V) and
pilot light. ( Also use as TC2511 Dummies ) No lens
75
Dummy TC2012. Integral power supply format ( 24V) and
pilot light. ( Also use as TC2512 Dummies.) No lens
70
Also use as TC2021. TC2022. TC2521, and TC2522
Dummies
NOTE: Order lens separately.
TC1034 SERIES - LOW COST SIT CAMERAS Auto Iris function controlled by lens/camera electronics. Cameras do
not include a remote lens control.*
SURVEILLANCE KITS
Everything required for a CCTV Surveillance setup in one, low cost, convenient package. Includes a2/3" Vidicon Camera, a16mm Lens, a
TC1034 HZ6 TC1034 HZ8
6015 6425
With 18-108 mm ( 61011.8 zoom lens. Same as above with 18-144 mm 18X) f20 zoom lens
9" RCA Monitor, aCamera Wall Mount, 100 feet of connecting cable and necessary connectors.
TC1034/HZ0 TC1034/1-1Z2
7250 7550
Same as above with 16-160 mm 110X) f18 zoom lens Same as above with 15-180 mm ( 12X) 11 9 zoom lens
Model
Price s
Description
TC1034/H12 TC1034/H24 TC1034/H49 1-C103 4 /1-174
5200 5200 5200 5200
With 12.5 mm 11.4 fixed local length lens. Same as above with 25 mm 11 4 fixed lens Same as above with 50 mm1/1.13fixed lens Same as above with 75 mm 11 8 fixed lens
NOTE.
For zoom focus where applicable, use V100ZF controller or twisted pair remote control
KIT1551 KIT1552
455
120 V TC1501 16 camera and 9 monitor Use where 120
VAC power is available at both the camera and mondor
locations
465
2.: VTC1502/16 camera. 24 Vtransformer and 9" rnondor
Use where 120 VAS power is available only at the monitor
systems such as RCA TC1600 or TC1700 Series.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-241
RCA CLOSED-CIRCUIT New Holland Avenue
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Lancaster, PA 17604-3140 (717) 397-7661
CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO EQUIPMENT
TC1500
TC1500 LOW-COST 2/3" CAMERA FAMILY
STANDARD VIDICON CAMERAS ·500 Line Resolution · RS- 170 Sync, 2:1 Interlace ·200,000:1 Light Range · Separate Mesh Vidicon
Model
Price 5
Description
TC1501 TC1501/8 TC1501/16 TC1502 TC1502/8 TC1502/16
198 258 216 198 258 216
120 V, 80 Hz. With 8 mm 1/1.6 lens ( no iris) With 16 mm 1/1.6 lens ( no iris)
24 V, 60 Hz version of TC1501. With 8 mm1/1.6 lens (no iris) With 16 mm 1/1.6 lens ( no iris)
ULTRICON III LOW LIGHT CAMERAS 660,000:1 Light Range with f / 1.4 to f/360 Auto Iris Lens
TC1501/U TC1501/U8 TC1501/U16 TC1502/U TC1502/U8 1C 1502/U16
670 895 860 670 895 860
Ultricon III version of TC1501, Type 4875U, 120 V, 60 Hz. With 80 mm 1/1 , 4auto iris lens With 16 mm (/ 1.4 auto iris lens
24 V, 60 Hz version of TC1501/U. With 8.0 mm 1/1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mm 1/1.4 auto iris lens
FIXED LENSES FOR TC1500 LOW LIGHT CAMERAS
Auto- iris lenses providing performance and economy for awide range of CCTV applications with connectors installed for ease of installation. Includes built-in spot filter that extends upper range to a minimum of f/360.
FIXED
TC1805/M TC1810/M TC1816/M TC1809/M TC1812/M TC1824/M TC1849/M TC1874/M
305 230 195 310 235 210 215 270
2/3" format EX 5.7 mm 1/1.4.
" " " "
EX 8.0 mm1/1.4. EX 16 mm 1/1.4.
1" format EX 9.0 mm 1/1.4 ( also usable on 2/3" cameras).
" "
EX 12.5 mm 1/1.4.
" "
ES 25 mm f/1.4
"
ES 50 mm f/1.8
"
ES 75 mm f/1.8 "
NOTES: TC1500 Series cameras and monitors may be combined to obtain best quantity price.
Zoom lenses not recommended for use on TC1500 Series Cameras,
FIXED LENS FOR 2/3" VIDICON CAMERAS
Model
TC1886 TC1888
Optional User Price 5
18
60
Description
2/3" format 16 mm 1/1.6 standard ( no iris) 2/3" format 8mm 1/1.6 wide angle ( no iris)
DIGITAL MOTION DETECTOR
MODULAR, ONE TO SIXTEEN CHANNELS
Model
Price 5
Description
TC1465
TC1465
2500
TC1465CM TC1465K8
975 1635
Modular. Accepts 1to 16 channel modules (TC1465CM). 896 detection points programmable in up to 7separate zones in each channel. On- screen alarm signal, sequence, alarm follower and status monitor outputs.
Single camera channel module. Up to 16 per TC1465.
Keyboard Control Unit for TC1465.
TC1450 VIDSCAN
TELEPHONE LINE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM · FOR CCTV APPLICATIONS
TC1451
3900
Phone Line Transmission (PLT) Transceiver.
TC4600 FIBER OPTIC LINK
FIBER OPTIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM. Best Cable Transmission System for: · Long Distance · Eliminates Lightning Damage · Eliminates Ground Loops · Color Compatibility
14611 TC4612 TC4601PS
375 375
23
Transmitter. Receiver. Power Supply, 120 V, 50/60 Hz.
FIXED AND ZOOM LENSES FOR LOW LIGHT CAMERAS
Auto- iris lenses providing performance and economy for awide range of CCTV applications. Includes built-in spot filter that extends upper range to a minimum of f/360.
FIXED
TC1805 TC1810 TC1816 TC1809 TC1812 TC1824 TC1849 TC1874
305 230 195 310 235 210 215 270
2/3" format EX 5.7 mm 1/1.4. EX 8.0 mm 1/1.4. EX 16 mm f/1.4.
1" format EX 9.0 mm f/1.4 (also usable on 2/3" cameras) EX 12.5 mm 1/1.4 ES 25 mm V1.4 ES 50 mm 1/1.8 ES 75 mm 1/1.8
ZOOM'
TC1841A
690
2/3" format 12.5-75 mm ( 6x) 1/1.8.
TC1846 TC1843
1095 1700
11-110 mm ( 10x) 1/1.6. 1" format 15-180 mm ( 125)1/1.9 (also usable on 2/3" cameras).
NOTES: Prices are for lenses purchased separately, less connector. 1. For zoom lenses use V100ZF controller or a suitable control system. 2. Zoom lenses not recommended for use on TC1500 Series cameras.
VC- 242
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
RCA CLOSED-CIRCUIT New Holland Avenue
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Lancaster, PA 17604-3140 (717) 397-7661
CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO EQUIPMENT
TC2000 STANDARD 2/3" CAMERA FAMILY
·2/3" Magnetic Focus and Deflection Vidicon
·RS- 170 Sync ·Gamma Correction- Internally Selectable ·Composite Video Output Level Control ·Automatic Beam Control ( ABC) ·2:1 Interlace, Precision Line Locked at Zero Crossover ·Accepts External Drive ·Automatic Light Control Adjustable for Peak/Average Response ·Genlock with Automatic Internal/External Switching
·Auto Track Electronic Focus ·Auto Black Plus Keyed Clamp · 10:1 Automatic Gain Control ( AGC)
STANDARD VIDICON CAMERAS Type 8844 Separate Mesh Vidicon 400,000:1 Light Range ( including
10:1 AGC).
Model
Price S
Description
TC2011 TC2011/8 TC2011/16 TC2012 TC2012/8 TC2012/16 TC2021 TC2022 TC2055/C
290 350 308 290 350 308 290 290 290
integral power supply, 120 V, 60 Hz, no lens. 2 With wide angle 8 mm 1/1 6 lens (no iris) With standard 16 mm 1/1.6 lens ( no iris)
Integral power supply, 24 V, 60 Hz, no lens. 2 With wide angle 8 mm 1/1.6 lens (no iris) With standard 16 mm f/1 6 lens (no iris)
Separate power supply, 120 V, 60 Hz, no lens. 2 Separate power supply, 24 V, 60 Hz, no lens. 2 12 VOC camera ( 10.5 - 16 MCI crystal control, no lens.
LOW LIGHT LEVEL CAMERAS Ultricon Ill Camera Tube - Type 4833U ( Newvicon Camera Tube ' ) 2.6 x 10 6 Light Range with f/1.4 to f/360 Auto Iris Lens, including
10:1 AGC.
TC2011/U TC2011/U8 TC2011/U16 TC2012/U TC2012/U8 TC2012/U16
790 1015
980 790 1015 980
Integral power supply, 120 V, 60 Hz. 2 With 8.0 mm 1/1.4 auto ins lens With 16 mm 1/1 4auto iris lens
Integral power supply, 24 V, 60 Hz. With 8.0 mm 1/1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mrn 11.4 auto iris lens
LOW LIGHT LEVEL CAMERAS Ultricon Ill Camera Tube - Type 4833U ( Newvicon Camera Tube 1 ).
TC2021/U TC2021/U8 TC2021/U16 TC2022/U TC2022/U8 TC2022/U16
790 1015
980 790 1015 980
Separate power supply, 120 V, 60 Hz. With 8.0 mm 1/1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mm 1/1.4 auto iris lens
Separate power supply, 24 V, 60 Hz. 2 With 8.0 mm f/1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mm 1/1.4 auto iris lens
12 Volt DC Models - Crystal Control Only
TC2055/UC TC2055/U8C TC2055/U16C
790 1015
980
12 VOC camera ( 10.5 - 16 VDC) crystal control. With 8.0 mm 1/1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mm f/1.4 auto iris lens
POWER SUPPLIES FOR CAMERAS
Model
TC2011PS TC2012PS TC2021PS TC2022PS TC2511PS TC2512PS
Optional User Price $
33 33 33 33 33 33
Description
For TC2011 Camera. Integral format. 120 V, 60 Hz. For TC2012 Camera. Integral format. 24 V, 60 Hz. For TC2021 and TC2521 Cameras. Separate unit. 120 V, 60 Hz. For TC2022 and TC2522 Cameras. Separate unit. 24 V, 60 Hz. For TC2511 Camera. Integral format. 120 V, 60 Hz. For TC2512 Camera. Integral format. 24 V, 60 Hz.
TC2000
FIXED AND ZOOM LENSES FOR TC2000 LOW LIGHT CAMERAS
Auto- iris lenses providing performance and economy for awide range of CCTV applications with connectors installed for ease of installation. Includes built-in spot filter that extends upper range to a minimum of
f/360.
FIXED
Model
Price $
Description
TC1805/D2 TC1810/02 TC1816/02 TC1809/D2 TC1812/D2 TC1824/D2 TC1849/D2 TC1874/02
305 230 195 310 235 210 215 270
2/3" format EX 5.7 mm 1/1.4
""
EX 8.0 mm I/1 4
"
EX 16 rnm 1/1.4
1" format EX 9.0 mm 1/1.4 (also usable on 2,3 cameras)
EX 12.5 mm 1/1.4
"
ES 25 mm1/1.4
ES 50 mm 1/1.8
"
ES 75 mm 1/1.8
ZOOM 3
TC1841A/D2 TC1846/D2 TC1843/D2
690 1095 1700
2/3" format 12.5-75 mm ( 6e) f/1.8. 11-110 mm ( 10x)1/1 6.
1" format 15-180 mm (12x)1/1.9 ( also usable on 2/3" cameras).
NOTES: TC2000 Series and Monitors may be combined to obtain the best quantity price.
1. For Newvicon camera tube type 49051S4075) change " u" to " N" in model number
and add $ 10.00 to cost. Allow for extended lead time when ordering.
2. Crystal control available on Special Order. Allow for extended lead time when order-
ing. Add suffix " C" to model number and add $ 10.00 to cost 1TC2055 is crystal control only). Crystal control models do not have Line Lock feature.
3. For zoom lens use V100ZF controller or a suitable control system.
OPTIONS FOR TC2000 SERIES Camera Identifier - TC2300 Series Use TC2000 series model number except change second numeral to "3", i.e., TC2312/U16. Add $60.00 Optional User Price.
CAMERA TUBES
4532/U 4833/U 4848 4875/U 4904 4905 4906 8541 8844
425 350
57 375 390 365 440
75 50
NOTES:
1. Adjustment Code M5
1" Ultricon Il Silicon Target) for TC1005/U01 Series. 2/3" Ultricon ill for TC2000/U and TC2500/U Series. 2/3" standard vidicon for TC1500 Series. 2/3" Ultricon III for TC1500/U and former TC1000/U Series. 2/3" Newvicon for TC1500/N Series. 2/3" Newvicon for TC2000/N and TC2500/N Series. 1" Newvicon for TC1005/N01 Series. 1" standard vidicon for TC1005/01. 2/3" standard vidicon for TC2000 and TC2500 Series.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-243
RCA CLOSED-CIRCUIT New Holland Avenue
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Lancaster, PA 17604-3140 (717) 397-7661
CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO EQUIPMENT
FIXED AND ZOOM LENSES
FOR TC2500 LOW LIGHT CAMERAS
Auto- iris lenses providing performance and economy for awide range of CCTV applications with connections installed for ease of installation. Includes built-in spot filter that extends upper range to aminimum of f/360.
FIXED
Model
Price S
Description
TC2500
TC2500 PREMIUM 2/3" CAMERA FAMILY
ALL THE OUTSTANDING FEATURES AND CAPABILITY OF THE TC2000 SERIES PLUS: ·Resolution Capability to 700 Lines ·25% Higher Sensitivity ·Better Signal- to- Noise Ratio ·AGC On/Off Switch - External ·Phase Adjustable Line Lock - External ·New Attractive Finish
STANDARD VIDICON CAMERAS Type 8844 Separate Mesh Vidicon Light Range 500,000:1 ( including 12:1 AGC).
Model
Price S
Description
TC1805/D2 TC1810/D2 TC1816/D2 TC1809/D2 TC1812/D2 TC1824/D2 TC1849/D2 TC1874/02
305 230 195 310 235 210 215 270
2/3" format EX 5.7 mm I/1.4.
"
EX 8.0 mm 111.4.
" " 1" format
EX 16 mm 1/1.4.
EX 9.0 mm f/1.4 ( also usable on 2/x· cameras)
" "
EX 12.5 mm I/1.4
"
ES 25 mm 1/1.4 "
"
ES 50 mm 111.8
-
ES 75 mm1/1.8
ZOOM 3
TC1841A D2 TC1846 ,D2 TC1843/D2
690 1095 1700
2/3" format 12.5-75 mm ( 6x) (/ 1.8
"
11-110 mm ( 10e) f/1 6
1" format 15-180 mm ( 12x) (/ 1.9 ( also usable on 23" cameras).
NOTES:
TC2500 Series and Monitors may be combined to obtain the best quantity price.
1. aFonrdNaedwdvi$c1o0.n00catmoecroastt.ube type 4905 ( S4075) change " U" to "N" in model number
2. Crystal control available on Special Order. Add suffix " C" to model number and add
$10.00 to cost. Crystal control models do not have Line Lock feature.
3. For zoom lens use V100ZF controller or a suitable control system.
OPTIONS FOR TC2500 SERIES Camera Identifier - TC2600 Series
Use TC2500 series model number except change second numeral to
"6", i.e., TC2612/U16. Add $60.00 Optional User Price.
TC2511 TC2511/8 TC2511/16 TC2512 TC2512/8 TC2512/16 TC2521 TC2521/8 TC2521/16 TC2522 TC2522/8 TC2522/16
337 397 355 337 397 355 337 397 355 337 397 355
Integral power supply, 120 V, 60 Hz, no lens. 2 With wide angle 8 mm 1/1.6 lens ( no iris) With standard 16 mm 1/1.6 lens ( no iris)
Integral power supply, 24 V, 60 Hz, no lens. 2 With wide angle 8 mm f/1.6 lens ( no iris) With standard 16 mm1/1.6 lens ( no iris)
Separate power supply, 120 V, 60 Hz, no lens. 2 With wide angle 8 mm 1/1.6 lens ( no iris) With standard 16 rnm 1/1.6 lens ( no iris)
Separate power supply, 24 V, 60 Hz, no lens. , With wide angle 8 mm 1/1.6 lens ( no iris) With standard 16 mm f/1.6 lens ( no iris)
LOW LIGHT LEVEL CAMERAS Ultricon Ill Camera Tube - Type 4833U ( Newvicon Camera Tube 13.1 x10 ° : 1Light Range with f11,4 to f/360 Auto Iris Lens.
TC2511/U TC2511/U8 TC2511/U16 TC2512/U TC2512/U8 TC2512/U16
855 1080 1045
855 1080 1045
Integral power supply, 120 V. 60 Hz. 2 With 8.0 mm f/1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mm f/1.4 auto ris lens
integral power supply, 24 V, 60 Hz. 2 With 8.0 mm f/1.4 auto iris lens
With 16 mm 1/1.4 auto iris lens
LOW LIGHT LEVEL CAMERAS Ultricon Ill Camera Tube - Type 4833U ( Newvicon Camera Tube ' I
TC2521/U TC2521/U8 TC2521/U16 TC2522/U TC2522/U8 TC2522/U16
855 1080 1045
855 1080 1045
Separate power supply, 120 V, 60 Hz. 2 With 80 mm f/1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mm 1/1 4 auto iris lens
Separate power supply, 24 V, 60 Hz. 2 With 80 mm f,.1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mm I/1.4 auto iris lens
TC900 MINISYSTEMS
AN ECONOMICAL AND ATTRACTIVE ENTRY TO CCTV SURVEILLANCE Available as asingle package including one Video Monitor/Sequential Switcher capable of handling up to three cameras and one Mini CCTV 2/3" Vidicon Camera with a16mm, f/1,6 lens ( no iris) and auniversal camera mounting bracket. Easy to install and operate. A single, user supplied, coaxial cable between the camera and monitor supplies power from the monitor to the camera and video from the camera to the monitor. Expandable.
Model
Price S Description
TC951
740
TC901
260
TC901N
645
TC931
TC901PS TC901PSDC
285
118 118
Basic MiniSystem. Includes Monitor/Switcher and one TC901 Camera with lens and mounting bracket. ( Can handle 3cameras.)
2/3" Vidicon Camera with 16 mm, 1/1.6 lens ( no iris) and universal camera mounting bracket. ( TC1888 8mm, f/1.6 wide angle lens ( no iris) available.
2/3" Newvicon Camera with universal camera mounting bracket. Auto Iris lens required. Order separately. ( 8.5-1625-50 mm lenses recommended Expansion Unit. Extends capabilities of Monitor/Switcher to handle atotal of six cameras.
Power Supply, 120 V, 50/60 Hz.
Power Supply, 12 VDC.
TC800 VIDEO PRINTER
Intant printed copies of video pictures on your monitor or from your Video Recorder. This compact thermal printer produces positive or negative prints. It has adjustable video level and contrast and gives approximately the same resolution as aTV receiver.
TC800 TC801
595 27
Video Printer. Paper for video printer. ( Pack of 4rolls)
VC-244
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
RCA CLOSED-CIRCUIT New Holland Avenue
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Lancaster, PA 17604-3140 (717) 397-7661
CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO EQUIPMENT
10x Zoom Lens
TC2800
e
TC1400
TC2800 CCD CAMERA FAMILY
·206, 366 Picture Elements ( 403 H x512 V) for Sharp, High Resolution
CCD Pictures · High Sensitivity for Nighttime Surveillance. Usable Pictures at 0.06Ctfc · No Geometric Distortion for Precise Measurements and Positioning · No Lag or Image Retention for Sharp Pictures of Moving Objects · Reduced Blooming
Model
Price 6
Description
TC2811 TC2811/8 TC2811/16 TC2812 TC2812/8 TC2812/16 TC2821 TC2821/8 TC2821/16 TC2822 TC2822/8 TC2822/16 TC2855C TC2855/8C TC2855/16C
1775 2005 1970 1775 2005 1970 1775 2005 1970 1775 2005 1970 1775 2005 1970
Integral power supply, 120 V, 60 Hz. I With 8.0 mm f/1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mm 1/1.4 auto iris lens
Integral power supply, 24 V, 60 Hz. I With 8.0 mm f/1.4 auto ins lens With 16 mm 1/1.4 auto ins lens
Separate power supply, 120 V, 60 Hz. , With 8.0 mm 1/1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mm f/1.4 auto iris lens
Separate power supply, 24 V, 60 Hz. I With 8.0 mm f/1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mm fil . 4auto iris lens
12 VDC camera ( 10.5-16 VDC) crystal control, no lens. With 8.0 mm f/1.4 auto iris lens With 16 mm f/1.4 auto iris lens
1N.OCTrEysSt:al control available on Special Order for basic cameras without lens ( shown in
bold type). Allow for extended lead time when ordering. Add suffix " C" to model number and add $ 10.00 to cost ITC2855 is crystal control only). Crystal control
models do not have Line Lock feature.
FIXED AND ZOOM LENSES FOR TC2800 CCD CAMERAS
Auto- iris lenses providing performance and economy for awide range of CCTV applications with connectors installed for ease of installation. Includes built-in spot filter that extends upper range to a minimum of f/360.
FIXED
TC1805/D2 TC1810/D2 TC1816/D2 TC1809/D2 TC1812/D2 TC1824/D2 TC1849/D2 TC1874/D2
zoom
TC1841A/D2 TC1846/D2 TC1843/D2
305 230 195 310 235 210 215 270
690 1095 1700
2/3" format EX 5.7 mm 1/1.4. EX 8.0 mm 1/1.4. EX 16 mm 1/1.4
1" format EX 9.0 mm 1/1.4 (also usable on 2/3" cameras) EX 12.5 mm 1/1.4 ES 25 mm 1/1.4 ES 50 mm 1/1.8 ES 75 mm 1/1.8
12/3" format 12.5-75 mm ( 6e) 1/1.8 11-110 mm ( 10e) f/1.6
1" format 15-180 mm ( 12x)1/1.9 ( also usable on 2/3" cameras)
SWITCHERS, DATE TIME GENERATOR, MOTION DETECTORS,
SPLITTER/INSERTER, TRANSFORMERS
Model
Price Description
TC1400 TC1404 TC1408 TC1418
TC1420
TC1440B
TC1460A/2
TC1461 TC1461/01 TC1470A ICI 313 TC1320 TC1324 TC1334
650 210 620 650
165
405
740
315 425 330
11 50 11 13
6 position Sequential Switcher, individually adjustable dwell time, 2 outputs. Interface for TC1460A/2 Motion Detectors.
"Alarm" auto homing sequential switcher. 4 position. One output. Interface for TC1460A/2 Motion Detectors. "Alarm" auto homing sequential switcher. 8 position. One output. Cascadable to 32 positions. Interface for TC1460A/2 Motion Detector. 8 position, Alarm Auto homing switcher. Two bridging video outputs Interface with TC1460At2 Motion Detector. On screen camera identification ( formerly model TC1408B).
Black out unit. Blacks out peak white portions of the video signal. Recommended for use only with Ultricon. Requires customized field
hook-up. Date and Time Generator. Year, month, day. hour. minute, and second. Black outline numerals. Position, brightness and size controls front panel accessible. Crystal control and DC options available.
2channel VidAlert Motion Detector for 1or 2cameras. Interface with TC1400 Series sequential switchers for automatic camera call up. Controls on front panel. VidAlert motion detecto , for one camera. Alarm beeper and LED. Switcher and alarm interfaces.
12 VDC Single Channel VidAlert Motion Detector. Beeper and LED Alarm Indicators. Switcher and Alarm Interfaces.
Splitter/Inserter. Permits simultaneous display of two cameras on one monitor and/or tape recorder. DC power cord with cohnectors for TC1910 monitors.
20' extension cable for TC5002 Color Camera to power supply.
24 V, 60 Hz transformer. Provides low voltage power for one TC1500 family 24 VAC camera. Plugs into standard wall receptacle.
Same purpose as TC1324 except will operate one TC2000 family, one TC1005 family or two TC1500 family 24 VAC cameras.
19" RACK MOUNT HARDWARE FOR TC14XX SERIES EQUIPMENT
TC1404, TC1461 AND TC1470 ARE QUARTER- RACK SIZE (All Others Are Half- Rack Size)
TC2117/01 TC2117/02 TC2117/03 TC2117/04
TC2117/05 TC2117/06 TC2117/07 TC2117/08
65
For one half- rack equipment with one half blank.
65
For two half- rack equipments.
65
For one quarter- rack equipment with three quarters blank.
65
For one half- rack and one quarter- rack equipment with one quarter
blank.
65
For two quarter- rack equipments with one half blank.
65
For three quarter- rack equipments with one quarter blank.
65
For four quarter- rack equipments.
65
For one half- rack and two one quarter- rack equipments.
NOTE: For zoom lens use V100ZF controller or a suitable control system.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-245
RCA CLOSED-CIRCUIT New Holland Avenue
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Lancaster, PA 17604-3140 (717) 397-7661
CLOSED-CIRCUIT VIDEO EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS
TC2900 CCD CAMERA FAMILY - 1/2" FORMAT
FEATURES ·206,366 picture elements ( 403H x512V) for sharp, high resolution
CCD pictures ·High sensitivity for nighttime surveillance. Usable picture
at 0.024 fc.
·No geometric distortion for precise measurements and positioning ·No lag or image retention for sharp pictures of moving objects ·Reduced blooming
Model
TC2911 TC2911 8 TC2911 16 TC2912 1C2912/8 TC2912,16 TC2821 129218 TC2921 16 TC2922 TC2922 8 TC2922, 16 TCHISSC TC2955/8C TC2955(16C
Optlonel User Price 11
3720 3950 3915 3720 3950 3915 3720 3950 3915 3720 3950 3915 3720 3950 3915
Dealer Coat 6
1 - 4
2495 2645 2622 2495 2645 2622 2495 2645 2822 2495 2645 2822 2495 2645 2822
5.24
2395 2545 2522 2395 2545 2522 2395 2545 2522 2395 2545 2522 2395 2545 2522
29*
2295 2445 2422 2295 2445 2422 2295 2445 2422 2295 2445 2422 2295 2445 2422
DeecrIplion
Integral power supply, 120 V, 80 Ha.' Wnh 80 mn11(1.4 auto am lens Weill 16 (nun Irl 4auto Ins lens
Integral power impale, 24 V, 8014a. ' %Mtn 80 rnn1 t140LAO ms lens
%Mtn le nun trl 4 .,, to melons
SeperHe power wappiy, 120 V. SO Ha.' Wm" 81 In,,, 1.1 4auto Ina lens With 16(nm 1/1 4auto ins lens
Separate power supply, 24 V, 110 11a. ' Wnh 8Cnun 14.4 auto'''. lens Wan 16 nun Itl .4eulo one Hon
12 VOC camera (10.5.10 VDCIMIntat Control, no lee. Wan 8.0 nun 141 4auto In. le. Wan 16 awn 1/1 · auto me lent
Notes: 1. Crystal control available on Special Order for basic cameras without lens (shown in bold type). Add suffix " C" to model number and add $ 10 to cost ITC2955 is crystal control only). Crystal control models do not have Line Lock feature.
EIXED AND ZOOM LENSES FOR TC2900 CCD CAMERAS
Auto- iris lenses providing performance and economy for a wide range of CCTV applications with connectors installed for ease of installation.
Includes built-in spot filter that extends upper range to aminimum of f/36o. FIXED
TC1805 02 TC1810/02 1C1816/D2 TC111109/D2 TC1812/D2 TC111211102 TC1649/02 TC1874/02
305 230 195 310 235 210 215 270
ZOOM'
200
200
200
2/w· formal EX 5.7 mrn III 4
150
150
150
" "
EX 80en, Ul 4
127
127
127
" "
EX 16 rén, 1/1 4.
205
205
205
1" tonne* EX 90nut 1/1 4 ( 0110 usable on 2)3" Cli....)
155
155
155
" "
EX 12.5 men 1/141
137
137
137
" "
ES 25 nun I/16
142
142
142
" "
ES 50 rent 0/10
178
178
176
" ES 75 nun 61 6
7C1841A/D2 TC16146/D2 TC1843tD2
690 1095 1700
480 765 1190
410 765 1190
480 7615 1190
2/3" format 12 5-75 nun (64)1/1.8
""
11-110 elm ( 10x) 1/1.1
1" format 15-100 nu, ( 62x) 61 9 (oleo usable on 2/3" catneree).
Note: For zoom lens use V1002F contro ter or asuitable control system.
10X AND 6X ZOOM LENS/CAMERA CROSS SECTIONS
LENS
Imager: 1/ 2 "CCD Sensitivity)2856
Scene Illumination· fc
lx
Scene Brightness* fi
nt
Faceplate Illum,
fc
lx
Usable Picture 0.024 0.261 0.018 0.060 0.0018 0.0190
'f/1.2 lens, 75% highlight reflectance. 1.0 lux 11x1 = 0.0929 footcandle ( fc). 1.0 nit Intl = 0.2919 foot Lambert ( fL).
Full Video 0.097 1.044
0.071 0.242 0.0071 0.0759
Resolution: Horizontal - 403 elements ( 50% amplitude response at 200 TV lines/picture height).Vertical - 512 elements ( Standard EIA Resolution).
Geometric Linearity: No camera distortion. Picture linearity limited by lens and monitor.
Light Range: 3.5 x 10':1 with f/1.2 to T/360 auto iris lens. Includes selectable 10:1 AGC, internally adjustable for peak/average response weighting. Automatic Lens Override ( ALOI: Provides camera-controlled auto- lens response independent of auto- lens setup. Eliminates AGC/Auto-Lens interaction and gives smooth, step-free response throughout light range. Compatible with all ES and EX Series Auto Iris lenses. Signal to Noise: Better than 65dB. Bandwidth: 3.7MHz. Gray Scale: At least 10 steps.
Gamma Correction: Factory set for preferred response. Internally changeable from 0.5 through 1.0.
Composite Video Output: 1.0 to 1.4Vp-p. Adjustable attenuator-type control on back panel. 75 ohm.
White Clipper: Automatic. Keeps highlights within preset level to avoid monitor or VCR overdrive.
Auto Black: plus keyed clamp maintains constant pedestal setup throughout entire light range.
Sync: EIA RS- 170. Phase- Locked- Loop synchronizes camera to power line zero crossing. Crystal control option available ( DC and 220VAC models - Crystal Control only).
Genlock: Accepts composite sync or HEW drives at negative 4Vp-p 13 to 6VP-P, RS-170).
External Controls: Composite Video Level, Imager Position and Lock.
Supply Voltage/Power: 12VDC models 10.5 to 16VDC. 7.2 watts nom. at 12V. 24VAC models 20 to 28V or 26 to 34V, 60 Hz. ( Range Switch). 15 watts nominal at 20 or 30 volts. 120VAC models 100 to 140V, 60 Hz. 15 watts nominal at 120V. 220VAC models 198 to 264V, 50 Hz. 15 watts nominal at 220V. Camera/Power Supply Separation: (Remote Power Supply Models) up to 100 ft. using AWG-18, Type SV, 3- conductor cable ( 12 ft. cable supplied). Lens Mount: Standard " C".
Camera Mounts: Two 1/4" -20 tapped holes in base. One 1/4" -20 tapped hole in top.
Connectors: Genlock/Auto-Iris - 8- pin DIN. Video - BNC.
Printed Circuit Board: Fiberglass epoxy with double-sided ground plane structure. Plated through holes. Finish: Light beige Lexan case. Weight: Camera ( 12V and Remote PS models) - 2.0 lbs. ( 0.9kg). Camera/Integral Power Supply - 3.3 lbs. ( 1.5kg). Remote Power Supply only 1.3 lbs. ( 0.6kg).
Size: Camera 112V and Remote PS models) - 3.05"H x4.50"W x7.10"L (75 x 114 x 180mm). Camera/Integral Power Supply - 3.05"H x4.50"W x9.23"L ( 75 x114 x235mm). Remote 24V Power Supply - 3.36"H x2.61"W x2.65"L ( 85 0660 68mml. Remote 120 or 220V Power Supply - 3.10"H x2.53"W x2.65"L (79 x65 x68mml. 12x Zoom Lens, Sup't Rail Er Camera ( w/o Power Supply 6.35"H x5.70"W x 19.7"L ( 162 x 145 x500mm). 12x Zoom Lens, Sup't Rail Er Camera/Integral Power Supply6.35"H x5.70"W x21.85"L ( 162 x145 x555mml.
Environment: Temperature - 0to 122°F (- 18 to 50°C). Humidity - 0to 95% relative. Vibration - 3g swept sine wave, 15 to 2000 Hz. Shock - 50g.
10x
6x
Lenses may be oriented in any position with respect to camera.
VC- 246
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
RCA CLOSED-CIRCUIT New Holland Avenue
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Lancaster, PA 17604-3140 (717) 397-7661
CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO EQUIPMENT
TRANSCOAX CONTROL SYSTEM TC4500 SERIES
The TC4500 Series, TransCoax, Control System provides control of camera functions at distant sites via the coaxial video cable. It thus eliminates the necessity and expense of separate control wiring to camera sites. The system consists of control Transmitters at one or more locations and Receivers at the site of each camera to be controlled. The control transmitters insert encoded control signals on the video cable during the retrace time and send these signals to the on-site receiver where they are decoded and used to implement the various control functions. The eight- camera transmitter, TC4508, with a built-in vertical interval switcher, can be used to control up to eight cameras. A one-camera transmitter, TC4501, is available for controlling a single camera or it can be used in conjuction with V1400S Series manual switchers to control multiple cameras. The transmitters may be used in series to control cameras from multiple locations. A lock-out switch with a " busy" light eliminates conflicting
control signals in such multi-control systems.
Complete Site Control
Pan, tilt, and auto- pan for 24 VAC, 115 VAC and 115 VDC pan/tilts. Zoom, focus, and iris control with variable speed. Two momentary switches for control of intermittent auxiliaries. Two On/Off switches for control of latching auxiliaries. ( One required for auto- pan implimentation)
Easy to Use
Just connect to existing or new video cabling and to apower source 2:1 or random interlace operation, monochrome or color. Vertical interval switcher in 8- camera transmitter for roll-free pictures and clean VCR recordings. "Back- porch" video clamping for hum and noise rejection. Weatherproof NEMA on-site receiver enclosure. Sealed " MS" style receiver connectors.
TAONoe· Res'ort/Caamme TANA TCASIS
tus
COAX
va.
Me · CNN. Sap.
turn ComoN
I TM» I R C'VR
j MIMIC ·· IC111·1
TRAIISNI TT( R
I 1 iii
I 1 J.
Adioneaa. Imu, UNI
L _
17011iT OR
r --
IL _ _ J
"1 oJOO .
L --
WITH TC4508 FOR 2TO 8CAMERAS -- OR TC4501 FOR 1CAMERA
TAOthe Riwetaeme,
LENS CAME
CO AX Vole,
COSE VAlee
Central X·PN,.
LITC4501TRANSAIITTIR
COR ITOS O 0 J
·1·1ffl·IM PTCyntro
Lem emtel Woman
ICISSO Nit VR
stues Sotto. Smoak>
tit
TAAddeta·Aal VIUM Smtem/TC4611 l'ANdleee.tet CO114,1.6.1. LI UNd
WITH TC4501 and V14005 SERIES SWITCHER FOR MULTIPLE CAMERAS
Specifications
Supply Voltage: 115 V Models -- 115 V, 60 Hz ( 100 to 130 V)
Relay Contact Rating: Auzdiaries $11 & e2 ( Latching) -- 5.0 amps at 115 V
TC4508, TC4508X Eight- Camera Control Transmitters
Use to control one to eight cameras
Switching Vertical interval
230 V Models -- 230 V. 50 Hz ( 200 to 260 V)
Power 4watts approx
Size: Table Top 1.81" H a17" Wv 9.5" I) ( 46 x432 r241 mm). Racked' 1.75" H o19" W 95" D ( 44 x483 241 mm)
Auxiliaries * 3. 8 * 4 ( Momentary) -- 5amps at 115 V
Supply Voltage: TC4550 -- 115 V. 60 Hz. ( 100 to 130 V) TCA550% -- 230 V. 50 Hz. ( 200 to 260 V). Power 8 watts approx. -- plus pan/tilt power.
Controls: Camera Selection -- 6"illuminated On pushbuttons.
'Drew Rack Kit TC450 ,PAK Weight 9 lbs (4 kg) approx
Construction Weatherproof NEMA enclosure.
8W Size 10" H
a33" 0 ( 254 x203 x84 mml.
Pan/Tilt -- Joystick. Zoom In/Out -- two position lever switch. Focus Near/Far -- two position lever switch. Iris Open/Close -- two position lever switch. Lens Control Speed -- Slow to Fast rotary knob. Latching Auxiliary 01 On/011-- two position lever switch Latching Auxiliary * 2On/Oft -- two position lever switch. Momentary Auxiliaries 03 & 84 -- two position lever switch
(Aux 03 -- Up. Aux * 4 -- Down). On/Oft -- rocker switch. LED On indicator. Channel Lock/Unlock -- rocker switch. LED " Busy" indicator. .Seliettable at east, receiver to control Auto- Pen
Latching Auxiliary " On" Indicator -- LED ( selectable at each receiver for status ol either Aux 01 or Aux 82)
Video Input ( HI Z. loop- through): 115 V Models -- 525 line, 30 field. NTSC. 230 V Models -- 625 line. 25 field. CCIR.
Video Output 1.0 V p- pcomposite video.
Operating Distance: With low loss RO -59/U type cable ( Beldon # 9259 or equiv.) --
2000 ft. ( 600 rn). With low loss AG- 11/U type cable ( Beldon * 9292 or equiv.) --
4000 It ( 1200 m).
Connectors: Video Input -- 16 BNC ( 2per camera for loop- through). Video Output -- 1BNC. Power -- 3- wire cord supplied.
Amblent Operating Temperature -20 to * 120° F (-29 to + 49 °C).
TC4501, TC4501X single Camera Control Transmitters
Use to control one camera -- or, with a V14005 Series Manual Switcher, to control multiple cameras.
Same as TC4508 Eight- Camera Control Transmitters except do not include the vertical interval switcher or the camera selection pushbuttons and have only two BNC video- in connectors for loopthru of asingle input.
TC4550, TC4550X Receivers
One required at each camera site to be controlled.
Controls " On/Off" toggle switch.
Signal Input 1.0 Vp- pcomposite video, Hi Zloop- through ( 100 K Ohm approx )
Pan/Tilt Output: Internal Selections -- 24 VAC, 115 VAC, 115 VDC. Max. Current -- 2amps continuous. 4amps intermittent. Auto Pan -- Internally selectable constant pan voltage.
Lens Outputs: Zoom. Focus, tris -- 7VDC ( adjustable with "speed" control) (1 V p- p. composite video ex 12 VDC available for auto- ins).
Connectors: Video -- 2UHF for loop- through. Pan/Tilt -- one 7- pin sealed " MS" style. Mating connector supplied.
Lens -- one 6- pin sealed " MS" style. Mating connector supplied. AUXiliBrieS -- Internal barrier strips. ( Customer to supply and install connectors).
Weight id Its ( 4.5 kg) approx. Ambient Operating Temperature -20 to + 120°F 1-29 to + 49°C)
Practical "Up-the-Video- Cable" Control for CCTV Surveillance Systems
Eliminates Costly Control Wiring
Single or Multiple Control Stations
TC4501 Single Channel TransCoax
Transmitter
$595.00
TC4501 MK Transmitter Rack Kit
75.00
TC4508 Eight Channel TransCoax
Transmitter
765.00
TC4550
TransCoax Receiver ( One required per
camera)
630.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-247
RCA CLOSED-CIRCUIT New Holland Avenue
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Lancaster, PA 17604-3140 (717) 397-7661
CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO EQUIPMENT
TC1600 SERIES -- CCTV CONTROL SYSTEM
MICROPROCESSOR BASED -- TWISTED PAIR WIRING ·Excellent for Control of Multi- Camera Systems · Basic System -- Up to 64 Cameras -- 8 Monitor Stations ·Automatic Sequential or Manual Switching ·Small Keyboard Controllers, Desktop or Rack Mount ·Date and Time, Camera Number and Title " On- Screen" ·Complete Control of Pan/Tilt, Zoom Lens and Auxiliary Functions ·Alarm Interface and Audio Follower Options
NOTE:
Control systems for la ger installations are available ( up to 256 Cameras, 32 monitors). Consult CCVE Marke ing.
Model
Price S DescrIpUon
SYSTEM CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT ( CPU)
TC1601/3 . 2380 TC1601/7 2380
Central Processing Und ( CPU) complete with Power Supply Module and Processing Module. Tabletop. For use with TC1671 and/or TC1672 keyboards. ( Up to eight monitor stational
Same as TC1601/3 except for use with up to 4TC1678 keyboards. Also permits use of up to 4additional TC1671/TC1672 keyboards i·
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
TC1602' TC1603 TC1604/3 TC1604/7 TC1611 TC1621
680 675 1335 1335 455 515
System Expansion Unit ( SEU) with Interconnect Cable. Tabletop Spare Power Supply Module ( PSM) for CPU. Spare Processing Module ( CPM) for CPU. TC1601/3
Spare Processing Module ( CPM) for CPU TC1601/7 Video Input Module ( 8 Inputs) ( VIM) Video Output Module - Single Monitor ( VOM-1).
TC1622 TC1631
TC1671 TC1672 TC1678'
IC1678/1
915 650
480 520 2000
2180
Video Output Module - Dual Monitor ( 1/0M-2).
Switcher Follower Unit ( SFU) Up to 32 inputs and one output, or 16 inputs and two outputs. Surface mount Keyboard Control Unit - Desktop. Single monitor station control ( KCU-1). Keyboard Control Unit - Desktop Two monitor station control ( KCU -2). Keyboard Control Unit - Desktop Up to 256 camera/32 monitor control with pre- position and alarm interface ( KCU-8/ RS232 Transmitting Keyboard.
TC1678/2 TC1679
2180 2040
RS232 Receiving Keyboard RS232 Receiver only
TC1680
1200
TC1660P 1665
On-Site Receiver/Driver ( SRO- 1). Outdoor for 120 V Pan/Tilt Optional heater ( add $40 Dealer Cost). Up to 3momentary or latching auxiliary functions ( add $40 each Dealer Cost). Same as TC1680 but includes pre- position option Use with pre- position lens and pan/tilt
TC16130NH TC1680PC TC1661 TC1681NH TC1681PC
1105 785 995 905 7135
Same as TC1680. mounted on steel plate with no housing. Replacement PC board only for TC1680.
Same as TC1680 but for 24 V Pan/Tilt ( SRO- 2Y Auxiliaries $ 15 each Same as TC1681, mounted on steel plate with no housing Replacement PC board only for TC1681
TC1682 TC1682P
960 1410
TC16132PC 755
TC1685PC 455
TC1688
770
TC1688CM 530
TC1691
415
TC1691PC 335
TC1695
750
On- Site Receiver/Driver ( SRI) Indoor for 24 V Pan/Tilt Up to 3 momentary or latching auxiliaries ( add $ 15 each Dealer Cost/ Same as TC1682 but includes pre- position option Use with pre- position lens and pan/tilt Replacement PC board only for TC1682 Replacement PC board for pre- position option in Receiver/Drivers
Modular Receiver/Driver for up to 8cameras, hard wired Requires TC1688CM modules Indoor 24 V Pan/Tilt.
Output module for TC1688 One per camera site Wired into TC1688. Signal Distribution Unit ( SOU). Required where signal control cable exceeds 5000 ft or 3Receiver/Drivers in "Star or Daisy Chain" configuration. Surface mount. Replacement PC board only for TC1691 Alarm Interface Unit ( AIL)). Up to 64 closure inputs. Surface mount
TC1700 SWITCHER/CONTROLLER -- MICROPROCESSOR BASED
TWISTED PAIR WIRING -- LOW COST SYSTEM · Up to 32 Cameras -- 4 Monitors ·Complete Control of Pan/Tilt, Zoom Lens and Auxiliary Function in
Multiple Camera Systems ·Automatic Sequential or Manual Switching
·Date/Time, Camera Ident and Title On- Screen ·Alarm Interface and Audio Follower Options
Model
Price $ Description
TC1701/162
TC1701/164 TC1701/322 TC1701/324 TC1701/MM TC1701/CM
2765
3370 3370 3875
605 525
CPU/Switcher/Controller in one unit. Integral keyboard. Up to 16 cameras x2monitors. Desk top. · Can be used with separate keyboards listed under associated equipment.
Same as TC1601/162 except up to 16 cameras x4 monitors.
Same as TC1601/162 except up to 32 cameras x2monitors.
Same as TC1601/162 except up to 32 cameras x4 monitors. Module for expansion from 2104 monitors.
Module for expansion from 16 to 32 cameras.
ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT FOR TC1700 SWITCHER/CONTROLLER SYSTEMS
TC1631
650
TC1635
2375
TC1671 TC1671/8 TC1672 TC1678B
465 635 515 1950
TC1678BE 1950
TC1680
1225
TC1680N TC1681 TC1681N TC1682
1135 985 875 925
TC1685P TC1689/8
440 3616
TC1689/6 3615
TC1689/4 3615
TC1689/0 TC1689P TC1691
3615 645 415
TC1695
675
TC1696
675
Switcher Follower - 32 Relay Closures. Useable in a 1x32 or a 2x16 configuration. Units cascadable for additional closures. · Master Clock - Synchronizes Date/Time Displays in Expanded TC1600 Systems.
Keyboard - Desktop - Single Monitor Control.
Keyboard - Desktop with switch for 8 Monitor Control. Keyboard - Desktop with switch for 2 Monitor Control.
Keyboard - Desktop' for TC1600. TC1700 and TC1990 Systems for multi Camera/Monitor Control - LED Readout. Keyboard - Desktop Executive - No Pan/Tilt or Lens Control.
Receiver/Driver - Outdoor. 120 V Pan/Tilt. Optional heater - $ 40 Dealer Cost ( Add suffix " H" to Model No.). Up to 3momentary or latching auxiliaries - S40 each Dealer Cost ( Add suffix " M" or " L" and 1. 2. or 3). Also specify auxiliary output as 24 V. 120 V, or contact closure. i.e., TC1680HM1L2 ( M is CC. L's are 24 8 120 V). Same as TC1680, mounted on metal plate with no housing.
Same as TC1680 but for 24 V Pan/Tilt.
Same as TC1681, mounted on metal plate with no housing. Receiver/Driver. Indoor. 24 V Pan/Tilt. Up to 3 momentary or latching auxiliaries, 24 VAC only. - $ 40 each Dealer Cost ( Add suffix "M" or " L" and 1. 2, or 31, e., TC1682M2L1.
Preposition Card for TC1680, TC1681 and TC1682 Receivers.
Multi Receiver/Driver for up to 8cameras. Indoor 24 V Pan/Tilt. No auxiliaries. Surface mount. --
Receiver/Driver for up to 6cameras. Indoor 24 V Pan/Tilt. Eight auxiliaries with 24 V output. Surface mount.··
Multi Receiver/Driver for up to 4 cameras. Indoor 24 V Pan/Tilt. Sixteen auxiliaries with 24 VAC output. Surface mount. --
Multi Receiver - 32 auxiliaries only. 24 VAC output. Surface mount. --
Preposition Card for TC1689 Receiver/Driver ( 10 positions).
Distribution Unit. Required where control cable exceeds 5000 ft. or 3Receiver/Drivers in " Star or Daisy Chain" for TC1600 systems or 8 for TC1990 systems. Surface mount.
Alarm Interface Unit for TC1600 and TC1700 Systems. 64 switch closure inputs ( for switch " open" inputs add suffix " C" to model number).
Same as TC1695 but for use with TC1990 series systems.
·For Rack Mount add $50.00 Dealer Cost.
** For Rack Mounting add suffix " R" to Model No. -- same price.
SPECIAL CORNER MOUNT HOUSING AND LENS
FOR RESTRICTED SPACE SUCH AS ELEVATORS
TC207OHL
575
Corner Mount Housing for TC2021, TC2022. TC2521 or TC2522 Camera. Includes 4.8 mm wide angle lens. Purchase camera separately.
VC-248
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
RCA CLOSED-CIRCUIT New Holland Avenue
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Lancaster, PA 17604-3140 (717)397-7661
CLOSED CIRCUIT VIDEO EQUIPMENT
105002
CAMERAS FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
COLOR CCTV FOR SURVEILLANCE APPLICATIONS Color Camera, Single Newvicon Tube, RS- 170 Sync, 2:1 Interlace, High Sensitivity
Model
Price $
Description
TC5002 TC5002/8 TC5002/12 TC5002/16 TC5002/24 TC5002/49 TC5002/74 TC5002/Z6 TC5002/Z0
1020 1250 1255 1215 1230 1240 1290 1730 2135
120 V, 60 Hz separate power supply Included. With 8.0 mm 1/1.4 auto- iris lens With 12.5 mm f/1.4 auto- iris lens With 16 mm f/1.4 auto- iris lens With 25 mm f/1.4 auto- iris lens With 50 mm f/1.8 auto- iris lens With 75 mm I/1.8 auto- iris lens With 12.5-75 mm ( 6x) f/1.8 auto- iris zoom lens With 11-110 mm ( 19x) f/1.6 auto- iris zoom lens
NOTE:
20 ft. Camera to Power Supply Extension Cable. TC1320, available.
TC3800
TIME LAPSE VIDEO RECORDERS -- 1/2-- CASSETTE TYPE
Use 1/2" VHS Video Cassettes, Built-in Date/Time Generator Microprocessor Based Touchbutton Operation, Automatic High Speed Alarm Recording, Single- Field Playback.
Model
Price S
Description
TC3800M l
3595
TC3800C f TC3801RC TC3700 f
3595 65
2395
TC3701RC
65
TC1350
185
NOTE: 1. Adjustment Code M7.
Deluxe 10 speed - two user programmable speeds to 999 hours. Real time to over 40 days. 7- day, multiple on/off program timer.
NTSC color version of TC3800M.
Remote control for TC3800's. Standard 10 speed. Real time to 480 hours. All basic time lapse features. Remote control for TC3700's.
VHS Video Cassette ( VK250) for above VCR's.
TC5510AU
MONITOR -- COLOR
TC5510AU
315
10 inch. Front operating controls. Built-in audio.
TC4200
TC4200 VIDCOLINK III MICROWAVE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Simultaneous, single- path communications of video plus audio or camera contro signals over short or medium distances.
TC4211H TC4211L TC4211S TC4212H
TC4212L
TC42125
TC4213H TC4213L TC4213S
5950 5950 5950 8450
8450
8450
8950 8950 8950
Simplex Video. frequency 23.525.
Simplex Video, frequency 22.325.
Simplex Video, special frequency to be supplied by customer. Simplex Video with wideband reverse audio subcarrier. frequency 23.525, for use with TC1600. TC1700 and TC1990 series systems. Simplex Video with wideband reverse audio subcarrier. frequency 22.325, for use with TC1600,TC1700 and TC1990 series systems. Simplex Video with wideband reverse audio subcarrier, special frequency to be supplied by customer for use with TC1600, TC1700 and TC1990 series systems. Simplex Video with duplex audio subcarriers. frequency 23.525.
Simplex Video with duplex audio subcarriers. frequency 22.325.
Simplex Video with duplex audio subcarriers, special frequency to be supplied by customer.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-249
RED LINE
Research Laboratories, Inc. 4055 Guasti Rd. Suite 110 Ontario, CA 91761 (714) 986-7600 ( 800) 447-7225 " HIP- PACK"
BATTERY PACKS
MODEL 6B
12 Volt, 6 Amp Hour Battery Record up to 5 Hours Short Circuit Protection Universal Power Receptacle 6.5 Watt Charger Comfortable Hip Pack Design
MODEL NC48
12 Volt, 4.8 Amp Hour Nickel Cadmium Battery 4-8 Hour Operation, up to 1500 Recharges Exclusive PowerLockTM Receptacle Short Circuit Protection Belt and Shoulder Strap Deluxe NiCad Charger Quick Release Buckle Padded Cordura Nylon Case
.................. .
MODEL 6E
12 Volt, 6Amp Hour Battery Record up to 5 Hours Exclusive PowerLockTM Receptacle
Short Circuit Protection Belt and Shoulder Strap 6.5 Watt Charger Quick Release Buckle Padded Cordura Nylon Case
MODEL M12B
12 Volt, 12 Amp Hour Battery Pack Built-in Meter Short Circuit Protection Dual Harness Construction Quick Release Buckle Padded Cordura Nylon Case
*M12B Operating Times: 100 Watt Light, 50 min. Continuous. VCR Et Camera ( Panasonic 6600), 10 hrs. Continuous. Times may vary with equipment used. May be more with intermittent use or less with extensive use.
MODEL 48B
12 Volt, 4.8 Amp Hour Nickel Cadmium Battery 4-8 Hour Operation with up to 1500 Recharges Deluxe NiCad Charger Short Circuit Protection Universal Power Receptacle Thin Profile Case Comfortable Hip Pack Design
SEALED LEAD ACID BATTERIES
6B
12V, 6AH Hip Pack
6E
12V, 6AH Hip or Shoulder Pack
M12B 12V, 12AH Metered Belt Pack
M 17B 12V, 17AH Metered Belt Pack
NICKEL CADMIUM BATTERIES
48B
12V, 4AH Hip Pack
NC48 12V, 4AH Hip or Shoulder Pack
714B
12V, 7AH Hip Pack
BATTERY ACCESSORY PRODUCTS
WB48 48 Inch Belt
WB60 60 Inch Belt
CH6
Charger for 6B and 6E
CH12 Charger for M12B and M17B
CH48 Charger for 48B and NC48
CH714 Charger for 714B
CH220 European Charger
DD15-S Voltage Level Indicator
VC- 250
S 59.95 79.95
199.95 249.95
$139.95 159.95 199.95
S 4.95 495
12.95 19.95 16.95 17.95 29.95 29.95
PORTABLE VCR POWER CABLES
RL1
Panasonic 5500-6600, Canon, Nikon, Olympus,
GE, Philco, Sylvania, Magnavox, Quasar 5420
$14.95
RL2
RCA 900, Hitachi VT7P
14.95
RL3
RCA 170, Hitachi 6500,6800 Minolta
14.95
RL4
Panasonic 8410, 3000, 4000, Quasar 5410, GE, Mag-
navox 8377, Sylvania VC4515, Philco V1715
14.95
RL5 RL6
JVC HR2200U JVC HR2650L1
14.95 14.95
RL8
Canon 30A, GE5022, 5024, 5026, 5028, J.C. Penney
5110, 5115, Magnavox 8474, 8475, Olympus 105, 106
Panasonic 5800, 8100, 8484, 8485, 8500, 9600, Philco
1728, Quasar 5440, 5442, 5740, 5747, Sylvania 4525,
4540
$24.95
RL10
Y-Connector
14.95
VIDEO CHECKER PRODUCTS
CBC
Color Bar and Grey Scale Chart
RSL
Resolution and Linearity Chart
SIT
Production Organizer
TTL
Title and Graphic Kit
$12.00 12.00 12.00
12.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SACHTLER CORP.
400 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788 (51 6) 231-0033 Telex 140107
OF
AMERICA
CAMERA SUPPORT EQUIPMENT
VIDEO 14 SYSTEM
Video 14 Fluid Head With 3step dial- in drag adjustment, plus free-wheeling for pan and tilt, sliding quick- release wedge plate ( 1/4" + 3/8" screws) for center-ofgravity compensation, built-in counter balance spring, tilt ± 60°, two adjustable pan arms, tripod interface: flat base for Video 14 pedestal/ 75mm bowl tripod.
Video 14 Pedestal Tripod with pneumatically supported center column, range 15.75" (400mm).
Video 14 Tripod 75mm bowl levelling, black anodized aluminum.
Video 14 Rolling Triangle For pedestal and 75mm bowl tripod.
Video 14 Triangle For 75mm bowl tripod.
SPECIFICATIONS Video 14 Fluid Head Capacity Counterbalancing Pan Tilt Drag Pan arms Temperature range Camera interface
Tripod interface Weight
17.6 lbs.
see diagram 360°
+ 60°-60° 3steps pan + tilt, free wheeling 0.7", 18" long, adjustable
- 40°F to + 140°F touch & go wedge- plate with Center of Gravity compensation
flat base 3/8"/3" o bowl levelling 4 81b5. with two pan arms
Pedestal Pneumatic Center Column Range Maximum load
15.7" 22 lbs.
Air pressure
adjustable up to 5bars
Video 14 Fluid Head with Pedestal
Operational range: on rolling triangle Overall dimensions when
folded for transport Weight of Pedestal
height: min. 42"- max. 84.5"
length 35.8", 0 7.5" 11 lbs.
Rolling Triangle Dimensions when folded for transport
Wheels Weight
27.5 x7x6.3" o 3.15" 9 7lbs.
Lightweight Tripod Bowl levelling
Height Weight
o 2.952" min. 29.5"- max. 61.2" 4 4lbs.
Video 14 Fluid Head Video 14 Pedestal Video 14 Tripod ( Long) Video 14 Tripod ( Medium) Video 14 Rolling Triangle Video 14 Triangle
Code # Price
0525 $ 920.00
4190 1025.00
4182
265.00
4151
244.00
7053
225.00
7001
95.00
VIDEO 14 FLUID HEAD
VIDEO 14 ROLLING TRIANGLE
y4. VIDEO 14 PEDESTAL
\t·
VIDEO 14 TRIANGLE
VIDEO 14 TRIPOD
Not Shown:
Transport Cover For Video 14 fluid head and pedestal For Video 14 fluid head, tripod and triangle
Carrying Bag For Video 14 fluid head, tripod 75mm
bowl, triangle
Components Included in unit prices above When ordered separately or in addition:
Air Pump
Touch and go sliding wedge plate
Pan Arm
Code
Price
9204 9200
$180.00 160.00
9101
85.00
4190-26 0156 1075
8.50 42.50 90.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 251
SACHTLER CORP. OF AMERICA
400 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 231-0033 Telex 140107
TRIPODS
Sachtler Triangle
A triangle for slippery or delicate floors. Made of various rubber and
polyamid parts, it is light, robust and unbreakable. Rubber pull loops
attach it to the tripod. For transport the triangle is folded inwards and
is stored together with the tripod in the container.
Sachtler Triangle
From $250.00
Sachtler Semi -Dolly
A lightweight, rolling triangle with independent brakes for the rolling and spinning action of the wheels; for clean straight and defined circular drives.
TRIPODS AND ACCESSORIES
The wheels have cable guards which are adjustable in height. The
Semi- Dolly folds to a minimum in volume and has a handy grip to
ease transport. Sachtler Semi- Dolly
$ 795.00
Sachtler Tripods
Sachtler tripods are extremely lightweight, robust and twistfree with 100mm resp. 150mm bowl leveling.
Height clamping of legs requires little effort with the fast and secure ball- ring clamp. The pre-set end pressure point of this clamp prevents damage by over- tightening. Double claws are provided for using the tripod with the triangle or rolling triangle.
Stainless steel spikes provide rigid standing on soft ground. For the weight minded traveling cameraman the 100mm bowl tripod is available with carbon- fibre legs, saving 2.8 kgs in weight, when using it with the lightweight triangle the saving is 4.2 kgs.
Tripod long Height at 50cm spread Length collapsed Weight Duraluminium
Duraluminium h.d. Inox Carbon- fibre
Tripod medium long Height at 50cm spread Length collapsed Weight Duraluminium
Tripod medium Height at 50cm spread Length collapsed Weight Duraluminium
Inox
Tripod short Height at 15cm spread Length collapsed Weight Duraluminium
SPECIFICATIONS 100mm Bowl For Panorama and Video 20
26.8" - 54" 168 - 137cm) 32.5" 182.5cm) 6.2 lbs 12800 g) 9.1 lbs 14150 g) 10.5 lbs 14750 g) 5.1 lbs 12300 91
SPECIFICATIONS 150mm Bowl For Video 25-30
32.7" - 60.6" 183 -154cm) 36.2" 192cm) 10.8 lbs 14900 g)
26.8" - 54" 168 - 137cm) 32.5" 182.5cm) 10.0 lbs 14550 g)
15.7" - 29.5" 140 - 75cm) 19.9" 150.5cm) 4.7 lbs 12150 g) 5.8 lbs 12650 9)
20.5" - 33.5" 152 - 85cm) 22.4" 157cm) 8.3 lbs 13750 g)
7.3" 118.5cm) 8.5" 121.5cm) 3.3 lbs 11500 g)
11.8" 130cm) 12.6" 132cm) 6.6 lbs 13000 ol
Sachtler Containers
For Panorama, Video 20 and Video 25 the container offers effective protection for the complete unit - head, tripod, triangle - during transport and storage. For Video 30 aseparate case for the head and acontainer for the tripod with triangle are available
Sachtler Containers
POR
Sachtler Shoulder Brace
The shoulder brace is easily adjustable for body shape and type of
camera. The touch Et go quick- release- system permits speedy change of camera between tripod and shoulder brace. For transport
it is collapsible, its weight is 1.1 kg. Sachtler Shoulder Brace
$ 712.00
THE ACTION TRIPOD FOR NEWS CREWS ON THE GO!
The Hot Pod
· Locked when folded, handy grip ·Central lock for easy set-up ·Self-locking lever for camera leveling ·Self-locking center column
for increased rise and height
For ENG -Cameras
The Sachtler Hot Pod with the Sachtler Panorama head. Minimal height ( up to wedge plate) - 940mm; Legs fully extended - 1432mm; Max. height - 1892mm.
For Recording -Cameras
The Sachtler Hot Pod with the Sachtler Video 20. Minimal height ( up to wedge plate) - 957mm; Legs fully extended - 1449mm; Max height - 1909mm.
Volume, for Transport and Storage
Hot Pod with Panorama: Full length-1003mm, 0195mm; Hot Pod
with Video 20: Full length-1020mm, 0240mm
The Hot Pod
POR
VC- 252
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SACHTLER CORP.
400 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788
(516) 231-0033 Telex 140107
OF
AMERICA
HEADS
VIDEO 30
EFP
The utmost in comfort for EFP:
Sachtler Video 30
For studio and field production using the new generation of easy-tocarry cameras. Sliding camera platform to compensate for center of gravity displacements.
Dynamic Counterbalancing System ( pat. pend.)
Balancing momentum adjustable in 7steps by means of 3toggle levers for camera weight and center of gravity height and to easily re- balance the camera when changing lenses and/or viewfinder- monitors.
Tilt range + 1-60°.
Drag individually adjustable in 7steps for pan and tilt. As an option, a lens- support fitting the sliding camera platform can be made available. The supporting device is adjustable to meet different camera/lens combinations. Support is effected by a spring loaded bracket, compensating for the extra load of narrow- angle zoom lenses, not affecting lens- prism-tube alignment.
Camera Interface Heavy-duty touch Et go system or Debrie wedge plate
Tripod Interface
150 mm bowl, Mitchell intermediate
Specifications
·Capacity: 40 kgs · Counterbalancing momentum · Pan: 360° ·Tilt: + / -60° · Damping: 7steps for pan and tilt each · Pan arm 0: 18 mm, extension 22 mm · Temperature range: -40° to + 60° C · Camera interface: heavy duty touch and go or Debrie wedge- plate ·Tripod interface: 150 mm bowl · Sliding platform: + /- 50 mm ·Weight: 9kgs · Finish: black enamel
Video 30HP Same as Video 30S but with Vinten interface
$5650.00
Video 30S
Same as Video 30, but with heavy-duty, 7 position dynamic counter-
balancing system, tilt range ± 60°
$5376.00
ENG/EFP
VIDEO 25
The doing everything:
Sachtler Video 25
A medium sized ENG/EFP fluid head optimized for on location shooting combining the stability and pan and tilt comfort previously offered only by significantly larger and heavier camera supporting systems.
Sliding camera platform to compensate for center of gravity displacements.
Dynamic Counterbalancing System ( pat. pend.)
Balancing momentum adjustable in 4steps by means of 2toggle levers for camera weight and center of gravity height and to easily re- balance the camera when changing lenses and/or viewfinder monitors.
Tilt range + / - 60°.
Drag individually adjustable in 7 steps for pan and tilt. Positive operational pan and tilt lock plus safety lock for keeping the camera in horizontal position.
As an option, alens- support fitting the sliding camera platform can be made available. The supporting device is adjustable to meet different camerai lens combinations. Support is effected by a spring loaded bracket, compensating for the extra load of narrow- angle zoom lenses, not affecting lens- prism- tube alignment.
Camera Interface
Touch Er go system to ease alternative use of camera on tripod or shoulder brace.
Tripod Interface
150 mm bowl, Mitchel intermediate
Specifications
·Capacity: 25 kgs · Counterbalancing momentum · Pan: 360° ·Tilt: + / - 60° · Damping: 7steps for pan and tilt each · Pan arm 0: 18 mm, extension 22 mm · Temperature range: -40° to + 60° C
·Camera interface: small touch and go wedge- plate · Tripod interface: 150 mm bowl · Sliding platform: + / - 50 mm · Weight: 6.5
kgs · Finish: black enamel
Video 25
$4279.130
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 253
SACHTLER CORP.
400 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788
(516) 231-0033 Telex 140107
OF AMERICA
HEADS
ENG
For the travelling news gatherer:
Sachtler Panorama 7 + 7
A small, lightweight fluid head for real news gathering, with an integrated counterbalance spring adequate for today's ENG cameras. To compensate for the center of gravity being displaced, this spring can be locked in 7different positions.
Tilt range + / - 90°.
Drag individually adjustable in 7steps for pan and tilt. Together with the Sachtler Carbonfiber tripod and the lightweight triangle the weight of the complete system, including its carrying case, is 8.2 kgs. Camera Interface
Touch Et go system to ease alternative use of camera on tripod or shoulder brace. Tripod Interface
100 mm bowl, Pro- Junior intermediate
Specifications
·Capacity: 10 kgs · Counterbalancing momentum · Pan: 360° ·Tilt: + /- 90° · Damping: 7steps for pan and tilt each · Pan arm 0: 14mm · Temperature range: - 40° to + 60° C · Camera interface: small touch and go wedge- plate · Tripod interface: 100 mm bowl ·Sliding platform: no · Weight: 2.8 kgs · Finish: black enamel
$2445.00
Panorama 3 + 3 3step on- off drag control for pan + tilt
Panorama 1 + 1 1step on- off drag control for pan + tilt
1965.00 1410.00
Panorama 7 + 7 7step on- off drag control for pan + tilt
2445.00
Panorama to come with flat base in exchange for 100mm ball add 100.00
ENG/EFP
For the mobile unit:
Sachtler Video 20
A medium sized ENG/EFP fluid head for the ultimate in mobility. Lightweight but stable enough to accept ENG cameras with FP accessories.
Sliding camera platform to compensate for center of gravity displacements, more powerful counterbalancing spring for cameras with integrated shoulder brace or for cameras in EFP configuration.
Tilt range + / - 60°.
Drag individually adjustable in 7 steps for pan and tilt. Positive operational pan and tilt lock plus safety lock for keeping the camera in horizontal position.
Camera interface
Touch Et go system to ease alternative use of camera on tripod or shoulder brace.
Tripod Interface
100 mm bowl, Pro- Junior intermediate
Specifications:
· Capacity: 15 kgs · Counterbalancing momentum · Pan: 360°
·Tilt + /- 60° · Damping: 7steps for pan and tilt each · Pan arm 0:
18mm, extension 22 mm · Temperature range: -40° to + 60° C
·Camera interface: small touch and go wedge- plate · Tripod inter-
face: 100 mm bowl · Sliding platform: + /- 50mm · Weight: 5.5 kgs
· Finish: black enamel
$3595.00
Video 18 7step on- off drag control for pan + tilt
2515.00
Video 17 3step on- off drag control for pan + tilt
Video 16 1step on- off drag control for pan + tilt
2035.00 1480.00
Heavy-duty balance spring type Cto compensate for camera- weight,
tilt range + /- 45°
add 15.00
VC-254
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCHNEIDER CORP. OF AMERICA
400 Crossways Park Dr. Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 496-8500 Telex 960102
BROADCAST ENG/EFP TV LENSES
2/3" ENG/EFP TV LENSES
Lens
14X Wide Angle
Focal Length 1.7/9-126
With asph. att. 1.7 ,6.3mm --- 9mm
With iris servo, zoom servo with rocker switch, lens hood and packing for shipment.
Type TV 44.5
$4250
14X Wide Angle
1.7/9-126
With asph. att. 1.7 6.3 9
With X2 flip- in RE with iris servo, zoom servo with rocker switch, lens hood and packing for shipment.
TV 44.0 $4990
o'···
14X Wide Angle
1.7/9-126
With X2 flip- in RE with iris servo, zoom servo with pistol grip and man or servo focus and packing for shipment.
TV 44.0
$5490 w/housing
14.5X Wide Angle
1.4/8.8-130
With X2 flip- in RE and Diascope
With iris servo, housing, camera mounting plate and aluminum transport case.
TV 66 $24,000
17X Wide Angle
1.4/8.5-150
With X2 flip- in RE and Diascope
With iris servo, housing, camera mounting plate and aluminum transport case.
TV 80 POR
Lens
Focal Length
30X
1.4, 8.7-260
Wide Angle
Type TV 46*
$22,200
30X Standard
1.4/ 11 - 330
TV 45* $21,800
30X Tele
1.4/18.5-550
30X
1.7/ 12.5-375
Wide Angle
30X Standard
1.7 16-480
30X Tele
1726 - 800
TV 47* $25,700
I
TV 35* $22,200
r TV 26* $21,800
r
TV 39* $25,700
;Puce includes MallUdi ZOOM and focus commis 'Adam,» for Mounting of Schneider TV Lenses 30X on
2 ' 3' ENG L"FP Camel as
Aspheric Accessory Lens for ENG 14X Lens
Lens Type
Super Wide Lens for TV 44 45
Type No. CVA 665-0001
52
70 horizontal
angle of view
Code Ref. 137 139
$495
Studio Conversion Kit for 44 Series ( 44 & 44.5) $ 1500
Universal Adaptor
Universal adaptor with accessories necessary for mounting 30X TV Lenses on ENG EFP cameras, together with tripod pedestal Different versions are available; specify camera type and manufacturer.
(complete) $2950.00
Schneider TV Lenses available for all cameras Please specify camera manufacturer and type in all
orders and inquiries All lenses with iris servo, housing. camera mounting plate, lens hood and aluminum transport case unless otherwise stated
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-255
SCHNEIDER CORP. OF AMERICA
400 Crossways Park Dr. Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 496-8500 Telex 960102
BROADCAST TV LENSES
TV Lenses 11/4"
NEW ,
NEW
Lens
14.5 x Wide Angle with x 2 flip- in RE and Diascope
14.5 x Wide Angle with x2 flip- in RE
Focal Length 2.2/16.5-240
1.7/13-190 2.2/16:5-240
1.7/13-190
Type TV 65 TV 64 TV 65 TV 64
15 x Wide Angle
2.1/16-240 1.7/12.5-190
TV 33 TV 36
2.1/16-480
TV 31
*
30 x
Wide Angle
1.7/12.5-375
TV 35
30x Standard
2.1/20-600 1.7/16-480
TV 25 TV 26
30 x Tele/OB
2.1/33-1000
TV 37
>
1.7 / 26-800
TV 39
Schneider TV Lenses available for all cameras. Please specify camera manufacturer and type in all orders and inquiries. All lenses with iris servo, housing, camera mounting plate, lens hood and aluminum transpon case unless otherwise stated.
$24,000.00 $22,400.00 $21,100.00 $22,200.00 $21,800.00 $25,700.00
VC-256
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SHARP
10 Sharp Plaza P.O. Box 588
Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 265-5548
FROM SHARP MINDS COME SHARP PRODUCTS
XC-A1 ENG/EFP COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
New Field- Proven 2/3" Diode Gun Saticon* Tubes with Prism Optics Broadcast- caliber picture quality starts with the three 2/3" Diode Gun LOC/MS Saticon" tubes coupled with ahigh- transparency glass f/1.4 prism beam splitter. The result is high sensitivity, enhanced resolution ( 750 lines), excellent S/N ratio ( 57 dB), truer colorimetrv, plus reduced image retention and comet tailing. Bias lighting further reduces lag, especially for those critical low- light scenes.
Automatic Functions Offer Increased Ease- of- Use
·Auto- White -- The high performance Auto-White circuit is supplemented by a preset 3200°K setting. This allows shooting to begin immediately if the action requires a quick change of scene
·Auto- Black -- Black balance is continuously maintained by high- gain DC clamp circuitry and precisely calibrated by the microcomputer Digital Auto- Black Balance. This combination totally eliminates black balance adjustment when switching from 0 to 18 dB gain, and reduces routine maintenance requirements.
COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
·Auto- Centering -- The Automatic Centering circuit allows centering to be automatically adjusted using computer control.
A preset switch position is also available
+9/ + 18 dB High Gain Switch Sensitivity can be increased 3X or 8X for low light- level scenes using the + 9dB and + 18 dB settings. Minimum required illumination is an amazingly low 30 lux ( 2.8fc) at f114, making the XC-A1 the ideal
choice for difficult ENG work.
Compact, Lightweight, Solidly- Built Die- Cast Body Provides
Balanced Weight and EMI Shielding Sharp has precision- machined the die-cast camera body to create a durable, solid unit that assures optical alignment under the roughest
ENG applications.
Automatic Beam Optimization Adjustment ( A.B.0.) Built-in automatic beam optimization circuitry can handle incident light intensity up to 8 times higher than normal. This feature eliminates " comet tailing" and " blooming" phenomena caused by
bright pin- point light sources.
Color Temperature Filter System A 4- position rotating filter system allows selecting the optimum color temperature filter for indoors, normal outdoor light, bright sunlit outdoors, and cloudy/dim outdoor light levels. This equipment
insures the best possible picture image under every lighting
condition.
Power Conserving Standby Switch Switching to standby mode further extends running time with battery operation by reducing power consumption to a minimum while the
operator is waiting for the action to begin.
Information- Packed 1.5" Viewfinder The 1.5" underscanned electronic viewfinder can swivel a complete 180° and can slide right and left. Additional features include abuilt-in peaking circuit and a zebra pattern video level indicator with
adjustable threshold.
Multi- Standard Intercom System The intercom provides communication with virtually all major 2-wire
intercoms presently in use.
XC-A1 (ENG configuration, less lens)
$6500.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Optical System: Lens Mount: Pick- Up Tubes: Scanning System: Synchronization: a. Internal Synchronization:
b. External Synchronization: Timing for External Synchronization:
c. Blanking Width:
Color Encoder System: Sensitivity: Standard Illumination: Resolution:
S/N Ratio:
Registration Error: a. Zone 1 ( within acircle of
diameter equal to 80% of picture height): b. Zone 2 ( within acircle of diameter equal to picture width): c. Zone 3 ( outside of Zone 2): Geometric Distortion: Color Temperature Compensation:
Gain Boost: Detail Correction:
Automatics:
Character Display:
Prism beam splitter ( f/1.4) with bias light injection Bayonet Three 2/3" Diode Gun LOC MS Saticons"
525 lines; 2:1 interlace 30 frames/second
Built-in sync generator ( meets SC- H Phase requirements of RS- 170A) Locks to composite video or black burst H- sync adjustable from 2i. sec. delay to 41-( sec. advance with respect to gen -lock input signal. Subcarrier phase adjustable 360° with respect to gen -lock input signal H- Blanking adjustable from 10.0 µsec. V- Blanking selectable-- 18, 19 or 20 lines NTSC Il, (1System)
ABO: Auto Iris: Zebra Indication: Color Ber:
Flare Compensation: Input Signals: 2. Gen- Lock Signal:
b. Return Video: c. Mic:
Automatic Beam Optimization stabilizes highlights up to 8times normal Uses NAM ( non- additive mix) of RG&B plus center screen weighting Adjustable zebra with On/Off switch Split field 100% saturated, 75% amplitude in accordance with EIA RS- 189A ( with camera identification) Compensated for individual channels
1V, composite video or 0.43V, black burst (75 ohm) 2 inputs-- BNC connector, Remote/VTR connector 1V 175 ohm) composite video synchronous or nonsynchronous. 1input -- Remote/VTR connector 0dB or + 50 dB Gain ( internally selectable) 1input -- XLR connector
2000 lux 89.9% Refl. 3200°K f4 Horizontal- 750 lines-- center G-ch. ( typ.)
600 lines encoded Ityp.) 57 dB measured without Gamma and without
image enhancement
d. Tally: Output Signals: a. Encoded Video:
b. RGB Video:
1input -- Remote/VTR connector
1V ( 75 ohm) composite video 2outputs--Remote/VTR connector, BNC connector 0.714V 175 ohm) non-composite 1output for each signal at Remote/VTR connector
(GRN with sync available)
Less than 0.1% of picture height Less than 0.2% of picture height Less than 0.5% of picture height Less than 1.5% of picture height
c. Monitor Video: (on encoded output)
d. Mic Audio:
Power Requirements:
Ambient Operating
1V ( 75 ohn). RGB individual video, encoded video, R- G, B- G. Registration video -20 dBm or - 70 dBm 600 ohm unbalanced 1 output-- Remote/VTR connector
+ 10V to + 17.4V DC, approx. 22W regardless of input voltage
Built-in optical filter turret, 3200°K, 5600°K, 5800°K, + 12% ND, cap and built-in auto-white balance circuit with memory produce total range from 2000°K to 10,000°K + 9dB ( + 6dB) or
+ 18 dB I + 12 dB) +9 dB I + 6dB) or + 18 dB I + 12dB) 2 line type including level dependence, noise coring and comb filtering Auto-White, Auto- Black, Auto- Centering with
memory and presets VF character display of camera status. Optional status display on main video
Conditions: Weight: Dimensions:
-10°C to 4- 40°C ( 14°F to 104°F) less than 90% humidity Camera head approx. 8.58 lbs. ( 3.9kg) Viewfinder approx. 1.32 lbs. ( 0.6kg)
Height: Approx. 10-15/16" including legs Width: Approx. 15-7/8" including 1.5" viewfinder Depth: Approx. 7-13/16" including 1.5" viewfinder (without mic. ho)der)
Design and specifications subject to change without notice. 'Note: LOC [ Low Capacitance) MS [ Magnetic focus- Static deflection) Saticon is a
registered trademark of NHK.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice
VC-257
10 Sharp Plaza P.O. Box 588
SHARP Paramus, NJ 07652
(201) 265-5548
FROM SHARP MINDS COME SHARP PRODUCTS
ENG/EFP COLOR CAMERAS
XC-80BAT Anton/Bauer 14.4V 4AH heavy duty NiCad rechargeable battery
XC-70SC Anton/ Bauer slow battery charger XC-80FC Anton/ Bauer fast battery charger XC-8004 Anton/Bauer 8- hour quad battery charger XC-99BT Frezzolini 14.4V 4AH heavy duty NiCad re-
chargeable battery
XC-99SC Frezzolini slow battery charger
XC-99FC Frezzolini fast battery charger
XC-99S8 Frezzolini slow charger for 8batteries
495.00 64.00
495.00 895.00
495.00 63.00
395.00 495.00
VTR CABLES ( XC-80011/XC-900D) XC-8B3VT VTR cable with 14- pin connector XC-8B3VC VTR cable with 10- pin connector
$195.00 145.00
XC-800 II
OTHER ACCESSORIES ( XC-80011/XC-900D)
XC-800 II
PROFESSIONAL ENG/EFP COLOR CAMERA
·Saticon II® Tubes for reduced high light sticking ·750 lines resolution ·57dB SN · Rugged die-cast chassis and RFI protected side covers with
weatherproofing ·On- board microcomputer · Flare compensation
XC-80CC
Heavy duty carrying case
$ 340.00
XC-80(IRR
Tripod quick release plate - heavy duty
123.00
XC-80LB
Light bracket with universal stud
45.00
XC-800KIT-0001 Spare parts kit for XC-800
2995.00
XC-800SM
Spare service manual for XC-800,
XC-815VF, XC-870VF and XC-8ORPA
75.00
XC-900KIT-0001 Spare parts kit for XC-900D
2995.00
XC-900SM
Spare service manual for XC-900D,
XC-815VF, XC-870VF and XC-8ORPA
75.00
· Dynamic beam optimization ·Geometry correction
·Test calibration signal with dual ramp for gamma correction ·2line image enhancement with comb filtering, noise coring and level
dependence · + 9dB, + 18dB gain switch ·Continuous gamma correction
CAMERA CABLES ( XC-800 II/XC-900D)
Standard Cables for connecting between camera head and R.O.P.
Stock Lengths XC-8B70 Camera cable - 70 feet
$ 560.00
XC-86150 Camera cable - 150 feet
800.00
XC-8B300 Camera cable - 300 feet
1250.00
· Digital auto white and auto black balance maintains balance when changing gain
·Split- field color bars IEIA RS- 189A) ·Built-in Gen- Lock with H and SC phase shifters ·Broadcast IEt Q encoder · Phantom power for condenser microphones ·Video and audio monitoring for recording and playback · Extremely accurate shading compensation ·Serial data transmission to reduce size, weight and cost of camera
cable
·Glass f / 1.4 prism beam splitter
XC-900D
DIODE GUN PLUMBICON* ENG/EFP COLOR CAMERA
·Three bias- lighted diode gun Plumbicon* tubes with prism and linear matrix masking
·Compact, light and sturdy die-cast body- maintains weight balance
· Dynamic beam optimization and two-line image enhancement · Low power consumption ·On- board micro- computer for unparalleled functions and accuracy · + 9 dB/ + 18 dB high gain switch · Built-in genlock circuit
XC-800PP ENG-PORTABLE PACKAGE
·Adjustable blanking width
Includes:
·Optical shock mount system
XC-800H Camera head with quick disconnect tripod mount, battery
·Triax ready
bracket, service manual, extender board, spare fuses,
registration chart.
XC-815VF 1.5" high resolution viewfinder with Zebra pattern, adjust-
able peaking, underscan and high gain indicator.
XC-812AA AC power adaptor.
XC-80CC Heavy duty carrying case.
XC-800PP ENG-Portable Package
$7500.00
(Less Lens/Less VTR Cable)
CAMERA HEAD AND COMPONENTS
XC-900PP ENG-PORTABLE PACKAGE
XC-900D Camera head with quick disconnect tripod mount, battery
bracket, service manual, extender board, spare fuses,
registration chart.
XC-815VF 1.5" high resolution viewfinder with Zebra pattern, adjust-
able peaking, underscan and high gain indicator.
XC-812AA AC power adaptor.
XC-80CC Heavy duty carrying case.
XC-900PP ENG-Portable Package
$19,995.00
XC-800H XC-815VF
Camera head with quick disconnect tripod mount, battery bracket, service manual, ex-
tender board, spare fuses, registration chart . $6240.00 1.5" High resolution viewfinder with Zebra pat-
(Less Lens/Less VTR Cable)
CAMERA HEAD AND COMPONENTS XC-900D Camera head with quick disconnect tripod
tern, adjustable peaking, underscan and high
mount, battery bracket, service manual, ex-
gain indicator
$695.00
XC-803TX Triax System. Includes base station and
camera head
$9995.00
XC-870VF 7" High resolution underscanned studio view-
finder with Zebra pattern and adjustable peak-
ing
$770.00
XC-8ORPA Remote operation panel ( includes R.O.P. adap-
tor) digital microprocessor controlled with serial
data transmission and black stretch
2200.00
XC-802RA R . 0. P. adaptor ( included with XC-80R PA I ..
455.00
tender board, spare fuses, registration chart $18,735.00 XC-815VF 1.5" high resolution viewfinder with Zebra pat-
tern, adjustable peaking underscan and high
gain indicator XC-870VF 7" high resolution underscanned studio view-
695.00
finder with Zebra pattern and adjustable
peaking
770.00
XC-8ORPA Remote operation panel ( includes R.O.P adaptor), digital microprocessor controlled
with serial data transmission and black stretch 2200.00
XC-802RA R . 0. P. adaptor ( included with XC-80R PA)
455.00
AC ADAPTOR, BATTERY AND CHARGERS ( XC-80011/XC-900D) XC-812AA AC power adaptor, mounts directly to camera
XC-803TX Triax system, includes base station and camera head
9995.00
head or can be used remotely
$225.00
* Plumbicon is atrademark
VC- 258
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
sv SMITH-VICTOR
TRIPODS
27740 Hopkins Ave.
Valencia, CA 91355 (805) 257-4447
3000AF 660506
A working range from 63" to practically ground level makes this the
ideal choice for special applications. Construction: 3- section anodized aluminum channel
Channel Size: 28 x21mm Height: 63", Weight: 6 lbs.
Folded Length: 233/ 4 " Center Column: 2-piece reversible manual lift
Other Indexed, locking telescopic braces
$89.95
2000AF 660501
Smaller, lighter weight version of the 3000AF, the 2000AF offers the
same capabilities in asmaller package.
Construction: 3- section anodized aluminum channel
Channel Size: 24 x18mm
Height: 57", Weight: 51/ 2 lbs. Folded Length: 22 1/ 2 " Center Column: 2-piece reversible manual lift
Other: Indexed, locking telescopic braces
$84.96
3000GLB 660507
Our best conventional tripod, the 3000GLB has all the sought-after
features. Construction: 3- section anodized aluminum channel
Channel Size: 28 x21mm Height: 63", Weight: 61/ 2 lbs.
Folded Length: 233/ 4 " Center Column: Gear operated Other: Reversible pan- head, Center braced legs
$79.95
2000GLB 660502
A smaller, lighter weight version of the 3000GLB. Construction: 3- section anodized aluminum channel
Channel Size: 24 x18mm Height: 57", Weight: 5 lbs.
Folded Length: 22 1/ 2 " Center Column: Gear operated Other: Reversible pan- head, Center braced legs
$69.95
2000SQ 660503
The 2000SQ is abasic no-nonsense tripod with aprice to match.
Construction: 3- section anodized aluminum channel
Channel Size: 24 x18mm Height: 57", Weight: 41/ 2 "lbs. Folded Length: 22Y2"
Center Column: manual lift
$59.95
2000SQ Mini 660513
A heavy-duty, full-featured table top tripod designed for the serious
enthusiast. Construction: 3- section anodized aluminum channel
Channel Size: 24 x18mm
Height: 201/4", Weight: 33/ 4 lbs.
Folded Length: 11 1/ 2 " Center Column: manual lift
$49.95
KC5000 660510
An ultra- compact tubular leg tripod complete with vinyl carrying case.
Construction: 3- section tubular aluminum
Height: 43", Weight: 11/2 lbs. Folded Length: 16" Center Column: manual lift
$37.95
255 Monopod 660512
Deluxe compact monopod. Construction: 5- section tubular aluminum Height: 61", Weight: 12 oz. Folded Length: 15 1/ 2 " Head: Locking ball and socket Other: Knurled cam-type leg locks, wrist strap included
$27.95
Cable Release 660601 All metal 24" cable release with shutter release lock.
$4.95
Model 601 660542
Construction: 2-section anodized and lacquered aluminum channel
Channel Size: 1.1" x
Height: 60" with column fully extended, Weight: 6 lbs.
Folded Length: 32" Center Column Geared, with locking screw, 123 /4 "rise Panhead: Model AA 2-way, indexed head with locking oontrols. Oversize
panhandle. Geared carrera mounting screw for easy camera mounting
and removal Other: Center braces, rubber-tipped feet with metal spikes for outdoor
applications
$94.95
Model 65 660520
Construction: 2- section contoured anodized & lacquered aluminum tubing.
Channel Size: 1.1" x.81" Height: 62", Weight: 8.5 lbs. Folded Length: 33" Center Column: Safety double-geared with 11 3111" rise Panhead: Model AA 2-way, indexed head with locking controls. Oversize panhandle. Geared camera mounting screw for easy camera mounting and removal Other: 2" locking casters, locking center braces $ 169.95
Model 501 660541
Construction: 2- section anodized and lacquered aluminum channel
Channel Size: . 95- x . 71" Height: 59", Weight: 5lbs., 2ozs. Folded Length: 32" Center Column: Geared, with locking screw Panhead: Model CC 2- way, indexed head with locking controls. Oversize panhandle. Geared camera mounting screw. Other Center braces, rubber-tipped feet with steel ground spikes $84.95
Model 641 660544
Construction: 2- section contoured anodized & lacquered aluminum tubing.
Channel Size: 1.1" x . 81 Height: 60", Weight: 6 lbs., 8 ozs. Folded Length: 32" Center Column Geared Panhead: Model AA 2-way, indexed head with locking controls. Oversize panhandle. Geared camera mounting screw for easy camera mounting and
removal. Other: Locking center braces, rubber- tipped feet with steel ground spikes
$139.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-259
sv SMITH- VICTOR
27740 Hopkins Ave.
Valencia, CA 91355 (805) 257-4447
C MOUNT ADAPTORS
poLnevN3ls5ornAerrDot ASCPLARTMeEnRA wrrii c- MOUNT LENS
Don't be locked into the OEM lens supplied with the C- mount video cameras on the market. Smith- Victor C- mount adaptors allow maximum versatility and flexibility by enabling all popular 35mm photographic lenses to be mounted on all video cameras with a removable C- mount lens.
Now, any photographer can make use of their existing 35mm lenses to realize the true potential of their video cameras. Fisheyes, wide- angles, macros, telephotos, and zooms can all be adapted with one simple converter, and at a fraction of the cost of high-
priced, hard- to- get video lenses. The creative possibilities are almost endless.
Smith- Victor Kenlock C- mount adaptors are of a precisionmachined alloy featuring plated mounting flanges which conform to each lens manufacturer's specifications. To use, simply unscrew the existing C- mount video lens, affix the appropriate converter in its place, and attach the desired lens following the standard procedure common to that lens mount.
Adaptors are available to fit the following 35mm lens mounts:
Canon mount Nikon mount Pentax K mount
Pentax S mount Minolta mount Contax/Yashica mount Olympus mount
640300 640301 640302 640303 640304 640305 640306
$29.95 each
Note: C- mount adaptors are not meter- coupled. Lens apertures must be set manually.
VC- 260
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
S
0
N
Y
. Sony Drive
Park Ridge, NJ 07656
Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1 000
COLOR CAMERA
DXC -1850 HBST Color Video Camera
The DXC-1850 with Sony's HBST, High Band Saticon Trinicon, pickup tube delivers the best possible picture in asingle- tube camera. The camera head, by virtue of its compact design and extremely light weight, is ideally suited for use with specialized fiber optics and awide range of other optical instruments in fields ranging from medicine to metallurgy.
Features · 2/3"HBST ( High Band Saticon Trinicon) pickup tube for the best possible picture from asingle- tube color video camera · HBST pickup tube assures high resolution, good color fidelity and uniformity, low image lag and retention · Lightweight camera head ( less than 1lb. 9 oz.) for precision interface with optical equipment: microscopes used in medicine, biology, metallurgy · Full range of automatic controls for very simple, very safe operation · Ideal for surveillance and teleconferencing, especially when lighting and installation- space are limited · 3- mode white balance: automatic, manual and halogenlamp · Red Hue Expander, Red Detail Control for enhancing and delineating red color nuances · Provision for handle on control unit, which is 19" EIA Standard for rack mounting · Safety conscious features include an exterior finish highly resistant to alcohol and disinfectants, electrical leakage of less than 10 micro Amps and solid housings not prone to damage from accidental spills · On- screen illumination indicating lines simplify illumination adjustments · Uniformity control ensures optimum color quality with wide variety of optical instruments by compensating for color hue distortions · Builtin two line type Vertical Image Enhancer · Automatic Beam Optimizer -- ABO · VBS GenLock capability · Automatic and manual gain/iris control · Chroma level control
Specifications ·Pickup tube: 2/3" HBST tube · Scanning system: 525 lines 30
frames NTSC 2:1 interlace · Sync system: Internal or external · Horizontal resolution: 400 lines · Sensitivity: 2000 lux f.4 · Automatic gain control range: 120-2000 lux ( with f/2.5 lens) · Output: 1.0 Vp-p, sync negative 75 Ohms unbalanced x3 · Video signal-to-noise ratio: 53 dB · Lens mount: C- mount · Power requirement: AC 120V, 60 Hz + 11 to + 16 V DC · Power consumption: AC 26W DC 18W · Op-
erating temperatures: 0°C to + 40°C · Weight: CHU: 1lb 9oz ( 0.71 kg) CCU: 17 lb 10 oz ( 8.2 kg) · Dimensions: CHU: 2-3/8" x2-1/4" x
7-3/4" HWD 55mm x59mm x196mm HWD; CCU: 3-1/2" x16-3/4" x
13-3/8" HWD 88mm x424mm x340mm HWD
Supplied Accessories ·Camera cable 110m) · 75 Ohm coaxial cable with BNC connector 110m) · AC power cord · Camera head bracket · Bracket set for 19" rack mounting · Filter set IN D4, W14 and replacement tool) · Battery
(Eveready M 542)
Optional Accessories ·VCL-1106YB 6.1 auto iris power zoom lens · VCL-08S Wide angle lens · CCJ-10 10m camera cable · CCJ-25 25m camera cable · CCJ50 50m camera cable · MVA-11 Microscope adaptor · MVA-102 Endoscope adaptor for Olympus · MVA-102R Endoscope adaptor for C. Storz.
DXC-1850 Color Video Camera
$8500.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 261
SONY".
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
DXC-M3 A 3-Tube MF SaticorimColor Video Camera
gEputc,Es ve -(c000
COLOR CAMERAS
·MF Saticon Pickup Tube: Sony developed the 2/3" MF Saticon
tube to achieve both a significant improvement in resolution and a reduction in geometric distortion. The 3tube system in the DXC-M3, using the new technology, offers superior picture quality with ahigh level of operational simplicity.
·Superior Resolution: The MF Saticon tube with its reduced beam spot achieves 650 lines of resolution at the center. Corner resolution was also improved due to the flat focus effect realized in the new tube design.
·Outstanding Picture Quality: Measurable improvements in picture quality attained with Sony's new MF Saticon tube technology include less geometric distortion, less registration error, anti- highlight sticking, aS/N or 57 dB thanks to alow output capacitance type target electrode, exclusive Sony FET and asensitivity of 2000 lux at F4. A standard 2H vertical image enhancer also helps to create asharper
and crisper picture.
·Improved Operating Convenience: New sophistications in chip design enabled Sony to enhance the operation of the DXC-M3 with computer- assisted automatic centering without any special chart consultation, automatic black setting/automatic black balance and automatic white balance. A visual warning system has also been integrated into the viewfinder display so that the cameraman is alerted in the case of low light, incorrect balance or centering and when battery power is too low.
·Character Generator and Display: Highly advanced microcomputer type circuitry allows Sony to provide the added convenience of a built-in character generator that will hold 60 characters. Either letters or numbers can be stored, displayed in the viewfinder and recorded as titles, dating or identification coding.
· Portability Plus: Compact tube design and highly condensed circuitry result in improved portability. Streamlined design makes the camera easier to handle and lighter in weight with both camera and viewfinder totalling just over nine pounds.
PAC M3/15 Camera System
DXC-M3 Camera Head $ 8300.00 DC- 7 Battery adaptor
LC M3 Carrying case VCT-M3 Tripod adaptor CCQ-2AR Camera cable for
portable VTR interface DXF-M3 1.5" Electronic viewfinder J15X9.5B 15x zoom lens, f1.8, 9.5-143mm
Microphone holder
·A Highly Versatile System: Designed for optimum flexibility and versatility, the DXC-M3 also has aserial data command system that allows full remote control via new, lightweight, low cost 14 pin
connecting cables. There's also direct interface with most consumer VTRs with no additional adaptors, lens interchangeability with other
Sony 3 tube cameras and the ability to use a variety of different viewfinders.
DXC-M3 Camera System
DXC-M3 Camera Head DC- 7 Battery adaptor
LC- M3 Carrying case
VCT-M3 Tripod adaptor CCQ-2AR Camera cable for
portable VTR interface DXF-M3 1.5" Electronic viewfinder
Microphone holder
$6990.00
DXC-M3H Camera System
DXC-M3 Camera Head VCT-M3 Tripod Adaptor
CCQ-2AR Camera cable for portable VTR
interface
$6600.00
DXC-M3K Camera System DXC-M3 Camera Head
DC- 7 Battery adaptor LC- M3 Carrying case VCT-M3 Tripod adaptor CCO-2AR Camera cable for
portable VTR interface VCL-9148Y 14x zoom lens, f1.6. 9-126mm DXF-M3 1.5" electronic viewfinder
Microphone holder
PAC M3/12E Camera System DXC-M3 Camera Head $ 9150.00
DC- 7 Battery adaptor LC- M3 Carrying case VCT-M3 Tripod adaptor CCQ-2AR Camera cable for
portable VTR interface DXF-M3 1.5" Electronic viewfinder
Al2X9 BERM- 88 12x zoom lens with 2x extender, f1.7, 9-108mm
Microphone holder
Studio- M3 Camera System
DXC-M3 Camera Head $ 8860.00 VCT-M3 Tripod Adaptor CCQ-2AR Camera cable for
portable VTR interface CCU- M3 Camera control unit
CMA-7 AC adaptor RMM-1800 19" rack mount
DXF-50 Detachable 5" high
resolution electronic viewfinder
ENG/Studio-M3 Camera System DXC-M3 Camera Head$ 9300.00
DC- 7 Battery adaptor LC- M3 Carrying case VCT-M3 Tripod adaptor CCQ-2AR Camera cable for
portable VTR interface DXF-M3 1.5" Electronic viewfinder CCU- M3 Camera control unit CMA-7 AC adaptor RMM-1800 19" rack mount DX F-50 Detachable 5" high resolution electronic viewfinder
Microphone holder
VC- 262
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
soNy Sony Drive (n) Park Ridge, NJ 07656 Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1000
COLOR CAMERAS
DXC-M3A 3- Tube MF Saticon Color Video Camera
·MF SaticonTM Pickup Tube: Sony developed the 2/3" MF Saticon tube to achieve both a significant improvement in resolution and a reduction in geometric distortion. The 3tube system in the DXC-M3A, using the new technology, offers superior picture quality with ahigh level of operational simplicity.
· Superior Resolution: The MF Saticon tube with its reduced beam spot achieves 750 lines of resolution at the center. Corner resolution was also improved due to the flat focus effect realized in the new tube design. ·Outstanding Picture Quality: Measurable improvements in picture quality attained with Sony's new MF Saticon tube technology include less geometric distortion, less registration error, anti- highlight sticking, an S/N of 57 dB thanks to alow output capacitance type target electrode, exclusive Sony FET and asensitivity of 2000 lux at F4. A standard 2H vertical image enhancer also helps to create asharper and crisper picture.
·Improved Operating Convenience: New sophistications in chip design enabled Sony to enhance the operation of the DXC-M3A with computer- assisted automatic centering without any special chart consultation, automatic black setting/automatic black balance and automatic white balance. A visual warning system has also been integrated into the viewfinder display so that the cameraman is alerted in the case of low light, incorrect balance or centering and when battery power is too low.
·Color Character Generator and Display: Highly advanced microcomputer type circuitry allows Sony to provide the added convenience of a built-in character generator that will hold 48 characters. Either letters or numbers can be stored, displayed in the viewfinder and recorded as titles, dating or identification coding. Memory- stores character message.
· Portability Plus: Compact tube design and highly condensed circuitry result in improved portability. Streamlined design makes the camera easier to handle and lighter in weight with both camera and viewfinder totalling just over nine pounds.
·A Highly Versatile System: Designed for optimum flexibility and versatility, the DXC-M3A also has aserial data command system that allows full remote control via new, lightweight, low cost 14 pin connecting cables. There's also direct interface with most consumer VTRs with no additional adaptors, lens interchangeability with other Sony 3 tube cameras and the ability to use a variety of different viewfinders. NP- 1NiCad adaptor.
DXC-M3A Camera System
DXC -M3A DC -8
Camera Head Battery Adaptor
LC -M3 VCT -M3 CCQ-2AR DXF -M3A
Carrying Case Tripod Adaptor Camera cable for portable VTR interface.
15" Electronic viewfinder -- detachable.
$7400.00
DXC-M3AH Camera System
DXC -M3A VCT -M3 CCQ-2AR
Camera Head
Tripod Adaptor Camera cable for portable VTR interface.
$6950.00
DXC-M3A PORTABLE CONFIGURATION
DXC-M3AK Camera System
DXC -M3A DC -8
Camera Head Battery Adaptor
LC -M3
Carrying Case
VCT -M3 CCQ-2AR DXF -M3A J15X9.5B
Tripod Adaptor Camera cable for portable VTR interface. 15" Electronic viewfinder -- detachable.
15X Zoom lens f1.8, 9.5-143mm $8400.00
PAC M3A/12E Camera System
DXC -M3A DC -8 LC -M3
Camera Head
Battery Adaptor Carrying Case
VCT -M3 CCQ-2AR DXF -M3A
Tripod Adaptor Camera cable for portable VTR interface. 15" Electronic viewfinder -- detachable.
Al2X9BERM -88
12X Zoom lens with 2X extender, f1.7,
9-108mm
$9550.00
Studio-M3A Camera System
DXC -M3A
Camera Head
VCT -M3 CCQ-2AR
Tripod Adaptor Camera cable for portable VTR interface.
CMA -8 RMM -1800 DXF -50
AC adaptor/camera.
19" Rack mount.
Detachable 5" high resolution electronic
viewfinder.
$9200.00
ENG/Studio-M3A Camera System
DXC -M3A DC -8 LC -M3 VCT -M3 CCQ-2AR DXF -M3A CCU -M3 CMA -8 RMM -1800 DXF -50
Camera Head
Battery Adaptor
Carrying Case
Tripod Adaptor
Camera cable for portable VTR interface.
15" Electronic viewfinder -- detachable.
Camera control unit.
AC adaptor/camera.
19" Rack mount.
Detachable 5" high resolution electronic
viewfinder.
$9650.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 263
SON-Y.
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656
Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1000
COLOR CAMERA
DXC-1820KA SMF TRINICON® COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
FEATURES
· Lightweight, Rugged Aluminum Diecast Camera Body ·Optical Filter for Shooting in Fluorescent Light ·Vertical Image Enhancer Standard ·Built- In Electret Condenser Microphone ·Built- In Color Bar Generator ·Adjustable Horizontal and Vertical Blanking Width ·Intercommunication Headset Jack On Camera Head ·Built- In Bias Light ·Optical Black System ·Diode Gun ·SaticonTM Layer · MF System ·Trinicon System
12:1 Servo Zoom Lens Standard ( DXC-1820KA)
The 12:1 f / 1.6 servo zoom lens provides zoom with variable speed, wide range macro and auto iris and there is a 14:1 f / 1.6 servo zoom lens also available as an optional accessory. The lenses automatically close to protect the pickup tube when the power to the camera is turned off.
Full System Capability
The camera can be used as a studio camera when connected to a CCU- 1800 camera control unit. The CCU can remotely control most of the functions of the camera. The CCU, a4" viewfinder/monitor and AC adaptor can all be mounted in asingle standard 19" rack and the system can be easily configured for either EFP or studio use.
DXC-1820KA
Information Pack 1.5" High Resolution Viewfinder
A 1.5" high resolution ( 400 lines) viewfinder monitors the recording picture. Warning indicators in the viewfinder illuminate if ( 11 there is a problem with the VTR or the tape, ( 2) the battery is weak, ( 3) the lighting is insufficient, or ( 4) the video output level is too low. The playback picture and the return video picture can be viewed when the camera and aVTR are connected with a CCO camera cable.
Automatic White Balance Adjustment w/Preset Position
The white balance is automatically adjusted by amicrocomputer and the adjusted value is stored in the digital memory even when the power is off. When the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRESET, awhite balance of 3200°K is obtained. This allows you to start recording without the need to adjust the white balance.
SPECFICATIONS Pickup Tube: 2/3" diode gun SMF Trinicon with built-in bias light, CT- 2232 Lens Mount: DXC-1820: S mount, DXC-1821: C mount Optical Filter: 3200°K, 4800°K, 5800°K, white fluorescent lamp Signal System: EIA standard, NTSC color Sync System: Internal sync or Genlock Horizontal Resolution: 300 lines Sensitivity: 200 fc ( 2000 lux) F4 at 3200°K, 89.9% reflectance Minimum Illumination: 4.0 fc ( 40 lux) at f/1.6, + 18d8 gain up Signal-to- Noise Ratio: 53dB in luminance channel Video Output: BNC ( 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms)
Sensitivity
The gain up function makes low light shooting possible down to 4fc (40 lux) and automatic, 0, + 6, + 12 and + 18dB positions are also provided.
VTR/CCU: Sony Q type 14P (automatic detection) Mic Input: Mini (- 60dB, 600 ohms) Genlock: BNC ( composite or black burst, 75 ohms) Gain Switch: Auto ( 0to + 12dB) 0/6/12/18dB
Automatic Beam Optimizer ( ABO)
Vertical Enhancer: 1H
An automatic beam optimizer allows the camera to accept alight input
Power Consumption: 12W ( camera head only), 14.1W ( w/1.5" VF)
that exceeds normal levels without causing comet tails or blooming and makes highlight handling very easy.
Operating Temperature: 32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C) Weight: Camera: 6 lbs. 6 oz. ( 2.9kg) Camera + 12X zoom lens +
Versatile Interfacing Capability
viewfinder + shoulder pad: 11 lbs. 11 oz. ( 5.3kg)
A four position VTR selection switch is provided to make interfacing with various types of portable VTRs possible without any additional adaptors.
Fader
The fader makes is possible to record with fade-in and fade-out for more professional results. The fade time can be adjusted from 0 seconds to about 5seconds.
Negative-Positive Picture Converter
The camera picture can be reversed to provide anegative picture for special effect.
Dimensions: 3-5/8"H x7-1/8"W x 12-7/8"D ( 90 x 180 x325mm)
DXC-1820KA
DXC-1821H Studio- 1820A * (Complete Studio Package) VCL-91454 VCT-12 CCOK-2 DXF-1820 LO-24ZS
LO- 24F
DXC 1820 Camera head, DXF 1820 1.5" viewfinder, VIC 1020SY 12x zoom. DC- 6Battery Adaptor, LC1820 carrying case, CCQ 2AR cable « Camera Head IC lens mourt) CCQ-2AR DXC 1820KA, CCU 1820, DXF-40, CMA8, RMM1800, LO 25, VCT-12
14:1 zoom lens 9-'26m f 16S ' ens mount Tripod adaptor for DXC 1820 only DXC 1820/ DXC 1821 H to SL2000 Camera Cable 1.5" Viewfinder for DXC 1820-DXC 1821H Lens conversion kit ( for zoom) for VCL1010SY or VCL914SY Lens conversion kit ( for focus) ,or VCL1010SY or VCL914SY
$3,345.00 2 600.00 5 980.00
1100.00 85.00 65.00
500.00 560.00 390.00
LO- 25
Studio Lens conversion kit for DXC-1820KA
Studio-1820A * Consists Of: DXC 1820KA, CCU 1820, DXF 40, CMA 8,
920.00
VC- 264
RMM 1800, LO 25, VCT 12
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SONYA
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
AVC-D1 Miniature CCD Video Camera
Compact enough to fit in the palm of your hand, the AVC-D1 delivers versatile performance with no sacrifice in video quality. Lightweight and easy to handle, it can be quickly attached to either a wall mount or tripod for use in amultitude of applications.
FEATURES CCD Image Sensor CCD ( Charge Coupled Device) solid-state image sensor for extended life and improved stability.
CCD Image Sensor Provides: · High resistance to image burning · Low lag · Excellent geometric accuracy · No magnetic interference
Lightweight and Compact Revolutionary size, 1.14"H x 1.73"W x 4.72"D, and ultralight weight, 7.7 oz., for
incredible versatility.
High Sensitivity High sensitivity makes low light shooting possible with minimum illumination of 0.3fc (3 lux).
Lens Interchangeability Special mini bayonet mount for ultra compactness. Supplied C mount adaptor allows use of C mount lenses.
Full Solid- State Design All electronic components are solid-state for video performance unaffected by shock and vibration.
Quick Start- Up Shooting start-up requires 0.5 seconds and no preheating is necessary.
Tripod Mountable Tripod attachment screw holes of 1/4" and 3/8" make mounting possible on both tripods and pan/tilt units. The attachment is removable from the bottom of the unit and mountable on the top cover.
Supplied Accessories Standard Lens with IR Filter: f114, 16mm, manual iris, manual focus lens with detachable IR cut filter.
C Mount Adaptor: Any C mount lens can be attached by using this C mount adaptor.
ND Filter: The 1/64 ND filter attaches to the standard lens.
CCD-G5 Color Video Camera
·Ultra- compact portable color video camera using solid-state CCD ( ChargeCoupled Device) imaging sensor
· Lightweight: 2 lbs., 7 oz. · Exceptional color fidelity and uniformity ·High sensitivity ( down to 30 lux) ·No image lag and burn · Low power consumption with no warm-
up time necessary · High quality 6:1 power zoom lens with
macro position · Built-in electronic viewfinder with 1-1/2"
B/W CRT ·Auto white balance · Record/review
(with SL-2000/SL-2500/SL-27001 · Electronic fader ·2- channel audio recording capability ·Weight: 2lbs., 5oz. ·Dimensions: 4"W x3-7/8"H x7"D)
Supplied Accessories Shoulder strap, ME-20H earphone, lens cap.
$1300.00
Optional Accessories Camera Extension Cable: CCK-5 ...$ 48.00
Camera Extension Cable: CCK-10 .. 63.00
Camera Plug Adaptor: CMA-1010A.. 55.00
Camera Adaptor Cord: CMA-1030
55.00
Unidirectional External Microphone: ECM-K100B
60.00
External Zoom Microphone: ECM-Z300C
150.00
Hand Grip: GP- 10
30.00
Camera AC Power Adaptor: HVA-200
Camera AC Power Adaptor: HVA-220
Special Effects Generator: HVS-120K
55.00 65.00 550.00
External Microphone Shoe: SAD- 100
25.00
CCD CAMERAS
AVC-D1
CCDC-10: 33' connecting cable ( for use with CMA-D1). AVC-D1 CCD Video Camera $ 1350.00
Optional Accessories
CMA-D1 AC Adaptor: The CMA-D1 sup-
plies power to two AVC-D1s simultan-
eously. Power Requirements: 120V AC,
50/60Hz, DC Out: 12V, 1A, 2 outputs,
Weight: 3lbs., 15 ozs. ( 1.8kg), Dimensions:
2.75"H x6.50"W x5.25"D
$220.00
VCL-08D1 Auto Iris Lens
CCDC-25 82' DC Power Cable: (For Use
with CMA-Dl )
POR
CCDC-50 165' DC Power Cable: (For Use
with CMA-D1)
POR
Tripod Dolly: TPD-8
85.00
Wide Attachment Lens: VCL-0758WA
55.00
Wide Conversion Lens: VCL-0758A .. 135.00
Teleconversion Lens: VCL-1558A . . .130.00
Lightweight Tripod: VCT-40
110.00
Heavy Duly Tripod: VCT-150K
199.95
Filter Kit: VF- 105A
65.00
CCD-G5
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 265
SON-Y.
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
MONOCHROME CAMERAS
AVC-1400 COMPACT MONOCHROME VIDEO CAMERA
Consists of a camera head and a separate power unit to make the camera head truly compact and lightweight. Ideal for surveillance or observation system. Power supply and video signal transmission with a single coaxial cable. Easy handling and adjustment: only focus adjustment. Automatic Sensitivity control for the most suitable lighting condition adjustment. Light Emitting Diodes for pilot lamp. Camera Weight: 2lbs., 2ozs. Dimensions: 8" x4" x21/ 2 ". Power Unit Weight: 2 lbs., 13 ozs. Dimensions: 61/ 2 "x23/8"x45/8"
AVC-1400. Black and White Surveillance Camera with
16mm f/1.7 lens
$495.00
AVC-3260DX VERSATILE MONOCHROME VIDEO CAMERA
Easy-to- operate video camera for versatile applications such as program production at small- size video studio, surveillance system, etc. Sharp and crisp picture due to minimal interference and excellent resolution. Stable quality performance assured by precise engineering and reliable solidstate circuitry. Reinforced mechanical construction assures lasting stable performance and stability against temperature change, vibration, impact, etc. Automatic sensitivity control for regulating camera sensitivity to suit a wide range of lighting conditions. Light Level Switch provides clear pictures under lighting intensity of as low as 15 lux. There are two types of camera output. VIDEO OUT: connects to avideo tape recorder or monitor for direct picture display, and VIDEO/ SYNC: connects to avideo tape recorder, or to other components such as special effects generator, wiper and switcher. Selectable between internal and external sync system. Adjustable pedestal level for contrast matching between cameras with multiple camera connections. Sony Viewfinder AVF-3250 ( supplied w/AVC-3250DX & AVC-3260DX) can be installed onto the camera for direct monitoring without any cable or additional hardware. Truly compact and lightweight.
AVC-3260DX. Black and White Studio Camera ensemble
including AVC-3260 camera, zoom lens, viewfinder, tripods,
microphone
$1165.00
AVC-1400
Camera Accessories
BC- 20. Dual battery charger for BP- 20 BP- 20A BP- 60 BC- 1000. Battery charger for six BP- 20A & BP- 60 BP- 60. Battery for DXC-1610, SLO-340 CCF-5. 6- pin camera extension cable, 16' CCF-10. 6- pin camera extension cable, 32' CCJ-1. 10- pin video audio extension cable, 5' CCJ-5. 10- pin video audio extension cable, 16' CCJ-10. 10- pin video audio extension cable, 32' CG- 101. Color sync generator
170.00 495.00
68.00 23.50 32.50 47.00 . 65.00 88.00 1100.00
VC- 266
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
S
0
NY" Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656
Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1000
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
CCU- 1800 CCU- M3 CMA-201A
Camera control unit for DXC-1800 $ 895.00
Camera control unit for DXC-M3 Recording adaptor to use HVC-2400, HVC-2800, with SLO-340
1200.00 100.00
CMA-204
Recording adaptor to use HVC-2400, HVC-2800, with VO -4800
130.00
CMA-205A Recording adaptor to use DXC-1800 with SL-2000
120.00
CMA-206M
Recording adaptor. Connects Sony DXC camera w/ Panasonic
portable recorder
125.00
CMA-206V
Recording adaptor. Connects Sony DXC camera w/JVC portable recorder
125.00
DR- 10A
Headset
66.00
DR- 100
Lightweight headset for intercom communication
95.00
DXF-M3
Detachable 1.5" viewfinder for DXC-M3
645.00
DXF-M3A
Detachable 1.5" viewfinder for DXC-M3A
895.00
DXF-50
Detachable 5" electronic high resolution viewfinder for
DXC-1800
830.00
LC2003
Carrying case for RMM-1800, CCU- 1800, CMA-7, DXF-40
250.00
LC- 2006 LC- M3
Carrying case for SEG-2000 Carrying case for DXC-M3
300.00 400.00
MVA-11
Microscope attachment for DXC-1800, DXC-1640, DXC-1850
535.00
MVA-102
Endoscope ( Olympus) adaptor for
2/3" Trinicon color cameras
2580.00
RMM-1800 19" rack mount for CCU- 1800, CMA-7, DXF-40
120.00
VCR- 16D
VCT-20A VCT-M3 EC- 0.5C2
Telecine adaptor for DXC-1800, DXC-1640
Tripod Tripod adaptor for DXC-M3 Microphone cable
577.00 100.00 130.00
30.00
Al2X9 BERM/88
12:1 9-108mm, f / 1.7 power zoom.
Auto iris w/2x extender
2250.00
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
CAMERA ACCESSORIES ( CONT'D)
Al2X9 BRM/88
12:1 9-108mm, f/1.7 power zoom 1220.00
LENSES AND LENS ACCESSORIES
A10X11 BRM
10:1 10-100mm, f / 1.6 power zoom. Auto iris. Bayonet mount $ 995.00
A14X9 BERM
14:1 9-126mm, f/ 1.7 power zoom
w/2x extender
4890.00
A14X10 BERM
14:1 10-140mm, f / 1.7 power zoom. Auto iris Bayonet mount
1330.00
A17X9 BERM
17:1 9-153mm, f / 1.7 power zoom. Auto iris. Bayonet mount w/2x extender
7800.00
J15X9.5B
15.1 9.5-143mm, f/1.8 power
zoom. Auto iris. Bayonet mount
1470.00
J13X9 BIE-2
13:1 9-118mm, f / 1.6 power zoom. Auto iris. Bayonet mount w/2x extender
4560.00
VCL-914BY 14:1 9-126mm, f/1.6 power zoom
for DXC-M3
1170.00
VCL-1206 Zoom 12.5-75mm f / 1.8, Cmount
302.00
VCL-08S
Wide angle lens 8mm f / 1.4, C mount for DXC-1800, DXC-1640, DXC-1850
280.00
VCL-1106YB 6:1 zoom 11-70mm f/1.4, 2speed power zoom. Auto iris, macrofocus
529.00
VCL-1110Y
10:1 zoom, 11-110mm f/1.6, 2speed power zoom. Auto iris,
macrofocus
650.00
FMM-7
Focus manual module for Fujinon A14X9BERM lens and A17X9 BERM to be used with RM-S5A
125.00
LO- 10
2speed power zoom adaptor for VCL-1106YA, VCL-1106YAF lenses
250.00
LO- 21
Flexible cable drive for tripod control of zoom and focus of VCL-1110Y lens
495.00
LO- 22
Flexible cable drive for tripod control of zoom and focus of
VCL-1106YB
495.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 267
S
CONY. Sony Drive
(") Park Ridge, NJ 07656
Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1000
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
LENSES AND LENS ACCESSORIES ( CONT'D)
LO- 24F LO-24ZS LO- 1309 LO- 1011 RM-S5A
Studio conversion kit for DXC-M3 using VCL-914BY lens
Studio conversion kit for DXC-M3 using VCL-914BY lens
Studio conversion kit for Canon J13X9 BIE-2 and J15X9.5 B
Studio conversion kit for Fujinon A10X11 BRM and A14X10 BRM
Studio conversion kit for Fujinon lenses. Al9x9 BERM and Al7x9 BERM focus manual is excluded.
AC ADAPTORS/BATTERIES
AC- 340B
AC adaptor for SLO-340,* V0-4800* charges BP-20A, BP-60
ACP-220
AC adaptor for SL-2000, fits in unit's battery compartment
BP- 60
Battery for DXC-1640, DXC-1800,
DXC-M3, DXC-6000, VO-4800 and SLO-340, SEG-2000 and PVM-4000
BP80/ EP650
Rechargable battery pack for PVM-8000
BC- 20
Dual battery charger for BP-20, BP-20A and BP-60
BP-65AN NiCad battery for DXC-6000
BC-65AN Battery charger for BP-65AN
DC-65AN Battery attachment for BP-65AN
AC- 220
SL-2000 AC Adaptor
BC- 1000
Battery charger for six BP-20A and BP-60
CMA-5
AC adaptor for DXC-1640
CMA-7
AC adaptor for DXC-1800, DXC-6000 and DXC-M3
DC- 6
Battery adaptor case for DXC-1800, DXC-6000
DC- 7
Battery adaptor case for DXC-M3
DCC-2400B Car battery cord for SL-2000
DCC-3000 Car battery adaptor for VO-4800, DXC-1640, DXC-1800
HVA-200
AC adaptor for HVC-2200
NP- 1
Rechargeable battery pack ior SL- 2000
CABLES CAMERA CC DO-06
CCDD-2.5 CCDY-2.5
14 pin to 4pin cable, 2'. DC power cord for CCU- 1800 from CMA-7
Tallycable 2.5 meters, 4pin
18 pin CCY to 4pin 2.5 meter tallycable for MD- 1200 w/DXC-1800, DXC-1640
·AC Adaptor is supplied
390.00 560.00 775.00 800.00
848.00
300.00 109.00
68.00 130.00 170.00 570.00
85.00 172.00 155.00 495.00 192.00 360.00 68.00 160.00 35.00 357.00
52.00 60.00
22.00 11.00
35.00
CCF-5 CCF-10 CCJ-1
CCJ-5
CCJ-10
CCJ-25
6-pin camera extension cable 16'
6-pin camera extension cable 32'
10-pin video/audio extension cable 5'
10-pin video/audio extension cable 16'
10-pin video/audio extension cable 32'
10- pin video/audio extension cable 82'
CCJ-50
10- pin video/audio extension cable 165'
CCQ-10AM 14 pin extension cable for DXC-M3/CCU-M3 33'
CCO-25AM 14 pin extension cable for DXG-M3/CCU-M3 82'
CCCI-50AM 14 pin extension cable for DXC-M3/CCU-M3 165'
CCO-100AM 14 pin extension cable for DXC-M3/CCU-M3 333'
CCQ-2AR CCQ -5AR
14 pin extension cable for VO-4800/DXC-1640/DXC-1800/ DXC-6000/DXC-M3 6'
14 pin extension cable for VO-4800/DXC-1640/DXC-1800/ DXC-6000/DXC-M3 16'
CCQ-10AR
14 pin extension cable for
VO-4800/DXC-1640/DXC-1800/ DXC-6000/DXC-M3 33'
CCQ -25AR
14 pin extension cable for VO-4800/DXC-1640/DXC-1800/ DXC-6000/DXC-M3 82'
CCQ-50AR CCQJ-2
14 pin extension cable for VO-4800/DXC-1640/DXC-1800/ DXC-6000/DXC-M3 165'
14 pin to 10 pin cable 6'
CCJQ-0.5 10 pin to 14 pin cable 1.6'
CCQQ-1
CCQ cable extension connector
CCXX-1
Bulk head type CCX cable extension connector
CCX -10A CCX-25A
26 pin extension for DXC/ CCU-6000, 32'
26 pin extension cable for DXC/ CCU-6000, 82'
CCX-50A
26 pin extension cable for DXC/ CCU-6000, 165'
CCX-100A 26 pin extension cable for DXC/ CCU-6000, 330'
CCY-25
Camera extension cable for DXC-1210 w/JB-6A, 82'
21.50 32.50 47.00 65.00 88.00 148.00 258.00 150.00 285.00 530.00 1030.00
80.00
100.00
150.00
275.00
525.00 50.00 52.00 40.00 110.00 400.00 600.00 900.00 1500.00 434.00
VC-268
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
S ON"Y".
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
GCS- 50
SUPERBETA SYSTEM
GCS- 1
SUPERBETATH SYSTEM
RM-E50
PROFESSIONAL SUIPERBETA TN SERIES:
GCS-50 BETAMAX® EDITOR/RECORDER GCS- 1BETAMOVIE® CAMERA RM-E50 EDITING CONSOLE
The SuperBeta system is designed around anew recording technique that shifts the video carrier signal frequency higher by 800kHz, creating a wider luminance bandwidth. The resulting picture is sharper and has finer detail and texture than conventional Betamax) VCR. The new system with higher horizontal resolution and superior dubbing picture quality is ideal for program origination as well as multi- generation editing.
The Sony SuperBeta system includes the one-piece GCS- 1 Betamovie® color camera/recorder unit, the GCS- 50 Betamax editing videocassette recorder and the RM-E50 automatic editing control unit.
rivaling the picture quality of video tapes produced as second generation on conventional Betamax VCRs.
The GCS- 50's framing servo and external sync systems allow precise editing. Its rotary erase heads produce clean cuts at edit points in either insert or assemble mode. The editor has programmed assembly edit function, and capability for automatic insert editing of picture and sound from a camera or other sources ( simultaneously or independently) for title and graphics insertion.
GCS -1BETAMOVIE® ONE -PIECE CCD CAMERA
The GCS- 1is awell-balanced, extremely compact package, weighing just 5 lbs., 11 oz. It combines the high performance of a Charge Coupled Device ( CCD) image sensor with 250,000 picture elements and the convenience of abuilt-in recorder. The one-piece, cord-free design allows for quick start recording with just a single button control in both camera and recording operations.
The replacement of the conventional pick-up tubes with the CCD sensor has resulted in much reduced size, weight and power requirement. The CCD sensor produces accurate pictures with low lag, high resistance to image burning and offers long life and high stability of performance. Adoption of the high band recording system and the high density CCD image sensor create asharper and more detailed picture.
A digital LCD display on the GCS- 1incorporates atape counter and battery indicator. Also displayed are date or time and camera/ recorder operating status. The date/time information on the LCD window can also be recorded on videotape.
The GCS- 1's auto index mark- in function allows the user to record an index signal on the tape during shooting.
The GCS- 1camera/recorder unit also incorporates a6X power zoom lens with macro capability, one- inch black and white electronic viewfinder, built-in electric microphone and three- position ( OdB, AGC, 12dB) light sensitivity switch.
GCS -50 BETAMAX® VCR RECORDER/EDITOR
A prominent feature of the GCS- 50 Betamax VCR recorder/editor is greatly improved picture quality. It incorporates a newly developed D.A. Pro 4 head for asharp and noise- free picture even in search mode. The GCS- 50's high band recording system provides 270 TV lines of resolution ( horizontal) in color. Along with this new recording system, the newly adopted dubbing mode produces superior quality dubbing -- with fourth generation tapes produced on GCS- 50
For quick edit point location, the jog/shuttle dial allows picture and sound search at X/5, 1X, 2X and Betascan0 9X speeds, in both forward and reverse direction. During recording or playback, the GCS- 50 can record/erase an index signal that provides quick and easy program search and programmed repeat.
The outstanding picture quality of the GCS- 50 is complemented by its superior two channel audio permitting stereo or dual language recording and by the optional Beta Hi -Fi sound. The unit is capable of recording in Beta II and playback in Beta I, II and Ill modes.
RM -E50 AUTOMATIC EDITING CONTROL UNIT
The fully automated editing control unit RM-E50 offers automatic
programmed assembly of up to 64 events. The unit's timesaving preview function allows the user to rehearse an edit decision before it is actually executed.
In the auto edit mode, the RM-E50 memorizes all the edit in/out
points on a particular cassette or series of cassettes -- up to 64 segments. While executing the edit list for a master tape, all unnecessary scenes in the original footage are ignored. By feeding the appropriate cassettes indicated in the edit decision list, an entire program is assembled with great speed, ease and flexibility.
Automatic editing also saves ageneration, since multiple copies can
be auto- assembled directly from the original tapes in second generation with minimum loss of picture quality.
The jog/shuttle dial on the RM-E50 provides fast and accurate
picture/sound search. In shuttle mode the tape speed can be varied
at X/5, 1X, 2X and Betascan 9X speeds, in forward and reverse. The
jog dial permits frame- by- frame picture movement in both directions
for quick and precise edit point location. During operation, possibility
for editing errors is minimized by the alphanumeric information in the
three LCD windows which display source and editing VTR status and
editing commands. Among the other features of RM-E50 are ( TTL
level) CUE signal output, automatic tape protection system and
capabilities for butt edit and go- to function.
Prices
TBA
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-269
Professional Wireless Communication Systems
for: Broadcasters
Schools 8: Churches
Industry
Police, Fire 8: Security
Entertainers
Athletics
Race Car Crews
TV 8r Film Production
WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEMS
· Systems for hand-held mics, lavalier mics, electric instruments and ENG/EFP/LPTV.
·A variety of hand-held mics and finishes.
· VHF/UHF high band operation.
· All metal construction assures durability and RF shielding.
· Reduced RF bandwidth for multi unit operation.
Antenna switching diversity for glitch free reception.
Swintek systems are used whenever reliable, high quality sound transmission is required without the physical limitations and visual clutter of " hard- wired" microphones. All systems contain our patented dB- Se compandors which permit wide dynamic range without unnatural compression
Mark H. & Mark 2L RF Switching
Diversity for Sound Reinforcement Top- of- the line receivers that can be
powered by either 110 or 230 VAC power mains, optional built-in batteries, or an external source of 12 to 24 V DC.
Mark 3Cinematographer Receiver Top- of- the line compact, portable
receiver that is powered from any external 10 to 16 V DC power source or internal battery cells.
Mark QAC Institutional Receiver Compact, economical receiver for church,
school, business and similar groups
Mark QDC Video Production Receiver DC powered, compact receiver designed
to be integrated with any video or film camera. Interfaces to most microphones and wired intercoms.
Mark 50A / ENG & Mark 50A Compact pocket transmitters that may be
used with any dynamic, ribbon or electret condenser lavalier microphone.
Hand-held Microphones Swintek offers achoice of mic capsules,
finishes and antenna systems.
Mark 8, Mark 8C & Mark 9-2 Antenna combination diversity-- the
simplest, most effective multiple diversity antenna system for fade- free reception.
Mark IL
Hand-held Microphones
Mark 8. Mark 8C & Mark 9-2
tee
WIRELESS INTERCOM SYSTEMS
·Continuous hands- free communications.
·Full duplex operation (talk and listen simultaneously).
·Unlimited system configurations with easy operation.
· VHF/UHF high band operation for less interference and noise, more reliable operation.
· Interfaces to wired intercom system and TELCO lines.
ON GOVERNMENT SCHEDULE
The Swintek Mark 200 is the world's finest and most reliable wireless intercom system. It's simple to operate and exceptionally dependable utilizing the same technology as our systems used on the Space Shuttle. Each system is designed to meet your specific requirements using standard, fully tested, precision Swintek electronic components that are protected by rugged, industrial grade, all metal cases.
Mark 200 RPL / D Full duplex base station expander,
mounts up to five Mark 200D / R remote receivers per rack.
Mark 200 RPL / D
HS200D/ Tor HS200D / B Single- muff headset with noise cancel-
ling dynamic microphone and rubber duckie antenna. Dual- muff headsets also available or use your own headset. The Mark 200 system works with carbon or electret condenser mics.
Mark 200/D, 200/CPS Remote intercom units powered by bat-
tery or external DC source.
Mark 0/DC Remote intercom receiver powered by
battery or external DC source.
gbwiniek
TELECOMMUNICATIONS DIVISION
587 DIVISION ST. / CAMPBELL CA 95008
Mark 200 / CPS
(408)378-8091 / TELEX 497-0334 SWINTEK SUVL
CANADA Toronto. Ontario Cinequip Vancouver. BC Commercial Electronic Ltd.
Mark 200D Mark O / DC
VC-270
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HS 200D / T
TEKSKIL INDUSTRIES,
310-218 Blue Mountain Street
Coquitlam, British Columbia, Canada, V3K 4H2 (604) 931-3211 Telex 04-351186 WCST PSML
INC.
PROMPTER SYSTEM
909V CAMERA VIEWING UNIT
909T SCRIPT TRANSPORT
909 PROMPTER SYSTEM The Tekskil 909 is the first prompter designed specifically to work with your portable video camera. Other prompting systems, designed for heavy studio cameras, have frontmounted imaging monitors that must be counterweighted. The result is a clumsy system that doesn't lend itself to smooth camera work and is time-consuming to set up. The 909 eliminates these problems with a totally different design.
The 909 also fills an important need for many teleproduction studios: The ability to use a variety of material for on- camera prompts. State-of-the-art controls, time- saving innovations, and acompact, rugged design make the 909 system an extremely useful permanent accessory for your portable video camera.
Full-function display control The 909T provides for two NTSC inputs: One for the text camera and one for your portable camera, with instant switching between cameras. Script feed stops when the
talent or operator switches to the auxiliary video feed. When the script is recalled, it continues where it left off, at the exact speed it was moving before the switch. The 909T also provides individually- buffered NTSC video outputs to drive monitors and other equipment.
You can switch between normal and reverse video text displays. An adjustable video enhancer brightens poor- contrast originals to give your talent the sharpest possible display to make reading easier.
Light, rugged, and easy- to-work-with The mount is asingle basic unit -- alight, rugged, precision aluminum casting that is easy to transport lit also contains and protects the imaging monitor), and can be set up in the field in afew minutes without tools. It is the first prompter really suited to EFP and ENG.
Optional: A gen -lockable text camera This option gives you the ability to use the 9091 to create text or graphic overlays. Place the material under the camera; the 909T gives you amonochrome output to work with.
Now you can use script paper in any format The 909T Script Transport lets you feed almost anything to the monitor. You can use paper up to ten inches wide, including continuous computer printouts, and even whole
magazines -- the document guide is self-adjusting. When you have to work from avariety of written, typed, or printed material, this feature will simplify your life.
State-of-the-art microcircuitry controls The 9091 uses apulse frequency modulation circuit to give you precise one- touch control of script speed forward and backward. A bar- graph display indicates scroll- ready status, direction of movement, and speed. Once your script assistant has established the best speed for the talent, that precise speed can be used every time. Scrolling speed and video- input switching can also be controlled by means of a plug-in remote controller.
The 909 lets you pan and tilt your portable as smoothly as astudio camera The 909V Camera Viewing Unit mounts on any standardmount field or studio tripod and accepts any portable camera. It holds the prompting monitor below the camera, so that both are balanced over the tripod head. Tekskil uses folded optics -- asurface- reflectance mirror and a70/30 beamsplitter -- to bring the prompts up in front of the lens. The result: Smooth, easy pans and tilts, free from the clumsiness associated with traditional front- heavy prompters.
Let your talent see what the camera sees The 909 takes avideo output from the camera and lets you switch it onto the prompting monitor. While looking straight at the camera, the talent can see what the camera sees -- ideal for blocking scenes, pointing at weather maps, and generally reducing production time.
SPECIFICATIONS
Power:
120VAC, . 2amp, 60Hz; or ( optional)
240VAC, . 1amp, 50Hz
Tekskil 909V Viewing Unit
Weight:
(without monitor) 11.0 lbs. ( 5.0kg)
Imaging Monitor: 9" industrial monitor, Ikegami PM- 910A
or equivalent.
Dimensions:
18"H x12-1/2"W x19-7/8"D
(45.8 x31.7 x50.5cm)
Tekskil 909T Script Transport
Weight: ( without camera) 17.0 lbs. ( 7.7kg)
Inputs:
Outputs: Text Camera: Dimensions:
Two, 1V p- p, negative sync video, BNC
connector standard. Two individually buffered
NTSC
outputs
·
Panasonic WV 1400 or equivalent.
15-3 / 8"H x17-1/ 8"W x17-11/16"D
(39.0 x43.5 x44.9cm)
909 Prompter System -- Includes 909T, Iscript transport), 909V ( 9"
monitor) and Vidicon Camera
$4250.00
909V Camera viewing unit 9" monitor
$1525.00
909T Script transport includes Vidicon Camera and remote control $2850.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice
VC-271
TELESCRIPT, INC.
445 Livingston St. Norwood, NJ 07648 (201) 767-6733
MONITOR PROMPTING SYSTEMS
TELESCRIPTOR
Telescript's Monitor Prompting Systems consist of the " Monitor Prompter" ( M/P) featuring the Lever Principle and the Telecue and Telescriptor Transports.
The Telecue'
The compact, portable TELECUE transports Prompting scripts and graphics with equal facility. To facilitate script Prompting continuity and for remote location operation, 81/2 x11 sheets of paper should be taped together.
The Telescriptor' The TELESCRIPTOR transports Prompting scripts and graphics via a white Fiberglass Belt with equal facility. TELESCRIPTOR Prompting only requires that 81/2 x 11 sheets of paper be placed singly on the Transport's belt. Over and under lapping and immediate editing by exchanging sheets is the norm.
1 Monitor Prompting System ( MPS)-°'
Telecue Transport or Telescriptor Transport incl. Table w/Casters; Vidicon Camera w / Mounting Plate. Int. 2-1, Sweep Sw, 12.5mm f/ 1.8. 1" Format Lens. Remote Hand Control and 25' cable Includes:
· 1Monitor/Prompter ( 15", 1000 Line) · 1Monitor Lensview Assembly
· 1Monitor Mount Assembly · Manuals
1Monitor Prompting System w/Telecue
1Monitor Prompting System w/Telescriptor 1Monitor Prompting System w/C-64 Program Contrast Enhancer w/pkg.
$ 4430.00
4760.00 3060.00
385.00
2 Monitor Prompting System ( MPS)'''
Telecue Transport or Telescriptor Transport incl. Table w/Casters Vidicon Camera w/Mounting Plate. Int. 2-1. Sweep Sw, 12.5mm f/
1.8, 1" Format Lens. Remote Hand Control and 25' Cable, includes: ·2 Monitor/Prompter ( 15", 1000 Line) ·2 Monitor Lensview Assembly ·2 Monitor Mount Assembly ·2 Compensating Weight Assembly
1eiecue w/Telescriptor w/C-64 Program
$ 5860.00 6160.00 4490.00
PRODUCT COSTS
Telecue w/HC and 25' Cable Telescriptor w/ HC and 25' Cable
$2390.00 2690.00
C-64 PROGRAM ROM Cartridge, Support Disk, Remote Controller w/10 Pushbuttons, Cables
1390.00
Table w / Casters ( Telescriptor)
90.00
Dual Control w/HC features plus
Ind. Foot Pedal ( 2) control, 25' ext. ( 2) Vidicon Camera w/ Mounting Plate, Int. 2-1,
290.00
Sweep Sw, 12.5mm f1.8, 1" Format Lens
560.00
Monitor Prompter ( M/P) 15" 1000 L.
835.00
Monitor Prompter ( M/P) 17" 1000 L. (E'homes rehoused in alum/viny)). Sweep Sw.
865.00
Preview Monitor 9" 700 L
175.00
Monitor Lensview ( LV) Assembly w/ Beam-
splitter, Amb. Light Mask
$290.00-360.00
Monitor Mount Assembly w / Counterbalancing Plate and Access. Compensating Weiyht Assembly, CWT ( Pb),
$375.00-475.00
Ext. Plate and Hardware
110.00
Beamsplitters 30/70 or 40/60 with 2nd surface
$95.00-145.00
low reflecting coating.
$130.00-180.00
Wedge Adaptor and Wedge Counterweight ( Pb) and Hdwe Pedestal Weights
$50.00-70.00 $20.00-30.00
Contrast Enhancer, 300% INCR. Video Rev.
(A must for Out- of- Doors Prompting)
$410.00
Telepod ( off camera M/P support) Head, Adj.
Pedestal, Base- Casters, LV or direct MI Pviewing Mirror View for Public Speaking. Housing for M/P, Panels, Adj. Bstr. Holder and Bstr.
510.00 520.00
Universal Fluid Heads. 12 models for Cameras weighing 12 to 50 lbs! 205BVH.
Fluid Action 50 lb. video head, 2PRO pan handles, PRO claw ball, tripod with 2" std. ball cup,
spikes/rubber feet. Fluid head warranty: 2years
$1790.00
Video Blanking including Control Er 2-50' ext. cables Contrast Enhancer features Video Rev. ( white on black
135.00
or shades of gray). Necessary in well lighted or open areas . . . .395.00
Lightweight Carrying Cases. Foam lined, handles, latches,
straps " Space Age" Plastic
245.00
23" Monitors, 1COOL'for placement in key areas for walk- about
type speaking or group viewing
875.00
VC- 272
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TOTAL SPECTRUM MFG., INC.
20 Virginia Avenue West Nyack, NY 10994 (914) 358-8820
MOUNTS/ADAPTORS/CABLES
TSM-CMB
TSM-QRP 700/800
TSM- MLA VTR CABLE
TSM-QRP 79/730
TSM-CMB-79 Camera Mono- Brace
For use with all HL-79 cameras. Unit comes with quick- release mount for front of camera, camera brace with twist- lock height adjust-
ments, and waist belt with pocket for camera brace
$633.00
TSM-CMB-77 TSM-CMB-SB
Same as above for HL-77 cameras
Same as above for all Sony Broadcast cameras
633.00 633.00
TSM-QRP 79/730 Quick- Release Tripod Mount
Quick- Release Plate with spring- loaded plunger lock. Plate is an
extremely rugged design for direct replacement of Ikegami's HL-79/
ITC-730 mount
$146.00
TSM-QRP 700/800 Quick- Release Tripod Mount
Direct replacement for Sharp's XC-700/800 camera mounts. Same as
TSM-QRP 79/730 above. ( Also fits XC-900)
$146.00
Camera Microphone and Light Adaptors
Allow mounting of Sennheiser shotgun or similar microphone and
provides a3/8" stud for mounting alight ( mounting posts included
for clamp type lights)
$94.00
TSM-MLA-79D For HL-79 cameras up to the Dmodel TSM-MLA-79E For HL-79E cameras TSM-MLA-95 For HL-95 cameras TSM-MLA-83C For HL -83 center handle cameras TSM-MLA-730 For ITC- 730 cameras TSM-MLA-350 For ITC-350 cameras TSM-MLA-77 For HL-77 cameras TSM-MLA-MP (Extra) Light Mounting Post
$ 94.00 126.00 175.00 175.00
94.00 94.00
94.00 600
BCTV CAMERA ACCESSORIES
VTR/CAMERA CABLES
Flexible 10' VTR cable assembly with extra heavy duty strain relief. Use Table to order correct TSM ModeIN for VTR/camera combination. Cables for other VTR /camera combinations are available by special order.
VTR Cable Model e TSM-HL-79/BVU TSM-HL-83/BVU 7SM-HL-95/BVU TSM-ITC-730/BVU TSM-HL-79/4400 TSM-HL-83/4400 TSM-HL-9514-400
TSM-XC-700/BVU TSM-XC-800/BVU TS M-XC-700/4403 TSM-XC-800/4400
TSM-TK-76/BVU
TSM-TK-76/4400
TSM-FP-21/BVU TSM-FP-22/BVU TSM-FP-21/4400 TSM-FP-22/4400
TSM-FP-11/BVU
Camera Moceo . 1
Ikegami PGA Shabp Hitachi
HL -79 HL-83
1
HL -95
ITC- 730
I-. L-79
I
I-. L-83
HL -95
l
XC--7D0 XC-800
XC-700 XC-813C
7K-76
1K-76 I
I· FP- 21 FP- 22
FP- 21 FP- 22
I
FP- 11
VTR Model, Pana -
Sony JVC sonic
BVU 11C/50
4400
NU 9400
BVU 110/50
BVU 110/50
4400
BVU 110/50
4400
BVU 11n 150
4400
NU 9400
NU 9400
NU 9400
4333.00
320.00 333.00 340.00 333.00
320 -00
340.00
363.00
Pistol Grip Mounts
TSM-PGM-79C Pistol grip mount for mounting aCanon
Canon
Pistol grip to front of HL -79 camera
TSM-PGM-79F Pistol grip mount for mounting Fujinon
Fujinon
Pistol grip to front of HL -79 camera
87.00 200.00
TSM-BCTV-ZC 2Speed BCTV Zoom Control
For standard broadcast lens drives. Normal speed is 1.5:1 and " Fast"
speed is 0.75:1. Control has aclutch to prevent end stop damage and
adrag adjustment to provide smooth action
$820.00
TSM-BCTV-FC BCTV Focus Control
For standard broadcast lens drives. Control has adrag adjustment to
provide smooth action
$400.00
TSM-BCTV-DC BCTV Drive Cables 40" or 44"
Direct replacements for standard broadcast drive cables. These
cables are extremely flexible to provide smooth, consistent opera-
tion. There is adust seal on both ends to prevent contamination of
lubricants
$95.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-273
ULTIMATE SUPPORT SYSTEMS, INC.
P.O. Box 470
Fort Collins, CO 80522-4700 (303) 493-4488 Telex 4991589
ULTIMATE SUPPT
Applications include: projection
TS-30 TRIPOD STAND Each Tripod combines deep etched
stands for backlit screens, photography studio backdrops, studio
and clear anodized aluminum tubing with black polycarbonate parts to create alook that complements any product it upholds. The stand's weight is 6pounds ( 2.72 kg) and carries loads of up to 75 pounds ( 34 kg). Two sizes of Ultimate Support Systems Tripods are available. The
lights, signs, etc. Large, easy- to- use handknobs make height and base spread adjustments simple and quick. For traveling and storage ease, the Tripod Stand breaks down to slip into aslender 58" ( 1.47 m) waterproof nylon tote bag which is included. A variety of mounting adaptors are
TS-30 is 30% smaller than the TS-33, but is identical in design. Height is infinitely adjustable from 3'6" ( 1.07 m)
available and are described in full on the accessory page. The TM B-400 Tripod Mounting Bracket; innovative
to 6'7" ( 2m) making it ideal for
two piece mounting bracket solves the
speakers, PA systems, signs, photo studio lights, etc. Large, easy- to- use handknobs make height and base spread adjustments simple and quick. For traveling and storage ease, the Tripod Stand breaks down to slip into
problems normally associated with mounting speakers on tripods. For uneven surfaces, USS has introduced the TAK-330 Tripod Articulation Kit which converts an existing TS-33 into an articulating leg tripod.
aslender 42" ( 1.07 m) waterproof nylon tote bag which is included. A variety of mounting adaptors are available and are described on the accessory information page. Special interest is the TMB-400 Tripod Mounting Bracket; this innovative two piece mounting system solves the problems normally associated with mounting speakers on tripods. All USS lighting products can also be used with the TS-30. For uneven surfaces, USS has introduced the
TAK-300 Tripod Articulation Kit which converts an existing TS-30 into an articulating leg tripod.
SPECIFICATIONS
·Height: 3'6" to 6'7" ( 1.07 to 2m) ·Max Base Diameter: 47" ( 1.19 m) ·Load Capacity: 75 pounds ( 34 kg) ·Breakdown Dimensions: 41-1/4" x
6-1/2" dia. ( 1.05 x . 165 m dia.) ·Weight: 6pounds ( 2.72 kg)
·Set up time: 2minutes
TS- 30
$100.00
TS-33 TRIPOD STAND
Each Tripod combines deep etched
and clear anodized aluminum tubing
with black polycarbonate parts to
create alook that complements any
product it upholds. The stand's
weight is just 8pounds ( 3.63 kg) yet it
carries loads of up to 100 pounds
(45.36 kg). The TS-33 is height
adjustable from 5' ( 1.52 m) to 9'2"
(2.79 m). With its wide base spread of
62" ( 1.57 m) it is well suited for larger,
heavy speakers that need stability.
The TS-33 serves as the base for all
USS stage lighting products.
SPECIFICATIONS
·Height: 5'0" to 9'2" ( 1.52 to 2.79 m) ·Max. Base Diameter: 62" ( 1.57 m) · Load Capacity: 100 pounds
(45.36 kg) ·Breakdown Dimensions: 57-1/2" x
6-1/2" dia. ( 1.46 x1.64 m dia.) ·Weight: 8pounds ( 3.63 kg) ·Set up time: 2minutes
TS- 33
$ 120.00
ARTICULATING LEG TRIPODS
These new Ultimate Support Systems
enable their users to direct the sound
on almost any surface. By simply
adjusting ahandknob located
conveniently at the top of the leg, the
tripod can be infinitely adjusted to the
exact contours of the ground surface.
From outdoor concerts to stairs, this
innovative stand will securely hold
speakers, lights, etc., in the most
precarious positions. The design also
allows the tripod to be used normally
on flat surfaces when the articulating
leg is fully retracted. Tripods are
constructed of lightweight aluminum
alloy tubing and glass- reinforced
polycarbonate parts to produce an
end product that is not only extremely
light but able to hold loads up to
twelve times their own weight. Two
sizes of Ultimate Support Systems
Tripods are available. The TS- 30A has
amaximum height of 6'7" ( 2m), and
can hold up to 75 pounds ( 34 kg) of
equipment. The TS-33A has a
maximum height of 9'7" ( 2.79 m), and
can hold up to 100 pounds ( 45.36 kg).
For traveling and storage ease, the
tripod stands breakdown to slip into a
TRIPODS
TS- 30
TS- 33
TS- 30A
TS- 33A
waterproof nylon tote bag which is included. Avariety of mounting adaptors are available and are described in detail on the accessory information page.
SPECIFICATIONS TS- 30A
·Height: 3'6" to 6'7" ( 1.07 to 2m) ·Max. Leg Extension: 11" (. 29 m) ·Load Capacity: 75 pounds ( 34 kg) ·Breakdown Dimensions: 41-1/4" x
6-1/2" dia. ( 1.05 x.164 m) ·Weight: 6-1/2 pounds ( 2.95 kg) ·Set up time: 2minutes
TS -33A ·Height: 5' to 9'2" ( 1.52 to 2.79 m)
·Max. Leg Extension: 16" (. 41 m)
·Load Capacity: 100 pounds (45.36 kg)
·Breakdown Dimensions: 57-1/2" x
6-1/2" dia. ( 1.46 x . 164 m dia.) ·Weight: 8-1/2 pounds ( 3.86 kg) ·Set up time: 2minutes
TS- 30A TS- 33A
$ 115.00 135.00
VC-274
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ULTIMATE SUPPORT SYSTEMS, INC.
ACCESSORIES
P.O. Box 470 Fort Collins, CO 80522-4700 (303) 493-4488 Telex 4991 589
ULTIMATE SUPPT Can be used in conjunction with a microphone stand clamp for high miking applications. Plastic construction.
TM B-400
TAD- 138
TAD- 100
Tripod Mounting Bracket for TS- 30, TS- 33. USS's unique two part mounting system consisting of athin plate, which is screwed to
the bottom of the speaker, and aslide- in bracket which secures speaker to the Tripod. Constructed of glass- reinforced
polycarbonate. Mounting screws included.
BMB -200
Mounting Bracket for TS- 30, TS-33. Designed for attachment to speakers with
built in threaded inserts spaced 4-3/8" to 6"
(11.11 to 15.24 cm) apart. Constructed of glass reinforced polycarbonate. 1-1/2" ( 3.85 cm) inside diameter socket fits directly on USS Tripods. Mounting screws not
included.
TM B-400
BM B-200
BMB -200K
Mounting Bracket ( not shown). Identical to the BMB-200 except that it includes two 5/16-18 T-thumbscrews and two T- nuts. The bracket mounts directly to any speaker cabinet made of wood ( or particle board) at least 5/8" thick.
KT -36, KT -42, KT-48, KT-54
Keyboard Tiers. Used with KS- 12, KS- 22 and KS- 88. Comes in four widths: 36", 42", 48", 54" (. 91, 1.07, 1.22, 1.37 ml. Includes: Support Bars, Tee Fittings, and Rubber
KT-TIERS KSB-222, KSB-220, KSB-160, EXT-220 TAK-300, TAK-330
PKT-100
PKT-200
Pads.
KSB-222, KSB-220, KSB-160
Keyboard Support Bars. USS offers three various length support bars that will work on any size tier. The KSB-222 is 20" (. 51 m) long enabling its user to mount extremely deep keyboards either directly to one tier or to reach from afront tier to arear mounted tier. The KSB-220, 14-1/8" (. 36 m) long, is the most popular support bar and comes standard with all USS tiers. Extra KSB-220s may be used when mounting two keyboards
side by side, or to increase stability for heavier instruments. The KS- 160, 8-3/4" (.22 m) long, is designed to hold small instruments on akeyboard tier. Its short length is perfect for drum machines, sequencers, etc.
EXT -220
Support Bar Pin Extensions ( Pair). For Keyboard Tiers. Increases height of pins from 3/4" to 2-1/2" ( 1.91 to 6.35 cm). Used with slanted front instruments.
TAK-300, TAK-330
The Tripod Articulation Kits were designed specifically so that USS tripods might provide astable support for mounting speakers, lights, etc., on uneven surfaces such as outdoors or on stairs. The TAK-300 provides amaximum single leg extension of 11" (. 29 m) for the TS- 30, while the TAK-330 provides a16" (. 41 m Isingle leg extension for the TS- 33. Installation is quick and easy, as it uses existing parts from the tripod and common tools.
PKT -100
Parts Kit ( MI). For KS- 12, KS-22, KS- 88, KT- 36, KT-42, KT- 48, KT- 54, KS- 11, SS-44, SS-40, TS- 33, TS-30, VT-44, US-22, and US-44. Agenerous stock of parts for repairs and replacements. Part numbers and descriptions are inside the lid of the unbreakable plastic box.
PKT -200
Parts Kit Lighting). For TS- 30, TS-33, VE -24, CB-48, CB-24, HB-48, and HB-24. A generous stock of parts for repairs and replacements. Part numbers and descriptions are inside the lid of the unbreakable plastic box.
ABG -100
Accessory Bag. Holds all sections of a complete lighting tree ( less Tripod). Also useful for microphone stands etc. Heavy waterproof nylon with full length zipper and carrying handle.
EXP -550
Expander Bracket. Provides ameans of attaching power expanders, dimmer packs, etc., to the lighting tree. Bar has 1/4" (. 64 cm) holes drilled 8" ( 20.32 cm) apart. Hardware included.
VCS -712
Velcro Cord Straps ( pair) ( not shown). Use to secure power and audio cords to any USS stand. 7" ( 17.78 cm) long.
ABG-100
EXP-800
TAD -138
1-3/8" dia. Tripod Adaptor for TS- 30, TS-33. Allows Tripod to be used with any 1-3/8" (3.53 cm) inside diameter socket such as Peavey or EV-Tapco. Plastic construction.
TAD -100
1" dia. Tripod Adaptor for TS-30, TS- 33. Allows Tripod to be used with any 1" ( 2.56 cm) inside diameter socket such as Atlas.
ABG-100
BMB-200 BMB-200K EXP-550
EXT-220 KSB-222 KSB-220 KSB-160 PKT-200
PKT-100 TAD- 138
TAD- 100 TAK-330 TAK-300 TM B-400 VCS- 712
KT- 54 KT- 48 KT- 42 KT- 36
Accessory Bag
Mounting Bracket Mounting Bracket Kit ( includes mounting hardware) Expander Bracket
Keyboard Tier Pin Extensions ( pair) Keyboard Support Bar ( longer) Keyboard Support Bar ( standard) Keyboard Support Bar ( shorter) Parts Kit
Parts Kit 1-3/8" Tripod Adaptor
1" Tripod Adaptor Tripod Articulation Kit ( for TS- 33) Tripod Articulation Kit ( for TS- 30) Tripod Mounting Bracket Velcro Cord Straps ( pair)
54" Keyboard Tier 48" Keyboard Tier 42" Keyboard Tier 36" Keyboard Tier
$25.00
20.00 24.00 18.00
2.50 8 50 7 00 6 50 85.00
85.00 900
9 00 3(100 26.00 20.00
2 00
47.00 45.00 44.00 43.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 275
VDO-PA i
VIDEO/AUDIO
· Trvi)
164 Howes St. P.O. Box 67, Dept. BD
Port Orange, FL 32029-0067 (800) 874-5906
HAWKEYE CORDLESS VIDEO/AUDIO TRANSMITTER
Florida ( 800) 342-4900
TRANSMITTER
getagam,,,. ,411,11.111111
MODEL VTR-80 CORDLESS VIDEO/AUDIO TRANSMITTER Features
·Transmits live video/audio from video camera to any TV set
·Transmits recorded video/audio from VCR to any TV set
·Range approx. 200 feet · sharp -- clear picture ·No cable -- portable · operates on 12 volts DC ·Color or B/W · light weight -- miniature size ·Applications: -- home entertainment -- crime watch --
baby minder -- education -- home security -- and much more
The Video/Audio Transmitter, Hawkeye Model VTR-80 is
aportable, real time, fast scan, high resolution, cordless Video/Audio transmission device, with an operational range of more than 200 feet.
To transmit Live Video pictures, you simply plug in any
standard Video Camera to the Video/Audio input connections on the VTR-80 Video Transmitter.
Alternatively, you can transmit Recorded Video Tapes, directly from your VCR, by connecting the Video/Audio
output connections on your VCR to the Video/Audio input connections on the VTR-80 Video Transmitter.
With the Hawkeye Video Transmitter, your pictures, live or recorded, can be viewed on any standard Television, just turn the dial to UHF Channel 14.
VTR- 80
$399.95
Specifications
·Frequency Range:
X-tal controlled UHF Channel 14
·Number of Channels: Single Channel
·RF Output:
Below 500 mV/m at 30 meters
·Antenna Impedance: 50 Ohms
·Power Input:
12 Volts DC
·Power Consumption: Approx. 350 mA. ·Type of Modulation: Video -- AM
·Video Input: ·Video Sync:
·Video Carrier Stab: ·Audio Input:
Audio -- FM
1.0 Volt peak-to-peak/75 Ohms Negative Sync .002% 0.1 - 1.0 Volts RMS/600 Ohms
·RF Bandwidth:
· Deviation: · Resolution:
·Spurious Output: ·Harmonics Output: · Dimensions:
4.5 MHz Subcarrier Max. 6MHz
Max. 7kHz NTSC Standard 50 dB down 50 dB down
5.75(W) x1.50(H) x8.50(D)
inches
·Weight:
1.8 lbs.
VC- 276
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
(VDO-Pft
164 Howes Street P.O. Box 67, Dept. BD Port Orange, FL 32029-0067 (800) 874-5906 Florida ( 800) 342-4900
POWER BELTS
Professional Power Belts Various Models: 7to 20 AMP Hours
VDO-PAK offers the most complete range of battery power belts for the home videophile. All belts feature auto- reset circuit breaker for safety and ease of use. Group Ibelts utilize amodular design that allows user conversion of B600 or B800 to high- capacity B1000 model. Group II belts feature aquick conversion option that gives the user the choice of cutting weight and capacity by 50%, when lighter weight is important, and full power is not needed. All Group II belts are equipped with dual outlets, so that VCR and other equipment may be used simultaneously. Group Iand Group II contain gell cell batteries.
VDO-PAK supplies all Power Belts with electronically regulated high- output float chargers. From full discharge, aVDO-PAK belt will regain full capacity within 14 hours. The regulated float charger ensures that the Power Belt will never overcharge, regardless of how long the charger
is connected.
All Power Belts are completely adjustable for waist sizes 27-50", and provide comfortable, balanced 12 volt DC power for all applications. Belts are available in Black or Rust color heavy-duty Nylon, with quick- release buckle. VDO-PAK provides alimited 1-year warranty on all power
belts.
Model
VCR Et Camera
Operating Time
100W Quartz Light
GROUP I
13600 B850 B1000
6 Amp Power Belt 8.5 Amp Power Belt 10 Amp Power Belt
3-4 Hours
5-6 Hours 7-8 Fours
20-25 Minutes 40-45 Minutes 50-55 Minutes
Price
$169.95 199.95 224.95
GROUP ll
B1200 B1700
B2000
12 Amp Power Belt 17 Amp Power Belt
20 Amp Power Belt
8-9 Hours 11-12 Hours 14-16 Hours
55-60 Minutes 100-110 Minutes
120-130 Minutes
249.95 299.95 349.95
Listed capacities based on continuous recording without power zoom or auto focus options. Intermittent operation will increase rated capacity. VCR playback only opera -ion will result in approximately double the listed operating time. Unrts weigh approximately 1pound
per Amp Hour.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 277
VIDEOLARM, INC.
P.O. Box 802 2675-C Lithonia Ind. Blvd. Lithonia, GA 30058 (404) 482-1313 Telex 80-4569
CAMERA HOUSINGS
Upward Movement to, Easy Access
SECURITYSCAN IEt II
·Flexibly designed for 2' x2' drop ceilings, surface, pendant or wall mounting
·Accepts standard drive motors and zoom lens ·Upper trap door used for fine focusing camera ·Quick- release fasteners on mounting plate for ease of servicing ·Non-toxic, non-flammable metal upper support - Fire Marshall's
choice ·Silent operation
Model I
Top: Top is fabricated from 18 gauge steel and measures 23" square. A swinging door appearing on bottom of unit is fastened to steel top
on one side using two hinges. Swinging door measures 22-5/8" square and has a 20-3/4" diameter hole in its center. Four (4) butterfly fasteners are located around perimeter of 20-3/4" diameter
hole and are used to secure capsule to top in absence of drive motor. Swinging door is secured in place using two butterfly fasteners located on opposite side of hinges. Smaller trap door, measuring 7-3/4"W x13"L, is located on side of steel top and is fastened to top with a continuous hinge. Trap door is commonly used to secure swinging door and for fine focusing camera as it looks through outer capsule. Additionally, trap door has akeyed cam lock which is used to render entire unit tamper proof. Located within interior of top is a drive motor mounting plate measuring 7-3/4" square and containing
four (4) quick release type fasteners. Height of mounting plate is adjustable to enable housing to be fitted with a variety of drive motors. Entire top is designed for a2' x2' ceiling grid, pendant, wall or hard surface mounting. Optional acrylic finishing plates can be
fastened to all four ( 4) exterior flat sides of steel top. In addition, an optional trim frame is available for concealing rough cut which might exist when installing unit in asheet rock ceiling.
Capsule: Capsule is formed from 1/8" bronze acrylic with a maximum of one " F" stop light transmission loss. Interior of capsule is painted flat black with exception of viewing slot. Diameter of
capsule measures 20" and is attached to drive motor using two ( 2) plastic arms and four (4) quick release fasteners for ease in servicing. Installed capsule appears entirely black and will not disclose position of camera when bright background lighting is present.
In general the unit described above is designed to conceal a CCTV
surveillance camera without the use of mirrors or other reflective image devices. In addition it is designed for standard off-the- shelf type drive motors which are standard to the CCTV industry.
Model I
$399.00
Model II ( Simulated Unit)
A fabricated piece of 18 gauge steel measuring 23-6/8" square and
containing a20-3/4" diameter hole is used for the simulated model.
Four ( 4) butterfly fasteners are located around the perimeter of the
hole and are used to secure capsule to steel part. Interior of entire
capsule is painted flat black since live camera will not be present.
When placed into a2' x2' ceiling grid and viewed from the ground,
simulated model appears identical to Securityscan I. There are no provisions for mounting camera.
Model Il
$267.00
Max. Camera Length- 16"
Note: Length includes fully extended lens and rear cable
connectorls). Optional VC- 1, Vd -2, or VC- 3 coiled cable is recommended for this housing.
Pan TIP Assembly 4.-- SuDported by Pole
VIewIng Slot
SECURITYSCAN III Et IV
·Accepts standard drive motors and zoom lens ·Silent operation · Easy to install and service ·Vertical movement in upper hemisphere for easy access
Model Ill Top is formed from 1/8" thick, high- impact, black, hair- cell A.B.S.
(acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) and measures 20" in diameter and
has a 10" radius. The housing support bracket, threaded coupling, and pan/tilt mounting plate are located within interior of housing. Ceiling mounting plate is also included, but 1-3/4" tubing is not supplied. Once installed, the housing never has to be removed for
maintenance. The upper hemisphere can be lifted upward to expose pan/tilt assembly for any maintenance because all equipment is supported from pole.
Capsule: Capsule is formed from 1/8" bronze acrylic with a maximum of one " F" stop light transmission loss. Interior of capsule transmission loss. Interior of capsule is painted flat black with the
exception of aviewing slot. Diameter of capsule measures 20" and is
attached to drive motor using two ( 2) plastic arms. Installed capsule appears entirely black and will not reveal position of camera when bright background lighting is present.
In general the unit described above is designed to conceal a CCTV
surveillance camera without the use of mirrors or other reflective
image devices. In addition it is designed for standard off-the- shelf
type drive motors which are found in the CCTV industry.
Model Ill
$434.00
Model IV ( Simulated Unit)
Top is same make as above, with no provisions for mounting camera.
Interior of entire capsule is painted flat black, since live camera will
not be present. When viewed from the ground, simulated model
appears identical to Securityscan Ill.
Model IV
$392.00
Max. Camera Length- 15"
Note: Length includes fully extended lens and rear cable connectors). Recommended Drive Motors: Vicon V3000, V3200; PeIca PT-270/ 280; Quickset QPT-15.
VC- 278
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEOLARM, INC.
P.O. Box 802 2675-C Lithonia Ind. Blvd. Lithonia, GA 30058 (404) 482-1313 Telex 80-4569
MODEL: VIS-16 Fixed camera housing, wall or overhead application ·Aesthetically designed for indoor/outdoor covert
applications ·Easy to install and service ·Comes complete with all necessary mounting hardware
and security fasteners ·Low profile for wall or ceiling mounting ·Ideal for parking decks, train stations, interior halls or
entrances, drive-through bank windows
CAMERA HOUSINGS
Housing consists of base plate and upper cover which is
formed from 1/8" thick, high- impact, black, hair- cell
A.B.S. ( acrylonitrile butadiene styrene) and measures 20-1/2" square. Upper and lower parts of housing are connected using one 18" stainless steel hinge. Upper cover has a16" diameter hole in its center. Weatherproof gasketing is located around perimeter of 16" diameter hole
and around perimeter of upper cover. Upper cover is secured to base plate using two ( 2) security fasteners. A fixed camera mounting plate that is fully adjustable to 360° is located within interior of housing. Unit is designed for both interior and exterior applications, but, since no heaters or blowers are available for this unit, it should not
be installed in direct sunlight.
CAPSULE: capsule measures 16" in diameter and is
formed from 3/16" thick, high- impact, cell- cast acrylic
sheets with no visible light transmission loss on clear and a maximum of one " f" stop loss on tinted capsules. Unit
contains an opaque inner liner in which aviewing slot can
be cut to conceal direction of camera. If outer capsule is
painted or scratched by vandals, open unit and twist outer
and inner liner to clear location.
Model VIS-16
1$343.00
10
Max. Camera Length -- 12" Note: Length includes camera, lens, and rear cable connectors.
MODEL: OBSERVADOME IEt II Fixed camera housing, indoor discreet, recessed ceiling
applications.
·Flexibly designed for a2' x2' drop ceiling
·Easy to install ·Comes complete with all necessary mounting hardware
PRODUCT SPECIFICATION AND USER GUIDE
Model 0-1
Unit is formed from 24" x24" high- impact, bronze acrylic
sheets. Capsule measures 20" in diameter with a 10"
radius. Interior of capsule is painted flat black with the
exception of a viewing slot. Installed capsule appears
entirely black and will not reveal position of camera when
bright background lighting is present. Unit comes
complete with camera mounting hardware that allows 0°
to 90° viewing angle. Dome cover is available as an option
and is formed from high- impact styrene.
Model 0-1
$ 122.00
Model 0-2 Interior of capsule is painted entirely black, since no live
camera will be present. No camera mounting hardware is
included.
Model 0-2
$ 100.00
Max. Camera Length -- 11"
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-279
VIDEOLARM, INC.
P.O. Box 802 2675-C Lithonia Ind. Blvd. Lithonia, GA 30058 (404) 482-1313 Telex 80-4569
MODEL VLW-22 Recessed Housing For Outdoor Wall/Ceiling Applications · Comes complete with mounts for drive motor & metal
rough- in box · Accepts standard pan/tilt motors · Standard 22- inch diameter smoked acrylic capsule
(1/4"thick) · Optional fan and heater available · Hinged front door with cam lock · Smoked capsule only eliminates one f-stop of light
Model VLW-22 is designed for either arecessed wall or ceiling application. Metal rough- in box is painted black along with adjustable pan/tilt mount. Optional fan or heaters can be ordered in 240, 115 or 24 volts (AC). 22inch diameter smoked acrylic capsule is standard with this housing. Vicon V300OPT or Pelco PT270 or 280 pan/tilt motor recommended.
Dimensions: Rough- in box 25" x8", Front door 24 1/2"x 24 1/2 ", Capsule diameter 22" Max. camera length 16"
(length includes fully extended lens & rear cable connectors)
CAMERA HOUSINGS
MODEL VLP-20 Indoor/Outdoor CCTV Housing
· Aesthetically designed for indoor/outdoor use · Allows use of pan/tilt & zoom lens · Easy to install & service · 1/4-inch smoked capsule with high optical quality
(only one f-stop reduction of light transmission)
Model VLP-20 is attractively designed using black hair-cell textured plastic for the upper portion and our 1/4-inch smoked Plexiglas for the lower capsule ( only one f-stop of light is lost). The cast aluminum globe holder and ceiling mounting plate are painted acoordinating black. Styled to complement your next interior or exterior application such as hotel lobbies, banks, department stores and casinos. Since no blowers or heaters are available at this time, it is not recommended that housing be installed in direct sunlight.
Max. camera length 15"
(length includes fully extended lens & rear cable connectors)
NOTE: Optional VC- 1or VC- 2coiled video cable is recommended for above housing. Heaters and blowers are not available at this time.
Drive Motor Recommended: Vicon PT3000, or Pelco PT270 PTA 15
Housing supplied with threaded couplings but 13/ 4 " diameter tubing not supplied by Videolarm.
VLP-20WM WALL MOUNT
PENDANT MOUNT
Wall Mount
VLP-20
Pendant Mount
,,
Side View
I
· I I
?el. DIA
Front View
VLW-22 VLP-20
Recessed housing for outdoor wall or ceiling applications. Accepts standard pan/tilt or scanning motors. Complete with motor mount, rough- in box. '.," high impact tinted capsule ( 22" diameter). 16" maximum length for both camera and lens.
NOTE OPTIONAL HEATERS AND BLOWERS AVAILABLE
Pendant housing with sunshield. safety chain and tamper- proof fasteners. Complete with high impact tinted capsule. ( P-10410 toolhead driver to open/close unit not included). Unit designed for installations utilizing pan/tilt and zoom lenses. Shipped complete with threaded mounting plate for ceiling or optional designer wall mount. ( See VLP-20WM in mountirg accessories).
$525.00 476.00
VC-280
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEOLARM, INC.
P.O. Box 802 2675-C Lithonia Ind. Blvd. Lithonia, GA 30058 (404) 482-1313 Telex 80-4569
OUTDOOR HOUSINGS MODELS VL-294/VL-29/VL-22/VL-18
Now there is no need to use the more costly weatherized Pan and Tilt or Scanner Motors for outdoor installations. Since everything is enclosed in VIDEOLARM and the weight of a heavy metal conventional housing is no longer a factor, light duty indoor drive motors can be used resulting in a lower installation cost. The real savings, however, is due to the lack of service calls your company will experience, because it is a recognized fact that the VIDEOLARM all-weather camera housing eliminates . . .
CAMERA HOUSINGS
·Wind problems experienced with conventional equipment. Since everything is enclosed, the housing protects the gear mechanism of drive motors from harmful effects of high winds.
·Reduces weight load on drive motors. Pan/tilt or scanning motor must only contend with the weight of the camera and lens and not aheavy metal housing.
·Icing and salt air damage to drive motor. ·Fogging experienced with conventional outdoor surveillance
housing. ·The threat of "wire pulling" vandals since everything is sealed
within the housing and mounting bracket. · " Sky Watching" on behalf of security personnel resulting in burnt
or damaged vidicon tubes.
Metal Wall Bracket (See Accessory Sheet)
Blower Mounting Area
ABS IKorad Capped Top Enclosure
In short the " Better Alternative" has arrived for both indoor and
outdoor use. Four different sizes are now available - for the very low light level cameras, motorized zoom lenses and large pan tilts, to fixed lens cameras with scanning motors. Heaters
and blowers are also available in all voltages.
Dimensions
A Model # ( 0.D.)
VL-294
19-1/2"
D (I.D.)
26"
Sunshield
Safety Chain
Tamper Switch (optional)
Key Lock (Except for VL-18 Modell
High Impact Plastic Capsule
'Pan tilt and Camera Not Included
Shipping Weight 34 lbs.
VL-29
21-1/8"
9-1/4"
13"
26"
30.5 lbs.
VL-22
17"
VL-18
14"
8-1/2" 7"
11" 8-7/8"
22" 17-3/4"
27 lbs. 25 lbs.
Drive Motor Recommended
Vicon V33OPT V36OPT
Pelco PT570
Max. Camera Length see note 1
22"
Vicon V300OPT
20"
V36OPT
Pelco PT270/PM105 PT280/PM105
Vicon V3000
16"
Pelco PT270/PTA30
PT280/PTA30
Vicon 3200
14"
Pelco PS524
Guickset OPT 15
Note 1. Length includes fully extended lens and rear cable connector(s).
Model #
Description
User Cost
VL-18
All-weather housing with sunshield, safety chain and locking mechanism. 1/4" high impact clear capsule. For fixed and scanning installations. 14" maximum length
$329.00
VL-22
Same as VL-29 in design, including key lock. Designed for camera and motorized zoom lens, 16" maximum
385.00
VL-29 VL-294
All-weather housing with sunshield, safety chain and key lock. 1/4" high impact clear capsule. Designed for camera and motorized zoom lens, 20" maximum
Same as VL-29 with exception of 4" height extension on white upper part. For large pan/tilt motors. Designed for
406.00
cameras and motorized lenses, 22" maximum
539.00
NOTE: Above units are available with tinted capsule. Add $50.00 per unit and "T" to model number. Optional heaters and blowers available.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-281
VIDEOLARM, INC.
P.O. Box 802
2675-C Lithonia Ind. Blvd. Lithonia, GA 30058 (404) 482-1313 Telex 80-4569
FM VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
FM modulator and demodulator system for long-
line, interference- free video transmission. Long-
line video transmission without signal loss.
RG-20u coax
10.000 feet
24 Ga. wire
4,000 feet
Video transmission through any type wire
Interference- free video transmission
Complete ground loop isolation
Two-year warranty
For further information contact factory $1120.00
MICROWAVE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Completely self contained
23GHz microwave transmitter and receiver offering
video, and up to two audio subcarriers. Antennas
can be interchanged, which allows longer distance
transmission to take place. The system operates in
the 21.8 to 22.0 GHz and 23.0 to 23.2 GHZ bands.
Transmitter designed to fit inside model VI- 29 and
VL-294 environmental housing.
43380.00
INFRARED ILLUMINATORS A new approach to nighttime surveillance is offered
by low- light level illuminators placed alongside
camera in model VL-29 and VI- 294 environmental
housing. Projects the greatest possible light energy
over a maximum distance, both narrow- beam and
wide- beam versions are available. In continuous
operation, the surface of the illuminator housing
only exceeds ambient temperatures by 3°
fahrenheit
$1120.00
VC- 1/2/3
All coiled cables are 5' extended having braided copper video conductor and two ( 2) low- voltage power leads for camera. Each conductor is stranded
copper. Both ends of cable are sealed with heat shrink tubing to eliminate breakage at connectors.
VC- 1 VC- 2 VC- 3
819.00 20.00 22.00
VC- 4
5 coiled video cable ( 7' extended). Complete With
BNC ( M/F). Connectors on each end. 5conductors for zoom lens and 2 conductors for powering low
voltage camera. Each conductor supplied with
quick disconnect ends.
$68.00
ACCESSORIES
WM-18/22/29
7 gauge hot rolled channel iron 11 /2 x 3 with 21 /4 "
diameter holes for entering and exiting of cable.
Steel is dipped in oil and electrically galvanized for
rust prevention. WM-18/22 measures 13- 1-ix 16ki"L
square plate ( 10 gauge) measures 8'/. x8%, WM-29
measures 13"H x 'lei_ square plate measures 11% x
11%. Both plates have four spot welded Y.' x20" x
11 /2 "bolts.
WM-18 b 22 WM-29
878.00 83.00
CM-2/WA-2/CA-2
7 gauge hot rolled steel, dipped in oil and electrically galvanized for rust prevention. Each bracket has eight 7/16" mounting holes.
Note: all 3 brackets can be used with VL18,22,29,294.
13 8" ci)c
2' o/c
CM-2 WA-2 CA-2
$44.00 44.00 41.00
PTM-13
Quick release mounting plate for VL-18/22/29/294
housing. Adjustable in height and predrilled for an
assortment of drive motors. Contains four quick
release fasteners for removing drive motor and
camera. Also accommodates strip heaters. VLH-
24/115/240.
834.00
P1500
15' pole manufactured from 4"x4"x 1 /4 " steel. Unit
comes complete with two access panels and
adapter plate for mounting WM-18/22/29 brackets.
SECURITY POLE
$679.00
· -
P1500
IO 0
PA-2/3
Parapet mount adapter. Used in conjunction with WM-18/22/29 for flat wall or corner mounting. Hinged to allow rooftop servicing.
PA- 3: backup adapter plate for PA-2.
PA-2 PA-3
870.00 31.00
ZiOt VI. W
PARAPET MOUNT PA-2
Elbow minus backward. to allow rooftop senrIcIng
Actiollène 0010 for Flat Wan or Corn« Mounting
VLB-24v/115v/240v
VLB-24v 24 vac, 60Hz, 12 watt U.L. listed fan. Metal parts have been treated with corrosion inhibitors for outdoor use. 3125 RPM ( min) free air 1.4A ( max). Thermostat
provided-closes at 95° fand opens at 80° f $83.00
litountina Holm for Wk.111 or WM.29
linens Oat
.1.1 MOLES :ZIII/$· 0.4.
Laguna Salt
VLB-115v
115vac, 60Hz, . 18 amps U.L. listed fan. Same
description as above. Air delivery is 95 (cf m) $83.00
VLB-240v
240 vac, 60Hz, . 12 amps. U.L. listed far Same
description as above.
895.90
VLH-24v/1 15v/240v
VLH-24v
24vac, 176 ohms, 150 watts, 6.25 amps heating pads (set connected in series) constructed from 4 ply
fiberglass supported silicone rubber. Each pad backed with . 20 ( mil) aluminum. Thermostat
provided closes at 350 F and opens at 500 F $88.00
VLH-115v
115vac, 7.6 ohms, 575 watts, 5 amps. same
description as above.
$88.00
VLH-2405
240vac, 384 ohms. 150 watts, . 625 amps, same
description as above.
$75.00
PM-3
Pole mount is used in conjunction with WM-
18/22/29 brackets. Constructed of 7 gauge hot
rolled steel which is electrically galvanized. Straps
are stainless steel.
$70.00
VC-282
13·13·1. 1·00800N0 41.11.
FP- 1
Tinted acrylic finishing plates designed for use with
Securityscan Ion surface mount applications.
TR-1
480.00
Trim frame used for recessing Securityscan Ior II
into sheet rock ceiling.
$56.00
PK-2
Pendant kit for Securityscan I. Includes mounting
board and two threaded couplings for 1%" diameter
tubing. Tubing not included.
$65.00
CL- 800
16 II oz housings
silicone cleaner for capsules of all
$6.65
Nadal PA · 3
1
A.A.Mbie Adept« Pin. hA %Pm Siam«
-Je
WK-3
Wall mount kit for Securityscan. Includes mounting
board and " L" shaped mounting arm.
$99.00
VLP-20WM
Wall mount bracket for VLP-20, black aluminum.
P-10410
$85.00
Toolhead driver for captive security fasteners on
models VLP-20. VI W-22, and VIS -16.
$3.50
953
Right angle BNC male to BNC female connector
954
$5.60
Right angle, PL259 UHF at one end and female UHF
at other
$3.54
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEOLARM, INC.
P.O. Box 802 2675-C Lithonia Ind. Blvd. Lithonia, GA 30058 (404) 482-1313 Telex 80-4569
WATCHMANN An Environmental Simulated
Provides Real Security.
Security
System
That
MODEL W-1 -- System comes complete with:
·Simulated camera with built-in motion detector, high frequency sonalert and red alarm light
·Adjustable camera mounting bracket ·Weather resistant upper housing
·Rock resistant globe ·L-shaped housing mounting bracket
·Pole mounting straps ·Strapping clamps ( Requires standard screwdriver for
securing) Note: Can handle 800 watts
Model W- I
$685.00
MODEL W- I1 -- Scanning unit includes:
·All equipment above
·Plus scanning motor
Model W- I1
$875.00
Accessories: ·Flood light ( mounted on top of L-shaped bracket)
$16.80
·Warning sign ( with your company's name upon request) $19.00
How System Works: Once unit is installed, high frequency sonalert is activated and remains on until intruder crosses path of motion detector. Once motion detector senses movement, sonalert turns off and red alarm light turns on inside
weatherproof housing. The optional flood light will turn on at the same time the red alarm light turns on and can be
pointed in any direction.
Applications: ·Construction sites ·Lumber yards ·Automobile dealerships ·Truck dealers ·Parking lots
Patent pending
SECURITY SYSTEMS
WARNING Closed Circuit T.V.
Transmitting System is used to
protect this property. Violators will be prosecuted. The Management
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 283
VIDEOLARM, INC.
P.O. Box 802 2675-C Lithonia Ind. Blvd. Lithonia, GA 30058 (404) 482-1313 Telex 80-4569
VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
f1/ 4.1
rfi
L
FM 3100 MODULATION SYSTEM
MODELS FM 3100/FM 3200 FM VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
· FM Modulator and Demodulator System for long line interference free video transmission.
· Long Line Video Transmission without signal loss:
RG-59u coax
10,000 feet
24GA wire
4,000 feet
· Video Transmission through any type wire
. Interference Free video transmission . Complete ground loop isolation
· Two year warranty
SPECIFICATIONS
FM 3100T Modulator
· Power Requirements
·Operating Temperature
·Input Impendance ·Output Impendence
·Input Level (Video)
·Output Level ·Carrier Frequency
· Deviation
120 Volts 60Hz. 18 watts --20° Cto +70° C 75 ohms 75 ohms 14volts pp max + 66 dbmv (adjustable internally) 8 Mhz Normal
+ 1Mhz for 1.4 volts video
Fm 3100R
Demodulator · Power Requirements ·Operating TemperaCture
120 Volts 60 Hz, 18 watts -- 20° Cto + 50°
·Input lmpendence
75 ohms, 5MHz- 13 Mhz
·Return loss at 75 ohms
Less than 18 db, 5Mhz-13MHz
·Video output impendance
75 ohms
·Minimum signal for full limiting + 10 dbmv
FM 3100 System
· Video Response ·Tilt
·S/N
·Package size (both units) ·Coaxial Connections
·Primary fuse ·External Adjustments
·Transmission · Isolation
60 Hz to 3.8 MHz ( not for color) Less than 2%
Better than 40 db (+ 10 dbmv input to limiter at demodulator) 7x4x2 inches Type BNC 1/ 4 Amp None
10,000 Feet with RG 59 Foam Co-Ax
5000 Volt Isolation from ground loop.
FM VIDEO TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
FM 3100 FM 3100T FM 3100R FM 3200 FM 3300
Complete with FM 3100R ( 120 VAC) and FM 31001 ( 120 VAC). FM modulator only 115 VAC. Add 24 to model number when ordering 24 volt. FM demodulator only 115 VAC. Add 24 to model number when ordering 24 volt. Complete with FM 3100R ( 120 VAC) and FM 31001 ( 24 VAC) Complete with FM 3100R ( 240 VAC) and FM 3100T ( 240 VAC).
S1,120.00 545.00 620.00
1,120.00 1,120.00
VC-284
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEOTELECOM
12229 Montague St. Arleta, CA 91331 (818) 890-0947
THE BARBER " BABY" BOOM
Features ·Weight: 70 lbs. ·Vertical Boom: 6" to 11' ·Horizontal Swing: 14' ·Boom Radius: 360° ·Camera Tilt: 160° ·Camera Pan: 360° ·Crew Requirement: 1camera operator ·Set Up: 5to 10 minutes ·Maintenance: Minimal - No Motors or Pumps ·Space Requirements: 3 sq. feet on Standard Tripod -
operates excellently in small tight spaces ·Mounting: Any standard camera mount from aHigh Hat
to aTitan Crane ·Safety: Camera operator remains on the ground at all
times ·Portable Case: 10'L x10"H x30"W
A boom. A breakthrough. A revolutionary camera positioning system. The Barber " Baby" Boom was designed and developed to create unique camera angles, fluid movement,
versatile rapid positioning, and multi- dimensional combination moves that were never possible before.
You're familiar with traditional booms -- where the camera and the operator ride up into the air on the end of the boom arm. But the camera operator has no immediate control over height, swing or speed of movement. He has to rely on
2or 3grips to interpret his shot and position him in the right place, at the right time, at the right speed. Inefficient,
costly, and creatively limiting.
The Barber " Baby" Boom requires only you, the cameraman, to operate and control it. The camera is mounted on the end of the boom arm. You are at the other end with your
hands on the two controls. You look into the video monitor and begin to track the action...fast, slow, whatever speed
you need for the shot. With afeather light touch, you boom from 6" off the ground to 11 feet in the air. You swing the boom arm 14' horizontally ( adolly move without the dolly). You tilt the camera 160° up and down, pan it 360° and servo zoom and focus without ever taking your hands off the controls, your eyes off the action, or your feet off the
ground. It's all made possible by the Barber " Baby" Boom's center of gravity gimble head and counter balance parallelo-
gram design which allows asingle camera operator to vary camera height, angle, pan, tilt, boom, zoom, and focus simultaneously in one smooth continuous motion. Great in the studio or on location, easy to set up ( about 10 minutes),
and simple to operate.
Barber"Baby" Boom
$ 9950.00
CAMERA BOOM
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-285
VINTEN
EXCLUSIVELY DISTRIBUTED BY LISTEC TELEVISION EQUIP. CORP.
39 Cain Drive Plainview, NY 11803 (516) 694-8963
KESTREL CRANE
CRABBING LOW ANGLE DOLLY 3224-3
SPECIALIZED JIB ARMS
3754-3 POWERED JIB 3743-3 MANUAL JIB
CAPACITY: 450 LBS.
RANGE:
23" -- 77"
WEIGHT: 668 LBS. SUPPLIED WITH:
PNEUMATIC TIRES
(OPTIONAL
SOLID RUBBER WHEELS
WITH CABLE GUARDS)
3754-3 $35,000.00
3743-3
29,000.00
DOLPHIN CRANE ARM 3067-3 (Shown on 3064-3 Tritrack Folding Dolly)
CAPACITY: 350 LBS.
RANGE:
4-1/2" -- 25-1/2"
WEIGHT: 150 LBS.
SUPPLIED WITH:
CAMERA MOUNTING PLATFORM
CAMERAMAN'S SEAT
DETACHABLE PUSH BAR
FRONT AND REAR
CARRYING HANDLES
3224-3 $ 9,450.00
MERLIN REMOTE CONTROLLED JIB ARM 3257-3A/D
ENG/EFP
3211-3/3214-3 Short 3201-3/3212-3 Long
CAPACITY: 50 LBS.
RANGE:
0" -- 69-1/2"
(Standard Mounting)
WEIGHT: 51 LBS.
(Excluding Counterbalancing Weights)
SUPPLIED WITH:
BALANCE WEIGHTS
CHOICE OF BASE MOUNTING
CHOICE OF HEAD MOUNTING
3067-3 $6,875.00
Vinten TRIPODS/DOLLIES/ELEVATION UNITS
Microwave 3280-3 Head $ 1,200.00 3261-3 Tripod $ 1,350.00
Combo Package 3063-3 $2,200.00
Tripod/Dolly/Elevation
CAPACITY: 40 LBS.
RANGE:
0 -- 7'
(with Studio Pedestal)
WEIGHT: 200 LBS.
SUPPLIED WITH:
WEIGHTS
(Monitor Optional)
(Available with
Over or Under Slung Head)
3257-3A/D $21,000.00 ea.
Heavy Duty 3206-3 Short $ 1,725.00 3207-3 Long $ 1,725.00
CAPACITY: RANGE:
WEIGHT: PRICE:
3211-3 45 LBS. 12"-30"
6LBS. $550.00
3201-3 45 LBS. 21"-61"
8LBS. $600.00
CAPACITY:
3214-3 100 LBS.
3212-3 100 LBS.
RANGE:
12"-30"
21"-61"
WEIGHT:
9-1/2 LBS.
15 LBS.
PRICE:
$600.00 $650.00
COMPATIBLE DOLLY: 3208-3
(OPTIONAL SPREADER AVAILABLE)
VC-286
CAPACITY: 150 LBS. FULLY ADJUSTABLE POSITIVE LOCKING
CAPACITY: 100 LBS. RANGE: 36" -- 72" WEIGHT: 38 LBS.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CAPACITY: 250 LBS.
RANGE: SHORT 22" -- 37" LONG 27" -- 46" WEIGHT: 26 LBS.
COMPATIBLE DOLLY: 3719-3 (Shown with optional 3737-3 Elevation Unit)
VINTEN
EXCLUSIVELY DISTRIBUTED BY LISTEC TELEVISION EQUIP. CORP.
39 Cain Drive Plainview, NY 11803 (516) 694-8963
3702-3 FULMAR THREE STAGE PNEUMATIC PEDESTAL
CAPACITY:
350 LBS.
RANGE:
21" -- 58 1 /2 "
WEIGHT:
382 LBS.
MINIMUM BASE: 34"
$19,500.00
3056-3E PORTAPED EFP PORTABLE PNEUMATIC PEDESTAL
CAPACITY: RANGE: WEIGHT: $4800.00
120 LBS. 27" -- 55" 33 LBS.
PNEUMATIC PEDESTALS
3741-3 TERN SINGLE STAGE PNEUMATIC PEDESTAL
CAPACITY:
290 LBS.
RANGE:
33" -- 54"
WEIGHT:
250 LBS.
MINIMUM BASE: 29 1/2 "
$9450.00
3197-3 TEAL SINGLE STAGE PNEUMATIC PEDESTAL
CAPACITY: 140 LBS.
RANGE:
30 1 / 2 " -- 51 1/2 "
WEIGHT:
170 LBS.
MINIMUM BASE: 32"
$7575.00
3179-3 PLOVER OB THREE STAGE PNEUMATIC PEDESTAL
3267-3 HAWK EXTENDED RANGE PNEUMATIC PEDESTAL
DIGITAL REMOTE CONTROLLED CAMERA SYSTEM ( DRCCS)
FEATURES Prebroadcast Preparation Of: ·Storage And Recall Of 99
Shots Per Camera Relating To Pedestal Height, Pan And Tilt
Head Position, Zoom, Focus, Iris, Black Level, Color Balance, And Color Suppression.
·Complete Shot Modification In Real Time For Unplanned On- Air Situations. P.O.R.
CAPACITY: 230 LBS.
RANGE:
25 1/2 " -- 60"
WEIGHT:
200 LBS.
$22,000.00 to $22,500.00
CAPACITY: RANGE:
WEIGHT: $ 15,500.00
150 LBS. 24" -- 59"
212 LBS.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC-287
VINTEN
EXCLUSIVELY DISTRIBUTED BY LISTEC TELEVISION EQUIP. CORP.
39 Cain Drive Plainview, NY 11803 (516) 694-8963
PAN AND TILT HEADS
3084-3 MARK VII L.F. CAM HEAD
3717-3 MARK IIIA CAM HEAD
CAPACITY:
400 LBS.
TILT RANGE: ± 50°
WEIGHT:
44 LBS.
(Shown with Optional Female
Wedge Adapter)
SUPPLIED WITH:
FULL SIZED PAN BAR
PAN BAR CLAMP
BASE FITTING
3/8" BOLT FIXING TO CAMERA
$3830.00
3716-3 MARK V CAM HEAD
CAPACITY:
180 LBS.
TILT RANGE: ± 50°
WEIGHT:
24 LBS.
(Shown with Optional Female Wedge Adapter)
SUPPLIED WITH:
FULL SIZED PAN BAR PAN BAR CLAMP BASE FITTING
3/8" BOLT FIXING TO CAMERA
$3000.00
3259-3D CORMORANT 90° EFP FLUID SPRING HEAD
CAPACITY:
80 LBS.
TILT RANGE: ± 90°
WEIGHT:
22 LBS.
SUPPLIED WITH: FULL SIZED PAN BAR PAN BAR CLAMP BASE FITTING 3/8" BOLT FIXING TO CAMERA
$4945.00
3078-3B SWAN FLUID POST HEAD
CAPACITY:
200 LBS.
TILT RANGE: ± 60"
WEIGHT:
35 LBS.
(Shown with Optional Female Wedge Adapter) SUPPLIED WITH:
FULL SIZED PAN BAR PAN BAR CLAMP
BASE FITTING
3/8" BOLT FIXING TO CAMERA
$4200.00
3076-3 PETREL MARK II FLUID LINK HEAD
CAPACITY: TILT RANGE: WEIGHT:
SUPPLIED WITH:
100 LBS. ± 40°
15 LBS.
FULL SIZED PAN BAR PAN BAR CLAMP BASE FITTING
3/8" BOLT FIXING TO CAMERA
$2250.00
3198-3 AVOCET 90° FLUID SPRING HEAD 3228-3 AVOCET 70° FLUID SPRING HEAD
CAPACITY: TILT RANGE: WEIGHT:
3198-3 30 LBS. ± 90° 71/ 2 LBS.
3228-3 30 LBS. ± 70° 71 / 2 LBS.
SUPPLIED WITH:
FULL SIZED PAN BAR PAN BAR CLAMP BASE FITTING 3/8" BOLT FIXING TO CAMERA
3198-3 $2750.00
3228-3
2750.00
3089-3 CYGNET FLUID MINI- POST HEAD
VC- 288
CAPACITY: TILT RANGE: WEIGHT:
50 LBS. 360 °
20 LBS.
SUPPLIED WITH: FULL SIZED PAN BAR PAN BAR CLAMP BASE FITTING 3/8" BOLT FIXING TO CAMERA
$3750.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CAPACITY: TILT RANGE:
WEIGHT:
25 LBS. 360°
11 LBS.
SUPPLIED WITH:
FULL SIZED PAN BAR PAN BAR CLAMP BASE FITTING 3/8" BOLT FIXING TO CAMERA
$2200.00
Weaver-Steadman
1646 20th St. Santa Monica, CA 90404 (213) 829-3296
TRIPOD HEAD
CENTER OF GRAVITY Camera floats in perfect balance-- the camera's center of gravity is coincident with the tilt axis, eliminating springs and providing aprecise balance of pan and tilt dampening. Dampening remains constant regardless of the camera's operating position.
UNIQUE FLUID DAMPENING MECHANISM Each tripod head contains 12 individually sealed dampening chambers, 8 of which can be selectively engaged with precision spring plungers, allowing a fine degree of tension adjustment and asmooth, effortless feel.
VARIABLE GEOMETRY MEANS VERSATILITY The tripod head can be adjusted to obtain magazine clearance for the largest cameras-- you can get a360° tilt range with Panaflex, BL3 and all ENG-EFP video cameras. Tripod head can be mounted upside down as well as right side up-- perfect for snorkel lenses. The capacity for a low- profile configuration-- ideal for passing the camera through an aperture or operating in limited space.
Camera can be positioned with lens axis directly over pan axis.
SPECIAL DESIGN FEATURES Ultra- thin camera shoe allows camera placement within 1.064" of the deck for low-angle perspective.
Dual brakes on both tilt and pan cylinders allow access from either side-- important when suspending the camera. Maximum stiffness-to-weight ratio is achieved with thin wall, tempered magnesium castings and large- diameter bearings. Lightweight-- only 18 pounds, the tripod head will carry a75- pound camera in
perfect balance.
Range in which center of greedy of camera must tall to echoer. balance_
13"
FEATURES:
Weaver/Steadman
Center of gravity design Weight
YES 18 lbs
Camera sag with 57 pound Arriflex 0°21'
Dampening increments Arri BL-3compatible Panaflex compatible
5 YES YES
Variable geometry Camera to deck clearance
YES 1-1/16"
Level for inverted mounting Dual brakes on pan and tilt
YES YES
WEAVER/STEADMAN BALANCED FLUID HEAD COMPLETE EXCALIBUR CASE
Price Includes: 1- PAN CYLINDER 1- TILT CYLINDER 1-90 DEGREE BRACKET 3- CAMERA SHOES 1-5" TUBE 2-10"TUBES 1-18" TUBE 1- PAN HANDLE MOUNTING HARDWARE
Ronford 7 YES
24 lbs. 1°26' 4 YES NO NO
1-9/16" NO NO
$4,700.00 210.00
STANDARD MOUNTING
MkChen Sale
n`C5°2°
Clearance to right of cement mounting hole.
647'
Variable 5V." to I23/4 "
INVERTED MOUNTING
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC -289
Video Systems and Tripods from Welt/Safe-Lock
Fe1:E1M...M
Consider the sturdy yet lightweight versatility and portability of all Welt units, and you'll understand our worldwide reputation for quality and design excellence backed up by the famous Welt lifetime guarantee.
VRP
Consider our
Video Rol-O- Pod (VRP) with optional adjustable Recorder Attachment ( RA)
Lightweight, sturdy, speedy shooting through advanced small camera technology, with our unique adjustable recorder attachment unit.
Complete VRP/RA: $175.95 Video Rol-O- Pod (VRP): $ 139.95 with fluid movement head: $ 159.95 Recorder Attachment (RA): $38.00
4111k
Consider our
Complete Video System (VI DiCS)
Complete VID/CS System: with spring loaded head: $ 228.50 with fluid loaded head: $248.50
Video Tripod (VID) with spring loaded head: $ 129.95 with fluid movement head: $ 149.95
Adjustable Recorder Attachment (RA): $ 38.00
Optional Center Support Wheel for AD- IL (CSW): $8.50
VID
RA TW-V
Unit folds compactly for storage and transporting
For Smaller Cameras,
Consider our Lightweight
Tripods with Unique Welt Features:
The " Zoom Leg" Tripod (TW-V) Our lightest tripod was designed for any climate and terrain. It can be set in water, mud, dirt, or snow and closed without wiping lower leg sections, due to unique construction. Patented Twist- Lock system allows legs to extend and lock in one instant motion to any height. Zoom- Leg Tripod (1W- V): $62.95
Adjustable RA unit
is easily attached and sold separately as an accessory.
CSW
Consider our New
Video CaddyPod (VCP)
Unique 4-wheel construction incorporates the finest features of our Video Rol-O- Pod with the convenience and maneuverability of a video caddy.
Video Caddypod (VCP): $99.50
VCP
·
WELT
VC- 290
/FL- V
The " Flip- Lock" Tripod ( FL- V) Famous -flip-lock - leg controls have made the FL- V a favorite of photographers world-wide because of its instant one- hand positioning to any height. Allows photographer to adjust legs without taking eye from camera viewfinder. No fiddling with leg adjustments.
Flip- Lock Tripod ( FL- V): $ 74.00
For information and free catalog about our complete line of photographic and video tripods and equipment, contact:
Welt/Safe-Lock,
A Heritage Communications Company
2400 West 8th Lane, Hialeah, Florida 33010, (305) 885-6401 Outside Florida dial Toll- Free: 1-800-521-1928
WIREWORKS CORP.
380 Hillside Avenue Hillside, NJ 07205 (201) 686-7400 ( 800) 621-0064 TVVX 710-985-4675
AUDIO-VIDEO MICROPHONE CABLES
Hardwired Microphone Multicables
Single unit systems designed to replace individual microphone cables.
available in nine channel capacities and various lengths.
-
100 ft.(30.5m)
150 ft.(458m)
200 it.(61 Ornk
Channel Capacity
Product Code
Pro Net
Product Code
Pro Net
Product Code
Pro Net
M Series
°-c.2ocrr,.uo. Chass.s to lads female xlr-type
chassis connectors wired to male sir-
type line connector tails
HAIT Series
4=, ....
Tails to tails
female sir- type line connector tails
wired to male sirtype line connector tails
3
M3-100
6
M6-100
9
M9-100
$ 352.00 445.00 564.00
M3-150 M6-150 m9-150
$ 394.00 522.00 668.00
M3-200 M6- 2C0 M9-200
$ 436.00 598.00 771.00
it
M11-100
15
M15-100
19
M19-100
652.00 805.00 990.00
M11-150 M15-150 M19-150
777.00 960.00 1194.00
M11-200 M I5-200 M19-200
901.00 1116.00 1397.00
27
M27-100
1343.00 M27-150
1637.00
M27-200
1928.00
36
M36-100
1897.00 M36-150
2367.00
M36-200
2836.00
50
M50-100
2510.00 M50-150
3137.00
M50-200
3762.00
3
HMT3-100
$ 167.00 HMT3-150
$ 212.00
HMT3-200
$ 255.00
6
HMT6-100
299.00 HmT6-150
378.00
HMT6-200
457.00
9
HMT9-100
411.00 HMT9-150
518.00
HMT9-200
624.00
11
HMT11-100
494.00 HMT11-150
621.00
H M T11-200
747.00
15
HMT15-100
635.00 H MT15-150
794.00
HMT15-200
952.00
19
HMT19-100
815.00 HMT19-150
1022.00
HMT· 9-200
1227.00
27
HMT27-100
1150.00 HMT27-150
1445.00
HMT27-200
1739.00
36
HMT36-100
1667.00 HMT36-150
2139.00
H M T3 6- 200
2610.00
50
HMT50-100
2248.00 HMT50-150
2876.00
HMT50-200
3503.00
Hardwired Multicables are also available: chassis to tails- male xlr-type chassis connectors wired to female xlr-type line connector tails; HMX Series, chassis to tails- female xlr-type chassis connectors with 3 male xlr-type returns wired to male xlr-type connector tails with 3 female xIr-
type returns and HMQ Series, same as HMX except with quarter inch returns. Hardwired Multicables are also available in standard lengths or any custom length and configuration.
AAudio/Viddeeoo Multicables
HVT Series
-----)
(;'
---------....,,.,,ip
Audio/Video hardwired multicables with male/fema le sir and male/ale BNC connectors
Length
NVT2
1 Audio/1 Video
Product Code
Pro Net
HVT4
m
3 Audio/1 Video
Product Code
Pro Net
NVT 7 6 Audio/2 Video
Product Code
Pro Net
10 ft (305m)
25 ft ( 763m) 50 ft (/ 5 25m) 75 ft ( 22 87m) 100 ft (30 5m) 125 ft (38 1m)
150 ft ( 45 8m) 175 ft ( 53 4m)
200 ft. ( 6/ 0m) 225 ft (68 6m) 250 ft ( 76 2m)
HVT2-10 HVT2-25 HVT2-50 HVT2-75 HVT2-100 HVT2-125 HVT2-150 HVT2-175 HVT2-200 HVT2-225 HVT2-250
$ 61.00 83.00
120.00 156.00 192.00 228.00 265.00 301.00 337.00 373.00 409.00
HVT4-10 HVT4-25 HVT4-50 HVT4-75 HVT4-100 HVT4-125 HVT4-150 HVT4-175 HVT4-200 HVT4-225 HVT4-250
$ 111.00 148.00 212.00 275.00 337.00 401.00 463.00 526.00 589.00 652.00 714.00
HVT7-10
HVT7-25 HVT7-50 HVT7-75 HVT7-100 HVT7-125 HVT7-150 HVT7-175 HVT7-200 HVT7-225 HVT7-250
$ 191.00 270.00
403.00 534.00 666.00 797.00 930.00 1061.00 1193.00 1325.00 1456.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VC- 291
VC-292
INDEX
A
Abekas Video Systems, Inc. Acme-Ute Mfg. Co.
ACO Pacific, Inc. Alexander Battery Co Ambico, Inc. Amperes Electronic Corp. Ampex Corp. Angenleux Corp. of America
Anton/Bauer, Inc.
VC-2 VC-3-5
VC-6, 7 VC-8
VC-9-11 VC-12. 13
VC- 14 VC- 15
VC- 16-19
Batteries/Belts/Chargers/Acc.
VC-5, 8, 16-19, 34-50, 54, 56
Belden Corp.
72-74. 150. 151, 176. 177. 220-223. 250, 277 VC-20-25
Bogen Photo Corp.
VC-26, 27
Buhl Optical Co.
VC-28, 29
Cables
Camera Boom .. Camera, Cinematography
VC-10, 20-25, 268, 273, 291
VC-285 VC- 118
Camera Control Unit
VC- 19
Camera Enclosures/Mounts
VC-67-69, 134, 137. 138, 175, 201
Camera Poles
203, 206, 207, 211, 237, 238, 278-281 VC-54
Cameras, Accessories/CCTV
VC-52, 53, 70, 79-87, 102-105
108, 132-134, 149, 190-199, 202, 240-249, 265, 266, 283
Cameras, Accessories/Color
VC-53, 90-101, 108, 109, 111-118
139-147, 156, 170, 174, 178-189, 257, 258, 261-265, 267-269
Cameras. Medical
VC-53, 106, 107, 123, 124
Canon USA, Inc.
VC-30-33
CCTV Accessories Chargers See Batteries/Belts/Chargers
VC-202, 206-215, 236-239
Christie Electric Corp. Cine 60, Inc.
VC-34, 35 VC-36-50
Clear-Com Intercom Systems
VC-51
Cohu, Inc.
VC-52, 53
Comprehensive Video Supply Corp.
VC-54
Compu Prompt Consoles, Desk-Top
VC-55 VC-215
Controls, CCTV Cool-Lux Lighting Ind., Inc.
VC- 136, 213, 214. 238, 239, 247, 248 VC-56
Cranes
VC-286
D
Davis & Sanford Co., Inc.
VC-57-59
MO. Industries, Inc
VC-60
Dollies Durcom, Inc
VC-9, 26, 27, 59, 125, 129, 161, 231-235. 251, 286. 290 VC-61
E
EEV, Inc. MA/Electronic Industries Assoc.
EMI, Inc.
VC-62-65 VC-66
VC-67-69
Fairchild Weston Systems, Inc. Film Chains See Multiplexers
For-A Corp. of America Frame Store
Frezzolini Electronics, Inc. Fulinon, Inc.
VC-70
VC-71 VC-2
VC-72-74 VC-75-78
G
General Electric Co.
Gitzo/Karl Heitz, Inc
VC-79-87 VC-88, 89
H
Harris Corp
VC-90, 91
Heads
VC-3, 9, 26, 27, 57-59, 89, 125, 127, 128, 171, 172
Hitachi Denshi, Ltd.
231-235, 251, 253, 254, 286, 288.289 VC-92-107
Hitachi Sales Corp. of America
VC- 108
Ikegami Electronics, Inc. Innovative Television EquipJITE Intercom Systems Iris
Javelin Electronics, Inc. JVC Co. of MIMICS
VC- 109-124 VC- 125-130 VC-51, 61,270
VC- 131
VC- 132-138 VC- 139-149
Kapco Mtg. Co., Inc.
Kinotone Eastman Kodak Co. Konica USA, Inc.
VC-150, 151
VC-152, 153 VC-154. 155
VC- 156
Laird Telemedla, Inc.
VC- 157-159
Lens Adaptors/Attachments
VC-11, 260
Lenses
VC-15, 30-33, 60, 75-78, 202. 208, 209,215
216-219. 239, 255, 256, 267, 268
Peter Usand Machine Corp.
VC- 160-162
Liebe Television Equipment Corp
VC- 163, 286-288
L-W International
VC- 164-166
Magnasync/Moviole Corp Microphones
VC- 167, 168 VC-6, 7, 270
Mounting Hardware
VC-59, 68, 69, 138. 175, 201, 203-205
211, 212. 226, 238, 273, 282
Multiplexers/Film Chains
VC-28, 29, 157, 164. 167, 168
N
Nalpak Video Sales, Inc./NVS Mims Video, Inc.
O'Connor Engineering Labs, Inc. Olympus Corp. of America
Omnimount Systems
o
VC- 169 VC- 170
VC- 171-173 VC- 176 VC- 175
Pag America, Ltd. Panasonic Industrial Co.
Pan & Tilts/Scanners Pedestals Peerless Sales Co. Palco Sales, Inc Pentair Corp PEP, Inc. Perrott Engineering Labs, Inc. Pivotelli, USA Porta-Pattern, Inc.
Prompters/Systems
VC-176, 177 VC- 178-202
VC-135, 200, 210, 211, 236 VC-58. 128, 129, 233-235, 287
VC-203-205 VC-206-215 VC-216-219 VC-220, 221 VC-222, 223
VC-226 VC-224, 225
VC-55. 163, 227-230, 271, 272
O-Tv Telesync/O-Co. Industries, Inc OuickSet, Inc.
VC-227-230 VC-231-239
RCA Closed Circuit Video Equipment
Recorder/Cameras, Acc. Red Line/Research Laboratories, Inc.
VC-240-249
VC-14, 110, 148, 154, 155,269 VC-250
Sachtler Corp. of America Schneider Corp. of America Sensors, Video
Sharp Electronics Corp. Slide Projectors, Video Smith-Victor Sales Corp Sony Corp. of America Swintek Telecommunications OH.
VC-251-254 VC-255, 256
VC-71, 138
VC-257, 258 VC-2
VC-259, 260 VC-261-269
VC-270
Tekskil Industries, Inc.
Telecine Cameras Telecine Converter Telecine Film & Slide Projectors
VC-271
VC- 119-122 VC- 10
VC-152, 153, 158, 159
Telescript, Inc.
165, 167, 168 VC-272
Tele-Slide Converter
Test Slides & Charts Total Spectrum Mtg., Inc.
Transmission Systems
VC- 10
VC-66, 169, 224, 225 VC-273
VC-249, 276, 284, 282
Triporls/Acc
VC-3, 4. 9, 26, 27, 58, 59. 88, 89 125-127 129
160-162, 171-173. 231-235, 251, 252. 259, 274, 275. 286, 290
Tubes. Camera
VC- 12, 13, 62-65
U
Ultimate Support Systems, Inc.
VC-274, 275
VDO-PAK Videolarm, Inc. Video Conferencing
Videotelecom
Vinten/Ustec Television Equipment Corp.
VC-276, 277 VC-278, 284
VC- 131
VC-285
VC-286-288
Weaver-Steadman WelbSale-Lock, Inc. Wirework, Corp.
VC-289 VC-290 VC-291
RECORDERS
Abekas Video Systems, Inc Agfa-Gevaert, Inc Allsop, Inc. Ampex Corp. R.B. Annis Co Audico, Inc. Audiolab Electronics
BASF Systems Corp. Benjamin Intl Blackbourn, Inc Robert Bosch Corp
Channelmatic Christie Electric Corp.
EECO, Inc . ELCON/TEA, Inc.
A
B
C E
Fuji Photo Film USA, Inc. Garner Industries Hitachi Denshi, Ltd.
G H
Interand Corp
Jensen Sound Laboratories JVC Co. of America
l
J
Eastman Kodak Co
VR-2 VA-3 VA-4 VA- 5-il VR-12 VA- 13, 14 VA- 15
VA- 16 VR-17, 18
VR-19 VA- 20
VA- 21 VA-22, 23
M
MazeII Corp. of America Memorex/Memtek Products
Microtran Co., Inc. Mitsubishi Electric Sales America, Inc.
N
NEC Home Electronics ( USA), Inc. Nortronics Co., Inc.
Panasonic Industrial Co. Pentagon Industries, Inc Phasecom Corp.
P
PPliaosnteiecrReViedleCo,orIpn.c.of America/PRC
Portavideo Intl, Inc. Precision Echo
VA- 24 VA- 25 VA-26, 27
VA-28 VA- 29
VA- 30
VA-31 VA- 32-52
VA-53
Research Technology Infl/RTI
Scotch 3M Co Sonar Radio Corp. Sony Corp. of America SStoannydaTradp/e,AuSdailsecsanCoC.o/rSpo.ny Corp. of America
Taber Mfg. & Eng. Co
Tascam/Teac Corp. of America TDK Electronics Corp. Tektronix, Inc.
T
W Wide Range Electronics Corp./WRE
X
Xedit Corp Index
VA-54 VA-55 VA- 56 VA- 57
VA- 58 VA-59, 60
VA- 61-77 VA- 79 VA-80
VA-V81A,-823 VA-84 VA- 85
VA-86, 87
VA-88, 89 VA-90, 91 VR-92-103
VA- 1045
VA- 106 VR-107-110
VA- 111 VA- 112
VA- 113, 114
VA- 115 VA- 116
1985 Bill Daniels Co., Inc. Shawnee Mission, KS
VA- 1
ABEKAS VIDEO
319 Lincoln Centre Drive Foster City, CA 94404
(415) 571-1711
SYSTEMS,
INC.
DIGITAL DISK RECORDER
A62 DIGITAL DISK RECORDER
FEATURES · Real-time record and playback · Internal digital matting ·Random access ·Simultaneous record/play ·Variable record/play speed ·Transparent signal system ·Digitally- decoded RGB outputs · Built-in sequence editor ·SMPTE serial interface · Precise control · High quality color framing · Compact size
The Abekas A62 Digital Disk Recorder is the most advanced tool available to satisfy the demanding needs of complex post- production. It is ideal for applications such as animation, video disk mastering and sophisticated multi- layered matting.
The A62 combines the well-known advantages of digital video recording with high-speed Winchester disk drives, producing a precisely controllable real-time record and playback device with storage capacities of 50 seconds and 100 seconds. Both versions offer the same basic features: namely, afull range of record/playback speeds, from still frame to faster than one times in forward and reverse; precise high-speed single frame editing; built-in sequence editor; and internal digital matting. Dramatically enhancing the value of the A62, the 100 second version also offers simultaneous real-time record/ playback and color-frarned random access over the entire 100 second range.
Transparent Signal System
The transparent picture quality of the A62 is the direct result of full bandwidth digital recording and advanced digital signal processing techniques. The digital decoding and freeze frame performance are identical to that of the highly acclaimed A52 Digital Special Effects system. Unlike that of video tape recorders, the A62's performance is not limited by analog recording techniques and the tape medium, but rather by the A/ D and D/A performance.
Powerful Control System The A62 offers apowerful and traditional video tape recorder type of control system using a time code based addressing scheme.
The A62 can be controlled by the A62CP control panel, which is provided with the system, or by an external computer through RS232 or
RS422 serial ports. In addition, two RS422 SMPTE serial ports are provided, enabling the A62 to emulate aVTR, thus simplifying editor interface.
Simple Control Panel
The A62CP control panel consists of an integral graphics display with associated softkeys, trackball, DataKey, numeric keypad and various dedicated function keys. Comprehensive menus are presented on the graphics display, enhancing the power and simplicity of the system. The trackball is used to browse manually through the material on the disk. The browse speed corresponds to the speed of the trackball movement. A DataKey, like the one used on the A52 Digital Special Effects system, is used for off-line storage of control parameters.
Sequence/Segment Editor A number of variable length segments can be defined by specifying In and Out points, and can be linked in any order to form asequence. Individual segments, or the entire sequence, can be run manually or automatically. A sequence can be modified by rearranging the order of the segments or redefining the segments by changing their In and Out points. The sequence length automatically reflects these changes.
Internal Digital Matting
The A62 greatly simplifies the sophisticated post- production task of complex multi- layer matting. The internal matting capability allows aforeground to be digitally matted over an existing background in real-time. The background always remains in the digital domain during this process; therefore, the usual problems of generation loss associated with matting are completely eliminated. This process can be repeated acountless number of times, maintaining first generation quality from start to end. The matting is accomplished in non- realtime on the 50 second version, and in real-time on the 100 second version using the simultaneous record/playback capability.
The flexible system architecture enables internal re-entry of either the background video or the foreground video and key signal. This permits the real-time matting of incoming foreground on an existing background, or the matting of an existing foreground on an incoming background. All the necessary adjustments for the matte/key processor are provided: foreground black, foreground black cleanup, fade value, key polarity, key level and key gain. The analog input/output
video level and timing, and the digital matte/key adjustments are made right from the control panel.
RGB Outputs Digitally- decoded high quality RGB outputs are provided as an option for the A62.
VR-2
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AGFA-GEVAERT r INC .
275 North Street Teterboro, NJ 07608 (201) 288-4100
VIDEO CASSETTES
lii -matic
AGFA BROADCAST PLUS U-MATIC VIDEO CASSETTES
Video producers and engineers demand perfection from their master video cassette. They fully appreciate that their image depends upon the quality of the video tape original just as much as it does on the camera, lens and lighting. AGFA BROADCAST PLUS U-Matic video cassettes fulfill all of these expectations...and then some.
AGFA BROADCAST PLUS U-Matic Cassettes will add anew dimension of color brilliance and definition to your masters with: 3dB more color signal-to-noise, 3dB more video signal-to-noise, 2dB more RF output and an exceptionally low drop out rate, as compared to the industry standard. In addition to excellent video characteristics, AGFA BROADCAST PLUS U-Matic Cassettes utilize a black anti- static backcoating resulting in better tape transport and winding properties.
Precision molded and assembled under stringent and uncompromising quality control standards, AGFA BROADCAST PLUS U-Matic Cassettes are designed for use on all U-Matic video cassette players and recorders.
CASSETTE TYPE
KCS10 BP ( mini) KCS20 BP (mini) KCA5 BP KCA10 BP KCA20 BP KCA30 BP KCA60 BP
PLAYING TIME Packaged/Labeled
Series
10min. 20 min
5min 10min 20 min 30 min 60 min
KCA5 BP KCA10 BP KCA15 BP
KCA20 BP KCA30 BP KCA30 BP
KCA40 BP KCA60 BP
Bulk/Duplicator Series
5min 10 min 15min
20 min 30 min 40 min
50 min 60 min
Broadcast Quality Tape at Regular Tape Prices
TAPE LENGTH
237 ft. ( 72.3m) 424ft. ( 129.3m)
140 ft. ( 42.7m) 237 ft. ( 72.3m) 424 ft. ( 129.3m) 611 ft. ( 186.3m) 1175ft. ( 358.2m)
140 ft. ( 42.7m) 237 ft. ( 72.3m) 329 ft. 1100.3m) 424 ft. ( 129.3m) 611 ft. 1186.3m) 798 ft. ( 2432m) 985 ft. ( 300.2m) 1175 ft. ( 358.2m)
Technical Data
VIDEO PERFORMANCE
1Video Signal to Noise Ratio
2. Chroma Signal to Noise Ratio
3Dropouts ( 16d13, 10ps) 4RF Output ( 5MHz) 5. Still Frame 6Tape Life
AUDIO PERFORMANCE
1Audio Signal to Noise Ratio
2. Audio0utputUniformity 3Relative Frequency
Response
MAGNETIC PROPERTIES
1. Oxide 2. Orientation 3. Coercivity iHc 4. Retentivity BRs
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
1Thickness ( Nominal) --Base --Coating --Backcoating --Total
2. Width --Tolerances
-2-51dB -3dB 10/mmn. max average ·21:18 capable of exceeding 3hours capable of exceeding 2000 passes
52dB ±1dB -1dB
CrC-2 Longitudinal 50C Oersteds 1500 Gauss
19pm 5pm 2iim
26pm
075 mils 0.20 mils 007 mils 102 mils
19mm
748 in
·0.025mm · . 001 in.
-0.010mm - 0004 in.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-3
ALLSOP, INC.
P.O. Box 23 Bellington, WA 98227 (206) 734-9090 ( 800) 426-4303 Telex 15-2101
AUDIO/VIDEO CLEANING SYSTEM
71200
71300 Ultraline Audio Cleaner
Our gear driven wiper arm and felt cartridge replacement system
enables the user perfect cleaning action for all three areas needed.
When cleaning felts become soiled, cartridges can be easily replaced
to make the Ultraline like new again. System includes 1/2 oz. bottle of
Allsop 3cleaning solution. Use part # 71010 for replacement cartridges
and solution.
$8.95
71200 Ultraline Audio Cleaner With Case
60100-A
58030
60100-A VCR Cleaner For VHS
Utilizes an exclusive ribbon that feeds into your machine like aconventional tape. A few drops of Allsop 3 solution are placed on the delicate ribbon which then circles critical parts to remove oxide residues from the video and audio heads. Additional soft pads swab
contaminants from the capstan and pinch rollers. This great cleaning system is effective for up to 30 cleaning cycles. Non- refillable.
$19.95
66000-A VCR Cleaner For Beta
Incorporates Allsop's unique ribbon for thorough, non-abrasive
cleaning power. Simply place afew drops of Allsop 3solution on the
soft ribbon and insert the tape into your machine like an ordinary
cassette. The ribbon gently swabs contaminants from critical parts,
removing oxides and airborne debris from audio and video heads.
Good for 20-30 separate cleanings. Non- refillable.
$19.95
60200 Ultraline VHS Video Recorder Cleaner
Uses atechnologically innovative design to provide acleaning break-
through offered by no other system. Small "windows" on the surface
allow you to directly apply Allsop 3solution to the internal cleaning
ribbon for maximum cleaning coverage. The non-abrasive ribbon
cleans entire tape path, removing contaminants from critical VCR
parts. Additional felt pads clean capstan and pinch rollers. Replace-
able ribbon and pads available.
$29.95
Fits nicely into any automotive glove or map compartment. This wet
system cleaner performs three important tasks in one cleaning cycle. First our gear driven wiper arm insures positive wiping action for head cleaning; second our felt cartridges on both sides ( for auto reverse) of the head wiper cleans the pinch roller as it revolves; and third the Alisop 3wipes the capstan automatically. Includes a 1oz. bottle of special Allsop 3solution, spare felt cartridges and tweezers which all fit into an attractive leather- like case. Uses #71010 for replacement.
$14.95
58000 Orbitrac - Record Cleaning System
58010 Orbitrac - Record Cleaning Solution 58030 Orbitrac '" Refill Kit
Takes atotally new approach to record care. By anchoring the cleaner
in the record center, the Orbitrac , when rotated around the record
surface, delicately wipes and removes dirt from each groove. After
one or two revolutions the record should be free of impurities and have
no static charge because of the Orbitrac'' specially formulated
cleaning solution. This system comes complete with Orbitrac ,..
cleaner, solution and sprayer, wipe off brush, special record cleaner
anti-static mat, attractive designer case and complete instructions.
Orbitrac record cleaner solution is also available in an 8 oz. refill bottle, and in arefill kit that includes two new cleaning pads with an 8
oz. bottle of cleaning solution.
58000 $ 16.95
58010 58030
7.95 7.95
50210 Ultraline VHS Replacement Components
Contains fresh ribbon and pad cartridge. Replace after 20-30
cleanings.
$8.95
68010 Ultraline Beta Replacement Components
Has new ribbon good for 20-30 cleanings. Available from quality video
dealers.
$8.95
68000 Ultraline Beta Video Cassette Cleaner
The ultimate Beta cleaning system. Strategic "windows" on the
cleaning cassette surface allow you easy access to place Allsop 3
solution directly inside the cassette. The moistened cleaning ribbon
then gently removes harmful contaminants and oxides from critical
parts along the entire tape path. Replacements available.
$29.95
71010 Audio Cleaner Replacement Cartridges Et Solution
Makes the Allsop 3audio cleaning products even more unique. This kit
includes four complete capstan and pinch roller cartridges, two head
felt cartridges, a1oz. bottle of Allsop 3solution and apair of specially
designed tweezers. This kit is compatible with Allsop #71200 and
#71300.
$7.95
Reprinted with permission from materials in part 1984 ALLSOP, INC.
VR-4
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AMPEX 1
Ampex Corporation · One of The Signal Companies IF. 401 Broadway Redwood City, CA 94063 (415) 367-2011
VPR-3 Type C Video Tape Recorder
The VPR-3 has been created for the uncompromising new video production world. It has more instant functions. It is more versatile and flexible. It's more precise and sophisticated. And it's crafted for longer life and simpler maintainability.
Day- in, day- out, this machine will give you air-guided tape handling, superior video and audio features, simplified control and easy adjustment accessibility. VPR-3. It's ideal for teleproduction where time is money. For broadcasters use where versatility is expected. And for satellite or cable distribution organizations where dependability is demanded.
224 OF WM.
PROFESSIONAL VIDEO TAPE RECORDER
RACK MOUNT le In lack danoelltio
CONSOLE
1.·
The optional console has provisions tor mounting the VPR-3. TBC-3. a picture monitor, ranmforrn end vector monitors. end the high power audio system.
TABLE TOP
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
Height Width Depth Weight
Rack Mount 29.75 in. 75.56 cm 19.0 in. ( Note *4) 48.26 cm 25.75 in. 65.4 cm
270 lb 122.47 kg
Table Top 30.5 in. 77.47 cm
22.0 in. 55.88 cm 26.5 in. 67.31 cm
275 lb 12474 kg
Studio Console w/ Monitor Bridge & TBC 75.5 in. 191.77 cm
29.875 in. 75.86 cm 32.00 in. ( Note 5) 81.28 cm 650 lb 294.84 kg
22 GM 5,·· Cia
FEATURES ·Pinch-rollerless design. Vacuum capstan with gas film and roller
guides provide fast, gentle and precise tape control and handling in all operating modes for smooth, predictable acceleration/deceleration ·500 inches/second acceleration/deceleration profile allows a 30 second segment to be re-cued and synchronously played in 2.0 seconds using one hour tape reels ·Large dot addressable fluorescent display with direct access and six menu- identified " soft keys" can easily organize, display and simplify important operational control and diagnostic functions ·Unique SCH phase meter built-in to assure better control for fast edits without picture shift ·Master Unity control ·Automatic computer optimization of video and audio record parameters, with storage for three tape types
·Single field lock- up ( 20 milliseconds) and synchronous start for full color frame playback in amaximum of four fields in NTSC, and a
maximum of eight fields in PAL/ SECAM ·Audio input and output processing ports for easy interfacing with
popular noise reduction and time compression/expansion systems ·Five machine editing control ·3- hour reel capability in either atabletop or rackmount configur-
ation ·Optional line- by-line autochroma ·Input cable equalizer
Additional Features ·AST Automatic Scan Tracking permits continuously variable play,
from still frame to 3X play speed forward, and zero to 1X in reverse ·SMPTE/EBU Type " C", one- inch format ·Individually replaceable video and sync head assemblies ·Two SMPTE series communications ports ( RS-422)
Optional Accessories TBC-3 Time Base Corrector Time Code Reader-Generator/Character Generator High- Powered Audio System/Speakers
Digital line-by-line Autochroma SMC-100 Slow-motion Controller
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-5
AMPEX
Ampex Corporation · One of The Signal Companies §
401 Broadway
Redwood City, CA 94063 (415) 367-2011
PROFESSIONAL VIDEO TAPE RECORDER
VPR-6 Type C Video Tape Recorder
The VPR-6 is an appealing blend of machine intelligence and ease of
operation, combined to allow operators to be more productive. Powerful microprocessors help the operator to make recording and playback operations as smooth as aballet, perform simple or complex
editing steps with equal ease, or to locate a troublesome IC if necessary. The mechanical design and packaging, based on proven Ampex designs, offer more reliability and greater accessibility.
"User friendly," aterm often applied to computers, applies equally well to the VPR-6. A well laid out control panel allows the operator to easily access the logical and powerful software. Virtually all board edge controls have been eliminated, allowing the operator to perform machine setup procedures from the control panel.
With RS-422 serial communications capability, the VPR-6 operates efficiently as an element of state-of-the-art systems, responding to computer editing systems such as the Ampex ACE edit controller.
Helping the VPR-6 attain its full potential is the TBC-6 digital time base corrector, performance matched to the VPR-6. Expanded memory and avery compact package make the TBC-6 the ideal companion for the VPR-6.
FEATURES
·ASTTu Automatic Scan Tracking is standard, allowing variable play speeds, 1to 3X normal
·Shuttle speeds approaching 500 ips with viewable picture ·Forward and reverse single- frame jog ·Video and audio confidence playback ·Optional sync channel ·Optional fourth audio channel ( EBU systems)
·Microprocessor- controlled optimization of servos for gentle tape handling of all reel sizes from spot to 2 hours
·Automatic unthread mode prevents head breakage from ragged tape ends
·Virtually all machine functions can be run from control panel ·Extensive built-in diagnostics monitor VTR status continuously ·Expanded diagnostic routine utilizing test probe can be run from
control panel
ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS Sync Channel
An option to permit all vertical sync information to be recorded according to the SMPTE/EBU Type " C" formats.
Four Channel Audio
This EBU option provides a fourth high quality audio channel in the track space normally allotted to the sync channel.
Audio Processing Kit This kit provides aharness and connectors to allow simple interfacing of the VPR-6 to external processing devices.
Rack Size Monitoring A compact, rack mountable monitoring assembly is available for use with the VPR-6.
Time Code Generator/Reader Et Character Display A printed wiring assembly plugs into the VPR-6 electronics bay to add longitudinal time code generation and reading capability.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
Rack Mount
Height Width
Depth
Weight
21.0 in 533 mm 19.0 in
482.6 mm 21.0 in 533 mm
143 lb 65
Table Top
22.0 in
5588 mm
22.0 in
558.8 mm
22.0 in 558.8 mm 150 lb 68 kg
Consolette with Monitoring
70.5 in 1791 mm 22.0 in 558.P mm 26.5 . n 673 mm 317 lb 144 kg
Parallel Remote Interface PWA Installation of this accessory adds a75- pin remote connector which is pin- compatible with Ampex VPR-2B's and VPR-80's.
Serial Remote Interface PWA Installation of this PWA provides RS-422A- compatible connection to the serial control bus of amicroprocessor- based editing system.
Diagnostic Probe
Standard diagnostics capability in the VPR-6, consisting of wakeup and background tests, can identify system malfunctions to assembly or subassembly level.
SMC-100 The traditional sports slow motion controller provides full variable speed playback control of the VPR-6 from up to 100 feet away.
STC-100 This multi- point search- to- cue accessory provides up to 99 cue point assignment and search capability. All cues can be recorded on tape for later recall.
Side Car Monitoring Console
564 in 1433 mm 33.0 in 838 mm 26.5 in 673 mm 545 lb 247 kg
Overhead Monitoring Console
74 in 1880 mm 33.0 in 838 mm 265 in 673 mm 670 lb 304 kg
VA-6
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AMPEX .
Ampex Corporation · One of The Signal Companies
401 Broadway Redwood City, CA 94063 (415) 367-2011
PROFESSIONAL VIDEO TAPE RECORDER
VPR-80 -- LOW COST HIGH PERFORMANCE TYPE C VIDEO TAPE RECORDER
Reliability, simplicity, efficiency: The fundamentals behind the design of the VPR-80. It offers the video producer the latest advances in helical recording technology from Ampex.
FEATURES ·SMPTE/EBU Type C 1" format
·Advanced transport design for superior tape handling of all reel sizes, from 6-1/2" "spots" to 2- hour, 11-3/4" reels
· Dual microprocessor control of all VTR functions and servo systems
·AST'm Automatic Scan Tracking system, permits continuously variable play from still frame playback to 1-1/2 times play speed with no picture breakup
·Compact design offers table-top and rackmount versatility
·Highly functional control panel, all operational controls are up front, logically placed for efficient operation
·Sophisticated, frame-accurate editing including search-to- cue
·Control panel includes Key Pad entry system
·Edit trim ·Exit to entrance edit cue transfer
· Extensive built-in fault detection
·Power- down memory holds control panel setup and tape timer information for up to four days
·Easy access to PWAs, transport components and internal electronics
·State-of-the-art materials, designed to meet the most stringent international safety requirements
·Optional diagnostic probe systems for user- interactive fault tracing
·Compatible with the Ampex VPR-series options and accessories
·High- band FM video recording system for the highest quality video signal perform-
ance
VPR-80
·Three full, high quality audio channels, third channel is time- code- compatible
· Built-in speaker monitors any combination of channels
·Tape speed override for VTR synchronization
·Unthread mode protects heads and master tapes
ACCESSORIES Remote Interface The VPR-80 offers optional parallel and serial remote control data interfaces for external control panels or editing systems such as the Ampex Computerized Editing ( ACE) system.
Diagnostic Test Probe Using the VPR-80's control system microprocessor, an optional handheld test probe is available for troubleshooting componentlevel faults in the VPR-80 electronics circuitry.
Rack Size Monitoring A compact, standard rack width monitoring assembly is offered with space provided for picture waveform and vectorscope monitoring, and an integral two- source video monitor switch panel.
Time Code Generator/ Reader Character Display A microprocessor- based, plug-in printed wiring assembly ( PWA) provides time code generation and reading on Audio Track 3. An eight digit character display provides time code information on the picture monitor.
TBC-80 Time Base Corrector A digital TBC that provides full performance time base correction of the VPR-80's off tape signal during playback, from still-frame up to 1.5X play speed. The TBC-80 includes full color dropout and velocity error compensation, and color slow motion processing as standard features.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
Height
Rack Mount 21.0 in 533 mm
Width
19.0 in 482.6 mm
Depth
21.0 in 533 mm
Weight
138 lb 63 kg
Table Top 22.0 in 558.8 mm 22.0 in 558.8 mm
22.0 in 558.8 mm 145 lb 66 kg
Consolette with Monitoring 70.5 in 1791 mm 22.0 in 558.8 mm 26.5 in 673 mm
312 lb 142 kg
Side Car Monitoring Console 56.4 in 1433 mm 33.0 in 838 mm 26.5 in 673 mm
540 lb 246 kg
Overhead Monitoring Console 74 in 1880 mm 33.0 in 838 mm 26.5 in 673 mm
655 lb 299 kg
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-7
AMPEX
Ampex Corporation · One of The Signal Companies §
401 Broadway Redwood City, CA 94063 (415) 367-2011
PROFESSIONAL VIDEO TAPE RECORDER
AMPEX NAGRA VPR-5
Type C Video quality from Ampex, Nagra Audio quality, all in the world's finest field recorder.
Combined in this machine are the quality and features of an Ampex one- inch type CVTR with Nagra audio quality from Kudeiski SA, in the most practical field acquisition recorder, no bigger than a briefcase and weighing only 15 lb. ( 6.8 kg.)
The VPR-5 adapts to all kinds of situations, thanksto its own versatility and afull complement of options and accessories. It adapts to the user's working style. One person can handle both acamera and the VPR-5, or the VPR-5 can be manned by adedicated operator, with the recorder connected to either a shoulder- held or fixed camera. The machine also conveniently fits into any kind of field production vehicle or aircraft.
Despite its compact size, the VPR-5 offers a full range of features needed for sophisticated production. To begin, you're in C- format, which pays off in the quality of your material. Added to that are some other VPR-5 amenities, such as its exclusive dual- cue editing that allows studio- type control. Four edit- related functions characterize this VT.R's professional ability: from " let's see it" reviews and precise returns to the next edit point, to total control when replacing undesired
material, and even mid- segment edits to new material.
Advanced audio technology is built into the VPR-5. You'll find features like avariety of interfaces available for microphone types and/or line inputs. And seven built-in switch- selectable filters to match scene acoustics, particularly low frequency reverberation cancellation.
You'll find aunique display using LCD for VU or PPM level. Even full individual record channel lockouts for two audio channels and standard time code channel.
You'll also discover that the VPR-5 features an audio confidence playback selector independent of the video.
Physical Dimensions: Height: 5.5" ( 13.7 cm) Width: 17.5" ( 44.2 cm) Depth: 8.5" ( 21.5 cm)
ACCESSORIES Extended Record/Play When aproduction calls for recording times longer than the standard 20- minute reels, the VPR-5 can be converted in amatter of seconds to hold NAB 9- inch, one hour tapes.
Power Systems The VPR - 5 is powered from a variety of sources. Two on- board, pluggable battery packs of different capacities are available: the lightweight standard capacity version for use with 20- minute tapes, and an extended capacity pack to accommodate one- hour tape operation.
The Battery Charger Unit can charge six battery packs at one time.
An ac power mains adapter that works with all world power standards is available. The VPR-5 can also be powered from low impedance dc sources of 12 to 18 Vdc, such as vehicle batteries.
Field Playback When the normal monochrome confidence- quality video replay is not satisfactory, the optional Color Stabilizer Unit produces acolor- locked signal with excellent color rendition on any monitor or conventional TV receiver.
Audio Inputs
A modular approach has been taken for audio inputs of the VPR-5, so that field reconfigurations dictated by audio sources can be quickly accommodated.
Carrying Aids
The VPR-5, with its light weight and compact size, is easy to take where C- format has never gone before. To enhance this portability, a protective soft case and a pack frame with carrying harness are available.
Video Interface
The VPR-5 has optional, pluggable modules for most EFP applications.
VR-8
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
-
P
o
BEST OF BOTH WORLDS
When you've produced the best show in town, transferring to Ampex 196 Professional Video Tape lets you keep all the emotion, color and snap of the original. And it stays that way, run after run. Nothing is lost, especially the subtleties and the ' little things' that can make your show memorable.
Ampex 196 High Energy Video Tape offers superb color and crispness. Plus the kind of
audio performance that has made Ampex tape number one in the music industry.
Video tape quality won't be the only reason
your show's ahit, but if you specify film-to- tape transfer on Ampex 196, you'll see on the screen what you first saw in the script.
To find out more about how Ampex 196 Video Tape can give you the best of both your worlds, call our Regional Sales Office in
Glendale ( 213) 240-5000 or write Ampex Corporation Magnetic Tape Division, 401 Broadway, Redwood City, CA 94063.
AMPEX
Ampex Corporaten · One of The Signal Companes
WE'VE GOT A LOT TO SHOW
FOR IT.
VR-9
AMPEX
Ampex Corporation · One of The Signal Companies
401 Broadway Redwood City, CA 94063 (415) 367-3809
VIDEO TAPE
1/2" INDUSTRIAL VIDEO CASSETTES
BETA AND VHS FORMAT INDUSTRIAL VIDEO CASSETTES
Catalog No.
Play Time - Minutes
Beta Format Video Cassettes
SLEEVE
BI
BII
13111
101- K250- 6C
30
60
90
101- K500- 6C
60
120
180
Ctn. Qty.
20 20
Price
S 9.29 11.69
HELICAL BROADCAST VIDEO TAPE For MASTERING
196 Series
1" Broadcast Helical Ampex/Sony, A Wind (Backcoated)
196-1630CD
1633', 1- x9" Prec M, 34 min
5
S 73.10
196-1630CR
1633', 1" x9" Prec M, 34 min
579.60
196-3170CD 196-3170CR
3169, 1" x9- Prec. M, 66 min. 3169', 1" x9" Prec. M. 66 min.
5 $107.71
5
114.21
PLASTIC BOX 101- K250- 6A 101- K500- 6A
BULK 101- K125- 6B 101- K250- 6B 101- K370- 6B 101- K435- 6B 101- K500- 6B 101- K530- 6B
30
60
60
120
15
30
30
60
45
90
52
105
60
120
64
128
VHS Format Video Cassettes
SLEEVE
X1
X2
102-KV30-6C 102-KV60-6C 102-KV90-6C
30
60
60
120
90
180
102-KV120-6C
120
240
PLASTIC BOX 102-KV30-6A 102-KV60-6A 102-KV90-6A 102 - KV120-6A
30 60 90
120
60 120 180
240
BULK 102-KV15-6B 102-KV30-6B 102-KV45-6B 102-KV60-6B 102 KV90-6B 102-KV105-6B 102-KV120-6B 102-KV127-6B
VR-10
15 30 45 60
90 105 120 127
30 60 90 120
180 210 240 254
90
20
180
20
45
40
90
40
135
40
157
40
180
40
192
40
$10.29 12.49
S 7.69 8.69 9.59
10.29 11.09 11.59
X379.60
90
20
180
20
270
20
360
20
$11.99 12.89 15.09
16.29
90
20
180
20
270
20
360
20
$13.09 13 .99
16.19
17.39
196-4610HD 196-4610HR
4610', 1" x10 1/ 2 "Prec. M, 96 min. 4610, 1- x10 1/ 2 "Prec. M, 96 min
5
$164.37
5
170.87
196-5100HD 196-5100HR
5100, 1" x10 1/ 2 "Prec. M, 106 min. 5100, 1" x10 1/ 2 "Prec. M, 106 min.
196-6050NE 196-7500FE
6050, 1" x11 3/4"Prec M, 126 min. 7500', 1" x12 1/ 2 "Prec. M, 156 min
5
$172.60
5
179.10
5
$204.72
5
253.80
196-9200KF
9200 , 1" x14" Prec M, 192 min
5
$351.00
196 Series
1" Broadcast Helical Bosch-Fernseh, B Wind (Backcoated)
196-1630CR-B 16-31, 1" x9" Prec M, 34 min.
5
$
196-3170CD-B 3169', 1" x9" Prec M. 66 min 196-3170CR-B 3169', 1" x9" Prec. M, 66 min.
5
107.71
5
114.21
196-4610HD-B 4610', 1" x10 1/ 2 "Prec. M, 96 min 196-4610HR-B 4610'. 1" x10 1/ 2 - Prec. M, 96 min
5
164.37
5
170.87
196-5100HD-B 5100', 1" x10 1/ 2 "Prec. M. 105 min.
5
196-5100HR-B 5100' . 1" x10 1/ 2 "Prec. M, 105 min.
5
196-6800JE-B 6800. 1" x12" Prec M, 141 min
5
172.60 179.10
259.11
45
40
90
40
135
40
180
40
270
40
315
40
360
40
381
40
$10.59 11.39 11.89 12.29
14.39 15.09 15.69 16.19
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AMPEX
Ampex Corporation · One of The Signal Companies . 6
401 Broadway Redwood City, CA 94063 (415) 367-3809
VIDEO TAPE
PleIFESSONO4 V,OC.XJ4-'SE-re
7
!Ole rvi IP,In 4.0
AMPEX
187 SERIES Industrial Heft& Scan 3/4" Video Cassettes
KCA - 3/4" U-MATIC CASSETTES - SHELF BOX
CTN. QTY.
PRICE
187-KCA10 187-KCA15 187-KCA20 187-KCA30 187-KCA40 187-KCA50 187- KCA60
3 4- Video Cassette. 10 min.
10
3 4" Video Cassette, 15 min.
10
3 4" Video Cassette, 20 min.
10
3 4" Video Cassette, 30 min.
10
3 4" Video Cassette, 40 min.
10
3 4" Video Cassette. 50 min.
10
3 4" Video Cassette. 60 min.
10
$26.69 27.49 28.29 31.69 36.89 43.29 45.29
KCA - 3/4" U-MAT1C CASSETTES - SHIPPER
197 SERIES Helical Scan 3/4" Video Cassettes
BCA - 3/4" U-MATIC CASSETTES - SHELF BOX
CTN. QTY.
PRICE
197-BCA-10 3/4" Video Cassette. 10 min. 10
197-BCA-20 3/4" Video Cassette, 20 min. 10
197- BCA-30 3. 4" Video Cassette, 30 min.
10
197-BCA-60 3 4- Video Cassette, 60 min.
10
$26.25 30.86 35.89 46.97
BCS - 3/4" U-MATIC CASSETTES - SHELF BOX
197-BCS-10 3 4" Video Cassette, 10 min
10
197-BCS-20 3 4- Video Cassette, 20 min
10
$26.25 30.86
187-KCA-10W 3 4" Video Cassette, 10 min. 10 187-KCA-20VV 3 4" Video Cassette, 20 min. 10 187-KCA-30W 3 4" Video Cassette, 30 min. 10 187-KCA-60W 3 4" Video Cassette, 40 min. 10
$27.89 29.39 32.89 46.49
KCA - 3/4" U-MATIC CASSETTES - BULK/TRAY
187-KCA-05B 3 4" Video Cassette, 5min
20
187-KCA-10B 3 4" Video Cassette, 10 min. 20
187-KCA-15B 3 4" Video Cassette, 15 min. 20
187-KCA-20B 3 4" Video Cassette, 20 min. 20
187-KCA-30B 3 4" Video Cassette, 30 min. 20
187-KCA-40B 3 4" Video Cassette, 40 min 20
187-KCA-50B 3 4" Video Cassette, 50 min. 20
187-KCA-60B 3 4" Video Cassette, 60 min. 20
$23.79 24.59 25.39 26.19 29.59 34.79 41.19 43.19
BCA - 3/4" U-MATIC CASSETTES - BULK
197-BCA-05B 3 4" Video Cassette, 5min.
20 $ 22.06
197- BCA-10 B 3 4" Video Cassette, 10 min. 20
25.25
197-BCA-206 3 4" Video Cassette, 20 min. 20
29.86
197-BCA-30B 3 4" Video Cassette, 30 min. 20
34.89
197 - BCA-60 B 3 4" Video Cassette, 60 min. 20
45.97
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-11
Protect valuable recorded tapes with an ...
Audiophile HAN-D-KIT
Provides everything needed to measure and eliminate magnetism in recorder components before recorded tapes are damaged permanently
1Check Magnetism in Recorder Components The Annis Pocket Magnetometer quickly and accu-
2Demagnetize Components When Necessary Whenever the Magnetometer indicates any appreciable
rately measures residual magnetism levels in recorder
level of magnetism in a tape transport component, you
heads, drive capstans or tape guides. Indicates when
can demagnetize it effectively with the powerful Annis
it's time to demagnetize and lets you know when it's again safe to use the recorder.
Han-D-Mag before it causes permanent damage to recorded tapes.
·
ID · ·
· · ·
Valuable audio and video tapes can be damaged when played on equipment that is not thoroughly and regularly demagnetized. Magnetism can easily build up in capstans, tape guides
or recorder heads to a point where it will degrade the magnetically recorded signal on tapes passing over them. Tape damage is first apparent as a loss of recorded high frequencies and a progressive increase in background noise each time they are played on magnetized equipment.
Until recently, there has been no easy way to tell when demagnetizing was needed, and most Demagnetizers on the
market were far too weak to be effective, particularly on offending hardened steel guides or capstans, etc. Now, with the introduction of the Audiophile Han- D- Kit, both measurement and correction problems can be solved easily at modest cost.
Here in one convenient package is everything needed to meas-
THE AUDIOPHILE HAN -D- KIT CONTAINS
ure magnetic levels quickly, along with a handy, powerful unit to demagnetize components completely before they can spoil
valuable tapes.
ANNIS POCKET MAGNETOMETER Measures level of magnetism in components.
Calibrated to read directly in gauss. Model 20/B5 shown.
TEST STRIPS One of these sensor strips is magnetically soft and the other magnetically hard. For experiments
and testing your demagnetizing technique.
CLIP-ON EXTENSION PROBE Extension probe is 13/4 " long. Can be formed with fingers. Improves checking of magnetism in hard to reach components.
·'NOTES ON DEMAGNETIZING" ETC.
.···
Explains causes of magnetism, with particular
reference to tape recorders. How to measure it
accurately and how to eliminate it.
Interesting experiments also included.
ANNIS AUDIOPHILE HAN -D-MAO
A rugged, dual- use Demagnetizer having a powerful, sine wave demagnetizing field strength of over 350 oersteds 1/4 " beyond the tip of the 21/4 " long probe.
Standard Han- D- Kit Model K20/B5
Includes all items shown above. Model 20 Magnetometer has polarity indicating carter zero scale, calibrated to read 5-0-5 gauss.
Standard Han- D- Kit Model K20 / B5 For operation on 115 V. 50 / 60 Hz.
Deluxe Han- D- Kit Model K25 / S5 For operation on 115 V. 50 / 60 Hz.
Shipping Wt.
2 Lbs.
21/4 Lbs.
Price
$49.00
83.00
Deluxe Han- D- Kit Model K25/S5
Same as above except for the Magnetometer.
This kit includes the larger, more rugged Model 25 jewelled Magnetometer with ten times the calibration stability of standard Model 20.
SPECIAL SAVINGS ON PREPAID ORDERS: When money order or check accompanies your order, add $ 1.00 for handling. Surface delivery to your door is included Via UPS or Parcel Post in USA. Air shipment, or export, is extra.
R. B. ANNIS COMPANY · 1101 N. Delaware St. · Indianapolis, Ind. 46202 · Ph. ( 317) 637-9282
VA- 12
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AUDICO INC.
219 Crossen Elk Grove, IL 60007 (312) 640-1030 Telex 4992690 AUDCO Ul
TAPE LOADING SYSTEMS/ACCESSORIES
SYSTEM III WITH 619-P PAY-OFF UNIT
619-R REWINDER
SYSTEM III
"HOCKEY PUCK" SPLICER
VIDEO TAPE LOADING SYSTEMS
UMATIC, VHS AND BETA - ( Also Load Audio)
Systems can be equipped to load Umatic, VHS, and Betamax video cassette and cookies as well as audio cassettes, cartridges and reels. Tape loading speed is 135 inches per second. Counter allows selection of exact tape length desired. Built-in cleaner is included which can be used to wipe both sides of video tape during loading or rewinding. Space is provided to mount aburnisher/scraper.
All systems consist of a751-V Delivery Unit and an 829 Receiving Unit with one interchangeable Take-up Module. Systems II and Ill also include the 29R Unloading Unit. The 829 Receiving Unit, which con-
tains aprocessor that continuously monitors in- path tape loading tension, may be upgraded: System Ior II to System II or System Ill.
Systems Iand II require only one Take-up Module for both VHS and Beta; System Ill requires separate modules for each format. Umatic modules handle both KCA and KCS housings. When ordering, specify desired module - Umatic or 1/2" on System Ior II; Umatic, VHS or
Beta on System Ill.
System IVideo Loader Loads new tape into new cassette housing. $6075.00
System II Video Loader/Reloader Has additional feature that auto-
matically removes old tape from cassette housings without taking
them apart, and thus allows for their convenient reuse
7075.00
System III Video Loader/Reloader/Rewinder Adds ability to rewind
and fast-forward cassettes, and to wipe tape while rewinding. When
reloading, tape can be removed from either reel
7275.00
Take-up Modules Extra interchangeable modules ( in addition to one
selected with Receiving Unit). Load (All Systems) Load/Reload (Systems II and III) Load/Reload/Rewind ( System III)
Audio Tape Loading Options ( 1) Audio Cassettes, ( 2) Broadcast and 8- track Carts, and ( 3) Nagra Reels.
First Option
450.00 600.00 750.00 Type- A
325.00
Second and Third Option ( each)
50.00
619-P Pay-off Unit Used with video loader to transfer tape directly
from acassette housing or cookie into another housing. Mounts to left
of Delivery Unit which counts desired length. Built-in leader detector
stops loading, and length loaded is indicated. VHS unit transfers tape
from VHS housings to both VHS and Beta housings.
Umatic or VHS
975.00
Umatic and VHS
1175.00
Economy Video Loader Loads new tape into new cassette housings. Includes 751-V Delivery Unit and 619-T Take-up Unit with tape wiper
and one Take-up Module, either 1/2" ( VHS and Beta) or Umatic.
Audio tape loading options also available
4475.00
Second Take- Up Module
450.00
VIDEO CASSETTE REWINDER
619-R Video Cassette Revvinder Rewinds and fast-forwards Umatic,
VHS and Beta cassettes. Unit can also be used as either 619-P Pay-off
Unit or 619-T Take-up Unit on Economy Video Loader ( Take-up tape
wiper is $150 extra). Rewinder One format - Umatic, VHS or Beta Each additional format
$1125.00 700.00
Rewinder/Unloader 29-R Unloader added to above 619-R. Allows
old tape to be removed from housings and stops automatically when
leader is detected. One format
1975.00
Each additional formal
700.00
VIDEO TAPE SPLICERS
"Hockey Puck" Splicer Tape and leader are butted together and held in place by vacuum holes in tape slot. Splicing tape is placed on top of
block across ends to be spliced. The " puck", aprecision fitting, hard-
ened metal roller, is rolled down the slot and cuts and applies splicing
tape in one motion.
1/2" Tape 3/4" Tape
$550.00 550.00
Vacuum Source The " Hockey Puck" Splicer requires a vacuum
source for tape hold-down, either asmall vacuum pump or acom-
pressed air source connected thru aventuri. Venturi Kit Consists of venturi, flow control and fittings to generate
vacuum from compressed air source
75.00
Vacuum Pump
125.00
SUMMARY Costs for various formats and features, including optional " Hockey Puck" Splicer(s) and vacuum pump.
ECONOMY LOADER
SYSTEM I
SYSTEM II
SYSTEM Ill
Umatic ( or one 1/2" format on System Ill) $5150.00 $6750.00 $7750.00
$7950.00
VHS and Beta $5150.00 $6750.00 $7750.00 $ 8700.00 Umatic, VHS and Beta ( two " Hockey Puck" Splicers) $6150.00 $7750.00 $8900.00 $ 10,000.00
Above System Ill for Umatic, Plus: Umatic Pay-off Unit VHS/Beta System ll Load/Reload Module,
and 1/2" " Hockey Puck" Splicer
$8925.00 9100.00
Add $325.00 to above prices for audio cassette or broadcast cart loading option; add $375.00 for both. Subtract $50.00 from above prices for Venturi Kit instead of Vacuum Pump.
All prices F.O.B. Elk Grove, IL, and subject to change without notice.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VA- 13
AUDICO INC.
219 Crossen Elk Grove, IL 60007 (312) 640-1030 Telex 499-2690 AUDCO Ul
VIDEO TAPE/ACCESSORIES
VIDEO TAPE LOADING SYSTEMS
LOAD/RELOAD* Your Own...and Save!
*Easily Reuse Cassette Housings Without Taking Them Apart
Umatic
Length
5min 20 min 60 min
Material Costs
Tape Only ( Reload)
$ . 83 3.30 9.90
Tape and Housing
$ 5.53 8.00
14.60
VHS Beta
T-5 T-30 T-120
$
. 08 - $ . 12 .48 - . 71
1.93 - 2.82
$ 1.18 - $1.37 1.58 - 1.96 3.03 - 4.07
L-50 L-500
$ .12 - $ . 18 $ 1.22 - $ 1.43
1.20 - 1.75
2.30 - 3.00
CASSETTE LABELS Umatic VHS · Die Cut · Pressure Sensitive · Ready to Use
· Suitable for Typing, Printing, Duplicating, etc. ·Available in Pewter, Sand and Matte White
Beta
ACTUAL LABEL SIZES
100 SHEETS PER PACKAGE
umatic
6-1/4" x4-3/8" 2 LABELS PER SHEET 200 Labels per package SHEET SIZE: 6-3/8" x 11-1/4"
beta
2-1/2" x2-3/4" 9 LABELS PER SHEET 900 Labels per package SHEET SIZE: 7-7/8" x 11-1/4"
(Types, colors and whites may be mixed to achieve quantity prices)
Audio
1-4
5S
10-19
20 Et More
Whites Colors
$17.00 $ 15.30 $ 13.80 $ 12.40
21.00
18.60
16.50
14.60
Video Whites Colors
22.00 26.00
19.80 23.00
17.80 20.40
16.00 18.00
RAINBOW ASSORTMENT PACKAGES: Audio- 10 Colors and 2 Whites: 10 sheets of each (120 sheets total)
2sheets of each (24 sheets total) Video and Audio- Choice of any 50 sheets
$30.00 10.00
20.00
Prices FOB Elk Grove, Illinois (When orders are prepaid, surface freight is allowed within the continental U.S.A.)
vhs
3-1/16" x 1-7/8"
10 LABELS PER SHEET 1,000 Labels per package
SHEET SIZE: 63/8" x 11-1/4"
VA- 14
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AUDIOLAB
ELECTRONICS
3725 Esperanza Drive Sacramento, CA 95825 (916) 485-0500
TAPE DEGAUSSERS
TD- 1B Tape Degausser
(With Automatic Overheat Thermal Protection)
·Erases audio, video, computer, data tape, magnetic films, cartridges and cassettes.
·For tapes up to 3/4 inch. ·Accommodaes up to 10 1/ 2 inch NAB reels. ·Provides awide focused magnetic field to assure complete
erasure. ·Positive results every time with asimple two pass operation
for broadcast NAB audio cartridges. ·Transient protection to prevent permanent tape damage. ·Operate light flashes, indicating auto- shutoff by thermo pro-
tector, resets automatically. · 115 and 220 volt, 50-60 Hz models available.
Power Requirements: TD-1B 115 volts AC ± 10% 50-60 Hz. TD-1BF 230 volts AC -± 10% 50-60 Hz. Duty Cycle: One minute ON -- Three minutes OFF. Dimensions: 51/4 x 71/4 x 3 inches high. 133 x 184 x 76.2 MM. Weight: Net -- 91/2 lbs. Shipping -- 10 lbs. Reel Size: Up to 10 1/2 inches in diameter. Removable center post for large carts
TD- 1B - $ 105.00 (115V 50-60 Hz)
TD-1BF - $ 118.00 (230V 50-60 Hz)
TD- 4 Tape Degausser
·Erases audio, video, data tapes, U-Matic cassettes up to 750 oersteds,reels to 14 inches in diameter. See performance chart.
·Provides 2550 effective gauss field. ·Built in timer has adjustable " on" cycle and automatic shut-off.
·Automatic cooling fan operation. ·Overheat light with automatic thermal protection prevents ex-
ceeding duty cycle on " Hl" position. Thermal protection resets
to normal operation automatically. ·Hi- Lo operation allows continuous duty erasing on Lo position
for most tapes. See performance chart. ·Standard 5/16 inch center post with 3inch NAB hub supplied. ·Conservative design assures long reliable performance.
MODEL
LINE
LINE
LINE CURRENT MAXIMUM GAUSS
NUMBER
VOLTAGE
FREQUENCY
HI
LO
HI
LO
Erases audio, video, computer,
TD -4-115-60 TD -4-115-50
110-125 VAC 60 HZ 110-125 VAC 50 HZ
8A
4A
8A
4A
2550 2550
2000 2000
8735.00 715.00
and cartridge tape.
411/
TD-4-230-60 220-250 VAC 60 HZ
4A
2A
2550
2000
525 .00
TD-4-230-50 220-250 VAC 50 HZ
4A
2A
2550
2000
825 .00
Duty Cycle: Hi position 50%, 20 minutes. Lo position - continuous. Dimensions: 10 x 13 x4 inches. ( 25.4 x33 x 10.1 mm)
Shipping Weight: 45 lbs. ( 14.97 kg)
TD- 5 Tape Degausser
·Erases audio, video, data U-Matic cassettes up to 1100 oersteds and 16 inches diameter.
·Provides 3500 effective gauss field. ·Built in timer has adjustable " on" cycle and automatic shut-off.
·Automatic cooling fan operation. ·Overheat light and automatic thermal protection prevents ex-
ceeding duty cycle on " Hi" position, resets to allow normal
operation. ·Hi -lo selectable operation allows continuous duty erasing on Lo
position for many tapes. See performance chart.
·Standard 5/16 inch center post with 3inch NAB hub supplied. ·Conservative design assures long reliable performance.
MODEL NUMBER
TD- 5-115-60 TD-5-115-50 TD- 5-230-60 TD-5-230.50
LINE VOLTAGE
110-125 VAC 110-125 VAC 220-250 VAC 220-250 VAC
LINE FREQUENCY
60 HZ 50 HZ 60 HZ 50 HZ
LINE CURRENT
HI
LO
10
4
10
4
5
2
5
2
MAXIMUM GAUSS
HI
LO
3400 3400
2600 2600
3400 3400
2600 2600
8846.00 885.00
915.00 915.00
Erases audio,
video, computer, and cartridge tape.
Duty Cycle: Hi position 50%, 20 minutes. Lo position - continuous. Dimensions: 13 x 17 x4 inches. ( 33 x43.2 x 10.1 mm) Shipping Weight: 46 lbs. ( 20.87 kg)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-15
BASF SYSTEMS CORP.
Crosby Dr. Bedford, MA 01730 (617) 271-4000
VIDEO CASSETTE TAPE
· Chromium dioxide formulation for the highest quality reproduction available.
· Extensive Quality Control testing assures consistent stability, long durability, and brilliant pictures.
· Unique vinyl sleeve eliminates shedding which causes dropouts and signal loss.
· Compatible with all VHS or Beta equipment
Cassette Type
Playing Time
T-60 T-120 T-120 CARDED T-160
TC-20 HG T-120 HG T-160 HG
L-250 L-500 L-500 CARDED L-750 L-750 CARDED L-830
L-500 HG L-750 HG
1-2-3-hrs. 2-4-6-hrs. 2-4-6-hrs. 22/3-5 Y3-8 hrs.
20 minutes** 2-4-6-hrs. 22/3-5 'A-8 hrs.
1/2 - 1-1 1/2 hrs. 1-2-3 hrs. 1-2-3 hrs. 3-4 Y2 hrs. 3-4 1/2 hrs. 31/3-5 hrs.
1-2-3 hrs. 3-4 1/2 hrs.
**60 min. on units properly equipped.
Part Number
54554 54555 56002 56008
56009 54937 56010
56001 54552 56003 54553 56006 56011
54929 56007
Master Carton Pieces
20 20 20 20
50 20 20
20 20 10 20 10 20
20 20
Ship Weight
(lbs.)
14 15 16.5 15
8 15 15
12 12 6.5 13 6.5 13
12 13
VA- 16
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Sugg. Retail
$14.95 16.95 16.95 21.95
14.95 21.95
--
12.95 14.95 14.95 16.95 16.95
16.95 21.95
BENJAMIN INTERNATIONAL
232 Sherwood Avenue Farmingdale, NY 11735 (516) 753-0700
AUDIO- VIDEO ACCESSORIES
Gibson Girl® Tape Splicer
Precision made-- produces slight trim cuts on the edge of the splicing tape to prevent
adhesive from contacting parts. Knob has
cut and trim position blade adjustment provided to maintain lifetime accuracy.
26-038 1/4" tape ( reel to reel) splicer. .$ 9.95
26-043 Cassette splicer
9.95
Cassette Head Demagnetizer and Cleaner
Operates with home Er auto cassette player/
recorders. Features rotary magnet and non-
abrasive head cleaning tape.
25-007
$ 3.95
1111ramm·
Micro/Mini Cassette Tape Eraser
Erases recorded material from micro and
mini cassettes. 24-005
$ 9.95
Micro -Cassette Head Cleaner
Non-abrasive cleaning cassette thoroughly
cleans recorder heads. 35-008
$ 4.95
Cordless Cassette Tape Eraser
Erases recorded material from standard and
micro or mini cassettes in seconds -- no out-
side power or batteries needed.
24-004
$ 14.95
Stylus Cleaning Kit
Removes dust and dirt from stylus tip. In-
creases life of stylus and records.
40-052
$ 1.95
Audible Tone Electronic
Cassette Head Demagnetizer
Restores original full range recordings by demagnetizing heads which have lost high
frequency response or show distortion. Audible tone confirms electronic demag-
netizing action. 25-005
$ 19.95
Robolite
Battery operated dustcover lamp. Light
turns on when cover is raised, off when
lowered. Uses two D- cells ( not supplied).
40-002
$ 12.95
Audio Cassette Care Kit
A complete care kit for auto, home Et office cassette recorder/players featuring the
Audible Tone cassette head demagnetizer.
Non-abrasive cassette tape head and cap-
stan cleaner ( cat. no. 35-005) packaged in a
plastic storage box. 25-010
$ 19.95
Tape Head Cleaning Kit
Contains bottles of head cleaner and head guide lubricant, audio clean swabbies ( 10 pcs.) for safe easy cleaning and lubricating
of hard to reach recorder heads.
30-005
$ 1.95
24-022 Audio- Video Bulk Tape Eraser, Industrial grade, erases up to 1" wide tape
13/4" helical scan video) on reels up to
Cassette Tape Head
10-1/2" diam. UL listed
$200.00
and Capstan Cleaner
This unique wet cleaning system will clean the tape heads, capstan and pinch rollers in
one operation. It will bring back the original clarity and performance of your cassette unit without scratching or damaging the
tape head. 35-005
$ 4.95
Universal Tape Splicer
Low cost splicer for both 1/4" and cassette
tapes -- blades included. Uses standard
splicing tape. 26-030
$ 2.50
24-026 Heavy Duty Bulk Tape Eraser, Indus-
trial grade, erases up to 1" wide tape ( 3/4"
helical scan video) on reels up to 17" diam.
UL listed
500.00
24-032 3" Hub Adaptor for 24-022, 24-026 10.00
24-033 3-11/16" Hub Adaptor for 24-022,
24-026
10.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-17
BENJAMIN INTERNATIONAL
232 Sherwood Avenue Farmingdale, NY 11735 (516) 753-0700
AUDIO-VIDEO ACCESSORIES
Professional " Gibson Girl"®
Video Tape Splicer
Heavy duty with precision features: tape guide and arms secure tape, control knobs for precise " cut and trim" positions. Precision blade centering adjustment is provided for lifetime accuracy.
26-048 1/4" Audio/Visual Tape Splicer
26-051 1/2" Audio/Visual
Tape Splicer 26-054 1" Audio/Visual
Tape Splicer 26-081 3/4" Audio/Visual
Tape Splicer
$125.00 125.00 125.00 125.00
Video Head Cleaner
A non-abrasive wet system which thor-
oughly cleans the entire tape path. It will not
damage the heads in your recorder. The
special fluid control system prevents over
saturation of the cleaning surface which
may activate the moisture sensing circuit of
some VCRs.
29-520 VHS Cleaner
$19.95
29-525 Beta Cleaner
19.95
Video Head Cleaning Fluid
Special Freon TF formulation as used in 29-500 kit.
29-501
$ 1.95
Deluxe Video Cassette Bulk
Tape Eraser
Powerful eraser restores magnetic qualities
of video cassettes. Erases virtually all signals
and does it in seconds. Works on VHS Er
Beta formats. UL Listed.
24-001
$39.95
111.11111.11111;";# Video Head Cleaning Applicators
Special non-abrasive chamois type appli-
cators 15).
29-502
$ 6.95
Video Screen Care Kit
Pre- saturated pads clean and restore original
screen brightness and clarity. Pre- saturated
screen restorer covers minor scratches on
screen.
29-505
$ 3.95
Splicing Tape for Splicing Recording Tape
23-018 1/4" x100"
$1.50
23-030 3/8" x100"
1 75
23-033 1/2" x100"
1 95
Universal Bulk Tape Eraser
Our lowest cost quality bulk eraser restores
like- new performance to video cassettes in seconds. Works on VHS Et Beta formats. UL Listed.
24-017
$ 19.95
Video Head Cleaning Kit
Contains Freon TF base cleaner, which
removes oxides and dirt from heads, guides and pinch rollers; and five long- reach appli-
cators with specially angled chamois- like
tips to permit complete cleaning. Packaged
in a plastic storage box.
29-500
$ 7.95
23-235 Aluminum Foil Sensing Fi Cueing
Tape-- 1/4" x100"
195
30-004 Tape Recorder Head Cleaner Fluid
--removes accumulated oxide,
grime Et other particles from record-
ing heads
1 00
30-011 Audio Clean Swabbies -- cotton-
tipped applicator for cleaning hard
to reach places-- 100 pcs.
1 95
VA- 18
Universal Head Demagnetizer
Removes residual magnetism from all heads
and other metal parts in the tape path.
On/off switch and special designed inter-
changeable tips for video recorders. UL
Listed.
24-055A
$ 12.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BLACKBOURN
10150 Crosstown Circle
Eden Prairie, MN 55344 (612) 944-7010
INC.
PROFESSIONAL VIDEO PACKAGING
INJECTION
MOLDED COMBO ALBUM
VHS ALBUM
·Single cavity VHS cassette album
·4" clear label holder on bottom of
front cover and spine
·Available in Chocolate Montana, Black, Red, Azure Blue, Ginger
Montana, White, and Royal Blue ·All albums have black trays except Ginger and White,
which have white trays ·Packed 50 per carton. Carton weight is 21 lbs
·Excellent for attractive dust proof cassette storage
Suggested Retail Price
$2.75 ea.
BETAMAX ALBUM
·Single cavity VHS cassette album
·3" clear label holder on bottom of
front cover and spine
·Available in Chocolate Montana,
Black, Red, Azure Blue, Ginger
Montana, White, and Royal Blue
·All albums have black trays except Ginger and White,
which have white trays
·Packed 50 per carton. Carton weight is 19 lbs
·Excellent for attractive dust proof cassette storage
Suggested Retail Price
$2.50 ea.
·Easily accommodates either VHS
or Beta videocassettes ·Unique internal loading tray locks
cassette in place ·Impact resistant, hard plastic con-
struction ·3" clear label holder centered on front cover and spine ·Professional looking black, brown, or clear leather grain
textured exterior ·Ideal protection for transporting or storing videocas-
settes Suggested Retail Price
$2.50 ea.
CP-T CLEAR COMBO ALBUM with CLEAR POCKETS
·Manufactured in clear transparent
vinyl ·Designed to hold either a VHS or
Beta cassette ·Full-length clear pockets on front
cover, spine and back cover allow
LE1541RE U&RARY *V.
insertion of literature or title
material
·Dust proof closure
·Packed 50 per carton. Carton weight is 12 lbs
Suggested Retail Price
$2.50 ea.
3/4" U-MATIC ALBUM
·Single cavity 3/4" U-Matic cassette
album ·Molded hub locks prevent tape
creasing
·4" clear wrap- around label holder
centered on front cover and spine
·Dust proof closure
·Available in Chocolate Montana or Black vinyl with black
trays ·Packed 48 per carton. Carton weight is 32 lbs
Suggested Retail Price
$3.75 ea.
POST COMBO
ALBUM
·Holds in place either VHS or Beta
videocassettes
·White or Black exterior vinyl with
full open trap unsealed at spine
·Dust proof closure
·Packed 50 per carton. Carton weight is 22 lbs
·Versatile album for retail or professional use
Suggested Retail Price
$3.00 ea.
CP-S CLEAR COMBO ALBUM
·Manufactured in clear transparent vinyl to attractively display either a VHS or Betamax movie sleeve with or without its cassette
·Prevents handling wear in displaying movie
sleeves ·Packed 50 per carton. Carton weight is 10 lbs.
Suggested Retail Price $2.50 ea.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VA- 19
BOSCH
2300 S., 2300 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119
(801) 972-8000 Telex 38-8352
VIDEO TAPE RECORDERS/SYSTEMS
MONITORING
BCN 21 Portable VTR for Recording, Play-back and Editing
Features ·Weight: 16.6 lbs. ( 7.5kg) without battery
and tape -- 20.1 lbs. ( 9.1kg) with battery and tape ·6.5 inch standard reels for 20 minutes playing time -- 6.5 inch Bosch reels for 30 minutes playing time -- 9 inch standard reels for 60 minutes playing time ·Color monitoring output ·Video and audio monitoring on any home receiver ( with optional HF modulator) ·Internal 12 V/2.5 Ah battery or external 12 V DC-supply · Field editing with the scene ·Correction of edit decisions ·Status monitor ( LCD display) for time code, operating modes or failure ·Built-in » C time code generator · Presetting of time code and user bits ·Output for time code for simultaneous recording on two BCN 21 ·Integrated audio mixer ·Three audio inputs ·Audio cross dubbing ( on- site postproduction) ·Overload protection for audio tracks (limiter) · Integrated supply line for condenser mike ·Integrated automatic editing facilities with edit simulation · IN, OUT cue marks for Master and Slave ·Search function with two frame editing accuracy ( tape timer) · Fully remote control facilities ·Instant edits with 1second backspace ·Interface for external editing systems
BCN 41/51 - One Inch Video Tape Recording System
The BCN 41 is the basic unit of the system. It consists of: ·Standard tape deck ·Control panel · Electronics
Operating modes · Recording with broadcast quality ·Insert and assemble editing ( manual) · B/W reproduction ·Color reproduction on request
Applications ·Compact unit for OB vans especially suit-
able due to low weight ·Optional operation with one processor
switchable to two BCN 41s for broadcast playback ·All applications where time- base- corrected signals are not necessary but atop-quality recorder is required. An economical solution
The BCN 41 can be upgraded with the processor BCPC 49C and an additional monitoring bridge BCBM to the BCN 51
version which then includes the following features: ·Time base correction ·Play-back in broadcast quality ·Drop-out and velocity error compensation · Delay time and subcarrier phase correction ·Monitoring of picture level and vector
signals ·Audio monitoring ·Test point selection
Digital Vario Motion
The BCN 51 basic version can be further upgraded with adigital BCN store BCQE 620.
The following features can be added for a more time saving and therefore more economical production.
Functions ·As per BCN 51 basic version ·Still frame reproduction ·Step motion ·Slow motion ·Visible search
·BCN 51 with BCN store is the basic version for further optional peripheral units
Applications · Demanding electronic productions · Fast and economical decision making for
editing; fast take search possible ·Analysis of moving sequences, e.g. sports
events ·Artistic use of quad split mode
BCN 41/51 A Production Peripherals
A BCN 51 with the store unit and additional control interface ZPQ is capable of being used with four further control panels: ·Single frame display BFS 9B ·Slow motion programmer BPS 9A ·Production editing systems ·Remote control A further specialty of the BCN system is the digital split system. The digital quad split control RCSH can be connected to every BCN 51 with the DVM unit. · For picture archiving with fast access to
individual pictures, ( 135,000 pictures on a 90 minute one- inch tape), picture sequences ( programmer takes) or logos ·Replacement of slide archives where the slides have so far been reproduced conventionally
Functions · Single frame recording and reproduction · Remote control of main tape deck func-
tions ·Automatic frame selection ·Automatic reproduction of picture se-
quences · Fast search mode
BCN 51
DVM/DIGITAL VARIO MOTION UNIT
BPS9A Slow Motion Programmer
Applications · Programmable slow motion replay of
various takes or high- lights ( e.g. goal scene etc.) Analysis of motion sequences or for replay of still picture from any kind of program ·Substitute for complex disk store systems Functions · Programmable slow motion, forward and reverse · Programmable single frame selection ·Automatic selection between normal and slow motion mode ·Variable slow motion speed ·Remote control of the main tape deck functions
RC SH Digital Quad Split Effects
Applications ·Analysis of motion sequences ·Artistic picture designing ·Production revising · Industrial, scientific and medical applica-
tions Functions ·Display of all effects with moving pictures
in color ·Display of still pictures ·Adjustable frequencies of picture se-
quences when still pictures are reproduced (Skip field mode) ·Reduction of picture area down to 1/4 ·4fold simultaneous display ( Quadsplit) ·Repetition of Quadsplit produces 8 fold reduction ( Restore) ·Selectable freeze frame of individual quadrants ( Quad Freeze) · Display of various mirror effects
VR-20
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AUTOMATIC VIDEO CASSETTE CHANGER
CHANNELMATIC
821 Tavern Road Alpine, CA 92001 (619) 445-2691
BROADCASTER I
Automatic Video Cassette Changer
(Patents Pending) BROADCASTER Iis the basic unit of a revolutionary new series of ultra- reliable and highly flexible video cassette changer systems. It can random access amongst up to fifteen video cassettes or, optionally can also random access up to 100 individual spots on each video cassette. It is designed to be used in broadcast stations, CATV systems, LPTV systems, hospitals, schools, hotels and other facilities where quality programming must be originated automatically on a pre-programmed weekly time schedule.
The microcomputer in BROADCASTER Iis operator programmed to select any one of the standard 3/4 inch video cassettes from the integral tape storage magazine, insert it into an unmodified Sony Type- 5 VGR, playback the tape and then replace it in its designated slot. Provisions are included for
precisely prerolling the VCR and audio/video switching is accomplished in a broadcast fashion, with vertical interval transition as referenced to the primary program source.
BROADCASTER I may be operator programmed to rewind a video cassette immediately after it has played, or to delay tape rewinding until a specific time, such as midnight, when each tape which has been played will be inserted into the VCR, rewound and replaced in the magazine. All tape rewinding is totally automatic and requires no operator attention.
FEATURES · Random Access of up to 15 Video
Cassettes ·Total Microcomputer Control ·Easy Programming- Display Prompted in
English ·Full 7- Day Programming ( 100 Events per
Day) ·No VCR Modification Required ·Computerized Stepper Motor Drive --
Indexing Accuracy Within . 005 Inch
· Reliable.. No Oil, No Gears, No Belts, No Chains
· Minimal Moving Parts for Ultra Long
Service Life ·Units May Be Cascaded for Additional
Capacity ·Will Play Multiple Sequential Segments on
Each Tape ·Built- In Vertical Interval Switching ·Automatic Switching to Auxiliary Source
During Cassette Change ·Automatic Record and Delayed Playback
Optional ·Built- In Video Monitoring Optional ·Optional Electronic Modules can add
Numerous Features
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT In its basic form BROADCASTER Ican solve many of the problems associated with loading and operating a video cassette machine, but when options are added, BROADCASTER I becomes a custom workhorse capable of almost any operation
involving video tape.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS BROADCASTER I is housed in a freestanding, castered cabinet measuring 52"H x 22"W x 37"D and weighing approximately
200 lbs.
BROADCASTER I
$ 13,500.00
Single channel Random Cassette Changer including Microcomputer Controller, Audio/Video Switcher with two additional inputs and DTG-102A Tone Generator for encoding tapes.
OPTIONS: 5- Inch Monochrome Video Monitor Additional 3- Input Audio/Video Switch
Tone Decoder ( Satellite) 8- Page Character Generator Including Programming
Video Presence Detector Balanced Audio, 3- Input and 1- Output HAN DUVIOD IAccessary for Sony Type 5VCR SONY VP 5000 Video Cassette Player, Installed
Video Distribution Amplifier, 6Isolated Outputs Audio Distribution Amplifier, 6Isolated Balanced Outputs Logging System Including 80. Column Printer Random Access Within Tape 4Incl. Logging and Tape Encoder) Automatic: Record and Playback
S 300.00 450.00
400.00 900.00
325.00 300.00
300.00 1895.00
325.00 325 00
1500.00 5500.00 3000.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-21
CHRISTIE ELECTRIC CORP
20665 Manhattan Place Torrance, CA 90501 USA (213) 320-0808 ( 800) 421-2955 TWX 910-349-6260
mAxERASE-16I3
BULK VIDEO/AUDIO TAPE DEGAUSSER A 30-second
one pass total erasure of all high coercivity video tape formats and sizes.
BULK TAPE DEGAUSSER
For the first time high coercivity tape (up to 1500 oersted) can be completely and automatically degaussed at the touch of a button. The Christie mAxERASE-16B, provides hands-off, fast degaussing, and eliminates the uncertainty of previous degaussing systems.
MOST POWERFUL . DEGAUSSER
The mAxERASE-1 6B [ Mode) ME- 16B) with its advanced design is the most powerful professional degaussing machine on the market today. It makes use of apatented high-power [equivalent flux of over 16 kilowatts] assembly composed of upper and lower magnetic cores, assuring total erasure of any video tape.
There is no other degaussing machine currently available which: [ 1] comes even close to the magnetic flux levels generated; ( 2) directs almost all of the deguassing flux through the tape; [3] simultaneously rotates the tape reel or cassette while passing it non-linearly through the magnetic field preventing " spoking"; [4] does all this in one pass, automatically, in about 30 seconds.
ERASES HIGH COERCIVITY TAPE
tape reel size up to 16 inches in diameter. It handles all magnetic tape formats-- reels, cassettes, cartridges and disc. For even faster degaussing, on smaller formats and sizes, several tapes can be erased at once by the mAxERASE-16B.
HEAVY DUTY APPLICATION
Many degaussers quickly overheat and stop functioning until they cool down. They also can cause the tape to overheat and perhaps even be damaged if multiple passes are required. The mAxERASE-16B is built with an enhanced duty cycle for bng-term continuous operation with most tapes, without overheating the tapes or the degausser.
SIMPLE AUTOMATIC OPERATION
The mAxERASE-166 operation is simple, safe and automatic. Atape is placed into the holding tray. The tape width is reset if different from the prior tape as indicated on the control panel. The operator then presses the start button, which causes the degaussing operation to begin. A motor drives the tape into the high-energy flux field and back out, while uniformly rotating the tape tray first in one direction and then in the opposite direction.
Difficult to erase high coercivity tape rated at 700 to 1000 oersteds is degaussed by the mAxERASE-16B to levels
typically exceeding -- 85 dB in one pass. Degaussing to typically more than -- 95 dB is achieved on 300 to 500 oersted tapes. Multi-track audio tapes are usually also degaussed to levels exceeding -- 80 dB.
HIGH QUALITY CONSTRUCTION
The unit employs ahigh quality drive motor, all solid-state control logic, high-current resonant technology, visual display
control panel, heavy cast base construction, and a sturdy molded fiberglass enclosure.
HANDLES ALL FORMATS/SIZES
The mAxERASE-1 6B is the only automatic degausser capable of being quickly adjusted to accommodate maximum degaussing fields for all widths of audio, computer, video, and
ONE-YEAR WARRANTY
The Christie mAxERASE-16B carries aone-year warranty on all parts. The warranty also includes labor if the unit is returned to Christie for repair. Acomplete copy of the Christie warranty containing all provisions is available from Christie
instrumentation tape from 0.25 inch up to 2.6 inches and any Electric Corp.
VR-22
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CHRISTIE ELECTRIC CORP
20665 Manhattan Place Torrance, CA 90501 USA (213) 320-0808 ( 800) 421-2955 TVVX 910-349-6260
mAxERASE-16B
(cdnt d)
BULK TAPE DEGAUSSER
TECHNICAL FEATURES
UNIQUE CORE DESIGN
The task of degaussing today's high coercivity tape
requires amagnetic flux field of maximum intensity. Since the magnetic flux density decreases exponentially with the distance, the mAxERASE-1 6B locates one magnet core just under the reel tray, in close proximity to the bottom of the tape. The top core assembly can be raised or lowered to bring it close
to the top of the tape. Operating with flux equivalent to more than 16 kilowatts, these electro-magnets produce an extremely concentrated flux field to penetrate the tape.
CONTROL/INDICATOR PANEL
Push-button controls and an indicator display panel make the mAxERASE-16B easy to operate. A linear scale indicates
the top magnet position which can be adjusted for standard or non-standard tape widths. If an operator loads atape which is too tall for the magnet position selected, the unit reverses and
alight on the display panel flashes.
SELECTABLE FLUX FIELD
·For high and low coercivity tapes, the unit has selectable high
and low power settings for each of the electro magnets. ·To assure the best erasure for every type of tape, the unit also provides switch selection between two orientations of the
flux field
SPECIFICATIONS OF MODEL ME- 16B* Aux Power
High and low power settings.
Operation Cycle:
One-pass, approximately 30 seconds. Flux Field Orientation: Two settings.
Formats/Sizes: Degaussing Level:
All diameters up to 16 inches (41 cm]. All widths up to 2.6 inches [ 6.6 cm].
-- 80 to -- 95 dB typical, one- pass. [Degaussing level will vary with tem-
Power Input: Protection
230 Volts, 60 Hz, 30 amps max twist lock plug.
Main Power: Magnetic circuit breaker; Control circuitry: fuse.
perature, tape coercivity, tape width, Dimensions:
H 16" [41 cm] xW 35" [ 89 cm] x
depth inside tape stack, reel type, reel
D 24 " [ 61 cm].
Controls:
construction, wave-length recorded, power setting, and number of passes.]
Front display panel.
Base Construction;
Cabinet: Mounting:
Heavy cast aluminum. Molded fiberglass. Bench mount.
Mechanical Drive: Electro-Magnets:
Single gearmotor. Heavy duty, patented core assemblies.
Net Weight:
150 ibs. [ 68 kg.).
*Subject to change without notice.
MAXERASE-16B Optional Features Suffix: Z: 230V, single phase
50Hz ( only), 30 amps maximum input
65,550.00 $400.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-23
EEC")
Incorporated
COMPUTER CONTROLS FOR VIDEO PRODUCTION
MULTIPOINT SEARCH- TO- CUE CONTROLLER
STC-100
A highly flexible microprocessor-based search-to-cue controller designed for use with Ampex VPR-1 and VPR-2/2B VTRs, the STC-100 can designate, store and recall up to 99 separate cue points, and remotely control the VTR's record, normal speed play and full speed bi-directional shuttle functions. Cue points may be keyed-in via a number pad in SMPTE/EBU format, or they may be marked on-the-fly from SMPTE/EBU time code being read off amoving tape. Each designated cue point is automatically assigned atwo-digit file number which may be keyed- in to recall the associated SMPTE/EBU time code address of the cue point, allowing the STC-100 to " rapid search" VTRs under its control to specific cue points.
INTERNAL MEMORY:
An internal memory with battery backup stores all cue point information. The memory can be dumped to or loaded from audio track 3of the VTR under the STC-100's control, allowing cue point lists to be stored on the same tape as the program material to which they apply, for convenient recall. The entire 99 cue point capacity of the STC-100 memory occupies only 40 seconds of tape, so the list can easily be recorded onto the leader ahead of the program material, if desired.
APPLICATIONS:
The STC-100 has awide range of uses in both live production and postproduction. For sports, it can be used to rapidly designate cue points for " instant replay" at any time during recording or playback. It can increase the efficiency of spot commercial playback by allowing aseries of commercials to be recorded on a single reel, with cue points designated at the beginning of each spot to allow rapid searching to those selected for playback. For postproduction, an entire library of stillframe recordings can be selected and the cue point information stored right on the video tape for recall during subsequent editing sessions. The list of STC-100 applications is limited only by the user's imagination.
MANUAL, STILL AND SLOW- MO OPERATION: Cue points may be marked, assigned cue numbers and searched in manual, still and slow motion mode.
Manual: Provides normal remote control of the VTR via the STC-100's record, play, stop and shuttle buttons. Cue points may be marked or searched-to during any motion sequence.
Still: Allows up to 99 stills to be selected in an auto-assemble sequence, providing arapid-access still store. Each still segment is 10 frames long. 99 recordings occupy approximately 33 seconds of real time (NTSC). Maximum access time is 5seconds, with a + 2frame target accuracy.
Slow Motion: Similar to manual mode, except that the transport controls on the STC-100 are disabled. Transport control is provided by an Ampex SMC-60/100 slow motion controller, while cue points are marked and searched by the STC-100. Operating in conjunction with the STC-100, the SMC-60/100's memory is expanded from one auto cue point to 99. The SMC-60/100 plugs directly into the back of the SIC-100.
SIMPLE INSTALLATION: The STC-100 plugs directly into the VTR's remote connector, and may be remoted up to 100 feet. No VTR modifications are required.
MODEL NO. STC-100
PART NO.
PRICE
260211-02 $ 8,950
Includes 10' Interconnect Cable
VA-24
EECO Incorporated, 1601 E. Chestnut Ave., Santa Ana, CA 92701 Phone: 17141835-6000. TWX 910-595-1550, Telex 67-8420
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Elcon
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY TELEVISION EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATES, INC.
Box 393 S. Salem, NY 10590 (914) 763-8893 TVVX 710-575-2600
VIDEO TAPE CLEANER/EVALUATOR
3/4 INCH CASSETTES MODEL EA750
ONE INCH TAPE MODEL EA 254
The Elcon Tape Evaluators are fully automatic, high-speed tape cleaners and profilers, specifically designed and precision- engineered for professional tape maintenance and evaluation. The Elcon offers aunique LED linear display system that makes thorough tape evaluation quick and easy. Push-button accessing of three pre- established acceptance levels simplifies classification into common categories, i.e., " Master Stock", " Commercial", and "Dub" quality, making this system particularly suited to operation by non-technical personnel. In one pass, tapes are cleaned, evaluated and rewound in 1/10 the normal running time.
Operation is fully automatic. The machines shuttle tape from head to tail end, cleaning only. The tape reverses automatically. On the rewind pass, the tape is cleaned a second time, and, if profile has been selected, the tape is degaussed and profiled electronically.
Electronic profiling will locate and identify damaged tape areas by illuminating the appropriate section on the LED linear display panel. The panel is divided into three illuminated channels representing the " Top Edge", "Video", and " Bottom Edge" of the tape. These channels are calibrated in 1/4 minute segments. No light indicates that the number of defects is below the predetermined acceptability level.
After atape has been profiled, the operator evaluates the tape by pressing the buttons labeled A, B and C. These alter the display illumination to reflect three separate userprogrammed acceptance levels.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-25
350 Fifth Ave. New York, NY 10118 (212) 736-3335 Telex ITT 423298
VIDEO TAPE
VA- 26
Fuji features 1- inch " C" format video tape in hard plastic shippers. The rigid, flame-retardant cases are available in 10 1/2-inch and 14- inch sizes with built-in handles. Fuji H621 video tape is acclaimed for its reliability, particularly under adverse conditions.
H621 Professional 1- Inch Video Tape
Fuji H621 1- inch video tape gives you better color, better S/N ratio, fewer dropouts, longer life, lower abrasion, and lower jitter from the capstan and drum. You get better results on the master, and with each subsequent generation you make.
High-density particles of Fuji's exclusive BERIDOX ( Berthollide iron oxide) are specially sensitized, then held together and fastened to the tape's backing material with Fuji's special U- binder. The backing material has uniform thickness and an extremely fine finish to prevent edge damage during winding, and is treated to reduce static. Fuji H621 provides superb performance in virtually any recording or playback situation.
For extra protection, aflame retardant shipping case is also available.
Length 1640' 3170' 4620' 5070' 6070' 7540' 9100'
Recording
Carton
Time
Reel Quantity Case
34 Min. 8"
5
66 Min. 9"
5
FRS or carrying case FRS or carrying case
96 Min.
10.5" 5
FRS or carrying case
105 Min.
10.5" 5
FRS only
126 Min.
14" 2
FRS only
157 Min.
14" 2
FRS only
189 Min. 14" 2
FRS only
All the above lengths are available in the Type C Format. The 34 min., 66 min., 96 min., and 120 min. lengths are available in the Type B Format.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
350 Fifth Ave. New York, NY 10118 (212) 736-3335 Telex ITT 423298
VIDEOCASSETTES
H521 BR Professional U-Matic Videocassettes
Fuji's new H521 BR is ahigh grade version of our H521 which is already considered to be the top of the line as far as 3/4" inch videocassettes go. Fuji has now taken U-Matic tape technology astep further by suppressing dropouts to the absolute minimum technically possible-- less than 4 per minute. We've also boosted video and color S/N performance amaximum of + 2dB over the H521. Fuji's H521 BR is the ultimate 3/4 inch video cassette.
BR KCA-30, BR KCA-60, BR KCS-10, BR KCS-20
H521 Professional U-Matic Videocassettes
Employing its new backcoating technology, Fuji has recently developed the " H521", the highest quality U-matic videocassette available to professional producers and broadcasters. With the dramatic reduction in dropouts and increased durability, the H521 becomes the most ideal U-matic cassette around, delivering the sharpest, cleanest picture--just what professional broadcasters expect and demand. The H521--the reliable 3/4-inch videocassette that can stand up to the toughest of operating conditions. Its outstanding features include: KCA-10, KCA-15, KCA-20, KCA-30, KCA-60, KCS-10, KCS-20
Super XG H451 VHS/H351 Beta
Proudly dubbed " The Master Tape". A magnetic layer 2.7 times higher in density than Super HG ensures the highest possible image and sound quality. "Additionally, anew binder developed specifically for the Super XG features the lowest friction co-efficient of any binder yet available, enhancing reliability and durability to the maximum." VHS: T-120, T-60 BETA: L-500, L-250
fg
Super HG VHS/Beta
The pioneer of super high-grade videocassettes. Exclusive DURO BACK backcoating realizes both super picture quality and excellent running stability.
VHS Videocassettes
T-20 T-30 T-40 T-60
T-80 T-100 T-120 T-160
BETA Videocassettes
L-125
L-500
L-250
L-750
L-370
L-830
H421/H321 Professional Super HG Videocassettes
In response to the introduction of 1/2 - inch ENG and EFP video systems, Fuji now offers new professional- use 1/2 -inch videocassettes: Fuji Super HG 14421 ( for the M-format) and H321 ( for the BETACAM
format).
Model/ H421 H421 H321 H321
Size T-120 T-60 L-500 L-250
Recording Time 20 Min. 10 Min. 20 Min. 10 Min.
VHS/Beta Videocassettes
Renowned Fine Grain BERIDOX magnetic particles ensure vivid, life- like color reproduction. Stable images-- even after hundreds of
playbacks-- are guaranteed.
VHS Videocassettes T-30 T-60 T-90
T-120 T-160
BETA Videocassettes
L-125
L-500
L-250
L-750
L-370
Head Cleaners VCL-10/VHS
BCL-10/BETA
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-27
GARNER INDUSTRIES
4200 N. 48th Lincoln, NE 68504
(402) 464-5911 Telex 438-068
DEGAUSSERS
Model 1400
The Standard In Video and Computer Degaussers Garner serves the video and computer industries with afull line of automated video tape erasers engineered for both the speed and effectiveness professionals demand.
Depth of Erasure: Garner's erasure of aheavily saturated, high coercivity tape is the standard of the industry.
Speed: Erases high-energy tape completely in 5 to 15 seconds. Other erasers take many times that long.
Ease of Operation: No one beats Garner's ease of operation. Just touch the " on" switch and place the tape on the conveyor. There are no drawers, no spindles and no height adjustments. Dependability, Guaranteed. For over 13 years, Garner has set the standard for tape erasers. Just one look at the rugged construction shows you why.
Model 1200
SPECIFICATIONS: Overall Dimensions
Model 270 (for 1/2" to 3/4" cassettes)
Length Width Height Weight Max Reel Diameter *Power Erasure Level PRICE
28 1/2 " 16" 9"
90 lbs. 81/2"
*120 VAC -75 dB
$2,985.00
*All models available in 220, 230 & 240 VAC / 50 Hz
Model 1200 (for 1" reels and cassettes
up to 101/2"in diameter)
33 1/2"
20 1/4" 11"
140 lbs. 10 1/ 2 "
*208/220 VAC -90 dB
$4,850.00
Model 1400 (for 1" reels and cassettes
up to 14" in diameter)
33 1/ 2 " 23 3/4"
11" 160 lbs.
14" *208/220 VAC
-90 dB $5,750.00
VR-28
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HITACHI
Hitachi Denshi, Ltd.
175 Crossways Park W.
Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 921-7200
VIDEO TAPE RECORDER/PLAYER
HR- 230 High Performance 1- Inch Production VTR
· High quality recording/reproduction · Interchangeability with all Type C tapes · 2-hour/3-hour reel operation selectable ·- 1to + 3times variable play speed ( option)
· Built-in 4Hp-p TBC ( option) · Auto setup of optimum record current · Video confidence ( simultaneous playback) · DG/ DP compensation circuit · Deviation marker for modulation setting · Auto chroma function · Built-in cable compensator · Auto setup of optimum bias current · Audio confidence ( simultaneous playback)
· Linked left-right volume control possible · Peak level display by LED · Audio spot erase function · Built-in monitor speaker · Digital servo system · Quick start of tape travel · Hand advance of tape under servo control · Automatic color framing · Any size of reel usable without servo switching · PRO ( Protective Reverse Oxide) tape path · Non-contact head drum in standby and FWD/REW modes
· Retracting entrance and exit guides · Escape tension mechanism · Retracting master erase head · Automatic audio head cover opening and closing · Built-in monitor select buttons · Controls with unity setting and center click · Various displays for ease of operation · Assemble/insert editing with 1-frame accuracy · Split edit and forced edit possible · Cue shift and variable preroll · Preview and review operation · Change and display of edit data · Edit point setting by ten- key entry
The Hitachi HR- 230 is a newly designed 1- inch helical- scan VTR in accordance with the SMPTE Type C standard and provides the same highly acclaimed performances that made the former HR -200 series so popular with many new added features that make it even more useful for various applications.
The HR- 230 inherits the same features as the former models such as the tape transport designed by CAD to assure stable tape travel, the PRO (Protective Reverse Oxide) tape path to protect oxide surface of atape, the air support system to reduce resistance to tape travel, and the retracting entrance guide for ease of tape loading. In addition to these features, air tension arm posts are newly adopted to further reduce resistance to tape travel and an escape tension mechanism and retracting exit guide, to make tape loading more simple and accurate in combination with the retracting entrance guide.
Only by changing the mounting position of reel motors, both of the 3- hour and 2- hour reel operations are possible; the former for desk-top and console configurations, and the latter for rackmount configuration.
Other performances improved, and functions added, are two microprocessors which independently control the operation system and servo system, - 1to + 3 times variable play speed and its memory function (option), auto setup function of the optimum video record and audio bias currents, variable play time function which can increase or decrease program time, master/slave control function, reduction of tape accelerating time and lock- in time, incorporation of 4Hp-p TBC ( option), various alarms and error messages for ease of fault diagnosis and
maintenance, etc.
The HR-230 can be used in any configuration of desk-top, console and rackmounting and is most suitable for broadcast station, production house and other high end industrial and educational applications.
HR- 230-1
Package Includes: HR- 230 -- Recorder Player TC-030 -- Plug- In Digital TBC
Take Up Reel Set of Extender Boards Service Manual
Price S57,900.00
HR- 230-2
Package Includes: HR- 230 -- Recorder/Player TC-230 -- Digital TBC
SL- 30 -- Slow Motion (Head Scan Tracking)
Take Up Reel Set of Extender Boards Service Manual
Price S78,800.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-29
INTERAND CORPORATION
3200 W. Peterson Ave. Chicago, IL 60659
(312) 478-1700 Telex 91022-15279 INTERANDCO CGO
FASTSCANTM 200
Multipoint Freeze- Frame Transceiver and Image Processor
FEATURES ·A true communicating image processor ·Can accept future transmission/compression programs · Easy to use · Compact ·Microprocessor- based · Remote control · Full color ·High resolution - 640 by 480 pixels
·Fast transmission - initial image in 4seconds ( V2.3) ·Automatic error detection/correction ·Compatible with other members of the DISCON family · Upgradeable
FastScan 200 is the entry level member of the DISCON family. Both affordable and upgradeable, it allows users to transmit to multiple locations any image that can be captured by avideo camera or created
by avideo compatible professional computer. FastScan 200 systems can be used in astand-alone network or as part of aDISCON 700 or 1000 network.
FastScan ( with Image Processor Program 2.3) transmits the initial image over ordinary telephone lines to multilple sites in 4seconds. As users discuss the image, the system adds color and detail. High resolution allows descision-makers to review such complex images as
blueprints, mechanical parts, circuit boards, molded pieces, financial documents, seismic charts, typewritten copy, and photographs. Advanced Image Processor Programs can be installed as they are made available.
FASTSCAN 200
$ 14,000.00
IMAGE STORAGE/TRANSCEIVER AND PROCESSOR
45c. Initial Image
2% Sec. First Color
47 Sec.
Completed Image
FastScan Transmission Time' (Using Image Processor Progkarr 2.31
IMAGE FILE ' m II
Video Image Storage System
FEATURES · Easy to use · " Help" menu · Remote control ·Instant image storage and retrieval ·Automatically generated menu of images, including record of date
and time of storage ·Automatic display mode ·Automatic send mode ·Tape drive for image backup and restore
·Compacity expandible from 200 to 1400 full- color high resolution images
A significant addition to DISCON'" 1000, 700, or FastScan' 200, Image File allows storage and retrieval of any image that can be captured by a video camera or created by a video compatible
professional computer. With expansion modules, up to 1400 full- color high resolution images can be stored, any of which can be called up on DISCON display terminals in less than three seconds.
Using FastScan, images can be transmitted over ordinary telephone lines and remotely stored in Image Files at all locations. Users can then
call up any of these images simultaneously at all sites for fast, effective problem- solving and telepresentations. Images can also be sequenced for automatic display at all sites to create a remote electronic slide show.
IMAGE FILE II
$ 15,000.00
Displayed Image
"Unretouched Photo From Display Monitor TRADEMARKS OF INTERAND CORPORATION
VR-30
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
mumn
·
nenhiCe
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO & COMMERCIAL/INDUS-
TRIAL SOUND EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide --
1280 pages of Studio & Remote Audio Recording
Equipment & Systems for stage, concert, audito-
rium, arena, stadium, hall, church, industry,
business, commercial, school, hospital & hotel
sound reinforcement, background music, paging,
intercommunications, telephone & telecom-
munications systems & equipment.
$95.00
AUDIO-VISUAL & EDUCATIONAL/TRAINING
COMPUTER EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide -- 1280
pages of projectors, screens, recorders, learning aids, carrels, stands, tables, lecterns & equipment for multi-image & sound. Computers, disk drives, furniture, graphics, magnetic media, modems, monitors, networks, paper/forms, printers, power supplies, terminals & software. $95.00
BROADCAST EQUIPMENT & SERVICES Buyers Guide -- 1280 pages of Studio, Remote & Location Equipment & Systems for television,
commercial & tape production, broadcast television, radio, cable, pay & satellite TV, special
effects, animation & music video.95.00 $
COMPUTER EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide -- For
Professional, Scientific, Business, Industrial &
Commercial Applications. 1280 pages of micros,
minis, disk drives, furniture, graphics, digitizers,
plotters, boards, cables, cases, consultants, diag-
nostic & test keyboards, magnetic media, main-
tenance, modems, monitors, networks, paper/
forms, power/protection, printers, software,
supplies, tape drives, telecommunications,
/ terminals.
$95.00
SECURITY & CCTV EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide
-- For Industrial, Professional, commercial & Busi-
ness Applications. 1280 pages of controls, annun-
ciators, power supplies, dialers, closed circuit TV,
wire, cable & equipment for remote monitoring,
space protection & central station.
$95.00
PROFESSIONAL PHOTOGRAPHY/MOTION
PICTURE Buyers Guide -- Professionals in
Photography, Motion Picture, Multi- Image, Audio- Visual, Film Production & Post Production
-- 1280 pages of studio, remote & location
equipment systems & supplies for Still, Cine, AV &
Film Production.
S95.00
INDUSTRIAL & PROFESSIONAL VIDEO EQUIP-
MENT Buyers Guide -- 1280 pages of cameras,
recorders, production & terminal equipment,
monitors, lighting, telecine, RF equipment, enclo-
sures, wire & cable.
$95.00
BILL DANIELS COMPANY, Inc.
9101 BOND · P.O. BOX 2056 SHAWNEE MISSION. KANSAS 66201
rsi CALL TOLL FREE
1-800-255-6038
IN KANSAS: 1-913-492-9900
VA- 31
3/4"EDITING RECORDER CR-850 U
JVC
FEATURES ( Preliminary)
. 4- Heads · Front Loading . Direct Drive Reel Servo . SMPTE Time Code Track ( 3rd Audio) · Diagnostic Warning System · Front Panel Test Points · S/N 47dB Video · Vertical Interval Head Switching · Improved Drop-Out Compensation · Die-Cast Chassis · LED Indication for Fuse Condition
Status . Record, Playback and Editing
Capabilities
CR -850U 3/4" EDITOR
The CR-850U is avery high quality 3/4" editing VCR with characteristics that make it suitable for a wide variety of applications. It was designed with the following objectives in mind:
It should have a picture reproduction quality second to none.
It should be easy to use.
It must adapt to awide variety of systems and applications. Above all, it must be reliable.
The CR-850U achieves all of these goals and more. It incorporates a variety of innovations in VCR technology and will certainly set new standards of performance.
Signal Quality, Performance. The most important attribute of a 3/4" editor is its picture quality. Design engineers made every effort to see to it that the CR-850U would have absolutely the best picture reproduction quality of any 3/4" VCR on the market.
Through the use of avariety of circuits, the CR-850U has exceptionally low noise -- 47dB signal to noise ratio in the color mode. And the less noise produced by a VCR, the cleaner the picture. This is especially important in the editing process, since noise is usually compounded as multi-generation dubs are being made.
Y-688 Dubbing System. Normal tape-totape transfers result in deterioration of the video signal. To minimize this, the CR-850U employs aY-688 dubbing system, utilizing a standard 7- pin cable (provided).
Convenience. Line Input Switcher. On the CR-850U there are two video inputs labeled "Line A" and "Line B". These inputs are selectable by pressing a pushbutton on the front panel. An LED lights to indicate which input is active.
When switching from Line A to Line B, the CR-850U performs the switching in the vertical interval. If the signals are genlocked together, then the transition is glitch-free, even when it is recorded. To further this benefit, a connector is provided on the rear panel for remote operation of this function. Contact closure of this connector causes the VCR to switch from Line A to Line B. The VCR can actually be used as a "mini-switcher".
Built-In Editing Control Functions. In many instances, a separate editing controller is not necessary to perform editing functions. The CR-850U has a built-in Z-80 microprocessor which controls these functions. A close look at
the control panel on the CR-850U shows many of the same functions found on popular editing controllers: Preroll, Preview, Entry In, Entry Out, Assemble, Insert, Edit Start, Edit Stop.
Digital Tape Counter. The LED digital tape counter on the CR-850U displays Hours, Minutes, Seconds, and Frames. Its count is based on the FG pulse from the capstan circuit, and will continue to read even if control track is lost. If the control track reference is desired, a DIP switch can be flipped internally to make this selection. In addition to displaying tape travel, the counter in the CR-850U has another function unique to aVCR: it has a buiit-in Lap Timer. This is like having a separate tape timer working independently of the normal counter. It can be used to measure tape travel distance from a given point. It is especially useful when doing fixed length edits.
Visible Picture Search. The front panel search dial on the CR-850U provides a convenient way to shuffle the tape with a viewable picture at speeds from 1/30th to 15 times normal in forward and reverse.
Jog Mode. In addition to visible picture search, another function is provided, which can be accessed when using a
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA. Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VR-32
JVC
3/4" EDITING RECORDER CR -850U
serial editing controller. "Jog" is afeature which allows the picture to accurately follow the movement of the search dial on the controller, as it is turned to the right or left
Full Capstan Control In All Modes. When the cassette is inserted into the CR -850U, mechanism fully loads the tape around the head drum. The tape remains threaded in this fashion until the eject button is pressed. This permits much faster cueing times, as well as more positive control over the tape. A special "standby" mode is provided which stops the head drum and disengages the pinch roller after 10 minutes in still. This permits rapid drum- up to full picture while protecting the tape and vital components.
Independent Audio Limiters. Besides adjusting the audio levels manually, the CR -850U can adjust levels automatically with its built-in limiter circuit. Separate on/off switches are provided for each channel, a JVC exclusive feature.
Flexibility. It is fitting that an editing VCR as advanced as the CR-850U be able to adapt to a wide variety of systems and applications. For this reason, JVC incorporated a number of features which are explained below.
Front Loading Design. Besides saving space the front loading design permits mounting in a standard 19" rack, with an optional rack slide kit. All operational controls are mounted on the front panel.
channels, to provide accurate indexing of the tape and to provide an accurate reference for editing. The CR -850U is equipped with a 3rd audio track (address track) for SMPTE code. A front panel LED illuminates when a signal is present on this track.
Balanced XLR Audio. The audio inputs and outputs on the CR -850U are balanced, and utilize standard 3- pin XLR connectors. The inputs can be switched for three levels, depending on the audio source.
Reliability. Diagnostic Warning System. Advanced microprocessor technology was applied to a sophisticated array of sensors and detectors throughout the CR -850U. If a problem occurs the VCR will immediately detect it and go into the "warning" mode. All functions will immediately be terminated so as to protect the tape and the machine. A digital readout on the front panel will display a code number from 01 to 99. This code number corresponds to the type of problem detected.
Front Panel Test Points. To aid in troubleshooting and preventive maintenance, test points were placed onto the front panel. A technician would normally connect test gear to these points and analyze the machine's performance. Adjustments can be made by opening the top or side panels.
Serial ( RS-422) Control. A 9- pin " D" type connector is located on the rear panel for connection to editing controllers and other components. Using the serial port permits connection to a wide variety of sophisticated controllers. The serial connector is also used for the JVC RMG850U controller.
Parallel Control. A 45- pin connector is located on the rear panel for connection to existing JVC editing controllers. Direct connection can be made to the RM-86U or VE-90AT/VE-93 controllers.
SMPTE Time Code Capability. SMPTE time code is a digital code which can be recorded on one of the VCR's audio
Direct Drive Motors. The CR-850U uses a fully direct drive reel servo system (separate motors for the supply and take-up reels), which keeps tape tension constant during all modes. In addition, the head drum and capstan are also directly driven. There are no belts, pulleys, or idlers to require maintenance.
Die-Cast Chassis. All critical components are mounted onto a heavy-duty diecast chassis. This assures stability, even when the machine is moved around a lot. Circuit boards are easy to access, and can be unplugged from the machine if necessary.
SPECIFICATIONS ( Preliminary)
GENERAL Format: U-VCR
Video Signal System: NTSC Power Requirements: 85 - 135V/170 - 270V ( switchable)
Dimensions: 17-9/16W x11-3/16"H x21-1/8"D (446 x284 x535mm)
Weight: 73 lbs. ( 33kg) Operating Temperature: 5-40 C (-4to 140'F)
Storage Temperature: -20 to 60'C (-4to 140 F) Operation Position: Horizontal
VIDEO Input: 0.5 to 2.0V p- p, 75 ohms BNC x2
Output: 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms BNC x2
Resolution: (B/W) 340 line, ( Color) 260 lines
Signal-To- Noise Ratio 47dB ( Color)
Video Input Select: Line ( A or B)/DUB H-Phase Adjustment: Auto Dubbing Systems: Y-688
RF Out for DOC: 0.5V p- p. 75 ohms
Audio Output: +4/-20dB ( Low impedance) balanced XLR Monitor Output: 4dB ( Low impedance) balanced XLR
Headphones: -46 -24dB variable, 6.3mm jack, 8ohms
Frequency Response: 50 to 15,000Hz Rec. Level Adjustment: Manual with meter, Limiter On/Off
OTHER FF/REW Time (w/KCA-60): 4min. ( FF), 3min. ( REW) Wow/Flutter ( by JIS): 0.15% RMS
Search: 1/30 to 15 times
Jog Mode: Yes ( with Serial Controller)
Tracking Adjustment: Yes
Suggested List Price
IBA
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VR-33
CR -8250U 3/4"RECORDER/PLAYERS
FEATURES
. SMPTE Address Channel · Balanced Line Audio Inputs/Outputs · Vertical Interval Head Switching · Full Metering . H- Phase Control · Full Capstan Control with Standby
Mode . Real-Time Electronic Tape Counter · Professional-Quality Editing Functions · FM- FM Dubbing System for High
Quality Copies · Color Dubbing Switch · Automatic Pre- Roll · Capstan Servo System with External
Lock Function · Automatic Search Mechanism · Automatic Repeat Mechanism
JVC
CR-8250U 3/4" Recorder/Players
With 3/4" videocassettes used in production houses throughout the world, there is a pressing need for recorders that are able to make the precise edits required for professional results. Various sophisticated features have been added to the recognized reliability and dependability of our previous Tape Handler models. The improvements include:
Addition of a third audio ( address) channel for time code; Balanced line audio inputs/outputs with XLR connectors; Vertical interval head switching; Video input level meter with manual adjustment; Tracking meter for precise playback adjustment; H- phase control to prevent edit flagging; Full capstan control in all modes except load and eject; Standby mode to protect tape and machine components while allowing quick drum- up; External hour meter; Increased dubbing flexibility through the use of FM-FM dubbing or Color Dub; Faster tape search ( 15X); Real-time tape counter that reads at search speed, even through blank tape; Improved horizontal resolution
H-Phase Control. This allows the CR -8250 to be accurately synchronized with the horizontal phase of the player for more accurate editing.
Full Capstan Control With Standby Mode. The tape remains threaded in all modes except load and eject, permitting faster cuing times as weil as better control. Tape search speed is variable from 0to 15 times in forward and reverse when an edit controller is used. A special " standby" mode is provided which stops the head drum and disengages the pinch roller after 21/2 minutes in still. This permits rapid drumup to full picture while protecting the tape and vital components.
Real-Time Electronic Tape Counter. The electronic tape counter has an easy-toread fluorescent display that shows elapsed time up to 59 min. 59 sec., facilitating indexing. It operates at search speeds, even while winding through blank tape.
degradation of picture quality, making the CR -8250U ideal for use as a master VCR in software production and in copying and editing systems.
Color Dubbing Switch. When FM-FM dubbing is not suitable for your editing situation, the Color Dub switch, located on the rear, improves the color dubbing quality.
Automatic Pre-Roll. When the pause button is pressed during recording or when the edit stop button is pressed during assemble editing, the tape is automatically pre-rolled and stops after being rewound by about 2seconds of program time.
Professional-Quality Editing Functions. The CR -8250U has a rotary erase head and a blanking switcher which make possible assemble and insert editing with virtually no distortion at the edit points. Editing flagging is minimizea by use of framing servo and extremely stable horizontal phase lock.
Capstan Servo System With External Lock Function. This permits playback to be locked to external sync signals so that the CR-8250U can be used in any
existing video system. The external subcarrier input terminal also enables
connection of a time base corrector (TBC).
FM- FM Dubbing System For High Quality Copies. In the FM- FM dubbing system, the signals are transferred in the form of FM signals without modulation and demodulation; this greatly reduces the
Automatic Search Mechanism. This function operates together with the
tape counter so that any section of the program can be located automatically.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VR-34
JVC
CR -8250U 3/4" RECORDER/PLAYERS
Automatic Repeat Mechanism. In the auto repeat mode, playback is continuous; when the tape reaches the end, it is automatically rewound and repeated.
SMPTE Address Channel. By connecting a time code generator. SMPTE time codes can be recorded on the tape allowing access to exactly the required frame for precise edits.
Balanced Line Audio Inputs/Outputs. XLR audio connectors, the type most commonly used on professional audio equipment, are provided for line inputs/outputs.
Vertical Interval Head Switching. The head switching line, sometimes visible in the picture area, has been moved into the vertical interval -- out of the picture completely.
Full Metering. For demanding professionals, a video level meter and adjustments are provided to allow the video recording current to be optimized. A tracking meter is provided for precise playback adjustment. Independent audio level meters are provided for channels 18( 2. The audio levels of the two channels can be adjusted referring to the meters, or automatically using the audio limiter. The limiter can be switched out on either or both audio channels as needs require. An external hour meter is also provided.
Based On A Heavy-Duty Mechanism For Assured Reliability
Direct- Drive Head Drum And Capstan Servos For Stable Rec And Play. The rotary head drum and heads which trace 85 micron tracks for the accurate recording and playback of the video signal are the most crucial parts of the video system. In the CR-8250U, the head drum is directly driven by a servocontrolled brushless DC motor. Together with the servo-controlled capstan which is also driven by an independent brushless DC motor, it assures highly stable pictures as well as greatly improved reliability.
Reel Servo System With Independent Motors. The stability of the tape transport mechanism is maintained by the independent motors driving the supply and take-up reels, and the `'ervo system which keeps tape tension constant during fast forward and rewind, as well as recording and playback, so there is no overload on the tape at any speed.
Aluminum Diecast Chassis Supporting The Heavy-Duty Mechanism. The advanced mechanisms used in the CR8250U are supported by a rugged, durable aluminum diecast chassis. A two- motor gear-driven tape loading mechanism and powered cassette eject mechanism are used to further assure reliability.
Microprocessor- Based Logic Control. The logic control system using a microprocessor allows direct changeover between modes without having to enter the stop mode. It is this facility that makes possible remote control over all the recorder's functions. Modes are clearly shown by the lighting of LED indicators corresponding to various controls which perform an intelligent tally function.
Skeletal Construction For Ease Of Maintenance. To make the CR -8250U easier to service and maintain in optimum condition, its front and rear, top and bottom and side panels can be detached independently, giving easy access to all circuit boards. For easy maintenance, the circuit boards use plug-in connectors.
PRICING CR-8250U CR-6650U CP-5550U
Suggested List Price
Tape Handler 3/4" Videocassette Editing Recorder Recorder/Player Version with Assemble Edit (No Insert Editing) Player Only Version
$5220.00 $3415.00 $2600.00
SPECIFICATIONS ( CR-8250U)
GENERAL
Power Requirement: AC 120V , 50/60Hz, 140W
Dimensions: 56.4(W) x22.1(H) x47.1(D) cm (22-1/4" x8-3/4" x18-9/16")
Weight: 30.6kg ( 67.3 lbs.)
Operating Temperature: (40 Fto 104 -F) 5 C to 40 ' C Operating Position: Horizontal only
Tape Speed: 9.53 cm/sec Recording Time: Max. 60 min. with JVC KCA-60
Fast Forward/Rewind Time: Within 4min. 30 sec. for 60 min. tape
Wow & Flutter: Less than 015% RMS
VIDEO Recording System: Rotary two- head, helical scanning Video Signal System: NTSC-type color, 525 lines
Input Line/TV: 0.5 -- 2.0V p- p, 75 ohms FM Dubbing: 0.5V p- p, 75 ohms
Output Line/TV: 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms FM Dubbing: 0.5V p- p, 75 ohms
Signal-To-Noise Ratio: More than 46dB ( color) More than 49dB ( B/W) (Rohde 8( Schwarz noise meter)
Horizontal Resolution: Monochrome 340 lines, Color 260 lines Sync Input: 0.5 to 4.0V p-p, 75 ohms
Time Code: Input: - 10dBs, more than 10K ohms Output: 2.2V p- p, low impedance
Input Select: TV/LINE/FM DUB
AUDIO Input Line: -20/0aBs, 10K ohms, balanced Mic.: - 70dBm, 600 ohms, unbalanced TV: -20dB& high impedance, unbal
Output Line: -20/0dBm. 600 ohms load, low impedance, balanced Monitor: OdBm, 600 ohms load, low impedance, balanced TV: OdBs, 1K ohm, unbalanced
Signal-To-Noise Ratio: More than 48dB (at 3% distortion level)
Frequency Response: 50 to 15,000Hz
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division. 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825
VR-35
3/4"RECORDERS/PLAYERS CR-6060U/CP-5200U
FEATURES
. Remote Control Option . Timer Start Capability · Dubbing Switch ( CR-6060U) · Audio Level Control w/Limiter
(CR-6060U) · Two Audio Channels · Auto Replay Feature · Solenoid Operation · Still Frame · Optional RF Converter
JVC
CR-6060U/CP-5200U 3/4 "RECORDERS/PLAYERS
The CR-6060U and CP-5200U...proven 3/4" U-Format performers.
The CR-6060U is a basic 3/4" recorder/player offering excellent economy, simplicity, and reliability. The CP-5200U is a player only model based on the same design philosophy. Both models offer the right combination of features and performance and are priced within the reach of most industrial users.
Sharp, Clear Pictures. Highly stable, sharp images and well defined colors are provided by the AGC and double function Automatic Color Control circuits.
Dubbing Facility ( CR-6060U). A feature normally found on more expensive 3/4" VCRs, the CR-6060U provides a dubbing switch which allows some of the color processing circuitry to be bypassed, thus improving the quality of machine-tomachine transfers.
Still Frame Playback. During playback, you can stop the action to analyze
individual pictures. Both the CR-6060U and CP-5200U are equipped with this capability.
Timer Start Capability. By plugging the deck into an external timer ( not included), unattended recording (playback on the CP-5200U) can take place. In the timer start mode, the machine automatically enters the record mode ( CR-6060U) when the AC power is supplied.
Audio. Dual audio channels are provided. On the CR-6060U, recording levels can be adjusted using the meters, or automatically with the built-in limiter circuit. In addition, the CR-6060U is equipped with an audio-dub feature which allows the audio on channel- 1to be re-recorded, if desired.
Auto-Repeat. Tape playback can be repeated from beginning to end as many times as desired using the autorepeat feature. An auto- search feature also lets you fast forward or rewind to counter "0000".
Solenoid-Control. Solenoid operation not only provides easier operation, but enables an optional remote control to be used. The RM-60U ( CR-6060U) and RM-51 ( CP-5200U) provide remote control of most tape transport functions and have tally indication.
Optional RF Converter. Both machines can be connected to an ordinary TV receiver through the use of an optional RF converter, KR-234 ( Ch 3-4) or KR-256 (Ch 5-6).
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
Suggested List Price
CR-6060U 3/e Recorder/Player
CP-5200U 3/4" Player RM-51U Remote Control for CP-5200U Rfv1-60U Remote Control for CR-6060U SW-200UF Switchbox and Antenna Cable
MCB-20 KR- 234U KR- 256
for CR-6060U
Carryrng Case115.00
RF Converter ( Ch 3-4)
RF Converter ( Ch 5-6)
$1685.00 1230.00
110.00
165.00
7.25
100.00
100.00
JVRV-C36COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825
JVC
PORTABLE 3/4" RECORDER CR -4900U
FEATURES
·Video Confidence Heads ·SMPTE Time Code Capability makes
Possible Edits with Single- Frame
Accuracy ·Automatic Backspace Editing for
Assemble Edits in the Field ·Real-Time Tape Counter; for
Convenience, Shows Tape Running Time in Minutes and Seconds ·Microprocessor-Based Logic Controls
All Tape Operations for Precise Control ·Full- Function Remote Control (optional); Useful when the Recorder is Operated by the Cameraperson ·Shuttle Search at about 10 Times Normal Speed in either Direction
CR -4900U VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER
Lightweight. Complete with its rechargeable NB-P2U battery pack and a KCS-20 videocassette, the CR-4900U weighs only 19.6 lbs. ( 8.9kg). This is less than similar machines; lighter weight makes it more portable so that it can be used on more demanding assignments.
Low Power Consumption. The CR-4900U has a low power consumption, only 12 watts, an important advantage when it is used on location. The optional multicharger/AC adaptor can charge the NB-P2U battery pack; four battery packs can be connected to this multi-charger and charged either in sequence ( taking 90 minutes per battery pack) or simultaneously in a total of 10 hours.
Video Confidence Heads. The CR-4900U is the first 3.4" U-format recorder to be equipped for real-time monitoring of the signal immediately after it has been recorded while recording is taking place. This allows instantaneous detection of unsatisfactory sections so that they can be rerecorded immediately. This gives the CR-4900U an impressive advantage over competing machines.
Recording Current Adjustment. While recording is taking place, the level of the video signal recorded on the tape is measured; this is displayed so that the
video recording current can be optimized. By turning a control on the
bottom, the recording current can be adjusted. When the meter makes its biggest deflection, the recording current is optimum.
Microprocessor-Controlled. All tape operations are controlled by a microprocessor. This makes it possible to use feather-touch operation buttons; when these buttons are touched lightly, they generate electrical signals which are fed into the microprocessor, which analyzes the feasibility of mode changes and the necessity of entering other modes during the changeover process before issuing the appropria+e signals.
Remote Control. Microprocessor control also facilitates remote control using the optional remote control unit. All functions of the recorder can be controlled using this except audio dubbing and videocassette eject; this flexible remote control is particularly useful when the CR-4900U is operated by the cameraperson.
SMPTE Time Code Capability. With the optional TG-P47U Time Code Generator connected, the SMPTE time code -- an eight-digit address-can be recorded on the tape so that the exact frame can be accessed for precise editing.
Frame Servo Mechanism. The frame servo mechanism allows accurate frame-to-frame editing.
Automatic Editing. Whenever the recorder enters the pause mode by use of the front panel pause button, the remote control unit's pause control or the camera's start switch, the tape is backspaced. Then, when recording starts again, the control track previously recorded on the tape is read so that the subsequent recording is correctly
synchronized.
Real-Time Tape Counter. The 4-digit LCD tape counter shows the amount of tape that has run in minutes and seconds. This is a convenient way to indicate the amount of tape that has run and allows the required section of the tape to be accessed with afair degree of precision. An identical 4-digit LCD tape counter is provided on the optional remote control.
Shuttle Search. In playback, the picture can be seen on the screen with the tape running in either direction at about 10 times normal speed. This is convenient when you want to locate any section of the program quickly.
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
Suggested List Price
CP-4900U Portable 3/4- Rec,,tier
AA-P.47U PC Adaptor/Charger
TG-P47U Time Code Generator
CB-P47U Custom Shoulder Case RM-P47U rzernote Control
BA-P47U Battery Case
for NI3-P2U
$3285.00
370.00 1470.00
115.00 245.00
170.00
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive. Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-V5R8-2357
EDITING CONTROLLER VE-93
FEATURES
· Joystick Control · Keypad Entry · Automatic Edit-In/Edit-Out · Entry On-The- Fly, Auto Tag · Variable Pre/Post Roll Times · Dual Channel Time Code Readers · SMPTE Time Code Generator · Jam Sync, Time Code Copy Mode . Edit Decision List Output for Printer
Connection · Fade to Black Module · Machine Synchronization ( Bump) · Time Code Offset Compensation · Multiple Edit Replay Feature . Full Audio Preview · Built- In Cooling Fan
JVC
VE-93 SHOWN WITH OPTIONAL CI-90 CHARACTER INSERTER
VE -93 EDITING CONTROLLER
The VE-93 brings state-of-the-art computer technology to video tape editing. Utilizing a single, rugged joystick for controlling both record and source machines, the VE-93 is one of the easiest to operate controllers on the market.
Time Code Capability. One of the most useful features of the VE-93 is that it generates, reads, and references SMPTE time code. Tapes with time code can be searched, catalogued, and edited with frame accuracy. This greatly simplifies and speeds up the postproduction process.
CI-90 Character Inserter (optional). The Cl -90 is actually a separate time code reader which displays the time code in the picture area. This enables you to make acopy of the master tape ( the copy can be in any format) with numbers on the screen which correspond with the code on the original tape. The lengthy process of reviewing footage and making edit lists can be done away from the editing system.
Other Features of VE-93. With the JVC TapeHandler 3/4" series, tape speeds are variable from 0-15 times in forward and reverse. Edit points and search locations can be directly accessed by entering the exact location into the controller via a numerical keypad. In addition, edit points can be entered in a variety of other ways, depending upon application. With the tape running, edit points can be entered "on-the-fly". In the parked position, edit points can be entered either manually or automatically using the Trim or Auto Tag functions. The VE-93 will also compute inpoints automatically for back-timed edits
When connected to an external monitor, a Status Display Generator generates a screen full of pertinent information including edit times, program length, etc. Other advanced features:
Variable pre/post roll times (0-9 sec.); Last edit recall; Machine synchronization; Cruise (full speed search without joystick); Abort capability; Time code offset compensation; Multiple edit
replay; Fade in/out to and from black; Edit decision lister with printer interface.
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
VE -93 CI-90
Editing Controller Character Inserter
Suggested List Price
$6,900.00 1,250.00
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VR-38
JVC
FEATURES ( Preliminary)
· Controls 2Source Decks · RS-422 Serial Control · LED Indicators · Lap Time Function · Automatic Back-Timed Edits · Monitor Audio Volume Controls · Audible Alarm Warning · Dial Search with Jog Mode · Automatic Edit Control · Switchable Total Time/Lap Time
Counter · "Go To" Edit-Point Location · Preview Perform/Review Functions · Auto-Tag Operation · Frame-by-Frame Correction
EDITING CONTROL UNIT RM-G850U
RM-G850U AUTOMATIC EDIT CONTROLLER
The RM-G850U controller uses a built-in microprocessor to automatically produce edits from any three In/Out points entered -- especially convenient for fixed- length and back-timed edits. Smooth editing accuracy is provided by twin Search dials for the master and slave recorders, jog capability and frame- by-frame edit correction.
"Conversational" Operation. Selfilluminating control buttons light in proper sequence to guide operators naturally through editing procedures.
Audible Warning. An electronic alarm confirms activation of key functions including tape-transport, Preview, Perform, Review, etc. The alarm will also sound to indicate tape-transport abnormalities.
Dial Search with Jog Mode. Twin dials control recorder and player search at several different speeds between 1/30 and 15 times normal playback. The jog mode, which can be entered directly from any other, provides the fine adjustment for exact edit-point location.
Automatic Edit Control. This system allows entry of edit points in the still mode or on the fly ( while the tape is running), and will automatically determine the fourth point in a set of edit locations.
Switchable Total Time/Lap Time Counter. Independent counter displays are provided for the player and the recorder. Memorized edit points or the duration of an edit can be displayed in hours, minutes, seconds and frames. Elapsed time indication is also available.
"GOTO" Edit-Point Location. Edit points can be called up directly from the player or recorder for on-screen checks.
Preview and Review. Programmed edits can be previewed ( rehearsed) without actual recording, and then reviewed after completion at the push of a button.
Auto-Tag Convenience. After completion of an edit, the recorder returns to the edit-out point and enters the Still mode. Pressing the Perform or Preview button automatically makes it the starting point for the next edit.
Frame-by-Frame Correction. Correction of edit locations to single-frame accuracy is provided using the Shift button.
Variable Pre-Roll Time. 3, 5, 7, 10 or 15 seconds
9-Pin Remote Control Terminal ( RS-422)
Suggested List Price
TBA
Audio Monitor Level Adjustment. Permits audio level reduction in high-speed search modes.
25-Frame and 30-Frame Compatibility
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Source: AC 120V, 50/60Hz Dimensions: 16-15/16'W x4-11/16"H x12-11/16D (430 x118 x322mm) Weight: Approx. 13.7 lbs. ( 6.2kg)
VCR CONTROLS Control Buttons: Play, REO ( recorder side only), FF, REW, Stop, Pause/Still, Search/Jog, Eject Dial Search 0, 1/30, 1/5, 1, 2, 5, 10 and 15 times normal speed in both directions Edit Modes: Assemble and Insert Edit-Point Memory: Edit-in and edit-out points held in memory Edit-Point Shift: Frame-by-frame shift in both directions
COUNTER DISPLAY Time Counter: Up to 9hours, 59 minutes, 59 seconds, 29 frames Display: Total time/elapsed time and editin/edit-out points
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-V5R8-2359
VHS RECORDER/PLAYER BR-6400U/BP-5300U
FEATURES
·Direct- Drive Motors ·Rugged Diecast Aluminum Chassis ·Motorized Front Cassette Loading ·4- Head System ·Microprocessor Full- Logic Control ·Shutte Search at up to 10 Times
Normal Speed in either Direction ·Playback at any Speed from Still to 5
Times Normal Speed in either Direction .Capstan Servo and External Sync Capability ·Two- Channel Audio ·Hi -Fi Sound ·Remote Control and Random Access Options ·Electronic Tape Counter/Lap Timer with Fluoresent Display .Audio Level Control with Meters ·Two-Channel Selectable Audio Dubbing ( BR-6400U only) .Editing Control Interfacing ·Easy Serviceability
JVC
BR-6400U VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER BP-5300U VIDEOCASSETTE PLAYER
These machines embody the latest and best of JVC's VHS technology. They are designed to offer every possible useroriented convenience. The BR-6400U and BP-5300U can be used as source decks with JVC's VHS and 3/4" editing systems.
Direct- Drive Motors. The motor used to drive the head drum is a direct-drive, servo-controlled. brushless DC motor, while th capstan and reels have independent direct-drive DC motors. This system keeps jitter down to an absolute minimum, assuring stable pictures and more reliable operation.
Rugged Diecast Aluminum Chassis. Robust and durable, the diecast aluminum chassis gives the firm support that the mechanism requires for years of trouble-free operation in a demanding professional environment.
Motorized Front Cassette Loading. Simply insert the edge of the videocassette into the front panel slot and the loading motor moves the
cassette gently so that it is positioned for correct operation. With dl controls on the front panel, this loading mechanism allows the machine to be mounted in a stacked configuration to save space.
4- Head System. Both these machines have two pairs of video heads; one pair for recording ( 13R-6400U only) and normal speed playback, the other pair for search and variable-speed playback. This is in keeping with NC policy; as well as assuring that recording is of the highest possible qualify, this system gives stable pictures in any playback mode.
Microprocessor Full-Logic Control. Feather-light touch operation and highly reliable tape transport control are made possible by advanced full-logic electronics.
Shuttle Search at up to 10 Times Normal Speed in Either Direction. No more guesswork in locating the particular section you want to view; you can scan through a whole 2-hour program in about 12 minutes. Run the tape at about 10 times normal speed either forward or in reverse while watching the speeded-up picture on the screen. This takes you to the scene you want quickly and accurately.
Playback at any Speed from Still to 5 Times Normal Speed in either Direction. When controlled from either of the optional remote control units, the playback speed can be varied continuously from still to 5times normal in both forward and reverse directions. This is a great help in editing; you can accurately and quickly locate any required frame. It also allows more detailed analysis of action.
Capstan Servo and External Sync Capability. Because of its capstan servo mechanism and the fact that it can accept external sync signals to which playback is synchronized, these machines can easily be incorporated in an existing video system.
Two-Channel Audio. Two audio channels make the system more versatile and increase the range of applications. Either of the two channels can be played independently; stereo playback is also possible.
Hi-Fi Sound. Advanced audio circuitry ensures excellent sound reproduction that's further improved by the built-in Dolby noise reduction system.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division. 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 VR-40
(201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825
JVC
VHS RECORDER/PLAYER BR-6400U/BP-5300U
Remote Control and Random Access Options. A choice of cable and infrared full-function remote control units using microprocessors are optionally available; choose the one which meets your needs best. As well as giving control over tape operations, they also control high-speed picture search and variable-speed playback. An optional random access unit equipped with a digital fluorescent display allows you to input any tape address for quick retrieval of any scene.
Electronic Tape Counter/Lap Timer with Fluorescent Display. 4-digit tape counter provides a convenient means of addressing tape segments. The display doubles as a5-digit lap timer showing tape running time in hours, minutes and seconds.
Audio Level Control with Meters (BR-6400U only). To prevent over- level recordings, an audio limiter circuit is provided in each of the audio channels. These limiter circuits can be switched on and off. In either condition, manual level control referring to the meters is possible.
Two-Channel Selectable Audio Dubbing (BR-6400U only). For greater flexibility and better control over sound, either of the two audio channels can be selected for dubbing.
Multi-Standard VHS Recorder BR-64001R VideoCassette Recorder Features and specifications similar to BR-6400U; Records PAL, SECAM signals;
Editing Control Interlacing. For more elaborate editing, direct interfacing with JVC's Automatic Editing Control Units is possible, enabling 1/2" to 3/4" or 3/4" to 1/2" edits to be made quickly and accurately.
Easy Serviceability. Main circuit boards can be checked conveniently by connecting an extension board. This makes a major contribution to dependable operation throughout the unit's long service- life.
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
Suggested List Pric
BR-6400U 2Hour VHS Recorder/Player
BP-5300U 2Hour VHS Player
BR-6400TR Multi- Standard VHS
Recorder/Player
RK-6400
19- Rackmount for BR-6400U/BP-5300U
PM-P53U Wired Remote Control for
BR-6400U/BP-5300U
RM-P54U Wireless Remote Control for
BR-6400WESP-53U
RM-P500U Random Access Control tor
BR-640011/13P- 5300U
$1785.00 1400.00 1995.00 8600
95.00 115.00 330.00
Playback in PAL. SECAM and NTSC 4.43 formats; Power requirement: 100/120/220/240 VAC 50/60Hz
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL Format: VHS 1/2" ( 12.7mm) NTSC standard
Power Requirement: 120V AC, 50/60Hz Power Consumption: 73 watts ( with remote control, DC 12V, max. 0.55A) 53 watts ( in the record mode) Dimensions: 17-11/32 -W x6-15/32"H x17-21/32"D (44.0 x16.4 x44.8cm)
Weight: 37.8 lbs. ( 17.2kg) Operating Temperature: 5°C to 40°C ( 41°F to 104°F) Tape Speed: 33.35 mm/sec ( 1.31 inches/sec)
Fast Forward/Rewind Time: Less than 4 min. for 120 min. tape
VIDEO Recording System: Rotary iwo-head, helical scanning system Liminance: FM recording Color Signal: Phase shift, converted subcarrier direct recording
Video Signal System: NTSC-type color signal ( EIA standard)
Input Line/TV: 0.5 to 2.0V p-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced Output Line/TV: 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms, unbalanced Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 45dB ( Rohde 8( Schwarz noise meter)
Horizontal Resolution: Monochrome: more than 280 lines
Color more than 230 lines
Sync Input: 1to 4V p- p, 75 ohms, unbalanced
Sync Select: INT/EXT
AUDIO Input Line: -6/-20dBs ( selectable), 10K ohms, unbalanced ( CH-1/CH-2) Mic: - 70 to -60dBm, 600 ohms, unbalanced Output Line: -6dBs, low impedance, unbalanced
Monitor OdBs, low impedance, unbalanced ( CH-1/CH-2/MIX)
N: OdBs. low impedance, unbalanced Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 48dB ( NR-on), 45dB ( NR-off) ( at 3% distortion level) Frequency Response: 20 to 12.000Hz
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VR-41
HI-FI VHS DUPLICATOR BR-700OUR
FEATURES
· Quality Hi -Fi Sound · Direct- Drive Motors Plus Heavy- Duty
Chassis · Professional Hi -Fi Dubbing System · Oversize Cassette Mounting Guide
· Big, One- Glance Audio/Video Level Meters
· Manual/Auto Video Recording Level · Accidental Erasure Override · High Quality Sound in Normal Audio
Mode · Two Audio Inputs for Recording
Flexibility
· Easy Frontal Access to Essential Test Points
· Front Panel Hour Meter · Easy Tape Path Maintenance · Serial Parallel Remote Control
Flexibility
JIM
BR-700OUR HI-FI VHS DUPLICATOR
JVC, the originator of the world's most popular video format -- VHS, has designed and built aVHS Hi -Fi recorder specifically for tape duplication. The new BR-700OUR was conceived with the anticipation of a large consumer demand for pre-recorded VHS Hi -Fi tapes during the next few years. And it was conceived with the idea that people duplicating the video cassettes would be expecting the very highest quality video and audio reproduction from a machine designed for such a purpose.
Why A Video Recorder Just For Duplicators? JVC engineers visited a number of major duplication facilities throughout the world, and it became apparent that the needs of duplicators were unlike those of any other user of video tape products. There was the temptation to design an "all purpose" recorder/player that would incorporate some of the features the duplicators needed -- and many features that were not needed. But there were already such machines on the market, and that's not what the duplicators were asking for.
Instead, JVC engineers took the ideas and suggestions of the engineers and
technicians specializing in duplication, and came up with aVCR that was designed Inside and Out especially for them. Complete with punch-outs on the rear panel for user modifications, and front panel test points, the BR-700OUR was designed for one application: continuous duly tape duplication in the VHS Hi -Fi format at the Standard Play tape speed.
Durability. The BR-700OUR is based on the most advanced electronic tape transport system available today. The transport, mounted on a solid die-cast aluminum chassis, has been designed to give continuous, trouble-free use for years. Servo-controlled direct-drive motors not only ensure greater viewing stability, but they are also more reliable.
Plug-in circuit board construction. Most circuit boards are designed for quick replacement and can be swung out or unplugged. In addition, a replaceable fuse is located on the rear panel.
Front panel hour meter and serial number. Most people wouldn't want these items on the front of the machine, but the BR-700OUR wasn't designed for most people. Duplication houses want
the ability to quickly identify a machine and its operating hours. The plug-in hour meter indicates up to 5000 hours of head drum operation, and can be reset by simply un -plugging and turning around.
Window for tape path cleaning. On the top cover of this front load machine is a trap door. Inside, there is access to the head drum and tape path components.
Ease Of Maintenance. Despite its low maintenance design, JVC engineers wanted a recorder that technicians could keep in peak operating condition with utmost ease. It is for this reason that several innovations were incorporated:
Front panel test points. Provided are the following: Ground; Drum Pulse; Video RF (FM Carrier); Hi -Fi Audio RF ( FM Carrier); Normal Audio RF-Out
Duplicator-Friendly Operation. The following features were asked for by the professional duplication houses:
1. Wide opening for accepting the cassette with a guide for easy loading and unloading of the cassette.
2. At-a-glance large recording indicator (possibly the largest LED recording indicator in the industry.)
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VR-42
JVC
HI-FI VHS DUPLICATOR BR- 7000UR
3. Recording capability of a cassette with the safety-tab off. ( Bulk duplication tape is shipped and recorded with the safety tab already broken off. This eliminates the need for the duplicator to remove the tab.) The BR-700OUR goes one step further: A front panel LED tells the duplicator whether the tab is in the cassette or not.
4. Large video/tracking and audio meters.
5. A cover for operational buttons is provided which prevents accidental misoperation. Since all transport functions are normally remote controlled, there is no need for the person loading and unloading tapes to have access to these controls.
6. Video AGO on/off switch. Provided as a convenience, the video recording level can be adjusted manually or automatically, using the AGO. The BR700OUR is equipped with a video level meter.
Outstanding Performance. The performance of the BR-700OUR is second to none. With no compromise either electronically or mechanically, JVC engineers built the very best VHS machine possible.
Improved video processing circuitry including: A pulse response improvement circuit; S/N improvement circuit; Improved filter response; Improved head resonance characteristics.
DIMENSIONS
Dolby Bnoise reduction circuits on the normal audio channels.
Utilization of the "VHS Hi -Fi" audio format, incorporating two rotary audio heads. Audio dynamic range is more than 85dB, with afrequency response of 20 to 20,000Hz.
Serial Or Parallel Control System. Thanks to the BR-700OUR's built-in serial coding system, you can create awhole professional system carrying out hi-fi dubbing operations with matchless efficiency. Dubbing operations are further simplified by the BR-700OUR's remote control capability covering, Record, Play, FF, REW, Stop, Pause, Rec. Pause, Eject, plus Hi -Fi Record on/off functions. Simply interconnect any number of BR-700OUR units using an RCA pin cable. Each unit is supplied with a cover over the control buttons and switches on the front panel, which prevents the BR-700OUR from operating accidentally when under serial coded remote control.
For installation into duplication facilities using parallel control, the BR-700OUR is equipped with a 34- pin connector, which gives access to most machine functions.
Suggested List Price
$ 1795.00
445mm 17-906'
440mm 17-3/8'
00 00 00
I-J
O
00 00 0
L
I_J1J
III
174mm 8-7/8
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL Format: VHS 1/2" NTSC Standard
Power Requirement: AC 120V. 50/60Hz
Power Consumption: 55 watts ( Max. 67 watts with remote control unit, 12V DC, 550 mA)
Dimensions: 17-3/8'W x6-7/8"H x17-9/16"D (440 x174 x445mm)
Weight: 39 lbs. ( 17.5kg)
Operating Temperature: 5°C to 40°C Tape Speed: 33.35 mm/sec. Recording Time: Max. 120 min. with T-120 cassette FF/REW Time: Less than 4.0 min. for T-120 cassette
VIDEO Video Signal System: NTSC color and EIA monochrome signals, 525 lines
Input: 0.5 to 2.0V p- p, 75 ohms, unbalanced
Output: 1.0V p-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced
Signal-To-Noise Ratio: 45dB ( Rohde and Schwarz)
Horizontal Resolution: 240 lines ( Color); 300 lines ( B/W)
AUDIO Input: -6dBs, 10K ohms, unbalanced
Output: -6dBs, into 1K ohm, unbalanced (Normal, Hi-Fi) Frequency Response: 20Hz to 12kHz ( Normal) 20Hz to 20kHz ( Hi-Fi)
Dynamic Range: 85dB ( Hi -Fi) Signal-To-Noise Ratio: 48dB ( NR-on), 44dB ( NR-off) (Normal) at 3% distortion
Wow and Flutter: Less than 0.005% WRMS ( Hi-Fi) Less than 0.25% WRMS ( Normal)
CONNECTORS Video input/Output: BNC-tybe Audio Input: RCA ( Normal, Hi-Fi) Audio Output: RCA ( Normal, Hi-Fi)
Remote Control: 34- pin connector
AC IN: 3-wired AC connector
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Part, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VA-43
VHS EDITOR BR- 8600U
FEATURES
· Professional-Quality Editing Functions · Flying Erase Heads
· Preroll Function for Automatic Editing · Direct-Drive Transport
· Variable-Speed Dial Search · New Video Processing Circuit · Two-Channel Audio · Dolby* BNoise Reduction
· Improved Color Dubbing Quality · Three Video Inputs Selectable · External Sync Capability · Total Front Operation
· Electronic Tape Counter/Lap Timer · Tape End Warning · External Hour Meter · Automatic Rewind . Electronic Tape Tension Control
. 45-Pin Connector for Edit Controller
BR-8600U
JVC
BR-8600U Videocassette Editing Recorder
Engineered for professionals, a fullfunction VHS editor with the features, styling, and feel of advanced 34" systems.
The VHS format, now the most popular videocassette format in the world, has grown immensely popular within the professional video community. As the originator of the VHS format, JVC is totally committed to its success and has responded to the demand for a full function editing recorder.
The BR-8600U is aVHS editor based on JVC's advanced heavy-duty technology. It incorporates 6video heads! One pair is used for standard 2-hour recording and playback. Another pair is for still and search functions. And two rotary erase heads provide perfect insert edit capability. System configurations are flexible: a choice of professional VHS and 3/4" recorders and players are available as a playback source. For a complete automatic editing system, a choice of editing controllers is also available.
Professional-Quality Editing Functions. The BR-8600U has a pair of rotary erase heads and a blanking switcher which make possible assemble and insert
editing with virtually no distortion at the edit points. Edit flagging is minimized by use of a framing servo and extremely stable horizontal phase lock.
Preroll Function for Automatic Editing. An independent Preroll button is provided on the control panel to automatically backspace the tape by about 3seconds of program time. When no edit controller is being used, reasonably accurate editing can be accomplished with two BR-860OU's utilizing the Preroll buttons on the recorder and source. After locating the edit-in points using the convenient dial search controls, the machines are each prerolled. When Edit Start buttons are pressed simultaneously, the edit takes place at the predetermined edit points.
Heavy-Duty Mechanism with Direct- Drive Motors. The head drum is directly driven by a servo-controlled brushless DC motor, while the capstan and reels are also directly driven by independent DC motors. This assures highly stable pictures as well as greatly improved reliability. To add further to reliabilty and durability. the mechanism is supported by an aluminum diecast chassis.
Variable-Speed Dial Search. A convenient, easy-to-operate control dial is provided for fast and accurate location of edit points. Turning this rotary dial varies the tape speed from still to 10 times normal, in both forward and reverse directions. The sensitivity of the control is dependent on the selected speed, so that fast, positive control of the tape is always maintained.
New Video Processing Circuit VHS picture qualty is improved due to a new video signal processing clrcuit. The BR8600U conforms to the standard VHS format and a single cassette (T-120) provides 2hours of quality recording and playback.
Video Recording Adjustment-- Video Level/Tracking Meter. Normally the Automatic Gain Control (AGC) circuit optimizes the video recording current depending on the input video signal. For demanding professionals, however, this circuit can be defeated and the video level can be manually adjusted referring to the video level meter. During playback, the meter functions as a tracking meter and helps in precise playback adjustment together with an independent tracking control.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Pa« NJ 07407 ( 201)794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VA-44
JVC
VHS EDITOR BR-8600U
Two-Channel Audio for Stereo Recording and Playback. Independent audio level meters are provided for channels 1and 2. The audio levels of the two channels can therefore be separately adjusted. Independent audio limiters are provided and can be switched in and out as needs require.
Dolby* BNoise Reduction Incorporated.
To further improve sound quality by reducing tape hiss, Dolby Bnoise reduction circuitry is incorporated in the audio recording and playback circuits.
Improved Color Dubbing Quality. The playback video signal is normally subjected to compensation so that the picture quality on the monitor is improved. However, non-compensated color signals are more suitable for dubbing and result in higher-quality color copies. In order to make this kind of signal available at the Video Out terminals, the BR- 8600U is equipped with a switch labeled Color Process. When the BR-8600U is used in a copying system, set this switch to Off; the resulting tape will have a significantly improved color quality.
Three Video Inputs Selectable. Three video inputs ( Line- 1, Line-2, 8- Pin TV) are provided and the input select switch on the front panel makes it possible to incorporate signals from a tape, a camera or a TV monitor onto an edited tape by simply operating the switch.
Field-Still and Slow- Motion Playback. The BR- 8600U has two pairs of video heads: one pair for recording and normalspeed playback, the other pair ( extra video heads) for still and slow-motion playback. This is in keeping with JVC policy; recording of the highest possible quality is assured and stable pictures can be obtained even in still and slowmotion modes. Ease of locating edit points is considerably enhanced.
External Sync Capability. The BR-8600U is equipped with all the terminals and connectors required by video professionals for editing; the Sync In connector enables external synchronization so that the BR- 8600U can easily be incorporated
in an existing video system. By use of the Sync In connector, a time base corrector (TBC) can also be connected.
Total Front Operation. As well as the front cassette loading system, all switches and controls are accessible from the front. Conforming to the 19" rack mount standard, the BR-8600U presents no problem at all when it is to be installed in your existing production house.
Electronic Tape Counter/Lap Timer with Fluorescent Display. A 4-digit counter provides a convenient means of addressing tape segments. The display doubles as a 5-digit lap timer showing tape running time in hours, minutes and seconds. The fluorescent display used
assures easy readability.
Tape End Warning. About 5minutes before the end of the tape, the electronic tape counter starts flashing, indicating that the tape is coming to an
end.
Shuttle Search at About 10 Times Normal Speed. Run the tape at about 10 times normal speed either forward or in reverse while watching the speededup picture. You can scan through a whole 2- hour program in about 12 minutes.
Automatic Search and Repeat. In conjunction with the tape counter, the automatic search mode enables any section of the program to be located automatically. In the automatic repeat mode, the entire tape is automatically played back any number of times.
'Dolby and the double- D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
Suggested List Price
BR-8600U VHS Editor RK-8600 Rock Mount Kit for BR-86(»1
(Monitors, Rocks & Rack Kits not included)
VEP-1
Edit System (BP-5300U, CM- 86U. BR-86(XU).
VEP-2
Edit System (BP- 6400U. RM-86U, BR- 8600U) .
VEP-3
Edit System (BP- 8600U, CM- SOU. BR- 86(0U).
S2995.00 86.00
5495.00 5850.00 6995.00
SPECIFICATIONS:
GENERAL Format: VHS ',2" (12.7mm) NTSC standard Power Requirement: 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: 80 watts ( with the Automatic Editing Control Unit, 12 VDC, 550mA) 68 watts Dimensions: 44.0W x16.0H x44.8D cm (17-11/32'' x6-5/16" x17-21/32") Weight: 18.5kg ( 41.0 lbs.) Recording & Playback Time: Max. 120 mirs. with NC T-120 Fast Forward/Rewind Time: Less than 5min. for 120 min. tape Wow and Flutter: Less than 0.25% rms Search Speed: Shuttle FWD/REV - 10X, Variable 0 - -é-5X, · 10X
VIDEO Signal-to- Noise Ratio: 45 dB ( Rhode and Schwarz noise meter) Horizontal Resolution: Monochrome: 300 lines, Color: 240 lines Sync Input: 4+0/-3 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced Input Select: TV/LINE 1/LINE 2 Sync Select: INT/EXT
AUDIO Input: LINE: 6/-20 dBs ( selectable), 10 k-ohms,
unbalanced ( CH-1/CH-2) MIC: - 70 to -60 dBm, 600 ohms,
unbalanced TV: -20 dBs, 10 k-ohms, unbalanced Output: LINE: -60 dBs. low impedance,
unbalanced MONITOR: 0dBs, low impedance,
unbalanced ( CH-1/MIX/CH-2) HEADPHONE High/Med/Low, 8to 300
ohms, unbalanced TV: 0dBs, low impedance,
unbalanced Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 48 dB ( NR-on), 44 dB ( NR-off) ( at 3% distortion level) Frequency Response: 20 to 12,000 Hz Input Select: IV/LINE Monitor Output Select: CH-1/MIX/CH-2
CONNECTORS Video: LINE INPUT/OUTPUT: BNC-type connectors SYNC INPUT: BNC-type connector TV INPUT/OUTPUT: EIAJ 8-pin TV connector Audio: LINE INPUT/OUTPUT: RCA-type pin jacks MIC: 6mm jacks MONITOR OUT: RCA-type pin jack HEADPHONE: 6mm jack Remote Control: 45-pin connector AC IN: 3-lead AC connector
Accessories: Power cord, monitor cable, dust cov:)r
UM.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Part, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 (800) JVC -582 ,
vR-4.
VHS RECORDER/PLAYER BR-3000U
FEATURES
·Motorized Front Loading Design ·2/4/6 Hour Playback, 2/6 Hour Record ·4Video Heads
.Shuttle Search FWD/REV at 7x ·Wireless Remote Control Included ·Auto Repeat To/From Counter " 0000" .Auto Rewind ·Picture Sharpness Control ·Timer Playback and Record ·EIN 8- Pin Connectors ·Built- In RF Converter ·3- Prong Grounded Detachable AC
Cord
BR-3000U
JVC
ER- 3000U VHS RECORDER/PLAYER
JVC, the originator of the VHS format, continues to expand its growing VHS product line-up with the BR-3000U. This state-of-the-art recorder/player has the features professionals need most, in an attractive, economical package. Moreover, the BR-3000U is extremely simple to operate, and can be easily connected into any existing video system.
4- Head System for Excellent Picture Quality in all Speeds. The BR-3000U utilizes four video heads for recording and playback: one pair provides an optimum track width for the SP ( 2hour) speed; the other pair is for the EP ( 6 hour) speed. Playback is also possible in the LP ( 4hour) speed With the BR3000U, recording and playback is possible for up to 8hours, using aT-160 cassette ( EP).
Built- In Clock Timer, Fluorescent Display. An electronic clock with a 14-day timer is built into the BR-3000U. This permits the user to preset the VCR to automatically record or playback a segment of material up to 14 days in advance. Setting the VCR to operate in the unattended mode is a very simple process.
Shuttle Search. A very useful and convenient way of locating material on the recorded tape is through the use of shuttle search. The tape can be reviewed quickly ( about 7times normal speed) in either the SP or EP modes, forward and reverse.
Wireless Remote Control Included. A full function infrared remote control unit is provided with each BR-3000U. All tape transport control functions ( except eject) may be controlled with this unit.
Electronic Tape Counter. Also integrated with the fluorescent clock, is a digital tape counter. This four-digit counter provides an accurate reference for tape location, arid can be reset to " 0000" by pressing the reset button.
Flexible Auto Repeat, Auto Rewind Functions. One very important feature for institutional applications is autorepeat. The BR-3000U can be set to automatically rewind the tape and repeat a desired segment over again. The auto- repeat feature has three modes:
I. Full repeat -- from the beginning of the tape to the end.
2. From counter "0000" to the end of the tape.
3. From the beginning of the tape to counter "0000".
The auto-repeat function can be avery important feature for applications where the VCR is to be used for unattended playback operations, such as point-ofpurchase displays, etc. It can be used in conjunction with the automatic timer, so that the VCR can be turned on at a specified time, for repeat playback.
Suggested List Price
$715.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Format: VHS Standard, Less NTSC System
Recording/Playback System: Rotary, slant azimuth two- head helical scan system with two pairs of video heads, one pair exclusively for the SP mode and one pair for the EP mode.
Tape Speed: SP: 33.35mm/s ( 1-5/15 ips) ( 1.31 ips) EP: 11.12mm/s ( 7/16 ips) ( 0.43 ips) Max. Recording Speed: SP: 160 min. with ,,WC T-160 cassette EP: 480 min. with JVC T-160 cassette
Temperature: Operating: 5°C to 40°C ( 41°F to 104°F) Storage: -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F) VHF Output Signal: Channel 3or 4 ( switchable: preset to channel 3), 75 ohms, unbalanced
Power: Consumption: 30 Watts Requirement: AC 120V, 50/60Hz
Video: S/N Ratio: More than 45dB ( Rhode & Schwarz Noise Meter) Horizontal Resolution: 240 lines ( SP mode)
Audio: S/N Ratio: More than 40dB Freq. Response: 70Hz to 10kHz (SP mode)
Dimensions: 17-3/161N x5-1/8"H x14-1/2"D (435 x130 x368mm) Weight: 20.1 lbs. ( 9.1kg)
Provided Accessories: Remote Control Unit, Antenna Cable ( Ftype), Power Cord, Matching Transformer
Speoficonons shown je for 5P mode unless othenvise specified
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VA-46
JVC
FEATURES
9-Function Remote Controllable · Pictograph Indicators For Operation
At A Distance · Memory Function For Automatic Stop · Dependable 4-Motor System Design · 4- Head Recording And Shuttle Search
In Both SP And EP Modes · Automatic Rewind At Tape End · Automatic Edit Function Makes
Scenic Transitions Smooth And Noiseless · Pause Button For Still Frame Advancement
VHS RECORDER/PLAYER BR- 1500U
BR- 1500U
BR- 1500U VHS RECORDER/PLAYER
Eight Hours Recording Time in EP Mode, 4- Heads. The BR- 1500U has four video heads -- two used exclusively for the SP mode, two for the EP mode -- to ensure a sharp, clear picture always. The EP mode offers an extra-long eight hours of recording time from a single cassette (T-160).
Detachable Remote Control. You can attach the wireless remote control to the front panel of the videocassette recorder, an arrangement that comes in handy when loading or unloading a tape. Control buttons jut out slightly from the surface of the control panel for easy operation.
Push the right side of the remote control unit and it pops out into your hand so you can operate the videocassette recorder from anywhere in the room. Controls include Recording, Play, Stop, Pause, Shuttle Search (forward and back), Power On/Off, Channel Up/Down, Video/TV Switching, and Cassette Eject.
To prevent accidental operation, the buttons for recording, channel up/down and video/N switching are hidden behind a sliding cover. The remote control even operates when its batteries have run down; merely mount it on the videocassette recorder to regain full control.
Built-In Timer -- Four 1V Programs/TwoWeek Period. You can program the BR1500U to record unattended up to four N programs over the coming two-week period. This means you can automatically record programs at any time of the day or week -- late at night, weekends -- for later viewing at more convenient times. The built-in timer also permits automatic recording of the same program at the same time every day. Setting the timer is easy. A "flowchart" like guide shows you the way, step by step.
Counter Memory. When the counter memory button is touched at the start of recording or play, the tape stops at "0000" on the counter automatically during rewind or fast forward.
Special Effects Playback. Whether in the EP or SP mode, you can move the tape back and forth at high speed, freeze a frame or advance one frame at a time. Thus you can search for a specific scene more efficiently, and take a closer look at acritical moment. ( Note: Noise bars may appear on screen during special effects playback.)
Suggested List Price
$620.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Format: VHS Standard Recording & Playback System: Rotary, slant azimuth two- head helical scan system with two pairs of video heads, one pair exclusively for the SP mode and one pair for the EP mode.
Video Signal System: NTSC-type color signal
Tape Width: 12.65mm ( 1/2")
Tape Speed: SP: 33.35mm/s ( 1-5/16 ips) EP: 11.12mm/s ( 7/16 ips)
Maximum Recording Time: SP: 160 min. w/JVC T-160 videocassette ER 480 min. w/JVC T-160 videocassette
Channel Coverage: VHF: Channels VI. 2-6
V, A-1 7-13 J-- W
UHF: Channels 14-83
VHF Output Signal: Channel 3or 4 ( switchable), 75 ohms, unbalanced ( preset to channel 3when shipped)
Power Consumption: 28 Watts
Power Requirement: AC 120V , 60Hz
Dimensions: 17-3/16-W x4-3/16"H x14-13/16"D (15-1/4" wi -hremote control attached) 435mm x105mm x376mm (386mm with remote control attached)
Weight: 16.8 lbs. ( 7.6kg)
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VR-47
VIDEOCASSETTE PLAYER BP-5100U
JVC
FEATURES
7-Function Remote Control Flexible Repeat Playback
Memory Function for Automatic Stop Automatic Timer Playback
Flexible Connection Dependable Four-Motor System
Four-Head System for Consistently Excellent Picture in All Playback Modes · Two-Way Shuttle Search · Automatic Rewind at Tape End · Pause Button
BP-5100U VIDEOCASSETTE PLAYER
7-Function Remote Control. Control all tape operation, including Shuttle Search, from the most convenient and desirable position.
Flexible Repeat Playback. This welcome feature is ideal for training sessions or sales demonstration where repeated viewing is essential. You can set the BP5100U to automatically playback all of the tape or a certain part of it repeatedly as many times as required.
Memory Function for Automatic Stop. Another useful function that can eliminate a lot of unnecessary guesswork is this memory function which automatically stops the tape during rewind or fast forward when a "zero" counter reading is reached.
Automatic Timer Playback. Besides connecting a separate timer between the BP-5100U power cord and an AC outlet in the usual manner, aTimer connection is provided on the back panel of the BP-5100U to accommodate a " shorting timer". In this way, in addition to playback beginning automatically at a preset time, the built-in preheater circuit will remain continuously operative to prevent moisture condensation.
Flexible Connection. A standard 8-pin TV connector is provided for direction connection to aN monitor; an RF Out terminal is also provided to accommodate any ordinary television through the built-in RF converter. Video (BNC) and Audio ( RCA) outputs are also provided.
Dependable Four-Motor System. To guarantee long-term reliability, this
model is driven by afour-motor system that comprises separate motors for tape loading, the capstan, and the take-up reel, as well as a brushless, quartz-locked
direct-drive motor to ensure accurate rotation of the head drum.
Four-Head System for Consistently Excellent Picture in All Playback Modes.
Clear, stable pictures are assured in all three playback speeds ( SP. LP and EP), and a detection circuit automatically determines the mode in which a tape has been recorded and plays it back at the appropriate speed.
Two-Way Shuttle Search. For quick, accurate access to a desired program segment, follow a clearly visible picture in either direction at about 7times normal speed in the SP mode, or 21 times normal speed in the EP mode.
Automatic Rewind at Tape End. To
further relieve users of burdensome, timeconsuming operations, the BP-5100U automatically rewinds tapes when they reach the end in the Play or Fast Forward mode.
Pause Button. When this button is pressed during playback, a still picture with noise bars will appear. The still picture can be advanced frame by
frame each time this button is pressed.
And More. A tape protection circuit that
cancels the Pause mode after about
five minutes and engages the Stop
mode.
ISuggested List Price
$650.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Format: VHS Standard
Playback System:
Rotary, slant azimuth two-head helical scan system with two pairs of video heads, one pair exclusively for the SP mode and one pair for the EP mode.
Video Signal System: NTSC-type color signal
Tape Width: 12.65mm ( 1/2") Tape Speed:
SR 33.35mmis ( 1-5/16 ips) LP: 16.67mm/s ( 21/32 ips) EP: 11.12mm/s ( 7/16 ips)
Maximum Playing Time: SP: 160 min. w/JVC T-160 cassette EP: 480 min. w/JVC T-160 cassette Temperature: Operating: 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) Storage: -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
VHF Output Signal: Channel 3or 4 ( switchable; preset to when shipped) 75 ohms, unbalanced Power Consumption: 28 waits
Power Requirement: 120V, 50/60Hz
Horizontal Resolution: 240 lines ( SP mode)
Frequency Response: 70Hz to 10.000Hz ( SP mode) Dimensions: 17-3/8"W x5-9/16"H x12-13/16"D (440 x140 x325mm)
Weight: 20.1 lbs. ( 9.1kg)
Provided Accessories: Remote control unit x1 Antenna cable ( F-type) x2 Antenna selector x1
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division. 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VA-48
JVC
PORTABLE VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER BR-6200U
FEATURES
· Two-Channel Audio Track · BNC Video Connectors · Shuttle Search · Full- Function Wireless Remote Control · Automatic Backspace Editing · Extended-Time Recording Capability
BR-6200U PORTABLE VHS RECORDER
In sales, education, medicine and all types of business communication, the half-inch VHS video format has earned extensive acceptance for its costeffective, high- impact communications capability. JVC's portable BR-6200U possesses the technological features and the rugged, reliable construction to provide years of trouble-free service in the widest variety of professional and institutional applications.
Easy Connection to Professional Equipment. Professional-type BNC video input and output jacks are provided on the BR-6200U for direct connection to other professional video gear.
Power Economy. The low powerconsuming design of the BR-6200U is enhanced by a unique REC LOCK power economy switch. This feature allows the operator to shut down power for indefinite periods and return to the record mode, with smooth edits.
Full-Logic Operation. Microprocessor control over all functions allows direct changeover between modes and feather-touch pushbutton operation.
Two-Channel Audio Track and Dolby Noise Reduction. This two-channel system enhances production flexibility, allowing the recording of "voice-over" narration, bilingual sound-tracks or full stereo sound. Dubbing can be
performed independently onto the left channel only, or simultaneously onto both.
Extended-Time Recording and Playback. In addition to normal-speed operation ( two hours of recording or playback with al-120 cassette), the BR6200U functions in an extended play mode to give you extra recording time in those situations where your supply of tape is limited but the subject matter is not.
Advanced Editing Functions. During recording, backspace editing prerolls the tape between takes so that the end of the previous segment is neatly synchronized to the beginning of the next one, thereby eliminating distortion at the edit points in assembled recordings. The BR-620OU's improved editing capabilities permit program segments from different video and audio sources to be edited into a previously recorded tape with minimum distortion at the start and end of the new material.
Shuttle Search. This JVC-developed highspeed visual scanning system lets you view the tape at 7or 21 times normal speed ( depending on the playback mode) in either direction, for quick easy access to any desired portion of avideo program
Flexible Power Supply System. Rechargeable NiCad battery packs
(NB-P1) are the basic power source for the BR-6200U; their compact yet highcapacity design makes it easy to catty extras for on-location applications. Power can also be supplied from regular household AC outlets or a car battery, via appropriate adaptors.
Also Included: Built-in RF converter for connection to the antenna terminal of any IV receiver; LCD ( Liquid Crystal Display) 4-digit tape counter with memory function; LED tape running, insert editing and audio dubbing indicators; Battery depletion and moisture condensation warning indicators; Automatic quick review function
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
Suggested List Price
BR-6200U Portable Videocassette
Recorder
$1185.00
AA-P26U
AC adaptor/battery charger for the BR-6200U. This unit can be used to charge the NIB-P1 NiCad battery pack. used in the BR6203U. FIR-2200U, and TM-22U
180.00
AC-P2U
AC adaptor for BR-6200U. Slides into battery compartment. For playback only
100.00
AP-P4U Car battery cord for BR-6200U
24.00
CB-P62U Soft carrying case for BR-6200U
while operating
80.00
NB- P1
Rechargeable NiCad battery pack for BR-6200U
75.00
TU -26U
Tunes/Timer for BR-6200U. 105 channel capability. 14 day/ 8event programmable ......
375.00
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VR-49
PORTABLE VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER BR- 1600U
JVC
FEATURES
· Extremely Compact · Four Video Heads · Operates from Three Power Sources · Wired Remote Control · Shuttle Search · Memory Counter · Counter Panel · Simplified Insert Editing Function · Direct Video Connection
BR- 1600U PORTABLE VHS RECORDER
Four Heads For A Crisp, Sharp Picture. Pictures are crisp and sharp at any speed because the JVC BR- 1600U uses one pair of heqds exclusively for the Standard Play mode, and another for the Extended Play mode. A choice of two tape speeds also means economy: use the tape-saving EP mode to file away less important documents and visual presentations, while saving the high-resolution SP mode for documents and presentations of top importance.
It's Portable Light Weight So It Can Be Used Almost Anywhere. Whenever sales and deals are made, indoors or out, the BR- 1600U is extremely compact ( 8-1/16" x3-3/16" x8-7/8") and weighs only 5.3 lbs. Its remarkable small size and weight give it flexibility to be used almost anywhere. For full versatility, it connects to most video cameras without an adaptor.
Operable On Three Power Sources. Enhancing the mobility of the BR- 1600U is its ability to operate on any of three power sources.
Outdoors, it can receive its power from an optional battery pack. Indoors, it operates from standard household AC through an optional AC pack. And in and around the car, it taps into the car's 12V DC power supply by means of an optional car battery adaptor. So wherever you go, just select the most accessible power source.
Clean Scene Changes. All recordings you make on the BR- 1600U are clean and free of annoying "streaking." The backspace editing function assures clean transitions from scene to scene. The automatic recording lock provides an uninterrupted transition between two recording sessions even if the power has
been turned off after the first
Easy Operation. Using the BR- 1600U is very simple. A memory counter lets you
quickly review a specific segment of the tape. The counter panel serves as a tape counter and also as a dew indicator and a battery condition
indicator. There's a built-in jack that accepts an optional earphone so you
can monitor the audio on playback. Playback speed automatically matches the speed at which a tape was recorded, either SP or EP.
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
3R- 1600U Portable Videocassette
Recorder
AC-P3U AC Adaptor for BR1600U/
TMP3U/GXS700U
AP-P3U
Car Battery Cord for
BR1600U/GXS700U
BB-P3U
Bcrtery Charger for
NBP3U/NBP4U
NB-P3U Battery Pack for BR1600U
GXS700U (. 7AH) ......
NB-P4U Battery Pack tor EtRiaoou
GXS700U ( 12 AH)
CB-P1OU System Carrying Case
for ER- 1600U
Suggested List Price
$815.00 50.00 18.00 93.00 30.03 46.00
126.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Format: VHS Stcridard
Recording System: Rotary, slant azimuth two-head helical scan system with two pairs of video ,-eads, one pair exclusively for the SP mode and one pair for the EP mode. Video Signal System: NTSC-type color signal
Tape Width: 12.65mm ( 1/2")
Tape Speed: SP: 33.35mm/s ( 1-5/16 ips) EP: 11.12mmis ( 7/16 ips)
Maximum Recording Time: SP: 160 min. w/JVC T-160 videocassette EP: 480 min. w/JVC T-160 videocassette VHF Output Signal: Channel 3or 4 ( switchable, preset to channel 3when shipped) 75 ohms, unbalanced
Power Consumption: 8W ( 18W with camera)
Power Requirement: DC 12V
Camera Connector Output DC 12V=, 10W maximum
Dimensions: 821/16W x3-3/15-Hx8-7/8"D (204 x80 x225mm)
Weight: 5.3 lbs. (24kg)
Provided Accessories: Remote control unit; Remote control adaptor; Shoulder strap; Matching transformer ( 300-75 ohm); Battery for remote control unit; Dubbing connector; Connector cover; Dummy battery
Specifications shown are for SP mode unless otherwise specified..
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VR-50
EDITING CONTROL UNIT RM-86U
JVC
FEATURES
· Insert, Assemble Edit Capability · Independent Dial Search Controls
· Preview/Perform/Review Functions · Automatic Back-Timed Edits · Frame by Frame Edit Trim Feature · Auto Tag ( to last Edit-Out Point) · Lap Time Function · LED Indicators · Record Monitor Control ( REC-EE) · Monitor Audio Volume Controls · VCR Intervace Cables Provided
is a
WuICM AM 1111 ill Ill
RM-86U
RM-86U VIDEO EDITING CONTROLLER
With the introduction of JVC's new BR8600U VHS editing recorder, JVC engineers saw fit to design a new, economical editing controller -- one that would offer the convenience and ease of operation necessary for a VHS system, yet one that would also provide a degree of sophistication applicable to JVC's 3/4" TapeHandler Series. The RM86U, a highly sophisticated microprocessor based automatic editing controller, offers features previously not found on units in its price range.
Dial Search Controls. Two Dial Search knobs provide tape shuttle control (visible picture search) for each VCR. Detent positions give indication as to machine speed, depending upon which VCR is being used. Tape search speeds are variable, forward & reverse,
Independent LED Indicators. Two large, easy to read LED displays show the tape location in Hours, Minutes, Seconds, and Frames for both recorder and player. In addition, these indicators provide " lap time" indication, edit in point locations, edit out point locations, and computed edit duration.
Preview/Perform/Review Buttons. Edits may be rehearsed ( previewed) prior to
actually erasing any tape. This " preview" function allows the operator to make any corrections or adjustments to the edit points prior to doing the edit. The Perform button actually initiates the editing process which continues until the edit is completed, or until the Edit Stop button is pressed. The Edit Stop button can be used to manually end the edit, or to abort an unwanted edit in progress. The Review button replays the just completed edit.
Automatic Edit Computation. When any three edit points are entered, the fourth point is automatically computed. This controller allows you to enter two outpoints and one in- point. The controller will compute the other in- point. This is a very important feature because it permits automatic back timed edits.
A back timed edit is one in which two events must end simultaneously at the edit out point. Other edit controllers in this class don't have this feature.
Frame By Frame Trim Feature. Edit in and out points can be trimmed one frame at a time by holding down " shift 4" or "shift -" and touching In or Out once for each frame to be trimmed. ( A computed edit point cannot be trimmed.)
"Go To" Button. With edit points set, pressing " Go To" and In or Out will
command the respective VCR to search to that edit point and stand-by. This is convenient when the operator wants to make corrections without using the trim feature.
Edit Lap Time Indication. When an edit point is entered, the lap timer is reset to zero, automatically. This timer indication can be viewed by pressing the Lap button next to the digital readout. The purpose of the lap timer is to allow the operator to use the tape counter with a zero reference during each edit, without disturbing he normal counter reading, which is used as a program timer and for locating segments on the tape.
Record Monitor Control ( REC-EE). This alternating pushbutton switches the recorder's video and audio circuits to the player's signals. This permits an editing set-up using only one monitor.
PRICING/PACKAGE
Suggested List Price/
Rtv1-86U Editing Control unit
$1,295.00
VEP-1
Edit System
(BR 5300U. RM-86U. BR-8600U) ... 5,495.00
VEP-2
Edil System (BR 6400U. RM-86U. BR- 8600U) ..
5,850.00
VEP-3
Edit System (BR- 8600U. RM-86U. BR- 8600U) ..
6,995.00
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VA-51
JVC
RM-70U REMOTE CONTROL
. Full Remote Control of most Tape Operations
. Variable-Speed Tape Shuttling · Large-Sized, Self-Locking Dial · Pre-Roll Editing Possible ( when
combined with the CR-8250U) · Simple Design · Intelligent Tally Function Controls · Dimensions: 5-3/4'W x2-11/16"H x
9-3/8"D · Weight: 4lbs. ( 1.8kg)
Suggested List Price
$370.00
RM-P500U RANDOM ACCESS CONTROL
By dividing the information recorded on the tape into up to 64 segments and allowing access to these segments as required, the RM-P500U Random Access Control Unit is an extremely useful tool wherever information retrieval and
random access playback are required, when used in combination with suitable JVC professional VHS VCRs. Applicable Models BR-6400U, BP5300U.
Suggested List Price
$330.00
VCR ACCESSORIES
RM-P500U
RM-P54U WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL ·Infrared Transmitter and Receiver
Included
· All Tape Functions Provided · Operating Distance Up to 22' in Front
of Recorder/Player
· Requires Four "M" Batteries
· Applicable Models BR-6400U, BP-5300U
Suggested List Price
$ 115.00
RM-P53U WIRED REMOTE CONTROL
· Dial Search Knob Varies Tape Speed to 10X Forward and Reverse
· All Tape Functions Provided
· 16' Cable Provided · Applicable Models BR-6400U,
BP-5300U
Suggested List Price
$95.00
RM-P54U
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VR-52
EASTMAN KODAK CO.
343 State St. Rochester, NY 14650 (716) 724-4000
VIDEO TAPE
8mm KODAK VIDEO CASSETTES 8mm Kodak Video Cassettes for use with the Kodavision Series 2000 Video System and other 8mm systems. MP video tape offers an advanced metal- particle coating for excellent density and sensitivity, and ME video tape offers
highest- quality metal- evaporated coating for excellent performance and dubbing.
CAT. #
8mm 173-3427 100-9455 101-2301 110-7069
111-0592
115-6520
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
MP6-30 MP6-60 MP6-90 ME6-30 ME6-60 ME6-90
PRICE
$12.99 13.99 15.99 18.99 21.99 23.99
KODAK VIDEO CASSETTES 1/2" VHS/BETA Kodak Video Cassettes for use with 1/2" VHS and Beta format video recorders. And for the new generation of 8mm video systems.
Each Kodak Video Cassette is designed and manufactured to meet exceptionally high standards of quality, perfor-
mance, reliability, and consistency.
· For beautifully accurate images · Excellent picture sharpness, color brilliance, sound clarity · Quality that lasts even after repeated use
KODAK VIDEO CASSETTES (REGULAR GRADE) For use with 1/2" VHS and Beta format video recorders. Designed for excellent picture sharpness, color brilliance, sound clarity, and reliability.
KODAK VIDEO CASSETTES, HGX (EXTRA- HIGH GRADE) Extra High Grade video cassettes in both VHS and Beta recorder formats. For use at extended playing speeds and for repeated recording and playback. High- density particle packing has excellent capability for re-recording, erasure, and signal stability.
1/2" KODAK VIDEO CASSETTES
VHS T-30
T-60 T-90
$14.89
15.59 16.29
BETA L-250
L-500 L-750
T-120 T-160
16.99 25.49
L-250 HGX L-500 HGX L-750 HGX
T-30 HGX
T-60 HGX T-90 HGX T-120 HGX T-160 HGX
18.69
19.49 20.39 21.19 31.89
L-830 HGX
$12.19 14.79 16.29
15.29 18.59 20.39 27.49
3/4" U-MATIC EASTMAN PROFESSIONAL VIDEO CASSETTE
(Professional) ( Broadcast Quality)
3/4" Standard
EP- 900
KCA-10 KCA-20 KCA-30 KCA-60
EB-900
KCA-10 KCA-20 KCA-30 KCA-50 KCA-60
Mini
KCS-20
KCS-10 KCS-20
1" EASTMAN PROFESSIONAL VIDEO TAPE One- inch Eastman professional video tape affords the optimum reproduction capability your important programs
demand generation after generation.
EASTMAN PROFESSIONAL VIDEO TAPE EVT-1000*
C- Format
B- Format
1"
VT- 34
VT- 34
VT- 48
VT- 48
VT- 64
VT- 64
VT- 96 VT- 105 VT- 126
VT- 96 VT- 105 VT- 126
VT- 157
VT- 188
*VT- 34 through VT- 105 lengths are available in flame-retar-
dant shippers or cardboard containers. VT- 126 through
VT- 188 lengths are available only in cardboard containers.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-53
MAXELL CORP. OF AMERICA
PROFESSIONAL/INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
60 Oxford Drive Moonachie, NJ 07074 (201) 641 - 8600
VIDEO CASSETTES
All the below are fully packaged with sleeves and labels.
KCA-HG 3/4" VIDEO CASSETTES
Product
Length
KCA-5HG
5min.
KCA-10HG
10 min.
KCA-20HG KCA-30HG
20 min. 30 min.
KCA-60HG
60 min.
Quantity 12/24 12/24
12/24 12/24 12/24
Price $23.00
25.00 26.50 28.50 41.50
KCA 3/4" - BROADCAST QUALITY VIDEO CASSETTES
Product
Length
Quantity
KCA-5BQ
5min.
12/24
KCA-10BQ
10 min.
12/24
KCA-20BQ
20 min.
12/24
KCA-30BQ
30 min.
12/24
KCA-60BQ
60 min.
12/24
Price $23.90
25.90 27.43 29.51 47.95
KCS 3/4" MINI VIDEO CASSETTES - BROADCAST QUALITY
Product
Length
Quantity
KCS-10BQ
10 min.
12/24
KCS-20BQ
20 min.
12/24
Price
$22.54
27.01
VHS 1/2" VIDEO CASSETTES
Product T-30 PI
Length 30 min.
T-60 PI
60 min.
T-90 PI
90 min.
T-120 PI T-160
120 min. 160 min.
Quantity 10/50 10/50 10/50
10/50 10/50
Price $ 7.99
8.99 9.25
9.99 16.99
BETA 1/2" VIDEO CASSETTES
Product
Length
L-250 PI
30 min.
L-500 PI L-750 PI
60 min. 90min.
HIGH GRADE VHS Product HGXT-60 HGXT-120
Length 60min. 120min.
HIGH GRADE PRO VHS
Product HGX-PRO IT-30 HGX-PRO r-60 HGX-PRO T-90
Length 30 min. 60 min. 90min.
HGX-PRO T-120
120 min.
HIGH GRADE BETA Product HGXL-500 HGXL-750
Length 60 min. 90 min.
HIGH GRADE PRO BETA
Product HGX-PRO L-250 HGX-PRO L-500
Length 30 min. 60 min.
HGX-PRO L-750
90min.
COMPACT HIGH GRADE VHS
Product HGX-TC 20
Length 20 min.
Quantity 10/50 10/50 10/50
Quantity 10/50 10/50
Quantity 10/40 10/40 10/40 10/40
Quantity 10/50 10/50
Quantity 10/40 10/40 10/40
Quantity 10/100
Price $7.99
8.99 9.99
Price $11.99
12.99
Price $16.99
17.99 18.59 20.36
Price 11.99 12.99
Price $16.99
17.99 18.99
Price $9.99
VR-54
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MEMOREX MEMTEK PRODUCTS
P.O. Box 988 Santa Clara, CA 95052-0988 (408) 987-2495
P re rni um Video Cassettes
VIDEO CASSETTES
·Video signal-to-noise ratio ·Stop motion
·Tape life
Better than 43.0 dB Better than 1hour
Better than 2,000 passes
MULTIPLE
PASS PLAYBACK
+3.0
OUTPUT
-- + 2.0
r- +1.o a. 0.0
0 1.0
-2.0 NUMBER OF PASSES:
R.F. OUTPUT CHROMA OUTPUT SPECIFICATION
·Video signal-to-noise ratio
·Stop motion ·Tape life
Better than 43.0 dB
Better than 1hour Better than 2,000 passes
MUL11PLE
PASS PLAYBACK
+3.0
OUTPUT
-- + 2.0
>- +1 0
o.o
1.0
2.0 NUMBER OF PASSES:
R.F. OUTPUT CHROMA OUTPUT
SPECIFICATION
PREMIUM VIDEO CASSETTES
Formulated to exceed the demanding standards of today's state-of-the-art equipment. Memorex video cassettes deliver consistently accurate reproduction, play after play.
·Colors that are richer, more lifelike-- because the high density Memorex oxide provides ahigher chroma output even at super long play.
·Pictures that are crisper, clearer-- because the mirrorlike tape surface affords a higher signal-to-noise ratio.
·Long term performance reliability-- thanks to the tough binder material, low friction Acetel rollers, and rigorous quality control.
·Comes with extra labels for your convenience and adustproof album for extra protection.
·Superior results with all VHS and Beta recorders. ·Full 180 day warranty
PLAY LENGTHS VHS T-30 T-60 T-90 T-120
BETA L-250 L-500 L-750 L-830
SLOW 112 hour 1hour 1112 hours 2 hours
Beta I 112 hour 1hour 1112 hours
LONG 1hour 2 hours 3 hours 4 hours
Beta II
1hour 2 hours 3 hours
EXTENDED 1112 hours 3 hours 4112 hours 6 hours
Beta III 1112 hours 3 hours 4112 hours 5 hours
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-55
Ale MICROTRAN company, Inc. 141 E. Mineola Ave. P.O. Box 236 Valley Stream, NY 11582
(516) 561-6050 TVVX 510-225-8412
AUDIO TRANSFORMERS
· PC POWER · MINIATURE - AUDIO · MICROPHONE INPUT · TELEPHONE COUPLING
· HI- F1 ACCESSORIES · DEMAGNETIZERS · OC- OC CONVERTERS · TOROIDAL INDUCTORS
IMMEDIATE DELIVERY FROM DISTRIBUTORS
Request Complete Catalog
MICROPHONE/TRANSDUCER INPUT TRANSFORMERS
FOR PROFESSIONAL SOUND STUDIOS
BROADCAST MIXING CONSOLES CONTROL & INSTRUMENT AMPLIFIERS
Wide bandwidth - Broad frequency response - Hi efficiency. Extremely low distortion. Power level range up to -iii dBm. Negligible hum pick-up due to nested Mu- metal shields and unique gapless core construction. Ease of mounting and orientation for minimum hum pick-up. Polarizing voltage connection for condenser microphones. Subminiature size permits close spacing to adjacent circuitry. Low microphonics.
fie 11
Bee
Fig. .SP PRINTED CIRCUIT MOUNTED Double Mu- metal Shielded. 3/ 4 " D z 14." H. 7-.040 pins 1/ 2 " H.
S s
0=
0
·
Fir - S
, SINGLE THREADED
STUD MOUNTING
Double Mitmetal shielding. 3" color
coded leads. 56" D
oIV H. N." D stud.
Part No.t
S1014 SIOS-t 0107-1 SIOLt S111.1 S116.1 S1111-1 5126.4 01311-1 SIOO-FO
Nominal
TRaatmio, Pri:Sac
I:,..11 1.15 1:15 I lo I 71 1 5 1.5 (:1 I I
Typical Open
Nominal Impedance Ratio
Primary
Secondary
UImnpCteiiltaPnieet @ SO Na
Frequency Rim eeeee
125 2011 200,50 Split 2110 2110 200
200 511 Split 600 CT 111000
5.11110
45.otto
45.000 211.000 lima 1
5.19111 5.11901
600
10.000
too
2.000 2.000 23100 20110 2.0110 2.01111
1.750 iii0000
30-15,00014r -..- Idb 10-15.000Hz ^ Idb
30-1501111Hz i Idb 10-153100Hz " Idb 10-150110Hz · Idb
30- IS.000Nz ..-_,- i`lb
10.15.000Hz - ± ldb
30.20330,1Hz -r..5db 30-15.000Hr - 1 h
Right angle mounting bracket for S100- S Stu , e,
Replaces Th Stud Mounting
Pelt
IR -DV 15704 331.1115 1016 35 I . 215.11116 351.0111.005 351.007.004
vsi.ott5.mi.1
351.2050113 TR-145 10/3550n TN- 145 BV15s9ii
Net Each Lets if 1- II*
-5
-$P
52350 28.50 3100 26.00 2450 2350 2850 .2, 5,0_() .I.0.0
$3050 3700 3950 3400 3150 3100 3700
7,,3, -5,,,0,
4-4 .4
-Or iPC is repiacemetti rsitt nV37 & 310 Pc pins.
tORDER BY COMPLETE PART NUMBER ( S101 -SPI.
TELEPHONE COUPLING TRANSFORMERS
Part No
Application 1 ImPpreimdaarnyce
Secondary
Fig
Impedance
No
FIG. U
DESIGNED TO MEET
11104
Coupling
600
i,un
U
T2104
Coupling
600
600
i
FIG. la-F
FCC PART 68
T2106
Coupling
600 CT
600 CI
U
For interconnect of voice/data modem terminals to telephone lines. Permits optimum use of voice-grade telephone lines for broadband computer modems over a wide dynamic signal range with minimum
distortion. PC construction.
T2108
Coupling
600
900
ll
72110
CouPling6
900
900
u
T4113
Courd.ha: I
900 600 o
600 Split
U
60 75 rtiA DC
75114
coupling
600
600 Split e 75 mu
r
15115
Coupling
egg
600 Split te 120 inA
i
· Frequency Response: 300-3500 Hz -±0.5 dB.
· Level: - 45 dBm to + 7dBm. · Return Loss: 26 dB min.
· Impedance Matching: -± 10% over entire frequency range.
· Distortion: 0.5% max. · long Balance: Per FCC 68.310.
T6112
T2220 T3220 T4220
CouPhne
Hybrid? Hybrid: sortuirl,..
600
600,4w 5004W 50044W
900 600 4'
2
100 170 mil DC
600 600
u
640 600
u
600.600 i4
u
DIMENSION
T5220
Hybild,...
60014e
60 mA DCilW
600 600 e
1
Series
71000 72000 13000 14000 75000 T6000t
Width ,-,"
11, ..i Ini,,, ,,
Depth ini," 114 ,...
614,1 "
l'1i
1111V7..1 .2.",,," _
Height
io"
-'12 274". IV."
1 !' " 141ke
Weight .4 oz. .5 oz.
1.2 oz. 3.5 oz.
5.5 oz.
9 5el.
T2316 T4415 15415 77410 T11410
1
Bridging Holding Coil Holding Coil Holding Coil
Holding Coil
100 n'A DC(21V
4000
600
U
20Sy a 60 mA. 13hy e' 100 mA oc. 180!
U
I4 hy · 20% e 120 ma. Split. 180.!
F
I0hy a 0inli. 08 try (4 25 mu DC. 275Y
01
I0hy la' 0mA. 0 8hy OP 40 rnA DC. 113'.
01
annel frame mounting 23/go M.C.
·T5114 and 754 5 , Ç,," high.
Ulertrostatir Shield - 15 10 + 7dBm. R QUEST EN INURING APPLICATION BULLETIN F232
PRECISION HI-FI ACCESSORIES
AUDIO-VIDIO INDUSTRIAL GRADE DEMAGNETIZERS
Price IAn
S 9.25 6.25 7.50
7.25 7.25
10.50
12.00 5.50 19.50
9.25 10.00 13.00
22.00
7.25
7.25 12.00
13.50 14.50
HM -90
STEREO CENTER CHANNEL
OUTPUT MATCHING TRANSFORMER FOR MONAURAL EXTENSION SPEAKERS
Designed for the Audiophile who wishes to convert a Stereo system to Monaural or wishes to modify or enlarge his Stereo system. Permits "hole- in-the- middle" fill in with
3rd channel speaker. Matches impedance, polarity and power level. 30 watts. Response 40 to 20,000 Hz.
user net $23 .75
MAGNETIC TAPE EDITING PEN
For erasing small areas of sound and video from
magnetic tape or film. Syllables, program material,
and errors may be removed. Press to operate switch.
115V 50/60 Hz at 10 watts. Active tip area I/4" D.
Size: Ye D. x8" L Weight: 6oz.
HD- 3551
1r
user net $72.00
TAPE HEAD DEMAGNETIZER
HEAVY DUTY BULK TAPE ERASER
For bulk erasure of up to 1/3" tape. Ideal for cassettes, cartridges, film, and reel diameteis from 31/4" · 10 1/2 ". For Audio, Video and Computer Tapes. Restores tape to like new condition. Epoxy molded for ruggedness and longer duty cycle. 117V. 60 HZ, 5Amps. Size: 7" x31/2',xUV H. Weight: 9 lbs.
H11- 11M
User net $77.59
HUM- BUCKING TELEPHONE PICK-UP COIL
HP- 70
Hum free transcription, no con-
nection to phone. Perfect for high
impedance tape recorders and dic-
tating machines. Rugged construction
$15 50 of high impact plastic.
User net
.
BULK TAPE ERASER FOOT SWITCH
HD- 50
For hands free operation of HD- 25
and HD-20. Momentary switch pre-
vents burn outs. Plug-in connection.
Skid- proof base. Black wrinkle finish.
UL approved 8, 3-conductor cord
Size: 51/2 " x 31/4 " x 11/4 " H.
Wgt: 2 lbs.
User net $49.50
Removes permanent magnetism. Protects tape from erasure. Minimizes noise and distortion. Extended Pole piece for easy access. Polished end prevents scratches. 117V. 50/60 Hz, 1 Amp. Size. 4" X P/4" D. Weight: 7 ois.
HO-40M
User net $8.95
HAND HELD BULK TAPE ERASER
A compact bulk tape eraser. For
magnetic tape up to 1/2 " wide. For cassettes, cartridges and
reels. Erases recorded signals and noise instantly, when passed over tapes or sound film, without rewinding. Removes background
noise below level of new tapes or
film. 117V. 50/60 Hz, 4 Amps.
Size: 47/e"x2 1/2"x4 1/0"Wt.2 1/2 1bs.
HD- 15
User net $24.00
Adapter hub for NAB reels for (not illustrated:. Nell·AD
$750 spindle. Wt. 1/2 lb.
User net
.
INDUSTRIAL AUDIO/VIDEO/COMPUTER BULK TAPE ERASER
For bulk erasure of up to 1" tape. Ideal for cassettes, cartridges, and reel diameters
from 31/4 " - 10 1/2 ". Erasure 6590 db below saturation level.
Designed and constructed for
heavy industrial use. Fuse and pilot light. 117V. 50/60 Hz, 10 Amps.
Size: 4" x6" x8". Weight: 15 lbs.
HD- 20
User net $158.50
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO/VIDEO/COMPUTER BULK TAPE ERASER
For tapes up to 2" wide by 17" diameter. For cassettes, cartridges, and reels. Erasure to 90 db below saturation. Designed and constructed for heavy duty professional use. Double fuse and pilot lights for safety. 115V. 50/60 Hz, 20 Amps. Size: 4" x12" x14". weight: 33 lbs.
HI3-25
User net $400.00
VA-56
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SALES AMERICA, INC.
110 New England Ave. West
Piscataway, NJ 08854 (201) 981-1414 ( 800) 631-5377
VIDEO PRINTER
P- 50U Video Printer
Within the last decade, the role of the television set has taken on dynamic new dimensions. It now encompasses home videotaping, cable, satellite, and videodiscs. Personal computers have provided us with powerful resources and conveniently linked the home with vast database/information services. Teletext and videotext services are now in operation and expanding.
What was once asimple source of entertainment, has been suddenly transformed into an extremely useful tool. And this transformation has created aneed for new and innovative video- related products.
Until now, there has been no cost-effective way of obtaining " hard copies" of video images from the TV set. You could certainly photograph them, but the quality, cost and convenience of that process leaves alot to be desired. And unless you have acostly printer for your home computer, you have no way of recording permanent records and important data on paper.
The Mitsubishi P- 50U Video Printer solves these problems. It provides low-cost printouts of any video image at the simple touch of a button.
Instant Hard Copies Simply connect the Video Printer to any direct composite video output, or in- line between TV and VCR, videodisc, etc. Then at the touch of abutton on the front panel or remote control, it stores the current image on the screen and prints a clear, legible 3-15/16" x3-5/16" copy in less than 15 seconds. Printouts are reproduced in 16 discrete tones ranging from black to white with image resolution of 280 x234 dots. Print contrast can be adjusted in three steps ( dark, normal and light). Darker images can be lightened, brighter images can be darkened.
Prints are made on special thermo-sensitive paper that's available at your Mitsubishi dealer. The 82-1/2' rolls will accommodate approximately 220 prints.
Mitsubishi P- 50U Video Printer provides quick, legible " hard copies" of any TV or video image.
Remote Control The P- 50U is also equipped with awired remote control 116 ft.) It's a handy feature that enables printing without getting up from your easychair.
Positive/Negative Normally, the printout is a positive image ( the same as the picture display). It can, however, be reversed to anegative image for special applications. White letters on adark background las in a computer display) can be reversed to print as black letters on awhite background for improved legibility.
Remote control for initiating prints from across the room.
Reverse Scanning Under ordinary circumstances, printing advances from the bottom of
the image to the top. But when printing several images that need to be
in sequence, we've included aspecial reversing function. The image
orientation is printed upside-down to create acontinuous " real-time"
sequence of prints.
P- 50U
$ 390.00
K- 50U Thermal Paper
per roll/ $ 18.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-57
NEC
1401 Estes Avenue
Elk Grove, IL 60007-5463 (312) 228-5900
.4111111111111E11111111111`111111MIMIIIIIIIIIIIINIIIIR111b..
MIS SA- 84A
TVs/VCRs/MOVIE CAMERA
VC-N7OEU
PJ-4600EN/3700EN
Pà-4600EN/3700EN Stereo Rear- Projection TVs
· Horizontal Resolution/450 lines · Built-in Stereo and SAP Decoder · 142- Channel Cable Capable w/Skip Memory ·20 Function Wireless Remote Control ·90 Minute Sleep Timer PJ-4600EN-46" Screen PJ-3700EN-37" Screen
$3000.00 $2400.00
PJ -4010EN Rear-Projection TV
·Bright 40- inch screen with wide 120° horizontal viewing angle ·Rear projection console, only 22 inches deep
· Powerful 20W audio output with Sound Wide
·134- channel CATV-ready PLL electronic tuning ·Infrared remote control
·Input/output terminals for CATV, video games, VCR, etc.
PJ- 4010OE1
$2800.00
N895EU
Hi-Fi VHS Video Cassette Recorder
·Hi -Fi VHS for superb audio specs
·Dual ( stereo) audio tracks with Dolby NR · Four heads for excellent picture
·139- channel cable- ready frequency synthesizer tuner ·Full-function wireless remote control
N895EU
$ 1400.00
VC-N7OEU
Stereo Beta Hi -Fi Video Cassette Recorder
·4 Head design ·3week/8 event · 17 function wireless remote control ·134 channel cable- ready
Beta Hi- F1 is abreakthrough in audio technology. While conventional
audio is recorded by astationary head along the edge of atape, Beta Hi -Fi frequency- modulates audio and records it along with the video signal on the tape's video tracks by means of a rotary drum. Called AFM ( Audio Frequency Modulation), this is the same system used in
FM radio broadcasting, and it's one of the two reasons why Beta Hi -Fi sounds so good. The second reason is that the Hi -Fi signal is recorded at a much higher relative head- to- tape speed than with a
conventional stationary audio head -- 7m ( 23 feet, 4 inches) per second vs. 1.33cm ( 1/2 inch) or 2cm ( 13/16 inch) per second.
VC-N7OEU
$ 999.00
VC-N6OEU
Super Beta Hi-Fi Video Cassette Recorder
·Stereo ready -- all audio inputs and outputs are stereo ·Multichannel decoder terminals to connect a multi- channel
decoder for stereo TV and SAP ( Secondary Audio Programs) ·Super Beta -- a new video technology for higher resolution
· Programmable 1-week/3-event timer with daily repeat ·14- function wireless remote control
· 105- channel cable- ready tuner for VHF. UHF and Midband cable channels
Beta Hi -Fi yields audio that is devoid of wow and flutter and noise, producing clear, accurate sound and a dynamic- range approaching digital quality.
In addition to Beta Hi -Fi, the VC-N6OEU also features MPX
connectors designed to interface with NEC's TV Stereo Adaptor, the
SA- 84A. When interfaced, TV stereo can be recorded in Beta Hi -Fi.
VC-N6OEU
POR
VC-N4OEU
Beta Video Cassette Recorder
·4- head design for better picture ·134- channel cable- ready PLL synthesizer tuner ·3-week/8-event programmable timer ·Full 17-function wireless remote control ·Picture search at 8times normal speed VC-N4OEU
$ 749.00
BM-22EU
Beta Movie Camera/Recorder
·Camera/VCR combination
·Auto-focus f1.2 6X power zoom lens with macro capability
·Lightweight ( 2.64kg/5.8Ibs) and compact
· Recording time up to 3 hours and 20 minutes
· Fully compatible with Beta format; no adaptor required
BM-22EU
$ 1595.00
CD -705E Compact Disc Player
· Front loading · Remote control · 15 tracks memory play ·Cue and review
·Search with instant access/repeat/time access CD- 705E
$ 995.00
SA -84A TV Stereo Adaptor
Interfaces with CT- 1901A and CT- 2501A monitor/receivers, pro-
jection TV models PJ-4000 and PJ-4010 and the VC-N7OEU Beta
Hi -Fi VCR. This compact unit can also be used with other TV receivers and tuners with suitable multiplex sound input/output terminals.
SA- 84A
$ 99.95
VR-58
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
NORTRONICS COMPANY,
8101 Tenth Avenue North Minneapolis, MN 55427 U.S.A. (612) 545-0401 Telex 29 0304
INC.
5800
5140
NORTRONICS UNIVERSAL REPLACEMENT HEADS Nortronics offers the most complete line of replacement heads for virtually every recording application. Its Universal
Replacement Magnetic Tape Heads are specially designed for awide variety of cassette (. 150") and 8-track cartridge players. Nortronics can provide aprecise replacement head
for hundreds of home and auto stereo cartridge and cassette tape players manufactured by both foreign and
domestic firms. Only Nortronics offers one-stop shopping
for heads. Because only Nortronics is the world's leading designer and manufacturer of magnetic heads for virtually
every recording application.
TAPE HEADS/ACCESSORIES
r:
DURACORETM REPLACEMENT TAPE HEADS FOR PROFESSIONAL RECORDERS Professional recording equipment users need magnetic heads with greatly- extended wear life to directly reduce operational costs by eliminating electronic adjustments, requiring fewer service calls and cutting recorder downtime. Nortronics now offers anew series of direct replacement magnetic heads constructed with anew wear- resistant material called Duracore. It provides ten times the operational lifespan of conventional Mumetal replacements to yield meaningful cost advantages. More than three years of extensive testing have proved Duracore to be the ideal material for long- life replacement heads. You'll find that Duracore heads provide excellent wear resistance and they're also affordable. Duracore replacements are currently available for popular professional reel-to-reel and cartridge recorders/players manufactured by many wellknown companies.
AT-320B BROADCAST CARTRIDGE ALIGNMENT TAPE
Professional full- track broadcast cartridge alignment tape
offering unmatched versatility to fully align and calibrate
broadcast cartridge machines.
AT- 320B
$82.00
AT-200B CASSETTE ALIGNMENT TAPE AT- 120 REEL-TO-REEL ALJGNMENT TAPE Nortronics AT-200B is a versatile full-track professional
cassette alignment tape recorded at 1.875 ips.
Nortronics AT- 120 is aversatile full track 1/4" reel-to-reel, 7-1/2 ips professional alignment tape.
AT- 200B AT- 120
$82.80 91.20
VCR- 95 MAINTENANCE KIT
Nortronics new video cassette recorder maintenance kit is
designed to help keep your VCR operating at its peak
performance level. Kit includes specially-formulated
QM- 103 head cleaner and QM- 505 cellular foam swabs for
removing accumulated tape oxide debris that can cause
snowy pictures and damage tape. Also included, an anti-
static dust cloth and a special screwdriver for removing headcover screws. Complete instructions provided to guide
even anovice through the maintenance operation.
PF-211 HAND-HELD BULK ERASER The contoured hand-held PF-211 Bulk Tape Eraser
produces apowerful 2400 gauss flux intensity on its surface.
VCR- 95
$21.40
PF -211
$54.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-59
NORTRONICS COMPANY, INC.
8101 Tenth Avenue North Minneapolis, MN 55427 U.S.A. (612) 545-0401 Telex 29 0304
VIDEO RECORDER CARE PRODUCTS
VCR- 800
VCR -50 Deluxe Video Maintenance Kit
Professional kit includes five essential products necessary for video
recorders to function at peak performance level: 25 highly absorbent,
lint-free cellular foam swabs. 16 oz. can of 100% pure TF spray head
cleaner. Static- free cleaning cloth. Super Blast compressed air
duster. 280 lint-free cellular tissues.
$40.00
VCR-90 Video Foam Swabs And Cleaner
"Maxi" performance from a " mini" kit. Compact " mini" care kit for thorough manual cleaning. 18 highly absorbent, lint- free cellular foam swabs. 3 oz. bottle of 100% pure TF liquid head cleaner. Detailed, easy to follow instructions
$15.20
VCR -95 Video Maintenance Kit
Industry's top selling complete video maintenance kit includes: 15
highly absorbent, lint-free cellular foam swabs. 3oz. can of 100% pure
TF spray head cleaner. Anti-static dust cloth. Specially designed
screwdriver for original equipment VCR screws. Complete, illus-
trated instructions for thorough manual cleaning.
$21.40
VCR-109 Video Super Blast Duster
High velocity jet of air blasts away loose dirt and dust from hard to
reach areas within the recorder. Completely safe for use on all metals,
plastics, rubber, painted surfaces and elastomer parts. Available in 10
oz. spray cans
$7.20
VCR -111 Video Head Spray Cleaner
Scientifically formulated, 100% pure TF solution cleans magnetic
heads, pinch rollers, and capstans without leaving harmful residue.
Non-flammable, non-toxic formula will not harm metal, plastic,
rubber, painted surfaces or elastomer parts. 2 oz. can.
$4.40
VCR-130 Video Head Cleaning Cassette -- VHS
Unique, non-abrasive, wet system drop- in video cleaner thoroughly cleans the entire VCR tape path. All magnetic heads and critical parts are exposed to a fresh- moving cleaning surface with each application. Spun- bonded pure polyester cleaning tape consists of tiny cross-weave pockets which give adeep- down cleaning action and carry away debris. 100% pure TF spray cleans all critical areas without leaving residue or harming any sensitive recorder parts.
$29.95
VCR -135 Video Head Cleaning Cassette -- Beta
Unique, non-abrasive, wet system drop- in video cleaner thoroughly cleans the entire VCR tape path. All magnetic heads and critical parts are exposed to afresh- moving cleaning surface with each application. Spun- bonded pure polyester cleaning tape consists of tiny cross- weave pockets which give a deep- down cleaning action and
carry away debris. 100% pure TF spray cleans all critical areas without leaving residue or harming any sensitive recorder parts. Available with effective counter rack or counter merchandiser.
$29.95
VCR -205 Video Head Demagnetizer
290 gauss field intensity removes residual magnetism from all video heads, capstans and guides for asharper picture and sound. Angled, Plastisol-coated probe tip designed for hard to reach locations will not
VCR- 350
VCR- 300
harm sensitive head surfaces. Rugged Lexan housing withstands
years of heavy use. Thermal- fused to prevent overheating and burn-
out. Also available as VCR- 207 for 220-250VAC.
$36.40
VCR-211 Video Tape Bulk Eraser
Recognized as industry's finest and most reliable video tape bulk
eraser. Powerful 2300 gauss flux intensity erases all video cassettes
back to original level of virgin tape. Burn- out proof design automati-
cally shuts off power to the coil when core temperature reaches 70°C.
Thermal protective device resets once core returns to normal
operating temperature. Convenient microswitch activates with finger-
tip pressure. Hand- contoured housing is constructed of rugged
Lexan. Also available as VCR-212 for 220-250VAC
$54.95
VCR -300 VCR Dustcover
The neutral tan, 100% cotton cover has brown fabric trim and ahigh-
quality, clear plastic insert which allows for easy viewing of the VCR controls. The fabric breathes well so the cover can be put back on the VCR immediately after use without concern about it holding in heat. In addition, the washable fabric has no objectionable odor, as do some vinyl models.
The Dustcover comes in a standard size which fits 80-90% of the
recent model tabletop units and many portables as well. It measures
18" wide by 15" deep by 4" high
$ 14.95
VCR -350 VCR Speed Rewinder
The Rewinder allows aVCR user to enjoy uninterrupted playback of
videotapes by putting them directly into the rewinder after use. The
Rewinder is capable of rewinding a T-120 VHS Videotape in about
two minutes, compared to four or more minutes for aVCR to do the
same job. The unit has forwarding as well as rewind capability and
features auto stop and auto power off for added safety and ease of
operation
$59.95
VCR -510 Video Foam Cleaning Swabs
10,000 pores per square inch polyester urethane foam absorbs more solution, is completely non-abrasive, and provides optimum cleaning action. Completely lint- free, foam swab will not harm even the most
delicate recorder parts. For use in conjunction with Nortronics 100%
pure TF liquid or spray head cleaner. Package contains 12 foam
cleaning swabs.
$5.80
VCR -800 Video Dubbing Kit
Permits convenient dubbing with any combination of VHS, Beta and
video disc systems. Highly shielded, very low 25 pico farads per foot
cable capacitance ensures quality duplication. Convenient 3-foot
cable length makes dubbing easy. Kit includes Beta " mini-jack"
adaptors for dubbing to or from Beta format machines
$17.20
VCR-820 VCR Dubbing Kit
The RCA style plugs are gold electro-plated because gold is the best
conductor of electricity available. Attached to them are low capaci-
tance, ultra flexible cables that minimize attenuation of the signal,
resulting in excellent transmission quality of both the audio and video
signals
$11.95
VR-60
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
p amsoniec
VHS PLAYERS/RECORDERS
AUDIO- VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
One Panasonic Way
AG-6300 VHS Video Cassette Recorder
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
A high performance VCR perfect for use in editing systems with all the precision and connectors required for professional use.
·Two DD Reel motors for smooth tape transport ·Forward ( noiseless) and reverse slow motion playback and frame
shift
· 17 step dial ·Audio dubbing selector
·Audio level/tracking meter
· EXT SYNC IN
·Time code IN and OUT Connectors
· DUB/NORMAL switch select
·Random auto repeat functions · Real time counter ·Two channel audio with Dolby NR System
·Audio limiter and audio level meter ·Headphone level control ·Loopthrough recording for dubbing ·Intermediate loading system
·Mode lock function ·Optional remote control
·External clock timer · 19" rack mountable ·Multiple AC Power sources AG- 6300
$ 1895.00
AG- 6300
AG-6200 VHS Video Cassette Recorder
Ideal for dubbing and a wide range of other applications including
education, research, medical analysis and demonstration.
·Noiseless slow ( forward)
· 14- step dial search
· Intermediate loading
·Audio dubbing possible on channel 2
· Headphone level control ·Audio limiter and audio level meters
·2- Channel audio w/Dolby NR System ·Realtime counter with " tape remaining" time counter
· Random auto repeat
·Optional remote control
·Mode lock function
·Time code connectors
· Loopthrough recording for dubbing
· 19" rack mountable
·Multiple AC power sources AG- 6200
$1750.00
AG-6100 VHS Video Cassette Player
A playback only video cassette deck that offers the advanced
functions of the AG- 6200.
·Noiseless slow ( forward)
· 14- step dial search
·Frame advance
·Intermediate loading ·2- Channel audio w/Dolby NR System
· Random repeat
·Optional remote control ·External clock timer can be connected for timer-- playback control
· Mode lock function
·Loopthrough operation
· 19" rack mountable
·Multiple AC power sources AG- 6100
$ 1395.00
Psna·oev..
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AG- 6100 VR-61
Panasonic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
VHS PLAYERS/RECORDERS
AG- 6200E
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
Multi- System VHS Video Cassette Recorder
A multi-system VTR for international video PAL, CCIR & 4.43 MHz NTSC · PAL, CCIR ( recording and playback), 4.43MHz NTSC ( playback only) · Noiseless slow ( forward) and noiseless frame advance make it
possible to locate exact edit points
· 14-step dial search for quick and accurate program searching.
(forward: 125, 110, 1/5, 1/2, 1, 2, 6, 10, Still, reverse: 1/2, 1, 2, 6, 10) · Real time counter with "tape-remaining" time counter and lap time
can display up to 9hours, 59 minutes, 59 seconds
· Random auto repeat function, other versatile counter. The unit automatically stops at 000 on the counter ( Rew./FF). Set the
beginning and end points. At the end point, the unit will automatically
rewind to the beginning point and stop. The unit will consecutively repeat playback between these points. · Intermediate loading system aids in random access by reading the control signal in the FF and REW modes
· Loop through recording remote control makes multiple dubbing easy up to 500* units at the same time
· Two channel audio with Dolby** NR system enables stereo playback and recording with very low noise
· Audio limiter and 2audio level meters make independent adjustment of channels 1and 2possible
· Audio dubbing possible on channel 2 · Mode lock function locks the unit into the current mode and
overrides front panel controls
· Time code In and Out connectors permit recording and playback of time code signals on audio track 2
· See-through front loading mechanism and EIA 19" rack mounting size makes it possible to install alarge number of units in alimited space
· A 34-pin remote-control connector is provided and the optional
remote control AG-A600 controls of the Play, REC, FF, RE, Stop, Pause/Still, Frame ADV., Search and Audio DUB modes · Multiple AC power sources
AG-6200E
$ 1850.00
'Use of the AWG-24 cords with units spaced 1m apart.
·-- Dolby" and the double- Dsymbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
AG-6300MD
VHS Video Cassette Recorder for Medical Applications
Meets UL-544 Standards · Microcomputer-controlled full logic operation, and two direct drive
reel motors provide the precise tape handling
· See-through front loading mechanism and EIA 19" rack mounting size
· A 34-pin remote-control connector is provided, and the optional 9mode remote controller (AG-A600) controls of the play, record, fast forward, rewind, stop, pause/still, frame advance, search, and audio dub modes
· 17-step dial search for quick and accurate program searching.
(forward: 1/25, 1/10, 1/5, 1/2, 1, 2, 6, 10, Still, reverse: 1/25, 1/10, 1/5, 1/2, 1, 2, 6, 10) · Forward ( noiseless) and reverse slow motion playback and noiseless frame shift
· Real time counter with "tape-remaining" time counter and lap time can display up to 9hours, 59 minutes, 59 seconds
· Random auto repeat function, other versatile counter. The unit automatically stops at 000 on the counter ( Rew/FF). Set the beginning and end points. At the end point, the unit will automatically
rewind to the beginning point and stop. The unit will consecutively repeat playback between these points. · Time code In and Out connectors permit recording and playback of time code signals on audio track 2 · Two channel audio with Dolby' NR system enables stereo playback and recording with very low noise · Audio dubbing selector enables dubbing on either channels 1or 2, or both
· Audio limiter and 2audio level meters make independent adjustment of channels 1and 2possible
· Audio level meter for Ch. 2/tracking meter switch-select · Headphone level control
· Ext Sync In makes it possible to connect an external sync source · Intermediate loading system aids in random access by reading the
control signal in the FF and REW modes
· Loop through recording remote control makes multiple dubbing easy up to 500 -- units at the same time
· Mode lock function locks the unit into the current mode and overrides front panel controls
· An external clock timer can be connected for unattended timerrecording and playback
· Multiple AC power sources
AG-6300MD
$ 1925.00
-- Dolby" and the double- Dsymbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
·" Use of the AWG-24 cords with units spaced 1m apart.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES -- AG- SERIES AG-A600 Remote Controller
AG- M600 19" Rack mount Bracket60.00 NV-A850 Programmable Auto Search Controller
(NV-9240/NV-8170/NV-8200/AG Series)
$ 140.00 420.00
VR-62
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PanaSIXIIC AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
VHS VIDEO/AUDIO CASSETTE RECORDER
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
Panasonic
CI CO
la
El MM.
AG- 6800 HI-FI VHS VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER
FEATURES · Extra 2 Audio Channels ·Precision Heads for Full 58 µm Tracing ·Loop- through Recording for Dubbing ·See-through Front Loading Mechanism ·Rack Mountable ( optional frame available) · Real Time Counter and Random Repeat · Remote Control Connector · SMPTE Time Code Recording Possible
Presenting the AG- 6800, the professional VHS Hi -Fi video cassette recorder designed for recording studio and dubbing applications. The AG- 6800 uses the newly developed VHS Hi -Fi system to provide stereo sound with full conventional VHS video compatibility. Tech-
nically speaking, VHS Hi -Fi is an FM multiplex depth recording system. Two additional audio heads are mounted on the same cylinder as the usual video heads. These record the audio signal on adeep layer of the video tape, then the video heads record the video signal on the
shallow surface layer. Azimuth angles of the audio and video heads are different ( · 6° for video and · 30° for audio) so there is no problem of interference or intermodulation distortion. Furthermore, the left and right audio channel information is completely independent, unlike FM
stereo broadcasts, so stereo separation is complete.
On aVHS Hi -Fi VTR you have four channels to work with -- two hi-fi audio channels and two conventional audio channels. The AG-6800 is equipped with complete input and output connectors, level controls, and metering facilities to handle each channel independently, all at once, or any combination in between. Therefore, you enjoy the ideal
balance of flexibility and convenience.
Note: AG- 6800S is for duplication only.
SPECIFICATIONS Power Source: Power Consumption: Television System:
Video Recording System:
Audio Channel:
Tape Format:
Tape Speed: Record/Playback Time: FF/REW Time: Input Level:
110, 120, 220, 240V AC, 50/60Hz Approx. 60 watts EIA Standard ( 525 lines, 60 fields) NTSC color signal 2rotary heads, helical scanning system
Luminance: FM azimuth recording Color signal: converted subcarrier phase
shift recording
4 channels NORMAL ( CH1/ CH2): 2fixed heads
HD ( CH 1 / CH2): 2 rotary heads Tape width 1/2inch ( 12.7 mm), high density tape 1-5/16 ips ( 33.35 mm is) 120 min. with NV- T120 Less than 4.0 min. with NV- T120 Video: Video In ( BNC), 1.0Vp-p,
75 ohms unbalanced
Output Level:
Remote Control: Video Horizontal
Resolution: Audio Frequency
Response: Signal- to- Noise Ratio:
Audio Dynamic Range: Wow and Flutter: Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Weight: Dimensions ( WxHxD): Accessories Supplied:
Audio: Line In ( RCA): unbalanced Normal ( CH1/ CH2) - 20dB (reference input - 8dB), 47K ohms, unbalanced HD ( CH1/ CH2) - 20dB ( reference input - 8d13), 47K ohms, unbalanced
Time Code: Time Code ( BNC), 1.0Vp-p, 10K ohms, unbalanced
Video: TV Monitor ( 8pin), 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced Video Out ( BNC), 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced
Audio: TV Monitor ( 8pin), OdB, 600 ohms
unbalanced Audio Out ( RCA), Normal (CH1/ CH2) -8dB, 1K ohms, unbalanced HD ( CH1/ CH2) -8dB, 1K ohms, unbalanced Headphones, -60dB - - 16dB 8 ohms, unbalanced Time Code: Time Code ( RCA), 2.4Vp-p,
low impedance, unbalanced
Remote Control Connector ( 34 pin) Camera Remote ( M2) Rec. Remote ( RCA)
Color; more than 240 lines B/W; more than 300 lines
50 - 12,000 Hz ( Normal Audio) 20 - 20,000 Hz ( HD Sound) Video: better than 46dB ( B/W)
better than 45dB ( Color) Audio: better than 48dB ( Norma) Audio/
Dolby NR IN) better than 80dB ( HD Sound) less than 0.005% ( HD Sound) 41°F - 104°F ( 5°C - 40°C) 35% - 80% 30.9 lbs. ( 14.0 kg) 17"x 6-1/4"x 15-1/2" (430 x158 x392 mm) 1pc. Dust cover ( VFB0043) 2pcs. Volume protector ( VKF0358)
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES AG- M600 Rack Mounting Frame
NV- A850 Program Auto Search Controller AG- A600 Remote Controller140.00
AG- 6800 AG- 6800S (for duplication)
S 60.00 420.00 ./
11880000 ..0000
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VA- 63
Panasonic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
VHS EDITING SYSTEMS
One Panasonic Way
NV- 8500 1/2" VHS Editing System
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 2011 348-7000
This system combines the professional features of 3/4" editing systems with the convenience and economy of 1/2" VHS. The
system is comprised of Panasonic's advance design NV-8500 editing recorder/player combined with the NV- A500 automatic editing controller and may be expanded through the NV- A505 remote controller. The new editing system provides excellent versatility and performance that was previously limited to larger tape formats.
NV- 8500 Recorder/Player
·Accurate 8- step search dials for fast editing point location
·Microprocessor based operation
· Dolby* noise reduction
·2- track audio with audio limiter, playback level adjustment and meters for each channel
·Second audio track can be selected to accept time code information
·S/N ratio 45dB color, 46dB monochrome
· Horizontal Resolution 240 lines color, 300 lines B/W · Hot pressed ferrite video heads
· Dub in/Dub out connectors
· 100-240VAC, 50/60Hz · LED indicators
·Adjustable headphone out level
NV- 8500
$ 3250.00
NV- A500 Editing Controller
4
NV-8500
J./ 41.
I
Designed to work effortlessly with the NV-8500 deck. It offers outstanding features for easy and accurate assembly edits with non-
locking feather touch controls, designed around an advanced microprocessor that allows for a variety of professional editing functions. ·Preview mode allowing for atrial run ·Review mode for rapid review of acompleted edit ·Edit time + /1function for locating aspecific edit point · Bi-directional search dials
·Searching speeds: 1/25, 1/10, 1/5, 1/2, 1, 2, 5 and 10 times normal playing speeds
· Pause function with a visible still picture and frame by frame advance in either forward or reverse
·Two LED counters for source and editing deck
A full-function remote control, model NV- A505, is also available for this system.
NV- A500 Full Function Editing Controller
$1500.00
NV - A505 Full Function Remote Search Controller NV- J500 Multi- Source Switcher
750 00 450.00
*Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories
AG- 6300 VHS Video Cassette Recorder
A high performance VCR perfect for use in editing systems with all the precision and connectors required for professional use.
·Two DD Reel motors for smooth tape transport
·Forward ( noiseless) and reverse slow motion playback and frame shift
· 17 step dial
·Audio dubbing selector
·Audio level/tracking meter · EXT SYNC IN
·Time code IN and OUT Connectors
· DUB/NORMAL switch solect
· Random auto repeat functions · Real time counter
·Two channel audio with Dolby NR System
·Audio limiter and audio level meter · Headphone level control
· Loopthrough recording for dubbing
·Intermediate loading system
· Mode lock function
·Optional remote control · External clock timer
· 19" rack mountable
· Multiple AC Power sources
AG- 6300
$ 1895.00
NV- A505
VR-64
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ice et 1 g
PanaSOnele· AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
VHS RECORDERS/PLAYERS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
NV- 8350 2 Hour 1/2" Video Cassette Recorder
w/Multi-Motion Playback Function
·Two Hours Playback Time on NV- T120
·Two Audio Channels-- Dual Audio Meters · Dolby NR System Increases the Range of the Audio Signal,
Improves S/N Ratio to 45 dB
· Convenient High Speed 19X1 Search in Forward or Reverse
·Clear, Sharp Still Pictures of Crucial Scenes Can Be Viewed Slowly
and Thoroughly by Means of the Pause/Still Playback · Frame Advance Playback Makes It Possible to View and Analyze
Scenes One Frame at aTime
·Standard Wired Remote Controller
· Four Video Heads for High Performance
· Noise Free Slow Motion at 1/30-1/5X Speed
·Variable Slow Playback · Instant Recording Makes It Possible To Insert New Scenes Onto
Tapes That Have Already Been Recorded
·14-Day/4 Programmable Timer with Built- In Timer Back- Up
·One-Touch Timer Recording Allows Automatic Recording for
30 Min., 60 Min., 90 Min., and 120 Min. ·The Picture Quality Control Adjustment Can Be Adjusted
·Dimensions: 18-15/16"(W) x5-3/8"(H) x 14-3/8"(D)
·Weight: Approx. 24.9 lbs. ( 11.3kg)
NV- 8350
$ 1395.00
NV-8950 Motion Analyzer-Recorder/Playback
·Two Hour/Six Hour Recording on NV- T120
·Variable Playback Speeds
·Audio Switchover Function for Multiplex Recording Playback
·Wireless Remote Control of 14 Modes
·Quick Program Selection
· Front Loading
· Electronic Display Type of Tape Counter
·Automatic Rewind
· Dolby NR System
· Includes Camera Connector for Video Camera
NV- 8950
$ 1995.00t
NV- V950 Tuner/Timer
375.00
NV-8420 2 Hour 1/2" VHS Portable VCR
·Compact Quartz Direct- Drive Cylinder
·Flat Type Direct- Drive Capstan Motor
· High Density Circuit Modules
·Lightweight Annealed Die- Cast Chassis
·Still- Frame, Variable Slow and High Speed Search
·Video- Add and Audio Dubbing
·Automatic Backspace
·Multi- Function Digital Display
·12- Function Remote Control
·Auto- Rewind and Memory Rewind
NV- 8420
$ 995.00
NV- V410 Matched Tuner/Timer INV-8420)
425.00
NV- 8950
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-65
R
inaiwiere
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
VHS RECORDERS/PLAYERS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
AG- 2100
VHS Video Cassette Player
·4- head video system
· Front loading with top/front windows, safety mechanism ·Auto- play and auto- repeat with video end mode
·2/4/6 hour playback capability
· Direct drive cylinder motor ·Multi- function display
·8- pin connector for monitor
·Noiseless still picture and frame advance
AG- 2100
$750.00
Veee,`.Z;Ze=
AG- 2200 VHS Video Cassette Recorder! Player
·2/4/6 Hour record and playback capability ·Advanced 4- head system greatly enhances picture quality. Clear
still and frame advance pictures with minimal noise and jitter · Frame advance button permits slow motion playback. Speed
search forward and reverse
·107- channel cable ready with 12 button tuning ·Supplied wired remote control with 9modes
·Multi- function display confirms all tape modes and shows time and day
·Front loading
·8- pin connector permits single cable connection to monitor
·2week/single event unattended recording
AG- 2200
$895.00
AG-2400 4- Head System
W/Quartz-Servo Direct Drive Cylinder
AG- 2400 is ideal for use with a portable video camera and is also perfect for stationary VCR applications when connected to the matching AG- V340 Video Tuner/Timer ( optional). There are four
precision video heads mounted on the cylinder. Two heads are used for conventional recording and playback, while the other two enable clear STILL, FRAME ADVANCE, and SLOW playback modes. In addition, a SPEED SEARCH mode is included, making it easy to locate any desired point on the tape. Recording is possible in the 2- hour and 6- hour VHS modes and playback is possible in all 2 /4 /6 Hour modes.
With liquid crystal display ( LCD), this single panel can transport speed modes ( LP, SLP), cassette status, tape counter, remaining tape time, battery charge level, audio dubbing, and video adding. By simply connecting asingle 20- pin cable, the AG- V340 can be added to provide you with the capabilities of afull-size conventional VCR. In addition, astandard 10- pin connector on the AG-2400 allows the unit to be used with most conventional video cameras. Weight: 4.84 lbs. (w/o internal battery pack). Dimensions: 8-7/16" x2-3/4" x10-3/8".
FEATURES ·2/4/6 Hr. Playback; 2/6 Hr. Record ·4- Head System W/Quartz-Servo Direct Drive Cylinder ·5- Speed Search/Variable Sb- Mo Playback ·Multi- Function LCD Display · Diecast Aluminum Chassis · Wired Remote Control Enables Variable Sb- Mo Playback ·Video Adding For Basic Insert Editing ·Audio Dubbing Capabilities ·Memory Function ·Auto- Rewind
AG- 2100 AG- 2200
AG- 2400
ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED:
VSQ0251 VFB0053
VFA0020 VSQ0107 VEB0003
VS00015-1 VFB0050
VUP5075 VJP1431
VJA0147-1 VFC0036
Wired Remote Control Shoulder Strap
300-75 ohms Transformer, 75-75 ohms Transformer Antenna Selector Earphone
VHF Matching Box, 75-300 ohms Transformer V Lock Tool
Adaptor Connector ( RCA-BNC) Audio- Output Cord
Coaxial Cable With One- Touch Type F Connector Carrying Case
AG- 2400
$ 950.00
VR-66
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
p arriasiork AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
VIDEO TUNER/TIMER/TITLER/ 1/2" INDUSTRIAL VCR ACCESSORIES
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348.700C
NV-A850 Programmable Search Controller
The NV- A850 is designed for use with the VHS- format VTR models NV- 8200 and NV-8170 or the 3/4" VTR models NV- 9240 and NV-9600.
FEATURES ·Memorizes up to 64 Tape Segments that can be Referenced Later
by Direct Recording of Their Position Data on the VHS
Videocassette Tape ·Push Button Remote- Controllable Operation of the Connected
VTR's Tape Transport Functions ·Unsurpassed Random Segmenting for Automatic Search and
Playback NV- A850
S420.00 7
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES- INDUSTRIAL RECORDERS
AG- A600
Remote Controller for AG Series
AG- M600
19" Rack Mount Bracket for AG Series
LCR-3012VBP Rechargeable Panalloid Battery
(NV- 9400/8400)
$140.00 60.00
47.50
LCS-2012V
Rechargeable Battery, 12V ( NV- 8420, CT-300VT)
42.50
NV-A800A
Auto Search Controller (NV-9240/9600/AG6000 Series)
350.00
NV- A810 NV- A850
Remote Control Unit
(NV-9240/9600/8170/8200/8500)
125.00
Programmable Auto Search Controller
(NV-9240/ NV-8170/NV-8200/AG6000 Series) 420.00
NV- B51 NV- B58
AC Adaptor/Battery Charger for NV-8400 ... 135.00 AC Adaptor/Battery Charger for NV-8420 ... 155.00
NV- B59 NV- C15
Plug-in AC Adaptor for NV-8420 VTR/TV Connection Control Cable ( 5ft.)
125.00 18.50
NV- C21 NV- C37
NV- C80
VTR/TV Extension Cable ( 10 ft.) for NV- C15 External Battery Cable for Car or Boat
Battery for NV- 8420 Extension Cable ( 16.4 ft.) (NV-A800/A810/A850)
24.50 17.50 95.00
NV- J240
NV- U234 NV- V240 NV- V410
VTR/Tuner/Timer Adaptor for Use Between the Optional NV- V240 Tuner/Timer and NV-8200/9300A RF Modulator CH 3and 4Switchable VHF/UHF Tuner/Timer for NV-8410/8400 Programmable VHF/UHF Tuner/Timer for NV-8420
120.00 80.00
.325.00
425.00
NV- V950
Programmable Tuner/Timer for NV-8950 Only
375.00
PC- 801 PC- 842
Hard Shell Carrying Case for NV- 8110/8350 150.00
Hard Shell Carrying Case INV-84201
120.00
PC- 845
Hard Shell Carrying Case for NV- 8420, CT- 500V
125.00
PC- 895
Hard Shell Carrying Case for NV- 8950
150.00
TU -1012T
Tuner/Signal Switcher
495.00
AG- V340
AG- V340 Video Tuner/Timer
FEATURES ·2/4/6 Hour Playback; 2/6 Hour Record ·4Head System w/Quartz-Servo Direct Drive Cylinder
·5- Speed Search/Variable Slow Motion Playback ·Multi- Function LCD Display ·Diecast Aluminum Chassis ·Wired Remote Control Enables Variable Slow Motion Playback
·Video Adding for Basic Insert Editing
·Audio Dubbing Capabilities ·Memory Function
·Auto- Rewind
AG- V340
$425.00
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES AG-CR240 Car Battery Cord
$ 17.50
AG- B11 AC Adaptor/Battery Charger
155.00
AG- B12 Plug- In AC Adaptor/Battery Charger
125.00
AG-BP202 Battery Pack
42.50
AG- C240 Conversion Cable ( use AG-2400 w/NV-V410)
25.00
WV- J10
WV-J10 Video Titler
FEATURES ·Superimposition of Titles and Graphics on Color Camera or Video
Tape Recorder Video Signal
·Seven Different Color Selections ·Super Auto Fade InJOut
·Two Separate ( Switchable) Video Outputs
·Key Level Control ·Soft/Sharp Select for VTR Playback Picture Tone ·Pattern ( Picture) Reversal Between Input Signal and Title Camera
Signal
·VTR Remote Control
·Four Audio Inputs
·Audio Fade In, Fade Out
·2X Variable Focus Zoom Lens for Title Camera ( Supplied)
WV- J10
$695.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-67
Panasonic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDERS/PLAYERS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
NV-9100A 3/4" Video Cassette Player
Features
·Automatic phase control for stability of the color signal ·Auto Repeat and Auto Search functions ·Adjustable still framing
·Non- locking pushbutton controls with logic memory ·Tapes can be viewed on conventional TV using optional
RF modulator
NV- 9100A
$ 1475.00
NV-9200A 3/4" Video Cassette Recorder
Features
· DD cylinder and DD capstan for high stability ·Can be used as slave player in editing system ·Automatic or manual video and audio level meters ·Automatic search modes with auto rewind at end of tape · Still frame playback
· Printed circuit boards with low density component layout for ease of servicing
· External sync input, for better stability in editing and dubbing systems
NV- 9200A
$2500.00 /
NV- 9200E Records in PAL/SECAM, plays back NTSC.
Two audio channels and meters
$3000.00
NV-9300A 3/4" Video Recorder/Player
Features
·VHF and UHF tuners to record TV broadcasts ·Auto Repeat and Auto Search ·Tapes can be viewed on conventional TV set using
optional RF modulator ·Automatic phase control for stability of the color signal ·Adjustable still framing ·Non- locking pushbutton controls with logic memory
NV- 9300A
$ 2150.00/
Optional Accessories
NV- P23 30 min. 3/4" video cassette tape NV- P26 60 min. 3/4" video cassette tape
NV- P20 Head cleaning tape NV- A810 Remote control unit NV- U234 RF modulator
$ 30.00 40.00
19.50 125.00/
80.00
VR-68
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
%flawsif e AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
VCR/ VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDERS/ACCESSORIES
One Panasonic Way Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
NV-9240XD 3/4" High- Resolution
Video Cassette Recorder
FEATURES ·HPF heads and acomb filter provide excellent picture quality with
high horizontal resolution of over 500 lines ·Six special DC motors, direct drive tape transport, and all- new
chassis for amechanism which is both reliable and durable ·Automatic functions such as auto-search, auto- rewind, and auto-
stop for easier and more convenient operation ·Microcomputer- controlled soft-touch operation buttons for direct
control ·Independent motors for cassette insertion/ejection and tape loading
provide errorless operation
·Four independent level meters for video, audio CH1, audio CH2, and tracking facilitate precise adjustments
·Selection of automatic or manual video recording level adjustment,
audio recording level adjustment limiter on/off switching ·Indicator lamps are provided for frame lock, servo lock, stand-by,
and time code use
NV- 9240X0
$4500.00
NV-9200E 3/4" High Performance
Video Cassette Recorder
FEATURES ·PAL/ SECAM recording/playback and NTSC playback ·3motors; reel drive, rotating video head, and capstan servo motors ·Recording and playback in either color or high- resolution b/w ·Picture resolutions of 350 lines b/w, and 250 lines color; HPF heads ·Signal to noise ratio is 46dB ·Sync and subcarrier input, FM output allow time base corrector
(TBC) connection ·One-piece aluminum die-cast chassis ·Automatic tape rewind; Auto Search stops either FF or REW mode
at zero ·Two audio level meters for each audio channel; audio limiter on/off
switch ·Audio Dub In on CH1; audio monitor selector for CH2 or mix
·Optional remote controllable
NV- 9200E
$3000.00
Optional Accessories
AU- A70
High performance Editing Controller /-
(AU-700)
6500.00
AU- J10
Multiple Source Adaptor ( AU- A70)
750.00
NV- A970
High Performance Editing Controller with SMPTE Time Code Generator and Reader (NV-9600, NV-9240, NV-9200A)
4950.00''
NV - A500
Full Function Editing Controller
1500.00 -
NV- A505
Full Function Remote Search Controller
750.00 '
NV- J500
Multi- Source Switcher ( NV-8500, NV- A500, NV- A505)
450.00
NV- A800
Auto Search Controller ( NV-9240/ 9600/8170/8200/8500)
350.00
NV- A810
Remote Control Unit ( 9100A, 9200A, 9200E, 9240XD, 9300A, 9600/ 8170/ 8500/8050)
125.00
NV- A850
Programmable Auto Search Controller (NV-9240, NV-8170, NV-8200, NV-9600)
420.00
NV- C80
Extension Cable Deck to Controller ( 16.4 ft., NV- A800, A810, A850, A152, A970)
95.00
NV- C15
TV/Monitor Connection Cable ( 5ft.)
18.50
NV- C21
VTR / TV Extension Cable ( 10 ft.)
24.50
NV- U234
RF Modulator CH3 and 4Switchable
80.00
TU -1012T
Tuner/Signal Switcher
495.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-69
Panasonic
AUDIO- VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
One Panasonic Way
PORTABLE VIDEO RECORDERS/ACCESSORIES
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
NV-9450 3/4"
Portable Video Cassette Recorder
FEATURES
·Real time monitoring with video confidence heads ·SMPTE time code capability ·TBC connection capability
·Professional-standard connectors ( Video/ BNC, Audio/XLR)
·Automatic Backspacing for assemble editing ·Microprocessor controlled operation ·Remote control facility ·3- way power supply ·2audio meters ·10x picture search capability
·Lightweight 19.6 lbs. ( including battery) ·Supplied with handle and shoulder strap
NV- 9450
$4250.00
NV-9400 3/4"
Portable Video Cassette Recorder
FEATURES ·NV- 9400 has three-way power: Rechargeable Panalloid battery
(included); 12V battery power with optional car/boat battery cable, NV- C24; or optional AC adaptor/battery rechargers, NV- B50 and NV-B5OR ( NV-B5OR for use with AK- 750) ·NV-9400 has acapstan servo system with acrystal reference signal generator to help insure precise head-to-tape speed and high picture stability
·Automatic Assembly Editing ( AAE) from Stop mode. AAE feature assembles the record segments without tear or roll
·Dropout/noise compensator ·Automatic Phase Control ( APC) for stable color signal ·Dubbing mode turns off APC to maintain luminance/chroma rela-
tionship when dubbing ·Pause control stops tape travel in Record mode, and features astill
frame in Playback
·Two audio channels; audio dubbing on channel 1; balance control for channels 1and 2during Playback
·Five function meter: monitors video level, audio channel 1, audio channel 2, battery voltage and servo lock
·Optional RF modulator NV- U956 plugs into VCR for playback on TV channels 5or 6 ( switchable)
·NV-P22S 3/4" cassettes recorded on NV-9400 can be played on other U-format VCRs
·Mates with Panasonic ENG/EFP color cameras, such as AK-750 and WV- 3800
NV- 9400
$3200.00
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
3/4" PORTABLE VCR SYSTEMS INV-9400/9450)
NV- U956
RF Modulator ( NV-9400)
$ 125.00
NV- B50
AC Adaptor/ Battery Charger ( NV-9400)
325.00
LCR-2012V
Rechargeable Panalloid Battery (NV- 9400, NV-8400)
42.50
NV- C45
10P 14P Cable ( f/NV-9450)
60.00
NV- H25 NV- A450
Carrying Case with Shoulder Strap ( NV- 9400I 60.00
Remote Control Unit ( NV-9450)
250.00
NV- B450
AC Adaptor/Charger ( NV-9450)
370.00
NV- C450
Car/Battery Cable ( NV- 9450)
20.00
NV- F450 NV- H450
Time Code Generator ( NV-94501 Soft Vinyl Carrying Case
1500.00 100.00
NV-BP450
Battery Pack 12V/2.2A NiCad INV-9450)
100.00
VR-70
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AUDIO-VIDEOle anaSOnie SYSTEMS GROUP
EDITING SYSTEMS
One Panasonic Way Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
NV-9600 High Performance 3/4" Video Cassette Editing Recorder
·S/N 46 dB color, 50 dB monochrome ·Horizontal Resolution 260 lines color, 330 lines monochrome ·Direct drive video head cylinder for high stability and adirect drive
capstan servo for maintaining precise head- to- tape speed ·Microprocessor- based system control: governs the non- locking
pushbutton controls; allows direct mode changes without passing through the STOP mode; and permits use with Panasonic editing
controllers NV- A960 and NV- A950 ·DUB IN and DUB OUT connectors enhance the picture quality of
multi- generation dubs ·Special APC circuitry automatically switches OFF during Video-
to-Video edits or duplication ·Video frequency response adjustment is provided for normalizing
the playback picture ·Video head switching has been moved to the vertical blanking
interval ·Electronic digital tape counter counts recorded control pulses
(CTL) and provides LED readout in minutes and seconds ·Indicator lamps are provided for servo lock, frame lock, stand-by
and time code use ·AUTO- OFF indicator flashes to show tape slack, or stays on steady
to indicate dew problems ·A flying erase heads help ensure the quality of edits performed ·A frame servo and horizontal phase adjustment ·Individual editing selection switches for insert and assembly edits ·Audio track 1can be used either for audio or as atime code control
track ( switchable)
NV- 9600 with optional remote control unit NV- A152
·A recessed front panel features controls for frequency response, chroma level, video mode selection, horizontal phase adjustment
and frame servo ON/OFF ·Deck includes 6DC motors and provides beltless tape drive system.
Motors are: direct drive video head cylinder motor, direct drive
capstan motor, reel drive motor, skew motor, loading motor and
elevator motor ·External sync/subcarrier inputs and FM output for use with atime
base corrector ( TBC) ·Loop- through video input connectors with 75 ohm termination
switch ·Selectable headphone levels: -32 dB, -26 dB
·Die-cast aluminum chassis
·100-240VAC, 50/60 Hz Power operable
·26-1/8" x18-3/4" x9-3/8" ( WHD) Weight: 77 lbs.
NV- 9600
$6500.00
NV-9240 High Performance
3/4" Video Cassette Recorder
·S/N 46 dB color, 50 dB monochrome ·Horizontal Resolution 260 lines color, 330 lines monochrome
·Microprocessor- based system control: governs the non- locking
pushbutton controls; allows direct mode changes without passing
through the STOP mode; and permits use with Panasonic editing
controllers NV- A960 and NV- A950 ·Direct drive video head cylinder for high stability, and a direct
drive capstan servo for maintaining precise head- to-tape speed ·New DUB IN and DUB OUT connectors enhance the picture
quality of multi- generation dubs
·Audio track 1can be used either for audio or as atime code control
track ( switchable) ·Special APC circuitry automatically switches OFF during Video-to-
Video edits or duplication
·A frame servo adjustment ·Video frequency adjustment is provided for normalizing the play-
back picture ·Video head switching has been moved to the vertical blanking in-
terval ·Electronic digital tape counter counts recorded control pulses
(CTL) and provides LED readout in minutes and seconds ·Indicator lamps are provided for frame lock, servo lock, stand-by,
·100-240VAC or 60 Hz power capable ·Weighs 90.2 lbs. NV- 9240
$4250.00
NV-9240 XD 3/4" High- resolution Video Cassette Recorder delivers 500 lines horizontal resolution ( B/W) X-ray, Medical uses . .$4500.00
and time code use
Standard Accessories for NV-9600 and NV- 9240:
·AUTO- OFF indicator flashes to indicate tape slack or stays on to
1pc. AC power cord, VJA0129
show dew problems. Controls for frequency response, chroma
1pc. Dubbing cable, VJA0151
level, video mode selection, and frame servo ON/OFF
1pc. Dust cover, VFB0006
·Deck includes 6DC motors and provides abeltless drive system. Motors are: direct drive video head cylinder motor, direct drive
Optional Accessories for NV-9600 and NV- 9240
capstan motor, reel drive motor, skew motor, loading motor, and
elevator motor ·Die-cast aluminum chassis ·External sync/subcarrier inputs and FM output for use with atime
3/4" video cassette tape: NV- P23 approx. 610 ft. ( 186m), 30 min. NV- P26 approx. 1,175 ft. ( 358m), 60 min.
Head cleaning tape, NV- P20
base corrector ( TBC) ·Loop-through video input connectors with 75 ohm termination
switch ·Selectable headphone levels: -32 dB, -26 dB
Remote control unit, NV- A152 Editing controller, NV- A950 Editing controller, NV- A960
Auto search controller, NV- A800
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-71
Panasonic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
EDITING SYSTEMS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
NV- A970 SMPTE
Time Code Editing Controller
· Insert and Assembly editing ·Microprocessor based logic control
· Edits both 1/2" and 3/4" formats · 100-240VAC, 50/60Hz power operable
· + 2 frames accuracy
·4.5 seconds Pre- roll time
· 17-1/8" x9-1/4" x 17" ( WHD) Weight: 31.9 lbs. approx.
NV- A970
$ 4950.00
Standard Accessories: 1pc. AC power cord,
VJA0129
2pcs. 34- pin remote control cables, VJA0149 approx. 16.4 ft. ( 5m) 1pc. Dust cover, VFB0003
3/4"Component Editing System
Deluxe 3/4" Editing Systems: NV- 9600 ( 2 units), NV- A970. Panasonic introduces a system package providing the ultimate in advanced- feature editing. The system includes two NV- 9600 3/4"
high performance editing recorders and one NV- A970 editing controller combined in atotal system package. 221 lbs. ( 3 ctn. total)
$17,950.00
High Performance 3/4" Editing System: NV-9600, NV-9240 and
NV- A970. A practical approach to the many demands of modern-day
video production and editing. A single package of exceptional
Panasonic 3/4" equipment designed for precision results throughout
the use of one NV- 9240 production recorder as source, one NV-9600
3/4" high performance editing recorder and one NV- A970 editing
controller. 221 lbs. ( 3ctn. total).
$15,700.00
NV- A500
Editing Controller
Designed to work effortlessly with the NV-8500 deck. It offers outstanding features for easy and accurate assembly edits with nonlocking feather touch controls, designed around an advanced microprocessor that allows for a variety of professional editing functions. ·Preview mode allowing for atrial run ·Review mode for rapid review of acompleted edit ·Edit time + / 1function for locating aspecific edit point · Bi-directional search dials
·Searching speeds: 1/25, 1/10, 1/5, .1/2, 1, 2, 5and 10 times normal playing speeds
· Pause function with a visible still picture and frame by frame advance in either forward or reverse
·Two LED counters for source and editing deck · 15-3/8" x2-7/8" x9-5/8" ( WHD) ·Weighs 5.28 lbs.
·2 pcs. 34- pin remote control cable supplied
A full- function remote control, model NV- A505, is also available for this system.
NV- A500 Full Function Editing Controller
$1500.00
NV- A505 Full Function Remote Search Controller NV-J500 Multi- Source Switcher
750.00 450.00
*Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.
VR-72
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
1/2" TIME LAPSE VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
AG-6010 1/2" TIME LAPSE VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER
A New Era In Time Lapse Recording
AG- 6010 is Panasonic's all new time lapse video cassette recorder. Equipped with multiple search functions and a built-in time/date generator, the AG-6010 provides reliability and economy of operation. In addition to the 24- hour and 72- hour time lapse recording features for observation and surveillance applications, this new model also includes 2- hour standard play and 6- hour super- long play VHS modes. Engineered and built for time lapse operation by the world's largest manufacturer of video recorders, the AG-6010 boasts these additional quality engineering features...
·4 Video Heads ·Resolution: 300 lines B/W; 240 lines color
·Front- loading tape system ·Built-in RF converter for viewing tapes on aconventional television
receiver ·Automatic Repeat Recording ·Recording lock protects against external tampering once recording
has started · Multiple Search Functions ·Hour Meter ( up to 10,000 hours) ·Sturdy die-cast chassis stability
VHS Mode/Time Lapse Mode Recording In addition to time-lapse recording in the 24- hour and 72- hour modes, the AG- 6010 is also equipped for 2- hour ( SP) and 6- hour ( SLP) VHS recording. Since the AG- 6010 has abuilt-in RF converter, it can be conveniently used with a conventional television to meet a wider variety of requirements and effectively serve as two units in one.
Recording System Versatility For surveillance and monitoring applications, such features as timer recording, automatic- repeat recording, external timer recording, and alarm recording greatly enhance the versatility and convenience of the
overall system.
Timer Recording The built-in time/date generator also functions as a single- event 24- hour recording timer.
Built-in Time/Date Generator The built-in time/date generator automatically superimposes complete date and time information, including the hour, minute and second, upon recorded images for later reference or evidence. This data can be moved to any of the image's four corner areas. In addition, the power-failure compensation function assures the retention of time/date and recording time mode data in the unit's memory for approximately 72 hours, providing the unit was in operation for a minimum of 48 hours prior to the power failure.
Automatic Repeat Recording By simply setting the automatic- repeat recording switch in advance, recordings are automatically made repeatedly end-to- end on the tape, thereby eliminating the need for manual reloading of the cassette or
resetting the controls.
Automatic Recording After Power Failure If the external timer recording switch is set to the " ON" position, recording will automatically resume if a power failure occurs during operation. This switch can also be used for timer recordings.
Recording- Lock The recording- lock switch protects the unit against external tampering once a recording has started.
Alarm Recording If the unit detects any abnormal activity in the area under surveillance while in the time-lapse recording mode, it immediately switches to the 2- hour ( standard play) recording mode and records all activity in full detail. After 3.5 minute interval has elapsed the unit will return to the
former time lapse mode.
Multiple Search Functions The advanced four- head system makes a wide range of search functions possible for utmost versatility. Search functions include clear still, clear slow, frame shift ( forward and reverse) search, and speed search ( forward and reverse). Thus, you can quickly and
precisely locate any desired scene for study or analysis.
High Reliability and Durability Image stability assured by direct- drive capstan. Tape- transport mechanism mounted on sturdy die-cast chassis to assure complete stability.
Built-in RF Converter Because the RF converter ( CH 3/4) is built-in, video playback is
possible on any TV.
Hour Meter The hour meter indicates the approximately total time ( power supply time), up to a maximum of 10,000 hours.
SPECIFICATIONS Power Source: Power Consumption: Television System:
120V AC, 60/50 Hz Approx. 45W EIA Standard ( 525 lines, 60 fields) NTSC
color signal
Video Recording System:
2 rotary heads, helical scanning system Luminance: FM azimuth recording Chrom-
inance: converted subcarrier phase shift
Audio Track: Tape Format: Tape Speed:
Record/ Playback Time: FF/REW Time: Input Level:
recording
1track Tape width 1/2" ( 12.7mm), iis tape
SP; 1-5 / 16i.p.s. ( 33.35mm / s), SLP; 7/16
i.p.s. ( 11.12mm/s) 2/6/24/72- hour mode with NV- T120 tape Less than 4.5 min. with NV- T120 tape Video ( BNC): 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced Audio IFICA):-20d8, 47 kohms unbalanced Alarm Signal input: contact closure for alarm
Alarm Reset input: + 12V ( min, current 2mAl
Output Level:
Video ( BN CI: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced Audio ( RCA): - 6dB, 1kohms unbalanced Alarm Recovery output: + 5V, 220 ohms RF Modulated: Channel 3or 4 ( selectable) 66.5dB bi (open voltage), 75 ohms un-
balanced
Video Horizontal Resolution:
(on monoscope test
Monochrome: more than 300 lines Color: more than 240 lines
pattern)
Audio Frequency
Response:
Signal-to- Noise ratio: (Rohde Er Schwarz
50-12,000 Hz ( SP mode)
Video: more than 45dB ( SP mode) Audio: more than 43dB ( SP mode)
noise meter Operating Temperature: 41°F- 104°F ( 5°C- 40 °C)
Operating Humidity:
35%-80%
Weight: Dimensions:
25.3 lbs ( 11.5 kg) 16-15/16"W x4-9/16"H x4-11/16"D 430(W) x115(H) x372(D) mm
Weight and dimensions shown are approximate.
$1895.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-73
Panasonic
AUDIO- VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
One Panasonic Way
RECORDER/PLAYER-TIME LAPSE SYSTEM 1/2"- VHS
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
AG- 6050 1/2" Time Lapse Video Cassette Recorder
The Panasonic AG- 6050, a1/2- inch time lapse VCR with advanced features for security, industrial, scientific and other professional applications.
Maximum recording time on asingle VHS video cassette is 480 hours ( 20 days) in color or black Et white. Simultaneous audio recording is possible in the 2- hour ( real time) and 12- hour modes. 24, 48, 72, 120, 240- hour and 1-shot modes are also included to meet avariety of needs.
For surveillance and security applications, the deck is equipped with asophisticated alarm function. Timer, auto- repeat, auto- rewind and series recording modes provide additional performance. To permit detailed analysis of recorded contents, advanced technology boosts resolution to an impressive 350 lines ( 38-W).
Convenient playback functions include 6times normal speed forward and reverse search, reverse playback, forward/reverse field advance and automatic playback of alarm triggered segments.
The AG- 6050 boasts rugged, durable construction. There are special protection features such as recording mode lock ( to protect against tampering and accidental mode switching), recording monitor display of video head record status, power failure reset switch and auto- off display in case of improper internal conditions. Standard connectors are provided for video/audio input/output, simple video monitor hookup ( 8- pin terminal), camera
switching and camera number and remote control.
VA -74
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
RECORDER/PLAYER-TIME LAPSE SYSTEM 1/2"-VHS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
PanaSOnit AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
High- Resolution Playback
Black Et white recording provides 350- line high resolution picture reproduction which is particularly valuable for close analysis in the still playback mode. The picture sharpness control can be adjusted for maximum viewing comfort.
9- Mode Recording
Nine recording modes are available. The real time 2- hour mode and 12- hour mode allow simultaneous audio recording. The time mode selector also offers 24, 48, 72, 120, 240 and 480- hour recording modes. Thus, unattended time lapse recording is possible for amaximum of twenty days on asingle VHS video cassette. The 1- shot mode is convenient for special situations such as animation or data
files.
2-Hour 12-Hour 24- Hour 48-Hour 72- Hour 120-Hour 240- Hour 480-Hour 1-Shot
Sound Recording
Video Record Intervals
(sec.)
1/60 0.1
0.2
0.4
0.6
1min 30sec
(Manual)
1.0
2.0
4.0 2rn1n. 30sec.
(Auto)
Camera Selector Intervals
(sec.)
1
12 1.6
20 2.4
4
8
16
4 ( field)
Built-in Time/Date Generator with Alarm
Function
This can be used to automatically add month, day, year, hour, minute and second displays to the recorded picture. Camera number can also be added. Data memory of date and time of alarm triggered recording can be recalled and displayed. If desired, the activation of an alarm can switch
the deck to the 2/12 hour mode for extra detail while also sounding an audible alarm and lighting an indicator lamp. The lamp stays on after the end of the tape is reached.
Multi- Function Recording Versatility
To better meet your particular needs, the AG-6050 is equipped with avariety of convenient recording functions. Timer ( built-in) recording can be used to record at the same time every day or the same day every week. The auto- repeat function can be selected to rewind at the end of the tape and begin recording again. Simple auto- rewind is also possible. Series recording lets you cascade a number of AG-6050 decks so that when one finishes recording, the next begins.
Multi- Mode Playback
To quickly find desired segments of a recording, the AG-6050 is equipped with convenient 6 times normal speed search ( normal mode), reverse playback and forward/reverse field advance. An alarm triggered recorded segment can be found and played back automatically at any time.
Other Features
·Rear panel facilities include video/audio input/output, 8- pin connector for video monitor, camera switching terminal, camera number terminal and 34- pin remote control connector
·10,000- hour operation time meter for reminder of maintenance schedule
·Semi-fine slow motion interval playback ·Audio level meter with audio limiter · 1/2H lock switch ·Counter memory ·Alarm buzzer switch
Specifications ( Tentative)
Power Source:
AC 120V 50/60Hz
Power Consumption:
Approx. 70 watts
Recording System:
2rotary heads, helical scanning
Tape Speed:
1-5/16ips ( 33.35mm/s) ( 2- hour mode)
Tape Format:
Tape width 1/2 inch ( 12.7mm), high density tape
Recording/Playback Times: 2-480 hours with NV- T120
FF/REW Time:
Approx. 4.5 min. ( with NV-T1201
Recording Time Modes:
2/12/24/48/72/120/240/480 hours and
1- shot mode
This unit is designed exclusively for time lapse use. The special recording system will not allow interchanging recorded programs with a standard VHS unit.
VIDEO TV System: Modulation System:
Input: Output: Horizontal Resolution: Signal- to- Noise Ratio:
EIA Standard ( 525 lines, 60 fields) NTSC color
signal Luminance; frequency modulation recording Color signal; converted subcarrier, phase shift
recording TV ( 8pins); 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced Video Input ( BNC); 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced TV ( 8pins); 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced Video Output ( BNC); 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced
More than 350 lines for monochrome More than 240 Imes for color Better than 45 dB ( Rhode & Schwarz noise meter)
Output:
Track: Signal-to- Noise Ratio: Frequency Response:
CONNECTORS Alarm Signal Input: Alarm Signal Output: Alarm Recovery Output: Alarm Reset Input: 1Shot Signal Input: Series Recording Input: Series Recording Output: Camera Switching Output:
Camera No. Input: Alarm Recording Time: Alarm Recording Speed: Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Weight: Dimensions:
Audio Input ( RCA); -20 dB, 100K ohms unbalanced Mic; -70 dB, 600 ohms unbalanced TV ( 8pins), 0dB, 600 ohms unbalanced Audio Output ( RCA); -6dB, 600 ohms unbalanced 1track Better than 40 dB ( 2- hour mode) 50 Hz to 10,000 Hz ( 2- hour mode)
Contact closure for alarm + 12V, 4.7K ohms +5V, 220 ohms +2 --+ 15V Contact closure for alarm Contact closure for alarm Open collector ( max. 5.0mA) 5V/OV, negative pulse Pulse Width; 33.3m sec Contact closure for alarm Approx. 10 sec.- 6min./tape end 2-hour/12 hour modes 41°F- 104'F ( 5°-- 40°C) 35%-80% 40.7 lbs. ( 18.5 kg) 16-7/8" ( W) x7-7/8" ( H) x 17-3/8" ( D) 430 ( W) x 197 ( H) x441 ( D)rnm
AUDIO Input:
TV ( 8pins); -20 dB, 100K ohms unbalanced
Weight and dimensions shown are approximate.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-75
p armsoniec AUDIO- VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
DUBBING SYSTEM
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
AG- A100
The Dubbing Controller can be used for control of as many as 10 slave VTRs and 1or 2 master VTRs.
A complete dubbing system designed for precise and efficient simultaneous dubbing. The ideal system to solve your dubbing problems, this new Panasonic Dubbing System offers complete control over virtually every step of the dubbing process, with remote control facilities for added convenience, permitting dubbing to as many as 40 VTRs at the same time.
·Either one or two master VTRs can be connected
·From one to ten slave VTRs can be connected
·Remote control of the start and stop of
the playback mode of the master VTRs lone or two units)
·Remote control of slave VTRs lone to ten
units): recording, playback, fast forward, rewind, forward and reverse search, stop, pause/still and cassette ejection
·As many as 40 slave VTRs can be con-
nected by using the multi- connection system ( with four Dubbing Controllers,
AV Distributors and Switchers) ·Remote control possible with any master
VTR which has an RCA-type record remote jack ·Mountable in 19- inch rack
SPECIFICATIONS
Remote Control
Connector:
20- pin x10
Master VTR Start/Stop:
Rec Start/Stop: Multi- Connection: Weight: Dimensions:
Operating Temperature:
Operating Humidity:
Accessories Supplied:
RCA jack, open collector (A Et B) RCA jack, open collector 20- pin ( Input/Output) 10.65 lbs. ( 4.8 kg) 17"(W) x3-1/2"(H) x13"(D) 430 x88 x328mm
41°F - 104°F ( 5°C- 40°C)
30%-80%
Rack Angle x2
AG-A100
$750.00
FRONT VIEW
HUM"
REAR VIEW
AG-DA100 The AV Distributor can be used for distribution of as many as 10 video or audio (2- channel) signals.
·Two inputs, A and B, selectable for two
outputs, A ( 1 -- 5) and B ( 2 -- 10) ·Because loop-through type input ter-
minals are used, video/audio distribution
can be further expanded by using an additional AV Distributor
·Video and audio output levels can be adjusted while monitoring the level meter
·Distribution to as many as 40 slave VTRs is possible by using the multi- connection
system ( with four Dubbing Controllers, AV Distributors and Switchers)
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Supply:
AC 110/120/220/240V,
Consumption: Video
50/60 Hz 14W
Input: Output: Audi.)
BNC x4loop- through BNC x10
Input:
RCA jack x8 ( CH1, CH2),
Output:
loop- through type RCA jack x 20 ( CH1,
CH2), loop- through type
-6 dB 600 ohms
(-8, -20 dB selectable)
Weight: Dimensions:
Operating Temperature:
Operating Humidity:
Accessories Supplied:
12.76 lbs. ( 5.8 kg) 17"(W) x3-1/2"(H) x 13"(D) 430 x88x 328mm
41°F- 104°F ( 5°C - 40°C)
35%-80%
Rack Angle x2 Power cord
AG-DA100 $750.00
VA-76
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
DUBBING SYSTEM
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
Panasonic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
AG-SW100
The Switcher can be used to select any one of as many as 10 audio/video inputs for monitoring.
·Video/audio selection of one from as many as 10 input signals for monitoring
· Manual and automatic modes can be
selected for the output signal · Selection timing for the automatic mode
ranges from about 1second to 30 seconds · Selection timing can be set according to
the external pulse ·Audio monitoring selectable as either
audio channel 1, mixed or audio channel 2 · Mode lock function for inhibition of
remote control input ( normal side) and front panel control ( remote side)
SPECIFICATIONS Power Supply:
Power Consumption:
Video Input: Output: Monitor Output:
Audio Input:
AC 110/120/220/240V, 50/60 Hz
9W
BNC x10 BNCx 2
BNC x1
1.0Vp-p 75 ohms 1.0Vp-p 75 ohms 1.0Vp-p 75 ohms
RCA jack x10 ICH1) RCA jack x10 ( CH2)
-6 dB 5K ohms
Remote Control Connector:
Weight: Dimension
Operating Temperature:
Operating Humidity:
Accessories Supplied:
20- pin 12.98 lbs. ( 5.9 kg) 17"(W) x3-1/2"(H) x13"(D) 430 x88 x328mm
41°F - 104°F ( 5°C- 40°C)
35%-80%
Rack Angle x2 Power cord
·Automatic skip function makes selection
Output:
RCA jack x2 ( CH1)
quicker by skipping terminals with no
RCA jack x2 ( CH2)
AG-SW100
$850.00
input signal
Monitor Output: RCA jack x1 -6dB 600 ohms
· Interval switching function makes it pos-
sible to switch within the synchronized
signal of the video signal if a video input
signal is present at input terminal 1
·Mountable in 19- inch rack
ci CI
1181 11111
1111
II8 II8 -zers
t0········· 0000000000 00 000000000 00
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
BASIC SYSTEM
CesInbutor AG·DA100
Core oiler AG40C0
SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
SYSTEM USING 2 MASTER VTRs
Master VTR A
Master VTR B
MULTI- CONNECTION SYSTEM
Master VTR B
, A
ChstnOutor AG.DAI00
Conooller AG4.100
Dedributor AGMA100
IController I Dialribulor I Controller.
AG-A100
AGrDAICO
AG.A100
Castobrao. reGADA100
Con rode AG All)
Drolntrutor AG.DAI00
1IIOUT 2 Lli2tOUT '3 LIN1 3I/OUT ' 4
Controller AGA 00
IN/ ll
Slave VTR 10
AG.SW100
h ilt Monitor
Slave VTR 1
LSlave VTR 10
Svolcner AGSW1j03 · TV Mondor
11..1.r.1,-,..-...1-,,,:oenIiset..IvrrAi -,,-, -Ist.LVTli 1 ISIalVTR
Slave VTR Si
SlavIVIR
ISIaloVTRI
' -; 4---. wit1eer
ASGSW100
,_
i
Smtcher
Tv
mom,
AG.S2W100
Swacher
iv
A G-S3WIM
Swlicher AG.SWIOD
4
A Controller ( AG- A100), AV
Distributor ( AG-DA100) and Switcher ( AG-SW100) combine with one master VTR for dubbing to as many as 10 slave VTRs.
The Controller, AV Distributor and Switcher are combined with two master VTRs for dubbing to as many as 10 slave VTRs.
Up to 4 Controllers, 4 AV Distributors and 4 Switchers are com-
bined to facilitate dubbing from
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
2 master VTRs to as many as 40 slave VTRs at one time, with full control over system operations.
VR-77
nuen
nDi TAL5 nmmelcr
·
-)b
tilek
JvC
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO & COMMERCIAL/INDUS-
TRIAL SOUND EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide --
1280 pages of Studio & Remote Audio Recording
Equipment & Systems for stage, concert, audito-
rium, arena, stadium, hall, church, industry,
business, commercial, school, hospital & hotel
sound reinforcement, background music, paging,
intercommunications, telephone & telecom-
munications systems & equipment.
$95.00
AUDIO-VISUAL & EDUCATIONAL/TRAINING
COMPUTER EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide -- 1280
pages of projectors, screens, recorders, learning aids, carrels, stands, tables, lecterns & equipment for multi- image & sound. Computers, disk drives, furniture, graphics, magnetic media, modems, monitors, networks, paper/forms, printers, power supplies, terminals & software. $95.00
BROADCAST EQUIPMENT & SERVICES Buyers
Guide -- 1280 pages of Studio, Remote &
Location Equipment & Systems for television,
commercial & tape production, broadcast tele-
vision, radio, cable, pay & satellite TV, special
effects, animation & music video.
$95.00
COMPUTER EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide -- For
Professional, Scientific, Business, Industrial &
Commercial Applications. 1280 pages of micros,
minis, disk drives, furniture, graphics, digitizers,
plotters, boards, cables, cases, consultants, diag-
nostic & test keyboards, magnetic media, main-
tenance, modems, monitors, networks, paper/
forms, power/protection, printers, software,
supplies, tape drives, telecommunications,
terminals.
$95.00
SECURITY & CCTV EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide
-- For Industrial, Professional, Commercial & Busi-
ness Applications. 1280 pages of controls, annun-
ciators, power supplies, dialers, closed circuit TV,
wire, cable & equipment for remote monitoring,
space protection & central station.
$95.00
PROFESSIONAL PHOTOGRAPHY/MOTION
PICTURE Buyers Guide -- Professionals in
Photography, Motion Picture, Multi- Image,
Audio- Visual, Film Production & Post Production
-- 1280 pages of studio, remote & location
equipment systems & supplies for Still, Cine, AV &
Film Production.
$95.00
INDUSTRIAL & PROFESSIONAL VIDEO EQUIP-
MENT Buyers Guide -- 1280 pages of cameras,
recorders, production & terminal equipment,
monitors, lighting, telecine, RF equipment, enclo-
sures, wire & cable.
$95.00
BILL DANIELS COMPANY, Inc.
9101 BOND · P O. BOX 2056 SHAWNEE MISSION. KANSAS 66201
CALL KAI TOLL FREE
1-800-255-6038
IN KANSAS . 1-e13-482-9900
PENTAGON INDUSTRIES, INC.
4751 N. Olcott Ave. Chicago, IL 60656 (312) 867-9200 ( 800) 621-3867 Telex 253058
VIDEO CASSETTES
HIGH- COLOR VIDEO RECORDING AND PLAYBACK CASSETTES
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions Tape Width
Thickness
12.650mm +. 01mm 19.mm + 1 -2mm
Physical Properties Surface Resistivity
Yield Strength 5% Elongation
less than 1x10" 0/sq.
more than 1.8kg
Video Properties R.F. output Signal/noise
Chroma output Chroma SIN Pause Mode
better than -2.0db better than -2.0db
+2.0db +2.0db more than 60 min.
Audio Properties Sensitivity Frequency Response
Output Uniformity Erasability
+2.0db +3.0db
0.3db more than 65 db
VIDEO CASSETTE SIZES AVAILABLE
L-125 L-500 L-250 L-750
T-30 T-60 T-90 T-120
RECORDING TIME
REC MODE L-125 L-250 L-500 L-750 L-830
3 45 min. 1hr. 30 min.
3 hr 4 hr. 30 min.
5 hr
2 30 min.
1 hr 2 hr. 3 hr. 3 hr. 20 min.
1 15 min. 30 min.
1 hr. 1hr. 30 min.
N/A
RECORDING TIME
REC CODE T-30 T-60 T-90 T-120
SP 30 rain. 60 min. 90 min. 120 min.
LP 60 min. 120 min. 180 min. 240 min.
SLP 90 min. 180 min. 270 min. 360 min.
Other iengths available on specia order. Allow 8 weeks for delivery for lengths not listed.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-79
PHASECOM
6365 Arizona Circle
Los Angeles, CA 90045
(213) 641-3501
CORP.
PROGRAMMABLE VIDEO CASSETTE PLAYER/CHANGER
THE DIRECTOR System 19, Model 12 The Automatic Programmable Video Cassette Player/Changer
The Director represents a revolutionary approach to video cassette utilization. Rather than time-link a series of VTRS, the technologically sophisticated DIRECTOR manipulates and plays a stack of video cassettes through a single VTR. Essentially, it is an electro-mechanical robot teamed with microcomputer technology to provide you with great versatility of system design and programming capability.
The Model 12 with its added abilities resulting from an integral Z-80 microprocessor, proudly succeeds the hundreds of Model 10's and 11's presently serving the industry. It is the only such comprehensive device on the market today, and its uniqueness is acknowledged by U.S. Patent #4133013.
Full Week Programming Capability The DIRECTOR has random access to nineteen ( 191 video cassettes and the capability of programming an entire week or seven distinct schedule days...for automatic and continuous video distribution throughout a closed circuit or cable television system. Each cassette may contain an assembly of programs, with options for automatic " Intermission" displays between each program or cassette. Once programmed, no personnel assist is ever required. The DIRECTOR goes on working...seven days a week, week after week.
THE DIRECTOR: Loads, Plays, Unloads. Gives "Intermissions." Retrieves and Rewinds Video Cassettes. Automatically and in Any Sequence According To Your Keypad Entered Schedule.
AND You Can Specify the start of any cassette at any real time minute of the day.
THE DIRECTOR IS DESIGNED TO OPERATE WITH THE SONY U-MATIC 5000 VTR. The Kt" tape format provides you with the best combination of economy and excellence of performance.
For Education · For Entertainment · For Training
Hospitals: FOR PATIENT EDUCATION, ENTERTAINMENT AND STAFF TRAINING. Industrial Plants: FOR IN- PLANT TRAINING, SAFETY AND MOTIVATIONAL PROGRAMMING. Hotels: FOR PREMIUM CHANNEL ENTERTAINMENT. Schools, Fire and Police Depts.: FOR EDUCATIVE SUPPORT AND IN-SERVICE TRAINING.
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROGRAMMER
Sophisticated microprocessor control .. executes 7distinct schedule days, with up to 49 events per day It loads, plays, unloads. Gives 'intermission' displays. Retrieves and rewinds videocassettes All automatically.
CASSETTE RACK
Large 19 videocassette capacity with random access to each
cassette in stack. You can specify the start ol any cassette at any minute of the day.
Cue tones are placed before ao after each program to signal computer
CONTROL PANEL Simple keypad schedule entry. Allows easy review and editing of stored schedules Has LED displays of the Real Time Clock and ol elapsed lime from start of each program PLAYER The Sony Model 5000 Player The 3/4" tape format provides the best combination of perform unce and economy
POWER SUPPLY Power supply and motor con trots use 1101/ AC to furnish regulated OC
$8995.00
Whether Your Program Schedule Needs Are Simple or Complex... The Director Can Solve Them. For example, in multichannel systems you have options for time switching the video output to different channels. This has proved particularly important to hospitals for distributing programs to different floors or patient populations.
Important Facts About The Director Each of its nineteen ( 19) video cassettes can start at any time of the day, any day of the week, in any sequence. Each cassette can have more than one program.
Its computer is capable of storing and executing in sequence seven 171 distinct schedule days. Each schedule day has a49 event capacity.
Video cassettes automatically rewind at end of the day, or are automatically rewound immediately prior to their next play.
02 Graphic Generator Intermission lines
021 Custom Programming 2 pages of 2 lines each. Each line has 12 characters.
Programmable Time Switch The DIRECTOR has a Programmable Time Switch IPTS) Option. The PTS may be utilized by Multichannel Systems to change the output channel automatically at specific times, or coincident with specific programs.
ADDITIONAL OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Ceramic Filter Provides maximum protection against false cueing due to the presence of full audio or noise on audio track 1
Complex Cue Tone Generator Crystal controlled, battery powered complex cue tone generator. Used to record cue tones compatible with Complex Tone Detectors.
VA -80
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PIONEER®
PIONEER VIDEO, INC. INDUSTRIAL SALES DIVISION
5150 E. Pacific Coast Highway/Suite 300 Long Beach, CA 90804 (213) 498-0300
LASERDISC PLAYERS
LD-V6000 INDUSTRIAL LASERDISCTM PLAYER
LD-V1000 HIGH PERFORMANCE LASERDISC TM PLAYER
FEATURES: ·Full random access of up to 30 minutes ( 54,000 frames) of video,
with two sound channels ·Plays heavy duty, aluminum- backed CAV discs as well as standard
CAV discs ·Maximum access time of three seconds ·Bidirectional parallel computer interface with continuous player
Status output ·Variable play speeds ·Multiple track skips in selected increments up to 100 ·Maximum skip time less than 5ms ·Audio channels can be enabled during Variable Speed Play for
special audio effects ·512 user registers in player RAM ·Abiliity to load player RAM from disc resident " data dumps"
Designed for special purpose applications, the Pioneer-V1000 offers features tailored for external computer control in industrial, OEM,
and other high usage environments.
Typical Applications: ·Simulators ·Arcade Games ·High level CAI systems
SELECTED SPECIFICATIONS
Operational Features:
Play Fast Play: 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5times normal play speed Slow Play at 1/4 and 1/2 normal speed Step Frame, Still Frame, and Scan functions
Frame accurate Search Frame accurate Autostop Selectable display of frame number, register number, and register
contents
Design Features:
Helium neon laser Top loading Height
Width Depth
56inches, 14.3cm
20.7 inches, 52.5cm 15.6 inches, 39.5cm
Net weight MTBF
33 lbs, 15 kg 4500 hours
Video Format: NTSC, 525 lines,
350
lines
horizontal
resolution,
30
frames
per
second SNR greater than 42 dB Video signal available during track skip
Audio Characteristics Two switchable audio channels Frequency response 40-20,000 Hz
Signal-to-noise ratio better than 50 dB Total harmonic distortion less than 0.5%
Power Requirements: 120 VAC, 60 Hz 60 watts LD-V1000
POR
Accessories: Wheeled carrying case for LD-V1000 Service Manual
$300.00 50.00
PLAYER FEATURES: ·Multiple control modes:
-Level II-- Standalone programmable
-Level Ill Computer peripheral ( RS232C) -Normal linear play with RCU keypad -User programmable with RCU keypad ·Front panel disc loading ·Solid state laser signal pick-up ·Fast access-- maximum of three seconds ·Compact-- less than 17 inches wide, sized for rack mounting
·Built-in RS232C serial interface ·External sync and subcarrier 75 ohms looped through ( adjustable)
·Playback sync out ·Video and RF out ·AutoRepeat ·Switchable AutoPlay ·Chassis access door to removable EPROM ·Displays to show frame number, register, register contents,
command(s) entered, and multi-speed function entered
·CX'noise reduction ·Plays CLV, CAV, and CAV aluminum backed discs ·Optional remote control
The LD-V6000 is aflexible, versatile industrial videodisc player. In one front loading, compact chassis is avideodisc player capable of
meeting awide variety of needs.
SPECIFICATIONS
Visual Access ·Three seconds or less access time from frame 1to frame 54,000
·Under one second for nearby frame searches I ± 10,000)
Environmental Requirements: ·Power: 120V ± 10%, 50/60 Hz, 40 watts typical, 120 watts max.
·Size: Height 5.9" ( 150mm), Width 16.6" ( 420mm), Depth 16.4"
(415mm) ·Weight: 30.8 lbs. ( 14 kg)
Signal Parameters ·Video: NTSC, 525 scan lines, 30 frames per second
·330 lines horizontal resolution ·SNR greater than 40 dB
·Timebase error less than ± 22ns. ·Differential gain less than 10%
·Differential phase less than 12° ·Output impedance 75 ohms ·Audio: two discrete, switchable channels ·Frequency response 20-20,000 Hz ± 3dB
·CX"noise reduction decoding ·Signal-to-noise ratio 67 dB with CX" 55 dB without
·Distortion - 1KHz 75% mod, less than 0.5%
·Crosstalk - 1KHz 75% mod, -- 50 dB ·Output impedance 3.3K ohms
·RF: Channel 3or 4out, switchable ·Output impedance: 75 ohms ·Synchronization: sync and subcarrier potentiometer adjustable
·Composite sync 75 ohms loop-through, switchable terminator
·Subcarrier 75 ohms loop-through, switchable terminator
·Sync out TTL, 2K ohm pull-up
LD-V6000
$ 1490.00
Accessories: RU-V6000 Remote Control Unit
Wheeled carrying case Service Manual
$ 45.00
300.00 50.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-81
PIONEER®
PIONEER VIDEO, INC.
INDUSTRIAL SALES DIVISION 5150 E. Pacific Coast Highway/Suite 300 Long Beach, CA 90804 (2 13) 498-0300
LASERDISC PLAYERS
LD-V4000 LASERDISC - PLAYER
FEATURES: · Front disc loading ·Solid state laser signal pick-up ·Compact size - ideal for rack mounting ·Autostop function when attached to external computer · Expanded control features ·Maximum access time, six seconds ·Switchable AutoRepeat ·Serial computer ports
·Optional remote control keypad ( wired or infrared wireless) ·Stereo headphone jack with volume control built into the keypad
The LD-V4000 can operate in a Level Istandalone mode using chapters and picture stops and in a Level Ill mode when attached to an external computer.
Typical Applications: · Learning centers ·Sales demonstrations ·Group lectures ·Point- of- sale information booths ·CAI with color visuals and sound ·Audi- visual libraries
SPECIFICATIONS* Operational Controls:
·Normal play with two discrete audio channels
·Bidirectional Fast Play: 1, 2, 3times normal · Bidirectional Slow Motion: 1 frame per 1/2, 1/4, 1/8 or 1/16
second.
· Bidirectional Timed Step Frame: 1 frame each three seconds or each second
·Pause, with screen blanking · Random Chapter Search · Chapter Scan ·Frame Search ( CAV) ·Picture Stop ( CAV) ·Bidirectional Step Frame ( CAV) · Fast Scan ·Time Search ( CLV) ·Bookmark Review ( CAV) ·Selectable automatic disc Repeat or Reject ·Selectable audio channels, left, right, or stereo
Computer Ports: ·Serial TTL with pulse timing logic · " Acknowledge" output
·Amphenol-type 24- pin rear panel, and DIN 8- pin front panel connectors
Remote Control Unit ( Optional): ·Wireless infrared
·Wired, via 16" cable provided
·Stereo headphone jack with dual channel volume control, 1/4", 8 to 200 Ohms ( wired mode only)
·Two AAA dry batteries included
Design Features: · Front disc loading ·Solid state laser signal pick-up
· Height ·Width
· Depth · Weight
47inches ( 12cm) 16.5 inches ( 42cm)
16.3 inches ( 41.5cm) 27.3 lbs. ( 12.4kg)
Screen Displays: ·Frame number ( CAV) ·Chapter number ·Elapsed time ( CLV) · Fast Play/Slow Play speeds
Front Panel Indicators: ·Power on/off ·Antenna/disc player out ·CX' Noise Reduction status ·Audio channel(s) ·CAV/CLV mode ·Memory status · Pause · Play/standby ·Disc loading status · Remote sensor
Video Format: ·NTSC, 525 scan lines, 30 frames per second ·330 lines horizontal resolution ·Channel 3 or 4 RF output ·Video output
Audio: · Dual discrete channel or stereo ·CV' noise reduction decoding ·Frequency response: 20-20,000 Hz (± 3dB) ·Signal-to-noise ratio
-70 dB with CX" -58 dB without CX'"
Power Requirements: · 120 VAC 50/60 Hz ·33 watts
Environmental Requirements: ·Operating temperature/humidity:
41-95°F, 5-35°C, 0-90% non- condensing
LD-V4000
$900.00
Optional Accessories
CU- V4000 Remote Control Unit Wheeled carrying case Service manual
$ 45.00
300.00 50.00
CX is atrademark of CBS, Inc. LaserDisc is atrademark of Pioneer Electronic Corporation.
VR-82
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PLASTIC REEL CORP. OF AMERICA
Brisbin Ave. Lyndhurst, NJ 07071 (201) 933-5100
VIDEO REELS & CASES
We protect the image you project.
Video Tape Reels.
Video Cases.
Plio-Magic® improves the state of the art in tape reels! Plio-Magic's quality of endurance gives you precision reels that last and last for long-term dollar savings. There's areel for all types of tape systems:
1" and 2" video tape reels with NAB centers. For shipping, transporting or storage, Plio-Magic custom designed cases are available for video tape reels and cassettes. All offer the unparalleled protection of PRC's
super tough material assuring dust resistant, safe protection for your valuable programs. We maintain large inventories in four centralized locations,
assuring you of product when your requirements dictate. To find out more about how we can protect your image call
or write today.
Product Number
Description
Selling Ctn. Price Qty.
VIDEO TAPE REELS & BOXES less than
1to 26 Clan
Carton 25 Urn
8. Up
14561 14581 14555 14565 14580
61/ 2 x1" frx1" 5"x2" 61/ 2 "x2" frx2"
2.53 2.85 1.01 2.24 3.02
1.40 1.65
.62 1.45 1.76
1.25 1.50 495 1.05 1.56
48 48 60 48 24
3955504 3956504 3958004 3956104 3958104
VIDEO TAPE REEL BOXES ONLY
5'/" 2"
48
61/ 2 "x2" 8"x2"
.60 .67
61/ 2 "xt "
.55
Ent"
.64
.43
40
60
53 .50
48
.59 . 56
24
.48 .46
48
.56 .53
48
70031BW ZEBRA TAPE
6.00
6.00
6.00
12
38802 38800 38801 38800 38805 328xx 327xx 39602 39601
VIDEO TAPE SHIPPING CASES - PLASTIC ( Video Vault)
(Holds the following
1to
25 &
Cassettes)
24
Up
1/ 2 "Beta Bulk 1/ 2 "Beta Plastic Box 'h" VHS Bulk 'h" VHS Plastic Box 3/ 4 "U-Matic Bulk 3-10 '/2" VHS or Beta 3-10 3/ 4 "U-Matic
7.20 5.90 7.20 5.90 5.90 49.50 49.50
5.90
25
4.60
25
5.90
25
4.60
25
4.60
25
47.00
25
47.00
25
Inserts Only:
1/ 2 "Beta Cassette
2.00
'h" VHS Cassette
2.00
2.00 2.00
Product Number 38213 38203
38214 38204
38215 38205
Description
VIDEO TAPE STORAGE BOXES · PLASTIC Beta '/2 Cassette Case with window Beta 1h" Cassette Case without window Quantity 100-199 200-499 500-11,999 12,000-24,999 25,000-49,999 50.000-99,999 100,000 & Up
Selling Price
Price .91 .83 .79 77 .71 .67 Available on Request
VIDEO TAPE STORAGE BOXES · PLASTIC
VHS/Beta 1/ 2 " Cassette Case with window
VHS/Beta 1 /2 "Cassette Case without window
Quantity 100-199 200-499
Price .95 .87
500-11,999
.83
12,000-24,999
.81
25,000-49,999
.75
50,000-99,999
.71
100,000 & Up
Available on Request
U-Matic 3 /4 "Cassette Case with window U-Matic 3 /4 "Cassette Case without window
Quantity 100-299 300-499 500-11,999 12,000-24,999 25,000-49,999 50,000-99,999 100.000 & Ur)
Price 1.37 1.18 1.15 1.09 1.04 1.02 Available on Request
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-83
PORTA VIDEO INTERNATIONAL, INC.
3325 West Catalina Drive P.O. Box 11296 Phoenix, AZ 85061 (602) 269-2101 1-800-528-3350 Telex 299689
VHS VIDEOCASSETTE PLAYER
VIP- 1100 Portable VHS Format Videocassette Player
FEATURES
·Playback up to 2 hours 40 minutes ( T-160) ·Soft- touch controls with microprocessor ·Noise canceller ( fine picture reproducer in STILL mode) ·Soft damped eject mechanism ·Auto rewind feature ·Still picture can be viewed
· Puts Hollywood movies at home within everyone's reach · Brings learning to a higher level
It's portable
Housed in arugged, tamper- proof protective case and weighs approximately 16 pounds
It's quality- built Made with heavy-duty industrial components for years of reliable operation
It's convenient Connects in seconds to most any TV or monitor
The VIP- 1100 is a lightweight, portable VHS Format Videocassette player. It adds sight and sound impact to sales presentations. It can
be used for employee orientation and training, recruitment, internal communications, hotels, motels and resorts, convention booths and hospitality rooms, school systems, libraries and self improvement programs.
SPECIFICATIONS:
Playback System Video Signal Tape Width Tape Speed
Playback Time Usable Tape RF Output
Video Output Horizontal Resolution
Video S/N Audio Output Audio Frequency
Twin heads, Helical Scanning system 525 lines, 60Hz standard TV signal 1/2 inch 23.39mm/sec.
Up to 2 hours 40 minutes/T-160 tape VHS pre-recorded video cassette VHS ch -3or 4
1Vp-p, 75 ohm unbalanced 240 TV lines for VHS standard recorded tapes 43 dB
Line output; -- ( minus) 2dB
Response Audio S/N Operation
100Hz to 10kHz 40dB
Temperature Main Input Player Dimensions Player Weight
40°F to 106°F ( 5°C to 40 °C) 117VAC 60Hz
10.62(W) x4.33(H) x 12.4(D) inches
With Case
Without Case Accessory
Approximately 16 pounds Approximately 12 pounds
RF Cord, switch box, instruction book
VP- 1100 VP- 1100 w/case
$319.95 379.95
VR-84
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PRECISION ECHO
SQUEEZER/VIDEO DISC RECORDER
3105 Patrick Henry Dr. Santa Clara, CA 95054 (408) 988-0516 TVVX 910-338-2328
III!IIIIIII!IIIIII
SQUEEZER FEATURES ·Four discrete image sizes ( 1/4, 1/9, 1/16, 1/25) · Universal image positioning on screen · Four preset controls, governing image position, size, border/no
border, border width and border color
· Image cropping from reduced size to infinity, and back · Border/no border switching ·Variable border width ·256 border colors, variable by saturation and hue
· Horizontal image flipping · Dual joystick controls for image cropping and positioning
·Slimline master panel design · Rugged, high reliability design
SPECIFICATIONS Squeezer Controls Image Size:
Image Position:
pushbutton selectable to four discrete sizes
joystick controlled to any position in screen, speed of movement controlled by
joystick position
Image Cropping:
Freeze Frame: Horizontal Invert: Border On/Off: Border Hue:
Border Saturation: Border Size: Preselect:
joystick controlled position, horizontal and vertical size, cropping speed poten-
tiometer controlled pushbutton controlled pushbutton controlled pushbutton controlled dual pushbuttons for in-
crease and decrease allow 256 color selections across
the spectrum dual pushbuttons for increase and decrease dual pushbuttons for increase and decrease pushbutton storage of four separate parameter pro-
grams
Video Characteristics NTSC Video Input Level: NTSC Video Output Level:
Genlock to composite video or black burst
Signal-to- Noise Ratio: Differential Phase: Differential Gain: Luminance Bandwidth:
1.0V p- p + 3dB adjustable RS 170A standard
> 47 dB 30
< 3% 4.2M Hz ( in squeezed model
Power Requirements
117V, 60 Hz
Environmental Specifications
Temperature:
32°F to 125°F
Humidity:
10% to 90% non- condensing
Mechanical Characteristics
Mainframe Remote Controller Interconnect Cable Squeezer
$ 19,400.00
VIDEO DISC RECORDER
FEATURES ·User Eraseable ·User Recordable and Re- recordable
·Video Only or Video and Audio ·200 Frames/side, Video only · 100 Frames/side, Video with Audio Messages
· Monochrome or Color · Remote Operator Control or Computer Control ·Next Generation Video/Audio Discassette0 · Full Achievability and Interchangeability · Random Access Frame Recall ·Very Lightweight, transportable ·Applicable in Teleconferencing, Medical, Training, Computer
Graphics, Business Information, Advertising, and Professional
Video Markets
S/N Ratio: Resolution: Recording: Input Signal: Output Signal: Input/Output Z: RF Modulated Output:
Dimensions: Disc: Remote: Weight:
46 dB 240 lines, horizontal
High Band Direct 1.0V p- p 1.0V p- p 75 ohm Ch3/ Ch4 switchable 72 dBu, 75 unbalanced
3.75"H x16.5"W x12"D 0.31" x10.88" x10.88" 1" x2.75" x5.5" 15 lbs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-85
From the Engineering Labs of IliTII..
TapeiChwkrm EMU
1" EVALUATOR/CLEANER
When quality recordings count. . . count on TapeChek 6120!
·Operates automatically at over 20 times play speed
·20- track " Micro- Pulse"' dropout detection system
·Color CRT graphically displays magnetic and physical defect information
·Opto -electronic edge detection mode permits physical evaluation of pre-recorded tapes
·Cleans tape with dual vacuum system · Reduces dropouts by burnishing tape oxide · Printer provides hard copy reports of video-
tape condition
·Three microprocessors ensure fast and easy operation
TapeChek 6120 1" Videotape Evaluator/Cleaner
Optional Base Cabinet
$ 16,800.00 175.00
A must for studio mastering, news, satellite
feeds and all situations where costly retakes are impractical or impossible!
WRITE OR CALL TOLL FREE 800-323-7520*
For more information on our complete line of videotape and film care products.
/1111g VR-86
TREECSHENAORLCOHGY INTERNATIONAL
TOTAL TAPE CARE SYSTEMS. . . FOR VIDEO PROFESSIONALS
The Ultimate in Professional Videotape Care
TffluElinek'
PROFESSIONAL VT SERIES
Videotape Evaluators! Cleaners for:
·3/4" U-Matic -- Model VT3100 ·VHS, M- Format -- Model VT2100 · Beta, BetaCam -- Mcdel VT1100
· Fast, accurate, easy to use, operating at over 25 times standard play speed
·Inspects cleans and protects ·Provides digital defect reports of control,
video and audio tracks ·Available with printer and high speed
erase capabilities
VT3100, 2100, 1100 Printer Option Erase Option
$ 6,950.00 875.00 575.00
Tapechek 320 VHS Videotape Inspector/Cleaner
·Inspects and cleans aT-120 tape in less than 2 minutes
· High speed automatic operation inspects tape for wrinkles, creases and edge damage while cleaning magnetic oxide
· LED display reports number of defects ·Compact unit priced to fit smaller budgets
TapeChek 320
$ 3,295.00
lápEherl(Tm 32E1
/RTI
TREECSHENAORLCOHGY INTERNATIONAL
4700 Chase Avenue Lincolnwood, IL 60646-1689 Telex: 28-9414 RETEC LCWD
*From Illinois, Alaske, Hawaii and outside the USA, call 312-677-3000.
VR-87
SCOTCH 3M CO.
MAGNETIC AUDIO/VIDEO PRODUCTS DIVISION
3M Center - 223, 5S-01 St Paul, MN 55144 (612) 733 1110
VIDEO TAPE
Helical Video Products
Color Plus U-Matic ( 3/41 Video Cassettes
Color Plus Mini-U-Matic Format Color Plus Master Broadcast U-Matic Format Video Cassettes
Color Plus Extended Play U-Matic Format
Color Plus Professional Use Beta Er VHS ( 1/2") Video Cassettes U- Do- It IU-Maticl Reload Kits
"Scotch" Color Plus UCA Videocassettes use aspecial Color Plus oxide video tape which provides asuperior signal-to-noise ratio, color- noise ratio and lower dropouts. Color Plus UMatic videocassettes are fully compatible with all 3/4" U-Matic Videocassette Systems; the permanent oxide lubrication and time proven backside treatment assure low head wear, extended stop motion and maximum tape life.
"Scotch" Brand Mini-U-Matic Videocassettes are designed for use with such recorders as
atfhteerStohneypVlaOyi-3n8g0t0imaen(dUtChAe-JlVoCp-jCiRn-d4ic4a0t0espmoirntiabsliezse.. Features new Color Plus oxide. An " S"
"Scotch" Master Broadcast U-Matic Series IMBU) provides amore rugged, longlife product suitable for repetitive playback and inclement recording situations such as field ( ENG) recording and editing applications. Other features are the same as the Standard Series UCA Videocassettes except MBU cassettes also feature the new Color Plus oxide. All MBU's are packaged in adistinctive two-tone shell that affords immediate identification, plus visual access to tape pack during crucial editing operations.
Designated for use where playing time is key factor. Features new Color Plus oxide. These Extended Play U-Matics use an extra thin polyester backing. Tape machines that are poorly aligned or with incorrect tensioning can cause damage to this product. Performance of this UMatic on such equipment cannot be guaranteed by 3M.
"Scotch" Brand Color Plus Beta and VHS Format ( 1/2") Videocassettes, with proprietary back treatment, feature improved color, broadband signal-to-noise, improved RF output, low RF output, low dropouts, stop motion capability, and very low head wear. " Scotch" Beta and VHS Formats are compatible with all 1/2" videocassette recorders and playback units.
These items permit in the field reloading of damaged cassettes. The extra rugged Color Plus MBU Series U-Matic tape is supplied in the 18S ( for Minis) and 30- minute ( std. size) reload kits. The 60-minute reload kits use UCA U-Matic tape.
No. 361
No. 361 is longitudinally oriented video tape with many outstanding advantages, including a heavy duty binder system, long wearing oxide, improved signal-to-noise ratio, excellent audio and video output characteristics, low dropout count, a highly conductive backside coating which offers extended head life. Backside treatment of the film precludes interlayer
slippage, scratching, and the attraction of foreign debris. No. 361 uses athin coat of black oxide applied to a1mil polyester base.
No. 479 No.480
No. 479-1" helical video tape is aspecial application tape that can only be used with " high density" video recorders such as the Bosch-Fernseh, Ampex VPR-1 and 2, Sony BVH-1000 and other machines having similar record/erase capabilities.
No. 480-1" helical video tape is an improved broadcast video tape providing better signal-tonoise, color- noise qualities and virtually eliminates head friction. For use on all recorders capable of using 479 mastering/broadcast video tape ( type Crecorders).
"SCOTCH" VIDEOCASSETTES
Color Plus U-Matics
Color Plus Mini U-Matics Color Plus MBU Series U-Matics
Color Plus Extd. Play U-Matics U- Do- It Reload Kits
Catalog Number
UCA-5 CP C125 or C114 UCA-10 CP C125 or C114 UCA-20 CP C125 or C114 UCA-30 CP C125 or C114 UCA-60 CP C125 or C114
UCA-10S C124 or C120 UCA-20S C124 or C120
Mini MBU-5S C124 or C120 Mini MBU-18S C124 or C120 Reg MBU-30 C125 or C114 Reg MBU-45 C125 orC114
UCA-30S C124 or C120 UCA-75 C125 or C114
U- Do- It 18S ( C.P. MBU Tape) U-Do-lt 30 ( C.P. MBU Tape) U-Do-lt 45(C.P. MBU Tape) U- Do -1t60 ( C.P. UCA Tape)
Playing Time
5 10 20 30
so
10 20
5
a1o8
45
30 75
18 30 45
so
Reel Size
Units Per Carton
10 10 10 10 10
10 10
10 10 10 10
10 10
10 10 10 10
List Price
$ 22.64 23.06 26.22 27.20 38.78
$ 21.58 24.34
S 24.04 27.10 33.34 40.60
5 37.94 56.78
S 18.96 23.86 29.38 31.36
TAPE ACCESSORY DESCRIPTIONS
B
At end of catalog number indicates in box.
R-139 1" xEr phenolic NAB hub reel with aluminum
flanges.
R-148 1/2" x 5-1/8" plastic reel designed for EIAJ VTRs.
R-153 1/2" x 7-1/8" plastic reel designed for EIAJ VTRs.
R-179 Flat flange reel in box in sizes for 9" or 10-1/2" reels.
sËl*swl*swl*swl*sw
"SCOTCH" HELICAL OPEN REEL VIDEO
Ampex VPR-1, 2, Sony BVH-1000, Video Memory VM-1000
479-1-1630-R179B 479-1-3170-R179B 479-1-4610-R179B
1" x9" 1" x9" 1" x10-1/2"
5
$ 90.14
5
135.78
5
205.18
R-174 1" x9" 3-window reel with precision hub without friction ring.
C-87 High impact shipping container for 1" NAB hub reels to 10-1 / 2" diameter.
C-114 Plastic album U-Matic format videocassette storage box.
Bosch-Fernseh, ( BCN), IVC, Philips, RCA, RCA, BCN-20 Portable
Ampex VPR-1, 2, Sony BVH-1000, Video Memory VM-1000
Bosch-Fernseh, ( BCN), IVC, Philips, RCA, BCN-20 Portable
Sony, Panasonic, Concord EIAJ / STD Recorders
IVC 800(B Et H, RCA, GPL, Chester)
479B-1-1630-R179B 479B-1-3170-R179B 479B-1-4635-R179B
480-1-1630-R179B 480-1-3170-R179B 480-1-4610-R179B
480B-1-1630-R179B 480B-1-3170-R179B 480B-1-4635-R179B
361-1/2-1200-R148B 361-1/2-2400-R153B
361-1-2150-R139B
62
1" x9" 1" x9" 1" x10-1/2" 1" x9" 1" x9" 1" x10-1/2"
1" x9" 1" x9" 1"x 10-1/2" 1/2" x5-1/8" 1/2" x7-1/8"
1" x8"
5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 10 10
5
5 90.14 135.78 205.18
$ 84.65 142.57 214.44
S 94.65 142.57 214.44
S 37.51 63.64
S 84.65
C-116 High impact shipping container for 2" x10-1/2" Cushion flange NAB hub reels only.
C-120 Plastic album Mini-U-Matic format videocassette storage box.
C-122 High impact shipping container for the R-179 reel ( 10-1/2").
C-124 Plastic hanger system shipper/storage case for
Mini-U-Matic format videocassettes. C-125 Plastic hanger system shipper/storage case for
Standard U-Matic format videocassettes. C-127 Plastic hanger system shipper/storage case for
Beta format videocassettes. C-128 Plastic hanger system shipper/storage case for
VHS format videocassettes. C-130 Plastic album Beta format videocassette
storage box, equal to "A" T/2" packaging.
C-131 Plastic album VHS format videocassette stor-
age box, equal to " A" 1/2" packaging.
VR-88
C-132 High impact, " Fire Retardant" shipping case for the 9" R-179 reels.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCOTCH 3M CO.
MAGNETIC AUDIO/VIDEO PRODUCTS DIVISION 3M Center - 223, 5S-01
St. Paul, MN 55144 (612) 733- 1110
Hanger System
You're looking at the videocassette case design that's triggered arevolution in 3/4" videocassette storage and handling - it's at the focal point of the all new " Scotch" Hanger System from 3M Company. The shipper/storage case ( patents applied for) represents awhole new design concept based upon the idea that hanging your videocassettes not only is the best way to protect them from damage, but it will organize your storage area and simplify the way you transport videocassettes. So "hang on" with the " Scotch" Hanger System.
VIDEO TAPE REELS/ ACCESSORIES
SHIPPER/STORAGE CASE ( C-125) This sturdy C-125 box can be labeled and mailed with no other packaging needed. Its unique hanging hook and slide-snap latch are only two of the features of this case that opens to reveal arecess for storing the record- lockout button when you are not using the record mode. The stabilizer bars on the box bottom and the expandable, spinehandle simplify storage and retrieval in any situation.
CASE HANGER ( CHB-4) This extruded aluminum bar comes in four-foot lengths and can be cut to fit doors, desk backs, cabinets, shelves, walls, etc. Standard screws or bolts anchor them securely to concrete, wood, plaster or metal surfaces, and when properly mounted, the bars can maintain weights of up to 240 pounds. We call it the Case Hanger.
CASSETTE HANGER ( CHH-10) In order to handle unboxed, bulk videocassettes, 3M has designed the Cassette Hanger to snap in and out of the case hanger bar providing ahook on which to place the videocassette. The Cassette Hanger is made of heavy duty plastic and will fit any case hanger bar, whether it is attached to ashelf, door, wall or mobile cart. Another flexible adaptation of "Scotch" Hanger System.
SIX-PACK HANGER (6 PH) What else could you call asturdy, aluminum frame that easily totes up to 6videocassettes, with the case or without, than the " Six- Pack Hanger"? Simple to carry, lightweight and yet durable, the " Six- Pack Hanger" can be adapted to hold bulk cassettes by adding two Cassette Hangers and two Cassette Hanger Clips on the center bar.
CHB-4 Bar 6- PH Six- Pack CHH-10 Plastic Hanger
C-124 C-125 C-127 C-128
Mini-U-Matic Hanger shipper/storage case Std. U-Matic Hanger shipper/storage case Beta Hanger shipper/storage case VHS Hanger shipper/storage case
PER CTN
CASE LOT
25 $5.12
1
7.78
50 Bags 500 Units
60
2.55 3.31
50
3.31
50
3.80
50
3.80
VIDEO TAPE REELS AND ACCESSORIES CATALOG NUMBER
SIZE
PER CTN
Empty Metal Video Reefs In Box
R139B-1-8 R159B-1-12-1/2 CFR
1" x8" 1" x12-1/2" CFR
5 2
Empty Cardboard Video Boxes
VR-1-10-1/2 VB-2-10-1 / 2
1" x10-1/2"
5
2" x10-1/2"
2
Empty ( blue) High Impact Shipping and
C87-1-10-1/2 C116-2-10-1/2
1" x10-1/2" NAB
5
2" x10-1/2" CFR
2
Storage Containers
The C116 shipping case must be used with the Cushion
Flange 2" reels ( R150).
Fire Retardant Empty Plastic Shipper/
C129-1-10-1/2
1" x10-1/2" for
5
Flat Flange R179
Storage Cases
The C122 shipping case is recommended for use with
Cushion Flange 10-1/2" reels such as R179.
C132-1-9
1" x9" for
Flat Flange R179
5
Empty Videocassette Boxes
Head Cleaning Videocassettes
Empty Plastic Spot Reels In Box Empty 1/2" Video Reels In Vinyl Box Empty Vinyl Video Box Aluminized Splicing Tape - . 5mil Aluminized Splicing Tape - . 25 mil
C-114 Album Box C-120 Mini-U-Matic Album Box C-130 Beta Album Box C-131 VHS Album Box
UCS-HC ( Mini; C-124; recorded) B-HC IBeta; Hanger box; unrecorded) V-HC ( VHS; Hanger box; unrecorded)
VRB-2-6-1/2 VRB 1-6-1/2
2" x6-1/2" 1" x6-1/2"
R148B-1/2-5-1/8 R153B 1/2 7-1/8
1/2" x5-1/8" 1/2" x7-1/8"
VB 1/2-5-1/8
1/2" x5-1/8"
·392-1/4-66 ·392 1/2-66
1/4"x66' 1/2'' x66'
'393 1/4-66 ·393-1/2-66
1/4"x66' 1/2" x66'
·Splicing Tapes Nos. 392 and 393 are recommended for
all video splicing requirements and are mandatory for
use on all controlled wind video tapes.
50 70 100 100
2 10 10
12 20
10 10
10
12 12
12 12
Diagonal Stripe Hold- Down Tape
8125 1/4-90
1/4" x90'
12
Universal Blank Labels
UMAL Mini Album Box Label UMSL Mini Videocassette Label
500 500
USSL Standard Videocassette Label
500
USAL Standard Album Box Label UUSL C-125/4 Shipper Label UHAL 1/2" Album Box Label
500 500 500
UHCL 1/2" Shipper Label UBSL Beta Videocassette Label UVSL VHS Videocassette Label
500 500 500
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CASE LOT PRICE S 29.85 39.94 7.91 8.15 16.85 27.24
19.28
17.29 3.31 3.31 3.80 3.80
32.27 24.43 25.55
4.17 3.81 5.22 5.66 2.92 4.80 7.18 4.80 7.18
5.20 100 + .21/Labe .21/Labe .21/Labe .21/Labe .21/Labe .21/Labe .21/Labe .21/Labe .21/Labe
VR -89
PULSING VIDEORASERR
Erases Industrial
and Broadcast quality video tapes
Industrial and Broadcast video tapes are the hardest to erase. The VP- 2001's powerful pulsing action removes all traces of video and audio signals, and
even time codes from all grades of 3 /4 "U-Matic and 1" and 2" video tape. Hand-held, weighs just 4 pounds. With thermal cutoff switch.
VIDEORASER SPECIFICATIONS
NEW
Voltage
Cycles
Current
Diameter ( in.)
Height ( in.)
Weight ( lbs.)
Magnetic Flux
'open field gauss
alc4,
Auto- Cutoff
Pulsing Feature
UL Listed
Price
data processing
VX-1401
115 V 60 Hz
8 A 43 /4 41 /2 4.0 1400
VX-1402
230 V 50 Hz
4 A 43 /4 41/2 4.0 1400
No No No $52.00
No No No $ 65.00
consumer video
VX-1601
115 V 60 Hz 12 A
43 /4 41/2 4.0 1600
VX-1602
230 V 50 Hz
6 A 43 /4 41/2 4.0 1600
Yes No Yes $65.00
Yes No No $ 74.00
professional video
VP- 2001
115 V 60 Hz
10 A 43 /4 41/2 4.0 2000
Yes Yes No $165.00
For -ower-powered requirements, including erasing data. Sonar makes the VX-1401 Dataraser"". All prices are in U.S. Dollars and are subject to change.
i«i i,m iu.a,uruii'adI3
3000 Stirling Road, Hollywood, FL 33021 305-981-8800
Voice, Video and Data Communications Products and Services
VA-90
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEO RASER®
no.E9iFumear BRAND
loom. « loot
e.
ill
aekir
u,C.CMCM 0011VeM 9f,.. '
OWED MO%
Erases high grade videocassettes
The Vdeoraser Model VX-1601 erases VHS and Beta videocassettes in seconds for better, cleaner recordings! Reduces wear on expensive video recording heads. Erases regular, High Grade, and Extra High Grade tape. UL Listed with thermal cutoff switch. 4pounds. No home video system is complete without it!
Sonar Radio Corporation has been manufacturing magnetic tape erasers for over 20 years.
With the new Pulsing Videoraser, Model VP- 2001, we now offer 3power levels, addressing the data processing, consumer video, and professional video markets.
Full One-Year Warranty. Your complete satisfaction is guaranteed. All Models are covered by Sonar's Full OneYear Warranty against defects in materials and workmanship.
SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage Cycles Current Diameter ( in.) Height ( in.) Weight ( lbs.) Magnetic Flux
(open field gauss @ ' uinch)
Auto- Cutoff
Pulsing Feature UL Listed Price
Videoraser
VX-1601
115 V 60 Hz
12 A 43 /4 41/2 4.0 1600
VX-1602
230 V 50 Hz
6 A 43/4 41/2 4.0 1600
Yes No Yes $65.00
Yes No No $ 74.00
All prices are in U S. Dollars and are subject to change.
s1111o111n1 maurral:110
3000 Stirling Road, Hollywood, FL 33021 305-981-8800 Voice, Video and Data Communications Products and Services
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-91
SON-Y.
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER/PLAYERS
VP- 5030
VO- 5630
VP- 5030 U-MATIC® PLAYER · PAL/SECAM/NTSC playback
· High- efficiency power supply permits operation on 110- to-220 Volts, 50/60 Hz
· Front- loading tape transport ·Tilt- out control panel
·Aluminum diecast chassis
· Direct drive drum and capstan, and digital servo IC ·High-speed search at 5times normal speed in forward/
reverse
· Still frame capability
· Long pause with automatic tape protection
· Built-in " programmed operation" function allows automatic tape- segment repeat
· End- of- tape automatic rewind
· Optional RF modulator allows playback on ordinary TV receiver
·Optional timer allows unattended, automatic playback start and stop
· Random access/interactive capability · Exclusive data in/out connector for
353CE Automatic Search Controls · External sync input capability
·Weight: 48 lbs. 8oz.
RX-303CE/RX-
·Dimensions: 9-3/8"H x17-5/8"W x20-3/8"D $2500.00
VO -5630 U-MATIC® RECORDER/PLAYER
· PAL/SECAM color recording/playback plus NTSC color playback
· High- efficiency power supply permits operation on 110- to-220 Volts, 50/60 Hz
· Front- loading tape transport ·Tilt- out control panel
·Aluminum diecast chassis · Direct drive drum and capstan, and digital servo IC · High-speed search at 5 times normal speed in
forward/reverse · Still frame capability
· Long pause with automatic tape protection ·Built-in " programmed operation" function allows auto-
matic tape- segment repeat · Dub-In/Dub-Out connectors · End- of-tape automatic rewind ·Audio dubbing capability ·Audio limiter function
· Random access/interactive capability
· Exclusive data in/out connector for RX-303CE/RX353CE Automatic Search Controls
· External sync input capability ·Weight: 51 lbs. 7oz.
· Dimensions: 9-3/8"H x17-5/8"W x20-3/8"D $2950.00
VR-92
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
soNy Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1000
VP-5000 U-matic Player
The most convenient and versatile U-matic player ever made. Up front controls and indicators, an all new front loading tape transport and standard EIA rack mounting head the list of exterior improvements. Inside, there's new technology with advances in the drive compo-
nents, power supply and control circuits.
Features ·New front loading tape transport · Aluminum diecast chassis
·Direct drive for both drum and capstan · Digital servo LSI with " Phi
Square Servo" · DC motor reel servo · x5 forward and reverse
search · Noiseless still -- Fine still picture · 19" rack mountable
·High picture quality · Tilt- out control panel · New switching
regulator power supply provides wide range of voltage and frequency,
with low power consumption -- 45W · Exclusive connector for type RX-303 and RX-353 · Random access/interactive capability · Micro-
computer based logic control
$1895.00
VO -5600 U-matic Recorder
A new generation of U-matic recorder with new all time high levels of performance and flexibility. Totally redesigned around a new front loading tape transport, the unit has asuper- functional, tilt- out control
panel and is 19" rackmountable. New circuitry and components further enhance the reliability and accuracy of video's most relied-on
format.
Features · New front loading tape transport · Aluminum diecast chassis
·Direct drive for both drum and capstan · Digital servo LSI with " Phi
Square Servo" · DC motor reel servo · x5 forward and reverse
search · Noiseless still -- Fine still picture · 19" rack mountable ·High picture quality · Tilt- out control panel · New switching
regulator power supply provides wide range of voltage and frequency,
with low power consumption -- 55 W · Exclusive connector for
RX-353 and RX-303 · Random access/interactive capability · Micro- /
computer based logic control
$2395.00
VO-5800 Videocassette Recorder
Sony expands the upgraded Type 5 U-matic system with another convenient new recorder. Compact and even more lightweight than the VO -5850 Editing Recorder, the VO -5800 offers the same
professional quality and design, with front- loading tape transport, and allows smooth manual editing. It can be used alone; or as aplayer in a
sophisticated, rack- mountable automatic editing system.
· Front loading tape transport · Aluminum diecast chassis · Direct drive of both drum and capstan · Digital servo LSI with " Phi Square
Servo" · DC motor reel servo · Backspace edit capability · Vertical
interval switch between two video inputs · Feeder capability with full RM-440 interface · Bidirex dial search, x1/30 to x5 · U- scan, high
speed picture search ( with RM-440 and KCS tape) · LED tape counter
with mark- in function · Switching regulator power supply provides
wide range of voltage and frequency and low power consumption -- 75W · Noiseless still · 19" rackmountable · Tilt-out control panel ·
High picture quality · Exclusive connector for RX-353 · Random
access/interactive capability · Video Recording: Rotary two-head
helical scan system · External sync lock capability · Color Signal:
Converted subcarrier direct recording · Video Signal System: EIA
standards, NTSC color
$4590.00
VO-5800H High Resolution B/W Videocassette Recorder
The VO -5800H is a High Resolution Monochrome Videocassette
Recorder with over 400 lines of resolution per field ( 525/60 field) compatible with both EIA and non-EIA Standard Signals from 525 to 1125 lines. The unit is equipped for widespread applications in institutions, research and medicine, able to record images from medical diagnostic systems such as X-ray, Ultrasound, Computer Axial Tomography (CAT) Scans and even Positive Emission Tomography ( PET) Scans. The VO -5800H may be used to record special signals from infrared and radar systems and can also be employed as a " ground" player for an airborne VTR.
VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER/PLAYERS
· Front loading tape transport · Aluminum diecast chassis · Direct drive of both drum and capstan · Digital servo LSI with " Phi Square Servo" · DC motor reel servo · Backspace edit capability · Vertical interval switch between two video inputs · Feeder capability with full RM-440 interface · Bidirex dial search, x1/30 to x5 · U-scan, high speed picture search ( with RM-580 and KCS tape) · LED tape counter with mark- in function · Switching regulator power supply provides wide range of voltage and frequency and low power consumption -- 75W · Noiseless still · 19" rackmountable · Tilt-out control panel · Exclusive connector for RX-353 or RX-303 · Random access/ interactive capability · Video Recording: Rotary two- head helical scan system · External sync lock capability · 2audio tracks·Dimensions: 9-3/8"H x17-5/8"W x20-1/2"D ( 237 x446 x518mm) including projecting parts and controls · Weight: 53 lbs. (24kg) $6000.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-93
soNy Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1000
EDITING RECORDER
-matic:
A type
U-MATIC RECORDER
VO-5850 Professional Editing U-Matic Recorder
Features · New front loading tape transport · Aluminum diecast chassis · Drum and capstan direct drive · Digital servo LSI with " Phi Square Servo" · DC motor reel servo · Sophisticated editing with full RM-440 in-
terface ·Bidirex dial search + /- 1/30 ···· x5, 15 dif-
ferent speeds · High speed picture search ( with RM-440
and KCS tape) · LED tape timer with mark- in function · Built-in preroll editing capability · Noiseless still · Accurate editing + /- 2 frames with one
preview · New power supply with switching regula-
tor, wide range of voltage, frequency and low power consumption -- 75W · 19" rackmountable · Loop through video input with 75 Ohm termination switch · 2 video output connectors -- BNC · Tilt- out control panel · High picture quality
Specifications
System Video recording: Rotary two- head helical scan system
Luminance: FM recording
Color signal: Converted subcarrier direct recording
Video signal system: EIA standards, NTSC color
Video
Video Input: VIDEO IN, BNC type, x2 with 75 Ohm termination switch and loop- through output. 1.0 V ( p- p) + 1.0-0.5 V ( p- p), 75 Ohms, unbalanced, sync negative. DUB IN, 8 pin, x1 TV, 8 pin, xl
Video Output: VIDEO OUT, BNC type, x2. 1.0 V ( p- p) + 0.2 V, 75 Ohms, unbalanced, sync negative DUB OUT, 7 pin, x1 TV, 8 pin, x1
Horizontal resolution: Monochrome: 340 lines
Color mode: 260 lines
Signal-to-noise ratio: Monochrome mode: more than 49 dB Color mode: More than 46 dB
Subcarrier: SCIN, BNC type, x1.2 V ( 0.5-3V) (p- p), 75 Ohms, unbalanced, sync, negative
Sync: EXT SYNC ) N, BNC type, x1.4 V 125V) (p- p), 75 Ohms, unbalanced, sync negative Recording level: Automatic and manual
Audio
Audio Input: LINE CH- 1, CH-2 IN, Phono jack, xl in each - 10 dB, 47 KOhms. MIC CH1, CH- 2, Phone jack, x1 in each. - 60 dB, for 600 Ohm microphones TV, 8 pin, x1
Audio Output: LINE CH- 1, CH- 2OUT, Phono jack, x1 in each - 5dB ( with 47 K Ohms load). HEADPHONES, Stereo phone jack, x1 for 8 Ohm headphones Level: Adjustable (- 24 dB to - 46 dB). TV, 8 pin, x1
Signal-to-noise ratio: Better than 48 dB ( at 3% distortion) Both channels 1and 2
Frequency Response: 50 15,000 Hz ( channels 1and 2)
Recording level adjustment: Manual, with audio limiter
Edit
Assemble: Video and audio channel 1 and audio channel 2 ( simultaneously) Insert: Video, audio channel 1and/or audio channel 2 independently ( selectable) Preroll: Possible
Automatic editing: Possible with the RM-440 Automatic Editing Control ( optional) Accuracy: + / - 2frames
Special Instructions
Pause: A still picture is obtained, with long pause function
Search: Possible ( still, and 1/10 to 5 times of normal speed in forward and reverse directions). Picture search is possible with the RM-440 when KCS tape is used
Tracking control: Possible
Skew control: Possible
Sync System: Internal and external Vertical- interval switcher: Internal Dropout compensator: Internal
Tape Transport
Tape speed: 3-3/4 ips ( 9.53 cm/sec) Recording or playback time: 60 min ( with KCA-60) Fast forward and rewind time: Within 4 min (with KCA-60)
Wow and flutter: 0.2% RMS
Tape compatability: U-Matic videocassette tape Usable tape: KCA, KCS type tape
General
Power requirements: 100-120 VAC + /- 10%, 50/60 Hz + /- 10%
Power consumption: 75 W with RM-440
AC OUT: 400 W maximum, unswitched Operating position: Horizontal
Storage temperature: -4°F to + 140°F (- 20° C to + 60°C)
Operating temperature: 41°F to 104°F 15°C to 40°C) Dimensions: 9-3/8"H x 17-5/8"W x 201/2"D ( 237 x 446 x 518mm) including projecting parts and controls
Weight: 55 lb. ( 25 kg)
Supplied accessory: AC power cord Optional Accessories
RM-440 Editing Control Unit Sony CVM and PMV Series Color Video
Monitors Sony DXC Series Color Video Cameras RX-353 Auto Search Control RX-303 Auto Search Control KCS-1C Cleaning Cassette RCC-5F Remote Control Cable VDC-5 Dubbing Cable ( 5m) Monitor Connecting Cables: VMC-3P ( 3m), VMC-5P ( 5 ml, VMC-10P ( 10 m) Video Responder System: VRC-100, VRS100, VRD-100, VRP -100
Price
$ 7395.00
VA- 94
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SON-Y.
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive
Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
VO -6800 PORTABLE VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER/PLAYER For All ENG and EFP Applications
FEATURES · Real Time Tape Counter · Logic Control System · Backspace Editing Capability · Picture Search · Soft Eject · Rain and Dust Proof · RF Modulator · Remote Control Capability
A Video Confidence Head makes it possible to monitor just- recorded images simultaneously when the VO -6800 is in the REC mode. These images can be seen in the camera viewfinder when the return video button on the camera is pressed. This function allows the operator to make sure that what he is shooting is actually being recorded on the tape.
Two NiCad Batteries ( NP- 1) can be installed for longtime battery operation ( approximately two hours for VTR recording or one hour with the Sony DXC-M3/M3A). Since the unit can also be powered by a single battery, continuous recording or playback is possible if two batteries are used in tandem. Pop-up battery compartments are adopted for easy battery replacement.
The Tape Remaining Time can be seen in the camera viewfinder when the return video button is pressed. Eight different indications can be displayed, 15 min, 10 min, 5min, 4min, 3min, 2min, 1min and Tape Before End. ( Accuracy is ±-7seconds when using Sony's KCS-10K/20K Series). This function conveniently lets the operator know just how much shooting time he has left.
A Complete Warning System notifies the operator of recording conditions in three different ways. 1.) LED indicators on the control panel of VTR. 2.) Warning sound ( 1kHz) output to the earphone of the VTR. 3.) Blinking warning lamp in the camera viewfinder. This threefold warning system makes sure the operator knows in advance of any malfunctions so that the recording will come out perfect from the first time.
Picture and Sound Quality A sendust head and XLR connector ( balanced) bring the signal-to-noise ratio to 50dB and widen the frequency response range from 50 to 15,000Hz. Wow and flutter is reduced to amere 0.2%, thanks to ahighly accurate capstan motor.
RF Modulator Using the RFK-634 RF modulator ( option), you can play back tapes on aconventional TV receiver.
Remote Control Capability Using the RM-680 remote control unit ( option), you can control REC, PLAY, F. FWD, REW, PAUSE, and STOP operations. ( The cable can be extended up to 50 meters). VO -6800 Portable U-Matic Recorder/Player $ 3800.00
PORTABLE VCR
SPECIFICATIONS VIDEO Video Recording System: Helical scanning FM recording
Video Heads: Rotary 4- head ( R/P x2, Confi. x2) Video Signal System: EIA standard, NTSC color
Input: Composite, sync, negative 1.0 + 1.0/ -0.5 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced Output: Composite, sync, negative 1.0 -'0.2 Vp-p, unbalanced
Horizontal Resolution: 260 TV lines Signal-to- Noise Ratio: Better than 45dB ( color)
AUDIO Input: MIC: - 60dB, more than 3Kohms, balanced, CAMERA MIC: - 20dBi - 60dB switchable, more than 3Kohms balanced, LINE: ( CH- 1/ L; DUB, CH- 2; R): - 4dB, more than 10 K ohms balanced
Output: LINE: ( CH- 1/ L/ MONI, CH- 2' R): - 4dBm ( at 600 ohm load) balanced, EARPHONE: - 20 to - 33dB ( at 8 ohm load) adjustable.
Signal-to- Noise Ratio: Better than 50dB
Frequency Response: 50 to 15,000 Hz Dimensions: Approx. 10 1/ 4 -W x4 5/8"H x13 3/8-D(258 x117 x 338mm). Not including projecting parts and controls.
Weight: Approx. 12 lbs., 2ozs, ( 5.5kg)
CMA-8 BC-1 WA R M-680 AH -6800 NP- 1 RFK-634
Camera Adaptor AC Adaptor Battery Charger for NP- 1 ; for 4 NP Remote Control Unit Carrying Handle ( hard) Rechargeable Battery RF Modulator
$390.00 300.00 110.00 POR 60.00 POR
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-95
SONY.
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
BETAMAX RECORDER/PLAYERS
SLP -305 Betamax® Player
· Beta I, II and Ill playback capability with automatic mode selection
and LED mode indication · 2head system · Variable speed playback in all Beta modes, Beta I: Still, continuous slow, variable speed play up
to X2 and auto frame advance, Beta II: Still, continuous slow, variable speed play up to X4, Beta Ill: Still, continuous slow, variable speed play up to X6 · BetaScan high speed search in all modes · Repeat/ Auto Stop function · Exclusive connector for RX data · 33- pin remote control connector enhances random access and interactive
applications · Logic controlled tape transport design allows direct switching between tape travel modes · End-of-tape automatic
rewind · Dual audio tracks for playback of stereo or bilingual recording · Direct head drum and capstan drives · Switchable RF
modulator · Soft eject cassette mechanism · Weight: 23 lbs. 13 oz. · Dimensions: 5-7/8"H x15-1/2"W x13-7/8"D
SLP-305
Betamax® Player
$1160.00
SLP-305/RX-303 Betamax® Player w/automatic search
controller .
1510.00
SLP-305/RX-353 Betamax® Player w/ programmable automatic
search controller
1560.00
SLO-325 Betamax® Recorder/Player
·Beta Irecording and Beta I, II and Ill playback capability with automatic mode selection and LED mode indication · Advanced four head system · Variable speed playback in all Beta modes, Beta I: Still, continuous slow, variable speed play up to X2 and auto frame advance Beta II: Still, continuous slow, variable speed play up to X4, Beta Ill: Still, continuous slow, variable speed play up to X6 · BetaScan high speed search in Beta Imode · Repeat/Auto Stop function · Exclusive connector for RX data · 33 pin remote control connector enhances
random access and interactive applications · Logic controlled tape transport design allows direct switching between tape travel modes
·End- of- tape automatic rewind · Dual audio tracks permit stereo or
bilingual recording · Direct head drum and capstan drives · Switchable RF modulator · Soft eject cassette mechanism · Weight: 27 lbs. 2oz. · Dimensions: 5-7/8"H x15-1/2"W x13-7/8"D
SLO-325
Betamax(R) Recorder/Player .
$1650.00
SLO-325/RX-303 Betamax® Recorder/Player w/automatic search
controller
2000.00
SLO-325/RX-353 Betamax® Recorder/Player w/ programmable
automatic search controller
2050.00
SLO -340 Betamax® Portable Videocassette Recorder
The SLO-340 is aportable unit for recording and playing back Betamax videocassettes. It weighs less than 20 lbs., and will record in either color or black and white for up to 90 minutes on its internal lightweight battery pack. The SLO-340 offers all the basic Betamax advantages. Quality recording on smaller, less expensive videocassettes. Lower equipment costs, and the security of equipment proven in the field.
Lower shipping and distribution costs. Simple one- button operation and interchangeability of cassettes.
SLO-340 Betamax® Portable Videocassette Recorder .. .$ 1295.00
SLO-325
SLO-420 Betamax® Videocassette Recorder/Player
·Super- compact size 3-1/8"H x 17"W · Front- loading and frontpanel control · Beta II and Ill recording capability plus Beta I, II and III
playback · SwingSearchTM continuous search in forward/reverse at
normal speed, 2times normal speed, 1/5th and 1/10th normal speed, plus slow-motion, frame- by- frame advance and still frame · BetaScan II" search in forward/reverse at 9times ( Beta II) and 15 times
(Beta Ill) normal speed · Linear time counter shows exact tape position in hours, minutes, seconds · Optional Wireless Remote Commander® RMT-312 with recording and speed control functions · Double azimuth head eliminates frame jitter and delivers noisefree slow motion · New Micro Timing Phase Circuitry maintains precise transitions at record/pause and on/off · Tab Marker" elec-
tronic indexing system · Two channel audio · External sync lock capability · Weight: 20 lbs. 12 ozs. · Dimensions: 3-1/8"H x17"W x 13-3/8"D
SLO-420
Sony, Betamax, Beta Hi -Fi, BetaScan, BetaSkipScan, Express Tuning and Remote Commander are registered trademarks of Sony Corp. of America.
SLO-420 Betamax® Videocassette Recorder/Player
$1340.00
VR-96
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
soNy Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1000
BETAMAX RECORDER/PLAYER
Typical Betamax® Editing System
D D o oo DODO
SLO-383 EDITING BETAMAX RECORDER/PLAYER
SLO-383 EDITING BETAMAX® VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER/PLAYER
· Direct drive drum and capstan · Rotary erase heads, vertical interval switching and framing servo
system · Interfaces with RM-440 Automatic Editing Control Unit · BetaScan® high-speed search ·Playback at 1/20th to 2times normal speed in forward/reverse · Insert and assemble editing capabilities ·External sync- lock connector plus built-in sync- signal generator
· Manual audio recording level control plus audio limiter function ·Dub-Ini Dub- Out connectors allow Beta to Beta, U-matic to Beta or
Beta to U-matic tape duplication
·Soft cassette eject mechanism · Random access/interactive capability ·Exclusive data connector for RX-353 / 303 Automatic Search Con-
trols ·Weight: 34 lbs. 3oz. · Dimensions: 7-1/2"H x 15-1/2"W x 16-3/8"D
The SLO-383 is an editing Betamax recorder/player with new features that make the Betamax system even more effective for education and
training, sales demonstration, corporate communications and a variety of other uses.
New Beta-Scan high-speed picture search ability helps you find what you want while viewing coherent picture at up to 15 times normal in the forward mode and up to 10 times normal in reverse ( average speed in forward and reverse is 8times normal).
The SLO-383 offers full editing capability, including edit preview, when used with the RM-440 Automatic Editing Controller. Video, Audio 1or Audio 2may be selected independently for insert editing, or handled simultaneously in assembly editing. Dubbing connectors let
you work easily in both Beta and U-Matic formats.
The design of the SLO-383 assures top- rate performance. Direct- drive
power for both head drum and capstan maintain precise tape
alignment and smooth play, with video signal-to-noise ratio at 45 dB in
color mode.
$2335.00
SLO -383PAC
Contains 2SLO-383, 1RM-440, 1VDC-5 and 2RCC5F
$5945.00
RM-440 EDITING CONTROLLER
SLO-383 EDITING BETAMAX RECORDER/PLAYER
Betamax® Editing System (A/B Switch)
Li I I
C00000 000000
PV1e8200M11
V0-5850 00 0000 00 00oow. 0000 0 0=
0.00 0000
H
Oa o oo
k!---1:10 oo
71L0·383
IN VAUCDSI·O5c0SrrW0.IoVTICDHEEORAND
OCICIL 0000
o
00
\10-5850 OUT
00000. 0000 0
0.00 0000 0
° 0
RC1O1N1T-5R5O5LMLUELRTI REMO;TEDO RSeELeOEvCeT0VO0TR0R00
II [11 c= ni 0 0,0 0
RIO-440
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VA-97
S
N. y Sony Drive
Park Ridge, NJ 07656
Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1000
CONTROLLERS/INTERFACE
RM -440 Automatic Editing Control Unit
· Interfaces with both U-matic Editing Recorder/Players and Betamax
Editing Recorder/Players, allowing U-matic to U-matic, Beta to Beta or Beta to U-matic editing
·Edit point memory system memorizes the edit- in points for aplayer and a recorder and 1edit- out point for either machine
· Insert and assemble editing capabilities
· Preview function allows rehearsal before actual edit is made · Review function allows instant edit review
·Return/jump function: in preview mode, tapes return to edit- in point; in review, tape fast forward to a point 5 seconds before the
cutout point, then returns to normal speed to review edit- out section · Butt edit and trim edit functions
·Cue- Out connector provides cue signal for camera recording and
computer generated graphic insertion
·Automatic safety pause release
·Weight: 4 lbs. 14 oz.
· Dimensions: 3-1/8"H x 15-3/8"W x8-3/4"D
$1770.00
RX-353 Programmable Auto Search Control
· Hand-held remote keyboard
· Memorizes locations of up to 63 programs and commands automatic playback of any 8 segments in any sequence
·Compatible with most Betamax and U-matic units
· Functions include automatic repeat plus skip and return
·Segment data recording capability for automatic playback retrieval
·Timer- activated programmable operating capability with Betamax and U-matic units
·Weight: 1lb. 5oz.
·Dimensions: 1-1/2"H x3-5/8"W x7-1/8"D
$400.00
RX-303 Programmable Auto Search Control
· Hand-held remote keyboard
· Memorizes locations of up to 63 programs and commands automatic playback of any 8 segments in any sequence
· Compatible with most Betamax and U-matic units
· Functions include automatic repeat plus skip and return ·Weight: 1lb. 2oz.
·Dimensions: 1-1/2"H x3-5/8"W x7-1/8"D
$350.00
IF-500 Multiple Interface Box
· Institutional and broadcast equipment combination capability allows institutional VCRs to be controlled from broadcast equipment and
institutional editing or remote controllers to be used with broadcast VCRs
·Preroll Time Selection from 0to 15 seconds in convenient 1second increments
·REF Video In signal for greater editing accuracy ·Rack mountable in EIA standard 19" racks ·A separate IF- 500 is required for each combination of broadcast and
institutional units
·Weight: approx. 15.5 lbs. · Dimensions: 3-3/4"H x 19"W x 11-7/8"D
Accessories Supplied ·AC power cord ·Rack mount kit ( 2brackets, 4 screws, 4washers) ·Operation/service maintenance manual
Audio Cables ·RK-5XLRF ( 16', XLR female -phono) ·RK-5XLRM ( 16', XLR male -phono)
Note: Separate connections are required for each combination of broadcast and institutional units.
Note: Equipment functions are restricted by the connecting
equipment.
$1150.00
JI
tiOIN Y .on,
--`e%NNl·e!A·
RM-440
e II all
a · Be sir
RX-303
RX-353
le seam is
IF 500 .411111111111.
Videocassette Cables
RCC-5C
RCC-5E RCC-5F RCC-05ET
RCC-15FT SGC-5 VDC-5 VMC-220A
16' remote control extension cable for RM-410, RM-300, RM-430, RX-303, RX-353, IF- 500;
Shipping Weight 2lbs. 4oz. 20 Pin to 33 pin cable for VO -2860A, VP- 2260 to
RM-440, IF- 500; Shipping Weight 2lbs. 4oz ' 33 pin cable for SLO-383 or VO -5850, RM-440 or
1F-500; Shipping Weight 2lbs. 4oz 33 pin to 20 pin conversion cable for 20 pin VTR to RM-500/ 580, 1.5', IF- 500; Shipping Weight 2lbs. 4oz Extension Cable for RCC-5F, 50'; Shipping
Weight 4lbs. 2oz. BNC-UHF coaxial cable, 15'; Shipping Weight 13 oz
Video dubbing cable for VO -5850, SLO-383, 15'; Shipping Weight 14 oz Adaptor cable for SL-2000, multi- connector w/
video in/out ( pin plug), audio in/out ( mini plug); Shipping Weight 7oz
$105.00 110.00 110.00
58.00 175.00
13.00 50.00
35.00
Videocassette Accessories
AH -220 DA -500
SL-2000 Hard handle; Shipping Weight 8oz. . . $ 20.00
Video/Audio distributor 1input/5 outputs.
Shipping Weight 13 lbs. 7oz.
700.00
LC- 230 FA- 20
SL-2000 soft carrying case; Shipping Weight 2lbs. 3oz
Timer recording/playback adaptor for U-Matics; Shipping Weight 4oz
60.00 6 00
RFK-634 Switchable CH3 / CH4 RFmodulator for Type V
U-Matics; Shipping Weight 1lb. 8oz.
100.00
VCS- 500 Video/Audio switcher w/5 inputs; Shipping
Weight 15 lbs. 3oz.
1250.00
VA-98
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
S ON Y , Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656
Sony Video Communication
(201) 930-1000
U-MATIC EDITING SYSTEM
UNITS SHOWN ·2VO -5850 U-matic Editing Recorder/Players ·RM-440 Automatic Editing Control Unit
FOR COMPLETE DETAILS, SEE INDIVIDUAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS.
U-MATIC DUPLICATION SYSTEM
UNITS SHOWN ·1VO -5850 U-matic Editing Recorder/Player ·5VO -5800 U-matic Recorder/Players ·DA -500, VCS- 500, RM-555, RM-500 ·Waveform Monitor/Vectorscope · 12" Color Monitor
FOR COMPLETE DETAILS, SEE INDIVIDUAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS.
FOR RECORDER
T coHra RIS'-500 REMOTE
UNIT
EXPV,,A ID B IL 1.0, E 20.V. TR'. Sp
Mesas MUL11 REMOTE CONTROLLER EXPANDABLE
`VO-5800
r I
IN
, DA 500 VIDEO AND AUDIO
DISTRIBUTOR VIDEO AND AUDIO SIGNALS
1
VO- 5800 I
vassoo I
REMOTE CONTROL SIGNAL
U-MATIC SYSTEMS
II=
11,00
LO (MD vii-stsso
oC)
SLO-383
VCS400 VCE0 AND AUDIO WATCHER
000 0
Ihc( T ."0 0 0000 0 0
Neese MULTI REMOTE I
CONTROLLER
RI/I-V5 VTR
SELECTOR
11:1=7:71_1.1
DOtLpT0io 1D
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-99
S ON-Y.
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
ACCESSORIES
1,0NY
ON Y
I
RM-V5
SON Y
RM-580
¡jIÍI .7 is
RM-500
Type 5Accessories
A whole family, six in number, of system accessories especially designed to enhance the flexibility and versatility of the new Type 5 U-matic equipment. These highly compatible units can also be teamed in a variety of different combinations to further expand their capabilities.
RM -580 Remote Control Unit
· Full function remote control with Bidirex search dial · Functions: STOP, F.F., PLAY, REW, PAUSE, SEARCH ( Bidrex Dial), REC, EDIT, PRE- ROLL · LED tape timer, includes frame counts · DC operation ( power supplied from VTR) · Pre- roll start jack for remote start · Cable length 3m ( 10 ft) can be extended to 18m ( 60 ft)
$650.00
RM -500 Remote Control Unit
· Basic function remote control · Functions: STOP, F.F., PLAY, REW, PAUSE, REC, DUB, X5 SEARCH, FORWARD, X5 SEARCH
REVERSE · DC operation ( power supplied from VTR) · Cable length:
3m ( 10 ft) can be extended to 18m ( 60 ft)
$197.00
4/0j,",, itellltr"
i_llt1674.
RM-555
, 881
VCS- 500
RM -555 Multi -Unit Remote Controller
·Simultaneous control with RM-500 or RM-580: Up to 5 VTR's
controlled simultaneously; Up to 4 RM-555's can be connected in series for control of up to 20 VTR's · Sequential record/playback with DA -500 or VCS- 500: Up to 5 VTR's can be controlled to record or
playback in one sequence or in continuous sequences; Timer operation capability enables unattended operation · Individual
control with VCS- 500 and RM-V5: Any 1of up to 5 VTR's can be selected with the RM-V5 for control by an RM-500, RM-580 or
RM-440. VCS- 500 will select appropriate video and audio outputs. RM-300 or RX-303 / RX-353 can be used for random access multi- VTR
operation
$1890.00
DA -500 Video and Audio Distributor
·1video input ( BNC), 2channel audio input RCA and 1dub input ( 7
pin) · 5outputs of each input · Individual direct outputs of each input
permit branching to additional distributors · Single input can be
expanded to amaximum of 20 outputs with up to 4DA -500's · Power
requirements: 120 V AC + /- 10%, 20W
$700.00
RM -V5 VTR Selector
·Up to 5VTR's can be selected with RM-555 · 1out of 5selection with VCS- 500 · Selection can be expanded to 1out of 1-4 or 1out of 5-9 using VCS- 500 group selector switch · Remote cable length 3m (10 ft) with 20 pin connector can be extended up to 50m ( 160 ft)
$230.00
VCS -500 Video and Audio Switcher
·5video inputs ( BNC), 2channel audio ( RCA) and 2dub- in inputs ( 7
pin) · 1 video output ( BNC), 2 channel audio output ( RCA) and dub- out ( 7 pin) · 1sync input ( BNC) and 5sync outputs ( BNC) for external sync- lock operation · Vertical interval switching · Interface with RM-V5 or RM-555 · Dual VCS- 500's can be used for control of up to 9 inputs · Power consumption: 20 W
SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: Power Consumption: Storage Temperature: Operating Temperature: Operating Position: Dimensions:
Weight: Cable Length:
RM-580
6.8 V DC (supplied from VTR)
2 0 W
- 20 °C to + 60 °C ( - 4°F to + 140°F)
0°C to + 40 °C (+ 32 °Fto + 104 °F)
Free
21/ 2 " X 17" x 5%" (HWD) 62mm x 424mm x 131mm ( HWD)
35 lb ( 1.6 kg) including cable
3m (can be extended up to 18m with optional cables)
RM-500
6.8 V DC (supplied from VTR)
RIA -V5
5.0 V DC (supplied from VTR)
RM-555
6.8 V DC (supplied from VTR)
1.2 W
0.5 W
6.0 W
- 20 °C to + 60 °C (- 4°F to + 140°F)
0°C to + 40 °C (+ 32 °Fto + 104 °F)
Free
-20 °C to + 60 °C (- 4°F to + 140 °F)
0°C to + 40 °C (+ 32 °Fto + 104°F)
Free
-20 °C to + 60 °C (- 4°F to + 140 °F)
0°C to + 40 °C (+ 32 °Fto + 104 °F)
Horizontal
31/ 2 "x 81/ 2 "x 11/ 2 " (HWD) 87mm x 212mm x 38mm ( HWD)
31/ 2 "x 81/ 2 "x 11/ 2 " (HWD) 87mm x 212mm x 38mm ( HWD)
31/ 2 "x 19" x 11" (HWD) 87mm x 480mm x 280mm ( HWD)
2.0 lb. (0.9 kg) including cable
17lb. (0.7 kg) including cable
12.8 lb. ( 5.8 kg)
3m ( can be extended up to 18m with optional cables)
3m ( can be extended up to 50m with optional cables)
3m ( can be extended up to 18m with optional cables)
DA -500
120 V AC ±10%, 60 Hz
20.0 W
-20 °C to + 60 °C (- 4°F to + 140°F)
0°C to + 40 °C (+ 32 °Fto + 104 °F)
Horizontal
31/ 2 " X 19" x 11" (HWD) 87mm x 480mm x 280mm ( HWD)
13.4 lb (6.1 kg)
VCS- 500
120 V AC ±10%. 60 Hz
20.0 W
- 20 °C to + 60 °C (- 4°F to + 140 °F)
0°C to + 40 °C (+ 32°F to + 104°F)
Horizontal
31/ 2 "x 19" x 11" (HWD) 87mm x 480mm x 280mm ( HWD)
15.2 lb. (6 9 kg)
VA- 100
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
S
1NT le" Sony Drive
n' Park Ridge, NJ 07656
Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1000
VIDEODISC PLAYER
LDP- 180 VIDEODISC PLAYER
FEATURES Semiconductor Diode Laser Pick- Up LDP- 180 employs a semiconductor diode laser to ensure dependability, long life, and compact construction.
Non- Contact Read System Laser scanning system permits unlimited use of still frame and repeat functions because signals are picked up without physical disc contact, thereby eliminating chance of disc deterioration.
Picture Clarity LDP- 180 VideoDisc System produces clear, sharp and super- stable picture with the use of direct frequency modulation.
Front- Loading Design Front- loading design for space saving and easy disc loading.
Superb Sound High fidelity sound reproduction adopting CX noise reduction system.
Highly Reliable Design Special LSIs are incorporated to provide operation and quality you can rely on.
External Control LDP- 180 can be controlled externally
through the I/O port on the back of the
unit LDP- 180
$ 1100.00
Optional Accessories
RMT- 180 Remote Control Unit $70.00
IF- 180 Interface Box IF- 180 provides interactive capability between LDP- 180 & amicrocomputer having RS- 232C interface.
RMT-180 Multi- Function Remote Control Unit ( optional) All the functions of LDP- 180 can be controlled using remote control unit either in awired or wireless mode. · Chapter number search · Frame number search
(CAV discs only) · Time number search
(CLV discs only) · Chapter stop · Swing search
(CAV discs only) · Memory review play · Headphone can be used in a
wired mode
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Disc format:
Laser vision
Pickup method: Laser beam ( reflective)
Laser:
Semiconductor diode laser
Maximum playing time: 12-inch standard play disc (CAV) 2: 12-inch extended play disc (CLV)*s: 8-inch standard play disc (CAV): 8-inch extended play disc (CLV):
30 min/side 60 min/side 14 min/side 20 min/side
Spindle revolution: CAV: 1800 rpm CLV: 1800 rpm (inner circumference) to 600 rpm (outer circumference)
Power requirements: AC 120 V, 50/60 Hz
Power consumption: 33 W
Dimensions: 16 5/8" x4 3/4"x 16 3/8 (WxHx D)
420°120 x415 mm(WxHxD)
Weight:
12.4 kg (27 lb 5oz)
Operating temperature: 41° to 95°F ( 5° to 35 °C I
Operating humidity:
25% to 90%
Storage temperature: -- 4° to 140°F (- 20° to 60 °C)
·1 IF- 180 WILL BE RELEASED IN Jan. 85.
*2 CAV: Constant Angular Velocity '3 CLV: Constant Linear Velocity
RMT- 180
Remote controi system: Wireless (infrared) or wired
Power requirements: Battery Size AAA x2 ( IEC battery designation R03) included
Dimensions: 33/8· x13/16"x 73/8" (Wxl-lx C) 84 x29 x187 mm (W xHx D)
Weight -
250 g (9oz) including batteries
Operating temperature: 41° to 95°F ( 5° to 35°C )
Operating hum dity:
5to 90%
Storage temperature: --4° to 140°F (-20° to 60°C)
VIDEO Signal:
EIA standards, NTSC color
Otuput:
1.0 Vp-p ±0.1 Vp-p. 75 ohms unbalanced, sync negative
Resolution: 350 lines (color)
Signal-to-noise ratio . 42 dB
VHF output: Channel 3or 4 (switchable), 75 ohms. unbalanced
AUDIO Output Line out: Less than 3.3 kohms
650 mV nominal ( 1kHz 100% MOD 50 kohms terrnmated)
Signal-to-noise ratio: Better than 70 dB (with CX noise reduction system on)
Frequency resoonse: 20 Hz to 20 kHz
CONNECTIONS
Video Out (BNC type) VHF in ( Ftype) VHF Out (Ftype) Audio Line Out (CH1 and CH2 separately) External control (24 pins, amphenol type) Remote control jack ( DIN 8pins)
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES 75 ohm antenna cable with F-type connectors (2m)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-101
SONY".
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive
Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
VIDEODISC PLAYERS
LDP- 2000 SERIES
LDP- 2000 SERIES VIDEODISC PLAYERS
The new Sony LDP- 2000 Series of fast, internally expandable videodisc players combines random access video, analog and digitally compressed audio and external computer control for unprecedented multimedia and communications capabilities.
The LDP- 2000 Series is the result of Sony's new, integrated systems approach to videodisc player design. This is manifested, on the one hand, by significant improvements of individual functions. The players, for instance, are extremely fast: capable of accessing any frame in 1.5 seconds or less. On the other hand, with the LDP- 2000 Series Sony is introducing the concept of planned internal expandability for videodisc players.
To enable users to select the level of player capability best suited to their needs, the LDP -2000 players are available in five different configurations. Upgrading from one configuration to another is achieved by the simple addition of boards making additional wiring or add-ons unnecessary.
LDP -2000/1
In its most basic form, the LDP -2000 is a linear ( Level 1) player
controlled by an external computer. It features built-in, industry
standard RS- 232C computer interface port and switchable baud rates of 9600, 4800, 2400 and 1200.
LDP- 2000/1
S1,690.00
LDP- 2000/2
LDP- 2000/1 ' Control Expansion Board ( DB-2010)
The addition of DB-2010 board permits the playback of ( Level II)
videodiscs with audio track control programs, including those designed
for Sony LDP -1000 and LDP -1000A disc players. In this configuration,
the player reads the command codes on the disc and stores them in the
expansion board's random access memory ( RAM).
LDP- 2000/2
$ 1,895.00
LDP- 2000/3
LDP- 2000/2 · Parallel Interface Board ( DB-2020)
The LDP- 2000/3 is designed for applications that require the basic features of the LDP- 2000/2 with aparallel interface. The DB-2020 is the IEEE -488 standard interface board for fast data communication between the player and an external computer. The IEEE -488 bus also
permits computer control of up to 15 videodisc players via just one
IEEE- 488 port on an external computer.
LDP- 2000/3
$2,305.00
LDP- 2000/4
LDP- 2000/2 · Computer Data/SFA Board ( DB-2040)
The LDP- 2000/ 4 expands the capabilities of LDP- 2000/2 with the
added dimension of Still Frame Audio ( SFA). SFA is an audio signal
digitally compressed to take up considerably less space on the videodisc, enabling the extension of audio playback while still pictures are
displayed on the monitor. The SFA data are recorded in blocks. One
block consists of 2 to 32 frames or 2 to 40 seconds of audio. In conventional systems, 300 frames are required to record 10 seconds of
audio, and only 30 minutes of playback is possible on one side of adisc.
With the DB-2040 SFA board, however, only 15 frames are needed for
10 seconds of audio. This permits 15 hours of audio playback. In this configuration, SFA can be used either in a standalone mode or
controlled by an external computer via the RS- 232C port.
LDP- 20 3,20 35.000/4
$
LOP- 2000/5
LDP- 2000/1 · DB-2010 · DB-2020 · DB-2040
The fully -configured LDP -2000/5 allows an external computer to read
computer data recorded on avideodisc with the same reliability as a micro floppydisc. Digital data access is achieved via the DB-2010 and
DB-2040 boards. The DB-2020/IEEE-488 bus permits high speed transfer of digital data.
LDP- 2000/5
$ 3,535.00
All of the LDP- 2000 configurations utilize a newly-developed Sony semi-conductor laser. In contrast to the conventional helium -neon gas laser, the new optical block with the diode laser is both smaller and designed for higher reliability. An automatic optical block locking mechanism, which is activated when the power is turned off, obviates the need for manual lockdown screws during transportation.
The LDP -2000 players are also mountable on 19" racks with the optional RMM-201 Rack Mount Kit. The motor -driven, front- load videodisc tray on the players is activated manually, by external computer. The players also incorporate CXTM noise reduction system for improved signal-to-noise ratio.
CX ts atrademark of CBS. INC
VR-102
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SONY
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
VIDEODISC PLAYER
LDP- 1000A
LDP -1000A Laser VideoDisc Player
An extremely versatile high density video system utilizing the compact, convenient videodisc. An expanded RAM and the option of Still Frame Audio make this system perfectly suited for interactive
video uses, including avast number of training, storage, educational and informational applications for business and industry. A wide range
of connectors for external video and computer systems further expand the system's potential and it is compatible with its predecessor, the
LDP- 1000.
FEATURES ·Internal microcomputer expands versatility into interactive video applications with programming options that include pre- encoding,
user- entered coding, prompts and indicators · Maximum side- to- side access time of five seconds allows even single frames to be viewed
smoothly in any sequence desired · Storage capacity of 54,000 frames per 12" disc provides densest storage medium in existence · Laser scanning system permits unlimited use of still frame or
segment repeat because signals are " read" without physical disc contact, thereby avoiding disc erosion and signal deterioration · Durable discs retain " like new" playback quality that is unaffected by normal handling or minor surface scratches · Sony Laser VideoDisc system produces clear, sharp, super- stable pictures of excellent color quality · Dual audio channels permit separate track audio recording/ playback for bilingual or multiple specialized audiences · Built-in, system- oriented connections provide future flexibility by anticipating links with external video equipment and computers · Detachable remote control provides both wireless or wired control of all functions ·On- screen video index display confirms function selected, current disc location and address requested plus prompting the writer during
control instruction input. The index location on the screen can be moved as the viewer desires, left or right and up or down · Variable
playback modes include SCAN, FAST, SLOW, STILL, REPEAT and STOP in both forward and reverse plus INTERRUPT, SKIP and REVIEW · Semi- automatic functions include frame search, segment search, and memory search plus segment and frame repeats of 1to 15
times each, or infinitely · Playback of CAV and CLV discs with automatic sensing of proper operating mode · Compact size requires less space and reduced weight cuts shipping costs · Swing- out circuit boards simplify servicing and reduce downtime · Addition of the SFA-1000 Still- Frame Audio Adaptor provides up to 40 seconds of audio to accompany a single still frame of video. Over 15 hours of audio can accompany nearly 1400 video still frames on asingle disc
side. Use any mix of voice, music and sound with any combination of still and full- motion video. Operable in either stand-alone mode or under computer control, the SFA-1000 is completely compatible with LDP- 1000 and LDP- 1000A videodisc players and SMC-70 microcomputer systems. Standard connections allow easy upgrading of existing
systems.
Specifications
General ·Pick-up method: Laser beam ( reflective) · Laser: He-Ne ( A = 6328Â) · Maximum playing time: CAV: 30 min/side; CLV: 60 min/ side · Spindle revolution: CAV: 1800 rpm CLV: 1800 rpm (inner circumference) to 700 rpm ( outer circumference) · Power requirements: 120 V AC -4- /- 10%, 60 Hz · AC out: Unswitched 120 V AC, max. 400W · Power consumption: 110 W · Dimensions: 21-3/8" x 6-1/4" x16-3/8" ( WHD) 542 x160 x415 mm ( WHD) · Weight: 43 lb 3
oz ( 19.6 kg)
Video ·Signal: EIA standards, NTSC color · Output: 1.0 V ( p- p) + /- 0.1 V Ip- p), 75 Ohms unbalanced, sync negative · Resolution: Color: 360 lines · Signal-to-noise ratio: 42 dB · VHF output: Channel 3 or 4 (selectable) 75 Ohms, unbalanced · Input signals: SYNC 4 V ( p- p) + /- 1V ( p- p), 75 Ohms; SC 2V ( p- p) + /-0.5 V ( p- p), 75 Ohms
Audio ·Output: LINE OUT: Less than 2K Ohms; 0 + /- 2dBIV11100% MOD, 47 K Ohm load), unbalanced; PHONES: 8 Ohms, - 19 +/- 2 dB IVI · Signal-to-noise ratio: More than 50 dB · Frequency response: 40 Hz to 20 kHz ( + / - 3dB)
Connections ·RS- 232C communication connector for EXT CPU ( 25 pin) · TV connector ( 8 pin) · Video Out · Audio Line Out ( CH 1, Ch 2 separately) · VHF In · VHF Out · SYNC In · SC In · AC Out · Headphone Jack · Remote Control Jack
Data Capacity ·Frame numbers: From 1to 54,000 · Segment numbers: From 1to 63 · Program line numbers: From 000 to 511 ( program 000 to 255 are stored on page 0 and 256 to 511 are stored on page 1). Multiple
programs possible on single disc side · Memory capacity: 5 K Bytes (Up to 5 program segments may be downloaded to memory at one time.) · Inputs: From 1 to 9 · Registers: 4 ( Registers 0, 2 and 3 accessible with pre- encoded discs) · Register value: From 1to 255 ( if 0is entered, the register does not function) · Repeat times: Up to 15
(if 0is entered, playback will continue until the command to stop is entered) · Step speed: 1/1 to 1/255 of normal speed
Remote Control Unit RM-1002 ·Remote control system: Infrared control · Power requirements: 4.5
DC Battery size AA x3 IIEC battery designation R6) · Dimensions: 3-5/8" x1-1/4" x6-1/4" ( WHD) 91 x31 x157 mm ( WHD) · Weight:
10 oz ( 280 g) including batteries · Supplied accessories: 75 Ohm coaxial cable with F- type connectors 11.5m) Remote cable 12m) · Op-
tional accessory: SFA-1000 Still-Frame Audio Adaptor
LDP- 1000A Laser VideoDisc Player RM-1002 Remote Control
$2500.00 129.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-103
SONY
SONY TAPE SALES COMPANY
A DIVISION OF SONY CORP. OF AMERICA
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
1/2" BETA DYNAMICRON
Recording Time
Model
mi (minutes)
r13 II Mill
L-125
15
30
45
L-250
30
60
90
L-500
60
120 180
L-750
90
180 270
L-830
N/A** 200 300
L-125UHG
15
30
45
L-250UHG
30
60
90
L-500UHG
60
120 180
L-750UHG
90
180_ 270
L-830UHG
N/A" 200
"For use only with recorders having BIll mode.
300
Suggested End User Unit Price $ 8.50 9.70 12.65 14.95 17.80 9.20
10.55 13.75 16.70 23.30
1/2" VHS DYNAMICRON
Model
Recording Time
(minutes)
SP
LP
EP
T-60 T-90TT--116200
-_
T-60UHG _T-90UHG _T-120UHG
60 90 120 160 60 90 120
120 180 240 320 120 180 240
180 270 360 480
180 270 360
Suggested End User Unit Price
$11.89
14.25 14.95 23.69 12.69 14.99 16.70
1/2" REEL TO REEL
Model
V-30H V-32 V-35
Reel Size
5' 7 5
Recording Time
(minutes)
30
60 20
Suggested End User Unit Price
S17.70
31.00
15.15
1" HIGH BAND
Model
V- 16-18B V-16-348 V- 16-66B
V- 16-96B V-16-126 V-16-188 V-16-18SP* V-16-34SP* V-16-66SP* V-16-96SP*
'SP - Shipper Case
Reel Size
8" 8" 9"
10 1/ 2 " 11 3 / 4 " 14"
8" 8"
9" 10 1/ 2 "
Recording Time
(minutes)
18
34 66
96 126 188
18 34
66 96
Suggested End User Unit Price
$ 47.90
84.35 123.15
169.70 237.00 337.85
61.95 95.50
138.20 193.45
3/4" U-MATIC K- SERIES
Model
KCS-10K KCS-20K KCA-10K
Recording (minutes)
10 20 10
Suggested End User Unit Price $18.18 20.86 18.82
VIDEO TAPE AND ACCESSORIES
KCA K SERIES
KCS K SERIES
_.1. 0L `LC
0 1-
\LCP
KCA-20K
20
KCA-30K
30
KCA-60K
60
KCA-30KSP*
30
KCA-60KSP*
60
'SP - Shipper Case
21.40 24.05 35.18 26.32_ 37.44
3/4 - U-MATIC BR K- SERIES
Model
Recording (minutes)
KCS-10BRK
10
KCS-20BRK
20
KCA-10BRK
10
KCA-20BRK
20
KCA-30BRK
30
KCA-60BRK
60
KCA-30BRKSP*
30
KCA-60BRKSP*
so
"SP - Shipper Case
Suggested End User Unit Price $22.25
23.54
22,60 24.00
28.17 39.60 30.49 41.92
1/2" BETACAM
Model
HG- 10 HG-20
Recording (minutes)
10
20
Suggested End User Unit Price
$15.95
21.20
TAPE ACCESSORIES
Model
CL-16SP CL-25
Description _ Flame retardant 1" shipper case
Hard U-Matic Cassette Case
CL-25SP Flame retardant U-Matic shipper
CL-30 CL-35
Betamax vinyl mailer/shipper. Approved by U.S. Postal Service. Reusable.
Betamax vinyl library storage container
KCS-1C 3/4" cleaning cassette (small)
HG-5CL Betacam cleaning cassette L-25CL Betamax cleaning cassette
KA-1
Cassette adaptor - KCS to KCA
RI-9V RI- 10V
9" empty reel for 1" high band 10.5" empty reel for 1" high band
RI- 11V 11.75" empty reel for 1" high band
RI- 14V 14" empty reel for 1" high band
RH-5V
1/2" empty reel 4%" diameter
Suggested End User Unit Price $23.35 2.00 5.55
1.70
too
20.45 12.20 16.00
3.45 40.50 43.45 68.90 93.10
4.85
VR-104
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
A DIVISION OF THE AUDISCAN CORP.
1410 130th St. NE Bellevue, WA 98009 (206) 454-0694 ( 800) 426-0852
1/2" VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER
VIDEOMASTER
FEATURES ·5-1 / 4" color monitor ·Full size 1 / 2" VHS format · Four head deck ·Only 22 lbs. · Fits under an airplane seat · Complete accessory line
Videomaster is geared for the sales, marketing or training professional. It can be operated with both AC and DC ( using an accessory battery pack), has a built-in battery charger, retains a ten- pin connector for easy camera hook-up and boasts rotary 4- head helical scan, azimuth recording for superior playback, pause and slow motion ( with the use of remote control).
The unit utilizes full size 1/2" VHS cassettes, has top- mounted loading and function controls, has a fold down arm which acts as both acarrying handle and an elevation device and comes equipped to accept afull range of accessories. Videomaster is constructed to withstand rugged use, and comes in amatte industrial black finish to complement its business- like design.
ACCESSORIES A nickel- cadmium battery pack R/ F modulator VHF color tuner Wireless remote control Dust cover Soft carrying cover Attache- style carrying case A heavy duty shipping case
SPECIFICATIONS Format:
1 / 2" VHS Portable Recorder/Player with monitor built-in. Rotary 4head Helical Scan, Azimuth
Speed: Monitor:
Speaker: Loading: Features:
Recording. SP, LP Et EP ( Records and Plays up to 8hours). 5" Diagonal. Tint, Color, Contrast and Bright-
ness Control Knobs. 0.5W, 8ohm. Top Loading ( Cassette). (Front Panel or Top) Play, Stop, Record, Cas-
sette Ejection, Pause, Counter, Rewind/Fast Forward ( high speed and viewable), Counter Reset, Audio Volume, Power Switch, After Recording, Insert, Tracking, Sensor for Wire-
less Remote Control and Auto- Rewind. ( Slow
motion available with use of Remote Control
Indicator Lamp:
only). Play, Stop, Pause, Record, After Recording, Battery Warning, Dew Light.
Earphone Jack:
Included ( Disengages internal speaker when in
use).
Video In/Out: Video Input: Video Output:
Inctuded. 0.5-2.0Vp-p ( 75 ohm RCA Connector). 1.0Vp-p ( 75 ohm RCA Connector).
Video S/N:
45dB Over.
Ten Pin Connector: Included.
Audio Input:
Microphone - - 67dB ( mini jack). Line - 20dB ( RCA Connector).
Audio Output: Audio Hertz:
Line - 6dB ( RCA Connector). 70Hz - 8kHz Audio Output: Line ( Standard)
Resolution: Measurements:
Over 240 Lines ( Standard) 15"W x5.5"H x16"D.
Weight: Power:
22 lbs. AC 117V, DC 12V ( Battery Pack Extra Option).
VIDEOMASTER
$995.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VA- 105
TABER MFG. Et ENGINEERING CO.
1880 Embarcadero Rd. Palo Alto, CA 94303 (415) 493-3811
TAPE ERASER
TABERASER MODEL 409
Method Of Operation:
Tape is placed on the spindle and rotated manually several
times at slow speed. Erasure is accomplished by exposing tape to astrong magnetic field. To avoid high-energy pops
and thumps being recorded on the tape due to turn-off transients, the field is gradually reduced automatically.
Tapes over one inch wide should be turned over and the above process repeated.
Types Of Tape:
Taberaser completely erases all audio, video, instrumentation tapes and magnetic films ( widths over one inch must be
turned over). Audio and video cartridges, as well as tapes
on reels or in boxes, can be efficiently degaussed. Reel sizes up to 16 inches can be accommodated.
Erasure:
30Hz to 15kHz the depth of erasure is 76dB below saturation (from reference control tape).
Thermal Protection:
At 150° to 170°F coil surface temperature, the automatic
heat overload circuit activates internal blower circuit indicated by front panel red light.
Cycle Time To Erase: Power:
Maximum Current:
20 seconds
95-135 VAC, 60Hz, 1phase 210-230 VAC, 50Hz, 1phase (both 3wire)
Up to 10 amps
Nominal Current: Size: Weight:
2-1/2 amps
5"H x10"W x13-1/2"D 409110-60: 46-1/2 lbs. ( 21kg) 409220-50: 49-1/2 lbs. ( 22-1 / 2kg)
Model Number:
409-117V 60Hz 409-117V 50Hz 409-220V 60Hz
409-220V 50Hz
$ 1295.00 1347.00 1360.00
1360.00
3
'h
1I.
11 /2
1V.
2
EFFECTIVE DISTANCE-- Inch..
MODEL 409 TABERASER
MODEL 1500H AUTOMATIC TAPE DEGAUSSER
AUTOMATIC TAPE DEGAUSSER MODEL 1500H
Precision Controlled Erasure:
Eraser automatically erases all tapes by moving the tape through astrong field while electronically diminishing the field over aprecisely controlled decay of the erase field.
Easy Operation:
Operation is accomplished by inserting reels of tape or film stock in the top, or U-Matic; VHS; RCA video cassettes or audio cassettes in the side. The tape control mechanism
either rotates the reels or conveys cassettes through the field while the electronics decay the field, thus providing the smoothest and deepest erasure yet accomplished in the state-of-the-art.
Degaussing Efficiency: Tape with coercivity from 150 oersteds to 1500 oersteds (contact dealer or factory for details) will be erased to a depth of 80dB or greater ( as measured from a reference control tape).
Reel Size:
Up to a19 inch reel of 2inch video tape, audio tape, 1inch instrumentation tape, or film stock.
Cassette Video or Audio: Erases any size video cassette, VHS, U-Matic, 2inch quad cartridge, audio cartridge or cassette.
Erase Time: 20 to 45 seconds depending on tape format and power configuration.
Thermal Overload:
At 150° to 170°F coil surface temperature, the automatic
heat overload circuit activates internal blower circuit indicated by front panel red light.
Power Requirements:
AC Voltage 115 VAC, 60Hz,
+ /- 10% at 20 Amps. Optional 115 VAC, 50Hz, + /- 10% at 20 Amps.
Size:
25-1/2"W x30-1/2"L x15"H
Weight:
320 lbs.
Model 1500H
$6495.00
VR-106
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TASCAM
TEAC Professional Division
7733 Telegraph Road Montebello, CA 90604 (213) 726-0303
RECORDERS/REPRODUCERS
e Ill Ill
ii II
32
34B
38
Tascam Recorders/Reproducers Series 30
If you need acost-effective, high quality tape recorder/reproducer for production of jingles, demo tapes, or soundtracks for AV and industrial use, the Tascam Series 30 may be just what you need. They have been engineered specifically for multi- channel audio production. We build significantly better tape machines for less money by combining close contact with the field of audio production, manufacturing experience, and economies of large scale assembly. This is not to say the Series 30 is mass produced. For example, the Series 30 heads are hand lapped to precise tolerances. By making our heads and all critical parts " in house", we retain the strict quality controls needed to achieve uncompromising performance. . not only when the machines are new, but after months and years of regular use.
Superior Heads for Superior Recording and Reproduction
·25% narrow gaps for 40 Hz to 22 kHz ( + / - 3dB) response.. same for repro head and sync playback off record head · Hand lapping significantly reduces head bumps for more accurate response and more track- to- track transfers without degradation · Built to precision tolerances for minimum " gap scatter", which improves alignment and "mixability" between tracks · New high- density permalloy material is 30% harder and lasts 20% to 50 0/0 longer than previous permalloy compounds · Staggered gap erase heads on 8- track for less fringing effect avoids partial erasure of adjacent tracks · All erase heads made of high beta material with 25% higher flux density at saturation mean complete erasure ( over 65 dB down at 1kHz) and quieter tapes
Series 30 Chassis Are Exceptionally Strong, Yet Light
· Folded, braced box- type chassiswith steel boxes around reel motors provides rigidity by means of the same principles that give steel "I- beams" their high strength · Lighter than solid castings, Series 30 is easy to take on the road ( 38 weighs 59.6 lbs., 348 and 32 each weigh 44 lbs.) · Tape path remains absolutely level for easier initial alignment, and long-term stability
Slotless DC Reel Motors for High Torque and
Smooth Winding
· Get up to speed faster than AC motors, with no hum · Achieve very high torque for faster start-up and faster high speed winding-- saves time and avoids missing cues · Large, trapped ball bearings for low friction and long life · Even less "cogging" than brushless DC motors for low wow and flutter-- less than 0.05% RMS ( NAB, Wtd., 15 ips) · Combination of dynamic and mechanical braking to stop tape quickly and reliably without any appreciable wear or tendency -- uni-
form tension avoids stretching tape
Frequency Generator DC Servo Capstan Motors With Van- Pitch
·Motor circuit includes + / - 12% variable speed control for returning or " tightening chops" without accessory VSO · Belt driven capstan acts as further filter to keep even the smallest motor shaft vibrations
from affecting the capstan · FG Servo Motor operates at precise speed of 15 ips on all 3models, switchable to 7.5 ips on 32 and 34B ·Special polyurethane pinch roller firmly grips tape and resists wear, avoiding flat spots and the wow they cause
Fast, Gentle Tape Handling Under Microprocessor Control
·Micro- touch pushbuttons command transport modes via custom programmed microprocessor which also incorporates motion sensing ·Tape motion sensed by LED photosensor tachometer on Reel Motor (5 times more accurate than mechanical counter) · No appreciable step between fast winding and record/play
Exceptional Audio Electronics for Exceptional Performance · + 1-15 V DC supply for wide dynamic range without distortion ( mini-
mum 25 dB headroom, with + /- 18 dBV maximum output) · Major circuits rated at + / - 18 Volts, so they are not -straining" and thereby last longer · Only selected " DD" low- noise type ICs are used for record, playback, and EQ amps for 68 dB S/N ( A wtd., 15 ips no NR) · Bipolar power supply means less susceptibility to hum and RFI · All components are mounted on asingle PC board per channel for easier service and less costly " spares" kit · The 32 has mic inputs and controls to permit simple 2- track location recording without a mixer
Built To Operate in Any Position and For Easy Alignment
· Dynamically balanced tension arms means transport operates equally well vertically ( in rack or on table) or horizontally, for editing and alignment · Rubber stand-off feet on back panel, plus angled,
recessed input/output connector panel, provides equally good cable accesses in horizontal or vertical position · All bias, record/repro level and EQ controls are readily accessible behind the bottom panel · By laying the machine on its back, it's easy to adjust the alignment trimmers while simultaneously observing the results on the front- panel meters · 32 and 34B come with NAB EQ, easily switched to IEC by moving ajumper wire and replacing asingle part; the 38 has IEC EQ, the industry standard for 1/2" 8-tracks
The Features You Need For Professional Recording and Editing
·Three OUTPUT SELECT buttons set the source of the line output signal: INPUT is for setup, SYNC for recording initial tracks and overdubbing, and REPRO for mixdown or alignment · With SYNC button engaged, each track's output source depends on its individual FUNCTION SELECT switch ( Record Ready/Safe) and on the machine's record/play status · Flip- up head cover and flip- down record head gate make it easier to mark edit point · Single- point search- to- cue, where tape fast winds, slaws and then " parks" at previously indicated zero point · Output normally muted during fast wind, but tape lifters and mute can be defeated by CUE lever; EDIT modes for manual " reel rocking" or dump edits · Industry standard 250 nWb/ m nominal tape flux level at 0VU ( machines include large VU
meters with peak LEDs)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-107
TASCAM
TEAC Professional Division
7733 Telegraph Road Montebello, CA 90604
(213) 726-0303
RECORDER/REPRODUCERS
480B
480B RECORDER/REPRODUCER
The Tascam 480B is ahigh quality 8- track 1/2" recorder/reproducer
designed for audio and video production work where flexibility, relia-
bility and synchronized operation are primary requirements. This
compact, solidly built machine is the natural successor to our famous
440B
80-8. We have improved the audio electronics, added a total servo system under microprocessor control, packed in many new features,
and provided single plug compatibility with popular SMPTE control-
ler/synchronizer systems. The 480B operates at 15 ¡ Ps with industry
standard IEC equalization, and can be set for flux reference levels of
440B 4-TRACK COMPACT RECORDER/REPRODUCER
The TASCAM 440B is a high quality 4- track 1/4" recorder/reproducer designed for audio and video production work where flexibility,
reliability and synchronized operation are primary requirements. We have improved the audio electronics, added a total servo system under microprocessor control, packed in many new features, and
provided single plug compatibility with popular SMPTE controller/ synchronizer systems. The 44013 operates at 15 ips and 7-1/2 ¡ Ps with industry standard NAB equalization, and can be set for flux reference
levels of 250 or 320 nanoWebers per meter. Nominal + 4 standard, and - 10dBV RCA jacks are also provided for the broadest possible compatibility. To avoid distortion and make your mixing less critical, we allowed plenty of headroom: 24dB of it at the XLRs ( + 28dBm maximum output level) and 2£idB headroom at the RCAs ( + 18dBV maximum output level).
250 or 320 nanoWebers per meter. Nominal + 4dBm balanced inputs
and outputs are standard, and - 10dBV RCA jacks are also provided for the broadest possible compatibility. To avoid distortion and make your
mixing less critical, we allowed plenty of headroom: 24dB of it at the XLRs ( + 28dBm maximum output level) and 28dB headroom at the RCSs ( + 18dBV maximum output level).
All 3 motors in the 480B's heavy duty transport are under servo
control, not just the capstan, so tape comes up to speed fast -- aclear benefit in any application, and a " must" to avoid excessive " chasing" for lock- up under SMPTE control. A rapid " spooling" mode permits forward or reverse winding at 8 times normal play/record speed for
tight, uniform tape packs. Normal play/record speed can be fixed via an internal crystal, externally controlled, or adjusted over afull 4- 12% range with the Pitch control.
480B
$4495.00
All 3 motors in the 440B's heavy duty transport are under servo
480B SPECIFICATIONS
control, not just the capstan, so tape comes up to speed fast, aclear benefit in any application, and a " must" to avoid excessive "chasing" for lock- up under SMPTE control. A rapid " spooling"
mode permits forward or reverse winding at 8 times normal
play/record speed for tight, uniform tape packs. Normal play/record speed can be fixed via an internal crystal, externally controlled, or adjusted over afull ± 12% range with the Pitch control.
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Tape:
1/2 inch, 1.5 mil.
Track Format:
8- Track, 8- channel
Reel Size:
10-1/2" NAB Hub
Tape Speed:
15 ips ( 38 cm/sec.)
Speed Accuracy ( 1):
·0.2% deviation
Tape motion is fast and accurate. The 440B's precision is obvious when Search- to- Zero actually parks tape at zero; a second search function, Search-to- Cue remembers the actual tape postition so
resetting counter zero doesn't blow the cue. The tape counter displays positive or negative " real time" ( a major convenience for
Pitch Control: Wow and Flutter:
Fast Wind Time:
· 12%
0.5% RMS ( JIS / NAB, Weighted) 0.07% RMS ( WS / NAB, Unweighted)
·0.08% peak ( DIN / IEC/ANSI Weighted) ·0.12% peak ( DIN / IEC/ANSI Unweighted) 120 seconds, 2400 feet
back- timing cues). These benefits are made possible by advanced microprocessor control of all transport functions. Each track has its
own Function selector ( Ready/Safe) and pre- load selector ( Input/ Sync) that help you rehearse overdubs or make inserts with exactly the right signal in the monitors. Because sync response is equal to
repro response, your mixing and performance values remain
Spooling Wind Time: Start Time:
Tape Drive System: Capstan Motor: Reel Motors:
400 seconds, 2400feet Less than 0.8 sec. to reach standard Wow and Flutter
PLL ( phase- lock- loop) DC, Direct Drive Slotless, DC x2
consistent throughout all phases of production. And if you're
Head Configuration:
3- heads; erase, record/reproduce x2
working alone, you can punch in or out of record mode with an
Tape Cue:
Manual and automatic ( RTZ and SIC)
optional foot switch. Peak LEDs in the meter faces detect brief, high
Motion Sensing:
0.5 sec., · 0.15 sec., delay time- stop to next
level transients, helping you to avoid overdriving the tape. A
motion: tension servo system
precision splicing block is mounted immediately in front of the head
Mounting:
Standard 19- inch rack with optional RM-501
stack where tape naturally lays in place. Simple installation and single operator controllability. A consideration for musicians working alone
Remote Control: Connectors
Basic functions available with optional RC- 71
or producers working through the night. LEDs signal the status of all selected transport and electronic functions. With such features as a
braced, box type chassis and separate circuit cards for each channels electronics.
Line Inputs and Outputs: Remote Control Unit: Accessory: dbx unit ( control signal):
Punch In/Out Remote ( RC-30P):
RCA, XLR Multi- pin type Multi- pin type Multi- pin type
Phone jack ( Tip- Sleeve)
440B
$ 2995.00
Dimensions:
17"W x19"H x12-7/16"D
(432 x505 x315.5mm)
VR-108
Weight:
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
89.6 lbs. ( 37kg)
TASCAM
TEAC Professional Division
7733 Telegraph Road Montebello, CA 90604 (213) 726-0303
MODEL 58 TASCAM Model 58 compact recorder/reproducer is designed for demanding production applications, including SMPTE control. The 8-track 58 records 1/2" tape at 15 ips with IEC equalization. It also incorporates aunique concept in tape path configuration. We call it OMEGA DRIVETM. This balanced drive system delivers tight consistent tape wrap. Tape tension arms never pop so you always maintain maximum tape to head contact. Precise interface between tape and heads provides optimum edge track contact. All tape motion is under microprocessor control. There are five different, non- contacting, photo- interrupter sensors that continuously update the status of the tape. The microprocessor then feeds the servo motor drivers necessary commands to ensure accurate and gentle tape handling. Play, Rewind, Record, Fast Forward, Stop, Rewind...after 10,000 takes our machines will pull tape as steadily as the day they were first installed. The 58 is built to exacting tolerances with industrial construction techniques. The transports employ high strength 5052-S aluminum alloy base plates, plus the three strongest motors ever put into a compact deck. This advanced recorder/reproducer has the sound quality that matches its construction, with features like custom designed, hand lapped permalloy heads that eliminate head bumps, narrow gaps for extended high frequency response, and FET differential playback
preamps for sync response equal to repro response. Because we engineer the record amps and the sync and repro preamps to match the G and impedance of the record heads, the noise and distortion is near zero.
BUILT FOR FAST, EFFICIENT EDITING
·Built-in auto- locator functions for search- to- cue in either direction, plus return-to- zero; speeds overdubs, looping, and editing
·Choice of remote controls: RC- 50 Transport Function Remote or RC- 51 Full Function Remote
·Tach driven fluorescent display with precise positive and negative real time readout for logging cues in Rewind or Fast Forward
·Servos track when you finger- turn the tach roller for effortless manual cueing
·Flip- up head assembly, and push- down head gate for rapid mark/ splice tape access; precision splicing block included
122/1226
RECORDER/REPRODUCERS
· For tight, uniform pack in minimum time, forward and reverse
"spooling modes" wind off tape at eight times the play speed ·Output normally muted during fast wind, but tape lifters and mute
can be deleted by CUE lever; dump edit mode, too
RUGGED TRANSPORT AND
SERVO- CONTROLLED MOTORS
· Rigid aluminum alloy base plate always keeps transport in perfect
alignment ·High-torque slotless DC reel motors emit no hum, and bring tape to
play speed under asecond. They easily keep up with video tape transports when fast winding under SMPTE control ·9600 Hz referenced rec/play speed can be switched to variable mode; dual pitch controls for coarse ( ± 15%) and fine I ± 0.7%)
adjustments · Ball bearings minimize friction and maintain close tolerances in the
tension arms, tension arm guides, and pinch roller
BETTER HEAD + BETTER ELECTRONICS =
BETTER RECORDINGS
·25% narrower record and repro head gaps for increased high frequency response
·Direct- coupled amplifiers for lowest distortion and optimum low frequency response
· Record/sync head and repro head yield identical performance
(typical 30 Hz to 26 kHz ± 2 dB) ·Separate low frequency compensation adjustments for record/
sync and repro heads ·VU meter plus peak LEDs to detect brief, high-level transients
SIMPLE ALIGNMENT AND FAST ACCESS FOR ELECTRONIC MAINTENANCE
·Each channel has aplug-in, glass- epoxy circuit board with metal glazed trimmers for mechanical durability
· Meter panel swings out and down for front panel access to all EQ,
bias and level trimmers ·All servo system trimmers are accessible on front by removing one
cover plate
SOPHISTICATED " BRUTE FORCE"
POWER SUPPLY
·Transformers available for 100V to 240V AC lines, 50 or 60 Hz, with
low flux leakage to minimize hum ·Eight different supplies including noise- cancelling bipolar 15 volt
for all audio amps, which optimizes performance while eliminating interaction between logic, audio and motor circuits
COMPATIBLE WITH LEADING SMPTE
EDITOR/SYNCH RONIZERS
· Rear panel SMPTE connector has TTL logic needed for interface
to equipment made by Adam Smith, Audio Kinetic, BTX,
Convergence, EECO, Fernseh, Video Media, and others
·Two tach rates: 12 Hz provides slow tach, and 60 Hz allows certain
SMPTE equipment to exercise control in tracking and parking
·With microprocessor servo control, SMPTE lockup is easily
maintained in modes, including high speed winding
Model 58 OB Input/Output + 4-10 RCA
$5995.00
122/122B STUDIO CASSETTE
RECORDER/REPRODUCER
·3Heads: Erase, Record, Play · 2- Speed 1-7/8-3-3/4 ips · Dolby* Hx-Headroom Extension Circuits and Dolby* B · Adjustable Bias and EQ Select · Front Panel Line Inputs · Optional dBx-I1** Inter-
face · 122B + 4 XLR /- 10 RCA
RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES ·AH -50 Rack Mount Handles eRC- 90 Remote Control · RX-8P
Optional dBx-I1** · TO- 122A Test Tone Oscillator
122/1226
$ 725.00/$825.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VA- 109
TASCAM
TEAC Professional Division
7733 Telegraph Road Montebello, CA 90604 (213)726-0303
MULTI- IMAGE SERIES AUDIO RECORDER/REPRODUCERS
133/13313
133/133B Stereo- Plus Cue Cassette Recorder/Reproducer
Fully compatible with the TASCAM 144. Stereo program on Channels 1and 2 with cue on channel 4 allowing for total separation from program. With extensive auto present features, the TASCAM 133 is the definitive tool for stereo production and presentation using cassette tapes.
Recorder Features: ·Two position cue select for compatibility with all analog or digital programming units · 2- motor, soft- touch logic control transport · 2speeds: 1-7/8-- 3-3/4 ips · Double- action pinch roller for reel time pause · Switchable micíline inputs · Dolby*noise reduction system ·Input and output level controls for each channel · " Simul-Sync" recording for multitrack recording · Independent headphone gain ·4- digit LED counter · 2output levels: normal and high to deliver the extra output needed to drive self- powered speakers
Auto Present Features: ·Cue pulse: generates a25 Hz tone on the cue channel which does not affect projector operations, but which triggers the auto present
functions · Automatic shutoff or rewind at cue tone · Following automatic rewind TASCAM 133 can be programmed to: a) Return to 0000 and restart program b) Return to 0000 and stop awaiting manual start cl Return to beginning of tape and restart program dl Return to beginning of tape and await manual start
Recommended Accessories: ·RC- 133 Remote Control · AH -50 Rack Mount Handles · RX-8P Optional dbx-II" · FC-133 Flight Case
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS Tape
Head Configuration Track Format Tape Speed Dimensions
Weight 133 133B
Philips Type Cassette C-60 and C-90, 70 ,us, Hi- Bias Tape, Type II 2 Heads: Erase and Record/Playback 4- Track, 3- Channel 1-7/8 ¡ Ps ( 4.76 cm/s); 3-3/4 ¡ Ps 19.5 cm/s) 19"W x5-13/16"H x 13-1/2"D ( 482 x 147 x 345 mm) 19.8 lbs. ( 9 kg) Net
$ 1200.00
1300.00
225 Syncaser Multi- track Recorder
For mixing inputs, overdubbing, 1"ping-pong") tracks on standard compact cassettes. Produce demo cassettes, work out musical arrangements, create narration/music tracks for AV presentations, and play back standard audio cassettes in high fidelity as well.
Recorder Features: ·Produce professionally on standard 4- track, 2-channel format (stereo or dual mono, 4.8 cm/s tape speed) · Insert new sound in perfect synchronization with apre-recorded track · Route your inputs to feed one or both tracks, from mono or stereo sources · Ping-pong tracks as you acid new sounds · Punch-in/out with asingle touch of the optional footswitch · Dolby B noise reduction · Headphone jack with level control · Zero return switch
225
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS Tape Track Format Heads
Tape Speed Dimensions
Weight 225 RM-225 Rack Mount Kit
Compact Cassette, C-30 to C-90 4- track, 2- channel
4- track 2- channel erase, 4- track 2- channel rec / play 4.8cm/s11-7 / 8ips) 1.5% 17"W x4-3/8"H x11-3/16D ( 432 x111 x
284 rnrn) ii lbs. ( 5.0 kg) Net
$425.00
.
40.00
The 234 is an extension of advanced cassette technology. It's perfect for AV, or non- sync film and video soundtracks that are compatible
with the latest 133 and 244 machines. You can even use the 234 in conjunction with the 133 or 244 to make realtime copies.
234
234 Syncaset® Multi -track Recorder
If you want the production power of a4- track open reel machine plus the convenience and portability of acompact cassette, then our Model 234 Syncaset R · is for you. It's the perfect tool for production of demo tapes, working out complex musical arrangements, in fact, any application needing high quality, 4- channel sync recording and playback.
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS Tape
Track Format Head Configuration Tape Speed Dimensions
Weight 234
Compact Cassette C-30 to C-90, 70 us, Hi-
Bias Tape. Type))
4- Track, 4- Channel 2 Heads, Erase and Record/ Reproduce 3-3/4 ¡ Ps ( 9.5 cm/s)
19"W x5-13/16"H x14-1/16D ( 482 x147 x357 mm) 21.6 lbs. ( 9.8 kg)
$900.00
VR-110
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TDK ELECTRONICS CORP.
12 Harbor Park Dr. Port Washington, NY 11050 (516) 625-0100 ( 800) 645-6571
AUDIO/VIDEO CASSETTE TAPE
PT Professional Video Cassettes
Special Features ·Higher resolution for increased clarity and
sensitivity ·Super precision mechanism to eliminate
skew and jitters · Four convenient lengths; packaged in
individual boxes
Model PT-30 PT-60
Playing Time (Minutes) 30 60
Model PT-90 PT- 120
Playing Time (Minutes)
so
120
ZT* ( VHS) and ZL* ( Beta)
Video Cassettes
Special Features ·Greater magnetic energy for consistently
higher video and chroma output
·Higher resolution for increased clarity and sensitivity
·Super precision tape transport mechanism for reliable operation under all duplicating
conditions
Model
Playing Time (Minutes)
VHS ZT-30Y
30
ZT60Y
so
ZT-90Y
90
ZT-105Y
105
ZT-120Y
120
ZT-127Y
127
ZT-150Y
150
BETA ZL-370
so
ZL-430
105
ZL-500
120
AV- D Audio- Visual Cassettes
Special Features ·Can be used with any cassette recorder ·Excellent frequency response; low distortion
·Wide dynamic range; high MOL · Low noise; normal bias setting ·Precision cassette mechanism and five-
screw construction
Model AV- DC30 AV- DC46 AV- DC60 AV.D C90 AV-D C120
Total Punning Time both sioes 1 .Ps
30 Min (2x15) 46 Min (2x23) 60 Min (2x30) 90 Min (2x45) 120 Min (2x60)
Bias/E0 NormalrI20ps Normal/120ms Norma1/120ps Norma1/120ps Norma1/120ps
EC- FEndless Cassettes w/Sensing Foil
Special Features · Backcoated for quality sound, low noise,
and minimum wow and flutter
·Smooth, reliable tape transport for jamproof performance
·Precision mechanism with five- screw construction
Model EC-20SF EC-30SF EC -MF
Playing Time 20 Sec 30 Sec. 1Min
Model EC-3MF EC-6MF EC-12MF
Playing Time 3Min. 6Min. 12 Min.
ZD Duplication Cassettes
Special Features · Excellent frequency response with low
distortion ·Wide dynamic range; high MOL ·Low noise; excellent signal-to-noise ratio
·Precision cassette machanism with five -
screw assembly
·Optional accessories include index cards, labels and boxes
Model ZD-C3OTYD ZD-C46TYD ZD-C6OTYD ZD-C9OTYD ZD-C120TYCI
Total Running Time both sides 0 1,/a ins
30 Min. (2x15) 46 Min (2x23) 60 Min. (2x30) 90 Min (2x45) 120 Min (2x60)
Bias/E0 Norma1/120ps Norma1/120ps Norma1/120ps Norma1/120ps Norma1/120ps
D- LLeaderless Cassettes
Special Features · Excellent frequency response with low
distortion ·Wide dynamic range, high MOL · Precision cassette mechanism and five-
screw construction for optimum reliability
Model DC3OL D-C6OL
Total Running Time both sides 0 1,1a ips
30 Min (2x15) 60 Mir. (2x30)
Bias/E0 Normal/120/e Norma1/120ps
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-111
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
SYNCHRONIZER
110-S
110-S
True 10- Bit Accuracy and Resolution
Tracks Signals into the Noise
Optional Four- Field Memory for the Highest Picture Quality
Adaptive Decoding- Minimizes Picture Shifts while Preserving Horizontal and Vertical Detail, Provides Exceptionally High Quality Picture Freeze
Adaptive Clamping- Minimizes Streaking on Noisy Signals
Digitally Precise RS- 170A Sync and Burst Insertion
Passes the Vertical Interval
Processing Amplifier
Precalibrated Boards in Modular Design
Audio Delay An Audio Delay control port allows automatic audio-video delay correction when used with a Tektronix 118- AS Audio Synchronizer.
Quantizing Error Included in Specifications The industry has neglected the effects of quantizing error on synchronizer product specifications The following 110-S specifications, however, include quantizing error for a modulated ramp with 40 IRE subcarrier.
CHARACTERISTICS
Digital Sampling -- 10 oits at 14.3 MHz ( 1024 levels at 4 times NTSC Subcanier).
ELECTRICAL PROGRAM CHANNEL Gain -- Program Output Lin ty 1%. Frequency Response -- 1% to 4.2 MHz.
Signal to Noise Ratio -- - 60 dB unweighted. Chrominance/Luminance Gain Error -- · 1% Chrorninancelluminance Delay Error -- · 10 vs. Differential Gain -- 1% Differential Phase -- - 1°. 2T Pulse K Factor -- 0.5%.
2T Pulse to Bar Ratio Error -- Short Time Distortion -- Line Time Distortion -- 0.5% Field Time Distortion -- · 0.5'..
PROCESSING AMPLIFIER Input Gain Range -- 13dB. Output Gain Range -- + 3dB. Setup Range -- 10 IRE. Hue Adjustment Range -- -t20°
Chrominance Gain Range -- * 3dB.
Signal Correction Timing -- Horizontal Blanking: 10.2 CS. 10.7 Cs or 109 as ( selectable). Vertical Blanking: Start ol field through line 21.
Sync and Burst InserSon Timing -- Horizontal Insertion: 10.2, 10.7 or 10.9 CS (selectable). Vertical Insertion: Start of field through line 9.
Sync arid Burst Insertion Amplitude Accuracy -- · 1IRE. VITS Deletion Timing -- Vertical Tming Une 10 through fine 14 ( selectable).
ADAPTIVE CLAMP The adaptive clamp has 32 dB hum rejection in the absence of noise other than hum, and reduces hum rejection in the presence of other noise in arder to minimize clamp streaking. Clamp Speed -- Slow: 20 dB Sarin. Settling Time: Within SIRE in 30 lines or more. Medium (- 35 dB S/N)". Settling Time: Within 5IRE in TO lines to 30 lires. Fast: (,· 35 dB SiNr. Settling Time: Within 5 IRE in 2 dries to 3 lines. *, Approximate signal to noise ratio.
CHROMINANCE DECODER Video Signal Filtering Modes -- Pass: Signal unaltered.
Comb: Chrominance inverted using 3-rire comb filter. Burst is comb decoded. Notch: Chrominance inverted using 9-point transversal notch filter. VITS are notcn decoded. Adaptive:
Chrominance inverted using combination of notch and comb filters
SYNCHRONIZER TIMING Output Timing Range -- Horizontal: 13.41 ms advance to 4.40 as deay. Vertical: Two lines advance to one line delay.
POWER SUPPLY Line Voltage Range -- 90 V ac to 132 V ac; 250 V ac.
180 V ac to
Peak Input Power -- 300 W maximum.
Typical Power -- 240 W.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS Temperature -- Operating: 0"C to + 50`C. Nonoperating: -55°C to ·- 75°C.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width fleight Depth Depth ( Rackmount)
mm
480 89
510 491
Weight
kg
Net
32.7
in 19.0
3.5 20.1 19.4
lb
14.8
Remote Control Interface Functions -- Remote Bypass. Manual Freeze, Freeze Field or Frame, Freeze Four Field, Enable Auto Freeze, Inhibit Decode, Inhibit Sync and Burst Insertion, External. Test Data Enable, ( Digital Input Port), Status In-
dicator. Power LED, System Status L. Proc Amp Active LED. Bypass LED, Hue Control, Setup Level. Chrome Level. Input Gain ( ADC), Output Gain ( DAC).
INCLUDED ACCESSORES Power Cord ( 161-0066-00); remote plug 36- pin unwired connector with shell ( 131-0293-00); one set of rack slides (351-0636-00); circuit board extender ( 670.7754-00); operators manual; service manual.
ORDERING INFORMATION
110-S Synchronizer
$ 14,975
Option 10 -- Four- Field Memory Adaptive Decoder . + 64,200
110-RC Remote Control Unit
$ 500
OPTIONAL ACCESSORY Spare Pads Kit -- Order 020-0990-00
$ 1,255
VR-112
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WRE
2119 Schuetz Road St. Louis, MO 63146 (314) 567-5366
DEGAUSSERS
·
MODEL 9205A
A Professional Heavy- Duty Unit ·Erase reels up to 17" diameter, 2" thick · Rugged and reliable ·Two powerful electromagnets · Portable
WRE Model 9205A Degausser is recommended for complete erasure of program and residual noise on audio, video, and data recording tape and magnetic film -- in reels, cartridges and cassettes. For use with plastic, aluminum or other non-magnetic reels with any type hub and any diameter up to 17 inches. If used with care, 19 inch reels may be degaussed. May also be used to demagnetize tools or components having residual magnetism imparted into the material being worked.
The Degausser contains two powerful electromagnets which generate the erasing field, each having its individual fuse and pilot lamp located on the front panel. The top of the unit is aheavy duty black bakelite plate with a 5/16 inch spindle emerging from it. It is equipped with high temperature rated coils for extended life under heavy use.
Degaussing is accomplished by rotating the reel slowly around the spindle three ( or more) times. Continue to rotate and at the same time lift the reel slowly off and away from the degausser. For 2inch tape, turn the reel over and repeat the procedure.
The 9205 is manufactured with heavy-duty, double pole switches, double- fused with dual pilot lights for individual protection and monitoring of each coil, six-foot three conductor cord with two- prong plug and ground connector , heavy steel gray baked enamel case complete with rubber feet. This rugged Degausser is built for years of efficient and dependable service.
Model 9205A-110
Reel Size:
Will handle any size reel up to 17 inches
in diameter and 2 inches thick
Erasure Level:
60 to 90 dB minimum erasure below
recorded level
Switch:
Heavy-duty, double pole
Fuses:
Two 15 amp, fuses; one for each coil
Pilot Lights:
Two; one for each coil
Power Requirements:
115 VAC, 50-60 Hz
Power Consumption:
2000 watts
Dimensions:
4-1/8" x 12" x 14"
Net Weight:
32 pounds
Shipping Weight:
35 pounds
Model 9205A-110
$342.20
Model 9205A-230
Identical to Model 9205A-110 except the Model 9205A-230 is designed to operate at 230 VAC, 50-60 Hz.
Net Weight:
33 pounds
Shipping Weight:
36 pounds
Model 9205A-230
$370.49
Optional Accessories
Model 11-267-1 Hub Adaptor:
Model 22-323-1 Foot Switch:
Permits easy degaussing of NAB reels
with 3inch hub diameters. Fits on ex-
isting 5/16 inch spindle.
$12.80
A companion accessory to the bulk degaussers that allows convenient,
"hands free" operation and provides a positive means of turning the degaus-
ser off immediately after use. This is a momentary acting switch and can help extend the life of the degausser.
$43.84
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-113
WRE
2119 Schuetz Road
St. Louis, MO 63146 (314) 567-5366
DEGAUSSERS
Model 642-21 Degausser
· Professional bulk eraser · Erase reels up to 10-1/2" diameter, 2" thick · Portable ·Two locating spindles ·Simple and efficient operation
WRE Model 642-21 Degausser is designed for the same applications and usage as the Model 9205A except that it is equipped with asingle powerful electromagnet ( same type as in the 9205A) and is limited to erasure of 10 1/2 inch reels. This unit is recommended where size and cost are primary considerations.
Construction is of heavy duty steel, finished in gray baked enamel with
abrown phenolic top panel and two locating reel spindles. A sturdy handle is located on the front panel of the unit.
Degaussing is accomplished by rotating the reel by hand on the top surface of the degausser. Cartridges and cassettes can be passed
slowly across the field area for aclean erasure. The unit provides an
audible indication when in operation. It is equipped with a high temperature rated coil for extended life under heavy use.
SPECIFICATIONS Model 642-21/110
· Reel Size: Will handle any size reel up to 10 1/2 inches in diameter and 2inches thick. Any size cartridges and cassettes that fit within the field area outlined on the top panel
· Erasure Level: 60 to 90 dB minimum erasure below recorded level ·Switch: Heavy-duty, single pole
· Fuse: One 15 amp, line fuse
· Power Requirements: 115 VAC, 50-60 Hz
· Power Consumption: 1000 watts ·Dimensions: 4-1/8" x6" x8"
· Net Weight: 15 pounds
·Shipping Weight: 18 pounds
Model 642-21/110
$200.13
Model 642-21/230
Identical to Model 642-21/110 except the Model 642-21/230 is designed to operate at 230 VAC, 50-60 Hz.
·Net Weight: 16 pounds
· Shipping Weight: 19 pounds
Model 642-21/230
$214.27
Model 8905 Magnetic Erasing Pencil
WRE Model 8905 Magnetic Erasing Pencil is an excellent tool for erasing limited, small areas of sound tracks and splices on tape and film. In program material, words, complete sentences, and even syllables may be erased. The 8905 is equally useful for demagnetizing record and play heads. A press to operate switch is located on the handle.
SPECIFICATIONS
·Active Tip Area: 0.250" diameter
·Switch: Single pole, press to operate
· Enclosure: Heavy phenolic case, complete with six foot rubber cord · Finish: Matte black
· Power Requirements: 115 VAC, 50-60 Hz · Power Consumption: 10 watts
· Dimensions: 5/8" diameter by 8" long
·Net Weight: 6ounces
·Shipping Weight: 12 ounces
Model 8905
$ 54.34
VR-114
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
XEDIT
133 South Terrace Avenue Mount Vernon, NY 10550
CORPORATION ( 914) 668-0388
Professional Editing/Splicing System
BLOCKS AND KITS
Block Kit Model
(K) S-1 (K) S- 1S
(K) P-2 (K) S-2-90 (K) S-2
(K) S- 3D (K) S-3 (K) S-3-90
S- 3L (K) S- 3X
(K) S- 3.5D (K) S- 3.5S (K) S- 3.5E (K) S- 3.5X
(K) S-3.75 (K) S-4
SA- 2 A-2
(K) V-3.5 (K) V-3.75 (K) V-4
Tape Size
(Block Length) Cut Config./Mounting
CAS. ( 5.75") CAS. ( 4")
90°/45° H 90°/45° T
1/4" ( 4") 1/4" ( 4") 1/4" ( 4")
90°/45° H 90° /45° T MTK/45° T
1/4" ( 5.75") 90° / MTK/45° H
1/4" ( 5.75")
MTK/45° H
1/4" ( 5.75")
90° / 45° H
1/4" ( 5.75")
165°1L H
1/4" ( 5.75")
60° X/45° H
1/2" ( 5.75") 90° / MTK/45° H
1/2" ( 4.5")
90°/45 ° H
1/2" ( 5.75")
MTK/45 °
1/2" ( 5.75")
73 °X/MTK H
3/4" ( 5.75")
MTK/45° H
1"
(5.75")
MTK/45° H
2" ( 6")
75° / 15° / 30°
2" ( 6")
750w/clamps H
1/2" ( 4.5")
3/4"
(5")
1"
(5.75")
VIDEO H VIDEO H VIDEO H
*For the complete KIT, add prefix " K" to block model No., and add $ 2for Audio KIT and $ 7for Video KIT to Basic Block Price.
EDITABS
Block Price
29.00 22.00
8.50 22.00 22.00
36.00 29.00 29.00 36.00 36.00
40.00 36.00 32.00 50.00
45.00 50.00 110.00 125.00
40.00 50.00 60.00
Tab Model
CX-1 CX-2 CX-3 CX-4 CX-5 CX-6 CX-7 CX-8
Tape Size
1/4" 1/4" CAS. 1/2" 3/4" 1/2" 3/4" 1"
Tab Material Tabs Per Sheet
MYLAR 10/SHEET FOIL 10/SHEET MYLAR 15/SHEET FOIL 10/SHEET FOIL 7SHEET MYLAR 10/SHEET MYLAR 7/SHEET MYLAR 6/SHEET
Model
RB-1 WP- 1 MTD TB- 2
20-P
AV- 3
Accessory Description
RAZOR BLADES (. 012") WHITE GREASE PENCIL MAGNETIC TAPE DEVELOPER 32 PAGE TEXT ON ALL ASPECTS OF TAPE EDITING. BY JOEL TALL. DRIFT & FLUTTER METER IEEE ( DIN) & ( JIS) RMS MEAS. UNIVERSAL AV PULSER
-List PricesBox/100 1000
4.15 4.65 4.15 5.35
6.00 6.25 7.00
7.75
32.00 37.50 32.00 39.50
50.00 52.00 57.50
68.00
-List Prices-
7.50/100 5.00/DOZ 8.00/CAN 3.00/BOOK
550.00'
1,400.00'
MTK:
Multi Track Cutting Angle; calculated for atime interval of less than 1/100th of a second between the top and bottom tracks. This short interval is not normally perceivable.
MOUNTING:
H - Countersunk Holes T - Adhesive Tape backing C - Cork backing
BLOCKS: All are individually precision machined from hard aluminum alloy; P-2 is reinforced plastic. KITS: Audio " KS" - Contain: Block, 30 pre-cut self adhesive Editabs, razor blade and grease pencil.
Video " KV" - In addition to above, also includes acan of KYREAD, Magnetic Tape Developer.
For Orders and Information Call Toll Free 800-431-8900
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR-115
Abekas Video Systems, Inc. Agfa-Gevaert, Inc.
Alignment Tape Allsop, Inc.
Ampex Corp.
R.B. Annis Co. Audlco, Inc.
Audiolab Electronics Audio-Video Synchronizer
Audio Transformers
A
BASF Systems Corp
Benjamin Intl Blackboum, Inc. Robert Bosch Corp
Cassette Albums Cassette Labels Channelmatic
Christie Electric Corp. Controllers, Auto Search
Demagnetizers Digital Disk Recorders Dubbing Systems Duplication System Duplicator, VHS Hi-Fi Video Tape
E
Editing Controllers Editing Recorders, 1/2" Editing Recorders, 3/4" Editing System EECO, Inc. Eicon/Televislon Equip. Assoc., Inc.
Frame Store Fuji Photo Film USA, Inc.
Gamer Industries
Head Cleaners Heads Hitachi Denshi, Ltd.
G H
Interand Corp.
JVC Co. of America
Eastman Kodak Co. VA- 116
INDEX
VA- 2 VA-3
VA-59 VA-4
VA-5-11
VA- 12 VR-13, 14
VA- 15 VA- 112
VA-56
Laserdisc Players
rtn
Maxell Corp. of America Memorex/Memtek Products Microtran Co., Inc. Mitsubishi Electric Sales America, Inc.
N
NEC Home Electronics (USA), Inc. Nortronics Co., Inc.
VA-81, 82
VA-54 VA-55 VR-56 VA-57
VA- 58 VA- 59, 60
VA- 16 VR-17, 18
VA- 19 VR-20
VA- 19 VA- 14 VA-21 VR-22, 23 VA-24, 67, 98
VA- 12, 17, 56 VA-2
VA-76, 77 VA-99
VA-42, 43
VA-38, 39, 51, 64, 72, 98 VR-44, 45, 64, 97 VR-32, 33, 71, 94 VA-99 VR-24 VA-25
VR-30 VR-26, 27
VR-28
Panasonic Industrial Co. Pentagon Industries, Inc
Phasecom Corp.
Pioneer Video, Inc. Plastic Reel Corp. of America/PRC Portavideo Intl, Inc. Precision Echo Projection TV
VA-61-77 VA-79
VA-80
VR-81, 82 VR-83 VA-84 VR-85 VA-58
Recorders/Reproducers Research Technology Intl/RhI Rewinders, Video Cassette
VR-107-110 VA- 86, 87 VA- 13, 60
Scotch 3M Co. Sonar Radio Corp. Sony Corp. of America Sony Tape Sales Co./Sony Corp. of America Splicers, Video Tape Squeezer Standard/Audiscan Corp.
VA-88, 89 VA-90, 91 VR-92-103
VA- 104 VA- 13, 17, 18, 115
VA-85 VR-105
Taber Mfg. & Eng. Co
VA- 106
Tape Erasers
VR-15, 17, 18, 22, 23, 28, 56, 59
Tape Loaders
60, 90, 91, 106, 113, 114 VR-13, 14
Tascam/Teac Corp. of America
VR-107-110
TDK Electronics Corp. Tektronix, Inc.
VA- 111 VR-112
Time- Lapse Video Cassette Recorders/Players, VHS
VR-73-75
Titler, Video
VA6-7
VA-4, 17, 18, 25, 59, 60 VR 59 VR-29
VA-30
.VR-32-52
VA- 53
Video Cassette Acc
VA-52, 67, 100
Video Cassettes, Blank Recording
VA-3, 10, 11, 14, 16, 27
53-55, 79, 88, 104, 111
Video Cassette Changer
VA-21, 80
Video Cassette Recorders/Players, Beta
VR-58, 96,97
Video Cassette Recorders/Players, 3/4"
VR-32-37, 68-72, 92-95
Video Cassette Recorders/Players, VHS
VA-31, 40, 41, 44-50
58, 61-66, 84, 105
Video Disc Recorder/Player
VA-85, 101-103
Video Printer
VA-57
Video Tape, Blank Recording
VA-9, 10, 26, 53, 88, 104
Video Tape Recorders, 1"
VA-5-8, 20, 29
Video Tape Evaluators/Cleaners Video Tape Reels/Acc
VR-25, 86, 87 VR-83, 89
Video Tuner/Timer
VA6-7
W &X
Wide Range Electronics Corp./WRE
Xedit Corp.
VR-113, 114 VA- 115
PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT
Abekas Video Systems, Inc
Adams-Smith, Inc. ADDA Corp. Ampex Corp.
A
Beaveronics, Inc. Robert Bosch Corp
Central Dynamics Corp Channelmatic Chyron Corp Cipher Digital, Inc. CMX Corp Convergence Corp. Crosspoint Latch
Datum, Inc.
Echolab, Inc EECO, Inc ESE Evertz Microsystems, Ltd.
C
D E
For- A Corp. of America
The Grass Valley Group, Inc. Gray Engineering Laboratories
G
H
Harris Corp
Image Video, Ltd. Intergroup Video Systems, Inc
VP- 2
VP- 3-5 VP- 6-8
VP- 9
J
JVC Company of America
K
Knox Video Products
VP-80, 81 VP-82, 83
VP- 10, 11 VP- 12
VP- 13-21 VP- 22
VP- 23-26 VP- 27-29 VP- 30-32 VP-33, 34 VP- 35-38
VP-39, 40
VP-41 VP-42-47 VP- 48-50 VP- 51-54
VP- 55-58
Laird Telemedia, Inc. Leitch Video of America, Inc.
3M Co. MCl/Quantel Micro-script/ScriPtovision, Inc.
Microtime, Inc Mycro-Tek, Inc
M
VP- 84-88 VP-89-90
VP- 91-95 VP-96 VP-97 VP-913
VP-99, 100
California Paltex Corp. PPoarntaasco,nIincc Industrial Co.
VP- 101-103 VP- 1V05P,-1046
Quanta Corp.
Ross Video, Ltd
Scriptovision, Inc. Shintron Co., Inc. Skotel Corp. Sony Corp. of America
S
VP-107-112
VP- 113-117
VP- 97 VP- 118-120
VP- 121 VP- 122-126
VP- 59-67 VP-68, 69
Tech Electronics, Inc Telecom Research
VP- 70
Ultimatte Corp. United Media Corp.
VP-71, 72 VP- 73-79
Videomedia, Inc. Index
1985 Bill Daniels Co., Inc. Shawnee Mission, KS
U V
VP- 127 VP- 128
VP- 129-131 VP- 132
VP- 133, 134 VP- 136
VP- 1
ABEKAS VIDEO
319 Lincoln Centre Drive
Foster City, CA 94404
(415) 571-1711
SYSTEMS,
INC.
SPECIAL EFFECTS SYSTEM
A52 DIGITAL
SPECIAL EFFECTS SYSTEM
FEATURES · Picture positioning
·Compression to zero · Expansion to 99 times ·Variable compression axis
· Border of any color and width · Background of any color ·Cropping from any or all sides
· Full manipulation of cropped pictures · Flips and tumbles
· Mosaics ·Multi- freeze
·Variable aspect ratio · Solarization
·Variable duration for each keyframe
·Variable time for entire effect · Programmable break or pause
·Soft edge key signal
· Contact closures for remote operation ·A / B video switching
Transparent Picture Quality The A52's transparent picture quality is the
direct result of advanced digital signal pro-
cessing. The incoming composite signal is immediately digitized to eliminate the usual
COMPLEX MANIPULATIONS PERFORMED BY THE A-52
ON STILL IMAGES
analog decoding problems such as drift and
complex adjustments. Digitally decoded into 4:2:2 components, it is then processed to ensure signal transparency and long-term stability.
Smooth Picture Movement
an effect can be run in its entirety. The position of the fader bar directly corresponds to
agiven point on the time- line of the effect, thus enabling precise control when manually rehearsing any part of an effect.
possible to interface the A52 to the Abekas A42 digital still store system.
Key Softness The A52 produces a variable soft edge key
The A52 completely eliminates the stepping
usually associated with moving a picture slowly across the screen. For flawless motion while keying the A52 over another source, the key output moves as smoothly as the picture.
The A52 Control System Never before has there been a control sys-
tem so ideal for the speed required by on- air effects and the accuracy needed for post-
production. By providing instantaneous access to alarge number of effects, it makes on- air operation extremely simple. The
power and sophistication are reflected in the ease with which complex effects can be created. Precise control over all parameters is provided to satisfy the most demanding requirements.
The A52 Control Panel
The control panel consists of a high- resolution graphics display, a professional 3- axis joystick, numeric keypad, optically encoded fader bar, dedicated keys and the DataKey.
Mini Control Panel The A52MP mini control panel, one of the
smallest ever designed, retains the majority of the A52CP functions. It also consists of a 3- axis joystick, display and the DataKey. Operation of the A52MP is similar to the A52CP, allowing them to be used interchangeably.
On- Air Operation
For fast on- air operation the A52 provides the user with 36 on-line effects. Twelve frequently used effects are pre-programmed
and presented in picture form on the graphics display. These include flips, tumbles and a variety of compressions. As an added advantage, the user can modify the pre-
programmed effects to meet specific needs. The remaining 24 locations can accommodate simple to very complex effects created by the user. The 12 pre-programmed and 18 user- programmable effects are stored in non-volatile memory and are therefore protected from power down.
signal, to obtain hard or soft edges when keying the output of the A52 over another source.
Unmatched Dual Channel Operation The A52 Digital Effects Combiner provides a truly flexible multi- channel system. It accommodates up to four control panels and two channels. A remote assignment panel allows the system to be configured either as a dual channel, or as two completely independent single channel systems.
As adual channel system, operation can be from any one of the four control panels. When operated as two single channel systems, one control panel is assigned to each channel. True dual channel operation is
achieved by allowing each channel to be programmed independently to its fullest extent along a common time- line. In this way, different effects can be programmed on each channel and run simultaneously.
For time critical applications such as live newscasts, there are also pre-programmed,
complementary effects. As with the single
The heart of the control panel is the graphics
External Control
channel A52, custom effects can be created
display and associated "softkeys". Because
RS232 and RS422 serial ports are standard
and stored in non-volatile memory. Off-line
information is clearly displayed above the
on the A52. Through these ports, all of the
storage is provided on the standard Data-
softkeys, operation is easy. Instead of
functions of the control panel can be emu-
Key.
searching for buttons all over the control panel, simply press the softkey below the function desired. The joystick is used for
specifying parameters during programming. For instance, the joystick is used to choose the hue, saturation, and luminance of a
background color. The numeric keypad allows precise entry of parameters. Duplicating the exact size, position, or other
lated by a computer. For a simple interface to switchers and editors, four contact
closure inputs are provided. These can
trigger the A52 to run an effect forward or reverse, pause an effect already in progress,
or freeze the incoming video. Contact clo-
sure outputs can be used to trigger an external device such as a video switcher for A/ B switching.
Variable Priority In dual channel operation, achannel can be defined as the foreground or background, depending on its priority. Unlike other systems, the effects combiner offers variable priority, allowing programmable dissolves between the two channels.
Internal Keyer
parameters of aprevious effect is easy. The fader bar manually runs effects forward or reverse. With one full throw of the fader bar,
VP- 2
Digital Interface
The A52 provides composite digital input and output ports. These digital ports make it
An extremely versatile luminance keyer is
also part of the effects combiner, which makes keying titles over a picture and manipulating them separately very easy.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ADAMS- SMITH, INC.
34 Tower Street Hudson, MA 01749 (617) 562-3801 111VX 710-347-0096
TIME CODE TAPE SYNC Et TRANSPORT CONTROL PRODUCTS
SYSTEM 2600
A family of Modules for LTC and VITC Generation and Reading, Video Tape Editing, Audio/Video Tape Synchronizing, TV Sound Editing, Transport Control, and Computer Interfacing.
TECHNICAL FEATURES ·Time Code:
Formats: SMPTE/EBU standard Reading Speeds: LTC: 1/20 to 100 xplay speed
VITC: still- frame to 45 xplay speed Control Track/Tack Pulse: 0to 100 xplay speed
Translating Speed ( VITC to LTC): 0to 60 xplay speed Standards: 24-frame film
25-frame PAL and SECAM 25-frame PAL and SECAM 30-frame NTSC, full or drop-frame and PAL- M
·Tape Synchronizing: Accuracy and Resolution: ± 1/1000 TV frame Offset Capability: ± 24 hours Offset Adjustment: ± 1/100 TV frame
·Power: 115/230 VAC ±-15%, 50/60 Hz. ·Mechanical:
Modules: Size: 5-1/4" ( 133mm) ( 3RU) high 1" ( 25mm) or 2" ( 50mm) wide 15" ( 381mm) deep Weight: approx. 1lb. ( 0.5kg), 1" width modules approx. 2lbs. ( 1.0kg), 2" width modules approx. 4lbs. ( 2.0kg), Power Supply module LED Size: 1/8" ( 3mm) high characters Mounting: table- top, panel, or relay rack ( chassis slides
optional) Controllers:
Size: 5-1/4" ( 133mm) ( 3 RU) high 4-1/4" ( 108mm) wide 3" ( 76mm) deep
Weight: approx. 1lb. ( 0.5kg) Mounting: SYSTEM 2600 modular consoles, mix console or relay rack ( in 19" wide frames) Controller Displays: Size: 1-3/4" ( 44mm) ( 1RU) high
8-1/2" ( 216mm) wide 3" ( 76mm) deep Weight: approx. 1lb. ( 0.5kg) LED Size: 9/16" ( 14mm) high characters Mounting: SYSTEM 2600 modular consoles, mix console or relay rack ( in 19" wide frames)
·RF Emission: complies with FCC requirements for class A computing equip-
ment
A New Generation of time code, machine control and studio automation products of proprietary design. They're modular -- and each module is acomplete, stand-alone product. They're system- oriented -- tied together by a uniquely efficient data bus. And the systems you make with them are expandable -- without obsoleting prior
purchases.
SYSTEM 2600 modules are designed to save time, reduce costs, improve quality and unlock creativity in audio and video production, post- production, and program distribution. Operations such as identifying the location of picture and sound material on recording media, linking multi- track ATRs, making frame- accurate video edit decisions, editing video tapes, building television audio tracks, controlling studio equipment by computer, and many more -- all can be enhanced by SYSTEM 2600's new techniques. All- in-all, SYSTEM 2600 modules are your best bet, whether you're modernizing existing facilities or building new ones. Each module is an independent product, yet when incorporated into asystem, each can talk to the others over the data bus. And the data bus design is so efficient that modules don't have to wait in line to hand- shake and talk. Instead, they " broadcast" their data as they generate it, for use by all the others. This new computer technique, combined with distributed data processing ( there's an advanced- design microprocessor in every module that processes data), gives each module the computing time to really do its job right.
SYSTEM 2600 gives you the modules you need for Longitudinal and Vertical Interval Time Code generating, reading and display, transport control, audio and video tape synchronizing, and LTC restoration. SYSTEM 2600 modules incorporate the very latest in state-of-the-art features, such as color framing, jam- syncing user bits, field- rate code generation, automatic drop-frame handling, bi-phase mark phase correction, and binary group ( user bits code)
decoding identification.
Our VITC Reader can read Vertical Interval Time Code at high wind speeds* -- even when your one- inch VTRs are really rolling. And because reading VITC at high speed doesn't mean much if you can't feed it into your video tape editing system, we make amodule which will do that, too, by translating VITC into Longitudinal Time Code. This not only lets you make edit decisions in still- frame and slo-mo, but also lets you edit with VITC alone -- without modifying your existing editing system.
When you're ready to synchronize audio tapes to audio or video tapes in your video tape editing or television sound sweetening facility, SYSTEM 2600 can help you there, too. Our tape synchronizing modules will precisely fit your requirements, from basic recording and layback, through multi-slave chase operations for mixing, right up to television sound editing features such as "Smart- Lock Cr fast re-synchronizing and " Splice-Trap©" handling
of physically spliced tapes are Adams- Smith exclusives.
*Patent applied for
Reprinted with permission from materials © 1984 ADAMS SMITH Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-3
ADAMS- SMITH, INC.
34 Tower Street Hudson, MA 01749 (617) 562-3801 TVVX 710-347-0096
SYSTEM 2600 ( Cont'd)
TIME CODE TAPE SYNC Et TRANSPORT CONTROL PRODUCTS
Snap- on top and bottom covers protect the modules and contain slots for ventilation and adjustment of set-up controls. When fully assembled, the chassis is completely shielded electrically, and all exposed parts are grounded. Rack mounting angles, chassis slides and rubber feet are all available, permitting the chassis to be mounted in a rack, in apanel, or on atable-top.
For Production
In studios and remote vans, you can use SYSTEM 2600 LTC and VITC generators to record synchronous time codes -- either elapsed time or time- of- day, or even calendar data -- simultaneously on all VTRs and ATRs. In addition, you can use time code readers and character inserters to locate and identify program material right away during playback and review. And when you use Vertical Interval Time Code, you can display time during slow motion replay -- with right- to- the- frame accuracy.
You can use the user bits of the time codes to log production
identification information, such as reel, scene and take numbers. And for those who may wish to use asmall computer for logging, the possibilities for recording production information become almost limitless.
TAPE SYNCHRONIZER CONTROLLERS AND DISPLAYS
Tape Synchronizer Controllers and Displays To put together acomplete television sound editing room, you can use SYSTEM 2600's controllers and displays. These user-friendly, advanced- design units let you implement all of the Tape Synchronizer module's control capabilities with single keystroke operations. You can choose only the controllers you need to fit your particular requirements, because they also are fully modular, able to stand alone or in combinations, as suits you needs.
The controllers and controller displays in a system talk to other SYSTEM 2600 modules over a single coax cable through a special Remote Control Processor module. This technique lets you locate the controllers and displays in your mixing console and the modules near your recorders. A Serial Interface module lets any computer or terminal communicate with SYSTEM 2600 modules using an RS-232 format. Our Serial Interface module has all the hardware in it to implement SM PTE/ RS-422 communication when it becomes an industry standard -- just by plugging in a PROM.
The ChassiRod© System* This design allows you to incorporate SYSTEM 2600 technology into your studios and remote vans easily, flexibly and cost-effectively. ChassisRod construction permits modules to be rearranged or added whenever required by system changes or expansion. The design also insures the system compatibility of new modules, and there's no expensive " mainframe" to buy with your first SYSTEM 2600 purchase.
The modules of SYSTEM 2600 are all physically separate units, including their front panel controls and rear panel input and output connectors. All modules are of the same height and depth, and either one or two inches wide, depending on whether they contain one or two printed circuit boards. Any number of modules of the same or different kinds can be grouped together, side- by-side, in any arrangement, to form a specific system. Very little rack space is required, even for an extensive system.
An important feature of the module design is that it permits video signals to be handled with " broadcast" quality.
The chassis is made up of two side panels tied together by four ChassiRods. The two bottom rods are permanently connected, while the two top rods are easily removable. The individual modules fit down over the bottom roas, and are captured by the top rods to form a rigid assembly. Individual modules can easily be removed when changing system configuration or for service. The ChassiRods are available in various lengths, allowing the chassis to be of standard rack width, or wider or narrower to accommodate the modules used.
You can use SYSTEM 2600 Tape Synchronizer modules to cue VTRs to captured tape addresses for immediate replay, and eliminate the need for additional storage devices. In addition, you can use these same Tape Synchronizer modules to link multi- track ATRs to each other, to video sync, or to VTRs, greatly simplifying later post- production timing problems.
For Post- Production
You can group the modules of SYSTEM 2600 into many configurations to enhance both audio and video editing. You can combine high speed VITC Reader* and Translator Interface modules with other modules to add aVITC capability to your present video tape editing system. SYSTEM 2600 VITC modules permit both edit decisionmaking in still-frame and slow-motion, and actual editing ( winding, cueing, parking, syncing and locking). The modules wil handle tapes with either or both codes. Both manual and automatic change- over between codes allow the system to adapt to changing session-tosession requirements without lots of re-setup.
In audio recording operations, you can use SYSTEM 2600 Tape Synchronizer modules to link multi-track ATRs together -- for instance, to make two eight- track recorders act like a 16-track recorder. You can also use the Tape Synchronizer modules to sync an ATR to video sync or to a VTR. These techniques can be particularly useful during recording and playback, and when laying back a mixed- down audio track onto a video tape in synchronism with the picture material.
Importantly, interfacing SYSTEM 2600 Tape Synchronizer modules to your audio and video recorders is easy and straightforward. No internal or external special interface circuitry is needed. All you need to do is make up the interconnecting cable. We supply the mates to any special connectors used on our modules.
An important use for a combination of SYSTEM 2600's Tape Synchronizer and time code reader modules is to implement chase synchronizing during audio mixing. One or more slave ATRs chase a master VTR at all times. They run in exact synchronism when in play, so lip- sync is maintained. The VTR is normally controlled by the video tape editing system or by its own remote controls. This technique is extensively used in both video editing suites and in audio studios which do television sound editing.
You can also assemble complete television sound editing systems by combining Tape Synchronizer modules with other SYSTEM 2600 modules and our modular controllers. The system permits creative sound professionals to enhance the quality of television audio, especially stereo, while at the same time reducing the cost of sound editing by removing it from the video tape editing suite. Phasing the audio to the video with a resolution of 1/100 of a TV frame, rehearsing and recording with a repeatability of better than 1 ms, measuring elapsed time from any selected tape location, starting and stopping other devices with frame accuracy, re- locking audio to video after cueing in one or two seconds, and, of course, cueing, looping and re- playing, are all possible, using SYSTEM 2600 modules.
*Patent applied for
Reprinted with permission from materials © 1984 ADAMS SMITH
VP-4
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ADAMS- SMITH, INC.
34 Tower Street Hudson, MA 01749 (617) 562-3801 TWX 710-347-0096
TIME CODE TAPE SYNC Et TRANSPORT CONTROL PRODUCTS
SYSTEM 2600 ( Cont'd)
SYSTEM 2600 TAPE SYNCHRONIZER MODULES CONTROL PANELS AND DISPLAYS
à
MASTER VTR
SOURCE MATERIAL
> )
SLAVE ATR
SOURCE MATERIAL
> )
SLAVE AIR
MULTIPLE AUDIO SIGNALS
VIDEO MONITOR ORIGINAL SOUND TRACK MONITOR
AUDIO MIXING CONSOLE
MONITOR
AUXILIARY SOURCES
SYSTEM 2600 TELEVISION SOUND EDITING SYSTEM
SYSTEM 2600 TELEVISION SOUND EDITING SYSTEM
For Studio Automation You can combine SYSTEM 2600 time code and Tape Synchronizer modules with either Serial or Parallel Interface modules to implement automatic operation of VTRs and ATRs. Operations such as cueing, playing and rewinding, verification of correct tape content, and monitoring of the play function, can all be implemented by studio computers, large or small. The Serial Interface modules permit serial data interchange, using the RS- 232 format, at data rates from 50 to 19,200 baud. Normally, you can connect up to eight devices to each Serial Interface module. And you don't need to be a professional computer programmer -- the unique design of SYSTEM 2600's data bus lets our Serial Interface use very fast, efficient and simple protocols. Programming is thus straight-forward and uncomplicated. You can implement parallel data interchange, using either BCD or ASCII codes, by means of the Parallel Interface. This module is particularly useful for interfacing to special control panels which you may want to design and build yourself, to fit your specific studio requirements.
SYSTEM 2600 PRICES (Includes top and bottom covers)
Part No. 2600 PS
Width 2 Power Supply
Price $ 595.00
2600 LG
2 Longitudinal Time Code Generator
1990.00
2600 LR
2 Longitudinal Time Code Reader
1695.00
2600 VG
1 Vertical Interval Time Code Generator** . .950.00
2600 VR
2 Vertical Interval Time Code Reader
1925.00
2600 TI
2 Translator Interface
1510.00
2600 CI
1 Character Inserter
1090.00
2600 CR 2600 SI
2 Code Restorer 1 Serial Interface
915.00 1060.00
2600 PI
2 Parallel Interface
1425.00
2600 SY 2600 SRO
2 Tape Synchronizer
2195.00
Tape Synchronizer Relay Option PCB .315.00
2600 LRO
Lock Relay Option PCB
125.00
2600 BP()
Bi -Phase Option PCB
255.00
2600 RCP
1 Remote Control Processor
995.00
2600 EE 2600 SS
2 Event Executive 1 Sync Stripper
2450.00 525.00
2600 RG
1 Reference Generator
945.00
2600 RMCA -- Rack Mount Chassis Assembly
225.00
(Includes 1pair of Side Panels, 1pair of Rack Mounting Angles, 1set
of 17" ChassiRods, and 1Rack Width Module Data Bus)
CONTROLLERS AND DISPLAYS Part No.
Price
2600 RSG Remote Starter Group ( Includes 1RCP, 1RT and
1RPS)
$1495.00
2600 MTC Master Transport Controller 2600 STC Slave Transport Controller
2600 DEC Data Entry Controller 2600 EEC Event/Edit Controller 2600 CD Controller Display
950.00 950.00
950.00 950.00 595.00
2600 RT Remote Transceiver 2600 RPS Remote Power Supply
325.00 175.00
Prices include 1data bus with each Controller and 1data bus and 1 extension with each CD.
CHASSIS COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
Price
Side Panels ( LH and RH) ChassiRods, set of 4 ( Specify length) Rack Mounting Angles Module Data Bus ( Rack Width or shorter) Floater Panel Assembly Filler Panel Assembly ( 2" - 13" -- any length) Chassis Slide Kit Controller Data Bus CD Data Bus CD Data Bus Extension
Controller Rackframe ( holds up to 4Controllers) Display Rackframe ( holds up to 2Displays)
$ 45.00/pr. 5.00/in.
20.00/pr. 75.00/ea. 65.00/ea. 40.00/ea. 60.00/ea. 35.00/ea. 25.00/ea. 25.00/ea.
85.00/ea. 75.00/ea.
Controller Console ( holds 1Controller) CD Console ( holds 1CD) Dual CD Console ( holds 2stacked CDs)
95.00/ea. 90.00/ea. 150.00/ea.
**Must be used with 260OLG Module *Estimated Prices
FOB - Hudson, MA.
Reprinted with permission from materials © 1984 ADAMS SMITH Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-5
ACIDA CORPORATION
130 Knowles Drive Los Gatos, CA 95030 (4081379-1500
VIDEO COMPRESSOR
tAce
VIP- C
Video Compressor
The ADDA VIP- C is amodular, single- channel image compressor and positioner with exceptional signal processing transparÇqy and straight- forward approach to image manipulation.
The difference between the basic unit with the PR- 1an ttfe VIP- C with PR-2remote unit is the degree of image control s ieication.
PR- 1has 6preset effects positions that can be remembe VIP- Cwith PR- 2intelligent remote pa nelcan commit v
while the 4 events
and sequences to memory for eithe rmanua lor automa drecall. The
optional off-line " sequence memory module" expanle the storae capacity of routine effects setups and sequences.
The VIP- C is aversatile digital effects system. Frami chronizatio and time base correction for heterodyne VTRs are 'incli4led for exte
ded versatility in utilizing freeze frame and mùW- reeze effect. Engineering control is provided on a separate renoe panel.
With these features, the VIP will serve the stations and production houses, and ev operations in industry, business, medicine
Basic Control Panel ( PR- 11
needs of ny in-house
ucation.
Simplicity is the key for news and mobile in Ilations. T PR- 1control panel can be rack or desk- top mounted.
clusters control image size and positi ' . Unit includes sjze Et
position presets, variable or locked ima size, and borde
Is.
Engineering Remote and Proc Amp Cont IPanel ( ER- 1)
The engineering remote provides
sor control of ideo,
chroma and setup as well as hue, sys \subcarrier nd hon ntal
phase. ER- 1assigns up to four product n)-emotes anaselects BC or synchronizer modes.
Both production and engineering demote modules connect to the
mainframe chassis with asingle 75 o m coax, eliminating the need for multi- conductor cables.
Interactive Control Panel ( PR- 2)
Optional multifunction programm. 3-axis joystick ovides infinite
video compression size and position locked or variable pect ratio,
border generator plus p ogram abl sequence c trql and extend-
ed event memory. Pro
rpa informs oper i( of position,
move trajectory and im
in addition to s
e order.
VIP- Cwith PR-2control be executed in real time f
up to 16 effect orking me
e ts which can ver 224 events
-- including move time a
ballistics -- an be stored in the
protected memory, as sep
ects or linke together to form
sequences which may be run anua lly or auto
ally.
Sequence Memory Programmer ( SM-1) An optional off-line effects sequence memory system, featuring a
removable plug-in archive module, can be add edto the PR-2 to offload selected sequences for indi vid ua li ze deffects control by different operators.
Pit- aj
The basic ADDA VIP- C system can be
upgraded to interactive multifunction operation with PR- 2remote panel, featuring menu-
driven effects and off-line sequence control.
VIP- C PR-2 3-axis joystick provides infinite
compression size and position. Optional offline effects sequence memory module may be included to off load sequences for individualized operation. Joystick unit may mount on either end of remote control panel.
11111111111111111111
D 111111E1n11nD 1i1111111
MCI DUD 111 reel 13
Standard PR- 1remote unit is engineered for
simplicity. Adaptable for rack or console mount, the panel's small size is ideal for
mobile application. Push-button clusters control size and position; up to six different
effects ( size, position and border) may be preset.
System Description: 1MF -1Main Frame
ER- 1 Engineering Remote
1PR- 2Remote Control
Price
VIP- C
$42,000.00
FEATURES
·Single channel system
·0-7 10 of full screen size compression when synchronizing and or
time base correcting
·0-full screen size when feeds are synchronous
·Picture may be positioned anywhere
· Improved horizontal and vertical interpolation
·Remotes utilize asingle 75 ohm coax cable
Options:
PR- 1PRODUCTION REMOTE
FEATURES ·Pushbutton operation
·4x3aspect ratio lock/unlock during zoom ·Horizontal and vertical justification ( one side of picture locks to edge
of screen, then it compresses off screen) ·Color border or mat generator
·Unity size and center position switches ( will return either to center or full size)
PR- 1
$ 3700.00
PR- 2REMOTE CONTROL
FEATURES ·Joystick control of positions, size, borders ·Hex key pad entry with menu ·Software defined and multimode ·Inversions and reversions ·Multiuser and RS 232 port ·Color border or mat generator ·Electronic freeze frame · Programmable presets ·Dynamic moves · Programmable sequences ·SM-1 cassette storage of pre-programmed effects
PR- 2
Cassette pricing
1/4 user cassette pack of 3 Full user cassette, pack of 3 Pre-programmed cassette
$7600.00
$550.00 645.00 490.00
VP-6
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AMA UNIPINIATION
130 Knowles Drive Los Gatos, CA 95030 (408) 379-1 500
ELECTRONIC GRAPHICS SYSTEM
ESP II Electronic Graphics System
The easy entry to professional broadcast quality, still store and electronic graphics generation.
ADDA's ESP II offers aunique opportunity to move up to truly professional video graphics production and presentation. Transfer your current slides, still photos, art cards, titles and other graphics to digital frames in the ADDA ESP II for video production or special display.
You can even " grab" stills from live camera or tape productions with the ESP II freeze frame feature. Stills may be stored as random frames, each with a numerical address for instant recall, or assembled in sequences. ESP II high resolution stills are always perfect, always right
side up, always available.
Create your own graphics without costly art work, paste up or photography. Multi- layer video graphics may be assembled in the frame buffer for storage as completed stills. Because the ESP II uses the same 8- bit, 4- times subcarrier sampling scheme, multi- generation graphics can be created without picture degradation. Up to 2 of the most popular drive units may be used with the ESP II, each with a capacity of up to 400 stills. Drives may be fixed or removeable for additional off-line storage flexibility. The ESP II's modular architecture permits expansion to dual- channel operation at any time to add additional production capability plus digital transitional effects between channels.
Add new dimensions to video productions and display presentations with broadcast quality electronic graphics.. always at hand in the ESP II. Save on slide production and graphics cost as well as mainten-
ance.
VIDEO Television Standard:
Accepts NTSC or NTSC type 525 line, 60Hz signal.
Input Signals:
Requires stable color signal. Also requires 1 gen lock reference signal with comp
sync, blanking, and burst.
Input Impedance:
75 ohms, A and B Channel Inp ts. Lock is high impedance 1o0pi941
Output Signals: (A, B, COutputs)
Composite video with b r t composite sync, and blanking meèçinlg RS- 170A
requirements.
Range of Synchronization: One frame ( 2field
Bandwidth:
+ 0.5dB to 5MH
K Factor: Differential Phase:
1% ( 2T pulse). Less than 2° at 4I IRE, using linearity
ramp and subcarrier test signal.
Differential Gain:
Signal- to- Noise: Sampling Rate: Line Rate Tilt: Field Rate Tilt:
Less than 2%. +56dB ( p- psignal to rms noise).
4x Fsc ( 14.3MHz). Less than 1%. Less than 1%.
Output Sync Jitter:
± 1nsec.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Voltage: Frequency:
120 + 10%. 50 or 60Hz.
Power Consumption (single):
Less than 300 watts ( mainframe); less than 50 watts. (remote control unit at
120V AC).
Power Consumption (dual):
Less than 350 watts ( mainframe); less than 50 watts (remote control unit at
120V AC).
ESP II REMOTE ( Single Channel)
ESP II REMOTE ( Dual Channel)
(-1_ DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
!1 '
MAIN FRAME
Height: : (-, Width: , L,/
Depth1 II
7inches 19 inches
21-3 / 8inches
((9
35 lbs.
(46 lbs for dual)
REMOTE 3-3/4 inches
19 inches 8inches 6lbs.
t. No. Description
SINGLE CHANNfLI
ESP II AnaloeDlgital Processor with Proc Amp Control
Mas rControl Panel19,500.00
$
Price
ESP II 2 hline Upgrade
DC- I1
E n ing IeChannel Upgrade to Dual Channel .. 9990.00
Rernot
Remote Control Panel Engineering Remote
3200.00 1200.00
tD AL CHANNEL ESP II Analog/Digital Processor with Proc Amp Control
Master Control Panel
$27,590.00
Remotes
RM-II
Remote Control Panel
ACR - II Engineering Remote
3500.00 1200.00
ACCESSORIES Drives DD- 80-F 80 Megabyte Fixed Disk Drive ( 200 Frames)
DD- 80-R 80 Megabyte Removable Storage Disk Drive 1200 Frames)
$ 5500.00 10,500.00
DD- 160 160 Megabyte Fixed Disk Drive ( 400 Frames)
10,500.00
Cables CB- II- 20 CA- I1-20 CA- II-06
Processor- to- drive Cable B20' Processor- to- drive Cable A 20' Drive- to- drive Cable A 6'
390.00 390.00 150.00
Circuit Board Repair Circuit board repair on " exchange" basis
350.00*
*ADDA Corporation reserves the right to refuse to repair any board out of warranty.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 7
ADDA COFIPEWIATIUN
130 Knowles Drive Los Gatos, CA 95030 (408) 379-1500
ELECTRONIC GRAPHICS SYSTEMS
ESP C SERIES Digital Still Storage and Retrieval
On-line previewing and editing; automatic sequencing; the instant creation of multi-
layer graphics.
The electronic storage and retrieval of video
images for graphic production and preprogrammed on- air use, is becoming an industry standard for the technological leaders in television and video production.
Now there is a new generation of still store systems. And from the 200C to the large, multiple drive 750C, our microprocessorcontrolled, expandable systems have a production versatility that can't be beat.
The Basic System
The ESP 750C Digital Graphics System consists of an Analog/Digital Processor, a Master Control Panel, and standard com-
puter industry disk drives. But the built in
flexibility of our system makes it easy to expand. Each Analog/Digital Processor can
accommodate up to four drives. You can add up to a total of fifteen remote production
panels. And more off-line storage with up to 99 separately identified disk packs.
Our dual channel output and front end
synchronization allow you achoice of inputs and awider range of capabilities.
And the 750's second generation digital electronics give you a production- oriented
sequence and memory system that lets you perform last minute editing. Add or delete within a sequence. Create multiple genera-
tion graphics with virtually no degradation in the quality of your original image.
ESP's intelligent controls make the C Series a production tool that goes easy on everyone in your operation.
FEATURES ·A built-in operator prompter. ·Single function keys.
·A rapid- access sequence and system.
· Built-in safety features.
memory
t\J
ESP- 750 C Series Electronic Graphics System
CAT. ESP- 750C
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
Analog/Digital Processor; Master Con-
trol Panel; Disk Drives 121; Acoustic Cab-
inet.
Cables
CB- 750C-20(2)
CA- 750C-2011
CA- 750C-06 11)
Disk Packs ( 21
Multipix
$119,500.00
ACCESSORIES RM-750C Remote Control Panel
6500.00
CABLES CB-750C-20 Processor- to- drive Cable B120'1 CA-750C-20 Processor- to- drive Cable A ( 20')
CA-750C-06 Drive- to- drive Cable A(6')
390.00 390.00 150.00
DISK PACKS
DP- 750
Record and playback packs, 750 frames/
pack.
Quantity 1-4 5-10
11 +
1075.00 1000.00
940.00
OPTIONS Digital I/0
5203.00
ESP-400 C Series Electronic Graphics System
CAT. I ESP- 400C
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
Analog/Digital Processor; Master Con-
trol Panel; Disk Drives:111160MB.
Cables
CB- 400C-20111 CA- 400C-2011 CA- 400C-0611(
ACCESSORIES
RM-400C Remote Control Panel
$52,700.00 6500.00
CABLES CB- 400C-20 Processor- to- drive Cable B120') CA- 400C-20 Processor- to- drive Cable A(20') CA- 400C-06 Drive- to- drive Cable A(6')
390.00 390.00 150.00
OPTIONS
Digital I/O ACI Multipix
5200.00 5200.00
3500.00
ESP-200 C Series Electronic Graphics System
CAT. ESP- 200C
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
Analog/Digital Processor: Master Con-
trol Panel; Disk Driven I80MB.
Cables
CB- 200C-20111
CA- 200C-2011
CA- 200C-06111
$52,700.00
ACCESSORIES RM-200C Remote Control Panel
6500.00
CABLES CB- 200C-20 Processor- to- drive Cable B(20') CA- 200C-20 Processor- to- drive Cable A1201 CA- 200C-06 Drive- to- drive Cable A 161
390.00
390.00 150.00
CARTRIDGE
DP- 200
Record and playback cartridges
200 frames/cartridge
420.00
OPTIONS Digital I/0 AC) Multipix
5200.00 5200.00 3500.00
LIBRARY CONTROL SYSTEM
The ADDA Library Control System ( LCS) is an option to the ESP- C series digital video
still store. Utilizing the LCS, an operator may identify a still with an alpha descriptor and
then may conduct searches for descriptors,
build sequences of stills, transfer sequences to and from the ESP main frames, and print copies of sequence lists or disk packs.
FEATURES
·One to eight users. ·One-half second typical search time. · Dedicated engraved key functions. ·Multiple search categories. ·Single or quantitative searches.
· Up to 15,000 still descriptors storable.
Basic System Description 1 -- Computer Operating Software
1 -- Terminal/CRT
1 -- Library Control Software
1 -- Library Interface Card
$14,750.00
Options Printer
$1,200.00
Terminal/CRT
1,350.00
Interface Card
600.00
VP- 8
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AM PEX
Ampex Corporation · One of The Signal CompanLes
401 Broadway Redwood City, CA 94063 (415) 367-2011
PRODUCTION SWITCHER
AVC SERIES
AVC SERIES VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHER
Also on this display are " active bus" and keyer tally indicators that
FEATURES ·Simplified Controls: pushbuttons, instead of knobs, assure con-
trols never get out of sync with internal memories ·Expanded Memory System: Key Memory System allows storage
always show which video bus or buses including keyers are contributing to the output of the M/E. To further simplify the operator's job, these tally indicators change colors from yellow to bright red to indicate when any of those sections of the switcher are
and recall of up to four separate and distinct key setups for each
"On Air."
key source ·Unparalleled Switcher Flexibility: three keyers per M/E so operator
can introduce any type or combination of keys in any sequence
with any background ·Extensive Preview Capability: preview monitoring system allows
previewing of not only any M/E output, but also individual buses feeding the M/E as well as the Quad Split, Program, and Preset
One of the greatest advantages ot the AVC Series switcher is its ease of operation. AVC Series switchers are among the most powerful and capable production switchers available on the market today. Yet, for all their creative power and capability, AVC switchers operate in the logical and familiar cascaded re-entry, A/B format. The operator's perceived "video flow" is always left-to- right and top-tobottom and, except for Mix Key, Wipe Key and Auto- Transitions, the
Buses ( or program bus A and 6)
fader position always corresponds to the active video bus.
·Independent M/E Pattern Systems: with the AVC Series, 90 pat-
The AVC switchers use 12- button keypads on each M/E for the
terns are keypad selectable, and each M/E has its own independent
selection of key sources for all three keyers, wipe patterns and auto-
pattern system
transition rates. Use of the keypad makes control of the M/E fast and
·Bordering Flexibility: half- halo borders allow wipe transitions to be hard on one side, tapering to full soft on the other for unique
efficient, and its compactness allows the overall physical size of these extremely powerful switchers to be kept to human proportions.
images and effects ·Choice of Auto-Transitions: automatic transitions from 0.1 to 9.9
seconds can be sinusoidal, exponential or logarithmic, as well as
linear ·Positive Tally Indication: actual tally with positive " On Air" indi-
cations are provided for extra operating ease and reliability ·Wider Matte Color Choice: totally independent matte generators
let the operator choose any color wanted on every matte function
AVC Series switchers aFe designed to significantly increase creative capabilities while actually reducing operational tasks. Simple controls, easy-to- read and understand visual displays and tallies and compact size add up to a more useful production system. With an AVC Series switcher's simple-to- operate console and logical, familiar
A- B operation providing truly useable power, you'll be assured of better final production results every time.
·Downstream Mixer/ Keyer: downstream mixer/keyer allows user to choose either PGM / PST or A/ B operation
The uncluttered beauty of the AVC Series panel is striking. In creating the AVC Series switcher, Ampex engineers achieved many
AVC SERIES OPTIONS There are numerous options available for use with AVC Series switchers that can extend their unique and powerful production capabilities. AVC switcher options include:
industry firsts, including the elimination of all panel control knobs.
·Analog Key Border Generators
Instead, there are two centrally located " adjust panels" containing
·Encoded Chroma Keyers ( with shadows)
Up/Down and On/Off pushbuttons as well as the Pattern Positioner.
·RGB Shadow Chroma Keyers
All major switcher adjustments are made from this convenient focal
·Pattern Modifiers
point.
Advanced design concepts are used to enhance reliability and to improve signal performance. For example, dual current sharing power supplies are standard. Independent microprocessors in both
·Rotating and Matrix Patterns ·Status Displays, Timer/Counters ·SMPTE Serial Interface ·Auxiliary Buses
the control console and the electronics bay may have an optional
While some of these options, such as the highly advanced Pattern
backup CPU installed. A battery backup for the AVC system is
Modifier system, offer exciting new visual effects and abilities un-
standard.
available on any other switcher ` others ( such as the Panel Memory
One dual-twisted- pair audio cable is the only connection required between the console and the electronics bay.
system) make the already easy- to- use AVC's operation even simpler and more powerful.
The large, backlit M/E display panels contribute to the easy operation
The wide range of options available for use with the Ampex AVC Series switcher means you can better configure your switcher to
of the AVC Series. These panels display the key sources selected on all three keyers in each M/E. In addition, the wipe pattern numbers and auto-transition duration times are also displayed in large,
easy-to- read numerals.
meet all of your specific needs at a cost within the limits budget. And with AVC's modularity and microprocessor
future expansion is easy to accomplish.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
of your control,
VP-9
Beaveronics, Inc.
8 Haven Ave.
Port Washington, NY 11050 (51 6) 883-4414
STUDIO PRODUCTION VIDEO SWITCHING SYSTEMS
MODEL 712
For Remote and Small Production Facilities $8300.00
I. %
Mee?
%i£eaÍ-1:5e:
\ lelle\ eee
a·Ç-
See
12- input, 4-output mix- effects amp with downstream mixer, includes downstream preset and program buses with cut bar, RGB chroma key
OPTIONS
Downstream Keyer $2250.00
(Also available in PAL and PAL- M versions)
STANDARD FEATURES
·12 inputs including Black- burst and Color Background ·Built-in Black- burst Generator · Built-in Colorizer ·Built-in RGB Chroma keyer · Four Switching Buses
· Downstream Preset and Program Buses with cut bar ·Rack- mounted electronics ·Adjustable Soft Wipe ·Adjustable Border edges ·Color Matte
·Vertical Interval switching thru-out ·Illuminated Momentary Contact pushbuttons
·Internal, external, Chroma -key, and matte inputs to keyer ·Built-in pattern modulator with trequency and amplitude controls · Full Tally ·Pattern symmetry control ·Illuminated Momentary contact pushbuttons for effects selection · Normal/Reverse/Normal-Reverse wipe transitions
·Pattern limit controls for presetting size of patterns or varying vertical and horizontal aspect ratio
·Loop-through inputs · Input amplifiers with clamping ·Synchronous/Non-synchronous inhibit
·Modular construction with front access plug-in modules
PAL/PAL-M Versions, per Switcher
$1250.00
CHECK BEAVERONICS FOR:
·Master control switchers AFV with audio breakaway · Specialized custom switchers · Keyers
MODEL DSK-4-DLB
Stand-alone Downstream Keyers To Upgrade Your Total System $9500.00
This Keyer is specifically designed for Character Generators and accepts both Video and Key signal outputs from up to four Char. Gens. ( or other video sources). The key signals may, if desired, be keyed simultaneously, assuming different portions of the picture area are involved, to produce multiple inserts.
The unit is packaged with its electronics on plug-in cards in a5-1 / 4" rack mounted frame together with a compact 1-3/4" remote control panel.
FEATURES ·Independent stand-alone keyer · Built-in Edge Border, Shadow, and Outline, variable
from black to white · Built-in Matte Generator
·Key can be inserted or removed by cut or automatic mix at any of four rates
· " Cut" or automatic Fade to Black at any of four rates ·Edge Border variable from black to white · Key may be filled with either key video or matte ·Can select up to four key sources either individually
or simultaneously
ALL BEAVERONICS SWITCHING EQUIPMENT CARRIES A TWO YEAR WARRANTY
FAVAU MASTER CLOCK SYSTEMS Available with accuracy better than 1second/yr. or tied to Rubidium stnd.
NUMEROUS SECONDARY CLOCKS ARE AVAILABLE INCLUDING THOSE WITH SILENT OIL- BATH MOVEMENTS.
Dual Master Type 2QM S-2
w/Auto Changeover $8060.00
Extra- Flat Secondary Clocks
VP- 10
6 Digit Digital Displays Available
Master
Type QMS-1 $4805.00
Table Top $395.00 Minute or Second Impulse
MASTER CLOCK SYSTEMS MODULAR DESIGN FACILITATES FUTURE EXPANSION
Decorative Secondary Clocks
Beaveronics, Inc. Write or phone for details. 8 Haven Avenue · Port Washington, New York, 11050 · Tel: ( 5161 883-4414
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
8 Haven Ave. Port Washington, NY 11050
(516) 883-4414
Beaveronics, Inc.
STUDIO PRODUCTION VIDEO SWITCHING SYSTEMS
For Moderate Size Facilities Model B1-154
$14,440.00
For Sophisticated Facilities Model B1-156
$23,975.00
4 NI nit
ikc . ............._.....
_ · ......
\ 4"
.40 1011e.
--.^······jWelbe.em.f..:«eA:
ar>4414 e'arde
··
s ·
7
·
15- input, 4- bus mix/elf/key amp with downstream mix/key amp. Many optional features including DSK and quad-split, etc.
Models 154 and 156
(Also Available in PAL and PAL- M Versions)
15- input, 6- bus with two full mix / eff/key
systems and dir. pgm and pre busses: many options available, DSK, quad. etc.
STANDARD FEATURES
1. Switcher Models 154 and 156 are of the same basic design and
utilize the same electronic sub assemblies. These switchers have the same standard basic features, differing only in the number of busses and in the number of mix/effects units. The basic standard features include 32- pattern mix/effects, color black and color matte background generator, and a mix/key unit in the case of
the model 154.
2. Input Amplifiers · loop through high impedance input · gain equalization for 1000' cable · 22° sub carrier phase control ·clamped inputs ( 10% to 90% APL) sync addition on non composite signals if desired.
3. Tallies · isolated dry contact relay closure on all inputs ( 2amps at
50v.) 4. Mix- Effects Units [ Includes Keying Function] · One ( 1) used in
model B1-154 · Two ( 21 used in model B1-156 · Fades ( or Supers), Wipes, Keys may be produced · Positioner Joystick for each M/E positions patterns. · Pattern Modulation may be accomplished by an internal waveform generator. Modulating sources may be either ( 1) sine wave, ( 2) square wave, 131 saw
tooth, or 14) an external customer generated source. · Mix Key and Wipe Key available. · Soft Wipe and Soft Key available with adjustable variations. · Push to Preview obtained by depressing knob on clip potentiometers ( provides for M/E monitor output). ·Wipe Mode -- 3 interlocked buttons select " NOR", " REV" or "N/R". · Hard Wipe, Soft Wipe or Border can be selected with degree of softness made by " Edge" control adjustment. Border may be Colorized by adjustment of " Hue" and " Luminance" control. · Symmetry of Pattern may be adjusted by " SYM" knob. ·Preset Wipe Limits are set by potentiometers. " H" and " V" ver-
tical preset limits activated by Pattern Limit button. · Spotlight alternate action push button produces a6db. level difference between " A" and "B" input channels in the " Wipe" mode. ( Operates on all patterns.) · Pattern Assignment is made by depressing "ASSIGN" button. Pattern select feature may be " locked" to pattern matrix by depressing the " ASSIGN" button asecond time on the same pattern. Patterns assigned appear on LED display on
M/E control panel. · Non- Synchronous Inputs. An " NS" indicator is provided. Tearing is prevented by not allowing a non- synchronous signal to be switched except at extreme position of
fader handle where a " cut" transition occurs. · Key Input Sources may be either ( 1) " A" bus video for self keying, ( 2) preview Key bus, ( 3) chroma key, or ( 4) an external key source. · Key Invert selector provided to accommodate either positive or negative video as akeying source. · Key Fill may be either " A" video for
self keying or acolorized matte. · Mix/Key provided alieu of second Mix/effects system for Model B1-154 switching system. Provides for all mix and keying functions of mix/effects system ( as
previously described) except for the pattern effects.
OPTIONAL FEATURES
May be added at any time ( required control panel wiring already installed) except those indicated with an asterisk.
Chroma Keyer ( C.K 1
$1100.00
· Hue -- selects hue of keying color · Gain -- adjusts the ampli-
tude · Clip -- adjusts the clip level for keying · Camera ( 4 x 11 in-
put switcher -- selects RGB output of any one of 4cameras to feed
C.K.
Down Stream Keyer [ DSK]
$ 2250.00
· Keys in titles, inserts, or fades to black with or without insert
·Color matte background · Key sources: ( 1) Mix/Effect, ( 2)
Chroma Key, 13) External · Push to Preview ( Monitor)
DSK Border
$2200.00
· Border -- black edge around insert · Shadow -- black edge on
right side and bottom of insert.
Quad Split
$ 2500.00
Provides four 14) variable size quadrants from eight possible sources
with variable width border.
Aux Busses -- (Model 156 only)
$2300.00
Two remote outputs are available -- remote control panel and amps
required. 2nd Mix/Effect Unit in lieu of Mix/Key amp in 154 Mix/Key amp fed by preview and program busses in 156
$2990.00* 3850.00*
PAL/PAL-M Versions, per Switcher
1250.00*
ALL BEAVERONICS SWITCHING EQUIPMENT CARRIES A TWO YEAR WARRANTY
Write or phone for details.
Beaveronics, Inc. 8 Haven Avenue · Port Washington, New York, 11050 · Tel: 1516) 883-4414
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 11
BOSCH
2300 S. 2300 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-8000 Telex 38-8352
VIDEO GRAPHIC SYSTEM
FGS-4000 Video Graphic System
FEATURES
· Polygon based system · NTSC, PAL, SECAM and film compatible ·Scene Synthesis of 2D and 3D shaded objects in 3- space · Real time animation · Area selectable display mode: raster fill or vector outlined · Unlimited area overlap · Variable perspective · Multiple light sourcing: variable direction, color, intensity and ambience · Infinite curve resolution · Hidden surface processing · Keyboard, knob, tablet, stylus and joystick controls · Interactive editing from work station · Simultaneously displayable colors: 16,384 real time, 16,777,216 nonreal time · Real time, full- color frame capture · User diagnostics · High quality images · 2D and 3D image entry · Single frame VTR control · Software expandability · 16 levels of transparency · Texture mapping · Film Effects: glows, streaks, and script- on · Paint capabilities · Viewports of variable size and position
High Quality Animation System 11-1QAS)
The High Quality Animation System ( HQAS) software gives the operator atool for enhancing previously created animations by adding glows, script- on effects and streaking capabilities along with texture mappings. Each of these " high- quality" effects can be applied to produce exceptional animation sequences and still pictures. By generating single-frame animation sequences the FGS-4000 can produce effects previously available only with film.
Texture Mapping enables the artist to create special effects with video images " captured" by acamera. These effects can include images of metallic surfaces, textures, landscapes and personalities applied to a previously created object or shape. 3D box can now have different video inputs on each of the six sides. Logos assigned with apicture of chrome can be transformed into metal.
Real Time Text Editor
Using the Real Time Text Editor, displays can be created and pages composed of both 2D and 3D objects. Fonts can be selected, sized, colored, italicized or condensed either by turning aknob or by menu selection. All objects can then be positioned, rotated or rearranged prior to the animation being created. The operator is not limited to the virtual image area of the monitor, but can also type or position characters off- screen.
Typing is not limited to a horizontal line. By rotating the cursor, keyboard characters can be entered at an angle, into the distance (Z-axis) or even upside down and backwards, all in real time. There are no limits to composition with the Real Time Text Editor.
2D Editor
The 2D Editor allows the operator to input arbitrary flat objects by rapid digitization from artwork placed on the tablet. Overlapping of different colorable areas is possible, along with duplicating objects for repositioning, coloring, etc.
The 2D Editor puts real time entry and editing at the operator's fingertips. All operations are viewed in real time and display can be zoomed up and back or moved left-to- right for close-up scrutinizing. Character entry does not require preprocessing time prior to page composition and animation. This feature allows rapid creation time while maintaining interactive editing capabilities for the operator.
· · . r,·Y ,
- · ipabrs.
.
v · 'X
- ·
,· "
noMeIeasX. ·11111111
1Iee1·1wMw111eOe11
oolom
FGS-4000
3D Editor The 3D Editor provides four different techniques for generation of three dimensional objects. With the Extruder, the operator can create atwo dimensional character and make athree dimensional object. The object can also be extruded to a " ribbon" edge effect, without front or back faces. Options include variable curve tolerance to allow the operator to gauge the overall character smoothness and the capability of making athree dimensional font suitable for page composition from any 2D alphanumeric font.
Speed- Framing This option is available for use with the Paint Editor, Animation Editor, and High Quality Animation System. It interfaces with avariety of 1" VTRs to provide automatic single frame control to allow mastering of nonreal time effects.
Animation Editor The objects composed on a page in the Real Time Text Editor are animated by the Animation Editor. Each object, or group of objects, can be moved independently in 3D space. Controls including menus, knobs and ajoystick are provided. Animations are Keyframe-based with automatic interpolation between Keyframes. Sizing, position and rotation can be animated, along with eye position, viewport size, and perspective. The FGS-4000 provides a single light source which can animate on the X, Y or Z axis. The intensity of the light source and ambient light levels also can be controlled.
By animating color, the operator has access to 16,000 real time and 16,000,000 nonreal time colors. There are 16 levels of transparency and two vector ( or wire frame) character widths. When using vectors, the character maintains the assigned color, level of shading and high quality edges, atrademark of the FGS-4000.
Paint Editor The Paint Editor extends the use of the FGS-4000 by transforming the operator's painting skills into artistic expressions of video imagery. "Paintings" are created by moving the stylus on the tablet in the same manner as moving a paint brush on a canvas. Instead of working directly on the painting, the artist watches the color monitor while moving his hand on the tablet.
Other features of the Paint Editor include: airbrushing effects, painting with 16,000 colors and 16 levels of transparency. All features are accomplished by a pressure- sensitive stylus that fits firmly in the artist's hand.
VP- 12
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CENTRAL DYNAMICS CORP.
147 Hymus Blvd. Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810 TVVX 610-422-3906 Telex 05-821506
Series 80 Video Production Switchers
III
III, I 1 1
=TEO ni!1=1=-1M1tititrrintrtrerm ·
MICEISMI tinereTerl Intrererl · 21T.IISMSICIrrfle52121Ter1* nTrentri creereer; ma-tram .
inumsm Nino mil;
· · gig
rn =ME
1 1 1
·
r
1111
I I 1
MerlErrri =MITI =TIMM ISI· mger
IIII
artTrrInmrermtr.Erronn err 11 I; t+
p
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
SFX Mode Module (Part of each SFX group)
XIS I MOOS
CI CFI CM CZ ES
-TISONS MOOS -
/CS
MATT
Oui
SAT
LUM
SIX MOOS
The Central Dynamics Series 80 range represents agreat advance in the field of video production switchers. Based on the new SFX (Sequential Effects) group, the range offers unprecendented flexibility and ease of operation.
The Series 80 and its SFX group were made possible by the development of radically new systems of processing and control, resulting from acomplete reappraisal of the uses of video switchers and the needs of operators in the light of present day production
techniques.
Conventional video switchers suffer from severe limitations when used in complex production sequences, and frequently the whole sequence must be planned in advance to ascertain the correct point of
entry into the sequence. Even with the pre- planning, some simple sequences are impossible on conventional switchers, because a
'lock-out' situation is reached. A single SFX group can perform sequences impossible on even a triple Mix/Effects conventional switcher. Pre- planning is generally unnecessary, and lock- outs' are
impossible.
Three models of the Series 80 are offered, but modular construction of both electronics and control panels permits ahigh degree of flexibility in the choice of each system. This arrangement also enables plug-in installation by customers of additional facilities as required.
The Series 80 employs the latest techniques of circuitry and construction to ensure the highest standards of performance, stability and reliability. Each unit of the electronics is internally timed, so there are no heavy and bulky delay cables - aparticular asset for mobile van
installations.
This module, shown above, provides selection of the operating mode of the SEX group.
The following controls are provided:
Key 1Mode controls: aset of five momentary action pushbuttons to select the mode of operation on Key 1. Key, Matt Key, Non- Additive Insert, Spotlight, Split Screen.
Transition Mode controls: three pushbuttons to select Background, Key 1and Key 2Transitions. These controls may be either momentary or alternative action. ( Selection is made in the electronics unit). Above the Key 1and Key 2buttons are LED indicators to show when these
key levels are on air.
Matte controls: three potentiometers to provide control of Hue. Saturation and Luminance of the internally generated matte signal. (An optional dual matte generator allows two separate matte signals, matte 1, matte 2, to be used simultaneously in key 1and key 2. When this option is fitted, the matte controls on the SFX module are not installed).
Split Screen controls: these controls adust the size of the split screen and the width of aborder around the split screen. The Size control also adjusts the size of the pattern when spot is selected.
Fader handle: used to effect dissolve or wipe transitions. Indicators are provided to show the current direction of travel.
Mix/Wipe controls: two momentary controls to select the type of transition controlled by the fader.
Cut: provides an immediate cut to the effect(s) selected on preview.
TR/PV: operation of the TR / PV button allows previewing of a transition without affecting on air signal.
Features
·Unique sequential effects ( SFX) processing ·Greater flexibility plus simpler operation ·Modular consturction · Full range of options · High performance, high stability ·Available for PAL, PAL- M, NTSC.
Series 80 Standard Modules
Key Mode Module
(Part of each SFX group) his module provides selection of key sources, masking, level and
softness controls for the two key processors of the SFX group. Controls are also provided for the Dual Key Border Generator, which is aplug-in option to the SFX group.
The following control groups are provided:
Key 1Source Controls Note: In all of the modes of Key 1, except Matt Key and Spotlight, the key is filled with the video from the Foreground bus.
UT IL EX1 RGB
Momentary action switches select the signal to be used for keying from either the Foreground or Utility buses, or from an external input.
Momentary action switch select the key signal from the optional RGB Chroma Keyer.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 13
CENTRAL DYNAMICS CORP.
147 Hymus Blvd. Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810 TWX 610-422-3906 Telex 05-821506
Series 80 Key Mode Module ( Coned)
FI
111,11
SOT
r 11011
" 11 SPir
ID ALT mçgit
ENC
An alternate action switch. When enabled, the keying
signal is derived from the encoded chroma keyer incorporated in the SFX group. The signal video input to the keyer is selected by the F, UTIL, EXT buttons.
ENC is cancelled by depressing the button a second time, or by selection of RGB.
(NV
An alternate action switch which causes the selected
key signal to be inverted.
Key 2 Source Controls
UT IL
Momentary action switches select the signal to be used for keying from the foreground or Utility
EXT
busses, or from the external input. In all of these modes,
the key is filled with the output of the color matte
generator. With the optional Dual Matte Generator Key 2 may be filled with video from the Utility bus.
RGB
Momentary action switch select the key signal from the
optional RGB chrome keyer. In this mode the key is filled with the video from the Utility bus.
C/GEN INV
Momentary action switch. Separate key and video fill signals are accepted from an external character generator
An alternate action switch which causes the selected key signal to be inverted.
Level and Softness Controls Two pairs of potentiometers provide control of the key Level ( clipping level) and Softness for Key 1and Key 2.
Key 1/Key 2 Mask
An alternate action pushbutton enables arectangular mask for Key 1 and Key 2processing. Atoggle switch assigns the rectangular mask to Key 1, Both, or Key 2. Four potentiometers provide full independent control of position for the four sides of the rectangle. When the mask is enabled, a brightness change on the preview output displays the masking area to permit accurate adjustment. Keying is inhibited outside the preset rectangle. A toggle switch inverts the mask i.e. -- keying is inhibited outside the rectangle.
Masking of Key 1may also be independently performed by patterns derived from the Wipe Mode Module. This function is enabled by the simultaneous operation of the KEY and S/SCN switches or MATT and S/SCN switches on the SFX mode module ( page 3). When this function is enabled, a brightness change also displays the masking area in the preview output. Key 1may be simultaneously masked by the Si SCN-KEY or S/SCN-MATT selection and by the Key Mode module rectangular MASK selection.
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
Key Border Controls ( Optional)
Note: These controls are operational only when the Optional Dual Key Border Generator is fitted to the SFX group. This option also includes 1 or 2 line key borders.
A toggle switch assigns border selection to Key 1, or 2, or both, and all borders may be single or double width.
Note 1: Different color and key border modes can be assigned to Key 1 and Key 2.
Note 2: 1or 2line borders are selected by successive depressing of the BLACK, WHITE or COLOR pushbuttons.
BLACK WHITE COLOUR
OFFSET OUT LINE OFF
Black all around borders. White all around borders.
All around borders, filled with the output of the matte generator, phase shifted by 180 degrees. This facility permits colored borders around a color matte title with minimum chroma crawl effect.
An alternate action switch which displaces the border to the right and down, giving a ' drop shadow' effect. The border only is displayed ( black, white or colored, as selected). No border.
Wipe Mode Module
[Part of each SFX group]
1.---elvt
U( INISS
flOPOIR
ICI WIPI MOO,
---- MON/I AIUM Dip ( OLA
,rtrik`vv
1,.¡
AMP
This module provides basic pattern selection and multiplication, wipe direction and edge controls, pattern modulation and positioning. The controls are also used for the SPLIT SCREEN mode of Key 1.
Wipe Direction
Three pushbuttons provide selection of N ( normal) N/R ( normal/reverse) and R ( reverse) direction.
Wipe Edge Controls
Two pushbuttons provide selection of hard or soft edge wipe. A potentiometer controls the degree of softness. This button also enables the border for the SPLIT SCREEN mode of Key 1.
An alternate action pushbutton selects awipe border, which may be used in conjunction with hard or soft wipes. The border is filled by the matte generator and apotentiometer controls the width of the border.
Pattern Selection
A group of nine pushbuttons select the basic patterns. A symmetry control is provided for the box, diamond and circle patterns.
Pattern Multipliers
Two pushbuttons ' X H' and ' X V' allow multiplication of the selected pattern by four horizontally, or vertically, or both. When the positioner is turned On(NOR MI, the multiplication ratios ( horizontal and vertical) may be varied by moving the positioner.
EE
This pushbutton selects the output of the optional Extended Effects Generator in place of the standard patterns.
VP- 14
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CENTRAL DYNAMICS CORP.
147 Hymus Blvd. Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810 TVVX 610-422-3906 Telex 05-821506
Series 80 Wipe Mode Module ( Cont'd)
(Part of each SFX group)
Pattern Modulator Amplitude and frequency controls operate in the conventional manner, except that modulation is normally of both horizontal and vertical edges. ( Vertical or horizontal modulation may be inhibited in the rack electronics if required.) A three- position toggle switch selects sine wave, square wave or triangular modulating waveforms and another three- position switch selcts OFF ( no modulation), ON (modulation pattern " runs through" according to the setting of the frequency control) and LOCK ( modulating frequency is locked to the vertical and horizontal picture frequencies. Various multiples can be obtained by appropriate setting of the frequency control). External modulation signals can also be accepted.
Pattern Positioner A three- position toggle switch selects OFF ( positioner not operating), NORM ( normal " On" positioner operation with non- repeating patterns), and WIDE ( the available wipe range is doubled permitting a full wipe across the picture from or to any pattern in any position).
Black and Background Generator
(Standard on every Series 80 switcher)
BACKGROUND
HUE
SAT
This unit provides black and color background signals for the primary inputs to the switcher, and separate black signals for use in the secondary stages of the switcher. Hue, Saturation and Luminance controls are provided for the color background. An additional output of color black is provided at the same timing as the switcher inputs for feeding to cameras, pulse assignment systems, etc. A 2nd Background Generator can optionally be fitted to the switcher.
Program Processor Module
The Program Processor Module used in Models 680 and 1080 permits a wide range of Mix, Wipe, Title and Fade effects to be performed.
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
The module is fed by the Mix A and Mix B busses, each with re-enty facilities of the SFX Amplifier, and these two busses may be used as either Ai B Mix, or a Preset to Program Take.
The Module operates similarly to the SFX Module; i.e., a transition may be performed by changing only the background or title or changing both the background and title simultaneously. A separate control permits fading asynchronous or non- synchronous source, or composite source to black. The following control groups are provided: Transition Mode controls: Two pushbuttons to select Background transition and/or Title Transition. A LED indicator, above the Title button, indicates when the Title is on- air. Title Mode controls: Four buttons to select individual title sources. Any of these may be strapped for self keying or for accepting separate video and key ( gate) signals as from a character generator. With pushbuttons, the key may be normal or inverted. Matte filled or video filled, and may be Blinked at avariable rate. Key Level and Softness controls are provided. Key border controls: Border On/Off, Outline ( only the border is displayed) and Offset. The border width may be 1or 2 Lines. Matte controls: Hue. Saturation and Luminance. Border matte is always the complimentary hue of the Matte filled key. Independent border Saturation and Luminance controls are provided.
Dual Matte Generator
The dual matte generator option allows different matte signals ( Matte 1, Matte 2) to be used in the Key 1and Key 2levels of each SFX group. Two switches, Key 1M1/ M2, Key 2VID / M2, allows Key 1matte to match Key 2matte, and Key 2to be filled with Video from the Utility bus or Matte 2. Wipe border matte is derived from Matte 2. NOTE: When this option is fitted to an SFX group, the matte controls
MI >VIO K2 on the SFX module are not installed. alp
rtni
SAT 1
FIMALT IOFSM2'WI
Series 80 Optional Modules Extended Effects Generator
This module provides awide range of rotary, matrix, spin and other wipes, and a pointer. There are five control groups. Exclusive patterns ( Black buttons)
Rotary wipes and matrix wipes can only be controlled by one fader handle and must always wipe over the full picture field. If an exclusive pattern is selected, aswitch assigns control to SFX1 or SFX2. In this mode, the basic SFX pattern generator is still available for split screen, so it is possible for example, to perform arotary wipe to acorner insert split screen. ( By appropriate selection of SFX transitions, the foreground or background or both may be wiped.)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 15
CENTRAL DYNAMICS
147 Hymus Blvd.
Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810
TV« 610-422 3906 Telex 05-821506
CORP.
Series 80 Extended Effects Generator ( Cont'd)
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
One Bus Quad
MAUI I i"E
1 0'
o.
và ViRT « NOR* 4 tor tr-
111115010 EifICTS G1/1
Orientation controls:
Four pushbuttons select the orientation of start point of the selected rotary wipe. The same controls may be used to determine the resolution of the matrix wipe patterns ( 4x3, 8x6, 16x12, or 32x24), and to select Normal or Alternate pattern, and Spin facilities on the non-exclusive patterns.
Non- Exclusive ( White buttons)
These patterns are used in exactly the same way as those of the SFX pattern generator. They can be controlled independently by both SFX faders and can be used as split screen patterns.
Normal and Alternate pattern selections are available from each button, and these patterns may be used as Spin wipes. Pointer:
Four pushbuttons control the direction of the pointer. This effect is available as akey input to each SFX group and is totally independent of all wipe functions.
These same controls are also employed to select the operational mode of spin wipes. Wipes may spin at aconstant rate ( free), or may rotate according to the fader arm motion ( lock), or may not spin, but have their orientation changed ( angle).
(A similar generator is available as afree standing model for use with any production switcher)
SORT
WIDTH
NOT
SAT
SUM
This module provides quadplexer effects for all series 80 switchers.
There are 5selectable patterns which produce a composite picture derived from either 3 or 4 sources selected from 10 available video input signals.
The 5patterns include 2rectangular quad splits, 1diagonal quad split, and 2 " Y" splits.
Patterns can be positioned horizontally and vertically, and edges may be soft bordered and colorized.
Other Features
Quadrant preselections can be aired simultaneously or in any sequence.
Quad output can be fed to another switcher input not used for Quad inputs.
Quad color border matt can be fed directly to the 10th input and used as aquadrant fill. It is 180° out of phase with the border matt and can therefore be used vynen colorizing pattern borders.
(Also available as a free standing VQ2170 model for use with any production switcher.)
Quadplexer
411,
Positioner:
The positioner always controls the position of the pointer. The positioner on/off switch enables positioner control of the star and rotary patterns.
Modulation: Modulation from the selected SFX group is available for all wipes (except matrix) and is controlled by the modulation on/off switch. When using an exclusive pattern it is possible to perform an unmodulated wipe to a modulated split screen.
Note: A second Extended Effects Module may be installed on Model 1080, so that each SFX has exclusive use of Extended Effects.
Digital Video Effects Interface
Each SFX provides, as astandard feature, outputs for key and wipe signals used by digital effects units. A video input for the Digital Effects unit may be provided by either the Utility bus, an Auxiliary bus of the Series 80 Model 1080, or by an optional auxiliary bus. The DVE Key output is usually made available to the switcher as one of the inputs of an RGB output switching system ( in place of one of the chroma keyers). Consult CDL's Marketing Services office for application information and details for interfacing to particular Digital Effects units.
8001D.11
This module provides ' Quad Split' facilities, with SFX re-entry, and can be fitted to Models 680 and 1080.
A 4x4input switcher allows selection of sources to the four corners of the split. The four sources provided are normally the Utility bus, the SFX1 Foreground and Preset Background Busses and the Output SFX1 ( Utility 2replaces Preset Background on Model 1080).
Three potentiometers provide control of the horizontal split position, and independent control for the two vertical splits. These controls are disabled if the alternate action ' CENTer' control is operated. In this mode, the Quadplexer provides a conventional quartering of the picture area.
A border of variable width is enabled by a toggle switch, and the integral Border Colorizer provides a color matte output to fill the border.
Special configurations using auxiliary busses allow agreater range of effects to be entered into the QUAD. Contact CDL Marketing Service for details and recommendations.
VP- 16
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CENTRAL DYNAMICS CORP.
147 Hymus Blvd. Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810 TVVX 610-422-3906 Telex 05-821506
Series 80 Title Keyer
PAM N
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
Auto Transitions
SIX
ix
u
iillt LADI
TIM
St«
IVEY tiVit
SAT
tm{ « AVIS 111E1
This unit is designed to key color matte titles in program video. A Key Border module is fitted to provide avariety of edging effects. One or 2 line key borders are standard.
The unit accepts the following inputs:
Input video Color black For Key signal inputs. ( One input may be strapped to accept separate
feeds of key and video from a character generator.)
The internal color matte generator is locked to the incoming video, and no pulse feeds are required. An output of separated syncs is provided, and if this feed is used to drive a caption camera or character generator, this unit may be used to title over non- synchronous sources. Keying is inhibited if the selected key signal is not
synchronous with the video.
Controls: Matte controls: Hue, Saturation, Luminance
Key Border controls: Border On/Off. Outline(the border only is displayed). Offset ( the border is displaced to the right and down to give adrop shadow effect).
1or 2line borders are selected by successive depressing of the ON, OUTLN or OFFST pushbuttons. Key source controls: 1, 2, 3, 4. Key input 1is normally fed from the Utility bus of the switcher for maximum flexibility. Input 4 may be strapped to accept separate key and video from acharacter generator.
Title fader: allows the title to be faded into or out of the program video.
Title In/Out: allows the title to be cut into or out of the program video.
Master fade: fades the output of the keyer to black, and can be used with synchronous or non- synchronous video. A cut to local color black will occur at the end of the fader travel.
Key level: adjusts the " clipping level" of the keying circuits. Softness is preset to minimize edge crawl effects.
Border fill controls: The border is filled with the output of the matte generator, phase shifted by 180°. This permits color edges to colored titles with minimum crawl and differential saturation effects. Separate Saturation and Luminance controls are provided for the border signal, and permit black, white, grey or colored edges to be selected.
Preview: Three outputs of the preview signal are provided. This always displays the title keyed into the video, irrespective of the settings of the faders and InOut controls.
(Also available as a free standing DK 2160 model for use with any production switcher)
AUTO temni.noti
AUTO TRANSITION
Smooth, accurate transitions can be made for each SFX and the Program Processor Amplifier. Rates from one frame up to 999 frames
can be selected. A transition can be stopped and restarted at any time.
Audio Follow Switcher
PAM
IMO_ .111.11
11:111..11111 11111
MIR
PAM
Igli
J1111_111111M1 Oil 111111 Ill ICI Ili
PST
MONITOR
*isicerizer
11111E5' lei
StliNCE
AUDI') CONTROL ID
Either Mono or Stereo systems may be installed in any Series 80
switcher. The system includes an 8 x 2 audio switching matrix for dissolve, fade-to- silence and A / B/ output switching. The two audio busses follow the Program Background and Preset Background busses of an SFX.
There are 3 control modes: Manual, Editor and Follow Switcher. In the Follow Switcher mode, independent selection is provided for Follow Crosspoints and Follow Faders. When Follow Fhder is selected,the dissolve will follow the SFX fader when a background transition is performed. The fade- to-silence follows the fade- to- black of the Title Keyer ( when this option is installed). Note: Title Keyer facilities are standard on Model 680 and 1080. The system includes a 4" x 8" control panel ( standard Series 80 Switcher control panel module) and rack electronics ( 6 RU).
Utility and Auxiliary Busses, and Re-entry
A variety of options are available for installing busses to a Series 80 Switcher. 4800 Series Busses may be added to the basic switcher electronics; i.e., additional rack space is not required. Models are available with primary only inputs, primary and secondary inputs, and timed to the switcher output or untirned. The following number of busses may be added to Series 80 Switcher in increments of 1bus: 4to 480, 2to 680,
and versions of the 1080 may have up to 6.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 17
CENTRAL DYNAMICS
147 Hymus Blvd.
Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810
TVVX 610-422-3906 Telex 05-821506
CORP.
Utility and Auxiliary Busses, and Re- Entry ( Cont'd)
UM8 and AM2, 8and 2Series Bus Expansion Systems may be added to Series 80 switchers to provide timed ( UM Series), or untimed ( AM Series) busses. They may also be used for general purpose vertical interval switching. The UM Series includes primary and secondary inputs. The AM Series has only primary inputs. These systems require additional rack space.
Contact CDL Marketing Services for full details and recommendatioins.
RGB Chroma Key Systems
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
Figure 1. Input Switching System
CA1A 1 G 8
CIME SOI v
CAA1 3
CAM 4
RBIG 8 V
CAM S
11
8
CAMS ROI
RGB CHROMA
RIVER
Figure 2. Output Switching System
CAM I
CAME
CAM 3
CAM 4
CAMS
CAM
JIIIIITIJIÏ 1111111 GIERGE11161186 811GIFIG
RGB CHROMA
BEVER
ROB CHROMA
REVER
RGB CHROMA
REVER 3
AGI CHROMA
RI YE R a
·+"--
RGB CHROMA
RIVER
EHRRI6GV8ER
C>
SFX I PET SFX 1 KEY 2
H. WI 1 (KEY El SHADOW
ICS8 IFS MICE
SIX E
SIX 2
The new RGB chroma keyer developed for the Seried 80 Switchers is designed for optimum performance under a wide range of keying conditions. Controls are provided for Hue selection and " Separation" of the keying signal, and Shadow level. The shadow output is used to modulate the background signal, to obtain realistic shadows in the keyed composite. ( Note: the shadow facility is only available on Key 1 of the SFX group).
Selection facilities can be provided for input or output of the chroma keyers.
1) For asingle chroma keyer, a6xRGB input selector is available. For two chroma keyers a dual 6 x RGB input selector is available ( See Figure 1).
2) For greatest flexibility, one chroma keyer per RGB source ( up to a maximum of six) may be fitted, together with 6x2output selectors. A 6 x 1 or 6 x 2 shadow output selector may also be provided, as appropriate lSee Figure 2).
Both of these systems are controlled by the RGB Key Select panel, fitted with the correct number of switches. Each selector may be switched to any of the RGB sources ( 1-61 or to follow the selection of the appropriate foreground video.
For models 480 and 680, aspecial 4xRGB Follow Only INPUT Selector is available as an option. Either aSingle or Dual version can be installed in the switcher rack electronics. ( No additional rack space is required.)
Special Chroma Keying Systems Two systems are available for cameras which produce preprocessed single line key signals, rather than RGB, and can also be used to select key signals from digital video effects units. The systems provide manual/follow switching of the key signals. Consult CDL Marketing Services for details.
Encoded Chroma Keyers
ENC CHA KEY
H U
GAIN
ID
Encoded chroma keyers may be fitted to each SFX amplifier. The standard option is aone line delay type keyer and does not affect systems timing.
"Zero delay encoded chroma keyers are also available for the most critical application. Details available from CDL Marketing Services upon request.
VP- 18
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CENTRAL DYNAMICS CORP.
147 Hymus Blvd. Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810 TVVX 610-422-3906 Telex 05-821506
Computer Assisted Production--CAIP
VIDEO PRODUCTION
SWITCHERS
1111111 0 Milli
MIX
a i.
_ lEt CAP SIARF
ON PROTECT
CAP MODELS The CAP- 1Series ( CAP- 1and 1XL) can be used with any Series 80
Model switcher. CAP-2XL can only be used with Model 1080.
Switchers with one SFX System require only the CAP MASTER
MASTER
01/1 11 PROTECT
CAP is the advanced technology Computer Assisted Production option designed specifically for Central Dynamics' Series 80 video
production switchers.
The Series 80 lends itself to Computer Assisted Production due to the unique design of its SFX amplifier which permits extremely complex
Module. Switchers equipped ith two SFX Systems normally use both MASTER and SLAVE Modules. If only CAP MASTER is supplied, then selection of CAP control for either SFX-1 or SFX-2 must be specified on order.
When CAP-2XL Model is supplied, the MASTER Module controls SFX-2 and the SLAVE Module controls SFX-1.
production sequences to be performed with one fader handle.
CAP is an invaluable aid to fast moving production sequences.
Complex scenes involving multiple sources, keys, SFX amplifier mode, etc. can be preloaded into CAP's memory, and recalled randomly or sequentially, and accurately executed during real-time production. This gives the operator full control of the dynamic transitions necessary for artistic expression and the desired effect.
Full manual control of all functions is maintained to allow last minute manual overrides of any CAP selection.
Floppy Diskette Option The Diskette and its Control Module permit the stored events in CAP to be transferred off-line to adiskette. The diskette can be filed for later use, or sent to another production center equipped with aSeries 80
CAP.
Data from CAP MASTER and CAP SLAVE Modules can be quickly stored on the diskette, and retrieved, with the operation of two pushbuttons. This option is not available for CAP- 1Model.
The SLAVE panel is identical to the MASTER except for two keys. Because the SLAVE Module is used only for the SFX-1 Processor System, the MIX-LRN and A/T functions are replaced with SLAVE
CAP FEATURES
and FREE. The SLAVE key either ' ties the SLAVE Module to the
·Can be added to any Series 80 production switcher. ·Memorizes all crosspoint selections, mode selections and
potentiometer settings for acomplete Series 80 SFX processor
systems. ·Effects Dissolve dynamically transfers static analogue
potentiometer settings from the setup of one event to asecond event, over aperiod of time defined by the Auto Transition Module.
·Integral memory for 32 or 64 switcher set-ups. ·Ten-minute memory for all Learn events; 120- second Learn duration
MASTER or permits it to operate independently.
When the two modules are used independently, CAP has capacity of 64 events with information for different sections of the switcher. When ' tied', the capacity is 32 events, with each modu!e containing information for the entire switcher.
Operation The two basic operation modes are storing and recalling events
manually or automatically.
for any single event.
To use CAP the following simple steps are performed.
·Memorizes auto transition rates. ·Instantaneous random access to any event. ·Event editing permits changing contents of any event, such as a
transition, without affecting the switcher set-up. ·Permanent storage of memory contents on optional floppy disk ( not
available on Model CAP- 1).
1. Setup the switcher for an event's sources, keys, effects, etc. 2. Store the event information in the CAP memory. 3. Repeat steps 1and 2for each new event, or recall an event to
reset the switcher to that previous event setup.
The following types of events are easily handled by CAP.
· Switcher status. ( SWR)
CAP- 1 CAP-1XL CAP-2XL MEMORY/LEARN CAPA131LITY
·
·
· SFX-1 System static switcher setups
·Auto transition rates. ( AIT) ·Fader Learn. ( LRN) ·Simultaneous auto transition from one set of analog values to
·
· ·SFX-1 fader Learn
·
· Master Mix crosspoints
·
· Master Mix fader Learn
· SFX-2 System static switcher setups
· ·SFX-2 fader Learn
·
· "Effects Dissolve
·
· *Auto Transitions
·
· Extended Effects
another, excluding fader values. ( EDIS) ·A combination of the above. Each CAP control panel has two 4-character information displays and control keys with status indicators. The keys are used for:
1. Event selection for the current production sequence (Numeric keys with/without shift).
2. Select switcher sections that are to be memorized: SWR, E DIS (Effects Dissolves), SFX-LRN ( Learn), MIX-LRN ( Master Mix Learn), and Auto Transitions LAIT).
3. Mode Controls: Auto, Reset, Store Enable, On- Air Protect.
e
· Quadplexer
·
e Title Keyer
·
· ROB Chroma Keyers. Does not
control ROB Key Select * Module.
·
· Background
INSTALLATION CAP Control Modules are mounted on panels which can be installed into spare 4" x8" switcher panel slots, or in a matching switcher
extension tub. Control panel extension is always required if the floppy
diskette option is to be fitted. An CAP models can be added to any
installed Series 80 switcher.
*A/T module required on switcher
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 19
CENTRAL DYNAMICS
147 Hymus Blvd.
Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810
TVVX 610-422-3906 Telex 05-821506
CORP.
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
Edit Controller Interfaces
All Series 80 Switchers are designed to be controlled by video tape edit controllers.
In some cases, the edit controller manufacturer supplies the interface; in others, CDL supplies the interface.
CDL's 480 EIF Interface for the Sony BVE 5000 is representative of the functions controlled by the editor.
A two way dialogue between the editor and a Series 80 Switcher permits:
(1) Control of Preset, Program and Foreground buses. (2) Control of transitions of one SFX amplifier. (3) Automatically selects Cut, Mix, Key and Wipe modes. (4) Selects the wipe pattern. (5) Selects Normal or Reverse wipes. (6) Controls optional 8x2audio switching systems; mono
or stereo ( 480 AFM or 480 AFS). (7) Controls audio dissolves between the two audio buses of
the 8x2 matrix.
Consult CLD's Marketing Services for application information and details for interfacing to aparticular editing system.
Series 80 Rack space and Mechanical dimensions
Rack Electronics Series 80 (Note 1)
16 inputs
W
H
CD-480
15
25 x 16
(634 x 406 mm)
Control Panel
24 inputs
W
H
30 x 16 (762 x 406 mm)
32 inputs
W
H
N/A
CD-680
18
34 5/8 x 19 1/4 (879 x 489 mm)
39 1/8' x 19 1/4 (994 x 489 mm )N/A
CD1080
36
47 5/8 - x22 3/4 - 53 1/8 - x22 3/4 59 1/8 x22 3/4 (1209 x 578 mm) (1349 x 578 mm) (1501 x 578 mm)
Extension tub
Cut Out 15° Mounting with wooded end
Cut Out Flush Mount
CD- 480 CD- 680 CD- 1080
11 5/8 - x 16 -
(295 x 406 mm)
Add 1/8°' ( 3 mm) 11 5/8 - x 19 1/4 - to panel width (295 x489 mm) and 7/8 - ( 22 mm)
11 5/8 - x22 3/4 (295 x 578 mm)
to panel height
Add 1/8 - ( 3 mm) to panel width
and 1/8 - (3 mm)
to panel height
goosegagaggo megoaeoco micolooto
111111Mallt1110311 11111011111111111111111M11111
1, liit o 1.
sialsE7e1=125
1111111çaili
C121T1e1 e=1225515CertreMITMErelltr
El=rte133 Tao= erfeereco· cit=ccon cure= =re= ·
·MIT15251=212155trIMMT1'
- 11r
if
,,. roitero re eti,
1111 ,
Ft etit
112132e1;1=1113SITI eetrertM lnIfl · 4111111g1:
=MGM MIterrITICEIT121= [115·
4--
1=11
e1S 'II
CD- 680
le I IIIII.
I I. 11111111i.III.III.Ili
e M -; mermen ecconere enneIrreIerceemeelir=e
moo erreÉ 61; ' pci
gmjimun 1Ii te.,
1 i
.- .
SrIMTrf, =3=5 MtenTertliTLISItl BB 11111
i
mrcrtsni =acre marine
mar Telel : ·
- -·?·· nanm cemrnosiasrmerrorweeenscsneeerrnecne.r·fr·Iu
I I
--
.1 I
É; -- iisi.·
215:19=1=21M21 CErfirrere CAM' =Mr
StrInfrIntl mecum =mere ·
I ,e
ggig
IIII, ·
MTIMInerl ffftfOrerll amain err
SITITSIn GrISSITICI 52121MItl trr
I I I iI r
·PP P
Mâ·
gligg* ·
III
Il
FM «·;
III ; I·
CD- 1080
Note 1)
The rack space shown includes a2RU Power Distribution Frame with an integral forced air convection fan, and a1RU Air Filter Frame. The Filter should be located on bottom of the switcher electronics, and the Power Distribution Frame mounted on the top.
Note 2)
When an ExtensionTub is supplied with a switcher it is normally mounted to one side; therefore, the console cutout width = control panel width + Ext. tub width of 11-5/8" + 1/4".
Wooden end panels
L --
End view
5'· ( 127 mm)
VP- 20
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CENTRAL DYNAMICS CORP.
147 Hymus Blvd. Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810 TVVX 610-422-3906 Telex 05-821506
Series 80 Optional Modules and Systems
Model 480
Model 680
Adci'l Rack
Model 1080 Space
16 Input Switcher 24 Input Switcher 32 Input Switcher Single Key Border (SFX) Dual Key Border (SFX) Fade to Black
480-16 480-24
NA SKB DKB FB
680-16 680-24
NA SKB DKB NA Note 1
1080-16
1080-24 1080-32
SKB DKB NA Note 1
STD.
0
o o 1
Title Key Border (Program Processor)
2nd Background Generator Dual Matte Generator (SFX) Digital Video Effects Interface
NA NA DMG DI
TKB BG-2 DMG
DI
TKB
o
BG-2
o
DMG
o
DI
o
Extended Effects
(Spin, Matrix, Rotary, Star)
EE
EE
NA
o
Extended Effects (Spin, Matrix, Rotary, Star)
ONE Bus Quad
Quadplexer Title Keyer Auto Transition (SFX1) Auto Transition (SFX1, Mix)
NA OBQ NA DK2160 AT-1
NA
NA
EE Note 2 3
OBQ
OBQ
2
NA
Q
o
NA Note 1 NA Note 1 3
NA
NA
o
AT-2
NA
o
Auto Transitions (SFX1, SFX2, Mix)
N/A
NA
AT-3
o
Auto Transition (PGM Fade to Black)
NA
NA
AT-4
o
Audio Follow Switcher (8 x2Mono)
AFM
AFM
AFM
6
Audio Follow Switcher (8 x2Stereo)
1RGB with 4xRGB Input Switcher
AFS SRK
AFS SRK
AFS
6
NA
o
2RGB with Dual 4xRGB Input Switcher
DRK
DRK
NA
o
1RGB with 6xRGB
Follow/Manual Input Switcher
NA
RKS-1
NA
3
2RGB with Dual 6xRGB
Follow/Manual Input Switcher
NA
RKS-2
NA
3
6xRGB with 6x3Follow/ Manual Output Selector
6xRGB with 6x6Follow/ Manual Output Selector
NA
RKS-3
NA
3
NA
RKS-6
RKS-6
3
4RGB with Quad 6xRGB
Follow/Manual Input Switcher
N/A
NA
RKS-4
3
Encoded Chroma Keyer
EK-0
EK-0
NA
2
Encoded Chroma Keyer Encoded Chroma Keyer Cap Basic Cap Master + Fader Learn
NA
N/A
EK-0
4
EK-1
EK-1
EK-1
o
CAP-1
CAP1
NA
13
CAP1XL
CAP1XL
CAP1XL
13
Cap Master/Slave + Fader Learn
NA
NA
CAP2XL
13
Edit Con(rollerI ntf erae c
EIF
EIF
EIF
3
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
TYPICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Video Inputs: 16, 24 or 32 inputs, 1Vp-psynchronous or non-synchronous. 75 ohm loop thru: return loss better than 40 dB to 5MHz
Video Outputs: 2Program outputs. 2Preview outputs (Utility/Preview) 1Auto preview output for each SFX group. All outputs are 1Vp-pcomposite; return loss better than 34 dB to 5MHz
Pulse Inputs: All are 75 ohm loop thru, 2V or 4V p-p Sync Blanking Burst Gate (PAL only)
Subcarrier Input: 75 ohm loop thru: 1Vor 2Vp-p
Frequency Response: 1-5 MHz ± 0.1 dB 5-7 MHz ± 0.2 dB -- 0.5 dB Steady roll off above 7MHz.
K Rating: Kp 1/4% K Kp-b 1/4% K Kb 1/2% K Linearity: Better than 1% 10-90% APL. Tilt: Line and field (standard window) Less than 1%. Ch rominance/Luminance Inequalities:
Gain: Less than 1%. Delay: Less than 10 nS. Non-Linear Distortion: (10-90% APL) Dynamic Gain: Less than 1%. Diff. Gain: Less than 1%. Diff. Phase: Less than 1° Crosstalk: One adjacent input hostile. All paths energized except path under test better than -- 56 dB. Path Delay, typical: CD480: 200nS CD680: 350nS CD1080: 600nS Path Length Inequality: Less than 1° at subcarrier frequency. Signal to Noise Ratio: Better than 60 dB unweighted relative to 0.7 V. Power Input: (50-60Hz) 117V ± 10% 234V ± 10% Power Requirements; typical:
CD680: 550VA CD480: 400VA CD1080: 900VA Tally Outputs: Two independent tally outputs are provided, each providing one 'make' contact to a common for each input. Contact rating 2A, 40 VA resistive. Permissible ambient temperature range:
0-50°C. Within this range the performance specification will be maintained for changes of ± 10°C, about the ambient temperature at which the equipment was set up.
CHANNELMATIC
821 Tavern Road Alpine, CA 92001 (619) 445-2691
CUSTOM SYSTEMS MESSAGE GENERATORS/
CLOCK SYSTEMS AND VIDEO CASSETTE SEQUENCERS
SERIES 3000 CUSTOM SYSTEMS
The Channelmatic 3000 Series " Building Blocks" provide the system designer with a diversified group of standard pre-packaged and pre-tested, plug-in modules which can be easily combined to satisfy alarge variety of requirements. Over 50 modules, each with different functions, are available.
Developed by Channelmatic, Inc. through many years of providing custom designed switching and control systems for Cable and Industrial Television users, these modules represent the most reliable and economical solution to many specialized system requirements.
The PCM-3000A is designed to be used in any application where local or remote control of equipment is required on a7- day schedule. By adding appropriate modules, it can be used to control almost any electrical or electronic device, including satellite receivers, video cassette machines, audiovideo switchers, relays, IF switching, message generators, solenoids, motors, etc.
A UAD-3000A Unattended Telephone Answering Device module and related CTD-3001A DTMF Decoder module can be added to a clock- controller subsystem enabling it to be operated over standard telephone lines.
CMG- 3008A 8- Page Color Message
Generator Module
The messages are contained on a factoryprogrammed EPROM. Eight customercomposed messages are supplied with the module.
The CMG- 3008A requires external video sync from a CSG-3000A Color Sync Generator
module. One sync generator will drive up to thirty CMG- 3008A modules.
The CMG- 3008A is a very low cost 8- page
color message generator module which displays an 8- line fixed message on a color background.
Up to eight different message pages can be
stored in its non-volatile memory The page to be displayed is selected with either a remote switch, aDIP switch mounted on the
module, or by applying a3- bit binary code to the page select inputs on the module.
Characters are displayed in a custom-
designed uppercase font which includes
numbers and all common symbols. The bold,
white characters are 18 TV lines high for
maximum legibility. Up to 32 characters may
be placed on each message line; yielding a
total message length of 256 characters per
8- line page.
$1,605.00
PCM-3000A SUPERCLOCKTM
Programmable Controller Module
The PCM-3000A Programmable Controller is amicroprocessor- based 7- day clock module for the Channelmatic Series 3000 frame. It has a1- minute resolution and alarge memory for storage of program events. The system is bus- oriented and provisions are included for input-output capability and addiron of a
multitude of special control interfaces. The basic system has eight programmable closure- type outputs which can be preprogrammed to open or close on any desired weekly time schedule.
Vertical- Interval
Video Cassette Sequencers VCR- 3005A-5
Automatic vertical- interval video cassette sequencer system for playback of locally generated programming. Frame is wired to handle up to five VCR's and provisions are included for cascading two or more main frames for the sequential control of any number of machines. Front panel Sequence Selector Switches allow each VCR to: 1) continue sequence normally, 2) bypass to the next VCR in sequence, or 3) terminate the sequence. For broadcase quality performance, all switching occurs in the vertical blanking interval of program video. This allows glitch-free transitions if the VCR's in the sequence are sync- locked using an accessory such as the HAN DIMOD I. System includes ATG-202A Tone Generator/Verifier for videotape encoding. Sequence may be initialized using manual pushbutton, relay closure, or automatically on areal-time basis by the PCM-3000A Clock Controller.
$5005.00
Typical Superclock Programmable Clock Systems PCM-3000A-1
Programmable 7- day, 1683- event clock with eight outputs. Assembled in Series 3000 frame with blank filler panel. Outputs are open collector transistor type, which will sink 40 MA at 30 VDC. $2380.00
PCM -3000A-2
Same as - 1, except outputs are eight form A
(SPST) relay closures.
$2480.00
PCM -3000A-3
Same as - 1, except also has (1AD-3000A
Automatic Telephone Answering Device
module and CTD-3001A Tone Decoder for
telephone override capability.
$2980.00
PCM -3000A-4
Same as - 3, except outputs are eight form A
(SPST) relay closures.
$3080.00
CMG- 3008A
IMP
«ES
PCM-3000A SUPERCLOCK
VCR- 3005A-5
PCM -3000A -13
Remotely programmable 7- day, 1683- event
clock having both transmit and receive
subsystems. Transmit subsystem is provided
with an answering device and telephone
override. Receive subsystem has decoding
for twenty independently programmable
decimal outputs, each of which are provided
with aform A ( SPST) relay. Receive system can be expanded to control hundreds of
devices, including satellite receivers, audio/
video switches, etcetera. Transmit and receive subsystems can be connected by any
voice- grade audio path. Multiple hubs can be
controlled by a single transmit subsystem
lPCMl by adding receive subsystems for
each. Includes modems, card extenders and
blank panels.
$7860.00
(Additional receive subsystems are $3555 ea.)
VP- 22
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CHYRON CORP.
VIDEO PRODUCTS DIVISION
265 Spagnoli Road Melville, NY 11747 (516) 249-3018
PAINT SYSTEM Et SPECIAL EFFECTS GENERATOR
CHAMELEON PAINT SYSTEM
Chameleon:
High resolution stand-alone paint system with digitizing tablet and pen, 10 megabyte removable hard disk, internal genlock with keyer.
FEATURES ·Easy to use icon- oriented Human interface ·Full set of drawing tools ( plus free- hand drawing)
-Line -Circle ( outline or filled) -Rectangle ( outline or filled) -Closed figure ·Area fill ·Multiple brushes ·User- definable brushes ·Cut and paste, with resizing ·Layout grid and drawing aid ·16- Level zoom with pan ·Flexible color selection and modification ·768 x482 Resolution ( 582 lines for PAL) ·256 Colors displayable out of 4,096 possible ·Digitizing tablet with pen ·10 MegaByte removable hard disk ·Internal keyer configurable for downstream or upstream ·Simultaneous RGB and NTSC or PAL available with optional RGB board ·256 Levels- of- Gray camera capture ( option)
Chameleon
$ 11,900.00
DIGIFEX T" -- SPECIAL EFFECTS GENERATOR, MODEL RG-DFX-1 FOR CHYRON® RGU-2, MODEL DFX-1 FOR CHYRON® IV
FEATURES ·Multiple effects including spin, flip, rotate,
zoom, compress, and image splitting can be created instantaneously ·Position and time duration of effect are operator selectable ·Key manipulation can be background or foreground relative to CHYRON char-
acters ·100 Matrix Wipe Patterns ·Standard broadcast rack mounted ·All trigonometric computations are im-
plemented in hardware with pipeline processing under direction of a microprocessor controller ·NTSC and PAL compatible ·Special effect sequences can be stored within CHYRON messages and recalled at
will ·A manual operation is available for effect
formatting and testing ·Provides an external key signal for integra-
tion into your system
The DIGIFEX Special Effects Generator provides the CHYRON IV and the RGU-2
with a powerful new low-cost modular option. The DIGIFEX will provide exciting
special visual effects through digital video
manipulation of CHYRON generated graph-
ics.
Titles, logos, and shapes can be manipulated and positioned anywhere on the screen.
The functions of spin, flip, rotate, zoom,
compress, position, and image splitting can
be requested from the CHYRON keyboard.
Combinations of these effects may be
individually customized. The speed of per-
formance along with number repetitions can
also be controlled from the CHYRON key-
board. All functions operate in real time and
provide smooth transitions between steps. DIGIFEX will support up to 15 colors at one
time from the palette provided by the CHY-
RON system. The DIGIFEX image may be
keyed as a background effect behind
CHYRON characters or as a foreground
effect over the characters. It can also be
manipulated as a background to fore-
ground, or reverse transaction, to produce a
three dimensional effect. A Channel Control
Module is required on aCHYRON IV and a
Digifex Control Module is required on an
RGU-2 System.
Digifex
$ 19,500.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CHYRON
Video's silent partner
VP- 23
CHYRON CORP.
VIDEO PRODUCTS DIVISION
265 Spagnoli Road Melville, NY 11747 (516) 249-3018
THE EXPANDED CHYRON IV® CHARACTER/GRAPHICS GENERATOR
FEATURES ·27 Nanosecond Resolution ·Automatic Character Kerning ·Software Controlled · RS232 Computer Interface ·Software Diagnostics ·512 Color Choices
·Versatile Multi- Font Library ·Proportionally- Spaced Characters · Background Stripes and Solids ·True Character Overlay
·Choice of Character Edging ( Style and Color) ·See- Through Characters ·Auto-Color/Font Change · Diagonal Typing ·Multi- Color Character! Logo Display ·Six Font Loading Positions ·Programmed Animation ( PSC) · Multiple Roll Et Crawl Speeds ·Adjustable Video Window During Roll ·Slow Reveal ·Automatic Centering ·Mini- Computer Programming ·Automatic Instruction Displays ( AID) · Flexible VIDIDISC Magnetic Storage System · Disc Duplication · Flash ·Automatic Lower Third Display ·Visibly- Bordered Safe Title Area
·Operator Controlled Margin Release of Safe Title Area · Left Et Right Justification · Insert and Delete Controls ·256 Tab Positions ·Auto Pause and Rolls and Crawls ·Modular Design ·Clock/Event Timer ·Automatic Kerning ·Word or Row Squeeze, or Stretch · Row Swap
MULTIMODE GRAPHICS MODULE ( MGM) ( Option)
The Multimode Graphics Module ( MGM) provides a multitude of graphic abilities never before associated with a character generator.
In addition to Standard Camera Font Compose, traditionally afeature of Chyron systems, the MGM offers an Advanced Camera Font Compose that is unparalleled in the industry today. Combined with the MGM's Background Graphics/Paint System, it provides a graphics machine of awesome versatility.
FEATURES · Standard RS170 Input ·512 Color Palette · Full Screen Display Capability ·Accepts Drawing Tablet Input · Resizing of Graphics ·Cut Er Paste · Standard Geometric Library · Infinite Montaging of Multiple Graphics ·Montaging of Text Channels ·Area Fill · Custom Brush Compose · Palette Animation ·Satellite Weather Service Interface
An important extra dimension is added to Chyron IV by the MGM's background graphics abilities. High resolution background graphics (1024 x 512 pixels) can be created either from standard black- andwhite camera input or hand drawn with Chyron's optional drawing
BACKGROUND GRAPHICS/ PAINT SYSTEM
OPTIONS · International Fonts ·Right- to- Left Writing ·Subtitling Interface %e
·SMPTE Time Code Interface ·Real Time Digital Effects ( Digifex)
·Advanced Camera Font Compose ·Multimode Graphics Module ( MGM) ·Full- Function Second Channel · Color Encoder · Down Stream Keyer ·Multiple Keyboards
· Multiple VIDIDISC Transport
· Large Capacity Winchester Hard Disc ·Drawing Tablet ( Electronic Painting System)
·Channel Control Module CCM ( Mixes, Wipes, Fades) ·Sports Scoreboard ·Weather Service Interface
·Custom Font/Logo Compose Service
Chyron IV® Priced from $ 54,000.00 to $87,000.00 depending on configuration.
tablet. Up to 16 colors may be selected from a512 color palette, as
well as a wide variety of brush sizes and styles, color fill, color pick-up, etc. Circles, rectangles and other graphic primitives are automatically drawn at the touch of akey. Completed portions of the background graphic can be cut and pasted and varied in size. Backgrounds can also be montaged over other backgrounds for an unlimited layered effect. Palette animation is an important function of the MGM. The colors of the background graphics can be animated for exciting effects such as Glow Glitter, Neon and Color Trails.
Weather Service Interface of the MGM can accept and display high
resolution weather graphics from Weather Service International (WSI) or Environmental Satellite Data, Inc. ( ESD). The weather
graphics are transmitted over telephone line* to the Chyron IV and stored on Chyron's Winchester disc for subsequent display on command.
Data terminal and modem are required.
In foreground mode, the MGM provides an extremely advanced form of camera font compose that will quickly and easily create standard and multicolor graphics. Fonts can be automatically modified and added to your font library.
When background graphics are created with the MGM, they can be
displayed as a single graphic or combined with text and other
graphics on Chyron IV's channel one or two and stored as a single message on Winchester Disc.
MGM
$ 8,000.00
VP- 24
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CHYRON CORP.
VIDEO PRODUCTS DIVISION
265 Spagnoli Road Melville, NY 11747 (516) 249-3018
GRAPHICS Et TITLING SYSTEM
RGU-2
High quality graphics & titling system for studio and mobile production. Incorporates many features of the Chyron IV.
Character Resolution of the Chyron RGU-2 is unsurpassed in television production. It is defined in 27 nanosecond increments to produce characters and graphics with sharp edges, smooth curves and distinctive detail similar to live camera video.
Font Library contains styles and sizes designed for high quality video presentations and afull range of programming applications. Character width and spacing is proportional for each character. Fonts contain upper and lower case alphas, numerics, punctuation, symbols, circumflexes, and diacritical marks. New fonts are constantly being
added.
Font Storage can hold 4complete fonts at once, allowing intermixing of styles and sizes in any word, row, or full page of text. The standard Chyron RGU-2 memory has acapacity of over 32,000 16 bit words.
Color For Characters/ Background is available when using the optional CHYRON Color Encoder. Color can be produced on a character-
by- character or complete message basis, with achoice of 8colors at atime, selectable from a 64- color palette. Background colors can range in size from full screen height to as small as 8TV lines. Because
RGU-2
the height of background color is independent of character height, characters may be positioned over a background of two or more
colors at any location on the screen. Character and background colors are recordable on VIDIDISC.
The Logo Compose Feature permits composition of custom graphics
own requirements. In addition, fonts may be italicized and re- sized. Any standard video input such as black- and- white camera or character generator may be used as the video source, or characters
and fonts from artwork via keyboard entry.
may be created manually.
The Character Display Area is defined by avisible safe title area on the Edit monitor. It will accommodate up to 62 characters per row, depending on their width and up to 20 rows per page, depending on their height. Maximum width of characters can encompass full
Program Animation is achieved with the Program Sequence Con-
troller ( PSC), astandard feature that transforms the CHYRON RGU-2 into a graphics animation machine. A series of function keystrokes-- recorded at composition time-- establishes the appear-
screen width. Maximum height of characters can be 420 TV lines. Large graphics, such as station or sponsor logos can be displayed in conjunction with text.
Vertical Interval Change allows next messages to be displayed without black areas between messages.
Edging allows characters and graphics to be displayed with symmetrical " surround" edging, non- symmetrical " dropshadow" edging, or no edging. All edge types, including see-through characters, may be displayed with black or white edging.
Vertical Roll is selectable in five speeds, including pause. Roll may be used in two modes: roll from full screen, and roll from erased screen. Up to 2000 rows of standard text may be rolled continuously. An end- of- roll vertical tab-- recorded at composition time
pauses the roll.at the desired screen location. Roll speeds may be
ance, sequence, and dwell time of displays. Subsequent high-speed playback produces smooth, professional image movement. All system functions can be captured by PSC, including color, flash, roll, and crawl to further enhance the effect animation. In addition to action graphics displays, PSC can provide automatic recall of nonsequential messages, instant interchange of fonts for the same message compositions, automated keyboard operations for recall sequences, and easy programming of repetitive operations.
Auto Color/ Font Change allows fonts and/or colors of entire text or parts to be changed automatically without re-typing.
Tabs can be selected from 256 possible locations. Eight may be selected in asingle page display.
Lower Third allows messages to be keyed into the lower third display area without pre-programming.
changed at any time.
Insert and Delete are keystroke functions. Messages may be rapidly
Horizontal Crawl is selectable in five speeds, including pause. Messages are crawled from right to left on any row within the display
edited by use of character and row insert and delete keys, with automatic spreading or closing of remaining text.
area. An automatic end- of- crawl pause may be recorded at composition time, and crawl speeds may be changed at any time.
RGU-2 . . from $ 19,950.00 to $36,000.00 depending on configuration.
Slow Reveal allows titling and graphics to be displayed character- bycharacter with a staccato typewriter- like effect in a choice of 5 rhythms. Centering asingle row of text or an entire page of text horizontally is
easily achieved at akeystroke.
OPTIONS Full-function Second Channel Color Encoder Down Stream Keyer Multiple Keyboards Multiple VIDI DISC Transports
Flashing is provided on a character basis to dramatize titling and
Diagnostic Panel
graphics, and is recordable on VIDIDISC.
Factory Font Compose Service
Horizontal and Vertical Shift allows individual characters or rows to be moved under control of the cursor, in both the horizontal and
(already created) Factory Font Compose Service
vertical direction. Horizontal movement is in 112 nanosecond incre-
(custom created)
ments allowing adjacent character tuck. Vertical movement is in increments of one scan line pair. These features allow precise place-
Channel Control Module ( CCM) (Mixes, Wipes, Fades)
ment of text with aminimum of effort.
Sports Scoreboard
The Font Compose Unit ( optional) quality custom fonts, logos, and
enables RGU users to create high other graphics according to their
Prices and Specifications
Subject
Camera Font Compose Digifex to Change Without Notice.
$4,800.00 3,000.00 500.00
each 2,500.00 each 2,100.00
590.00
each 100.00
each 750.00
2,900.00 950.00
4,400.00 19,500.00
VP-25
CHYRON CORP.
VIDEO PRODUCTS DIVISION
265 Spagnoli Road Melville, NY 11747 (516) 249-3018
CHARACTER AND GRAPHICS GENERATOR/
VIDEO PRINTER
.13
Any Computer System
/Mot 10-2
Video Monitor
Video Camera '\)
Videocassette
VP- 2Character and Graphics Generator
The VP- 2 is a low-cost, high- resolution character and graphics generator with features and capabilities found only on costly, more
elaborate studio character generators. With complete keyboard and micro floppy disk drive, this stand-alone system offers 512 colors, 35 nanosecond resolution, 6- font capacity, multiple graphic planes, and many more features. The VP- 2has cursors and prompting menus for very easy graphics composition and display. This combination of operational ease, superior composition capabilities, and high quality image, makes Chyron's VP- 2 the ultimate low-cost character and graphics generator.
VP-1SG Video Printer
VP-1SG is alow cost Video Printer that provides character generation and graphics capabilities with a resolution previously available only with costly and elaborate studio character generators.
The VP-1SG accepts serial data from an RS232C communications
interface. Imbedded format commands within the data will be detected and executed and will cause the generation of a high resolution video picture ( 35 NS EC increments). The video memory is organized as adual frame buffer which allows one page to be displayed while the next page is being created.
FEATURES
FEATURES
· Character Resolution: 35 nanosecond resolution, equivalent to 1510 pixel elements
·Colors: 512 color choices available 8per page for characters, edges, and backgrounds
· Fonts: Six full fonts ( upper and lower case) on line selectable from a library of 45 Chyron fonts with international fonts available. Custom font and logo compose service is also available. ( two fonts standard)
· Character Planes: Full horizontal and vertical overlap of characters, symbols, and logos to any depth.
· Background Graphics: Color every two raster lines if desired.
This unit can be driven by any computer system with text processing capability and a serial communication port. This includes most personal as well as larger computer systems.
· Font Storage: ROM based minimum of two fonts, each with full upper and lower case. Optional expansion to six fonts. ( Font library of 44 fonts.)
· Hardware: Microprocessor controlled -- dual 32K Byte frame store memory -- ROM Program -- 4000 bytes of message memory -- internal sync generator with genlock and NTSC video generation.
· Color Select: Any one of eight colors may be assigned to back-
·Auto Display ( Read from Disk): Display selected graphics pages
grounds, characters or edge.
from disk memory in any sequence at variable rates. · Palette Animation: Cycle color in graphic images at selected multi-
ples of video frame rate.
· Edge Types: The three edge types for any font-- full drop shadow,
· Color Table: Any eight of 512 colors.
· Sync: Genlock to external sync or composite video from a stable source. VCR may not not be a stable source.
· Keying: Full down stream keying included.
characteroffset, and bordered edge-- can be varied in extent, dirt ction, and color.
· Menus: Complete menus and prompting displays to guide you through graphics composition.
· Composition and Control Features: Cursor commands: up, down, right, left, backspace, return, home. Insert, delete, or move charac-
·Output: NTSC composite video.
· Commands: Select background color, character color, edge type, edge color, font type. Skip scan lines ( push down), center line, center page, roll display, page delay, repeat message, end of page, horizontal and vertical margin control. Adjust character spacing, italicize, set color table.
ters, words, lines. Select fonts, character colors, palette, edge
· Edit functions: New line. Character shift left, right, up, down.
types, edge colors, key color. Set tab, clear tab, right justify, center
Repeat message. End of message.
page, line or column. Italicize afont ( left or right), and display menu.
SPECIFICATIONS
Change character, word, line, color, font, edge, or edge color.
· System: Microprocessor based with ROM program
SPECIFICATIONS
· Interface: Multibaud rate serial RS232 interface. Max 9600 BAUD
· Power Requirements: 115 VAC at + /- 10%, 60 Hz and less than 100 watts ( 230 VAC, 50 Hz available)
· Packaging: PC board design with switching power supply, enclosed in a metal case with lighted power switch and all connections on rear of unit
· Frame Store: 32K bytes of run length encoding. Two frame stores to provide sequential picture generation. ( 35 nsec resolution)
· Packaging: Single PC board designs for computer and video with switching power supply. Enclosed in ametal case with power switch and video connectors on rear of unit
· Physical Characteristics:
·Power: 115 VAC, at + /- 10%, 60 Hz, and less than 100 Watts · Compliance: FCC
Keyboard: 7-5/8"D x 7/ 16"-1-3/8"H ( front- back) x 17-3/4W. 3 lbs.
Chassis: 20" x 3-15/32" x 17"
30 lbs. VP- 26
VP-1SG Video Printer
$8250.00
Additional Fonts Logo Compose
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
From $4395.00 From 100.00 From 100.00
CIPHER DIGITAL, INC.
10 Kearney Road Needham, MA 02194 (617) 449-7546
MODULAR TIME CODE SYSTEM
MODEL 6100 MODULAR TIME CODE SYSTEM
Model 6100 is an intelligent, modular time code system which provides all SMPTE time code functions, including the ability to simultaneously generate, read, display, and character insert-- SMPTE and EBU code, both longitudinal and vertical interval.
The modular design allows the user to select only those features required today. Future requirements may be easily and economically added, as needed, to a single, efficient, lightweight 3-1/2" by 19" stand-alone or rackmountable chassis. The system's powerful microprocessor and firmware offer unparalleled performance and functionality, while additional features such as a built-in time- of- day clock and RS- 232/422 computer interface insure total system flexibility and versatility.
MODEL 6100 SMPTE TIME CODE GENERATOR
Model 6100 generates the entire SMPTE code, including time data, user data, status bits, drop frame, or color frame and displays this data on alarge 8- digit LED display. It accepts the color field definition pulse required for high quality color video editing and generates code consistent with present as well as proposed SMPTE standards. The time base is selectable between external video sync or internal crystal reference. Application flexibility is provided by the choice of standard 30 frame, drop frame as well as 24/25 frame formats. Model 6100 offers both automatic and manual jam sync capability with look- ahead circuitry. In jam sync mode, the generator is automatically locked to a pre-recorded or externally generated code source, such that the original code may be continuously generated, even when the originating source is removed.
MODEL 6100 SMPTE TIME CODE READER
Model 6100 decodes and displays the entire SMPTE time code, including time data, user data, status bits, drop frame, or color frame and displays this data on a large 8- digit LED display. Reliable code reading at levels as low as - 25 dBm from 1/50 play speed up to 80 times play speed is facilitated. The extremely high sensitivity allows users to write code tracks at levels well below 0 dBm to minimize bleed through to adjacent program tracks.
It's ability to read deteriorated or poorly written code and reconstitute code with properly squared edges, restored rise times and amplitude without altering the time base is apowerful feature of the Model 6100.
CHARACTER INSERTER
In- video display feature provides up to three times code/user bits video displays. The character format of display is an alpha numeric 9 x7 dot matrix. The size, position and window are completely user
definable and variable.
VERTICAL INTERVAL TIME CODE READER/GENERATOR
May be originally ordered with VITC capability, or this capability may be easily added on site, as required. Vertical interval time code is reliably read from still frame to full wind- with- picture speeds. VITC to longitudinal conversion is also facilitated. The ability to add this capability to an existing unit saves the user both space and money.
PROGRAMMABLE TIME CODE RELAYS
A plug-in relay option to the Model 6100 provides 16 programmable, time- code- driven contact closures. The ability to turn ON and OFF various studio equipment or trigger aspecial effects cart machine or
other studio equipment is facilitated.
MODEL 6100 AND RELATED PRODUCTS
6100 System- with Control Panel 6110 Tach Pulse to Time Code Synthesizer 6240 Event Controller ( option)
$4900.00
795.00 1295.00
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
·SMPTE/EBU Reader ·Video Character Inserter ·True re- clocked time code output available in jam mode allows code
copying without degradation ·Unique forced-jam feature provides frame- accurate, glitch-free
change over from reading to generating. Sync is maintained. Drop-
outs or offsets are not introduced. ·Reverse jam- sync ability allows recovery of lost audio pre- rolls. ·VITC to longitudinal conversion upgrade of older video editors to
VITC capability. ·Ten time code memories are available for later use in cueing and
editing. ·Tachometer pulse driven time code generation allows use of film
projectors, film dubbers and editing tables. ·Generates tach pulses from time code for use with tach pulse based
auto locators. ·Reader to generator transfer of time code and/or user bits for
specialized editing applications. ·Built-in time-of- day clock for master time or user bit insertion is a
standard feature. Time code display, status, character size, and position are all accessed from both the optional front panel keypad and standard RS- 232C/422 computer interface.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 27
CIPHER DIGITAL,
10 Kearney Road Needham, MA 02194 (617) 449-7546
INC.
SYNCHRONIZER AND CONTROLLER
SHADOW II PLUS 1" SMPTE/EBU EDIT CODE SYNCHRONIZER/CONTROLLER
The Shadow II Plus System, Model 4700, is afully intelligent SMPTE/ EBU Edit code synchronizer and controller for audio, video and film transports. The system utilizes sophisticated adaptive control loop techniques to insure superior synchronization and interlock of virtually any combination of audio, video or film transports.
Shadow Il Plus is a complete, stand-alone system which provides control of the slave transport's capstan until phase error is adjusted to less than 1/100th of a TV frame; 1/3000 of a second to the audio engineer.
The System is further enhanced by an RS-232/422 computer interface, a standard feature of the Shadow II Plus. This interface allows studios to connect the Shadow II Plus to virtually any commercially available micro or mini computer as well as most video/audio editing systems. The Shadow II Plus, when interfaced to computer control, provides the ultimate in production flexibility. Users are free to control a virtually unlimited number of transports and perform complex edits in conjunction with ATR's, VTR's, mixing consoles, and other studio equipment.
The Shadow II Plus Synchronizer is completely compatible with, and may be interfaced to, the Softouch audio editing system for control of multiple ATR's, VTR's and sprocketed film transports for applications such as automatic dialogue replacement ( ADR I, sound effects assemble and sweetening.
Application Areas
The Shadow II Plus Synchronizer is currently satisfying customers in these and many other application areas: synchronization and control of multiple ATR's for audio post- production; synchronization and control of multiple ATR's and VTR's for audio for video post- production; synchronization of sprocketed film transports for audio for film post- production, and synchronization and control of film projectors and ATR's for corporate and institutional presentation requiring high fidelity sound.
ADDITIONAL FEATURES ·SHADOW locks to SMPTE/EBU Time Code, drop or non-drop
frame, video sync, 24- frame film code, and 60Hz tone, interchangeable.
·SHADOW reverts to tachometer pulses when auto locating, eliminating the need for high-speed reading of time code.
·24- hour offset in 1/100th frame increments facilitated. ·Typical interlock times between two to five seconds.
·sTpiemeed.code read accurately between 1/50 play speed to 80 times play · Unique selectable Slow Lock feature. ·Wow and flutter suppression circuitry assures stablest lock pos-
sible. · Battery back up
SHADOW PAD
The Shadow Pad Console, Model 4735, facilitates the remote control of amaster and slave transport. Multi-track audio, video or sprocketed film transports may be configured in any desired combination. The console's dedicated function keys and 10- digit LED display allow the user to select the speed and type of desired interlock as well as initiate GO TO and FOLLOW commands. Pre-programmed, subframeaccurate record- in and record-out of both master and slave transports are easily accessed. The console's LED display provides instant recognition of master and slave time code. The presence of drop frame code on any transport is displayed as are stored locations and offsets in hours, minutes, seconds, frames, and 1/100th frame.
SHADOW II PLUS
4700 -- SHADOW II System
4725 -- Master Transport Selector ( Three Machine) 4750 -- Tally Test Board
4760 -- Wide Band Reader 4770 -- Universal Film Dubber Interface
4735 -- SHADOW PAD Controller ( remote control for two transports)
7000 -- Packaged System, includes Model 4700
and Model 4735
$5595.00 1850.00 150.00 695.00 2500.00
2495.00
6995.00
VP- 28
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CIPHER DIGITAL, INC.
10 Kearney Road Needham, MA 02194 (617) 449-7546
SMPTE TIME CODE READERS/GENERATORS/
VIDEO INSERTERS
SMPTE Time Code Reader Model 710A
710A Features: · Low Cost · Wide Dynamic Input and Bandwidth
· Integral Video Character Generator · Low Profile 1-3/4" x 19"
Package
$ 2650.00
Reader/Generator/Character
Generator with Video Model 722A
722A Features: · Designed to provide complete generate, read and
video display capabilities in one cost-effective package · Drop Frame or Non Drop Frame mode, plus the insertion of User data · A wide
dynamic input and bandwidth allows it to read and display code from
1/20 to 100x VTR play speed · Selectable parallel data outputs, for
Time or User data
$ 4950.00
Time Code Generator Model 716A
716A Features: · Designed specifically for Television Studio and Pro-
duction Environments · Display and output of SMPTE time codes
· Internal Reader · Reference Sync inputs for video or film tach pulse ·Drop Frame Mode · Jam Sync · Sync lock $2650.00
SMPTE Code Generator Model 766
766 Features: · Generator Time and User Code · Internal or external Sync · Integral User Data Preset Switches · Fully Remote Controllable · Drop Frame Mode · Jam Sync Option · Real Time Clock Option
$3650.00
SMPTE Character Generator Model 700A
700A Features: · BCD Parallel Input · Keys Hexadecimal Characters
on to Video Signal 10-F) · Low Cost
$ 2450.00
SMPTE Time Code Reader Model 760
760 Features: · Wide Input Bandwidth · Reads Simultaneous Time
and User Data · Integral Video Character Generator · Dot- Matrix,
Hexadecimal Display · Low Profile 1-3/4" x19" Package
$3650.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 29
CMX CORPORATION
3303 Scott Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95050 (408) 988-2000 Telex 910-338-0554
EDITING SYSTEM
Model 340XL Videotape Editing System
Today CMX systems are used in every possible television application
from athree-hour network special, to aten- second spot, to industrial training tapes. Most Emmy Award winning television programs have
been edited using CMX. Agencies and producers have come to expect their programming to be edited on CMX.
APPLICATIONS
· Delayed transition gives you the advantage of simple and efficient single event scene-transition- scene edits.
·Time code trim allows you to think in minutes, seconds and frames, not just frames.
·Nine preview modes allow you to see all important scene information for precise edits.
· Master/Slave operation gives you automatic synchronization of separate audio and video sources.
LIST MANAGEMENT
The CMX Decision List is the computer's copy of your Master Program Tape. True speed and flexibility in editing requires the capability to develop scene sequences in any order, i.e., matching incoming and outgoing takes, then processing the list for minimum auto assembly time. 340XL systems have the unique ability to move blocks of events, renumber events in groups or the entire list, and sort in several ways allowing you to get maximum efficiency from automatic assembly.
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111.
340XL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
System Configuration
Distributed Processing
Central Controller
DEC Minicomputer
Device Interfaces
16 Bit Microprocessor Controllers
Device Interface Memory . EPROM
Communication Format. Serial / 9600 BD! RS 232
Communication Protocol . CMX 8Bit Binary
Edit Decision List Format .. Andustry Standard
Edit Decision List I / 0
Most DEC compatible Floppy Disk/
CRT Display Format
Papertape / High Speed Printer Devices 80 Characters per line/25 lines/50-60 Hz
Refresh Rate / Noninterlaced
Display Monitor
High Resolution CMX Terminal or any
Broadcast Video Monitor No. of Devices Assignable. . 24
No. of Devices Controllable 8
340X DISTRIBUTED
PROCESSING SYSTEM
011ie
Edit Accuracy Time Code Standards
Frame Accurate, Color Framed, PAL- pair
self-correcting SMPTE Drop/NonDrop Frame, EBU
Television Standards
NTSC/PAL/SECAM
Operators's Keyboard .. Expandable/Alphanumeric/Color Coded
Motion Control Device .. Rotary Control for search/Slow Motion/
Aremiyage·
um,.corm..
Frame Jogging ( memorized recall in
process)
Time Code Functions Set in time/Set multiple in times Set out time/Set multiple out times Set duration/Set multiple durations Trim in time/trim multiple in times Trim out time/Trim multiple out times Mar* in time/Mark multiple in times
Mark out time/Mark multiple out times Auto trim of record and source devices Clear (all) marks Reset (all) marks Recall marks (of specific event) Restore last mark
VP- 30
Edit Transition Selections
Cut
..antest -- Ra-
Dissolve from/to Dissolve durauon Wipe from/to Wipe code Wipe duration
Key in (background/foreground/duration)
Key out lbackgrouncVforegrouncVduration) Delayed key Key delay time Fade up from black Fade to black (14 different types of key edits possible)
Machine Control Functions
Rewind
Slow motion Jog backward
Fast forward Cue
Retard Jog rate
Play
Still frame Advance Jog rate
Stop
Jog forward All stol)
Preview Functions Full Edit
Record- source- record Record-blk-record Source-blk-source Blk-source-blk Blk-record-blk
Outpoint Source- record Record-blk Source-blk 81k- record Blk-source For Video Audio 1or 2
System Parameter Selection Event number Reel number ( specific) All reel numbers Preroll time Drop/nondrop 'rame Edit Mode Selection Video only Audio only Audio follow video Automatic Edit Assembly Functions Sequential Assembly Reel- by-Reel Assembly Enable for Assembly ( By Event # 1
Print out time Print duration Interface channel assignment Show start Title Switcher crosspoint assignment
Split edit delay audio Split edit delay video Any combination of Audio 1, Audio 2, and Video can be selected
Disable for Assembly ( By Event #1 Resume Assembly List Enabled Events List Disabled Events
Device Selection R--VTRATR A--VTFVATR B--VTR/ATR
List Management Sort by event number Sort by record time Renumber events
List Input/Output Load list Display fist Punch list
C--VTR/ATR
Move events
Read List
1:1--VTR/ATR
New record start time Scroll list up
E--VTR/ATR F--VTR/ATR
Delete events Pull up events
Scroll list down
AUX SOURCE BLK SOURCE
Model 340XL
$27,000.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CMX CORPORATION
3303 Scott Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95050 (408) 988-2000 Telex 910-338-0554
EDITING SYSTEM
The Edge'I Computer-Assisted Editing System
FEATURES ·Compact Design/ Fingertip Controls ·Smart Keys ·Internal Memory/Re-edit and List Rippling ·Auto Assembly ·VTR Mix ·Machine Control ·Time Code/Pulse Count Editing ·Built-in Dissolver ·Six Preview Functions ·340XL Edit Decision List Input/Output ·Competitively Priced
The Edge from CMX is atwo-source, one- record, computer-assisted editing system designed for broadcast, teleproduction, industrial, educational and government television applications.
Using The Edge, editors can perform dissolves, and produce aCMXstandard Edit Decision List with wipes and keys and delayed transition events. They can produce lists with new record start times as well as assemble automatically.
Two General Purpose Interfaces ( GPI's) are included to control autotransition switchers, digital video effects, character generators, and a variety of peripheral equipment. These GPI events, as well as splits (audio or video delays) and dissolve/wipe points, can be entered on the fly. Locating any point in ascene is smoothly and easily accomplished by asimple turn of the Reel Motion Controls.
The internal memory permits list manipulation which includes re-editing, list rippling, list scrolling, and event deletion.
Compact Design/Fingertip Controls The Edge is lightweight and compact. Al: controls are conveniently grouped together around the CRT and can be quickly manipulated.
Smart Keys
The operating console combined with the CRT screen and the six Smart Keys on each side of the screen provide you with an ongoing dialog with The Edge as you move through the editing process. The dynamic labeling of the multi- layered screens will change to identify each of the keys by the function being requested. The screens virtually "talk" to you at each editing level, giving you an unusually high degree of control and flexibility. They will work with you, even instruct you if necessary, but always keep pace with your train and speed of thought.
Auto Assembly The Auto Assembly function will assemble and deliver a polished, finished video tape in final form for screening from the scenes you have preselected. The assembly source can come from either apaper tape or an 8- inch floppy disk; output options available for The Edge.
VTR Mix The Edge will interface with 1- inch, 3/4-inch and 1/2- inch formats including VTRs from Ampex, Bosch, Sony, and RCA.
Six Preview Functions There is a full complement of Preview capabilities, including both In- Point and Out- Point, designed to provide flexibility, productivity, and give you, the editor, more time to concentrate on creativity without having to review unnecessary material. In- Point previews are: Video, Black, Video; Black, Video, Black; and Video, Video, Video only. Out- Points are Black, Video; Video, Black; Video Video.
Four Operating Mode Buttons The Edge has four operating mode buttons: Setup, Motion, Edit, and Marks. The Setup mode allows you to set up your edit sessions parameters, and provides for maintenance.
Time Code/Pulse Count Editing The Edge is Time Code- based and is switchable to Pulse Count when it is required. Using SMPTE Time Code, drop frame and non-drop frame may be mixed. The Edge is available in both PAL and NTSC standards.
Optional Audio/Visual The Edge will perform actual dissolves in the machine. ( External time base correctors are required.) Stereo audio can be added to this
function.
Internal Memory/Re-edit, List Ripple With the internal event memory, which features re-editing, list rippling, event deletion and list scrolling, you can essentially do your off-line editing with The Edge and build aCMX Edit Decision List. And this can all be done on acuts-only system, if desired. Through the availability of avariety of optional techiques, such as using The Edge audio/video dissolver or auto-transition control of a production switcher, you can complete your final auto-assembly on The Edge. If it's ahighly sophisticated production that requires numerous special
effects, you may wish to complete it from The Edge EDL on a340XL system.
THE EDGE. Priced from $9,200.00 to $ 18,400.00 depending on configuration.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-31
CMX CORPORATION
3303 Scott Blvd. Santa Clara, CA 95050 (408) 988-2000 Telex 910-338-0554
EDITING SYSTEM
CMX 3400 Editing Control System
APPLICATIONS
· Edit in the most efficient sequence, not necessarily chronologically
·Make changes to individual edits or groups
of edits without the necessity of constant re-recording
· Facilitate efficient on-line conforming of a work print
These tools can be used to:
·Rearrange events ( move asingle event or a block of events)
· Change program content by adding or deleting edits ( insert, delete)
· Change the master time positioning of an
individual edit and/or subsequent edits · Edit Decision List text editing without
altering edit time relationships ( renumber,
change mode, change transition rates, change reel numbers, change transitions, repeat event blocks)
· Easier list management through Auto Clean, which reviews the EDL for anomalies, eliminating unwanted duplicate events and cleaning over- records
· Multiple EDLs on one disk eliminates changing floppies everytime you change lists
·Text editing allows you to change elements of events other than playback and record in
and out times without having to re-edit each event one at atime
·The CMX3400 EDL has been expanded to increase flexibility and to store more infor-
mation in the list. Switcher memory registers contents, as well as triggers and master slave offsets, are among the additional information stored in the EDL. In addition, the editor now has the flexibility
Centerpoint Dissolve With the midpoint selected, the system will back up half the assigned transition rate and perform the dissolve.
Go To Sends the VTR to the edit point rather than to the preroll point.
All Simultaneous command and control of all assigned sources.
Selective Switcher Control Several levels of effects switcher control are available permitting freedom to work directly with the switcher to make audio or video crosspoint selections and fades.
· Look Ahead Auto Assembly that uses the full advantages of the minicomputer and Distributed Processing to minimize assembly time
· Delayed transition gives the advantage of simple and efficient single event scenetransition- scene events
·Time code trim allows thinking in minutes, seconds and frames, not just frames
·Nine preview modes allow you to see all
important scene information to precise edits
·Master/slave operation gives you automatic synchronization of separate audio and video sources
·Reel- by- Reel Auto Assembly tells you which videotape to put on and in what order
· Frame Bump allows synchronizing of out of sync tapes while machines are rolling
·Sync Roll locks isolation reels and separate audio sources together for real-time edits that are recorded in the CMX list
·General Purpose Interface allows up to eight peripheral devices to be activated from keyboard with up to sixteen commands per event
to assign four characters in alphanumeric
System Configuration _
Distributed Processing
nomenclature to reels such as DUB1, EFX2, as well as 001A through 999Z
Central Controller --
DEC Minicomputer
Device Interlaces
Micropmeess.ir Controllers
Device Interlace Memory _ EPROM
Communication Formal _ Serial 9600 BD RS- 732
·The CMX 3400 also gives you Motion
34e Communication %Wee _ 0p6k 8-6,1 Binary
Edit Decision List Format _ CMX 3100 CMX
CMX 50 SMPTE ( when nadabtel
Memory ( M 2 ) M 2 lets you program a
Edit Decision let I0 CRT Display Formal
Most DEC- compatible Floppy Disk Papertape High Speed Printer Devices 80 Characters per Line 25 Lines 50-60 He Retreh Rate Noninterlaced
VTR over its range of stable tape speeds:
Display Monitor _
High Resolution CAIX Terminal oi any Broadcast Video Monitor
No of Devices Assignable _ 24
you can stop motion, reverse, and allow
No of Devices Controllable _ 8
Edit Accuracy
Frame Accurate Color Framed PAL - Pau Sell- Correcting
variable tape motion for any event. Eight
Time Code Standards %WEE Drop NonDroP Frame E8U
Television Standards
NTSC PAL SECAM
sequences can be rehearsed and recalled by the system at edit time. Total memory is eight minutes
SPECIAL FEATURES Multi- Function Keys Each of these multifunction response keys is capable of executing an extensive series of editing functions with asingle keystroke.
Precue Equipment controlled by 12 ' s are automatically recued in preparation for the next event.
Transition Preview Provides dissolve or effect preview preceded by five seconds of the segment.
VTR Channel Assignment Simplified assignment of individual VTRs. Mark File Allows you to remember the frame, and the system to remember the time code, for later use. Duplication Function Use the system to
Opera?. sKeyboard
Expandable Alphanumeric Color Coded
Motion Control Device _ _ Rotary Control for Starch Slow Motion FrarrteJogging ( memorized recall in process)
Edit Transition Selections
Cut Dissolve From to Dissolve duration Wipe from to Wipe code Wipe duration
Key in ( background Foreground durationl Key out Mackground foreground duration) Delayed key Key delay lime Fade up from black Fade lo black
114 dilleren1 types ol key edits possiblel
Machine Control Functions
Sun Reverse Scan Rewind Fast lorward Play
Stop blem motion
SCtuilel Frame Jog Forward Jog backward Retard tog rate Advance log rate All slop
System Parameter Selection
Event numbers to 9999 Reel nomenclature-
4chancier alphanumeric %roll lime Drop nnndrop trame Print- our time Print duration
Time Code Functions
time code calcumicr Se intone Se inuMple ir times
Set ont time Set multiple out times Sel duration Sel multiple elinabOnS
teint in time Trm mintiplein times Trim out time Trim multiple out limes
Mark .ntime Mark multi)) e tunes Mark out time Mark multioteout times Auto trim ol tecord and source devices Clear ( all) marks Reset MI marks Recall marks lol specific event, Restore last marl
1r en,fc ol.iny menu digmyr ntime code
List Input/Output
load list Display list Punch list Read list Scro'l list up Scroll list down
List Management
Sort by went number Sort by Maud IMe Move eents Offset record start time Delete events Pull up events EDL lent ((litre
Renumber events Change modes Change trans.tron type
Change transition rate. Change reel numbers Repeal event block
Edit Mode Selection
Video Audio I Audio 2
Audio follow vide0 Split edit- delay audio Split edil delay video Any combination of Audio 1 Audio ? and
Video can be selected
Automatic Edit Assembly
Functions
Sequential Assembly Reel- by Reel Assembly look Ahead Sequential Assembly Enable for Assembly ( by event II Disable for Assembly iby event Ci Resume Assembly Lisl Enabled Events List Disabled Events
Device Selection
Master I A- source ( audio video) B· source laudo video)
C source ' audio widen -source mud. video,
E source ( audio video, t source'audio witeni Auxiliary source Black sourer
control playback and record VTRs for making duplicates.
Interlace channel assignment Show start Swqr hot tro,porn1
CMX 3400
VP- 32
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice,
Preview Functions
full Edil Record mnirce record Record blk recOirl Source-blk·source 81k-source-blk BIli record-blk Look Ahead record- source- record Transition Preview
Outpoint Source reentd Record XII Source blti 81k record 81k source Foi Vide Audio Ior 2
$40,000.00
CONVERGENCE CORP.
1641 McGaw Irvine, CA 92714-5661 (714) 250-1641
EDITING SYSTEMS
200 SERIES VIDEO EDITING SYSTEM
In aworld where ideas are manipulated by the medium in which they are expressed; where soaring creativity can be grounded by technology; there comes atool so sophisticated in design that once again the pure creative urge is set free...the 200 Series Video Editing Systems.
Each system in the 200 Series includes as standard the following features:
Actionilatch
Action Match calculates edit points to match action and sound anywhere within an edit segment. Audio-only or video-only inserts can be precisely matched to corresponding action or sound with joystick control and asingle keystroke.
Amber Status Monitor
An amber status monitor is included with each 200 System. The amber display was chosen after extensive testing which showed that it produced minimum eye strain while causing the least distortion of an oper-
ator's color perception.
Auto Duration
Utilizes the trim register to set the edit duration relative to either an in or an out point. This simplifies backtiming. critical inserts and animation style sequences.
Auto/Manual Assembly
Auto Assembly provides for automatic editing of asequence or an entire program following the instructions in the edit list. Any 200 Series editor will sequentially (in numeric order) auto assemble. Manual Assembly calls up the next edit automatically but actual performance of the edit relies on the operator. The 204 includes Checkerboard as well as Sequential Auto/ Manual Assembly.
AutoMatch
AutoMatch allows the operator to create matching source and record inedit points at any location within the previous edit. This automatically provides match frame edits for A/B rolls and effect transitions.
Auto Scene Store
In this mode asingle keystroke snapshots scene location by time code and reel number. Up to ninety-nine locations can be stored or listed. When recalled the time code address is readily available for high speed search or loading as an edit point.
Automatic Dialogue Replacement
ADR provides cue tones and a continuous audio record cycle for "looping - or post-dubbing of sound. It also can be used to replace video material.
Cleat*
Cleanit automatically cleans overlapped edits in the EDL one edit at a time during the off-line edit process. This program constantly checks the preceding edit to see if an overlap ha, occurred.
Color Framing
AColor Framing routine allows the edit system to monitor the color frame relationship for one-inch VTRs based on time code.
Control Track or SMPTE1BU Time Code
The editing system has the capability to operate in either control track or industry standard SMPTE/EBU drop frame or non-drop frame time code. The system also operates with any combination of control track or SMPTE/EBU time coded tapes.
High Speed Search Highspeed search allows the oper-
ator to program any tape time location (control track or SMPTE/EBU time code), and have the selected VTR search to that tape location.
List Scroll
List Scroll gives you joystick control to shuttle forward and backward through the edit list, including " cruise" for no-hands scrolling of EDL.
Manual Bump
Manual Bump allows for small
adjustments to roiling VIRs ti oil) tile keyboard to achieve precise syricr.ronization of multiple machines fur syrcroll.
Programmable Personality
Each model of VTR has an individual "personality" with regard to speed and response characteristics. In the 200 Series, personality switches tell the system what specific VTRs are cannected, providing greater control in cueing and searching.
Smart Shirt Smart Start learns the character-
istics of the VTRs in the system and makes adjuernents in the synchronization routines to accommodate variations in petformance.
Split AudioAtideo Edits
Split audio/video edits can be programmed with independent selection of audio and video in edit points.
200 SERIES
All 200 Series edit systems include keyboard console, status display monitor and electronic control unit. All systems include edit storage, auto assembly and basic Ist management. 202 Sync Roll System stores 250 edit lines, includes three interfaces. 202T Time Code/Sync Roll System same as 202 but includes TCR Time Code Reader.
203 A/B Roll System interfaces with effects switchers; stores 250 edit lines; VTR sync roll capability, includes three interfaces. 2037 Time Code / A/8 Roll System same as 203 but includes TCR Time Code Reader. 204 Advanced List Management System stores 800 edit lines, VTR sync roll. 409, block move and comments; includes three interfaces.
CONVERSION KITS
CK-202/203 Conversion Kit upgrades 202 to 203; includes memory board. CK-202/204 Conversion Kit upgrades 202 to 204; includes memory board and keycaps. CK-203/204 Conversion Kit upgrades 203 to 204; includes memory board and keycaps.
ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
AVS-100 Audio Video Switcher cuts-only (required for multi-source cuts-only systems) CG- 100 Command Generator (Option for 104/204 only) Remotely commands peripheral devices. CI-90 Character Inserter inserts time code digits into video being recotded, providing
'Window Dubs DD- 200 Dual Disk Drive ICC-100/5 Interconnect Cable for parallel I/O 1CC-100/20' Interconnect Cable for parallel I/O IFP-100 Interface Package specify VTR manufacturer and model number ( 1", 3/ 4 ", & 1/ 2 ").
1B-100 Junction Box required for multiple connections to parallel In) e.g., TCR and switcher.
LL- 100 Unlock Audio Pitch Corrector. P10-100 Parallel Input/Output provides parallel data to switcher, switcher interfaces, time code
readers and CG- 100. Must be purchased with switcher or switcher interface if no TCR in system.
RC- 100 Reader Card provides one time code channel capability to TCR
RMK-200E rack mount kit for Electronic Control Unit. RMK-200D rack mount kit for Disk Drive. SE- 100 Switcher Effects Unit audio follow video switcher with 23 wipe patterns. SWI-100/110 Switcher Interfaces includes J6-100 and appropriate cables; specify model/manufacturer of switcher to be interfaced. SWI-120 Switcher Interface includes 1B-100 and appropriate cables: specify model/Manufacturer of switcher to be interfaced. TCR Time Code Reader (formerly TCR-100) includes three reader cards, P10-100. Can be expanded for four channel capability.
200 Series Operators Manual 200 Series Operators and Maintenance Manual
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LIST
$13,500.00 $17,000.00 $19.000.00
$22,000.00 $25,000.00
$ 6,500.00 $14.000.00 $ 7,000.00
$ 2,200.00 $ 1.500.00 $ 1.500.00
$ 4,000.00 $ 175.00 $ 300.00 $ 1,000.00
$ 200.00 $ 1.500.00 $ 500.00
$ 800.00 $ 250.00 $ 250.00 $ 7.000.00 $ 2.000.00
$ 3.000.00
$ 4,500.00
$
50.00
$ 125.00
VP-33
CONVERGENCE CORP.
1641 McGaw Irvine, CA 92714-5661 (714) 250-1641
EDIT CONTROLLERS
EDIT * 006 SOURCE(D) RECORD(N) V Al ( JOYSTICK) ( PAUSE]
TIMER
1 10 52 10
III
7 33 42 26
IN OUT
1 10 52 10 1 11 04 00
7 33 42 26 7 33 54 14
EDIT DURATION PROGRAM LENGTH
1118 48 12
PREROLL= 5 SEC
LIPLOCK=ON
FADE=OUT
KEYBOARD= 1 12 84 12
TRIM
30
ECS-90 SERIES
The ECS-90 is alow cost microprocessor- based editing system designed to bring sophisticated joystick editing within the budget of every videotape producer. It is a plug-in system that provides variable speed tape motion control with most 3/ 4 "and 1/ 2 "editing VTRs.
The multi-format ECS-90 is particularly suitable for high speed ENG (electronic news gathering), EJ ( electronic journalism), remote production vans, educational and industrial productions, broadcast productions requiring asingle source, and as an off-line system for commercial post production.
The ECS-90 can be used for single or dual monitor editing, remote VTR rolls, back-timed edits, animation and manual edit listing. The ECS-90 operates on control track or industry standard SMPTE/EBU time code, and is available in NTSC or PAL versions.
The ECS-90 is human-engineered for ease of operation and is the fastest editor available in the industry. The dedicated twelve- button keyboard permits quick initiation of edit functions and communication with the editor and its options, Liplock® audio pitch control, and BLADE" black/ fade module.
The ECS-90 standard package includes a status display generator for quick and convenient video monitor display of edit data, two CCA control cable assemblies ( Y.," or 1 /2 "VTRs of customer's choice), one Operator's Manual and one Installation and Maintenance Manual.
FEATURES
· Plugs into most 3/.." and 1/ 2 "VTRs
· Joystick control of tape speed · Pulse Scan · Interchangeable VTR formats · High speed search · Cruise
· Full VTR remote control · Auto-tag · Recall feature · Built-in sync generator ·On- board computer
· Dynamic Edits
· Mark, set and trim in/out edit points
· Programmable pre- and post- rolls · Insert or assemble edits · Independent control of
audio and video channels
· Control track or SMPTE/EBU time code
· Abort capability
· Status display generator · Fastest edit controller available
ECS -90S -Super90 - EditControl System
Includes two CCA-90 Control Cable Assemblies, Time Code
Reader/Generator/Lister, one Operator's Manual, and one Installa-
tion and Maintenance Manual.
$6500.00
ACCESSORY CI- 90 Character Inserter
Inserts time code digits into video being recorded, providing " Window
Dubs".
$1500.00
PLUG-IN OPTIONS LL- 90 LiplockTm Audio Pitch Corrector
Corrects audio pitch to provide intelligible audio dialog monitoring
when tape is shuttled at fast or slow speeds.
$1,200.00
BL- 90 Blade" Black Generator And Fade Module Fades up from and/or down to black at in or out edit points. Includes internal black burst generator for prerecording color black on video tapes. ( Fades NTSC and PAL, Black Burst Generator NTSC only.)
$925.00
CCA-90 Control Cable Assembly Interfaces ECS-90 to VTR.
$650.00
RGL-90 Time Code Reader/Generator/Lister
Can generate drop or non- drop frame SMPTE/EBU Time Code on Record VTR. Reads both Source and Record time code
simultaneously. Lists edit decisions to RS- 232C storage devices such
as printers or disk drives. Includes everything necessary to upgrade an
ECS-90 to aSuper 90.
$3250.00
ECS-90 Edit Control System
Price includes two CCA-90 Control Cable Assemblies, one Operator's
Manual, and one Installation and Maintenance Manual.
$4500.00
SPARE PARTS
ECS-90 or ECS-90S Operator's Manual ECS-90 or ECS-90S Installation and Maintenance Manual RMK-90C Rack Mount Kit
$25.00 50.00
250.00
VP- 34
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CROSSPOINT LATCH CORP.
SWITCHERS/CONTROLLERS
95 PROGRESS STREET · UNION, NJ 07083 (201) 688-1510 · TELEX 9104901990
r. - "11 : · · · · ·
· -· : · -
rirrruftrrrriF4
rrrrrrrrrrri9
A
,
ardt
B efflelerler
AB
4/13
coemazujuguo
ciszUMULIED scsamma
6124
6109/7209
/MY
400 EVENT REGISTERS. 100 PROGRAMMABLE SEQUENCES is
available with the 6109/7209 combination. The switcher can store and
run sequences varying analog functions smoothly and simultaneously. Sequences can be stored on disc or in editors. Sequences can be
recalled' by editors and triggered to run. Each Event can be programmed for smooth transitions of upto 999 frames, and in addition to that adelay of
up to an additional 999 frames before the start of each smooth transition. Event registers can be recalled as static displays ( switcher control panel
status); 400 such registers are available. Or, the Editor can recall the
registers and " run" them on the switcher from the status of one Event
register to the next. Individual functions on the Stored Events can be altered with the unique " Edit" mode. The 7209 can be controlled fully by
most editors by means of RS232 or RS422 serial ports, or with parallel
6124 A four bus 12 input switcher with illuminated push- buttons. A chroma
keyer is standard ( either RGB or encoded).
There are two independent mix effects systems, each with its own pattern generator and positioner, border generator ( with individual luminance controls), keyer ( with internal, external, and chroma key modes), hard or
soft edge. The downstream keyer mattes the incoming signal, and has blink and invert. The pattern modulator with adjustable amplitude and frequency, can be switched into either ME system. The colorizer has hue luminance and saturation controls, and drives both border generators with complimentary colors. The chroma keyer has avariable delay line which is adjustable from the front panel for optimum keying. It can be switched into either ME, allowing wipes and dissolves behind as well as over a
interface. This is athree bus switcher with a32 pattern generator with automatic or manual operation. It has a built in RGB chroma keyer, and a second optional chroma keyer. It has adownstream keyer with edge, master fade
to black, can dissolve from abordered split wipe ( or from achroma keyer over asplit wipe) to athird signal. It has ablanking processor with aunique
test mode for system timing.
chroma key. The 6124 can be controlled by most editors by means of the 6403 Editor Switcher Interface. 6124A is available in 19" wide control panel with wide
LED type buttonS. Available in PAL 6124
413,700.00
Available in PAL 6109 7209
46,995.00 3,000.00
99 SEQUENCE OPTION
995.00
6112, 6112BH and 6112AK The 6112AK is amicroprocessor controlled switcher with two mix effects systems each with 12 individually positionable patterns. The two fader arms can be programmed to control not only the pattern size ( as with
conventional switchers) but also positioner. border width etc.. between
two limits. When so programmed, when the fader arm is moved from one of its mechanical limits to the other, the pattern moves from one of its
programmed electrical limits to the other. The programmed transition can be produced automatically by the microprocessor with duration times up to 999 frames. In addition to that the start of the transitions can be delayed
up to 999 frames each. The two mix effects systems can be programmed with different duration and delay times and can be triggered
simultaneously or independently. The 6112AK has adownstream matte
key with invert and blink. The optional chroma keyer is available either in RGB or Encoded. The switcher has nine inputs including colorizer, pattern modulator, Mix-Wipe which is a combination of mix and wipe independently controllable, dual back porch clamps, and blanking processor. The 6112 can produce awipe over awipe. awipe inside a
wipe, a wipe over or behind a chroma key. The blanking processor completely removes color sh.fts at the end of atransition. The 6112AK is
equivalent to the 6112 combined with the 6403.
The 6112 has the same production features without the programmable
features of the 6112AK.
The 6112BH is similar to the 6112 except for the incadescent lamp
buttons. All version of the 6112 can be used with the 6403 Editor interface. In
addition the 6112 can also be used with the 7239 AUTO DRIVE TM and the 7203 Programmable Editor switcher interface. All versions operate
with the 6800 Audio mixer.
A6 vailable i1 n PAL 12 6112BH 6112AK Chroma Keyers ( RGB or Encoded)
$ 7,950.00 10,500.00 10,900.00 1050.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 35
CROSSPOINT LATCH CORP. 1
95 PROGRESS STREET · UNION, NJ 07083 (201) 688-1510 · TELEX 9104901990
SWITCHERS/CONTROLLERS/ AUDIO & SYNC GENERATORS
MITO MOW' 7230
"
-11 NM 77-
g
Ili --
10.101VAI
-I
7; Roo
7239 Auto Drive TPA
Auto Drive is an extremely versatile programmable controller for the Crosspoint Latch " K" switchers. Its computer is capable of storing the configuration of the entire control panel and then making smooth or abrupt transitions from one configuration of the panel to the next. Each configuration is stored as an " event". Events can be grouped into sequences.
As a production tool, it enables artistic combinations of effects which could not possibly be achieved manually, to be generated with great precision and ease. Before editing, sequences can be programmed and then rehearsed live. Minor adjustments and trims ( or major ones for that matter) can be made to the program. Events may be added, deleted or changed. Sequences of events may be called up and reviewed at random. Sequences may be stored one way and played back in reverse. Elaborate sequences may be set up slowly, at the convenience of the operator, then by programming a short duration for each event, the sequence can be run through rapidly and without mistakes. Programming
7239 Auto Drive is much faster than editing because no time is lost waiting for tapes to rewind and roll. By performing most of the effects before editing, agreat deal of post production time is saved.
As an editing tool, the 7239 Auto Drive can be programmed to perform effects and switching for multiple roll edits. Since the programming is done with its own computer, interface with editors is very simple, via an
RS232 serial port. The cost of acomplex switcher to editor interface is eliminated.
AUTO DRIVE TM. is the most sophisticated controller in the industry. It
has 256 Events each of which consists of the entire control panel of the
switcher and any number of which can be grouped into sequences which can be run in either direction. Manual fader arm movements can be
stored, then " run" with all analog functions being controlled smoothly from
1 one switcher panel configuration to the next. Stored Events can be very
easily modified, with the unique Crosspoint Latch " Edit" mode.
Interfaces with most Editors
812,500.00
6800 Programmable VTR Audio Mixer
The 6800 has been designed primarily for use with VTR editing
controllers. It can perform automatic cuts and mixes, with durations
accurately programmable up to 999 frames. It has five stereo inputs with individual gain controls for each channel. The two channels ( tracks) may
be reversed at the output, or combined into either output channel. This
allows the use of the SMPTE time code on the free audio channel of the
recording VTR. The input selection may be manually overriden by switches on the front panel. Mixing may also be performed manually form
the front panel, if required. Each output channel has again control with a
center detent. A separate LED type VU meter is provided for each set of
stereo inputs. Both mixers are simultaneously controlled by asingle
slider or by the automatic ramp generator
$ 3,500.00
vein ··,..1.1
oniaè,
!le 03
7
OS
WI
6403 Editor/Switcher Interface
The 6403 is an active interface unit which allows most Crosspoint Latch switchers to communicate directly with VTR editing controllers. It greatly enhances the versatility of the more sophisticated editors by increasing the capability of their effects and mix functions. It adds the capability of effects and mix to simple editors. It has programmable start to finish points, for effects and mixes, along with an internal duration counter which may be set from one to 999 frames.
The 6403 is very flexible. It has several modes of operations. In one mode it accepts and stores commands such as duration time, pattern selection, input selection, etc., directly from an editor; and then executes the commands at the required instant. In another mode, where greater capability than that afforded by the editor is required, the start and finish points may be set manually from the 6403 control panel. The editor then merely issues the run command at the appropriate time. This function is
especially useful, since most editors, even those capable of A- Brolls can only produce complete wipes. The 6403 enables an edit to be performed with apattern or amix starting from any point and ending at any level (for instance ahorizontal wipe which stops in the middle). This enables even the simplest editors, which are only capable of performing cuts, to execute partial wipes during the edit.
One of the problems inherent in most editor-switcher combinations, is that when duration time is defined, the effect or mix almost always starts late and finishes early. This results in a shorter duration than that specified. This problem is especially apparent on wipe patterns, because of the overrun necessary for positioners. The 6403 completely eliminates the problem. The start and finish points can be precisely defined even with an offset positioner.
Interfaces with most Editors $ 2,750.00
Editor Module 995.00
6006B Sync Generator
This is acomplete sync distribution system, with afull set of distribution amplifiers included in the package.
There are four ( independently) phase adjustable pulse amplifiers, switchable to either sync or horizontal drive. There are also five subcarrier distribution amplifiers, four of which are independently adjustable through afull 360 degrees.
Four black burst outputs are provided for genlock type cameras which are independently phase- adjustable for both horizontal and subcarrier from the front panel. 3-1/2" rack.
This unit is extremely compact, occupying only 1- 3/4"of rack space. It is
ideal for small studios, where in most cases, no additional drive
distribution amplifiers are required
$ 1,990.00
6006C Sync Generator
This unit features two black burst outputs, with the addition of NTSC
full field color bars. 3-1 / 2" rack
$1,990.00
6803 Audio Follow Mixer
This is an audio follow mixer for the 6112 and 6124 video switchers. It is
similar to the 6800, but has no input selector button for break-away
audio and no tone generator
$2,500.00
VP-36
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CROSSPOINT LATCH CORP.
95 PROGRESS STREET · UNION, NJ 07083 (201) 688-1510 · TELEX 9104901990
SWITCHERS/CONTROLLERS/ AUDIO & SYNC GENERATORS
6119 The 6119 is a3bus, 6input switcher. This unit features 12 wipe patterns with positioner, soft edge and bordered wipes. There is afull spectrum colorizer. Includes blanking processor and test mode for system timing.
The 6119 has a unique EFFECTS DOWNSTREAM KEYER, which replaces the colored border with amatte key, ( thus producing amatte key over an Effect, and this entire combination can be dissolved to black. The
6119 can dissolve from abordered wipe to athird input.
The 6119 also offers both manual and automatic transitions which can be external GPI interface. The standard switcher has genlock, four black burst outputs ( to lock four other devices), and provision for expansion
pattern generator.
Not available in PAL
6119
8 2,400.00
OPTIONS *RS107A Sync Generator *Microprocessor Board for full RS232 or 422 Control
*Extended Pattern Generator
8 100.00 1,850.00 TBA
Model 8000 TIBEC TM
NEW Time Base Corrector which can lock two VTR'S.
The 8000 makes it possible for the first time to have afull bandwidth, high quality A- B roll system with asingle PBC.
The 8000 produces clearly recognizable pictures even when one VTR is in fast forward while the other is in rewind. It has avirtual " infinite window".
The 8000 can also be used in the conventional manner ( one PBC for each VTR). Used in this way it is just a high quality PBC.
8000
$8,996.00
r 4
· 4 · · ·
·· ·
1
0
9
12 00
a c.
o
4 1.
à a wig
ermerree ernmeria
ereerere eramena
. 3
L;;
P.94.i9
6150BK Master Control Switcher
Programmable microprocessor controlled switcher. Two events memory directly selectable on the control panel. Real time clock. Serial communication between control panel and electronics. Automatic or manual fader operation. With the addition of the SMART INTERFACE BOARD the 6150BK can be accessed serially from external programmer
or computer. Single or dual channel audio. Sixteen inputs, with four input
downstream keyer. Voice over with automatic 4db " duck". Options for machine control, printer driver. Includes blanking processor and test
mode for system timing. 6150BK
$ 15,900.00
Dual Audio
3,300.00
6026
Encoded Chroma Keyer and Video mixer. 1-3/4" rack mountable,
horizontal positioner, dual outputs for midstream and downstream
chroma keying. 6026
$ 3,500.00
6700 Matrix Switcher
This is an 8input RGB Matrix switcher for selecting RGB inputs used for multiple camera chroma keying. Outputs of switcher goes into RGB
chroma key inputs on switchers. Can be controlled from 6112,6124 and
68 139 sw7 itchers.00
$ 1,990.00
6116/7209 Microprocessor controlled COMPONENT
SWITCHER
Basic unit has four EVENTS which can be simply programmed and run automatically under internal computer control. Each EVENT consists of the entire configuration of the control panel. The 7209 can run smooth transitions controlling all functions on the panel simultaneously. The 7209 interfaces with most editors, with the SMART INTERFACE BOARD.
The 6116 handles four component inputs ( any format) and three encoded
signals. The switcher will not perform effects between encoded and component formats without an external transcoder. The Y channel can
handle both 7encoded inputs ( when not used for component signals).
The switcher has an optional chroma keyer, 32 pattern generator,
bordered wipes, amatte downstream keyer, fade to black, and three video
buses permitting a dissolve from a split wipe to a third input. Includes
blanking processor and test mode for system timing.
6116
$ 16,000.00
7209
3,000.00
SMART INTERFACE BOARD
1,000.00
6029 Genlock Unit Generates sync and subcarrier from black burst or composite video.
Locks to VTR. Automatic change over switch to external sync and
subcarrier inputs on loss of video. Requires DC supplies derived from
6112, 6124, or 6139 switchers.
6029
$ 407.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-37
ICROSSPOINT LATCH CORP. 1
95 PROGRESS STREET · UNION, NJ 07083 (201) 688-1510 · TELEX 9104901990
SWITCHERS/CONTROLLERS
.111 an
MMM
1111! 11·11
41111 111, MMM
M
6139 Series 8, 16, or 24 Inputs
LED or Illuminated Push Buttons
The illuminated push button versions have 32 patterns for each ME system, ( instead of 12 each for the other version) and the pattern selection is by means of momentary illuminated push buttons.
This series of switchers has tremendous production power. Available in three sizes, 8, 16, and 24 inputs with either the illumiinated, or the more
cost effective LED type push buttons. A unique feature of the 8 input version ( with LED buttons) is that it can be expanded in the field to a16 input switcher.
All versions of the 6139 have six buses and three mix-effects systems; colorizer; pattern modulator with freeze; downstream keyer with edge and external border; quad split; master fade to black; spot -lite; mix pattern mode between ME1 and ME2; an effects unit which can either key or mix
the program bus over the other three ME's or over quad split. Aunique test mode ( the simplest one ever conceived) for system timing and ablanking processor which completely eliminates color shifts on mixes and wipes are also standard on all units.
The 6139 " K" switchers can be controlled with AUTO DRIVE TM, by far
the most powerful controller in the industry, which stores the entire control
panel status 256 times, learns manual fader movements, has unique
"EDIT" Mode, and interfaces with most editors.
$ 12,500.00
Rotary and Matrix Wipe Option is available for the 16 and 24 input switchers. With this option it is possible to select atotal of 96 patterns,
which include matrix wipes ( 8x8) squares, rotary wipes and multiple patterns.
All switchers interface with most editing systems by means of the 6403 or 7200 interface unit. Additional options include two chroma keyers, RGB or encoded and dual colorizers.
6139 6139AK 6139AH
6139AHK
$ 14,500.00 16,000.00 22,500.00
24,000.00
6139B 6139BH 6139BK
6139BHK
6139C 6139CK 6139CHK
$ 21,799.00 37,299.00 23,299.00
38,299.00
28,299.00 29,799.00 50,299.00
OPTIONS Chroma Keyer ( RGB or Encoded) Additional colorizer 6035 External Pattern Generator
with rotary wipes 6032 Remote control panel for
dual colorizer
$1050.00 500.00
3000.00
600.00
ULLLLLU 1-1-1-1
;t,,_.
b. 11 11 t`,,,t,t:e- ,`,,,, e
1,. . , Ct1s--) 3.-,,t) L1-1, titil .. ai
,,,,.ti LCUJJ
VP-38
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
DATUM, INC. 1363 S. State College Blvd. Anaheim, CA 92806 (714) 533-6333
PROCESSORS AND TIME CODE EQUIPMENT
5300 INTELLIGENT TIME PROCESSOR With an optimum blend of state-of-the-art LSI and VLSI circuitry including amicrocomputer, Datum has introduced the Model 5300 Intelligent Time Processor ( ITP). This economical and flexible time processing package allows the user to make full use of his video resources in today's demanding broadcasting, post production, and industrial environments.
The Intelligent Time Processor can produce SMPTE/EBU time code simultaneously with user bits, vertical interval time code and video characters. The 5300 will operate in NTSC to the RS- 170A specifications or in PAL to the EBU 3079-E specification.
A numeric key pad for data entry and high efficiency LED readouts combine to achieve an exceptionally attractive and highly functional front panel assembly. The slimline design occupies aminimum of standard rack cabinet space. All input and output signal connections are mounted on the rear panel.
The ITP reads standard serial code at speeds ranging from 1/3 to 90 times normal play speed in both directions without experiencing any frame decoding delay.
In addition, the system will automatically revert to reading vertical interval time code when reading down to still frame to insure complete code reading reliability.
STANDARD TIME CODE: MODEL 5300
The Intelligent Time Processor generates time code from data which is either preset through the front panel keyboard or dubbed from an external source. Special modes have been created which allow the ' user bits' portion of the code to update as an independent time generator or to be jam sync'd to serial time code from an external source. The ITP also produces color frame correct time code.
VERTICAL INTERVAL TIME CODE: MODEL 5301 This is an optional feature that provides the ITP with the capability to both generate & read VITC in the proposed industry standard. Any two lines in the vertical interval from line 10 through & including line 20 can be selected. In the read mode, the ITP decodes VITC independently of its recorded position in the vertical blanking
interval.
TIME CODE CHARACTER GENERATOR:
MODEL 5302
The optional time code character generator makes use of a black mask background for either recording or displaying characters in the video picture. The vertical and horizontal positioning of the characters is controllable from the front panel together with character
height and width.
CONFIGURATION SUMMARY 5300 Standard T/C Reader/Generator 5301 Vertical Interval Time Code
5302 Character Generator 5303 Includes all features
$4150.00 4550.00
4550.00 4950.00
Field Upgrade Kit VITC Field Upgrade Kit CG
500.00 500.00
The ITP, a unique combination of demanding features for professional time processing, allows the user to make use of such
features as time code dubbing, ' user bits' manipulation and synchronization, standard SMPTE/EBU and VITC generation and
decoding, and clear, crisp video character display.
The TTL compatible input signals into the rear panel parallel connector permitting the ITP to be remotely controlled. A rear panel
mounted toggle switch is used for selection of EIA RS170A/NTSC or PAL compatible video signals.
VP- 39
DATUM, INC. 1363 S. State College Anaheim, CA 92806
Blvd.
(714) 533-6333
5350 SMPTE TIME CODE GENERATOR
PROCESSORS AND TIME CODE EQUIPMENT
The Datum Model 5350 generates industry standard time code in the SMPTE/EBU specified format. Front panel thumb wheel switches allow for user-definable setting of hours, minutes and seconds. Additional user accessible front panel switches allow for such useful functions as drop frame/non-drop frame format and generator start and stop.
The current time count is clearly displayed through the use of high efficiency red LED indicators located on the front panel.
Time code serial output is at the rear chassis through standard balanced XLR connectors. In addition, buffered parallel BCD code is also available for use with other Datum peripherals such as the Model 5370 time code character generator.
Code synchronization is achieved through astandard BNC connector requiring composite sync or video
input reference to achieve properly locked time code. PAL ident connectors are also available.
A front panel indicator displays the presence of sync failure when it occurs. The Model 5350 and all of its features are combined in astandard 19" rack mount package requiring minimum panel space.
5350 SMPTE Time Code Generator
$ 1850.00
5360 SMPTE TIME CODE READER
The Model 5360 Time Code Reader processes SMPTE/EBU time code ranging in speed from 1/5 to 60 times normal play speed fLrEoDm raenaydocuotmspamtoiublnetesdouornce.theThferonttrapnasnlealt.ed information is displayed in hours, minutes, seconds and frames by highly efficient
The hold feature of the 5360 allows the user to 'freeze the display for data logging purposes. A front panel lamp indicates the presence of drop frame/non-drop frame code.
To prevent the unit from translating invalid data (due to occasionally poor input signal quality), the Model 5360 allows for the bypassing of one, two, four, or
eight frames of code before the internal displays are updated. The time code reader rear panel has input facilities for balanced or non-balanced XLR video input. Buffered paralleled BCD output at TTL compatible levels is available from arear panel
connector for use by Datum's Model 5370 Time Code Character Generator and other external devices.
5360 SMPTE Time Code Reader
$ 1550.00
5370 TIME CODE CHARACTER GENERATOR
Incorporating numerous user-defined functions in acompact 19" rack mountable package, the Datum Model 5370 is able to superimpose up to eight SMPTE/EBU time code characters and three alpha characters on astandard video signal.
The numeric characters reflect the SMPTE/EBU time code in hours, minutes, seconds and frames as translated through input sources such as the Datum Model 5360 Reader or the Model 5350 Time Code Generator. Additional rear connectors facilitate input for video background, composite sync and mixed output or characters only.
Front panel switches and controls facilitate character positioning vertically and horizontally in addition to character height .and width selection.
As an added enhancement, the user may select either characters with mask, characters alone or remote control operation at the touch of aswitch.
Three additional alpha characters can be superimposed by user selectable internal jumpers.
The Model 5370 Character Generator is fully compatible for use with Datum products and
represents the state-of-the-art design in SMPTE/EBU time code equipment.
5370 Time Code Character Generator
VP-40
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice,
$ 1680.00
ECHOLAB, INC.
175 Bedford Road Burlington, MA 01803 (617) 273-1512
PRODUCTION SWITCHER/ PULSE CROSS
SE- 1G 4Input S.E.G. for use with up to 5video sources, one of which may be a VCR playback. 4 blackburst outputs simplify system connections with the new genlockable B-411 cameras. Rack mount or desk top.
SE- 1G
$ 1695.00
SE- 3
SE- 2VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHER
·Direct plug compatibility with many cameras · Revolu-
tionary Soft Take · Built-in phase shifter and sync DA's
·Single box, only 3-1/2" depth The SE-2is the ideal switcher/special effects generator for
PCD
medium sized color studios. Designed for ease of installa-
tion, the SE-2includes many features which are normally
purchased in separate boxes. A sub- carrier phase shifter
and acomplete set of five standard sync pulses are built-in at no extra cost. Another important feature is a 400-hs
PCD PULSE CROSS DISPLAY ·Waveform Sampler Pulse Cross Display · Distribution
window of acceptable sync timing; this means that aslight
mis-phasing of camera inputs has no effect instead of
causing alateral shift during effects.
SE- 2
$3195.00
Amplifier
The PCD is the most effective and economical tool for monitoring video quality for small applications. The input to be monitored is a1V p-pcomposite video signal. Six SO-239
SE-3PRODUCTION SWITCHER
connectors provide two different types of output signals:
·Computer control of all switching and effects · Contact
display and distribution.
closure editing interface ( standard) will initiate any preprogrammed event · 12 inputs, including black and back-
The Display outputs carry unmodified input video until Display Select switch is pushed. Pulse cross or waveform
ground · 3 mix-effects circuits, 2 border generators ·1color background, 2 color matte generators · Front-
sample displays may be selected separately or in combination. Four isolated distribution amplifier outputs are also
panel programmable with up to 5000 steps · Remote
available: these outputs are not affected by the display
control panel with coax or 5-wire cable, or clamps together for single- box 19" x 12" x 7-1/4" · Quad splits · Reentrant effects · ECHOlab's patented soft take · 1-3/4"
select switch. The Waveform Sample Display acts as an oscilloscope for monitoring video functions such as amplitude, pedestal level, excessive white peak clipping and 60
front panel depth ECHOlab's revolutionary switcher/ special effects genera-
cycle noise. Instantaneous video level is sampled once per horizontal line and displayed as the horizontal displacement
tor, the SE-3, makes available exceptional performance for
of avertical white stripe which is added to the Display video
a low price. A powerful built-in Z-80 microcomputer re-
outputs. Two additional vertical stripes act as acalibrated
places most of the digital logic found in other switchers and
graticule, representing pedestal level and peak white level.
also allows user programming.
These are factory-set for a1V p- psignal but may be recali-
SE-3with contact closure interface
$16,000.00
brated with internal trimpots. Pulse Cross Display reposi-
Options Full Remote Control Interface Chroma Keyer
$2225.00 1650.00
tions the monitor picture to make sync and blanking pulses visible. Serration, equalizing, and blanking pulse timing can be quickly verified. Vertical interval test signals ( VITS) and VTR head switching transients can be monitored. Editing
SG-4A Full genlock color sync generator with automatic
VTRs can be tested for tape tension, servo lock and proper
sync and sub- carrier switches and vertical ratelock . $945.00
sync. Since the color burst is displaced in pulse cross
CBB Full field color bars generator
$365.00
operation, color sync will be lost on the display outputs
TIM Tally- Intercom Master, built-in
$400.00
only. In all other modes, broadcast color specifications are
SE/2-SG4/CBB ' A' Combo SE/2-SG4A'B' Combo
SE/2-CBB'C' Combo
$3995.00 $3695.00
met. PCD
$3560.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$495.00
VP-41
EECO
Incorporated
COMPUTER CONTROLS FOR VIDEO PRODUCTION
TIME CODE READERS/ GENERATORS
MTG-550 LONGITUDINAL TIME CODE GENERATOR
switch selectable time code update modes are provided: time-of-day,
in which time code updates continuously as long as power is on; and elapsed time, in which time code updates only when recording. Other
design features and operating capabilities which uniquely qualify the PTG-560 for ENG/EFP include:
A compact and versatile longitudinal time code generator packed with useful features. Outputs continuous serial SMPTE/EBU standard drop
frame or non-drop frame time code with or without user bits for use in laying down longitudinally recorded time code tracks on video and audio
tapes and magnetic film. Front panel thumbwheel switches for presetting starting time values and for manually entering user bit data. Front panel selectable slave mode allows starting count to be picked-up from apreexisting time code track, an invaluable feature for generating continuous time code tracks in assembly editing applications and for reconstructing damaged sections of time code tracks. Accommodates awide variety of sync references: AC line; NTSC, PAL or SECAM composite video.
Additional features which make the MTG-550 an outstanding value include:
· Easily understood control panel with visual and audible status alarms/displays.
·Manual user bit entry with full hexadecimal capability. ·HOLD pushbutton that allows time code count to be frozen and re-
sumed from front panel. ·Binary word and hexadecimal display modes. ·Selectable time code frame rate: 25 fps or 30 fps. ·Parallel BCD time and binary word output lines capable of driving TTL
loads.
·Parallel binary word input lines. ·Compact, low power, high reliability design utilizing CMOS logic and
EECO's exclusive custom LSI time code generator I.C.
MODEL NO. MTG-551 MTG-552 MTG-553
DESCRIPTION NTSC PA L- B SECAM
PART NO.
PRICE
260182-01 $2,995
260182-02
3,230
260182-03
3,350
PTG-560 PORTABLE TIME CODE GENERATOR
A precision battery operated longitudinal time code generator expressly designed for portable use in ENG/EFP applications. Synchronized either to an internal crystal oscillator or to the video signal, the unit sup-
plies continuous serial SMPTE/EBU standard time code with or without numerical user bits for use in laying down longitudinally recorded time
code track simultaneous with recording of video/audio material under field production conditions. Dual function thumbwheel switches preset starling time values and also specify numerical user bit values. Two
·Compact, lightweight and rugged packaging with mounting hardware designed for quick, secure piggyback installation on most popular portable VTRs.
·Operating temperature range of 32 to 104 degrees Farenheit for allweather performance.
·Low power consumption design utilizing CMOS logic, EECO's exclusive custom LSI time code generator I.C., and an LCD time code display. 1000 hours typical operation from standard 9.0 volt battery.
·RESET pushbutton that clears time code value to zero. ·HOLD position on operating mode switch that allows time code count
to be frozen and resumed manually.
·Bright electroluminescent backlight on LCD time code display that provides excellent readability at night and under low ambient light conditions.
MODEL NO. PTG-560
PART NO.
PRICE
260236-01 $ 1,495
TCR-650 TIME CODE READER
A full-feature time code reader capable of reading serial SMPTE/EBU standard drop frame or non-drop frame time code with or without user bits from video and audio tapes and magnetic film at forward or reverse speeds of 1/16th to 60 times normal play. The decoded time code is displayed on a front panel readout that is switchable between SMPTE/EBU time format and user bit format. Decoded time code is also
output via serial and parallel interface ports for use by computer con-
trolled editing systems and studio automation computer systems. At play speed, squared and buffered restored serial time code is output for use in time code dubbing. For added versatility, transport tachometer pulses can be used alone or in conjunction with SMPTE/EBU time code inputs to update the time code outputs and display. This capability allows time
code synthesis from sprocketed equipment lacking provisions for atime code track, and also allows automatic switchover from time code input to tach pulse updating whenever invalid time code is detected. Additional features which make the TCR-650 aversatile performer include:
·Automatic frame rate detection circuit that automatically compensates for incoming time code rates of 24, 25 and 30 fps and for drop frame/non-drop frame format.
·Locally or remotely selectable frame blanking that suppresses frame display on front panel time code readout.
·Locally or remotely commandable HOLD that freezes time code/user bit display and outputs; terminating HOLD allows display and outputs to resume updating from current time code input value.
·Microprocessor technology and CMOS logic are employed to achieve
compact size, low power consumption and operational flexibility.
MODEL NO.
TCR-651 TCR-652
DESCRIPTION
Basic Unit With time code synthesis from tach pulses
PART NO.
260202-03 260202-04
PRICE
$2,995 3,240
VP-42
EECO Incorporated, 1601 E. Chestnut Ave., Santa Ana, CA 92701 Phone: ( 7141835-6000, TVV)( 910-595-1550, Telex 67-8420
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
EECO
Incorporated
TIME CODE READERS/ GENERATORS
COMPUTER CONTROLS FOR VIDEO PRODUCTION
VCG-750 VIDEO CHARACTER GENERATOR
Aversatile microprocessor based reader/character generator that reads
SMPTE/EBU standard time code from any source at speeds from zero to 60 times normal play. From this input, the unit extracts tape time and user bit data and outputs this data as video characters which may be "burned" into or superimposed over source video on amonitor. Reads longitudinal and vertical interval time code, with automatic switchover to VITC if longitudinal code becomes invalid. Features include:
·Compatible with 24, 25 and 30 fps drop frame and non-drop frame SMPTE/EBU time code inputs; frame rate and drop frame status are automatically detected and compensated for.
·All current video standards accepted as source video inputs ( NTSC,
PAL, and SECAM). ·Tape time and user bits may be displayed on monitor alone or together,
and are independently positionable vertically and horizontally; " smart" positioning controls prevent displays from overlapping. ·Tape time display includes video field readout at play speed and below. Frame blanking command allows frame and field characters to be
suppressed. ·Selectable character heights of 28 or 42 raster lines; variable density
black background mask may be added for increased legibility. ·Remote HOLD command freezes displayed tape time/user bits; display
updating resumes from current time code input value when HOLD
is released. ·Parallel interface outputs decoded time code/user bit data for use by
computer controlled editing systems, synchronizers or studio automa-
tion computers. All front panel enable/disable functions remote con-
trollable via TTL interface.
MODEL NO. VCG-751
VCG-752
DESCRIPTION Basic Unit With VITC
Reader
PART NO. 260225-01 260225-02
PRICE $3,660
4,560
VIG-850 INTELLIGENT TIME CODE GENERATOR/READER
chronizing videotaped programming. The unit's video inserter can suppress VITC present in incoming source video and re-insert slaved VITC into the outgoing source video, making the VIG-850 ideal for laying down continuous VITC on edited master tapes produced on VITC-only or mixed VITC/longitudinal time code video tape editing systems. A sampling of the VIG-850's many features includes the following:
·Flat membrane switch control panel with audible actuation feedback. · Microprocessor control with sophisticated firmware that allows
simultaneous reader/generator operation, guards against improper time code entries, prevents conflicting commands, inhibits operation in modes requiring signal inputs not available, and automatically switches certain signal inputs to backup sources if prime sources are not
present. · Front panel time code readout assignable between reader and
generator, time-of-day or user bit display. Full hexadecimal capability
and commandable frame blanking. ·HOLD command that freezes reader time-of-day/user bit display without
affecting generator output updating. ·Time code output available via SMPTE bus for interface to computer-
controlled editors, synchronizers and studio automation equipment. ·Compatible with NTSC and PAUSECAM video standards.
MODEL NO. VIG-850
PART NO.
PRICE
260234-01 $ 5,490
VIR-950 VITC READER
An advanced time code reader capable of recovering and decoding
SMPTE/EBU time code and user bits recorded in the video vertical blanking interval at tape speeds from freeze-frame to 45 times normal play, forward and reverse. Front panel time code readout is switchable from
time code to user bits display. An additional readout element indicates the video field, providing indexing resolution to one half frame. Recovered time code is also output via a serial SMPTE bus for use by external
equipment such as computer controlled editing systems and syn-
chronizers. An automatic tach pulse update mode is provided, in which time code count is derived from transport tachometer pulses in the absence of readable VITC. Additional operating capabilities and design features which make the VIR-950 aversatile production tool include:
The do-everything time code instrument! Reads and decodes vertical
interval time code (VITC) with user bits from input video at speeds from
freeze frame to + 45 times play. Generates continuous longitudinal time code and/or VITC, with or without user bits, from manually preset values, from external sources, slaved to decoded VITC from the reader or slaved to longitudinal time code input. Virtually any VITC/longitudinal time code conversion can be accomplished. A broadcast quality video inserter pro-
vides the means to insert generated VITC into source video. Display of generated and read time code and user bits, and avariety of informational and error messages is via amulti-function 8-digit front panel
·Frame blanking function that suppresses display of frame and field digits in time code readout at high tape wind speeds or in response
to local or remote blanking command. ·Local/remote HOLD command that freezes displayed tape time/user
bits; display updating resumes from current time code input value when
HOLD is released. ·Selectable VITC frame rate of 25 or 30 fps; selectable tach pulse rate
ranging from 1to 30 pulses/frame. ·Compatible with NTSC and PAUSECAM video standards. ·SMPTE bus interface over which all front panel controls are remoted
and decoded time code/user bit data and unit status are output. ·Microprocessor control with powerful firmware that prevents conflic-
ting operator commands, checks and processes VITC in real time, automatically executes acomplete self-test sequence at power- up and performs maintenance diagnostics on command. · Compact, rack-mountable packaging. Flat membrane switch front
panel.
readout. The VIG-850's primary application is generating, reading, converting and slaving vertical interval and longitudinal time code for indexing and syn-
MODEL NO. VI R -950
PART NO.
PRICE
260235-01 $2,770
EECO Incorporated, 1601 E. Chestnut Ave., Santa Ana, CA 92701
Phone: ( 714) 835-6000, TVVX 910-595-1550, Telex 67-8420
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-43
EECD
Incorporated
COMPUTER CONTROLS FOR VIDEO PRODUCTION
IVES TM VIDEO TAPE EDITING SYSTEM
Definable System Parameters: Preroll time, postroll time, reel numbers, edit event numbers and control track editing starting time count are all user definable from the keyboard.
Printer Output: Print commands enable automatic hardcopy printer output of edit data as each edit is completed. Printout can be specified in CRT display format or CMX-compatible edit list format.
Recall Command: Lets you keep track of changes you make to existing edit data by allowing recall of the old value of the last data item changed.
Non-volatile Memory: When IVES is turned off during breaks or at the end of the day, all the information pertaining to the current edit is retained, and is immediately accessible when power is turned back on.
Auto Retry: If an edit is aborted due to VTR syncing problems, the IVES system automatically attempts the edit again, extending the preroll time to allow the VTRs alonger sync- up period.
PRE- AND POST- EDIT FUNCTIONS THAT MAKE IVES A COMPLETE POST- PRODUCTION SYSTEM: Copy: Just one button starts an automatic sequence that makes adirect copy from the play VTR to the record VTR, or vice-versa. Both tapes are rewound to their beginnings before the copy starts, and all audio, video and SMPTE/EBU time code routing is accomplished automatically through the internal routing switcher.
Stripe Tape: Another powerful one- button command. Automatically stripes either the record or play tape with continuous SMPTE/EBU time code and/or video colorblack and control track pulses. Before striping is begun, the tape(s) are rewound to the beginning and the starting count of the SMPTE/EBU code is preset to an operator designated value. All functions associated with the stripe tape sequence, including an NTSC sync generator, a video color- black generator and aSMPTE/ EBU time code reader/ generator for each VTR are included in the IVES system. An auxiliary video input jack is also provided for application of an externally generated color bar signal if color bars are desired instead of video color- black.
Record Time Code: Press this button and the designated play and/or record tapes are rewound to the beginning and then striped with continuous SMPTE/EBU time code. Starting count is automatically preset to an operator designated value before striping begins.
Audio Mixer and Monitor: Need to add audio background or voiceover to your edited master-- The capability is right on the IVES control panel. The internal audio mixer with front panel level and mix controls allows you to blend audio from afront panel mic input or an auxiliary audio line input with play VTR audio output as it is routed to the record VTR input. A 2- watt audio amplifier with front panel volume control lets you monitor either VTR's audio.
EDITING SYSTEM
"SMART" INTERFACES INSURE SMOOTH INSTALLATION:
Two self-contained interfaces for popular 3/4" and 11/2" VTRs are supplied as standard equipment on IVES. The interfaces are of plug-in design to facilitate fast conversion to different types of VTRs; no VTR modifications are required. The interfaces are capable of serving in both a
record or play capacity, as selected at time of installation, and all VTR manual motion controls are remoted to the IVES front panel.
MODEL NO.
IVES Tm INTSC) IVES T"' ( PAL BI
PART NO.
260237-02 260252-01
PRICE
$7,450 7,450
IVESTM SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
The EECO SP- 10 Status Printer provides rapid printouts (120 CPS) of complete editing status information, while the EECO SM-9 Video Status Monitor ( 9" B/W) offers sharp displays of edit status information with 800 lines resolution.
MODEL NO.
PART NO.
PRICE
SP- 10 SM-9
Option
260250-01 260249-01
$575 275
Cable- Interconnect 136455-01 $ 150
SM-9
VP-44
EECO Incorporated, 1601 E. Chestnut Ave., Santa Ana, CA 92701 Phone: ( 7141835-6000, TVVX 910-595-1550, Telex 67-8420
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
EECCI
Incorporated
COMPUTER CONTROLS FOR VIDEO PRODUCTION
MULTI- CUE SYNCHRONIZER
MOS-100A A frame-accurate, microprocessor-based SMPTE/EBU time code instrument that can simultaneously search up to three video/audio tapes to designated program points, cue them at these points and then lock them in phase-locked synchronized play. The MQS-100A offers abroad range of operating modes that can enhance the efficiency, precision and flexibility of virtually any video or audio tape production facility. A sampling
of its many applications includes:
Video/Audio Synchronization-- ·Matching video to audio for perfect lip sync. ·Audio sweetening. ·Stereo simulcasting. · Layback of sweetened audio onto final edited video master.
VideoNideo Synchronization-- ·Sumultaneous program presentation. ·Program sequence selection (off-line editing). · Network program backup. ·On-line program editing.
Audio/Audio Synchronization-- ·Expanding total number of synchronous tracks by syncing two or more
multi-track decks. · Maintaining precise synchronization during mixdowns.
points or at aspecified preroll distance ahead of these points. Preroll capability is especially useful when the cue point is used as amain en-
try or event trigger point, as it gives all transports time to sync prior to
the cue point. Sync Play Command: Commands all enabled transports to play for-
ward from their current tape locations, with the slave transports seeking time intervals from their assigned cue points to match the master's current distance from its cue point. When this match- up is achieved, the slave transports remain phase- locked to the master.
Tape-to-Tape Offset Adjustment: Offset commands allow the servo of any transport to be slewed at a high or low rate in any time increment from one frame on up, plus or minus of the current sync point, to allow shifting the program material on one tape with respect to another
without breaking sync.
Roll Back: Aone-button command that tells all transports to roll backward for a designated distance, then play forward and synchronize to one
another. Chase Mode: The chase mode allows parallel control of one or both slave transports from the master transport's remote control panel. The slaves duplicate every action of the master automatically.
Time Code Triggered " Event" Relay Closures: An internal time code comparator can be programmed to initiate up to two relay contact
THE MOS-100A SYNCHRONIZATION CYCLE:
Time code from up to three transports is read by the NAOS-100A. One transport is designated as amaster; the others, slaves. At the start of the sync cycle, the MOS-100A commands each transport to cue to a predesignated point. As the transports roll from their cue points, the MQS-100A issues speed-up/stow-down commands to the slave transports
closures and/or roll the second slave transport when the master transport's time code matches " event" time code values preset by the
operator. Time Code Scratchpad Memories: Three scratchpad memory registers are provided for temporary storage of time code values and to facilitate transfer of time code values from one register to another.
until they are the same distance from their cue points as the master
On-the- Run Transport Mode Changes: The operating mode of any
is from its cue point. When this is achieved, the slave transports resume normal play speed. From then on, the time code of all transports is constantly monitored by the MQS-100A to maintain the synchronous relationship. Once lockup is achieved, the frame rates of the slave transports are held to within + 100 usec of the master. Identical time code need not be recorded on the tapes to be synchronized, the MQS-100A automatically compensates for time code differences and for mixed drop
frame/non-drop frame formats.
transport can be changed while system operations are in progress. With few exceptions, there is no necessity for placing the system in stop mode
prior to performing mode changes.
Interface Flexibility: The MQS-100A employs modular hardware organization and custom interface boards to accommodate awide selection of popular professional video and audio transports. All transport con-
trol and status signals are opto-isolated, preventing ground-loop induced system noise or damage resulting from mis-mated interface connectors.
A HOST OF USEFUL OPERATING FEATURES:
The MQS-100A offers afull complement of operating modes and convenience features to satisfy even the most demanding user. Yet, for all its technical sophistication, the MOS-100A is simple to operate. Some of the features that make the MQS-100A so versatile are outlined below.
There are provisions for remoting the MQS-100A's control panel from its electronics chassis, and for connecting several remote control panels in parallel, providing the versatility to adapt to any studio layout.
UART Interface ( RS-232): An optional serial UART interface allows all MOS-100A front panel control and indicator functions to be accessed by computer controlled editing systems and studio automation computers.
Cue Point Selection: Key- in cue point assignments as SMPTE/EBU time values or mark them on-the-fly, on an individual transport basis or
for all transports simultaneously. Cue Search With Preroll: Aone-button command searches all transports forward or reverse to predesignated cue points and parks them at these
MODEL NO.
MOS-102A MQS-103A
DESCRIPTION
2- Transport 3- Transport
PART NO.
PRICE
260176-02 $ 15,290
260176-03
17,930
Price includes transport interfaces.
EECO Incorporated, 1601 E. Chestnut Ave., Santa Ana, CA 92701
Phone: ( 714) 835-6000, TVVX 910-595-1550, Telex 67-8420 Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-45
EECCI
Incorporated
COMPUTER CONTROLS FOR VIDEO PRODUCTION
TIME CODE EQUIPMENT
EECONOLINE TM TIME CODE GENERATOR AND READER PERIPHERALS
EECONOLINE peripherals are designed for entry level postproduction and editing applications and complement the EECO line of full features time code products.
MTG-55
MTG-55 MASTER TIME CODE GENERATOR
The MTG-55 eight- digit SMPTE/EBU longitudinal time code generator outputs serial time code. Time code is formatted in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. The MTG-55 is an extremely useful instrument for indexing video and audio tapes for subsequent material location and editing. It also offers the following affordable features:
·Drop frame or non- drop frame operation. ·Color frame synchronization through a rear- mounted
BNC connector. This feature permits using an external 15Hz color framing pulse.
·Loop- through video input/output connectors ( BNC) to assure that time code transmission starts at the beginning of aframe, per ANSI-V98. 12M.
·A video input designed to accept composite video or composite sync.
·An XLR connector that provides for time code output on the rear panel.
TCR-65
'
9 37
VCG-75
The TCR-65 is 1-3/4" high and 10" deep. It has astandard 19" rackmount front panel. Power required is 117 VAC, 60Hz, 4watts maximum
MODEL NO. TCR-65
PART NO.
PRICE
260247-01 $ 1,250
The unit is 1-3/4" high and 10" deep. It has astandard 19" wide rack mount front panel. Power required is 117 VAC,
60Hz, 3watts maximum
MODEL NO. MTG-55
PART NO.
PRICE
260246-01 $ 1,250
TCR-65 TIME CODE READER The TCR-65 eight- digit SMPTE/EBU time code reader uses 0.4" red LED's to display time code in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. You can use the TCR-65 to read and decode longitudinally recorded time code from video tapes, audio tapes, and magnetic film. Other affordable features of the TCR-65 include:
·Reads time code from aSMPTE/EBU time code generator or directly from atape. The time code is read at 1/20 to 20 times normal playback speed, in either forward or reverse mode.
·Extreme accuracy when the TCR-65 is reading code from
a time code generator that is locked to a color subcarrier frequency.
·A momentary Hold switch that holds the tape time on the display at the point the Hold button is pressed. The data
is displayed as long as the button is depressed-- even when the input is reading or decoding time code. ·A digital error- detection system. The TCR-65 automatically switches to aframe- counting mode when abad time code frame is detected. A pulse train, pulsing at the frame rate, then increments an internal counter that is loaded with the last valid data.
VCG-75 VIDEO CHARACTER GENERATOR The VCG-75 eight- digit video character generator reads SMPTE/EBU time code from video tape or other sources and outputs this data as video characters. The output data can be burned into or superimposed over the source video on amonitor. Time code is read at 1/20 to 20 times normal playback speed, in either forward or reverse mode.
Using the VCG-75, you can correlate specific video frames with time code information without looking away from the video monitor. Other affordable features include:
·Afront panel designed to put all of the necessary controls at your fingertips.
·Ability to adjust character size from 5% to 30% of screen size. Characters can also be positioned anywhere on the screen.
·Easy- to- read characters via black screen background with white characters. In addition, character brightness can be adjusted from very bright to barely visible.
·Adisplay that includes adrop- frame indicator, in the form of acolon(:).
·Through arear- mounted connector, remote inputs can be used to control the Hold function and two display blanking inputs. One blanking input blanks frames only and the other blanks the entire time display.
The VCG-75 is 1-3/4" high and 10" deep. It has astandard 19" wide rack mount front panel. The unit is powered by 117 VAC, 60Hz.
MODEL NO. VCG-75
PART NO.
PRICE
260248-01 $ 1,250
VP- 46
EECO Incorporated, 1601 E. Chestnut Ave., Santa Ana, CA 92701 Phone: ( 714) 835-6000, TVVX 910-595-1550, Telex 67-8420
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
EECC1
Incorporated
COMPUTER CONTROLS FOR VIDEO PRODUCTION
COMPUTERIZED EDITING SYSTEM
EMME T"' Computer -- Assisted Editing System
EMME System brings the most sophisticated editing tools available together with simple, straight forward operation. Combining the speed and creative freedom of an active list editing system with the list management capabilities of large data base systems, the EMME System controls up to nine VTR's and multi-track ATR's and a production switcher.
It features a choice of user interfaces. Called the EMME Creative Workstations, each is tailored to fit a distinctive editing style of today's professional video and film editors. The EMME Creative Workstation is offered in two versatile configurations -- the Video Editing Workstation, and the Cinemagraphic Editing Workstation.
Human engineered to minimize button- pushing, the Independent Creative Workstation uses akeyboard with dedicated function keys and an active edit decision list to meet daily editing needs in an easy to learn and logical style.
The Cinemagraphic Editing Workstation is designed for the unique needs and creative style of film editors. It displays no time code numbers, and allows the editor to edit totally
with pictures and sound using aminimum of keys.
Utilizing state-of-the-art computer hardware and totally new systems software optimized for the videotape editing application, the EMME system provides all the comprehensive editing features required in today's postproduction
environment including:
·Sync Roll: Allows the synchronization of multiple machines and creation of an edit decision list " on the
fly". ·Cluster: Enables the creation of complex, multiple source
events, and allows preview or record of these events in one pass. ·Motion Control: This standard feature provides Jog and Shuttle control of the assigned VTR's/ATR's. ·Auto Assemble: Provides sequential, checker board and dub assembly capabilities, and full " look ahead search" to eliminate waiting on machines. ·Auto Sync: Automatically tags apreviously used source onto the edit list -- in exact sync. ·Fill: Stretches or shrinks the source material to exactly fit the available space in the edit sequence. ·Slow: Allows manual entry of play speeds in frames per second or automatic entry via the shuttle knob. ·Constants and Macros: Ten Constant registers to store commonly used numbers and ten Macro registers which
store up to 80 key strokes each.
Priced at 35,000.00 to 65,000.00
EMME' 1/10E0 EDITING WORKSTATION with optional monitors and optional ASCU keyboard.
CUT
D ISS' 30
EFFECTS CHANGE 3PL IT
ALL STOF
E C, I T
FgEuIE0 FICT TF
EL'JL *7:3
I;F-E CIL
ED IT E '=· ti 1
rIA'E·TER ;FL C
t114C H- E PL 12
11-41: H 'E 4 F_ 4
BurIF _
-1,1-ILI_
Close-up of EECO Cinemagraphic Editing Workstation's control display. All source material and edit function controls are displayed on- screen and are selected by the editor using the workstation's onebutton " mouse" controller.
EECO Incorporated, 1601 E. Chestnut Ave., Santa Ana, CA 92701 Phone: ( 714)835-6000, TWX 910-595-1550, Telex 67-8420
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-47
142 Sierra Street
El Segundo, CA 90245 (213) 322-2136
CLOCKS/TIMERS
70 SERIES CONSOLE MOUNT CLOCKS AND TIMERS
ES 172 Six Digit - 12 Hour Clock. Three setting controls: Fast
Advance, Slow Advance, and Hold
$174.00
ES 174 Six Digit- 24 Hour Clock. Otherwise identical to the ES 172.
$174.00 ES 370 Four Digit, One Hundred Minute Up/Down Timer. Six controls: Count Up, Count Down, Stop, Minutes Advance, Seconds
Advance, Reset
$222.00
ES 562/564
ES 371 Up/Down Timer. Similar to the ES 370 except with Leverwheel
Preset capability for faster setting of the desired time
$352.00
ES 570 Four Digit, Sixty or 100 Minute Timer. Select 60 or 100 minute
mode on rear connector. Start, Stop and Reset controls. Runs continuously unless stopped. Reset will return all displays to zero. Unit will run if reset while running or will stay at zero if reset when stopped.
ES 992/994
$174.00 ES 572 Six Digit- 12 Hour Clock or Timer. Five controls: Start, Stop,
Reset, Fast Advance, Slow Advance. Will run continuously to
12:59:59. Advances to 1:00:00 and continues as clock unless stopped
or advanced
$212.00
ES 574 A 24 hour version of ES 572
$212.00
ES 575 Exactly like ES 570, with the addition of a "freeze" button. When the button is released, the display "catches up" with the correct elapsed time.
Dimensions: 2.16"H x4.5"W x4.13"D $212.00
ES 562E/564E SIX DIGIT CLOCK/TIMER WITH MEMORY
ES 562E/564E is acombination six digit clock and 24 hour timer with
memory, allowing the user to set the clock to the correct time of day,
switch to timer mode, then switch back to time of day by pushing one
button; time of day will be correctly displayed, in hours, minutes and
seconds. Six pushbutton controls are mounted on the top of the unit,
near the front of the desk-top case. When panel mounting is specified,
they will be mounted on the front panel, below the display. The
controls may also be remoted, through two rear- mounted five pin
connectors ( Option Ror Option D). These controls are Reset, Timer,
Fast/Start, Slow/Stop, Hold and Clock.
Display: Six digits of . 55" Planar Gas Discharge Display
$345.00
ES 112E/124E DIGITAL CLOCK
ES112E (12 hr.) and ES 124E (24 hr.) are solid state, six digit clocks. Can drive 80 Series and 90 Series slaves. Displays are gas discharge, .55" high.
Dimensions: 2-1/2"H x8"W x6"D
80 SERIES JUMBO CLOCKS AND TIMERS
$182.00
ES 207 VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
ES 207 Video Distribution Amplifier answers the " one more unit"
question with aversatile little package that can be tucked anywhere, either temporarily or permanently. Controls are available through the top plate with aminiature screwdriver for video gain, D.C. level and HF equalization. A very wide range of chroma level control can be obtained with the DA. Output video is expected to be set for 0 volts D.C. on the blanking or porch level, with video extending positive and sync negative. Nominal input and output signal level is 1volt p- p. Typical gain- control range is from 1/2 volt to 1-1/2 volts p- p . . .$ 175.00
ES 232 TIME CALCULATOR
ES 232 is an eight digit, 24 hour, Up/Down Timer/Time Calculator
displaying Hours, Minutes, Seconds, and Frames ( 30 frames per second) on bright red .4" LED's. In the Calculator mode, data may be
added or subtracted, or stored in memory, or recalled from memory.
There are 10 memory locations available. Data may be added or subtracted from the timer value, while the timer is counting either up
or down, but not while the timer is stopped. When stopped, data
moved from calculator to time serves to preset the timer. In the timer mode, ES 232 counts up or down, and can be reset while running or
stopped. It can be preset to any number in the 24 hour range. While timer is running or stopped, it is possible to enter the value into
memory without disturbing the operation. It is also possible to recall a
value from memory and add or subtract while timer is counting up or
down. ES 232 uses 24 keys, mounted on adesktop case, measuring
2"H x5"W x6"D
$250.00
90 SERIES 2-INCH DISPLAYS VIEWABLE AT 60 FEET
Large, bright 1" gas discharge displays provide effortless long
ES 391 Presettable Up/Down Timer. 100 Minute Range, Displays
distance viewing from 40 feet.
Minutes and Seconds, uses Leverwheel Preset. Controls are Count
ES 1821 Six Digit- 12 Hour Clock. Three rear- mounted setting
controls: Fast Advance, Slow Advance, and Hold
$300.00
Up, Count Down, Stop, Reset and Preset. Dimensions: 4.45"H x10.38"W x6.58D
$537.00
ES 1841 Six Digit- 24 Hour Clock. Otherwise identical to the ES 182.
$300.00 ES 380 Four Digit, 100 Minute Up/Down Timer Displays minutes and seconds, with rear- mounted connector to allow remote wiring of six momentary SPST Controls: Count up, Count Down, Stop, Minutes Advance, Seconds Advance and Reset. Other features similar to ES
ES 5901 Sixty Minute Timer Displays Minutes and Seconds. Rear-
mounted connector provides for wiring to user's single pole, momentary, push-button controls - Start, Stop and Reset. Reset
returns all displays to zero, and timer will continue to run from zero if reset while counting.
Dimensions: 4.45"H x10.38"W x6.58"D
$376.00
301
$349.00
ES 381 Up/Down Timer. Similar to ES 380, except that leverwheel preset is used
$459.00 ES 5801 Four Digit, 60 Minute Timer Displays minutes and seconds.
Rear connector allows remote wiring of three momentary SPST
ES 992E/994E- 6Digit Clocks. ES 992E ( 12 hr.) and ES994E ( 24 hr.) Hours and Minutes on Two Inch Gas Discharge Displays, Seconds
on One Inch Gas Discharge Displays. Three top- mounted setting
controls- Fast Advance, Slow Advance, and Hold.
Dimensions: 5"H x12"W x3-1/2"D
$495.00
controls: Start, Stop and Reset. Reset returns all displays to zero, and
ES 301E/302E 100 MINUTE UP/DOWN TIMERS
timer will continue to run from zero if reset while running.
ES 301E is a four digit, one hundred minute timer ( 99:59) with six
80 Series slaves are also compatible with other ESE clocks and timers:
controls: Count Up, Count Down, Stop, Minutes Advance, Seconds
ES 112/124, 301, 302 and 510.
Advance, Reset. Counting can be activated up or down or set back
Dimensions: 4.45"H x10.38"W x6.58"D
$251.00
to zero. When " Stop" control is pressed, the four digit display is
ES 510E FOUR DIGIT 60 MINUTE TIMER
ES 510E is afour digit, sixty minute timer ( 59:59) with Start, Stop and Reset controls. If stopped, display will hold time reading and when restarted will continue with next count from last displayed figure. If reset while running, timer will continue to run. ES 510 can drive 80 Series and 90 Series Slaves.
held. Counting direction ( up or down) can be changed or time can be reset to zero without stopping the count. The ES 301E can drive 80
Series and 90 Series Slaves. Displays are gas discharge . 55" high.
With the ES 302E, the user can preset times much faster than with the ES 301E, because lever- wheel type switches are used for the preset feature. The ES 302E can drive 80 Series and 90 Series Slaves.
Dimensions: 2-1/2"H x6"W x6"D VP- 48
$174.00
Dimensions: ES 301E: 2-1/2"H x8"W x6"D
ES 302E: 2-1/2"H x10"W x6"D
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change With out Not ice.
$258.00 $333.00
142 Sierra Street El Segundo, CA 90245 (2 13) 322-21 36
CLOCKS/TIMERS
ES 192E/194E
ES 160
ES 199
MASTER CLOCKS
ESE Masters provide a means of keeping all time displays in the system in agreement, through the use of a Serial Time Code. Only one pair of wires is needed to distribute the time code to all remote serial input displays. An ESE Master Clock System can operate digital
displays, clocks with sweep second hands, printers, and in addition, tell your computer what time it is. Twelve hours of standby battery
operation is standard in ES 160 and 160/1.
ES 160. Mounted in a5-1/4" relay rack panel Er chassis, displays six digits of time information on . 4" LED displays, in 12 hour format. The ES 160 has 3sec. per month accuracy. Its standard output is serial BCD, CMOS compatible, and drives ES 161E, 166E, 171, 991 or 993 Remote Displays w/o buffering. All inputs Er outputs are through rear- mounted connectors. Dimensions: 5-1/4"H x19"W x$1151"5D8..00
ES 160/1. One second per month version of ES 160
$1350.00
ES 199. Our most accurate Master, providing better than . 5seconds per month. It contains a10 MHz receiver, with audio output, to synchronize with WWV at the push of abutton. WVVV transmits a1000
Hz tone at the start of each minute, except for the first minute of each hour, when a1500 Hz tone occurs. If the button is pushed and held during this time, the seconds' counters of the clock will be reset to zero. The ES 199 is supplied with an antenna, battery and charger. An external sync input connector is provided, to allow introduction of
aperiodic logic " 0" or contact closure at aonce per second or slower rate. In order to simplify maintenance, test points are provided on the
1000 Hz decoder board, to allow re- calibration of the oscillator using only an oscilliscope. The serial output will drive 100 ES 161E, 166E, 171, 991 or ES 993E Remote Displays. Dimensions: 5-1/4" Hx19" W x15" D. Electrical: 117V AC, 50/60 Hz. Options: B ( CMOS, 5V) J, One pps Output, Relay Closure on Hour and 1/2 Hour, Impulse
Driver ( ES 162)
$1575.00
ES 192E/ES 194E. The most economical Masters, ES 192E ( 12 Hr.) and ES 194E ( 24 Hr.) are constructed using ES 112 or ES 124 digital clocks and adding the ES 167B Serial Time Code Generator to
provide the output needed to drive Remote Serial Displays ES 161E, 166E, 171, 991 and 993E. Displays are 6" incandescent type. Dimen-
sions: 2-1/2" Hx8" W x6" D
$358.00
AEcSce1s6s1oEriReesmote Digital Display decodes serial time data and displays
six digits of time on . 55" Gas Discharge Displays, in either 12 or 24
hour format. Dimensions: 8" W x2-1/2" Hx6" D
$182.00
ES 162 Impulse Driver plugs into the ES 160 chassis, and can drive 20 Impulse Clocks. Designed so that if power fails, impulse always
comes on with the same polarity when power is restored $221.00
ES 164E Remote Digital Impulse Display is similar to the ES 161E
except that the ES 164E derives its count command from the ES 162 Impulse Driver, or any impulse clock drive circuits already installed.
Dimensions: 8" W x2-1/2" Hx6" D
$269.00
ES 165 Impulse Driver was designed to provide synchronized power
to the ES 168 Impulse Clocks. It is capable of driving 50 ES 168 clocks, and will keep them running accurately through twelve hours
of power failure. The ES 165 derives its synchronizing pulse from any
one pulse per second source, such as the ESE Master Clock, and can also accept the once per second, alternating 12 or 24 volt impulses
from an existing impulse clock system
$210.00
ES 166E Jumbo 1" Clock Display features six digits of one inch Gas Discharge Displays in 12 or 24 hour format. Receives serial time code
input from any ESE Master Clock or ES 167B. Dimensions: 10-1/2"
W x4-1/2" H x6-1/2" D
$280.00
ES 167B Serial Time Code Generator is an integral part of ES 160,
190, 192E/194E and 196 Master Clocks, this unit can be added to
many other ESE products, including ES 112, 124, 182, 184, 992, 994, 750, 751, 753, 754 and all 780 Series Time Programmers. Drives ES
161E, 166E, 171, 991 or 993 Remote Displays
$161.00
ES 168 Impulse Clock operates from the 8 pps output of the ES 165
Impulse Driver. As many as 50 ES 168s can be connected to asingle
driver, and they will continue to run during apower outage of at least
12 hours
$142.00
ES 171 Console Mount Remote Display receives the serial time code generated by any ESE Master Clock, or any ESE product containing
the ES 1678 serial time code generator, and displays it on bright red
.3" LEDs. Dimensions: 2-1/4" Hx4-1/2" W x4" D
$174.00
Impulse Clock. When asweep second hand is desired specify the
3201 . 003 " Extra Flat" Impulse Crock. It has a12 inch dial protected by aglass cover and metal bezel and is approximately one inch thick.
As many as twenty impulse clocks can be driven by a Master Clock
which has ES 162 as an accessory
$211.00
ES 991 4- Digit Serial Input Slave decodes serial time data and displays four digits of time on large 2" Gas Discharge Displays. Dimensions: 10-1/2" W x4-1/2" H x6-1/2" D, Desk Top Case $358.00
ES 993E 6- Digit Serial Input Slave features four digits of 2" high Gas Discharge Displays, and two digits ( Seconds) of 1" Gas Discharge
Displays. Receives serial time code input from any ESE Master Clock or ES 1678. Dimensions: 5" Hx12" W x3" D ( Wall Mount) . $495.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-49
142 Sierra Street El Segundo, CA 90245 (2 13) 322-2 136
TIME CODE READERS PROGRAMMERS/LEVEL INDICATOR
TIME CODE READERS
ES 253 SMPTE Time Code Reader is an eight- digit SMPTE Time Code
Reader displaying Hours, Minutes, Seconds and Frames
$500.00
ES 254 SMPTE Time Code Reader is a bi-directional, multi-speed eight-digit reader, displaying Hours, Minutes, Seconds and Frames on .4" red LED displays
$744.00 ES 255 is a bi-directional, multi-speed, eight-digit SMPTE Code
Reader, that can add the information to avideo stream for recording time code on the video portion of a tape, or for displaying it on a monitor. Reading speed is 1/20 to 20 times playback speed... $1095.00
ES 256 " Smart" SMPTE Time Code Reader. The ES 256 is abi-direc-
tional multi-speed, eight digit SMPTE Time Code Reader which
displays Hours, Minutes, Seconds and Frames on . 4" red LED's. The
ES 256 incorporates a digital error detection system: When a bad
frame of time code is detected, the unit will switch to aframe- counting mode
$1045.00
ES 257 SMPTE Time Code Reader/Comparator is capable of making
two comparisons, as established by the two sets of thumbwheels located on the front panel. By specifying option "B" (four- line parallel
BCD, 5V CMOS compatible), additional comparisons may be made by
connecting one or more ES 258 "expander" units
$875.00
ES 258 SMPTE Time Code Comparator has been designed as an " expander" for the ES 257. Two sets of eight-digit thumbwheels are located on the front panel, to allow comparison of two SMPTE code locations
$395.00 ES 280 Audio Time Code Generator/Reader is a 10 Digit Audio Time
Code Generator/Reader, capable of laying down a serial BCD time code on audio tape in the Generator Mode, and recovering and displaying it in digital form in the Reader Mode. The code has been
designed by ESE. It is not astandard code, such as SMPTE or IRIG. The frequencies used to produce the code have been selected to be
compatible with cartridge machines as well as other tape recording
and playback equipment. Amplitude adjustment assures the right
amount of signal for the particular machine being used
$550.00
VIDEO TIME AND DATE GENERATORS
ES 206 Video Time and Date Generator has been designed to allow the
addition of Time and Date information to a video signal. Two rear-
mounted video jacks permit " looping" the video information through
the 206 to add the data
$520.00
ES 261 SMPTE Time Code Generator is a pre-settable, eight- digit SMPTE/Time Code Generator, capable of Drop Frame or Non- Drop Frame operation
$875.00
PROGRAMMERS
780 Series Ram Time Programmers are the most cost-effective way of programming more than eight events. They are flexible, easy to use, and provide 32 events ( expandable to 96) in 5-1/4" of rack space.
780 Series units operate from the povver line with abackup crystal time base and 72 hour battery/charger as an integral part of the equipment.
STANDARD UNITS Eight Digits of Programming Capability
ES 780 10 Days, 10 Outputs, Hours, Minutes, Seconds ES 781 100 Days, Hours, Minutes, Seconds
ES 782 16 Outputs, Hours, Minutes, Seconds Six Digits of Programming Capability
ES 783 Hours, Minutes, Seconds
ES 784 100 Days, Hours, Minutes ES 786 16 Outputs, Hours, Minutes ES 787 16 Outputs, Minutes, Seconds Four Digits of Programming Capability ES 788 Hours, Minutes
ES 789 Minutes, Seconds
$1575.00 1433.00 1654.00
1365.00 1365.00 1600.00 1600.00
11331133..0000
The size of the unit is 5-1/4"H x19"W x10"D -- Relay Rack construction. totally enclosed, with a screen top.
ES 255
t
bf 9 12 lb 3 13 44
ES 280
ES 206
ES 790 Microprocessor- Based Programmable Timer is a 1,000 event, 32 channel, microprocessor- based programmable clock. Events occur as reed relay contact closures ( single pole, normally open). These
closures may be all momentary, all latching, or 16 of each, at the user's option. A simple modification allows the use of 16 double pole relays, instead of 32 single pole relays.
1,000 time events can be programmed into the memory and they can be entered randomly, as opposed to chronologically.
An internal crystal with battery and battery charger is provided for uninterrupted operation.
The size of the unit is 5-1/4"H x 19"W x 10"D.
ES 790 is totally enclosed in arack mounting chassis with ascreen top.
ES 790/$ 1 790 w/2 1 sec/3 mo accu0 racy. M0 aster Cl. ock Opt0 ion . .20 888.00 750 Series Thumbwheel Programmer Comparators are recommended when programming up to eight time events. Thumbwheel switches are set to compare the time information from an ESE Clock or Timer.
An output ( event) occurs each time the thumbwheel switch setting agrees with the time display.
One set of thumbwheels is required for each event. The standard 750
Series units are enclosed in a3-1/2" high relay rack panel and chassis. STANDARD UNITS
ES 750E ES 112 and one 6Digit Program
$347.00
ES 751E ES 753E
ES 754E
ES 756E
ES 124 and one 6Digit Program ES 112 and two 4Digit Programs ( Hrs. Et Min.) . ..
ES 124 and two 4Digit Programs ( Hrs. Er Min.) . ..
ES 510 and one 4Digit Program ( Min. Er Sec.)
347.00 414.00
414.00
341.00
ES 758E ES 510 and two 4Digit Programs ( Min. Er Sec.) . .. 430.00
AUDIO LEVEL INDICATOR
ES 214 Dynamic Audio Level Indicator is ahighly accurate audio level
indicator, which is designed to simulate the action of a conventional VU- Meter but with superior dynamic characteristics. The LED meter is five to one hundred times faster in responding to complex waveforms than the mechanical meter without sacrificing the familiar meter "movement."
SPECIFICATIONS
Number of Indicators: 14 LED Lamps in 3colors. Scale: + 4, + 3, + 2, + 1dB-Red. OdB-yellow. - 1, -2, -3, - 5, - 7, - 10, - 15, -20, -25dB-Green. Input Impedance: 2200 ohms at maximum sensitivity. 6800 ohms at +8dBm " House Level", 10,000 ohms at minimum sensitivity. Input Circuit: Transformer isolated, balanced bridging. Frequency Response: 20-20kHz 1dB ( all modes).
Rise Times: Less than 250 MicroSec ( Peak Mode), less than 25 MilliSec ( Fast Averaging Mode). Approximately 300 MilliSec ( Optional VU Standard).
Fall Time: (All Modes) About 300 MicroSec from full scale.
Modes of Operation: Peak Reading. Fast Averaging ( Apparent
Loudness). Slow Averaging ( USA VU- Standard)
$125.00
VP- 50
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
EVERTZ MICROSYSTEMS
3515 Mainway Burlington, Ontario, Canada L7M 1A9 (416) 335-3700 Telex 061-8784
"TEACH YOUR EDITOR VITC" Model 620 VITC/VITS Deleter Model 621 VITC Generator/Translator Model 622 VITC Reader/Translator
Powerful VITC/LTC translator modules. Source identification and remote control via video signals. The 620 series modules are basically stand-alone units, i.e. no provisions are made for direct data transfer between modules, except via external code or video connections. For more complex systems 610 series modules should be used. Their " EV-COM" communications bus permits direct command/data interchange with other modules within aframe.
Model 620 VITC/VITS Deleter
This is ageneral purpose vertical interval signal deleter. A high quality programmable video keyer substitutes black level for any type of code or test signal present on lines 10 to 21 ( 6to 22 for PAL) of the vertical blanking interval. A group of DIP switches is used to select any line or group of lines. Color burst is not affected.
EV-BLOC RACK FRAME COMPONENTS Backplane Assembly 1601
The Backplane circuit board has been developed specifically to meet our design goal of maximum flexibility on the system level with reliability and performance on the module level. Circuit conductors for data, video and audio signal transfers, from each circuit block to its associated I/O module, have been carefully laid out to eliminate any chance of cross-talk between program video and high frequency microprocessor signals. The assembly comes complete with 21 64- pin euro-card connectors (DIN 41612), one for the power supply regulator module, and 10 pairs for the EV-BLOC modules and their companion I/O modules.
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
Power Supply Regulator 1602 Power Transformer 16025
The power supply consists of two separate assemblies. The plug-in regulator module provides regulated + 5V for microprocessor and logic circuits, and ± 8V for signal processing elements. The power transformer module contains all line/mains voltage circuits enclosed in aheavy duty stainless steel shielding case. Appropriate RFI protection is provided by LC filters. The power supply provides enough DC current to handle a full complement of 10 EV-BLOC modules. Except for special custom applications, the two units are generally supplied together. Options currently available are: for Model 621: -- LTR Longitudinal timecode reader for Model 622: -- VCG Video character generator Each EV-BLOC module in this series requires I/O module #603
Model 621 VITC Generator
FEATURES AND APPLICATIONS ·VITC Generator: 4/8 field color framed, resettable to 00:00:00:00 or
jam- synced to longitudinal time code ILTR option) with error bypass ( aterrific LTC to VITC translator; teach your editor VITC) ·Multi- source VITC Keyer: Any number of 621's can be synchronized to acommon time code generator to accommodate isolated video sources. User bits may be transferred from the common generator or preset locally, using easily accessible DIP switches.
This provides an added benefit ·Source Identification: The user bits in each module can be encoded
to uniquely identify its video source. The time code bits can be set to zero, for cameras etc., or jam- synced to time- coded sources
such as VTR's ·Remote Machine Control: Six control inputs can be utilized to
control VTR's etc. via the program video path
VIDEO IN
VIDEO VITC OUT
REMOTE CT!. Ammo ,» 0,00-0II 9.10 clover le ON MR Ally
MODEL 621
FORMATING 96VITCHES Vnt Lem MA IWO lee mode Some C oxbe
LTC IN
Model 622 VITC Reader
FEATURES Ft APPLICATIONS ·VITC Reader. Reads vertical interval time code from about 20 times
play speed down to still frame, providing time and user data out as LTC and multiplexed parallel BCD. An optional video inserter
VIDEO IN
(VCG) keys the data into the picture ·VITC to LTC translator for use with LTC only editing equipment or
readers ·Source ID Decoder. User bits encoded with aspecial code from
an EV-BLOC 621 module or Model 4000 are displayed as unique source identification e.g. CAM 3, TC 1, VTR 5 etc., using the
optional VCG ·Remote Machine Control. Six grounding output switches respond
to specific user bit codes from a621 encoder to remotely control avariety of devices via the program video path or off tape. Just
think of the application potential Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
»melee LTC OUT
VIDEO · CHAR OUT
FORMATING SWITCHES
CV-
talao.04
>erg Oupn tuner+.
VP-51
LEVERT?' MICROSYSTEMS 3515 Mainway Burlington, Ontario, Canada L7M 1A9 (416) 335-3700 Telex 061-8784
"THEY WORK ALONE OR TOGETHER"
Model 610 System Controller All communications within the EV-BLOC system are supervised by a system controller. The function of the system controller is to establish the location and type of each module installed in the system, and to schedule the use of the EV-COM bus by other modules. The model 610 System Controller module is specifically designed to perform this task and provide agateway to the EV-BLOC system. The standard RS-232-C serial port allows an external computer or computer based editor to control and monitor the status of any of the 610 series modules installed in the system. Fitting the 422 option, changes the serial port to a SMPTE/EBU compatible RS-422 configuration.
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
MODEL 610
Model 611 Timecode Reader/Translator FEATURES Et APPLICATIONS ·VITC/LTC Reader. Reads longitudinal time code from 1/30th play
speed to 70 times providing time and user bits out as multiplexed parallel BCD ( with BCD option fitted) or as serial ASCII ( with 232 ocapttiioonns.fitted). Custom interfaces are available for other OEM appli·LTC Jam- sync Generator. Regenerates and re- synchronizes LTC code to eliminate edit aborts due to mis-phased or unreadable time code. ·VITC/LTC to LTC Translator. Permits LTC only editing equipment to read both codes providing frame accuracy at all tape speeds.
Model 612 Timecode Generator FEATURES Et APPLICATIONS ·VITC/LTC Generator. 4/8 field color framed, free running or jam-
synced to data from a611 Reader module. When jam-synced to the record VTR reader in VITC only editing, continually ascending code is inserted on the edit master as edits are assembled. VITC coded workprints can be prepared for frame accurate edit decisions without acharacter burn- in ·Multi- source VITC Keyer. Any number of isolated video sources may be encoded with identical VITC using multiple 612 Generator modules.
Model 613 Video Character Generator FEATURES Et APPLICATIONS ·Off- Line Editing. Inserts time/user bit character data from another
610 series module into program video for burning timecode into workprints. Frame accurate edit decisions can also be made directly from VITC without the need of awindow dub ·Video Typewriter. Used in conjunction with a computer or keyboard, the 613 module is alow cost alpha- numeric character generator for preparing tape indexes, slate boards, etc.
Each module requires acompanion I/O module as outlined below: For 610 -- #605 Serial I/O Module For 611 -- #604 Parallel I/O Module -- #605 Serial I/O Module when 232 option fitted For 612 -- #603 Parallel I/O Module Et 613 -- #605 Serial I/O Module when 232 option fitted
MODEL 611
10 eo.
L1C OUT
MOO OUT · TM 00
EVOOM
LIU GENERCOR
FOPOURING SOITCHES Color FranUelILf.fle
MODEL 612
vnc cieninmon
VP-52
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
EVERTZ MICROSYSTEMS
3515 Mainway Burlington, Ontario, Canada L7M 1A9 (416) 335-3700 Telex 061-8784
TIME CODE EQUIPMENT
Model 3700D Edit Code Master
Our best longitudinal time code generator and full speed reader ( over 2000:1 speed ratio). A video character generator with high resolution
characters and alpha- numeric user bit decoding is standard. In addition to the features listed for the 3600D, these functional enhancements give this unit the power and flexibility to meet your most diffi-
cult operational requirements.
Features · Separate generator and reader displays are particularly useful in
Jam- Sync modes and when operating reader and generator
independently. ·High flexible Jam- Sync modes allow transfer of reader time and user
bits into the generator in avariety of configurations. ·Full alpha- numeric user bit functions can be used to record tape
index, captions, source identification or other data along with the
time code. ·RS- 232-C serial port permits interfacing to remote control panels,
computers, editors, etc. · Multiplexed parallel BCD output of reader time and user bits. ·An aural alarm signals genlock problems. This can be disabled if, for
example, the generator is locked to aVTR rather than house sync or
PG M video. 3700D Edit Code Master
$3950.00
3700D 3600D 4900
Model 3600D Edit Code Generator/Reader
This is an SMPTE/EBU edit code generator, afull speed reader and a video character inserter in aslim one rack unit package.
Features ·True dual standard, NTSC and PAL. Generates time code in accor-
dance with SMPTE RS170 or RS170A, or EBU 4or 8field standards
(4 switch selectable modes), locked to the PGM video source. · Front panel format switches, no need to disassemble whenever
certain system parameters need to be changed, e.g. field 1 or 2
update of VCG, color framing, drop frame, etc. · Reads time code from 1/30x to 70x playspeed. New input circuit
design permits reliable recovery of even severely distorted code such as can be expected off low end 3/4" machines. · High resolution character generator in two character sizes, full screen positionable, keys time and user bits into the picture. ·Momentary and continuous Jam- Sync modes. In Cont-Jam, good code is automatically substituted when synchronizing to poorly
recorded or disrupted code.
3600D Edit Code Generator/Reader
$3150.00
Model 4900 Edit Code Reader/VCG/Translator
A superb reader, capable of hesitation- free time code display from 70x down to 1/30x play speed, and with VITC option all the way down to still frame. We believe this to be the finest code reader available
anywhere.
Features · Full speed range LTC reader. ·Optional VITC decoder module ( Model 49V).
· Easily accessible formatting Dip switches. · High resolution character inserter; 2 sizes.
·VITC source ID decoder. ·Byte- wide parallel data output for easy Editor interface. ·Play speed LTC translator output incorporating a new soft- lock
feature provides continuous time code at all reading speeds from still
frame to maximum wind. · LTC code phase corrector/regenerator for dubbing.
4900 Edit Code Reader/ VCG / Translator 49V VITC Reader Module for 4900
$1995.00 500.00
4000
Model ECM4000 Edit Code Master ( with VITC)
The top of the line Model 4000 Edit Code Master combines agenerator
and reader for both VITCode and longitudinal time code with a high resolution character inserter, making it the most comprehensive
answer to all time code needs. It reads from still frame to full wind speeds directly from the VTR output. Alpha- numeric user bit capabilities enable the storage of tape indexes, program comments and
source identification.
Utilizing one of the most powerful microprocessors available, plus built-in diagnostics, the Model 4000 achieves new levels of functional
flexibility and reliability. Particular attention has been paid in its overall
design to maintaining operational simplicity. To this end we have introduced anew and unique concept which allows the Model 4000 to be configured to your particular operational environment. The daily
operation of the unit is greatly simplified, often being reduced to just a
few push button functions.
4000 Edit Code Master ( with VITC)
$4995.00
Model 4300 Portable VITC Reader/Character Generator/Translator
Portable VITC reader/character generator. 15 character positions on
raster; reads time code, standard and alphanumeric user bits, source ID data; reads VITC code at speeds of 10x play and above depending on VTR format; translates VITC to longitudinal time code
4300 Portable VITC Reader/Character Generator
$1600.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 53
LEVERTe MICROSYSTEMS 3515 Mainway
Burlington, Ontario Canada L7M 1A9 (416) 335-3700 Telex 061-8784
CHARACTER GENERATOR/ TEST EQUIPMENT
VCG 1260 CHARACTER GENERATOR
The VCG 1260 Video Character Generator, designed primarily to display time information in video, has limited text and logo capabilities too. It decodes DC(S-B6 or SMPTE/EBU time code from your master clock system and displays the time or user bit information. In addition, abuilt-in elapsed time counter with 0.01 sec resolution and a remote START/STOP control may be used for timing sporting events, etc.
The VCG 1260 may be used as a low cost alphanumeric generator using the optional serial. ACSII port. Limited custom logo capabilities are optionally available.
Eight front panel keys allow user selection of 4 character sizes; horizontal and vertical positioning, inverse video, input code, and display formats to suit individual applications. The configuration parameters are stored in non-volatile memory, eliminating the need to reprogram the setup after a power failure.
CHASER
Chase synchronizer for audio and video transports. As astand alone unit, CHASER can perform awide variety of tasks such as: ·Synchronizing an ATR to aVTR for audit, iaybacks ·Synchronizing ATR's to increase the number of available audio
tracks ·Slaving an ATR to aVTR for integration of audio editing into the
video edit suite ·Synchronizing multitrack ATR's to video during mixdowns of audio
for video
CHASER incorporates a highly sophisticated intelligent transport interface which controls most transports with asimple cable change. Interfaces are selected by machine model using the CHASER remote control unit. Parallel, serial RS-232 and RS-422 SMPTE control protocols are supported.
Advanced software algorithms permit CHASER to learn machine ballistics, providing precise cueing and fast lock- ups. Integrated wideband LTC readers for both master and slave transports read code at slow hand crawl and full wind speeds. An optional VITC reader used with master VTR's, provides frame accurate timecode information even when the master is positioned at extremely slow speeds. Tach pulse backup allows normal tape lifter operation when spooling the ATR.
The only interface required from the master is timecode ( LTC or VITC). Tach pulses may be required on some transports that do not provide LTC or VITC in wind modes.
CHASER is constructed using three of our popular EV-BLOC modules, providing distributed intelligence and possible system
PHASER--TIMECODE SYSTEM FOR AUDIO TRANSPORTS
PHASER -- anew microprocessor based capstan speed resolver and timecode system for professional audio transports. Primarily intended for the live production environment, PHASER incorporates the functions of both amaster timecode system and audio transport resolver into one slim rack mountable package.
PHASER controls the audio transport capstan to lock a pilot tone or SMPTE/EBU longitudinal timecode ( LTC) to a master video reference. When time code is used, the absolute relationship between the timecode on the ATR and the video can be preserved in the video timecode by transferring the ATR timecode into either the time or user bits of the built-in LTC and VITC timecode generators.
The audio transport may be either frame locked to the video, or color framed such that the ATR timecode follows the SMPTE/EBU color frame sequence. This direct correlation between the video and audio time code facilitates video post production, as color framed edits may
VCG 1260
A broadcast quality keyer and high resolution characters combine to give a high quality presentation for on- air use. A separate preview output is provided for setup to preserve the integrity of the program output on air.
VCG 1260 Video character generator including video keyer to convert master clock, SMPTE, inputs to video output. Sports timer function
with remote control stop/start facility-- internal clock system, H- V positioning, inverse video-preview output. Optional serial ASCII input for alphanumeric display information and tape leader generator function.
VCG 1260A Video character generator as described above with
optional serial I/O port for alphanumeric and tape leader generator displays.
VCG 1260
$2480.00
CHASER
expansion. A remote control unit displays master and slave
timecode, slave offset, machine status, etc., as well as controlling transport functions of the slave manually. The offset between master and slave timecode may be captured on the fly, trimmed up or down, or entered as absolute numbers from 1/100th of a frame up to 24 hours.
Two switch closures may be generated from either master or slave time code. The event outputs may be used to start and stop cart
machines, unsynchronized recoders, or to punch in and out the master.
An RS-422 serial remote control port, compatible with the proposed SMPTE standard for digitally controlled equipment communicates with CHASER's remote control unit or may be used to permit
computerized edit controllers or other studio computers to control CHASER.
Chaser w/no display Chaser w/built-in display Chaser w/remote control
$ 3995.00 4495.00 5395.00
PHASER now be performed from the audio timecode numbers present in the video timecode's user bits.
PHASER's intelligent transport interface can be configured to a variety of ATR's. Front panel controls include remote control of transport functions, search, display and entry of timecode information for generator and reader.
PHASER is based on our popular EV-BLOC series, and is expandable to accommodate larger applications including multiple VITC channels, etc. Servicing is facilitated by a drop down front panel, which permits each module to be removed easily from the front. Phaser
$3995.00
VP-54
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEO TYPEWRITERS
49 Lexington St. W. Newton, MA 02165 (617) 244-3223 Telex 922407
VTW-200 Video Typewriter
Features
· Self-contained, compact and low cost video typewriter
·4- page memory ·Character format: 7 x9dot matrix ·Optional CMI-100A is compatible · Dimensions:
16.92"W x3.93"H x11.42"D ( 430 x 100 x290 mm) (19" rack type)
VTW-200 Video Typewriter VTW-200S With Internal Sync Generator
$1500.00 1800.00
VTW-210/210S Video Typewriters
Features · Self-contained super video typewriter
·4- page memory ·Optional PU -210 Preview Function is available ·Character format: 16 x 20 dot matrix for both line and preview
monitors ·Three display mode: normal, roll and crawl · Independent speed control for roll and crawl on the keyboard ·One line title display mode function ·Line monitor check function ( transition preview) ·Automatic/manual sequential page switching ·Sequential time control · Display line and quantity control ·Automatic character centering function · Line/page word correction ( horizontal character space shift)
· Line skip function ·Page- to- page line jump function ·Mis-operation detection function ·Optional MU- 600, MU- 300, MU- 250 and PU -210 are compatible ·Dimensions: 18.5W x4.13"H x 11.8"D ( 470 x 105 x300mm)
VTW-210 Video Typewriter VTW-210S Video Typewriter with Internal Sync
CI- 10 Color Interface CO- 210 Character Out PU -210 Preview Unit MU- 250 39 page Memory VTW-210/CI-10 Video Typewriter w/Color Interface
$1950.00 2200.00 1650.00 175.00 1000.00 1450.00
3200.00
segli
rrere' '
lor
VTW-400 Video Typewriter
Features
·Character generator has clear, extremely high- resolution characters in a choice of 3 sizes and 2 resident font styles
·Includes a4- step character slant
·Character flash · Dropshadow and edge ·8- page memory in standard version · Displays 8 lines per page with 26 characters per line ·An optional built-in floppy disk adds 300 pages of memory ·64 colors available for page by page character colorizing · Displays modes for automatic and manual sequential page switching
·Time interval adjustable between 1-999 seconds ·Word processing characteristics such as line skip, line and page
shifts, and line check ·Vertical position control ·Optional extras are also available. The MU- 400 floppy disk memory
which provides up to 300 pages on one diskette and fits onto the control unit of the VTW-400, and the PU -400 preview unit which allows information to be typed onto a page while another page is
being displayed on the line monitor
VTW-400 Video Typewriter MU-400 Floppy Disk Memory PU -400 Preview Unit
$3950.00 1500.00 TBA
FVW-300 Video Writer
Features ·Self-contained, extremely low cost free hand writer ·Smooth writing: same picture elements as the FVW-910 ( 224 x384
for NTSC, 256 x384 for PAL) no line intermittence
· Line thickness selection ·Write, partial erase, total deletion functions ·Automatic straight line drawing function ·Cursor can be used as an instructional pointer. ( cursor superimposi-
tion) · Remote control capability ·Table top use or 19" rack installation use ·Optional MU- 600 and RS- 232C Serial Interface Unit are compatible ·Dimensions: 16.92"W x3.46"H x 11.81"D ( 430 x88 x300mm)
FVW-300 Video Typewriter
FVW-30ORS RS- 232C Interface CI- 10 Color Interface
$2950.00
TBA 1650.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 55
Fam.e
49 Lexington St. W. Newton, MA 02165 (617) 244-3223 Telex 922407
VIDEO WRITER/ACCESSORIES
FVW-910 VIDEO WRITER
FEATURES
Operation Unit
· Idealized free hand writer meets broad applications ·Any information can be smoothly written directly onto the
screen by using the lightpen · Line thickness selection · Eight different directions roll operation · Straight line drawing ·Write/erase function
·Optional 3- page memory for the B and W mode ( 1page memory for the color mode)
·Tremendous potential in broadcasting, educational, medical, instructional and informational video systems
·Optional CC-910 and AA-910 are compatible
· Dimensions: Control Unit 15.35"W x6.93"H x 13.98"D (390 x 176 x355 mm)
·Operation Unit 15.35"W x4.72"H x7.87"D ( 390 x 120 x
200 mm)
Control Unit
·All Units Combined 15.35"W x18.50"H x22.44"D ( 390 x
470 x 570 mm)
(Note: Monitor console not included, any Black Et White monitor can be used with both the FVVV-910 and the FVW-300.)
VIDEO WRITER
FVW-910
CC- 910 CI- 10 ENC-110 AA- 910
Video Writer with 1page
Color Control Unit Color Interface/Encoder NTSC Encoder Area Address Unit
$6300.00
650.00 1650.00 2500.00 2600.00
CI- 10 COLOR INTERFACE
FEATURES
· Excellent to use with the Video Typewriters especially for information service at the hotel, medical center, etc.
· Character colorizer and color background generator
·8different colors can be added to the display characters · One of single color, two color or three color backgrounds
is selectable-- selective color is out of 8 different colors
· Display portion of color background can be freely adjusted vertically when two or three color backgrounds are selected
·Width of border line(s) of each color background can be varied in a range of OH 4H lines
· Dimensions: Main Process Unit 16.93"W x 1.73"H x 15.75"D ( 430 x44 x400 mm)
·Control Unit: 18.5"W x 6.3"H x 3.94"D ( 470 x 160 x 100 mm)
CI- 10 Color Interface RB-10 Remote Box for CI- 10
$1650.00 700.00
Monitor Console Unit CI- 10 Color Interface
VP- 56
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
FaR.e
49 Lexington St. W. Newton, MA 02165
(617) 244-3223 Telex 922407
11 e
C
ge
TG- 160
TIME CODE SYSTEMS
TG- 160 Title Generator
Features ·Fixed character data is generated and superimposed through the
built-in P- ROM ·External BCD input data ( 7bits ASKII code) such as Time Code is
superimposed independently or together with the fixed character
·dUapta to 16 alphanumeric characters ( 7 x 9 dot matrix) are
superimposed ·Black/white/off mask display at the back of the characters, for
easy view ·Matt control, V and Hdisplay position control and display size con-
trol facilities ·Excellent device to use with the FOR- A Time Code Generator/Read-
er series ·Dimensions: 16.92"W x 1.75"H x 11.8"D ( 430 x 44 x 300mm)
(19" rack type) TG- 160 Title Generator
$1550.00
TCG-3100
TCG-3100 Time Code Generator
Features ·Low cost SMPTE standards units for use in precision video tape
·eTdhietinTgCGsy-s3t1e0m0s generates SMPTE Time Code and 32 spare bits
code. The unit contains 8digits for hour, minute, second and frame number. Time can be preset at random and also reset to zero. Preset time is confirmed on the front panel. Sync 59.94/external/ crystal for NTSC, and PAL/external crystal for PAL, are selectable.
Also local/remote modes are selectable ·By combining the TCG-3100 with the TG- 160 Title Generator, time
and frame number can be superimposed onto apicture resulting in
easy visual confirmation ·Dimensions: 16.92"W x3.90"H x16.54"D ( 430 x99 x420mm)
(19" rack type) TCG-3100 SMPTE Time Code Generator
62700.00
TCR-3500 Time Code Reader
Features ·Low cost SMPTE and EBU standards Time Code reader for use in
precision video tape editing systems. ·PAL, NTSC standards ·It reads out SMPTE or EBU Time Code and 32 spare bits
code ·Drop-out function ·Time Code display function so it is not necessary to utilize
TG- 160 Title Generator ·Video time display function with frame numbers of the
TG- 55B Video Timer is included ·Built-in real time generator: full automatic running- real time can be
instantly displayed on the monitor ·Two Time Code memories: retrievable instantly ·Identification number for the VTR tape can be displayed on the
monitor ·Dimensions: 16.92"W x3.90"H x 16.54"D ( 430 x 88 x420 mm)
TCR-3500 Time Code Reader w/Video Display
$3450.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-57
49 Lexington St. W. Newton, MA 02165 (617) 244-3223 Telex 922407
VTG-55
VIDEO TIMERS
VTG-55B
VTG -12 Video Timer
Features ·Compact size, low cost and high performance · Battery backup function
·Generates amonth- day- year, hour: minute: second display ·Character format is a7x9dot matrix with abuilt-in black border for
maximum legibility
·Includes abuilt-in rechargeable battery
VTG-12 12/24 hr. Time Date
$ 575.00
VTG -22 Video Timer
Features
· Designed for use with a video camera in field photography · Easily attached to a VTR · 12V power supply or external DC battery
· Built in rechargeable battery for continual internal counting
· Two time modes available: Calendar Mode is standard and a Stop- Watch adaptor can be added as an accessory.
VTG-22 Portable Timer w/Stopwatch 10 Pin Camera Cable
$ 740.00 120.00
VTG -33 Video Timer
Features
· Perfect accessory to any television system, compatible with almost any new and existing installation.
· Precision crystal controlled IC circuitry.
· Low cost, accessible to video and VTR equipment users.
· Compact, full-feature generator with wide operational flexibility.
VTG-33 Video Timer VTG-33F Video Timer w/Battery Backup Terminal
$750.00 850.00
RB-33 Remote Box for VTG-33 and VTG-33F
175.00
R.Ofte VIDEO TIMER
....·
r r
4111)
ems rr-
VTG-33
VTG -55 Video Timer
Features
· High performance professional unit formats. · Up- down counting versatility with freeze control. · Full remote control capability. · Crystal controlled IC reliability.
VTG-55 Video Timer
RB-55 Remote Box for VTG-55
$1235300..0000
VTG -55B Video Timer
Features
· Perfect timer for broadcasting use ·TV frame number display
·Time count- up in the range from -99 to + 99 hours ·Independent display on/off for hour, minute, second and frame
number ·4- step display character size control ·Time fre"ze function
·Optional remote control box is available ·Time Display
Hour: Minute: Second Frame number
VTG-55B Video Timer RB-55B Remote Box for VTG-55B
$ 1650.00 600.00
VP- 58
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRASS VALLEY
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (91 6) 273-8421
GROUP
IGVG\-
PRODUCTION SWITCHER
MODEL 100 PRODUCTION SWITCHER
FEATURES With all the production features needed for basic programming, we expect the Model 100 will follow in family footsteps, becoming the industry standard in professional video production.
If you've been waiting for quality, performance and acomfortable drive before buying acompact switcher, call us today. And put the power of our new Model 100 Switcher on your production team.
STANDARD FEATURES Unique Three Bus Multi- Level Mix/Effects
System: · Eight looping video inputs, plus black and
color background. ·DSK Preview, overrides look- ahead
preview system. · Cut or mix key transitions with indepen-
dent frame rate auto transition.
Master Fade- to- Black and Pulse Processor, Featuring: · Independent frame rate auto transition.for
Fade- to- Black. · Preview system that shows program
output when Fade- to- Black is engaged. · Pulse Processor re-inserts blanking from
black burst on program output for stable output and recordings.
·Standard contact closure editor interface (GPI) to each of the three auto transitions or afourth " select" line which allows selection of any one.
· Program and Preset buses for background transitions.
·Video key bus for luminance keying, chroma keying, and pattern inserts, over the background transition.
·Look- Ahead Preview System that shows the next effect; Wipe transition preview.
·Auto transition, adjustable 0-999 frame, lever arm transition or cut button.
·Ten wipe patterns, with modifiers: Hard or soft edges Hard or soft bordered edges Pattern Reverse Pattern Aspect Rate controlled positioner Preset Pattern size
· Independent Matte Generator for key fill and pattern borders.
Video Keyer, featuring: ·Video or Matte fill
External key input Optional RGB chroma keyer Key invert Key mask using pattern generator Preset Pattern insert filled from key bus
Standard Downstream Keyer, featuring: · Key input from the video key bus or an
external key input.
Pri
411·11TEMOD
faux.* air% toel,,
as, UAL LEY TIROUP MAIM TSAMM10111 IRATE
M. monde
We TO 01411...
eCOK.018
Oat ei
· SID
· · CI CI ·
0101MUMMInyIsuIs IIIIIIII 01 MIIMIU101011110111110118 CI CI
u
BO
· Key fill from an external video source or the independent DSK matte generator.
· BORDER LINE' 4--' Generator option for black or white title borders, drop shadows,
or matte filled outline_ · Key invert. · Key mask using pattern generator.
·Optional serial interface ( RS 232/422) for external computer control.
·Optional pulse regenerator for system timing
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS ·Control panel can sit on desk top ( 17"
wide, 14" deep), or with rack mount adaptor, can be placed in modular rack enclosures ( requires eight rack units). · Electronics frame requires three rack units
and 20" depth. · Single 15 conductor control cable. · Full tally system. ·Selectable power ranges from 100 to 240
volts, 50 or 60 Hz.
OPTIONS
100N NTSC Production Switcher $ 10,495.00
100-33 RGB Chroma Keyer
850.00
100-40 NTSC Digital BORDERLINE
Generator
1 500.00
100-41 NTSC Pulse Regenerator . . .1,000_00
100-50 Serial Interface Adaptor. .. 1,500.00
MODEL 100CV COMPONENT VIDEO
PRODUCTION SWITCHER
The Model 100CV is acompact, flexible,
economical component switching system with the traditional family characteristics of
its older brother; quality, performance, economy and acomfortable drive. Designed for professional component video production, the Model 100CV has all the qualities expected by the most sophisticated user.
The Model 100CV features non- looping video inputs, 8in all, and 3sets of BNC connectors for every input. Utilizing the same control panel as the Model 100 Production Switchers, the Model 100CV Component Video Production Switcher has updated electronics that incorporate as standard equipment many of the features
offered as options on the Model 100.
The electronics frame of the Model 100CV requires 6rack units and 20" depth.
100CV-525 Basic System for 525 Line
System
$18,950.00
OPTIONS 100CV-40 525 System-- Digital BORDER-
LINE Generator
$1,500.00
100-51 Key MEM Effects Memory
System
$3,195.00
AMX-100 Audio Mixer System . . . 5,495.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 59
GRASS VALLEY
P.O. Box 1114
Grass Valley, CA 95945 (916) 273-8421
GROUP
IG\A-
VIDEO SWITCHER
0 0 a o o
0
o
-o
ipà =ye a WHIM
ofS
ElI ULLI J-=
Model 1600-1LCV
Component Video Switcher
The 1600-1LCV is a compact, flexible and economical component switching system, functionally very similar to the popular 1600-1L switcher for composite systems. The switcher uses three parallel switching and processing paths, operating on equal (full) bandwidth R, G and B signals. Careful design allows for excellent tracking of the three processors. Most of the system employs standard 1600 Series modules.
FEATURES
· Component video quality ·Ten inputs, four output buses ( optional
transcoders required for each active input) · Complete mix/effects system with modul-
ated positioner, color matte generator, and rotary pattern generator · Flip-flop mixer with cutbar · Black generator ·Color background generator · Camera tally system
The primary switching matrix is arranged in a 10- input, 4- output configuration. Buses 1 and 2supply input signals to the mix/effects system, the output of which is available as an input to buses 3and 4 -- program ( PGM) and preset ( PST). Sources selected on the PST bus may be transferred to the PGM bus by operation of the cutbar. Alternatively, lap dissolve transitions may be made between the same two buses by means of the lever
assembly using the flip-flop technique.
The mixing and special effects system provides mix or wipe transitions between sources, to a keyed insert, or to a preset pattern. Proportional ( linear) control elements are used for all modes of operation;
mix, wipe, and key. The proportional elements allow soft wipe and vignette effects to be generated; the degree of softness is ad-
justable from the panel. The mix/effects system is complete, in that it contains its own pattern generator, moduulated positioner, and color matte generator.
Matte keys can be enhanced by use of an optional BORDERLINE generator, which provides asymmetrical or drop shadow black edge to inserts. The borderline unit also has an outline- only mode.
The shadow key operates in conjunction with the RGB chroma key option. Shadow chroma keying allows lifelike, noise- free shadows to be included in chroma keyed inserts; the shadows cast by the foreground subject can be electronically added to the background scene so as to provide a high degree of realism. Other options for the 1600-1LCV include an audio- follow- video system which operates in conjunction with the PGM and PST buses. Models are available for 525/60 and 625/50 systems.
SPECIFICATIONS
(Basic System)
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS:
Note: Each active input requires an input transcoder. See ordering information.
Video Input: R, G, B or Y, R-Y(V). B-Y(U) or Y.I.Q. (Input formats individually selectable.) R, G, Band Y inputs 1Vp-p composite or 0.714Vp-p ( 0.7Vp-p for 625/50 versions) non- composite. Components input gain adjustable to accommodate " scaled to Y" components ( e.g., " Betacam") or unscaled components. All inputs must be synchronous. All inputs 75 ohm terminating. Each transcoder provides a monochrome ( Y) signal for input monitoring. 1Vp-p composite.
Pulse Input: Sync Er Blanking
1.8V -- 6.0Vp-p, high impedance bridging.
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS:
Outputs Available:
PGM:
2xRGB Composite
2x Y, C., , C2 Selectable Standard with optional program output transcoder IR, G, B or Y, R-Y(V), B-Y(U) or Y, I, 0) Composite or non- composite. (Both sets of outputs identical.)
2x Y, CI ,C2 as above, with optional second output transcoder.
PVW:
2x RGB Composite
2x Y, CI ,C2 , as above, with optional preview output transcoder.
Impedance: 75 n + 1% source terminated
Level:
R, G, B and Y outputs 1Vp-p composite or 0.714Vp-p ( 0.7Vp-p for 625/50 systems) non- composite, w/transcoder.
Components outputs gain adjustable to provide " scaled to Y" or " unscaled" outputs.
1600-1LCV-525 1600-1LCV-625
$ 37,500.00 37,500.00
OPTIONS
RGB chroma keyer and switcher
for component
$2750.00
BORDERLINE® generators
2490.00
Flip-flop mixer AFV system
9260.00
Parallel edit interface with 8 x2 audio mixer
8300.00
Input transcoders for all current standards
975.00
Program output transcoders
900.00
Preview output transcoder
900.00
Test bar generator and differential
alignment system
1800.00
VP-60
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (916) 273-8421
_AA_
VIDEO SWITCHER
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
çj. o ·
m-amjiuaa4llecleendit:eOr, :· lam :::17F
Zliriral+-1..1121i
o
·_ · ·
rerzl
1o7i12[1JEr,t1-
eIt · t! ..= tT4
tà
111
·
- '
FI CI FT I C1.1 -E:Ilf1
I FITT
[7 :1 1.1
t--3P
rrne t -t (5t
·
T71r;lirlf711-0, · 11 .1
1
n
nrnr ii 0 0 0 0
Model 1600-1XCV Component Video Switcher
The 1600-1XCV is acompact, high performance component video switching system intended for use in small studios, remote vehicles, or in post production applications. A fully integrated E-MEM effects memory system provides assistance to the operator through storage of effects, auto transitions, effects dissolves and effects sequence programming. The 1600-1XCV uses standard 1600 Series modules to provide three parallel switching and processing paths, operating on equal ( full) bandwidth R, G, and B components. Careful design allows excellent tracking accuracy for accurate and stable performance.
FEATURES ·Component video quality ·Ten inputs ( including black and color back-
ground) ·4output buses: M/E-1 A 6. B, PGM, and
PST ·Complete Mix/Effects ( M/E) system with
modulated positioner, color matte generator, and pattern generator
·E-MEM TN II system with SE-QUENCER programming system
·Four Auto transitions ·Flip-flop mixer with cut bar
·Downstream keyer ·Black and color background generator
·Camera tally system
STANDARD E-MEM II SYSTEM An E-MEM II system is standard on every 1600-1XCV. The E-MEM II system provides assistance to the operator through storage of effects ( all controls and pushbuttons) in any of twenty registers. The stored effects can be recalled instantly at the touch of abutton. This permits rapid effects sequences in live production or precise recalls for iterative post
production work.
SPECIFICATIONS
(Basic System)
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS:
Note: Each active input requires an input transcoder. See order information.
Video Input: R, G, B or Y, R-Y(V), B-Y(U) or Y, I, Q.
(Input formats individually selectable.) R, G, Band Y inputs 1Vp-p composite or 0.714Vp-p 10.7Vp-p for 625/50 versions) non- composite. Components input gain adjustable to accommodate " scaled to Y" components ( e.g., " Betacam") or unscaled components. All inputs must be synchronous. All inputs 75 ohm terminating. Each transcoder provides a monochrome ( Y) signal for input monitoring. 1Vp-p composite.
Pulse Input: Sync Et Blanking 1.8V -- 6.0Vp-p, high impedance bridging.
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS:
Outputs Available:
PGM:
2xR GB Composite
2x Y, C 1, C2 ,Selectable Standard,
with optional program output transcoder
(R, G, B or Y, R-Y(V), B-Y(U) or Y, I, (al
Composite or non- composite. (Both sets of outputs identical.)
2x Y,CI , C2 as above, with optional second output transcoder.
PVW:
2x RGB Composite 2x Y, C, , C2,as above, with optional preview output transcoder.
Impedance: 75 fl ± 1% source terminated
Level:
R, G, B and Y outputs 1Vp-p composite
or 0.714Vp-p ( 0.7Vp-p for 625/50 systems non- composite w/transcoder.
Components outputs gain adjustable to provide " scaled to Y" or " unscaled" outputs.
1600-1XCV-525 1600-1XCV-625
$56,500.00 56,500.00
OPTIONS RGB chroma keyer and switcher
for component
$2750.00
Borderline® generators2490.00
Flip-flop mixer AFV system
9260.00
Parallel edit interface with 8x2 audio mixer
8300.00
E-MEM serial interface E- DISK floppy disk storage E-MEM audio system
1565.00 5950.00
15,500.00
Input transcoders for all current standards
975.00
Program output transcoders
900.00
Preview output transcoder
900.00
Test bar generator and differential
alignment system
1800.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-61
GRASS VALLEY GROUP _A/G\_ -
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (916) 273-8421
3 3
·u 0
PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
=:p1.16c:1.1,CLI.111111[
ria-Ímu- rri 1Hi
1.1 l.ii11J
1Li:VIA Et II] ifliJ iii.T1J
00 0.
I
O o O
MODEL 1600-1LN
The 1600-1LN is acompact, flexible, and economical video switching system, intended for use in remote vans, small studios, and post production applications. The switcher employs the same high quality components as other 1600 Series models. Many of the circuit modules, including the mix/effects system, are interchangeable with other 1600 Series modules.
Mode11600-1LN Basic System $23,675.00
· Rotary and standard wipes · 10 inputs ( including color black and color background) ·4 output busses: M/E-1 A Et B, PGM, 8- PST · Complete mix/effects system with modulated positioner,
color matte generator, and pattern generator · Flip-flop mixer with cutbar · Color black generator · Color background generator ·Non- sync inhibit system · Camera tally system
Post Production Options A Parallel Edit Interface option permits remote control of the switcher by asuitably equipped computer editing system. An 8x2audio mixing system with separate control panel is included with the system. The Parallel Edit Interface is compatible with most current computer editing systems.
SPECIFICATIONS: ( BASIC SYSTEM)
Maximum Input Hum Level: 1.5V pp Clamp APL Response: C2mV shift for 10-90% change
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
DC on Output: + 50mV blanking to ground Output Return Loss: 40dB ( 5MHz sweep) Output Isolation: > 35dB ( 5MHz sweep) Outputs Available: Four; 752 + 1%, source terminated Output Level: 1V ppcomposite ( nominal)
MECHANICAL and POWER
Control Panel: 12.25"H x,19"W x 3.5"D ( 31x48.3x 8.9cm)
Rack Mounted Equipment: 8.75"H x 19"W x 18"D (22.3x48.3x45.7cm)
Power Supply: Above dimension includes power supply. No additional air circulation space needed.
Input Power: 120 or 240VAC + 10%, 50/60Hz Power Consumption: 100VA approximate Connectors: BNC ( video) Tally Relay Contacts: 2A, 28V ( resistive load) Gross Shipping Weight: Approximately 100Ib/45kg
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Video Input Level: 1V ppcomposite or 714V pp noncomposite
Pulse Input Level: 4V p- p + 6dB Subcarrier: 2V p- p + 3dB Input Return Loss
Video: 40dB ( 5MHz sweep) Pulse: > 30dB ( T Pulse) Input Hum Attenuation: > 26dB ( reference; 1V p-)) hum)
OPTIONS
· RGBchroma keyer with shadow key
$1850.00
· Encoded chroma key system
2880.00
· RGB switching matrix
900.00
· Borderline generator
2490.00
· Downstream keyer with insert fade control
3995.00
· Flip-flop mixer AFV system
9260.00
· Parallel Edit Interface: compatible with most computer
editing systems. Includes 8x2audio mixer with control
panel
8300.00
VP-62
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (916) 273-8421
_AA_
PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
;ARA
11.111118·1811 '71 ;
Ael ·
·
·
·
· · GRASS VAtUR GROUP II .>
Let
- I
·
-1
crrnirrn EH
IiifflelifflaN !Jiît 7
LIALLITED n I
OM Oil II
MODEL 1600-1XN
A compact, high performance video switching system intended for use in small studios, remote vehicles, or in post production applications. Afully integrated E-MEM II effects memory system provides assistance to the operator through storage of effects, auto transitions, effects dissolves and effects sequence programming.
Model 1600-1XN Basic System $36,500.00
·Ten inputs, four output busses · Rotary and standard wipes ·Complete Mix/Effects ( M/E) system with modulated
positioner, color matte generator, and pattern generator ·E-MEM' II system with sE-QUENCER programming
system ·Four Auto transitions ·Flip-flop mixer with cut bar ·Downstream keyer ·Color black and background generator
·Non-sync inhibit system ·Camera tally system
OPTIONS
·RGB chroma keyer with shadow key ·Encoded chroma key system ·RGB switching matrix ·Borderline® generators ·Flip-flop mixer AFV system ·Pulse regenerator ·Parallel edit interface with 8x2audio mixer ·E-MEM serial interface ·E- DISK floppy disk storage ·E-MEM audio system
$1,850.00 2,880.00 900.00 2,490.00 9,260.00
8,300.00 1,565.00 5,950.00 15,500.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Characteristics
Video Level: 1V p- pcomposite or . 714V p- p noncomposite
Pulse Level: 4V p- p ± 6dB
Subcarrier: 2V p- p±3dB
Return Loss Video: 40dB ( 5MHz sweep) Pulse: 30dB ( T- Pulse)
Hum Attenuation: >- 26dB referenced to 1V p- p
hum Maximum Hum Level: 1.5V p- p Clamp APL Response: < 2mV shift for 10-90%
change
Output Characteristics
Impedance: 75n ± 1%, source terminated Level: 1V p- pcomposite, nominal DC on Output: ± 50mV blanking to ground Return Loss: 40dB, 5MHz sweep Isolation: 35dB, 5MHz sweep
Mechanical and Power
Control Panel: 15.3"H x 28"W x 5.25"D ( 38.9 x 71.2 x 13.4cm)
Rack Mounted Equipment: 15.75"H x 19"W x 18"D (40 x48.3 x45.7cm)
Power Supply: Above dimensions include power supply; no additional air circulation space needed
Input Power: 120 or 240Vac + 10%, 50/60Hz Power Consumption: 225 VA approximate Connectors, Video: BNC Tally Relay Contacts: 2A, 28V, resistive load Gross Shipping Weight: approximately 200Ib/90kg
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-63
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
P.O. Box 1114
Grass Valley, CA 95945 (916) 273-8421
300 SERIES PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
...11&412 11wirtr.' 111.1·04tOr: ,:r..11":0+-- 100 fildiaZIIMP#
C C) C NMI
r
Ire
MODEL 300-3A
300 SERIES PRODUCTION SWITCHING SYSTEM
FEATURES · Unlimited re-entry of effects
·E-MEMTH effects memory system on each Mix/Effects ( M/ El with Effects Dissolve and sequencing
· Four input buses per M/E ·Independent title mix/cut per M/E · Lever and title auto transitions ·Multi- source title keys ·Automatic key follow ·Chroma key memory per input ·Quad split from each M/E · Personality Programming
·Omni-KeyTM system-- Linear Key mode/Key Memory/Key Invert/ External Key*
The 300 Series Production Switching System has been developed to meet the demanding requirements of both live broadcast production, and complex program and commercial production in the studio or edit suite. It is the first production system designed specifically to integrate Digital Video Effects and E-MEMTm effects memory control. Careful attention to the human engineering of panel controls and computer assisted operation provide unmatched production power and ease of operation.
The fully integrated E-MEM system, standard in each mix/effects system, can learn up to 20 different M/E configurations ( all switches and controls). Each effects E-MEM system is independent allowing for selective recalls during live programming. E-MEM's unique "Effects Dissolve" capability allows any combination of analog controls to be treated as a transitional device for unique new
transitions and effects previously impossible under manual control. Sequencing allows aseries of changes in control set-up and effects dissolves to be linked together for animated effects and complex productions. The effects E-MEM systems can be linked with control of the other switcher functions ( Flip- Flop mix, DSK, Background, Quad
Split) and the Mk11 DVE by the Master E-MEM effects memory option. This distributed E-MEM system allows frame accurate control of individual elements of very complex effects frequently used in post- production.
Four input buses per M/E handle most common effects sequences without re-entry. Transitions from one background to another, the addition of avideo key ( chroma key, DVE key, self key or matte key), a title key or any combination of the above, can be accomplished with one lever movement on a single MIE. Title hierarchy is selectable over or under the video key for full flexibility. Four input buses also permit aquad split output from each MIE. Thus dissolves or wipes are now possible between quad split from different M/E s.
An automatic preview function displays the exact results of the next lever movement ( including all re-entries) in the Preview monitor.
Lever and title auto transitions with independent rate programming, are provided on each M/E. Titles can be added or deleted in combination with background or video key transitions or independently from title mix ( auto transition) or title cut buttons.
The preset black function permits atransition to black ( mix or wipe) between the on air effect and the previewed effect. The first lever movement is a transition to black ( the crosspoint is automatically selected), and the second lever movement is a transition to the previewed effect.
New high performance chroma keyers ignore luminance highlights in non- key areas, due to an exclusive Luminance Annihilator circuit. Encoded chroma key with shadow can be added to each M/E. For each primary input the appropriate chroma keyer ( FIGB or Encoded) and last key setup is memorized for automatic recall if selected.
A program/preset mixer with downstream keyer feeds the Program output of the switcher. It operates just like an M/E, with the exception of wipes, non- additive mixes, and video keys. Downstream keyer functions are accomplished in the same manner as title keys in an M/E with the same sources available.
'Available as standard on all 300 series switcher systems beginning May, 1985. Omni- Kit available to upgrade 300 series systems to include Omni-Key' enhancements.
VP-64
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
PRODUCTION SVVITCHERS
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (91 6) 273-8421
,TÍT"). rrrin-TTEETTITT
11
)f1 ErITED 1LI Eli frn..)
fTg TITir141"EUITITEIT.P1 '
r.I r'rr'! flTr11"/"YrreEFtl
lyrr
Options RGB Chroma Keyers with Shadow Key
for 10V/10X for 16F/24F -- 16K/24K Chroma Key Switcher · E-MfEoMr ®10IllVEffects Memory System" for 16F/24F for 16K/24K E-MEM® Ill System Serial Interface EDlSKTM Floppy Disk Storage Digital BORDERUNE® Generators Analog BORDERLINE® Generators Encoded Chroma Key Systems for 10V/10X for 16F/24F -- 16K/24K Parallel Edit Interface with 8x2Audio Mixer Video Only Video and Audio Quad Split Generator for F/K Models Only Auxiliary Switching Bus with Separate Control Panel for 16F for 24F
Dual fPorow1e0rV/Su1p0pXlies for 16K/24K
$ 1,850.00 1,950.00 900.00
19,545.00 32,180.00 37,380.00
1,565.00 5,950.00 2,490.00 5,200.00
2,880.00 2,945.00
5,800.00 8,300.00 2,140.00
2,670.00 3,320.00
2,850.00 37,380.00
"Standard on F/K Models **Standard on 10X Models
1680 SERIES PRODUCTION SVVITCHERS With the 1680 there is anew level of possibilities available to operators worldwide. With the same familiar drive of the 1600, there is more power, more control than ever before. Whether live broadcast or post production, the 1680 provides double the production power from each mix/effects system. Plus the 1680 has the ability to interface with peripheral devices integral to modern production. So your potential to create brilliant special effects explodes.
Best of all, the 1680 carries the Grass Valley Group reputation of respect, reliability, and worldwide recognition -- areputation meaning more to you than awell known name. It means when you outgrow your switcher, there will be amarket to sell to. In fact, most of our 3,500 original 1600's are still in use somewhere in the world, commanding close to their original price. So, welcome to the world of the 1680. A world with power, control and Grass Valley Group reliability, all in the
drive you have come to know.
The evolution from the 1600 has brought other standard features to the 1680-- expanding your ability to create visual messages. Non-Additive Mix greatly improves how supers look on the screen. New Soft Bordered Wipes allow control of border width and degree of softness. And the Downstream Keyer, formerly an option, is now standard in every 1680. Standard Title Keyers, Non-Additive Mix, Soft Bordered Wipes, and Downstream Keyer. They all add up to the production power needed to
meet today's heavy demands.
E-MEM System Although standard on the 1680-10X, the E-MEM System is an option on all other 1680 switcher models. The system provides effects memory for all switcher functions, plus the sequences created with the Post Production System. The system allows individual elements of complex effects to be adjusted and previewed separately, giving you precise
control and effect repeatability.
Serial Interface Adaptor The serial interface adaptor expands the switcher/editor interface beyond the edit decision list to total switcher control. It is the central hub that allows the switcher to connect all peripheral devices, such as the
E- DISK TM Effects Storage System, post production audio, your computer editing system, and many other external production tools.
Preliminary Specifications
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Video Input Level:
1V p- p composite or .714V noncomposite.
Pulse Input Level:
4V p-p ±-6dB.
Subcarrier:
2V p-p -±6dB.
Input Hum Attenuation: 26dB (reference; 1V P-P hum)
Maximum Input Hum Level:
1.5V p-p.
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Level:
1V p-p composite ( nominal).
Available:
Three; 7511 ± 1%. source terminated.
DC on Output: ±50 mV blanking to ground.
MIX/EFFECTS CHARACTERISTICS (each M/E) Mix Tracking: 1% gain error. 10mV p-p DC error.
Chrominance Linearity During Mix: 1.5% amplitude error. 2° p-p phase error.
VIDEO SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS
Short Time Waveform Distortion
1% unvveighted
Line Time Waveform Distortion 0.5%.
Field Time Waveform Distortion: 0.5%.
Frequency Response (reference; 1MHz):
300kHz to 5MHz: ±0.2dB. 5MHz to 8MHz: +0.2dB to -0.7dB. 8MHz to 20MHz: OdB maximum.
Differential Phase: 1.5° ( 10-90% APL). Differential Gain: 1.5% ( 10-90% APL).
K Factor:
0.5% (2 T Pulse).
Chrominance/Luminance Inequalities: 1Ons delay. 0.2dB gain.
Crosstalk: 52dB at 3.58MHz; 50dB at 4.43MHz.
Signal-to- Noise Ratio: 65dB p-p signal/RMS noise to 5MHz.
Path Length Deviation: 1.5°.
Gain Stability:
1%.
Gain Uniformity:
0.1dB.
DC Stability:
530mV.
Post Production Audio This integrates the control of audio sources with your system by placing your audio sources under computer editor control.
E- DISK Effects Storage System With the E- Disk floppy disk system, favorite effects can be stored permanently for future use. This allows effects to be created off-line
POWER Input Power: Power Consumption:
95-125 or 190-250 VAC, 48-62Hz. 450VA approx. 11680-24K/16K). 275VA approx. 41680-10X).
225VA approx. ( 1680-16F/24F). 200VA approx. ( 1680-10V).
then used in live programs with perfect repetition. The E- Disk System is
particularly useful in fast- paced formatted programs, where visually
exciting effects are consistently repeated.
1680-10VN 1Mix Effect Switcher 1680- 10XN 1Mix Effect Switcher
Peripheral Interface The Peripheral Interface expands production capabilities by allowing your computer editor to control other intelligent devices, such as Digital
1680-16FN 2Mix Effect Switcher 1680-16K N 3Mix Effect Switcher 1680-24FN 2Mix Effect Switcher 1680-24KN 3Mix Effect Switcher
Video Effects or character generators.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$ 30,855.00 49,500.00 67,950.00 97,650.00 74,950.00 105,000.00
VP-65
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (9 16) 273-8421
SYSTEMS 31/41/51 VIDEOTAPE EDITING SYSTEMS Modular Each editing system, while uniquely designed for specific applications, permits "personal tailoring" to satisfy individual editing needs. Expandable As your demands increase for additional editing features and equipment, GVG editing systems expand to accommodate your growth by adding hardware or software modules. Flexible GVG Editing systems have the industry's most flexible interfacing capabilities. Examples include RS422 and RS232 VTR Control as well as the ability to control awide variety of switchers and other equipment. Help File Sometimes an editor needs aquick solution to acomplex editing request; Help File with sub- categories insures easy access to definitive help... help you will remember and repeatedly use.
VIDEO TAPE EDITING SYSTEMS
SYSTEM 31
An editing system designed to serve both on-line and off-line applications, the System 31 is an editing system of unusual functional dimension. With eight I/O ports, and exceptional features such as
Super- Slave and Cue Ahead, the System 31 provides exceptional performance at an outstanding performance/cost ratio.
FEATURES · DEC 11/2 CPU ·64K Bytes of Memory · Dual 0.5M Byte Floppy Disk Drives · Distributed Processing Control ·8 Control Ports for VTRs and Switchers ·4 Accessory Ports · Sync Interface · 132 Column Printer · DEC RT/11 Operating System · Exclusive Super Edit ·Assignable VTRs, Video, Audio ·Video, Dual Audio Editing ·Edit List Display, Input- Output ·Multiple Edit List Disk Files
·Auto- Track Dissolve Setup, Anywhere in Edit List ·Match Any Edit, Both Sides of Dissolves ·Unique- Timed Action Modes
XGPI, Expanded Switcher Control, Log in Edit List ·Auto- Clean Removes Overlaps ·Super- Slave
Slave 1to 6VTRs, Easy Slave Setup, Positive Offset Lock, Easy Offset Change, Slaves in Edit List · Full Preview, Edit Functions
·Sequential, Checkerboard, and Cue- Ahead Auto- Assembly ·Real- Time Edit Mode ·Replay Any Edits, with Auto- Scroll ·Six- Character Alpha- Numeric Reel ID ·Multiple- Record, Synchronous Replay · Help File · Event Numbers to 999
· Notes in the Edit List, with Individual Add, Delete ·User- Bit Time Reference
· Powerful Edit List Management, with/without Ripple
Insert, Delete Groups, Recall, Replace, Move Groups, Shift Groups
SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions
Console Model CPU Rack Mount CPU Keyboard Jogger I/O Panel Typical Interface Separate Disk Enclosure
Weight
Height
14-3/4 5-1/4 3-1/4
3-1/4 1-3/4 1-3/4 5-1/4
Console Model CPU Rack Mount CPU Keyboard Jogger Typical Interface
Separate Disk Enclosure
Power
Console Model CPU Rack Mount CPU Typical Interface
Separate Disk Enclosure
Warranty
System Hardware System Software Accessories
System 31
Width
20-1/2 19
20-1/2
8 19 19 19
Inches Depth
20 25-1/2
9
9 2 13 26
Clearance
21-1/2 27 9 9 2
14-1/2 27
Lbs.
50 60
3 4 1
40
Watts
500 500 100
400
Months
6 12
3
$ 29,500.00
VP- 66
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRASS VALLEY GROUP Jek
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (916) 273-8421
VIDEO TAPE EDITING SYSTEMS
SYSTEMS 31/41/51 VIDEOTAPE EDITING SYSTEMS ( Coned)
SYSTEM 41
The System 41, a high performance on-line editing system, is designed for the most demanding applications. This system has a
faster CPU than System 31. It also has features which make variable- speed VTR control and editing precise and easy. System 41 software and hardware features permit full exploration of the pro-
fessional's creativity.
FEATURES ·Faster DEC 11/23 CPU ·64K Bytes of Memory ·Dual 0.5M Byte Floppy Disk Drives
·Distributed Processing Control ·8Control Ports for VTRs and Switchers
·4Accessory Ports ·Color- Lock Sync Interface ·132 Column Printer ·Jogger Motion Control ·DEC AT/il Operating System
·Exclusive Super Edit ·Assignable VTRs, Video, Audio
·Video, Dual Audio Editing ·Edit List Display, Input- Output ·10 Macro Functions, with Nesting
·Multiple Edit List Disk Files ·Powerful Edit List Management, with/without Ripple
Insert, Delete Groups, Recall, Replace, Move Groups, Shift
Groups ·Single- Keystroke Dissolve ·Auto-Track Dissolve Setup, Anywhere in Edit List
·Three Freeze Modes
·Help File ·Match Any Edit, Both Sides of Dissolves ·Auto- Clean Removes Overlaps
·Full Preview, Edit Functions ·Match to Freeze, Variable- Speed ·Replay Any Edits, with Auto- Scroll ·Six- Character Alpha- Numeric Reel ID
·VTR Speedometer ·Event Numbers to 999 ·Notes in the Edit List, with Individual Add, Delete
·Unique Timed- Action Modes XGPI, Expanded Switcher Control, Log in Edit List
·Fill Mode Computes VTR Speed
·User- Bit Time Reference
·Real- Time Edit Mode ·Multiple- Record, Synchronous Replay
·Super- Slave Slave 1to 6VTRs, Easy Slave Setup, Positive Offset Lock,
Easy Offset Change, Slaves in Edit List
·Precise Programmed Motion Control ·Sequential, Checkerboard, and Cue- Ahead Auto- Assembly
System 41
$35,500.00
SYSTEM 51
The top of the line System 51 is without reservations an editing system unmatched in features, performance and reliability. This
system was specifically designed to perform flawlessly for the profession's best in their most demanding applications. The interfacing possibilities with the industry's most complex equipment is virtually limitless. The system features huge memory capacity, 16 ports for unrestricted control, and the most powerful software features in the
industry.
FEATURES ·Fast DEC 11/23 CPU ·Memory Management ·256K Bytes of Memory ·10M Byte Hard Disk Drive ·0.5M Byte Floppy Disk Drive
·Distributed Processing Control ·16 Control Ports for VTRs and Switchers ·4Accessory Ports ·132 Column Wide Form Printer
·Jogger Motion Control ·DEC RT/11 Operating System ·Exclusive Super Edit ·Assignable VTRs, Video, Audio ·Video, Dual Audio Editing ·Edit List Display, Input- Output ·Multilple Edit List Disk Files ·Color- Lock Sync Interface ·Single- Keystroke Dissolve ·Multilple-Record, Synchronous Replay
·Super- Slave Slave 1to 6VTRs, Easy Slave Setup, Positive Offset Lock, Easy Offset Change, Slaves in Edit List
·Help File ·Auto-Track Dissolve Setup, Anywhere in Edit List
·Match Any Edit, Both Sides of Dissolves
·Remote Terminal Emulator ·Auto- Clean Removes Overlaps ·Full Preview, Edit Functions
·Print Spooling ·Sequential, Checkerboard, and Cue- Ahead Auto-Assembly
·Replay Any Edits, with Auto- Scroll ·Six- Character Alpha- Numeric Reel ID
·Notes in the Edit List, with Individual Add, Delete
·Event Numbers to 9999 ·Powerful Edit List
Management, with/without Ripple Insert, Delete Groups, Recall, Replace,
Move
Groups,
Shift
Groups ·User- Bit Time Reference ·Real-Time Edit Mode ·10 Macro Functions, with Nesting
·Three Freeze Modes ·Film Package
Direct Film Entry, Slate Calculation,
35/16mm,
Centered
Dissolve ·Match to Freeze, Variable- Speed
·VTR Speedometer ·Fill Mode Computes VTR Speed ·Unique Timed- Action Modes
XGPI, Expanded Switcher Control, Log in Edit List, Precise Pro-
grammed Motion System 51
$43,500.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-67
GRAY ENGINEERING
504-P, West Chapman Avenue Orange, CA 92668 (714) 997-4151
LABORATOFIIES, INC
TIME CODE EQUIPMENT
DT- 113
Code Reader and Video Character Generator
DR- 103. Data Receiver and Character Generator. Reads and displays
edit- code and equivalent film-frames on video monitor and has three
switchable units
$4550.00
DR- 107B. Data Receiver and Character Generator. Reads and displays
time or user bits on video monitor
2795.00
DR- 115. Data Receiver and 4Channel Character Generator. Provides 4
separate video character displays from one edit- code input for
iso-camera productions
4250.00
DR- 120. Data Receiver, Character Generator, Identifier and Demulti-
plexer. Reads and displays time, multiplexed user bits, and video
source I.D. on video monitor
3150.00
DR- 122. Data Receiver and Dual Character Generator. Allows simul-
taneous video display of both time code and user- bits with video
source identification capability
4450.00
Code Reader and Local Display
DR- 109, Data Receiver, Display and Demultiplexer. Reads and displays time or multiplexed user bits on 8digit hex readout .. .$2795.00
TCR-119. Time Character Reader. Reads video characters in the stop
or slow VTR speed and converts to serial time code for automatic com-
puter editing
3950.00
TBC-117. Edit Code Time Base Corrector. Converts wide- band erratic
code input to atruly regenerated "ANSI" spec code output. . .3900.00
DR- 107 Font
NOTE: 5Yr. Warranty on All Products Including Parts and Labor.
SMPTE Data Receiver Et Character Generator
DR- 107. The DR- 107 offers an unusual number of capabilities in a minimum space at an economy price. All controls are on the front panel. In addition, there are internal selectors for DROP FRAME status on the monitor, choice of monitor up- date change, and free running of time in the absence of code. Character heights may be varied from 8to 64 lines in four increments, and the widths may be adjusted to the preferred aspect ratio. The characters may be plain or boxed. Characters may be inserted in the Vertical Interval, offering greater versatility to recording or transferring of tapes. Lines 12 through 19 are used in the Vertical Interval mode so no interference will occur. Size: 1-3/4" High Standard 19" relay panel x9-1/2" deep excluding plugs.
SMPTE Time Code Transmitter
DT- 113. SMPTE Edit Code is generated from amaster clock which may be selected for DROP FRAME count by a front panel switch. User Bits may be inserted from aparallel 32 line input. TIME or USER BITS can be displayed on an 8- Digit hexadecimal readout. The master clock may be reset or loaded to atime on an 8- Digit thumbwheel switch. The clock can be stopped by a HOLD button. The clock and transmitted code can be synchronized to the 60 Hz line or to Video/Sync frames. Code start is within the HNSI spec. ( 1HLine in the Vertical Interval). The clock can be synchronized to the color burst phase for odd or even frame count when the sub- carrier is in phase. Size: 1-3/4" High Standard 19" relay panel x9-1/2" deep excluding plugs.
Code Generators
DT- 104F. Data Transmitter. Similar version of the DT- 104A that
provides for NTSC and PAL compatibility, Color Frame Sync,
advanced Slave (jam-sync) decoding and a choice of Field or Frame
Rate Time Code
$5950.00
DT- 113. Data Transmitter. Transmit code at 30, 25, or 24 frame
counts; color frame sync mode, local hex display, user- bit input; code
start accuracy to + /- 1 line
2995.00
CC- 114. Code Comparator. Compares apre-set time with an incoming
Time Code to produce an editing signal on coincidence. Must be used
with any Gray Time Code Reader
2330.00
User-Bit Equipment
MC -ib. User Bit Modifier and Combiner. Combines time codes
serially from two independent sources using user bits for the second
time code
$2595.00
MD- 111. User Bit Modifier, Display and Demultiplexer. Modifies
multiplexed user bits on incoming edit code from a 32- line parallel input
3295.00 UBE-118. User Bit Encoder. a 10- channel multiplexer that encodes
user- bits from parallel inputs. MD- 111
Encoder for DT- 104, DT- 113, or 2550.00
Safe Area Generator
VR-116. Video Reticle Generator. Allows precise positioning of titles
and graphics from dead center to the edge of verticle and horizontal
blanking
$2595.00
VR-121. Video Reticle Generator. Similar to VR-116 with the addi-
tion of monitor linearity check, variable reticle size and position with memory and recall and akeying switch to set reticle areas from white to black
3950.00
Code -Phase -Measurement
CPI- 123. Code Phase Indicator. Measures the difference between an
actual code frame start on aVTR versus ANSI spec of + /- 1H. Line
to insure computer compatibility
2100.00
VP-68
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRAY ENGINEERING LABORATORIES, INC.
504-P, West Chapman Avenue Orange, CA 92668 (71 4) 997-41 51
SMPTE EDIT CODE PRODUCTS
ellE1111
VIE- 224
CPC- 700
CPC -700 Code Phase Corrector
The location of SMPTE Time- Code on the cue track of avideo tape and its relationship to other signals on the tape is specified by ANSI V98. 12M-1981. Although the Time- Code start of address as originally recorded may meet the specified tolerance of + one H line, an out of phase condition can develop due to video signal processing ( TBC's) and the changing of the audio/video head relationship, among other things. When automatic editing is involved, a large enough displacement of the code with respect to the picture can cause the computer to reject the time code and prevent editing.
Measures, displays, and corrects the phase difference between the Cue- Track Frame Code and the Video to allow computer acceptance. One 703-1 and 703-2 modules are required for each playback VTR. Compatible with both NTSC and PAL.
$1395.00 plus $995.00 for both 703-1 Et 703-2 modules
The equipment rack provides space for one to eight Code- Phase- Corr-
ector Modules. One of these modules is required for each playback VTR machine in the edit bay.
Features: SERIES 700 rack frame houses all modules. POWER SUPPLY plug-in module 701-1 provides the required power to all modules in the unit. FRAME PULSE GENERATOR plug-in module 702-1 supplies the sync timing to the Code Phase Corrector modules. CODE PHASE CORRECTOR plug-in module 703-1. TVVO DIGIT DISPLAY shows the number of bits the Time Code is out of phase. Range is + 40 bits. A blinking point between the two digits indicates data is being sampled
and corrected.
VIE -224 Vertical Interval Encoder
Converts longitudinal Edit Code Input to VITC for insertion into one or
more video lines. Incorporates Code Time Base Correction
techniques.
$3450.00
Features: USER- BIT UPDATE switch offers choice of updating atime code used
in the user bit section. ENCODE/OFF switch indicates when the
V.I . T.C. is encoding. USER/TIME switch allows the selection of either Time or User- Bits for display. DISPLAY of time or User- Bits information of 8 Digit Hexadecimal characters. BLANK/FRAMES switch allows blanking of the two frames digits. SYNC/ CUE indicates whether video sync and/or imput code is present. DROP FRAME/NON DROP FRAME indicates the type of code being
received.
VID -225
VID -225 Vertical Interval Decoder
Decodes both longitudinal and/or Vertical Interval Time Code and
outputs information as longitudinal Time Code at arate proportional to
either input arid acceptable to most edit computers.
$3950.00
A new SMPTE longitudinal code is outputted at arate proportional to either input. Therefore VITC input can be used from freeze frame to full wind and be automatically interfaced to most existing edit controllers, SMPTE longitudinal generators, readers and character
generators, etc. Selection of the two codes can be automatic or manual, allowing the maximum advantage of both codes in various situations. At tape speeds below 1/4 play speed, the unit outputs longitudinal data at a 1/4 rate when VI IC is present and will squelch if an absence of time code is required by the edit controller when the tape is stopped.
The VITC data is also available for use in encoding other video equipment.
Features: DROP FRAME/NO DROP FRAME displays the type of Time Code being received. FRAME number thumbwheel is an eleven position switch to select the unit frame number for de- multiplexed User- Bit display or to display ALL frames of User- Bits. DISPLAY/FREEZE is an alternate switch to freeze the display. TIME/USER switch allow the selection of either Time or User- Bits for display. DISPLAY of Time or User Bit information of 8 Digit Hexadecimal characters. FRAMES/ BLANK switch allows blanking of the two frames digits. FIELD 1-- FIELD 2 split indicator shows which field of the V.I.T.C. code is being received. V.I.T.C. / CUE split indicator shows the source of data being transmitted on the Code Output. POWER button is an alternate toggle switch to turn the instrument ON and OFF.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-69
HARRIS CORPORATION
VIDEO SYSTEMS DIVISION
P.O. Box 4290 Quincy, IL 62305-4290 (217) 222-8200
EFFECTS SYSTEM
gailaes'a
L.1-1
HDE 100/150/200 DIGITAL VIDEO EFFECTS SYSTEM Harris introduces the HDE 200. This easy-to- use production tool features a 150 event bubble memory and easily upgradeable multi- channel capability. It is also available in two expandable versions, the HDE 100 and HDE 150. So now your effects capability can expand with your needs, and you can stay within your budget.
HDE 100 Features ·Variable Squeeze and Compression · Slide/Push ·Split and Compression Split ·H Er V Invert ·Freeze/Stop Action ·Programmable Multi-Pix Freeze · Posterization · Mirror/Reflect · Montage ·Separate Border/Background ·Variable Aspect Ratio ·Fader Limiter ·Preset Effect Registers
HDE 150 All the effects of the HDE 100, plus: ·Variable Expansion/Zoom ·Programmable Trajectory ·Multi Move ·Mosaic ( Tile) · Flip/Tumble ·Wipe Follow ·Chroma Key Tracking ·Auto Operation of up to 150
Programmed Events ·On- Board Event Memory with
Battery Back-up ·Removable Event Bubble Memory ·Editor Interface
HDE 200 All the effects of the HDE 150, plus: ·Automatic Input Switching ·Strobe Caption · Decay ·Prewired for Dual Channel Option
L1%. \
L;.1
Specifications GENERAL
Signal processing system No. of bits per word Sampling frequency
PCM binary-coded signal processing 8 bits
14.3 MHz
Input signals Input key signal
NTSC composite sync or monochrome signal: 1V p- p, 75 ohms 0.7 V p-por TTL
Output signals Output key signal
NTSC composite sync, 1Vp-p, 75 ohms, 4outputs 0.7 V p-p, 75 ohms, 3outputs
External Reference
Black Burst: 0.3 Vp-p
Composite Video: 0.3 V p-p, high impedance SYNC: 4V p-p
SC: 2V p- p
SIGNAL PERFORMANCE
Video input return loss Reference input return loss Video output return loss
?-30 dB at 3.58 MHz >30 dB at 3.58 MHz >28 dB at 3.58 MHz
Frequency response (A/D, D/A only)
1kHz to 5.0 MHz: ± 0.2 dB >7.5 MHz: <- 40 dB
K factor
<1%
Dill gain
2%
Dill phase
2°
Signal-to-noise ratio Periodic noise Hum
50 dB/rms (quantizing noise included) <30 mV p-p 4 -- 50 dB
Adjustable ranges Video level
Chroma level Set-up Burst phase HUE SYNC level Burst level
Adjustable to 07V p- pwith input of 056 to 084 V p- p ±10% 0to 17.5 IRE 360° ±20° 0.3 V ± 0.1 V
0.3 V ± 01V
MECHANICAL & ENVIRONMENTAL
Dimensions
EMI: Conducted & Radiated Operating temperature Spec temperature Power requirements
Video Processor 11 7" (30 cm) H x19" (48 cm) W x17.6" (45 cm) D
System Controller 5.9" ( 15 cm) Hx19" (48 cm) W x17 6" (45 cm) D Control Panel: 17.2" (44 cm) Hx7.8" (20 cm) W x5.9" ( 15 cm) D Meets FCC Class Aspecifications 0°C to 40°C 10°C to 30°C
110 V + 10%. 220 V + 10%. 50/60 Hz
HDE 100 HDE 150 HDE 200 Single Channel
HDE 200 Dual Channel
$47,000.00 55,250.00 79,000.00
135,000.00
VP- 70
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1 H 2X1 1416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
COLOR SPECIAL EFFECTS GENERATOR
SEG-801-Studio Color Special Effects Generator
With full NTSC color specifications, the Image Video SEG-801 Studio Color Special Effects Generator is designed to meet the needs of VTR post production. It will function as astandard 6input video switcher with basic mix and effects transition. With the downstream key function, basic matte keys and fade to blacks can be performed with non- synchronous sources ( non time based VTR's). It's easy to follow front panel design is engineered to enable the operator to concentrate on the creative rather than the technical aspect of production.
FEATURES
· 7video inputs ( including Ext. Key), loop thru · Total solid state vertical interval switching · Momentary contact, illuminated pushbuttons
used throughout · Full NTSC color specifications · Total of 5busses ( including PV & PGM out
busses) · Versatile configuration with MIE, A/B and C Aux.
allow cut buss operation and total preview of all
inputs plus EFF and KEY
· Mix Functions -- Fade In/Out -- Lap dissolve
-- Superimpose
· Effects Functions
-- 12 regular wipes with adjustable aspect
ratio -- external matte key -- Normal and Inverted
key
· Built in color/mono matte generator locked to input video. Requires no external drives or
subcarrier · Built in black generator with downstream fade to
black capability. Locked to program input,
requires no external drives · Downstream keyer for normal or invert keys and
provision for dissolving in or cutting in key
· External H&V drive outputs locked to program video for external monochrome key camera
allow full color matte key inserts on program video even with non capstan servo VTR program
source and no external sync gen. or gen lock
required. · Full electronic tally with dry contact closures
· Fully solid state includes 180 transistors, 77 diodes, 40 integrated circuits and 2bridge
rectifiers · Self contained unit with standard 19 inch rack
mount capability
insia taer so ases ani·anli
* aaaUua samease-n.
ej WI OW NPUS
re!ie
t
3 ·
3
6
C
EFFECTS
eruge 6606661/
*
I DONIESTREAN REEER
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
__I GEGNAETRTAITOR
:VErleji
VIDEO INPUTS Input signal level . Input impedance
Number of inputs
1V p- pnominal, composite 75 ohm loop thru. BNC connectors
6plus ext. key video in
SYNC AND DRIVE INPUTS
VIDEO OUTPUT Signal level Impedance Number of outputs
None required
1V p- pnominal. composite 75 ohm. BNC connectors
2program, 1preview
DRIVE OUTPUTS
Signals provided Impedance Signal level Connectors
H and Vdrive for key camera 75 ohm source terminated 4V p- p BNC
CHARACTERISTICS
Frequency response
Gain Differential gain . Differential phase Crosstalk Line and field tilt Signal to noise ratio Path length accuracy
10 MHz ± 1db
Unity Less than 1°0. 10-90 00APL Less than 1° . 10-90°0 APL Better than 52 db at 3.58 MHz
Less than 1°. Better than 60 db RMS below 1V p- p + 1° at 3.58 MHz
GENERAL
Telly system
6camera--dry contact closures
Intercom Power requirements
Front Panel Jack 117V AC 60 Hz Nom.. 35VA
Weight Dimensions
13 pounds 19" x5.2" x13.8" behind panel
Mounting
. Rack or desktop
Operating temperature .. . 0° to 50°C
Operating humidity
. 0to 95°0
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-71
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46
Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1 H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
BORDER GENERATOR
coo HUE
SATURATATX
LUM31HUICE
Ki ·
or.. a
z
8105 Border Generator
121I
OM IMO
MIX TO &AM
MI MI
The Image Video Ltd. Border Generator provides bordering facilities controlled from a remote control panel. One special feature is the elimination of bothersome dither associated with camera originated graphics.
Features
·Built-in color fill generator locks in the incoming video ·Borders graphics or character generators ·Eliminates dither when bordering camera originated graphics ·Built-in linear keyer provides cut or auto- mix of key into program video ·Remote control panel with facilities for border, outline, color fill key, drop shadow, invert
key, and variable key threshold control ·Master fade to black ·Advanced technology incorporating CCD delay lines
SPECIFICATIONS Input Inputs
Input Signal Level Input Impedance Outputs Program Outputs Program Monitor Preview Outputs Output Impedance Differential Gain Differential Phase Frequency Response
Output Signal Level Power Dimensions Electronics Rack Remote Control Panel Fade to Black Controls
VP- 72
Program, Key, and Reference video ( usually tied externally to Program input). 1V p- p ± 1dB Bridging 75 ohms
2 1 1 75 ohms 0 5%, 10 to 90% APL 0 5°, 10 to 90% APL + 0.1 dB to 5MHz 1+V 0p.-2,p-0.5 dB to 8MHz 120 VAC ± 10%
3-1/2"H, 19"W, 15"D 3-1/2"H, 19"W, 4-1 / 2"D Manual fader and 4- rate auto fade
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Bofd Beginning"
why each Intergroup product is backed by a 5-year fimited warranty. And to go one step further, Intergroup is offering a30-day return policy. The video user can purchase an Intergroup product with complete confidence.
Innovation And Craftsmanship
Creativity You Can Depend On!
Tocfay, anew group with vision and dedication is working to expand the quality and creative limits of video. This new group, futown as Intergroup Video Systems, recognizes that their ultimate success will depend upon satisfying the needs of video users. Therefore,tney estabfishedthree important _goats for aff Intergroup products: each must be innovative, quality-crafted and user-friencify.
Intergroup Video Systems manufactures a complete fine of video production and switching equipment including: production switchers, master control switchers, routing switchers and audio and video terminal equipment.
Calf tofffree today 1-800-874 -7590 tofind out more about Intergroup products bache ti
by a5-year limited: warranty and
30-day return policy.
Introducing Intergroup's New 5-Year Limited -Warranty And
30-Day Return Policy
Intergroup Video Systems also recognizes that their pro&tds must be dependable. That's
v111111:111=s
"Creativity You Can Depend On"
INTERGROUP VIDEO SYSTEMS, INC.
P.O. BOX 1495 / GAINESVILLE, FL 32602 U.S.A. SALES: (800) 874-7590 / IN FLORIDA (904) 373-6783
TWX 810-825-2307
dle49 \11)1 C) SYS ri
"Creativity You Can Depend On"
2101 NE 31st Ave. P.O. Box 1495 Gainesville, FL 32602 (904) 373-6783 (800) 874-7590 TVVX 810-825-2307
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHER
MODEL 901
FEATURES ·3Input Buses ( A, B, and Direct) ·6Composite Video Inputs including, Colorizer/ Black ·Mix, Wipe, Mix- Key, Wipe- Key ·Hard or Soft Wipes ·Normal/Reverse Wipes · 12 Patterns · Positioner ·Operates on AC or DC ·Master Fade-to- Black with Blanking Processor · Mix or Cut from Direct to M/E ·Internal or External Key with Matt Fill or " A" Bus · Prewired for Downstream Key Edger with Colorizer ·Prewired for RGB or Encoded Chroma Keyer ·Complete Tally ·No External Wiring between Circuit Boards
Description
The Model 901 Video Production Switcher is capable of awide range of video effects. From soft or hard edged wipes to chroma keys with fade-to- black this unit will give you all the power you need. The
AC/DC operation makes this the ideal choice for the small production van or an EFP Unit that operates out of cases. Pulse lock, genlock, and internal sync generators are available to insure the correct mode for your system.
LEDs are provided as a convenience, indicating which bus is " on air". A low voltage indicator warning when the + 12V supply is low when operating from battery power.
901 ENC Video Production Switcher
with Encoded Chroma Keyer 901 RGB Video Production Switcher
with RGB Chroma Keyer
901 Options
666-C Downstream Keyer with
Color ( Frame and PS req.)
934
Additional Extender Card
Additional Manual
Spare Parts Kit
$4,300.00 4 300.00
2,275.00 40.00 65.00
400.00
VP-74
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VI flE0 SYSTT
"Creativity You Can Depend On"
2101 NE 31st Ave. P.O. Box 1495 Gainesville, FL 32602 (904) 373-6783 ( 800) 874-7590 TVVX 810-825-2307
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHER
MODEL 903
FEATURES ·Computer Controlled Switcher · 1C Inputs with Full Tally · Momentary contact Pushbuttons · Black Burst Generator/Colorizer ·Two Mix/Effects Systems with Shared Pattern Generator
(Additional Pattern Generator available) ·Smart Panel enabling write or read capabilities · Functions in each M/E: Mix, Wipe, Key, Mix -Key, Wipe -Key and
Mix- Wipe- Key ·The Key System on each M/E features Matte Key, Key Invert and a
three Input Key Selector that chooses between Self Key, External Key and Chroma Key Inputs · Four Output Buses plus Separate Preview and Program Switching Buses allow easy set up, Preview and "Take" or dissolve between M / El, M/E2, or the "B" Direct Bus ·Editor Interface Firmware ( 907-3)
The Model 903 Video Production Switcher is a fully computer controlled switcher. The microprocessor in the control panel makes it a "smart" terminal in relation to the microprocessor in the electronics.
A unique combination of Program and Preview Phantom Bus Switching allows for cuts or mixes from one M/E to the other. A blanking processor with Fade-to- Black is also standard.
The pattern generator has 14 standard wipe patterns. Variable softness or border width of the wipe edges is adjustable on each M/E with edge control while border color is also variable with the colorizer
control. Unique effects can be generated with the sine wave modulator. Modulation can be used on both M/E1 or M/E2 and varied with the frequency and gain controls. Both M/E's have electronic spot lite and M/E1 offers preset wipes which can be positioned for dramatic
special effects. M/E1 can also be re-entered into M/E2, enabling mix or wipe behind keys colorized mattes wiping over chroma keys and many other advanced production features. An optional PROM allows External RS232 connection of an editor or computer.
903-S 903-E
Video Production Switcher with LED Buttons $ 9,900.00
Video Production Switcher
with Illuminated Pushbuttons
11,900.00
903 OPTIONS:
617
Downstream Key Edger
with Color and 4Input Selector
625
RGB Chroma Keyer
625-4 RGB Chroma Keyer with 4Inputs
1233 Encoded Chroma Keyer
1233-4 Encoded Chroma Keyer
9026 Transition Control
908-4 Audio Follow Video
908-4S Stereo Audio Follow Video
Additional Manual
Spare Parts Kit
Additional Cable
1,750.00 1,010.00 1,680.00 2,240.00 2,635.00 2,700.00
3,500.00 5,100.00
95.00 650.00 5.00/ft.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 75
en& 111E05TM MS
"Creativity You Can Depend On"
2101 NE 31st Ave. P.O. Box 1495 Gainesville, FL 32602 (904) 373-6783 ( 800) 874-7590 TVVX 810-825-2307
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHER
MODEL 904 VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHER
Standard Features · 10 inputs including Blackburst/Colorizer ·6 busses ·2 independent Mix/Effects units · Program/Preset mixer · DSK with key edging and 4 input selector ·Master fade to black · Pulse processor · Full camera tally system ·Microprocessor controlled ·Single 25' cable to remote control panel ·Technical manual ·Two year warranty ·Editor Interface firmware ( 907-4)
Each mix/effects system includes the following standard features: · Mix, wipe, key, mix key and wipe key modes · 16 pattern generator with 3 rotary patterns and star · Pattern normal/reverse ·Variable soft or border and hard pattern transitions · Pattern positioner · Pattern preset with separate size and aspect controls · Pattern modulation with frequency and amplitude controls · Pattern spotlite · Self, chroma key and external key inputs · Matte key · Key invert
The 904 provides aversatile switching package for complicated studio production, remotes and post production.
Computer editing.. digital effects...automation...new technologies placing new demands on production switchers.
The 904 incorporates microprocessor control, effectively interfacing the 904 with the future. Serial editor interface, event storage and total switcher automation are field installable plug-in options.
The 904 mix/effects systems are unequaled in capabilities and ease of operation. The last technical advances have been incorporated into the new pattern generators, providing crisp hard wipes and variable soft or bordered wipe transitions. Included in the 16 patterns are a star and 3rotary wipes. Pattern preset allows control of both the preset limit and pattern aspect ratio and can be used to either mix or wipe to a preset pattern or masked key.
90410S 904 10E
904 20E
Video Production Switcher with LED buttons Video Production Switcher with Illuminated
Pushbuttons
Video Production Switcher with Illuminated Pushbuttons and 20 Inputs
S15,900.00 18,500.00 24,500.00
625 625-4 1233 1233-4 9026 908-4 908-4S
904 OPTIONS:
RGB Chroma Keyer
1 010.00
RGB Chroma Keyer with 4Input Selector
1 680.00
Encoded Chroma Keyer
2 240.00
Encoded Chroma Keyer with 4Input Selector . . . . 2,635.00
Transition Control
2 700.00
Audio Follow Video
3 500.00
Stereo Audio Follow Video
5 100.00
Additional Manual
95.00
Spare Parts Kit
650.00
Additional Cable
5 00/ft.
VP-76
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ditffl 1DEO SYSTEMS
"Creativity You Can Depend On"
101 NE 31st Ave. ).0. Box 1495 3ainesville, FL 32602 904) 373-6783 ( 800) 874-7590
rvvx 810-825-2307
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
900 SERIES SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL 901
MODEL 903
MODEL 904
INPUTS: Video Input Level 1yp-p composite Pulse · 4 yp- p ± 6 dB Subcorrier 2y p- p +6dB Impedence Video - 75 S2 terminated Pulse - looping Key - 75 S-2terminated
INPUTS: Video Input Level 1yp-p composite Pulse 4 yp-p ±6 dB Subcarrier .2 yp-p ± 6dB Impedence - Video - 75 SI ter minated Pulse - looping Key - 75 S-2 terminated
INPUTS:
Video Input Level: 1y p-p composite Rilse .4vp-p + 6 dB
Subcarrier 2vp-p .± 6 dB
s2 Impedence - Video - 75 -
ter minated Pulse - looping
Key - 75 S-2terminated
OUTPUTS: Return Loss: > 36 dB @ 5 mHz Types . 2 Program
2 Black burst 1Preview Level 1y p- p nominal
OUTPUTS: Return Loss > 36 dB 5 mHz Types 2 Program 2 Preview 1Black burst 1M/E1 A.1 M/E1 B. 1M/E2 A Level 1 yp-p composite
OUTPUTS: DC on PGM ± 50 My Return Loss > 36 dB @ 5mHz Types 2 Program 2 Preview 1Black burst Level 1vp-p composite
MIX/EFFECTS CHARACTERISTICS: Block Balance Stability 50 my Switching Transients -< 5 IRE Mix Tracking .± 2%
Key Response Linear
MIX/EFFECTS CHARACTERISTICS: Black Balance Stability ± 50 my Switching Transients -< 5IRE Mix Tracking ± 1% Key Response -Linear
MIX/EFFECTS CHARACTERISTICS: Black Balance Stability + 50 my Switching Transients < 5 IRE Mix Tracking :t1% Key Response Linear
OVERALL SYSTEMS:
Differential Gain < 15% Differential Phase < 15° K Factor ( 2T Pulse) . 1% Freq Response ( ref 1mHz )
to 6mHz 2dB Chroma/Luminance . < 10 ns Crosstalk . < - 50 dB Path Delay Accuracy 1° Signal/Noise Ratio >60 dB Tilt ( Line or Field) < 1%
OVERALL SYSTEMS:
Differential Gain < 2% Differential Phase < 2° K Factor ( 2T Pulse) 1%
Freq Response ( ref 1mHz) to 6 mHz + 25 dB
Crosstalk'< 53 dB @ 3.58 mHz (4.43 PAL)
Path Delay Accuracy 15° Signal/Noise Ratio 60 dB
below 1yp- p Tilt Line or Field: < 1%
OVERALL SYSTEMS:
Differential Gain: < 2% Differential Phase:< 2° KFactor ( 2T Pulse): 1%
Freq Response ( ref 1mHz) to 6 mHz + 25 dB
Chroma/Luminance: < 10 ns Crosstalk: < - 53 dB @ 3.58 mHz
(4.43 PAL) Path Delay Accuracy: 1.5° Signal/Noise Ratio 60 dB
below 1V p-p Tilt ( Line or Field): < 1%
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
vp-n
\IDEO SYSTI "Creativity You Can Depend On"
2101 NE 31st Ave. P.O. Box 1495 Gainesville, FL 32602 (904) 373-6783 ( 800) 874-7590 TVVX 810-825-2307
og,K *seen
PRODUCTION SWITCHER ACCESSORIES
MODEL 640
MODEL 640 DOWNSTREAM KEY EDGER
FEATURES ·Built-in colorizer ·Outline, drop- shadow, border and normal
keys ( external cut with video fill) ·4input selector ·Remote control ·3-1/2" self contained unit
MODELS 666, 666-C, 666-4C DOWNSTREAM KEY EDGER
FEATURES ·Outline shadow, border key ·Remote contro,
Legend: SC -Self- Contained: #-- Frame Slots
MODEL 2031 MATRIX WIPE GENERATOR
FEATURES ·Digitally derived patterns ·Switchable 32 x32 or 64 x64 matrix ·Variable speed auto or manual transition
MODELS 660, 660-4 RGB CHROMA KEYER
FEATURES ·Saturation selective ·Soft keying
·Sixteen ( 16) basic patterns plus pattern multiplier with 90° rotate
·Uses external key input on any switcher ·Remote control ·Self-contained rack electronics include
power supply in 3-1/2" unit
·Full remote control ·Full 360° hue selection ·660 uses one ( 1) module space in 5010
rack frame; 660-4 uses four ( 4) module spaces in 5010 rack frame
NOTE: Certain options require the use of a Model 5010 rack frame and 5050 power supply. tTehrimsinfarlapmreocweilslsiancgceoqmumiopdmaetnet up to seven ( 7) modules of options or audio/video
MODEL DESCRIPTION DOWNSTREAM KEY EDGERS:
FRAME SLOTS PRICE
640
Downstream Key Edger with normal key mode; 4Input
Selector and Color
666
DoBwonrsdterream Key Edger with Outline, Shadow and
666-C
Downstream Key and Border
Edger
with
Color;
Outline
Shadow
666-4C
Downstream Key Edger with Outline Shadow and Border
Color;
4 Input
Select;
660 660-4 1240 1240-4
CHROMA KEYERS: RGB Chroma Keyer RGB Chroma Keyer with 4Input Selector Encoded Chroma Keyer Encodea Chroma Keyer w ith 4 Input Selector
SPECIAL FUNCTION OPTIONS:
5010
Rack Frame
5050
Power Supply
22900236415
Blanking Processor with Fade-To-Black Matrix Wipe Generator Digital Pointer Generator
SC 2 3 4 4 1 2 1
SSCC SC
$2650.00
1680.00
2275.00
2465.00
1010.00 1680.00 2470.00 2750.00
200.00 200.00 1370.00 2550.00 1250.00
MODELS 1240, 1240-4 ENCODED CHROMA KEYER
FEATURES ·Wide range of encoded video sources ·Minimum chroma crawl ·Uses one ( 1) module space in 5010 rack
frame ( two (2) with input selector)
MODEL 924 BLANKING PROCESSOR
FEATURES ·Self-contained unit w/fade to black ·Inserts new blanking intervals into
program output
MODEL 2065 POINTER GENERATOR
FEATURES · Digitally synthesized · Eight ( 8) direction arrow · Uses one ( 1) module space in 5010 rack
frame
JP- 78
Prices and Specifications Subiwrt tr,
&NI) %. IDFO SiSTI NIS
'Creativity You Can Depend On"
?101 NE 31st Ave. 3.0. Box 1495 3ainesville, FL 32602 904) 373-6783 ( 800) 874-7590 RNX 810-825-.2307
PRODUCTION SWITCHER ACCESSORIES
VIODEL 9026 AUTOTRANSITION/ EVENT STORAGE UNIT =eatures Autotransitions on M/E's Mix, FTB and DSK e General Purpose Interface ( GPI) e 99 Event Storage/Recall ,Chaining of Events for Longer Sequences e Editor Interface Built-in RS-232 or RS-422 e Stores En -ire Switcher Set-up e Operated with 903 or 904 Switchers
The 9026 offers both autotransitions for the 903 or 904 Production Switchers and Event Storage and Recall of 99 different panel " snap- shots". The autotransitions may be triggered through the GPI with either a momentary closure or TTL active low to ground. Multiple events may be sequenced to perform complex series of events. A Serial Editor interface allows either RS- 232 or RS-422 editor control in concurrent operation.
Model 9026
$ 2700.00
MID ea 111111 MIMI MI OM
am am 1111 111111 all MI
MODEL 908-4
VIODEL 908 AUDIO FOLLOW VIDEO :eatures ·10 Audio Follow Inputs 5Audio Breakaway Inputs
Auto or Manual Control e Follows M/E1, M/E2, or Mixer e VU Mete' for Program Out Level Adjust for Program Out ,Linear Fader for Manual Control e Stereo Version Available
M. , M. Of
1MM
.11410re + 0111
The Audio Follow Video package gives you the ability to mix audio sources concurrent with Fader movement on either the 904 or 903 Production Switchers. In addition to audio follow the 908 has 5separate audio inputs for break-
away. Stereo operation is also available.
Model 908-4 Model 908-4S Stereo Version
$ 3500.00 5100.00
11.1····inea
in -en
SPECIAL EFFECTS GENERATOR KM-2000U
JVC
FEATURES
Eight Inputs (VBS), Three Buses · Two Fader Levers · Non-Synchronous Input · Built- In RGB Chroma Keyer
· 13 Wipe Patterns with Soft Edge · Built- In Color Background Generator · Adjustable Background Color · Color Downstream Keyer · B/W Superimpose Circuit . External Key Input . Built- In S.S.G. with Genlock
· Intercom and Tally Circuits Provided . Auto Fade-to- Black . Auto Take
· ; tit t tij / I k 11
't Il
fl'fjJ
rnn
it /On
KM- 2000U
The NC KM-2000U Color Special Effects Generator is designed to meet the needs of users of professional and industrial video systems. Its popularity, and wide acceptance in both broadcast and non-broadcast environments is testimonial to its excellent design and performance.
Two-Piece Design. The KM-2000U actually consists of two components: a control unit and an electronics unit. The control unit is compact ( only 35/8"deep and 6rack units high) and is connected to the main electronics unit by two ribbon cables. The electronic unit houses the primary electronics and all connections to peripheral equipment. The 16' ribbon cables provide a good deal of flexibility for placement of the components in a system.
Eight Inputs. There are eight synchronous video inputs, each with loop-thru BNC connectors. In addition, a nonsynchronous input is provided, which can be routed to the program line via a pushbutton on the control panel.
Downstream Keyer. The KM-2000LYs downstream keyer ( DSK) has a built-in color background generator (adjustable). The polarity of this circuit can be switched so that a reversal of the key effect may be obtained. The circuit also allows the user to manually fade the effect in and out -- independently of the fader controls.
RGB Chroma Keyer. Utilizing the RGB signals obtained from most 3-tube cameras, this feature allows the user to selectively replace any color in the picture with a signal from another camera. For example, a person standing in front of a blue background can be made to look as though he was standing in another location, with the KM-2000U replacing the blue color with another scene The chroma keyer can also be switched to become an external keyer, allowing additional key effects.
Three Busses, Dual Faders, The KM200OU's three bus system allows an effect to be created and previewed before actually putting it " on-line". The effect can then be inserted into the program output with a dissolve, using the second faaer. The 13 built-in wipe patterns, together with joystick positioning and soft edge control provide most popular effects. This system can even be used to create "spotlight" and other effects, not possible with a single fader.
Other Features. An input is provided for a black 8( white graphics camera, allowing the signal to be independently faded in and out of the program material. An audio modulation input allows an audio source to be used to create some really unusual effects.
Suggested List Price
$4860.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Video Inputs: X8, VBS, 1.0V p-p, 75 ohms or high ( BNC) Aux Input: Xl, VBS, 1.0V p- p, ( non- synchronous) 75 ohms or high ( BNC)
Chroma Key Inputs: RGB, va, 0. 7V p- p 75 ohms or high ( BNC)
External Key Input: X'. VBS or VB 1.0/0.7V p- p, 75 ohms or nigh ( BNC)
DSK Input: X^ , VBS 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms or high ( BNC) B/W Superimpose Input: IXi VBS 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms or high ( BNC)
IlEXT. Wipe MOD Input: OdBm mini-jack ( plug provided) Program Output: X3, VES 25 ohms ( BNC)
Preview Output: VES 75 ohms ( BNC)
Frequency Response: 60Hz to 5MHz ±0.2dB
DG/DP: Less than 1.5%, 1.5' at 10 to 90% APL Crosstalk: More than 50dB at 358MHz
S/N: More than 55dB ( p-p/rms)
Sync Output: HD, VD, sync, black burst X2
Power Consumption: AC 110V 60Hz 50W
Tally: 5V DC or dry contact
Dimensions & Weight: Electronics Unit: 175(H) x482(W) x250(D) mm Standard EIA rack size (4unit size) Weight: 10 5kg
Control Units: 265(H) x482(W) x90(D) mm Standard EIA rack s.ze ( 6unit size) Weight: 5.0kg
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Uommunications Divisior, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Part, NJ 07407 VP- 80
201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825
JVC
FEATURES
· RGB Chroma-Keyer · low-Cost, Economical · 8-Color Generation · 6Wipe Patterns · Smoother Fades and Dissolves
SPECIAL EFFECTS GENERATOR KM- 1200U
ex.."... ...a {0. 4.14
tliffiliretert.
-I- I- I- Iassats
'1 0 El o 00 II irn
·«.
1·... ·
-I- I- I- I- U I-
KM- 1200U
KM- 1200U SPECIAL EFFECTS GENERATOR
The KM- 1200U is designed for mounting in a standard EIA rack and has 4video inputs, a chroma key input, a background color generator and a DSK input. It incorporates an SSG and genlock operation is possible using composite video or blackburst signals. With its Autotake switch, the signal selected to be previewed can be supplied to the program line with a single operation. Both AC and DC power supplies can be used so that use on locations is possible.
RGB Chroma Keyer/External Keyer. By the use of 3discrete signals the RGB Chroma Keyer allows for an extremely sharp key. These individual signals allow the decoder circuit to more easily distinguish subtle color differences, thus producing a more accurate and clean key.
An external keyer is also supplied for Black and White key sources, usually a CCTV type camera. This mode is selected by a back panel control, which switches between Background Color and external key. The external key circuit can also be used with a color character generator. The character generator supplies a B/W signal to cut the key hole and a color video signal to 1of the 4 video inputs, which is in sync with the key hole.
the flow of the video signal path. The D.S.K. circuit has the capability of colorizing itself. This internal generator has the ability to make the following 8 colors: Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow and White.
Sync Generator and Gen- Lock. The sync generator in the KM- 1200U is multifaceted because of its many modes and outputs. It is capable of generating RS- 170 sync or Gen- Lock to any source, including a VCR.
The KM- 1200U also supplies the following signals: Two Black Burst outputs. Composite Sync; Horizontal Sync; Vertical Sync; Blanking ( Switchable as third Black Burst output).
Auto Take. The purpose of Auto-Take is to allow for preselection and confirmation of cuts, before they go to air.
Background Generator and External Input. The Background and External position is input 5on the KM- 1200U. These two sources are selectable from a back panel switch.
When in the Background position the following 8colors are available: Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow and White.
D.S.K. -- Down-Stream Keyer. The D.S.K.
circuit is identical to the External Key circuit except for its electronic position in
Suggested List Price
TBA
SPECIFICATIONS ( Preliminary)
Video Inputs: x4, VBS, 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms or High ( BNC)
Chroma Key Inputs ( EXT. KEY): RGB, VB, 0.7V p- p, 75 ohms or High
DSK Input: x1, VBS or BB, 1.0/0.45V p- p, 75 ohms or High
Program Output: x2, VBS, 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms ( BNC)
Preview Output: x1, VBS, 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms ( BNC)
DSK Preview Output: xl VBS, 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms ( BNC)
Sync Genlock Output: HD, VD, SYNC, x1 each, "Blackburst x3 (" VD/BB-3 selectable)
Sync System: (1) Internal mode (2) External mode: Genlock by VBS or BB
Subcarrier Phase: Adjustable from 0" to 360' in steps of 0 / 1201240°, continuously variable between steps
Horizontal Phase: ·0.1 ,us ( with reference to the input sync signal)
Chroma Keying ( EXT.): Blue only
Wipe Patterns: x6
Tally Outputs: x5, 5V ( 10 mA) DC ( 6- pin terminal)
Background Colors: x8, black/blue/red/magenta/green/ cyan/yellow/white ( 1color selectable)
Power Supply: AC 110/220/240V or DC 12V
Power Consumption: AC 15W, DC 12VA
Dimensions: 482(W) x176(H) x90mm(D) (19" x7" x
Weight: Approx. 6kg ( 13.2 lbs.)
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VP-81
KNOX
8547 Grovemont Circle Gaithersburg, MD 20877
vim() PRODUCTS ( 301) 840-5805
"
K128B Character Generator
General Description: Keyboard entry device for purpose of generating high resolution white alphanumerics in video form. Unit self-contained requiring only AC power and sync pulse train. Allows entry of informa-
tion at any location on page. Audio I/0s included. Character Specifications: Display format: 128 characters -- 26 upper case, 26 lower case, 10 numerals, 26 typewriter symbols, 10 math symbols, 8Greek letters, 11 foreign language letters, 9special symbols, 1flash, 1space.
Character resolution: 768 elements ( 32 horizontal x 24 vertical); Nominal character height: 32 scan lines, large, 16 scan lines, small;
Page format: 24 cnaracters/line; 8lines/page; 4pages of memory; 3 pos. title window, double size. Input full interlace composite videosync per EIA RS170, RS330, EIAJ or similar standards. $3825.00 OPTIONS: ( To STD K128B)
RC128 3- Speed roll/crawl, three speeds $875.00
PP128 Independent Edit Channel
$ 1115.00
AC128 Line- By- Line Auto Center
$ 650.00
MF246 Multi-font very high resolution character set
$ 1415.00
IF008 Adds 4pages for total of 8
$ 545.00
IP016 Adds 12 pages for total of 16
$ 1425.00
KAM128 Automated control for KD128
$ 1030.00
SYSTEMS K128B/MOD8 K128B, RC128, AC128, PP128, IP008
$ 6160.00
K128B/MOD16 K128B, RC128, AC128, IP016, PP128, with MF246.
$8355.00
KSD128 K128B, RC128, AC128, PP128, KD128, MF246 $ 12,365.00
KSD246 K128B, RC128, AC128, PP128, MF246, KD128, KAM128,
Color Box
$ 15,830.00
KD -128 Expansion Memory Unit
Fast random access page storage on flexible magnetic Floppy disk-
ettes. Expands the K128 memory capacity to 400 pages, external. Roll
or crawl continuously from page to page. Or, with the inclusion of the
KAM128 automated control option, PROGRAM the 400 pages to do any combination of Rolls/Crawls, full page displays, loop pages,
pause the program, do character animation. A remote control unit is
included with each system.
$ 5715.00
K50 Titling Unit
General Description: Keyboard entry device for purpose of generating white alphanumerics information in video form. Unit self-contained requiring only AC power and sync pulse train. Used as avideo source or downstream keyer-inserter. Allows entry of information at any location or page. Independent program/preview channels. 4full pages of memory. Character Specifications: Display format: 64 characters --
26 upper case, 10 numerals, 27 typewriter symbols, 1space. Character resolution: 7x9dot matrix. Nominal character height 36 scan lines. Page format: 16 characters/line; 8 lines/page. Input: Full interlace composite video- sync per EIA RS170, RS330, EIAJ, or similar standards.
SERIES K50/K60 TITLERS
K50 Character Generator with 4pages of memory, independent edit
channel, flash. 16 characters by 8lines per page
$ 1295.00
KS50 All features in K50 plus crystal controlled internal sync $ 1550.00
KX50 All features in KS50 plus title window, crawl, and automatically
timed page sequencer
$ 1775.00
Upgrade Kit to convert K50 or K60 to KX50 or KX60
$710.00
K60 Character Generator with all K50 features but increases line length
to 32 characters and number of lines to 16
$ 1525.00
KS60 All features in K60 plus crystal controlled internal sync $ 1700.00
KX60 All features in KS60 plus title window, crawl and automatically
timed pages sequencer
$2085.00
Colorizer adds genlocking color foreground/background generator to
KS50, KX50, KS60 or KX60
$350.00
Upgrade from K50 or K60 to KS50 or KS60 $255.00
K128B
VIDEO PRODUCTS
Math, Greek and Foreign Language Symbols Included
41, *.
88 III 1'1 TT13111
K50/60
K700 Video Corrector
The Model K700 Video Corrector is a unique proc amp, chroma
corrector, noise reducer and image enhancer in a 1% inch high rackmount unit. The unit is designed to provide the user with
correction of both luminescence and chroma without the use of
expensive waveform monitors or oscilloscopes. Up to 6dB of noise reduction and continuously variable image enhancement are also front
panel controlled. The automatic wide- window genlock proc amp
provides completely regenerated sync, burst and blanking on the output signal. The Knox Video Corrector can be used to correct most
errors that are commonly thought to require more expensive time base
correctors. The unit has an automatic signal bypass in the event of a
power failure. Comb filter decoding is used to maintain accurate
frequency response.
$2495.00
The Color Box
THE COLOR BOX
The Knox Color Box generates color backgrounds, color characters
and full surround edging for the K50, K60, K128B or any other character generator. It features built-in sync for stand-alone
applications and a video mixer for use in studio or production environments.
APPLICATIONS:
The Color Box is compatible with Knox Character Generators and key cameras. Two video outputs are provided on the Color Box. The builtin color sync generator may be used in stand-alone installations. Or a variety of external inputs may be used, including normal system video from a production switcher, color bars, time- base corrector, color black, or camera feed. The Color Box is ideal for use between video tape recorders. The stability of the inserted color characters will reflect the quality of the signal. Superior performance can be obtained from %" U-Matic equipment and 1 /2 "VHS units. As in all tape to tape applications, the use of aTBC is desirable but not required if the recording and equipment are of good quality. $ 1950.00
VP-82
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
KNOX
VIDEO PRODUCTS
8547 Grovemont Circle Gaithersburg, MD 20877
(301) 840-5805
CHARACTER GENERATOR
K100 CHROMAFONT The K100 Chromafont -- full color character generation. The titler of choice when the budget is limited, the Knox Chromafont represents atotally new approach to character generator design. Advanced, high speed pipeline architecture puts sophisticated display capability in your hands at minimal expense.
Compact and versatile, the K100 is equally at home in the EJ van or in the studio. Its superior display adds elegance to routine titling such as schedule changes or weather alerts. The K100 also offers the small studio or production house a true alternative to costly and inconvenient outside titling services.
Chromafont Option B
·Full range color control ( 512 color palette) of background
and character, organized as 16 selectable combinations.
Color palette includes transparency
·Italics: two forward and two backward slants
·Variable line height
·Pinstriping. Selectable line thickness, spacing and color
control. Can be inside character as well as over back-
ground
·Multi- speed forward and reverse roll and crawl
·Flexible, non-volatile 8000- character memory. Can be
organized as:
-up to 256 lines
-up to 64 pages
·Portable, detachable keyboard
·NTSC and PAL- B compatibility
·Character- by- character color control
·Individual character background color control
·Character- by- character underlining and pinstriping
·Four Fonts: two upper and lower case, two upper case
only, all in two sizes ( eight 32- character font blocks)
· Horizontally and vertically adjustable shadow edging
· Fade Control: allows fade to and from black, dissolves
from color to color
·Second 512 color palette for fade/cut/dissolve effects
·Serial interface for computer control or extra keyboards
·Superscript and subscript
$3890.00
Chromafont Option C ( Under Development) (This option features all of the capabilities of Option B, plus):
·Sixteen 32- character font blocks
·Completely interactive computer interface: allows for the design and loading of custom fonts, creation of logos and
symbols
·Real time clock
·Programmable, automated sequences
TBA
UM MU_
LATE BREAKING NEWS!
LM?iklTiMEit1i8taR fflrerna¡ tienMtiEgiWS .1
p
L_
Rega LHJ r
tca, E). e3 ex le r^i 9 IN to. El r-,cr I·et r9 "be
Screen Display Composed on aChromafont Option B, Including One Extra Font
\`````N```````.\`' %\
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-83
ill
LAIRD TELEMEDIA
2424 S. 2570 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-5900
INC.®
..N..%N·.···`·````.-`,
CHARACTER GENERATOR
Model 3300 Time/Date & Fixed Message Generator
The Model 3300 Time/Date and Fixed Message Generator is aself contained, microprocessor controlled character generator designed to key highly legible alphanumeric characters into an external video source. The display consists of twelve text rows of thirty one characters per row. The characters may be displayed in either black or white with the opposite luminance value of horizontal edging. The front consists of 64 upper case and punctuation characters.
All messages and display modes are controlled by means of a10 key numeric keypad on the front panel of the chassis. Messages are simply called up by entering the appropriate page number into the 10 key pad. Display control and time set modes are obtained by selecting amenu and entering the appropriate mode. The menu display may be set to avisible or invisible mode. This ensures downstream compatibility. The time is referenced to the incoming power and may be strapped for 50 or 60 Hz. Consult the factory if an external 50/60 Hz frequency standard or "time hold" is required.
The Model 3300 is supplied from the factory with the following standard messages: 24 HOUR TIME AND DATE WITH TENTHS OF SECONDS " PLEASE STAND BY AUDIO DIFFICULTIES" 12 HOUR TIME AND DATE WITH TENTHS OF SECONDS " NETWORK DIFFICULTIES" 12 HOUR TIME AND DATE WITH SECONDS " PLEASE STAND BY" "PLEASE STAND BY VIDEO DIFFICULTIES"
Optional messages may be installed by the factory.
Several other options are available for the Model 3300. Some of the options require custom factory software. Please consult the factory for pricing and availability.
3300 Time/Date and Fixed Message Generator
S1575.00
Custom Message (Text format and message position for each page must be supplied by the customer -- consult factory for details).
First Text Row $ 50.00 Each Additional Row 1.00
Model 3302 Character Generator
The Model 3302 Character Generator is designed to be used in conjunction with a " user's" external computer. All display control and text entry is accomplished using asingle RS- 232-C serial I/O port with USASCII codes. This ensures compatibility with most of the computers in the world. All text and controls must be received via the RS- 232-C serial I/O port as the Model 3302 does not have akeyboard for text entry. The Model 3302 may be used in any system that requires alphanumeric characters to be keyed into avideo source. The character display consists of 12 text rows of 31 characters per row. The characters are formed using a 16 by 32 dot matrix to ensure avery high degree of legibility. All characters have horizontal edging to enhance readability at varying video luminance levels. Additionally, characters may be displayed in either black or white (with an opposite luminance value of edging). The character font consists of 64 ASCII characters -- upper case and punctuation.
The Model 3302 contains asingle page buffer memory which is used to store incoming text while an old message is being displayed. This makes possible a " hard cut" from one page to the next.
3302 Character Generator -- General purpose designed for use with an external " user's" computer. RS- 232-C interface. ( Note. This
Character Generator does not have akeyboard)
$1575.00
VP-84
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ill
LAIRD TELEMEDIA
2424 S. 2570 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-5900
INC.
CHARACTER GENERATOR
3600A CHASSIS
3610A KEYBOARD
Model 3600A Television Character Generator
Versatility, expandability and economy were of pi line consideration in the design of the Model 3600A Television Character Generator A plug-in module approach permits field upgrades and additions to the basic 3600A system. The basic 3600A system includes 16 pages of resident text memory in a10 row by 25 characters per row format Page memory can be added in 16 page increments up to a total of 64 pages. Black or white, upper and lower case characters, can be keyed into the program video source under control of a program character on off switch at the keyboard. A separate cursor output is included for editing text Character edging modes include full edge, drop shadow, outline and drop shadow outline. Both the character stroke width and the edging stroke width are adjustable. Underline. overline. boxed characters and flash are provided on aword- by- word basis Dynamic display modes include roll, crawl, and page pop. In addition, aunique Format Window Position feature allows the mixture of page information with other pages and or data sources on the same display
Character Generators
3600A Character Generator-- 10 lines of 25 characters with one preview and one program output. 9x14 font with large and small characters, 1000
character memory with 16 pages of roll, crawl, and pop-up Internal External video selector switch, horizontal edging and auto
centering all are provided as standard features. Must be driven by composite
video. Requires 3610A or 3615A Keyboard
$2995.00
3610A Keyboard for 3600A Character Generator with character on off.
black white, large small, and fast roll slow switch. and 16- key control
Includes 15' of interconnect cable
$575.00
3615A Keyboard Memory for 3600A Character Generator with character
on off, black white, large small, and fast roll slow roll switch, and 22- key control. Provides unlimited data storage on built in heavy duty industrial
audio cassette unit. Includes 15' of interconnect cable
$1,295.00
3600A Options
3620A Additional color output channel for 3600A Provides one additional
video input output channel programmed from the first program channel
Requires a3634B memory board
$495.00
3622A Dual floppy disk memory Provides copying capability of memory up to 2000 pages May access file for random page and operate in page or file mode Contains separate keyboard control ( Formerly 3618A)
$2,595.00
3630A Fixed Titlo Provides 25 Character title line. (Total of 16 fixed title
lines can be used per generator. Indicate line location and characters when
ordering.).
$50.00
3632A RS 232 Interface to acomputer. Includes external switch to utilize
3610A or 3615A keyboard or computer. ( Consult factory for control codes) $300.00
36348 Solid State Memory -- PC Board for 1000 characters of roll crawl 10 LN, 2 LN pop-up (Total of 4 memories can be used per generator)
$995.00
3639 Cassette Kit
$25.00
3640A Temperature Sensor -- includes PC Board interface electronics.
sensor and 100 ft of interconnect cable Provides fixed title and temperature
dsplay ·
$455.00
3641A Time Generator -- provides fixed title and time display' $295.00
3642A Date Generator ( Requires 3641A) display'
provides fixed title and date $350.00
3643A Up Down Counter -- provides fixed title and up down counting
trine clock display ·
$460.00
3644A BCD input for 3600A Consult factory for special engineering
requirements
$695.00
3650A Color background, NTSC color sync generator, including single pulse drive outputs and adjustable pulse delay for color phasing with
external video source Controlled format display of any combination of red, green, or blue background Provides H, V. SY, BL. BF. and SC ( Less genlock)
$1265.00
3652A Color background, pulse interface Provides interface with drive
pulse from external sync generator Controlled format display of any
combination of red, green, or blue backgrounds Requires SY, BL. BF and
SC
$977.00
'Only 2data- source options can he used per chassis
Service Manual
$ 38.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-85
Hi
LAIRD TELEMEDIA
2424 S. 2570 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-5900
INC.®
CHARACTER GENERATOR
The Friday Night Movie
The Next Earthstations
Chemistry Desert Clirnates
1500
MODEL 1500 CHARACTER GENERATOR
GENERAL DESCRIPTION:
The model 1500 is a high quality television broadcast character generator system with some graphics capability. It is capable of displaying multiple font styles and sizes in asingle message. Custom logos and symbols can be included in the font styles. Each character style and size is created from an entirely different high- resolution font file. None of the fonts is stretched, squashed, or otherwise distorted to achieve multiple effects, which assures consistent quality and legibility in each display.
There are 65,536 colors resident in the 1500. The colors are controlled on ascan- line basis for both characters and background. This provides the means to have multi- colored characters on a multi- colored background of different colors.
The 1500 is essentially a two channel system. One channel is the Preview/Status Channel and the other is the Program Channel. All message information is entered into the Preview/Status Channel and then transferred to the Program Channel. Such a system allows for editing while on- air.
The 3-1/2" dual disk drive system and the logic system are both in one chassis. The single chassis unit can be used as rack mount or an attractive desk- top unit. As a rack mount system, the single chassis conserves rack space.
The keyboard is a low- profile, 72- key configuration. Many of the functions can be initiated by asingle keystroke from the keyboard.
SYSTEM FEATURES: Resident Memory ·Internal text memory and font memory are size interactive ·Variable page length
Fonts ·35 ns resolution · Multiple resident font capability ·96 characters per font ·Multifont library ( 70 fonts included) ·Proportional spacing ·Character cell adjustment · 12-56 scan- line character sizes
Display Editor ·Instant italics ( forward or backward with choice of multiple angles) ·Auto centering ( line and page) · Underline · Insert and delete character · Insert and delete row
·Seven edge modes: no edge, outline, full border, and 4quadrants of drop shadow
·8edge intensity levels
Color ·65,536 colors resident · RGB encoder required for color
Dual 3-1/2" Disk Memory ·Loadable operating system software ·System initialization user defined by auto- sequence ·Page, font, and auto- sequence loadable from disk
VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS
Outputs
RGB:
0.7V peak- to- peak, non- composite video
PGM Out:
1V peak- to- peak, composite video
PRV Out:
1V peak-to- peak, composite video
Key:
1V peak- to- peak, composite monochrome video
Inputs PGM In:
Encoded In:
1V peak-to- peak nominal, composite video, positive interlace, EIA; monochrome or color
1V peak- to- peak nominal, composite video, EIA; monochrome or color
Dimensions Size 1500 Logic Unit:
1500 Keyboard:
H 7"
1-1/2"
W 15-5/8"
17-3/4"
D 17"
7-3/4"
Model 1500 Character Generator
$6995.00
VP- 86
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
111
TELEMEDIA
2 L42A4 2R57ODW
Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-5900
INC.
A
012"
EGHIJ
FGHIJK
6,89
CHARACTER GENERATOR
ABCDEFGH1JKLM abcdefghljklmnop
0123456789
XXXe6X%
MODEL 7200 COMMUNICATOR SYSTEM FEATURES
Fonts ·35 nsec horizontal resolution · 128 characters per font · 4resident fonts · Multi font library · Proportional spacing · Inter- character spacing adjustment · Inter- row spacing adjustment · Custom logo capability · Character by character font selection
Display Editor ·Instant italics ( 12° slope) · Auto centering row and page · Row shift left and right · Row shift up and down · Character by character underline · Character by character flash ( Variable duty cycle flash rate) · Insert and delete character · Insert and delete row
R- G- B Output ·32,768 possible colors · 32 resident background colors · 32 resident character colors · Colors may be named individually · Character by character color selection · Full borderline edging · Outline edging · Drop shadow edging
Auto Sequence · Real time machine control · Up to 20 frame per second animation ·Adjustable run rate and time delays · Editor allows command insertion and deletion
Dynamic Messages · Rol' in 10 Speeds-- up or down · Roll to stop, pause, or speed change · Roll to variable position split · Roll through variable size and position window · Crawl in 10 speeds- left or right · Variable crawl position · Resident titles - - Random or sequential call-up · Variable size and position titles
Resident Memory · 12C rows of resident text memory ( Allows disk drives to be turned off during use.) · Utility programs such as font developer may be plêced in resident memory · Four base pages may be expanded as required for message length · Fast call-up from base page to base page
Status Channel · Machine control status · Creates user friendly environment · Menu operation · Doubles as tow resolution, monochrome, text preview output · Allows system diagnosis Dual 8" Floppy Disk Drives ·Operating system softvvare loads from diskette · Diskette format and copy routines allow all diskettes to be copied · User defined system initialization from diskette
Keyboards ·Power on self- diagnosis · Single function control keys · Keys grouped by function for ease of operation · Up to four keyboards may be attached
Self- Diagnosis · Pcwer on self- diagnosis of all memory devices · Additional long-term memory testing and keyboard testing programs included
VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS
Outputs · R- G- B Program: . 7V peak- to- peak non composite video · R- G- B Cursor: Identical to program outpLts with cursor added. ( Cursor may be turned on/off from the keyboard.) · External Key: 1V peak- to- peak composite monochrome video. ( Adjustable delay 0-1.5 micro secs.) ·Status Channel: 1V peak- to- peak composite monochrome video
Inputs ·Sync: 4V peak- to- peak looping inputs · Blanking: 4V peak- to- peak
looping inputs
KEYBOARD SPECIFICATIONS ·Inputs: Four inputs are supplied. ( Input # 1 has control priority.) ·Cable length: 15 feet standarc · Signals: RS- 422 bi-direct .onal. May be used uni -directional. )
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
117 VAC 60 Hz 7200 Display Logic Unit 7210 Keyboard 7220 Dual Disk Drive 7234 Video Keyer
100W Max 10 W Max
330 W Max 10 W Max
Character Generator 7200 System Character Generator-Incrudes 7260 Display Logic Unit, 7210 Keyboard, 7220 Duai 8" Disk Memory, ( 4Each), 7240 RAM Font
Memory, 7230 RGB Color Generator, 21 Standard Fonts, and ah iother standard Features. ( Starter Prog-am also available at reduced price.)
OPTIONS $ 18,995.00
7204 Dual Channel Upgrade for 7200 System- Includes 7238 Interface, 7260 Display logic Unit, (4 Each), 7240 RAM Font Memories,
7230-RGB Color Generator and all other standard 7200 features. $11,950.00
7210 Keyboard, Full Editing- Includes 15' Interconnect Cable. Up to
four keyboards may be used per system.
$2,000.00
7212 Control Keyboard- Provides machine control capability, but no
text editing.
$500.00
7222 -XX Font Diskette ( 7fonts per diskette).
$210.00
7228-02 Font Development Kit- Includes software, manual and one
each Mylar Master Grid Sheet.
$495.00
7232 Interface RS- 232 to RS-422 Interface ( 3-1/2" x19" Rack Mount). $300.00
7234 Video Keyer-For Downstream Keying of 7200 Encoded Video
(1-3/4" x19" Rack Mount).
$495.00
7236 Y-Channel Encoder- Show full luminance from RGB signals,
status channel, or shows status over luminants. All controlJed by
external switch closure.
$845.00
PCE-462 Color Encoder -Lenco ( Rack Mount). CSL-710 Sync Generator -Lenco ( Rack Mount).
$2.950.00 $1,500.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 87
ill
LAIRD TELEMEDIA
2424 S. 2570 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-5900
INC.®
VIDEO POINTER
1060A Video Pointer Desk Top
The Laird Telemedia Model 1060 Video Pointer is aversatile, easy-touse production aid designed to enable studio personnel to add the professional touch to both live and video tape production.
Using aselected mode, ajoystick positioned arrow can be suited to the video background by athree- position switch. This is accomplished by an internal keying circuit to provide black or white image insert or, in the third position, an additive mix circuit, wherein the image is superimposed upon the video signal.
An 8- position rotary switch controls the orientation of the arrow in 45° incremental steps. Two sizes of arrows are by a " large- small" switch. As an enhancement feature, the arrow may be made to flash. A "Pointer On" Switch controls the presence or absence of the arrow image within the video presentation.
The 150 nanosecond dot- width can accommodate additional shapes including preselected logotypes of considerable sophistication. One of the operator controls allows switching between logos and other symbols and the pointer. The special shapes may be presented in the same manner as the arrow with the exception of rotation. The position of these shapes is controlled by the joystick so it may be positioned anywhere within the video presentation. Special logos or other shapes and symbols can be optionally ordered from the factory to be developed from a32- by-32 dot matrix.
Three housing configurations are available: adesk-top chassis with all controls on top, a rack mount chassis with all controls on the front face, or arack mount chassis with acable connected remote control unit.
Remote controls are offered in rack mount or small desk top chassis.
ELECTRICAL
·Power Requirements: 117 VAC + I-10% 60 Hz or 234 VAC + /- 10% 50 or 60Hz · Power Consumption: 70 MA at 117 VAC · Fuse: 3AG 1 / 2 Ampere · Video Input: 1 V P- P nominal, composite positive or random interlace, EIA Monochrome or color · Video Output: 1Volt P- P nominal when 75 ohm terminated, composite · Internal Power Supplies: + 5V DC filtered and regulated; + 12V DC filtered and regulated; - 12V DC filtered and regulated
MECHANICAL
· Model · Height
1060A 4.0"
·Width
12.0"
· Depth
9.5"
· Weight
5lbs.
·Shipping Weight 6lbs.
· Connectors
BNC
1060B 1.75"
19.00" 10.50"
4lbs. 5lbs.
Rack
Elec-
Remotes
tronics 1060C 10600
1.75"
1.75" 2.50"
19.00" 19.00" 6.50"
10.50"
3.00" 5.00"
4lbs. 1.5 lbs. 3.5 lbs.
5lbs. 2.5 lbs. 4.5 lbs.
· Environmental Operating Temperature
0-50°C at 95% Humidity
Video Pointer
Arrow may be oriented in eight positions and operated in the following modes: on/off, static/flash, large/small, arrow/symbol, keyed
white/black/or highlighted ( Additive Mix).
1060A Self contained desk top unit
$ 1045.00
1060B Self contained 134" rack mount
1045.00
1060C Remote Controlled Unit with rack mounted remote control
1100.00
1060D Remote Controlled Unit with desk top remote control 1148.00
Cable for remote control
47.00 + 2.10/ft.
1064 Custom logos-- customer specified by filling in squares of a32 x
32 grid
First Logo 52.00
Additional Logos up to 15 31.00
Model 1021 Electronic " Q" Board
The 1021 Q Board adds that professional touch to your video tape productions. By amethod similar to that involving a" clap" board used in movie making, important production information may be televised and recorded on the leader of any commercial or program tape. Also, both an aural and visual countdown, recorded just prior to program information, will allow accurate cueing in playback. Emission of a countdown beep tone from the built-in speaker serves to alert the studio crew and talent during taping sessions.
1021 Electronic " ICI" Board with built-in speaker may be remotely con-
trolled
$415.00
1040 Video " 0" Board. Visual and audio countdown with audio cue
tone. Composite sync and video compatible with local and remote
control. Standard 10 second cue with last 2seconds as " dead- time".
Adjustable character size.
$625.00
VP- 88
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LEITCH VIDEO OF AMERICA, INC.
825K Greenbrier Circle Chesapeake, VA 23320 (804) 424-7920 Telex II 710-882-4342
CLOCKS
UDC- 508/512 UNIVERSAL DIGITAL CLOCK The Universal Digital Clock represents a departure from conventional clock design by combining the advantages of analog and digital time displays. It operates with any of the three most commonly available drive signals and can therefore be easily integrated into new or existing systems. The clock accepts:
· 12VDC impulse drive · SMPTE serial time code · 115VAC, 50/60Hz
To accommodate various viewing distances, the UDC is available in two sizes. The UDC- 508 is an illuminated, wall mounting unit with an 8" diameter clock face, while the UDC- 512 has a 12" diameter clock face.
The analog/digital time displays together with the cool white, glare- free illumination of the clock face make the UDC suitable for use in darkened areas, such as TV control rooms. Its noiseless operation makes it ideal for noise sensitive locations, such as announce booths.
UDC- 508 UDC- 512
Universal Digital Clock, 8" wall mounting,
includes Instruction Manual $ 990.00
Universal Digital Clock, 12" wall
mounting, includes Instruction
Manual
1100.00
Extra Instruction Manual
for UDC- 508/512
40.00
CLK SERIES
CLK SERIES ANALOG IMPULSE CLOCKS The CLK Series Analog Impulse Clocks operate with 12VDC impulse drive or, optionally, with 115VAC, 60Hz. The clocks
are available in five different models. The CLK-1600 is awall mounting clock with an illuminated, 16" diameter clock face. It is generally used in studios, auditoriums etc.
The CLK-1200 and CLK-800 models have 12" and 8" diameter, illuminated clock faces respectively. They are also
wall mounting units, but can be adapted to rack mounting. These clocks are primarily used in " monitor walls" in studio and master control rooms. The cool white, glare- free illumination of these clocks has very low infrared emission and does not adve7sely affect the viewing conditions of color
picture monitors.
The model CLK-501 is a ron -illuminated, rack mounting clock which is generally used in confined areas, such as small mobile units etc. The model CLK-500 is a non- illuminated, sloping front desk lop unit. The virtually noiseless operation makes it suitable for use in announce booths.
IMPULSE CLOCKS
CLK-1600 Illuminated 16" Impulse Clock,
includes Instruction Manual
$730.00
CLK-1200 Illuminated 12" Impulse Clock,
includes Instruction Manual
625.00
CLK-800 Illuminated 8" Impulse Clock,
includes Instruction Manual
520.00
CLK-500 Non- illuminated 5" Desk- top Impulse
Clock, includes Instruction Manual
475.00
CLK-501 Non- illuminated 5" Panel- mount Impulse
Clock, includes Instruction Manual
370.00
CLK-503 Impulse clock ( oil-filled movement)
5" non- illuminated, desk top
695.00
Options CLK-002
RM-001
Internal Impulse Driver for CLK Series ClocKs
Rack Mount Kit for CLK 800 and CLK 1200
Exra lnstructior Manual for CLK Series Clocks
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$180.00
50.00
30.00
VP-89
LEITCH VIDEO OF AMERICA,
825K Greenbrier Circle Chesapeake, VA 23320 (804) 424-7920 Telex II 710-882-4342
INC.
CLOCK SYSTEMS
CAC- 511
CSD-510 MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM DRIVER
The CSD -510 Master Clock System Driver provides accurate and stable drive signals for:
· 100 impulse clocks ( 12 VDC) ·50/60Hz synchronous clocks
·Digital clocks compatible with SMPTE Time Code ( EIA/EBU)
The unit operates with its internal, temperature controlled master oscillator, or it can be referenced to an external Cesium or Rubidium
standard. With WWV/CHU reception, the CSD -510 provides automatic synchronization to Coordinated Universal Time. Special
features include an automatic 1hour advance/retard function and an internal stand-by battery with a 1/2 hour capacity for 100 impulse clocks. An external battery input is also provided.
CSD -510
Master Clock System Driver, includes Instruction
Manual Extra Instruction Manual
$4,325.00 40.00
CAC-511 CLOCK AUTOCHANGE
The CAC- 511 Clock Autochange is used with two CSD -510 Master Clock System Drivers to provide continuity of impulse drives, time code signals and 50/60Hz sine wave outputs when a malfunction of the assigned Master Driver occurs. The Autochange is activated upon the loss of one impulse or a6dB level reduction of the time code signal. The unit's front panel provides assignment and failure LED indicators, an aural failure alarm and manual assignment switches. In order to switch the impulse clock load from one driver to the other it is necessary that both drivers are correctly phased. The CAC- 511 contains the required phase comparator and indicates an "out of sync" condition
with afront panel LED. During a primary power outage, the Autochange makes it possible to utilize the available standby battery power in each CSD -510 in asequential manner.
CAC- 511
Automatic Master Clock Driver Changeover,
includes Instruction Manual Extra Instruction Manual
$1395.00 45.00
DCD-520/521
CDP-514
CDP-514 CLOCK DISTRIBUTION PANEL
The CDP-514 Clock Distribution Panel is designed as asystem accessory for the CSD -510 Master Clock System Driver and CLK Series impulse clocks. The distribution panel provides isolated feeds for 32 impulse clocks. Individual feed lines may be shorted, or either side of
the lines may be grounded without affecting the other clocks in the system. Shorts cause visual and aural alarms. The visual alarm is ared LED, while the aural alarm is ahigh pitched tone which can be switched off. Up to three distribution panels can be used in parallel to feed 96 impulse clocks from one CSD -510 Clock Driver.
CDP-514
Clock Distribution Panel for 36 CLK Series Impulse Clocks Extra instruction manual
$790.00 30.00
DCD-520/521 DIGITAL CLOCK DISPLAY
The DCD-520 Digital Clock Display accepts the standard SMPTE serial time code in the EIA or EBU format. The decoded signal drives a6- digit
7-segment real time display in the 24 hour system, i.e. 00 23 hours,
00...59 minutes and 00...59 seconds. A front panel Store switch can be used to freeze the time display as an aid in event timing. When the switch is released, the unit returns to real time. The DCD-520 cannot be used for VTR editing functions. The brightness of the readout is adjustable. Also available: Model DCD-521. It provides a computer
interface, i.e. aTTL ( or CMOS) compatible, parallel BCD time code output. This output appears on a rear panel, 50- pin Amphenol connector.
DCD-520 DCD-521
Digital Clock Display, including
Instruction Manual
$ 895.00
Digital Clock Display with Parallel BCD Code
output, includes Instruction Manual Extra Instruction Manual for DCD-520 / 521
1095.00 35.00
VP- 90
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
3m BROADCAST PRODUCTS DIVISION 3M Center Bldg. 225-3N
St. Paul, MN 55144 (612) 733-8132
CHARACTER GENERATORS
D-1510
D-1510 Television Character Generator
DESCRIPTION The D-1510 is amulti- page video character generator that features a broadcast character display with color background and character capability. It is designed for operating in professional television systems that require quality, versatility and low cost in titling and captioning.
The D-1510 features a built-in keyer that will lock to virtually any composite video signal including 1/2 inch Beta, VHS, or 3/4 inch recorders. Eight colors: red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellovv, black and white, can be used on the background and the characters in any combination needed on arow- by- row, word- by- word basis. Even the drop shadows and edges can be colored; three speeds, and pause can be applied to the roll and crawl modes. The D-1510 has fully independent edit channel and program channels, so editing of text can occur without affecting the program output.
There is a32- character graphics font that allows for construction of basis charts, graphs and symbols.
The Model D-1510 is acomplete titling facility. All necessary features are built into the unit eliminating the requirement for add-ons. Keyer, gen -lock sync and color, and 24- hour battery back-up are built in. This allows the unit to operate completely ildependently as astard-along unit without asupport system. This " complete" system concept, plus the use of only high- quality materials, makes the D-1510 an inherently reliable device, a most important consideration for production use.
FEATURES ·70 nanosecond resolution; 2heights ·Built-in keyer with gen -lock · Independent edit and program channels ·8 background colors ·8 character colors ·8edge colors ·512 color palette ·36- page random access memory ·2 character sizes
· Upper and lower case ·Word Processor text editing ·7 Graphic separators/International font set
·Automatic centering · Left/right justify ·9- speed roll and crawl
·22 characters per row · Flash ·Automatic word integrity · User prompting
· Battery back-up ·Roll/Crawl speed -- 8speeds %u/pause Physical: 16.5"W x 18.5"D x6.15" H
Weight: 30 lbs. D-1510 Character Generator
$ 4195.00
D-1512 Television Character Generator
D-1512 Television Character Generator shares the same features as
the D-1510 except: ·70 nanosecond resolution; 4 heights
·International font set
·Roll/crawl speed -- 8speeds w/pause
·512 color selections ·RGB output: RS- 170A compatible · Independent channel for composition while program channel is in
use · Edge signal for external key on/off
Weight and dimensions same as the D-1510 as well
D1512 Character Generator
$ 4995.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 91
3m
BROADCAST PRODUCTS DIVISION
3M Center Bldg. 225-3N St. Paul, MN 55144 (612) 733-8132
CHARACTER GENERATOR
D-5000 CHARACTER GENERATOR The 3M Model D-5000 Character Generator is a titling and graphics system designed for broadcast production and cable television use.
This is an expandable system which brings high resolution and full features into the affordable price range, while allowing future system growth.
Features ·Multi- font library 4 resident fonts · Proportional character spacing · Full editing capability · High resolution character definition ·35 nanoseconds · Multi- speed roll, crawl, reveal, and billboard dynamics ·Auto centering, line Er page ·512 color palette · Built-in sync and gen -lock ·9 speeds roll and crawl · 100 page internal memory · Programmable roll, crawl, and roll masking · Built-in clock · Built-in italics, all fonts · Internal colorizer · Background color in 4 line increments · Non-volatile data storage · Split screen displays · Character kerning Et overlap · Multi- color logos ·Vertical roll, 9 raies plus pause ( blanking to blanking),
five different masks are selectable · Horizontal crawl, 9 rates plus pause ( blanking to
blanking), position selectable ·Word flash and color change flash · Mix rolls and/or crawl with static displays · Slow reveal -- 7 speeds · Billboard -- 9 speeds
Specifications Configuration Electronics 19" rack mount
10-1/2"H x 16-1/2"D -- 38 lbs. Keyboard 21"W x4-5/8"H x 11-1/8"D -- 10 lbs.
Output Program channel NTSC compatible, color encoded, 1.0V peak- to- peak composite into 75 ohm load adjustable +10%. High Resolution. Two outputs provided.
Edit channel same as program channel with cursor, system status indication and interactive operator prompting information. High Resolution.
R- G- Boutputs for program channel 0.7 volts peak- to- peak.
Edge External Key Signal- composite luminance 1.0 volts. Strap for non- composite 0.7 volts.
Inputs Sync accepts standard 4.0V peak- to- peak or composite video signal 75 ohm looping inputs.
RS- 232 keyboard loop through for multiple channel operation.
RS-422 ( optional) dual 3-1/2" micro floppy disc memory
Subcarrier Reference Frequency. 3.58 MHz 2.0 volts peak- to- peak loop through ( 4.43 MHz 2.0 volts PAL).
Model D-5000 Character Generator $ 10,995.00
Accessories/Options 4Additional resident fonts 24 Hour memory backup unit 48 Hour memory backup unit 72 Hour memory backup unit
Keyboard Chassis Custom Logos 1Font Chip set
$ 675.00 50.00
100.00 150.00
1,700.00 9,295.00
200.00 125.00
Memory Expansion Options
50 pages additional resident memory
$ 250.00
Single Disc Drive
2,900.00
(Store up to 600 pages of text per disc)
Dual Disc Drives
3,199.00
(Greater on line storage and disc duplication capability)
4Font Ram Memory
1,150.00
(Down load 4 of 100 fonts from 3M font library disc)
8Font Ram Memory
2,300.00
(Down load 8 of 100 fonts from 3M font library disc)
VP -92
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
3m BROADCAST PRODUCTS DIVISION 3M Center Bldg. 225-3N St. Paul, MN 55144 (612) 733-8132
GRAPHICS GENERATOR FONT LIBRARY
This series of Video Fonts is designed for use with the D-5000 Generators. The styles and sizes shown are part of our growing Video Typography Library. Additional fonts will be added regularly. Also, custom alphabets and logo fonts can be prepared to your specifications. Fonts consist of complete high- resolution, alpha- numeric character sets. Characters are fully proportionally spaced for true letterforms. Unless shown otherwise, fonts contain complete upper case characters, lower case characters, numbers, and standard punctuation. A series of standard symbols is also provided.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqr stuvwxyz
1234567890 ! of%C&*() ·1' ?
21 -
Similar to Cooper Black Italics SIZES: 18, 22. 28. 34 and 44 TV Scan Lines
FONTS
ABCDEFGRIJKL14111
OPORSTUVWXYZ
abeddyitijktnutopqrstuu
wiry:
1234567890
!
.? · .
Similar to Free Style Handletter SIZES: 34 and 44 TV Scan Unes
ABCDEPGRIJKLIV1 NOPQRSTUVWXYZ abedef ghijklmnopg
rstuvWxyz 1234567890 $96Cilte()-+1.><:""1
IA-41/2 4*de
Similar to American Typewriter SIZES: 28. 34 and 44 TV Scan Lines
Ascreemmxtmaceemwm: umove NNNN .
AtICDEFG1411KL/414 OPORSTUVWXY2
1234567890
Similar to Cartoon SIZES: 28 TI/ Scan Lines
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 1234567890
fie,EDEFGHLIHL(Ell OPCIFISTUUWHY2 I23456189O t/.59.C6·[]-+1 ,/,$"": d1/ 2 --
Similar to Data 70 SIZES: 28 and 34 TV Scan Lines
AEMLIEF abcdefghi 12,345!©#$%
0-- +]1/4 ° :<
Similar to Avant Garde SIZES: 16 TV Scan Lines
Similar to Cheltenham Black SIZES: 14, 28 44 and 56 TV Scan Lines
ABCDEFGHIDINNOPOR STUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz 1234567890
IC,11111408*8-+r/4- :<>?1! /.,/er=·
S ,,· Bolt Bold w/CBS Logo
Similar to City Bold
SIZES:
24 28 32 36 ara 44 7V Scar, Lines SIZES: 18, 22. 34. 44 and 64 TV Scan unes
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ
abcdelghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz
12345678IN $1,48*0-+]1 / 4 ""r-
Similar to Eight Ball SIZES: 54 TV Scan bre ,
Similar lo Eras Bold SIZES: 34 TV Scan Lines
ABCDIEFGHIJKLAIN OPORSTUVWXYZ abcdefghijklmnopqrstu
vvvxyz 1234567890! >680 66 -- :ae?eu
a- · French Helvetica Bold SIZES:
ABCDEFGHIJ KUM° PQRSTUVWXYZ
obcdefghijklmnopqr stuvwxyz
1234567890
·/.,*';' 1/2=-
SIZES:
.1 10 Futura Bold
ABCDEFGHIJ abcdefghi¡
1234567890
?0,./.
,ar to Futura Bold wINBC Logo SIZES: 41, TV Scat
ABCDEFGHIJKLIVINOP QRSTUVWXYZ obcdefghqklmn opqrstuvwxyz 1234567890
to Broadway
SIZES: 54 T
s
Similar to Cooper Black SIZES: 16 24. 28, 34 and 44 IV Scan unes
Note. All fonts photographed directly from monitor
Eurostyle Bold Extended
'and 44 TV Scan Laws
Similar to Futura Demi Bold SIZES: 29. 34, 46 and 56 TV Scat , Lines
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-93
3m BROADCAST PRODUCTS DIVISION 3M Center Bldg. 225-3N St. Paul, MN 55144 (612) 733-8132
GRAPHICS GENERATOR FONT LIBRARY ( Cont'd)
ABCDEFGHIJ abcdefgh
1234567890 !4>£$%<&*() -1/2'1/4
$;'*:"",. ·
ABCDEFGHIJK LMNOP ORSTUVW XYZ
abcdelghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz 1234567890
Similar to Futura Demi Bold wiNBC LogoItaliScismilar to Helvetica Bold
SIZES: 46 Tv Scan Lines
SIZES: 18, 22, 28, 34 and 44 TV Scan Lines
ABCDEFGHIJK LAIN abcdefghijklrnrepqr
123q567890 ? .< -- :]1/4 ±--x*myes
ARCOEFGHIJKUANOP ORSTUVWXYZ
ABOEEFGHLIKLMNOPORSTUXV WXYZ
1234567890
FONTS
0 =X123456789 114-1<>°01'---[= -
ADCDEFGHIJKIMNOP
QRSTUXYZ abcciefghijkIrrinopo
rstuvwxyz 1234567890
Math Symbols SIZES: 28 TV Scan Lines
Similar to Serif Gothic Extra Bold wINBC Logo SIZES: 30. 44, 50 and 58 TV Scan Lines
1234567890 234,567_8M/83/83/4 1/4
Tffl/8 1/25/8
ABCDEFGHIJKLNI NOPORSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmn opqrstuvwxyz
1234567890
Similar to Harry Fat SIZES: 44 TV Scan Lines
Similar to Horatio Bold UC SIZES: 32 TV Scan Lines
Numbers & Fractions Font SIZES: 34 56 and 64 TV Scan Lines
Similar to Serifa Bold wiCBS logo SIZES: 24 and 28 TV Scan Lines
ABCDEFOIUKLMN OPORSTUVWXYZ
12341567890 ?·· """tré-WilirkS#1-.
170U,./ 0
ABCDEFGHXLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ
olxciefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz 1234567890
Similar to Harry Obese Squeezed (CBS) SIZES: 36 and 44 TV Scan Lines
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PORSTUVWXYZ
abcedfghmnopqr stuvwxyz
1234567890
Similar to Horatio Medium SIZES: 28 TV Scan Lines
r-r-· f`.
Il-H'-'.
1-&-. Si I-
Pun
11+1 ,0 ·
i.à.1 EH 19 .4.
ASCH£GIIIJIL1410?11 RS1151117 1Z3867890
c #Slert+1--·=1/2 /41 [1 :'';*,<.>/?·°
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ
abcedfghijklmnop qrstuvwxyz 1234567890
''#$%c&*(1- +11/ 4 -:<>?°·/..:
Similar to Old Timer SIZES: 44 TV Scan Lines
ONCEIrAl1PW0/1.41571/13148 51676112 14HR 1234567890
.71 ,1,1:3,, 8(.610r -946'3
Similar to Souvenir Demi Bold SIZES: 18, 22, 28, 34 and 44 TV Scan Lines
Other fonts available.
Similar to Spanish Helvetica SIZES: 28 TV Scan Lines
Simiiar to Helvetica Bold SIZES: 16, 24, 28. 34 and 44 TV Scan Lines
Line Segment Font SIZES: 16 and 34 TV Scan Lines
bojeleauueeleuoeou o
aaàaaAAAAA 006ouuüuuAÇJEoax&xiMiii
ICECieceoec
atecoéygx.oprawni ercPQRSIMOXV3
abaWgitilldennop.e414 vwx_y3
1234567890 ?@# ¿.· 0-+] 1/4 :"
Similar to Helvetica Bold International SIZES: 28 TV Scan Lines
Similar to Mandate Script SIZES: 34 TV Scan Lines
Note: All fonts photographed directly from monitor.
Similar to Russian Helvetica SIZES: 28 TV Scan Lines
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP QRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqr stuvwxyz
1234567890 !#$%.**0 ":?/.:;-
Similar to Standard Bold Tabular SIZES: 28 TV Scan Lines
Similar to Tea Chest SIZES: 44 TV Scan Lines
Similar to Video Bold SIZES: 14, 24, 28, 34. 56 and 64 TV Scan Lines
Similar to Serif Gothic Extra Bold SIZES: 30. 44, 50 and 58 TV Scan Lines
Similar to Windsor Bold SIZES: 64 TV Scan Lines
VP-94
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
3m
BROADCAST PRODUCTS DIVISION
3M Center Bldg. 225-3N St. Paul, MN 55144 (612) 733-8132
GRAPHICS SYSTEM
ARTRONICS/3M STUDIO COMPUTER SYSTEMS Designed For: ·Video Producers · News Graphics ·Audiovisual Producers · Business Graphics · Illustrators · Industrial Artists ·Art Directors · Graphic Designers Applications: · Beautiful comps, with exciting alternatives, for logos, layouts, ads, story boards · Thumbnails and roughs, in full
color with instant variations · Video and Business Graphics, grids and text · Final reflective or transparency
art, 35mm color slides, 4 x 5 and 8 x 10 instant color prints · Video tape or broadcast
Paint System Consists Of: · Central Processor with 128K bytes ·Two Dual Density Floppy Disks with 1megabyte each · 13" High Resolution RGB Color Display · 12" Monochrome Monitor · Detachable keyboard · 15" x 15" Digitizer Pad with Stylus · Optional Camera Input and Font Origination · PC Software
FEATURES: · Freehand Drawing · Camera Input · 128 Color Palette w/16,777,216 possible colors · Color Mixing: Hue/Luminance/Saturation · Color Matching · Rainbow/Spectrum · Continuous Tone · Cycle " Real-Time" Color Movement · 28 Brush Styles · Create New Brush · Air Brush · Textures · Area Fill · Line Snap · Squares · Rectangles · Intricate Curves · Arcs · Overlay · Text/Typesetting · Duplication/Transformation e Enlarge/Reduce · Condense · Expand · Shear · Distort · Rotate · Copy · Reposition · Grids: Parallel/Perpendicular/Perspective/ Align/Justify · 16:1 Zoom · Save- Store · Recall · Help · Photo Print · Video Tape · Broadcast.
Paint System Consists Of: · Electronics · Terminal Et Stylus · Image Grabber
Keyboard * Digitizer Pad Et $34,990.00
OPTIONS · 13" RGB Color Monitor · Business Grapnics Software ·Animagic® Software ·Videoslide 35mm Color Film System ·8" x10" Instant Color Print System · NT SC Color Encoder · Color Insert Keyer · Font Origination Software
$3,200.00 5 000.00
10,000.00 3,000.00 8 800.00 2,950.00 4 395.00 500.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 95
MCl/GUANTEL
P.O. Box 50810 Palo Alto, CA 94303
MICRO CONSULTANTS INC. (415) 856-6226 Telex 334420
FAX 415-493-5262
VIDEO EFFECTS SYSTEMS
Video Effects System DLS 6010 " Snapshot"
"Snapshot" is the most advanced smallscale still store available, employing the latest
in electronic and disc drive technology. It therefore includes features that, singly or in combination, other systems cannot match. These include:
·Asynchronous picture capture · Field or frame freeze · Picture grab
· Half- second transfer rate ·Two framestores-- instantaneous vertical
switching
·On- air editing
·External key
· " Browse-- and title search
·Autofile numbering/default titling
·Individual user picture protection · Printer output
·Interchangeable disc cartridges
"Snapshot" records and plays still pictures with the aid of remarkable Winchester disc
technology. Each removable disc cartridge
holds approximately 400 pictures on-line.
DIS 6010
$ 44,375.00
VP-96
DFS 1750
TBc Synchronizer DFS 1750
The remarkably small size of the DFS 1750 is
achieved through advanced technology and elegant electronic design, with no sacrifices in performance. On the contrary, the DFS 1750 is a powerful performer, with such features as infinite window heterodyne TBC, automatic phased/non-phased switching,
fast hot cuts, freeze, built-in reference signals and test equipment, full proc amp controls, remote control-- even adigital / 0
interface conforming to SMPTE recommendations on composite sampling. And it consumes just 90 VA.
· Auto phased/non-phased operation · Built-in reference signals · Proc amp controls · Remote operation · Low power consumption
· Size: 19" rack mount; 1- 3 /4 "H x 19"D ·Weight: 15 lbs.
DFS 1750
$ 13,900.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MICRO- SCRIPT SCRIPTOVISION, INC.
7419 Lajeunesse Montreal, Quebec, Canada H2R 2J1 (514) 271-2265
COLOR VIDEO TITLER/ CHARACTER GENERATOR
Model Ii Color Video Titler/Character Generator
2 MODELS
·TITLER-2 pages of memory
$259.00
·CHARACTER GENERATOR - 8 pages of memory with
automatic sequencing $299.00
FEATURES ·2 character sizes · 150 different letters, numbers and graphic symbols including
punctuation marks · 16 lines of 32 small characters, 4 lines of 10 large characters ( with
character by character colorization) ·6 brilliant colors: red, blue, green, yellow, magenta, orange ·4way cursor control
· Status mode indicator shows: ·direction selected
·character or graphics mode ·when in " shift- lock" mode ·Character size and color indicated by cursor · Permits simple animation
· Power on color bars · Dependable tactile keyboard -- 40 function keys · Reliable solid-state construction -- rugged metal case · Easy to use -- no computer language needed ·Competely portable...measures a mere 7" x3-1/4" x 1-1/2" and
weighs only 3,4 lbs.
APPLICATIONS ·Generates distinctive titles and graphics for home or commercial
USE
·TV Production ·Video Merchandising ·CATV/SMATV/MATV Channels · HOTEL/MOTEL/HOSPITAL Announcements ·LPTV Production ·Instructional Programming
OP -PONS ·Standby Power ·Genlock Keye-/Matte Generator
Prices and Specificat ons Subject to Cnange Without Notice.
VP- 97
MICROTIME, INC.
1280 Blue Hills Avenue Bloomfield, CT 06002
(203) 242-4242 ( 800) 243-1570 TWX 710-425-1165
Elrene%is I
II II III III III II II II
· ·····.0.4e)·64·**·*
GENESIS 1DIGITAL EFFECTS SYSTEM
FEATURES
· Composite or Component Inputs ·Built- In Preview Keyer ·User- Oriented Control Panel ·Full 2- Axis Rotation · Infinite Variable Position ·Continuous Interpolation ·Spatial Antialiasing
GENESIS 1
Genesis 1 is an easy to operate, high performance digital effects
system, containing features only available in the higher priced digital effects systems, and creating more special effects capabilities for users in the professional, industrial and academic areas.
Genesis 1 incorporates advanced digital technology producing
effects such as zoom, flip, tumble, crop, vertical or horizontal compression, border, posterize, mosaic, smooth and freeze.
Genesis 1with Standard Control Panel Accessory Service Extender Card Additional Cable ( 25' standard)
-- with Standard Control ( 100') --with ACT 1 ( 2000' max.) DATAKEY ( additional)
$ 21,990.00 350.00
600.00 2 00/ft.
95.00
SPECIFICATIONS GENESIS 1 Input Signals
Composite Component Reference Video
Program Video Sequence Trigger Routing Switcher Control Output Signals Composite Component Key Differential Gain Differential Phase Power Supply
Power Consumption Weight
Shipping Weight Unit Weight Dimensions Control Connectors SMPTE 207M RS449
NTSC* Y/R-Y/B-Y" Composite Color/Black Burst, High impedance loop through 75 ohms, terminating ( 1) RCA phono jack ( TTL level)
Active Low ( TTL level)
NTSC per RS170A** Y/R-Y/B-Y 75 ohms, terminating ( 1) 3% 10-90% API*** 3° 10-90% APL"** NTSC: 115/230 VAC, 60Hz PAL: 220 VAC, 50Hz 240 watts
62 lb. ( 28kg), approx. 52 lb. ( 23kg), approx. 7" x19" x21" ( 18cm x48cm x53cm)
9pin " D" 37 pin " D"
DIGITAL EFFECTS SYSTEM
GENESIS 1/ACT 1TM
FEATURES ·Variable Speed, Zoom and Position · Menu Driven Design · Data Key® Portable Storage · Nonvolatile Memory
·Capacity to Operate up to 2000 feet from the Genesis 1Mainframe · Shadow, Disassemble, Inertia, and Variable Aspect Ratio for
Mosaic added to Genesis 1Capability
Genesis 1, Microtime's high quality, low-cost digital effects system was just the beginning. Now, ACT 1, Microtime's Artistic Control Terminal combined with the Genesis 1mainframe, increases creative capabilities to your imagination's limit.
ACT 1functions through the ease of the joy stick. The selection of Menu, Freeform and an Initialization File results in rapid availability of the joy stick for on-air use. Accessing the Directory and selecting a sequence number recalls aprior file, computes the requirements and obtains aplayback within seconds. The sequence begins by pressing Take.
A routing switcher is used for changing sources at the system input.
The switcher shculd have loop through inputs and flip / fIcp logic. Selection of the two sources is by manual entry.
The routing switcher is controlled by the Change Source command within ACT 1. Computer editors have access to the Genesis 1, ACT 1 combination via the Sequence Trigger connector on the rear panel of the Genesis 1mainframe.
GENESIS 1/ACT ACT 1Control Panel Only
$27,990.00 7,000.00
VP- 98
GENESIS 1 ( Rear panel) Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ACT 1 ( Rear panel)
MYCRO-TEK, INC.
303 N. West Street P.O. Box 47068 Wichita. KS 67201 (316) 945-5087 ( 800) 835-2055
GRAPHIC CHARACTER GENERATORS
MODEL NUMBER MV- 10000 MV- 10001 MV- 10002 MV- 10003
MV- 10008 MV- 10007 MV- 10008
DESCRIPTION "Supra Character Generator
Including Keyboard, 64K Memory and Utility Font
**Supra Two Character Generator Including Keyboard, Supra Keyboard Only Supra Edit Terminal With Micro- Disk Drive Et Keyboard, Includes Serial Communications
Supra Character Generator Includes Serial Communications, Utility Font Supra Two Character Generator Includes Serial Communications, Utility Font Supra Edit Keyboard Only
PRICE $8495.00
9995.00 395.00
4495.00 8495.00 9996.00
396.00
SUPER EDIT
SUPRA
SUPRA SYSTEM
·Supra · Supra Two ·SupraEdit · Supra Graphics The high quality 40 nanosecond resolution supplies crisp, sharp, very readable character and graphics display. Text or graphics mix easily on the same line. For emphasis combine fonts on the same page. Add various character colors over adifferent background color. With its real-time sequencing, your SupraSystem lets you set different events to appear hourly, daily, weekly, in whatever order or frequency you want. Organize, create and edit your programming by content...by time...by frequency. The Supra is a single- channel character generator with 10 fonts online, 250 pages ( 8 lines, 32 characters per line) of memory. This can be expanded to 1,000 pages of memory. The SupraEdit is the perfect answer for offline editing. It has micro disk drive for non-volatile storage. Operating commands or the SupraSystem are written in plain, easy to understanc English, not computereze. The keys are color coded and labeled in plain English. Most users can teach themselves to operate the SupraSystem in amatter of hours. ASupraSystem will interface to news wire or alocal weather station to give viewers an excellent variety of timely information. Sports, news and financial stories can be displayed on designated pages and sequenced to be shown at specific times and frequency. Also, classified ads can be stored and sequenced to run at your choice of times and frequencies to give maximum impact in the marketplace. The Supra's modular design lets you start with one Supra. Keep adding units until you have your complete system set up. In-house systems can operate up to 99 character generators at the same location. A regional network can operate from acentral location and feed into multiple remote headends. You can do off-line editing at the same site or from aremote location using phone lines. Each SupraSystem operates independently.
MV- 10200 MV- 10271 MV- 10272 MV- 10273
MV- 10278
SUPRA HARDWARE OPTIONS Serial Communications Board Et Software Add-on Memory 1192K) Uninterruptible Power Supply Supra Interface Formatter
Genlock Sync/ Downstream Keying
SUPRA FONT OPTIONS MV- 10100102) Utility Font MV- 101011081 Video Gothic MV- 10102104) Pi Characters MV- 10103)04) News
MV- 10104108) Serif MV- 101051041 Graphic MV- 10108(08) Video Italic MV- 10107(10) Video Bold MV- 101081081 Display Medium
MV- 10109(101 Video Roman ( Uppercase) MV-10110(xx) · Custom Logo MV-101111xxl · Custom Font
Graphics IExtended Includes all standard graphics characters plus 37 MV- 10122)6) Additional graphics characters Variety Font-Pac ( 5fonts) Video Gothic, MV- 101121281 Pi Characters, News, Serif Et Graphic Display Font Pac ( 4Fonts) Video Gothic, MV- 101131281 Pi characters, Graphic Et Video Bold Production Font Pac ( 4Fonts) graphic, MV- 10114132) Video Bold, Display Medium Et Video Roman Uppercase MV- 10115102) Spanish Utility ( Standard with Spanish System) MV- 10116108) Spanish Video Gothic MV- 101171041 Spanish News MV- 10118106) Spanish Serif Spanish Variety Font-Pac ( 5Fonts) S- Video Gothic, MV- 10119)34) Pi Characters, S- News, S- Serif Et Graphics
Extended Variety Font-Pac 19 Fonts) Video Gothic, Pi Characters, News, Serif, Graphic, Video Italic MV- 10120182) Video Bold, Display Medium, Video Roman Uppercase MV- 10121108) Spanish Upgrade ( accents)
GROCERY FONT PAC Utility Double Height Video Gothic, Bottom Et Top Aligned Single Height Video Gothic with wide shadow, MV- 101231341 tag characters Et Grocery Pi Font
LP- 10220 MV- 10221
SUPRA LOCAL WEATHER SYSTEM Weather Computer ( Includes Sensors) Weather Computer Interface
MV- 10250 MV- 10253 MV- 10254 MV- 10258 MV- 10256 MV- 10257
MV- 10301 MV- 10302 MV- 10303
SUPRA WIRE SERVICE OPTIONS Wire Interface Card ( holds 2sets of wire software) Associated Press Software United Press International Software Dow Jones Software NOAA Weather Software Reuters Software
SUPRA SYSTEM SPARES Supra Spares Kit Supra Two Spares Kit Supra Edit Terminal Spares
396.00 1600.00 1096.00 3800.00
800.00
Standard 300.(X) 250.00 200.00 300.00 250.00 300.00 300.00 300.00 300.00
Variable Variable
300.00
1000.00
1000.00
1000.00 Standard
300.00 200.00 300.00
1000.00
2000.00 300.00
1000.00
976.00 1025.00
300.00 350.00 350.00 350.00 350.00 350.00
2500.00 2500.00 1600.00
Genlock The Genlock option includes manual sequencing. " Pause" and "take" keys allow the operator to preview titles offline and add them to external video, providing great flexibility when mixing alphanumerics
with tape or live video
All Supras have asix month warranty. The optional service contract offers 24 hour, 7-days- a-week WATS service assistance. With the purchase of a Spares Kit, most problems can be handled over the
NOTE: I) Designates value assigned to that particular font or total value of the fontpac. Maximum font value for Supra is 64. Maximum font value for Supra Two is 32.
·Individual evaluation is required before afirm quote will be given. These are con-
sidered one- unit prices. Mycro-Tek reserves the right to add custom fonts and/or logos to the Supra font Library. *Include MV- 10200 with each MV- 10000 or MV- 10001 that will be required to send
and receive data from MV- 10003, 10004, MV- 10006 or MV- 10007.
phone.
Reprinted with permission from materials© 1984 by MYCRO-TEK
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP-99
MYCRO-TEK ·INC
303 N. West Street P.O. Box 47068 Wichita, KS 67201
(316) 945-5087 ( 800) 835-2055
CHARACTER GENERATOR
Mycro-Tek Introduces Max A low-cost character generator w/non-volatile RAM storage
Features
· Real-time clock for time and calendar display · Main and auxiliary loop sequencing ·Up to four user- definable regions, with region separators
user- definable by size and color · Eight background colors and eight character colors: red,
blue, green, yellow, cyan, magenta, black and white · Display modes in three speeds of roll: print, crawl and
splash. Additional display modes are bang and ripple · Background and character color by line, page or character · Full character edging in black or white · Flashing characters or graphics ( three speeds) · Display time from one to 999 seconds · Six-month full warranty on parts and labor
Max is a technological step ahead of other character generators in its price range because it utilizes non-volatile RAM storage. A built-in, product- life battery provides power for Max's memory, so Max retains stored pages even if power is accidentally interrupted.
This backup memory gives Max portability as well as safety. The user can store pages, power Max off, move it to another location, and power up again without losing pages. This makes Max an excellent display tool for meetings, conventions and classrooms.
MYCRO-VISION rm MAX
Max has astandard 32K memory allowing 120 pages ( eight lines, 32- characters per line) of storage. Two separate highresolution fonts for text and graphics are standard. Both
fonts can be displayed in four separate styles: single height/ single width; single height/double width; double height/ single width; double height/double width. Two optional wire service feeds can be captured by Max.
MODEL NUMBER MV- 11000
DESCRIPTION
MAX CHARACTER GENERATOR Includes Max Text Er Max Graphics Fonts
PRICE $2995.00
ERNIE CHARACTER GENERATOR MV- 11001 Includes Genlock, Text 8- Graphics Fonts
$3995.00
MAX LOCAL WEATHER SYSTEM Max Weather Station Includes Heathkit Weather Computer,
MV- 11200 Sensors and Interface Software MV- 11201 Max Weather Station ( Interface Only)
Max Wire Service Options, interface incl. (limit: two) MV- 11400 AMEX Stock Ticker MV- 11401 AP Cable News MV- 11402 Dow Jones Stock News
MV- 11403 New York Stock Exchange Ticker MV- 11404 NOAA Service/RS232
MV- 11405 NOAA Service/Current Loop MV- 11406 Reuters News View MV- 11407 UPI Cable News MV- 11408 Communications in ( Receive only) MV- 11409 Communications out ( Send only)
$1095.00 499.00
125.00 125.00 125.00 125.00 125.00 125.00 125.00 125.00 199.00 499.00
vP-100
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CALIFORNIA PALTEX CORP.
2752 Walnut Avenue Tustin, CA 92680 (714) 838-8833 TVVX 910-333-8535
ABR-1A EDITING SYSTEM Features
·Advanced microcomputer technology · Individual control of transports for faster editing · Multi- event memory storage · CRT Status Display ·Assemble and Insert Editing Modes · Edit points trimming ·A/ B Roll, Match Cut, and Sync Roll modes · Printer Output ( RS- 232C) · Serial Communication port for computer interface ·Animation Editing mode · Split Edits · Manual and Auto Take control for general purpose inter-
face · Frame accurate extend edit ·Mark Edit Points On- the- Fly, in still frame, or by
numeric entry
The microprocessor based ABR-1A editing system offers simplicity, ease of operation, and ruggedness while providing outstanding performance and features in a variety of editing configurations at a competitive cost.
The basic system includes aVideo Display Output consisting of four screens of information showing all editing related data, Executive Menu, 20 Event Memory List and System Diagnostics.
By selecting the Executive Menu, the operator may change edit parameters by second level software to suit particular modes of operation. The " Off-line" feature enables a full Edit Decision List to be complied including Reel Number, Wipe/Dissolve Selection and Duration, Split Edits, etc. The EDL can be outputted to a hard copy printer or punched paper tape in Paltex ( Datatron/Tempo) or CMX-340 formats.
Normal system counting uses control track or tach pulses and as an option SMPTE/EBU Time Code or Microloc can be fitted.
Specifications
EDIT MODES ·Assemble or Insert · Split Video and Audio Edits · Manual and Auto Animation · A/B Roll · Sync Roll
· Park and Enter
· Numerical Entry · Trim Frame by Frame or a Pro-
grammed Value · Auto Tag, Auto Next · Extend Edit
SEARCH MODES
· Recall any Edit in Memory
· Fast Forward · Forward Play · Forward Variable Speed
· Still Frame · Stop · Reverse Variable Speed · Rewind · Cruise
EDIT LIST ·Paltex ( Datatron / Tempo) or
Compatible Edit Decision List · Printer Output IRS- 232C)
CMX
OPERATING CONFIGURATIONS · Sony 2860A, 5850, BVU, SLO-383,
BVW-10 40
· Go to any Programmed Point
· JVC - 8200, 8250, 6400, 8600, 8800
EVENT SET UP ·On- the- Fly Marking · Park and Perform
· Pan - 8500, 9600, AU- 300 "M"
· Hitachi - HR- 200
9240,
AU- 700,
Reprinted with permission from materials 1984 PALTEX
EDITING SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL Power: 115/220 VAC 1- 10%, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption: 30 Watts Television Standard: NTSC, PAL,
SECAM Time Code: SMPTE, Micro Loc, Pulse
Count Edit Accuracy: Frame Accurate
w/Time Code
ABR-1A
MECHANICAL Lengtn: 17.5" Height: 6.0" Width: 18.0" Weight: 20 lbs.
ABA- 1A
TCR-1 RdI-1 RCI-2
Three- Machine ABR-1A Editing System w / 3VTR Cable
SMPTE Time Code Reader Interconnect Comm' Remote Cable Interconnect Control Remote Cable
MAIN DISPLAY
$8,200.00 800.00 350.00 570.00
A- B » R
V+A1+A2
No Split
ABR-1A Ready
Loc
Record
12 38 00
Play- A
338 10)
Play- B
522 10
Split Edit Point
GPI Trigger P3int
Edit # 001 ·Reel A 001
Reel B 001
Effect Pattern Elf Dur
In .12.30 ,00 .320 10 .522 10
12 46.15
Out t3 03 00 336 25 538:25
W
Proçram Length
335
Keybcard Entry
045
Dur .33:00 :16:15 .16:15
35 10 00
EXECUTIVE MENU
;1 SELECT THE DESIRED EXECJIIIVE FUNCTION.
01 Edit Number Select 02 Reel Number ASelect 03 Reel Number BSelect 04 VCR APre- roll Time 05 VCR BPre- roll Time 06 VCR RPre- roll Tune 07 VCR APost- roll Time 08 VCR BPost- roll Time 09 VCR RPost- roll Time
[10] Pattern Code Select [11] Eff Duration Select [121 Auto Animation Mode [131 Auto Next ON or OFF [14] Auto Tag ON or OFF [15] Clear Program Length [16] Local VCR Recording [MEM1 Event Memory Update
I] ALWAYS PRESS ' ENTER" TO END EXECUTIVE MODES
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 101
CALIFORNIA
2752 Walnut Avenue Tustin, CA 92680 (714) 838-8833
TVVX 910-333-8535
PALTEX
CORP.
EDIT-STAR COMPUTERIZED EDITING SYSTEM
FEATURES
HELP HELP is PALTEX's exclusive feature that allows you to leave your user manual on the shelf.
USER DEFINABLE KEYS Editors can store asequence of up to 20 keystrokes in each of three user registers.
FRAME BUMP ( A/V Sync) FRAME BUMP allows the editor to sync up asource VTR to either the record VTR or another source VTR.
ASSIGNABLE RECORD While the EDIT- STAR initializes with your preferred VTR assignment, any of the VTRs can be assigned to be the Record VTR; and any can be assigned to be the A, B or C VTR directly from the keyboard.
DISTRIBUTED PROCESSING
For special situations where you need to interface to more than four VTRs or where you need to have more than one EDIT- STAR share control of a pool of VTRs, Distributed Processing is available.
VTR MOTION CONTROL EDIT- STAR is equipped with arotary Varascan for manual jog and shuttle ccontrol of the VTRs, including frame jog ( deck dependent).
SPECIAL FUNCTION CONTROL EDIT- STAR is capable of controlling any external device such as a character generator, DVE or audio cart which can be actuated via a contact closure or TTL logic level.
SYNC ROLL
Will sync roll as many as three source and one record VTR. SWITCHER CONTROL When interfaced to aproduction switcher, the EDIT- STAR enables you to perform cuts, wipes, dissolves, fades and keys from the editing keyboard.
TIME CODE READERS The EDIT- STAR includes aTime Code Reader in its electronic chassis for each of the interfaced VTRs. These longitudinal Time Code Readers also read and allow the operator to display on the status monitor User Bits data which is a part of the time code.
TIME CODE AND CONTROL TRACK When operating in Time Code mode, it is frame accurate. The EDIT- STAR can also edit in Control Track mode and the operator can go into Control Track while the VTRs are at rest or in motion. It is capable of simultaneously intermixing VTRs which are under Time Code and Control Track control.
MARKING " IN" TIMES Allows you to mark " In" ( and " Out") points in three ways:
·Enter the time number via the 10- key pad and mark the VTR "In" key;
·Park the VTR at the desired point and mark the VTR " In" key with a single stroke;
·Play the tape and mark the VTR " In" key " on-the-fly" AUTO USER REACTION TRIM Allows the operator to enter auser- selectable " reaction time" of from 1to 31 frames. It initializes with a reaction trim of zero frames.
EDITING SYSTEM
SPLIT AUDIO- VIDEO Is capable of designating split audio and video edits.
CUEING OF VTRS
Allows the operator to send any or all of the VTRs automatically to the Cue point, which is the edit " In" time less the preroll time. In addition, the operator can send any of the VTRs to park directly on the " In" point or the " Out" point.
SINGLE DECK PREVIEWS
While the normal " automatic preview" function is in the video-videovideo format you can also perform single deck manual previews.
AUTO TAG Selectable for all of the VTRs or the record VTR only, and the system initializes with Auto Tag off.
EDIT LIST MEMORY
Has adynamic memory of 318 events. A protect mode enables you to automatically dump to disk on an event- by-event basis to preserve the list.
EDIT LIST FORMATS Outputs Edit List information in any of three EDL formats selectable from the keyboard.
LIST MANAGEMENT TEXT EDITING allows the operator to add, delect, modify or reposition an individual event in the edit list, with or without ripple.
BLOCK MOVES allows the editor to add delete or reposition blocks of events in the edit list.
MATCH, when initiated by the operator, provides for continuous automatic tracking of the edit list as the record VTR is playing.
AUTO ASSEMBLE
The entire Edit Decision List, or adesignated block of it, can be automatically previewed or edited.
SCRATCH PAD MEMORY Can store two miscellaneous time code values.
SOFTWARE IN " PROM" Operational software onboard in resident read-only memory.
AUTO SYNC POINT In order to sync apoint within asource shot to apoint within material previously laid down on the record VTR, simply park the source and
record VTRs on the desired sync point. It automatically calculates and enters the correct " In" point with the push of abutton. COLOR- FRAME ADJUSTMENT The EDIT- STAR will automatically adjust all play VTR times to be in the proper color- frame relationship ( NTSC, RS- 170A or PAL 8-field) to the record " In" time at the press of a button.
ES1-3 ES- 1-4 INST
HSP DDS DD8 EDB ITCR-2 VITC-1
IC- F
GVM AVM IPI-C1
IPI-U1
IPI-H1
IPI-S
CPI- U1 CPI- D1 CPI- R1
Three- Machine EDIT- STAR System Four- Machine EDIT- STAR System Installation and Basic Training
(Note: No Distributor Margin) High Speed Line Printer 5-1/4" Binary Disk Drive 8" CMX-Compatible Disk Drive
Self Analysis Debug Package Internal Time Code Reader Vertical Interval Time Code Capa-
bility for ITCR-2 Interconnect Cable per Foot
(beyond 25' Standard Cable Length) Green Phosphor Video Monitor
Amber Phosphor Video Monitor Internal Processor Interface
for 1" Type CVTR Internal Processor Interface
for U-matic VTR Internal Processor Interface
for 1/2" VTR Internal Processor Interface
for Switcher Universal Control Processor Interface Downstream Control Processor Interface Remote Machine Control
$27,500.00 30,000.00
1250.00 2000.00 2800.00 5000.00 2675.00 1700.00
1000.00
4 00 800.00 800.00
1700.00
1700.00
1700.00
4000.00 1200.00 3500.00 2000.00
VP- 102
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CALIFORNIA PALTEX CORP.
2752 Walnut Avenue Tustin, CA 92680 (714) 838-8833 TVVX 910-333-8535
EDITING SYSTEM
'F. lir
'te
Ilr
1161616161
THE ESPRIT The Ultimate Editing Experience, includes: Features ·Rolls up to 5VTRs/ATRs in full synchronization ·Full Serial or Parallel Production Switcher interface
·Internal SMPTE/EBU Time Code Readers ·ESPRIT Broadcast Color Framers ·ESPRIT State- of- the- Art Software:
Smartscan ( Learn Mode, Slow Motion Control in EDL) Frame Bump ( Audio/Video Sync) 10 User Definable Keys with Disk Storage Et Display 20 Contact closure facilities with EDL storage On- Screen Help Instructional System Mix Effects Et Crosspoint Assignment ( with Serial
Switcher) Edit List Memory ( 1400 Edit Lines) Advanced List Management:
Backtrac Edit List Clean- Up Match Sort Find- It Block Moves Text Editing Comment Display
·Sync Roll with EDL listing ·Auto Assembly ( Sequential, checkerboard Et Animation,
Continuous Roll) ·Auto- Trim Et Auto- Tag ·Multiple Source Effects ( All Sources in EDL)
·Assignable Record ·Split Audiol / Audio2/Video Edit ·Auto Sync Point ·Variable Pre- and Post- Roll Times ·SMPTE Time Code or Control Track ·Auto Reaction Trim ·Scratch Pad ·Programmable Switcher Delayed Effects ·Automatic Color Frame Adjustment ·Enrollment for one person in ESPRIT Maintenance Class ·Installation, Basic Training Et Acceptance
ESPRIT (3VTRs Controlled) Additional VTR Interface
ESPRIT Update from VANGUARD Level 6 ESPRIT Update from VANGUARD Level 4 ESPRIT Update from ST- 3
Price $54,000.00
3000.00 7500.00 12,000.00 19,000.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 103
p arunicionic AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
COLOR PRODUCTION SYSTEMS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348 7000
WJ-5500B
e lb · ati
*
41 0 0
ei-
WJ-5600 Color Special Effects Generator
· Two built-in mixing amplifiers allow three- channel mixing · 8-channel inputs · Three black- burst outputs
· Mixing in Fade-in. Fade-out and dissolve modes · Switch-over in Normal; Normal- Reverse; and Reverse
· Wipe waveforms in three stages: Soft, Sharp, & Color Border · Switchover by self-collating non- locking button during the vertical interval · A built-in positioner circuit
· Two color generators for the Matte Key & Border Wipe, and for Downstream Keying & Background
· Color generators adjusted independently for Hue, Saturation & Luminance
· The Matte Key, has aNEGA/POSI selection switch · Downstream Keyer has abuilt-in edge On Off switch · Color matte key and RGB chroma -key are independent
· Chroma -key creates key signals in full hue, & controls key delay levels · Downstream key signals capable of color/monochrome switch- over · Input signals in both the VBS composite & VB non-composite modes. VBS
genlock is also possible
· AC or 12V DC power operation available
WJ -5600
$5750.00
WJ-5500B Deluxe Color Special Effects Generator
· Vertical interval switching of 8program inputs, 1auxiliary input for VTR, 1
super input, and 1external key input ( monochrome) · Downstream mixing of up to three cameras, including super
· Nine wipe patterns with soft/sharp edges; normal, normal- reverse, and reverse wipe modes; wipe positioner
· Wipe key, internal key, external key · Built-in EIA RS- 170A sync generator ( HD, VD, Sync, BL, BFP, SC and
Black Burst outputs) plus genlock capability · Genlock circuitry for non- synchronous video signal mixing · Subcarner phase and horizontal phase adjustments for genlock
· Color bar generator with subcarner phase control
· Black burst ( Program Output only) 3outputs · Can mix composite and non-composite video inputs · Effect, preview and two program outputs
· " cur pushbutton transfers program and preview busses
· 2- Step illuminated, non- locking pushbuttons: light dimly when pressed to indicate selected preview inputs: light brightly when pressed to indicate selected program inputs
· Illuminated lock release buttons light up when pressed to show function selected
· Supplies intercom power to eight cameras and level adjustable · Supplies tally light on/off switching to all ten inputs · BNC connectors
· Audio amplifier for intercom with level control
WJ-5500B
$3950.00
WJ-4600C
WJ-4600C Color Special Effects Generator
·DC operation for EFP use ·Vertical interval switching of 6program inputs ·Fades, dissolves, and six wipe patterns · Super, external key (monochrome); internal key
·Built-in EIA RS- 170A sync generator ( HD, VD, Sync, BL, BFP, SC, and Black Burst outputs) plus genlock capability
·Genlock circuitry for non-synchronous video signal mixing
·Subcarrier phase and horizontal phase adjustments for genlock ·Black burst ( PROGRAM OUTPUT only) 3outputs ·Can mix composite and non- composite video inputs ·Effect, preview, and two program outputs
· " CUT" pushbutton transfers program and preview buses
·2- Step illuminated, non- locking pushbuttons: light dimly when pressed to indicate selected preview inputs: light brightly when pressed to indicate selected program inputs
·Illuminated lock- release buttons light up when pressed to show function selected
·Supplies intercom power to six cameras and level adjustable ·Supplies tally light on/off switching to all eight inputs ·BNC connectors
·Audio amplifier for intercom with level control
WJ-4600C WJ-CC46 Carrying Case for WJ -4600C
$ 2100.00 350.00
VP- 104
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PORTAC, INC.
108 Aero Camino Goleta, CA 93117
(805) 685-2960 968-2120
CHARACTER GENERATOR
KBD- 2
STANDARD FEATURES · 12 pages of memory. ·Selectable roll, crawl, flow or static dis-
play. Programmable by page. · Programmable order of page display. ·Insert/Delete editing mode. ·Any character may be programmed to
flash. · Full cursor control. · Direct page for urgent messages. · Internal battery to save memory. ·BNC and Fconnectors. ·Automatic line centering. · Lockout key to prevent unauthorized use.
·Memory is essentially " non-volatile" during power failure. Memory retention during power failure is chiefly limited to the shelf life of the internal battery which is in excess of one year.
OPTIONS ·Six programmable background colors. · Extra pages of memory up to 56 total. ·Time, day, and date display. · " Heading" showing fixed message and
time. · Superimpose on external VTR or video
signal. · Dual outputs for editing. · External audio cassette storage for increa-
sed memory or power failure back-up.
PRICING
KBD- 2
Keyboard Character Generator. With 12 pages o' memory; each page 8 lines of 32
characters. With Indefinite Internal Battery.
$3175.00
OPTIONS:
Automatic Audio Changeover. Feeds " background" audio with internally genera-
ted video background for messages-- switches over to VTR audio when VTR video
is used. ( Only available with " -- X" option).
250.00
Provides for pre-programming each page to one of six background colors ( red, green, blue, orange, neutral). Message characters appear in white or black. 430.00
Dual output for editing. Provides output signals on two connectors-- one, for local
"edit" use shows editing data during set-up. The main output shows a test bar
pattern during editing.
230.00
Spanish Font. Special keytops with accents.
450.00
"Heading" option. Shows fixed message plus time, day and date above normal
display.
550.00
Two Line Heading without time, day and date.
260.00
"--P"
Permits Pre-programming Order of page display by time and day.
820.00
External audio cassette recorder storage to provioe extended memory capability.
845.00
Provides for addition of one page to show time, day and date. This page may be
inserted in the display sequence to show time between pages.
365.00
Superimposes an external video ( VTR Isignal witi auto changeover to internal sync
generator if external signal fails or is turned off. ¡ Specify - X1 to superimpose char-
acters on external video; - X2 to blank characters when external video is used; - X3
will blank heading I - Hoption] only when video is used).
375.00
"-- X /X . " Switches between X · and X 2 options. ( Requires -- Xoption.)
"-24"
Added storage options. Increase display sto-age capability to 24
or 56 pages.
25.00
370.00 1280.00
NOTE: Any number of options may be added to the basic KBD- 2.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 105
PORTAC, INC.
108 Aero Camino Goleta, CA 93117 (805) 685-2960 968-2120
MESSAGE GENERATOR
KBD-2000 Keyboard Message Generator
·Up to 50 message pages ·Fixed two-line heading with time and date display ·Six color backgrounds ·Can be pre-programmed for the entire week with each day com-
pletely independent ·U.L. listed
A new approch to atotal TV display system for hotels, hospitals, apartment complexes -- any place where MAW or other distribution systems are required to display information, advertising or video programming.
The microprocessor controlled keyboard contains timing pages for each day of the week and the schedules for each day can be displayed on an edit monitor so that it is very simple to revise a
schedule. Program outputs can be fed to dedicated monitors at strategic locations: lobby, restaurant, convention center, etc., and then routed to an MATV system for distribution to guest or patient
1-00D1S.
The KBD-2000 when combined with the new VCU-4 video control unit, can control four pre- loaded video tape players. Movies or educational videotapes may be scheduled to be shown at various times throughout the day or week and will pre-empt any messages. At the end of the program, the system will automatically resume
message display and the tape player will rewind. The system gives
the user complete control over what is to be displayed between videotape programs and the time at which those programs are to be turned on, 24 hours a day. VCU-4s can be stacked for increased program capability and/or multiple channel operation.
KBD- 2000 KBD-2000S
Keyboard Character Generator/Controller .. $6425.00
With external audio cassette recorder
storage for extended memory
7270.00
Accessories for KBD-2000
ECU-4
Equipment control unit for pre- programmable A/ B
switching. Uses four dry-contact low current relays
PCU-4 RFSCU-4
that are connected to screw terminals
$1200.00
Power Control Unit for pre- programmable control of
AC power. Has four AC receptacles and four dry-
contact relays connected to screw terminals . .1440.00
RF signal control unit for pre- programmable RF signal
SCU-4
switching
1650.00
Signal control unit for pre- programmable video
VCU-4
switching. BNC connectors
1200.00
Video control unit for pre- programmable control of
four video players
1470.00
Remote Keyboard Installations:
MKU-2 RCG-2000
Multiple Keyboard Character Generator Remote Character Generator/Controller
for use with MKU-2
$ 625.00 6450.00
KBD- 2000 w/VCU-4
KBD-2000/VCU-4 TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS
SYSTEM A NORMAL OPERATION
A
VCR
AUDIO VCR
Fm RADIO
cAeur
CONTROa
AUDIO veDEO enOc.HAMCO,,rnot e
KBD- 2000
VCR
vIOE0
NI> RF terbutyym SYSTEM
deTeNA e V DEO
MONITOR
Block diagram A outlines the most commonly used configuration-- a PORTAC KBD 2000 50-page message generator provides text information and control commands to a VCU- 4video control unit which controls the
start- stop- rewind functions of four ( 4) videotape players by day and by time on a7- day pre- programmable basis for output to avideo or RF distribution system. In this example. an FM tuner provides background music during
text display When a VTR is switched on the video program will pre-empt the message and the background music, both of which will resume at the end of video: i.e. at the end of the program or. alternatively, should tape or machine failure occur.
SYSTEM B STACKED VCU-4s
E
VCR
VCR
G
VCR
UD01:1 o
CO-44
VCU 4
- 02
KBD- 2000
FM RADIO
vc
Aurno yelocy2 coN7ROL
e
ven
44/010 vIDED
corona
VCR
RF
4.01344.
Tcre. 545404
Block diagram Boutlines asystem where automated control of more than four ( 4) VTRs is desired for increased program capacity. Up to six VCU- 4video control units can be stacked in this manner to control up to twenty-four (24) video tape players. As in the case of the example in diagram A. messages are pre-empted by video and resume at loss of video
VP- 106
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
E7-MANTA
2440 South Progress Drive Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 974-0992 TVVX 910-925-5684
Q8 QUANTAFONT®
08 Quantafont is a broadcast teleproduction graphics and titling system, microprocessor driven, incorporating high technology circuitry and the simplicity of real time operation. Employing the highest quality components and user- oriented design considerations, Q8 provides a complete complement of video typography, graphics display, character generator effects and animation, text handling and composition functions.
Font- Flex ru Instant Sizing. Perhaps the most significant composition feature offered, Quantafont exclusive instant sizing allows for increasing or decreasing character height instantly from the keyboard. The operator can literally " create" fonts by merely selecting " height", then depressing either " up" ( arrow) or " down" ( arrow) until the desired font size is achieved. Sizing by row or page operates as arepeat- key function in single scan- line increments while keeping the original proportions of all characters on the row intact as well as maintaining individual character aspect ratio.
Extend/Condense. In addition to instant sizing which applies to
character height, Q8 also provides the ability to extend or condense character width by row or page in horizontal increments. This function
is easily accomplished by selecting either " row" or " page", then "cursor right" ( extend) or " cursor left" ( condense). The extended or condensed type face may be instantly returned to " normal" width.
SPECIFICATIONS
Performance:
Base Resolution:
26 nsec.
Resident Faces: All faces at 54 vertical sizes each ( from 10 to 64 lines high), plus instant condense/extend and right/left
italics for all faces.
Face Selection: By character, characters are proportional.
Size Selection: By row.
Maximum Character/ Logo Height:
Character Colors:
Background Selection:
Edging Styles:
Single character/logo, 96 lines; multiple character/ logo, 384 lines.
16 million colors; interactive color mix; menu of 16 colors definable per page, selectable by character.
16 million colors available, select by row from amenu of any 16 for each page; external video; or row- byrow split of internal color and external video.
Fine border, bold border, selectable by character; 4- quadrant drop shadow selectable by row.
Edge Color: Page Size:
16 million colors, selectable by row. 24 rows ( max.) x64 characters per row ( max.)
Pages Per Disk: 400
Roll Message Length:
Full disk.
Crawl Message
Length:
4000 characters.
Roll/Crawl Speeds:
9 plus stop. Roll to stop function provided.
Roll/Crawl
Blanking- to- blanking. Crawl displays can include
Display Area: static text area.
Page Access: Random or sequential.
Character Flash: By character. Flash speeds: frame rate selectable (1 to 256 system wide).
Special Display Graphic separators,
Elements:
Graphic blocks, geometrics, underline, accents.
TELEPRODUCTION TITLER
Clock Displays:
Tab Positions:
Editing Functions: (selected)
Optional Type- Face Library:
Real time clock ( hours; minutes; seconds), or count up/down event timer ( hours; minutes; seconds). 4 per page. Tab positions are stored with page on disk. Insert row or character; delete row or page; justify row or page left or right; move character left or right (including character tuck); erase row or page; move text to lower th,rd position.
20 face diskette.
Electrical: Color Standards: NTSC/RGB, or PAL/RGB
System Integration:
Internal RS170A sync generator with genlock provides keyboard selection between upstream or downstream matte ( with cut/dissolve)
Maximum Number Of Keyboards:
Inputs:
5, for single or dual channel system.
Blackburst ( to genlock circuit), 1.0 Vp-p (6." 75 ohms, looping. External background video, 1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms.
Outputs:
2, Program ( internal downstream keyer output), 1.0
Vp-p composite video e75 ohms. 1, Edit, 1.0 Vp-p composite video e 75 ohms. 1, Upstream Key
(character input), 1.0
plus Vp-p
medogneocshizreo, mfeorcoumspeosasitsewviitdcehoereke7y5
ohms. 1, Downstream Key ( similar to Upstream Key,
except for use with dual channel systems). 2, CG
(characters plus internal color background for use as
switcher input, 1.0 Vp-p composite video e 75
ohms. RGB ( non- composite, 0.7 V) and sync ( 4.0
Vp-p) outputs included on all units.
Data I/O Port: Disk Unit: Power:
RS- 232 Two, double- density, 8" flexible disk drives.
110 VAC, 60Hz, or 220 VAC, 50Hz ( nominal); 130 watts.
Mechanical: Dimensions:
Keyboard: 3-3/4"H x21-3/8"W x 10-1/2"D (95 x540 x265mm) Chassis: 7"H ( 4 rack units) x 19"W x 17"D (180 x480 x430mm) Disk unit: 7"H ( 4 rack units) x 19"W x 17"D (180 x480 x430mm)
Note: as supplied, chassis with disk units are suitable for rack mount or tabletop installation.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 107
I1JAN
2440 South Progress Drive Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 974-0992 TVVX 910-925-5684
TELEPRODUCTION TITLERS
Microgen
MG- 200 Single Disk
$4995.00
MG- 200 Dual Disk
5695.00
MG-202/SD Table top, self contained chassis with both Serif and
Sans Serif faces, Single 3-1/2" Disk Drive built-in
$5295.00
MG-202/DD Same as above but with dual 3-1/2" Disk Drives built-in
$5995.00
MICROGEN Te MG -200
MicrogenTM MG- 200 is the new addition to the Microgen product line, incorporating Quanta's exclusive instant sizing plus built-in 3-1/2"
disk drives providing 400 pages of memory per disk. The MG-200 assures the same reliability, high technology circuit design and easy,
real-time composition and editing common to all Quanta products.
SPECIFICATIONS Performance: Horizontal
Resolution: 55 nsec. at 24 characters per row.
Character Sets:
1face style standard, small and large caps, 8 sizes
from 40 characters per row to 12 characters per row, sizes selectable by row. Vertical sizes from 48 to 16 scan lines high. Second face style optional.
Character Edge: Full surround border, black or white with on/off control.
Color:
256 colors for colorizing characters by row and
colorizing backgrounds by row ( available simultaneously); maximum 28 colors per page.
Editing Functions:
Cursor up, down, right, left, home; line feed; return; key repeat; erase row, page; center row, page; justify row or page -- right or left; move up, down; insert/delete character, word, row; variable size graphic separators; variable size graphic blocks;
scan line pair adjustment of top leading, bottom
leading or both ( row tuck); caps lock; 8columnar tab settings per page; color palette selection of RGB colors.
Memory:
Single 3-1/2" disk, 400 pages; Dual 3-1/2" disk, 800 pages. Maximum 40 characters per row, 13 rows per page.
Battery:
System has NiCad battery backup.
Display Functions:
Dynamic Functions:
Flash by character, recall page by number, recall next page, prior page; matte characters in/out of Program output row by row or page; sequential or
random page sequencing; real time clock displayable any size, color or location on the page.
Automatic or real-time sequencing of any combination of pages; dwell time, 0.25-99 sec., selectable by page; roll, 260 rows max.; crawl, 260 rows max., position on any row, any size/color and mix with static text as required; roll/crawl at 9 speeds plus pause; all dynamic displays can be displayed one time or continuously.
Electrical: Inputs:
1external video in, looping.
Outputs:
2 Program; 1Edit; 1Key.
Power:
Data I/O Port: Mechanical: Dimensions:
Voltage, 105-135 or 210-270 AC ( PC program card selectable); frequency, 48-70Hz; 45 watts. RS-232 ( optional).
17-1/2"W x4-5/8"H x 17-1/2"D
Environmental: Ambient
Temperature: 40 -- 120°F ( 4 -- 50 °C)
MICROGENTM MG -100B
The Microgen TM MG- 100B standard features have made it the best value in low cost television production titlers. Quality character display, color, real-time editing and optional dual channel are just some of the reasons thousands of Microgens are creating titles in almost every conceivable television application.
SPECIFICATIONS Performance: Horizontal
Resolution: 80 nsec. at 32 characters per row.
Character Sets: Set 1, 24-characters/row; set 2, 32-characters/row; both sets 24 lines high; selectable by row.
Character Edge: Full surround border with on/off control.
Color:
256 colors for colorizing characters by row ( with external input); or colorizing backgrounds by row (stand-alone).
Editing Functions:
Cursor up, down, right, left, home; line feed; return; repeat; erase row, page, memory; center row, page,
memory; justify row left, right; move row up, down; insert/delete character, word, row; insert graphic separator.
Memory:
600 row RAM, maximum of 32 characters/row; operable as 50 pages of 12 rows or 200 pages of 3 rows positionable at any raster location.
Battery:
System has NiCad battery backup.
Display Functions:
Dynamic Functions:
Electrical: Inputs:
Flash by character; recall page by number; recall next page, prior page; matte characters in/out of Program output. Auto sequencing of any combination of pages; dwell time, 1-99 sec., selectable by page. Roll, 600 rows max. Crawl, 600 rows max, position on any row, mix with static text as required. Roll/crawl at 9 speeds plus pause. All dynamic displays can be repeated continuously.
For each channel: 1external video in, looping.
Outputs: Power:
Data I/O Port: Mechanical: Dimensions:
For each channel: 1, Program; 1, Edit; 1, Key. Voltage, 105-135 or 210-270 AC ( switch selectable); frequency, 48-70Hz; 50 watts. RS-232 ( optional).
15-3/4"W x4-1/4"H x14-3/4"D (400 x108x 375mm)
Shipping:
24 lbs. ( 10.9 kg)
Environmental: Ambient
Temperature: 40 -- 120°F ( 4 -- 50°C)
Microgen MG- 100B Single Channel
MG- 100B Dual Channel
$2995.00 3695.00
VP- 108
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
:ZUANTA
2440 South Progress Drive
Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 974-0992 TWX 910-925-5684
TELEPRODUCTION TITLERS
QUANTAFONT® QCG-300
TELEPRODUCTION TITLING GENERATOR
FEATURES ·Instant sizing -- 8to 64 scan line heights plus incremental extend/
condense for both resident face styles-- keyboard accessed ·512 colors-- easy RGB palette selection of background Er char-
acter colors ·True proportional spacing-- upper and lower case, two faces ·Edge selection-- full surround border, 8 colors row selectable per
page ·Easy edit-- real time composition and editing capability-- Quanta's
exclusive text editing package ·Roll- 260 rows, 9 speeds plus pause, edit in roll compose, roll to
fixed title ·Crawl- 260 rows, 9speeds plus pause, edit in crawl compose ·Automatic page sequencing-- random or sequential, date/time
generator for real time sequences-- dwell time selectable 1/4 to 99 seconds per page ·Manual page sequencing-- random or sequential, forward or reverse, 0 second dwell time ·Built-in 3-1/2" Disk Drive- 400 pages-- second drive optional ·Built-in full terminal complement -- sync/genlock RS170, NTSC or PAL- 1Encoder full studio timing ·Graphic blocks/graphic separators-- variable size and color · Real time clock and date generator · Full battery back-up ·RS-232 Data I/O Port-- optional
The Quantafontw QCG-300 is areal time professional teleproduction titling system for use in broadcast or non- broadcast applications.
Fully self-contained, the QCG-300 provides for either stand-alone operation or may be integrated into a full television production studio. The proportionally spaced type face styles provide over 40 resident fonts per face style instantly on-line with Quanta's exclusive instant sizing. Ease of operation, real time functions and Quantafont® dependability make the QCG-300 a versatile, multi-feature low-cost character generator.
SPECIFICATIONS
PERFORMANCE Horizontal Resolution: Resident Type Faces:
Color:
Character Edge:
Editing Functions:
55 nanoseconds at 24 characters per row"
2face styles standard-- Quarnberg 300 ( sans serif) and Journal Bold ( serif), both faces proportionally spaced with upper and lower case. 40 sizes per face with 8to 64 scan line heights plus widths of normal, condensed and extended 512 colors for colorizing characters by row or page and backgrounds by row or page. Maximum 34 colors per page ( 13 each characters and backgrounds, 8each edges - available simultaneously) Full surround border, 8colors per page selected by row. Seethrough characters through edge selection/background selection
Cursor up, down, right, left, home; line feed; return; key repeat; erase row, page; center row, page; justify row or page -- right or left; move up, down; insert/delete character, word, row; variable size graphic separators; variable size graphic blocks; scan line pair adjustment of top or bottom leading, or both ( row tuck); caps lock; 4 columnar tab settings per page; color palette selection of RGB colors
Memory:
Single 3-1/2" disk; 400 pages ( maximum 40 characters per row, 13 rows per page). Second disk available ( optional)
Display Functions:
Dynamic Functions:
Flash by character; recall page by number; recall next page, prior page; matte characters in/out of Program output; sequential or random page sequencing; real time clock and date generator displayable any size, color or location on page
Automatic or real time sequencing of any combination of pages; dwell time, 1/4-99 sec., selectaole by page. Roll 260 rows max; crawl 260 rows max; position on any row, any size/ color and mix with static text as required. Roll/crawl at 9 speeds plus stop with programmed speec changes imbedded in message or manua keyboard adjustment. All dynamic displays may be one time or continuous
ELECTRICAL
Battery Back- Up: System has NiCad battery for RAM and real-time clock.
Automatic program restoration including dynamic displays
after power failure
Video
Standards:
Built-in RS170 Sync Generator with Genlock. Built-in NTSC or
PAL- 1encoder. Subcarrier phase and horizontal phase adjust-
ment accessible from rear panel. Upstream or downstream
operation. Chromalock plus regeneration of sync for proper
genlock to non- time base corrected signals
Inputs:
1composite video in, looping
Outputs:
2Program, 1V P- Pcomposite at 75 ohms
1Edit, 1V P- Pcompcsite at 75 ohms
1Key, 1V P- Pcomposite monochrome at 75 ohms
Data I/O Ports: RS- 232 ( optional)
ELECTRICAL
Power Requirements:
105 110210-270 VAC. 48/70 Hz
MECHANICAL Dimensions:
Color:
17-1/2" wide x4-5/8" high x17-1/2" deep Dark brown and almond
QCG-300/SD
QCG-300/DD DD- 300 RS- 232/300
Table- Top, Self- Contained Chassis with 2 Faces ( Serif and
Sans Serif), Upper Et Lower Case, Proportional Spacing,
Single 3-1 ,2" Disk Dnve Built- In
$7,295.00
As above but with Second 3-1 2" Disk Drive Built- In 7,995.00
OPTIONS Second 3-1/2" Disk Drive for QCG-300 Units Customer
Installed RS- 232 Data I/O Port for QCG-300 Units Factory
Installed
800.00 500.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 109
=UANTA
2440 South Progress Drive Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 974-0992 TWX 910-925-5684
QUANTAFONT® QCG-400 TELEPRODUCTION GRAPHICS AND TITLING GENERATOR
FEATURES ·7resident type faces -- 56 fonts on-line ·30 topical graphics display symbols ·Instant sizing -- true proportional spacing ·128 colors -- each page is palette assignable ·Built-in 3-1/2" high density disk drive ( 400 pages) -- second drive
optional ·Built-in full terminal complement -- sync/genlock and NTSC or
PAL- Iencoder-- full studio timing adjustments standard ·224- row RAM with battery back-up -- dynamic displays and
automatic sequencing ·Patented NANOLOGTM character smooth Et fill refinement-- high
resolution average rise times ·LED front- panel operator prompting ·RS-232 data I/O port option
The Quantafont® QCG-400 Teleproduction Graphics Et Titling Generator is designed for real-time, easy operation in awide variety of titling applications.
Incorporating the Easy Edit and quick, versatile composition features which have made Quanta the preferred standard of mid- range character generators world-wide, the QCG-400 is a modern, lowprofile, ultra- portable self-contained unit.
SPECIFICATIONS:
Performance:
Effective Start Point Resolution 20 nsec with patented Nanolog v" character refinement
Resident Faces
Graphic Symbols
7faces at 6vertical sizes each ( from 8to 64 lines high) Face # 1Helvetica Medium, proportional upper and lower case
Face #2 Bolt Bold, caps non- proportional, lower case proportional
Face #3 Serifa, proportional upper and lower case Face #4 Cooper Black, proportional upper and lower case Face #5 Helvetica Medium Italic, proportional upper and lower
case Face #6 Grotesque 9, proportional upper and lower case Face # 7 Upper Case: 30 selected symbols
Lower Case: Helvetica Bold, caps, proportional Weather, sports, transportation, medical, communications, miscellaneous
Face Selection
By character, maximum of two faces can be mixed on a row. All 7faces may be used on apage
Character Color Select any of 16 pre-defined palettes of 8colors each. Palette is stored with page. Character color by word
Background Selection
Select either of 2 pre- defined palettes of 8colors each or external video. Palette is stored with page. Background color by row
Edge Styles
Selectable by row: Fine border, bold border, 4- quadrant drop shadow positionable
Edge Luminance Eight levels black to white, stored with page
Page Size
16 rows ( max.) 32 characters on arow available with Grotesque 9
System Parameters
Roll Message Length Crawl Message Length Roll Speed
Stored witliin a block: tabs, memory protect, roll/crawl pointers and speeds, shadow quadrants, status line size, user- defined center of screen, last selected face description, flash speed
224 rows
6,110 characters 9 plus pause ( start and re- start). Programmable roll to stop function provided
Crawl Speed Roll/Crawl Display Areas Character Flash Special Display Elements Clock Displays
Tab Positions
4 plus pause ( start and re- start)
Blanking to blanking. Crawl displays can include static text area By word. Flash speeds: 2 Graphic separators, graphic blocks, underline accents, special symbols ( optional on international language versions) Real time clock ( hours, minutes) or event timer ( minutes, seconds) 8 Columnar tabs with vertical tabbing
TELEPRODUCTION TITLERS
Editing Functions
Resident Memory Automatic Sequencing
Disk Memory Page Access
Disk Access Time
Insert row or character; delete row or character; center row or page; justify row or page left or right; row move left or right; reduce top leading; reduce intercharacter spacing ( selected characters); erase row or page; capture character attrbutes; Get, Save or Exchange row or page. Applicable editing functions operate rght of the cursor on arow or from the cursor to end of
page
224 Rows ( RAM) w·th battery back-up for non-volatile retention. Battery will last in excess of 24 hours
Ful 4- page resident memory 400 pages plus 2 blocks per disk Random or sequential
Page: average . 4sec: max. 1.2 sec. Block: average . 6sec. max. 1.5 sec.
Electrical:
Television Standards
Built-in RS- 170 sync generator with gen lock. E3Jilt-in NTSC or PAL ercoder. Gen lock/Color lock; built-in 360° subcarrier, horizon/a drive phase adjustable + 1.5 usec. on back panel
Stand- Alone
Operation
Yes
Input
One, external video in, looping
Edit Output
One, 1.0V p- pcomposite at 75 ohms
Program Output ""wo, 1.0V p-pcomposite at 75 ohms.
Key Output
One, character plus edge, 1.0V p- p composite at 75 ohms
Power: ( PC Card 117VAC, 60Hz, 150W max
Selectable)
220VAC, 50Hz, 150W max
Data I,0 Port
One, RS- 232 Optional
Mechanical:
Dimensions Ventilation Color
Self- Contained Chassis: 18"W x5"H x 17-1/2"D Filtered, forced- air cooled Dark brown and almond
laCG-400/SD
(1CG-400/DD DD- 400 RS- 232/400
Table- Top, Self- Contained Chassis with 7Resident Faces,
30 Graphic Symbols, Upper Er Lower Case, Proportional
Spacing, Single 3-1/2" Disk Drive Built- In
$8,995.00
As above out with Second 3-1/2' Disk Drive Built- In. 9,695.00
OPTIONS Second 3-1/2" Disk Drive for GICG-400 Units Customer Installed
800.00
RS-232 Data I/O Port for 03CG-400 Units Factory Installed
500.00
VP- 110
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
zà..T..UA ,Ifflr NITA
2440 South Progress Drive
Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 974-0992 TWX 910-925-5684
TELEPRODUCTION TITLERS
QUANTAFONT° QCG-500 PROFESSIONAL
TELEPRODUCTION GRAPHICS AND TITLING SYSTEM
FEATURES ·High resolution -- 29 nanoseconds · Font Flex' instant sizing, instant extend condense, instant
left/right italics ·512 color palette · Fine, bold or 4- Quadrant Positionable Drop Shadow · Easy Edit ·Auto- Sequencing ·Built- In sync/genlock
The Quantafont@ QCG-500 is afully disk loadable, broadcast quality character generator and graphics system designed for cost effective teleproduction titling and text efficiency.
A powerful software intensive system, the QCG-500 offers real time speed and convenience. No slow, time consuming menu selections are required-- all functions are immediately accessible from the keyboard and happen as the operator commanas them.
A low profile remote keyboard accesses the rackmounted electronics with built-in 3-1/2" disk. The entire electronics chassis requires only 7" of vertical rack space. Big system featLres provide a degree of professional flexibility never before attainable in the QCG-500 price range. Disk compatibility with the Quantafont@ Q8 Teleproduction Graphics System also makes the QCG-500 an ideal remote unit or addition to an existing Q8 graphics production facility.
Graphics enhancement accessories provide for a full paint system and digital effects, all conveniently controlled from the QCG-500 tri level keyboard permitting interaction between text, paint or effects operations.
SPECIFICATIONS
Disk Loadable: Rack Mount: Number of Keyboards: Disk:
Pages per Disk: Power Requirements: Stand- Alone Operation: Encoder: Genlock/ Colorlock: Phasing:
Program, faces, pages Chassis includes electronics, single drive, power supply
One standard Single 3-1/2"
optional 600 max
double
density,
double
sided;
second
150 watt power supply; 110/220 VAC switchable
Yes Built-in, NTSC RS- 170 or PAL
Built-in, horizontal and subcarrier phase adjustments External, 360° subcarrier, horizontal drive 1.5 usec.
drive
System Integration:
Edit Output: Program Output: Key Output:
Sync Output: External Video Input: Options: Electronic Video Paint: Digital Video Effects: Camera Capture Digitizer:
Keyboard selectable upstream/downstream, or jumper selectable One, 1.0 V P- Pcomposite at 75 ohms Two, 1.0 V P- Pcomposite at 75 ohms One, character + edge or full page, 1.0 V P- Pcomposite at 75 ohms 4.0 V P- Pcomposite
One, looping 2nd 3-1/2" disk drive
Yes, addressed by QCG-500 keyboard
Yes, addressed by QCG-500 keyboard
Yes, addressed by OCG-500 keyboard
QCG-500/SD
QCG-500/ DD QCC-1 EVP-500
EVP-800
FDL 500 FS 500 GR 500 CF- 500 CL- 500
Single Channel, Disk Loadable, NTSC System, Including:
Chassis, Rack Mount, with Sync/Color Lock,
NTSC Encoder Keyboard, Remote, English System
Software ( License Required)
Single 3-1/2" High- Density Disk Drive
1Type Face Diskette- 2Faces
1Operating Manual
1Operator Training Diskette
Total System
$ 14,995.00
As above but with Dual 3-1/2" Disk Drives Built- In 15,695.00
OPTIONS Camera Capture Font/Logo Compose Accessory (PC Card Mounts in QCG-500 Electronics Chassis)
2,995.00
Electronic Video Paint Systems Paint System for Operation with QCG-500 Character Generator,
Including:
Micro- computer and Graphics Card Paint ISoftware ( License Required) Single 3-1/2" Disk Drive Built- In EVP-500 System I·equires operation with QCG-5001
14,950.00
Paint System for Operation with QCG-500 Character Generator, Including:
Microcomputer and Graphics Card Paint II Software ( License Required) Single 3-1/2" High- Density Disk Drive Built- In EVP-800 System (requires operation with QCG-5001
24,950.00
ACCESSORIES
20 Face Library Diskettes
$ 1,000.00
Single Face Style from List available
100.00
Graphics Face-- Geometric Shapes, Jumbo Numbers,
Symbols
200.00
Custom Face Style .
POR
Custom Logo Style
POR
(Minimum Charge $ 500.00)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 111
N TA
2440 South Progress Drive Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 974-0992 TVVX 910-925-5684
ELECTRONIC VIDEO PAINT SYSTEMS
GUANTAPAINT'm ELECTRONIC VIDEO PAINT SYSTEMS
FEATURES · 11 basic automatic drawing functions with individual enhance-
ments ·9 dynamic painting functions · 12 illustration aids to make creating graphics fast and easy ·Anti- alias and improve overall or selected display quality · Display/Illustration enhancements for creating superior graphics
Quanta's Electronic Video Paint systems provide the television graphics artist with multiple, full- function drawing, painting and illustration tools in an easy- to- use, high quality and compact configuration.
The system incorporates a powerful microcomputer with 3-1/2" floppy disk drive and may include a 53- megabyte fixed disk, a graphics tablet with push-button stylus, control keyboard and CRT (computer) monitor. An EVP system is a natural accessory to the QuantafontE 08 Broadcast Teleproduction Graphics and Titling System, or the new Quantafont QCG-500 Teleproduction Graphics and Titling System, or may be incorporated into studio facilities for providing backgrounds, enhanced digitized images, outstanding graphics with or without character generator text.
All painting, drawing and effects commands are accomplished from the graphics tablet so the artist rarely needs to refer to external equipment once a paint project is begun.
Execution of all commands is fast and simple by means of "touching" the appropriate area of the menu on the graphics tablet with the tip of the stylus. The menu may be displayed anywhere on
the screen and may be turned on or off as desired by the operator. A total palette of 16.7 million colors may be called upon to create individual page palettes of 256 colors each. Color spreads, washes, chromes, neons and other dynamic color displays including color table animations, may be created for use in any portion of the illustration.
EVP-500
EVP-505 EVP-550 EVP-800
Paint System for Operation with QCG-500 Character
Generator, Including:
Microcomputer and Graphics Card
Paint ISoftware ( License Required)
Single 3-1/2" Disk Drive Built- In
EVP-500 System ( requires operation with
QCG-500)
$14,950.00
Stand- Alone Paint System, Includes Microcomputer, Paint ISoftware ( License Required), CRT Computer
Monitor, Keyboard, Graphics Tablet Et Stylus, Sync/ Genlock / Encoder, Single 3-1/2" Disk Drive $16,805.00
Paint System as above but with 53- Megabyte Fixed
Disk, Second 3-1/2" High- Density Disk Drive Built- In
and Digitizer ( Camera Capture) 256 Levels
24,995.00
Paint System for Operation with QCG-500 Character
Generator, Including:
Microcomputer and Graphics Card
Paint II Software ( License Required)
Single 3-1/2" High- Density Disk Drive Built- In
EVP-800 System ( requires operation with QCG-500
Character Generator)
24,950.00
EVP-805 EVP-850
Stand-Abne Paint System, Includes Microcomputer,
Paint II Software ( License Required), CRT Computer
Monitor, Keyboarc, Graphics Tablet Et Stylus, Sync/
Genlock / Encoder, Single 3-1/2" High- Density Disk Drive
and 53- Megabyte Fixed Disk Built- In
30,800.00
Paint System as above but with Second 3-1/2"
High- Density Disk Drive Built- In and Digitizer ( Camera
Capture) 256 Levels
34,995.00
OPTIONS
Computer Monitor
Keyboard 3-1/2" Disk Drive 53- Megabyte Fixed Disk Digitizer fCamera Capture) 256 Levels
Graphics Tablet Et Stylus Sync / Genlock / Encoder
300.00
395.00 700.00 3,995.00 3,495.00
850.00 310.00
VP- 112
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ROSS VIDEO LIMITED
500 John St. P.O. Box 220 Iroquois, Ontario, Canada KOE 1KO (613) 652-4886 Telex 05-811579
VIDEO PRODUCTION SWITCHER
RVS-210 Video Production Switcher
With a combination of production power, built-in memory, serial interface and Ross reliability, the 210 is the best small switcher value you'll find.
Three independent auto transition units, three color generators, complete memory facility and the Ross Multi- Level Effects system means that you can create complex production effects, and get into and out of them without batting an eye. And the RVS-210 is available with the Ross analog key border generator for high quality title keys.
Combine all this with serial interface, the Ross analog key border generator and apowerful pattern generator with mask and positioner and you have the kind of production power that usually costs several times the price.
The RVS-210 can be mounted on adesk, in aconsole or in astandard rack- frame. The electronics package needs just 8 inches of rack space.
STANDARD FEATURES
MULTI- LEVEL EFFECTS SYSTEM: ·Three bus Multi- Level Effects ( MLE) system permits manipulation
of foregrounds without ever locking up the switcher ·Transition preview system enables you to see every effect or wipe
before you take it, even with the switcher on the air · Program/Preset buses permit simple flip/flop operation using the
Cut button. Transition controls include cut button, wipe or dissolve using fader handle or one of the three auto transition units, programmable from 0to 999 frames · Key bus permits source selection for chroma keys, video keys, and matte keys ·MLE keyer features video or matte fill, external or split screen key, optional RGB chroma key, key invert, key mask using pattern generator ·Twelve wipe patterns with modifiers: hard or soft edges, hard or soft bordered edges, pattern aspect ratio, pattern reverse, ratecontrolled pattern positioner ·Three independent matte generators for wipe borders, title borders and backgrounds ·Non- sync inhibit detects non- synchronous sources and prohibits awipe or dissolve and substitutes acut at the end of the transition. Non sync LEDs indicate selection of anon- synchronous source
DOWNSTREAM KEYER: Key input from key bus, an external source or acharacter generator; Key fill from external video, character generator or the independent DSK matte generator; Digital key border generator for black or white titles with all-round or drop shadow borders or matte filled outline; Key invert; Key mask using pattern positioner; Cut or dissolve titles in or out manually or with independent frame rate auto transition; Downstream keyer transition can be tied to the effects system.
BUILT-IN MEMORY: Storage and recall of twelve complete switcher set-ups including key levels, patterns, matte levels, transition information, etc.; In normal operation the MLE keyer and Downstream keyer " remember" key and softness levels, fill source, borders, etc. for each key source; Auto transition unit, matte/background generator, pattern positioner can store and recall current settings.
MASTER FADE- TO- BLACK: Independent frame rate auto transition for fade- to- black; Preview system shows next program output after fade-to- black is completed.
EDITOR INTERFACE: Standard general purpose interface to each of the three auto transitions or afourth line which permits selection of any one of the three.
OPTIONS: Analog Key Border Generator -- produces asmooth and quiet border without any tendency to jaggedness or break-up even on small characters or slightly inclined edges. Permits colorizing in the outline mode and reduces chroma crawl on colorized characters. Also offers drop shadow borders on self keys; RGB chroma key-- single RGB keyer, available as aplug-in circuit board ensuring simple field installation; Serial Interface-- serial port using RS 422 computer interface for external computer control; Rack mount adaptor permits installation in a standard 19 inch rack frame; Console mounting frame permits customized installation in desk top.
SPECIFICATIONS: Control panel measures 14" ( 35.5 cm) x17" ( 43 cm) x7" ( 17.75 cm) deep. Can be mounted on desk or in rack space using optional adaptors. Rack mounting requires 3 rack units and 22.25" ( 57cm) depth; Available in NTSC, PAL or PAL- M standards.
RVS-210 10 input production switcher, equipped with choice of
2meter or 10 meter control cable
$9850.00
OPTIONS: Spare components kit 30 meter cable Extender board set Extra manual Rack mount adaptor for control panel In- desk adaptor for control panel RGB chroma keyer Analog key border generator Twelve event memory system Serial interface adaptor
$ 100.00 150.00 325.00 100.00 100.00 150.00 750.00
2500.00 900.00 850.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 113
ROSS VIDEO LIMITED
500 John St. P.O. Box 220
Iroquois, Ontario, Canada KOE 1KO (61 3) 65 2-48 86 Telex 05-81 1579
PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
d, PATTERN SELECTOR
earn.A + noon
-030 iD
111 11°1'41 > 4 = all
MVO 14
TItf011
tin(
'APO
42,4 ,611:1".L8.7.1MNI
aS)
El 0 Ea
MVO V OW ·
Mir/
$AM
pitOut
Pattern Selector
A variety of patterns and effects can be created with the 18 basic
patterns ( Inner Pattern Group), Pattern Modulator, Horizontal and Vertical Multipliers, Joystick positioner and optional Rotary and Spin wipes.
The rotary selector has direct access to 18 patterns. Each can have colored and soft edge borders. A push-pull switch on the aspect ratio control knob is used to round the corners on the box wipe patterns.
RVS 524
Designed for any small studio, editing suite or mobile van, the 524 has a lot more production power than you would expect from a switcher this compact.
·Rotary Wipes: Nine standard rotary wipe patterns are available with colorized and soft borders
·Spin: A full excursion of the Fader spins some patterns 360 degrees and simultaneously reduces their size until they vanish.
·Spin Preset: the angular position of apattern is set manually ·Horizontal and Vertical Multipliers: These multiply the pattern a
number of times horizontally or vertically, or both ·Joystick: Can change the pattern multiplier factor or effectively
zoom in on the pattern in the top left corner
The Ross MLE system makes it possible to manipulate up to four video signals with just one fader handle. It permits changing the background picture either separately or in combination with the foreground and title sources.. .or dissolving or wiping behind a chroma key...all without locking up the switcher.
Most simple transitions are made between the PGM bus and the PST bus, using the familiar flip/flop mode or operation. The PGM bus is always the on-air bus. When the PST source is transferred to the on- air bus at the end of a transition, the former PGM source is automatically transferred to the PST bus. The foreground source is selected on the Fbus and the processing mode is selected in the foreground group of MLE controls. Mode skeelyecatnidonmsaitntcelukdeey.RGB and encoded chroma key, split screen, PST
The MLE title keyer is acomplete Downstream Keyer with a4input source selector.. the 5th bus of the switcher.
ROSS MLE Patented Transition Preview System Ross Video was the first to introduce this unique operating feature. Now, complicated transitions that include up to four sources can be previewed and adjusted with the effects amplifier on-air...for example, the transition effect of a bordered wipe with color and softness, or awipe limit can be previewed exactly as it will occur. When Transition P/V is selected, the P/V monitor automatically shows the current on-air scene. After previewing the transition effect, switching off Transition P/V automatically returns the monitor to the next scene...regardless at which limit the fader is set.
Fade- To- Black A master fade-to- black is provided from all synchronous sources by pre-setting the Fade button in the transition group and moving the fader handle.
Dimensions:
One rack frame only 7inches high ( 4RU's) houses all electronics and optional equipment, plus two aux buses. An additional frame is required to accommodate six more aux buses. The switcher panel width is 22 inches ( 12 inputs) or 28 inches ( 20 inputs) and 16.65 inches deep.
RVS 524 Series Switchers
Model 524B-12 Model 524B-20
Options:
Video Production Switcher, 12 Inputs . .$23,483.00 Video Production Switcher, 20 Inputs . . .25,417.00
Extra control cable for basic switcher, per ft . .8.40
Rotary and Spin Wipe Patterns Encoded Chroma Keyer Ultra Key RGB Chroma Keyer
RGB Follow Switcher for 4cameras and 1Ultra Key Single RGB Chroma Keyer 2RGB Chroma Keyers with Follow Switcher Video Output Sync and Burst Processor Digital Key Border Generator on Title Keyer
Clamped Character Generator Video Input to Title Keyer Auto Transitions
Digital Effects Interface for Quantel DPE5000/5001 Digital Effects Interface for NEC Digital Effects Interface for Vital Squeezoom
$2,012.00 2379.00
3,780.00 1,652.00
770.00 1652.00 1273.00
661.00
340.00 1,230.00 1,458.00 1,458.00 1,458.00
Videotape Editor Options:
Editor Interface for CMX-340 Editor Interface for Edge
Editor Interface for Datatron ST5 Editor Interface for Vanguard
Editor Interface for Fernseh Mach- 1 Editor Interface for United Media Commander Editor Interface for Sony BVE-3000 Editor Interface for Sony BVE-5000 Editor Interface for Video Media 26000 Editor Interface for Video Media 26000
Editor Interface for CVC Lightfinger
$ 1,458.00 1,458.00
1458.00 1458.00
1,458.00 1,458.00 1900.00 1,900.00 1900.00 1,900.00
1,900.00
VP- 114
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ROSS VIDEO LIMITED
500 John St. P.O. Box 220 Iroquois, Ontario, CN KOE 1K0 (613) 652-4886 Telex 05-811579
PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
RVS 514- Series Video Production Switchers
The new RVS-514 is designed for any small studio, edit suite or van. And the RVS-514 has alot more power than you would expect from a switcher this compact with awide range of options to match almost any production requirement. The operational convenience of the PGM PST style of switcher takes on anew dimension with the added power of afully integrated MLE system. And it is easy to operate. Complex multilevel effects are immediately accessible via wipe, dissolve or cut transitions.
Fast moving shows can be handled with confidence because: You always see the next event on the preview monitor as you compose it. Logical controls allow any effect to be achieved easily. For example: Preset atitle by the push of asingle button, and move the fader to wipe it On- Air. All this has been made possible with the Ross patented Transition Preview System.
How The MLE Works
Most simple transitions are made between the PGM bus and the PST bus. The PGM bus is always the On- Air bus. When the PST source is transferred to the On- Air bus at the end of a transition, the PGM source is automatically transferred to the PST bus.
The Foreground source is selected on the Fbus and the processing mode is selected in the Foreground group of MLE controls. Mode selections include RGB and Encoded Chroma Keys, Non- Additive Mix, Split Screen, Spotlight, PST Key and Matt Key.
The MLE Title Keyer is acomplete Downstream Keyer with a4input source selector...the 5th bus of the switcher.
The Transition Control Group... Dissolve, Wipe and Take buttons are located adjacent to the Fader. Conveniently located HOLD buttons allow directing atransition to any or all levels. You can see at aglance which levels will change in the next transition.
Dimensions
One rack frame only 7 inches ( 4 RU's) also contains all optional accessories and 2 Aux buses. An additional frame is required to accommodate 6 more Aux buses. The switcher panel width is 28 inches ( 12 inputs) or 34 inches ( 20 inputs) and 18 inches deep.
The RVS-514 is available with 12 or 20 inputs, and in NTSC, PAL and PAL- M Standards.
RVS 514 Series Switchers
514A-12 Video Production Switcher ( 12 Inputs) 514A-20 Video Production Switcher ( 20 Inputs)
Extra Control Cable for Basic Switcher ( per ft.)
$28,208.00 30,357.00 840
Options:
Rotary and Spin Wipe Patterns
$2,012.00
Matrix Star and Pointer Wipe Patterns
1,925.00
Encoded Chroma Keyer
2,379.00
Ultra Key RGB Chroma Keyer
3,780.00
RGB Follow Switcher for 4cameras and 1Ultra Key
1,692.00
Single RGB Chroma Keyer 2RGB Chroma Keyers with Follow Switcher
770.00 1,652.00
4RGB Chroma Keyers with Follow Switcher
2,819.00
Follow Switcher for 4External Chroma Keyers
1,652.00
Program Fade
1,444.00
Fader for External Leitch Proc Amp
171.00
Clamped Character Generator Video Input to Title Keyer
340.00
Auto Transitions
1,230.00
Quad Split Screen
3,596.00
Extra Control Cable for Quad Split ( per ft.)
140
Digital Effects Interface for Quartel DPE5000 / 5001
1,458.00
Digital Effects Interface for NEC
1,458.00
Digital Effects Interface for Vital Squeezoom
1,458.00
Editor Interface for CMX-340
1458.00
Editor Interface for Edge
1,458.00
Editor Interface for Datatron ST5
1,458.00
Editor Interface for Vanguard
1,458.00
Editor Interface for Fernseh Mach- 1
1,458.00
Editor Interface for United Media Commander
1,458.00
Editor Interface for Sony BVE-3000 Editor Interface for Sony BVE-5000
1,900.00 1,900.00
Editor Interface for Video Media 26000
1,900.00
Editor Interface for CVC Lightfinger
1,900.00
Editor Interface for Ampex HPE
2,722.00
Editor Interface for Convergence Video ECS-103/104 Editor Interface for I.S C
2,722.00 2,722.00
Editor- controlled Audio Switcher
4,180.00
Editor- controlled Stereo Audio Switcher
7,387.00
Extra Control Cable for Audio Switcher ( per ft.) ENCORE ( free standing)
140 13,500.00
ENCORE with extension tub to match switcher tub ENCORE with cassette storage
14,277.00 14,326.00
ENCORE with cassette and extension tub
15,193.00
Scene Store
6318.00
Scene Store with extension tub to match switcher
7,096.00
Scene Store with cassette storage
7,144.00
Scene Store with cassette and tub
7,922.00
Extra Control Cable for ENCORE/Scene Store ( per ft.)
140
Aux Preview Bus ( 12 inputs + 3secondaries) # 1or #2
1,590.00
Aux Preview Bus ( 12 inputs + 3secondaries) #3thru #e . .1,590 . 00
Aux Aux
Preview Preview
Bus Bus
( 20 inputs ( 20 inputs
+ +
3secondaries) 3secondaries)
##31otrhr#u2#e .
.
2,018.00 2,018.00
Extra Control Cable for Aux Preview Bus ( ft.)
140
Expansion Frame
1,895.00
Extra Manual
97.00
Switcher price includes spares kit, special tools kit, 1system manual and 25 ft. control cables
Expansion Frame required if one or more options marked · are chosen
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 115
ROSS VIDEO LIMITED
500 John St. P.O. Box 220 Iroquois, Ontario, CN KOE 1K0 (613) 652-4886 Telex 05-811579
RVS 517 Series Switchers
With 12 or 20 inputs, the 517 is designed for any post- production, van or studio installation. A wide range of optional equipment enables the 517 to meet most production requirements. The operational convenience of the PGM/PST style of switcher takes on a new dimension with the added power of two fully integrated Multi- Level Effects ( MLE) systems. Logical controls allow any effect to be achieved easily with a minimum of confusion. For example: preset atitle by the push of only asingle button, then move the fader handle to put it on- air. Now complicated transitions that include up to four sources can be seen on the preview monitor and adjusted without disturbing the on- air output of the effects system. For example, a bordered wipe with color and softness or awipe limit can be previewed exactly as it will occur. After previewing awipe or dissolve, switching off TRANS P/V automatically returns the monitor to the next scene preview mode, regardless of which limit the fader is at. Most simple transitions are made between the PGM bus and the PST bus. At the end of atransition, the PST source selection is tranferred to the PGM bus and the PGM source is automatically transferred to the PST bus. The MLE title keyer is acomplete downstream keyer with afour- input source selector...the 4th bus of the Multi- Level Effects System. The Transition Control Group.. dissolve, wipe and take buttons are located adjacent to the fader handle. Conveniently located HOLD buttons permit directing atransition to any or all levels. The Preview (or next scene) monitor always shows what change will take place in the next transition. Adjusting key levels, effects, borders or colors is simplified and there are no surprises because the next scene is always in sight on the preview monitor.
When fully equipped, a wide variety of patterns and effects can be created with the 30 basic patterns, pattern modulation, horizontal and vertical multipliers, joystick positioner and optional rotary/spin wipes and matrix wipes. The RVS 517 is equipped with two pattern generators which are independently controlled by an assignable pushbutton pattern selector. The selector has 30 pattern keys, an assign key and ashift key. The most commonly used patterns may be selected directly. When the SHIFT key is turned on, 30 different patterns may be selected, thereby providing a total of 60 patterns from the selector panel. DIMENSIONS: Only 17-1/2 inches of rack space required for the 517 electronics package, including all options. Control panel 34 -- 38 inches wide and 26 inches high, depending on number of inputs.
PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
RVS 517 Series Switchers and Options
517A-12 Video Production Switcher ( 12 Inputs) 517A-20 Video Production Switcher ( 20 Inputs)
Extra Control Cable for Basic Switcher ( per ft.)
$49,700.00 53,480.00 12.72
Rotary and Spin Wipe Patterns on MLE-1 Rotary and Spin Wipe Patterns on MLE-2
$2,012.00 2 012.00
Matrix Star and Pointer Wipe Patterns on MLE-1 Matrix Star and Pointer Wipe Patterns on MLE-2
1,925.00 1925.00
Encoded Chroma Keyer
2 916.00
Ultra Key RGB Chroma Keyer on MLE-1
3,780.00
Ultra Key RGB Chroma Keyer on MLE-2
3,780.00
RGB Follow Switcher for 4cameras and MLE-1 Ultra Key 1,692.00
RGB Follow Switcher for 4cameras and MLE-2 Ultra Key RGB Follow Switcher for 4cameras and 2Ultra Keys
1,692.00 2,160.00
Single RGB Chroma Keyer
770.00
2RGB Chroma Keyers with 2- bus Follow Switcher
2,138.00
4RGB Chroma Keyers with 2- bus Follow Switcher 6RGB Chroma Keyers with 2- bus Follow Switcher .
3 305.00 5,443.00
8RGB Chroma Keyers with 2- bus Follow Switcher"
6,610.00
Follow Switcher for 4External Chroma Keyers
1 652.00
2- bus Follow Switcher for 4External Chroma Keyers
2,138.00
Program Fade Fader for External Leitch Proc Amp
1,444.00 171.00
Clamped Char. Gen. Video Input to MLE-1 Title Keyer
340.00
Clamped Char. Gen. Video Input to MLE-2 Title Keyer Auto Transitions
340.00 1 230.00
Quad Split Screen Extra Control Cable for Quad Split ( per ft.)
4 082.00 1 40
Digital Effects Interface for Quantel DPE5000/5001 Digital Effects Interface for NEC Digital Effects Interface for Vital Squeezoom
1,458.00 1,458.00 1,458.00
Editor Interface for CMX-340
1 458.00
Editor Interface for Edge Editor Interface for Datatron ST5
1,458.00 1458.00
Editor Interface for Vanguard
1,458.00
Editor Interface for Fernseh Mach- 1
1,458.00
Editor Interface for United Media Commander
1,458.00
Editor Interface for Sony BVE-3000 Editor Interface for Sony BVE-5000
1,900.00 1,900.00
Editor Interface for Video Media Z6000
1 900.00
Editor Interface for CVC Lightfinger
1,900.00
Editor Interface for Ampex HPE
2 722.00
Editor Interface for Convergence Video ECS-103 / 104 Editor Interface for I.S C
2,722.00 2 722.00
Editor- controlled Audio Switcher
4 180.00
Editor- controlled Stereo Audio Switcher
7 387.00
Extra Control Cable for Audio Switcher ( per ft.)
1 40
ENCORE ( free standing)
13,500.00
ENCORE with extension tub to match switcher tub ENCORE with cassette storage
14,277.00 14,326.00
ENCORE with cassette and extension tub
15,193.00
Scene Store
6 318.00
Scene Store with tub to match switcher Scene Store with Cassette Storage
7 096.00 7 144.00
Scene Store with Cassette and Tub
7 922.00
Extra Control Cable for ENCORE/Scene Store ( per ft.)
1 40
Aux Preview Bus ( 12 inputs + 3secondaries) # 1thru # 4
1,590.00
Aux Preview Bus ( 12 inputs + 3secondaries) # 5thru # 10* 1,590.00
Aux Preview Bus ( 20 inputs + 3secondaries) # 1thru # 4 . . 2,018.00
Aux Preview Bus ( 20 inputs + 3secondaries) # 5thru # 10" 2,018.00
Extra Control Cable for Aux Preview Bus ( per ft.)
140
Expansion Frame
1895.00
Extra Manual
97.00
Switcher price includes spares kit, special tools kit, 1system manual and 25 ft. control cables
Expansion frame required if one or more options marked · are chosen
VP- 116
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ROSS VIDEO LIMITED
500 John St. P.O. Box 220 Iroquois, Ontario, CN KOE 1K0 (613) 652-4886 Telex 05-811579
ROSS 500 MLE® Switchers
The clean panel layout is only 46 inches long.
Most simple transitions are made between the Background bus ( B) and the Background Preset bus ( B PST). The B bus is always the On- Air Bus. When the B PST source is transferred to the On- Air B Bus at the end of atransition, the B source is automatically transferred to the B PST bus.
The Foreground source is selected on the Fbus and the processing mode is selected in the Foreground group of MLE controls. Mode selections include RGB and Encoded Chroma Keys, Non- Additive Mix, Split Screen, Spotlight, PST Key and Matt Key.
Each MLE Title Keyer is acomplete Downstream Keyer with 4input sources. Three inputs can be wired from primary crosspoints...and tally is supplied.
The Transition Control Group...Dissolve, Wipe and Take buttons are located adjacent to the Fader. HOLD buttons, conveniently located
in the control group for each MLE level, allow directing atransition to any or all levels. You can see at aglance which levels will change in the next transition.
504A-16 Video Production Switcher ( 16 Inputs) 504A-20 Video Production Switcher ( 20 Inputs)
Extra Control Cable for Basic Switcher ( per ft.) 505A-16 Video Production Switcher ( 16 Inputs)
505A-20 Video Production Switcher ( 20 Inputs)
$35,406.00 37,061.00
8 40 39,275.00 41,346.00
PRODUCTION SWITCHERS/ ACCESSORIES
e eitat
Mai
g # e . · .41,
H
a
et"
·
C ·Ca · · 0.3831100:CC · 4
an · . EEn rii7- ·-;(
Model 508B is shown
Models are available with 16, 20 and 24 inputs, and in NTSC, PAL and PAL- M Standards.
505A-24 Video Production Switcher ( 24 Inputs)
$43,610.00
Extra Control Cable
for Basic Switcher ( per ft.)
840
508B-20 Video Production Switcher ( 20 Inputs)
67,513.00
508B-24 Video Production Switcher ( 24 Inputs)
71,121.00
Extra Control Cable
for Basic Switcher ( per ft.)
14.00
OUAD SPLII
le,
It Id
Scene Store: An optional accessory
Scene Store Memory System
The Ross Scene Store memory system provides asimple- to- operate means of recalling video production switcher set-up information. It is designed to improve accuracy, while reducing the pressure on the switcher operator during fast-moving programs.
Features:
·Operates to/from the next scene as shown on the MLE ( Multi Level Effects) preview monitor. The MLE program output is never disturbed
·Each of ten pages of memory stores 20 MLE set-ups ( scenes) and one sequence of scenes up to 32 long. Total storage is 200 scenes and 10 sequences of 32 scenes each
·Extensive error checking of the recalled scene for compatability with the on- air scene it will follow
·Stored scenes and sequences are protected against power loss for a period exceeding 1000 hours
·Built in diagnostics for simplified troubleshooting and verification of system operation
·Rack- mounted electronics only 1-3/4" high
Option:
·Cassette Tape Storage
»idiom
Quad Split: An optional accessory
Quad Split
Another Ross innovative optional accessory that adds tremendous production power and flexibility to asmall switcher. Features: ·Unique Quad Split does not tie up any switcher bus, and virtually
gives you 4extra buses for free ·Each quadrant has access to any 9predetermined primary inputs ·Includes diagonal, offset and conventional quad patterns ·Has its own border color generator ·Lets you preset the next source for each quadrant...then do a
vertical interval Take of the entire scene
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 117
SHINTRON COMPANY, INC.
144 Rogers Street Cambridge, MA 02142
(617) 491-8700 Telex 921497
PRODUCTION SWITCHERS
###
· ·
111101010111 1010.18
eramme
390 COMPONENT VIDEO SWITCHER AND EDITOR
The Model 390 " Component Video" Switcher is a triplicated pro-
duction/post production switcher with a built-in tandem ( 2 x Z80) microprocessor- controlled command system.
It has 6 inputs, each consisting of three component channels and internally generated black and VIO background which can be used as input. The bus system is A Et B, Preview and Program. Wipes ( 16 patterns), key and mix can be accomplished between A Bus and B Bus, while Preview and Program Buses have independent access to each input, black, color background and the A Et B result.
The color background is generated by the microprocessor which produces three suitable pseudo- component signals to simulate the
desired color background. The input accepts " currently available" standard component signals as specified by the manufacturers; however, acceptable signal format can be easily altered to comply
with whatever future standards may be developed. For example, M- format defines the existence of a sync pulse on both Y and I
signals, while O has none. BetaCam specifies only Y and Isignals,
while Q has none. BetaCam specifies only Y to have the sync pulse and none on both R-Y and B-Y. The Model 390 Component Switcher is capable of switching the input circuit to accept either format.
The built-in intelligence consisting of two Z-80 microprocessors communicates with the editor of the user's choice, decodes instructions, and selects operational switches. The on- board intelligence, in addition to the standard operational functions, is expandable to ac-
commodate the function to handle both SMPTE and in-house time codes. This feature is an industry first by Shintron.
Professional editors used in the post- production environment use
time codes extensively to communicate and mark edit points. An RS- 232 or RS-422 port becomes anecessity in these circumstances.
Also, the Model 390 is equipped with aspecial port to communicate with Convergence Editors. All decision points can be independently input to the switcher's intelligence on atime code basis. The switcher
reads time codes and acts upon instructions based on time codes.
This makes the Model 390 a unique combination of a triplicate
switcher and a universal editing machine interface. The system is equipped with plenty of on- board processing capability and its upgrading to being an editor is just a software step away.
390
$ 18,000.00
Optional Time Code Reader/Generator Board,
Part #390CR
S 2,460.00
Optional Downstream Keyer with dropshadow and border .. 6,000.00
Stratoslt
A 12 input, A, B, Preview/Program Bus Switcher with
downstream keyer, chromakeyer, Empress features.
The Stratosl is acombination of an Empress 2000 control
panel, 390 electronics, DK-3 downstream keyer, 390CR
time code board all joined together with Orange
bus
$36,000.00
StratosIlt A Model 390 with downstream keyer in component.
22,000.00
Stratos111/ A Model 390 with downstream keyer plus Model Empress
2000 with its own downstream keyer. Controlled from
one keyboard of Model 390
40,000.00
/Available in PAL: specify NTSC or EBU when ordering.
î. ·1imi -1-1---rn-ri:n._
1'1 -11Tj
· ;
·LELIZ-1W-
375 SUPERSWITCHER FOR NTSC, PAL Et PAL- M
FEATURES
Vertical Interval Switch: Momentary contact, high-grade incandescent lighted pushbutton switch with
VIS on all controls. Automatic Take System: Automatic transfer of preview set-up to
Re-entry:
Independent Pre-set Output:
Independent Preview
program, located before chromakey. Dissolve into Effects by ( A / B)- C bus structure.
Preset Bus has its own output.
Output:
Preview Bus has its own output to
10 Basic Wipe Patterns:
Soft Wipe Et Edge Wipe: Wipe Modulator Et
prevent chromakey effects. 10 basic wipes and 12 more modified wipes.
Both modes can be combined to all wipes.
Positioner:
Wipe Direction Control: Wipe Limit Controls: Encoded Chromakeyer:
Built-in audio generator modulates wipe patterns and positioner is joy- stick.
Normal/Normal-Reverse/Reverse. Wipe limiters are built-in.
Takes input from preview bus. No delay
compensation necessary. Easy color
Three Built-in Color Background Generators:
match by its own color generator. One for general use, one for chromakeyer, the third for downstream matte keyer.
Downstream Matte
Keyer:
Has its own background generator, and
dissolve to Program bus. Preview capability.
Fade- to- Black: Total Tally Logic:
Non- Sync Detector: Self- Test of Buses: Rugged Construction: Remote Control:
Downstream Fade- to- Black.
All tallies are atrue expression of signal states.
Non- sync is handled as " take". Unique feature of bus self- test. For ENG, EFP users. Separate Electronics.
Shintron Model 375-375P Chromatic Special Effects Generator is a
part of the Chromatic series Color Video Equipment. The Model
375-375P SEG is a complete color studio programming switcher
having the features of the most modern professional studio equipment together with acompact size and a highly human- engineered operational panel for teleproduction directors.
Model 375-375P Chromatic is designed to produce sophisticated special effects. The unit is intended for use as amain switcher in any advanced teleproduction situation, studio or mobile.
375
$ 14,000.00
VP- 118
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SHINTRON COMPANY, INC
144 Rogers Street Cambridge, MA 02142 (617) 491-8700 Telex 921497
SWITCH ERS
DK-3 DOWNSTREAM KEYER FOR COMPONENT VIDEO The Model DK-3 is astand-alone downstream keyer derived from the design incorporated in the Empress 2000 Encoded Switcher. The model OK-3is triplicated to accommodate
component signal.
Features ·Matte fill or video fill ·Four corner edges, drop shadow and border- around
letters ·Dissolve to Key + Program from Program ·It is compatible with Shintron's Orange Bus
DK-3
$3,450.00
anninantmlatilid.
12X SERIES
EMPRESS 2000
EMPRESS 2000 SWITCHIER Shintron offers the perfect solution for your production and post production needs, the Empress 2000 Switcher. Empress, which means Event Memory Programmable Effects Switching System is the most powerful of its type
on the market.
At the heart of the Empress 2000 is the Shintron Empress System itself, the most flexible editor interface and switching control system. The Empress System consists of two Z-80 microprocessors which accept digital data from the switcher and edit control systems to fully integrate edit suite operations. Auto transitional switching can be triggered by either internally or externally generated SMPTE Time Code, through general purpose relay contact closure, through RS-422 and direct plug compatibility with edit control
systems.
The Empress System interfaces with operators through a CRT display. Al switching functions are digitized so that precise settings can be achieved in editing and the Empress System can be taught to do tricks.
The Empress 2000 comes standard with 12 inputs, 10 for external video sources, colorizer and color black. The bus structure is A / B, Preview and Program, with 16 basic wipe patterns, soft and hard borders, RGB chromakeyer, master fade to black, and adownstream keyer equipped with drop
shadow.
The Empress 2000 is equipped with Orange Bus ( Organized Ancillary Grouped Equipment) digital control. Orange Bus allows the Empress 2000 to communicate with other Shintron products, the Model 270 Audio Follow Video Mixer/Routing switcher and the 12x series of routing switchers whicki allows for remote studio operations.
EMPRESS 2000
$8,670.00
12X ROUTING SWITCHER SERIES Shintron introduces a new family of digitally- controlled
routing switchers created specifically for the video professional -- the new " 12X" Series. The 12X Series has been designed for flexibility and expandability, and is suitable for situations where superb signal quality and cost-effective-
ness are chief considerations.
The " 12X" Series is based on twelve inputs of either composite video ( V), three- channel component video ( C), or three- channel audio ( A, for left channel, right channel, and
time code). Current models in the 12X Series are available with either one or four independently controlled outputs. Thus, the 12X-V4 is a twelve by 4 video switcher, the
12X- C4 has twelve inputs and four separate outputs for component video, and the 12X-A1 is a three channel,
twelve by one audio switcher.
At the heart of the 12X Series is Shintron's remarkable new "Orange" ( Organized Ancillary Grouped Equipment) digital control. Orange consists of astream of RS-422 digital data
which is understood by all of Shintron's new products. With the flexibility of Orange, any switching device in the 12X
Series can receive commands from any 12X Remote
Control Unit.
The " 12X" Routing Switcher Series has been superbly
engineered for the highest possible electrical performance and system transparency. The wide bandwidth of the 12X
Series is even suitable for High Definition TV ( HDTV).
Video switching in the 12X Series is done during the vertical interval, and with the 12X- C4 Component Video Routing Switcher, the same timing system developed for our successful Model 390 Component Video Switcher/ Editor
Interface assures that timing errors between channels are eliminated. The 12X- C4 is in fact the world's first routing
switcher originally designed to simultaneously control three separate video channels for either RGB, YIQ, or Y, R-Y, B-Y format signals, and represents one more way in which Shintron is maintaining its role as the primary supplier of " Com-
ponents for Component."
12X- C4 12X- V4 12X- A1
$6,990.00
4,910.00 POR
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 119
SHINTRON COMPANY, INC.
144 Rogers Street Cambridge, MA 02142 USA (617) 491-8700 Telex 921497
INTERMATRIX CONVERTER/ READER/GENERATOR
MC- 1
690 ET
MC- 1COMPONENT INTERMATRIX CONVERTER Shintron introduces another first in the growing field of
component video, the MC- 1 lntermatrix Converter. The MC- 1is an important link in our burgeoning line of " Components for Component," and is sure to become astandard
element of every component system.
The MC- 1is a stand-alone unit, one rack- unit high, that accepts as input signals in either RGB, YIQ, or Y, R-Y, B-Y format, and produces outputs in any of the other formats.
The absence of a highly reliable and superbly engineered unit to perform component matrix conversions has, until now, been a major stumbling block to designers of component video systems. With the MC- 1used as an integral part of editing and post- production set-ups, a degree of flexibility and variety of effects approaching that of standard NTSC systems is now possible, while taking advantage of the inherently higher quality offered by component video.
RGB graphic generators, processing equipment, and
cameras can now be incorporated into M- Format and Betacam suites, various types of component products can be simply interfaced, and relatively inexpensive RGB monitors can be used to monitor YIQ or Y, R-Y, B-Y signals with true component quality. The MC- 1is acompletely transparent addition to any state-of-the-art component system, and enables discerning producers to enjoy afuller range of available effects without sacrificing one bit of resolution or colorimetry.
Inputs are three BNC connectors for either VIO, RGB, Y,
R-Y, B-Y External Genlock Input. Outputs are six BNC connectors for two sets of the selected format. Bandwidth is
better than 20M Hz and Intermatrix Conversion Accuracy is better than 0.2%.
MC- 1
$ 2,000.00
690 ET ( Everything Time Code) READER/GENERATOR Shintron introduces the single time code product that does
it all...the remarkable Model 690 ET Reader/Generator. Reading and generating SMPTE or EBU Time Code is just the start. The ET comes equipped with every function ever
put in aTime Code product and several unique innovations. Independent readers and generators can handle time code
and user bits in either Vertical Interval Time Code ( VITC) or Longitudinal Time Code tracks. The 690 can actually be
used to translate between VITC and longitudinal Time Code. A sophisticated character generator will burn ahighquality numeric display onto any video source, and even generates aset-up manu onto avideo screen which makes access to all of its digitally- controlled functions available at the push of abutton. The Model 690 can jam- sync to other
Time Code Generators in either longitudinal or VITC mode, has ten internal memories which can be used to mark edit
points, and automatically adjusts itself to read in any framerate standard.
The performance of the Model 690 is no less amazing than
its range of features. In the longitudinal mode, the ET can read at speeds from 1/60 to 80 times normal play speed in either forward or reverse. One frame is automatically added when reading in the forward direction or is subtracted when reading in the reverse direction to keep the resulting display
in direct correspondence with the frame that is currently under the tape machine's playback head. The ET has adjustable hysterisis levels from - 15 to - 25dBm to allow the user to select the amount of noise rejection desired.
The ET comes equipped with Shintron's unique Orange (Organized Ancilliary Grouped Equipment) digital control. That means that it can be directly interfaced with any of our new switchers or routing systems to become part of a completely interconnected studio control system.
The most amazing feature of all is the ET's price. Compare the ET with any Time Code Product on the market for
features, performance, and price, and you will discover how truly remarkable the ET is.
690 ET
$4,500.00
VP- 120
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SKOTEL CORP.
1445 Provencher Brossard, Quebec CN J4W 1Z3 (514) 456-8990
TCR-80 SMPTE TIME CODE WIDE BAND READER
· LED display with contrast enhancing filter
· Low power consumption
·Small size
· Display of Time and User Data
· Reads code from less than 1/20X to greater than 40X play speed
· Digital decoding techniques · Retains and displays last code read when machine is stopped
·Self-contained Video Character Generator
·Low level head pre- amplifier available
·Automatic selection of record bias filter
· Display of Drop Frame mode
·Wide dynamic range AGC
· Error detection and bypass
· Dub output of reshaped LTC code input
TCR-80 SMPTE/EBU LTC Reader
$ 2,100.00
TCR-80V SMPTE/EBU LTC Et VITC Reader
2 700.00
TCR OPTIONS
011 Parallel Data Input-001/output-011
$450.00
012 Byte Serial Data Input-002/output-012 for Jam Slave .175.00
114 Video Character Inserter
850.00
214 Same as 114- Includes Remote Control with 2meter cable
017 Intelligent Interface
800.00
018 VITC Input
019 Regen ( Reshaped or reclocked) Code Output
250.00
PTC-100 PORTABLE TIME CODE GENERATOR/READER
·Generates and Reads Time Code ·Jam Sync Capability ·Video Standards: NTSC, PAL, PALM · Film Standards: 24, 25, 30 fps · User Bit Generation and Display ·Remote Control for Time Counter ·Standard Connectors ( type XLR, BNC...) · Large, Bright LED display ·Antiglare Contrast Enhancing Display Filter
· Identification of Color Field Sequence in Code ·Simple, Straight Forward Operation ·Time of Day Clock
The Skotel Portable Time Code Generator/Reader Model PTC-100 provides areliable source of time code for field production. A reader
with Jam Sync capability is included to enable several units to be synchronized together in the field.
PIC -100
Portable Time Code Generator/Reader with LED display and longi-
tudinal code output. Includes -- service manual, Ni -Cad battery
pack, battery charger Er spare battery pack to accept 4size AA cells.
PTC-100
$ 2,800.00
TIME CODE GENERATORS/ READERS/METRONOMES
· stOte · ·
Mal. TCR-80
···· ·
TCG-80N
SMPTE TIME CODE PRODUCTION GENERATOR
· LED display with contrast enhancing filter
·Thumbwheel switches to set Time and User Data
· Full User Data facilities
· Low Power
· Small size
· Full Frame or Drop Frame mode is front panel selectable
· High level output capable of feeding multiple machines
·Self-contained Video Character Generator
·Unaffected by momentary power dropout
· Internal LTC Reader for Jam Slave of Time and/or User Bits
·Color Field Identification defined by Internal Measurement or Exter-
nal Field One Pulse
TCG-80N SMPTE LTC Generator
$2,690.00
TCG-80N/008 SMPTE VITC Er LTC Generator
3 590.00
TCG-80P EBU LTC Generator
2,880.00
TCG-80P/008 EBU VITC Er LTC Generator
3 780.00
TCG OPTIONS 001 Parallel Data Input-001/output-011 002 Byte Serial Data Input- 002/ output- 012 for Jam Slave
004 Video Character Insert 006 VITC Reader for Jam Slave 007 Intelligent Interface
008 VITC Output
$450.00 .175.00
850.00
550.00 800.00
tfle
te
le è gitSN PIC- 100
DM- 100 DIGITAL METRONOME
·Can be used for film and videotape productions ·Resolution to 1/100th of aframe makes metronome rate calcula-
tions easy · Headphone and line outputs ·Fits into an attache case ( 8" x6" x 1.75")
Modern editing methods, and production techniques such as
computer animation, animation using computer assisted editing, and
shooting directly on videotape, have created a demand for music
scores more accurately timed than in the past. This demand is easily
satisfied by the Skotel Digital Metronome.
DM- 100 Digital Metronome
$750.00
DM- 1000 DIGITAL METRONOME
Same as DM- 100 and with 1/' 000th of aframe resolution. DM- 1000 Digital Metronome $870.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 121
SONY.. Sony Drive
Park Ridge, NJ 07656
Sony Video Communications
(201) 930-1000
SPECIAL EFFECTS GENERATOR
SEG-2000A Special Effects Generator
The SEG-2000A is afully equipped, rack- mountable studio unit and it's also atotally self contained, lightweight EFP portable that can be operated on AC, DC or rechargeable battery packs. At less than 21 pounds, with its own optional custom fitted carrying case plus amatched companion case for a CCU and amonitor, SEG-2000A offers an unprecedented level of flexibility and versatility.
The SEG-2000A incorporates the most sophisticated Sony industrial video features and delivers ahigh level of operating and control flexibility. Six video inputs and four output buss lines from the core of a system which accommodates a wide selection of cameras and offers wide latitude in transition switching. These are coupled with controls designed to achieve special effects in professional style: Cut, mix, ext. key, downstream key and wipe with 6wipe patterns and soft, hard and border modes plus abuilt-in background color generator. Additional features, such as a built-in NTSC sync generator with Gen- lock capability, help assure high operating flexibility.
The outstanding performance of the SEG-2000 is based on the same engineering that's brought outstanding picture quality, color integrity and long-term reliability to all Sony video equipment.
FEATURES
· Built - in Sync Generator · Three-way Operation · SC and H Phase Adjustment · Four Output Buss Lines · Cut and Dissolve Between Inputs · Comprehensive Inputs/Outputs · Mixing, External Keying and Wipe Effects · Six Separate Wipe Patterns · Downstream Keyer and background color generator · Super- convenient Operation · Tally Intercom Circuit.
SPECIFICATIONS
· Power requirements'. AC 120V. 50 60 Hz, DC 10-24V ( Ext. DC), DC 12 24V with BP- 60 Battery pack ( 1or 2) · Power comsumption 37W ( AC). 30W ( DC) · Operating temperature. 0°C to 40°C ( 32°F to 140°F) · Weight · Approx. 9.5kg ( 20 lbs, 15 ozs.) · Dimensions: Approx. 482(W) x 168(H) x 266(D)mm ( 19x6 -,, x10'.:') · Color system: NTSC color · Switching system: Vertical blanking switcher
Effects
· MIX, Dissolve by special effects control lever and PGM/PST MIX lever · WIPE, 6wipe patterns ( selectable) · Wipe edge: The softness is continuously variable · Border line: Hue, chroma, luminance, width and amplitude are continuously variable · EXT KEY. Input signal: 0.7Vp-p (VB) or 1.0Vp-p (VBS), 75 Ohms, unbalanced, EXT KEY connector ( BNC). Slicer circuit is included · DOWNSTREAM KEYER. Gen- lock with PGM buss line signal, B&W CAMERA connector ( 6- pin) · Output signal: HD, VD 4Vp-p, 75 Ohms, unbalanced · Input signal: Video 0.7Vp-p, 75 Ohms, unbalanced · Shadow: Wide and narrow (selectable) · BACKGROUND COLOR, Chroma: 0-650mVp-p ( variable according to the hue level) · Hue: 0 - 360° · Luminance ( Y): 0-450mV continuously variable.
Video Inputs
· VIDEO IN, 1-6 connectors ( BNCx6) 0.7 Vp-p (VB) or 1.0Vp-p (VBS), 75 Ohms, unbalanced, with 75 Ohm termination switch (The PHASE INDICATION switch does not function with the VB input signal.) · VIDEO IN AUX, connector ( BNCx1) 1Vp-p (VBS), 75 Ohms, unbalanced, with 75 OHM termination switch · GEN LOCK IN, connector ( BNCx1)1Vp-p (VBS) or 0.3V 0.3V ( black burst), 75 Ohms.
Video Outputs
· PGM OUT, 1-3 connectors ( BNCx3) · PST OUT, 1, 2connectors ( BNCx2) 1Vp-p (VBS), 75 Ohms, unbalanced · VIDEO OUT, connectors ( BNCx7) 1Vp-p ( VBS), 75 Ohms, unbalanced ( loop- through output of the corresponding VIDEO IN connector) · BLACK BURST OUT, 1-4 connectors (BNCx4) Sync. burst 0.3Vp-p, 75 Ohms, unbalanced · V DRIVE OUT, connector ( BNCx1) 4Vp-p, 75 Ohms, unbalanced · TALLY ' INTERCOM, 1-4 connectors ( DIN, 4- pin x4) · DG, DP: 1.5%, less than 1.5° ( APL 10-90%) · Crosstalk ( SC): Over - 40 dB · Supplied accessory: AC power cord.
Optional Accessories
· Sony CVM and PVM series Color Video Monitors · Sony DXC series
Color Video Cameras · Sony B&W Video Cameras · Sony CCDD. CCF &
UGC Connecting Cables · BP- 60 Rechargeable Battery Pack · LC- 2003
Carrying Case for camera controller and monitor · LC- 2006 Carrying Case
for SEG unit · BC- 20 Battery Charger.
$4990.00
VP- 122
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SONY®
Microcomputer Products
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
MICROCOMPUTER PRODUCTS
SMC-70 Microcomputer
SPECIFICATIONS: Main Unit
CPU
Processor: Z-80A'. Clock: 4.028 MHz
Memories Read/Write Memory: 64K Bytes fully accessible. Read Only Memory: 32K Bytes includes System Monitor, Sony BASIC and Automatic start up diagnostic. Video Memory: 32K Bytes Graphic RAM, 6K Bytes for character, attribute and programmable character generator.
Display Format: ( software selectable) 25 lines of 80 characters or 25 lines of 40 characters x2 pages. Character Set: ASCII character set ( includes upper and lower case). Software programmable fonts ( up to 256 total character types) 8x8 character cell size, 8colors. Graphic Resolution: 640x400 dots, 2 colors ( green or black and white); 640x200 dots, 4
colors; 320x200 dots, 16 colors; 160x100 dots, 16 colors, 4 pages. Border Area: 16 color display. Output Video Signals: Color- Analog RGB signals ( 0.714 Vp-p 75 Ohms, positive); Sync Signals ( 4Vp-p 75
Ohms, negative); System Control Signal ( TTL, 525/625 lines select); B/W- Composite Video Signal ( 1 Vp-p 75 Ohms, sync negative).
Horizontal Frequency: 15.73 kHz. Vertical Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz Selectable.
Keyboard Type: Standard QWERTY, full alphanumeric keyboard. Keys: Total 72 (individually sculpted and contoured by row) including 5 Programmable function keys ( up to 15 defined functions), Editing function keys (insert, delete and clear), 5Cursor position keys, Programmable HELP
key.
Standard Interfaces RS- 232C Interface. Printer Port ( Centronics type 8bit Parallel). RGB Video Out ( Color). Composite Video Out ( Monochrome). Cassette Tape Recorder Interface. Light Pen Interface. Numeric Key Pad Interface. 5Expansion I / 0 slots: ( 2inside, 3outside), Micro floppydisk drive ( internal); Expansion memory port ( internal); 3 expansion I/O
slots ( on tray). Expansion Unit Connector ( for expansion unit).
Additional Standard Features
Timer/ Calendar ( battery backed up). Earphone Jack. Audio Speaker.
Sound Level Switch. System Turnkey Switch. Tone Generator.
Dimensions: 3.5" x 14.5" x 17.5" ( HWD). Weight: 10.6 lbs. Power
Requirements: 115 VAC +/- 10 °A 60 Hz, 30 W. Operating
Temperature: 5° to 35° Centigrade.
$995.00
Optional Accessories
RS- 232C Interface Unit. IEE-488 Interface Unit. Video Signal Converter. Battery Backup Unit. Cache Disk Unit. Floppy Disk Control Unit: for 8" single sided, single density disk drive. VCR Control Unit. VideoDisc Superimpose Unit. Expansion Unit: Includes 5 additional I/O slots and power supply. 192K Bans( RAM Unit. 16- Bit Adaptor.
SMI-7011 ( AI Micro Floppydisk Unit
Console mounted, single drive, Single sided, double density, 280K
Bytes capacity ( formatted), 135 Tracks per inch, 70 Tracks, 500k bps
transfer rate. Media: Sony micro floppydisk ( 3.5- ). Size: 2.3" x14.5" x
6.3" ( 11WD). Weight: 3.5 lbs.
$ 565.00
Other Disk Storage Options
Sony Du& Micro Floppydisk Unit ( SMi-7012): Console mounted, dual
drives. Sony External Micro Floppydisk Unit. ( SM1-70131: Single drive
with power supply and cabinet ( requires SM1-7011 and SMI-70121.
Sony Micro Floppydisk Drive. ( SM1-7014): Single drive ( only for use
with SMI-7011 and SMI-7013). 8' High Dersity Floppy Disk Drive: 1.0
megabytes ( unformatted). Hard Disk System: 5.7 megabytes
(fornated).
SMI-7012 $ 1,100.00
SMI-7013
775.00
SMI-7014
500.00
KX 1211HG ( Z) Trinitron° Component TV
12" picture tube measured diagonal'y, Composite and RGB Color Monitor, High Resolution Display ( 25 lines of 80 characters), 525 and 625 line mode ( software selectable). Inputs: RGB Multi- input ( Analog and TTL), Composite Video Input, Audio Input ( 2 channels). Dimensions: 13.1" x 13.3" x 15.0" ( HWD). Weight: 28.9 lbs.
$895.00
CPD -120 Character Display
12" picture tube measured diagonally, Non- glare tube with long
persistence green phosphor, High resolution display ( 25 lines of 80 characters), 525 and 625 line mode ( software selectable), Built-in audio amplifier and speaker. Inputs: Co-rpos.te Video Input, Audio Input. Dimensions: 11.1" x 12.8" x 12.7" ( HWD). Weight: 17.9 lbs.
Other Display Op 280.0t 0 ion
$
Standarc color TV receiver: ( with Sony Video Signal Converter).
SMI -7020 Dot Matrix Printer
Printing Method: Impact, dot matrix, logic seeking printing,
bidirectional, incremental printing. Printing Quality: 7(H) x9(V) dots
Alpnanurneric, 8(H) x81V) dots characte- generator based graphic,
N(H) x8(V) dots, bit image graphics. Print Speed: 120 cps, 63 LPM ( 10
CPO. _ ine Spacing: 1/6", 1/8", N/144 ( N = 0-99). Print Density: 5, 6,
8.5, 10, 12, 17 char/inch. Interface: 8- bit Parallel. Dimensions: 4.9" x
15.0" x 11.2" ( HWD). Weight: 18.7 lbs.
$725.00
Other Printer Options Dot Matrix 136 Character Printer, Letter Quality Printer ( 40 CPS).
·Z- 80A Trademark of Zilog, Inc. Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 123
SONY,
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
MICROCOMPUTER TO VIDEO SUPERIMPOSER
SMI-7073 RGB SMI-7074 NTSC Superimposers
The Sony Superimposers are modules that plug into the
SMC-70G enabling character or graphic data generated on the Genlocker Tm Microcomputer to be superimposed on video signals. SMI-7073 Lock pulse input (for LDP-1000): TTL level, 4.7k Ohms, put-up
Superimpose and mix mode: Superimposed portion of
video signal: Same as above; Other portion of video signal: Dependent on external video signal
Sync out (for LDP-1000): 2V p-p ±- 0.5V p-p, 75 Ohm, BNC connector
SC out (for LDP- 1000): 2V p-p ±-0.5V p-p, 75 Ohm, BNC connector
Audio input level: --5dBm (Z in), 50k Ohms Audio output level: --6dBm (Z out), 600 Ohm Audio control:
Audio Out 0
1
2
3
4
Off Audio 1 Audio 1 Audio 1 Audio 2
Off Audio 1 Audio 1 Audio 1 Audio 2
SMI-7074
Video input: 1V p-p, 75 Ohm, BNC connector
Video output: Encoded video: 1V p-p ( 140 IRE units), 75 Ohm, BNC connector; Signal level: 100 IRE units Including set up); Sync Level: 40 IRE units; Burst level: 40 IRE units; Set up level: 7.5 IRE units
Connector
Power On
Power Off
Video In (1V p-p)
75 Ohm terminated
75 Ohm open
Video Out 1 Video Out 2
1V p-p, 75 Ohm 1V p-p, 75 Ohm
Connected to Video In
No signal
Superimpose and mix mode: Superimposed portion of
video signal: Same as above; Other portion of video signal: Dependent on external video signal
Lock pulse input (for LDP-1000): TTL level, 4.7k Ohms, pull-up
Volume adjustment: Inside of case: Video gain, sync gain, set-up level, chroma level, encoder gain
Outside of case: Chroma level with chroma on/off switch, subcarrier phase ( 360 degrees)
Sync out ( for LDP- 1000): 2V p-p - ±0.5V p-p, 75 Ohm, BNC connector
SC out (for LDP- 1000): 2V p-p ±-0.5V p-p, 75 Ohm, BNC connector
Audio input level: --5dBm ( Z in), 50k Ohms
Audio output level: --6dBm (Z out), 600 Ohm Audio control:
Audio Out 0
1
2
3
4
R
Off Audio 1 Audio 1 Audio 1 Audio 2
R
R
L
R
L
Off Audio 1 Audio 1 Audio 1 Audio 2
L
R
L
L
Display capability: 8colors* under following modes:
Display capability: 16 colors* under following modes:
Mode
Superimposed
Mix
Video
Video
640X400
No
No
640X200
No
No
320X200
Yes
Yes
160X100
Yes
Yes
*One fixed color is used as atransparent color in superimposed mode
Remote control jack (for audio recorder): Minijack
Mode
Encoded RGB
Superimposed
Video
Mix Video
640X400
Yes
No
No
640X200
Yes
No
No
320X200
Yes
Yes
Yes
160X100
Yes
Yes
Yes
*One fixed color is used as atransparent color in superimposed mode
RGB video input (from SMC-70): 25 pin connector
Remote control jack (for audio recorder): Minijack
RGB video output: 0.7V p-p, 75 Ohm, 37 pin connector SMC-70 interface: 50 pin connector
RGB video input (from SMC-70): 25 pin connector SMC-70 interface: 50 pin connector
Dimensions: 4.4" X14.6" X 1" (HWD) 110mm X365 mmX25mm (HWD)
Dimensions: 4.4" x15.3"X2.4" ( HWD) 110mm x382mm x6Omm (HWD)
Weight: 1.7 lbs. ( 065kg)
Weight: 3.3 lbs. ( 1.5kg)
SMI-7073 ( RGB) VP- 124
$500.00
SMI-7074 ( NTSC)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$ 950.00
SONY
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
GENLOCKER"
SMC-70G GENLOCKER"
Microcomputer with Ger lock Capaa lity
The SMC-70G is an incredibIy versatile, highly flexible, reachly expandable microcomputer with genlock that enables it to synchronize internally generated text and graphics with an external video signal. It can superimpose text and graphics directly onto any video signal using either the RGB or NTSC Superimposer module ( optional).
The SMC-70G is acost effective system for video production houses and industrial studios that currently rely on outside services to add text and graphics to their video productions.
Features
Video
·Built-in genlock capability ·Sync mode selectable by hardware or software ·Looping input for composite sync or video ·BNC connectors for composite input, reference output, RGB and
sync or B & W outputs simplify computer/video equipment connections ·RGB superimpose capability with optional plug-in module -- SMI7073 ·NTSC computer output and superimpose capability with optional plug-in module-- SMI-7074 ·Outstanding graphics capability in four modes: 640 x 400 dct, 1 color; 640 x200 dot, 4colors; 320 x200 dot, 16 colors; 160 x100, 16 colors ·Programmable character display ·Independent control of graphics and character displays from software ·Dual composite sync/video loop outputs ·Simultaneous RGB and B Et W computer outputs ·Wide range of available peripherals and software due to complete compatibility with SMC-70 Micro Computer
Microcomputer
·Compact, integrated CPU/keyboard unit designed to accept either single or dual, built-in, 3.5" Auto Shutter micro floppy disk drives
·Optional 16 bit adaptor plug-in via expansion unit connector ·Custom LSI circuitry for graphics display and timing generation ·16 resident I'0 ports for RGB video x2, composite monochrome
video x2, RS-232C Centronics-type parallel printer port, numeric keypad interface, Ight pen interface, tape cassette interface, expansion unit connector and 2internal and 4external I/O slots on aslideout tray ·Resident clock/calendar with battery backup
·Resident audio tone generator, speaker and volume control switch ·Three- mode turnkey switch: Off: System monitor signs on when
powered on; Disk: OS or application program automatically loaded from diskette when powered on; ROM: Software loaded from ROM pack ( contained ira plug-in expansion module) when powered on ·Sculpted ano contoured 72 key QWERTY type keyboard with 5function keys ( software definable up to 15), 4edit keys and 5cursor position keys ·Optional 17 key numeric keypad unit ·Optional light ben for non- keyboard data entry ·Direct memory access
$2400.00
Prices arc) Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 125
SONY
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
VIDEO GRAPHICS/IMAGES
SMI-7075 VIDEOTIZER FOR SONY MICROCOMPUTER SMC-70/70G
The Sony's VIDEOTIZER takes you to anew world of graphics and images with much easier and faster input capability than akeyboard and atablet.
It allows you to make a picture file for computer with the images from any NTSC composite video source, such as Video Camera, VTR, Video Disk and so on.
And more, enhances the usages of SMC-70/70G as an eminent presentation tool, and aspecial effect equipment for video post- production, with the mosaic effect capability.
The picture file made by VIDEOTIZER has compatibility with -Graphics Editor" and "Video Titler" in the PIC. file format.
FEATURES
· Field Still -- Can freeze the video picture with resolution of
448 x262 pixels*.
· Color Mode -- 2planes of 256 colors, 448 x262 pixels.
· B&W Mode -- 2planes of 256 gray scales or 16 planes of
user sliceable binary mode, 448 x262 pixels*.
·SMC-70 70G: 320 x 200 pixels.
· Write-in Speed -- 1/60 sec. ( 1field real timing)
· Built-in Genlock capability for any NTSC video input
· Mosaic Effect
· 1pixel can be enlarged up to 32 times for aspecial mosaic
effect
SMI-7075
$ 2900.00
Connections
Creating Graphics
Portable Col pr V.deo Gamer.. DXC.M3
Co or Mondor p,,,m 12700
SPECIFICATIONS ( Inputs/Outputs) Video Input: BNC Type, 1.0Vp-p 75 ohms, sync negative B&W Video Output: BNC Type, 1.0Vp-p 75 ohms, sync negative RGB Video Output: BNC Type, 0.7Vp-p 75 ohms
Composite Sync Output: BNC Type, 4.0Vp-p 75 ohms Keying Signal Output: BNC Type, 0.7Vp-p 75 ohms, without sync signal RGB Multi- Input: 25- pin Connector RGB Multi- Output: 25- pin Connector
000
VIDEOTIZER SMI-7075
Superimpose & Special Effects
Color Mon,tor PVM 12700
MIcrocornputer SMC 70,70G
VIDEO IN
THIOUGH OUI
50 PIN Bus
VIDEO O- T
VIDEO IN
ROO
VIDEOTIZER SMI.7075
COB MULTI OUT
INITSC Superimposer SM1-7074
REF OUT
COB MULTI OU
BOBS OUT ' CO AM,
EFIF-eveeep..,
.,, VIDEO OU T · ·····
.9
U-matic-- VIdeocas--sette V0-5850
GENLOOKER SMC-70G
VP- 126
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TECH ELECTRONICS, INC.
CONTROLLER
6000 Peachtree Rd. N.E. Atlanta, GA 30341 (404) 455-7626
PROGRAMMABLE
VIDEO
CONTROLLER
( PVC)
The PVC is compatible with most remote
controllable VTR's, and when combined with existing VTR's it provides acost effective playback system without the large initial expenditure necessary with other similar systems. The PVC will automatically control up to 8different VTR's following your preprogrammed schedule. The PVC will control and can intermix different industrial tape formats such as 3/4", Beta and VHS. The PVC provides maximum flexibility.
Best of all, the PVC gives you ease of programming. An entire day of programming can be entered in afew minutes. Up to 64 separate commands can be programmed into memory for daily operation of power, play, stop or rewind functions -- automatically switching video and audio sources at the prescribed time.
Battery backup prevents loss of memory during momentary power failures.
Because aPVC- based playback system includes several VTR's, the failure of any particular VTR eliminates only one input channel, and in no way affects the programming or playback of other VTR's.
OPTIONS
A special input is provided so that aCharacter Generator or Title Camera can be automatically switched on whenever the VTR's are not playing. In addition, an audio input is provided so that background music can be played over this special input.
For those occasions when it is necessary to insert anon-scheduled program or live camera input onto the system, aspecial auxiliary input is provided. Switching to the auxiliary input does not disturb the scheduled programming commands stored in memory. To activate the special auxiliary input only requires pressing two buttons on the PVC keyboard.
All VTR inputs can be switched up manually by pressing buttons on the keyboard. This does not disturb the scheduled programming commands stored in memory, and is particularly useful for previewing tape programs already loaded on the VTR's.
The PVC can be wired for two separate independent channel outputs utilizing four input positions per output channel. Programming and control of the two channels can be simultaneous.
An additional memory section can be added to the PVC, increasing its memory an additional 64 positions, to atotal of 128.
Both options are available either as factory installed or as afield update.
Programmable Video Controller Model PVC- 5
Expanded Memory Option
$4850.00 668.00
Control Cables: Sony or Panasonic - 12' Length . . JVC - 12' Length
$36.00 66.00
Video Cables
(Specify Sony, Panasonic or JVC)
12' Length
$14.00
Audio Cables 12' Length
$6.00
Power Strip - 6Receptacles
$35.00
NOTE: Longer Cables Available Upon Request
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 127
tk m e o
4 allbe
researcMhU le e
B116r3 King Road ur ington, Ontano, CN L7R 3X5
(41 6) 681-2450
TCR 660
TIME CODE GENERATOR/ READER
6010
TCG 550
TCG 550 Time Code Generator
FEATURES
· Low, low cost opens up many new applications · Rugged construction. It's built to live in the real world · Operates on four standards. Drop frame, 24, 25, and 30 frames per second · Color
framing. Operates with both NTSC and PAL color field sequences...
necessary for work requiring great precision such as animation ·Auto preset to 23:58:30:00. Accommodates 1-1/2 minute pre- roll
· ' Lock' Et ' Line' indicator lights. Lets you know if you're properly sync'd to video signal or powerline · Large, bright display. LED's
.6in/1.5cm high are readable at a glance · Microprocessor- design.
Fewer parts; lower operating temperature; greater reliability · Low power consumption. The TCG 550 draws only 4 watts from an AC
source and 3watts from 7-1/2-16 volt DC source.
$995.00
TCR 660 Time Code Reader
FEATURES
· Low cost opens up many new applications · Rugged construction for long, trouble free life · Operates on four standards. Drop frame, 24, 25 and 30 frames per second · Indicates color framed time code. Operates with both NTSC and PAL color field sequences . . .
necessary for work requiring great precision such as animation · Time
or user data display is selected from front panel · Front panel and remote Run/Hold lets you freeze a reading while the code count continues · Convenient operating range of . 1 to 10 times play
speed · Error light indicates absence of code · Large, bright display. LED's . 6 in/1.5 cm high are readable at a glance · Microprocessor-
design. Fewer parts; lower operating temperatures; greater
reliability · Low power consumption. Draws only 4 watts from AC
source and 3watts from 71 / 2 - 16 volt DC source.
$995.00
T5010 SMPTE/EBU Time Code Generator
FEATURES
·Generates SMPTE ( drop and non- drop frame), EBU and 24 frames per second time code · 4 field NTSC and 8 field PAL color framing sequences · Jam Sync and Continuous Jam operation featuring indicators for received time code error and received time code synchronous. All jam operations are held pending until received time
code errors clear · Keyboard entry of time and user bits · High resolution 16 x 16 dot character generator. Offers boxed or uniquely bordered characters, reverse character video, continuously variable character position, frames suppression switch and two isolated video outputs · Time and user data displayed together or separately in video · Parallel input/output of time/user data · Two isolated 600 Ohm time code outputs · Large, bright . 8" high display with intensity
adjustable to match your control room lighting · Microprocessor design and extensive use of NMOS large scale integrated circuits. Fewer parts and low operating temperature for greater reliability. 19" rack mount only 3.5" high · Versatility. Combination of function and size makes the T5010 ideal for VTR room and mobile applications.
$2695.00
T5010 T-7000
6010 High Speed Time Code Reader
FEATURES
· Full compatibility with any source of SMPTE/EBU time code · Drop frame indicates 25 or 30 frames per second modes
· Reads 1/10 to 80 times play speed. Accommodates precise edit choices · Wide input level range accepts signal from any
professional equipment source · Time or user data display is selectable from front panel. Provides time code for edit selection and
user data for further identification or control purposes · High resolution 16 x 16 dot character generator. Offers boxed or uniquely bordered characters, reverse character video, two isolated video outputs, continuously variable character position, and frames suppres-
sion switch · Regenerated 600 ohm + 11 dBm time code output ·Time and user data displayed together or separately in video · Remote and front panel Display Run/Hold control · Parallel output of time or user data · Indicates color framing in NTSC and PAL for
precision editing jobs, such as animation where the odd/even color framing sequence is significant · Forward/Reverse indicator. Tells you the direction in which the tape is being read · Error indicator
shows that you're not reading good code, and in the event of an
error, the display will freeze on the last valid reading · Decoding delay compensation · Large . 8" ( 2cm) high, bright LED display with intensity adjustable to match your control room lighting · Micro-
processor design. Fewer parts for greater reliability. 19" / 48.3cm rack mounting only 1-3/4" / 4.5cm high. The low operating temperature
means T6010 can be racked immediately above or below other equip-
ment · Versatility. Combination of size and function makes the
T6010 ideal for VTR room and mobile applications.
$2295.00
T-7000 Time Code Generator/Reader
FEATURES
·Self- powered, it weighs only ounces · This pocket calculator size
time code generator/reader operates up to 8 hours on its internal rechargeable power supply; another 18 to 30 hours from the reserve
supply in the book- size carrying case · It offers direct keyboard entry
of time and user bits; standard 600 ohm + 11 dBm output; jam- sync with built-in reader; color framing; all 3standards ( drop frame 30 and
25 frames per second) as well as remote start/stop capability · High
intensity display readable in direct sunlight without using the sun
shield
$1695.00
VP- 128
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
111:TINATITE
18607 Topham Street Reseda, CA 91335 (818) 345-5525 Telex 662453/Answer back Ultimatte RSDA
VIDEO MATTING
0 (1) rl
,CD Li 0
8
FLARE
"N
8
WHITE BAL
e
MATTE DENSITY
8
BLACK GLOSS
e C)
CLEAN-UP BAL
0
PRINT
\T.HRU,
0 0
MATTE CLEAN UP
.
HUE
NE`t/SIIATTE o Í« C)
By PE TFi0 VLAHOS
0
ULTIMATTE CORP RESEDA CALIFORNIA USA
CAN SOLVE YOUR VIDEO MATTING PROBLEMS FOR LIVE BROADCAST The Newsmatte has been designed to satisfy the needs of broadcasters desiring Emmy Award winning Ultimatte composites for their newscasts. Chromakey in newscasting has always been both desirable and undesirable. Desirable because image compositing allows for dynamic presentations and undesirable because of the distracting edge effects on the newscaster.
Newsmatte now permits image compositing without any edge effects, with every strand of hair reproduced. There is no blue edge or blue tinting, shadows are totally linear and quiet.
Newsmatte operates on the encoded signal and therefore does not require an encoder. It is connected in line between the camera and the switcher and delays the composite video 18 nanoseconds.
The output of the Newsmatte is either the direct unaltered camera video or processed video, whereby the blue backing and blue flair have been removed. Processed video is automatically selected when the chromakey button is depressed on the switcher.
The RGB inputs are used to generate the matte ( key) signal which is made available along with the processed
Operational Controls Flare -- normally set full- on for full suppression. White Balance -- Adjust color temp of FG grey scale. One time adjustment upon installation. Matte Density -- Sets foreground matte density. Adjustment may be needed when cool wardrobe colors are present. Black Gloss -- Used to stop background print-thru from blue reflections on shiny black objects. Typically set for black glossy hair. Clean- Up -- Allows elimination or reduction of shadows on background. One time adjustment used when shaded logos are present on blue backing.
foreground for subsequent mixing with the background scene within the switcher. Newsmatte also contains its own mixing amplifiers, and when the background video is connected directly, it can be used as astand-alone compositing device, without need of a switcher. Many switcher manufacturers have Newsmatte interfacing options available for their new switchers. There are several ways of connecting Newsmatte into existing switchers, depending upon customer requirements.
Live news broadcasting demands immediacy whereby human engineering is developed to an ultimate. Newsmatte comes as close to this ideal as possible with its one- knob "matte density" control. One more button for selecting "shadows" or " no shadows" and the operational controls are defined. Newsmatte departs from Ultimatte in both intended end user and principle of operation, while maintaining Ultimatte's flawless, undetectable compositing performance.
Bal -- Allows for fine adjustment of edge transitions when Clean-up is used. Print Thru -- Sets null for background multipliers. One time adjustment needed only when Newsmatte is being used as a stand alone device. Matte ( Switch 1) -- Composite image is selected when switch is lighted; direct FG camera is selected when switch light is off. Clean- Up ( Switch 2) -- Clean-up enabled when switch is lighted. Hue ( Switch 3) -- Selects blue or green backing color.
$4870.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP -129
ATTE
18607 Topham Street Reseda, CA 91335 (818) 345-5525 Telex 662453/Answer back Ultimatte RSDA
VIDEO MATTING
NEWSMIATTE-2 -a Professional Compositing Tool that is both easy to operate and easy to integrate into avideo system
PERFECT, UNDETECTABLE COMPOSITES Since Ultimatte Corporation introduced Newsmatte in early 1982, it has literally revolutionized the set design and format of news and weather programs throughout the world.
Unlike Chromakey, Newsmatte allows the foreground subject to be close to or even touching the blue backing. Sets can therefore be much smaller, less expensive.
Broadcasters have enjoyed the flexibility of a compositing device which gives them freedom to use transparent objects, smoke, fast moving objects, and other difficult- tocomposite items. Newsmatte picks up even the finest hair detail and there is never a " cut-out" look, again not available with chromakey-- even the new " soft edge" designs. Newsmatte contains its own mixing amplifiers, and when the background video is connected directly, it can be used as astand-alone compositing device, without need of aswitcher. Newsmatte has been designed to handle the immediacy of live broadcast, with its automated controls. Unlike chromakey, adjustment of iris and paint pots do not require a readjustment on the Newsmatte.
Newsmatte-2 has all these same advantages, plus Digital Memory, along with some other interesting developments to make it even more useful for the broadcast industry-- not only as a more versatile tool for news and weather, but allows the News Department and Production Department to share the benefits and costs.
Newsmatte-2 is introduced not as a replacement for the original, but as a medium priced compositing device
suitable for either live broadcast or simple production work. Newsmatte-2 has all the desired features of the Newsmatte, plus digital memory. For small or fairly simple productions, where, perhaps, the more expensive and versatile Ultimatte-4 could be an " overkill" Newsmatte-2 has the necessary features for a professional job.
Newsmatte's ability to handle simple production situations makes it an extremely useful product for corporate or industrial video departments or smaller production houses. At a comparatively small cost, it is possible to obtain professional results, not available from even the very best
and most expensive chromakey.
In the event aset is unevenly lit, say with hot spots at the top, the camera can zoom in on the area immediately surrounding the subject. Pressing the memory button locks
in the backing characteristics; the camera can then be pulled back and the background will be perfectly composited without the ill effects normally caused by hot spots.
Dissolves and Wipes: An output to a switcher is available
with continuous flare suppression of the foreground image.
It is then possible to dissolve or wipe from the Newsmatte
effect to the direct picture, while still maintaining the color
balance of the foreground subject. This feature gives the
foreground picture an appearance of better definition and
depth and no noticeable difference between acomposited
or non-composited image.
$7500.00
VP- 130
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
1111131111ATTE
VIDEO MATTING
18607 Topham Street Reseda, CA 91335 (818) 345-5525 Telex 662453'Answer back Ultimatte RSDA
FG MATTE --. ,-- BG MATTE.--B-- AC. KGRO. UN. D-- · -- FG
So·PICT
TO·ill
..,,
tIrIL
ILEv PIG
14 GAIN
BG
r. ,, . --..- LUM EXT KEY-. ·-· Coe -, e-- WINDOW--.
·'.
SIT ;;;IILJN
ALA GLOSS
.., TEST SIG
OEM )
i RIF Ct R
ANTI PAINT 1111111
(o
SI , : RIJN
AID ,
...:\
GRUA
."
ow.«
.1
' eta
' 1,4·00·0
,i, Gt./team', ")
e DC RIO
e TO GAIN
- * DIRECT , .: ARAT
, - .....,r -- IIG CLIP
LL,) - ,.,+ ',;»--.,...
_-,-_- -n ·i) ·0 CLEAN o
EAO(ESIR ........,
FG
0
II
GATE I
GQ TE 1.
e)
COW LINO
0 (, ) `.1.- ,
,.,,
0
C
0 0c
·
ULTIMATTE 4
n· If FRO VIANDS
,
·LIOR
.POWER
Of
ULTIMATTE(-4 FRONT PANEL
FOREGROUND DIRECT
BACKGROUND-ULTIMATTE-4
' :
FINAL COMPOSITE
ULTIMATTE' -4
FEATURES · Flawless Composites ·New Creative Opportunities · Finer Quality Control ·Unusual Production Features
Black logic -- compositing against black backing with variable level and density, for streak photography, titles, etc. Shadow control -- reproduce, darken, lighten or eliminate. Overshoot the backing-- using the built-in window/mask generator. Contrast control of foreground subject independent of background. Foreground fade-in/ out-- to extinction-- to black silhouette. Fill a silhouette with a second scene ( using two Ultimattes). Create halos in any color ( using two Ultimattes). Subject can walk completely around himself during a continuous take ( using two VTRs). Many other special effects are possible by creative use of the unique switching/mixing/ matting functions of the Ultimatte.
Production With live video camera in foreground and background. With live video camera in foreground-- with background scenes on tape.
Post Production-- Film Composites onto tape images previously photographed on film (foreground and background, 16 or 35mm). This is done during the film-to- tape transfer process. The quality of the matte is superior to any film matting system. Replaces film opticals for both blue screen composite photography and streak photography on black backings.
Post Production-- Tape By recording the matte output signal at the same time as the Ultimatte processed foreground, post production video composites of the highest quality become possible.
Now you can achieve superior blue screen video matting that can defy detection and will composite two images with no restrictions of any kind as to the nature of the subject matter.
Ultimatte is designed on a linear principle. It is not a keyer, and can thus solve problems Chroma -Key type systems cannot. It will reproduce ( unless purposely inhibited) all foreground information seen by the camera.
ULTIMATTE ® -5FRONT PANEL
ULTIMATTE -5
FEATURES
· Post Production-- Makes high quality composites from taped (analog component) originals
·Soft or hard-edge windows
·Reverse window. Allows shut-off of background scene within window area
·Digitally based remote control over asingle coax cable ·Can be controlled from 4 remote locations ·32K random access memory
·Accepts all inputs, RGB/YRGB/YR-Y B-Y/ YIQ ( YUVI/NTSC ·Automatic BG matte setting · Dynamic BG matte tracking through color changes from back
wall, through coving, to floor. IA Breakthrough)
· Matting logic for Blue, Green, White, and Black backings
· May be computer controlled through switchable interface
· RBG Black balance/RGB White balance. Permits matching of color tones in FG/BG blacks and whites
·Inserts Glow or title-- solid or t-ansparent ·Accepts external Matte ( key) signal
Ultimatte - 5
$ 25,000.00
Normally used with a blue screen, the Ultimatte can also composite against green or red backings.
Ultimatte is available with either local controls ( UM- 41 or a remote
control panel ( UM- 4R).
Ultimatte -4
$ 13,500.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 131
4075 Leaverton Court Anaheim, CA 92807 (714) 630-8020 TVVX 910-591-1669
VIDEO TAPE EDITOR Expandable and Up-Gradable to a Commander II, Eight Machine Editor.
EDITING SYSTEM
C.041 Pet4.
latell· MIMI/Mt
v ....0 Meth
Fea íáii1
re. Ant
C011.17.1
AURONIAT of; On 01.
List Management -- Includes Insert, Delete, Change, Replace with and without Ripple, also Display 2, manual control of any parameters.
Edit List Memory -- For up to 250 events with manual entry of dissolves, wipe or keys when using asingle source.
Interfaces -- 2 or 3 Interfaces for either 1", 3/4" or 1/2" VCR.
Switcher Control -- To include crosspoint selection, dissolves and wipes up to 999 frames with partial effects in 10% increments. Keys, Pop, Fade, In, Out or Both.
User Definable Key -- Allows storage of up to 125 keystrokes. Simply depress the key again to repeat each and every keystroke stored in memory.
Assignable Record/Play -- Any machine in the system can be a recorder or player.
Multiple Recorders -- Record/Slave Operation, one or all machines on the system can be recorders.
Automatic Assembly -- Either sequential or checker- board.
Audio Switcher Control - Using the Model 425 for cuts or dissolve up to 999 frames.
Mark One/Mark All -- VTR assigned to the system in one stroke, can also be used to trim the Edit in, Edit out, or duration.
Fully Time Code and Control Track Capable -- Intermixing DF, NDF, SMPTE T/C or Control Track is perfectly acceptable.
Motion Control -- Rotary Control of Search Speeds with detents and variable rotation
without detent when in Jog Mode. Jog is available on all types of video and audio machines.
Slow Motion Control -- Manual Sb -Motion during the Ed tInterval to achieve variable speed effects.
Special Function Control -- Control of any external devices such as DVE, Aucio Cart Character Generator or any device which can be activated by a contact closure.
Color Frame -- All color frame parameters are checked for proper C- F relationship n NTSC-RS-170A or PAL 8- Field Sequence.
Cueing of VTR's -- Cue one or all machines to the cue point or to the Edit point automatically as des.red.
Edit Back Timing -- Operator selectable Edit durations, for Back Timing of Edits and quick Edit adjustmerts.
Animation -- Allows repeated Edit or previews to occur in durations of one frame to mary hours operator selectable.
Frame Bump A/V Sync -- Frame Bump, Audio/Video, on one or all machines in the system, with computer assistance in modifying the in times to ensure complete synchronization when recycled.
Back Timing -- Automatic Back Timing of Edits -- enter the outpoint and the desired duration. The Mini- Comm does the rest.
RS-232 Input/Output Port -- Output cf Memory Data or Edit list is via an RS- 232C Port. Device Optional.
Sync Roll -- All machines on the system can be used.
Single Machine Preview -- For BVB, VBV, or VVV either source or Recorder. Auto Tag or Manual Tag -- Allows freedom of mixing the operation as desired. Edit List Format -- The industry standard Edit list can be displayed, printed, paper tape p-nched or output to disc. Time code standards SMPTE/EBU 24, 25 and 30 FPS; Drop/Non-drop Frame.
Electrical Source Voltage: 115-220 VAC Source Frequency: 50-60 Hz. Single Phase Brownout Voltage: 30% of Source Volt-
age Power Consumption: 300 watts nominal Dimensions Electronic Chassis: 16.5"W x20"D x 10.5"H Keyboard:
Rear -- 28.0"W x9"D x3.6"H Front -- 19.5"W x9"D x 15"H Weight: Electronic Chassis -- 80 lbs. Keyboard: Rear -- 8 lbs.
Prices start at $9200.00
ACCESSORIES FURNISHED VTR Control Cables TC Cables Instruction/Maintenance Manual Detailed Electrical Drawing Parts List
VP- 132
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEOMEDIA, INC.
211 Weddell Drive Sunnyvale, CA 94089 (408) 745-1700
EAGLE I, II And III
EAGLE I
FEATURES · Ful. Transport Mode Feedback
·The Most Accurate System Available
· Distriouted Intelligence
·25C Event Memory
· Built-in Sync Generato·
· Built-in Black Burst Generator
· Animation
·Multiple Split Edits
·Auto- Tag
·Auto- Edit from Memory or the Eagle Disk Operating System
· ADR
·Printer Output
·Two Scurce Capable
· Fully Digital Speed Control
·Cruise Control
·Full Function " All" Button
· Search to any Register
·Trim + or - any Register
·Calculae Mode
· Furl Capstan Override Routines
·Tape Number Handing
· Sync Roll Capable
· Program Length Counter
· Micro-Loc Il and Control Track or SMPTE
·Single Defined Pushbuttons
·MuIt - Display
·Transition and Pattern Entry
·Software Selectable Pre- Roll and Post- Roll
· Fully Upgradable to the Eagle II or Eagle Ill
·Software Lockout of Assembly Edits
· Full Complement of Error Messages
·Can be used with the Eagle DOS Dual Disk Drive System
·Slide Feature
S7500.00
EDITING SYSTEMS
EAGLE II
All the features of the Eagle Ibut includes full list management
functions including: Insert Event, Delete Event, Move Event, Index,
Ripple, Auto- Clean and Slide.
$9,500.00
EAGLE III
A full A/B roll system including the switcher. Includes all the features
of the Eagle Iand II plus third TCP module, Z6006, Z6007, complete
switcher control, and Echo SE-3 computerized production switcher
with Videomedia editing interface.
$30,000.00
EAGLE EDITING OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
MICRO-LOC"2" Intelligent Micro-Loc reader generator.
(specify type VTR)
SM-3
Triple SMPTE/EBU readers ( for three
VTRs)
EA100
Single 5-1/4" mini- floppy disk file storage
and retrieval system. Includes one 5-1/4"
drive, mounting chassis and disk controller
card.
EA- DOS
Dual 5-1/4" mini- floppy disk operating
system. Includes two 5-1 / 4" drives, mount-
ing chassis, disk controller card, and disk
operating system software.
Z6004
Dual 8" floppy disk operating system. In-
cludes two 8" drives, rackmount power
supply and chassis, disk controller board
and operating software
VER 2.00 Enhanced operating software includes ex-
panded list management and software
assignable VTRs. Must have the Z6004
DOS for this option. Not available on the
Eagle I.
C1-TRAN Translator software to convert aVideomedia
edit list to CMX format. Includes error
tagging of all functions incapable of being
performed by a " CMX" type editor. This
option is available with the Z6004 only
EA101
CMX edit list translator to printer port only.
EPROM version
EA102
Non-volatile memory. Retains memory for
extended periods of time even when the
editor is not plugged in. No external bat-
teries or power supply backup is required.
Z6007
Contact closure and general purpose inter-
face. Includes audio and video monitor
switcher and software control; 5 separate
contact closures for use with external
devices. ( This unit is standard with the Eagle
Ill)
Z6008
Monitor switcher for use with any Eagle Ior
II to provide single monitor use for rehearsal
and shuttling
TCP-2
Complete set of hardware and software with
Z-80 microprocessor for parallel interface of
additional transport to the Eagle. ( specify
type transport).
TCP-3
Complete set of hardware and software for
serial interface of two additional transports
to the Eagle. ( specify type transports)
$ 750.00 2,800.00 1,995.00 5,000.00 7,500.00
1,500.00
1,000.00 1,500.00 1,000.00
900.00 450.00 2,500.00 5,000.00
Note: Maximum number of transports controlled -- 6serial or 4serial and 1parallel or 2serial and 2 parallel or 3 parallel.
EA-RM SP-EAG
Rack mount version option for any Eagle model
editor
$ 450.00
Spare parts for Eagle editing system
650.00
Upgrade or changeout charges
TCP-2 to TCP-2 (VTR Change) Includes software and cable swap.
$ 800.00
TCP-2 to TCP-3 (VTR Change) Includes software and cable swap.
1,400.00
Eagle to Magnum upgrade charge
POR
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VP- 133
VIDEOMEDIA, INC.
211 Weddell Drive Sunnyvale, CA 94089 1408) 745-1700
EDITING SYSTEM
CODELJ ODD OA · · II · · · 5 44
131:1000 OCID
· 4 le
le 11.
DODO
1:3D E3 -
ODD 3LIE CIA111
LI
3JUoED3
roam
Z-6000
FEATURES
· Distributed intelligence using standard S-100 bus ·Standard rackmount chassis ·Z80A - 8- bit microprocessor · Frame accurate, color framed w/SMPTE or Micro-Loc; Machine
dependent w/control track ·Dedicated; Full alpha- numeric capability w/ KR- 6000
·Serial printer/ Videomedia disk operating system
The Z-6000 Editing System is the latest in the family of postproduction products from Videomedia. It incorporates full distriouted intelligence for control of teleproduction devices, assuring maximum
system flexibility and precise system timing. Machines may be intermixed or changed easily as the user's requirements vary. SMPTE Time Code, Micro Loc and control track can be used together with complete accuracy. The Z-6000 may be economically installed in its simplest configuration as a single source, control track, on-line editing system, and then expanded, as the needs dictate, to an 8source editing system with full switcher control, Text Editing ( List Management) and a sophisticated Disc Operating System, which allows the editor to custom design the Z-6000 to his particular style of editing.
Z6000- A Z6000- B Z6000- C Z6000- D
Z6000- E
2 machine, 8 event, cuts only, printer out-
put, 2 TCP modules ( specify type trans-
ports)
$ 9,800.00
2 machine, 250 event, cuts only, printer
output, 2 TCP modules ( specify type trans-
ports) .
13,400.00
2 machine, 250 event, cuts only, list
management, printer output, 2 TCP mod-
ules ( specify transports).
16,250.00
3machine, A / B roll, 8event, printer output,
3 TCP modules ( specify type transports)
and switcher to be used ( order switcher
and/or software driver separate).
22,750.00
3machine, A / B roll, 250 event, list manage-
ment, printer output, 3 TCP modules (specify type transports) and switcher to be
used ( order switcher and/or software driver
separate).
30,500.00
Z6000 EDITING OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
MICRO-LOC"2" Intelligent Micro-Loc reader generator
(specify type VTR)
Z6001
Software based intelligent SMPTE EBU
time code reader. S-100 bus.
Z6004
Dual 8" floppy disk operating system. In-
cludes two 8" drives, rackmount power
supply and chassis, disk cortroller board
and operating software
S 750.00 1,000.00
7,500.00
VER 2.00 Enhanced disk operating system includes
expanded list management and software
assignable VTRs. Must have the Z6004 DOS
for this option. Avai able on the Z6000- C
and Emodels only.
C1-TRAN Translator software to convert aVideomedia
edit list to CMX format. Includes error
tagging of all functions incapable of being
performed by a " CMX" type editor.
Z6006
Software and hardware driver for switchers
capable of a computer interface i.e. CDL
CAP, Grass Valley EMEM, Echo SE- 3,
Crosspoint Latch, etc. Contact factory for
availability of other switcher interfaces.
Z6007
Contact closure and general purpose inter-
face. Includes audio and video monitor
switcher and software; control 5 separate
contact closures fo( use with external de-
vices. ( This unit is standard with the Z6000
D and E. It , snot available for the Z6000- A)
Z6008
Monitor switcher for use with any Z6000 A,
B or C to provide single monitor use for re-
hearsal and shuttling. Please note: This
unit is mandatory if type " C" transports are
to be used on aZ6000 A- C. This unit is not
required in either case with aZ6000 D or E. .
Z6010
1.0. expansion chassis will house up to 4
TCP modu es. The main computer chassis
will house an initial 3 TCP modules. ( Any
Z6000 can control J p to 8 source and 1
record trarsport). This unit is necessary
when adding more than 2sources.
Z6012
Hardware and software package to allow an
externa' computer to engage in two way
communications and control the Z6000
system. Use of the Z6012 does not interfere
with normal keyboard operating para-
TCP
meters.
MODULE- 1 Complete set of hardware and software with
Z-80 microprocessor 'or interface of any
transport to the Z6000 system. ( specify type
VTB-2Z SP- 6000 MAFV-1
transports). Card extender and logic probe.
Spare parts for Z6000 systems. 10 x 1 audio/follow/video vertical interval
switcher and 1.0. port for use with any
Z6000 A- C when expanding number of
source decks
1,500.00 1,000.00 3,950.00
900.00
450.00
2,450.00
2,495.00 2,750.00
150.00 800.00 1,900.00
VP- 134
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
flA1Ï? LIA D1._
JCL
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO & COMMERCIAL/INDUS-
TRIAL SOUND EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide --
1280 pages of Studio & Remote Audio Recording
Equipment & Systems for stage, concert, audito-
rium, arena, stadium, hall, church, industry,
business, commercial, school, hospital & hotel
sound reinforcement, background music, paging,
intercommunications, telephone & telecom-
munications systems & equipment.
$95.00
AUDIO-VISUAL & EDUCATIONAL/TRAINING COMPUTER EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide -- 1280 pages of projectors, screens, recorders, learning aids, carrels, stands, tables, lecterns & equipment for multi- image & sound. Computers, disk drives, furniture, graphics, magnetic media, modems, monitors, networks, paper/forms, printers, power supplies, terminals & software. $95.00
BROADCAST EQUIPMENT & SERVICES Buyers
Guide -- 1280 pages of Studio, Remote &
Location Equipment & Systems for television,
commercial & tape production, broadcast tele-
vision, radio, cable, pay & satellite TV, special
effects, animation & music video.
$95.00
COMPUTER EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide -- For
Professional, Scientific, Business, Industrial &
Commercial Applications. 1280 pages of micros,
minis, disk drives, furniture, graphics, digitizers,
plotters, boards, cables, cases, consultants, diag-
nostic & test keyboards, magnetic media, main-
tenance, modems, monitors, networks, paper/
forms, power/protection, printers, software,
supplies, tape drves, telecommunications,
terminals.
$95.00
'111111111118
SECURITY & CCTV EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide
-- For Industrial, Professional, Commercial & Busi-
ness Applications. 1280 pages of controls, annun-
ciators, power supplies, dialers, closed circuit TV,
wire, cable & equipment for remote monitoring,
space protection & central station.
$95.00
N
PROFESSIONAL PHOTOGRAPHY/MOTION PICTURE Buyers Guide -- Professionals in
Photography, Motion Picture, Multi- Image,
Audio- Visual, Film Production & Post Production
-- 1280 pages of studio, remote & location
equipment systems & supplies for Still, Cine, AV &
Film Production.
$95.00
JVC
JVC
INDUSTRIAL & PROFESSIONAL VIDEO EQUIP-
MENT Buyers Guide -- 1280 pages of cameras,
recorders, production & terminal equipment,
monitors, lighting, telecine, RF equipment, enclo-
sures, wire & cable.
$95.00
BILL DANIELS COMPANY, Inc.
9101 BOND · P 0 BOX 2056 SHAWNEE MISSION KANSAS 66201
la CALL TOLL FREE
1-800-255-6038
IN KANSAS 1-913-42.9900
INDEX
Abekas Video Systems, Inc Adams- Smith, Inc. Adda Corp. Ampex Corp.
A
VP- 2 VP-3-5 VP-6-8
VP- 9
Beaveronics, Inc. Border Generators Robert Bosch Corp
VP- 10, 11 VP-72 VP- 12
Central Dynamics Corp
VP- 13-21
Channelmatic
VP- 22
Character Generators
VP-39, 40, 43, 46, 52-57, 68, 82-87
91-94, 97, 100, 105, 106, 108, 109
Character & Graphics Generator
VP-7, 8, 11, 24-27, 99
107, 110, 111, 123-125
Chyron Corp
VP- 23-26
Cipher Digital, Inc
VP-27-29
Clock Systems
VP- 10, 22, 90
ClocksfTi mers
VP- 10, 48, 49, 89, 90
CMX Corp
VP-30-32
Colorizer
VP-82
Convergence Corp.
VP-33, 34
Crosspoint Latch Corp
VP-35-38
D
Datum, Inc.
VP- 39 40
E
Echolab, Inc Editor Controllers Editing Systems EECO, Inc
Encoders/Decoders
ESE Evertz Microsystems, Ltd.
VP-41 VP-31, 34 VP-30, 32, 33, 44, 47, 66, 67, 101-103, 132-134 VP-42-47
VP-69
VP-48-50 VP-51-54
For-A Corp. of America
VP- 55-58
G
Graphics Systems
VP-7, 8, 12, 25, 95, 99, 107, 110, 111, 123-126
The Grass Valley Group
VP-59-67
Gray Engineering Laboratories
VP-68, 69
H
Harris Corp
VP- 70
Knox Video Products
VP- 82 83
Laird Telemedia, Inc. Leitch Video of America, Inc.
VP- 84-88 VP- 89 90
3M Co. MCl/Quantel Microcomputer/Genlocker, Acc Micro-Script/Scriptovision, Inc Microtime, Inc.
Mycro-Tek, Inc.
VP-91-95 VP-96
VP-123-125 VP-97 VP-98
VP-99, 100
Paint Systems
VP- 11, 23, 24, 95, 112
California Paltex Corp.
VP- 101-103
Panasonic Industrial Co
VP- 104
Portac, Inc
VP-105, 106
Production Switchers, Acc
VP-2, 6, 9-21, 23, 35-38, 41, 59-65
70, 71, 74-81, 98, 104, 113-119, 122
Quanta Corp.
VP- 107-112
Ross Video Ltd
VP-113-117
Shintron Co., Inc. Skotel Corp. Sony Corp. of America
Special Effects Systems
VP- 118-120 VP- 121
VP- 122-126
VP-2, 6, 23, 70, 71, 80, 81, 96, 98, 104, 122
Tech Electronics, Inc
VP- 127
Telcom Research
VP- 128
Time Code Readers/Generators/Acc
VP-3-5, 27, 29, 40, 42, 43, 46
50-54, 57, 68, 120, 121, 128
Time Code Synchronizer/Controllers
VP-28, 45, 54, 96
Time Processors
VP-39, 58
Transport Control Products
VP-3-5
Ultimatte Corp. United Media Corp.
Utility Switchers
U
VP- 129-131 VP- 132
VP-21
Image Video, Ltd. Intergroup Video Systems, Inc
JVC Co. of America
VP-71, 72 VP- 73-79
VP-80, 81
Video Controllers
Video Corrector
Video Matting
Videomedla, Inc. Video Pointers Videotizer
VP-22, 127
VP-82
VP-129-131
VP- 133, 134 VP-88
VP- 126
VP- 136
TERMINAL SITESTEQUIPMENT
A
ADC Magnetic Controls Co. Adda Corp. Allen Avionics, Inc Ampex Corp. Artel Communications Corp. Asaca/Shibasoku Corp. of America
Beckman Instruments, Inc B & K Precision/Dynascan Corp Blonder-Tongue Labs, Inc Robert Bosch Corp BSM Broadcast Systems, Inc.
Central Dynamics Corp Channelmatic Cohu, Inc Comprehensive Video Supply Corp Comsonics, Inc.
Datatek Corp Dyma Engineering Dynair Electronics Dynatech Data Systems
Faroudja Laboratories, Inc For-A Corp. of America Fortel, Inc Foundation Electronic Instruments, Inc
G
The Grass Valley Group, Inc
H
Clifford B. Hannay & Son, Inc Harris Corp HEDCO/Hughes Electronic Devices Corp Henry Engineering Horizon Intl
ICM Video Ikegami Electronics, Inc. Image Video, Ltd. Intergroup Video Systems Interphase
Javelin Electronics JVC Co. of America
Leader Instruments Corp Leitch Video of America, Inc. Lenco, Inc. Link Electronics/TEA, Inc.
VT-2, 3 VT-4, 5 VT-6-11
VT- 12 VT- 14 VT- 13
VT- 15 VT- 16, 17 VT- 18, 19 VT- 20-24
VT- 25
VT- 26-28 VT- 29-30 VT- 31-33 VT- 34-36
VT- 37
VT-38-41 VT-42
VT-43-45 VT-46
3M Co. M/A Corn Video Systems, Inc Matthey/TEA, Inc Merlin Engineering Works Microtime, Inc Multidyne Electronics Mycomp Technologies Corp
N
Non- Linear Systems/Div . Kaypro Corp Nova Systems, Inc
California Paltex Corp Panasonic Industrial Co Pelco Sales, Inc Perma Power Electronics, Inc Pioneer Video, Inc
OSI Systems, Inc.
The Real World Technologies Group, Vic. ROH Corp Ross Video, Ltd.
VT-47, 48 VT-49-52 VT- 53-57 VT- 58-61
VT-62-71
V1"-72, 73 VT-74
VT-75-81 VT-82 VT-83
VT-84-86 VT-87
VT- 88-98 VT- 99-103 VT- 104, 105
VT- 106-108 VT- 109
Shintron Co., Inc. Shook Electronic Enterprises, Inc. Sigma Electronics H.A. Solutec Ltd. Sony Corp. of America
Tascarnfreac Corp. of America Tektronix, Inc. Telemet/Geotel, Inc. Temtron Electronics, Ltd. Thomson - CSF Broadcast, Inc Trompeter Electronics, Inc.
Utah Scientific, Inc.
Video Aids of Colorado Vanco-Chicago, Inc. Vanner, Inc. Video Interface Products Videolink/Xantech Corp. Videomedia, Inc. Videotek, Inc. Vidicraft, Inc
U V
VT- 111-114 VT- 115-118 VT- 119-124
VT- 125
SL Waber/SL Industries, Inc.
World Video, Inc Index
1985 Bill Daniels Co., Inc. Shawnee Mission, KS
VT- 126-130 VT- 131 VT- 132 VT- 133
VT- 134-136 VT- 137 VT- 138
VT- 139, 140 VT- 141
VT- 142 VT- 143 VT- 144-146 VT- 147, 148 VT- 149
VT- 150-154
VT- 155, 156 VT- 157, 158
VT- 159
VT- 160 VT- 161 VT- 162, 163 VT- 164 VT- 165
VT- 166-169 VT- 170-183 VT-184, 185
VT- 186 VT- 187 VT- 188, 189
VT- 190-192
VT- 193-195 VT- 196 VT- 197 VT- 198 VT- 199
VT-200, 201 VT-202-204 VT-205-207
VT- 208-213 VT-214, 215
VT- 216
VT- 1
ADC MAGNETIC CONTROLS CO.
4900 West 78th Street Minneapolis, MN 55435 (612) 835-6800
AUDIO/VIDEO PATCHING
00000 00 0 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
· Parp -Pnrc··
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000 0 0 0 0 0
REAR VIEW
PRO- PATCH New Concepts In Audio and Video Patching
Pro- Patch -- ADC's newest family of jackfields offers the user additional features, greater savings and new concepts in both audio and video patching.
Pro- Patch units are re- usable and especially suited for remotes, special broadcasts and advance builds as well as studio environments. Pro- Patch jackfields allow matching
audio and video configurations while providing a uniform and professional look to any system.
The Pro- Patch video jackfield features a2x22 or 2x24 array of ADC switching ( self-normalling) coax jacks wired back to
quick and simple BNC connectors on a clutter-free rear panel. Self-normalling loops internal to the jackfield are color- phase compensated for cross patching. No phase shift occurs between self- normal and patch cord providing a phase coherent patching system.
ADC Part Number:
4-26053-0010 2x22 ( 44 Jacks) 4-26053-0020 2x24 ( 48 Jacks)
$ 14.10 15.40
Accessories Longframe ( 1/4") Patch Cords ADC No. PJ-81 1-foot Length PJ-82 2-feet Length PJ-83 3-feet Length PJ-84 4-feet Length PJ-86 6-feet Length
Bantam Patch Cords ADC No. PJ-712 12- inch Length PJ-713 18- inch Length PJ-714 24- inch Length PJ-715 30- inch Length PJ-716 36- inch Length PJ-718 48- inch Length PJ-720 60- inch Length PJ-722 72- inch Length
Note: Minimum order on patch cords, two each length. Additional discount for 10 or more of each length.
PRO- PATCH ( Video/Coax Patch Cord) 3' Coax Patch Cord ADC No. CC- 1076-N
$ 13.66
Note: Use only 3foot patch cord to preserve phase coherent capability of ADC Pro- Patch Video Jackfield.
VT- 2
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$23.53 24.78 25.75 26.65 28.58
$14.82 15.11 15.45 15.75 16.04 16.62 17.26 17.84
ADC MAGNETIC CONTROLS CO.
4900 West 78th Street Minneapolis, MN 55435 (612) 835-6800
PRO- PATCH VIDEO JACKFIELDS
The Pro-Patch video jackfield features a2x22 or 2x24 array of ADC switching (self-normalling) coax jacks w:red back to quick and simple BNC connectors on aclutter-free rear panel. Selfnormalling loops internal to the jackfield are colorphase compensated for cross patching. No phase shift occurs between self-normal and patch cord
providing aphase coherent patching system. ADC Part Number PPV-22 or PPV-24
PPV -22 PPV -24
$1410.00 1540.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Physical
Chassis: Aluminum with gold anodized finish
Front Panel: Black thermoset plastic or black thermoplagic.
Rear Connectors: Isolated BNC bulkhead reiseptacle, non-tarnish finish
Cable RG·51)series coax cable ( 75 ohms impedance)
Jacks N.ckel plated zinc alloy housing. Gold-plated beryllium copper and pews-bronze spnngs.
Electrical Better than 40dB :solatiim between circuits in range i.,(0-6 mHz. Not greatrr than . 1 insertitm \' SVCR. iii fe,sthan I. : r.
range of IN mil:.
Environmental
Operating Temperature: -:"C tii + 30*C .
Non -operating Temperature:
7tt
Humidity: 3% tii
i8 000
MARKING AS SHOWN TO IDENTIFY CIRCUITS
6 6666 6ê66666 6 6 , 6 6 ,,6 6 6 6 6 6 6.6
6666666 6666 é
coa o
REAR VIEW ( ROTATED'
V t
POSITION OF CARD 8 WINDOW REF
Z. , it
7 co
(D00@©0©© C100
®©@@@@@@@ 811···%···
co
S:
7c1o1
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-3
ALMA CORPORATION
130 Knowles Drive Los Gatos, CA 95030 (408) 379-1500
TIME BASE CORRECTORS/ FRAME SYNCHRONIZERS
VW- 3
'11
1
re
VW SERIES Time Base Corrector/ Frame Synchronization
VW SERIES FEATURES ·Full frame " infinite window" time base
correction ·Electronic Frame or Field Freeze for pro-
duction applications ·Remote control panel for full studio con-
trol of operational and setup functions ·Exceptional degree of transparency in
either TBC or Synchronizer mode · Hot switching without video roll or breakup ·Selectable freeze on loss of video- last good
field or system black ·Horizontal blanking fixed at 10.8 usec. · Bandwidth exceeds 2.4 MHz in heterodyne
TBC mode ·RS- 170A ·Direct or Heterodyne color processing ·Vertical Blanking is switch selectable in any
order between lines 15-20 ·Velocity compensation in both Direct and
Heterodyne TBC mode · Bandwidth exceeds 2.4 MHz in Hetero-
dyne TBC mode ·Adjustable chrominance -to- luminance de-
lay of + 200 nsec. ·Advanced vertical output to minimize
video delay for multiple generation editing ·Capable of delaying non- synchronous
video feeds by as much as afull frame to make them synchronous with system reference
VW-2/VW-3 TBC, Frame Synchronizer, Electronic Freeze Frame
The VW- 2 is designed to provide firstquality time base correction and dropout
compensation for systems which utilize direct color Type C format VTR's.
The VW- 3 is designed to provide first-
quality time base correction and synchronization for systems applications.
The VW-2/VW-3 also supply superior heterodyne processing for systems employing 3/4 and 1/2- inch format video tape machines.
The VW- 3has asignal-to-noise of 56 dB and is smaller with less power consumption.
The VW- 3provides simultaneous time base correction and synchronization, making it possible to take random feeds from land lines, microwave links or satellite and switch them synchronously with program materials.
·Hot switching without video roll or breakup · Electronic Frame or Field Freeze for pro-
duction applications ·Selectable Freeze on loss of video, last
good field or system black
· Remote control unit can be operated from any location. Two remotes may be used
·Internal sync generator or Gen- lock mode · Dropout compensation: TTL or RF inputs
SPECIFICATIONS Television Standard NTSC 525- line 60 Hz
Video
Bandwidth: ± 0.5 dB to 5 MHz; Heterodyne 2.4 MHz ( luminance)
K Factor: 1% ( 2T pulse); Heterodyne 4% (2T pulse)
Differential Phase: Less than 2° Differential Gain: Less than 2% Signal- to- Noise: ( VVV2 + 56 dB)
(WV- 3 + 58 dB) Sampling Rate: 4th Harmonic of color sub-
carrier Time Base Error:
Monochrome: ± 20 ns Heterodyne: + 3° Direct Color: + 2 nsec Range of Correction: 1TV frame ( two fields) Line Rate Tilt: 1% Field Rate: 1%
Output Sync Jitter: + 1nsec
Operating Controls
Bypass: Bypasses input video to Video Out 1 HET: Selects Heterodyne TBC mode Freeze Frame: Full frame freeze
Freeze Field: Field freeze eliminates interfield flicker
Chroma Level: ± 3 dB Hue: + 45° ( with ± 180° switch) Setup: + 10 IRE Video Level: + 3 dB
Outputs: Video -- 2outputs composite video 1volt p- p
3.58 MHZ -- uttering 3.58 MHz 1 volt signal + adv. sync
Inputs: Video input -- 1volt ± 3 dB composite ( NTSC) 75 Ohm terminating
Reference input -- composite video or black burst looping input; 1volt ± 3dB return loss is 40 dB with power on or off. (VW- 3 -- RF or TTL DOC)
VW- 2Physical
Size: 5-1/4"H, 19"D, rack mount Weight: 50 lbs. Power Consumption: 250 watts at 115 VAC Operating Voltage: 100 v-240 V AC 50/60 Hz Operating Range: 0-35°C
VW- 3Physical Size: 1-3/4"H, 23"D, rack mount Weight: 28 lbs.
Power Consumption: 150 watts at 115 VAC Operating Voltage: 115/230 V AC 50/60 Hz Operating Range: 0-35 C
Basic System Description: 1 -- VW- 2Main Frame
Price $15,500.00
1 -- Remote Control
1875.00
1 -- VW- 3Main Frame 1 -- Remote Control
$14,500.00 1875.00
VT-4
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ADDA CUPPUFIATION
MODULAR VIDEO PROCESSING
130 Knowles Drive
Los Gatos, CA 95030 (408)379-1500
AC 20A DUAL CHANNEL VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEM The Modular Concept
Truly modular signal processing is more than acollection of plug-in parts; it is an integrated system of interchangeable components that can be selected to perform a number of specific tasks at the user's discretion.
It may be configured as a single or dual channel system of time base correction or field/frame synchronization or a combination of both.. by simply inserting the appropriate modules.
The AC 20A concept was the first digital video processor designed to grow with you as your needs expand. Start with a single channel processor at avery modest cost and add the second when you're ready.
Select the TBC module for tape machine use or the synchronizer module for integrating non-synchronous video.. or a combination of both.
The simple architecture of the AC 20A includes four major elements...mainframe, genlock board and two signal processing channels.
AC 20 A Mainframe
The mainframe chassis occupies only 7" of rack space. All connections are made on the rear panel, power, video, external reference for video and advanced vertical and 3.58 MHz feedback for VTR use. Multi-pin connectors are used for interconnection with remote units and accessories.
Proc amp controls, genlock indicator and bypass switches may be included on the front panel of the mainframe, or on a separate Engineering Remote unit.
Inside, a single printed-circuit interconnect board routes power, video and sync signals to and from the genlock board, the module boards and the outboard remote and accessory units.
The AC 20A may be equipped with either a single or dual changeover power supply.
Genlock Board
The AC 20A may operate as a stand alone system with its own internal sync generator, or it will genlock to house reference black burst or composite video. The GL 1 board supplies each channel with accurately timed blanking, sync and burst for reinsertion into the corrected output video.
The optional GL 2genlock board performs all GL 1 functions plus production remote control as well as control from many commercial tape editors. It provides switching effects and channel C output circuitry which may be controlled by the PRC 20.
Modular Video Processing
Interchangeable modules provide for one or two channels of digital video processing -- time base correction and/or field/frame synchronization.
You may add either one or two TBC or field/frame synchronizer boards in any combination...two TBC's, two synchronizers, or one channel of each. Processor modules in the AC 20A are totally interchangeable.
TB 1Digital TBC Processor Module
The time base corrector module in the AC 20A accepts color NTSC composite video from common V-locked, nonsegmented video tape machines which will accept 3.58 MHz subcarrier feedback ( supplied from the AC 20A).
AC 20 MAINFRAME
PRC 20 DIGITAL EFFECTS REMOTE
ACR 20 ENGINEERING REMOTE
Output is time base corrected NTSC composite signal meeting RS- 170A specifications.
TB2 Digital TBC Processor Module
The TB2 TBC module has all the TB1 capabilities, plus: Heterodyne processing -- 3.58 MHz feedback available but not required (for 3/4 and 1/2" VTR's); Sony BVU 820 Sbo Motion capabilities; viewable picture up to 40 times shuttle speed; and, drop out compensation.
VS 1/VS 2 Digital Synchronizer Module
The synchronizer module delays non-synchronous video by as much as afull frame to make it synchronous with system reference. Field synchronization is provided with the VS 2 board; frame synchronization is provided with the VS 1board.
With 8bit resolution and asample rate of 4 times subcarrier, the synchronizer module makes the AC 20A ideal for all broadcast and production applications.
PRC 20 2:1 Production Remote Control
The PRC 20 puts digital switching effects within the reach of almost any budget, delivering professional control of speed, type and direction of transitions between the two channels without tying up a costly production switcher. Microcomputer controlled effects include Push On, Push Off and Pull On.. transitions not available on any analog switcher.
Transitions are selected by pushbutton control and may be made at any of four fixed rates -- 16, 24, 32 or 48 frames.
When added to the AC 20A with two TBC channels, the PRC 20 transforms the system to an ingenious post- production tool to smooth out the complexities of threemachine, A/ B roll editing.
GL 2Editor Interface
Many editing system controllers are able to interface directly to the AC 20A in order to fully control the digital switching effects as part of the edit list.
Take Box Editor Interface
Lower cost editing systems which do not include software interface provisions may still control the switching transitions between channels with the "Take Box"...a 3x4 x 1" accessory which initiates the last function selected on the PRC 20 remote control panel when it receives a ground closure signal from the editor controller.
Dual Power Supply
In order to meet the needs of many broadcast applications, a full standby power supply may be included as an option. This alternate power supply may be selected at the flip of a switch.
Manual Transition FADER BAR
This accessory unit, with familiar T-type
"handle bar," permits the operator to control the duration of transition effects manually.
Available in desk top or panel-mount configurations, the Fader Bar extends the range of creative control for production and
post-production applications.
System Pricing
Product
Price
Time Base Correctors ITBIl
AC 2CA 1- Channel AC 20A 2- Channel
$6960.00 13,450.00
AC 20A 2- Channel with Digital Production
Effects
17,450.00
Note 1-Add $ 550 for ACR 20 Configuration
(PROC AMP Remote)
Note 2-Add $ 1,500.00 Per Channel for TB 2
TBC Module
Field Synchronizers
AC 20A 1- Channel
7990.00
AC 20A 2- Channel
14,990.00
AC 20A 2- Channel with Digital Production
Effects
18,990.00
Note 1Add $ 550 for ACR 20 Configuration
11:1 0C AMP Remote) Note 2-Add $ 1000.00 Per Channel for Frame
Synchronizer
TBC/Field Synchronizers
AC 20A 1- Channel TBC ( TBI)
1- Channel Synchronizer
13,750.00
with Digital Production
Effects
17,750.00
Note 1- Add $ 550 for ACR 20 Configuration
(PROC AMP Remote)
Note 2- Add $ 1000.00 for Frame Synchro-
nizer Note 3-Add $ 1500.00 Per Channel for TB 2
TBC Module
Upon request 1or 2channel models may be ordered with the GL 2Gen Lock Module for
Digital Production Effects in place of the GL 1 Gen Lock Model for an additional $2500.00
Product
Spares Pricing
Price
TB 1Video Module
$6500.00
TB 2Video Module
ACR 20 Engineering Remote GL 1Gen Lock Board
8000.00
1200.00 2200.00
GL 2Gen Lock Board
4200.00
PRC 20 Production Remote AC20 Mainframe without plug-in
modules
1500.00 4300.00
AC 20S Mainframe without plug-in
modules
4300.00
AC 20 Power Supply
500.00
VS 1Frame Synchronizer Board . 1000.00
VS 2Field Synchronizer Board
7000.00
Take Box
500.00
Fader Bar Rack Slides
530.00 80.00
Circuk Board Repair
Circuit board repair on "exchange"
basis
8350.00'
*Adda Corporation reserves the right to refuse to repair any board out of warranty.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 5
Allen Avionics, Inc.
224 E. Second St. Mineola, NY 11501 (516) 248-8080
HUM ELIMINATOR HEC1000 INCOMING VIDEO
FOR TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE OR IMMEDIATE PRICE AND DELIVERY 'INFORMATION CALL FACTORY: PHONE ( 516) 248-8080
HUM ELIMINATOR
OUTGOING VIDEC
ELIMINATES HUM AND OTHER INTERFERENCE in Video Lines caused by differences in Ground Potential.
·FLAT - DC to 10 MHZ ·For Color and Black & White ·No Low Frequency or
High Frequency Roll- Off ·No Differential Gain Distortion ·No Differential Phase Distortion ·Passive Device - Failure Free ·Reversible ·Small Compact Package ·Low Price
IN FIELD: Between Remote Truck & Telco Between Remote Truck & Microwave For Intertruck Hookup For VTR Units For Monitoring Lines
IN STUDIO: Between Buildings On long runs in Buildings Between Studios & Transmitter On incoming Telco Circuits On outgoing Telco Circuits
Impedance Connectors Bandwidth Hum Reduction Dimensions Weight Insertion Loss
SPECI FICATIONS:
75 ohms, unbalanced Type BNC DC to 10MHz ( 0.6 dB @ 10 MHz) to 50 dB depending on system 5.3" x4.0" x 2.0" ( 135 x 102 x 51 mm) Approx. 3 lbs. ( 1.36kg) <0.2 dB
NETWORKS
RELATIVE RESPONSE ( db)
PRE- EMPHASIS & DE- EMPHASIS WAVE SHAPING NETWORKS
Pre- emphasis networks are used precediig the FM modulator in order to optimize the TV transmission.
De- emphasis follows the demodulator and serves to restore the wave shape of the demodulated signal.
4 2 De- emph.as. i s
o
2
4
pre-...s-·o.h.a.s..) s.·
IMPEDANCE 75 OHMS
6
Part No.
NW400 NW500
Description
Pre- emphasis De- emphasis
Size
2" x 1" x Vie" 2" x Vt." x l'i."
UNITS SUPPLIED IN METAL CANS WITH BNC CONNECTORS
8
10 01
.10
1.00
FREQUENCY ( MHz)
10.00
ALSO AVAILABLE -- RANDOM NOISE MEASUREMENT NETWORKS TO EIA STANDARD RS -250B
VT-6
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
RACK MOUNTABLE VIDEO/ PULSE DELAY LINES
_411en
(516) 248-8080
A complete rack mountable series of video and pulse
delay lines, with the capability of replacing up to 1450 feet of cable, is now being marketed by Allen Avionics.
All models are stocked in our plant in Mineola, New York.
RACK MOUNT showing delay units with switches and terminals available for delay changes. Up to 11 delay units can be housed. Cards for mounting units in rack are purchased separately. Note hinged front panel.
Rack Size: 19" w., 10" d., 514" h.
Showing 8 individual slide switches for rapid delay changes.
Photo shows 1of 4 Strappable versions (VRS Series). Note that there are 7 input and output terminals available for strapping desired delay.
Four variable slide switch units are being offered with total delays of 255, 637.5, 1275 and 2270 nanoseconds. Each unit contains 8 individual delay
units. Four strappable units are also manufactured with total delays of 317.5, 635, 1270 and 2260 nanoseconds. The strappable units consist of 7 separate delay lines each having their own 'input and output terminals. The slide switches or terminal strapping provide methods for adding the individual lines together so that the output is always the summation of the individual lines. This eliminates most video distortions and assures good chrominance to luminance delay. Precision delay changes of as small as one nanosecond are easily accomplished. Low insertion loss, amplitude
and delay flatness, along with excellent pulse fidelity, are characteristic of
this series.
All units are manufactured to fit standard 19 inch racks and are provided with additional inserts to satisfy almost any mounting requirement. Delay
units and racks can be purchased separately. The rack is manufactured with a hinged panel so that fast delay adjustments can be made. However, once adjustments are made, the front panel prevents
further tampering with the slide switches or terminals.
Units are rack mounted by attaching a durable plastic card to the large surface.
Note inserts provided for the attachment.
To satisfy requirements
other than rack mounting, additional inserts are provided.
Part No. VRM0255 VRM0637 VRM1275 VRM2270 VRS0317 VRS0635 s VRS1270 VRS2260
Delay Range (NanoSec.) 0-255
Delay ' Steps (Nano- 1 Sec.)
Method of
Variation
1.0 Slide Switch
, Amplitude
Maximum
Flatness At
Insertion
Any Delay
Loss
Setting
(a 100 KHz
100KHz to
(db)
5.5MHz (db)
.40
.4 Max.
Max. Rise Time (NanoSec.) 20
Package Size
(Inches)
1.250 x4.15 x4.00
0-637.5
2.5 Slide Switch
*1.00
.4
28
1.250 x4.15 x6.00
0-1275
5.0 Slide Switch
*3.00
.4
33
1.250 x4.15 x9.00
0-2270
10.0 Slide Switch
*3.00
.5
40
1.250 x4.15 x9.00
0-317.5
2.5 Strap
.40
.5
26
1.250 x4.15 x4.00
0-635
5.0 Strap
.75
.5
35
1250 x4.15 x6.00
0-1270
10.0 Strap
1.50
.5
37
1.250 x4.15 x9.00
0-2260
20.0 Strap
3.00
5
40 40
1.250 x4.15 x9.00
*±.2db variation at any delay setting.
Impedance: 75 ohms. Pulse Distortion: Less than 4% with an input pulse rise time of 20 nanoseconds. Working Voltage: 50 volts maximum. Return Loss: 15db minimum. Delay Tolerance: 5% or 1nanosecond, whichever is greater.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-7
Allen (516)248 8080
1.1011 i(
/11( ..
VIDEO/PULSE DELAY LINES
Allen Avionics, an established leader in the design and manufacture of Electromagnetic Delay Lines and L- C Filters has now developed a specialized group of products for the video market.
In color television broadcasting, accurate timing of signals is essential. This was initially achieved by the use of 75 ohm coaxial cable. The
Pest &Mt() M A, ten vpizoo 0-1 100 MAttostco NDs
cost in time and materials to accomplish precise trimming and the lack
of a rapid and convenient method of changing delays is currently re-
sponsible for the decline in cable usage. Television studios, studio
equipment manufacturers and others engaged in the video industry are
changing from 75 ohm cable to a more suitable method of achieving
precise short delays. Allen Avionics now offers a line of Video Units for this purpose. Their use will result in a reduction of size, weight,
installation cost and an overwhelming saving in time and effort to make delay changes.
·,,u'-`
Models VP0635, VP1270 and VP2075 are padded to provide aflat
ALLEN AVIONICS INC. *
IN
Pti,S lhOt.i".3 02t5 Nal'eSECOM$
OUT
loss at any setting. As aresult of this padding, these units will exhibit amaximum variation of ±. 2db at any delay setting.
Model VP0010 was designed speciftcally to be used as a delay
138. 6$
16 e
41
Ile
:e
el) es)
trimmer in conjunction with our other delay units or any 75 ohm
system. It offers . 5 nanosecond switching resolution with excellent amplitude flatness up to 5.5 MHz.
*
These new delay units feature extremely flat amplitude response to 5.5 MHz, small increments of delay variation, low signal distortion and tight delay tolerance. The delay networks are ideal for pulse
applications because of their fast rise times and low distortion. Amplitude equalization is employed to achieve excellent flatness over the video frequency range. The delayed output of any model in this group is the summation of individual lines. It is not the result
of a tapped line. This feature insures that output pulse distortions are minimized. Units will match to any 75 ohm system and can be directly connected into the video signal path by means of BNC connectors.
ALLEN AVIONICS INC.
4 K.1.13.4E ,>,,ekr, Ve=.4.'. Lee biotezcoetiss
Part No. VP0010 VP0127 VP0255 VP0317 VP0635 VP1100 VP1270 VP2075 VS0315 VS0635 VS1275 VS2075
Delay Range (NanoSec.) 0-10.5
0-127
0-255 0-317.5 0-635 0-1100 0-1270 0-2075 0-315 0-635 0-1275
0-2075
Delay Steps (NanoSec.)
.5
1.0
1.0 2.5
5.0 10.0 10.0 25.0
5.0 5.0 5.0 25.0
Method of
Variation Toggle Toggle
Toggle Toggle Toggle Rotary Toggle Toggle Strap Strap Strap Strap
Maximum Insertion
Loss @ 100 KHz
(db)
.15
.15
.15
.15
*. 50
1.25
*3.00 *3.00
.25
.60 1.25
2.50
Amplitude Flatness At Any Delay
Setting 100KHz to 5.5MHz (db)
.2 Max.
.3
.3
.3
.4
.4
.4
.5
.4
.5 .5
.5
Max. Rise Time (NanoSec.)
3 14
16
20
25
30 30 40
28
33
33
40
Package Size
(Inches) 4% x2% x13 /4 6 4% x2% x13 /4 6
4% x2% x13 /4 6 4% x2% x13 /4 6 4"16 x3"-76x2'i° 4i. x3' 1 ,-6x2%- 6 41!'i. x3"-. x2hi. 7% x4"à x29/4 4x2x13 /4 ) 5 x 2 x 11 /4 5 x3 x 11 /4 61 /2 x3 1 /2 x2
Impedance: 75 ohms.
·. 2db variation at any delay setting.
Pulse Distortion: Less than 4% with an input pulse rise time of 20 nanoseconds.
Working Voltage: 100 volts maximum.
Return Loss: 20db minimum. 15db minimum for VP2075 & VS2075.
Delay Tolerance: 5% or 1nanosecond, whichever is greater.
VT- 8
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEO/PULSE DELAY LINES
Wen Arionics, Inc. (516)248-8080
DELAY TRIMMERS-VRM011, VAR011 & VAR005
These VAR Units, which permit an infinitely small delay adjustment, insure an amplitude and delay flatness superior to that of any other unit presently available.
The units can be used as delay trimmers alone, or in conjunction with any of our other delay boxes from D.C. to over 5.5 MHz.
VAR011
Part No. VRM011
VAR011
VA R005
Delay Range (NanoSec.) 0 11
0 - 11
3- 7
Toggle Switch Variation (NanoSec.) .5 steps to 10.5
.5 steps to 10.5
--
Trimmer Variation
(NanoSec.)
Continuously Variable to . 5
Continuously Variable to 1
Continuously Variable from 3 to 7
Maximum Insertion
Loss @ 100 KHz
(db) .3
.2
.2
Amplitude Flatness at Any
Delay Setting 100KHz to
5.5 MHz (db) .3
.25
.
Package Size
(Inches) 1%, x4%2 x4
4% x 2% x
3%,x i" X 1%
Impedance: 75 ohms.
ALLEN AVtONICS,INC
0
Working Voltage: 100 volts. Pulse Distortion: Less than 3% with an input rise time of 20 nanoseconds.
Return Loss: 20db or greater.
VAR005
TYPE AV-397 & 75-2A
75-2A 7-3/8"x4- 11/16"x2-3/16"
4
AV- 397 2"x2- 1/2"x5-1/2"
Maximum Delay: 2.075 microseconds ± 3% variable in . 025 sis. steps from .025 to 2.075 microseconds.
Time Delay of Individual Lines: 1, .5, . 2, . 2, . 1, . 05, . 025 microseconds.
Rise Time for Entire Line: .06 microseconds maximum. Frequency Response: 3db down at 5megahertz for 2.075 microseconds delay.
Distortion: 2% maximum with . 2microsecond input pulse.
Impedance: 75 ohms ±. 5%.
Working Voltage: 100. Temperature Coefficient: 50 parts/million/ 0C from - 55 0C to 1050C. Attenuation: 7% maximum for 2.075 microsecond delay.
TV LINE EQUALIZERS- VE300 & AV-535
IMPEDANCE. lb tihrTIS 2ohms to 8Megdher ti
ATTENUATION OF CABLE PLUS EQUALIZER 3cib
These Equalizers are designed to compensate for losses in AG- 11/U ( 75 ohm) cable and its equivalents. The units
are capable of equalizing 50 to 300 feet in 50 foot increments.
The VE300 is provided with a rotary switch to select the required
ALLEN AVIONICS INC.
CARLE AUIPUTUDE EQUALIZER
amount of cable footage to be equalized. It is supplied with BNC connectors for quick input and output connections and is foamed
in ametal can. The AV-535 has terminals on its mounting surface arranged to pro-
vide for simplified strapping of different cable lengths. The unit is
foamed and hermetically sealed in ametal can.
Attenuation of equalizer alone is as shown.
TOLERANCE ±. 07 db.
VE300 4- 11/16"x3- 11/16"x2-1/16"
Feet
50 100 150 200 250 300
0.1 MHz
2.97 db 2.93 2.90 2.86 2.82 2.78
2 MHz
2.86 db 2.68 2.51 2.35 2.19 2.02
4 MHz
2.79 db 2.53 2.28 2.03 1.82 1.58
8 MHz
2.67 db 2.27 1.88 1.52 1.21 0.86
s.
AV- 535 2"x3- 1/2"x5"
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 9
Allen Auionics,
(516) 248-8080
VIDEO FILTERS
INCREASING ATTENUATION INCREASING DELAY
NEW " MVFL" SERIES
DELAY EQUALIZED NTSC LOWPASS FILTERS - VFL, MVFL & VCL SERIES
For the video field, we have built many lowpass filters having sharp roll- offs and good passband delay linearity with cut-off frequencies from . 1MHz to 10 MHz. The most popular of these are used to attenuate the harmonics of the NTSC color sub- carrier frequency 3.58 MHz. The most commonly used filters in this group are tabulated below:
VFL & MVFL SERIES - IMPEDANCE = 75 OHMS
Standard Size Max. Insertion
Loss ldb Part No.
Miniature Size Max. . 25db
Max. Insertion Attenuation
Loss 2db
@ Frequency
Part No.
(MHz)
Max. 3db Attenuation @ Frequency
(MHz)
Min. 45db
Attenuation Approximate
@ Frequency Passband Delay
(MHz)
(Nanoseconds)
VFL1P7 V FL2P2 V FL2P7 V FL3P2 V FL3P5 V FL3P8 V FL4P0 V FL4P5 VF L5P2 V FL6P0 V FL6P5
MVFL1P7 MV FL2P2 MVFL2P7 MV FL3P2 MVFL3P5 MV FL3P8 MVF L4P0 MVFL4P5 MVF L5P2 MVF L6P0 MVF L6P5
1.75 2.25 2.75 3.20 3.50 3.80 4.00 4.50 5.20 6.00 6.50
1.92 2.45 3.00 3.50 3.84 4.16 4.38 4.93 5.70 6.58 7.12
2.41 3.10 3.77 4.40 4.82 5.22 5.51 6.19 7.16 8.27 8.95
1691 1325 1082
928 846 781 741 659 570 494 457
ax. Delay Variation = ± 3% to - .25 db Freq.
Max Passband Ripple = ±. 25db
VFL Size: 4- x 2" x 1'4" in metal can with BNC Connectors.
MVFL Size: 3" x 1s/8" x in metal can with terminals for PC mounting.
VCL SER ES - IMPEDANCE = 75 OHMS
Part No.
Maximum ± 3% Delay Distortion to Frequency ( MHz)
Maximum . 25db Attenuation @ Frequency ( MHz)
Minimum 45db Attenuation @
Frequency ( MHz)
Approximate Passband Delay (Nanoseconds)
VC L3P2
2.7
VC L3P5
2.9
VCL3P8
3.2
VC L4P2
3.5
VC L4P5
3.8
VC L4P9
4.1
VC L5P2
4.4
VCL5P7
4.8
3.2
3.63
1100
3.5
3.97
1010
3.8
4.31
930
4.2
4.76
840
4.5
5.10
780
4.9
5.56
720
5.2
5.90
680
5.7
6.46
620
M ax. Insertion Loss @ 100 KHz = 2.5db.
Max. Passband Ripple = ±.. 25db
Size: 6" x 2" x 1'4" in metal can with BNC Connectors.
DELIVERY FROM STOCK
o II
Amplitude Response
Delay Response
808I.N.C.REAS. IN. G FRE.QUE.NCY TYPICAL AMPLITUDE & DELAY RESPONSE OF VFL & MVFL SERIES
NTSC REJECT FILTERS
Some of the most frequent specifications that we encounter in the video industry are based upon rejection of the color information in the video signal to provide isolation from the luminance signal. These specifications require very low phase distortion to the luminance signal. To satisfy this requirement, Allen Avionics has designed a group of band reject filters with phase equalization where necessary. One of the most often used applications for this band reject filter is in color systems for monochrome transmission to prevent color flashes from appearing
on the screen. Since various segments of the television industry have different passband requirements, we are listing three filters with different reject bandwidths.
Impedance = 75 ohms. Maximum Insertion Loss
@ 100 KHz = 3db. Maximum Passband Ripple
to 5.5 MHz = ±.. 25db.
Part No. VFR4P6 VER1P3 VFROP5
Maximum 3db Attenuation @ Frequency ( MHz)
1.95
6.55
3.00 -- 4.30
3.37 - 3.88
Minimum Attenuation @
3.58 MHz 40db
40db 30db
Size: 4" x2' x 1 " in metal can with BNC Connectors.
NTSC BANDPASS FILTER
Allen Avionics sub- carrier bandpass filter is alow distortion unit designed to attenuate the luminance information in color TV signals. This filter is useful in most applications where it is required to isolate the chrominance information.
Impedance = 75 ohms. Maximum Insertion Loss
@ 3.58 MHz = 1.5db. Maximum Ripple =
VT-10
Part No. VFB3P6
Maximum 3db Attenuation @ Frequency ( MHz) 3.40 - 3.70
Minimum 30db Attenuation @ Frequency ( MHz)
2.40 -- 5.80
Size: 4" x2" x 11r+" in metal can with BNC Connectors
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEO FILTERS
11101/iCS · 1 11C. (516)248 8080
VSL4P5 DELAY EQUALIZED LOINPASS FILTER This filter is similar to the VFL series and is intended for use at the ouput of adigital to analog converter. Its special feature is that amplitude equalizers have been incorporated to shape
the passband response for su'x x correction.
Odb -5db · -15db.
25db ·
Amplitude Response
·--t--
Impedance = 75 ohms. Attenuation = 38db or greater
at 7.03 MHz to 20 MHz. Maximum Group Delay Distortion
=30 nanoseconds or less
to 4.7 MHz. Nominal Delay = 500 nanoseconds. Size -- 4x2x1% inches.
Units supplied in Metal Cans with BNC Connectors
-35db · -45db -55db
4.7MHz
Delay Response
· 1\
7.03-MHz
-65db -75db ·
3
4
5
6
7
FREQUENCY ( MHz)
1.60
1.40
Zoip
1.20
o o
1.00 (lnil O
.80 cc.c)
.60
.40 O
.20
VIDEO GAUSSIAN FILTERS
These filters are used for pulse shaping and bandwidth limiting. They are very useful ; n the removal of unwanted distortions caused by noise, ringing, preshoot and overshoot. Due to their fine impulse response, they are often used in conjunction with delay lines that must have minimum pulse distortion in the delayed output.
Input Pulse
Output Pulse
An approximate Gaussian VVaveshape obtained by passing a pulse through a Gaussian Filter.
17db Min.
Delay Time
Rise Time
Part No.
VGFOOP17Z500 VGFOOP30Z500 VGFOOP33Z500 VGFO1POOZ*** VGFO1P14Z*** VGFO1P25Z*** VGFO1P5OZ*** VGFO1P72Z*** VGFO2POOZ* VGFO2P39Z*** VGFO2P5OZ**
VGFO3POOZ***
VGFO3P44Z*** VGFO4POOZ** VGFO4P89Z* VGFO5POOZ * VGFO5P53Z** VG F12POOZ***
3db ± . 5db
Frequency
(MHz)
0.17 0.30 0.33 1.00 1.14 1.25 1.50 1.72 2.00 2.39 2.50 3.00 3.44 4.00 4.89 5.00 5.53 12.00
Impedance
(Ohms)
500 500 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75, 500 50, 75 50, 75
Attenuation
Frequency
(MHz)
. 45 . 80
.87 2.60 3.00 3.30 4.00 4.50 5.20 6.30 6.60 8.00 9.00 10.50 12.80 13.20 14.65 32.00
(Nano -
seconds)
Nominal
1988 1126 1024
340 296 270 225 196 169 142 135 113
98 84 68 67 67 29
(Nano-
seconds)
Nominal
2016 -- 1147 1038
357 300 275 229 200 171 144 137 115 100
86 70 69 69 30
***Replace asterisks with 050, 075 or 500 depending on your impedance selection from chart.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
o 1
.125"- I . 6" .85" --
1.0115"
4 Leads . 0285 - Dia. Length . 5'
VT- 11
AM PEX
Ampex Corporation · One of The Signal Companies §
401 Broadway
Redwood City, CA 94063 (415) 367-2011
VIDEO SWITCHING SYSTEM
11651:111111111
...LL,LL,LLLLLLI_Lij_11,111_11 LU L_LLLLLLI_I_L1.1 TT-1111111111i
BIM MK 111
111111
I111 1I11 11J III "ITtittlitt
·a« re
UJJWJULWWIJLWJ aam ea
LLL.L.LL,LL.LLI_LLLL.L.LLLI T.11-T-rn
CIIIErcrarantrumnin
OEC
susmum- ·
us. 74eszetesuaer»e gimni
Win 1111111111111111111
min
a... a.
4100 SERIES
4100 SERIES VIDEO SWITCHING SYSTEM
The Ampex 4100 Series Switcher has something to appeal to everyone at the teleproduction or broadcast studio. As the heart of the television operation, the 4100 Series provides a wide range of effects. It does its job swiftly and effectively.
The 4100 Series easily accommodates virtually any combination of video sources and keys.
FEATURES · Extended A/B format for logical signal flow and straightforward
operation · Keypad control allows the operator to control several visual func-
tions from asmall space with speed and accuracy ·The Series 4100 keypad gives you fingertip control of:
100 different patterns 99 transition rates ( in seconds to make your job alot easier) From 0.1 to 9.9 seconds Key sources ( 10 key sources from phantom buses that allow you to make any type of key appear at any video level) · Dual bus keyers to provide the ability to put any of 10 key sources (including RGB chroma keys, encoded chroma keys, character generator, luminance keys, etc.) upstream of the M/E amplifier · Function Module, together with the keypad's operation lets you fully control the M/E bank without having to reach away from the M/E itself · Status indicators show you exactly what's happening on the switcher at all times so you're in total command of every situation ·Exceptionally high quality keyers deliver clean, noise- free operation, even under adverse conditions ·Auto- transition is standard on each M/E ·Rugged construction using only the highest quality, multi- sourced components assures you asuperior level of reliability and maintainability
·The 4100 Switchers are controllable by electronic editing systems for cost-effective production and post- production applications
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
Downstream Mixer/Keyer: Offers a program to preset mix or take and automatic transition for keys and master fade to black. It provides keyboard control of 10 sources ( including an additional external
source not available on the M/Es) and automatic transition control. The Dowrstream Mixer/Keyer genlocks independently to the program bus so that even non- synchronous sources can be smoothly faded to black.
Quad Slit: The individual size and aspect ratio of each quadrant is fully variable. Quadrants may also be diagonal and even then the quadrant sizes are fully adjustable. Three border choices are available with variaole width, softness and color control.
Quadrant Selector for Quad Split: This option doubles the number of video sources available to the Quad Split. And it allows any bus video from Buses ' A, 1B, 2A, 2B and the preview bus to be placed in any of the quaorants. M/E1 and M/E2 outputs, as well as an external video source, may also appear in any of the quadrants. This option also permits quadrant video sources to be pre-set and entered whenever and wherever you desire.
Linear Key Border Generator/Composite Chroma Keyer: In addition to providing an exceptionally high quality encoded chroma key, this option allows keys to be bordered with adjustable border luminance. It also allows drop shadows and colored outlines. Encoded chroma key is hard to distinguish from high- quality RGB keys.
Bi -Level Linear RGB Chroma Keyer: Up to four are available on the 4100-E and up to six on the 4100-H, A and L models.
Pattern Extender for 100 Patterns: With the 4100 Series, 65 patterns are standard. Thirty-five additional patterns ( rotary and rotating patterns) are also available for use in the system. This option may be installed in any or all M/E pattem systems at any time.
In- Line Dual Bus Keyer Upstream of Mix/Mix Effects: Provides all the keying power and flexibility needed to meet today's teleproduction operations
External Key Signal Processor. Allows full capability character generators to be fed to the phantom buses.
Aux Buses: Available with Audio Follow Video and Audio Breakaway. Includes MIE re-entries. Up to 8 aux buses may be installed, depending on the switcher model involved. Two video only aux buses are prewired standard for easy field installation.
Editing Interface: Provides extensive control of the 4100 Series by electronic editing systems.
Digital Effects Interface: Allows the 4100 Series to be used with and control any digital effects unit curently available on the market.
VT- 12
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ASICA
ASACA/SHIBASOKU CORP. OF AMERICA
12509 Beatrice Street Los Angeles, CA 90066 (213) 827-7144
TV TEST SIGNAL GENERATORS
TEST EQUIPMENT
law· ire t . . v ,·=ut- à1;w 9
CB11A Color Bar Generator The CB11A is designed for the precise adjustment of television receivers and monitors. There are 10 basic patterns available and combining these with the specially designed " mode switch," an additional 50 patterns and combinations are available. Available in NTSC, PAL, SECAM.
/11111111111111111111111111111111.
11 · · · 11 ·
1111
_ILL
o o
TG/7 Video Test Signal Generator A complete modular test signal system with all drives. Seven interchangeable modules provide up to 48 different test signals. RS170-170A Sync, Gen Lock, and Black Burst.
The TG 7 may be completely automated with the QB102A ( 531) GP- 1B Interface unit. Available in NTSC, PAL. SECAM.
TG53A1 Digital Test Signal
Generator This generator uses an 8 bit high speed digital- analog converter. It generates 6
signals and also utilizes two RAMs with a two-line writing capacity. Utilizing the GPIB Interface Bus, special test signals may be designed, placed on afloppy
disc and displayed via the RAM.
CB53A1 Digital Color Bar Generator The CB53A1 provides 7signals as well as an RF modulator, Audio Oscillator, Gen Lock, and a charactor Generator
which displays 31 characters on 2 lines. AC/DC Operation. Available in NTSC, PAL.
SPECIALIZED TEST EQUIPMENT
IMB111111111·11111111M16.
.4,411111111111111.1111
e
A111111111111.1111111·111111111111111111b*.
-.-- MINI · MIMI
MI&
CC-5 Color Encoder The CC- 5is a high quality encoder which converts the RGB signals to composite video. In addition, the unit also outputs Y, I, 0, and R-Y, B-Y and has aperture corrector. Available in NTSC. PAL,
SECAM.
205A Video Sweep Generator
The 205A is used to measure the
frequency response on color TV sets. Video Tape Recorders and other video equipment. The frequency range is 100kHz-10MHz. Available in NTSC, PAL.
VH01BZ VTR Dropout Counter With dropout detection levels selectable from - 10dB- - 24dB and dropout time widths selectable from 0.5 - 50 Micro seconds, the VH01BZ gives high precision readings and is also an automatic testing system using the QB101A GP-IB Interface Unit. Available in NTSC, PAL, SECAM.
CD101A Color Decoder The CD101A demodulates the VBS signal to generate RGB, Y. I. Q. and R-Y, B-Y. Drive signals of BL, BF Sync, and SC are also available for interfacing with other equipment. Also available is the CD902A
to generate RGB and sync only.
Available in NTSC. PAL. SECAM.
4/11111111111111111111111111111L
For Complete Catalogs and Data Sheets, Please Call Asaca (800) 423-6347 -- In California, Call (213) 827-7144
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 13
ARTEL COMMUNICATIONS CORP.
P.O. Box 100 West Side Station Worcester, MA 01602 (617) 752-5690
FIBER OPTIC SYSTEMS
SL2000
SL3000 LASER- BASED FIBER OPTIC SYSTEM For simultaneous transmission of video, audio and data.
FEATURES ·Over 20 mile ( 32km) range without repeaters ·Exceeds RS-250B short haul standards ·Over 20 MHz video bandwidth ·Automatic protection switching option ·On-line self-diagnostics ard metering
·Automatic alarming ( local and remote) ·75 ohm or 124 ohm ( balanced) input/output ·Easy access connectors ( WECO or SMA-type) · Long wavelength, singlemode option ·Coaxial input/output equalization ·Compact, modular construction · Front panel monitor output
·Multiple audio subcarrier option
This FM laser- based system combines state-of-the-art modulation
techniques with the latest in reliability/maintainability features. These features include automatic protection switching and on-line selfdiagnostics. The SL3000 is acompact, modular system designed to
replace microwave radio and balanced coaxial cable in video transmission links ranging over 20 miles ( 32 kilometers).
Longest Distance Transmission The SL3000 is available as a short wavelength ( 840nm) multimode system for distances up to 10 kilometers, and as a long wavelength
(1300nm) singlemode system ISL3000L) for distances over 32 kilometers without repeaters. Artels low- noise receiver circuitry means that the SL3000 can transmit over 10dB greater cable loss than other systems.
Most Transparent Video and Audio The SL3000 exceeds the most stringent video transmission standards: RS- 250B ( short haul). The system's bandwidth is afull 20 MHz wide, allowing you to send wideband video and multiple subcarriers. Audio is flat from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with better than 70 dB RMS signal-tonoise ratio and less than 0.1% total harmonic distortion.
Flexible Modular Construction
Video and subcarrier cards are separately packaged on compact
plug-in modules. Up to nine card modules can be housed in asingle
19- inch card frame. The T/ R3000 video module set can be configured for transmission of high resolution ( up to 20 MHz) video or for standard video plus up to six subcarriers. Subcarrier modules are switch selectable for either audio or data transmission, and can be incrementally added or changed as needed. All modules are quick and easy to change and to troubleshoot, with self- diagnostic indicators on the front of each module.
Video Plus Data and Audio Subcarriers
The Artel SL3000 system consists of three transmitter/receiver pairs
designated the T/ R3000 for broadcast quality video and T/R3111 and
T/R3114 FM subcarriers for broadcast audio or TTL data. The SL3000
system lets you independently add up to two channels of audio or TTL
data or one of each on a single optical fiber. Both video and audio
modules exceed RS- 250B short haul standards over installed cable
with losses exceeding 40(313. An additional four channels of
microwave- compatible ( standard) audio subcarriers can be provided
upon special request.
POR
The T3000 cards accept unbalanced 75 ohm coax and 124 ohm balanced pair, 1 Vp-p video. These cards also have built-in coax equalizers. The subcarrier transmitter cards ( T3111, T3114) accept 600 ohm balanced audio or TTL asynchronous data, witi the selection of audio or data made by on board DIP switches.
All transmitter cards convert the video, audio and data signals to a composite optical signal which is transmitted through the fiber optic cable. The receiver cards reconvert the optical signal to full level video, audio and data. BNC connectors are used for loop through video inputs.
SL-2000 FIBER OPTIC TRANSMISSION LINK
FEATURES ·Broadcast quality video/audio ·Long distance transmission ·Extended frequency response ·Eliminates group loops, hum · Immune to RFI and EMI ·Self- monitoring, self-testing · EIA/CCIR compatibility ·Space saving cable · Versatility ·Convenient modular construction · Dual video outputs · Loop through input ·Switchable AGC/MGC ·Switchable squelching ·Adjustable I/O levels ·Tunable differential gain ·Signal level alarm outputs ·High reliability ·Quick, easy set-up ·Switchable DC clamping
A high performance fiber optic video/audio system for fixed point-to-point transmission. This versatile system delivers broadcast quality signals over long distances with complete freedom from interference and ground faults.
The Artel SL2000 is arevolutionary advance in video communications. For the first time fiber optics can be used to transmit broadcast quality video and audio signals over several kilometers without the need for repeaters. This modular system offers the convenience of small, lightweight cable, with performance that rivals microwave. And there is no need to obtain an FCC license with fiber optics.
The SL2000 is specifically designed to meet the performance requirements of the broadcast industry. Only with fiber optics can this performance be achieved, without regard to atmospheric or electromagnetic considerations. Only the SL2000 can deliver this level of quality over such long distances.
The SL2000 delivers all the intrinsic advantages of fiber optics, plus unique features that enhance performance, reliability and ease of use.
POR
VT- 14
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BECKMAN
630 Puente Brea, CA 92621 (71 4) 871 - 4848
INSTRUMENTS,
INC.
TEST EQUIPMENT
HEAVY-DUTY SERIES
DIGITAL MULTIMETERS
· Diode test function. · Drop Proof. ·Shock Proof. · Contamination Proof. · High Overload Protection. ·Easy-to- use.
The Heavy- Duty Series is designed for dependability under rugged industrial conditions. The meters are built of tough fire- retardant thermoplastic and sensitive components are shockmounted. The housing is of waterproof construction so dirt, grime, and moisture can never get inside to cause inaccurate readings or damaging shorts. All voltage ranges can withstand transients up to 6KV. Resistance ranges are protected to 600 volts and current ranges are protected by a2amp/600 volt fuse.
Model HD- 100
·0.25% DC Volts Accuracy. ·2000 Hour Battery Life. ·Insta -Ohms (-i) Quick Continuity.
The HD- 100 is built for accuracy under rugged conditions.
The HD- 100 includes a test lead set, battery, spare
fuse, and operator's manual.
$169.00
Model HD- 110 ·10 Amp Current Range.
·0.25% DC Volts Accuracy. ·2000 Hour Battery Life. ·Insta -Ohms.
The HD- 110 is used with confidence by transportation
companies, electrical contractors, and maritime
operators. Each HD- 110 includes test lead set, battery,
spare fuse, operator's manual.
$189.00
Model HD- 110T
·Temperature Function. · 10 Amp Current Range. ·2000 Hour Battery Life. ·0.25% DC Volts Accuracy.
·Insta -Ohms Quick Continuity.
HD- 110T is designed for service in the heating, ventilation and air conditioning industry because of its ability to measure temperature. A simple field adjustment is all that is required to switch from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
The HD- 110T comes with test lead set, battery, spare
fuse, operator's manual, and a K- type thermocouple
wire.
$209.00
Model HD- 130
·True RMS ( AC + DC coupled). · 10 Amp Current Range. ·0.1% DC Volts Accuracy. ·2000 Hour Battery Life. · ) nsta-Ohms Quick Continuity.
The HD- 130 is built to withstand industrial, factory, and automotive applications. The HD- 130 includes the Adaptor Capacitor Accessory ( Model BC-047), which allows decoupling of the AC and DC signals. The HD- 130 includes test lead set, battery, spare fuse, BC-047 Accessory, and operator's manual . $239.00
Model HD- 140
·4-1/2 Digits. ·True RMS ( AC + DC coupled). ·0.05% DC Volts Accuracy. · 10 Amp Current Range. ·Insta -Ohms.
The HD- 140 is designed for production testing, field servicing, industrial maintenance, and design engineering applicatons. The 4-1/2 digit display provides high resolution and accuracy.
Model HD- 140 comes complete with test lead set, battery, spare fuse, and operator's manual. 8259.00
Model 320
PROFESSIONAL SERIES DIGITAL MULTIMETERS
· Dependable. ·Easy-to- use. ·High Overload Protection. · Diode Test Function.
· Long Battery Life.
The Professional Series Digital Multimeters provide reliability and ease of use. Each meter is designed for day in and day out use.
The single rotary function/range selector switch is a special patented design which eliminates the friction wear that reduces the life of typical wafer-type rotary switches.
These multimeters contain extra overload protection. All voltage ranges can withstand 6KV transients for 10 microseconds. Resistance ranges on the Series 300 multimeters are protected to 600 volts.
Model 300
·3-1/2 Digits. ·0.5% DC Volts Accuracy. ·2000 Hour Battery Life. ·Diode Test Function.
The Model 300 is ideal for repairing televisions, appliances, stereos, and common electrical problems.
High performance is achieved through acombination
of special features, including RF shielding to prevent
stray signals from affecting the reading. The Model 300
comes complete with test lead set, battery, spare fuse,
and operator's manual.
$12(1.(X)
Model 310 ·10 Amp Current Range.
·0.25% DC Volts Accuracy. ·Insta -Ohms. · Diode Test Function. ·2000 Hour Battery Life.
The 310 group comes complete with test lead set, battery, spare fuse, and operator's manual. $145.00
Model 310B
The Model 310B features an audible continuity beeper
for busy technicians who need to perform repeated
continuity checks. Within 100 milliseconds, the meter
beeper signals continuity.
$155.00
Model 310T
·Temperature Function. · 10 Amp Current Range. · Diode Test Function.
Model 310T features a built-in temperature function
which uses any K-type thermocouple having a
standard miniature or subminiature connector to
measure up to 1999°F with one degree resolution. A
single adjustment allows the meter to read in
Fahrenheit or Celsius.
$165.00
Model 320 ·0.1% DC Volts Accuracy.
· 10 Amps Current Range.
· Diode Test. ·2000 Hour Battery Life. ·Insta -Ohms Quick Continuity.
The 320 group is designed for the professional who desires high accuracy in a reliable hand-held meter. The 320 group comes complete with test lead set, battery, spare fuse and operator's manual. $ 179.00
Model 350
Model 320B
The Model 320B is designed for situations that require
an audible continuity beeper and high accuracy. The
"beep" allows atechnician to check circuit continuity
without having to look at the LCD display. This feature
is an excellent aid in trouble-shooting. The momentary
beep requires very little power which helps retain the
2000 hour battery life.
$189.00
Model 330
·True RMS ( AC + DC coupled). ·0.1% DC Volts Accuracy. · 10 Amp Current Range. ·2000 Hour Battery Life. ·Insta-Ohons Quick Continuity.
The Model 330 comes complete with test lead set,
battery, spare fuse, BC-047 accessory, and operator's
manual.
$219.00
Model 4410
·4-1/2 Digits. ·True RMS ( AC + DC coupled). ·0.05% DC Volts Accuracy. · 10 Amps Current Range. ·Insta -Ohms Quick Continuity.
· Diode Test Function.
The True RMS feature is ideal for testing switching
power supplies, heating elements, flyback trans-
formers, motors, electronic flashes, and SCR or
TRIAC controlled power supplies. The meter comes complete with test lead set, battery, spare fuse,
operator's manual.
$239.00
Model 350 Bench/Portable
·20 Ohm Resistance Range. ·0.1% DC Volts Accuracy.
· Diode Test Function.
· 10 Amps Current Range.
·Audible Continuity Beeper. · 12,000 Hour Battery Life.
Model 350 includes test lead set, batteries, spare fuse,
and operator's manual.
$229.00
Model 380 Bench/Portable
·True RMS ( AC + DC coupled). ·Temperature Function. ·20 Ohm Range. ·0.1% DC Volts Accuracy. ·Diode Test Function.
·Audible Continuity Beeper. · 12,000 Hour Battery Life.
The True RMS feature makes the Model 360 an ideal
meter for testing power supplies. A decoupling switch
allows the AC ripple of aDC power supply to be easily
measured. The storage compartment on the top of the
meter will hold the test lead set, spare fuse, and an
operator's manual.
$289.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 15
B Et K PRECISION
DYNASCAN CORPORATION
6460 West Cortland St. Chicago, IL 60635 (31 2) 88 9-9 08 7
VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATOR
DELUXE VIDEO SIGNAL GENERATOR MODEL 1260
FEATURES
·NTSC Color Bars- with or without -IWO signal
·TCXO Master Oscillator Stability Exceeds Broadcast Requirements
·Five step linear staircase; selectable high/low chroma
·Selectable chroma and burst ·Circle pattern ·Multiburst pattern- full field,
stepped or variable ·Convergence patterns- dot, cross-
hatch, dot-hatch, center cross ·Raster patterns- eight EIA colors ·RGB outputs ·Interlaced or progressive scan
czz 'eretere
1260 NTEC GENEPATOR
·
ell OM" 11111 11111 MN MN IN al
y
Il·i ·Mi·l ·III· Oa ell II Ill SIN III Mil Mil OM NM OM
·Gen lock
·Crystal Oscillator- I- F, CH 3, CH 4 and sync generator
·Composite video output ·RF output ·External Video input ·Sound output- 1kHz or 3kHz ·External audio input and output ·Black Burst output ·Sync Pulse output ·Subcarrier output ·Multiburst output ·Composite blanking output ·Rugged rack- mount cabinet design
APPLICATIONS
Television studio and transmitting station set-up and maintenance,,, CATV, MATV, CCTV system installation, adjustment, service and maintenance...Color or black and white video monitor or RGB color monitor installation, adjustment, and service...television, VTR, VCR and Video disc testing, service and adjustment... Production line testing of nearly any type of video product ... video product design lab.
SPECIFICATIONS
PATTERNS
RF OUTPUT
GEN LOCK ·
NTSC Color Bars: White ( 75%). yellow, cyan. green, magenta, red, blue. black (7.5% set-up).
-IWQ: - I. white ( 100%), O. black. Switch selectable on or off with NTSC color bars. Pattern appears on bottom 1/4 of vertical scan.
Top Burst Off: Switch selectable ( top 1/4 of vertical scan).
Full Burst Off: Switch selectable. Chroma Off: Switch selectable. Circle: May be superimposed on any pattern. Dots: 19 x15. Crosshatch: 19 x15. Dot Hatch: Dots and crosshatch.
Center Cross: 1vertical and 1horizontal line. Linear Staircase: 5equal steps.
High or Low Chroma Staircase: Burst phase chroma. 40 or 20 IEEE units.
Raster: Black (7.5%), red, blue, green. yellow, cyan, magenta. white ( 75%).
M ULTIBURST
Gated Multiburst: Six fixed frequencies (0.5. 1.5, 2.0, 3.0, 3.58 and 4.2 MHz ± 5%) with a leading white level.
Full Field: Any one of the six frequencies selectable for full field display.
Variable Frequency: One selectable variable frequency may be substituted for 4.2 MHz as the sixth frequency or full field (variable from 2 MHz to 7MHz).
Amplitude Flatness: ± 1dB to 4.2 MHz.
MULTIBURST OUTPUT
Multiburst output available at rear panel for frequency measurement.
Voltage: 24V p- pinto open circuit. Impedance: 1kit
VIDEO OUTPUT
Composite Video Voltage: Preset=1 V p-p. Variable=0 to 1.5 V p- p.
Impedance: 75 ohms.
Polarity: Positive ( negative sync).
Modulation: Negative.
Carrier Frequency: Crystal controlled. CH 3=61.25 MHz. CH 4=67.25 MHz, I-F=45.75MHz.
Voltage: 5mV rms minimum into 750. Impedance: 75 ohms.
Generator synchronizes horizontal and vertical sync and color burst with external NTSC video input. Adjustments on front panel for horizontal delay and chroma phase. BNC connector on rear panel for loop through.
COMPOSITE SYNC OUTPUT -4 V into 75s).
External Video Input: Switch selectable; requires 1V p- p. 75n input.
COMPOSITE BLANKING OUTPUT -·-4 V into 75u
SOUND OUTPUT
BLACK BURST OUTPUT
RF Modulation: 4.5 MHz FM-modulated intercarrier (±25 kHz deviation with internal 3kHz audio signal).
Continuous output consisting of negative sync (286mV p- p), color burst (206mV p- p), and black level: 7511.
Internal Signal: 3kHz or 1kHz. Audio Output: 3V p- pinto 1kn.
RGB OUTPUT Outputs: Red, green, and blue outputs to drive 525
External Audio Input: 1to 3V p-p. 100 Hz to 10 kHz,
line color monitors.
pre-emphasis of 75 ps.
Video Patterns: Convergence, full field raster, multi-
Input Impedance: 10 ka
burst, circle, and staircase.
SYNCHRONIZATION
Voltage: High/low selectable. Use low level for
Type: 59.94 Hz field of 525 lines, interlaced scan. 262 lines non-interlaced scan.
staircase. Low level approx. 1Volt p-pinto 75 ohms.
Horizontal Frequency: 15.734 kHz.
High level 2.4 V into open circuit (TTL).
Vertical Frequency: 59.94 Hz. Horizontal Blanking: 10.76 ps. Vertical Blanking: 1.33 ms. Horizontal Sync: 4.89 ps. Front Porch: 1.47 ps.
Burst: 8cycles minimum 3.58 MHz. Equalizing Pulse: 2.44 ps.
TRIGGER OUTPUT
Sync: Horizontal and vertical sync; circuit (TTL).
Polarity: Positive sync. Positive RGB
2.4 V into open
MISCELLANEOUS
Input Power Requirements: 105-130 VAC. 60 Hz. 25 Watts.
Operating Temperature: 00 to + 50° C. Specifications, apply for operating temper-
Type: Horizontal or vertical sync pulse available at front panel, switch selectable. Horizontal sync pulse available on rear panel
Voltage: TTL level.
ature of + 18° to + 28° C unless otherwise noted. Temperature coefficient less' than 0.1 times the stated accuracy per °C.
Impedance: 75 ohms. Polarity: Negative going sync. SUBCARRIER OUTPUT
Dimensions ( HWD): 5-5/16 x 19 x14" ( 135 x483 x 356 mm).
Weight: 14 lb (6.36 kg)
Frequency: 3.579545 MHz. (± 5Hz,0° to + 40° C). Setability ± 1Hz; TCXO.
Voltage: Approx. 1V p-p. no load. Impedance: 75 ohms.
ACCESSORIES SUPPLJED WITH MODEL 1260
Instruction Manual
Schematic Diagram & Parts List
Model 1260
S1695.00
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
VT- 16
RM-20 Rack Mount Slide Kit Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$69.00
B Et K PRECISION
DYNASCAN CORPORATION 6460 West Cortland St. Chicago, IL 60635 (312) 889-9087
NTSC SIGNAL GENERATOR
Model 1251/ $995.00 FEATURES
·Generates NTSC color bars with or without IWO signal. 5step linear staircase, staircase with high or low chrome, multiburst stepped, full field and variable · External video input - modulates RF or If carrier outputs · Crystal controlled RF. IFNTSC sync · 45talHz audio intercarner modu·
tallow selectable IkHz. 3kHz. external · Dot. Crass hatch, dot hatch center cross convergence patterns · Raster color selection red or green or blue and all combinations · 3579545 MHz subcarrier output · Selectable vertical and horizontal sync output · Selectable on/off for chroma burst
NTSC COLOR GENERATOR SEMICONDUCTOR TESTERS
SPECIFICATIONS
PATTERNS NTSC Color Bars IWQ ( bottom) Top
Burst OFF ( top i., of vert scan) Selectable.
Full Burst OFF Selectable Chroma OFF
Selectable Dots Cross hatch, Dot Hatch,
Center Cross. Linear Staircase, High or Low
Chroma burst phase chroma 40 or 20 IEEE
units. color raster
MULTIBURST- 05, I5. 20, 3O. 358 and 42
MHz Six bursts with aleading white level and
ON- OFF selectable color burst Selection of
any one of tile six bursts for full field display
One variable frequency selectable as full field
or the sixth burst of multiburst
VIDEO OUTPUT Voltage Fined 1Vpp
Pt
Variable OUTPUT
0-1 --
5Vpp Impedance Crystal Controlled CH
75 3,
I/ CH
4.
Video IF, 47 75 MHz Voltage 10 mV RMS
approx ( No Load) Impedance 75 ( tExt
Video Input Selectable ( IVpp. 75 ti input)
SOU40 OUTPut - F14 45MHz Modulaban on RF On- Oft Select ( 1kHz, 3kHz) Eat Audio Input 11 Vpp 100 Hz 10 kHz Pre-emphasis of 75 us Input Z 10 kt t
SYNC Horn 15 74 kHz Vert 59 94 Hz Honz Blanking 10 76 us Vert Blanking 133 ms H'riz Sync 489 us Front Porch 147 us Burst 8Cycles min (158 MHz) Equalizing Pulse 244ms
TRIGGER INPUT - Honz vert Voltage 1Vpp Impedance 75 n
SUB>RR1ER OUTPUT - 3519545 MHz ± 50 Hz Voltage IVpp Approx ( No Load) Impedance 75 (-)
GENERAL - Power 105 130 VAC. 60 Hz 19 W Size ( HWD) II 5a457 a30 5cm
x18 x12") Weii.ht 5kg ( II lbs I
VACUUM TUBE VOLTMETER
Model 177 / $228.00
LAB QUALITY SEMICONDUCTOR TESTER
Model 530 / $ 497.00 FEATURES
· Measures transistor beta or FET gm ·Measures transistors cut-off frequency up to 1500 MHz · Non-destruc-
FEATURES
· Internal DC power supply for ohms ranges -- no battery needed · 37 ranges, including dB and zero center scales.
The 177 includes the PR-43 DC/AC/ Ohms probe with switch and ground
tive testing of transistor and diode breakdown voltages · Measures Ices and loss · Fast testing of transistors, FET's and SCR's -- in or out-of-circuit ·Base diagrams are not required · No biasing information required · Identifies all leads of transistors and SCR's ·Automatic identification of PNP/NPN types and N or P channel FET's.
SPECIFICATIONS
IN- CIRCUIT TESTS
Good/Bad Test: For bipolar transistors,
FET's and SCR's. Identifies: All leads of bipolar
transistors and SCR's, and gate lead of FET's. Also identifies device polarity by automatically indicating PNP, NPN, and P or N channel FET's.
OUT- OF-CIRCUIT TESTS Measures: Transistor beta, gm, fr, Ices,
loss, BVcrs, and Ply. Transistor Beta: Two lc ranges ( low
power, 10-600; high power, 15-200). gm: OF FET's
lead. Low AC ranges have special calibrations. Features easy- to- read 7" mirrored scale, DC polarity switch and 1% precision resistors in all critical circuits.
SPECIFICATIONS
DC Volts: -± 0-.5, 15, 5, 15, 50, 150, 500. 1500.
AC Volts: RMS, 0-1.5, 5, 15, 50, 150, 500, 1500; peak-to- peak, 4, 14, 40. 140, 400, 1400, 4000; frequency response, -2:1 dB, 4 Hz-4 MHz, 600
fi: Three ranges (0-100 MHz; 0-750 MHz; 0-1500 MHz). Ic/s and loss: From . 5 AA to 5 mA. 8Vces of transistors and Ply of diodes at 10 V (5 mA max.) or variable 10-100 V (100 µA max.).
Accuracy: Within -±-10% for ft, gm test; ±-20% fi tests.
INDICATORS Audible tone for GOOD indication. Front
panel switch provides tone defeat. LEDs identify device polarity. Panel Indicator and Test Switch identifies all leads of transistors and SCR's and base lead of FET's. Jacks and test leads are color coded. Meters indicate other device parameters.
APPLIED TEST CURRENTS Collector: 100 mA at 4% duty cycle. Base: 200 mA at 4% duty cycle
(HI drive); 0.75 mA at 4% duty cycle (LO drive). Test Repetition Rate: 6 per second. Voltage for Leakage Test: Variable from 0-100 VDC.
ohm source, 5V range. Resistance: 0-1 K, 10 K. 100 K; 0-1,
10, 100, 1000 meg; 10, 100, 1000, 10K, 100K center scale.
Input Resistance: 11 Mn ( 1MI/ in probe).
Accuracy: DC, -± 3% f.s.; AC, ±-5% f.s.
Power Required: 117/234 VAC. 50/60 Hz.
Size ( H4W4D): 18 x 18 n9 cm (7.5" s 7.5" 43.6").
Net Weight: 2.2 kg. ( 6 lbs.).
High- power beta and gm Tests: Special 300 µS, 1% duty cycle current pulses enable testing at 2 amps without over-dissipation of device under test. Maximum beta ( 200) and maximum gm/425 milliohms) correspond to test current of 2 amps.
LIMITING IN- CIRCUIT SHUNT VALUES
FOR IN-CIRCUIT GOOD/BAD TEST
Resistance: Down to 1001 (HI drive).
Down to 1.5 len ( LO drive).
CapUapcittoan0c.e3:AFUp(
to LO
15 rrF (HI drive).
drive).
GENERAL Color-coded Mini- lock clips for hands.
free operation. Detailed instruction manual. Optional FP- 5 Dynaflex three- lead, one- hand probe for easy in- circuit testing. Power Required: 117/234 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 watts. Size ( H4W40): 10 x 33.6 x25.6 cm (4 o 13.5 x 10.25"). Net Weight: 2.3 kg. ( 5 lbs.).
CSA Listed.
PORTABLE INDUSTRIAL TRAN-
SISTOR TESTER
FEATURES
· Fast GO/NO-GO In- circuit transistor testing · Fast and thorough GOOD/BAD out- of-circuit testing · Tests FET's and SCR's in-circuit or out-of- circuit · Connect any test clip to any component lead · Gives positive emitter-base-collector identification in LO drive -- positive base identification in HI drive · Light- Emitting Diodes incidate NPNOK or PNP-OK · Pocket-size -- over 100 hours of testing from single set of "AA" cells · Digital stability -- no
Model 510 / $155.00
adjustments; nothing to go out of calibration.
SPECIFICATIONS
IN/OUT-CIRCUIT TESTS GOOD/BAD test for transistors. FET's,
SCR's and Darlingtons. Identifies transistors as NPN or PNP. FET as N- channel or P-channel. Identifies FET gate lead. Identifies all leads of transistors in
LO drive; base lead in HI drive. Identifies all leads of SCR.
APPLIED TEST CURRENTS Base Drive: 250 mA ( HI) or 1mA ( LO)
at 2% duty cycle. Collector Drive: 125 mA at 2% duty
cycle.
Test Repetition Rate: 5 Hz.
IN-CIRCUIT SHUNT LIMITS FOR VALID GOOD/BAD TEST: R/C: > 10 ohms with HI drive;
>1.5 K ohms with LO drive/Up to 25 µF with HI drive; up to . 3 µF with LO drive. Power Requirements: 6 VDC from four "AA" cells, not supplied. Accessories: Carrying Case and test leads supplied. Model FP- 5 Dynaflex Probe (optional). Size ( H4W4D): 4 s9.5 X 17 cm (1.75 x3.75 n6.6"). Weight: . 45 kg. ( 1 lb.).
INDUSTRIAL TESTER
TRANSISTOR
FEATURES
· Now with HI/L0 drive · Works incircuit when others won't · Identifies all three transistor leads · Random lead connection · Audibly and visually indicates GOOD transistor · Automatic NPN/PNP determination · Positive Si! Ge identification · Tests diodes, SCR's, FET's, and Darlingtons.
Model 520B / S275.00
SPECIFICATIONS
IN- CIRCUIT TESTS Good/Bad Test: For PNP and NPN
Idetnrtainfsiiesst:orNsP. NFEoTr'sPNaPn;dNSCoRr'Ps.
channel FET's.
OUT-OF-CIRCUIT TESTS Good/Bad Test: For PNP and NPN
transistors. FET's, SCR's, leakage and loss. Identifies: NPN or PNP; silicon or germanium transistors. Measures: Reverse leakage from 0.1 AA to 5 mA.
AUTOMATIC INDICATORS Audible Tone for GOOD indication.
LEDs identify NPN or PNP devices and Ge or Si types. Test Switch automatically identifies base or gate lead for good transistors or FET's. Meter Scales: 0.1 AA to 5 mA for Ice leakage; silicon and germanium power and signal transistor leakage limits.
APPLIED TEST CURRENTS Collector: 250 mA at 3% duty cycle. Base: 125 mA at 3% duty cycle. Test Repetition Rate: 10 per second.
LIMITING IN- CIRCUIT BASE- EMITTER SHUNT VALUES FOR VALID TESTS R/C: Greater than 10 ohms/Less than
15 µF.
GENERAL Accessories: Color- coded test leads
with Mini- Lock clips; detailed instruction manual. Power Required: 105/125 VAC. 50/60 Hz; also available for 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. Size8(xHrox3D5),,,2)0. 17 x8.9 cm
Net Weight: 2.27 kg. ( 9
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 17
BLONDER TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
BANDPASS FILTER
BPFa
BPFa SINGLE- CHANNEL BANDPASS FILTER Stock No. 4414
Features · Suitable for use in adjacent channel headends · Lower adjacent channel sound down 60dB · Upper adjacent channel picture down 60dB · Fits standard 19" rack
The BPFa is a VHF single- channel bandpass filter. It provides extremely high rejection of signals outside of its bandpass, including adjacent channels. A BPFa is available for each standard VHF channel, midband channels A thru I, superband channels Jthru P, and FM. Circuitry consists of a high- 0, six- stage bandpass filter and two-phase cancellation traps,
The traps are normally factory aligned to the lower adjacent sound and upper adjacent picture carrier frequencies. BPFa's are recommended in adjacent channel headends, ahead of individual strip amplifiers. The model BPFa may also be used to eliminate the undesired lower sideband of a CCTV camera with RF output to permit the use of the camera with a lower adjacent VHF channel.
Typical Specifications Impedance: 75 ohms Return Loss - Input/Output ( between video
and sound carrier): 13dB Return Loss - FM band ( 90-107MHz)
Input/Output: 16dB ( with traps) Insertion Loss ( Low Band)
At picture carrier: 3.5dB Sound carrier ref. to pix: - 2.0dB Insertion Loss ( High Band) At picture carrier: 8.0dB Sound carrier ref. to pix: - 2.0dB
Insertion Loss ( FM Band)
90-108MHz: 3.0dB At 88MHz: 5.0dB ( no traps)
Bandpass Flatness ref. to picture carrier Low Band ( from pix minus 0.5MHz
to pix plus 4.0MHz): + /- 1.5dB High Band ( from pix minus 0.25MHz
to pix plus 4.0MHz): + /- 1.5dB FM Band ( 90-108MHz): 1.5dB ( with traps) Selectivity - Low Band
Trap - lower adj. sound: 60dB down Trap - upper adj. video: 60dB down Lower adj. video: 40dB down Upper adj. sound: 50dB down Lower adj. band edge: 55dB down Upper adj. band edge: 55dB down Selectivity - High Band Trap - lower adj. sound: 60dB down
Trap - upper adj. video: 60dB down Lower adj. video: 40dB down Upper adj. sound: 45dB down Lower adj. band edge: 50dB down Upper adj. band edge: 50dB down Selectivity - FM Band At 82MHz: 30dB At 114MHz: 22dB At Sound Trap: 60dB down At Pix Trap: 60dB down
$414.66
VT- 18
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BLONDER TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
bum
·
MCA-b SINGLE CHANNEL PROCESSOR Stock No. 4454
The MCA- bchannel processor is a3volt VHF TV strip amplifier with automatic gain control and all solid-state circuitry. It is intended to amplify and stabilize the level of asingle VHF channel in MATV and CATV headend systems. The model number of the MCA- b amplifier indicates the channel number it will amplify ( e.g. MCA- b2is for amplifying Channel 2). The MCA- bfeatures high output even on adjacent channels through the use of a built-in intermodulation notch filter and a built-in aural carrier level control notch filter. Each MCA- b consists of three modular sections: A 6MHz wide channelized input amplifier with variable gain for AGC, amain amplifier with five broadband RF stages as well as the power supply and AGC control circuitry, and achannelized output module consisting of adirectional filter diplexer to enable backmatched mixing of alternate channels in asystem. All three modules can be easily removed for servicing and/or channel changing.
FEATURES · Interchangeable broadband amplifier board to facilitate
maintenance ·Adjustable aural carrier control for lower distortion · Lightning and line voltage surge protected ·True peak detector AGC ·Wide dynamic range
SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Maximum output for 1/2dB sync compression: 69.5dBmV ( 3.0 volts)
min.; 71.0dBmV ( 3.5 volts) typical Recommended output level for color operation: 68dBmV ( 2.5V) for
920kHz beat down 55dB min., 60dB typical ( measured with P = -8dB, S = - 15dB, C = - 17dB) Recommended output level for adjacent channel operation: 66dBmV (2.0V) for adjacent channel beat down 48dB min., 58dB typical (measured with S = 15dB) Gain: 55.0dB min., 61.0dB typical Noise Figure at Full Gain: 7.0dB typical AGC Range: 40dB min AGC Stiffness ( output change for + / - 20dB input change): Less than + / - 0.25dB at 69dBmV output; Less than + / - 0.5dB at 59dBmV
output Maximum input with level set at 69dBmV output: 43dBmV Bandpass Flatness, 6MHz BW ( over 40dB gain control range):
+ /- 1.5dB max.; + /- 0.75dB typical Alternate channel rejection ( use with BPFa Bandpass Filter at input for
adjacent channel operation): - 30dB ( + / - 9MHz from channel center) typical Input Match: 14dB return loss typical Output Match: 18dB return loss typical greater than 9MHz from channel center; 18dB return loss typical on channel Power Requirement: 117VAC, 60Hz, 0.11 amp Semi- conductor Complement: 2- ICs, 1-FET, 6- transistors, 9- diodes
CHANNEL PROCESSORS
Mechanical Line Cord: 3- wire grounded; 3- wire convenience outlet Connectors: BTF-1130, F- type, Female; G/F monitor point Fuse: 1/8 amp., Slo-Blo
Dimensions: 19"L x 1-3/4"H x4''D Shipping Weight: 4lbs.
$385.77
HMCA-b SINGLE CHANNEL PROCESSOR Stock No. 4462
The HMCA-b channel processor is a6- volt VHF TV strip amplifier with automatic gain control and all solid-state circuitry. It is intended to amplify and stabilize the level of asingle VHF channel in MATV and CATV headend systems. The model number of the HMCA-b amplifier indicates the channel number it will amplify ( e.g. HMCA-b 2 is for amplifying Channel 2).
Each HMCA-b consists of three modulator sections: A 6MHz wide channelized input amplifier with variable gain for AGC, amain amplifier with five broadband RF stages as well as the power supply and AGC control circuitry, and achannelized output module consisting of adirectional filter diplexer to enable backmatched mixing of alternate channels in asystem. All three modules can be easily removed for servicing and/or channel changing. To simplify maintenance, there are two main amplifier configurations, one for the low band ( Channel 2-6) and one for the high band ( Charriel 7-13).
FEATURES · Provides a stable, quality signal free of distortion and intermodul-
ation products ·A built-in aural carrier control reduces the sound level for maximum
output and adjacent channel operation
· Modular construction for quick, easy servicing ·Contains adiplexing output filter for loop-thru lashups of alternate
channels ·Convenience AC outlet mounted on front of panel for easy connec-
tions between mounted units
SPECIFICATIONS Electrical Maximum output for 1/2dB sync compression: 75.5dBmV ( 6.0 volts)
min., 77.5dBmV ( 7.5 volts) typical Recommended Output Level for Color Operation: 74dBmV ( 5.0V) for
920kHz beat 55dB down min., 58dB typical ( measured with Pix =
-8dB, Sound = - 15dB, Color = - 17dB) Recommended Output Level for Adjacent Channel Operation:
73dBmV 14.5V) for adjacent channel beat down 48dB min., 55dB typical ( measured with Sound = - 15dB)
Gain: 63dB min., 69dB typical Noise Figure at Full Gain: 7.0dB AGC Range: 40dB min. AGC Stiffness ( output change for + /- 20 input change): + / - 0.25dB at
76dBmV out; + /- 0.5dB at 63dBmV output level setting Maximum Input with level set at 72dBmV out: 48dBmV Bandpass Flatness, 6MHz BW over full 40dB AGC range:
+ /- 1.5dB max., + / - 0.75dB typical Alternate Channel Rejection ( skirt selectivity): - 30dB
( + /- 9MHz from center) typical Input Match on Channel at 75 ohms at 10dB AGC gain reduction:
14dB return loss typical Output Match on Channel at 75 ohms: 13dB return loss typical Output Match, alternate channels and rest of 54-216MHz band at 75
ohms: 18dB return loss typica Power Requirement: 117V, 60Hz, 0.20 amp Supply Voltage Range for 0.5dB change in level or output capability:
100-130VAC Semi- conductor complement: 10- transistors; 1-FET; 2- ICs; 16- Diodes
Mechanical Line Cord: 3- wire grounded; 3- wire convenience outlet
Connectors: BTF-100, F- type Female; G/F monitor point
Fuse: 1/4 amp, slow- blow Dimensions: 19"L x 1-3/4"H x4"D Shipping Weight: 5lbs.
$664.49
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 19
BOSCH
2300 S. 2300 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-8000 Telex 38-8352
MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM/ MASTER CONTROL SWITCHER
Because It Communicates,
Routing Switcher
1101101
0;311 4 4-
'14»
Master Clock
Printer
maze DIM
;Leredi
,
111111
TCS-1 Machine Control System
FEATURES
· Controls up to 100 VTR's/film chains · Dual twisted pair wiring simplifies installation ·Control of each VTR/film chain can be delegated to any one of eight
studio control panels or machine control multiplexers: Each studio control panel can operate up to four VTR's and three film chains simultaneously; each includes a " Gang- Start" switch. (custom configurations available) Each machine control multiplexer can accommodate up to 30 MC- 24 control panels
· Central microprocessor can be programmed to provide special functions, such as permanent assignment of specific machines to specific control panels
· System can be integrated with Bosch TVS/TAS-1000 Distribution Switcher to provide dynamic machine selection
The TCS-1 is a mcroprocessor/software based machine control system designed to operate up to 100 videotape recorders and/or telecine film chains It eliminates patch panels or complex relay switching systems where it is desirable to delegate control of machines to various points. Connection between the control panels and the
VTR's/film chains is accomplished with dual twisted pair audo-type
wiring, rather than the multiple- conductor cabling normally used with remote controls. The system includes provisions for assigning specific
machines to specific control panels, eliminating the possibility of conflicting or unauthorized control commands reaching the same macnine from different control stations.
MI- 8 MI- 24 MD- 8 MC- 200 MC- 24
MCM-1000 DC- 1
CP-1200A BP- 1200
8- Function Machine Interface, 13/4 " Rack mount
24- Function Machine Interface, 31/ 2 " Rack mount Machine Delegate Panel, 1'4" Rack mount Sudic Control Panel
Single- machine Control Panel, requires MCM-1000. Includes space for one CP-1200A or BP- 1200
Machine Control Multiplexer, connects with up to 30 MC- 24's
Dynamic Machine Selector, connects with up to 6 MD- 8's and 30 MI- 8/24's ( must be used . n connection with Bosch TVS/
TAS -1000 Distribution Switcher) Singie- bus Control Panel, with audio breakaway, mounts in MC- 24
Blank panel, mounts in MC- 24 not having CP-1200A
CZ Musa
01:1011
CM CM MMII3
110 OM
M»
uca 14
so
ama. Mein
01·0111·111·1111·11·11·0110
a
10111·1·110111101····011101
an aosamaaaa aaaasidsom MUM 0
Machine Control
EveT7
Stack
Automation System
MICS-2000 Master Control Switcher
FEATURES
· Dynamically labeled input buttons, assignable to any input · Instant switching between on- air and production work with the
bypass mode, allowing one switcher to do the work of two, automatica'ly ·Two fully independent keyers allow mix- keys and key- mixes · Microprocessor control of up to four channels of audio allows smooth transitions arid precise control of audio levels · Multiple memories allow Saves and Recalls of sw.tcher configura tons
· Single-stage mixing of both audio and video provides excellent operational specifications, and eliminates system timing problems
The MCS-2000 allows unlimited input selections. Select any of these inputs as key sources, with as many external key inputs as you need, automatically. It allows you to use any input as ar audio under or audio over source. It also enables the MCS· 2000 to offer the easiest system timing, and the simplest installation in the master control industry.
The MCS-2000 can offer the most sophisticated, and yet still the simplest preroll system you can get. It offers the capacity to multi- roll A/V splits and backup machines, to automatically handle film chain multiplexers, and to provide automatic full- function machine control at the operator's finger-tips.
The MCS-2000 can provide complete on- air automation, with every function of the switcher available to an automation system. The automation system can even adjust the clip levels of a keyer.
The MCS-2000 can provide automatic logging of all svvitcher events, even without an automation system.
The Switcher can be interfaced to acomplex machine control system such as the TCS-1 and will provide complete full- function control of any machine selected on the preset or program bus.
VT- 20
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BOSCH
2300 S. 2300 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-8000 Telex 38-8352
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHING SYSTEMS
TVS/TAS-2000 Video/Audio Distribution Switcher
FEATURES ·Multi- level breakaway capability ( 7level standard) ·Power supply alarm indicators on all boards · Power supply alarm indicators with contact closure for remote alarm · No PROM changing on crosspoint boards ·Clamped video inputs ·Output delay trim · Redundant control card capability ·Coax party line or RS-422 control standard ·Internal refresh memory with 120- hour memory save · Fused power supply outputs · Redundant power supply capability ·Vertical internal switching of video · Field expansion of outputs without rewire ·Compact -- 10 x10 matrix arrangement. 60 x10 audio and video or
130 x 10 audio or video in 8-3/4" card cage ·Internal cooling fans. Fans removable during normal operation ·Matrix " in use" indicator ·Computer automated system testing of audio and video circuit para-
meters through all possible signal paths. Hard copy results supplied.
The TVS/TAS 2000 Distribution Switcher is the newest in the family of Bosch distribution switchers. Bosch developed the 2000 switcher system using the knowledge gained from earlier switcher experience, and adding features suggested by our customers. Improved packaging, audio signal performance, video DC restoration, output delay adjustments to simplify timing, circuitry to monitor the power supplies on each circuit board. The power supplies are also monitored for failures. Redundant power supplies allow the system to continue operation if one power supply fails. The user is alerted to the failure of the first power supply, while the system continues to operate on the second.
CP -1400 Control Panel
The CP-1400 aSingle Bus 10- key Control Panel for the TVS/TAS 1000 and TVS/TAS 2000 Video/Audio Distribution Switcher features alphanumeric LED displays for rapid identification of selected source.
CP -1404 Lever Wheel Control with Status
The CP-1404 Control Panels, for use with TVS/TAS 1000 and TVS/TAS 2000 Distribution Switchers, have lever wheel switches for input selection. LED readouts are provided for true switcher status.
CP -1405 Desk Top Lever Wheel Control Panel
The CP-1405 Control Panel, for use with TVS/TAS 1000 and TVS/ TAS 2000 Distribution Switchers, is designed to sit on adesk or table top. It is intended to provide economical switcher control in offices and conference rooms.
CP -1420 Control Panel
The basic CP-1420 Control Panel for use with TVS/TAS 1000 and TVS/TAS 2000 Distribution Switchers, provides for 20 pushbuttons to select inputs for one switcher output. The buttons can select inputs in numerical order, or they can be encoded to select inputs in any order. Additional buttons may be added to expand input selection. X-Y control and category/number selection are also available.
TVS/TAS-2000
CP -1440 Control Panel
The CP-1440 Control Panels for use with : he TVS/TAS 1000 and TVS/ TAS 2000 Distribution Switcrters have three level alphanumeric lever wheel switches for input selection. Four character alphanumeric LED displays are provided for status.
CP-1450 Control Panel
The CP-1450 is asingle- bus, microprocessor based control panel for use with TVS/TAS 1000 and TVS/TAS 2000 Video/Audio Distribution Switchers. Alphanumeric lever wheels are used to reduce space requirements and cost while still providing category/number operation.
CP-1500 Control Panel
The CP-1500, afull- matrix control panel for use with TVS/TAS 1000 and TVS/TAS 2000 Video/ Audio Distribution Switchers, features alphanumeric LED displays for rapid identification of sources and destinatiors. The alphanumeric displays, which can consist of any combination of one to four letters or numbers, are complemented by descriptive labels on a10- key pad to provide simple error- free operation.
CP -1550 Control Panel
The CP-1550 is asingle- bus, microprocessor based control panel for use with TVS/TAS 1000 and TVS/TAS 2000 Video/Audio Distribution Switchers. Alphanumeric lever wheels are used to reduce space requirements and cost while still providing category/number operation.
TI -2000 Telephone Interface
The TI- 2000 Telephone Interface allows remote control of TVS/TAS 1000 and TVS/TAS 2000 Distribution Switchers from any Tot.chTone 4 : eiephone. All commands to the switcher are entered, using the Touch- - one 4 pad. Prompting of the operator and status from the switcher are reported by a synthesized voice.
SM -2000 Full Matrix Status Monitor
SM-2000 Fril1 Matrix Status Monitor provides full matrix status information in alahanumeric format of entire matrix for display on any video monitor. Seiection of display pages may be remote controlled via the party lire control system. The video output is compatible with the TVS/TAS 1000 and TVS/TAS 2000 video switchers.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 21
BOSCH
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
2300 S. 2300 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-8000 Telex 38-8352
"525" SERIES EQUIPMENT
TVA- 528 Video Distribution Amplifier
·Differential input · One input/Six outputs · Precision-grade com-
ponents assure long-term stability · 1% bounce ( overshoot) · 0.25% distortion and tilt, 50Hz square wave ( Servo on) · Accepts delay and equalizer plug-in operations · DL 525 Delay plug-in option - up to 300 nsec delay with frequency response/ripple of less than 0.25dB to
5MHz · EQ 525 Equalizer plug-in option - corrects for up to 1000 feet
of 8281 cable · Delay/Equalizer combinations possible
TVA-528 Precision Video Distribution Amplifier
$410.00
TVA- 524
Video Distribution Amplifier
TPA- 527
·Differential input · One input/Four outputs · Direct- coupled outputs · 0.25dB to 5.5MHz frequency response · 0.5% tilt 60Hz square wave · 0.25% 0.25° differential gain and phase ( 10-90% APL)
TVA 524
$326.00
TPA-527
Precision Pulse Distribution Amplifier
·One input/Four outputs · Precision design assures long-term stability · Separate output stages · Individual output 350-4000 nsec delay adjustments
TPA- 527
TPA- 528 Precision Broadcast Pulse Amplifier
$399.00
TAS- 525
TVS-525
·One input/Six outputs · High input noise immunity ·0.5% tilt; 1% overshoot and ringing · Symmetrical output rise and fall times ·Strappable for 2or 4 volt operation
TPA- 528
$289.00
burst addition to monochrome source with separate blackburst output
to switcher · Remote on/off control of burst on either output · Either output can be used for sync/blanking acder and/or burst adder · 360° burst phase adjustment
TSA-525
NOTE: Modules may be installed in RF-525 or RF -175 Rack Frames.
Distribution Amplifier
525 Series equipment may be intermixed subject to power
·TSA-525 for NTSC and PAS- M systems ( 3.58MHz), TSA-535 for
PAL- Isystems ( 4.43MHz) · 40dB input return loss at subcarrier fre-
quency ( Power on or off) · Greater than 360° individual phase adjustments · 1.8 to 2.0V p- p adjustable output level · Four outputs with 36dB isolation at 3.58MHz
TSA-525
$ 625.00
TAA-525
supply and mounting space restrictions. Please specify with order. TBB-525
ACCESSORIES
DL- 525
E0-525 RC- 5
Delay plug-in for TVA- 528
Equalizer plug-in for TVA- 528 5- pushbutton remote control panel,
$814.00
$326.00 74.00
Audio Distribution Amplifier
· Extremely low distortion at all power levels · Accepts balanced or unbalanced inputs · Wide dynamic range · High common mode rejection · Transformer- coupled inputs and outputs with individual gain adjustments
RP- 203
CC- 5/25 CC- 5/50
mounts in RP- 203 Rack panel for up o three remote control panels Connecting cable, 25 ft
Connecting cable, 50 ft
205.00
89.00 68.00 79.00
TAA-525
TVS/TAS-525 Video/Audio Distribution Switcher
$515.00
RACK FRAMES AND POWER SUPPLIES
RF -525
5-1/4" Rack frame for PS- 525 and up to
PS- 525
twelve 1" modules Power supply, 115V + /- 10%, 50/60Hz
247.00 389.00
·5x 1modules can be stacked for additional inputs with common
PS-525RK Power supply redundancy kit, two
latching or for multiple bus operation · Video-loop/audio-bridge inputs · Video switching is vertical interval, with asixth crosspoint for improved isolation specifications in multimodule systems, ( 0.2°
differential phase, 0.2% differential gain), (-60dB crosstalk) ·Switchers self- latch, require only momentary closures · TAS -525 Audio Distortion: 0.1dB overall; Crosstalk: - 75dB · 5x 1illuminated
pushbutton control panel available · The RC5 pushbutton remote control panel can be mounted in RP-203 rack frame. The RC5 will
PS-526RK
PS- 526 EX- 526 RP- 203
BP- 203
required for PS- 525's Same as PS-525RK but for use
with PS- 526's Power supply, 230V + /- 10%, 50/60Hz Module extender
Rack panel for remote control modules, accommodates up to three modules Blank panel for RP- 203
116.00
116.00 431.00 147.00
89.00 No Charge
operate either aTVS-525, or aTAS -525, or both simultaneously ( audio follow video). Looping control connections allow two control panels
to operate in parallel. Each RC5 requires aCC5 interconnecting cable.
TVS-525 TAS -525
$488.00 515.00
TBB-525
NOTE: A PS- 525 Power Supply must be ordered with each RF -525
Rack Frame. The RF-175 Rack Frame contains abuilt-in power supply; therefore, a PS- 525 is not required.
BLANK FILLER PANELS
BP- 1 1-3/4" x19" BP-2 3-1/2" x19"
$16.00 26.00
BP-4 7" x19" BP- 5 8-3/4" x19"
$37.00 42.00
Black Burst Generator/Sync Blanking and Burst Adder
· Burst adder · Permits smooth fades to black without loss of color-
lock · Two separate outputs permit simultaneous sync/blanking/
VT- 22
Prices and Specifications
Subject
BP- 3 5-1/4" x19" VENTILATION UNITS TVU-175 Ventilation Unit,
VRU-176 Ventilation Unit, to Change Without Notice.
32.00
117VAC 234VAC
BP- 6 10-1/2" x19"
47.00
$290.00 315.00
BOSCH
2300 S. 2300 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-8000 Telex 38-8352
SIGNAL PROCESSING EQUIPMENT
- 41004
e
gelltets.
new... «leer\
·01,11.,
Ole «I.
1111111111111111111111111
1 --1
TVP-1000 Video Processing Amplifier
Features
· Full sync, blanking, burst regeneration · Includes programmable pulse width digital sync generator with
genlock · Differential input rejects up to 30 V P- P Common Mode Hum · Strappable for operation with helical scan and U-Matic format
recorders · Separate sync, luminance, chrominance and burst processing · Failsafe compensated metallic- contact bypass · Full 360° subcarrier phasing · Full remote control · Reverts to monochrome black on incoming signal loss · Luminance and chrominance AGC ( optional) · VIRS AGC Mode -- Luminance/ chrominance ratio maintained.
Loss of VIRS causes reversion to burst AGC mode · Available for NTSC, PAL, or PAL- M standards · Selectable AGC responds to VIRS or burst for chroma gain
sync, VIRS or video for luminance gain
The TVP-1000 Video Processing Amplifier meets modern broadcast performance requirements with superior operating features and stability. Handling both color and monochrome signals, the TVP-1000 is designed to operate with quadraplex, helical scan or UMatic format videotape recorders. Models are available for NTSC, PAL or PAL- M. A differential amplifier at the processor input, together with an input clamp circuit, provides over 60 dB common mode hum rejection and over 35 dB reduction of single- ended hum. A wide dynamic range permits the circuit to effectively remove over 30 V P- Pcommon mode hum from the incoming video.
RC-1000 Remote Control
A remote control is available and separate controls are provided for Video, Chrominance, Pedestal, Sync, Burst and White Clip levels plus Sync Bypass, Processor Bypass, Video AGC and Chroma AGC. Any or all of these adjustments can be remotely controlled.
Sync Generator with Genlock
The sync generator built into the TVP-1000, aprogrammable digital unit, is an application of the TeleMation-originated digital approach to sync generator design. Transitions of the output pulses are all clock- derived and can be programmed in 100- nanosecond increments ( 83 nanoseconds for PAL operation). Once timed to meet local requirements, no further timing adjustments are required. The special genlock circuit developed for the TVP-1000 provides stable performance even with badly degraded input signals. Output signal variations are minimal-- regardless of wide variations in video level, burst level, time base stability and input signal-to-noise ratio. Internal strapping is provided for operation with helical scan or U-Matic format videotape recorders. The P0-1000 Pulse Output accessory permits the TVP-1000 to be
TVP-1000
used as a local sync generator. Sync generator outputs in 625/50 PAL units may be so used when genlocked, but do not provide the 25 Hz offset sync derivation when free- running. In normal operation, sync, burst and blanking are replaced with internally generated waveforms. A remotable Sync Inhibit switch optionally allows the sync portion of the waveform to pass through the amplifier unchanged. Luminance, chrominance, sync and burst information are separated, processed separately then recombined.
AG -1000 AGC Option
The TVP-1000 provides automatic luminance and chrominance gain control with the plug-in AG- 1000 AGC option. The luminance detector in the AG- 1000 is switchable to operate on peak video, sync, astandard VIRS signal or any combination where the greatest of the selected signals compared to its reference level is used for control of output video level. Similarly, the chroma detector can be strapped for detection of burst amplitude or VIRS reference, but not both. If VI RS are not present, burst will automatically be used instead.
Unique to the TVP-1000 is the ability to select Full Video or Partial Video AGC operation. The Partial Video selects an area of the raster approximating the safe title area for the sampling.When VI RS referenced AGC is used, chrominance/luminance ratios are precisely maintained. With the absence of VIRS, the TVP-1000 reverts to burst and video/sync AGC references.
Range of the luminance and chrominance AGC circuit is sufficient to restrict output variations to less than 5%, with 6dB increases or decreases in luminance or chrominance level.
The TVP-1000 allows a variety of sync and subcarrier reference options. All references can be derived from the incoming video. Sync and/or subcarrier may be referenced against external pulse sources or from an external black burst signal, if desired.
Video Processors
TVP-1000N TVP-1000P
NTSC Video Processor, use with RC- 1000
Remote Control recommended
$5,229.00
PAL- IVideo Processor
5 859.00
Accessories
AG- 1000
P0-1000N/M
RC- 1000
CC- 6/5 CC- 6/10
AGC Option. Specify for NTSC, PAL,
PAL- M operation
$646.00
Pulse Output Module,
NTSC/PAL-M
273.00
Remote Control Panel, rackmount.
Requires CC-6
299.00
Connecting Cable, 5ft.
105.00
Connecting Cable, 10 ft.
160.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 23
BOSCH
2300 S. 2300 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-8000 Telex 38-8352
SIGNAL PROCESSING EQUIPMENT
TCE-2000 Digital Color Encoders For NTSC/PAL/PAL-M Systems
Features
· Available for NTSC, PAL- I, PAL B, G, and H or PAL- M operation · Drift- free digital modulators ( U.S. Patent No. 3721755) · All- digital color bar generator -- full/split bars -- optional · Level- dependent proportional aperture correction
· 100% circuit access during operation -- no extenders required -- no phase shift or gain change during adjustment
· Umbilical connection for instant service replacement · Subcarrier rejection typically 55 dB · No DC shift with APL change · Drift- free current summing matrices ( U.S. Patent No. 3715470) · Meets all specifications over 100-130 VAC, 0°-60°C range without
readjustment
TCE-2000 Digital Color Encoders are available to produce NTSC, PAL or PAL- M encoded color signals according to NTSC, CCIR and EBU specifications. With the use of digital circuitry and precision components, set-up and maintenance requirements are minimized on the TCE-2000 Series.
TCE-2000N
The TCE-2000 Encoders are designed for use with both live and film
cameras, either three or four- tube types. All inputs are bridging with looping jacks provided. Compensation networks assure excellent input return loss characteristics.
TCE-2000N ·NTSC Digital Color Encoder · Digital Color Bar Generator · Pulse Delay Module
TCE-2000N
$ 4,473.00
TCE-2000P · PAL Color Encoder ·PAL- 1Digital Color Encoder · Digital Color Bar Generator · Pulse Delay Module
TCE-2000P
$5,208.00
THE -100 Hum Eliminator
Features
· For use in color and monochrome systems · Greatly reduces common mode power line hum in video circuits · Passive, failure- free · Compact · Flat frequency response · No differential phase or gain distortion
The THE- 100 greatly reduces common mode hum caused by differences in ground potential as frequently encountered in installations with long video cables, incoming and outgoing lines, or separate power distribution systems.
Specifications
Impedance
75 ohms, unbalanced
Connectors
Type BNC
Bandwidth
DC to 10 MHz
(-0.1dB at 5MHz, - 0.6dB at 10 MHz)
Hum Reduction To 50cl Bdepending on system
Dimensions
4-11/16"H x3-11/16"W x2-1/4"D
Weight
(119x 93 x57mm) 3lbs. ( 1.36 kg)
Insertion Loss Greater than 0.5dB
THE- 100 Hum Eliminator
$ 142.00
Incoming Video with 16V P- P hum superimposed (5 V/ Division)
Outgoing Video with 50 mV P- P hum: attenuation of 50 dB. ( 200 mV/Division)
VT- 24
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ilIMJCASÍ
4,7
e4- etc.
Box 8081 Manito Station
Spokane, WA 99203
(509) 448-0697
AUDIO- VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS Et ROUTING SWITCHERS
10 X 10 BCD BASED ROUTING SWITCHER
10 X 1VIDEO ROUTING SWITCHER
· · · e · · · · ·_ o_ · · · · fe
t....,tt:SIXttetee..101111.
AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
Self-contained, 1-3/4" x 19" rack mount, level control, standard BNC connections, power supply included.
2x 12 ( Dual 1x6's) 4x24 ( Quad 1x6's)
$495.00 795.00
10 X 1ROUTING SWITCHER
Direct access momentary pushbutton controls, 1-3/4" x 19" rack
mount, 10 inputs/1 output, power supply included, transformer
input.
Audio
110- Mono
$ 695.00
120- Stereo
995.00
Video
210- Video Only
41095.00
220- Audio Follow Video 11 level audio)
1295.00
230- Audio Follow Video 12 level audio)
1495.00
AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
Self-contained, regulated power supply, 1-3/4" x 19" rack mount, individual front panel output level controls, shielded power supplies
and transformer inputs. Available with either active or transformer outputs.
1x10- MA- Mono, Active Out 1x10- DMA- Stereo, Active Out 1x10- MT- Mono, Transformer Out 1x10-DMT-Stereo, Transformer Out
$ 395.00 595.00 695.00 895.00
10 X 10 AUDIO ROUTING SWITCHER ( BCD BASED)
Thumbwheel control with LED Matrix display of active crosspoints, 5-1/4" rack mount, power supply included, remote controls
available. ( Please specify on order).
510- Mono 10 x10 520- Stereo 10 x10
$ 3595.00 4595.00
THE MODULAR SERIES
A comp ete I.ne of Audio and/or Video Routing Switchers...Price On Request
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 25
CENTRAL DYNAMICS CORP.
147 Hymus Blvd.
Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810 TWX 610-422-3906 Telex 05-821506
SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
SDS-2 Signal Distribution System
SDS-2 Signal Distribution System is atotally new concept for meeting today's and tomorrow's signal distribution and control requirements.
System Architecture...the basic system's architecture is a modular straightforward simplistic design to assure extremely high performance and reliability regardless of system size.
This design approach also provides: · Flexibility.., microprocessor controlled and 4 levels of switching · Extremely Hi- Density 2048 crosspoint array ·Expandable. from 32 x32 up to 512 x512
RS-2000 Switching Array
RS-2000 Hi- Density switching array features the latest state-of-theart circuitry and packaging techniques in the audio and video domains.
The basic RS-2000 Switching Array contains 2048 crosspoints, the control board, apower supply.. all in arack frame that is only 14" high and 15"deep...8 RUs.
The control board includes the master intelligence system that uses the Intel 8085 microprocessor which has the capacity and speed to control a system using more than one RS-2000 array. The power supply has the capacity to power any two RS-2000 frames; therefore, providing redundant power supply capacity.
RS- 2000 Array
Power Supply
Crosspount PCB
P Control Memory
The basic array configuration is 32 inputs by 32 outputs and avariety of switching array types are available.
64x32 32x32
Audio Only
X
Data Only
X
AFV
X
Dual Audio
X
Video Only
X
Video + Data
X
Audio + Data
X
Dual Data
X
The basic system is configured for up to 4 signal levels and any combination of the above arrays may be combined. As an example...a system could include 1video, dual audio and 1data level. The latter could be used for SMPTE Time Code, digital control signals or data lines connecting peripheral computer hardware to various host computer systems. All 4 levels can be contraed in a Follow mode or separately at the discretion of the user.
The SDS-2 has been designed to accommodate arrays as large as 512 x512 with up to 4 levels.
Examples: Space requirements for SDS-2 systems using RS-2000 Hi- Density arrays.
32 x32 AFV
8RU
14"
64 x32 Audio Only
8RU
14"
3 Level 64 x32 AFV
64 x32 Audio Only 1 Level
24 RU 42" ( 3RS-2000 arrays)
96 x96 Video Only
72 RU
126" ( 9RS- 2000 arrays) (Less than 2std. racks)
MicroPatch TU Control System
MicroPatch is the computer software operating program that puts the intelligence into SDS-2's control scheme. MicroPatch is highly sophisticated, flexible and includes a variety of software application programs.
Among the programs included with MicroPatch are: · Salvo Take ·Security Loc · System Alert · MacroPath ·Quick Switch · SysConfig
An exclusive feature of the SDS-2 MicroPatch control software is the ability to initiate up to eight Salvo Takes automatically using the systems on- board clock. This feature permits users to define various matrix configurations that are used on a daily basis and have the system select them at apredetermined time. Each of these Salvos can be of any size from one crosspoint to 512 crosspoints with all switches occurring in the vertical interval.
MicroPatch also includes Help and extensive Diagnostic software routines.
VT- 26
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CENTRAL DYNAMICS CORP.
147 Hymus Blvd. Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810 TWX 610-422-3906 Telex 05-821506
SDS-2Signal Distribution System ( Cont'd)
Diag. 1 is used for Microprocessor/Memory/Control maintenance. Diag. 2tests the switching array(s) to verify that the routing switcher is operating properly. Individual crosspoints, tally, latches, all inputs to a specific output, a specific input to all outputs are all separate diagnostic routines...as is acheck which cycles through all the crosspoints. Self- Test routines are also included and are transparent to the operating system as are the other tests. The above represent asampling of the available programs. Software development will continue through Central Dynamics Computer Labs and aformal Central Dynamics Users Group. Testing, documenting and debugging will be conducted by Central Dynamics to assure that all programs developed by Users are compatible and available to other interested users. MicroPatch also includes programs that permit communicating with the outside world. The ports are compatible with RS-422/423 and RS- 232.
Control Hardware The control system is based on the Intel 8085 microprocessor which communicates to all control panels and switching arrays. The array's frame control board communicates to the matrices within the array. Example: If the array is configured into a32 x32 Video Only matrix and a32 x32 Audio Only matrix, the control board would talk to each path separately making it possible to independently control each half of the frame. This board also has sufficient RAM to store operating data so all the application programs can be executed efficiently; programs such as Salvo Take, Security Loc, etc. Memory is also backed up with battery power that can protect the memory for a minimum of 15 days.
MICROPATCH CRT STATUS DISPLAY
SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
ra o
Lg._ A3
Sier1V UMW e·Va
D
[A AC:1 C.7 A
pi
DEDICATED CONTROL PANEL
in]
Li Li
ALPHANUMERIC CONTROL PANEL
Video System The SDS-2 switcher RS-2000 uses the latest state-of-the-art video switching technology. The basic design of the crosspoint is a high speed analog multiplexer developed by Central Dynamics expressly for the SDS-2. Each video crosspoint board contains 16 multiplexers; each one under microprocessor control. This permits selecting a crosspoint and receiving aconfirming tally, via areturn signal from the matrix, that verifies that the selected crosspoint is latched.
Each video input amplifier PCB contains 16 unity gain wideband video amplifiers that distribute each video signal to a maximum of 32 multiplexers. The video output card contains 16 video output amplifiers which receive outputs from a maximum of 8 multiplexers. The unique Central Dynamics designed output switching amplifier eliminates the requirement for " combiners" when expanding aSDS-2 system. This output switching amplifier concvpt permits expanding the inputs by simply connecting the output of each frame to the output of another frame.. via a standard 75 Ohm coax cable.
This unique design not only reduces rack space when expanding, but assures maintaining and optimizing the system's signal distribution transparency and timing.
Audio System The SDS-2 utilizes aCentral Dynamics design that closely simulates the characteristics of a manual patch panel.
This is achieved by processing all audio signals in a balanced configuration. Each input signal is routed through two separate, isolated input buffers; therefore, two parallel crosspoint paths.
All audio switching uses highly reliable, standard CMOS analog switches. Packaging design for the input crosspoints and output amplifier cards achieves the same density as the video matrix.
A CRT control console is standard equipment and is used for defining the basic system operating parameters and as amaster control center for the system. Besides providing control, it is used to monitor the status of all input and output signals. Other status displays include input and output Lock configurations and Salvo Take tables.
When installing the SDS-2 system, reconfiguring the switching arrays or expanding the system, the terminal is used to define the control panel types used, their priorities, and the basic system operating parameters, i.e., audio follow video, stereo audio, digital control, etc.
In addition to the CRT control console, the user may select any number of awide variety of discrete and multi- function numeric or
alphanumeric control panels...up to a maximum of 512. The panels communicate with the 8085 microprocessor via eight coax serial control loops.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 27
CENTRAL DYNAMICS
147 Hymus Blvd. Pointe Claire, Quebec CN H9R 1G1 (514) 697-0810
TVVX 610-422-3906 Telex 05-821506
CORP.
MASTER CONTROL SWITCHER
MC-4000 Master Control Switcher
The MC- 4000 is a perfect blend of hardware and software.
The sophisticated microprocessor control system processes all analog and digital commands. Control extends to all audio and video interfaces, plus all matte, color background and all audio level control. Digital VU meters that measure peak and average audio levels.
Video crosspoint circuitry is high speed analog multiplexer design.
Advanced packaging concepts. .. rack electronics require only 8RUs; control console mounts on top of the console and only 2 small cable accesses are required.
Ergonomics. More than cosmetics. The industrial designed backlighted control panel has been designed by experienced master control operators for efficient, safe On- Air operations. On- Air switching and control can now reach a high confidence level with the MC- 4000. All controls have been strategically located based upon operator usage.
Exclusive On- Air Program confidence switching system protects against accidental changes to On- Air signal. This system continually verifies that the computer hardware and software are functioning properly.
Pushbutton LED verifies that acommand has been communicated to its crosspoint and that the crosspoint has latched.
Automatic control features reduce the number of manual functions required when executing complex program breaks.
Many control functions are automatically cleared after atransition to air. This concept reduces operator error and permits a higher level of operating confidence.
On- Air mirror protection system inhibits preset film island mirror flips.
Audio Over preset selection can be monitored while On- Air. Output Path selector may be used to bypass Mixer and Downstream Keyer outputs.
Preset bus can be used as an On- Air emergency bus.
Optional emergency switcher ( VAS- 1010) controls can be located in console panel.
4e4
Software status tables for control console and electronics computer systems are stored in battery protected CMOS RAM. Switcher will return to " before main power failure" status, after power is restored. Machine control and Preroll system for 10 VTRs, 2film islands and 4 Audio Only starts. Preroll delay times are user definable for individual machines in 10ms increments up to amaximum of 10 seconds. Separate preroll delays can be used for 2 projectors on the same island. Preroll system automatically adjusts delays to accurately follow Mix and Fade transitions. Transition multifunction ramp generator provides for Mix, Fade, Fade Cut and Cut Fade and 4transition rates of 0.5, 1, or 2seconds, or Cut. Stereo audio. Second Program output control locations and cutouts are provided to add stereo to existing system. Rack electronics only requires 4 RUs. Serial port available for external digital communications. A MC- 4000 System is available for any size location. MC- 4164 16 AFV inputs; 4 Audio Only inputs MC- 4246 24 AFV inputs; 6 Audio Only inputs MC- 4328 32 AFV inputs; 8 Audio Only inputs All models are available in NTSC, PAL and PAL- M.
PGM PST
16 24 or 32
< MIX MON
< MI,N
MIXER
DOWNSTREAM 8E VER
< SOIL
f t f f
KEY SOURCES ·fi'a
FADE TO BLACK
PGM-
<`ecT.,
VT-28
AFV 1 2
16 24 or 32
BRK
PST
AUDIO ONLY
OFF AIR
46 or 8
BRK PST PGM XXX
AUDIO MIXER
PPM
AVC,
FADE TO SILENCE
PGM-
9 EXTERNAL EMERGENCY INPUTS
--
OPTIONAL 10X1 SELF POWERED BYPASS SWITCHER 'VAS- 101(Y
.1
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CHANNELMATIC
821 Tavern Road Alpine, CA 92001 (619) 445-2691
PATCH MASTER"`"
The PATCHMASTER is a broadcast- quality bridging audio- follow- video routing switcher which will satisfy a variety of switching requirements. Configured as a 10 input by 1 output switcher, the moving of internal jumper plugs converts the unit to two independent 5- input by 1- output switchers.
Switching is vertical interval as referenced to the output signal.
The extremely high impedance, low capacitance bridging inputs cause negligible line loading, therefore, many switchers may be looped together for expansion to any desired number of outputs. Expansion in increments
of ten inputs is provided with automatic
secondary switching to eliminate crosstalk degradation. Stereo audio is available optionally.
Connections are also provided for remote switcher control. The switches are momentary and provided with electronic interlock-
ing.
AVS-10A SPECIFICATIONS VIDEO
Inputs: 10 or 5x2, plus expansion in incre-
ments of 10 Input Impedance: High impedance looping Return Loss: Greater than 50 DB at 5MHz
Input Level: 0.5 to 2.0 VPP Outputs: 2(10 x 1) or 1 leach 5 x 1) at
75 ohms Output Level: 4VPP maximum Frequency Response: + 0.05 DB to 5MHz -.1 0.1 DB to 10 MHz Crosstalk: 60 DB or more at 3.58 MHz Differential Gain: Less than 0.1 percent Differential Phase: Less than 0.1°
AUDIO Inputs: 10 or 5 x 2, plus expansion in increments of 10 Input Impedance: High impedance balanced or unbalanced bridging Input Level: + 8DBM Nominal, + 12 DBM Maxim urn Outputs: 2110 x 1) or Beach 5 x 11; 600 ohms Balanced Output Level: + 19 DBM Maximum Frequency Response: 0.05 DB, 20 Hz to
20 kHz Crosstalk: Greater than 70 DB at 20 kHz
AVS-10A PATCH MASTER $ 1000.00
RCP- 15A Remote Control Panel
350.00
UAA-6A
Universal Audio Amplifier
The LJAA-6A is abroadcast- quality universal audio amplifier providing six separate transformerless amplifiers in aself-contained 1.75 by 19 inch rack mounting frame. Each amplifier has a high impedance input which may be either balanced or unbalanced and a low impedance output of 600 ohms balanced or 150 ohms unbalanced. A front panel gain control and test points are also provided for level adjustments.
ROUTING SWITCHERS, AUDIO AMPLIFIERS, AUDIO AND VIDEO
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
It is particularly useful in installations utilizing video cassette machines to convert their high impedance preamp audio output to 600 ohms balanced and to provide gain control.
UAA-6A SPECIFICATIONS Response: 20 Hz to 20 kHz ± 0.1 DB THD: Less than 0.05% at + 24 DBM output Connectors: XLR on input and output or terminal Board 1UAA-6A-TB)
UAA-6A with XLR connectors $ 750.00
UAA-6A-TB with screw terminals
700.00
ADA-1A, ADA-2A, ADA-3A
Audio Distribution Amplifier
The ADA-1A is a broadcast quality audio distribution amplifier providing six balanced 600 ohm source-terminated outputs from one high impedance bridging input. Both inputs and outputs may be connected to provide balanced or unbalanced circuits. Outputs are independent precision integrated amplifiers, providing accurate output
balance. Gain is adjusted with a 25- turn potentiometer for ease and accuracy of
control.
The 1.75 by 19 inch rack- mounting package is available with one, two or three independent amplifiers with a common power supply.
SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Response: ± 0.5 DB, 10 Hz to
30 kHz Hum and Noise: 80 DB down with + 20 DBM Output Distortion: 0.1% or Less Connectors: Terminal Strips
ADA-1A One Amplifier ADA-2A Two Amplifiers ADA-3A Three Amplifiers
$ 375.00 600.00 800.00
VDA-1A, VDA-2A, VDA-3A
Video Distribution Amplifier
The VDA-1A is a self-contained broadcastquality video distribution amplifier with six source-terminated 75 ohm outputs and one high- impedance looping input.
The 1.75 by 19 inch rack- mounting package is available with either one, two or three independent amplifiers with a common power supply.
SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Response: 0.10 DB to 5MHz · 0.20 DB to 10 MHz
Differential Gain: Less than 0.1%, 10 to 90 APL Differential Phase: Less than 0.1°, 10 to 90 APL Automatic DC Offset Compensation
VDA-1A VDA-2A VDA-3A
$ 375.00 600.00 800.00
AVS-10A PATCHMASTER mop
AVS 1CA PATCHMASTER BACK VIEW
RCP- 15A REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
UAA-6A FRONT VIEW
liabaoaoisositec
UAA-6A WITH XLR's BACK VIEW
ADA-1A BACK VIEW `V-
VDA-1A FRONT VIEW
VDA 1A BACK VIEW
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 29
CHANNELMATIC
821 Tavern Road Alpine, CA 92001 (619) 445-2691
SPOTMATIC Random Access Commercial Insert System
The SPOTMATIC Random Access Commercial Insert System is designed to schedule and automatically insert local
commercials into any length of available time slot on multiple channels of satellite service programming. SPOTMATIC locates, cues
and inserts the proper commercials in the proper order from standard 3/4 inch video cassettes. Up to 100 randomly mixed
commercial spots can be added to each cassette, greatly reducing tape and editing
costs. In addition, it prints out a log of all switching functions as they occur and also prints out a daily advertiser- grouped listing identifying all spots inserted on each channel. Insertion is accomplished in aclean, broadcast- quality fashion.
FEATURES ·Controls up to Four VCR's Per Channel
·Display- Prompted Keypad Programming ·Controls Multiple Channels/VCR's Simul-
taneously
· Each Channel Independently Programmed for Versatility
·Uses Non- Modified Sony Type- 5VCR's · Expandable to Control Up to 32 VCR's
The SPOTMATIC Random Access Commercial Insert System uses sophisticated multiple microcomputers to automatically locate an individual commercial spot on a video cassette, cue it in accordance with a satellite service's chosen preroll time and insert it upon receipt of the proper satellite cue tones. SPOTMATIC may be configured to control from one to four VCR's per channel and to insert commercials on as many channels as desired, as long as the total number of VCR's to be controlled does not
exceed 32. SPOTMATIC also has a built-in automatic logging feature which gives the operator a hard copy printout of the times and contents of each commercial insertion.
$18,000.00 Et up
SPOTMATIC JR.
Single VCR
Commercial Insert System
The SPOTMATIC JR. provides a highly versatile, yet extremely cost-effective means of inserting local commercials into satellite
programming. The microcomputer controlled unit performs all of the functions
necessary to insert commercials in a broadcast fashion and is also equipped with a
full- feature logging and verification printer.
The SPOTMATIC JR. is completely self-
contained and provides all the necessary
control for one satellite service. It decodes
satellite tones which occur at the beginning
of a local availability and inserts a VCR
commercial into the satellite program. All
variable microcomputer functions are pro-
grammed with an external handheld touch-
pad which is easily connected to afront panel
mounted jack.
$2,750.00
COMMERCIAL INSERT SYSTEMS,
TONE SWITCHER, AND SONY VP/V05000 SERIES VIDEO/AUDIO INTERFACE MODULE
The same touchpad is used to encode
commercial tapes with spot cueing and
advertiser information.
$225.00
ATS-4A
Automatic Tone Switcher
The ATS-4A Automatic Tone Switcher provides asimple and inexpensive means of
inserting local programming from an audio source and a character generator or other
video source into satellite programming. It
decodes the satellite tones which occur at the beginning and end of the satellite
programming or a local commercial insert period and uses the locally generated information to automatically fill the time period surrounded by the cue tones.
All switching is performed by integrated circuits and occurs during the vertical blanking interval for clean, broadcast- quality performance. The microcomputerized tone decoding circuitry is programmable for various satellite service tone codes and is equipped with alithium backup power supply
for memory retention in the event of power failure.
SPECIFICATIONS INPUTS
Tone: 600 ohms balanced, 0 DBM nominal Audio: 600 ohms balanced, 0DBM nominal Video: 1volt PP, 75 ohm unbalanced Video A and B: 1 volt PP, 75 ohm unbalanced
OUTPUTS:
Audio: 600 ohms balanced, 0 DBM nominal
Video: 1 volt PP, 75 ohm unbalanced
$1,200.00
HANDIMOD I.
·Auto Sync- Lock -- Automatic vertical sync- lock of Sony Type 5 VCR to an
external video source so vertical interval switching is possible · Balanced Audio -- Converts 47,000 ohm
high- impedance audio line output of VCR to 600 ohm balanced or dual 150 ohm unbalanced for compatibility with most audio equipment
·Audio Level Control -- Installed in seconds by plugging into modulator cavity on rear
of VCR; absolutely no VCR modifications necessary
Broadcast- Type Audio Output. The HANDIMOD Iconverts the high- impedance preamp audio output of the VCR into either one 600 ohm balanced audio output or two independent 150 ohm unbalanced audio outputs. An audio level control is also provided, which allows adjustment of the output level from zero to better than + 14 DBM
Auto Sync- Lock. The HANDIMOD Ialso adds circuitry to enable the VCR to be sync- locked to an external video source.
The HANDIMOD Iis particularly useful in
VCR systems which require vertical interval
switching between the VCR and an external
source.
$300.00
SPOTMATIC SPOTMATIC JR. ATS.4A FRONT VIEW ATS-4A BACK VIEW
HANDIMOD I
VT- 30
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COHU, INC.
5755 Kearny Villa Road P.O. Box 85623 San Diego, CA 92138 (619) 277-6700 TWX 910-335-1244
MODEL: V8800 SERIES
The Matrix 88 is amicroprocessor- based video switching system that automatically routes video signals from a requested camera position to a specified monitor. The basic system configuration permits video switching of up to 64 cameras on 8monitors, and when fully expanded, atotal of 255 cameras and 32 monitors can be utilized without additional hardware. Removeable printed circuit boards, featuring plug-in connectors, provide on-line serviceability and eliminate down- time of the entire system.
Standard System components consist of a Control Processing Unit ( CPU), an 8x 8Matrix Switcher, and a Power Supply Unit. The control unit contains the system software, and when automatic sequencing is desired, the EAROM memory programming card. The control front panel houses the numerical keypad for video selection and the LED displays for camera/monitor number indication.
The CPU decodes signals accepted from external sources and transmits the information directly to the Matrix Switcher. A total of 48 Remote Keypads can be added to the basic System when multiple video control is desired.
Internal Switcher components consist of three mother boards which accommodate ten vertical boards, eight of which are switcher boards that route video from eight cameras to eight monitors for a total basic Matrix Capacity of 64 cameras by eight monitors. The remaining two boards are the Address Board and the Output Amplifier Board respectively
The Power Supply Unit consists of six output circuits that are individually double- fused, and provide power for up to six Matrix 88 Switcher Modules. Positioned internally are two transformers that deliver + 12V at 71/2 amp. and - 12V at Iamp. to each of the switcher unitS respectively.
This diagram illustrates some of the ways that the modular components can be configured to meet video system requirements Using the fewest possible components, this simple Matrix 88 system can meet video switching requirements for up to 64 camera inputs and eight monitor channels out
SWITCHING SYSTEM
MATRIX 88 CONTROL UNIT
Assembly
Video Card Cage Assembly Vrcleo SwItch Card Assembly'
CPU/Manual RoutIng Keypad Assembly ( local) CPU/Sequential Routrng Keypad Assembly ( local) CPU Manual
CPU- Sequential
Remote Manual Keypad
Power Supply Assembly
MATRIX M SWTTCHER SYSTEM COMPONENTS
MoON No.
Product Code
Asper-Mon
Matez Switcher
VE181'0SCC V88105
0814 0813
Contains address butler video amplifier . video and address mother boards
Inpu1. swaching. and decodrng cIrcuitry
V886OCK
C011tl01 0818
V8862CSK
0602
V8864C
0603
May be used with remote manual routing keypads
May be used with remote sequential and remote manual routing keypads
Used with remote manual r0peng keypads
V8866CS
0604
Used with remote sequential and remote manual rOuleg keypads
V8868RK
0605
POWN
V8830SPS
0815
Must be used with V886OCK V8862CSK or V8864C
Powers amaxlmum 0f sr vIdeo card cage assembles
Control
Up to 64 Cameras
Up to 8 Monitors
BASIC MATRIX 88 SYSTEM Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 31
COHU, INC.
5755 Kearny Villa Road P.O. Box 85623 San Diego, CA 92138 (619) 277-6700 TVVX 910-335-1244
PULSE AND VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
PULSE DA
il
·
2 40
OUTPUTS
· 74 ·
e, R ·
o LEVEL
VIDEO DA
E.LILSE DA
. L
r>4
9800 Series Distribution Amplifiers
·Modular Construction with Total Solid- State Active Circuitry
· Etched Glass Epoxy Circuit Boards
· Mix or Match both PDA's and VDA's in Same Enclosure
· Choice of Vertical or Horizontal Configuration
· Fits Standard 19- inch Rack or Cabinet
· Integral Power Supply on Each Module
The Cohu 9800 Series Pulse Distribution Amplifier is a solid-state, regenerative pulse- amplifier that processes and distributes television synchronizing signals from one input to four output channels. The input may be horizontal drive, vertical drive, blanking, or sync pulses. Each amplifier has an integral power supply; ac on- off switch and indicator; front panel test points for input, output, and power supply;
and an output level adjustment on the front panel. Individual connector panels, one for each amplifier, fasten to the rear of the enclosure and have six BNC or UHF connectors, one connector for each output and two for the bridging ( loop-thru) input.
The Cohu 9800 Series Video Distribution Amplifier is a solid-state, wide- band video amplifier that amplifies ( optional sync adding) and distributes video signals from one input to four output channels. The input may be composite or noncomposite, monochrome or color video. Each amplifier has an integral power supply; ac on- off switch and indicator; front panel test points for input, output, and power supply; and a video gain adjustment on the front panel. Individual connector panels, one for each amplifier, fasten to the rear of the enclosure and have six BNC or UHF connectors, one connector for each output and two for the bridging ( loop-thru ) input. The outputs to which sync is to be added ( optional) are selected by means of slide switches mounted on aspecial version of the rear connector panel of the pulse distribution amplifier.
ENCLOSURE Vertical Chassis Horizontal Chassis
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS For Horizontal Chassis
For Vertical Chassis
Pulse DA
9850-000 9860 000
9800-162 9800-362 9800 161 9800-261
9800-361 9800 461
Video DA
9850-000 9860 000
Holds 10 DA's Holds 3 DA's
Description
9800-152 9800-352 9800 151
9800 351
With BNC connector assembly, one input ( with loop-thru) and four outputs With UHF connector assembly, one input ( with loop-thrul and four outputs With BNC connector assembly, one input ( with loop-thrul and four outputs With BNC connector assembly, one input ( with loop-thru) and nine sync adder switches
With UHF connector assembly, one input ( with loop-thru) and four outputs With UHF connector assembly, one input ( with loop-thru) and nine sync adder switches
VT- 32
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COHU, INC.
5755 Kearny Villa Road P.O. Box 85623 San Diego, CA 92138 (619) 277-6700 TVVX 910-335-1244
VIDEO CABLE EQUALIZER
GNiCt C.
·
`ke
+ V DB
tee
o RESPONSLI
o GAIN
· INPUT
et. ON
P`t VIOt
,L QLAt_t;,ER kt
EQUALIZER MODULE
PORTABLE CABINET
.111·1·11111. .0·11111.111111.,
t
HORIZONTAL FRAME
MIMI
VERTICAL FRAME
9800 Series
· Up to 30 dB Equalization at 10 MHz
·Dependable Operaton Over aWide Environmental Range
· Front Panel Variable Equalization Adjustments
·Total Solid State Active Circuitry
· Exceptional Low Hum and Noise Level
· Integral, Regulated Power Supply on Each Module
The Cohu 9800 Series Video Cable Equalizer compensates for high frequency losses due to long runs. Equalization is sufficient for up to 6000 feet of RG-11/ U foam dielectric cable. Longer distances can be equalized by using polyfoam dielectric cable having even lower losses. The equalizer is a self-contained, plug-in module, having its own integral regulated power supply. All circuitry is contained on an etched, glass epoxy circuit board. All components, test points and adjustments are prominently marked.
Equalization to 30 dB at 10 MHz is provided by three convenient front panel controls, variable RESPONSE control, avariable GAIN control, and afixed + 15 dB toggle switch. Equalization of 0to 15 dB is made using the RESPONSE control. Equalization above 15 dB requires activating the + 15 dB toggle switch and using the variable RESPONSE control. Activating the + 15 dB toggle switch introduces afixed 15 dB of equalization to which the variable RESPONSE control will add the necessary signal for up to atotal of 30 dB equalization at 10 MHz. Should low frequency gain compensation be necessary, the variable GAIN control will provide - 4 dB to + 6 dB adjustment,
which shifts the entire equalization curve, low frequency to high frequency.
The Cohu 9800 Series Equalizer when used at the receiving end of a cable provides excellent results with both color and monochrome video signals. The equalizer will accept either a75- ohm unbalanced or 124- ohm balanced output. Differential input provides rejection of hum caused by ground loops. The equalizer may also be used at the transmitting end with similar excellent performance.
ENCLOSURES
The Cohu Video Cable Equalizer Module may be mounted in any of three enclosures. A 10 module vertical frame, a3 module horizontal frame or a3module self-contained portable cabinet. The 10 module vertical or 3module horizontal frame will mount into astandard 19 inch rack.
MODEL NUMBER
9850-000 9860-000 9870-000
ENCLOSURE DESCRIPTION
10 Module Vertical Frame 3 Module Horizontal Frame 3 Module Portable Cabinet
AMPLIFIERS
9800-855 9800-856
VIDEO CABLE EQUALIZER
Vertical Amplifier Horizontal Amplifier
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 33
VIDEO
r@lherkelvie.= 148 Veterans Drive Northvale, NJ 07647 SUPPLY CORPORATION ( 201) 767-7990
(800) 526-0242
VIDEO ACCESSORIES
Comprehensive has recognized the benefits of making all types of video supplies and accessories, and below are listed asmall sampling of what is available.
COMPREHENSIVE VIDEO ACCESSORIES
AC power accessories
Lighting background supports
Breakout boxes
Studio expendable supplies
Cable crimp connector kits
Video/audio connector adaptors
Complete line of cables (video, audio)
Video & film production prop accessories
Degaussers
Video labels and cards
Distribution amplifiers
Video maintenance tools & accessories
Contents:
2BNC Jack, Plug, Jack ( T) 1BNC Jack, Jack, Jack ( T) 2BNC Jack to Jack ( Barrel) 1BNC Plug to Plug ( Barrel) 1BNC Jack to Plug ( Right
Angle)
1UHF Jack. Plug. Jack ( T) 2UHF Jack to Jack ( Barrel)
2 " F" Jack to Jack ( Barrel) 1Phono Jack to Jack ( Barrel) 3BNC Plug to UHF Jack 3BNC Jack to UHF Plug
1 " F" Plug to BNC Jack 1 " F" Jack to BNC Plug 1 " F" Jack to Mini Plug
1Phono Plug to BNC Jack
Video Adapter Kit
1Phono Plug to UHF Jack
1Phono Plug to " F" Jack 1Phono Jack to BNC Plug 1Phono Jack to UHF Plug 1Phono Jack to " F" Plug 2BNC 75 ohm Terminator 1UHF 75 ohm Terminator
1 " F" 75 ohm Terminator
Adapt and interface wi h Video Connectors-
includes 75 ohm terminators VDAP -1 $99.00
Contents:
3Mini Plug to Phono Jack
3Mini Plug to Standard Phone Jack
2Mini Jack to Jack ( Barrel) 3Phono Plug to Mini Jack 2Phono Plug to Standard
Phone Jack
3Phono Jack to Jack ( Barrel)
2Standard Phone Plug to Mini Jack
2Standard Phone Plug to Phono Jack
2Standard Phone Jack to Jack ( Barrel)
1Phono Plug to XLR Jack
1Standard Phone plug to XLR Jack
1XLR Plug to Phono Jack 1XLR Plug to Standard
Phone Jack
1XLR Plug to Plug ( Barrel) 1XLR Jack to Jack ( Barrel)
Audio Adapter Kit
Adapt and interface with Audio Connectors
ADAP-1 $99.00 --
BNC AND UHF CRIMP CONNECTOR KIT
Contents:
25 BNC Plug for RG59/U Cable 25 UHF Plug for RG59/U Cable
1Crimp tool 1Cable stripper for BNC 1Cable stripper for UHF
BUCK- 2 $ 179.00
DELUXE " F" CRIMP CONNECTOR KIT
Contents:
200 " F" Plug for RG59/U Cable with Crimp Ring
1Heavy Duty Crimp tool for FP 1Cable stripper
Crimp Kits
FCK-2 $ 129.00
Break- Out Boxes
PS-7B
Features 10 pin cable ( E10P) to plug into camera input of portable VCR or other equipment using 10 pin jack ( E1OJCM). Provides video in/out via BNCs and audio
in/out via Minis ( 3.5mm). PS -7B $ 59.95
PS- 6B
Features 8 pin cable ( E8P) to plug into equipment using 8 pin jack ( E8JCM). Provides video in/out via BNCs and audio
in/out via Minis ( 3.5mm). PS- 6B $54.95
Video Distribution Amplifier
CBB-10
Provides access to individual signals of color cameras using the common 10 pin ( E10P) connection.Features: 10 pin camera input (E10J), Video out via BNC connector, Audio out via 3.5mm Mini connector, 12 volts DC power input fused via 4pin DIN ( allows external powering of camera), Remote record/pause via extended Mini jack.
CBB-10 $69.95
Passive Video Switchers
Overcome line loss, provide additional equipment outputs and line equalization, or any combination of these. Comprehensive's 4output Video Distribution Amplifier contains two input connectors to permit signal looping, thereby allowing the units to be " ganged" if more than four outputs are needed. Mounts easily on any flat surface.
CVA2B-4 $ 175.00
VT-34
Versatile Switchers You Can Depend On Comprehensive's passive video switchers with audio pass- along offer a fast simple way to interconnect video and audio equipment. Pushbuttons select the input and automatically terminate the other video inputs, for constant impedance.
CPS -4A 4Pair Video with Audio pass- along $129.00 CPS -8A 8Pair Video with Audio pass- along $179.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ehegtellVee= SUPPLY CORPORATION
148 Veterans Drive Northvale, NJ 07647 ( 201) 767-7990 ( 800) 526-0242
VIDEO ADAPTERS
PART NO DESCRIPTION
14 5-49 50 +
BNC
BT BT- J BBL BP- BL
BJ-13P-L
BNC Jack, Plug, Jack ( T) BNC Jack, Jack, Jack ( T) BNC Jack to Jack ( Barrel) BNC Plug to Plug ( Barrel) BNC Jack to Plug ( Right Angle)
8.99 7.49 4.99 7.99
8.99
S 8.09 $ 7.19 6.74 5.99 4.49 3.99 7.19 6.39
8.09 7.19
UHF
UT UJ-UP U- BL UJ-LIP-L
"F"
FAIL FJ-FP FJ-FP-L
UHF Jack. Plug. Jack TI UHF Jack to Plug ( Push- On) UHF Jack to Jack ( Barrel) UHF Jack to Plug ( Right Angle)
F- Jack to Jack ( Barrel) F" Jack to Plug ( Push- On) -F" Jack to Plug ( Right Angle Push- On)
4.99 3.99 1.99 4.99
4.49
3.59 1.79 4.49
3.99 3.19 1.59 3.99
1.59 2.79 2.99
1.43 2.51 2.69
1.27 2.23 2.39
Phono ( Video)
PT
Phono Jack, Plug, Jack ( T)
PTJ
Phono Jack. Jack. Jack ( T)
PJ·BL
Phono Jack to Jack ( Barrel)
2.99 2.99 1.79
2.69 2.69 1.61
2.39 2.39 143
Between Series: BNC, UHF, " F", & Phono ( Video) -
BP-UJ
BNC Plug to UHF Jack
5.59 5.03 4.47
BJ-UP
BNC Jack to UHF Plug
4.99 4.49 3.99
FP.BJ
"F" Plug to BNC Jack
4.59 4.13 3.67
FP-UJ
"F" Plug to UHF Jack
4.59 4.13 3.67
FJ-BP
"F" Jack to BNC Plug
5.59 5.03 4.47
FJ-UP
-F" Jack to UHF Plug
4.59 4.13 3.67
FJ·MP
-F" Jack to Mini Plug
4.29 3.86 3.43
MP- 11J
Mini Plug to UHF Jack
2.99 2.69 2.39
PP-BJ
Phono Plug to BNC Jack
4.59 4.13 3.67
PP.UJ
Phono Plug to UHF Jack
2.29 2.06 1.83
PP-FJ
Phono Plug to " F" Jack
4.29 3.86 3.43
PJ-BP
Phono Jack to BNC Plug
5.29 4.76 4.23
PJ-LIP
Phono Jack to UHF Plug
4.29 3.86 3.43
PJ-FP
Phono Jack to " F" Plug
4.29 3.86 3.43
VIDEO CABLES
PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
1 4
Molded Video Cables- Flexible Coax
BNC Plug to Plug
BB- C-1.5 BB- C-3
f t 3 ft
BB- C-10 BB- C-25 BB- C-50
10 ft 25 ft 50 ft.
"F" Plug to Plug- Push- On
FF -C-1.5
1'/2 ft
FF -C-3 FF -C-10
3 ft 10 ft
FF -C-25 FF -C-50
25 ft 50 ft
"F" to " F" Right Angle Push- On
FF.CR-3
3 ft
FF -CR -10
10 ft.
FF -CR -25
25 ft
UHF Plug to " F" Plug
UF -C-10 UF -C-25
10 ft 25 ft.
9.99 10.29 12.99 15.99 21.99
5.99 6.29 7.99 10.99 16.99
7.29 9.99 12.99
11.69 14.69
549
8.99 9.26 11.69 14.39 19.79
5.39 5.66 7.19 9.89 15.29
6.56 8.99 11.69
10.52 13.22
55 .
7.99 8.23 10.39 12.79 17.59
4.79 5.03 6.39 8.79 13.59
5.83 7.99 10.39
9.35 11.75
PART NO
DESCRIPTION
4 `, 49
r,0
UHF Plug to Plug
UU-C-3 UU-C-10 UU-C-25 UU-C-50
3 ft. 10 ft. 25 ft 50 ft
BNC Plug to UHF Plug
BU -C-3 BU -C-10
3ft 10 ft
BU -C-25
25 ft
BU -C-50
50 ft
"F" Plug to 3.5 Mini Plug
F- MP- C-10
10 ft
Phono ( RCA) Plug to Plug- Video
PP-PP-CV.1.5 PP- PP- CV- 3
11/ 2 ft 3 ft.
PP- PP- CV- 10
10 ft.
PP- PP- CV- 25
25 ft
BNC Plug to Phono ( RCA) Plug
B.PP.C.10
10 ft
B- PP- C-25
25 ft
UHF Plug to Phono ( RCA) Plug
U- PP- C-10
10 ft
U.PP-C-25
25 ft
EIAJ Multi- Pin Cable Assemblies
EIAJ 8- Pin VTR & Monitor Cables
E8P-E8P-5
5ft.
E8P-E8P-10
10ft,
E8P-E8P-25
25ft.
E8P-E8P-50
50 ft.
E8P-E8P-100
100ft,
Portable VTR to Monitor Cable
E6P-E10P-5S ( Sony) 5ft
E8P-E10P-5J
,JVC & Panasonic) 5ft.
EIAJ 10- Pin Camera Extension
E1OP·E10J-5
5 ft
E10P-E10J-10
10 ft.
E10P-E10J-25
25 ft.
E10P-E10J-50
50 ft
E10P-E10J-100
100 ft
EIAJ 10' Pin Hook- Up Cable
E10P-E1OP-5
5 ft.
E10P-E1OP.10
10 ft.
E10P-E10P-25
25 ft.
E10P-E10P-50
50 ft
E1013-E1OP.100
100 ft.
Camera Cable ( JVC)
E10P-E12P-10
10 ft.
E1OP.E1213.10CL
10 ft
B 8i W Camera Extension Cable ( 6- Pin)
D6P-D6J-25
25 ft
Color Camera Extension ( 8- Pin)
08P-D8J-25
25 ft
BETA Camera Extension ( 14·Pin)
B14P-B14J-25
25 ft
Hitachi Camera Extension Cable ( 10 Pin)
H10P-H10J-25
25 ft
Professional 14 Pin Camera Cable
E14P-E14J-25
25 ft
9.99
11.69 14.69 20.69
5 8.99 $ 7.99
10.52
9.35
13.22
11.75
18.62
16.55
9.99 11.69 14.69 20.69
8.69
6.99 7.29 9.99 12.99
8.99 10.52 13.22 18.62
7.82
6.29 6.56 8.99 11.69
7.99 9.35 11.75 16.55
6.95
5.59 5.83 7.99 10.39
11.69 14.69
10.52 13.22
9.35 11.75
11.69 14.69
10.52 13.22
9.35 11.75
26.99 29.99 39.99 52.99 99.99
25.64 28.49 37.99 50.34 94.99
24.29 26.99 35.99 47.69 89.99
38.99 38.99
37.04 37.04
35.09 35.09
38.99 45.99 62.99 88.99 145.99
37.04 43.69 59.84 84.54 138.69
35.09 41.39 56.69 80.09 131.39
40.99 46.99
58.99 88.99 145.99
38.94 44.64
56.04 84.54 138.69
36.89 42.29
53.09 80.09 131.39
51.99 51.99
49.39 49.39
46.79 46.79
36.99 39.99
35.14 37.99
33.29 35.99
89.99 56.99
85.49 54.14
80.99 51.29
109.99 104.49
98.99
Multi- Pin Adapters
E8J-BL
EIAJ 8pin -GOOF - Plug
E8J-P
EIAJ 8pin Dubbing Adapter
E14P-J
EIAJ 14 pin Adapter
$24.95 24.95 39.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-35
VIDEO
148 Veterans Drive
Northvale, NJ 07647
r®In 4
ellarVee=. ( 201) 767-7990
SUPPLY CORPORATION ( 800) 526-0242
· Video Connectors · Bulk Video Cable · Video Adapters
· Video Cables
VIDEO CONNECTORS
BNC
BP
BNC Plug for RG59/U Cable. Solder
BP.0 BP- E
BNC Plug for RG59/U Cable. Crimp BNC Plug for RG59/U Cable. Fast- Fit
BP- C.8281 BNC Plug for 8281 Cable. Crimp
BP- E-8281 BNC Plug for 8281 Cable. Fast- Fit
BJ-CM
BNC Jack. Chassis Mount
B·BLCM B.TM
BNC Jack to Jack ( Barrel). Chassis Mount BNC 75 Ohm Terminator
UHF
UP
UHF Plug & Adapter for RG59/U Cable.
Solder
UP·C
UHF Plug for RG59/U Cable, Crimp
UPE UP- 8281
UHF Plug for RG59/U Cable. Fast- Fit
UHF Plug & Adapter for 8281 Cable, Solder
UP- E-8281 UHF Plug for 8281 Cable. Fast- Fit
UJ.CM U· BLCM U- TM
UHF Jack, Chassis Mount UHF Jack to Jack ( Barrel), Chassis Mount UHF 75 ohm Terminator
S 3.99 3.59 4.49 5.49 5.49 1.99 7.19 6.49
2.29 1.79 2.99
2.99 3.49 3.39 4.49 4.59
3.59 123 4.04 4.94 4.94 1.79 6.47 5.84
2.06 1.61 2.69
2.69 3.14 3.05 4.04 4.13
3.19 2.87 3.59 4.39 4.39 1.59 5.75 5.19
1.83 1.43 2.39
2.39 2.79 2.71 3.59 3.67
"F"
FP FP- E
FP- ES FJ-CM F.BLCM F.TM
"F" Plug for RG59/U Cable. Crimp "F" Push-on Plug RG59/U Cable, Fast- Fit
"F" Plug for RG59/U Cable, Fast- Fit "F" Jack, Chassis Mount
"F" Jack to Jack ( Barrel) Chassis Mount "F" 75 Ohm Terminator
Phono ( Video)
.49 . 44 . 39
.99 1.49 1.09 1.79 1.99
.89 1.34
.98 1.61 1.79
.79 1.19
.87 1.43 1.59
PP.V PP- C PJ.CM P-BLCM
P.TM
Phono Plug for RG59/U Cable. Solder Phono Plug for RG59/U Cable. Crimp Phono Jack, Chassis Mount
Phono Jack to Jack ( Barrel). Chassis Mount
Phono 75 Ohm Terminator
1.29 89 .69
2.29 2.29
1.16 .80 .62
2.06 2.06
1.03 .71 .55
1.83 1.83
EIAJ Monitor and VCR Connectors
E8P
8pin Plug. Cable End
E8J
8pin Jack. Cable End
E8JCM
8 pin Jack. Chassis Mount
E8PCM
8pin Plug. Chassis Mount
6.99 6.99 2.99 2.99
6.29 6.29 2.69 2.69
5.59 5.59
2.39 2.39
EIAJ VCR and Editor Remote Control Connectors
E2OP E2OJCM E20J E2OPCM E33P E33JCM E33J E33PCM EX.33J E34P E34JCM E34J E34PCM E45P E45JCM E45J E45PCM
EX- 33P
20 pin Plug. Cable End 20 pin Jack. Chassis Mount 20 pin Jack. Cable End
20 pin Plug. Chassis Mount 33 pin Plug. Cable End
33 pin Jack. Chassis Mount 33 pin Jack. Cable End 33 pin Plug. Chassis Mount 33 pin Shell Extension Jack Cable End 34 pin Plug. Cable End 34 pin Jack. Chassis Mount 34 pin Jack. Cable End
34 pin Plug, Chassis Mount 45 pin Plug. Cable End
45 pin Jack, Chassis Mount 45 pin Jack. Cable End 45 pin Plug, Chassis Mount
33 pin Shell Extension Plug, Cable End
Camera Connectors
13.29 11.96 10.63
4.99 4.49 3.99 13.49 12.14 10.79
4.79 4.31 3.83 19.99 17.99 15.99 15.99 14.39 12.79 19.99 17.99 15.99
15.99 14.39 12.79
25.99 25.99 25.99
16.29 14.66 13.03 6.99 6.29 5.59
16.49 14.84 13.19 5.99 5.39 4.79
16.79 15.11 13.43 7.49 6.74 5.99
16.99 15.29 13.59
7.29 6.56 5.83
25 99 25 99 25 99
E1OP E10J E1OJCM E1OPCM
H1OP H10J E12P El2J E12JCM
10 pin Plug. Cable End 10 pin Jack, Cable End 10 pin Jack, Chassis Mount 10 pin Plug. Chassis Mount
10 pin Plug Push- On. Cable ( Hitachi) End 10 pin Jack Push- On, Cable End ( Hitachi) 12 pin Plug, Cable End ( JVC) 12 pin Jack, Cable End ( JVC) 12 pin Jack. Chassis Mount ( JVC)
15.99 14.99 9.99 14.99 15.99 14.99 18.99 16.99 10.29
14.39 13.49 8.99 13.49 14.39
13.49 17.09 15.29 9.26
12.79 11.99
7.99 11.99 12.79 11.99 15.19 13.59
8.23
E14P El4J E14JCM E14PCM D6P D6J D6JCM
D8P D8J D8JCM 07P- SL
14 pin Plug, Cable End
14 pin Jack. Cable End 14 pin Jack. Chassis Mount 14 pin Plug. Chassis Mount
6pin Plug, Cable End ( B&W Cameras) 6pin Jack. Cable End ( B&W Cameras) 6pin Jack. Chassis Mount (B&W Cameras)
8pin Plug. Cable End ( Hitachi. NEC) 8pin Jack. Cable End ( Hitachi. NEC) 8pin Jack, Chassis Mount ( Hitachi, NEC) 7pin Plug. Cable End ( Akai)
Remote Control Connectors
138P- R
8pin Plug, Cable End
D8.1·R
8pin Jack, Cable End
D1OP
10 pin Plug, Cable End
MP- R
Extended Mini Plug. Cable End
4
34.00 34.00 22.00 22.00
6.79 3.29
3.49 4.59 3.59 1.79 7.59
3.99 3.79 8.50 . 99
32.40 32.40 19.80 19.80
6.11 2.96
3.14 4.13 3.23 1.61 6.83
3.59 3.41 7.65
.89
SO ·
26 80 26.80 17.60 17.60
5.43 2.63
2.79 3.67 2.87 1.43 6.07
3.19 3.03 6.80
.79
DC Power Connectors
D4P D4J D4JCM
4pin Plug, Cable End 4pun Jack, Cable End 4pin Jack. Chassis Mount
D8P-SL DCP DCP-A
8pin Plug, Cable End (JVC) Direct Current Plug 2.5 mm ( Sony) Direct Current Plug 3mm
RM12BPG-3P RM12BPG-3S
RM12BPG.4P RM12BPG-4S
(JVC, Panasonic) 3pin Plug. Cable End 3pin Jack. Cable End
4pin Plug. Cable End 4pin Jack. Cable End
XLRP-4 XLRJ-4 XLRP.5 XLRJ-5
4pin XLR Plug. Cable End 4pin XLR Jack. Cable End 5pin XLR Plug. Cable End 5pin XLR Jack. Cable End ·
DCP12
12 pin Plug. Cable End ( Sony)
5.79 2.99 2.79 11.99
.99
5.21 2.69 2.51 10.79
.89
4.63
2.39 2.23 9.59
.79
.99 11.99 11.99 11.99
11.99 6.29 8.29 9.99
11.99 9.50
.89 10.79
10.79 10.79 10.79
5.66 7.46 8.99 10.79 8.55
.79 9.59 9.59 9.59 9.59 5.03 6.63 7.99 9.59 7.60
BULK VIDEO CABLE
RG59IU Solid Center Conductor CVC-59
CVC.59-100 CVC.59-500
100 it reel 500 reel
19.95 89.95
CVC-59.1000
1000 It reel
159.95
RG59/U Stranded Center Conductor CVC-59S
CVC.59S-100
100 ft re01
21.95
CVC-59S-500
500 ft reel
98.95
CVC-595.1000
1000 It riel
169.95
Belden 8281 75 ohm Precision Broadcast Coax Cable
8281.500 8281.1000
500 ft 1000 11
631005 0000
EIAJ 8Pin VCR Cable CVC-8
CVC.8
1-499 ft
. 95 per ft.
500-999 ft.
. 85 per ft.
1000 + ft
ECIVCA-J10 10
Pin
Camera Cable
1-499 ft
CVC10
500-999 ft
1000 + ft
EIAJ 14 Pin Camera Cable CVC-14
. 76 per ft.
1.35 per ft. 1.21 per ft. 1.08 per ft.
CVC 14
1499 ft
500.999 ft 1000 + ft
20 Pin Remote Control Cable
CVC 20
1499 ft
500 999 ft 1000 + ft
CVC-20
1.95 per ft. 1.75 per ft. 1.56 per ft.
1.95 per ft. 1.75 per ft. 1.56 per ft.
VT-36
COMPLETE CATALOG AVAILABLE
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AUTOMATIC SWITCHING IS AREALITY
WITH OUR MODULAR COAXIAL SWITCHING RELAYS
STANDARD COAXIAL RELAY: Now selective interconnecting
allows maximum channel allocation, and reliable single channel timesharing with multiple programming sources becomes a reality! Our totally passive design eliminates third order distortion. Our highly reliable RF coaxial Reed assemblies are triggered by command switching vo.tage with PC board design that guarantees performance every time!
VIDEO SENSING RELAY: Solve many of your switching problems
with confidence. Now you can insert back-up video signals, or channel preempting from a variety of sources. Match this one with our Standard relay (above) and you've got a totally automatic system! It's really a system you can build on.
RF/IF SENSING RELAY: Switch between primary and secondary
inputs upon carrier or modulation signal completion or failure. Senses video modulated signals from 5to 450 MHz from local, microwave, or satellite sources. Built to your specs, and match with our Standard Relay for totally automatic RF/IF and video switching that you can depend on.
CARRIER MODULATION SENSOR: This onewill indicate the
presence or failure of TV modulated carrier or IV modulation signal ( on the carrier) with no third order distortion. As with all our relay units, you get high isolation and solid state dependability.
VIDEO SYNC SENSOR: This simple yet sophisticated sensor
actually " socs" the presence or failure of the appointed video signal. Its speed will defy even the most sensitive detection with drop-out time of 225mS and lightning fast 20mS pick-up time; that you can build into your system and forget about!
POWER SUPPLY: To make your system complete, our 12 or 24Vdc
rack mount power supply allows for mounting and powering several relays.
MAKE THE RIGHT SWITCH:
Complete specs, prices and additional information is available at your request. As a complete service facility, you can also rely on our:
· COMPLETE REPAIR FACILITY · FIELD ENGINEERING DEPT. · USED EQUIPMENT DIVISION, and · TECHNICAL CONSULTING SERVICES!
CALL TODAY & RELAX: TOLL FREE 1-800-336-9681
ComSotaceNc
An Employee Owned Corporation
1350 Port Republic Road, P.O. Box 1106, Harrisonburg, VA 22801
Toll Free ( 800) 336-9681, In VA ( 703) 434-5965
VT- 37
DATATEK CORP.
1121 Bristol Rd. Mountainside, NJ 07092 (201) 654-8100 Telex 833541 DATATEK MTSD
D-2000 SERIES ROUTING SWITCHERS
·Compatible matrix frames of 50 x25, 25 x25 and 25 x20 used as
building blocks for systems of up to 256 inputs, with up to 8levels of control · Easily field expandable-- no need to specify initially the
future matrix size · Switcher is output oriented with each output bus having its own microprocessor control system, independent of every other output bus · Serial data control system using RG-59/ U coax-- with opto -isolators in the control lines to avoid compromising reliability due to ground loop hum · D-4300 series switching units can be furnished with compatible microprocessor controls, for use where small auxiliary switchers are needed for special purpose additional levels · Non-proprietary components, available through electronics distributors, used throughout · All plug-in modules interchangeable with other modules of same type. Switcher remains within specifications, without readjustment, when modules interchanged.
The Datatek D-2000 series of Video and Audio Routing Switchers use avariety of compatible matrix frames to make up systems of various sizes for video, audio, SMPTE time code and intercom.
The D-2000 series switchers are easily field expandable without down time, by adding matrix frames and interconnecting them with plug-in cables. There is no need to specify initially the future size of the switcher, provided the ultimate size is not greater than 256 inputs.
The switchers are output oriented both from a signal and a control standpoint. Output modules are either 25 x1or 50 x1and each output module has its own microprocessor control system which is completely independent of the control system on any other output bus. This provides maximum bus security since failure of a microprocessor or shorting acontrol line will affect only one bus and not the entire matrix.
Further, since each output bus has its own control system, the crosspoint tally fed back to the control panel is generated on the same module as that on which the crosspoint is located. A positive crosspoint tally status for the bus is generated, rather than a tally generated from acentral control module serving many output busses.
Serial data is used over standard RG-59/ U coaxial cable to connect the matrix frames to the control panels. This simplifies installation and reduces cost. To insure that ground loop hum does not compromise the reliability of the serial data control system, control panels are equipped with opto -isolators.
By combining avideo matrix frame with one or more audio, time code, etc. matrix frames, multi level systems can be assembled for video, audio, stereo audio ( left and right), SMPTE time code, intercom, tally, and machine assignment.The control system provides for up to 8 levels of control, any of which may be " follow video" or " breakav% y".
Where an auxiliary matrix of small size is needed, D-4300 series switching units can be equipped with compatible micropro...... ,sor control modules, and controlled as part of the D-2000 switcher ", is is useful where a small video or audio auxiliary matrix is needej for special purpose additional levels for switching audio, tally, intercom, SMPTE time code, synclock, cursors, time base correctors, etc.
D-2000 Series Video and Audio Routing Switchers
VIDEO- AUDIO ROUTING SWITCHERS
D-2000-50x25A
Audio Routing Switcher. Basic " Building Block"
matrix frame capacity is 50 inputs x 25 output busses. Frame size is 10-1/2 inches.
1>eyfeitettettemeivemeeeite
100x25 AUDIO SWITCHER There are no proprietory components used in the Datatek switching systems. All components are available through electronics distributors as standard items.
All plug-in modules are interchangeable with other modules of the same type, and the switcher will remain within specification, without adjustment, when modules are interchanged. If cable equalization is used, the cable equalizer would of course normally need to be reset. Removal or insertion of modules with power on will not disturb other signals, and will not blow fuses.
eCirderre,...· ...700:401ree
The D-2000 Series Routing Switchers use aserial data control s Lem and have expansion capability to 250 inputs x250 outputs.
D-2000-25x2OV D-2000-25x25V D-2000-50x25V D-2000-25x20A D-2000-25x25A VT- 38
Video Routing Switcher. Basic " Building Block"
matrix frame capacity is 25 inputs x 20 output busses. Frame size is 7 inches.
Video Routing Switcher. Basic " Building Block" matrix frame capacity is 25 inputs x 25 output busses. Frame size is 8-3/4 inches.
Video Routing Switcher. Basic " Building Block" matrix frame capacity is 50 inputs x 25 output busses. Frame size is 10-1/2 inches.
Audio Routing Switcher. Basic " Building Block" matrix frame capacity is 25 inputs x 20 output busses. Frame size is 7 inches.
Audio Routing Switcher. Basic " Building Block" matrix frame capacity is 25 inputs x 25 output busses. Frame size is 8-3/4 inches.
MATRIX FRAMES
D-2021 D-2044
Power Supply System, 5-1/4" rack Includes fault monitoring and alarm.
Latch Retention ( Battery) Supply.
mounting.
D-2045 Control Buffer Frame, 3-1/2", for use with X-Y Control Panels.
D-2014 Source Tally Relay Frame, 1-3/4"
D-2019 Parallel Interface Frame, 5-1/4"
Prices and Speci fications Subject to Change Without Notice.
DATATEK CORP.
1121 Bristol Rd.
Mountainside, NJ 07092 (201) 654-8100
Telex 833541 DATATEK MTSD
CONTROL PANELS
·
e.
D-2047 Three Bus Lever Switch Control Panel
D-2037
Single Bus Control Unit, 2- digit lever switch input selection, no take button. Signal switches as lever switch changed. In miniature housing.
IMO
D-2029 Single Bus Touch Pad Control Panel
D-2000 Series Control Panels
D-2040 D-2041
Single Bus Desk Top Control Panel, touch pad input selection with reset and take button, and LED status display.
Single Bus Desk Top Control Panel, lever switch input selection with take button.
Each Datatek control panel is equipped with its own microprocessor to communicate with an associated output bus microprocessor in the matrix frame. The serial data control system uses RG-59/U coaxial cable, with an optoisolator in each bus to prevent errors due to ground loop hum.
Control panels are available to operate either asingle bus, or multiple busses. The are also available for audio- follow- video, audio or video breakaway, and for controlling multiple levels, either on a follow or breakaway basis. In addition, the control panels can be lever switch, touch pad keyboard, or pushbutton per input.
Modems and RS- 232-C interfaces are available to operate single or multiple busses over standard telephone lines, or connected to automation systems.
Control Panels -- Some of the D-2000 series control panels are listed below.
D-2029 D-2030
Single Bus Touch Pad Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting, for video- only, audio- only, or audiofollow- video switching. With two LED displays, one for preset ( selection) and one for line. With reset and take button.
Single Bus Touch Pad Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting, for one video and two audio channels, with provisions for switching audio- follow- video or breakaway of one or both of the audio channels. Includes three LED displays, one each for video and audio channels 1and 2. Includes switch level select switch, reset and take button.
D-2042
D- 2042A
D-2047 D-2049 D- 2049A D-2050 D-2036 D- 2069A
D-2098 D-2100 D-2103
Single Bus 2- Digit Lever Switch Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting, with LED status display and
take button.
Single Bus 3- Digit Lever Switch Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting, with LED status display and take button.
Three Bus 2- Digit Lever Switch Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting.
Two Bus 2- Digit Lever Switch Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting.
Two Bus 3- Digit Lever Switch Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting.
Supervisory CRT Terminal and X-Y Control Panel. Requires also D-2045 Control Buffer Frame.
Alpha- Numeric Single Bus Control Panel, 1-3/4" Mounting, 10 Alphas and 10 numerics/Alpha.
Alpha- Numeric Single Bus Keypad Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting, 12 Alphas and 99 numerics/
Alpha.
Two Bus Keypad Control Panel, 3-1/2" rack mounting.
Single Bus Keypad Control Panel, 3-1/2" rack mounting.
Eight Bus Keypad Control Panel, 3-1/2" mounting, permits split audio, with nine displays.
rack LED
D-2031
Single Bus Touch Pad Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting, for audio- follow- video or audio breakaway switching. With two LED displays, one for video
source and one for audio source. Includes split- audio switch, reset and take button.
Machine Assignment and Control System
The Datatek Machine Assignment and Control System is designed for operation in conjunction with the D-200 Video- Audio Routing Switcher.
D-2032
D-2033-25 D- 2033-25S D- 2033-25P
Portable Diagnostic Control Unit, for checking matrix status from front of rack. Includes LED displays and touch pad keyboard. May also be used as asingle bus control panel.
Single Bus Pushbutton Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting, with 25 illuminated pushbutton switches.
Single Bus Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting, with 25 illuminated pushbutton switches. Provision for split audio switching.
Single Bus Control Panel, 1-3/4" Rack Mounting. Programmed to control any 25 specified inputs out of the matrix.
D-200025x25D D-200050x25D D-2204
D-2205
D-2206
D-2207
Bi -Directional Data Matrix, 8-3/4", for 25 Source Buffer Modules and 25 Destination Switch Modules.
Bi -Directional Data Matrix, 10-1/2", for 50 Source Buffer Modules and 25 Destination Switch Modules.
Source Buffer Module lone needed for each machine interfaced into system).
25x1 Destination Switch Module ( one needed for each machine control panel).
50x1 Destination Switch Module ( one needed for each machine control panel).
Machine Interface Unit, 8 function.
D-2033-50 D- 2033-50S D-2034 S
Single Bus Pushbutton Control Panel, 3-1/2" Rack Mounting, with 50 illuminated pushbutton switches.
Same as above, but with additional switch for split audio switching.
Multi- Bus Touch Pad Control Panel, 3-1/2" Rack Mounting, for operation of the full matrix or aportion of the matrix, including provision for split audio operation. Includes two LED displays, one for output bus and one for input selected. With touchpad, reset and take button. Equipped with key- lock inhibit of the take switch to prevent accidental interference with individual bus control panels. Requires also D-2045 Control Buffer Frame.
D-2208 D-2213
Machine Interface Unit, 16 function.
Machine Control Panel Module. Provides: ( A) RS 422 connection to 25x1 or 50x1 Destination Switch Module and ( b) Connection to readouts and momentary normally open switches on console for up to 8 functions.
Control Panels-- Price dependent on customer requirements. Customer can use existing switches if desired or can build own panels.
Because of options and affecting price, all prices Application" basis.
system are on
configuration a " Price on
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 39
DATATEK CORP.
1121 Bristol Rd. Mountainside, NJ 07092 (201) 654-8100 Telex 833541 DATATEK MTSD
VIDEO- AUDIO SWITCHING UNITS
VIDEO- AUDIO SWITCHING UNITS
D-41:300 Series Video and Audio Switching Units
·Video and Audio switcher " building blocks" of 6x1, 16 x1and 20 x1 · Each building block equipped with self contained power supply · Choice of video- only switching, audio- only switching, audio- follow- video and split audio operation · Video and Audio inputs are high impedance bridging, permitting stacking units for multiple output bus applications · Vertical Interval video switching · Video switching units equipped with 4- section cable equalizer on output · Differential Phase/Differential Gain performance of 0.15°/ 0.15%·Video crosstalk 60 dB or better to 6.0 MHz
·Audio maximum output level + 30 dBm, balanced · Audio distortion 0.15% maximum, 20 Hz to 20 kHz · Audio dynamic range in excess of 100 dB · Audio inputs and outputs on connectors · Balanced audio crosspoint, audio common mode gain - 60 dB, 10 Hz -20 kHz · Remote control panels using momentary switches with choice of LED or incandescent lamps for feedback tally · Remote control cable is RG-59 / U coax with BNC connectors · Local control panels available · Switching units are plug-in modules · Optional tally relays available for source tallies, intercom, etc.
SWITCHING UNITS
D- 4301A
D- 4310A
D- 4302A
D- 4304A D- 4305A D- 4307A DF -603 DF -603H
6 x 1Video Switching Module, bridging inputs, oc-
cupies 2 module widths in 10- module DF -603 Rack Frame. Less rack frame and remote control panel.
$445.00
6x1Video Switching Module, terminating inputs oc-
cupies 1 module width in DF -603 Rack Frame or
DF -603H Rack Frame. Less rack frame and remote
control panel.
$430.00
6 x 1 Audio Switching Module, bridging inputs, oc-
cupies 1 module width in 10- module DF -603 Rack
Frame or in 3- module width DF -603H Rack Frame.
Less rack frame and remote control panel.
$430.00
20 x 1Video Switching Unit, bridging inputs, including 1-3/4" rack frame, less remote control panel.
$935.00
20 x 1Audio Switching Unit, bridging inputs, including 1-3/4" rack frame, less remote control panel.
$935.00
16 x 1 Video- Audio Switching Unit, audio- follow-
video switching, bridging inputs. Includes 1-3/4"
rack frame, less remote control panel.
$1305.00
Rack Frame, 5-1/4"
$175.00
Rack Frame, 1-3/4"
$155.00
REMOTE CONTROL PANELS
D- 4320A-6 D- 4322A-6 D- 4320A- 6S
Pushbutton Remote Control Panel, 6inputs, for video
only, audio- only or audio- follow- video switching.
1-3/4" rack mounting, less control cable ( coax). Uses
switches with LED tallies.
$375.00
Pushbutton Remote Control Panel, 6inputs, for video-
only, audio- only or audio- follow- video switching.
1-3/4" rack mounting, less control cable ( coax). Uses
switches with lamps for tally, and clear plastic lenses
for inserting legends.
$385.00
Pushbutton Remote Control Panel, 6 inputs, audio-
follow- video or split- audio switching. 1-3/4" rack
mounting. Uses switches with LED tallies.
$395.00
D- 4322A- 6x2 D- 4320A-16
Pushbutton Remote Control Panel, 6inputs, 2output
buses, for controlling two of 6x1type switching units.
1-3/4" rack mounting, less control cable ( coax). Uses
lamps for tally and clear plastic lenses for inserting
legends.
$475.00
Pushbutton Remote Control Panel, 16 inputs, for audio- follow- video switching. For use with D- 4307A Switching Units. 1-3/4" rack mounting, less control cable ( coax). Uses switches with LED tallies. $435.00
D- 4322A-16
Pushbutton Remote Control Panel, 16 inputs, for
video- only, audio- only or audio- follow- video switch-
ing. For use with D- 4307A Switching Units. 1-3/4"
rack mounting, less control cable ( coax). Uses switch-
es with lamp for tally, and clear plastic lenses for insert-
ing legends.
$460.00
D- 4320A-20 D- 4322A-20
Pushbutton Remote Control Panel, 20 inputs, for
video- only, audio- only or audio- follow- video switch-
ing. For use with 20 x 1Switching Units. 1-3/4" rack
mounting, less control cable ( coax). Uses switches
with LED tallies.
$455.00
Pushbutton Remote Control Panel, 20 inputs, for
video-only, audio- only or audio- follow- video switch-
ing. For use with 20 x 1Switching Units. 1-3/4" rack
mounting, less control cable ( coax). Uses switches
with lamps for tally, and clear plastic lenses for inserting
legends.
$490.00
D- 4320A- 20S Pushbutton Remote Control Panel, 20 inputs, for
audio- follow- video or split- audio switching. For use
with 20 x 1 Switching Units. 1-3/4" rack mounting.
Requires 2 control cables ( coax). Uses switches with
LED tallies.
$475.00
VT-40
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
DATATEK CORP.
1121 Bristol Road Mountainside, NJ 07092 (201) 654 8100 Telex 833 541 DATATEK MTSD
VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
D- 603G VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
FEATURES · High Impedance Differential Input provides High Return Loss and
50dB or better Longitudinal AC Hum and Noise Reduction · Six Outputs, Direct Coupled Resistive Split, with High Isolation
over Wide Bandwidth ·Front Access for in- position Adjustment of Gain, Output DC, Fre-
quency Response and Transit Time ·Includes Cable Equalizer with Front Access in- position Adjustment
for Cable Length ·Individual Power Supply
The Datatek D- 603G Video Distribution Amplifier is astandard plug-in card module which, with its accompanying frame mounted rear assembly, D-603RA, provides six 75 ohm highly isolated, level matched, source terminated outputs.
Up to ten D-603G Video Distribution Amplifiers and their rear assemblies mount in aDF -603 5-1/4" Rack Frame for accommodation in a standard 19" equipment rack.
A very high impedance differential input provides anon- polarized long time constant AC coupling to the input signal and the low common mode gain reduces longitudinal hum and noise by 50dB or more up to 100KHz. This not only reduces the effects of ground loops but also those caused by transients from lighting circuits, motors, welders, etc. A compensated bridging loop through, in conjunction with the high input impedance, results in ahigh input return loss, power on or off, over awide bandwidth, so reducing mis -match effects.
Front access is provided for screw driver adjustment of gain, oJtput DC offset, frequency response, transit time and cable equalizirg, all with the module in its normal operating position ( not on a module extender).
The D- 603G also provides cable equalizing up to 10dB at 10MHz. The four section slope equalizer is preset to match aparticular cable type (specified when ordering) down to low frequencies and asingle, front access, screw driver adjustment on the D- 603G is set to equalize the particular length of cable involved.
Input and output test points, together with ground terminals to which scope probe ground clips may be attached, are provided at the front of the module. The output test point is low impedance and level corrected to correspond with aterninated output for correct response and level assessment. An LED is used to indicate when power is applied to the module.
The D-603RA Rear Assembly, into which the D-604 plugs, by way of a 22 contact edge connector, provides the input and output BNC connections, together with the module power connections. The rear assembly contains the power transformer, with fused primary, for operation on AC power line, avoiding the hazard of taking high voltage (117V or 234V) line supplies onto the module itself.
A small power cable from the D-603RA Rear Assembly plugs into one of ten power distribution outlets provided on the DF-603 Rack Frame, whether the supply be line or low voltage AC. This means that all connections to a D-603 / D-603RA combination are by way of connectors. Additions or deletions to the complement of amplifiers in the frame may be made at any lime, without wiring, and without interrupting primary supply to the frame or other modules.
The DF -603 5-1/4" Rack Frame accommodates up to ten D-603 Video or D-604 Pulse Distribution Amplifiers. An optional second power distribution system may be added to the DF -603 Frame should it be desired to operate up to six of the amplifiers on asecond supply circuit, such as a priority or emergency supply system.
D- 603G Video Distribution Amplifier with D-603 Rear Assembly $335.00
D-603RA Power Supply and Connector Assembly
100.00
FRAMES DF -603 5-1/4" Rack Frame, accepts 10 D- 507G, D-518,
D- 603G, D-604, D-605, 0-606, or D- 607A modules, intermixed if desired DF -603H 1-3/4" Rack Frame, accepts 3D- 507G, D-518, D- 603G, D-604, D-605, D-606, or 0-607A modules, intermixed if desired DE- 400A Module Extender for D- 507G, D-518, D- 603G, D-604, D-605, and D- 607A
$185.00
$155.00 $30.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 41
DYNIA
E
N
Q
I
367 MAIN SE · BOX 1535 ·
N
E
E
R
I
N
13
LOS LUNAS, NEW MEXICO 87031 · ( 505) 865-6700
800 - 222- 3962
SERVICES
Broadcast and Production Systems by professionals: · Representing over 100 major suppliers. · Systems Engineering and Installation. · Lighting systems design for TV and Film. · Broadcast Facility Design. · Equipment appraisal.
PRODUCTS
AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
Highest Headroom, Greatest Density, Easiest Installation, Individually Powered. Model 815 - 1 in 10 out, common gain adj. $298.00 Model 8151 - 1 in 6 out, individual gain adj. $298.00 Model 815M - Monitor Amp, 12 watts RMS $298.00 Model 815F - Rack Frame, 10 Modules $ 180.00
AUDIO CONSOLES
The International - -
8 Mixing Channels, Rack Mount, Switchable Mic or Line, DA outputs, + 30dBm output.
Model M-1 -
16 switchable inputs into 1 mono output. Handle lots of inputs in small space. $2395
Model M-2 Model S
8 inputs into 2 independent monaural mixers, ideal for editing suites.
$2695
8 stereo inputs into 1stereo output. $3295
AC LINE SURGE PROTECTORS
Our convenient package is still the best. Combines line conditioning and "hash" filter in compact units. Protect sensitive solid state electronics. Thousands in use by major computer and word processor manufacturers. Most models $26.95. 6 models to choose from.
VT-42
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
DYNAIR ELECTRONICS, INC.
5275 Market Street San Diego, CA 92114 (61 9) 263-771 1 TVVX 910-335-2040
111111111·111111111·111· 111111113111111111111111112
SVA-100B
Illialliallill11111 11111111111111111····
SAA-110A
SOLID-STATE SWITCHING EQUIPMENT
ritimagegre
SCA-120A
SVA-101B
SAA-111A
SCA-131A
SERIES 10
The Series 10 Solid- State Video and Audio Switching Equipment provides 10- input/ 10- output high quality vertical interval monochrome or color video switching and on- air quality audio switching. Each 10 x 10 matrix is housed in a 5-1/4"H x 14-1/2"D x 19" rack mount chassis ( 13.34 x 36.83 x 48.26 cm) which includes power supply. The control system is microprocessor- based and allows local and remote operation. Remote master and individual output bus control
Video Switcher
SVA-100B. Self-contained, for local control. 10 inputs, 10 dual out-
puts with tally and regulated power supply.
$4350.00
Video Switcher
SVA-101B. Same as SVA-100B but for remote control operation only. Control by single coaxial comm. line. Requires remote control panel(s)
option.
$4060.00
Video Switcher
SVA-102B. Same as SVA-101B but for slave control only. Con-
trolled from switcher control bus only. ( Model CC- 1130A Control Bus Jumper Cable Assembly not included). Tally not provided. $3425.00
Audio Switcher
SAA-110A. Self-contained, for local control. 10 input by 10 output
with tally and regulated power supply.
$4050.00
Audio Switcher
SAA-111A. Same as SAA-110A but for remote control operation
only. Control by single coaxial comm line. Requires remote control
panel(s) option.
$3760.00
Audio Switcher
SAA-112A. Same as SAA-111A but for slave control only. Controlled from switcher control bus only. ( Model CC- 1130A Control Bus Jumper Cable Assembly not included). Tally not provided. $3125.00
panels are available to operate over asingle coaxial cable control line. Up to four levels of switching, 1video and 3audios as an example,
can be controlled locally and/or remotely. A total of 15 remote
control panels may be used to control a system. Models SVA-100B, SVA-101B, SAA-110A and SAA-111A include 10 Form A tally relays and facilities to control the slave matrices, Models SVA-102B and SAA-112A. Notice: Series 10 equipment has been tested to show compliance with FCC Rules, Part 15, Subpart J, for Class A computing devices.
Master Remote Control Panel
SCA-120A. Rack mounting. For remotely controlling all 10 outputs
of video and/or audio switchers.
$900.00
Master Remote Control Panel
SCA-122A. Desk top use. Same as SCA-120A except for housing. $900.00
Single Bus Remote Control Panel
SCA-130A. Rack mounting. For remotely controlling 1 output of
video and/ or audio switchers.
$675.00
Single Bus Remote Control Panel
SCA-131A. Desk top use. Same as SCA-130A except for housing. $625.00
Switcher Control Bus Jumper Cable Assembly
CC- 1130A. Switcher Control Bus Jumper Cable Assembly for control
of slave matrices, Models SVA-102B and/or SAA-112A. 24 inches ( 61
cm) in length.
$120.00
Termination
TC-260A. 75 ohm BNC Termination Plug for terminating looping
video inputs.
$10.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-43
C)YNAIR ELECTRONICS, INC.
5275 Market Street San Diego, CA 921 14 (61 9) 263-771 1 TWX 910-335-2040
DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
DA- 1510A
BP- 1502A
SW- 1540A
FR- 1500A
VS- 12D
SERIES 1500 VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
Series 1500 distribution and switching products may be used as selfcontained, stand alone units for desk top or custom mounting. For rack mounting applications, units can be installed in the Model FR- 1500A Rack Mounting Frame which occupies only 13/4 inches (4.45 cm) of standard 19- inch rack space. All units are equipped with BNC type signal connectors unless otherwise noted. Mating connectors are not included.
DA -1510A Video Distribution Amplifier. Provides four isolated 75 ohm source terminated outputs from one high impedance looping input.
·Input: 75 ohm unbalanced, high impedance looping, 1V p- p, BNC
connectors · Outputs: 4, 75 ohm source terminated, 1V p- p, BNC
connectors · Gain: Adjustable + /-3dB · Frequency Response ( ref.
1MHz): 100 kHz- 10 MHz: + /- 0.5 dB; 30 MHz: + 1, -2dB · Tilt: Less
than 1% line or field · Differential Gain: 0.25% at 5 MHz, 10-90%
APL, 1V p- poutput · Differential Phase: 0.25° at 5 MHz, 10-90%
APL, 1V p- poutput · Hum and Noise: 65 dB RMS below 1V p- p, 10
MHz bandwidth · Size: Module only, 1-11/16"H x5-3/4"W x9" D
(4.32 x14.61 x22.86 cm); mounted in MB- 1504A desk mount, 2"H x
6"W x9-1/4"D ( 5.08 x 15.24 x 23.50 cm) · Power: 115/230 VAC
+ /- 10%, 50/60 Hz · Net Weight: 2-1/2 pounds ( 1.13 kg)
DA -1510A
$300.00
FR- 1500A Rack Mounting Frame. Provides mounting for three 13) Series 1500 units in standard equipment racks. A captive screw fastener at the rear of the frame, and aguide pin at the front, secures each unit, allowing equipment to be used in mobile applications.
·Size: 1-3/4"H x9-1/4"D x19" rack mounting ( 4.45 x29.21 x48.26
cm) · Net Weight: 2-1/2 pounds ( 1.13 kg)
$100.00
BP- 1502A
Blank Module. Fills one unused space in FR- 1500A Frame · Net
Weight: 1-1/4 pounds ( 0.57 kg)
$60.00
MB- 1504A
Desk Mount Kit. For one Series 1500 unit. Includes rugged aluminum
cover, rubber feet, and hardware.
·Net Weight: 13 ounces ( 0.37 kg)
$30.00
PULSE DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
PD- 1515A Pulse Distribution Amplifier
Provides 4isolated, source terminated outputs from 1high impedance looping input. Regenerative input, linear output. Normal output with up to 1000 ft. ( 305 m) Belden 8281 input cable.
·Input: 2-4 V p- p negative pulses, 75 ohm unbalanced differential, high impedance bridging, BNC connectors · Common Mode Rejection: Greater than 60 dB, 50-400 Hz, + / - 30 V reference chassis ground · Outputs: 2-4 V p- pnegative pulses, 4each 75 ohm source terminated, BNC connectors · Output Return Loss: Greater than 35 dB at 5MHz · Output Isolation: Greater than 40 dB at 5MHz · Output
Rise Time: 130 ns · Gain: Adjustable to 2-4 V p- p · Hum and Noise:
75 dB RMS below 4V p- p · Overshoot and Ringing: Less than 1.0%
·Tilt: Less than 1.0% · Size: 1-11/16"H x9"D )55-3/4"W ( 4.32 x 22.86 x16.61 cm): mounted in MB- 1504A desk mount, 2"H x9-1/4"D
x6"W ( 5.08 x23.50 x 15.24 cm) · Power: 115/230 V ac + /- 10%,
50/60 Hz · Net Weight: 3lbs. ( 1.36 kg)
$325.00
EQUALIZERS
EQ-1530A Equalizer ( Post Equalizing) EQ-1531A Equalizer ( Post Equalizing) EQ-1532A Equalizer ( Pre- Equalizer)
$575.00 700.00 650.00
PASSIVE VIDEO SWITCHERS
Multiple input to single output locally controlled terminating video switchers. Units have extra contacts for user wiring of audio- follow or external cue lights.
VS- 6D Video Switcher Video Switcher. Provides passive switching of from one to six inputs to a single output. Incorporates switch- controlled terminations. Equipped with separate auxiliary switch section for user wiring of un-
balanced audio, balanced audio, external cue lights, or other secondary functions. For lighted pushbutton operation, order LK1541A Lighting Kit shown below.
· Inputs: Six ( all except operating channel terminated in 75 ohms) · Output: One · Connectors: BNC · Size: 1-3/4"H x 6-1/2"D x 19"W ( 4.45 x16.51 x48.26 cm) · Net Weight: 2-1/2" pounds ( 1.13 kg)
$225.00
VS- 12D Video Switcher Video Switcher. Same as VS- 6D but with 12 inputs.
·Inputs: Twelve ( all except operating channel terminated in 75 ohms) · Output: One · Connectors: BNC · Size: 1-3/4"H x 6-1/2"D x 19"W ( 4.45 x16.51 x48.26 cm) · Net Weight: 2-1/2 pounds ( 1.13 kg)
$300.00
LK-1541A Optional Lighting Kit Lighting Kit. For use with passive switchers. Provides 6volts DC at
100 mA to power lamps provided with switcher. Calculator style plugin transformer with 6foot ( 1.82 meters) cable.
·Connector: Miniature male, 3.5 mm ( mates with Switchcraft No. 41 jack provided on rear of switcher) · Primary Power: 115 VAC, 60 Hz
·Net Weight: 6ounces ( 0.17 kg)
$20.00
SW- 1540A 6- Input, 1- Output Passive Video Switcher
b- Input, 1- Output Passive Video Switcher. Switch controlled 75 ohm inputs. Separate auxiliary contacts included for user wiring of secondary switching functions. Lighted pushbuttons with use of LK-1541A Lighting Kit. Shown with optional MB- 1504A.
·Inputs: 6 ( all except input selected, 75 ohm terminated), BNC connectors · Output: 1, BNC connector · Switching: Break- beforemake · Size: Module only, 1-11/16"H x9"D x5-3/4"W ( 4.32 x22.86 x14.61 cm); mounted in MB- 1504A desk mount, 2"H x9-1/4"D x 6"W ( 5.08 x23.50 x15.24 cm) · Net Weight: 2-1/2 lbs. ( 1.13 kg )
$200.00
VT- 44
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
DYNAIR ELECTRONICS,
5275 Market Street San Diego, CA 92114 (619) 263-7711 TVVX 910-335-2040
INC.
BROADCAST DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
SERIES 5300 DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
Series 5300 Distribution Equipment mounts in a 5-1/4" x 19" rack- mounting frame ( 13.34 x48.26 cm). The frame has atotal of
twenty mounting spaces. Two power supply modules can be used to provide redundant power supply operation. All amplifier modules include " on- board" power regulators, fuses and blown fuse indicators. AC input power is 115/230 VAC + 10%, 50/60 Hz.
FR- 5300B FRAME
Module Mounting Frame. Provides twenty spaces for Series 5300 modules. All modules can be installed without soldering. ( Frame shown with modules installed.)
Size: 5-1/4"H x14-1/4"D x19"W Net Weight: 9pounds . . . $400.00
PS- 5305B Power Supply Module
Power Supply Module. Mounts in FR- 5300B Frame and provides
unregulated dc for amplifier modules. Requires four spaces in frame.
Two power supplies can be installed for redundant opera-
tion.
$500.00
AD- 5370B 5- OUTPUT AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER MODULE
High performance audio distribution amplifier module. Indefinite short
circuit protection. Can be used in same frame with other Series 5300
modules.
$325.00
DA -5310B DUAL 1INPUT- 2OUTPUT VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER MODULE Video Distribution Amplifier Module for high performance video systems. Two identical amplifier sections on one module, each
providing 1 terminating input to 2, 75 ohm outputs. Equalization available for up to 1000 ft. 1305 ml of cable.
DA-5310B/10A Video DA, Non Equalized DA-5310B/11A Video DA, Equal., Belden 8281, Unbal. In.
DA-5310B/21A Video DA, Equal., WECo 16 PEVL, Bal. In DA-5310B/22A Video DA, Equal., WECo 760, Bal. In
$450.00 .575.00
575.00 575.00
DA -53206 5- OUTPUT VIDEO AND SUBCARRIER DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER MODULE
Video Distribution Amplifier Module for high performance video systems. Sync- Tip reference maintains dc level with changing APL. Equalization available for up to 1000 ft. ( 305 m) of cable.
DA -532013/10A Video DA, Non- Equalized DA-5320B/11A Video DA, Equal., Belden 8281, Unbal. In.
DA-5320B/21A Video DA, Equal., WECo 16, PEVL, Bal. In. . DA-5320B/22A Video DA, Equal., WECo 760, Bal. In
$395.00 .460.00
.460.00 460.00
DA -53306 10- OUTPUT VIDEO AND SUBCARRIER DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER MODULE Video Distribution Amplifier Module for high performance video systems. Sync- Tip reference maintains dc level with changing APL. Equalization available for up to 1000 ft. 1305 m) of cable.
DA-5330B/10A Video DA, Non- Equalized
$400.00
DA-5330B/11A Video DA, Equal., Belden 8281, Unbal. In. . 470.00
DA -53308/21A Video DA, Equal., WECo 16 PEVL, Bal. In
470.00
DA-5330B/22A Video DA, Equal., WECo 760, Bal. In.
470.00
DA -5340B 4- OUTPUT VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER MODULE
4- Output Video Distribution Amplifier Module and Frame Adapter for
high performance video systems. 1high impedance looping input and
4,75 ohm outputs provided
$225.00
EQ-5350B POST- EQUALIZING AMPLIFIER MODULE Post- Equalizing Amplifier Module. Provides up to 24dB of equalization at 8 MHz. Will equalize up to 3000 ft. 1914.4m) of Belden type 8281 cable or 5000 ft. ( 1524 ml of WECo 16 PEVL. Provides 2,75 ohm outputs.
EQ-53506/51A Post- Equalizing Amp., Belden 8281, Unbal. In.$660.00 EQ-5350B/61A Post- Equalizing Amp., WECo 16 PEVL, Bal. In. 550.00
LA- 5353B UNBALANCED TO BALANCED LINE AMPLIFIER MODULE 75 ohm unbalanced input, 124 ohm balanced line driving amplifier module. Available with pre- equalization for up to 2500 ft. 1762 m) of
WECo 16 PEVL cable to provide 750C) ft. 12286 m) equalized circuit when used with EQ-5350B / 61A.
LA- 53536/10A Line Amplifier, Non Equalized LA-5353B/41A Line Amplifier, Equalized, WECo 16 PEVL
$450.00 520.00
FR5300B
DA5330B 5300 Series
PD- 5360B 5- OUTPUT PULSE DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER MODULE
Pulse Distribution Amplifier Module for high performance video
systems. Regenerative input, linear output with controlled,
adjustable, rise time. Front panel input pulse presence indicator.
Normal output with up to 1000 ft. 1305 m) Belden 8281 input
cable.
$275.00
SERIES 5300 BLANK FILLER PANELS
BP- 5390A Blank Filler Panel. Mounts in FR- 5300B Frame and fills one
Lnused amplifier space. Net Weight: 4oz.
$50.00
BP- 5391A Blank Filler Panel. Mounts in FR- 5300B Frame and fills two
unused amplifier spaces. Net Weight: 5oz.
$60.00
BP- 5392A Blank Filler Panel. Mounts in FR- 5300B Frame and fills four
unused amplifier spaces. Net Weight: 6oz.
$70.00
CC- 5398A POWER SUPPLY SERVICE CABLE
Power Supply Service Cable. Allows power supply to be extended
from frame for maintenance.
$175.00
CE -5396A MODULE EXTENDER
Module Extender for ad Series 5300 modules ( except power supply).
Allows modules to be extended from frame for maintenance. Net
Weight: 2lbs.
$250.00
CN-9860A CABLE MATING CONNECTOR
Cable Mating Connector. For use with Western Electric type 760 or
equivalent 124 ohm balanced cable. Mates with Trompeter
BJ-77
$35.00
CN-9861A CABLE MATING CONNECTOR
Cable Mating Connector. For use wth Western Electric type 16 PEVL
or equivalent 124 ohm balanced cable. Mates with Trompeter
BJ-77.
$35.00
FA- 5308A Frame Adapter, Power Supply, 18" Power Cord FA- 5309A Frame Adapter, Power Supply, 72" Power Cord FA- 5315A Frame Adapter, Unbal. In. FA- 5316A Frame Adapter, Bal. In. FA- 5325A Frame Adapter, Unbal. In. FA- 5326A Frame Adapter, Bal. In. FA- 5335A Frame Adapter, Unbal. In. FA- 5336A Frame Adapter, Bal. In.
FA- 5345A Frame Adapter, Unbal. In. FA- 5355A Frame Adapter, Unbal. In.
FA- 5357A Frame Adapter, Loop In FA- 5358A Frame Adapter, Term In. FA- 5375A Frame Adapter, Audio
SP- 5359A Transient Protection
$90.00 95.00 75.00
125.00 75.00 90.00
110.00 130.00
60.00 75.00
80.00 75.00 75.00
75.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 45
Dynatech Data Systems
7644 Dynatech Court Springfield, VA 22153 (703) 569-9000 ( 800) 368-2210
VIDEO PATCHING EQUIPMENT
.40V, 04, Weele,
Saa
·
COAXIAL PATCH FIELDS AND ACCESSORIES
The system consists of a high density patchfield that incor-
porates 22 channels in a standard 19 inch wide rack panel -- either 11/ 4 or 31 / 2 inches high. Each circuit is connected to a patented COTERM( 22T jack which provides normal-thru connection without the use of patch cords or looping plugs. Patch cords may be inserted to break the normal-thru signa path and program cross connections. Sources that are patched out are automatically terminated within the
jacks. Test probes may be used to enter the jack to sample the signal without interruption of the live circuit.
The Dynatech Coaxial Patching System provides normal-thru connections and self - termination within the jacks, as well as cross patching and non- interrupting on-line monitoring of live circuits.
COTERM® 22T
(Normal-Thru, Self - Terminating)
$38.00
The COTERM 22T is areliable, normal-thru patching and line terminating jack designed for rugged use and trouble- free service. It is availa-
ble in 75 ohm impedance or optionally in 50 ohm impedance. It accepts standard BNC connectors on its rear terminals.
COJAX® 22B
(Normal-Thru)
$34.00
The COJAX 228 is identical to the COTERM 22T in dimensions quality and serviceability. It is anormal-thrJ patching jack without the internal self- termination feature.
COPATCH® 2-2A
(Normally Terminating)
$38.00
The COPATCH 2-2A is a self- terminating jack without the normalthru feature. It provides patchfield appearance of two standby source circuits. 75 or 50 ohm impedance.
COPATCW 2-2
(Non- Terminating, Non-Normalling)
$34.00
The COPATCH 2-2 has neither the normal-thru or self- termination features. It provides two inputs to test equipment, trunk lines or other equipment.
All Coaxial Jacks may be interchanged for use in mixed patchfields.
COAXIAL PANELS
Panels are available in metal or phenolic either 11 /4 or 31 / 2 inches high for standard rack mounting. Coterm, Cojax or Copatch jacks may be mounted interchangeably on all panels-- each panel holds 22 jacks across the 19 inch width. 4 standard panels are available, consult factory for other sizes.
Model 105-113-22 Aluminum 134" high x19" wide
$46.00
Model 105-114-22 Phenolic 134" high x19" wide
65.00
Model 105-115-22 Aluminum 31 /2 "high x19" wide
52.50
Model 105-112-22 Phenolic 31 /2 "high x19" wide
73.50
COAXIAL PATCH CORDS
Model 105-057 -- Standard Patch Cord constructed with soldered center pin and crimped sleeve shield connections to meet the highest stan-
dards of reliability. Standard lengths of 2, 3and 4'; others available on
special order.
PATCH CORDS, ( Specify length -- 2, 3and 4' standard)
Model 105-057-Y (Patch plugs on both ends)
$23.00*
Model 105-057-BNC-Y (Patch plug on one end, male BNC on oppo-
site end)
$23.00*
VIDEO COAXIAL CABLE, ( Specify Length)
Model 105- 112- MM -Y (MM = BNC male connectors on both ends)
$23.00*
COAXIAL TEST PROBES
TEST PROBES, ( Specify Length -- 6' standard)
Model 105-5-Y (Test probe tip on one end, standard patch plug on
opposite end)
$23.00*
Model 105- 5A -Y(Test probe tip on one end, BNC male connector on
opposite end)
$23.00*
Model 105- 5B -Y (Test probe tip on one end, UHF male connector on
opposite end)
$23.00
COAXIAL PLUGS
Model 105-13 -- Dummy plug for opening normal-thru connections.
$11.50
Model 105-14 -- Terminating plug for use with Cojax or Copatch 2-2
to terminate source in proper impedance
$17.00
Y = length in feet; customer to specify. 'Plus $. 50 per foot over 6feet.
VT-46
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
FAROUDJA LABORATORIES, INC.
946 Benicia Avenue Sunnyvale, CA 94086 (408) 245-1492
VIDEO PROCESSORS
RecordEx
RecordEx" improves the picture quality of your portable recorder in the field. By processing small details prior to recording, it prevents their loss in successive generations.
The new FL RecordEx TM is an add-on device which compensates in advance for the usual picture degradation that 3/4" and 1/2" cassettes suffer in normal playback operation.
RecordEx TM goes in your signal path ahead of the VTR, after the camera. RecordEx TM crisps the small details in the picture without enhancing large outlines. As aresult the playback image does not have the usual flat, pasty appearance with over- emphasized edges that conventional enhancers produce.
To get even further advantage from this unique signal process, RecordExTvgenerates apedestal around small image details, allowing your playback enhancer to reduce luminance and chroma noise without loss of detail. A sharper, crisper, more detailed image that does not look enhanced is the result.
In addition to its Record boost features, the new RecordEx TM is also capable of enhancing the Play-back signal from acassette recorder. RecordEx" is afully compatible device that requires no modification of your camera, VTR, or playback sen-p. RecordExTM is small ( 5" x5" x 1.5"), weighs only 12 ounces, and fits conveniently on the side of your battery- operated VTR. It requires less than 1.2 watts from the VTR battery. RecordEx n 'A is available in Rack- Mount and Portable configurations, and is available for NTSC as well as for PAL / SECAM standards.
Model No. PRX-N PRX-P RM-RX-N RM-RX-P
Portable RecordExTM in a5x5x1.5", 12 oz. Package for NTSC/PAL-M applications Portable Rec ordE xTM in a5x5x1.5", 12 oz.
package for PAL/ SECAM applications Rack Mount RecordEx" 1-3/4" height. NTSC Video In, Video Out. 115V160Hz AC
Rack Mount RecordETM 1-3/4" height. PAL/ SECAM Video In, Video Out. 220V/50Hz AC
Price $995.00 1100.00 1300.00
1400.00
Accessories
3/4" or 1/2" RecordEx TM and Record One Demonstration Cassette ( NTSC) 10- pin Interconnection Cable for PR- 1and PRX 14- pin Interconnection Cable for PR- 1and PRX 110V/60Hz or 220V/50Hz AC Adapte- for PR- 1and PRX
50.00 110.00 110.00
75.00
MIIIIII/1111111111i1
111111111111111
ColorEx The ColorEx is a chroma noise reducer and enhancer designed specifically to work with one inch professional VTRs and 3/4 inch format recorders used in ENG, EFP, or general purpose applications. With a standard NTSC input signal the ColorEx yields an enhanced NTSC output with up to 12 dB of chroma signal to noise ratio improvement.
The ColorEx features include: 11 A noise reducer switchable between 6 dB or 12 dB of noise reduction. 2) aciroma enhancer with eliminates chroma ringing, chrominance/luminance delay errors, and apparent loss of chroma bandwidth associated with 3/4" VTRs. 3) An active comb filter separator which preserves the integrity of the luminance and chrominance bandwidth.
The front panel controls include: la, A three position N/R selector switch with 0, 6dB and 12 dB selections. ( b) A Chroma Enhancing 2 position switch marked " operate/bypass".
Connections are made through standard BNC plugs on the rear panel. The NTSC source driver can acccmodate up to three outputs. Selection of the level of noise reduction is dependant on the quality of the NTSC input signal. The ColorEx is housed in arugged rack mount case only one module high.
Model No.
CRX-N
Color Noise Reducer ano Enhancer ( NTSC)
Video In, Video Out, 1-3/4" Rack Mount. 115V/60Hz AC
Price $5995.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-47
FAROUDJA LABORATORIES, INC.
946 Benicia Avenue Sunnyvale, CA 94086 (408) 245-1492
DECODER
/7"///////111/MIIIIIIIIMM·ANA%%X\XN IVVVY77/////iiiiiiIIIIIIIIii\\\\
·
1
er)
DECODER
MODEL CFD-2 NTSC DECODER w/CHROMA ENHANCER The CFD-2 is a high quality NTSC to RGB comb filter decoder for use in critical applications where high resolution and absence of artifacts are required. Among these applications are large screen projection, precision color monitoring, tape-to-film transfer, computer generated information display, color keying and standard conversion.
The model CFD-2 uses a novel active comb filtering method which leads to amuch more effective suppression
of color subcarrier dot crawl problem present with standard comb filter designs. In addition, the resultant image has no visible loss of resolution. The luminance bandwidth extends to 10 MHz, making the CFD-2 the closest thing to true RGB possible. This comb filter approach results also into an inherent improvement in signal-to-noise ratio.
Features of the Faroudja Laboratories CFD-2 include also, a unique luminance enhancer to improve narrow band input signals, and chroma enhancement circuitry which eliminates ringing, chroma/luminance delay errors, and apparent loss of chroma bandwidth often associated with NTSC signals.
With a standard NTSC input signal, the CFD-2 Decoder provides on the back panel: Separate RGB signals, combed chroma and luminance, R-Y, B-Y, G-Y, and sync outputs. All sources drivers are capable of handling three outputs.
The CFD-2 is a moderately priced professional unit, housed in arugged mount case only one module high.
CFD-2
$5,995.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Faroudja Laboratories Decoder CFD-2
Inputs:
(75 ohms)
Video:
1V p- pNTSC
Subcarrier:
4V p- p3.57945 MHz
Outputs:
(75 ohms)
R, G, B:
1V p- p
R-Y, B-Y, G-Y:
1V p- p
Luminance:
1V p- p
Chroma:
3.58 MHz, 1V p- p
Sync:
4V p- p
Performances,
luminance channel:
Bandwidth:
+1dB to 5MHz, -3dB at 8MHz
2T sine- square pulse Kfactor:
under 1.5%
Vertical tilt:
under 2%
Signal to noise ratio:
60 dB
Subcarrier rejection:
32 dB
Performances,
chrominance channel:
Demodulated chroma bandwidth: 1.5MHz
Demodulation quadrature:
90° ± 1°
DP:
under 1.5°
DG:
under 1.5%
Chroma -luminance delay error: less than 25 ns
Front panel controls
Chrominance channel
amplitude:
±3dB
phase:
±20°
enhancement":
ON/OFF
Luminance enhancement
amplitude: threshold: Dimensions
0to + 50% ( rise time reduction) 0to 15 IRE units
Width:
19" ( 48.3 cm)
Height:
1.75" ( 4.5 cm)
Depth:
16" ( 40.6 cm)
Weight
8.5 lbs ( 38.6 kg)
Power
117 VAC, 60 Hz, 40 VA
"Chrome enhancement reduces chroma rise time by 50%, reduces by 6dB chroma ringing and reduces chroma/luminance delay from
± 100ns to 25ns
VT-48
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
F
R a c) 49 Lexington St.
·
W. Newton, MA 02165 (617) 244-3223 Telex 922407
TIME BASE CORRECTORS
f`
FA-400 TBC With Freeze Frame
Features ·Full color frame memory function
·Compact, lightweight unit specially designed for professional video systems
·Outstanding timebase correction together with automatic/manual field 1and field 2freeze, and remote control capabilities
·Corrects errors in 1/2" and 3/4" VTRs, or any V- lock or non- V- lock source
·A full processing amp
·Optional remote control ·Includes a built-in RS- 170A standard sync signal generator with
gen -lock function
FA-400 TBC w/Freeze Frame FA-420RU Remote Unit for FA-400/420
$ 5950.00 675.00
FA-420
FA-420 TBC With Freeze Frame
Features ·Compact, lightweight unit ·Full feature digital time base correction ·Full color frame memory
·Capable of correcting errors in 1/2" and 3/4" VTRs, or any V- lock or non- V- lock source
·TBC processes color in either the HETERO or VTR SC modes ·Optional remote control unit allows full operation away from the
FA-420 ·Full processing amp allows control of video level, chroma level,
chroma phase, set-up and freeze operation
·Comes with built-in digital DOC and aRS- 170A standard sync signal generator with gen -lock function
FA-420 Digital Time Base Corrector w/Freeze Frame FA-420RU Remote Unit for FA-400/420
$ 7950.00 675.00
All111111111111111111k. 41P110
FA- 410
FA-410 Digital Time Base Corrector
Features
·PAL/ SECAM, NTSC standards ·16H wide range time base correction for alarge variety of popular
VTRs ( such as the 3/4" U-format, VHS and Betamax) in studio and production use today ·Designed especially for ENG and field production applications
·Component encoding of luminance and color difference signals ·Either external sync referenced or non- capstan servoed VTRs are
corrected ·Portable small size and low weight ·Unbeatable low cost compared with other available equipment with
less capability in many instances ·Digital luminance/chroma delay correction ·Composite and non-composite outputs ·Chroma noise reduction with comb filtering ·Built-in sync pulse generator ·LED input level dispay
·White clip function ·Optional digital DOC is available ( standard for NTSC) ·Dimensions: 16.92"W x 3.46"H x 19.88"D ( 430 x 88 x 505mm)
(19" rack type)
FA-410 Digital Time Base Corrector ( NTSC) w/Dropout Compensator DT Option for Sony BVU-820
$7450.00 400.00
1 4
%le
I J4 4, 4
FA-430
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111M
FA -430 Digital Time Base Corrector/Image Processor
Features ·Full feature processing for 3/4" and 1/2" VTR formats ·Includes Time Base Correction, Image Enhancement, Digital Color
Correction and Noise Reduction ·System consists of the basic 19" rack- mount main control unit and a
compact remote controller containing controls for all correction functions ·Incorporates the major design and performance features of the Model FA-410 ·Combines both Hdetail enhancement and selective noise reduction to provide pleasing pictures with appearance of greater bandwidth ·Color correction allows RGB correction to compensate for poorly aligned camera white Et black levels as well as for camera-to- camera differences in shooting the same scene ·Special Black Stretch circuit that provides improved contrast in low light level scenes ·Allows directors to " paint" scenes to create special moods by changing overall picture hue ·Time Base Correction capabilities provide professional broadcast level performance ·Composite or non- composite video outputs, built-in sync pulse generator, and composite sync and VTR subcarrier outputs ·Dub -ln, Dub- Out mode for editing and duplicating
FA-430 Time Base Corrector Et Image Processor $ 12,500.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-49
FC:1 ao R· ·
49 Lexington St. W. Newton, MA 02165 (617) 244-3223 Telex 922407
SIGNAL PROCESSING
DEC- 100
ENC-100
CCS-4300 Color Corrector with Full Broadcast Processing Amp
Features · Full broadcast specifications · 19" Rackmounting processor Et remote control unit · Independent RGB controls for both white Et black levels ·Vertical blanking set in 1H steps range 10H to 21H ·Designed for color balancing and leveling in production, post pro-
duction and telecine operations CCS-4300 Color Corrector $5500.00
TSG-5000 Sync Pulse and Signal Generator
Features · Highly advanced sync pulse and signal generator with excellent
performance · PAL, NTSC standards ·Hdrive, Vdrive, composite blanking, composite sync, burst flag and
vertical sync/2 outputs ( plus PAL pulse for PAL).
·Superior gen -lock capability for an external composite video signal ·Gen- lock to either composite video ( black burst) or composite sync
and subcarrier ( plus PAL pulse for PALI--mode of the gen -lock operation is indicated by LED lamp on the front panel ·When gen -lock operation is off, built-in sync generator will be operative
·Optional CB- 5000 Color Bar Generator and BC- 5000 Background Color Generator are available ( both generators are plug-in module
type) -- remote control capability of hue, saturation and luminance for the background color
·Dimensions: 16.92"W x3.46"H x 13.19"D ( 430 x 88 x 335 mm) (19" rack type)
TSG-5000 Sync Pulse and Signal Generator Color Bar Generator
Back Color Generator
ALC -4100 Automatic Level Controller
$3400.00 1100.00
700.00
Features · PAL, NTSC standards ·Correction of video output level differences ·Automatic gain control
·Separate control for video, sync and burst signals
ALC-4100 Automatic Level Controller
DEC-100 RGB Decoder
$ 3450.00
Features ·Converts standard NTSC video signals to RGB components, primar
uy used to provide Chroma key inputs on switchers or to mix with RGB Graphic Systems
·Converts composite video inputs from cameras and VTRs, etc. and provides RGB component signals as well as Sync outputs
DEC- 100 RGB Decoder
ENC -100 Color Encoder
$ 1900.00
Features
· Especially designed to incorporate with the FVW-910, in conjunction with the CC- 910, CS- 710 and VTW-600 in conjunction with the CU-
600, resulting in effective performance
·Encodes analogue or digital RGB signals input
· Special mixing is performed providing certain and distinct superimposition
· Both NTSC and PAL standards are available ·Dimensions: 16.92"W x 1.75"H x 12.6"D ( 430 x44 x320 mm)
ENC-100 Color Encoder
CCS -4200 Color Corrector
$ 2000.00
Features · Highly advanced color corrector for professional use · PAL, NTSC standards
·Composed of the main process unit and remote control unit ·Variations in the color balance and video level caused by the sur-
rounding conditions in ENG, EFP, etc. are finely corrected
· For correction of color tone differences, gamma, gain and black balance adjustors are provided
· For correction of video signal level, video level, chroma level, set-up and burst phase adjustors are provided
·Three operation modes: by-pass, operation, and off · DIF/BAL mode switch: DIF is for adjusting live camera and VTR
output; BAL is for adjusting film camera output ·Gamma on/off switch
· Inferior sync and burst signals improvement
· Each adjustor includes neutral center clip ·Dimensions: Main Process Unit 16.92"W x1.75"H x 18.11"D ( 430
x44.5 x460 mm) ( 19" rack type) ·Remote Control Unit 9.84"W x2.17"H x3.86"D ( 250 x55 x98 mm)
CCS-4200 Color Corrector $4500.00
VT- 50
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
FO
2 ·
® 49 Lexington St. W. Newton, MA 02165 (617) 244-3223 Telex 922407
VIDEO MEASUREMENT
IV- 550
f=111111111=1.1811112111/11
· 6,ef) - 4) · e ° e ce et -
VS- 1000
IV- 570
IV-550 Video Micro Scaler
Features
· Especially developed for use with the microscope · Horizontal length of an object in apicture can be precisely measured
by using one horizontal and two vertical lines whose positions are independently varied · High resolution: maximum 1999 horizontally · Measured data is displayed on both the picture scene and front panel of the unit · Calibration adjustor sets the most suitable measurement length based upon size of the object in a picture · Edge enhancer function provides clear picture quality, assisting in
precise measurement · Five different measurement units are selective 1nm, urn, mm, cm
and m) ·Dimensions: 16.92"W x3.46"H x 13.78"D 1430 x88 x350 mm)
(19" rack type)
IV- 550 Video Micro Scaler
$3000.00
IV -570 Crossline Generator
Features
·Compact and easy operation design · Essentially designed for observing, seizing, comparing or recog-
nizing size, length or position of an object displayed in a picture · One each of horizontal line and vertical line is displayed in either the
straight line or dotted line display modes · In either the straight/dot modes, each display line can be variably
positioned on the monitor ·Also each display line can be set to the fixed position · Graduations are included with horizontal and vertical straight lines ·Dimensions: 8.46"W x1.73"H x9.84"D 1215 x44 x250 mm)
IV- 570 Crossline Generatoi
$775.00
4
1111 lb OF · (10
lb · it
e
VPA-1000
VS- 1000 Video Scaler
Features
· Low cost measurement unit for human action and object motion analysis
·Two measurement modes: in the scale mode, single or double crosslines which are variably positioned independently are superimposed onto the picture; in the grating mode, number of line selected by 5step rotary switches in both horizontal and vertical position are
superimposed ·Size of the mask can be freely adjusted ·Comparison of sizes, distances and space of different picture ele-
ment can be readily determined ·Dimensions: 16.92"W x3.94"H x 13.78"D ( 430 x 100 x350 mm)
119" rack type)
VS- 1000 Video Scaler
$1200.00
VPA-1000 Video Position Analyzer
Features
·An excellent and accurate unit for researching and analyzing human
actions and motions such as in sports, medical rehabilitation, etc. ·One each of horizontal line, vertical line and dot whose positions are
independently varied are superimposed onto the picture, and position of the dot is expressed in XV coordinate value based upon position of the Hand Vlines, and displayed on both the picture and front panel of the unit ·The obtained data ( XV coordinate values) can be fed to external equipment such as printer either automatically ( every . 5 second) or manually · Slight differences in the regular movement of the object can be digitally analyzed · Dimensions: 16.92"W x3.46"H x 13.90"D 1430 x88 x353 mm) (19" rack type)
VPA-1000 Video Position Analyzer $2500.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 51
FC 2 e® 49 Lexington St. W. Newton, MA 02165
·
( 617) 244-3223 Telex 922407
VC- 81
COUNTER/POINTER
VC-81 Video Counter
Features
·Slim- line video terminal unit
· Up to 8 digits, which counts from 0 to 9, are superimposed onto picture
·Display character format is 7x9dot matrix · Each character includes edge for maximum legibility ·Operation is performed either manually through the front panel faci-
lities, or remotely through BCD or TTL 5V external input signals ·Start, stop, reset, matt control, Vand Hdisplay position control faci-
lities ·Wide applications such as program editing in broadcasting stations,
time and score indications for sport events, traffic monitoring and control, data insertion in video research, security systems, etc. ·Dimensions: 16.92"W x 1.75"H x 11.81"D ( 430 x44 x300 mm) (19" rack type)
VC-81 Video Counter
$1025.00
VP- 380
VP-380 Video Pointer
Features
·Compactly designed instructional instrument allows to superimpose 4 different directions of arrow pointers and 4 different symbol pointers 10, 0, + and LI) onto apicture
·Each pointer can be positioned anywhere within 80% of the effective picture area by using the joystick controller
· Black/white pointer selection · Flash function
·Excellent for educational, medical and research purposes. ( Effective
use if incorporated with the video measurement unit) ·Dimensions: 8.46"W x 1.75"H x9.84"D ( 215 x44.5 x250 mm)
(half 19" rack type)
VP-380 Video Pointer
$700.00
VG -40 Videogram
Waveform generator for up to 4 analogue inputs which are supplied from an electrocardiograph, seismograph, etc.
VG-40 Videogram
$4400.00
tv-eme "",,r
E
etrefflocurn ·
FM- 60
· IV- 530
FM -60 Frame Memory
Features
· Excellent device for video research and video surveillance · B/W video signal is memorized in real time and frozen instantly
frame by frame, or field by field
·Compact and lightweight yet reliable performance with low cost ·Automatic freeze function with freely set time interval
·Any of Video Timers, Video Measurement Units, Video Surveillance Units are effectively incorporated
·Dimensions: 16.92"W x 1.75"H x 11.81"D ( 430 x44 x300 mm) (19" rack type)
FM-60 Frame Memory
$2000.00
IV -530 Contour Synthesizer
Features
·Unique device for analyzing X-ray and all types of difficult-to- interpret photographic data
· Differences in density within the image are converted into differences in contour ( image enhancement), so that slight details of the picture will be easily discernible
· 21- step gradient switcher plus independent differential level control · Negative/positive modes selection
·Dimensions: 16.92"W x 1.97"H x 14.17"D ( 430 x 50 x 360 mm) (19" rack type)
IV-530 Contour Synthesizer
$1500.00
VT-52
Prices and Specifications Subject to Chan geWith out Notice.
2985 Gateway Drive Norcross, GA 30071 (404) 447-4422 Telex 804822
IMAGE CORRECTION PRODUCTS
RECORD 2 Image Correction
RECORD 2is astand alone detail booster with noise threshold control, and apassive filter separator. However, it may also be used to insert the Faroudja Pilot on the video tape for automatic playback control of
The Y-688 32 Total Error Corrector, PLAYBACK 1or PLAYBACK 2. RECORD 2 is available in aportable or rack mount model.
RECORD 1 Image Correction
RECORD 1is the top of the line detail booster designed as the first part of two part comprehensive automatic image correction system. It provides pre- record detail boost and inserts the Faroudja Pilot on the video tape for automatic playback control of the Y-68832 Total Error Corrector, PLAYBACK 1or PLAYBACK 2. RECORD 1features afull bandwidth comb filter separator for the ultimate in picture quality, and is available in a portable or rack mount model.
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
·Power ( On/Off): 2 position switch · Faroudja Pilot ( On/Auto/Off): 3 position switch. On: inserts
Faroudja Pilot proportional to boost at all times; Auto: inserts Faroudja Pilot and boost when no previously recorded Pilot signal is detected. Auto position is on RECORD 2 only. Off: does not insert Faroudja Pilot or boost. ·Boost Level ( Adjustable): From: 0-100 IRE 0% Boost; To: 0-10 IRE +200% Boost; 11-20 IRE + 100% Boost; 21-100 IRE + 5% Boost ·Noise Threshold ( Adjustable): Inhibits boost 0-10 IRE ·Power On ( Rack Mount only): Green LED
SPECIFICATIONS
·Signal to Noise Ratio: 65dB (* RECORD EX 60dB) ·Differential Phase: 1.5° (* RECORD EX 2.5°) ·Differential Gain: 1.5% (* RECORD EX 2.5%) · Bandwidth: 5MHz + /- 1dB (* RECORD EX 4.2 MHz + / - 1dB) ·K Factor ( 2T): 1.5%-2% (* RECORD EX 2%-2.5%) ·Video In/Video Out: 1V peak to peak, 75 ohms ·Power ( Rack Mount): 115VAC, 60Hz, 10W
(Portable): 12VDC + /- 2V, 160mA ·Ambient Temperature: 5°C to 45°C ( 41°F to 113°F) ·Ambient Humidity: 10% to 90% ·Weight ( Rack Mount): 2.5kg 15.5 lbs.)
(Portable): 0.7kg ( 1.5 lbs.) · Dimensions ( Rack Mount): 19"W x1.75"H x14"D ( 48.3 x4.5 x35.6
cm)
Specifications apply to RECORD EX, RECORD 2and RECORD 1ex-
cept where asterisk c.) indicates RECORD EX specifications different
than RECORD 2 and RECORD 1.
Boost Level Control Noise Threshold Control Rack Mount Model Faroudja Pilot
Comb Filter Separator
RECORD EX
RECORD 2 RECORD 1 ·
RECORD 1 ( Rack Mount) Pre- record detail boost, insertion of Faroudja Pilot for automatic play-
back control and comb filter
2295.00
RECORD 2 ( Rack Mount) Pre- record detail boost and insertion of Faroudja Pilot for automatic
playback control
1495.00
PLAYBACK 1 ( Rack Mount4 PB 1
Playback image improvement featuring: automatic or manual control
of noise reduction, ringing suppression, and V/C delay correc-
tion
$5995.00
ACCESSORIES
14 pin cable for Record 1and Record 2
$165.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 53
2985 Gateway Drive Norcross, GA 30071 (404) 447-4422 Telex 804822
TIME BASE CORRECTORS
CCD1H TIMING CORRECTOR
· Signal-to-noise: 60 dB NTSC, 58 dB PAL · Differential Phase- 1% ·Differential Gain- 2% ·Window of Correction- 1H ·Affordable Price · NTSC or PAL
The CCD1H Timing Corrector removes skew and jitter from VTR playback. The Timing Corrector operates with any non-segmented helical scan VTR. Color or monochrome operation is selected automatically.
Patented circuit techniques in the CCD1H utilize digitally controlled charge coupled devices to provide superb signal transparency.
High quality, simplicity of operation and the lowest price in the industry make the CCD1H Timing Corrector ideal for use by educational institutions, cable TV, industry, hotel and motel channels and broadcasters in editing facilities.
$3950.00
CCDHP TIME BASE CORRECTOR
·Full broadcast standard performance · Horizontal enhancement and noise reduction standard · Full proc amp controls ·Super transparency for all heterodyne, non- segmented
VTR's ·Available in NTSC and PAL standards ·Input comb filter separator ( NTSC)
The CCDHP time base corrector offers high performance and proven reliability at a low price.
High Performance patented circuit techniques utilize digitally controlled CCD's ( Charge Couple Devices) to provide signal transparency exceeding the most advanced digital designs. Signal to noise ratio is 60 dB, K factor is 2% and differential phase is less than 0.5°. The CCDHP's bandwidth and transient response are designed to match the latest professional broadcast heterodyne VTR's.
Proven Reliability: The CCDHP time base corrector is the result of more than seven years research and development. Fortel has pioneered the use of CCD's for time correction and has delivered more units worldwide than all other manufacturers combined.
$5495.00
CCDHPS TIME BASE CORRECTOR
The CCDHPS provides the same high performance and unequalled picture quality as the extremely popular and highly reliable CCDHP.
Features include a new Y/C Separator, developed by Faroudja Laboratories resulting in higher performance specifications.
·60dB signal to noise ratio ·0.5° differential phase
CCD1H
CCDHPS
CCDY/C
· 1.5% differential gain · 1% K Factor ·2.8 MHz bandwidth The CCDHPS is designed to obtain the highest performance from the new professional grade U-Matic VTR's. Standard features include noise reduction, enhancement, preset and manual proc amp control and full sync drive capability.
$6495.00
CCDY/C TIME BASE CORRECTOR" The CCDY/C Time Base Corrector - ... The perfect TBC for producing high quality video playback from 1/2" VHS and 3/4" VTRs. The CCDY/C processes Y/C component video using Dub signals, as well as standard NTSC composite video. Features ·Y/C (Luma -- Chroma) component video input and output
uses the Dub video input and output of Sony 3/4" and Panasonic 1/2" VHS and 3/4" VTRs for adramatic improvement in picture quality · Full function performance meets all FCC requirements and corrects time base error to RS170A specifications ·Y/C input and output combined with Y, R-Y, and B-Y internal component baseband processing provides edited copies, tape duplications, and video playback that is sharper, crisper, and more lifelike than encoded video playback ·Corrects wrong color- frame edits automatically ·3dB of chroma noise reduction · Ful! proc amp control · Luminance noise reduction from 0 to 4dB · Horizontal enhancement from 0to 100% boost ( limited to 20IR El · Use NTSC composite Video In for operation with all 1/2" VHS and 3/4" VTRs; add Dub input and/or output ( composite Video In must remain connected) for automatic Y/C component processing
$8995.00
VT- 54
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
2985 Gateway Drive
Norcross, GA 30071 (404) 447-4422 Telex 804822
TIME BASE CORRECTOR
FORTEL CY10.32 TBC
SPECIFICATIONS:
· Digital Sampling: Y Channel - 14.32 MHz, 1Channel - 3.58 MHz, O Channel - 3.58 MHz · Window of Correction: 32 H · Signal to Noise Ratio: ( p- p signal to rms noise, per channel at defined p- p input Y and chrominance levels) better than 57 dB · Differential Phase: Encoded In Encoded Out 1.5°, Dub In/Dub Out 0.5° · Differential Gain: Encoded In/Encoded Out 1.5%, Dub In/Dub Out 0.5% · Residual Jitter: ± 7.5 Nanoseconds ( Stable Input) · Bandwidth: (- 3dB), Luminance 4.5MHz, I Channel 1.5MHz, 0 Channel 1.5MHz, Encoded 4.5MHz ( Subcarrier Direct) · K Factor ( 2T): Luminance ( 2%) 1%, I, O Channel ( 10T) 1%, Subcarrier Direct 1.5%, HET 3% · Power: 87 - 130VAC, 50 or 60 Hz · Amb;ent Temperature 10°C to 40°C ( 50°F to 104°F) · Ambient Humidity: /0% to 90% · Weight: 18.2kg (40 lbs) · Dimensions: 19"W x 3.5"H x23.75D ( 48.3 x8.9 x60.3cm), 21.5" Depth into Rack ( 54.6cm).
Inputs: · VIO In - Loop - Switchable rear panel termination · Video In ( Encoded) Subcarrier Feedback Only · Genlock/Sync ( Loop), Subcarrier ( Loop), Search - Switch to Encoded mode if Recorder playing VIO during search or jog mode
Outputs: · VIO Out - Loop - from VIO In, Video 1 ( Encoded) Relay bypass, Video 2 (Encoded) Active output only, VTR Advanced Sync, VTR Subcarrier
Controls and Indicators:
· Power: 2 Position switch (on or off) · Program Out: 2 Position switch bypasses unit circuitry in program video path, monitor video path is always activated · Input Mode: VIO video input signal or encoded video input signal · Video Gain . -±3dB · Chroma Gain: -1.-3d13 · Setup: -±20 IRE · Hue: -±30° · Video Position: ± 250 nsec ( with respect to sync) · Horizontal Phase: -±4 usec · Chroma Phase: Greater than 360° · Power On: Green LED · Video: Green LED ( indicates input video present) · GenLock: Green LED ( indicates GenLock present)
The Challenge: POWER to time base correct new 1 2" Type "M" VTR's pure VIO signals without conversion to composite NTSC or PAL video.
THE INNOVATION: C-YIO" Time Base Corrector'', another result of Fortes ongoing research in component signal processing. The C-Y1C1" is the only TBC that uses pure VIO signals to work with the new Type "M" format, high speed 1 2" VTR's offered by RCA, Ampex and other world leaders in video -- powerful evidence of Forcers leadership. Because of its superior picture quality, the C-Y10"TBC was selected over all other TBC's for the first major Type " M" installation at WNEV-TV in Boston.
The C-YIQ32 Power Provides:
YICI. Component Processing -- The C-YIO" is the only stand alone TBC that time base corrects full bandwidth, pure baseband VIC! component video signals. VIO processing eliminates picture quality loss due to heterodyne processing or composite NTSC encoding and decoding.
Y-688 Output -- The C-YIC132 provides a2wire Y-688 " dub" output for
dubbing to 3/4" U-Matic VTR's. Using Y-688 signals for dubbing produces pictures of better quality than alive encoded feed.
32 Line TBC -- Field trials have shown that a32 line window of correction is necessary to correct the large gyroscopic errors produced by the high speed, shoulder mounted Type "M" VTR's. The C-YIO" has two 32 line digita memories for separate time base correction of the luma ( Y) and chroma ( 1, O components of the color video signal. Time base correcting the luma one chroma separately reduces luma .- .: hroma crosstalk.
Search Mode Viewing -- The TBC control input from a1/2" Type " M" VTF to the C-Y1Q" TBC permits viewing in the search ( jog) mode.
3.58 Feedback Operation -- The C- Y10" can be used to time base correo: 1, 2- VHS and 3 4" U-Matic video with 3.58 Feedback for full bandwidtf operation.
Color Correction -- Fortel's CC- 1Color Corrector can use high quoin)
Y-688 " dub" video from the C- Y10" to produce the optimum in coloi corrected pictures. The CC- 1had RGB output, full remote control and io` stick control of individual vectors. Use the CC- 1to balance color out of black and whites and correct the color saturation, hue and luma level of the si, color bar colors. The CC- 1also compresses and stretches blacks and whites
Unleash the PUR EPOWER of the VIO format with the C- Y1032 Time BasE
Corrector
$14,995.0(
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 55
2985 Gateway Drive Norcross, GA 30071 (404) 447-4422 Telex 804822
TOTAL ERROR CORRECTOR
Y-688 32 Total Error Corrector The New Standard
The Y-688 32 Total Error Corrector'" represents amajor advance in the art of video signal correction.
First, the unique circuitry of the Y-688 32 TEC accepts component or composite signals and performs all functions of time base correction and picture improvement in the component, Y-688, form. This method bypasses the root cause of most errors before they occur.
Second, new and improved image processing techniques are possible when the signal is in the Y-688 component form so that errors in the original color- under recording or introduced in later processing can be more completely eliminated.
The result of the above innovations is afirst generation U-Matic playback that looks like 1" or 2" formats and 3rd generation tapes that look like conventional first time playback.
The Y-68832 Total Error Corrector. The New Standard in time base and video image correction!
Features
·32 line super- wide instantaneous window Phase Comp .' one and two line digital look ahead velocity compensator and phase error corrector
·Complete image processing including horizontal and vertical enhancement, horizontal detail improvement
· Luminance noise reduction through advanced compression and combing techniques to 10db
·Chroma noise reduction to 10 db ·Chroma crispening ·Gyro -Trac - automatic window re-recentering for extraordinary
errors without hue shift or horizontal movement · Record 1 - Pilot tone compatible for automatic setting of image pro-
cessing controls ·Chroma Amplitude Correction through two line look ahead pro-
viding 4.2db short term and 6db long term correction ·Accepts shuttle speeds up to ten times normal ·Unitec .' Construction features easy access to all components with-
out board or unit removal from operating system
· Front panel image process bypass control with internal programmable jumpers allow anything from super transparent time base correction through extensive image reprocessing
· High efficiency, low power, low heat ·Accepts composite or component ( Y-688) signals and outputs
both types ·Adjustable H and V Blanking ·Automatic Chroma/ Luminance delay compensation ·Adjustable video position
·Drop- out compensation based upon previous line information ·Single cable Gen- Lock Sync Generator
· Programmable jumpers and mode switches allows tailoring to specific system objectives
·Automatic color or monochrome operation · Full Proc Amp ·Chroma combing
Applications
· Use Y-688 32'. for time base and image correction of U-Matic masters when dubbing to other U-Matics, VHS or Beta formats
·Edit, special effects, or A / B rolls through Y-688 32 for third generations tapes that look like master tapes
· Use accessory adaptors or RGB switcher to do complete production in component format for final product approaching full bandwidth format
· Reprocess any color under signal to reduce luminance noise by 10db and chroma noise by up to 10db
· Use in conjunction with Record 1- for completely automatic processing of the cleanest, sharpest pictures ever from U-Matic
·Use Y-68832 as alternative to digital picture processors costing thousands of dollars more
· Remove transmission noise and distortions from satellite feecs
· Use with latest scan track U-Matics for broadcast stable pictures in slow motion
· Do field production in U-Matic format and all post production through broadcast or distribution copies for lower program costs
· Use with microprocessor controllers and U-Matics for high quality, economical, automatic program delay or remote broadcast
UNITEC and Gyro -Trac are trademarks of Edutron, Incorporated
Y-688 22 Total Error Corrector
$15,995.00
VT- 56
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
2985 Gateway Drive Norcross, GA 30071 (404) 447-4422 Telex 804822
CHROMA NOISE REDUCER
COLOR EX CHROMA NOISE REDUCERTM
FEATURES
Chroma noise reduction up to 12dB in the Heterodyne ( Het) mode and up to 6dB in the Direct ( Dir) mode. Up to 50% reduction in chroma ringing.
Chroma risetime improvement for sharper, crisper color transitions.
Automatic V/C delay correction of ± 100 nsec.
Manual V/C delay correction of up to 280 nsec.
Exclusive one-year warranty on parts and labor
Use COLOR EX with any NTSC composite video signal, time base corrected or uncorrected:
To virtually eliminate quad banding from 2- inch VTR's.
To reduce moiré and noise from 1- inch VTR's.
With 3/ 4 -inch and 1/2-inch color- under VTR's to reduce chroma noise, improve chroma risetimes, and reduce ringing and WC delay.
To remove moiré noise and other interference patterns from satellite and microwave transmission paths.
COLOR EX Chroma Noise ReducerTM ... The better alternative to higher priced digital noise reducers (DNR's). COLOR EX uses a unique processing technique, developed by FAROUIZIALaboratores, to reduce chroma noise and improve the color content without affecting the luminance (luma) portion of the video signal. This exclusive processing technique reduces chroma noise without frame-to-frame or field-to-field averaging. The result is acrisp, clean video picture without the motion artifacts associated with DNR's.
COLOR EX works with any NTSC composite video signal, time base corrected or not, to reduce chroma noise and restore rich, vibrant color to your video picture. In addition, COLOR EX corrects problems inherent in different video sources. COLOR EX virtually eliminates quad banding from 2- inch VTR's, and removes annoying moiré-and other interference patterns from satellite and microwave transmission paths. COLOR EX gives more complete and comprehensive improvement of chroma deficiencies from color- under VTR's ( 1/2-inch and 3/4 -inch) than DNR's costing thousands of dollars more. In addition to chroma noise reduction, COLOR EX reduces chroma ringing by up to 50%, improves chroma risetimes for sharper, crisper color transitions, and corrects V/C delay for improved lumaichroma registration.
While COLOR EX gives you powerful performance, operation is
simple requiring only avideo loop-through (video in/video out). Front panel controls are power (on/off), program ( bypass/operate), input source selection, and V/C delay control. Simply connect COLOR EX
to the video source, turn it on, select the appropriate input source, and COLOR EX does the rest. Up to ± 100 nanoseconds of WC delay is automatically corrected, additional manual control can be
used to correct more severe delay
SPECIFICATIONS
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
65dB
Differential Phase
(Direct) (Heterodyne)
1.5° 2.0°
Differential Gain Bandwidth
(Direct) (Heterodyne)
(Full) (Narrow)
1.5% 2.0%
4.2MHz ± 1.5dB 2MHz ± 1.5dB 2.7MHz ± 6dB over 28dB @ 3.58MHz
K Factor
(Direct) (Heterodyne)
1.5% 2.5%
Tilt
(Direct)
1.5%
(Heterodyne)
1.5%
Chroma Noise Reduction (Direct)
6dB
(Heterodyne only) 12dB
Chroma Ringing Reduction
(Heterodyne only) 50%
Chroma Risetime
Reduction with lus input
risetime
(Heterodyne)
50Ons
Chroma/Luma Delay Correction
Power Ambient Temperature Ambient Humidity Weight Dimensions
(Automatic) ± 100ns
(Manual)
28Ons
117VACS, 60Hz, 40W
5° to 45°C
10% to 90%
5.0kg ( 11 lbs.)
48.3cm 4.4cm
55.9cm
(19")W (1.75")H (22")D
$5995.00
COLOR EX is aTrademark of FAROUDJA Laboratories and is licensed to FORTEL by FAROUDJA Laboratories
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 57
re. FOUNDATION ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS INC.
24 Colonnade Road Nepean, Ontario K2E 7J6 Canada (613) 226-4000 Telex 053-4153
FIBER OPTIC MODULES
Analog Fiber Optic Modules
video
MODELS F1- 7300T And FI -7300R ANALOG FIBER OPTIC MODULES ( Video)
The FI -7300 analog link consists of two modules; the transmitter ( F1- 7300T) and the receiver ( FI -7300R). Each unit can be plugged into the F1-7000MF mainframe from which operating power is derived.
The F1-7300 link is intended for the transmission of high quality analog signals over large distances, with exceptionally low signal degradation.
The link can be used for the distribution of studio quality video signals through areas of high electromagnetic interference or where the advantages of the small size of optical fiber cable are significant.
Front panel indicators and test points provide easy monitoring of link performance.
VT- 58
Specifications
INPUT Type Common mode rejection, 60 Hz Common mode range
Input return loss
OUTPUT Number of outputs Output impedance Output return loss Output to output isolation Module to module isolation S/N ratio at - 27 dBm of received optical power DC on output
DC restored
Loop- through >40 dB ±- 12 volts referenced to chassis ground >40 dB to 5MHz
2per receiver module 75 ohms >30 dB to 5MHz >30 dB to 5MHz >60 dB to 5MHz
>60 dB weighted <50 millivolts in ACcoupled mode
PERFORMANCE Differential Distortion (with composite signal and transmitter input clamp activated). Phase Gain
Frequency response: 10 Hz to 5.9 MHz 2TPulse to bar Field tilt composite field square wave Line tilt
Relative Chrominance-toLuminance distortion ( without filter)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
<50 millivolts, over entire APL range
00 .50 <1 0°0 ±- 0 15dB -±- 1°0 <1% <1%
<15 nanoseconds
F1 FOUNDATION ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS INC.
24 Colonnade Road Nepean, Ontario K2E 7J6 Canada (613) 226-4000 Telex 053-4153
FIBER OPTIC MODULES
Analog Fiber Optic Modules
audio
MODELS FI -7310M And FI -7310D ANALOG FIBER OPTIC MODULES ( Audio)
The FI -7310 voice analog link consists of two modules; the modulator ( FI -7310M) and the demodulator ( Fl-7310D). Each unit can be plugged into the FI-7000MF mainframe from which operating power is derived.
The FI -7310 link is primarily intended for the transmission of abaseband video signal along with its associated audio over asingle fiber.
The modulator FM modulates an RF subcarrier with the audio signal. The FM modulated subcarrier is then summed
with the video in the transmitter module. The receiver module separates the audio FM signal from the video; the
audio FM is then demodulated by the demodulator.
Specifications
INPUT
Type
Terminated. Line impedance of 600 ohms
Connector
Input 3pin audio XLR
male; Output 3pin audio XLR female
Common mode rejection, 60 Hz > 40 dB
Maximum common mode voltage
>± 5volts
Maximum 600 ohm level + 18 dBm
OUTPUT
Line impedance
Maximum line output Driving 600 ohms
PERFORMANCE
Distortion ( at maximum output level) THD, 15 Hz to 15 KHz
Frequency response
Crosstalk, video in audio
Signal-to-noise; ( referenced to maximum audio output level, with no video input)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
600 ohms + 18 dBm
<1% 30 Hz to 15 KHz -57dB 70 dB
VT- 59
re i
FOUNDATION ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS INC.
24 Colonnade Road Nepean, Ontario K2E 7J6 Canada (613) 226-4000 Telex 053-4153
FIBER OPTIC MODULES
Digital Fiber Optic Modules
data 0-10 Mb/s
MODELS FI -7400T And FI -7400R DIGITAL FIBER OPTIC MODULES ( data 0-10 Mb/s)
The FI -7400 digital fiber optic data link was designed for digital data transmission over single fiber channels. The modules can be plugged into the FI-7000MF mainframe from which operating power is derived.
Bipolar integrated circuits and ahigh radiance LED convert TTL level inputs to optical pulses at data rates from DC to 10
·TTL Input Levels · Data Rates from 0 to 10 Mb/s - NRZ · Low Cost · Low Bit Error Rate · Single Supply · Link Quality Monitor · Long Distance ( up to 5Km) ·Arbitrary Data Format ·Optical Port Connector
Mb/s NRZ. An internally coded mode of operation produces a3- level coded optical signal for reception and decoding by the receiver. This 3- level optical signal places no restriction on data format over the data range of DC to 10 Mb/s NRZ while allowing for wide dynamic range and high sensitivity at the receiver.
Features
· TTL input levels · Data rates from 0to 10 Mb s- NRZ · Low Cost · Low bit error rate · Single supply · Link quality monitor · Long distance ( up to 5Km) · Arbitrary data format · Optical port connector
Specifications
Data rate Input data Output Data Optical Rise Fall time Optical Output Power Optical Input Power Electrical Risetime Electrical Falltime Jitter Permitted Link Loss Optical Wavelength Operating temperature
VT-60
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
0to 10.0Mb sec TTL NRZ or RZ TTL NRZ or RZ 20 nsec max 30 uW min .2 uW min for 10 " BER 20 nsec 7n sec 25 nsec typ 22 dB ( No margin) 830 nm ( nominal)
0 to 40 C
F1 FOUNDATION ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS INc.
24 Colonnade Road Nepean, Ontario K2E 7J6 Canada (613) 226-4000 Telex 053-4153
FIBER OPTIC MODULES
RS- 232C Fiber Optic Module
data 0-56 Kbs
· · · Is s · · · · sei
i- s ; · · , , · , · é · e,t
tire seite§ · », · ;t,
· · ,,,`, ·
1
FI-7000MF
MODEL FI-7500TR RS- 232C FIBER OPTIC MODULE ( data 0-56 Kbs] The FI-7500TR fiber optic modem is designed for full duplex asynchronous data transmission at rates of 0to 56 Kb/s. Each modem module can be plugged into the FI-7000MF mainframe from which operating power is derived. The electrical connections for the data signals are made on the rear panel of the mainframe using a standard 25- pin RS-232C connector. The FI-7500TR communicates in full duplex over a single fiber, thus offering asubstantial saving in fiber costs.
FI-7000MF MAINFRAME The FI-7000MF Mainframe is designed to be installed in a standard 19" ( 48.26 cm) rack. Mounting is included with each tray. Modules are installed in the mainframe as shown in the front view.
Specifications
Connector Electrical Signal Input Output Data Rate Transmission Medium
Distance
Error Rate Optical wavelength Operating temperature
25 pin IRS- 232C
EIA IRS- 232C 0to 56 Kb sec Single Fiber Optical Cable 1000 meters ( longer distances optional) < 10" 830 nm ( Nominal) 0'· 1040C
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-61
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (9 16) 273-8421
400 SERIES ROUTING SWITCHERS
400 SERIES ROUTING SWITCHERS
FEATURES · High performance · DC restored inputs · Vertical interval switching · Destination oriented matrices · Expandable · Built-in short term memory protection
OPTIONS
·Additional audio matrices · Tally relay systems · Special control systems · Dual power supplies · Expansion systems
The basic video switching matrix is arranged in a 32- input by 16- output format. A complete frame contains 21 printed circuit modules consisting of four input buffer amplifiers, sixteen crosspoint modules, and an interface module. Each buffer contains eight DC restorers together with other circuitry to drive eight 32 by 1crosspoint modules. The latter also contain the line driving amplifiers. The interface module is used to " marry" the video matrix with other matrices, e.g., audio and tally.
The mounting frame employs exclusive Grass Valley Group zero insertion force connectors for mating the input buffer amplifiers to the crosspoint modules via the frame- mounted mother board. Modules are removed by aquarter turn screw on the front of each connector.
Since all video crosspoints for an output bus are contained on a single module, the system is thus destination oriented. A failure in a
crosspoint module only affects one output bus; all other busses continue to operate normally. It is not necessary to switch the system off when removing modules.
The audio switching matrices are similar to video switching matrices; consisting of input buffer modules, crosspoint modules, and a single interface module. The buffer modules utilize differential input circuitry to provide up to 80 dB of common mode rejection at 60 Hz. Grass Valley group can supply systems with audio input and/or output transformers at extra cost -- on special order.
It should be noted from the specifications that the audio system will operate at levels up to + 24 dBm at 600 ohms or + 30 dBm at 150 ohms -- with full performance.
A tally relay matrix is available to provide contact closures corresponding to input sources. The system can be enabled on abus by bus basis.
On special order, Grass Valley Group can provide matrices with relays corresponding to each crosspoint. The latter are particularly useful in distributing special control signals through a routing switcher.
The power supply system is unique. AC line current is first rectified to provide 48 volts direct current. This voltage is then converted to 15 volts DC by means of high efficiency DC to DC converters for distribution to the matrices. The latter also provide regulation.
The 48 volt rectifiers, as well as the DC to DC converters, are plug-
in modules for ease of maintenance. Systems can be supplied with dual rectifiers fed from separate AC inputs for maximum system protection. A 400 Series routing switcher can also be fed directly from (nominal) 48 volt direct current sources.
System crosspoint status can be maintained by an optional battery system. Short term protection ( nominally 1minute) is inherent in the standard system as a result of the CMOS memory elements employed.
The flexible control concept employed in the 400 Series allows systems to be addressed in two basic ways; ( 1) on an individual bus- bybus basis, and ( 2) by means of asingle X-Y panel for control of all buses.
Several types of panels are offered for controlling individual output buses. These consist of panels with momentary illuminated pushbuttons corresponding to input sources, panels employing thumbwheel preset, LED status indicators and atake button, and 10- digit keyboards with LED status indication.
The X-Y control panel provides the means for both input selection
and output assignment. This method of control operates via the input/output data port available on each matrix, as opposed to
addressing the individual control bus connectors used with the panels described above. The data port also can be used for controlliing systems via a computer.
A unique feature of the control system allows several panels to be paralleled on asingle output bus, even panels of different types, e.g.,
keyboard and pushbutton. The only limitation to paralleling panels is the current available for lighting lamps.
Special control panels can be provided on a custom-built basis. Consult Grass Valley Group with your requirements.
Output expansion of a basic 32x16 system requires that input sources be distributed to each frame.
Grass Valley Group's modular approach to routing switcher requirements allows users to start with a small system and expand as needs change. It is not necessary to initially purchase additional
frames, power supplies, or other equipment to accommodate future expansion.
VT-62
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (916) 273-8421
ROUTING SWITCHERS
TEN -XL
TEN -XT MONITORING STATION
TEN-XL 113 x1ROUTING SWiiTCHER Now when you buy arouting switcher, you can feel like abig spender without having to spend like one. And without short-changing your systems.
The TEN- XL provides the best price/ performance value available in 10 x1 program quality routing switchers. The best video and audio specs in the business are here, backed by high quality design and manufacturing standards, right down to the plug- infrom-the-front modular construction and optional dual power supplies with fault alarms.
FEATURES
Breakaway stereo audio comes with every unit and both local and remote control panels are available. The binary control system even makes it easy to fabricate your own control panels. Add the optional RS422/232 interface module and you can externally control the TEN-XL from production switchers, modems, machine control systems, or any other computer system.
Input source isolation problems are virtually eliminated by the use of differential inputs for both video and audio. No more ground loops caused by sources from different locations. No need to put humbuckers on remote feeds. Video inputs are DC restored and switching is done in the vertical interval ( line 10).
The built-in expansion capability lets the TEN-XL be a19 x1, 28 x1or more. Add two more frames plus looping control cable, and you have an RGB switcher for your component video system.
Plug in arelay module, and get tally follow for your DVE input switching, or source start capability. It even has aone- hour minimum crosspoint memory in case of power failure. After this interval, if power has not been restored, it reverts to input 1. The TEN- XL encompasses video, stereo audio, optional RS422/232 serial interface module, relay module, and dual power supply, all in aone rack unit frame. No other routing switcher incorporates so many features in so compact aspace.
TEN-XT MONITORING STATION
The unique packaging of the new TEN- XT allows you to combine the capabilities of the TEN-XL with the Tektronix 1740 or 1750, as well as the 528 and 1420 waveform/vector monitors. Nested together, they give you the ultimate central quality control monitoring station. When used in transmission facilities, VTR and film chain bridges, the monitoring station puts all control at your fingertips. This makes the TEN-XT ideal as an input selector to VTRs or video monitors.
The marriage of these two important pieces of equipment into one functional unit is alogical extension of Grass Valley Group technology into aspecialized, reliable monitoring station. Now the comprehensive routing switcher technology your work demands has been engineered into two remarkably small packages, at one remarkably small price.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 63
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945
(916) 273-8421
ROUTING SWITCHERS
TEN- X II
TEN-X 'ASeries Program Quality 10x1 Routing Switchers
Versatility: The TEN- X `" is a10x1 routing switcher housed in aone- rack unit frame. It is available in video only, audio only, video- plus- audio or video- plus- relay module.
More versatility: The TEN- X' II is a10x1 routing switcher housed in a two- rack unit frame. The TEN- X II will permit the use of video, plus the addition of either three audio modules, three relay modules or any combination thereof.
As an option, the TEN- X Il can house dual power supplies.
FEATURES
The TEN- X Series may be controlled locally or remotely. Two different types of local control panels are available; one for video- only ( or audiofollow- video operation) and another for audio breakaway operation.
When configured for remote control operation, the local control panel is replaced by ablank front cover. Both AFV and audio breakaway remote control panels are available, or you may choose to build your own. Control is wire-per-crosspoint with switching accomplished using a momentary closure to ground. Tally information is returned on the same wires as switching control. The control/tally lines may be operated and read by external TTL logic, if required. The TEN- X operates by local and remote control panels simultaneously.
Video input signals are independently DC- restored, blanking to ground level. Switching is timed to line 10 of the vertical interval of the last selected source.
FET audio crosspoints ensure virtually silent audio switching. + 24d Bu maximum input/output level facilitates integration of the TEN- X into practically any broadcast audio environment.
Modular Construction: All modules plug into acommon motherboard and the frame has no wiring harness. This results in ease of maintenance and reliability.
10x1 Video Crosspoint Module
Selects 1of 10 video inputs and switches this signal to an output buss. All inputs are D.C. restored. Crosspoint switching occurs during line 10 of last video.
10x1 Audio Crosspoint Module
Selects 1 of 10 balanced audio inputs and routes this signal to a balanced output buss. The system gain is unity and accepts signal levels up to + 24dBu ( 12.3 volts RMS amplitude).
10x1 Relay Module
Two isolated contacts per input are switched to two isolated common busses. This module is interchangeable with the 10x1 audio crosspoint module. It allows you to have atally relay for activating external tally module devices, a bidirectional data switch or an audio relay crosspoint module capable of switching balanced audio sources.
Power Supply Module
Provides power for the 10x1 video, audio and relay modules. The power supply furnishes unregulated filtered + /- 16V* direct current to the TEN- X frame power distribution busses. Power regulation is accomplished on the individual plug-in modules.
*Nominal for 115V or 220 VAC input.
VT-64
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (916) 273-8421
Model Ten- X' Routing Switchers Basic System
The Ten- X is ahigh performance 10x1 switcher housed in a one- RU rack mounting package. It is available in audio- only, video- only and video/audio configurations. The Ten- X may be controlled locally or remotely. Two different types of local control panels are available: one for video- only ( or audio- follow- video operation) and another for audio breakaway operation. When configured for remote control operation, the local control panel is replaced by ablank front cover. Both AFV and audio breakaway remote control panels are available. Both local and remote control panels can be operated simultaneously.
TNX-10 10x1 Video- Only basic switcher for remote control use,
110-120V. Does not include remote control panel. Includes Blank
Front Cover.
$1080.00
TNX-11 10x1 Video/Audio basic switcher for remote control use,
110-120V. Does not include remote control panel. Includes Blank
Front Cover
1380.00
TNX-12 10x1 Audio- Only basic switcher for remote control use,
110-120V. Does not include remote control panel. Includes Blank
Front Cover.
1025.00
TNX-20 10x1 Video- Only switcher with local standard control panel,
110-120V
1230.00
TNX-21 10x1 Video/Audio switcher with local standard control
panel, 110-120V
1480.00
TNX-22 10x1 Video/Audio switcher with local breakaway control
panel, 110-120V
1500.00
TNX-23 10x1 Audio- Only switcher with local standard control panel,
110-120V
1185.00
TNX-201 Standard Local Control Panel.
250.00
TNX-305 3"x4" Slot Mount standard remote control panel
525.00
TNX-905 3"x4" Slot Mount standard remote control panel
for Ten- X II
550.00
TNX-211 Breakaway Local Control Panel
275.00
TNX-301 Standard Remote Control Panel.
170.00
TNX-311 Breakaway Remote Control Panel
215.00
TNX-401 25 Conductor Control Cable for remote control panel
(specify length).
32.25 plus 2.50/meter
TNX-402 25 Conductor Remote Control Connector Kit. . . 22.00
TNX-501 Module Extender
75.00
TNX-502 Video Crosspoint Module
395.00
TNX-503 Audio Crosspoint Module.
325.00
TNX-504 Relay Module
310.00
TNX-505 Power Supply Module, 110-120V
185.00
TNX-600 One Rack Unit Frame with 110-120V power supply 680.00
TNX-601 One Rack Unit Blank Front Cover.
110.00
Ten- X with RS232/422 Control TNX-50 Video- Only, no Control Panel TNX-60 Video- Only, with STD Local CP
TNX-61 Video- Only with BKwy Local CP
TNX-301 STD Remote CP TNX-311 BKwy Remote CP
$2755.00 2945.00 2970.00 170.00 215.00
ROUTING SWITCHERS
TNX-401 Control Cable with Connectors TNX-402 Connector Kit
32.25 plus 2.50/meter
22.00
TNX-701 RS422/232 Module ( spare)
755.00
All 2 RU Frames above supplied with video crosspoint module single power supply, and RS-232/422 control module. Add up to 2 audio
crosspoint and/or relay modules and dual power supply, as required.
Ten- X II
The Ten- X II is a10x1 routing switcher housed in a2rack unit frame. The Ten- X II will permit the use of video, plus the addition of either three audio modules, three relay modules or any combination thereof. As an option, the Ten- X II can house dual power supplies by ordering an additional TNX-505 or TNX-505-2.
TNX-70 Two rack unit Video- Only routing switcher for remote control use, 110-120V. Does not include remote control panel.
$1325.00
TNX-80 Two rack unit Video- Only routing switcher with single 110-
120V power supply and local standard control panel.
1515.00
TNX-81 Two rack unit Video- Only -outing switcher with single 110-
120V power supply and local breakaway control panel
1535.00
TNX-801 50 Conductor Control Cable for Ten- X II remote control
panel ( specify length).
52.00 plus 5.95/meter
TNX-802 50 Conductor Remote Control Connector Kit for Ten- X II
40.00
TNX-901 Standard Remote Control Panel for Ten- X II switcher.
215.00
TNX-905 3"x4" Slot mount Remote CP for 2R/U Switcher. 550.00
TNX-911 Breakaway Remote Control Panel for Ten- X II switcher.
260.00
TNX-602 Two rack unit Blank Front Cover
150.00
TNX-100A
The TNX-100 A Interfaces with the Grass Valley Group Model 100 Production Switcher via the Serial Interface Port to provide an Audio Follow/Breakaway Switching System.
TNX-100A Two rack unit routing switcher
$2945.00
Including: 1 TNX-502 Video Crosspoint Module 1 TNX-503 Audio Crosspoint Module 1 TNX-505 Power Supply Module 1 TNX-701 RS422/232 Module with
SMPTE
TNX-100
Software
9- pin 1 9- Pin Interconnect Cable, 2 meters or 10 meters long ( specify
length) 1 Local Breakaway Control Panel
Spare Module TNX-701 RS422/232 Module
$755.00
Instruction Manuals A90-086800-00 1RU
$50.00
A90-086811-00 2RU A90-086820-00 RS422/232 2RU
50.00 50.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
wr-65
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (916) 273-8421
The Model 3400 Utility Video Distribution Amplifier has differential input circuitry which can reject common mode voltages up to + /- 10V, six outputs and gain adjustment between - 2and + 3dB. It is operated in
an AC coupled mode.
The amplifier is designed for use in small systems that do not require cable equalization. It is intended to be used as autility amplifier to costeffectively distribute video in small facilities.
The Model 3401V Video Distribution Amplifier is a general purpose differential input, six- output, cable equalizing module. It is capable of
equalizing up to 500 feet of Belden 8281/9231 or WE724 with appropriate equalizer cards. The amplifier has current mode input circuitry, which provides + /- 30V common mode range, and may be operated in either an AC or DC coupled mode. In the DC mode a + /- 150mV offset adjustment is provided for system balancing.
The Model 3402V- A Precision Video Distribution Amplifier has differential input circuitry, six outputs, and cable equalizing capability. It is capable of equalizing up to 1,000 feet of Belden 8281/9231 or WE724 with the appropriate equalizing cards. The amplifier has voltage mode input circuitry with a + /- 4V common mode range. The amplifier is designed for use in large systems where extremely low distortion and precise timing are essential.
The Model 3403V Clamping Distribution Amplifier is ageneral purpose unit providing differential input, six outputs, clamping and cable equalizing capability. It is capable of equalizing up to 1,000 feet of Belden 8281/9231 of WE724 with appropriate equalizer cards. The amplifier has current mode input circuitry, which provides an extremely high common mode range of + / - 30V.
The Model 3407 Subcarrier Distribution Amplifier is designed for installations where phase control and/or level stabilization of color subcarrier are required. The 3407 regenerates color SC on zero crossings and provides 360° of highly stable phase adjustment. Output level is adjustable for nominal 1V or 2V operation. Input circuitry is identical to Model 3401V.
The Model 3410 Pulse Distribution Amplifier regenerates and shapes tv pulses, and selectively provides stable delay adjustments from 400ns to 3.5ns. It is designed to operate with nominal pulse levels of 1V to 4V. The amplifier provides normal outputs when fed with as much as 1000 feet of Belden 8281/9231 or WE724 cable. The amplifier's current mode input amplifier is identical to the Model 3411V.
The Model 3411V Linear Pulse Distribution Amplifier provides differential input, cable equalizing capability, and optional pulse shaping. The unit is specifically designed for use in television systems where pulse timing is critical; that is, installations where the SC/ H phase relationship must be accurate. The amplifier has a looping current mode differential input stage with + /- 30V common mode range, as does the 3410, above.
The Model 3421V Long Cable Equalizing Video Amplifier is adifferential input three- stage device which can equalize up to 2,100 feet of Hg59b/u, 3,000 feet of Belden 8281, 3,900 teet of Rg 11/u or Rg 11A/ u, or 5,400 feet of Belden 8213 cable with the appropriate plug-in equalizers. The Model 3430V Video Delay Distribution Amplifier is a high performance video delay module with a differential input, six outputs, and optional cable equalization. It is capable of equalizing up to 500 feet of Belden 8281/9231 or WE724 with appropriate equalizer cards. The 3430V has alooping current mode differential input stage with + /- 30V common mode range, and may be operated in either an AC or DC coupled mode. In the DC mode a + /- 150mV offset adjustment is provided for system balancing.
Variable Equalizer Models in the 3400 Series allow rapid adjustment with a single front card edge control. This makes the 3400 variable equalizer models good for mobile operations and situations where setup with unknown cable lengths is required.
3400 Series Distribution Amplifiers
3400 Utility video distribution amplifier 3401V General purpose video distribution amplifier 3402V- A Precision video distribution amplifier
$255.00 375.00 435.00
VIDEO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 1
3400T- 2A TRAY
999
090t,
909
O. 41
0
4190_ 9004)
oL1e.990,Q0
o
l000ç'i000Çoio 'ootp'
oóta0.49400,4Oo 94., 99.e
3400T-2A TRAY REAR
ewe
3400T- 1A TRAY
0egicr 6 *Zre9715- 4" 'Wed- -
3400T- 1A TRAY REAR
3403V Clamping video distribution amplifier
3407 Subcarrier distribution amplifier 3410 Regenerating pulse distribution amplifier 3411V Linear pulse distribution amplifier 3411V-101 Pulse shaping filter 3421V Long cable equalization distribution amplifier
$535.00
395.00 395.00 295.00
45.00 455.00
3430V-350 Video Delay Amplifier with up to 350ns of adjustable
delay.
$775.00
3430V-550 Video Delay Amplifier with up to 55Ons of adjustable
delay.
$845.00
3430V-750 Video Delay Amplifier with up to 750ns of adjustable
delay.
$895.00
3400T- 1A 3400 DA tray ( 1RU) housing up to four distribution ampli-
fiers, power supply, module extender
$800.00
3400T- 2A 3400 DA tray ( 2RU) housing up to eight distribution ampli-
fiers, power supply, module extender
$950.00
3400T- 1B 3400 DA tray ( 1RU) housing up to eight 3421V distribution
amplifiers, power supply, module extender 3400 - EX1 Module extender for 3400
$800.00 $75.00
Note: Two instruction manuals are supplied for each type of amplifier.
VT-66
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (91 6) 273-8421
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
8500 SERIES AUDIO/VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS The 8500 Series is anew range of video and audio distribution amplifiers. These new DA's feature both high performance and low cost as aresult of innovative engineering coupled with advanced manufacturing techniques.
All 8500 Series models feature differential inputs with six outputs. Circuit building blocks such as input amprfiers, output amplifiers, and voltage regulators have been reduced to individual hybrid integrated circuits which provide improved performance, better unit- to- unit consistency, and ease of maintenance over conventional discrete
designs.
Video DA's include the 8501, a basic non-equalizing DA; the 8502, an equalizing DA with dual range ( 0-500 and 500'-1000') variable equalizer; the 8503, an equalizing DA with precision stepped equalization ( 0, 100', 200',...1000') plus vernier trim ( 0-125'); the 8504, adelay IDA capable of up to 300ns delay ( up to 1.1p swith optional plug- ins); and the 8505, afield DA which combines long cable eq ( up to 3000' of 8281) and a two speed clamp. The line also includes the 8520, apulse DA.
The 8551 is ahigh performance voltage- mode audio DA. It
has an active, balanced hi- zinput ( input Z > 40K ohms) and six active, balanced lo- z outputs ( output Z < 50 ohms). The 8551 will accommodate signal levels to +24dBu; SNR is greater than 110dB.
8500 SERIES
Model
8500T1-120 850071-240 8500T2-120 8500T2-240 8500PS-120 8500PS-240 8500EX 8501 8502 8502-RG59 8502 -SPI 8503 8503-RG59
8504 8504-RG59 8504-D300
Description
1RU Video Tray ( 120V PS) 1RU Video Tray ( 240V PS) 2RU Video Tray ( 120V PS) 2RU Video Tray ( 240V PS) Backup PS for 8500T2-120
Backup PS for 8500T2-240 Extender Card Video DA
Equalizing VDA ( 8281) Equalizing VDA ( RG59) Equalizing VDA ( Special) Precision VDA ( 8281) Precision VDA ( 14G59i
Delay DA ( w/8281 EQ) Delay DA ( w/RG59 EQ( 30Ons Delay Submodule
Model 8504-D500 8504-D800 8505 8505-RG11 8505 -SPI 8520 8520-EQ1 8520-EQ2 8520-RGEN 8550T1-120 855071-240 855072-120 8550T2-240
8550PS-120 8550PS-240
8551
Description
500ns Delay Submodule 800ns Delay Submodule Field VDA ( 8281) Field VDA ( RG11) Field VDA ( Special Cable Types) Pulse DA EQ Submodule ( 8281) EQ Submodule ( RG59) Pulse Reger. Submodule 1RU Audio Tray ( 120V PS) 1RU Audio Tray ( 240V PS) 2RU Audio Tray ( 120V PS) 2RU Audio Tray ( 240V PS) Backup PS for 8550T2-120 Backup PS for 8550T2-240 Audio DA
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Price $650.00
650.00 795.00 795.00 250.00 250.00
75.00 175.00 285.00 285.00 285.00 395.00 395.00 450.00 450.00
TBA
Price TBA TBA $425.00 425.00 425.00 250.00 TBA TBA TBA 695.00 695.00 875.00 875.00 350.00 350.00 275.00
VT-67
GRASS VALLEY GROUP
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 19161273-8421
VIDEO PROCESSING SYSTEMS
3240-10 VIDEO PROCESSOR IN ONE RACK UNIT FRAME
10
3220-LC2 COMPLETE UNIT
3240-20 VIDEO PROCESSOR
e 4. 9.41 · 41 414 441.
3274A 3247A RACK MOUNT REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
Model 3240 Video Processing Amplifier
3240-10 Video Processor in 1- RU tray, AC power cord, module
extender, two instruction manuals $4795.00
3240-20 Video Processor in 2- RU tray, two AC power cords, module
extender, two instruction manuals
4995.00
3240-201 Pulse DA-1A module; Option-202 may not be used . 995.00
3240-202 Pulse DA-2module; Option- 201 may not be used . 495.00
3240-203 Video AGC module; Option-204 may not be used . . 895.00
3240-204 VIR AGC module; Option-203 may not be used
995.00
3240-205 3220 Linearity Corrector; Options-206-207 may not be
used
995.00
3240-206 Relay bypass module; Option-205 may not be used. 295.00
3240-207 External Reference module; Option-205 may not be
used
995.00
3240-208 NTSC Pulse DA -3
725.00
3240-209 NTSC Color Bar Gen. Submodule
470.00
3240-101 Fade-to- black control with 8 meters ( 26') connecting
cable
465.00
3240-102 Console type Remote Control panel with 8 meters 126') of
connecting cable. Option- 103 may not be used
525.00
3240-103 Rack mounting Remote Control panel with 8meters ( 26') of
connecting cable. Option- 102 may not be used
525.00
3240-104 Delegate Remote Control panel with one meter 13.3'1 of
connecting cable. Options- 101 or - 102 may also be used
695.00
3240-105 Console type Remote Control parts kit with 8meters 126'1 of
connecting cable
275.00
The Model 3240 Video Processing Amplifier is ahigh performance sync and blanking regenerative amplifier designed for signal processing in studio, master control, remote, and transmitter locations.
Features ·SC / H phasing · Full regeneration of sync and burst · Adjustable blanking width · Soft and hard clippers · Cable equalization option ·Selectable line deletions: 10-21 · Sin 2 pulse edges · Color black output option · Optional accessories
The basic 3240-10 system is a fully functional processing amplifier, available in one rack unit ( RU = 1.75") height. Controls are available on the card edge or at aremote control point.
The compact and rugged construction, coupled with low power consumption and wide supply voltage range, make it ideal for remote van applications. All active components are accessible from the front of the rack.
Conservative ratings, and asealed air design that keeps contamination out, will assure years of trouble free service.
The expandable 3240-20 system in the two- RU frame contains four additional cells for accessories. The accessories are plug-in modules that complement the basic processor. The frame has been prewired to accept the accessories, and power is supplied from the 3200A Power Supply.
Model 3220 Linearity Corrector
3220-LC1 Assembly in 1- RU tray, power supply, one 3220 module,
AC line cord, remote connector, module extender, two instruction
manuals
$2025.00
3220-LC2 Assembly in a1- RU tray, power supply, two 3220 modules,
AC line cord, remote connector, module extender, two instruction
manuals
3020.00
3220 NTSC Linearity Corrector Module
995.00
The Model 3220 Linearity Corrector compensates for differential gain and differential phase non-linearities of visual television transmitters or other video systems. Whether used alone, or as an accessory to the 3240 Video Processor, the Linearity Corrector features:
·Differential phase correction · Differential gain correction · Operate or bypass modes · Four adjustment steps in gain and phase · Threshold and slope step adjustments · Negligible adjustment interaction
Model 3274A Borderline Generator
3274A-10 Borderline Generator in 1- RU tray, power supply, AC line
cord, module extender, two instruction manuals, and a1.75"H x19"W
(4.45 x48.3cm) control panel with 8m ( 26') of control cable.
3274A-10
$3995.00
3274A-11 Borderline Generator in 1RU tray, power supply, AC line cord, module extender, two instruction manuals, and a 2.25"H x 6.95"W ( 5.72 x17.6cm) control panel with 8m ( 26') of control cable.
3274A-11 3274A-101 Nonsynchronous Detector submodule 3274A-102 Matte Insert Colorizer module
$ 3995.00 255.00 925.00
The Model 3274A Borderline Generator is a caption inserting device normally installed at the output of studio production switching systems.
Features ·External matte · Complete downstream keyer · Matted inserts ·Three modes of caption enhancement · Insert fade-in and fade-out operation · Optional matte colorizer · Optional non-sync detector
VT-68
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRASS VALLEY
P.O. Box 1114
Grass Valley, CA 95945 (91 6) 273-8421
GROUP
ÁVG\-
3256A TRAY REAR
VIDEO TIMING SYSTEMS
--.. ..-
.9 43 el'
3230-200 SLAVE FRAME
q o 9 g g_19 99 9 ' 9 9 9 9 9 L
3257A TRAY REAR
· ·I _ 3258 FRONT PANEL
3230-100 REFERENCE ASSEMBLY
Model 3230 lsophasing System
3230-100 Reference Assembly in 1- RU tray, AC power cord, module
extender, two instruction manuals. The system can drive up to four
slave assemblies ( 3230-200) and up to 32 isophasing amplifiers
(3230-201).
61495.00
3230-200 Slave Tray with cells for eight 3230 modules, 3200 power
supply, three 24" coax cables, and AC line cords. A maximum of four
3230-200's may be ordered with one 3230-100.
875.00
3230-201 3230 lsophasing Distribution Amplifier ( one); maximum is
eight per slave assembly, 32 per system.
855.00
3230-205 Remote indicator panel for up to 16 isophasing DA's in two
trays. Two maximum per system. Eight meters ( 26') of cable included.
385.00
The Model 3230 lsophasing System provides automatic video delay as part of aprecision distribution amplifier.
The 3230 distribution system automatically adjusts the timing of input signals for precision color phase timing at the input of aswitching or
mixing center.
The system will remove daily drifts and reduce the usual source timing requirements to coarse timing. The automatic timing does not effect the critical subcarrier horizontal relationship specified by RS170A.
I o o p-o/3-9 p 000000boáo
see
,
3252A TRAY REAR
Model 3252A Genlocking Sync Pulse Generator
3252A-SG1 Dual sync system consisting of two 3252A Sync Generators
with power supplies and Pulse DA -1A, 3257A Automatic Changeover
Switch with power supply, module extender, remote connectors, and
two instruction manuals.
$12,740.00
3252-SG2 Dual sync system consisting of two 3252A Sync Generators
with power supplies and Pulse DA -2, 3257A Automatic Changeover
Switch with power supply, module extender, remote connectors, and
two instruction manuals.
11,740.00
3252A Single Sync Generator, power supply, module extender, remote
connector, and two instruction manuals.
4250.00
3252A-201 Pulse DA -1A module
995.00
3252A-202 Pulse DA -2module
495.00
Note: One Pulse DA ( DA -1A or DA -2) is required for operation.
00
er)
3258 TRAY REAR
Model 3256A Non-Genlocking Sync Pulse Generator
3256A Tray with modules, power supply, AC line cord, remote
connector, module extender, two instruction manuals.
$1995.00
3256-201 Pulse DA -1A with sin 2 pulses, two color black outputs and
test output.
995.00
3256-202 Pulse DA -2with ramp shaped pulses, and two color black
outputs.
495.00
3256-213 Encoded Subcarrier module; converts the slave sync
generator to amaster sync generator.
365.00
Note: One Pulse DA ( DA -1A or DA -2) is required for operation.
Model 3257A Automatic Changeover Switch
3257A Rack mounted switching matrix, power supply, AC power
cord, remote connector, module extender, and two instruction
manuals.
$2250.00
The Model 3257A Automatic Changeover Switch can automatically
transfer between the outputs of two sync generators when a " fault" output condition is detected.
Features ·Manual and automatic switching · Sensing on output lines · Me-
chanical and electrical transfer · Visual and remote alarms · Eight programmable detectors · Unique switching application in a one- RU package.
Eight detectors in the module sense eight of the nine outputs. All
detectors adjust between 2or 4V pulses, and 1or 2V subcarrier signals. One detector can sense alow level, steady state signal such as color black or encoded subcarrier. Any or all detectors may be switched off.
Model 3258 SC/H Phase Meter
3258 SC/ H Phase Meter with power supply, module extender and two
instruction manuals.
$2995.00
The Model 3258 SC/ HPhase Meter is ameasurement instrument speci-
fically designed to aid in establishing and maintaining an SC/ H phased video system. It has two video inputs plus acolor frame pulse ( VI) input, which are used to measure absolute SC/ H phase of either video input, the difference between the two video inputs, and absolute SC/ H phase of either video input with respect to an externally applied house reference color frame pulse ( VI).
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 69
GRASS VALLEY
P.O. Box 1114
Grass Valley, CA 95945 (916) 273-8421
GROUP
VIDEO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 2
3291 COMPLETE UNIT WITH DUAL CHANNEL AUDIO OPTION
Models 3290/3291 Wavelink Fiber Optic Communications System
Thé Model 3290 is the broadband transmission component of the Wavelink system. It provides a full wideband 10MHz channel to accommodate any signal requiring such a bandwidth, for instance high- quality video. Incoming coaxial cable can be equalized by the 3290 with the addition of an optional submodule. The 3290 consists of an LED or laser- based transmitter, areceiver employing an APD detector, and compact mounting trays built to accommodate transmit and receive modules with their power supplies. The mounting trays are available in one rack- unit ( RU, 1.75 inches) or two rack- unit heights. One RU tray package houses up to three transmitter or receiver modules or one laser transmitting system. Two RU tray packages will house up to six transmitter or receiver modules, or two laser transmitting systems, plus two power supplies for back-up redundancy.
3291 The Model 3291 is the multichannel transmission component of the Wavelink system. Like the 3290, the 3291 consists of an LED or laserbased transmitter and an APD-based receiver. In addition to a5.8MHz video channel, the 3291 includes the multiplexing capability for two optional subchannels of audio and/or data. The Model 3291 also provides adjustable equalization of incoming and outgoing coaxial signal cables as an option. All 3291 receiving systems and LED- based transmitting systems are housed in two rack- unit mounting trays. Each of the two rack- unit trays will accommodate three transmit or receive systems. Laser- based transmitting systems are housed in either one or two rack- unit trays, one laser transmitting system being accommodated by each rack- unit of height.
3291 Audio, Data, and Alarm Options Each option consists of plug-in modulator and demodulator modules which are fully interchangeable with the other option modules. The modulator module plugs into the frame of the transmitting system, while the demodulator module is housed in the standard two rack- unit frame used in the receiving system. Audio options use a unique
FM- on- FM modulat.on scheme to enhance the signal-to-noise performance. The baseband audio signals are individually preemphasized and modulated at 100kHz; one channel is then frequency modulated on a9.8MHz carrier, arid the other ( dual audio systems) on an 8MHz carrier.
For the data option, serial asynchronous data ( up to 20kbits/second) is accepted at the data modulator via an RS232 interface. The data is bandlimited to 500kHz to limit the spectral width of the modulator output, and then FM modulated on a9.8MHz carrier. The audio/data option combines the features of the single audio and data options. Audio specifications are the same as for the dual audio option, and the data specifications remain unchanged. The GV43 audio option supports transmission of two channels of audio on carriers of 5.8MHz and 6.4MHz for common carrier applications; and 6.2MHz and 6.8MHz for satellite link applications.
Before transmission, each option channel is summed with the video channel on the exciter or LED transmitter module, and the resulting waveform is frequency modulated on a carrier of 24MHz. At the receiver the FM signal is demodulated and separated into its video, audio, and/or data components. The demodulator modules perform further FM demodulation and baseband filtering to restore the original audio or data signals. For the dual audio and the audio/data options, the audio output amplifier may be configured for a600 ohm ( 20 dBm) or low impedance ( 50 ohm) balanced output. For the single audio option achoice of 600 ohm, 150 ohm, or alow impedance ( 50 ohm) balanced output is provided. The data output is available via an RS232compatible interface. An optional alarm provides relay closures if a video input at the transmitter becomes disconnected, an optical carrier is absent at the receiver, or a redundant power supply fails.
Repeaters Laser- based 3290/91 repeaters allow transmission distances to be greatly extended.
VT- 70
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRASS VALLEY
P.O. Box 1114 Grass Valley, CA 95945 (9 16) 273-8421
GROUP
MODELS 3290/3291 WAVEL1NK (Cont'd)
WAVELINK PRICE LIST
3290 Transmitters, Repeaters and Receivers
3290-201
830 NM LED Transmitter Module
$ 1,200.00
3290-10L
830 NM Laser Transmitter
5,750.00
3290-301
1300 NM LED Transmitter Module
3,300.00
3290-1OP
1300 NM Laser Transmitter, 1RU
9,800.00
3290-20P
1300 NM Laser Transmitter, 2RU
19,390.00
3290-1SP 1300 NM Single- Mode Laser Transmitter . 12,300.00
3290-1RL 830 NM Laser Repeater
6,000.00
3290-1RLK 830 NM Laser Repeater w/Monitor Out
6,500.00
3290-1RP 1300 NM Laser Repeater
11,000.00
3290-1RPK 1300 NM Laser Repeater w/ Monitor Out
11,500.00
3290-1RSP 1300 NM Single- Mode Laser Repeater
13,500.00
3290-1RSPK 1300 NM Single- Mode Laser Repeater w/Monitor
14,000.00
3290-202
830 NM APD Receiver Module
1,200.00
3290-302
1300 NM APD Receiver Module
2,300.00
3290 Options
3290-10
1RU LED Tray, 1AC Power Supply
3290-20
2RU LED Tray, 1AC Power Supply
3290-21
2RU LED Tray, 2AC Power Supplies
3290-22
2RU Laser Tray, 1AC Power Supply
3290-PS1
AC Power Supply
3290-DCPS-12 12V DC Power Supply
3290-DCPS-24 24V DC Power Supply
3290-DCPS-48 48V DC Power Supply
3290-230
Alarm Card
3290-EX3
3290 Extender Card
3290-001
3Meter Fiber Optic Test Cable w/ Conn
$725.00 895.00
1,140.00 995.00 245.00 600.00 600.00 600.00 450.00 100.00 65.00
3291 Transmitters, Repeaters and Receivers
3291-201
830 NM LED Transmitter Module
$ 1,400.00
3291-10L
830 NM Laser Transmitter
5,950.00
3291-301
1300 NM LED Transmitter Module
3,500.00
3291-10P
1300 NM Laser Transmitter, 1RU
10,000.00
3291-20P
1300 NM Laser Transmitter, 2RU
19,790.00
3291-1SP 1300 NM Single- Mode Laser Transmitter . . . 12,500.00
3291-1RL 830 NM Laser Repeater
6,000.00
3291-1RLK 830 NM Laser Repeater w/ Monitor Out
6,500.00
3291-1RP 1300 NM Laser Repeater
11,000.00
3291-1RPK 1300 NM Laser Repeater w/Monitor Out .. . 11,500.00
3291-1RSP 1300 NM Single- Mode Laser Repeater
13,500.00
3291-1RSPK 1300 NM Single- Mode Laser Repeater w/Monitor
14,000.00
3291-202
830 NM APD Receiver Module
1,400.00
3291-302
1300 NM APD Receiver Module
2,500.00
----o0 oo 00'.--.`2,6e':âe
1 gl0e1--00:-1097-0e'4e0l-443*0
3290 2 RU TRAY REAR
3291 2 RU TRAY REAR
3291 Options
3291-20
2RU LED Tray, 1AC Power Supply $ 895.00
3291-21
2RU LED Tray, 2AC Power Supplies
1,140.00
3291-22
2RU LED Laser Tray, 1AC Power Supply .
995.00
3200-PS1
AC Power Supply
245.00
3291-DCPS-12 12V DC Power Supply
600.00
3291-DCPS-24 24V DC Power Supply
600.00
3291-DCPS-48 48V DC Power SJpply
600.00
3291-230
Alarm Card
450.00
3291-EX3
3291 Extender Card
100.00
3291-001
3Meter Fiber Optic Test Cable w/Conn
65.00
3291-203
Single Audio Modulator
550.00
3291-204
Single Audio Demodulator
550.00
3291-205
Dual FM Audio Modulator
995.00
3291-206
Dual FM Audio Demodulator
995.00
3291-207
RS- 232-C Data Modulator
500.00
3291-208
RS- 232-C Data Demodulator
500.00
3291-209
Audio/ Data Modulator
995.00
3291-210
Audio/Data Demodulator
995.00
3291-215
GV43 Dual Channel Audio Modulator
1,500.00
3291-216
GV43 Dual Charnel Audio Demodulator . . 2,000.00
3291-115
Filter for GV43 Dual Audio Modulator
250.00
3291-116
Filter for GV43 Dual Audio Demodulator. .. 250.00
3291-117
Filter Bypass
100.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 71
CLIFFORD B. HANNAY AND SON, INC.
600 East Main St.
Westerlo, NY 12193 ( 518) 797-3791
Manual Rewind Reels For Cable Storage Series C-3200
REELS
SERIES C-3200
Series C-3200 reels are designed for storage of long lengths of electric cable. A 4-1/2" x5-1/2" opening in the reel drum is provided for insertion of the cable to initiate winding. Equipped with a springactuated pin lock.
Rewind: Direct crank rewind. Crank attaches to reel axle and is removable.
Series C-1500
Options: Upon request, reels can be supplied with " 8" dimension other than shown and with disc sizes (" E" dimension) in other diameters.
Divider discs, as shown on Page 11, can be placed at almost any point on the drum you specify. Specify spacing of discs on your order.
See chart below for specifications.
c
Ile
A
SERIES C-1500
Series C-1500 reels are designed for storage of shorter lengths of electric cable. A 7/8" x 1-3/4" opening in the reel drum is provided for insertion of the cable to initiate winding.
Rewind: Direct crank rewind. Crank is permanently attached to axle.
Options: Reels with "B" dimension other than those shown in the chart are available upon request.
Divider discs, as shown on Page 11, can be placed at any point on the drum you specify. Specify spacing of discs on your order. See chart below for specifications.
To Order: Specify complete Model Number. Give size, length, type
and weight of cable. Indicate how reel will be installed and used ·
VT-72
0 D
Cable Capacity of Reel in Feet 1" 1 ," 1
Model Number
Reel Dimensions in Inches E. F, and G are Overall Dimensions
A
BCD
E
F
GH
1000 450 225 150 100 C3218-24-26 14' 2 9', 10'. 23 - 24
21 1/ 2 27
15
2200 1000 500 325 200 C3228-24-26 25
20
10. 23 - 24
32
27
15
3000 1300 650 425 275 C3234-24-26 31
26
10
23', 24
38
27
15
4300 2000 975 650 425 C3246-24-26 43
38
10. 23'- 24
50
27
15
3900 1700 900 550 375 C3228-30-32 25
20
10. 23 - 30
32
30 1/ 2 15'.
5000 2300 1100 700 500 C3234-30-32 31
26
10
23' 30
38
30 1 /2 15'.
3000 1350 675 400 375 C3224-32-34 20', 15
7500 3400 1700 1000 950 C3246-32-34 43
38
1400 325 150
75
C1514-17-18 11
6
10 10
6'.,
23 23 , 14
32
27 1/ 2 32 1/ 2
32
50
32 1/ 2
16 1/ 2 15 1/ 2 18
16', 16' ,
9
2600 650 4000 1000
300 450
150 225
C1520-17-18 17
12
6', 14
16 1/ 2 21 1/ 2 18
9
C1526-17-18 23
18
6'., 14
16 1/ 2 27 1/ 2 18
9
5000 1200 550 275
C1530-17-18 27
22
6 . 14
16 1/ 2 31 1/ 2 18
9
rices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Approx. WI Lbs. Crank
Rew in d
NET SHIP
64
89
80 105
90 125
126 158
100 135
107 145
90 125
130 165
23
31
25
33
27
37
29
41
CLIFFORD B. HANNAY AND SON, INC.
REELS
600 East Main St.
Westerlo, NY 12193
SERIES (518) 797-3791 C Manual and Power Rewind Reels for Cable Storage
These heavy-duty reels are designed for storage of all types of electric cable. A 41 /2 "x 51 /2 "opening in the
drum permits end of cable to be inserted to initiate winding. Rewind: Choose gear- drive crank rewind, or chain and sprocket drive powered by A.C. or D.C. electric motor, compressed air motor or hydraulic motor. ( See Pagel.) Options: Upon request, reels can be supplied with "B" dimension other than shown and with disc sizes (" E" dimension) in other diameters.
Divider discs, as shown on Page 11, can be placed at almost any point on the drum you specify. Specify spacing of discs on your order.
A 15 1 /2 "diameter drum, in place of the standard to accommodate abending radius of 73 /4 "or less, is available on all models. With this option the reel cable capacity is reduced.
To Order: Specify complete Model Number and include proper prefix for rewind wanted. Specify size, length, type and weight of cable. Specify A.C. or D.C., voltage and phase for electric rewind models. Specify standard
or 15 1 /2 "diameter drum. Give spacing for divider discs, if required. Indicate how reel will be installed and used. Note: Be sure to specify all options you require when ordering.
Cable Capacity of Reel in Feet
0.0.
-,4
1"
1 1/4 "
1 ' '. "
3500 900 350 210 125 70 4800 1200 475 300 170 90 6700 1600 675 380 250 170 8700 2000 890 500 325 210 6000 1450 600 340 175 110 8000 1950 800 475 250 160
-- 2500 moo 625 325 210
7200 1700 700 400 225 175 2400 1100 575 350 260 3600 1500 900 550 375
Model Number*
C24-19-21 C28-19-21 C24-23-24 C28-23-24 C20-25-26 C24-25-26 C28-25-26 C18-30-31 C22-30-31 C28-30-31
Reel Dimensions in Inches E, F, and G are overall Dimensions
Approx. Wt. Lbs. Crank
Rewind
ABCEEEFFFGpw
C Clnee c.de
Ak
HO. Crank Pee
Ak/ e+e
20 1/ 2 15 1/ 2 10 1/ 2 19
20 1/ 2 19
21 1/ 2 27 1/ 2 24 1/ 2 21
80
25 20
10y, 19
20 1/ 2 19
26
32
29
21 13c
ShippIng
120 124
20 1/ 2 15 1/ 2 10 «.
23
24 1/ 2 23
21 1/ 2 27 1/ 2 24 1/ 2 24
90
130
25
20
10'. 23
24 1/ 2 23
26
32
29
24 94 134
16 1/ 2 11'. 10 1/ 2 25
26 1/ 2 25
17 1/ 2 23 1/ 2 20 1/ 2 26 86
126
20 1/ 2 15 1/ 2 10 1/ 2 25
26 1/ 2 25
21 1/ 2 27 1/ 2 241/ 2 26
93
133
25
20
10 1/ 2 25
261/ 2 25
26
32
29
26 100 140
14 1/ 2 91/ 2 10 1/ 2 30
18 1/ 2 13 1/ 2 10'.
30
25
20
10'. 30
31 1/ 2 30 31 1/ 2 30 31 1/ 2 30
15 1/ 2 21 1/ 2 181/ 2 31
96
19% 25 1/ 2 221/ 2 31 100
26 32 29
31 110
136 140 150
WHEN ORDER NG POWER REWIND MODELS, PREFIX MODEL NO. WITH: A = AIR REWIND E = ELECTRIC REWIND HD = HYDRAULIC REWIND
ADD 10" to Edimension when crank is in rewind position.
NOTE: Weights shown in chart are for crank
rewind models. ADD these amounts for power
rewind models
NET
SHIP
ELECTRIC
40
45
AIR
25
30
HYDRAULIC
25
30
To Order: Specify Model Number and indicate if reel is to be equipped with handle. Specify Gauge/No. of Conductors, length and type of cable for factory installation.
Model C-10-17-19 Cable Storage Reel. A compact. lightweight crank rewind reel, without collector rings, for cable storage.
Rewind handle is permanently attached to disc.
Cable Capacity of Reel In Feet 0.D
250 375 500 750 1150 300 200 100
1150 300 200 100
Model Number
C10-17-19 W/Handle C10-17-19 W/O Han-dle
Reel Dimens ons In Inches E, F and G are overall Dimensions
B
C
E
F
G
Crinit Crank
5
6
18
10
20 1/ 2
5
6
18
10
17 1/ 4
To Order: Specify Model Number and indicate with or without handle
Approx. Wt. Lbs.
Net ShIppIng
28 43
21
36
VT-73
HARRIS CORPORATION
HARRIS VIDEO SYSTEMS OPERATION
967 Starlin Road Mountain View, CA 94043 (415) 969-9100
FRAME SYNCHRONIZERS/ TIME BASE CORRECTORS
tnanu HARRIS
. am rz3i · · · ese ir
MODEL 550VT
HVS 690
HVS 690 Frame Synchronizer and Time Base Corrector
STANDARD FEATURES:
·Freeze frame or freeze field for production versatility ·Dropout compensation to clean up bad tapes
·Line- by-line velocity compensation with look- ahead for high accuracy correction with direct signals
·Preset proc amp level controls for complete control over input video ·Hysteresis circuitry for smooth signal handling ·Transparent signal performance for perfect originals and clean, crisp
dubs ·Industry standard components to speed maintenance ·3.5 inch height to conserve rack space, or to make tabletop use more
convenient ·Auto-freeze when incoming signal is lost to reduce output video
disturbance ·Automatic mode switching between stable and unstable inputs to
reduce operator set-up time ·Built-in TBC for heterodyne and direct signals for complete
versatility with all formats
Part É 7-16154-01 1-10440-01 1-11203-00 1-18244-01
1-18253-01 7-11245-01 5-14113-01
5-14114-01 1-18140-01
Product HVS 690 Quad Head Switch Amplifier FM Sampler for D.0 C C- MOD ( option)
C- MOD ( retrofit)* Fiberglass Shipping Case Operators Manual
Maintenance Manual Spare Parts Kit
Price $14,500.00
295.00 95.00
350.00
500.00 275.00
50.00
75.00 975.00
HVS 632/DNR NTSC
Frame Synchronizer and Time Base Corrector
Frame Synchronizer and Time Base Corrector which offers superb performance with outstanding flexibility. It operates with time base stable direct color, and monochrome signals and also time base unstable heterodyne or monochrome signals. The unit is shipped as a stand-alone unit with manuals and rack slides.
·Stable or unstable inputs · " Dual Mode" hot switching ·Smooth handling of odd field edits ·Compensation for lost video ·Picture freeze ·High noise immunity
HVS 550VT Digital Time Base Corrector
The Harris 550VT operates with all capstan servo heterodyne video recorders, from the older, non-subcarrier feedback machines to the new highband VCRs. 3.58 feedback and process modes are both available to offer superb performance over awide range of VTRs.
For easy editing, the 550VT will handle 10X shuttle speeds. And its full remote panel is small enough so that two can fit side- by-side in a 1-3/4" rack space.
The 550VT's 8- bit, 4xfsc architecture provides virtually-transparent signal performance, while its 16- line memory and Automatic Vertical Advance handles large gyro errors with ease. A built-in proc amp, plus RS- 170A sync output circuitry, allow complete operator control of video signals and gen -lock of external equipment.
·Exceptional write clock range
VARIABLE TRACKING OPTION FOR 540/550 TBCs
·RGB mode
The new Variable Tracking ( VT) option allows either TBC to be used
·Digital interface
with slow-motion heterodyne VTRs such as the Sony BVU 820 with
·Convenient front panel operation
its Dynamic Tracking mode. The 540VT and 550VT will dynamically
·Easy maintenance
track from 1xreverse play speed to 3x forward play speed and will
Part É 7-18482-01 7-13106-03
IBA
Product HVS 632/DNR Compress/ Positioner
Spare Parts Kit
Price $21,800.00
4500.00
2500.00
hold color lock to ± 5x shuttle speed. In addition, the 540VT and 550VT will enable the VTR to present astable picture in " Pause" as
well as present aviewable picture in fast forward and rewind modes )±40x normal speed).
5-16356-01 Maintenance Manual
125.00
Part t
Product
Price
5-16357-01 Operators Manual
50.00
7-18000-02 HVS 540 ( 16L-feedback mode only)
$6450.00
7-16212-01 7-16391-01 1-14745-01
Remote Control
2000.00
Digikey
4500.00
Rackmount for C/P and/or Remote Control Panel .75.00
HVS 632C IRGB)
24,800.00
HVS 632 / DN RPackage ( includes C/P,
Digikey and Remote Control)
27,990.00
HVS 540VT ( 16-L)
6950.00
HVS 550VT ( 16-L)
8200.00
7-18478-01 Remote Control ( 540/550)
975.00
5-18043-01 Operators/Maintenance Manual ( 540/550)
75.00
Interconnect harness compatible with the Sony BVU
820
250.00
VT-74
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HEDCO
HUGHES ELECTRONIC
DEVICES CORPORATION
P.O. Box 1985 Grass Valley, CA 95945 USA (916) 273-9524 Telex 364412
ADA-200/ ADA-201 Audio Distribution Amplifier
· Differential Input
· Balanced Outputs
· Six Outputs
· Ultra Low THD
· Wide Range
· Modular
The ADA-200 Audio Distribution Amplifier is a
modular, high-performance amplifier designed
to meet the rigorous requirements of the
broadcast industry.
Each module has tandem output stages
containing LF256H operational amps and MPS- U05 /U55 output transistors in tracking loops,
providing very low THD and high output drive
capacity. The amplifier response profile allows
distribution of SMPTE time code without modifications. The ADA-200 can be used with
ADF-200 or AVF-150 frames, and APS-155
power supplies. ADA-200
ADA-201
$245.00 245.00
ARA-202/ARA-203 Audio Distribution Amplifier
· Remote Gain · Differential Input · Balanced Outputs · Six Outputs · Wide Range
· Modular
The ARA-202 Remote Gain Audio Distribution
Amplifier provides remote gain adjustment
using a single 10 K potentiometer to ground.
Internal jumpers provide ± 3dB, ± 6dB, or ± 9dB
remote ranges in addition to the local ± 3dB
adjustment. Differential input, and six balanced
outputs with advanced, tandem tracking loops in
the output stages, provide very low THD and transparent signal distribution. The ARA -202
may be used in any HEDCO Audio Distribution
Frame and/or mixed with standard Audio Line
Amplifiers.
ARA -202 ARA -203
$325.00 325.00
VDA-1 00 Video
· Differential Looping Input · Six Identical Outputs · High Performance · Multi- Purpose DA
EDA-102 Equalizer
$235.00
· Up to 1000 feet of 8281 Cable · Four Pole Equalization · Six Identical Outputs · Operator-proof
The EDA-102 has a plug-in, four- pole cable submodule ( CEQ-100) which allows four individual peaking circuits to compensate for various types of cable. The equalizing submodule has asecurity clip which prevents misadjustment of response on an installed EDA. Gain and DC adjustments are accessible for
local operations.
The EDA-102 plugs into the standard VDF-100 or AFV-150 frame, and can be mixed with other video or pulse amplifiers in the same frame.
$285.00
CDA-104 Clamper
· Back Porch Clamp · Differential Looping Input · Six Identical Outputs · Optional Cable
· Equalizer
The CDA-104 clamping DA provides up to 45 dB
of hum rejection with afast forward clamp pulse
derived from input composite video. For set-up,
clamping may be bypassed with afront panel
switch. The CEO- 100 cable equalization
submodule may be added to the CDA-104
clamping DA to provide additional compensa-
tion for up to 1000 feet of 8281 cable. The front
panel gain control provides level adjustments
without affecting response or clamping. The
CDA-104 can be mixed with other video or pulse
DA's in the same frame.
$325.00
Option: CEO- 100 1000 Foot Cable Equalizer
SCA-1 05 Subcarrier
· Differential Looping Input · Phase Adjustable · Six Identical Outputs · Regenerated S/C
The SCA-105 provides regenerated, low distortion subcarrier, and 360° of subcarrier phase control.
The SCA-105 has adifferential input with over 80 dB hum rejection at 60 Hz. Subcarrier is
switched through one of four 90° phase shifters, and a three-pole filter that recovers only the fundamental frequency. Fine phase is adjusted
prior to phase shifting and filtering.
The SCA-105 uses the standard VDF-100 or the
AFV-150 frame.
$270.00
LDA-1 08
· Linear Low Delay · Six Identical Outputs · AC Coupled Input · Looping Input
A linear pulse DA with less than 2Ons trarisition time from loop-thru input to six outputs. Designed to complement RS- 170A pulse distribution,
the LDA-108 has very low group delay. A pulse presence detector with LED indicators and
remote line is optional.
Useable for 1V p- pvideo, 2V p-psubcarrier or 4V
p- p pulses. The LDA-108 uses the standard
VDF-100 or AFV-150 frame.
$185.00
Options: PPD-100 Horiz. Sync Detector, PPD101 Vert. Sync Detector
AUDIO/VIDEO DISTRIBUTION
SDA-107 Sync Strip
· Sync from Video · Sin2Transitions · Six Identical Outputs · Looping Input
The SDA-107 provides output sync at 4V p-p levels with 120ns sin2 transitions from any
video input.
Input signals are passed through a sync strip filter submodule ( SSF-100) mounted on aPDA108 module. Sync level detector ( PPD-100) indicates low level signals with local LED's and remote closure to ground.
The SDA-107 series can be mixed with other video or pulse amplifiers in the same frame.
4216.00
Versions: SDA-107 NTSC/Horiz., SDA-117 NTSC/ Vert., SDA-127 PAL/Horiz.
Frames
Each 2RU frame is prewired for easy expansion. One power supply is required for each tray. An optional, " plug-in" redundant supply is avail-
able. Separate AC inputs and CB/switches are
standard.
ADF-200 Audio frame is prewired for eight
audio DA's and two APS-155 audio power
supplies.
$550.00
AVF-150 Audio/video frame is prewired for
four audio DA's, four video DA's plus two APS-
155 audio power supplies.
$575.00
VDF-100 Video frame is prewired for eight
video DA's and two VPS-154 video power
supplies.
4575.00
Module Extender
An optional module extender, Model DEX-160,
is available to provide maintenance adjustments
and ease of trouble shooting. The DEX-160 may
be used with all audio, pulse, and video
distribution amplifiers.
$40.00
Power Supplies
Two types of power modules are used in the
distribution equipment: APS-155 with audio
equipment, and VPS-154 with video units. Each
supply provides regulated outputs from
selectable 115V/60 Hz or 230V/50 Hz lines.
APS-155
VPS -154
$245.00 246.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-75
HEDCO
HUGHES ELECTRONIC DEVICES CORPORATION
P.O. Box 1985
Grass Valley, CA 95945 USA
(916) 273-9524 Telex 364412
ROUTING SWITCHERS
MRC-16/4V MRD-16/4A
· 16 or 8 Inputs ·Up to 4Output Buses · Up to 4 Channels ·Audio, Video, AFV · Dual Power Supplies ·Vert. Interval Switch · Duff Audio In/Out · Meets AVR-1 Specs
RCP- 105 CONTROL PANEL provides four buses of 16 LED/switches. Uses single wire per crosspoint lines and closure to ground contacts. The 2RU panel requires on cable per bus.
11111111111111111111111111111111 '""
RCP- 101 CONTROL PANEL provides 16 LED/switches for control of one bus. Single wire per crosspoint lines connect through the remote connectors and activate with closure to ground.
ORDERING INFORMATION
SIZE 8Inputs/ 1Out
VIDEO MRC 8/1
8Inputs/2 Out MRC 8/2
8Inputs/3 Out MRC 8/3
8Inputs/4 Out MRC 8/4
16 Inputs/1 Out MRC 16/1
16 Inputs/2 Out MRC 16/2
16 Inputs/3 Out MRC 16/3
16 Inputs/4 Out MRC 16/4
AUDIO MRD 8/1 MRD 8/2 MRD 8/3 MRD 8/4 MRD 16/1 MRD 16/2 MRD 16/3 MRD 16/4
CONTROL PANELS RCP- 101 Panel, 16 Inputs, 1Bus
RCP- 105 Panel, 16 Inputs, 4 Buses CAB- 2 Cable for RCP- 101, RCP- 105
OPTIONS REX-161 Extender Module VPS-154 Redundant Video P.S. APS-155 Redundant Audio P.S.
MRI-24/2V MRJ-24/2A
· 16 or 24 Inputs ·1or 2 Buses Out ·Audio/Video/ AFV ·Multiple Levels ·2 RU Frames · Plug In Modules ·Meets AVR-1 Specs
ORDERING INFORMATION
SIZE 16 Inputs/1 Out
VIDEO MRI 16/1
24 Inputs/1 Out MRI 24/1
16 Inputs/2 Out 24 Inputs/2 Out
MRI 16/2 MRI 24/2
AUDIO MRJ 16/1 MRJ 24/1 MRJ 16/2 MRJ 24/2
VT- 76
aim
MRC/MRD 16/4 Audio/Video Routing Switchers are modular and bus oriented. The MRC/MRD switchers provide premium switching quality in either Audio, Video or AFV configurations. The MRC Video switcher features vertical interval switching based on last video plus video transparency. The MRD Audio switcher features differential inputs and outputs and operation at levels up to + 240dBm.
MRE-40/2V MRF-40/2A
·24 to 40 Inputs ·1or 2 Buses Out ·Audio/Video/AFV ·Multiple Levels ·4 RU Frames · Dual Power Supplies ·Meets AVR-1 Specs
MRE/MRF 40/2 AUDIO AND VIDEO Routing Switchers provide one or two buses which can select from either 24, 32,
or 40 buffered inputs. Each bus uses standard crosspoint and
buffer modules in 8 input increments. AFV systems may be configured with up to three levels of audio. Excellent audio and video transparency using standard components.
MRC REAR PANEL is equipped with loop thru inputs and two outputs per bus. The frame is prewired for all 4buses and has parallel control connectors for use with either the RCP- 101 or RCP- 105 panels. The 2 RU frame is fully equipped for dual power supplies.
eelffleerAl,
=Ira e=0
ISMITIMMIIMMS
CIM=1" 112191=1» 1111111111111111
1.
MRD REAR PANEL is equipped with RDI block terminals for ease of rack wiring. Parallel control connectors allow additional levels of audio or multiple control panels. The MRD frame is wired for two ABM-8's, eight ACM- 8's, 2 control logic, and
two APS-155 modules.
RCP- 109 CONTROL PANEL is equipped with 40 LED/switches to control one bus. Two RU panel mounts in standard 19 inch rack. May be used for video, audio or AFV control.
ORDERING INFORMATION
SIZE
VIDEO
24 Inputs/1 Out MRE 24/1
32 Inputs/1 Out MRE 32/1
40 Inputs/1 Out MRE 40 / 1
24 Inputs/2 Out MRE 24/2
32 Inputs/2 Out MR E32/2
40 Inputs/2 Out MRE 40/2
AUDIO MRF 24/1 MRF 32/1 MRF 40/1 MRF 24/2 MRF 32/2 MRF 40/2
MRE REAR PANEL is prewired for 40 BNC looping inputs and dual outputs on both buses. Frame space for up to four VPS-154 power supplies, two logic, five VBM8 buffers, and ten VCM8 crosspoint modules. Dual control connectors on each bus for looping to additional frames.
MRF REAR PANEL is prewired for 40 audio differential inputs and two differential audio outputs per bus. Frame space for up to four APS- 155 power supplies, two logic, five ABMS buffers, and ten ACM8 crosspoint modules. Dual control connectors and separate AC inputs.
RCP- 111 CONTROL PANEL is equipped with 24 LED/switches to control one bus. Single RU panel mounts in standard 19 inch rack and provides single wire per crosspoint control.
CONTROL PANELS RCP- 109 Panel, 40 Inputs, 1Bus RCP- 110 Panel, 32 Inputs, 1Bus RCP- 111 Panel, 24 Inputs, 1Bus CAB- 4 Cable for RCP- 109, RCP- 110 CAB- 3/4 Cable for RCP- 111
OPTIONS REX-161 Extender Module VPS-154 Redundant Video P.S. APS-155 Redundant Audio P.S.
-.Mgt 1" 1 1.." merilifflion-
MRI/MRJ 24/2 AUDIO AND VIDEO Routing Switchers provide one or two buses v. `lich are individually controlled by remote panels. The combined buffer, crosspoint, output amplifier modules completely isolate the buses and are front panel accessible. Each switcher is compact and provides auxiliary bus switching using single wire per crosspoint control.
RCP- 111 CONTROL PANEL is equipped with 24 LED/switches to control one bus. Single RU panel mounts in standard 19 inch rack and provides video, audio or AFV control with LED status display. HEDCO remote panels contain a minimum of electronics for operations.
OPTIONS REX-162 Extender Module
CONTROL PANEL RCP- 111 Panel, 24 Inputs, 1Bus CAB-3 Cable for RCP- 111
C f' C C C' -f (
MRI REAR PANEL is prewired for 24 BNC looping inputs and dual outputs on both buses. Frame space for one VPS-154 power supply and six VSM900 video switcher modules. Dual control connectors for each bus allows looping of control to additional frames.
MRJ REAR PANEL is prewired for 24 audio differential inputs and two differential outputs per bus. Frame space for one APS-155 power supply and six ASM900 audio switcher modules. Also has dual control connectors for each bus for AFV operation or for use with multiple panels.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HEDCO
HUGHES ELECTRONIC DEVICES CORPORATION
P.O. Box 1985 Grass Valley, CA 95945 USA
(916) 273-9524 Telex 364412
SRB 8/1 V
·8Video Inputs · Broadcast Quality · LED Indicators · Single RU Frame · Remote Option ·Meets AVR-1 Specs
11113111111111.111
um ·
SRB-8/1 VIDEO ONLY Routing Switcher is our plain vanilla unit. Frame houses one VSM-9 and one
VPS-153 module with front panel access for maintenance. Local front panel displays video status on LED's. Compact rack mounting with excellent performance.
ROUTING SWITCHERS
ORDERING INFORMATION SRB 8/1 8input, Video Only
OPTIONS RCP- 100 Remote 8 / 1Panel CAB- 1 Cable for RCP- 100 SRX-162 Extender Module LCP-100 Local Control Panel
REAR PANEL shows loop thru BNC video inputs which exhibit greater than 50dB return loss. Dual video outputs have better than 0.1° diff 0.0.1% diff G and 0.1dB response. Equipped with captive AC cord and remote plug for parallel control.
RCP- 100 REMOTE PANEL has 8 LED/ switches mounted in 19 inch single RU panel. Single wire per crosspoint control.
SRB-182 AFV
·8Video Inputs ·8Audio Inputs ·AFV Operation Only ·One RU Frame · Remote Option · Meets AVR-1 Specs
ORDERING INFORMATION SRB-182AFV Complete 8 Input AFV OPTIONS RCP- 100 Remote 8/1 Panel CAB- 1 Cable for RCP- 100 SRX-162 Extender Module LCP-100 Local Control Panel
The SRB-182 AFV Switcher frame construction is identical to the SRB 8/1 above except for the rear panel. Audio Follow Video operation is standard and controlled locally by LED/switches mounted on the front panel. Audio response of 0.1dB from two outputs with < 0.1% THD at levels up to + 24dBm over the range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
REAR PANEL of the SRB-182 AFV Switcher shows loop thru BNC video inputs and dual video outputs. Audio inputs and outputs are thru an RDI terminal block for ease of wiring. Equipped with captive AC cord and remote plug for parallel AFV control.
SRB-281
· Dual Audio ·8 Input Groups · Separate Control · Diff Audio In/Out ·Two Remote Panels · Meets AVR-1 Specs
ORDERING INFORMATION SRB-281 Dual Audio, 8 + 8 Inputs
SRB-181 Equipped as one channel
OPTIONS
LCP-100 RCP- 102 or
Local Control Panel Remote Dual 8 + 8Panel
RCP- 100 ( 2ea.) Remote 8 / 1Panel
CAB- 1 ( 2ea.) SRX-162
Cable for above Extender Module
RCP- 102 REMOTE PANEL has two sets of 8 LED/switches mounted in 19 inch single RU panel. Requires two CAB- 1cables.
MIMEO
1111111111111111111111
SRB-281 DUAL AUDIO Switcher provides two independent 8input, dual output audio switchers in asingle RU frame. Frame houses one VPS-150 power supply
and two ASM-9 audio modules with fold down front panel access. LED/switches provide local control and status. Excellent audio transparency in both channels.
ppreme.eil
REAR PANEL Of the SRB-281 shows an independent set of RDI terminal blocks for each audio group. Remote operation for each group is controlled by single wire per crosspoint contact to ground, through the rear mounted connectors. Equipped with acaptive AC cord and fuse protection. All audio input and output connections are balanced.
SRB-481
· Dual Video ·8 Input Groups ·Separate Control ·Vertical Interval ·Two Remote Panels ·Meets AVR-1 Specs
ORDERING INFORMATION SRB-481 Dual Video, 8 + 8 Inputs
SRB -381 Equipped as one channel
OPTIONS RCP- 102 or
Remote Dual 8 + 8 Panel
RCP- 10012 ea.) Remote 8/1 Panel
CAB- 112 eai Cable for above
SRX-162 LCP-100
Extender Module Local Control Panel
LCP-102
Local Control Panel
*MIMI
11111111111111111
I41111
SRB-481 DUAL VIDEO Switcher provides two independent 8input, dual output video switchers in asingle RU frame. Frame houses one VPS-151 power supply and two VSM-9 video modules with fold down front panel access. Independent vertical interval switching on last video
î
REAR PANEL of the SR B-481 shows an independent set of BNC looping inputs and dual outputs for each video group. Contact closure to ground on a single wire per crosspoint through the individual rear mounted connectors provides parallel remote control. Equipped with acaptive AC cord and fuse protection.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
V1"-77
HEDCO
HUGHES ELECTRONIC DEVICES CORPORATION
P.O. Box 1985 Grass Valley, CA 95945 USA (916) 273-9524 Telex 364412
COMMON MODULES
,,,, 4 r 'be; " b, - , · ,,,
ASM-900 Audio Switch Module contains 8 high impedance input buffers, 8 transistor switches, and dual balanced outputs. Levels of + 24dBm and 0.1% THD with 0.1dB response over 20 to 20 kHz.
Z
'to ;*
4111111
L ena
·
es a. me r ...ee
-
11118
alus
VSM-900 Video Switch Module contains 8 high impedance input buffers, 8 transistor switches, and dual 75 ohm 0.1% outputs. Switcher exhibits 0.1° diff , 0.1% diff G and 0.1B response.
il
VPS-152 Power Supply provides .· 24 VDC and · 12 VDC with fold back current limiting for single rack unit frames. Line inputs can be strapped for 115V/60Hz or 230V/ 50Hz.
ABM-8 Audio Buffer Module contains 8 individual differential balanced inputs with 80cIB CMR at up to +24dBm input levels. Individual buffers with DC offset adjustments drive isolated motherboard paths to crosspoint modules.
=6114111111.1
t
f
ii
r«.
11112;·'11:::·. '''''''''
ACM-8 Audio Crosspoint Module contains 8 T- style transistor crosspoints, audio output driver and bus control logic. Dual output driver has true 600 ohm impedance at up to + 24dBm with THD 0.1% and
0.1dB responsive to 20 kHz.
· o
liele6dielisteibtmtarie· ·
VBM-8 Video Buffer Module contains 8 individually powered high impedance buffers. Each buffer drives a motherboard path and provides constant level video for up to eight crosspoint modules. Fully compensated for loop thru inputs.
*-:
SWlie- tali'
r )
· 'wire
itaw.iiiaag %sae liffle
VCM-8 Video Crosspoint Module contains 8 T- style
transistor crosspoints, video output driver, and bus control logic. Dual outputs are gain adjustable 3dB and have < 0.1% diff G, < 0.1% diff 0 ,and 0.1dB response. Wire per crosspoint control logic.
ROUTING SWITCHERS
SRE 16/1 AFV
· 16 or 8 Inputs ·Video/Dual Audio · Built-in Breakaway · Dual LED Indicators ·Two RU Frame ·Prewired Frame ·Meets AVR-1 Specs
ORDERING INFORMATION SRE-16/1AFV Dual AFV, 16 Inputs
SRE-8/1AFV Only 8 Inputs, Dual AFV
OPTIONS RCP- 121
Remote 16/1 AFV Panel
CAB- 4
Cable for RCP- 121
SRX-162 LCP-221
Extender Module Local uontrol ranel
SRE-16/1 STEREO AFV Routing Switcher otters two levels of audio follow video with local or optional remote control. Frame houses 2 each VSM-9, 4 each ASM-9 and single APS-155 modules, with fold down front panel access. Local front panel displays audio and video status with red/green LED's. Breakaway stereo audio controlled as single selection.
j. 1 1
REAR PANEL shows loop thru bNC video inputs and RUI terminal blocks used for audio inputs and outputs. Plug in power connector and remote connectors are quick disconnect style. Remote connector provides full access to all features.
Use the RCP- 121 Remote Control Panel to provide Remote Breakaway or AFV operations. LED indicators provide parallel status information.
SRA 16/1 AFV
· 16 or 8 Inputs ·Video, Audio, AFV · Built-in Breakaway · Dual LED Indicators ·Single RU Frame · Meets AVR-1 Specs
ORDERING INFORMATION SRA 16/1AFV Complete 16 Input AFV
SRA 16/1A SRA 16/1V SRA 8/1AFV SRA 8/1A SRA 8/1V
Only 16 Audio Inputs Only 16 Video Inputs Only 8 Inputs AFV Only 8Audio Inputs Only 8Video Inputs
OPTIONS RCP- 121 CAB- 2
SRX-162
LCP-101
Remote 16 / 1AFV Panel Cable for RCP- 121 Extender Module Local Control Panel
LCP-121
Local Control Panel with audio breakaway
1. II II ,-
SRA-16/1 AFV Routing Switcher offers breakaway audio or video with local or optional remote control. Frame houses 2each VSM-900, 2each ASM-900 and single VPS-152 modules, with fold down front panel access. Local front panel displays individual audio and video status with red/green LED's. Hold down breakaway feature prevents accidental operations.
REAR PANEL shows loop thru BNC video inputs and dual video output. Audio connector is aquick disconnect style yet provides access for differential inputs and outputs. Captive AC cord. Remote control connector provides full access to all features.
RCP- 121 provides identical remote control of audio and video as the local panel plus parallel LED status indicators. Rack mounting, single RU construction.
\
SRA SREI-8/1 SRB-182 SRB-281 SRB-481 SAE SAO SRH SRU-1611 SRU-YRG8 MRA macs MAC MR0 MRE MRF MRI MRJ
16, 8
1
·
·
·
a
i
·
8
1 ···
Dual 8
1, 2
·· o
Dual 8 1. 2 ·
·
0
16. 8
1
· Dual
·
256.···.8
2
·
·
0
256.···.8
2
go
·
o
16, 8
1 ·
a 8 a 16.8 16, 8
3, 4 · 1-8 · 1-8 1-4 · 1-4
·
0
· · 0
·
0
e
· o
40 32, 24, 1-2 ·
18, 8
1, 2
·
0
· · 0
24, 16, 8 1, 2 ·
· 0
24, 16. 8 1, 2
· · 0
1
3
1
4
1
4
1
5
1
5
2
3
12
tt
12
ti
2 Delay 6 2 RGB 7
2
a
2
a
2
9
2
g
4
10
4
10
2
11
2
11
Custom panels will be quoted upon request
· Standard Feature
Specifications
· Standard Option
sublecl to change
0 Specialized Option «mho.'
tt Described Elsewhere
notiftcation
VT-78
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HEDCO
HUGHES ELECTRONIC DEVICES CORPORATION
P.O. Box 1985 Grass Valley, CA 95945 USA (916) 273-9524 Telex 364412
SRU-16/1 DELAY
16 or 8 Video Inputs 25 to 125ns Input Delay 25 to 125ns Input Delay 65 to 165ns BG Out Delay BG Switching/Timing Compliments UltiMatte C4)
;RU- 16/1 DELAY switcher provides either 16 or 8input transar delays and adelayed switched output. Delays are adjustable ,ver a100ns range to compensate for cabling and BG transit ime through the UltiMatte. The two RU frame contains 2each /SM-900 Video Switch module, 2 each WM-9 Video Delay Aodule, and one VPS-154 Power Supply.
ji
"4·ZnÇ ' US2;:Z9ODQ9QQ 9Q9gg9 -40 ·
a
Q:e1
zr.la
3ACK PANEL shows the 16 looping BNC inputs plus delayed Ind non- delayed switched output. Delayed outputs are posiioned below the looping inputs. The control connector pro/ides the interface to the RCP- 101 Control Panel.
ROUTING SWITCHERS
SRU-YRGB
·YRGB or RGB Switching ·Single Control Panel · Dual Outputs per Bus
·Two RU Frame ·Compliments UltiMatte CD · Meets AVR-1 Specs
à SRU-YRGB Video Switcher consists of four individual 8input, one bus VSM-900 switchers in a two RU frame. Outputs are simultaneously controlled by one RCP- 100 panel to provide Y,R,G,B switching. Dual outputs on each bus allow monitoring and direct feeds. Unit may be used for 3 channel RGB switching by removal of one VSM-900 module.
1111.1 .1 . 1
1CP-101 CONTROL PANEL provides 16 LED/switches for :ontrol of the switched output. Panel is single RU high and nounts in standard 19 inch racks.
;PECIFICATIONS lofer to HEDCO AVR-1 Specs except for: iequency Response: 100K to 5MHz, ± 0.2dB )ifferential Phase: < 0.2° 110 to 90 APL) )ifferential Gain: < 0.2% 110 to 90 APL)
)RDER INFORMATION ;RU- 16/1 DELAY Complete 16 Input with 16 Input Delays
plus BG Delay
;Ru -8 / iDELAY Equipped as 8 Input with 8 Input Delays plus BG Delay
ICP-101
Control Panel for 16 Inputs
:AB- 2
Cable for RCP- 101
)PTION IRX-162 Extender Module
VIRA- 8/8V
,8 Inputs
,Up to 8Output Buses ,Up to 4 Channels
,Audio, Video, AFV
,Dual Power Supplies
,Vert. Interval Switch Diff Audio In/Out
,Meets AVR-1 Specs
MRB-8/8A
VIRA/MRB 8/8 AUDIO And VIDEO Routing Switchers )rovide 8buses which can select from 8buffered inputs. Each )us including control logic, transparent switches and output
enplifier is contained on one module. A separate buffer nodule feeds signals through a motherboard to each cross -
)oint module. Frame has space tor redundant power supply
ind all modules are removable from the front.
C=Ze
f1I1h1l1Y1h1h1llIhIlD
" CZZ)
1111111/1=111117111
»
iA RA REAR PANEL shows the eight looping inputs and dual iutputs on each bus. Frame space for two redundant VPS-154 lower supplies, one VBM8 buffer module and eight VCM8 :rosspoint modules. Individual connectors for looping and bus :ontrol. Separate AC inputs.
(· ..
I I
BACK PANEL showsfour groups of 8loop thru BNC hputs for Luminance IV), Red IR), Green (G), and Blue ( B). Each channel has dual outputs. Equipped with astandard AC connector and a 1Amp Circuit Breaker/Switch.
RCP- 100 CONTROL PANEL provides 8 LED/switches for singular control of all channels. Panel is single RU high and mounts in a standard 19 inch rack.
ORDERING INFORMATION SRU-YRGB 4 Channel YRGB Video Switcher
SRU-RGB 3 Channel RGB Video Switcher
RCP- 100
Control Panel for 8 Inputs
CAB- 1
Cable for RCP- 100 OPTION
SRX-162
. e.Extender Module e
41/111
-·
MRB REAR PANEL shows the RDI terminal blocks for audio differential inputs and outputs. Frame contains space for two
APS-155 power supplies, one ABM8 buffer and eight ACM8 crosspoint modules. Individual connectors for bus control plus looping connectors. Separate AC inputs.
MOM
RCP- 104 CONTROL PANEL controls up to eight buses using individual rotary pushbuttons plus take pushbuttons for selections. Panel is standard 19 inch width and required only one RU of space. LED indicators.
ORDERING INFORMATION
SIZE
VIDEO
8Inputs/1 Out
MRA 8/1
AUDIO MRB 8/1
8Inputs/2 Out 81nputs/3 Out
MRA 8/2 MRA 8/3
MRB 8/2 MRB 8/3
8Inputs/4 Out
MRA 8/4 MRB 8/4
8Inputs/5 Out
MRA 8/5 MRB 8/5
8Inputs / 6Out
MRA 8/6 MRB 8/6
8Inputs/7 Out
MRA 8/7 MR B8/7
8Inputs/8 Out
MRA 8/8 MR B8/8
Ma 1111 Ma Os
la le la Ia..
RCP- 100 CONTROL PANEL isequipped with LED/switches for control of 8 inputs on one bus. Up to eight panels may be used at separate locations for video, audio or AFV operations. Single wire per crosspoint.
CONTROL PANELS RCP- 100 Panel, 8Inputs, 1Bus
RCP- 102 Panel, Dual 8In for 2Buses
RCP- 104 Panel, TVV/Take for 8Buses CAB- 1 Cable for RCP- 100, RCP- 102
CAB-3 Cable for RCP- 104 12 ROD)
OPTIONS REX-161 Extender Module
VPS-154 Redundant Video P.S. APS-155 Redundant Audio P.S.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-79
H EDCO
HUGHES ELECTRONIC
DEVICES CORPORATION
P.O. Box 1985 Grass Valley, CA 95945 USA (9 16) 273-9 524 Telex 364412
ROUTING SWITCHERS
IRS 48 x48 AUDIO/VIDEO INTERMEDIATE SIZE ROUTING SWITCHER
IRS 24 x 24 VIDEO AND 3 CHANNEL AUDIO INTERMEDIATE ROUTING SWITCHER
IRS 48 x48/IRS 24 x24 FEATURES
· No Fans or Blowers are required. Thermal design provides for efficient heat removal. All integrated circuits are state-of-the-art, require very little power and are mounted in high quality I. C. sockets. All components are Off- Shelf and most Dual Sourced, available from an electronic parts house near your location.
·All modules are identified by matrix card slot for the Computer Software, not by individual module. Permits total type interchange.
·Back- Plane Inputs and Outputs ( Signal I/O) modules are direct plugin, with no intervening cables or wires to cause signal degradation or timing changes which complicate future maintenance problems.
·Each module has close tolerance on- board voltage regulators for maximum isolation characteristics. The input to each regulator is fused and its output is protected by automatic thermal shutdown and current limit.
·The Video Buffer has Differential Inputs to assure ahigh degree of common mode or Hum Rejection.
·The Video channels use Vertical Interval Switching featuring Back Porch Clamping to assure bounce-free switching between signals with widely different APLs. No SC traps are used. The circuit is designed to clamp only when there is adifference in DC levels, thus helping to maintain excellent system transparency.
·Audio Input is Balanced Differential for either balanced or unbalanced sources, has input impedance greater than 50K ohms and operates at levels up to + 24dBm.
·Dunker circuit gives " pop free" on-line Audio switching.
IRS 48 x48 System can start as small as 12 x12, single channel, and expand to 48 Inputs by 96 Outputs with up to four channels of Audio, Video and Time Code in any combination.
The IRS is available as individual Video, Audio 1, Audio 2, and/or Time Code Matrices with amaximum capacity of 48 inputs by 48 outputs in just 17 rack units, ( 29.75").
IRS 24 x24 Can start as small as 12 x12, single channel, and expand to 24 Inputs by 24 Outputs with up to three channels of Audio.
IRS CONTROL PANELS This series of control panels can be used on all HEDCO microprocessor based routing switchers. Control is via shielded twisted pair (balanced) using RS 422 protocol, MPU 6803 based.
RCP- 301: Basic single bus control panel. Keypad entry, Audio follow Video.
RCP- 302: Single bus control panel. Keypad entry, separate Audio and Video selection.
RCP- 303: X-Y control panel. Keypad entry for control of all buses. Audio follow Video.
RCP-304: Single bus control panel. Keypad entry, separate Video and two channel Audio selection.
RCP- 311: 1R.U., 16 pushbutton " shot box" panel. Buttons can be easily programmed to access any 16 inputs of 24, all levels.
RCP-306: X-Y control panel. Keypad entry for control of all buses. Separate Video and two channel Audio selection.
RCP- 307: Single bus control panel. Keypad entry, separate Video and three channels of Audio.
RCP- 310: 2 R.U. 48 pushbuttons. ( IRS 48 x48 only)
RCP- 305: 1R.U. 24 pushbuttons. ( IRS 24 x24 only)
IRS FRAMES Both Models' Switchers are contained in 17 rack units 29.75".
IRS MODULES IVI-611 Video Input Buffer · Back porch clamp · Differential inputs · Equalization for 200' of 8281 or equivalent cable ·On board power supply regulation ·6 buffers per module
IXP-144 Audio or Video Crosspoint · 12 x 12 array ·Crosspoints are transistor arrays in IC sockets ·Vertical interval switching ( refer to house sync) ·On board power supply regulation
IVO-612 Video Output Amplifier ·On board power regulation ·6 output amplifiers per module ·Two separate full level outputs per amplifier ·Output gain unity, ± 3dB adjustable
IAI-601 Audio Input Buffer ·Accepts balanced or unbalanced audio lines ·Differential inputs ·S/N ratio > 90dB ·On board power regulation ·6 buffers per module
IA0-602 Audio Output Amplifier ·600 ohms or 150 ohms outputs ·6output amplifiers per module ·Two separate full level outputs per amplifier · + 24dBm max. at 600 ohms; + 27dBm max. at 150 ohms
ICL-412 Computer ·One required for each 12 buses ·On board diagnostics ·Non-volatile E2 RAM for unlimited memory retention ·MPU 6803 based at 76.8 Kbaud
ICI- 401 Bus Interface ·One required for each 12 buses ·Uses RS-422 bi-directional controls ·Change module for RS-232-C
Reprinted with permission from materials by Copyright 1983, HUGHES ELECTRONIC DEVICES CORP.
VT-80
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
H EDCO
HUGHES ELECTRONIC
DEVICES CORPORATION
P.O. Box 1985 Grass Valley, CA 95945 USA (916) 273-9524 Telex 364412
SRG-128/4 VIDEO / SRH-128/4 AUDIO SRG-256/2 VIDEO / SRH-256/2 AUDIO LARGE INPUT MONITORING SWITCHERS SRG-256/2: 256 input, 2 bus video switcher. SRH-256/2: 256 input, 2 bus audio switcher.
SRG-128/4: 128 input, 4 bus video switcher.
SRH-128/4: 128 input, 4 bus audio switcher.
Includes SMC-256 Logic Interface -- One for 256 inputs, Two for 128 inputs.
SRG/H 256/2 AUDIO/VIDEO SWITCHER Features ·Automatic Scan Alarm · Remote Computer Control · Modular Input Configurations · Input Skip Program
256
·ALARM CONTACTS
SRC 256/2 VIDEO M AR.·
SIAC 256 loom
1616,1·49
RCP 201 CONTROL
P·ne
RS 232 It8C:r7 Pon::64,
254 ·5811·5 Inputs
'8 2
RCP 202 CON TROL
R·461
2 CONTACTS
MONITORING SWITCHERS
LARGE INPUT MONITORING SWITCHER
SMC-256 Logic Interface The SMC-256 Logic Interface uses two MC6803 Microprocessors which are programmed to execute all commands from the RCP-207 panels plus operations via the RS232- C computer link. Communication using the remote computer link is via standard ASCII parallel code. Two completely separate computers are housed in a one RU frame, each with NOVRAM ne memory for " SKIP" retention during power failures plus external alarm contacts.
VDS-182 Buffer Crosspoint The VDS-182 Buffer Crosspoint module contains selection logic, eight buffers, two sets of eight crosspoints and acard select crosspoint. Standard transistor arrays are used for switching and buffer functions.
VOA- 182 Output Amplifier The VOA- 182 Output Amplifier contains two independent output amplifiers and signal detectors. Each section uses standard components and logic elements for ease of maintenance.
RCP- 207 Control Panel Local Functions ( optional) Take: Activate bus to keyboard entry.
Audio Only: Causes audio SR H switcher to follow independently.
Skip: Allows any input to be bypassed in SCAN or SCAN ALARM.
Reset: Stop operations and switch to input one. Scan: Sequentially switch each input to an output bus at scan rate. Scan Alarm: Scan while monitoring for video or audio present. Reverts to HOLD when signal loss is detected. Hold: Manual or Automatic selection causes steady display of last input. Continue: Continue in SCAN or SCAN ALARM.
Options RCP- 207: Remote panel -- Two for 256 inputs, Four for 128 inputs. VPS-156: Redundant Power Supply, Video + 15V. APS-256: Redundant Power Supply, Audio + 28V. Cabling: One of each type listed is required for each bus. Specify length. CAB- 2: RS- 232 Computer cable. Up to 50m. Matrix to Logic Interface cable. Up to 10m. CAB- 4: Remote panel to Logic Interface cable. Up to 20m.
NOVRAM is a trademark of XICOR, INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 81
HENRY ENGINEERING 750 E. 5th St., Unit 83 Azusa, CA 91702 (8181 334-5580
INTERFACE AMPLIFIER/ TURNTABLE CONTROLLER
THE MATCHBOX
The MATCHBOX is the ideal way to correctly interconnect "HiFi" or Semi- Pro UHF standard equipment with professional studio gear. The Matchbox is a bi-directional unit, with four independent amplifiers providing full stereo input and output interface. Two amplifiers convert a stereo IHF HI-Zunbalanced source to LO- Zbalanced outputs at studio
level. A second pair of amplifiers converts astereo balanced studio line source to unbalanced IHF outputs to feed the inputs of an IHF device. All circuitry is active and directcoupled for absolute sonic transparency. The Matchbox is compact and lightweight, allowing it to be permanently mounted to most cassette recorders, tuners, portable mixers, etc.
· Gain is adjustable to + 20dB · + 26 dBm maximum output level · . 008% distortion, 90dB S/N ·All active direct coupled circuitry · Does not load or ground studio lines
·Self contained regulated power supply · Provides extra AC outlet for convenience · Made with high quality U.S.A. components
MATCHBOX Specifications:
General · Power input: 115 VAC, 4 watts · Fuse: . 1amp, internal · Dimensions: 6.25" x3.75" x2.25" ·Weight: 2 lbs. ·Adjustments: Studio Output level adjustable via front
panel access holes
Electrical · Input Level: · Input Imped: · Gain/Loss
· Output Level: ·Output Load: · Freq Response: · Distortion: · Noise Level: · Number of
Channels:
IHF Input to STUDIO Output -10dtBo vOdBv,, nominal 25K ohms, unbalanced +6dB to + 20dB, adjustable 0to + 8dBm nom, +26dBm max
600 ohms or greater, bal
DC- 20 kHz, + /- 0.25dB .008% at any level 85dB below +4dBm output
2, " Left" and "Right"
STUDIO Input to IHF Output OdBm to + 8dBm, nominal 10K ohms, balanced -14dB, fixed
-10dBv nom, +20d Bv max 2K ohms or greater, unbal DC- 20 kHz, + / -0.25dB .008% at any level 75dB below - 10d Bv output 2, " Left and "Right"
The Matchbox
$195.00
UNIVERSAL \AO TURNTABLE
CONTROLLER
Ned InAlAucteons coretufly Stefano Am,
HENRY ENGINEERING
Azusa, CM
115
--TT, r--RE111101'ES--, 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
TT 1
... , . . 112
UNIVERSAL TURNTABLE CONTROLLER
The Universal Turntable Cortroller is acontrol interface unit for use in conjunction with Technics ( SP10, SP15, SP25, SL1200 MK1f) and Russco direct drive professional turntables.
The " UTC" adds remote control facilities to these turntables. It converts the turntable's " single button" control logic so that separate Start and Stop switches can be used to operate the turntable. The UTC also provides outputs to
drive 24VDC tally lamps for Run and Stop mode indication. The turntable's start- stop switch can still be used for cueing records, and the Universal Turntable Controller will always
remain " in sync". It easily connects to the turntable with
just three wires, and may be controlled by either momentary switches or CMOS circuitry. One UTC will control two turntables.
·Works with most console remote control facilities, or use "outboard" switches
·Tally lamp outputs accommodate illuminated pushbuttons
· No contact bounce or false operation
· CMOS circuitry is RF immune...no relays
· Self contained regulated power supply ·One UTC controls two turntables
Universal Turntable Controller
$ 180.00
V1"-82
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Withcut Notice.
,liéHORIZON international 3837 E. Wier Ave., Suite 1 Phoenix, AZ 85040 (602) 437-3800 Telex 322043
MASTER CONTROL SYSTEM
AUTOMATION/MASTER CONTROL SYSTEM
FEATURES ·Timecode based system ·Dual computers with failsafe capacity ·Interfaces to traffic department computer ·Interfaces to single and multiple deck machines ·Accountability for log changes ·Generates as run log and discrepancy report ·Decodes satellite channel cue tones ·Uses WWV as clock reference ·Automatic and manual operation ·Runs back-up tapes simultaneously ·Security code access to the system ·Discrepancy generated for every log change ·System will operate with or without amaster control switcher ·Printouts including list of tapes needed for the day's log
The Master Automation System offers a new and unique solution pertaining to automating master control. The MAS -100 acts as a central manager of information and acoordinator of activities for the equipment used in the master control operation.
As the hub of a data network that includes the traffic computer, single and multiple deck machines, and other equipment used in master control the MAS -100 oversees and monitors the on air operation. This includes receiving a station log from the traffic computer, performing the breaks as specified, and generating an as run log with adiscrepancy report.
The MAS -100 operates in an automatic mode in which all the operator has to do is load tapes. At this point the MAS -100 takes over and follows the below procedure:
·Detect tape has been loaded ·Read the userbit identification label ·Verify that the tape is needed for the day's log. If the tape is not
needed then go to step 12 ·Look up segment start time in MAS -100 tape database ·Cue the tape to the timecode preroll point from the database ·Turn the video head or scanner off ( minimizes wear on tape) ·Turn the video head or scanner on and recue the tape one minute
before it is to be rolled ·Roll the tape at the specified log time minus amount of preroll ·Switch the tape on air ·Switch to next source upon completion ·Verify if tape is needed again. If so then go to step 4 ·Eject cassette or rewind reel
Normally the MAS -100 will use the specified log time to start abreak. During live events when the break times are unknown the MAS -100 has the ability to use satellite channel cue tones to initiate the station break or be operated manually in which the operator must instruct the system when to start the break. Even though the break is started manually the MAS -100 automatically performs and logs the times of the entire break as it was performed.
The MAS -100 interfaces to equipment via a serial network. This enables the system to control single deck machines as well as the new multiple deck machines being manufactured today. A customer now has achoice to run the master control operation with aset of lower cost single deck machines for both program and commercial material or the multiple deck machine for commercials and several of
e NPR
11111111111111111111111111 1111111111111
·
·
single deck machines for programs. Besides interfacing with tape machines the MAS -100 is capable of communicating with and controlling character generator/electronic still store equipment, satellite control equipment, switchers, down stream keyers, and audio voice over mixers. A down stream keyer and audio voice over mixer can be used in conjunction with a small routing switcher in place of acostly master control switcher.
Accountability is akey aspect of the MAS -100. Whenever achange is made to the log by an authorized person, the system records the person's name, the log change as well as the time the change was made. This information is printed in the day's discrepancy report. Also if there are any changes to the log due to equipment failure or other reasons the MAS -100 will insist the operator include a discrepancy for every occurrence.
111111111fflit 111.-111
fir
toe,.
fi,,e
t,l In. iv Ill
,:mrerL,
t
tr-itueeettliitlfr
In, 11 n N Ig IC le
1116111110101111 «MIMI osetree,p
'niAS-100 BLOCK DIAGRAM
DATABASE
,10·10
COMPU TER
MIIE0 TAM ut011«.1
INTERFACE AND CONTROL
COMPUTER
u
PRINTER
TRFF IC COMPL TER
0204111·11
nuesaf101 1%.0·1.
MINXIL
T1.
BLOCK DIAGRAM/MAS-100
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-83
ICM VIDEO
A DIVISION OF INTERNATIONAL
CRYSTAL MFG. COMPANY, INC. to N. Lee
P.O. Box 26330
Oklahoma City, OK 73126
(405) 232-5808 Telex 747-147 TVVX 910-831-3177 Cable INCRYSTAL
Nights -- Weekends (405) 236-1818
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
JA ,OOp 0, 5, RellvlION AMP
· ·
DA -5000P DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
Features:
· Combination video and audio distribution in single cabinet
· Ten video and ten audio outputs
· Rackmountable, 1.75" high
· Gain and high frequency front panel screwdriver adjustments
· Front panel monitoring test points
· 110/220 VAC, NTSC or PAL operation
The DA -5000P is aversatile distribution amplifier combining audio and video into one cabinet. Ten matched, isolated video outputs are provided from asingle video input, and ten matched, isolated audio outputs are provided from asingle audio input. The inputs are looping or bridged so that additional DA's can be stacked to provide more outputs.
The front panel has screwdriver adjustments on both video and audio channels for overall level and high frequency compensation. Test points on the front allow oscilloscope monitoring of one of the video outputs and one of the audio outputs.
The video section handles NTSC and PAL signals equally well. The DA 5000P is supplied to operate on 110VAC, but asimple internal wiring change will allow it to operate on 220 VAC, 50Hz for PAL countries.
The DA -5000P, with rack mount hardware included, provides more outputs per rack inch than any other DA. Its cost per output is extremely moderate. Its clean, stable operation and long term reliability make the DA-5000P an unbeatable choice.
Specifications: Video: Bandwidth Linearity Tilt S/N Ratio Differential Phase Differential Gain Gain Hi Freq. Comp. Isolation Between Outputs Connectors Used
Audio: Bandwidth THD S/N Ratio Gain Isolation Between Outputs Input Outputs Connectors Used
General: Power Requirement
Power Consumption Operating Temperature Dimensions Shipping Weight Accessories Included DA -5000P
10MHz Better than 1% Less than 1% 56dB Less than 1/2° Less than 1% Up to 6dB ( front adjustment) Up to 1500 ft RG-59/U 40dB BNC
50kHz .05% 70dB Up to 6dB (front adjustment) 60dB High impedance, unbalanced 600 ohm, unbalanced RCA phono
110VAC, 60Hz (220VAC, 50Hz capable) 6 watts 10°C to 50°C 17"W x12"D x175"H 10 lbs Rack mount hardware
$595.00
VT-84
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ICM VIDEO
A DIVISION OF INTERNATIONAL
CRYSTAL MFG. COMPANY, INC.
10 N. Lee
P.O. Box 26330 Oklahoma City, OK 73126 (405) 232-5808 Telex 747-147 TWX 910-831-3177 Cable INCRYSTAL Nights - Weekends ( 405) 236-1818
VIDEO CORRECTOR
VC- 2000P PROFESSIONAL VIDEO CORRECTOR
Features: · Ideally suited to 1/2" and 3/4" videotape correction
· Useful as a remote camera control unit
·Automatic regeneration of all sync signals · Image enhancement and noise reduction · Fade to black control
· Four output video/stereo audio DA · Optional plug in RF Modulator
· Copyguard Stabilizer · Rack mountable
The VC- 2000P is an advanced video corrector at an extremely moderate price. The unit automatically generates new sync and blanking signals, both horizontal and vertical, plus new color burst signals. The insertion of new synchronizing signals plus back porch clamping permit the VC- 2000P to solve avariety of stability problems. Jitter, flicker, bending, and rolling are automatically corrected in most cases.
The " Bypass- Operate" switch allows instant comparison of processed and unprocessed signals. The " Stabilize" switch automatically removes copyguard encoding when activated. The " Indicate" switch activates a zebra stripe 100 IRE peak video indicator.
The zebra stripe indications in the picture permit unskilled operators to set the video level correctly without special test equipment.
The " Video Level," color " Level," and " Phase" ( color hue) allow the correct setting of these parameters, even on video shot in low light. These controls are a great aid in matching scenes with different brightness, contrast, color, and hue when editing video tapes.
When used as a remote camera control unit, the level and phase controls make camera matching and correct setup very practical.
The " Noise Level" control aids in removing grainy background noise. The enhancement " Level" control provides pleasing and often dramatic improvement to picture sharpness and clarity. The two controls together eliminate much of the degradation that occurs when duplicating video tapes.
The enhancement " Position" and " Normal/Split" switch give asplit screen presentation of the picture with the top half enhanced and the bottom half not enhanced. The " Position" control moves the split up
and down to permit a close, instant analysis of the improvements gained by enhancement. The signal may even be recorded this way so that the same analysis can be performed on the playback of the test recording.
The " Fade" control permits fade to black. an especially useful effect in editing and remote camera control. When fully faded to black proper sync, burst, and setup level are maintained at the video outputs.
The " Setup" control is ascrewdriver adjustment to allow correction of signals with non-standard black levels. Internally the VC- 2000P has horizontal and vertical blanking width adjustments.
The VC- 2000P also has abuilt-in 4output video distribution amplifier with a4 output stereo audio distribution amp.
Specifications:
Bandwidth:
S/N Ratio: S/N Improvement- Luminance: Tilt: Differential Gain: Differential Phase: Video Gain: Chroma Gain: Burst Phase ( Hue) Range: Enhance Gain: Setup Control Range: Number of Outputs: Isolation Between Outputs: Operating Temperature: RF Channels ( with optional RF): Connectors Used: Power Requirement: Dimensions: Shipping Weight: Accessories Included:
Ordering Information: For optional RF modulator, order model RFC- 34.
5MHz, - 1-3dB 60dB Up to 6dB with " Noise Level" Lass than 1% 1 1/2% 1 1/2° 0% to 300% of input level 50% to 150% of input level 130°1 ± 65°) 14dB at 2MHz -15, + 201RE from 7.51RE
4video, 4stereo audio 40dB video, 60dB audio + 10°C to + 50°C Channels 3 and 4, switchable Video-BNC, Audio- RCA, RF -F 117VAC, 60Hz, 9watts 17"W x 1-3/4"H x 12-3/4"D 11 lbs. Rack mount hardware
$695.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 85
ICM VIDEO
A DIVISION OF INTERNATIONAL CRYSTAL MFG. COMPANY, INC. 10 N. Lee
P.O. Box 26330 Oklahoma City, OK 73126 (405) 232-5808 Telex 747-147 TWX 910-831-3177 Cable INCRYSTAL Nights -- Weekends ( 405) 236-1818
VIDEO PROCESSORS
VC- 2500P AUTOMATIC VIDEO PROCESSOR
· Ideal for use where unattended, automatic video correction is needed
· Automatic level adjustment of video signal
· Automatically regenerates synchronizing signals
· Clamp circuit removes hum and flicker
· Four video and audio outputs · Available in NTSC ( American) or
PAL ( European) models
· Ideal for driving RF modulators · Video tape duplicating
VC- 2500P
Ideal for applications where it is necessary to provide technically correct levels and stable video at all times, automatically and unattended. Corrects most of the stability problems encountered with video. Problems ( e.g. jitter, satellite receiver flicker, bending and rolling) are corrected automatically. When the AGC circuit is switched on, the processor samples incoming video sync level and uses that reference to set video level to the correct standard of 1volt peak to peak into 75 ohms
automatically. The " Stabilize" switch automatically solves all videotape
copyguard problems when switched on. Additionally built-in is one input, four outputs audio distribution amplifier and aone input, four corrected outputs video distribution amplifier.
VC- 2500P Dimensions: 17"VV x13/4 "H x12 3/4"D
VC- 2500P
$495.00
VE -200C
VE -200C VIDEO ENHANCER
Features
· Connects to standard TV sets ( with optional RF modulator)
· Automatic regeneration of all sync signals
· Copyguard stabilizer · Four audio and video outputs · Image enhancement and noise
reduction · Fade to black capability · Available in NTSC ( American)
The VE -200C is an advanced video processor that uses the same technical processes for the video signal that expensive commercial
processors use. This process of
regenerating to proper standards all the video synchronizing signals will automatically correct most of the technical problems encountered when dealing with video. Stability problems such as jitter, flicker, bending, rolling and loss of color are automatically corrected. The "Stabilize" switch automatically solves copyguard problems when activated. Additionally, the front panel controls permit correct adjustment and consistency in contrast, brightness, color and hue on all signals.
VE -200C Dimensions:
11
x13/4' ' H x91/2 "D
VE -200C
$550.00
VT-86
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Ave. Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
VTN-110A Modular Signal Distribution Amplifier
· Standard 19" rack mount- only 4" high · Hybrid Integrated Circuit Design for stable and reliable operation · Plug-in modules for VDA, PDA, and EQA · Up to ten modules may be utilized · For each module: one input (looping), four outputs · Low power consumption ( 65 to 150 ma per module) · Standard BNC-type connectors PLUG-IN MODULES VDA-VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMP SDA-PULSE DISTRIBUTION AMP VEQ-VIDEO EQUALIZER
'UM 11 tIII IIll
SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
' »e·ef.:Z'
,
tstattattnittittuttintattitaattatiottnatatittaltitialttla vTN-1.1°A
sr
4 4
VDA 104A ·Single IC construction ·One input, four outputs ·DC coupled for good LF
response
ZRC-101A Power Supply ·Two amp outputs ·AC input ± 10%
SDA 104A ·High speed IC construc-
tion ·One input, four outputs ·Input level: 1or 4volts
VEQ 106A ·Cable compensation to
750 feet ·Response to 7MHz within
0.5dB ·Noise better than 1.0mV
.44011
III re '14
ZIRE-101A Regulator ·0.5 amp output ·Current limit circuit ·Supplies power for up to
five modules
Specifications:
Ambient Temperature Input lmpedence Differential Gain Differential Phase Response Output lmpedence Power Requirement Hum Crosstalk
VDA 10'C to 50°C
4KQ + -±0.15% ±0.15° 10MHz (- 0.2dB)
75Q -±10V ( 75ma) 5mV or less -40dB @ 4MHz
Noise Rise Time
Overshoot
0.5mV or less pp 0.035,4sec.
(0.03psec. input) Within 1%
Sag
Within 1%
SDA 10°C to 50°C
4KQ +
754 ±10V (65ma)
-60dB -46dB 0.5mV pp 0.1±0.03psec. Within 1%
Within 1%
VEQ 0°C to 45°C
4KQ + Within 1%
1° 8MHz (- 1dB)
75Q ±10V ( 150ma)
lmV -54dB @ 100KHz
-40dB @ 3MHz lmV pp
0.0714sec. or less @ 250KHz
Less than 3% @ 11MHz or less
Less than 10% @ 11MHz or more Within 1%
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Vr-87
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
UNIVERSAL SERIAL DATA READER
7100 UNIVERSAL SERIAL DATA READER The lack of areliable method of monitoring serial interface data is amajor problem in troubleshooting complex multi- processor control systems.
A solution to this problem is the Image Video UNIVERSAL SERIAL DATA READER ( U.S.D.R.). The U.S.D.R. is capable of reading and displaying serial data in real time by simply looping into the suspected problem line. The unit is set to the predefined parameters of that line and that data may be viewed in either hexadecimal or binary format as preferred. Triggering is valid on detection of a unique word ( HEX byte) and may be checksum qualified if necessary.
Operation
Three operational modes are alternately selected by the MODE key.
Mode 1 Setup
1-1 1-1
MODE
I
lo
n
LI
MODE 1
MODE 1 causes the displayed setup data to be latched into the U. S.D.R.'s control routine.
The required hexadecimal ( unique word) trigger byte is entered by pressing the TRIG key followed by two digits.
A requirement when reading checksum qualified data is the frame length byte. Press the LEN key and enter the number of bytes per frame ( including the unique word and checksum bytes). For operator convenience this number is expressed in decimal format, three to ninety-nine being valid.
The offset byte is used to set the KEY byte ( starting point for the data display). Press the OFFSET key and enter the number of bytes offset from the trigger byte. Again this number is expressed in decimal format, zero to the frame length being valid.
MODE 2 Hex Status
This mode displays the hexadecimal status of four bytes of data from the line with the KEY byte appearing in readouts seven and six and KEY + 1, KEY + 2, KEY + 3bytes appearing in readouts five through zero respectively. The most significant nibble appears in the lefthand display of each of the four pairs. For proper interpretation of the display none of the error tallies should be on.
MODE 3 Binary Status
Mode 3shows the binary status of one byte of data from the line at the KEY byte. The eight displays show the status of the eight bits of the KEY byte with the most significant bit appearing in readout seven and the least significant bit in readout zero. For proper interpretation of the display none of the error tallies should be on.
Error Indication
Four error tallies are provided to alert the operator to possible false data detection; FRAME error, OVERRUN error, PARITY error, and CHECKSUM error. DIP switches select 0 Eparity, inhibit parity, and select one of eight baud rates.
VT-88
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1 H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
Control Panel Features
·Coax Cable Control Line ·Audio Cable Control Line Optional · Multipanels per Line · Large selection of control panel configurations ·Audio and Video may be selected married or unmarried on some
panels · Multilevel unmarried control panels available · Standard 8 bit word serial communications ·Alpha numeric entry and display available on some panels ·Single or multi destination control panels available on some models ·Will operate the switcher up to 2000 feet using coax · Multi source electronic components used, no hybrids, custom I.C.'s
or mask programmable ROMs ·Custom panel requirements easily accommodated · Milled plate aluminum used on front panels ·All front panels are brushed, deep etched and clear anodized · Legends custom engraved and filled black
ROUTING SWITCHER CONTROL PANELS
·10 -r
CP-4/3 CONTROL PANEL
IV CP-3/1 Single thumbwheel control panel with access to all inputs on one destination. Complete with TAKE pushbutton and 7- segment LED status readout. Simultaneous audio and video selection. Desk top mounted box. IV CP-4/X Rack mounted control panel. Thumbwheel input selection with TAKE pushbutton and numeric status display. Simultaneous audio and video selection. A number ( 1through 9) substituted for X indicates the total number of destinations the panel controls. Separate thumbwheel selection and status readout for each destination.
CP-1 DESK TOP PANEL
IV CP-1/X
The CP-1/X is either afull matrix or restricted Keypad control panel. The " X" designation indicates full matrix control panel. If a digit is substituted for " X" then this digit identifies the total number of destinations which the panel controls. These destinations must be specified when ordering, but may be changed later by recoding a PROM. The panel is complete with 7 segment LED readouts for BUSS, VIDEO PRESET, AUDIO PRESET, VIDEO STATUS and AUDIO STATUS. Selection of new source may be 1 of 4 modes; Audio follow Video, Audio only, Video only or Audio/Video unmarried. The unit is built in a desk top configuration.
IV CP-5/X Shadow pushbuttons with gold contacts and relegendable caps. Mounted in a brushed anodized aluminum panel. Pushbuttons available in multiples of 10 to a maximum of 50.
IV CP-6/X Same as CP-5/X but with Clare Pendar S180 series illuminated pushbuttons.
IV CP-7 Salvo panel capable of 10 presets. MASTER TAKE pushbutton for simultaneous take of preset inputs. Status, and preset numeric displays. Simultaneous or separate audio and video.
IV CP-7/C Same as IV CP-7 but with coded ( alphanumeric) keypad.
IV CP-1/CX This panel is similar to the CP-1/X, except the Keypad is coded for alpha input selection instead of numeric.
ill Mil MI MI
u
CP-8/4 CONTROL PANEL
IV CP-1/XK
This panel is similar to the CP-1/X, except the TAKE function is disabled by the use of a lock and key.
IV CP-1/CXK
This panel is similar to the CP-1 / Xand also includes the features of the
CP-1/CX and the CP-1/XK.
*ette"e"t,,,%_lrat--
to r
go go
· to.i.e
CP-2 RACK MOUNT PANEL
The CP2/X, XK, CX, CXK, are similar to the CP-1 but rack mounted. In
addition, the CP-2 Panel can be restricted to any nine destinations, selected by DIP switches ( provided) or may control the full matrix.
IV CP-8/4 Controls one destination only. Has four overrides and four breakaway levels. Alphanumeric thumbwneel selection and alphanumeric display.
IV CP-9/1, IV CP-9/2 Similar to IV CP-4/1, IV CP-4/2 but with alphanumeric thumbwheel and numeric status display
IV CP-10 Alpha thumbwheel with unmarried audio- video operation. Six overrides and numeric status. Single destination control.
IV CP-11 Six destination control panel. Married audio/video operation only. Alphanumeric display. Preset function and alpha coded keypad.
IV CP-12 Alphanumeric coded keypad and status display. Six overrides. Simultaneous audio/video, or separate audio and video functions.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-89
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
6000 Broadcast Routing Switcher
Custom Control Panel
BROADCAST ROUTING SWITCHERS
Features
· Solid state vertical interval switching. · Compact expandable modular construction
used throughout. · Excellent video and audio specifications for
full color broadcast use. · Video only, audio only, audio follow married
or unmarried control available. · Crosspoint retention during power interrup-
tion optional. · Tally LED on each video crosspoint indicates
exact switcher status at all times. · Conservatively rated, overload protected
power supplies for trouble free operation. · One pushbutton per crosspoint or thumb-
wheel control panels available.
Description
The 6000 Series Switchers are specifically designed for small and medium audio/video routing systems. These versatile switchers are ideally suited as high quality electronic patch panels, delegate switchers or in any application where remote controlled switching is needed. Compact 5x 1or 10 x1crosspoint modules plug directly into the motherboard assembly which also accommodates the input and output amplifier modules. This flexible configuration allows up to 24 outputs per 19- inch rack.
F
Switcher Matrices
ELECTRICAL _
VIDEO
Input Sepal Level
pout Impedance deturn Loss Number el Inputs
Output Level Nurnbescf Outputs Per Bus mpedarce Notation
Level Difference DC on Output Frequency ',legume°
HLrr,
Clain
Crain Ranbe
tine Tilt
leid Tilt
Differential Gain ¡ El
APL,
Differential Phase I'D-90Ar APL:
Switching Time
Swcching Tuning
Crosstalk
Noise (sus)
AUDIO
Input
Input Sigral Level
Inou, Impedance
Output Number at Outputs Per Bus impedancr F.rquenr u Response
Inta Harmonic OsIrrtion
Firer and Nome Gam G·osstalll
SPECIFICATIONS
1201240 V PMS · 10% 50/60HT
IV P- P &riding 75 ohms >46 db to 5 MHZ . As required
1 2
75 ohms :Tr 40 db to 5 MHZ
< <D5V .0 Idblo5MHZ . 1. · 5 db to TO MHZ 60 db below IV P- P
.Unity 1db
< 5% < 5% < 5%
< 5. 0 1 -· SEC Vertical hterval
60 clh to 358 MHZ
> 70 db below IV P·P
. 8 dbm nominal Briigong 60C ohms
Balanced
2 500 ohms Balanced
<3 5db 30 HZ 20 KHZ
< 5.. 30 HZ 20 KHZ di o 18 DBM >70 10 telow o 8 DBM
Unity > 7I) db rer IS KHZ
VT- 90
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
BROADCAST ROUTING SWITCHER
6010 10 X 1Self- Contained Broadcast Routing Switcher
Description:
The 6010 self contained switcher is ahigh quality 10 x1suitable for use throughout the television or radio plant, from production to monitoring applications. The flexible configuration and control system frees the Engineer from handbuilt or customized equipment procurement.
Configuration:
· Basic switcher is 10 x1, video only, mono or stereo audio only or AFV with mono or stereo audio in one rack unit.
· One or both audio channels may be replaced with time code or control bus. · Basic switcher may be expanded to 20 x1or more with additional 6010's and one control
interconnection. · Remote control via shielded audio pair may be factory installed or field installed later
(no soldering or adjustments required). · Tally is optionally available (one open collector per input). · Parallel BCD control optionally available for automation interface.
Features:
· Relegendable pushbuttons with gold contacts and LED indicators. · Two outputs per bus, video and audio. · Loop through video inputs. · Bridging audio inputs. · Vertical interval switching. · Hinged front panel for easy access to plug-in modules. · Low power consumption. · Second audio channel may be retrofitted. · All electronic switching.
f=-7·1000000000000(213rg: - 11
Rear Panel Facilities
0E00 Vile
4 F · tensoun control 47150e(-il ' lot bus e·tensese, S · · sout eco control 'Fs conneetur fi ' eeleo outputs 7 · ·· e edee spot loops
· Ewtêns.on .npyr 9 Fewer sretse
10. Fuse II Foster so70
Technical Specifications
Electrical Power
120/240VAC t 10%, 50/60Hz, 12VA
Video Input Input Signal Level Input Impedance Return Loss Number of Inputs
1VP.P Bridging 75ohms. Loop through
> 460b to 4.2MHz 10 + Extension
Video Output Level
1VP-P
Number of Outputs Impedance
2 75 ohms
Isolation
> 36db to 4.2MHz
Level Dofference
...
· 1%
Frequency Response
< 0.1cIb to 5MHz
+ 0...5db to 10MHz
Hum (P Pl.
65db below 1VP- P
Gain
Unity
Output Gain Range
ldb
Line Tilt
2%
Field Tilt Differential Gain ( 10-90% APL)
· 2% < 25%
Differential Phase ( 10.90% APL)
< 25%
Switching Timing
Vertical Interval
Crosstalk
60db to 4.2MHz
Noise ( RMS)
70c10 below 1VP- P
Audio Input
Input Signal Level
+ 8dbm nominal 24dbm MAX
Common Mode Rejection
· 60db at 60Hz
Input Impedance
· 20K Balanced
Number of Inputs
10 a Extension
Audio Output
Number of Outputs Impedance
2 . 600 ohms Balanced
Frequency Response
a 0.-3 db 20Hz 20KHz
Total Harmonic Distortion · 2% 20Hz.20KHz + 24c1brn
Maximum Output Level
......
+ 24dbm
Hum and Noise
· 78db below a litdbm
Gain
Unity
Gain Range
y 3clti
Crosstalk
.
> 70clb @ 20KHz
Physécol Dimensions Height Width
Depth Video connectors Audio connectors Remote control connectors
Tally connector
13/4" . 19 - Rackmoun:
15 - Including connectors BNC
D Sub- miniature 2-3 Pin DIN
D Sub-mIntature
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 91
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
BROADCAST ROUTING SWITCHER
6200 BROADCAST ROUTING SWITCHER
The 6200 Series Switchers are designed for medium to large Routing Systems and are available in any combination of video, audio and timecode/control ( SMPTE/ EBU,I 2) matrices.
Compact 10x1 crosspoint modules, input and output modules and control modules plug into a backplane assembly. This flexible configuration allows unlimited expansion.
A wide variety of microprocessor based control systems are available including button per crosspoint, X-Y, thumbwheel, keypad or combinations of these. All systems may be equipped with interrogation, numeric only or alphanumeric displays on the control panels, CRT status displays and rack mount alphanumeric displays.
· Expandable, modular construction · Separate or married control of video, audio or multiple
audio available
· Crosspoint retention during power interruption available ·Automatic switch to backup power supply available ·Tally indicators on all audio and video crosspoints for ease
of maintenance · Excellent video and audio specifications
·All bus related modules interchangeable-- no proms or DIP switches to change
· In-service maintenance disables only 10 crosspoints on one bus ( video) or two buses ( audio)
· Readily available components-- no custom LSI or hybrids · Parallel interface available for automation control · Extra audio or timecode matrices may be added at afuture
date without system modifications ·8 bit word format used in serial control system
SPECIFICATIONS: Electrical Power
120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Video
Input
Input Signal Level
1V P- P
Input Impedance
Bridging 75 ohms
Return Loss
Greater than 46 dB to 5MHz
Number of Inputs Unlimited expansion
Output
Level
1V P- P
Number of Outputs per Bus
2
Impedance Isolation
75 ohms Greater than 40 dB to 5MHz
Level Difference
Less than 1%
Frequency Response
Less than 0.1 dB to 5MHz
Hum
+0, -. 5dB to 10 MHz 60 dB below 1V P- P
Gain
Unity
Gain Range
- 1 dB
Line Tilt
Less than . 25%
Field Tilt
Less than . 25%
VIDEO MATRIX
AUDIO MATRIX
Differential Gain ( 10-90% APL)
Less than . 25°
Differential Phase ( 10-90% APL)
Less than . 25°
Switching Timing
Vertical Interval
Crosstalk
Greater than 60 dB to 4.2 MHz
Noise ( RMS)
Greater thar 70 dB below 1V P- P
Path Length Differential
+ /- 1degree
Audio
Input
Input Signal Level + 8dBm nominal, + 24 dBm MAX
Input Impedance
Greater thar 30K Balanced
Common Mode Rejection Output
Greater than 60 dB at 60 Hz
Number of Outputs per Bus
2
Impedance Frequency Response
600 ohms -2 /- 2% Balanced + 0, -. 3dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Total Harmonic Distortion . Less than . 02% 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
+ 18dBm Less than . 2% 20 Hz to 20 kHz, + 24 dBm
Hum and Noise
Greater than 80 dB below + 8dBm
Output Gain Range
. Unity + 3 dB
Crosstalk
Greater than 73dB at 15 kHz
VT- 92
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
ROUTING SWITCHER
9100 SERIES ROUTING SWITCHER
FEATURES
Video
·Outputs of individual 16 x4cards are disabled when not required so that crosstalk for 256 x256 is same as for 16 x1
·All module interconnections are made via 75 ohms coax for controlled transmission characteristics
·System is easily timed because of short internal bus systems ·Vertical interval switching controlled by asingle feed of sync or
composite video to the controller ·All plug-in boards have overcurrent protection so that ashort
circuit failure only affects the board concerned ·All addressed boards ( i.e. crosspoints and controller) identify their
position in the matrix by backplane wiring -- no adjustments or prom changing required ·Output cable equalization · Input cable equalization ·True confidence tally
Audio
· Balanced throughout -- drivers, crosspoints, intermodule transmission lines and outputs
· + 24dBm input and output levels with 600 ohms output impedance ·50 ohms output impedance optional ·Audio- follow- video or full breakaway of audio/time code · Multiple level audio available ·Extended bandwidth audio ( 100k Hz) ·Click/transient free switching ·Over current protection ·True confidence tally
Control
·Accommodate all 6100/6200 series control panel types and options ·Battery retention of status during power fail ( in controller module)
Power
·Modular plug-in power supplies · Power supply backup system with built-in failure alarm system,
continuous operation with one failed supply ·Simple, rugged, fan- cooled supplies offer reliable operation ·Over- temperature protection/alarm system prevents failure of
system due to cooling failure
A new generation of routing switchers designed for medium to large routing systems. Its modular construction facilitates easy expansion up to 256 inputs with an unlimited number of outputs. Any combination of video, audio, and time code matrices are available.
All controls are microprocessor based with processors located in both the control panels and the matrix controller. Battery retention of status during power failure is provided and control panels are available in button per crosspoint. X-Y, thumbwheel, keypad, or combinations of these. RS232 and IEEE-488 control ports can be supplied when computer interface is desired.
Video Configuration Input Distribution Amplifiers restore DC and provide input cable equalization up to 1000 feet. The input feed is then split into four 75 ohm outputs. 75 ohm coaxial cable is used for all inter- module connections. This provides controlled transmission characteristics.
MODEL 9100
ita t. ua
zra tat MID Mt Sie
R.
MO Ian
60, lilt
;,."'n(411i
tut
R.
VIDEO CROSSPOINT
FRAME
AUDIO CROSSPOINT
FRAME
CONTROL PANEL
Each video crosspoint frame is arranged in a 16- input by 64- output format. A crosspoint frame consists of sixteen 16 x4cards each with output buffers for 75 ohm cable. There is also a control buffer card. All addressed crosspoint cards identify their position in the matrix by backplane wiring thus eliminating DIP switch adjustments or PROM changing. Crosspoint cards may be removed and reinserted without switching off the system.
The combiner frame cons:sts of sixteen 16 x1combiner cards. This, in conjunction with the crosspoint frames, makes up a 256 x 16 format. Output equalization adjustment is provided for up to 1000 feet of cable.
Audio Configuration
Each audio crosspoint frame consists of two 16- input buffer cards which drive sixteen 32 x8crosspoint cards. This results in a32 x128 frame format. There is also a control card in each frame for interfacing to the microprocessor controller. Differential input circuitry provides 82dB of common mode rejection at 60Hz.
The audio combiner cards each contain two 8 x 1combiners. The frame consists of sixteen combiner cards to accommodate expansion up to 256 inputs by an un imited number of outputs. Extended audio bandwidth ( 100kHz) allows use of time code channels.
Control Configuration
Control panels communicate with asystem controller. The switcher modules are then controlled by a parallel control bus via the control card in each frame. Redundant control is possible by paralleling two control modules on the control bus in a master/slave configuration.
A wide variety of microprocessor based control systems are available including button per crosspoint, X-Y, thumbwheel, keypad, or combinations of these. All systems may be equipped with interrogation,
numeric only or alphanumeric display on the control panels, CRT status displays, and rack mount alphanumeric displays.
Image V deo designs control panels to meet the requirements of the particular customer. We can custom design one for your special application.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical
Power
Video
Input Input Signal Level
Input Impedance Return Loss Number of Inputs
120/240 VAC 50/60Hz
1V RP Bridging 75ohms > 46db to 5MHz
256
Output
Level
IV RP
Number of Outputs per Bus
2
Impedance
75 ohms
Isolation
> 40db to 5MHz
Level Difference
< 1°.
Frequency Response
Hum Gain Gain Range Line Tilt Field Tilt
Differential Gain ( 1090% APL) Differential Phase ( 10-90°0 APL) Switching Timing Crosstalk NoiseIRMS) Path Length Differential
< 0 idb to 5MHz o 0 500 to 10MHz
8.0db below IV RP Unity ·lob
< 25.. < 25",
Audio
Input Input Signa Level Input Impedance
Commor Mode Rejection
+ 24dbm MAX > 30K Balanced
> 82db at 60Hz
Output Number uf Outputs per Bus Impedance
3 600 ohms · 2°4 Balanced
< 25'
Freq,renc yRrponse
o 0.- 3db 20Hz to 20KHz
25°
Total Harmoric Drstortion < 02°. 20Hz to 20KHz. 18dbm
Vertical Interval
< 2". 20Hz to 20KHz, + 24dbm
60ab to 42MHz
Max Signal'Noise Ratio
> 96db
> ° Odb oolow IV RP
Output Gain Range
Unity · 3db
·1degree
Crosstalk
> 75db rrr, 15KHz
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-93
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
4100 Machine Assignment System
· Handles up to 160 Machines · Up to 24 Control Panels · Up to 25 Machines per Panel · Up to 35 levels of switching · Master start of preset functions · Tally of Remote/Local control · Communication via coaxial cable · Plug-in modules for flexibility and ' asy maintenance · Status generator and printer facility
System Controller
The organization is built around the System Controller which is made up of two sections; the Assignment Controller, and the Machine Controller. Each section contains a microprocessor and they communicate with each other via a multi- conductor cable in parallel format.
The Assignment panels all contain a microprocessor and communicate with the Assignment Controller via coaxial cable. The Assignment Controller handles the assignment of control panels and machine interfaces. The control panels also all have a microprocessor and communicate with the Machine Controller via coaxial cable. The Machine Controller handles communications between the control panels and the machine interfaces.
Machine Assignment Panel
The machine assignment panel permits the assignment of any control panel to control any machine ( VTR, Telecine) through the machine interface unit. It effectively interconnects the various control panels and the machine interfaces. Assignment is made by simply entering the machine number and then the control panel number. Pressing ASSIGN completes the assignment. A machine cannot be assigned to more than one control panel. The communications link between a machine and a control panel is broken by entering the machine number and pressing CANCEL. The machine and control panel numbers are three characters and do not have to be in any specific order.
Machine Interface
The machine interface is atwo rack unit assembly capable of remotely controlling the functions of amachine. It consists of five Relay Tally Boards, a DIP Switch Board, a Line Driver Tally Board, and a Microprocessor Board. Each Relay Tally Board is capable of seven levels of relays and seven return tallies. Pushbutton functions, e.g. Fastforward, are associated with each relay. The Microprocessor Board communicates with the outside world and operates the relays etc. The DIP Switch Board has DIP Switches for machine number assignment, relay close time, and baud rate etc. The Line Driver Tally Board controls the remote tallies and confirms the presence of the power supplies. Five 38- pin connectors at the rear of the frame interfaces between the relay boards and the actual machines being controlled. VTR interfaces normally consist of 7 levels of control and Telecines normally have 21 levels. However, up to 35 levels may be controlled. The control is buffered via floating ( form Ctype) relay contacts and the tally from the machine with an optical isolator.
MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEMS
Ile
ntic,
nT1.1 er) tMi rl Ern
gent
Eli NM
Yet
r i n
1111 I
M
IJ
IN
re, VTR as
U .htct v«
TELECINE F
8111
Ent5
11.
EMI Er
err er-
Machine Assignment Panel
Machine Assignment System
Control Panel
This desk mount panel provides control of the machines assigned to it. The number of machines to be controlled varies depending on specific customer requirements. The standard configuration is 3VTRs with 7 levels of control and 2Telecines with 21 levels of control each. Special control panels with up to 25 machines and 35 functions per machine may be specially ordered. A three character alphanumeric display shows which machine is assigned to the bus. The machine numbers do not have to follow any specific order and there can be atotal of 160 machines in asystem. The numbers assigned to the machines should be specified at the time of ordering. A blank machine number indicates that no machine is assigned. Operations may be preset on all of the busses of the control panel and with one button, the MASTER START, all the selected functions will be taken. Functions are preset by holding down the PRESET button and depressing the desired functions. Preset functions can be cleared by holding down the PRESET button and depressing the function button again. Presets can also be clearea when they are initiated by the MASTER START button. A coaxial cable is used to interconnect the control panel and the System Controller. Clare Pendar or Shadow type pushbuttons are available.
VT- 94
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
AUTOMATED MASTER CONTROL-- MODEL 8100
Off The Shelf Broadcast Automation
Image Video now offers the world's first really practical automated master control system for broadcast applications.
The System is built around two components-- afull capability master control Ion- air) switcher with the most advanced features in the industry, and a state-of-the-art, plug-in automation system. The Automation Package has been kept to aminimal size with full function through the use of aZ-80 4 microprocessor. The Automation System simply plugs into the switcher matrix -- no further hardware is required. So the master control switcher can be bought and used manually until volume makes the Automation System desirable.
The Design is based on six years experience in producing custom systems for major television and radio stations world-wide. All of the most advanced functions to date have been incorporated-- you no longer have to sacrifice one function to get another. And because the Image Video Automation System is based on proven engineering, standard components and off the shelf hardware, your total package price is extremely competitive with units offering far less capability.
The System can interface with business systems for direct entry of accounting, traffic and other functions. Floppy discs are used for storage of daily programming and can be programmed with standard equipment off-line. A full 24 hours' events can be handled.
A printer is easily connected and back up processor is available.
Highlight Features:
· Electronic Digital Clock Timer indicates real time, elapsed time and countdown in 12 or 24 hour time modes. Provides for automatic time freeze as program events occur
·Automatic Pre Roll allows for stabilization of related equipment with adjustment increments of . 01 seconds to 10 seconds maximum for
each of the 30 inputs. Individual pre roll settings are achieved via a touch pad and protected against power loss.
·4 Audio/Video Transition Modes ·Adjustable Transition Rates
PC,M
PGNI
· Start Facility on all Audio Inputs Available
·40 Audio and 30 Video Inputs
·Audio/Video Married or Separate Operation
· Manual Fader Control
· Emergency Fade to Black for Video and Audio
·Audio and Video Preview Bus
·Separate Key Input Bus
·Colour Defeat Function · Border Generator · Matte Generator and Background Generator
TRANSITIONS
Rates adjustable 1 2 4 6 8 1 2. 3 o, A seconds
·5 Input Key Source Select and Monochrome Keyer
· 10 Separate Audio Inputs
· Continuously Variable Audio Over/Under Ratio
·Audio Level Correction Facility
·Comprehensive Audio Monitoring Facilities
·48K of Ram for Data Storage
· 16K of ROM for Program Storage
·Dual 8" Floppy Discs for Off- Line Storage
·CRT Terminal For Data Entry and Status Display
·Line Printer for " As Aired Log" Available
·Optional 2nd CRT Entry and Display System and a Stand Alone Entry Disc Package
Z-80 is a registered trademark of Zilog Corporation
MASTER CONTROL
AUDIO FUNCTIONAL
· 'a
PST
V V
(ii9)¢.º Ç7 V
VIDEO SO0PCF
FUNCTIONAL
Q2.9 V
1>-
«AO ...IFUTS Vg."Kr
(e_se
·
IIACP4010.1, SINEW.
V
V
Dr
.,®c,1 =Mr rg,1U" ,
F·OPOSIT AST«·00.1
C't
AAAAA OA
122:7
On MOP TOP Os/ buS au · OuT
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-95
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
MASTER CONTROL
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1 H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
MODEL 8200 FEATURES
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK TIMER Indicates real time, elapsed time, and countdown in 12 or 24 hour time modes. Provides for automatic time freeze as programme video events occur. Initiates transition to new source.
AUTOMATIC PRE- ROLL Allows for stabilization of related equipment with adjustment increments of . 01 seconds to 10 seconds maximum for each of 30 inputs.
4 AUDIO/VIDEO TRANSITION RATES (PROM based)
Crossover, V- Fade, Cut- down and fade- up, fade down and cut-up.
START FACILITY ON ALL AUDIO INPUTS AVAILABLE
30 AUDIO/VIDEO INPUTS PLUS BLACK, BACKGROUND, SILENCE, and Audio Follow pushbutton.
5 DSK SOURCES AND LUMINANCE KEYER
4 VIDEO MONITOR INPUTS
SEPARATE DSK INPUT BUS
EMERGENCY FADE- TO- BLACK and SILENCE
BORDER GENERATOR Matte, outline, border, drop shadow, key invert, border white, and fast or slow mix.
12 SEPARATE AUDIO/AUDIO OVER/PRELISTEN INPUTS
10 AUDIO MONITOR INPUTS
PPM METERS FOR AUDIO MONITOR AND PROGRAM LEVEL ( PAL only)
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE ( SLIDER) AUDIO OVER/UNDER RATIO
AUDIO LEVEL CORRECTION FACILITY
COMPREHENSIVE AUDIO MONITORING FACILITY
ANNOUNCEMENT LEVEL CONTROL
REHEARSAL MODE
Allows production setup without affecting on- air program
12 PATTERNS AVAILABLE ON PATTERN SELECTOR ( PAL only)
RGB KEYER ( PAL only)
FULLY COMPUTERIZED SYSTEM Permits increased reliability with four separate microprocessor control with individual memories.
Separate electronics and control systems for preset and program. System is functional even if panel control of the program bus fails; events can be taken on air by manual fader or Take pushbutton.
COMPUTER INTERFACE AVAILABLE For control and monitoring devices e.g. another control panel, log printer, modem for remote control ( telephone initiated preset selection and transition etc.), machine control.
SELF- DIAGNOSTICS BY MICROPROCESSORS
PROGRAMMABLE MODES OF TAKE OPERATION
PROGRAMMABLE MODES OF AUDIO OPERATION
STEREO AUDIO OPTIONALLY AVAILABLE
INTELLIGENT START-UP AFTER POWER FAILURE
Maintains status after short power failure. Comes up black and silence after long power failure.
Roo
--
P/V BUS
PST BUS
AGM BUS
AUX BUS
,-MONITOR SELECT--,
YYYY
STATION BLACK
VIDEO INPUTS
8200 AUDIO FUNCTIONAL SEPARATE
,--AuD,0 INPUTS--, i2
FiiiIP/V OUT
PST OUT
P/L BUS A/0 PST A/0 Poe
MONITOR OuT
VU MONITOR
8200 VIDEO FUNCTIONAL
KEY SOURCE
2
3
4
L4
BACKGROUND GENERATOR
OFF MR INPUT
0OFF MR OUTPUT
AUDIO Pea
Feez LEVEL Et
CORRECTION
° PGMOUT
°M
°11T
o VIDEO 0/P MONITOR KEY SELECT MONITOR
BUS
BPGM us
AUX BUS
P/v OUT
PGM MONITOR
VIDEO DELAY
BORDER GENERATOR
EMERGENCY FADE TO
BLACK
OUT
TRANSIT ION GENERATOR
MONITOR O PST BUS
I>
e l AUR OUT
Electrical Power Video Number of Inputs Input Signal Level Imput Impedance Differential Gain Differential Phase Crosstalk
Frequency Response Signal to Noise Ratio Electronics Frame
120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz
10%,
30 ( standard) 1V p- pComposite Bridging 75 Ohms 1%, 10 to 90% APL 1°,10 to 90% APL -56db c subcarrier · all imputs and buses hostile except input and bus under test.
± 0.1 dB to 5MHz ± 0.3 dB to 8MHz
70 dB rms to 1V p- p 21 rack units
Audio Number of Inputs Input Signal Level
Input Impedance Frequency Response Harmonic Distortion Crosstalk Signal to Noise Ratio
Monitor Amplifier
30 Standard, 12 Separate + 8dBm nominal + 18 dBm test + 24 dBm maximum 30K balanced
± 0.5 dB, 20 Hz to 20KHz
0.1% at + 18 dBm 70 dB to 15KHz
Better than -90 dB relative to + 18 dBm 10W output
VT- 96
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IMAGE VIDEO, LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1 H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
MONITORING PANELS
7105 Silence Monitor
Features
· Expandable two to ten channels in single rack unit enclosure · Immediate alarm warning indicator ·Audible and visual alarm ( after preset time lapse) · Remote alarm outputs ·Cancelling/non-cancelling resettable audible alarm ·Simple setup procedure
· Low cost · 110/220V operation
Specifications
Number of
Detectors Multiples of 2, up to 10 max
Audio Input
Impedance
600 ohms balanced, bridging
Acceptable
Input Level
+24dBm to -68dBm
Trip Threshold
Range Adjustable from - 20dBm through -68dBm
Detection to Alarm
Time Delay
0 sec through 2 mins, 35 sec in 5 sec increments
Remote Alarm
Outputs
1per detector, Open- collector active low
150mA, 30V max
Size
1-3/4" high, 19" wide, 15" deep
VMP-1 Voltage Monitor Panel
SUMS
4111.
· R
"Ta'w
The Image Video Audio Silence Monitor automatically monitors up to ten audio inputs and issues audible and visual alarms if any input falls below a preset level. It is a compact, low cost, single rack unit product incorporating many unique features and is particularly suited for use in isolated, non- supervised areas.
Operation Each silence detector channel car be set to trip at any level from -20dBm through - 68dBm. Individual alarm delays are switch settable from 0 seconds through 2 minutes, 35 seconds. As the audio level falls below the detector threshold, the amber warning LED of the channel lights. If this condition persists for a period determined by that channel's delay setting, the red alarm LED lights, the remote output goes low and an audible warning is issued.
Remote alarm outputs are provided for each channel. These outputs will sink up to 150mA at up to 30V and are open- collector, active- low enable. They may be used for avariety of purposes as the customer desires. The remote alarms may be individually disabled.
The audible alarm can be manual'y reset. However, a simple strap feature permits automatic reset when the alarm disappears. Conversely, the automatic reset can be inhibited so that the operator will know that silence occurred when no one was in attendance.
The Image Video Voltage Monitor is a microprocessor based unit capable of monitoring up to 128 individual D.C. voltage sources both continuously and automatically. Circuitry is digital throughout, eliminating the need for adjustment and improving reliability.
Alarm tolerances are set via asoftware ( PROM) adjustment and may contain both upper and lower limits. A channel failure is announced through a local sonic alarm and silenced with a pushbutton. Both alarm and reset functions are remoted through a rear panel connector.
The standard unit is equipped with LED type seven segment displays, indicating channel number and voltage. Display rate is adjusted by a front panel control.
Several enhancements are available as factory installed options.
· Monitors up to 129 DC voltages · Digital circuitry throughout ·Adjustable display rate · Software adjusted alarm tolerances ·Continuous and automatic monitoring
Options -01 Basic unit c/w AC power supply, local alarm and remote alarm
connectors, seven segment LED display -02 Eight character alphanumeric display c/w supporting circuitry. -03 Battery backup for above -04 Printer dump circuitry to allow hard copy of information
displayed -05 CRT interface to continuously display data on 8W monitor
Operation
Normal ( Standby) Mode. In this mode, the DISPLAY RATE control is rotated fully CCW and CHANNEL and VOLTAGE displays are blanked. The green STBY lamp indicates that the microprocessor is scanning all of the channels.
Alarm Mode. If for any reason an input voltage falls outside its tolerance range, the red displays illuminate indicating the channel that failed and its present voltage. Simultaneously the remote and local alarms are switched on. If more than one channel failure exists each faulty channel is displayed in turn at afixed rate which may be overridden by the DISPLAY RATE control.
The audible alarm can be cancelled at any time by the ALARM RESET pushbutton, however, the displays will remain active until a no-fault condition is restored.
Examine Mode. The Voltage Monitor may also be used as a maintenance tool, even if no alarms are present. A slight CW rotation of the DISPLAY RATE control allows the displayed channel's voltage to be shown permanently. A further CW rotation allows the channels to be sequentially stepped at avariable rate. It should be noted that at all times, no matter what operational mode is selected, ALL channel voltages are ALWAYS MEASURED.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 97
IMAGE VIDEO LTD.
705 Progress Ave., Unit 46 Scarborough, Ont., Canada M1 H 2X1 (416) 438-3940 Telex 065-25392
AUDIO/VIDEO COMPONENTS
10
MODEL 7001C
MODEL 7001C -- DUAL VIDEO MIX AMP
Features ·Two separate video mixing amplifiers housed in asingle rack unit · Remote control panel · Mix amps may be independently operated or cascaded ·Operates on synchronous video source -- no external sync
requirements ·Control and tally output on same connector on rear panel ·Standard AUTO- MIX permits variable rate and automatic mix
on amp 1 · Easily conformed to existing system ·Audio- follow- video option available ·Manual fader on amp 2
The Dual Video Mix Amp -- Model 7001C incorporates two independent video mixing amplifiers housed in a single rack unit and controlled from a remote panel.
The Model 7001C meets all broadcast specifications and is ideal for use in downstream title mixing and A / B mixing applications.
'e.ev (e.
-
DOWNSTREAM TITLE MIXING WITH FADE TO BLACK
SoGNAL rm. Kr/
A/8 MIX WITH FADE TO BLACK
°kW
.020
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Video Inputs
Four, 1V p- p, 75 ohms terminating
Video Outputs
Four, 1V p- p, ( 2outputs per amp)
Frequency Response + 0.2dB to 5MHz, ± 0.5dB to 8MHz
Diff. Phase
< 1.5° ( 10-90% APL)
Diff. Gain
< 1.5° ( 10-90% APL)
Crosstalk
> 55dB at 3.58MHz
Tilt ( Vert Er Horiz)
< 1%
Signal to Noise
> 60dB
Path Length
25ns ( through one amplifier)
Path Length Differential
< 1°
Tally Output
Open Collector pull down
Electrical
117/230V, 50/60Hz
Electronics Frame
1rack unit ( 1-3/4" x19" x10")
Control Panel
7" x3" x3-1/2"
Video Connector
BNC
Control and Tally Connector
D- Sub miniature
MODEL 7707 -- UNIVERSAL UNDER MONITOR DISPLAY
The basic system consists of 2 components: the monitor display driver and the monitor status display.
u
MODEL 7707K DRIVER AND DISPLAY UNITS
FEATURES Driver Frame ·Two rack units high ·Will drive up to 9displays ·Connects to displays by 37 pin flat rbbon cable ·Connects directly to the Routing Switcher or to an RS232 interface
unit ( 7707 only) ·On Air Tally inputs connected by 25 pin D type connector-- the
user supplies the contact closures only ·Internal Power Supply ·Alphanumeric Keypad for message update ( 7707K only)
Display Unit ·Single rack unit high ·Available in both rack and wall- mounted design · Rack mounted units are available in a number of formats to ac-
commodate the picture monitor layout: displays can be located in the center, to the left or right side, or two displays per panel
There are two types of systems available -- the model 7707 and the model 7707K. Both systems use the same kinds of monitor status displays; only the display drivers are different.
The model 7707 system can be driven directly from Image Video routing or master control switchers or with an optional RS232 interface, can be driven directly from any routing or master control switcher that has atally output. Each driver frame can handle up to nine display units and multiple drivers may be connected via the control inputs to accommodate requirements for more than nine displays.
The model 7707K system has abuilt-in alphanumeric keypad used to update message data on the display units. Up to nine display units may be driven from one 7707K driver, however, multiple drivers may be connected together to facilitate additional display units. Only one of these drivers requires a keypad. Each display output is internally assigned adisplay number ( 1to 225) va a dip switch.
MODELS 601, 602 10X1 PASSIVE ROUTING SWITCHERS
Video Model 601 AFV Switcher Transparent signal path ensures the integrity of the audio/video signal.
Video signal is fed through the switcher with excellent crosstalk specs and high stability with no noise interference. And, there is unity transmission gain. Input video is via isolated BNC connectors and is terminated with built-in 75 ohms 1% resistors. Selected input is indicated by an orange strip on input pushbuttons.
Crosstalk Physical Dimensions
Better than 40dB at 4.2MHz
(All other inputs hostile) 19" x 1-3/4" x4"
Model 602 Dual Audio Switcher Each audio input is terminated with built-in 600 ohms resistors. The
inputs and outputs are brought to the panel via two 25- pin D- type connectors for wiring convenience. There is no degradation of the input signal.
Crosstalk
Better than 70dB at 20kHz
(All other inputs hostile)
Physical Dimensions ..... . 19" x 1-3/4" x4"
Ordering Information For 10 x1audio follow video
For 10 x1dual audio
Model 601 Model 602
VT- 98
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IntOSYSTf MS "Creativity You Can Depend On"
2101 NE 31st Ave. P.O. Box 1495 Gainesville, FL 32602 (904) 373-6783 ( 800) 874-7590 TVVX 810-825-2307
ROUTING SWITCHERS
982 ROUTING SWITCHER
DESCRIPTION The Model 982 AFV Routing Switcher is based upon refinement of the CMOS logic family and is characterized by extremely low power requirements, high noise immunity, and controlled rise and fall times.
FEATURES ·Vertical interval switching ·Ten inputs with two video and four audio outputs per bus ·Modular construction/bus expandable ·Employs latest COS/MOS logic ·Self-contained using only 1Y." rack space
MATRIX The matrix requires only 1-3/4" of standard 19" rack space, is selfcontained, and has adual voltage power supply and vertical trigger generator dedicated only to this matrix. The vertical interval switch-
ing pulses are derived from video.
Available with 952 dual audio and/or 992 remote control with 25'
cable.
982 ROUTING SWITCHER (SC)
$ 950.00
Audio Follow Video; 10 X 1Vertical Interval Switcher; Loop
Thru Video Inputs; Remote Controllable; Additional Audio
Channels for Stereo; Auto Sequencer; Stackable to form
up to 10 X 10 Matrix.
982 OPTIONS: 972 Two Additional Audio Channels ( SC) 952 Automatic Sequencer with Manual Remote ( SC)
992 Remote Controller with 25 ft. Cable ( SC) Additional Cable up to 250 ft.
590.00 400.00
225.00 200/ft.
952
MOO
982
SPECIFICATIONS
Audio Inputs: Impedance: balanced bridging Level: OdBm, + /- - 15dBm Outputs: Program: 2 Impedance: 600 ohms balanced Level: 15dBm max. Performance: Harmonic Distortion: less than . 25%, 20Hz to 20KHz at OdBm output Frequency Response: + /- 0.1dB, 10Hz to 30KHz Crosstalk: less than or equal to - 60dB Signal to Noise Ratio: less than or equal to - 65dBm below + OdBm Gain: Unity + /- - 2dB Mechanical/Power Video Connectors: BNC Audio Connectors: Micro Blue Ribbons Dimensions: 1.75 x19 x13 Power Required: 115 volts AC + /- 10% 50-60 Hz Temperature Range: 0-50° C
Video Inputs: Impedance: 75 ohms, bridging Return Loss: 35dB minimum
Outputs: Impedance: 75 ohms, source terminated Number: 2 Return Loss: 35dB minimum
Performance: Frequency Response: DC to 8mHz + /-. 25dB Differential Phase: less than 1° Differential Gain: less than 1% Tilt ( line or field rate): less than 1% Crosstalk: less than - 52dB at 3.58 mHz ( 4.43 PAL) Signal/Noise Ratio: less than 60dB to 5mHz
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-9i
&WM) `IFIFOSYSTI
"Creativity You Can Depend On"
2101 NE 31st Ave. P.O. Box 1495 Gainesville, FL 32602 (904) 373-6783 ( 800) 874-7590 TVVX 810-825-2307
ROUTING SWITCHER
1100 SERIES AFV ROUTING SWITCHER
FEATURES: ·Vertical interval switching ·Two video outputs, two audio outputs on each bus ·Color timed system · Field expandable · BCD control ·Modular construction ·COSIMOS logic ·Front- panel plug-accessibility · Microprocessor control option ·Computer adaptable
Description: The 1100 Series Routing Switcher is a third generation design providing inherently simple and extremely reliable operation based on a decade of experience.
One 7" matrix module contains the input buffers, crosspoints, latch and output DA for a 20 by 1 balanced audio or wide band video switcher.
This system has been field tested in many installations around the country and has proven not only completely reliable, but also mechanically rugged and free from major service problems.
Since inputs and outputs are in different planes, crosstalk is greatly reduced.
All cards are interchangeable and matrices are direct coupled, eliminating the introduction of tilt.
Audio is switched balanced negating the effects of transients and spurious crosstalk in the system, and uses high impedance bridging units.
The 1100 system offers maximum flexibility by its availability with many different control options including pushbuttons, touchtone pad, keyboard, thumbwheel preset and take, microprocessor control, and special controls. Audio, AFV, audio and video, or almost any combination audio and video can be switched in any manner required by the user.
Pushbutton Controllers The standard pushbutton controller ( Model 1190) has up to 20 illuminated pushbuttons in a 1-3/4" rack mount panel. For audio breakaway in AFV routing switchers the Model 1192 with 10, 15 or 20 inputs, is available with a3-1/2" panel with two rows of buttons and breakaway audio switch is available.
Thumbwheel Controllers Thumbwheel controllers are particularly useful in larger systems or when large scale expansion is planned as they can accommodate up to 100 inputs, with modification when the system is expanded. For certain applications thumbwheels alone are available ( Model 1193). For operational ease, the standard thumbwheel configuration includes an LED status window and Take button ( Model 1195). This allows presetting an input and switching directly to it on the vertical interval. Panels are available in rack mount and multiple output configurations and with audio breakaway. ( Models 1194 and 1196).
Keyboard Control Touchpad keyboards with LED status windows are available in adesk top configuration or in rack mount panels. Touchoads allow presetting inputs and switching on the vertical interval. Audio breakaway is not available.
Microprocessor Controller The Model 681 microprocessor controller is a very cost-effective means of controlling large systems. A central computer and terminal allow seiection of any input to any output with audio breakaway. An 80 event memory, sequenced by an internal clock, alows presetting changes in router status for Jp to 7 days. The memory has backup battery protection to restore crosspoint status in the event of power interruption. Additional control terminals are available as options.
1100 Series Routing Switchers ( from 10 x5to 20 x201
Audio Follow Video
from $3,250.00 to $ 15,200.00
Video or Audio only . . . ......... from $2,500.00 to $9,200.00
Controllers
1190-10 Pushbutton Controller with 10 Inputs
1190-15 Pushbutton Controller with 15 Inputs
1190-20 Pushbutton Controller with 20 Inputs
1192-10 Pushbutton Controller with Audio Breakaway;
10 Inputs 1192-15 Pushbutton Controller with Audio Breakaway;
15 Inputs
1192
Pushbutton Controller with Audio Breakaway;
1193
20 Inputs Thumbwheel Controller
1194
Dual Thumbwheel Controller with
Audio Breakaway
1195
Thumbwheel Control'er with LED Status;
1196
Preset and Take Dual Thumbwheel Controller with
LED Status; Preset and Take
1181
Keypad Controller Desk Mount
1181R Keypad Controller Rack Mount
681
Microprocessor Controller
683
Additional CRT for Microprocessor Controller
B-6000 Controller Interface card for 681
Additional Cable ( per Output Bus) Spare Parts Kit
Cable Length 50'
$ 340.00 420.00 505.00
675.00
840.00
1,010.00 105.00
170.00
280.00
560.00 435.00 485.00 5,600.00 1,120.00 850.00 2 50/ft. 500.00 Standard
VT-100
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
\11n (Pors-ri
"Creativity You Can Depend On"
2101 NE 31st Ave. P.O. Box 1495 Gainesville, FL 32602 (904) 373-6783 ( 800) 874-7590 TVVX 810-825-2307
MASTER CONTROL SWITCHER
MODEL 831
831 Master Control Switcher FEATURES ·Ten AFV Inputs including Blackburst/Colorizer ·Five Breakaway Audio Inputs with Auto Cart Start ·Audio Over/Under ·Auto Transition Audio/Video Mixer, Cut or 3Mix Rates ·Downstream Keyer with 4Input Selector, Colorizer and Key Edging ·Non- Sync Detectors with Mix Transition Inhibit ·Program VU Meter and Level Adjust ·Audition and Program Monitor Amplifiers with Gain Controls ·Time Display ( Count- up Event Timer) The Model 831 Master Control Switcher with audio follow video utilizes state-of-the-art circuitry and construction techniques to maximize operation convenience, flexibility and accuracy. The Model 831 utilizes a10 in and 2output AFV matrix which allows for direct cuts on the Program bus at any time. The Preset/Audition bus allows auditioning of any of the inputs and presetting of the next event. The auto transition system allows for cuts and for audio and
video mix transitions between the Preset and Program busses. Mix transitions at one-half, one and two second rates may be preselected but will be inhibited if anon- synchronous source is selected. A downstream key edger with 4input selector, colorizer and outline, shadow
and border edging is standard.
Both switching busses provide 5breakaway audio inputs with auto cart start which may be used with any 600 ohm source. A variable ratio audio mix between Program and Preset is provided when audio over/ under is activated. A Program VU meter, Program level control and Program and Audition 5watt monitor amplifiers are standard.
831 Master Control Switcher
$ 11,700.00
831 OPTIONS Additional Cable Additional Manual Spare Parts Kit
$ 10.00/ft. 75.00
400.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 10
limo sYsirims
"Creativity You Can Depend On"
2101 NE 31st Ave. P.O. Box 1495 Gainesville, FL 32602 (904) 373-6783 ( 800) 874-7590 TVVX 810-825-2307
MASTER CONTROL SWITCHER
MODEL 399-20 WITH STEREO OPTION
899 Master Control Switcher ·10 to 30 inputs ircluding Color Black
· Equalizing Input Amplifiers with + /- 15° Phase Adjust ·5 Breakaway Audio Inputs with Auto Cart Start ·Audio Over/Under ·Auto Transition Audio/Video Mixer, cut or 3 mix rates ·Downstream Keyer with 4Input Selector, Colorizer and Key Edging
·Non- Sync Detector with Mix Transition Inhibit · Program VU Meter and Level Adjust ·Audition and Program Monitor Amplifiers with Gain Controls
· Live/Air Input Selector to Program Monitor Amplifier ·Audition VU Meter ·Time Display ·Tally System ·Master Fade to Back/Pulse Processing
The Model 899 Master Control Switcher combines the Model 1100 series routing switcher matrix with state-of-the-ar electronics to provide both amaster control switcher and arouting switcher matrix. Based on the 1100 series muter matrix, the 899 uses two output buses for its audio follow video matrix. The additional output buses (3 minimum) may be used for preview or routing using standard 1100
series controllers. Equalizing amplifiers simplify color timing of the system. The 899 is also ava;lable in various input sizes from 15 to 30 inputs.
The Program bus allows for direct cuts at any time. The Preset/Audition bus allows auditioning of any of me inputs and presetting of the next event. The auto transition system allows for cuts ard for audio and video mix transitions between the Preset and Program busses. Mix transitions of one-half, one and two second rates may be preselected, but will be ; nnibited if a non -synchronous source is selected. A downstream key edger with four iiput selector, colorizer and outline, shadow and border edging is standard.Unit
Both switching busses provide 5 breakaway audio inputs with auto cart start which may be used with any 600 ohm source. A variable ratio
audio mix between Program and Preset is provided when audio over/ under is activated. A program VU meter and program level control and program and audition 5watt monitor amplifiers with gain controls on
the panel are standard.
OPTIONS ·Model 810 Booth Mic Pre- Amplifier: Provides booth mic level
setting orior to air ·Model 868 Machine Control Logic
· Model 883 Video Tape Machine Control' · Model 884 Film Island Control ·Computer Interface to operate the 899, consult factory
899-10 Master Control Switcher with 10 Inputs 899-15 Master Control Switcher with 15 Irputs
899-20 Master Control Switcher with 20 Inputs 899-25 Master Control Switcher with 25 Inputs 899-30 Master Control Switcher with 30 Inputs
413,900.00 15,900.00
20,100.00 25,750.00 28,575.00
810 825 825-S 868
883 884 862
800 SERIES OPTIONS: Booth Preamp Auxiliary Bus with Controller ( limit 3) Stereo Auxiliary Bus with Controller ( limit 3) Machine Control Logic
Video Tape Machine Controller` Film Island Controller Stereo Audio Option
Additional Manual Spare Parts Kit Additional Cable
675.00 2,050.00 2,700.00 2,890.00
510.00 675.00 5,250.00
125.00 650.00 20.00/ft.
"Requires 868 Machine Control Logic
VT- 102
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ffifftli9 !Duo sysri \ Is
"Creativity You Can Depend On"
2101 NE 31st Ave. P.O. Box 1495 Gainesville, FL 32602 (904) 373-6783 ( 800) 874-7590 TVVX 810-825-2307
5010 RACK FRAME/ 5030 EXTENDER/5050 ( VIDEO)/ 7050 ( AUDIO) POWER SUPPLY
FEATURES ·Rugged, modular construction holds up to
eight ( 8) plug-in modules ( including power supply) ·Universal power supply ·Dual voltage
Description The Model 5010 3-1/2" rack frame accommodates eight ( 8) plug-in modules including the power supply. The Model 5050 Video Power Supply provides asource for the distribution of pre- regulated + 10V and -10VDC to an entire rack frame of seven ( 7) modules. The Model 7050 Audio Power
Supply provides a source for the distribution of pre- regulated + 15VDC and - 15VDC to an entire rack frame of seven ( 7) modules. Both the 5050 and 7050 power supplies are plug-in modules which utilize rugged, heavy-duty components in astraightforward and reliable design. They supply voltage limited low ripple power from compact con-
vection cooled modules.
5010 5030 5050
7050
$200.00 40.00
200.00
200.00
5130 VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
FEATURES ·Specifically designed for NTSC and PAL
standard color video systems ·Six ( 6) isolated outputs ·Flat frequency response ·Minimum chroma -luminance delay ( less
than 10 ns) minimal phase and gain distortion ·Self- regulation of incoming DC voltage ·Uses one ( 1) module space in 501 rack
frame
5130
$ 175.00
5160 VIDEO EQUALIZATION AMPLIFIER
FEATURES ·Six ( 6) isolated outputs ·Continuously variable equalization and
±15 phase adjustment at 3.58MHz ·Feedback, sample and hold clamp circuit
for stable DC reference ·Common mode rejection greater than
60dB at 60Hz ·Self- regulation of incoming DC voltages ·Uses one ( 1) module space in 5010 rack
frame
5160
$ 250.00
TERMINAL PROCESSING/ SIGNAL GENERATING EQUIPMENT
5190 PULSE DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
5220 QUAD PULSE DELAY
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
FEATURES ·Four ( 4) outputs, each individually driven ·Total regeneration of pulses allow any of
the outputs to be operated unterminated ·Circuits or regenerative devices sensitive
to hum or other low frequency disturb-
ances are not utilized ·Shaped rise times ( less than 100 ns;
·Self- regulation of incoming DC voltages ·Uses one ( 1) module space in 5010 rack
frame
5190 5220
$ 185.00 225.00
5290 COLOR BLACK GENERATOR
FEATURES ·Produces Black Burst signal for use as a
color black or to drive devices which genlock to ablack burst signal ·Adjustments for burst phase and level,
sync level and setup ·Uses one ( 1) module space in 5010 rack
frame
5290
$505.00
5225 SUBCARRIER
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
FEATURES ·Subcarrier output level independent of
input level ·Two step continuously variable 0-170° and
170-340° phase control ·Self- regulation of incoming DC voltage ·Uses ore ( 1) module space in 5010 rack
frame
5225
$285.00
5600 SMPTE COLOR BAR GENERATOR
FEATURES ·Meets RS 189A specifications including
new SMPTE Monitor Alignment signal ·Front panel controls switchable to full field
or split field color bars or monitor align-
ment ·Digitally synthesized Iand Q signals ·Filtered Iand Q bands ·Composite output delay for ease of sys-
tem timing ·Self regulation of incoming DC voltage ·Uses two ( 2) module spaces in 5010 rack
frame
5600
$750.00
5690 SYNC GENERATOR
FEATURES ·TCSO 14.3MHz Crystal Oscillator ·Digitally derived pulses
·Self- regulation of incoming DC voltages ·Uses one ( 1) module space in rack frame
·Meets RS170A standard
5690
$590.00
7070 AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
FEATURES ·20dBm maximum output level
·Six ( 6) outputs, 600 ohms balanced
·Flat frequency response ·Self- regulation of incoming DC voltage ·Uses one ( 1) module space in 5010 rack
frame
7070 Audio D/A 6Output 7200 Monitor Amp
$225.00 265.00
*Requires 7050 ( Audio) Power Supply
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 103
INTERPHASE
2060 Menold Dr. Allison Park, PA 15101 (412) 367-3775
DIGITAL GENERATOR/SWITCHERS
CB- 1
CB-1ELECTRONIC SLATE BORDER GENERATOR
BORDER GENERATOR FEATURES · Safe Action/Title Display with Center Crosshairs · Internal Keyer -- Selectable Hard or Soft Key · Crosshatch Display
· Custom Patterns Available · Remote Controllable -- SPDT Switch Required · Digitally Generated Patterns for Stability and Accuracy · 1Line Vertical, . 15 ps. Horizontal Resolution · 2, 75 ohm 1%, Outputs
COUNTDOWN GENERATOR FEATURES · Selectable Size Numbers 7to 112 Lines · Audio Output -- Beeps Over Tone · Internal Keyer
· Remote Controllable -- SPST Switch Required · Relay Closure on " Zero"
· No Pulses Required -- Locks to Input Video · Countdown Position Adjustable over Entire H & V Picture · 1, 75 ohm 1%, Output
The CB- 1provides two useful post- production accessories in one compact package.
The Electronic Countdown Slate provides a digitally generated, 7 segment style countdown from 10 to 3. Both size and positioning are adjustable. The CB- 1derives its timing from input Video. It contains an internal Video Keyer that can be used to key the countdown over the program or to add its key signal to acharacter generator's.
The CB- 1audio output is a400Hz tone that rises in level 12dB, for 200ms after each number transition. The Tone automatically starts when the slate is activated and turns off . 2sec. after the " 3". With the slate function switch in the Tone position, a low distortion, steady 400Hz tone is available for reference or utility use.
The Countdown Video and tone disappear 200 ms. after the "3". A relay is activated at "0". Its contacts are available on arear mounted terminal strip and can be used to activate aswitcher or other device.
The Border Generator utilizes a phased- locked- loop, locked to the input video, to clock a read only memory that generates the video pattern. This translates into long-term stability and accuracy.
Two patterns are selectable by the front panel switch or remote control: 1. Safe Border/Safe Title/Center Crosshairs 2. Safe Border/Safe Title/With Crosshatch. The crosshatch display is useful for monitor alignment or graphic positioning. User defined custom patterns are available, or they can be developed in-house with access to an EPROM programmer.
The Key Level is adjustable from 0 to 110 IEEE units. An internal jumper can select aHard or Soft Key mode. In the Hard Key mode, the pattern is keyed regardless of the program video level. In the Soft Key mode, the pattern is keyed only where the program luminance is lower than the pattern's luminance. This mode provides a nonobtrusive display ideal for line monitor use.
Aulo . 8dbm-4dbm
COUNTDOWN SEQUENCE
OPTIO--N- 2
RELAY CLOSURE (400ms)
81 ii El VIDEO
11Di 91
·
5i LIk]
liaimmasim
S-20
S-202 10x1 DUAL AUDIO/REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHER
FEATURES · One Video -- Two Audio Channels · Tally Contacts Standard · Gold Contact Switches with LED Indicators · Can be Configured as a19 x1Switcher · Modules Removable from the Front of the Unit · Occupies only 1RU of Panel Space · Power Switch, Test Points, and Adjustments Accessible From the
Front of the Unit · Interface to SMPTE ( RP- 113) Digital Machine Control Optional · 10 BNC Video, 2x10 Audio Inputs · 2Video Outputs, 2x2Audio · RF Equals -+ 0/-.3dB, 20Hz to 20kHz · 10 Hours Data Retention in Cases of Power Loss
The Interphase S-202 is the 10 x 1switcher with everything. Dual audio, multiple panel remote control, audio breakaway, tally contacts and the specifications to back it all up. Remote control is accomplished via serial digital data. Up to four remote control panels can be connected to one S-202 utilizing normal shielded audio cable. Cmos circuitry is utilized throughout the unit for low power consumption and high reliability. Memory backup is provided for the event of apower failure.
S-20 AUDIO FOLLOW VIDEO PASSIVE SWITCHER
FEATURES · 10 Audio/Video Inputs · BNC Video Connectors · No Power Requirements · Balanced Audio Switching · Title Strip to Identify Sources · Gold Contact, Premium Switches Utilized for Trouble Free
Operation · All Unselected Video Sources Terminated with 75 ohms + 1% · All Unselected Audio Sources Terminated with 600 ohms · Colored Switch Lens to Identify Selected Source · Compact Size -- 1.73" x19" x6" Mounts in Standard EIA Rack
VT- 104
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
INTERPHASE
2060 Menold Dr. Allison Park, PA 15101 (412) 367-3775
MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM
M-400 MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM FEATURES · Up to 250 Machines · Up to 24 Functions per Machine · Up to 24 Tallies per Machine · No Switching Matrix Required · Custom Control Panels . Up to 8Control Panels . Up to 10 Machines per Panel · SMPTE ( RP- 113) Compatible . No Central Assignment Controller Required
MACHINE CONTROL PANEL
The Interphase M-400 Machine Control System was developed to merge the existing older equipment in a typical Broadcast facility with the new, RS-422, digitally controlled equipment of today and tomorrow. It accomplishes this with aminimum of hardware.
The M-400 is designed to conform to the Multi- Point operational configuration of SMPTE RP- 113. It can consist of from 1to 8control panels and from 1to 250 machines, communicating via a common RS-422 digital communications bus.
The Machine assignment problem is addressed by a shared responsibility between the machine operator and the control panel operator. A machine is delegated to a particular Control Panel location by selecting one of the eight assignment buttons on the Machine Interface. The assignment is completed when that machine number is selected on one of the leverwheel switches of the delegated Control Panel. There is no central assignment controller to contend with. In fact, alarge system can be re-configured into several smaller systems by simply moving some cables. The fact that no " overhead" equipment is required, makes the M-400 cost-effective for small systems.
The M-400 system uses one looped RS-422 bus for all machines and control panels. Only one Control Panel will be in control of the bus at any time. Control of the bus is transferred between control panels utilizing the " ESCAPE" provision of RP- 113. While in control of the bus, aControl Panel will Poll each machine assigned to it and update its status. If a command is initiated the panel will initiate a command sequence message. When polling is completed, control of the bus is transferred to the next Control Panel and the sequence is repeated.
VTR INTERFACE
Control Panels The Control Panels are normally built to the customers specifications. The standard control panel shown consists of four VTR controls of five functions and two film controls of 19 functions. Control panels can be supplied ranging from asingle rack unit for one VTR with 2-8 functions to a desk mount unit with 10 VTRs with eight functions.
Machine Interface The Machine Interface is available in two basic versions: an eight function unit, suitable for VTRs and a24 function unit suitable for film chains. Both units mount in a19" EIA rack and contain eight front panel Control Delegate switches. The 24 function unit has relay ( form A) outputs and opto isolator tally inputs. The eight function also has relay outputs, opto-isolator inputs and an additional RS-422 Port to communicate with those devices that use RS-422 but are not RP- 113 compatible. It will, of course, interface with devices that are RP- 113 compatible, depending on the software supplied.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 105
JAVELIN ELECTRONICS,
19831 Magellan Dr. P.O. Box 2033 Torrance, CA 90510 (213) 327-7440 Telex 19-4860 JAVELIN TR NC
INC.
MONITORS
All models provide 600 lines resolution. Corrected for use with all video recorders. Have front mounted controls for
brightness, contrast, vertical and horizontal hold. Switchable looping input.
VM9C VM9CX
117VAC 220-240VAC
60 Hz
$179.00
50 Hz ( CCIR) 186.00
Viewing area 39 sq.in. Available in single or dual rack mount configurations.
VM15 VM15X
117VAC 220-240VAC
60 Hz
$310.00
50 Hz ( CCI R) 324.00
Viewing area 118 sq.in. Available in single rack mount
configuration. Has built in audio pre-amp and speaker. U.L. Iisted.
VM19
117VAC
60 Hz
VM19X 220-240VAC
50 Hz ( CCIR)
Viewing area 172 sq. in. UL listed.
$391.00 399.00
VIDEO SWITCHERS
Provide ameans ot routing anumber of cameras to asingle video display ( monitor) or recorder.
LMS6D $116.00
Manual Switchers Passive Manual- MS and LMS Series-- Economical, reliable low signal loss mechanical switchers. Available in 4 and 6 position with terminating or looping inputs. Active Manual--MS- L and LMS-L Series -- Feather touch electronic switching. Illuminated. Low power micro-CMOS circuitry. Javelin V- Phase available. Looping and terminating versions. Modular, circuit board construction for quick field service or system expansion at minimal cost.
Positions available: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32. Available in 117VAC 60 Hz or 220-240VAC 50 Hz ( CCIR).
MONITORS/SWITCHERS
VM15
VM19
VM9C
Sequential Switchers TM
All Javelin Sequential Switchers feature low power CMOS circuitry on two position modular board for quick field service or system expansion at minimal cost. Individual dwell pot per camera position, plus overall dwell pot on front panel for varied camera viewing times. Javelin V- Phase available. Loopng and terminating versions.
Homing Sequential HSS-Terminating LIHSS-Looping --Provicie for single monitor output. Front mounted switches provide camera by-pass, auto sequence and camera hold.
Bridging Sequential BSS- Terminating LIBSS-Looping-- Two monitor outputs. Displays sequencing cameras on monitor
#1 while selected camera is viewed on monitor #2_ Looping series permits independent dual station control. Same switch features as Homing Sequential.
Auto Alarming Sequential-- Al: Javelin Homing and Bridging switchers available in auto alarm versions: AHSS -- Auto Alarm Homing ( Terminating)
LAHSS -- Auto Alarm Homing ( Looping)
ABSS -- LABSS --
Auto Alarm Bridging ( Terminating) Auto Alarm Bridging ( Looping)
Will automatically switch to camera covering an intruded
area when area alarms are tripped. N. O. and N. C. relay
contacts to operate other remote devices- recorders, phone dialers, etc.
All Sequential Switchers available in desk top or rack mount cabinets.
Positions available: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32. All Sequential Switchers available in 117VAC 60 Hz or 220-240VAC 50 Hz ( CCIR ).
VT- 106
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
JAVELIN ELECTRONICS, INC.
19831 Magellan Dr. P.O. Box 2033 Torrance, CA 90510 (213) 327-7440 Telex 19-4860 JAVELIN TRNC
OMNI-100 TM / SUPER SWITCHER n4 Omni- 100 is Jave,ir's new total system controller. Plugin modular components can be combined as required to fit any requirements from a simple 2 camera videoonly system to complete control of a 100 camera/100 alarm integrated system with pan/tilt and motorized lenses. All video switching is performed on a single microprocessor-based Master Control. The same Master
Control can be used to completely integrate a full alarm network simply by adding Alarm Gathering Panels as required. An auxilliary Acoc-ewory Control Keyboard can be added at any time to provide complete pan/tilt, zoom, focus and iris control of up 70 100 cameras. The Accessory Control System ( ACS) also includes built-in remote control of any six on/off functions ( room lights, camera power, etc.) per camera position. A Remote Transrh;tter and Receiver relays control signals over long line twisted pair wire. The video switching system is available separately as SuperSwitcher, and can be expanded into a full control system simply by adding components.
SWITCHING FUNCTIONS:
· Manual
· Looping
· Sequential · Bridging
· Auto Alarming · Remote
FEATURES:
· Expandable to 100 cameras and 100 alarms · Variable speed automatic sequencing · Adjustable dwell on individual cameras · Bypass and restore functions ( video and alarm) · Forward and back search function · Automatic find bypass search function · Full control of pan, tilt, zoom, focus and iris AutoPan
control · Memory-stored preset positions · Manual or alarm activated home return · 6 keyboard controlled on/off functions per camera
position · Remote control of room lights, locks, housings, etc. · Interface with automatic alarm response - autodialer,
etc.
SWITCHER
System Components
J0-101 MASTER CONTROL-- Pressure sensitive touch pads
allow the operator to select which type of switching the
system will do, and program those functions. Two LED dig-
ital displays indicate which camera is being monitored and
read sequence time in seconds during sequencing selection.
The Master Control unit interfaces with the Video Gather-
ing Panel via a plug in ribbon cable. SuperSwitcher and
OMNI-100 provide the user with switcher versatility un-
heard of in the security marketplace.
$349.00
J0-102AC AUXILIARY KEYBOARD -- Attaches di-
rectly to the J0-101MC Master Control to provide accessory
control for the entire system. Pan/tilt or scanner control;
zoom, focus and iris control; and remote control of six
functions per camera position are operated from pressure
sensitive touch pads on the .10-102AC ACS keyboard.
$185.00
J0-103RT REMOTE TRANSMITTER --Converts signals
from the video alarm gathering panels to long line twisted
pair transmission, enabling remote operation of the system.
This configuration eliminates costly coaxial cable pre-
viously associated with non-remote switchers.
$422.00
J0-104RR REMOTE RECEIVER --Reverts signals from
Remote Transmitter.
$422.00
J0-105VP VIDEO GATHERING PANEL --The Video
Gathering Panel is a 10 position switching module providing
input for as few as one camera and as many as 10. Up to 10
Video Gathering Panels may be utilized in the system for a
maximum capacity of 100 video inputs. No matter how
many panels are used, all are controlled by one Master
Control Looping or terminating switching functions are
accomplished individually via aswitch at each position on
the Video Gathering Panel.
$286.00
JO-106AP ALARM GATHERING PANEL-The Alarm Gathering Panel is similar to the Video Gathering Panel in that individual panels handle up to 10 alarm inputs and 10 panels may be utilized providing up to 100 alarm inputs. Fire, smoke, seismic, door and window, infared or any
other sensor with anormally open or closed contact may be connected to the system. Alarms are set and re-set by
Master Control and may be sequenced or bypassed. $270.00
JO-107MP MULTIPLEXER PANELS - Each Multiplexer
Panel will relay pan, tilt, zoom, focus and iris control
signals as well as 6 remotely controlled on/off signals
from the ACS keyboard to up to 10 individual camera
locations. Up to 10 Multiplexer panels can be controlled
from a single Master Control, for a total system capa-
city of 100 cameras.
$500.00
J0-4PS, J0-16PS POWER SUPPLY -- Several power supplies
are available for the SuperSwitcher system. Because of the variety of configurations the system may take, the power requirements will differ. By offering arange of supplies, the appropriate supply may be chosen optimizing energy
efficiency and representing acost saving. $235.00 -$565.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-107
JAVELIN ELECTRONICS, INC.
19831 Magellan Dr. P.O. Box 2033 Torrance, CA 90510 12131327-7440 Telex 19-4860 JAVELIN TR NC
VIDEO SIGNAL EQUIPMENT J312T Series Time and Date Generator Provides flicker- free display of year, month, day, hour, minutes and seconds. May be added to any video system. All functions, including 300 year clock, preprogrammed. Includes own stand-by power supply. 220-240VAC 50 Hz available.
VIDEO SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
JVAS100-Video Authentication System Iransw Its information horn centr al file to any work station. For signature verification the teller signals the name and account number to the operator via intercom. When the file card is placed on the base tray of the console, it is displayed instantly on the teller's remote monitor. In a typical system two tellers share a centrally located 9" monitor. For other applications monitors are available in 15" and 19" formats. The addition of a time lapse video recorder with a time/date generator allows transmissions to be recorded and stored for easy review.
J312T
J411- Real Time Video Transmission System - Transmits video over #22 or #24 gauge wire or telephone wire. Basic system will transmit up to 4000 feet. Repeaters available for each additional 4000 foot interval.
JVAS-100 Video Authentication System
JVA-D-1-Video Line Amplifier-- Amplifies signal and compensates for high frequency roll- off for coaxial runs up to 3400 feet over RG-59/U cable.
JDA-D-2-Video Distribution Amplifier Provides a four- line output from a single video source for driving up to 40 monitors. Each line may drive agroup of up to 10 monitors in any direction desired. 220-240VAC 50 Hz ( CCIR) available.
VT-108
J411 System
JDA -D-2
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
JVC
DIGITAL TIME BASE CORRECTOR SA-T100U
FEATURES
· 8-Bit Digital Sampling At A Sampling Rate 4Times the Subcarrier Frequency
· High Performance Comb Filter for Improved Resolution and S/N
. Full Frame Memory for Ultra-Wideband Time Base Correction
. Compact and Lightweight
· Automatic Freeze · Built-In Drop-Out Compensator · Built-In Color Picture Frame and Field
Freeze Functions · VTR Subcarrier Feedback for Wide-
Bandwidth Performance · Heterodyne Color Processing · Built-In Sync Signal Generator with
Genlock
SA-T1 00U
SA-T1 00U DIGITAL TIME BASE CORRECTOR
The video signal produced by any VCR contains a certain amount of instability commonly called "jitter This is due to the fact that the VCR uses mechanical components, and a relatively fragile recording medium: magnetic tape. Ordinary video monitors have no trouble reproducing the signal. It can even be recorded and edited by other VCRs. But no matter how precise the VCR, none can produce a signal free from this instability. And if the signal is to be mixed with another video signal -- as is the case if dissolves and other special effects are to be performed -- it must be perfectly stable.
A time base corrector is a digital device which temporarily stores the video signal (or part of it) and then releases it at a steady, precise rate, free from the error caused by the moving and rotating parts of the VCR. In addition to simply eliminating the jitter, some TBCs also provide other features like drop-out compensation, and special effects ( freeze frame, etc.).
Full Frame Memory, Freeze Frame/Field. Wide variations in the Input signal can be corrected with the SA-T1 00U because of its full frame memory. If the input signal is interrupted, the SA-T1 00U will automatically freeze the picture until the
incoming signal is restored. In addition to this, the SA-T1 00U offers the user the ability to manually freeze a frame or field with pushbutton controls on the front panel. The frozen picture is displayed in full color.
Compact, Lightweight. The SA-T100U is only 1-3/4" tall and can be mounted in a standard EIA rack. Mounting hardware is included. And because of its size, it is ideal for both studio and mobile operations.
Built- In Drop-Out Compensator. For VCR's which provide an RF-DOC output ( like ,NC's CR-850U) the SA-T100U can provide digital dropout compensation. The fully digital drop-out compensator is far superior to the circuits found in most VCRs.
Subcarrier Feedback For wide bandwidth performance, the SA-T100U can be connected to VCRs which accept external subcarrier ( SC) and sync signals. Since most 3/4" professional VCRs have this capability, maximum performance can be obtained
Heterodyne Processing. For use with JVC's professional VHS models ( BP-5300U, BR64(3U, BR-8600U) the SA-T100U can be connected using the " heterodyne" mode. This mode does not require the "SC" input on the VCR, thus expanding the flexibility of the TBC.
Built- In SSG. An RS- 170A sync signal generator required by some A- Broll editing controllers is included in the SAT100U. Included also is a genlock function which locks the SSG with another stable sync signal.
Suggested List Price
IBA
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Signal: Video: NTSC composite video, 1V p- p, 75 ohms
Reference Signal: Black burst 0.45V p- p or NTSC composite video 1V p- p, 75 ohms or loop through
DOC ( input R.F.): 0.2 to 2.0Vp-p, 75 ohms
Output Signal: Video: NTSC composite video, 1V p-p, 75 ohms
Advance Sync: 4V p- p, 75 ohms
VTR- SC: 2V p- p, 75 ohms
S/N Ratio: 58dB
Frequency Response: VTR SC and Monochrome: 4.2MHz ·0.5dB Hetero Y: - 25MHz, C:-1.5MHz
Gen-Lock Phase: H: · 2sec. SC: · 180
Dimensions 17"W x1-3/4"H x19-3/4"D (430 x44 x500mm)
Power Supply: 100/117V AC, 50/60Hz
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA. Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VT- 109
miluen II) In
DI neaa.ic
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO & COMMERCIAL/INDUS-
TRIAL SOUND EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide --
1280 pages of Studio & Remote Audio Recording
Equipment & Systems for stage, concert, audito-
rium, arena, stadium, hall, church, industry,
business, commercial, school, hospital & hotel
sound reinforcement, background music, paging,
intercommunications, telephone & telecom-
munications systems & equipment.
$95.00
AUDIO-VISUAL & EDUCATIONAL/TRAINING COMPUTER EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide -- 1280 pages of projectors, screens, recorders, learning aids, carrels, stands, tables, lecterns & equipment
for multi- image & sound. Computers, disk drives, furniture, graphics, magnetic media, modems, monitors, networks, paper/forms, printers, power supplies, terminals & software. $95.00
BROADCAST EQUIPMENT & SERVICES Buyers
Guide -- 1280 pages of Studio, Remote &
Location Equipment & Systems for television,
commercial & tape production, broadcast tele-
vision, radio, cable, pay & satellite TV, special
effects, animation & music video.
$95.00
COMPUTER EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide -- For
Professional, Scientific, Business, Industrial &
Commercial Applications. 1280 pages of micros,
minis, disk drives, furniture, graphics, digitizers,
plotters, boards, cables, cases, consultants, diag-
nostic & test keyboards, magnetic media, main-
tenance, modems, monitors, networks, paper/
forms, power/protection, printers, software,
supplies, tape drives, telecommunications,
terminals.
$95.00
SECURITY & CCTV EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide
-- For Industrial, Professional, Commercial & Busi-
ness Applications. 1280 pages of controls, annun-
ciators, power supplies, dialers, closed circuit TV,
wire, cable & equipment for remote monitoring,
space protection & central station.
$95.00
PROFESSIONAL PHOTOGRAPHY/MOTION
PICTURE Buyers Guide -- Professionals in
Photography, Motion Picture, Multi- Image,
Audio- Visual, Film Production & Post Production
-- 1280 pages of studio, remote & location
equipment systems & supplies for Still, Cine, AV &
Film Production.
$95.00
INDUSTRIAL & PROFESSIONAL VIDEO EQUIP-
MENT Buyers Guide -- 1280 pages of cameras,
recorders, production & terminal equipment,
monitors, lighting, telecine, RF equipment, enclo-
sures, wire & cable.
$95.00
BILL DANIELS COMPANY, Inc.
9101 BOND · P 0 SOX 2056
r 1-800-255-6038 SHAWNEE MISSION, KANSAS 66201
CALL. TOLL FREE
IN KANSAS I·913-492-9900
LEADER INSTRUMENTS
380 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 231-6900 TVVX 510-227-9669
CORP.
F.
1 1
â
a
4.
e-i-
71-
j;; . - 4
·· 44-ï I.
MIS
LCG-400M
VIDEO TEST INSTRUMENTS
UMW..
-- 1'
4'10
OKA le.,
I Ilull
:7MI
e 1 1
c7,
d
LCG-400S
A·······a·Meee
o à
000000
LCG-400
NTSC VIDEO SYNC/TEST GENERATORS
The LCG-400 provides both gen -lock and internal synchronization with the full range of video signals needed for testing and adjusting monitors, cameras, VTR's and overall performances of color and B 8. W TV systems. It is available with either multiburst ( LCG-400M) or
sweepmarker ( LCG-400S1 generators. The LCG-400 will sync with all standard composite video and black burst signals including those from quad head and helical scan VTR's. Patterns include EIA and full field color bars, 5- step modulated stair case, 8 color rasters, cross hatch and dot covergence, circle and corner marker with on/off control of
chroma and luminance. Both interlace and progressive scanning are provided. Outputs include composite video, subcarrier, black burst,
selectable vertical or horizontal drive, and CH 3/4 RF. Units are supplied for either bench- too or rack mounting ( rails included).
LCG-400M LCG-400S
$ 1990.00 1990.00
LCG-396
NTSC COLOR BAR PATTERN GENERATOR
The LCG-396 is aversatile NTSC video generator suitable for testing, servicing and evaluating a broad range of video systems including
video tape recorders, CATV and MATV systems, video monitors and television receivers. It provides 11 test patterns including the standard
NTSC color bars for measuring and adjusting color purity, white balance, luminance, chrominance, and convergence. Outputs include composite video, H or V scope trigger, subcarrier and RF ICH5 or 4). Other features include variable chroma, luminance and set-up levels,
and selectable interlaced or progressive scanning. Also available as an option are RGB outputs on the rear panel for testing color computer display systems and video game color circuitry. The LCG-396 is supplied with acomprehensive user's manual including detailed VTR,
TV and monitor application data. LCG-396
$ 995.00
LB0-51MV
LS W-333
LBO-51MV DISPLAY MONITOR
For special low-cost applications-- and as adirect replacement for the Tektronix 602A or 1424 X-Y Display Monitors-- the Leader LB0-51MV delivers outstanding performance. It is driven by R-Y and B-Y video signals, from aprecision chroma decoder or aTektronix 650 HR series picture monitor equipped with R-Y and B-Y outputs. The LBO-51MV has the added capability of displaying individual VITS and VIRS lines* when used with Leader's LBO- 5860 waveform monitor.
The unit's CRT display area is 8x10 cm. Combines 3MHz bandwidth on X and Y axes, with 4MHz on Zaxis. Phase shift between x and Y axes is less than 3° at 1MHz IR -Y and B-Y signals are approximately 600 kHz).
In its standard configuration, the LBO-51MV is supplied with front panel controls for power, intensity, focus, and horizontal and vertical positions. Screwdriver adjustments are provided for vertical and horizontal IX and Y) gain, astigmatization, and trace rotation.
The absolute accuracy of the LBO-51MV display is dependent upon the accuracy of the precision chroma decoder being used to drive it.
"VITS and VIRS lines may be observed only when the signal delay
inherent to the chroma decoder being used is not excessive ( 10 to 15
Sec).
LBO-51MV
$995.00
LS W-333
ALL-CHANNEL SWEEP/MARKER GENERATOR
The LS W-333 is acomplete test and alignment instrument for the RF and IF tuned circuits of VHF and UHF television receivers and FM
radios. It is used in production testing and aligning, and in servicing.
Front- panel displays of ideal IF and chroma response curves with
marker positions permit fast and precise alignment in accordance
with manufacturers' recommendations. The LSW-333 has three bias
supplies, selectable marker tilt ( vertical or horizontal), and vertical
and horizontal polarity reversal.
LSW-333
$ 775.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 111
LEADER INSTRUMENTS CORP.
380 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 231-6900 Pi« 510-227-9669
POWER SUPPLIES
LPS-151
LPS-152
The LPS-151 and LPS-152 are Triple Output DC Power Supplies with individual voltage and current meters, automatic overload recovery and auto tracking. The output voltages are adjustable, Oto 6Volts, Oto + 25 Volts and Oto -25 Volts on both models making them ideal for computer subassembly, circuit board, semiconductor and system burn- in test applications. All three outputs have independent adjustable current limiting with an auto recovery feature which allows the output voltage to return to normal when the short or overload condition is removed. Both units also feature atracking output mode which allows an adjustable ratio of positive vs. negative voltage between the 25 Volt outputs. The adjustment range is from 100% 100% to 50% - 100%. Ripple is less than 3mV p- pand output stability is rated at less than 3mV for 10% input line voltage variation and Oto 100%. Both power supplies carry Leader's full Two Year Warranty.
SPECIFICATIONS
OUTPUT Voltage
0 to + 6V adjustable. 0 to + 25V adjustable. 0 to - 25V adjustable.
Current LPS-151 0 to 6V output -- 3.0A max. · 25V outputs -- 0.5A max. LPS-152 0 to 6V output -- 5.0A max. · 25V outputs -- 1.0A max.
Current Limiter All outputs separately adjustable from OA to fully loaded at rated max. current with automatic recovery.
REGULATION Load
< 0.01% + 3mV to 0 to 100% load variation.
Line < 0.01% + 3mV for t 10% input line voltage.
Ripple < 3mV p- p.
METER Voltage Ranges
0to 7V, 0to + 30V, 0 to - 30V.
Current Ranges LPS-151 -- 0 to 3.5A, 0 to 0.6A. LPS-152 -- 0 to 6A, 0 to 1.2A.
Accuracy 5% f.s.
GENERAL Tracking Voltage Mode
Positive vs. negative voltage will track at 50% to 100% for ± 25 Volt outputs.
Overload Protection Voltage shutdown, automatic recovery.
ENVIRONMENTAL Operating Temperature
0° to + 40°C operating at 100% load.
Storage Temperature -20° to + 70°C.
Humidity 30% to 85% relative.
POWER REQUIREMENTS 100, 120, 200, 220, 240,
LPS-151 approx. 120 VA; LPS-152 approx. 220 VA.
10%; VAC.
PHYSICAL Size ( W x H x Di
LPS-151: 8-1/2" x5-1/4" x 13" (215 x 132 x332mm) LPS-152: 8-1/2" x5-1/4" x 14-1/8" 1215 x 132 x360mm)
Weight LPS-151: 13-1/2 lbs. 16.1kg) LPS-152: 15-3/4 lbs. ( 7.2kg)
LPS-151 LPS-152
$ 395.00 495.00
VT- 112
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LEADER INSTRUMENTS CORP.
380 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 231-6900 TVVX 510-227-9669
· .* * ewe amarea
FREQUENCY COUNTERS/ TRANSISTOR TESTERS
q:
f,TO
LDC-823S
LTC- 905
LDC-824S
Laboratory Frequency Counters
Leader Frequency Counters provide accurate, reliable frequency and period measurements for a wide variety of laboratory, communications and bench applications. LSI and MSI technology results in costeffective instrumentation for today's stringent requirements.
Large, florescent displays make these instruments particularly wellsuited to production testing and other applications where a large, bright readout is essential.
All four units are housed in well- shielded metal cases which virtually eliminates errors caused by nearby R.F. fields.
In addition to frequency readout, period measurements can also be made. Normally, asampling rate of ten seconds can be expected for direct frequency readouts when the test signal frequency is very low and resolution to 0.01 Hz or greater is required. The period function can be used to reduce sampling time and to increase the accuracy of the measurement while increasing the resolution significantly. In the period mode, the time duration of one period is measured, averaged over the gate time. A reading of 16.09 milliseconds, for instance, can be converted to 62.15 Hz using the relationship f = 1/t. The period mode is particularly useful when performing high resolution frequency adjustments because the counter readout permits constant observation of any change in frequency.
LDC-823S 250 MHz Counter
The LDC-823S has astandard time base accuracy of 1ppm from 10 Hz to 250 MHz. It is also available with an ovenized time base which gives 0.03 ppm stability.
LDC-822 80 MHz Counter
The seven digit, 80 MHz LDC-822 is the simplest and least expensive bench- type counter from Leader. It has atime base accuracy of 5ppm, offering high performance at a cost effective price.
LDC-831 150 MHz Counter
The LDC-831 is a41 / 2 digit 150 MHz battery- powered counter. Its small size and portability make it ideal for field service applications, an optional AC adaptor converts it to bench use. Simple controls and a large, bright LED display make it easy to operate.
LDC-824S 520 MHz counter
The LDC-824S has astandard time base accuracy of 1ppm ( 0.03 ppm optional) over its 10 Hz to 520 MHz frequency range.
TRANSISTOR TESTERS
LTC-905 Semiconductor Curve Tracer
The LTC- 905 permits displaying the characteristic curves of all types of
semiconductors ( NPN, PNP, triacs, SCR's, FET's, MOSFET's, zener, signal, and rectifier diodes, etc.) on virtually any oscilloscope. Used in labs, classrooms, and for production- line testing, the LTC-905 will
measure ( both in- and out- of- circuit) gain ( beta), cutoff, leakage, and output admittance. The LTC- 905 provides 8selectable collector sweep voltages from 10 to 100 Volts along with afull set of step- generator
currents and voltaaes.
LTC- 905
$255.00
LTC-906 Transistor Checker
The LTC-906 is a portable, multi- purpose transistor checker widely used in laboratories, schools, servicing, and for production troubleshooting. In the automatic mode, activating asingle switch initiates a programed test that automatically identifies emitter, base, collector,
and type of device ( NPN, PNP, FET, diode, or other) with an audible and visual good- or- bad indication.., both in- and out- of- circuit. In the DC parameter mode, out- of- circuit measurements can be made of
leakage current, hfe,Vbe and Vd. Powered by asingle 9V battery, it
easily fits in a technician's tool kit.
LTC- 906
$220.00
LTC-906A Transistor Checker
The LTC-906A is identical to the LTC- 906 in features, functions and
specifications but is housed in alarger bench- top package. The larger
physical dimensions allows for amore convenient front panel layout
and is less susceptible to theft making it ideal when the instrument is
used in unsecure areas.
LTC- 906A
$249.00
ACCESSORIES
LP- 11Y In circuit Probe for LTC-906, 906A LPS-169A AC Adaptor for LTC-906 ( 9V DC)
$19.00 9 00
LDC-825 1GHz Counter
The LDC-825 has the widest frequency range of any Leader counter; 10 Hz to 1GHz. It also has the highest time base accuracy ( + /-0.03 ppm), making it the ideal counter for critical, high-frequency requirements. Two input impedances, 1M ohms ( 10 Hz to 80 MHz) and 50 ohms ( 50 MHz to 1GHz) are available for precise matching to the device under test.
LDC-825
LDC-824S LDC-824S-01 LDC-823S LDC-823S-01 LDC-822
LDC-831
1GHz, 8digit, 0.03 ppm
520 MHz, 8digit 1ppm 520 MHz, 8digit, 0.03 ppm 250 MHz, 8digit, 1ppm 250 MHz, 8digit, 0.03 ppm
80 MHz, 7digit, 5ppm
150 MHz, Battery Portable
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$1295.00 550.00 875.00 450.00 775.00 320.00 210.00
VT- 113
LEADER INSTRUMENTS CORP.
380 Oser Avenue Hauppauge. NY 11788
(516) 231-6900 TVVX 510-227-9669
METERS AND BRIDGES
wirer'
o*
· _let« . 1.!.· "4 4 LCR-745
LCR-740
LCR -740 LCR BRIDGE
The LCR-740 is aversatile instrument for accurately measuring induc-
tance, capacitance, resistance, and loss factor of electronic compo-
nents. This compact unit provides abasic accuracy of 0.5% and reso-
lutions of 0.1
1pF or 0.001 ohm. Its broad measurement ranges
make it ideal for use in component design, inspection and selection. It
has also found wide use in educational institutions as an aid to
teaching the characteristics of inductive, capacitive and resistive
components.
LCR-740
$ 365.00
LDM -853A-3-1/2" DIGITAL MULTIMETER
The LDM-853A is arugged, compact AC or battery- powered DMM
that is at home both in the field and in the lab. Its automatic zeroing
and bright green LED display ( which reduces eye fatigue) make it ideal
for applications where constant monitoring of varying inputs is
required. The LDM-853A can measure up to 2A, both AC and DC, as
well as ohms, DC volts and AC volts. An AC adaptor is supplied, as are
four each " C" cells for field operation.
LDM-863A
$ 185.00
LHM -80A HIGH VOLTAGE METER/PROBE
The LHM-80A permits easy and safe measurement of voltages up to 40,000 VDC. It is widely used for checking CRT accelerating voltages, testing and servicing X-ray machines, and other high voltage equipment. Completely self-contained ( no batteries or external power required), it is made of high- impact polystyrene with aspecial corona safety shield. Full-scale accuracy is + / - 3% . It is supplied with ground wire and heavy-duty cap.
LHM-80A
$ 50.00
LCR -745G -DIGITAL LCR METER W/GPIB
Digital LCR Meter with GPIB interface can be used in remotely controlled test systems conforming to the IEEE-488 Standard.
Wide measurement ranges, from 0.001 II to 19.99M II for resistance,
0.1 gH to 199.9H for inductance, and 0.1 pF to 1999 Ffor capaci-
tance. Quality IQ) and Dissipation ( DI factor measurements are also
possible, along with azero offset function to compensate for stray
capacitance and residual resistance and inductance. Two test
frequencies, 1kHz and 120 Hz are available. Combining all of these
features with GPIB capability will make the LCR-745G ideal for high
volume quality control.
LCR-745G
$ 2495.00
LEM -73A FET BENCH MULTIMETER
The LEM -73A is asensitive, versatile electronic multimeter for general
purpose laboratory applications. Its high input resistance permits
measuring high impedance circuits with minimum loading. DC and AC
voltages can be measured from 30mV to 1,000 V; DC and AC currents
from 30 bi Ato 300mA. Resistance, using either high ( 1.5V) or low ( 100
mV) test voltages may be measured from 0.2 ohms to 500 M ohms. dB
scales are also provided for sound level measurements in 600 ohms
audio systems. AC operated.
LEM -73A
$ 208.00
ur
LPM-8000
LCR -745 DIGITAL LCR METER
LDM-863A
The LCR-745 is aCPU controlled digital LCR Meter with automaiic and manual ranging. Direct resistance, capacitance, and inductance measurements of components and equivalent series and parallel circuits can be made, with Quality ( Q) and Dissipation factor IDI displayed simultaneously with inductance and capacitance. The unit's wide automatic measurement range greatly reduces the time associated with performing these component measurements compared with a manual LCR bridge. This makes the LCR-745 an ideal instrument for incoming inspection or final production test of components where ease of operation and high throughput are necessary.
An offset function is available which can be used to cancel any residual resistance, capacitance or inductance of the test leads or fixtures being used. In addition, the offset function can be used to rormalize the value of acomponent under test to zero. The deviation (including polarity) from this normalized value of succeeding components will be displayed, simplifying testing.
Two test frequencies, 120 Hz and 1kHz are available, facilitating the
testing of electrolytic capacitors. In addition, an external DC bias in the
range of 0 + 30 V can be applied; an internal bias of + 1.5 V is
available. Basic measurement accuracy is + / - 0.35%.
LCR-745
$ 1395.00
LCR-745-04 -DIGITAL LCR COMPARATOR SYSTEM
The LCR - 745-04 is acomplete LCR comparator system. It allows fast
incoming inspection or production test of precision components, even
by non-technical personnel. Upper and lower limits for inductance,
capacitance or resistance and dissipation or quality are set on the com-
parator's front panel mounted switches. If the value of the component
under test falls within these limits, avisible and audible " go" signal is
given. Otherwise, a " no-go" indication is accompanied by the display
of the actual deviation from the referenced value, including polarity,
for precise quality control.
LCR-745-04
$ 2300.00
LCR-745-01 -DIGITAL LCR METER w/BCD OUTPUT
The LCR-745-01 adds BCD output capability to the standard LCR-745.
The BCD option is ideal for recording the values of the components
under test, remote readout or input to acomputer for further analysis.
LCR-745-01
$ 1750.00
LPM -8000 LASER POWER METER
Two wavelength and three power measuring ranges are available on the LPM-8000, giving this instrument the versatility to be used in servicing the equipment of many laser disk manufacturers. This Laser
Power Meter, which consists of amain body and aseparate sensor connected by cable, boasts small size, light weight, and battery operation for portability. The LPM-8000 is a time and cost saving device since the service technician will be able to instantly verify power output from the laser device of disk players.
LPM-8000
$ 225.00
VT- 114
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LEITCH VIDEO OF AMERICA, INC.
PHASE MONITOR/
825K Greenbrier Circle
VERTICAL INTERVAL PROCESSOR
Chesapeake, VA 23320
(804) 424-7920 Telex II 710-882-4342
SYNC/SUBCARRIER PHASE MONITOR SCH-730N
SCH-730N SCH-731N
NTSC Sync/Subcarrier Phase Monitor,
includes Instruction Manual
$1145.00
Same as above, with
HTiming Indication
1450.00
Extra Instruction Manual
20.00
The SCH-730N Sync/Subcarrier Phase Monitor is a selfcontained metering device which develops a LED display corresponding to the relationship between the phase of subcarrier, as represented by burst in a composite video signal, and the sync of that signal.
The unit permits fast, accurate measurement, adjustment and continuous monitoring of SCH. Since it does not require an external reference signal, it can be used at any point in avideo system.
Correct SCH, according to current practice, is achieved when the positive or negative slope zero crossings of subcarrier, of which burst is a representative sample, are coincident with the 50% point of the leading edge of horizontal sync. The acceptable tolerance is + /- 40° of subcarrier or + /- 31 ns of H phase.
VIP- 1101N VERTICAL INTERVAL PROCESSOR
Model VIP- 1101N NTSC Vertical Interval Processor ( two
VI source inputs standard)
Complete with detachable power cord
and instruction manual
$3900.00
Options Model 1101IP Input Preselect ( module)
Model 1101ME Module Extender Extra Instruction Manual
$800.00 85.00 60.00
Features ·Digitally generated sync, burst and black ·RS170A SCH always maintained
·RS170A or narrow H blanking selectable ·Microprocessor control ·Comprehensive self- diagnostics, including set-up
and timing modes
·Digital front panel status display
·Automatic failure by-pass ·Transient-free switching ·RS232C remote control interface ·Digital power- down memory ·Digitally temperature compensated, high stability crystal
oscillator ·Programmable signal- loss handling ·Differential video inputs ·High efficiency switching power supply
The VIP- 1101N NTSC Vertical Interval Processor is a stand-alone device which, unlike traditional VITS insertion
equipment, does not generate any insertion test signals. It offers, instead, an unprecedented degree of capability and flexibility in the handling of multiple, external insertion
signal sources. The application of microprocessor control and digital technology in general, together with the latest analog circuit components, results in aunit with previously unavailable features and high quality video specifications.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 115
LEITCH VIDEO OF AMERICA,
825k Greenbrier Circle Chesapeake, VA 23320
(804) 424-7920 Telex II 710-882-4342
INC.
NTSC MASTER SYNC PULSE GENERATOR
SPG-102N The SPG-102N Master Sync Pulse Generator is the successor to the reliable and time- proven SPG-100N. Many
refinements and additional options make this the ideal master generator for virtually any pulse system concept. Modular construction and the fully wired mounting frame guarantee maximum flexibility in the selection of astandard and optional module complement. Optional modules can easily be added later to satisfy system requirements or user preference.
Digital Timing Circuits Ensure extreme accuracy and reliability. Gating for all pulses and the color subcarrier is derived from the 14.31818 MHz reference oscillator. Pulse widths and timing relationships are adjustable in 70 nsec increments.
Synchronous Counters Eliminate phase drift of the subcarrier relative to the leading edge of sync. The sync generator features improved temperature stability and exceeds the performance specifications of EIA Standard RS- 170. Time base errors are less than 1 nsec. Pre- aged and tested master oscillator crystals assure accurate calibration and very low long term frequency drift.
Master Color Standard 100CS The optional Master Color Standard 100CS is avery high stability reference source oscillator. Its inclusion is recommended when the SPG-102N is used as the main system generator.
Automatic Digital Sync Lock Circuits permit genlock and chroma lock with an external composite video signal input. Color lock is maintained by using the incoming burst only to phase lock the 14.31818 MHz reference oscillator from which all timing information is derived. The relative phase of the incoming sync signal is monitored to ensure phase coincidence. Electronic switching is used to automatically revert to the local, independent mode of operation should there be a degradation or complete loss of the input video signal.
Optional Frequency Converter/Resolver A Frequency Converter/Resolver module is available and can be used in place of the 100CS Master Color Standard to lock the generator to the 5MHz signal of an external Cesium or Rubidium standard.
Additional Features A new vertical timer incorporates switchable 1 or 2 line advance and selectable vertical blanking width of 19, 20 or 21 lines.
A Color Frame Ident pulse at a15 Hz rate and with adefinite frame to subcarrier relationship is provided. The choice of ident pulse position has been expanded and is selectable by means of small U- link jumpers.
Test Signals
The mounting frame is pre- wired to accept optional dual output Bar/Dot/Grating and NTSC Encoded Color Bar test signal modules. A dual output Color Black signal module must be included with the test signal modules.
IC Regulators
On each module provide DC regulation with current limiting short circuit protection.
NTSC SYNCHRONIZING PULSE GENERATORS SPG-102N Master Generator with Color Sync Lock,
includes Instruction Manual
OPTIONS
100CS 100FC
10OLD 100SD 100ME 102PM 102RP 102RC 200BD
Master Color Standard Frequency Converter and Resolver
(5 MHz input) Pulse Shaper and Line Driver Color Sync Driver
Module Extender
Pulse Monitor Remote Control Panel
Resolver Control Bar and Dot Generator
1100SD required for composite output) 200CB1/CB2 Color Bar Generator ( 2modules)
(100SD required for composite output)
Extra Instruction Manual SPG-120N NTSC Sync Generator
Extra Instruction Manual
SPG-130N NTSC Sync Generator
OPTIONS 130TA 130BD 130SI 100ME
AC0-131 OPTIONS
Timing Assignment Color Black Output Source ( dent Module Extender Extra Instruction Manual
NTSC/PAL Automatic Changeover Unit
131PM
131RP 100ME
Pulse Monitor ( 2modules)
Remote Control Panel Module Extender
Extra Instruction Manual
$3780.00
655.00
555.00 255.00 225.00
65.00 190.00 1100.00 525.00 240.00
710.00
55.00 2295.00
55.00 2730.00
$ 410.00 275.00 375.00 65.00 55.00
2260.00
$ 440.00 455.00 65.00 35.00
VT- 116
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LEITCH VIDEO OF AMERICA,
825k Greenbrier Circle
Chesapeake, VA 23320 (804) 424-7920 Telex II 710-882-4342
INC.
VIDEO PROCESSING AMPLIFIER
VPA-331N NTSC Video Processing Amplifier
FEATURES ·R5170A front panel SC/ H indication · H Et V blanking width adjustable · Selectable VIT retention ·Video gain control ·Chroma gain control · Fade to black · Soft white clip · Hard
white clip · Soft black clip · Hard or soft clamping · Input video lock · External reference lock ·Video and/or chroma AGC ·Total bypass ·Auxiliary video input ·Differential input ( optional) ·Equalizing ( optional) ·Cue dot ( optional)
The VPA-331N is a complete, broadcast quality Video Processing Amplifier requiring only one unit of rack space. It is an alternate version of the successful VPA-330N, featuring front panel controls for video and chroma levels, burst phase, set up and fade-to- black. An auxiliary video input has been added for a stand-by signal. The VPA automatically switches to this signal if this function is enabled and the main program input fails.
The VPA incorporates a high- stability color sync pulse generator capable of maintaining the EIA R5170A pulse and SC/ H phase specifications. In order to allow awide range
of operational flexibility, the VPA has independent adjustments for the various signal parameters. Horizontal and vertical blanking, for instance, can be adjusted to suit specific in- plant applications. Once established, the settings are accurately main-
tained.
The H sync to subcarrier phase relationship (SC/ H ) is established relative to the selected lock signal. The VPA front panel and the optional 33ORP-2 Auxiliary Remote Control
Panel have " Correct SC / H" indicators as a convenience for setting and monitoring.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Power Voltage Frequency Power consumption .
115/230 VAC 50/60 Hz 25 VA max.
10%
Video Input Level
Impedance Return loss
1Vpp 6dB composite video
75 ohm, terminating > 40dB to 4.2MHz
Auxiliary Video Input
Level
1Vpp 6dB com-
posite video
External Reference Level
Impedance Return loss
composite video with 40 IRE units sync Et burst 7 6dB 75 ohm, bridging > 40dB to 4.2MHz
e
Black Output
Number of outputs . . 1
Level
40 IRE units sync Et
burst, 7.5 IRE units
set-up
Timing
synchronous with
program output
Impedance
75 ohm
Return loss
> 37dB to 4.2MHz
Video Outputs Number of outputs . 2 ( program Et pre-
view)
Total bypass
input to program
output
Impedance
75 ohm
Return loss
> 34dB to 4.2MHz
Output isolation > 40dB to 4.2MHz
Video Path
Video gain range
· 2.5dB
Chroma gain range
2.5dB
Frequency response
0.1dB to 5MHz
Line tilt
< 0.5%
Field tilt
< 0.5%
Differential phase . . < 0.2°
Differential gain < 0.5%
S/N ratio
> 60dB to 4.2MHz
(pp signal to rms
noise)
Hum
> 54dB below 1Vpp
Blanking Interval Regeneration
Sync level
40 IRE Units, adjust-
able
Burst level
40 IRE Units, adjust-
able
Set-up
7 5IRE units, adjust-
able
Htiming range
- 1ps
Htiming resolution . < 10 ns
H lock jitter
< 5ns
Pulse widths
per R5170A, adjust-
able
H blanking start
nominal 5p5
Hblanking finish . nominal - 1.0 + 0.5 )Js
V blanking
lines 10-21 on either
field may be blanked
or retained.
Burst phase Range
Resolution Jitter Burst lock frequency
360 0
< 0.1° < 0.2° 3.579545MHz · 30Hz
Temperature Range
Performance Operating
5° - 40°C ambient 0° - 50°C ambient
Mechanical
Mounting Frame
Height
175" ( 44mm)
Width
19" ( 483mm)
Depth from
mounting surface .. . 17.5" ( 445mm)
Net weight
19 lbs. ( 8.6kg I
VPA-331N
NTSC Video Processing Amplifier complete
with detachable power cord and instruction
manual
$4800.00
VPA-330N NTSC Video Processing Amplifier $4400.00
OPTIONS
330RP-1 Main Remote Control Panel
$660.00
33ORP-2
Aux. Remote Control Panel
Input video and reference video status
indications ( present, color, locked). Lock
mode selection ( input video, reference video,
automatic). Output SC/ H status indication.
AGC on/off. Burst kill640.00
$
33ORP-3
Cue Dot Control Panel
Selection and tally of steady and flashing cue
dot modes.
Initiation and tally of auto- timed cue dot
sequence. Cancel button500.00
$
The VPA-331N can be equipped with either one of the following optional modules:
330PE Processor Equalizer Differential input with 40 dB of common mode hum rejection. Equalization for up to 1500 ft. ( 450m) of
Belden 8281 or equivalent coaxial cable $305.00
330CD Cue Dot Generator Remotely controllable steady and flashing mode cue dot. Requires 33ORP-3 Cue Dot
Remote Control Panel.
Horizontal and vertical positioning of cue dot. Non- additive mixing of cue dot with
processed video. Auto timed cue dot sequence selection.
$240.00
100ME Module Extender
$65.00
Extra Instruction Manual
65.00
Reprinted with Permission by 1984, LEITCH VIDEO LIMITED
All rights reserved. This publication supersedes all previous releases Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 117
LEITCH VIDEO OF AMERICA,
825k Greenbrier Circle Chesapeake, VA 23320 (804) 424-7920 Telex II 710-882-4342
INC.
TEST GENERATOR
DTG-1010N
NTSC Digital Test Generator
This generator is the successor to the DTG-1000N. It retains all of the latter's capabilities and offers anumber of new features and improvements.
The DTG-1010N has ahigh efficiency switching power supply which operates on line voltage inputs from 90 to 135 VAC, 50/60 Hz. The new power supply also results in a25% weight reduction of the unit.
The generator's subcarrier frequency stability with crystal aging is less than 1Hz/month, and with temperature variations it is less than 2 Hz/ 10°C. A facility has been added so that burst can be switched on or off.
Two new test signals are now available:
a) Modulated Pedestal for chroma noise measurements, and b) Sync without Set-up for transmitter power calibration
H blanking has been narrowed to 10.6 ps and vertical blanking width is selectable as 20 or 21 lines
DTG-1010N
NTSC Digital Test Generator with detachable power cord and
instruction manual
$10,500.00
DIG- 1100N
NTSC Digital Test Generator CTG-240N NTSC Calibration Test Generator CBG-230N
NTSC Encoded Color Bar Generator
$ 5295.00 6950.00 2200.00
OPTIONS 1000ME
Module Extender 101ORP
Remote Control Panel Height: 1.75" ( 44mm)
Width: 19" ( 483mm)
Depth from mtg surface: 2.5" ( 64mm) Net weight: 2.4 lbs. ( 1.1kg) 100ME
Module Extender ICBG-230N / CTG-240N 230GD
Grating 8. Dot Generator ICBG-230N I Extra Instruction Manual ( CBG-230N)
Extra Instruction Manual ICTG-240N I Extra Instruction Manual ( 1100N/1010N)
$ 225.00
730.00 65.00
285.00 50.00 55.00 65.00
TEST SIGNAL TYPES Linearity Mode
Modulated Ramp dto. Low AP L dto. High APL
Modulated Staircase 110 step) dto. Low APL dto. High APL Staircase 110 step) Composite ( full field)
HF Response Mode
Multiburst 100% Multiburst 100% with luminance Multiburst 50% Multiburst 50% with luminance Multipulse 2T Pulse and Bar Modulated 12.5T Pulse and Bar Combination ( full field)
LF Response Mode
Window Alternate Window 240 Hz Square Wave 60 Hz Square Wave 30 Hz Square Wave
2second bounce 8second bounce Sync and Burst
Monitor Alignment Mode SMPTE Alignment Color Bars
EIA Color Bars Full Field Color Bars
with luminance Red Grating Grating and Dots Cross Dot Timing Vector
Ancillary Mode
MTS (Multiple Test Signal) Safe Title Area Color Response Modulated Pedestal Staircase ( 5step) Black Gray Luminance Ramp
VT- 118
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LENCO, INC., ELECTRONICS DIVISION
300 North Maryland St. Jackson, MO 63755 (314) 243-3147 ( 800) 325-8494 TWX 910-760-1 38 2
menraxe, wiarerr.n.r..m.roormb.
\
PFM-300B
· . .# · ;
:· · :·
PFM-301
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
PMG- 312 PFT-314
PGS-315
PSG- 310
PMG-312 MASTER SYNC GENERATOR The PMG-312 is a professional Master Color Sync Generator designed to meet the most demanding specifications for performance and stability. The design criterion was to provide a high
quality master color sync generator that includes all the features desired by the discerning engineer. Utilization of the latest state of the art techniques are incorporated in the PMG-312. $2500.00
PFM-300B FRAME AND POWER SUPPLY
PFT-314 FRAME TIMING MODULE The PFT-314 basically has the same system responsibility as its sister
The PFM-300B Frame is the heart of the 300 System. It consists of a
power transformer, the PPS- 302B Power Supply, and nine cells with
connectors mounted on a " mother board". The PPS- 302B supplies
the power busses in the frame with + /- 15VDC and + 8VDC.
$780.00
PFM-300/1 300 System frame with 2power supplies
885.00
PFM-301 Unlike the PFM-300B, the PFM-301 is a system frame with a dual
unit, the PGS-315 Generator Substitute unit. That is, its primary
function is to receive an externa: signal and supply the PFM-300
Frame mother board with all the six drive signals. The PFT-314 has
major differences: The input signal is a Composite Reference Signal
(CRS) instead of individual drive signals; provides acomplete set of
output signals for use external to the frame; has advance timing
capabilities instead of just delay, and subcarrier is phase locked to
H Sync.
$ 995.00
power transformer and power supply. It is designed to house two
PMG-312 Master Sync Generators and one PCO-318 Changeover unit
only.
$ 1375.00
ACCESSORIES:
PPS- 302-- Spare Power Supply for PFM-300 Frame
PBL-305 -- 300 Series Blank Panel -- Single Width PBL-306 -- 300 Series Blank Panel -- Double Width PEX-308 -- 300 Series Extender Board PEX - 309 -- 300 Series Extender for Double Width Units
$130.00 13.00 14.00 65.00
120.00
PSG- 310 DIGITAL COLOR SYNC GENERATOR W/RS-170 GENLOCK The PSG- 310 Digital Color Sync Generator exemplifies the latest in design techniques of digital engineering. The unique circuit allows us to offer an ultra- stable and trouble free generator, with exclusive
PGS-315 SYNC GENERATOR SUBSTITUTE The PGS-315 Sync Generator Substitute module is a valuable member of the overall 300 System concept. It has the primary function of replacing the PSG- 310 or PSG- 311 Sync Generators when external drive sources are available to the PFM-300 Frame. The PGS-315 accepts Sync, Blanking, H- Drive, V- Drive and Subcarrier from an external source, processes these signals and distributes them to the proper busses in the frame. The identical digital delay circuits, as described in the PSD-340 System Delay Module, are also in the PGS-315 module, providing the system timing capabilities for the frame. Because the PGS-315 is not a generator, although in this application it is performing the same function, the pulses supplied to the frame are absolutely jitter free and can be perfectly timed. $550.00
PFI-316 FRAME INTERFACE The PFI-316 Frame Interface module is aunique and inexpensive way
features not normally found in broadcast quality equipment.$1125.00
OPTION 1: Variable Blanking Width Assembly
155.00
of allowing an external generator to supply signals to the PFM-300 Frame. It has the primary function of replacing the PSG- 310 or
PSG- 311 DIGITAL COLOR SYNC GENERATOR The PSG- 311 Digital Color Sync Generator incorporates the same
unique design techniques that are found in the PSG- 310 Sync Generator. The only exception it in the Genlock circuitry. The PSG-311 was engineered to operate with helical VTR's or other
equipment that supplies unstable time base signals. $ 1125.00
PSG- 311 when external drive pulses are available to the PFM-300
Frame. The PFI-316 accepts SYNC, BLANKING, H- DRIVE, V- DRIVE, SUBCARRIER, and BURST FLAG from an external source
for proper distribution to the mother board busses in the frame. There are no delay circuits in the PFI-316. Its function is simply to apply the proper level and impedance of each signal to the Frame.
$375.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 119
LENCO, INC. ELECTRONICS DIVISION
300 North Maryland St. Jackson, MO 63755 (314) 243-3147 ( 800) 325-8494 TWX 910-760-1382
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
PP B-325
PSS-324
PFF-329
The 300 System ( continued)
PCO-317 AUTOMATIC SYNC CHANGEOVER SWITCH
The PCO-317 Automatic Sync Changeover Switch is a remarkable state of the art device designed to instantly recognize the failure of any synchronizing signals and immediately switch to an alternate source. Signal sensing circuits monitor each input for the level and
timing of the sync, blanking, horizontal drive, vertical drive, burst flag, and subcarrier signals. Upon loss of the primary generator, the PCO-317 will supply the frame busses with the alternate source only if their signals are acceptable to the changeover module's parameters. It will not switch to afaulty generator. $585.00
PCO-318-- Automatic Sync Generator Changeover w/ Black Burst (for PFM-301 frame only) ( not shown) $ 880.00
Option 1 Black Burst Generator, ( for PCO-318 only). $ 250.00
Option 2 Remote Control for ° C0-318
200.00
PCB- 320 ENCODED COLOR BAR GENERATOR
The PCB- 320 Encoded Color Bar Generator is aprecision test signal
generator engineered to conform to the EIA-RS-189-A and NTSC
specifications. Reflecting the progressive concept of the 300 System,
the PCB- 320 includes the new SMPTE Alignment Color Bar Test
Signal with chroma and black set signals. The encoder is a true
NTSC standard as evidenced by the precise filtering of the Iand Ct
channels shown by the waveform.
One of the exclusive features of the PCB- 320 is the single control
composite video delay circuit which, for the first time, allows system
timing of test signals.
$1050.00
PBB-321 BLACK BURST GENERATOR
The Lenco PBB-321 Black Burst Generator is aprecision professional
broadcast quality Black Burst Generator that provides a " Color Black"
video signal composed of composite sync, set-up and color burst. This
signal is used as the black reference input to switching systems,
cameras or may be Jsed as asignal source to genlock remote sync
generators to " House" sync.
$595.00
PBD-322 BAR DOT/VISUAL REFERENCE GENERATOR
The PBD-322 Bar Dct/ Visual Reference Generator is one of the 300
System's most technically advanced signal generators. It is two
separate and independent generators providing the standard dot
grading signals, and a new linearity test signal, including a " safe
title" signal.
The Bar Dot Generator digitally produces EIA standard horizontal
and vertical bars, cross hatch, and dot signals used in the testing for
convergence of color monitors and camera sweep circuits. Horizontal
and vertical position controls, plus pattern selection, are located on
the front panel.
$875.00
PMB-323
PMB-323 MULTIBURST/SWEEP GENERATOR
The PMB-323 Multiburst and Sweep Generator is a combination of
two precision test signal generators which are required for overall
system frequency response measurements. A front panel switch
provides for selection of either the Multiburst Signal, the Sweep
Signal, or both ( on alternate lines). Other switches allow for the
selection of full or reduced amplitude and burst on- off. The Multi-
burst frequencies are preset to EIA standards but burst frequencies can be adjusted to 10 MHz if required. Stability of both amplitude
and frequency is assured by aprecision function generator operating
within afeedback loop. The burst levels are fixed and cannot change
as are the sync and setup levels. The Sweep Generator provides a
linear sweep at a horizontal rate from 0.5 MHz to approximately 12
MHz with overall flatness of 0.2 dB. Fixed markers are provided at
2.0 MHz intervals.
$995.00
PSS-324 STAIRSTEP/RAMP GENERATOR
The PSS-324 Stairstep/ Ramp Generator provides a precision test signal for measuring differential phase and gain, luminance linearity,
and burst phase error of avideo system. An exclusive feature of the
generator is anegative signal for all combinations of test signals. This
is avery important function for the testing of differential phase and
gain in the burst region. Strict conformity to the standards of IEEE
206 is adhered to, as well as atrue video bounce test that conforms
to standard APL definitions.
$1100.00
PPB-325 SIN' PULSE WINDOW GENERATOR
The Lenco Model PPB-325 Sin' Pulse Window Generator is another in the series of fine, precision, state of the art signal generators.
Unique engineering and packaging techniques have provided the following nine precision test signals in a one module width plug-in unit: Modulated 12.5T and 20T, T, 21, or T/2 pulses, window or bar signals and the exclusive " pluge" pulse. The PPB-325, with a combination of front panel switches and internal strapping options, can provide almost any combination of the nine signals. This feature
was designed to allow the user to determine the proper test signals which are best suited for his particular system application. $ 1295.00
PFF-329 BLACK BURST/BACKGROUND GENERATOR
The Black Burst section of the PFF-329 provides a " Color Black"
video signal composed of composite sync, set-up, and color burst. This signal is used as the black input to switcning systems, or may
be used as a signal source to genlock remote sync generators to "House" sync.
The Color Background section produces asolid field of color and,
when connected to the input of aspecial effects generator or video
insert keyer, provides color backgrounds for titles and other inserts.
A standard feature of all 300 System generators is acomposite delay
which provides for delaying the output signal up to 1.5 pS to assist
in system timing.
$ 680.00
VT- 120
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LENCO, INC., ELECTRONICS DIVISION
300 North Maryland St Jackson, MO 63755 (314) 243-3147 ( 800) 325-8494 TVVX 910-760-1382
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
PBT-342
PPA-343
PFO-344
The 300 System ( continued)
PSD-340 SYSTEM DELAY MODULE
The PS D-340 System Delay Module has completely changed the
traditional system timing techniques as they are now used. This
unique system concept obsoletes the use of pulse and subcarrier
distribution amplifiers, as well as excessive cable or other external
delay devices used in system timing. The PSD-340 will supply all
drive signals to any video source, including subcarrier, with the
unique capability of timing these signals to your system require-
ments. This jitter free device can be compared with having an
individual genlock sync generator driving each camera, switcher,
VTR, etc.
$550.00
PST- 341 SYSTEM TIMING MODULE
W/OPTIONAL BLACK BURST OUTPUT The PST- 341 System Timing Module is a new generation of system timing equipment added to the " 300 SYSTEM". It not only has delay, but advance as well. The PST- 341 requires the Composite Reference Signal ( CASI, from the PMG-312 Master Sync Generator via the PFM-300 Frame mother board. This Composite Reference Signal supplies Master Sync Generator timing information to the PST-341 for the purpose of system distribution and timing. $995.00
PBT-342 BLACK BURST TIMING
The PBT-342 Blackburst Timing Module not only has delay, but
advance as well. The PBT-342 requires the Composite Reference
Signal ( CAS) from the PMG-312 Master Sync Generator via the
PFM-300 Frame mother board. This Composite Reference Signal
supplies Master Sync Generator timing information to the PBT-342 for
the purpose of system distribution and timing of blackburst required
devices.
$995.00
PPA-343 PULSE DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER The PPA-343 Pulse Distribution Amplifier is an important module in the overall concept of the 300 System. Although the PSD-340 System Delay Module is the modern method of pulse distribution and system timing, there are still many applications where the standard methods of individual pulse distribution are required.$285.00
OPTION 1: Pulse Delay Assembly for PPA-343
160.00
PFO-344 FAN- OUT PULSE DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
The PFO-344 is auniversal fan- out amplifier consisting of six separate
and independent DA cells. Each cell has one input and one output with
unity gain. Each cell can be programmed by changing connector posi-
tions to select any combination of drive pulses. The pulses are made
available on the frame mother board by any of the 300 Series sync
generators or an interface module.
$375.00
PSA-346 SUBCARRIER DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
The PSA-346 Subcarrier Distribution Amplifier was designed to
supplement the versatile 300 System's unique concept and incorpor-
ates the same state of the art design techniques found in all of the
300 System modules. The PSA-346 is a precision, ultra- stable,
regenerative subcarrier amplifier whose advanced circuitry provides a
pure, distortion free 3.58 MHz sine wave.
$395.00
PVA-350 VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER The PVA-350 Video Distribution Amplifier reflects a new concept in engineering techniques, bringing to the 300 System a versatile state of the art video amplifier with outstanding performance characteris-
tics. The PVA-350 is flat to 15 MHz, has a unique automatic DC offset control, and offers low noise, excellent stability, and virtually no distortion. A differential ampl fier on the input is standard in the
PVA-350, and provides 70 dB of common mode rejection. $ 290.00
OPTION 1: Feedback Clamp Assembly OPTION 2: Cable Equalizer Assembly OPTION 3: Sync Adding Assembly
110.00 85.00 60.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 121
LENCO, INC., ELECTRONICS DIVISION
300 North Maryland St Jackson, MO 63755 (314) 243-3147 ( 800) 325-8494 TWX 910-760-1382
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
PVD-354
PVA-351
1
PS W-367
THE 300 SYSTEM ( continued)
PVA-351 WHITE CLIP VIDEO AMPLIFIER The PVA-351 Video White Clip Distribution Amplifier has adifferential high impedance looping input that is standard and provides more than 60 dB of common mode rejection for reduced ground loop hum pickup. Gain is front panel adjustable over a +/- 6 dB range. Frequency response is flat to 10 MHz. The PVA-351 offers low noise and excellent stability with virtually no signal degradation. Four 75 ohms source terminated DC coupled outputs are provided with excellent low frequency transient response and 40 dB of isolation.
$365.00
PVD-354 VARIABLE DELAY VIDEO AMPLIFIER The PVD-354 Variable Delay Amplifier is a precision device that has widespread system applications when quality and accuracy of video timing is desired. Most passive video display devices have a very sharp frequence roll- off above 5 MHz and show an insertion loss of about 6 dB. This requires the use of a video distribution amplifier with enough gain to bring the signal up to normal. The PVD-354, however, is a wideband device that has no insertion loss, and will provide up to 537 uS of equalized video delay, with infinite resolution of delay setting. An option to the PVD-354 is aplug-in board that will provide amaximum of 1.051 pS of video delay. $ 950.00
PRC-365 PROCESSING AMPLIFIER w/SYNC GENERATOR
The PRC-365 is a high performance video processing device. It is
designed for use in studios, master control facilities or transmitter
locations. It features standard or helical lock, differential video input,
luminance only black clip, a soft white clip, internal digital sync
generator, vertical interval line select, front panel controlled pedestal,
genlock capability and afront panel LED that indicates the presence
or absence of video. The PRC-365 requires only the PFM-300 Frame
and Power Supply for operation.
$1890.00
PSW-3676 x1TEST SET SVVITCHER
The PSW 367 6x1Test Switcher was designed to provide aunique
and economical method of selecting the various output signals from
the test signal generators that may be instaJled in the PFM-300 Frame.
In addition to the six test module signals, provisions have been
included to allow the PSW-367 to switch to either the " Gen- lock
Video" or one other external video source. The PSW-367 will switch
during the vertical interval and the LED display will constantly monitor
the switch status.
$550.00
VT- 122
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice
LENCO, INC., ELECTRONICS DIVISION
300 North Maryland St. Jackson, MO 63755 (314) 243-3147 ( 800) 325-8494 TVVX 910-760-1382
PSG- 412
PCD-463
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
1
1111MaitatiMalinamo
PVS-430
PCE-466P
THE 400 SYSTEM
PSG-412 Master Sync Generator
The PSG-412 is a Master Sync Generator with genlock. This unit
meets the proposed RS- 170A specifications. It maintains an accurate
SC / H phase condition. There are 2outputs of each drive pulse plus
blackburst, video, CRS, burst flag & color field identification. CFI is
programmed for field 1line 10. An ovenized crystal is used to maintain
an accurate internal timebase. All pulse widths are adjustable except
VD and field ID. Vertical blanking is selectable between line 17 thru 21.
Also converts the genlock video to RS- 170A by inserting aregenerated
blackburst signal.
$3450.00
PSG -412P Master Sync Generator
The PSG-412P is aMaster Sync Generator that meets the PAL B, G Et I
standards. It uses an ovenized crystal to maintain avery accurate time
base. The PSG- 412P outputs two each of the following pulses: HD,
VD, sync, blanking, burst flag, subcarrier, black burst, PAL pulse, a
13.5 MHz sine wave and color field identification. All pulse widths
except HD, VD, and CFI are adjustable. Vertical blanking is selectable
between lines 20 to 25. The PSG-412P maintains an accurate SC/ H
condition.
$3575.00
PCO -418 Automatic Generator Changeover
The PCO-418 Automatic Generator Changeover Switch instantly
recognizes the failure of any of nine pulses and immediately switches
to an alternate generator. There are nine LEDs metering each genera-
tor. A nine position DIP switch allows the lock-out of any of the nine
generator pulses. A front panel switch selects GEN -1or GEN -2 or
Auto. The unit switches on failure of HD, VD, SY, SC, BL, CRS, BF,
BB and CFI.
$1975.00
PCO-418P Automatic Generator Changeover
The PCO-418P Automatic Generator Changeover Switch instantly
recognizes the failure of any of nine pulses and immediately switches
to an alternate generator. The unit meets the PAL B, G Et Istandards.
There are nine LEDs metering each generator. A nine position DIP
switch allows the lock-out of any of the nine pulses. A front panel
switch selects GEN -1, GEN -2or Auto. The unit switches on failure of
HD, VD, SY, SC, BL, BF, PAL pulse, black burst or CFI ( Field
Reference Pulse).
$2175.00
VNM -428 Video Noise Meter
The VNM-428 is aVideo Noise Meter that offers the in-service capa-
bility of making accurate real time signal-to-noise measurements. It
has a built-in calibrator that insures an accuracy of 1% through its
range of 28.5 dB to 76 dB. The signal-to-noise ratio is shown directly
on alarge LED display. The VN M-428 can be calibrated to read directly
in either the EIA or PAL- M system standards.
$1925.00
PVS-430 Videoscope
The PVS-430 provides atrue method for certifying the correct SC / H
Phase relationship. The PVS-430 will measure very accurately the SC/H phase relationship and compare the video input of aswitcher or
mixer for precise and accurate system timing. In an editing system, the
Videoscope provides auseful method of determining off-tape SC/ H
Phase.
$3150.00
PCD-463 Chroma Decoder
The PCD-463 is aChroma Decoder with two line comb filtering. The
input is any stable NTSC video and has two outputs each of 1V p- p
RGB. One output of 4V p- psync is available on the rear panel. The unit
genlocks to the input video signal. ' he front panel controls are video
level, saturation, hue and blanking position. It is self-contained with
internal power supply.
$2475.00
PCE -466 Color Encoder
The PCE-466 Encoder produces an NTSC/EIA color signal from either
a three or four channel video source. The fourth, or luminance
channel, is optional. The encoder requires red, green, blue, sync, SC
8. blanking input. Split field color bars meeting RS- 189A are standard.
Full field or split bars are selectable internally. Front panel switches allow the selection of operate, color bars, black burst or mono. All
inputs are 75 ohm loop-through. Two video outputs.
$2980.00
PCE -466P Color Encoder
The PCE-466P produces aPAL color signal from either athree or four
channel video source. The fourth or luminance channel is optional.
The encoder meets the PAL B, G Et Istandards. It requires the
following input signals: red, green, blue, sync, subcarrier, blanking
and burst gate. Color bars and reversed bars for setting decoder
chroma gain are standard. The front panel switches select operate,
color bars, black burst and mono. All inputs are 75 ohm loop-through.
There are two video outputs.
$3280.00
PSW-467 Vertical Interval Bridging Switcher
The PSW-467 is a 12 x 1 vertical interval bridging switcher. It is
designed to efficiently and economically route or delegate video
signals.
$1000.00
PAF-467 Audio Follow Bridging Switcher
The PAF -467 is a12 x1Audio Fo.low Video Switcher designed as a
companion to the PSW-467 Video Switcher.
$840.00
PSR-467 Remote Control
The PSR-467 Remote Control is a self-contained rackmounted unit
that can be located up to 1000 feet from the switcher location. It
requires no external power source because it receives its power from
the PSW-467 or PSW-468 Video Switcher.
$550.00
PSR-4673
Remote Control P.C. Board Assembly Only --
Electronics Only
$275.00
PSW-468 Remote Vertical Interval Video Switcher
The PSW-468 is a 12 x 1remotely controlled, vertical interval video
switcher. This switcher has no push buttons. All input switching is
controlled by the companion PSR-467 remote control unit or PSW-467
vertical interval switcher.
$875.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 123
LENCO, INC., ELECTRONICS DIVISION
4···· 300 North Maryland St. Jackson, MO 63755 (314) 243-3147 ( 800) 325-8494 TVVX 910-760-1382
COLOR SYNC GENERATOR/ENCODER
MODEL CSL-710
MODEL CCE-850
700 SERIES EQUIPMENT
Model CSL-710
The CSL-710 Digital Color Sync Generator is aprofessional broadcast piece of equipment that meets several applications. The generator has a complete complement of NTSC pulses meeting EIA RS- 170 specifications.
Two genlock modes of operation are provided by the CSL-710. The Standard genlock mode for RS- 170, and Helical genlock mode for unstable time base signals. The genlock circuit has a unique noise immunity circuit which makes the generator highly insensitive to noise or extreme changes in input levels. The incoming video is sensed by an extremely fast video presence detector, processed and locks the generator automatically to the 50% point of the sync pulse. The Helical genlock mode will lock to most helical scan video tape recorders. It will lock to the unstable time base signal and ignore the fact that information is missing during the head drop out period of the VTR. In the Helical mode, it does not require acoherent burst input to achieve lock. Input level for genlock is automatically compensated to maintain genlock on various input signal levels.
A temperature compensated crystal oscillator operating at 14.318180 MHz provides the stable master frequency source from which all pulses and subcarrier are derived. All pulse widths and levels are fixed per EIA standards.
Two sets of output are provided on the rear panel including Horizontal Drive, Vertical Drive, Blanking, Sync, Subcarrier and Burst Flag. The modern design front panel provides test points for pulse measurements. Adjustments for Horizontal Frequency, Horizontal and Vertical Phase and Subcarrier Phase as well as the selection of Standard or Helical genlock is located on the front panel. The unit is self contained, operating on 100 to 130 VAC and drawing only 24 watts.
CSL-710 Digital Color Sync Generator w/Genlock $ 1525.00
MOD- 1 Special Scan Rates
1875.00
800 SERIES EQUIPMENT
Model CCE-850
The CCE-850 is a complete NTSC compatible color encoder with a built-in color reference bar signal. The system is aself contained unit measuring only 1-3/4 inches high and 17 inches wide. It can be used as atable top unit or mounted in astandard 19" equipment rack.
It is awide band high resolution encoder primarily for the use with RGB color graphic generated information from acomputer processor unit.
The unit will encode most of the scan and resolution rasters presently offered by computer terminals. The output of the CCE-850 can be fed
to any standard NTSC color monitor or video tape recorder.
The required signal input is RGB with or without the presence of sync. An external sync input is available if the computer RGB signal is non- composite ( without sync.). The unit does not require an external
GEN locking sync generator to interface with the RGB graphics computer. An automatic sync input detector selects between video sync or external sync to generate blanking and burst. A video gating circuit automatically matches black levels and inserts new blanking. Blanking regeneration automatically adjusts to line lengths and field lengths to closely simulate NTSC specification.
In addition to the two composite NTSC type outputs, in order to reduce system timing problems, the CCE-850 features a very short signal delay ( 25Ons).
An image detail control on the front panel allows the operator to continuously compensate for high frequency losses in the system. A color reference pattern is switch selectable to aid in the adjustment of the NTSC color monitor.
Front panel controls are AC On/Off, Brightness, Color, Contrast, Detail, and Color Reference. Rear panel connections are high impedance looping RGB and sync input, two NTSC type composite video outputs source terminated 75 ohms.
The unit operates on 115/230 volts AC, 50/60 Hz. Power approximately 10 watts.
CCE-850 RGB to NTSC Computer Encoder
$1900.00
CCE-8501 Adapts to 10,1S Sync Pulse
190.00
VT- 124
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LINK ELECTRONICS
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY
TELEVISION EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATES, INC.
P.O. Box 393 S. Salem NY 10590-0393 (914) 763-8893 TVVX 710-575-2600 CA ( 213) 271-9570
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
285
216/2
gas
760
Video Distribution Amplifiers Type 280
The Video distribution amplifier type 280 is contained on a single 3-1/2" high module. This module contains mains transformer, power supply and active circuits. A plug-in daughter board type 281 contains equalizing and gain setting components. This board can readily be changed from one VDA type 280 to another. The gain and equalization characteristics will then be transferred to the new module. One 280 module can thus serve as a spare for a variety of 280/281 combinations.
FEATURES
·Single unit-- handles video or up to four volt pulses without adjustment
·Multipurpose -- fixed or variable gain, fixed or variable equalization, pre or post cable equalization
·Gain and equalization set by plug-in board · Balanced input for rejection of unwanted common mode signals ·Low power consumption for long and trouble- free life.
286 Rack frame to accommodate up to eight distribution amplifiers
w / one main 287 w/two mains
$ 258.00 323.00
280 Distribution amplifier module ( Less 281) 281 Daughter board for 280 -- All options
232.00 32.00
283 Rear video connector assembly for 280
65.00
204 Extender board for 280 Series
108.00
282 Six " Knobs" equalizing distribution amplifier module for com-
plex equalization of individual adjustment of different parts of the re-
sponse curve
387.00
285 Two knob distribution amplifier for frequent adjustment of gain
and equalization
323.00
216/2 Portable case to accommodate two distribution amplifier 280
Series with mains
237.00
Blank Panel for 1-4 module width
22.00
Audio Distribution Amplifiers 760 Series
The Audio Distribution Amplifier, type 760 is contained on a single 3-1 / 2" high 12U) module. This module contains mains transformer, power supply and active circuits. A.C. mains connects to the module through a separate isolated connector and not through the printed circuit edge connector. This feature considerably enhances safety aspects as well as reducing the likelihood of breakdown in high humidity conditions. To extend the versatility of the unit a variety of connector units and transformer modules are available. All the units fit into the same rack frame as the Link VDA, type 280.
FEATURES
· Low noise and low distortion · Balanced and floating bridging irput. · Balanced, centre grounded outputs-- fully floating using optional
transformer module ·20 dB variable gain range ·Compact, self powered modules with low power consumption · Mechanically compatible with 280 Video DA series -- uses same rack
frame
760 Audio Distribution Amplifier
762 Rear Connector- screw
763 Rear connector for 760
766 Rear Connector-varien
767 5Balanced and Floating
768 2Balanced
769 Extender board for 760
286 Rack frame for 8units w/one main
287
w/two mains
$215.00 97.00
183.00 95.00
237.00 129.00 10R.00
258.00 323.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 125
3m BROADCAST PRODUCTS DIVISION 3M Center Bldg. 225-3N St. Paul, MN 55144 (612) 733-8132
MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM/ ROUTING SWITCHER
woo //
IIIIMMX\XN:
MODEL 6500
MODEL 6500 Machine Control System
FEATURES ·Controls VTR's, audio tape machines or film chains ·Coax control linels), simplifies installation ·Machine Interface Decoder -- controls eight functions per decoder;
maximum of 16 functions per machine ·Control of each machine's mechanical functions can be delegated
to any number of machine control panels -- Each control panel can operate up to ten 1101 different categories of machines ·The central 6500 Microprocessor Controller can be programmed to provide special functions, such as temporary or permanent assignment of specific machines to aspecific control panel ·Verification of machine function(s) ·The 6500 Machine Control System can be operated as astand alone system or it can be integrated with the 3M 40X, AX and Series H Routing Switcher Systems ·Machine Control can also be assigned from avideo terminal and display controller ·Automation of machine control and switching commands available ·Machine Lockout capability is astandard feature ·Tape Duplicator environment in Master-- Slave Machine Control situation. Allows abank of machines, i.e. 4, 6, 8, etc., to be controlled from one machine Interface Decoder in a " ganged condition."
The 6500 Machine Control System is amicroprocessor/software base control system which allows an operator the capability for remote control of the mechanical functions of machines. It eliminates patch panels or complex relay switching systems where the delegation of machine control is required. Connection between the microprocessor, the machine interface decoders, and the machine control panel(s) is via coax cable. The machine interface decoder module interfaces directly to the specific machinels). In addition to handling the mechanical functions of machines, the decoder will provide verification that aspecific machine has actually performed the requested function, if such atally is available from the machine electronics.
MODEL AX
MODEL AX Series Routing Switcher
FEATURES ·Mono or stereo ·8-3/4" High rack frame ·All plug-in construction ·Balanced input Et output amps ·Transformer input ( optional) ·Plug-in control boards for every channel ·All solid state ·400 Crosspoints/freme ·FET Crosspoints ·Card frame construction 20 x20 or 40 x10 mono configuration or
20 x 10 stereo ·Low cost ·Available with 6500 Microprocessor control
An audio routing switcher not only serves to eliminate the patch panel but provides a good portion of the audio distribution. Output distribution amplifiers are available with six 16) outputs.
Card frame construction is used to house two independent 20 ( input) x 10 ( output) matrices in the same frame. These two matrices may be combined to obtain either a20 x10 stereo matrix or 40 x10-20 x20 mono configuration. Input isolation is maintained with an isolation amplifier which bridges the line and provides alow driving impedance to the crosspoints. Each amplifier has provisions for balanced input feeds with common mode hum rejection.
For those who want transformer inputs, space on back panel is allotted for mounting the transformers (optional). The crosspoints are high impedance FET-MOS integrated circuit modules and offer line isolation and no measurable loading effect.
Each AX Series frame occupies 8-3/4" of rack space. A full width removable front panel allows access to the plug-in boards. Input connectors are gold plated multipin type. If terminal block type interconnect wiring is desired, ready made pigtail cables are available. Outputs wired to a plug-in terminal strip provided for each output furnishes all power required by that unit. Every card frame board has a power regulator for isolation. The power supply can be removed by simply removing two screws and three connectors.
The AX Series can be purchased in increments of four inputs and any number of outputs. To add more outputs than the capacity of asingle frame requires looping the inputs of additional frames. If more than 40 inputs is required, additional frames can be cascaded together. Includes output amplifiers with + 21 dBm maximum output on each of six ( 6) outputs.
VT- 126
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
3m
BROADCAST PRODUCTS DIVISION
3M Center Bldg. 225-3N St. Paul, MN 55144
(612) 733-8132
ROUTING SWITCHER
SERIES H
Compact size, excellent mechanical and electronic integrity, and circuit redundancy give the 3M Series H switching equipment the best product performance per dollar of any Routing Switcher on the market.
The Series H Routing Switcher offers anumber of other benefits as
well. They include:
· No internal maintenance or service adjustments
· DC coupled inputs to outputs allow analog switching circuits to handle certain data signals without DC- restore circuitry
· Bi-directional, parallel control bus with positive feedback from crosspoint latches gives immediate and positive confirmation of crosspoint latching
·Pre-tested and pre- adjusted hybrid circuits
· Microprocessor control system simplifies design, maximizes dependability
· Single line coax control capability simplifies wiring and connections
·Separate plug-in video and audio output amplifier cards to assure that failures are isolated to one point and disable only one output if removed
·Each video path can have multiple associated audio paths ( i.e., stereo, SMPTE time code, multi- lingua) applications)
·The microcontrol system can provide one video with up to 5audio levels with separate control for each level
·Audio- follow- video, video only, audio only, and audio breakaway for easy adaptation to any switching application
·I/O ports for RS232 computer terminal control, and standardized I/O protocol to allow for external CPU control by avariety of devices
·Improved temperature uniformity, hybrid ceramic substrates have stable and predictable dissipation characteristics
· Easy and cost-effective switcher expansion through modular building block design with full expansion compatibility
·Control circuits are distributed by card, another valuable circuit redundancy feature
Hybrid Circuits
A hybrid circuit consists of ahigh purity alumina ceramic substrate on which various alloys and resistive materials are printed to form conductor paths and resistive circuit elements.
Miniature leadless discrete components are attached directly to the substrate. Adjustments are made to screened resistors and capacitors by laser trimming. Each microelectronic hybrid substrate contains an entire circuit function. These centralized, modular functions include video and audio crosspoints, video and audio input amplifiers, and video and audio output amplifiers. Seven building block hybrid circuits make up the Series H system. They are:
·16 x2Video Crosspoint ·16 x2Audio Crosspoint ·Quad Audio Input Amplifier ·Quad Video Input Amplifier · Block Control Logic ·Video Output Amplifier ·Audio Output Amplifier
16 x16 Audio/Video Matrix Card
The 16 x 16 Audio/Video Matrix Card is the basis of the Series H, Model 128 x32 Audio/Video Switching System. It provides up to 16 inputs and 16 outputs of audio and video switching on a 11-1/2" x 15-1/4" circuit board. The audio/video matrix card is simply acarrier card for the hybrid circuits. All switching matrix functions are contained on this single card, demonstrating the packaging density that can be achieved using hybrid circuit design. This new technology allows crosspoint densities never before attained.
SERIES H MODEL 128 x32
INITIAL SYSTEM
ITS IT % A V ROUTING SWITCH. NPUTS
H- SERIES SWITCHING EXPANSION ILLUSTRATION
_..
MICROPROCESTS O UR
2S4 T·36· A V ROUTING TVVITCHEil
-%
% PUTS
CONTROLLER
-% PANELS
I%
3%
TO MATRICES
f
)2/
2
SUMPIONG MAP
120 X 32 IFLTUREI
t33
ut
-1 I
1211 X 32
SUMMING AMA
1211 S32 1FU3LRE1
128 X 32 SA
SUMMING AIIIP
SO
'2E_132 (FUTURE,
·NOTE USING ADDITIONAL FRAM S · ND COMBINER! CAN PROVIDE SWITTCMINFT SYSTEMS AS LARGE AS 1024 1024
The 16 x16 Audio/Video Matrix Card consists of the following hybrid circuit devices:
·16 x2Video Crosspoint ·16 x2Audio Crosspoint ·Quad Video Input Amplifier ·Quad Audio Input Amplifier ·Logic Control for the 16 x 16 A / V Matrix Card
Video and Audio Output Amplifiers
The Series H Routing Switcher employs individual hybrid video and audio output amplifiers. These amplifiers are placed on separate output amplifier carrier cards. Ar example, the Model 128 x32 uses five output amplifier motherboards. Two of the boards have 7plug-in audio and video output circuits, and the remaining 3 boards have 6 audio and video output circuits, for atotal of 32 outputs. Individual video and audio outputs are used for ease of maintenance and card changing. This technique also restricts malfunctiors to no more than one video or audio output circuit.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 127
3M
15X SERIES
BROADCAST PRODUCTS DIVISION
3M Center Bldg. 225-3N St. Paul, MN 55144 (612) 733-8132
The Series 15X Routing Switcher offers an inexpensive method of eliminating patch panels and providing selectable distribution of audio and video signals. Any output channel can be independently programmed to select any input signal. The 15X Series offers very flexible control options which are divided into two categories - local and remote which can be intermixed within the same frame. Units are available in sizes: 2outputs, 6outputs, and 12 outputs. Also available with Audio Breakaway.
Plug-in input and output amplifiers are used for video and audio. The audio input amplifiers incorporate balanced inputs with common
mode rejection for cancelling hum on input lines. The video inputs have looping BNC connectors and terminating switches.
LOCAL CONTROL
Description
Price
15 in x3out 15 in x4out 15 in x5out 15 in x6out 15 in x7out 15 in x8out 15 in x9out 15 in x10 out 15 in x11 out
15 in x12 out
$3300.00
3600.00 4000.00
4300.00
4800.00 5100.00 5400.00 5800.00
6000.00 6400.00
REMOTE CONTROL
Description
Price
15 in x3out
$ 4300.00
15 in x4out
4800.00
15 in x5out
5700.00
15 in x6out
6300.00
15 in x7out
7500.00
15 in x8out
8500.00
15 in x9out
9300.00
15 in x10 out
10,000.00
15 in x11 out
10,800.00
15 in x12 out
11,500.00
OPTIONS Description Vertical Interval Switching ( remote only)
Audio Input/Output Cable ( 6' pigtails) 6out frame 12 out frame
Remote Control Cable (assembled and tested)
Second Audio Level Switching ( remote only) 6out frame, add 12 out frame, add
Expansion Modules for: 15X Local Control Chassis, per output 15X Remote Control Chassis, per output For 12 out frame with less than 6outputs
Price $ 350.00
170.00 340.00
50.00 + 1.00/ft.
1240.00 1475.00
510.00 820.00 1500.00
ROUTING SWITCHERS
1
15X 15X Series Video/Audio Routing Switchers · Bridging Crosspoints ·Choice of Local or Remote Controls · Modular - Field Expandable · Three Frame Sizes · Low Crosstalk · Second Audio Level (optional) · LED Status Indicators · Input and Output Amps · Terminating Switches on Inputs · Audio Breakaway Local Control Mechanically interlocked pushbutton switches are used to select and switch the audio, video and tally signals. Each video crosspoint is isolated from feeding back through the switch to the newly selected signal eliminating the glitch on other monitors. Each output has a separate plug-in tray containirg the mechanical switch as well as the audio and video output amplifiers which are also separate plug-in units. LED status indicators above each pushbutton illuminate when the corresponding switch is depressed. Remote Control Standard remote controls are available for momentary pushbuttons. Remote control pushbutton trays are interchangeable with the local modules. Only D.C. voltages are used for control. Switch module assemblies are available in 12 x 1and 15 x 1sizes.
101 SERIES
Model 101 Vertical Interval Bridging Switcher
15X-2 Series Video/Audio Routing Switchers
15X-2
Local Control, Video Only: 15 in x1out
15 in x2out
$2000.00 2200.00
Local Control, Audio/Video: 15 in x1out 15 in x2out
2300.00 2500.00
Remote Control, Video Only: 15 in x1out 15 in x2out
2300.00 2500.00
Remote Control, Audio/Video: 15 in x1out 15 in x2out
2600.00 2950.00
15X-2 with 1Local Control Panel and 1Remote Control Panel:
Video Only
2400.00
Audio and Video
2800.00
Accessories/Options
350.00
Vertical Interval Switching ( remote only), add Remote Control Cable ( assembled and tested), add
50.00 + 1.00/ft.
A10 x1 bridging switcher with built-in video and audio DA's featuring vertical interval switching on all inputs; lighted push buttons; and switch position memory. The switch position memory is effective for at least 30 seconds, and longer when connected to an external battery source ( terminals provided).
101
Model 101 Vertical Interval Bridging Switcher Accessories/Options Remote Control Instruction Manual ( one supplied with each unit)
$ 1255.00
450.00 30.00
VT- 128
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
311/
BROADCAST PRODUCTS DIVISION
3M Center Bldg. 225-3N St. Paul, MN 55144 (612) 733-8132
VIDEO PRODUCTS
P-50
P-50 Video Processing Amplifier The Model P-50 Processing Amplifier accommodates a wide range of sync formats and provides adjustment for all
signal parameters including sync, video, pedestal, burst level, burst phase and chroma level. In addition to the processed output, apulse cross output is provided enabling the operator to adjust skew and tracking controls on avideo tape recorder for optimum performance. The P-50 also has built in AGC circuitry for maintaining signal level automatically.
FEATURES
· Front panel control of six video signal parameters, includ-
ing video level, sync level, chroma level burst, burst phase
and pedestal level.
·Accepts most sync formats.
·Input AGC for maintaining proper signal level automati-
cally.
·Generates a pulse- cross format with automatic picture
brightening to allow the use of astandard monitor for VTR
skew and tension adjustments.
·Comes complete with rack mounting kit and instruction
manual.
$1700.00
SPECIFICATIONS ELECTRICAL Video Input
Level: Impedance:
1.0V peak- to- peak, ± 6dB, composite video 75 ohms, ± 5%
Video Outputs (2 each)
Level: Impedance:
1.0V peak-to- peak, ± 6dB, composite video 75 ohms, + 5% source terminated Output No. 1works in conjunction with the front panel Operate! Bypass switch Output No. 2can be strapped to provide anon- composite video signal
Monitor Output Level: Impedance:
1.0V peak- to- peak, ± 6dB, composite video 75 ohms, + 5%, source terminated
Output mode selectable by the front panel Monitor! Pulse Cross switch
Sync Output Level: Impedance:
4.0V peak-to- peak 75 ohms, ± 5%, source terminated Sync signal is separated from the incoming video signal
Frequency Response: ± 0.5 dB to 5MHz, down less than 3.0 dB at 8.0 MHz
Differential Gain:
1.0% maximum 110-90% APL)
Differential Phase: 1.0 degree maximum ( 10-90% APL)
Low Frequency
Noise and Hum
Reduction:
Greater than 30 dB
AGC ( Sync Tip
Detector)
Input:
1.0V peak- to- peak, ± 6dB
Output:
Less than 0.5 dB change with ± dB change on the input
Controls ( referenced
to Nominal Video
Levels)
Video Level: ± 6dB
Sync Level: + 6dB
Chroma Level: + 6dB
Burst Level: + 6dB
Burst Phase: + 45°
Pedestal Level: ± 40 IRE Units
Power Requirements: Connectors
Video Signal: AC:
MECHANICAL Size:
Weight:
ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature: Relative Humidity:
100-135 VAC, 50-400 Hz, 16 watts nominal BNC type 3- prong, heavy duty grounding type
1.75"H x17.0W x9.30"D. Mounting hardware provided for standard 19" rack. Feet provided for desk top mounting 6lbs. ( net) 8lbs. ( shipping)
0to 50°C operating, - 55 to + 85°C ( non- operating) 0-90% ( no condensation)
720 Video Distribution Amplifier 3M's Model 720 Video Distribution Amplifier has been designed for flexibility in almost any situation. It's ideal for studio, mobile, or duplication applications, where quality signal performance and reliability are mandatory.
Used independently, our Video Distribution Amplifier accepts up to three different sources with four outputs for each source. Multiple sections may be looped together to provide 4, 8, or 12 outputs from asingle video source.
The Model 720 can either be conveniently rack- mounted or utilized as afree-standing unit.
FEATURES
·Three sections; 1 input, 4 outputs per section, with
common power supply ·Front panel gain adjustments
·Cable equalization adjustments up to 1000' of cable
·Front panel test points
·High impedance, loop- through inputs
·13/4" rack- mounting
$835.00
SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRICAL
Input Impedance:
Bridging, greater than 40 dB, 75 ohm return loss, 0-10 MHz
Maximum Input DC: ± 25 volts
Gain: ± 6dB ( front panel adjust)
Outputs:
4each, 75 ohm source terminated
Maximum Output: 2.2 volts peak- to- peak into 75 ohms
Output Isolation:
35 dB at 3.5 MHz between outputs
Frequency Response: ± 0.25 dB, 100 Hz-5MHz; ± 0.5 dB, 5MHz - 10 MHz; Less than 3dB cown at 15 MHz, 50 Hz tilt less than
1%
Differential Phase: 0.5 degrees
Differential Gain:
0.5%
Chrominance/
Luminance Delay
Error:
1Ons
Cable Equalization: Capable of 1000 RG59U to 10 MHz. Unity gain through system
Isolation between
Amps:
50 dB at 3.58 MHz
Power Requirements:
103-135 volts, 50-400 Hz, 10 watts nominal
Connectors:
BNC type
MECHANICAL Size:
1.75"H x17.0W x9.30"D. Feet provided for table top use. Mounting kit provided for standard 19" rack
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature:
0to 50°C ( operating) - 55 to + 85°C ( storage)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 129
3M
BROADCAST PRODUCTS DIVISION
3M Center Bldg. 225-3N St. Paul, MN 55144 (612) 733-8132
ACTUAL PHOTOGRAPH OF A 120 x 120 SYSTEM
MICROPROCESSOR SWITCH ERS
40X MAINFRAME
CONTROL TERMINAL
40X Series
The 40X Series Routing Switcher is designed as an expanded 20X system. Up to 40 inputs can be accommodated in the same main frame and frames can be added to handle systems in excess of 40 inputs. One 40X Mainframe will house acomplete 40 input -- 20 output routing switcher providing input/output amplifiers and switching fo- video, audio and auxiliary signals. Inputs are expandable in groups of ten 1101. Outputs can be added one at atime. Each 40 x1channel is mounted on a single Switch Module that plugs into the Mainframe. Output Amplifiers and Crosspoint Modules, including latches, plug into the Switch Module. All redundant modules are interchangeable without compensating adjustments. A unique microprocessor logic system is standard in the 40X system allowing any type of control to be used without changes to the logic. A dual microprocessor system with automatic changeover ( option) may be employed eliminating the possibility of total system failure. With this type of logic every channel can be programmed for any type of control or can be changed in the field by simply replacing the existing control with another type. Single line coax cables are used as panel control cables. Tally verification is returned from the matrix crosspoints to the control panel. Control panel cables can be looped through without making home runs to the mainframe.
The Microprocessor System makes the following capabilities standard features:
1. RS232 port for a terminal or computer interface. 2. Port for cartridge tape recorder which can be used for test routines
or special instructions. 3. PlJg-in expansion to 4K of RAM ( 1K standard). 4. Plug-in expansion to 6K of ROM ( 10K total). 5. Plug-in I/O and timer expansion. 6. 5',`" card frame chassis.
7. Separate power supply in frame.
8. Audible and visual alarm in case of failure- external closure for remote alarm also available.
9. Audible and visual failure alarm can be used with one or two microcomputers.
10. Display and keyboard included on board for field programming.
11. MPU will handle a 1000 x 1000 matrix.
Total Reliability is greatly enhanced in this type of system because of several factors.
1. Failure of any input will cause aloss of only one input in the matrix.
2. A failure of any component or module associated with any given output will cause a loss of only that output or a small portion thereof.
3. Modules can be removed and replaced while system is operating.
4. All logic is provided with connector for applying emergency battery power in case of power failure. Only small dry cells are necessary with CMOS logic.
5. Redundant power supplies are available as an option.
6. Every channel has separate power regulators for all voltages offering excellent power isolation.
Options include asecond audio switching path ( built-in), redundant power supplies.
Breakaway Audio is standard with pushbutton control. It consists of selecting any audio from another input signal source and switching that source without changing the video. From that point the audio can be changed to another source or returned to the audio- follow mode.
With all other types of control, Breakaway Audio is available at a slight additional cost. Provisions are also available for adding asecond audio switching channel. However, if this option is taken, the auxiliary switching channel is not available. Vertical Interval Switching is standard with all 40X systems.
VT- 130
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
M/A-COM VIDEO SYSTEMS, INC.
63 Third Ave. Bldg. 5 Burlington, MA 01803 (617) 272-3100
FIBER OPTIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
· Higher Resolution Video -- to 30 MHz
·Greater Signal- to- Noise Ratio -- Beyond 70 dB · Lower Distortion -- For Video and Audio
·Greater Distances -- to 3km and Beyond Without Repeaters
· Immune to RFI, EMI, Crosstalk and Hum
GENERAL Rat kShe ItCapacity
power supply/test module,
plus up to nine function modules
Dimensions
17" ( I) x19" ( w) x5.2" ( h)
(43.2 x48.3 x13.4 cm)
Optical Connector
standard Amphenol 906
SMA Type
The SL-2000 Fiber Optic Transmission System represents amajor advance in communications technology from M/A-COM Video Systems, Inc., a leading supplier of communications systems. The revolutionary SL- 2000 System provides transparent transmission of broadcast quality signals over several kilometers of fiber optic cable without using repeaters and with none of the potential interference problems encountered when using conventional coaxial or microwave links. The MVS SL-2000 System is a cost-effective way of satisfying your video, audio or data communications requirements with provision for future expansion.
The MVS SL-2000 Fiber Optic Transmission System is capable of simultaneous transmission of video and multiple audio/data signals over a single optical fiber. Fiber optic cable provides the benefits of dielectric waveguide transmission with the convenience of lightweight dedicated cable and significantly lower installation costs. Add to this other inherent advantages of fiber optic cable, such as immunity from interference, electricil isolation, and security. The field proven MVS SL-2000 System is engineered for years of reliable, unattended operation with abuilt-in expansion capability to meet future requirements. Up to nine channels of video, audio, or data are housed in asingle 19" rack frame. Modular design permits expansion or reconfiguration by simply adding or changing plug-in modules.
VIDEO PERFORMANCE Input/Output
1.0V P- P; 75 ohms
(loop-through/dual)
Signal- to- Noise Ratio
70 dB at 1km;
60 dB at 3.2 km (2 miles)
Frequency Response
10 Hz to 6MHz
±-0.15 dB
Distortion
Line Time
10/0
Field Time
I %
Chrominance-Luminance Delay
15 ns
Differential
Gain
10/0
Phase
0.5°
AUDIO PERFORMANCE
Input/Output Signal Level
+9 dBm (TT),
+21 dBm ( peak)
Impedance
600 ohms balanced
Modulation
FM
Signal-to- Noise Ratio
83 dB at full modulation
Frequency Response ± 0.2 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Total Harmonic Distortion
0.1% (TT level)
Pre-Emphasis/De-Emphasis
75 'Ls
POWER Voltage
Consumption
115 Vac/60 Hz or 220 Vac/50 Hz 5W/module
ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature Range
0to + 50°C
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-131
Matrkel
VIDEO DELAYS AND FILTERS
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY
TELEVISION EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATES, INC.
Box 393 S. Salem, NY 10590 (914) 763-8893 TVVX 710-575-2600
VIDEO DELAY BOXES ( VARIABLE), DV SERIES
Small metal boxes with BNC connectors provide infinitely variable video delay either with switches ( type 180 or 360) or taps ( type 097) over arange of 10-665ns. A ± 1ns trim achieves precise timing at installation and will compensate for temperature and aging variations during subsequent maintenance. For longer delay requirements, these variable boxes may be cascaded with lump delay boxes ( type DV 0100-1000) for amaximum delay of 250Ons. The prefix DV identifies boxes which can be used as " stand alone" units or can be mounted on a 19" rack panel ( Type 5) which accommodates 15 separate boxes. The prefix DN refers to similar boxes which are not rack mountable.
Adjustment of time delay in TV signal routes is important in all countries of the world. Matthey 75 ohm delay units are suitable for use in all TV systems including NTSC, PAL, SECAM, and all variations.
The Matthey SMALLER VIDEO DELAY UNITS are designed to make the fullest use of Matthey miniature DIP video delay line modules ( separate data available on request) and retain features important to TV engineers.
Technical Data
Impedance
75 ohms
Frequency Response ± 0. 05 dB Ripple up to
5.5 MHz ( 0.1 dB peak to peak)
Return Loss
27dB*
Temperature range
0 -- 70°C
413
Max. input voltage
2v.d.c.
Performance of box and 19" rack units is a
function of the delay line combinations
used.
*Delay times > 400ps = > 25dB
443
RACK MOUNTED PC CARD DELAY ( INFINITELY VARIABLE) Video Delay Range 10-1830ns. with optional " 0" loss.
Rack Frame Type 175: Height 1-3/4"; accommodates 10 PC cards ( 2 delay lines on each card); total 20 delays; BNCs on back of PC card; lucite front cover; cards mount horizontally. Rack Frame Type 350: Height 3-1/2"; accommodates 16 PC cards ( 2 delay lines on each card); total 32 delays; BNCs on back of PC card; lucite front cover; cards mount vertically.
,114·14·11414
tL) CD
Delay Range Part Number
1 -- 10
10-165nsVU 180 ( switches) ·
S205
10-325nsVU 360
482
*Original Matthey Video delay ( not DIP performance)
11 -- 50 $185
433
Use rack panel 3
10-17OnsDV 180 ( switches) $234
10-32OnsDV 360 ( switches)
455
$211 410
LUMP DELAY BOXES These can be cascaded with variable boxes to achieve any delay out to 250Ons.
Delay Range 100ns 200ns 300ns 400ns
500ns 600ns 700ns 800ns 900ns 100Ons
Part Number DV 0100 DV 0200 DV 0300 DV 0400
DV 0500 DV 0600 DV 0700 DV 0800
DV 0900
DV 1000
1 -- 10 $196 218 267 290 305 418 442 489 514 529
PC CARD DELAY LINES FOR 175 AND 350 SERIES (NOT INTERCHANGEABLE)
Prices for Video Delay Channels
Video Delay Range
10-170ns 10-330ns 170-49Ons 210-530ns 310-630ns
410-730ns 510-830ns 610-93Ons 710-103Ons 810-1130ns 910-1230ns 1010-1330ns 1110-143Ons 1210-1530ns 1310-1630ns
1410-173Ons 1510-183Ons
Part Number
Suffix " S"
Suffix " N"
Prefix ( switches) ( taps)
175 or 350
1-10
11-50
1-10 11-50
A
S 316 $275 $ 297 $267
B
434
391
415 373
c
553
498
533 479
D
570
513
550 496
E
617
556
598 538
F
641
576
621 559
G
657
591
638 574
H
770
692
750 675
J
793
714
774 697
K
840
756
820 739
L
864
ns
845 760
M
879
791
860 774
N
993
894
974 876
P
1016
915
997 897
R
1063
957
1044 940
s
1088
979
1069 962
T
1103
992
1084 975
VT- 132
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MERLIN ENGINEERING WORKS
2440 Embarcadero Way Palo Alto, CA 94303 (4151856-0900 TVVX 910-3731782
ME- 888 DIGITAL
VIDEO PROCESSOR & STANDARDS CONVERTER
· Five input standards (auto switching)
· Five standard SPG & genlock full PAL sequence
PAL/ SECAM' NTSC 4.4NTSC/ PAL- M
· Noise reduction · Detail enhancement
· Four output standards
(plus Y-U- V) PAL NTSC 4.4NTSC/ PAL- M
· Color correction · Versatile control panel · A-8 channel switching · Remote control
· Eight- bit resolution -- luminance & chrominance
· Freeze and fade · Fully modular construction
The ME- 888 is much more than just astandards converter; it also performs awide range of signal processing functions:
Timebase Correction: A separate TBC is unnecessary when ME-888 is available.
Noise Reduction and Detail Enhancement The powerful noise reduction capability and horizontal and vertical detail enhancement are valuable aids to improving picture quality. Improvements equivalent to at least one tape generation are easily possible.
Freeze Field and frame controls are accessible externally ( as are all
controls) for effects generation, multigrab, etc.
Color Correction A separate color corrector is unnecessary. Color errors in source material may be eliminated by the comprehensive color balance controls which are standard on the ME-888. Red and blue gain controls operating at white and black
levels of the picture ensure complete color control.
Synchronizing Multi- standard frame synchronizing to external references
further increases the cost effectiveness of the ME-888.
TV Standards The ME-888 offers TV standards conversion or synchronization between: ( Inputs) PAL/SECAM/NTSC/4.4NTSC/ PALM and ( Outputs) PAL/NTSC/4.4NTSC/PAL-M. Y-U- V (optionally RGB) outputs are always available. Input standard selection is automatic and failsafe; it will not change until it positively identifies a new standard. Provision is made for manual selection in instances when interior quality render it
necessary.
VIDEO PROCESSOR
rin
gr
Genlocking
ME- 888
Outputs of all four standards may be genlocked to asuitable
reference. Coded signals (e.g. SECAM), derived from the
Y-U-Voutputs via an external coder, may also be genlocked if
the coder provides for it. A genlock status light is provided.
The full EIGHT- FIELD sequence is maintained in PAL and
PAL- M.
SPG The ME- 888 contains its own stable multi- standard sync pulse generator and outputs all the necessary signals for driving external equipment. In PAL and PAL- M the full eightfield sequence enables recording on one inch VTRs from a freestanding ME- 888. Sync/ subcarrier phasing is adjustable on all output standards. (This enables, for example, EBU recommended phasing in PAL). Provision is made for temperature compensated reference oscillators to
be used.
Remote The front panel may be removed from the unit and adapted by means of asimple and inexpensive optional kit for remote
use. Alternatively, an additional remote panel may be used. Total control passes to the remote unit when the REMOTE switch on the master panel is operated. Status lights on both panels are illuminated. The remote control panel has standard 19" fixings and is 3U ( 132mm) high.
Dimensions: ( 6U) 280H x406D x445W mm, Weight: 19kg ( approx.)
Cabinet is suitable for rack mounting when fitted with side lugs ( supplied).
VIDEO 1.0W
·ITIC
IMO
GAIN
Pal
C.01011la GAM
NACU 1.141.
`.1)
rummer,. 00111/
·"''
SMIDA11.0 .
Z 0.
77.LJ LJL1LJ
LJ "7:7
"L'j
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 133
MICROTIME, INC.
1280 Blue Hills Avenue Bloomfield, CT 06002 (203) 242-4242 ( 800) 243-1570 TVVX 710-425-1165
ROLL EFFECTS SYSTEMS
DIGITROL 2 Video Source Control System
·Station Automation ·Commercial Insertion ·Automatic Studio Programming ·Playback for Delayed Broadcasts ·Video Tape Duplication Control
Features
Microprocessor Control
·Up to 8VTR's for as many as 98 Separate Events
·Change any Sequence Assignment
·Eight Hours of Pre-programmed Automated Presentation without
Intervention
·LED Readout
·Pushbutton Keyboard Programming
·Vertical Interval Switching
·Built-in D.A. for Time Base Corrector Advance Comp. Sync
·Card Edge LED for VTR Status Indication
·Detector Senses Loss of Video, and Automatically Switches to
External Video Source
·Back-up Power Supply Maintains System Logic in Event of Power
Failure
$8495.00
System Configurations
S 2E-120 A/B Roll Effects System Consists of: · ( 2) S-230D TBC/ Frame Synchronizers · ( 1) E-120 Effects Processor and Effects Control
TSE -120 A/B Roll Effects System Consists of: ·(1) S-230D TBC/ Frame Synchronizer · ( 1) T- 120D Standalone Time Base Corrector · ( 1) E-120 Effects Processor and Effects Control
12 E-120 A/B Roll Effects System Consists of: · ( 2) T- 120D Standalone Time Base Correctors · ( 1) E-120 Effects Processor and Effects Control
$32,950.00 $26,950.00 $21,950.00
VT- 134
E-120
E-120 Effects Processor and Effects Control
Features
·T- 120D or S-230D Units can be Separated from the Systems for Standalone Operation
·8 Bit, 4x Subcarrier Design for High Reliability and Transparent Performance
·Dynamic Tracking Operation ( with T-1200) ·Manual or Automatic Freeze ( with S-2300)
·Controllable by VTR Editor for Preview and Record
·Built-in Genlock RS- 170A Sync Generator for Precise Output
Timing
$5950.00
Options for Above A/B Roll Effects Systems Rackmount Panel Adaptor for Effect Control Mosaic Transition Package
$ 250.00 1290.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MICROTIME, INC.
1280 Blue Hills Avenue Bloomfield, CT 06002 (203) 242-4242 ( 800) 243-1570 TVVX 710-425-1165
T- 120D
T-120
T-100
TIME BASE CORRECTORS
T-220 FIT/Time Base Corrector
The T-220 FIT TM component digital TBC allows multiformat input selection with simultaneous multiformat outputs from:
· 1/2" or 3/4" heterodyne VTRs · 1/2" Professional Type M ( Component) Format ·3/4" U-Matic0 ( Dub) Y688, or Composite Mode
The T- 220's input processing control architecture permits standard outputs to be integrated with future developments, such as digital effects. This architecture gives you the cleanest, most versatile TBC available today, ready to interface with your component studio.
· Freeze: Vertical interpolator provides clean, crisp pictures ·Vari-Trak : Color to 3x Forward and 1x Reverse when used with
Sony BVU-820 in Dynamic Tracking® mode ·Search Performance: A full 40x Forward and Reverse · Infinite Window TBC: Allows Operation with Nonservo'd VTRs or
Remote VTR Feeds · DOC Detector: TTL/RF Selectable with Automatic AGC · Plug Compatible with Sony U-Matic Series
The T-220 can be purchased in NTSC and PAL- B television formats.
T-220 FIT Format Interchange TBC Accessory Service Extender Card
$11,900.00 350.00
T-120D Time Base Corrector
·8 Bit, 4x Subcarrier Digital Design for Transparent Performance
·16 H- Line Memory, Handles Large Gyro Errors ·D.T. Operation with the Sony BVU 820 U-matic*, plug compatible
·Interfaces with our E-120 for Digital Effects and A/ B Roll · Standalone Heterodyne or 3.58 MHz Feedback
·Auto Trac 3'" Circuit " Steers" VTR T- 120D
$ 7990.00
T-120 Time Base Corrector
· 16 H- Line Memory, Handles Large Gyro Errors ·8 Bit, 4x Subcarrier Digital Design for Transparent Performance
· Passes VITs, VIRs and Teletext
·Auto Trac 3·Built-in Standalone or Genlock RS- 170A Sync Generator
T-120
46990.00
T-100 Time Base Corrector
· 16 H- Line Memory Range, Handles Large Gyro Errors ·8 Bit, 4x Subcarrier Digital Design for Transparent Performance
·3.58 MHz Subcarrier Feedback ·Averaging Velocity Correction for Best Color Performance ·Switchable 1H- Line Advance Allows Easy Interface With the Micro-
time 2100 Image Processor T-100
$ 5490.00
Optional for Above Time Base Correctors
Remote Control with 75' cable ( additional at $2.00 per foot) . .$895.00
Interconnect Cable ( 8') for Sony BVU-820
250.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 135
MICROTIME, INC.
1280 Blue Hills Avenue Bloomfield, CT
(203) 242-4242 ( 800) 243-1570 TVVX 710-425-1165
VIDEO PRODUCTS
VT- 136
S- 230D S-230
S- 230D TBC/Frame Synchronizer
· Interfaces with our E-120 for Digital Effects and A/B Roll Editing
·Selectable Field 1, Field 2, or Full Frame Freeze
· Infinite Window Heterodyne TBC Handles Large Gyro Errors
·8 Bit, 4x Subcarrier Digital Design for Transparent Performance
· Selectable Response to Fading Signals
·Auto Mode Switching Selects TBC or Synchronizer Mode
· Built-in Genlock RS 170A Sync Generator
$14,950.00
Option for all TBC/Frame Synchronizers Remote Control with 75' cable ( additional at $2.00 per foot) $1295.00
S-230 TBC/Frame Synchronizer
·Selectable Field 1, Field 2, or Full Frame Freeze ·Infinite Window Heterodyne TBC Handles Large Gyro Errors ·8 Bit, 4x Subcarrier Digital Design · Steering Signal Interfaces With Optional Audio Delay Corrector ·Selectable Response to Fading Signals ·Auto Mode Switching Selects TBC or Synchronizer Mode
$13,950.00
S-130 Full Frame Synchronizer
· Full Frame Storage Processes Vils, VIRs and Teletext
· Selectable Response to Fading Signals ·Excellent Hot Cut Performance
·Available in NTSC, PAL B and PAL M TV Standards ·Internal Microprocessor Controlled Troubleshooting ·Manual selection of Field 1, Field 2or Full Frame Freeze S-130 NTSC
S-130 PAL B, PAL M, TV Standards
$10,990.00 11,500.00
2100 Video Image Processor
Provides dramatic picture improvement of any video signal and corrects many problems inherent in VTRs.
·6dB Noise Reduction in Chroma and Luminance ·Vertical and Horizontal Enhancement: Adjustable ·Automatic Chroma/Luminance Delay Compensation ·Proc Amp Controls /$5950.00
C-150
C-150 Automatic VTR Machine Controller/ Commercial Ad Inserter
For use in Broadcast, Satellite, Cable and Low- Power Television applications.
·Total Automatic Operation, up to 4 VTRs · Logging Interface ·Satellite Tone Decoder ·Automatic TBC Interface ·Vertical Interval Switching
$4995.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change With ou tNotice.
MULTIDYNE ELECTRONICS
P.O. Box 528 Locust Valley, NY 11560 (516) 671-7278
AUDIO/VIDEO EQUIPMENT
ret 2 21221.
AteNent.
NOMA EON
TS 2
VPIDA-2
EQCUAABLLIEZER
GAIN
1111-111.11 MLOUCLUSTT5I16VD1AY6L1NL1EE-Y721E8NLYE1C1T36.0
POWER
Of71 ATCE-XT
VPDA-2
MULTIDYNE TS- 2
The Multidyne TS- 2 is a high quality test signal generator with many particular functions that are often achieved through the use of at least four different instruments. It produces bars with a field programmable 12 character message, black burst, tone end all standard oven- referenced pulses. It also produces asophisticated ten second tape leader count- down with aswinging pendulum, frequency shift beeps, one second of black after second 2and display of the edit point for the first 3frames of second zero (picture start). For more versatility in editing systems it also has an audio and video bypass. The TS-2CG also has acharacter generator that allows typing over tape leaders. The instrument is housed in a1.3 4" welded steel cabinet.
SPECIFICATIONS
Sync Generator
Frequency
14.318180 MHz
Subcarrier
3 579545 ± 1ppm, RS- 170A
All pulses widths as generated by the National Electronics
MM5321 sync generator IC in the color mode.
Pulse and Subcarrier
Amplitude & Stability ..
1% 0 - 50 C.
Character Phase Stab .
Same as subcamer
Tone Stability
10% 0 - 50 C.
AC Input
117/220 ± 10% at 10W
Bars Stability
2 degree, 2 IRE
Number of Characters
12 switch program
Count Down
0through 2w/frequency shifted tone
TS- 2with all options With only bars logo and tone .
TS-2CG
$ 2400.00 1350.00 3000.00
ACCESSORIES TS- 2A Bars, black, logo, tone, audio/video bypass $ 1150.00
TS- 2B Bars, black, logo, tone, audio/video bypass All sync drives and black burst
1750.00
TS- 2C Bars, black, logo, tone, audio/video bypass All sync drives, black burst. & count-down
2250.00
TS- 2D
Bars, black, logo, tone, audio/video bypass All sync drives, black burst, count-down, cross hatch, and character generator
3000.00
Multidyne VPDA-2
The Multidyne VPDA-2 is an AC DC distribution amplifier designed mainly
for field use. It runs on 11 5 230 Volt A/C 40-60 Hertz externally selectable
or from external battery power dissipating about 4Watts. It provides visual
indication of low battery voltage and, most important, of signal presence at
the output. Dimensions: 9"W x7',2"D x21/ 2 "H
$ 650.00
Dual equaLzer option
$ 100.00
Rack mountable, two units per 1.3/4" rack height .. $ 1300.00
TCC-1 TCR - 1 ADA-7 ADA-7RM
T.me code center T'me code reader / regenerator . Audio distribution amplifier . Dual rackmounted
.
$ 4200.00 2000.00 650.00 1300.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 137
MYCOMP TECHNOLOGIES CORPORATION
130 McCormick Avenue Suite 112 Costa Mesa, CA 92626 (714) 545-5111 Telex 855065 MYCOMP TECH
TERMINAL GEAR
DRC-120
DRC -202
SERICON SYSTEM -- MACHINE CONTROL
The Sericon System is aset of SMPTE-compatible general-purpose remote control devices. A complete system consists of one or more Transmitters, one or more Receivers, and optional Interfaces, all connected to acommon bidirectional digital serial data line. Each unit is housed in arackmount enclosure, one rack unit 1.75" high and 6" deep.
DRC-108/DRC-120 Transmitter
The Sericon Transmitter is available in two versions: 8-button and 20button. The 8-button version has 8 software- configurable illuminated pushbuttons mounted on its front panel, and 5auxiliary input and 5 output lines available at a15-pin Dconnector on the rear panel. The 20button version has 20 softwareconfigurgable illuminated pushbuttons and no auxiliary input/ output lines. The Sericon Transmitter normally functions as aController.
DRC-202/DRC-20XA Receiver
Sericon Receivers have two rearpanel 15- pin 0-connectors, each carrying 8 software-configurable outputs and 4 inputs. Each connector may be treated as aseparately addressed port; in effect aSericon Receiver may function as asingle or adual Receiver.
Interface
A Sericon Interface is required whenever aSericon system must communicate with adevice which employs anon-SMPTE-compatible serial data format.
Specifications
All Units: Overall Dimensions Weight Power Requirement SMPTE Port Warranty
1.75 x19 x6 inches 3 lbs 110/220V, 50-60Hz, 15W See SMPTE 207M & RP- 113 3 Years
Transmitters:
Buttons
8or 20, illuminated, field-legendable
Rear Panel Connectors
AC power, 2- x9- pin SMPTE, 2- x15- pin D
(1 Expansion Box Compatible, 1user I/O)
Signal Levels
( Outputs) 200mA open-collector drivers,
(Inputs) 0/5 Volt logic
Receivers: Rear Panel Connectors
Signal Levels
AC power, 2- x9- pin SMPTE, 2- x15- pin D (Both Expansion Box Compatible)
(Outputs) 200mA open-collector drivers, (Inputs) 0/5 Volt logic
Interfaces: Rear Panel Connectors
Protocols Supported
AC power, 2- x9- pin SMPTE, 1of: 25- pin D, RS- 232C signal levels, 9- pin D, RS-422A signal levels BNC, 70mA current loop
Sony, Image Video, or per request
Sericon System: SMPTE Compatible Digital Serial Remote Control
DRC-001 DRC-108 DRC-120 DRC-128 DRC-202 DRC-20XA
DRC-30X DRC-6XX EB-303 EB-416 IC- 300 OC-3XX RFB-01 RFB-02 OS- 7000
Buss Controller
8- Button Transmitter 20- Button Transmitter 8- Button Passive Controller
2- Channel Receiver 1108 Channel Receiver ( basic unit)
(A) Plus, per channel (X) (B) Option 01: RF playback level digitizer,
(requires one RFB-02/channel) · · · (C) Option 02: Provides rack temperature digitizing
(requires one per rack) Serial Switcher Interface (firmware required)
Firmware package for DRC-30X Expansion Box, 1x8out, parallel Expansion Box, 1x16 out, analog 15- Pin Expansion Box Cable ( specify length) VCR Cable 15-Pin/Hirose ( specify VCR model) RF Buffer Amplifier Board, QC VCR RF Buffer Amplifier Board, DC plus RF out Audio Output Switcher, QC VCR, JVC-BR-7000
$ 770.00 1700.00 1960.00 425.00 1300.00 950.00 150.00
50.00
150.00 1050.00
POR 540.00 680.00
65.00 75.00 70.00 80.00 47.00
VT- 138
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
NON-LINEAR SYSTEMS
DIVISION OF KAYPRO CORP.
P.O. Box N Del Mar, CA 92014
(619) 481-3900 Telex 249045
TR-1 and TR-1B Non- Linear Systems TRACER
Features: ·In- circuit and out of circuit testing of circuit compon-
ents Et networks. 'Graphically displayed signature patterns for rapid
detection of faults by inexperienced personnel. "Tests all parameters simultaneously. 'Test circuit boards to component level without power-
ing up tested device. 'Dual inputs for good- bad circuit comparisons. 'Automatic, adjustable input switching rate. 'LED input indicators. 'Battery or line operation. 'Sett test capability. 'Small and lightweight for user portability. 'Dynamic testing of components and circuitry. 'Tests all these components and more:
'Field Effect Transistors 'Bipolar Transistors
·Diodes 'Diodes back to back 'Light Emitting Diodes "Zeners ·Unijunctions 'Ferrite Core Inductors ·Seleniums 'IC's and LSI Chips ·Darlingtons ·Bridge rectifiers *SCR's ·Triacs 'Capacitors 'Inductors 'Transformers 'Combinations of all of these and more 'Also indicates shorts and opens
TEST EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION
The NLS TRACER is asmall, portable test instrument incorporating acathode-ray tube display and test circuitry which enable it to present agraphically displayed " signature pattern" of acomponent or electronic network under test and thereby allows the user to determice if the component or circuit is good or faulty. The TRACER performs dynamic testing on circuits that are not
powered up, in circuit or out. The TRACER has two inputs ( A Et B) each of which can be used alone or which can be used alternately at an adjustable rate. LED indicators show which input is being displayed on the CRT. Using this alternating mode, the user can compare a known good circuit to others in question and easily observe any difference in the displays.
The TRACER has two sensitivity ranges: LO -- 1Volt / Division and HI -- 10 Volts/ Division and includes aself- test capability that enables the user to determine that the TRACER is functioning correctly and is in proper calibration.
Model TR-1B comes complete with abattery charger and batteries as well as aset of three adjustable tip test leads. A leather carrying case with aneck strap and belt loop for versatile hands- free operation is offered as an optional accessory. Package size is a small 2.9 inches high by 6.4 inches and 8.0 inches long. Weight is less than three pounds.
The TRACER uses mainly integrated circuits of the CMOS or low power Schottky types. Warm-up time is less than ' ive seconds. Power consumption is less than 8 watts ( actual running power consumption with batteries not charging is approximately 3
watts). Low battery indlcation is provided when the power ON LED doesn't light when the power switch is in the ON position. The TRACER is an extremely stable instrument and therefore requires no controls for synchronization.
TA- 1 IR -1B
$646.00 796.00
Which diode is a good video detector?
Which is a good capacitor?
SPECIFICATIONS
INPUTS NUMBER: Dual inputs ( A Es Ell MODES: A, B or A / B ( Alternate) A / B SWITCHING RATE: 0.25 Sec to 0.5 Sec INDICATORS: LED indicators for each input
TEST VOLTAGE FREQUENCY: 2 Kilohertz SENSITIVITY: 1Volt/Division or 10 Volts/ Division ACCURACY: 3% MAXIMUM VOLTAGE: 25 Volts peak ( HI range)
2.5 Volts peak ILO range) MAXIMUM CURRENT: 1mA peak IHI range)
125 mA peak ILO range) DISPLAY
CRT: Bluish- white phosphor, medium persistance, 1% " diagonal screen. CRT uses low power filament for low battery drain. X AXIS: Represents peak voltage across the circuit under test. Y AXIS: Represents peak current through the circuit under test
POWER SOURCE INTERNAL: Three rechargeable, sealed lead- acid cells. Operating time using fully charged cells is approximately six hours. Charging circuitry is integral and functions when the TA- 1is connected to apower line through aplug-in transformer ( supplied with each TA -il. Battery charge time with instrument off is 16
hours. EXTERNAL: Operates continuously from a 115 VAC
source, 50 to 400 Hz when connected to the plug-in transformer. Alternate transformer for 230 VAC is available. Power consumption is less than 8 Watts. ENVIRONMENT OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 0 to * 40 degrees
Celsius. SHOCK AND VIBRATION: Will withstand normal shock and vibration encountered in commercial ship-
ping and handling. PHYSICAL MEASUREMENTS
SIZE: 2.9" 6.4" 8.0" D. WEIGHT. Less than 3 lbs. 11.36 kg) with batteries.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-139
NON-LINEAR SYSTEMS
DIVISION OF KAYPRO CORP
P.O. Box N Del Mar, CA 92014 (619) 481-3900 Telex 249045
TEST EQUIPMENT
34
MODEL LMI-40A
VDC
Oita
100 it'e MO
ACmA
CYCmA 1
1A 415 OFF
LM- 3A
LM-40A
Miniature Digital Multimeters
LM 3A. 3 Digits. · Full three digits - 1000 counts
·Measures AC and DC volts, kilohms, megohms
and AC and DC milliamperes · Bright, sharp . 3"
LED readout · Battery or AC line operated · Nicad
batteries and charger included · Automatic polarity
indication · Auto decimal placement · Automatic
overload indication scale ohms adjust ·
·SmNaollzesriozead-jutstemenHt
and no full x2.7" W x
4.0" D · Overload protection all functions · Weignt
- 9.2 ounces, including batteries
The Model LM-3A 3- digit Digital Multimeter is an original Digital Volksmeter designed and manu-
factured by NLS. NLS goal was to design ar. economical DMM with a wide range of accurate performance and thereby make digital instruments available to a much wider group of users. The LM-3A is packaged in a small 1.9 inches high by 2.7 inches wide by 4.0 inches deep attractive,
tough case. It weighs only 9.2 ounces. Case design allows the meter to be placed on end for ver-
tical viewing, as well as on its side for customary horizontal viewing. Optional tilt stand or panel-
mounted cases are available. $148.00
LM-3.5A · Moderate cost · 3Y2 digits - 2000 counts - 100% over- range · Measures AC and DC volts, kilohms, megohms, and AC and DC milliamperes · Battery or AC line operated · Bright sharp 0.3" LED readout · Nicad batteries and charger included ·Automatic polarity indication · Automatic decimal placement · Automatic overload indication · No zero adjust and no full scale ohms adjust · Small size 1.9"H x2.7"W x4.0"D · Overload protection all functions · Weight - 0.2 ounces, including batteries · 10 megohms input impedance
The Model LM-3.5A e- 1/1- digit Digital Multimeter called the " Volksmeter-Plus," was designed to be a rugged, hard working general purpose multimeter, priced very competitively with instruments of comparable performance. Since its introduction in 1975, it has been one of the fastest selling instruments in the world.
The Model LM-3.5A is aneat appearing instrument in a modern, tough, scuff- resistant, basic blackcolored case. Its size, 1.9 inches high, by 2.7 inches wide, by 4.0 inches deep, makes it the smallest 31 / 2 -digit instrument available and allows it to fit snugly into any tool kit. Weight is only 9.2 ounces with batteries installed. Its form factor permits standing the meter on end for vertical viewing as well as placing it on its side for conventional horizontal viewing. Optional tilt-stand or panel- mounted cases are available.
Basic functions include AC and DC volts, kilohms, megohms, and AC and DC milliamperes. Full scale ranges are 2, 20, 200 and 1000 volts ( 750 VAC), 2, 20, 200 and 2000 kilohms as well as 20 megohms and 2, 20, 200 and 2000 milliamperes. Resolution for each ¡unction is 0.001 volts, one ohm and one microampere.
$182.00
LM-4A, 4 Digits. · Moderate cost · 4 digits 10,000 counts Measures AC and DC volts, kilohms, megohms and AC and DC milliampees · 0.03% DC accuracy - 0.0001 VDC resolution · Battery or AC Jme operation · Bright, sharp 0.3' LED readout · Nicad batteries and charger included · Automatic polarity indication · Automatic decimal placement ·Automatic overload indication · No zero adjust, no full scale ohms adjust · Small size - 1.9" H x2.7" W x4.0" D · Overioad protection all functions · Weight - 9.2 ounces, including batteries · 10 megohms input impedance.
The NLS Model LM-4A " Lab Accuracy Volksmeter" was developed to provide a small hand-held DMM which would produce precise measurements in alaboratory, shop or field environment and yet would be small, tough and operate independently of the AC line. The LM-4A, 10,000-count DMM meets these requirements beautifully.
In addition it is a neat appearing instrument- in a modern, tough, scuff- resistant, basic black- colored case. Its size, 1.9 inches high by 2.7 inches wide by 4.0 inches deep, makes it the smallest 4-digit instrument available and allows it to fit snugly into any tool kit. Weight is only 9.2 ounces with batteries installed. Its form factor permits standing the meter on end for vertical viewing, as well as laying it on Ita side for conventional horizontal viewing. Optional tilt-stand or panel- mounted cases are available. $275.00
LM-40A, 4 Digits. · 4 digits - 10,000 counts · Measures AC and DC volts, kilohms, megohms and AC and DC milliamperes · 0.01% DC accuracy 0.0001 VDC resolution · Battery or AC line operation · Bright, sharp 0.3" LED readout · Nicad batteries and charger included · Automatic polarity indication · Automatic decimal placement · Automatic overload indication · No zero adjust, no full scale ohms adjust · Small size - 1.9" H x2.7" W x 4.0" D · Overload protection all ranges · Weight 9.2 ounces including batteries · 10 megohms input impedance
The NLS Model LM-40A Digital Multimeter was designed to provide the extra performance offered by a 4- digit multimeter at a price comparable to that of a 3- 1/2- digit hand-held DMM. This was achieved by replacing some of the most expensive parts in the NLS " Lab Accuracy Volksmeter." Only a slight depredation in accuracy was the result. However, the accuracy o( the LM-40A meets or exceeds that of the best 3-1 2.digit DMM and in all other regards the 10,000- count LM-40A is vastly superior to its 2000- count counterpart.
In addition it is a neat appearing instrument- in a modern, tough, scuff- resistant, basic black-colored case. Its size, 1.9 inches high by 2.7 inches wide by 4.0 inches deep, makes it the smallest low cost digital instrument around and allows it to fit snugly into any tool kit. Weight is only 9.2 ounces, with batteries installed. Its form factor permits standing it on end for vertical viewing or placing it on its side for conventional honzontal viewing. Optional tiltstand and panel- mounted cases are available. $252.00
DIGITAL FREQUENCY METER
Miniature Digital Frequency Meters
FM- 7. 7 Digits. · Seven digits - 10 million counts · Measures frequency 10 Hz to 60 megahertz Ito 512 megahertz using SC-5prescalerl · Small size 1.9" H x2.7" W x 4.0" D · 30- millivolts sensitivity at amateur and CB frequencies · One- hertz resolution on 10Hz range · Meets FCC standards for setting transmission frequencies · Battery or AC line operation · Nicad batteries and charger included · Automatic decimal placement · One-megohm input impedance · Weight - 9 ounces, including batteries · Bright, sharp LED display.
The NLS Model FM- 7 Digital Frequency Meter is the smallest 7- digit, 60-megahertz, battery or AC line operated instrument available. Its dimensions are a neat appearing 1.9 inches high by 2.7 inches wide by 4 inches deep. Its case is modern tough. scuffresistant and basic black- colored. The form factor of the case is amenaole to standing the meter on end for vertical viewing or placing it on its side for viewing in the conventional manner. Optional tiltstand and panel- mount cases are available. $237.00
VT- 140
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
NOVA SYSTEMS, INC.
20 Tower Lane Avon, CT 06001 (203) 677-5252
The nova Series Digital Time Base Correctors
The nova Series Digital Time Base Correctors define new industry standards. For the first time, digital performance doesn't have to cost alot. Designed for optimum correction of non- segmented 3/4" and 1/2" video tape recorders. Engineered like their predecessors, the nova Series provides superb performance in the smallest packages available.
Operating in the heterodyne ( process) mode, the nova 490 will correct 3/4" and 1/2" non- segmented video tape recorders, including U-Matic, VHS'. , and Beta R formats. The nova 500 will time base correct all 3/4" and 1/2" non- segmented video tape recorders which accept sync and derived subcarrier inputs. The result is a full bandwidth time base corrected signal. The nova 510 contains more features in one rack height than any other time base corrector in its class. A general purpose TBC, operating in either subcarrier feedback (direct) or heterodyne ( process) modes at the flick of aswitch.
Compact -- Only one rack unit high ( 1.75"), the nova 490 fits in even the tightest space. Strong aluminum extrusions form the front, rear and sides providing a solid chassis. A weight of only 10 pounds enhances portability in all applications.
Simple Operation -- The nova Series is designed for use right out of the box. Simply connect 2cables from the nova 490 to your VTR, one to your monitor, and turn on the power. Simply connect coax cables to the nova 500 and nova 510 and turn on the power. Control of video, chroma, hue and setup constitute the built-in video processing amplifier controls. Front panel LEDs indicate the presence of video and reference signals, as well as proper video level. ( A front panel switch instantly changes from direct to process modes and back again on the nova 510 only).
Advanced Design -- 8 bit 4X subcarrier sampling is employed for maximum picture fidelity. Advanced design memory provides 32 lines of video storage. Reference to output delay ( or advance) is adjustable for perfect plant timing. Digital processing amplifier reinserts sync and burst perfectly every time. Never a need to trim filters or pots for proper rise time or position. RS- 170A relationship is maintained regardless of Reference SCH. Proven technology allows operation with less than 60 Watts ( 50 Watts for nova 500) of power dissipation. Color lock is maintained in VTR shuttle and pause operation. A stable color still frame picture can be recorded in pause. ( Front panel adjustment of luminance/chrominance timing for best multi- generation tape performance on nova 490).
Reliable -- All active components are temperature cycled, burned- in and tested prior to assembly into the nova Series. Each system is thoroughly burned- in after test for enhanced reliability. Power supplies operate at no more than 60% ( 55% with nova 500) of their rated capacity.
Cost Effective -- Compare the nova Series with any other time base correctors. Feature for feature, the nova Series are the lowest priced digital time base correctors around.
SPECIFICATIONS Performance:
Correction Range S/N Ratio Differential Gain Differential Phase K- Factor ( 2T)
nova 490 nova 500 nova 510
Bandwidth nova 490 nova 500 nova 510
Residual Error
nova 500
Sampling Rate Number of Bits L/C Delay Adjustment
(nova 490 only)
32 lines 56dB ( p- pvideo to RMS noise) Less than 2% ( plus quantizing effects) Less than 2° ( plus quantizing effects)
Less than 3% Less than 2% Less than 2% ( Direct) Less than 3% ( Process)
2.3MHz ( Y), 1.0MHz ( CI + /-0.5dB to 4.2MHz + / -0.5dB to 4.2MHz ( Direct) 2.3MHz ( Process) + /- 10ns ( Y), 2° IC) + / - 10ns 14.3MHz ( 4times color subcarrier) 8
Greater than 400ns
TIME BASE CORRECTORS
·
nova 490
nova 510
Video Inputs: VTR Video Reference nova 490, 500, 510
Video Outputs: Program Video
Monitor Video
Control Outputs:
Advanced Sync VTR Subcarner
nova 500,510
1.0 Volt p- p + 6dB into 75 ohms Composite video or black burst, looping, or terminated. Necessary only if genlock is required.
Composite video, 1.0 Volt p- pnominal into 75 ohms. Input hard wired to Program Video output if power is off or the bypass switch is activated. Time base corrected video otherwise. Same as Program Video except no output with power off, and black burst output in bypass mode.
4.0 or 0.4 Volts, nominal ( jumper selectable) into 75 ohms. 16 lines advance of the Reference.
2.0 Volts nominal into 75 ohms, 3.58mhz. Locked to Video Input horizontal rate.
Mechanical: Depth Width
Height Weight Electrical:
nova 500 nova 490,510 Environmental: Operating Temperature Humidity Front Panel Controls:
Front Panel Indicators:
20.5" ( 52.1cm) 16.75" or 19.0" ( witn rackmount ears installed) (48.3cm) 1.75" ( 4.5cm) 10 lbs. ( 4.6kg I
95-130 VAC, 47-63Hz, 50VA 95-130VAC, 47-63Hz, 60VA
10°C- 40°C 5%-90%RH, lo condensation Power, Bypass/Operate, Video Level, Chroma Leve', Hue, Setup, H Phase Coarse, H Phase Fine, Chroma/Luma Delay (490 only), Direct Process ( 510 only) Reference, Vdeo Input, Video Low, Normal, High
nova 490 nova 500 nova 510
$5850.00 6450.00 7450.00
ACCESSORIES novapak ( Carrying Case) Additional Manual Additional Rack Ears
$95.00 60.00 12.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 141
CALIFORNIA
2752 Walnut Avenue Tustin, CA 92680 (714) 838-8833 TWX 910-333-8535
PALTEX
CORP.
DIGITAL VIDEO PROCESSOR
GEMINI DIGITAL VIDEO PROCESSOR
GEMINI DIGITAL VIDEO PROCESSOR ·Dual bus digital processing ·Multiple inputs per bus ·Full synchronization from any source ·Universal Time Base Correction from any VTR or other
input ·Digital switcher and effects panel ·Remote engineering control panel ·A/ B roll editing capability ·Built in freeze and strobing ·Digital control of all functions ·Software control of signal processing, mixing and effects ·Built in broadcast sync pulse generator ·Variable digital enhancement ·Variable digital color balancing ·Built in color bar and black burst generators ·8- bit integrated ADC's ·NTSC Codea and RGB outputs ·Selectable input proc modes ·Remote control by Paltex edit controller or other com-
puter systems using RS422A ·Remote preselected effects initiated from relay closure
or ground ·Single wire genkock or stand alone ·Operates in stop and slow motion ·Store error concealment ·Ease of maintenance ·Software controlled test routine ·Common size plug in circuit cards ·Cool and quiet main frame ·Optional " B" bus output for expanded applications
Designed to meet and exceed the requirements of the most demanding production and post- production applications, at a cost lower than that expected from similar systems consisting of multiple units from various suppliers.
GEMINI features advanced component coded sampling techniques to deliver fully framed, digitally processed, stable color video output, from the widest range of inputs, including unstable VTR outputs, and non- synchronous video feeds.
On board microprocessor software allows control of all signal p-ocessing, mixing and effects functions, offering flexibility as well as unlimited life expectancy. GEMINI is ideal for editing applications because of its infinite window which only requires a single wire feed from the source VTRs. An RS422A interface or asimple GPI contact closure may be used to command cut, mixes and effects for different levels of sophistication.
Four video inputs plus color black can be assigned to either A or Bchannel, and ajoystick picture positioner can move any input selected on channel A off in any direction including diagonally.
GEMINI comes complete with central processing rack, fully operational production switcher, and engineering control panel. Hundreds of units are already in service around the world with a proven record of reliability, minimum down time, and maximum operational efficiency.
VT- 142
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PanaSOnie AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
TIME DATE GENERATOR/ SWITCHERS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348 7000
WJ-810
--41111111111111111111111111111111111111
Ile
\NJ- 200B
......___,, ,r _ r
WJ-810 Time Date Generator
Superimposes time and date onto any composite video signal, stopwatch function, variable independent adjustment of white to
black character brightness and black to white edge brightness, ad-
justable control of character size, internal quartz- crystal time
accuracy: 15 seconds per month, internal batteries ( not included) are
designed to prevent time error due to short term power failure,
battery warning indicator, full automatic calendar, rack mountable.
WJ-810
$475.00
Passive Switchers
WJ-200B Desktop passive switcher with six inputs that can be switched to a
single video output, mechanical switching, front panel card holder
permits labeling each input source, all inputs terminated with 75
ohms, BNC connectors.
WJ-200B
$ 95.00
WJ-20ORB Rack mountable passive switcher with six inputs that can be
switched to asingle video output, mechanical switching, front panel
card holder permits labeling each input source, all inputs terminated
with 75 ohms, BNC connectors. WJ-20ORB
95.00
WJ-205B
Desktop passive switcher with 12 inputs that can be switched to a
single video output, mechanical switching, front panel card holder
permits labeling each input source, all inputs terminated with 75
ohms, BNC connectors. WJ-205B
S175.00
WJ-521
Sequential Switcher, accepts up to 6
camera inputs, two video outputs,
sequential and spot monitor, front
panel indicator lamps, manual selection
of any camera for display on second
monitor, switching interval manually
adjustable from 1to 30 seconds, 12- pin
connector for optional remote selection
of the spot monitor output, BNC
connectors.
WJ-521
$330.00
WJ-523
Sequential Switcher, accepts up to 10
camera inputs, two video outputs,
sequential and spot monitor, front
panel indicator lamps, manual selection
of any camera for display on second
monitor, switching interval manually
adjustable from 1to 30 seconds, 12- pin
connector for optional remote selection
of the spot monitor output, BNC
connectors.
WJ-523
$395.00
WJ-205RB Rack mountable passive switcher with 12 inputs that can be switched
to a single video output, mechanical switching, front panel card
holder permits labeling each input source, all inputs terminated with
75 ohms, BNC connectors.
WJ-205RB
$ 175.00
Sequential Switchers
WJ-512 Sequential Switcher, accepts up to 10
camera inputs with alarm mode, two spot monitor, sequential Et spot
monitor, front panel indicator lamps, manual selection of any
camera for display on second monitor, switching interval manually adjustable
from 1to 30 seconds, 12- pin connector
for optional remote selection of the spot
monitor output, BNC connectors, front-
panel buzzer shows alarm condition, in-
puts for 10 sensors: door switch, mat
switch, window switch, etc., when sensor
activated, sequential output automatically
switches to camera involved. WJ-512
$495.00
WV-1000/WV-1000A series WV-1600/WV-1650KT1 series WV-1800/WV-1850 series WV-1900/WV1904 series WJ-810 Time Date Generator
NV- 8030 NV- 8050
WJ-525 Sequential Switcher, accepts up to 14
camera inputs, two video outputs,
sequential and spot monitor, front panel indicator lamps, manual selection
of any camera for display on second
monitor, switching interval manually adjustable from 1to 30 seconds, 20- pin
connector for optional remote selection of
the spot monitor output, BNC connectors.
WJ-525
8475.00
WJ-527
Sequential Switcher, accepts up to 10
camera inputs, two video outputs,
sequential and spot monitor, front
panel indicator lamps, manual selection
of any camera for display on second
monitor, switching interval manually
adjustable from Ito 30 seconds, 12- pin
connector for optional remote selection
of the spot monitor output, BNC
connectors.
WJ-527
$550.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WJ-205RB
WJ-20ORB
WV-1000/WV-1000A series WV-1600/WV-1650KT1 series WV-1800/WV-1850 series WV-1900/WV-1904 series WJ-810 Time Date Generator WV- 1400/1500 series
WV-1000/WV-1000A series WV-1600/WV-1650KT1 series WV- 1800/WV-1850 series WV-1900/WV-1904 series WJ-810 Time Date Generator
WV-1000/WV-1000A series WV-1600/WV-1650KT1 series WV-1800/WV-1850 series WV-1900/WV-1904 series WJ-810 Time Date Generator
WV-1000/WV-1000A series WV- 1600 / WV-1650KT1 series WV-1800/WV-1850 series WV-1900/VVV-1904 series WJ-810 Time Date Generator
VT- 143
PELCO SALES, INC.
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave. Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
COMPUSWITCH TM
Pelco Compuswitch'" series of sequential switchers are the first of a new generation. They are designed using the latest high reliability micro-computer technology. Included are more useful features of higher priced switchers in an economical attractive package for general use. MICRO- COMPUTER TECHNOLOGY -- Compuswitch' incorporates the majority of circuit functions in a single specially developed micro- computer to control video switching and other functions greatly reducing parts counts, which enhances reliability. TWO SWITCHERS IN ONE -- Compuswitch" combines the features of Homing and Bridging switchers into a single compact configuration. The Monitor 1 output allows a number of CCTV cameras to be displayed in automatic sequence, or any cameras to be displayed in automatic sequence, or any camera may be selected for continuous viewing. The Monitor 2 output allows an independent camera to be selected for continuous viewing or may sequence with the Monitor 1output.
Other outstanding features include Independent Programmable Dwell Time, Digital Channel Display, Rapid Sequence of All Cameras, a Self Test Mode, and human engineered ease of operation. VARIETY OF MODELS -- Compuswitch' is available in awide variety of models to fulfill the requirements of all systems. Separate interfaces which connect to the basic switchers using a flat ribbon cable allow for alarm operation, audio follow, and remote switching. Expansion of any Compuswitch system is easily achieved by cascading switchers together. The Compuswitch Formatter interfaces with the basic Compuswitch and allows for achannel number, time, date and 16 character message to be superimposed onto a selected video picture. All programming is done from the front panel, for all inputs in the basic Compuswitch. The channel number, time, date, and message are considered to be independent fields of information and can be positioned anywhere on the screen independent of the channel selected. Information can be displayed in black or white characters, and unwanted information may be blanked, independent of the channel selected. All displays are jitter free even with random interlace cameras. Each channel may have a different message on the screen, and have a different position on the screen. The character set has 128 characters, utilizing a5x7 dot matrix, included are upper and lower case alphabet, numbers and 64 special characters. The Compuswitch Formatter will interface with
all basic Compuswitch options and accessories.
SWITCHERS
POWER SUPPLIES FOR DIGITAL RECEIVERS
PT3200PS
Pan / Tilt power supply
A3200P S
Autoscan power supply
V3200PS
Variable speed power supply
LZ3200PS
Pelco zoom lens power supply
AUX3200PS " Auxiliary contact supply for MEH3200 and MG3200
$150.00
150.00 300.00 130.00 140.00
COMPUSWITCH' SYSTEM 700
NOTE: ALL COMPUSWITCH SYSTEM 700 PRODUCTS ARE DESK TOP MODELS. RACK MOUNTING IS AVAILABLE AT ADDITIONAL COST. SPECIFY WHEN ORDERING . .$ 20.00
COMPUSWITCH -- MASTER COMPONENT OF COMPUSWITCH SYSTEM 700
CS708DT
8 position user programmable sequential switcher combines both homing Er
bridging features. Separate dwell times programmable for each channel plus
bypass of unwanted or unused inputs. Standard feature allows camera se-
quencing to be controlled from an external source such as VTR
$490.00
CS708LDT 8position. Same as CS708, except with looping inputs
540.00
CS716DT CS716LDT
16 position. Otherwise same as CS708 16 position with looping inputs. Otherwise same as CS708
550.00 600.00
CS716EDT 16 position extender up to a maximum of 96 positions for interface with
CS716DT or CSR716DT only. ( Interface of more than one extender is available
on special order only.)
380.00
CS716ELDT 16 position extender for looping inputs up to a maximum of 96 positions for
interface with CS716LDT or CSR716DT. ( Interface of more than one extender
is available on special order only.)
420.00
SYSTEM EXPANSION MODULES
(NOTE: Interface with CompuSwitch Video Switcher Required.)
COMPUSWITCH FORMATTER"
CSF700DT
User programmable time/date, channel number, and 16 character message
generator in one unit. Program each camera position independently. Position
programmable information anywhere on screen individually for each camera.
Internal battery backup system maintains power for up to 8 hours. Easily re-
programmable in field.
790.00
COMPULARM"
CSA716DT
16 position. Integrates video and alarm systems. User programmable. " Arm"
or " disarm" any alarmed camera. Attended or unattended modes. Multiple
alarm monitoring in either " priority" or " sequential mode." Visual and audible
alert indicators
$500.00
CSA716EDT 16 position extender up to a maximum of 96 positions for interface with
CSA716E only. ( Interface with more than one extender is on special order
only.)
Quote
COMPUSWITCH REMOTE'
(Two pair and coax required.)
CSR708DT 8position remote
$ 950.00
CSR708LDT 8position remote. Same as CSR708, except with looping inputs
1000.00
CSR716DT 16 position remote. Otherwise same as CS R708
1120.00
CSR716LDT 16 position remote with looping inputs. Otherwise same as CS R708 1170.00
CS716EDT
16 position extender for amaximum of 32 positions
Quote
CS716ELDT 16 position extender for amaximum of 32 positions. Interface with CS R716LDT
only.
Quote
COMPUSWITCH AUDIO FOLLOW
CS708AFDT 8 position balanced audio follow. Integrates audio and video system for
synchronized switching of audio with video
Quote
CS716AFDT 16 position balanced audio follow. Otherwise same as CS708AF
Quote
CS716EAFDT 16 position extender up to a maximum of 96 positions for interface with
CS716AF only. ( Interface with more than one extender is available on special
order only.)
Quote
VT- 144
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PELCO SALES, INC.
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave. Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
VIDEO SWITCHERS MANUAL/SEQUENTIAL
VS510HDT
MS504-DT
MS540
Video Switchers - Manual
Note: All Manual Switchers listed below are Desk Top Models.
Rack Mounting is available at additional cost.
Specify when ordering
$20.00
MANUAL PASSIVE SWITCHERS MS504DT 4Position MS508DT 8Position MS512DT 12 Position MS518DT 18 Position
MS540DT 40 Position*
$ 66.00 121.00 154.00 264.00 880.00
PASSIVE MANUAL SWITCHERS WITH AUDIO- FOLLOW
MS504AF 4Position
$114.00
MS508AF 8Position
217.00
MS512AF 12 Position
298.00
MS518AF 18 Position
400.00
LOOPING INPUT SWITCHERS WITH AUDIO- FOLLOW MS504AFL 4Position .
MS508AFL 8Position MS512AFL 12 Position
MS518AFL 18 Position
$125.00 236.00 331.00 440.00
ILLUMINATED MANUAL PASSIVE SWITCHERS MS504GDT 4Position MS508GDT 8Position
MS512GDT 12 Position MS518GDT 18 Position
$121.00 165.00
210.00 320.00
MANUAL LOOPING INPUT SWITCHERS MS504LDT 4Position
MS508LDT 8Position MS512LDT 12 Position MS518LDT 18 Position
MS54OLDT 40 Position*
$ 77.00 140.00 187.00 320.00
1040.00
ILLUMINATED MANUAL LOOPING INPUT SWITCHERS MS504GLDT 4Position
MS508GLDT 8Position MS512GLDT 12 Position MS518GLDT 18 Position
$132.00 187.00 240.00 374.00
PASSIVE MANUAL SWITCHERS W/BALANCED AUDIO- FOLLOW
MS512BAF 12 Position IR KS20 Rack Kit)
TBA
Note: All Switchers are Desk Top Mounted. Rack Mounting
is available at additional cost. Specify when ordering
20.00
Video Switchers - Sequential
HOMING SEQUENTIAL SWITCHERS ( Single Output) VS504HDT 4Position VS506HDT 6Position VS508HDT 8Position VS510HDT 10 Position VS512HDT 12 Position VS520HDT 20 Position
$215.00 253.00 297.00
340.00 374.00 434.00
LOOPING INPUT PASSIVE MANUAL SWITCHERS WITH BALANCED AUDIO- FOLLOW MS512BAFL 12 Position IRKS20 Rack Kit)
IBA
NOTE * Available on Special Order Only
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 145
PELCO SALES, INC.
4790 W. Jacquelyn Ave. Fresno, CA 93711 (209) 275-5561
VIDEO SWITCHERS/ SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
TDG-200
1111111111111k
MD1OODT
· - MOO - ·
·- --
1-- Gs- .
SP5OODT
·
-a-- -e ·e
GIT-100
Video Switchers
HOMING LOOPING SEQUENTIAL SWITCHERS VS504HLDT 4Position VS506HLDT 6Position VS508HLDT 8Position VS51OHLDT 10 Position VS512HLDT 12 Position VS52OHLDT 20 Position
$ 253.00 300.00
346.00 396.00 440.00
518.00
BRIDGING SEQUENTIAL SWITCHERS ( Dual Output) VS504BDT 4Position VS506BDT 6Position
VS508BDT 8Position VS510BDT 10 Position
VS512BDT 12 Position VS520BDT 20 Position
$237.00 280.00
330.00 368.00
414.00 470.00
BRIDGING LOOPING SEQUENTIAL SWITCHERS VS504BLDT 4Position VS506BLDT 6Position VS508BLDT 8Position
VS510BLDT 10 Position VS512BLDT 12 Position VS520BLDT 20 Position
$283.00 334.00 384.00 418.00 462.00 560.00
VID -ALARM SEQUENTIAL SWITCHERS VA504DT 4Position
VA508DT 8Position VA512DT 12 Position
$420.00 590.00 750.00
VID -ALARM LOOPING SEQUENTIAL SWITCHERS VA504LDT 4Position
$460.00
VA508LDT 8Position
630.00
VA512LDT 12 Position
790.00
Note: All Video Signal Equipment listed below are
Desk Top Models. Rack Mounting is available at extra cost.
Specify when ordering
20.00
Signal Equipment
TIME/DATE GENERATORS TDG200DT Time/ Date Generator. Superimposes month-
day- year, hour- min.- sec onto TV picture TDG200BDT Time/Date Generator. Same as TDG200R.
Battery backup during power loss
$400.00 440.00
SCREEN SPLITTER/INSERTER VSS100DT Screen Splitter/ Inserter simultaneously dis-
plays portions of video from 2cameras on 1 monitor or full view of one camera. Size and position of insert/split is fully adjustable
$315.00
MOTION DETECTOR
MD1OODT Motion detector utilizing " window frame," which can also be used for perimeter protection
$800.00
SEQUENCER PROCESSOR
SP5OODT
Sequencer processor records up to 8cameras
on asingle VTR
$800.00
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER DA104DT 1x4distribution amplifier
$130.00
GROUND ISOLATION TRANSFORMER
GIT100
Eliminates ground loops
$110.00
VT- 146
NOTE: * Available on Special Order Only Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
P,RMA POWER, uectronics Inc.
5615 West Howard Ave
Chicago, IL 60648 (312) 647-9414
eoPclkueSt, s
s
MULTIPLE
OUTLET STRIPS
Asafe and convenient way to distribute power where it's needed
Convenient. " Sockets- Plus"
Sate. All " Sockets- Plus" multi-
Asmad idea in power control.
multiple outlet strips are the
ple outlet strips come with
With one or more on- off switch
quickest, most convenient way to control electric power when and where it's needed, with the assurance of complete safety. (Conventional cube taps and extension cords can result in
3- wire U- ground outlets, and are housed in electrically-
grounded steel cases. Because they are available with built-in fuse or circuit breaker, there's no danger of overloading one of
and current indicator lights available, " Sockets- Plus" multiple outlet strips put the user in complete control of his local power use! See at aglance what's on, what's off.
Acts as abranch circuit, instantly
providing additional power outlets
·Fuse or circuit breaker protection ·U- ground outlets with electrically- wired ground ·Switch capab.lity to turn outlets on or off ·Attractive styling ·Compact size, to fit into tight places ·Heavy-duty construction
·Cross- slot rapid mounting feature
over- loaded circuits and chaotic stacking of plugs into existing wall outlets.) Plug in "Sockets- Plus," and instantly you have the additional outlets you need.
Awide choice of models.
Easy mounting. All units are
._:
Perma Power makes it easy to
provided with two screws and
the main circuits. If the power drain is too great, they shut off the power here, not in afuse box somewhere down the line.
All units are rated at 15 amperes, 125 volts, 60 Hz continuous duty.
They guard the line, so users
Aone year limited warranty
can relax!
-.-J
.,, . .applies to all models.
ii(;
....,d,_
N.,...:.,,..., a
find exactly the kind of multiple outlet strip that's needed... Choose agroup, and then select individual models on the
cross- slots on the bottom for rapid mounting.
Cases are different lengths, depending on the number of out-
6Ft Cord Model No
12 Ft Cord Model No
Number of
Outlets
Master Switch 8 Indicator
Light
swanned
Outlet Pairs with Indicator
bets
Individually Switched
Outlets with Indicator bets
OW'
Case Length oncdest
Suggested
Use Price
6Ft Cord 12 Ft Cord
easy- to- follow pictorial chart.
lets- 2' x2" x9", 2" x2" x12"
INDUSTRIAL MODEL SELECTOR CHART All U listed, all circuit breaker -protected
or 2" x x15".
1(401
K402
4
9 19.70 22.70
1(410
1(412
4
9 21.90 24.90
K420
1(422
4
-
2
-
12
24.70 27.70
1(440
1(442
4
-
-
4
15
30.00 33.00
K450
K452
4
1
-
4
15
32.40 35.40
K510*
K512
5
1
-
-
12
24.40 27.40
K520'
K522'
5
-
2 I-
12
26.70 29.70
Industrial
1(540* K542'
5
-
-
1(600
1(602
6
-
-
4
15
32.00 35.00
-
12
21.90 24.90
Tough silver and black industrial finish-
1(610
K612
6
1
-
-
12
24.10 27.10
1(630
1(632
6
-
3
-
15
29.40 32.40
K710*
K712'
7
1
-
-
15
27.03 30.03
K800
K802
e
-
-
-
15
24.40 27.40
K810
K812
8
1
-
-
15
26.20 29.20
'includes one outlet always " live tor clocks. etc
UNITS WITH GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER PROTECTION
K310G
3
9
K510G
5
12
56.00 57.70
Residential
Warm honey beige top, vinyl woodgrain side panels... blends with the decor of any home'
RESIDENTIAL 5100EL SECTOR CHART AHD L listed all circuit bleaker protected
L400
-
1410
-
L420
-
L440
-
1600
-
L610
-
1800
-
1810
-
4
4
1
-
4
-
2
4
-
-
6
-
-
6
1
--
8
-
-
8
1
-
-
9
18.80
-
9 21.00
-
12
23.80
4
15
29.10
-
12
21.00
-
12
23.20
-
15
23.50
-
15
25.30
UNITS WITH GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER PROTECTION
L3I0G
3
9
1510G
5
12
55.40 56 90
Commercial
Handsome decorative finish fits in beautifully with sales and display settings!
M400
M410
1.1420 M440 51600 M610 14800 M810
COMMERCIAL MODEL SELECTCR CHART Fuse Protected
11402
4
-
-
9
1. es
M412
4
1
-
-
9 18.80
1.4422
4
-
2
-
12
21.60
1/442
4
-
-
4
15
26.80
14602
6
-
-
-
12
18.80
14612
6
1
-
-
12
21.00
14802
8
-
-
-
15
21.30
14812
8
1
-
-
15
23.50
.
21.40 24.20 29.40 21.40 23.60 23.90 26.10
EXTENSION UNITS/NO PROTECTION
N400
4
14800
e
9 14.50
15
18.80
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 147
ID,RMA POWER, wectronics Inc.
5615 West Howard Ave. Chicago, IL 60648 (312) 647-9414
sockets
ePílu.S
SURGE SUPPRESSORS
Protect sensitive equipment from power line voltage surges.
Sensitive digital circuits in today's home and business computers, and electronic office, industrial and medical equipment can be damaged or even destroyed by electrical power line voltage surges. These surges can be caused by lightning, equipment on the same power line being turned on and off, or by electrical utility company switching. Even though adirect strike by lightning is of low probability, lightning several miles away can cause significant power line surges that can harm electronic equipment (even without striking the earth).
All Perma Power Surge Suppressors provide protection against both normal mode surges (line to line) and common mode surges (line to ground). There are two model groups:
The first features single- stage filtering, provided by three metal oxide varistors. Unlike outlet strips in their price
category, the models in this group provide protection on all three conductors in a typical 120VAC circuit. The second group features four- element, two- stage filtering, provided by a uniquely-engineered combination of metal oxide varistors and silicon avalanche diodes. These models assure you of both normal and common mode surge protection, and of an almost unlimited operating life.
All Perma Power Surge Suppressors feature a unique positive shutdown mechanism to prevent inadvertent operation of unprotected equipment in the event of a suppression element failure. A visual indication of shutdown is provided by the pilot lamp. Strip models have a 6- foot double- insulated #14/3 "s..ir line cord, master switch and indicator light and act as apower control center.
Veer
0,01 ,
eile A
tiVir.--1-\--1lMirhe"--e- skF ie -__-_-\ ,41
k
I11ia
specifications
Protection Modes
Clamping Threshold ( Nominal) Let-Through Voltage , Response Time Pulse Life` Pulse Life, Steady State Power , Single- Surge Energy-. Peak Current. Maximum Transient Voltage, Power Rating. Load Noise Filtering Warranty
PERNA POWER SURGE SUPPRESSORS
EXTENDED LIFE SURGE SUPPRESSORS
normal ( line/neutral) common ( line/ground) comm.. ( neutral/ground) 250 Volts 600 Volts 5 nanoseconds 104 cycles 10. cycles 08 wans 70 pules 6000 ainpres 6000 Volts 1875 watts
1 year
normal ( line/neutral)
common ( line/ground) common ( neutral(ground) 225 Volts 400 Volts 5 picoseconds 10. cycles 11). cycles 50 walls 70 pules 6000 ampres 6000 Volts 1875 watts
More than 20db. 2.100 mhz 5 years
TEST WAVES
1 IEEE Std 587 ( 0 5us-100 KHz 6000 Volt. 200 Amp , Ringwave)
2 5KW peak, 10 millisecond expotential switching transient
3 104100 us-expolential ( accepted industry lest impulse for inductive load switching transients)
4 IEEE Std 587 ( 6 x 20 us 30 KA , Unipolar current wave)
5 Limited in 120VAC distribution systems by wiring devices arCOver to 6000 Volts peak ( IEEE Std 587)
SURGE SUPPRESSOR MODEL SELECTOR CHART
Parma Power Surgi Suppressors
Surge Suppressor Model Features ·Both normal and common mode
suppression
·Low let- through voltage
Model No.
Number of
Outlets
Master Switch
Indicator Light
',
Case Length (inches)
Price
·High single- surge energy rating ·Automatic failure shutdown ·1year warranty
PT 209 RT 410 KT 410 RT 610 KT 610 JT 06E10 .11" 0662
2
-
1
4
1
1
4
1
1
6
1
1
6
1
1
6'
1
6 '
·
$33.00
12
46.60
12
4760
15
48.60
15
49.60
19
63.70
19
67.00
Extended Life Surge Suppressor Model Features ·Both normal and common mode
suppression
·Lower let- through voltage
Parma Power Extended Life Surge Suppressors
PS 209
RS 410
4
12
KS 410
4
12
RS 610
6
15
KS 610
6
15
JS 06130
6'
19
JS 06B2
6'
19
'Rack - mount models, outlets on rear panel. Case Style and Color: ( prefix)
P -- Tan plastic case
R -- Tan baked enamel on steel with Oak plastic sides K -- Silver baked enamel on steel and textured black plastic
61.80 75.40
76.40
77.40
78.40 92.50 95.80
·High pulse lifetime ·High steady-state ( repetitive surges)
power rating ·High single-surge energy rating ·Automatic failure shutdown ·5year warranty
Case Style and Color: ( prefix) P -- Tan plastic case R -- Tan baked enamel on steel with Oak plastic sides K -- Silver baked enamel on steel and textured black plastic
VT- 148
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ei) PIONEER
PIONEER VIDEO, INC. INDUSTRIAL SALES DIVISION
5150 E. Pacific Coast Highway/Suite 300 Long Beach, CA 90804 (213) 498-0300
DIGITAL PROGRAWAVD PRODUCTS
USER'S GUIDE
PROGRAMMING PRODUCTS/ PROCESSOR
DIGITAL
et
PROGRAMMING
PRODUCTS
DiscAssembleTM
reYe,.e"l4l11111
,,
FEATURES: ·Free- form source lines with multiple commands ·Optimized object code uses minimum dump space ·Checksum generated for file verification · Provides library of macros, subroutines, and diagnostics ·Assembler variables available for use in expressions ·Variable symbols redefined during asingle pass ·Warning and error messages readable and well documented ·Command mnemonics provided with abbreviations checked for
compatibility with videodisc player.
DiscAssemble is asymbolic macroassembler designed to automatically translate source statements from asource file into object code in an object file and a program listing in a listing file. All three files are normally saved on diskette. Source file contains statements typed by the programmer.
DiscSimulateTM
FEATURES: ·Simulates up to 100 data dumps by automatically loading them into
the player as they are called ·Allows testing of the transmit commands used to send data from a
videodisc player to an external computer or printer ·Permits testing Partial Load commands for data dumps of less than
1022 bytes ·Provides warning and error messages that are readable and well
documented.
DiscSimulate· is aprogram designed to be used by people unfamiliar with computer programming. It is used for demonstrating and debugging digital programs for Pioneer LaserDisc' Players. It is
intended to be used with a Check Disc to simulate the finished disc prior to approving a production run.
DiscMail'
FEATURES: · Data transmission at 300 or 1200 baud ·Automatic retries if there are transmission errors
DiscMail" is atelecommunications program which allows transmission of videodisc source, listing, object, or message text files from one computer to another. Transmission is accomplished over phone lines using a Bell 212A ( or compatible) modem or by direct
connection of two computers using an RS232 serial interface.
Digital Programming Products Systems Requirements
·Apple II or Ile with Apple II Pascal 1.1 operating system. With Apple II, alanguage card is also required. For display purposes an 80- column text card is recommended.
·IBM Personal Computer ( P.C.) with UCSD p- System, Version IV.0 operating system and at least 128K bytes of memory.
·Modification for other computers capable of using the p-System--
RFQ.
DiscAssemble ( includes library of macros, subroutines, and diagnos-
tic programs on diskette, plus user's manual package)
$2,250.00
DiscSimulate ( includes adiskette and user's manual package)
1,250.00
DiscMail ( diskette and user's manual package included)
750.00
SS- D1 PROCESSOR
SWSD SYSTEM STILLS WITH SOUND AND DATA
Motion Video With Stereo Sound ·Traditional applications of optical LaserDisc brand videodiscs ·High quality full color video with two discrete high fidelity audio
channels
Still Frames With Sound ·On one side of adisc, over 20 hours of music and narration explain-
ing and describing 4500 different still frames can be stored ·Transfers sound filmstrip programs to the LaserDisc - medium
(100 typical 20- minute filmstrips per side) · Expands multi-language/message capability
Digital Data Storage ·As much data as 1000 floppy diskettes stored on one disc side ·Massive ROM capacity for typical computer applications ·Graphics and text file data storage · Keyed title and overlay storage ·Interactive program control ·Additional user area at 40 bytes per frame
Still with Sound and Data ( SWSD) is a system that allows compressed audio and/or digital data to be stored in video frames. The SS- D1 Processor, when attached to any optical laser videodisc player, can process data encoded on the disc.
Flexibility is provided by three different encoding techniques. The blinking method blanks the video screen while reading the data into SS- D1 memory, then displays avideo still frame while playing back the audio from memory. The masking method allows the user to store data in up to nine horizontal band segments. Typically, the top and bottom of an image would be cropped as data is read off the disc
while the cropped areas are blanked on the video screen. Then, the player displays astill frame while the SS- D1 memory is played back.
The user area, uses five lines at the top of the picture, outside visible range, to provide data transfer of 40 bytes per frame.
SWSD System
POR
SPECIFICATIONS Audio Encoding Method
Error Correction Method
Power Supply Specifications
·Nommal Voitage ·Pow, censumpt,D-
Connectors and Controls
·vbeo , nput ·VIdeooutput masked. nonmasked ·Aude Aout ·Aucho output ·RS- 232C pot! ·DIgtal data out ( contc rMS
wIthCentrocucs specs) ·SW5 Audo Reseal smtch ·Power ONiOFF sw,tc , ·RS- 232 Baud rate
(100-38 4001select ·AC Outlet SW.IChed
·20V 50/60Hz 701II
-BNC 2-B NC 1- RCA pa.t 1- RCA parr 2- 0- Type ( 25 pm)
1-Amphenol ( 36-Pol 1- Push button 1- Push button
2- DIP ( 8swItch) 1-200 Watts max
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 149
QSI SYSTEMS,
12 Linscott Rd. Woburn, MA 01801 (617) 938-1403
INC.
QS' BG-200 SERIES
BG-200, BG-208, BG-216 COLOR BAR GENERATORS
The CtS1 BG-200 Series is an inexpensive line of high quality color bar generators which produce full field bars and a1000Hz tone. This series is designed for testing both audio and video feed lines quickly and effi-
ciently. The standard model, the BG-200, generates full field bars and 1000Hz tone only. Models BG-208 and BG-216 will provide the additional advantage of an on- screen ID of eight characters and six-
teen characters, respectively. This ID proves very useful in locating specific feed lines.
FEATURES · Full field color bars · 1000Hz tone
· Field programmable eight character ID 18G-208 only) ·Field programmable sixteen character ID ( BG-216 only)
SPECIFICATIONS
Power:
117VAC at 3/8 A
Size:
19"W x1-3/4"H x16"D rackmounted
Audio Output: + 8dBm into 600 ohms, transformer isolated, balanced, Male XLR.
Video Output: 1.0V p- psource terminated in 75 ohms, BNC.
ID ( where applicable):
Eight or sixteen alphanumeric characters, depending
on model; character and background mattes adjus-
table. Horizontal and vertical size and position adjustable. Two character matrices 5x7and 7x9 ( 7x9 shown). Background may be deleted.
BG-200 Full Field Bar Generator
$1195.00
BG-208 Full Field Bar Generator with 8
character programmable identification BG-216 Full Field Bar Generator with 16
1395.00
character programmable identification
1595.00
BG-308
COLOR BAR GENERATOR ·1kHz audio test tone
· Internally switchable for either constant display or flashing mode ·Split-field NTSC bars patterns
COLOR BAR GENERATORS/ VIDEO IDENTIFIER
BG-308 is asplit-field color bar generator with afield programmable 8
character video source identifier positioned in the black block of the
split-field pattern. The BG-308, one rack unit high, is perfect for the microwave equipped ENG truck.
SPECIFICATIONS
Video output
(color bar with 8character ID): 1V p- p, 75 ohm source terminated,
Blackburst output:
BNC connector 75 ohm source terminated, BNC
Pulses: Subcarrier: Vector accuracy: Audio output:
connector Within RS- 170 specifications 3.579545MHz 1- 10Hz, 0-50 degrees C Within 1.5 degrees
Internally adjustable 0to 8dBm,
600 ohms balanced, transformer
Tone:
isolated, male XLR 1kHz sinewave, distortion less than
Power: Size:
3% 117 VAC, 2watts 19"W x 1-3/4"H
x 12"D.
Rack
Mount
BG-308
$ 1495.00
CB- 9000V SERIES LIVE VIDEO IDENTIFIER AND SOURCE IDENTIFIED COLOR BAR GENERATORS
·Adds ID to vertical interval of external composite video when bars are dropped, placed on lines 10 through 16, both fields
·Switch selectable character matrix 5x7or 7x9, in color bar mode · Digital line by line vertical positioning in color bar mode
The CB-9000V Series, in the color bar mode, allows you to test your audio and video links, and the split field identification indicates who is out there. When the color bar is dropped for the live feed, the identification is automatically transferred to the vertical interval of the live video.
CB -9000
SMPTE Color Bar Generator with 8 character field programmable VSID ( Video Source Identification) and 1000Hz Audio Tone. Video
and audio by-pass. 19"W x1-3/4"H x16"D. Rack Mount. 117 VAC.
CB- 9000
$ 2095.00
CB -9000V
8 Character Vertical Interval Identifier. SMPTE Color Bar Generator
with 8character field programmable VSID ( Video Source Identifica-
tion) and 1000Hz Audio Tone. When bars are dropped for program
feed, the 8 character I.D. is automatically transferred to the vertical interval. 19"W x 1-3/4"H x 16"D. Rack Mount. 117 VAC.
CB- 9000V
$ 2195.00
SPECIFICATIONS Video input: Video output:
Video transparency:
1Vp-p nominal, 75 ohm terminated, BNC Adjustable to 1Vp-p 75 ohm source terminated, BNC Differential gain: Less than 0.5%
Differential phase: Less than 0.5° Frequency response: ± 0.5dB to 8MHz
VT- 150
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
QSI SYSTEMS, INC.
12 Linscott Rd. Woburn, MA 01801 (617) 938-1403
MODEL AF- 1000 AUTOPHASING BLACKBURST GENERATOR
The AF- 1000 is a time and labor saving device for multiple camera systems. Cable lengths are no longer a consideration since the AF- 1000 adjusts each of its three blackburst outputs automatically to ensure properly phased chroma and sync at the switcher. Fully selfcontained, the AF- 1000 also features a fixed blackburst output to which all three cameras are referenced. The one rack high unit can be daisychained for systems of more than three cameras, due to its gen locking capabilities which include asingle control covering more than 360° of subcarrier phasing.
FEATURES · Stand alone or genlocking · May be used at distances of 1000 feet · Reference blackburst output ·All inputs are Hi- Z looping ·One rack high
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS · Phases three cameras automatically · Daisychain to phase additional cameras · Enable quick camera phasing · No camera tweaking for cable lengths · Locks TBCed studio VTR's
AF-1000 SPECIFICATIONS
Auto Phase H phase within 4 7Ons
Subcarrier phase within -± 1° Lock time 5seconds max
Internal phase trim H lus min., subcarrier ± 90 min.
MODEL CB- 1680 COLOR BAR GENERATOR/VIDEO SOURCE IDENTIFIER
The CB- 1680 gives you an ID in the vertical interval of an external video source. It is easy to program since pushbuttons are readily available on the front panel. The built-in memory stores up to 80 separate 16 character messages. The CB- 1680 includes genlocking SMPTE bar generator and 2 blackburst sources.
FEATURES ·ID in vertical interval for satellite up- link feeds ·Up- link transmission · Microwave feeds from both fixed and mobile transmitters · EFP segment identification ·SMPTE bars · lkHz tone and blackburst signal
CB-1680 SPECIFICATIONS
Colorbar Output: 1Vp-p, blanking at 0 VDC, 75 ohm source terminated. Pattern: SMPTE with plunge. Pulse Widths: Within RS170 specifications. Subcarrier Frequency: 3.579545 MHz + 10Hz 0°C -- 50°C. Vector Accuracy: Within 1.5 degrees
Genlock Input: 75 ohm terminated, requires blackburst. H Phase: Front panel adjustable to within ± 70 ns. Subcarrrier Phase: Front panel adjustable more than 360 degrees.
Blackburst Outputs: Two, 75 ohm source terminated, blanking at 0 VDC. Pulse Widths: Within RS170 specifications Subcarrier Phase: Adjustable more than + 30 degrees.
ID Inputs: Two, one internally connected to color bar, one external, 75
ohm terminated. Clamping: Synctip.
COLOR BAR/ BLACKBURST GENERATORS
· ·
·
Genlock Mode H phase adjustable ' 2us Subcarrier phase adjustable more than 360° Lock time 5 seconds max 19"W x 1-3/4"H x 16"D 115 VAC + 10%, 22W 0-70 C operating Net weight: 8 lbs. Shipping Weight: 11 lbs.
AF- 1000 Automatic Black Burst Phasing Generator Automatically adjusts each of its three black burst outputs for varying
camera cable lengths to ensure properly phased chroma and sync at the switcher. The unit can be used as astand alone or genlocked. The one rack unit generator can be stacked for systems of more than three cameras
AF- 1000
$ 2595.00
Differential Phase: Less than 0.5 degrees. Differential Gain: Less than 0.5%. Frequency Response: 0.5dB to 8MHz. Tilt and Overshoot: Less than 1%.
Hum and Noise: - 60dB below 1Vp-p. Dc In Output: Less than 0.75 VDC.
Output: 1Vp-p nominal, 75 ohm source terminated.
Audio Input: + 8dB, 600 ohm balanced. Output: + 8dB nominal at 0 VU transformer isolated, 600 ohm
balanced. Line Gain: adjustable from full off to a gain of 2. Tone: lkHz sinewave, distortion less than 1%.
Power 117 VAC 50/60Hz 25 Watts.
Mechanical Video Connectors: BNC Audio Connectors: XLR Size: 19"W x 1-3/4"H x 16"D Weight: Approx. 7 lbs.
Remote 7 BIT parallel plus negative strobe for remote ID selection.
CB- 1680
$2895.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 151
QSI SYSTEMS, INC.
12 Linscott Rd. Woburn, MA 01801 (617) 938-1403
COUNTDOWN GENERATOR/ VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
VT- 77 SEGMENT
VIDEO LEADER COUNTDOWN GENERATOR
The QS! VT- 7Video Leader Countdown Generator provides video and audio tape cueing information at the head end of each program segment. Video cueing is a1second interval numerical countdown for 10 seconds, consisting of 8seconds of displayed numbers and 2seconds of terminal or no numeral video. Audio cueing is 0.5 second of 400Hz tone burst during the first half display of each new video numeral. The first half second of " 2" count contains a200Hz tone burst, indicating that the terminal video has been reached.
All electronics are rack mounted with Size Flash, Set, Count, and Hold front panel controls. Remote contact closures may be input through the rear panel. Remote inputs are priority.
FEATURES · Selectable expanding size · Selectable fixed sizes; any one of eight ·Set: Places " 10" in screen, no audio ·Count: Countdown starts with " 9" and tone burst ·Count video deleted after " 2" displayed ·Video bypass on power- down ·Switch selectable 1/2 second flashing characters · Hold: Stops countdown on last number and silences audio · Remote inputs for all control functions ·400Hz Counting Audio, 200Hz Black Cue ·Accepts any composite video input ·Numerals generated in any display area ·Pulse out at " 5", " 3" and terminal count
666 0
SPECIFICATIONS
MECHANICAL Size:
19"W x1-3/4"H x12"D, Rack Mount
CONNECTORS Video:
BNC
Audio:
Remote Control: ELECTRICAL Power:
XLR Terminal Strip
115VAC, 60Hz, 10 watts
Controls:
Toggle switches, pushbuttons and external dry closures
VIDEO Input:
1.0Vp-p, 75 ohm terminated
Output:
Adjustable to 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohm source terminated
Audio Output:
600 ohm balanced, transformer isolated
VT- 7 10 Second Countdown Timer 7Segment
$1395.00
6 x 1 UTILITY VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
The QS' 6x1DA Video Distribution Amplifier is designed to handle standard utility video distribution for your television system. The 6x1 DA is adesk top type distribution amplifier with looped- through video input and six isolated video outputs. The compactness and self-
contained power supply makes the VDA highly portable for those tight quarters in your operations.
FEATURES · 1in x6out
·Looped- through input · Excellent transparency ·Output source terminated in 75 ohms · Front panel gain and equalization controls
SPECIFICATIONS Size:
4-1/2"W x2"H x4-1/2"D
Power: Optional:
115VAC, 50/60Hz 5watts 230VAC, 50/60Hz 5watts
VIDEO Input:
Hi- Zlooped- through 1.0 VPP
Outputs:
75 ohm source terminated
Frequency Response: 0.5dB to 10MHz
Differential Gain:
Less than 0.5%
Output Isolation:
40cl B
Equalization:
Utility -- Single control, approximate com-
pensation of 200-1000 ft. of RG59U coaxial cable.
· ·
Noise:
Less than 60dB, below 1VPP
Differential Phase:
Less than 0.5°
Propagation Delay:
Approximately 10 ns.
Gain:
Adjustable from less than unity to greater than + 10dB
6x1DA Portable 1in, 6out distribution amplifier with front panel control for gain and equalization
$295.00
VT- 152
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
QSI SYSTEMS, INC.
12 Linscott Rd. Woburn, MA 01801 (617) 938-1403
VIDEO SOURCE IDENTIFIERS
VSID-1611V VIDEO SOURCE IDENTIFIER
FEATURES ·5x5dot matrix · 16 character positions · No signal interference or degradation of video signals ·Adjustable matte level
The VSID-1611V inserts 16 numeric characters in the vertical blanking interval of a NTSC signal using lines 10 through 14 inclusive. There are 10 numeric characters ( 0through 9) plus ablank for each of the 16 character positions.
Selection of the number or blank is done through sixteen ( 16) eleven position thumbwheel switches located on the front panel of the VSID-1611V. The thumbwheels are arranged in the same manner as the character format so that programming the identifier is simply a matter of dialing it in.
The VSID-1611V was designed to identify video signals transmitted by mobile satellite uplinks. The telephone number of the uplink is inserted into the VBI of the video program being transmitted.
VSID-82 VIDEO SOURCE IDENTIFIER
Developed for security, broadcast, medical and industrial applications, the VSID-82 provides an efficient and effective visual indicator of video signal's identity. The VSID-82 generates eight alphanumeric characters and inserts them into acomposite video signal. The ID is movable anywhere on- screen or into the vertical interval, with separate controls for character and background matte levels. It can also be adjusted for several sizes.
Switches on the board allow the user to select either a5x7or a7x9 character matrix and, if desired, to delete the full- surround back-
ground. Because the ID is programmed with DIP switches, it can be easily changed at any time, even in the field.
FEATURES ·Switch selected 5 x7or 7 x9 matrix · Eight easily programmed alphanumeric characters
·Adjustable mattes · Switchable background delete · Line by line vertical positioning ·Adjustable horizontal and vertical size
SPECIFICATIONS Power:
5VDC at 500mA per card
Size:
4-1/2"W x9"D x5/8"H
Video Input:
1.0Vp-p nominal, on board termination
Video Output:
Adjustable to 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohm source terminated
Frequency Response: ± . 5dB to 8MHz
Differential Gain:
Less than 0.5 percent
Differential Phase: Display Size:
Less than 0.5 degrees Horizontally adjustable from 1/4 to full screen. Vertically adjustable, three sizes per matrix. Character heights of 14, 28, and 42 raster lines
in 5x7; 18, 36, and 54 raster lines in 7x9.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input/Output:
Hardwire looping, 1Vp-p nominal, 75 ohm
source terminated, BNC connectors
Frequency Response: ±0.5dB, DC to 8MHz
Differential Phase:
Less than 0.2 degrees
Differential Gain:
Less than 0.2 percent
Character Insertion: Additive-- no signal degradation with power
loss
Matte Level:
Adjustable between 35 and 80 IRE
Power:
117 VAC ± 10%, 4watts
Dimensions:
19"W x1-3/4"H x12"D
VSID-1611V
1295.00
1
VSID SERIES VIDEO SOURCE IDENTIFIER -- DUAL MATRIX
UNIT VSID-82/101 VSID-82/102 VSID-82/103
Single Card in Rack Frame Double Card in Rack Frame Triple Card in Rack Frame
$1375.00 2095.00 2850.00
CARDS VSID-82
Single Card
595.00
FRAME W/POWER SUPPLIES VSID-82/195RMPS Sixteen ( 161 Card Frames
1995.00
SYSTEMS SUPPORT EQUIPMENT
"X" Board
Universal Extender Board for Frames . . . 99.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 153
QSI SYSTEMS, INC.
12 Linscott Rd Woburn, MA 01801 (617) 938-1403
SW-402 MINI- PRODUCTION SWITCHER
FEATURES ·One rack- unit high · Four video inputs
·Two switchable buses · Dissolve between buses ·Two program and two preview outputs ·Tally contacts ( dry closure)
The SW-402 is a four input, two output mini- production switcher with a simple dissolve feature between the two selected signals. Designed originally to augment the QSI AF- 1000 autophasing blackburst generator, the SW-402 can easily be integrated into other systems. The SW-402 is a compact, easy to operate, mini- production switcher -- ideal where space and dollars are limited.
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs: 1V p- pcomposite, internal termination, BNC
Outputs: 1V p- p, adjustable, two preview, two program, BNC
Dissolve: between buses
Power: 115 VAC ± 10%, 230VAC optional
Size:
19"W x1-3/4"H x12"D
Tally:
dry contacts on program bus, 9pin connector, supplied
Frequency Response: 0.5dB to 8MHz
Differential Gain: < 0.5%
Differential Phase: < 0.5°
Switching:
vertical interval
Sync Source:
video or black on input # 1
Weight:
net weight: 6lbs. shipping weight: 9lbs.
SW- 402
$ 1695.00
SWITCH ER/PORTABLE COLOR BAR GENERATOR
PSF-777 COLOR BAR GENERATOR
FEATURES · lkHz audio test tone output
·Can be powered by most common camera/VTR -- 11 to 15VDC batteries
· Internally selectable for either flashing ID or constant display
PSF-777 a battery operated split- field colorbar generator with 8
character user programmable video identification in the black block of the split- field bar pattern.
The PSF-777 is perfect for the remote engineer when testing temporary microwave links or long cable runs.
SPECIFICATIONS
Video Output ( with 8
character ID):
1V p- p, 75 ohm source terminated
Pattern:
Split-field NTSC bars
Pulses:
Within RS170 specifications
Subcarrier:
3.579545MHz ± 10Hz, 0-50°C
Vector Accuracy:
Within 1.5 degrees
Video bypass with power switch off
Audio Output: Tone:
Front panel switchable ( transformer isolated) -56dB, 150 ohm balanced; OdB, + 4dB + 8dB at 600 ohm balanced 1kHz Sinewave; distortion less than 3%
Power: External Controls:
11 to 15 VDC, 120mA Power switch; LED indicates power on and low
battery ( flashing); and 4position audio level switch
Mechanical:
Video Connector: 2BNC for video in/out
Audio Connector: XLR
Power Connector: 2.1mm coaxial power jack
Size:
8.6"L x4.6"W x3"H
Weight:
3.5 lbs. ( less battery)
Optional transistor battery pack ( 2) with 115V AC power adaptor.
PSF-777
$ 995.00
VT- 154
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PSF-777
uniVUer
The uniVLIer puts stereo metering over monitor video for quick unified reference of audio level and phase error
MonSter Mongol.,
The Mono-Stereo Coherency Evalator is astereo phase energy bargraph display.
The uniVUer is the first practical method of measuring audio levels in an environment which demands that the engineer's visual attention be on the video monitor. With the stereo audio levels keyed into the video monitor
program material, the engineer has asingle reference point for all program quality evaluations. Add the MonSter option ( Mono-Stereo Coherency Evaluator) and the uniVUer will signal Phase/Polarity errors.
The uniVUer is available with either VU or PPM ballistics, both meters complying precisely with industry adopted standards.
The uniVUer has an adjustable peak flasher for system headroom protection and an adjustable silence sense which can be tied to an external alarm for master control " off the air" alarms.
The uniVUer is compatible with both NTSC and PAL systems and will not degrade the signal to even the most expensive video monitors. Simply insert the uniVUer into the monitor input loop and you're ready to go. Horizontal and vertical size and position are adjustable to suit any monitoring situation. The bar video level is adjustable, and ablack box surround can be switched in or out to enhance visibility. The uniVUer display can be bypassed and both the bypass function and the black box can be remote controlled.
The uniVUer consists of two 41 / 2 "x61 / 2 "PC boards stacked and hinged to open like abook for setup and maintenance. All setup adjustments are located on the front edge of the boards. The uniVUer is rackmounted (3 uniVUers in a13/4 "x19" chassis with common power supply).
The uniVUer can be used any place where audio competes with video for operator attention. In master control rooms, network switching centers, satellite uplink facilities and other program distribution points where more than one program channel is in use and it isn't possible to monitor audio on all channels simultaneously.
Hundreds of uniVUers are in operation worldwide in major network facilities, production and post production facilities, satellite switching centers, duplicating houses and motion picture dialog and scoring stages.
The piggy-back optional MonSter ( Mono-Stereo Coherency Evaluator) monitors stereo phase energy. As an optional extra capability within the uniVUer, the MonSter provides ago/no-go decision for both program material and setup tones. Intended for use in stereo TV, motion picture and recording studio applications, the MonSter is essential where left-right energy coherency provides the basis for correct mono-mix.
Specifications.
VU
PPM
Performance Spec
ANSI C16.5-1954 EBI3205-E
BS4297: 1968
Input Impedance
50K ohms, balanced 50K ohms, balanced
25K ohms,
25K ohms,
unbalanced
unbalanced
Frequency Response 20-20KH; ±0.3dB
±0.3dB
Reference Level (0) Adjustment
Range
-20 to + 8dB
-6to + 22dB
Input Overload Capability
(Continuous, Above Operating) +22dB
+10dB
Loading (600 ohm line)
0.1dB
0.1dB
Dynamic Measuring Range
30dB
30dB
Dynamic Response
100ms:OdB
(5KHz Tone Burst @ REF Volts in)
10ms: 2.5 ± 0.5dB
5ms: - 4.0 ± 0.75dB
1.5ms: - 9.0 ± 1.0dB
Response Time
300ms
10ms Integration
Time
Fall Back Time (24dB Drop)
300ms
2.8 ± 0.3sec.
Peak Flasher Adjustment Range
(Relative to Operating)
-33 to + 18
-3010 + 10
Reversability/Polarity Error
±0.5dB
±0.5dB
Resolution
Logarithmic,
1to 5dB/Step
15 2dB Steps
Silence Sense (" C" contact
closure)
Delay adjustable
from 6-second to
1- minute
Video Input (10K ohms, Bridging) 1Vp-p ± 10%
75 ohm term
Video Output ( Into 75 ohms)
1.00Vp-p
Video Frequency Response
8MHz ± 0.5dB
Video Differential Phase
1°
Video Differential Gain
1%
Tilt
1%
Power Requirements
+12 ± 0.5VDC @ 100ma
Operating Temperature
Stability (20°C, Lt5% Power)
0to 50°C, 30°-122°F ±0.5dB
2-Cards Stacked Together
41/2"x61/2"x1Vit " Thick
Edge Connector
22 Position (0.156")
Weight
10oz, 2809
Rack Frame ( Mounts 3uniVUers) 19" x13 / 4 "x12" Deep ( 1RU)
Weight
41 / 2 lbs., 2.025kg
Power Requirements
115/230V, 50-60Hz 7VA
Input Voltage Tolerance ± 10%
M ono-Stereo energy coherency is defined as the point at which the electrically combined left and right channels will have substantially the
same energy component as the perceived energy component when acousti-
cally and aurally combined. In other words...the point at which the mono mix
will sound like the stereo mix.
When bridged across the left and right channels the bargraph provides
acontinuous readout of average phase energy. Tie extremes, from cen-
ter channel buildup to polarity reversals, and all the nuances in between
are clearly apparent. The MonSter provides much the same information
as the Lissajous Oscillograph in adisplay which requires less subjective interpretation.
The MonSter is intended for use in stereo TV, motion picture, and recording
studio applications where left-right energy coherency is essential for correct
mono-mix. The input filtering is designed to provide reliable phase energy
measurement of program material. With the filters switched out the MonSter
can be used to measure point source phase during microphone placement,
transmission system frequency sweeps, and tape machine head alignment.
The Mono-Stereo Coherency Evaluator graphically indicates the phase
energy relationship of the stereo channels in an unambiguous bargraph
readout. In astereo signal the instantaneous phase relationships appear
random, but in reality they must be energy additive in order to provide " loud-
ness" to the program material.
When program material is evaluated,
the MonSter bargraph movement
Normal Program
indicates the left-right instantaneous
sum energy measured against the total left- right energy. The result is
IMI.Ster
phase energy relationship. This
relationship is extremely important if
the resulting program is subject to
being listened to on amonophonic
system (as in television). Maintaining the program in the
Red Amber Green
GREEN with occasional dips as low
as - 3dB into the AMBER range is the
recording engineer's goal. When the display goes down into the RED zone a
distinct cancellation is occurring, usually due to amicrophone misphasing.
When total energy reaches the - 15dB level aprobable left- right polarity
reversal is assumed and the RED portion of the display will blink as an
operator warning. When audio level in either channel falls below the minimum
sampling threshold, the entire display goes dark.
With the filters switched out of the circuit, the MonSter will display point
source phase cancellation during microphone placement and system
checkout.
Specifications.
Input Impedance Frequency Response Reference Level Minimum Sample Level Loading (600 ohm line) Frequency Rolloff ( Switchable) Power Requirements Operating Temperature
Stability (cor '15% Power)
Size Weight
50K ohms balanced bridging 25K ohms unbalanced bridging 20-20KHz ± 0.5dB +4 dBm(±4013) 10dB below operating 0.1dB
2nd order at 750Hz lo-pass 115/230V, 50-60Hz, NA ± 10% 0-50°C, 32°-122°F ±0.5dB 21/ 2 "H x81/2"W x91/ 4 "D, 63.5mm x 215.9mm x234.94 mm 21/ 2 lbs., 1.125 kg.
Product Ordering Information.
PRODUCT & OPTIONS 4514-01 4514-02 4514-03
4514-04 4403 4539-01
4539-02
4509 4300
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION uniVUer, VU BALLISTICS uniVUer, PPM BALLISTICS uniVUer, TV MODULATION MONITOR BALLISTICS uniVUer, CUSTOM BALLISTICS MonSter OPTION TO uniVUer RACK FRAME W/POWER SUPPLY 110V/220V 50-60Hz VIDEO INPUT LOOPING RACK FRAME W/POWER SUPPLY 110V/220V 50-60Hz WNIDEO BYPASS RELAYS-- INPUT 75 ohm TERM uniVUer MAINTENANCE EXTENDER CARD PRODUCTION MonSter
THE REAL WORLD TECHNOLOGIES GROUP, INC.
UST PRICE $ 995.00 $ 995.00 $ 995.00 $1,095.00 $ 475.00 $ 250.00
$ 350.00 $ 55.00 $ 675.00
130 McCormick, Suit9 e 1095 · Cos7 ta Me- sa C1 A 92620 6 · 176 141 1 VT- 155
RG341
Turn any video monitor into aprecision alignment instrument with the Real World RG341 Safe Area/Safe Title Display Generator with Center Marker, Micro- Mark Cursor for extra convenience in post production and optional Remote Control.
THE REAL WORLD TEUFINULOCilES GROUP, INC.
1
The Real World RG341 is astand-alone display generator which provides three of the most useful alignment and signal verification tools for video engineering, production and post production.
Pulse Cross Precision electronics delay incoming video into horizontal and vertical elements in order to check video timing and adjust video tape machine tension and tracking.
Blanking Verifier Fixed patterns ( 10.9 microsecond horizontal and 20 TV lines vertical) are included in the pulse-cross display.to verify that equipment under test conforms to RS- 170A standard for H & Vblanking width.
Micro- Mark Cursor Digitally- generated marker, calibrated in 1microsecond intervals, may be positioned anywhere within picture to verify timing information and to aid in titling or scene setup.
Safe Area/Safe Title Dual reticules, digitally generated to meet SMPTE standard specifications confirm safe transmission of vital picture information.
RG341 displays may be used separately or in any combination.
VIDEO IN
EXT SYNC IN
INPUT BUFFERS
VIDEO PROCESSOR
1_ VIDEO 1
OUTPUTS
,
VIDEO?
SYNC PROCESSOR
SCAN DELAY
GEN
MICRO MARK
GEN
SAFE AREA
SAFE TITLE GEN
SA/ST'
SA/ST 2 SA/ST ,
Specifications
REMOTE
j
CONTROL j
Real World RG341 Micro-Mark/Safe Area Generator
INPUTS
V,1eu Ext Sync
IVp pic,op Inrougn c.1,11erent,a1 irlp,1 1-8 V p- p. loop through
OUTPUTS
Video SA/ST
Two video outputs 1V p-p. 75 ohm with or without selected keyed- in pattern Three dedicated non-switchable composite outputs. 1V p- p. 75 ohms. 60dB isolation between outputs
CONTROLS
VT- 156
1 Micro -Mark Cursor
On- Off ( LED Indicator)
2 Line
On- Off ( LED Indicator)
3 Horizontal Position
Multi turn potentiometer
4 Vertical Position
Multi turn potentiometer
5 Horizontal Scan Delay
On- Off ( LED Indicator)
6 Vertical Scan Delay
On- Off ( LED Indicator)
7 Safe Area/Title
On -Off ( LED Indicator)
8 Center Crosshair
On- Off ( LED Indicator)
9 Minimum letter size
On- Off ( LED Indicator)
10 External Sync
On- Off ( LED Indicator)
11 Remote
On- Off ( LED Indicator)
12 Power
On- Off ( Incandescent Indicator)
NOTE Functions 7and 8are independent of each other
Function 9works inconjuction with function 7
VIDEO PERFORMANCE
Differential input with HUM rejection Frequency response
Differential Phase Differential Gain K Factor Horizontal tilt Vertical tilt Signal-to-noise ratio
40dB + 15dB to 4MHz. -3dB Ti 15MHz 05 ° 05% 0.5% 0.5% 05% better than 60dB (measured with Rhode 8 Schwartz noise meter)
PATTERN DETAILS
Vertical Line Thickness
Horizontal Line Thickness
Blanking Markers Horizontal Vertical
Safe Area Limits Safe Title Limits
Visibility Micro -Mark
200 nanosec (100-white/100-black, internally adjustable to 100 nanosec -50-white/50-black) 2TV Lines ( one line white, one line black)
10 9microsec 20 TV lines 90% of scanned image 80 0/o of scanned image ( conforms to SMPTE RP 273. reaffirmed 1977) Independent of picture content 1microsecond spacing with enlarged marks for 5and 10 microsecond intervals
ENVIRONMENTAL
Temperature Non- operating Operating
Altitude Non- operating Operating
-45°C to + 65°C 0°C to 45°C
to 50.000 feet to 15,000 feet
POWER REOUIRMENTS
115 Volts AC or 230 Volts AC nominal (internally selectable)
Main voltage
104 to 126 Volts AC or
208 to 252 Volts AC
Line Frequency
48 Hz to 62 Hz
Power consumption
35 W Max
MECHANICAL
Electronics Remote Control
13 /4 "Hx19"Wx14"D 13 /4 "H x5"Wx 33/ 4 "D
PRODUCT ORDERING INFORMATION
Product & Options
Product Description
List Price
RG-341-01 RG-341-02 RG-341R
NTSC model PAL model Remote control
$1495.00 $1795.00 $ 275 00
-- THE REAL WORLD TECHNOLOGIES
GROUP, INC.
130 McCormick, Suite 109 · Costa Mesa, CA 92626 · 714) 957-1061
ROH CORPORATION
3603 Clearview Place NE Atlanta, GA 30340 (404) 455-7940
INTERCOMMUNICATION MASTER STATIONS
302
308
316
SERIES 300 INTERCOMMUNICATION MASTER STATIONS
The full range of ROH Series 300 Intercom Stations provide aflexible and efficient intercommunication system capable of satisfying a
broad range of news, production and technical operation requirements. Series 300 Master Stations are reliabie and are suitable in both fixed and mobile environments.
Available in 1, 8, 16, 24 and 32 Channel versions, these Intercom stations can be configured to accomrrodate any combination of
Intercom, Interphone, Party Line, IFB/PGM Interrupt, Page/Talkback, 2-Way Radio, Telephone and All Call functions. When configuring these communication features into a single operator station, additional auxiliary control panels and associated accessories are unnecessary. ROH Intercom Stations can be supplied in either self-contained or remote panel versions.
Series 300 Intercom Systems include Models 308, 316, 324 and 332 and are designed for applications which require the coordination of
Intercom, Party Line ( PL), Program Interrupt ( IFB), Page, Telephone, 2-Way Radio and All Call communication, util zing asingle Operator
control panel in a Headset or Speaker/ Mic mode. Each Operator panel is remotable from its chassis and equipped with its respective number of dual purpose pushbutton switches, a corresponding number of toggle keys, speaker/headset selector and a master All Call toggle key.
Except for PL usage, all the functions are easily satisfied through the exclusive use of the toggle keys.
Operating controls have been kept to a minimum and communications with any number of Master Strions is asimple and straight-
forward procedure. Each Intercom station can originate and maintain two-way communications with any one or more stations. Both private and group communications car be conducted simultaneously without other stations interferring with one another. By depressing the momentary push- to- talk keys, individ-channels or functions (2- Way, IFB, etc.) may be addressed while alternate action switches select the listen status for the desired interphone channel(s). Concentric front panel controls adjust speaker volume and auxiliary program level. In addition, a rear panel control is provided for microphone gain.
332-02 32 Transmit and 20 Receive circuits, 5.25" x19" rackmount.
Requires RAN-001 or RAN-015 external speaker; and 75- pair
interconnect cable
$4700.00
332-01 Same as 332-02 except with 12 Receive circuits
4460.00
324-02 24 Transmit and 20 Receive circuits with built-in speaker,
5.25" x19- rackmount. Requires 50- pair interconnect cable.
4200.00
324
332
324-01 Same as 324-02 except with 12 Receive circuits
3960.00
316-02 16 Transmit and 20 Receive circuits with built-in speaker,
3.50" x19" rackmount. Requires 50- pair interconnect cable.
3700.00
316-01 Same as 316-02 except with 12 Receive circuits
3460.00
308-01 8 Transmit and 12 Receive circuits with built-in speaker, 3.50" x19" rackmount. Requires 25- pair interconnect cable.
2960.00 302-01 1ICM and 2- channel PL ( selectable) circuits with speaker and
power supply, 115/230V, 50/60 cycle. 1.75" ( H) x19" rack-
mount. Includes 2ea. PTT keys; FCM, PL and AUX volume
controls; 4ea. 3- pin XLR connectors for audio inputs/out-
puts, and 3- pin XLR gooseneck/mic connector. NOTE:
302-01 is self-contained only
780.00
ACCESSORIES
RAN- 001 Unpowered full range speaker system in awalnut veneer
enclosure. 30 Watts power capacity and 4 ohms input
impedance.
$118.00
RAN-015 Same as RAN- 001 except housed in a protective trans-
port case with handle and removable front/rear covers.
118.00 RAN-002 Unpowered extended range speaker system. Constructed
of 5/8" hgh density laminated wood, finished with walnut
veneer. Includes two low frequency drivers, one HF Dome
Tweeter and crossover. 60 Watts power capacity and 4
ohms input impedance.
178.00
RAN-025 Same as RAN-002 except housed in a protective trans-
port case with handle and removable front/rear covers.
188.00
GOOSENECKS/MICS
565-7 7" gooseneck, connectorized
40.00
565-14 14" gooseneck, connectorized
45.00
565-20 20" gooseneck, connectorized
50.00
558 Noise- cancelling mic with 12" goose- neck for hardmounting
on PL stations so designated.
140.00
563 Noise- cancelling mic, connectorized
100.00
563H Handheld push-to-talk mic with 6' coil cord and 3- pin XLR
connector installed.
90.00
CABLE, TELEPHONE ( Specify to nearest 5' Length)
25- Pair 351B- IISolid, with connectors installed
$30 + . 70 ft.
351S- IISame as 351B except standard.
Upon Request
50- Pair 352B- IISolid, double- booted with connectors
installed
$60 + 1.00 ft.
352S- IISame as 352B except standard.
Upon Request
75- Pair 353B- IISolid, triple- booted with connectors installed.
$90
+ 1.30 ft.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 157
ROH CORPORATION
3603 Clearview Place NE Atlanta, GA 30340 (404) 455-7940
PARTY LINE USER STATIONS
SERIES 303 PARTY LINE ( PL) USER STATIONS
The full range of ROH Series 303 Party Line IPL) User Stations are designed to provide reliability and audio clarity to party line communications for industrial, entertainment, and broadcast requirements. Series 303 stations are available in both Headset and
Speaker/ Mic versions to include Belt Pack, Console, Rack, Portable Speaker, Rack Mount Speaker and Wall Mount Speaker. All stations can be used with either Dynamic or Carbon headsets.
PL/ User Stations are supplied standard as high impedance bridging (10,000 ohms, typical) across a150 ohm unbalanced line; configured standard with one channel PL and one channel PGM. Two channel PL, optional. Other standard electro-mechanica) features include a 3- position MIC Key for MIC ON/OFF and PTT ( momentary) use, associated volume controls and Carbon and Dynamic headset jacks.
ROH User Stations can be used to construct acomprehensive standalone mobile or fixed PL System or to complement any ROH Series 300 Intercom Master Stations to provide additional communications to floor personnel, cameras, and remote field units. Although intended for PL use, various Series 303 User Stations can also be interfaced with ROH Intercom Systems as private intercommunication positions when the multiple channel features of Master Stations are not required.
Series 303 Party Line units are interconnected via standard 2- conductor mic cable or single shielded pair through the use of 3pin XLR type audio connectors. DC power and two channels of the interphone stations are combined at a central location by a plug-in PC
card regulator which creates phantom powered or " WET" audio buses. In addition to being able to rece ve power from the wet audio bus, Model 303RS and TM are also offered with the optional Model 200PS, 115/230 VAC Power Supply. Stations equipped with the PS will power themselves for the AC line normal y, and will rever to the wet bus power if no AC is present.
A maximum of 30 non- speaker user stations or 8 speaker user stations may be powered from one wet line. Two wet lines may be audio coupled together to further expand the number of user stations intercommunicating with one another. Speaker user stations may be externally powered in order to reduce the DC load on awet bus. All
Series 303 User Stations present a high impedance bridging load to the wet bus audio and multiple units have little or no effect to the audio level on the bus. All units incorporate fast attack and slow decay automatic gain control circuits on their microphone inputs which helps maintain the audio bus level at a near constant level.
ROH Party Line units receive power from Model 274 Power Regulator
module, installed in any Series 200 Mainframes. Typical installations use an XLR Breakout Panel to provide mJItiple interphone line connectors or lines may be connected direct to the plug-in regulator.
Line connectors may all be wired to the same party- line channels or routed through aSource Delegation or Assignment Panel. Series 303
units are direct y compatible with RTS TW Series and Clearcom System II interphone user stations, and can be interchangeably
plugged into these systems.
GENERAL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
(Ref OdBV = 0.775V RMS)
Audio Line Impedance: 150 ohms, ' 50 ohms, 75Hz-20kHz
Speech Level:
-20dBV to OdBV (- 10c1BV avg.)
Line Capacitance:
0.3 microfarads max. ( typ. 10,000 ft of cable)
303B Portable headset station
$400.00/300.00
303C Console mount headset station
400.00
303TM Portable speaker station, 2- channel ( selectable)
plus AUX, removable rear panel for ( optional)
Model 200PS plug-in power supply. Includes 3- pin
XLR connectors for INPUT, LOOP TI- RU, AUX and
MIC
520.00
303R Rack mount headset station, 1.75" x ' 9"
460.00
303R2 Same as 303R except with two ( 2) headset stations
303RD Same as 303R except with 10- position PL channel
select switch. Requires 25- pair cable and 300SP
Splitter Panel for system interconnect
700.00
303RS Rack mount speaker station, 1.75" x19", with 2- PL
channels ( selectable) plus AUX. Includes 14"
gooseneck/noise-cancelling mic and removable
rear panel for ( optional) Model 200PS plug-in power
supply
620.00
303WS Wall mount speaker statior, 2- PL channels
(selectable) plus AUX. Includes built-in electret mic
and rear- mounted terminal strip
540.00
VT- 158
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ROSS VIDEO LIMITED
500 John St. P.O. Box 220 Iroquois, Ontario, CN KOE 1K0 (613) 652-4886 Telex 05-811579
MULTI- LEVEL EFFECTS SYSTEM/ CHROMA KEY
Encore Memory System
·Simple operation with one Multi- Level Effects system to store and recall the next scene as shown on the MLE preview monitor. The MLE program output is never disturbed.
· Set-ups are created on the switcher panel and stored or recalled from the Encore control module.
·Each of 5 memory pages stores 20 Multi- Level Effects set-ups
(events) and one sequence of up to 32 events. Total storage is 100 set-ups and 5sequences of 32 scenes each. · RS422 serial port for editor interfacing. ·Built-in diagnostics for simplified trouble- shooting and verification of system operation.
The Ross Encore is a microprocessor based memory system that greatly enhances the capabilities of the switcher both in studio use and post- production.
Encore provides asimple- to- operate means of storing and recalling video production switcher set-ups. In the studio it improves accuracy and reduces the pressure on the switcher operator during fastmoving programs.
In the post- production suite, Encore can communicate with computerized videotape editing systems by means of a serial interface port. Now the most complex production effects can be created and instantly recalled, time after time, ensuring production consistency and effective use of costly editing time. When Encore is used with some brands of editors it is able to store switcher set-up information directly to the edit system's floppy disk.
Ultra Key
· Keying with ANY color ·Superior hue discrimination ·Production flexibility ·Ease of operation
The Ultra Key is a new approach to chroma keying that provides superb quality keys, free from the effects of background color "spill".
And now for the first time in the present generation of enhanced chroma keyers, there is continuous remote control of hue adjustment -- you can key with ANY color. The Ultra Key is completely integrated into the Ross Multi- Level Effects system, meaning that you can use it like an ordinary chroma key unit WITHOUT the limitations and restrictions imposed by add-on units. You can change foreground or background sources separately or in combination with each other or with titles. And while other units limit you to one camera, the Ross Ultra Key permits the use of two or more chroma key cameras with selection right on the switcher control panel, including automatic key follow of the foreground bus video selection. An optional multi- camera selector is available. With Ultra Key there is no distortion of colors in the keyed scene. That means you can make transitions to and from chroma key situations without the distracting hue shifts on the keyed- in subject that occur on some chroma keyers.
A separate "travelling matte" output may be recorded for subsequent post- production to eliminate problems of encoded keying.
There are only two remote controlled adjustments -- hue selection and null control. With the use of the null control, you can eliminate blue edging or blue tint, so common to conventional chroma keyers.
RGB KEY
o HUE
o
NULL IN1
I2N e
FOLLOW
Continuous hue selection offers improved hue discrimination.
Nu'l control is set to eliminate undesirable edge color effects from subject.
Two camera selector has follow position. An optional multi- camera se1ector is available.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT -159
SHINTRON COMPANY, INC.
144 Rogers Street Cambridge, MA 02142 1617) 491-8700 Telex 921497
AMPLIFIERS
HI -REL SYSTEM SERIES
High Reliability Audio/Video Distribution Amplifiers and Audio- Follow- Video Routing Switchers. Shintron Hi- Re) System Component Series for video production professionals is an expanding line of signal distribution amplifiers and audio- follow- video routing switchers commonly required in video production systems.
The Hi- Re) Series pursues " reliability" single-mindedly. The products go through aseries of long aging and quality control procedures before shipment. In addition to the thorough attention to reliability, the basic design philosophy is conservative in all aspects. For example, all audio distribution amplifiers listed in this series are equipped with both input and output transformer isolation. Some manufacturers think this practice is superfluous. We think it adds an extra margin of safety making the products supremely reliable.
AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS (Transformer Coupled)
M511=11111131==
MODEL 201
Model 201 Audio Distribution Amplifier ( Terminal Block)
The Model 201 is the terminal block type connector version of the ex-
tremely popular Model 316 as described below. The specifications are identical to Model 316 except 201 is equipped with terminal block con-
nectors on the rear panel instead of XLR connectors.
$450.00
1141·111M1140101
111
0111111MIMIZI
MODEL 316
Model 316 Audio Distribution Amplifier
The Model 316 is an audio distribution amplifier with one input and six
outputs. The Model features transformer isolation both at input and
output. This conservative design approach makes this product
popular among professionals.
$480.00
VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
II 0 · · · e *
MODEL 336
Model 336 Video Distribution Amplifier
Shintron Model 336 Video Distribution Amplifier is a professional
grade, all- silicon solid-state video distribution amplifier for multiple
fan- out, high grade distribution systems. Model 336 features profes-
sional electronics specifications, acompact 19" rack- mount package,
and modern appearance.
$300.00
111········00.
) f.
· » · · · =I» 4,- ·
·
0-0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0-0 0 0 0 II 0 0
MODEL 337
Model 337 Dual Video Distribution Amplifier
The Model 337 Dual VDA packs two Model 336's in one rack enclosure
for compactness. The Model 337 can be used as either 1in 12 out DA's
or 2 in 6 out DA's in one enclosure.
$480.00
The electrical performance is identical to Model 336 as above.
·
· ·
f)
I,
·· = le
·
.·
.· --
4) CO et ·-· · · · · le 5
MODEL 338
.)
MODEL 338-P
Model 338 Pulse Distribution Amplifier
The Model 338 is aregenerative PDA suitable for Broadcast Cable and
other high reliability environment. The 338 contains two identical
Pulse DAs of one input/six outputs.
$480.00
VT- 160
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BUILDING THEM BETTER IN TEXAS
Low cost. Fast delivery. Superb quality. Smart reasons to select Shook mobile television production systems. But the real advantage is not how little you'll spend for Shook's totally custom designed vehicles-- it's the additional revenues you'll earn by delivering those profitable remote productions.
Cost effective? With Shook's low prices and solid reputation for quality and reliability, you couldn't ask for abetter return on your investment! Providing quality built mobiles throughout the industry at the right price. We give you what you want and how you want it. Vehicles of all sizes custom designed and manufactured. Ready for equipment or turn- key jobs. Call or write
today. We'll put you on the road to success.
Shook Electronic Enterprises
6630 Topper Parkway San Antonio, Texas 78233
Phone (512) 653-6761
SIGMA ELECTRONICS,
1830 State St. E. Petersburg, PA 71520 (71 7) 56 9-2 68 1
INC.
·
· ·
I
·
CSG-355A CSG-365A
BBG-144 VPA-380 ADA-110
FR3-100
VS6-100 PASSIVE VIDEO SWITCHER
For switching six video inputs to one input. Desk or rack mount.
FR-3-100 RACK FRAME
$115.00
For all of the above items; occupies 1.75 vertical inches of standard
rack.
$70.00
BP3-100 BLACK PANEL
For unused spaces in the rack frame.
$16.00
SYNC AND DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
PROCESSING EQUIPMENT
CSG-160 COLOR SYNC GENERATOR $800.00 Provides all the standard synchronizing outputs including Blackburst. RS- 170 standard. Desk or rack mount.
CSG-350A MASTER SYNC GENERATOR $ 1200.00 Provides all the standard drives, plus Blackburst and a color field ID pulse. Features include: RS- 170A timing; SC/ H locked; adj. blanking widths; freq. stability 1PPM.
CSG-355A MASTER SYNC GENERATOR $ 1550.00 Same as CSG-350A, also includes: SMPTE Color Bar Signal plus an audio tone. The ideal generator for any studio large or small.
CSG-360A COLOR SYNC GENERATOR $ 1450.00 With Genlock. Source select allows lock to Helical VTR. RS- 170A in crystal mode, SC / H locked.
CSG-365A COLOR SYNC GENERATOR $ 1850.00 With Genlock and color bars. RS- 170A in crystal mode, SC/ H locked. BBG-144 SYSTEM TIMING MODULE $ 1650.00 Provides 4independently adjustable Blackburst outputs with advance, as well as delay, + / - 3ju sec. adjustment of Horizontal time, 360° subcarrier adjustment.
VPA-380 VIDEO PROCESSING AMPLIFIER $ 1750.00 Built-in genlocking sync generator, adjustable blanking width controls to allow saving the various vertical test and identification signals; and a dual- mode genlock circuit to allow acceptance of either stable or VTR signals.
AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
ADA-110 AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS $405.00 High performance Audio D.A. One input and ten outputs; low noise, flat response, adjustable gain - 8to + 23.5 dB. Can be used for SMPTE CODE. ADA-210 AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS $610.00 Same high performance DA as the 110 except dual configuration. Can be either dual 1X 10 or asingle 1X20. Ideal for SMPTE CODE.
SELF-CONTAINED SYNC AND DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
VDA-115 VIDEO EQUALIZING AMPLIFIER $360.00 The VDA-115 is an extremely versatile unit. In its most simple configuration, it is a1x6Video D.A. More importantly, it is acable equalizing amplifier that can serve as a " line- driver" or " line- receiver" to compensate for up to 1100 feet of coaxial cable. It features a differential input that can eliminate as mu ich as 10 volts of A.C. hum.
VDA-100A VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER $310.00 6output D.A. Freq. response 0.2 dB to 10 MHz, looping input, d.c. coupled, + / - 6dB gain adjust. 110/220 VAC Desk or rack mount.
ADA-106 AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER $310.00 1 x 6, high performance amplifier, with a frequency response of + /- 0.1 dB to 30 kHz, can be used for SMPTE Code. Screw capturing terminals. 110/220 VAC. Desk or rack mount.
PDA-100A PULSE DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER $310.00 1X 6Pulse regenerative D.A. with looping input. 110/220 VAC. Desk or rack mount.
SDA-110 SUBCARRIER DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER $390.00 Regenerative subcarrier amplifier, 2independently adjustable outputs. 110/220 VAC. Desk or rack mount.
PDA-110 PULSE DELAY AMPLIFIER $415.00 Ideal aid in system timing. Four independently delayable outputs, range of 0.2 to 2usec. 110/220 VAC. Desk or rack mount.
VT- 162
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SIGMA ELECTRONICS, INC.
1830 State St. E. Petersburg, PA 71520
(717) 569-2681
r4a0r.o.ede =
·
IIIIIIIIIIII---
SYSTEM 500
SYSTEM 500 MODULAR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
·10 Modules Per Frame with Plug- In Power Supply; 11 Modules Per Frame with External Supply
· Redundant Power Supply Configurations Available · Different Types of Modules may be Mixed in Frame
Each FR- 500 frame will hold up to ten plug-in modules plus aplugin power supply, or eleven plug-in modules with external power supply. The exclusive Sigma interface Adaptor System allows the mixing of Audio, Video, Pulse, and Subcarrier Distribution Amplifiers and other System 500 modules in the same frame.
DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT/ SWITCHERS
FR- 500
Holds 10 modules and PS- 501 or 11 modules
without power supply
$400.00
PS- 501A Power Supply -- Powers one FR- 500 frame
90-130/180-260 VAC, 50/60Hz
150.00
EX- 505
Extender Card
30.00
VDA-510
Video Distribution Amplifier, one- in, six- out --
Differential Gain less than . 1%; Differential
Phase less than . 2'; Return Loss less than
40dB to 5MHz
240.00
ADA-526
Audio Distribution Amplifier, one- in, six- out --
THD less than . 1%; Drives 600 ohm balanced
lines to + 22dBm
280.00
PDA-530
Regenerative Pulse Distribution Amplifier,
one- in, six- out; less than 100 nsec delay; con-
trolled rise and fall times
240.00
PDA-535
Dual Pulse Delay Amplifier, Two independent
amplifiers each with two adjustable delayed
outputs -- 0.20 µ sec to 2.0 sec controlled
rise and fall times
360.00
SDA-540
Subcarrier Distribution Amplifier, one- in, three- out; each output individually phase adjustable over 360° range
320.00
BBG-550 Adjustable SC Et H Phase Blackburst Module.. 375.00 VDA-515 Video Equalizing D.A. for up to 1100 ft. of cable .280.00
VSS-120/VAS-120 SVVITCHERS
·Can be used for Tally or Time Code ·Highly Visible Green -' egend
· High Isolation · Balanced or Unbalanced Audio Operation
The VSS-12012 x1Passive Switcher offers simple and clean selec-
tion of any of 12 video and stereo or 2nd channel audio inputs to a single output, while terminating unselected inputs in their charac-
teristic impedances. 2nd channel can also be used for tally indicators. The VAS- 120 is basically the same unit, providing only one channel of audio. Easy input and output connections with BNC
type video connections and screw- capturing terminal strip for
audio.
VSS-120 Video/Stereo Audio Switcher VAS- 120 Video / Audio Switcher
$250.00 225.00
VSD-200/VAD-200 VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
·Balanced or Unbalanced Audio In and Out ·Separate Channel Gain Controls
·Easy Installation ·Dependable and Proven Circuits
The Video Stereo- Audio D.A. Model VSD-200, provides one 1x6
video channel and two 1x6aucio channels in one simple package. Both audio and video amplifiers provide flat frequency responses,
making them suitable for any studio or duplication environment.
The Model VAD-200 is the same device, with only one audio channel. With on- board regulators on each of 3 separate circuit boards, this unit provides the isolation of independent devices, in
the space of the single unit. The " screw- capturing" audio terminal
strips make for easy installation. The audio channels can be used
for audio or time code signals.
VD- 200 ( Stereo) Distribution Amplifier VAD-200 (Audio) Distribution Amplifier
$900.00 650.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 163
,JDLUTEL,
H.A. Solutec Ltd
4360 lberville Street Montreal, Quebec, Canada H2H 2L8 (514) 524-6893 Telex 055-62139
AUTOMATED BROADCASTING SYSTEM
3
P
9
c
SOL -6800
·Controls up to eight VTRs with an integrated 12 input audio and video switcher
·Stereo audio optional ·Video component switcher optional ( 2or 3levels) ·Spare parts kit optional ·250 real time or sequential events ·Programmable emergency and fill in inputs for automatic recovery ·VTR recording software option ( for delayed telecast) ·Events logging software option ·RS422 or 232 communication link optional ·DTMF decoder optional
SOL- 6800/M INI
.r. .:4·1.44·Ren
trpn 51·49A ht·at·T lOpleA·11
M.
MA S TER CONTROL
MICRO PROCESSOR
MN»
»BB BOMB
KEYBOARD «ITN
DISPLAY
No e I
PR
con..<
ToTT
7, I *GAN vTA
hem VTR sV.O·poOpul
RNA,
·Sync vTR h 0410.1·A
a.
TR I TRY
Te«Tvfor 1.1.0
Too«.
---1 ,--AAAA,__.·
A ,
1 ·
, ·
AI Two's...TOT , ..1., · 94. , épa t4o. o, , ...A.,
c
CIOne II ···0 · sap., D, , o.tpul
t>
SOL-6800 COMPONENT SWITCHER
e.
NRO 6·00
A1/101MIDED AROADCAS TING
SYSTI M
I
2.
3
4
5
6
C
·
9
SI
·Controls up to four VTRs with an integrated 6input audio video switcher
·All options available
SOL-6800/M ICRO
emu. 4(1 PRY .CONPOIIIINT V.
GSS-04 CUE TONE GENERATOR
ve.ee-trc.·'·Z"eS-elee
·2frequencies available ·F1 start and end of message
·F2 pause ( recue or skip)
·Controls one VTR with integrated 4 input stereo audio and video switcher
·Integrated DTMF decoder ·Can drive aprinter ·Can be driven or programmed externally ·Can become aremote switcher ·Offers manual switching ·Memory battery back up ·Automatic bypass
·6809 micro processor: offers two serial communication ports configurable as RS422, RS232, FSK Demodulator ( modem)
·Networkable system; configurable up to 32KB EPROM, 24KB RAM
AD.ID/Q GENERATOR FOR MESSAGE RECOGNITION
Records on audio channel: ·6digit number ·Duration ( MM:SS) min, sec ·20 digit alpha information ·Cue code
VT- 164
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SONY".
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
SWITCHER SYSTEM
SEG- 2000A
IS aIsI oo ornnlnn-oErnli el et-ve en · nnoon
WEX-2000
·
Limn elee..-11-40&
CRK-2000
DIRECTOR 2000 SWITCHER SYSTEM
The Director 2000 Switcher System is made up of three beautifully matched, professional quality components that, as atrio, provide an incredibly diverse range of production possibilities coupled with outstanding control and broad flexibility. The impressive capabilities of the SEG-2000A, the central system component, are enhanced and extended through interaction with the WEX-2000 Wipe Pattern Extender and the CR K-2000 Chroma Keyer and create asystem that is capable of very sophisticated and artistic special effects.
The SEG-2000A, by virtue of its ability to operate on either AC or DC power can be used for both studio and field production. The unit mounts in standard 19" racks for optimum studio convenience, yet is light enough at 21 lbs to be eminently portable at the same time. It is equipped with connections for up to six color cameras, one playback VTR, acamera for an external keyer and one camera for downstream keying using the built-in downstream keyer. A full complement of professional controls provide professional results with cut, mix, external key, downstream key and wipe functions. Output connections are extensive with three program outputs, two preset outputs, seven video outputs, four black burst outputs, a V drive output and four tally intercom connectors.
The WEX-2000 extends the wipe pattern selection of the SEG-2000A to 84 different patterns and provides easy-to- use keyboard actuation of the desired pattern with memorization of up to 3 patterns for enhanced convenience. There are auto wipe, servo wipe and trim wipe functions with variable wipe speeds.
The CRK-2000 has dual inputs for composite video signals as well as a separate RGB input. Another unique feature is the natural chroma key facility which creates natural shadow and softness on the compound key camera's picture. It also has a built-in effect amplifier, a background color generator and async generator which coupled with its external key input and SC/H phase indicator allow it to be used not only as achroma keyer but also as aswitcher. In operation with the SEG-2000A and WEX-2000, this unit enables the user to create a diverse range of artistic and creative special effects.
System Price $9900.00
SPECIFICATIONS
SEG-2000A ·Color System: NTSC color · Switching System: Vertical blanking switcher · Effects: MIX: Dissolve by special effects control lever and PGM / PST mix lever. WIPE: 6selectable wipe patterns, continuously variable wipe edge softness, border line with continuously variable hue, chroma, luminance, width and amplitude. EXT KEY: 0.7V p- p (VB) or 1.0 p- p ( VBS) input signal, 75 ohms unbalanced, BNC connector. DOWNSTREAM KEYER: Gen- lock with PGM bus line
signal, 6 pin B Et W camera connector. Output Signal: Horizontal
Drive, Vertical Drive, VD 4V p-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced. Input Signal: Video 0.7V p- p, 75 ohms, unbalanced. Shadow: Wide and Narrow,
Selectable. BACKGROUND COLOR: Chroma: 0-650mV p- p ( variable
according to the hue level). Hue: 0° to 360°. Luminance ( Y): 0-450mV
continuously variable
64990.00
Optional Accessories ·Sony CVM and PVM Series Color Video Monitors · Sony DXC Series Color Video Cameras · Sony B Et W Series Black and White
Video Cameras · Sony CCDD, CCF Connecting Cables · BP- 60 Rechargeable Battery Pack · LC- 2003 Carrying Case for Camera Control Unit and Monitor · LC- 2006 SEG 2000A Carrying Case · BC20 Battery Charger
WEX-2000
·Color System: NTSC color · Genlock Input: Sync 0.3V p- p, Burst
0.3V p- p · Wipe patterns: 84 kinds · Wipe outputs: OUT 1: 6pin for
SEG-2000A ( via CCF-5 cable). OUT 2: BNC connector for SEG-2000A
or CR K-2000, 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms · Wipe speed: Approximately 0.5 to
9 seconds · Pairing wipe: Every other line · Pattern modulation:
Wave length and frequency are continuously variable · Power
requirements: 120V AC, 50/60 Hz; 11-15V DC, external DC · Power
consumption: 19 W AC, 14W DC · Operating temperature: 32°F to
140°F ( 0°C to 40°C) · Dimensions: 3-1/2"H x19"W x11-7/8"D (88 x
482 x300 mm) · Weight: 15 lbs. 7oz. ( 7kg)
$2500.00
Supplied Accessory ·AC power cord
Optional Accessory ·CCF-5 interface cable with the SEG-2000A
CRK-2000 ·Color system: NTSC color · Video inputs: VBS 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms ·RGB inputs: 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms · External key: VIDEO INPUT: 1.0V p- p or 0.7V p- p, 75 ohms. HD/VD OUTPUT: 3.8V p- p · Gen lock input: Sync 0.3V p- p, Burst 0.3V p- p · Video outputs: VBS 1.0V p- p, 75 ohms · Video output channel crosstalk: Better than 40 dB · Video
output DP: 1.5° · Video output DG: 1.5% · Video output frequency response: 5MHz + / - 1 dB · Chroma key outputs: VBS 1.0V p- p ·Chroma key output crosstalk: 32dB ( fsc) · Chroma key output DP: 2.5° · Chroma key output DG: 2.5% · Chroma key output frequency response: 5MHz + / - 1dB · Black burst outputs: Sync 0.3V p- p, Burst
0.3V p- p · Keying bandwidth: RGB mode more than 2.0MHz, Line mode more than 0.8MHz · Power requirements: 120V AC, 50/60 Hz ·Power consumption: 29 W · Ooerating temperature: 32°F to 140°F (0°C to 40°C) · Dimensions: 3-1/2"H x19"W x11-7/8"D ( 88 x482 x 300 mm) · Weight: 15 lbs. 7oz. ( 7kg)
Supplied Accessories
·AC power cord · Chroma key cloth ( Blue) · Instruction tape
(U-matic ® format)
$2550.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 165
TAS CA
TEAC Professional Division
7733 Telegraph Road
Montebello, CA 90604 (213) 726-0303
MIXERS/CASSETTE RECORDERS AND ACCESSORIES
111111 III 1111
Ii MB- 20
244 Portastudio ° Portable Recorder/Mixer
The Tascam 244 Portastudio improves upon the original 144, the world's first portable 4x2 mixer with a built-in 4- track sync cassette recorder. Portastudio combines top sound quality with flexibility and ease of operation, making it possible for the performing artist to sing and play multiple parts by recording in sync on successive " passes", and to transfer tracks (" ping-pong") for building more complex recordings. With its 4 input mic/line mixer, parametric EQ, and headphone cue capability, the 244 is also being used for AV production and occasional sound reinforcement.
·4- track Simul-Sync cassette recorder operates at 3% ips ( variable)
with built in dbx noise reduction · Simultaneous 4- channel recording
capability for copying · Accessory patch points on each input for use
with compressor/limiters, graphic EQ, or special effects · Punch
in/out footswitch jack for " third hand" convenience · " Mic/Line-
Tape" selector switches have " Off" position to mute unused inputs
without pulling down faders · 18-1 / 2"W x4-3/4"H x14-5/8"D. Wt.
20 lbs.
$1300.00
RECORDER SECTION
·4 channel Record/Reproduce · 2 channel Simul-Sync record/4 track playback for multichannel recording · Pitch control enables
precise tuning of special effects · Punch- in recording · Built-in full time dbx' noise reduction system · High speed, 33/4 ips ( 9.5 cm/sec) for wider dynamic range · Digital Tape Counter and Zero Return function · 4 track tape output
MIXER SECTION
·4Mid / Line or Tape Inputs · 2band, 4knob sweep EQ · Simul-Sync
monitoring with separate stereo cue mix system for complete overdub flexibility · Stereo AUX MIX SEND for echo recording using an external echo unit · Acc. SEND/RECEIVE on each input · Stereo AUX RECEIVE for effects or extra bus inputs
RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES ·FC-144 Flight Case · RC- 30P Punch- in Foot Control
Shown with MB- 20 and optional sideboards
M -2A Active 6-In/4-Out Mixer for Recording, P.A., Disco
·Model 2A -- the right balance between multi- channel recording flexibility and low cost · Six inputs drive four separate outputs · Each input has switchable mic / line and mic attenuation to reduce overload distortion · Bass and treble controls I + / - 12 dB at 100 Hz and 10 kHz) ·Color- coded channel assign buttons · Pan for stereo balance · Slide fader level control · Master fader for overall level control · Lots of mixdown flexibility with the Model 2A's patch points · 13-7/16"W x3-17/32"H x14-9/16"D. WT. 13.2 lbs. $495.00
MB -20 Meter Bridge
·A Natural Sale with Each Model 2A · Excellent for P.A., Audiophile or Studio Applications · 4 VU Meters each with fast acting Peak LED's · Built-in 4 x 2 Monitor Mixer and 1 watt Headphone Amp · Selectable Meter Sensitivity Control ( 4, - 2, - 10 and - 20 dB) · 13-3/8"W x3-3/4"H x6-11/16"D. Wt. 4.25 lbs.
$250.00
SB-2A Console Cradle for Models 2A and MB- 20
·38"W x10-3/8"H x17-3/8"D Wt. 2-15/161bs.
$40.00
Ministudio Porta One Mixer/Recorder
The Ministudio is aportable, battery- operated 4channel audio mixer/ recorder designed for field work and convenient operation. Each input
channel of the built-in mixer can accept amicrophone, musical instru-
ment, line level source or playback from the built-in recorder. Each
channel contains controls for TRIM, EQ HIGH, EQ LOW, PAN, and a
fader, as well as aRecord Function matrix used to assign each input to
any of the four tracks for recording, or all four inputs to any one track. Tape transport runs at 1-7/8 ips using standard track spacing, and
switchable dbx noise reduction*. The recorder section is FG servo
controlled with variable PITCH CONTROL, and acounter with ZERO
RETURN for faster cueing. The monitor system includes cue capabil-
ity. Four VU meters provide visual monitoring of any recorded or
reproduced signals. Up to 10 different parts can be recorded without
going beyond asecond generation. A jack for an electronic remote
punch-in/out ( the optional RC- 30P footsvvitch) permits you to start
and stop recording with your hands free.
$595.00
RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES
·AC Adaptor, PS- P1 · Soft Carrying Bag, CS- P1 · Flight Case, CS-P1H · Auto Battery Adaptor
*dbx is a trademark of dbx, Inc.
VT- 166
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
l'AS CAM
TEAC Professional Division
7733 Telegraph Road Montebello, CA 90604
(213) 726-0303
300 Series Recording/Sound Reinforcement Mixers
Eight, twelve or twenty input channels with the following features on
each channel:
· MIC or LINE selectable inputs · Separate MIC and LINE TRIM controls ·3 band sweep- type parametric EQ · EQ bypass switch ·2assignable AUX send controls · EFFECTS send control · DIRECT OUT jack · INSERTION jack ·MUTE and channel " On" indicator, overload LED · PFL · PGM and STEREO BUS assign matrix and PAN control
Other Features of the 300 Series: ·4 PGM BUS MASTER SECTIONS with AFL · STEREO and MONO MASTER SECTIONS ·8 assignable TAPE RETURN MONITOR sections with LEVEL and
PAN ·2 EFFECTS RETURN master sections · Multiple MONITOR selection with stereo outputs and headphone
jack · + 4dBm balanced and unbalanced outputs on PGM, STEREO and
MONO busses ·6selectable VU meters with LED peak indicators
Features of the M-312 and M-320 only:
·2additional AUX sends in TAPE MONITORS
· Built-in TALKBACK MIC and signal routing switch array
M-308
$ 1649.00
M-312
2595.00
M-320
3495.00
M -106 6-In/4-Out Mixing Console
M-106 is equipped with aflexible combination of functions so it can be used in awide range of applications, from small studio recording, to mixing in PA and disco systems and mixing audio productions.
·6input channels with selectable inputs, provide; 6 MIC IN; 6 LINE IN; 4 RIAA PHONO IN
·4 PGM busses ·AUX bus with master level control
· EFFECT bus with master level control ·Each input channel provides: Input selector ( CH 1and 2; MIC-ATT-
LINE, CH 3 to 6; MIC-ATT/PHONO-LINE), Trim control, Low
(100Hz) and high ( 10kHz) EQ ( 12dB boost/cut), Direct out, insertion, Post/Line select switch for AUX bus, AUX send level control, EFFECT send level control, PGM assign/pan, input fader, Overload indicator · PGM insertions · PGM master faders · EFFECT RETURN with level control and PGM bus assign/pan · Monitor outputs IL, R1 with monitor select matrix, mono switch and monitor level control · Headphone jack 11.5W + 1.5W) ·2 VU meters with peak indicators ·Meter select switch ( PGM 1-2, PGM 3-4, Aux/Effect) · PGM sub in/EFFECT sub in/AUX sub in ·2fader- link knobs supplied ·Optional portable case CS- 106 ·Optional EIA 19" rack mount angle RM-106 ·Frequency Response: 20Hz 30kHz, + 1dB, - 1.5dB
·Dimensions: 395W x 135H x3950 ( mm) ·Weight: 7.0kg ( net)
M-106
$ 595.00
M-320 M-106
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MIXERS
VT- 167
TASCA
TEAC Professional Division
7733 Telegraph Road Montebello, CA 90604 (213) 726-0303
M-500 SERIES MIXING CONSOLES
The M-500 Series are sophisticated audio mixing consoles designed for professional production applications. The M-520 ( 20-in/8-bus) is intended primarily for 16-track studios, while the M-512 ( 12-in/8-bus) is ideal for 8-track installations.
·20- input channels on the M-520, 12- input channels on the M-512, each with selectable inputs, provide: 20 ( M-5201, 12 ( M-5121 balanced XLR microphone inputs with individually switchable phantom power. 2 pair of instrument inputs ( 1/4" phone and RCA pin). 2 RIAA phono inputs ( RCA pin). 16 ( M-520), 8 1M-5121 line inputs ( RCA pin). 16 ( M-520), 8 1M-5121 multi-track tape returns ( RCA pin). 2 pair of stereo tape returns ( RCA pin).
·8main program busses with bus master controls ·4independent auxiliary busses · 16 1M-5201, 8 ( M-512) groups of stereo monitor mix controls ·8balanced amplifiers ( input; RCA pin/22K ohms, output; XLR/600
ohms) ·Access Send/Receive on each input channel and program bus ·3- band parametric EQ on each input channel
·Mute switch on each input channel · Direct Out on each input channel · Built-in talkback mic plus slate tone/test oscillator ·Stereo SOLO ·PFL ( Pre Fader Listen) · 12 1M-520), 8 ( M-512) VU meters with LED peak indicators · 100mm input and bus master faders ( compatible with PG- 3000) · Bipolar 15 volt power supply
·Optional pedestal ( CS- 520 for M-520, CS- 512 for M-512) ·Optional top/side board ( CS- 521 for M-520, CS- 513 for M-512)
M-520/512 SPECIFICATIONS
Crosstalk:
Better than 70dB ( 1kHz)
Better than 60dB 115kHz)
Total Harmonic Distortion 1line to 1PGM out: 0.02% ( 1kHz. nominal level)
1mic to 1PGM out: 0.025% ( 1kHz, 50dB above nominal level, MIC ATT 30dB on)
Fader Attenuation: Overload Indicator: Meter Peak Indicator:
80dB or more 25dB above nominal level 10dB above nominal level
Dimensions: M-520: M-512:
1082W x240H x798D mm 802W x240H x798D mm
Weight: M-520: M-512:
47kg 38kg
Frequency Response: Line in to --
PGM out:
20-20kHz, · 1dB
Aux out:
20-20kHz, 1dB
Mon out:
20-20kHz, 1dB
Equalizer Type: Level: Frequency ( low): (mid): (high):
Sweep Boost/Cut -· 15dB 50Hz to 500Hz 100Hz to 5kHz 2.5kHz to 15kHz
Oscillator Frequencies: 40Hz, 1kHz, 10kHz switchable
S/N Ratio: ( nominal input level, EQ out, UNVVTD/"A" VVTD)
1line to 1PGM out: 85dB, 87dB 1mic to 1PGM out: 68dB, 70dB 1tape to 1PGM out: 86dB, 70dB
M-512
M-520 Accessories for 512/520
$ 3995.00
5495.00 POR
MIXING CONSOLES
MODEL M-512 MODEL M-520
VT- 168
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TASCAM
TEAC Professional Diviision
7733 Telegraph Road Montebello, CA 90604
(213) 726-0303
RACKMOUNT SERIES
The TASCAM Rack Mount Series signal processing and auxiliary equipment augments a number of sound systems. By using top quality circu tcomponents, TASCAM engineers have made the Rack Mount Series acost-effective approach toward the expansion of your capabilities with signal processing/routing technology.
MX-80, 8x2Mic/Line Mixer
The MX-80 offers top performance in a more versatile mixer. When other mixers are too large, too small, or lacking in necessary features, the MX- 80 is ideal It can be used for sound reinforcement as well as recording.
·Using the mic-level outputs, the MX-80 is perfect as a " spot mixer" for increasing the capacity of asnake.
·Transformerless, its electronically balanced differential inputs provide immunity from hum and noise without the high-level saturation.
·Pad and gain trim enable line- level inputs to be fed directly into microphone XLR input connectors.
·Accepts most 150 to 600 ohm low impedance mics; wired to supply external phantom power.
· Phase switch and mute/input attenuator switch.
·Pre- level control jacks allow effects or signal processing equipment to be patched into each input; double as unbalanced line inputs.
· Eight pan spots for assignment to the stereo mixing buss, and two
independently adjustable stereo outputs: a balanced, 600- ohm, -40dBm nominal output for driving mic level inputs, and an unbalanced, 200- ohm source switchable to a medium line level of -10dBV or high line level of OdBu for driving power amps directly.
·MX- 80's can be cascaded together for increased input capability.
MX- 80
$650.00
SIGNAL PROCESSING/ AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
·Instant compatibility between TASCAM or similar - 10dBV unbalanced inputs and outputs and almost all other equipment: compatible levels, compatible impedances, and balanced/unbalanced operation.
·Utilizing three of the most poptiar types of connectors ( XLR, phono, phone) the LA-40 also avoids the need for costly adaptor cables.
·All connections are on the rear panel for neat, orderly installation, except the phone jacks, which are intentionally placed on the front panel where they can be used in conjunction with a standard TRS jack patch bay.
LA- 40
$ 360.00
MH -40B Multi -Headphone Amplifier
The MH-40B accepts alow or high line level mono or stereo input and feeds it to four adjustable headphone outputs. By using one or more monitor outputs, or the stereo outputs from a TASCAM M1 or MX- 80 mixer, the MH-40B provides increased monitoring capacity.
·Avoids overloading a headphone output when more than one person is using the same mono or stereo headphone system.
· No need for costly custom distribution systems with expensive high- power amplifiers and high- power attenuators.
·Allows use of different types of headphones, each with separate volume control.
· Increases headphone cue capacity.
· Unlimited freedom of expansion and system configuration.
MH-40B
$275.00
LA-40 Line Amplifier/Impedance Converter
The TASCAM LA-40 is the perfect 1- track space solution to the problem of mismatched line levels or impedances. The LA-40 is a compact 4-chaniel unit that permits interconnection between +4dBm, -20dBm and - 10dBV inputs and outputs. It also matches balanced and unbalanced circuits.
When you have an LA-40, you'll never have to concern yourself with compatibility. Your system will be able to drive or be driven by any line level equipment. It's an invaluable tool, atime saver, and asecurity blanket -- anecessity for every studio, radio and TV production/ broadcast facility and sound reinforcement system.
· Each of the LA-40's channels is really two circuits back-to-back. One channel can convert a + 4dBm or - 20dBm output to drive a -10dBV nput, and it can simultaneously convert a - 10dBV output to drive a + 4dBm or -20dBm input.
·By plugging ajumper across the RCA in and out jacks, both halves of achannel can be used together permitting the LA-40 to match a -20dBm balanced or unbalanced input to a + 4dBm balanced output, or vice-versa.
·Can be used where no level conversion is required, but instead tor buffering ( isolating) a line or for converting from unbalanced to balanced operation when both the output and input are at the same +4 or - 20dBm nominal level.
PE -40 4-Band 4-Channel Parametric Equalizer
The PE-40 permits adjustment of the three parameters: the center frequency at which boost or cut is applied, the amount of gain ( boost or cut), and the " Q" ( affected bandwidth). The PE-40 is really four separate equalizers in one rack mount package.
Graphic equalizers can be used to reduce feedback- causing peaks, and then also tune out desired program material. The PE-40 elimin-
ates those peaks while permitting the overall level to be increased. The PE-40 can also alter the character of the sound in any PA or recording application.
·A top-quality recording or PA equalizer that can be patched into any input channel or output circuit.
·The four sections can be used for different programs, or combined for greater control over one signal.
·In addition to " Q", Frequency and Gain controls, each section has two High Pass and one Low Pass Filter for reducing vocal pops, wind noise, floor rumble, hiss.
· Bypass switches allow comparison of original and EQ'd signals, or instant preset changes in sound during a mix.
PE- 40
$650.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 169
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
VIDEO AMPLITUDE CALIBRATION FIXTURE
PEAK- TO- PEAK DETECTOR
NBS-Traceable Frequency Response Standard
Ultra Flat Response
Detector Amplifier Corrects Detector Diode Gain and Offset Errors
Video Amplitude Calibration Fixture. Digital Sweep Generator. and P- P Detector .?, hown in a Tektronix TM 504 Mainframe
Accurate calibration and verification of video equipment performance is essential for maintenance of optimum television system quality and thus signal quality
New products, as well as calibration standards and procedures. have been developed to help provide accurate and NBS-traceable calibration and performance verification of Tektronix television products
VIDEO AMPLITUDE CALIBRATION FIXTURE
Provides a Standard Reference for Amplitude Calibration
Preset Values for Common Video Signals
NTSC, PAL, PAL- M, SECAM Compatible
The VAC ( Video Amplitud? Calibration Fixture) is a precision test fixture used in the measurement of common video signals and the calibration of video test signal generators and waveform monitors It provides asimple means of measuring and calibrating luminance and chrominance ampli hides associated w-th most video signals
The VAC provides a squar?.wave amplitude refer ence from 00 mV to 999 9mV peak with aresolu lion of 0 1mV and an acc_iracy of 005% Signal amplitude may be selected using a lour- digit front panel lever- switch or from over 500 preset values stored in EPROM The VAC preset amplitudes are compatible with NT:3C. PAL PAL M and SECAM television systems
In the design of the VAC, careful attention was paid to thermal tilt to ensure accurate conversion from dc calibration to squarewave output Unique choice of output impedance compensates loading effects when calibrating equipment with loop through inputs
The calibration of the VAC requires only a digital voltmeter with an accuracy of 001%.
The VAC operates in any of two compartments of the Tektronix TM 500 or TM 5000 Series power modules (except TM 501)
CHARACTERISTICS
Output Signal Front Output Connector -- 37 5ff. BNC connector located on front panel
Rear Interconnect -- 00u. Rear edge connector pins 27A and 28A.
Amplitude Range ( Tolerance Disabled) -- OmV to 999.9 mV · ( 005% · KA mV). p-p squarewave amplitude Amplitude Range ( Tolerance Enabled) -- OmV to 999 9mV
·l0 5% · a' mV) amplitude Resolution -- 0 1mV Risetime -- 1es.
Tolerance reading. p- p squarewave
Frequency -- NTSC. PAL- M. 270 Hz nominal. PAL. SECAM. 275 Hz nominal
ENVIRONMENTAL
Normal Operating Temperature -- · 15 C to 35 C Operating Temperature Range -- O C to · 50 C Weights -- NE.1 1.4 kg. 30 lb) Net Shipping 4.5 kg. ( 10.0 lb)
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 0025%) 75.!f Terminator ( 011-0102-01). 006% attenuator (011-0134 - OD), subcarrier harmonic rejection filter (015-0407-00); manual
ORDERING INFORMATION
Video Amplitude Calibration Fixture Order
06' 0916 00
$2,250
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Low Loss Cable 72 inch 75 ii -- Order 012-0159-01 .... $35
The 015-0408-00 Detector Amplifier, combined with a 015-0413-00 Detector Head, comprise an NBS-traceable peak- to- peak detector system for
baseband video frequency response testing. This system allows precise comparison of sinewave amplitudes at frequencies throughout the video spectrum. Typical response is accurate to as low as ± 0.02% ( ± 0.002 dB).
The frequency response of an analog generator may be calibrated using the peak- to- peak detector system as a transfer standard The generator may then be used as afrequency response transfer standard to calibrate frequency response and chrominance -luminance gain of test equipment such as waveform monitors and vectorscopes
A second detector head may be ordered for differential measurements
CHARACTERISTICS
Input Signal Range -- 0.25 V to 1.0 V p- p Envelope Gain Unit -- · 0.1% for 1% signal change Input Impedance -- 75 If. Frequency Response
Frequency Performance Requirements
Supplemental Information
Typical Response
Transfer Uncertainties
TEK
NBS
25 kHz
·0.1. 07
.0. 0.25% ·0.05% ·0.01%
50 kHz
·0 1. 03% ·0. 0.1% ·0.05% ·0.02%
100 kHz
·0.1%
·005%
·0.05% ·0.02%
200 kHz
·0.1%
i0.02%
.0.05% i0.05%
500 kHz
·0 1%
·002%
·0.05% ·005%
1 MHz
0.0% (Reference)
·0 02%
·0.05% ·0.05%
2 MHz ·0 1%
·0 02%
·0.05% ·0.1%
5 MHz ·01%
·0.02%
·0.05% ·0.1%
10 MHz ·0 15%
·0.05%
·0.05% ·0.1%
20 MHz ·02%
·01%
·0.05% ·0.2%
30 MHz ·05%
·02' ,,
·0.1°
·0.2%
50 MHz ·20%
1
·0 2
·0.5%
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Detector head and data sheet with NBS-traCeability curves (015-0413-00). 72 in low loss 75 ii cable ( 012-0159-01). manual
ORDERING INFORMATION Peak- to- Peak Detector Order 015 0408 00 $1,265
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Extra Detector Head -- (For differential measurements) Order
015-0413-00
$195
VT- 1M
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (5 03) 627-71 11 Telex 151754
DIGITAL SWEEP GENERATOR
DIGITAL SWEEP GENERATOR
Digitally Derived Sweep Signal
10- Bit Digital Data for Use with 1900- Series Digital Test Signal Generators to Reconstruct Analog Sweep
Frequency Range 55.9 kHz to 7.16 MHz Field Sweep or ( Manually Adjustable) CW
The Digital Sweep Generator provides 1U- bit, 14.31818 MHz, digital data words derived from a cosine lookup table. The output signal sweeps from 55.9 kHz to 7.16 MHz in each field with high spectral purity and amplitude accuracy when used with the DAC in a 1900 Series generator. A front panel connector provides SMPTE" compatible balanced ecl data. Data is continuous through blanking so that it can be used with noncomposite video detectors. Sync and burst may be inserted by a 1900 Series generator using the blanking output on the DSG if desired. The Digital Sweep Generator may be locked to a 1900 Series generator using IRS and clock outputs from the 1900 Series generator. Alternatively, the 1900 Series generator may be genlocked to the black burst output from the sync generator in the Digital Sweep Generator. A separate marker output provides identification of 1MHz intervals, as well as 3.58 MHz and 4.43 MHz, during the sweep.
The Digital Sweep Generator is enclosed in asingle wide TM 500 package. The front panel includes an LED power indicator, two 25- pin digital data connectors, three BNC connectors for blanking, markers, and black burst outputs, and one variable control to manually set CW frequencies. Digital interfaces of the DSG conform to the signal levels, clock rate and pinout of the proposed SMPTE standard.
When the Digital Sweep Generator is used in conjunction with a 1900 and an 015-0408-00 peak- topeak detector (included accessory), it will provide an NBS-traceable analog frequency response standard and completes an effort to provide NBS-traceable performance verification of Tektronix television generators, waveform monitors, and other television equipment.
·, The proposed SMPTE standard 'Digital Format for aParallel Interface (System M'NTSC)" draft of July. 1979.
CHARACTERISTICS
Digital Sweep Output Frequency Range - 55.93 kHz to 7.159 MHz in 55.93 kHz increments; Field Sweep, or CW digital data.
Format - SMPTE Standard parallel 10-bit signal.
Sample Clock Frequency - 14.31818 MHz (4fsc) ± 100 Hz; also accepts external 14.3 MHz clock from 1900.
Blanking - Vertical: 22 hnes to 23 lines. Horizontal: 10.8 A.
Markers 1V at 1.006747 MHz.
1V at 2.013494 MHz.
1V at 3.020241 MHz.
0.5 V at 3.579545 MHz.
1V at 4.026988 MHz.
0.5 V at 4.418501 MHz.
1V at 4.977805 MHz.
1V at 5.984552 MHz.
Marker frequencies are multiples of 55.93 kHz
The 1450 Series Test Modulator is used to test a television demodulator plus down converter (system) or the television demodulator alone. Test modulators are available for four CCIR Systems and three visual IF Carrier Systems. The Test Modulator converts baseband video frequencies to a specified IF or RF. The aural carrier is below the visual carrier frequency at the IF output and above the visual carrier at the RF output.
Group delay precorrection (except System 1) and sound pre-emphasis switches are front panel mounted. The RF and IF outputs provide doublesideband modulated signals of high quality. State-of-the-art circuitry is used to achieve high accuracy and stability. The test modulator needs very little maintenance or recabbration
ORDERING INFORMATION
Test Modulator, 37 MHz for 1450-1. Order 067-0886-01 $4,275
Test Modulator, 38.9 MHz for 1450-1 Order 067-0886-02 $4,275
Test Modulator, 45.75 MHz for 1450-1 Order 067-0886-03 $4,275
Test Modulator, 38.9 MHz for 1450-2 Order 067-0886-04 $4,275
Test Modulator, 38.9 MHz for 1450-3 Order 067-0886-05 $4,275
Extender Cable, for TDC/14501.-2.-3. Order 067-0899-00 $105
ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature Range - Operating: 0°C to + 50°C. Nonoperating: -40°C to 65'C.
Altitude - Operating: To 4752 m ( 15.000 feet). Nonoperating: To 15 240 m (50,000 feet).
Weights - Net:0.6 kg ( 1.3 lb). Net Shipping: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb).
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES ECL data cable assemblies ( 175-3671-00); 72 in low loss 75 It cable ( 012-0159-011. p- pdetector ( 015-0408-00): manual
Digital
ORDERING INFORMATION Sweep Generator. Order 067-1011.00
$3,310
CPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Detector I-bead Order 015 0407 00
TEST MODULATOR
$ 225
High Quality 'Double-Sideband Modulator
Available in Five Versions Covering Systems M, I. B, and G
RF Output is - 25 dBm ± 3dB
IF Output is - 24 dBm ± 3dB
Separee Video and Aural Carrier Level Controls
Group Delay Precorrection Systems M, B, and 3
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Half-Rack Adaptor Kit - (Two instruments side-by-side.) Or-
de' 020-0633-00
$140
Half- Rack Adaptor Kit - (One instrument and a " dummy"
box side-by- side ) Order 020-0634-00
$350
Other Calibration Fixtures for Tektronix Television Products.
ORDERING INFORMATION
GENERATORS Diagnostc Prom Order 06741964 -00
$125
69CSR PICTURE MONITOR
Minimum Load Unit - Order 067-0998-00 Rigid Module Extender - Order 067-0999-00
$$17550
Flexible Interface Module Extender - Order 067-1000-00 $125
CRT Scale - 11 x 15 line for 690SR, Option 40/42 Order
067-1034-00
$150
Pattern Generator - Order 067-1039-00
$3,000
C.9T Scale - 14 n 17 line for 690SR. Order 067-1054-00 $150
CRT Scale - 15 x 20 line for 690SR. Order 067-1055-00
$150
1980 ANSWER Service Kit - for the 1980
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 171
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
NTSC TV SIGNAL GENERATOR
R 147A NTSC TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR
R147A
VITS Generation, Insertion, and Deletion
Sync and Burst Regeneration
Program Signal Protected
Full Field Test Signals Independently Selectable from VITS Program
Reprogrammable for New Signals
Vertical Interval Reference Signal
Noise Test Signal and Measurements
Ino R147A NTSC Television Signal Generator provides the test signals commonly used for test and measurement of video transmission systems. The signals generated are available as full- field composite video test signals and Vertical Interval Test Signals ( VITS) that may be inserted on an incoming composite video signal
VERTICAL INTERVAL INSERTION/ DELETION AND PROGRAM CONTROL iitt H1.1,7\ .% 111 ins( It VI I1r only w gen -locked to an incoming composite video signal A VITS deleter inserter involves active circuit elements in the program line within the generator Fail-safe provisions are provided in the event of amalfunction within the instrument including loss of sync or power Local and remote- control manual override capability is also provided
When an incoming program is lost. the R147A will go to one of two operating modes selectable by internal reprogramming jumpers They are program line bypass, or full field test signal or flatfield signal In the event the program signal is lost. the transmitter will continue on the air PROGRAM CONTROL FEATURES Processing Amplifier In addition lo performing deletion and insertion functions, the R147A generator is designed to function as a sync and burst regeneration amplifier.
TEST SIGNALS Ihe H147A provides the following NTSC Vertical Interval Test signals. These signals are also available full field ( except VIRS):
Composite Linearity Multiburst Noise Pulse and Bar VIRS
The R147A also provides these full field test signals:
Field Squarewave Flat Field Window
NOISE TEST SIGNAL The R147A offers a signal-to-noise measuring technique for in-service testing during the vertical interval. The noise present in the middle portion of a line is deleted while the noise generated in a calibrated source is inserted for measurements by comparison. You then adjust the calibrated attenuator until inserted and incoming noise appears the same on awaveform monitor. The measured noise values are independent of operator interpretation errors to within 2IRE
CHARACTERISTICS
PROGRAM CONTROL SYSTEM Input Level -- Adjusted to unity gain
Variable Input level -- · 30°..
Input Return Loss -- 5 MHz in bypass
46 dB to 5 MHz Power on 40 dB to
Inserted Signal Level -- 714 mV ( 100 IRE) · 1' , Frequency Reponse, Program, and Preview Channel -- ·1 50 kHz to 5 MHz. · 1%. 5%, 5MHz to 8 MHz
2T Pulse to Bar Ratio -- 100°. · 0.5%.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
Power Requirements -- 90 V ac to 136 V ac or 180 V ac to
272 V ac 48 Hz to 66 Hz. 40 W maximum at 115 vac and
60 Hz
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width Height Depth
mm
483 89
436
in
19.0 3.5
17.9
Weights
kg
lb
Net Shipping Export Shipping
9.1 16.3 25 4
20.0 36.0 56.0
147A OPTION 01 The 147A Option 01 provides the signals used for transmitter remote control, but Color Bars must be provided from an alternate source such as the Tektronix earlier models 140, 144, 146, or the current model 1410, SPG2. TSG7.
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 7511. BNC termination ( 011-0103-04 two each BNC-T adaptors ( 103-0030-001. front panel protective cover ( 200-1246-00). rackmount slide ( 351-0195-01). manual
ORDERING INFORMATION 147A NTSC Signal Generator
Option 01 -- NTSC Signal Generator
R147A NTSC Signal Generator (Rackmount)
Option 01 -- NTSC Signal Generator (Rackmount)
$9,750
NC
$9,750
NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Noise Measurement Filters -- External filters are required with the 147A Generator when making noise measurements
Low Pass 4.2 MHz 525,60 -- Order 015-0212-00 $ 125
Noise Weighting 4.2 MHz 525 60 -- Order 015-021c-00 $90
CCIR recommendation 568 provides for measur.ng signal- toweighted random noise on all international transmissions Moth
525 60 and 625 501 with a 5.0 MHz low pass filter and a unified noise weighting filter.
Low Pass 5MHz -- Order 015-0213-00
$ 125
Unified Noise Weighting Order 015-0283-00
S65
Rackmount to Cabinet Conversion Kit -- Order 040-0573-00 $150
VT- 172
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
R148/R14840
Insertion Test Signals ( Per EBU, CCIR Recommendation 473-2, Annex 1)
Full- Field Test Signals ( Per CCIR Recommendation 567)
Easily Reprogrammable
Safe In- Service ITS Insertion ( Per EBU Specifications)
Noise Measurement
APL Bounce Signal
Source Identification Code
Operates with Sound In Syncs
Locks with Mixed Sync ( Per EBU Homologa tion Specifications for ITS Generators) Subcarrier, PAL Pulse, Burst Flag, Comp Sync
The Tektronix R148 ( PAL) and R148- M ( PAL- M) Insertion Test Signal ( ITS) Generators provide all the test signals you need to test and measure PAL ( or PAL- M) video transmission systems. Test signals are available as both full-field composite video and ITS inserted into the incoming program signal's vertical blanking interval. All timing information for ITS insertion is derived from the incoming composite video signal.
VERTICAL INTERVAL INSERTION/ DELETION AND PROGRAM CONTROL The R148 and R148- M insert ITS only when gen locked to an incoming composite video signal. Since ITS insertion/deletion involves active circuit elements in the program line, program line fail safe operation is provided in the event of instrument malfunction, loss of sync, or power failure. You also have access to local and remote control manual override capability.
A preview monitor output permits observation of the ITS deletion/insertion program before anything is actually done to the program signal. Preview/program operation can be locally or remotely controlled.
Provisions are made for adding an externally generated ITS to the program line INSERTION SIGNAL CONTROL FEATURES Free Running Operation A warning light indicates absence of incoming synchronizing information and ITS deletion and insertion is automatically discontinued. Program Level A front panel switch lets you select apreset gain, normally adjusted for unity gain between program input and program output. Or, you can use afront panel level adjustment to normalize the incoming program signal to provide 1volt at the program output. Local- Remote Control of Program and Preview You can shift control of program or preview modes from the front panel ( local) to a position remote from the generator. When operating under either local or remote control, front panel lights indicate program line status, since the front panel program status switch position may not correspond to the operating mode selected.
PAL AND PAL- M INSERTION TEST SIGNAL GENERATORS
Program- Preview- Bypass This three- position switch is used to select one of three modes: Program, Preview, or Bypass.
Program: In this switch position, ITS is inserted on program line output according to internal selection of test signals and their time addresses.
Preview: In this switch position, ITS is inserted only on program, as viewed on the preview monitor output. Preview is used for verification prior to inserting these signals on program output.
Bypass: In this switch position, incoming program material bypasses R148 functions and output is unchanged.
Auxiliary A noncomposite video signal ( such as a sweep generator) applied to the auxiliary input appears at the preview monitor output connector with composite blanking and sync added. A pedestal control provides adc offset so the auxiliary signal excursion may be positioned between the black and white limits of the resulting composite video signal. Remote control is not available.
ITS Subcarrier Phase A recessed front- panel control adjusts phase of color subcarrier on internally generated signals to be correct in relation to the phase of incoming burst.
Insertion Delay A recessed front- panel control provides a fine horizontal timing adjustment for inserted signals.
FULL- FIELD OPERATION The Tektronix R148 and R148-M provide full- field test signals separate from program. These signals are generated with or without external synchronizing information and will be locked to the external synchronizing signal when a program signal or external synchronizing signals are present.
FLAT- FIELD SIGNAL The flat- field signal with VITS inserted is used primarily for system testing at discrete average picture levels.
The flat- field signal is a composite video signal that, during the active portion of each field, has a constant luminance level. The luminance level is selectable in eleven increments from 0% to 100% of white. An alternate selection provides automatic change between black and white with aperiod variable form 1sto 10 s.
When operating the R148 in the flat field mode, you may select awhite level preset between 85% and 100% and a black level preset between 0% and 15%. Automatic change between white and black is available and occurs at a period adjustable from 1.0 sto 10.0 s.
FIELD SQUARE WAVE SIGNAL The field squarewave signal is used to measure field time distortions. In this mode, the Tektronix R148 provides acomposite video signal with 205 active lines at 700 mV, approximating a 50 Hz squarewave. The R148- M provides a composite video signal with 132 active lines at 700 mV, approximating a60 Hz squarewave.
Use this signal to detect low frequency phase and gain distortions, even those passing through clamper amplifiers.
CHARACTERISTICS
PROGRAM CHANNEL Input Level -- Adjusted to unity gain.
Variable Input Level -- ± 30%.
Inserted Signal Level -- Within ± 1% of nominal.
Output Dc Level -- · 50 mV ( no signal)
Frequency Response, Program, and Preview Channels -- ·1%. 50 kHz to 5MHz
Field Time Tilt -- 0.5%.
Line Time Tilt -- · 0.25%.
Differential Phase Standard Input -- Program Output: -0.15 ..Preview Output: · 0.3".
Differential Gain Standard Input -- Program Output: < 0.2%. Preview Output: 0.4%.
Random Noise Output Program Channel -- < -- 75 dB RMS.
Hum, Transients on Noninserted Lines -- _?- 60 dB down.
Spurious Signals During Blanking Time -- Inactive hne urne -40 dB down. Active ITS lines -60 dB.
Signal Attenuation in " Delete" Mode -- 2T Pulse:
-70 dB. Subcarrier ( Color Bars):
60 dB.
Crosstalk into Program Channel from Internal Signals -- 27 Pulse · 70 dB. Subcarrier ( Color Bars): · 60 dB.
Unwanted Pedestal at Time of ITS Insertion -- Program and Preview Channel: · 5mV.
Insert Delay Adjustment Range -- 0.5 es front panel.
SOURCE IDENTIFICATION CODE ( R148 ONLY) The Tektronix R148 is a source identification code generator with up to 25 pulses available in any combination on line 16 or line 329.
Pulse Width -- 1e/s.
One Level -- 630 to 700 mV above blanking.
Zero Level -- Within 25 mV of blanking.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS Power Requirements -- 90 V ac to 136 V ac or 180 V ac to 272 V ac. 48 Hz to 66 Hz. 55 W maximum at 115 V ac and 60 Hz. Factory set at 230 V ac ( R148) or 115 V ac ( R148- M).
Ambient Temperature -- Performance characteristics are valid over an ambient temperature range of 0°C to + 50°C.
Dimensions Width Height Depth
Weights
Net Shipping .-.---
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
in
483
19.0
88
3.5
499
19.7
kg
lb
9.1 16.3
20.0 36.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 759 BNC termination (011-0103-02). two each BNC-T adaptors ( 103-0030-00); rackmounting hardware (351-0195-01): manual
ORDERING INFORMATION R148 PAL Test Signal Generator R148M PAL- M Test Signal Generator
$5,540 $8,700
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Noise Measurement Filters -- External filters are required with the 148 Generator when making noise measurements.
Low Pass 6.0 MHz 625/50 -- Order 015-0220-00 $ 100
Noise Weighting 5.0 MHz 625/50 -- Order 015-0215-00. $80
Low Pass 4.2 MHz 525/60 -- Order 015-0212-00 $ 125
Noise Weighting 4.2 MHz 525/60 -- Order 015-0214-00 . $90
CCIR recommendation 568 provides for measuring signal-to-
weighted random noise on all international transmissions (both 525/60 and 625/50) with a5.0 MHz low pass filter and aunified noise weighting filter.
Low Pass 5.0 MHz -- Order 015-0213-00
$ 125
Unified Noise Weighting Network -- Order 015-0283-00 $65
Rackmount to Cabinet Conversion Kit -- Order 040-0573-00 $150
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 173
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
SYNC AND TEST SIGNAL GENERATORS
141OR NTSC/1411R PAL/ 1412R PAL- M
Five Test Signal Generators and One Switcher
Conforms to EIA Standard RS- 170A (1410R)
Sync to Subcarrier Phasing Maintained or Corrected
I.
·
ea,
..,i111.· î * f a
,.
a. . 10:00
a
6 "Ar ····We.
....,..
,
..,
,
· .,... ....
·
..
..
.... f
I .
...
1410R OPTION 04 TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR
Color Frame Reference Output
Genlock to Composite Video Lock to External References Adjustable Blanking Widths
Two external synchronization modes, external ref erence and genlock. are available In the genlock mode, line field, subcarner, and PAL pulse (SPG12. SPG22) timing are derived from the incoming composite video signal.
1410R NTSC Mainframe and SPG2 $4,200
Option 03 1 -- NTSC Package Installed and Tested Together +$3.295
Option 04' 1 -- NTSC Package Installed and Tested Together +$7.885
Adjustable Sync Delays ( H and V)
Broadcast Quality
The 1410R Series sync and test signal generators are precision generators for use in studios, remote vans maintenance facilities and anywhere high quality sync or test signals are required. Three different models are available The 1410R is lor NTSC applications, the 1411R for PAL and the 1412R is for PAL- M applications. Each 1410R Series generator includes a genlock sync pulse generator. Five different test signal generators ( four for PAL- M) and one signal switcher are available for each color standard (NTSC. PAL. PAL- M). Any combination of up to five test signal generators and signal switchers can be installed in one mainframe. The following components are available for each color standard.
In the external reference mode, line, field. subcarner. and PAL pulse timing is derived from individual reference signals applied to the generator.
The SCH phasing can be set or maintained at any offset. This is made possible by locking the generator color subcarner to the reference color subcarrier and referencing generator- line and field- sync- signal timing to subcarner rather than line and field sync on the incoming reference signals. This feature is of value in editing and program assembly applications. A color frame identification pulse output identifies Field 1of the color field sequence. Should the user desire, the SCH phasing feature of the sync pulse generator can be disabled with a front panel control. In this mode of operation the SCH phasing of the incoming signal is maintained by locking subcarner to incoming burst or subcarner, sync to incoming sync.
Option 1E1 -- Adds TSG7 Installed
+$ 1,780
Option 1S -- Adds TSP1 Installed
+$ 1.565
Option 10 -- · 10 Hz Color Subcarner Frequency Accuracy
--
$405
Option 2C -- Adds TSG2 Installed
+ $505
Option 3L -- Adds TSG3 Installed
+$ 1,250
Option 4M -- Adds TSG6 Installed
+ 62.265
Option 4P -- Adds TSG5 Installed
+$ 1,625
Cannot be combined with any other option except may he combined with Option 10.
TSG2 Convergence Generator
TSG3 Linearity Generator TSG5 Pulse and Bar Generator
TSG6 Multiburst Generator TSG7 Color Bars Generator TSP1 Switcher
$ 530
$$11,,731150 $ 21:,33777505 $$12,8640
1411R PAL Mainframe and SPG12 .... $4,200
1410R SERIES PRODUCTS
uoior btanaara
Description
NTSC PAL PAL - M
Mainframe Sync Pulse Generator
1410R 1411R 1412R SPG2 SPG12 SPG22
Color Bars Generator
TSG7 TSG11 TSG21
Convergence Generator TSG2 TSG12
Linearity Generator
TSG3 TSG13 TSG23
Pulse 8 Bar Generator TSG5 TSG15 TSG25
Multiburst Generator
TSG6 TSG16 TSG26
Signal Switcher
TSP1 TSP11 TSP21
The 1410R Series generators may be ordered with standard combinations of signal generators or they can be configured to your specific requirement. A 1410R Series generator can be ordered with aminimal complement of signal gener-
A slow genlock mode is provided for those applications where fast- lock may upset the system The slow- lock selector is located on the generator card sets.
Genlock or external reference lock mode selection may be remotely controlled. Remote manual phasing of the SPG12 or SPG22 signal to an external source is possible in the internal mode. Ver. tical and or horizontal timing are altered as in slow- lock operation. Front panel LED's are used to indicate generator lock status.
Internal adjustments permit some variation of burst and blanking widths on the burst flag. comp blanking, and black burst outputs. These adjustments are preset to conform to recognized standards. You can reduce widths initially to allow for the widening that sometimes occurs when the video signal is processed.
Option 03 , -- PAL Package Installed and Tested Together +$3,000
Option 04 1 -- PAL Package Installed and Tested Together +$7.500
Option 18 -- Adds TSG11 Installed1,500
+$
Option IS -- Adds TSP1 IInstalled
+$ 1;4535
Option 2C -- Adds TSG12 Installed4_95
Option 31 -- Adds TSG13 Installed
+$ 1,225
Option 4M -- Adds TSG16 Installed
+$ 2,220
Option 4P -- Adds TSG15 Installed1.595
+$
Cannot be combined with any other option.
TSG11 Color Bars Generator
$ 1.575
TSG 12 Convergence Generator $ 520
TSG13 Linearity Generator
$ 1,285
TSG15 Pulse and Bar Generator
$1.680
TSG16 Multiburst Generator
$ 2,330
TSP11 Switcher
$ 1.610
ators now and others added later as your needs grow.
Unless otherwise indicated by a statement enclosed by parentheses I. all information characteristics and descriptions of the 141OR NTSC Series and its generators applies equally to equivalent mainframes or generators for the 1411R PAL and 1412R PAL- M Series Information in parentheses applies only to the specified series
The subcarrier frequency accuracy is ± 1Hz when operated in the internal mode. An optional ± 10 Hz oscillator ( Option 10) is available for the 1410R. A black burst output independent of all other outputs is provided. For NTSC systems, the VIRS ( Vertical Interval Reference Signal) is factory programmed on line 19, Field 1and Field 2of the
1412R PALM PACKAGES
1412R PAL- M Mainframe and SPG22 TSG21 $7,415
Option 05 -- Adds TSG2ITSG25,TSG26 ISP21 Installed +$8.795
SYNC PULSE GENERATORS
The SPG2. SPG12 and SPG22 are high quality sync generators designed for use in systems where accuracy. stable SCH ( sync-to-subcarrier) phasing capability, and lockup mode versatility are of prime importance
black burst when selected by afront panel switch on the SPG2. VIRS can be selected on line 18 if desired
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES Extender board ( 670-4441.02). 1.5 A fuse ( 159-0016-00). 075 A fuse 1159-0042-001 rackmount hardware instruction
OPTIONAL ITEMS ( FOR ALL CONFIGURATIONS)
Single- Width Blank Panel -- Order 333-2171-00
$1.35
Conversion Kit for SMPTE Bars -- For TSG1 Module Order
040-1010-00
$375
Rackmount to Cabinet Conversion Kit -- Order 040-1152-00
$90
VT- 174
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
1410 R Series ( coed)
TSG3/TSG13/TSG23 Linearity
and Modulated Pedestal Test Generators
5 Step and 10 Step Staircase Signal Ramp Signal 2 Modulation Amplitudes
One or Three Level Modulated Pedestal
TSG5/TSG15/TSG25
Pulse and Bar Generators
Pulse and Bar Overlay Full and Half Amplitude Pulse and Bar Field Squarewave and Window
SYNC AND TEST SIGNAL GENERATORS
TSP1/TSP11/TSP21 Switchers
and Convergence Generators
Single Switchable Output for Two to Six Generated Signals
Blanking, Sync and Burst Insertion for External Signal
Matrixing--Eight Programmed Display Formats to up to Six Sequential Signals
Convergence Border
Flat Field with 11 Fixed Levels
Modulated Pulse and Modulated Bar
Convergence Key
Ac and Dc Bounce
Front Panel Selection of 2T, T, and T/2 Pulse Width and Bar Risetime
Crosshatch or Dots Combined Crosshatch and Dots
¡he ISG3. TSG13 and TSG23 provide high- quality linearity and modulated pedestal test signals for the 1410R Series signal generators.
Combine variable APL with either of these signals to measure nonlinear distortions. The generators operate independently of all other test signal generators installed in the mainframe, while the rear panel output is available simultaneously with all other test signal generators > outputs.
You can select the 5 step and 10 step staircase signals and the ramp signal with or without 180' . subcarner modulation for NTSC. or U subcarner modulation for PAL and PAL- M The subcamer amplitude is front panel selectable at 20 IRE or 40 IRE on the TSG3, or at 140 mV and 280 mV on the TSG13 and TSG23. Applications include measuring differential phase and gain, dynamic gain. luminance linearity, and burst phase errors
With the TSG3, the flat field signal can be used on all active picture lines with levels set by the IRE Level control (% peak white on the TSG13. TSG23) or flat field on four lines can be alternated with one line of linearity or modulated pedestal When using the alternate mode APL is controlled by the IRE level control rio peak white on the TSG13, TSG23).
The ac Bounce position of the IRE level switch (TSG3) or the % peak white switch ( TSG13. TSG23) provides asignal in which the active portion of each line ( excluding sync) changes APL levels at a rate determined by the rate control ( 1 second to 30 second intervals).
The TSG5. TSG15, and TSG25 are sin2 pulse and bar television test signal generators designed for use with the 141OR Series signal generators. They're well suited for testing on equipment manufacturers' production lines and for testing of television transmitters, common carrier microwave and wire lines, and studio distribution systems Front panel controls provide most test signal options, while internally selectable options provide additional versatility.
The pulse and bar test signal consists of a sin' modulated pulse, asin2 pulse, and luminance bar The pulse and bar overlay mode lets you conveniently compare pulse to bar ratio without manipulating waveform monitor controls.
The inverted and noninverted 2T pulses may be overlaid lo compare shape and HAD ( half amplitude duration) This capability is particularly useful in detecting quadrature distortion which results from envelope detection of the RF modulated video signal. The pulse and bar test signal is also useful in measuring line time and short time distortions.
For sin' pulse signals, three self- cancelling switches permit independent selection of pulse half amplitude duration ( 21, T, T2) independent of bar risetime. In the bar mode, four self-cancelling switches permit selection of luminance bar risetime ( 21, T, T2) or modulated bar.
Full or half amplitude pulse and bar test signals can be provided with or without pedestal or setup (the TSG15 and TSG25 do not offer setup capability). For the TSG5, full amplitude is 100 IRE units
The TSP1, TSP11. and TSP21 combine the capabilities of atest signal switcher and convergence signal generator in asingle unit They simplify and expand the uses of the 1410R Series signal generators.
From asingle. electronically switched output. you have access to all the test signals ( from two to six) generated by the card sets in the mainframe. Meanwhile, you may continue to use the individual generator card sets' parallel outputs. so no restrictions are imposed on an established system As an added feature, one of the input signals can be external ( composite or noncomposite). All of the switcher inputs are provided with clamp circuitry
Eight different matrixes are stored in the PROM This signal matrixing capability, combined with the full- field mode of the TSP1 presents several combinations of signals sharing the full field display.
Most of TSP1 switching functions can be remotely controlled through the mainframe's Remote connector
TSG2/TSG12
Convergence Test Signal Generators
Dots and Crosshatch
Dots Only
Vertical Lines Only
For the TSG3, amplitude of the bounce excursions is fixed at 0IRE to 100 IRE in flat field mode and 10% to 90% APL in alternate modes. Blanking level remains fixed at 0V. To check ac
with no setup. Half amplitude is 50 IRE with no setup. For the TSG15 and TSG25, full amplitude is 100% ( 700 mV) with no setup. Half amplitude is 50% ( 350 mV) with no setup.
Horizontal Lines Only Vertical and Horizontal Lines
coupled circuitry use ac bounce.
With the switch set to dc bounce, ac bounce occurs as described above. In addition, the entire signal changes dc level in the opposite direction at the same rate resulting in no change in average dc level. Clamp circuits may be checked using dc bounce.
The luminance pulse, luminance bar, and luminance components of the modulated pulse and modulated bar may be switched off to provide chrominance pulse and chrominance bar. The chrominance pulse and bar may be placed on a
pedestal ( 50 IRE for the TSG5, 50% for the TSG15 and TSG25) to prevent chrominance from extending below blanking level.
Use the standard field squarewave ( with full amplitude and no setup) to measure field time distortion, and the window signal to measure line time distortion and picture monitor smearing. You can switch the color burst off without affecting the chrominance components of the test signals.
Position Controls
The TSG2 and TSG12 provide high- quality convergence test signals for the 141OR Series signal generators. You can use them to determine picture monitor or camera scanning linearity, aspect ratio. and geometric distortion. Signals for the TSG2 conform to IEEE Standard 202.
Provision is made for on/off switching of the dots. vertical lines, and/or horizontal lines and for positioning vertical and horizontal lines. The signal output is located on the rear panel of the mainframe in which the test signal generator is in-
Use the TSG5 for measuring overall gain, transient response, line and field time tilt, and chrominance to luminance delay and gain
stalled. The convergence signal output is available simultaneously with all other test signal generator outputs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-175
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
1410 R Series ( cont'd)
TSG7/TSG11/TSG21
Color Bars Generators
Color Bars Signals
SMPTE Color Bars ( TSG7)
EIA ( TSG7)
Fixed Full Field ( TSG11/TSG21)
Full Field with Switchable Components
75% or 100% Amplitude
Split Field/Y Reference
Split Field/Red
Split Field Bars/Bars Reversed
The TSG7, TSG11 and TSG21 provide high-quality full field and split field color bars for the 1410R Series signal generators. The TSG7 operates independently from any other test signal installed in the mainframe. Its output is available simultaneously with all other test signal outputs. The composition of the signal can be altered by switching off Y, B-Y( U), R-Y( V), Burst, and Sync.
You may also select fixed or alternating R-Y( V) subcarrier phase, bar amplitude, white reference, and setup level ( or pedestal).
The /Y REF switch selects asplit field display of color bars in the same sequence as full field, followed by the luminance portion of the color bars for the remainder of the field. The split can be 1/2 or 3/4 field as selected by internal programming in the sync pulse generator. With this signal, you can check chrominance to luminance delay and picture monitor gray scale tracking while simultaneously evaluating color performance.
SYNC AND TEST SIGNAL GENERATORS
TSG6/TSG16/TSG26
Multiburst Signal Generators
MULTIBURST SIGNAL GENERATOR TSG6, TSG16, TSG26
Low Range
High Range
Multiburst Signal
Controlled Risetime Burst Packets
Last Burst Frequency Variable
Manual and Field Swept Frequency Signals to 20 MHz
Markers for Both Frequency and Amplitude Reference
Full and Reduced Amplitude on all Signals
The TSG6, TSG16 and TSG26 are television multiburst and video sweep test signal generators designed for the 1410R Series signal generators.
They feature front panel controls for most test signal options, plus special Remote functions for additional versatility. They can be used in many testing applications, including equipment manufacture and microwave or long-line transmission systems.
Performance advances include reduction in harmonic content of sinewave signals and skirt energy associated with gating burst packets. Phase modulation of the burst packets aids ease of measurement by filling in shape of packets. Two ranges of multiburst frequencies are available: the 500 kHz to 4.1 MHz ( TSG6) range aids in testing television transmitters and common carrier links, while the 1.25 MHz to 12 MHz range is used in testing television studio equipment and cabling.
Use these generators where nonlinearities make reduced amplitude test signals desirable. The reduced amplitude multiburst signal allows accurate testing of video tape record/playback systems, since it is not subject to the false distortion of the full amplitude multiburst that often occurs in such applications.
Multiburst Frequencies (TSG6)
500 kHz ± 3°. 1.25 MHz ± 3% 2.00 MHz ± 3% 3.00 MHz -± 3% 3.58 MHz ± 3% 4.10 MHz ± 3%
(TSG16) iTSG26)
500 kHz ± 3% 1.00 MHz ± 3% 2.00 MHz ± 3% 4.00 MHz ± 3% 4.80 MHz ± 3% 5.80 MHz ± 3%
500 kHz 13% 1.00 MHz ± 3% 2.00 MHz ± 3% 3.00 MHz ± 3% 3.58 MHz ± 3% 4.20 MHz t3%
Amplitude ( First Multiburst Packet)
Full ( TSG6)
(TSG16, TSG26)
643 mV (90 IRE) ·20 mV
700 mV ± 21 mV
Reduced (TSG6) (TSG16, TSG26)
428 mV (60 IRE) f12 mV
420 mV ± 12 mV
1.25 MHz ± 3% 3.50 MHz ± 3% 5.50 MHz ± 3% 8.00 MHz ± 3% 10.0 MHz ± 3% 12.0 MHz ± 3% 1.00 MHz ± 3% 3.00 MHz t3% 5.00 MHz t3% 8.00 MHz ± 3% 10.0 MHz ± 3% 12.0 MHz ± 3% 1.00 MHz ± 3% 3.00 MHz ± 3% 5.50 MHz ± 3% 8.00 MHz ± 3% 10.0 MHz ± 3% 12.0 MHz t3%
643 mV * 25 mV
700 mV t28 mV 428 mV t16 mV
420 mV t16 mV
Flatness. Reduced and Full (TSG6)
(TSG16. TSG26)
10 mV or less 10 mV or less
16 mV or less 17.5 mV or less
Packet Envelope Risetime
400 ns ± 60 ns
400 ns · 60 ns
Burst Phasing
Phase shifted at field rate to provide filled-in burst packets.
Sweep/Manual Sinewave Frequencies Start Stop Amplitude at First Marker (TSG6)
(TSG16. TSG26)
100 kHz minimum 330 kHz minimum
6MHz ± 10%
20 MHz t10%
643 mV t20 mV 700 mV ± 21 mV
643 mV t25 mV 700 mV t28 mV
The /RED switch selects a split- field display of color bars, as in ,Y REF, followed by red chrominance. ( Same phase and amplitude, and at the same luminance level as the red bar.) Use this
Using the front panel controls, you can select a high or low- frequency band for each operating mode. SWEEP, allows selection of field sweep signal with or without markers. MARKERS inserts
Reduced (TSG6)
(TSG16. TSG26) Flatness 3
Full and Reduced
signal for adjusting VTR playback controls. Head equalization errors and noise are easily spotted on ared field. Other bar colors can be chosen by internal programming. The signal is also remotely switchable to color bars/white.
The REVERSE switch selects asplit field display
amplitude/frequency markers in Sweep, and amplitude markers in Composite/Manual. BURST al-
lows insertion/deletion of color burst on composite video for use with systems that operate
differently when burst is present. COMPOSITE/
CONTINUOUS determines whether sync, blanking, and a pedestal will be added to the sweep
(TSG6) (TSG16, TSG26)
Markers Frequencies
of color bars as in /Y REF, followed by color bars in a reverse sequence. That is black, blue, red,
magenta, green, cyan, yellow, white. This signal helps detect chrominance to luminance delay while viewing the kinescope of a color monitor receiver Reverse bars are also useful in detecting VTR velocity errors.
and manual signals.
MANUAL selects a fixed- frequency sinewave with frequency determined by the Frequency control and Frequency Range switch. AMP allows selection of either full or reduced amplitude in all operating modes, MULTIBURST selects line- rate discrete- frequency packets with reference inser-
The TSG7 will produce color bars VIT on any VIT line desired. ( VIT signals cannot be inserted on the program line. Use a 147A, 148, 148M, or 1910 for insertion of VITS on aprogram fine.)
tion levels.
COLOR BAR GENERATORS (TSG7, TSG11, TSG21)
Luminance Signal Accuracy - Within 1% or 1.5 mV, whichever is greater.
Multiburst/Manual (Last Burst Variable Mode) Frequency Range (TSG6, TSG26)
The SMPTE switch ( TSG7) is used to select the alignment color bar test signal for television pic-
ture monitors. This signal is generated in accordance with the format outlined in SMPTE Engineering Committee Recommendations, ECR
1-1978. SMPTE bars provide an easy way to objectively adjust picture monitor chroma, hue, and brightness.
Chrominance Accuracy - Absolute Amplitudes: Within 3% (all subcarrier components). Relative Amplitudes: Within 1% of the red chrominance bars or 1mV plus p- presidual subcarrier amplitude. whichever is greater.
Full Field Displays - Bar Width 6.45 ms (TSG7); 6.5 ps (TSG11); 6.6 ms ( TSG21). White Bar Risetime: 130 ns. +20 ns. 10 ns (TSG7): 115 ns 15 ns (TSG11): 125 ns 120 ps (TSG21). Time Difference Between Chroma and Lum Channels: 20 ns
(TSG16) Accuracy
VT- 176
Pric es and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
428 mV ± 12 mV 420 mV t12 mV 10 mV
10 mV
500 kHz ± 3%, 1.0 MHz ± 3%" 2.0 MHz ± 3%" 3.0 MHz t3%" 4.0 MHz ± 3%" 5.0 MHz ± 3%"
3.8 MHz to ..4.5 MHz -5.0 MHz to 6.0 MHz t10% -· 0.2% short term
428 mV t16 mV 420 mV t16 mV
15 mV to 12 MHz 20 mV to 20 MHz 17.5 mV to 12 MHz 21.0 mV to 20 MHz
1.0 MHz ± 3%" 2.0 MHz ± 3%" 4.0 MHz ± 3%" 6.0 MHz t3°4" 8.0 MHz t3%" 10.0 MHz ± 4%" 12.0 MHz t4%* 2 14.0 MHz ± 6%' 2 16.0 MHz t7%*2 18.0 MHz t7.4 2 20.0 MHz ± 7%* 2
- 14 MHz to 20 MHz t10% - 14 MHz to 20 MHz * 10% t1% short term
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
SYNC AND TEST SIGNAL GENERATORS
*
1474 NTSC COLOR SYNC GENERATOR
Yeats-wax
é ·
,
taktrorsx
'0 pmsom tcv.trn .,,e a /wort
m«mem*A'om
1470 NTSC COLOR SYNC AND TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR
CHARACTERISTICS
SYNC GENERATORS OUTPUTS ( 1470/1474) Horizontal Blanking - Leading Edge: 2.2 ms to 0.6 as before
the leading edge of sync. Trailing Edge: 9.1 as to 10.7 as after the leading edge of sync.
Horizontal Drive - Leading Edge: 2.2 ps to 0.6 pS before the leading edge of sync. Vertical Blanking - 20 lines or 21 lines.
Subcarrier Phase Controls - Composite Test Signals: Subcarrier 1and 2. Blackburst: Independent adjustment range of
120°, and jumpers allow afull 360° shift in 90° steps. GenLock Master: Independent 360° front panel adjustment and 100° remote control, via arear-panel BNC connector.
GEN -LOCK Composite Sync - Output Level Into 7512: 4V ±, 0.5 V. Risetime and Falltime: ' 40 ns nominal. Composite Blanking - Output Level Into 75 It: 4V ± 0.5 V. Field Blanking Risetime and Falltime: 140 ns nominal.
Vertical Drive - Output Level Into 75 it: 4V ± 0.5 V. Risetime and Falltime: 140 ns nominal. Duration: 9 lines. Horizontal Drive - Output Level Into 75 ft: 4V ± 0.5 V. Risetime and Falltime: 140 ns nominal. Duration: 6.35 ms. Burst Gate - Output Level Into 75 it: 4V ± 0.5 V. Delay from Line Sync: 5.1 as 0.1 as. Risetime and Falltime: 140 ns nominal. Duration: 2.5 i(s ± 100 ns.
Subcarrier - Output Level Into 75 9: 2 V. Frequency: 3.579545 MHz ± 1D Hz.
Black Burst - Sync Amplitude Into 7512: 40 IRE. Burst Amplitude: 40 IRE (286 mV p-p). Burst Frequency: 3.579545 MHz
10 Hz. Gen-Lock Signal Loop Input - Composite Video Input Range: 0.5 V to 1V when loop-through connectors are exter-
nally terminated into 7511. Comp Sync: 1V to 4V. ref subcarrier 1.5 V p-p to 2V p-p.
1470/1474
Full Color Sync Generator with Gen- Lock
Locks to Most Helical Scan VTRs
Simple to Operate
Compact and Economical
Full Selection of Sync and Timing Signals
Simplified Timing Via Multiple Subcarrier Phasing Controls
The ' 470 Sync and Test Signal Generator is a compact, full color, gen -lock sync generator providing a full selection of high quaky test signals.
The 1474 is identical in performance to the 1470 with the exception of test signals which, in the interest of economy, are not included. Both products have color gen -lock compatible with composite video from all normal sources including most helical scan video tape recorders.
The 1470 and 1474 can operate as master-sync gene-ators or as units fully or partially timed from external sources. Color gen -lock capable of locking to most helical scan VTRs is a standard feature.
Front- panel pushbutton selection of external synchronization is provided. In external mode, the 1470 and 1474 automatically lock on composite video ( 1V), composite sync (- 4V), or reference subcarrier ( 2V). Two front-panel lights show subcarrier and/or sync external lock. Lights out indicate aswitch to internal standard.
1470 Test Signal Functions To simplify your test signal selection and speed testing operations, the 1470 has push button selection of test signals. All test signal push buttons, except the color field selectors, are self-cancelling. Each test signal provides aberration- free transitions and accurate flat levels.
Color Bars The 1470 provides full- field color bars signals useful for color monitor adjustments, VTR tape lead in, and system checks.
Color Fields Red, green, and blue color- field signals are provided for checking purity on color monitors/receivers that do not have individual gun on/off controls. These signals may also be used to provide a color background source. The red, green, and blue selectors may be used simultaneously to provide yellow, cyan, magenta, and white full field signals.
Linearity ( Staircase) Staircase signal with selection of high, medium, or low APL. Staircase subcarrier may be switched on or off from the front panel.
Test Signals Test Signals available include: Window, Convergence Multiburst.
Window signals are suitable for measuring both line time and field time distortion. Convergence test signals are used to check color monitor convergence and linearity, and camera scanning linearity. Multiburst signals are used to check system frequency response.
Both the 1470 and 1474 are configured for rackmounting and are shipped ready to install in a 19 inch rack.
TEST SIGNAL OUTPUTS ( 1470) Test Signal Generator Outputs Composite Video - Return Loss. - 30 dB to 5MHz. Output Level Into 75 1V. Sync:
40 IRE. ± 1IRE (286 mV nominal amplitude). Peak Video Level: 100 IRE, ± 2IRE ( 714 mV nominal amplitude). Blanking Dc Level: 0V. ± 50 mV. NTSC Color Bars Full Field: 75% amplitude. 100 IRE white
reference. 7.5% sezup. Luminance Signal Accuracy: Within 2%. Chrominance Signal Absolute Amplitudes: Within 3% (all subcarrier frequency components).
Window Amplitude - 100 IRE, ± 2IRE. Duration: 25.8 p5,
±3%. Starts at line 66 in each field and ends at 218 in each field. Risetime: 150 ns nominal.
Crosshatch Patten or Dots - Setup: 7.5 IRE ± 1IRE. Peak Level: 77 IRE ± 2IRE. Risetime and Falltime: 150 ns nominal.
Multiburst - White Reference Amplitude: 100 IRE ± 2IRE. Multiburst Amplitude: 50 IRE ± 2IRE. Average Level: 55 IRE ±1IRE. Multiburst Frequencies: 0.5 MHz. 1.5 MHz, 2.0 MHz, 3.0 MHz, 3.58 MHz, 4.2 MHz
Staircase Luminance Component - Five Step Amplitude (each step): 20 IRE ± 1IRE ( 143 mV). Staircase Amplitude: 100 IRE ± 2IRE (714 mV). Aberrations: Within 2% of step amplitude. Step Risetime: 150 ns nominal.
Staircase Subcarrier Chrominance Component - Amplitude: 40 IRE ± 1IRE ( 286 mV p-p). Phase: 180°. Differential Phase: -< 0.3°. Differential Gain: < 0.5%. Subcarrier Envelope Risetime: 400 ns nominal.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 1470 Power Requirements - 115 V or 240 V line voltage. high-low ranges. Selection switches for line voltages and
ranges are accessible internally. Factory set to 120 V. 120 V Range: High, 108 V to 132 V; Low, 95 V to 110 V. 240 Range: High, 216 V to 250 V; Low, 198 V to 242 V. Line Frequency: 50 Hz to 60 Hz. Power Maximum: 50 W. 1474 Power Require-
ments: 115 V: 90 V to 130 V. 240 V: 198 V to 250 V. Power: Maximum 40 W.
Dimensions
Width
Height Depth
Weights Net Shipping
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
1470
mm
in
483
19.0
89
3.5
483
19.0
144
mm
in
483
44
483
19.0 1.7
19.0
kg
lb
kg
lb
4.9
10.8
7.8
17.2
42 8.1
9.2
17.9
ORDERING INFORMATION
1470 Color Sync and Test Signal Generator
(Rackmount)
$3,595
1474 Color Sync Generator ( Rackmount) $2,095
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 177
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
TELEVISION DEMODULATORS
The 1450-1 is compatible with
System M Television Transmission, the 1450-2 Is compatible with System B/G, and the 1450-3 is compatible with System I.
1450-2
1450-1/1450-2/1450-3
Measurement- Quality Performance for Negligible Distortion
Synchronous Detection Elminates Quadature Distortion
Envelope Detection for Accurately Determined Differential Phase
Surface Acoustic Wave Filter Provides Precise Nyquist Slope; Excellent Long and Short-Term Stability
Digital Readout of Input Power Level for Easy, Accurate Field Strength Readings
Constant-Bandpass Characteristics Over Wide Dynamic Range
Any Single VHF or UHF Channel Operation
UHF and VHF Tunable Down Converters
Conforms to EIA Standard RS- 462 (System M Only)
The 1450-1 ( System M), 1450-2 ( System BG) and 1450-3 ( System I) Demodulator Mainframes are combined with a Tektronix Television Down Converter (TDC) to provide an accurate link between your transmitter's RF signals and video baseband measuring equipment. Unique components work together to identify and eliminate any possible demodulation distortion in reproduced signal characteristics. You see a transparent picture of your transmitter's performance and signal output.
High Performance Spectrum Analyzers for your RF measurements are described on pages 202216.
Tunable or Fixed- Channel Down Converters For demodulating an RF signal at a TV channel frequency, the 1450 Series demodulator mainframes must be used with aTektronix TDC. Three compatible TDCs are available for each system and provide a selection between tunable and fixed-channel performance. The TDC Fixed-Channel Down Converter supports your specified system channel number. Tunable Down Converters available for VHF and UHF channels are the TDC1 and TDC2 respectively.
Demodulation of the transmitter IF signal may be accomplished by using only the mainframe.
Synchronous and Envelope Detection The 1450 Series demodulators allow you to select either synchronous or envelope detection. Each method has advantages, yet both are required for ful measurement capability. For instance, synchronous detection is necessary for measurements that can be seriously affected by quadrature distortion.
The 1450 Series demodulators have two synchronous video detectors operating in phase quadrature One detects the in-phase signal; the other detects the quadrature component of the video signal. (The quadrature component is ameasure of change in visual carrier phase resulting from a change of video level.)
However, if incidental phase modulation is present on the picture carrier, the amount of differential phase measured on asynchronously detected signal will be erroneous. Because of this, an envelope detector is necessary to determine the actual differential phase present. The envelope detector has linear transfer characteristics down to 3% carrier and so provides optimum modulation depth indication.
Tektronix- Developed Surface Acoustic Wave Filter The 1450 Series demodulators feature a SAW (surface acoustic wave) filter developed by Tektronix. It provides more precise Nyquist slope characteristics without group delay distortion, improves long-term and short-term stability, and lowers maintenance costs compared to conventional filter network circuitry.
In conventional demodulators, the more precisely the bandpass characteristics approach an ideal Nyquist curve, the more complex the filter network required. In the 1450 Series demodulator mainframes however, the bandpass characteristics are determined by just a single component, the SAW filter. Precision is the result.
Conventional tuned IF circuitry must be meticulously adjusted and is subject to change with mechanical and thermal shock. But the SAW filter is in asealed unit and accurately provides the critical selectivity characteristics of the demodulator --and requires no adjustments.
ORDERING INFORMATION, SYSTEM M
1450-1 Television Demodulator (Order one vi-
sion IF option)
$14,400
Option 01 -- 37 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 03 -- 45.75 MHz Vision IF
NC
For demodulation of RF signals, one of the following three down converters must be plugged into the 1450-1 mainframe. Order one vision IF option and either Option 11 or 14.
TDC Fixed Channel Down Converter -- (Stiplulate channel
number when ordering.)
$3,550
TDC-1 -- Tunable Down Converter VHF Band
57,880
TDC-2 -- Tunable Down Converter UHF Band
57,680
Option 01 -- 37 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 03 45.75 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 11 -- System M Countries
NC
Option 14 -- System M Countries
NC
ORDERING INFORMATION, SYSTEM 13/G
1450-2 Television Demodulator (Order both
Option 02 and Option 09)
$ 11,900
Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 09 -- i90 ns/ -- 170 ns Group Delay
NC
For demodulation of RF signals, one of the following three down converters must be plugged into the 1450-2 mainframe. Order both Option 02 and Option 12.
TDC Fixed Channel Down Converter -- (Stiplulate channel
number when ordering.)
$3,550
TDC-1 -- Tunable Down Converter VHF Band TDC-2 -- Tunable Down Converter UHF Band
$7,680 $7,560
Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 12 -- System 13/Gil countries
NC
ORDERING INFORMATION, SYSTEM I
1450-3 Television Demodulator (Order Op-
tion 02)
613,145
Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
NC
For demodulation of RF signals, one of the following three down converters must be plugged into the 1450-3 mainframe. Order both Option 02 and Option 12.
TDC Fixed Channel Down Converter -- (Stiplulate channel
number when ordering.)
$3,550
TDC-1 -- Tunable Down Converter VHF Band $7,650
TDC-2 -- Tunable Down Converter UHF Band Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
$7,660 NC
Option 12 -- System B/G/I countries
NC
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
1910 Digital Generator
Four External VITS Inputs for Insertion of Teletext, Closed Captioning, Source ID, etc.
Nonvolatile Memory to Maintain Selected VITS and Full Field Signal Configuration after Power Interruption
Signal Stored in Replaceable PROMs so Your 1910 won't Become Obsolete
The Accuracy and Stability of an all- Digital 10- Bit Sync and Signal Generation ( RS170A)
User Friendly RS- 232C Control Port for Added Versatility
New Signals ( Eye Test Pattern, Special Multipulse, Color Multipulse), New Functions (VITS Sequence, Field Sequence and More
The 1910 Digital Generator is a state-of-the-art test signal generator designed for performance testing of NTSC video systems and equipment. The 1910 is especially suited where high accuracy and stability are required. It is also a VITS inserter (internal and external) with a full complement of signals that allow testing in studio, transmitter, production or research environments. Four external VITS inputs permit insertion of signals such as teletext, closed captioning, source ID, and other similar sources. These four inputs may be converted to four pulse outputs for use in aproduction environment.
External interfacing of the 1910 is controlled by an internal microprocessor and its nonvolatile memory. Test signals are stored as 10- bit digital words and converted to analog form by a 10-bit precision DAC (with deglitching to reduce differential gain and differential phase) to ensure signal accuracy as well as long term stability and repeatability. Since all signals are stored in replaceable EPROMs, changing needs and industry standards will not cause obsolescence.
Control and versatility of the 1910 are greatly enhanced by the use of its RS-232 control port. Most functions of the 1910 can be controlled, reconfigured and saved. This includes VITS and full field signal selection, matrix signal creation, sequences and other features.
DIGITAL GENERATOR
1910 DIGITAL GENERATOR
Remote Control Remote control via aground closure interface allows the user to control the full field signals. VITS insertion on lines 14 through 21 ( VITS changes are saved in nonvolatile memory), VIR mode, bypass operate, genlock source, control mode and reset to preprogrammed condition.
Programmability and RS- 232 Control Port Features The 1910 has a friendly command language that allows the user to program its features to meet specific applications. The user does not need to be aprogramming expert as the 1910 has alanguage that allows him to concentrate on the applications and not on programming.
The 1910 can be programmed and controlled using an RS-232 terminal. It can also be controlled or run under program control using an RS-232 host computer, including some handheld models or personal computers. The host computer could also be the Tektronix 1980 Automatic Measurement Set which would use the 1910 as a progammable signal source to stimulate and measure television equipment or a transmission link.
The 1910 can also be controlled over telephone lines. An auto-answer modem connected to the 1910 will allow the user to take control of the 1910, observe or modify its status and subsequently release control. The control and reconfiguration can also be accomplished automatically by ahost computer.
Some of the capabilities offered by the RS-232 port include the ability to redefine the signal selection on the front panels ( 1910 and remote control unit) to better meet particular user needs, such as placing frequently used signals in apreferred position or in a convenient sequence for calibration; production testing or other special uses.
Pulse Out Feature This included feature of the 1910 allows the user to change the four external VITS inputs to four pulse outputs for limited camera drive. The outputs available are H Drive, V Drive, Composite Blanking, and Burst Flag. Applications for pulse outputs are remote vans or standby sync generators. Composite sync and subcarrier outputs are always available.
The 1910 can also be used as astand-alone signal source that will remain SCH phased and locked to an internal oven-controlled reference.
SYNC AND SUBCARRIER OUTPUT All pulse outputs have negative going output levels of 4V ·10% into 75 ii and have a risetime and falltime of 140 ns ±20 ns.
Composite Sync Timing -- EIA RS- 170A Specifications. Subcarrier Output -- Frequency: See Genlock. Amplitude: 2V p-p ± 10%. The following optional outputs replace the external VITS input function of the 1910. Composite Blanking -- Horizontal Blanking Width: 10.7 ms
100 ns. Field Blanking: Field 1 - 21 lines, Field 2=21 lines. Horizontal Drive Timing.-- Start of line blanking to end of line sync. ±. 100 ns.
Vertical Drive Timing -- Coincident with start of field. Duration: 9lines.
Burst Flag -- Duration: 2.5 vs ± 100 ns. Delay from Line Sync: 5.3 p5 100 ns.
RS-232C INTERFACE Supports EIA Standard RS-232C format to the extent shown below.
Baud -- 300 bit/s. 1200 bit/s, 2400 bit/s or 4800 bits/s. Input/Output -- ASCII. serial, asynchronous data. Full duplex input and output.
Character Length -- Eleven bits/character, including a start and two stop bits Parity -- Input: No parity required and. if present, is ignored. Output: No parity sent.
DIGITAL DATA INTERFACE Parallel, 12 balanced. signal pairs consisting of 10 bits/sample. aclock, atiming reference signal.
Sampling Frequency -- Four times color subcarner. Nominally 14.3 MHz, Sampling Phase Angle -- Referenced to Iaxis and O axis. Dynamic Range -- Ten bits/sample: Blanking level (0 IRE) is at digital word 240. Reference white ( 100 IRE) is at digital word 800 (5.6 LSB/IRE). Input Logic Levels Terminated in 100 11 -- 10 k ECL compatible. Output Logic Levels -- 10 k ECL compatible. Digital Input Timing -- Setup and hold times are 10 ns before and atter the 50% point of the negative transition of the clock. Output Clock Timing -- The 50% point of the leading edge of the clock pulse preceeds the data by 5ns ± 5ns.
POWER SUPPLY Line Voltage Range -- 90 V ac to 132 V ac. 180 V ac to 250 V ac. Maximum Power Consumption -- 130 W. Line Frequency -- 47 Hz to 63 Hz.
Dimensions
Width Height Depth
Weight
Net Shipping
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Cabinet
Rack mount
mm
in
mm
in
442
174
486
19.1
96
3.8
88
3.5
525
20 6
525
20.6
kg
lb
kg
lb
11 6 16.7
255 370
12.2 16.7
27.0 37.0
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature -- Operating: 0°C to f50°C Nonoperating: 40°C to + 65*C.
Altitude -- Operating: To 4572 m ( 15,000 ft) Nonoperating. To 15 240 m (50.000 ft).
Vertical interval color reference
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES Pair of rack slides ( 351-0636-00); pulse out board (670-8007-00); cabinet hardware: rack hardware; operator manual: service manual.
ORDERING INFORMATION 1910 Digital Generator
Option 03 -- CBC Test Signals
$9,990
NC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Remote Control Unit
Order 015-0374-00 Interconnecting Cable (6ft).
Order 012-0108-00 Interconnecting Cable ( 22 ft). Order 012-0251-00
$400 $150 $350
SIGNAL MATRIXING The matrix feature of the 1910 divides the field into 16 blocks of lines consisting of approximately 16 lines each. Through the RS-232 control port the user can program any full field signal to appear in any of the 16-line blocks. Any signal can be repeated in as many blocks as necessary. There are three matrix signals in the 1910 that are factory set, but can be user- redefined and saved in anonvolatile memory.
Some of the applications of this feature include user-defined tape headers or monitor test patterns. The matrixed signal can serve several users simulta-
neously, reducing the need for multiple signal outputs. By using the 15-fine feature of the Tektronix 1480- Series Waveform Monitors, particular signals in the matrix can be viewed by the users.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-179
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-71 11 Telex 151754
1
1.11041.11`111 CNANNR
MIAMI 1.4
,· mum% ne we
011181
MOW vt..
AMID», NOME IbILM110111.10 SET
RANDOM NOISE MEASUREMENT SET
e Mtlf.111.11.11%, MIMI RAM
1430
1430
Conforms to CCIR Recommendation 568
In- Service Testing
Out-of- Service Testing
Program Material Protected by Fail- Safe Provisions
525/60 or 625/50 Standards
The 1430 provides random noise measurement capabilities on an in-service basis using the spatially adjacent noise matching technique with a waveform monitor. A program channel allows deletion of VITS and/or noise on selected lines in the vertical blanking interval and amonitor channel is provided for making measurements in conjunction with awaveform monitor.
The 1430 has two sections. One section, permanently mounted in the rack, contains inputs and outputs and program protecting material. The second section, containing circuitry and controls, may be easily removed without cable disconnection.
Monitor Channel The monitor channel has an output independent from program for waveform comparison of the noise on the incoming signal and noise from the internal noise generator. Front- panel controls determine monitor channel parameters with three operating modes: VITS, Full Field, and Out of Service.
In the VITS mode, any line between 10 and 21 in either or both fields may be selected for insertion of the reference noise. The Full Field mode provides insertion on all active lines.
The Out of Service mode is provided for measurements on sources that do not have composite sync. In particular, these include transmission circuits not carrying signals at the time testing is conducted. Horizontal sync is added for waveform monitor synchronization.
The 1430 may be used on both 625/50 and 525/60 systems but is shipped equipped for 525/60. The 1430 Option 01 is equipped for 625,50. Both models use the unified weighting filter per CCIR Recommendation 568. Insertion loss characteristics are as follows:
Insertion Loss
1 MHz 2 MHz 3 MHz 4 MHz 5 MHz
5.9 dB 10.2 dB 12.0 dB 13.0 dB 13.6 dB
Program Channel The Program Channel has a 7512 input impedance and unity gain and output impedance of
75 12. No program impairment is introduced. A relay provides program signal continuity if the 1430 loses power. Internal programming, readily changeable, controls all deletion parameters. Up to three lines between 10 and 21 in either or both fields may be deleted. The deletion may be varied between the first half, second half, or full active portion of the video line. A pedestal may be inserted in the deleted portion of a line at 10 IRE,
50 IRE, or 100 IRE levels,
CHARACTERISTICS
PROGRAM CHANNEL Signal Input Level -- 1V nominal.
Input Impedance -- 75 9 nominal.
Input Return Loss -- Power On: or Bypass: .40 dB to 5MHz.
dB to 5MHz Power Off
Output Impedance ( Operating) -- 75 ° nominal.
Output Return Loss ( All) -- > 30 dB to 5MHz.
Output Blanking, Dc Level -- 0V within 50 mV, for blanking
pulses. Inserted Pedestal Level -- Adjustable to 100 IRE, 50114E. 10 IRE, or 0IRE.
2T Pulse to Bar Amplitude -- Within 0.25%
Mod Sin2 Pulse (Chrominance and Luminance) -- 100% within 0.5%.
Waveform, Tilt -- Field Rate Squarewave - 0.5%. 26 is Bar. 0.5%
Differential Phase ( 10% to 90% APL, Standard Input) -- Program Output: · 0.15°. Differential Gain ( 10% to 90% APL, standard Input) -- Program Output: 0.2%.
NOISE Pedestal Level -- Pedestal Amplitude: 10 IRE, 50 IRE. and 100 IRE.
Pedestal Position ( Insertion Mode Only) -- Delay: 10 pS to 50 pS
Noise Amplitude -- 20 dB to RMS)
59.5 dB (0dB
700 mV
Noise Attenuators -- Absolute Amplitude: Within 1dB.
Noise Spectrum -- Energy/Unit Bandwidth: Flat within 6dB. 15 kHz to 5MHz
Output Impedance -- 751/ nominal.
Output Return Loss -- - 30 dB.
Noise Weighting and Low Pass Filter -- Per CC1R recommendation 421-2.
AC POWER Line Voltage Range -- 115 V ac: 90 V to 132 V. 230 V ac: 180 V to 264 V. Standard 1430: Factory set at 115 V ac. 1430 Option 01: Factory set at 230 V ac.
Maximum Line Current -- 025 A.
Maximum Power Consumption -- 30 W.
Line Frequency Range -- 48 Hz to 66 Hz.
Dimensions Width Height Depth
Weights
Net Shipping
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
mm
in
483
19.0
44
1.7
429
16.9
kg
lb
45
10.0
7.2
16.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES One pair slide guide (351-0331-03). cover program front panel (200-1481-00); manual.
ORDERING INFORMATION 1430 Random Noise Measuring Set ( 525/60)
$4,115
Option 01 -- Random Noise Measuring Set ( 625 ,50) .. + 585
The 1430 and 1430 Option 01 are provided with the 5.0 MHz low pass filter and unified weighting filter per CCIR Recommendation 568.
In all modes the insertion width is internally set at 26 Ms. Delay between insertion and sync is controlled by the Delay adjustment. A switch and a potentiometer covering a range of 0IRE to 100 IRE controls the insertion pedestal level.
Line Time Amplitude Nonlinearity ( 10% to 90% APL, Standard Input) -- 0.5%.
Random Noise -- Program Output: 75 dB (RMS) down (using weighting and low pass filters. 5MHz).
Hum or Transients on Noninserted Lines -- - 60 dB down, (using weighted and low pass filters, 5MHz).
Monitor channel gain control, with a ± 3dB range, allows nomalizing the signal for a1V peak-
Spurious Signals During Blanking Lines -- low pass (5MHz).
40 dB down,
to- peak signal so that noise measurement relative to 1V may be made. The internal noise weighting
Signal Attenuation in Delete Mode -- 2T Pulse: 70 dB down. Subcarner (Color Bars): - 60 dB down. Insertion pedes-
filter may be switched in or out from the front panel for evaluation of the spectral content of the
tal: 10 IRE, 50 IRE, and 100 IRE, first half, second half, or entire line (up to 3; 10 to 21) or full field.
incoming noise. This filter is the monitor channel
Unwanted Pedestal at Time of VITS Insertion -- 0.7 IRE.
only and does not affect the program output.
Time Jitter -- - 5ns
VT-180
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P 0. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
AUTOMATIC VIDEO CORRECTOR
SYNC 'BAIN
OVUM NAIR
1=1
BURST PHAN.
·et. Je CNNONIAGAIN
1440 NTSC AUTOMATIC VIDEO CORRECTOR
NANTIR SAM
ryffra.
· -
·
RIZ NIOTB
UN IT 0111.43M40..00
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
EZI
linamcrra mown* ore Limn'.114401
REMOTE MONITOR UNIT
1440
Reduces Operating Costs
Extends Transmitter Tube Life and Reduces Maintenance Costs
Maintains Consistent High Quality Color Pictures
Automates Transmitter Modulation Level Control
Maintains Correct Sync- To- Video Ratios During Line Voltage Fluctuations
Auxiliary Units In most applications, the usefulness of automatic correction is enhanced by a Tektronix Remote Control Unit. You can conveniently select corrector modes and manually correct six signal parameters with this unit. The remote unit allows easy adjustment of the parameter's preset values for operation in the absence of a reference signal. Automatic correction value adjustments are also provided.
The Tektronix Remote Monitoring Unit provides meter indications of the amount of correction applied to the signal.
Dc Error-Signal Output -- Source Impedance: 10 Mr. Open Circuit Voltage: 10 V for remote metering and telemetry. Six Outputs: Video pin, sync gain, burst gain, relative chroma gain, burst phase, and set up.
Chroma/Luminance Gain Correction (+ 3dB to -- 3dB) --27 Pulse/Bar Ratio -- 110% maximum and 92% minimum. 7 Pulse/Bar Ratio: 125% maximum and 85% minimum. 27 Pulse Preshoot: 5% maximum. T Step Overshoot: 5% maximum. T Step Risetime: 95 ns minimum and 155 ns maximum. Chrominance/Luminance Delay: 10 ns minimum and 10 ns maximum. VIR Signal Correction Rate: 0.35 s (90% correction without overshoot).
POWER SUPPLY Line Voltage Range -- 115 V ac -±- 10% and 230 V ac t10%.
Maximum Power Consumption -- 35 W.
Line Frequency Range -- 48 Hz to 66 Hz.
Automatic VIRS Referenced Correction of: Overall Video Signal Amplitude Chrominance to Luminance Gain Ratio Black Level Chrominance Phase Burst Gain Sync Gain
Optional Closed Loop Capabilities for Greater Efficiency and Economy in Transmitter and VTR Operations
CHARACTERISTICS
Input Impedance -- 75 II nominal.
Video Delay -- 145 ns.
Output Impedance -- 75 q. Linear Waveform Distortions (Maximum) -- Field Time: 0.5%, Line Time: 0.5%, Short Time: T Pulse/Bar: 2%. 27 Pulse/Bar: 1%. Nonlinear Waveform Distortions -- Differential Gain ( 10% to 90% APL): 0.5%. Differential Phase ( 10% to 90% APL): 0.5%. Dynamic Gain ( 10% to 90% APL): Picture 0.5%, sync 0.5%. Chrominance/Luminance Intermodulation: 0.5%. Line Time Nonlinearity: 0.5%.
I-YSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
Width
483
Height
881
Depth
412
Weight
kg
Net Domestic Shipping Export Shipping
7.6 11.0 16.8
in
19.0 3 5
16.2
lb
16.7 24.1 37 0
ORDERING INFORMATION 1440 NTSC Automatic Video Corrector $6,325
The 1440 VIRS Automatic Video Corrector gives
fully automatic correction of video gain, chrominance to luminance gain ratio, black level ( set up), chroma phase, burst amplitude, and sync amplitude errors. With this corrector in your facili-
ty, the quality of the program signal is rigidly maintained. Ordinary changes and even many se-
vere distortions are automatically corrected.
Unweighted Video Signal to Random Noise Ratio -- to 5MHz.
60 dB
Spurious Subcarrier -- 60 dB.
Field Time Tilt Correction -- 25% Tilt on Input Signal: Will be reduced to · 1%.
Clamping Characteristics -- 10% to 90% APL or 90% to 10% APL. Recovery within one line to within five IRE without overshoot. Slow clamp option provided to reduce keyboarding when used with noisy signals. Hum Reduction: 1V hum on
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Remote Control Unit for 1440 -- ( Includes two connectors).
Order 015-0240-DO
$775
Remote Monitor Unit for 1440 -- ( Includes one connector).
Order 015-0239-00
$900
Six Foot Extender Cable -- With connectors for use between
the 1440 and Remote Control Unit or Rerrote Monitor Unit.
Order 012-0131-00
$325
Video gain correction is referenced to the 50 IRE level of the VIRS. Chrominance to luminance gain ratio and burst phase corrections are referenced
to the amplitude and phase of the VIRS chrominance respectively. Set up level correction is referenced to the 7.5 IRE level of the VIRS. Sync and
burst gain corrections are controlled respective to
input signal can be reduced to 25 mV.
Maximum Correction Ranges -- Video Level at Input: ± 6dB. Sync Level at Input: t3 dB. Chrominance/Luminance Gain: ±3dB. Burst Level: ± 6dB Burst/Chrominance Phase: ± 25°. Black Level Set Up: -1- 10 IRE.
Reduced Correction Ranges -- Video Level: ± 2dB. Sync Level: ± 3 dB. Chrominance/Luminance Gain: ± 3 dB. Burst/Chrominance Phase: ± 25°. Black Level Set Up:
Three Foot Extender Cable -- With connectors, for use be-
tween the 1440 chassis and the rear rackmounting section.
Order 012-0637-00
$ 330
their standard amplitudes.
5 IRE.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 181
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
AUTOMATIC VIDEO MEASUREMENT
1980 ANSWER
Complete Video Measurement Capability
Waveform Digitizer to Capture Video Signal
ANSWER BASIC Software for Measure-
ments, Analysis and Report Generation
Remote Terminal Capability
The 1980 ANSWER Automatic Video Measurement Set provides total video measurement capabilities and offers maximum versatility and testing power. Special features provide quality measurement performance for a wide variety of applications.
Programmability The 1980 can be programmed using ANSWER BASIC to make specific measurements required for a wide range of video applications. Comprehensive software packages (Options 01, 04, 05 and 06) are available from Tektronix. The instrument can be tailored for a specific operation, automatically performing a single measurement or agroup of measurements continuously, on operator demand, or at prescheduled times. The results can be returned in report format, with or without graphics, on a variety of terminals and printers. ANSWER's microprocessor control and ROM memory give you extensive flexibility. Format or standard changes can be made without the expensive modifications or recalibrations associated with analog test equipment.
High Measurement Accuracy The 1980 provides consistent measurement accuracy with high repeatability. Special features like signal offset, gain control, dither generation, and signal averaging can be used to minimize possible errors. Using these features can significantly reduce noise on the incoming signal and provide an effective resolution of 11 bits. This means you can use the 1980 for the most stringent measurement problems and have fast accurate results. Due to its digital nature ANSWER has very few internal adjustments, providing a high degree of reliability over long periods of time.
Amplitude, Phase and Timing Measurement All type of measurements can be programmed into the 1980, including sync, burst, and bar amplitudes, differential gain and phase, and timing measurements. The 1980 can tell you immediately if video signals are within acceptable or legal limits.
Remote Operation The 1980 can also be operated from a remote terminal over telephone lines. With Option 12 (Autocall), it can even be programmed to automatically telephone aremote terminal under user specified conditions, e.g., an out-of- limits signal. The 1980 can be used in awide range of applications including unattended and remote transmission systems, and systems under computer control.
Display Terminal ANSWER requires the use of a terminal for display. We offer several, including the 4105 and 4107 13 inch Color Graphics terminals. Standard
RS-232C interfaces ensure compatibility with a wide range of other terminals and printers.
Available Measurement Programs Application programs taking full advantage of the
1980's capabilities can be purchased from Tektronix to make most NTSC and PAL video
broadcast measurements.
The flexibility of software- based measurements, unavailable in analog instruments, means that the 1980 can be tailored to awide range of applications for the analysis, measurement, and testing of baseband video signals.
RS- 232C Compatibility
ANSWER has five RS- 232C (ASCII coding) Ports. This means the instrument can be adapted to a wide range of applications, including unattended and remote systems and computer control.
CHARACTERISTICS
SIGNAL HANDLING Inputs -- A and B (user selectable).
Impedance -- 75 U.
Return Loss -- Video: 46 dB to 5MHz.
Signal Level -- 0.5 V to 2V p-p; sync negative.
Coupling -- Dc or ac nonfloating ( user selectable).
Clamp -- Selection: Fast. slow. or off (user selectable). Level: Sync tip or back porch.
Hum Rejection -- Fast: -. 36 dB. Slow: · 1dB.
Signal Averaging -- Noise Reduction: 15 dB; with 32 line averaging and incoming signal-to-noise ratio of 46 dB or less. Dy-
namic Range: 2.5 V maximum: with 0 offset. Gain Range: 0 times to 15.5 times in 0.5 increments. Offset Range: 0 LSB to 248 LSB t0.5 LSB (8 LSB increments); referred to input at unity gain. Noise Floor: - 72 dB (0dB = 714 mV).
Distortions -- Differential Gain Error: 0.5%. Differential
Phase Error:
Luminance Nonlinearity Error, 1.0%.
Amplitude/Frequency Error (0MHz to 5MHz): 0dB · 0.25 dB;
7.16 MHz = - 46 dB. Delay/Frequency Error ( 0MHz to 5MHz): 20 os.
SYNCHRONIZATION
Modes -- Internal: Satisfactory operation with 26 dB signalto-noise ratio ( Sound-in-Syncs disabled). Channel A and B (user selectable). External: Channel A and B (user selectable).
Amplitudes -- Internal Mode: 143 mV (20 IRE) minimum; negative going sync on incoming signal. External Mode: Minimum: 0.2 V p-p into 75 fi, composite sync. Maximum: 8.0 V p-p into 75 U. composite sync.
ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERSION Resolution -- 8bits; 11 bits effective with dither.
Accuracy -- RMS: ± 0.25 LSB (± 0.1%l. Peak (t 0.2%). Conversion Rate -- 20 MHz maximum.
t0.5 LSB
Monotonicity -- All 256 codes present and in sequence with no polarity reversals.
Sampling Rate -- NTSC: 910 x horizontal frequency. PAL: 1135 xhorizontal frequency.
Note: User selectable means that the function is controlled from the keyboard.
DIGITAL PROCESSING Signal Memory -- Video Acquisition Memory Capacity: 32 k samples. Video Acquisition Memory Controller Sampling Modes: Line rate, field rate or block sampling between two points on signal. Save Value: Multiples of eight. Skip Value: Multiples of two. Picture Monitor Bright-Up Pulse Output: Am-
plitude: 240 mV. Termination: Internal in 75 U.
Real Time Clock -- Internal Reference Stability: 10 P/M total over · 10"C to + 50°C; crystal controlled. External Input Frequency: 1MHz. External Input Amplitude: 0.3 V to 4.0 V.
Microcomputer -- User Memory: 32 k words. Nonvolatile Memory: 8kwords.
Software Control -- TEK ANSWER BASIC.
DIGITAL INTERFACE Access Ports -- Interface: RS-232C: (ASCII code). Number: 5: 3 DCE ,(full duplex). 2 DTE2 (full duplex).
Baud Rate -- Five Ports: Up to 9600: user programmable.
Automatic Call-Up -- RS-366 (01390nal). User Operation -- Via keyboard (ASCII).
DCE = Data Communication Equipment .2 DTE - Data Terminal Equipment
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS Temperature Range -- Operating: 0°C to + 50°C. Nonoperating, 55°C to + 75°C.
Altitude Range -- Operating: Sea level to 4572 m ( 15.000 ft). Nonoperating: Sea level to 15 240 m ( 50,000 ft).
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width Height Depth
Cabinet
mm
in
429
16.9
355
14.0
593
24.0
Rack mount
nun
in
483 355 644
19.0 14.0 22.0
Weights .--,
kg
lb
kg
lb
Net
25.0
55.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Left rackmounting adaptor (367-0279-00); right rackmounting adaptor (367-0280-00); tracks (351-0104-03); 15 ft RS-232C
modem connecting cable (012-0939-00): rubber cabinet feet
(348-0068-00): power cord ( 161-0066-01); rack slides (351-0623-00): manual.
With the Option 06 Dual Standard Applications
Software, ANSWER can make automatic or operator-initiated measurements on both PAL and NTSC video signals. The video standard in use on
the incoming video signals is specified by the user, and thereafter Option 06 makes all measurements accordingly.
This program combines all features of Option 04 (NTSC Video Monitoring) and Option 05 ( PAL video monitoring) into one program. The characteristics remain the same as in those programs.
The Option 06 program is stored in PROMS on two circuit boards which plug into the 1980 base unit.
ORDERING INFORMATION
For Base Unit Plus Software, Order:
1980 ANSWER with Option 01 --
NTSC Applications Software
$26,000
1980 ANSWER with Option 04 --
NTSC Monitoring Software
$26,800
1980 ANSWER with Option os --
PAL Monitoring Software
828,800
1980 ANSWER with Option 06 --
PAL/NTSC Applications Software
29,5000
Option 12 -- Automatic Call Equipment
+ 6500
For Software Only, Order:
1980 F04
$ 5,800
1980 F05 1980 F06
$ 5,800 $ 8,500
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Service Kit -- Order 067-1115-00
VT-182
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151 754
TELEVISION GENERATOR
TSG-170A NTSC TELEVISION GENERATOR The accuracy and lorg term stability of the TSG-170A test signals are enhanced by its precision digital to analog converter. Each converter is automatically laser trimmed to 12 bit
accuracy.
Color bar blanking width is 10.6 ps to facilitate verification of proper blanking throughout your system.
The TSG-170A sync generator's stable color standard and unique digital genlock make it ideal for either master generator or slave operation. All outputs are correctly SC- H phased, even if the TSG-170A is locked to an improperly SC- H phased reference input. The digital genlock calculates sync timing and subcarrier phase to properly identify color framing of the input reference signal.
The TSG-170A automatically senses composite video or 3.58 MHz subcarrier refererce inputs. It switches to an internal oscillator in the absence of areference input signal. This high stability crystal oscillator, with its constant temperature over, ensures long term frequency stability.
Horizontal and subcarrier phasing control settings are stored in nonvolatile RAM for digital control of genlock timing. In addition, a separate set of timing controls is provided for sync outputs to simplify system timing. A front panel lockout feature prevents inadvertent changes to the front pane. system timing controls.
The TSG-170A has eight sync generator outputs; four fixed and foJr programmable. Option 1adds a separate SMPTE bar output for routine studio needs, such as tape 'eaders, freeing the front panel selected test signals for engineering and mainterance.
An ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters may be inserted ir the SMPTE bar output. This front panel programmable ID is ideal for identifying satellite feeds, and videotapes.
Option 1also provides a400 Hz audio tone output, useful for
TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR
Lumeance AmMnu. Accu(0c
.. t`.1's
g3worsnanutto Cur... Cur.
t1%
Osapn ITPs..·
75 am
%rum Loss
380BN42 MN7
TEST SIGNALS COLOR BARS
CONVERGENCE PULSE 8BAR NM MOON
2T Pume MAD WIMe Bat Arreftwe, Feld TM
NAPTE Boos NM 10 5us Nrromr7 14 moo pm,Two, 17 Mu pp rp,orsa
250m . 25 no 100 05% 05%
larLteIBLIIST
Bar Amortudo Preker Arrome Bum Trecorences BST( PSTAIRCASE LUMINANCE RAMP
rT4-013ULATED RAMP CANenmoce ARM.* ET(:Sern
AK AC BOUNCE
Bows. ROT FLATFIELOB ITED FIELD
Lummox. MOM» MULTIELAIU
NTC7 composn
LINE SWEEP MULTIPULSE
Metue FrogrAncos $YSTEM TEST MATRIX MONITOR SETUP Mel«
DAC TEST OPTION 01
COLOR BARS IDENTIFICATION AUDIO TONE
428 8TM DO IRE) 421313 roV NO IRE) pp 05. 10.20. 30. 3513zrol4 2 714 3 ,V IRA RS) 0to 714 3Mi ( 1CO IRS)
2857 Mr (40 IRE) 0WIr 03. 10% on0 PO%
1morrol MP , »Tr.' I.. ORS ROSS
202 2Mr (28 3IRE) Cole Mrs orx1 mulotwoi WIRE. Orpop =du.d awn. an3 pubs & Mr 714 3t. PD Um, ramp Km 500 NU % 53PG
714 30M 05. 112 20. 30. 354(mx14211117 NulliTas ors2 NTC7 Ccrworgonce. MOB.commosnce cow Mrs rem. two ancl commons 5110 he* «Id 3Se MN
SMPTE Mrs 12 crwoclors. 7x9rmes 4E0 H*. 0NB Mtn etalabe
checking program line continuity and adjusting audio levels. The tone can be adjusted over a0to +8dBm range into 150 or 600 ohms.
Remote operation of test signal selection and timing functions is available by simple ground closure control through arear panel connector.
TSG-170A NTSC Television Generator. $4800.00
TSG-170A Option 1 Adds a separate SMPTE Bars output with 12 character ID and audio tone output. $ 1000.00
SYNC GENERATOR
SUBCARRIER STABILITY BLACK BURST OUTPUT
Eltansng PULSE OUTPUTS (GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS)
Arnp1aude snpe.nce
elfi.rn Loss R. Tone PULSE OUTPUTS (SIGNALS) COMPOSITE SYNC el- ASKING
tiormeTal BRAN% OwsNo Ven.1 Blanks% Our84011 BURS , FLAG krOFUZONTAL CRIVE VERTICAL DRIVE C01011 FRAME PU1 SE -- TIU-6CAFIRIER OUTPUT Arnp14.14
35711345 MIN o114: omr TernperMons 75 RE Um Pen I06m
40 * 111V 75 arm
de.4 2mm
rem o2Ono
1137,4 03 rm. wpm Mambo IV? TO 2ss or 10 N 20 Irom p5,8. MANI» IN 19 or 201mo
291.4/ t0Pi
GENLOCK
GENLOCK SOURCE (COMP 910E0)
Inrm Conewurmon %urn Loos Burol Aropbrub SynC ArnollM OENLOCK PERFORMANCE Norpontri Trnow Rome %Mod Isom Romp
Bum Lock Now JR
75 Pm POTNIsmole AI Ima 40 WI 1142 MIN 288mV 310 - TITIB 288oN · 310 - 603
10 AsturNance. 5ps OWN 0. tor 2Ms odromo or 1Me (WM Jumpy 4.Clable 1579545 MIN * 20111 05.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
OWE/MONS Rier/tOull Neght WM)
LPN*, POWER TEMPERATURE
1734 Ram 14 44114.1 190 rem (48 3rrm)
221 runsre(56 1mo)
904E2 VAC or 180.250 VAC. CO VI may
Opsraing
40.C. Stomp - 40* b · 85·C
Prices end Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 183
TELEMET
DIVISION OF GEOTEL, INC.
185 Dixon Avenue Amityville, L.I., New York 11701 (516) 842-2300 TVVX 510-227-9850
VIDEO BROADCAST TEST EQUIPMENT
MODEL 3705 Envelope Delay Measurement Set
Envelope Delay Measurement Set Model 3705 measures envelope delay over awide frequency range. It is expressly designed for mea-
suring the envelope delay incurred in equipment used in the transmission and reception of color television signals.
The Model 3705 uses the split- frequency method proposed by Nyquist and Brand: a relatively low frequency, 20 kHz, called a split-frequency amplitude- modulates a video or RF test frequency and the modulated test signal is applied to the equipment " under test". The split- frequency, is demodulated from the output of the equipment " under test" and compared in phase with the splitfrequency before modulation.
3705-A1
Envelope Delay Test Set w/ Internal Sweep Generator
$7650.00
MODEL 3706-A1 Sideband Analyzer
Sideband Analyzer 3706 by direct display permits thorough examina-
tion of the entire sideband response of television transmitters and
sideband filters. It can also be used for the examination, evaluation, and adjustments of video circuits. Spurious emissions, low level sidebands, and frequency deviations are accurately pin pointed with
the use of 7 crystal markers whose frequencies are of the most interest in a television transmitter's VSB passband. Discrete fre-
quency marking is augmented by a 1 MHz crystal comb frequency marker which provides markers at 1MHz intervals across the swept band on display.
3706-A1
TV Transmitter Sideband Analyzer, includes VHF channel element
(3708- Al
47500.00
MODEL 6910 Audio DA System
Audio DA System Model 6910 is designed for distribution of audio signals in AM, FM and TV systems. The performance characteristics of the 6910 are in keeping with the high standards of modern audio equipment
Flexibility as to impedances, and expandibility as to the number of single and dual channels available should fill all input and distribution requirements.
6910-A1 6001-A1 6101-A1 6201-A2
4145-A1 7300-B1
Audio D.A. System consisting of:
Frame
8 525.00
Power Supply
525.00
Audio Distribution Amplifier w/terminal board assembly 475.00
Extender
75.00
Audio Monitor
1085.00
VT- 184
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TELEMET
DIVISION OF GEOTEL, INC.
185 Dixon Avenue Amityville, L.I., New York 11701 (516) 842-2300 TVVX 510-227-9850
MODEL 4706-A1 NTSC CHROMA KEYER DECODER
Using unique new proprietary circuitry, Telemet's NTSC Chroma Keyer Decoder Model 4706 is designed to put your station's existing RGB Chroma Keyer inline, providing zero horizontal delay NTSC Chroma Keying. Also, acomb filter is incorporated in the unit that eliminates chroma crawl.
Another important feature is that the unit can use different encoded video sources. This includes standard and triaxial color TV cameras, video tapes, remotes or any other composite NTSC signal, without restriction to aparticular one.
4706-A1
$3,000.00
MODEL 7932 12 x3AV ROUTING SWITCHER
Audio/Video Routing Switcher 7932 is amodular system that uses 4 in 1out video cards, and 4in 1out audio cards. The audio and video output amplifiers are also separate plug-in cards; therefore, asystem can be expanded from 4x1to 4x2, 8x1, 8x3etc., to amaximum of
12 x3in one chassis. For economy, two other chassis are available wired 12 x 1and 12 x2which can be used when it is known that expansion will not be needed.
7932-B1 A/V Routing Switcher w/audio follow and V.I. trigger (remote control version)
12 x1 12 x2
$2,300.00 3700.00
12 x3
5050.00
Note: Above prices include Switchcraft pushbutton panels with 50'
cables.
7932-B2 A/V Routing Switcher w/audio follow and V.I. trigger ( self contained version)
12 x1 12 x2
$2,240.00 3,570.00
12 x3
4,830.00
Note: Above prices include Switchcraft pushbuttons on front panel.
VIDEO BROADCAST TEST EQUIPMENT
MODEL 4706-A1
· MODEL 7932
r · :
«lb
MODEL 7934 AV ROUTING SWITCHER
KEY FEATURES
·Remote Controlled
·Crosspoints and Latching CMOS I.Cs. provide Energy Efficient Design
·Unlimited Control Versatility and Computer Interface with Programmable Switching
·Less than 0.1s Switching Time, 50mV max instantaneous video change
·V.I. Switching
·Stereo Audio Switching plus Auxiliary. ( Can be used for Tally) ·Breakaway Audio available ·Hi level Tally available ·20 x10 standard, 400 x400 possible ·Input Sync Adders optional ·Video DC Restorers optional ·Accurate Color Timing ·Complete accessibility through modular construction ·All boards removable/insertable with power on
NTSC, PAL and SECAM
POR
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 185
1 r emtron (850106154959-2-6340000 Electronics Ltd. 1E.5RMoaciknawSatrye,etNY 11518 Telex 125237
MODEL WU -05 Onyx Distribution Amplifier
This Onyx CCTV Distribution Amplifier allows you to isolate one video input signal into four individual video output signals. The user may install four monitors in four different places. It is lightweight and will
give you dependable, long-term operation.
FEATURES ·Compact, solid state, reliability ·Receives an input signal, isolates and increases it, then provides four
independent video outputs
·Four video outputs is four equal 75-ohm loads, by its four indivi-
dual video amplifier circuit ·Convenient, desk top, easy installation
Connection All ONYX DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS use five BNC Connectors.
Connections and cable should be given a continuity test to insure proper installation. An WU -05 Distribution Amplifier accessory model is recommended for distance within 1000' 1300M.).
SPECIFICATIONS
Video Input:
1Vp-p to 2Vp-p, 75-ohm, 1Input
Video Outputs:
1Vp-p to 2Vp-p, 75-ohm, 4Outputs
Video Gain:
Unity
Frequency Response: 2.5Hz to 15MHz to ± 0.3dB
Bandwidth I-3dB) Input Voltage:
1Hz to 15M Hz 110V 50/60Hz 1220V optional)
Power Consumption: 5Watts
Video Connectors:
BNC
Construction: Size:
Steel, Silver Gray Baked enamel 6" x1.875" x8.25"
(1521W) x48IH Ix2101DImm I
Weight:
2.75 lbs.(1.25kg)
1-4
5 +
Model WU -05
$75.00 $72.00
VIDEO AMPLIFIERS
WU-05
4+:1-
VS
Vodeo estr.butor
MODEL WU -07
Onyx Video Amplifier
This Onyx CCTV Video Amplifier is especially for the long cable run compensation. For example: when your video camera is installed from adistance of 3000' ( 1000M), you will need to use the WU -07 Video Amplifier.
FEATURES ·Compact and lightweight ·Convenient, easy installation, desk top ·Use in those applications where long coaxial cable runs are required ·Restores the high-frequency components of the video signal that are
lost in long cable runs ·Produce crisp, clear and constant images despite relatively long
distance ·An adjustable voltage gain of 13dB and fully regulated power will
supply the user with stable continuous operation
Connection All ONYX VIDEO AMPLIFIERS use a BNC Connector. Connections and cable should be given acontinuity test to insure proper installation. The table shown provides maximum operating distance for Video Cable. An WU -07 line amplifier accessory model is recommended for distance over 1000' ( 300M.).
Cable Requirements
Max
Video
Distance
(Feet) ( No Amp)
1000' 2000' 3000' 5000' 65C0' 8600'
RG-59U RG-11U
Amplified Video (WU -07)
RG-59U RG-59U RG-59U RG-11U RG-11U RG-15U
Max Distance ( Meters)
300M 600M 900M 1500M 2000M 2800M
WU- 07
SPECIFICATIONS Input Voltage:
110V 50/ 60Hz ( 220V optional)
Power Consumption:
6Watts
Power:
On- Off Switch
Gain/High Frequency
Gain:
Knob Adjustable
Video Connectors: Input Level:
BNC 0.4 to 2.0Vp-p
Input Impedance:
75 ohms
Maximum Video Gain:
13 dB
Maximum High Frequency
Gain:
18 dB
Output Impedance:
75 ohms
Construction:
Steel, Silver Gray baked enamel
Size:
6" x1.875" x9.25"
1521 W) x48IH Ix210( D)mm)
Weight:
2.63 lbs. ( 1.2kgs.)
1-4
5 +
Model WU -07
$75.00 $72.00
VT-186
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change `Arrthout Notice.
"Thomson-CSF · Broadcast, Inc.
37 Brownhouse Road Stamford, CT 06902 (203) 327-7700
VIDEO PRODUCTS
g" --- ----·e-- 4I0 3 8010N
Q· 0· 0·
·
7011
- - - - --
NTSC CHROMA INSERT KEYER
7011
The Model 7011 Chroma Insert Keyer was especially designed for existing color installations. This unit contains its own insert keyer, thus eliminating the need for an externa keyer. Installation is direct, and minimal system re-timing is necessary since through delay is less than 25 nanoseconds.
With the Model 7011, noise and " color crawl" are minimized from horizontal transitions. To reduce annoying crawl from the key signal, aunique comb filter is used to separate luminance and chrominance spectrums.
Since bandwidth of the Model 7011 key signal is the bandwidth of the color difference signals, the key is quieter than a full bandwidth key typical of RGB keyers.
5500B 5550
MARK IV
IMAGE ENHANCER
Models 8010N, 8310, and 8410E
Thomson-CSF Broadcast Mark IV Image Enhancer provides truly effective enhancing of the vertical and horizontal detail of atelevision
video signal to produce increased picture sharpness. The Mark IV line
of image enhancers ( models 8010N, 8310, and 8410E) provides operational compatibility with all types of monochrome and color television cameras.
APPLICATIONS ·Now the broadcaster can send asignal over anetwork with a " blue
flat" background, and a local scene can be inserted in each city that receives the network signal. ·A program can be recorded on video tape, and played back for post- production editing and chroma keying. ·A single- cable color TV camera can be used to send a composite NTSC signal, with chroma keying done external to the camera control unit.
· Portable " minicameras" can be used to generate a composite NTSC signal, with keying done on a received signal.
· In new studio design, keying can now be done at the output of the composite program switcher.
· No separate RGB switcher is required for chroma keying. · Furnished with remote control panel.
7011
$ 3325.00
By comparing each picture element with its adjacent horizontal and vertical elements within a picture field, a detail signal is generated.
The detail signal is then combined with the main video signal to enhance the sharpness of the picture element being analyzed.
COLOR CORRECTION SYSTEM
Using the new combed H and crispening technique, the Mark IV Image Enhancer provides video enhancement without degrading color signal quality by effectively separating chrominance from the detail signal. Combing the detail signal improves the signal-to-noise
ratio, allowing more enhancement to be used.
In the automatic mode, the model 8010N Image Enhancer automatically maintains picture sharpness and resolution without double enhancement if a previously enhanced program passes through the
unit.
The delay lines are positioned in temperature controlled ovens to insure highest stability and lowest drift. Thus, the unit operates within the temperature range of 0to 50°C without any readjustments required. The Mark IV Image Enhancer is available for NTSC, PAL, and PAL- M applications.
FEATURES
·With Improved Signal-To- Noise Ratio
· Enhances Network Feeds, Local Origination Programming
·Automatic Sensing Prevents Over- Enhancement
·With Combed H and Crispening
·Available in NTSC, PAL, and PAL- M
8010N
$4900.00
8310
4900.00
8410E
4900.00
NTSC Color Corrector, Model 5500B Sensor, Model 5550, Remote Control, Model 5555
The Color Correction System was designed specifically for use in film chains. Typically, films may exhibit color deficiencies due to exposure and/or developing errors. Color mismatch is another problem which often occurs when sections of different films have been spliced together. Scenes shot from different cameras under different lighting conditions or a string of back-to-back film commercials can all contribute to color imbalance problems.
And now with the advent of ENG, color imbalance and colorimetry pose additional problems. Matching remote camera shots to indoor studio programs or assembling tapes from different locations is " chancy" at best. With the 5500B Color Corrector you will be able to rebalance and match video signals after encoding, either after the play-back tape machine or following the microwave receiver during live coverage.
Thomson-CSF Color Correction System compensates for all of these color balance deficiencies. Available in NTSC and PAL.
5500B 5550
5555
$4400.00 3595.00
925.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 187
TROMPETER
8936 Comanche Avenue (818) 882-1020
/E INC.
ELECTRONICS
Chatsworth, CA 91311 Telex/TVVX: 910-494-1210
Standard Coax Patching Systems
Patch Panel
Patch Cord
Jacks
Cable Connectors (Not Shown)
' Fixed Parallel Network
(Not Shown)
Jacks: Single/Dual
2 TO
tI. -FIG. 7
PATCH JACK V (Cable entry)
J3CN · J3WE.N ·
070 pin ( RCA) 090 por WE)
Usable whenever cable entry is desired in place of standard connectors
237
PATCH JACK (BNC)
J3 J3W
070 pin ( RCA) 090 pin ( WE)
FIG. 8
Rear mates with Trompeter P120- N series or any standard BNC plug
286
,
FIG. 9
PATCH JACK ( BNC) J1341 · ·
070 pin ( RCA)
(Soletorrn)noling)
J13W.R
090 pin ( WE)
Rear mates with any BNC plug Circuit is terminated when
patch plug is removed Signal degradation increases when
used above 100 MHT
See Fig. 17
289"
Looping Plug
FIG. 1
Introduction:
Trompeter Electronic's standard coax patching systems, shown on this page, provide limitless flexibility to route signals from one place to another. Two basic versions of Standard Coax patching are available. The RCA 50 ohm with a pin size of . 070" and the Western Electric (WE) 75 ohm type with a pin size of . 090". Signal degradation occurs above 100 mhz. The two series are not interchangeable but can be intermixed on the same panel along with TEI's audio pa ch jacks and panel lites ( not shown)
PAR RCA
NO WESTERN ELECTRIC
J3E-N
J3WE-N
FUNCTION Patch Jack, Single
J3
J3W
Patch Jack. Single
J30
J3WD
Patch Jack, Single
JIM' · J13C-R"
J13WR
_ J13WC-R
Patch Jack SingleSell Terminating
Patch Jack. SingleSell Terminating
J14
J14W
Series _ Series
Patch Jack. DualSell Looping
JIS Series
J15W Series
Patch Jack Dual -
Prevared Parallel or No Wiring
*· Subslit te Resistance tor R I W 5 - 1
REAR ENTRY Cable' BNC Standard INC Available Solder Pot
BNC Standard TNC Available
Case Crimped
Dual BNC Standard INC Available
SriCnalbele BNC. TNC 0
PIS. CIRCUIT
FIE.
FIG.
7
-
8 -
Not
-
Shown
9
17
Not
17
Shown
TO 12 Ihru th
11
-
62" PATCH JACK (Normal Thiel
-'
I25 -
i FIG. 10
re J14 Series
For available circuit on
Sae Fog 12 that 16
3 46'
i\ 112,_
-j-- -L
STANDARD
FIG. 12
Plugs & Cable Assemblies
PATCH PLUGS ( Crimp)
PL1C N ·
070 pin (RCA) A · 280"
PLIWCN ·
090 pin (WE) A = 252"
13 · t57' FIG. 2
B = 129"
ADAPTER PLUG lEINC)
AD1 ADIW
070 pin ( RCA) 090 pin ME)
A
A · 277' (Shown) A=283'
FIG. 3
LOOPING PLUG
C = 625 LI·2 LPW.Z
C = 100 LPL.Z LPLW·2
070 pin ( RCA) A = 376' 090 pin (WE) A = 350"
FIG. 4
B = 155"
B - 125'
PATCH CORD
PC4..2
(50. 75. 93 ohm)
PCW.L.Z ( 50. 75. 93 ohm)
070 pin (RCA) 090 pin (WE)
L
FIG. 5
CABLE ASSEMBLY
PCX.L.Z ( 50. 75. 93 ohm)
PCWX.L.2
(50. 75. 93 ohm)
Designate 75 ohm BNC by Pre'. U
070 pin RCA) 000 pen ! WEI
FIG. 6
Cable Assemblies Ordering Information:
Assembly Model
T PC - L - Z
Standard Length in Inches
(6. 12, 18, 24 or 361
Impedance (Ohms)
(50 75 93)
SPOT SWITCH 1251f SA
REAR ENTRY (TYPICAL)
STANDARD WEXTERNAL SPOT SWITCH
FRONT PANEL ENTRY (TYPICAL)
PATCH JACK ( Dwell - Wire!
J1513 ( BNCI JISWEI ( BNC)
JISH ( TNC) J1Svoi ) TNC)
PATCH JACK ( Dual) - No Wiring
JISBA ( BNC) JISWBA ) BNC)
JISHA (TNC) JISWHA (TNC)
070 pin ( FICA1 090 pin ( WE)
070 pin (14Cii) 090 pin (WE)
FIG. 11
REAR ENTRY CABLE
070 pin (RCA) 090 pin ONE)
Patch Panels
19" Typical
FIG. 18
,, 62
FIG. 19
VT- 188
PANEL NO . HEIGHT ROWS
FIG '
PANEL DESIGNATION AND NO. OF SINGLE JACKS ACCOMMODATED
13/4" 41 1
18
12
14
16
20 24S 26
28
2 19
32S
40S 48S 52S
31/2 " 2 20
24L
28A 32A 36A 40 48 52 56
·ieWill not accept J14 or J15 Dual Jack.
Full Line Catalog and Pricing Available on Request
JIAILL113W R * * JI3C.PARAIIRLYCYAR··
31
'
FIG. 20
Ordering Information:
Panel Type (JS = Aluminum) (JSI = Insulated)
No. of Jack Holes
1_I JSI - 12 / J3W
Jack Type
To Order Panels Only, Leave "Jack Type" Blank.
The TROMPETERNAECWO(NNECTION
EATURES
1Shield conductor, captive " hardened
Beryllium copper" spring
2Metal to metal contact provides
positive shield integrity
3Positive jacket crimp locks exceed' MIL C39012 Cat A ( Wrench Crimp)
& Cat D ( Tool Crimp)
4Wrench Crimp -- Floating no-twist bushing
4Tool Crimp -- Teflon insulators
(featured exclusively in all TEl con-
nectors)
MINIATURE COAX SERIES CONSTRUCTION
WRENCH CRIMP**
=14=2 -*el>
FIELD SERVICEABLE
TOOL CRIMP
IN- LINE CABLE PLUGS
IN- LINE CABLE JACKS
BNC 2- LUG BAYONET
----<
I :.7-
--
Construct. 50 Ohm
WRENCH CRIMP PL20-N*
TOOL CRIMP
PL220-N*
WRENCH CRIMP CJ20-N *
TOOL CRIMP
CJ220-N·
75 Ohm
UPL20-N·
UPL220-N·
UCJ20-N · NOT AVAILABLE
TNC THREADED
Construct. 50 Ohm
-,k*
WRENCH
CRIMP PL40-N*
_
.%-:
TOOL CRIMP
P1240- N*
=elmf illi
WRENCH CRIMP CJ40-N*
TOOL CRIMP
CJ240-N·
INSULATED BULKHEAD
CABLE JACKS
I.
! ili· a%
Ili ii
4---
WRENCH CRIMP 8J26- N·
TOOL CRIMP
8J226- N*
UBJ26-N*
NOT AVAILABLE
ienjlhe - .
.
--.4...--
.11-. '--
WRENCH CRIMP BJ46-N·
TOOL CRIMP
CONTACT FACTORY
INSULATED
re
.......--
BJ28
UBJ28
--
BFEUELDKTHHERAUD ebl
I ¡ Ili. --
JACKS
L41.
-
*SPECIFY CABL NO 8, MANUFACTURER JACKET DIA MAX 33 " 18 42mm) CONDUCTOR DIA MAX osrIl 4smin)
TPS & TCM SUBMINIATURE. FMINIATURE & C&NSTANDARD COAX CONNECTOR SERIES ALSO FEATURE 3PIECE WRENCH CRIMP CONSTRUCTION
BJ48
75 Ohm UPL40-N·
UPL240-N·
UCJ40-N· NOT AVAILABLE
UBJ46-N· NOT AVAILABLE
UBJ48
COAX DATA SWITCHES:
Designed for use up to 15 MHZ. Circuits are isolated from
ground with shield & center conductor switched. Switched out ports are terminated in a resistive load.
DATA DISTRIBUTION PANELS:
TEl manufactures signal distribution panels that accommodate from 12 to 52 Bulkhead Cable or Feedthru Jacks illustrated above. All panels are 19" standard rack size in insulated and noninsulated versions. Panels accommodating 24, 32, 40 or 52 lines are double row ( as illustrated) and 3Y2" high. Light gray is the standard color though other colors are available on special order.
INC/INC
SINGLE LINE INC OR TNC
WALL MOUNT PLATE:
Available with
up to 5 BNc or TNC
connectors.
(9)
A TROMPETER ELECTRONICS, INC
8936 COMANCHE AVENUE, CHATSwORTH, CAUF., 91311 · (818) 882-1020 · TVVX: 910-494-1210
A complete line of concentric TWINAX/TRIAX connectors in MINIATURE, SUBMINIATURE and STANDARD sizes, for military or commercial Data Bus applications. are also available. For thus and more, send for OW
FREE T14A catalog.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-189
scienTIFIC,Inc.
1685 West 2200 South Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 973-6840 ( 800) 453-8782 TVVX 910-925-4037
CSP-100-E GROUP/UNIT SELECTION CONTROL Et STATUS PANEL
·Source selection by familiar name ·A/V breakaway · LED statusing · Loop-thru coax control connection The CSP-100-E is Utah Scientific's most popular panel. It permits addressing sources by their familiar group name and unit number and provides audio and video breakaway.
ROUTING SWITCHERS
CSP-100-E
CSP-10 TEN OR TWENTY- BUS CONTROL AND STATUS PANEL
·Simultaneous statusing of ten buses · Lower cost per bus ·Optional twenty- bus control at no extra cost · Loop-thru coax control connection
The CSP-10 controls either ten or twenty buses. It provides continuous statusing of ten buses and audio/video breakaway.
CSP-10
CSP-1610 TEN- BUS ALPHANUMERIC CONTROL Et STATUS PANEL
·Alphanumeric displays · 1600 Name/Number combinations ·A/V-split switching ·Optional twenty- bus programming · Loop-thru coax control connection
The CSP-1610 alphanumeric ten/twenty-bus controller provides 12 four- character alphanumeric read-outs to permit addressing and statusing sources by their familiar names. Sixteen Name keys with either one or two keystroke Unit identification provides atotal of 1600 Name/Number combinations. Separate audio and video preset displays permit both breakaway and A/V-split switching.
BIM NI Mil III III 1111 III à Mee Canea atZ
·
0130000000 ° o·
000000
Ci
CSP-1610
CSP-1601 SINGLE- BUS ALPHANUMERIC CONTROL Et STATUS PANEL
·Alphanumeric display · Familiar name data entry Er statusing ·Minimal keystrokes- 1, 2, or 3-- data entry · Loop-thru coax control connection
Separate name and unit keyboards permit either one, two or three keystroke data entry addressing each source by its familiar name. Single four- character alphanumeric readout doubles as preset and status display. 1600 name/number combinations available.
CSP-1601
VT- 190
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
17. 7_.S7LJTFII-1
1685 West 2200 South Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 973-6840 ( 800) 453-8782 TVVX 910-925-4037
mTTrnmTL 1111111
rriii 1-
1111111 I
AVS-1
AVS -1SERIES ROUTING SWITCHERS
FEATURES · Coax Party Line Control with Industry's Widest Choice of Panels · Refresh Memory with 24- Hour Memory- Save ·Optional Dual Control Cards for " Hot Standby" Redundancy · Standard BNC Video and Control Connectors · Single Motherboard for Fully Operational Servicing with Simple
Extender Card ·Compact -- 20 x20 Audio and Video in 10- 1/2- inch Panel Space
ROUTING SWITCHERS
Utah Scientific routing switchers are available in two series-- Model AVS-1 featuring coax party line controls and 12 matrix configurations in standard sizes up to 150 x 160, and Model CAV-7 Compact Series with inexpensive models up to 50 x 10 or 20 x 20 in size. The AVS-1 system is available in twelve different packaging configurations and is designed to provide the ultimate in reliability. Neither input fan- out amps nor secondary combining matrices are required, and 100% " hot standby" backup of control cards and power supplies is available. Reduncant cooling fans, redundant party lines, and minimal failure mode design further reduce the likelihood and consequence of failure to a bare minimum. In addition to video and single or multiple audio levels, Utah Scientific offers Metallic Contact, Tally and Regenerative Time Code switching matrices. The Metallic Contact matrix ( model RR- 384) provides dual circuit, bi-directional switching of control signals or data. It is primarily used in conjunction with machine control systems and for switching serial data such as the CMX' signal. The Tally matrix ( model CT- 384) features a variety of strapping options accepting various control signais originating at video or audio destinations to control tally lights for other devices associated with video and/or audio sources. Time Code matrices provide full regeneration of time code signals to permit multi- generation time code dubbing without degradation. Two models are available, one with fixed 254 sec rise time and the other with frequency- dependent rise time providing readable code in faster shuttle modes. Thirty different party line control panels are available to suit varying user requirements in the contro. of AVS-1 matrices. They feature simple loop- through coax control connection and provide true matrix status* based on continuous refreshment from the system memory.
*Except CPD/PL Following are descriptions of some of these panels.
'e nrnmannnomnocrinnrr nnmorinrnmimornrr
CSP-20/CX-20
CSP -20/CX -20 BUTTON -PER -SOURCE PANELS
FEATURES ·True A Er V Statusing · Expandable · Single Keystroke Selection · Loop-Thru Coax Control Connection The CSP-20 provides button- per- source switching with all source names professionally lettered in the write-in strip. Also provided are audio and video breakaway buttons. CSP-20 is shown with CX-20 twenty- button expander panel.
CPD/PL
CPD/PL DESKTOP PARTY LINE CONTROL PANEL
FEATURES · Battery Powered · Pull- Out Directory · Single Coax Connection The CPD/PL is a battery operated desktop controller for executive offices, meeting rooms, etc.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 191
g ri .../UTF11-1 scienTIFIC,If7C.
1685 West 2200 South
Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 973-6840 ( 800) 453-8782 TWX 910-925-4037
PLMC-1
PARTY LINE MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM
FEATURES ·Economical-- utilizes " virtual" matrix established via
party line
· Free standing or integrated with AVS-1 routing switcher · " Hot Standby" control Et memory backup available ·Alphanumeric assignment statusing ·Gang Roll/Record/Stop capability · Machine delegation capability ·Wide variety of standard control and interface panels
system
The PLMC-1 system has been designed to provide an economical, yet flexible means of controlling various machines such as VTRs, telecine projectors! multiplexers, character generators, satellite
receivers, etc. It utilizes serial data transmitted over coax party lines.
The data words and system protocol are compatible with the Utah Scientific AVS-1 switching system permitting the machine control system to be integrated with Utah Scientific routing switchers by merely connecting the control panels and machine interface panels to the existing party lines.
Previously available machine control systems have been hardwired, with individual panels dedicated to individual machines, or have required multiconductor interconnection or metallic contact switch-
ing matrices to permit machine/panel assignments. In the PLMC-1 system a " virtual matrix" is established over the system's party line thereby eliminating the need for a separate machine control switching matrix.
A PLMC-1 machine control system is composed of four basic elements: acontrol and memory card to generate polling and refresh-
ment words on four redundant party lines; control panels for assignment of machines to machine control panels; machine interface panels to provide two-way serial- to- parallel interface between
the party lines and machines; and machine control and status panels
to generate machine commands and read back the machine's identity and status.
MACHINE CONTROL SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
mill» MN Imo mil all · III 11111111111111111111111111111111111·111111111111M BRIM MISaIM Bali Mill
MCSP-5 CONTROL Et STATUS PANEL
r
111.
1111111121111111111111
MCSIP-1D COMBINATION CONTROL AND INTERFACE PANEL
MIP-4 MACHINE INTERFACE PANEL
The control and memory function is provided by one or two standard PL- 150 circuit cards either as part of a switching system or freestanding. Machine assignment can be accomplished with any of a wide variety of standard AVS-1 system control panels or with custom designed panels. Machine control, interface and delegation is provided by avariety of panels each of which is described herein.
ADA-8 WITH RGM-1
REMOTE GAIN/MIX OPTION
ADA-8 AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
FEATURES · 1-in/8-out or dual 1-in/4-out · - 6dB to + 30 dB gain ·Outputs short-circuit protected · Front panel test points and level controls · Redundant power supplies available ·On- card regulators for failure isolation · . 05% / ± . 05 dB distortion and flatness ·Optional remotely- controlled gain or mix ·Input over- voltage protection
·Can be intermixed with other devices in RF-50 frame
VDA-8 WITH EQUALIZATION
AND CLAMP OPTIONS
VDA-8 VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
FEATURES ·8 outputs per DA, 80 per rack frame ·Optional feedback clamp and cable equalization ·Adjustable path length ·0.1%/0.1° diff. gain Et phase · Differential input · Extremely stable ·On- card regulators for failure isolation · Redundant power supplies available · Front panel test points and user adjustments
VT- 192
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VAT:
VIDEO AIDS OF COLORADO
2450 Central Avenue Boulder, CO 80301 (303) 443-4950 ( 800) 821-0426
Fe
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
FAULT INDICATORS
MODEL VS-2PC VIDEO SQUELCH The Video Squelch is an automatic two input, one output video switch. The output is determined by monitoring the main input signal. If the main input signal quality degrades below the user predefined setting on the front panel dial, the output is immediately switched to the alternate input signal and a clearly audible alarm is sounded.
VS-2PC
Video Squelch ( Insulated RCA's for Audio)
Feature SFS Squelch Feature Stereo Audio
Feature SFT Squelch Feature Audio Terminated
Feature SFC Squelch Feature XLR Connectors ( 3or 4pin)
Feature SFR Squelch Feature Remote Control
(Any or all features may be added to the VS-2PC)
$1000.00 200.00 100.00 50.00 200.00
SWITCHES AND ALARMS
MODEL VPS-1PC VIDEO ACTIVATED POWER SWITCH When this failsafe unit senses avideo signal, it provides AC power to any device plugged into it. It is useful in remote applications, inaccessible units or any device the
user chooses. A kit is available for installation in existing equipment.
VPS-1PC
$ 165.00
MODEL APS-1PC AUDIO ACTIVATED POWER SWITCH When this failsafe unit senses an audio signal, it provides AC power to any device plugged into it. It is useful in remote applications, inaccessible units or any device the user chooses. A kit is available for installation in existing equipment.
APS-1PC
$ 165.00
MODEL AA-1PC AUDIO ALARM Tnis failsafe unit is an automatic monitor of your audio signal. A clearly audible alarm will sound upon any loss of audio for 12 seconds. A kit is available for installation in existing equipment.
AA-1PC
$ 165.00
MODEL VA-1PC VIDEO ALARM This failsafe unit is an automatic monitor of your Video signal. A clearly audible alarm will sound upon any loss of video for 1second. A kit is available for installation in
existing equipment.
VA-1PC
$ 165.00
MODEL RFPS-1PC RF POWER SWITCH
When this failsafe unit senses apreselected TV channel or RF signal it provides AC power to any device plugged into it. A one antenna source may be used to initiate
remote units, inaccessible devices, user defined devices or the selective dissemination of information. A kit is available for installation in existing equipment.
RFPS-1PC
$255.00
MODEL RFA-1PC RF ALARM This failsafe unit is an automatic monitor of your preselected TV channel or RF signal. A clearly audible alarm will sound upon loss of this signal for 1second. A kit is available for installation in existing equipment.
RFA-1PC
$255.00
PARAMETER MEASURING DEVICES
MODEL BPM-1PC BURST PHASE METER The Burst Phase Meter will save you time, give you abetter picture and improve your quality because of the 1/2 degree of accuracy in color burst phase measurements,
and 50 nanoseconds accuracy in the H- Phase mode. The Burst Phase Meter is particularly useful in vans and remote situations since it is more cost effective, space efficient and accurate than avectorscope for these measurements.
BPM-1PC
Opt 02 Switchable H and Burst Opt 03 with Dual Meters
$ 765.00
941.00 1089.00
MODEL CPG-WC CROSS PULSE GENERATOR This unit is avaluable visual tool for diagnosing video problems in cameras, monitors and checking errors when making duplicate tapes. The Cross Pulse Generator will also show you any skew errors on your helical tape equipment.
CPG-1PC Opt 01 External Sync
$358.00 391.00
MODEL 4000 MULTI PHASE AND VIRS INSERTER This unit adds, passes or deletes the Vertical Interval Reference Signal ( VIRS) and monitors burst and H- Phase for accurate control of the color parameters. The meters in this unit allow easier and more accurate quality control than avectorscope.
4000
$ 1850.00
FAULT INDICATORS SWITCHES AND ALARMS
r.,sailiTilimaN
1: mei ° ° ins à
PARAMETER MEASURING DEVICES
DISTRIBUTION UNITS
DISTRIBUTION UNITS
DISTRIBUTION UNITS
MODEL ADA-2PC AUDIO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER This is a 1in, 6out device for distributing audio to anumber of devices simultaneously.
ADA-2PC
$ 275.00
MODEL VDA-2PC VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER This is a1in, 6out device for distributing video to anumber of devices simultaneously.
VDA-2PC
$275.00
MODEL PDA-2PC PULSE DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER This is a1in, 6out device for distributing video pulses to anumber of devices simultaneously. The outputs are regenerated so that dirty video pulses are effectively cleaned
up.
PDA-2PC
$ 275.00
MODEL DA10-2PC DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY This is a5in, 30 out device for distribution of video and audio signals. The combina-
tions available are 5which may be ADA-2P's, VDA-2P's or PDA-2P's. A minimum of 4 DA units are required for each order
DA10-2PC per Audio DA per Video DA per Pulse DA
$250.00 250.00 250.00
MODEL VSDA10-2PC VIDEO STEREO DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER This is a1in, 6out video and a2in, 12 out transformer isolated stereo audio device for distributing stereo to anumber of units simultaneously. This 19" wide device comes with rack mounts and has asingle power cord.
VSDA10-2PC
$875.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 193
VIDEO AIDS OF COLORADO
2450 Central Avenue Boulder, CO 80301 (303) 443-4950 ( 800) 821-0426
ISOLATORS
MODEL Al TO MODEL 810 ELECTRO -OPTICAL ISOLATORS These units are kits for converting most Sony and other receivers and projection sets to quality video monitor/receivers. See the complete Video Aids catalog for specific details.
Basic Kit
$150.00
MODEL VL-1PC VIDEO LINE ISOLATOR
This unit is a solution for 60Hz ground loop noise and provides up to 1500 volts isolation between input and output video lines. This unit is useful in vans, aircraft, and cable installations.
VL-1PC VL-1APC
8270.00 335.00
KITS/BARE BOARDS
MODEL BBG-1 BLACK BURST GENERATOR KIT This kit is used to update old equipment with Black Burst output. It requires a5VDC at 12mA supply.
Basic Kit
BARE BOARDS
· VPS-1P
APS-1P RFPS-1P ADA-2P *VDA-1
4105.00 VDA-2P
105.00 PDA-2P 195.00 VA- 1P 200.00 AA- 1P 140.00 RFA -1P
·Requires a12 VDC at 70mA supply. · P Requires 117 VAC.
$110.00
$200.00 200.00 105.00 105.00 195.00
MONITORING/COMMUNICATIONS
MODEL PL- 1 PARTY LINE SYSTEM The Party Line System allows the users to communicate either individually or collectively at the same time. These systems are available for either carbon headsets in the
Standard station or dynamic headsets in the Deluxe station. The Deluxe model is designed for the Beyer DT 108 and DT 109 headset. One master unit will handle up to
ten intercom stations. This allows up to ten conversations to be handled simultaneously with individual volume control for each party. Hard wire reliability means excellent transmission quality is assured at all times. These units may be mounted on cameras or worn on a belt clip.
PLS - 1PC Master Unit with Power Supply
0140.00
Standard
PL- 1Intercom Station PL-1BC with Belt Clip
$72.00 75.00
Deluxe
DPL-1 Intercom Station DPL-1BC with Belt Clip
4125.00 128.00
MODEL PLC-1PC UNIVERSAL INTERCOM COUPLER This transformer coupled device allows the user to connect the VAC Party Line System to existing intercoms without interference. This enables the user to substantially expand his communication network.
PLC-1 PC
8239.00
UNIVERSAL DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
MODEL UDA UNIVERSAL DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
This unit is designed to be alow cost Universal- Utility Distribution Amplifier. It is a linear amplifier with response from DC to 6 MHz at -3 dB. In the Video mode, the response is related to asignal 2VPP. In Audio mode up to 30 kHz, the output swing
is + 4VPP. All outputs are 75 ohm output impedance. The input impedance can be selected by a switch on the face of the unit and either 75 ohm or 10K ohm is available with the switch.
UDA
$ 180.00
SYNC GENERATORS
MODEL 100-2PC COLOR SYNC GENERATOR This unit insures that all the user's cameras, monitors, VCRs, character generators,
editing and duplicating equipment are on exactly the same frequency. NTSC H- Drive, V- Drive, Blanking, Burst Flag, Subcarrier, Sync and Black Burst Signals
are provided. A three output video distribution amplifier is offered as an option. Height: 1-3/4".
100-2PC 1000A-2PC with VDA 13 output)
4885.00 845.00
MODEL 5000 COLOR SYNC GENERATOR This unit includes all the features of the VAC Model 100 Color Sync Generator with the added capability of GenLocking to a NTSC standard ( network) or a helical standard ( wide range GenLock). Subcarrier phase adjust is provided on the front panel. A video distribution amplifier option is offered.
5000 5000DA with VDA 13 output)
$1750.00 1910.00
All Video Aids Cabinets are Rack Mountable for an Additional $30.00 per unit.
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
ISOLATORS
KITS/BARE BOARDS
MONITORING/COMMUNICATIONS
uNIVEASAL DA
111
S·11111 LE
4A1M
ea °
Our
1
A
· 00%I1e-e0I.efl#09)0Ie· e01e010e
UNIVERSAL DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
SYNC GENERATORS
VT- 194
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VAC
VIDEO AIDS OF COLORADO
2450 Central Avenue Boulder, CO 80301 (303) 443-4950 ( 800) 821-0426
FAULT INDICATORS
SWITCHES AND ALARMS
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
.4 e
QC; ow l)w
PARAMETER MEASURING DEVICES
DISTRIBUTION UNITS
ISOLATORS
KITS/BARE BOARDS
MONITORING/COMMUNICATIONS
SYNC GENERATORS
Particular Problem
1. Multiple line intercommunica-
tions control, cameras, studio, floor, lights. Need to extend camera, crew, intercom, etc.
2. Tired of turning on everything by hand? Out of reach monitors? Remotes
3. Automatic turn on of other machines when audio is detected in the line.
4. Loss of audio in control rooms, remotes, studios, helicopters, satellite, transmitting VTR's.
5. Loss of video signal.
6. Need black burst, eliminate fuzzy transition.
7. Need additional video output and feeds.
8. Need additional audio outputs and feeds.
9. Update older video equipment, dirty pulse and/or cameras not in sync.
10. Monitoring stereo and/or audio amplifier. Editing, duplicating.
11. Convert Sony TV's to monitors/receivers.
12. Ground loop, distorted picture and/or noise interference.
PINPOINT THE PROBLEM AREA
Inexpensive Solutions
Particular Problem
1 Party Line ( intercom) System, Party Line Coupler
2. Video Activated Power Switch
3. Audio Activated Power Switch
4. Audio Alarm
5. Video Alarm 6. Black Burst Generator 7. Video Distribution Amplifier 8. Audio Distribution Amplifier 9. Pulse Distribution Amplifier
10. Stereo Headset Amplifier
13. Diagnosing video problems, i.e. cameras, monitors reference signals, errors on tape source, duplicating tapes or adjustment, skew errors.
14. Loss of video from cameras, remote vans, helicopters, studios, control centers, transmission, automatic change over.
15. Need to measure color burst to 1/2 degree.
16. Loss of color, loss of flesh tones, fading greens, bright reds, drifting.
17. Distribution of signals, isolating cameras.
18. Color variations between different units, cable and remote.
19. Substitute for vectorscope with more accuracy need to insert VIRS on Line 19.
20. Loss of RF, Automatic Switching.
21. Loss of RF.
11. Electro -Optical Isolators
12. Video Line Isolators
Inexpensive Solutions
13. Cross Pulse Generator
14. Video Squelch
15. Burst Phase Meter 16. Color Sync Generator 17, Distribution Amplifier
18. Color Gen Lock Sync Generator 19. Multi Phase and VIRS Inserter 20. RF Squelch 21. RF Alarm
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 195
VANCO-CHICAGO, INC.
970 North Shore Drive Lake Bluff, IL 60044 (312) 295-1050
ADAPTORS/CONNECTORS/ ACCESSORIES
VCR/VTR CABLES AND ADAPTERS
CABLE ASSEMBLIES
-41011:2
UHF PLUG
UHF PL UG
75- OHM CABLE Model UU-10 10 ft
1Per Bag
ti
-1111111
CONNECTOR Model FF -3 3 Model FF -12 12 h
75 OHM CABLE Model FF -25 25 ft.
CONNECTOR 1Per Bag
TV ACCESSORIES
Matching Transformers PAT- 75. Separate F-59 and ring included 75 to 300 ohrn matching translorrners Individually bagged
A a. IIIIIIIIIMIIII=
MTE-75. Popularly priced aluminum case 75 to 300 ohm
Connectors
-4111140
F-59. With separate " 0 ring
F-59-2. 2per beg F-59-50. 50 per bag
VCR/TV SEPARATORS
U11-75. VCR/TV Separator. UN Splitter and Balan 75 ohmn input 1- per bag
' UVF-75. VCR/TV Separator, UN FM Splitter and Balan 75 ohm input
magillEn'
BNC PLUG
BNC PLUG
75- OHM CABLE Model BB- 1010h.
1Per Bag
RCA PLUG
75- OHM CABLE Model 113-12 12 ft.
IIJ
BNC PLUG
1Per Bag
RCA PLUG
75- OHM CABLE Model /111-12 12 h.
RCA PLUG
1Per Bag
RCA PLUG 75- OHM CABLE Model RU- 1010 h.
BNC PLUG 75- OHM CABLE Model BU -10 10 h.
UHF PLUG 1Per Bag
UHF PLUG 1Per Bag
F-56. With separate "0" ring F-56-2. 2per bag F-56-50. 50 per bag
F-81. Female connector mates F-56, F-59. F-61 connectors F-81. 1per bag F-81-50. 50 per bag
Splitter/Transformers UVS-3. UHF- VHF- FM Splitter RLC High and low pass filter networks insure sharp, clear picture Low insertion loss
UVS-75. UHF-VHF Splitter with matching transformer Adapts 75 ohm lead-in to 300 ohm inputs on VHF- UHF terminals of set Low insertion loss F-59 with ring included
UVSF-75. UHF-VHF- FM Spinier with matching transformer Same specifications as UVS-75 but with separate FM In,-, 11 ce,ew term,e,
UVFF-75. VCR TV Signal Miner 75 ohm input
UV-300. VCR/TV Separator. UN Splitter and Baton 300 ohm input
UVF-300. VCR/TV Separator. U/V FM Splitter and Balun 300 ohm input
",'11.111Millielassugglimanglit
UVFF-300. VCR/TV Signet Miner. 300 ohm input
VIDEO DUBBING CABLES
VANCO NOW OFFERS NEW PARALLEL CABLE IN A VARIETY OF LENGTHS AND PLUG STYLES TO ACCOMMODATE THE MOST DISCRIMINATING BUYER. PLUGS AVAILABLE IN NICKEL PLATED AND GOLD PLATED FOR EVEN LOWER CONTACT RESISTANCE AND NOISE FACTOR.
VHS TO BETA 6FT. Model DK-4 12 FT Model DK-5
VT- 196
VIDEO CABLE 6- MM
PARALLEL WIRE DUBBING CABLE
GOLD PLATED PLUGS
3)3111114eien)
AUDIO CABLE 4- MM
VHS TP VHS
7:17&t
$19.00
INDIVIDUAL HANGER
6FT Model DK-2
$22.15
SEE-THRU-BOX
12 FT Model DK-3
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$18.75 $22.00
VANNER, INC.
745 Harrison Dr. Columbus, OH 43204 (614) 272-6263
POWER CONVERTERS
20 a VANNER VERTER
ON
CIRCutT BREAKER
OFF 11
V.-
FROFI EFFICENCY DC/AC INVERTER
VANNER INC cot.umaus. OHIO USA
ENG VANNER-VERTERS are the most advanced products designed and engineered for the inversion of electrical power from battery to line current. The high efficiency, regulated control of frequency and voltage, light weight and compact size, and undistorted wave form make it effective for use in ambulances, fire trucks, boats, mobile broadcasting, and utility vehicles. Its efficiency, current control and reliability combine to make this the most outstanding product of its type manufactured today. The following paragraphs outline some of the specific features of the ENG VANNER -VERTER.
·The Vanner inverter produces full designated wattage continuously regulated 120 volt RMS power from idle to high RPM, and is not affected by high or low deviations in battery voltage.
·Produces apulse width modulated wave form with less than 14% harmonic distortion.
·Frequency controlled by a30 parts per million quartz crystal for 60 Hz time base.
·Capable of operating all types of electrical AC loads including resistive and reactive ( either inductive or capacitive) without distortion. This is necessary for operating various types of medical and broadcasting equipment.
·Operates on only 30 watts at no load, and is over 87% efficient at full load, for more usable AC power. The 24 volt model, ideally suited for helicopter use, provides 1500 watts continuously with 2200 watts surge and is 92% efficient.
·Light weight -- only 26 lbs. ·Compact size -- 8x6x13 inches for convenient installation.
·Lighted remote control switch kit and quick connect battery terminals are standard equipment.
·Guaranteed one full year.
A built in 120 VAC transfer switch is also available for shore power equipped vehicles. Add the suffix 'T" to the part number.
MODEL NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
PRICE EACH
20-1000 20-1000T 24-1500 24-1500T
ENG VANNER -VERTER, 1000 watts, 12VDC Same as above with built in transfer switch ENG VANNER -VERTER, 1500 watts, 24VDC Same as above with built in transfer switch
$ 899.00 950.00 998.00
1090.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 197
VIDEO INTERFACE PRODUCTS
19310 Ecorse AUen Park, MI 481C 1
(800) 792-2489
Il'BRID a- 8
VIDEO PROCESSOR
Already the top rated multi-processor in consumer video.
Now adds an extraordinary new ( 16) pattern Special Effects Generator, S. E.G
-Guaranteed to give ytai the neatest little video recording set-up this side of Hollywood and Vine!
1-_,,.,.w.i.rcelk,77,,,, eel*" -''--' temennii" -- ne:7C'en · 6-i- ,)
Set- Con EDICTO .1.ieNteriTais eie
_L
T Si
IC
fe - ,A.StO tiSis N/f. ttO
PINION
SAlit ouitat ion
SON retie
Si l, iiuisf kw:
NIN SU,
PF OteITIJ . el
prig eiccoit
8 UNITS IN ONE
(1) Switcher electronically switches between ( 2) siaJrces New V.I.S. (vertical interval switching) technique makEs glitch imperceptable..
(2) Enhancer (3) controls Enhance improves detail sharpness NEG. Noise Amp new high tech noise reductior circuit Color Balance perfects color hues
(3) Stabilizer cancels all copyguard roll automatica:ly! (4) Video Distribution Amp makes up to ( 3) copies at once (5) NEW Stereo Distribution Amp (3) Stereo outputs (6) Editing Section (3) controls:
Fader, fades video and audio, Duration Control adjusts fade time . 5 to 5 secords X- CH fade (cross channel fade) out A- switch- in B (7) NEW Special Effects Generator ( S.E.G and E/T Meter. Meter counts elapsed tape time to the exact second. Special effects generator creates ( 4) basic wipe patterns, total of ( 16) combinations possible.
(8) R/F Output for cable TV enhancement
Everything You Need For EXTRAORDINARY Video'
--HOOK-UP-DIAGRAM
NI ATje cE
EL AV E VCR,
NI A EsT=E:
SLAVE SIC R.2
SLAVVCER·3 [
HYBRID
-PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
SWITCHING TECHNOLOGY: All switching is 'emoted to front panel and is affected via digital analogue circuits using pushbutton momentary contact switcnes. No actual video or aucao signals pass through the switches. This advanced technique prevents noise and static normal', heard andseen during switching.' VIS.. Vertical Interval Switching minimizes glitch..
INPUT SWITCHER: A- B input selector switch allows instant alternation between ( 2) video sources. Audio is automatically switched right along with video. Switcner is operative with new S.E.G. patterns.
VIDEO AUDIO FADER: The Fader fades your picture in and out at the push of aswitch. it is asuper aid n editing, allowing you alternation from full bright to black ir a graduated way awe:tiro jerkiness between scenes and lending that dramatic smooth touch to entrances and arckrgs. The auto feature is much superior to manual faders ( turning aknob to fade) because when used in conjunction with the fade duration control, auto control assures fade time will be perfectly even inc coexistent throughout your entire edited presentation. Audio Fader fades sourd out and in. synchronized pelectly w th eideo fader. Fabulous results with musical recordings and concert editing.'
X- CH FADE: ( Cross Channel Fade) this feature is aspecial refinement that is oath subtle and striking. its operation is quote sample after pressing X- Ch Fade button, press Switcher button. Picture fades out on A- channel- then switches- to fade back in on B- channel. World's most pleasant way to input select.' TOJcan also use X- Ch Fade with all S.E.G. patterns, to cross channel wipe.
STABILIZER: (Automatic type) cancels all copyguard. Self adjusts to give rock stable N picture even with ( 2) or more forms of copyguard on the same tape. WARN ,NG: It is a violation of Federal law to duplicate copyrighted video tapes without permission of copyright folder. The sale of this device should not be construed to imply manufacturers' sanction of use for any illegal activity of any kind. Consult your attorney for answers to all copyright questions.
NEGATIVE NOISE AMP: Removes video " snow" or "confetti". Prevents generation loss. Video noise appears on your TV screen as asnowy or blurred image. This problem becomes nsire acute with multiple generation tapes as aggregated noise builds up. Negative noise amp generates é negative image of all noise present in incoming video signal. Negative noise is men imposed onto positive noise. The effect is noise is nullified or canceled. This negative noise reduction technioue he ps make it possible io pioduce superb copies, nearly indistinguishable from agood quality master. The producer's dream of cear, sharp dubs can now be realizedl ·
When considering video improvement components there are a couple of
ways to go. You can buy a bunch cf stand alone modules and string them
togethes - with lots of connectors cables - or you can buy asystem. HYBRID
offers you that alternative - the systems approach. HYBRID is a refined
consolioation of ( 8) diffeent precision engineered video improvement
components in one strearileied console Use Hybrid for Beta or VHS. record
and playback. Here is asingle system with spectacular video editing, viewing
and duplicating capabilities to transform ordinary video into EXTRAORDINARY
video! And HYBRID'S a good value too. Purchased elsewhere as modules.
comparable features would exceed $ 1.000.00 in cost - and that's not including
the extras - Hybrid exclusives like pushswrch elecronic function selectior,
LED. E/T Meter, Cross Channel Fade feattre, Negative Noise Amp and now new
S.E.G. Just review our features and see. You gel everything you need, and alittle
extra, for superb viewing and flawless copies. Why settle for less? Our
introductory price includes fill 1 yeas warranty and hand-held remote pause
control with S.E.G. and E.'T Meter option.
PRICE:
$419.00
ENHANCE: Procluces super sheep detail or mdeo edge definition. Control activates very specialized high speed video boost circuit that selectively ampl lies and accentuates upper video frequencies producing a super crisp, clear picture for viewing and lot deplication Upgrades widescrecn TV systems with an extraordinary improvement in clearness.
COLOR BALANCE: Lifelike colors stand out as this color processor breathes color life back nto washed out video taped s. enes Cornparetor attests color hue and detail of outbound video signal. Especially appropriate for color improvement with home video cameras by compensating for inherent non-linear chroma bard pass charieteristics w color fringing This important control colors the
difference between bleak and beautiful copies.
E/T METER: Elapsed recurd time can now be measured to the sec ond. Meter functions include fast forward. slow forwaeLreset and minute- second select. Meter registers rinie 011eR2 recording and can be remo:ely paused with a hand held control. Wien recording deck s paused. This system is much superior to aVCR odometer winch measures non- Inearly acid is irrherenty inaccurate Knowing your elapsed time and thus, time teman ne on : ape is extremely useful for tape conservation, editing and scheduling.'
VIDEO DISTRIBUTION AMP-, dakes (3) copies at once AutornatIcally suppl es correctly regulated output gain. High aulput channel isolation steety feature prevents electrical malfunction of one slave VCR from damaging functiors of oteers a critical consideration Iri multiple production applications.
STEREO DISTRIBUTION AMP Regulated voltage to ( 3) stereo audio outputs assures correct power :o drive 3 slave VCR's Of IO 1111E11d -2 with your s:ereo system.'
R/F OUTPUT: R/F ( iadrafrequentr.) modpation is channel 3-4 selectable with aconvenient pushbutton switch mounted or tne ' row panel With Me:, fine feature you can stabilize and enhance all your video movies out of the Hybrid and diem to your TV eliminating the need for a second VCR. R/F output can additionally be used to supply video to power asecond --11 set. Since R/F section is internal to Hybrid no cumbersome noise inducing cables are necessary
WARRANTY: Full 1year warranty coveringall parts and service is in force with the sale of each HybodEl. Extended service policy is also mailable to cover all parts and labor fora full 24 months beyond original period at a cost ot 529.95. Remiest policy at ton- e of parchase.
SPECIAL EFFECTS GENERATOR Hybrid's new S.E.G. is a practical editing tool. With S.E.G. you
can add professional style fades arm wipes to vour home video movies or duplicates. You'll probably use
the ( 3) basic patterns most often. horizontal, vertical and corner. But if you wish, you can operate ( 21 or
more patterns sunuitaneously to give you the ( 16) extraord nary combinations ilk.strated below For a softer effect you can even fade and wipe simultaneously. Duration control varies wipe & ration, and yes.
Fade and X- Ch Fade buttons create sope to flack and X·Ch wipe ( wipe out on A- Channel - switch - then
uun,rcan wipe back in on B- Channel) all aut3rnatica'',
18 --···
al
11:ILIII: 1111=1:1
11U8 1138 SI O O -···
-eN
IDOEHMEM
/
Buttons select wipe in direction indicated by .:rrow . Fade button at far left.
VT- 198
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEOLINK XANTECH CORPORATION
12950 Bradley Ave.
Sylmar, CA 91342 (818) 362-0353 ( 800) 843-5465
CABLES ( RF)
5004/5014 High quality, 75 ohm cables in avariety of convenient lengths have molded ( not crimped on) male F-type
connector on each end. Use for interconnecting all
types of video equipment.
5004 Length -- 3' F- F
$7.29
5014 Length -- 6' F- F
7.99
5104/5114 High quality, 75 ohm cables in avariety of convenient lengths have molded ( not crimped on) male F-type connectors on one end and right angle quick connect F-type connector on the other end. For use when one end of cable is frequently switched between various video components.
5104 Length -- 3' F-OC 5114 Length -- 6' F-OC
$7.99 9.99
CABLES (Audio Video)
5204 Use for interconnecting two VHS VCR's for dubbing purposes. Interconnecting video components that use RCA jacks such as video enhancers, video stabilizers. All VHS VCR's utilize special video and audio inputs
and outputs with RCA jacks. TV monitors, protection TV's and some newer home TV's are also equipped with RCA jacks for the transmission of pure video and audio signals.
5204 Length -- 6' RCA RCA
$7.99
UNIVERSAL DUBBING KIT
00
5504 This kit provides high quality -- shielded, 6foot long video and audio cables for dubbing from one VCR to another. Connector and adaptors that permit dubbing from VHS to VHS, Beta to Beta or VHS to Beta are included.
5504 Dub Kit: 2Gold #5204 Cables 2Gold #576 Adaptors ( RCA- Mini)
$22.95
CABLES ( RF)
NOW FEATURING NEW FLEXI LINK KG- 59U COAXIAL CABLE ,
500/501/502/503 High quality, 75 ohm cables in avariety of convenient lengths have molded ( not crimped on) male F-type
connector on each end. Use for interconnecting all types of video equipment.
500 Length -- 3' 501 Length -- 6'
$4.95 5.95
502 Length -- 15' 503 Length -- 25'
6.95 9.19
510 / 511 High quality, 75 ohm cables in avariety of convenient lengths have molded ( not crimped on) male F-type connectors on one end and right angle quick connect F-type connector on the other end. For use when one end of cable is frequently switched between various
video components.
510 Length -- 3' ( QC) 511 Length -- 6' ( QC)
$5.95 6.95
CABLES (Audio Video)
520/521/522 Use for interconnecting two VHS VCR's for dubbing
purposes. Interconnecting video components that use RCA jacks such as video enhancers, video stabilizers. All VHS VCR's utilize special video and audio inputs and outputs with RCA jacks. TV monitors, projection TV's and some newer home TV's are also equipped with RCA jacks for the transmission of pure video and
audio signals.
520 Length -- 6'
521 Length -- 10' 522 Length -- 10' ( pair)
$ 4.95
7.95 12.95
Reprinted with Permission from Materials © 1982 XANTECH CORP.
CABLES/ADAPTORS/ CONNECTORS
UNIVERSAL DUBBING KIT
560
This kit provides high quality -- shielded, 6foot long
video and audio cables for dubbing from one VCR to
another. Connector and adaptors that permit dubbing
from VHS to VHS, Beta to Beta or VHS to Beta are
included.
$14.95
CONNECTORS
570 Male F-type Plug ( 75 ohm ( 2per card). Use to make up interconnecting cables or TV antenna leads. .. $1.79
571
75 ohm Round Wire to Right Angle Quick Connector.
Save time if cables are frequently switched. Convert
the ends of round 75 ohm cables to right angle quick
connectors
$2.49
ADAPTORS CONNECTORS
(
5 Donuble Female " F" Jack. A handy connector that
allows connection of two lengths of round 75 ohm cable that have male F-type connectors. Can also be
used as panel mount connector.
$1.79
573 RCA Jack to "F" Plug Adaptor. Converts F-type male connector to RCA type jack. RCA jacks are usually found on video games, computers and other video accessories such as enhancers, stabilizers, etc. . .$3.95
81=-.
574 Adaptor. Converts RCA plug to female F-type jack that will accept F-type plug and round 75 ohm wire. . .$3.69
gig
575
Quick Connect FPlug Adaptor. Ideal where cables or
antenna leads are frequently switched. Converts
female end of round 75 ohm cables to quick connect,
Push on/pull off style.
$3.69
Z=1>-
576
RCA Jack to Mini plug Adaptor. Converts VHS
dubbing cables to Beta style so you can dub from VHS
to aBeta VCR
$2.39
ElME
5n
Mini Jack to RCA Plug. Converts Beta dubbing cables to VHS style so you can dub from Beta to aVHS VCR.
$2.39
578
75 ohm Terminator. Provides constant 75 ohm "load"
on unused inputs/outputs to maintain the proper
system balance
$1.59
580
Flush Mount 75 ohm Wall Plate. Wall plate provides a
finished- professional look where 75 ohm round
antenna lead passes through awall. Includes built-in 75
ohm " F" jack.
$3.49
581
BNC Jack to 75 ohm " F" Plug. Professional level video
equipment utilize BNC connectors for fast, positive
hookup. This adaptor allows connection of round 75
ohm cables, with conventional " F" type threaded
connectors to BNC jacks
$6.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 199
VIDEOMEDIA, INC.
211 Weddell Drive Sunnyvale, CA 94089 (408) 745-1700
CONTROL PRODUCTS
THE STC SYSTEM
The Videomedia STC ( serial transport control) system represents a major breakthrough in remote control capability. It is amodular system that can fulfill virtually any remote control requirement and is flexible enough to change when you change or add to your existing system. The STC system will function as auniversal remote system without the limitations placed on the operator using discrete remote control panels. Using the STC system allows the user to customize and even totally automate any or all components in the system. The name may be alittle misleading in that transports are not the only things that can be remote controlled. Any device that has remote control capability such as routing switchers, film chains, audio decks, VTRs, and even transmitter parameters.
The Videomedia STC ( serial transport control) system is based upon a unique two wire communications system between the controlled devices and the master transmitting unit ( MSTC). This differential transmission system allows the controlled devices to be located long distances from the master control device ( up to one mile using twisted pair wires, or around the world using amodem). Multiple master transmitting units IMSTC) may be incorporated in the system for control of devices from several remote locations.
Each device ( or group of devices) to be controlled by the STC system must have a receiving module attached to it. One receiving module (RSTC) can control up to six devices in parallel. Each master control unit IMSTC) may command and monitor up to 63 RSTC units or 378 maximum transports. Multiple MSTC units can be on the line in systems where the user desires more than one remote location. The MSTC master control module will accept control from any external computer via an RS-232 port. This feature allows the end user to automate his system with any conventional computer using the Videomedia MSTC operational data format which we supply the code to at no charge for use with STC products.
Master Units ( MSTC)
Master units are of one basic type, available in different packages for various applications. They are all capable of controlling up to 63 remote units and conversing with other master units. In addition, they may be interfaced to any external computer or RS-232 control. Master units are available in 1-3/4" rack mount ( one or two per mount), or as a local keyboard input device known as the MSTC-2 / PK.
Remote Units ( RSTC)
RSTC-1 This is aunidirectional, non- addressable, commands-only module. It supplies no transport function feedback to the operator. This system is suitable for duplicating applications where low cost and mass transport control is required.
RSTC-2 This is a bi-directional, individual addressable, command and status module. Applications for its use include universal remote control systems, sequencing systems and station automation systems.
Supporting Units
MAFV-1 The MAFV-1 is a10 input, 1output, single channel, audio follow video switcher.
MAFV-2 The MAFV-2 is identical to the MAFV-1 except it provides stereo audio switching.
4/02
MSTC-2/PK MSTC-1
MSTC-1 REMOTE
RSTC-2
Serial Transport Control Systems
MSTC-1
Master control module can control up to 64 RSTC-1 receiving units
STC-2-PS
1-3/4" rack mount unit and power supply will house 2MSTC-1 modules
RSTC-1
Receiver/control module. One per transport required
MSTC-2/R1 Master remote control module. Single unit rack mount version
MSTC-2/R2 Dual master control modules. Rack mount version
MSTC-2/PK Stand alone master control module with keyboard
RSTC-2
Remote receiving module
STC2-CRT CRT status display generator
MAFV-1
10X1 serial controlled audio follow video routing switcher
MAF-2
As above with 2channel audio
VMC-101C Tone encoder, backspace tone placement
module ( for Cl-Star)
VMC-101S As above for SPOT-CI
Control cable and connector for any U-Matic or 1/2" VTR. For use with MSTC-1 and 2systems
61300.00
200.00
190.00
1650.00
2900.00
1950.00 275.00
1750.00
1900.00 2100.00
900.00 900.00
75.00
AUTOMATION SYSTEM SPOT- 0
Low cost computerized VTR sequencing system. Controls up to 54 VTRs and up to 6 switchers in up to 24 pre-programmed events. Applications include commercial spot playback and channel automation. ( order 1 RSTC-2 unit per VTR to be controlled). System includes 1 MSTC-2PK and 1 MAFV-1 10X1 audio follow video switcher. This unit is not upgradable to the VMC-200 system.
VT-200
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEOMEDIA, INC.
211 Weddell Drive Sunnyvale, CA 94089 (408) 745-1700
CONTROL PRODUCTS
VMC-201
REMOTE OPERATING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Accepts commands for execution from VMC-200 via modem or preprogrammed disk. System includes control computer, dual 8" disk operating system, printer port, real time clock, MAFV-1 10 x 1 vertical interval AFV switcher and hardware to control 6 devices.
(Order additional RSTC-2 units for up to 255). VMC-201
$ 13,500.00
VMC-200 MASTER CONTROL SYSTEM
This system will control up to six source VTRs, film chains, etc. ( Ad-
ditional units up to 255 are optional.) It will control the random access functions of each source, as well as automating their playback times and positions. This unit incorporates a terminal, modem, dual 8"
floppy drives, areal-time clock and aprinter port. It can receive its programming instructions either locally ( terminal) or from adisk. Each source or sequence of sources may be activated manually, from the
real-time clock or from apreceding sequence. The system generates a report at the operator's request for confirmation of the day's run activity. The VMC-200 will also pre-program, automatically, up to 99 remote locations using the VMC-201 at that location.
Control Automation System
The VMC-200 is acomputerized version of the VMC-100 sequencing system, but incorporates many additional features and capabilities. It allows the broadcaster or cablecaster the capability of total random access of any group of commercials or program material from any of a group of tapes loaded in different VTRs. The accessing method incor-
porates Micro-Loc which allows for frame accurate programming automation and does not require tones or any timing reference that needs to occupy an audio channel. There are three basic standard versions of the system, and many broadcasters will find the need to
incorporate all three operating modules.
The VMC-200 utilizes the STC components as machine control devices. All VMC-200 systems include customized programming in the
base price to assure the customer of asystem tailored to his specific needs. The customer merely needs to define his system in terms of
how many sources ( up to 255), how many channels of simultaneous operation ( up to 63) and what kind of hardware is to be controlled and
automated. Because the VMC-200 is software based, and no two systems requirements will be the same, you will find the VM C-200 to be the most powerful and cost effective automation system available. Options such as Auto- Logging, Auto- Billing and Vertical Data Command ( VDC*) are available on any VMC-200 system regardless of size. All logging, billing and custom report forms will be customized to
the customer's requirements from our standard data base.
*VDC is aVideomedia exclusive development for transmitting and
receiving control and logging data during the vertical interval of the
television signal. It is the only system in the industry that provides
100% verification that aprogram segment has, in fact, been trans-
mitted. Contact your authorized Videomedia distributor for detailed
information. VMC-200
$27,000.00
COMOVI.
VMC-202 STATION MANAGIEMENT
TRAFFIC CONTROL CENTER
Station management and traffic control center. Features contract generator, cuts sheet generator, log generator, sales tracking and
report generator, word processor, data base management for up to 8
channels of operation. Center includes computer, dual 8" disk
operating system, terminal, and software. VMC-202
$28,500.00
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES VMC-250 Auto- billing and report generating software for
use with the VMC-202. Includes menu driven
data base management and account billing
software. Generates " make good" schedules
and maintains " active account data" as well as
print out invoices for commercial time actually
run. This software package is custom format-
ted to individual operating parameters
$12,000.00
VMC-260 Videc integrated operational software package
Used in conjunction with the VMC-200 and the Videc-1 package. Provides all programming necessary to supply and receive data commands as well as 100% feedback of commer-
cial spot verification data actually aired
3000.00
VIDEC-1
Vertical interval data encoder, decoder set for wireless remote control and commercial data
verification. This unit includes the frame, power supply, encoder module, decoder module and
line finder/cleaner module
4250.00
VIDEC-2 Encoder module ( installs in Videc-1). For additional control channel encoding
2495.00
VIDEC-3 Decoder module ( installs in Videc-1). For additional channel of control data
1695.00
VDC-1
Rack mount frame and power supply will house three Videc-2 or Videc-3 modules
850.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-201
11.411
VIDEOTEK INC.
243 Shoemaker Road Pottstown, PA 19464 (215) 327-2292 TVVX 710-653-0125
Zra VIDEOT EK
4
·
PVS-6A Audio Follow Video Passive Switcher
FEATURES · 100% passive - no power requirements · Low insertion loss · Low
video/audio crosstalk · Six video/audio ( unbalanced)inputs · One
video/audio ( unbalanced) output · BNC video connectors · Barrier strip
audio connection · 13 /4 "rackmount height · Can mount three units side
by side using aVideotek DAT-1 ( rackmount tray)190.00
$
PVS-6 Passive Video Switcher
FEATURES · 100% passive - no power requirements · Low insertion loss · Low
video crosstalk · Six video inputs/One video output · 13 /4 " rackmount height · Can mount three units side by side using a Videotek DAT-1
(rackmount tray)
$ 110.00
ROUTING SWITCHERS
VIS - 1200 12x1 Video Only Routing Switcher
FEATURES
· Twelve video inputs, bridging Two isolated video outputs · Twenty-four
hour channel memory · Vertical interval switching · Momentary contact
illuminated push buttons with changeable legends
(1 3/ 4 - rackmount)
$360.00
12x 1 ROUTING SWITCHER SERIES Video Only Routing Switcher
FEATURES
· Video inputs, bridging. Two video outputs · Overnight channel Memory · Vertical interval switching/ Momentary contact push buttons w/changeable legends and " LED" video indicators · 1% inch rackmount or free standing with rubber feet.
RS- 12 RS-12RC
RS-12RC-LS
12x1 Vertical Interval Switcher, Video Only. Remote 12x1 Vertical Interval Switcher, Video Only Same as RS-12RC, but with Switching Capability at the Local and Remote Locations
$ 995.00
1224.00
1295.00
Options (RS- 12, RS-12RC, RS-12RC-LS)
RSP-2
12x1 Remote Video Switching Panel with
Rackmount Kit
RRK-2
Remote Rackmount Kit
BLK-2
Blank Panel
RCT-2
Remote Connector Kit
CR -2
Cable for Remote
$225.00
110.00
60.00 42.00 1.22/ft.
10x1 ROUTING SWITCHER SERIES Audio Follow Video With Breakaway Feature
FEATURES · Ten video inputs, bridging/Two video outputs · Two audio inputs for each video channel · Video/Audio latching breakaway control · Balanced/Unbalanced audio inputs or outputs · Overnight channel memory · Vertical interval switching/Momentary contact push buttons w changeable legends and " LED" audio/video indicators · 13/4 inch rackmount or free standing with rubber feet.
RS- 10A
10x1 Vertical Interval Switcher w/
Two Audio Channels & Audio ( or) Video
Breakaway Feature
RS-10ARC Remote 10x1 Vertical Interval Switcher w/
Two Audio Channels & Audio (or) Video
Breakaway Feature
RS-10ARC-LS Same as RS-10ARC, but with Switching cap-
ability at the Local and Remote Locations
RS-10ARC/L Local portion of RS-10ARC-LS only
$1285.00
1855.00
2070.00
1498.00
OPTIONS ( RS-10ARC, RS-10ARC-LS)
RSP-1
10x1 Remote Switching Panel
(May be added to RS-10ARC or RS-10ARC-LS
to provide aSecond Remote Switching
Location)
RCT-1
Remote Connector Kit
CR -1
Cable for Remote
$642.00 30.00 .99/ft.
18x 1AFV ROUTING SWITCHER With Breakaway & Computer Interface
FEATURES
· 18 loop thru video inputs · 18 stereo & data channel audio inputs
(balanced/unbalanced) · + 24dBm audio headroom · Vertical interval
line 10 switching · Edit pulse for user controlled switching times · RS-
422 computer control interface · Optional RS- 232 computer control
interface · Computer control, menu driven for ease of operation · 15
selectable communication baud rates · Single line coax remote bus
control · Multi- local addressing for remote selection of different
locals · FCC approved EMI filtering
$2795.00
OPTIONS
RS-183ARC Remote Control RS- 183A
$3495.00
RS-183ARC-L Additional Local for RS-183ARC
2720.00
RS-183AR C- LS Same as RS-183ARC w/switching at both the
Remote & Local Locations
3565.00
RSP-3
18x1 Remote Switching Panel ( may be added
to RS- 183A or RS-183ARC-LS to provide a
Second Remote Switching Location)
770.00
VT-202
Reprinted with permission from materials © 1984 by VIDEOTEK, INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
11-411
DEMODULATORS & AUDIO PROGRAM MONITORS
VIDEOTEK INC.
243 Shoemaker Road Pottstown, PA 19464 (215) 327-2292 TVVX 710-653-0125
-3 -Vle017,11(
410
Model APM-2RA
APM -2RA
Dual Input Rackmount Audio Program Monitor
FEATURES
·The slim- line APM-2RA requires only 3-1/2" of vertical rack space
· 100% Solid State
·2Inputs -- Balanced/Unbalanced
·3Pin male XLR / RCA phono jack input connections
·Internal 3" x5" speaker
·Two meter sensitivity ranges
· Hi/Low input impedance select
·A / B mix capability
· Headphone jack with speaker defeat
· 105VAC -- 132VAC RMS, 48Hz -- 66Hz
· Lower power consumption makes the APM-2RA ideal for mobile
applications
APM-2RA
S425.00
Model DM-4RA
Television Tuner/Demodulator
The Videotek Model DM-4RA Demodulator was designed specifically for Broadcast, CATV, Microwave Modulation and CCTV applications. The unit receives " off- the- air" signals, processes these signals
and provides dual buffered composite video, audio and 4.5MHz Aural Subcarrier outputs.
FEATURES ·Varactor express tuning system with band select fine tuning presets
·Channels-- VHF 2-13, UHF 14-83
· Low noise
· Low chrominance/luminance differential gain Et phase
(maintains IRE color burst standards)
·Regulated power supplies
·Audio level indication via LED on front panel
·Audio- video level controls on front panel
·The slim- line DM-4RA requires only 3-1/2" of vertical rack space
·Automatic fine tuning ( AFT) with defeat switch, accurate tracking
of all 82 channels
· Dual buffered and short circuit protected aural outputs
·SAW filter IF Technology for high quality gain and bandwidth
characteristics
DM-4RA
$899.00
ty:
Model DM-40RA Television Cable Ready Tuner/Demodulator
DM-40RA
FEATURES
· Low noise
el.
· Low chrominance/luminance differential gain and phase
(maintains IRE color burst standards)
· Regulated power supplies
· Internal audio monitoring 2" speaker
Model APM-8R 8Input Rackmount Audio Program Monitor
FEATURES ·The slim- line APM-8R requires only 3-1/2" of vertical rack space · 100% solid state
·8 inputs-- Balanced/Unbalanced
· Barrier strip input/output connections
· Internal 3" x 5" speaker
· 10 watt amplifier
·5meter sensitivity ranges ·OdBm, 600ohm line output
· Calibrated tone output
·A- B channel mix capability
· Hi/Low input impedance select · 115/230VAC -- 50/60Hz mains input select
· + 12VDC battery operation
·Connector removable PC board for serviceability
APM-8R
$ 799.00
Model APM-2RS Stereo Audio Program Monitor
·The slim- line APM-2RS requires only 3-1/2" of vertical rack space
· 100% Solid State
· Stereo Inputs-- Balanced/Unbalanced
·3 Pin male XLR / RCA phono jack input connections
·Internal 3" x5" speaker
·Two display sensitivity ranges
· Hi/Low input impedance select
· Stereo headphone jack with speaker defeat
· 105VAC -- 132VAC RMS, 48Hz -- 66Hz
·Low power consumption makes the APM - 2R Sideal for mobile
applications
APM-2RS
$493.00
·Audio- video level controls on front panel behind access door
·The slim- line DM- 40R A requires only 3-1/2" of vertical rack space
·Frequency synthesized 10- key express tuning with non-volatile
memory
· 100% solid state circuitry for long term reliability
· Dual buffered and short circuit protected video and audio outputs
·Two monitor outputs are sourced by the 4X1 input switcher
·Cable- adaptable tuning circuitry for instant access to cable TV
midband ( A- I) and superband ( J- W) channels in addition to
standard VHF ( 2-13) and UHF ( 14-83) channels-- 125 channels in all
·RM-723 Multi- Function Express Commander Infrared remote
control unit with 10- key multi- function command capability:
complete VHF/UHF/cable TV channel selection, sequential up-
down channel search, last channel memory, display- channel
number appears in TV/monitor vdeo out jack for afew seconds
then reduces in size. Channel display is superimposed in video on
upper right hand corner, channel clear, power on/off, antenna
switch and video/audio line input selection. When used with
Videotek's RGB/VM-19A and RGB/VM-25A, remote control of
picture level, sound mute, volume control, and power on/off is
available
· Internal 4X1 video switcher permits selection of three external
video inputs plus internal demod from the front of the DM-40RA or
from the remote control via aone button sequence selection
·Coax type 75 ohm " F" connecto-s are used to provide VHF/UHF
antenna inputs, aux. cable input and converter output for ascram-
ble decoder. The aux/ant RF inputs may be selected from the
DM-40RA front panel behind the door or via the remote control.
Indicators on the DM-40RA front panel display which mode has
been selected
·Three video inputs are BNC looped thru with a75 ohm termination
switch
·Three stereo external audio inputs are provided that follow the
video selection. These are loop thru Hi- Zinputs
DM-40RA
$ 1495.00
Reprinted with permission from materials © 1985 by VIDEOTEK, INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 203
ILA VIDEOTEK
INC.
243 Shoemaker Road Pottstown, PA 19464 (215) 327-2292 TVVX 710-653-0125
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
· VDA-16
PDA-16
JMIW-IMC
. I
800 SERIES
800 SERIES DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
Videotek's 800 Series Distribution Amplifiers are engineered to meet critical video distribution needs in all types of applications. The 800 Series is based on the TR-800 eight bay modular tray and PS- 800 power supply. Up to eight distribution amplifier modules may be mounted in the TR-800 tray, in addition to a second PS- 800 power supply for backup in case of primary supply failure.
The VDA-816S is astandard video DA with one looping single ended input and six outputs. Up to 300 feet of Belden 8281 may be equalized via afront card equalizer adjustment.
The VDA-816 is a precision video clamping DA with one looping
differential or single ended input and six outputs. An optional E0-800 card may be added to the VDA-816 to allow front panel adjustment of equalization up to 1000 feet of Belden 8281.
VDA -816 Precision Video Clamping DA Module
FEATURES
Front card output level adjustment · Front card equalizer adjustment
when optional EQ-800 equalizer card is employed · Can equalize up
to 1000 feet of Belden 8281 · Switchable clamping or DC restora-
tion · Modular plug-in card · One looping differential or single ended
input and six outputs
VDA-816 .
$ 375.00
TR -800 Modular DA Tray
FEATURES
Eight bay modular two rackmount high tray · Will accept any
combination of VDA-816 precision DAs or VDA-816S standard
DAs · Also permits the use of a redundant back-up PS- 800
supply · Comes standard with asingle PS- 800 supply.
TR-800
S750.00
VDA-816S Standard Video DA Module
FEATURES
Front card output level adjustment · Front card equalizer adjustment
can equalize 300 feet of Belden 8281 cable · Modular plug-in
card · One looping single ended input and six outputs.
VDA-816S
$ 250.00
PS -800 Redundant Power Supply
FEATURES
Provides unregulated 16VDC to the TA- 800 rack tray · An additional
PS- 800 can be installed as aback-up supply in case of primary supply
failure.
PS- 800
$ 199.00
EQ-800 Equalizing Module for VDA-816. Equalizes up to
1000 feet of Belden 8281.
$ 65.00
EX- 800 Extender Card for Servicing DA Modules
90.00
ADA-16
vII* ,iu Iei
·· · SDA-14
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
VDA -16 Video Distribution Amplifier
FEATURES
One looping video input · Six isolated video outputs · Front panel
output level adjustment · Cable equalizer front panel adjustment ( 300
ft. Belden 8281) · Front panel input/output test points · Front panel
LED power indicator · BNC input/output connectors · Rack -
mountable using Videotek DA tray option DAT-1.
VDA-16
$ 325.00
ADA -16 Audio Distribution Amplifier
FEATURES
One balanced/unbalanced audio input · Six balanced audio
outputs · Front panel output level adjustment · Front panel input/
output test points · Front panel LED power indicator · Barrier strip
input/output connectors · Rackmountable using Videotek DA tray
option DAT-1
ADA-16
$ 325.00
PDA -16 Pulse Distribution Amplifier
FEATURES
One looping pulse input · Six pulse outputs · Front panel input/
output test points · Front panel LED power indicator · BNC
input/output connectors · Rackmountable using Videotek DA tray
option DAT-1.
PDA-16
$ 325.00
SDA-14 Subcarrier Distribution Amplifier
(SDA 14P PAL SDA 14PM. PAL- M)
FEATURES
One looping subcarrier input · Four isolated subcarrier outputs
· Regeneration technique removes noise & distortion from input
signal · Available for NTSC, PAL, PAL- M · Front panel 0°-360°
output phase adjust w/0° preset · Front panel input/output test
points · Front panel LED power indicator · BNC input/output
connectors · Rackmountable using Videotek DA tray option DAT-1.
SDA-14
$ 450.00
Reprinted with permission from materials © 1985 by VIDEOTEK, INC.
VT-204
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
w`dc-orilLF
0704 S.W. Bancroft St Portland, OR 97201 (503) 223-4884 TVVX 910-464-5156
VIDEO IMAGE ENHANCER
v11,1 , 1
I
l 104 t I,
C
o '''':'''''''''''
(111E
(
.,, .. , , ,..,.. ,·· me.. , ·
Of
MI , ,
0000
SPECIAL OUTPUT
0
e
e
AuvCtr;t'ilef'
o
·
..' 1..
o o o
tc, , Ve. .50 fe , . MO ,
CD
)
)
H Et V VIDEO IMAGE ENHANCER
The H & V Enhancer minimizes detail loss. The visual clarity of pictures is significantly improved when used with Videotape Productions and Video Projection Systems and the editing and duplication of 3/4"and 1 /2 "recordings. Other applications which will benefit from the use of the H & V Enhancer include video camera taping and film- to- tape transfers.
The image enhancer features 2H processing of vertical detail, noise reduction and split screen
comparison. 2H processing utilizes information
from three successive lines to form a symmetri-
cal enhancement signal. Noise usually
increased by enhancement is minimized by a
combination of two techniques: coring which
reduces noise in all areas of the picture and a
Level- Dependent circuit which supresses
enhancement in the darker areas of the picture
where noise is more visible. A split screen
mode allows side- by- side comparison of
unenhanced and enhanced video.
$1295.00
OPERATING CONTROLS Enhance/SplitScreen/Bypass
Chroma, normal/ 1H delay
Front Panel Power on/off
Enable/Disable enhancer circuitry for total picture comparison
The -- 1H ( minus one line delay) feature is especially useful when dealing with systems that introduce a one line chroma delay or smear i.e. PAL decoders, single tube color cameras, etc.
VARIABLE CONTROLS Split- Screen position .
Horizontal Detail
Horizontal Aperture
Vertical Aperture Enhancement Noise
Reduction Coring
Black
Operates only when Enhance/Split-Screen/ Bypass switch is in the Split- Screen mode Controls horizontal enhancement of only low amplitude textural picture information Controls horizontal enhancement of high frequency picture information Controls amount of vertical enhancement
Used to minimize noise amplified by enhancement Reduces enhancement in areas of low picture luminance which decreases the visibility of enhancement- amplified noise
SPECIFICATIONS Video Input Level Video Output Level Frequency Response .
Maximum Enhancernent NOTE:
Vertical Tilt Video Inputs Video Outputs Connectors Power Cabinet Type Dimensions
Shipping Weight
.5 to 1.5 V (1V p- p nom.) Unity in reference to input Within + 1, -- 3 dB to 4.5 MHz ( NTSC). V/C crossover 2.9 MHz ( all variable controls counterclockwise, enhance switch in enhance position)
Greater than + 12 dB for H. Detail, H. Aperture, or V. Detail Excess enhancement is clipped above 20% of peak video white and below
25% of sync ( referenced to back porch). Clippers will adapt to changes of video level within the limits of the video input specification. Enhancement is gated off during both horizontal and vertical blanking intervals. Less than 2% 1(high impedance loopthru w/75 ohm termination switch)
1special (enhance signal
on 50% setup with sync)
BNC ( standard)-- RCA
Phone Connectors
available
/10 Vac 20 Watts- 220
Vac available on request
Rack- mount with detach-
able mounting brackets
Height
13/ 4 "
Width
17"
Depth /13/."
Weight
7 lbs.
14 lbs.
PAL (4.43 MHz)/SECAM
available on request
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 205
wrrorbcasi
0704 S.W. Bancroft St. Portland, OR 97201 (503) 223-4884 TVVX 910-464-5156
(LiP lainc.
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
GUARD STABILIZER
SEG-100 Special Effects Generator
All transitions can be done automatically or manually. With the MANUAL feature, effect patterns can be retained on the viewing screen for setup prior to using the automatic ( AUTO) function, or for creating vignettes, segues, and framing.
Standard fade-to- black and wipe-to- black are both possible with a variable color background matte in place of the black matte. Cut directly from one source to the other while retaining any background effects in the MANUAL mode.
Pattern edges are variable from a hard, clean transition to a soft, halo-like effect achieved by mixing the video information at the
pattern edge.
The first eleven locations on the pattern keypad have two possible basic shapes; the ALTERNATE key selects the second pattern, which is not displayed on the keypad.
Pattern effects shapes are variable with SLANT. A virtually infinite variety of shapes are possible with the Special Effects Generator. ALTERNATE pattern shapes are also variable with SLANT.
Automatic transition time is variable from one-half second to as long as five seconds. Audio is faded with video when using AUTO; audio is retained when using the MANUAL function.
SEG-100
$469.95
GUARD STABILIZER
Copyguard Remover and Stabilizer
You will find a wide selection of movies, concerts and special programs available for rental or sale on prerecorded video cassette. Most of these video cassettes are copyguarded to prevent you from making your own copy. But no system is perfect; certainly not this one. In fact, the guard that keeps you from copying may also keep you from watching. Many television sets w II not play prerecorded tapes because the copyguard makes the picture roll, jitter, turn to snow, or disappear all together. The GUARD STABILIZER stops this nonsense at the source, by completely removing the copyguard from the video signal. Simply connect the GUARD STABILIZER in line between your two VCRs...and feed the VHF output from the second VCR to the TV. Adjust the lock control for astable picture. Once the control is set, the tape will play all the way through without further adjustment. If you have aTV monitor or TV projector wiel direct video input, you can also connect the GUARD STABILIZER in line between VCR and TV.
Guard Stabilizer
$ 69.00
CHAN NELPLUS T"
Video Multiplexers
A ChannelPlus video multiplexer allows users to watch and/or record all of their video sources on all their TVs and VCRs without any switches or added wiring. Picture quality is often improved because ChannelPlus uses the direct video and audio outputs available from sources such as VCRs, VDPs, cameras, satellites, computers, etc. ChannelPlus assigns each source to an unused UHF channel, adding them onto the existing antenna or cable system. All TVs in the home view the added channels by simply tuning to them.
H2V Dual Channel Video Multiplexer. Accepts two composite video
+ audio ( stereo or mono) inputs
$199.95
H3V Triple Channel Video Multiplexer. Accepts three composite
video + audio ( stereo or mono) inputs
$269.95
HRV Combo RF/Video Multiplexer. Accepts one video + audio
input Et one channel 3or 4input
$239.95
IVE -100
Integrated Video Enhancer
Use the IVE -100 Integrated Video Enhancer to correct for sharpness and detail losses that occur during recording and viewing of video tapes, to improve sharpness and detail of live, off- the- air or videocamera pictures, to eliminate copyguard-induced vertical roll and jitter, to reduce the probability of vertical roll and breakup ( due to dropouts) during dubbing ( tape- to- tape recording), and to aid in the cutting of commercials.
The IVE -100 is designed for use with one or two VCRs. With one VCR it can be used while viewing to improve picture quality. With two VCRs, atuner and one VCR, or acamera ( equipped for RCA -phono pin connection) and one VCR, it can be usec to improve recordings as
you make them.
The IVE -100 instruction Manual gives complete and easy- to- follow instructions for installation and use, includirg detailed instructions on how to use enhancement to improve your own recordings. It even includes beginner- oriented instructions on how to cut commercials.
IVE -100
$ 229.00
VT- 206
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
wriffEbF
0704 S.W. Bancroft St. Portland, OR 97201 (503) 223-4884 TVVX 910-464-5156
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
DETAILER III
Video Image Enhancer
The Detailer III Image Enhancer seems to offer two of just about every-
thing: Two systems for enhancement, two systems for enhancement
noise reduction, and two systems for enhanced-vs-unenhanced
picture comparison. 4 selectable video/stereo-audio inputs let you
connect four separate video sources and switch back and forth bet-
ween them. 4video/stereo-audio outputs and video/audio distribu-
tion amplifier let you send apicture to 4separate video devices without
loss of video or audio level -- make up to 4identical recordings at the
same time. Available now in black.
$349.00
STEREO SYNTHESIZER
With DNRTM Noise Reduction
The STEREO SYNTHESIZER is a sophisticated sound processor
designed to simulate the directionality and body of stereo audio in as natural away as possible. The incoming monaural signal is separated by frequency division into five overlapping bands, which when delivered in varying proportions to the let and right channels, produce a continuously directional sound. Both high and low frequencies travel to each channel just as they would for an actual stereo recording. The sound placement can be altered using the two dimension controls, and the overall directionality adjusted using the separation control. In addition, DNR Tv dynamic noise reduction is incorporated to suppress videotape hiss which would normally be reproduced when connecting VCR audio to a good sound system. Use the SYNTHESIZER to
playback mono videotapes in synthesized stereo. Or to make
synthesized stereo recordings on your stereo VCR. And use it to
remove high frequency hiss for any tape, stereo or mono.
$249.00
RF MODULATOR
Video to VHF Converter
The RF MODULATOR can adapt your TV receiver to accept direct
video and audio inputs from any video component. This allows you to
use an image enhancer with one VCR to improve tape playback or off-
the- air viewing. Or to connect your camera, portable VCR or computer
direct to your TV. Simply connect audio and video to the inputs on the
RF MODULATOR...and the modulator RF output to the antenna
terminals on your TV. .. or to one of the inputs on your RF switcher.
You can also use the RF MODULATOR to feed the output of asingle
VCR to two TV sets at the same time with little or no signal loss. This
allows people to watch the same tape at the same time in separate
locations. In addition to the RF output, the modulator provides loop-
through audio and video outputs. This allows you to make aseparate
output connection to a VCR or video monitor... or to any other
component that has avideo input.
$149.00
DETAILER IMAGE ENHANCER
·········
41-41b>-
SSYTNETRHEEOSIZER
-
MO
e
INTEGRATED VIDEO ENHANCER
SERIES ll
PROC AMP
Color Processing Amplifier
The PROC AMP is avideo processing amplifier designed to correct color and contrast errors. It can also be used to create fade-outs and fade-ins, or to remove color side effects from black and white programs. The chroma gain and phase controls adjust color level and tint, while the luminance gain control adjusts contrast/brightness in
very much the same manner as the contrast and color controls on aTV set. The PROC AMP controls have greater range, however, and can operate during recording, not just during playback when it is often too late to make adequate correction. The luminance gain control is also
supported by alevel meter to insure accurate adjustment. Recordings exhibiting shifts in color saturation or tint, or recordings which appear
too dark or too bright benefit greatly from PROC AMP correction.
Camera- recorded scenes can also be adjusted for overall correction or to match one shot with another, or to balance one camera to another.
Four distribution- amplified outputs are also provided for feeding
multiple VCRs and/or monitors.
$349.00
SERIES II
Series II enhancement components give the VCR or video camera user a lot for a minimal price: quality and dependability; easy-to-follow instructions; simple, plug-in installation ( for most applications); a two-year limited warranty. Available now in black.
The Series ll Detailer ED Image Enhancer is designed to improve picture detail and sharpness, and improve recordings as you make them. It incorporates enhancement and noise reduction features -- and can be used between two VCRs, aVCR and an RF modulator/TV combination ( for viewing purpose only), or avideo camera and one VCR.
$99.95
The Series II Stereo Synthesizer is designed to improve TV and VCR
sound quality for recording or listen:ng purposes. It incorporates a
patented stereo simulation system, a separation control, dimension
controls, and ahiss filter -- and can be used between aTV ( with audio
output), VCR, or other mono ( monaural) sound source and astereo
receiver, stereo VCR, or stereo recorder.
$129.00
The Series II Integrated Video Enhancer is designed to improve picture detail and sharpness, eliminate copyguard, and improve recordings as you make them. It incorporates enhancement, stabilization, noise reduction, and RF modulation features -- and can be used between a VCR, video camera, or video disc player and aVCR/TV combination
(for recording purposes) or TV ( for viewing purposes only). $159.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 207
SL WABER
DIVISION OF SL INDUSTRIES
300 Harvard Ave. Westville, NJ 08093 (609) 456-5400 Telex 844509
MULTIPLE OUTLET STRIPS
UL15
UL17
"1 \041. UL18
THE COMPACT GROUP
Model 602 has 5outlets: Model 603 has 4outlets; Model 605 has 3 outlets, on-off switch, and pilot light; Model 608 has 3outlets on top, one outlet on one end ( for "series stringing"), master on-off switch, and pilot light. All units have " U" ground outlets. Overall Size: 8-5/8"L x 2-3/8"W x1-1/2"H. Mounting: Type Ion 8-1/4" centers. Case Color: Gray.
Model
602 602-15 603 603-15 603CB 603CB-15 605CB 605CB-15 608CB 608CB-15
Protection
Fuse Fuse Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker
No. of Outlets
5 5 4 4 4 4 3 3 4 4
Cord Length
Feet
6 15
6 15
6 15
6 15
6 15
Shpg. Weight
Lbs.
11/2 2 11/2 2 11/2 2 11/2 2 11/2 2
Net Each
1-9
$14.25 17.25 18.35 21.35 18.35 21.35 20.15 24.00 22.55 25.55
UL24M
UL26
UL32
UL32P
THE MID-LENGTH GROUP
Model 15 and 17 are designed for "series stringing" with an outlet on one end and the power cord on the other. Model 15 is the control unit, with on-off switch, pilot light, fuse (or circuit breaker), and 7outlets. Model 17, with 9outlets, is the slave unit. Model 18 has 9outlets; Model 24 has 6outlets, on-off switch, pilot light, and fuse (or circuit breaker). Model 32 has four color-coded, individually switched outlet sets with circuit breaker protection; the switches on the Model 32 are illuminated to serve as pilot lights. Overall Size: 13-1/8"L x2-3/8"W x 1-1/2"H. Mounting: Type Ion 12-3/4" centers. Case Color: Gray.
Model
Protection
No. of Outlets
Cord Length
Feet
Shpg. Weight
Lbs.
Net Each
1-9
15
Fuse
7
6
2
$30.25
15-15
Fuse
7
15
21/ 2
33.25
15CB
Circuit Breaker
7
6
2
30.25
15CB-15
Circuit Breaker
7
15
21 /2
33.25
17
9
6
2
21.55
17-15
9
15
21/ 2
24.55
18
9
6
2
20.55
18-15 24
Fuse
9
15
21/ 2
6
6
2
23.50 27.50
24-15
Fuse
6
15
21/ 2
30.50
24CB
Circuit Breaker
6
6
2
27.50
24CB-15
Circuit Breaker
6
15
21/ 2
32PCB
Circuit Breaker
4
6
2
30.50 40.65
32PCB-15 Circuit Breaker
4
15
21/ 2
43.65
Maximum Rating: 15 A, 125 VAC, 60 Hz, 1875 Watts, Continuous Duty.
· 4
THE DELUXE GROUP
Model 25 has 7color-coded, individually switched outlet sets, amaster on-off switch, and pilot light. All switches in the 25P Series are illuminated. Model 800 has 10 outlets and an illuminated, master on-off switch. All units have circuit breaker protection and " U" ground outlets. Overall Size: 13-7/16"L x4-1/4"W x1-1/2"H. Mounting: Type I on 13-1/8" x2-7/8" centers. Case Color: Gray.
Model
Protection
No. of Outlets
Cord Length
Feet
Shpg. Weight
Lbs.
Net Each
1-9
CORDGARDTM ELECTRICAL CORD DUCTING
A quick, inexpensive way to keep people from tripping over electrical cords that must be run across floors or flat surfaces. Comes complete and ready to use; includes double-faced adhesive tape to prevent sliding on smooth surfaces, or, it can be permanently attached with epoxy cement. For carpeted floors, ribbed slots on the bottom prevent movement. The ducting is made of tough, flexible vinyl and can be used indoors or outdoors. Measures 3"W x9/16"H. Center channel will accept cords up to 7/16" diameter and is slit for easy cord insertion. The standard color is beige which will harmonize with every decor; other colors are available on special order.
25CB 25CB-15 25PCB
25PCB-15
800CB 800CB-15
Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker
7
6
3
$52.75
7
15
31/2
55.75
7
6
3
7
15
31/2
10
6
3
10
15
31/2
67.65 70.65 40.65 43.65
Model
0-6- BE 0- 15-BE G-50-BE
Color
Beige Beige Beige
Length Feet
6 15 50
Weight Lbs.
4 9 29
Net Each
$11.55 25.40 78.70
VT- 208
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SL WABER
DIVISION OF SL INDUSTRIES
300 Harvard Ave. Westville, NJ 08093 (609) 456-5400 Telex 844509
These multiple outlet strips have passed the rigid testing of Underwriters Laboratories and bear the UL label. Many models also have CSA certification. All models are designed to exceed NEC requirements and meet OSHA standards. All units are rated 15 amperes, 125 VAC, 60 Hz, 1875 watts, continuous duty and have " U" ground outlets, circuit breaker protection, 14/3 SIT power supply cords, and grounded steel cases. CSA certified units are indicated by an asterisk following the model number.
THE PREMIER GROUP
UL LISTED MULTIPLE OUTLET STRIPS
THE COMPACT GROUP
New designs feature a slim, contoured shape and color-coordinated case and components. Model ULA4E has 4 outlets: Model ULA4TME has 4 outlets and illuminated master switch; Model ULA6E has 6 outlets: Model ULA6TME has 6 outlets and illuminated master switch. All have circuit breaker protection. Case Color: Beige. Model ULA4 Series- Overall Size: 9 1/4" lg. X 2 3/8" w. X I" h. Mounting: Type III on 8 1/4" centers. Model ULA6 Series- Overall Size: 12" lg. X 2 3/8" w. x 1" h. Mounting: Type III on 10 15/16" centers.
Model ULA4E-6 ULA4E-15 ULA4TME-6 ULA4TME-15 ULA6E-6 ULA6E-15 ULA6TME-6 ULA6TME-15
No. of Outlets
4 4 4 4 6 6 6 6
Cord Length,
Feet 6
15 6
15 6
15 6
15
Shin. Wt., Lbs. 2 2 1/2 2 2 1/2 2 1/2 3 2 1/2 3
Net Each
1-9 $19.40
22.75 23.30 26.65 24.65 28.00 28.30 31.65
Model UL602CB has 5 outlets: Model UL603CB has 4 outlets: Model UL605CB has 3 outlets, on-off switch, and pilot light: aMosdweiltchU,L6an0d8CpBilohtasli4ghto.utAleltls h(a3vteopcioructuiltetsbraenadke1r epnrdotoeucttlieotn). Overall Size: 8 5/8" lg. X 2 3/8" w. X I 1/2" h. Case Color: Blue. Mounting: Type II on 5 13/16" centers.
Model UL602C13-6* UL602CB-15* UL603CB-6* UL603CB-15* UL605CB-6* UL605CB-15* UL608CB-6* UL608CB-15"
No. of Outlets
5 ç 4 4 3 3 4 4
Cord Length,
Feet 6
15 6
15 6
15 6 15
ShPg. Wt., Lbs. 2 2 1/2 2 2 1/2 2 2 1/2 2 2 1/2
Net Each
1-9 $21.50
24.80 20.35 23.65 23.15 26.50 24.80 28.15
THE MID- LENGTH GROUP
THE PERMANENT- INSTALLATION GROUP
· êt ·
a4. 4* * 'ÀF..*
·
*
ie,,,
· ir *
Designed to be wired into a fixed installation by means of the furnished wire nuts. They do not have a power supply cord
nor a circuit breaker. The base is screwed down in the de-
sired location, and the cover is fastened to the base with
soenlf-btoatphpienngdsscorfewcso.verK.noOcvkeoraultls
for Size:
1/2" fittings are provided 1 1/2" w. X 1 3/8" h. X
length as in table belov. Case Color: Blue.
Model 4305 4309 4407 4413 4508 4515 4607 4610 4619
Outlet Centers,
Inches 7 3 1/2 7 3 1/2 7 3 1/2
10 1/2 7 3 1,2
No. of Outlets
5 9 7 13 8 15 7 10 19
Length, Feet
3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 6
5hpg. Wt., Lbs.
:1 4 f -Ç h 6 6
Net Each
1-9 $26.50
29.40 30.75 39.50 33.00 45.15 32.00 37.15 53.25
Models UL15CB and UL17CB are designed for " series stringing" with a convenient outlet on one end. Model UL15CB is the control unit with on-off switch, pilot light, and 7 outlets: Model UL17CB is the slave unit with 9 outlets. Model UL18CB has 9 outlets on one plane: Model UL24CB has 6 outlets, on -off switch, and pilot light. Model UL24MCB has the same features as Model UL24CB. except that it has a0-150 VAC voltmeter instead of a pilot light. Model UL32PCB has 4 color coded. individually switched outlet sets with built -in pilot lights. All units have circuit breaker protection Overall Size: 13 1/8" lg. X 2 3/8" w. x 1 1/2" h. Case Color: Blue Mounting: Type II on 10 3/8' centers.
Model UL15CB-6` UL15CB-15' UL17CB-6 UL17CB-15 UL18CB-6 UL18CB-15 UL24CB-6* UL24CB-15` UL32PCB-6* UL32PCB-15
No. of Outlets
7 q 9 9 6 6 4 4
Cord Length,
Feet 6
15 6
15 6
15 6
15 6
15
ShIgg. Wt., Lbs.
2 1/2 3 2 1/2 3 2 1/2 3 2 1/2 3 2 1/2 3
Net Each
1-9 $31.55
34.90 29.75 33.05 31.05 34.40 28.15 31.50 42.75 46.05
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 209
SL WABER
DIVISION OF SL INDUSTRIES 300 Harvard Ave. Westville, NJ 08093 (609) 456-5400 Telex 844509
THE RACK MOUNT GROUP
MULTIPLE OUTLET STRIPS
THE TRIM- LINE GROUP
s.
iteeMaggifflà---ta
MI MD
4
4
4>
·oe
ve
4.
410.
lb 48,lb
0. lib
lb,4>
ilb· · ·
·
46. 4>
I. 4.
·10.
. '* 41.
·
% \10. t4 11
Space- saving strips are ideal for racks, workbenches, and lab tables. Model 7408 is 4feet long and has 8outlets. Model 7415 is 4feet long and has 15 outlets. Model 7610 is 6feet long and has 10 outlets. Model 7619 is 6feet long and has 19 outlets. All
units have " U" ground outlets. Models 7408 and 7415 -- Overall Length: 49-1/16". Mounting Centers: 48-3/4". Models 7610 and 7619 -- Overall Length: 73-1/16". Mounting
Centers: 72-3/4". Color: Gray.
i,111111iiiI!r1
Rack mounted outlet strips offer instant power distribution either from the front, the back, or a combination of both. Model 900 has 6 outlets, circuit breaker, illuminated master on- off switch all on the front. Model 903 has the same features as Model 900 except in aslim- line version. Model 904 has a circuit breaker, illuminated master on- off switch, and 2outlets on the front; it also has 4outlets on the back. Model 911 has a circuit breaker and illLminated master on- off switch on the front and 6outlets on the back. Models 900 and 904 -- Overall Size: 19" lg. x3-15/32" w. ( front plate) x2-3/8" d. Mounting Centers: 18-1/4" x3" Models 903 and 911 -- Overall Size: 19" lg. x1-23/32" xZ3/8" d. Mounting Centers: 18-1/4" x 1-1/4". Color: Black.
Model 7408 7408-15 7415 7415-15 77661100-15 7619 7619-15
Length, Feet
4 4 4
4 6 6 6 6
No. of Outlets
8 8 15 15 1() 10 19 19
Cord Length,
Feet 6 15 6 15 6 15 6 15
Slum Wt., Lbs. 4 1/4 5 451/4 6 1/2 7 1/4 6 1/2 7 1/4
MOUNTING STYLE
Net Each
1-9
$39.05 42.05 47.65 50.65 48.80 51.80
58.75
61.75
Model
No. of Outletst
Cord Length,
Feet
900C Bt 900CB-15t 903CBt 903CB-15t 904CBt 904CB-15t 911CBt 911CB-15t
6F
6
6F
15
6F
6
6F
15
2F, 4B
6
2F, 4B
15
6B 6B
6 15
All models protected by circuit breaker. = front; B = back.
Sling. Wt., Lbs. 3 3 1/2 2 1/2 3 3 3 1/2 2 1/2 3
Net Each
1-9
445.40 48.40 43.00 46.00 47.65 50.65 45.40 48.40
Type I
Maximum Rating: 15 A, 125 VAC, 60 Hz, 1875 Watts, Continuous Duty.
VT- 210
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SL WABER
DIVISION OF SL INDUSTRIES
300 Harvard Ave. Westville, NJ 08093 (609) 456-5400 Telex 844509
POWER MASTER TU Line Monitor Power Conditioners
Solid-state electronic plug-in devices, whether they be asimple calculator, an expensive instrument, or acomputer system, are subject to very hostile environments caused by electrical disturbances coming through the utility power lines that feed them, or generated by electrical equipment within abuilding. Usually, the solution to this problem has been the installation of a " dedicated" or separate power line to the wall receptacle that powers the sensitive equipment. Even with this expensive installation, equipment damage, memory failure, erroneous data input and output caused by thunderstorms, equipment switching, and other " electrical pollution", are still common occurrences.
Power Master Line Monitor Power Conditioners eliminate the requirement of a separate, dedicated, branch circuit. They have the latest solid-state technology. Most models have multi- stage filter networks, continuous voltage spike protection, RFI, EMI, and EMP noise rejection, anti-ground loop design, shielded power cords, and more, all in
MODEL LM 1100
POWER LINE CONDITIONERS
one package. Your equipment can work without interruption even when the power conditioner is dissipating ahigh voltage spike. Also, all models have an easily resettable 15 amp circuit breaker in the rare case of a voltage spike that exceeds the design limits of the power conditioner.
Power Master Line Monitor Power Conditioners protect against spike damage by filtering both the hot line and the neutral line. In addition, the filter is bidirectional, it dissipates both incoming spikes and outgoing spikes created by your equipment. The Power Master filter system is passive, it operates only when avoltage spike occurs. When aspike is sensed, the Power Master instantaneously clamps or reduces the over- voltage to alevel that is safe for use by your equipment. The spike, depending upon its voltage and the design of your Power Master, is harmlessly dissipated, either in the form of heat, through the grounding system, or both. All noise- protected models have athreestage passive noise filter system, a high frequency filter and a low frequency filter that operate in the transverse mode, the common mode, or both. The high and low ftequency filters overlap to give double protection in the mid- range frequencies where it is needed the most.
MODEL LM 1200
MODEL LM 1100
Model LM 1100 is awall plug-in unit designed for use at the wall receptacle. Ready to use, just plug it in. Provides one " U" ground duplex outlet accommodating two plugs. Contains one metal-oxide varistor for spike protection. Case is steel with baked- on black finish; outlets are also black. Measures 4-1/8" x3-1/4" x1-5/16". Weighs just 1-1/2 lbs.
·Max. Spike Energy Dissipation: 50 joules one time, 25 joules with repeated usage, self- restoring · Max. Spike Voltage: 6000 volts · Clamping Spike Voltage: 325 volts · Surge Current Clamping Ratio:
No greater than 2.03:1 · Max. Spike Current: 2000 amps · Clamping Response Time: 10 nanoseconds or less · Environment: For indoor use in dry location
Model LM 1100 Power Line Conditioner -- Net Each
$39.95
MODEL LM 2100
MODEL LM 1200
The Model LM 1200 is astrip type power line conditioner with 3 " U"
ground duplex outlets accommodating 6 plugs. Contains 3 metaloxide varistors for isolated spike protection. Case is steel with baked-on beige finish; outlets, power cord, and illuminated master switch are also beige. Measures 11-15/ 16" x2-5/16" x1" and weighs just 2 lbs. Mounts by means of keyhole slots on 10-15/16" centers. Power cord is 14/3 SJT 9 feet long.
·Max. Spike Energy Dissipation: 50 joules one time, 25 joules with repeated usage, self- restoring · Max. Spike Voltage: 6000 volts ·Clamping Spike Voltage: 325 volts · Surge Current Clamping Ratio: No greater than 2.03:1 · Max. Spike Current: 2000 amps · Clamping Response Time: 10 nanoseconds or less · Environment: For indoor use in dry locations
Model LM 1200 Power Line Conditioner -- Net Each
$47.95
MODEL LM 2200
e ·-z 4 \ Pi-4
MODEL LM 2100
The Model LM 2100 is awall plug-in unit designed for use at the wall receptacle. Ready to use, just plug it in. Provides one " U" ground duplex outlet for two plugs. Unit contains six- stage filter network providing isolated voltage spike and noise protection for each outlet. Case is steel with baked- on black finish; outlets are black. Measures 5-1/2" x4-1/2" x 1-5/16" and weighs 4 lbs.
·Max. Spike Energy Dissipation: 50 joules one time, 25 joules with repeated usage, self- restoring · Max. Spike Voltage: 7000 volts ·Clamping Spike Voltage: 225 volts · Max. Spike Current: 2000 amps ·Surge Current Clamping Ratio: No greater than 1.5:1 · Clamping Response Time: 10 nanoseconds or less · Noise Rejection Frequency Response: 1kHz to 100MHz · Attenuation: 20 to 40cIB ( volt ratio) ·Noise Protection: Transverse mode · Environment: For indoor use in dry locations
Model LM 2100 Power Line Conditioner -- Net Each
$104.95
g le
MODEL LM 2200
The Model LM 2200 is an outlet strip type power line conditioner providing 8outlets, each of which has isolated spike protection. A sixstage filter network provides voltage spike and noise protection. Case is steel with baked-on beige finish; the outlets, power cord, and illuminated master on- off switch are also beige. Unit measures 20" x2" x1"
and weighs 6 lbs. Power cord is 14/3 SJT 9 feet long. Mounts by means of end slots on 19-3/4" centers.
· Max. Spike Energy Dissipation: 50 joules one time, 25 joules with
repeated usage, self- restoring · Max. Spike Voltage: 7000 volts ·Clamping Spike Voltage: 225 volts e Max. Spike Current: 2000 amps ·Surge Current Clamping Ratio: No greater than 1.5:1 · Clamping
Response Time: 10 nanoseconds or less · Noise Rejection Frequency Range: 1k Hz to 100MHz · Attenuation: 20 to 40dB ( volt ratio) · Noise Protection: Transverse mode · Env ronment: For indoor use in dry locations
Model LM 2200 Power Line Conditioner -- Net Each
$157.45
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 211
SL WABER
DIVISION OF SL INDUSTRIES
300 Harvard Ave Westville, NJ 08093 (609) 456-5400 Telex 844509
POWER LINE CONDITIONERS
MODEL LM 3100
MODEL LM 3200
LM 3100 SERIES
Model LM 3100
The Model LM 3100 is awall plug-in unit designed for use at wall receptacle. Provides two hospital-grade outlets with isolated spike protection. A six- stage filter network provides voltage spike and noise protection. Case is steel with baked-on beige finish; outlets are also beige. Unit measures 5-1/2" x4-1/2" x 1-5/16" and weighs 5lbs.
· Max. Spike Energy Dissipation: 50 joules one time, 25 joules with repeated usage, self- restoring · Max. Spike Voltage: 7000 volts
·Clamping Spike Voltage: 225 volts · Surge Current Clamping Ratio: No greater than 1.5:1 · Max. Spike Current: 2000 amps · Clamping
Response Time: 10 nanoseconds or less · Noise Rejection Frequency Range: 1kHz to 100MHz · Attenuation: 20 to 40dB ( volt ratio) · Noise
Protection: Transverse and common modes · Leakage Current: Leakage to ground lead does not exceed 10 microamperes · Environment: For indoor use in dry locations.
Model LM 3100 Power Line Conditioner -- Net Each
$157.45
Model LM 3200
Model LM 3200 is astrip type power line conditioner providing 8outlets. A six-stage filter network provides voltage spike and noise protec-
tion. Each outlet has isolated grounding and isolated spike protection. Case is steel with baked-on beige finish; the hospital- grade outlets are ivory, shielded power cord is black, master on-off switch has black housing and amber illumination. Unit measures 20" x 2" x 1" and
weighs 7 lbs.
·Max. Spike Energy Dissipation: 50 joules one time, 25 joules with repeated usage, self- restoring · Max. Spike Voltage: 7000 volts ·Clamping Spike Voltage: 225 volts · Max. Spike Current: 2000 amps. · Surge Current Clamping Ratio: No greater than 1.5:1 ·Clamping Response Time: 10 nanoseconds or less · Noise Rejection
Frequency Range: 1kHz to 100MHz · Attenuation: 20 to 40dB ( volt ratio) · Shielded Power Cord Attenuation: Up to 60dB · Noise Protec-
tion: Transverse and common modes · Leakage Current: Leakage to ground lead does not exceed 10 microamperes · Environment: For indoor use in dry locations.
Model LM 3200 Power Line Conditioner -- Net Each
$262.45
Mom.
MODEL LM 4100
à-- à« à.·à«`>à.,,à`
IMF
lag
MODEL LM 4200
LM 4000 SERIES
Models LM 4100 and LM 4200 offer the best spike protection with the highest overvoltage handling capability and the quickest response
time. The series also offers the best noise suppression in both the common and transverse modes. Both models have RFI-shielded
power cords and isolated, hospital- grade, double-wipe, grounding
outlets for additional protection against noise. Included in both models is an AC voltmeter with color- coded scale to visually indicate that an undervoltage condition exists. An undervoltage sensing and warning system is also included. When the incoming line voltage drops to 105
volts or less, the warning system, consisting of ared light and abuzzer, will activate. If the low voltage is still within the operating range of the equipment, the operator can then choose to shut off the buzzer by
means of acutoff switch. The red pilot light, however, remains on, acting as aconstant reminder until the line undervoltage is corrected.
Model LM 4100
The Model LM 4100 is designed for rack or panel mounting with end
slots on 18-1/4" x 3" centers. Eight hospital-grade, " U" ground outlets are provided on the back of the unit. The front of the unit contains the master on- off switch, voltmeter, auto- manual switch,
warning buzzer, and warning light. Case is steel with baked- on black enamel finish; front cover is spun aluminum, outlets are ivory, power cord is black, switches are black, on indicator light is green, and undervoltage indicator light is red. A seven- stage filter network provides voltage spike and noise protection with each outlet having isolated spike protection. Front plate measures 19"L x3-15/32"W; the back cover measures 17"L x3-11/32"W x2-3/8"D. Unit weighs 15 lbs.
·Max. Spike Energy Dissipation: 300 joules one time, 150 joules with
repeated usage, self- restoring · Max. Spike Voltage: 10,000 volts ·Clamping Spike Voltage: + / - 20 volts as it appears on the sine wave; 190 volts, max. · Max. Spike Current: 6000 amps · Surge Current
Clamping Ratio: No greater than 1.63:1 · Clamping Response Time: 5 nanoseconds or less · Noise Rejection Frequency Range: 1kHz to
100MHz · Attenuation: 40 to 60dB ( volt ratio) · Shielded Power Cord Attenuation: Up to 60dB · Noise Protection: Transverse and common modes · Leakage Current: Leakage to ground lead does not exceed 10
microamperes · Environment: For indoor use in dry locations.
Model LM 4100 Power Line Conditioner -- Net Each
$524.95
Model LM 4200
The Model LM 4200 is aconsole type unit with sloping front and back panels; the front panel contains on- off switch, auto- manual switch,
voltmeter, " on" indicator light, undervoltage indicator light, and warning buzzer. The back panel contains 8 outlets and a circuit breaker. The eight outlets are hospital- grade, " U" ground type. Each
has isolated spike protection. Case is steel with woodgrain vinyl finish; outlets are ivory, power cord is black, switches are black, " on" indicator light is green, warning indicator light is red. A seven-stage filter network privides voltage spike and noise protection. Unit measures 13-1/2"L x4-1/8"W x4-7/8"H and weighs 15 lbs.
· Max. Spike Energy Dissipation: 300 joules one time, 150 joules with repeated usage, self- restoring · Max. Spike Voltage: 10,000 volts ·Clamping Spike Voltage: + /- 20 volts as it appears on the sine wave;
190 volts, max. · Max. Spike Current: 10,000 amps · Surge Current Clamping Ratio: No greater than 1.63:1 · Clamping Response Time: 5 nanoseconds or less · Noise Rejection Frequency Range: 1kHz to
100MHz · Attenuation: 40 to 60dB ( volt ratio) · Shielded Power Cord Attenuation: Up to 60dB · Mode Noise Protection: Transverse and
common · Leakage Current: Leakage to ground lead does not exceed 10 microamperes · Environment: For indoor use in dry locations.
Model LM 4200 Power Line Conditioner -- Net Each
$556.45
VT- 212
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SL WABER
DIVISION OF SL INDUSTRIES
300 Harvard Ave. Westville, NJ 08093 (609) 456-5400 Telex 844509
SPIKE AND NOISE SUPPRESSORS
e
DG115-S
DG 115-P
DATAGARD Spike and Noise Suppressors
Protects computers from system downtime, equipment failure, erroneous data and added service expense due to spike and electronic noise disturbances on the power line.
The DG115 Series includes 3 models:
DG115-5 12" strip for multiple plug-in, 6 outlets DG115-P Wall plug-in unit, 2 outlets DG115-C Console unit, 6 outlets
All models have asingle- stage spike filter and single- stage noise filter and provide protection to each outlet. Circuit breaker guards against power overloads.
LINEGARD POWER CONDITIONERS WITH SPIKE PROTECTION
DG115-P DG115-S DG115-C
$ 39.95 49.95 79.95
DG115-C
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model 00115-S 12" Strip for Multiple Plug -ln
Model 0G115- P Wall Plug-in Unit
Model 06115-C Console Unit
Outlets
inclucles 3 U ground duplexes Includes one U ground duplex Includes 6 U ground outlets
(6 outlets)
12 outlets)
on back of unit
Power Supply Cord
9foot 14 3SJT
6foot 14 ,3SJT with molded plug
Male Load Plug
Conveniently plugs into any 120 Volt outlet ( normal house current)
Voltage Spike Protection
Single Stage filler on each duplex
Single Stage filter
Single Stage filler for each outlet
Switches
Master switch with built-in pilot light
Pilot light shows when unit Each outlet controlled by asingle
is operable
switch with built-in pilot light
Overload Protection
15 Amp circuit breaker
15 Amp circuit breaker
15 Amp circuit breaker
Case
Seamless steel case with baked- on beige finish
Fabricated steel with baked- on
Wood- grained vinyl
beige finish
permanently adhered to metal heavy steel base with baked- on
black Mush
Component COICIfs
Outlets -- beige, circuit breaker Outlets -- beige, circuit breaker Outlets -- black, circuit breaker
-- gray, power supply cord -- -- beige, male load plug -- -- gray, power supply cord --
beige, switch -- beige, pilot
black, pilot light -- white
black. switches -- alternate
light -- amber
black and white, pilot light
-- amber
Dimensions
11 15/16"L vi 2firielifir xI'D
427/32'1.3 Ita-W.1 SiirD
g
x23/4"W.2 3/4"H
Mounting
Keyhole slot flush mounting -- 10 Is/le" center
Plugs into wall receptacle
Four protective rubber feet. no provisions for mounting
by fastening
Shipping Weight
2IDS
11/2 1bs
4lbs
DG315-P
DATAGARD"' Spike and Noise Suppressors
DG315-S
Protects computers from system downtime, equipment failure, erroneous data and added service expense due to spike and electronic
noise disturbances on the power line.
DATAGARD 315 Series Spike and Noise Suppressors from SL WABER provide an industrial grade three- stage spike filter and four-
stage noise filter, to protect against moderate to catastrophic spikes
and virtually all unwanted noise interference coming through the wall outlet. Without DATAGARD, your computer may exhibit loss of stored data, false input/output and equipment failure. And that means system downtime and costly service calls.. computer disasters!
The DG315 Series includes 3 models:
DG315-P Wall plug-in unit, 2 outlets DG315-S 16" strip, 6 outlets DG315-R 19" Rack or panel mount, 6 outlets
All three models feature aseven- stage filter network ( each outlet has spike protection) and 15 amp circuit breaker protection, to avoid power overloads.
DG315-P
DG315-S 0G315- R
$ 99.95
119.95 129.95
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Outlets Male load plug:
Power supply cord: Voltage spike and noise protection:
Overload protection: Case.
Model 06315P Wall Plug-in Unit
Includes one
ground
duplex ( 2outlets)
Conveniently plugs into any 120 volt outlet ( normal
house current)
Seven- stage filler network (each outlet has spike protection)
Pilot light shows when unit is operable
15 amp circuit breaker
Fabricated steel with baked- on beige finish
Model 1/03155 16 Strip for Multiple
Plug-in Includes 3duplexes
(6 outlets)
9foot 14 3SJT Seven- stage filter network
(each outlet has spike protection)
15 amp circuit breaker Fabricated steel with baked- on beige finish
Component colors:
Outlets -- beige, circuit breaker -- gray, male load
plug -- black, pilot light -- white
Case dimensions:
51,21. 41/2"w 15,1611
Outlets -- beige, power supply cord -- beige. master °nob switch -- beige, housing with built-in amber pilot light, circuit
breaker -- gray
1612'1.2 1/4"W.1"D
Mounting: Slapping weight:
Plugs into wall receptacle 5lbs
Key- hole slots -- 14" centers
5lbs
DG315-R
Model 06315R 19-Rack or Panel Mount
Includes 3duplexes 16 outlets)
6toot 14 3SJT Seven- stage filter network
leach outlet has spike protection)
15 amp circuit breaker Front plate -- brushed chrome steel. back -- fabricated steel with baked- on black finish Outlets -- black, power supply cord -- black, master switch -- black with built-in white pilot light, circuit breaker -- gray
1F9r1on.t1pl23at,3er--w
Back cover -- in 23/32'10v2 lyarD
Mounting Centers 18 1,41 . 1r 410/
7lbs
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT-213
LILIUM
el">le
M neneicr
%Or jg 011i
·
dill turn
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO & COMMERCIAL/INDUSTRIAL SOUND EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide --
1280 pages of Studio & Remote Audio Recording
Equipment & Systems for stage, concert, audito-
rium, arena, stadium, hall, church, industry,
business, commercial, school, hospital & hotel
sound reinforcement, background music, paging,
intercommunications, telephone & telecom-
munications systems & equipment.
$95.00
AUDIO-VISUAL & EDUCATIONAL/TRAINING COMPUTER EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide -- 1280 pages of projectors, screens, recorders, learning
aids, carrels, stands, tables, lecterns & equipment for multi- image & sound. Computers, disk drives,
furniture, graphics, magnetic media, modems, monitors, networks, paper/forms, printers,
power supplies, terminals & software. $95.00
BROADCAST EQUIPMENT & SERVICES Buyers
Gulde -- 1280 pages of Studio, Remote &
Location Equipment & Systems for television,
commercial & tape production, broadcast tele-
vision, radio, cable, pay & satellite TV, special
effects, animation & music video.
$95.00
COMPUTER EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide -- For
Professional, Scientific, Business, Industrial &
Commercial Applications. 1280 pages of micros,
minis, disk drives, furniture, graphics, digitizers,
plotters, boards, cables, cases, consultants, diag-
nostic & test keyboards, magnetic media, main-
tenance, modems, monitors, networks, paper/
forms, power/protection, printers, software,
supplies, tape drives, telecommunications,
terminals.
$95.00
SECURITY & CCTV EQUIPMENT Buyers Guide
-- For Industrial, Professional, Commercial & Busi-
ness Applications. 1280 pages of controls, annun-
ciators, power supplies, dialers, closed circuit TV,
wire, cable & equipment for remote monitoring,
space protection & central station.
$95.00
PROFESSIONAL PHOTOGRAPHY/MOTION PICTURE Buyers Guide -- Professionals in
Photography, Motion Picture, Multi- Image,
Audio- Visual, Film Production & Post Production
-- 1280 pages of studio, remote & location
equipment systems & supplies for Still, Cine, AV &
Film Production.
$95.00
INDUSTRIAL & PROFESSIONAL VIDEO EQUIP-
MENT Buyers Guide -- 1280 pages of cameras,
recorders, production & terminal equipment,
monitors, lighting, telecine, RF equipment, enclo-
sures, wire & cable.
$95.00
BILL DANIELS COMPANY, Inc.
9101 BOND · P 0 BOX 2056 SHAWNEE MISSION KANSAS 66201
. 13
CALL
TOLL FREE
1-800-255-6038
IN KANSAS: 1.913-492-9,30
27 N. Washington St. P.O. Box 117, Dept. BD Boyertown, PA 19512 (2 15) 367-605 5
AMP-1AND AMP-2AUDIO PROGRAM MONITORS
The AMP- 1and AMP- 2offer adual 3" x5" speaker system for high quality audio reproduction and a VU meter to monitor audio line levels.
Conveniently packaged, only 3-1/2" high and 4" deep, these compact units may be used in portable, mobile and studio applications.
The single input AMP- 1may be ordered with either balanced or un-
balanced inputs and the AMP- 2may be ordered in the same manner with switchable dual inputs.
The high performance and low cost of the AMP- 1and AMP- 2 will make them welcome additions to your video production system.
AMP- 1 Unbalanced Single Input AMP- 1B Balanced Single Input
$275.00 285.00
AMP-2 Unbalanced Dual Inputs
AMP-2B Balanced Dual Inputs AMP- 2C Dual Balanced and Unbalanced Inputs,
Switchable
315.00 335.00
360.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Inputs:
Single input balanced or single input un-
balanced ( AMP- 1)
Dual inputs balanced or dual inputs un-
balanced ( AMP- 2)
Dual inputs balanced or unbalanced, selec-
table ( AMP- 2C)
Connectors:
Balanced-XLR Unbalanced- RCA
Headphone Jack:
Front panel mounted 1/4" cutout type
VU Meter:
May be calibrated at 0 dBm, + 4 dBm or
+8 dBm at 0VU
Power Output:
2.5 watts maximum at 1kHz
Meter Response:
10 Hz to 50 kHz ± 3dB
Amplifier Response:
25 Hz to 50 kHz ± 3dB
Input Impedance:
Unbalanced 10K ( typical) Balanced 600
ohms
Maxmum Input:
AC: 3Volts RMS ( + 12 dBm)
DC: ± 5VDC
THD:
Typically less than 2% at 2watts from
25 Hz to 20 kHz Hum Rejection ( balanced
inputs only):
-45 dB
Size:
3.438" high x19" wide x4" deep
Weight:
7lbs., 8ozs.
Power:
110 VAC 50/60 Hz 20 watts max. Seven
foot 3- wire AC cord supplied
AMP -3AUDIO MONITOR AMPLIFIER
The AMP- 3 is a compact, rack mounted audio monitor/amplifier designed for use in any system application where accurate monitoring of line audio is necessary.
The three individually controlled channel inputs allow the AMP- 3to
be used in editing suites with new generation VTRs or as a control room audio monitor with the third channel used as an intercom input.
A convenient push-button switch array enables the operator to choose between the three inputs, mix inputs and select internal,
external or both speakers.
An easily visible, fast responding LED bargraph VU meter is incorporated into the AMP- 3and may be calibrated for different input
levels.
The amplifier section provides an output to drive an external speaker with minimal distortion and extremely accurate audio reproduction. A high quality internal speaker is in aseparate, acoustically insulated compartment within the unit. A front panel mounted 1/4" phone jack
is also provided for headphone use.
AMP- 3 Audio Monitor Amplifier
$650.00
AUDIO PROGRAM MONITORS/ MONITOR AMPLIFIER
AMP- 1 AM P-2 AM P-3
SPECIFICATIONS Inputs: Aux. Input:
Connectors: Outputs:
LED Bargraph VU Meter: Controls:
Freq. Response: Max. Power Output: THD: IMD: Hum Rejection of
Balanced inputs. Crosstalk Between
Balanced Inputs: Gain:
Size: Weight: Power:
Three, balanced ( 600 ohm) or unbalanced 110K ohm), selectable May be calilrated separately. Not displayed on meter and unaffected by tone control Balanced -- XLR Unbalanced-- RCA Rear panel spkr. output -- push type barrier strip Front panel headphone output -- 1/4" phone jack, cutout type May be calibrated at 0dBm, + 4dBm or +8dBm at 0VU Pwr., in spkr. select, ext. spkr. select; A input, B input, aux. input select switches Master gain, A gain, B gain aux. gain; bass Er treble 35-50 kHz, ± 3dB at 1kHz 8ohms -- 8.82 watts 4ohms -- 13.32 watts at 1kHz 8ohms . 18% at 1/2 power . 18% at full power .23% at - 12 dBm below max. output
-45 dB
at 20 kHz -48 dBm average at 1kHz unmeasurable at 1kHz Ch. A + 28 dBV
Note: Unit calibrated at CdBm Ch. B + 28 dBV Aux. + 25 dBV 3.438" high x19" wide x8.125 - deep 10 lbs., 8oz. 110VAC 50,60 Hz 30 watts max. Seven foot 3- wire AC cord supplied
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VT- 215
VT- 216
INDEX
A
AC Multiple Outlet Strips . VT-147, 208-210
ADC Magnetic Controls Co Adaptors, Video
VT-2, 3 VT-34, 35, 196, 199
ADDA Corp. Allen Avionics, Inc. Ampex Corp.
Analyzers Artel Communications Corp.
VT-4, 5 VT-6-11
VT- 12
VT-51 VT- 14
Asaca/Shlbasoku Corp. of America
VT- 13
Audio Distribution Amplifiers
VT-25, 29, 42, 67, 75, 84
125, 160, 162. 1E3, 193
Audio Mixers Audio/Program Monitoring Automation Equipment
VT- 166-169 VT-155, 203, 214, 215
VT-30, 164
Beckman Instruments, Inc B & K Precision/Dynascan Corp. Blonder-Tongue Labs, Inc. Robert Bosch Corp. BSM Broadcast Systems, Inc.
VT- 15 VT-16, 17 VT-18, 19 VT-20-24
VT-25
Cable Reels Cables, Video Central Dynamics Corp. Channelmatic Channel Processor Cohu, Inc. Color Correction Commercial Insert System Comprehensive Video Supply Corp. Comsonlcs, Inc. Connectors, Video
D
Data Reader Datatek Corp Digital Programming Products Dyma Engineering Dynair Electronics, Inc. Dynatech Data Systems
E
Effects Memory System Encoders/Decoders Enhancers
VT-72, 73 VT-34-36, 188, 196, 199
VT-26-28 VT-29, 30
VT-19 VT-31-33 VT-50, 187 VT-30, 136 VT-34-36
VT-37 VT-34, 36, 189, 196, 199
VT-88 VT-38-41
VT- 149 VT-42
VT-43-45 VT-46
VT- 159 VT-13, 24. 48, 50, 123, 124
VT-47, 86, 187, 205-207
Faroudia Laboratories, Inc. Fiber Optic Modules Fiber Optic Systems For-A Corp. of America Fortel, Inc Foundation Electronic Instruments, Inc.
G
The Grau Valley Group, Inc.
H
Clifford B. Hannay & Son, Inc. Harris Corp. HEDCO/Hughes Electronic Devices Corp. Henry Engineering Hortzon Intl Hum Eliminators
VT-47, 48 VT-58-61 VT-14, 70, 71, 131 VT-49-52 VT-53-57 VT-58-61
VT-62-71
VT-72, 73 VT-74
VT-75-81 VT-82 VT-83
VT-6, 24
ICM Video Ikegami Electronics, Inc. Image Correction image Video, Ltd. Intercommunication Master Stations Interface Amplifier Intergroup Video Systems Interphase
VT-84-86 VT-87 VT-53
VT-88-98 VT- 157 VT-82
VT-99-103 VT- 104-105
Javelin Electronics, Inc. JVC Co. of America
VT- 106-108 VT- 109
Leader Instruments Corp. Leitch Video of America, Inc. Lenco, Inc. Unk Electronics/TEA Inc.
VT- 111-114 VT- 115-118 VT- 119-124
VT-125
3IA Co.
VT- 126-130
MA-Corn Video Systems, Inc
V7-131
Machine Control Systems/Master Control Switchers
VT-12, 20
28, 83, 94-96, 101, 102, 105, 126, 138, 192. 200, 201
Matthey/TEA, Inc.
VT- 132
Merlin Engineering Works
VT- 133
Microtime, Inc
VT-134-136
Mobile Television Production System
VT- 161
Monitoring Panels
VT-97
Mono-Stereo Coherency Evaluator
VT- 155
Multidyne Electronics
VT- 137
Mycomp Technologies Corp.
VT- 138
N
Non- Linear Systems Div. Kaypro Corp. Nova Systems, Inc
VT-139, 140 VT- 141
California Paltex Corp. Panasonic Industrial Co. Party Line User Stations Pelco Sales, Inc Perma Power Electronics, Inc Pioneer Video, Inc Power Converters Power Line Conditioners Pulse & Video Delay Lines OSI Systems, Inc.
-GI
VT- 142 VT- 143 VT-158, 194 VT- 144-146 VT-147, 148 VT- 149 VT- 197 VT-211, 212 VT-7-9, 132 VT- 150-154
The Real World Technologies Group, Inc.
VT-155, 156
Relays
VT-37
ROH Coup
V7-157, 158
Roll Effects Systems
VT- 134
Roes Video, Ltd. Routing Switchers
VT- 159 VT-25, 29, 38, 39, 62-65, 76-78
89-93, 98-100, 126-128, 190, 191, 202
Shintron Co., Inc.
VT- 160
Shook Electronic Enterprises, Inc.
VT- 161
Sigma Electronics, Inc. Signal Distribution System
VT- 162, 163 VT-26 27
Signal Processing Equipment
VT-5, 6, 16, 17, 23, 24, 47, 48
50, 56, 57, 68, 69, 85, 86, 98, 103, 104, 108, 115, 117, 129, 134, 142 150, 152, 153. 156, 162, 181, 194, 205-207
H.A. Solutec, Ltd Sony Corp. of America
VT- 164 VT-165
Spike & Noise Suppressors Surge Supressors
VT-213 VT-42, 148
Sync & Test Signal Generators
VT-13, 16, 17, 50, 111.116, 118
137, 150, 151, 172-178, 183
Tascam/Teac Corp. of America
VT- 166-169
Tektronix, Inc.
VT- 170-183
Teiernet/Geotel, Inc.
VT-184. 185
Temtron Electronics, Ltd.
VT- 186
Terminal Equipment
VT-22, 37. 52, 103, 104, 119-124
138, 156. 193, 194
Test Equipment/Meters
VT-13, 15-17, 48, 50, 51, 110-114, 116
118, 137, 139, 140, 150, 151, 154, 170-185
Thomson - CSF Broadcast, Inc.
VT- 187
Time Base Correctors
VT-4, 49, 54, 55, 74, 109, 135, 136, 141
Trompeter Electronics, Inc.
VT-188, 189
Turntable Controller
VT-82
TV Line Equalizers
VT-9, 33, 75
U -V-W
Utah Scientific, Inc.
VT- 190-192
Vanco - Chicago, Inc.
VT- 196
Vanner, Inc.
VT- 197
Video Aids of Colorado
W-193-195
Video Distribution Equipment
VT-22, 25, 29, 32, 41, 44, 45, 66
67, 75, 84, 87, 103, 121, 125, 129, 137, 152, 160, 162, 163
186, 189, 192-195, 204
Video Filters
VT-10, 11, 18, 132
Video Interface Products
VT- 198
Videolinic/Xantech Corp.
VT- 199
Videomedla, Inc
VT-200, 201
Video Measurement Products
V7-51
Video Patch Systems
VT-2, 3, 46, 188, 189
Video Processors
VT-47, 53, 68. 86, 117, 129, 133, 136
142, 149, 198
Video Source Identifiers
VT-151, 153
Videotek, Inc.
VT-202-204
%loran, Inc
VT-205-207
SL Waber/SL Industries, Inc.
VT-208-213
World Video, Inc.
VT-214, 215
MONITORS
A
Amdek Corp. Asaca/Shibasoku Corp. of America
Audiotronics
VM-2, 3 VM-4 VM-5
Barco Electronic n.v./Elector USA, Inc Barco Industries Inc Beckman Instruments, Inc Robert Bosch Corp
Bourbon Street Assoc./TEA, Inc
VM-6-8 VM-9, 10
VM-11 VM-12
VM-13
Cohu, Inc Conrac Corp./Conrac Div.
VM-14 VM-15-19
Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc. Draper Shade & Screen Co.
D
VM-20, 21 VM-22, 23
Eiki Intl., Inc. Electrohome Electronics Electronic Systems Products, Inc ELMO Mfg. Co
E
VM-24 VM-25-31 VM-32-34
VM-35
Galaxy Audio Visual General Electric Co. General Technical Corp. Gould Electronics
G
VM-36 VM-37
VM-38 VM-39
Hitachi Denshi, Ltd. Hitachi Sales Corp. of America Hughes Aircraft Co
H
VM-40-45 VM-46, 47
VM-48
Ikegami Electronics, Inc. Inflight Services, Inc Interand Corp.
VM-49-52 VM-53 VM-54
Jensen Sound Laboratories JVC Company of America
VM-55 VM-56-62
Kloss Video Corp
VM-63-65
Leader Instrument Corp. Lenco, Inc. Lucasey Mfg. Co., Inc
rtA
MPO Videotronics Mitsubishi Electric Sales America, Inc.
N
NEC Home Electronics ( USA), Inc. Non- Linear Systems/Kaypro Corp. Northern Information Technology, Inc./NIT
Panasonic Industrial Co Pivotelli, USA Proton Corp
RCA Service Co. RCA Closed- Circuit Video Equipment
Sharp Electronics Corp. Sony Corp. of America Standard/Audiscan Corp
Tektronix, Inc. Temtron Electronics Ltd.
Ultra-Vision/Elector USA, Inc. Universal Satellite Corp University Research Co
U
Videomate/Universal Satellite Corp. Videotek, Inc. Viscotec Index
VM-66-70 VM-71-73 VM-74, 75
VM-76, 77 VM-78
VM-79 VM-80 VM-81
VM-82-91 VM-92
VM-92, 93
VM-94, 95 VM-96
VM-97 VM-98-105
VM-106
VM-107-115 VM-116
VM-117 VM-118 VM-119
VM-118 VM-120-126
VM-127 VM-128
1985 Bill Daniels Co., Inc. Shawnee Mission, KS
VM-1
A NEEK CORP
2201 Lively Blvd. Elk Grove Village, IL 60007 (312) 595-6890 Telex 280-803
COLOR MONITORS
eye°
· ·
'Itrtereseter''
"" tIeUteist-41" ···· '7,ielfet"PcniSee'ai -
--ete eme
eereer:
COLOR 300
VIDEO 300
VIDEO 310A
COLOR 300
The Amdek Color 300 is a high quality, composite ( NTSC) color monitor for use with awide variety of personal computers. The inexpensive price of the Color 300 makes it the ideal alternative to acolor TV in ahome computer environment. The attractive cabinet makes the Color 300 aesthetically compatible with any home computer.
FEATURES
·Quaky 260 ( horizontal) dots x300 ( vertical) line resolution provides a vivid color display for games and graphics
·13" black matrix ( dark bulb) picture tube (CRT) provides for sharper contrast
· Built-in speaker and audio amplifier for those computers that do not contain speakers, but do have sound capabilities
· Head phone jack to facilitate educational applications or private audio
·Easy access, front- mounted operator controls
·Capable of providing up to 40 columns x25 lines of text · FCC and UL approved for use in the office or in the home ·Capable of supporting 1) A standard composite color video signal
(NTSC) and, 2) Separate chrominance and luminance video signals such as those provided by the Commodore 64 ·Optional tilt'swivel stand for more flexibility in viewing angles
Color 300
$349.00
VIDEO 310A
The Amdek Video 310A has TTL inputs ( intensity controlled) for compatibility with the IBM PC computer. The 12" screen produces sharp,
vivid text or displays and may be ordered with green or amber phosphor CRT to suit your preference. The industrial grade cabinetry has a handy built-in carrying handle and is styled to enhance the appearance of any computer set-up. The screen surface is non- glare to reduce eye
fatigue and distracting reflections. Other design features include a 18MHz bandwidth and 960 lines ( center) resolution for asharp, clear picture.
FEATURES
· Fully compatible with IBM Personal Computer monochrome printer card ( includes intensity bit)
·80 x24 character display capability ·Non- glare screen, amber or green phosphor CRT · 18MHz bandwidth · Built-in handle for portability
Video 310A
$230.00
VIDEO 300
Everything about the Amdek 12" Video 300 monitor is designed for easy reading and operation. It's compatible with most personal computers, using acomposite video signal to produce sharp, vivid text or displays. The Video 300 is styled to enhance the appearance of any system and the non-glare screen permits no- strain viewing without distracting reflections. The CRT may be ordered with amber or green phosphor to suit your preference. Other design features include an 18MHz bandwidth and 960 lines ( center) resolution for asharp, clear picture. Lightweight and portable, the Video 300 has industrial grade
cabinetry with a built-in carrying handle. It's both UL and FCC approved.
FEATURES
·Green or amber phosphor for easier viewing ·Non- glare screen eliminates distracting reflections · 18MHz bandwidth ·80 x24 character display · Lightweight ( 17 lbs.)
Video 300 ( Amber) Video 300 ( Green)
S199.00 179.00
VIDE0300 COMPATIBILITY
Video
Interface
Computer
300
Cable
IBM -PC
.
Apple III
·
·
Apple II
·
Atari- 800
·
·
VIC-20
Commodore- 64
TI- 99
TRS-80
·
·
Osborne
·
·
·Interface Cable Required
VIDEO 310A COMPATIBILITY
Video
Interface
Computer
310A
Cable
IBM-PC
· '(included)
Apple III
Apple II
Atari- 800
VIC-20
Commodore- 64
TI- 99
TAS -80
Osborne
'Interface Cable Required
COMPUTER/CABLE COMPATIBILITY FOR AMDEK MONITORS
Computer Atari 800 + XL
Video 300A IG)
AC200
Video 3113A
Color 300
AC9C0
Color 500
INTSCI
AC900
Color 500
(KGB)
Color 600
Color 700/710
APPle II + Apple Ile
AC100 AC100
AC100 AC100
AC100 AC100
···AC1000 ··· AC1000 ··· AC1000 "AC1100 ·· AC1100 ·· AC1100
Apple Ilc Comm VIC-20
AC 103
AC100 AC900
AC100 AC902
AC1100 AC1100 ' AC1100
Comm 64
AC200
AC800
AC9GD
IBM PC/XT IBM PCJr. Comp AO
SAC1C0 AC TOO ACTO3
Cable Included
SAC100 AC100 AC100
SACRO AC1OD AC 100
'AC1000 AC1200 ACI000
AC1000 'ACI200 AC1000
·AC1000 ·AC1200 AC1000
Columbia
SAC100
tCable Included
OAC100 / AC100
ACICOO
Corona
aAC*00
MAC100 / AC100 · AC1000
'ROB interface required ··DVM-III or DVM-80e ROB card required ···DVM-II ROB card required
tSpecial power adaptor and morochrome TTL card required aReouires composite adaptor card may Ist part of ROB card)
AC1000 AC1000
AC1000 'AC1000
VM-2
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
A IVIDEK CORP
2201 Lively Blvd Elk Grove Village, IL 60007 13121595-6890 Telex 280-803
COLOR MONITORS
COLOR 700
COLOR 600
COLOR 700/710 SERIES
The Amdek Color 700 Series consists of two models, the Color 700 and the Color 710. The 700 Series was designed to provide superior resolu-
tion. Both models include a . 31mm dot pitch CRT for sharp text and graphics resolution. The attractive cabinet makes the Color 700 Series
aesthetically compatible with any personal computer.
FEATURES ·Up to 720 ( horizontal) dots x240 ( vertical) lines resolution with Color
700. Up to 720 x480 ( interlaced) ho flicker due to long persistence
phosphor CRT with Color 710. Ultra- high resolution for demanding
color graphics applications · 13" black matrix CRT ( Color 700) provides for sharper contrast. High
contrast, etched glass CRT ( Color 710) limits glare to provide more
comfortable viewing ·Switchable color matrix allows fuil 16 IBM ( PC, XT, PC Junior or
Apple) ( II, Ilc, Ile, III) colors
·A text switch changes text color from white to green for easier reading
·Easy access, front- mounted operator controls ·Capable of providing up to 80 columns x25 lines of text display · FCC and UL approved for use in the office or in the home ·Optional tilt/swivel stand for more flexibility in viewing angles
Color 700 Color 710
$ 699.00 799.00
COLOR 600
The Amdek Color 600 is a high resolution, RGB video input color monitor for use with a variety of personal computers. Its 13 black matrix picture tube provides excellent text and graphic resolution. The attractive cabinet makes the Color 60 aesthetically compatible with
any personal computer.
FEATURES ·Quality 640 ( horizontal) dots x240 ( vertical) lines resolution provides
a vivid color display for use in graphics applications ·13" olack matrix ( dark bulb) picture tube ( CRT) provides for sharper
contrast · Built-in speaker and audio amplifier for those computers with RGB
output that do not contain speakers, but do have sound capabilities
· Head phone jack to facilitate educational applications or private
audio ·Switchable color matrix allows fuil 16 IBM ( PC, XT, PC Junior or
Apple) ( II, Ilc. Ile, 111) colors ·A text switch changes text color from white to green for easier
reading ·Easy access, front- mounted operator controls ·Capable of providing up to 80 columns x25 lines of text display · FCC and UL approved for use in the office or the home ·Optional tilt/swivel stand for more flexibility in viewing angles
Color 600
$ 599.00
COLOR 500
COLOR 500
The Amdek Color 500 is ahigh quality, video monitor which is capable of supporting ooth RGB and composite ( NTSC) video inputs. In addition, it also provides an auxiliary mode which enables the monitor to display inputs from aVideo Cassette Recorder. This video input signal flexibility and other features make the Color 500 an ideal monitor for a
variety of personal computers.
FEATURES ·Quality 560 ( horizontal) dots x240 ( vertical) lines resolution in the
RGB mode, and 320 ( horizontal) dots x240 ( vertical) lines resolution in the composite ( NTSC) provide avivid color display for games
and graphics · 13" black matrix ( dark bulb) picture tube ( CRT) provides for sharper
contrast ·Capable of providing up to 80 columns x25 lines of text display in
RGB mode; 64 columns x25 lines in composite ( NTSC) mode ·Comb filter feature provides improved text and graphics resolution in
the composite ( NTSC) video mode · Built-in speaker and audio amplifier for those computers that do not
contain speakers, but do have sound capabilities · Head phone jack to facilitate educational applications or private
audio ·Switchable color matrix in RGB mode allows fuil 16 IBM (PC, XT, PC
Junior) or Apple ( II, Ilc, lie, 111) colors ·A text switch changes the text color from white to green for easier
reading ( RGB mode) ·Auxiliary mode allows the Color 500 to receive inputs from an alter-
nate video source ( e.g. VCR) and provide sLperior picture quality vs
that offered by atelevision set ·Easy access, front- mounted operator controls
· FCC and UL approved for use in the office or in the home ·Optional tilt/swivel stand for more flexibility in viewing angles
Color 500
6525.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-3
REZA
ASACA/SHIBASOKU CORP. OF AMERICA 12509 Beatrice Street Los Angeles, CA 90066
(213) 827-7144
MONITORS/SWITCHERS
HIGH RESOLUTION TV MONITORS
CMM 26-11
CMM 20-11
CM 99A
CMM 14-7
Asaca Shibasoku has acomplete line of color monitors. 14", 20" and 26" Delta- 9", 14" and 20" In- Line Dot Matrix- 20" and 26" High Definition ( 1125 line system) and 14" and 20" Data Displays. Featuring comb filter, R-Y, B-Y, Y, I, Q, RGB, Y + R-Y, B-YCross Hatch, plus a two year warranty on all parts and labor. Available in NTSC, PAL and SECAM.
PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT
VM-4
AS W-300
ASW-300 Video Switcher
The ASW-300 provides up to 5inputs of video for special effects for cuts and
fades. It also utilizes and RS422 interface to permit use from aremote control panel.
For Complete Catalogs and Data Sheets, Please Call Asaca (800) 423-6347 -- In California, call ( 213) 827-7144
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
AUDIOTRONICS
7428 Bellaire Avenue N. Hollywood, CA 91605 (818) 781-6700
MONOCHROME VIDEO MONITORS Et ACCESSORIES
6VM917
Professional 6- inch American- made monitor features a600- line hori-
zontal resolution, 100% solid-state circuitry; compact desktop, rack-
mount or console mount design; easily replaced regulator and deflec-
tion transistors; readily accessible components; rigidly constructed
frame with easy- to- remove chassis assembly. lntercompartment
shielding prevents cross-talk; coaxial connectors mounted at
60- degree angle; front- mounted major controls and adjustments; and
external sync provisions. Metal cabinet. 7" x5-7/8" x10-7/8", 8-3/4
lbs.
$380.00
6VM917T
Triple- six monitor. Three 6- inch monitors in arow with rack/desk top
metal cabinet. 7" x17-1/4" x10-7/8", 28 lbs.
$975.00
9VM967
Low price, general purpose 9- inch monitor features 700 line horizontal
resolution, convenient up-front operating controls, simplified service
adjustments and time lapse VTR capability. Heavy duty single chassis
construction. 8-3/4" x8-3/4" x10-1 / 4", 16 lbs.
$195.00
9VM967
12VM968
Economy priced 12- inch monitor features 12MHz bandwidth, 800 line
horizontal resolution, carrying handles. Rear panel controls allow
in- field underscanning. Metal cabinet. 11-1/2" x 12-1/4" x 12-1/4",
21 lbs
$235.00
12VM968-02 With green phosphor screen.
$245.00
12DM973-04 Low- profile,, low-priced monochrome monitor features 18MHz amplifier bandwidth, 800 line resolution and 80 characters by 25 lines
display capability. Ideal for computer word processing use. Standard green phosphor screen. 11" x14-3/4" x12-1/4", 13-3/4 lbs. . $159.00
12DM973-03 With amber phosphor screen
$169.00
14VM971
Low profile 14- inch monitor features 12MHz bandwidth, 800 line hori-
zontal resolution and carrying handles. Metal cabinet. 10-3/8" x
15-1/2" x12-7/8", 29 lbs.
$299.00
14VM971-03 With green phosphor screen.
$310.00
14VM939
The 14- inch screen offers top picture quality, solid-state reliability and
unitized construction at modest cost. Styling is attractive, with
shadow blue finish and aluminum control panels. Key features are:
100% solid-state circuitry, except for CRT; 800- line ( or better) resolu-
tion; front- panel operating controls; regulated power supply; VTR
compatibility; plug-in module incorporation of major components; CRT bleeder discharge system, and switchable D.C. restoration. The
unit complies with federal rules governing X-radiation. Metal cabinet.
10-1/2" x15-5/8" x12-7/8", 29 lbs.
$570.00
17VM922
The 17- inch model features silicon 100% solid-state circuitry ( except
CRT) for maximum performance stability, long life reliability and low
power drain and heat; 800- line ( or better) resolution, front- panel
operating controls, regulated power supply to counteract power line
fluctuations, and fast AFC action for optimum VTR operation. The
model also includes bleeder discharge systems for CRT, and black
porch clamp DC restoration. All major components incorporated in
plug-in modules for ease of maintenance and minimum down time.
Metal cabinet. 15-1/2" x16-1/4" x11-7/8", 33 lbs
$625.00
23" VM952
12DM973
23VM952 The 23- inch CRT display monitor features front " slide out circuitry" for reduced down time and instant on- the- spot servicing and also permits in- the- wall installation in areas where rear access is impossible. Silicon
100% solid-state circuitry provides maximum performance and stability, long life reliability and low power drain and heat. All major controls are front mounted for easy access and operation. Power
supply is regulated to prevent raster size or brightness deviation due to line voltage fluctuations. The monitor features asuperior gray scale and VTR capability. 17-3/4" x22-1/2" x16-1/2", 60 lbs. ... .5830.00
VC- 809 High quality CCTV camera features automatic light control of 50,000:1
for remarkable clarity and detail even in the lowest light levels. 4-1/2"
x2-3/4" x9-5/8", 3-3/8 lbs. Lens rot included
$219.95
SK- 976
Video Security Kit contains VC-809 camera lens, 9VM967 monitor,
bracket and cable. 26 lbs.
$545.00
Lenses
VCL-0813 8mm f1.3 lens
VC- 1614
16mm f1.41ens
VCL-1218VF 12.5mm - 75mm f1.8 macro zoom lens
VCL-0618 6.5mm f1.8 lens
$ 85.95 59.95
209.95 159.95
Rackmounts
90-967 RMD Dual rack mount for two 9VM967 monitors 14-971 RMK Rack mount kit for 14VM971 monitor 14-939 RMK Rack mount kit for 14VM939 monitor 17-922 RMK Rack mount kit for 17VM922 monitor 23-952 CYA Ceiling yoke adaptor for 23VM952 monitor
$45.00 49.00 49.00
52.00 60.00
Monitor Options External sync provisions and non-switchable underscan available for
most models. Ask about availability.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-5
BARCO ELECTRONIC n.v.
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY ELECTOR USA, INC.
PROJECTORS
P 0. Box 699 30 Chapin Road Pine Brook, NJ 07058 (201) 882-0584
BARCODATA Ill
High Resolution Video/Graphics Projector
The Barcodata Ill is designed for critical computer imaging/video applications where compatibility with high scan rate graphics systems is a requirement. The Barcodata Ill creates superb large screen imaging of computer generated 80 column text and graphics on any flat or curved screen. AH Barcodata Ill projectors are equipped with flexible remote control facilities and feature dual switchable horizontal/vertical scan frequency presets with remote control tuning of second preset frequencies. FEATURES
90-00080B BARCOVISION Il
with Delta II- M f/1.0 large screen lenses.
Mechanically modified for larger screen sizes.
Minimum screen size 4x3ft.
Maximum screen size 20 x15ft
10,000.00
BARCODATA III
· High light output: 440 lumens · Resolution: 875 lines in RGB, 475
lines in Video · Optional 30MHz wideband RGB amplifier for up to
1250 lines resolution in RGB · Variable screen size: 5to 10 ft. diagonal
·Optional lens set for up to 20 ft. diagonal · Switch selection of:
ceiling/desk mounting, front/rear screen projection · Multistandard
composite video loop-through inputs ( NTSC 3.58 / NTSC 4.43/PAL/
SECAM) · RGBS analog/TTL inputs · IBM-PC compatible, sup-
ports 16 colors · Dual switchable horizontal/vertical scan frequency presets with remote tuning capability · Scan ranges: Horizontal 15-32kHz, Vertical 50-100Hz.
BARCOVISION Il
90-00050 BAR CODATA Ill
RCVDS
with Delta II- Df / 1.0 flat field high resolution lenses
Minimum screen size 4x3ft.
Maximum screen size 8x6ft 90-00050C BARCO DATA Ill
$16,250.00
with Delta 11 DT- AC f/ 1.0 flat field high resolution large screen lenses.
Minimum screen size 5x3-3/4 f-t.
Maximum screen size 16 x12 ft
17,000.00
90-00060 BAR CODATA Ill - RGB
with Delta 11-D f / 1.0 flat field high resolution lenses
equipped with wideband RGB amplifier - provides
1250 lines resolution with 30MHz bandwidth (- 3d B1*
Minimum screen size 4x3f-t.
Maximum screen size 8x6ft 90-00060C BARCO DATA Ill - RGB
16,250.00
Remote Controlled Video/Data Source Selector
The RCVDS is a modular RGB/composite video switching system which allows up to ten input signals to be interfaced to the Barcovision II or Barcodata III projectors. The system consists of amain frame unit supplied with a hand held wireless infrared remote control unit and user selected input modules, and is designed to accommodate awide range of input signals with varying display parameters and scan frequencies.
The RCVDS allows remote control of: input switching, contrast, brightness, color intensity/tint, input dim mode, scan frequency mode and projector off, and may be controlled by either awireless infrared signal or hardwired remote connection. An optional hardwired remote infrared receiver is available for applications where remote control unit and RCVDS main frame are located in different areas.
with Delta II DT- AC f/ 1.0 flat field high resolution
large screen lenses - equipped with wideband RGB
amplifier - provides 1250 lines resolution with 30MHz bandwidth (- 3dB)*
Minimum screen size 5x3-3/4 ft. Maximum screen size 16 x12 ft
17,000.00
·Deletes composite video input capability - accepts RGB signals only. Requires astand alone chroma decoder for composite video applications.
BARCOVISION II High Resolution Video/Graphics Projector
98-25480 98-25760
98-25770 98-25780
98-25640
98-25650 98-25660
RCVDS main frame unit - 19" rackmountable . . $1425.00
MF Composite video input with stereo audio,
for BARCODATA III
175.00
MF RGB TTL input module for BARCODATA Ill . 160.00
MF RGB Analog input module
for BAR CODATA III
230.00
DF Composite video input with stereo audio
for BARCOVISION II
175.00
DF RGB TTL input module for BARCOVISION II.. 160.00 DF RGB Analog input module for
The Barcovision 11 is designed to provide exceptionally high light
output and truly outstanding picture definition on any flat or curved screen. All Barcovision 11 projectors are equipped with flexible remote
98-25840 98-25710
BAR COVISION II Hardwired remote control cable Remote infrared receiver
230.00 150.00 180.00
control facilities and are designed to accommodate a wide range of composite video and RGB sources.
ACCESSORIES 98-25350 TVDM 34 Off- Air Demodulator
$800.00
FEATURES
· High light output: 440 lumens · Resolution: 850 lines in RGB, 475 lines in Video · Variable screen size: 5 to 10 ft. diagonal · optional
lens set for up to 25 ft. diagonal · Switch selection of: ceiling/desk mounting front/rear screen projection · Multistandard composite video loop-through inputs ( NTSC 3.58 / NTSC 4.43/ PAL/SECAM ) · RGBS analog/ TTL inputs · IBM-PC compatible: supports 16
colors · Dual switchable horizontal/vertical scan frequency presets. · Scan ranges: Horizontal 15-17k Hz, Vertical 50-100Hz.
PDC 3-N2 Precision Chroma Decoder Option 119
98-25620 VSO 2Source Selector 98-25550 Ceiling mount bracket for BARCOVISION 11,
BAR CODATA Ill 98-25700 Re- useable padded heavy duty transit case for
BARCOVISION II, BARCODATA III 98-25410 Heavy duty projection cart with locking casters,
adjustable height and tilt 76-1168 30MHz wideband RGB amplifier
$1900.00 500.00 400.00 500.00
500.00 350.00
90-00070 BARCOVISION 11
34-82455 Additional remote control cable - 40ft. length
150.00
90-00080
with Delta II- Df/ 1.0 flat field high resolution lenses Minimum screen size 4x3ft.
Maximum screen size 8x6ft BARCOVISION II
$9775.00
34-82455S Additional remote control cable - 40 ft. length
+ $ 2.15/ft.)
32955
Spare lens set Delta II- M f / 1.0
32950
Spare lens set - Delta II- Df/ 1.0
150.00 750.00
750.00
with Delta II- M f / 1.0 large screen lenses. Minimum screen size 4x3ft.
Maximum screen size 14 x10-1/2 ft .
9775.00
32956 79-2009
79-2010
Spare lens set - Delta 11 DT- AC f/ 1.0 Set of extender cards for BARCOVISION II,
BARCODATA III
Extender Card for RCVDS
750.00
70.00 21.00
VM-6
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BARCO ELECTRONIC n.v.
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY ELECTOR USA, INC. , P.O. Box 699 30 Chapin Road Pine Brook, NJ 07058 (201) 882-0584
DCD 2740F
MONITORS
DCD SERIES 2740F/2240F/1640F
COLOR DATA/VIDEO DISPLAYS
COMMON FEATURES TO ALL DCD SERIES
·Internal Source Selection Switch ·Video ( NTSC 3.58/NTSC 4.43/PAL/SECAM) ·RGB ( Analog / TTL) ( 10 MHz) ·IBM-PC Compatible ·Vertical Resolution: 575 Active Lines ( interlaced) ·3Watt Built-in Speaker for Audio Monitoring ·Full Array of Video and RGB Inputs ·Stabilized Power Outputs for use in Custom
Built
Systems
DCD 2740F/2240F SHARE ALL COMMON FEATURES PLUS: Display Capabilities: 64 characters/line ( 5x7Dot Matrix) Total: 1600 characters Pitch: 0.82mm
DCD 2740F
DCD 2740F features a 27" Auto- Converging Tube with Horizontal
Resolution of 500 Pixels, 619W x508H x455mmD ( 32kg)
$950.00
DCD 2240F DCD 2240F features a 22" Auto- Converging Tube with Horizontal
Resolution of 400 Pixels, 535W x446H x411mmD ( 27kg) . .$875.00
DCD 1640F SHARES ALL COMMON FEATURES PLUS:
Display Capability: 40 characters/line ( 5x7Dot Matrix) Total: 1000
Characters
Horizontal Resolution: 360 Pixels
Pitch: 0.68mm
Portable, 400W x393H x405mmD ( 14kg)
$750.00
MCD SERIES
MULTI- PURPOSE COLOR DISPLAYS
·Automatic Sensing Quad Standard Decoders ( NTSC 3.58/NTSC
4.43/PAL/SECAM) ·RGB ( Analog / TTL) ( 10 MHz)
·Accommodates 2Input Modules for Additional Switched Inputs ·Optional Video/RGBs Input Module ·3Watt Loudspeaker ·Models Available with All Band Tuner ( VHF, UHF, CATV) ·Vertical Resolution: 575 Active Lines ·22" has aHorizontal Resolution of 400 Pixels ·27" has aHorizontal Resolution of 500 Pixels
·Self Converging CRT's ( Pitch 0.82mm) ·Slot- mask In- line Picture Tubes 3Screen Sizes ( 22", 26" and 27") ·Floating Earth Differential Input Amplifiers
·Looped through Input Sockets, Video and RGB
·100% Solid State with Complete AC Chassis Isolation
·Multi- standard Receiver- Monitors (8N Transmission Standard BG,
I, L, MN, DK)
RECEIVER MONITORS
MCD 2740 AR
Asymmetrical Cabinet ( 27" CRT) with a Stereo Sound Amplifier,
Quad 8N Version
$1700.00
MCD 2240 AR
Asymmetrical Cabinet ( 22" CRT) with aMono Sound Amplifier and
Quad 8N Version
$1400.00
MCD 2240, SSQ/MCD 2740 SSG Super Stereo Models ( 22" CRT and 27" CRT) Quad 8N Version . POR
MONITORS
MCD 2740 AM 27" CRT with Stereo Sound Amplifier Quad Version
$1125.00
MCD 2240 AM 22" CRT with Mono Sound Amplifier Quad Version
$1000.00
INPUT MODULES Video-RGB
$ 75.00
MCD 2740 SSQ
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-7
BARCO ELECTRONIC
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY ELECTOR USA, INC.
P.O. Box 699 30 Chapin Road Pine Brook, NJ 07058 (201) 882-0584
n.v.
ADVERTISING MONITOR
PAD 2740 AND PAD 2240 PUBLIC ADDRESS DISPLAY The BARCO PAD's are stand alone public address displays providing colorful timed cycling of messages and graphics.
Features · Clearly Readable up to a Distance of 16 feet · Easy Editing through Optional Typewriter- styled Key-
board · Programmable Display Sequencing for 32 to 64 Pages
in Non Volatile Memory · Fully Automatic Start of Message Cycling after
Switching on the Power · Modular Construction · Manual/Remote Programming
Applications As an information and advertising medium in: shops, supermarkets, department stores, mobile shops, banks, cinema's, airports, hotels, post- offices, fuel stations, railway and bus stations, hospitals, exhibitions, fairs, shows, traffic info centers, plant and office signalling, sales instructions, advertisement in cars, vans, etc.
Versions This version offers storing for 32 message frames. Kit for extension of up to 64 message frames optional. The 32 page version also offers video facilities ( automatic
choice of video when activated) and an RS 232 port for data dump and load. Data line transmission possible.
Display
12 lines of 40 characters or semi- graphics with 7foreground and 7 background colors.
PAD 2740
Screen Size: 27" ( 67cm), max. screen size available. Set
provided with suspension capability
619W x508H x455mmD: ( 32kg)
9330115
$ 1675.00
PAD 2240 Screen Size: 22" ( 56cm) Set provided with suspension capability 535W x446H x411mmD: ( 27kg)
9330105
$ 1575.00
General Power Supply: 115 VAC/60Hz Consumption: 90W
Accessories/Options
·Alphanumeric keyboard offering full editing facilities:
point by point- editing, character or page erase, flashing
text mode
$350.00
· Expansion Kit from 32 to 64 Pages
$225.00
VM-8
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BARCO INDUSTRIES, INC.
195 Jefferson Drive Menlow Park, CA 94025 (415) 328-4380
CM 22, CM 33 HRC, CM 51 HRC PROFESSIONAL COLOR MONITORS Barco CM Series color monitors fulfill a wide range of display applications where good picture quality and stability are essential requirements. High resolution dot mask in- line gun CRT's provide precise stable convergence, eliminating the need for readjustments. All models are available with NTSC ( PAL or SECAM optional) composite video and RGBS loop-through inputs, and employ Barco's advanced modular design concept to facilitate ease of maintenance.
Features ·Dot mask in- line gun CRT's · H / V delay/pulse cross display · Blue gun only mode · Switchable underscan ·Front panel cut-off/gain adjustments · Front panel preset · RGB / video fast insertion · Internal loudspeaker
Special Features of the CM 22: ·AKB auto color temperature stabilization · Switchable comb filter · AC/DC power operation
Common Specifications Electronic Gun System: High Focus Voltage Bipotential, In- Line Electronic Gun.
Scanning format: Factory adjusted 4to 3aspect ratio underscan. Normal scan switchable.
RGB Amplifier Performance: 15kHz to 7MHz + 1dB - 3dB Gradual roll- off.
Power requirements: 120 V AC - 15% + 12% 45Hz to 65Hz.
Power consumption: 14" and 20": With white field and beam current limiter working 135W. With standard test pattern and controls to average position 95W. Max. power consumption 135W.
9": Max. 70W on 120V Max. 77W on 14V Average 60W
CM- 22 Dimensions: 8.62H x8.58W x18.66D inch Weight net: 22 lbs. ( 10kg)
CM 33 HRC Dimensions: 10.47H x15.94W x15.20D inch Weight net: 37 lbs. ( 17kg)
CM 51 HRC Dimensions: 17.72H x18.31W x21.85D inch Weight net 77 lbs. ( 35kg)
MONITORS
CM 51 HRC
CM 33 HRC
CRT Size
Model Designation
Resolution
Inputs
CRT Pitch TV Dual Video
(mm)
Lines Video
RGB
Price
9inch 22 cm
CM 22 NTSC
0.30 mm
320
·
· 81900.00
13 inch CM 33 HRC-NTSC 0.43 mm
340
·
$1800.00
33cm
CM 33 HRC-RGB
0.43mm
340
CM 33 C HR-NTSC 0.31 mm
550
·
· 1900.00
·
· 1900.00
20 inch CM 51 HRC-NTSC 0.43 mm
540
·
2800.00
51 cm
CM 51 HRC-RGB
0.43 mm
540
·
·
· 3000.00
NOTE: Most units available with PAL or SECAM video inputs at the same prices as
NTSC versions.
ACCESSORIES
Model Designation AM 33 AM 51 TR 22
SS 22 S533
--
Description
Price
19 inch rack mount kit for CM 33
$150.00
19 inch rack mount kit for CM 51
150.00
19 inch rack mount tray; holds 2CM 22's
150.00
Sunshield for CM 22 Sunshield for CM 33
100.00
." loo.00
Additional instruction manuals ... 50.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-9
BARCO INDUSTRIES, INC.
195 Jefferson Drive Menlow Park, CA 94025 (415) 328-4380
MONOCHROME MONITORS
TVM 3 SERIES MONOCHROME MONITORS
The B.V.C. professional monochrome monitors are measurement instruments for use in broadcasting, industrial and educational applications where quality and reliability are most required.
Developed from the reliable CTVM series. these monitors have been designed to produce a sharp clear picture, free from distortion.
Two screen sizes are available: a37 cm (14 inch) and a51 cm ( 20 inch) monitor.
Facilities considered to be essential including colour subcarrier filter, pulse cross, size switch, remote control, internal/external sync offer broadcast-oriented operating features and controls.
The monitors are available as atable top unit or as a rack mountable unit for use in OB vans and in VTR monitor bridges.
FEATURES
Reliability: High reliability has been designed into the B.V.C. TVM 3.
Modular construction: All parts mounted on interchangeable plug-in boards.
Rugged construction: All- metal case.
All solid state: Fully transistorized circuitry.
Multiple inputs: Provision for 2composite inputs and external sync input.
Controls: All primary controls are available on the front panel.
Remote control: Remote input selection.
Maintenance: Use of all plug-in modular construction allows for high speed on- location parts replacement.
4111111111111111111k
TVM 3/37
TVM 3/51
MASTER CONTROL MONOCHROME MONITORS 37 cm ; 14") screen TV monitors; TVM 3/37/ WA ( ill. DI 51 cm ( 201 screen TV monitors; TVM 3/51/WA fill. DI
$2325.00 3025.00
CHROMA DECODER UNIT ( HOLDS UP TO 2 DECODERS)
CD3 N-2 CD3 PAL
CD3 Secam
Notch Plus Comb Filter Decoder Notch Filter PAL Decoder, B,M,N
Secam Decoder H / V
$2550.00 2450.00
2450.00
AUTOMATIC SVVITCHER
ASMD-3
Capable of switching upto 7decoders
COMPLEX COMB FILTER DECODER
CD3 N-5
Two or Three Line Comb Filter
$1250.00
$4000.00
ACCESSORIES ( 19" RACKMOUNTABLE)
RM 3/37 RM 3/51 RM ASMD3 RM CD3
15" Rackmount and Handle Kit 20" Rackmount and Handle Kit Rackmount for Switcher Rackmount for Decoder Units
$200.00 200.00 200.00 200.00
TV DEMODULATORS
Multichannel, mu!tistandard VSD 1systems ( BG / MN) or (BGH, CF, ), L) or ( BGH, CF, DK, L)
Option Input failure information outlet
$2040.00 90.00
Multichannel, monostandard VSD 2system MN or Lor I or DK or BG
Single channel, monostandard, quartz controlled VSD 2/X systemMorNorLorlorKorDorGorB
2200.00 2500.00
ACCESSORIES 19" rack mount kit -- 56 0930
$50.00
OTHER CONFIGURATIONS AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST.
VM-10
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BECKMAN INSTRUMENTS, INC.
630 Puente Brea, CA 92621 (714) 871-4848
OSCILLOSCOPES
/
MODELS 9100/9060
Professional Series Oscilloscopes
Models 9100 and 9060 Oscilloscopes offer many similar features. Both include three channel vertical inputs; two with 5mV/ Div. maximum sensitivity and the third with selectable 500 mV/ Div. or 100mV/Div. sensitivity. There is a rear panel output for channel 1. This permits the user to conveniently monitor channel 1 with a counter or other device, eliminating the need to connect another test probe to the circuit. The horizontal section features dual timebases and adelayed sweep function. The trigger section includes a TV sync separator for improved triggering on complex video waveforms, plus atrigger view (CH 3) switch for looking at the trigger signal without changing probes or cables.
Several new innovations for these oscilloscopes include aLinear Focus control, Trigger Level Lock control and Dynamic Bias Circuitry. The Linear Focus control focuses the trace regardless of intensity. The Trigger Lever Lock control makes trigger level adjustment automatic over a wide range of signals. Dynamic Bias Circuitry reduces power consumption by minimizing the power requirements during idle periods or for displaying low frequency signals. When high frequency signals are displayed, power consumption automatically switches to maximum.
Special features unique to the Model 9100 Oscilloscope include: Three DC to 100MHz vertical amplifiers. Up to 1mV/Div. sensitivity may be obtained at 20MHz bandwidth with the X5 Magnifier switch on. The horizontal time bases range from 0.5 Sec./Div. to 20nS/ Div., and there is aX10 Magnifier switch to extend the range to 2nS/ Div. Other features include a6 inch ( 152mm) rectangular CRT with 18KV acceleration potential for brighter traces, plus an internal illuminated graticule.
S1,595.00
Special features unique to the Model 9060 Oscilloscope include: Three DC to 60MHz vertical amplifiers. Up to 1mV/Div. sensitivity may be obtained at 20MHz bandwidth with the X5 Magnifier switch on. The horizontal time bases range from 0.5 Sec./Div. to 50nS/ Div., and there is aX10 Magnifier switch to extend the range to 5nS/Div. Other features include a6inch ( 152mm) rectangular CRT for brighter traces, plus an internal illuminated graticule. Both oscilloscopes feature plug-in module construction for easier maintenance.
S1,195.00
9060
9100
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL 9100
MODEL 9060
CRT Scrut.ii Acceleration Voltage Type Focus
152mm (6-in.) rectangular with internal illuminated graticule
Approx. 18KV. dome-mesh
Approx. 12KV. dome-mesh
Linear focus-- one setting for awide range of intensities.
VERTICAL Bandwidth .' Rise Time ('hi. Ch2 Sensitivity Ch3 Sensitivity Accuracy Input Impedance Chi, Ch2 Max. Input Voltage Operating Modes Delay Line Chi Output
DC ( AC:10Hz)-100MHz
DC ( AC:I0Hz)-60MHz
3.5nS ( 18nS. max. with X5 Mag. on) 5.8nS ( I8nS. max. with X5 Mag. on)
5mV./ Div.- 5V., Div., ImV./Div.-1V.IDiv. with X5 Magnifier
0.1V/ Div. and 0.5V/ Div.
±3%(±5% with X5 Magnifier)
1Megohm - ±1% shunted by 25pF --t2pF
300V ( DC + AC Peak)
400V ( DC + AC Peak)
Chl, Ch2, Ch3, Add, Alt./Chop Vertical delay approx. 20nS.
Vertical delay approx. 40nS.
50mV. minimum into 50 ohm load
HORIZONTAL Sweep Times: A
A ( main) Sweep 20nS., Div.- 0.5 Sec./Div.
A ( main) Sweep 50nSiDiv.-0.5 Sec./Div.
B (delayed) Sweep 20nS.IDiv.-50mS./Div.
B ( delayed Sweep 50nS./Div.-50mS./Div.
Magnifier Time Base Accuracy Trigger ASweep
X10 Mag., divides Aand BSweeps by 10
±-3%, ±-5% (magnifier on), - ±8% 20nS./ Div. and 50nS./Div.
DC-10MHz: 0.4 Div. or less 10MHz-100MHz: 1.5 Div. or less TV: 2.0 Div. or less
DC-10MHz: 04 Div. or less 10MHz-60MHz: 1.5 Div. or less TV: 2.0 Div. or less
BSweep
B ( delayed) Sweep is triggered by A ( main) Sweep source.
Sweep Modes Signal Source Coupling Level Lock
Auto, normal, single (push to reset). Int., line, ext., ext. -- 10 AC, DC, HF Reject, TV Included-- automatically adjusts trigger level-- saves time
X-Y MODE Functions Frequency Range Phase error CALIBRATOR
Chl:X, Ch2:y or Ch3 horizontal:X, Ch 1- Ch2:y DC-2MHz, --3dB 3° or less, DC-100KHz 2V P-Psquareware - ±2%, 1KHz -±5%
POWER REQUIREMENTS Voltage Power
Selectable, 100V, 115V, 215V., 230V AC ±- 10% at 50/60Hz
65 VA ( max.)
60 VA ( max.)
DIMENSIONS Size
340mm (13.39-in.) wide 190mm ( 7.48-in.) high 450mm ( 17.72-in.) deep
340mm (13.39-in.) wide 190mm (7.48-in.) high 440mm ( 1731-in.) deep
Weight ENVIRONMENT
75kg ( 16.5 lbs.) typical
70kg ( 15.0 lbs.) typical
5°C to 35°C ( 41°F to 95°F) operating --20°C to 70°C (-4°F to 158°F) transport and storage
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-11
BOSCH
2300 S. 2300 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-8000 Telex 38-8352
MC 22 BA
Color Precision Monitor 9" High Resolution
FEATURES
·High resolution in- line- gun color picture tube · Black matrix ·EBU or U.S. phosphors
·Color temperature 6500K, convertible to 3200K · Beam current feedback ·Inputs: CCVS + RGB signals · R, G, B, can be individually selected · Remote control ·Portable, robust design
·Suitable for single or double installation in 19" racks or DIN cabinets (interchangeable with M 24 BA/BB)
· Mains or battery operation
The MC 22 BA monitor has been developed for assessing the quality of television pictures and can be used for all color standards by fitting
appropriate PCBs. This new, portable, lightweight monitor can be
powered directly from the mains or, optionally, from batteries. In the case of mains failure, the monitor switches automatically to battery
operation ( option). Thanks to its low weight and small size, the MC 22 BA is ideal for ENG/EFP work. For installation, i.e., in OB vehicles,
two MC 22 BA monitors can be fitted directly side by side. The EBU
phosphor coordinates of the MC 22 BA- A1 and the U.S. phosphor coordinates of the MC 22 BA- A2 correspond with the standards for
professional color control.
POR
MC 37 BA- B2
Color Monitor 15" High Resolution
FEATURES
· High resolution delta gun color picture tube ·U.S. phosphor · Black matrix
·Three CCVS input + RGB input · NTSC comb filter
· Blue only display as black/white pictures ·Monochrome display
·Automatic and manual degaussing ·Active convergence switching with separate corner correction ·Color temperature switchable 6500K/3200K · Pulse cross
· ( R-Y) ( B-Y) output for vector display
This monitor has been developed especially for precise measurement
and viewing of television pictures. This monitor uses high resolution
delta gun, black matrix, U.S. phosphor picture tube. The monitor is
equipped with acomb filter decoder. Dual standard is available as an
option.
$5,770.00
COLOR MONITORS
MC 22 BA MC 37 BA- B2
MC 51 BA- B2 Color Monitor 20" High Resolution
FEATURES · High resolution delta gun picture tube · U.S. phosphor · Black matrix ·Color temp switchable 6500K/3200K
·Active convergence switching with separate corner correction ·Automatic and manual degaussing · Blue only display as black/white picture · Monochrome display · Pulse cross ·IR -Y) ( B-Y) output for vector display
This monitor is equipped with ahigh resolution delta gun color picture
tube with U.S. phosphors and meets or exceeds standards set for
professional broadcast color monitoring. It has three CCVS inputs and
an RGB input which can be selected in the control panel. All the adjust-
ment controls are easily accessible in asliding tray which can be pulled
out when necessary. It has acomb filter decoder and can be fitted with
another set of decoders for dual standard operation.
$5,398.00
MC 51 BA- B2
VM-12
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BOURBON STREET ASSOCIATES
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY TELEVISION EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATES, INC.
P.O. Box 393 S. Salem NY 10590-0393 (914) 763-8893 TVVX 710-575-2600 CA ( 213) 271-9570
IRT COLOR MONITOR COMPARATOR
D6500°K MODEL MK II IRT COLOR MONITOR COMPARATOR A Battery- Powered Visual Comparator for Quick and Precise Color Temperature Adjustment and Gray- Scale Balance of Color Monitors to the Recommended World Standard of D6500 °K.
Features · Matching accuracy uninhibited by average ambient light,
distracting colors, or other monitors · Optical illusion that kine face and comparator are on the
same plane · Reference surface texture appears similar to kine face tex-
ture · Device independent of phosphor variations · Lever adjustment to change reference from high- light to
low- light brightness · Light weight, small size and tripod mount for convenience · Long bulb life-- built-in meter and potentiometer to ad-
just lamp current · Endorsed by major Color Monitor Manufacturers
The IRT comparator is a simple auxiliary device which permits quick and accurate adjustments by direct color
comparison of the TV kine. The comparator ( which may be hand-held or tripod mounted) is presented to the face of the kine, displaying either agray- scale or window signal. The operator, looking through the device's ocular, will observe a circular field where half of the area is adirect view of the kine
face and the other half is the illuminant- D reference. This reference is produced by the reflected light emitted from a specially selected bulb and is filtered through conversion filters and stabilized by a control to a constant current. A neutral wedge filter is positioned in front of the reference area to change brightness in the comparator from peak white at 19 Ft. Lamberts to low- light brightness at 0.95 Ft. Lamberts. The operator adjusts the monitor's screen and gain controls so that the kine white balance will match with
the comparator in both high- lights and low- lights.
Specifications
·Color Temperatu-e: D6500 °K + / - 200°K · Battery- Powered by: 5C- Cells · Battery Life Expectancy: 15 hours · Bulb Current Consumption: 90 %
·Tripod Mount: 3,'8"-16"
MK II
$ 1500.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-13
COHU, INC.
5755 Kearny Villa Road P.O. Box 85623 San Diego, CA 92138 (6 19) 277-6700 TVVX 91 0-3 35-1 244
NU.
MONITORS
9- INCH CABINET MODEL
14- INCH CABINET MODEL
17- INCH CABINET MODEL
9- INCH DUAL RACK MODEL
17- INCH RACK MODEL
9600 SERIES MONOCHROME MONITORS
·Automatic Video Level
·800- Line Center Resolution
· Back Porch Gated DC Restoration
· Interchangeable Solid- State Plug-in Modules
·Continuous- Duty Operation
· Loop- Through Input
· Regulated Power Supplies
· Differential Input Available by Jumper Selection
·525/60 U.S. and 625/50 CCIR Scan Rates
The 9600 Series professional quality monochrome television monitors feature Cohu's exclusive Automatic Video Level Control. This feature makes it possible to maintain a set contrast level independent of signal strength. For example, in a CCTV system having multiple camera inputs, the monitor display will maintain the contrast level as set within monitor input requirement limits, regardless of which camera output is displayed.
All monitors have three modes of operation, automatic video level control with dc restoration, dc restoration only, and manual operation only. The operational mode is selected by athree position switch. In the automatic video level control mode, the blanking level and the contrast level are held constant. The dc restoration mode maintains a constant blanking level, however, the contrast level can vary as a function of input signal. The manual operation mode ( OFF position) allows viewing of changes in both the blanking level and the contrast level as afunction of input signal variation.
The monitors feature high quality cathode-ray tubes with excellent geometry, aP4 phosphor 19300K) with agray filter glass, and 800- line center resolution. The monitors also incorporate differential video inputs in which long line/interference pickup on the cable shield is reduced by 25 dB with up to 4V p- pmaximum hum component. They accept composite or noncomposite video inputs and external sync, when required, with all inputs having loop- through capability. They
operate at scan rates of 525 lines/frame ( 60 Hz/sec) and 625 lines/ frame ( 50 Hz/sec) with input signals that meet EIA RS- 170 specifications and CCIR specifications, respectively.
9600 Series TV monitors are of solid-state, modular construction with interchangeable plug-in circuit boards. The reliable, continuous- duty operation of the monitors makes them well suited for awide variety of surveillance, industrial, computer, educational and broadcast applications. The series includes three picture tube sizes: 9- inch ( 22.86 cm), 14- inch 135.56cm) and 17- inch ( 43.18cm) which are available in both cabinet and rack models ( the 9- inch is also available in adual rack configuration). Available options include: ( 1) CRT Phosphors P31, P39 and P42; ( 2) left, right, and dual mounts for the 9- inch rack model; ( 3) rack slides for the 14- and 17- inch models; ( 4) ayoke mount for the 17- inch model; ( 5) remote contrast and brightness control; ( 6) external drive capability; ( 7) atally light, and ( 81 an underscan switch.
The 9600 Series monitors are designed for long-term, stable operation with minimum downtime. Ease of maintenance is simplified by the plug-in modular construction.
9600-9C 9600-9R 9600-9N 9600-9/2R 9600-9/RBL 9600-9/RBR 9600-14C 9600-14R 9600-14N 9600-17C 9600-17R 9600-17N 9600-17/YC 9600-17/YW
9" Cabinet Model 9" Rack Model 9" Chassis only 9" Dual Rack Model 9" Rack with left panel blank 9" Rack with right panel blank 14" Cabinet Model
14" Rack Model 14" Chassis only 17" Cabinet Model
17" Rack Model 17" Chassis only 17" Yoke Ceiling Mount Model
17" Yoke Wall Mount Model
VM-14
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CONRAC CORPORATION
CONRAC DIVISION
600 North Rimsdale Ave. Covina, CA 91722 (818) 966-3511
6200 SERIES:19 and 13 -Inch Color
Class 1 master studio monitor incorporates fixed convergence
precision in- line CRT, RGB and NTSC switchable inputs, optional comb filter and Conrac ColormatcnTM phosphors. Other desirable
professional features includes superb white field and brightness uni-
formities and pulse cross display. 19 and 13 inch models are available in cabinet, rack- slide or chassis- only configurations.
19" CRT NTSC with Comb Filter and RGB
6242N19 6242RS19 6242C19 6242Y19
" 930 ' 5120..0..n0 '
5135
5185.00
13" CRT
6242N13 6242 RS13 6242C13 6242Y13 PAL B European
$4605.00 4800.00 4815.00
4855.00 Factory Quote
COLOR MONITORS
6200 SERIES
6100 SERIES:19-Inch Color
The ultimate " master monitor" for professional broadcasting and
teleproduction applications. Features a Colormatch, 625- line resolu-
tion, shadow- mask, CRT, beam current feedback, thirty-eight inde-
pendent, and fully active convergence controls and optional comb
filter which offers improved separation of chrominance and luminance
and reduces cross- color distortions.
6100 Series Broadcast Color
19" CRT
NTSC
Price
6122N19
$6980.00 Pal BEuropeanPrice
66112222CR1S919 6122Y19
77127800..0000 66112233RN1S919 7330 .00 6123C197345.00
$7090.00 7240.00
NTSC with Comb Filter
6123Y19
7385.00
6142N19
$8090.00 Accessories*
6142RS19 6142C19
8275.00 M3 8385.00 M4
$310.00 340.00
6142Y19
8425.00 MS
180.00
6100 SERIES 1: '5700 SERIES
5700 SERIES: 13 -Inch Color
A compact, 500- line resolution Colormatch, shadow- mask picture or data display monitor, with special controls and configuration for VTR over- console applications. All convergence controls are located in a pull-out drawer for full front access. Also available in rack and portable
cabinet configurations. Available in NTSC color transmission standards, with optional vector output.
5700 Series Broadcast Color
13" CRT
NTSC 5722N13 5722RS13 5722C13
5722Y13
Price $6450.00
6605.00 6660,00
6695,00
NTSC with Comb Filter 5742N13
5742RS13 5742C13
$7675.00
7830.00 7885.00
5742Y13
7920.00
NTSC with Vector Output
5732N13
47210.00
5732RS13
7340.00
5732C13
7435.00
5732Y13
7465.00
Pal B European 5723N13 5723RS13 5723C13 5723Y13
Accessories* M3 M4 M5 M8 M9
$6620.00 6770.00 6820.00 6860.00
$ 310.00 340.00 180.00 365.00 230.00
5200 SERIES
ifeasol 5200 SERIES 25-Inch Color
The 5200 Series display monitors are for audience viewing, corporate communications, and instructional applications. They feature a shadow- mask CRT, and preset controls for contrast and brightness. Available in NTSC color transmission standards, or in an RGB version for computer data/graphics applicaticns.
25" CRT NTSC 5222C25 5777Y25
Price $5795.00
5825.00
25" CRT RGB 5211C25 5211Y25
Price $5065.00
5095.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-15
CONRAC CORPORATION
CONRAC DIVISION
600 North Rimsdale Ave Covina, CA 91722 (81 8) 966-3511
MONITORS
7000 SERIES COLOR VIDEO DISPLAY MONITORS
7000 SERIES: 19, 13 and 9- Inch Color High Resolution
Video Display Monitors
Cost effective high resolution video displays ideally suited for business graphics, process control, CAD/CAM workstations and personal computers. Features 8colors, precision in- line ( PIL) CRT technology,
high density shadow mask CRT, modular electronics, scan rates from 24kHz to 32kHz. TTL level signal inputs and optional cabinet.
7000 Series Color
9" CRT 7011N9 24.8kHz
6665.00
13" CRT 7011N13 24.8k Hz 7011N13 31.2k Hz
$865.00 895.00
19" CRT 7011N19 24.8kHz
$1495.00
2600 SERIES: 19, 15 and 9- Inch Monochrome Video Display Monitors
The 2600 Series of video display monitors is designed to bring high reliability, easy maintenance and superior picture quality to a wide variety of broadcast and computer graphics systems. With its high performance and high resolution, the 2600 meets the demands of
computer aided design ( CAD), computer- aided manufacturing (CAM), medical imaging, CATV, process control and other graphics systems.
2600 Series Monochrome 15" CRT 2600N15 2600C15 2600NR15 2600Y15
Options Dual Video Input Inverted Video ( switchable) Pulse Cross Normal to Underscan Switchable Separate Horizontal and Vertical Drive Rack Slides Rack Shelf Tally Lights AFC Switchable High Line Rates ( specify) Direct Etch CRT
Phosphors: D6500° K P31, P39, P45 AR Filter ( OCLI)
$1220.00 1340.00 1380.00 1460.00
65.00 30.00 65.00 45.00 30.00 130.00 60.00 60.00 25.00 125.00 30.00
$155.00 85.00
VM-16
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CONRAC CORPORATION
CONRAC DIVISION
600 North Rimsdale Ave. Covina, CA 91722 (818) 966-3511
MONOCHROME MONITORS
SNA SERIES
QQA SERIES
GOA SERIES: 15, 17 and 21- Inch Monochrome
A very high resolution, dynamic focus, monochrome display which is
adjustable to lock on any field rate from 37 to 60 per second. It will lock on any three pre-selected, switch- selectable horizontal rates between
15 kHz and 37 kHz. Aspect ratio and frame size are continuously variable.
QQA Series
High Resolution Monochrome
15" CRT
Price
QQA15/N
$3260.00
QQA15/C
3490.00
QQA15/Y
3500.00
QQA15/RS
3570.00
Options Model QQA
Price
Video Reverse
(Switchable)
$225.00
Separate Horizontal and
Vertical Drive
250.00
Dual Video Input A/ B .. 280.00
600 /..1sec vertical
retrace option
100.00
17" CRT
QQA17/N QQA17/C QQA17/Y QQA17/ RS
$3745.00 4090.00 4100.00 4185.00
Accessories* M3 M4 M5 M8 M9
$310.00 340.00 180.00 365.00 230.00
21" CRT
QQA21/N QQA21/C QQA21/Y QQA21 / RS
$4395.00 4750.00 4760.00 4855.00
DZB SERIES: 15- Inch Monochrome
A professional monochrome monitor designed for VTR over- console mounting. Front panel selector switch allows two matched video inputs to be viewed for picture comparison.
DZB Series
Broadcast Monochrome
15" CRT
Price
DZB15/N
$2195.00
DZB15/RS
2300.00
DZB15/C
2360.00
DZB15/Y
2390.00
Accessories* M3 M4 M5
$310.00 340.00 180.00
SNA SERIES: 9, 15, 17 and 23- Inch Monochrome
A family of 800- line high resolution monitors for broadcast, industrial and educational applications. Horizontal AFC time constant is compatible with helical- scan video tape recorders. Quick- disconnect
circuit modules are common to all models. The 17- inch display features dynamic focus. Designed for operation at either 525 line, 60 field, or 625 line, 50 field, sync rates without modification. Also
optionally available for high line rate operation.
SNA Series Monochrome
9" CRT
SNA9/N SNA9/C SNA9/RBL SNA9/RBR SNA9/ RC SNA9/RXL SNA9/RXR SNA9/RKL SNA9/RKR SNA9/2R
Price
$1095.00 1200.00 1240.00 1240.00 1275.00 1275.00 1275.00 1275.00 1275.00 2220.00
15" CRT SNA15/NC SNA15/NR
SNA15/R SNA15/C SNA15/RS SNA15/Y
$1375.00 1445.00
1525.00 1540.00 1630.00 1590.00
17" CRT w/Dynamic Focus
SNA17/N
$1560.00
SNA17/R
1680.00
SNA17/RS
1805.00
SNA17/C
1805.00
SNA17/Y
1850.00
23" CRT w/Dynamic Focus
SNA23/C
$1790.00
SNA23/Y
1790.00
Options Model SNA
Price
Yoke Rotation,
90" or 180°
$100.00
Separate Horizontal and
Vertical Drive
110.00
Tally Light
110.00
Non- Synchronous Operation
9", 17", 23" ( Std. on 15") 145.00
Dynamic Focus 15"
170.00
Back Porch Clamp
195.00
Square Raster 9", 15"
(S·xl. on 17" and 23")
195.00
Ncrmal to Underscan
Switchable
195.00
20MHz Video Amplifier 265.00
Differential Input
265.00
High Line Rates
as available
310.00
Pulse Cross ( not
available on 23")
310.00
Video Reverse
(switchable)
325.00
Dual Channel
Video Input
365.00
Etched CRT
30.00
Accessories* SNA 17" M3
M6 M7
$310.00
285.00 220.00
SNA 23" M8 M9
$365.00 230.00
ENA SERIES: 9and 12- Inch Monochrome
A cost effective, 650- line resolution monochrome display for industrial, data processing, and educational installations. Meets all EIA
RS- 170 specifications. Horizontal AFC is optimized to meet the requirements of industrial tape recorders. Chassis, rack or cabinet models available. A dual 9- inch model will fit in a 19- inch rack and requires only 8- 3/4- inch of vertical rack space.
ENA Series Monochrome
9" CRT
Price
ENA9/ N
$ 640.00
ENA9/C
740.00
ENA9/ RBL
750.00
ENA9/RBR
750.00
ENA9/RKL
785.00
ENA9/RKR
785.00
ENA9/2R
1335.00
Options Model ENA External Sync Input
(switchable) Laminated Anti- glare CRT Panel
Non- synchronous
Shielding Differential Input
Price
$ 65.00 65.00
125.00 165.00
12" CRT ENA12/N ENA12/C ENA12/R
$670.00 825.00 840.00
NOTE: Letters in part number signify configuration: N for chassis-only (" naked"); RS for rack side; c for catinet; Y for yoke mounting.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-17
CONRAC CORPORATION
CONRAC DIVISION
600 North Rimsdale Ave Covina, CA 91722 (818) 966-3511
MONITORS
fs.
·8111. ·
111111
1-01,
MODEL 7211
Model 7211 High- Resolution Color CRT Display
Conrac's finest color display offers our proprietary high- resolution circuitry, shadow mask CRT design, 0.31mm dot pitch, and 1080
horizontal pixels ( at 1225- line scan), and accepts RGB composite video inputs in both EIA RS170 and EIA RS343 formats. 13" and 19" CRT models are available.
Here is why the 7211 keeps you ir the forefront of technology...PIL
technology. Conrac's Precision In- Line Gun provides easy setup and minimal maintenance. The gun design in the 7211 eliminates timeconsuming reconvergence adjustments by acombination of very close gun manufacturing tolerances and corrections built into the tubes's yoke. As aresult, when compared to adelta- gun design, the 7211 has
fewer parts and needs less service.
Adaptive packaging...The 7211 size and compact shape are designed for greatest integrating flexibility. Our 19" display comes in two front panel heights- 17.5" or 15.75" -- and fits into the same space as our high- resolution monochromatic CRT display. For still greater flexibility, you can order the 7211 with no front panel and relocated
controls, giving a 14- inch front height. Other configurations include rack-slide or cabinet options.
·40 MHz video bandwidth · Dynamic focus · Designed to minimize service downtime · Selectable scan frequencies ·Weight- saving aluminum frame improves heat dissipation · Preset calibration controls ·High-density shadow mask CRT ·Worldwide power adaptability
13" CRT High Resolution Color 7211N13
7211RS13 7211C13
$ 3590.00 3800.00 3825.00
19" CRT High Resolution Color 7211N19 7211RS19 7211C19
$ 3850.00 4065.00
4090.00
Options
Long Persistance Phosphor $ 150.00
Direct Etch CRT
100.00
Homalite Filter
135.00
AR Filter ( Laminated)
275.00
Differential Input
85.00
Separate H Et V Drives
100.00
Dark Body CRT(19")
25.00
Dark Body CRT direct etch ( 191
125.00
Dark Body CRT LP ( 19") . . . 175.00
Dark Body CRT LP Et direct etch
(19")
300.00
Internal/External Sync Select Switch Tilt Et Swivel Base Touch System
50.00 130.00 2995.00
MODEL 2400
Model 2400 High -Resolution Monochrome CRT Display
With features that represent the current state of technology, Conrac's best monochrome monitor meets the needs of many diverse applications for a high- resolution display. These include computer graphics and alphanumerics for CAD/CAM, process control, and similar systems. When equipped with its inverted video option, the 2400 is extremely well suited for medical imaging systems. Color- quality glass...A particularly impressive attribute of the 2400 is its combination of brightness with nearly perfect corner-focus characteristics. The reason is Conrac's use of color- quality glass, which permits higher voltages to enhance both focusing and brightness.
· Dynamic focus · Selectable scan frequencies ·Application versatility ·Wide video amplifier bandwidth · Preset calibration controls · Electronic raster centering · Differential video input · Modular electronics packages ·Choice of cabinet, rack- slide, or chassis- only configurations
19" CRT
High Resolution Monochrome
2400N19
$2900. 00
240ORS19
3115. 00
2400C19
3135. 00
13" Et 15" CRT
Factory Quote
Options
Dual Video Inputs
$110.00
Inverted Video
95.00
Front Panel Selectable
Scan Rates
165.00
Switchable Underscan
95.00
Option CombinationsFactory Quote
P-31, P-39, P-40, P-45
Phosphor
100.00
AR Filter ( Laminated)
275.00
VM-18
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CONRAC CORPORATION
CONRAC DIVISION
600 North Rimsdale Ave. Covina, CA 91722 (818) 966-3511
7351 65 kHz Raster Scan Color Graphic Display Monitor
FEATURES ·65 kHz horizontal scan rate ·60 Hz vertical refresh rate · 1083 non- interlaced lines per frame ·Self- diagnostic status indicators · 110 MHz wideband video amplifier
APPLICATIONS 19- inch display for finely detailed, non- interlaced images generated for computer- aided design ( CAD), computer- aided engineering (CAE), architecture, engineering and construction ( AEC), computeraided design and drafting ( CAD/D( and other applications demanding highest resolution in full color.
Model 7351 can be supplied in full cabinet, rack- slide or chassisonly configurations, and can be custom- configured to meet specific OEM requirements.
19" CRT Ultra High Resolution Color
7351C19 7351RS19
7351N19
$4575.00 4550.00
4325.00
Options Long Persistance Phosphor
Direct Etch CRT Homalite Filter
AR Filter ( Laminated) Tilt Er Swivel Base Internal / External Sync Select Switch
$150.00
100.00 135.00
275.00 130.00
50.00
COLOR MONITORS
7351
SPECIFICATIONS
Visual Performance
Resolution
1280H x1024V format ( non- interlaced).
CRT Pitch
0.31 mm
Linearity and Geometry
Within acentrally located 10.5" ( 267mm) circle, no point deviates by more than 2% from its proper position ( Ball Chart Method).
Raster Size Regulation
Less than 1% change from zero to 100% APL at 20 IL.
Brightness
20 IL nominal- 45 IL maximum.
CONVERGENCE
Maximum Error by Zones:
Zone A 267 mm ( 10.51 inches) dia.
--Zone B 267 mm x350 mm (10.51 inches x13.78 inches)
Center 50 mm ( 1.97inches) dia.
Maximum Convergence Error:
Center 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Zone A 04mm (0.016 in.)
Zone B 0.6 mer (0.023 in.)
Max CRT Display Area
Aspect Ratio
Height 297 mm ( 11.6 inches). Width 396 mm ( 15.5 inches) Area 11598 mm ,( 180 inches ,)
4to 3standard. 11. 5:4 available within 350 mm x267 mm rectangle.
Circuit Performance
Pulse Performance
Rise time = 3nsec Fall time = 3-1 / 2nsec
Black Level
Black level shift less than 1% change of peak
Stability
luminance from 10% to 90% APL
Interlace Performance
Better than 90%
Scan Rates
Horizontal Retrace Time
Horizontal -- 65 kHz ± 2.5 kHz Vertical -- 47 Hz - 63 Hz.
ao µsec maximu,ii.
Vertical Retrace Time
600 µsec maximum
SYNC SELECTION
Sync Selection
Jumper plug on video processor board permits selection of either internal or external sync.
Internal
Composite horizontal and vertical sync combined on green video channel.
External
BNC connector for external composite honzontal and vertical sync.
Input Connections
Three separate BNC connectors for ROB inputs, each parallel- wired with asecond BNC connector for loop- through operation, and switch- selectable impedance matching -- high
Zor 75 ohms.
External Sync
Single BNC connector for external sync input with parallel- wired second BNC connector for loop- through operation. Switch- selectable im-
pedance matching -- high 2or 75 ohms
INPUT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
Composite ROB Video
1V p- pnominal. 1V , 6db acceptable. Sync negative.
Non-composite ROB Video
7 V p- pnominal. .7 V f 6db acceptable. Black negative.
External Sync
4V p- pnominal. 10 Vto 8Vp- pacceptable Negative going pulses
CONTROLS
Operator Controls
Maintenance and set-up controls
Power. Degauss. Brightness Located on PCB's
General
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Temperature
3.2°F ( o*c) to 122°F (5crc)
Humidity
10% to 90% relative non-condensing
Altitude
Up to 10.000 Ft ( 3.000 meters)
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Voltage
90-132 VAC1180 - 265 VAC selectable.
Frequency
50-60 Hz t10%.
Power Consumption
WEIGHT
200 watts maximum e 117 VAC
Cabinet
68.00 lb. ( 30.91 kg).
Rack Mtg.
59.00 lb. no slides ( 26.82 kg). 6600 lb. with slides ( 30.00 kg).
Chassis only
56.00 lb. ( 25.45 kg).
OPTIONS
·Naked. Cabinet or Rack Slide version. ·Anti-glare screen contrast filters available. ·External horizontal and vertical drive 1-8 Vnegative. ·Digital Degaussing. On- 0118 Brightness, remote or on chassis. ·Hard Copy output. ·External anti- glare filters: Polaroid. Sunflex. °Cll. Homolite. ·Direct etch CRT
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-19
DA- LITE SCREEN COMPANY, INC.
3100 State Road 15 North P.O. Box 137 Warsaw, IN 46580 (219) 267-8101 Telex 23-2649
VIDEO PROJECTION SCREENS
VM -20
SUPER WONDER -LITE® VIDEO SCREENS Da -Lite makes choosing the right projection screen easy with a video line designed in appropriate video formats and projection surfaces that reflect the projected image at its best and brightest.
Super Wonder-Lite is Da-Lite's exclusive new silver lenticular screen surface created for Video Data Projection. It's available in popular sizes
on tripod, wall/ceiling and FastFold® portable models.
Da-Lite's matchless variety of models in correct formats and picture surfaces meet the many varied requirements of video projection. Choose from wall and ceiling models, electric screens, Da -Lite Polacoat® in- wall rear projection, heavy-duty tripod and portable Fast- Fold.
PICTURE KING
Model: Picture King Type: Extra heavy duty tripod
Construction: Spring roller in embossed metal case; Camlok Metal Roller System; Automatic fabric lock, automatic leg lock, extra heavy extruded gable type constructed aluminum legs, full range height adjustment, plunger locks for positive stops, built-in keystone eliminator.
Picture Surface: Super Wonder-Lite silver lenticular for Video projection. Video format. Black masking borders on all four sides.
Nominal Diagonal Size
60" 6'
100" 10'
Over- All Screen Size
37"x 50" 45" x60" 64" x84" 72" x96"
Approx. Shipping Wt.
23 lbs. 28 lbs. 39 lbs. 41 lbs.
Price
$258.00 298.00 446.00 490.00
Accessories: Zipper type carrying cases
$24.00 - $37.50
Model: Challenger Type: Automatic push-button tripod
Construction: Spring roller in embossed steel case; Camlok Metal Roller System; heavy duty steel tripod, leg lock, fabric lock, full range height adjustment, optional keystone eliminator.
Picture Surface: Super Wonder-Lite silver lenticular for Video projection. Video format. Black borders on all four sides.
Nominal Diagonal Size
60" 6'
Overall Screen Size
37"x 50" 45" x60"
Approx. Shipping Wt.
18 lbs. 25 lbs.
Price
$ 198.00 248.00
Accessories: P-69 keystone eliminator
$ 6.00
Carrying cases
$ 16.75 - 17.75
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
DA-LITE SCREEN COMPANY, INC.
3100 State Road 15 North P.O. Box 137 Warsaw, IN 46580 (219) 267-8101 Telex 23-2649
VIDEO PROJECTION SCREENS
SUPER WONDER-LITE® VIDEO SCREENS ( CONT'D) Model: Versatol
Type: Automatic push-button tripod Construction: Spring roller in embossed hexagon steel case; Camlok Metal
Roller System heavy duty steel tripod, leg lock, full range height adjustment, optional keystone eliminator.
Picture Surface: Super Wonder-Lite silver lenticular for Video projection. Video
format. Black masking borders on all four sides.
Nominal Diagonal
Overall
Approx.
Size
Screen Size
Shipping Wt.
Price
60"
37" x50"
6'
45" x60"
Accessories: P-69 keystone eliminator $6.00
Carrying case $ 16.75 - $ 17.75
15 lbs. 22 lbs.
S165.00 205.00
Model: Deluxe Model B
Type: Wall or Ceiling Model
Construction: Embossed metal case; Camlok Metal Roller System; spring roller
with embossed metal case, automatic fabric tensionizer holds screen in open position.
Picture Surface: Super Wonder-Lite silver lenticular fabric for Video projection.
Video format. Black masking borders on all four sides.
Nominal Diagonal
Over- All
Approx.
Size
Screen Size
Shipping Wt.
Price
60"
37" x50"
15 lbs.
$ 180.00
6'
45" x60"
17 lbs.
210.00
Accessories: Extension wall mounting brackets
No. 23 adjustable
$ 20.00
No. 11 non-adjustable
14.50
No. 6non-adjustable
7 50
T- Bar Scissor Clip for dropped ceilings: $6.50 per pair.
Model: Fast- Fold Type: Free Standing Portable Frame
Mounting: Screen is grommeted and suspended in frame on springs. Construction: Frame and legs 1" square hard alloy structural aluminum tubing
etched and anodized; frame height adjustable on legs in 6" increments. Folding frame can be tilted for keystone elimination.
Picture Surface: Super Wonder-Lite silver lenticular with 8" black masking
borders on all four sides for Video projection. Video format.
Nominal Diagonal
Over- All
Approx.
Size
Screen Size
Shipping Wt.
Price
100" 10'
63" x84" 72" x96"
54 lbs. 55 lbs.
$ 945.00 1045.00
Accessories: Presentation accessories of skirt and wings in velour draperies.
Note: Prices include frame, legs, Super Wonder -Lite picture surface and carrying case.
Cut- to- Size 36 Square Feet Minimum
Per Sq. Ft. $ 5.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
FAST- FOLD
//7
VM-21
DRAPER SHADE AND
411 South Pearl Street Spiceland, IN 47385
(317) 987-7999
SCREENS FOR WALL OR CEILING
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED SCREENS ·TARGA - Our most popular electric screen for video
projection. Sizes through 15' diagonal. Walnut woodgrain vinyl on steel case mounts easily to wall or ceiling. Motor in roller design permits viewing surface to be centered in case. Smooth, quiet operation. ·ENVOY - Adds atouch of class to your video presentation. Screen is recessed in the ceiling - invisible when not in use. At the touch of aswitch, the automatic ceiling closure opens and the screen appears. Closure may be painted to match ceiling. Sizes through 15' diagonal. · ROLLERAMIC - For really big screen presentations - sizes through 25' diagonal. All-wood case may be recessed in the ceiling or painted to match its surroundings. All DRAPER electric screens are listed by Underwriters Laboratories.
111111111·111MIM,
SCREEN COMPANY
FLAT SCREENS FOR VIDEO
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED SCREENS
TARGA sl,tor-ln-R011er -· walnut steel case. teacled.
· Scree^ .dtt white or
NOM.
X:EYEING
OVERALL OVERALL SHIP WI.
DIAL.
AREA
512f CASE LENGTH (" BS.) PRICE
4' 27 2 .37
32 . 4C
48'
33 5510.00
5 34 1 1- . 46 122 39v50
57"
34
512.00
64' 3'
...In 3-4 42 > El"
61'
34
520.00
6' 4,
1,2 47 x60
67'
35
520.00
.CS 1/2 53x70"
77"
40
532.00
63.84"
92'
49 ; 58.00
76"495"
103"
55
575.00
' . 104"
81">108"
116"
62
608.00
.:16"
9?".120"
128"
65
675.00
.111" 104'·x137"
145"
73
714.00
109,144"
152"
80
714 00
ROLLERAMIC
luty electric Screen beaded SPecify wall or
ENVOY Electric screen with motor- in- roller
and automatic ceiling closure. Matt white or glass beaded.
NOM. DIAG.
XiEwINC,
64" 37 6' 42 7' 48 1/2' yi ·
10'
II' 12Y 170'
15'
71 -
392
76 1/4"x104"
87" . 116"
99"
x133"
104"
v140"
OVERALL OVERALL
SIZE CASE LENGTH
39".50"
65"
4?"x53"
68"
4' .60
75"
'6 x95' 81"On" 90"i120'
: - 144"
110"
123" 135"
I52' 159"
SHIP WT ( LBS. )
65 68
00 80
90 5
110 125
130 135
PRICE
$1063.00 1077 00 1077.00 1090.00 1107.00 1114 00 1165.00 1210.00 1278.00 1278.00
Note: El,.
Screen Accessories Eo t'on abOve.
OVERALL SHIP WT.
'd E LENGTH ( 185.) PRICE
'4
105 S 886.00
77·
110
898.00
110
890,00
120
912.00
108
135
919.00
119'
145
930.00
132
155
988.00
"un 816G 12Y 1/0"
IS
?O' 22'3'
25'
ox141. 5121
OVERALL SHIP w
CASE LENGTH ( IF
'44 -
161"
In'
164 --
190
198"
280
222"
320
246
3'0
270"
430
01110E
3,c231.00 10/3.00 103.00 1375.00 1467.00 1675,00 1817.00
DIPLOMAT tripod Screen
Matt white or glass beaded.
NOM.
DIAL 4' 5'
64"
6' /'
100" 10'
VIEWING
OVERALL SHIP WT,
AREA 27 1/2"x37"
SIZE ( LBS.)
32.40"
23
34 112,46 I/O" 39"x50"
24
37"
v49 3/4 . 42x53"
27
42"
v56 1/2" 47x60"
28
48 1/2"x65 1/2" 51x70"
30
58"
v79"
63x84"
318
71"
.92"
76,95"
40
PRICE 5153.00
153.0C
166.00
166.00 183.00
253.00 275.00
MANUAL SCREENS
OPTIONAL
CARRT CASE PRICE
$20.50 21.50 23.00 23.00 25.00 28.00 31.00
LUMA Wall/Leiling Screen. Matt white or glass beaded.
NOM. 1:100.
4' 5' 64"
6' 7' 100"
VIEWING
AREA 27 1/2.37"
34 1/2x46 1/2"
37"
049 3/4"
42"
x56 1/2"
48 1/2"x65 1/2"
58"
x79"
OVERALL
32x40" 39"x50" 42">53" 47x60" 53"x/0" 63x84"
OVERALL SHIP WI.
CASE LENGTH ( LEIS.) PRICE
42 1/13"
11 S 64.00
52 1/8" 55 3/8"
1E23
6748.00
62 1/8"
14
78.00
72 1/8"
6
9
86 1,8"
2.1
1566:g
MANUALLY OPERATED SCREENS
· LUMA
Spring roller screen available in sizes
through 100" diagonal. Pentagonal walnut wood-
grain case blends with any decor.
· LUMA 2 - Similar in design to the LUMA. LUMA 2 is built with heavy-duty components for ease of operation and longer life. Available in sizes from 10' through 15' diagonal.
·CINEPERM - Wall- mounting version of CINEFOLD. 1" tubular aluminum frame installs easily to wall. Snap- on surfaces in flexible matt white or Cineflex are interchangeable for either front or rear projection. Replacement surface can be installed in less than five minutes in the event of damage. Excellent
for bars, discos, etc. Virtually any size, from 71/2 ' diagonal
PORTABLE PROJECTION SCREENS
ACCESSORIES For all screens on this page.
PRICE
EXTRA DROP
$ 2.00/so.ft.
LUMA - 16-25 - EXTENSION BROS 12" EXTENSION BROS EXTENSION BRKTS -
19.00/Pr. 14 .00,14r.
7.50/Pr.
7- BAR TWIST CLIPS -
7.00/Pr
LUNA 2 - 6" EXTENSION BRKTS ELECTRIC SCREENS -
KU( OPERATED POWER SUPPLY
7.50/Pr.
SWITCH 2- STATIONS WITH CONTROL
54 50
UNIT - 24 VOIT
264.50
LUMA 2 Heavy Duty Screen for Wall or Ceiling.
NOM.
MYU1Z e Ar :VIEZbea : 'RAIL
SHIP WT.
AREA
SIZE CASE LENGTH ( LBS.) PRICE
' ll e . 71"
x92"
76x95" 98 5/8"
39 5252.00
11' 76 1/4x104"
82x108"
Ill"280.00 45
12',' 87"
x116"
92x120" 123 1/4"
SC
325.00
170" 99" . 133" 104037" 140 1/4"
70
430.00
15' 104"
xI40" 109x144" 14/ 1/4" / 5 430.00
FOLDING SCREENS CINEFOLD - Convenient portable screen. 1" tubular
aluminum frame and legs assemble in minutes. Easyto-follow instructions. Interchangeable front or rear viewing surfaces snap onto frame - smooth and wrinkle-free. Stores in compact luggage- like ABS carrying case. Sizes from 71/ 2 'through 17 1/ 2 'diagonal. Larger sizes available with truss style construction.
Cinefold Accessories
Heavy-duty Legs ( pr.)
$ 126.00
Instead of T- legs. Recommended for screens
from 12 1/ 2 'diagonal.
Anti- sway Stabilizers ( pr.) Recommended for screens from 17 Y, ' diagonal.
70.00
Extra Handy Cranks
100
Extra Carrying Case
135.00
FOLDING SCREENS
CINEFOLD PonmbmAmiactIonScmoniubular aluminum frame and legs with interchangeable front or rear viewing surfaces.
ROM.
0IAG. 7',' 10'
12.s' 15'
17 ,,'
VIEWING
OVERALL
AREA
SIZE
50"x691 /2 " 4'6"x6'2"
68x92"
6'x8'
86x116" 7'6"x10'
104x140"
9'x12'
122>164" 106x14'
SHIP WT. (LBS.) 45 51 61 70 78
MATT COMPLETE PRICE $272.00 438.00 $10.00 572.50 691.50
WHITE FRONT SCREEN
SCREEN
SURFACE
PRICE
$118.00
164.00
253.00
358.50
447.00
ONLY
CINEFLEX REAR5CREEN
COMPLETE SCREEN
SURFACE
PRICE
PRICE
$388.00
$208.00
629.00
329.00
756.00
472.00
975.00
713.00
1020.00
770.00
ONLY
TRIPOD SCREENS DIPLOMAT - World's finest tripod screen. Walnut woodg rain vinyl on steel case. Built-in keystone eliminator. Gabled aluminum legs are held securely in place by Bell Leg Lock. Heavy-duty components throughout. Available in sizes through 10' diagonal. Carrying
case available.
Dress-up Kits for CRIlla012$ Velour skirt. valance and two ide drapes, tubular aluminum valance bar and drapery
mounting bars. Available in black or blue. Carrying case and adjustable skirt bar are available.
NOM DIAG.
7Y 10' 12)1' 15' 17Y
COMPLETE PRICE $509.00 586.50 657.50 713.00 795.50
KIT
OPTIONAL SKIRT BAR PRICE $ 99.00 107.00 114.00 117.00 120.50
SKIRT PRICE $125.00 161.50 199.00 222.00 248.50
VALANCE PRICE $64.50 83.00 86.50 92.00 93.00
BAR
VALANCE PRICE $ 76.00
87.00 101.00 109.50 119.00
DRAPERY PRICE
$84.00 84.00 84.00
84.00 84.00
BARS
DRAPES ( PR.) PRICE $159.50 171.00 187.00 205.50 251.00
VM-22
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
DRAPER SHADE AND SCREEN COMPANY
FLAT SCREENS
411 South Pearl Street Spiceland, IN 47385
FOR VIDEO
(317) 987-7999
FLAT SCREENS FOR VIDEO
Draper proudly presents the first comprehensive line of flat screens especially designed for video projection. A complete range of sizes are available for front or rear projection, portable or permanent mounting and manual or electrical operation. All are in 3:4 video format, with special video masking.
VIEWING SURFACES
Roller Operated Screens
·Fiberglass Matt White. Our most popular viewing surface. Offers a broad viewing angle, uniform light distribution, and excellent resolution. Gain 1.0. Easy to clean. Recommended for use with ceiling mounted projectors.
· Fiberglass Glass Beaded. Narrower viewing angle, some loss of resolution. Gain 1.5. Cannot be cleaned - not recommended for areas where cigarette smoke accumulates.
Cinefold and Cineperm
·Flexible Matt White. Vinyl with a delicate emboss for uniform brightness. Excellent resolution. Easy to clean.
·Cineflex Rear Vision. Vinyl film impregnated with miniscule optical lenses. Excellent resolution. Gain 2.5. Medium viewing angle.
Cinescreen Rigid Rear Screens Available in glass or acrylic substrate. Optical coatings for every application.
DRAPER SCREENS IN VIDEO FORMAT
HOW TO ORDER VIDEO SCREENS
Specify: 1 -- Model name and viewing surface 2 -- Diagonal measurement 3 -- Request " Video Masking"
The overall and viewing area dimensions shown here are for your information. We do not need them to fill your order.
Our Most Popular Models and Sizes are included in this price list.
We can manufacture all of our screen models in 3:4 formats with video masking. We will be pleased to quote on your special requirements.
Special sizes are our specialty -- No requirements too large or too small.
r,, j ,
PEA. 5,5PF 1 N' .
r
,
V
V
V1,..*-
K.E.,-
.V.·
..-
1...
V'
,..
V
*/
*Al ye
....--
...-..--
le ar
iI .1..-
le 1.-· V' le
te
te
le
le
sr le `e.
V' ..-
1.0.
V
.."
V
Ve .V.- V,,,, .V.- bVe ....
v. N' 1,,···
v· ....
V'
Re ie ...·
Iv
be ...
V.
1 V
IV
`,/
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V'
V
V
V
le
V
V
·155
V V
V. te
VIDEO PROJECTORS
hc,
liii) IT ¡('''' S taraql on manual« twee, iiiihn5hoil III, rature
111,11111 III tills
.Eri
Draiiet
I11(11(05 Illeralure ar111
Iniiirinatua on a Ey product, winch rimy have hoer, mintier]
NOMINAL DIAGONAL
4
5
61
5
ARCTURUS
MODEL 3
*
4
ELECTROHOME
EDP 57 *(
ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS PRODUCTS
AGUARAS
1
AOL/ASTAP MC*
1111
3500 MAGNA IMAGE I*
( I(
V
V
V
V
V
INFLIGHT
V STAR 5
E.(
BARCODAIA * i
KLOSS NOYABEAM MODEL ONE
PANASONIC
MODEL WOO CT 6100M CT 10010M CT 17000M CT 171(YJM CT 11700M
V iE,....
te. V
VS BUNCO
CINE 510111 Am *
(
CINEmAIEI Am I, Eir
(
SONY
UPES ,22,, VPH 102014 *
le".
THOMSON
TOP 01 A
* v 55
Ada/ 1,15,5 , to rear prolection pre -sel lo inc1,5ated
(
4
ty · ,·1, May II, sel 1,, 11,45 , 51155
100
/2
1,0
15
I 1
20
72
25
It }
4 1,1
V
V
V
V
,../
v*
`,...
V
V
V
V
V
V
VI.
V
V"
>I
V
V--) 41/
V--)
)
)
%.,
)
A 11 1
11
1
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-23
EIKI INTERNATIONAL,
27882 Camino Capistrano
Laguna Niguel, CA 92677 (714) 831-2511
INC.
SELF-CONTAINED VHS VIDEO SYSTEM
EIKIVISION 1/2" VHS
Features: · Big 9" Color Monitor · Standard 1/2" VHS. The world's most popular video
format with up to 8 hours of continuous play with T-160 tape ( 6 hours with T-120 tape). ·7- Day Touch- Button Programming · Rugged Tape Handling Mechanism. With ndustrial quality direct drive motors and aminimum of belts to wear out. · Pause control for discussion and review · Video search to locate important program sections, at five times normal tape speed, forward or reverse · Convenient Optional Remote Control · Headphone jack for private listening · Front- Load convenience. Inserts and ejects tapes quickly and easily.
TAPE SPEED
PLAY/RECORD TIME
T-120 , 160
!- SP
I 33.35 mm /sec.
2hours
--t 2hours i 40 minutes
I EP 11.12 mm/sec.
, 6hours
1 8hours
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES:
REMOTE CONTROL: CARRYING CASES:
PLAY, STOP, FORWARD AND EVERSE SEARCH, PAUSE.16" ( 5METER) CABLE
A). LIGHTWEIGHT KORDURA FABRIC CARRYING CASE WITH SHOULDER STRAP B). REUSABLE, FLAW DUTY SHIPPING CASE WITH OR WITHOUT REMOVABLE CASTERS
Specifications:
POWER REQUIREMENTS: TELEVISION SYSTEM:
PLAYBACK/RECORD SYSTEM:
VIDEO SEARCH: TAPE COUNTER: VIDEO INPUT: VIDEO OUTPUT " 1 VIDEO OUTPUT " 2: CRT DISPLAY: AUDIO AMPLIFIER: SPEAKER: AUDIO INPUT: AUDIO OUTPUT: OPERATING TEMPERATURE: OPERATING HUMIDITY: STORAGE TEMPERATURE: SIZE: WEIGHT:
120 VOLTS 60 HZ, 70 WATTS HA STANDARD 525 LINES 60 FIELDS N.T. S.C. COLOR SIGNAL V. H.S. ( i,2" CASSETTE FORMAT) LUMINANCE: FM AZIMUTH RECORDING CHROMINANCE: CONVERTED SUBCARRIER, DIRECT RECORDING
5XEP-11.12mm/sec MECHANICAL 4DIGITS .5 to 2.0 VP-P, 75 OHMS, RCA type jack
1.0 VP-P, 75 OHMS, RCA type jack 1.0 VP-P, 1.0 KOHMS, RCA type jack 9" COLOR MONITOR ( diagonal measure) 1.0 WATT
8CM .078 VRMS, 50 KOHMS, RCA type jack .38 VRMS, 1KOHMS, RCA type jack 41° fto 104° f (-1- 5°c to + 40°c) 35% to 80% 4°f to 140°f (- 20°c to + 60°c) 13 1/2"Hx17-el"Wx15 1/2"D 37 LBS. ( 17KG)
EV-10 Eikiv;sion Video Display System 1100 Eikivision Demo Tape 2000 Eikivision Remote Control 1500 Eikivision Soft Carrying Case 1501 Eikivision Hard Case w/Wheels 1502 Eikivision Hard Case w/o Wheels
$1395.00 20.00 20.00 99.00
266.00 216.00
VM-24
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ELECTROHOME
ELECTRONICS
809 Wellington St.
N. Kitchener, Ontario, Canada N2G 4J6 (51 9) 744-71 11 Telex 06 9-5 5449
VIDEO MONITOR/ MODULATOR/ RECEIVER
ECM 1301
ECM 1301 HIGH RESOLUTION COLOR VIDEO MONITOR
Designed with the discriminating user in mind, ECM 1301 provides high performance with an extra degree of flexibility. At the leading edge of monitor technology, this quality display readily moves from one applicatons segment to another as a result of inherent design features and selective interface modules. Now there is a monitor to meet the following array of video display requirements:
· Business productivity nicrocomputers ·Scientific desk top computers · End user/O.E.M. CAD/CAM Graphics systems
FEATURES · 13" RGB display ·Self- converging, in- line 90° CRT · . 31mm pitch ·720 x512 pixels ·25MHz bandwidth · 14.5 to 25KHz horizontal scan · Horizontal phase CTL · Long persistence phosphor ·80 character resolution ·8 user controls · Flexibility nrough custom interfaces ·Attractive styling ·All metal enclosure · 13"H x 17.5"W x 17.2"D I33 x44.5 x43.7cm) ·Weight: 52 lbs. ( 23.6Kg)
SM-36 MODULATOR
The new Electrohome Model SM-36 is today's answer to Modulator design. Its full output + 56 to 62dBmV in any desired channel from 54-300MHz makes stocking installing and backup 36 times easier. It uses synthesis for stability and total agility in your cable system. FEATURES ·Total agility means that only one unit has to be stocked that will
cover all channels in the low, mid, high and super bands. ·SAW filtered for adjacent channe operation. · Front panel metering of output channel, audio deviation and video
modulation. · R.F. mute on channel change. ·Only 1.75" high in standard E.1.A 19" rack -- 13" deep. ·Simple " on the job" setup. ·Canadian Standards Association ( C.S.A.) certified.
SR- 24
SR -24 SATELLITE RECEIVER
The Electrohome model SR-24 is the ultimate in satellite receivers designed exclusively for the cable systems market.
RGB/RS170
FEATURES · Microprocessor control for ease of operation and optimum perfor-
mance. · Frequency synthesis for both video and audio eliminates frequency
INTERFACE MODULES RGB/RS170
INPUTS · RGB with separate or cprnbined horizontal/vertical sync · RGB with sync on green ·75 ohm termination -- svvitchable ·Video loopthrough ·Inputs adjustable to 5volts peak to peak video · Power supply -- 12 volts ·Automatic Sync selection ·Connects to ECM- 1301 via 8 Pin Molex connector
Additional Modules 1. IBM PC 2. APPLE III
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. In Canada, IBM is a registered user.
Apple Ill is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc.
drifting, while continuous tuning ensures the ultimate in noise- free
reception. · Interference problems are under total control with this receiver.
Individual channel fine tuning, synthesized oscillators and IF loop, combine with the SAW filter to minimize your terrestrial problems.
·A full 30MHz SAW filtered IF bandwidth for state-of-the-art performance -- compatible with today's and tomorrow's scrambling
systems. ·Continuously variable audio syntnesized from 5.0-8.0MHz.
· If that were not enough, consider these extras: RF loopthrough to simplify multiple receiver installations. Redundant LNB powering for increased reliability. Level meter -- Analog and Digital for maintenance and ease of
installation. Keyboard lock to prevent unauthorized tampering. Non-volatile memory to protect against power failures. ·Canadian Standards Association ( C.S.A.) certified.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
vM-25
ELECTROHOME
ELECTRONICS
809 Wellington, St. N. Kitchener, Ontario, Canada N2G 4J6 (519 ) 744-71 11 Telex 06 9 - 55449
MONOCHROME VIDEO MONITORS
Electrohome's full range of monochrome video monitors is designed to international performance standards. Cabinets are constructed of a new Steltex textured steel for added durability. Attractive beige and earth brown tones have been utilized to further enhance the styling of each monitor design.
FEATURES · Front operated A - B switching · 18 MHz bandwidth · Scanguard· circuit for size stability · Primary and major secondary controls front accessible · Internal/External sync capability · Excellent black level stability ·Common mode rejection ·AC cord winder ( 9", 12", 15", 17") · Switchable power supply for 110/220/240 volt operation · Universal AC interlock · Long life LED pilot light ·Wide variety of options
·Scanguard is a special Electrohome development for EVM 19/20 models to keep picture sizes constant over awide range of brightness changes.
EVM-920 EVM-920P31
EVM-1220 EVM-1220P31 EVM-1519
EVM-1719 EVM-2319 EVM-2319AG EVM-2319P31
EVM-2319P31AG
9" Monitor, 20 lbs. 9" Monitor P31, 20 lbs.
12" Monitor, 33 lbs. 12" Monitor P31, 33 lbs 15" Monitor, 39 lbs.
17" Monitor, 48 lbs. 23" Monitor, 80 lbs. 23" Monitor with anti- glare, 85 lbs 23" Monitor P31, 80 lbs
23" Monitor with anti- glare, 85 lbs
ACCESSORIES
ECM- 3
Ceiling Mount for 17" and 23", 16 lbs
EWM-1
Wall Mount Adaptor for ECM- 3, 13 lbs
EMS
Mobile Stand, 24 lbs.
RAK-9A 9" Rackmounting Kit, 7lbs.
WMA-9
Waveform Mounting Kit for use
with RAK-9A, 5lbs
RAK-12
12" Rackmounting Kit, 9lbs.
RAK-15
15" Rackmounting Kit, 9lbs.
RAK-17
17" Rackmounting Kit, 10 lbs.
$ 571.00 607.00 645.00 683.00 711.00 792.00 939.00 971.00 987.00
1029.00
$ 75.00 65.00
175.00 70.00
35.00 70.00 70.00 70.00
EVM 920 EVM 1220 EVM 1519 EVM 1719 EVM 2319
CRT Diagonal (Phosphor)
8.55 in. 217.4mm
11.69 in. 296.9mm
13.86 in. 352.0 mm
16.25 in. 412.75 mm
22.31 in. 566.7 mm
CRT Display Area
38 in. 2 245.2 cm 2
74 in 2 477 cm 2
100 in. 2 645cm 2
141 in. 2 909.4cm 2
282 in. 2 1819cm 2
Unit Weight ( Unpacked)
17 lbs. 7.65 kg.
25 lbs. 11.2 kg.
29 lbs. 13.0 kg.
39 lbs. 17.5 kg.
71 lbs.· 31.9 kg.
·Add 5lbs. extra for face plate on tubes with antiglare panels.
RAK 9A 18.97"(L) ( 482.0 mm); 8.75"(H) ( 222.0 mm); 5lbs. ( 2.3 kg.) RAK 12 18.97"(L) ( 482.0 mm); 10.471H) ( 266.0 mm); 7lbs. ( 3.2 kg.)
RAK 15 18.97"(L) ( 482.0 mm); 12.20"(H) ( 310.0 mm); 7lbs. ( 3.2 kg.) WMA 93 lbs. ( 1.4 kg.)
EVM 1719
EVM 2319
EVM 1519
2220
EVM 920
11
2200 18461
EVM 1220
-"e t no
1121.11
(1e,s
710 12.071 100 23921
EVM 920
EVM 1519
12;441
MS o )146)
EVM 2319
5200 (2047)
,...
...)
IF 0
VM-26
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ELECTROHOME
ELECTRONICS
809 Wellington St. N. Kitchener, Ontario, Canada N2G 4J6 (51 9) 744-711 1 Telex 069-55 44 9
MONOCHROME VIDEO MONITORS
Operating and Service
Video Circuits
TWO EVM-920 WITH RAK-9A
EVM-1519 WITH RAK-15
EVM-920
WITH RAK-9A
Front Controls and Features: On- off Switch LED Pilot Light Reduced Scan Switch VTR Switch Horizontal Hold Focus ( screw driver adjust) Vertical Hold Height ( screw driver adjust) Brightness Contrast A- B Switch Volume Control: ( only with optional audio module)
EVM-1220 WITH RAK-12
Rear Panel: Input A - 2BNC Connectors. loop- through Input -13" or Ext Sync 2BNC connectors. loop- through 2Termination Switches Ext - Int. Sync Switch AC Connector Fuse Holder Width Control
EVM-1719 WITH RAK-17
Internal Controls: Preset Conirast Preset Brightness Black Level Control Vertical Linearity Horizontal Frequency centering Control Horizontal Phase ( video centering) AC- DC Coupling Link ( Factory set to DC position) Voltage Regulator Control Size Regulation Control Reduced Scan Width Coil
Input Circuits: Input via BNC connectors with isolated signal ground. Termination: 7511±5% Return Loss: Common Mode Rejection: better than 40db up to 6Vp-p.
Video Amplifier: Input Signal: 0.5-2Vp-p sync negative Gain -35db Bandwidth: 9" & 12" CRT: 100Hz18MHz ± 3db at 30Vp-p at CRT cathode.
15" CRT: 100Hz-18MHz ± 3db at 30V p- p.
17" CRT: 100Hz-18MHz ± 3db at 35V p- p. 23" CRT: 100Hz-18MHz ± 3db at
30V p- p
Deflection Circuits
Display
Power Supply Environment
Vertical Deflection: Adjustable from 130% to 65% of scan. Adjustment by size switching cir-
cuits and height control. Vertical Rate: Adjustable from 40Hz to 65Hz by vertical Hold control. Vertical Retrace: 650psec
Horizontal Deflection: Adjustable from 115% to 80% of
scan Adjustment by size switching circuits and width controls
Horizontal scan rates: Standard 15.75 KHz to 18KHz Option 18 KHz to 22.5 KHz Horizontal Retrace: 7.5 psec
Deflection Angles: 9" & 12' .CRT's 90° 15" & 23" CRT's 1100 17" CRT 1140 NOTE: For operation of the monitors at horizontal scan rates other than standard TV rates consult the Service Manual.
Display: All monitors have 4:3 aspect ratio Front switchable from 105% to appr 85% of full picture size. Vertical linearity: .i·.2% of picture height
Horizontal linearity: · - 2% of picture height
Geometry: 2% by EIA Ball chart. Interlace: 45 55 non tunable. Picture Size Stability: · 2% change
from 0to 30ft/I peak brightness at 90% APL Resolution: ( Polished face plate and P4 phosphor) 15", 17" and 23" CRT's: 1000 TV
lines centre. 800TV lines corners at 30 ft/I ( 300 lux). Standara 9" CRT's 750 TV lines centre 600 TV lines corners at 30 ft/I (300 lux). Standard 12" and Optional 9" CRTs. 800 TV lines centre, 650 TV lines corners at 30ft/I ( 300 lux)
High Voltage:
9" & 12 - CRT's 12KV at Opa 15" CRT's 17.5KV at Opa 17" CRT's 18KV at Opa 23" CRT's 19.5KV at Opa
Input Power: 9" & 12 CRT's 120V ( 220.240V),
50/60Hz 45 Watts 15". 17" & 23" CRT's 120V (220/240V) 50/60Hz 60 Watts
Asynchronous Operation: All V19 and V20 monitors are designed for asynchronous operation e.g. there is no discernible movement of the display if the vertical and power line frequency differ
Maximum Operating Range:
00 C to + 50°C Humidity: 90% non-condensing Altitude: to 10,000 feet ( 3040 meters)
Storage: -40°C to + 65°C
Electrohome's policy is to meet or exceed safety standards and regulations of: CSA, HWC, FCC, DHHS, UL. Television standards: EIA, CCIR.
All performance specifications apply for line variations from 100 to '32v (200-260 1/1 Due to constant research and product improvement. specifications are subject to change without notice
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-27
ELECTROHOME
ELECTRONICS
809 Wellington St. N. Kitchener, Ontario, Canada N2G 4J6 (519) 744-7111 Telex 069-55449
VIDEO PROJECTION SYSTEMS
Model EDP-58 Large Screen Monochrome Projection Monitor
The Electrohome EDP-58 monochrome projection monitor is specifically designed for large screen, high resolution video displays of alphanumeric and graphic information from computer generated signals. It is uniquely designed to synchronize with almost all CRTtype computer terminals available today.*
Extremely compact, the high brightness monochrome projector permits large group viewing in normal office lighting environments. Crisp, big picture impact replaces the need for several conventional sized monitors.
The EDP-58 is ideal for demonstrations of new computer hardware and software developments. Classroom teaching of computer programming is made easy. It is equally dramatic for customer or trade show presentations.
Lightweight, it can be moved from room to room. A precision f/1.0 lens is user focusable for 4ft. to 10 ft. ( 1.2m to 3m) diagonal screens. The EDP-58 also features ascan reverse switch for rear screen projection.
This modular, solid state unit is versatile, rugged and reliable, matching today's fast moving information needs. Set-up and operating ease, even by non- technical personnel, is inherent in the design of the EDP- 58. It eliminates audience fragmentation and permits each viewer to enjoy maximum impact from data/graphics presentations.
The versatile, solid state EDP-58 projection monitor is a compact, 24.75" x 14" x8" ( 69cm x36cm x21cm) and weighs only 45 lbs. (20.4kg). Designed for ceiling, pedestal or desk stand mounting, the unit offers tremendous flexibility for display presentations.
Stylish, the case and trim are made of textured steel and molded plastics. There is a rear carrying handle. A front trim protects the precision lens.
Precision optics and high speed electronics provide up to 1300 line resolution capability for sharp data/graphics display, exceeding 80 characters/line.
Easy to use operator controls are on the rear panel; service controls are accessible through the control panel. Also featured is video loop thru, keystone adjustment and D.C. restoration.
Data approved P53 green phosphor is standard. Optional phosphors available to match terminal manufacturer standards.
The versatile EDP- 58 may be used on many different screen materials and sizes, including flat and rear projection screens. Electrohome offers an accessory 6ft., ( 1.8m) high gain, curved screen for viewing in higher ambient light areas. Rugged and durable, it features a washable reflecting surface. The screen has adjustable wall mounting hardware. Accessory legs are available for freestanding display applications.
Electronic circuitry in the EDP- 58 data/graphics projection monitor permits interfacing with almost all CRT computer terminals on the market today. The unit employs stabilized power supplies and picture-size circuitry that allows operation over a wide range of scanning frequencies without internal modifications.
For some terminals not supplying composite video outputs, an economical Electrohome designed interface module may be used. The module simply supplies the necessary composite video ( via coaxial cable) to the input on the EDP- 58.
The functional, easy to use control panel ( shown) features convenient loop-thru BNC inputs to interface directly either with video terminals or the interface module.
Convenient user controls located on the rear control panel include Power Switch, Brightness and Contrast.
Other less frequently required set-up controls-- Electrical Focus, Keystone Correction, Picture Size, Vertical, Horizontal Hold-- are
_
recessed to allow access for set-up adjustments. Easy rear panel optical focusing of the lens permits use with various screen sizes. The EDP-58 video projection monitor is compatible with composite video signals in NTSC, PAL, CCIR and SECAM systems. Large monochrome pictures may be displayed directly from most VTR, Videodisc and television camera outputs.
EDP-58"
IM- 56 Harness
PB-56 DS- 58** MY-56 VS6-56 SL- 1000
CC- 56
Projection Monitor
Interface Module Wiring Harness
Pedestal Base Desk Stand Ceiling Mount Curved Screen 6feet Elevating Legs
25' BNC/BNC Coaxial Cable
$3895.00
155.00 85.00
390.00 150.00
65.00 495.00 145.00
35.00
*Special order phosphors ( other than green P1 )
--A minimum of 10-12 weeks lead time prior to product shipment --A premium of $600.00 per unit
**Desk stand requires aCeiling Mount ( MY- 56) An optional Interface Module may be needed for your particular CRT terminal.
VM-28
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ELECTROHOME
ELECTRONICS
809 Wellington St. N. Kitchener, Ontario, Canada N2G 4J6 (519) 744-71 11 Telex 06 9-5 5449
VIDEO PROJECTION SYSTEMS
EDP-58 ( Cont'd)
PERFORMANCE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS Resolution ·Up to 1000 lines resolution
Brightness ·300 footLamberts peak on axis on a 6'
(1.5m) diagonal 10 gain screen ·500 lumens total light output ( Std. P53
Phosphor)
Display ·Green P53 phosphor standard, other
phosphors available on special order ·Throw distance approx. 1.25x screen
diagonal size ·Continuously focusable from 4.5' ( 1.4m)
diagonal projected picture to 10 ft. ( 3m) diagonal ·Aspect ratio 3:4 ·Keystone circuitry to correct picture for projection angles up to ± 10° vertically from screen axis
Operating and Service Controls Front External ·Curved/flat screen lens focus adjustment
Rear External ·Single knob optical lens focusing ·Power on- off switch ·Brightness control ·Contrast control
·Video input 75 termination switch ·AC power input ·Electrical focus
Rear Internal ( accessible) ·Keystone correction ·Vertical size ( height) ·Vertical hold ·Horizontal size ( width) ·Horizontal hold ·Primary fuse ( 1.5A slow blow std.) ·Reversed Scan Switch for rear screen
projection
Internal ·120/220/240/AVC plug connection ( 120
VAC std.) ·Vertical Linearity adjust ·Dynamic Focus adjust ( Horizontal) ·Dynamic Focus adjust ( Vertical) ·Horizontal Video Centering adjust ·D.C. Restoration switch: 1. back porch
clamp ( STD) 2. sync tip clamp ·G2 bias supply adjust
Video Circuits Input ·2BNC connectors ( looped through)
·75 n + 1% terminated
·25k ohm shunted by 12pf open ·Input level 0.5 to 2.0V p- psync negative ·Differential ( floating) input rejects 14
V p- pof power line hum voltage
Frequency Response ·20MHz bandwidth + 3dB
D.C. Restoration ·Back porch keyed clamp internally switch-
able to sync tip clamp
Dimensions
171mm 6.75 in
359mm 14.13 in
143mm 5.63 inDia.
327mm 12.88 in
629mm 24.75 in
207mm 8.13 in
Gain ·Min. video gain 40 dB or 100X ·Max. video output 110V p- pdrive
Deflection Circuits Vertical Deflection ·Size: adjustable from 20% overscan to
10% underscan ·Frequency range: from 45 Hz to 80 Hz ·Retrace time less than 0.5 milliseconds
Horizontal Deflection ·Size: adjustable from 20% overscan to
10% underscan ·Frequency range: 15 kHz to 33 kHz ·Retrace time: less than 6microseconds
High Voltage ·32.0 KV regulated to better than + 1%
Power Requirements ·120 VAC ± 10% can be internally re-
connected for 220 VAC ± 10% or 240 VAC ± 10% ·Line Frequency 50 or 60 Hz nominal ·Power 120 watts max.
Environment Maximum Operating Range ·Temperatue: 0° to 35°C ·Humidity: 0-90% non condensing ·Altitude: 0-10,000 ft. ( 3,000m)
Storage ·Temperature: -30° to 65°C
One year parts and labor warranty.
Due to constant research, specifications are subject to change without notice. Manufacturers of television display equipment in monochrome and color standards for data, industrial, commercial and educational users.
This product is designed to meet or exceed safety standards and regulations of: FCC, DH HS, HWC and is CSA certified and UL listed.
This product is covered by U.S.A. patents 4414494, 4393336. Other patents pending.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-29
ELECTROHOME
ELECTRONICS
809 Wellington St. N. Kitchener, Ontario, Canada N2G 4J6 (519) 744-7111 Telex 069-55449
COLOR LARGE SCREEN DATA/GRAPHICS
VIDEO DISPLAY
Model ECP 1000 + Color Projector for Computer Graphics/Data or Video Tapes
Electrohome ECP 10C/0+ is the ideal projection system for ceiling mounted installation.
But it is also very portable-- unlike other color projection units.
The difference results from our breakthrough in Laser Aligned Dichroics ( LAD) that automatically converges colors within the unit and projects a brilliant image through a single lens.
So it takes only afew minutes for anon- technical person to set up ECP 1000+ for a perfect presentation.
Other systems have three lenses and dozens of controls that must be separately and meticulously adjusted to converge colors on the screen. Since that can take hours of work by a trained technician, those other systems weren't really designed to provide portable convenience and versatility.
Whether you use it in a permanent installation or as a portable system, ECP 1000 + performance must be seen to be believed.
It projects computer graphics in brilliant color and sharp detail. High resolution, together with 40 and 80 character display, makes computer data easy to read.
The most advanced system for today is so advanced, it's ready for tomorrow. Because it was designed as acomputer projection system, it also provides the ultimate performance from video tapes, video discs and off- air signals. In fact, ECP 1000+ is ready for the next generation of high definition video. And because it's so portable and can be set up in minutes, any room can be a teleconference center.
· Conveniently portable or convenient ceiling mount. You can make frequent use of your ECP 1000+ system because you can readily move it from room to room and from meeting to meeting. The easy- rolling cart has acompressed system for precise and effortless height adjustment. A special ceiling mount is available for more permanent installations.
· Readily adapted to most color and monochrome computers. ECP 1000+ is compatible with most corporate and personal computer terminals. Because it can project monochrome as well as color, you can benefit from ECP 1000 + portability and superb projection of video tapes even before you make the move to color computers.
·No guess work about what plugs into where. No one can possibly make amistake when setting up an ECP 1000 + presentation. One cable plugs all computer and video tape signals, as well as remote control, into the projection unit. Other systems not designed for portability have as many as twelve cables that confuse the set-up and clutter the meeting room.
·Only three operating controls. Once again -- there's no guesswork. The on/off brightness and contrast controls are clearly identified and readily accessible at the rear of the unit. Or they can be operated with the remote control unit.
·Adaptable to various screens. For further versatility, your ECP 1000 + can be operated with front and rear screens of various sizes-- including those you may already be using for your film and slide presentations. Or for ultimate performance, use the special Electrohome curved high brightness screen. ECP 1000+ electronically adjusts the image size to different screen sizes at the turn of a knob.
·Automatic positioning in relation to screen. As with all color computer and video tape projection systems, the unit must be correctly positioned in relation to the screen for precise optical focus.
With other systems that can be amatter of trial and error. But there's no guesswork with ECP 1000+ and it takes only seconds. Two rangefinder lights project arrows on the screen. When the two arrows meet to form an X, you know the projection unit is in the correct position for proper focus.
-- 1=isismansmolmemlummusxcm--.
"
.--terra 115111- 51 - 11111r
a
·One external lens makes the portable difference. This is the most dramatic breakthrough that makes ECP 1000+ so portably different from comparable systems. Laser Aligned Dichroics (LAD) converges all colors within the unit and projects the image through asingle lens. Other systems have three separate lenses and dozens of controls that must be meticulously adjusted by atechnician to converge colors on the screen.
·No need to dim the lights. The image is bright and clear even with normal or partially subdued lighting-- especially if you use the curved high brightness screen.
· One- button remote control automatic switching between computer and video tape images. You just touch one button to move back and forth between computer and video tape segments of the presentation. The effect is smooth and professional with no delays or adjustments because image frequency and size are locked in as you switch from computer to video.
·Removable modules simplify service. Most functions are contained in four modules that are readily removed by a service technician to simplify maintenance procedures.
ECP 1000
+
ECP 1000 + NTSC Decoder
ECO 1000 + Cart
ECP 1000 + Ceiling Mount
Extension Cable (For NTSC Decoder 25')
VS6-56 Curved 6ft. Screen
SL- 1000 Elevating Legs
BNC to 10- pin Cable Accessory
General Purpose Color Interface Wiring Harness
(for above)
$ 13,995.00 1,290.00 550.00 200.00 90.00 495.00 145.00 155.00
85.00
VM-30
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ELECTROHOME
ELECTRONICS
809 Wellington St. N. Kitchener, Ontario, Canada N2G 4J6 (519) 744-7111 Telex 069-55449
ECP-1000 + ( contd)
PERFORMANCE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Brightness
· 140 ft.- lamberts peak on axis on a 6 ft.
diagonal 10 gain screen.
·260 lumens total peak white output
this measurement taken under actual operating conditions with a
il
focused raster M adata signal -- not maximum unfocused, non- usable
brightness
COLOR LARGE SCREEN DATA/GRAPHICS VIDEO DISPLAY
1,1r ;'?r.;":· ·
e
Resolution ·Optical resolution 600 lines. · Electronics are capable of synchronizing
up to 1000 line systems.
Display ·Single lens dichroic design converges
colors accurately inside the projector, not at the screen. ·High gain front and rear screens may be used with no color shift due to viewing angle. ·May be used with flat screens. · Electronic pincushion circuits correct separately for top, bottom, and side pincushion for flat screen display. ·Throw distance of 87-1/2" ( internally adjustable). ·Wide electronic size control allows 2 knob easy adjustment of picture size from 5ft. through 7ft. diagonal. ·Aspect ratio of 3:4. · Keystone circuitry to correct picture for projection angles up to ± 15 degrees vertically from screen axis. Easy 1 knob adjustment. · Range finder lights will assist in positioning the projector at the right distance from the screen for the best optical focus.
Video Circuits Input ·Input level 0.5 to 2.0V p- p, sync
negative or positive. 75 11 ± 1% terminated. ·Differential ( floating) input rejects 14 V p- p of power line hum voltage. ·Automatically switches to separate sync or sync on green. ·Separate sync is automatically accepted in either polarity. · 10 pin multi connector for RGB sync and remote brightness and contrast.
Frequency Response ·30MHz bandwidth t3dB.
D.C. Restoration ·Back porch keyed clamp ( internally
switchable to sync tip clamp).
Gain ·Minimum video gain 40dB or 100X. ·Maximum video output 120V p- p drive.
Deflection Circuits Vertical Deflection ·Size: automatically regulated over fre-
quency range and adjustable from 20% underscan to 20% overscan. · Frequency Range: automatically locks from 45 Hz to 100 Hz. ·Retrace Time: less than 0.5 milliseconds.
2,51.n
Horizontal Deflection ·Size: automatically regulated over fre-
quency range and adjustable from 20% underscan to 20% overscan. · Frequency Range: automatically locks from 15KHz to 33KHz. ·Retrace Time: less than 7microseconds.
High Voltage ·32.0 Kv regulated to better than - 1%.
Power Requirements ·90 VAC to 132 VAC can be internally
reconnected for 180 VAC to 264 VAC. ·Line frequency 50 to 60 Hz nominal. · Power 250 watts maximum.
Operating and Service Controls Control Module ( Upper Right) ·Power on/off switch ( 3.5 AMP circuit
breaker). ·Contrast control ·Brightness control ·Range finder lights switch ·RGB drive levels ( screwdriver adjust) ·Remote brightness/contrast LED's ( lit in
remote function).
Set- Up Module ( Upper Left) ·R & B horizontal centering controls. ·R 8. B vertical centering controls. ·Normal/test switch ( cross hatch pattern). · RGB cut-off switches. ·RGB screen controls ( screwdriver adjust). ·Master electrical focus control. ·RGB individual electrical focus controls
(screwdriver adjust).
·Red Er blue raster rotation ( screwdriver adjust).
Deflection Module ( Lower Right) ·Keystone correction control. ·Vertical hold control. ·Vertical hold auto/manual switch. ·Vertical size control ( height). ·Vertical linearity control ( screwdriver ad-
just). · Horizontal hold control.
·Horizontal hold auto/manual switch. ·Horizontal size control ( width). ·Horizontal phase control ( video center-
ing, screwdriver adjust).
Convergence, Module ( Lower Left) ·Top Pincushion control IN -SI. ·Bottom Pincushion control ( N- S). ·Side Pincushion control ( E- W(.
All controls below are screwdriver adjust. ·Red vertical and horizontal bow. · Red 8. blue vertical keystone. ·Red Er blue horizontal linearity. ·Red Et blue skew. · Red Et blue height. ·Red, green, blue horizontal linearity. · Red, green, blue width. · Blue vertical bow.
Input Panel ·Top to bottom optical focus adjust. ·Signal input connector. ·A.C. power input. ·Power ON pilot light.
Environment Maximum Operating Range ·Temperature: 0to 35°C.
·Humidity: 0to 90% non- condensing. ·Altitude: 0-10,003 ft. ( 0to 3000m)
Storage ·Temperature: - 30°C to 65°C.
Regulatory Approvals ·UL approved ·Meets FCC and DHHS requirements. ·CSA certified
Weight ·75 lbs. ·Shipping Weight: 107 lbs.
Accessories Included ·25' signal cable, 10 pin keyed. ·RGB ard Sync splitter for BNC con-
nections. ·Projector mounting studs and knobs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-31
ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS PRODUCTS, INC.
One Tico Road Titusville, FL 32780 (305) 269-6680 Telex 56-7490 ESP TIVL
AQUARAY-RGB · Compatible with most medium resolution computers · Smallest, Brightest Projector · Lowest Cost Per Lumen · Lightweight, Portable · Easy Installation, Quiet Operation · Exclusive Microcomputer Control · Self- Diagnostic Capability · Liquid- Cooled Tubes, Super Cooling Chamber'
· High resolution coated lenses · Two- Control Throw Distance Adjustment · Modular Quick Change Tube Assembly · Overvoltage and Overcurrent Protection · Automatic NTSC/PAL sensing · Master Keystone Control · Interchangeable Electronic Assemblies · Pushbutton Remote Control · Simple Distance Adjustment · Front or Rear Projection
(*Invented by ESP)
ELECTRICAL
· Microprocessor controlled including self- diagnostics · Digital remote control using asmall two- wire cable · Digital numeric display for projector operating status · Built-in test generator for set up and registration ( 16 functions) · Complies with all HHS and FDA requirements · Front or rear projection · Automatic video gain control · Integral comb filter for improved luminance resolution · Band pass response to 16M Hz · Master keystone control; wide range correction (+/- 20°) · Liquid- coupled lens and liquid-cooled tubes · Switch mode power supplies for efficiency, cooler operation and
reduced weight · Full- line isolation, photo-optically coupled high voltage regulator · Overvoltage and overcurrent protection · Slow high voltage turn on to protect against electrostatic arcing · Automatic NTSC/PAL sensing · 110-220V switchable international power control · Full focus modulation for corner clarity · Built-in crosshatch and crosshair generator to facilitate registration · Differential video amplifier input
Light Output: Resolution: Video Input:
Video Sources:
Scanning Rate
Cathode Ray Tubes:
Power Input: Power Comsumption:
400 lumens peak white
1000 lines per picture width ( up to 800 scan lines) NTSC composite video with negative sync ( IVp-p typical) Video feed-through capability Differential amplifier input for hum rejection
Computer and graphics terminals ( NTSC/RGB signals) Video recorder (VCR) Remote tuner Satellite receiver (TVRO) Video disc player Camera
50Hz - 100Hz vertical frequency range/RGB mode 15,000Hz - 20,000Hz horizontal frequency range/RGB mode ( up to 800 scan lines) Minimum blanking time ( 6microseconds)
35KV at 1mA each ( average current) Non- browning, strontium-filled glass Liquid- cooled phosphors Electrostatically focused
115VAC 60Hz or 220VAC 50Hz
300 watts ( average)
VIDEO PROJECTION
REMOTE CONTROLLER
· Flat membrane keyboard with tactile feedback · Serial digital transmitter using atwo- wire cable · Operator controls on front: on- off, stand-by, picture control, tint · Set-up controls on back: centering for red and blue, brightness set,
color set, test generator on-off and pattern selector feature · Picture controls: brightness, contrast, color, tint · Standby ( blackout) feature · LED power indicator
MECHANICAL
· Rugged-- aluminum I-beam construction · Easily accessible master board · Simple throw distance adjustment · Quiet operation · Accessible, interchangeable electronic assemblies for easy
maintenance · Arc protected; encapsulated HV leads and connectors · Quick change tube modules · Easy inverted mounting:
7° lens offset for close ceiling mounting
Optics:
High resolution coated f/1.0 lenses
Weight:
53 lbs.
Dimensions:
71 /2 "H x21"W x24 1 /2 "L
Throw Distance: 1.5 times image width (6' W image is 9' throw distance)
Image Size:
4' - 20' wide image on flat or curved screen (some variation depending on lenses used)
Cable Lengths Mount:
6' AC power cord 25' remote control cable ( easily extended)
May be mounted in almost any location; floor, table, ceiling (full swivel)
AQUARAY-RGB
$ 7495.00
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES f/1.0 wide screen lenses ( 4'-20') Ceiling mount bracket Special remote control cable lengths 25 ft
50 ft 75 ft 100 ft. Optical wedges (for small screens) Phone jack type cable lengths 25 ft. 50 ft. 75 ft. 100 ft.
$830.00 150.00 75.00 110.00 170.00 200.00 500.00 38.00 75.00 107.00 143.00
VM-32
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS PRODUCTS, INC.
One Too Road
Titusville, FL 32780 (305) 269-6680 Telex 56-7490 ESP TIVL
AQUASTAR HIC
AQUASTAR IIIC
·Compatible with most High Resolution Computers ·Modular Quick Change Tube Assembly ·Liquid- Cooled Tubes, Super Cooling Chamber* ·Overvoltage and Overcurrent Protection ·Master Keystone Control ·Interchangeable Electronic Assemblies ·High Light Output -- 500 Lumens ·Easy Installation Er Registration ·Front or Rear Projection ·High Performance ·Wide Horizontal/Vertical Frequency Range ·Simple Distance Adjustment
I* Invented by ESP)
ELECTRICAL ·Compatible with most Medium and High Resolution Graphic Dis-
plays ·Front or Rear Projection ·Integral Comb Filter for Improved Resolution ·RGB Inputs with Separate Gain Controls, TTL Compatible ·Wide Band Pass Video Amps, Response to 30MHz ·Automatic Video Gain Control ·Separate Sync or Sync on Green ·Switch Mode Power Supplies for Efficient, Cooler Operation and
Reduced Weight ·Full- Line Isolation, Photo- Optically Coupled High Voltage Regulator ·Complies with all HHS and FDA Requirements
·Interlaced and Non- Interlaced Syncs ·Overvoltage and Overcurrent Protection ·Slow High Voltage turn on to protect against Electrostatic Arcing ·Sensitive Components protected from High Voltage Static
Discharges ·Independent RGB Gain Controls -- Red, Green, Blue ·Master Keystone Control; wide range correction ( + /-20°) ·Liquid- coupled Lens and Liquid- cooled Tubes ·Fully Regulated Focus, High Voltage and Registration Circuits ·Full Focus Modulation for Corner Clarity ·Built-in Crosshatch and Crosshair Generator to Facilitate Registration
Light Output Resolution
·500 lumens peak white
·1350 lines per picture width ( up to 1400 scan lines) ·330 NTSC video ·Up to 200 characters per picture width ·Exceeds 1024 pixel rates
VIDEO PROJECTION
Video Input · NTSC composite video with negative sync
(IV p- ptypical) ·RGB inputs with separate syncs or sync on green ·PAL, SECAM and modified NTSC decoders
(optional) ·Video feed through capability
Video Sources · Computer and graphics terminals ( NTSC/RGB signals)
·Video recorder ( VCR)
·Remote tuner ·Satellite receiver ( TVRO)
·Video disc player ·Camera
Scanning Rates · 25Hz to 180Hz vertical frequency range/ RGB mode
·14,000Hz to 42,000Hz horizontal frequency range/
RGB mode ( up to 1400 scan lines) ·Minimum blanking time -- 6microseconds
Cathode Ray Tubes
·36KV at 1mA ( average current) ·Non- browning, strontium-filled glass
·Liquid- cooled phosphors ·Electrostatically focused
Power Input
·115VAC 60Hz ( 220VAC 50Hz optional)
Power Consumption · 400 Watts
REMOTE CONTROLLER ·Power On- Off Switch; LED Power/Failure Indicator ·Standby ( blackout) Switch ·Signal Source Selector Switch ( RGB, composite video, test)
·Picture Controls-- Brightness, Contrast, Color, Tint, Detail ·Master Focus ·Set-up Controls: Horizontal/Vertical Centering -- Red, Blue ·Remote Control Box uses DC and Low Voltages for Long Distance
Cabling Compatible with Common Electric Power Code Require-
ments
MECHANICAL ·Rugged -- Aluminum I- Beam Construction ·Video Feed- Through Capability
·Accessible, Interchangeable Electronic Assemblies for easy Maintenance
·Parallel Lenses for Simple Screen Size Change (two- knob adjustment)
·Convenient Back Panel Registration Controls ·Quiet Fan
Optics Weight Dimensions Throw Distance Image Size
Cable Lengths
Mount
·High resolution, coated f / 1.0 lenses
·75 lbs; ( 33.7kg )
·91 /2 "H x20"Wx 28 1/2"L ( 22x 51 x72cm) ·1.5 times image width
(6' wide image :s9' throw distance)
·4' to 12' wide image high resolution lenses on flat or curved screen ( optional lenses available for larger screen sizes up to 25' wide)
·6' AC power cord ·15' remote control cable
(optional lengths available)
·May be mounted in almost any location; floor, table, ceiling
Aquastar IIIC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES f/1.0 Wide screen lenses ( 4'-25') Ceiling mount bracket
Special remote control cable lengths: 25 ft. 50 ft 75 ft. 100 ft.
Optical wedges ( for small screens) Shipping/carrying case Standard quad video decoder
$9,995.00
4830.00 150.00 75.00 110.00 170.00 200.00 500.00 500.00 995.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-33
ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS PRODUCTS, INC.
One Tico Road Titusville, FL 32780 (305) 269-6680
VIDEO PROJECTOR/ SWITCHER
AQUASTAR 600
ESP VIDEO SWITCHER
AQUASTAR 600 COMPUTER/VIDEO PROJECTOR
Provides remote control capability of easily switching up to 8 RGB,
and 8NTSC and 8stereo audio signals with no further need for adjustments...
FEATURES ·Simple installation and registration
· Front or rear projection ·Compatible with most high resolution computers
·Wide horizontal/vertical frequency range ·High light output -- 500 lumens · Exceeds 1024 pixel rates ·Self- diagnostic capability
·Overvoltage and overcurrent protection · Interchangeable electronic assemblies ·Modular quick change tube assembly ·Liquid- cooled tubes, super cooling chamber ( invented by ESP)
Electrical
·Remote control of horizontal and vertical hold
·Storage of 8 preset horizontal and vertical hold values in RGB
·Integral comb filter for improved resolution
· RGB inputs with separate gain controls, TTL compatible
·Wide band pass video amps, response to 30MHz
·Automatic video gain control
·Separate sync or sync on green
·Switch mode power supply for efficient, cooler operation and re-
duced weight
·Full- line isolation, photo- optically coupled high voltage regulator
·Complies with all HHS and FDA requirements
·Interlaced and non- interlaced syncs
·Sensitive components protected from high voltage static discharges
·Master keystone control
· Fully regulated focus, high voltage and registration circuits
· Full focus modulation for corner clarity
· Built-in test pattern to facilitate ease of registration
Aquastar 600
$ 12,995.00
Optional Accessories Infra- red remote control
IBM PC interface box f11,0 wide screen lenses (4' to 25') Ceiling mount bracket Optical wedges ( for small screens)
Floor stand Projection screens: Front: 60 x80"
Rear: 38 x50" Rear: 47 x62" Quad standard decoder Phone jack type cable lengths: 25 ft
50 ft 75 ft 100 ft
$295.00
395.00 830.00 150.00 500.00
245.00 1125.00 420.00 700.00 995.00
38.00
75.00 107.00 143.00
HIGH DEFINITION ESP VIDEO SWITCHER
FEATURES ·Up to 8 RGB, 8video, and 8stereo audio inputs ·Micro- processor controlled ·Micro- processor remembers up to 8 levels for horizontal, vertical
scan rates and audio levels · Horizontal and vertical frequency control with memory on any
channel ·Computer terminal control via RS-232 input ·Stereo audio switching ·Stereo/mono switch
·All remote connectors are telephone modular connectors ·Gain and brightness level adjustment on each RGB input to match
output levels between channels · Bright LED channel indicator ·Modular design · 19" rack- mountable or decor cabinet
This switcher has been developed for use with ESP's Aquastar 600 video projector to meet the needs of those who require wide bandpass, control, and distribution of computer ( RGB), video, and audio signals.
The system may be housed in a5-1/4" high, 19" wide rack- mountable enclosure or it may be supplied in an attractive decor cabinet for desk/table top installation.
The switcher is expandable to accommodate up to 8computer IFIGB) inputs and/or 8video inputs with stereo audio ( internally switchable to monaural). Paralleling switchers for more outputs is possible.
Individual preset for horizontal and vertical hold on each RGB channel
allows easy switching between computers at the touch of a button, from personal computers to high resolution CAD/CAM systems. Individual gain and brightness controls match all output levels.
The system is micro- processor controlled, accessed by front panel controls or remotely via an optional wired remote control station or an
infra- red wireless transmitter. The switcher may be controlled also by a computer keyboard via RS-232 interconnect.
Pushbutton operation offers automatic switching between input
signal sources. The effect is smooth and professional switching with no delays or adjustments. Image and frequency are locked up as
selections are made between channels. A bright LED digit channel indicator prominently displays which input has been selected.
ESP -- Rackmount, basic 2- channel
$2495.00
ESP -- Table- top, basic 2- channel
2695.00
Optional Accessories Infra red or wired remote control IBM PC interface box
Modular input assemblies for system expansion Delta II tac 12 ft. high resolution lenses
$295.00 395.00
each 325.00 1095.00
VM-34
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Mi.WI CI
70 New Hyde Park Road New Hyde Park, NY 11040 (51 6) 775-3200
VP- 10 ASTRON VIDEO PRESENTATION UNIT
FEATURES ·Compact, portable ·Weighs 18 lbs. with batteries ·4" EIA standard color monitor · Monitor elevates to 15° angle · Separate controls for power/volume, contrast, tint, color,
brightness, and vertical hold ·Built-in 3- inch speaker ·Video cassette recorder utilizes a4- head video system driven by 4
quartz servo- controlled direct- drive motors ·Delivers studio quality reproduction of over 240 horizontal line
resolution · Noiseless playback even when using special effects mode
·The VP- 10 can operate for 90 minutes on one charge ·With optional AC or car adaptor, VP- 10 can record or play for up to
8 hrs.
VP- 10 SNAP- IN RECHARGEABLE BATTERY PACKAGE
Complete Package Includes:
ELMO Astron 4" Color Monitor, EM- 10
Video Presentation Housing, SC- 10
Astron Professional VHS Recorder, ER- 10
Soft Carrying Case w/ Shoulder Strap
2ea. BP10 Rechargeable Batteries
Charger for 2 Batteries Simultaneously, EA-BC10 ( 110/220V
operating voltage)
12- Function Remote Control
6200DC
$ 1575.00
VP- 10 AC PACKAGE Complete Package Includes:
ELMO Astron 4" Color Monitor, EM- 10 Video Presentation Housing, SC- 10
VIDEO SYSTEM
Astron Professional VHS Recorder, ER- 10
Soft Carrying Case %Ai/Shoulder Strap
2ea. PA10 AC Adaptors ( 110/220V Operating Voltage)
12- Function Remote Control
6200AC
$ 1665.00
The capabilities of the ELMO Astron VP- 10 can be expanded at any time with the addition of the following accessories.
·ELMO EC- 10 Color Video Camera ·ELMO ET- 10 Tuner/Timer ·Car Adaptor
ADDITIONAL ACCESSORIES
6604 EA-BC10 2- Battery Charger ( 110/220V Operating
Voltage)
6601 EA-BP10 Snap- In Rechargeable Battery
6602 EA-PA10 AC Adaptor ( 2required)
6605
Soft Carrying Case ( as replacement)
$ 65.00 42.50
125.00
49.90
EC- 10 COLOR VIDEO CAMERA
FEATURES ·Under 2 lbs. ·f/1.4, 4x zoom lens · 1/2" Saticon® tube ·Automatic white balance ·Exclusive FOCUSFREE - control ·Indoor/outdoor color temperature setting ·VHS and Beta compatible · Scanning -- 525 lines · Built-in unidirectional condenser microphone ·56W x230H x270Dmm · 1.96 lbs. 6052 Color Video Camera
EC- 10 $499.95
6555 TD- 30A VHS to Beta adaptor cable, adapts EC- 10 for use
with Beta System recorders
75.00
6553 VHS extension cable, 33 ft. ( for use with EC- 10)
59.95
6503 Beta extension cable, 33 ft. ( for use with Astron)
49.95
2955 Soft case for EC- 10
26.20
ET-10 TUNER/TIMER
FEATURES · 14 Day/4 program timer
·One- touch timer recording ( OTR) · Fluorescent liquid crystal display · 16 Function infrared remote control · 14 Position/107 channel cable ready ·Automatic battery charging ·8-1/2"W x2-3/4"H x 10-3/4"D ·7.1 lbs. 6600 Tuner/Timer
$425.00
ER-10 VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER, PORTABLE VHS
FEATURES
·Under 6 lbs. including rechargeable battery
·4Video heads plus quartz- servo direct drive motors
·Special effect playback features-- still, frame advance, variable
slow motion, plus SP, LP, SLP playback
·Multi-function fluorescent liquid crystal display
·2- Speed recording and 3- speed playback
· 12 Function wired remote control
·One-piece diecast chassis
·Auto rewind
· Permits video adding/audio dubbing
·2-3/4"H x8-7/16"W x 10-3/8"D
6100 Video Cassette Recorder
$899.95
6602 EA-PA10 AC adaptor for cassette recorder, for use instead of
tuner. Provides both AC and battery charging functions ( 110/
220V Operating Voltage)
125.00
6601 EA-BP10 interchangeable rechargeable battery for
cassette recorder, requires either ET- 10 tuner or EA-PA10
AC adaptor for recharging. Up to 2hrs. use with 3hour
recharging; 6to 8hours recommended to maximum battery
life
42.50
6500 Carrying case for recorder with front pocket for camera
and extra battery
59.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-35
GALAXY AUDIO VISUAL
175 Commerce Dr. Hauppauge, NY 11788 (51 6) 434-9467
SELF-CONTAINED VIDEO SYSTEM
FEATURES ·Micro- processor controls · Coaxial cable with RF connections ·Swing away carrying handle · Built-in RF modulator ·Tape and/or accessory storage · Humidity protection device · Earphone · Color, tint and bright controls ·Matching 300-75 Ohm transformer
· Recording: SP for two hours; LP for four hours and EP for six hours. Eight hour recording possible with T-160 tape. Playback speed is automatically selected
·Automatic alignment control removes break-up from center of picture
·1/2" VHS Format
·Totally Self Contained ·5" Color Monitor
$1375.00
The Galaxy 2200 Video Centre has a rugged industrial design for sales and training.
Galaxy Audio Visual's Small Contribution to Big Business
The Galaxy 2200 Video Centre is an easy- to- operate, tough, versatile combination color monitor with 1/2" VHS/VCR system, designed specifically for the professional salesman or trainer.
The Galaxy 2200 has all of the features you liked in tne Galaxy 2100 plus ascreen that is approximately 56% larger and much more... Built right into the front panel of the Galaxy 2200 are: Freeze action, Slow motion, Frame to frame picture advance, Forward and reverse visible search. In its own small way, it's abig help for any business. Weighing only 16 lbs., and about the size of abriefcase, it's truly portable. With its optional battery pack, it can be used anywhere in the world, or may be plugged into any car lighter, or wall socket.
Looking at its large built-in color TV screen, you can make intimate color TV presentations to small groups. With its built-in RF modular you can connect quickly to any large TV set, or mJltiple of sets, and give color presentations to larger groups. If you need to edit tape, the Galaxy 2200 gives you many of the options you'd get in aprofessional studio. It dubs audio, edits video, and does sound- on-sound mixing. And with any video camera, it records programs up to eight hours long, and does the same thing for on-air programming, with its optional tuner. Three industrial grade recording heads insure profes-
sional picture quality, and rugged design and video tape- component miniaturization are why Galaxy Audio Visual is so well known as the leader in building professional equipment for professionals. After all, with our famous Super-8 Desk-top Presenters, we revolutionized business presentations. In short, Galaxy 2200 Video Centre is a big surprise in asmall package. Or asmall wonder for big business.
Galaxy 2200 Video-Centre w/AC Adaptor and Wall Plug
1/2" VHS Video Recorder with built-in 5" monitor and micro- processor controls. Three selectable recording speeds to record up to 8 hours. Playback speed automatically selected. Professional Studio features including audio dub, video editing and sound on sound
mixing. Swing away carrying handle. Storage for tape and/or accessories. Weighs only 16.5 lbs. ( 7.5 kilos). Size: 16.9"W x 5.5"H x 11.0"D. Three way power available: A/C Adaptor included; Battery Pak, and Automobile Battery Cord are optional accessories. Record with any video camera or use TU -2201 color tuner. RF output: Channel 3or Channel 4. Package includes cassette tape, earphone, matching transformers, coaxial cables.
ACCESSORIES
Color tuner -- TU -2201
$ 325.00
With programmable timer for VHF/ UHF operation ( select channels 2
thru 83). Unit can be set to automatically record 6 programs for two
weeks. Quartz clock.
Master remote control -- RM-2202 $45.00
Palm- sized unit allows you to adjust the rate of slow motion and
control the play, record, audio dub, freeze frame, fast forward, reverse, visible forward and reverse search, frame- by- frame advance and tracking functions.
Battery pack -- BP- 2203
$ 79.00
Twelve volt rechargeable supplies approximately 60 minutes of con-
tinuous playback or recording per charge. Full charge takes approxi-
mately 6to 8hours.
Battery charger -- BC- 2204 For battery pack, operates off A/C power.
$ 89.00
Car battery cord -- DC- 2208
$ 29.00
For true portable power to operate Galaxy 2200 Video Centre from
automobile lighter socket.
Travel-all bag -- TB- 2206
$ 79.00
Cushioned Travel- All Bag. Convenient shoulder strap for easy
carrying. Holds Galaxy 2200, tapes and accessory items.
Shipping case -- SC- 2207
$ 159.00
Rugged shipping case with custom tailored foam interior. Holds
Galaxy 2200, accessories and tapes.
Attache case -- AT- 2211
$ 120.00
Deluxe Executive Attache case to carry the Galaxy 2200-- extra room
for accessories.
SPECIFICATIONS
Video
NTSC color EIA standard 1/2" VHS cassette
Recording
Rotary 2head helical scan azimuth recording
Monitor
Color 5" diameter monitor fine pitch flat face type 55° deflection
Speaker
8x12 cm, 16 ohm
Power Dimensions
Three sources available:
11110V 60Hz AC wall current 2) Rechargeable battery pack 3) Car battery, DC 12V
16.9"W x5.5"H x11.0"D
Weight
16.5 lbs.
Jacks
Video and audio input and output, RCA type.
Camera, microphone, headset, DC 12V connector, RF and remote
Heads
Tape Speed
RF Output RF Input Included Items
3 Video Heads- 2 for SP/ LP/ EP, one for special effects. 1full track audio video erase head. 1combination head for control track, audio erase and audio record/play. 3Heads/single housing
With T-120 Video Cassette: 2hours playback/recording ( SP) 4hours playback/recording ( LP) 6hours playback/recording IEP)
Channel 3or Channel 4
VHF 75 ohm UHF 300 ohm
2 -- Coaxial cable with F-type connectors 1 -- Matching transformer 300-75 ohm 1 -- Matching transformer 75-300 ohm 1-- Cassette tape 1-- AC Adaptor 1-- Earphone 1-- RF isolator switch 1 -- Adjustment screwdriver
VM-36
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY
PROJECTION DISPLAY PRODUCTS OPERATION
Electronics Park 6-206 P.O. Box 4840 Syracuse, NY 13221 (315) 456-2152
TALARIATm TELEVISION PROJECTION
For more than a decade, General Electric professional large screen video projectors have been helping groups understand, enjoy and remember presentation material. Through technology developed by General Electric engineers, projector performance has improved continuously.
The Talaria projector line, featuring General Electric exclusive light valve technology, offers models that can display presentations more powerfully, in more situations, to more people than any models offered before. This was accomplished by developing important new capabilities.
High Levels Of Brightness General Electric has added three new color projectors with twice the brightness of the brightest color models previously offered. These new projectors are designed to perform where image size or room lighting would otherwise pose viewing problems. The high light output provides high contrast for crisp, clear pictures in any application.
With the new option of light output levels, you can buy the brightness capability you need. ( See specifications for ratings of each model's light output). These projectors weigh no more than prior models -- a very transportable 145 lbs.
Technical Description General Electric professional Talaria television projectors accept electrical video signals which are converted into an optical image which is projected onto a screen using the single optical path light valve system.
The projectors are completely self-contained, with all electronics, control, and power circuitry integrated into asingle unit. They can be used for front or rear projection, using any conventional projection screen.
Signal Processing And Display In color and monochrome models, input signals are used to amplitude modulate high frequency carriers which velocity modulate the electron beam, as it scans the raster. This results in adiffraction grating ( three diffraction gratings for color projectors) being formed on atransparent fluid surface.
In color projectors, light passes through dichroic filters, input bar system, and fluid surface. Schlieren output bar system and projection lens produce color representations of the electrical video signal on the display screen surface. In monochrome projectors, the light path is similar but without color separation.
PROJECTORS
Exclusive General Electric Design
The Talaria projector line uses an improved version of the exclusive
General Electric single light valve system featured in our previous lines. All projectors are designed for trouble- free operation. In fact, some
users program the projector to start up with an electric timer, and operators simply select the video input for the desired picture. The quality of the picture is consistent from use to use. With the General Electric unique light valve, no manual registration or convergence of colors is required.
A
c,)1>
..e
,,oes
er
`e·`de
ete
çrç 0,-
es 3
SIP OPT1OSAL 42
mrn
LENS (1
5.-1)
Flexibility
As a result of developments in optics, the Talaria projector line offers ahighly efficient lens system to provide the image size you require. Lens objectives are available in any one of the four throw distance to screen size ratios most convenient for your room dimensions with no picture degradation or loss of brightness. Lens objectives may be designed for special situations ( i.e., Cinemascope -- 3D -- High Definition TV -- Wide Screen).
Also offered is an optional system that automatically adjusts for any of the three most often used TV scanning and encoding standards in the world. When you use the projector in areas which do not employ the NTSC standard, you are not hampered by the need for extra hardware or signal conversions. All color projectors designed for 525 or 625 line operation have built-in video switchers and accept composite video or RGB video inputs. Among the signals accepted by Talaria projectors are outputs from tape, videocassette and video disk players, off- air TV tuners, video cameras, telecine, satellite receivers, closed-circuit television (CCTV) systems and most computer- generated displays that provide a television compatible signal, including alphanumeric and graphic data. Some computer- generated displays require an interface to provide signals for projectors.
GE Professional Large Screen Television Projector Specifications
COLOR PROJECTORS
Model
Light Output in Lumens
White Pic. Resol.' in :
Open Gate Modulated Modulated TV Li. per Pic. Heig ht
Min.
TV, Min.
TV, Typ. Min. Horiz. Min. Vert
PJ 5000 PJ 5050
500 1000
250 500
325 650
750 750
300 300
PJ 5055.· PJ 5800
2000 500
1000 250
1300 300
750 750
300 600
PJ 5850
1000
500
600
750
600
PJ 585U
2000
1000
PJ 5100
500
250
PJ 5150
1000
500
PJ 5155A
2000
1000
MONOCHROME PROJECTORS
1200 300 600
1200
750 750 750 750
600 650
650 _ 650
P.) 7000 PJ 7050 PJ 7055
900 1500 3000
600 1000 2000
750 1250 2400
800 800 800
400 400 400
P.) 7800 PJ 7850 PJ 7855 PJ 7100
900 1500 3000
900
600 1000 2000
600
750 1250 2400
750
800 800 800 800
650 650 650 750
PJ 7150
1500
1000
1250
800
750
PJ 7155
3000
2000
2400
800
750
Input Power Req.
Max. Watts
Max. VoltAmps
900
1350
1100
1550
1750
2600
900
1350
1100
1550
1750
2600
900
1350
11.00 1750
1550 2600
900 900 1100 900 900 1100 900 900 1100
1350 1350 1550 1350 1350 1550 1350 1350 1550
Scan Standards"
525 1,/60 fps; 625 11150 fps 525 11/60 fps: 625 11./50 fps 525 1/60 fps: 625 11./50 fps
875 lines/60 fps 875 lines/60 fps 875 lines/60 fps 1023 lines/60 ( Ps 1023 lines/60 fps 1023 lines/60 fps
525 1,/60 fps; 625 1,/50 fps
525 1,/60 Ips; 625 11./50 fps 525 li./60 fps; 625 1,/50 fps
875 lines. 60 fps 875 lines, 60 fps 875 lines. 60 fps 1023 lines, 60 fps 1023 lines, 60 fps 1023 lines. 60 fps
Video Input--
It 111 (1) 121 (2) (21 121 121 (2)
(3) (3) (3) (3) 131 (3) 131 131 (3)
Resolution measurements made with wide- band monochrome vtdeo input --Video Input KeyllINTSC or ROB Standard. NTSC/PAL/SECAM Swotchable asOption, 21
RGB.131Wide-Band monochrome. ··· Eor use at other scanning rates contact Genera Electric Pro ectoon Display Products Operation for special application/model information. Proiector line voltage 105 to 132v or 190 to 260 volts 50/60 Hz except those marked IA) above, which are 190 to 260 volts 50/60 Hz only
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-37
GENERAL TECHNICAL CORPORATION
4101 N. St. Joseph Avenue Evansville, IN 47712 (812) 423-4200
COMPUTERIZED INTERACTIVE
TELEVISION SYSTEMS
student responds via a computer keyboard or hand-held keypad... if correct, a congratulatory message is received and the program continues...if incorrect, the material is automatically reviewed, or the student views a remedial portion of the video. Student responses are then assessed and can be stored for later retrieval by the instructor.
Computerized Interactive Television is an extremely powerful instructional delivery system. GenTech's CIT systems allow educators, managers and trainers to use an exciting new technique to increase human productivity through more effective learning. The technologies of computers and television are combined in developing unique interactive video education programs that work like this:
A student views a segment of video...the computer presents questions on the material just viewed...the
ETS -2000 INTERACTIVE TELEVISION SYSTEM ( VIDEOTAPE) The ETS -2000 is a one-on-one interactive instructional system that allows astudent to respond to programmed questions while viewing avideotape program. The video controller ( interface) card enables a
microcomputer to precisely control avideotape player for interlacing educational video segments with computer- assisted instruction and
testing modules.
ETS -2000 System Components: Interface Card, Instruction Manual,
Connecting Cables and Operating Software
$595.00
LDI-2100 INTERACTIVE TELEVISION SYSTEM ( VIDEODISC) The LDI-2100 is a one-on-one interactive instructional system designed for use with laser videodisc programs and hardware. A student responds to programmed questions while viewing a videodisc program. The video controller ( interface) card effectively marries the microcomputer with the speed and quality of the videodisc player for interlacing educational video segments with computer- assisted instruction and testing modules.
LDI-2100 System Components: Laser Disc Interface Card, Instruc-
tion Manual, Connecting Cables
$399.00
Application Software Available M ultiPollTM Diskette and user guide
MultiTestTu Diskette and user guide
MultiFeudTu Diskette and user guide MultiSurveyTM Diskette and user guide MultiPursuitTM Diskette and user guide
$ 995.00
1295.00 1295.00 1295.00 1295.00
MTS-3000 MULTITERM GROUP RESPONSE SYSTEM (TAPE OR DISC) The MTS-3000 System allows expansion of the ETS -2000 and LDI-2100 interactive systems from one-on-one modes to classroom or seminar modes. Up to 128 people may interact simultaneously via hand-held keypads ( multiple systems may be linked for groups
exceeding 128 people). MultiTerm may be used with or without television for group interaction with live lecture and demonstration.
MTS-3000 Starter Package Components: MultiLink Unit, ten ( 10)
MultiTerm Keypads, 25 ft. Cable, Instruction Manual, RS 232 Connecting Cable, MultiTerm System Disk with hardware test and blind polling application and 2MultiTap Junction Boxes . ... $4695.00
MTS-3000 Expansion Package Components: Five ( 5) MultiTerm Key-
pads, 12 ft. Cable and MultiTap Junction Box
$1495.00
LIVE-- THE LANGUAGE FOR INTERACTIVE VIDEO ENHANCEMENT LiVE is aset of easy-to- use programming commands for implementing sophisticated interactive video programs. LiVE provides a very high degree of control of the videoplayer in extending the programming capabilities of Applesoft for interactive video. Extensive programming knowledge is not necessary to easily program interactive video modules. LiVE represents the industry's most advanced programming system for maximizing the computer in developing interactive video programs.
LiVE Components: Instruction Manual and Software Diskette (SuperPILOT, Applesoft or Pascal must be purchased separately)
$295.00
VM-38
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Large Screen Color Video Projector
· Business Training, Disco, Video Theaters, Board Room, Surgical Training.
· NTSC or PAL · 43/ 4 x6to 15 x20 foot pictures. · Floor or ceiling mount. · Front or rear screen.
Large Screen Computer Display
0/1MI-CD1
· Computer Program Training. Board Rooms, Tele -Con-
ferences, Stockholder !Meetings, Trust Account Discussions.
· 3x4to 15 x20 foot displays. · 80 Characters -- 34 Lines. · Front or rear screen.
Large Screen Color Graphics Display
· Board Rooms, Stockholder Meetings. · 6x8to 15 x20 foot display. · Used in conjunction with Tektronix, RAMTEK, ISC and
Apple Color Terminals. · Front or rear screen.
1M1-3000CG
All IM IProjectors Use Standard Screens
ONE YEAR WARRANTY ON ELECTRONICS.
EASE OF OPERATION.
1521 Airway Circle New Smyma Beach, FL 32069 19041427-5294
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-39
HITACHI
OSCILLOSCOPES
175 Crossways Park W. Woodbury, NY 11797 (5 16) 921 - 7200
DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPES VC- 6041 40MHz/2 Channels 4000 Words/Channel
Features ·Suitable for repetitive frequencies up to 40MHz ·Storage of transient event of up to 10MHz with pre-triggering ·Storage of long-term data ·High- definition storage display
·CRT = 6" square with 12kV acceleration potential. Useful Screen
Area: 8 x 10div ( 1div = 10mm), Non Storage Function · Vertical
Deflection = Bandwidth and Rise time: DC to 40MHz (-3dB), 8.8ns or
less ( normal), DC to 7MHz (- 3dB), 5Ons or less ( magnifier), Deflection
Factor: 5mV/div to 5V/div · 3%, 10 steps ( normal), 1mV/div to
1V/div · 5%, 10 steps ( magnifier), Modes: CH1, CH2, ALT, CHOP,
ADD, DIFF · Horizontal Deflection = Time Base: 0.24s/div to
0.2s/div · 3%, 19 steps. Maximum sweep rate to 2Ons/div with
magnifier extended · X-Y Operation ( CH1: X, CH2: Y) = Phase
Difference: 3° or less from DC to 50kHz, Digital Storage Function
·Memory Capacity: 4.096 word/channel x two channels, Vertical
Resolution: 8 bit, Horizontal Resolution: 400 steps/div, Maximum
Sampling Speed: 40MHz ( single trace mode), 20MHz ( dual trace
mode), 10MHz ( single sweep mode) · Data Acquisition ( Data update
method) = Normal Storage Mode, Average Mode, Hold Mode, Single
Sweep, Roll Mode, Data Save, Pretrigger, Data Output Analog
Output, Digital Output, Cursor Display, X-Y Display · Power Supply
AC100V/120V/220V/240V - 10%, 50Hz or 60Hz · Dimensions =
13.1"W x7.6"H x18.7"D ( 330 x190 x470mm) · Weight = 15kg/31
lbs.
VC-6041UG ( includes GP- 1B)
$ 5855.00
VC-6041UX ( less GP- 1B)
4950.00
VC- 6015 10 MHz 2 Channels 1000 Words/Channel
Features ·Usable as both a conventional oscilloscope and a digital storage
scope · Pretriggering allows capture of events before the trigger point ·Convenient free- run mode for use in recording repeating events ·A hold function maintains one stored waveform while another is
captured · Recording function enables a pen recorder to be used to create a
hard copy of stored waveforms
·CRT = 6" square with 2kV acceleration potential Display Area: 8x 10 div ( 1div = 10mm) · Memory = Memory Capacity: 1000 words/ channel ( 1word = 8 bit), Writing Speed: 1µs/word to 10ms/word
·Vertical Deflection = Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div · 5% 10 cali-
brated steps, Bandwidth: DC to 10MHz-3dB ( oscilloscope mode),
DC to 100kHz -- 3dB ( storage mode), Modes: CH1, CH2, DUAL, ADD, DIFF ( oscilloscope modes), DUAL, CH1 ( CH2 HOLD), CH2 ( CH1 HOLD) · X-YOperation ( CH1: X, CH2: Y) = Phase Difference: DC to 50kHz within 3° · Horizontal Deflection = Sweep Time: 1µs/div to
0.2s/div · 3% ( oscilloscope mode), 0.1ms/div to is/div - 3% (storage mode), Max Sweep Rate: 10Ons/div at x10 Magnifier extends
(oscilloscope mode) · External Output = Recorder: CH1, CH2 fullscale , 4V · Power Supply = AC100V/120V/220V/240V · 10%
·Dimensions = 12.3W x 7.1"H x 16.2"D ( 310 x 180 x 410mm)
·Weight = 10kg / 22 lbs.
VC- 6015
$ 2095.00
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE
V-134 DC 10MHz, Dual Trace
·CRT = 5" round with 2kV acceleration potential · Recording Speed 25div/ms or more, Fast: 50div/ms or more · Vertical Deflection =
Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div ( 10 steps) 3%, Max. Sensitivity: 1mV/div to 1V/div ( 10 steps) · 5% at x5 Magnifier extends, Bandwidth: DC to 10MHz (- 3dB), DC to 7MHz (- 3dB) at x5Mode: CH1, CH2, DUAL, ADD, DIFF · Horizontal Deflection = Sweep Time: 2µs/div to 2sec/div ( 10 steps) · 3%, Max. Sweep Rate: 20Ons/div at x10 Magnifier extends · X-Y Operation ( CH1: X, CH2: Y) = Phase error: 3° from DC to 50kHz · Dimensions = 10.9"W x7.5"H x15.8"D (275 x 190 x400mm) · Weight = 10kg/22 lbs.
V-134
$1620.00
IEEEMEme
VC- 6041
VC- 6015 V-134
o
c eL
i!»! tie fit
VM-40
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HITACHI
OSCILLOSCOPES
175 Crossways Park W. Woodbury, NY 11797
(516) 921-7200
READOUT OSCILLOSCOPE
V1100A DC - 100MHz 4Trace, Delayed Sweep
Three Digital Display Functions
·The AC voltage ( 50Hz 10MHz), DC voltage, and frequency (120Hz -- 99.9MHz) of the Channel 1input signal can be measured
and the results displayed digitally on the CRT screen ·An electronic CRT screen cursor may be used to digitally display
such values as AT, 1/ T, phase, ground potential ( Vabs), .1V, and
ratio I%) ·The sweep and vertical axis sensitivity setting values are displayed
digitally on the CRT screen
·Dimensions: 13"W x6.3"H x 16"D
·Weight: 22 lbs.
V- 1100A
$ 2490.00
V- 1100A Specifications
Readout functions
Digital Measurement ti.:nctions
Cursor Readout
DV M
Frequency Cou nter
REF. A cursors
DC voltage: Corresponds to screen AC voltage: 50Hz -- 10MHz
Frequency: 012kHz -- 99.9MHz
CH1 only
Voltage Vabs:
REF -- GND
Voltage V:
A -- REF
Amplitude ratio: % IS div = 100%1
Time T: Phase:
A-- REF Deg 15 div = 3601
Frequency:
I /T = A - REF
3 digits +units
V-1070
Panel setting Value displays
Vertical axis:
Sweep speed Other:
V/div. INVERT. ADD. WAIL. UNCAL. MAO
skim, UNCAL. MAO conditions delay tame and trigger source
GND REF REFERENCE FUNCTION
Ground lone dosplay
CHI and CH2 displays are possible. (the ground level is displayed as an intensified linel
V-1070 DC - 100MHz 4Trace, Delayed Sweep
The V-1070, alow cost version of the V-1100, using the built-in microcomputer, displays the panel setting information on the CRT as follows:
·· · eit;
éi ye;
f>. .0·o T·6. VIP oen*
C
111111111111111-
Vertical deflection factors, uncalibrated warning, magnification warning, vertical input coupling, band limiter, CH2 inversion, horizon-
tal sweep times for both A time and B time bases and trigger sources for both, uncalibrated warning for A sweep time, sweep magnification
warning, delay time and 10X probe indicators for CH1 and CH2.
----41111111111111111.111.11.0 "-V-1050F
Further vertical deflection factors and sweep times are displayed on the CRT with the converted values at the magnificated modes automatically. Dimensions: 13"W x6.3"H x 16"D. Weight: 22 lbs.
V-1070
$ 1950.00
V-1050F DC -- 100MHz, Quad Trace, Delayed Sweep
·CRT = 6" square with 20kV acceleration potential · Vertical Deflection = Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div · 2%, Max. Sensitivity: 0.5mV/div 4% at x 10 Magnifier extends, Bandwidth: DC to 100MHz (-3dB), DC to 5MHz (- 3dB) at x10 Magnifier extends, Modes:
CH1, CH2, ALT, CHOP, ADD ( DIFF) · Horizontal Deflection = A Time Base: 2Ons/div to 0.5s/div 2%, B Time Base: 2Ons/div to
50ms/div · 2%, Max. Sweep Rate to 2ns/div at x 10 Magnifier extends, Display Modes: A, A inten, ALT, B · X-Y Operation ( CH1: X, CH2: V) = Phase Error: 3° from DC to 2MHz · Dimensions = 310W x
180H x410Dmm · Weight = 9.3kg / 20.5 lbs.
V- 1050F
$ 1595.00
V- 650F DC - 60MHz, Dual Trace Delayed Sweep
·CRT = 6" square with 10kV acceleration potential · Vertical Deflection = Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div 3%, Max. Sensitivity: 1mV/div · 5% x5Magnifier extends, Bandwidth: DC to 60M Hz, DC
to 60MHz, DC to 10MHz at x5Magnifier extends, Modes: CH1, CH2, ALT, CHOP, ADD ( DIFF) · Horizontal Deflection = A Time Base: 5Ons/div to 0.5s/div 3%, BTime Base: 5Ons/div to 50ms/div -t3%,
Max. Sweep Rate: 5ns/div at x10 Magnifier extends, Display Modes: A, A inten, B · X-Y Operation ( CH1: X, CH2: V) = Phase Error: 3° from DC to 50kHz · Dimensions = 12.2"W x7.1"H x16.1"D ( 310 x
180 x410mm) · Weight = 9.3kg / 20.5 lbs.
V- 650F
V- 650F
$ 1195.00 Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-41
HITACHI
175 Crossways Park W. Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 921-7200
PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPES
V-509 DC -- 50MHz, Dual Trace Delayed Sweep
·CRT = 3.5" square with 12kV acceleration potential · Vertical
Deflection = Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div · 3%, Max. Sensitivity:
1mV/div 3% at x 5 Magnifier extends, Bandwidth: DC to 50MHz (-3dB), DC to 10MHz 1-3dB) at x5 Magnifier extends, Modes: CH1,
CH2, ALT, CHOP, ADD ( DIFF) · Horizontal Deflection = A Time Base: 0.1µs/div to 0.2s/div - 3%, BTime Base: 0.1µ/div to 2ms/div -- 3%, Max. Sweep Rate: 1Ons/div at x10 Magnifier extends, Display
Modes: A, A inten, B · X-Y Operation ( CH1: X, CH2: Y) = Phase Error: 3° from DC to 100kHz · Dimensions - 8.5"W x4.3"H x13.8"D (215 x 110 x350mm) · Weight = 5kg/ 11 lbs.
V-509 AD- 509 Battery Pack for V-509
$ 1399.00 300.00
V-209 DC - 20MHz, Dual Trace
·CRT = 3.5" square with 1.5kV acceleration potential · Vertical Deflection = Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div 1. 3%, Max. Sensitivity: 1mV / div - 3% at x5Magnifier extends, Bandwidth: DC to 20MHz 1-3dB), DC to 5MHz (- 3dB) at x5 Magnifier extends, Modes: CH1,
CH2, ALT, CHOP, ADD 1DIFF) · Horizontal Deflection = Time Base: 0.5µs/div to 0.2s/div .1 3%, Max. Sweep Rate: 5Ons/div at x 10 Magnifier extends · X-Y Operation 1CH1: X, CH2: Y) = Phase Error: 3° from DC to 100kHz · Dimensions = 8.5"W x 4.3"H x 13.8"D (215 x 110 x350mm) · Weight = 4.5kg/9.9 lbs.
V-209 AD- 209 Battery Pack for V-209
$ 945.00 75.00
V-059B DC - 7MHz, Single Trace
·CRT = 3.5" square with 1.5kV acceleration potential · Vertical Deflection = Sensitivity: 50mV/div to 2V/div 3%, Max. Sensitivity:
10mV/div to 20mV/div 3% at x5gain, Bandwidth: DC to 7MHz
(-3dB), DC to 2MHz 1-3dB) at x5gain · Horizontal Deflection = Time Base: 10ms/div to 20ms/div -. 3%, Max. Sweep Rate: 1p.s/div at x 10
Magnifier extends · Dimensions = 7.8"W x 3.35"H x 11.5"D (198 x85 x292mm) · Weight = 2.9kg/6.4 lbs.
V- 059B AD- 058B Battery Pack for V- 059B
$ 1200.00 200.00
TELEVISION WAVEFORM MONITOR
V-099 ( Type NTSC)
·CRT = 3.5" square with 2kV acceleration potential · Vertical Deflection = Frequency Response at 1V Full Scale or 4V Full Scale: Flat ... Response from 25Hz to 5MHz within 5% of response at 50kHz, IRE ... Response per 1958 IRE STD 23S-1 ± 10%, 3.58 Band Pass ... Response at 3.58MHz does not vary between flat and 3.58 Band Pass by more than 1% · Horizontal Deflection = 2V Sweep: Equal to Frame Rate at applied Video or External Sync. 2V Mag Sweep: X20 within ' 10%, 2H Sweep: Equal to half line rate of applied Video or External Sync, 1µs/div Sweep: + 3% ( Accuracy) · DC Restoration = Clamp Time: Back Porch · Dimensions = 5.8"W x
3.5"H x 15.6"D ( 145 x88 x395mm) · Weight = 4kg/8.9 lbs.
V-099 AD- 099 Battery Pack for V-089/099
$ 1350.00 250.00
TEST EQUIPMENT
V-209
V-099
VECTORSCOPE
V-089
V-089 ( Type NTSC)
·Chrominance Processing = Chrominance Bandwidth: Subcarrier
Frequency ( Fsc)/3.579545MHz Pull in Range: Within 100Hz of Fsc. Pull in Time: Within 1second with subcarrier frequency within 100Hz of Fsc, Phase Shift with Subcarrier Frequency change: Less than or
equal to 1° from Fsc to Fsc + 50Hz or rom Fsc to Fsc - 50Hz, Change: Less than or equal to 1° from unity to 2times unity or from unity to one-half unity · Amplifier = Maximum input Voltage: · 5V, VARGAIN Control Range: X0.5 - X5.0, Input Return Loss: Greater than or equal to 40dB down, 5MHz · External Sync = Input signal
requirement 1.6 to 4.5V composite sync. input impedance 15K ohm 10% · Dimensions = 5.8"W 3.5"H x15.6"D ( 145 x88 x395mm)
·Weight = 4kg / 8.9 lbs.
V-089 AD- 099 Battery Pack for V-089/099
$ 1684.00 250.00
VM-42
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HITACHI
OSCILLOSCOPES
175 Crossways Park W. Woodbury, NY 11797 (5 16) 921 - 7200
V-211 DC -- 20MHz, Single Trace
·CRT = 6" square with internal graticule · Vertical Deflection = Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div f3%, Max. Sensitivity: 1mV/div to 1V/div -1- 5% at x 5 Magnifier extends, Bandwidth: DC to 40MHz (-3dB) DC to 7MHz 1-3dB) at x5Magnifier extends, Modes: Single Trace · Horizontal Deflection = Sweep Time: 0.2,us/div to 0.2s/div ± 3%, Max. Sweep Rate: 10Ons/div at x10 Magnifier extends · X-Y Operation ( CH1: X, CH2: Y) = Phase Error: 3° from DC to 10kHz ·Dimensions --- 12.3"W x 5.2"H x 14.6"D ( 310 x 130 x 370mm) ·Weight = 6.0kg/13.3 lbs.
V-211
$510.00
V-222 DC -- 20MHz, Dual Trace
·CRT = 6" square with internal graticule · Vertical Deflection = Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div f_ 3%, Max. Sensitivity: 1mV/div to
1V/div f 5% at x 5 Magnifier extends, Bandwidth: DC to 20MHz (-3dB) DC to 7MHz 1-3dB) at x5Magnifier extends, Modes: CH1, CH2, ALT, CHOP, ADD · Horizontal Deflection = Sweep Time: 0,2,us/div to 0.2s/div + 3%, Max. Sweep Rate: 10Ons/div at x 10 Magnifier extends · X-YOperation ( CH1: X, CH2: Y) = Phase Error: 3° from DC to 50kHz · Dimensions = 12.3"W x5.2"H x 14.6"D ( 310 x 130 x 370mm) · Weight = 6.5kg/14.4 lbs.
V-222
$715.00
V-422 DC -- 40MHz, Dual Trace
·CRT = 6" square with internal graticule · Vertical Deflection = Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div f 3%, Max. Sensitivity: 1mV/div to
1V/div + 5% at x 5 Magnifier extends, Bandwidth: DC to 40MHz 1-3dB), DC to 7MHz (- 3dB) at x5 Magnifier extends, Modes: CH1, CH2, ALT, CHOP, ADD · Horizontal Deflection = Sweep Time:
0.2s/div to 0.2s/div f 3%, Max. Sweep Rate: 2Ons/div at x 10 Magnifier extends · X-Y operation ( CH1: X, CH2: Y) = Phase Error: 3° from DC to 50kHz · Dimensions = 12.3"W x5.2"H x14.6"D ( 310 x
130 x370mm) · Weight = 6.5kg/14.4 lbs.
V-422
$925.00
V-212 DC -- 20MHz, Dual Trace
·CRT = 6" square with internal graticule · Vertical Deflection = Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div ±- 3%, Max. Sensitivity: 1mV/div to 1V/div 5% at x 5 Magnifier extends, Bandwidth: DC to 20MHz (-3dB) DC to 7MHz (-3dB) at x5Magnifier extends, Modes: CHI, CH2,
ALT, CHOP, ADD · Horizontal Deflection = Sweep Time: 0.2,us/div to 0.2s/div t 3%, Max. Sweep Rate: 10Ons/div at x 10 Magnifier extends · X-YOperation ( CH1: X, CH2: Y) = Phase Error: 3° from DC to 50kHz · Dimensions = 12.3"W x 5.2"H x I4.6"D 1310 x 130 x 370mm) · Weight = 6.0kg/13.3 lbs.
V-212
$615.00
V-211 DC
V-222 DC
· is ·
o -; ·
,
V-422 DC
V-212 DC
V-223 DC -20MHz, Dual Trace Delayed Sweep
·CRT = 6" square with internal graticule · Vertical Deflection = Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div ± 3%, Max. Sensitivity: 1mV/div to 1V/div ± 5% at x 5 Magnifier extends, Bandwidth: DC to 20MHz (-3dB), DC to 7MHz (- 3dB) at x5 Magnifier extends, Modes: CH1, CH2, ALT, CHOP, ADD · Horizontal Deflection= Sweep Time: 0.2
s / div to 0.2s/div ± 3%, Delay Time: 1ms to 100ms, Max. Sweep
Rate: 10Ons/div at x10 Magnifier extends · X-Y Operation ( CH1: X,
CH2: Y) = Phase Error: 3° from DC to 50kHz · Dimensions= 310W x
130H x370Dmm/12.3 x5.2 x14.6 in. · Weight 7.0kg/15.5 lbs.
V-223
$795.00
·
-Li
Cie °e t 1 4 0
,
110
V-223 DC
V-423 DC-- 40MHz, Dual Trace Delayed Sweep
·CRT= 6" square with internal graticule · Vertical Deflection =
Sensitivity: 5mV/div to 5V/div ± 3%, Max. Sensitivity: 1mV/div to
1V/div ± 5% at x 5 Magnifier extends, Bandwidth: DC to 40MHz
I-3dB), DC to 7MHz (-3dB) at x5 Magnifier extends, Modes: CI-11, CH2, ALT, CHOP, ADD · Horizontal Deflection = Sweep Time: 0.2
psidiv to 0.2s/div ± 3%, Delay Time: 1ms to 100ms, Max. Sweep
Rate: 2Ons/div at x10 Magnifier extends · X-Y Operation 1CH1: X,
CH2: Y1= Phase Error: 3° from DC to 50kHz · Dimensions= 310W x
130H x370Dmm/12.3 x5.2 x14.6 in. · Weight = 7.0kg/15.5 lbs.
V-423
$995.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-43
HITACHI
Hitachi Denshi, Ltd.
175 Crossways Park W Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 921 - 7200
MONOCHROME MONITORS
`,Itagee
e
moo
VM-910A VM-173
/ VM-900A
B & W Solid State monitor with 500 lines resolution;
Portable ( 9.6"W x 9.2"H x 9.3"D) and lightweight
(13.5 lbs.) Deflection linearity of less than 2%. Other
specs similar to VM-906A.
$180.00
VM-910A 9" Monitor
The Hitachi VM-910A is asolid state black and white video monitor that displays video signals from Hitachi CCTV cameras, VTRs and other signal sources.
FEATURES
· Reliability Solid state circuitry using an IC and silicon transistors ensures high reliability.
·500 lines horizontal resolution Horizontal resolution in excess of 500 lines is achieved at picture center.
· Stable picture Even played back pictures of VTR can be displayed without uttering.
· Looping video input Video input can be looped through with built-in termination switch.
· External sync operation (available as option for U and C types)
· Compact construction Two monitors are mountable side by side in astandard 19- inch rack.
· Front Panel Controls Brightness, contrast, vertical hold, horizontal hold, power ON/OFF.
Dimensions: 8.6W x8.6"H x9.2"D ( 219 x 219 x 234mm).
Weight: 13.21b. (6Kg.)
$225.00
VM-906A VM-129
VM-906A 9" Monitor
The VM-906A is an IC-incorporated, transistorized video monitor. It offers high resolution and high deflection linearity. This model is a high-grade video monitor capable of fulfilling all requirements.
FEATURES
· Reliability
Solid state circuitry using an IC and silicon transistors ensures high reliability.
· 700 lines horizontal resolution Horizontal resolution in excess of 700 lines is achieved at picture center.
· Excellent linearity Deflection linearity is less than 1%.
· Stable picture Even played back pictures of VTR can be displayed without jittering.
· Looping video input Video input can be looped through with built-in termination switch.
· DC restoration switch
· External sync operation ( available as option for U and C types)
· Compact construction Two monitors are mountable side by side in astandard 19-inch rack.
·Front Panel Controls As on VM-910A
Dimensions: 8.6"W x8.6"H x9.2"D 1219 x 219 234mm)
Weight: 14.3 lb. ( 6.5 Kg)
$285.017
VM-129 12" Monitor
The Hitachi VM-129 is a solid state black and white video monitor that displays video signals from Hitachi CCTV cameras, VTRs and other signal sources. This model ensures stable picture with low distortion and high resolution. A DC restoration circuit is built-in.
FEATURES · Reliability
Solid state circuitry using an IC and silicon transistors ensures high reliability.
· 700 lines horizontal resolution Horizontal resolution in excess of 700 lines is achieved at picture center.
· Excellent linearity Deflection linearity is less than 1%.
· Stable picture Even played back pictures of VTR can be displayed
without uttering.
· Looping video input
Video input can be looped through with built in termination switch.
· DC restoration switch
· External sync operation (available by slight modification)
· Front Panel Controls As on VM-910
Dimensions: 12.5W x11.2H x12.5"D ( 318 x 84 x 316mm)
Weight: 221b. 110 Kg.)
4360.00
VM-173 17" Monitor
The Hitachi VM-173 is a solid state black and white video monitor that displays video signals from Hitachi CCTV cameras, VTRs and other signal sources.
FEATURES
· Reliability Solid state circuitry using an IC and silicon transistors ensures high reliability.
· 700 lines horizontal resolution Horizontal resolution in excess of 700 lines is achieved at picture center.
· Excellent linearity Deflection linearity is less than 2%
· Stable picture Even played back pictures of VTR can be displayed without uttering.
· Looping video input Video input can be looped through with built-in termination switch.
· DC restoration switch
· External sync operation (available as option for U and C types)
· Front Panel Controls As on VM-910
Dimensions: 16.1"W x 15.2"H x13.3"D ( 47 x386 X337mm)
Weight: 37.51b. ( 17 Kg.)
$395.00
Rack Mount Adaptors
VM-9-2RP Rack Panel ( 19") for mounting 2VM-910 or
906
$46.00
VM-12 RP Rack Panel ( 19") for VM-129
68.00
VM-17-RP Rack Panel ( 19") for VM-173
68.00
VM-44
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HITACHI
Hitachi Denshi, Ltd.
175 Crossways Park West
Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 921-7200
COLOR MONITOR
CM- 182
Hitachi 18" color video monitor ( for NTSC) employing an inline- type picture tube, provides sharp pictures with excellent color fidelity. Model CM- 182 is ideally suited for broadcast and medical TV applications which demand accurate colorimetry. The CM- 182 ensures a stable color presentation and excellent performance at a reasonable cost.
· Hitachi's innovative in- line- type color picture tube ensures reproduction of an extremely bright picture with vivid color.
· By incorporating integrated circuits, color synchronizing and color decoding circuits can reproduce and maintain delicate color hues.
· Aperture correction circuit offers sharp pictures without ringing.
Type Color System Color Decoding Video Input
CM- 182 NTSC 3axes decoding in narrow band 1.0Vp-p ( VBS) 75 ohms or high, BNC connector
Sync Input
Resolution
Signal-to-noise Ratio Deflection Linearity CRT Ambient Temperature Power Requirements Dimensions ( W x H x DI Weight
Horizontal: More than 370 lines at center ( at monochrome signal) Vertical: More than 350 lines at center
More than 46dB Less than 2% ( within the central zone of diameter = picture height)
18" In- line- type 90° Deflection 470EFB22 or equivalent
0to 40°C ( 32 to 104°F) U and C types 117 AC + ¡- ICM 60 Hz, 80W
464 x440 x459mm ( 18.3 x 17.3 x18.1")
Approx. 30 kg ( 66 lbs.)
Model CM- 182
o
I
o
- - 370 ( 14.6) 464 ( 18.3)
'
- 328.5 ( 12.9) -- - 68.5 ( 2.7)
459 ( 18.1)
Dimensions: mm ( in)
CM- 182
$ 1980.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-45
HITACHI 401 West Artesia Blvd. Compton, CA 90220 (213) 537-8383
AWorld Leader in Technology
COLOR TELEVISION RECEIVERS
CT1951 COLOR TELEVISION 19"
CT- 1342 COLOR TELEVISION 13"
· Signal Tracker System · Lighted Channel Indicator
·Quick- Start ·Memory Fine Tuning ( VHF) · Earphone and Record Jacks
Low Power Consumption This powerful video system operates on only 88 watts average, 110-120 volts, 60 cycles AC.
Cabinet Cabinet finish is wood- grain vinyl OVIr wood products for beauty, strength and durability.
Dimensions: Model C11961 Measures 25-1/eW x 18-1/16"H weighs 48.5 lbs. CT1951
a 18-3/4"D and 4419.95,
Quick- Start Hitachi's Quick- Start feature provides the viewer with sound instantly and with the picture appearirg in about 4 seconds after the set has been turned or. Hitachi is able to achieve this without having curent flowing when the set is rened off.
Memory Fine Tuning ( VHF) Hitachi's Memory Fine Tuning means that the fine tuning only has to be set once for each channel. The television automatically memorizes the setting so the viewer never has to adjust it again, even when the charnel is changed.
·Tatile model color TV/13" diagonal screen · Private listening earphone ·Quick- Start system · Signal Tracker system · 100% solid state video system · 10/2/1 limited warranty
Cabinet The cabinet is constructed of durable wood- grain plastic.
Dimensions:
Measures 17-1/4"W x 13-3/4"H x 15-3/4"D trid
weighs 25.3 lbs.
CT1342
$349.95
CT1957 W/B COLOR TELEVISION 19"
·VHF/UHF/69 Cable' Channels ·New Tinted Picture Tube ·MTS Multi TV Sound Jack · Random Access Electronic Tuning with
Remote Control ·Signal Tracker system · Detachable Remote Control ·Channel and Time on Screen ·Earphone and Record Jacks ·Comb Filter
·Video and Audio Input/Output Jacks · Distortion Free Circuit · New ABLC Circuit
Infrared
Cabinet Cab,net is viryl over wood products for beauty, strength and durability. CT1957 B- Black Color CT1957 W- Wood grair cabinet and trim.
Dimensions
Measures 20"W x 19"H x 18-3/4"D and 4ighs 49.6
lbs.
CT1957W Walnut Cabinet
$709.95
CT1957B Black Cabinet
709.95
Solid State UHF Tuner A special detent-type tuner on all Hitachi Color TV sets allows the viewer to select UHF stations
Dipole Antenna This Hitachi set comes with aUHF loop and a Dipole antenna.
CATV / M ATV This Hitachi set comes complete with antenna con nections providing for a conventional 300 ohm connection and for a75 ohm connection used fcr cable television or master antenna distribution systems
Earphone & Record Jacks This Hitachi set cornes equipped with a separate recording jack that provides for recording wnile listening to the TV sound A separate earphone jack and earphones are included for private listenirg
Lighted Channel Indicator The channel selection indicator shows alarge, lighted number making it easy to see which channel is on, even from across the room.
Listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
FCC Certified
CT1955 COLOR TELEVISION 19"
·VHF ' UHF/36 Cable Channels · Random Access Electronic Tuning
with Infrared Remote Control
·Signal Tracker system ·Off timer ·On screen volume indicator · Earphone and record jacks · Last channel recall
Cabinet Cabinet finish is wood- grain vinyl over wood products for beauty, strength and durability.
Dimensions:
Measures 23-1/16W x 18-7/16"H x 18-3/4"D and
weighs 48.5 lbs.
CT1955
$809.95
CT- 0911 9" POLAR CHROME'
VIDEO SYSTEM
·100% Solid State Polar Chrome"
· Electronic Bar Tuning ·Operates on AC or 12V DC ·Quick- Start system ·Automatic Frequency Control
Video System
Cabinet The cabinet is constructed of durable high impact
plastic with convenient carrying handle.
CT1958 COLOR TELEVISION 19" MULTI TV SOUND BUILT-IN
· 139 Channel Capabi,ity · Random Access Electronic Tuning
Remote Control ·Signal Tracker system · Detachable Remote Control ·Comb Filter ·Channel and T:me On Screen · Earphone and Record Jacks ·Video and Audio Input ... acks · Dual Speaker System
with
Infrared
Cabinet Cabinet finish is wood- grain vinyl over wood products for beauty, strength and dJrability.
Dimensions
Measures 28"W x 18-3/4"H x 19"D and we)ghs 55
lbs.
CT1958
4809.95
1.11111131111.111.11111111111111111.1,
Dimensions
Measures 10-5/8"W x 11-3/4"H x 14-1/8"D and
weighs only 16.5 lbs.
CT0911
$393.95
VM-46
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HITACHI 401 West Artesia Blvd. Compton, CA 90220 (213) 537-8383 A World Leader in Technology
COLOR TELEVISION RECEIVERS
CT2550
CT4532A
CT2020W/B
CT2550 25" COLOR TELEVISION
FEATURES ·Multi TV Sound Jack · Signal Tracker System · VHF/UHF/36 Cable" Channels · Random Access Electronic Tuning with Infrared Remote Control · Detachable Remote Control · Channel On Screen
Cabinet The cabinet finish is wood- grain vinyl over wood products for beauty, strength and durability.
Dimensions: Measures 35-1/2"W x22-7/8"H x22-1/2"D and weighs 102.3 lbs.
Hitachi Video System All Hitachi Color Television sets feature anew generation, 100% solid-state video system. This system consists of miniaturized, high performance integrated circuits ( IC's) similar to those used in advanced space flight technology. All the components have been matched and balanced to work together as atotally integrated video system. This system has been designed to use less electricity.
Contrast Picture Control This Hitachi feature allows the viewer to touch up the contrast, brightness and color simultaneously, even with the Signal Tracker engaged.
CATV/MATV This Hitachi set comes complete with antenna con-
nections providing for aconventional 300 ohm connection and for a
75 ohm connection used for cable television or master antenna distribution systems.
Hitachi's Better Backing 10/2/1 Television Limited Warranty Hit-
achi's limited warranty covers transistors for 10 years, picture tube
and parts ( except cabinet and accessories) for 2years, and 1full year
of free carry- in service ( in- home for 19" and larger color TV). For the
full provisions of Hitachi's limited warranty on this product, see the
warranty sheet which is available upon request at any Hitachi dealer.
CT2550
$759.96
"Local cable companies may require special adaptors for receivinj,
regular or d"premium" programs.
CT4532A 45" PROJECTION TELEVISION
Multi TV Sound Jack The multi TV sound jack, with an optional MTS adaptor ( model VTMTS2) and your separate stereo Hi -Fi system will enable you to receive TV broadcasts with stereo sound. If the
Hitachi 45" Color Television has large 45" diagonal screen -- over 3 times larger than a 25" screen. With a picture bright enough for
complete, comfortable viewing in awell lighted room.
broadcast is bilingual, atouch of aswitch on the MTS adaptor will
FEATURES
change the language.
·36 Cable* channel capability · High brightness, wide-angle viewing
Signal Tracker System Hitachi's all new Signa Tracker System is the most technologically advanced color control system. Monitoring the
signal the instant it enters the color TV, the Signal Tracker System
adjusts and corrects to immediately compensate for incoming signal variations, including broadcast signal errors. The new Hitachi Signal
Tracker System assures the best and most accurate picture at every
on 45" diagonal screen · Hi -Fi sound from two 5" woofers and two 2" tweeters · Random Access Electronic Tuning w/lnfrared Remote Control · Comb filter · Full audio and video input jacks · 10/2/1 Limited Warranty · Signal Tracker System TM · Channel and Time on Screen · Swing- away doors
CT4532A
42895.96
instant.
COMPONENT TV
Random Access Electronic Tuning with Infrared Remote Control Any VHF, UHF, or up to 36 cable" channels can be tuned instantly and precisely with pushbutton ease. Just enter any channel number and the channel changes quickly and silently.
The channel immediately appears, tuned electronically to its exact frequency with crystal controlled accuracy. The circuit automatically locks or the signal to prevent drifting or shifting.
Hitachi has developed acomplete new system. Now you can have a
complete component video system that integrates all functions; video tape recorders, video discs, stereo audio systems, games,
computers and TV receivers. The CT2020/3020 is the nerve center since it is first ahigh performance 20"/25" color TV receiver with full
function remote control. In addition, aset of jacks on the back and function switches on the front are provided for switching to any of the many video sources.
The advanced remote control system employs a precise infrared
beam and has pushbutton controls for turning the set on and off, random channel selection, channel up and down, raising, lowering or muting the volume. When the set is turned on, a " memory" recalls the volume level and last channel viewed.
CT2020W/B 20" COMPONENT TV
FEATURES
·Multi TV Sound Jack · VHF/UHF/69 Cable Channels · Component TV 20" Flat Square Tube · Randon Access Electronic Tuning with Infrared Remote Control · Conb Filter · Signal Tracker System
Detachable remote control hand unit slips into aspecial pocket on
·Channel and Time on Screen · Input- Output Jacks Switches from
the front where it will fully control the set. It can also be removed to
Video Tape to Video Disc to Regular TV
function as a remote control hand unit and a cover automatically covers the hand unit storage area to provide a finished design
appearance.
CT2020W Walnut Cabinet CT2020B Black Cabinet
$809.95/ 809.95
Low Power Consumption This powerful video system operates on only 112 watts average, 110-120 volts, 60 cycles AC.
CT3020W/B 25" COMPONENT TV
FEATURES Multi TV Sound Jack · 69 Cable Channels · Random Access Elec-
Channel On Screen Each time the channel is changed or when the recall button on the remote control is used the channel number
appears in the lower right hana corner of the screen. This easy-to-
tronic Tuning with Infrared Remote Control · Comb Filter · Signal Tracker System · Channel and Time on Screen · Input- Output Jacks Switches Video Tape to Video Disc to Regular TV
read display lasts for just a few seconds and disappears automat-
CT3020W Walnut Cabinet
$1049.95
ically.
CT3020B Black Cabinet
1049.96
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-47
HUGHES AIRCRAFT COMPANY
Industrial Products Division
6155 El Camino Real, Carlsbad, CA 92008 (619) 931-3000 TWX 910-322-1393
LARGE SCREEN DATA/GRAPHICS
PROJECTOR
MODEL 700 GRAPHICS PROJECTOR
· High brightness, even in normal room light. · High resolution. · Real-time operation. · Front or rear projection.
The Hughes 700 graphics projector combines high intensity illumination with the exclusive Hughes liquid crystal light valve to generate bright, high resolution, real-time projected displays ranging in size from 12 inches to 12 feet. It displays computer-generated alphanumerics, symbols and graphics in raster scan format. The inherent simplicity of this unique design results in a rugged, durable unit with long life and low maintenance cost.
For: ·Teleconferencing of all types. ·CAD/CAM design conferences. ·Computer assisted instruction. ·Computer training. ·Customer and sales support. ·Command and control. ·Simulation and modeling. ·Situation and status information. ·High resolution facsimile display. ·Graphics and alphanumeric displays for any
large meeting.
Projection Mode: Light Output:
Display Characteristics:
Contrast Ratio: Resolution:
Input Signal:
Total Raster Lines: 250-625 525-1225 Video Amplifier Response: Line Power: Turn on Time: Mechanical:
Lamp Housing: Cooling: Weight:
Front or rear, operator se,ectable.
Greater than 600 lumens (modulated, total useable area) Open gate: 1100 lumens.
Dark symbols on light background; operator may select colors, contrast and inverted modes.
Greater than 20:1.
Greater than 1000 TV lines per raster height.
Integral circuitry accents most computer terminal video outputs including
U.S. and European raster standards. Either composite video or video with externa isync can be Lsed.
Field Rate 50-75 Hz
50-75 Hz
Interlace 1:1
2:1
30 MHz at 6dB 115 V, 1300 watts, 50/60 Hz Immediate; no warm-up period required. Dimens.ons 10Hx20Wx27D . n. (225Hx510Wx690D mm) Pre- aligned modular un't. Ambient air fan directed 50 F to 104 F. 100 lbs (45 kg).
Applications assistance in evaluating proposed uses is available.
VM-48
HUGHES
AIRCRAFT COMPANY
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS,
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607
(201) 368-9171
INC.
COLOR MONITORS
9- SERIES COLOR MONITORS -- In Line Gun CRT Type
Now, broadcasters have a second line of high- resolution color monitors to choose from; IKEGAMI's 9- Series Color Monitors. Like the RH-Series, these monitors were built to serve the professional. The 9- Series offer you in- line gun CRT's that do away with the bother of always having to adjust the convergence. You'll find the 9- Series easier to maintain with convenient pull-out panels on the front of the monitors. And to put you in step with the 80's, the 9- Series have anew streamlined look coupled with the merit of low power consumption.
FEATURES ·In Line Electron Gun: The CRT has an in- line electron gun; thus
eliminating the need for convergence adjustments. ·High- Resolution CRT: The display produces crisp, precise images
because the monitors use a fine- pitch, dot- mask CRT. A black matrix effect is provided on the CRT screen, enabling pictures to be displayed with a high contrast ratio even under bright lights -- more than 600 TV lines at center. ·Pulse Cross Circuit: For observing sync signals, apulse cross circuit with three functions has been included V. DELAY, H. DELAY, and V.H. DELAY ·Protective Circuits: The power supply and high voltage circuits are equipped with excess- current and excess- load protection, to prevent the CRT from being damaged. Sweep failure detection circuits are also utilized for CRT protection ·Signal Generator: Internal cross- hatch signal generator facilitates a convenient means of checking deflection linearity ·Video Input System: A3video input system is used with aselector switch located on the front panel ·Signal Demodulation: The IQ standard is used for color signal demodulation; remarkably faithful color signals are reproduced ·Automatic Frequency Phase Control: Extremely accurate color locking is possible with AFPC system ·Keyed Back- Porch Clamp System: A keyed back- porch clamp system is used, to prevent black level fluctuation. ·Comb Filter: The monitors have acomb filter for maintaining highresolution in color images. Color trap/comb filter selection is possible ·Degauss Circuit: Internal degaussing circuit is provided. In addition, the CRT is equipped with amagnetic shield to prevent interference from external magnetic fields. ·Residual Subcarrier Test: A switch is provided for checking if residual subcarrier is present on the incoming signal ·Matrix Switching: A matrix switching circuit is provided to reproduce color similar to aTV receiver or NTSC standard ·Selectable Time Constants: Three types of horizontal- AFC time constants are selectable ·Optional Functions: RGB operation, Switching between RGB and NTSC operation
10" SERIES RH MONITORS
The TM10-9RH portable professional color monitor complements Ikegami's broad range of 14" ( 13V), 20" ( 19V) and 25" ( 23V) broadcast color monitors. Using a 10" ( 8.5V) high resolution shadow mask cathode ray tube with aself-converging in-line gun, the TM10-9RH can be operated from AC or DC Power and is available in cabinet or rackmountable versions. The rackmountable versions are 8-3/4" high and are furnished in single, dual, single with adjacent WFM space or single with adjacent Vectorscope space configurations.
American standard matched phosphors are utilized in NTSC versions of the TM 10-9R H. Features including pulse cross, keyed back porch clamp, pre-set contrast/hue/saturation/brightness controls, ondemand degaussing, aperture correction, dual video inputs, sync mode selection, color/monochrome selection, individual electron gun cut-off switches, remote control capability, etc. are standard.
TM14-9RH
TM20-9RH
14" and 20" SERIES 9RH MONITORS -- In Line Tube
TM14-9RH/N 14" NTSC - Rackmount (less and case and chassis tracks)
TM14-9RH/N/RGB 14" NTSC/RGB Rackmount (less case and chassis tracks)
TM20-9RH/ N 14" NTSC- Rackmount (less case and chassis tracks)
TM20-9RH/N/RGB 14" NTSC/RGB Rackmount (less case and chassis tracks)
TM10-9RH
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-49
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS,
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
INC.
COLOR MONITORS
IKEGAMI 10- SERIES HIGH RESOLUTION DELTA GUN COLOR MONITORS
TM14-10RH/TM20-10RH The 10- Series of high resolution color monitors were developed specifically for higher image quality in TV production and are available in 13V and 19V versions. The highresolution delta- gun CRT has realized high- resolution, high brightness, and the newly developed convergence circuit greatly facilitates convergence adjustment and operation.
Functions include: ·3video inputs each with bridging BNC connectors ·External sync input with abridging BNC connector ·Pulse cross for examination of horizontal and vertical
blanking interval ·Underscan/overscan selection switch ·Switchable AFC time constants for 2msec, 0.5msec, and
7msec ·Push-button control for degaussing CRT Shadow Mask ·Blue phase verification -- The Blue Gun On/Off switch
facilitates chroma level and hue adjustments ·Preset controls for contrast, brightness, chroma level,
and hue ·Residual sub- carrier verification, for evaluation of input
signal condition ·Color/monochrome selection switch, to facilitate white
balance adjustment ·Trap/Comb selection switch ·Corrective Matrix permits rotation of color decoding
vectors towards NTSC aim points ·Multi- turn potentiometers are used for RGB Background
controls, GB Gain control, Preset controls, and Height/ Width controls for easy operation ·A tally lamp is provided
19" Rackmountable TM14-10RH's are available in cabinet or rack configurations occupying 10-1/2" height. The TM20-10RH configurations are available in cabinet or rack configuration occupying 15-3/4" height.
Remote Controls Video A/B/C Sync INT/EXT Color/Monochrome Tally On/Off V- VS Control
TM14-10RH
TM20-10RH
Controls found in pull-out drawer
-1M1 ,1-10RFI
TM20-10RH
·Operate- Setup Select
·Height Width ( Wide and U- Scan)
·Tally INT/EXT Power Select
·I)elav Bright
·Height ' Width ( Wide and U- Scan) ·Aperture
·H/V Centering
tH/V Centering
·G/B Gain ·R/G/B Background ·Convergence
·Convergence ·R/G/13 Background ·G/B Gain ·Video Front Selector Cross Hatch
*Video Local or Remote Select
*AFC Select 2ms or
VAR (0.5ms or 7ms) *Residual Subcarrier Verification
on/off
·Trap- Comb Select
·Operate- Setup Select ·Matrix In- Out Select
*Tally INT/EXT Power Select
·Hue / Chroma / Brightness/Contrast Preset
VM-50
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS, INC.
37 Brook Avenue Maywood, NJ 07607 (201) 368-9171
COLOR MONITORS
RH SERIES COLOR MONITORS
For professional high- quality color reproduction IKEGAMI " RH" Series Color Monitors TM14-2RHA and TM20-8RH.
These two high- resolution color TV monitors are faithfully serving hundreds of satisfied customers around the world where precise color monitoring is an absolute necessity. The comb filter in the decoder, the high- resolution CRT, the excellent stability and durability, and the facilitated maintenance . . . all these merits put the TM142RHA and TM20-8RH at the top of their field.
Installable in 19" rack mounts, IKEGAMI " RH" Series Color Monitors are widely applicable for color monitoring from the studio, control room, telecine room to remote 0.B. van, and other uses.
FEATURES · High resolution CRT
High- resolution color cathode ray tube provides bright, clear pictures. Highly condensed dots ( dot pitch: 1/2 ITM14-2RHA), 1/1.5 ITM20-8RH) of that of conventional color monitors) promise excellent picture quality -- more than 600 TV lines at center. · 19" rackmount Installable in 19" rackmount by applying chassis tracks. · Comb filter A comb filter prevents deterioriation of resolution in reproducing color signals. The number of TV lines is more than 600 at the screen center. · AFPC system An AFPC ( Automatic Frequency Phase Control) system is adopted in the color lock circuit for accurately detecting color phase demodulation and ensuring faithful color reproduction. · Pulse cross circuit A pulse cross circuit is contained to facilitate VTR sync signal checking. The vertical delay and horizontal delay can also be effected independently. · Sync gate lock system The sync gate lock system in brightness pulse causes no influence on linearity. Also, since picture output is DC- restored by a feedback gate clamp, the black level is stabilized and input signals are always faithfully reproduced. · Normal/underscan function A normal/underscan function is provided. · Preset brightness/contrast By presetting, the fixed level of brightness and contrast can be gained merely by switching, resulting in easy operation. · Remote control Color/monochrome selection, video input selection, sync selection, and black level compensation of setup signal can be remote controlled. · Active convergence circuit Adopting an active convergence circuit, screen adjustment has been greatly facilitated. · Countdown pulse drive system Employing acountdown pulse drive system in the vertical sync circuit, excellent interlacing is assured, while vertical sync regulation becomes unnecessary. · Degauss circuit An incorporated degauss circuit avoids the influence of amagnetic field. Wherever a monitor is installed, by merely operating a switch, any magnetic influence can be shut out. · Optional functions 1. RGB operation 2. Switching between RGB and NTSC operation 3. R-Y and B-Y signal outputs ITM14-2RHA)
TM20-8RH
TM14-2RHA/N
14" and 20" Series 8RH Monitors - Delta Gun Tube
TM14-2RHA/N. 14" NTSC Rack Mount, Less Case and Chassis Tracks
TM14-2 RHA/N/RGB. 14" NTSC/RGB Rack Mount, Less Case and Chassis Tracks
TM20-8RH/N. 20" NTSC, Less Case, Requires T-TM20 for Rack Mounting
TM20-8RH/N/RGB. 20" NTSC/RGB, Less Case, Requires T-TM20 for Rack Mounting Optional Accessories for Series RH
T-TM14. Rack Mount Chassis Tracks for all TM14-2RHA
T-TM20. Rack Mount Chassis Tracks for all TM20-8RH
HC-TM14. Case for all TM14-2RHA C-TM20. Case for all TM20-8RH
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-51
IKEGAMI ELECTRONICS,
37 Brook Ave. Maywood, NJ 07607 (201)368-9171
INC.
MONOCHROME MONITORS
3-Series Monochrome Monitors
·New, professional monochrome monitor using high- resolution electron gun CRT
· IC and silicon transistor circuitry · Excellent geometry and linearity · Horizontal and vertical delay switches · Underscan switch ·Keyed back- porch clamp system ·Two video inputs
·Modular construction, quick- disconnect circuit boards common to 9" and 14" CRTs
·Remote operation -- Tally on/off, video A / B, and sync INT/EXT · Switchable DC restoration
Ikegami's new 3- Series-- the PM9-3H and PM14-3H-- are professional monochrome monitors. The 3- Series have been designed to give astudio engineer the equivalent of a fine precision instrument for monitoring important reference pictures. The 3- Series offer superior performance, extremely high quality, and compact construction unmatched by other monochrome monitors. In addition, the 3- Series are built specifically for continuous operation in broadcast television applications.
The 3- Series monitors are aunique blend of high reliability, ease of maintenance, superior picture quality, energy efficiency, and low power consumption. The monitors provide years of service- free use. They employ only the best components. The monitors also incorporate the latest technology, ICs, and silicon transistor circuitry.
The 3- Series monitors have modular circuit boards which can be quickly disconnected for ease of maintenance and operation.
The PM9-3H is a 9" monitor available in a dual rack mount version. Either the left or the right positions can be left blank for insertion of awaveform monitor.
The PM14-3H is a 14" monitor with a cast aluminum front for improved rigidity and appearance. The design of the monitor is compatible with VTR over- console mounting applications. Rack mount versions are also available. Design and styling of the PM14-3H drop- in model are compatible with Ikegami TM14-9RH and TM14-2RHA color monitors. The video drive circuit of the monitors uses a keyed backporch clamp system to prevent black level fluctuations. The monitors also offer differential gain distortion of less than 5% with 30Vp-p of cathode-ray tube drive.
The PM14-3H provides horizontal and vertical delay switches for displaying a pulse cross pattern; the PM9-3H has a single switch for the same function. In this mode, brightness is automatically increased for better observation of the sync pulses.
Other standard features: ·Underscan switch -- permits inspection of
picture edges ·Tally light ·Two video inputs ( A / B) · 120/240V AC 50/60Hz operation · EIA or CCIR scanning standards operation
PM14-3H
Specifications
IR GENERAL Power Ambient temperature External dimension·
Weight
Or.
Front panel controls
At. 100 120 220. 240V · io%
50 60Hz appris 40VA
15 C · 50 C
90% or less relative hurrudity
(non condensingt
NW)
2221WI 21:41111 2051D1
PMI4 PM') 4
fere
45.ftWi nun approk
2051111 s _r411h 7kg
PM14 4 app.», 15 kg Video input BM)' type 12 syste-nsl
Sync input RN)' type 11 system) Remote input Video A fi Syr], INT LXT H and V delay switches ( single switch
for VW) Size NOR WIDL Contrast Brightness Power ON OFF
· RATING
Input signal Input level Input impedance
Output level CRT Phosphor colorimetry Operation Video display screen
2 video inputs Isync input Video signal VS 1OVp p or 0 7Vp-p
positive Sync signal l',4Vp-p Video input
High impedance. Bridge connection (Return loss 46dB 1100Hz ,4 2MHz)) Sync input High impedance. Bridge connection (Return loss 40dB ( 5MHz)) 30Vp·p ( at CRT drive voltage) PM9-3 230131/34 PM14-3 340BKB4 P4 phosphor. 9300 K continuous NOR/UNDER switching system pulse cross circuit provided
· PERFORMANCE Mechanical vibrados
Resolution
Power voltage fluctuation
No disturbance picture by shock. ie microphonx. etc . when dropp.-c spontaneously from 50mm height
Center More than 600TV Lines Corner More than 500TV Lines
Should the power voltage fluctuees in the range of t10% against the - wed in put voltage, monitor is operated stable and picture quality does not deteriorate
PM9-3H
· VIDEO CIRCUIT Max. gain Frequency response
Waveform
Max. contrast More than 38dB 100kHz reference.
60Hz.-8MHz dB (at 30Vp-p of dutput level) When square wave of rise time 0 05terec is supplied at video input con-
Linearity Noise
Rise time 250kHz. Less than 0 lusec
Ow , , noot 250kHz. Less than 8%
Sag
601-1z. Less than 5%
Less than 5% DG ( at rated output 30V0 pl Coherent noise - 46dB
Hum noise
55dB
Others - 55dB
(except blanking period)
Above measured at output terminal in condition of terminating video input 752 and contrast VR maximum
· DEFLECTION CIRCUIT
Sync stability
Horizontal AFC time constant Deflection diatonic.= High voltage circuit (I) High voltage: (2) High voltage
fluctuation:
Ihe ·. t.IbIlIty of operation shall be met fur the following conditions III Internal sync
a Video input level changed against rated value: - 10dB
b For video amplitude changes of .0 to 120% and sync levels greater than - erdB (0 15 to 0 3V sync).
12) Exwrnal sync Sync signal input level 1".4Vp-p
Approx 2m sec less than 2% of picture height
12kV
·2% ir range of 0,3500A as 10OrrA reiere,
VM-52
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
41.154fsoLnIgHT SERVICES, INC.
New York, NY 10022 (212) 751-1800 Telex 126872 ( 800) 221-1297
BARCODATA VIDEO PROJECTION SYSTEM
Exclusive Distributors of all Barco/Barcodata Video Projectors in the Western Hemisphere.
·
BARCODATA 32 THREE- LENS REFRACTIVE OPTICS
Special Features ·Registration: 13- zone ( 1%). ·Accepts positive or negative logic. · Horizontal syncs delay. · High/low intensity. ·Improved computer blue resolution ( green in blue ratio adjustable
from 0 to 50%). ·Scanning rates: NTSC ( 525 lines, 60 field), CCIR ( 625 lines, 50 field). ·Horizontal: 15625-17500 ( standard frequency); 16500-32000 ( second
frequency). ·Vertical: 50/60 Hz automatic adjustable up to 100 Hz ( standard fre-
quency); 60-100 Hz ( second frequency). ·Interlaced or non- interlaced syncs. ·Self- diagnostic indicators. · Keystone correction: ± 25°.
General Characteristics ·Model and Type: BARCODATA three- lens refractive optics. ·Video Format: Multi- standard-- PAL, SECAM, NTSC 3.58, NTSC
4.43. Automatic sense and display. ·Size: 9.25" x22.25" wide x32.6" long. · Light Weight: 81.5 lbs. ·Power Requirements: 110 VAC/220 VAC, + 10% - 15%. Frequency
independent 40 Hz to 100 Hz. ·Power Consumption: 250W maximum.
Optical Characteristics · Light Output: maximum 450 lumens. ·Minimum Screen Size: 3' x4'. ·Maximum Screen Size: Using Delta II- D lenses 6' x8'. If Delta II- M
lenses are used it will enlarge to 18' x24'. ·Geometrical: Error measured horizontally and vertically 11%. ·Throw Distance: 1.5X screen width. ·Screen Application: Front or rear projection. Flat or curved screen
(Flat screen -- 180° viewing angle without loss of brightness). ·Simplified Scan Reversal: Capable of ceiling, floor and rear- screen
applications.
System Controls Local ·9- zone registration; focus-- red, green, blue; tube cut-off switch --
red, green, blue 02 voltage-- red, green, blue; contrast; brightness; color; tint ( NTSC mode only); decoder ( NTSC 3.58/NTSC 4.43): video/ RGB; fast/slow sync select ( for VCR use). Remote: (up to 300 feet). ·Controls on Remote Control Box: Brightness contrast, saturation and hue controls; switch for following modes: RGB Analog IS on green); RGB TTL; RGB Analog external S; video; ( NTSC mode only); decoder ( NTSC 3.58/ NTSC 4.43); fast/slow sync select ( for VCR use). Vertical and horizontal scanning frequencies; standard and adjustable frequencies select.
List Price $ 16,465.00 FOB,NY
"THE SWITCHER" VIDEO AND DATA SOURCE SELECTOR
FEATURES · Especially designed for use with the BARCODATA projector offer-
ing a standard video and data frequency range ( from 15kHz to 32kHz). · Completely modular design adaptable to your needs. ·Accepts up to 10 plug-in input modules in any combination between Composite Video, RGB TTL and RGB Analog. · Immediate remote controlled access to any input. ·Preset contrast level and picture positioning ( phase) for each input. · 19" rack compatible, 3 units height.
The Video and Data Source Selector is atailor made solution offering immediate remote controlled access for up to 10 different sources (Video, RGB, TTL, RGB Analog) connected to the BARCODATA.
INPUTS Composite Video Video: BNC Audio: DIN ( stereo)
RGB TTL D9 connector
RGB Analog 4 x BNC for RGB Sync. Each input module can be plugged into every input slot. The BARCODATA is given all information to adapt to the corresponding input. An internal power supply provides the necessary voltage + 18 V and + 5V.
OUTPUTS Composite Video Video: BNC Audio: DIN ( stereo)
RGB TTL D9 connector
RGB Analog 4 x BNC for RGB sync.
List Price $ 1,429.00 FOB,NY
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-53
INTERAND CORPORATION
3200 West Peterson Avenue Chicago, IL 60659 (312) 478-1700 Telex 91022-15279-INTERANDCO CGO
CONTROL CENTER
CAMERA STATION
INTERACTIVE IMAGE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
DISCON 1000
DISCON 725
TELESTRATOR 100
TELESTRATOR 440
DISCON® 1000 Integrated Videographic Teleconferencing System Camera Station/Control Center
DISCON 1000 is the most powerful member of the DISCON family. A fully integrated videographic teleconferencing system, DISCON 1000
offers all features inherent in other DISCON systems and more. Using ordinary telephone lines, users can touch a stylus to the DISCON Interactive Graphics Display to transmit and annotate any
image that can be captured by avideo camera or created by avideo compatible professional computer. DISCON 1000 is the ideal communications tool for decision- making, problem solving, crisis management, and education.
DISCON 1000 provides a 19- inch interactive graphics display, separate video outputs for operator and audience, the ability to have two separate FastScan*" transceivers, and substantial expansion
capability. A typical DISCON 1000 configuration includes a Document Station and Control Center. Custom features, packaging, operating software, and room design are available.
The Control Center mounted graphics processor features multi-
point communications controller, digitizing sensor surface with
switching control for video input and output, seven color graphics option and color background image displayed on 19" RGB monitor.
DISCON 1000 Control Center
S62,000.00
The Camera Station includes viewfinder monitor, bogan lighting (high resolution color camera is extra).
DISCON 1000 Camera Station $2,825.00
DISCON® 725 Compact Videographic Teleconferencing System
DISCON 725 is a compact, modular, integrated teleconferencing
system designed for the small conference room, desktop, or even
the plant floor. DISCON 725 combines the full- color, high resolution transceiver capabilities of FastScanTM with the seven color annotation capabilities of the DISCON 500.
Any image that can be captured by avideo camera or created by a
video compatible professional computer can be shared by decision-
makers at remote locations. With a touch of the stylus to the
DISCON Interactive Graphics Display, users can draw directly onto
the video image and instantly transmit graphics over ordinary tele-
phone lines. The DISCON display can also oe used as acolor display
terminal for a professional computer.
DISCON 725
$44,000.00
DISCON® 500 Videographic Annotation System
The DISCON 500 is designed to operate in conjunction with a customer's own pre- installed freeze-frame video conferencing system and provides the same interactive graphics capability as the DISCON 1000. It also operates as astand-alone audiographics system utilizing the same unique color and symbol characteristics as described with the DISCON 1000. The DISCON 500 consists of a display unit including astylus- controlled sensor surface, acolor monitor and an electronic microprocessor module. While the DISCON 500 does not provide error correction and network control of the background images supplied by the customer's freeze-frame system, it does retain
these features for the superimposed graphics which conference participants add to such images. The DISCON 500 offers the same
ability to annotate in multiple colors and symbols as the DISCON 1000. The DISCON 500 can also be used as an " electronic blackboard" in which there is no background image. Principal blackboard applications are expected to be in tele -teaching and as an added component to ordinary voice-only telephone conferences.
NTSC System PAL System
$ 23,300.00 24,800.00
TELESTRATOR® 440
The Model 440 includes all of the Model 100 capabilities plus an ability to work in seven colors. The 440 also permits the use of alarge
number of standard and custom symbols for specialties, such as sports, weather, current events and business news, together with many other functions, such as automatic straight line- connect, automatically sized and shaped rectangles, and other drafting aids. In addition, Model 440 can be supplied with custom software capable of producing animated effects. This system is designed for pre- and post- production settings, as well as for " on- air" use.
FEATURES
· 13- inch diagonal color monitor · Stylus selection of modes and
symbols · Symbol and mode indication in upper right corner of screen on Local display only · Local stylus- selectable crosshair for
exact stylus positioning · Moving symbol mode ("write-thru" cursor) · Eraser with exact- size symbol · Adjustment- free stylus calibration · Digital accuracy and repeatability · Color options
·Variable symbol size option · Variable symbol orientation option · Symbol animation option · Customized menu selection with
personality modules · Remote control options · High resolution 11024 x480) for smooth graphics
Basic System including 12 customer- specified standard symbols and
expansion capability.
NTSC System
$ 19,600.00
PAL System
20,600.00
TELESTRATOR° 100 Monochrome Graphics ( colorizable)
The TELESTRATOR systems allow television commentators and others communicating with video audiences to instantly add explanatory markings, annotations and symbols to live scenes, instant replays and pre-recorded video materials. The Model 100 is asimple
to operate monochrome system that is a natural for use during live coverage of events, i.e., news, sports, presentations.
FEATURES
· 13- inch diagonal color monitor · All symbol and mode selection by
stylus · Symbol and mode indication in upper- right corner of screen
on Local display only · Local crosshair ( stylus selectable) for exact
stylus positioning · " Write-thru" cursor mode-- moving symbol
·Eraser with exact size symbol · Automatic stylus calibration-- no
adjustments required · Digital accuracy and repeatability · High
resolution ( 1024 x480) for smooth graphics
Complete NTSC ( 525 line, 60Hz) system
$ 13,500.00
Complete PAL ( 625 line, 50Hz) system
14,500.00
VM-54
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
JENSEN SOUND LABORATORIES
4136 North United Parkway Schiller Park, IL 60176 (312) 671-5680 ( 800) 323-0707
AUDIO/VIDEO COMPONENTS
AVS-3250 Video Monitor
Jensen Video Monitors are designed to provide color image reproduction usually found only in the professional studio. The precise
definition and brilliant picture of the 25" Jensen Video Monitors are the result of uncompromising quality in every detail of engineering and manufacture. High technology active circuitry stabilizes the picture, while acomb filter is employed to enhance luminance and resolution. Color and image balance for key video parameters can be controlled by preset circuitry or manually varied. Offered in true
monitor format, without audio or tuner circuitry, this monitor provides the maximum flexibility for use in video or personal computer applications.
AVS-3250
$890.00
AVS-5250 Speaker System
Jensen's Audio + Video Speaker Systems embody the latest in loudspeaker technology and design. A specially designed low frequency system consisting of a5-1/4", polypropylene cone driver along with apassive radiator produces bass response normally found only in the most sophisticated audio systems. Brilliant high frequency perform-
ance is ensured by the 1" soft dome driver with high energy samarium cobalt magnets. All driver magnetic structures are specially shielded to prevent interference with the operation of video monitors or television receivers.
AVS-5250
$230.00/pr.
AVS-6200 Hi-Fi Stereo Videocassette Recorder ( VHS)
GENERAL FEATURES
· 139- channel, cable- ready frequency synthesizer tuning with remote control channel selection and switchable automatic frequency control
·Wireless infrared remote control with all primary functions and direct access channel selection
·8-event/14-day programmable recording with clock/timer featuring repeat function, tape speed selection and backup power for memory/clock functions
·4- digit electronic tape counter/time remaining indicator for record and playback modes
· Instant record/sleep timer feature for recording up to 4 hours and 59 minutes
·Tape search using counter memory or auto- encoded cue signal detection for locating the start of desired programs
·Insert editing capability on video, Hi -Fi and selectable normal audio tracks
·Up to eight hours of continuous audio + video or audio- only recording
·Microprocessor- controlled tape transport with feather- touch operation
· Display dimmer switch ·Quartz- locked, direct drive head drum and capstan motors. As-
sures precise speed accuracy with low wow and flutter ·RF output for connecting AVS 6200 to TV ( channel 3or 4) ·Multi- pin input connector for remote video camera ·Rear panel AC outlet ( unswitched)
VIDEO FEATURES ·Double- gap integrated 4- head configuration. Delivers high quality
video recording and playback in normal and special effects modes ·Noise- free field- still, frame advance and slow-motion playback ·Dynamic Aperture Control ( DAC) switch. Assures increased
picture clarity ·High video signal-to-noise ratio ( greater than 45dB). Provides
improved picture quality
AVS-3250 VIDEO MONITOR w/AVS-5250 SPEAKERS
AVS-620C HI-FI STEREO VCIR
· Horizontal resolution at 240 lines. Delivers better image sharpness
·8- speed tape transport with forward search and reverse speeds (1/40, 1/20, 1/10, 1/5, 1X, 3X, and 7X normal speed)
·Tiree playback speeds ( SP, LP, and EP)
·Two recording speeds ( SP, EP) ·Automatic backspace recording. Provides smoother transitions
between scenes · Normal and slow tracking controls · Picture sharpness control
AUDIO FEATURES ·AFM ( audio frequency modulation). Assures high fidelity, low
noise, wide dynamic range audio recording and playback · Dolby SB noise reduction for stereo normal recording and playback
(compatible with conventional VHS equipment) ·Stereo simulcast recording capability
·Audio limiter. Automatically adjusts recording evels on normal and Hi -Fi tracks ( switchable on Hi -Fi track)
·Two separate stereo audio outputs: Hi- Fi only, Hi-Fi/normal ( mixed output, continuously variable from front panel)
· LED recording level and peak level indicators
·Stereo headphone jack for private monitor ng of Hi -Fi, normal or mixed audio outputs
·Audio dubbing on normal tracks with separate left and right channel MIC inputs
AVS-6200
$ 1399.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-55
PORTABLE BRIEFCASE SYSTEM TBR-160U
FEATURES · Custom Attache Case Housing -- 18-
1/4"H x14"W x6-1/2"D · Built- In Compartment for Literature,
Notes, Pens, etc. · BR- 1600U VHS Videocassette Recorder · TM-63U 5" Color Monitor · Self- Contained Battery Power
JVC
TBR-160U VHS PRESENTATION SYSTEM
A complete VHS video system in a briefcase, the TBR-160U is ideal for sales presentations, training programs -- any one-on-one video application. The TBR160U consists of a super- small VHS recorder ( BR- 1600U) and a 5" color monitor ( TM-63U), battery system and accessories -- all wired and ready to go in an attractive briefcase.
Compact 2-6 Hour VHS Recorder/Player. The BR- 1600U is the smallest and lightest 2-6 hour videocassette recorder JVC has ever offered. It uses standard VHS cassettes ( available everywhere) and can playback tapes recorded in the 2, 4, or 6hour modes. Its 4video heads assure top picture quality. Connections are provided for not only the system's 5" monitor, but also for an ordinary TV receiver. A plug-in remote control is also included.
5" Color Monitor. As a compliment to the compact video deck, JVC engineers developed c companion monitor that is not only compact in size, but has excellent picture quality. The TM-63U monitor contains aflat-surface 5" (diagonal) in- line picture tube for high resolution and vivid, true-to-life colors. Audio signals are reproduced clearly through a built-in 3-1/8" speaKer.
Exclusive Power System. One key to the convenience of JPVC's new briefcase system is the exclusive power pack which supplies power to both the VCR and to the monitor. Termed the BBTR160U, this 2ampere hour NiCad pack is designed to power both units for cbout 1hour continuously, before recharging. A micro charger is supplied with the system. In addition, an optional AC adaptor ( AA-P1663U) is also avaiFable.
Attractive Briefcase. All components are housed in an attractive briefcase. Also there's a compartment provided which is designed for papers, literature, etc. All necessary cables are provided, and the system is fuLy wired and ready to go.
Provided Accessories BR- 1600U Portable VHS recorder/player; TM-63U 5" Color Monitor; BBTR-160U Power system including: BB- 16 NiCad battery, CB- 16 Battery charger, SSB-16 Shoe Cable Adaptor, CN-100U Cable Assembly ( RCA-RCA); ATTAC-10 Briefcase
PRICING/ACCESSORIES
Suggested List Price
TBR-160U Portable Briefcase System . $1620.00
TBR-160AC Portaole Briefcase System
(AC \:ersion -- incudes AC Adaptor instead cf DC Battery System)
1440.00
EBTR-160U Rech.Drgeable Ba'tery System
for TBR-160LI
AA-F:9663U AC A,1,1ntor ' BR-&) L
300.00 120.00
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA. Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, E:mwood Park, NJ 07407 VM-56
201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825
COLOR MONITORS
TM- 13U COLOR MONITOR
13" diagonal screen; 90 deflection angle; Audio input; Ideal for video networking and internal communications systems; Attractive tan metal housing; Concealed front panel controls with pushbutton On/Off switch; Rack mountable
Suggested List Price $360.00
TM-90U 9" COLOR VIDEO MONITOR/RGB COMPUTER DISPLAY
9" flat-face, in- line, sharp-corner picture tube; RGB input terminals ( TTL) for connection to personal computer; 2way audio/video input and bridged output connectors; BNC, EIAJ 8- pin video connectors; 8-cm round speaker on top; Compact metal shield cabinet -- smallest 9" color monitor available
Suggested List Price $500.00 I
JVC
TM-13U 111
TM- 90U
TM-22U 5" PORTABLE COLOR VIDEO MONITOR
In- line black stripe picture tube capable of accurate, well-defined color reproduction; Flexible AC/DC power
supply -- household AC or built-in exclusive rechargeable NB-P1 NiCad battery pack -- enabling both indoor or outdoor use; Built-in speaker enabling simultaneous audio and video monitoring; Dual circuits provided for audio and video signals; 5" Diagonal AC Battery powered Color Monitor includes Hood, Power Cord, Earphone
TM- 22U NBP-1U
5-Portable Color
Video Monitor
NiCad Battery
Suggested List Price
$410.00 75.00
TM-63U 5" PORTABLE COLOR VIDEO MONITOR
Compact size -- ideal for sales presentations, promotions, etc.; Hidden Control Panel; Loop-thru video/audio input; Built-in audio with speaker; 12V DC Power Requirement
TM-63U AA- 63B
5-Portable Color
Video Monitor
AC Adaptor...
Suggested List Price
$415.00 45.00
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VM-57
COLOR VIDEO MONITOR/RECEIVER C-2082 UM
jvc
FEATURES
· 19" Diagonal Color Monitor/Receiver · Comb Filter for Improved Color and
Detail · Dual Audio Channels · Skew Control · VC-202U Monitor Cable Included
C-2082UM
C-2082UM 19" VIDEO MONITOR/ RECEIVER WITH STEREO SOUND
To separate the chrominance and luminance components, an improved comb filter is used -- this results in better color and finer detail. With video signals, the C-2082UM has a maximum resolution of 350 lines, and with broadcast signals its maximum resolution is 330 lines.
Dual audio channels make the C2082UM ideal for use with a VCR equipped with stereo sound. External speaker terminals are provided for the connection of a pair of componentquality speakers to make the most of the improved 2-channel audio amplification circuit; a switch is provided which allows switching between these external speakers and the built-in speakers.
And being a receiver, direct tuning of VHF and UHF broadcast frequencies is possible with 12 preset stations selectable by pushbutton tuning. Front panel controls are provided for switching between the sources connected to the three rear sets and one front panel set of video and audio jacks.
BNC connectors are used for the connection of video components, and a standard 8- pin input/output connector is provided for the connection of an additional VCR. The video and audio signals of the channel to which the C2082UM is tuned are output from this terminal as well as from the TV Out Jack
A unique skew control is provided; this is to eliminate the distortion at the top of the picture which sometimes occurs when a stretched video tape is played back.
The two pairs of connectors are each linked for the bridge connection of video components; ; nput and output components can be connected to either of each pair of connectors.
For convenience when working with monochrome video signals, color can be switched off
Suggested List Price
$ 795.00
SPECIFICATIONS Type:
Co:or Video Monitor/Receiver Reception System: NTSC system
Channel Coverage: VHF 2 13 UHF 14 83 (twelve channel preset system) Power Input: AC 120V, 60Hz
Power Consumption: Max. 110W; Avg. 83W
CRT Dimensions: 19" diagonally measured
Semiconductors: ICs: 21 Transistors: 72
Audio Output: Bui!t-in speakers/3W 3W External speakers/5W + 5W Speakers: 4" ( 10cm) round type x2ea.
Antenna Terminal: VHF terminal ( 75 ohms), F-type connecting plug UHF terminal
External Speaker Terminai: Impedance/8 ohms
Exterior Dimensions: Width 21-1/4" ( 53.7cm) 30-1/2" ( 77.3cm) with reflectors opened to the maximum position. Depth 19-1/2" ( 49.3cm)
Height 19-3/4" ( 49.9cm) including legs Weight: 56.1 lbs. ( 25.5kg)
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VM-58
JVC
COLOR VIDEO MONITOR/RECEIVER C-1483UM
FEATURES
· Modern, Professional Styling · Wireless Remote Control with Volume,
Channel Select, Power On/Off · High Focus II CRT · Comb Filter · Electronic Tuner · 8-Pin EIAJ Input · BNC Video Input ( Loop-Thru)
'ffle-iitamJVmC.urrmituirr
C-1483UM
C-1483UM COLOR VIDEO MONITOR/RECEIVER
The C-1483UM is designed for use by institutions and videophiles who require more features, reliability and higher resolution pictures than those offered by a regular TV It has an electronic VHF/UHF tuner, so 83 channels can be received and it has input/output and audio/video terminals for the connection in a comprehensive audio/video system. Features that add to its cost/performance are its improved resolution comb filter, digital display of channel and audio level and its fullfunction remote control, provided for ease of operation which is particularly useful when used in a visual training setup.
Newly- Developed UMark- IV Chassis uses the high-density circuitry making possible compact styling, a lower power consumption and longer service life.
Two Input BNC Connectors (each linked for the bridge connection) are available for the connection of video components, and an 8- pin EIA VTR socket is provided for the playback and recording of an additional VCR. The mode select buttons ( TV, VIDEO or VTR) are provided on the front panel. The signal selected by the mode button is always output at the LINE OUT terminal on the rear panel for easy editing/dubbing/mixture of video sources.
Remote Control enables direct channel selection or scan tuning; it also makes possible volume control and instantaneous muting.
Front Panel Digital Display of channel and audio volume.
Superior Sound with improved audio circuit and 3" diameter circular speaker.
Comb Filter Resolution of 330 lines with video signals and 300 lines with broadcast signals for better color and finer detail.
83- Channel Electronic VHF/UHF Tuner with scan tuning from the remote control or front panel; 12 channels can be preset for direct tuning via the remote control.
Suggested List Price
$590.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Color Monitor/Receiver
Reception System: NTSC System
Channel Coverage: VHF 2 - 13, UHF 14 - 83
Power Input: AC 120V, 60Hz
Power Consumption: AVG. 68W, MAX. 85W
CRT Dimensions: 13" Diagonally Measured
Video Input ( EXT IN): Video/1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms Audio/390 mV rms (-6dBs) High Impedance
VTR ( EIA 8-Pin): Input: Video/1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms
Audio/775 mV rms ( OdBs) High Impedance
Output: Video/1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms Audio/150 mV rms (- 14 dBs) Low Impedance ( at 50% mod.)
Line Output: Video/1.0 Vp-p 75 ohms Audio/150 mV rms (-4dBs) Low Impedance ( at 50% mod.
Exterior Dimensions: Width 14-3/4" ( 37.3 cm) Depth 16-1/8" (40.9 cm) Height 14-3/8" ( 36.3 cm) including legs
Weight: 25.6 lbs. ( 11.6 kg) Accessories: Remote control unit x1 AAA-size dry cell batteries x2 Channel sheet for remote control unit x1
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division. 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 (201)794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VM-59
COLOR VIDEO MONITOR TM-R9U
FEATURES
· Two Selectable Video Inputs · Internal/External Sync, Comb Filter · Underscan, Pulse Cross · Blue Check Switch · Tally Lamp · Remote Control of Front Panel
Switches · AC or 12/24 VDC Power Supply · 47mm Dot Pitch In-Line Picture Tube · Carrying Handle · Double Rack Mount Option
JVC
TM-R9U 9" COLOR MONITOR
The TM-R9U is a multi- purpose monitor designed for a wide variety of applications and suitable for use in even the most demanding broadcast environments. Whether in a rack mount studio installation, or in a portable configuration, the TM-R9U offers the features that professionals demand in a high-performance, modestly priced monitor.
Excellent Picture Quality. A newlydeveloped color demodulator and comb filter provide accurate color reproduction along with excellent definition. The TM-R9U boasts a high resolution of more than 310 lines. Variations in black level are suppressed by a pedestal clamp system.
Dual Video Inputs, Sync Input. Separate loop-thru video inputs/outputs are provided for two separate video sources. These may be switched either from the front panel, or from an external remote control switch ( customer provided) connected to the remote terminal on the rear panel.
A loop-thru input is also provided for Ext Sync. Termination ( 75 ohm) are provided for all loop-thru inputs.
Pulse Cross, Under Scan, Blue Check. The pulse cross switch shifts sync phase so that the blanking portions of the video signal ( horizontal and vertical) can be vlewed on the screen.
For more accurate monitoring, the scan size can be switched to the underscan mode -- either from the front panel, or by remote control. In addition, a blue check circuit facilitates adjustment with a color bar signal.
Metal Cabinet, Compact Size, Rack Mount. The TM-R9U is the most compact 9" studio-type monitor offered ro date. It is housed in a rugged, metal cabinet which can be mounted in a standard 19" rack, usirg the optional RK9U rack mount kit. With this kit, two TM-R9Us can be mounted side by side, or one TM-R9U can be mounted next to a waveform monitor ( by adding the ADP9U adaptor).
LPRICING/,1CCESSORIES
TM-R9U RK-9U
ADP-9U
c· Color Monto,
Rack Mount Kit for TM-R9U Monitor
Rk-9U Adaptor to, Waveform Monitor .
Suggested List Price/
$ 700.00
120.00 95.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Signal: Video x2; VS 1.0V p- por V0.7V p- p (positive). Audio x2; S1-4V p- p or VS 1.0V p-p
Input Impedance: Video signal: 75 ohm or high impedance ( switchable)
External sync: 75 ohm or high ,mpedance ( switchable)
CRT: 9" stripe flat-face sharp-corner mediumhigh resolution tube
Active Screen Size: Horizontal 173 ( 6-13/16") Vertical 136 ( 5-3/8")
Power Supply: AC 420V, 60Hz; 33W ( typical) DC 12V/24V; 26W ( typical)
Dimensions: 8-13/16'W x8-3/4"H x13-5/16"D (223 x222 x348mm) ( except rubber stand, connectors and power plug)
Weight: 238 lbs. ( 10.8kg)
Resolution: More than 310 lines at center
Frequency Response: Up to 5MHz more than -3dB with 100kHz as reference ( including aperture correction)
S/N: Better than 50dB ( except sync noise)
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VM-60
JVC
FEATURES
· 350 Line Resolution · Comb Filter · Two Video Inputs ( loop-through) · 8-Pin EIAJ & BNC Connectors · 4" Round Speaker ( 1channel)
COLOR VIDEO MONITOR TM-2084U
TM-2084U 19" COLOR VIDEO MONITOR
People are increasingly using 1/2" videocassette recorders for applications in which only a few years ago they would have used 3/4" U-format equipment; this is because of the ease of use of 1/2" recorders and the wide range of applications that they are suitable for, achieved with lower running cost and no loss in signal quality. However, the new high-quality multi-function 1/2" equipment uses connectors with a different standard; this is why JVC has developed the TM-2084U, a highperformance 19" video monitor with BNC as well as 8- pin EIAJ input terminals
A special comb filter. Provided in the TM-2084U to separate the chrominance and luminance components more fully for greater detail and better color than a conventional monitor
Two pairs of bridge-connected video input terminals. One pair with BNC terminals and one pair consisting of a BNC terminal for output and an 8-pin EIAJ exclusively for input. Selection between the sources is done using frontpanel pushbuttons with LED indicators showing which input is being used
Bridge-connection of video component. Using both pairs of terminals is possible, with switchable 75 ohm terminal resistors built into the TM2084U; this is convenient, making it possible to connect to a multi-monitor system
Controls are provided. For adjustment of picture snarpness, color density and tint as well as brightness, contrast and V- hold
Suggested List Price $675.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Type: Color Video Monitor
Color System: NTSC system
Power Input: AC 120V, 60Hz
Power Consumption: Max. 108W; Avg. 82W
CRT Dimensions: 19" diagonally measured
Audio Output: 3W
Speaker: 4" ( 10cm) round type x1
Input A Terminal: Video terminal ( BNC-type) x2
Signal level/1.G./ p- p, 75 ohms
Audio terminal ( RCA-type) x2 Signal level/390 mV rms (-6dBs), high impedance
Input BTerminal: Video terminal ( BNC-type) x1
Signal level/1.G/ p-p, 75 ohms
Audio terminal ( RCA-type) x1 Signal level/390 mV rms (-6dBs), high impedance
VTR terminal ( EIAJ 8-pin) x1
Video signal level/1.0V p- p, 75 ohms Audio signal level/775 mV rms (OdBs), high impedance
Exterior Dimensions: Width 20-5/8" ( 52.2cm) Depth 10-1/4" ( 48.8cm) Height 19-1/8" ( 48.3cm) including legs Weight: 53.1 lbs. ( 24.1kg)
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 (800) JVC-5825 VM-61
JVC
FEATURES
· 14" Flat Face, In- Line Sharp Corner Picture Tube
· 2Composite Video Inputs (BNC Loop Thru)
· Separate RGB Analog Inputs (BNC Loop Thru)
· Under Scan · Notch Filter with On/Off Switch · Internal/External Sync · Color/B & W Switch · 400 Line Horizontal Resolution . Remote Control Function . Tally Light on Front Panel · Degaussing Switch on Front Panel · Comb Filter · Metal Cabinet ( Rack Mount Option)
COLOR VIDEO MONITOR TM-R14U
TM-R14U
TM-R14U 14" COLOR VIDEO MONITOR
The TM-R14U is a compact, high quality multi-function color video monitor designed for a wide variety of broadcast and professional applications. It's two composite video inputs and RGB analog inputs allow it to be connected to almost any video installation.
Excellent Picture Quality. The TM-R14U utilizes aflat face, in-line sharp corner CRT with a dot pitch of 0.43mm for exceptional resolution. Picture sharpness is further assured through the use of a high quality comb filter which separates luminance and chrominance components. A notch filter ( switchable) effectively eliminates chrominance interference, thus further improving picture quality. Horizontal resolution is greater than 400 IV lines.
RGB And Composite Video Inputs. Two pairs of loop-thru composite video inputs are provided, each with 75 ohm termination switches. In addition, noncomposite analog inputs are provided for the individual red, green, and blue channels using BNC connectors. Signals from many graphics units and threetube color cameras may be connected to the RGB inputs. When viewing composite video signals, the color circuits can be de-selected with the Color/B & W switch
Internal/External Sync. A BNC connector is provided for an external sync signal. (External sync must be used in the RGB mode.) Switching between internal and external sync can be done either from the front panel, or remote control ( not included).
SPECIFICATIONS
Underscan, Blue Check For more accurate monitoring, the scan size can
be switched to the underscan mode -- either from the front panel, or by remote control. ( Remote control not included.) In addition, a blue check circuit allows viewing of only the blue portion of the
composite signal. This is useful when adjusting the monitor with a color bar signal.
Not
Available At Press Time
Remote Control Function. A multi-pin (XLR-type) connector is provided on rear panel for connecting an external remote control unit. Many front panel switches ( input sele, int/ext sync,
notch, color on/off, blue check, scan size) can be remotely controlled by contact closures through this connector. (Remote control unit is not included.)
Metal Cabinet, Rack Mount Option. The TM-R14U is housed in a very compact, rugged, metal cabinet which can be mounted in a standard 19" rack, using an optional rack mount kit. AC power connections are made using a detachable grounded power cord.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA, Professional Video Communications Division, 41 Slater Drive, Elmwood Park, NJ 07407 ( 201) 794-3900 ( 800) JVC-5825 VM-62
KLOSS VIDEO CORPORATION
640 Memorial Drive
Cambridge, MA 02139
(617) 577-1000 Telex 951948
VIDEO PROJECTORS
WIRELESS INFRARED REMOTE CONTROL
NOVABEAM R MODEL ONE RECEIVER/MONITOR Includes Tuner, Remote Control
61 /2 'Curved Screen Projector 10' Flat Screen Projector 15' Flat Screen Projector
Screen Included
Yes No No
Floor Standing
$ 3800.00 $ 4000.00 $ 4550.00
Ceiling Mount
$ 4300.00 S4500.00 $ 4850.00
NOVABEAM RMODEL ONE MONITOR ONLY
Without Tuner, w/ Vinyl Walnut Cabinet
Screen Included
Floor Standing
Ceiling Mount
61 /2 'Curved Screen Projector
Yes
10' Flat Screen Projector
No
15' Flat Screen Projector
No
$3500.00 $3700.00 $4300.00
$3800.00
$4000.00 $4600.00
NOVABEAM . MODEL ONE
Receiver/ Monitor
The Novabea m Model One-A Receiver/Monitor, like aconventional TV set, comes with abuilt-in television tuner for off-air reception. Digital push-button selection of 105 UHF and VHF channels with random access is provided on the projector, along with all the usual color TV controls. In addition, awireless infrared remote control lets you select individual channels, scan through them all, adjust volume, and turn the set on and off from your favorite viewing position.
Direct audio and video inputs are provided for two additional video program sources, while a third can be connected to the antenna terminals as with aconventional TV set ( aconvenient switch on the control panel lets you select among them). Audio and video outputs are provided for recording, as is avolume-controlled audio output that lets you play the sound of your video program sources through your stereo system if you prefer. To receive TV broadcasts, you connect your 75 or 300 ohm antenna to the projector as you would to any TV set.
Monitor
The Novabeam , Model One- A Monitor is ideal if you already have, or are planning, asystem of several individual video components. It does not have abuilt-in TV tuner, letting you use the tuner built into your VCR, or a separate component tuner such as our T-1 or T-2, for off- air reception. That's not only flexible and convenient; it can save you money as well.
With the Model One-A Monitor, all controls and direct video and audio jacks for two video sources are located on a separate Video Control Center, rather than on the projector itself ( inputs for athird source are provided on the projector). That lets you place the Control Center wherever it's most convenient, such as next to your other video components, and you'll never have to touch the projector. Because your video sources connect to the Control Center, there's only one cable connecting to the projector. And you can, if you wish, play the sound of your video sources through your stereo system.
Accessories
Wall Mount Brackets for 61 /2 'Curved Screen
Curved 61 /2 'Screen (for ceiling mount) . T-1 Tuner w/Remote Control ...... ..
Remote Extension Cable .. .
pair S 20.00
360.00 250.00
45.00
(plus S1 . 50/ft.)
Screen Legs .
pair 40.00
NOTE: Custom Wall Mounting & Ceiling Installation Additional.
Features & Specifications
PROJECTION SYSTEM Three Novatronn projection tubes with f/0.7 reflective optics; magnetic focusing for ultra- sharp detail. Total light output, 200 lumens.
PROJECTOR SIZE 27.5W x22"D x18.5"H ( 70 x56 x47 cm).
SOUND SYSTEM Built-in wide-range loudspeaker with equalized power amplifier. May be bypassed when separate stereo system is used.
CIRCUITRY All solid-state with comb filter for highest picture resolution.
PICTURE CONTROLS Color, Tint, Brightness, Contrast, Detail ¡aperture correction).
SPECIAL CONTROLS Built-in test pattern generator and easy- to- operate controls let you adjust convergence of the Novatron tubes in seconds.
POWER REQUIREMENTS 100W, 120VAC, 60Hz
6.5' HIGH- GAIN SCREEN Projection surface: 65"W x47"H x6.5' diagonal measure ( 165 x63 x198 cm diagonal measure). Total height including legs supplied: 72" ( 183 cm). May be wall- mounted.
WEIGHT Projector 122 lbs. ( 55.34 kg), packed for shipping; 107 lbs. (48.53 kg) net. 6.5' High-Gain Screen: 50 lbs. ( 23 kg) packed for shipping; 41 lbs. ( 19 kg) net.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-63
KLOSS VIDEO CORPORATION
640 Memorial Drive Cambridge, MA 02139 (617) 577-1000 Telex 951948
LARGE SCREEN PROJECTOR/TUNER
KLOSS NOVABEAM MODEL TWO WITH CURVED SCREEN
Novabeam RModel Two Portable Projection Monitor
Model Two Portable Projection Monitor comes complete with a separate 5' diagonal- measure high gain projection screen. The new two-piece system provides the brightest picture ever in Novabeam projection television, and has been designed specifically for use in well- lit surroundings.
The Model Two curved screen system consists of an ultra- compact video projection monitor essentially identical in form, size and function to the original Model Two video projection monitor, and a separate curved 5' screen for wall mounting ( floor standing legs are available at extra cost). Where the original Model Two was designed to project a picture directly on awhite wall or conventional fat screen for viewing in subdued room lighting, and thus minimize the impact of projection TV on the viewer's living space, the new system uses aseparate high gain screen to provide an ultra bright picture in environments where lighting cannot be easily controlled. The high brightness combined with the screen's ambient light rejection properties means the picture can be viewed without significant loss of contrast in surprisingly well- lit environments. Since the difference between this Model Two and the original version are the tubes' field of focus, aspecific projector must be ordered. They are not interchangeable $ 2800.00
Model Two 5' Curved Screen
The Novabeam Model Two curved system's ultra bright picture results from its combination of 5' picture size, the high gain screen, and the high light output of the three tube Novatrong projection technology featured in all of Kloss Video's Novatron projection systems. In addition to its picture brightness, the system can fit with ease into awide variety of viewing environments. Both screen and projector are of a manageable size, the projection distance (four feet) is comparatively short, and the ultra compact portable projector can be tucked out of the way against the wall when not in use and easily realigned by use of a unique system of crossfiring light beams. Yet it provides atruly big, 5' picture with an unparalleled combination of brightness and clarity, all at unprecedented low cost.
The Novabeam Model Two curved screen system is amonitor design, without tuner, allowing the viewer to choose from a wide range of
programming sources and accessories. Controls and program source inputs, like all Novabeam monitor sets, are provided on aseparate Video Control Center which can be located wherever convenient. Only one
cable connects the projection monitor to the control center, which features a full range of controls including contrast, brightness, color,
tint, detail, video source selection, power, volume and convergence testing.
diPP Novabeam and Novatron are registered trademarks of Kloss Video Corporation.
Model T-1 Component TV Tuner With Remote Control
The Model T-1 Tuner is ahigh performance, 105 channel component TV tuner, perfect for use with Novabeam projection monitors or other
high quality monitors. It is supplied cable- ready, has amultiplex output and comes complete with an infrared remote control unit that features volume level adjustments as well as channel selection and scanning. The LED channel readout is bright and easy to read.
Dimensions -11 1 /2 "W x3"H x9"D. Weight: 7lbs., 4 ozs. (approx.).
Remote Control (Transmitter)
The Remote Control features Power ON/OFF, Direct channel selection
by 10- key keypad, Channel search Up/Down selection, Volume
Up/Down control and Audio Mute. Range of operation: 25 feet or more.
Uses two ( 2) size AAA 1.5V batteries ( 5-1/16"L x2-1/4"W x5/8"D).
Weight: 3.17 ozs.
S250.00
Model T-2 140 Ch. Component TV Tuner
S300.00
VIA-64
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
KLOSS VIDEO CORPORATION
640 Memorial Drive Cambridge, MA 02139 (617) 577-1000 Telex 951948
VIDEO PROJECTORS
VIDEOBEAM MODEL 2000
VIDEOBEAM' HIGH RESOLUTION, HIGH DEFINITION, 6.5' PROFESSIONAL VIDEO PROJECTOR
High resolution video projection monitor system specifically for the high quality display of computer generated color graphics and other video information. Featuring RGB inputs and high resolution, high- definition optics and electronics, the new VIDEOBEAM' Model 2000 is atwo piece projection system capable of reproducing 132 characters per line complete with a6.5' diagonal measure high gain screen for professional applications.
To provide a large, 22 square foot display unmatched in sharpness and clarity, the VIDEOBEAM Model 2000 employs aspecially refined, high resolution version of the Novatron projection tube technology designed and manufactured by Kloss Video for its Novatron projection television systems.
The high light output of the special Novatron projection
tubes, ultra small high definition spot size, high resolution
optics, and optimized video circuitry all combine to result in
aunique combination of resolution, definition, and display
brightness. A high gain 6.5' screen which rejects ambient
light is supplied so that the display can be viewed without
having to darken the room. Because a composite video
input is supplied as well as RGB inputs, virtually any high
quality video source can be used with the VIDEOBEAM
Model 2000.
$ 6000.00
VIDEOBEAMTN is atrademark of Kloss Video Corporation. Novatron and Novabeam are registered trademarks of Kloss Video Corporation.
NOVABEAIVI - MODEL TWO, WITH CEILING MOUNT
NOVABEAM MODEL TWO CEILING MOUNT PROJECTION TV
The ceiling mount version projects a5'4 - diagonal- measure picture directly onto aplain white wall or conventional flat projection screen. Unlike the original Model Two, which sits on the floor in front of the projection surface, the Model Two ceiling mount's ultra compact projector comes complete with the hardware necessary to mount the projector up out of the way on the ceiling. Thus the Novabeam Model Two ceiling mount takes up no floor space, and impacts less overall than any other system on the viewer's living space.
The new Novabeam Ceiling Mount, like the original floor
standing model, is amonitor design without tuner, allowing
the viewer to choose from awide range of program sources
and accessories. All controls and program source inputs are
provided on separate video control center which can be
located wherever convenient. In addition to the savings
entailed by the monitor design, the cost of the new Model
Two ceiling mount is kept low by its requiring no special
screen, and by the manufacturing efficiency of Kloss
Video's own highly automated Novatron projection tube
facility.
$ 3000.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change WithoJt Notice.
VM-65
LEADER INSTRUMENTS
380 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 231-6900 TVVX 510-227-9669
CORP.
OSCILLOSCOPES
LBO- 516
LBO- 513A 15 MHz, Single Trace, 1mV Sensitivity LBO- 514A 15 MHz, Dual Trace, 1mV Sensitivity
The single trace LBO- 513A and the dual trace LBO- 514A are compact 5- inch oscilloscopes that offer maximum performance at low cost.
Equipped with both vertical and horizontal magnifiers, they have 1- mV sensitivity with X5 magnification and amaximum sweep speed of 0.1 ms/cm ( 0.2 s/ cm to 0.5msec in 18 calibrated steps plus X5 magnification). Rise time of both oscilloscopes is 23 ns with normal and automatic, + or - triggering. The LBO- 514 provides both chop and alternate dual trace displays.
The model LBO-514AP is available with ahigher intensity CRT and internal graticule.
LBO- 513A LBO- 514A
$470.00 595.00
LBO-516 100 MHz, Dual Time Base
The Dual Time Base Oscilloscope LBO- 516 features full three channel capability, alternate triggering for simultaneous display of two asynchronous signals, alternate time base and eight trace capability. Excellent triggering sensitivity, along with HF reject, video sync separators, alternate channel triggering and trigger slope and level controls with
preset make obtaining ajitter-free display asimple task. The LBO-516 also features variable trigger holdoff, line triggering for observation of line related signal components and auto, normal and single sweep modes. The vertical input section of this scope offers 500 uV sensitivity, and add, subtract and X-Y modes. The dome mesh PDA CRT with 20 kV/2 kV accelerating potential provides abright, crisp trace, even at high sweep rates. And, aCH- 1output is provided on the front panel so that an additional instrument, such as afrequency counter, may be easily connected.
LBO-516
$ 1395.00
LBO-518 100 MHz, Four Channel, Dual Time Base
The LBO- 518 is aversatile 100 MHz quad channel alternate time base
oscilloscope. It features front panel four channel operation, individual or simultaneous display of main and delayed time bases and alternate channel triggering for simultaneous viewing of asynchronous signals.
Separate, independent comprehensive triggering facilities for both main and delayed time bases include HF reject, LF reject, video sync separator, alternate channel triggering and trigger level control with preset. Also included are variable trigger hold- off, line triggering and auto, normal and single sweep modes.
A dome mesh PDA CRT with 20 KV accelerating potential allows critical observation of fast rise time signals at low repetition rates,
events which are often difficult to observe due to limited trace intensity.
The vertical input section features 0.5 mV sensitivity, a 20 MHz bandwidth limiter, beam finder and add/subtract modes. Even with all these capabilities, the LBO-518 is still small enough to stow under your airline seat!
LBO-518
$2050.00
LBO- 518
LBO- 524/5241_
LBO-522 20 MHz, Dual Trace, 0.5mV Sensitivity
The LBO- 522 is an economical 20 MHz oscilloscope versatile enough
for almost any lab or field work within its frequency range. The input sensitivity of 0.5 millivolts allows observation of extremely low level signals easily on its 8 x 10 cm rectangular CRT equipped with an
internal graticule. Alternate triggering provides astable display of two waveforms, unrelated in frequency, simultaneously. The unit features
afull range of triggering controls including HFreject to filter unwanted noise from the display and line triggering for the observation of line frequency related signal components. A CH- 1rear panel output is standard which permits using the LBO- 522 as asensitive, accurate pre-amplifier to drive other less sensitive instruments. The units
"human engineered" front panel ensures easy, error- free operation.
LBO-522
$695.00
LBO- 523 40 MHz, Dual Trace 0.5mV Sensitivity
The LBO- 523 is a40 MHz oscilloscope economically designed for ap-
plications requiring medium bandwidth and extensive triggering facilities where costly features such as delayed sweep and signal delay lines are impractical. Trigger controls include variable hold- off, alternate channel triggering, HF reject, vertical and horizontal TV coupling and line source triggering. The vertical input sensitivity of
0.5mV, add and subtract modes and aCH- 1output connector add to the unit's total capability. Complex waveforms can be viewed easily even at highest sweep rates without readjusting the front panel controls due to its bright PDA CRT with 7KV accelerating potential and an auto focus feature. The LBO- 523 is well suited for many design, production, repair and educational test requirements.
LBO-523
$895.00
LBO- 524/5241 40 MHz, Dual Trace Dual Time Base
The LBO- 524 is designed to meet a broad range of applications in design, testing and servicing of both analog and digital circuits and
equipment. Its large 8x10 cm PDA CRT provides sharp bright displays
even at highest sweep rates. Comprehensive triggering controls including holdoff, alternate triggering and delayed sweep triggered
functions permit stable displays for even the most complex signals. With 0.5 millivolt sensitivity, extremely low level signals can easily be
observed. A channel 1output is available on the rear panel to drive other less sensitive instruments such as afrequency counter with an input level as low as 500 microvolts. The dual time base permits
accurate observation and time interval measurements of complex waveforms. The Model LBO-524L is also equipped with signal delay
lines to allow observation of pre- trigger information.
1.130-524 190-5241
$ 996.00 1050.00
VM-66
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LEADER INSTRUMENTS
380 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 231-6900 TVVX 510-227-9669
CORP.
OSCILLOSCOPES
LBO- 5251
LBO- 525L 50- MHz TWO CHANNEL DUAL TIME BASE
The LBO- 525L is asimple- to- operate 50 MHz two channel oscilloscope that still offers all of the flexibility and advanced features required for critical applications.
The LBO- 525L has atrue calibrated delayed time base with both run after A and trigger after A modes for jitter-free operation. 500 0/ maxi-
mum sensitivity and 20 ns maximum sweep speed allow analysis of low
level and high frequency signals, while still offering amaximum input rating of 600 V ( DC plus AC peak).
The LBO- 525L has an illuminated internal graticule for precise mea-
surements and photography and 12 KV CRT accelerating potential for maximum trace intensity even when observing transients at high sweep speeds.
LBO- 525L
$ 1195.00
LBO-308S/308PL 20 MHz, DUAL TRACE, 3" PORTABLE
The LBO- 308S and 308PL deliver " lab performance" in a compact package that's perfect for field work. Its broad range of capabilities in-
clude 2- mV sensitivity, 17.5 ns rise time, X-Y operation with full sensitivity, and add/subtract modes not normally available in oscilloscopes of this size. It may be operated from either 115/230 VAC, 50-60
Hz, 12 VDC or a 1.5- hour battery pack ) LBO- 308S only). The battery pack mounts internally and is automatically charged whenever the unit is connected to asource of AC power. The 3- inch rectangular CRT has an internal graticule. The LBO-308S and 308PL have 18 calibrated sweep rates with a X5 magnifier ( 0.1 ps/div. max) and calibrated
12- step attenuators. A rugged, compact scope with performance unsurpassed in its price range.
The model LBO-308PL offers a higher intensity CRT for viewing narrow pulses at low repetition rates and contains signal delay lines which permit viewing the leading edges of pulses.
LBO- 308S 1B0- 308P1
$ 950.00 1195.00
LBO- 310A 4- MHz RECURRENT SWEEP
The LBO- 310A is acompact, general purpose instrument designed to provide long, reliable service in production test, repair, and educational applications. Its simple front panel with aminimum of controls makes it ideal for use by production personnel, students, and nontechnical operators. Its low cost opens up many applications where waveform monitoring might otherwise be economically prohibitive. Sensitivity is 20 mV/division. Sweep frequencies range from 10 Hz to 100 kHz.
LBO- 310A
$ 305.00
LB0-51MA
LBO- 310A
LOC-7005
OSCILLOSCOPE CALIBRATOR
The LOC-7005 is an oscilloscope calibrator which combines the functions most needed to test, repair, and calibrate oscilloscopes into one compact instrument. The LOC-7005 provides three outputs: ·An amplitude output to calibrate the vertical axis of an oscilloscope.
It provides a . 25m V-100 V square wave in a 1-2.5-5 step sequence. Output frequencies are 100 Hz, 1kHz and 10 kHz with a100 ns rise time. ·Atime marker output to calibrate the time base ( sweep speed) of an oscilloscope. The marker interval is from 0.05 ps-i sin a1-2-5 step sequence at 0.1 V p- p.
·A fast rise time square wave tc check the pulse response and rise time of an oscilloscope. The rise time of the square wave is less than 3ns at amplitudes of 20 mV, 40 mV or 80 mV. The output frequency is 100 kHz.
The LOC-7005's small size and ve-satility make it the ideal instrument for service and calibration facilities which must maintain their own field service and general purpose oscilloscopes.
LOC-7005
$ 1395.00
LBO -51MA X-Y DISPLAY MODULE
The LBO-51MA features alarge 8x10cm aluminized, post deflection acceleration CRT for a bright trace. An internal 8 x 10 graticule is optional. Input sensitivity is adjustable from 50 to 150mV / cm and the X and Y axis bandwidth is 3MHz (-3dB). The input coupling ( AC or DC) and polarity can be selected by internal switches. The Z-axis (intensity modulation) input has a bandwidth of 4 MHz, producing clear alphanumeric displays.
In its standard configuration, the LBO-51MA is designed for half- rack
mounting and includes front panel controls for power, intensity, focus
and horizontal and vertical position. Screwdriver adjustments are
provided for vertical and horizontal gain, astigmatism and trace
rotation. Special configurations are available with provisions for
user- supplied controls, custom external graticules, other CRT phosphors, higher or lower input deflection factors, and other
modifications to accommodate particular user requirements.
LBO-51MA
$ 995.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-67
LEADER INSTRUMENTS CORP.
380 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788
1516) 231-6900 TVVX 510-227-9669
TEST EQUIPMENT
LBO- 5860A
LBO -5860A/L WAVEFORM MONITOR
The LBO- 5860A / LWaveform Monitor permits displaying the Vertical Interval Test and Reference Signals by afront panel line selector. Lines 14 through 21 (" A" model) or lines 7through 21 (" L" model) can be selected from field one or two without interference from the active portion of the video signal, afeature normally available only on more expensive, full rack mount units. The instrument also has a blanking output to blank the companion Vectorscope during the active portion
of the video signal, allowing differential gain and phase measurements to be accomplished easily. The CRT features an internal graticule and 7KV accelerating potential for bright, easy- to- read displays. Total RGB and YRGB ( YR GB optional) capability is available and horizontal sweep speeds of 2H ( 2line), 1u/div ( expanded 2line), 2V ( 2fields) and 2V MAG ( expanded 2fields) are standard. The LBO-5860A/L is half rack mountable and can be rack mounted side by side with the LVS-5850B Vectorscope. The LBO- 5860A / Lis also available in aPAL/ SECAM version, the LBO- 5861A.
LBO- 5860A NTSC ( Lines 14-21 Line Select) LBO- 5860L NTSC ILines 7-21 Line Select)
$ 2050.00 2300.00
PAL VECTORSCOPE
Leader also offers a PAL version vectorscope, the LVS-5851A. This unit is suitable for broadcasting PAL systems using 625 horizontal lines (625 H), 50Hz vertical or field rate ( 50 V), 4.43MHz sub- carrier color systems and types B, C, D, G, H, I, and K synchronization standards. This unit is similar to Leader's LVS-5850B NTSC vectorscope, and all
specifications are identical except where noted above.
LVS-5851A
2200.00
LVS-5850B
LBO-5825 DIGITAL STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE
The LBO- 5825 is a versatile 35M Hz, Two- Channel Digital Storage
Oscilloscope. Packed with features that are not normally found on DSOs of its class, it has atrue 5MHz digital sampling rate, allowing
detailed observation of relatively short transients. Also, individual A/ D converters for each channel ensure that apoint- by- point comparision of channels may be made. The 1K word by 2channel memory allows over 1000 points per channel to be stored. The Memory Protect feature
allows storage of reference waveforms. For example, the upper and lower limits of an amplitude adjustment may be stored in memory. Also, abattery back-up of the memory is provided, so the scope may
be transported while retaining the content of the memory for up to two weeks. X-Y recorder outputs are provided for hard copy of waveforms. Up to 9div of pre- trigger view allows observation of critical pretrigger events that often gives clues in determining the causes of transients. The AUTO/ ERASE mode is used so that the screen may be constantly updated, and the ROLL mode provides the 5825 with a chart- recorder capability.
In addition, the LBO- 5825 is aTwo- Channel, 35MHz Real Time Oscillo-
scope. With many of the features of Leader analog Oscilloscopes, its
500 IN sensitivity, coupled with Channel 1 output and complete
triggering facilities allows this scope to be used in anumber of conven-
tional applications. Backed by Leader's outstanding reputation, the
LBO- 5825 is the perfect scope for research and development,
service, and production environments.
LBO- 5825
$ 3850.00
LVS-5850B VECTORSCOPE
The LVS-5850B Vectorscope provides a convenient method for observing and measuring the relative phase and amplitude of chrominance signal components. It utilizes a unique technique which elect-
ronically displays the " inner boxes" which represent error limits of + 2.5° and ± 2.5 IRE units. This improves the accuracy of phase and
amplitude adjustments by eliminating errors due to CRT non -linean ties. The LVS-5850B includes three loop- through inputs including a dedicated external subcarrier reference input which is front panel selectable. Either of the two composite video loop- through inputs can also be selected as the reference signal and all three inputs can be
displayed individually.
The unit is also equipped with aZ-axis blanking input to provide blank-
ing during the active portion of the video signal and unblanking during
the VITS signal for astable, jitter- free display. A test circle pattern is
also selectable for aquick calibration check of the instrument. Another
front panel push button provides for either 100% or 75% amplitude
levels. A gain control, with adetented calibrated position, provides for
continuous amplitude adjustment. A phase control permits rotating
the display through 360°. The LVS-5850B is supplied in a protective
carrying case or in a 1/2" rack width configuration.
LVS-5850B
$ 2050.00
VM-68
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LEADER INSTRUMENTS CORP.
380 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 231-6900 TVVX 510-227-9669
GENERAL PURPOSE ACCESSORIES
LC- 2043 Double banana to BNC. 1rn cable
LC- 2021 Double banana to miniature alligator clips 1m cable
LC- 2022 Double banana to double banana. 1m cable
BNC-BP BNC to single binding post adapter
LT- 2049 BNC 50 f1in- line terminator
LC-2046 BNC to miniature alligator clips 1m 50 II cable
LC.2028 Two single banana plugs to miniature alligator clips
1rn cable
LC·19 AC Current Clamp Adapter For LOM-855. LDM-853A
Measurement Range 0 1-200 A ac.50-60 Hz Accuracy · 3%
LC.2026 BNC to miniature alligator clips tin 75 1/ cable
LC-2027 BNC to BNC 1rn 7511 cable
LP-6 DC High Voltage Probe For Input Resistance 1000 M 1! · 10% Attenuation X1000 · HP. Maximum Input 30 kVdc
LP-117 Three Point Probe For LTC- 906 LTC 906A
LPS-166F AC Adapter For LCD- 397 WM-853A
44,
LPS-169A AC Adapter For LTC-906. LTC- 906A. LCR.740
CC-851 Carrying Case LDM 963A LDC6131 ICG : 197
Model No. LP- 100X
LP- 100X
LP- 050X LP- 050X LP-16BX
LP-16BX LP-17AX
LP-17AX LP- 7X
LP- 11Y LP- 6 LC- 19 LP- 2017 LP- 2011 LP- 2013 LP- 2004A LC- 2016 LC- 2014 LC- 2006 LR-2402 LRA-508
LR-2400A1 LH-2015 LH-2007 LH-2008 CC- 851 LC- 2215 LP- 2054 LPS-166F LPS-169A LC- 2021 LC- 2022 LC- 2026
LC- 2048 LC- 2027 LC- 2028 LC- 2043 BNC-BP LT- 2049 215-U01
ACCESSORIES
100 MHz, X10 Oscilloscope Probe
(6ea.) ( 6Pack)
50 MHz Direct, X10 Oscilloscope Probe (6ea.) ( 6Pack) 40 MHz Direct/Low Cap Oscilloscope Probe
(6ea.) ( 6Pack) 40 MHz X10/X100 Oscilloscope Probe
Price $ 70.00
420.00
50.00 300.00
38.00
228.00 60.00
(6ea.) ( 6Pack) Demodulator/Low Cap Oscilloscope Probe
360.00 19.00
In Circuit Probe for LTC-906, 906A HV Probe for LDM-853A AC Current Clamp Adaptor for LDM-853A Probe Pouch for LBO- 518, 516, 5825 Probe Pouch for LBO- 308S, 308PL Probe Pouch for LBO- 522, 523, 524, 524L, 525L Probe Pouch for LBO- 513A, 514A Front Cover for LBO- 518, 516, 5825 Front Cover for LBO- 513A, 514A, 522, 523, 524, 524L, 525L Front Cover for LBO-308S, 308PL Rackmount for LBO- 518, 516,5825 Rackmount for LBO- 513A, 514A, 522, 523, 524, 524L, 525L
19.00 48.00 40.00 35.00 35.00 25.00 20.00 50.00 40.00 40.00 150.00 85.00
Rackmount for LVS-5850B, 5851A, LBO-5860A/L, 5861A, LBO-51MA, 51MV Viewing Hood for LBO- 518, 516, 522, 523, 524, 524L, 525L, 5860A/ L Viewing Hood for LBO- 513A, 514A Viewing Hood for LBO-308S, 308PL Carrying Case for LDM-853A, LCG-397, LDC-831 Carrying Case for LBO-308S, 308PL Battery Pack for LBO-308S AC Adaptor for LCG-397, LDM-853A ( 5V DC) AC Adaptor for LTC-906, LCR-740 ( 9V DC) Double Banana to Miniature Alligator Clips; 1m Cable Double Banana to Double Banana; 1m Cable BNC to Miniature Alligator Clips; 1m 75 ohm Cable
BNC to Miniature Alligator Clips; 1m 50 ohm Cable BNC to BNC; 1m 75 ohm Cable Two Single Banana Plugs to Miniature Alligator Clips; 1m Cable Double Banana to BNC; 1m Cable BNC to Single Binding Post Adaptor BNC 50 ohm In- Line Terminator Plug- In ROM Unit with Type 2716 ROM for LSG-215A, 216
180.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 9.00 35.00 75.00 8.00 9.00 12.00 9.50 11.00
11.00 12.00 11.00 11.00
7.00 37.00 80.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-69
LEADER INSTRUMENTS CORP.
380 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11787 (516) 231-6900 ( 800) 645-5104
OSCILLOSCOPE GLOSSARY Et SELECTION CHART
Oscilloscope Glossary
Accelerating Potential- The potential applied to the CRT to accelerate the electrons emitted from the cathode. As a general rule, the higher the accelerating
potential, the brighter the display. This is especially important at fast horizontal sweep speeds and multiple traces or to observe rapid transients.
Bandwidth-- The frequency range of signals that an oscilloscope will display with less than a3dB rolloff in amplitude.
Chop-- The Chop function switches the vertical channel input to the CRT. usually at a rate of approximately
Delayed Sweep-- A second time base
(sweep) that can be started after a variable delay from the start of the main (undelayed) time base. This allows any selected portion of the main time base
signal to be expanded and displayed over the entire CRT.
Add, Subtract-- These modes allow the displaying of the algebraic sum or difference of two signals. The subtract mode is especially useful in measuring signals not referenced to ground and elinnating unwanted signals common to both inputs such as hum.
Alternate Channel-- A function that allows more than one channel to be displayed by alternately switching the vertical input to the CRT between two (or more) input channels at the end of each sweep. Used at sweep speeds of 0.2 mS div or faster, this mode will result in aflickering display at slower sweep speeds. In this case, the Chop function should be used.
Alternate Time Base-- A feature that allows the main and delayed time base to be displayed simultaneously.
Alternate Trigger-- Afunction that allows the sweep to be triggered alternately by two different triggers, which, in conjunction with an alternate channel function, allows the display of two signals asynchronous.
Auto Triggering-- A feature that allows the sweep circuit to free run and display abase line in the absence of an input signal. Automatically switches to triggered sweep mode when asignal is applied.
250 kHz, to simultaneously display more than one channel. Used for sweep speeds of 0.5 mS div or slower, the alternate channel function should be used at faster sweep speeds.
Common Mode Rejection-- The attenuation of acommon signal ( in dB) that appears between the signal high input and ground and the low input and ground.
Coupling-- The manner in which a signal or trigger is connected to the oscilloscope's internal circuitry. DC coupling allows all components of the signal to pass: AC coupling blocks any DC component. HF reject and LE reject insert high or low frequency rejection filters in the input circuitry.
Deflection Coefficients ( Sensitivity) --The signal amplitude required for a vertical deflection of 1division; adjusted by the vertical volts division control. Sensitivity is the smallest amplitude signal that yields one major division of deflection.
Delay. Signal-- The amount of time (usually nanoseconds) between the beginning of the horizontal sweep and the vertical input signal; allows viewing of pre- trigger phenomena. This is accomplished by inserting adelay line in the signal channel.
Dual Time Base-- A feature that allows the sweep speeds of the two calibrated time bases to be set independently.
Graticule--A grid or scale either etched or overlayed on the CRT face for making amplitude and frequency measurements. An internal, illuminated graticule is parallax-free and required for precise measurements. It is also ideal for photography.
Hold-Off-- Allows the operator to choose, by altering the dead time between the end of one horizontal sweep and the start of the next, on which trigger to synchronize in acomplex trigger signal.
Jitter, Delay Time-- The term used for describing the horizontal instability of awaveform displayed in the delayed sweep mode.
Lisajous Pattern-- This pattern results when using external horizontal and vertical input signals in the X-Y mode. When the X and Y input controls are properly adjusted, the size and shape of the pattern allows phase shift to be measured.
Rise Time-- The time it takes for an oscilloscope display to rise from 10% to 90% of the amplitude of an applied step voltage.
Oscilloscope Selection Chart
Trigger-- The signal that starts the horizontal sweep. The trigger can be either derived from the vertical input
MODEL LBO- 518
100MHz 4
LBO-516 100MHz 3
LE10-525L
50MHz 2
ue.524
LEO 5241 L80-523
35MHz 2 35MHz 2
L130-3088 20MHz 2
L80-3081eL 20MHz 2
LBO- 522
20MHz 2
/ree 44,sfe .
ede
8 8cm x10cm
0V 20kV
2ons · · · · · · e
`Zr
o
Qeq
e·t·oe,
e20ns· 8 o,v · 2 Sans 10cm' 2Idte
r
20kV 12kV
20'ns
e
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
· 8cm xl0cm. 25
dlv
7kV
· , 4,,,,s 2 8c,nxbocmi edn.:
dlv
7kV
· 2 Ban e· 1°nm 2Osm, 7kV 1.5kv · 2 4,,dd,xdcd,I00ns
· ·
e ·
·
·
2 48cm x6cm e s' 2cmlZ. 2 8cm xlOcrn 4t e
· t" · 2kV
2ene
·
·
LBO- 513A LBO- 514A LEI0-310A
I5MHz 1 15MHz 2 IMHz 1
1
8c x10r cm n 1'ed' inv e
ImV div
1.8 kV
2 8cm xl0cm 1ed,ve. lmV , 18kV
4.8 crnx 6.0 cm
.e 1ys
div
t26V
signal or from avariety of external sources, either directly or harmonically related to the vertical input signal frequency.
Trigger View-- A function that displays the signal being used for triggering the sweep.
TV- H, TV- V Triggering- Coupling modes that insert sync separators in the trigger circuitry to allow triggering at the vertical or horizontal sync rates of acomposite video signal.
X-Y Mode-- Instead of using the oscilloscope's internal circuitry to generate the horizontal sweep signal, an external signal is applied. This allows phase and swept frequency response measurements to be made.
Z- Axis Modulation- Also known as intensity modulation, an externally applied signal is used to blank or intensify the trace.Typically used in video applications, in the X-Y mode, for time or frequency marking.
VM-70
Prices and Specifications Sub ect to Change Without Notice.
LENCO, INC., ELECTRONICS DIVISION
300 North Maryland St Jackson, MO 63755 (314) 243-3147 ( 800) 325-8494 TVVX 910-760-1382
COLOR MONITORS
MODEL ICM-214
200 SERIES COLOR VIDEO MONITORS The Lenco 1CM NTSC color monitors are compact, stable studio monitors. They are designed for applications where a high quality monitor is needed and the expense of a calibrated test monitor is not justified. The latest technological design concepts using the modern PIL tube and discrete regulated high voltage power supply make these color monitors ideal for the broadcast, teleproduction and industrial markets.
The I.C. M. Series of color monitors have been engineered to exact specifications for performance and stability. The design criterion was to provide a high quality monitor for applications that do not require a calibrated test monitor. The design concept of this monitor makes it avery universal device for the broadcast, teleproduction and industrial environment. Many of the features found in the ICM-214 and the ICM-219 color monitors center around the CRT. The ICM color monitors incorporate both 14" and 19" black matrix slot mask Precision -ln -Line ( PM tubes. Excellent resolution and simplified convergence are achieved with the use of this tube. Convergence controls, convergence amplifiers and a built-in cross hatch generator are eliminated by using the PIL tube. The CRT is capable of displaying awhite window with amaximum usable brightness of 100 foot candles with aone volt peak- to- peak input signal.
The semi- modular design of the ICM color monitor series is constructed around six modules: horizontal and vertical sweep, low and high voltage power supplies, decoder and the video amplifier. Horizontal and vertical sweep and the low and high voltage power s, ,pplies are the same design as the modu1es used in Lerco's , trofessional calibrated color monitors. The NTSC decoder used in the monitor has a decoding error of less than 21½. This decoder coupled with a video amplifier that is mounted directly on the CRT provides excellent frequency response, resolution and a distortion free display. All of these combinations allow the
MODEL ICM-219
picture to be viewed without masking any distortions or
noise. The ICM series of color monitors use a discrete non- scan derived high voltage power supply. An unregulated DC voltage of approximately 34 volts DC enters the high voltage unit and outputs a regulated 25 KV supply for the CRT. With this power supply, raster size will change less than 1% of picture height from 0% to 100% APL at 35 foot candles. This ultra stable high voltage is independent of horizontal
and vertical sweep, but with the loss of either sweep will shut off the high voltage unit and protect the CRT.
The quality of the color monitor starts at the inputs to the monitor where differential amplifiers are incorporated for maximum hum rejection. Other features of the monitor are automatic degauss, adjustable underscan and internal/external sync selection. Each time the monitor is turned on, the degaussing circuit is automatically activated to remove any built-up magnetic field on the CRT. Sufficient range was built into the horizonta1 and vertical size controls to produce afully overscanned or underscanned display. An easy access internal/external sync selector switch is located on the rear panel of the monitor.
The 200 Series color monitors carry the Lenco two year warranty with the exception of the picture tube. The CRT has a one year warranty.
The cabinets were carefully selected for a modern and an aesthetically pleasing look. The tube mask around the tube is flat black for minimum screen reflection.
200 Series Equipment
ICM-214-6
14" Color Monitor with 2 NTSC Inputs
and Adjustable Underscan. . 61mm Slot
Mask CRT
$1,700.00
ICM-219-6
19" Color Monitor with 2 NTSC Inputs
and Adjustable Underscan. . 61mm Slot
Mask CRT
$1,900.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-71
LENCO, INC., ELECTRONICS DIVISION
300 North Maryland St Jackson, MO 63755 (314) 243-3147 ( 800) 325-8494 TWX 910-760-1382
COLOR MONITORS
PCM-514
500 SERIES EQUIPMENT PROFESSIONAL COLOR VIDEO MONITORS
The Lenco PCM-500 Series NTSC/RGB color monitors are compact, stable master studio monitors. They are designed to meet or exceed the most demanding of professional broadcast and teleproduction requirements.
These monitors are manufactured to the latest state of the art design using the modern PIL tube to meet the high standards fcr performance and stability. The Precision In- Line Gun ( PILI cathode ray tube has several advantages over the Delta-gun tube. The simplified convergence adjustments required with the PIL tube enhances the reliability and reduces the maintenance time of the monitor. The PCM-500 Series monitors, using the modern PIL tube, are ideal test instruments in the studio for adjusting cameras to prevent subtle changes in color scene content when switching from one camera to another.
PROFESSIONAL 14" COLOR MONITORS
The Lenco PCM-514 NTSC/RGB Color Monitor is acompact, stable, master studio monitor designed to meet or exceed the most demanding signal evaluation in broadcast and teleproduction. This monitor is also an ideal unit for instrumentation and for VTR monitor bridge applications.
Lenco color monitors are manufactured to the latest state of the art design using the modern PIL tube to meet todays high performance and stability standards. Due to the simplified convergence, enhanced reliability and reduced maintenance time of this PIL monitor, the PCM-514 becomes an ideal test instrument to adjust cameras and to prevent subtle color scene changes when switching between cameras.
Since required vertical rack space is only 10.5 inches, this monitor will ideally fit the overhead bridge of a VTR.
PCM-514-4 NTSC and RGB Color Monitor with Pulse Cross
and Underscan, Standard CRT is . 41mm Dot Mask
Matrix
$3990.00
PCM-519 SERIES AND PCM-522
The Lenco PCM-519 Series NTSC/RGB cokor monitors are compact, stable master studio monitors. They are designed to meet or exceed the most demanding of professional broadcast and teleproduction requirements.
These monitors are manufactured to the latest state of the art design using the modern PIL tube to meet the high standards for performance and stability. The Precision In- Line gun IPIL) cathode ray tube has several advantages over the Delta- gun tube. The simplified convergence adjustments required with the PIL tube enhance the reliability and reduces the maintenance time of the monitor. The PCM-519 monitors are available with 0.4mm dot matrix Cri as well as a0.6mm slot mask matrix CRT. The PCM-522 is available with a 0.6mm slot mask matrix CRT only. These monitors using the modern PIL tube are an ideal test instrument in the studio for adjusting cameras to prevent subtle changes in color scene content when switching from one camera to another.
Model PCM-519 is a cabinet unit that rackmounts in a standard 19" equipment rack simply by adding the optional slides. The PCM-522 is also acabinet unit that can be rackmounted by adding slides, but it will require a22" equipment rack. Tube description for the required CRT is available on the back page of the specification sheet.
PROFESSIONAL 19" COLOR MONITORS
PCM-519-4 NTSC and RGB Color Monitor with Underscan.
Standard CRT is . 41mm Dot Mask Matrix.
$5485.00
PROFESSIONAL 22" COLOR MONITORS
Model PCM-522 is acabinet unit that could be rackmounted by adding slides, but it would require a22" equipment rack.
PCM-522
NTSC and RGB Color Monitor with Underscan.
CRT . 61 Slot Mask Matrix
$5200.00
VM-72
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LENCO, INC., ELECTRONICS DIVISION
300 North Maryland St Jackson, MO 63755 (314) 243-3147 ( 800) 325-8494 TVVX 910-760-1382
MONOCHROME MONITORS
PM M-911
PM 1%1 942
=pi
Professional Quality PM M-900 Series Monochrome Monitors
FEATURES:
· Professional Quality ·Modular Construction ·Cross Pulse Option
·900 Lines Resolution
·Underscan Option · Regulated Low and High Voltage
The Lenco PMM-900 Series Monochrome Monitors are the most advanced design of professional monochrome video monitors in the industry. The 900 Series monitor is a high resolution display device
for use in broadcasting, industrial, and educational facilities where quality and reliability are most required.
The 100% modular chassis consists of five individually shielded
circuit modules that plug in directly from the rear of the chassis. This unique and exclusive feature simplifies any required servicing allowing for aminimum of down time. The five plug-in modules are common to all the 900 Series monitors regardless of CRT size.
The PMM-900 Series Video Monitors are designed for continuous operation and to give stable pictures without adjustment. The regulated low and high voltage power supplies maintains constant picture size and brightness with line voltages between 105 and 130 volts AC ( or 210 to 260 volts AC).
The Lenco PMM-900 Series monitor's 900 line center resolution provides outstanding picture clarity which is necessary in most studio and educational facilities. This sharp, bright picture provides excellent viewing even under high ambient lighting conditions. This is extremely important to ensure full details when used in surveillance or observation systems.
Video response is down 3dB at 20 MHz providing for 900 line center and 750 line corner resolution. Differential gain of the video amplifier is less than 5% for 50 volt kinescope drive. Size of the raster can be switched from the front to show all four sides and corners. Optional cross pulse features can be provided to display the sync signals in the picture area for analysis. DC restoration is standard and is switchable on the rear panel.
The PMM-900 Series Video Monitors meet or exceed all EIA RS- 170 specifications and are compatible with 525/60 U.S. and 625/50 CCIR
scan rates.
PMM-920
9" VIDEO MONITORS
PMM-910 Chassis Only PMM-911 Cabinet PMM-912 Dual 9" units, Rackmount PMM-913 Rackmount, Right Side Blank
PMM-914 Rackmount, Left Side Blank PMM-915 Rackmount for TEK 529 or 1480 Right Side
PMM-916 Rackmount for TEK 529 or 1480 Left Side PMM-917 Rackmount for TEK 528 on Right Side
PMM-918 Rackmount for TEK 528 on Left Side
$ 890.00 950.00
1870.00
1015.00 1015.00
1015.00 1015.00 1035.00
1035.00
12" VIDEO MONITORS PMM-920 Chassis Only
PMM-925 Cabinet Slimline
$ 950.00 1040.00
15" VIDEO MONITORS PMM-930 Chassis Only PMM-935 Cabinet PMM-932 Rackmount
19" VIDEO MONITORS PMM-940 Chassis Only PMM-942 Rackmount PMM-945 Cabinet Slimline
MONITOR OPTIONS PMM-001 Module Extender Set ( HV module and
standard module) PMM-004 Rack Mounting Kit for PMM-925 PMM-005 Pulse Cross PMM-006 Underscan PMM-007 Crosstalk Shield Kit for PMM-912 Monitors . PMM-908 Rackmounting Kit for PM M-935
MONITOR REPLACEMENT MODULES
PMM-901 Power Supply/Regulator PMM-902 Video/Sync Amplifier PMM-903 Vertical Deflection PMM-904 Horizontal Deflection PMM-905 High Voltage Supply PMM-906 Vertical Deflection w/ Pulse Cross
S 980.00 1145.00 1065.00
$1125.00 1330.00 1380.00
50.00 60.00 260.00 145.00 85.00 70.00
5165.00 190.00 175.00 165.00 190.00 225.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-73
Lucasey% products for broadcast and video users are constructed of
A SUPERIOR SELECTION OF NON- LOCKING, HEAVY-DUTY CEILING MOUNTS
MODELS CB- M19, CB- M20, CB- M25 This is the top of the Lucasey line-- three models with different size platforms accommodate small,
medium and large monitors. Each may be mounted on permanent ceilings or hung through false ceilings ( mounting escutcheon furnished on an optional/extra basis). Each of the three ceiling mounts offers full 360' swivel and 45 0 tilt for universal viewing. Simple installation and clean- line appearance highlight the many features of these sturdy brackets.
WALL MOUNTS FOR HEAVY LOADS AND TIGHT SPACES
MODEL WB-M25
A tough wall bracket to exceed just about every overload requirement. Simple, positive installation features make this one afavorite with AV service
personnel. Rugged swivel arm engineering.
MODEL WB-S78
Special engineering allows adherence to clearance codes in low ceiling rooms. Easy installation and removal with minimum 61/2 foot clearance assured; fixed tilt and variable swivel make it aperfect choice for modern hospitals.
MODEL CB-M19
Swivel: 360 Tilt: To 45
Color: Chocolate Brown
Material: Heavy Gauge Steel Vertical Dimension: 18"
standard 1" pipe Ceiling Flange: 71 / 2 "diameter;
mounting holes (8); 1" pipe thread Platform Size: 27 1/8"x15 1 / 2 ; 20 1/ 2 "height opening Weight Load: Up to 150 lbs. Non- Locking
Shipping Weight: 31 pounds
MODEL CB- M20
Swivel: 360 Tilt: To 45 Color: Chocolate Brown Material: Heavy Gauge Steel
Vertical Dimension: 18" standard 11/4 "pipe
Ceiling Flange: 71/2 "diameter; sly mounting holes (8); 11/4 "pipe thread
Platform Sze: 25 1/2 "x18 1/2 "; 25 1/2 "height opening
Weight Load: Up to 175 lbs. Non- Locking Shipping Weight: 37 pounds
MODEL CB- M25
Swivel: 360 Tilt: To 45 Color: Chocolate Brown Material: Heavy Gauge Steel
Vertical Dimension: 18" standard 11 /4 "pipe
Ceiling Flange: 71 /2 "diameter; 5'16 " mounting holes ( 8); 11 /4 "pipe thread
Platform Size: 32" x19 1 /2 "; 25 1 /2 "height opening
Weight Load: Up to 175 lbs. Non- Locking Shipping Weight: 42 pounds
MODEL WB-M25
Swivel: 0 to 75 ( side to side) Tilt: 5° ( Fixed) Color: Chocolate Brown Material: Heavy Gauge steel
Projection: 27 1 /4 " (to and of mounting plate)
Knockout Holes: 1 /4 " Wall Plate Size: 10" x18" on
16" hole centers
Platform Size: 32" x19 1 /2 " Weight Load: 170 pounds Non- Locking Shipping Weight: 35 pounds
MODEL WB-S78
Swivel: 0 to 15 ( side to side) Tilt: 10° ( Fixed) Color: Chocolate Brown Material: Heavy Gauge steel Projection: 19 1/2 " ( to end of
mounting plate) Platform Size: 23" x10 1 / 2 " Knockout Holes: 1/4" Weight Load: Up to 100 pounds Non- Locking
Shipping Weight: 13 pounds
$100.40
$125.00
$125.00
$125.00
$52.55
VM-74
2639 East 9th Street. Oakland, CA 94601 1415) 534-1435
heavy gauge steel with baked-on epoxy finish -- atrue, lifetime investment.
The Lucasey Universal Security System is designed around a steel mounting plate with cutout configurations to fit most models. For non- locking requirements, the set is simply attached to the universal plate. To convert to a locking mode, the Lucasey locking kit is available. It includes apin tumbler key, locking plug, and bottom holding plate. The assembled unit hides the mounting screws, blocking access to the mounting plate and receiver by unauthorized personnel.
The Lucasey locking principle is protected under U.S.
Patent Na 3724798
MODEL 707
The pioneer bracket of the Lucasey line permits viewing from anywhere in the room by simply adjusting the clutch control. Platform rotates to a360' swing with the widest angle swivel in the industry. Rugged, durable, tamperproof.
MODEL 1700
The 1700 Series offers fixed tilt in an economical bracket where total security is not requ'red. It fills the need for key controlled, semi- security applications, without sacrificing Lucasey strength, clean- line styling and ease of installation.
MODEL 3100
Lucasey 3100 Series offers clean line styling and positive locking in a television bracket that may be installed quickly and simply. Designed to accommodate large or small sets, these brackets save valuable floor space.
MODEL 7100
This bracket has been designed for and is being used in - modern institutions throughout the country. Lucasey has included all of their exclusive features in the Model 7100 - with load bearing capability to handle the largest color sets.
MODEL 9000
The Lucasey Model 9000 features full swivel, tilt and angle variations to allow viewing from any location in school, hospital or meeting rooms. Simply installed, this versatile unit releases floor and/or wall space for other uses.
MODEL 707
Swivel: 360° Tilt: To 90° Angle: 4- 15° Color: Chocolate Brown Material: Heavy Gauge steel
and die-cast aluminum Projection: 15" Platform Size: 20" x 5" Weight Load: 60 pounds Locking: Five tumbler lock;
keyed alike in singles or masterkeyed Shipping Weight: 18 pounds
$35.55
MODEL 1700 Swivel: 360° Tilt: 15' ( Fixed) Color: Chocolate Brown Material: Heavy Gauge steel Projection: 19 1/2 " Platform Size: 23" x10 1/2 " Weight Load: Up to 100 lbs. Locking: Five tumbler lock;
keyed alike in singles or masterkeyed Shipping Weight: 13 pounds
$44.50
MODEL 3100
Swivel: 360° Color: Chocolate Brown Material: Heavy Gauge steel Projection: 20" Platform Size: 18 1 /2 "x11 1 /2 "
(3100); 15" x12" (3101); 23" x10 1 /2 " (3102) Weight Load: Up to 100 lbs. Locking: Five tumbler lock; keyed alike in singles or masterkeyed Shipping Wt.: 16 lbs. (3100)
13 lbs. (3101) 16 lbs. ( 3102)
$41.70
MODEL 7100
Swivel: 360 Tilt: To 90° Angle: 7.15° Color: Chocolate Brown Material: Heavy Gauge steel
and die-cast aluminum Weight Load: Up to 100 lbs. Projection: 20" Platform Size: 22" x12" Knockout Holes: '4" Locking: Five tumbier lock;
keyed alike in singles or masterkeyed Shipping Weight: 18 pounds
$7520
MODEL 9000
Swivel: 360° Tilt: To 90° Angle: - -t15° Color: Chocolate Brown Material: Heavy Gauge steel Weight Load: Up to 100 lbs. Vertical Dimension Standard
24" and 30" poles avail. Ceiling Flange: 71 /2 "diameter;
51'6"mounting holes (8); 1" pipe thread
Locking (optional): Five tumbler lock; keyed alike in singles or masterkeyed.
Shipping Weight: 17 pounds
$75.20
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-75
M 0 NPO Videotronics 3
619 West 54th Street New York, NY 10019
(212) 708-0560 ( 805) 499-8513
SELF-CONTAINED VHS VIDEO SYSTEMS
VHS 760 and 764 PORTABLE VIDEO SYSTEMS
These fully integrated single unit systems are designed to play or record, utilizing astandard 1/2" videocassette. 3-way power supply makes them especially easy to travel with, and each weighs only 22 lbs. With a 7" diagonal screen mounted above the deck, the new VHS 760 and 764 are convenient for the viewer, as well. They each occupy only 9" of desk space. Although portable, the VHS 760 and 764 offer many functions normally found on a standard size VHS: 2, 4 or 6 hour speeds for record or playback; multiple remote functions; full TV reception and auto rewind. The VHS 764 employs a4- head helical scan providing noiseless and jitter- free still picture and slow-motion special effects. Additional capabilities of both include large screen monitor hookup, RF in, audio/video in and out, and 10- pin camera input. For sales, training or any business travel or office use, the VHS 760 and 764 offer a new combination of lightweight practicality and technical expertise.
SPECIFICATIONS VHS 760 Dimensions:
9" Wide x 12" High x 12" Deep Screen:
7" Diagonal, NTSC Color. Positioned above VHS deck for easy viewing Weight: 22 lbs. Tape System: Rotary 2- head helical scan. Standard VHS 1/2" tape deck Features: Choice of 2, 4or 6hour speeds for record/playback; Auto Rewind; Remote Control; Freeze Frame; Single Frame Advance; Slow Motion 3- Way Power: AC and DC. Battery and auto lighter adaptor available Additional Capabilities: Hookup to large screen monitors. Full TV reception; RF out; Audio/ Video in and out; 10 pin camera input VHS 760 2- Head Rotary Helical Scan.
SPECIFICATIONS VHS 764 Dimensions:
9" Wide x 12" High x 12" Deep
Screen: 7" Diagonal, NTSC Color. Positioned above VHS deck for easy viewing
Weight: 22 lbs. Tape System: Rotary 4- head helical scan. Standard VHS 1 /2 " tape deck Features: Choice of 2, 4or 6hour speeds for record/playback; Auto Rewind; Remote Control Noiseless Special Effects: Freeze Frame; Single Frame Advance; Slow Motion
3-Way Power: AC and DC. Battery and auto lighter adaptor available
Optional: Continuous run switch
Additonal Capabilities: Hookup to large screen monitors. Full TV reception; RF out; Audio/ Video in and out; 10 pin camera input
VHS 764 4- Head Rotary Helical Scan.
ACCESSORIES: V-68 Battery Pack
12 volt 4 amp hour lead acid rechargeable battery. Clips on back of VHS 760/764, when attached fits in carrying cover. Approximate running time, 1hour. Weight 3.2 lbs.
V-58 Battery Charger -- Domestic .
Charges V-68 battery packs in 12-14 hours. Operates on 115 volts wall current.
V-60 Voltage Converter Step- Down Transformer.
V-63 Carrying Case
Textured Vinyl Carrying Cover padded soft construction, makes it easy to carry VHS 760/764, pocket for remote control.
VM-76
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
V-64 Shipping Case
Shipping Case for VHS 760/764 Heavy gauge durable construction. Lined with 11 /2 "ester foam. Accommodates VHS 760/764 and Carrying Cover.
V-52 Cable .
Audio- Video Recording Cable allows for recording from VHS 760/ 764 built in TV monitor or external video player or monitor. RCA jack or BNC adaptable.
V-55 Car Battery Adaptor
Car Battery Adaptor provides power to VHS 760/764 using acar battery (via lighter socket) as the source.
NPO Videotronics
619 West 54th Street New York, NY 1001 9 (21 2) 708-0560 ( 805) 499-8513
SELF-CONTAINED VHS VIDEO SYSTEMS
VHS 12C0
VHS 1260/1264
VHS 1200 PORTABLE VIDEO SYSTEM
SPECIAL FEATURES · Noiseless freeze frame ·All concealed controls-- accessible from front · RF out ·Audio/video out
This fully integrated, single unit system with 12' diagoral picture is designed for exhibits, in store POP, and training.
The VHS 1200 utilizes standard 1/2 "videocassettes. It features as an option aunique end- of- program sensor. When set in its unattended mode, the videocassette automatically rewinds and replays. All controls are concealed, yet are accessible from the front of the unit.
The VHS 1200 is for playback only ( no record feature) -- consequently the price is relat vely low.
SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions:
11-3/4" Wide x 17" High x 14" Deep Weight:
37 lbs. Screen:
12" diagonal, NTSC color Tape System:
Uses standard VHS 1 / 2 " videocassette
VHS 1200 Video Playback- only System (uses standard 1'2" videocassettes)
$1095.00
VHS 1200-C Special P.O.P. Model with end of program sensor,
auto rewind and replay
1155.00
Accessories: V-61 Cordura Carry Case, Canvas V-62 Shipping Case
$ 105.00 150.00
VHS 1260 Et 1264 PORTABLE VIDEO SYSTEMS
Specifications apply to both models unless otherwise indicated. Model VHS 1260 utilizes a 2- head helical scan system; the Model 1264 employs a4- head helical scan design which provides noiseless and jitter- free special playback effects.
Dimensions: 11-3/4" Wide x 16" High x 13" Deep
Weight: 30 lbs.
Screen: 12" diagonal, NTSC color. 250 line resolution. Positioned above deck for easy viewing.
Tape System: Rotary 2- head helical scan ( Model 1260 only) or rotary 4- head helical scan ( Model 1264) only. Standard VI-IS 1/2" format tape deck.
Features: Selectable 2, 4or 6hour speeds for record/playback. Auto rewind. Freeze frame, single frame action, slow motion. Basic function remote control ( Model 1260 only), or full function remote control (Model 1264 only).
Special Effects: "Noiseless" freeze-frame, single frame action and slow motion playback ( Model 1264 only). All recorder functions may be operated by remote control.
Power Requirements: 117/120 VAC current.
Additional Capabilities:
Hookup to large screen monitor. RF output Audio/video in and out. 10- pin v;rieo camera input.
Optional: Continuous run switch for unattended program repetition.
VHS 1260 2- Head helical scan system VHS 1264 4- Head helical scan system
$1595.00 1694.00
Accessories: V-61 Cordura Carry Case, Canvas V-62 Shipping Case
105.00 150.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM- 77
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SALES AMERICA, INC.
110 New England Ave. West
Piscataway, NJ 08854
(201)981-1414 ( 800) 631-5377
COLOR TV/MONITORS
13" to 25"
COLOR TELEVISION
COMMON FEATURES Picture: Diamond Vision picture tube · Automatic Picture Latitude Circuitry ( APLC) · Saw Filter Tuning: 139- channel cable- ready · Frequency synthesizer, random access
13" CS- 1352
Cabinet: Walnut-grain plastic · Tabletop styling
Tuning: Channel- Memory scan · Quick-View tuning
Dimensions: 13-5/8"H x 17-7/8"W x 14-3/4"D; Wt. 25 lbs.
CS- 1352
$320.00
13" CS- 1384R
VS- 360R/ VS-360RA
CS- 1384R
WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
Cabinet: Pecan- grain, vinyl- clad wood · Contemporary tabletop
styling
Tuning: Channel- Memory scan · Quick- View tuning
Audio: 2-speaker sound
Dimensions: 14-1/8"H x21-3/8"W x 15-1/8"D; Wt. 40 lbs.
CS- 1384R
$450.00
15" CS- 1584R
WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
Cabinet: Pecan- grain, vinyl- clad wood · Contemporary styling Tuning: Channel- Memory scan · Quick- View tuning Audio: 2-speaker sound Dimensions: 15-3/8"H x23"W x 16"D; Wt. 47 lbs. CS- 1584R
tabletop $500.00
19" CS- 1960R
MONITOR/RECEIVER WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
Cabinet: Silver vinyl- clad wood · Hi- tech contemporary tabletop
styling
Dimensions: 19-3/4"H x20-5/8"W x 18-3/4"D; Wt. 57 lbs.
CS- 1960R
$630.00
19" CS- 1973R
WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
Cabinet: Pecan- grain, vinyl- clad wood · Tabletop styling
Tuning: Channel- Memory scan · Quick- View tuning
Dimensions: 18-3/4"H x27-3/4"W x 19-1/2"D; Wt. 65 lbs.
CS- 1973R
$550.00
19" CS- 1984R
WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
Cabinet: Pecan- grain, vinyl- clad wood · Tabletop styling
Tuning: Channel- Memory scan · Quick-View tuning
Audio: 2-speaker sound
Dimensions: 18-7/8"H x28-1/4"W x 19-3/8"D; Wt. 70 lbs.
CS- 1984R
$650.00
25" CK-2561R
WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
Cabinet: Genuine oak veneer wood · Contemporary Vertical Con-
sole styling
Tuning: Channer-Memory scan · Quick- View tuning
Audio: Sealed enclosure 5-speaker sound ( with super woofer) · 3
separate amplifiers
Dimensions: 36-3/8"H x29"W x22-1/4"D; Wt. 173 lbs.
CK 2561R
$1200.00
25" CS- 2566R
WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
Cabinet: Genuine oak veneer wood · Contemporary tabletop stykng
·Compact design
Tuning: Channel-Memory scan · Quick-View tuning
Audio: 30 sound system with rear- mounted woofer · External
speaker terminals
Dimensions: 23-7/8"H x27"W x 19-5/8"D; Wt. 114 lbs.
CS- 2566R
$920.00
25" CK-2575R
WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
Cabinet: Genuine oak veneer wood · Contemporary console styling
Tuning: Channel- Memory scan · Quick-View tuning
Audio: Sealed-enclosure 4-speaker sound
Dimensions: 30-5/8"H x34-1/2"W x21-1/2"D; Wt. 152 lbs.
CK-257511
$800.00
25" CK-2587R
WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
Cabinet: Genuine pecan veneer wood · Traditional console styling
Tuning: Channel- Memory scan · Quick-View tuning
Audio: Sealed-enclosure 4-speaker sound
Dimensions: 31-1/8"H x43-1/2"W x21-7/8"D; Wt. 179 lbs.
CK-2587R
* 1100.00
25" CK-25:·:R WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
20" CS- 2061R
WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
Tube: Special flat tube with computer input Cabinet: Silver grid pattern vinyl-clad wood · Hi-tech contemporary
tabletop styling · Compact design
Tuning: Channel- Memory scan · Quick-View tuning Audio: 3D sound system with rear- mounted woofer Dimensions: 18-7/8"H x20-1/4"W x 19-1/4"D; Wt. 72 lbs.
CS- 2061R
$820.00
Cabinet: Genuine oak veneer wood · Contemporary console styling
Tuning: Channel- Memory scan · Quick-View tuning
Auduio: Sealed-enclosure, 4-speaker sound
Dimensions: 30-3/4"H x39-1/8"W x21-3/4"D; Wt. 179 lbs.
CK-2588R
$1200.00
36" VS-360/VS-360RA REAR-PROJECT1ON COLOR TELEVISION WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
21" CS- 2184R
WITH WIRELESS REMOTE
Cabinet: Pecan- grain, vinyl- clad wood · Tabletop styling or with
optional pedestal base Model MP-216
Tuning: Channel- Memory scan · Quick-View tuning
Audio: Sealed enclosure 2speaker sound
Dimensions: 21"H x30-5/8"W x 18-1/2"D; Wt. 97 lbs.
CS- 2184R
$ 750.00
Cabinet: Pecan-grain, vinyl- clad wood · Contemporary styling
Picture: Washable, anti- reflective screen · 170 footLamberts of
brightness · 110° viewing angle · Optically-coupled f/1.1 coated
lenses · APLC
Tuning: 139-channel, cable- ready · Frequency- synthesizer, direct
access · Channel- Memory scan
Audio: 2-speaker sound
Dimensions: 45-5/16"H x30-15/16"W x25-5/8"D; Wt. 159 ibs.
VS- 360
$2100.00
VM-78
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
NEC
1401 Estes Avenue Elk Grove, IL 60007-5463 (31 2) 228-5900
COLOR MONITORS
11111111111.M111111111.11.11111111111.. CM-1951A/CM-2551A
CT- 2505A
CT- 1305A ( RGB)
CI- 2020A
CM-2591A/CM-1991A
CT-1305A ( RGB)
13" Color Receiver/Monitor; 134 Ch. CATV-ready Quartz PLL tuner;
Random Access; Skip Memory; 90 degree deflection in- line picture
tube with black stripe shadow mask; Smoked non- glare screen;
Multiple input/output connections; High efficiency circuitry; Infrared
remote control. RGB Inputs.
$549.00
CT-2020A
20" Professional Color Monitor/Receiver; 142 Ch. CATV-ready
Quartz tuner; Direct access tuning; Skip Memory; Black stripe picture tube for nearly distortion- free image; Smoked- glass, non-
glare screen; Comb filter; Auto- flesh tone; Horizontal Resolution --
350 lines; Built-in stereo amp and speakers; Multiple input/output
connections; On- screen channel/time display; 20- function wireless
remote control
$799.00
CT -2505A
25" Color Receiver/Monitor; 134 Ch. CATV-ready Quartz PLL tuner; Random Access; Skip Memory; 100 degree deflection in- line picture tube with black stripe shadow mask; Smoked non- glare screen; Comb filter; Auto Flesh Tone; Stereo amp and speakers; Multiple input/output connections; High efficiency circuitry; Infrared remote control.
$950.00
C12 -202A
'2" Color Monitor; 90 degree deflection in- line picture tube with black stripe shadow mask; Smoked non- glare screen; Built-in speaker; High
efficiency circuitry; Compact design; versatile application. $350.00
CM -2551A
25" Color Monitor; 100 degree deflection in- line picture tube with
black stripe shadow mask; Smoked non- glare screen; Comb filter;
Auto clesh Tone; Built-in stereo amp; High efficiency circuitry;
Multiple input/output connections.
$700.00
CM -1991A ( RGB)
19" Professional Color Monitor; With RGB Analog Inputs; 90 degree deflection in- line picture tube with black stripe shadow mask; Smoked non- glare screen; Comb filter; Auto Flesh Tone; Built-in stereo amp;
High efficiency circuitry; Multiple input/ output connections. $750.00
CM -2591A ( RGB)
25" Professional Color Monitor; With RGB Analog Inputs; 100 degree deflection in- line picture tube with black stripe shadow mask; Smoked non- glare screen; Comb filter; Auto Flesh Tone; Built-in stereo amp; High efficiency circuitry; Multiple input/output connections.
$1100.00
TU -941EN
134 Ch., CATV-ready Quartz PLL video tuner; Random Access;
Two input audio/video selection; Programmable timer; Stereo audio
controls; Infrared remote control.
$595.00
C25-900A
25" Color Monitor; Comb filter and wide- band video circuit for im-
proved resolution ( 370 lines); RGB separate input and video composite
input; RGB analog input for intermediate color tones; Built-in 4"
speaker for sound monitoring; With the built-in 2- channel 7W + 7W
audio output, this model can be hooked up to ahi-fi system for high-
fidelity sound. The C25-900A also features outstanding reliability and a
clean, sharp picture.
$850.00
CM -1951A
19" Color Monitor; 90 degree deflection in- line picture tube with black
stripe shadow mask; Smoked non- glare screen; Comb filter; Auto
Flesh Tone; Built-in stereo amp; High efficiency circuitry; Multiple
input/output connections.
$550.00
ACCESSORIES
TS- 1910E 19" Rack for all 19" Color TVs and Monitors ....$ 115.00
TS- 1911E Rack for 19" TV/Monitors and SX-S25E
Speakers
149.00
TS-2_02AE Rack for CT- 2020A and an optional pair of
speaker systems
169.00
TS-2020AE Rack for CT-2020A
125.00
TS- 2510E 25" Rack for all 25" Color TVs and Monitors
130.00
TS- 2511E Rack for 25" TV/Monitors and SX-S26E Speakers
190.00
SX-S25E (2) Stereo Speakers for afi 19" TV/Monitors
115.00
SX-S26E SX-S27E
(2) Stereo Speakers for all 25" TV/Monitors
130.00
Custom- designed speaker system for CT-2020A
(available in pairs)
120.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-79
NON-LINEAR SYSTEMS
DIVISION OF KAYPRO CORP
P 0 Box N Del Mar, CA 92014 (619) 481-3900 Telex 249045
OSCILLOSCOPES
MS- 230
MS-215
Single- Trace Oscilloscopes
Dual- Trace Oscilloscopes
MS- 15, 15MHz. · Portability - 2.7" H x 6.4" W x 8.0" D · Weighs only three pounds · Lowest price batteries and charger included · External and internal trigger · Time base - 0.1 microseconds to 0.5
seconds- per-division · 21 time base settings · Auto-
MS- 215, 15 MHz. · Portable - 2.9" H x6.4" W x 8.0" D · Weighs only three pounds including batteries · Moderately priced - batteries and charger included · Dual-trace - two channel capability ·Separate, chopped or alternate sweep modes · Ex-
matic and line sync modes · Vertical gain - 0.01 to 50 volts- per-division · 12 vertical gain settings
ternal and Internal trigger · Time base - 0.1 micro seconds to 0.5 seconds per division · 21 time base
·Vernier controls - sweep and gain · Calibrated sweep and gain functions · Battery or line operation · Power consumption less than 15 watts · Internal calibrator.
settings · Automatic and line sync modes · Vertical gain - 0.01 to 50 volts per division · 12 vertical gain settings · Vernier controls - sweep and gain · Calibrated sweep and gain functions · Battery or
The MS- 15 Miniscope weighs only three pounds, is physically small at 2.9 inches high by 6.4 inches
line operation · Power consumption less than 15 watts · Internal calibrator
wide by 8 inches deep. Vertical bandwidth is 15 megahertz. The graticuled rectangular viewing area is four division high by five division wide. Division spacing is 0.25 inches.
This incredible dual- trace, 15- megahertz oscilloscope is battery or line operated and weighs only three pounds. Separate, chopped and alternate dual-trace sweep modes are included, as well as internal
Internal and external triggering are provided along with automatic and line synchronization modes as well as a horizontal input. There are 12 vertical gain settings from 0.01 volts to 50 volts per division.
and external sync modes. The time base controls
provide 21 settings with a range from 0.1 microseconds per division to 0.5 seconds per division. There are 12 vertical gain settings for each channel
Twenty-one time base settings from 0.1 micro-
providing a range from 0.01 to 50 volts per divi-
seconds to 0.5 seconds per division are included. / sion, for each.
An optional 10-to- 1probe and acarrying case are also
available.
$466.00
Packaging size is a small 2.9 inches high by 6.4 inches wide by 8.0 inches deep.
The MS-215 is furnished complete with two input cables, battery charger and rechargeable batteries.
Options include a leather carrying case with neck/
strap and belt loop for versatile hands-free operation
and a 10-to- 1, 10-megohm probe.
8596»
MS-230, 30 MHz. · Portable - 2.9" H x 6.4" W x 8.6" D · Weighs only 3.6 pounds including batteries · Moderate price - batteries and charger
included · Dual-Trace - two channel capability · 30 - megahertz bandwidth · Separate, chopped or alternate sweep modes · External or internal trigger
·Time base - 0.1 microseconds to 0.5 seconds per division · 21 time base settings · Automatic and line sync modes · Vertical gain - 0.01 to 50
volts per division · 12 vertical gain settings · Vernier
controls - sweep and gain · Battery or line
operation · Low battery indicator · Internal calibrator
Non -Linear Systems increased the number of its Miniscope oscilloscopes to three with the intro-
duction of its Model MS-230, 30- megahertz, battery operated, dual- trace miniscope. Small package size is 2.9 inches high by 6.4 inches wide by 8.6 inches deep. Weight is 3.6 pounds, including batteries.
The MS-230 features alternate, chopped and separate sweep modes. Internal and external trigger modes are included. There are 12 vertical gain settings for each channel's range from 0.01 to 50 volts per division. Time base settings number 21 from 0.05 micro-
seconds to 0.2 seconds per division. Verniers are provided for time base and vertical amplifier adjustment.
The MS-230 Miniscope includes a horizontal input channel and an internal calibrator. The graticule consists of 0.25 inch divisions arranged five across and four high. The MS-230 comes complete and ready to use. Included are input cables and a battery charger permitting battery or line operation.
Accessories include a 10:1, 10-megohm probe and a /
leather carrying case with shoulder strap and belt
loop.
$779.00
VM -80
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
NORTHERN INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
748 W. Algonquin Rd. Arlington Heights, IL 60005
(312) 640-3220
INC.
TELE-IMAGER
MODULAR TI- 2000 TELE-IMAGERTm
· Desk- Top Cabinet Design
· Full and Quad Screen Display Modes · Three Transmit Speeds for All Requirements · Exclusive " PixAlert"TM Signalling Feature
· Quick Installation -- Uses Modular Phone Jacks · Save Pictures on Ordinary Audio Tape · Uses Standard CCTV Accessories · Automatic Switching from Picture to Voice
· No External Phone Coupler Needed · FCC Approved for Direct Telephone Connection · Easy to Operate Pushbutton Controls · Automatic Mode Sends Continuous Pictures
PORTABLE TI-2500 TELE -IMAGER
All The Features Of The TI-2000, Plus... · Two Pages of High Resolution Memory · Dual Video Outputs. View Both Pages At Once · Self-Contained Video Monitor · Lightweight and Compact · Protective Front Panel Cover · Built- In Line Cord Storage
The Tele-Imager
The first of anew generation of low cost freeze-frame video communications systems that can send and receive high quality "snapshots" of live video pictures over regular telephone circuits, twisted pair, or voice grade radio channels. The Tele-Imager can capture video frames from any standard monochrome or color video camera or video tape recorder. These captured images may be then saved and played back on any standard audio tape recorder such as cassette or reel to reel.
Compact and lightweight, the Tele-Imager utilizes state-of-the-art microprocessor technology. A simplified, lighted control panel has been designed with the user in mind.
TI- 2000 TI- 2500
$ 2995.00 3750.00
SPECIFICATIONS Memory Capacity: 1 page of 256 x 256 pixels (TI-2000)
2 pages of 256 x 256 pixels each ( TI-2500)
Gray Scale:
Pixels are quantized to 64 shades
Scan Rates:
8 seconds at 128 x 128 16 seconds at 256 x 128 32 seconds at 256 x 256
INPUTS Video:
Standard Composite Video -- 525 line, 60Hz., 1.0 Volt p- pwhite positive, sync neg., 75 ohms BNC
Type Input Connector.
Telephone:
Standard RJ-11C Modular Jack for direct connection to single line U.S. telephone system and any FCC registered telephone instrument.
Audio Tape Recorder
100 mV Nominal into 1,000 ohms
TI-2500
OUTPUTS Video:
Telephone:
Audio Tape Recorder
Standard Composite Video -- 525 line, 60Hz., 1.0 Volt p- pwhite positive, sync neg.. 75 ohms BNC Type Output Connector. Standard RJ-11C Modular Jack for direct connection to single line U.S. tefephone system and any FCC registered telephone instrument.
100 mV Nominal into 1,000 ohms
TI-2500 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Size:
5.1e(H) x 15"(W) x 12.5"(D)
Net Weight:
Approx. 15 lbs.
Power
Requirements:
120 V AC 60Hz 25W
TI-2000 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Size:
3.75"(H) x 12"(W) x 13"(0)
Net Weight.
7.5 . los.
Power
Requirements:
120 V AC 60Hz 15W
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-81
p anaso AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
PROJECTION SYSTEM
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
CT- 10010M 100" Screen Color Video Projection System w/Remote Control
The CT- 10010M large screen color video projection system provides high image quality. Three 7- inch projection CTRs are used in an in- line configuration with f/1.1 lenses to attain aresolution of 450 lines using an NTSC input, which increases to aresolution of 550 lines ( or 2000 characters) with an RGB input. New high voltage circuitry delivers 4.2
foot- Lamberts of luminance ( screen gain = 1). Thus a bright, highly viewable picture can be displayed on almost any curved or flat screen.
The supplied wired remote control unit allows for
convenient adjustment and switching of brightness, contrast, tint, color, sharpness, vertical hold, power on/off and static convergence ( with a built-in crosshatch test pattern generator). In addition, the remote control unit
incorporates aLine/VTR switch, Video/RGB switch and a Test switch. The CT- 10010M can be installed for front/rear or ceiling/floor projection applications
Features:
·Three 7" projection lenses used in an in- line configuration
·Resolution: 450 Lines with NTSC input and 550 lines (or 2000 characters) with RGB input
·Standard accessory wired remote control ·Luminance of 4.2 foot- Lamberts and aluminous flux of
270 lumens at white peak ·High quality projection on almost any flat or curved
screen up to 100" ( diagonal) ·Comb filter improves resolution and reduces chroma
noise
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Source:
120V AC. 60Hz
Power Consumption: Projection Tubes: Lenses: Resolution:
Video IN/OUT Connector: Video Input Impedance:
139W ( average)
7" high brightness CRTs ( RGB) 138.32mm focal length 450 TV lines ( composite): 550 TV lines ( RGB)
BNC and 8- pin VTR
75 ohms/Hi - Z
Input Signals:
NTSC; 1V p-pcomposite, neg. sync ROB; 1V p-por TTL level
Screen Size:
Luminous Flux:
Ambient Operating Conditions:
50" to 100" diagonal 270 lumens at white peak
32° Fto 104° F ( 0° C to 40° C): 20% to 80% humidity
Dimensions:
12'/2" ( H) x24 ./no" ( W) x30'4" ( D) 318 x614 x767mm
Weight:
105.6 lbs. ( 48.0kg)
Included With Unit: ET- 10R Remote Control Unit
CT- 10010M
$ 6200.00
Jen.
1.97 -
A
24.21 -
D
B
C center ol screen
A: Distance from screen to center hole of holding bolt B: Distance from screen centei' to lens surface C: Distance from screen center to CRT surface D: Distance from mounting plate bottom to certer of screen. For conventional flat screen (Aspect ratio 3x4) E: Screen§ width F: Screen height G: Screen size Note: E.F.G. sizes shown here are reduced 7pecent from
raster size.
Screen Size (G) 100' 90' 84' 72' 60' 50'
Width (E) 80.0"
72.0' 67.2"
57.6" 48.0"
eoe -
Height (F) 60.0'
see -
50.4'
43.2' 36.0' 30.0'
A 122.4' t11.0' 104.2'
gee-
77.0' 65.7'
e
123.3-
111.6" 104.6'
90.5" 76.5' 64.8'
C 130.7 119.0 112.0" 98.0" 84.8 -
723 -
D 37.2" 34.4" 32.8" 29.5" 26.2" 23.S"
P131SONAL COMPUTER
Optional Accessories: ET- 10C15 (49.2', 15m) remote control cable ET- 10C30 (98.4', 30m) remote control cable ET- 10050 (164', 50m) remote control cable
$140.00 210.00
300.00
VM-82
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Fmmo
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
SELF-CONTAINED VCR Et MONITOR
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201 348-7000
CT- 130V VCR Monitor
Introducing the Panasonic CT- 130V VCR/Monitor TV
combination unit designed for high quality video presenta-
tions. The CT- 130V is aspace saving unit that measures
only 15-1/2" across and 16" from front to back. The front
loading VCR mechanism comes equipped with a
10- function wired remote control keypad and alocking front
panel cover for tamper free operation. The CT- 130V is easy
to set-up and does not require any connections other than
plugging it into an AC outlet. Operational modes include
auto- repeat and noise-free still playback. Boasting ahost of
valuable features, the CT- 130V can be apotent communi-
cations device in your organization. Applications range
from employee training and education, to sales presenta-
tions and product demonstrations. Two ( 2) Auto Repeat
modes; end of program and zero counter repeat.
CT- 130V
$ 1395.00
Features Designed for Operational Convenience ·Auto- repeat for unattended presentations or guidance
purposes ·Versatile noise-free playback modes including Still, Frame
Advance, and Cue 8- Review ( in the SLP mode) ·10-function wired remote control
·SP/ SLP tape speeds with 8- hour record capability ( using NV- T160 cassettes in the SLP mode)
·Bright, clear 13" diagonal screen for excellent picture quality
·Front locking cover provided for tamper free operation ·Video input and monitor output ·Camera remote jack ·BNC-RCA adaptor
Specifications
MONITOR Picture Tube: Viewing Area: Power Consumption: VCR Video Recording System:
Audio Track: Tape Format: Tape Speed:
SP SLP FF/REW Time:
13" diagonal, 90° deflection 1198" ( H) x8s1, 6" (V) [281mm ( H) x211mm (V)) 95W
2rotary heads, helical scanning system Luminance: FM azimuth recording Color signal: Converted subcarrier phase shift recording 1track Tape width 112 (12.7mm), high density tape
15/, 6 p.s. (33.35mm/s) '116 i.p.s. ( 11.12mm/s) Less than 4min. 30 sec. with NV- T120
Operating Temperature: Operating Humidity: Power Consumption: GENERAL Power Source: Audio Output: Speaker: Dimensions
(H xW xD):
Weight: CONNECTOR Video Output: Audio Output: Video Input: Audio Input: Camera Remote Input:
41°F- 104°F ( 5°C- 40°C) 35%-80% 29W
120V AC, 60Hz 1.5W 3-/ (10cm) round
1r/16 - x
x16'4 -
(437 x390 x409 mm)
49.2 lbs. ( 22.3 kg)
1Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced 0.5 Vrms (at 100% modulation) 1Vp-p, 75 ohms unbalanced 0.5 Vrms Short circuited ( M2)
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
10- function remote control
Front locking cover
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-83
rienta AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
PORTABLE PRESENTATION SYSTEM
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
AG-HT240 VIDPAK II CARRYING CASE
The AG-HT240 Vidpak II combines deck and monitor into alighlweight and functional portable video presentation system.
FEATURES: ·Designed for AG- 2400 VHS Recorder, CT- 500V Color Monitor and AG- B12 AC Adaptor ·Out- of- Sight Audio and Video Cables Included ·Special R.F. Barrier Prevents VCR- Monitor Interference ·Meets FAA Guidelines for Under- Seat Use on Airlines ·Facilitates Use of Components Separately or as Integrated Unit.
Panasonic introduces the AG-HT240 Vidpak Carrying Case. Designed to exclusively house the AG- 2400 VHS
recorder, CT- 500V color monitor, and the AG- B12 plug-in AC power adaptor, the AG-HT240 Vidpak combines the deck and monitor into afunctioning portable video presentation system. Its special out- of- sight cable connection design, easy access to controls, and light weight make the Vidpak ideal for point- of- sale presentations. The units are
easily removed for other applications and the case meets
FAA size requirements for under- seat airline carrying.
The AG-HT240 Vidpak features a rugged construction with reinforced frame. A special metal recorder/monitor
barrier prevents RF interference. Also included is a provi-
sion for two VHS tapes and 2 RCA cables for video and
audio connection.
AG-HT240
$ 148.00
VM-84
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Panasonic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
COLOR MONITORS
One Panasonic Way Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
BT-S700N 7" AC/DC Color Monitor
·Single lever selector for normal scan, pulse cross, under
scan and blue- only operation
·AC/DC operation ·Built-in folding carrying handle
·Selectable BNC/VTR inputs via front panel pushbutton
Audio monitoring facilities with built-in speaker
BT-S700N
$625.00
BT-S701N 7" Color Video Monitor
·Line A/B selectable by front panel pushbutton ·External sync switch ·Front panel controls ( concealed behind door) ·Single level selector for normal scan, pulse cross, under
scan and blue- only operation
·Desk- top construction design
BT-S701N
$550.00
BT-S702N Dual 7" Color Monitor
·Line A/B selectable by front panel pushbuttons
·External sync switch
·Rackmountable in standard 19" EIA rack
·Single lever selector for normal scan, pulse cross, under
scan and blue- only operation
·Front panel controls ( concealed behind door)
BT-S702N
$ 1150.00
BT-S1300N 13" Color Video Monitor
·High resolution Compu Focus picture tube w/Overlapping Field lens gun
·Line/VTR selectable ·Normal/underscan switch allows viewing of picture cor-
ners ·Blue- only switch defeats red and green signals and makes
hue and chrominance adjustment simpler ·Pulse- cross display for easy observation of sync detail
BT-S1300N
$650.00
BT-S1900N 19" Color Video Monitor
·High resolution CompuFocus picture tube with Overlapping Field lens gun
·Line 1 / 2/VTR selectability ·External Sync switch for use with non- composite video
signal ·Normal/underscan switch ·Chroma switch for black and white display ·Blue- only switch defeats red and green signals and makes
hue, chrominance adjustment easier ·Pulse cross switch ( H-delay, V- delay) ·Audio monitoring facilities w/built-in speaker
BT-S1900N
$795.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
--QT. SYNC SIT Err
·nsSI-- NOA · · · I our
BT-S700N
--QT. SYNC-- .« ·-· crY.
·. ·
7110.-AWAN · . · "Aff
BT-S701N
BT-S702N
71. OUT
o
Ext SPEAKERal.,.
BT S1300N
Lii . LSYSE1 _ = v i en rl
· -- ««
tlf YORMEI« - .1»
VIII
BT SIMON VM-85
Panasonic.
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
COLOR MONITORS/RECEIVERS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
CT- 500V 5" Portable Color Video Receiver/Monitor
·Powered by AC, Car Battery or Rechargeable Battery ·ColorPilot Electronic Color Control System ·Quintrix II In- Line Picture Tube with Quick- on
·RCA Connectors for Video Et Audio Input/Output ·TV/Line Selector Switch ·100% Solid- State IC Chassis ·Panabrite control for simultaneous contrast and bright-
ness adjustment CT- 500V
$475.00
CT-110MA 10" Color Video Monitor
·Quintrix II In- Line Picture Tube
·Switchable Line/VTR IN
·Selectable AFC time constant
·Metal cabinet and handle
·Built-in 3- inch Speaker Et Earphone Jack
·BNC Video, RCA Audio Et 8- pin VCR Connectors
CT-110MA
$475.00
CT- 1010M 10" Color Video Monitor
·Quintrix II In- Line Picture Tube ·Quick- on Picture Tube eliminates long warm-up time ·100% Solid- State IC Chassis ·Built-in 3- inch Speaker Et Earphone Jack
·Panabrite controls contrast and brightness simultane-
ously CT- 1010M
$400.00
CT- 1020M
10" Color Video Monitor w/o Audio Facilities
·Quintrix II In- Line CRT w/Black Matrix design Et prefocus lens for sharp resolution and natural color rendi-
tion · Front Panel Controls for color, tint, brightness, Pana-
brite, and vertical- hold
·Panabrite simultaneously optimizes contrast and brightness
·Quick-on construction avoids long warm-up but uses no power when unit is off
·Commercial UL Listing
CT- 1020M
$385.00
o o o
CT- 500V
00
CT-110MA
VIDEO AUPO .NPui
O o
Our's",
· o
CT- 1010M
CT- 1020M
VM-86
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Panasonic.
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
COLOR MONITORS/RECEIVERS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
CT- 1330M
13" Color Video Monitor w/3- Source Inputs
· Full/Over scan- size switching lets you see entire camera view or only
portion of picture seen on ordinary TV set and provides full character
view from computer outputs
· 3-way audio monitoring: headphones, built-in speaker or optional
external speaker. (Slide volume control provided)
· CompuFocus picture tube delivers high resolution picture
· Panabrite simultaneously adjusts brightness and contrast
· 10-channel preset electronic tuning with fine tuning control
· Rear panel controls for brightness, sharpness, and vertical- hold
· Tinted face glass
· Commercial UL listing
$ 495.00
CT- 1330V
13" Color Video Monitor/Receiver
w/Scan-Size Selector
· 3- source inputs with red LED indication
· Versatile rear panel facilities: 8- pin VTR connector, two sets of LINE
input/output jacks, and monitor output
· Audio monitoring by headphones, built-in speaker, or optional exter-
nal speaker. ( Slide volume control provided)
· Full/Over scan- size switching lets you see entire camera viewor only portion of picture seen on ordinary TV set and provides full character
view from computer outputs
· Rear panel controls for brightness, sharpness and vertical- hold · Tinted face glass
· Commercial UL listing
$595.00
CT-1350MG
13" Color Video Monitor with RGB Capability
· Ouintrix Il In- Line picture tube for superb contrast and excellent
natural color reproduction
· ColorPilot automatically adjusts incoming color and tint signals to
preselected levels
· Panabrite adjusts brightness and contrast simultaneously
· NTSC composite video or RGB video inputs
· Pushbutton NTSC and RGB select switch
· Automatic degaussing prevents magnetic build-up
S585.00
CT- 1920M
CT- 1920M 19" Color Video Monitor w/Comb Filter
· Quintrix II In- Line picture tube for superb contrast and excellent natural color reproduction
· Automatic degaussing prevents magnetic build-up · VTR/Line pushbutton selector · ColorPilot automatically adjusts incoming color and tint signals to
preselected levels · Panabrite adjusts brightness and contrast simultaneously · BNC connectors for NTSC composite video inputs $ 645.00
CT- 1930V 19" Color Video Monitor/Receiver
w/Scan-Size Selector
· Full/Over scan- size switching lets you see entire camera view or only
portion of picture seen on ordinary TV set and provides full character
view from computer outputs
· LINE connections can be bridged for connection to an additional
monitor or other equipment
· Audio monitoring by headphones or built-in speaker, External
speaker connection possible. ( Slide volume control provided)
· 12-channel preset electronic tuning with fine tuning control
· Panabrite optimizes picture quality by simultaneously adjusting
brightness and contrast
· Tinted face glass
· Commercial UL listing
S795.00
CT- 1930V
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
T InMER/-1. A- --LOME 6-- 110066011
2 ;7;
OUT
M .1 m
.1
0
0
00
CT- 1330V
r·
CT-1350MG VM-87
F 1 /41mmore
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
COLOR MONITORS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
MT-1340MG
13" Diagonal Medical Video Monitor
·RGB Linear and Composite Monitor for Medical
Applications ·Horizontal Resolution more than 400 Lines ( RGB) · . 52mm Dot Pitch Data Grade Tube for Crisp, Fine Detail ·UL- 544 Rating for Critical Environments
·1.5 Volt P- PLinear RGB Input for True Rendition of Subtle Color Tones
·Built- In Audio Amp and Speaker
MT-1340MG
$ 625.00
CT-1400MG
14" Diagonal Video/Data Color Monitor
·Resolution 370 TVL Composite; 580 Dots RGB
·2000 Character ( 80 Column) Display with Square Corner
Data Grade CRT
·RGB: Linear and TTL; and Composite Inputs with
Separate Audio Inputs
·P.C. Compatible with Optional Cable
·YS and YM Inputs for Teletext Display
·Switchable Comb Filter for Clearer Color and
Monochrome Pictures
CT-1400MG
$ 699.00
Optional
Accessories: ET- 100C Interface Cable for IBM-PC
Series and Panasonic Sr. Partner
(length 3ft.)
$39.00
ET- 101C Interface Cable for Apple Ill
(length 3ft.)
40.00
ET- 102C Interface Cable for NEC
PC-8001A and PC-8801A
(length 3ft.)
28.00
ET- 103C Interface Cable for ATARI-800,
TI 99/4A and Commodore VIC20, C64
(length 3ft.)
15.00
MT-1340MG CT-1400MG
CT-2000M
19" Diagonal Color Video Monitor
·Quintrex II In- Line Picture Tube
·4- System for International Use ( PAL, SECAM, 3.58
NTSC, 4.43 NTSC ( Simplifies use of different standard
video signals and multi- standard VCR units)
·Connectors: BNC/RCA and 8- Pin
·100% Solid State Chassis
CT- 2000M
$ 995.00
VM -88
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Panasonic
AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
BLACK AND WHITE MONITORS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094
(201) 348-7000
WV-5200B, WV-5203B
Power Source: 120V AC, 60 Hz Power Consumption: WV- 5200B approx. 16 watts, WV- 5203B
approx. 48 watts ·Video Input: 1.0Vp-p composite ( 0.5p- p -- 2.0Vp-p), 75 ohms
or high impedance ·External Sync Input: 4.0Vp-p composite ( 2.0Vp-p -- 5.0Vp-p neg-
ative), 75 ohms or Hi-Z looping through ·Video Frequency Response: More than 7MHz · Horizontal Resolution: More than 600 lines at center · H.AFC Time Constant: Short time constant for industrial VTRs
· Sweep Linearity: Less than 8% · Sweep Geometry: Less than 2% ·Overscanning: Approx. 5% ·DC Restoration: Yes ( switchable)
· CRT: 5" actual visual size · High Tension: DC 8.5kV ·Operating Ambient Temp: 14°F to 122°F I- 10°C to 50°C) ·Operating Ambient Humidity: Less than 90%
· Dimensions: WV- 5200B: 5-13/16"W x7-1/8"H x9-13/16"D 1147W x 180H x
250Dmm) WV- 5203B: 19"W x7"H x 10-5/8"D I480W x 177H x270Dmm)
·Weight: WV- 5200B approx. 6.7 lbs. ( 3.0kg), WV- 5203B approx. 24.4 lbs. ( 11.0kg)
WV-5380, WV-5381, WV-5382
· Power Source: 120V AC, 60Hz · Power Consumption:
WV- 5380 approx. 24 watts WV- 5381 approx. 24 watts WV- 5382 approx. 48 watts · DC 12V Operation/Power Consumption:
WV- 5380 Yes -- 24 watts WV- 5381 Yes -- 24 watts WV- 5382 Yes -- 48 watts ·Video Input: 0.5 -- 2.0Vp-p composite/75 ohms or Hi- Z looping through 0.2 -- 1.7Vp-p non-composite/75 ohms or Hi-Z bopping through ·External Sync Input: 4.0Vp-p composite ( 2.0Vp-p -- 5.0Vp-p
negative), 75 ohms or Hi-Z looping through ·Video Frequency Response: More than 10MHz · Horizontal Resolution: More than 750 lines at center
·Audio Input: 60mV ·Audio Output:
WV- 5380: 1W/8 ohms, INT/EXT Speaker
WV- 5381: 1W/8 ohms, EXT. Speaker WV- 5382: 1W/8 ohms, EXT. Speaker · H.AFC Time Constant: Short/Long switchable for industrial VTRs (except pulse- cross mode)
·Sweep Linearity: Less than 5% · Sweep Geometry: Less than 2% ·Overscaning: Approx. 5% ·Underscanning: Approx. 10% ) switchable) ·Pulse- Cross: Vertical Delay: One half field, Horizontal Delay: 1/4
line · DC Restoration: Yes -- on/off switchable · CRT: 8-1/4" actual visual size · High Tension: DC 10kV ·Rack Mounting: WV- 5381, WV- 511:12 only ·Operating Ambient Temperature: 14°F to 122°F (- 10°C to 50 °C) ·Operating Ambient Humidity: Less than 90%
· Dimensions: WV- 5380: 8-11/16"W x8-15/16"H x 10-7/16"D 1221W x 227.5H
x 265Dmm) WV- 5381, WV- 5382: 19"W x8-3/4"H x10-13/16"D ( 480W x221H
x 274.5Dmm) ·Weight: WV- 5380: 11.7 lbs. ( 5.3kg), WV- 5381: 18.0 lbs. ( 8.2kg),
WV- 5382: 29.0 lbs. ( 13.2kg)
WV- 5200B
154.111.
WV-5203B
BLACK AND WHITE VIDEO MONITORS
WV-5200B 5" Desktop Video Monitor WV- 5203B Triple Video Monitors, Each 5", in a19" Rackmount
WV- 5380 8-1/4" Deluxe Desktop Black and White Video Monitor
WV- 5381 WV- 5382
8-1 /4- Single Rackmount Black and White Video
Monitor
Dual Deluxe 8-1 /4'. Rackmount Black and White
Video Monitors
8.5 8275.00 34.0 825.00 19.0 395.00-
29.0 445.00
41.0 796.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-89
Fbariagrocnk AUDIO- VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
BLACK AND WHITE MONITORS
One Panasonic Way
Secaucus, NJ 07094 ( 201) 348-7000
TR-932
WV- 5203B
TR-930
WV- 5370
WV- 5200B
WV- 5410
TR-124MA
12" ( measured diagonally) monitor; resolution of 700 lines at center,
desktop model, rack mountable with optional 19" EIA panel. 17.6 lbs. with Audio.
TR-124MA
$ 250.00/
TR-930
9" ( measured diagonally) desktop monitor; front panel operating
controls more than 700 lines at center; all solid state'. 11.2 lbs.
TR-930
$ 185.0027
TR-931 ( not shown)
9" ( measured diagonally) CCTV monitor in rack mount chassis with
blank panel for additional equipment, front panel operating controls;
more than 700 lines at center; all solid state. 17.2 lbs.
TR-931
$220.00 -
TR-932
Dual 9" ( measured diagonally) CCTV monitor in rack mount chassis; front panel operating controls more than 700 lines at center; all solid
state. 27.8 lbs.
TR-932
$400.00
WV- 5200B
16 sq. in. ( 5" diagonal), all solid state"; more than 600 lines at center;
internal or external sync. Short H. AFC. 15.0 lbs.
WV- 52008
$ 275.00
WV- 5203B
Triple 16 sq. in. ( 5" diagonal), CCTV monitors for 19" rack; all solid state". 42.0 lbs.
WV- 5203B
$825.00
WV- 5370
9" ( measured diagonally) desktop CCTV monitor, more than 750
lines at center; DC restoration; all solid state"; internal or external sync. 17.5 lbs.
WV- 5370
$275.00 j
TR-196M
19" ( measured diagonally) CCTV monitor, resolution of 750 lines at
center with Audio
POR
WV- 5371 ( not shown)
9" ( measured diagonally) CCTV monitor in arack mount chassis with
blank panel for additional equipment; more than 750 lines at canter;
DC restoration; all solid state". 28.1 lbs.
WV- 5371
$320.00
WV- 5372 ( not shown)
Dual 9" ( measured diagonally) CCTV monitors in rack mount chassis more than 750 lines at center; DC restoration; all solid state". 37.4 lbs.
WV- 5372
$570.00
WV- 5410
14" diagonal desktop monitor; 700 lines resolution at center internal/external sync, DC restoraticn and short H. AFC time
constant. Optional brackets WV- Q.20 available for rack mounting. 28.6 lbs.
WV- 5410
/ $350.00
WV- 5470 (not shown)
17" desktop monitor; more than 850 lines at center, DC restoration, AFC time constant. Optional brackets WV- 022 available for rack mounting; solid state".
WV- 5470
/4450.00
WV-5490 ( not shown)
20" deluxe studio monitor, more than 850 lines at center, DC restoration, short H. AFC time constant for VTR playback, looping
through BNC connectors for video and sync input and output,
internal or external sync, inputs are switchable from 75 ohms to Hi-Z. 40.7 lbs.
WV- 5490
$525.00
ACCESSORIES
TYK-124 19" EIA rack mount panel for IR -124M
WV- 022 WV- 5400 rack mount angle bracket for standard 19" EIA rack. 3.2 lbs
WV- 020 WV- 5410 rack mount angle bracket for standard
19" EIA rack. 3.2 lbs
$ 50.00 25.00 25.00
*Except for picture tube
VM-90
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
p erm:in io,c AUDIO-VIDEO SYSTEMS GROUP
INTERACTIVE VIDEO TRAINING SYSTEM
NV- K120
NV- K110
KX-K150
Professionals know that interactive video is afaster, more effective training tool than linear instruction. After all, interactive video stimulates students to learn at their own pace. And, perhaps most important of all, interactive video increases comprehension. The result: Abetter-trained and more productive
employee. Now Panasonic makes interactive video as easy for trainers as it is effective for trainees. With the only interactive video system that's easy to program, easy to use and easy on the trainer.
Oà·······
--
· die ·
MMM
MM ·
· am tom» ID le II1Ile Mal!
ar
III MAW. 11111,
NV- K100 Interactive Computer
· The compact microprocessor-controlled computer is designed to easily interconnect with Panasonic solenoid- operated VHS Players or Recorders: NV8170, NV8200, NV8500; and Panasonic Y." Video Players or Recorders: NV9240, NV9600, AU700 · Other compatible VHS Players or Recorders to the NV- K100 are the AG-6100. AG-6200 and AG- 6300 · Program data is recorded onto one of the tape's audio channels · This program data is then decoded by the computer as the video tape is played · Computer memory is constantly updated by the reading of the recorded data as needed · This technique allows the system to have access to alarge amount of program data without permanently recording program data into the computer memory, thus affording avery flexible cost-effective system.
STUDENT ADDRESS UNIT · 18 button key pad that plugs into computer · The unit is as simple to operate as ahand-held calculator.
Ny -K120 Text Writer
· A single page character generator, 32 characters across, 15
lines · Information from the text writer is digitally encoded on the audio dub channel · This saves valuable editing time by enabling text to be added after the video editing process is complete · Through simple audio dubs the program designer can return to the tape at any time and revise questions, with no need for video editing · By eliminating the need for more complicated and time consuming video edits, the program designer is afforded the ability to transform existing linear programs into basic interactive programs simply through the use of audio dubs.
NV- K110 Master Tape Programmer
· Used with avideo recorder and monitor · Step-by-step instructions for master programming are displayed on a monitor · The master tape programmer is used to identify the start and end points of each individual segment · A cue tone is automatically recorded on the tape's audio dub channel at the start points of each segment · The location address of each segment is automatically encoded on the audio dub channel in the first 90 seconds of the jape · Entered answer data for each segment is encoded on the audio channel Just behind the cue tone · A choice of four questioning methods exists for each segment: VTR Play, VTR Pause, Workbook, and Character Display · For each possible answer the Program designer can assign an individual score value and the access point or branch number to which, depending on the trainee's answer, the answer will proceed · Partial Data Change Mode allows for easy updates and changes of Segment Answer Data · Easily interconnects with 1/ 2 " VHS Player Recorders NV- 8200, NV- 8500, AG- 6200 and AG- 6300; 3 /4 " Player Recorders NV-9240, NV- 9600 and AU- 700.
KX-K150 Printer ( Optional)
· Hard copy verification of all decisions made by the trainee · Student ID#, date, title of program, degree of answer correctness · Score achieved for particular question · Time taken to make decision · Total time taken vs. time allowed · And total score vs total potential score.
CT- 1010M Color Video Monitor AG- 6300 VHS Video Cassette Recorder NV- K100 Computer w/Addressar NV- K110 Master Programmer.
NV- K120 Text Writer KX-K150 Printer NV- U234 RF Converter
S 400.00"1895.00 795.00 2250.00
600.00 600.00
80.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-91
MOUNTING BRACKETS
20 RAINBOW POND DRIVE, SUITE A-2 WALPOLE, MA 02081 / ( 617) 668-8770
Pivotelli wall brackets are made of the
finest materials and offers a5 year parts and labor guarantee. You can use Pivotelli Swivel Support Arms with complete confidence.
All Brackets are available in gloss white or matt black durable nylon coating.
Prices subject to change without notice.
UNIVERSAL STEREO BRACKETS
Wall mounted brackets designed to support two stereo speakers. Maximum weight: 88 lbs. (sold only in pairs)
SINGLE PIVOTELLI
Straight arm wall mounted bracket. Maximum weight .176 lbs.
DOUBLE PIVOTELLI
12" Double joint flex-arms (24" Total) Maximum weight: 176 lbs.
TRIPLE PIVOTELLI
WITH WALL MOUNT
Provides viewing/listening direction adjustments in all three directions, including tilt.
WITH SCREW- IN BASEPLATES
Model PU $69.50 Pair
UNIVERSAL STEREO BRACKETS
Wall mounted brackets designed to support two stereo speakers. Maximum weight: 88 lbs. (sold only in pairs)
WITH LIMPET BASEPLATES
Model PULUP (7 1/2"-11") $89.50 Pair Model PULUM (11"-17 3/4") $99.50 Pair
12" ARM WITH SCREW- IN BASEPLATE
Model M $49.95
18" ARM WITH SCREW- IN BASEPLATE
Model S $49.95
SINGLE PIVOTELLI
Straight arm wall mounted bracket. Maximum weight: 176 lbs.
12" ARM WITH LIMPET BASEPLATE
MEDIUM (11"-17 3/4 ") Model MLUM $69.95 STANDARD ( 17 3/4 "-30") Model MLUS $69.95
18" ARM WITH LIMPET BASEPLATE
MEDIUM (11"-17 3/4 ") Model SLUM $69.95 STANDARD (17 3/4 "-30") Model SLUS $69.95 LARGE (27"-47") Model SLUL $69.95
SWING ' N TILT UNIVERSAL JOINT
For use with 12", 18" and Double Pivotellis To angle the TV, Speaker
or Monitor up or down.
MODEL UL
$27.95
VM-92
WITH SCREW- IN BASEPLATE
Model D $ 119 95
DOUBLE PIVOTELLI
12" Double joint flex-arms (24" Total) Maximum weight: 176 lbs.
WITH LIMPET BASEPLATE
MEDIUM (11"-17 3/ 4 ") Model DLUM $ 139.95 STANDARD (17 3/ 4 "-30") Model DLUS $ 139.95 LARGE (27"-47") Model DLUL $ 139.95
DOUBLE PIVOTELLI
Light Weight Model 12" Double Joint flex-arms (24" Total) Maximum weight: 22 lbs. WITH LIMPET BASEPLATE MEDIUM (11"-17 3/ 4 ") Model DSLUM $99.95 STANDARD (17 3/ 4 -30") Model DSLUS $99.95
MEDIUM Fits cabinet heights (11 .-17 3/4") Fits cabinet widths (1.1" -17 3/4") Model TMU $ 179.95 STANDARD Fits cabinet heights (11"-17 3/4") Fits cabinet widths (17 3/ 4 -33 1/ 2 ") Model TSU $ 189.95 LARGE Fits cabinet heights (17 3/ 4 "-30") Fits cabinet widths (17 3/4"-33 1/2") Model TLU $ 199.95
TRIPLE PIVOTELLI
WITH TELESCOPIC CEILING
t.de
4
MEDIUM STANDARD LARGE
Model TTM $179.95
Model US $189.95 Model TTL $199.95
CHOICE OF BASEPLATE?
SCREWTYPE--an effective way to support wood-based equipment. Support is provided by the"Fi . shaped baseplate to which equipment is fastened by four wood screws. Also if wood platform is desired.
LIMPET--The Pivotelli Limpet actually grips the cabinet of the equipment with rubber-lined clamps and is adjusted by you to support equipment in its exact center of balance. Pivotelli wall brackets mount onto wood or metal studs and masonry walls.
PROTON CORP.
737 W. Artesia Blvd. Compton, CA 90220 (213) 638-5151 Telex: 182391 FULETINTL
MONITORS/VIDEO TUNER/ PREAMPLIFIER
tuning with the fastest scanning rate of any system currently available. This convenient method of tuning seeks out and stops only
on active stations.
·Multiple Inputs. Up to two RF sources and two composite video
sources can be simultaneously connected to the Proton 600T. Build your own video system around any combination of tapes, discs, games, computers, cable, or off- air broadcasts.
·Multiple Outputs. The video signal selected by front panel or remote control is sent to two separate video outputs; one for viewing and one for taping, or two for viewing and two for taping. The option is yours.
·Multiplex Output for stereo TV decoder.
600T Tuner/Preamplifier
$400.00
MODEL 619
Proton 600M Video Monitor
In the Proton 600M such factors as a high performance comb filter, precision-wound deflection yoke, high frequency flyback transformer, and asophisticated power supply combine to accomplish the goal.
The quality of the picture is further aided by a system of " picture
clarification" circuits which insure that the details of every picture are retained for reproduction. And aseparate series of " color stabilization" circuits preserve subtle color nuances.
The screen itself is completely framed in a streamlined all- black
cabinet. Every control is concealed. Nothing detracts from the image itself.
The Proton 600M provides you with achoice of three color modes.
In the AUTO mode, the Proton 600M automatically adjusts itself for the most natural tleshtones.
In the VIA mode, the system calibrates itself to a color information signal contained within the program material.
In the MANUAL mode, all internal circuits are overridden and you take control.
With its OPC ( Optimum Picture Control; circuitry engaged, the Proton 600M will interpret ambiert lighting conditions and accurately adjust the picture brightness for the best viewing level.
The Proton 600M will shut itself down after five minutes without a video input-- whether the tape ends or the station signs off the air.
The Proton 600M has afrequency response in excess of 4.7MHz and
is able to actually provide more than 370 lines of resolution
600M 19" Monitor
$650.00
Proton 619 19" Color Receiver/Monitor
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Monitor ·Overscan: Typically 5% · Picture Size Variation: less than or equal to 0.6% from 96 to 144V ( Line Voltage) · Black Level Retention: DC Restoration via Keyed Back- Porch Clamping · Usable Luminance: greater than or equal to 800 LUX; typically 1350 LUX Peak White (Black Level at Detent) · Geometric Distortion: less than or equal to 2.5%; typically 0.7% · Video Bandwidth: approximately 4.7MHz ( To estimate resolution capabilities ( chassis], multiply video bandwidth by
80) · Horizontal Resolution: exceeds NTSC Broadcast Standard )4.25M Hz
Tuner/Preamplifier
·Tuning Range: VHF 2-13; UHF 14-83; Cable- Mid Band ( A-1; Super Band ( J- W); Hyper Band ( AA- TT; · Tuning Speed ( Scan Time): VHF/UHF less than or equal to 6Seconds; Cable less than or equal to 5 Seconds · AGC Range: greater than or equal to 80dB, typically 90dB · Audio Frequency Response ( VCR, Disc): 20Hz-30kHz + /1.5dB · Tone Controls: Bass and Treble + 10dB, - 15dB · Inputs: RF1 -- VHF 75 ohms, UHF 300 ohms; RF2-- ( Cable) 75 ohms; Video 1-- ( VCR) 1.0V p- pComposite Video 75 ohms; Video 2 -- ( Disc) 1.0V
p- p Composite Video 75 ohms; Audio 1--( VCR) 150-300mV at 47K ohms 2Channel IL and RI; Audio 2--( Disc) 150-300mV at 47K ohms 2 Channel IL and RI · Outputs: Video 1 -- ( VCR) Fixed Level 1.0V p- pComposite Video 75 ohms; Audio 1--( VCR) Fixed Level 2 Channel IL and RI; Audio 2--( AUX( Variable Level 2Channel ( I_ and RI · Connectors: Video and Audio-- RCA Phono Jacks · Power Requirement: AC 120V 60Hz 105W · Internal Audio System 3.5 Watt
Mono Power Amp Built-in Full Range Speaker · Dimensions: Width 70.2cm/27.5"; Height 46.0cm/18.5"; Depth 49.6cm/20.5" · Shipping Weight: 70 lbs I31.8kg)
619 Receiver/Monitor
$850.00
Proton 302 Speakers
The Proton 302 two-way speaker system provides true hi- fidelity per-
formance in a size that precisely matches the cabinet of the 600M
monitor.
302
pr. $ 130.00
Proton 600T Video Tuner/Prearnpiifier
As ahigh performance video tuner, the Proton 600T offers you multiband tuning capable of receiving 127 channels, including those from your cable system.
As apreamplifier of tremendous capabilities, the Proton 600T makes amost intelligent control center.
The Proton 600T stands apart from the competition in its complete dedication to excellent performance-- both audio and video. It is certain to appeal to those of you who valLe sound as much as sight, and who place unrelenting demands on both.
·Dedicated Circuitry. Audio signals differ dramatically from video signals, so the Proton 600T makes no attempts to process the two together. Instead, separate IF stages are employec, and each has been carefully perfected for handling a specific type of signal. This results in an excellent signal-to-noise ratio for both audio and video.
·Rapid Accurate Tuning. Inside the Proton 600T, an advanced Frequency- Locked Loop tuning system combines extremely accurate
Proton 602M 25" NTSC Color Video Monitor
FEATURES ·Remarkably Low Overscan ( typically 5%) for up to 15% more of the
image ·Exceptionally Stable Power Supply and DC Restoration for truer
blacks and brilliant whites ·Superior Geometric Linearity ( typically 99.3% accurate) for straight-
er lines and more precise shapes ·Exclusive Proton Deflection Yoke assures excellent convergence ·Video Bandwidth greater than 4.7 megahertz for Horizontal Resolu-
tion in excess of 380 lines ·Pure Black Cabinet for enhanced picture quality ·High Performance Comb Filter ·Automatic Shutdown ·Separate Video/Audio Inputs ·RGB Input ·10 Watt Stereo Amplifier ·Video Output
602M Video Monitor1100.00
$
Proton 303 Speakers
The Proton 303 two-way speaker system provides true high fidelity
performance in asize that precisely matches the 25- inch cabinet of the 602M.
303
pr. 4150.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-93
RCA
COLOR RECEIVER/MONITOR
RCA SERVICE COMPANY, A DIVISION OF RCA COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS MKT.
Bldg. 203-3, Route 38 Cherry Hill, NJ 08358 (609) 338-5973
RCA Model JKR-980W 19" Recelver-Vonitor
·U.L. Commercial Listed
·New improved all solidstate design
·Keyboard frequency synthesized tuner with 127-channel capability
·LED readout
·Automatic Light Sensor (ALS)
·Precision in- line slotted mask picture tube
·Keyboard selectable Video- Audio input
·Video/Audio bridging ·3-wire, type SJT, 10-foot
line cord ·Spill- proof back
JKR-980W $ 399.00
I. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Color Standard . Chassis Power Requirements Power Consumption Power Cord Service Adjustments Certification
525 line NTSC Color ColorTrak. CTC120 all solid state 120 VAC 10%; 60 Hz 94 watts, avg., 120 watts, max. Type SJT 3-wire, 10 ft. long Accessible at rear of cabinet U.L. Commercial Listing
II. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Height Width Depth Shipping Weight Cabinet Picture Tube
17"; 43.2 cm. 25 1 / 4 "; 64.1 cm. 19 1 / 4 "; 48.9 cm. 60 lbs. Simulated walnut finish on plastic 19" COTY Precision In -Line, slotted mask. 90° deflection
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS Power Switch Channel Selector: Keyboard Color' Tint' Contrast' Brightness' Volume Control: Rotary Automatic Light Sensor 'Controls located behind hinged front access panel
VIDEO LE/EL
TERM LOOP THRU
REAR PANEL CONTROLS
Focus Screen Cable/Normal Switch Red, Green, Blue Drive Controls Red, Green, Blue Bias Controls Vertical Height
VIDEO I
IN
OUT
AUDIO
Noise Figure
Image Rejection
IF Rejection Sensitivity RF IF Bandpass
Response Co-Channel Sound Attn Adjacent Sound Attn Adjacent Pis Attn Off-set Channel Pull-in
Range
6.0 dB max. Ch 2-13 14.0 dB max. Ch 14-83
6.0 dB max. Ch (A- 5)--I 8.5 dB max. Ch J--Ch (00) VHF- 60 dB min. Ch 2-6
60 dB min. Ch 7-13 60 dB min. Ch ( A- 5)--I 40 dB min. Ch J-- Ch (AA) 30 dB min. Ch ( BB)-- Ch (JJ) 26 dB min. Ch ( KK)--Ch ( 00) UHF-40 dB min. Ch 14-62 30 dB min. Ch 63-82 25 dB min. Ch 83 VHF- 60 dB min. Ch 2-- Ch ( GO) UHF-80 db min. Ch 14-83 VHF - 1.14 pW UHF- 3.0 pW
Chroma - 8dB nominal Pix - 6dB nominal 41.25 MHz 45 KHz greater than 40.0 dB 47.25 MHz t-45 KHz greater than 30.0 dB 39.75 MHz greater than 34 dB
-15 - 2.0 MHz (Single Channel)
B. AUDIO SPECIFICATIONS
Audio Output
1W r 5°.distortion ( nominal)
Audio Distortion
209. typical
Speaker Type
.. 3" x5" oval
Speaker Impedance .. 32 ohms
VIDEO/AUDIO INTERFACE PANEL Video: Type BNC female Audio: RCA phono jacks Video Level: Screwdriver adjustable potentiometer Terminated-- bridging slide switch
III. ELECTRICAL DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
A. RF SPECIFICATIONS Tuning System Type Band coverage
Frequency Coverage Tuner Type Channel Access Channel Indicator Antenna Input
Multiband Frequency Synthesis VHF 2-6, 7-13 Midband A-5-1 Superband J-- W Hyperband (AA)-( 00) UHF 14-83 54-402 MHz,
470-890 MHz. Solid State Direct Access Keyboard LE D VHF- 75 ohms UHF-300 ohms
C. VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS
Luminance Control
Range
6.1max., 4:1 min.
D.C. Gain
Luminance Ch
90% nom, with blanking level clamp
Luminance Bandwidth with
8dB peaking
3dB (3.0 MHz.)
Hue Control Range
- 50° nominal
Gain Ratios
R-Y = 1:1
B-Y= 1.2 ( 0.2):1
G-Y 0.33 ( t0.1)1
AGC Gain ( Chroma)
- 7 · 3.8 dB for - 14 dB
chroma input
-25 3.5 dB for + 6dB
chroma input
Chroma Bandwidth
10MHz at - 4dB
Vertical Interface
45 55
Horizontal and Vertical
Size Tracking with
Beam
less than 3%
Vertical Scan Capability full scan 105-135V RMS line voltage
(a max. beam
H.V. (a Zero Beam
25.0 kV 7.5%
A.FC. Phase Response less than or equal to 10 lines
VM-94
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COLOR RECEIVER/MONITOR
RCA SERVICE COMPANY, A DIVISION OF RCA COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS MKT.
Bldg. 203-3, Route 38 Cherry Hill, NJ 08358 (609) 338-5973
RCA Model JKR-985RR
25" Receiver-Mon.r[or
·U.L. Commercial Listed ·Video Noise Reduction ·Full Resolution Color ·Automatic Color Balance ·Detall Processor
·ChanneLock Tuning
·127-Channel Timing
·Coty 29 Picture Tube
·BlackLock Contrast Circuit
·Stereo TV ·Dynamic Noise Reduction
(DNR®) ·RGB inputs ·100° COTY 29 Picture
Tube ·Digital Infrared Remote
Control (Optional)
JKR-985RR $689.00
I. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Color Standard Chassis
525 line NTSC Color
c-rc 131 all solid state. unitized
Power Requirements
120 VAC - 10°, 60 Hz
Power Consumption
Not to exceed 157 watts. Av I34W
Power Cord
Type SJT 3- wire. 20 ft long. shielded
Service Adjustments
Accessible behind rear panel cover
Certification
U.L Commercial
II. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Height
21
55 2cm
Width
25 64 1cm
Depth
19 . 46 26 cm
Shipping weight
106 lbs.
Cabinet
Rosewood Veneers on fiberboard
Picture Tube
25 - 110 COTY Precision in- line with High
Potential. Bipotential gun. Super Arched
Shadow Mask and striped, pigmented
phosphors
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS Power Switch: Pushbutton Channel Selector: Keyboard Color' Tint' Picture'
Black Lever Volume Up Down Sharp' Bass* Treble'
'Controls located behind front access panel
Audio El* Stereo Mono' DNR · Off' Auto Color' Cable Norm'
LED INDICATORS POWER AUDIO B
AUDIO B- SET STEREO
DNR RGB
Sensitivity
RF IF Bandpass Response
Co- Channel Sound Ann
Adjacent Sound Attn Adjacent Pis Attn Off-set Channel
Pull- in Range
VHF- 1.14 pW UHF- 3.0 pW
Chroma - 8dB nominal Pix 6dB nominal
41.25 MHz - 45 KHz greater than 40 dB 47.25 MHz - 45 KHz greater than 30 dB 39.75 MHz greater than 34 dB
- 3.0 MHz, Cable - 2.5 MHz 3.5 MHz. Air (Single Channel)
B. AUDIO SPECIFICATIONS- per channel ( stereo)
Audio Output
internal spkr. : 1.8 W -ch 5°. TH.D.
external spkr: 1.3 W- ch. ,,, 5°., TH .D. (stereo)
Audio Inputs Frequency Response
hi-fi outputs: 1.5 V RMS max volume controlled), 600 ohms impedance Selected output: 200 mV RMS max.. 600 ohms impedance 680mV RMS, 16K ohms impedance 50-15,000 Hz
Stereo Performance Stereo Mono Switching Speaker Type
BTSC System, 3channels ( stereo L. R; Audio B) Automatic 2ea.- 5" Woofer. Tweeter
Speaker Impedance
internal: 16 ohms nominal external: 6ohms or greater
VIDEO
AUDIO
INTERFACE PANEL
......._ ....
...,,..
....
0- ·01,',.:.::·°
le=
.-.c, m.-...-..,..--.-..i.q..zE
..
_ .......,..
1.0w
0.. ow 0.
rMO
y.0 .. pio
r.c.
r.plo
.0110
r·DIO
.II.
4.11%
(5
®
(5
(5
(5
®
III. ELECTRICAL DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS
A. RF SPECIFICATIONS Tuning System Type Band Coverage
Frequency Coverage Tuner Type Channel Access Channel Indicator Antenna Input Noise Figure
Image Reject:on
IF Rejection
Multiband Frequency Synthesis
VHF 2-6, 7-13 Midband (A- 5)-I Superband J- W Hyperband (AA)-( 00) UHF 14-83 54-402 MHz, 470-890 MHz Solid State Direct Access Keyboard On Screen Display VHF- 75 ohm UHF- 75 ohm 60dB max. Ch. 2-13 14.0 dB max. Ch. 14-83 5.5 dB max. Ch. (A-5)-I 8.5 dB max. Ch. J-(00) VHF- 60 dB min. Ch. 2-6
60 dB min. Ch. 7-13 60 dB min. Ch. (A- 5)-I 40 dB min. Ch. J-( AA) 30 dB min. Ch ( BB)-(JJ) 26 dB min Ch. ( KK)-)(00) UHF-40 dB min. Ch. 14-62 30 dB min. Ch. 63-82 25 dB min. Ch. 83 VHF-60 dB min. Ch. 2-(00) UHF-80 dB min. Ch. 14-83
C. VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS
Contract Range....
5 : 1min. (8 : 1typical)
D C Gain
Luminanced Ch...
90% min with blanking level clamp
Luminance Bandwidth . 4.2 MHz ( limit)
Resolution
· 350 lines
Video input output
1Volt PP 75 ohms, negative sync
Comb Filter Rejection . greater than or equal to 25 dB (3.58 MHz;
920 KHz Attenuation
45 dB min.
Hue Color Range - 40 nominal
Color Matrix Angles
B-Y · 2
(AutoColor Off)
R-Y · 93 ·· 15'
G-Y - 258 - 15'
Gain Ratios
R-Y 11
B-Y- 1.2 (± 0.2):1
G-Y - 0.33 ( 1-0.1)1
AGC Gain (Chroma)
+ 2dB max. with - 14 to + 6dB chroma
input
Chroma Bandwith
0 -- 500 KHz, 1 1:5 MHz
Vertical Interface
40 60
Horizontal and Vertical
size tracking with
Beam Vertical Scan
less than 3%
Capability
full scan 105-135V RMS line voltage
H.V. r's Zero Beam
«I max. beam 28.2 kV nom.
(ct Max. Beam
26.0 kV
AFC Phase
Response
less than or equal to 10 lines
Light Output
Peak: 350 FT- L
D. RGB SPECIFICATIONS
Resolution
500 lines min.
Bandwidth
62 MHz
RGB Enable-TTL Compatible:
Hi ( color on) -
min. 2.4 V ( no current required as
Monitor has internal 3.65 V. pull-up
voltage through 75 ohm resistor)
Lo ( color off) -
less than 1.5 V: less than 50 ohms
impedance; able to draw min. 30 ma.
Sync.- 0.25 V-1 V PP negative polarity.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-95
RCA CLOSED-CIRCUIT Nevv Holland Avenue
VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Lancaster, PA 17604-3140 (717) 397-7661
MONOCHROME MONITORS
TC1105, TC1105X Monitors
R·solution mere then 600 lines at center
Amplifier Bandwidth Greater than 7MHz
High Voltage 85kV nominal
Sweep Linearity Better than 8%
Sweep Geometry Better than 2%
DC Restoration Selectable
Synchronization Internal or external. Switch selectable
Picture Tube 5tn. diagonal Rimband implosion protection.
Scanning Rate: TC1105 -- 60 fields/sec. 525 line TC11050 -- 50 fields/sec, 625 line.
Video Input: Level -- 1.0 V p- pvideo or composite, sync negative ( 05to 2h V p- p). High Z or 75 ohm termination. Connectors -- Two BNC Loop- through.
External Sync Input: Level -- 4.0 V p- p negative. 12 to 5 V p- p). High Z or 75 ohm termination. Connectors -- Two BNC Loop- through
Front Panel Controls: Rotary Knob -- Power On/Off with pilot light. Horizontal Hold, Vertical Hold, Brightness. Contrast. Screwdriver -- Focus. Height, Width.
Rear Panel Switches Video Termination ( H2/70 ohm); DC Restoration ( On/Off); Sync Selection lint/Eat). External Sync Termination ( HiZ/75 ohm).
Supply Voltage: TC1105 -- 120 V, 60 Hz. TC1105X -- 220 V, 50 Hz.
Power 16 watts. approx
Power Cord 3- wire with plug
Operating Environment: Ambient Temperature -- + 14 to + 122° F (- 10 to + 54r Humidity -- Less than 90%
SIZe 147 mm We 180 mmnH x250 rnrn 0 ( 5.8" oil' x9.8)
Weight 30 kg ( 67 lbs)
TC1105MK Rack Mount Kit
For mounting one, two, or three TC1105 or TC11055
monitors in a standard EIA 19 - rack.
Size 480 mm W x177 mm H o270 mm D ( 19" o7" x108 -1·
Weight 2kg ( 43 lbs)
TC1112 Video Monitor
General: Fast warm-up time -- less than 10 seconds
Resolution 700 lines
Amplifier Bandwidth 9 MHz or better
Synchronization Internally derived
Picture Tube 12 inch ( 31 cm) diagonal 90 aluminized Integral implosion protection
deflection
Input 05 to 20 V p-p sync-negative composite video High impedance or 75 ohm termination
Connectors Two BNC 10, looped- through video
Supply Voltage 108 to 132 si 60 Hz
Power 33 watts at 120 VAC
Power Cord 3- wire. 3prong- plug
Cabinet: Material -- Metal with plastic front Finish -- Non-reflecting brown Dimensions -- 358 mm W x261 5mm H x297 rem D (14 09" W x 10 29" Ho 11 67" DI Weight -- 8 kg 117 6 lbs) approx
Shipping information: o2kg ' 20 3 hs'
TC1115 Video Monitor
Resolution 800 lines
Amplifier Bandwidth 15 MHz or better
High Voltage 14 0 kV
DC Restoration Switchable peak clamped
Synch·onization Internally derived.
Picture Tube 15 inch ( 38 cm) diagonal. 110 deflection. Integral implosion protection.
Input 05 to 15 V p- p, sync- negative, composite video High impedance or 75 ohm termination.
Connectors Two UHF for looped- through video.
Supply Voltage 08 to 132 V. 60 Hz.
Power 43 watts at 120 VAC
Power Cord 3- wire. 3- prong plug.
Cabinet: Material -- Metal with plastic front Finish -- Non-reflecting brown Dimensions -- 398 mrn t4i o372 mm H x310 rnm D (15 7' W 14 6" H o Weight 12 kg 26
TC1119 Video Monitor
Resolution 0
Amplifier Bandwidth
MHz or belt,
High Voltage 155 uy
Linearity 4 0 max
DC Restoration Switchable On Off
Synchronization Internally derived
Picture Tube 19 in ( diagonal) 184-sq in viewing area integral implosion protection
Input 05 to 15V pi,. sync- negative, composite video High
impedance or 75 ohm termination
Connectors Two UHF for looped-through viceo
Supply Voltage 108 to 132 V. 60 Hz
Power
+ions at 120 VAC
Power Cord 3- wire. 3- prong plug
Cabinet: Material -- Metal with plastic front Finish -- Non-reflecting brown Dimensions -- 526 mm W x456 mm H x370 mm (20-11/16" W x 17-15 16' Ho 14-9'16" DI Weight -- 27 kg ( 59 5lbs Iapprox
TC1910 Video Monitor And Single/Twin Rack Mount
Resolution Better than 700 lines
High Voltage 11 kV
Linearity 2% or better
DC Restoration Front- Panel- Adjustable
Synchronization Internally derived
Picture Tube 9V. 9- inch ( diagonal) 90 deflection Aluminized Integral implosion protection 44-sq inch viewing area
Input 05 to 2.0 V p- p. sync- negative. composite video High impedancei75 ohm termination switch on rear panel
Connectors Two BNC for looped- through video
Supply Voltage - AC or DC: DC -- 12 to 16 V' 120 V. 60 Hz -- 105 to 130 V ·OC Power Coro ( optional) TC1313
Power: AC Supply Voltage -- 30 watts at 120 V. 60 Hz OC Supply Voltage -- 15 watts at 12 VDC
AC Power Cord 3- wire with grounded plug 6ft
Cabinet Material: Monitor -- Brown, vinyl coated metal case with black plastic front Rack Bezel -- Sheet metal Light metallic grey finish
Dimensions: Monitor -- 869 in W x856 in. H o980 in D
(220 x217 x249 rnm) Rack -- See drawing
Weight: Monitor -- 12.4 lbs ( 564 kg) Rack -- 50180 ( 2.28 kg)
Humidity 10 to 80% relative non-condensing
Altitude 10.000 it ( 300 ml
Shipping Info: Monitor -
Dimensions -- 14 4in x13 1in x130 in ( 365 x333 o330 mmi Weight -- 138 lbs ( 625 kg)
TC1105 TC1105MK TC1112 TC1112MK TC1115 TC1115MK TC1119 TC1910 TC1910MK
$ 275.00 45.00
250.00 50.00
320.00 65.00
400.00 200.00
45.00
VM-96
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SHARP
FROM SHARP MINDS COME SHARP PRODUCTS
· 4
SHARP ELECTRONICS CORP. PROFESSIONAL PRODUCTS DIVISION
10 Sharp Plaza P.O. Box 588 Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 2IiiieW/8--
;
PROFESSIONAL COLOR MONITORS
XM-900
XM-1300
XM-1900
XM -900 9" PROFESSIONAL COLOR MONITOR
The XM-900 9" professional utility color monitor is designed for
studio, field production and editing applications. The monitor is ideal for studio use or other fixed applications, but can also function on 12 to 24 volt battery power for complete portability.
An optional rack mount adaptor allows side- by- side mounting of either two XM-900s or one XM-900 and aWFM or vectorscope, by
using an additonal WFM mounting kit.
Frequent convergence adjustments are not necessary, since the XM-900 uses an in- line electron gun. Adjustments remain stable through wide temperature ranges and long periods of time.
Front panel controls include vertical hold, tint ( hue), color, brightness and contrast, as well as sync, color and scan select switches. Blue check and pulse cross switches are also incorporated into the panel.
The blue check circuit cuts off the red and green guns. A color bar signal allows correct adjustment of color phase and level controls in this mode.
The XM-900 has an automatic/manual degauss circuit which
degausses the monitor each time power is turned on. A 0.47mm phophor trio pitch cathode ray tube and a comb filter combine to make 310- line resolution available at all times.
Normal or fast time constants for the deflection AFC can be selected
by the rear panel skew switch. In the fast time constant mode, non-timebase corrected signals from aVTR can be displayed without flagging disturbance at the top of apicture.
The monitor itself is housed in a rugged metal cabinet to ensure durability. This also minimizes the effect of external magnetic fields.
XM-900
$700.00
XM-9DR Double Rack Adaptor XM-9WR WFM Adaptor Kit for XM-9DR
120.00 95.00
XM-1300 HIGH- RESOLUTION BROADCAST
COLOR MONITOR
High- resolution CRT features 0.31mm dot pitch producing over 600 lines resolution. Standard U.S. controlled phosphors are used, assuring accurate color reproduction and matching with existing high quality studio monitors. Comb filter is provided for maximum resolution and to minimize cross color interference. A front panel switch allows for selection of either the comb filter or anotch filter, whichever is needed. Two video inputs as well as direct RGB inputs are provided. The RGB signals can be from an analog video source or TTL for computer display. H- delay and V- delay functions are provided for apulse cross display.
Fast ( 0.5ms) or slow ( 7ms) AFC time constants can be selected. This allows you to optimally view anoncorrected VTR signal or asignal with stable time base.
Normal and under- scanned picture modes are provided. Hue, chroma, contrast, brightness and aperture are individually adjustable or can be switched to preset for aprecisely calibrated display.
White balance, black balance, individual gun switches and other
service adjustments are located behind aseparate hinged door on the front panel. This prevents accidental misadjustment of the monitor by non- technical people.
An automatic/manual degauss circuit neutralizes the XM-1300 from
the effects of magnetic fields. With its low power consumption and
highly reliable parts, including ICs, the high resolution picture
remains sharp and stable even after many years of use. The diecast
aluminum front mask is made for professional use guaranteeing
excellent durability and reliability.
XM-1300
82995.00
XM-13RMK ( Rackmount Kit)
120.00
XM-1900 19" HIGH RESOLUTION BROADCAST COLOR MONITOR
Type Ccontrolled phosphor for precise colorimetry is incorporated in the new XM-1900 19", high resolution color monitor. A 0.44mm dot trio pitch allows an outstanding 600 lines of resolution. Reliable, durable ICs and other high quality components are used in the XM-1900. These not only ensure stable performance and long life for the monitor, but also reduce power consumption. Monitor ruggedness is further enhanced by adiecast aluminum front mask.
The XM-1900's unique comb filter minimizes cross color interference. The monitor detects the presence or absence of burst and automatically selects the optimum display mode. Manual controls are provided to handle unusual situations.
Picture quality is further enhanced by an automatic degauss circuit that removes magnetism due to external fields every time the power is turned on.
A hinged metal cover for service adjustment controls prevents accidental misadjustment. White and black balance and individual gun switches can be set without fear of inadvertent misadjustment.
Two video and direct RGB inputs can be selected by switches to allow input from cameras and peripheral equipment. The RGB inputs accept signals from both an analog- video source and TTL (transistor-transistor logic).
Other outstanding feattres of the XM-1900 include independent horizontal and vertical delay circuits and across- pulse mode if both are activated. Normal ( 7.0 msec.) or fast ( 0.5 msec.) time constants for the deflection AFC can be selected with the front panel AFC/fast/slow switch as well.
XM-1900 XM-19CT Rackmount Slides
$3500.00 83.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-97
SON-3(
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
COLOR MONITORS
PVM-8020
.. f · : 1
PVM-4000
PVM-4000
4" Color Video Monitor/Viewfinder
·Dependable Trinitron (R) color system with 3.7" diagonal screen
·Advanced power supply switching regulator
·Sync signal checking via HV Delay puse cross) switch
·Blue- only picture display for hue and VTR playback checks
·Two separate video input connectors, rear panel selectable
·Tally lamp and LED tally indicator · EIA standard 19" rackmountable with
RMM-1800 ·Intercom system ·Swing-out viewing stand · Retractable utility grip ·Detachable anti- glare hood ·Optional VLC-4000 carrying case ·Weight: approx. 5lbs., 8oz. Approx. 5lbs.
15 oz. with mounting adaptor and hood ·Dimensions: approx. 4-3/8"H x4-1/4"W x
13"D including projecting parts and controls. Approx. 6-3/8"H x 4-1'2"W x 143/8"D with mounting adaptor and hood.
$1000.00
PVM-5300 Trinitron0 Triple 5" Color Video Monitor
The PVM-5300, three high performance 5" (diagonal) monitors mounted side- by- side in asingle housing. It is the ideal studio monitor for camera or preview monitoring.
· Fits 19" EIA standard rack · External sync input terminals ·Loop-through receptacles for both video
and sync ·Set-up switch for easy adjustment of white
balance and horizontal static convergence ·Weight: 52 lbs., 7oz. · Dimensions: 7"H x 19"W x 16-1/2"D /
$2300.00
PVM-8200T Trinitron® 8" Color Video Monitor
Tt- is versatile 8" rack mount color studio monitor can be easily combined with awaveform monitor or vectorscope or with one more PVM-8200T for dual color monitoring.
·Line ( A) Line (B) selection
·Easily mounted into an EIA standard 19"
rack with an optional mounting bracket
(MB- 5001 to hold two PVM-8200Ts
·External sync can be acceptable
·Loop- through connections for video and
sync
·In place of two PVM-8200Ts, awaveform
monitor or a vectorscope can be installed
by using an optional mounting attachment
(MB- 5011
· BNC connectors allow simple and quick
caole connection
·Available as a dual color monitor PVM-
8200MB ( two PVM-8200Ts and an MB-
500)
·Weight: 26 lbs., 7oz.
·Dimensions: 9-1/8"H x8-1/2"W x
20-1/2"D
$785.00
PVM-8200MB Trinitron® Dual 8" Color Monitor
·Weight: 26 lbs., 7oz.
·D:mensions: 9-1/8"H x8-1/2"W x
20-1/2"D
$1590.00 /
PVM-8020 Trinitron® 8" Color Video Monitor
The PVM-8020 is ideal for field production. It is a perfect companion to the DXC-M3A camera and the VO -6800 U-Matic recorder for location shooting.
· Microblack Trinitron® tube ·3-way AC/DC operation · Built-in stand ·Supplied hood ·Push- to- lock controls
·2video input/output ·6- pin DIN connector for optional TU -1110
TV tuner ·Blue- only, normal / underscan and
HV-Delay
$620.00
MONITOR CABLES
SMF-500 RGB cable for IBM-PC for
PVM-1910 / 1911 / 1910Q/
12710
$57.00
VMC-3425 Cable for Videotext Unit VDX-1000
for PVM-1910 / 1911/ 1910Q/ 1271Q
VMC-3P 8- pin monitor extension
cable 10'
22.00
VMC-25P 8- pin monitor extension
cable 82'
71.00
VMC-1MQ 8-14 pin monitor connect-
ing cable
35.00
VMC-1H 8- pin female coupler
11.00
MONITOR ACCESSORIES
MB- 500 19" rack mount for 2
PVM-8200Ts or 2
MB- 501
PVM-91s
/$120.00
2unit mounting bracket
for any combinations of
PVM-8200T, PVM-91,
waveform monitor or
vectorscope
55.00
MB- 502 19" rack mount for
PVM-1270Q and
CVM-1271
110.00
MB- 503 Rack mount bracket for
PVM-122
110.00
SLR- 101 Slide Rail for PVM-1960
120.00
SLR- 102 Slide Rail for MB- 502
(PVM-12700, CVM-1271) 100.00
SU -530 Monitor stand for
PVM-1910
140.00
VF- 500
Monitor hood for
PVM-1910
50.00
VM-98
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
S
J ip Y. Sony Drive
" Park Ridge, NJ 07656
Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1000
COLOR MONITORS
PV M-1220
SFB-1000
IPVM-1911
19" Trinitron° Color Video Monitor with
Built-in Touch Screen
· Built-in Touch Screen and Controller for fingertip location of any of
768 screen addresses · Line A ( Tuner)/ Line B/VTR/RGB/CMPTR
· Built-in interface for IBM-PC · Accepts Analog/Digital RGB · RGB loop through · RGB/NTSC Superimposition · Display Center adjustment for convenient adjustment of left side of display margin · Color
TV Tuner lopticnall can be connected by asingle connectirg cable · Comb Filter Select Switch ( COMB;TRAP) · AFC ( Automatic
Frequency Control) Switch ( Fast/ Slow) · Built-in speaker · Remov-
able Screen Frame/Shield · Weight: 66Ibs., Dimensions: 18-1/4"H x
19-1 4"W x21-1/4"D
$1485 00
PVIVI-1910
19" Trinitrone Color Video Monitor
·Line A ( Tuner)/ Line B/VTR/RGB/CMPTR · Built-in interface for IBM-PC · Accepts Analog/Digital RGB · RGB loop through · RGB/
NTSC Superimposition · Display Center adjustment for convenient adjustment of left side of display margin · Color TV Tuner ( optional)
can be connected by asingle connecting cable · Comb Filter Select
Switch ( COMB/TRAP) · AFC ( Automatic Frequency Control)
Switch ( Fast/Slow) · Built-in speaker · Removable Screen Frame/
Shield · Weight: 63 lbs. 15 ozs., Dimensions: 18-1/4"H x19-1/4"W x
21-1/4"D
$895.00
PVM-19100
19" Trinitron" Color Video Monitor
PAL/SECAM/NTSC/NTSC 4.43/RGB
· PAL/ SECAM/ NTSC/ NTSC 4.43 switches automatically · Line A (Tuner)/ Line B/VTR/RGB/CMPTR · Built-in interface for IBM-PC · Accepts Analog/Digital RGB · RGB loop through · RGB/NT SC
Superimposition · Display Center adjustment for convenient adjust-
ment of left side of display margin · Color TV Tuner ( optional) can be
ccnrected by asingle connecting cable · Comb Filter Select Swtch
(COMB/TRAP) · AFC ( Automatic Frequency Control) Switch
(Fast/ Slovv) · Built-in speaker · Removable Screen Frame/Shield ·
Weight: 63 lbs. 15 ozs., Dimensions: 18-1/4"H x 19-1/4"W x
21-1/4"D
$1050.00
Sony PVM-1220
Super Fine Pitch 12" Trinitron® Color Video Monitor
·High resolution -- more than 550 lines · Comb filter improves picture
quality -- no color spill or color noise distortion · Three sets of video
PVM-1910
inputs ( Channel A/ B and TEST) enhance studio flexibility · Normal/
underscan selection · Interval check for horizontal and vertical
separately and horizontal plus vertical ( cross pulse) in delayed
scanning mode · Accepts external sync · Auto/color/monochrome
selection · White- balance control inside quick- access slide- out
drawer · Aperture control adjusts frequency response · Front panel
tally lamp · Loop- through connectors for both video and sync allow
multiple bridging · EIA standard 19- inch rack mountable · Weight:
55 lbs. 2ozs., Dimensions: 11-1/4"H x19"W x20-1/4"D
$2150.00
Sony PVM-1271Q
Super Fine Pitch 12" Trinitron` PAL/SECAM/NTSC/
NTSC 4.43 Color Video Monitor
·High resolution- 550 lines with video input and 600 lines with RGB
inputs · PAL/ SECAM/ NTSC/NTSC 4.43 reproduction capability with automatic sensing of each color standard · 80- character, 25- line
(2000 characters) computer display capacity · RGB inputs capable of accepting both digital and analog signals for high-reso'ution
computer, videotext or teletext applications · VideoDisc superimpose
capability ( graphics and character display overlay on VideoDisc image)
with Sony SMC-70 Microcomputer, SMI-7073 Superimpose Adaptor
and LDP- 1000 VideoDisc Player · Line- A/ Line-B/VTR / RGB/ MC ( for SMC-70) input selector · Normal/ underscan selection · AFC slow/
fast switch · Switchable int./ext. sync · Switchable color tempera-
ture 6500°/9300°K · Comb filter improves picture quality-- no color
spill or color noise distortion · Video/sync/audio loop-ttrough
capability for multiple connections · Built-in speaker for audio
monitoring · Rack mountable with optional MB- 502 Rack Attach-
ment plus optional SLR- 102 Slide Rail · Weight: 32 lbs. 2 ozs.,
Dimensions: 13-13/16"H x 13-1'2"W x 15-3/16"D · IBM PC
Compatible
$915.00
SFB-1000
Touch- Screen For PVM-1271Q
·Converts PVM-1271Q to atouch- screen monitor ideal for interactive
applications · Touch- screen attacies to monitor with jus: two
screws · Menu selections can be made from the screen dispiay with
the touch of afingertip · 768 switch screen matrix ( 32 horizontal x24
vertical) · Two ranges of programmable coordinates: Model Zero ( 32
x24), Mode One ( 64 x48) · Switches activated by pressures from 20
to 180 grams · CX-564-080 ( ROM 4Kbyte) controller LSI · Baud rate
from 1200 to 4800 Baud selected au:omatically by controller · Screen
Weight: 1lb., 5ozs., Dimensions: 9-3/4" x14-5/8" x3-1/8" ( HWD) ·
Controller Weight: 3 lbs., 15 ozs., Dimensions: 3-3/4" x 5-5/8" x
10-1/2" ( HWD)
$435.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-99
SONY.
Sony Video Communications
Sor- yDrive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
COLOR TV RECEIVERS/MONITORS
CVM-3000
CVM-2560
CVM-1271
CVM-3000 30" Color TV Receiver/Monitor Enjoy the very best in studio viewing with the world's largest color video monitor. A 30" screen plus Sony's outstanding Trinitron® color system make it the perfect unit for large audience presentations or public events.
· Line/VTR/TV Selection ·VHF/UHF Synthesizer Tuner with Automatic Station
Memory that holds up to 14 channels ·Velocity Modulation System and Comb Filter for
improved Resolution ·Audio Power Output for External Speaker ( 10W) · Front Panel Controls including CRT Adjustment and
Manual Degauss · Remote Commander ( RM-503) controls power On/Off,
Channel Selection, Sound Level and Sound Muting · Loop through capability for Multiple Monitor Connection ·Weight approx: 275 lbs., 9oz. · Dimensions: 29-3/8"H x33-7/8"W x22-7/8"D $7800.00 /
CKV-1900F
19" Color TV Receiver
· 19" diagonal Screen with Trinitron® Color System
· Independent F- type VTR- In Connector for Reproducing
the Playback Picture and Sound from the RF / VHF Output
of aVTR
·VTR /( RF)/TV Selection
· Synthesizer VHF/UHF Tuning System with Automatic
Station Memory that holds up to 14 Active Channels
· LED Digital Channel Display
· Sub- Volume Control to Pre- Adjust Volume
·Side Panel Mounts for Safety Chain
·Weight: 61 lbs., 12 oz.
· Dimensions: 20"H x20-1/2"W x18-5/8"D
$649.00
CVM-2560
25" Color TV Receiver/Monitor A large screen, 25" measured diagonally, full color monitor in astreamlined, compact design. This remote controllable
unit employs a velocity modulation system as well as a comb filter for distinctly improved esolution and is an ideal unit for studios, classrooms, public events or any other large screen type of information display.
·390 Lines ( Video), 340 Lines ( TV)
· Line/VTR/TV Switchable
·VHF/UHF Synthesizer Tuner with Automatic Preset
Tuning of up to 16 Active, Local Channels
· LED Digital Channel Indicator
·Velocity Modulation System and Comb Filter ( COMB/
TRP Filter Switch) for Improved Resolution
· Built- In Speaker ( 3W) plus External Speaker Output
(10W)
· RM-606W Remote Commander Controls power On/Off,
Channel Selection, Sound Lever and Sound Muting
· Channel Lock Switch and Remote On/Off Switch
· Loop through capability for Multiple Monitor Installations
·Sub- volume Control for Presetting Initial Sound Level
·Versatile Output Connectors: TV Out, Monitor Out, Line
Out
·Weight: 136 lbs., 6oz.
· Dimensions: 25.5"H x27"W x19.2"D
$1715.00
Sony CVM - 1271 Super Fine Pitch 12" Trinitron' Color TV Receiver/Monitor · High Resolution -- more than 500 Lines with Video Input · 10- Key VHF/UHF Express Tuning tu plus Sequential
Up/Down Channel Selector and LED Channel Indicator · Line/VTR/TV Input Selector · Monitor/Line/TV Video Outputs
·AFC Slow/Fast Switch · Comb Filter improves Picture Quality -- no Color Spill or
Color Noise Distortion · Up/Down Volume plus Sub- Volume Control for Preset-
ting Initial Sound Level · Rackmountable with optional MB- 502 Rack Attachment
plus optional SLR- 102 Slide Rail · Color Temperature Selector ·Weight: 32 lbs., 2oz.
· Dimensions: 13-13/16"H x13-1/ 2"W x15-3 / 16"D $795.00
VM-100
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice
SONY
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656
(201) 930-1000
MONOCHROME MONITORS
PVM-411 Quadruple 4" Monochrome Monitor
Four independently controlled 4" screen ( measured diagonally) monochrome monitors in asingle rackmount unit. Fits EIA standard 19" rack. Individual unit shielding minimizes magnetic crosstalk
distortion. Spot- killer circuitry prevents phosphor burns when bright images remain on- screen for extended periods. Loop-through capability enhances use in multiple location production and surveillance applications. Individual front- mounted contrast, brightness, V- hold and H- hold controls. Weight: 35 lbs. 4oz. Dimensions:
5-1/4"H x 19"W x 12-1/2"D. PVM-411 Quadruple 4" Monochrome Monitor
$1275.00
PVM-91
PVM -122 12" High Resolution Monochrome Video Monitor
·1000 lines of horizontal resolution at center
·Selectable scanning systems: Normal/Underscan ·DC clamp switch provides astable reference for black level
·External sync input
·Selectable A/ B line inputs with front switch ·Loop-through BNC connectors for Line, A/ B and Sync · Built-in speaker for audio monitoring
·Tally lamp
·Weight: 21 lbs. 11 oz.
/
·Dimensions: 12-3/16"H x12"W x12 -3/ 16 "D
$ 450.00
PVM-91 9" High Resolution Monochrome Video Monitor
A high resolution black and white monitor whose picture precision makes it an ideal unit for use as acomputer display, acalibration device for color video cameras, CCTV applications and astudio control room
monitor. ·800 lines of horizontal resolution at center ·Selectable scanning systems: Normal/Underscan
PVM-122
·DC clamp switch provides astable reference for the black level
·Accepts an external sync
·Loop-through BNC connectors for video and sync
·Can be installed/rackmountad as a dual video with the MB- 500
optional mounting bracket monitor
·Can be installed with awaveform monitor or avectorscope by using
an MB- 501 optional mountirg bracket
·Weight: 12 lbs., 12 oz.
·Dimensions: 8-3/4"H x9"W K 10"D
$ 345.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-101
S
NY Sony Drive
Park Ridge, NJ 07656
Sony Video Communications (201) 930-1000
VIDEO PROJECTOR
VIDIMAGIC FP- 60 COLOR VIDEO PROJECTOR
Sony has performed their magic on video again. They've combined a TV tuner, a BetamaxR recorder/player and a revolutionary single lens video projector into one incredibly compact and lightweight presentation system. Advanced Sony design and technology means easy set-up, operation, and most of all, magical video presentation.
VI DI MAGIC FEATURES · A complete video presentation system that is compact,
lightweight, easy to set up and simple to use
· Single lens color video projector · Betamax. recorder/player · 181 channel cable ready TV tuner · Public address system · Loudspeaker
· Revolutionary new 5.25" high-brightness Indextron' designed for the single tube color projection system
· Super easy set-up with absolutely no registration headaches, just focus and it's ready
· Variable projection size allows use of screens from 30" to a giant 200" ( measured diagonally). Even awhite wall can be used as an instant screen
· Built-in Betamax recorder/player with Beta Il & Ill record/ playback, BetaScan R , Beta Skipsca nTM, linear time counter, external video in/audio in
· Built-in 181 channel VHF/UHF/CATV tuner with 10 key direct tuning
· Built-in public address system. The addition of the optional RM-27 Remote Control/Microphone allows for narration over the video playback/TV program as well as for use as an independent PA system
· RM-27 Remote Control/Microphone with remote control functions for the VCR ( PLAY/STOP/REW/FF/PAUSE) & built-in microphone
· Motor- driven focusing system for accuracy and ease-of- operation
· Adjustable projection angle from 7 to 20 degrees makes picture positioning asnap
· MPX and audio outputs plus video and audio inputs facilitates connection with other audio/video equipment
· On-screen TV channel indication · On-screen sound volume and picture bar displays · Convenient built-in power cord retainer
INDEXTRON is atrademark of Sony Corporation Vidimagic is atrademark of Sony Corporation Betamax is aregistered trademark of Sony Corporation BetaScan is aregistered trademark of Sony Corporation BetaSkipscan is atrademark of Sony Corporation of America
Reprinted with permission from materials by
GENERAL Color System: NTSC System
Test Signal: Focus marker is incorporated
Speaker: 2" x3%" (5cm x9cm) Audio Output: 3W
Power Requirements: 120V AC, 60 Hz Power Consumption: 110W
Dimensions: 91/ 4 "H x83/4"W x263/8"D (246 x220 x668mm) Weight: 34 lbs., 3ozs. ( 15.5kg)
Inputs: VHF/UHF: 75 ohm/300 ohm antenna connector (F- type), VIDEO: 1V p-p, 75 ohms unbalanced, sync negative (phono type), AUDIO: - 10dBs, high impedance ( phono type), MIC: - 60dBs, low impedance ( mini-jack), REMOTE: 8-pin DIN
Outputs: AUDIO: adjustable - 10dBs ( max) low impedance phono type, MPX: 0.0775 Vrms ( phono type), EARPHONE: 8 ohm earphone ( mini-jack)
Remote Connector: 8- pin DIN, for connection with the optional RM-27 Remote Control Unit
FP- 62
Stand alone Video Projector
FP- 60
Video Projector w/built-in Betamax
VPS-60 55" High Gain Screen
VSS-60 Screen Stand
VLC-60S Carrying Bag for Screen and Screen Stand
VLC-60 Carrying Bag for FP-60/FP-62
RM 27
Remote Control w/built-in Microphone for FP- 60
1984 SONY CORPORATION OF AMERICA
$2150.00 2995.00 300.00 300 00
250.00 125.00
45.00
VM-102
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SONY
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
VIDEO & COMPUTER PROJECTION SYSTEM
RVP-460 High Resolution Rear Projection Color Video System
The RVP-460 is an ultra- compact, high resolution rear projection video system with a giant 46" screen. Advanced projection tube, lens and screen technology create a picture sharp enough to reproduce computer-generated graphics and characters. Features include multiple video and audio input connectors including aseparate RGB input.
FEATURES
· Ultra compact size with giant 46" screen · Exclusive tri -fold optics system with unique
and extremely compact Delta Lens · Exclusive coolant- sealed picture tubes
produce 30% brighter picture ( 100 Ft- L) and improve viewing in normal ambient light conditions · Special front- coated mirrors and super bright f1.0 aspherical lens elements minimize light loss and yield brighter pictures · One-piece acrylic screen with patented lenticular surface on one side and fresnel lens on other side reject ambient light and improve contrast · Convertible screen provides choice of optical
path angles to adjust to viewers eye level-- standing or seated (± 1.8 degrees vertically)
· High resolution: RGB more than 500 lines, Video more than 450 lines, RF more than 340 lines
· RGB input accepts both analog RGB or digital RGB with 80 character x25 line color display
· 10 key frequency synthesis express tuning system provides direct access to selected channel with no presetting necessary
· 105 channel cable-adaptable tuning circuitry with Cable TV-Midband ( A-1), Cable TVSuperband ( J- W), VHF ( 2-13) and UHF
(14-83) · Multi- Function Remote Commandera con-
trols power, 10 key Express tuning, direct or
sequential up/down Channel selection, volume, muting, brightness, color, hue, picture matrix sound on/off, tone enhance
and antenna selection · On- screen color bar tuning display · Multiple video and audio inputs with 8- pin
and BNC connectors facilitate easy connections with audio, video and computer systems · Matrix Sound" with twin audio amplifiers
(10W + 10W) and separately enclosed bass reflex speakers · Built-in casters and handles permit simplified positioning anywhere in viewing environment · Optional modular base elevates unit and provides handy locked storage
RVP-460 46" color rear video projector. Displays 80 characters x 25 lines with RGB input. Cable- adaptable tuner. $ 4,440.00
SU -460 Modular Base
S430.00
Inputs/Outputs:
Signal Video Input
Connector
[VTR] 8 pin pins 2 & 6
[VIDEO IN]
BNC connector and phone jack
[RGB IN] 4 BNC connectors
Video Output Audio Input Audio Output
[VTR] 8pin (pins 3 & 4)
[VIDEO OUT] BNC connector
[VTR] 8pin (pins 1 & 5)
[AUDIO IN] 2phono jacks
[LINE IN] 2 phono jacks
[VTR] 8pin (pins 7 & 8)
[AUDIO OUT] 2 phono jacks
Signal Level
Remarks
1V (p-p) ± 0.2 V
NTSC 75 Ohms
sync negative
Composite RGB: 1V (p-p) ± 0.2V or
non-composite RGB: 0.7V (p-p) ±0.15 Sync: 0.5V
(p-p) to 6V (p-p), 75 Ohms, sync negative
Sync is selected
automatically between composite RGB signal and external sync
1V (p-p) ± 0.2V
NTSC, 75 Ohms sync negative
-- 5 dB (436 mV rms)
47k Ohms
10k Ohms 1 kHz 100% modulation
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VI11-103
SONY
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
COLOR VIDEO Et COMPUTER PROJECTION SYSTEM
VPH-72201/1020Q1 HIGH RESOLUTION COLOR VIDEO PROJECTION SYSTEMS
The Sony VPH-722Q1 and 102001 Universal Video Projectors create large, clear video images on flat screens, on high gain curved screens, and even on flat white walls when the use of ascreen is impossible or impractical. These two new lightweight, bright, easy- to- operate color video projectors allow business, professional, government and educational spokespersons to bring the dynamic impact and the excitement of video to all their presentations.
The VPH projectors may be set up at table height, floor mounted on alow rise pedestal or mounted from the ceiling. In addition, they may be used for high resolution front or rear video projection. New picture tubes, new lenses and new circuitry create incredibly brightened, sharper pictures.
Images are clear and crisp enough to reproduce computer generated graphics and characters ( 80 x25 characters) by digital or analog RGB signal.
The projectors are uniquely compact and transportable, and exceptionally simple to operate. They can be set up quickly and easily by anyone, without assistance and without special technical training. They are ideally suited for video teleconferencing, institutional and industrial training as well as for video theaters, schools and other educational facilities using VTR and data curriculum materials.
·10 41.111.1...te
With Optional Ceiling Mount
VPH -72201
Color video projector, portable. Factory adjusted for 72" flat screen.
Displays 80 characters X25 lines w/RGB input.
(Without screen)
$5850.00
VPH -1020Q1
Same as above except factory adjusted for 100" flat screen.
(Without screen)
$5850.00
VPH -202001
200" Universal projector. Floor type, ceiling mount or rear pro-
jection. 3 picture tubes, built-in speakers, greater than 200 lumens,
remote controllable. Horizontal resolution- 600 lines RGB. 150-250"
screens
$6495.00
SPECIFICATIONS
Optical
Projection System: 3picture tubes, 3lenses, direct projection system
Picture Tube: 5.5 inch high- brightness monochrome tubes, coolant sealed
Projection Lens: High-performance acrylic lenses F1.0/ 130mm
Projected Picture Size: VPH-722Q1: 72" measured diagonally VPH-1020Q1: 100" measured diagonally Picture Brightness ( obtained with acurved screen of gain 13): VPH-722Q1: More than 130 fL VPH-1020Q1: More than 65 fL Throwing Distance: VPH-722Q1: Approx. 97-3/4" (2,480mm) VPH-1020Q1: Approx. 132-3/4" (3,368mm) Viewing Distance: VPH-72201: 10 to 66 ft. ( 3to 20m) VPH-102001: 13 to 83 ft. ( 4to 25m)
General Color System: PAL, SECAM, NTSC, and NTSC 4.43, systems switched automatically
Resolution: More than 600 TV lines IRGB inputs) More than 400 TV lines ( video line inputs)
RGB Inputs: Character display capacity 2000 characters ( 80 letters x25 lines) Horizontal frequency: 15.75 kHz Vertical frequency: 60 Hz Test Signal: Cross-hair/crosshatch test pattern, generator is incorporated
Speaker: 2" x35/8" ( 5cm x9cm) 2 units
Power Requirements: VPH-722Q1/VPH-1020Q1: 120V AC 50/60 Hz-- Preset 100-240V AC 50/60 Hz Power Consumption: VPH-722Q1/VPH-1020Q1: 165W ( max.) Dimensions: 10-1/4" x20" x23-5/8" ( HWO) with the brackets pushed down, including projecting parts and controls Weight: 57 lb. 5oz. ( 26kg)
SUPPLIED ACCESSORY
AC power cord
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
VLC-722 Carrying Case $ 450.00 VPR-722 Remote Control Unit $ 400.00 SU -722 Pedestal Floor Stand $ 450.00 PSS-722 Projector Ceiling Mount $ 230.00 VPS-72HG1 72" Curved Screen $ 720.00 VPS-100F1 100" Flat Screen ( Elec.) $ 500.00 VPS-100HG1 100" Curved Screen $2800.00
Recommended P oectof/Scteen comtvnabons
S. 1.en
fiat scteen
Cu,ved screen
Proecto,
vPS-100F1
vPS r2HG1
VPSICOHG1
vPH.1220 VPH-10200
Oestdop o« Ceding mount
Desktop cv Cetteng mount
o, CetFil«o,wmount
node ot Ce.ionv mount
VM-104
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SONY
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656 (201) 930-1000
VIDEO GRAPHICS/IMAGES
SMI-7075 VIDEOTIZER FOR SONY MICROCOMPUTER SMC-70/ 70G
The Sony's VIDEOTIZER takes you to anew world of graphics and images with much easier and faster input capability than akeyboard and atablet.
It allows you to make a picture file for computer with the images from any NTSC composite video source, such as Video Camera, VTR, Video Disk and so on.
And more, enhances the usages of SMC-70 70G as an eminent presentation tool, and aspecial effect equipment for video post- production, with the mosaic effect capability.
The picture file made by VIDEOTIZER has compatibility with "Graphics Editor" and "Video Titler" in the PIC. file format.
FEATURES
· Field Still -- Can freeze the video picture with resolution of
448 x262 pixels'.
· Color Mode -- 2planes of 256 colors, 448 x262 pixels'.
· B&W Mode -- 2planes of 256 gray scales or 16 planes of
user sliceable binary mode, 448 x262 pixels' .
SMC-70 70G: 320 x 200 pixels.
· Write-in Speed -- 1, 60 sec. ( 1field real timing)
· Built-in Genlock capability for any NTSC video input
· Mosaic Effect
· 1pixel can be enlarged up to 32 times for aspecial mosaic
effect
SMI-7075
$ 2900.00
SPECIFICATIONS ( Inputs/Outputs) Video Input: BNC Type, 1.0Vp-p 75 ohms, sync negative B&W Video Output: BNC Type, 1.0Vp-p 75 ohms, sync
negative
RGB Video Output: BNC Type, 0.7Vp-p 75 ohms Composite Sync Output: BNC Type, 4.0Vp-p 75 ohms Keying Signal Output: BNC Type, 0.7Vp-p 75 ohms, without sync signal RGB Multi- Input: 25- pin Connector RGB Multi- Output: 25- pin Connector
Connections
Creating Graphics
Portable Ccior \hcleo Camera DXC-M3
Color Monitor PVM 12700
ot)I
titEI '15)1
Vl IT,
)41,..!1
000
VIDEOTIZER SMI-7075
t
fl ol
eeilet
11110 ogFags.. aa ahn.a.M.MO.6i
istemg.
Superimpose & Special Effects
3olor Monitor PV M-12700
MICIOComputer
·SMC-70 70G
r '-. 1,011lift
VIDECITJZER SMI 7075
UT". (It)
NTSC Supertmposer SMI-7074
, j!
IOU 4.,
t
:
-
GE NLDGKER SMC
U matic Videocassette VO-5850
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-105
A DIVISION OF THE AUDISCAN CORP.
1410 130th St. NE Bellevue, WA 98009 (206) 454-0694 ( 800) 426-0852
1/2" VIDEOCASSETTE RECORDER
VIDEOMASTER
FEATURES ·5-1/4" color monitor · Full size 1/2" VHS format · Four head deck ·Only 22 lbs. · Fits under an airplane seat ·Complete accessory line
Videomaster is geared for the sales, marketing or training professional. It can be operated with both AC and DC ( using an accessory battery pack), has a built-in battery charger, retains a ten- pin connector for easy camera hook-up and boasts rotary 4- head helical scan, azimuth recording for superior playback, pause and slow motion ( with the use of remote control).
The unit utilizes full size 1/2" VHS cassettes, has top- mounted loading and function controls, has a fold down arm which acts as both acarrying handle and an elevation device and comes equipped to accept afull range of accessories. Videomaster is constructed to withstand rugged use, and comes in amatte industrial black finish to complement its business- like design.
ACCESSORIES A nickel- cadmium battery pack R/F modulator VHF color tuner Wireless remote control Dust cover Soft carrying cover Attache- style carrying case A heavy duty shipping case
SPECIFICATIONS Format:
Speed: Monitor:
Speaker: Loading: Features:
Indicator Lamp:
Earphone Jack:
Video In/Out: Video Input: Video Output: Video S/N: Ten Pin Connector: Audio Input:
Audio Output: Audio Hertz: Resolution: Measurements: Weight: Power:
1 / 2" VHS Portable Recorder/Player with monitor built-in. Rotary 4head Helical Scan, Azimuth Recording. SP, LP Er EP ( Records and Plays up to 8hours). 5" Diagonal. Tint, Color, Contrast and Bright-
ness Control Knobs. 0.5W, 8ohm. Top Loading ( Cassette). (Front Panel or Top) Play, Stop, Record, Cassette Ejection, Pause, Counter, Rewind/Fast Forward ( high speed and viewable), Counter Reset, Audio Volume, Power Switch, After
Recording, Insert, Tracking, Sensor for Wire-
less Remote Control and Auto- Rewind. ( Slow motion available with use of Remote Control only). Play, Stop, Pause, Record, After Recording, Battery Warning, Dew Light.
Included ( Disengages internal speaker when in
use).
Included. 0.5-2.0Vp-p ( 75 ohm RCA Connector). 1.0Vp-p ( 75 ohm RCA Connector). 45dB Over.
Included. Microphone - - 67dB ( mini jack). Line -20dB ( RCA Connector).
Line -6dB ( RCA Connector). 70Hz - 8kHz Audio Output: Line ( Standard) Over 240 Lines ( Standard) 15"W x5.5"H x16"D. 22 lbs. AC 117V, DC 12V ( Battery Pack Extra Option).
VIDEOMASTER
$995.00
VM-106
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
VIDEO MEASUREMENT VECTORSCOPES
R520A NTSC VECTDRSCOPE
R520A/R521A/R522A
Luminance Amplitude
Chrominance Amplitude and Phase
Precision Differential Phase
Precision Differential Gain
The Tektronix R520A Series vectorscopes include three basic instruments These are the R520A for NTSC, the R521A for PAL, and the R522A for PAL- M
DISPLAYS The vector display shows the relative phase and amplitude of the chrominance signal on polar coordinates. To help identify these coordinates, the graticule has points corresponding to the proper phase and amplitude of the primary and complementary colors: R ( Red). B ( Blue), G ( Green), Cy (Cyan), YL ( Yellow). and MG ( Magenta).
Any errors in the color encoding, video tape recording, or transmission processes that change these phase and or amplitude relationships cause color errors in the television picture. Polar coordinate displays, such as those obtained on the R520A. R521A. and R522A CRT, have proven to be the best method for displaying these errors.
The polar display permits measurement of hue in terms of relative phase of the chrominance signal with respect to the color burst. Amplitude is expressed in terms of the displacement from center (radial length) toward the color point which corresponds to 75% ( or 100%) amplitude of the particular color being measured.
The outer boxes around the color points correspond to phase and amplitude error limits ( ± 10°, ±20%). For the R520A ( NTSC) the inner boxes indicate ± 2.5" and 2.5 IRE units, and correspond to phase and amplitude error limits per EIA specification RS- 189, amended for 7.5% setup. For the R521A ( PAL) and R522A ( PAL- M). the inner boxes indicate ± 3" phase angle and ± 5% amplitude.
An internally gent- a,:(1 ( 2`,t circle, use (I vector graticule. verities quadrature accuracy. horizontal to vertical gain balance, and gain calibration for chrominance signal amplitude measurements. Two methods of measuring phase shifts are provided You can accurately read large phase shifts from the parallax- free vector graticule. A precision calibrated phase shifter with a range of 30 spread over 30 inches of dial length, is provided for measuring small phase shifts.
CHARACTERISTICS
Graticule -- Two separate graticules provide reference for vector and line sweep displays The parallax -free vector grab cule. or the luminance graticule. is automatically selected and edge-Inghted concurrent with operating mode selection.
Z- Axis Input -- The Z- Axis Input connector accepts external trace- brightening pulses for intensifying aportion of the display during the time of inteiest
Video Inputs -- Dua, BNC input connectors for each channel permit 75 tr loop- through operation with a return loss 46 dB to 5MHz ( exceeds CCIR recommendation 567. Part D and D 2) Amplitude range ,s0 7V to 14V Video ( sync tip to peak white).
AC POWER Mains Voltage Range -- 90 V ac to 136 V ac or 180 V ac to 272 V ac
Mains Frequency -- 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Power Consumption -- 95 W maximum at 115 V ac,60 Hz (Rear panel selector provides rapid accommodation to six linevoltage ranges. Factory set at 115 V ac for the R520A and R522A and 230 V ac for the R521A.)
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS Operating Temperature Range -- 'C to 50"C ambient.
Dimensions
Width Height Depth
Weights
Net Shipping
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS mm
483 178 483
kg
15.0 27.7
in
19.0 7.0
19.8
lb
33.0 61.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES Smoke- gray filter. installed ( 378-0581-00). rackmounting hardware. and slide-out assembly ( 351-0195-01). manual
ORDERING INFORMATION R520A NTSC Vectorscope R521A PAL Vectorscope R522A PAL- M Vectorscope
$ 8,525 $ 8,050 $ 9,540
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 75 U Voltage Step- Up Termination -- When used with a Tektronix vectorscope. the 75 0 Voltage Step-up Termination provides an X5 increase in chrominance amplitude and lets you make more accurate Differential Gain and Differential Phase measurements. Input impedance to the termination is a constant 75 ff. Use of the termination requires a source of external sync to the vectarscope.
Voltage Step-up Termination -- For use with R520A (NTSC).
R522A ( PAL- M) Vectorscopes. Order 011-0100-01
$85
Voltage Step-up Termination -- For use with the R521A Vectorscope Order 011-0109-00
Single Sideband Chroma Amplitude Corrector -- Designed for use with a Tektronix vectorscope in transmitter applications where a vestigial sideband signal is being demodulated with a detecting diode. The corrector provides an x2 increase in chrominance amplituoe and passes luminance components with little or no attenuation. Input impedance is 75 0.
Chroma Amplitude Corrector -- For use with R520A ( NTSC).
R522A ( PALM) Vectorscopes. Order 011-0107-01
$110
Chroma Amplitude Corrector -- For use with R521A Vectbir1s0cope. Order 011 0108-01
Recommended Camera -- For Display Photographs: C-59AP with mounting adaptor 016-0295-01. See camera section this catalog for liformation
R520A Cradle Assembly -- For mounting the R520A in a
WECO backless rack. Order 426 0667 00
$40
Rackmount to Cabinet Conversion Kit -- Order 040-1153-00
$50
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
1/M-107
TEKTRONIX, INC.
WAVEFORM MONITORS
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
1485R Option 01 PAL/NTSC Dual Standard Waveform Monitor
(Rackmount)
Input - Internal or External.
50Hz/60 Hz Squarewave Triggering - Sensitivity: 400 mV ppminimum to 3V p-pmaximum. Input Impedance: 10 kit ac coupled ( Rear Panel loop-through connectors not return loss compensated.)
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES Two BNC right angle adaptors ( 103-0031-00); One pair rackmount ext DWR Slides (351-0195-01). various external graticules (see matrix below); manual.
1480 SERIES
External Graticules w/Tek P/N
1480R/C 1481R/C
1482R
1485R/C
1480 Series
point: Back Porch/Sync Tip. Time Constant: FAST reduces
Blank
mains hum > 26 dB, SLOW reduces mains hum < 0.9 dB.
331-0393-00
x
x
x
x
Bright CRT Especially Suitable for Vertical Interval Testing
Advanced Measurement Modes
Amplitude Measurement Accuracy Approaching 0.2%
Digital Selection of Line and Field
Probe Input Option
15- Line Display for VTR Applications
The 1480 Series waveform monitors have excellent amplitude measuring accuracy and many unique operating modes that enable you to work more precisely and accurately. The monitoring needs of CCU, VTR, control room, transmission' facilities, transmitter, and special systems are met by the use of 1480 Series waveform monitors. The 1485C and 1485R PAL/NTSC dual standard monitors ( see photos) represent the essentials of all seven monitors in the 1480 Series. The differences between the monitors in the series are essentially confined to what lines in the vertical interval are selectable, what filters are selectable in the response mode, and in the field selection modes. Dual-Standard Monitors recognize the signal standard in use automatically and indicate that standard with front panel indicators.
CHARACTERISTICS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION Inputs - Input A and B are 75 U high impedance loopthrough. Return loss is 40 dB from dc to 5MHz in a 75 ti system. Aux Video Input is internally terminated in 75 ti. Return loss is > 34 dB from dc to 5MHz.
Scale Factor - A and B input calibrated 1.0 V ± 7mV. 0.5 V ·15 mV, 0.2 V · 7mV. (0.05 V ··· 2.5 mV Option 06) volts full scale. Variable: Range for each scale factor at least + 40% to -50%. Aux Video Input 1.5 dB gain.
Maximum Input Voltage - 2V p-p (ac coupled). 1.5 V dc f peak ac (dc coupled). Frequency Hesponse FLAT: 50 kHz to 5MHz · 1% ( 1.0 V F.S., VAR in detent). 5MHz to 8MHz + 2, - 3%. 8MHz to 10 MHz + 2. - 6%. Typically within + 2, - 15% to 18 MHz and typically 3dB at 20 MHz. Low Pass: Attenuation > 14 dB, 500 kHz and above. 3.58 MHz Bandpass: Amplitude within -+ 1% of amplitude in Flat response position. Bandpass 600 kHz. 4.43 MHz Bandpass: Amplitude within t1% of amplitude in flat response position. Bandpass 800 kHz. IRE: Conforms to IEEE Standard 205. 1972,
Linear Waveform Distortion Pulse/Bar Ratio: I: 1%. For NTSC or PAL 2T Pulse or NTSC T Pulse. Short Time: Preshoot. overshoot. ringing - 1% of NTSC or PAL 7 Pulse and Bar. Line Time: Tilt or rounding .--Ç.1.0%. Field Time: ( Ac coupled) ·-· 1%.
Nonlinear Distortion - Differential Gain: -- 0.5%.
Dc Restorer - Keyed type. may be turned off. Clamping
Calibrator - Amplitude selected by dc Restorer switch. Sync Tip: 1V 0.2%. Back Porch: 714 mV or 700 mV 0.5%.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION Time Base - 5ms and 10 ms timing accuracy ± 2% (center 10 divisions); 5 (ts and 10 linearity ± 1% (center 10 division).
External Sync Input - Two loop-through high impedance, with - 46 dB return loss in a750 system. Inputs are slaved to A and B input or to A external sync input only.
External Sync Input Requirements - 400 mV to 2V composite video or 200 mV to 8V composite sync.
Field Selector - Positive selection of Field 1or Field 2in the NTSC system. Positive selection of 1, 2, 3, 4. or 1 & 3.2 & 4in the PAL systems.
Line Selector - Dig: Selects lines 9to 22 NTSC. line 9/322 to une 22/335 PAL, line 9/272 to line 22/285 PAL- M. Var: Approx line 20 of the selected field to line 4 of the next related field. 15 lines: Identical to Var. except 15 successive lines are displayed.
Sync - AFC horizontal frequency range is 15.75 kHz 200 Hz. Maximum Jitter with Respect to Input Sync: 10 ns
with 4V RMS hum (30 ns with the addition of - 36 dB white noise). Direct horizontal frequency up to -· 20 kHz. Maximum Jitter with Respect to Input Sync: 12 ns with 4V RMS hum (90 ns with the addition of -- 36 dB white noise).
OUTPUTS Line Strobe - TTL amplitude pulse. Pulse coincident with line or lines selected by VAR, 15 LINE or DIG modes of DISPLAY switch.
Picture Monitor - Output of incoming video with Line Strobe added. Output impedance is 75 0. Output gain adjusted to unity with respect to A and B video input.
Aux Video - Output of incoming video. 75 It output impedance. Gain adjustable to unity with respect to A and B video input.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS RGB·YRGB Staircase Input - -, 12 V for 12.7 divisions deflection. ROB sweep length internally selected for Vi normal sweep. VRGB sweep length internally selected for normal sweep length.
Mains Voltage - Ranges 100 V ac. 110 V Sc. 120 V ac. 200 V ac, 220 V Sc. 240 V ac 10%. Frequency 48 Hz to 62 Hz, maximum power consumption 75 W. At factory, 1480, 1482 preset for 110 V ac. 1481, 1485 preset for 220 V ac.
CHARACTERISTICS ( OPTION 01) 10X Probe Channel - Scale Factor: 1V. 0.5 V, 0.2 V full screen with 10X attenuator probe. Gain Range: -+- 10%. Tilt: --- 5% on 50 Hz. Squarewave High Frequency Response: ·3%. 25 Hz to 5MHz. Referenced to 50 kHz. Input Resistance 1Mlt. ±2%. not including probe. Input RC Product: 20 vs, + 1%. not including probe. BNC connector accepts most Tektronix probes.
10X Probe Calibrator - Output voltage 1,000 V ± 0.005 V or 0.995 V to 1.005 V.
SLOW SWEEP CHARACTERISTICS ( OPTION 07) Duration - 4 to 12 s, variable with front panel control.
Linearity - + 5% of full-screen over the length of the sweep.
Indicator - Front panel indicator on when slow sweep is operating but sweep is not running.
Triggering Signal - APL change - 10% to 90% ( Bump or Bounce), front panel selectable for either or - level change.
Sensitivity - 400 mV to 2V p-p composite video with APL change.
Rate - .-- 0.2 Hz. free-runs at rates ·. 0.2 Hz or with no triggering signal.
NTSC Composite 331-0393-01
CCIR 331-0393-02
CCIR K Visual 331-0393-05
CCIR K Photo 331-0393-07
GRAT A Visual 331-0393-08
GRAT B Visual 331-0393-18
GRAT A Photo 331-0393-10
GRAT B Photo 331-0393-17
x
x x x
yx x
x
ORDERING INFORMATION
1480C NTSC Waveform Monitor
$6,300
1480R NTSC Waveform Monitor
$6,300
1481C PAL Waveform Monitor"
$5,865
1481R PAL Waveform Monitor"
$5,865
1482R PAL- M Waveform Monitor
$6,790
1485C PAL/NTSC Dual Standard Waveform
Monitor'l
$6,300
1485R PAL/NTSC Dual Standard Waveform
Monitor"
$6,300
Option 01 - 1MU, 20 pF Probe Input (not available with Op-
tion 06. probe not included)
+$ 300
Suggested Probe: P6108 10X Probe 2m (010-6108-03), or
3m (010-6108-05)
$ 100
Option 06 - 124 It WECO Style Inputs ( 1480R only) +$2,075
Option 07 - Slow Sweep* 2 ( Option 07 performance included
with Option 06. Do not order with Option 06)
+$ 510
Option 08 - SECAM Field Identification ( 1481C 1481R.
1485C and 1485R only)
+$ 315
1481C/R, 1485C/R meets European Broadcast Union Tech. 3221-E, Guiding Principles for design of Television Waveform Monitors.
'2 Option 07 satisfies EBA Tech 332TE § 322
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
1480R Cradle Assembly - For mounting the 1480R in a
WECO backless rack Order 426-0309-00
$40
Field Case - ( For cabinet versions only). Order 016-0084-00 $120
Trace Recording Cameras - Both the Tektronix C-53P and the C-59AP can be used. The C- 53P gives the largest image possible on Polaroid pack film. The C- 53P requires a battery pack (016-0270-02) and camera mounting adaptor (016-0342-00). The C-59AP is less expensive but produces a smaller image on the film. The C-59AP requires a camera adaptor ( 016-0224-01).
VM-108
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
WAVEFORM MONITORS
1710B SERIES
WAVEFORM MONITORS
· Burst Phase Indicator · Dual Filter Display · Half Rack Width · Bright CRT Display · Internal Graticule · DC Operation · Available in NTSC and PAL Standards
The 1710B Series Waveform Monitors provide all of the commonly used display modes. In addition, the 1710B Series adds relative burst phase indication and dual filter display. All of this in acost effective package for the user who wants high quality at alow price. These new monitors are mechanically compatible and retrofit into an existing system that uses half rack width, 51/4 " waveform monitors.
Because of its extreme light weight, low power consumption, and DC operation ( field installable kit) the 1710B Series is ideal for field production, mobile operations, and any other application where space, power con. sumption and/or portability are prime considerations.
Easy Operation. This monitor was also designed with the user in mind. Controls have clear nomenclature and are laid out in a logical order. This makes the operation of this powerful tool easier than one might expect.
Burst Phase Indication. The relative burst phase between inputs is displayed on the LED bar graph. The center green LEDs indicate the two signals are phase matched. The yellow ones warn the phase is slipping out of an acceptable range. Finally, the red LEDs flag an unacceptable amount of phasing error. This feature allows one instrument to do the complete job of timing and phasing ir abasic television system.
Dual Filter Display. The dual filter display allows the user to view both the complete video signal and the luminance information at the same time using just one instrument This eliminates the need for switching back and
171013 WAVEFORM MONITOR
forth between filters and makes the instrument easier to operate. Ideal for camera setup.
Bright CRT Display. The bright CRT display permits use of the 1710B Series in high ambient light conditiors. Brightness remains high in the magnified sweep modes enhancing the 1710B's use in system timing applications. The internal graticule is parallaxfree to reduce errors and improve its monitoring and measuring capabilities.
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM Frequency Response: FLAT Within 5',»of the response at 5C1!kHz from 50kHz to 6MHz The response at Fsc is within 2% of the response at 50kHz LPASS At least 40dB attenuation at Fsc
Transient Response: Pulse to Bar Ratio 099 100 to 1011 00
Ringing 2% or Less
Overshoot 2% or Less Tilt ( Field Rate Square Wave. Vertical Window, or 25 µS Bar) 1% or Less
Gain Range: Input signals between 025V and 2OV can be adjusted to 140 IRE ) NTSC Ior 1V ( PAL) display
Maximum Absolute Input Level: 2V (dc · peak ac)
Deflection Accuracy: 1710B 1V input for 140 IRE display within 2% 1711B 1V input displays 1V within 2`',
DC Restoration: DC Restorer Clamp Time Back Porch Low Frequency Response a: 50Hz Attenuation of 50Ion Input Signal 20% or less. Blanking Level Shift with 10% to 90% APL Change 1710B APL changes from 50% to either 10% or 90% will cause blanking level shi`t of 1IRE unit ( 7inV) or 'es:. 17118 APL changes from 50% to either 10% or 90% will cause blank ng level shift of 72 mV or less
Blanking Level Shift Due to Presence or Absence of But st 1% or less of 100% video
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM Sweep: Sweep will occur in all Horizontal mode settings with or without synchronization Synchronization Sweep will synchronize to composite video C.5V p- pto 2OV pp or to composite sync 143inV pp to 8V p- p.
2FLD Sweep Repetition Rate: Equal to frame - ate of applied video or external sync
2H Sweep Repetition Rate: Equal to half line- rate of applied video or external sync Timing Accuracy: 1pS city Sweep within 2%
Linearity ( 1mS div): Within 2%
Differential Linearity ( 1pS/ div): Within 3%0 1div (05minor rim) or less compression or expansion of a center screen 4 div signal, when positioned anywhere horizontally
POWER SOURCE Mains Voltage Ranges: 115V (90-132V) 230V ( 200-250V)
Mains Frequency Range: 48Hz to 66Hz
Power Consumption: 25 Watts ( 85 25 BTU hour) maximum
CALIBRATION SIGNAL Frequency: 100kHz · 1kHz
Amplitude: 1V within ro.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions: 251-1 x8424 -W s16.875L
113 3x21 4x42.9cm)
Weight Approx 8 lbs ( 36kg)
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
Instruction Manual 1710B Series 070-5522-00 Power Cable Assembly 161-0066-00
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Cameras: Regular: CSC OPT.2 Automatic: C7 OPT.3
Cabinets: Plain: 390-0018-05 Portable: 437-0100-03 MPS Case: 020-1241-01 Flip Stand ( Order 2): 348-0618-01
Rack Adaptor: 016-0115-04 Blank Panel: 016-0475-00 Viewing Hood: 016-0726-01 Front Panel Cover: 200-1566-00 DC Operation Kit ( 12VDC): 1700 F10
1710B SERIES ORDERING INFORMATION
1710B Waveform Monitor (NTSC system applic,,tions) $ 1 , 890 00
1711B Waveform Mon,' or
(PAL systen· ap,» ·
01!
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
e ittkftr0 "* 528A
WAVEFORM AND VECTOR MONITORS
· 4120 NTSC
TC1·111.11.1t
to 411111111111111111111K ·
528A/1420 SERIES
528A/1420 Series
Parallax- Free Internal Graticule Half Rack Width Proven Performance Available in NTSC. PAL, PALM Models
The 528A Waveform Monter and 1420 Seres veclorscopes and X-Y monitors provide complete monitoring of your video signal. One 528A and
one 1420 Series monitor mounted side by side in the optional rack adaptor provide a continuous display of both the luminance and chrominance
information of your video signal. whether your signal is in the NTSC, PAL. or PAL -M format.
These monitors are ideally suited for use in camera. VTR. video production and post production monitoring applications. They all have simple- tounderstand and easy -to- use controls
CHARACTERISTICS ( 528A)
Inputs -- Two Rear Panel BNC Connectors ( A and
Prov.de
two 75 11 loop through connectors ( norma ly ac coupled but
may be easily modified for dc coupling)
Video Output -- The displayed signal is provided at the Video Out rear panel connector
Dc Restoration -- Slow acting back porch dc restora:ion
Calibrator -- An internal calibration signal provides a convenient reference to verify the deflection factor. Calibrator amplitude is 1.0 V p-p · 1",
TIME BASE Provides four time base operating mudes. baseline visible in each mode with no external video or sync inputs.
EXTERNAL SYNC Input Signal Levels -- 15V to 4.5 V o- p ( cumposite sync will synchronize sweeps)
YRGB AND RGB The 528A can be used with color camera processing amplifies that provide the necessary signal switching and staircase signals
CHARACTERISTICS ( 1420, 1421, 1422)
Chrominance Bandwidth -- Upper 3 dB Pond Fsc
5581 kHz ·10d kHz
100 kHz. Lower
3 dB Point Fsc 5511 kHz
Vector Phase Accuracy -- Within 1
Phase Control Range -- 360 9°r-or:meter
continuous rotation with
Input Amplitude Range -- 1V 6dB.
Front Panel Gain Control Range -- Unity to · 15.12 dB Unity to 6 dB
Input Return Loss -- At least 46 dB to 5 MHz.
Din eremial Phase -- 1 or less.
Differential Gain -- 1% or less.
AC POWER Line Voltage Ranges -- 99 V ac to 132 V ac and 198 V at: to 250 V ac t51'8A). 90 V ac to 132 V ac and 180 V ac to 250v ac (1420 Sene;) Typical Power Consumption -- 48 W ( 528A). 45 W rt420, ,421. 14221
Mains Frequency -- 48 Hz to 66 Hz.
SAFETY 528A Waveform Monitors are CSA556B certified With cover or carry.ng case installed they meet the requirements for listing under UL 1244. 528A's without a cover are UL recognized comoonen:s
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS ( 528A/1420 SERIES)
Dimensions
mm
in
Width Heignt Depth
216 133 470
8.5 5.3 18.5
Weights ( 528A)
kg
lb
Net (witr accessories) Shipping
6.8 10.4
15.0 23.0
Weights ( 1420 Series)
kg
lb
Net ( with ::: ahinet) Net ( without cabinet) Shipping
7.0
15.5
5.9
13.0
9.1
20.0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
9-pin plug connector for 528A ( 136-0099-01); manual: 75111crrrinato,iIn, 1420 1421 142? 1011-0102-001.
ORDERING INFORMATION
These mstruments are configured tor rackmounting and are shipped without cases or covers. To configure for bench or portable use, order appropriate optional accessories.
528A Option 01 Waveform Monitor (for use with 525 line systems)
$2,300
Option 03 -- ( Modified for use with 625 line systems and for 230 V ac power. unless otherwise specified.)
NC
1420 Option 01 Vectorscope ( for NTSC,
factory wired for 115 V ac power)
$2,820
1421 Option 01 Vectorscope (for PAL,
factory wired for 230 V ac power)
62,920
1422 Option 01 Vectorscope ( for PAL- M, factory wired for 115 V ac power) $ 3,185
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Cover -- Unfinished aluminum, nc handle or feet Order
437-0100-01
$60
Carrying Case -- Painted, with handle and feet Order
390-0018-01
$85
Camera -- Use standard C-59AP. C-4 Option 02. or standard C- 5C. ( See camera section of this catalog)
Side- by-Side Rack Adaptor -- (For two half- rack instru-
ments)
Order
016-0115-02
$225
Blank Panel -- Far rack adaptor. Oroer 016-0116-00 .... 842
VM-110
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P 0 Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
WAVEFORM/VECTOR MONITORS
1740 SERIES
1740 Series
Two Instruments in One
Optional Dc Power Capability
Bright CRT Display
R- Y ( V- Axis) Mode
VITS Monitoring
RGB/YRGB Display Capability
Remote Control Capability
Available in NTSC, PAL, and PAL- M
Similar to the 528A and 1420 Series products, the 1740 Series provides all the basic waveform monitoring and vectorscope functions. but in asingle. compact package In addition. the 1740 Senes adds dc power operation ( optional'y). single line vertical interval display which is internally preset, an R-Y sweep mode for differential phase measurements, and remote control of waveform vector mode and most of the front panel sweep and vertical amplifier response functions
The 1740's half- rack width package allows easy installation where space and power requirements are important considerations. The 1740 is mechanically compatible with the 528A. 602, 1420 and 1750 Series instruments.
Typical applications include video signal monitormg in VTR bridges, camera control units, production switcher consoles, and in mobile vans and field productions
EXTERNAL REFERENCES INPUT Etc Input Impedance -- 15 Id! Return Loss -- At least 40 dB from 50 kHz to 6 MHz.
ROB YRGB MODE Will display either a 3- step or 4- step ROB YRGB display
Staircase Amplitude -- A 10 V input will result in a horizontal display of 9 divisions · 14 major divisions
Maximum Operating Staircase Signal Voltage -- 12 V p- pac component Signal voltage not to exceed · 12 V dc · peak ac
VECTOR MODE Chrominance Bandwidth
Upper Lower
3dB point rsc · 500 kHz · 100 kHz 3dB point Fsc 500 kHz · 100 kHz
Vector Phase Accuracy -- Within 125 degrees
Vector Gain Accuracy -- 1740 Within 125 IRE 1741 1742 Within 125°.
Quadrature Phasing -- Within 0 5 degrees
SUBCARRIER REGENERATOR Pull- In Range -- 1740 Within 50 Hz of Fsc 1741 1742 Within 10 Hz of Fsc
Phase Shift with Subcarrier Frequency Change -- 1740 Within 0 5 degrees front Fsc to iFsc · 50 Hz). or Fsc to ( Fsc
50 Hz) 1741 1742 Within 05 degrees Iron) Fsc to ( Fsc · 10 Hz). of Fsc to ) Fsc 10 Hz)
Phase Shift with Burst Amplitude Change -- Within 2 degrees front nominal burst amplitude to · 6dB.
Phase Shift with Reference Switched Between Internal and External References -- Within 0.5 degrees
Phase Shift with Input Channel Change -- Within 0.5 degrees Phase Shift with X5 Gain -- Within 2 degrees
Phase Shift with Variable Gain -- Within 1degrees as gain is vaned from · 3dB to 6dB
Phase Control Range -- 360 degrees continuous rotation
DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS Differential Phase -- Within 1degree.
Differential Gain -- Within 1°.
Variable Gain Range -- 1740: Input subcarner signals between 28 IRE and 140 IRE can be adjusted to normal burst vector length. 1741 1742: Input carrier signals between 210 mV and 10V can be adjusted to normal burst vector length
CRT DISPLAY CRT Viewing Area -- 80 mm y 100 mm. Accelerating Potential -- Nominally 15 kV
GRATICULE Waveform -- Internal, variable illumination Vector -- External, variable illumination Illuminated with VECTOR or R-Y mode selected
POWER SOURCE Mains Voltage Ranges -- 100 V ( 90 V to 100 V). 120 V (108 V to 132 V), 220 V ( 200 V to 242 V), 240 V ( 218 V to 250 V).
Mains Frequency Range -- 48 Hz to 66 Hz.
Power Consumption -- 50 W maximum in ac 30 W nominal in
DC BATTERY OPERATION ( OPTION 07) Voltage Input Range -- 11 V to 16 V
Over Voltage and Polarity Reversal Protection -- Fuse blows if 20 V dc or opposite polarity is applied to the dc INPUT
Under Voltage Protection -- Instrument shuts down when battery voltage ( under load) is below 9 V.
Battery Current -- 35 A or less at 12 V.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS Temperature -- Operating OC to · 50'C Nonoperating
55 C to 75 C Altitude -- Operating 4500 m ( 15.000 ft) Nonoperating 15 000 m ( 50.000 ft)
CERTIFICATION Safety/EMC -- UL 1244
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Width Height Depth
mm
216 133 460
Weight
kg
Net Battery Pack
82 13 6
in 85 53 18 1
lb
188 30 0
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES 03 A fuse ( 159-0029-00). 06 A fuse ( 159-0043-00). Power cord assembly ( 161-0066-00). clear filter ( 378-0219-00). female remote connector, 25 pin ( 131-0569-00), remote connector housing, 25 pin ( 200-1667-00) strain relief. 25 pin (358-0314-00). instruction manual 1070-4473-00)
ORDERING INFORMATION
These instruments are configured for rackmounting and are
shipped without cases or covers Order appropriate options or
optional accessories to configure for bench or portable use
1740 Option 01 Waveform/Vector Monitor ( For
NTSC applications)
$3,970
1741 Option 01 Waveform/Vector Monitor ( For
PAL applications)
$3,970
1742 Option 01 Waveform/Vector Monitor ( For
PAL- M applications)
$4,370
Option 06 -- (Composite internal graticule waveform and vec-
tor)
+$ 30
Option 07 -- (Adds dc power operation capabi)ity. must be
instated during manufacture)
+ 560
Option 11 -- (Portable carrying case. dc power operation and
a BP1 Battery Pack)
+$650
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Battery Pack -- Order BP1
$ 550
Snap-On Front Cover -- High import plastic Order
200-1566-00
$18
Modular Carrying Case -- Portable case with handle feet.
and battery mounting lugs ( lugs are required to mount the
BP1). Order 020-1241-00
$120
Carrying Case -- Painted ( blue) with handle and feet Order
390-0018-01
$85
Cover -- Unfinished aluminum. no handle or feet Order
437-0100-01
$60
Side- by- Side Rack Mount -- For mounting two half- racks
(1740. 528A, etc) in a standard 19 in rack Order 016-0115-02
$225 Blank Panel -- For one half of the side- by- side rack mount
Order 016-0116-00
$42
Flip Stand Feet -- For modular carrying case, stands extend
normal feet for tilted viewing ( two required) Order 348-0618-01
$5-75 Viewing Hood -- For high ambient light environments Order
016-0475-00
$8,25
Camera -- Use C-30 Option 01 with adaptor 016-0269-03.
C- SC Option 02 or 04. or standard C-4
MAINTENANCE ACCESSORIES Extender Board -- 64 pin Order 670-7980-00 Extender Cable -- Order 067-0709-00 Deflection Leads Extender Cables -- (Four each) 196 0939 00
$47 $45 Order $6.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-111
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 1503) 627-71 11 Telex 151754
WAVEFORM/VECTOR MONITORS
1750 SERIES
1750 Series
Two Instruments in One
SCH Phase and Color Framing
R- Y ( Y- Axis) Mode
RGB1YR GB Mode
Remote Control Capability
The Tektronix 1750 Series offers comprehensive monitoring and measurement of television signafs. including SCH phase and color framing, in orie compact unit. While similar in appearance to the 1740 instruments, the 1750 has enhanced performance in each of its operating modes.
The unique new SCH phase display presents horizontal sync timing relative to reference subcarrier (burst) for verification of signal format and color framing. Pis mode enables easy analysis and morpto'ing of these important characteristics of the television signal; a task which previously requised compiex techniques, highly skilled operators and or additional instrumentation The 1750's SCH phase and color frame displays are derived from the standard composite signals. No extra pulses or acided signal details are required
The 1750's SCrl capability makes it particularly valuable in production and editing environments where maintenance of SCH phase and color frame are crcical considerwions. Applications include VTR b·idges, camera control units, switcher consoles, master control, mobile and field production units, arid in maintenance operations support:ng any of these areas.
The 1750's half- rack package allows easy installatior in environments where space and power requi ,ements are important considerations. The 1750 is mechanically compatible with 528A, 602, 1420, ard 1740 Series Tel·tronix instruments.
Waveform Mode The waveform mode vertical response is controlled by selectable flat, chroma, and luminance (IRE) filters. A backporch slow clamp is controllable from the front panel. An internal jumper reprograms the clamp timing for sync tip operation.
The 1750 has pushbutton selection of H, 2H, V. and 2V horizontal sweeps. A magnifier provides calibrated sweep speeds of 1us. elm, 0.5 ms,div, and 0.2 MS. div at the line display rates, and about 20X magnification of the vertical rate display. The faster sweep speeds are useful for determination of horizontal blanking. pulse widths, risetimes, and other timing details of the signal. while the magnified vertical sweep allows viewing of the vertical blanking interval
The internal calibrator signal in the 1750 is useful for verification of both video amplitude and sweep timing calibration Crystal control of the calibrator waveform provides an accurate 1V p- p squarewave and 10 ms timing interval
The sweeps may be locked to the selected signal (A or B input), or to aseparate external reference input The horizontal rate sweeps may be triggered by the selected source ( which presents a stable display in the presence of sync jitter) or may be AFC controlled ( which displays sync jitter for analysis). Use of the AFC sweep control can also reposition the H sweep for more convenient timing measurements.
The 1750 Series has front panel line and field selection. an LED readout of the selected line number, and avideo output with astrobe pulse on the displayed line. The 1750 ( NTSC) will display line 8 thru 23 of either monochrome field ( color fields 1.3 or fields 2,4). The 1751 ( PAL) will display lines 6thru 21 or 319 thru 334. The line selection range may be extended to any line of the frame by the use of rear panel remote control input in conjunction with the front panel controls.
The line selection function is operational in waveform, R-Y, and vector modes. These features provide convenient in-service monitoring or measurement of field blanking interval test or data signals.
R-Y ( V- Axis) Mode In this mode the display is similar to a waveform display with the demodulated chrominance signal on the vertical axis and the selected sweep on the horizontal axis. Any demodulation axis may be set with the phase control; properly setting the display of burst in the vector mode will ensure RY axis decoding when the R-Y mode is selected.
There are differential phase markings on the grab cule for use in this mode. Resolution of differential phase error is about twice that of vector measurement techniques, and the displayed errors may be correlated with time and luminance amplitude by using modulated staircase or modulated ramp test signals.
SCH Phase Mode This display is acombination of the burst vectors of the vector display and abright dot on the outer degree circle of the vector graticule. The position of this " sync dot" around the circle represents the timing ( phase) of the horizontal sync edges relative to the reference subcarrier An individual signal may be analyzed for proper format ( for proper SCH phase) without any additional reference.
Since it is possible for two signals to be properly formatted but not properly timed to each other (i.e a color framing error exists), the 1750 has provision for using an external reference input for its subcarrier phase reference. When the external reference mode is used, the display shows the burst phase and sync timing of the selected signal relative to the burst of the reference signal. simultaneously indicating the SCH phase of the selected input signal and its color frame relative to the external reference signal
INCLUDED ACCESSORIES Power cord assembly ( 161-0066-00). clear filter ( 378-0219-00), contrasting filter (378-0221-01). female remote connector. 25 pin ( 131-0569-00). 9pin ( 131-1006-00), remote connector housing. 25 pin (200-1667-00). 9pin ( 200-1170-00), strain relief. 25 pin ( 358-0314-00), 10A fuse ( 159-0022-00). 05 A fuse (159-0032-00). instruction manual (070-4472-00)
ORDERING INFORMATION
1750 Waveform/Vector Monitor ( for NTSC Ap-
plications)
$5,900
1751 Waveform/Vector Monitor ( for PAL Appli-
cations)
$ 5,900
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Battery Pack -- Order BP1
$550
Snap-On Front Cover -- Nigh impact plastic
Order 200-1566-00
$18
Modular Carrying Case -- Portable case with handle feet.
and battery mounting lugs (lugs are required to mount the
BPI) Order 020-1241-01
$120
Carrying Case -- Painted (blue), with handle and feet
Order 390-0018-01
$85
Cover -- Unfinished aluminum, no handle or feet
Order 437-0100-01
$60
Side-By-Side Rack Mount -- For mounting two half-racks
(1750. 528A, etc). In astandard 19 in rack.
Order 016-0115-02
$225
Blank Panel -- For the side-by-side rack mount
Order 016-0116-00
$42
Flip Stand Feet -- For modular carrying case, stands extend
normal leet tor tilted viewing (two required).
Order 348-0618-01
$5.75
Viewing Hood -- For high ambient light environments
Order 016-0475-00
$8.25
Camera -- Use C-30 Option 01 with adaptor 016-0269-03. or
C- 5C Option 02 or 04, or standard C-4
MAINTENANCE ACCESSORIES Extender Board -- 64 pin Order 670-7980-00 Extender Board -- 32 pin Order 670-7981-00 Extender Cable -- Order 067-0709-00 Deflection Leads Extender Cables -- (Four Order 196-0939-00
$47 $55 $45 each) $6.00
VM-112
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
COLOR PICTURE MONITORS
650HR
High Resolution Display Plus Capability for Critical Signal Analysis
0.25 mm Triad Pitch High Resolution Trinitron CRT
Variable Aperture Correction
Precise Color Tracking Over Full Signal
Range
Two Video Inputs with Differential ( A- B) Capability
Video Inputs Isolated from Ground for Hum Rejection
Capability for Front Panel Switching of External Sync Inputs
NTSC, PAL and Multistandard Decoders Available
Precise Decoders with Outputs to Provide Vector Display on External X-Y Monitor
Unique Monochrome ( White) Display of Decoded Blue Signal for Critical Analysis of Color Noise
The Tektronix 650HR Series color picture monitors are designed for exacting applications where pic· lure quality and signal quality analysis are particularly important. The 650HR uses a Trinitron CRT with resolution capabilities which exceed the performance of encoded television signals The decoders have sufficient chroma channel band width to pass all of the information in standard signals.
The unique blue only mode feeds the decoded blue video signal to the red, green, and blue channels simultaneously. This produces a monochrome display with a high subjective sensitivity to chroma noise, allowing better analysis of video quality The chrominance channel may be manually switched to either the monochrome or color modes, or activated automatically by the pros ence of burst. Circuits in the Tektronix 650HR Series are de signed for color stability and consistency Outputs are provided from the precision decoders and may be used to drive an X-Y monitor for a vector display. The regulated EHT supply is not affected by extreme changes in APL even when calibrated brightness, at peak white, is set at 30 fL. Raster size is held within 1%, while excellent clamping maintains astable black level with a 0% to 100% range of APL.
CHARACTERISTICS
Input Signal Level -- 0.5 V p- p minimum composite video 2V p- p maximum. ( Exceeds CCIR recommendations 567. Part D and D.2.) Impedance -- Unterminated: High Z bridging inputs loopthrough compensated for 75 It ( not internally terminated). Return Loss: - 46 dB to 5MHz. power on or off. input in use or not Maximum Safe Input -- Exceeds CCIR Recommendation 451 2 ( · 5 V peak) Hum Rejection -- Hum is 50 dB down when 4 V maximum RMS common mode mains hum signal is applied to the monitor in floating ground mode.
NTSC Luminance Channel -- Bandwidth ( notch filter removed) 6 MHz. SubCarner notch filter automatically removed when burst r. not present and Mode switch is in Auto position. SubCarner notch filter removed when Mode switch is in Monochrome poscion Dc Restoration back porch type. not affected by burst. Mains hum reduction due to dc restorer is - 6dB. Amplitude Linearity Within 2%. NTSC Chrominance Channel -- Demodulation Axis: R-Y, BY Bandpass 13MHz equiband. Gain Range: Preset at 0 dB. adiustab'e from 6 dB to · 10 dB. PAL Luminance Channel -- Bandwidth ( notch filter removed)
6 MHz Sdbcarner notch filter can be removed by changing internal jumper Subcarner notch litter normally left e circuit. PAL Chrominance Channel -- Demodulation Axis: U. V.
Bandpass 12MHz Gain Range Preset at 0d13; adiustable from 6de to · 10 dB Residual Sebcarrier Detection ( On Applied Signal) -- Color of displayed picture will shift due to any residual subcamer. This feature can be inhibited by aJumper on the decoder board. chrominance/Luminance -- Time Error: 30 ns. Gain Error 3" ,. Delay -- Red to green to blue - 50 ns.
Subcarrier Regeneration -- Phase Error: Within 1' with input
burst variation of · 10 Hz from subcamer nominal burst fre-
quency WIM Temperature Variation Within 5" with ambient
temperature variation from 0 C to · 50 C. with t" for any
·10 Cirv..mment within the range 0 C to 50C. With Input
`.>ignal Variation Within 1' with input signal variations of
3r113 from 1O V. within 3 with variation of burst, sync ratio
of 6dEi ' o 10 dB Breezeway Stability' 0.2: for burst
timing errors including burst width variance (8 to 11 cycles),
arid breezeway variance 0.28 s Phase Error Due to Noise
Wmitrsiir; 1 with RMS white noise at ri
24 dB ( 0dB
700 mV
PICTURE
Height -- 184 'Mr 17 2in)
Width -- :.. 44 rrim is 6in). Underscan -- 20", reduction in both height and width
Aspect Ratio -- 4 3
Deflection Linearity -- Vertical and Horizontal: 1% of picture height emit,vi a central area bounded by a circle whose diameter ndi.ais ; you', hPIght. · 2' <, of picture height outside of cen?rat arna
Convergence Error -- 1mm within the central area. Outside rit Dur. ,.r.ritrai area. color separation ( misconvergence) is
Unblanking -- All active picture elements are displayed. ( Honwg itai rpt,;.r,e· u..w.i.omplished within 10 es
Color Temperature -- 6500 k Easily adjustable to other ..taridard·
Calibrated Contrast -- 30 tL at peak white of standard 1V 5u51 u;ii
Calibrated Brightness -- Disp ayed black may be preset to a invni app ,opri.ite Ir ir ambient conditions
ENT ( Extremely High Tension) -- 19 kV nominal. regulated Load variations cause 1".. 'picture size variation Monitor
complies as of date of manufacture with applicable DHHS standard ,,under Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of
1968
·
Kinescope Protection -- Failure of horizontal or vertical scanning shies off the EHT Failure of HV Regulator circuit does not cause EMT to soar excessively EHT supply is current limited
Heater Voltage -- Regulated dc
650HR MONITOR
SYNC anc TIMING Signal Range -- Compos te sync 0.5 V p- p to 8V p- por composite video 0.5 V p- p to 2V p- p.
Impedance -- Unterminated: High Z bridging inputs loopthrough compensated for 75 it mot eternally terminated). Terminated: 75 U. Return Loss: - 46 dB to 5MHz with respect to 75 9.
Synchronization -- Stable subcamer regeneration, limited by line sync performance. Line sync white noise immunity is 20 dB. Field sync white noise immunity is 20 dB. Field sync stable with tilt equal to 100% of sync amplitude in vertical blanking. Stable with 20 IRE mains num.
AFC ( Two Loop AFC Type) -- Phase Corrector: Corrects for phase errors due to side pincushion correction and other effects within the monitor. Slow AFC Displays timing errors of incoming sync, particularly. 60 Hz or 240 Hz timing errors. Bandwidth is 25 Hz. Fast AFC: Largely corrects for incoming sync errors. -.., 2 kHz bandwidth.
Scan Delay -- Hor zontal Delay: ' la lee; displays burst. Vertical Delay: Displays the vertical blankeg interval of the input signal expanded 2.5 times unless underscan is activated. If the underscan button is depressed. vertical expand is inhibited.
AC POWER Mains Voltage Range -- ITS V: Within 10% ( 104 V ac to 126 V ac). 230 V: Within 10% ( 207 V ac to 250 V ac maximum). 650HR. 650HR-1 are factcvy set for 115 V. 651HR, 651HR-1, 655HR-1 and 652HR-1 are factory set for 230 V.
Crest Factor -- - 1.3.
Mains Current -- 1.5 A RMS maxirnum at 115 V, 60 Hz. 0.75 A maximum at 230 V. 50 riz. Current is substantially higher during degaussing.
Degaussing Surge Current -- 5 A RMS. Power Consumption -- 150 W maximum. 110 W typical.
Mains Frequency -- 48 Hz to 66 Hz. PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
Cabinet
Rack mount
;rim
in
mm
in
Width Height Depth
426 279 419
16.8 11.0 16.5
483 266 464"
19.0 10.5 18.3"
Weights
kg
lb
kg
lb
Net Domestic Shipping Export Shipping
22 7 28 5
50.0 65.0
i
363
80.0
23 5 30.4
37.2
52.0 67 0
82.0
handles
ORDERING INFORMATION
All 650HR Monitors are ShipPed with rackmounting hardware Cabinet version hardware is also included
MODEL NUMBER
650HR 650HR-1 651HR 651HR-1 652HR-1 655HR-1
NTSC · ·
·
PAL
· · M ·
RGB
·
· · ·
PRICE
55.760 $5.970 $6.010 $6.250 $6.660 $6.925
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-113
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P 0 Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
COLOR PICTURE MONITORS
656HR-1
Color Sequencing from Field Identification Signals or Line Burst
Precision Decoding Allows Use of R-Y, B-Y Outputs for Vector Display Measurements
RGB Inputs with Vector Display Outputs
PAL SECAM with Front Panel Control of Decoding Standard
Variable Aperture Correction
Vertical and Horizontal Delay Display Modes
Reduced Chrominance Line Crawl
Indicates Color Sequence Error
Rapid Retrace -- Entire Picture Area is Displayed in Reduced Scan
Two Switchable Inputs Isolated from Ground for Hum Rejection
The lektionix 656HR-1 SECAM color picture monitor is identical in function to the other 650HR Series monitors but is specifically designed for use in SECAM systems. It includes both PAL and SECAM decoders.
Color sequencing is front panel controlled by a three position mode switch. In the Field mode, field identification signals are used for color sequencing and a color display is enabled by the presence of detectable field identification signals. In the Line mode, line burst determines color sequence, and acolor display is enabled whenever detectable SECAM subcarrier is present. Use of the Monochrome mode blanks the chrominance channel
In the internally selectable Forced- Color mode, the very high limiting ratio of the chrominance channel lets you use the monitor to search for very small amounts of crosstalk or other unwanted signals By displaying the chrominance portion of such signals on a brightened display, you can easily identify the source. Two PROMs ( Programmable Read Only Memories) are used in the monitor for generating accurate timing signals. Their use eliminates the need for many internal adjustments and possible drift related to the timing of internal signals. One of these PROMs is programmed with information corresponding to the lines containing subcarrier (including field identification lines) in 625/50
SECAM systems. The monitor then serves as a check on improper additions or deletions of lines that might possibly occur in improperly adjusted VTRs, processing amplifiers, and switchers.
Chrominance line crawl is greatly reduced by using separate acoustical delay lines; one for D'R and one for D'B. With front panel controls, you can turn off luminance or chrominance, and examine each one separately. Brightness is automatically advanced for easier viewing when luminance is turned off for examination of chrominance. For purity checks, you can set up the equivalent of a flat field display by switching luminance off in a monochrome mode ( chrominance off).
The monitor's chroma control has two operating modes. When the control is in, the chrominance is independent of subcarrier amplitude. When the control is out, the chrominance is proportional to subcarrier amplitude. In the first mode, the saturation will vary with incoming video level. In the latter mode, correct saturation will be maintained for varying signal levels. In either mode, both a preset (detent) position and a variable range are available. Switching between the two modes in the preset position provides an indication of abnormal chrominance or luminance amplitude.
CHARACTERISTICS
SECAM PERFORMANCE- LUMINANCE CHANNEL Bandpass Without Chrominance Trap -- (Aperture Corrector set for 0dB). Amplitude: ± 0.5 dB to 5MHz. Aperture Corrector Maximum Range: 8dB; doubled peaked at 2.5 MHz and 7MHz: - 3dB between 4.0 MHz and 5MHz.
Chrominance Filter -- Subcarrier Rejection: > 25 dB at 4.250 MHz and 4.406 MHz, ·_- - 1dB at 5.5 MHz. NOTE: The chrominance filter is removed from the luminance channel whenever the display is monochrome.
Pulse Distortion -- ". 1% tilt on 50 Hz squarewave. 0.5% tilt on 15 kHz squarewave.
Dc Restoration -- Back porch type, not affected by burst. Mains hum reduction due to dc restorer is · 6dB.
Amplitude Linearity -- Within 2%.
Luminance Off Facility -- Displays chrominance only and automatically advances brightness.
SECAM PERFORMANCE -CHROMINANCE CHANNEL High Frequency De- emphasis -- Matching to Encoder High Frequency Pre-emphasis: Error 0.5 dB over the range 3.9 MHz to 4.75 MHz; 3dB at 2.85.
Drift (Center Frequency) -- Within t20 kHz.
Luminance Rejection -- > 46 dB at 15 kHz.
Limiting Ratio -- · 60 dB.
Ultrasonic Delay Line Error -- · 30 na.
Crosstalk at input to Discriminators -- Between Direct and Delayed Chrominance Signals: Alternate line crawl on display is minimized through the use of separate delay hnes for the DR and D'B chrominance signals.
Discriminator Linearity -- Overall: Within · 1%. Incremental: Within 1°·,
Demodulator Center Frequency -- Clamped to crystal reference stabilized within · 0.250 kHz.
Chrominance Sequence and Color Enable -- Chrominance sequence and enable are statistically averaged with hysteresis for best performance under poor signal-to-noise conditions. Field Mode: Based upon field identification signals. Chrominance Amplitude: Disable when chrominance is more than 12 dB low, may be internally selected. Line Mode: normally based upon line burst with no chrominance amplitude disable. An internal jumper provides chrominance amplitude disable if required.
Chrominance Unblanking -- Programmed internally according to 625 line 50 Hz SECAM standards. Field identification signals are displayed in vertical scan delay modes.
Saturation -- Selectable to treat subcarrier as FM signal or to vary the saturation with incoming chrominance level. Independent of Subcarner Amplitude: Gain Error 3%. Dependent on Subcarrier Amplitude: Tracking error · 5% for signals within
3dB to - 6dB of normal amplitude. Chroma Control Separately Adjustable: · 6dB.
Cross Talk -- Between R-Y and B-Y - 40 dB attenuation.
Chrominance/Luminance Time Error -- 60 ns with properly adjusted bell filter and low frequency de-emphasis.
Sequence Error Indicator -- When the front panel red light indicates that the incoming SECAM signal has achrominance sequence opposite to that indicated by an externally applied 7.8 kHz signal. Also when the monitor is used in the Lone mode the light will indicate when the field identification signals are reversed with respect to the Chrominance Sequence present during the active picture.
VECTORSCOPE OUTPUTS Calibrated Modes (Dots in Boxes) -- Selected by front-panel control for either 75% color bars or 25% color bars ( SECAM and RGB only). Vector locations are within 2% of vector magnitude.
Vectorscope Drive Capability -- Suitable to drive 10 ft of 75 t! coaxial cable (unterminated) to X-Y display.
Required X-Y Display Deflection Sensitivity -- 0.05 V/cm on both X axis and Y axis.
Required X·Y Display Input Resistance -- 100 kt.1.
RGB Vector Display -- R. G. and B input signals are matrixed to form R-Y and B-Y signals which are switched to the rearpanel vector output connectors when the RGB inputs are selected.
RGB Matrix Error -- R-Y and B-Y relative output signal amplitudes are within !: 2% of desired values when equal R. G. and B signals are supplied.
RGB Centering -- Black level is clamped to within 9mV which corresponds to Is 1mm in the 75% vector display.
Other Inputs and Outputs -- 7.8 kHz input. 7.8 kHz output. and field 1pulse output.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Same as 650HR on previous page
ORDERING INFORMATION
656HR-1 SECAM + PAL RGB
$7,740
VIA- 114
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
HIGH RESOLUTION PICTURE MONITORS
690SR Color Monitor
High- Resolution 19- Inch Dot-Shadowmask CRT Precise Color Convergence Stabilized Color Balance Rugged Modular Construction Plug-in Interface ( Decoder) Modules Operates at Various Scan Frequencies Adjustable Picture Size and Aspect Ratio
The 690SR is designed to meet critical needs for image evaluation and video signal quality control in television, high definition television, and computer imaging environments. The standard high resolution delta gun, dot-shadowmask CRT and precise, stable video processing circuits provide faithful rendition of picture details and ease of closeup viewing. An optional medium resolution CRT provides more uniform screen appearance and tightly controlled phosphor colorimetry for those applications where greater viewing distance or signal limitations ease the requirement for the highest resolution display.
With either of these CRTs, Tektronix' unique color convergence system provides accurate color registration over the entire screen ( less than 0.5 mm maximum error, equivalent to less than 0.18% of picture height) so that fine details can be observed anywhere in the picture. Stabilization of the operating point of each gun in the CRT compensates for tube aging and helps to maintain accurate long term color balance without frequent maintenance.
A logical and noninteractive set of convergence controls makes reconvergence a quick and straightforward task. All controls are identified by color-coded patterns and produce acomfortable up-down or right- left motion on the screen with negligible interaction. Several function switches are also located within the front drawer. In general, these switches permit the 690SR to be used either as an accurate picture/signal monitor to display faults if they are present, or as a high quality picture display monitor that provides a clean picture even in the presence of signal defects.
Front panel controls have detent positions so that the monitor may be returned to its preset condition quickly and accurately. Adjustments for the preset positions of front panel controls are located within the lockable front drawer together with virtually all other adjustments needed for routine setup.
Picture size can be adjusted from overscan to underscan without significant loss in convergence or linearity. This feature makes it possible to conduct experiments at various image sizes and aspect ratios or to set the monitor for different system characteristics by readjusting the size and position controls.
White balance is adjustable to standard D6500 or to other desired standards using controls located in the front d'awer. A Setup switch allows the raster height to be 'educed to facilitate low- levellight adjustments. Additional features in the television models include horizontal and vertical scan delays, and pulse cross. The CRT is automatically brightened in these modes to facilitate evaluation of blanking interval detail.
The 690SR mainframe is essentially an RGB monitor. The signal conditioning and or decoding functions are performed in plug-in modular units. The 69M41 provides RGB input, with provision for external sync. The 69M01 is an NTSC decoder with aone fine comp. The front control panel for each of these interface modules is also modular and is fitted into the control drawer of the mainframe. (A blank panel is provided with the 69M41 since no controls are needed for the RGB interface.)
All 690SR color monitors are fully enclosed and may be mounted in a standard relay rack. The 690SR complies with UL478 and UL1244, CSA Bulletin 556B, IEC348, and IEC435. The 690SR also complies, as of date of manufacture, with applicable DHHS standards under Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 and with FCC/CBEMA standards for electromagnetic-interface control.
Various combinations of interface, CRT, and scan capability are oraerable. The following " system" option allows convenient specification of a common configuration.
690SR OPTION 02 The 690SR Option 02 is a NTSC color monitor system that consists of a comb/notch filter/decoder module (69M01 Comb Decoder) installed in a690SR mainframe.
690SR COLOR MONITOR
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Dimensions
mm
Wldth
483
Height
444
Depth
579
Weights .,_-.
Net Domestic Shipping
i
kg
50 73
in
19.0 17.5 22.8
lb
110 160
Rackmounting Information
Rear su face of monitor
559 mm (22 in)beh nd rackmourtirg surface, 690SR with inter-
face module installed. INCLUDED ACCESSORIES
8 ft power cold ( 161-0104-00); slide- out tracks
w/mounting hardware (351-0395-00); two front drawer keys
(214-3292-00). menial
ORDERING INFORMATION
690SR Color Monitor, ( High Resolution
(0.31 mm Triad Pitch) CRT
$6,300
CRT OPTION Option 25 -- Contrdled Phosphor Colorimetry. Medium Resolution (0.43 mm Triad Pitch) CRT
--$250
SYSTEM OPTION Option 02 -- Standard Mainframe with 69M01 Installed
+S765
INTERFACE MODULES 69M01 NTSC Comb Decoder
69M41 ROB Interface
$ 850 $ 510
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Rigid Module Extender -- For circuit modules. Order 067-0999-00
$ 50
Minimum Load Unit -- For power supply. Order 067-0998-00
$ 175
Flexible Extender Order 067-1000-00
For interface modules/decoders
$125
Linearity Graticule -- 11 x 15 lines. Order 067-1034 00
$150
Linearity Graticule (NTSC) 14 x 17 lines. Order 067-1054-00
$ 150
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-115
Vemtron Electronics Ltd
15 Main Street E. Rockaway, NY 11518 (516) 599-6400 800-645-2300 Telex 125237
COLOR MONITORS
12 AND 14 INCH COLOR MONITORS CPD TU now offers acomplete line of 12 and 14 inch high resolution and switchable RGB/NTSC color monitors for home, business and industry. Compatible with Apple II, Ile, Ill; IBM PC, PC Jr. ( virtually any personal computer); video tape recorders; TV game and TV tuner.
CPD color monitors incorporate switching regulator power supplies and in- line high contrast CRT's in two sizes to meet all your video requirements. When dependable picture quality and versatility make the difference, make your choice aCPD color monitor.
Features ·Switchable RGB/NTSC ·Compatible with Apple II, Ile, III, IBM PC, PC Jr. Video
Tape Recorder, TV Game, TV Tuner ·High Resolution Model 785H x400V ·Switching Regulator Power Supply ·In- line High Contrast CRT's
SPECIFICATIONS
Model
CRT/Pitch mm
1201 NR
12" 0.47
1203 R 1208 R
1410 NR
12" 0.38 12" 0.28
14" 0.52
1428 R
14" 0.39
Also available...
1201 N
12" 0.47
1201 R
12" 0.47
1205 R
12" 0.31
1416 N
14" 0.64
1410 R
14" 0.52
1423 R
14" 0.42
1423 NR
14" 0.42
Bandwidth 10MHz RGB 3MHz NTSC 20 MHz 25 MHz 12MHz RGB 3MHz NTSC 18MHz
5MHz 18 MHz 25 MHz 3MHz 12 MHz 18 MHz 12 MHz RGB 3MHz NTSC
Resolution 640H x262 V 260 Hx300 V 640 Hx 262V 785 Hx400 V 490 Hx250 V 260 Hx300 V 650 Hzx 250V
260 Hx 300 V 640 Hx 200V 640 Hx 20(1 V 260Hx 300V 490 Hx250 V 600 Hx 250 V 600 Hx250 V 260 Hx 300 V
Note: 1. Suffix " R" denotes RGB; " N" is NTSC; " NR" is switchable
NTSC RGB 2. All RGB models have switchable Pos or Neg sync
3. 12" Models 11.6" ( 295mm) H x12.75" ( 324mm) W x14.4" ( 367mm) D 22 lb ( 10 kg)
4. 14" Models 14.7" ( 374mm) H x14.3 ( 364mm) W x14.6" ( 370mm) D 24.2 lb ( 11 kg)
12 and 14 Inch Color Monitors Model 1200 1201N 1201NR 1203R 1208R 1201R 1410NR Tilt Et Swivel
VM-116
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Price $532.00
587.00 656.00 718.00 887.00 604.00 660.00
26.00
ULTRAVISION
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY
ELECTOR USA, INC.
P.O. Box 699 30 Chapin Road Pine Brook, NJ 07058 (201) 882-0584
COLOR VIDEO PROJECTOR
ULTRA- VISION 2000 PROFESSIONAL COLOR VIDEO PROJECTOR
Model 2000 is ahigh performance large screen color video projector capable of delivering bright outstanding picture definition on any flat or curved screen.
Designed for consistent performance and high reliability, this projector is especially well suited for large screen video applications providing high quality projection imaging.
FEATURES ·Screen sizes from 7to 10 ft. diagonal · Projects onto flat or curved screens · Front or rear projection · Floor or ceiling mounting · Electronic range finder facilities set-up · Electronic border generator surrounds the picture with a black
frame · Comb filter NTSC decoder with enhancement circuitry provides
crisp imaging ·Internal 5- inch loudspeaker with 1.5 watt amplifier ·Liquid- cooled tubes ·Video output drives auxiliary equipment
SPECIFICATIONS
OPTICS
Lenses:
Three Delta IID-OC Optical- coupled, flat field,
f/1.0 high resolution, 3- element acrylic
Focus:
Adjustable lens barrel rotation with mechanical
lock
Resolution:
Min. of 3 line pairs/ mm across 5 inch image
diagonal
PICTURE Display:
8ft. diagonal 16.5 ft. wide x4.8 ft. high); projector throw distance 10 feet front projection; table mounting
Note: Dealer can reconfigure projector for screen sizes from 7ft. up to 10 ft. diagonal; and can change to rear projection and/or ceiling mount.
Throw Distance: Approx. 1.5 times image width
Brightness:
320 lumens peak output
Resolution:
330 lines
GENERAL Width: Length:
Height: Weight: Color:
24 inches 23 inches cabinet, with lens mounted in full focus extension, 30.5 inches 12.5 inches 80 lbs. net; 90 lbs. shipping
Pecan finish with black and metallic accents
ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED Phono to Phono 75 ohm video cable, 48", ( 1), yellow connector Phono to Phono shielded audio cable, 48", 11), red connector
Ultra- Vision 2000
$ 2095.00
VIEWING OPTIONS
the 2000 adapts to lit your viewing area
loorstand front projection viewing
2000 SYSTEM COMBINATIONS
111-111
Monitor VCR System Cooability Use the VCRS tuner to get big screen enjoyment of either
ry broadcast signals or prerecorded
topes Add a TV Tuner to record one program while viewing another
IL. Ceiling mounted front projection viewing
SPEAKER
1/11 SPEAKER
, ---"'"---'
I"lie---1
14
,loorstand rear Pro'action viewing onto ear projection screen
NOTE Eloorstands. ceiling mounts, and screens are optional accessories
2
1111@ei
Monitor Stereo VCR Stereo Amplifier Speakers Produce stereophonic sound in combination witn the big picture for a large room commercial 000hcohor, or when stereo sound is simply a preference NOTE Other combinations are possible Consult with your dealer to insure the compatibility of a particular system
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PRICE
2000 RC Remote on/off cable, 15 ft. long
$ 20.00
2000FS Floor stand kit
90.00
1453 Mounting kit for suspended ceilings
150.00
1463 Mounting kit for concrete or steel beam ceilings
55.00
1465 1445
Mounting kit for rafter or plaster ceilings Extension column; specify length 12 ft. min.)
65.00
includes 1418 finishing ring
ft /9.00
2000 AC Heavy-duty Anvil ATA reusable padded transit case
with accessory compartment
485.00
CV 512 Electronic TV Tuner; 157 channels; cable ready; IR
remote control
395.00
VR 4000 VHS Hi -Fi Stereo Video Cassette Recorder;
cable- ready tuner; 14- day programmable; IR remote
controlled
1350.00
VR 2000 VHS Video Cassette Recorder; cable- ready tuner;
IR remote controlled
700.00
2000 SM Technical Service Manual for 2000
50.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Vm-117
VIDeo are
USATCO
UNIVERSAL SATELLITE CORPORATION
Videomate, the family of American Made High Quality, High Resolution Video Projection Devices that are capable of displaying full color images up to 25' diagonal. Dual Focal Element Lenses, in conjunction with ahighly optimized 9Zone Convergence system provide full screen convergence with corner to corner brightness, clarity and resolution.
Videomate Projection Devices have been designed for awide variety of applications to include Entertainment, Alpha- Numeric Data Display, High Resolution Computer Graphics, Teleconferencing, Educational Training, Sporting Events, and CAD/CAM applications. With Monochrome displays as well as Variable Line Rates, coupled with the ability to interface with NTSC, PAL and SECAM, it's no surprise that Videomate has a projector for your application.
VM-118
Tubes
Lens Cooling Country/Origin Screen Size* (Variable To) Lumens Bandwidth Convergence Resolution:
NTSC PAL** SECAM ··· RGB Scan Freq: Horiz. Vert. Mounting Test Pat. Mfg. Sug. Retail
Alpha 3-5"
IIM
VMIla 3-5"
VMIV
i
3-5"
6" U.S. Precision Delta
IIM
I
IID3
Forced Air Et Liquid Cells
USA
VMIII 1-5"
1103
25' 250 11MHz
25' 450 11MHz" 9Zone
10' 450 40MHz
10' 300 11MHz N/A
400 400 400 800
14kHz-17.5k 50 100Hz
Yes $5995.00
400
N/A
N/A
400
N/A
N/A
400
N/A
N/A
800
1080X800 Pixels
800
11kHz-18.5kHz 17kHz-27kHz
to 37k Hz
to 37kHz···
50-100Hz
50-100Hz
Floor or Ceiling
50-100Hz
Yes
Yes
N/A
$6900.00
$12,900.00 $ 5500.00
All specifications reflect standard product for the indicated price.
·Lens dependent ( optional lenses are available) **Optional plug-in cards will provide a40 MHz Bandwidth ***Optional
Videomate; manufactured by UNIVERSAL SATELLITE CORPORATION IN LIC, NY, USA
Plant: 5-30 54 Ave. Long Island City, NY 11101 (7181 786-1510
Telex 226000 ETLXUR/USATCO
Exec. Offices: 300 East 59 St., Suite 606 New York, NY 10022 (212) 752-7750
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
University Research Company
526 South 780 West Cedar City, UT 84720 (801) 586-5261
4/ COLLEGE BOWL MODEL
COLLEGE BOWL® QUIZ-A-MATIC®
Modularized construction permits quick set-up and take down. Extra long cords accommodate any set layout. Number of players can be modified to suit your needs. Patented circuit uses voltage lock-out and solid state construction, instead of digital.
All cords come with strain relieved molded plugs, and gold plated switch contacts. A bright 4" wide red light at each station clearly identifies each contestant and is easily distinguished under studio lighting.
COLLEGE BOWL QUIZ-A-MATIC
$ 603.00
VISUAL/VOICE RESPONSE LEARNING SYSTEM
OPTIONS
Remote Chime -- provides additional jack on control console to
bypass built-in bell and connect to aremote chime. Plug with 12 feet
of cord included
add to price $ 25.00
Remote Reset -- provides additional jack on control console for
connecting to a remote reset switch. Includes wired switch, 25 feet
of cord and plug
add to price $35.00
Player modification ( for modifying the number of players); write for
pricing, as this is customized to your needs.
SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: Electrical Safety:
Cord Lengths:
Format:
120 VAC, 60 Hz, 6watts
Grounded, low voltage class 2transformer circuit. Approved by the City of Los Angeles Electrical Testing Laboratory Power cord, 8feet; contestant switch cords, 5feet; teamset cords ( from plug to first station), 25 feet. Contestants' stations are on 2foot centers Official College Bowl® format consisting of 2teams of 4. Picks first place and locks out remaining contestants until reset. Bell tone accompanies first response
Note: Use of this system alone will not earn credit towards an official College Bowl® match. Current enrollment and participation in the
official College Bowl® program through College Bowl Co., Inc., from their New York headquarters is required.
Guarantee: One year, parts and labor
(excluding light bulbs).
10 PLAYER MODEL
10 PLAYER QUIZ-A-MATIC®
Contains main control unit with an 8foot ground, 3wire power cord; 2teamsets each with 5player stations on 2foot centers and 6 foot cord from first player station to control unit. Tamper- proof construction and heavy duty switches with gold contact for long life.
10 PLAYER QUIZ-A-MATIC
$ 329.00
OPTIONS Remote Chime Remote Reset
Expansion Jack Coupling Unit
25 Foot Extension Cord Deluxe Carrying Case
add to price $ 25.00 add to price 35.00
add to price 25.00 add to price 50.00
add to price 40.00 add to price 100.00
SPECIFICATIONS Power Requirements: Electrical Safety:
System Package:
120 VAC, 60 Hz, 2watts Grounded, low voltage transformer circuit. Approved by the City of Los Angeles Electrical Testing Laboratory Stores compactly in its 2foot by 1foot by 6
inch deep container. Easily set up within one minute. Weighs 9pounds
Guarantee: One year, parts and labor.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-119
air
VIDEOTEK INC.
243 Shoemaker Road Pottstown, PA 19464 (215) 327-2292 TVVX 710-653-0125
PROFESSIONAL RACKMOUNT COLOR MONITORS
SYSTEM 8 Eight Inch Broadcast Rackmount AC/DC Color Monitor With Comb Filter and Glare Shield. Includes TSM-5A Waveform Monitor and PVS-6 Switcher
Features Include: Raster size regulation, degauss, keyed back porch clamping, A-B inputs, RGB gun switches, RGB background and drive controls, tally light, medium resolution 350 lines, comb filter, internal/external sync, anti-glare shield, rackmount accessories and Service manual.
Options: Pulse Cross, Underscan, Dimensions: 83 /4 "H x19"W x18' ..' D Weight: 40 lbs. Power Consumption/ 40W AC. 33W DC Power Consumption,' Entire System: 95W
VM-8PRD Dual Eight Inch Professional Rackmount AC/DC Color Monitor
Features Include: Raster size regulation, degauss, keyed back porch clamping, A- B inputs, RGB gun switches, RGB background and drive controls, tally light, internal/external sync, rackmount accessories and service manual.
Options: Pulse Cross, Underscan, Dimensions: 83/4"H x19 -W x15 34"D Weight: 57 lbs. Power Requirements: 120VAC 60Hz, 12 or 24VDC Power Consumption: 40W AC, 33W DC ( ea. unit)
VM-8PRW Eight Inch Professional Rackmount AC ' DC Color Monitor with Space Provided for Videotek TSM-5A with Standard Case or VSM-5A with Standard Case.
Features Include: Raster size regulation, degauss, keyed back porch clamping, A- B inputs, RGB gun switches, RGB background and drive controls, tally light, internal/external sync, rackmount accessories and service manual.
Options: Pulse Cross. Underscan, Dimensions: 834"H x19"W x153.1"D Weight: 32 lbs. Power Requirements: 120VAC 60Hz, 12 or 24VDC Power Consumption: 40W AC, 33W DC
VM-8PT Eight Inch Professional Portable AC/DC Color Monitor
Features Include: Raster size regulation, degauss, keyed back porch clamping, A- B inputs, RGB gun switches, RGB background and drive controls, tally light, internal/external sync and service manual.
Options: Pulse Cross, Underscan Dimensions: 9I:i"Fl x8W x16 1,"'D Weight: 25 lbs Power Requirements: 120VAC 60Hz, 12 or 24VDC Power Consumption: 40W AC, 33W DC
VM-8PR Eight Inch Professional Rackmount AC/DC Color Monitor
Features Include: Raster size regulation, degauss, keyed back porch clamping, A-8 inputs, RGB gun switches, RGB background and drive controls, tally light, internal/external sync, rackmount accessories and service manual.
Options: Pulse Cross, Underscan, Dimensions: 83/4"H x19"W x15',"D Weight: 30 lbs. Power Requirements: 120VAC 60Hz, 12 or 24VDC Power Consumption: 40W AC, 33W DC
VM-8PRA Eight Inch Professional Rackmount AC/DC Color Monitor w/Speaker Cabinet
Features Include: Raster size regulation, degauss, keyed back porch clamping, A- B inputs, Dual audio inputs. RGB gun switches, RGB background and drive controls, tally light, internal/external sync, rackmount accessories and service manual.
Options: Pulse Cross, Underscan, Dimensions: 834"H x19"W x15',"D Weight: 32 lbs. Power Requirements: 120VAC 60Hz, 12 or 24VDC Power Consumption: 40W AC, 33W DC
VM-120
Reprinted with Permission From Materials 1984 By VIDEOTEK, INC Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
" la
VIDEOTEK
INC.
243 Shoemaker Road Pottstcwn, PA 19464 (215) 327-2292 TVVX 710-653-0125
PROFESSIONAL RACKMOUNT COLOR MONITORS
A111111111111111·11·1111K
Studio- 13
Professional Rackmount
Color Monitor
Features Include: 13" Trinitrore Plus color picture tube, 380 lines of resolution, Selectable comb and notch filters, nigh voltage regulation, separate H & V delay front panel adjustable, split mode A- Bdisplay (front panel adjustable), automatic sync switchover to internal if external sync is lost, external sync indicator, automatic degauss, keyed back porch clamping, A- B- C looping video inputs, RGB video inputs, RGB Gun switches, RGB background and drive controls. Tally light, Underscan, Presets - Chroma/Phase/Brightness/Contrast, ACC defeat ( switchable). Selectable time constant ( H. AFC), Monochrome select, Set-up select, Aperture control, Rackmount slides, and Service manual
Dimensions: 10 1/2 "H x19'W x19"D Weight: 52 lbs. Power Requirements: 120VAC 60Hz :I: 10% Power Consumption: 85 Watts ( avg.), 120 Watts ( max.)
VM-17PRO
17" Professional Rackmount
Color Monitor
Features Include: Raster size regulation automatic degauss, keyed back porch clamping. A- B- Cinputs, RGB gun switches, RGB background and drive controls, tally light, internal/external sync, pulse cross, underscan, rackmount slides, presets, aperture control, focus control and service manual.
Dimensions: 17 1/2"H x19"W x21 1 /2 "D Weight: 70 lbs. Power Requirements: 120VAC 60Hz Power Consumption: 73 Watts ( avg.), 110 Watts ( max.)
VM-13PRO
13" Professional Rackmount
Color Monitor
Features Include: Raster size regulation, automatic degauss, keyed back porch clamping, A- B- C inputs, RGB gun switches, RGB background and drive controls, tally light, internal- external sync, pulse cross, underscan, presets, selectable automatic chroma control ( ACC) defeat for detection of chroma loss, monochrome- color select, set-up switch, selectable horizontal time constant ( H. AFC), aperture control, rackmount slides.
Dimensions: 10 1 /2 "H x19"W x19"D Weight: 4.8 lbs. Power Requirements: 120VAC 60Hz ± 10% Power Consumption: 55 Watts ( avg.), 80 Watts ( max.)
HR- 130 Broadcast Master Color Monitor RGB/NTSC
Features ·Hi Resolution ( 600 lines) · Video Inputs A, B, C/A- B split field adjustable video display · Linear phase aperture correction · 1H comb filter, notch filter- selectable · Pulse cross mode · Separate H Et V adjustable pulse cross delays · Expanded vertical mode · Underscan mode H.AFC time constants selectable · Internal- External sync selectable · RGB gun kill control · Color- monochrome mode · Manual or preset chroma, phase, brightness and contrast front panel controls ·Analog RGB inputs, NTSC-RGB selectable · Lockabie ergineering adjustment drawer · Tally indicator
VM-13PR
13" Professional Rackmount
Color Monitor
Features Include: Raster size regulation, automatic degauss, keyed back porch clamping, A- B- C inputs, Blue Gun, tally light, internal/external sync, rackmount slides, selectable ACC defeat, and service manual. Dimensions: 10 1 /2 "H x19"W x19"D Weight: 48 lbs. Power Requirements: 120VAC 60Hz ± 10% Power Consumption: 55 Watts ( avg.), 80 Watts ( max.)
Reprinted with Permission From Materials 1984 By VIDEOTEK, INC. Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-121
ILA
VIDEOTEK
243 Shoemaker Road Pottstown, PA 19464 (215) 327-2292 TWX 710-653-0125
PROFESSIONAL RACKMOUNT COLOR MONITORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Professional Color Monitors ( Except HR- 130)
CRT:
Trinitron Plus®
Color Standard:
NTSC
Video Signal Level: . 5V to 1.5V P- Pcomposite video loop thru
or switchable to 75 ohm termination,
negative sync
Video Inputs A- B- C:
Switchable, better than 50 dB at 4MHz
isolation ( Except 8")
Connectors:
BNC
Raster Regulation:
1%, 0-100% APL, 20 fl.
Luminance Bandwidth: 2dB/to 3.2 MHz
DC Restoration:
Keyed back porch clamping maintains 98%
black reference
Pulse Cross:
Switchable to display horizontal and
vertical blanking intervals
Underscan:
Switchable to display 90% of full screen
External Sync:
1V P- Pminimum- 8V P- Pmaximum
Comb Filter:
Permits extended luminance to be displayed
(except VM-13PR, VM-13PRO, VM-17PRO)
-·1141114.1111,....
Above: Rear Connector Panel for VM-8PT, VM-8DR, VM-8PRW, VM-8PRA, VM-8PRD, System 8. Right: Rear Connector Panel for VM-13PR, VM-13PRO, Stud,o-:3, VM-17PRO.
VM-122
Professional Color Monitors
Model No. Description
VM-8PT
8" Professional Portable AC/DC Color Monitor
VM-8PR
8" Professional Rackmount AC/DC Color Monitor
VM-8PRW 8" Professional Rackmount AC/DC Color Monitor with space provided fo- Videotek TSM-5A with Standard Case or VSM-5A with Standard Case
VM-8PRW-1 Same as VM-8PRW and with space provided for PVS-6 Switcher
VM-8PRA 8" Professional Rackmount AC/DC Color Monitor with Speaker Cab.net
VM-8PRD Dual 8" Professional Rackmount AC/DC Color Monitor
System 8
8" Broadcast Rackmount AC/DC Color Monitor with Comb Filter and Glare Shield. Includes TSM-5A Waveform Monitor and PVS-6 Switcher
Includes VSM-5A Vectorscope and PVS-6 Switcher
VM-13PR 13" Professional Rackmount Color Monitor
VM-13PRO 13" Professional Rackmount Color Monitor
Studio- 13 13" Broadcast Rackmount Color Monitor
VM-17PRO 17" Professional Rackmount Color Monitor
PC- 1 US- 1
CF- 1
Options VM-8PT, VM-8PR, VM-8PRW, VM-8PRA, VM-8PRD, System 8 Pulse Cross Underscan Service Manual ( Additional) Comb Filter and Glare Shield
VM-13PRO, Studio- 13 Service Manual ( Additional)
Reprinted with Permission From Materials c1985 By VIDEOTEK, INC. Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice,
List Price $1230.00 1155.00
1198.00 1220.00 1335.00 2265.00
3495.00 3795.00 1250.00 1465.00 2360.00 2065.00
$ 155.00 70.00 11.00
200.00
11.00
algra
VIDEOTiNEc K
243 Shoemaker Road Pottstown, PA 19464 (21 5) 327-2292 TWX 710-6 53-01 25
RM-5T Five Inch AC/DC Portable Color Receiver/Monitor
Dimensions: 85/8"H x7,43"W x12 1/ 2 "D Weight: 15 lbs. Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz, 12 or 24 VDC Power Consumption: 27 Watts AC ( max.), 17 Watt DC ( max I
$ 999-00
VM-5T Five Inch AC/DC Portable Color Monitor
Dimensions: 8'."H x7'n"W x12' ," D Weight: 15 lbs. Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz, 12 or 24 VDC Power Consumption: 27 Watts AC ( max.), 17 Watt DC ( max.)
$970.00
RM-8A Eight Inch AC/DC Portable Color Receiver/Monitor
Dimensions: 93,8H x10',`"W x13-1/ 4 "D Weight: 20 lbs.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz, 12 or 24 VDC Power Consumption: 49 AC Watts ( max.). 40 Watts ( 12 VDC),
33 Watts ( 24 VDC)
$ 957.00
VM-8A Eight Inch AC/DC Portable Color Monitor
Dimensions: 9-H x10 "`.,\/ x13 1/ 4 "D Weight: 18 lbs.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz, 12 or 24 VDC Power Consumption: 49 AC Watts ( max.). 40 Watts ( 12 VDC).
33 Watts ( 24 VDC)
$855.00
RM-9A Nine Inch Portable Color Receiver/Monitor
Dimensions: 11'·i"H x10W x14'."D Weight: 19 lbs. Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 57 Watts AC ( avg.). 77 Watts AC ( max ) $ 1050.00
VM-9A Nine Inch Portable Color Monitor
Dimensions: 11"H x10 1/ 2 "W x13* Weight: 16 lbs. Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 57 Watts AC ( avg). 77 Watts AC ( max)
$998.00
RM-13T Thirteen Inch Cable Ready Portable Color Receiver/Monitor
Dimensions: 14-H x15 1/ 2 W x16 1/ 2 "D
Weight: 33 lbs. Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 55 Watts ( avg.), 80 Watts ( max.;
$ 755.00
VM-13T Thirteen Inch Portable Color Monitor
Dimensions: 1eH x15' ." W x16' . -D Weight: 33 lbs.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 55 Watts ( avg.), 80 Watts ( max.)
$ 725.00
RM-13TR Thirteen Inch Cable Ready Rackmount Color Receiver/Monitor
Dimensions: 153/ 4 "H x19"W x16 1/ 2 "D Weight: 38 lbs. Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 55 Watts ( avg.), 80 Watts ( max.) $875.00
VM-13TR Thirteen Inch Rackmount Color Monitor
Dimensions: 15-'i·H x19"W x16 1/ 2 "D Weight: 38 lbs. Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 55 Watts ( avg.), 80 Watts ( max.)
$820.00
RM-15 Fifteen Inch Color Receiver/Monitor
Dimensions: 15-H x
x16 5,8D
Weight: 36 lbs.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz
Power Consumption: 73 Watts ( avg.), 105 Watts ( max.)
$ 1057.00
Reprinted with Permission From Materials 1984 By VIDEOTEK, INC.
COLOR MONITORS & RECEIVER MONITORS
RM-9A
RM-8A
RM-13TR
VM-15 Fifteen Inch Color Monitor
Dimensions: 14'z:i"Fi x
x 16"D
Weight: 36 lbs.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz
Power Consumption: 73 Watts ( avg.), 105 Watts ( max.)
$ 1039.00
NON-TRINITRON MONITORS
RM-13 Thirteen Inch Color Receiver/Monitor
Dimensions: 133 /4 "H x18"W x15"D Weight: 33 lbs. Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 84 Watts
$8699.99
VM-13 Thirteen Inch Color Monitor
Dimensions: 13./H x18"W x15-D Weight: 33 lbs. Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 84 Watts
$642.00
RM-19B Nineteen Inch Color Receiver/Monitor
Dimensions: 17 -" H x23 :" W x1BVD Weight: 60 lbs. Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60Hz Power Consumption: 83 Watts
RM-25 Twenty-Five Inch Color Receiver/Monitor
Dimensions. 21
x22 .
Weight: 92 lbs.
Power Requirements: 120 VAC 60Hz
Power Consumption: 93 Watts
$740.00 $1070.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-123
I'PLr A
VIDEOTEK INC. 243 Shoemaker Road Pottstown, PA 19464 (215) 327-2292 TVVX ( 710) 653-0125
Meet 4///é
RM-17RC
COLOR MONITORS Et RECEIVER/MONITORS
RM-17RC SEVENTEEN INCH, CABLE- READY
COLOR RECEIVER/MONITOR, REMOTE CONTROL
Dimensions: 17-1/2"H x 17-3/4"W x 18-1/2"D
Weight: 55 lbs. Power Requirements: 120V AC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 56 Watts ( Avg)
90 Watts ( Max). RM-17RC $ 1170.00
VM-17
SEVENTEEN INCH COLOR
MONITOR
Dimensions: 17-1/2"H x 17-3/4"W x 18-1/2"D
Weight: 55 lbs. Power Requirements: 120V AC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 56 Watts ( Avg)
90 Watts ( Max). VM-17
$999.00
RM-19
NINETEEN INCH, CABLE- READY
COLOR RECEIVER/MONITOR
Dimensions: 19"H x26-1/2"W x 18-5/8"D Weight: 63 lbs. Power Requirements: 120V AC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 73 Watts ( Avg)
115 Watts ( Max).
RM-19
$ 985.00
VM-19
NINETEEN INCH COLOR MONITOR
Dimensions: 19"H x26-1/2"W x 18-5/8"D
Weight: 61 lbs.
Power Requirements: 120V AC 60 Hz
Power Consumption: 73 Watts ( Avg)
115 Watts ( Max).
VM-19
$ 899.00
VM-124
11111111111111111{111111111111111111--
RM-26A
RM-26A
TWENTY-SIX INCH, CABLE- READY
COLOR RECEIVER/MONITOR
Dimensions: 25-1/8"H x26-1/2"W x 23-7/16"D
Weight: 118 lbs. Power Requirements: 120V AC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 88 Watts ( Avg)
160 Watts ( Max).
RM-26A
$ 1525.00
VM -26A
TWENTY-SIX INCH
COLOR MONITOR
Dimensions: 25-1/8"H x26-1/2"W x 23-7/16"D
Power Requirements: 120V AC 60 Hz Power Consumption: 88 Watts ( Avg)
160 Watts ( Max). VM-26A
$ 1498.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
IL.II
VIDEO'TEK INC.
243 Shoemaker Road Pottstown, PA 19464 (215) 327-2292 TVVX 710-653-0125
RGB/VM-25A
25" Analog and Digital RGB/NTSC Monitor
Features
·25" Trinitron ® CRT · Comb filter, 350 lines of resolution · Looping video and audio inputs · 8pin VTR connectors · A- B input switching · DC restoration · 100% solid-state · Complete chassis AC isolation · Low power consumption · Dual audio amplifiers · Underscan standard · Blue gun standard · 1V or TTL digital RGB inputs, looping
BNC or multi pin input · Digital composite or separate horizontal and
vertical sync, normal or inverted polarity · Internal- external sync select and looping BNC input · 8 pin DIN connector to work with
Videotek DM- 40R for full remote control and TV tuner capabilities
·Two optional speaker systems
$2425.00
RGB/VM-19A
19" Analog and Digital RGB/NTSC Monitor
Features
· 19" Trinitron CRT · Comb filter, 340 lines of resolution · Looping video and audio inputs · 8pin VTR connectors · A- Binput switching
· DC restoration · 100% solid-state · Complete chassis AC isolation
· Low power consumption · Dual audio amplifiers · Underscan
standard · Blue gun standard · 1V or TTL digital RGB inputs, looping
BNC or multi pin input · Digital composite or separate horizontal and
vertical sync, normal or inverted polarity · Internal- external sync
select and looping BNC input · 8 pin DIN connector to work with
Videotek DM- 40R for full remote control and TV tuner capabilities
·Two optional speaker systems
$1745.00
CD-19HR 19" Analog RGB Monitor
Features · High resolution CRT capable of a clear display of 4,000 characters (approx. 1,000 pixels in screen center) · Black- matrix CRT Pil-Delta construction for stable, simple convergence of beam registration · Full range analog input · Video channel bandwidth, 50Hz to 25MHz I ±-3dB) · 3 looping RGB inputs with selectable 75 ohm termination · Internal/external sync auto select · Multiple scan rates · Separate H and V drives · 19" rack mountable · Dynamic focusing · Multi mains input select · Selectable 3:4 or 1:1 aspect ratio
With Cabinet ( Underscan Standard) $ 3250.00
CD-13HR 13" Analog RGB Monitor
Features
· High resolution CRT capable of a clear display of 2,000 characters
(approx. 700 pixels in screen center) · Black- matrix CRT Pil-Delta construction for stable, simple convergence of beam registration · Full range analog signal input · Video channel bandwidth, 50Hz to
20MHz ( -3dB) · 3 looping RGB inputs with selectable 75 ohm termination · Internal/External sync select set internally · Multiple scan rates · Multi mains input select
With Cabinet ( Underscan Standard) $ 1855.00
Without Cabinet ( Underscan Standard)
1635.00
MONITORS
RGB/VM-25A
CD-19HR CD-13HR
Reprinted with permission from materials c 1984 by VIDEOTEK INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-125
I" LARI VIDEUTEK
243 Shoemaker Road
Pottstown, PA 19464 (215) 327-2292 TVVX 710-653-0125
TEST EQUIPMENT
TSM-5A
TSM-5A WAVEFORM MONITOR
NTSC/PAL/PAL-M STANDARD
FEATURES
Compact:
NTSC:
CCIR:
CCd1:
Vertical Frequency Response:
Graticule:
Visibility:
Inputs:
Output:
Sync: Filters: Time Base:
Line Select: Field Select: YRGB/RGB:
DC Restoration: Options:
TSN1-5A
Mounts in 5-1/4" of vertical rack space and one-half standard rack wicth space Standard NTSC, 525 lines, 30 trame (60Hz field rate) scan Standard PAL, 625 lines, 25 frame 150Hz field rate) scan Standard PAL- M, 525 lines, 30 frame (60Hz field rate) scan
8MHz response Internal illuminated greicule; eliminate parallax errors High brightness CRT, non- glare contrast filter Selectable A/B video looping BNC inputs. AC or DC coupled Separately buffered video out 1V P- P into 75 ohm termination Selectable internal/external input Flat, IRE, Chroma or Differertial Gain 2line, 1line, expanded 2line, expanded 1line, 2field or expanded 2field Selects lines 14 thru 21 of field selected Field 1or 2selectable 9pin access connector for monitoring color processing amplifier waveforms Selectable Standard case, portable case. double rackmount case, blank panel
$2065.00
VSM-5A
VSM-5A VECTORSCOPE NTSC/PAL/PAL-M STANDARD
FEATURES
Compact: NTSC: CCIR: CCIR:
Graticule: Visibility:
Inputs:
REF NTSC: REF PAL:
Test NTSC: Test PAL/PAL-M:
Options:
Mounts in 5-1/4" of vertical rack space and one-half standard rack width space
Standard NTSC, 525 lines, 30 frame (60Hz field) Standard PAL, 625 lines, 25 frame
(50Hz field) Standard PAL- M, 525 lines, 30 frame
(60Hz field) Internal illuminated graticule; eliminates parallax errors Non- glare contrast filter Selectable A/B Video looping BNC
inputs, subcarrier A select, external subcarrier looping BNC inputs, external
PAL pulse looping BNC inputs ( PAL
only) Selectable A/B and external subcarrier
looping inputs Selectable A or Band external subcarrier looping inputs
Normal/Alternate Line/Test Circle Push
Button Selectable Normal/NTSC Display/Test Circle Push
Button Selectable Standard case, portable case, double rackmount case, blank panel
VSM-5A
$ 2365.00
VM-126
OPTIONS ( TSM-5A, VSM-5A) SCC -1 Single Standard Case PTC-1 Portable Case w/Handle Et Sunshield
DRC-1 Double Rackmount Case BLK-1 Blank Panel
S 39.00 135.00
200.00 20.00
Reprinted with Permission From Materials © 1985 By VIDEOTEK, INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
3043 South Oak St Santa Ana, CA 92707 (714) 557-5437
Ec Visual ommunications Technology
PROJECTION SCREENS
Ultralite Projection Screens...The Ultimate in Picture Quality
ULTRALITE PROJECTION SCREENS Get maximum visual impact with sharp brilliant images. Ultralite's high quality optical coating gives you top fidelity magnification with no distortion or loss of detail. · Light is evenly distributed across the screen. Color fidel-
ity is uniform and consistent. · Exceptional image definition is achieved with Ultralite's
"controlled" gain across the screen. · Contrast is improved. Ultralite's special optical coating
absorbs extraneous ambient light without loss of image brightness.
Customized Ultralite ·Ultralite 1for three-gun projection systems. Designed for
wide angle viewing. ·Ultralite 2 for single-gun systems, with wider angle
viewing and minimum drop-off. · Custom match the right Ultralite screen to your projec-
tion system. A variety of sizes to 7- feet diagonal measurement. Wall- mounted, free-standing or custom packaged to your cabinetry.
Durable And Easy To Maintain Ultralite's tough, mar- resistant surface tolerates handling and is easily cleaned with conventional detergents. ·The Ultralite Screen Care Kit is a lifesaver, includes a
soft, protective dust cover and our specially formulated spray cleaner and screen brightener. · In the lightweight, portable version, the durable Ultralite screen now allows you to make your TV system fit your decor.
Screen Resurfacing Service Viscotec can resurface screens for most major projection TV systems -- Advent, Kloss, MGA, Sony and others.
· Saves dollars because resurfacing is often half the cost, or less, of buying a new replacement.
· Improves quality, with superior optical characteristics for improved brightness, truer colors and crisper images.
Let Viscotec help you get more out of your projection TV system. Our versatile range of Ultralite screens let you see a superior picture. Our screen resurfacing service assures you of continued good viewing. You can also use Ultralite screens for front projection viewing of slides and films. Our expertise in optical coatings and manufacturing guarantees timely delivery and consistent quality at attractive prices. When you want to experience the ultimate in viewing.., team up your projection system with Ultralite.
MODEL Ultralite Ior li Ultralite Ior li Ultralite Ior h
SIZE
4' dia. ( 32" x40") 5' dia. ( 52" x40") 6' dia. ( 62" x45")
PRICE* $165.00
285.00 442.50
HARDWARE Floorstand Wall/Ceiling Mounts
( All sizes) $ 67.50
( All sizes)
18.00
SCREEN CARE ACCESSORIES
Protective Dust Cover Protective Dust Cover Protective Dust Cover
Spray Cleaner Screen Brightener Screen Care Kit (Includes cover, cleaner and brightener) *Substantial quantity price breaks specific price quotations.
4' dia. 5' dia. 6' dia.
16 oz. 16oz. 4' dia. 5' dia. 6' dia. are available.
$ 37.50 45.00 52.50
6.75 11.25 52.50 60.00 67.50 Please call for
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VM-127
A
Amdek Corp. ASACA/Shibasoku Corp. of America Audiotronics
Barco Electronic, IncJElector USA, Inc Barco industries, Inc Beckman Instruments, Inc Robert Bosch Corp Bourbon Street Assoc./Television Equip. Assoc., Inc.
Camera, Color Cohu, Inc Conrac CorpJConrac Div.
Da-Lite Screen Co., Inc. Draper Shade & Screen Co
E
Elk' Intl, Inc. Eiectrohome Electronics Electronic Systems Products, Inc ELMO Mfg. Co
G
Galaxy Audio Visual General Electric Co. General Technical Corp. Gould Electronics
H
Hitachi Denshl, Ltd Hitachi Sales Corp. of America Hughes Aircraft Co
ikegami Electronics, Inc. inflight Services, Inc Interactive TV Systems interand Corp
Jensen Sound Laboratories JVC Co. of America
Kloss Video Corp
Leader Instruments Corp Learning System, VisualNoice Response Lenco, Inc. Lucasey Mfg. Co., Inc
INDEX
VM-2, 3 VM-4 VM-5
VM-6-8 VM-9, 10
VM-11 VM-12 VM-13
VM-35 VM-14 VM-15-19
VM-20, 21 VM-22, 23
VM-24 VM-25-31 VM-32-34
VM-35
VM-36 VM-37 VM-38 VM-39
VM-40, 45 VM-46, 47
VM-48
VM-49-52 VM-53
VM-38, 91 VM-54
VM-55 VM-56-62
VM-63-65
VM-66-70 VM-119
VM-71-73 VM-74, 75
MPO VIdeotronics
VM-76, 77
Mitsubishi Electric Sales America, Inc.
VM-78
Monitor Comparator
VM-13
Monitor Mounts
VM-74, 75, 92
Monitors, Color
VM-2-5, 7-9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19, 25, 45, 49-51, 55
57, 60-62, 71, 72, 79, 85-88, 93, 97-99, 113-116, 120-125
Monitors, Monochrome
VM-5, 10, 14, 16-18, 26, 27, 44, 52, 73
89, 90, 96, 101
N
NEC Home Electronics ( USA), Inc Non-Linear Systems/Kaypro Corp. Northern Information Technology, IncJNIT
o
Oscilloscopes
VM-79 VM-80 VM-81
VM-11, 40-43, 66-70, 80
Panasonic Industrial Co.
VM-82-91
Pivotelli, USA
VM-92
Projection Systems, Video
VM-6, 28-34, 37, 39, 48, 53, 63-65
82, 102-104, 117, 118
Proton Corp
VM-93
RCA Service Co.
VM-94, 95
RCA Closed-Circuit Video Equipment
VM-96
Receivers/Monitors, Color
VM-58, 59, 78, 79, 86, 87, 93-95
100, 123, 124
Screens, Video Projection Sharp Electronics Corp Sony Corp. of America Standard/Audiscan Corp Switchers
VM-20-23, 127 VM-97
VM-98-105 VM-106 VM-34
Tektronix, Inc. Teleconferencing Systems Television Receivers, Color Temtron Electronics, Ltd.
Ultra-Vision/Elector USA, Inc. Universal Satellite Corp University Research Co
U
VM-107-115 VM-54, 81
VM-46, 47, 78, 100 VM-116
VM-117 VM-118 VM-119
Vectorscopes
VM-42, 68, 107, 110-112. 126
Videocassette Recorders, VHS
VM-35, 55
Videomate/Universal Satellite Corp.
VM-118
Video Presentation Systems
VM-24, 35, 36, 56, 76, 77, 83, 84, 106
Videotek, Inc
VM-120-126
Videotizer
VM-105
Viscotec, Inc.
VM-127
Waveform Monitors
VM-42, 68, 108-112, 126
VM-128
A
Acme-Lite Mfg. Co Ambico, Inc. Anton/Bauer, Inc.
Bogen Photo Corp Walter S. Brewer Co., Inc. BW Lighting Systems
Cine 60, Inc. Colortran, Inc. Comprehensive Video Supply Corp. Cool- Lux Lighting Ind., Inc Costume Armour, Inc.
Frezzolini Electronics, Inc.
G
Gitzo/Karl Heitz, Inc. Graflex/Subsea Corp The Great American Market
Kapco Mfg. Co., Inc. Kliegl Bros Kobold/SAT NEWS, Inc.
LIGHTING
TABLE OF CONTENTS Video Lighting
VL-2-5 VI-6 VL-7
Lowel-Light Mfg., Inc. LTM Corp. of America
VL-8, 9 VL-10-21 VI- 22-31
VI-32, 33 VL-34-37 VI-38, 39 VL-40, 41
VL-42
ModuLight Systems
O
Olesen
Perrott Engineering Labs, Inc.
VI-43-45
Rosco Laboratories, Inc
VL-46 VL-47 VL-48, 49
Smith-Victor Sales Corp. Strand Century, Inc Strong Intl/Ballantyne of Omaha Sylvania/GTE Products Corp.
VI-50 VL-51-55 VL-56-78
U
Ultimate Support Systems, Inc Index
1985 Bill Daniels Co., Inc. Shawnee Mission, KS
VL-79-83 VI-84, 85
VI-86, 87
VL-88, 89
VL-90
VL-91, 92
VI- 93-97 VL-98-108
VL-109 VL-110
VL-111 VL-112
VI- 1
ACME -LITE MFG. CO.
3401 W. Madison Street Skokie, IL 60076 (312) 588-2776
Q-BRITE PROFESSIONAL LIGHTING
NO. 660
Basic unit conical in shape with 4" diameter reflector, 3" depth which produces medium beam spread, fixed focus. Ideal illumination for most lighting applications
such as key or fill as main or side light. Housing sun-
shine gold. 600W quartz lamp included.
(189.95
NO. 680
Unique focusing arrangement enables beam adjust-
ment from medium to broad and 3:1 ratio of beam
center intensity. Such versatility makes this model
adaptable to all lighting situations. Housing surf sand
600W quartz lamp included.
$ 123.95
Q-BRITE PROFESSIONAL VIDEO AND PHOTO LIGHTS
Q-Brite represents a trio of heavy-duty, compact quartz reflectors for professional use. Constructed of heavy steel housings and scientifically contoured
aluminum reflectors using strong swivel yokes with adaptors for either 3/8 or 5/8 stands. Electrical
construction includes 3-cond. power cords, heavy rated switches, and ceramic sockets. All models include lamp, safety chain, accessory clips, finger grips.
NO. 960
Specifically designed to give broad, uniform beam ideal for back and background lighting. Measures 4 x 4" with shallow 2" depth. Includes built-in 4- leaf
barndoors. Housing black. 600W quartz lamp in-
cluded
899.95
NO. 990
A higher intensity broad beam reflector with long life
frosted lamp for greater diffusion. Includes 1000W
lamp, rated 400 hours in 5-1/2" reflector with
heavy-duty switch. Barndoors included.
$149.95
4VB BARNDOORS: 4- leaf rotatirg Barndoors to fit
Models 660 and 680 only
$32.50
SPECIFICATIONS FOR Q-BRITE MODELS
Model Lamp Watts Amps Kelvin 660 DYS 600 5.2 3200 680 DYS 600 5.2 3200 960 DYS 600 5.2 3200 990 FHM 1000 8.7 3200
Hours 75 75 75
400
Beam 45° 40"-75'· 60 75°
VSD SCRIM: Fine mesh screen framed in aluminum
for diffusion. Use singly or in pairs. For all Q-Brite
models only.
each S11.95
FCBC 100
65-190'
60 140
FCBC: Footcandles at Beam Center measured at 10 feet. All models priced to include Lamps as indicated.
·For focusing model indicates extreme from spot to flood position.
SUGGESTED Q-BRITE COMBINATIONS
The versatility of Q-Brite line allows for various combinations to suit your lighting needs. Below are listed several combinations which are more economical than purchased as components.
No. LP268 Litepak 2 No. 680 Q-Brite 2 Casestands 2 Stand Extensions 2 DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
44.50.00
No. LP266 Litepak 2 No. 660 Q-Brite 2 Casestands 2 Stand Extensions 2 DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$390.00
No. LP296 Litepak 2 No. 960 Q-Brite (incl. Barndoors) 2 Casestands 2 Stand Extensions 2 DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$400.00
No. LP360 Litepak 2 No. 660 Q-Brite 1No. 960 Q-Brite (incl. Barndoor) 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3 DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$490.00
No. LP366 Litepak 3 No. 660 Q-Brite 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3 DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$500.00
No. LP368 Litepak 2 No. 680 Q-Brite 1No. 660 Q-Brite 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3 DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$565.00
No. LP375 Litepak 2 No. 660 Q-Brite 1No. 680 Q-Brite 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3 DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$535.00
No. LP386 Litepak 1No. 660 Q-Brite 1No. 680 Q-Brite 1No. 960 Q-Brite (incl. Barndoor) 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3 DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$545.00
No. LP396 Litepak 1No. 660 Q-Brite 2 No. 960 Q-Brite (incl. Barndoors) 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3 DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$530.00
No. LP398 Litepak 1No. 680 Q-Brite 2 No. 960 Q-Brite (incl. Barrdoors) 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3 DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$550.00
No. LP290 Litepak 2 No. 990 Q-Brite (incl. Barndoors) 2 Casestands 2 Stand Extensions 2 FHM Lamps 1Deluxe Case
S530.00
No. LP300 Litepak 1No. 660 Q-Brite 1No. 680 Q-Brite 1No. 990 Q-Brite 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extension 3DYS/FHM Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$625.00
Assort your own lighting studio, packed in Deluxe
Case, with Stand and Accessories complete
No. LP306 Litepak 2 No. 960 Q-Brite 1No. 990 Q-Brite 3 Barndoors 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3DYS/FHM Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$600.00
No. LP309 Litepak 2 No. 990 Q-Brite 1No. 960 Q-Brite 3 Barndoors 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3DYS/FHM Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$650.00
No. LP332 Litepak 2 No. 990 Q-Brite 1No. 710SL 3 Barndoors 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3 ELJ/FHM Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$680.00
No. LP369 Litepak 2 No. 990 Q-Brite 2 Barndoors 1No. 660 Q-Brite 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3FHM/DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$650.00
No. LP390 Litepak 2 No. 660 Q-Brite 1No. 990 Q-Brite 1 Barndoor 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3DYS/FHM Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$575.00
No. LP399 Litepak 1No. 660 Q-Brite 1No. 960 Q-Brite 1No. 990 Q-Brite 2 Barndoors 3 Casestands 3 Stand Extensions 3FHM/DYS Lamps 1Deluxe Case
$585.00
THE CASE
The case designed for the Q-Brite line is the most versatile and deluxe ever designed. Constructed of solid plywood and covered with tough PVC laminate. All edges and corners reinforced with extruded aluminum. Interior fully foam padded. Vertical partitions adjustable to any size. Includes strong hasp locks and full length piano hinge. Measures 26 x 12 x 9. Holds up to 3 lights, 3 stands, plus accessories.
Case Only $ 179.95
THE STAND
The special Case stand designed to fit in the case pro-
vides maximum sturdiness for Q-Brites 3-sec. stands
made of 5/8, 1/2, and 3/8 telescoping tubing, black
seamless tubing with star locking knobs. Sections
locked in, legs channeled and braced. Elevates to 7ft.
folds to 26"; leg spread 30".
Stand Only $29.95
VL-2
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ACME -LITE MFG.
3401 W. Madison Street Skokie, IL 60076 (312) 588-2776
CO.
KOOLVENT REFLECTORS
A line of 6 lights of professional quality made in larger sizes for both efficient quartz lamps and lower priced photoflood lamps.
Each reflector has a specially designed Koolvent housing on the back which keeps the unit cooler and easier to use. Heavy swivelling yoke, 3- conductor grounded power cord, and large control knobs make this suitable for heavy-duty use.
NO. 010-P
10" diameter using # 1 ( BBA) lamp 250W ( not included) in screw- in ceramic socket providing 45° beam spread with 125 fc at beam center at 10 ft.
$51.95
NO. 010-Q
10" diameter using 600W quartz lamp ( included)
providing 40° beam spread with 150 fc at center at 10
ft. Expected lamp life 75 hours
$69.95
NO. 010- LL: Same but 500W quartz lamp ( included)
with 100 fc and 2000 hour life
$109.95
NO. 012-P
12" diameter for #2 IEBV) lamp 500W ( not included)
providing 40° beam with 170 fc at center
$59.95
NO. 025-P
Cone shaped 7" diameter for # 1 or #2 photoflood lamp not included) for narrow beam, 80 to 120 fc.
$59.95
NO. 640- HD
6" diameter using 600W quartz lamp ( included) with
60° beam and 90 fc at center at 10 ft. Equipped with
4- leaf rotating barndoors.
$94.95
COMPACT ECONOMY QUARTZ LIGHTING
NO. 710- SL
Compact, low-cost light with big 1000W lighting punch. Includes quartz lamp with 75 hour life in lightweight phenolic housing small enough for gadget bag. Elliptical aluminum reflector for broad beam complete with folding 4- leaf barndoors to control beam. Includes locking swivel, panel switch, heavy power cord, stand adaptor for 3/8 stand. ....$ 119.96
NO. 710- LL
Same as above but with 1000W quartz lamp with 400 hour life rating ideal for longer video taping
$129.95
LP232 LITEPAK: Deluxe combination of two Model 710SL for total 2000W. Includes two 7ft. Midelwate Stands, 4 stand extensions, extension cord, lamps. All fitted into deluxe wood case, partitioned and lined.
4439.00
NO. 600
Small, lightweight 6" diameter aluminum reflector which throws broad beam of light. Complete with 600W quartz lamp, double ball swivel, and stand adaptor for 3/8 stand. Electrically fitted with ceramic socket, 10 ft. power cord, 10 amp line switch, cool finger knob. Use for main, side, or back lighting.
$69.95
4BD BARNDOORS: 4- leaf rotating barndoors to fit
Model 600 reflector.
$19.95
640BD REFLECTOR: Combination of No. 600 reflec-
tor with lamp and 4BD Barndoors
$84.95
LITECLAMPS
47 MINI SPRING
Medium tension spring clamp for attaching small lights to flat surface or tubing. Has 3/8 stud for light.
$7.95
STUDIO JUMBOLITE
Giant 18" diameter reflector to illuminate entire scene ard overall lighting in studio. Comes equipped with amazing 2- in- 1 Lamp with large frosted outer envelope for diffusion plus inner quartz lamp for long life and consistency. Produces intense light highly diffused. Lamp 1000W, 27,000 lumens, 500 hours, 3200K. Reflector disassembles into 3 sections for portability. Complete with 10 ft. cable cord and 10 amp line switch.
NO. 923
Complete 3- piece reflector assembly and 1000W DST
Lamp
$99.95
NO. 920- RS
Model 923 Reflector assembly and lamp plus heavy-
duty Champion stand on roller base.
$283.00
49 PIPE CLAMP
Heavy-duty clamp for heavy lights with adjustable screw lock. Fits flat or tuoular surfaces from 5/8" to
No. 49 with 3/8 Light Stud
$23.95
No. 49/5 with 5/8 Light Stud
$23.95
48 GAFFER
Heavy tension spring clamp with large grips for
clamping to flat or tubular surface. Has 3/8 stud for
light. Fits 5/8 to 2"
423.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-3
ACME -LITE MFG. CO.
3401 W. Madison Street Skokie, IL 60076 (312) 588-2776
·
LOCATION LITEPAKS/
LOCATION LITEPAKS
LITE STANDS
Litepaks provide an economical and convenient way to store and carry all your lighting equipment. A variety is shown below including deluxe and economy lights in both deluxe cases and economy carriers.
LP3
LP36
LP340BD LOCATION LITEPAKS
Deluxe combination of three Model 600 reflectors including barndoors for use as front, side, and back
lighting. Totals 1800 watts of illumination. Complete
with lamps, fittings, 3 Flywate stands, stand exten-
sions, extension cord, and 4- leaf barndoors. All con-
tents contained in partitioned plywood case measur-
ing 19" x12" x8".
$445.00
LP340BD CONTENTS
3 No. 600 Reflectors 3 No. 4BD Barndoors 3 DYH 600W Quartz Lamps 1Deluxe Carry Case 3 Flywate Stands 3 Stand Extensions 1Extension Cord Lighting Plans
NO. LP333:
Same as LP340BD but without Barndoors. $389.00
LP3 LOCATION LITEPAK
An economy 3-way lighting kit that provides atotal of
1800 watts of lighting for front, side, and back. In-
cludes 3 No. 600 reflectors with 600 watt Quartz
lamps, 3Flywate Lite Stands with 3Stand Extensions
for total height of 7.5 ft., 12 ft. extension cord, fit-
tings, and lighting diagrams. All contents in parti-
tioned heavy weight paperboard carrier with metal
snaplocks and styrene handle.
$299.95
LP2 LOCATION LITEPAK
Same as LP3 but a2- way lighting kit providing 1200
watts of illumination. Contains 2 each of No 600
reflector, lamps, stands, extensions, etc. in same
carrier.
$ 209.95
LITE STANDS FOR EVERY VIDEO AND PHOTO NEED
Lite Stands are an indispensable part of every lighting set-up. They support the light and place it exactly where it is needed. Acme-Lite offers avariety of sizes and prices to suit every need.
BANTAMWATE
Same stand but 3- sec closes to 36"; opens to 8 ft. $29.95
FLYWATE
Ultra compact 4- sec closing to amere 18" and open-
ing to 6 ft. Recommended for lightweight units and
where compact portability is needed
$29.95
WELTERWATE
Deluxe stand for heavier lights offers finest construction and features. 3-sec closes to 31"; opens to 8ft. Heavier 1" tubing and 31" leg spread. $59.50
MIDELWATE
Same design but slightly larger closing to 24"; opens
to 7ft
$34.95
LITEWATE
Basic steel stand with 5/8 tubing offers greatest value. 2- sec closes to 42"; opens to 6.5 ft.....$19.95
LP27 LOCATION LITEPAK
Same as LP2 but adds Model 708G Videolite for total
1800 watts. Provides camera mounted light plus side
and background light for 3- way triangular lighting for
professional effect. Complete with lamps, 2 Flywate
Stands and extensions, fittings, and light plans fitted
into same carrier as above.
$279.95
LP36 DELUXE LITEPAK
Contains deluxe heavy-duty Model 660 Q-Brite Reflectors and heavier duty Casestands in sturdy
paperboard carrier with metal snap- latches and styrene handle. Includes 3 No. 660 with 600W DYS quartz lamps, 3 Casestands with stand extensions, 2 rotating 4- leaf barndoors, fittings. $355.00
LP26:
Same as above but 2-way kit including 2No. 660 with lamps, 2Casestands, and one Barndoor $239.00
HEVIWATE
Same construction but 4- sec with heavier 1-3/8 dia-
meter tubing. Closes to 37"; opens to 12 ft.; leg
spread 35"
$89.50
7A
Aluminum 5- sec stand offering lighter weight and
greater versatility. Sections locked in; legs braced;
lock knobs won't fall out. Closes to 19"; opens to 7
ft.; leg spread 32"; weighs 30 oz.
$36.95
9A
Same as 7A but closes to 23"; opens to 9 ft.; weighs
36 oz
$41.95
CHAMPION
Heavy duty roller stand to hold largest lights. Built-in
dolly 3" wheels sturdily braced. Folds up compactly.
3-sec with one inch base tubing closes to 39" and
opens to 10 ft. Sections locked in; locking clamps
prevent denting.
$ 119.95
VL-4
STAND CONVERTERS
All Acme -Lite stands accept lights with 3/8 fitting
except Champion for 5/8. Change size of stand to fit
your own light fitting with:
NO. 35 CONVERTER: Changes 3/8 to 5/8
NO. 53 CONVERTER: Changes 5/8 to 3/8
each
$5.95
9A
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ACME -LITE MFG. CO.
VIDEO CAMERALITES
3401 W. Madison Street Skokie, IL 60076 (312) 588-2776
These compact lights have been designed to attach directly to the video
or movie camera to provide key lighting that automatically follows the lens and action.
Lamp
1
Life
2
MODEL 32P- DC and DC
Color
1
Same as Model 32 but made to Temp
2
professional standards with high Beam
1
intensity lamps. Includes two Angle
2
200W lamps to operate on 30V battery to provide maximum illumination up to 400W. $159.95
Watts
1 2
Footcandles 1
2
50 hrs 100hrs
3300K 3300K
38 0
70°
200 400
95f c 180fc
ACCESSORIES
4VT BARNDOORS: 4- leaf barndoors attach to front of any Twinlite model to provide accurate control of light pattern.
$24.95
VST SCRIM: Fine mesh screen attaches to front of any Twinlite model to provide soft lighting and diffusion.
$12.95
95 HANDLE: Handle attaches to any Twinlite model for
holding light in hand.
$7.95
MODEL 22- AC and AC
Two individually switched lamps in tandem each 250W operating from 115V wall outlet. One lamp
provides 250W for normal room
sizes and average beam angle for
smaller subjects. Both lamps provide 500W for large areas and
wider beam angle for larger sub-
jects. All Twinlite lamps are min-
iature size with built-in reflectors having faceted surfaces for opti-
mum illumination. Dichroic coat-
ing on lamps and phenolic housings provide cool operation.
Swivel yoke can mount on stand
or video camera.
$129.95
ONE LAMP Optimum illumination for normal room. Medium beam angle for average subjects.
TVVO LAMPS Increased illumination for large room. Wider beam angle for larger subjects.
Lamp
1
Life
2
Color Temp
Beam
1
Angle
2
Watts
1
2
Footcandles 2 1
175hrs 350hrs
3250K
25° 45° 250 500 1501c 300f c
MODEL 32- DC and DC
Two individually switched lamps
in tandem for DC operation in ·
cludes 50W ( high intensity) and 100W. Low wattage lamp pro-
vides intense light but doubles battery running time while second lamp provides same illumination
with wider beam. Use both lamps simultaneously for high light out-
put with wider beam angle. Total
unit provides variable light output
and beam angle plus double
battery running time
$129.95
FIRST LAMP Doubles battery running time.
SECOND LAMP Wider beam angle.
BOTH LAMPS Increases both illumination and beam angle.
Lamp Life Color Temp Beam Angle
Watts/ Amps
Footcandles
1 2
1 2
1 2 both
1 2 both
1 2 both
3000hrs 50hrs
3075K 3350K
27° 38° 60°
50/4.2 100/8.6 150/12.7
80fc 90fc 170f c
MODEL 42- AC and DC Same construction as described above but operates on both DC (battery) and AC power.
Two individually switched lamps
in tandem: one 100W operates on
12V battery; other 250W oper-
ates on 115V wall outlet. Unit can
be used on either type power
source with security of having un-
limited reserve power when bat-
tery runs down. Or both lamps
can be used simultaneously on
both power sources when addi-
tional light and wider beam angle
is needed. One power cord to fit
battery and one to fit wall outlet
each keyed to be used on correct
power source.
$139.95
DC LAMP Use on 12V battery for portability
AC LAMP Use on 115V circuit for reserve
power.
BOTH LAMPS Increased illumination for large room. Wider beam angle for
larger subjects.
LarI1P
AC
Life
DC
2
Color
AC
Temp
DC
2
Beam
AC
Angle
DC
2
Watts
AC
DC
2
Footcandles AC DC 2
175hrs 50hrs
225hrs
3250K 3350K 3300K
25° 38° 60°
250 100 350
150fc 40fc 180fc
LIGHTS FOR 115V AC
No. 625 DELUXE FOCUSING VIDEOLITE
Deluxe focusing light which adjusts beam spread to
cover entire subject and changes light intensity for
size of room. Aluminum reflector in steel housing
with yoke. Fits on stand or 94B and includes shoe
adaptor. Includes 250W, 3200K quartz lamp with
200 hour rated life.
$79.95
No. 725
Economy videolite with built-in
elevated shoe mount ( use 94B for
cameras without shoe) and in-
cludes 250W quartz lamp rated
3200K. 200 hours good for up to
40 video cassettes.
$59.95
725G
Same as above but with wire
safety guard and cooler opera-
tion. UL approved.
$69.95
AC- DC VIDEO SAFETY LIGHT MODEL 7PBX No. 7PBX: Model 7PB batteryoperated light with Voltage adjuster included to power off either 12V battery or 115V wall outlet without changing lamps or cords. Plug directly into 12V battery ( e.g. 12BB or 12BL) with 6ft. coil cord and cigar plug.
Or insert light cord into Voltage Adjuster plugged into well outlet and continue without interruption. Total 18 ft. cord. Complete with 100W quartz lamp and elevated bracket with locking camera shoe. Completely safe. Never a dangerous mistake of plugging into wrong vol:age.
$119.95
BEAM FOCUSES TO DIFFERENT ANGLES ACCORDING TO SIZE OF SCENE
Distance Spot
Flood
5ft
500
160
10ft
120
42
15ft
70
25
20ft
35
15
Measured in footcandles
No. 708G: 600W quartz lamp, 75 hour for more intense light in larger rooms and groups. Complete with safety guard, bounce bracket, stand adaptor. Includes lamp. For cam-
era mounting see note at bottom. $59.95
No. 800VL:
100W low-level light for closeups
and small areas. Same construc-
tion as 708G. Includes lamp. UL
approved.
$39.95
NOTE: To mount 708G, 800VL, 710 to top of camera use No. 25 shoe adaptor for cameras having
accessory clip; or 94B telescoping handle bracket for other cameras or added height.
ACCESSORIES
25
Shoe adaptor to mount light to
top of cameras having shoe
fitting.
$7.95
94B
Folding handle to mount light to cameras having no fitting. Cam-
era mounts on platform, light on
telescoping tube
$19.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-5
AMBICO, INC.
50 Maple Street Norwood, NJ 07648-0427 (201) 767-4100
VIDEO LIGHTING AND
O ACCESSORIES
Model V-0199 Video Lighting System
A total of 600 watts in an integrated video lighting kit. Adds complete lighting control with stands for back lighting and side lighting. In this kit:
·Two V-0100 Flood/Spot Videolights, each
with a300-watt quartz- halogen lamp, 120
volts
·Two V-0509 Video Lightstands telescope
to nine feet. Easy- adjust Positive- action
locks and non-skid feet
·Two handgrips and two bases
· Deluxe Fitted Carrying Case to store and
carry complete set of lights and stands con-
veniently and safely
$349.00
V-0199
For detailed description of parts see light V-0100 and stand V-0509.
Model V-0100 Flood/Spot Videolight
Versatility makes this one of the most
popular videolights. Bathes subject in warm light for accurate, realistic colors. Comes complete with lamp, handgrip, base for wall or table-top mounting, and instructions.
· Lightweight and compact ·Attaches to camera accessory shoe, hand-
grip, lightstand, or tripod ·300-watt quartz- halogen lamp ( approx. 70-
hour bulb life) Output: 700 foot-candles ·3200° Kelvin color temperature for
accurate color reproduction · Light beam variable controlled for 30° spot
(single subjects) to 50° flood ( group shots)
Quartz -Halogen Replacement Lamps
Model V-0101 a300- watt, 120- volt lamp, for
V-0100 Videolight. Approximately 70- hour
bulb life.
$25.95
Model V-0151 a150- watt, 120- volt lamp for
AC operation of Model V-0150 or V-0170.
Approximately 70- hour bulb life.
$25.95
Model V-0201 a100-watt, 12-volt lamp for
V-0200 Videolight; or for DC operation of
V-0150 or V-0170. Approximately 50- hour
bulb life.
$19.95
·Facet- Focus Reflector gives maximum
V-0170
Model V-0170 AC/DC Flood/Spot Videolight
Aversatile quartz- halogen light with brushed reflector to spread soft light. Plugs into a normal 120-volt AC receptacle and comes with 12- volt cigarette lighter plug adapter for car lighter receptacle or battery pack for DC
light dispersion in both flood and spot posi-
tions · Light intensity at center of beam adjust-
able from 60 foot-candles in flood to 150 foot-candles in spot configuration at 10
feet ·Heat- absorbing glass Safety- Shield for
cooler, safer shooting ( Protects videocamera, too) · Lamp Ejector removes hot lamp without
burning fingers ·Tilt Control for vertical 120° adjustment of
Model V-0105 Barndoors
Professional-style Barndoors control light
spill; direct maximum light on subject. Screw
directly onto V-0100 Flood/ Spot Videolight.
Hinged doors adjust individually to any
angle; fold flat when not needed.
$19.95
use. Focus adjustment changes light from flood to spot. Includes one 150-watt AC lamp and one 100-watt DC lamp. Heat- absorbing glass Safety- Shield. Tilt Control for 120°
bounce lighting
·Mounting bracket is offset from video-
camera for cooler shooting
$89.95
bounce lighting.
$112.95
Model V-0806
Model V-0200
10-Amp- Hour, 12- Volt Belt
Compact 12V Videolight
Powerpack/Videolight Kit
Portable, 100-watt, quartz- halogen light with cigarette lighter-type plug. Fits directly into car lighter receptacle, 12-volt battery pack, or similar power source. Compact light
attaches firmly to camera accessory shoe, extender bracket, lightstand, or tripod. Comes with voltage monitor, cord, and mounting shoe.
Powers V-0200 videolight for nearly one hour.
·Weighs less than 8pounds ·Compact 12- volt Videolight, V-0200,
included · 100-watt quartz- halogen lamp included ·Rechargeable lead- acid battery cells are
rugged, have high cycle- life and recovery
Model V-0507 Multiple Accessory Shoe
Allows mounting two lights and amicrophone on videocamera to follow the action everywhere. Sturdy, lightweight metal.
$9.95
·Includes 100-watt quartz- halogen lamp
(approximately 50- hour bulb life)
·3200° Kelvin color temperature gives
accurate color reproduction
·Heat- absorbing glass Safety- Shield
·Facet- Focus Reflector provides maximum
light dispersion
·Tilt control for 120° vertical adjustment
bounce lighting
$79.95
ability
· Batteries in polypropylene cases for
protection from shock, temperature, and
climate changes
· Fused for greater protection
·Outer packs of water-resistant nylon fabric
with foam padding for extra comfort
·Sturdy web belting adjustable and has
easy- latch buckle
$169.95
Model V-0505
Extender Bracket
Moves light to side of videocamera for cooler
shooting and reduced " head-on" lighting
look. Attaches to camera tripod socket and
holds V-0100 or V-0200 Videolight. Also
keeps power cord conveniently away from
camera.
$9.95
VL-6
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
/onion_
EIDURP/
One Controls Drive Shelton, CT 06484 (203) 929-1100
ULTRALIGHT SINGLE
ULTRALIGHT DUAL
CLPA MOUNTED ONTO CAMERA SNAP-ON BRACKET
LGK - 30 LIGHTING KIT
UP SNAP-ON UNIPAC
CAMERA WITH LG-UD LIGHT, BR HL79 BRACKET, AND CLPA ADAPTOR
ULTRALIGHT fu SYSTEM
UltraLight System provides extremely compact, lightweight, and versatile portable lighting. UltraLights become fill, spot, or flood lights according to the selection of quick- change bulbs, filters, and focus adapters. The removable light head module allows bulb changes in the
field without direct handling. A working system requires one or more of the power cables/adapters listed as well as abulb of corresponding
voltage.
PORTABLE LIGHTING & KITS
ULS. UltraLight Single. Single base and head module with single
power input and switch.
$195.00
ULD. UltraLight Dual. Dual base with two head modules, two
switches, and single power input. Bulb voltages must be matched.
ULD
$350.00
UL -HM. UltraLight Head Module. Extra quick- change rugged
aluminum module to house alternate or spare bulbs.
UL -HM Package of three
$195.00
UL -HM Single
75.00
ULAC. UltraLight AC Power Supply. Compact AC power supply
allows use of low voltage bulbs 112-14v) where AC power is available.
Maximum 100 watts of light output ( one or two bulbs). 115/230v,
50/60 Hz. 12-14 VAC for lighting applications only
$165.00
Black Beauty Light Head
LG-UD Universal Black Beauty Light Head. With swing- away dichroic
filter. Select bulb and cable from lists below
$295.00
Dichro. Dichroic Filter Assembly. For all LG Series Black Beauty Light
Heads.
$85.00
Bulbs for Black Beauty Light Heads
ANSI Code
Volts
Watts
Fey FHT FLP FAV
30v 10v 14.4v 12v
250 150
7(1 , 1(10
Life, Hrs.
6
Run Time with 4 AH battery
25 min. 45 min. 45 min. 25 min.
$32. $27. $46. $23.
LGK-30 30 VOLT LIGHTING KIT
Complete Kit Includes: · LG-UD Black Beauty Light Head with Dichroic Filter Assembly
· LC- 30, 5foot 30 volt power cable
· FBV 30V 250 watt tungsten bulb ( one). · Model 30/13 30V 4AH battery belt with built-in 110/220 overnight
charger
· Heavy duty shipping case with custom fit foam interior
·Typical Run Time: 25 minutes at 250 watts
·Size: 17-1/2" x7-1/2" x14"
LGK-30
$ 1195.00
LIGHTING ACCESSORIES
LC- L 5 Foot Low Voltage 112-15V) Power Cable For LG-U Light Head. Makes with Anton/Bauer Super D System UniPac Holders and other batteries with 5pin XLR connectors. .. .$48.00
LC- 30 5Foot 30 Volt Power Cable
For LG-U Light Head. Amphenol connector mates with Anton/Bauer
30/13 Battery Belt and other 30 volt batteries
$55.00
CLPA Camera Light Power Adaptor Powers LG-U Light from camera battery. Snaps on between battery
and bracket at the rear of any camera. Integral cable plugs directly into
LG-U Light Head. Requires 14.4 volt 70 watt bulb.
$95.00
UP Snap-On UniPac Compact Anton/ Bauer Snap-On bracket with integral belt loops and 5 foot cable. Allows any Anton/ Bauer Snap-On 4AH NiCad battery to
be worn on apants belt. Cable plugs directly into LG-U ( or other 12-15
volt device). Requires 14.4 volt 70 watt bulb.
$130.00
Light Head Brackets These brackets are used for quick custom mounting the Black Beauty
and UltraLights on all popular ENG cameras.
Cameras not listed above may use one of the following brackets:
BR STUD: For all cameras with a 1/4-20 threaded accessory hole.
BR UNIV: Universal mount that clamps onto the handle of virtually any
camera. BR SHOE: For all cameras with microphone/accessory shoe.
Price of all Brackets listed
$45.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-7
BOGEN PHOTO CORP.
100 South Van Brunt St. PO Box 448 Englewood, NJ 07631 (201) 568-7771
STANDS
Super Stand
Super Stand
The bigger your light, the more you need this strong,
tall, stable stand. Made of aluminum, it's compara-
tively lightweight ( slightly over 15 1/2 lbs.), yet will
support large lighting units such as movie and TV
floodlights, including 228mm sockets. Full extension is
just under 12 feet. Standard 5/8" stud and 1/4-20
adapter to take strobes, smaller professional Q. H.
lights, and other lights. Clamp- on leveller can be
ordered which keeps the Super Stand on an even
footing, when the terrain isn't. For indoor use, there's
an accessory set of 100mm casters.
SPECIFICATIONS
Closed Length: 55.9". Minimum Elevation: 56.3".
Maximum Elevation: 143.3". Diameter of base: 64.5".
Legs are 30mm diameter aluminum. Sections are
respectively, 50, 40, 30mm
3079
$240.00
ACCESSORIES
Extension Leveller. A 22mm diameter tube which
clamps on to one of the legs of the Super Stand and
provides a40cm ( 15") range of adjustment so that the
center column of the stand can be kept level on uneven
ground.
3080
$30.00
Caster Set. 100mm 13.9") diameter casters to provide
easier movement when the stand is used indoors.
3081
$40.00
Cine Stands
Designed to hold heavy lights, reflectors and scrims. The Wind-up 2 and Wind-up 3, Cine and Cine 3 Stands, as well as the Super Stand all accept 1-1/8"
(28mm) bushings and supplied with adapters for 5/8". (16mm) and half inch female yoke sockets. The Tall Cine accepts 5/8" bushings and female yoke sockets.
Model 345 Stand
Three section light stand which extends to 11', closes
down to 41 1/ 2 ". It weighs 6lbs. 4oz. and will support any of our Monolite units or other lights of comparable
weight. The 345 comes with Shepherd casters for easy
movement in the studio. Mounting stud is 5/8" for
standard studio strobes with 1/4-20 thread adapter.
3082
$99.95
Model 251 Stand
The workhorse for portable strobe and Q.H. lighting
use, the 251 is stable 8' stand. It weighs under 2-1/4
lbs. and closed length is 34-1/4". Mounting stud is
5/8" for standard studio lights with 1/4-20 thread
adapter, 42" diameter legs spread.
3086
$47.95
For use indoors, you can add a set of Shepherd
Casters. 3088
$22.00
Bantam Weight Stand
A six foot light stand, very lightweight for its size and
relative sturdiness. For use with small strobes and
quartz lighting units. The mounting stud is 5/8"
diameter . Closed length is 24-3/4", minimum
extension is 32", weight 2lbs.
3089
$34.95
CINE STANDS
Order code
Wind-Up 3 3075
WIncl-Up 2 3070
Order
3077 3083
3084
3085
3086
3092
3093
3095 3098 3100 3101 3102
3103 3104
3105
Wall Boom Clip on metal cable hooks for 3082 Adaptor to convert stand tips to accommodate 3/8" sockets Boom Assembly with adjustable arm counterbalance Model 251, Compact Stand, extends to 8' Plastic clip on cable clamps, set of 6 Plastic clip on cable clamps,
set of 4 ( Large) Back light stand Water bag counterbalance Broncolor Adaptor 5/8" Socket Converter Rapid Adaptor for 3/8" socket 1/4-20 to Euro Thread Adjustable section for Back Light Stand Rapid Adaptor for 1/4-20 socket
Price $ 79.95
210
1 70 84.95 47.95
200
200 24.00 19.50
4 95 4 95 5 95 195 15.00 5 95
ana
cine
Clne-3
3071
son
3073
Nr of Sections Folded Length' Diameter of Base Minimum Height' Maximum Height' APProx Load Capacity Weight Casters Available
'Werlout Casters
3 68*A" ( 176cmi 50W 1128cmi 63ve ( 162cm) 147W i375crni 66 lbs ( 301(g) 43 lbs ( 19 5Iegi lIncludedl
$420.00
2 59" ( 149cmi 50 4" 1128cm)
53 5" 1136cm) 98 4" (250cm) 88 lbs (40441 37 lbs ( 15 31(g) (Included)
2 47V, ( 120crni
461/ 4 "( 119cm) (120cmp
90y,( 230cmi 66 lbs ii01(g) 14Y, lbs (67Iegi (Included)
3 61" ( 155cm) 39 4" ( 119cm) 57 1/ 2 "1146cmi 149 ,/," ( 380cm)
55 lbs 1251(91 196 lbs 18 96g) Use Nr 3081
3 51" r130cmi 46ve ( 119cm) 56" (153cm)
128- 325cm) 48 lbs 122kg)
15V? lbs (69kg)
Use Nr 3074
$360.00 $135.00 $140.00 $130.00
VL-8
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BOGEN PHOTO CORP.
100 South Van Brunt St. PO Box 448 Englewood, NJ 07631 (201) 568-7771
11.
QUARTZ STUDIO LIGHT OUTFITS
7220
7200
7240
Bogen 120 Quartz Studio Light Outfit
Order Code 7200
2- Bogen 7000 Studio Quartz Lights w / Safety glass, 2-Barndoors for
Bogen 7000, 2-600W DYS OH Bulbs, 2-6' Light Stands, 1- Compact
Carrying Case.
$ 409.95
Bogen 185 Quartz Studio Light Outfit
Order Code 7210 2- Bogen 7000 Studio Quartz Lights w / Safety glass, 1- Bogen 7050 Studio Quartz Light w / Safety glass, 2-Barndoors for Bogen 7000, 2-600W DYS OH Bulbs, 1-Barndoor for Bogen 7050, 1-650W FAD OH Bulb, 2-6' Light Stands, 1- Carrying Case, 1-8' Light Stand. $699.95
Bogen 190 Quartz Studio Light Outfit
Order Code 7220 1- Bogen 7000 Studio Quartz Light w / Safety glass, 2- Bogen 7050 Studio Quartz Lights w/ Safety glass, 1-Barndoor for Bogen 7000, 1-600W DYS OH Bulb, 2-Barndoors for Bogen 7050, 2-650W FAD OH Bulbs, 1-6' Light Stand, 1- Carrying Case, 2-8' Light Stands. $789.95
Bogen 180 Quartz Studio Light Outfit
Order Code 7230
3- Bogen 7000 Studio Quartz Lights w Safety glass, 3-Barndoors for 7000, 3-600w DYS OH Bulbs, 3-6' Light Stands. 1- Carrying Case.
$609.95
Bogen 195 Quartz Studio Light Outfit
Order Code 7240
3- Bogen 7050 Studio Quartz Lights w / Safety glass, 3-Barndoors for
Bogen 7050, 3-650W FAD OH Bulbs, 3-8' Light Stands, 1- Carrying
Case.
$ 884.95
7000
7010 7015 7016 7025 7030 7050
7060 7065 7066 7075 7080 7085
7200 7210 7220 7230 7240 0310 0311 0312 0313 0316
0317 0322 0323 0324 3086 3089
Bogen 7000 Quartz Studio Light. Accepts 600W DYS OH Bulbs. Supplied with handgrip and safety glass Barndoors for 7000
Dichroic Filter for 7000
Diffuser Filter for 7000 600W DYS QH Bulb for 7000
Compact Carrying Case for 7000 Bogen 7050 Quartz Studio Light. Accepts 650W FAD, FBX ( Frosted) or DWY ( 3400 °) QH Bulbs. Supplied with quick ,elease safety glass
Barndoors for 7050 Dichroic Filter for 7050 Diffuser Filter for 7050 650W FAD QH Bulb for 7050 650W FBX QH Bulb for 7050 Carrying Case for 7000 and or 7050
$ 79.95 34.95 55.00 16.95 18.60 89.95
$ 149.95 49.95 84.95 32.95 17.80 22.05
129.95
Bogen 120 Quartz Studio Light Outfit Bogen 185 Quartz Studio Light Outfit
Bogen 190 Quartz Studio Light Outfit
Bogen 180 Quartz Studio Light Outfit Bogen 195 Quartz Studio Light Otfit 32" Reflective White Umbrella 40" Reflective White Umbrella 32" Reflective Silver Umbrella 40" Reflective Silver Umbrella
40" Reflective White Umbrella w/ Silver backing Feather-Lite Umbrella
42" White Bowflecta 42" Silver/ Matte Silver Bowflecta
42" Silver/Silver-Gold Bowflecta 8ft. Light Stand
6ft. Light Stand
$ 409.95 699.95 789.95 609.95 884.95 26.00 36.00 40.00 55.00
69.00 52.00 50.00 50.00 50.00 47.95 34.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-9
WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
4717 " F" South Mingo Road Tulsa, OK 74146 (918)665-6820
A-ALTMAN STAGE LIGHTING COMPANY, INC
BM-BARDWELL 8 MCALISTER INC EC- ELECTRO CONTROLS INC
F-FREZZOLINI ELECTRONICS INC GE-GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY LL-LOWEL-LIGHT MANUFACTURING, INC
L-LEVITON INC. R- ROSCO LABORATORIES INC SY-SYLVANIA (GTE PRODUCTS
CORPORATION) TH- THORN EMI LIGHTING WB-WALTER S. BREWER COMPANY,
INC.
KEY & BACK LIGHT
RECOMMENDED LAMPS 120V
MEDIUM BIPOST BASE
2' 2 LCL TUNGSTEN-HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansi
Code Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
EGN-TH 120
500 3200K Clear
50.00
EGR-TH 120
750 3200K Clear
70.00
EGT-TH 120
1000 3200K Clear
75.00
14006- BM
14005- BM
58014- BM 49369- BM 49141- BM 10012- BM 10013- BM 10014- BM 49148- BM 49149- BM 49150- BM 49151- BM 09343- BM
09344- BM
2000W, 10" JUNIOR FOCUSING
FRESNEL with "C" Clamp and GPP
Plug
429.55
MOTION PICUTRE MODEL as
above, except with stand mount. 25'
cable and fixture mounted 20A
switch and plug
441.65
4- leaf (8 way barndoors)
79.20
Gel/Diffusion Frame
20.00
Safety Cable
8.80
Snoot 6" dia front opening 68.20
Snoot 8" dia, front opening 68.20
Snoot 10" dia, front opening 68.20
Scrim, single
8.00
Scrim, half single
8.00
Scrim, double
10.00
Scrim, half double
10.00
Replacement Socket Brass, terminal
side
12.00
Replacement Socket Brass, clamp
side
9.50
STUDIO LIGHTS
BASE & FILL LIGHT
ke,ie
RECOMMENDED LAMPS 120V
MOGUL BIPOST BASE
5" L.0 L TUNGSTEN- HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansi
Code Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
CYV-TH 120
1000 3200K Clear
92.00
CX2-TH 120
1500 32001( Clear 115.00
CYX-TH 120
2000 3200K Clear 125.00
These fixtures give the proper light source and intensity to allow the lens aperture to operate at a desired setting to create that brilliant picture with creative depth and sharpness. All are focusing for absolute control.
FRESNEL
This family of fresnels are the workhorses of the industry, providing the art in lighting for the realization of depth, modeling and to set the mood, which is so important for that interesting picture. All are focusing.
06000- BM
06001- BM
58005- BM 49143- BM 49141- BM 49144- BM 49145- BM 49146- BM 49147- BM 10004- BM 10005- BM 10006- BM 06308- GE
1000W, 6" BABY KEG FOCUSING
FRESNEL with " C" Clamp and GPP
Plug
277.09
MOTION PICTURE MODEL as
above except with Stand Mount, 25'
cable and inline 20A crush proof on
off switch and plug
264.99
4- leaf Barndoor
39.60
Gel/Diffusion Frame
19.00
Safety Cable
8.80
Scrim, single
6.60
Scrim, half single
6.60
Scrim, double
7.70
Scrim, half double
7.70
Snoot 2" dia. opening
16.50
Snoot 3" dia. opening
16.50
Snoot 4" dia. opening
16.50
Replacement-Socket, medium
bi-post
48.00
19005- BM
19004- BM
58022- BM 49391- BM 49141- BM 10022- BM 10023- BM 10024- BM 49152- BM 49153- BM 49154- BM 49155- BM
5000W, 13" SENIOR FOCUSING
FRESNEL with "C" Clamp and 60A
GPP plug
771.65
MOTION PICTURE MODEL as
above except stand mount 25' cable
and fixture mounted 20A switch and
plug
819.50
4- leaf (8 way barndoors) Gel/Diffusion Frame
132.00 23.00
Safety Cable
8.80
Snoot 8" dia. front opening 85.80
Snoot 10" dia, front opening 85.80
Snoot 12" dia, front opening 85.80
Scrim, single Scrim, half single
12.10 12.10
Scrim, double
13.20
Scrim, half double
13.20
RECOMMENDED LAMP 120V MOGUL BIPOST
BASE 61/ 2 " L.C.L.
TUNGSTEN- HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansi
Code Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
DPY-TH 120
5000 3200K Clear 535.00
02120-WB
01120-WB
01129-WB 02710-WB 08806-L
14", 1000W FOCUSING SCOOP
with ' C's Clamp and GPP
plug
236.00
MOTION PICTURE MODEL as
above except with stand mount, 25'
cable and inline 20A crush proof on
off switch and plug
246.00
Gel Diffusion Frame
35.00
Safety Cable
6.50
Replacement Socket, medium pre-
focus base
15.00
RECOMMENDED LAMP 120V
MEDIUM PREFOCUS BASE
3' 2" LC.L. TUNGSTEN- HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansi
Code Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
EGC
EGD-GE 120
500 3200K Clear 64,80
EGF-GE 120
750 3200K Clear 72.70
EGK-TH 120
1000 3200K Frosted 70.00
02124-WB
01124-WB
01129-WB 02710-WB 08808-L
14", 2000W FOCUSING SCOOP
with "C" Clamp and GPP
Plug MOTION
PICTURE
230.00 MODEL as
above except with stand mount. 25'
cable and inline 20A crush proof on
off switch and plug
245.00
Gel/Diffusion Frame
35.00
Safety Cable
6.50
Replacement Socket, mogul screw
b
17.50
Reprinted with permission from materials by (c) 1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
VL-10
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
STUDIO LIGHTS
4717 " F" South Mingo Road Tulsa, OK 74146 (918) 665-6820
RECOMMENDED LAMP 120V
MOGUL SCREW BASE
5' LCL. TUNGSTEN-HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansi
Code Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
15000'
CL 48-SY 120
1500 3200K Frosted 175.38
BWG-TH 120
2000 3200K Frosted 140.00
02135-WB 01135-WB
01139-WB 02710-WB 08808-L
18. 2000W FOCUSING SCOOP
with " C" Clamp and GP Plug 255.00
MOTION PICTURE MODEL as
above except with stand mount. 25 .
cable and inline 20A crush proof on
off switch and plug
265.00
Gel/Diffusion Frame
40.00
Safety Cable
6.50
Replacement Socket, mogul
screw base
17.50
LIGHT HANGER
SOFT LIGHT
RECOMMENDED LAMP 120V MOGUL SCREW
BASE
LC.L. TUNGSTEN- HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansi
Code Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
DSE-GE 120
1000 3200K Frosted 50.00
DSF-GE 120
1500 3200K Frosted 60.00
BWG-TH 120
2000 3200K Frosted 140.00
BROAD
48007- BM
48006- BM
48015- BM 48013- BM 49141- BM 08815-L
1000W FOCUSING SINGLE BROAD
with "C" Clamp and GPP
Plug
236.50
MOTION PICTURE MODEL as
above except with stand mount, 25'
cable and fixture mounted 20A
switch and plug 4-Way Barndoor
236.50 63.80
Gel/Diffusion Frame
14.30
Safety Cable
8.80
Replacement Socket (pair),
recessed single contact 11.00/each
RECOMMENDED LAMPS 120V
DOUBLE ENDED
M.O.L. TUNGSTEN-HALOGEN QUARTZ
Anal Code
Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
FDN-TH 120
500 3200K Frosted 31.00
EMD-TH 120
750 3200K Frosted 40.00
FHM-TH 120
1000 3200K Frosted 35.00
48007/ 15- BM
48006/ 15- BM
48015- BM 48013- BM 49141- BM 08815-L
1500W FOCUSING SINGLE BROAD
with " C" Clamp and GPP
Plug
236.50
MOTION PICTURE MODEL as
above except with stand mount, 25'
cable and fixture mounted 20A
switch and plug
236.50
4-way Barndoor
63.80
Gel/Diffusion Frame
14.30
Safety Cable
8.80
Replacement Socket ( pair), recessed
single contact
11.00/each
RECOMMENDED LAMPS 120V
DOUBLE ENDED
69/,J M.O.L. TUNGSTEN- HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansi
Code Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
FGV-GE 120
1000 3200K Frosted ( Disc)
FGT-GE 120
1500 3200K Frosted 72.44
WBC manufactures the only light hanger made in the USA that is adjustable from the studio floor. Extends 5', 8'. 10', & 15'. Supports 0-100 lbs
02740-WB
02742-WB
02744-WB
02746-WB
02750-WB
02752-WB 02755-WB 02757-WB 02760-WB
'Floor adjustable telescoping hanger,
extends,
5'.
supports
0-100
lbs.
525.00
'Floor adjustable telescoping hanger.
extends
8',
supports
0-100
lbs.
535.00
*Floor adjustable telescoping hanger.
extends 10', supports 0-100
lbs.
545.00
'Floor adjustable telescoping hanger.
extends
15'.
supports 0-100
lbs.
555.00
Battery operated motor assembly
with activator pole and battery
charger
295.00
5 ft. extension cable
- 41.65
8 ft. extension cable
- 44.35
10 ft. extension cable "46.15
15 ft. extension cable
- 50.65
Note: · Includes stirrup, safety cable and
needed accessories. ·"Add $20.00 per cable for NEMA L520 Twist lock
other
Used for virtually shadowless fill light and base light for smaller subjects. Fabricated from aluminum for easy movement.
01185-WB
04074-WB 01186-WB 49100- BM 08815-L 08902-L
1000/4000W FEATHERLITE SUPER
SOFT-LIGHT with 4. 20A fixture
mounted switches, 11 /4 " stud-stand
mount, and two 20A pigtails with
Locking Pin Plugs.
750.00
20A, 25' cables with female 120V
pin plug ( 2 required)
53.25
Gel/Diffusion Frame
60.00
"C" Clamp
26.40
Replacement Socket (pair), recessed
single contact
11.00/each
Replacement Switch
8.00
RECOMMENDED LAMP 120V DOUBLE ENDED
BASE 4"/, 6"MOL.
TUNGSTEN- HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansi Code
Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
FCM-TH 120
1000 3200K Clear
32.00
CYCLORAMA AND BACKGROUND LIGHTS
CYC LIGHTS
These units are available in a variety of configurations for up to 4 color cyclorama, background, set illumination and color blending. Grid or floor mounting are available with a full range of mounting hardware for any type of studio installation requirements. (Fixtures for single and four light systems listed. Other configurations available upon request.)
25013- BM ONE LIGHT CYC LIGHT 1000W
with GPP Plug
141.90
25013/
ONE LIGHT CYC LIGHT 1500W
15- BM
with GPP Plug
141.90
25050- BM Extended Holder, One Light 50.00
25063- BM " C" Clamp and Yoke Hanger
Assembly for One Light Cyc 40.70
02208-WB " C" Clamp and Yoke Hanger
Assembly for Two One Light Cycs
(Used in 4-circuit system)
45.00
25051- BM 49141- BM 25018- BM
Gel Frame
18.70
Safety Cable ( 1 required)
8.80
FOUR LIGHT, FOUR CIRCUIT CYC
LIGHT 1000/4000W with GPP
Plug
284.90
25018/ 15- BM
25050- BM 25060- BM 25053- BM
25051- BM 49141- BM 08815-L
FOUR LIGHT, FOUR CIRCUIT CYC
LIGHT 1500/600W with GPP
Plug
284.90
Extended Holder, One Light 50.00
Extended Holder, Three Light 77.00
" C" Clamp and Hanger Assembly
(Pair)
42.90
Gel Frame (4 required)
18.70
Safety Cable ( 1 required)
8.80
Replacement Socket (pair), recessed
single contact.
11.00
RECOMMENDED LAMPS 120V
DOUBLE ENDED
4"1, 6"MOL. TUNGSTEN-HALOGEN QUARTZ
(Use with 1000W Version Only)
Ansi
Code Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
FDN-TH 120
500 3200K Frosted 31.00
EMD-TH 120
750 3200K Frosted 40.00
FHM-TH 120
1000 3200K Frosted 35.00
RECOMMENDED LAMPS 120V
DOUBLE ENDED
69/,." M.01 TUNGSTEN-HALOGEN QUARTZ (Use with 1500W Version Only)
Ansi
Code Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
FGV-GE 120
1000 3200K Frosted ( Disc.)
FGT-GE 120
1500 3200K Frosted 72.44
Reprinted with permission from materials by © 1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-11
WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
STUDIO LIGHTS/KITS
4717 " F" South Mingo Road Tulsa, OK 74146 (918) 665-6820
EFFECTS PROJECTORS
imissompp.
RECOMMENDED LAMP 120V
MEDIUM TWO-PIN
BASE 2,/s" L.0 L.
TUNGSTEN- HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansi
Code Volts Watts Temp. Type
FEL-TH 120
1000 3200K Clear
(For both Follow Spot and Ellipsoidal)
Price 52.00
o
LIGHTING KITS
000
FOLLOW SPOT
Has six color changers and dowser, framing
shutters, ins, variable focus, stand with casters. 25' cable, fixture mounted 20 amp switch and
blower for gels and lamp
02642-A 08800-L
FOLLOW SPOT Replacement Socket, pin base
900.00 medium two
15.00
00
ê 0
0o9e0o
01720-WB PORTA-KIT 6000
Portable " open face" fixtures designed for larger set areas giving maximum footcandles and the ability to diffuse, color the light with fieid and beam control.
2--SLIMLINE II 1000 2000W '' Punch Light" with
integral ( 4) way barndnor and 10' power cable with crush proof in:ine switch and plug.
2--Accessory Holders (Attaches to Barndoor)
2--Gel Diffusion Frame.
2-- FEY 2000W, 3200K Quartz Lamp.
3--MINI MAC 1000W " Base Light with integral
(4) way barndoor and 2S" power cable with
inline switch and plug.
3--Accessory Holders (attaches to barndoor).
3--Gel Diffusion Frame.
3--FHM 1000W, 3200K Quartz Lamp
4-- Medium Weight, Hi-riser Stand Folded 353 /4 ", extended 127".
2--Gaffers Grip
1-- Rosco Assortment-Roscolux: 3200K to day-
light conversion blue, red, green and blue
primary colors, amber and Tough Spun Diffusion Material,
1-- Rugged Case-partitioned. roomy and light-
weight
2350.00
ELLIPSOIDAL
0.0
Used for background special effect. Will project rectangles, triangles, almost any combination of straight edges. Also, will project patterns. The ellipsoidal can be purchased with a iris to control the diameter of the beam.
02612-* 02616-* 0262102624-'
01411-WB
02632-A 02635-A 02636-A 09608-A 09609-WB 02710- WU 08800-L
VI- 12
e x 9" Ellipsoidal
240.00
6" x 12" Ellipsoidal
240.00
6"
16" Ellipsoidal
240.00
ZOOM Ellipsoidal, 1000W, 20° to
40° beam angle
380.00
A modified by WB
MOTION PICTURE ADDER for
stand mounting, 25' cable with inline
20A crush proof onioff switch and
Parallel Blade Plug
25.00
Gel Frame
2.50
Pattern Holder
8.00
Iris
50.00
Set of 8 Patterns
18.00
Set of 10 Designer Patterns 90.00
Safety Cable
6.50
Replacement Socket, medium two
pin base
15.00
ELLIPSOIDAL DESIGNER
PATTERNS
9.00
With over 100 precision patterns to choose from
you can accent your picture theme or mood not possible any other way so inexpensively. These patterns will fit any standard brand of ellipsoidal fixture. When necessary, the special heat resistant metal can be cut to size with scissors to fit most pattern holders.
CUSTOM PATTERNS from camera ready art (first pattern) 90.00
01730-WB PORTA-KIT 4000
Use as kit 6000 when not as many fixtures are
needed and without maximum beam diffusion or colored light is needed.
2--SLIMLINE II 1000/2000IN " Punch Light" with integral (4) way barndoor and 10' power cable with crush proof inline switch and plug.
2--Double Scrim.
2-- FER 1000W Quartz Lamp. 1--MINI MAC 1000 with integral ( 4) way
barndoor and 25 ft power cable with inline switch and plug. 1-- Double Scrim. 1--FHM Frosted Quartz Lamp. 1--Gaffers Grip 3--Featherweight Hi-riser Stand, folded 30". extended 103".
1-- Rugged Case-Partitioned, roomy and light-
weight.
1350.00
Reprinted with permission from materials by 1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
4717 " F" South Mingo Road Tulsa, OK 74146 (918)665-6820
01740-WB SLIMLINE II 2000 KIT
Can be used for over all base light. We recommend using with Mini Mac 1000 kit for
more versatility The double kit system is easier to move from location to location.
2--SLIMLINE II 1000 2000 with integral (4) way barndoor and 10 ft power cable with crush-
proof inline switch and plug. 2--Double Scrim.
2-- FER 1000W Quartz Lamp.
2--FEY 2000W Quartz Lamp.
1--Gaffers Grip.
2--Featherweight High Riser Stand. Folded 30" extended 103".
1-- Rugged Case- Partitioned, roomy and light-
weight.
1250.00
LIGHTING KITS
01750-WB MINI MAC 1000 KIT
As described above but generally are used more as a base light and the Shmline II as the key light. They also make excellent copy board lights.
3--MINI MAC 1000 with integral ( 4) way barndoor and 25 ft power cable with inline switch and plug.
3--Double Scrim. 3--FHM 1000W Frosted Quartz Lamp.
1--Gaffers Grip.
3-- Featherweight High Riser Stand. Folded 30". extended 103".
1-- Rugged Case- Partitioned, roomy and Light-
weight
1055.00
01760-WB MINI MAC 650 KIT
Same rugged fixtures as above but smaller in size.
3--MINI MAC 650 with integral (4) way barndoor and 25 ft. power cable with inline switch and plug.
3--Double Scrim.
3--FBX 650W Frosted Quartz Lamp 1--Gaffers Grip.
3-- Featherweight High Riser Stand, Folded 30.
extended 103".
1--Rugged Case-Partitioned, roomy and Light-
weight
1000.00
D2-94- LL DP 4 KIT
Light weight kit that is very versatile and unique. Four reflectors can be interchanged to vary the beam pattern from a soft wide angle to a narrow beam long throw fixture.
4--dp 1000 fixtures with # 1 reflector and 16 It
power cable and inline switch.
4--dp barndoors
4--ks stands
1--dp lampak
1--carrying
case,
partitioned and
light
weight.
1375.00
01610-WB SUPER 600 " ENG" KIT I
Designed for use when 120V AC is not available. The power is a 30 volt DC battery belt which generates a 250W lamp. Both power cords and lamps are included in the kit. Gives more light output per watt than any competitive fixture.
1--Frezzi 600. 30 volt DC 125 Volt AC fixture 1-120 Volt Cable. 8 ft with on off switch and
plug
1-30 volt cable, 8 ft. with on off switch and plug 1--Accessory Holder 1--Rotating Barndoor 1--Daylight Glass Conversion Filter. 3200K to
5400K. 1--Hand Grip.
1--Micro- Featherweight Stand, Folded 18 1 /2 ". extended 78".
1-30 Volt
4ah Battery Belt ( 250W-30 min.)
w/charger cable.
1--DYS. 600 Watt ru 3200K Quartz Lamp
1--DYG, 250 Watt
3400K Quartz Lamp
1--ENG Kit ICarrying Case
965.00
40
a large selection of accessories.
01640-WB SUPER 600 " ENG"
4--tota 1000W fixtures with 16 ft power cable
KIT III
and integral two-leaf reflecting doors.
Everyone in TV or photo lighting production must
1--lofa-brella 4--tota-frames
have at least one ENG KIT Ill. Very efficient light output and light weight.
2--assorted gels
1--lightflector
3--Frezzi 600, 30 Volt DC125 Volt AC Fixture.
4--tota-flags 1--tota-flector
3-120 Volt Cable, 8 ft. with on off switch and plug.
4--flexi-shafts
3--DYS 600W Quartz Lamp.
1--tota-tatch
3--Accessory Holder.
4--omni-stands
3-- Four Leaf Barndoor.
TI-94M- LL T 4 KIT
Versatile, light weight that gives a very wide spread of light or ( by moving the reflector doors into the light beam) gives a concentration of light
1-- tots- mount 1--tota-clamp 1--large space clamp 1--gaffer tape 1--tota-lampak
2--Scissor Mounts. 3--Uttra Featherweight Stands,
extended 83 1/ 2 ".
1-25' Extension Cable. 3-Way 1-- Rugged Case, Partitioned,
Folded Roomy,
25 1 /2 ", Light
which can be used for bounce light. The kit has
I--case
1290.00
weight
975.00
Reprinted with permission from materials by (- 1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-13
WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
PORTABLE LIGHTING
4717 " F" South Mingo Road Tulsa, OK 74146 (918)665-6820
PORTABLE LIGHTING
«it
FL- 100
FL- 250
KEY AND BACKLIGHTING
AC DC Power- You need FREZZI high output
lights, plus portable power for most all ENG production.
FL-100-F FREZZI LIGHTHEAD WITH 11.5
Volt 1000W FAV Quartz Lamp.
Handle
Power
Cable
with
Plug
195.00
FL- 250-F FREZZI LIGHTHEAD WITH 30 Volt
DC 250W FBV Quartz Lamp. Han-
dle, Power Cable with Plug. ( Light-
head accepts 150 or 350W Quartz
Lamps)
195.00
SP-600-F FREZZI SUPER 600 Fixture Only
(No Lamp or Cable)
165.00
CABLES
C12- F
12 Volt Cable, 8 ft with On,Off
Switch
32.00
C30- F
30 Volt Cable, 8 ft. with On Off
Switch
32.00
C120- F
120 Volt Cable. 8 ft. with On/Off
Switch
17.00
C120EX-WB 120 Volt Extension Cable, 25 ft. 3
Way
18.50
FIXTURE ACCESSORIES
FLAH-101-F Accessory Holder for Barndoors Plus
Scrim & Dichroic Filter
29.00
FLBD-102-F Rotating Barndoors, Mounts in
Accessory Holder
36.00
01005-WB Single Scrim, Mounts in Accessory
Holder
8.50
01006-WB Double Scrim, Mounts in Accessory
Holder
8.50
01007-WB Dichroic Filter. Mounts in Accessory
Holder
85.00
FLDF-101-F Dichroic Filter Swing Away
88.00
FIS-101-F Scrim Swing Away
40.00
FLH-101-F Hand Grip
12.00
01510-WB
01512-WB
01980-WB 01982-WB LAMPS EYL-GE DYG-GE EKB-GE DYS-TH EKD-GE DYR-220GE
Micro- Featherweight High Riser Light
Stand. Folded 181/ 2 . Extended
78"
53.00
Ultra-Featherweight High Riser Light
Stand, Folded 25 1/ 4 ". extended
83 1/ 2 ",
67.00
Eng Kit 1 Carrying Case
90.00
Eng Kit 3 Carrying Case
100.00
1000 Watt si 3300K 12 hrs.) 250 Watt rri 3400K 30 hrs.) 420 Watt hi 3200K 120 hrs.) 600 Watt (ii 3200K 120 hrs.) 650 Watt Pr 3400K 120 hrs.)
Volt ( 50 13.68
Volt ( 15 27.80
Volt ( 75 36.86
Volt ( 75 28.00
Volt ( 25 36.34
650 Watt hrs.)
3200K 220 Volt ( 50 33.50
MOUNTS
FLCM-101-F Camera Mount, 1/ 4 -20 Screw In 12.00 FLCM-
101A-F
Camera Mount, 10-32 Screw In 12.00
FLCM-
101B-F
Camera Mount, 4MM Screw-In 12.00
FLCM-102-F Dove Tail Mount
45.00
LS- 1-F
Lite-Stud, 3" x 1/ 2 ", 1/ 4 -20
10.00
LS- 2-F LS- 3-F
Lite-Stud, 3" x 1/ 2 ". 10-32 Lite-Stud, 3" x 1/ 2 ", 5MM
10.00 11.00
LS- 4-F LS- 5-F
Lite-Stud, 3"
1/ 2 ", 6MM
11.00
Dove- Tail Assembly and Lite-
Stud
49.00
LS- 21-F
Lite Stud for FP-21/22
28.00
LS- 79-F
Lite Stud for HL-9
17.00
LS- 83-F
Lite-Stud for HL-83
28.00
LS- 700-F Lite-Stud for XC-700
17.00
LSM-21-F Lite Mic Holder for FP- 21/22 49.00
LSM-79-F Lite Mic Holder for HL-79
49.00
LSM-83-F Lite Mic Holder for HL-83
49.00
Special Mounts Available for Most Video
Cameras
."'4111re .:11111111e
at
2339- BM
Scissor Clip with 1/ 2 " Stud, Used to
Suspend Light from Drop., Ceiling.
Allows dressing of power cable
along drop ceiling.
6.00
2339- 1- BM Scissor Hook, Used to Dress Light
Cable Across Drop Ceiling
6.00
PORTABLE BATTERY
PACKS BELTS 8
CHARGERS
Frezzohni fixture arid camera batteries FBP-12- 4L-F12 Volt @ 4AH Battery Pack ( 100W-20
Min.)
395.00
F-30- EC-F 30 Volt @ 4AH Battery Belt ( 250W-30
F-30-
Min.)
545.00
EXFA-F
30 Volt @ 4AH Battery Belt ( 250W-30
Min.)
595.00
EC-30-F
30 Volt @ 4AH Battery Pack ( 250W-30
Min.)
595.00
FTC- 12-F 12 Volt Trickle Charge ( 14
hrs.)
80.00
BC- 77- U- F 12 Volt Fast Charger ( 1 hr.) 395.00
BC- 30-
C D- F
30 Volt Fast Charger ( 1 hr ) 395.00
FLCC-101-F Super 650 AU Kit Carrying
Case
125.00
FLCC-102-F Super 650 AC Kit Shipping
Case
295.00
FLCC-103-F 30 Volt Kit Carrying Case FLCC-104-F 12 Volt Kit Carrying Case
140.00 140.00
BATTERY PACKS
BP- 12-F
12V iii 4ah
BP- 13-F
13.2V 5, 4ah
BP- 14-F
14.4V hi 4ah
BP- 77-F
7.2V
4ah
BP- 122-F 12V iii 2ah
BP- 142-F 14.4V 5, 2ah
FBP-20-F 12V 5, 2ah
FBP-44-F 12V hi 2ah
FBP-60-F 12V iii 2ah
FBP-90-F 12V rir 4ah
FBP-90-
FC-F
12V i.i 4ah
FBP-12-
4B-F
12V r/r 4ah
FBP-12-
4L-F
12V
4ah
FBP-14-
43-F
14 4V
4ah
EC- 30-F
30V (i, 4ah
AC ADAPTERS
RPS1-F
On-Board, 40 Watts
RPS2-F
Dual Channel Adapter
Charger
RPS3-F
On-Board 50 Watts
455.00 475.00 495.00 495.00 275.00 295.00 210.00 210.00 210.00 275.00
330.00
395.00
395.00
425.00 595.00
515.00
895.00 595.00
BATTERY BELTS
F-12-
EXFA-F
12V hi 6ah
F- 12-
77-F
6.0V la 6ah
F-14-
EXFA-F
14.4V
6ah
F-30- EC- F 30V
4ah
F-30-
EXFA-F
30V
4ah
475.00 475.00
495.00 546.00
595.00
FREZZI BATTERY MOUNTING
BRACKETS 8 ACCESSORIES
BHM-F
Belt Bracket
FCB-103-F For FBP-12-4B/41.
FBP-14-4E
HM76A-F TK-76A
HM7613/C-F TK-760/C
HM77-F
HL -77
HM300-F
BVP-300/330
HM2000-F Ky-2000/2700
HM6000-F On-Board to DXC 1800/6000
HM90-F
BP-90 to OnBrd
ISM90-F
Side Mt. HI-79
RM6000-F BP-90 to DXC-1800/6000
HMBVV1-F BETACAM
HMM3-F
DXC-M3
LP9O-F
Leather Pouch
95.00
90.00 155.00 155.00 148.00 105.00 105.00 198.00 198.00 110.00 198.00 105.00 145.00
38.00
LEATHER BELT FLBB-101-F For FBP-124B/4L 8« FBP-14-4E 28.00
BATTERY CHARGERS
BC-77U- F 12-14V W/Cable
395.00
BC-77U6-F 12-14V W/Side BKT
395.00
BC-30C ,D-F 30V W ,Cable FAST CHARGER ADAPTER CABLES
395.00
HL -F
To BP- 122i142
30.00
HS- F
To FBP-20/44.60 & FBP-12-4B,
4L
30.00
HV-F
To FBP-90-FC
30.00
HX-F
To FBP-14-4E
30.00
OVERNIGHT TRICKLE CHARGERS
BC- 1225-F For FBP-20/44 60
80.00
BC- 1245-F For BP-90
80.00
CR -1-F
Current Regulated
105.00
FTC- 12-F For BP- 12
80.00
FTC- 14-F For BP-14
80.00
FTC- 14X- F For FBP-14-4E
80.00
FTC- 122-F For BP- 122
90.00
FTC- 142-F For BP- 142
90.00
MULTIPLE BATTERY CHARGING STATIONS
MBC-2-F Fast Charges ( 5) Batteries Plus (8)
Inter-Mixed VTR Batteries Over -
Night
2,400.00
MBC-4-F Fast Charges (5) Batteries' Plus (8)
BP-90 Typè or other Single Type
VTR
Battery
Packs
Overnight
2,090.00
MBC-4A-F Fast
Charges ( 5) Batteries
Only
1,595.00
MBC-2/4C-F Deluxe Shipping Case
375.00
'Fast Charge Adapter Cables Optional
MBC-5-F Charges (8) Sony BP-90 Type
Battery Packs Overnight
395.00
Reprinted with permission from materials by © 1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
VL-14
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
STUDIO LIGHTS
4717 " F" South Mingo Road Tulsa, OK 74146 (918)665-6820
DP LIGHT 8, REFLECTORS
OP light and reflectors make this 1000W very versatile There are many accessories that compliment this fixture. Ask for a complete brochure
D2- 10- LL do light D2- 15- LL # 1reflector D2- 17- LL #3reflector D2-18- LL #4reflector
DP LIGHT CONTROLS
D2-20- LL complete barndoor D2-21- LL barndoor frame D2- 22- LL rectangular leaf 02-23- LL triangular leaf D2-50- LL diffused glass D2- 51- LL dichroic filter D2- 52- LL clear glass 02- 53- LL snoot D2- 54- LL full scrim 02-56- LL half scrim 02-56- LL graduated scrim D2- 57- LL cookaloris 02-24-1.1. dp frame
145.00 13.00 13.00 13.00
60.00 25.00 13.00 13.00 32.50 107.50 28.50 36.50 14.50 14.50 17.00 14.50 38.50
RECOMMENDED LAMP 120V
MEDIUM TWO- PIN BASE 23 /4 "L.C.L. TUNGSTEN- HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansi Code Volts Watts Temp. Type
EHC-TH 120
500 3150 Clear
Price 52.00
EHF-TH 120 FEL-TH 120 FCV-TH 120
750 1000 1000
3200 3200 3200
Clear Clear Frosted
58.00 52.00 64.00
RECOMMENDED LAMPS 120V
DOUBLE ENDED 55/0"
M L TUNGSTEN- HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansl
Code
Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
FER -GE 120 1000 3200K Clear
68.46
DVV-SY 120 FEY -TH 120
1500 3200K 2000 3200K
Clear Clear
(Disc. I 110.00
PAR LAMP HOLDERS
Used for lighting of arenas , sports events.
churches. etc. More light per 1000W than any
other quartz fixture.
02031-WB 1000 PAR 64 WHITE. includes -C"
Clamp and Color Frame
135.00
02032-WB 1000 PAR 64 BLACK, includes "C"
Clamp and Color Frame
135.00
02033-WB 1000 PAR 64 WHITE, with Canopy.
Gel Frame, and No Plug
120.00
02034-WB 1000 PAR 64 BLACK, with Canopy.
Gel Frame, and No Plug
120.00
01034-WB MOTION PICTURE ADDER For
Stand Mounting, 25' Cable with
Inline 20A Crush Proof On/Off
Switch and Plug
25.00
01035-WB 4-Way Barndoor
52.00
01036-WB Color Frame
10.00
02710-WB Safety Cable
6.50
02705-WB "C" Clamp
19.80
08820-L
Replacement Socket, extended
Mogul end prong
8.00
RECOMMENDED LAMPS 120V SINGLE ENDED, EXTENDED MOGUL END PRONG BASE TUNGSTEN- HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansl Code Volts FFN-GE(VNS) 120 FFP- GE(NS) 120 FFR-GE(MF) 120 FFS-GE(WF) 120 FGM-GE(NS) 120 FGN-GE(MS) 120
Watts 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
Temp. 3200K 3200K 3200K 3200K 5200K 5200K
Type Price Clear 96.94 Clear 96.94 Clear 96.94 Clear 96.94 Clear 224.50 Clear 224.50
71- 10- LL Tote- Light 1000 with Ref lecting
Doors
107.00
71-20- LL GeliDiflusion Frame
24.50
71-80- LL 16', 120V Power Cable with lnline
On/Off Switch and Plug
22.50
(See Lamp Listing below Set Lights)
For Soft almost shadowless light. Folds to take on location.
S2- 10- LL Soft Light 2-2000 with 14 Cable with 'Mine On/Off Switch
S2- 20- LL Two Leaf Barndoor S2- 30- LL Replacement Reflector Shell
(See Lamp Listing below Set Lights)
275.00 72.50 68.00
SET AND BACKGROUND LIGHT
Heavy duty wash light for backgrounds, sets or curtains up to 9' in height. They work 41/2'from background service eliminating spill light on subject.
Heavy duty key light type fixture with excellent open face barndooring capacity. The fixture is very compact and the 4 leaf barndoor is integral.
29001- BM
29000- BM
04113- BM 48015- BM 01018-WB 01017-WB 49304- BM 49305- BM
SLIMLINE II 1000/2000W with inte-
gral (4) Leaf Barndoors, "C" Clamp
and Plug
210.10
MOTION PICTURE MODEL as
above except with stand mount, 25'
cable and inline 20A Crush proof on off switch with 20A Twist Lock
Plug
214.50
U Ground Pigtail ( PBG)
18.00
Four-Leaf Barndoor
63.00
Gel Frame
13.00
Gel Frame Holder ( For Use on
Barndoor to extend Gel Frame)52.00
Scrim ( 10"
Stainless
Steel)
Single
8.00
Scrim ( 10" Double
Stainless
Steel) 10.00
BASE AND FILL LIGHT
Excellent heavy duty base type light. Great for
copy board lighting.
18003- BM
MINI MAC 1000 with Integral 4-leaf
Barndoor. " C"
Clamp
and
Plug
141.90
18001- BM MOTION PICTURE MODEL as shown above except with stand
mount, 25' cable and inline 15A on/
off switch and Plug
141.90
01112-WB Extended Holder
52.00
01113-WB Gel Frame
1100
49141- BM Safety Cable (See Lamp Listing below Set Lights)
8.80
Lots of light and an even wide angle beam. Has
a semi-hard light pattern that can be concentrated by the reflector doors for bounce light
27001- BM
49141- BM 27000- BM
MINI SET 1000 with Integral 2- Leaf
Barndoors, " C"
Clamp
and
Receptacle
141.90
Safety Cable
8.80
MOTION PICTURE MODEL as
above except with Stand Mounts,
25' Cable and lnline 15A On/Off
Switch and Plug
141.90
RECOMMENDED LAMPS 120V
DOUBLE ENDED
4"/,." M.O.L. TUNGSTEN- HALOGEN QUARTZ
Ansi Code FON-TH
Volts Watts Temp. Type
Price
120
500 3200K Frosted 31.00
EMD-TH 120
750 3200K Frosted 40.00
FHM-TH 120
1000 3200K Frosted 35.00
FCM-TH 120
1000 3200K Clear
32.00
(Clear Lamp Used with Soft Light)
STAND FAMILY
This family of stands will handle most fixture mounting. There are many more stands available.
01510-WB MICRO-FEATHERWEIGHT 181/ 2 "extended 78"
folded 53.00
Reprinted with permission from materials by (ë.)1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-15
WALTER S. BREWER
4717 " F" South Mingo Road
Tulsa, OK 74146
(918)665-6820
01512-WB ULTRA- FEATHERWEIGHT
folded
25' .. extended 83'
70.00
01514-WB FEATHERWEIGHT folded 30 ex-
tended 103
82.50
01516-WB MEDIUM WEIGHT folded 35
extended 127"
115.00
CO.,
INC.
01517-WB Caster Adapters
with Brakes for 01516-WB
(Set of 3)
40.00
4/2 63006-BM
63003L- BM
STUDIO STAND folded 47. extend-
ed 142 1/2
218.35
STUDIO STAND LOW folded 28
extended 64
176.00
SAND BAG
Used to weight stands for fixtures, boom. gobos and flags to assure stability and safety both on
location and in the studio These high quality
lined sandbags can also be emptied and reloaded with ease.
07028-WB Single Bag-25 lbs. 07029-WB Saddle Bag- 50 lbs
55.00 75.00
PORTABLE DISTRIBUTION
PORTABLE LIGHTING/ ACCESSORIES
50 FT. NUMBER 143 S.O. 1000 WATT
04033-WB Parallel Blade U' Ground, 25A
120V
81.25
04034-WB Grounded Pin Plug, 20A 120V 65.10
04035-WB Grounded
Twist
Lock,
20A
120V
84.25
50 FT. NUMBER 12/3 S.O. 2000 WATT
04083-WB Parallel Blade -U- Ground. 20A
120V
99.75
04084-WB Grounded Pin Plug, 20A 120V 83.60
04085-WB Grounded
Twist
Lock,
20A
120V
102.75
PIGTAILS
MALE TO FEMALE PIGTAIL 123 2000 WATT
04112-WB Male 15A 120V Parallel Blade ' U"
Ground to Female 20A 120V
Grounded Pin Plug
29.20
04113-WB Male 15A 120V Parallel Blade " U"
Ground to Female 20A 120V
Grounded Twist Lock
46/5
A must for placing the light beam exactly where you want it, placing the boom stand out of the picture. A light can easily be counter balanced equal to the weight of a 6" fresnel with accessories
63020- BM Boom Arm Er Heavy Duty Stand 610.50
GAFFER EQUIPMENT
18321 3-BM Two Position 5'8' Stand to Fixture Mount with V2 Yoke Bolt
44
12.75
49104-WB Safety Throat
"C" Clamp with Hand
Position Knob
19.80
·
CONNECTORS
All connectors are PHENELIC molded plastic. grounded and shipped with wire ends for the pin connectors. (All are grounded.)
04210-H
04211-H
04212-H
04213-H
04214-UC 04215-UC 04216-H 04217-H 04218-H 04219-H 04220-UC 04221-UC 04222-UC 04223-UC
15A Parallel Blade ( Fits Standard
recept) Female
17.00
15A Parallel Blade ( Fits Standard
recept) Male
11.00
20A Parallel Blade. Female Will
accept 15A Male above)
18.00
20A Parallel Blade, Male ( cannot be
used with 15A Female above) 11.50
20A Pin Connector, Female
6.25
20A Pin Connector. Male
6.25
20A Twistlock, Female
20.00
20A Twistlock, Male
13.00
50A Twistlock, Female
53.00
50A Twistlock, Male
41.50
60A Pin Connector, Female 21.50
o 60A Pin Connector. Male
100A Pin Connector Female 100A Pin Connector, Male
21.50 44.00 44.00
PIGTAIL-TWO-FER
MALE TO FEMALE 123 2000 WATT
04123-WB Male to Two Female 20A 120V
Grounded Pin Plug
52.50
04124-WB Male to Two Female 20A 120V
Grounded Twist Lock
92.35
02734-WB
VI -16
EXTENSION CABLE
!Ft
63070-WB Gaffers Grip
with
Safety Stud,
Non- Marring
20.90
02731-WB Pantograph Stirrup 16.00
Stirrup Pipe. two light position 10.00
25 FT. NUMBER 14/3 S.O. 1000 WATT
04030-WB Parallel Blade " U- Ground, 15A
120V
60.00
04031-WB Grounded Pin Plug, 20A120V 43.90
04032-WB Grounded
Twist
Lock,
20A
120V
63.15
25 FT. NUMBER 123 S.O. 2000 WATT
04073-WB Parallel Blade " U" Ground, 20A
120V
69.35
04074-WB Grounded Pin Plug. 20A/120V 53.25
04075-WB Grounded
Twist
Lock,
20A
120V
72.35
PIGTAIL POWER BOXES
MALE TO FEMALE 1000 WATT 15A 120V WATER RESISTANT APPROVED BOX.
04411-WB 04412-WB 04413-WB
Parallel Blade U to Duplex 82.50
Parallel Blade U' to Quad 100.00 Parallel Blade " U" to Duplex. Individually Switched-Quad Box 120.00
Reprinted with permission from materials by 0 1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
GAFFER SUPPLIES
4717 " F" South Mingo Road
Tulsa, OK 74146
(918)665-6820 MALE TO FEMALE 2000 WATT 20A 120V WATER RESISTANT APPROVED BOX.
04418-WB 04419-WB
04420-WB
04423-WB 04424-WB 04425-WB
04428-WB 04429-WB 04430-WB
Parallel Blade U. to Duplex 84.00
Parallel Blade " U" to Quad
Box
102.00
Parallel Blade " U- to Duplex Individ-
ually Switched-Quad Box
121.50
Pin Plug to Duplex
79.00
Pin Plug to Quad
97.00
Pin Plug to Duplex. Individually
Switched-Quad Box
116.00
Twist Lock to Duplex
88.00
Twist Lock to Quad
104.75
Twist Lock to Duplex Individually
Switched-Quad Box
103.75
PIGTAIL INLINE DIMMER 2.4KW
04433- EC 04434- EC
04435- EC 04437- EC
Parallel Blade " U" Pin Plug Twist Lock Remote Control Unit
285.00 285.00 286.00 71.00
MAIN ENTRY POWER CONTROL
BOX
Main power entry with CAM-LOK connectors to 50 amp 240 volt, 3 phase/4 wire main breaker
distributed to eight 20 amp breaker switches protecting two each 20 amp recessed plugs all housed in an approved enclosure. Box is
constructed from aluminum. 150 usable amps at 125V
04439-WB Main Entry Power Control
Box
2,300.00
Note: All Portable Distribution exposed cabling is
of S.O. Standards ( resists oil, water, etc.). Other wire types and configurations may be Custom Fabricated upon request. ( All grounded wiring.)
GAFFER SUPPLIES
THORN LAMPS*
Thorn, an English corporation, is one of the world's largest manufacturers of quartz lamps. The CYX. one of the most used lamps in the
industry, has a stronger base than those of competitors . . made from super strong glass mica plus a high-temperature metal retaining clip assures maximum strength from the base to the quartz envelope. Lamp test show they are 50% quieter and last up to 60% longer at 3200 Kelvin, 125 volt.
QUARTZ LAMPS
Ansi
Case
Code
Qty
BAB-GE
6
BAH- GE
24
BBA-GE
24
BCA-GE
24
BEJ-GE
24
BEP -GE
24
BFA-GE
24
BFK)13FL-GE 24
BHC/DYS/
DYV-GE
24
BHC/DYS/
DYV-TH
24
BRH-GE
12
BSC-SY
12
BSD-SY
12
BTL-GE
12
BTL-TH
12
BTM-TH
12
BIN- GE
12
BTN-TH
12
BTP-GE
12
BTP-TH
12
BTR-GE
12
BTR-TH
12
BVR-GE
24
BVT-GE
6
BVT-TH
6
BVV-GE
6
BVV-TH
6
BVW-GE
6
BVW-TH
6
BWA-GE
6
BWA-TH
12
BWF-GE
6
BWF-TH
6
BWG-TH
6
BWM-GE
6
BWN-GE
6
CAW/CAX-GE 24
CBA-GE
24
CBJ/CBC-GE 24
CBX/CBS-GE 24
CCM/CHD-GE 24
CDS/CDX-GE 24
CEL-SY
24
CEM-GE
24
CEW/CFC-GE 24
CHK-SY
24
CLS/CSG-GE 24
CLX/CMB-GE 24
CMV/CMT-GE 24
CWA-GE
24
CWA-TH
12
CWZ-TH
6
CXZ-GE
6
CXZ-TH
6
CYV-GE
6
CYV-TH
6
CYX-GE
6
CYX-TH
6
DAN-SY
24
DCT(XL)-SY 6
DEB-GE
24
DGH-GE
24
DMX-GE
24
DNS-GE
24
DNT-GE
24
DNV-GE
24
DNW-GE
24
DPY-GE
6
DPY-TH
6
DRC/CRB-GE 24
DRS-GE
24
DSE/DKZ-GE 12
DSE/DKZ-TH 12
DSF/DKX-GE 12
DSF/DKX-TH 12
DIA-1H
6
Watts 20
300 250 250 200 300 375 750
Color Temp. 2925K 3200K 3400K 4800K 3075K 3400K 3400K 3050K
600 3200K
600 3200K 1000 3350K
750 3200K 750 3000K 500 2950K 500 2950K 500 3200K
750 3000K 750 3000K 750 3200K
750 3200K 1000 3200K
1000 3200K 30 2860K
1000 3050K 1000 3050K 1000 3200K
1000 3200K
2000 3200K 2000 3200K 2000 3200K 2000 3200K
2000 3200K 2000 3200K 2000 3200K
750 3200K 1000 3200K
50 2050K 500 3200K
75 2950K
75 2950K 200 3150K 100 2975K
120 3000K 120 3000K 150 3100K 150 2850K 300 3150K 300 3150K
300 3100K
750 3250K
750 3200K
1500 3200K 1500 3200K
1500 3200K
1000 3200K 1000 3200K 2000 3200K 2000 3200K
200 3400K 2000 3050K
500 2850K 750 3050K
500 3200K 500 3100K 750 3100K 1000 3100K 500 3050K 5000 3200K 5000 3200K 1000 3280K 1000 3280K 1000 3200K 1000 3200K 1500 3200K 1500 3200K
1500 3200K
Price 20.30 5.00 3.94 4.34 18.68 11.00 17.82 47.74
29.24
28.00 57.38 108.42 103.32 49.74 47.00 47.00 55.10 47.00 53.82 47.00 59.18 52.50 11.10 83.92 72.00 81.64 72.00 106.88 88.00 133.42 120.00 141.58 130.00 140.00 85.46 93.12
9.06 55.76 17.00 15.96 22.06 17.06 12.76 11.78 16.52 14.04 17.06 19.38 27.80 36.66 27.00 96.00 126.28 115.00 100.00 92.00 133.16 125.00 15.30 187.50 54.08 56.18 30.36 52.68 55.48 58.42 56.88 581.64 535.00 40.44 34.62 64.28 50.00 68.36 60.00 90.00
DIY-GE
a
10000 3200K
DTY-TH
6
10000 3200K
DVY-GE
12
650 3200K
DWC-SY
24
150 2800K
DWD-SY
24
300 2800K
DWE-GE
12
650 3200K
DWT-GE
6
1000 3000K
DWY-TH
50
650 3400K
DWZ-GE
12
375 2950K
DXC-GE
24
500 3400K
DXH-SY
'2
375 3200K
DXK-GE
12
650 3400K
DXM-SY
12
DXN-GE
24
DXN-TH
50
DXR/DXS-GE 24
DXT-SY
24
DXW-GE
24
250
woo woo woo 1000 woo
3400K 3400K 3400K 3400K 4803K
3200K
DXW-TH
50
1000 3200K
DXX-GE
12 800/230V 3200K
DYA-GE
12
1000 3200K
DYG-GE
24
250 3400K
DYG-TH
50
250 3400K
DYH-GE
24
600 3200K
DYR-GE
24
650 3200K
DYR-TH
50
650 3200K
DYS/DYV/
BHC-GE
24
600 3200K
DYS/DTVI
BHC-TH
50
600 3200K
DZD-SY
12
1000 3200K
EAL-GE
24
500 3200K
EBR-GE
24
375 3400K
EBV-GE
24
500 3400K
EBW-GE
24
500 4800K
ECT-GE
24
500 3200K
EEX-SY
12
300 3200K
EFX-SY
12
500 3000K
EGC/EGD-GE 12
500 3200K
EGE-GE
50
500 3000K
EGE-TH
12
500 3000K
EGF-GE
12
750 3200K
EGG-GE
12
750 3000K
EGG -TH
12
750 3000K
EGJ-GE
12
1000 3200K
EGJ-TH
50
1000 3200K
EGK-GE
12
1000 3200K
EGK-TH
12
1000 3200K
EGN-TH
12
500 3200K
EGA- GE
12
750 3200K
EGR-TH
12
750 3200K
EGT-GE
12
1000 3200K
EGT-TH
10
1000 3200K
EHC-EHB-GE 12
500 3200K
EHC/EHB-TH 12
500 3200K
EHD-GE
6
500 3000K
EHD-TH
12
500 3000K
EHF-GE
6
750 3200K
EHF-TH
12
750 3200K
EHG-GE
6
750 3000K
EHG-TH
12
750 3000K
EHM-TH
25
300 3000K
EHP-GE
12
300 3000K
EHR-GE
6
400 3000K
EHT-GE
6
250 3000K
EHV-SY
12
325 3000K
EHZ
25
300 3000K
EJG-GE
12
750 3200K
EJG-TH
10
750 3200K
EKB-GE
24
420 3200K
EKD-GE
24
650 3400K
EKP-GE
24
80 3350K
EKT-SY
12
150 3400K
END-GE
12
750 3200K
EMD-TH
10
750 3200K
ESL-GE
6
150 3000K
ESM-GE
6
250 3000K
ESN-GE
6
100 3000K
ESP-GE
6
150 3000K
ESAG-E
6
100 3000K
ESS-GE
6
250 3000K
ESX-GE
6
20 2925K
ETB-GE
6
250 2900K
ETC-GE
6
150 3000K
ETD-GE
6
100 3000K
ETF-GE
6
150 3200K
ETG-GE
6
150 3000K
ETH-GE
6
150 2900K
EVR-GE
6
500 3000K
EVR-TH
500 3000K
EXN-GE
6
50 3050K
Reprinted with permission from materials by © 1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
1,119.90 995.00 35.96 &92 15.30 45.16 89.28 28.00 37.58 13.40 15.30 45.18 71.42 54.20 37.00 21.48 31.26 49.50 38.00 34.48 58.16 27.80 30.00 35.02 45.30 33.50
29.20
28.00 73.98 17.04 16.00
4.06 5.54 4.60 61.22 98.22 64.80 64.80 58.00 72.70 72.70 66.00 76.28 68.00 78.82 70.00 50.00 76.28 70.00 83.92 75.00 59.18 52.00 56.88 52.00 61.74 58.00 61.74 58.00 29.00 43.36 38.26 33.16 43.36 33.00 43.36 40.00 36.86 36.34 34.52 46.56 45.92 40.00 34.44 36.36 36.98 34.44 36.98 33.16 20.30 36.36 33.16 33.16 35.72 33.16 35.72 34.56 35.00 21.64
VI- 17
WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
4717 " F" South Mingo Road Tulsa, OK 74146 (918) 665-6820
FGT
12
FGV
12
FGW
24
*FHM
10
1500-
Cl/CL/48
6
1500 1000
150 1000
3200K 3200K 3200K
3200K
1500 3200K
66.61 (Disc.)
24.67 35.00
142.72
HMI LAMPS
BA575-SY
10
BA1200-SY 10
HM11200-0K 10
HM11200-0S 10
BA1200/32-SY 2
BA2500-SY
1
BA4000-SY
1
BB1200-
PAR/64-SY
*-THORN LAMPS UNMARKED LAMPS OR SYLVANIA
575 1200 1200 1200 1200
2500 4000
5600K 5600K 5600K 5600K 3200K
5600K 5600K
1200 5600K
ARE GENERAL
854.60 892.86 561.25 542.00 956.63 1530.62 1938.78
982.14
ELECTRIC
DIFFUSION MATERIAL
3006-R
Tough Spun. 41/ 2 'x 22' Roll 80.00
03110-WB Tough Spun, 41/ 2 'x 51/ 2 'Roll 25.00
PAINT
5710-R 5711-R
Chroma Key Blue (gal) Chroma Key Green ( gal)
30.50 30.50
TAPE
(2" 60 YDS-24 Rolls Per Case)
398BL-WB
Black ( case)
398GR-WB Grey (case)
141.84 115.00
398GR Y-WB Grey ( roll)
6.20
398CL-WB
Colors, Red. Green, Blue, Gold
Yellow, White, and Black, ( roll) 8.00
STUDIO EQUIPMENT
inspected before fabrication to assure against weaving flaws and sewn to our rigid specifications These cycloramas are available in three colors-white, gray, and powder blue green.
Seamless Lino-Weave
This curtain has a 4" heavy duty binding at the
top with spring harness snaps on one foot centers. The 21/ 4 " bottom hem has a # 90 lead tape weight sewn 1" above the bottom of the
hem in a separate muslin pocket. The side hems have a 2" heavy duty binding with eyelets of 2' centers for tauting the curtain. Tow cord with handle is provided for easy transporting of curtain. The curtain is flame-proofed and flawless (as per the standards of the mills and converters) and is fabricated to the highest quality workmanship.
07005-WB White 07006-WB CBS Grey 07007-WB Powder Blue
Green 07008-WB Limbo Black
Sq. Ft. Sq. Ft.
(14'9" & ( 1410" á
under)
over)
3.25
4.25
3.40
4.50
3.35 3.60
4.35 4.70
ROSCOLUX
Seamless Scrim
The most durable color filter. Available in 103
colors and diffusers. Sold under the trade name "Supergel" overseas
LIGHT METERS
07038-WB White 07039-WB Black
2.20 2.30
2.95 120
*Sheets: 20" x 24"
1027-R
Primary Red
1080-R
Primary Blue
1091-R
Primary Green
*Rolls: 24" 1027R- R
1080R- R 1091R- R
X 50' Primary Red
Pnmary Blue Primary Green
8807-R
Swatch Book
4.25 4.25 4.25
109.50 109.50 109.50
2.50
09010-WB
G.E. Incident Footcandle Meter 09011-WB
75.00
Sekonic Incident Light Meter ( reads in footcandle)
Complete Kit 09012-WB
145.00
Gossen Sixticolor Color Meter ( reads 2600 to
20,000K) indicating proper color
295.00
CURTAINS, TRACK
TAUTING POLE
Tauting poles are used generally with the cyc curtain to assure proper horizontal tension on the cyclorama. They stand vertical at both ends of the cyc with adjustable claws attached through the vertical eyelet on the curtain. The base is weighted with a sandbag. The curtain is then adjusted to a proper tautness by the pair of poles.
1001 Lt. Bastard Amber 1002 Bastard Amber 1003 Dark Bast. Amber 1004 Med. Bast. Amber 1006 No Color Straw 1007 Pale Yellow 1008 Pale Gold 1009 Pale Amber Gold 1010 Medium Yellow 1011 Light Straw 1012 Straw 1014 Medium Straw
1015 Deep Straw 1016 Light Amber 1017 Light Flame 1018 Flame
1019 Fire
1020 Medium Amber
1021 Golden Amber 1022 Deep Amber 1023 Orange 1024 Scarlet 1025 Orange Red
1026 Light Red 1027 Medium Red
1030 Lt. Salmon Pink
1032 Salmon Pink 1033 No Color Pink 1034 Flesh Pink 1035ALight Pink
1036 Medium Pink 1037 Pale Rose Pink
1038 Light Rose 1040 Light Salmon
1041 Salmon
1042 Deep Salmon 1044 Middle Rose
1045 Rose
1046 Magenta 1047 Lt. Rose Purple
1048 Rose Purple 1049 Medium Purple
1050A Mauve
1051 Surprise Pink 1052 Light Lavender 1053 Pale Lavender 1054 Special Lay. 1055 Lilac 1057A Lavender 1058A Deep Lay. 1059 Indigo 1060 No Color Blue 1061 Mist Blue 1062 Booster Blue 1063 Pale Blue 1064 Light Steel Blue 1065 Daylight Blue 1067 Light Sky Blue 1068 Sky Blue 1069 Brilliant Blue
1070 Nile Blue 1071 Sea Blue 1072 Azure Blue 1073 Peacock Blue 1076 Lt. Green Blue 1077 Green Blue 1078 Trudy Blue 1079 Bright Blue 1080 Primary Blue 1081 Urban Blue 1082 Surprise Blue 1083 Medium Blue 1085 Deep Blue 1086A Pea Green 1087 Pale Yel. Green 1088 Light Green
1089 Moss Green 1090 Dark Yet. Green 1091 Primary Green 1092 Turquoise 1093 Blue Green 1094 Kelly Green 1095 Med. Blue Gm. 1097 Light Grey 1099 Chocolate
8( ACCESSORIES
CURTAINS-CYC
Cyclorama curtains are seamless up to 125 feet in length and 28 feet in height the cloth is
07013-WB 07014-WB 07015-WB 07016-WB 07017-WB 07018-WB 07019-WB 07020-WB 07021-WB 07022-WB 07023-WB 07024-WB 07025-WB 07026-WB 07027-WB
Tauting Pole Base (one Left and
one Right Hand)
46.00
(8) Tauting Pole with Guy Wire and
Turnbuckle
52.00
(9') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire and
Turnbuckle
58.50
(10') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
66.00
(11') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
71.50
(12') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
78.00
(13') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
84.50
(14') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
91.00
(15') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
97.50
(16') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
104.00
(17') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
110.50
(18') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
117.00
(19') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
123.50
(20') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
130.00
(21') Tauting Pole with Guy Wire
and Turnbuckle
136.50
EYELET CLAWS
07031-WB
Eyelet Claws to Attach Tauting Pole
to Cyc Curtain ( 2 (1. centers
required)
12.60
Reprinted with permission from materials by 1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
VL-18
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
STUDIO EQUIPMENT
4717 " F" South M ingo Road Tulsa, OK 74146 (918)665-6820
SAND BAG
07029-WB
Sand Bag. 50 lb size, non-spill
saddle bag type made of heavy-duty duck with inner liner and Velcro
fasteners to hold base and pole in
position
75.00
CURTAINS- BACKGROUND
SPECTROCOLOR II (TM)
The background curtains are also fabricated to
rigid specifications and come in almost any color.
Usually it is recommended that the first
background curtain be chroma-key blue. This,
then permits chroma-keying and when not
illuminated may be used to produce a limbo
eff ect
(Primary)
Sq. Ft.
07058-WB Red
2.20
07059-WB Green
2.20
07060-WB Chroma-Key Blue
2.20
(Other)
07061-WB Antique Gold 07062-WB Silver Haze
2.20 2.20
07063-WB Limbo Black
2.20
VELCRO FASTENER
07068-WB 07069-WB 07070-WB 07071-WB 07072-WB 07073-WB 07074-WB 07075-WB 07076-WB 07077-WB 07078-WB 07079-WB
07080-WB 07081-WB
8 Velcro Fastener 9' Velcro Fastener 10 Velcro Fastener 11' Velcro Fastener 12' Velcro Fastener 13' Velcro Fastener 14' Velcro Fastener 15' Velcro Fastener 16' Velcro Fastener 17' Velcro Fastener 18' Velcro Fastener 19' Velcro Fastener
20' Velcro Fastener 21' Velcro Fastener
20.00 22.50 25.00 27.50 30.00 32.50 35.00 37.50 40.00 42.50 45.00 47.50
50.00 52.50
07083-WB SWATCH BOOK 2.50
CYC CURTAIN GROUND ROW
07088-WB 9 ft radius corner section 07089-WB 8 ft. straight section
425.00 375.00
TRACK AND HANGERS
Track and accessories have been selected to assure a perfect installation. Curtain carriers are supplied with the proper trim chain ready to attach the cyc or background curtains. The dual track method is recommended. Track switching can be purchased upon installation or can be installed at a later date. A complete package, ready to install, includes preformed corners. assuring proper diameter for accurate corner illumination and ease of curtain travel.
SUSPENSION
It is most important that the curtains be suspended properly to assure even travel at the studio floor and stability of the track system. Wall brackets are available in 6" increments from the studio wall. Suspension brackets are used where wall mounting is not possible. All brackets assure proper spacing between the tracks. Grid mounted track hangers are available for studios where the grid pipe extends to the studio wall. Hardware is available for the mounting to any type of wall, including hollow.
07145-WB 07146-WB 07147-WB 07153-WB 07154-WB 07155-WB
30" Double Track
Assembly 36" Double Track
Assembly 42" Double Track Assembly 24" Double Track Bracket Assembly 30" Double Track Bracket Assembly 36" Double Track Bracket Assembly
Wall Bracket
38.50 Wall Bracket
40.50 Wall Bracket
42.50 Corner Wall
37.00 Corner Wall
40.00 Corner Wall
43.00
TRUSS OR CEILING SUSPENSION
7161-WB 07162-WB
Beam Attachment Assembly for 8"
Suspension Bracket
18.50
Hanging Clamp Assembly for Single
Track Suspension ( each includes
18" x 3/8"all-thread rod)
14.00
GRID PIPE SUSPENSION
07163-WB 07164-WB 07165-WB 07167-WB 07168-WB
07169-WB
07172-WB 07171-WB 07170-WB
Track Suspension Bracket Top ( 11 /2 "
I.D. to Track)
8.00
Track Suspension Bracket Top Cor-
ner Right Hand ( 11/ 2 "I.D. Pipe) 8.00
Track Suspension Bracket Top Cor-
ner Left Hand 11/ 2 " I.D. Pipe) 8.00
Track Suspension Bracket Bottom
(1 1/ 2 " I.D. to Track)
7.50
Track Suspension Bracket Bottom
Corner Right Hand ( 11 /2 "I.D. Pipe to
Track)
7.50
Track Suspension Bracket Bottom
Corner Left Hand ( 11 /2 " I.D. Pipe to
Track)
7.50
Accessory Suspension Bracket (with
3/8" Attachment Hole)
5.50
Accessory Suspension Bracket (with
3/8"Threaded Stud)
5.00
Accessory Suspension Bracket (with
WB" Threaded Socket)
5.25
STUDIO DISTRIBUTION
CYC GROUND ROW
Made of fiberglass for durability and to allow compound curvatures. Color of the ground row matches the white cyclorama curtain. The ground row may be painted to match any color background curtain by using tempra paint and washing with water when production is complete. Hides all cyclorama fixtures. When using top cyc lighting, the ground row is tinted with gels. Works 5 ft. from cyc curtain.
CYC LIGHT GROUND ROW
07085-WB 41/2 il. radius corner section 450.00
07086-W13 8 ft. straight section
475.00
07110-WB
07111-WB
07112-WB
07113-WB
07114-WI3
07115-WB 07118-WB
07119-WB 07122-WB 07123-WB 07124-WB 07125-WB 07128-WB
07129-WB 07130-WB 07131-WB 07132-WB 07138-WB
07141-WB
07142-WB
07143-WB
07144-WB
5 ft. section of straight cyc/
background
12.00
10 ft. section of straight ce/
background
24.00
15 ft. section of straight ce/
background
36.00
20 ft. section of straight cyc/
background
48.00
9 8. radius, 1/ 4 circle cyc/background
corner track
40.00
9 ft. radius, crating charge 30.00
41/ 2 'radius, 1/ 4 circle cycibackground
corner track
22.50
41/ 2 'radius, crating charge Track Switch, Right Hand
16.00 400.00
Track Switch, Left Hand
400.00
Inter Track Switch Assembly 800.00
Switching Pole
85.00
Nylon Wheel Carrier with Bumper
Assembly
6.00
Hanging Clamp
1.73
Ceiling Clamp
6.90
Splicing Clamp Carrier Stop
5.50 3.75
4" Single Track Wall Bracket
Assembly
16.50
8" Double Track Suspension Bracket
Assembly
15.00
12" Double Track Wall Bracket
Assembly
23.50
18" Double Track Wall Bracket
Assembly
34.00
24" Double Track Wall Bracket
Assembly
36.50
91
Rigid, 16 gauge, one-piece 31/ 2 " x 41 /2 "steel construction of desired length, with internal wiring to meet all electrical codes. Available with mounting hardware for any possible situation, standard 18" or 24" pigtail with connector of your choice. A unique four circuit cyc box for powering your cyc lights. Unit available completely assembled including 11 /2 "I.D. PiPe ( not included in price below) ready to hang .. . saving time and cost at installation. Comes primed and painted with 3" permanent decal assuring circuit identification from the control console.
Reprinted with permission from materials by 0 1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-19
WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
4717 " F" South Mingo Road Tulsa, OK 74146 (918) 665-6820
GRID CONNECTOR STRIPS
05015-WB 05018-WB 05021-WB
10 11 Strip, 4 20A« Pigtails 13 ft. Strip. 5 20A* Pigtails 16 ft. Strip. 6 20A' Pigtails
395.00 487.50 602.00
Other Configurations Available Price on Application
'Add $ 13.75 per Circuit for 20 Amp NEMA Twist Lock.
Note: Price for Connector Strip Bracket Assemblies. Single Pipe are included in price of Connector Strip and are completely assembled ready to install. They are shipped in a wooden crate, price included.
Fabricated to the high standards of the above men-
tioned connector strip with desired number of circuits and ampacity. Ready for wall or pipe mounting.
05114-WB
05115-WB
05116-WB
05117-WB
05118-WB
05119-WB
05120-WB 05121-WB 05122-WB 05123-WB 05124-WB 05125-WB
05126-WB
05191-WB
05192-WB 05193-WB 05195-WB 05197-WB
05109-WB
Bolt Assembly 3/ 4 1". attaches " Load Channel" ( as above) when slots are
provided by truss deck beams ( money savings) . 70 Sleeve Anchor 3/8" ( for low PSI density
concrete ceiling and floors) . 55
Wedge Anchor 3/8" ( for high PSI densi-
ty concrete ceiling and floors) 1.25 Toggle bolt Ve" assembly for hollow
wall
1.00
Load Channel, slotted sections. 20'
S/8" X 1-5/8", 12 gauge
76.00
All Thread Suspension Rod. Vv" 12'
Locking Spring Nut
7.00 1.25
Square Locking Washer Hex Head Nut. Flat Washer. -4" Lock Washer. i/8"
1.20 . 10
.05 . 05
Connector Strip
Single Pipe Connector Strip
Bracket Bracket
Assembly
22.50 Assembly
Double Pipe
28.00
Corner 90 degree Cyc Light Pipe. 41/ 2 '
radius. 11/2"I.D. Slip Couplings- both
ends
90.00
Pipe Cuts. 11/ 2 "I. D
1.75
Pipe Threads. 11/ 2 "ID
5.00
Light Pipe Coupling
3.00
Moveable Light Pipe. 6' ,
ID Grid Locks, 11/ 2 "
Light Pipe
15.00 11/ 2 for Moveable
10.00
STUDIO EQUIPMENT/ CONTROL SYSTEMS
09214-WB
09215-WB 09216- WO
09217-WB 09218-WB 09219-WB 09220-WB 09221-WB 09222-WB 09228-WB 09229-WB
Studio Ladder for 12' Grid
Studio Ladder for 13' Grid Studio Ladder for 14' Grid
Studio Ladder for 15' Grid Studio Ladder for 16' Grid Studio Ladder for 17' Grid Studio Ladder for 18' Grid Studio Ladder for 19' Grid Studio Ladder for 20' Grid Gaffers Basket Gaffers Tool Box, Locking
825.00
880.00 940.00
995.00 1,025.00 1,100.00 1,200.00 1,250.00 1,300.00
65.00 275.00
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
DIMMER BANKS- PORTABLE
WALL BOXES
05310-WB 05315-WB 05311-WB
Two Pigtails, 2-20A Three Pigtails, 2-20A, 1-50A Three Pigtails, 3-20A
102.00 142.00 138.00
Other Configurations Available Price on Application
GRID HARDWARE
All hardware may be purchased to suspend the complete lighting grid system. Included would be load channel, for ceiling mounting positions, all thread, required nuts and bolts, beam clamps, concrete anchors, grid hardware and pipe cut to length
STUDIO LADDERS
ALPHA DIM TO INCLUDE:
(For Portable Location Use)
Alpha Dim 24 kW portable dimmer with integral
potentiometer is used to dim 2-1000W or 1-2000W fixtures. It is used in small studios or on location. A
10' low voltage cable with remote control can be purchased
0600502- EC Parallel Blade U 0600506- EC Pin Plug 0600503- EC Twist Lock
06006- EC Remote Control Unit
285.00 285.00 285.00
71.00
05107-WB LIGHT PIPE
2.25/ft.
The heart of good lighting is the grid system. It is very important to use 11/2 "I.D. light pipe.
05194-WB LIGHT PIPE Handling Charge . 10/ft.
PLAYMATE II PORTABLE
DIMMER PACK TO INCLUDE:
rFor Portable Location or Small Studio Use)
05109-WB GRID LOCK
10.00
Used to fasten perpendicular 11/ 2 " I.D. light pipe together when constructing a grid. Also used for moveable light pipe to place alight at any position in the grid. The grid lock will not let the pipe torque.
05113-WB
Beam clamp 3/8", attaches " Load
Channel" to most types of angle iron,
such as truss deck beams
5.00
Designed to meet or exceed all safety standards.
These ladders are manufactured to work to grid height providing a6ft reach from ladder platform to grid with a 30" safety rail. The ladder is fabricated from 1 square tubing with all joints welded. Gaffers storage chest and basket for extension cables and other frequently used studio equipment are recom-
mended. The large casters are rubber with toe touch locking. A second ladder is recommended for larger studios. Finished with aprime coat and two coats of durable enamel.
09210-WB 09211-WB 09212-WB 09213-WB
Studio Ladder for 8' Grid Studio Ladder for 9' Grid Studio Ladder for 10' Grid
Studio Ladder for 11' Grid
495.00 550.00 640.00 725.00
Compact and flexible. Playmate can be purchased with ( 12) 20 amp. (6) 50 amp, and (3) 100 amp dimmers per each portable pack. Recepticals on dimmer outputs are (2) per 20 amp dimmer and ( 1) per 30 amp and 100 amp dimmer. Each dimmer has a single properly sized protective breaker. The celebrity controller is used with the Playmate dimmer packs.
41412- EC
41406- EC 41403- EC 04- 1400-00- EC
(12120 Amp Dimmers (6150 Amp Dimmers (31100 Amp Dimmers Daisy Chain 18"
3200.00 3600.00 2267.00
66.65
Recepticle Code ( Place after Cat. No.) 01- EC--Terminal Output
02-EC-PBG--(NEMA 520) 2 KW Dimmers Only Two Recepticals Per Dimmer
03-EC-UTLG-Twist Lock ( Not in 12 KW)
06- EC-PPG Grounded Pin Plug
VL-20
Reprinted with permission from materials by 1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
4717 " F" South Mingo Road Tulsa, OK 74146 (918)665-6820
DIMMER BANKS
Studio
and increasing dimmer life. Standard 19" EIA Cabinets utilize tri-chassis dimmer racks and other components for complete system. Dimmers are available in 10, 20, 35, 60 and 100 amp ratings. Contractor access is assured by removable panels on all faces.
Studio dimmer racks are moduler to simplify installation and provide customized economy. This system is complete with needed dimmer plug-in modules, wiring, breakers and all other components ready to be set in its permanent location and " hard-wired."
Quad Dimmer
Modular Bank
MODULAR FLOOR MOUNT CABINET
Available in fou - heights (42", 59", 77", 85") DCF Cabinets provide independent ventilation for each dimmer, thus preventing cross-temperature effect
NOTE: SUPPRESSION OF RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE IN DIMMERS
SCR dimmers utilize rapid switching of electrical current for effective dimming. This rapid switching creates radio frequency interference ( RFI) that causes " noise" problems in audio systems. All welldesigned dimmers contain choke coils to filter most of the RFI. There is confusion, however, about the best method to describe such filtering. A common approach is to quote total rise time, which does not consider spikes. A more accurate approach is that proposed by Motorola Semiconductor Products in their article AN-295 on RFI suppression, wherein the rate of current rise is recommended to be less than 0.35 amps (350 milliamps) per microsecond. All Electro Controls' dimmers meet or exceed these recommendations.
Custom Built--Price on Application
CONTROL CONSOLES Manual
PLEXUS 200 PT PRESET CONSOLE TO INCLUDE:
(For use with Custom Studio Dimmer Banks when used with (48) Dimmers or Less and an Electronic Patch is Not Desired.)
Compact and lightweight, PT Panels are ideal where space and weight are at a premium but where control capability cannot be compromised. Available
in single scene ( PT 100) or two-scene ( PT 200) preset, the Master Modules feature Grand and Inde-
pendent Masters, A and B Scene Masters and on two-scene versions, manuel or timed Split Fader. With sixteen 60mm ( 23/8") controllers on each Preset Module, the single scene version contains sixteen channels per module and the two-scene version contains eight channels per module. Non-dim mod-
ules are available. Control Power Supply is located in a dimmer cabinet. Control Panel can be ordered for hard wiring or with 52-conductor receptacle(s)
6200- 16- EC 1161 Channel, 2Scene Preset 6200-24- EC (241 Channel, 2Scene Preset 6200-32- EC ( 32) Chan nél, 2Scene Preset 6200-40- EC ( 40) Channel, 2Scene Preset 6200 -48- EC ( 48) Channel, 2Scene Preset
6201-99- EC Timed Split Fader 6156-01- EC Wall Plug- In Box
2580 .00 3052.00 3525.00 3997.00 4468.00
304.00 117.00
CONTROL CONSOLES Manual/Memory/Patch
CONTROL SYSTEMS
STUDIO PACKAGES
Sample only
· · ·
99
·
99
99 9
o
1.1 OC. 3
x40' TELEVISION STUDIO LAYOUT 14' GRID HEIGHT
00-0133-40
BILL OF MATERIALS
5515110 IIACK LIMII1 313 100) Watt 6' S'ente FOCUS Fresnel II 2000 Wan In' Focosang Fresnel
MU Ill FILL MOTS 10 1000/2000 Wan Il. Soeur Focus
wan Scoop
6 1500
Focusong Bread
2 1003/ 4000 Watt Featherlde Super
Sonlogrn
16 Floor Adualable Telescoping
Caner
11611111116110 203 leel 'l'ID steel let pl. Sltn
Wam sternes nord clamps. load
channel grid locks. ',racket assemblons and otner hardware
as ' fourre() for semple,. 9110 mslallatlen
00111111116011000FRT
96 20 am 00 >fumes
SCR s
loroFdal RFI films and Svelte',
Analysis Indicators
CYCLORAMA 051 A110
CACRIROU111 MITA Il 1000 Wan Ino tight Tero Circuit Cyc Let 6 1000 Wan Four 1.001 FOUI Circuit CyC Lient
1.1111T11111 CORTISOL I 24 Channel Taro Scene Prose, PM Be. solh 96 · II Ion voltage Patch
2 Wall Mount Control Receptacles
OFICIAL LIMITA
2 ICOO Watt 6" x9" Ellipsordal
1 Ryle en 1000
3 Megném Out, nrgn Rist, Stand
2 6
(WeMeavnysiOountyCaLbloen 1R5os5e1r
Stand
3 klaleFemant N'ail Adapter
3 Power Box
3 Inline 10:0 Watt Chromer
Caner, lape Dinusen S'atonal
Gel Primanes
ELECIW.Al MISTMIUT1011 II Connecter Stries 11391 arak aa -
20 Amp and II - Foor 1.911 Cyc
Pearl FleceMaCleS Wall Boxes · Ith 11.
Amo
goart RecellteClee
CYCLORAIll tal CURTAIIII 1 50 White Lono.weave 131ourler,
2 20 ChrOma Key Blue
Background 17 sunam Ido tem Certain Track ienn Isoeners
Dm
Cenearna cunem onew 1·1·4 cen··· ew IC,tte News ans
baffle sud.. ··· der. .4.0
1······
6.0·11
tepdeo Ir.
epv.a.
leffErt 10(111111(111 Sludo Lagder son, Basket and
tocking lool Box 2 Xooloande Ideler
··
sr,
rw
ry,fm,s, eseetafflotes rd 11..81 Spare
ér·
···
of lanfeelly el ··11.1001 ty00/111. 1.111 Y. WIN.. uM111.· ·111
11111111111 11
11Ci "1i .
·-iiiir.······4;i4
CELEBRITY
(For use with Custom Studio Dimmer Banks and the Playmate Il Portable Dimmer Pack)
Moduler celebrity comes in over 100 different models; in single or two-tiered designs. (There's one perfect for you.) Either 24 or 48 celebrity Scene
CELEBRITY PLUS
celebrity plus provides greatly enhanced memory capacity in aso easy to use format I: can also be used with the celebrity, or as astand-alone memory control celebrity plus offers access to 200 additional memory cues and 125 channels through autosequencing, by means of a split wheeled A/B
Masters can be configueed with 12, 24, 36 or 48 control channels, and with patch, celebrity controls up to 512 dimmers. Controller comes with vinyl
cover and 25 ft. control cable.
7700- 10-EC
Basic Celebrity Control
Console, 24 Scene 12 Channel
with operator's light
2.300.00
crossfader and asingle wheeled C/D crossfader. it may be installed initially, or added to your celebrity
console celebrity plus is CRT compatible. displaying data updates in bott, on-stage" and preview'
modes
6780-25-EC
Basic Celebrity Plus Control
Console, 125 Channels and
200 Cues
4,000.00
Studio lighting packages are designed to supply an excellent system for a particular size studio. The "Complete Package" has all the equipment lighting and control equipment needed to light sets and the production area of the studio. The equipment is not over specified.
The "Start Package" is assembled with the idea of getting enough equipment from the "Complete Pack-
age" ( master list)jo begin production and then, add from the " Compibte Package" as your production needs increase.
81015-WB 81115-WB 81520-WB 81620-WB 82030-WB 82130-WB 83040-WB 83140- WE 84050-WB 84150-WB 85060-WB 85160-WB
86070-WB 86170-WB 87500-WB 87600-WB
10'0" x15'0" START 10'0" x15'0" COMPLETE
15'0" x20'0" START 15'0" x20'0" COMPLETE 20.0"x 30'0" START 20'0" x30.0" COMPLETE 300" x40'0" START 30'0" x40'0" COMPLETE 40'0" x50'0" START 40'0" x50'0" COMPLETE 50'0" x60'0" START 50'0" x60.0" COMPLETE
60'0" x70'0" START 600" x700" COMPLETE 700" s100'0" START
700" s100'0" COMPLETE
P.O. A. P.O. A . P.O.A. P. O. A. P. O. A . P.O. A . P. 0.A . P.O.A. P.O. A . P.O. A. P. O. A P.O.A.
P.O.A. P.O.A. P.O. A . P.O. A .
Reprinted with permission from materials by 0 1984, WALTER S. BREWER CO., INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-21
BW LIGHTING SYSTEMS
P.O. Box 470162 Tulsa, OK 74147-0162 (918) 664-111
Special Effect Lights
Cyclorama Lights Catalog Number:
20-201 One Light, One Circuit $ 195.00
20-202 Two Light, One or Two Circuit
(specify)
390.00
20-203 Three Light, Three Circuit 585.00
20-204 Four Light, Four Circuit
780.00
Accessories:
20-211 One Light Yoke and C- Clamp $39.00
20-212 Two Light Yoke and C- Clamp 44.00
20-213 Three Light Hanging Assembly44.00
20-219 Floor Mount Assembly
20.00
20-220 Gel Frame
24.00
20-705 Safety Cable
8.00
Lamps:
80-EHD 500W, 3200°K $45.00
Features:
· Compact, lightweight, with double plano -convex lenses.
· Accurately controlled accent lighting. · Axially mounted socket ( TP/4). · Alzak reflector. · Easy relamping. · New weight 71/2 lbs.
Lamps:
80-F DN 500W, 3200°K 80-FHM 1000W, 3200°K
$27.00 30.50
STUDIO LIGHTING
Cyclorama Lights
Features:
· Cyc Strip housings are compact and extremely durable in design and construction
· Cyc Strips can be mounted overhead or on the floor depending upon requirements and applications.
· Single and multi- circuit cyc strips allows change in color of illumination by switching or dimming from one circuit to the other with colored filters.
· Flo-Thru ventilation cooling design · Soft, even intense illumination · Net weight One Light 3 lbs.
Four Light 1Ilbs.
NOTE: Add /' Ei to above Catalog number for FHM lamp series.
Ellipsoidal - 31 /2 Inch
Catalog Number:
20-33006 3-1/2" x6"
$ 175.00
20-33008 3-1/2" x8"
175.00
20-33010 3-1/2" x10"
175.00
All with C- Clamp 8.36" Power Lead
Accessories:
20-331 Gel Frame 20-332 Pattern Holder 20-333 Pattern Set 20-705 Safety Cable
$ 3.00 8.00
16.00 8.00
Ellipsoidal - 6 Inch Catalog Number:
20-335 6" x9"
$ 237.00
20-336 6" x12"
237.00
20-337 6" x16"
237.00
All with C- Clamp Et 36" Power Lead
Accessories:
20-327 Gel Frame 20-339 Pattern Holder 20-340 Pattern Set 20-705 Safety Cable
Lamps:
80 EHG 750W, 3000°K 80 EHF 750W, 3200°K 80 EH D 500W, 3000°K
$ 5.00 8.00
16.00 8.00
$49.50 49.50 45.00
Features:
· Features interchangeable and replaceable die cast, fully guaranteed parts
· Compact, lightweight with double plano convex lenses
· Accurately controlled accent lighting
· All aluminum die cast unit · Axially mounted socket ( TP,/4) · Alzak reflector ( Double flatted) · Net weight 18 lbs.
Ellipsoldal - 31 /2 Inch Ellipsoidal - 6 Inch
VL-22
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BW LIGHTING SYSTEMS
P.O. Box 470162 Tulsa, OK 74147-0162 (918) 664-1111
Base and Fill Lights
STUDIO LIGHTING
Baby Broads -- 650/1000
Mini Softlight 500 / 2000
Baby Broads
Catalog Number:
·10-101 650 Watts
$ 180.00
·10-110 1000 Watts
190.00
Both with 25 power lead. in -line
switch and parallel blade
u-ground connectors
Accessories:
10-111 Extended Holder 20-220 Gel Frame 20-705 Safety Cable
$42.00 24.00 8.00
Lamps:
80-FHM 1000W, 3200°K 80-FDN 500W. 3200°K 80-FBX 650W. 3200°K
$30.50 27.00 30.00
Features:
· Flat, even pattern of light over a wide area
· Ultra lightweight for portability · Unique ventilation cooling design · New one piece reflector for smooth.
even light pattern · Compact . . . ideal for field use · Heat resistant adjustment knobs · Net weight 4 lbs. "TV Model available with yoke and
C-Clamp: Specify 10-101(A) or 10-110(A)
Mini Softlight 500/ 2000 Watts
Catalog Number:
20-140 TV Model with: $350.00 36" Power Lead
Softlight 2000/4000 Watts
Catalog Number:
20-130 10-130
TV Model with 36" power
lead, C- Clamp
$595.00
Motion Picture Model with 10
ft. power lead
595.00
Accessories:
10-131
10-132 10-517 20-705
Gel/Diffusion Frame
Scrim Stand Mount Safety Cable
$69.00 65.00 10.00 8.00
Lamps:
80-FFW 2000W. 3200 °K 80-FDB 1500W. 3200 °K 80-FFT 1000W, 3200°K
$81.00 52.00 48.00
Features:
· Designed for rugged location or studio use, utilizing 5050 H32 high strength aluminum.
· Integral gel frame holder. · Individually switchable lamp
holders. · 24" x 24" aperture. · One ( 1) 50A power cable on
request. · Two ( 2) 20A power cables standard. · Switch Guard protects damage to
switches during shipping and rough handling. · Net weight of base unit with yoke: 19 lbs.
Accessories:
20-141 20-142 10-517 20-705
Gel Frame Scrim Stand Mount Safety Cable
$38.00 36.00 10.00 8.00
Lamps:
80-FHM 1000W, 3200°K 80-FDN 500W, 3200°K
S30.50 27.00
Softlight 2000/4000
Features:
· Designed for rugged location or studio use, utilizing 5050 H32 high strength aluminum.
· Integral gel frame holder. · Individually switchable lampholders. · 18" x 18" aperture. · Switch Guard protects damage to
switches during shipping and rough handling. · Net weight of base unit with yoke: 15 lbs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-23
BW LIGHTING SYSTEMS
P.O. Box 470162 Tulsa, OK 74147-0162 (918) 664-1111
Base and Fill Lights
Focusing Broad
Catalog Number:
·20-108 1500 Watt ·20-110 1000 Watt
$290.00 290.00
Accessories:
20-111 20-112 20-705
Four Leaf Barndoor Gel Frame Safety Cable
$85.00 21.00 8.00
Lamps:
80-FDB 1500W. 3200°K ( For Model
20-108)
$52.00
80-FFT 1000W, 3200°K ( For Model
20-108)
48.00
80-FHM 1000W, 3200°K ( For Model
20-110)
30.50
Features:
· Smooth, uniform field . . no hot spots
· Designed for short throw studio applications
· Continuous variable focus for beam intensity control
· Heavy duty sockets and unique ventilation for improved cooling and lamp life
· On/Off switch built into housing on request
· Switch guard assures protection of switches for stacking and storing units
· High performance reflectors for smoothness and intensity
· Compact and lightweight without sacrifice of durability
· Net weight 10 lbs.
·Motion picture models available with 10 ft. power lead.
14" Focusing Scoop -- 1000 Watts
Catalog Number:
20-120 TV Model with: Yoke and C- Clamp
$195.00
Accessories:
20-121 Gel Frame 20-705 Safety Cable
$15.00 8.00
Lamps:
80-EGK 1000W, 3200°K 80-EGF 750W, 3200°K
$60.50 56.00
Features:
· New rapid focus and cool operating control handle.
· New high efficiency reflector permits long throw applications.
· Continuous variable focus from medium beam to wide flood.
· Net weight 9 lbs.
16" Non- Focusing Scoop -- 1000 Watts
Catalog Number:
20-125 TV Model
$165.00
Accessories:
20-126 Gel Frame 20-705 Safety Cable
$35.00 8.00
Lamps:
80-FHM 1000W. 3200°K 80-FDN 500W, 3200°K
$30.50 27.00
STUDIO LIGHTING
Focusing Broad
MP'
Focusing Scoop -- 1000
Features:
· 16" diameter aperture · 75° beam spread · High efficiency reflector · Net weight 9 lbs.
Non- Focusing Scoop -- 1000
VL-24
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BW LIGHTING SYSTEMS
P.O. Box 470162 Tulsa, OK 74147-0162 (918) 664-1111
STUDIO LIGHTING
A. Key and Back Lights
Fresnel 3- Inch -- 200 Watts
Catalog Number:
20-314/A Table base model with: $50.00 4' cable and parallel blade u- ground connector
Accessories:
20-316/A 20-317/A 20-318/A 20-319/A 20-320/A 20-701/A
Four- Leaf Barndoor Gel Frame Pin Spot Adapter Gel Frame for Pin Spot Snoot C- Clamp
$19.00 2.00
43.00 3.00 7.00 6.00
Lamps:
80-FEV 200 W Lamp, 3200°K
$28.00
Features:
· Convection cooled spotlight which focuses accurately from spot to flood.
· Fits on stand or hanger and can be hidden for light effects.
· 3" Fresnel lens for clear, ring- free light.
· For both B & W and Color photography.
· Durable and well ventilated · Easy top opening access for quick
lamp change. · Net weight 31 / 4 lbs.
Fresnel 6 Inch -- 1000 Watts
Catalog Number:
20-020, B TV Model with C- Clamp 36" Power Lead
$335.00
Accessories:
10-041 10-042 10-047 10-048 20-705
Four Leaf Barndoor Gel Diffusion Frame Single Scrim Double Scrim Safety Cable
$54.00 25.00 12.00 14.00 8.00
Lamps:
80-EGT 1000W, 3200°K 80-EGR 750W, 3200 ° K
$66.00 60.50
Features:
· Delivers intense, filament- free light
-- sharp and hard for heavy contrast, soft and smooth for flood effect. · Versatile, lightweight, all-purpose
spot modeling, background, and fill light for motion picture, photographic, and television studios. · 6" Fresnel lens for clear, ring- free light. · Instant spot to flood with quick acting lever. · Durable and well ventilated with easy rear door access for quick lamp change. · Front and rear " fingertip - focus control. · Net weight 12 1 /2 lbs.
Fresnel 10 Inch -- 2000 Watts Catalog Number:
20-050
B TV Model with: C- Clamp 36" Power Lead
$520.00
Accessories:
10-051 10-052 10-057 10-058 20-705
Four Leaf Barndoor Gel/Diffusion Frame Single Scrim Double Scrim Safety Cable
$99.00 30.00 12.00 15.00 8.00
Lamps:
80-CYX 2000 W. 3200°K 80-CXZ 1500W, 3200° K 80-CYV 1000W, 3200°K
$105.00 97.00 76.00
Features:
· Highly efficient 10" fresnel lens. · Heavy-duty mogul bipost socket
utilizing the popular and long-lived CYX series lamp. · Easily removable reflector retainer for ease of cleaning the reflector. · Net weight 28 lbs.
Fresnel 3 Inch -- 200 Fresnel 6 inch -- 1000
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Fresnel 10 inch -- 2000
VL-25
BW LIGHTING SYSTEMS
P.O. Box 470162 Tulsa, OK 74147-0162 (918) 664-1111
Much more Studio Lighting available...
ask for complete BW Lighting Catalog
STUDIO LIGHTING SYSTEMS BW Lighting offers awide selection of complete Television Studio Lighting Packages. Each system is designed to offer the greatest flexibility possible, utilizing the world's finest lighting fixtures made in conjunction with BW Lighting control system. Each system is complete, including lamps, color frames, accessories and distribution equipment. In addition we also offer complete custom design and engineering for larger specialized systems, including acomplete range of the most advanced memory systems. For any of these special services please consult us directly.
Key and Back Lights
Fresnel 6 Inch - 750 Watts
Catalog Number:
20-324A
TV Model with:
$110.00
C- Clamp
36" Power Lead
Medium Prefocus Socket
Accessories:
20-326 20-327 10-047 10-048 20-705
Four Leaf Barndoor Gel/Diffusion Frame Single Scrim Double Scrim Safety Cable
$39.00 5.00
12.00 14.00
8.00
Lamps:
For Model 20-324A 80-BTP 750W, 3200°K 80-BTM 500W, 3200°K
$39.00 39.00
Fresnel 6 inch - 750
Features:
· Adjustable spot to flood focus · Heat resisting 6" fresnel lens · Alzak reflector · Hinged front for easy relamping · 36" leads · Lightweight - 8 lbs. · Shipping weight 12 lbs.
Fresnel 8 Inch 1000/2000 Watts
Catalog Number:
20-354A TV Model with C- Clamp 36" Power Lead Mogul Prefocus Socket
$195.00
Accessories:
20-356 Four Leaf Barncloor 20-357 Gel/Diffusion Frame 10-057 Single Scrim 10-058 Double Scrim 20-705 Safety Cable
$55.00 6.00
12.00 15.00
8.00
Fresnel 8 inch 1000/2000
Lamps:
For Model 20-354A 80-BVV 1000W, 3200°K 80-CWZ 1500W, 3200°K 80-BVW 2000W, 3200°K
$60.00 72.00 91.00
Features:
· Adjustable spot to flood focus · Heat resisting 8" fresnel lens · Alzak reflector · Hinged front for easy relamping · 36" leads · Lightweight - 12 lbs. · Shipping weight - 22 lbs.
STUDIO LIGHTING
Cine Par
Cine Par
Catalog Number:
10-393 10-310 10-320 10-340
Par 64 Holder Cine Par Four Cine Par Six Cine Par Nine
$ 90.00 593.00 706.00 898.00
Accessories:
10-395 Par 64 Gel Frame $ 6.00
10-396 Par 64 Stainless Steel Scrim 18.00
10-31 1 Cine Par Four Extended Holder 46.00
10-312 Cine Par Four Gel Frame
29.00
10- 313 Cine Par Four Stainless Steel 72.00
Scrim
10-321 Cine Par Six Extended Holder 57.00
10-322 Cine Par Six Gel Frame
34.00
10-323 Cine Par Six Stainless Steel 107.00
Scrim
10-341 Cine Par Nine Extended Holder85.00
10-342 Cine Par Nine Gel Frame
40.00
10-343 Cine Par Nine Stainless Steel 159.00
Scrim
20-705 Safety Cable
8.00
Lamps:
80-FFN 1000W, 3200°K Narrow Spot $ 67.00
80-FFP 1000W. 3200°K. Spot
67.00
80-FFR 1000W. 3200°K. Medium Flood 67.00
80-FFS 1000W. 3200°K. Wide Flood 67.00
Features:
· Lightweight · Operates at 120V AC, DC · Provides high intensity fill for
daylight shooting · Each lamp adjustable to provide
control of beam spread · Easy access for lamp replacement · Separate switch for each lamp
permits lamps to be preset.
· Net weight Par 64 7 lbs. Cine Par Four 20 lbs Cine Par Six 28 1 /2 lbs. Cine Par Nine 40' ,4 lbs.
VL-26
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BW LIGHTING SYSTEMS
P.O. Box 470162 Tulsa, OK 74147-0162 (918) 664-1111
LIGHTING CONTROLS
Dimmer Racks
Catalog Number: 60-300
Description
BW Lighting manufactures a complete line of custom built dimmer racks. Each dimmer rack is tailored to fit the particular dimmer style. All dimmer racks include the specified number of spaces for dimmers and non- dims. All input and output power terminals are housed behind the terminal access door.
Construction
The rack consists of welded tubular steel frame in 16 Ga. cold rolled steel closure panels. Entire rack is primed, then painted with two coats of black catalyzed polyurethane paint. Detailed specifications available upon application.
Dimmer Racks
Patch Panel
Description
BW Lighting manufactures a complete line of custom built patch panels. Each patch panel is tailored to fit the end user's specific requirements. All panels are of the cold- patch family and represent complete safety from shock hazard for the operator. Styles available range from wall mounthanging cord thru free standing retractable ( in both under and overhung).
All patch panels include a specified number of receptacles grouped according to individual dimmers and non- dims. There is one drop cord and load circuit breaker for each pigtail and/or receptable in the studio. An ammeter is also included for proper loading of dimmers.
Construction
Panel consists of welded, tubular steel frame and 16 gauge cold rolled steel closure panels. Receptacle panels are made from 16 gauge cold rolled steel. Entire panel is primed, then painted with two coats black catalyzed polyurethane paint.
Detailed specifications available upon application.
Catalog Number:
60-401
60-402 60-403
Hanging Cord
Overhead Retractable Cord Desk Retractable Cord
Overhead Retractable Cord
Patch Panel Desk
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-27
BW LIGHTING SYSTEMS
P.O. Box 470162 Tulsa, OK 74147-0162 (918) 664-1111
CYCLORAMA SYSTEMS
Cyclorama Curtain Track
Catalog Number:
·70-100 Double track system 70-110 Single track system
·70-120 Single track system w/ciouble track brackets
$13.95 ft. 7.25ft. 9.90ft,
Accessories:
70-101 70-102 70-103 70-108 70-109 70-111 70-122
70-123
70-133
70-135 70-137 70-138 70-139 70- I40 70- I41 70-142
Track 10 ft. Track 15 ft. Track 20 ft. Splicing clamp Bracket clamp
Curtain stop Corner track 90° for 10 ft. corner Corner track 90° for 5 ft. corner Bumpered ball- bearing Carrier Assembly Single track wall bracket 4 in. Double track wall bracket 12 in. Double track wall bracket 18 in.
Double track wall bracket 24 in.
Double track wall bracket 30 in. Double track wall bracket 36 in. Double track wall bracket 42 in.
$21.00 31.50 42.00 7.75 3.50 2.50
45.50
33.50
6.25 10.75 14.50 15.50 30.50 39.75 45.50 48.00
Features:
· Ease of installation · Rigid alignment of splices · Effortless, walk- along carriers may
be pushed or pulled · Pre- formed corner radii · All components aluminum or plated
or painted steel · One free set custom track layouts
(Additional sets available for fee)
Double Track System 70-100
The double track system is recommended for the seamless Linoweave, and background curtains. The track, corner track sections, track brackets, splicing clamps and all other necessary accessories required to install the double track system are included.
Track Features
Extruded aluminum I-beam. Minimum 14 gauge aluminum with interior horizontal web for additional stiffness and to prevent carriers riding up on the track. Bottom flange has 10° topside slope -- inside to outside automatically centering carriers on track.
Carrier Features
1" wheeled, nylon ball- bearing carrier with bumper, 20° included angle between wheels for self centering on track. ( One carrier per foot of curtain width, plus one).
Splicing Clamp Features
Extruded aluminum clamp slides over track and may be coincident with hanger bracket to facilitate system layout and installation. Clamp rigidly aligns both spliced track ends resulting in smooth joint. Splicing clamp may also be used as bracket clamp to minimize components.
Important Note
It is recommended that exact inside studio dimensions be sent --carefully noting all obstacles. By so doing. we can often eliminate problems -- and save money.
Bracket Clamp Features
Extruded aluminum clamp slides over track firmly attaching track to hanging brackets. Single screw attaches clamp to track -- and clamp to bracket, providing quick, easy, one- handed, low maintenance installation.
Wall Bracket Features
Brackets made of 1/4" X 2" heavy duty steel slotted 8" apart, center to center in horizontal leg for mounting ceiling clamps. Three 7 /16" holes on vertical leg for attaching to wall.
·CWANA -- Complete with all necessary accessories for normal wall installation.
-I-Normal Installation: Two ( 2) inexperienced men can install double track system in a 30 X 40' studio in two ( 2) days.
VL-28
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BW LIGHTING SYSTEMS
DISTRIBUTION AND GRID HARDWARE
P.O. Box 470162 Tulsa, OK 74147-0162 (918) 664-1111
Connector Strips
Specifications
This unit shall consist of a 4" X 4" (102 mm X 102 mm) code gauge steel wire- way with removable cover sections for access, labelled with circuit numbers.
Each strip shall have a terminal compartment which shall be factory installed on the right or left end as required which shall contain terminals for feed connection.
· Each circuit identified by I.D.
number on outside of strip and on terminal strip. · Each strip a solid welded unit.
· Connector Strip Assemblies are fully assembled units ready to hang with
connector strip bracket assembly attached. Grid pipe attached if purchased with the connector strip. · Connector strip system engineered to integrate with the grid system.
· Weight -- 6 lbs. per foot ( approx.) · Shipping Weight -- 9 lbs. per foot
(approx.)
The strip shall be provided with heavy steel mounting straps on approximately 5' ( 1.5m) centers with U- bolts and pipe saddles to grip up to 2" ( 51 mm) pipe.
Wall and Grid Box
Specifications
Type SEO. 18" ( 457 mm) cable pigtails shall be secured by strain reliefs and shall be furnished with three pole grounded type female receptacles. Flush receptacles are available in lieu of pigtails.
This unit shall consist of a 4" X 4" (102 mm X 102 mm) code gauge steel wire- way with removable cover section for access, labelled with circuit numbers.
The box shall be supplied with wall
Internal wiring shall be rated at I25°C. Overall length of unit shall be as shown on the drawings, and each pigtail shall be spaced and wired in accordance with the circuit schedule.
Exterior finish shall be catalyzed polyurethane paint and the entire unit shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories.
Catalog Number:
50-000
Connector Strip ( specify length ·
number and ampacity of
pigtails/receptacles. type of
connector and terminal
location.
P.O.A.
Accessories:
50-092 50-093 50-094
Connector Strip Bracket Assembly. double pipe. Connector strip Bracket assembly. horizontal mount Other bracket assemblies
fasteners for wall boxes and pipe
saddles for grid boxes.
Grounded female flush receptacles are standard on all wall and grid boxes. Type SEO. 18" ( 457 mmm) cable pigtails, secured by strain reliefs, and furnished with grounded female connectors are available in lieu of receptacles.
Exterior finish shall be catalyzed polyurethane paint and the entire unit shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories.
Catalog Number:
50-WBX Suface Mount Wall Box ( specify
number and ampacity of
receptacles/pigtails, and
type of connector.
P.O.A.
50-GBX Pipe Mount Grid Box ( specify
number and ampacity of
receptacles/pigtails, and
type of connector.
P.O.A.
Features
Features:
· 4" X 4" cross section made of code gauge steel with screw on cover. Separate cover over terminals.
· Complies with National Electric Code.
· UL listed · 18" pigtails attached by strain relief
type cable clamps. · Separate, color coded, HOT.
NEUTRAL. GROUND wire to terminal strip for each circuit. · Primer and two paint coats for superior durability and corrosion resistance.
Note: P.O.A. ( Price on Application)
· 4" X 4" cross section made of code gauge steel with screw on cover.
· Complies with National Electric Code.
· UL listed. · Primer and two paint coats for
superior durability and corrosion resistance. · Each circuit identified by I.D. number on outside of box. · Each box a solid welded unit. · Weight -- Wall Box with 2 20A receptacles -- 2 lbs. Wall Box with 2 20A pigtails-- 3lbs
Grid Box with 2 20A receptacles 3 lbs. Grid Box with 2 20A pigtails -- 4 Ibs
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Connector Strips Wall Box Grid Box
VL-29
BW LIGHTING SYSTEMS
P.O. Box 470162 Tulsa, OK 74147-0162 (918) 664-1111
DISTRIBUTION AND GRID HARDWARE
Grid Hardware I Grid Hardware gI Grid Lock
C. Grid Hardware
Specifications
Grid Hardware shall consist of upper suspension mechanism(s), proper length threaded rod, and lower suspension mechanism(s).
All components of a grid hardware system shall be painted or plated for corrosion protection.
Detailed assembly drawings, installation instructions, and layout prints shall be included with grid hardware when system is engineered by BW Lighting. If grid hardware is purchased as components, only assembly drawings shall be included.
Catalog Number:
50-100 50-105B 50-105C 50-1051 50-105L 50-105P 50-105T 50-105W
Grid Hardware as engineered
by BW Lighting.
P.O.A.
Bracket Suspension
Assembly.
Concrete Suspension
Assembly.
I- Beam Suspension
Assembly.
Load Channel Suspension
Assembly.
Pipe Suspension Assembly.
Truss ( Bar Joist) Suspension
Assembly.
Wood Beam Suspension
Assembly.
Accessories:
50- ALL 3/8 50- ALL 5/16 50- I40
3/8" Threaded Rod. 5/16" Threaded Rod. Load Channel
Features:
Includes sufficient load channel, allthread, nuts, bolts, beam clamps. etc. to complete installation of connector strips or pipe grid to I- beams or truss deck based on no greater than 5' centers. Detailed assembly instructions sent with equipment.
D. Grid Pipe
Specifications
All pipe shall be pre-cut to length, have ends cieburred, and be painted with a catalyzed wash primer. Pipe sections which are co- incident with connector strips shall be factory mounted to strips when purchased and delivered at the same time. Pipe sections shall be spliced together with a sleeve- over type splice. Threaded couplings available at extra cost.
Catalog Number:
50-1 10 I'/2 " I.D. Steel Pipe 50-111 1 " I.D. Steel Pipe
$ 3.30 3.05
Accessories:
50-1 IOSP 50-1 I1SP 50-130
Splice for 1 " I.D. Pipe Splice for I1 /4 " I.D. Pipe Grid Lock
$ 8.75 8.50
12.75
Features:
· BW Lighting provides engineering services for grid and distribution systems.
· Pipe grid available in any configuration.
· Grid Lock provides positive, secure interconnection of cross gricipipes. Lock has only two component parts and generates a 4,000 lb. grip with a safety factor of 2:1 ( 8.000 lb. actual grip.)
Note: P.O.A. ( Price on Application)
VL-30
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BW LIGHTING SYSTEMS
P.O. Box 470162 Tulsa, OK 741 47-01 62 (918) 664-1 111
Studio Ladder Catalog Numbers:
90-208 Ladder for 8ft. grid 90-209 Ladder for 9ft. grid 90-210 Ladder for 10 ft. grid 90-211 Ladder for 11 ft. grid 90-212 Ladder for 12 ft. grid 90-213 Ladder for 13 ft. grid 90-214 Ladder for 14 ft. grid 90-215 Ladder for 15 ft. grid 90-216 Ladder for 16 ft. grid 90-217 Ladder for 17 ft. grid 90-218 Ladder for 18 ft. grid 90-219 Ladder for 19 ft. grid 90-220 Ladder for 20 ft. grid 90-221 Ladder for 21 ft. grid
$495.00 564.00
683.00 719.00 753.00
785.00 845.00 920.00
995.00 1110.00 1250.00 1390.00 1530.00 1670.00
Pole Hangers
Grid Adjustable Pole Hanger Catalog Number:
20-714 4ft. pole 20-715 6ft. pole 20-716 10 ft. pole
Accessories:
20-707 Stirrup 20-717 Stirrup Light Pipe 40-074 4ft. Extension Cable 40-076 6ft. Extension Cable 40-0710 10 ft. Extension Cable
$55.00 65.00 78.00
$34.00 10.00 39.00 41.00 45.00
Features:
· Meets or exceeds new government safety codes
· Made of I" square steel tubing, all welded construction.
· Steps have non- slip surfaced steel for strength and safety.
· Platform at top with safety rail, toe plate and connecting hand rails.
· Four large casters with foot locks for non- movement working position.
· Base is covered with 1/4 " plywood. finished in walnut stain, bolted to steel frame to provide usable shelf.
· Primer and two paint coats for superior durability and corrosion resistance
Gaffer's Tool and Accessory Box ·Use for expensive or delicate
accessories, i.e.. spare lamps. footcanclle meters. etc. Access is from the top by two lids designed so a lot of space would not be needed for opening. Desk type lock also provided. Tray covers half the box with two subdivisions which may be slid from side to side, or lifted out completely. Box painted to match studio ladder.
90-230 $ 295.00
Spectra Candela Footcandle Meter
The footcandle meter is a convenient lightweight instrument for making studio measurements of illumination. It features correction for the color quality of the light and cosinecorrection for incident angle_of light The meter has three ( 3) ranges of
sensitivity, 0 to 300 footcandles, to 3,000 footcanciles and 0 to 30,000 footcandles. A protective carrying case is also included.
30-005
Features:
· Adjustable up or down with easy 1- handle
· Dependable - will hold up to 75 lbs. · Net weight: 4 ft. Hanger II lbs.
6 ft. Hanger 12 lbs. 10 ft. Hanger 14 lbs. NOTE: Allow as much room above grid as needed for hanger to be positioned up out of the way.
Stands
Catalog Number:
30-542 Tubular Leg Stand, ( 40" folded,
max. 122" extended)
$120.00
30-543 Lightweight Stand, ( 41" folded,
max. 96" extended)
110.00
30-544 Heavy Duty Stand, ( 51" folded,
max. 132" extended)
206.00
30-545 High Riser Heavy Duty Stand
with Casters, ( 66" folded, max.
170" extended)
530.00
Accessories:
30-546 Caster Set for Tubular Leg Stand # 10-542
30-547 Caster Set for Heavy Duty Stand # 10-544
30-517 Stand Mount
$ 45.00
55.00 10.00
Features:
· Lic h stand designed for minimum weight, high strength and rigidity.
· Constructed to properly mate with lighting equipment.
· Fd%y to sut up. knock down.
Color Media and Diffusion Material
Catalog Number:
30-010 20" x24" sheets 30-020 24" x50' roll 30-050 20" x24" sheet diffusion 30-060 24" x50" roll diffusion
$ 4.25 110.00 4.25 110.00
GAFFER AND MISC. EQUIPMENT
Studio Ladder
Gaffer's Tool and Accessory Box
it Stands
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-31
·
630 Ninth Avenue New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
POWER LIGHT KITS/ POWER LIGHT/12 VOLTS
Double-Duty Battery Power and Light Kits
Acomplete kit combining aminiature 12 Volt Battery Light with integral 8ft. battery cable. removable handle. ultra-violet filter safety glass, 12 Volt 100 Watt Lamp. Battery Belt or Pack equipped with two 5-pin XLR power outputs, one to power the Light, the other, for a
Camera/VTR: 14 hour Overnite Charger. spare 12 Volt Lamp. all contained in afoam- cushioned customized carrying case. Eight models provide aselection of 29 minutes to 1.7 hour run time
per charge.
KIT MODEL NO.
Carrying Case Dimensions for all Models are 71 /4"x13" x11P/4"
WT
KIT MODEL NO.
LKB-124S Battery Belt Type LKB-127S " " LKEr-128S LKB-1214S
29 min. Light 13 lbs.
50 " " 14 lbs.
58 " "
17 lbs.
1.7 hour Light 20 lbs.
LKP-124S Battery Pack Type 29 min. Light
LKP-127S " "
50 " "
LKP-128S
58 " "
LKP-1214S
1.7 hour Light
WT. 11 lbs 13 lbs 16 lbs 19 lbs
re4.0-10 BATTERY CHARGER
e:PL-I2 POWER LIGHT
ell2V LAMP
/42L80 BARNOOOR ¡ optional) 4:DFI2 DICHROIC FILTER ¡ optional) ·-eSR12 SPOT REFLECTOR ¡optional)
,B-1 24S BAT1ERY BELT
,, LKB 124S KIT
B-1 27SBATTERY BELT
t;PL-1 2POWER LIGHT ON SONY OXC-M3 CAMERA
tiP 1248 BATTERY PACK
PL- 12 Power Light Data
The 12 Volt Power Light is asoft, wide angle focusing light. Its miniature size makes it ideal as a camera-mounted light. Used as a "fill" light outdoors. a " key or fill" indoors. Features · Portrait quality · Variable focusing to change intensity and light coverage · Less heat and no ultraviolet rays with heat-absorbing Safety Glass Filter
Powerlight: Cat. No. PL- 12 with handle and L12V Lamp. Handle is removable. Switch: On Powerlight. Cable 8ft. integral cable with XLR5-12C connector. Mounting: Male V4-20 stud on swivel " bounce" fixture, 90° vertical, 360° horizontal. Beam Angle Continuously variable from 20° to 80° with heatinsulated knob. Weight/Size 6ozs., w/o Cable. 21 /2 "diameter, 31 /2 :: front to back. Lamp: 12 Volts 100 Watts, 3400°K 50 hour Tungsten-Halogen Lamp. Cat. No. L12V. Reflector/Safety Glass Assembly: Bayonet type, removable.
Optional Accessories For PL- 12 Powerlight Dichroic Filter: Converts 3400 Kindoor color temperature to 5500°K outdoor color temperature. Connector Adaptor: Converts 5-pin XLR connector on Powerlight's cable to cigarette lighter plug. Cat. No. 5-CLP Car Extension Cord: 6ft. cable. Permits powering Powerlight from car's cigarette lighter. Cat. No. 6401EX Barndoors: 2-Leaf Barndoors and Holder for lighting effects filters. Cat. No. 2LBD. Spot Reflector Provides spot light for long throw applications and effects. Cat. No. SR12. PL- I2 Camera Mounting Brackets.
VL-32
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LIGHTS
630 Ninth Avenue
New York, NY 10036 (212) 586-8782 Telex 645647
Sun- Gun #6201-A 12 14.4 & 30 Volts
Aunique battery-powered light used by TV News Camera Men and documentary video &film makers all over the world as a 'fill light outdoors, akey' or ' fill' light indoors. For 70, 100, 150, 250 and 350 watt quartz lamps.
Features:
· Soft, wide angle focusing light. Ideal camera-mounted for head-on situations. At 10
ft. flood position throws a14 ft. wide beam flat from edge to edge, free of hot spots.
filament patterns, or halos. Camera man achieves better picture quality balancing
'fill' light to ambient light, and eliminating facial shadows. Aheat insulated knob
provides for focusing.
· Built-in Swing-Away Dichroic Filter provides 55000Kcolor temperature with the turn
of aknob. Correct color temperature whether indoors or outdoors is always assured
without the need for adjusting the camera's filter.
· Accepts 12V 100W, 14.4V 70W, 30V 150W, 250W & 350W Lamps.
· Single finger control of focus and on-off switch.
Cine 60 Sun- Gun Kits
Switchable Sun- Gun Kits
Combines 30V 250W and 14.4V 70W Sun- Gun lighting in one kit.
The Sun-Gun Kit
consists of: The Cine 60 Sun-Gun Head ( with integral Swing-Away Filter Holder, removable handle, integral battery
cable). Cat. No. 6201A; Tungsten- Halogen
Lamp; Swing-Away
Dichroic Filter. Cat. No. 6202: Powerbelt or Powerpak, Std. or Fast
Charge: Overnight Charger: Carrying Case. Cat. No. 6207. Pictured:
12V .8AH FC Powerbelt
Sun-Gun Kit with 1- Hour Fast Charger, Cat. No. SGK-8327PS.
These Models are supplied with the Combination 30 Volt and 14 .4 Volt Switchable type Battery Belt or Battery Pack. Standard or Fast Charge. plus the 30 Volt 250 Watt Lamp and 14.4 Volt 70 Watt Lamp.
SGK-3014PS
Standard Battery Belt Sun- Gun Kit. 30 Volt 4AH / 14.4 Volt - 8AH 30 Volt - 250 Watt (27 min. life) 14.4 Volt - 70 Watt (90 min. life)
S1080.00
SGK-3014FC
Fast Charge Battery Belt Sun-Gun Kit. 30 Volt
-4AH / 14.4 Volt - 8AH. Same life as standard
kit. With 9400 Fast Charger
$ 141 6.00
SGK-3017PS
Standard Battery Belt Sun-Gun Kit. 30 Volt -
7AH / 14.4 Volt - 14AH
$ 1408.00
30 Volt - 250 Watt (42 min. life)
14.4 Volt - 70 Watt ( 147 min. life)
SGK-3017FC
Fast Charge Battery Belt Sun-Gun Kit. 30 Volt
-7 AH / 14.4 Volt - 14AH. Same life as
standard kit. With 9400 Fast Charger
$1746.00
Sun- Gun Mounting Brackets
SGK-6327PS SGK-8327PS
SGK-7027PS
Standard Powerbelt Sun-Gun Kit. 12 Volt - 8AH (50 min. life. Wt. 20 lbs.)
Fast Charge Powerbelt Sun-Gun Kit. 12 Volt 8AH ( 50 min. life. With 9400 Fast Charger. Wt. 23 Ibs.)
Standard Powerbelt Sun-Gun Kit. 12 Volt 14AH (80 min. life)
$ 972.00 $1304.00 $1276.00
For easy, fast mounting and removing Sun-Gun on camera. Two piece set.
Consists of precision machined aluminum sleeve with side locking knob for
Sun-Gun and stud for camera. Supplied compfete with hardware. Available
in two diameters 5/13" and 1 /2". Types for most cameras are listed below.
Two Piece Set - All Types
$45.00 Machined
'A"13"C''E'
II 1
F
Sleeve
SGK-7027FC SGK-6304PS SGK-8304PS
SGK-7004PS SGK-7004FC SGK-9704PS SGK-9704FC
Same As SGK-7027PS except with Fast Charge
Powerbelt and Fast Charger
$1596.00
Standard Powerbelt Sun-Gun Kit. 30 Volt - 4AH
(25 min. life. Wt. 21 lbs.)
$ 941.00
Fast Charge Powerbelt Sun- Gun Kit. 30 Volt -
4AH (25 min. life. With 9400 Fast Charger. Wt. 24
lbs.)
$1270.00
Standard Powerbelt Sun-Gun Kit. 30 Volt - 7AH
(40 min. life)
$1270.00
Same As SGK-7004PS except with Fast Charge
Powerbelt and Fast Charger
$1607.00
Standard Powerpak Sun-Gun Kit. 30V - 7AH (40
min. life. Wt. 23 lbs.)
$1299.00
2Hr. Fast Charge Powerpak Sun-Gun Kit. 30 Volt
- 7AH (40 min. life. With 9400 Fast Charger. Wt.
26 lbs.)
$1616.00
IML MI6
Cat No.Description ( Used On)
A- 1 /2 Has male accessory shoe. Mounts on all cameras equipped w/female accessory shoe.
B- 1 /2 Has 1 /4-20 screw. Mounts on all cameras equipped w/ 1/ 4-20 hole. Sony BVP types. etc.
B1 /26 Has 6mm screw. Mounts on lkegami ITC-731:). B- 1 /25 Has 5mm screw. Mounts on JVC KY- 1900. B1 /2 16 Has 3/8-16 screw. Mounts on all Panasonic and Ampex Recams. C- 1 /2 Mounts on RCA TK-76. D- /2 Clamp type. Attaches to camera's handle. E- 1 /2 Mounts on lkegami HL-79 cameras. F-'h Mounts on RCA TK-76B, C. and TK-86. Note: For 5/8"size Sleeve & Stud Set, instead of - 1/2.specify -5/8.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-33
Colortran, hc.
1015 Chestnut Street Burbank, CA 91506-9983 (818) 843-1200 Telex 67-7252WU, 188167TRT
Colortran offers acomprehensive line of both manual and computerized lighting control consoles to fit any application. Portable manual control units are available to control 6-999 dimmers in either fully manual units or in units with eight presettable recorded scenes. Three different computerized consoles are available for television lighting control: The portable Patchman for the small to medium sized studio; the System Two for larger installations; and the ultimate in lighting control systems, Dimension Five. State of the art dimming is available in the Dimension 192 Rack, available in rating capacities ranging from 1.2kw to 12.0kw all in plug-in configurations.
LIGHTING CONTROLS
System Two 168-300 Series A completely self-contained computerized control co:nsole.
Patchman 168-700 Series, the leader in portable lighting control systems, big system
features, in asmall package.
Dimension 192-192-000 Series Maximum density dimming...up to
192 2.4kw dimmers or combinations with other ratings all' in one rack.
(Optional(asan accessory to Dimension Five. Designer Remote 168-603 with asingle display, channel controller, cue controller,
two individual faders, and one crossfader which duplicate all
main system functions, except for the more limited playback functions.
Dimension Five TM 168-400
Series, the most versatile and logical control system in the world. This is the lighting contro system for the future, designed for versatility, ease of operation and for your needs --by Colortran.
(Optional) as an accessory to Dimension Five. A hand held (Focusing Remote) 168-602 is provided to access all dimmers, channels and cues.
VL-34
Dimension Five-- Two color video monitors, comprehensive
group mastering, and multiple fader systems make this the ultimate in television lighting control.
Colortran, Inc.
1015 Chestnut Street
Burbank, CA 91506-9983 (818) 843-1200 Telex 67-7252WU, 188167TRT
LIGHTING
1kw Pole Op Fresnels
FEATURES · Rugged sheet metal construction with die cast reinforced accessory clips built to withstand trouping and rough handling · New optical system designed for maximum photometric output · Double wall construction for optimum cooling · UL -ecognized floating diamond four point contact mogul bipost socket ( patented) · All operator controls are thermally insulated · Rapid turn, rack and pinion focus mechanism for manual and pole operated versions for international applications · Applications: Key lighting · Wattage: 1000W
100-205 Manual operated 100-215 Pole operated
$328.00 477.00
6" Theatre Fresnel
FEATURES · Rugged lens door equipped with cool handling positive lock for fast and easy relamping · High performance low expansion Borosilicate lens delivers maximum intensity in asmooth fiefd · Thermally insu-
lated, fast track focus mechanism provides 6 to 1spot/flood focus ratios · Positive clutch system insures fast, positive, slip free operation · Applications: Area, side, and back
lighting · Maximum Wattage: 750W
213-202 6" Theatre Fresnel
$160.00
Mini- Pro®
FEATURES · Utility yoke contains finger operated on/ off switch · Recessed power receptacle permits use of detachable 120 or 30 volt power cord · Completely portable. Designed for stand mounting or hand held operation ·Operates at 30 volts, 120 volts or 240 volts AC/DC · Safety lock prevents accidental
loss of accessories from mounting clips ·Smooth field. No hot spots · Variable focus produces 3:1 range · Dichroic Filter available for daylight shooting · " Quartz" Lamps for high efficiency · Applications: Key, back, kicker, side fighting · Maximum Wattage: 650W
100-091 Mini- Pro
$122.00
40°, 30°, 20°, 12° I ELLIPSOID
23.5" 10° ELLIPSOID e
8
27.5"
50
15.5"
--t 15 5"
Ellipsoids
Colortran Ellipsoids are designed to frame areas, project patterns and help you create special effects. They are designed for throws
of 14 feet to 140 feet. The Ellipsoid system incorporates: arugged die cast housing assembly for long reliable service and ease of maintenance. A new high performance optical train with plano -convex lenses permits greater light transmission, fewer aberrations, improved field control and higher efficiency. Lenses are fabricated of low expansion borosilicate glass and may be easily field modified to create 40°, 30°, or 20° field angle in one unit. Lenses are shock mounted in silicone to eliminate possible damage. A new joy stick design assures fast precise filament alignment without tools. A new lens barrel design permits you to easily focus to a hard or soft field edge. A new framing shutter concept enables you to create nearly any three or four sided shape.. this unique capability solves virtually every keystoning problem. Each shutter travels in its own plane eliminating interference problems. Every unit is equipped with a built-in pattern slot and is available with an optional iris without the loss of other beam shaping capabilities.
40° Et 30° Ellipsoid
Incorporates a single 4.5" and 6" diameter plano -convex lens. These units outperform
750 watt and 1kw 6" x9" and 6" x 12" existing spotlights. They are designed for throws
from 14' ( 4.3m) to 55116.7m).
$310.00
20° Ellipsoid
Incorporates asingle 6" x9" plano -convex
lens. This unit outperforms 750 watt and 1kw
6" x 16" existing spotfights. Designed for
throws from 30' ( 9.1m) to 67' ( 20.4m).
12° Ellipsoid
$305.00
Incorporates asingle 6" x12" plano -convex
lens. This unit is equivalent in performance to
higher priced generic eight- inch spotlights.
Designed for throws frcm 45' ( 13.7m) to 80'
(24.4m).
$310.00
10° Ellipsoid
Incorporates e single 8" diameter plano -
convex lens. This eight- inch unit is equival-
ent in performance to existing ten and
twelve- inch spotlights. Designed for throws
from 55' ( 16.7m) to 108' ( 32.9m).
8448.00
5° Ellipsoid
Incorporates a high transmission 10" diameter plano -convex lens. With its efficient reflector design, single lens optical system
and with optional iris assembly it actually outperforms many followspots. It is ideally suited to long-throw applications and is effective from 110' ( 33.4m) to 140' ( 42.7m). $625.00
Mini -Ellipse
The new Mini- Elipse establishes a new per-
formance standard. It is designed for throws
from 6feet to 40 feet. It accepts arange of
high output Tungsten- Halogen Lamps from
250 watts to 930 watts at 120 volts and 500
watts at 240 volts.
$165.00
Reprinted with Permission from Materials - 1982 COLORTRAN, INC. Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-35
Colortran, Inc.
101 5 Chestnut Street Burbank, CA 91 506-9 983 (81 8) 843-1 200 Telex 67-72 52WU, 1881 67TRT
ENG/LOCATION LIGHTING KITS
14-- Highly flexible kits that set-up fast for the most complex shooting situations.
Coloruan's lighting kits are designed for film/ EN G lighting anywhere in the world.
LIGHTING KITS
14 different kits in 120, 220 and 240 volt versions. Kits are sized to deliver maximum lighting with minimum power consumption. Fill lights and variable focus spots are available in wattage from 250 to 1000 watts. Lightweight construction and compact design delivers maximum illumination while maintaining complete portability.
PRODUCTION KIT
FEATURES Designed ':oilluminate a 15' wide x10' deep by 10' high area. Includes lights, stands, accessories, cable, and switch boxes. Applicat ,ons include news, sports, weather, commercials, instruction, etc.
Total connected load 45.8 amps at 120 volts.
Contents
catalog
qty. number
3
100-201
3
118-013
3
142-101
3
152-053
1 142-215
3
176-097
2
104-031
2
152-053
2
176-022
1 104-041
2
120-007
1 142-101
1 152-053
1 176-024
2
148-001
description 1000 War Fresnel 4- Leaf Barndoor 25' Extension Cable
Compact Stand w/ Casters Outlet Box w/ 2Outlets
25' Cable 1000 Watt Lamp Broad
Compact Stand w/ Casters 1000 Wat Lamp
Multi- Broad Diffusion Frame
25' Extension Cable Ccmpact Stand w / Casters
500 Watt Lamp Case
150-062
$4130.00
LOCATION LIGHTING KIT
FEATURES Accessory holder on Multi- 10 simplifies operation. Designed for more complex lighting setups. One case carries all equipment. Channel leg stands for reliable support. Draws 41.6 amps at 120 volts and 14.5 amps at 220 volts.
Contents
catalog
qty. number
2
100-301
2
118-013
1 122-147
2
176-012
2
176-015
2
104-051
2
118-003
1 148-001
2
152-052
2
176-002
2
176-027
description
Multi- 10 4- Leaf Barndoor
Scrim Set -- Single, Half Single 1000 Watt 120V Lamp
(150-056 Kit) 80C Watt 220V Lamp
(150-057 Kit) Mini- King
4- Leaf Barndoor Case
Compact Stand 1C00 Watt 120V Lamp
(150-056 Kit) 800 Watt 220V Lamp (150-057 Kit)
150-056 ( 120V) 150-057 ( 220V)
$ 1485.00
CAMERAMAN'S LIGHTING KIT
FEATURES A highly flexible kit for complex shooting situations. All equipment fits in one case. High output lighting equipment for optimum production lighting.
Draws 27 amps at 120 volts and 14.5 amps at 220 volts.
Contents
catalog
qty. number
2 400-201
2
126-027
2
118-013
description Color Beam 800 Accessory Holder 4- Leaf Barndccr
FLIGHT KIT
FEATURES Lightweight, compact, designed for fast setups. Accessory holders on Multi- 6 for simple setup.
Draws 27.5 amps at 120 volts and 15 amps at 220 volts.
Contents
catalog
qty. number description
2
100-151 Multi- 6
2
118 013 4- Leaf Barndoor
1 122 147 Scrim Set -- Single,
Ha'f Single
2
176-002 650 Watta 120V Lamp
(150-058 Kit)
2
176-007 800 Watt 220V Lamp
(150-059 Kit)
2
104-051 Mini- King
2
118-003 4- Leaf Barndoor
1 148-007 Case
3
152-05 Mini-Stand with 5/8" Stud
1 156-001 Gatfer Grip
2
176-022 100 Watt 120V Lamp
(150-058 Kit)
2
176-027 800 Watt 220V Lamp
(150-059 Kit)
150-058 11201/1 150-059122eV
$ 1655.00
2
104-341 Mini- Board
2
118-016 4- Leaf Barndoor
1 122-137 Scrim Set -- Single,
Half Single
1 148-007 Case
2
152-050 Mini- Stand with 1/2" Stud
2
152-051 Mini- Stand with 5/8" Stud
4
176-002 650 Watt 120V Lamp
(150-054 Kit)
4
176-007 800 Watt 220V Lamp
(150-005 Kit)
150-054 1120V) 150-055 220V)
$ 1325.00
VL-36
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Colortran,Inc.
101 5 Chestnut Street Burbank, CA 91506-9 983
181 8) 843-1 200 Telex 67-72 52VVU, 1881 67TRT
ENG/LOCAT1ON LIGHTING KIITS
14 - Hichly flexible kits that set-up fast for the most compex shoothg situations
LIGHTING KITS
COLOR BEAM MO KIT
Features Uses three cool touch Color Beam 800 units.
Accessories include accessory holder, barn-
doors and scrim set. Total connected load
16.3 amps at 120 voks and 11 amps at 220
volts.
Contents
catalog
qty. number description
1 122-147 Scrim Set - Single, Half
Single
1 148-007 Case
3
152-051 Mini-Stard with 5/8" Stud
3
176-002 650 Watt 120V Lamp
(150-060 Kit)
3 400-201 Color Beam 800
3
18-013 4- Leaf Barndoor
3
126-097 Accessory Holder
3
176-007 800 Watt 220V Lamp
(156-061 Kit)
150-060 (120V) 150-061 (220V)
$ 1300.00
BATTERY BELT KIT
PRO -KIT IV
FEATURES Four ' ights. Two Minibroads, and two Mini- Pros. Key and fill lighting in one package. Interchangeable accessories. Designed fer use with 120 volt or 240 volt lamps for fcreign location work. Draws. 20 amps at 120 volts and 11 amps at 220 volts.
Contents
catalog
qty. number
2
100-091
2
104-34'1
3
118-016
1 142-001
1 148-030
3
152-050
1 156-012
2
176-002
2
176-092
2
176-007
2
176-094
description Mini- Pro
Mini- Broad 4- Leaf Barndoor 25' Extension Cord
Metal Case Mini- Stand 1/2" Stud
Gaffer Grip 650 Watt 120V Lamp (150-052 Kit)
600 Watt 120V Lamp (150-052 Kit) 800 Watt 220V Lamp
(150-053 Kit) 650 Watt 220V Lamp
(150-053 Kit)
150-052 ( 120V) w / metal case 150-0531220V) w/metal case
$1125.00
BATTERY BELT KIT
FEATURES Kit comes complete with Battery Belt, Mini- Pro, 30 Volt DC cord, Mini Pro Handle, 9foot cord for 120 Volt AC power operator (note - requires 120V lamp). Carry Case and 250 Watt 3400 K 30V lamp.
Batieries are rechargeable Nickel- Cadmium Cells and will provide many years of reliable service.
Note - Belt comes complete with 14- hour overnigh: charger and an integrated cable. Charger designed for 120 and 240 volt input pc wer
MINI- PRO KIT
FEATURES Lightweight Designed for use with 30 volt battery power, 120 volts, or 220 volts Kits in current use by network news crews and photographers Draws 15 amps at 120 volts and 8amps at 220 volts
Contents
catalog
qty. number
3
100-091
2
118-016
1 122-137
1 142-001
1 148-030
3
152-050
3
176-092
3
176-094
description Mini- Pro
4- Leaf Barndoor Scrim Set- Sine, Half Single 25' Extension Cable Metal Case Mini- Stand with 1/2" Stud 600 Watts 120V Lamp (150-050 Kit) 650 Watt 220V Lamp
(150-050 Kit)
150-0501120V) w / metal case 150-051 ( 220V) w / metal case
$930.00
Contents catalog
qty. number 1 100-091 1 140-003 1 140-001
1 142-012
148-030 156-005 176-090
description Mini- Pro
30 Volt DC cord Battery Belt with charger unit ( 120/240volt)
9' cord for 120V AC power (requires 120V lamp) Carry Case ( metal) Mini- Pro Handle 250 Watt, 3400°K 30V lamp, 25 hou -s
150-063130V) Battery Belt Kit
$1475.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-37
VIDEO
r®Ihe rr1,1
SUPPLY CORPORATION
e--...
148 Veterans Drive Northvale, NJ 07647 (201) 767-7990 (800) 526-0242 Telex 13-5139
MOUNTS/ LIGHTING CONTROLS
MODULAR MOUNTS Et LIGHT CONTROLS
COMPREHENSIVE LIGHT MOUNTING AND CONTROL ACCESSORIES
Selecting and deploying lighting fixtures and
control devices to one's exact specifications can be difficult on location or in small. "adapted" studios, where confined quarters, low ceilings, and ashortage of power is the rule rather than the exception
Recognizing this. Comprehensive has created anew line of light mounting and control devices designed to work with portable lighting fixtures. They offer you much the
same freedom and flexibility on location as you would expect in a studio environment While they each perform a unique function. they share features important to you and your budget
· Lightweight and portable These rugged little devices can fill the nooks and crannies of your present lighting system case, without adding appreciably to your bulk and weight logistics.
· Generic compatability. Our light control and mounting devices are designed to work with YOUR lightweight location lights
· Designed for economy, not duplication. The modular aspect of our mounting devices eliminates the need to purchase costly parts over and over again, adding to your flexibility. not your overhead
THE MODULAR STUD
MS
Commonly know as the " baby pin". the 5/8(16mm) diameter stud has become the most
prevalent mount for lightweight professional lighting fixtures in use in motion picture and television. Nearly all manufacturers of this type of equipment design their lights to fit. or be adapted to, this mount We have made this common denominator amodular piece in our system It can be moved from device to device, thereby saving the cost of having to make repeat purchases of this item. The 3/4"
deep 1/4-20 tapped hole in the base of the stud, enables it to be attached to all Comprehensive mounts, as well as many other types of mounts, stands, and rigs with 1/4-20 threaded screws It's also an ideal building block when nothing will do but an invention of your own
It conforms, in key mounting dimensions, to
the new SMPTE proposed standard for the baby pin, but is an inch and ahalf longer (4 inches overall) to facilitate interchangeable mounting and add to the versatility of the piece It features asafety hole through the top for safety wiring of lighting fixtures and asafety mounting groove. which should be standard on all light mounting devices
CEILING SCISSOR CLIP
CSC
For hanging lightweight lighting fixtures from the rails of dropped ceilings so commonly found in modern offices Used in conjunction with the modular stud and our tilting um-
brella/gel frame bracket, it also makes an excellent support for overhead microphones (Mic must be equipped with 1 /4-20 threaded receptacle or 3/8 to 1/4 adapter thread on mic mount
COMPREHENSIVE C- CLAMP
CC
Our version of the industry Sstandard hangar for mounting lightweight lights and control
devices to pipe. shelves, doors. and " twoby-fours-.the Comprehensive C-Clamp accepts pipe and flat surfaces up to 2 incnes thick The pin mount's variable adjustment control makes this C - clamp the most versatile of its type available Its 1/4-20 threaded
screw, our link to the modular stud, can also be used for microphone mounts and, in an emergency, to mount lightweight still
cameras. Here, however extreme caution should be exercised so as not to perforate the camera's bottom, use the threaded back-up plate for this and similar applications.
COMPREHENSIVE DOUBLE CLAMP
DC
This product eliminates forever the need to transport cumbersome and expensive pole systems to distant locations for the purpose of building temporary overhead rigging for your lights and controls. Two of these clamps, attached to the tops of two stands. will support a length of inexpensive, readily available, electrical or plumbing conduit, on which you can clamp your fixtures Pipe of this type can be purchased &ally from hardware stores, electrical outlets, or plumbing supply shops, used for the shoot and disposed of, all at afraction of the cost of shipping such items to and from alocation. A ten foot length of conduit is an inexpensive and ideal way to hang seamless background paper as well. A pair of these handy clamps is an ideal adjunct to any portable lighting system
COMPREHENSIVE CAMERA MOUNT CM
Fast, simple, and safe. this is an effective way to attach lightweight fixtures to the camera shoes featured on many of today's video cameras. The mount, tooled from a single piece of sturdy bar aluminum, is fitted with a
locking plate to prevent the fixture from sliding off the camera if it's tilted forward. The top of the mount is our standard 1/4-20 threaded screw to accept the modular light mounting stud
5/8" to 3/8" ADAPTER
A5/3
Adapts lights with 1/2" or 3/8" mounting receptacles to stands and clamps with 5/8" pin diameters. Like the 5/8" modular stud. the adapter features asafety undercut to pre vent a light from sliding off a suspended mount
COMPREHENSIVE/GEL UMBRELLA
HOLDER
GUH
This device enables you to equip 1.000 watt or under focussing spot or flood lights with either an umbrella for soft lighting applications or agel frame for color conversion. correction, diffusion. or special effects with gel The holder has a tilting mechanism which
enables the light and the gel frame or umbrella, to be re-oriented as an assembly rather than having to re-position these ac-
cessories independently when the light is moved. The top of the unit has a1 / 4-20 lock screw that mates to the modular stud In an
emergency. the gel/umbrella holder can be
used to support alightweight still camera or
mic mount on top of alight stand, however, the same caution mentioned in the C-Clamp description applies
BACK-UP PLATE
BUP
The 1 /4-20 screws, common to most Comprehensive modular mounting devices, can provide temporary support for small
cameras. mic mounts, and similar devices with 1/4-20 mounting receptacles For mos of these applications, however. the 3/4" screw length is too long The back-up plate provides asecure, adjustable mounting surface for devices with shallower maximum mounting depths
COMPREHENSIVE GAFFER GRIP
GG·2
Made of heavy-duty fiberglass and featuring
apermanently mounted 5/8" safety undercut
stud, the Comprehensive gator-style gaffer grip is an efficient, reliable way to attach
lightweight fixtures to shelves, doors, and
similar flat surfaces. Use with 5/8" to 3/8" adapter for lights with smaller mounting receptacles ( see Ing t . nsfoe front cover)
COMPREHENSIVE GEL FRAME
GF
The Comprehensive gel frame is designed to work in conjunction with our gel/umbrella
holder, but will work equally well with standard " gobo" type devices from a variety of manufacturers in the industry. It's open-sided design facilitates " blending" the effect of the gel on the subject or set. The unique double ball & socket locking mechanism permits the plane of the gel supports to be set at any angle relative to the mounting shaft of the unit. It is sized to accommodate 10" x 12" gels. available in the Comprehensive/Rosco
Gel Kits and from other manufacturers in this size. Four gels can be cut from industry standard 20" or 21" x24" sheet sizes.
COMPREHENSIVE UMBRELLAS
Comprehensive reflective umbrellas convert small, focussing spot lights and flood lights into efficient soft sources, particularly useful in fill light applications. The U-43 and U-30 feature an aluminized surface: the UMMV is white All provide high reflectivity and true color renditions, based on the color temperature of the lamp in use. Caution· When used in coniunction with focussing spots, light must be adjusted to flood position Full spot intensity aimed at the center of the umbrella may cause scorching of the umbrella surface
CSC
MS
.1*
ir DC
\\ U-43
·
MS
GU H 1114
elle
MS
el GU H GF
Modular Light Controls 11. Mounting:
MODEL NO.
MS CC CSC GUM GF CM A5/3 DC U·30 U-43 BUP GO 2
DESCRIPTION
Modular Stud C- clamp Ceiling scissor cup Gel/umbrella holder Gel trame Camera mount 5/8" to 3/8" adapter Double clamp Umbrella 30- diameter/storage lengtn Umbrella 43" earneterrstorage length Back-up plate Gee, oil:,
20-3.4 . 29-' 4
WT.
2oz 1 oz 2oz '2 oz 10oz
oz 2oz 2lb 8oz
oz 1oz til O?
PRICE
S 3.50 12.95 2.50 19.95 19.95 5.50 4.95 10.50 26.50 37.50
. 95 26.95
VL-38
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEO
einierr1,1
SUPPLY CORPORATION
148 Veterans Drive
e--. Northvale, NJ 07647 (201) 767-7990 (800) 526-0242 Telex 13-5139
i 0ea,'stienele0e0'% s--ffoteesr osooemis
VIDEO ACCESSORIES
Medium- Duty Tripod and Fluid- Effect Head
A medium- duty but lightweight assembly featuring a30 lb. capacity fluid- effect head with adjustable quick-
release platform, dual- handle operation, tilt safety stop,
fluid- action pan and tilt, and reversible 1/4" or 3/8"
camera mounting screw.
Collapsed Length: 30"
Weight
14-3/4 lbs.
Extended Length: 70"
3142 Tripod Capacity 65 lbs.
1473 Fluid- Effect Head Capacity 30 lbs.
Compact Tripod with Fluid -Effect Head
3148 $449.95
Compact and lightweight, this tripod is specially
designed for today's lightweight industrial and consumer
color cameras.
Collapsed Length:
20"
Extended Length:
54"
Weight:
Less than 6 lbs.
Tripod/head Capacity
18 lbs.
6144 $ 139.00
3148
LIGHTING KITS Comprehensive Lighting Kits
Virtually all lighting kit suppliers face a similar challenge-- selecting component pieces that best handle the requirements of the largest number of users. Comprehensive kits are therefore divided into two general categories kits featuring a full assortment of accessories for a wide variety of locations, and kits that offer the bare necessities, but provide extra room for accessories of your choice Either way. Comprehensive lighting kits offer you a substantial savings over purchasing individual component pieces.
Ultra·Mln Kit
MODEL
NO.
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
UM- 1
(31M-250 hunts (I) UAMV umbrella/stand
adapter
(I) UMMV Mini umbrella (2) SAMV stand adapters (I) TCMV table clamp (1) HGMV handgrip (2) IRS mini stands (3) ENH lamps (1) MC mini case
$595.00
Size 20-1/2 Lx4Wx 15-1/4 H Weight 14 lb 6 oz
(Lampe Included)
Bask 2 Klt
MODEL
NO.
DESCRIPTIONPRICE
21-2
( 11 VL-601 light
111 VL-601 VF focussing light
(Il VL-BD-2 Barndoors for VL-601VF
Ill GUHGel/Umbrella
$399.00
(I) MhoSldMerodular stud
.rtttrd'a ( 30 I 121 · · 1,ds 121: 11(1,-2
Size 25 L · t ··· · 8-1,4 H Weight 1 t (Lamps included)
Take 2 Klt
MODEL
NO.
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
T-2
( 2) K-600 focussing lights $549.00 (21 KBD Barndoors for K-600 11)GUH Gel/umbrella holder (Il MS Modular stud Ill UMMV min. umbrella 12) IRS mini stands 121 DVS lamps (11KC kit case
Size 22 L 6-3/4 W r · 6 H Weight lIh 14 oz
(Lamps included)
T-4 Kit
Take 4 Klt
Take 3 Klt
MODEL
NO.
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
MODEL
NO.
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
T-4
( 2) V-10/6 focussing light $ 995.00
T-3
121 VBD barndoors for
V-10/6
121 VAH accessory holders
for V- I0/6
121 MF -10 flood lights
(41 LSP light stands
121 DXW lamps
(2) FHM lamps
PRC Kit case
Size 35 Lxii - 1/2 W x15-3/4 H Weight 45 lb (Lamps Included)
(2) V-10/6 focussing light $ 715.00 12) VBD Barndoors for
V-10/6 (2) VAH Accessory holder
for V-10/6 (I) MF -10 flood light (3) LSP light stands 12) DXW lamps (1)FHM lamp (1) PRC Kit case
Size 35 L 11-1/2 W x15-3/4 H Weight 36 lb 14 oz
( Lamps Included)
Basic 3 Klt
ENG-3 Klt
Production 4 Kit
EFP-3 Klt
MODEL
NO.
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
MODEL
NO.
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
MODEL
NO.
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
MODEL
NO.
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
B.3
(1) VL-601 tignt
$599.00
S775.00
P-4
(2) V-10/6 focussing light $1,225.00
EFP-3 (2) V-10/6 focussing light
8125.00
121 VL-601VF focussing light
( 21 VBD barndoors for
121 VBD barndoors for
III VL-BD-1 Barndoors for
i.'i Krilf Kiliini, ii. ' ir 6 ' '
V-10/6
V-10/6
VL-601
111DFK diffusion filter for
121 VAH accessory hdders
( 21 VAH accessory holder
121 VL-BD-2 Barndoors for VL-601VF
K-600 ( 1101V delude filter for
for V-10/6 121 VSS single scrim for
for V-10/6 ( 21 VSS single scrim for
Ill GUH Gel/umbrella holder
VM-300 111 CSMV camera mount fo
V- I016 11) VDS double scrim fOi
V-10/6 ( 1) MF -I () flood light
(1 ) MS Modular stud
VM-300
V-10/6
( 1) FLS-1 single scrim for
(11U-30 Umbrella ( 30'1
Ili VC- 30 30V battery cap e
( 21 MF -10 flood lights
MF -10
Ill VLS-1 Single sCrl(6 101
for VM- 300
( 2) FLS-1 single scrim for
( 31 GUH Gel/umbrella
VL-601
ir ' tiGMV nandgrip for
MF -I0
holders
III VLS-V Single scrim for
VM-300
( 4) GUH gel/umbrella
131 MS modular studs
VL-60tVF /3) LS- 2light stands
Ili SAMV stand adapter for VM- 300
holders ( 4) MS modular studs
( 11U-43 umbrella ( 43 -1 131 OF gel frames
(31 DYH lamps
13i IRS mini stands
( 1 ) U-43 umbrella ( 43")
( 1)LOP location gel pack
111C-2 kit ease
12t DYS lamps
( 4) GF gel frames
( 1) CSC ceiling scissor clip
Size 25 L kIOW x8-1/4 H
ii iAvi lamp
111LGP location gel pack
II) CC C-clarnp
Weight 25 lbs (Lamps Included)
it } EPL lamp Size 22 Lr6-3,1 W r16 H
( 2) CSC ceiling scissor clip (2) CC c-ciarne
( 4) LSP light stands
( 3) LSP light stands ( 21 DXW lamps ( 1) FHM lamp
Weiont 23 tb 5oz
( 2) DXW lamps
( I) PRC Kit case
(Lamps Included)
(2) FHM larnps
Size 35 Lx11-1 / 2W x15-3/4 H
it) PRC Kit case
Weight 43 lb 4at
Size 35 Lr11-1/2 W u15-3/4 H Weight 53 lb 13 oz
(Lamps Included)
(Lamps Included)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-39
(b0L-LUX
lighting ind. inc.
5723 AUCKLAND AVE N HOLLYWOOD, CA 91601-2207
(E318) 761-61E31
LIGHTING
MINI- COOL PORTABLE, PHOTOGRAPHIC LIGHT
The Mini- Cool is designed especially for photography. All its interchangeable lamps provide light which is essentially free of heat, Infrared and Ultraviolet radiation. Ultraviolet light has the unwelcome effect on film or videotape of decreasing image contrast ( and is harmful to people as well). And many subjects, such as delicate life forms, can be damaged or destroyed by heat.
The Mini- Cool's unique operating features simplify conventional applications and invite new creative uses. It is small and light enough to attach to any video, motion picture or still camera, using the Camera Adaptor supplied. Or it may be handheld, using the handle included with each unit. ( The handle has ahollow underside which can be fitted over a5/8" diameter light stand column or post, but this is recommended only as an occasional practice. A far more secure mounting is provided by the Cool- Lux Stand Adaptor.)
The Mini- Cool is operable from a variety of AC and DC power sources, simply by installing alamp of corresponding voltage and an appropriate adaptor cord. The lamp socket, switch and wiring are all heavy-duty construction, easily capable of handling DC currents (which are heavier than AC) as well as AC.
A 120- Volt, 250- Watt lamp is included with every Mini- Cool.
C4440 Mini- Cool Standard Pack ( AC). Includes one each Mini- Cool
Light, FOS-1 Lamp, Camera Adaptor ( C4447), and handle ( C4441).
Supplied in foam carton
$129.50
C4460 MINI-COOL AC/DC PACK. Includes all items listed in
Standard Pack plus FOS-9 Lamp and 12V DC Adaptor Cord ( C4453).
Supplied in foam carton
$159.50
INTERCHANGEABLE LAMPS. Eleven different lamps are available for your Mini- Cool to enable you to use awide variety of illumination intensities.
LAMP TYPE PATTS
e e e> e. e e> e> e e 4?
e, e
4e)·
e
e
c.;"
e
e
ce e
250 200 100 50
25 50
25
75
75 95
150
VOLTS
120 30
12
12
12
12
12
12
12 144 120
AMPERES
208 667 833 417 208 417 208 625 625 694 125
AfERAGE LIFE ( hrs)
tereeRsAKTeUivRiEn)
BEAM TYPE
50 50
50 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 500 250
3300 ,
3300 3350
e
3100
3100
3100
3100
3000 3150 3200 3300
2F)ValnE (Honz aVen )
46,47 40,40 43,42 30030 30030 19,13 14,11 1401136038 36038 42,44
'D ,stance 1 Fool ___,. 8250 4660 3950 Candles
1800
600
7200 6670 19142 3003 3(X) 6200
2' FC -. 2062 2915 988 450 150 1800 1669 4201 801 960 1550
3'
FC --e- 917 1296 439 200 67 800 741 1980 375 450 710
5'
FC
330 446 158
72
24
298 267 1050 125 150 160
7 FC --.- 168 238 81
37
12 147 136 465 67
80
63
10 FC --.- 83 117 40
18
6
72
67 171 32 38 42
15
FC
37
52 18
8
27 32
30
85
14
17
14
'Illumination figures above are read as LUX If distance figures are read as meters
COOL- LUX" LAMPS FOR MINI- COOL FOS-I Lamp, 120V, 250W, Wide Beam FOS-2 Lamp, 30V, 200W, Wide Beam FOS-3 Lamp, 12V, 100W, Wide Beam FOS-4 Lamp, 12V, 50W, Wide Beam FOS-5 Lamp, 12V, 25W, Wide Beam FOS-6 Lamp, 12V, 50W, Narrow Beam FOS-7 Lamp, 12V, 25W, Narrow Beam FOS-8 Lamp, 12V, 75W, Narrow Beam FOS-9 Lamp, 12V, 75W, Wide Beam FOS-10 Lamp, 14.4V, 95W, Wide Beam FOS 11 Lamp, 120V, 150W, Wide Beam
$24.95
29.96 29.96 24.95
24.96 24.95 24.96
24.95 24.95 28.96
24.95
VL-40
C4463 COOL KIT III
C4462 COOL KIT II. 18"L x16"W x5-1/2"D. 10-1/2 lb. Includes two
Mini- Cool Lights, two Light Stands ( C44511, three FOS-1 Lamps, one
FOS-4 Lamp, two Stand Adaptors ( C4446), two Camera Adaptors
(C4447), two Spring- Clamp Mounts ( C4452), two Scissor- Clip
Mounts ( C4469), one Putty- Knife Mount ( C4464), one 12V DC
Adaptor Cord ( C4453), three Extension Cords ( C4442), one Daylight
Filter ( C44481 and one Diffusion Lens ( C44491. Supplied in
foam- fitted carrying case
$675.00
C4463 COOL KIT III. 18"L x16"W x5-1/2"D. 10 lb. Includes three
Mini- Cool Lights, five FOS-1 Lamps, one FOS-3 Lamp, three Stand
Adaptors ( C4446), one Camera Adaptor ( C4447), three Spring- Clamp
Mounts ( C44521, two Scissor- Clip Mounts ( C4469), one Putty- Knife
Mount ( C4464). one 12V DC Adaptor Cord ( C44531 three Extension
Cords ( C4442), one Cube 1ap ( C4471), one Daylight Filter ( C444.8)
and one Diffusion Lens ( C4449). Supplied in foam- fitting carrying
case
$675.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Jacques Cousteau's Amazon series took one
/
../ L.
ycbeanerenm taowtur praeptphhaere er Coaunsdutiestapwureotzeyeealaimnrs atwonhdshoot.
zy
Calypso for many years says,
FOR STUDIO WORK
OR LOCATION
"The STARPAK is the most compact and best equipped lighting package in the market."
LOUIS PREZELIN
1CASE WITH FOAM & KEYS
4STAND ADAPTER 2COLLAPSIBLE LIGHT STAND 2LIGHT FRAMERS ( Barn Doors) 6FOS-1 LAMP ( 120- Volt. 250-Watt, Flood)
1FUS-3LAMP ( 12- Volt, 100-Watt, Flood) 1FUS-9LAMP ( 12- Volt, 75-Watt, Flood)
4MINI-COOL" m LIGHTS
2DIFFUSION LENS 2DAYLIGHT FILTER 1HANDLE 1CAMERA ADAPTER 2THREE WAY CUBE TAP 2SCISSOR- CLIP MOUNT 1PCTTY-KNIFE MOUNT
2LARGE SLIDING CLAMP MOUNT 2SPR:NG-CLAMP MOUNT 3EXTENSION CORD 1CIGARETTE- LIGHTER ADAPTER CORD
1PHOTO DIMMERTm 2SPARE NYLON STRAIN RELIEFS 1AUTO BATTERY ADAPTER CORD
Custom- fitted foam provides cavities for all above- listed items. Cavities are also provided for NEW MINI- COOL BARN DOORS and for small tools or accessories. Starpak is ideal for studio or location shooting. MINI- COOLS operate from AC or DC power sources. AC power consumption ( total for four lights) is less than nine arms. Many times during the filming of the series, " AMAZON" only STARPAKS would permit the shooting of exceptional documents under the most precarious conditions.
Mini- Cools are used by NASA aboard space shuttle flights.
CINEGUIP
INC.
275 MacPHERSON TORONTO, CANADA M4V
(416) 920-5424
1A4
The Camera Mart.
456 W. 55th ST. NEW VORK, NY 10019 212) 757 6977/TELEX: 1-2079
5723 AUCKLAND AVENUE N. HOLLYWOOD, CA 91601 · ( 818) 761-6116
VL-41
COSTUME ARMOUR,
Shore Road P.O. Box 325
Cornwall- On- Hudson, NY 12520 (914) 534-9120
INC.
SCENIC BACKGROUNDS
COMMERCIAL, INDUSTRIAL Et PORTRAIT PHOTOGRAPHY
EXHIBITS Et DISPLAYS
MOTION PICTURE, T.V. Et THEATRICAL SCENERY
Materials Used In Construction Of Scenic Backgrounds: All back-
grounds illustrated are fabricated of heavy gauge vinyl ( 30 mil.), aself-
extinguishing material that has been approved for use in areas of
public assembly. The units which are available " ready- to- use" are
those which have been permanently mounted onto sturdy wood frames. As noted below, all units are also available unframed for direct installation onto existing walls.
Paint Finish Selection: As explained in the catalog, most of the units shown are available in several alternative finishes. To obtain any style in afinish other than the one illustrated, merely indicate the particular unit desired ( by name and number) then specify that it be painted in whichever alternative finish is desired. All units ordered by name and
number alone will be painted as illustrated. As further noted below, all units are also available unpainted. On re- orders of the same style, because they are hand painted to order, all units are sometimes subject to slight variations in color and tone.
Custom Work: In addition to our stock items, we also fabricate customized backgromds to meet any design specified, i.e. company names and logos, TV station call letters, etc. The size of the customized panes may range anywhere from 2' x2' up to 4' x12'. Estimates for custom work not mentioned below are available on request.
Shipping Time: These scenic panels are all made up to order; they are not kept in stock. Normally approximately four weeks is required between placirg an order and the shipment of painted panels, whether framed or unframed. Unpainted, unframed- units can sometimes be
shipped faster if required. All prices are F.O.B. Studio, Cornwall-onHudsor, New York. Shipments are sent Freight Collect, via trucking companies or freight forwarders.
PRICES
Style No.
101 110 112 201
Style Name
Bamboo Old English Wall Old English Wall French Provincial
202
English Oak Paneling
203
Spanish Paneling
204
Italian Provincial
205
Library Panel
207
Castilian
208
Baroque
209
Rococo
210
Fireplace
212
Florentine Bronze Doors
215 220 225
230 235 306 310 312 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 330 340 345 346 315A
Empire ( not illus.) Gothic Paneling Roman Arch
Roman Arch ( Matching Panel - not illus.) Colonial Brick Arch Moorish Arch Slate Roof Tiles
Western Quarry Stone ( not illus.) Barnwood Siding
Logs Colonial Brick
Cedar Shingles
Split Shaker Shingles Spanish Roof Tiles
Wood Clapboard Siding New England Fieldstone Stucco Wall
Bronze Gates ( ea.) ( not illus.) Corinthian Column Mosaic Tiles Colonial Brick 9'
(Panel) (Pilasters ea.)
(Pane) (Pilasters ea.)
( Panel) (Pilasters ea.) ( Panel) (Pilasters ea.) ( Panel) (Pilasters ea.)
( Panel) (Pilasters)
( Panel)
Painted, Framed Ready- To- Use
$155.00 175.00 175.00 175.00 120.00 175.00 120.00 175.00 175.00 245.00 175.00 120.00 175.00 120.00 175.00 120.00 185.00 175.00 120.00 175.00 295.00 250.00 155.00 375.00 325.00 175.00 175.00 155.00 155.00 215.00 155.00 155.00
175.00 155.00 175.00 150.00 120.00 170.00 150.00 225.00
Unpainted Unframed
75.00 75.00 75.00 75.00 50.00 75.00 50.00 75.00 75.00 75.00 75.00 50.00 75.00 50.00 75.00 50.00 75.00 75.00 50.00
7 5.00
150.00 150.00
75.00 150.00 150.00
75.00 75.00
75.00 75.00 75.00
75.00 75.00
75.00 75.00 75.00 75.00 50.00 80.00 75.00 75.00
Handling Fee Per Box $ 12.00/2 Panels Per Box.
VL-42
Prices and Specifications Sub¡ect to Change Wfthout Notice.
Frezzolini Electronics Inc.
7 Valley Street Hawthorne, NJ 07506 USA (201) 427-1160 TVVX 710-988-4142
LIGHTING KITS
MINI- FILL KIT MODEL MFK4
COMPARE THESE UNIQUE MINI- FILL FEATURES: ·Extremely lightweight-- only 12 ozs ·Compact size- 2" x4-1/4" ·Operates from any 12-14.4 or 30 volt battery ·Utilizes the latest high efficiency multi- mirror lamps
(20-100 watts) ·Completely serviceable ·Field tested ·Field proven ·Mounts on camera, pistol grip or lightstand ·Dual-lighthead configuration from one power source
·Rugged construction-- Built by Frezzolini® -- The world leader in portable lighting and power
MINI- FILL KITS
MFK1 (1) MF12P Mini- fill w/cigarette lighter plug
(1) VB12 Battery pack- 12V at 4AH ( slow charge
only)
(1) VBC Overnight charger ( 115VAC 60 Hz only)
(less carrying case)
$295.00
MFK2 Same as MFK1 plus (1) MFDF dichroic filter (1) MFCC carrying case
455.00
MFK3
(1) MF12V Mini- fill vv/frezzi amp connector
(1) VB12V High performance battery pack w/amp
connector
(1) VBCV Overnight charger ( 115VAC 60 Hz only)
(less carrying case)
354.95
MFK4 Same as MFK3 plus (1) MFDF dichroic filter (1) MFCC carrying case
514.95
MFK5 (1) MF4X Mini-fill w/XLR-4 connector
(1) VB4X High performance battery w/XLR-4
connector
(1) VBCV Overnight charger ( 115VAC 60 Hz only)
(less carrying case)
364.95
MFK6 Same as MFK5 plus (1) MFDF dichroic filter (1) MFCC carrying case
524.95
MFK7 (1) MFSV Mini-fill wishort 18" cable Et amp
connector
(1) VBSO High performance camera mount
battery pack- 3keyhole type
(1) VBCV Overnight charger ( 115VAC 60 Hz only)
(less carrying case)
374 95
MFK8 Same as MFK7 plus (1) MFDF dichroic filter (1) MFCC carrying case
534.95
Bulb/Handle/Light Stud Optional
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-43
Frezzolini Electronics Inc.
7 Valley Street Hawthorne, NJ 07506 USA (201) 427-1160 TVVX 710-988-4142
LIGHTING/LAMP GUIDE
FREZZI MINI- FILL LIGHTHEAD
Single Light Configuration ( Including 100W or 75W Bulb) MF12P Mini- Fill w/Cigarette Lighter Plug MF12C Mini- Fill w/BP-90 Type Co- Ax Plug MF12V Mini- Fill w/Frezzi Amp Connector MFSV Mini- Fill w/Short ( 18") Cable Et Amp Connector MF4X Mini- Fill w/XLR-4 Connector MF5X Mini- Fill w/XLR-5 Connector MF30 Mini- Fill w/2- Pin Amphenol Connector for 30V Operation
(Includes 80W Bulb)
$ 149.95 149.95
149.95 149.95 149.95 149.95 154.95
Dual Light Configuration
DM F12
Twin mini- fill interconnected for power from one ( 1) source. Choice of power
connectors; Sony BP-90 In- Line, Frezzi-Amp, XLR-4 or Cigarette Lighter
type
$295.00
DMF30 Same as DMF12 except wired for 30V operation including 2- pin Amphenol Connector
298.00
Mini- Fill Accessories MFDF Mini- Fill " Flip- Up" Dichroic Filter
MFCC Mini- Fill Carrying Case
LP90
Leather Pouch W/ Belt Loops for BP- 90
NOTE
1) Lightstud/Mount/Handle additional
2) Normal cable length 4' Custom specified cable length up to 8'. Additional cost
$ 88.00 80.00 38.00
$ 8.00
Shown with convenient Flip- up Dichroic Filter Model MFDF and diffused front surface
LP90 leather pouch w/belt loops
MINI- FILL LAMP GUIDE
LAMP CODE
BAB EKP ESX EXN EXT EXV EXZ *EYC EYF
VOLTS
12 30 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
WATTS
20 80 20 50 50 100 50 75 75
LIFE ( HRS)
2000 25
2000 3000 3000
50 3000 3500 3500
'Also recommended for 13.2 & 14.4 VDC operation
1 YOUR CHOICE OF POWER CONNECTOR
COLOR TEMP.
2925°K 3350 °K 2925°K 3050°K 3050°K 3350°K 3075°K 3050°K 3050°K
TYPICAL CENTER CANDLEPOWER
BEAM SPREAD
460 1750 3300
1500 9150 3300 3000
2000 11500
FLOOD FLOOD NARROW SPOT
FLOOD NARROW SPOT
FLOOD NARROW FLOOD
FLOOD NARROW SPOT
A Frezzi Amp Connector B 2- pin Amphenol ( 30V) C BP- 90 In- Line D Cigarette Lighter Type E XLR ( 4 or 5 Pin)
A
VL-44
D
E
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Frezzolini Electronics Inc.
7 Valley Street Hawthorne, NJ 07506 USA (201) 427-1160 TVVX 710-988-4142
CHARGERS/ADAPTORS/ BATTERY PACKS
VB SERIES 12 VOLT CHARGERS, ADAPTORS
VBC
Overnight charger w/cigarette lighter type plug (115V AC 60 Hz only) $ 35.00
VBCV
Overnight charger w/frezzi male amp connector
(115V AC 60 Hz only)
38.50
FTC12P
Deluxe overnight charger w/cigarette lighter type plug, L.E.D. charge sensing indicator and switchable 115/230V AC 50/60 Hz input . .78.00
FTC12V Deluxe overnight charger w/frezzi male amp connector L.E.D. charge sensing indicator and switchable 115/230V AC 50/60 Hz input . .80.00
MBC5V Eight ( 8) channel overnight charger w/universal
A.C. inputs
395.00
BC77UB Single battery fast charger ( 1Hr) w/universal A.C. inputs ( requires HV adaptor cable) . .395.00
MBC4V
Fast charges five ( 5) battery packs simultaneous-
ly in one ( 1) Hr, plus eight ( 8) additional battery
packs overnight, universal AC inputs ( requires
HV adaptor cables)
2090.00
RPS2
Dual channel ( 2) combination battery fast
charger and A.C. adaptor
895.00
HV
Fast charge adaptor cable
30.00
V4X
Adaptor cable, 6" male amp connector to XLR-4
female connector
24.00
V5X
Adaptor cable, 6" male amp connector to XLR-5
female connector
24.00
V210
Adaptor cable from VB series battery amp
connector to Sony BC210 charger or Frezzolini
chargers models: BC124S, CR1, MBC2, MBC4,
MBC5
22.00
P210
Same as V210 except for model VB12 battery
w/cigarette lighter type plug
22.00
XLM3
VB12V battery holder for Sony DXC-M3 (includes low battery warning circuit) . . . .175.00
LP90
Leather pouch with belt loops for BP- 90 .. .38.00
VB SERIES 12V at 4AH BATTERY PACKS
BC-77UB
Model VBSO "camera- mounted" battery pack with additional XLR4 connector
Model VB4X " fast- charge" battery pack with XLR4 connector
VB12 VB12V VB4X
VBSO
Battery pack w/cigarette lighter type plug, slow
charge only w/(1) VBC charger
$165.00
High-performance battery pack w/frezzi amp
connector and ( 1) VBCV charger
225.00
High-performance battery pack w/XLR4
connector on short coil cable and ( 1) VBCV
charger
235.00
High-performance battery pack w/amp
connector, ( 3) circular studs for camera mount
(3- keyhole) and ( 1) VBCV charger
245.00
Model VB12 "slow- charge" battery pack
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Model VB12V " fast- charge"
battery pack
VI-45
GITZ0 KARL HEITZ, INC.
34-1 1 62 st. P.O. Box 427 Woodside, NY 11377 (71 8) 565-0004
MONOPODS/CASES/LIGHTSTANDS MICROPHONE BOOMS/ATTACHMENTS
n'r
0056 560 560 H
560 B 560 BH
560 L 560 LH
561 561 H
562 562 H
563 563 L
564 564 L
565
565 L
566 567
S564
585 175 275
MONOPODS, With WRIST STRAPS, SOFT GRIPS,
CHARCOAL FINISH
Mono Loisir w/3 sections, leg diam. 5/8"
$ 49.95
Mono Weekend w/2 sections, leg diam. 3/4"
44.95
Same, w/handle, also usable as walking stick, no grip,
leg diam. 3/4"
44.95
Mono Weekend B w/3 sections, leg diam. 3/4"
49.95
Same, w/handle, also usable as walking stick, no grip,
leg diam. 3/4"
49.95
Mono Weekend Luxe w/4 sections, leg diam. 3/4"
59.95
Same, w/handle, also usable as walking stick, no grip.
leg diam. 3/4"
59.95
Mono Sport w/3 sections, leg diam. 7/8"
49.95
Same, w/handle, also usable as walking stick, no grip,
leg diam. 7/8"
49.95
Mono Sport Luxe w/4 sections, leg diam. 7/8"
59.95
Same, w/handle, also usable as walking stick, no grip,
leg diam. 7/8" Mono Reporter w/4 sections, leg diam. 1"
59.95 69.95
Mono Reporter Luxe: 563 w/5 sections for tall people,
leg diam. 1"
89.95
Mono Studex w/4 sections, leg diam. 1-1/4"
79.95
Mono Studex Luxe: 564 w/5 sections for tall people,
leg diam. 1-1/4"
99.95
Mono Studex Super 564 w/swivel head, chest & shoulder support,
leg diam. 1-1/4"
119.95
Mono Studex Super Luxe: 565 w/5 sections for tall people,
leg diam. 1-1/4"
139.95
Mini Mono Studex w/6 sections, leg diam. 1-1/4"
89.95
Mini Mono Studex Super: 566 w/swivel head,
chest & shoulder support, leg diam. 1-1/4"
129.95
Safari Mono Studex, w/reversed leg, olive green, no grip,
leg diam. 1-1/4"
89.95
Side tilt attachment for more than 90°
49.95
Ball 1for more than 90" tilts, 360° pans for 560. 561,562
59.95
Ball 2for more than 90 tilts, 360' pans for
563. 564. 565. 566, 567
79.95
MULTIPOD
558
Gitzopod foldable chest-shoulder-knee-table-bi-mono-pod
w/swivel head, chest and shoulder support,
neck and carrying straps
$ 149.95
te
es
SO
··
an
565 566
567 S564
· · elte
558
564LM 'ststfl 566M ictia181111811811.1. 557 « tit 7680 ..timmul 555 tere.
568 520 521
522 5228 523 PM 523 MM 523 GM F88 582
ATTACHMENTS For CAMERAS Car and all-purpose attachment Wall support 15", turnable Same, extensible 24" - 40", not turnable
Same as 520, but stronger 19", not turnable Same as 522, adjustable Simple tilt head, 2small platforms Simple tilt head, 1small - 1large platform Simple tilt head, 2large platforms Accessory Triangle Bag, attaches to all tripods Accessory Tray, for Super Pro Tele Studex, Monocolumn
5 99.95 79.95 99.95
59.95 79.95 29.95 29.95 29.95 39.95 39.95
E 01 E 106 E 101
E 206
E 201 E 210 E 304 E 301 E 405 E 505 E 500
SOFT HEAVY DUTY CASES For TRIPODS And HEADS, With SHOULDER STRAP, BLACK For Weekend/Luxe, Cremaillere 0/Luxe For Total Luxe, Weekend Compact For Sport/Luxe, Cremaillere 1/Luxe
For Reporter Mode, Cremaillere 2Compact
For Reporter/Luxe, Cremaillere 2/Luxe For Reporter Industry, Cremaillere 2 Industry/Luxe For Studex Compact/Luxe. Cremaillere 3Compact/Luxe For Studex, Cremaillere 3 For Super Pro Studex Compact/Luxe For Tele Studex Compact/Luxe For Super Pro Tele Studex Giant/Luxe
$ 29.95 29.95 29.95
39.95
39.95 39.95 49.95 49.95 59.95 59.95 59.95
EH 304
EH 405
EH 400 EH 505 EH 500
HARD FIBER CASES For TRIPODS And HEADS, With HANDGRIP, BLACK
For Studex/Cremaillere 3Compact Luxe, Lightstands, 25-30" x8-1/2" For Super Pro Studex Compact/Luxe, Studex/Crem. 3, 30-40" x8-1/2" For Super Pro Studex Giant/Luxe. 40-50" x8-1/2" For Tele Studex Compact/Luxe, 30-40" x10" For Tele Studex Giant/Luxe, 40-50" x10"
$84.00
86.75 88.00 94.50 96.25
MICROPHONE FISHPOLES/LIGHTBOOMS, With SOFT GRIPS,
HOLES For CORD, 3/8" - 1/4" SCREW,
3/8" - 5/8" ADAPTOR, CHARCOAL FINISH
555
2Sections, range 2-1/2 - 4-1/2 It, weighs 7/8 lb., supports 3lbs. 5 59.95
556
3Sections, range 2-1/2 - 6-1/2 ft., weighs 1lb., supports 3lbs
79.95
557
4Sections. range 2-1/2 - 9ft.,
weighs 1-1/2 lbs., supports 1-1/2 lbs
99.95
7680 564 LM 566 M 559
556 "
6Sections, range 2-1/2 - 12 ft., weighs 2-1/2 lbs., supports 1-1/2 lbs 5Sections. range 1-1/2 - 7ft., fits suitcases, etc.. weighs 1-1/4 lbs., supports 3lbs 6Sections, range 1-1/4 - 4-1/2 ft., fits briefcases, weighs 1-1, 2lbs., supports 3lbs Clamp adaptor to fix fishpole/lightboom to tripods, heads, lightstands
119.95 109.95 109.95
39.95
105/3 105/4
EXTRA SOLID LIGHTSTANDS With STRONG BRACES. 5/8" PIN
REVERSIBLE 3/8" - 1/4" SCREW, WHEEL, CHARCOAL FINISH
Giant Lightstand w, 3section column,
3-1/2 lbs., range 3-10 ft
$99.95
Compact Lightstand w/4 section column,
3-1/2 lbs.. range 2-1/2 - 8-1/2 ft
99.95
542 544
546 548
542L 542E 547
FOLD-AWAY COPY And CLOSE-UP STAND Reprogilux fold-away copy and close-up steno w spirit level Macro stage 12" x15". transparent w/adjustab.e 2section column
Bispot Lfolding arms for Reprogilux w/copylights to 500 Watt Bispot Efolding arms for Reprogilux w/shoes for
electronic flash Complete set of Reprogilux, Macro Stage and Bispot L
Complete set of Reprogilux. Macro Stage and Bispot E Clamp for Bispot 546, 548, attaches to tables, shelves, fences. etc
$ 169.95
49.95 69.95
59.95 269.95 259.95
49.95
588
589
65
66 67 526 529 595
PROJECTION STANDS With 4LEGS, DIAMETER 1-1/2", PLATFORMS, For PROJECTORS To 250 Lbs.
Quadn pod w/2 leg sections. range 40-59
(specify, and add platform)
$399.95
Ouadripod w/3 leg sections, range 27-67"
(specify, and add platform)
449.95
13 x16" medium platform, attaches to Quadripods,
tripods, dollies 16 x26" large platform, attaches to Ouadripods, tripods, dollies...
59.95 79.95
20 x36" giant platform, attaches to Ouadripods, tripods, dollies 99.95
Cremaillere gearlift column 18", for 588 or 589
189.95
Cremaillere gearlitt column 32". for 588 or 589
299.95
Dolly with 4 5" wheels for Ouadripod
POR
VL -46
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GRAFLEX/SUBSEA CORP.
1030 West 15th Street Riviera Beach, FL 33404 (305) 844-8937 Telex 52710 GRAFSUB
VIDEOLUX 1000 Watt A professional quality videolight designed to be both versatile and highly efficient. The Videolux comes complete with bulb mounting bracketry and barn doors. An optional shoe mount is available for mounting your Videolux directly on your video camera. For those who require economy, the Videolux 1000 ( Cat. #3302) provides 1000 watts of light. It is built with high quality. Replacement bulbs are standard over-the-counter.
VIDEO CAMERA LIGHT
HAND-HELD
MOUNTED ON LIGHTSTAND
MOUNTED WITH VIDEO CAMERA ON A STANDARD TRIPOD
MOUNTED DIRECTLY ON CAMERA
Cat. #3302
SPECIFICATIONS Standard Replacement Bulb
Videolux 1000
Yes
Watt Output
1000
Color Temperature ( 0K) Safety Glass Barndoors
3400° Yes Yes
Candle Power ( Lumens)
Zoom
Built- In Fan
33,000 Yes No
Removeable Handle
Yes
Camera Bracket Included
Yes
Maximum Continual Use
10 Min.
Price
$ 75.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-47
THE GREAT AMERICAN MARKET
826 N. Cole Avenue Hollywood, CA 90038 (2 13) 461-0200 TWX 910-494-1 233
LIGHTING
STIK-UP KIT
STIK -UP
·Compact single source luminaire ·Small, lightweight · 100 watts, 3000 Kelvin ·Mounts in any position
Stik-up is asmall, durable incandescent luminaire. It weighs only 9oz. with its nine foot cord. Ultra light wire frame construction allows you to mount it where you need it -- in any position by almost any means. Tape it to astand, camera dolly, scenery, furniture. Hang it by picture wire. Stick it up with gaffer tape, masking tape, an alligator clip, even a clothespin! Convenient snap-on extension arms and clips allow you to use color filters, correction filters or diffusion material. And you can take it anywhere, tucked into your briefcase or utility bag.
Stik-up is ideal for television, film and still photography. Its 100 watt, 3000° Kelvin light source makes it an ideal miniature fill light. It creates the subtle reflection of dash lights in acar, the glow of atable lamp or candle, the ambience of adistant skyline. When you're in atight spot, Stik-up can solve your problem. Its the ultimate trick for your bag of
tricks, for better lighting made easier.
STIK -UP KIT
The ready- to- go Stik-up Kit contains three heads, three sets of extension arms, six clips and three lamps. It is available in either a re- usable carton or an Excalibur custom case.
TECHNICAL DATA ·Dimensions: 3" x3" x4"Ht ·Weight: 9oz. with power cord · Housing: Wire frame and steel ·Reflector: Diffused aluminum · Lamp: 0100 CL/DC 120 V ·Power Cord: 9' flat BB / B, molded plastic U- ground plug
ORDERING STIK-UP 2600 Stik-up Kit: Three heads and accessories 2602 Stik-up Kit: In Excalibur custom case 2610 Stik-up head 2620 Extension arms ( set of two) 2622 Clips ( set of two) 2624 Mounting block 2020 Lamp 2150 Case for three heads and accessories
CAMRALITE
CAMRALITE
·Unique variable area reflector · Keeps constant color temperature ·Mounts on any film or video camera CamraLite is designed to mount on any film or video camera, in close proximity to the lens. It also accepts a5/8" stud for use on astand. Soft, yet efficient, it serves to lighten or erase the harsh effect of facial shadows in close-up work. Its reflection adds sparkle and life to the subject's eyes. CamraLite is light weight and easy to use. It will not overheat or jam if left on during long rehearsals.
HOW IT WORKS The rear wall of the CamraLite contains a unique variable area reflector, allowing the intensity of the light to be modulated without any fluctuation in the color temperature. As the distance between the subject and camera changes, aconstant 3200°K can be maintained by adjusting the reflector. No variation in exposure is required. The reflector is controlled by aconvenient shaft on the side of the fixture.
TECHNICAL DATA · Dimensions: 81 /2 "H x 11 1/2"W x61 /2 "D ·Length including yoke: 10 3 /4 " ·Weight: 21 /2 lbs. ·Control shaft: 14" long. May be attached to either side of fixture ·Cable and connector: 6" high temperature lead, U- ground male plug ·Control: Separate toggle switches for each lamp ·Lamps: 120V/600W BHC/DYS/DYV
120V/420W EKB 30V/250W DYG 220V/650W DYR
ORDERING CAMRALITE 2320 Complete CamraLite kit 2325 CamraLite head 2330 Four-way barndoor 2331 Scrim frame 2332 Gel frame 2340 Lamp: BHC/DYS/DYV
VL-48
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
THE GREAT AMERICAN
826 N. Cole Avenue Hollywood, CA 90038 (213) 461-0200 TVVX 910-494-1233
MARKET
PATTERNS
THE GREAT AMERICAN PATTERN
The Great American Pattern is acustom designed template for use in ellipsoidal spotlights. Made of high quality, durable stainless steel, it is tough enough to stand up under intense heat at the gate. Cut it with scissors to fit any pattern holder.
The Great American Pattern is photo etched in a4" x4%2" matte. The pattern area does not exceed 3" in diameter. An Adaptor, Cat. #400, is available for use in spotlights with larger pattern holders. The Adaptor is 5-1/8" x5-1/8".
The Great American Pattern-- for projections that range from bold showstoppers to subtle shadows. Special effects without special equipment, to add new dimensions to your production.
ADDITIONAL PATTERNS AVAILABLE FROM THE
GREAT AMERICAN PATTERN
257 CLOUD 9
328 WATER 3
224 CLOUD 1
270 FIREWORKS
290 CLOUD 14B
234 STARBURST
226 CLOUD 3
244 SUPER STARS
228 CLOUD 5
245 EVENING STAR
230 CLOUD 7
289 CLOUD 14A
267 FIRE
225 CLOUD 2
250 CRESCENT MOON
313 CLOUD 15
287 FIREWORKS B
227 CLOUD 4
231 REALISTIC STARS
229 CLOUD 6
326 WATER 1
256 CLOUD 8
286 FIREWORKS A 295 SMALL MOONS 288 FIREWORKS C 232 LARGE STARS 327 WATER 2 268 LIGHTING 306 EXPLOSION 266 SUNBURST 243 STAR BREAKUP 314 SM. EVENING STARS
CUTTING GUIDE PATTERN ARE
TV PATTERN
CUTTING GUIDES PATTERN AREA
PATTERN
358 STARRY NIGHT
360 COMET
356 SPARKLER
366 SUNSET
218 REALISTIC LEAVES
363 ROW OF TREES
362 PALM LEAVES
361 CANDLES
359 ENCORE
294 SUMMER UAVIS
215 BARE TREES
216 BARE BRANCHES
297 PALM TREES
217 JUNGLE LEAF
*ALL DESIGNS ARE COPYRIGHTED BY " THE GREAT AMERICAN MARKET"
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
220 DENSE FOLIAGE
VL-49
KAPCO MFG CO., INC.
1270 Jarvis Ave. Elk Grove Village, IL 60007 (312) 437-5900 ( 800) 323-8551
PORTABLE LIGHTS, CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES
LP3 L20
LK5
L20 K-Beam' Quartz Light*
·Complete with 100 watt lamp installed
· Rated at 100 watts, but the unique design of this 12 volt light
actually produces about 25% more light than a conventional 100 watt lamp.
·Convenient 5' cord with in- line switch and cigarette plug.
· Has a unique mounting bracket" that allows the L20 to swivel in any direction.
·Precision- engineered design reduces heat build-up. It remains
cool to handle; radiates minimal heat from face of lamp.
·Can be shoe mounted or attached to any standard 3/8" post.
·Patents Pending
L20
$ 89.95
LL5055 Last Light
·Rechargeable glass- halogen spotlight
·Comes with recharger, mounting bracket and 25,000 candlepower
GE lamp
·Throws a beam over 500' with up to 2-1/2 hours running time
· Built-in battery withstands severe discharge and temperature
changes
·Available in black, beige or red
LL5055
$ 39.95
LK3075 Knight Light
· Lighter than the Last Light · Lamp provides over 100,000 candlepower
·Convenient 6' heavy-duty cord with cigarette plug ·Available in black, beige or red
LK3075
$ 19.95
LP3 AC Power Module
This is the accessory power unit for the L20 K- Beam Quartz Light.
Enables you to operate the K- Beam from an AC outlet.
LP3
$ 59.95
L29 100 Watt Quartz Lamp
Replacement lamp for the L20 K- Beam Quartz Light
1.29
$ 25.95
M30 Deluxe Light Bracket*
This precision- engineered bracket weighs only eight ounces and can
be disassembled into three parts for easy, compact storage. The
bracket will hold video, still, and movie cameras on the base and
Kapco shooting lights or strobes on the 3/8" post. Also attaches to
any tripod. A must for hand-held work.
M30
$ 34.95
M22 Shoe Post
Positive " lock- down" mounting feature and apost that is notched at
the top. Use it with the K- Beam light or other 3/8" mounting
accessories.
M22
$ 12.96
M40 Shoe Adaptor
Designed for easy mounting on any stand or the deluxe M30 light
bracket. It has a standard shoe mount on top and fits our LB1 ( as
shown) Dual Light Bracket or any 3/8" light stand.
M40
$ 7.95
LB1 Dual Light Bracket
For that extra flexibility and convenience when needed, this bracket
will hold two K- Beam lights and can be mounted on alight stand or a
camera. Or mount one light and any additional accessory suited to a
3/8" post.
LB1
$ 13.95
LB2050 K-Beam Spotlight
An incandescent lamp with a heavy-duty cord with cigarette lighter
plug.
LB2050
$ 14.96
Special Purpose Item R37 DC Voltage Converter
Converts 12 volts DC to either 3, 6 or 9 volts for powering most
portable televisions, radios, calculators, toys, etc. Equipped with
universal adaptor plugs and polarity reversal switch. Can be used
with any Kapco pack.
R37
$8.95
ACCESSORIES
AL5010 Car charger cord
$19.95
A20 Accessory pouch
16.95
C23 8' plug cord
695
C24 12' Ext. cord
995
V10 4- pin DIN 6' power cord w/cigarette plug
11.95
V20 6' power cord bell w/cigarette plug
11.95
V30 7- pin DIN 6' power cord
11.95
V40 7- pin DIN 6' power cord w/cigarette plug
11.95
V50 6' power cord w/cigarette plug V60 6' power cord w/cigarette plug V70 6' power cord w/cigarette plug
11.95 11.95 18.95
V80 6' power cord w/cigarette plug
11.95
VL-50
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
klieg
32-32 48th Avenue Long Island City, NY 11101
(718) 786-7474
KEY AND BACK LIGHTS
3604 3606 3610
ALL UNITS PROVIDED WITH 39 INCH LEADS, C- CLAMP,
SAFETY CABLE AND CONNECTOR
CATALOG NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
PRICE
3604 23604 13604
3606 23606 13606
3608 23608 13608
4-1/2" 750W quartz Fresnel, slide focus 4way Barndoor Color/Diffuser Frame
$ 250.00 65.00 10.00
QUARTZ LAMP FOR 3604: BWM 750W 3200°K 200 hrs.
6-3/8" 750W Quartz Fresnel 4way Barndoor Color/Diffuser Frame
83.00
260.00 75.00 13.00
QUARTZ LAMPS FOR 3606: EHC 500W 3200°K 500 hrs. EHF 750W 3200°K 300 hrs.
8" 1000W Quartz Fresnel 4way Barndoor Color/Diffuser Frame
QUARTZ LAMPS FOR 3608: CYV 1000W 3200°K 200 hrs. CXZ 1500W 3200°K 325 hrs.
57.00 63.00
370.00 100.00
13.00
97.00 133.00
3609 23609 13609
3610 23610 13610
8" 1000W Quartz Fresnel 4way Barndoor Color/Diffuser Frame
QUARTZ LAMP FOR 3609: FER 1000W 3200°K 500 hrs.
10" 2000W Quartz Fresnel 4way Barndoor Color/Diffuser Frame
QUARTZ LAMP FOR 3610: CYV 1000W 3200°K 200 hrs. CXZ 1500W 3200°K 325 hrs. CYX 2000W 3200°K 250 hrs.
370.00 100.00
13.00
69.00
510.00 130.00
25.00
97.00 133.00 133.00
NOTES: Oval Beam.,7. 8" Fresnels available on Special Order Pole- operated Fresnels available on Special Order P.O.A. -- Price On Application
ADD SUFFIX TO CATALOG NUMBER TO SPECIFY PROPER CONNECTOR
--UG Parallel blade U- ground, U.L. listed --955G 3pole pin connector, U.L. listed --TLG 3pole twistlock, U.L. listed
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-51
kliegl
32-32 48th Avenue
Long Island City, NY 11101 (718) 786-7474
BASE, FILL AND SET LIGHTS
3451 1000SE
ALL UNITS PROVIDED WITH 39 INCH LEADS, C- CLAMP, SAFETY CABLE AND CONNECTOR
CATALOG NUMBER
3451 3452 13451 13452
DESCRIPTION
16" 1000W Quartz Scoop 16" 1000W Focusing Quartz Scoop Color/Diffuser Frame Color/Diffuser Frame
QUARTZ LAMPS FOR 3451/3452: FDN 500W 3200°K 400 hrs. frosted EMD 750W 3200°K 400 hrs. frosted FHM 1000W 3200°K 300 hrs. frosted
FWM 650W 3200°K 400 hrs. Watt Miser
1000SE
1000W Quartz Set Light
QUARTZ LAMPS FOR 1000SE: FDN 500W 3200°K 400 hrs. frosted EMD 750W 3200°K 400 hrs. frosted FHM 1000W 3200°K 300 hrs. frosted FWM 650W 3200°K 400 hrs. Watt Miser
6912 16912
2000W Soft Light Color/Diffuser Frame
6914 16914
QUARTZ LAMPS FOR 6912: FHM 1000W 3200°K 300 hrs. frosted FWM 650W 3200°K 400 hrs. Watt Miser
3000W Soft Light Color/Diffuser Frame
QUARTZ LAMPS FOR 6914: FGT 1500W 3200°K 400 hrs. frosted
FDB 1500W 3200°K 400 hrs. clear
DIFFUSION MATERIALS
CATALOG
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
TSP-2
Tough Spun. Replaces spun glass.
Ro112' x50'
TR F-2
Tough Frost Diffusion Roll 2' x50'
TS K-2
Tough Silk. Same diffusion qualities
as real silk. Roll 2' x50'
835
Spun glass. Roll 3' x12'
NOTE: Softlights require 2lamps each.
PRICE $260.00
280.00 40.00 40.00
34.00 46.00 39.00 43.00
200.00
34.00 46.00 39.00 43.00 850.00 50.00
39.00 43.00 860.00 50.00
66.00 66.00
PRICE
$130.00 130.00
130.00 30.00
ADD SUFFIX TO CATALOG NUMBER TO SPECIFY PROPER CONNECTOR
-- UG Parallel blade U-ground, U.L. listed --955G 3pole pin connector, U.L. listed --TLG 3pole twistlock, U.L. listed
VL-52
6914
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
klieg
32-32 48th Avenue Long Island City, NY 11101 (718) 786-7474
DIMMER CONTROLS
Standard Systems (Include Dimmer Bank, Control Console and Control Cable)
SYSTEM #
DESCRIPTION
DIMMER BANK er
CONTROL CONSOLE 1-4
PRICE
9000/TLG
9 -- 2.4 KW Dimmers, Twistlock Receptacles
8926/TLG
7890
$4900.00
9000/955G
9 -- 2.4 KW Dimmers, Pin Connector Receptacles
8926/955G
7890
$4900.00
9000/UG
9 -- 24 KW Dimmers, U- Ground Receptacles
8926 UG
7890
$4900.00
9000/S
9 -- 2.4 KW Dimmers, Terminal Strip Output
8926/S
7890
$4400.00
8000/955G
9 -- 60 KW Dimmers, Pin Connector Receptacles
8960/955G
7890 $ 9300.00
8000/S
9 -- 6.0 KW Dimmers, Terminal Strip Output
NOTE: A #7892/32 Control Cable is furnished with each system.
Control Cables
8960 S
7890
$8200.00
Catalog #7892
Catalog #7893/3
Console to Dimmer Bank Control Cable
32' (10M) long with AMP connectors
Console to Console Master/Slave Cable
3'11M) long with AMP connectors
Other Control Cable lengths of 50, 75, 100, 200 and 250 ft. also available.
Catalog #7895
Cable to Cable Coupler 1' (. 3M) long with AMP connectors
DIMMER BANK # 8926/955G
CONTROL CONSOLE 47890 Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-53
kliegl 32-32 48th Avenue Long Island City, NY 11101 (718) 786-7474
LIGHTING
SIX STUDIO LIGHTING PACKAGES
These packages have been designed and engineered by Kliegl to cover abroad spectrum of studio lighting applications as they apply to most commercial, educational, and industrial users. Each package has been carefully laid out to ensure that the compliment of lighting fixtures, distribution equipment and the lighting control system will prove adequate in the area for which it is designed.
LIGHTING FIXTURES DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
LIGHTING FIXTURES-- A varying complement of Key, Back, Base, Fill and Set lights, including their accessories, are provided in every package. Pattern Projectors and special Cyc lighting instruments are included in certain packages. All fixtures are provided with 39" leads, C- clamp, safety cable and pin connector.
DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT -- Wireway connector strips and wall outlet boxes are provided in various quantities for each package in order to ensure proper power distribution throughout the specified studio. Cyc drop boxes are also used in the three larger packages for powering the cyc lighting units.
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM --An SCR multiplexed digital dimming system utilizing the " dimmer- per- circuit" concept has been designed for each of the studio packages. Each system consists of an SCR digital dimmer rack ( or pack) and an ENTERTAINER portable, microprocessor- based control console. The digital dimming system uses bi-directional, multiplexed data streams between the console and the dimmer rack. A single 4 conductor, shielded cable replaces the large multi-conductor control cables required in older systems. The accuracy of the system is unaffected by electrical noise, temperature or aging of the components.
In addition to the above, each of the studio packages contains astudio layout and asystem riser ( flow) diagram. The packages are listed as follows:
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
CATALOG NUMBER
851520 851825 852030 853040 853650 854060
PACKAGE DESCRIPTION
PRICE
15' x20' ( 300 sq. ft.)
18' x25' ( 450 sq. ft.) 20' x30' ( 600 sq. ft. )
30' x40' ( 1200 sq. ft.)
36' x50' ( 1800 sq. ft.) 40' x60' ( 2400 sq. ft.)
$ 26,600.00
37,700.00 51,900.00
86,200.00
124,200.00 166,200.00
VL-54
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
kliegi 32-32 48th Avenue Long Island City, NY 11101 (718) 786-7474
LIGHTING KITS
Klieglkit 4Q-TV
Portable Kit for 150 Sq. Ft. Area
Klieglkit 5Q-TV
Portable Kit for 225 Sq. Ft. Area
The KLIEG LKIT 4Q- TV and 5Q- TV provide the ideal solution to the lighting requirements encountered in the remote TV and film location applications of today. In addition to portability, these kits contain the types of lighting fixtures the lighting professional needs in equipping an O.B. van for Electronic News Gathering.
The two kits are identical except for the inclusion of an additional SPOT head, with accessories, in the 5Q- TV kit. The carrying cases for either kit are the same. This allows one to start with a4Q- TV kit and later add an additional SPOT or FLOOD head, with accessories, as required.
Contents of 4Q-TV
2 -- # 1720-UG 1000W Focusing SPOTS with Switch 10' Cord
2 -- # 11720 2 -- #21720 2 -- FBY 2 -- # 1750-UG
2 -- # 11752
Diffuser Frames 4-Way Barn Doors
1000W Quartz Lamps 1000W FLOODS with Switch, 20' Cord Et Integral 4-Way Barn Doors
Diffuser Frames
2 -- FHM
1000W Quartz Lamps
4 -- # 14360
Folding Stands
2 -- #25E16/3UG Extension Cables, 25'
1 -- # 1700
Carrying Case
PRICE
$ 1550.00
Contents of 5Q-TV
3 -- # 1720-UG 1000W Focusing SPOTS with Switch, 10' Cord
3 -- # 11720
Diffuser Frames
3 -- #21720
4-Way Barn Doors
3 -- FBY
1000W Quartz Lamps
2 -- # 1750-UG 1000W FLOODS with Switch, 20' Cord Er Integral
4-Way Barn Doors
2 -- # 11752
Diffuser Frames
2 -- FHM
1000W Quartz Lamps
5 -- # 14360
Folding Stands
3 -- 25E16/3UG Extension Cables, 25'
1 -- # 1700
Carrying Case
PRICE
$ 1960.00
4Q- TV Power Requirements: 120V AC/DC at 33.3 Amps. Weight: 64 lbs. 50- TV Power Requirements: 120V AC/DC at 41.66 Amps. Weight: 75 lbs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-55
Profi Mini Light for Video ENG and TV
Features of the Kobold Profi Mini system:
-- Super Light Mini Fixture -- Protective tempered glass shield at all time -- Various adaptors for quick and easy mounting of fixture
on camera -- Easy lamp replacement: Just remove head of fixture -- Fast conversion from or to 5600K -- Spot to flood focussing: Ratio 1:3 -- Lamp socket G 6.35 or 2pin base G 5.3 -- Extra reflector for super-spot -- Established cooling system
Maximum, even light output
Kobold Design
Kobold Quality
Single fixtures:
Profi Mini 120 for mains operated fixtures 120V, 250-300W, 2- pin mains cord 13 feet ( 4m). handgrip, camera shoe and adapter AD 16 B ( 5/8" bushing)
Profi Mini 30/120 for battery and mains operated fixtures with battery cord 6feet (1.8m), MIL or Cannon plug. for 30V battery. For mains operating ad extension cable 13ft. (4m) with 2- pin plug, handgrip, camera shoe and adapter AD 16 B (5/8" bushing)
Profi Mini 12 for battery operated fixtures with battery cord 6ft. ( 1.8m), MIL or Cannon plug, handgrip, camera shoe and adapter AD 16 B.
VL-56
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Profi Mini Kit 30/120
for battery and mains operated fixtures:
Profimini 120 Profitnini 30 Extension cable
Adapter/bushing Dicroic filter Diffusion filter Reflex plate Handgnp Alustands Table clamp Transport case
Mini 120
2x
Mini 30
lx
CAN MAINS
or
1 x
CAN MIL
AD 16 B
3x
DIC Mini h
3x
DIF Mini h
lx
REF Mini h
lx
HG KS
2x
TR Mini
2x
TC 1
2x
MK 30/120
lx
Transport case cbrnensions 20.5' .x15 T.x4 Weight: 135 lbs
Profi Mini Kit 12
for battery operated fixtures
Profi Mini 12 Power belt in leather case Charger 12V Handgrip Adapter/bushing
Camera shoe Dicroic filter
Transport case
Mini 12
lx
G/BA 12/4
lx
LA 12
lx
HG KS
lx
AD 16 B
lx
CS 250
lx
DIC Mini h
lx
MK 12
lx
Transpon case dimensions 16.5"x13.0"x4.S" Weight. 5.5 lbs
It is very easy to exchange the standard reflector for the superspot. This super-spot gives you 770 footcandle at 10 feet distan-
ce.
New unique feature:
The use of a special reflex leaf' enables you to have both
key and bounce light at the sa-
me time without the danger of
blinding. This is particulary useful and practical when working in confined areas. It makes the profi mini the most versatile unit
on the market.
To hold a fixture, even the Profi Mini, for a longer time, is tiring. Therefor Kobold offers a telescopic support in leather quive .
PO Box T Manchester. Maryland 21102 ! 301 239-6839 PO Box 556 Wheatley Heights New York I1798 15161242-72 4 1
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-57
kObOlid SUN LIGHT from your battery- belt or battery-pack
kabokl
Reporterlight 200/CID
-- NEW DAYLIGHT UNIT with 200 W CID lamp
-- NEW ELECTRONIC SQUARE WAVE BALLAST
-- NEW DESIGN for Reporterlight CID Belt Version and KOBOLD Battery Pack System
Kobold has been selling successfully now its Reporterlight Type 200 EL for 8years. Today, there is hardly aTV- network that does not use this Reporterlight for its dayly news gathering. Based on this long experience and thanks to the progress in the development of new electronic components, Kobold has developed a new concept. This new concept offers the following distinct features: -- 20% less weight for lamphead and ballast. -- 28% higher efficiency and consequently a
prolonged operation time viz. 29 min. for 4Ah version and 50 min. for the 7Ah version, when fully charged. -- Dimming up to 50% of rated wattage possible. -- Higher reliability and easier servicing for both lamphead and electronic ballast. The flat design of the electronic ballast enables to attach it to the battery belt. New also is Kobolds car adaptor, to be used with a 12 volt car battery. This adaptor features a special control that guarantees aconstant light output at all time during operation. For mains operation. Kobold offers a new electronic ballast that operates independantly from the battery electronics.
VL-58
Prices arid Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LAMPHEAD DLf 200 CID
-- Housing made of heat resistant GRP material. -- Easy to handle spot to flood focus. -- Coiled power cord with 7-pin amphenol plug. -- Instant, hot re-strike. -- Optimal color temperature after only 20 sec. Maximal
output.
light
Electronic ballast BE 201
-- Square wave ballast with new design. -- Minimum losses and therefor maximum efficiency -- Dimming up to SO% of rated wattage.
-- 2- pin connector for battery
-- 7- pin connector for lamphead
-- Reduced dimensions, light weight.
-- Only one printed circuit board.
Easy to service: replacement of panted circuit board by only removing 6screws and 3connectors.
We also offer our Reporterlight in 3versions:
I. If you have already a30 volt battery belt. Kobold offers a supplementary Kit:
Lamphead 4- leaf barndoor Metal halide lamp Battery-electronic Connection cable electronic/belt Carrying strap Diffusion filter
Conversion filter Transport case
DLf 200 CID ST 1020 CID 200 BE 201
DLf 203 CAN DLf 082 DLf 012 S DLf 017 S DLf 207
2. Reporterlight 200 CID-GB: The transport case DLf 205 has an additional battery belt.
space for a
3. Reporterlight 200 CID- KB:
In this Kit, the battery belt is replaced by the battery pack
BA- 30 EL/4 resp. BA- 30 EL/7. These packs are to be connected to the battery electronics BE 201 by means cf Kobolds ,, rapid action .'interlocking system.
The complete unit comprises:
Lamphead 4-leaf barndoor Metal halide lamp Battery-electronic NC-battery
Carrying strap Charger Diffusion filter Conversion filter Transport case
DLf 200 CID ST 1023 CID 200 BE 201 K BA- 30 EL/4 resp.
BA- 30 EL/7 DLf 082 LA- 12/30 DLf 012 S
DLf 017 S DLf 206
»bold
PO Box T Manchester Maroano 2102
13n 239-6839
PO Box 556 Wheatley Hefghts r\lew York 11798 l'61 242-7241
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-59
kolsta LIGHTING
SPECIFICATION
DLf 020 S Head with ignitor circuit, 4leaf barndoor with filter holder, time counter, yoke with 3/8 - thread
and 11/8" stud
DLf 021 U Power supply with relay system
120
V, 60 Hz and 10 ft.
power cord
DLf 022 30 ft. extension cable
DLf 023 575 W HMI lamp
DLf 024
Heavy duty aluminum transport case for head, cable and accessories
DLf 025
Heavy duty aluminum transport case for power supply
ACCESSORIES
A 145
Spare UV safety glass, in pouch
DLf 026
Diffusion filter in pouch
DLf 027
Conversion filter 3200" K in pouch
TR 512
Aluminum stand: 45/126 11/8" bushing
TR 513
Brake castor set for above
TR 514
Extension leg/boom attachment for TR 512 ··
DLf 575 S
575 W HMI Unit
VL-60
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Transport case dimensions:
lighting unit, accessories 19.3" x 15.0" x9.8"
ballast Weight:
13.5" x17.7" x7.1"
lighting unit and barndoor
15.5 lbs
cable 30 ft.
5.5 lbs
case for above
12.2 lbs
ballast case for above
total weight:
16.0 lbs 6.6 lbs
55.8 lbs
8.7"
-12.6''
1>,
Performance Data: Lamp type. HMI 575 W Daylight color temperature: 5600° K Luminous flux: 49.000 Im Luminous efficiency: 85 Im/W Average life: 750 hours Power consumption: 7,0 A
Measuring distance: Flood: Spot: Focal ratio:
15 ft 125 fc 260 fc 1 2
3000 ·· 2000 . 1000 ·
Lux
r ·
30
20
10
S, INC. DISTRIBUTOR OF
uGhTING
PO Box 7 Manchester Maryland 21102
13011 239-6839
PO Box 556 Wheatley Heights New York 11798 ( 5161 242-7241
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
300 200 m. 100
10
2;
30
FOOT CANDU:
VL-61
LIGHTING
DLf 1200 S
1200 W HMI Unit
SPECIFICATION
DLf 030 S Head with ignitor circuit, 4leaf barndoor with filter holder, time counter, yoke with 3/8" thread and 11/8" stud
DLf 031 U Power supply with relay system
120
V, 60 Hz and 10 ft.
power cord
DLf 032 30 ft extension cable
DLf 033 1200 W HMI lamp
DLf 034
Heavy duty aluminum transport case for head, cable and accessories
DLf 035
Heavy duty aluminum transport case for power supply
ACCESSORIES
C 140
Spare UV safety glass, in pouch
DLf 047
Diffusion filter, in pouch
DLf 048
Conversion filter 3200' )K, in pouch
TA 25
Steel stand: 47/130, 11/8" bushing
TA 513
Brake castor set for above
TA 514
Extension leg/boom attachment for IR 25
TA 36
Telescope: 47/86.5" for middle piece of TA 25
VL-62
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
4ai
c.;
13.4"
4
17.7"
Transport case dimensions
I.ghting unit, accessories ballast
204 177
12.2" --
x 18 9- x 13 4. x 10 6- x 10 2-
Weight
lighting unit and barriduur cable 30 ft case for above
27.7 lbs 5.5 lbs
16.6 lbs
ballast case for above
total weight:
42.0 lbs 8.8 lbs
100.6 lbs
4
15.7" -
Performance Data:
Lamp type: HMI 1200 W Daylight color temperature: 5600 ° K Luminous flux: 110.0001m Luminous efficiency: 92 Im/W Average life: 750 hours Power consumption: 13 A
Measuring distance: Flood. Spot: Focal ratio
15 ft 316 fc 762 fc 1 : 2.5
7500 · 5000 rr 2500 ·
LUX
r
r
30
20
10
y 1000 /50
y 500 250
v
10
20
30
F001 CANDLE
INC .
haffii1CeS DISTRIBUTOR OF
uGml7NG
PO Box r Manchester Maryland 21102
13011 239 - 6839
PO Box 556 Wheatley Heights. New York 11798 15161 242 Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-63
LIGHTING
SPECIFICATION
DLf 040 S Head with ignitor circuit, 4leaf barndoor with filter holder, time counter, yoke with 3/8" thread and 11/8" stud
DLf 041 U Power supply with relay system
120
V, 60 Hz and 10 ft.
power cord
DLf 042 30 ft. extension cable
DLf 043 2500 W HMI lamp
DLf 044
Heavy duty aluminum transport case for head, cable and accessories
DLf 045
Heavy duty aluminum transport case for power supply
DLf 2500 S
2500 W HMI Unit
ACCESSORIES
C 150
Spare UV safety glass, in pouch
DLf 057 Diffusion filter, in pouch
DLf 058
Conversion filter 3200 ° K, in pouch
TR 30
Aluminum stand 59/157", 11/8" bushing
TR 36
Telescope: 47/86.5" for middle piece of TR 30 and TR 35
TR 104
Brake castor set for above
VL-64
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
'FT
tr)
cci
14.5"
Transport case dimensions
lighting, accessories ballast
22.8" x24.0" x16.1" 26.4" x13.0" x12.2"
Weight:
lighting unit and barndoor cable 30 ft. case for above
42.2 lbs 8.9 lbs
26.6 lbs
ballast case for above
total weight
86.0 lbs 24.0 lbs
187 7 lbs
111
23.6"
Performance Data:
Lamp type: HMI 2500 W Daylight color temperature: 5600° K Luminous flux: 240.000 Im Luminous efficiency: 96 Im/W Average life: 500 hours Power consumption: 25 A
Measuring distance: Flood: Spot: Focal ratio:
15 ft. 604 fc 1673 fc 1: 2.75
20 0004
, + +·
r. r·
ii
15.000
t 10.000
, 1
I. 2000 1100 1000
e. 500
..".--.-7-
LUX
30
20
10
0
10
20
30
FOOT omma
INC.
DISTRIBUTOR OF »
beg
PO Box T
Manchester Maryland 21102
13011239-6839
PO Box 556 Wheatley Helghts New York 11798 15161242-7241
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-65
LIGHTING
SPECIFICATION
DLf 050 S Head with ignitor circuit, 4leaf barndoor with filter holder, time counter, yoke with 3/8" thread and 11/8" stud
DLf 051 U Power supply with relay system
120
V, 60 Hz and 10 ft.
power cord
DLf 052 30 ft. extension cable
DLf 053 4000 W HMI lamp
DLf 054
Heavy duty aluminum transport case for head, cable and accessories
DLf 055
Heavy duty aluminum transport case for power supply
DU 4000
4000 W HMI Unit
ACCESSORIES
C 150
Spare UV safety glass, in pouch
DLf 057 Diffusion filter, in pouch
DLf 058 Conversion filter 3200° K, in pouch
TR 30
Aluminum stand: 59/157", 11/8" bushing
TR 35
Steel crank- up stand: 53.5/98", 11/8" bushing
TR 104
Brake castor set for TR 30 and TR 35
TR 36
Telescope: 47/86.5" for middle piece of TR 30 and TR 35
VL-66
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
2204..84""
14.5"
Transport case dimensions:
lighting unit, accessories 22.8" x27.1" x 16.1"
ballast
30,7" x 13.0" x 12.2"
Weight -
lighting unit and barndoor cable 30 ft case for above
ballast case for above
total weight
51 1 lbs 89 lbs
289 lbs
131 0 lbs 31 0 lbs
250 9 lbs
Performance Data:
Lamp type: HMI 4000 W Daylight color temperature: 56000 K Luminous flux: 410.000 Im Luminous efficiency: 102 Im/W Average life: 500 hours Power consumption: 39 A
Measuring distance: Flood. Spot: Focal ratio-
15 ft. 836 fc 2137 fc 1: 2.55
20000. 15000· .0000. 5000
2000
1500
1000
...
SOO
LUX
30
20
10
·
v
0
10
20
30
FOOT CANDLE
INC.
DISTRIBUTOR OF klabieg
PO Box T Manchester Maryland 21102
13011 239-6839
PO Box 556 Wheatley 1-lefghts New York I798 15161 242-7241
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VI-67
LIGHTING
MINI 250 Kit 1
SPECIFICATION:
MINI 250
Keylight
TR- M INI
Aluminum stand 19/88", 5 8" stud
TC-1
Table clamp
HG -KS
Handgrip
AD- 16
Adapter with 5/8" bushing
MK -250/1
Transport case
3 x 2 x
1 x 1 x
1 x 1 x
MINI System
MINI 250
..Ultra- Light" Keylight: weight 1.1 lbs on inclusive 2- leaf barndoor and safety glass
Ideal for use as: -- camera- mounted keylight ruse camera- mount
adaptor CS 250) - hand held light ( use handgrip HG- KS) -- clamp light ( use adaptor AD- 16)
Because of the extended range of available dichroic reflector/multi-mirror lamps. the Mini 250 can be mains as well as battery operated. For mains operation. the Mini 250 takes a250 W. 120 V lamp, whereas for battery operated use 50 W. 75 W, 100 W, 12 V and a 250 W, 30 V lamps are available.
The lamp can be changed easely by removing the 2- leaf barndoor.
The safety glass can be easely replaced by adiffuse filter or adichroic daylight conversion filter.
Transport case dimensions: Weight:
20.5" x 15.7" x41" 13.5 lbs
ACCESSORIES:
SG- MINI
Spare safety glass, in pouch
DIF-MINI
Diffusion filter, in pouch
DIC-MINI
Dichroic conversion filter 5500° K, in pouch
UM- MINI
Reflex umbrella white dia 27,5"
U-AD- MINI Umbrella adaptor
BC- 250
Battery connecting cord
P-5
Super- clamp with 5/8" bushing and stud
P-43 R
Alligator clamp with 5/8" stud
VI-68
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MINI 250 Kit 3 portable light for prefessional use
SPECIFICATION:
MINI 250 P
Keylight with 2- leaf
barndoor. safety glass and voltage indicator
BA- 30
NiCad battery pack. 30 V. 7Ah. with electronic cut-off
TA- 30
Leather case with carrying strap
SG- MINI
Spare safety glass. in pouch
01F- MINI
Diffusion filter, in pouch
DIC-MINI
Dichroic conversion fines 5500° K. in pouch
HG- KS
Handgrip
MK- 30
Transport case
MINI 250 Kit 2
portable Kit
SPECIFICATION:
MINI 250
Keylight
BA- 12
NiCad battery belt; 12 V. 4Ah
TA- 12
Leather case with carrying strap for BA- 12
LA- 12
Charger; 120/12 V
HG- KS
Handgrip
MK- 250/2 Transport case
Transport case dimensions
Kit 2 16.5" x13" x4.5" Kit 3 16.3" x15" x4.7''
Potential lighting per charge
Charging time
Kit 2 Kit 3
Kit 2 Kit 3
Weight 12.0 lbs 30.0 lbs
by 100 W about 20 min by 250 W about 45 min 10-12 hrs 10-12 hrs
ACCESSORIES: ( Kit 3)
P-30/30
Hann held light. with 2 reflectors. "Spot/Soft". voltage indicator. filter holder with safety glass
and with 3/8" connector for stand. for lamps types: DXM
SG- 30 E
Spare safety glass. in pouch
DIC-30
Dichroic conversion filter 5500° K. in pouch
S, INC.
Itatier DISTRIBUTOR OF u 77
PO Box T
Manchester Maryland 21102
13011 239-6839
PO Box 556 Wheatley Heights New York II 798 (5161 242-7241
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-69
LIGHTING
ST 650
Reporter Light
Features
HOUSING made of heat- resistant GAP material; lockable pivoting bracket with 3/8" thread on bracket and 5/8" bushing; ball- bearing axial focusing system; smooth and non-stick operation at any operating temperature ;big rear- mounted control knob affording agood grip; 4- leaf barndoor, rotatable by 360° and featuring readjustable leaf clamping and insert for safety glass or filter. Optimum interior ventilation.
Electrical Design
Double insulated cables. 15 ft power cord with on/off switch located at approx. 5ft from housing, build -- in fuse designed for 650 W, 120 V, R 7shalogen lamps, type FAD.
ST 650
ST 226 ST 22',
DU 018 S ST 227
VL-70
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ST 1020 -DLf 012 S
SPECIFICATION ST 650 Kit 1
ST 650
3x 650 W Fill & Bounce Light
ST 1020 3x 4- Leaf barndoor
ST 262
3x Aluminum stand; 27/94, 5/8" stud
UM MINI lx Reflex umbrella, silk- white, round 27.5"
ST 227 Z lx Holder for reflex umbrella
P43 R
lx Alligator clamp with 5/8" stud
MK 650/1
Transport case
ACCESSORIES
DLf 019 S Safety glass in frame; in pouch
DLf 012 S Diffusion filter in frame; in pouch
DLf 018 S Dichroic conversion filter 5500 ° K in frame, in pouch
HG 10
Handgrip with 5/8" stud and 3/8" thread
ST 226
Reflex umbrella, white, round 35"
ST 222
Reflex umbrella, silver, round 41"
ST 227
Adaptor for ST- 222 and ST- 226
Lamp: FAD, 650 W/120 V
Distance (feet)
5 10 15 20
footcandle
spot
flood
1750
385
270
110
130
60
80
40
cti
Dimension
MK- 650/1 28.3" x15.0" x11.0"
Weight 42.0 lbs
koitiwee DISTRIBUTOR OF UGH TING
PO Box T
Manchester. Maryland 21102
13011239-6839
PO Box 556 Wheatley Heights. New Ycrk 11798 15161242-7241 Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-71
LIGHTING
DS 575 DS 575 A
575 W HMI Soft Light
This unit produces an ultra- soft light at acolour temperature of 5200° K.
The 575 HMI- lamp is placed in an opaline globe which is precisely located in a large parabolic reflector, producing a very diffuse and nearly uniform light pattern at 80°angle and amarginal degradation of approx.15c/o.
The broad lateral surfaces of the welded frame support the retaining bracket. There are 2versions viz. type DS 575 with abracket with 11/8" stud, for use on astand, and type DS 575 A being a pole operated unit to be suspended from the ceiling.
The insert of the unit houses the 575 HMI- lamp as well as the ignitor and the power supply cable. The lamp can easely be replaced by simple loosening the two screws at the rear side of the insert.
VL-72
SPECIFICATION
DS 575 DLS 060
Soft light head with ignitor circuit, bracket with 11/8" stud and protective grid.
DLf 021 U
Power supply with relay system,
120
V, 60 Hz and
10 ft power cord.
DLf 022
30 ft extension cable.
DLf 023
575 W HMI- lamp
DS 575 A DLS 060 A
DLf 021 U
DLf 022 DLf 023
Pole- operated Soft Light head with ignitor circuit, bracket with 11/8" stud and protective grid.
Power supply ;with relay
system, 110
V and 10 ft
power cord.
30 ft extension cable.
575 W HMI- lamp
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Electrical Design
Symmetrically designed ignitor delivering 50°/o of the starting voltage to either lamp base.
Power cut-off for operator protection when unit is open.
Ballast equipped with hum- free tight- core reactance coils.
Two- chamber ballast design, keeping coils and electrical circuit separate.
Easy access to ballast compenents by loosening 2screws and hinging down the front panel
Front panel of ballast features power switch, fuse, power cord, lamp cable connector and ON/OFF button.
Ballast is for 120 V, 60 Hz. Ballasts for 220 V or 245 V, 50 Hz available upon request.
Performance Data:
Lamp type: HMI 575 W Daylight color ternperatur distribution: 5200° K Luminous flux: 49.000 Lm Luminous efficiency. 85 Lm/W Average life: 750 hours Power consumption: 7,0 A
Efficiency: 56 fc Measuring distance: 15 ft
DLS 060/DLS 060 A: Reflector dia: Width of bracket: Height of bracket:
Ballast:
Dimension
25.5" 29.0" 20.0" 12.6" x8.7" x7.1"
Weight 41.0 lbs
16.0 lbs
INC.
kcitieree DiSTRfBUTOR OF
PO Box T Manchester Maryland 21102
13011 239-6839
PO Box 556 Wheatley Heights New York 11798 15161242-72 4 1
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VI-73
LIGHTING
DL 1200 PAR
The 1200 Watt Brite Beam Lamp is the latest development in arc discharge light sources.
Kobolds DL 1200 PAR fixture for this lamp is the latest addition to its line of daylight fixtures. This unit is especially suitable for use in Studios, Theatres and for Television ( STTV-market).
Because of the use different lenses, the performance of the DL 1200 PAR exceeds that of a regular 1200 Watt fresnel unit.
Four Lens System Beam Specifications:
VNSP NSP
MF WF
Lens
Very narrow spot Narrow spot Medium flood Wide flood
Maximum Intensity
(cd)
1.8 x106 1.3 x106 6.0 x10 5 1.7 x105
Total Beam Angle ( 50 0/0)
(V xH)
7° x10° ex 11° 10° x22° 19 0 x54°
Performance Data:
Average Rated Life
1000 hrs
Physical
Base Type Arc Length Maximum Overall Length Bulb Diameter Reflector Coating Bulb Type
G38 Bi Post 13 mm (. 51 in.)
6.89 in 8 1 in
Dichroic
PAR 64
SPECIFICATION
DLf 030 PAR
Head with ignitor circuit, 4leaf barndoor with filter holder, time counter, yoke with 3/8" thread and 11/8" stud
DLf 031 U
Power supply with relay system
120
V, 60 Hz and 10 ft.
power cord
DLf 032
30 ft. extension cable
DLf 034 PAR Heavy duty aluminum transport case for head, cable and accessories
DLf 035
Heavy duty aluminum transport case for power supply
VL-74
ACCESSORIES
DLf 047
Diffusion filter, in pouch
DLf 048
Conversion filter 3200° K, in pouch
IR 25
Steel stand: 47/130", 11/8" bushing
IR 513
Brake castor set for above
TA 514
Extension leg/boom attachment for IR 25
TA 36
Telescope: 47/86.5" for middle piece of TR 25
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Spot 7° / 10°
Flood 54°
Fresnel Unit 2500 W
DL- 1200 PAR with VNSP
Fresnel Unit 2500 W
DL- 1200 PAR with WF
20 ft 3330 4630
400 450
Features
-- Compact housing (same design as the DLf 1200 S unit).
-- Rigidly mounted high voltage ceramic sockets. -- Double insulated high voltage leads.
Adequate striking voltage to guarrantee hot- restrike in all circumstances. -- Special lever construction for quick and easy lamp change. -- Opening in front plate of housing to insert lens. -- No light side- ways after lens is inserted.
Electrical Design
Symmetrically designed ignitor delivering 50% of the starting voltage to either lamp base.
Power cut-off for operator protection when unit is open.
Ballast equipped with hum-free tight- core reactance coils.
Two- chamber ballast design, keeping coils and electrical circuit separate.
Easy access to ballast compenents by loosening 2screws and hinging down the front panel.
Front panel of ballast features power switch, fuse, power cord, lamp cable connector and ON/OFF button.
Ballast is for 120 V. 60 Hz. Ballasts for 220 V or 245 V. 50 Hz available upon request.
25 ft
2130 2960
30 ft
1480 2040
40 ft
830 CD 1160CD
260
170
90 CD
290
200
110CD
S, INC.
DISTRIBUTOR OF kalbegg
PO Box T
Manchester, Maryland 21102 (301) 239-6839
PO Box 556 Wheatley Heights New York 11798 (5161 242-7241
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-75
LIGHTING
200 EL/D-BN Battery/mains-operated unit
SPECIFICATION
DLf 080 D
Head with ignitor circuit, 4 leaf barndoor, filter holder, yoke with 3/8" thread and 5/8" stud and 7.5 ft. cable
DLf 012 S Diffusion filter, in pouch
DLf 013
200 W HMI lamp
DLf 081 D
Portable electronic ballast with 3- step dimming switch
BA-30 EL 7 NiCad battery pack: 30 V, 7Ah automatic cut-off for battery protection
DU 088 U
Mains adapter with charger. voltage range 100-150 V
DLf 082
Carrying strap
DLf 083
Transport case
DLf 017 S Conversion filter 3200° K, in pouch
HG 10
Handgrip with 5 8" stud
REPORTERLIGHT 200 EL/D
Electronically controlled, i.e. " flicker- free" 200 W portable HMI- unit for battery or mains operation
200 EL/ D- B Battery- operated unit
SPECIFICATION
DLf 080 D
Head with ignitor circuit, 4 leaf barndoor. filter holder, yoke with 3. 8" thread and 5 8" stud and 7.5 ft. cable
DLf 012 S Diffusion filter, in pouch
DLf 013
200 W HMI lamp
DLf 081 D
Portable electronic ballast with 3-step dimming switch
BA-30 EL 7 NiCad battery pack: 30 V. 7Ah automatic cut-off for battery protection
LA- 12/30 T
Charger with 110/220 V ,, switch-over"
for 30 V -- 7Ah, NiCad battery with 12 hour charger timer, in fully isolated plastic housing
DLf 082
Carrying strap
DLf 083
transport case
DLf 017 S Conversion filter 3200° K. in pouch
HG 10
Handgrip with 5/8" stud
ACCESSORIES
D 87 S
Spare UV safety glass, in pouch
ST 262
Aluminum stand: 27/95", 5/8" stud
DLf 084
Rain protector shield for battery pack
DLf 086
12 ft. extension cable
DLf 087
Battery tester 24 -- 30 V
DLf 088
Mains adaptor with charger, voltage range 150 -- 250 V
DLf 089
Leather case for spare NiCad battery
DLf 090
Case for mains adaptor
DLf 091
Telescope: 3extensions, 13/41", 5/8" stud and quiver
DLf 092
Remote control " on/off" to be fixed on telescope ( for use with extension cord only)
VL-76
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Features
HOUSING made of heat- resistant GAP material; lockable pivoting. bracket. 3/8" thread on bracket, 5 8" bushing; ball- bearing axial focusing system, smooth and non-stick operation at any operating temperature; big rear- mounted control knob affording a good grip, 4- leaf barndoor, rotatable by 360 ° and featuring readjustable leaf clamping; mechanical interlock protecting UV glass pane or filter; varnished aluminum housing comprising BATTERY. BATTERY ELECTRONICS and MAINS ADAPTOR, rapid- action link between battery and battery electronics and/or battery electronics and interlocking mains adapter: CHARGING UNIT made of GAP material.
Electrical Design
LIGHTING UNIT featuring symmetrically designed ignitor, plugc able connections for easy disassembly and reassembly of components subject to wear; ON/OFF pushbutton; electrical system interlock operating whenever the lighting unit is open ( for a lamp change) or if there is no UV pane; ,, green" LED display if unit . s ready for operation, ,, red" display signalling imminent battery shutdown;
BATTERY ELECTRONICS having 3 main modules: DC converter ircluding power control, square- wave output switch, ignition driver and unit- function monitor; 3- step lighting control: 100°/o. 87.5% and 75 0/o; power control featuring a -I- 5°/0 precision irrespective of battery voltage.
BATTERY having 2 blocks of 14 and 11 NC cells each, 7 Ah; battery tester; green, yellow, and red LEDs indicating battery status; CHARGING UNIT automatic switch- over; 110 V/220 V stabilized power, irresspective of cell number; synchronometer permitting chalging times of up to 12 hrs to be set; mains- connection and charging indicator lamps. MAINS ADAPTER featuring the following major modules: primary converter, rectification and filtering; charing unit fitted with up 1r 8 hr LED display indicating fully charged battery.
mea wring dista ice: 15 ft , --
i
Dimensions and Weight Data:
moo .0
500 I
/ `
r
/ /
e N
/ /
I 1
`
\
I
I/I,J,
/ i
N \ \
1 N. 1\
1 ` I 1
/1 I I
1
44-8.4"Il iL e---
. >
1 4 ,
LUX 40'
aa- 20°
10°
,
0°
10"
20'
30'
40 cFA OONTDOE
luminous efficiency and distribution for
200 W 175W 150W
200 W - - - 175 W - -·- 150 W
Head, DLf 080 D Electronics, DLf 081 D Battery, BA- 30 EL/7 Battery, BA- 30 EL/ 4 Mains adaptor DLf 088 Charging unit LA- 12130 T Case, DLf 083
200 EL/D-B, complete 200 EL/D-BN, complete
Dimensions (inch)
Weight ( lbs)
6.1" x 4.8" x8.8" 5.5" x 4.8" x8.8" 4.2" x 4.8" x8.8" 6.3" x 4.8" x8.8" 5.9" x 4.1" x3.7" 14.7" x14,4" x9.8"
6.7 7.6 14.2 9.5 9.6 4.3 11.1
45.5 51.5
tItronj 0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
Power/lighting time ratio. It is obvious that, say, at 150 W power, the lighting time available on a fully- charged battery is superior to the 200 W value by some 50%.
INC.
DISTRIBUTOR OF kleggreig
PO Box T
Manchester Maryland 21102
1301) 239-6839
PO Box 556 Wheatley Heights. New York 11798 15161242-7241
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-77
IJGHTING
Lamp: DYS, 600 W/120 V
5
1950
415
10
280
80
15
140
40
20
90
25
Dimension MK 600/1 22.0" x16.5" x7.0"
Weight 26.5 lbs
Video 600
Reporter Light
FEATURES -- High intensity halogen light in
compact light- weight housing. -- Spot- to- flood possibility. -- Lockable pivoting bracket. -- Build- in fuse in housing. -- Equipped with safety glass. -- Sturdy housing made of heat
resistant GRP material. -- For use with 600 W, 120 V,
lamp type DYS.
SPECIFICATION Video 600 Kit 1
Video 600 3x 600 W Fill & Bounce Light ST 1020 2x 4- leaf barndoor TA MINI 3x Aluminum stand, 19/88", 5/8" stud
UM MINI lx Reflex umbrella, silk- white, round 27.5"
ST 227 Z lx Holder for reflex umbrella
MK 600/1
Transport case
ACCESSORIES (see also unit ST 650)
DLf 019 S Safety glass in frame, in pouch
DLf 012 S Diffusion filter in frame, in pouch
DLf 018 S Dichroic conversion filter 5500° K in frame, in pouch
HG 10
Handgrip with 5/8" stud and 3/8" thread
ST 226
Reflex umbrella, white, round 35"
ST 222
Reflex umbrella, silver,
round 41"
ST 227
Adaptor for ST 222 and ST 226
P43 R
Alligator clamp with 16 mm stud
VL-78
S, INC.
DISTRIBUTOR OF kabil§
PO Box T
Manchester Maryland 21102
(3011 239-6839
PO Box 55o Wheatley Heights New York 11798 15161 242 -7241
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
475 Tenth Avenue New York, NY 10018 (212) 947-0950 ( 818) 846-7740 Telex: 666597UW Cable: Lowelight, NY
Lowe) systems and kits have been in use since 1959 for video, film and still photography. They are a successful combination of innovative design, high strength materials, and careful workmanship. As aresult, the lights and accessories are extremely efficient, lightweight and
LIGHTING
durable. Their versatility is unequaled. We have received eight United States patents, an Academy Award Certificate and International acclaim.
Tota-Light
· Interchangeable 1000, 750 and 500 watt tungsten halogen lamps --
120 volts · 800 watt lamp- 220/240 volts · Patented gull- wing reflector produces remarkably efficient output · Exceptionally wide, smooth beam angle. One unit can provide even illumination of four
walls from the corner of a room · Basically non- focusing, however, reflecting doors offer some intensity and spread control · Light
control system: umbrella, gel frame, gels, small flags, and others
· Mounting system: stand, wall/door mount, clamps · Weighs only
21/4 lbs. ( 1.02 kg). Closes up compactly for storage/travel · Patent #3,852,582
T1-10 Head
$ 107.00
Omni- Light
· Interchangeable 650, 600 and 420 watt tungsten halogen lamps -- 120 volts · 650 watt lamp -- 220 and 240 volts · 250 watt lamp -- 30 volts ( battery operation) · 100 watt lamp-- 12 volts ( automobile and
battery operation) · Unprecedented spot/flood focusing range ·Interchangeable, special purpose reflectors · Uses many Iota- light accessories · Light control system: four way expandable barndoors, high intensity and other reflectors, umbrella, gel frame, gels, snoot,
scrims, dichroic filter, cookaloris and others · Mounting system: stand, clamps, wall/door mount · Weighs only 2-5/8 lbs. ( 1.19kg) · Patent #4,187,531
01-10 Head
$ 130.00
DP Light
· Interchangeable 1000, 750 and 500 watt tungsten halogen lamps --
120 volts · 1000 and 650 watt lamps at 220 and 240 volts · Wide
smooth beam pattern with continuous focusing to intense spot ·Quick change, special purpose reflectors · Convenient, fast,
one- hand tilt control · Light control system: four way expandable barndoors, high intensity and other reflectors, large umbrella, gel frame, gels, scrims, dichroic filter, snoot, cookaloris and others
· Mounting system: famous KS stand, clamps, wall mount, and others · Weighs only 3-7/8 lbs. ( 1.76kg) · US Patent # 0210927
02-10 Head
$ 145.00
Softlight 2
·2000 watt maximum capacity. Uses two 1000, 750 or 500 watt lamps at 120 volts or two 800 watt lamps at 220/240 volts · Unit folds in half,
nearly flat, for storage/travel · Large, soft- shadow source utilizes aluminized Nomex reflecting surface which will not scorch or discolor
· Light control system: adjustable and fixed barndoors for flare control, subject shading and gel mounting; gels · Mounting system: stand, clamps · Weighs only 8 lbs. ( 3.63kg) · Both lamps can be switched on and off individually · US Patent # 3,712,978
S2-10 Head
$275.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VI- 79
iowollu® 475 Tenth Avenue New York, NY 1001 8 (212) 947-0950 ( 81 8) 846-7740 Telex: 666597UW Cable: Lowelight, NY
TOTA/OMNI SYSTEMS
TOTA-LIGHT, OMNI-LIGHT& REFLECTORS
T1 10
tom- light
2V. lbs
01-10
21/2 lbs
01-13
omni-light 30v
21/2 lbs
01-15 #1reflector
2oz
01 16 # 2reflector
2oz
01-17 #3reflector
2oz
01-18
*4reflector
2oz
1.02 kg 1.19 kg.
1.02 kg
57g. 57g.
57g 57 g
TOTA/OMNI LIGHT CONTROLS
T1-20
tota-frame
6oz
GELS PACKAGE OF 5, 1002" (25x30cm)
71-69
blue frost gels
2oz
T1-70
day blue gels
2oz
T1-71
nd3gels
2oz
11-72
frost gels
2oz
11-78
assorted gels
2oz
11-25
tota-brella
8oz
T1-34
tota-tatch
2oz
T1-50
flexishaft le (2)
4oz
11-52
tota-flag
4oz
Ti 54
tota-flector
6oz
LIT
lightflector/tilter
13/4 lbs
17 kg
57 g. 57g. 57g 57g. 57g. .23 kg. 57g. .11 kg .11 kg. 17 kg. .79 kg.
OMNI LIGHT CONTROLS
01-20
complete barndoot
01-21
barndoor frame
01-22
rectangular leaf
01-23
triangular leaf
01-50
diffused glass
01-51
dichroic filter
01-52
clear glass
01-53
snoot
01-54
full scrim
01-55
halt scrim
01-56
graduated scrim
01-57
cookalons
8oz 2oz
2m. 1oz. 3oz. 3oz
3oz. 4oz 2oz 2oz
2oz. 2oz
.23 kg. 57 g.
57g. 28g 85g. 85 g
85g. 11 kg 57g 57 g
57 g. 57g
TOTA/OMNI SUPPORTS & MOUNTS
01 33 KPH
omni stand half pole
21/2 lbs 1lb
SC- 10
large space clamp
11/2 lbs
SC- 20 11-30
small space-clamp tota-clamp
11/2 lbs 4oz
11-32
tota-mount
10m
GT-12 GT-30 LSS
gaffer- tape 12 yards gaffer- tape 30 yards screw-in stud (2)
8oz 11/2 lbs
3oz
T1-35
tota-daptor
4oz
11-36
tota-Idler
4oz
130 kg 45 kg 68 kg
57 kg 11 kg
28 kg 23 kg 57 kg
85 g 11 kg 11 kg
TOTA/OMNI CABLES
T1 80
16' tota/omni cable
01-81
5' omni 30v cable
01-82
omm 12v car adaptor
10E25
25' extension cable
KCC
cable clips (40)
K4CC
cable clips ( 10)
13 oz 7oz 1oz 25% lbs 4oz 1oz
37 kg 20 kg 28 g 108 kg 11 kg
28 g
TOTA/OMNI STORAGE
T1-61
tota-lampak
01-61
omni-lampak
TO-61
tota/omni lampak
01-65
tota-packet
11-85
tota case
TO-87
molded tota/omni
case 87
TO 84M
molded tota/omni
case 84M
01-86M
molded omni case 86M
TO- 89
heavy duty case
11-82
tom tube case
202 2oz 2oz 2oz Sibs
10 lbs
121/2 lbs 14 'Ir lbs
28 lbs 23/4 lbs
57g 57g 57g 57 g 227 kg
454 kg
567 kg 658 kg 12 70 kg 108 kg
LAMPS FOR TOTA-LM1T tota lampak available-stores 5lamps
EH?
120v.
300w
2000hr.
frost
2900' K
EON
120v.
500w
400hr.
frost
3200°K
FCZ
120v.
500w
2600hr,
frost
3000*K
EMD
120v.
750w,
400hr
frost 3200·K
FHM
120v
1000vr
300hr
frost 3200'K
EME
240v.
800w,
250hr,
frost
32130'K
LAMPS FOI OMNI WIT ornm lampak available- stores 6lamps
EYL OYG
EKB
OYS/DYV EKD DYR/220 DYR/240
12v 30v 120v 120v 120v
220v 240v
100w. 250w, 420w,
600w 650w 650w, 650w
50hr.
clear
3200K
15hr.
clear
34017K
75hr. clear 3200*K
75hr.
clear
32CO*K
25hr,
clear
34CO*K
50hr.
clear
3200*K
50hr.
clear
320IrK
107 OCI 130 CO 140 00
12.50 12.50 12 50 12 50
24 50
10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 3000 11.00 1750 15.00 1950 75.00
5000 23.50 10.00 10.00 28.50 77.50 25.00 26.00 12.50 12.50 15.00 12.50
82.00 4000 48 50 4250 18.50 2500
850 16.50 10.50 1500 21 00
22 50 32 50
500 23 50
9CO 450
13 50 13 50 13 50 11 50 8900
115 00
16500 195 00 395 00
78 00
50 00 31 00 35 00 4000 35 00 37 CO
16.00 23.00 30.00 23.00 3050 3650 35.50
LIGHTING
SYSTEMS AND KITS
impwa>
fk
ne, n
T1- 94M
TO- 96
TOTA/OMNI KITS
T1- 93 M TI- 90 T1- 92M T1- 94M
01-92 01-93 01-94M TO-91 TO- 95
TO-98 TO- 96
carry-on kit
19 lbs.
8.62 kg.
655.00
3tota-lights, 16 cables (less lamps); 3tota-frames; assorted gels; 3
Iota-flags. 1tota-flector; 4flexishafts: 1tota-mount: 1tota-clamp; 1small
space clamp; 112 yard gaffer- tape; 1tota-lampak: 1tota-case. (11-85)
tube kit
14 lbs.
6.35 kg.
495.00
2Iota- lights:16' cables (less lamps); 1tota-brella; 1tota-frame:
1assorted gels; 2omni-stands: 1tota lampak: 1tube cast (T1-82)
trans- kit
29 lbs.
13.15 kg.745.00
3tota-lights, 16' cables (less lamps); 3tota-brellas: 3omni-stands:
1tota-lampak: 1tota/omni 4m2olldbesd.case. ( TO- 87)
4kit
19.05 kg.
1290.00
4tota-lights, 16' cables (less lamps); 1tota-brella. 4tota-frames;
2assorted gels: 1lightflector/tilter: 4tota-flags: 1tota-flector: 4Om
shafts: 1tota-tatch: 4omni-stands, 1tota-mount: 1tota-clamp: 1large
space-clamp; 112 yard gaffer- tape; 1tota-lampak. 1molded tota/omni
case. ( TO- 84M) action kit
30 lbs.
13.61 kg.
920.00
3orna -lights. 16' cables, #1reflectors (less lamps): 3omni-barndoor 3orna -stands. 1omni-lampak; 1molded tota/omni case. ( T0- 84M)
omni 3kit
34 lbs.
15.42 kg.
1115.00
3omni - lights. 16' cables. #1reflectors ( less lamps); 3omni-barndoors,
2full scrims; 1half scrum: 1tota-brella; 3tota-frames: 2assorted gels;
3omni-stands; 1tota-mount. 1tota-clamp: 112 yard gaffer- tape:
1omni- lampak: 1molded tota omni case ( TO- 84M)
spatial kit
44 lbs.
19.96 kg.
1450.00
4omni lights. 16' cables, #1reflectors, (less lamps): 4omni-barndoors:
1 #3superspot reflector, 1diffused glass. 2full scrims. 1half scrim:
1graduated scrim; 4tota-frames: 2assorted gels: 4omni-stands: 1large
space-clamp: 1tota-clamp; 1omni-lampak: 1molded omni case. (01 86M)
basically 3kit
28 lbs.
12.70 kg.
795.00
2tota-lights. 16' cables (less lamps); 1omni-light 16' cable, #1reflector
(less lamp): 1omni-barndoor: 1full scrim: 1tota-brella: 1tota-frame: 1
assorted gels; 3omni-stands. 1tota/omni lampak: 1tota/omni molded
case ( 10-87)
ambi kit
41 lbs.
18.60 kg.
1395.00
2tota-lights, 16' cables (less lamps); 2omni-lights. 16' cables. #1
reflectors ( less lamps): 2omni-barndoors: 2full scrims: 1half scrim. 2
tota-brellas, 4tota-frames: 2assorted gels; 2tota-flags: 1tota-f lector. 4
flexi-shafts, 1tota-tat ch, 4omni-stands: 1tota-mount. 2tota-clamps. 112
yard gaffer tape. 2tota/omni lampaks: 1molded totaromni cast )1O- 84M)
elemental kit
31 lbs.
14.06 kg.
895.00
1tota light. 16' cable (less lamp): 2omni-lights, 16' cables. #1reflectors
(less lamps): 2omni-barndoors, 1full scrim; 1tota-brella: 2tota-frames:
1assorted gels. 3omni-stands. 1tota/omni lampak. 1totajornm molded
case ( 10-87)
solo kit
60 lbs.
27.22 kg.
2190.00
2tota · Iights. 16' cables (less lamps): 4mini- lights. 16' cables. #1
reflectors ( less lamps): 2 #3superspot reflectors. 4omni-barndoors:
2diffused glass. 2full scrims, 2half scrims. 1graduated scrim: 1 cookalons. 3tota-brellas: 6tota-frames. 3assorted gels: 1lightflector/
tiller: 4tota-flags. 1tota-flector. 4flexishaf ts: 5omni-stands. 1
tota-mount. 2tota-clamps. 1large space clamp. 2Iota- latches. 112 yard
gaffer- tape: 2screw- in studs: 2tota/omni lampaks, 1molded omni case.
(01-86M)
TO ORDER ABOVE KITS WITH HEAVY DUTY CASE [ TO- 89] SUBSTITUTED FOR STANDARD KIT CASE, SEE BELOW:
T1-93MHD Ti -90HD T1-92MHD
T1-94MHO 01-92HD 01-93HD 01-94MHD
TO- 97H0 TO-95HD 10-98H0
TO- 96H0
carry- on, tui case tube kit 'hd case trans/be case
t4/hd case action/hd case omni 3/hd case spatial, hd case
basically 3,'hd case ambi/hd case elemental/hd case
solo kit/hd
42 lbs 40 lbs 47 lbs
58 lbs. 45 lbs. 49 lbs 57 lbs
46 lbs 56 lbs 49 lbs
73 lbs
1005 kg 18 14 kg 21 31 kg.
2630 kg 20.41 kg 22 22 kg 25.85 kg
20 86 kg 25 40 kg 22.22 kg.
33 11 kg
960 00 81000 102500 152000 115000 1345 00 1650 00 1075 00 1625 00 1175 00 2390 00
VL-80
Reprinted with Permission from Materials © 1984 LOWEL-LIGHT MFG., INC. Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
475 Tenth Avenue New York, NY 10018 (212) 947-0950 ( 818) 846-7740 Telex: 666597UW Cable: Lowelight, NY
LIGHTING SYSTEMS AND KITS
DP SYSTEM
DP LIGHT & REFLECTORS
02-10
dp light
D2-15 #1reflector
D2-17 #3reflector
D2-18 #4reflector
DP WITH GEL FRAME
3% lbs. 2oz 2oz 2oz
1.76 kg 57 g 57 g 57 g
DP LIGHT CONTROLS
132-20
complete barndoor
1lb.
D2-21
barndoor frame
4oz.
D2-22
rectangular leaf
4oz.
02-23
triangular leaf
2oz.
02-50
diffused glass
4oz.
D2-51
duchroic filter
4oz.
02-52
clear glass
4oz.
D2-53
snoot
6oz.
D2-54
full scorn
3oz.
D2-55
half scorn
3oz.
D2-56
graduated scrim
3oz.
02-57
cookaloris
3oz.
D2-24
dp frame
8oz.
GELS: PACKAGE OF 4, 12x16" (30x41 cm)
D2-69
blue frost gels
2oz.
D2-70
day blue gels
2oz.
D2-71
n.d. 3gels
2oz.
02-72
frost gels
2o2.
D2-78
mixed gels
2oz.
D2-25
dp brella
21 oz.
71-50
flexu-shaft 16-(2)
4oz
T1-52
tota-flag
4oz.
T1-54
tota-flector
6oz.
LFT
lightflector/tilter
1Yi lbs.
45 kg 11 kg 11 kg 57 g 11 kg 11 kg 11 kg 17 kg 85 g 85 g 85 g 85 g 23 kg
57 g 57 g 57 g 57 g 57 g 40 kg 11 kg 11 kg 17 kg 79 kg
DP SUPPORTS AND MOUNTS
KS
ks stand
KP
full pole
KPH
half pole
LC
lowel casters (3)
LA
lowel anchors (4)
LW
lowel weight
SC- 10
large space-clamp
SC- 20
small space-clamp
02-32
tape-up bracket
GT-12
gaffer- tape 12 yards
GT-30
gaffer- tape 30 yards
71-30
tota-clamp
K1-10
interlink
KG
grip
LSS
scrpw nstud i21
4% lbs.
2.10 kg
1% lbs. .62 kg.
1lb. . 45 kg.
23/8Ibs
1.08 kg.
12oz. . 34 kg.
4V4 lbs.
1.93 kg.
11 /2 1bs. .68 kg.
P/4 lbs. . 57 kg.
8oz. . 23 kg.
8oz. .23 kg.
11 /2 lbs. . 57 kg.
4oz. . 11 kg.
12 oz. . 34 kg.
13/4lbs. . 79 kg.
4oz . 11 kg
DP CABLES & STORAGE
LOE25
25 extension cable
KCC
cable clips 140)
K4CC
cable clips (10)
D2-61
dp lampak
MCSEM
molded multi case
02-89
heavy duty case
23/e lbs 4oz
1oz
2oz 16 ,/21bs
37 lbs
108 kg 11 kg
28 g
57 g 749 kg
17 kg
DP RETROFIT
02-05
quartz dretrofit
8oz
23 ku
145.00 13.00 1300 1300
6000 25.00 13.00 13.00 32.50 107.50 28.50 36.50 14.50 14.50 17.00 14.50 38.50
13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 48.50 17 50 1500 19.50 75 00
103.00 47.50 4000 47.50
900 22.50 48.50 42.50 27.50
8.50 16.50 18.50 21.50 27 50 10.50
23.50 900 4.50 13.50
195.00 425.00
10 00
D2-97
DP KITS
D2-95 D2-93 D2-94 D2-96
D2-97
D2-95HD D2- 93H0 0022--9946HHDD 02-97H0
dp brella kit
48 lbs.
21.78 kg.1025.00
3dp lights, #1reflector ( less lamps), 3dp brellas.
3ks stands; 1dp lampak; 1molded multi case
dp 3kit
45 lbs.
20.41 kg.
1075.00
3dp lights, #1reflector ( less lamps); 3dp barndoors.
3ks stands: 1dp lampak; 1molded multi case
dp 4kit
55 lbs.
24.95 kg.
1375.00
4dp lights, #1reflectors (less lamps): 4dp barndoors
4ks stands; 1dp lampak: 1molded multi case
dp remote kit
52 lbs.
23.58 kg.1475.00
3dp lights. #1reflectors (less lamps): 3do barndoors.
1 #3superspot reflector: 1diffused glass, 1lull scrim 1graduated
scrim; 1dp brella; 3dp frames; 1mixed gels: 1pack day blue gels:
1lightflector/tilter: 2tota-flags; 2flexi-shafts; 3ks stands; 1large
space clamp: 1dp lampak, 15m8ollbdse.dmulti case
close quarters kit
26.31 kg.1595.00
4dp lights, #1reflectors ( less lamps); 1 #3superspot
reflector; 4dp barndoors; 2full scrims; 1half scrim; 1graduated
scrim; 2dp frames; 1mixed gels: 1pack day blue gels; 4ks stands:
1large space-clamp; 1dp lampak; 1molded multi case
TO ORDER ABOVE KITS WITH HEAVY DUTY CASE [1:12-89] SUBSTITUTED FOR STANDARD KIT CASE, SEE BELOW:
dp brella/hd case
68 1/ 2 lbs
31.06 kg
dp 3/hd case
65 1/ 2 lbs.
29.70 kg
ddclppos4re/ehmqdotcuea/sa hedrcatseers/7752l1/ 21/ 2 illbbssd.. 32.384.824
kg. kig.
case
78 1/ 2 lbs.
35.60 kg
1255.00 1305.00 11670055..0000
1825.00
LAMPS FOR OP LICHT dp lampak available-stores 4lamps
EHC
120v,
500w,
300hr.
clear
3200° K
EHD
120v,
500w.
2000hr.
clear
3000°K
EHF
120v,
750w,
300hr.
clear
3200° K
EHG
120v,
750w,
2000hr.
clear
3000°K
FEL
120v.
1000w.
300hr.
clear
3200°K
FKR/220
220v.
650w.
300hr.
clear
3100°K
FEP/220
220v,
1000w.
150hr,
clear
3200° K
FKR/240 FEP/240
240v, 240v,
650w. 1000w
300hr. 150hr.
clear clear
3100°K 3200°K
52 00 52.00 58.00
58.00 52 00 65.00
moo
65.00
60 00
Reprinted with Permission from Materials 1984 LOWEL-LIGHT MFG., INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-81
475 Tenth Avenue New York, NY 10018 (212) 947-0950 ( 818) 846-7740 Telex: 666597UW Cable: Lovvelight, NY
LIGHTING SYSTEMS/ KITS AND REFLECTORS
SOFTLIGHT 2
LOWEL-LIGHT
REFLECTORS
SOFTLIGHT SYSTEM
SOFTLIGHT 2 & GELS
S2-10 S2-20 S2-21 S2-22 S2-30
S2-69 S2-70 S2-71 S2-72
sot flight 2
8lbs.
3.63 kg.
complete barndoor
2lbs. .91 kg.
top or bottom door
10 oz. . 28 kg.
side barndoor
5oz. . 14 kg.
reflector shell
6oz. . 17 kg.
GELS PACKAGE OF 3, 24x34" (61x86cm)
blue frost gels
7oz. . 20 kg.
day blue gels
7oz. .20 kg.
n.d. 3gels
7oz. . 20 kg.
frost gels
7oz. . 20 kg.
SOFTLIGHT 2SUPPORTS & MOUNTS
KS
ks stand
4 % lbs.
KP
full pole
1% lbs.
KPH
half pole
1lb.
SC- 10
large space-clamp
11 /2 lbs.
SC-20
small space-damp
11/4lbs.
KG
grip
13 /4 lbs.
KI-10
interlink
12 oz.
11-30
tota-clamp
4oz.
KWW
water weight
8oz.
LW
lowel weight
41 /4 lbs.
LC
lowel casters (3)
2,/e lbs
2.10 kg. .62 kg. .45 kg. .68 kg. .57 kg. .79 kg. .34 kg. .11 kg.
.23 kg. 1.93 kg. 108 kg.
STORAGE
KCC K4CC
11-61 S2- 51M
S2- 53M RU
cable clips (40) cable clips (10)
tota lampak
molded sot tlight case molded sot flight case roll up carrier
4oz 1oz
2oz 13 lbs 13 lbs
3% lbs
.11 kg. 28 g. 57 g.
5.90 kg.
5.90 kg. 147 kg.
SOFTLIGHT RETROFIT
S2-06
501 111981 retrofit
17/8lbs
85 kg
275.00 72.50 30.00 15.00 68.00
29.50 29.50 29.50 29.50
103.00 47.50 40.00 48.50 42.50 27.50 21.50 18.50 16.50 22.50 47.50
9.00 4.50 13.50 175.00 165.00 98 50
39 00
SOFTLIGHT KITS
S2-92 S2-91 S2-93
standard soft kit
29 lbs.
1315 kg
600.00
1softlight 2 ( less lamps): 1ks stand; 1complete set barndoors.
1tota-lampak; 1molded sof Hight case. (S2-51M)
light soft kit
24 lbs. 10.89 kg
510.00
1sot night 2 ( less lamps): 1complete set barndoors; 1tota-lampak,
1molded softlight case. (S2- 51M)
triple soft kit
43 lbs. 19.50 kg.
112500
3sot flight 2(less lamps); 3complete set barndoors: 1tota-lampak.
1molded sol Hight 3case. (S2- 53M)
Reprinted with Permission from Materials CD 1984 LOWEL-LIGHT MFG., INC.
LAMPS FOR SOFILICHT 2tota lampak available-stores 5lamps
FOF
FCL EJG EME/EJB FCM
120v, 120v. 120v, 240v, 120u,
500w, 500w, 750w, 800w
1000w
400hr, 2600hr,
400hr, 250hr, 300hr.
clear clear clear clear
clear
3200*K 3000°K 3200°K 3200°K 3200*K
LOWEL-LIGHT SYSTEM
LOWEL -LIGHT & ACCESSORIES
LL1
towel- light
BR40
barndoor
BR- 1
replacement flap
BR-2
complete bulbmount only
GT-12
gaffer- tape 12 yards
GT-30
gaffer- tape 30 yards
K5C
lowel light case
10 oz. 4oz. 1oz. 302. 8oz.
11/4lbs. 2Ve lbs.
.28 kg. . 11 kg.
28 g. 86 g. 23 kg.
.57 kg. .96 kg.
LOWEL -LIGHT KIT
K5BR
lowel-light KW kit
81/ 4 lbs.
3.74 kg.
5lowel-lights ( less lamps); 112 yard gaffer- tape. 5barndoors:
1lowel-light case
32.00 26.00 40.00 37.00 32.00
32.50 32.50
8.00 18.00 8.50 16 50 67.50
360.00
REFLECTORS
REFLECTORS
LUT
LU T1-54
V44A V44RS V44CK
lightflectornilter
iightflector tota-flector
vanflector It replacement panel side channels (2)
SUPPORTS & MOUNTS
114 lbs. . 79 kg.
1s/e lbs. . 74 kg.
6oz. . 17 kg.
14 lbs.
6.35 kg.
71/ 4 lbs.
3.29 kg.
31/ 2 lbs.
1.59 kg.
75 00
57 00 1950 265 00 110 00 11500
GS KS 01-33 LA LW 71-36 11-50
T1-30 11-34 LC
STORAGE
grand stand ks stand
omni-stand lowel anchors (4) lowel weight tota-tilter flexi-shaft 16" (2)
tota-clamp Iota- latch
lowel casters (3)
6lbs. 454lbs.
2,/i) lbs. 12 oz.
41/ 4 lbs. 4oz. 4oz.
4oz. 2oz.
2% lbs.
2.72 kg. 2.10 kg.
1.30 kg. . 34 kg. 193 kg.
11 kg. 11 kg.
. 11 kg. 57 g.
108 kg
165.00 103.00
82.00 9.00
22.50 21.00 17.50
18.50 1100 47 50
V44CC
KIT
vanflector case
41/ 4 lbs.
193 kg
88 00
V44SC
varif lector II kit
25 lbs.
11.34 kg.
495.00
1vanflector I! 1grand stand 4lowel anchors. 1variflector case
VL-82
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
475 Tenth Avenue New York, NY 10018 (212) 947-0950 ( 818) 846-7740 Telex: 666597UW Cable: Lowelight, NY
LIGHTING SUPPORT SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES
FRAME-UP LOBO Et LOBO ARM
CLAMPS & MOUNTS
CLAMPS AND MOUNTS
STANDS, POLES, BOOMS, RIGS
FLAGS. GELS. UMBRELLAS
CLAMPS Sc 10 SC- 20 SC- 15 SC- 25 SC- 35 SC- 30 T1-30 KG KI-10 KI 1i
large space-clamp small space-clamp large bar small bar clamping arm (1) stud bracket Iota- clamp grip interlink double male stud
1% lbs. 11 / 4 lbs
8oz. 4oz 6oz 4oz 4oz 134lbs 12 oz 4oz
68 kg 57 g
23 kg 11 kg 17 kg 11 kg 11 kg 79 kg 34 kg 11 kg
48 50 42 50 22 50 16 00 10 50 12 00 18 50 27 50 21 50
700
FLAGS, FRAMES, UMBRELLAS, MATS, GELS
FI- 15 FI-20
standard frame-up large frame-up
14 oz.
40 kg.
1lb. . 45 kg.
D2-24
dp trame
8oz. .23 kg.
TI -20
tota-frame
6oz. . 17 kg.
11-52
tota-flag
4oz. . 11 kg.
B1-25
big brella
3% lbs.
1.59 kg.
D2-25
dp brella
21 oz.
6.6 kg.
T1-25
tota-brella
8oz. . 23 kg.
MATS FOR STANDARD FRAME-UP: 20x24" (50x60cm)
FI -42
black mat
3oz.
85 g.
F1-43
translucent mat
3oz.
85 g.
58 50 6500 38 50 24 50 15 00 148 00 48 50 30 00
15.00 15.00
MOUNTS Ti 32 02-32
GT-12 GT-30 LSS 71-35 T1-36 F1-30 F1-40
Iota- mount
tape-up bracket gaffer- tape 12 yards gaffer- tape 30 yards screw-in stud (2)
tota-daptor Iota- titter lowel lobo lobo arm
10oz
8oz 8oz.. 11 / 4 lbs
4oz 4oz 4oz 10oz 3oz
STANDS, POLES, BOOMS, RIGS
28 kg 23 kg 23 kg 57 kg 11 kg 11 kg 11 kg
28 kg 85 g
25.00 27 50
8.50 16.50 10.50 1500 21 D3 17 50 13.50
F1-52 F1-53
F1-70 FI -71 FI -72
S2-69 S2-70 S2-71 S2-72
MATS FOR LARGE FRAME-UP: 24x34" (61x86cm)
black mat
4oz. . 11 kg.
22.50
translucent mat
4oz. . 11 kg.
22.50
STANDARD FRAME-UP GELS: PACKAGE OF 3, 20x24" (50x60cm)
day blue gel
4oz. . 11 kg.
17.50
n.d. 3gel
4oz. . 11 kg.
17.50
frost gel
4oz. . 11 kg.
17.50
LARGE FRAME-UP 8SOFTLIGHT 2GELS: PACKAGE OF 3. 24x34"
(61x86cm)
blue frost gels
7oz. .20 kg.
29.50
day blue gels
7oz. . 20 kg.
29.50
n.d. 3gels
7oz. . 20 kg.
29.50
frost gels
7oz. .20 kg.
29.50
STANDS & POLES
CS
grand stand
KS
ks stand
01 33
omni-stand
KP
full pole
KPH
half pole
6lbs. 4% lbs. 2% lbs. 13/8 lbs.
1lb.
272 kg 210 kg 130 kg
62 kg 45 kg.
165 00 103 00 8200 47 50 40 00
ACCESSORIES
LC
lowel casters (3)
LA
lowel anchors (4)
LW
lowel weight
KN4N
water weight
KCL
ceiling link
T1-30
Iota- damp
KG
grip
KI-10
inter ink
KI-11
double male stud
234lbs 12 oz
41 / 4 lbs 8oz 10 oz
4oz. 13 / 4 lbs
12oz
4oz
108 kg 34 kg
193 kg 23 kg 28 kg
11 kg 79 kg 34 kg
11 kg
47 50
900 22 50 16 50 18 50 1850 27 50 21 50
700
STORAGE MCSEM V44CC T1-82 RU
molded multi case vanflector case tube case roll- up carrier
16 1 / 2 lbs 41 / 4 lbs 234lbs
31 / 4 lbs
749 kg 193 kg 108 kg 147 kg
195 00 FIA 00
7800 98 50
BOOMS & RIGS
SP- 90
big boom
20 1/2lbs.
9.30 kg.
315.00
1grand stand: 1grip; 1full pole: 2lowel weights. 1set lowel (;amer, 13;
1package cable clips (10)
SP- 91
basic boom
19 lbs.
8.62 kg.
260.00
1ks stand; 1grip; 1full pole; 2lowel weights. 1set lowel casters Cl).
1package cable clips (10).
S2-79
D2-69 D2-70 D2-71 02-72 02-78
T1-69 11-70 11-71 11-72 T1 78
special colors
7oz. . 20 kg.
DP GELS: PACKAGE OF 4, 12x16" (30x41cm)
blue frost gels
2oz.
57 g.
day blue gels
2oz.
57 g.
nd 3gels
2oz.
57 g.
frost gels
2oz.
57 g.
mixed gels
2oz.
57 g.
TOTA/OMNI GELS PACKAGE OF 5, 10x12" (25x30cm)
blue frost gels
2oz.
57 g.
day blue gels
2oz.
57 g.
nd 3gels
2oz.
57 g.
frost gels
2oz.
57 g.
assorted gels
2oz
57 g.
MOUNTING DEVICES
F1-30
lowel lobo
F1-40
lobo arm
GS
grand stand
KS
ks stand
01 33
omm-stand
11 50
flexi-shaft (2)
11 30
Iota- clamp
Ti 34
Iota- latch
11 35
tota-daptor
KG
grip
KI 10
interlink
SC 10
large space-clamp
SC 20
small space clamp
1W
lowel weight
Ri)
roll- up carrier
10 oz 3oz 6lbs 4% lbs 21/ 4 lbs 4oz 4oz 2oz 4oz 13/ 4 lbs 12 oz
lbs 11/4 lbs 41/ 4 lbs 31/ 4 lbs
28 kg 85 g 227 kg 210 kg 1.30 kg 11 kg 11 kg 57 g 11 kg 79 kg 34 kg 68 kg 57 kg 193 kg 147 kg
29.50
13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50 13.50
10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50 10.50
17.50 13.50 165.00 103.00 82.00 17.50 18.50 11.00 15.00 27.50 21.50 48.50 42.50 22 50 98 50
SP- 92 SP- 93
hi- lo-elbow
7lbs.
1ks stand. 1grip: 1half pole.
background support 131 / 2 lbs.
2ks stands: 2interlinks; 2full poles
3.17 kg. 6.12 kg.
160.00 325.00
FRAME-UP SETS
F1-90
standard frame-up set 31/ 2 lbs.
1.6 kg.
2standard frame-ups. 3lobos. 1lobo arm
FI -95
large frame-up set
4lbs.
1.80 kg.
165.00 175.00
Reprinted with Permission from Materials
2large frame-ups. 3lobos, 1lobo arm
rcD 1984 LOWEL-LIGHT MFG., INC.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-83
LTM CORP. OF AMERICA
1160 N. Las Palmas Ave. Hollywood, CA 90038 1209 (213) 460-6166 Telex 67-7693
LIGHTING
STUDIO/INCANDESCENT LIGHTING...THE LT SERIES
LTM has introduced acomplete line of Fresnel Studio/Incandescent Lighting instruments from 1,000 watts to 10,000 watts.
These fixtures are ideal for set lighting for motion picture and TV studios.
They all have a wide focusing range which provides precise beam control while maintaining a perfectly smooth, even spread of light.
The LT series are constructed of cast and steel- sheet housing...welded and waterproof. They all use convex fresnel lenses and Type A9 polished aluminum reflectors. Wire safety guards protect the fresnels.
All fixtures are finished in a black enamel with gold accents.
The LT series comes in three different operating versions.
LT1000W-7" Fresnel
·Manual -- all controls function by hand
$332.00
·Pole- Operated -- the true studio light, used only suspended. The
light is actuated from the ground by means of apole
478.00
·Remote control -- the studio light of the future. The LT Remote
Control lights feature "joy stick" control for panning ( right and left), tilting ( up and down), focusing ( spot to flood) and on/off
from one central control console
IT 1000W-7" Fresnel
$1338.00
·4- Leaf Rotating Barndoor
49.00
· Hinged Gel Frame
21.00
·Single Scrim Full or Half
9 20
· Double Scrim Full or Half
11.50
LT Mini 1000W-5-1/6" Fresnel ( Manual only)
$332.00
LT 2000W-10" Fresnel
·Manual -- all controls function by hand
$526.00
·Pole- Operated-- the true studio light, used only suspended. The
light is actuated from the ground by means of apole
625.00
·Remote Control -- the studio light of the future. The LT Remote
Control lights feature " joy stick" control for panning ( right and
left), tilting ( up and down), focusing ( spot to flood) and on/off
from one central control console
LT 2000W-10" Fresnel
$1743.00
·4- Leaf Rotating Barndoor
68.00
· Hinged Gel Frame ·Single Scrim Full or Half
28.00 9 20
·Double Scrim Full or Half
11.50
VI- 84
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LTM CORP. OF AMERICA
1160 N. Las Palmas Ave. Hollywood, CA 90038 1209 (213) 460-6166 Telex 67-7693
LIGHTING
STUDIO/INCANDESCENT LIGHTING
LT 5000W-12" Fresnel
·Manual -- all controls function by hand
$ 925.00
·Pole- Operated-- the true studio light, used only suspended. The
light is actuated from the ground by means of apole
1100.00
·Remote Control -- the studio light of the future. The LT Remote Control lights feature "joy stick" control for panning ( right and
left), tilting ( up and down), focusing ( spot to flood) and on/off
from one central control console
3080.00
·4- leaf Rotating Barndoor · Hinged Gel Frame
88.00 33.00
·Single Scrim Full or Half · Double Scrim Full or Half
14.95 18.40
LT 10,000W-14" Fresnel
·Manual -- all controls function by hand $ 1339.00
·Pole- Operated-- the true studio light, used only suspended. The
light is actuated from the ground by means of apole
1591.00
·Remote Control -- the studio light of the future. The LT Remote
Control lights feature "joy stick" control for panning ( right and
left), tilting ( up and down), focusing ( spot to flood) and on/off
from one central control console
4455.00
·4- leaf Rotating Barndoor
133.00
· Hinged Gel Frame
63.00
·Single Scrim Full or Half
16.90
· Double Scrim Full or Half
18.40
CYC Lights LTM's cyc lights use unsymmetrical reflectors which provide even, smooth lighting of cycloramas when hung overhead.
CYC 1000-1000 watts of power, steel- sheet welded construction with wire guard front and color gel frame.
CYC 1000W-CYC Light w/Color Frame $ 225.00
Cyclomodul A combination of four CYC 1000s providing the possibility of instant color changes during ascene. Cyclomodul Four- 4- light w/wireguard Et 4-color frame . .. $900.00 Cyclomodul Pole-Operated -- w/wireguard Et 4- color frame .. 1050.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-85
MUDD' deli
SY5b61115
Route 9South Box 1009 Cumming, GA 30130 (404) 887-9910
2111S 2121S
2841G 2842G
3541G 3542G
THE CONVERTIBLE SOFTLIGHT
Rugged frame constructed of light weight high stress aircraft tubing.
Convertible design with non- removable soft reflector facilitates instant set up and knock down of fixture.
High performance soft reflector coated with easy to clean, ultra high temperature white reflecting surface that resists color temperature shifts associated with conventional painted softlights.
Rotating light bar provides ultimate control of light intensity and direction.
Lamp reflectors designed for maximum lamp cooling. Wiring operates inside ventilated heat sink channel. Switches removed from lamp housing for cooler operation. Complete line of accessories.
2111S
21" 1000 watt convertible softlight for multiple purpose location or studio operation. Supplied with inline switched 25' power cord and choice of plug. Includes rotating light bar feature.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Size: 21" x18" Weight: 18 lbs. w/cable Rating: 8.3 amp maximum at 1000 watts. 120/240 volts, A.C. or D.C. operation. Cable: 25' 3conductor # 16 AWG SO power cord with choice of plug. Switching: Single inline switch. Lamps: Single Tungsten- Halogen lamp.
2121S
21 -2000 watt convertible softlight for multiple purpose location or studio operation. Supplied with inline switched 25 power cord and choice of plug. Includes rotating light bar feature
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Size: 21 -x18 Weight 18 lbs w/cable Rating .166 amp maximum at 2000 watts. 120/240 volts. A C. or D.0 operation Cable 25' 3conductor 514 AWG SO power cord with choice of plug. Switching. Single inline switch Lamps -Single Tungsten- Halogen lamp
SOFTLIGHTS
2821S
28" 2000 watt convertible softlight for multiple purpose location or grid operation. Supplied with inline switched 25' power cord and choice of plug. Includes rotating light bar feature. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Size: 28" x24" Weight: 21.5 lbs. w/cable Rating: 166 amp maximum at 2000 watts 120/240 volts, A.C. or D.C. operation. Cable: 25' 3conductor 1;14 AWG SO power cord with choice of plug. Switching, 2inline switches. Lamps: 2Tungsten- Halogen iamps.
2841G
28 4000 watt convertible sottlight with rotating light bar for multiple purpose location or studio operation Single 60 amp flush mount grounding pin plug provided for single circuit operation Requires 0083 or 0083P header cable Header cable not included in base price TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Size: 28 -x24 Weight: 18.5 lbs w/o cable Rating .33 3amp maximum at 4000 watts. 120/240 volts. A.0 or D.C. operation. Cable -1-25' 3conductor 48 AWG SO header cable attchable to 60 amp flush mount grounding pin plug at switch box required
2842G
284000 watt convertible sottlight with rotating light bar for multiple purpose location or studio operation. Two 20 amp flush mount grounding pin plugs provided for two circuit operation. Requires two 0143 or 0143P header cables Header cables not included in base price. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Size: 28 -x24 Weight: 18.5 lbs w/o cable Rating: 33.3 amp maximum at 4000 watts. 120/240 volts. A C. or D.C. operation. Cable: 2-25' 3conductor 1;14 AWG SO header cables attachable to 220 amp flush mount grounding pin plugs at switch box required. Switching .2switches mounted in permanent switch box attached to pivoting yoke Lamps: 2lamps, individually switched,
3541G
354000 watt convertible softlight with rotating light bar for multiple purpose location or studio operation. Single 60 amp flush mount grounding pin plug provided for single circuit operation. Requires Cor 0083P header cable. Header cable not included in base price, TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Size: 35" x30" Weight: 22.5 lbs. w/o cable Rating: 33.3 amp maximum at 4000 watts. 120/240 volts, A.C. or D.C. operation. Cable: 1-25' 3conductor #8AWG SO header cable attachable to 60 amp flush mount grounding pin plug at switch box required. Switching: 2switches mounted in permanent switch box attached to pivoting yoke. Lamps: 2lamps, individually switched.
3542G
35" 4000 watt convertible sottlight with rotating light bar for multiple purpose location or studio operation. Two 20 amp flush mount grounding pin plugs provided for two circuit operation. Requires two 0143 or 0143P header cables. Header cables not included in base price. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Size: 35" x30" Weight: 22.5 lbs w/o cable Rating: 33.3 amp maximum at 4000 watts. 120/240 volts, A.C. or D.C. operation. Cable: 2-25' 3conductor # 14 AWG SO header cables attachable to 220amp flush mount grounding pin plugs at switch box required. Switching: 2switches mounted in permanent switch box attached to pivoting yoke. Lamps: 2lamps, individually switched.
VL-86
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
11101111/Uffliei" 575b61115
Route 9 South Box 1009
Cumming, GA 30130 (404) 887-9910
SOFTLIGHTS
4282G
428000 watt convertible softlight with rotating light bar for multiple purpose location or studio operation.Two 60 amp flush mount grounding pin plugs provided for two circuit operation. Requires two 0083 or 0083P header cables. Header cables not included in base price. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Size: 42" x36" Weight: 27 lbs. w/o cable Rating: 66.6 amp maximum at 8000 watts. 120/240 volts, A.C. or D.C. operation. Cable: 2-25' 3conductor # 8AWG SO header cables attached to 260 amp flush mount grounding pin plugs required. Switching: 4switches mounted in permanent switch box attached to pivoting yoke. Lamps: 4lamps, individually switched.
3561G
4281G
THE CONVERTIBLE SOFTLIGHT 4282G
Rugged frame constructed of light weight high stress aircraft
tubing. Convertible design with non- removable reflector facilitates
instant set up and knock down of fixture.
High performance soft reflector coated with easy to clean, ultra high temperature white reflecting surface that resists color tem-
perature shifts associated with conventional painted softlights. Rotating light bar provides ultimate control of light intensity
and direction. Lamp reflectors designed for maximum lamp cooling. Wiring operates inside ventilated heat sink channel. Switches removed from lamp housing for cooler operation. Complete line of accessories.
3561G
35" 6000 watt convertible softlight with rotating light bar for multiple purpose location or studio operation. Single 60 amp flush mount grounding pin plug provided for single circuit operation. Requires 0063 or 0063P header cable. Header cable not included in base price
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Size: 35 -x30' . Weight: 22.5 lbs w/o cable Rating: 50 amp maximum at 6000 watts 120/240 volts. A C or D.C. operation. Cable: 1-25 3conductor e6 AWG SO header cable attachable to 60 amp flush mount grounding pin plug at switch box required. Switching: 2switches mounted in permanent switch box attached to pivoting yoke. Lamps: 3lamps with center lamp switched independently of two outboard lamps.
4281G
42" 8000 watt convertible sottlight with rotating light bar for multiple purpose location or studio operation. Single 100 amp flush mount grounding pin plug provided for single circuit operation. Requires 0043 or 0043P header cable. Header cable not included in base price.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Size: 42" x36" Weight: 27 lbs. w/o cable Rating: 66.6 amp maximum at 8000 watts. 120/240 volts, A.C. or D.C. operation. Cable: 1-25' 3conductor #4AWG SO header cable attachable to 100 amp flush mount grounding pin plug required. Switching: 4switches mounted in permanent switch box attached
to pivoting yoke. Lamps: 4lamps, individually switched
7716G
77" 16000 watt convertible softlight with rotating light bar for multiple purpose location or studio operation. Two 100 amp flush mount grounding pin plugs provided for two circuit operation. Requires two 0043 or 0043P header cables. Header cables not included in base price. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Size: 77" x42" Weight: 50 lbs, w/o cable Rating: 133 amp maximum at 16000 watts. 120/240 volts, A.C. or D.C. operation. Cable: 2-25' 3conductor 44 AWG SO header cables attached to 2100 amp flush mount grounding pin plugs required. Switching: 4switches mounted in permanent switch box attached to pivoting yoke. Lamps: 8lamps, switched 2per switch.
annameaum·MOMORW
9951T
Totally unobstructed translucent camera table for highlight control shadow elimination, and special effects photography. FEATURES INCLUDE: 51" x100" overall dimension with unobstructed shooting area of 46" x96:'
Adjustable front sweep allows user maximum control of foreground space.
Standard surface is non-reflective matt on one side with glossy surface opposite side.
User may select from numerous commercially available translucent colored or textured surfaces.
Fast, easy, no error assembly and knock down.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VI- 87
OLESEN
1535 War Ave.
Hollywood, CA 90028
(21 3) 461-4631
CYCLORAMA CURTAINS, TRACKS, PIPE GRIDS AND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
Studio cycloramas can be tied directly to a pipe grid, but curtain track is recommended for hanging to allow maximum versatility. The most flexible installation has at least adouble- run of track, to permit the size of the shooting area to be changed. Compute the length of each track separately; add any necessary footage for off camera storage. Switchers are used to move curtains from one track to another
with ease. An individual curtain track is sold on a " per foot" basis, complete with all necessary accessories for standard installation. This includes: the track channel, as ordered, cut to the nearest even foot.
(We do not ship in less than foot increments; i.e., if you need 12 1 /2 feet, order 13 feet.) One master carrier, one single carrier per 12 inches of track, and hanging clamps to suspend on 5foot centers are included. If closer centers are required because of your installation configuration, they must be ordered at additional charge. To order, compute the number of feet. Advise us of this amount. We will ship necessary items for standard installation with instructions for assembly.
#76064
Versatile, I-beam track, for installations up to 75 feet long and 30 feet high, rigged for walk- along operation. Ideal for most motion picture and TV studio cycloramas. This track is shipped straight, for on the job curving. A bending tool for accurate curving is listed and must be ordered separately.
Track can be curved without this special tool. #76064 I-beam track - $ 13.83 per foot.
#502
Heavy duty track, used for walk- along installations over 30 feet high or 75 feet long. This track must be factory curved and requires drawings for special radii. Standard radii beginning at 2 feet minimum.
#502 Heavy duty track - $34.40 per foot, includes curving
PIPE AND WALL BRACKETS #76374 Bending Tool ( For use with #76064 track) #76450 Pipe Clamps for 11 /2 "I.D. pipes #76394 Wall Bracket 18", for single cyc track #76395 Wall Bracket 24", for double cyc track
The following switchers are available to facilitate moving of curtains from one track to another or from storage tracks to set locations.
SWITCHERS FOR #76064 TRACK #143-2 2-way switcher #143-3 3-way switcher 4and 5- way switchers available on request.
SWITCHERS FOR # 502 HEAVY DUTY TRACK #503 2- way switcher
VL-88
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
OLESEN
1535 War Ave. Hollywood, CA 90028 (213) 461-4631
CYCLORAMA CURTAINS, TRACKS, PIPE GRIDS AND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
CYCLORAMA CURTAINS
Cyclorama curtains are available in various fabrics as listed below. Cycloramas are manufactured to your size specifications with jute webbing triple stitched at the top; snaps for attaching to track; or grommets with tie- lines to tie on pipe; snaps or ties on 12" centers. Bottom finished with either canvas chain picket, with chain, or pipe pocket, without pipe; side finished with 2" hems. Seamed with vertical seams. Horizontal seams and seamless available on special request. All materials supplied flameproofed.
MUSLIN CYCLORAMA Medium weight, unbleached muslin cycloramas are available in three
colors, natural, light blue, and 60% reflectance gray.
With Vertical Seams 88921 Natural 88922 Light Blue 88923 60% Reflectance Gray
$ 58/sq. ft.
75/sq. ft. 85/sq. ft.
Seamless Natural: Hgts. to 18' and any lgth. to 180'
POR
Hgts. to 18-32' and any lgth. to 180' Light Blue: Hgts. to 18' and any lgth. to 180' 60% Reflectance Gray: Hgts. to 18' and any lgth to 180'
POR POR POR
Larger sizes in blue and reflectance gray available on special request.
SOLID SEAMLESS LINO A useful fabric, woven so mesh holes are filled for opacity. It is slightly toothed- in texture and is useful for television, since it does not show wrinkles and is non- reflective. Woven in one size approximately, 28 feet wide. Cycloramas made of this fabric are finished at approximately, 27 1 / 2 feet high, lengths up to approximately 180 feet long.
White Blue Reflectance Gray
Black
POR POR POR
POR
VELOUR CYCLORAMAS Heavy pile curtain fabric. Comes in two weights, heavy and medium. 100% cotton, flameproof, 54" wide. Cycloramas of this fabric have
vertical seams. Colors listed below are in stock. We can supply over 40 other shades. Interesting effects can be accomplished by alternat-
ing color panels. Bi -parting curtains, with fullness sewn in, are avail-
able on request.
Black Flame Red Bright Blue
Navy Blue Gold Gray
Heavy weight Velour Cycloramas Medium weight Velour Cycloramas
$1.85/sq. ft. 171/sq. ft.
VELOURETTE CYCLORAMAS A napped fabric, lighter in weight than velour. Good opacity and
useful for economical draperies and cycloramas. 100% cotton, flameproof, 54" wide, cycloramas of this fabric have vertical seams. Bi -parting curtains with fullness sewn in, are available on request.
Black Gold Red Forest Green
Bright Blue Reflectance Gray Chroma Key Blue Beige
Velourette Cycloramas
SPECIAL EFFECTS CURTAINS Fabrics for special effects are available as follows:
Lame Curtains Rain curtains Shimmer curtains Sharkstooth Scrim drops
Prices on request.
$1 . 46/sq. ft.
PIPE GRIDS
Useful for small studio installations or where ceiling height does not permit use of live rigging. Used for hanging of cyclorama tracks, electrical distribution devices and lighting fixtures. Minimum size 15 ft. by 20 ft. Consists of 11 /2 " I.D. pipes, dead hung at right angles on 4 ft. centers. Complete with wall brackets and ceiling hangers. Includes standard mounting hardware.
Motorized or counterweight rigging on request.
29730
Pipe Clamp. The safest method of clamping two 11 /2 "
pipes at right angles to one another
$13.50
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
To allow total flexibility in connecting your lights to your dimming or power system. Connector strips are manufactured to any length in even foot increments with 18", 20 amp pigtails on any center (multiples of 3") and a choice of pin plug, Edison type or twist lock connectors. Supplied with double hanging brackets to be used on a maximum of 7 ft. centers, for mounting on top of 11/2 " I.D. pipe. Special hangers available on request. All connector strips are U.L. listed.
Prices on request.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-89
PERROTT ENGINEERING
7201 Lee Highway Falls Church, VA 22046 (703) 532-0700
LABS,
INC.
LIGHTING/CHARGER
PE 8204
·Sequential multiple 2hr. Ni-Cad fast Minicharger°
·Minichargere reliability with microprocessor controls
·Charges any combination of four ( 4) 10-12 cell 4.0 AH
("D") or 7.0 AH (" F") packs sequentially
·Charges any combination of four ( 4) 22-24 cell 4.0 AH
("D") or 7.0 AH (" F") packs sequentially
·High impact sturdy construction
·Lightweight ( 5-1/4 lbs.); compact 10-1/4" x 9-3/4" x
5-1/2"
·Eliminates need for temperature sensors
·Circuit breaker protected
·100% quality tested both electronically and manually
PE 8204
$950.00
THE PERROTT ON- CAMERA LIGHT ·No heat build up ·Consistent light pattern -- No holes -- No shadows ·Can be powered with any 14.4 volt battery ·Ultra miniaturized design -- sturdy welded construction ·Convenient 5- pin XLR connector ·Handheld or mounts virtually anywhere -- camera, light,
stand, tripod, accessory shoes, etc. ·100% quality control inspected, electronically and
manually
Specifications
Color Temperature: 3500° Kelvin Volts ( nominal): 14.4 Running Time Available:
Amp Hours
Hours
4.0
. 75
8.0
1.50
Weight: 1.0 lbs. ( Head, 8.0 oz.; cord, 8.0 oz.)
Size: 2-1/2" x2-1/2" x3"
Connectors: 5- pin XLR
Lamp Type: FLR
The Perrott On-Camera Light
$ 195.00
NOTE: The Perrott Lite® can be used with virtually any ENG/EFP camera in the field. To double the running time of the Perrott Lite use the Perrott PE- 52-4 NiCad®. Dual Output Belt.
VL-90
PE 9037 IKWI K- KLI P° 1Battery Carrier PRB 9037 (Snap-On TM ) Battery Carrier
$185.00 185.00
Basic Purpose: Allows user versatility and economy of
using aVTR battery to power camera.
Features: · Mates with KWlK-KLIP® or Snap-
On TM battery mount.
·Impact resistant metal construction.
·100% quality inspected both elec-
tronically Et manually.
·Spring tension prevents rattle.
·Configured for Silver-Zinc or Ni -Cad
VTR battery.
Size:
5-1/6" x1-3/4" x6-3/4"
Weight:
.75 lbs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ROSCO LABORATORIES, INC.
36 Bush Ave. Port Chester, NY 10573 (914) 937-1300 Telex 131472
LIGHT CONTROL MEDIA
Roscogel
The traditional color media, still produced in 74 proven colors. Ideal for short run or low budget productions.
Sheets: 20" x24' Swatchbook
S 2.00 2.50
COLOR MEDIA PRODUCTS
Roscolux
The most durable color filter. Available in 111 colors and diffusers. Sold under the trade name " Supergel" overseas.
Sheets: 20" x24" Rolls: 24" x50' Swatchbook
S 4.25 109.50 2.50
Diffusion Test Kit
Nineteen 10" x 12" sheets of Rosco diffusion materials packed in ahandy plastic pack. The kit includes aTechnote which details the characteristic of each diffuser. $19.95
Roscolux Diffusion
A range of filters in the stable Roscolux base, designed to alter the shadow characteristics or the beam shape of a light. Available in 17 colors..
Sheets: 20" x24" Rolls: 24" x50'
S 4.25 109.50
Roscolene
The most widely used color media in the world Available in 62 colors.
Sheets: 20" x24" Rolls: 24" x50' Swatchbook
S 3.25 94.00 2.50
Super Heat Shield
A protective transparert filter of extremely heat stable polymer, specially designed to deflect heat. This product should be placed between the bulb and the color filter,
allowing space for the escape of heated air.
1991 2 mil. 20x24
S 7.50
Safety Frames
The replacement for hazardous metal color frames. Special, heavy- weight, flame retardant fiberboard will not transmit heat to the filter. Remains cool for safe handling.
8620 8621
8622 8623
31/2" ( 41/4 x41/4) 6" ( 71/2 x71/2)
8" ( 10 x10) 41/2 " ( Mini- ellipse)
.80 1.05
1.90 .95
UV Filter
A virtually transparent filter, specially coated to absorb ultraviolet rays. The material allows less than 10% transmission below 390 nanometers.
20" x24" 48" x 100 sq. ft.
S 4.25 104.00
Fluorescent Sleeves
For simple and economical control of fluorescent lighting.
Clear carrier sleeve is supplied with one insert filter in any of
the 62 Roscolene colors. 48" Roscosleeve.
S 6.00
Prism Filters
Three different styles of holographically produced films that
break light up into different effects.
Each filter is 9" square.
$10.00
Pin Beam Prism Filters
Two styles specially designed for use with pin beams ( rain
light). These filters are 6" square and are a rigid 10 mils.
thick. Each design allows a central beam of light with the
prismatic effect radiating outward from its center. Linear
and Circle.
S 9.00
Marcplot
A fresh approach to teaching and creating lighting design Basic kit includes 220 magnetized markers, a special marking pen and a complete manual written by Marc B. We
8450 Marcplot kit 8451 Marcplot board 24" x36"
S 49.95 49.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-91
ROSCO LABORATORIES, INC.
LIGHT CONTROL MEDIA
36 Bush Ave. Port Chester, NY 10573 (914) 937-1300 Telex 131472
CINEGEL PRODUCTS DAYLIGHT CONVERSION FILTERS
RoscoSun Daylight Conversion Filters are used when shooting in an interior at a 3200 K balance. They are required at windows or other openings to convert incident daylight to an approximation of 3200°K. Partial conversions are utilized where less than full correction ( a cooler or bluer daylight appearance) is preferred. All roll materials are 100 sq. ft. 58" wide, and are optically clear.
CINECOLOR
Roscos Cinecolor range is asehes of effects colors available in rolls that are afull 48"
wide. 100 sq ft
ea. $ 104.00
ARC LIGHT FILTER Rosco' sCinegel System offers awide range of filters for carbon arcs, HMI. CID and CSI
lamps. They vary in the character and the amount of color Correction provided to deal with the ages of the lamps in use and other operating conditions. All materials are 100 sq. ft. and are fabricated in a deep dyed base for optical and high heat stability.
No.
3401 3407 3408 3409 3761
Name
RoscoSun 85 RoscoSun CTO RoscoSun 1/ 2 CTO RoscoSun 1/ 2 CTO Roscolex 85
Description
Converts 5500"K daylight to a nominal 3200 K Converts 5500"K daylight to a nominal 2900"K Converts 5500K daylight to a nominal 3800°K Converts 5500"K daylight to a nominal 4500 K Optically clear rigid acrylic. Panel, 51"x 100" Performs same function as Roscosun 85
Price
$104.00 104 00 104 00 104 00 147 00
NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTERS
RoscoSun Neutral Density Filters reduce the level of incident daylight Two of the materials also convert daylight to anominal 3200"K. Except for RoscoScrim ( 54" wide) all roll materais are 100 sq ft. 58" wide and are optically clear.
No. 3402 3403 3404 3405
3406
3809
3762
3763
Name RoscoSun N3 RoscoSun N6 RoscoSun N9 RoscoSun 85N3
RoscoSun 85N6
RoscoScran
Roscolex N3
Roscolex N6
Description
Reduces light intensity one stop. Reduces light intensity two stops. Reduces light intensity three stops. Reduces light intensity one stop and converts daylight to nominal 3200°K Reduces light intensity two stops and converts daylight to nominal 3200K Perforated material, 54" wide, reduces light intensity two stops with no effect on Kelvin. Optically clear rigid acrylic panel, 51"x 100", reduces light intensity one stop. Optically clear rigid acrylic panel, 51"x 100", reduces light intensity two stops.
Price $10400
104.00 104.00 109.00
109.00
104.00
147.00
147 00
TUNGSTEN CONVERSION FILTERS
Rosco Tungsten Conversion Filters convert incandescent 3200" Kelvin sources to nominal daylight. These filters offer adeep-dyed base for optical clarity and high heat stability. They are 54" wide. 100 sq. ft.
No. 3202 3204 3206 3208 3216
Name
Tough Blue 50 (Full Blue) Tough Booster Blue (Half Blue) Tough ih Booster Blue (Third Blue) Tough Y. Booster Blue (Quarter Blue) Tough V. Blue (Eighth Blue)
Description Boosts 3200K to nominal 5500 ' K daylight Boosts 32001( to 4100 .K Boosts 3200°K to 3800°K Boosts 3200*K to 3500 °K Boosts 32001( to 33001(
Price S104 00
104 00 104 00 104 00 104 00
FLUORESCENT LIGHT FILTERS
Standard cool white or daylight fluorescent tubes offer a reasonable approximation of photographic daylight except for their excessive green content. Two separate techniques are available to deal with this situation- balance all sources to the fluorescents or balance the fluorescents to the sources Rosco Product 3304 es applied to windows or daylight sources and 3306 to 3200-K sources, respectively, to balance them to the fluorescent lights. Rosco Products 3308, 3313, 3314. 3310 and 3311 are applied to the fluorescent lights to convert them to either 3200° Kelvin or nominal daylight All roll materials are 54" wide. 100 sq. ft.. and are optically clear.
No. 3304 3315
3316
3306 3308
3313
3314
3310 3311
Name Tough Plusgreen Tough 1/ 2 Plusgreen
Tough 'A Plusgreen
Tough Plusgreen 50 Tough Minusgreen
Tough Y. Minusgreen
Tough ¼ Minusgreen
Fiuorofilter Fluorofilter
Description
Price
Converts daylight to match fluorescents $ 104.00
Adds partial green to Daylight and 32001C
104.00
sources for balancing with fluorescents and
discharge lamps. Equivalent to CCI 5 Green.
Adds partial green to Daylight and 32001(
104.00
sources for balancing with fluorescents and
discharge sources. Equivalent to CC075 Green
Converts 3200 °K sources to match
104 00
cool white fluorescents
Converts cool white fluorescents to nominal daylight by absorbing excess green output. Partial green absorbing filter equivalent to 0.15cc Magenta Useful on some fluorescent types or discharge sources. Partial green absorbing filter equivalent to 0.075cc Magenta Useful on some fluorescent types or discharge sources. Converts cool white fluorescents to 3200' Kelvin. Same as 3310 in 4 foot sleeves for covering lamps.
104.00 104 00 104.00 104 00
7 75
No 3107
3110
3106
3102
3115 3116 3134 3114
Name
Description
Width
Price
Tough VI
A pale straw filter used in U.S. on H.M.I. or
30" $ 10400
white flame arcs to absorb U.V. and reduce Kelvin for daylight balance.
Tough WF Green Because of generally higher ambient Kelvin. 48"
104.00
Tough MTY
preferred in Europe for the same purpose as Tough VI. A single filter combining MT2 and Y1 for
54"
104.00
Tough MT2
correction of 5500°K white flame arcs and H.M.I. to 3200°K.
When used in combination with Y1, converts 54"
104.00
Tough 42 MT2
white flame arcs to 3200°K. Also useful as an amber conversion filter on H.M.I. and CID conversion. A partial amber conversion for use on Arcs and H.M.I.
54"
104.00
Tough V. MT2 Tough MT 54
Pale amber correction for arcs and H.M.I. A pale straw correction for white flame arcs or H.M.I.
54" 48"
104.00 104.00
Tough UV Filter
A clear slightly tinted filter that absorbs 90% of UV wavelengths below 390 nm. For absorbing UV output of arc sources.
54"
104.00
DIFFUSION MATERIALS
Rosco 's Cinegel System includes the broadest range of diffusion material available 18 different products, plus lour which combine diffusion and ablue tint to boost Kelvin temperature. All diffusers are 100 sq. ft. " Tough designation indicates heat stable filter. " Soft" diffusion should be placed at a distance
No. 3002 3023 3004
3014 3032 3030 3000 3001 3006 3007 3022 3008 3009 3010 3011 3026
3821
Name
Width Price
Solt Frosl
54" $ 60 00
Wide Soft Frost
72"
80 00
Half Density
54"
60 00
Soft Frost
Hilite
55" 115.00
Light Grid Cloth 43"
85.00
Grid Cloth
40"
85.00
Tough Rolux
49'
80.00
Light Tough Rolux 49"
80 00
Tough Spun
55"
80.00
Light Tough Spun 51"
80.00
v. Tough Spun
54"
80.00
Tough Frost
48"
80 00
Light Tough Frost 48"
80.00
Opal Tough Frost 48"
80.00
Tough Silk
54"
80.00
Tough White
48"
80.00
Diffusion
ore RoscoBounce
White
48"
45.00
ROSCOBOND
Pressure sensitive adhesive for bonding Floscoflex media to aluminum or other non- porous board surfaces.
No.
8202 8203
Description
Roscobond Quart Roscobond Gallon
Price
S 6.75 21.50
ROSCOPAKS
Roscopak materials are lightweight, yet strong and durable. These materials can be taped or tacked to virtually any wall, ceiling or panel and turn that area into an
efficient reflector. Each Roscopek consists of 18 sq. ft of material packaged Ina handy pocket size pouch.
No.
8502 8503 8509 8510
Description
Price
RoscoPak F ( silver) $ 15.00 RoscoPek D ( blue/silver) 15.00 RoscoPak G ( gold/silver) 15.00 RoscoPak W (white/sliver) 15.00
REFLECTION MEDIA Roscos reflector materials offer a
wide variety of choices for surfacing reflector boards or for use wherever reflected light is required. The product designation generally indicates the quality of the reflection. These materials are fabricated in a durable, washable plastic laminate. They are 100 sq. ft. and 54" wide ( except for RoscoBounce W. which is 48 - wide).
No. 3801 3802 3803 3804 3805 3806 3807
3808
3809
3810 3821
Description
Price
Roscotlex M ( mirror) $ 85 00
Roscoflex H ( hard)
85.00
Roscoflex S ( soft)
85.00
Roscoflex SS ( supersoft) 85.00
Roscollex G (gold tinted) 85.00
Roscof les C ( cool blue tint) 85 00
Roscof lesO
85.00
(daylight blue/silver)
Roscollex F
85.00
¡featherweight)
Roscocrim
104.00
(perforated silver/black)
Roscollex W ( white/silver) 85.00
RoscoBounce W ( white) 45.00
DIFFUSION/BOOSTER
MATERIALS
These filters offer the same diffusion properties as those described above, but contain a deep-dyed blue correction, integral to the material, which raises the Kelvin temperature of 3200"K sources. These materials are 54" wide, 100 sq. ft.
No. Name Description
Price
3025 Tough Y. Diffuses and
$85.00
Booster increases 32001(
Frost
sources to
3012
Tough Booster Silk
3300 °K.
Diffuses and
85.00
increases 32001(
sources to
3013 Tough
3500 °K Diffuses and
85.00
3017
Booster Frost
Tough Blue Frost
increases 3200*K
sources to
3800°K.
Diffuses and
85.00
Increases 3200"K
sources to
nominal daylight.
VL-92
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Ev SMITH- VICTOR
27740 Hopkins Ave. Valencia, CA 91355 (805) 257-4447
QUARTZ LIGHTING KITS
K2R
<62 h.50
K33
KE3
K22U
K2R 1800 Watt Quartz Location Kit
$295.00
A complete location lighting kit in an attache case. The most compact 3 light kit on the market with a price to match.
3 700 3 DYH
3 S6R 1 634L
401101 401928
401242 402202
600 watt quartz units 600 watt 3200°K quartz lamps
6' Steel Stands Carrying Case
Size: 18" x 12" x6" Weight: 15 lbs.
K2R Accessories:
701
401301
Barn doors for 700 quartz unit
$36.95
G5
401264
Gaffer grip -- portable light mount
14.95
K33 1800 Watt Quartz Location Kit
$529.95
A complete lighting system at a popular price; contains everything needed for professional results.
3 700 3 DYH 3 701
3 SA28 1 650
401101 401928 401301
401233 402208
600 watt quartz units 600 watt 3200°K quartz lamps Barn doors for 700 quartz units 8' aluminum stands Carrying case
Size: 24
x 14 1 /2 "x63 /4 " Weight: 17 lbs.
K33 Accessories:
G5
401264
Gaffer grip -- portable light mount
$14.95
K50 1800 Watt Quartz Location Kit
$699.95
Excellent versatility with professional results is offered in this 3- light kit featuring a600 watt key and 2600 watt broad fill lights.
1 760
2 770 3 DYH 3 771 2 712
3 SA28 1 650
401112
401113 401928 401325 401312
401233 402208
Size: 24 1 / 2 "x 14 1 /2 " x63 /4 "
600 wan quartz key unit 600 watt quartz broad units 600 watt 3200°K quartz lamps Barn doors Single scrims 8' aluminum stands Carrying case
Weight: 22 lbs.
K50 Accessories:
G5
401264
712 401312
Gaffer grip -- portable light mount Single scrim
S14.95 11.95
K63 1800 Watt Quartz Location Kit
$324.95
3 light kit offers excellent portability arid versatility for basic photographic and video applications.
3 060
401130
3 DYS/DYV 401970
3 S9
401240
1
105664
1
300779
600 watt quartz units
600 watt 3200°K quartz lamps 6' 4- legged steel stands Light case Stand case
Size: Stand case 29 1/ 4 "x81/ 2 " x23/ 4 " Weight: 23 lbs.. 10 oz. Light case 29 1/ 2 "x 13 3/ 4 "x81/ 2 "
K62 1200 Watt Quartz Location Kit
5239.95
Basic 2 light quartz kit permits trofessional results in photographic and video applications, offers room for additional light and stand to be added at alater date.
2 060
401130
2 DYS DYV 401970
2 S9
401240
105664
300779
600 watt quartz units 600 watt 3200°K quartz lamps
6' 4- legged steel stands Light case Stand case
Size: Stand case 29 1/ 4 " x81/ 2 " x23/ 4 " Weight: 17 lbs., 1oz. Light case 29Y," x 13 V." x81/ 2 "
K22U 1200 Watt Quartz Location Kit
$349.95
An excellent starter for the serious am3teur photographer or videographer offers room for additional accessories.
2 700 2 DYH 2 2 2 S7
1 650
401101 401928 670002 670033 401239
402208
600 watt quartz lamps 600 watt 3200°K quartz lamps 38" white umbrellas Combination light and umbrella mounts 6 ft. steel stands Carrying case
Size: 24 1/ 2 "x 14 1/ 2 "x63/ 4 " Weight: 15 lbs., 10 oz.
K22U Accessories:
701 401301
G3
401263
Barn Doors for 700 Quartz unit Gaffer grip -- 3,8" portable light mount
$36.95 14.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-93
sv SMITH-VICTOR
27740 Hopkins Ave. Valencia, CA 91355 (905) 257-4447
K71
QUARTZ LIGHTING KITS
K74
K75
K76
K74 3090 Watt Professional Quartz Location Kit
$1035.00
K71 1800 Watt Professional Focusing Quartz
Location Kit
$900.00
Versatility is the key word in this professional quartz lighting kit featuring the flexibility of 3 focusing units which allow smooth transition from spot to flood.
3 710
3 DYH 2 711 2 712
3 SA10 1 674
401102 401928 401307
401312 401235 402206
600 watt focusing quartz lamps 600 watt 3200°K quartz lamps Barn doors Single scrims
10' aluminum stands Carrying case
Size: 29" x18" x8" Weight: 28 lbs.
K71 Accessories
711 712 G5
401307 401312 401264
Barn doors Single scrim Gaffes grip -- portable light mount
$34.95 11 95 14 95
K72 1900 Watt Professional Quartz Location Kit
$925.00
Our most powerful 3 unit lighting kit offers the versatility and flexibility of 2 1000 watt broad units and a 1000 watt focusing unit.
2 750
2 FI-IM 2 752 1 720
1 FBY 1 721 3 SA48 1 674
401105
620380 401322 401103
620140 401308 401234 402206
1000 watt quartz broad units
1000 watt 3200°K quartz lamps Single scrims 1000 watt focusing quartz unit
1000 watt 3200°K quartz lamp Barn doors 8' Aluminum stands Carrying case
Size: 29" x 18" x8" Weight: 34 lbs.
K74 Accessories
722
40 1316
G5
40'264
401260
Single scrim Gaffer grip -- portable light mount
30" Stand Extension
$14.95 14.95 12.95
K75 2500 Watt Professional Quartz Location Kit
$1225.00
Everything you need and more is found in this Smith- Victor 4 light kit. Two each focusing and broad units provide excellent lighting for both studio and location use in photographic and video applications.
Key in on the action vv'th this professional kit featuring a 600 watt focusing unit and 2650 watt broad units. Ideal for smaller set applications.
2 740 2 FBX 2 742 1 710 1 DYH 1 711 3 SA48 1 674
401104 620050 401319 401102 401928 401307
401234 402206
650 watt quartz broad units 650 watt 3200°K quartz lamp Single scrims 600 watt focusing quartz unit 600 watt 3200°K quartz lamp Barn doors 8' aluminum stands
Carrying case
2 740 3 FBX 2 742 2 710 3 DYH 2 721
4 SA48 1 674
401104 620050 401319 401102 401928 401308
401234 402206
650 watt quartz broad units 650 watt 3200°K quartz lamps Single scrims 600 watt focusing quartz unit 600 watt 3200°K quartz lamps Barn doors
8' aluminum stands
Carrying case
Size: 29" x 18" x8" Weight: 35 lbs.
Size: 29" x 18" x8" Weight: 30 lbs.
K75 Accessories
K72 Accessories
712
401312
G5
401264
401260
Single scrim
Gaffer grip -- portable light mount 30" Stand Extension
$11.95 14.95 12.95
712 G5
401312 401264 401260
Single scrim Gaffer grip -- portable light mount 30" Stand Extension
K76 4000 Watt Professional Quartz Location Kit
$11.95 14.95 12.95
K73 3000 Watt Professional Focusing Quartz Location Kit
$995.00
Extra coverage and reach are provided in this kit featuring 3 1000 watt focusing
$1400.00
A winning combination is found in this, Smith- Victor's most complete lighting kit. The pairing of 2 1000 watt focusing and 2 1000 watt broad units make this Smith- Victors most versatile and powerful kit.
units.
2 750
401105
1000 watt quartz units
3 720
401103
1000 watt focusing quartz units
3 FHM
620380
1000 war: 32009( quartz lamps
3 FBY
620140
1000 watt 3200°K quartz lamps
2 752
401322
Single sc-ims
2 721
401308
Barn doors
2 720
401103
1000 watt focusing quartz units
2 722
401316
Single scrims
3 FBY
620140
1000 watt 3200°K quartz lamps
3 SA48
401234
8' aluminum stands
2 721
401308
Barn doors
1 674
402206
Carrying case
2 722
401316
Single scrims
Size: 29" x18" x8" Weioht: 32 lbs.
K73 Accessories
721
401308
Barn doors
$42.95
4 SA48 1 674
401234 402206
8' aluminum stands Carrying case
Size: 29" x ' 8" it 8" Weight: 41 lbs.
G5
401264
Gaffer grip -- portable light mount
14.95
K76 Accessories
401260
30" Stand Extension
12.95
G5
401264
Gaffer grip -- portable light mount
401260
30" Stand Extension
VL-94
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$14.95 12.95
sv SMITH- VICTOR
27740 Hopkins Ave. Valencia, CA 91355 (805) 257-4447
MODEL 720
LIGHTING
Similar in design to the 710, the 720 focusing quartz unit delivers up to 1000 watts output for more demanding applications. Complete with safety wire.
Rating: 120 volts- 8.4 amps at 1000 watts. Socket: Recessed single contact (R7S). Switch: In- line. Cable: 10 ft. 3- wire grounded. Construction: Vented aluminum. Mounting: Universal - 3/8" to 5/8". Reflector: Soft- grained spun aluminum.
720
401103
1000 Watt Focusing Light $ 130.00
FBY 721 722
620140 401308 401316
1000 Watt Lamp, 3200°K, 120 Volt, Frosted Barn Door for 720 Sgl. Scrim for 720
40.50 42.95 14.95
MODEL 740 UL
The Model 740 650 watt quartz broad light provides rectangular, flat, even fill
illumination over large areas. Permanently attached 4- leaf barn doors provide posi-
700
tive light control with sharp, even cut-off.
Large insulated handle for easy adjustment. Perfect for photographic and video
applications, the 740 is also ideal as a copy light. Complete with safety wire.
Rating: 120 volt -- 5.5 amps at 650 watts. Socket: Recessed single contact ( R7S). Switch: In- Line. Cable: 10 ft., 3- wire grounded. Construction: Vented Steel. Mounting: Universal - 3/8" to 5/8". Reflector: Embossed, soft- etched aluminum.
740
401104
650 Watt Broad Light, Inc. Barndoors
$145.00
FBX
620050
650 Watt Lamp, 3200°K, 120 Volt, Frosted
28.25
780
742
401319
Sgl. Scrim for 740
11.95
MODEL 750 UL
710
Similar in design to the 740, the 750 quartz broad unit provides 1000 watts of
fill illumination over large areas. Permanently attached 4- leaf barn doors provide
sharp, even cut-off. Ideal for photographic, video, and graphic arts applications.
Complete with safety wire.
Rating: 120 Volt - 8.4 amps at 1000 watts. Socket: Recessed single contact (R7S). Switch: In- line. Cable: 10 ft. 3- wire grounded. Construction: Vented Steel. Mounting: Universal -- 3/8" to 5/8". Reflector: Embossed, soft- etched aluminum.
750
401105
1000 Watt Broad Light, Inc. Barndoors
$150.00
FHM 752
620380 401322
1000 Watt Lamp, 3200°K, 120 Volt, Frosted Sgl. Scrim for 750
38.00 12.95
720
760 UL
The fixed focus 760 is ageneral purpose 600 watt quartz fill light for photographic
and video applications. High efficiency pebble- finished aluminum reflector provides
even coverage over entire lighted area. Safety wire provided.
Rating: 120 Volt - 5.4 amps at 600 watts. Socket: Miniature 2- pin ( G5.3). Switch: In- line. Cable: 10 ft., 3- wire grounded. Construction: Double- wall vented alumi-
num. Mounting: Universal - 3/8" to 5'8". Reflector: Pebble- finish spun aluminum.
760
401112
600 Watt Fill Light
$90.00
740
QUARTZ UNITS MODEL 700
Q60 Q120
770
An economical, compact 600 watt quartz broad unit, the 770 provides rectangular, flat even illumination over large areas. All aluminum construction provides for cool operation. For photographic, video, and graphic arts applications. Safety wire Provided.
Rating: 120 Volt - 5.4 amps at 600 watts. Socket: Miniature 2- pin ( G5.3) Switch: In- line. Cable: 10 ft., 3- wire grounded. Construction: Vented aluminum. Mounting: Universal - 3/8" to 5/8". Reflector: Embossed, soft- etched aluminum.
770
401113
600 Watt Broad Light
$80.00
DYH
401928
600 Watt Lamp, 3200°K, 120 Volt, Clear
24.50
771
401325
Barn Door for 760 and 770
39.95
712
401312
Sgl. Scrim for 760 and 770
11.95
Q60 UL
The Model 700 quartz light is a low cost, compact 600 watt flood featuring a broad, even beam pattern Unit s supplied with a 600 watt 75 hr. DYH lamp rated at 3200°K.
Contemporary- styled, general purpose 600 watt quartz unit for basic photographic
and video applications. The 060 features baffled and vented construction for cool operation. Supplied with permanently attached 2- leaf barn doors.
Unit shown with optional 701 - 401301 4- Leaf barn doors. Rating: 120 volt - 5.4 amps at 600 watts. Socket: Miniature 2- Pin ( G5.31. Switch: Unit- Mounted. Cable: 10 foot, 2Wire. Construction: Phenolic Resin. Mounting: Universal - 3/8 - to 5; 8". Reflector: Etched aluminum.
Rating: 120 Volt - 5.4 amps at 600 watts. Socket: 2- pin prefocus ( GZ9.5). Switch: Unit- mounted, Cable: 10 ft., 3- wire grounded. Construction: Vented and baffled aluminum. Mounting: Universal - 3/8" to 5/8". Reflector: Pebble- finish spun aluminum.
700 DYH 701
401101 401928 401301
600 Watt Quartz Light with DYH Lamp 600 Watt Lamp, 3200°K, 120 Volt, Clear Barr Door for 700
$60.00 24.50 36.95
MODEL 710 UL
A profinsional 600 watt focusing quartz unit, the 710 is well suited for key, fill
ano ba...klighting applications. Rear- mounted focusing lever allows easy flood to spot control. Ideal for photographic and video applications. Complete wth safety cable.
Rating: 120V - 5.4 Amps at 600 watts. Socket: Miniature 2- Pin ( G5.3). Switch: In line. Cable: 10 ft., 3-wre grounded. Construction: Double- wall vented aluminum. Mounting: Universal - 3/8" to 5/8". Reflector: Pebble- finish spun aluminum.
710
401102
600 Watt Focusing Light
$109.95
DYH
401928
600 Watt Lamp, 3200°K, 120 Volt, Clear
24.50
711
401307
Barn Door for 710
34.95
Q60 DYS/ DYV
401130 401970
600 Watt Fill light, Inc. Barndoors 600 Watt Lamp, 3200°K, Clear
$70.00 22.10
Q120 UL
Q125 UL
A general purpose 12" quartz reflector, the 600 watt 0120 provides asoft, diffused beam pattern for photographic and video fill applications. Vented and baffled construction permits cool operation. Swivel yoke allows for easy positioning at any angle. 0125 is similar to Q120 but supplied with high- low switch.
Rating: 120 Volt - 5.4 amps at 600 watts. Socket: 2- pin prefocus ( GZ9.5) Switch: Unit- mounted, Cable: 10 ft., 3- wire grounded. Construction: Vented and baffled aluminum. Mounting: Universal - 3/8" to 5/8". Reflector: Etched, spun aluminum.
Q120 Q125
401116 401117
600 Watt 12" Reflector 600 Watt 12" Reflector with High/Low Switch
$75.00 99.50
DYS/ DYV
401970
600 Watt Lamp, 3200°K, 120 Volt, Clear
22.10
712
401312
Sgl. Scrim for 710
11.95
BD120 401344
Barn Door and Filter Holder for 0120/0125
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
41.95
VL-95
sv SMITH-VICTOR
27740 Hopkins Ave. Valencia, CA 91355 (805) 257-4447
MOUNTS AND ACCESSORIES
SA24
s. SA8
Aluminum Stands Strength and stability need not be sacrificed in a lighter weight stand. Smith- Victor aluminum stands offer compactness and portability and are the ideal answer for the
photographer on the go.
SA10
Standard Models SA24 401231 Folding to 14", this 3/8" mount 3- section
stand extends to 46" making it ideal for
low background lighting.
$39.95
SA28 401233 8', 3/8" mount 5- section folds to only
22-1/2".
$54.95
SA210 401236 10' 5- section version of SA28 folds to 27".
3/8" mount.
$60.00
BP4
Ai
n
Deluxe Professional Stands
SA8 401232 8' double- braced tubular leg 5- section
stand folds to 3/8" mount.
$85.00
SA10 401235 10' 5- section version of SA8 folds to
27-1/2". 3/8" mount.
$87.00
SA48 401234 8' heavy-duty, 5/8" mount 3- section stand
for most demanding applications. Folds to
27-1/2".
$80.00
Steel Stands S- V steel stand offers strength, stability, and years of
dependable, trouble- free service at the most economical price. Ideal for studio applications, these general purpose
stands are available in heights from 6to 10 feet.
S2 S3 S4 S6R
S7 S9
S84
401228 6-1/2' 2- section stand folds to 42". 3/8"
mount.
$20.95
401229 8' heavy-duty 3- section stand folds to 36".
3/8" mount.
$31.95
401230 10' heavy-duty 4- section stand folds to
37". 3/8" mount.
$36.95
401242 6' 4- section stand disassembles for easy
storage and portability. 3/8" mount.
$31.95
401239 Compact 6' model folds to 22". 3/8"
mount.
$31.95
401240 6' stand is designed to give extra stability
with the addition of a4th leg. 3/8" mount.
Folds to 27".
$34.95
401241 8' 5/8" mount version of S9 folds to 37". $36.95
BRIO 401250
This professional 4- legged roller base stand is equipped with
a 10 ft., 5/8" mount upright. Solid steel legs feature 4
locking ball- bearing casters to prevent creeping or rolling on
uneven surfaces.
$170.00
Boom and Boom Lights More than just an accessory, the boom is truly the profes-
sional way to light a subject. The addition of a boommounted accent or hair light can mean the difference between a " good" photograph and a " great" photograph.
BP4 401224 This versatile light boom incorporates a2 lb. counterweight mounted on a51" steel shaft. An adjustable locking swivel allows for unlimited positioning. Fits all 3/8" mount stands. Also doubles as amicrophone boom. $57.00
alI:M3P 1
GAFFER GRIPS
MP2
MP4
Stand Extension 401260 Add up to 30" to any 3/8" - 5/8" mount light stand. May
also be used as acrossarm to mount 2light units on asingle
stand.
401260 Stand Extension 5/8" mount ( adds 30")
$12.95
85 Mini Boom 401012 A winning combination - a boom
arm and light in one. Using either spot or flood reflector
lamps, the mini- boom provides the solution to many
lighting problems. 44" aluminum boom with counterweight
features a660 watt swivel socket easily adjusted to any posi-
tion by means of attached control handle. Unit comes with
12 ft. cord and fits any 3/8" mount stand.
$49.95
Mounts Smith- Victor offers 3wall mount brackets with various stud lengths to fit avariety of applications. Base plates on all models measure 4" x6". Wall mounts are ideally suited for
permanent installations when agrid system is not feasible. They may also be gaffer- taped to walls for location shooting.
MP1 MP2 MP4
401217 3" long 5/8" dia. stud
$19.95
401218 6" long, 5/8" dia. stud
19.95
401220 9" long, 5/8" dia. stud with 90° bend
$21.95
C7 401216 For heavy-duty applications, this professional
5/8" mount, C- clamp is ideal for grid-type applications. Can
be clamped to any pipe up to 2" O.D.
$24.95
G3- G5 This spring- loaded Lexan® casting takes over where the Cl clamp leaves off. Equipped with a3" long stud, the
gaffer grip clamps to any surface up to 2-1/2" wide. Rubber cleats prevent marring. Pre- drilled to accept an extra stud allowing you to mount 2 lights. Extra studs available.
Gaffer Grips G3 401263 3/8" mount G5 401264 5/8" mount
$14.95 14.95
VL-96
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SV SMITH-VICTOR
27740 Hopkins Ave. Valencia, CA 91355 (805) 257-4447
VIDEO CAMERA LIGHT/ LIGHT PACK
Model Q250 Video Camera Light Designed to mount on any video camera shoe, the Model
0250 is acompact 250 watt flood unit featuring abroad, even beam pattern. Lightweight and equipped with an extra long 15' cord, the light can be adjusted to avariety of angles to fill ahost of camera situations. Model 0250 will enhance colors and eliminate undesirable shadows. Complete with 250 watt 3200°K, 50 hour quartz lamp and shoe mount bracket.
Specifications:
Model Q250 (401135) ·Rating: 120V -- 2.8 amps at 250 watts ·Socket: Miniature 2- pin ( G5.3) ·Switch: Unit- mounted ·Cable: 15', 2wire ·Construction: Phenolic resin ·Mounting: Shoe mount bracket supplied ·Reflector: Etched aluminum
Model Q250
$ 54.95
Accessory:
QL250 (401906) Replacement 250 watt, 120V.
3200°K quartz lamp for SV 0250.
May also be used in SV models
700, 710, 760 and 770
$22.95
Micro 100 Pack Eliminate unwanted shadows and enrich colors with the Micro 100 Lght Pack. Complete with 100 watt 3200°K lamp, the lighting unit is designed for safety with vented spun aluminum housing and reflector, with integral tempered safety glass. Camera shoe and microphone mount make the light unit especially convenient to use with any video camera. The Micro 100 Pack comes complete with light unit, battery, charger and its own handsome carrying case.
Specifications:
Micro 100 Pack (401477)
Lighting Unit: See below
Battery:
12VDC, 50AH sealed lead acid cells
Case:
9-3/4"H x7-1/2"W x3-1/2"D
Polyethylene case wi nylon webbing strap
Charger -
110-120VAC, 500 milliamp/hr. taper
charger
Weight:
7.25 lbs. ( including light and charger)
Micro 100 Pack (401477)
$109.95
Components/Accessory
Micro 100 Micro light head only with FCR lamp
(401142) and coil cord
$ 49.95
BP- 2C
12V battery pack %Ai/case,
(662009) strap cord
69.95
BP- 6
Auxiliary 9.6V battery pack w/charger
(662101) for Betamovie
129.95
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VI- 97
STRAND CENTURY,
P.O. Box 9004 Rancho Dominguez, CA 90224 (213) 637-7500 Telex 664741
INC.
PORTABLE LIGHTING KITS
KIT IV
KIT V
KIT VII
PORTABLE LIGHTING KITS A wide choice of compact, lightweight complete lighting kits, with rugged, fitted cases.
Catalog Number
Description
1051
Kit I, Fitted Case with:
3-4500MP Pulsars
3-1310
4- Leaf Barndoors
1-1225
Full Double Scrim
1-1226 1-1227 1-1228
1053
Kit Ill, Fitted Case with:
3-4501 MP Lanebeam 650
2-1230
Accessory Holders
2-1324
4- Leaf Barndoor
1-1216 1-1217 3- FAD
1054
Kit IV, Fitted Case with:
2-4501MP Lanebeam 650
2-1230
Accessory Holders
2-1324
4- Leaf Barndoors
1-1216 1-1217 2-4801MP
1055
Kit V, Fitted Case with:
2-4503MP Lanebeam 1000
2-1230
Accessory Holders
2-1324
4- Leaf Barndoors
1-1216
Double Scrim
1-1217 3-4801MP 2-DXW 3-FCM
1056
Kit VI, Fitted Case with:
4-4501MP Lanebeam 650
2-1216
4-1230
Accessory Holders 2-1217
4-1324
Barndoors
4- FAD
1057
Kit VII, Fitted Case with:
4-4503MP Lanebeam 1000 2-1216
4-1230
Accessory Holders 2-1217
4-1324
Barndoors
4-DXW
1061
Kit X, Fitted Case with:
2-4505MP Lanebeam 2000
2-1325
4- Leaf Barndoors
1-1221
Double Scrim
1-1222
1-1223 1-1224
Half Double Scrim 3-DYS Full Single Scrim 3-1529 Half Single Scrim
Double Scrim Single Scrim
3-1530
Double Scrim Single Scrim Mini Fill 1000
Single Scrim Mini Fill 1000
2- FAD 2-FCM 4-1530
1-1963
4-1535
Double Scrims Single Scr'ms
4-1535
Double Scrims Single Scrims
4-1535
Single Scrim Half Double Scrim 2-1535 Half Single Scrim
600W Lamps Pulsar Stands
Stands
Price $790.00
$765.00
650W Lamps 1000W Lamps Stands
Gaffer Grip with %" ( 15mm) stud Stands
$990.00 $1165.00
Stands
$1105.00
Stands
$1105.00
Stands
$995.00
NOTES Lamps listed are 3200°K unless otherwise noted. Lamps and fixtures are 120V unless otherwise noted. For international applications, designate 100, 120, 220 or 240V operation.
VL-98
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
STRAND CENTURY, INC.
P.O. Box 9004 Rancho Dominguez, CA 90224 (213) 637-7500 Telex 664741
PORTABLE LIGHTING UNITS
PORTABLE LIGHTING UNITS
Light, compact, efficient focusing floodlights, ideally suited for location and remote use. Complete with 12' 13.6m) cord and switch, and 5/8" ( 16mm) stud for stand mounting.
Pulsar 600 - Fiberglass Housing
4515MP 600W Pulsar, variable focus, stand mount
ACCESSORIES
1310
4- Way Barndoor
1133
Color or Diffuser Frame
1141
Outrigger Color or Diffuser Frame
1281
Dichroic Filter
1225
Full Double Scrim
1226
Full Single Scrim
1227
Half Double Scrim
1228
Half Single Scrim
$ 120.00
$ 25.00 12.00 80.00 80.00 11.25 11.25 11.25 11.25
LAMPS DYS
DYG DYR
600W 75 hrs
250W 15 hrs., 30V 650W 50 hrs., 220 or 240V
lanebeam 650 - Fiberglass Housing
4501MP 650W lanebeam, variable focus, stand mount $116.00
4501GG Same, with flexible arm and gaffer grip
150.00
4502MP Same, for 220 or 240V operation
116.00
ACCESSORIES
1230
Accessory Holder ( for all accessories)
1324
4-Way Barndoor
1282
Dichroic Filter ( converts 3200°K to 5600°K)
1216
Full Double Scrim
1217
Full Single Scrim
1218
Half Double Scrim
1219
Half Single Scrim
$ 31.00 28.00
112.00
11.25 11.25 11.25
11.25
LAMPS
EH R 400W 2000 hrs., 3000°K
FDA
400W 250 hrs
FAD
650W 100 hrs
FBX
650W 100 hrs
DXX
800W 50 hrs., 220 or 240V
lanebeam 1000 - Fiberglass Housing
4503MP 1000W lanebeam, variable focus, stand mounted. $ 116.00
4503GG Same, with flexible arm and gaffer grip
150.00
ACCESSORIES
1230
Accessory holder ( for all accessories)
1324
4- Way Barndoor
1282
Dichroic Filter ( converts 3200°K to 5600°K)
1216
Full Double Scrim
1217
Full Single Scrim
1218
Half Double Scrim
1219
Half Single Scrim
LAMPS
FCB DXW FBY
600W 75 hrs 1000W 150 hrs 1000W 150 hrs
$ 31.00
28.00 112.00
11.25 11.25 11.25
11.25
lanebeam 2000
4505MP 2000W lanebeam, variable focus, stand mounted
with integral accessory holder
$ 285.00
4506MP Same, for 220 or 240V operation
285.00
ACCESSORIES
1325
4- Way Barndoor
1283
Dichroic Filter ( converts 3200°K to 5600°K)
1221
Full Double Scrim
1222
Full Single Scrim
1223
Half Double Scrim
1224
Halt Single Scrim
LAMPS FER
DVV FEY
FEX
1000W 500 hrs 1500W 300 hrs 2000W 300 hrs 2000W 300 hrs., 220 or 240V
$ 52.00
310.00 11.50 11.50 11.50 11.50
NOTES
·Fixtures are provided with 3' (. 9m) leads, connectors and C- clamp for hanging unless otherwise specified
·To specify grounded connector type, add suffix to catalog number: GP - Three Pin GTL-Twistlock GR - Parallel Blade U- Ground
HGP - Harj-lock Pin Connector ·To specify fixture type add suffix to catalog number:
MP- For stand mounting, with 23' ( 7m) cable and in- line switch
P0- For pole operation · Lamps ano color frames not included unless otherwise noted ·Lamps listed are 3200°K unless otherwise noted. Lamps and fixtures
are 120 vo,t unless otherwise noted · For international applications, designate 100, 120, 220 or 240 volt
operation ·tContact Strand Century for current lamp prices
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-99
STRAND CENTURY, INC.
P.O. Box 9004 Rancho Dominguez, CA 90224 (213) 637-7500 Telex 664741
PORTABLE LIGHTING/FLOODLIGHTS/ HMI SYSTEMS
Mini-Fill 1000
Compact high intensity fill light-- wide angle smooth beam.
4801MP 1000W Mini- Fill floodlight with integral
4- Way Barndoor and cable
LAMPS
FDN
500W 400 hrs
EMP
750W400 hrs
FCM
1000W 500 hrs
FHM EMF
1000W 500 hrs 800W 250 hrs
$220.00
t t t t t
Broad
Small versatile floodlight for television, photography and motion picture applications.
4520TV 1000/1500W Broad! Location Softlight, hanging . . .$ 137.00
4520MP Same, stand mount
137.00
4521
Same, for 220 or 240V operation
158.00
ACCESSORIES
1344
4- Way Barndoor
1155
Outrigger Color! Diffuser Frame
$48.00 96.00
LAMPS FFT FDB
P2/7 P2/12
1000W 400 hrs 1500W 400 hrs
1000W 200 hrs., 220 or 240V 1250W 200 hrs., 220 or 240V
Par 64 Holders
Low cost, compact units for a choice of Par lamps.
4755
Par 64 Holder
ACCESSORIES
1110
Color Frame
1408
8- Way Barndoor
LAMPS
FFN FFP
1000W 400 hrs., Narrow Spot 1000W 400 hrs., Spot
FFR FFS
1000W 400 hrs., Medium Flood 1000W 400 hrs., Wide Flood
CP60 CP61
300 hrs., Narrow Spot 220 or 240V 300 hrs., Medium Flood 220 or 240V
CP62 300 hrs., Wide Flood 220 or 240V
$48.00
$8.50 84.00
t t t t t t t
Strand Century/laniro HMI Daylight Systems
A range of Fresnels by laniro, utilizing super high efficiency HMI lamps
(up to 102 LPW at 5600°K). Each system is complete with ballast, starter, cables and accessories.
3360MP 575W System with: 6"1150mm) Fresnel, Wireguard, 8- Way Barndoor and Color Frame Ballast and cables
3570MP 1200W System with: 10" 1250mm) Fresnel, Wireguard, 8- Way Barndoor and Color Frame Ballast and cables
3680MP 2500W System with: 12"1300mm) Fresnel, Wireguard, 8-Way Barndoor and Color Frame
Ballast and cables 3790MP 4000W System with: 14"1350mm) Fresnel,
Wireguard, 8-Way Barndoor and Color Frame Ballast and cables
3796MP 6000W System with: 14" ( 350mm) Fresnel, Wireguard, 8- Way Barndoor and Color Frame Ballast and cables
$2100.00 2730.00 4015.00 5723.00 9251.00
HMI DAYLIGHT SYSTEMS
4801MP
4520
HMI Performance Data
Catalog Number
3360 3570
3680 3790 3796
Distance
20 ( 6m) 25'17 5m)
35' ( 10 5m) 50' ( 15m) 70' ( 21m)
Spot Focus Footcandles ( lus)
500 ( 5555) 1120 ( 12 440)
898 (9980) 960 ( 10 670) 1295 ( 14 400)
1 10 Peak Flood Focus 1 10 Peak Diameter Footcandles (lux) Diameter
611 8m) 58' ( 17m)
13 7' (4 1m) 14' (42m) 14 7' (44m)
55 (625) 80 (890) 82 ( 910) 74 (820)
65 ( 750)
22 6' ( 68mm) 32(8 6mm)
52 9' ( 15 9mm) 61 5118 5mm)
85 4' ( 25 6mm)
NOTES
·Fixtures are provided with 3' 1.9m) leads, connectors and C- clamp for hanging unless otherwise specified
·To specify grounded connector type, add suffix to catalog number: GP -- Three Pin GTL -- Twistlock GR -- Parallel Blade U- Ground HGP -- Harj-lock Pin Connector
·To specify fixture type add suffix to catalog number: MP-- For stand mounting, with 23' ( 7m) cable and in- line switch PO -- For pole operation
· Lamps and color frames not included unless otherwise noted ·Lamps listed are 3200°K unless otherwise noted. Lamps and fixtures
are 120 volt unless otherwise noted
·For international applications, designate 100, 120, 220 or 240 volt operation
tContact for current lamp prices
VL-100
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
STRAND CENTURY,
P.O. Box 9004 Rancho Dominguez, CA 90224 (213) 637-7500 Telex 664741
INC.
FRESNELS
STRAND CIENTURY/IANIRO FRESNELS
Efficient, soft edged beam with excellent barndooring characteristics for high performance situations.
3" ( 76mm) 200W " Mizar"
1211 1125 1173 1174 1175
Half single scrim Wireguard 4-3/8" ( 111mm) cone 6" ( 152mm) cone 7-3/4" ( 197mm) cone
21.25 16.00 80.00 80.00 80.00
3101TV 3101MP
3" ( 76mm) Fresnel, hanging 3" ( 76mm) Fresnel, stand mount
ACCESSORIES
1310
4-way barndoor
1133
Color or diffuser frame
1225
Full double scrim
1226 1227
Full single scrim Half double scrim
1228
Half single scrim
1183
Variable cone
1500
Safety cable for hanging
LAMPS 100G/CL/DC
150(1/CL/DC FEV
100W 1000 hrs 150W 2000 hrs 200W 50 hrs
6" ( 152mm) 1000W " Polaris"
3301TV
6" ( 152mm) 1000W Fresnel, hanging
3301P0
6" ( 152mm) 1000W Fresnel, pole- op
3301MP
6" ( 152mm) 1000W Fresnel, stand mount
$189.00 189.00
$25.00 12.00 11.25 11.25 11.25 11.25 74.25 8 75
$228.00 357.00 252.00
LAMPS CYV CXZ CYX CP41
1000W 200 hrs. 1500W 325 hrs 2000W 250 hrs 2000W 400 hrs. 220 or 240V
12" ( 305mm) 5000W " Pollux"
3601TV*
12" ( 305mm) 5000W Fresnel, hanging
$648.00
3601P0*
12" ( 305mm) 5000W Fresnel, pole- op
770.00
3601MP"
12" ( 305mm) 5000W Fresnel, stand -mount .. 697.00
ACCESSORIES
1302
8-way rotatable barndoor
1146
Color or diffuser frame
1212
Full double scrim
1213
Full single scrim
1214
Half double scrim
1215
Half single scrim
1126
Wireguard
1176
6-1/4" ( 159mm) cone
1177
9" ( 229mm) cone
1178
11" (279mm) cone
$133.00
37.00 42.50 42.50 42.50 42.50 32.00 101.00 101.00 101.00
ACCESSORIES
1300
8-Way rotatable barndoor
1144
Color or diffuser frame
1201
Full double scrim
1202
Full single scrim
1203
Half double scrim
1204
Half single scrim
$64.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
1123 1170
Wireguard 2-1/4" ( 57mm) cone
11.00 37.00
1171 1941
3" ( 76mm) cone Operating Pole 6' ( 1.8m), 2.1 lb. ( 0.95kg)
37.00 85.00
1942
Operating Pole 9'3" ( 2.8m), 2.8 lb. ( 1.3kg)
90.00
1943
Operating Pole 12'7" ( 3.8m), 3.5 lb. ( 1.6kg)
96.00
1944
Operating Pole 15'10" ( 4.8m), 4.2 lb. ( 1.9kg) . .106.00
LAMPS EGN EGR EGT
CP39 CP40
500W 100 hrs 750W 200 hrs 1000W 200 hrs
650W 100 hrs. 220 or 240V 1000W 200 hrs. 220 or 240V
10" ( 254mm) 2000W " Castor"
3501TV
10" ( 254mm) 2000W Fresnel, hanging
$357.00
3501P0
10" ( 254mm) 2000W Fresnel, pole- op
490.00
3501MP
10" ( 254mm) 2000W Fresnel, stand- mount .. 420.00
ACCESSORIES
1301
8- Way rotatable barndoor
1145
Color or diffuser frame
1208
Full double scrim
1209
Full single scrim
1210
Half double scrim
$101.00 32.00 21.25
21.25 21.25
LAMPS DPY CP29
5000W 500 hrs 5000W 500 hrs. 220 or 240V
"NOTE: Units Include Wireguard
laniro Fresnel Performance Data
CMalog Number
3101 3301 3501 3601
Distance
le (3.)
15' 5m)
25 .( 7 5m) 35' ( 10 501)
Spot Focus
FoolcanOles
1,2 Pees
Memel«
234 (2600) 560 (6222)
423 ( 4708) 449 (4989)
14 ' 4m)
17 I5m) 5 '( 15m) 8' (24m)
Flood Focus
FoolcanOles
lid Peak
flue)
Dtunaltre
31 (350) 48 ( 533)
83 (2 5m) 16 5' ( 5M)
63 ( 702) 81 (907)
25 '( 75M) 39 6' ( 11 9,4)
Lamp
FE V EG1 CYX DPY
NOTES
·Fixtures are provided with 3' (. 9m) leads, connectors and C- clamp for hanging unless otherwise specified
·To specify grounded connector type, add suffix to catalog number:
GP - Three Pin GTL - Twistlock GR - Parallel Blade U- Ground HGP - Han- lock Pin Connector ·To specify fixture type add suffix for catalog number: MP - For stand mounting, with 23' 17m) cable and in- line switch PO - For pole operation TV - With C- clamp for hanging
·Lamps and color frames not included unless otherwise noted ·Lamps listed are 3200°K unless otherwise noted. Lamps and fix-
tures are 120 volt unless otherwise noted ·For international applications, designate 100, 120, 220 or 240 volt
operation ·tContact Strand Century for current lamp prices
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-101
STRAND CENTURY, INC.
P.O. Box 9004 Rancho Dominguez, CA 90224 (213) 637-7500 Telex 664741
3505
FRESNELS
3701
5" ( 125mm) 1000W Bambino
3201
5" ( 125mm) 1000W Fresnel, hanging
3201MP 5" ( 125mm) 1000W Fresnel, stand mount
$196.00 196.00
LAMPS
DPY
5000W 500 hrs
CP29 5000W 500 hrs., 220 or 240V
ACCESSORIES
1306
8- Way rotatable barndoor
1143 1200
Color or diffuser frame Full double scrim
1205
Full single scrim
1206
Half double scrim
1207
Half single scrim
LAMPS ERN EGR EGT CP39 CP40
500W 100 hrs 750W 200 hrs 1000W 200 hrs 650W 100 hrs., 220 or 240V 1000W 200 hrs., 220 or 240V
$84.00 16.00
16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00
6" ( 150mm) 2000W Bambino
3302* 6" ( 150mm) 2000W Fresnel, hanging 3302P0* 6" ( 150mm) 2000W Fresnel, pole- op 3302MP*6" ( 150mm) 2000W Fresnel, stand mount
ACCESSORIES
1300
8- Way rotatable barndoor
1144 1201
Color or diffuser frame Full double scrim
1202
Full single scrim
1203
Half double scrim
1204
Half single scrim
1123
Additional wireguard
1170
2" ( 50mm) cone
1171
3" ( 75mm) cone
1172 1941
4" ( 100mm) cone Operating Pole 4' ( 1.2m), 2.1 lb. ( 0.97kg)
1942
Operating Pole 8' ( 2.4m), 2.8 lb. ( 1.3kg)
1943
Operating Pole 11' (3.3m), 3.5 lb. (1.6kg)
1944
Operating Pole 15' ( 4.2m), 4.2 lb. ( 1.9kg)
LAMPS
CYV
1000W 200 hrs
CYZ
1500W 325 hrs
CYX
2000W 250 hrs
CP41 2000W 400 hrs. 220 or 240V
$392.00 532.00 392.00
64.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 11.00 37.00 37.00 37.00 85.00 90.00 96.00 106.00
10" ( 250mm) 5000W Bambino
3505* 10" ( 250mm) 5000W Fresnel for hanging
$ 665.00
3505P0* 10" (250mm) 5000W Fresnel, pole-op
767.00
3505MP*10" ( 250mm) 5000W Fresnel, stand mount
616.00
ACCESSORIES
1301
8- Way rotatable barndoor
1145
Color or diffuser frame
1208
Full double scrim
1209
Full single scrim
1210
Half double scrim
1211
Half single scrim
1125
Additional wireguard
1173
41/4" ( 105mm) cone
1174
6" ( 150mm) cone
1175
71/2 " ( 195mm) cone
1941
Operating Pole 4' ( 1.2m), 2.1 lb. ( 0.97kg)
1942
Operating Pole 8' ( 2.4m), 2.8 lb. ( 1.3kg)
1943
Operating Pole 11' (3.3m), 3.51b. (1.6kg)
1944
Operating Pole 15' ( 4.2m), 4.2 lb. ( 1.9kg)
$ 101.00 32.00 21.25 21.25 21.25 21.25
16.00 80.00 80.00 80.00 85.00
90.00 96.00 106.00
14" ( 350mm) 10,000W Bambino
3701* 14" ( 350mm) 10,000W Fresnel, hanging 3701P0* 14" ( 350mm) 10,000W Fresnel, pole- op 3701MP*14" ( 350mm) 10,000W Fresnel, stand mount
$ 1015.00 1141.00 1015.00
ACCESSORIES
1302
8- Way rotatable barndoor
1146 1147
Color or diffuser frame Outrigger color frame
1212 1213
Full double scrim Full single scrim
1214
Half double scrim
1215 1126
Half single scrim Additional wireguard
1176
6" ( 150mm) cone
1177 1178
9" ( 225mm) cone 11" ( 275mm) cone
1941
Operating Pole 4' ( 1.2m), 2.1 lb. ( 0.97kg)
1942
Operating Pole 8' ( 2.4m), 2.8 lb. ( 1.3kg)
1943
Operating Pole 11' ( 3.3m), 3.5 lb. ( 1.6kg)
1944
Operating Pole 15' ( 4.2m), 4.2 lb. ( 1.9kg)
$ 133.00
37.00 212.00
42.50 42.50 42.50 42.50 32.00 101.00 101.00 101.00 85.00 90.00 96.00 106.00
LAMPS
DTY
10,000W 300 hrs.
CP83 10,000W 500 hrs., 220 or 240V
· Add LA to specify lens door for drop- in accessories ·
Units include wireguard.
t Contact for current lamp prices.
NOTES
·Fixtures are provided with 3' (. 9m) leads, connectors and C- clamp for hanging unless otherwise specified
·To specify grounded connector type, add suffix to catalog number:
GP- Three Pin GTL-Twistlock GR - Parallel Blade U- Ground HGP-Harj-lock Pin Connector ·To specify fixture type add suffix to catalog number: MP- For stand mounting, with 23' (7m) cable and in- line switch PO- For pole operation ·TV- with C- Clamp for hanging
·Lamps and color frames not included unless otherwise noted
·Lamps listed are 3200°K unless otherwise noted. Lamps and fixtures are 120 volt unless otherwise noted
·For international applications, designate 100, 120, 220 or 240 volt
operation
laniro Bambino Performance Data
Calelog Number
1201 302 505 707
Ckeleoce
15 ( 4 50 ,1 20 ( 6m1 35' ( 10 54,1 50' ( 15m)
Spe Foot'',
Fooleandlee (Lu,)
1/10 Peak Deanteler
075 (7500) 785 (4305)
42' ( 126m) 7' ( 2 lm)
448 ( 4985) 328(36451
II 5 (3 5m) 22 5' (68m)
Flood Focus
Footcandles (Los)
1 10 Peak OMmeter
i 6317001 52(5801
65 17251 60(665)
20 2' ( 6 lm) 29 ( 8 n41
41 6,(12 6rn)
616.( 18 544)
Lamp
EGO COX DPY OTO
VL-102
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
STRAND CENTURY, INC.
P.O. Box 9004 Rancho Dominguez, CA 90224 (213) 637-7500 Telex 664741
LIGHTING/PROJECTORS
Scoops
Wide-angle, smooth beam, variable in the focusing units.
4271 4291 4273A
1000W 14" ( 356mm) Fixed Spread Scoop 1000W 14" ( 356mm) Focusing Scoop 2000W 18" ( 457mm) Fixed Spread Scoop
$195.00 220.00 230.00
ACCESSORIES 1116 Color Frame for 4271, 4291 1119A Color Frame for 4273
LAMPS FOR 4271, 491
EGD
500W 150 hrs., 3100°K
EGE
500W 2000 hrs., 3000°K
EGF
750W 250 hrs
EGG
750W 2000 hrs., 3000°K
EGK
1000W 400 hrs
EWE
1000W 250 hrs., 220 or 240V
LAMPS FOR 4273
DSE
1000W 750 hrs., 3050°K
DSF
1500W 1000 hrs
02000/4/95 21300W 750 hrs.
CP 59
2000W 300 hrs., 220 or 240V
$ 30.00 35.00
Catalog Number
4271 4291 4273A
Distance
10 :3m , 10 c:3r10 10 ( 3rm
Performance Data
Footcandles (Lux)
115 ( 1235 (spot) 178 119151
177 09001
Lamp
EGK f GK
02000 -1 95
Scenic Projectors
5911 TV One light, Iris Cyc Light
$193.00
5912TV Two light, two circuit Iris 2Cyc Light
368.00
5913 TV Three light, three circuit Iris 3Cyc Light
511.00
5914TV Four light, four circuit Iris 4Cyc Light
630.00
5915 One light, Mini Cyc Light ( color frame not included) . 151.00
5921 One light Pallas 1Rigid Groundrow
172.00
5923 Three light Pallas 3Rigid Groundrow
550.00
5924 5933
Four light Pallas 4Rigid Groundrow Three light Pallas 3Hinged Groundrow
609.00 620.00
5934 Four light Pallas 4Hinged Groundrow
676.00
5901 TV One light, Iris 1Cyc Light for 220/ 240V operation ... 200.00
5902TV Two light, Iris 2Cyc Light for 220/240V operation .. 385.00
5903TV Three light, Iris 3Cyc Light for 220/240V operation . 537.00
5904TV Four light, Iris 4Cyc Light for 220/240V operation . . 662.00
5905TV One light, Mini Cyc Light for 220/240V
operation ( color frame not included)
151.00
5941
One light, Pallas 1Rigid Groundrow for
220/240V operation
172.00
5943 Three light, Pallas 3Rigid Groundrow for
220/240V operation
550.00
5944 Four light, Pallas 4Rigid Groundrow for
220/240V operation
609.00
5945 Three light, Pallas 3Hinged Groundrow for
220/240V operation
620.00
5946 Four light, Pallas 4Hinged Groundrow for
220/240V operation
676.00
ACCESSORIES
1151 Additional Color Frame for Iris Cyc Lights 1155 Outrigger Color Frame for Mini Cyc Light
$ 26.50 96.50
LAMPS
FFT
1000W 300 hrs
FDB
1500W 400 hrs
FGT
1500W 400 hrs
P2/10 625W 200 hrs., 220 or 240V
P2/7
1000W 200 hrs., 220 or 240V
P2/12 1250W 200 hrs., 220 or 240V
4604 4605
HM14000W Pani Slide Projector for use with
7-1/8" ( 180mm) slides, complete with two-slide
rotatable carrier, locking castered trolley and 120
VAC ballast. Accepts 1381 to 1387 Objective
Lenses
$18,500.00
5000W Pani Scenic Projector for use with 7-1/8" (180mm) sq. slides, complete with two-slide rotatable slide carrier and locking castered trolley. Accepts 1381 to 1387 Objective Lenses
7,300.00
Cyclorama Lighting
laniro " IRIS" Cyc Lights and " PALLAS" Groundrow Lights-- Compartmented units using linear sources which produce smooth, shadowless illumination. Complete with color frames.
NOTES
·Fixtures are provided with 3' (. 9m) leads, connectors and C-clamp for hanging unless otherwise specified
·To specify grounded connector type, add suffix to catalog number: GP-- Three Pin GTL--Twistlock GR -- Parallel Blade U- Ground
·HGP-- Harj-lock Pin Connector
·TV-- with C- clamp for hanging ·Lamps and color frames not included unless otherwise noted ·Lamps listed are 3200°K unless otherwise noted. Lamps and fixtures
are 120 volt unless otherwise noted ·For international applications, designate 100, 120, 220 or 240 volt
operation ·tContact Strand Century for current lamp prices
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-103
STRAND CENTURY, INC.
P.O. Box 9004 Rancho Dominguez, CA 90224 (213) 637-7500 Telex 664741
SPOTLIGHTS
3380
3142
STRAND CENTURY FRESNELITE® SPOTLIGHTS
Economical, efficient, soft edged beam. Variable in spread from an intense spot to a medium angle flood.
3" ( 76mm) Fresnelite
3142
3" ( 75mm) 150/250W Fresnel Spotlight Table Base,
6'11.8m) Cord and Plug
$ 135.00
ACCESSORIES
1104
Color Frame
1311
8- Way Barndoor
1555
C- Clamp
$ 4.00
50.00 10.00
LAMPS
la150CL/DC 150W 2000 hrs., 2600°K
FEV
200W 50 hrs.
1
0250CL/DC 250W 2000 hrs., 3000°K
6" ( 152mm) Fresnelite
3380 3390
6" ( 152mm) 500/1000W Fresnel Spotlight 6" 1152mm) 500/1000W Fresnel Spotlight with
GX9.5 bi-post socket, for 220 or 240V operation only
$ 165.00 165.00
ACCESSORIES
1108
Color Frame
1332
High Hat
1350
Accessory Safety Clip Assembly
1406
8- Way Barndoor
$ 4.25
16.50 7 00
59.00
LAMPS FOR 3380
BTL
500W 500 hrs., 3050°K
BTM
500W 100 hrs
BTP
750W 200 hrs .
BTN
750W 500 hrs 3050°K
BTR
1000W 200 hrs
CP51
650W 100 hrs., 220 or 240V
CP52
1000W 200 hrs., 220 or 240V
LAMPS FOR 3390
CP23
650W 100 hrs., 220 or 240V
CP24
1000W 200 hrs., 220 or 240V
8" ( 203mm) Fresnelite
3480
8" ( 203mm) 1000/2000W Fresnel Spotlight
$281.00
3490
8" ( 203mm) 2000W Fresnel Spotlight with
GY16 bi-post socket, for 220 or 240V operation only .281.00
ACCESSORIES
1110
Color Frame
$ 6.50
1333
High Hat
16.50
1358
Accessory Safety Clip Assembly
7.00
1408
8- Way Barndoor
84.00
LAMPS FOR 3480
BVT
1000W 500 hrs., 3050°K
BVV
1000W 200 hrs
CWZ
1500W 325 hrs
BVW
2000W 250 hrs
LAMPS FOR 3490
CP43
2000W 400 hrs., 220 or 240V
Catalog Number
Olstance
Performance Data
Spot Focus
Flood Focus
Footcandles
lijiliPeetaerk Footcandles (Lux) 1,11%7,3:
Lamp
22 ( 245)
(511)
39 ( 4331
11 1 ( 33, , if 254 (7
NOTES
·Fixtures are provided with 3' (. 9m) leads, connectors and C-clamp
for hanging unless otherwise specified ·To specify grounded connector type, add suffix to catalog number:
GP-- Three Pin
GTL -- Twistlock GR -- Parallel Blade U- Ground HGP -- Harj-lock Pin Connector
·Lamps and color frames not included unless otherwise noted ·Lamps listed are 3200°K unless otherwise noted. Lamps and fixtures
are 120 volt unless otherwise noted · For international applications, designate 100, 120, 220 or 240 volt
operation
·tContact Strand Century for current lamp prices
VI- 104
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
STRAND CENTURY, INC.
SPOTLIGHTS
P.O. Box 9004 Rancho Dominguez, CA 90224 (213) 637-7500 Telex 664741
2205
2212
2113
2123
2113 2114
1110 1333 2123 2124
8" ( 203mm) 1000W Lekolite 12° Spread, 21 lbs. (9.5kg)
8" ( 203mm) 1000W Lekolite 14" x15" x33" (356 x381 x838mm) 12° Spread, with Iris, 21 lbs. (9.5kg)
Color Frame for 8" ( 203mm) Lekolite, 0.3 lbs. (0.14kg)
High Hat for 8" ( 203mm) Lekolite, 4lbs. ( 1.8kg)
10" ( 254mm) 1000W Lekolite 9° Spread, 25 lbs. ( 11.3kg)
10" ( 254mm) 1000W Lekolite 14" x15" x37" ( 356 x381 x940mm) 9° Spread, with Iris, 26 lbs. ( 11.8kg)
$440.00 520.00
6.50 16.50 550.00 630.00
LEKOLITE R SPOTLIGHTS
All Lekolites include 4shutters and template slot. Lekolites with iris kit also include shutters and template slot. All units with plano convex lenses.
2205
4-1/2" ( 114mm) Measurement: 8" x8" x20" (203 x203 x508mm) 150/500W Variable Focus Ellipsoidal 15 lbs. (6.8kg)
$ 185.00
ACCESSORIES 1112 Color Frame
for 10" ( 254mm) Lekolite, 0.5 lbs. (0.2kg)
1336 High Hat for 10" (254mm) Lekolite, 5lbs. (2.3kg)
1342 Pattern Holder 0.1 lb. (0.05kg)
$ 8.50 22.00 10.00
ACCESSORIES 1105 Color Frame 1331 High Hat 1345 Pattern Holder 1352 Set of 6Patterns
1355 Iris Kit
1500 Safety Cable
$ 4.00 16.50 14.00 27.50 99.00 8.75
LAMPS 15003/CL
150W, 2000 hrs., 2900°K
EHT
250W, 2000 hrs., 2900°K
0400CL/MC 400W, 2000 hrs., 2900°K
EVR
500W, 2000 hrs., 2900°K
JD500
500W, 300 hrs., 3000°K ( 220/240V)
1/10 Peak Angle
25° 30° 40° 50°
Performance Data
Distance
25 ( 7.6m) 20' (6m) 15' (4.5m) 12.5' ( 3.8m)
Footcandles (Lux)
42 ( 465) 63 ( 695) 93 ( 1036) 122 ( 1355)
1/10 Peak Diameter
11' ( 32m) 10.8' ( 3.3m) 10.95' ( 3.3m) 11.6' ( 3.5m)
500/750/1000W UNITS
2204 4-1/2" ( 114mm) 500/1000W Lekolite 44° Spread, 15 lbs. (6.8kg)
2209 6" ( 152mm) 500/1000W Lekolite 31° Spread, 17 lbs. (7.7kg)
2212 6" ( 152mm) 500/1000W Lekolite 25° Spread, 16 lbs. ( 7.3kg)
2213 6" ( 152mm) 500/1000W Lekolite 25° Spread, with Iris, 17 lbs. (7.7kg)
2216 6" ( 152mm) 500/1000W Lekolite 17° Spread, 16 lbs. ( 7.3kg)
2217
6" ( 152mm) 500/1000W Lekolite 12" x12" x24" ( 305 x305 x610mm)
17° Spread, with Iris, 17 lbs. (7.7kg)
Lamp EVA EVA EVA EVA
$284.00
299.00
294.00
373.00
284.00
373.00
1352 1354
Set of 6 Patterns 0.1 lb. (0.05kg)
Iris Kit (for customer installation) 0.5 lbs. (0.2kg)
27.50 98.00
LAMPS EHC/EHB EHD EHF EHG FEL FKR CP77
500W, 200 hrs., 3200°K 500W, 2000 hrs., 3000°K 750W, 300 hrs., 3200°K 750W, 2000 hrs., 3000°K 1000W, 300 hrs., 3200°K 650W, 300 hrs., 3100°K (220/240V) 1000W. 300 hrs., 3200°K (220/240V)
Catalog Number
2204 2209 2212/13 2216/17 2112/11 2113/14 2123/24
Distance
20' ( 6m) 30' ( 9m) 40' ( 12m) 50' ( 15m) 60' ( 18m) 80 (24m) 100' ( 30m)
Performance Data
Footcandles (Lux)
1/10 Peak Diameter
206 ( 2285) 165 ( 1870) 169 ( 1880) 124 ( 1395)
84 ( 935)
91 ( 1010) 88 ( 975)
16.2' (4.8m) 16.5' (4.9m) 17.6' (5.3m) 14.9' (4.5m) 14.4' (4.3m)
14.7' (4.4m) 16' (4.8m)
Lamp
FEL FEL FEL FEL FEL FEL FEL
RETROFIT KITS
(For old diecast Lekolites) 2000 1000W Kit
for 6" x9" ( 152 x229mm) and 6" x12" ( 152 x305mm), includes complete rear-end assembly and front barrel.
11 lbs. ( 5kg)
2016
1000W Kit for 6" x16" ( 152 x406mm), includes complete rearend and front barrel. 11 lbs. (5kg)
2750
500/750W Kit for all 6" ( 152mm) units, includes complete rear-end assembly, 6lbs. ( 2.7kg)
$176.00 176.00 135.00
2112 6" ( 152mm) 500/1000W Lekolite 14° Spread, 15 lbs. (6.8kg)
2111
6" ( 152mm) 500/1000W Lekolite
14" x14" x39" (356 x356 x991mm) 14° Spread, with Iris, 16 lbs. (7.3kg)
1108
Color Frame for 4-1/2" ( 115mm) and 6" ( 152mm) Lekolites, 0.2 lbs. ( Q. 1kg)
1332
High Hat for 4-1/2" ( 115mm) and 6" ( 152mm)
Lekolites, 2.0 lbs. (0.9kg)
284.00 363.00
4.25 16.50
NOTES · Fixtures are provided with 3' (. 9m) leads, connectors and C-clamp for hanging
unless otherwise specified · To specify grounded connector type, add suffix to catalog number
GP - Three Pin GTL - Twistlock GR - Parallel Blade U-Ground HGP - Harj-lock Pin Connector · Lamps and color frames not included unless otherwise noted · Lamps listed are 3200°K unless otherwise noted. Lamps and fixtures are 120 volt unless otherwise noted · For international applications, designate 100, 120. 220 or 240 volt operation tContact Strand Century for current lamp prices
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-105
STRAND CENTURY, INC.
P.O. Box 9004 Rancho Dominguez, CA 90224 (21 3) 637-7500 Telex 664741
MOUNTING EQUIPMENT/STANDS
1553
1555
1558
'1985
1522
1513
1571
(4.
GRIP AND MOUNTING EQUIPMENT
1500 1502 1504 1509
1540
1543 1550 1551
Safety Cable for fixtures up to 100 lb. ( 45kg) $ 8.75
Scenery Guard 18" ( 457mm) diameter, 2lb. ( 0.9kg) . .66.00
Pipe Stiffener, 6lb. ( 2.7kg)
77.00
Bambino Adaptor for 5/8" ( 16mm) stud or 1-1/8"
(29mm) spigot for conversion to MP type units
11.00
15" ( 381mm) Sidearm with 2" ( 51mm) C- clamp and
sliding tee. 5lb. ( 2.3kg)
54.00
Clamp Hanger with swing joint. 5lb. ( 2.3kg)
55.00
Cable Clamp, 3lb. ( 1.4kg) Support Cradle for 1-3/4" ( 45mm) cable. 14 lb. ( 6.4kg)
25.00 80.00
1552 1553 1555 1558
1559 1580 1963 1964
1965 1966
Kellem's Grip, specify cable size when ordering Pipe C- Clamp Adaptor, 1-1/8" ( 29mm) spigot
2" ( 51mm) C- Clamp with stud. 2lb. ( 0.9kg) Standard Pipe C- Clamp, 5/8" ( 16mm) stud. 3lb. ( 1.4kg) Standard Double Pipe C- Clamp, 5lb. ( 2.3kg) Clancy Sure- Clamp, 3lb. ( 1.4kg) Gaffer Grip, 5/8" ( 16mm) stud. 0.9 lb. ( 0.4kg)
Heavy Duty Gaffer Grip, supports up to 25 lb. (11.4kg) 2lb. ( 0.9kg) Gaffer Grip ( small) with 5/8" ( 16mm) socket Gaffer Grip ( large) with 5/8" ( 16mm) socket
61.00 50.00 10.00
33.00 16.50 35.00 30.00
65.00 33.00 75.00
BASES
1560 1561 1562
Table Stand with 5/8" ( 16mm) stud. 4lb. ( 1.8kg) ..$ 27.50
3" ( 76mm) Diameter Base, 1lb. ( 0.45kg)
27.50
6" ( 152mm) Diameter Base, 3lb. ( 1.4kg)
33.00
TORMENTORS AND LADDERS
1570 1571 1572
1573
1-1/2" ( 38mm) Tormentor Boom, 20' ( 6.1m) long, 6" ( 152mm) base and tie- off 65 lb. ( 29.5kg) 1-1/2" ( 38mm) Tormentor Pipe, 12" ( 3.7m) long, wall mounted, 44 lb. ( 20kg)
Three- Rung Ladder with four 18" ( 457mm) 20A pigtails and two 12' ( 3.7m) 20A feed cables. 60 lb. ( 27.2kg) Three- Rung Ladder, same as 1572, unwired.
50 lb. ( 22.7kg)
$230.00 155.00
675.00 355.00
STANDS
1513
4'-7' ( 1.2m-2.1m) Stand with 14" ( 356mm) diameter.
20 lb. ( 9.1kg) base
105.00
1514
5'-8' ( 1.5m-2.4m) Stand with 18" ( 457mm) diameter
25 ) b. ( 11.3kg) base
140.00
1519 1520
laniro "Trojan" Folding Stand for lanebeam 2000 .. 115.00 3'-5' ( 0.9m- 1.5m) Stand, castered 30 lb. ( 13.6kg)
1521
legs 5'-8' ( 1.5m-2.4m) Stand, castered 40 lb.
190.00
1522
(18.1kg) legs Strand Century Stand, heavy duty aluminum
190.00
1529
castered, extends from 4' ( 1.22m) to 8'6" ( 2.6m) 18.5 lb. ( 8.4kg) laniro Stand for 4500MP Pulsar
313.00 60.00
1530
1531 1535
1826 1831
Strand Century Small Kit Stand, aluminum, folds
to 21" ( 533mm) extends to 8'6" ( 2.6m),
5/8" ( 16mm) stud. 2.3 lb. ( 1.04kg) Wind-up Stand, extends to 8'6" ( 2.6m)
65.00 435.00
Strand Century Regular Kit Stand, aluminum, folds
to 30" ( 762mm), extends to 8'6" ( 2.6m), 5/8" ( 16mm)
stud. 2.9 lb. ( 1.3kg)
75.00
Combo- Reflector Lamp Stand, 25 lb. ( 11.3kg)
505.00
Combo Adaptor Wheels ( set of 3) 9lb. ( 4.1kg)
245.00
OPERATING POLES
1941
Operating Pole, 6' ( 1.8m) 2.1 lb. ( 0.95kg)
1942
Operating Pole, 9'3" ( 2.8m). 2.8 lb. ( 1.3kg)
1943
Operating Pole, 12'7" ( 3.8m) 3.5 lb. ( 1.6kg)
1944
Operating Pole, 15'10" ( 4.8m) 4.2 lb. ( 1.9kg)
LITE LIFTS AND HANGERS
$ 85.00 90.00 96.00
106.00
1980 1981 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987
Pantograph Lite Lift, supports 12 lb. ( 5.4kg), extends 10' ( 3m) 13.5 lb. ( 6.1kg)
Pantograph Lite Lift, supports 25 lb. ( 11.3kg), extends 10' ( 3m) 13.5 lb. ( 6.1kg) Pantograph Lite Lift, supports 35 lb. ( 15.9kg),
extends 10' ( 3m). 15.5 lb. ( 7kg) Telescopic Hanger, 10-20 lb. ( 4.5-9.1kg) extends 12'3" ( 3.7m) 16.5 lb. ( 7.5kg) Telescopic Hanger, 10-20 lb. ( 4.5-9.1k g), extends 7'4" ( 2.2m) 12.5 lb. ( 5.7k g ) Telescopic Hanger, 20-40 lb. ( 9.1-18.1kg), exten ds
12'3" ( 3.7m) 14.5 lb. 16.6kg) Telescopic Hanger, 20-40 lb. ( 9.1-18.1kg), extends
(2.2m) 15 lb. ( 6.8kg)
$415 .00 425 .00 510.00 310.00 270 .00 365.00 310 .00
EXTENSION CABLES
6410 6411
10' 13m) 3- Wire Grounded Pi n Connectors
20 10'
amp, ( 3m)
2.6 lb. ( 1.2kg) 3- Wire Grounded
Tw
istl oc kC$ onnectors
50.00
20 amp, 2.6 lb. ( 1.2kg)
55 .00
CASES
1970
1971
1974 3363 3366 3573 3683 3686
3786
3793
Carrying Case for Century Kit V ( 1055), Kit VI ( 1056),
Kit VII ( 1057)
$165.00
Carrying Case for Century Kit 1 ( 1051), Kit III ( 1053),
Kit IV ( 1054) Carrying Case for Century Kit XI ( 1060)
160.00 175.00
Fixture Case for 575W HMI Head, 25 lb. ( 11.3kg)... 415.00
Ballast Case for 575W HMI Ballast. 34 lb. ( 15.4kg).. .640.00
Fixture Case for 1200W HMI Ballast, 39 lb. ( 17.7kg) .725.00 Fixture Case for 2500W HMI Head, 43 lb. ( 19.5kg).. .670.00
Ballast Case, castered for 2500W HMI Ballast. 45 lb.
(20.4kg)
775.00
Ballast Case, castered for 4000W HMI Ballast, 52 lb.
(23.6kg)
800.00
Fixture Case for 4000W HMI Head, 49 lb. ( 22.2kg).. 780.00
VL-106
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
STRAND CENTURY, INC.
P.O. Box 9004 Rancho Dominguez, CA 90224 (213) 637-7500 Telex 664741
PORTABLE CONTROL SYSTEMS
MINI LIGHT PALETTE
MANTRIX MEMORY
MINI LIGHT PALETTE
An advance in mid- range console design.
FEATURES ·2-9" high resolution CRT displays with all
operational information · Proportional patch for assigning dimmers
and their levels to channels ·7overlapping pile- on submasters, 3inhibi-
tive submasters ·Executes up to 3- part cues ·3crossfaders, 1of which is split ·200 control channels for up to 384 dimmers ·Special effects package · Electronic back-up · Disk for library storage · Interfaces to any dimme' ·Diagnostics Program
OPTIONS · Designer's Remote Console · Remote Control Unit · Printer · Remote Monitor · Full System back-up ·Mantrix Manual Console · Non Dim and Auxiliary Controls
Call for Price
MANTRIX MEMORY
An exciting new control system -- Mantrix Memory or Mantrix 2S plus a powerful, easy- to- use memory module.
FEATURES · Memory may be included initially or added-
in later · Presets may be recorded from the key-
board or from manual potentiometers ·Split handle crossfader with LED display
for timed or manual fades · Level/Rate Control Wheel · Preset linking and cue insert capability · LCD display of channel, playback, patch
and submaster information ·Solid state cartridge for library storage
Call for Price
MANTRIX TM 2S WITH MEMORY
(All prices include 25 ft. control cable)
8181 12 Channel $ 9,000.00
33-1/2" ( 85.1cm) 1- Tier Console
8182 24 Channel
9,700.00
45-1/2" ( 115.6cm) 1- Tier Console
8183 24 Channel w/video
module
10,300.00
45-1/2" ( 115.6cm) 1- Tier Console
8184 36 Channel
10,500.00
45-1/2" ( 115.6crt-01- Tier Console
8186 36 Channel w/video
module
11,600.00
45-1/2" ( 115.6cm) 2-lier Console
8187 48 Channel w/video
module
12,300.00
45-1/2" ( 115.6cm 2-Tier Console
8188 60 Channel w/video
module
13,100.00
45-1/2" ( 115.6cm) 2- Tier Console
8189 72 Channel w/video
module
13,500.00
45-1/2" ( 115.6cm) 2- Tier Console
MANTRIX 2S
Up to 56 overlapping submasters at the flip of a switch. Designed specifically for the faster paced lighting of television and live performance.
SINGLE TIER CONSOLES
8110 12 Channels 8111 12 Channels w/Patch 8112 24 Channels 8113 24 Channels w/Patch 8114 36 Channels w/Patch 8115 48 Channels w/Patch
$2,300.00 3,500.00 3,000.00
4,200.00 4,900.00 5,600.00
DOUBLE TIER CONSOLES 8116 36 Channels w/Patch 8117 48 Channels w/Patch
8118 60 Channels w/Patch 8119 72 Channels w/Patch 8120 84 Channels w/Patch
$5,500.00 6,200.00 7,000.00 7,500.00 8,000.00
OP1 IONAL EQUIPMENT FOR MANTRIX/CD80 PACKS
3-22900- Remote Console Receptacle Sta15-010 tion $ 120.00
8021/01, Vinyl Cover (for single tier con-
03, 05 sole
105.00
8021/07, Vinyl Cover (for double tier con-
09, 11 sole)
121.00
8017
Stand, 72" ( 1.8m)
998.00
8018 8019 8020 8022
Stand, 72" ( 1.8m)
w/ return
1155.00
Castered Stand, 36" ( 91.4cm
wide)
975.00
Castered Stand, 48" ( 121.9cm
wide)
1,050.00
Light Accessory (for stand only)
237.00
8030 8031 8032 8033 8034 8174 8175 8176 8177 8178 8179
Dimmer Control Extension cable
25'17.6m)
95.00
Dimmer Control Extension cable
50'115m)
147.00
Dimmer Control Extension cable
100' 130m)
205.00
" Daisy Chain" (Control jumper
cable) 18" ( 45.7cm)
53.00
" Daisy Chain" (Control jumper
cable) 72" 11.8m)
61.00
Trouping Case (to 8200, 8201,
8110, 8111)
350.00
Trouping Case (for 8202, 8203,
8112, 8113)
465.00
Trouping Case (for 8204, 8205,
8114, 8115)
550.00
Trouping Case (for 8206, 8207,
8116, 8117)
595.00
Trouping Case (for 8208, 8209,
8210)
699.00
Trouping Case (for CD80 packs)
730.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-107
STRAND CENTURY, INC.
P.O. Box 9004 Rancho Dominguez, CA 90224 (213) 637-7500 Telex 664741
CONTROL SYSTEMS
CD80 DIMMER BANK
MODULES
DIMMER CABINET ( Interior View)
CD80 PACKS Designed for Portable and Wall Mounted Use
Features: · Compact design: 12-2.4kw, 6-6kw or 6-12kw dimmers in a
23-1/2"W x20-1/2"D x8-1/2"H ( 59.7 x52.1 x21.6cm) package ·Toroidal Chokes ·Terminal block phase changer in 2.4 and 6kw Packs ·All electronics on asingle, easily accessible card · Failure indicators for power, overtemp and over voltage ·Multiplexed control wiring and " daisy- chained" connections for expandability ·Available for 220 or 240 volt operation
8124 8125 8126 8127 8066 8067 8068 8063 8064
12-2.4kw Dimmers with 24- Grounded
Twistlock Outputs ( 20 amp)
$4060.00
12-2.4kw Dimmers with 24- Grounded
Pin Connector Outputs ( 20 amp)
4060.00
12-2.4kw Dimmers with 24- Parallel
Blade U Ground Outputs ( 20 amp)
4060.00
12-2.4kw Dimmers with Terminal
Strip for Hard- Wiring
4060.00
6-6kw Dimmers with 6- Grounded
Twistlock Outputs ( 50 amp)
4700.00
6-6kw Dimmers with 6- Grounded
Pin Connector Outputs ( 50 amp)
4700.00
6-6kw Dimmers with Terminal Strip
for Hard- Wiring
4700.00
6-12kw Dimmers, 1-100A GP Receptacle
per dimmer, camlock plugs
5600.00
6-12kw Dimmers, Hard- Wired
5400.00
SLIDER CONTROL STATION
PROGRAMMABLE MASTER STATION
ENVIRON c"- 2 The Environ 2 Architectural Dimming System features modular, off- the- shelf components which can be combined into a custom configuration for any installation.
A variety of control stations includes slider and pushbutton controls, preset capabilities and a Master Station with a number of programmable functions. A wide variety of sizes and types of dimmers is available.
CD80 DIMMER BANKS And MODULES Compact, High Density Dimmer Banks with Dual 2.4kw, Single 6kw or 12kw Dimmer Modules. Designed for all Theatrical ard Television Applications.
Dimmer Racks Features: ·Extremely shallow - only 17-3/4" (. 45m) deep · Up to 96 plug-in 2.4kw dimmers in 24-1/2" ( 6.2m) width · Ideal for dimmer per circuit applications · Equipped with quiet fans to maintain proper operating
temperatures · Designed to reduce installation costs · Full length guides and self aligning dimmer connectors for
positive dimmer module alignment
Dimmer Modules Features: · Heavy gauge aluminum chassis · Heavy duty, self aligning power and control plug ·Toroidal Chokes · Plug-in non dim modules available ·220 and 240V dimmers and nondims available
VL-108
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SPOTLIGHTS
BALLANTYNE OF OMAHA STRONG INT'L
1712 Jackson Street Omaha, NE 68102 (402) 342-4444
Xenon Trouper-Follow Spotlight
· " Cold" metal reflector · Six color boomerang with geletin color filters · Ultra- Violet filter available · Horizontal masking control · Nichrome steel iris · Spot focus adjusting knob · Dimming control ·Controls for adjusting spotlight height, vertical and horizontal
movement · 700 watt Xenon bulb · Warranted for 1500 hours ·Operating time -- continuous · Color temperature 5700° Kelvin
· Maximum downward tilt 45° · Maximum upward tilt 25° · Horizontal sweep 360° · Gross shipping weight approx. 540 lbs.
48050
$ 6640.00
Xenon Super Trouper -- Follow Spotlight
· " Cold" metal reflector · Six color boomerang with geletin filters · Ultra-violet filter available · Horizontal masking control
· Nichrome steel iris · Spot focus adjusting knob · Dimming control
·Controls for adjusting spotlight height, vertical and horizontal movement · 1600 watt Xenon bulb ( 65 Amp.) · Operating time -- continuous · Color temperature 5900° Kelvin · Maximum downward tilt 45° · Maximum upward tilt 25° · Horizontal sweep 360° · Gross shipping weight approx. 700 lbs.
83050
$ 8495.00
Xenon Gladiator II -- Follow Spotlight
· " Cold" metal reflector · Six color boomerang with geletin color filters · Ultra-violet filter · Horizontal masking control · Nichrome steel iris · Spot focus adjusting knob · Dimming control · Controls
for adjusting spotlight height, vertical and horizontal movement ·2500 watt Xenon bulb ( 90 amp) · Operating time -- continuous ·Color temperature IAprrox.) 5600°Kelvin · Maximum downward tilt 45° · Maximum upward tilt 25° · Horizontal sweep 360° · Gross weight 930 lbs.
47050
$ 11,995.00
47061
Xenon Gladiator II ( complete with 208/230V, 60 Hz, 3 ph. Power
Supply and 3000W, Xenon bulb)
$14,720.00
Trouperette Ill -- Quartz -Halogen
·Quartz- Halogen lamp -- 1000 watt, 250 hour life · Draws only 8.5 to 9.5 Amperes · Exclusive single lever controlled two element variable focal length lens system · Horizontal masking control with 45 1/4 angle adjustment · Nichrome heavy duty iris · Simple to operate built-in six color boomerang · Quick relamp design · 115 volt AC operation... equipped with 25 ft. 3 wire cable · Maximum downward tilt 36° ·Maximum upward tilt 32° · Horizontal sweep 360° · Gross weight 90 lbs.
45003
$ 1290.00
575 Metal Halide
· " Cold" metal reflector · Six color boomerang with geletin color
filters · Horizontal masking control · Nichrome steel iris · Spot
focus adjusting knob · Dimming control · Controls for adjusting spotlight · Height, vertical and horizontal movement · 575 watt metal halide bulb · Life expectancy- 750 hrs. · Operating time-- continuous · Color temperature 5600° Kelvin · Maximum downward tilt 45° · Maximum upward tilt 30° · Horizontal sweep 360° · Gross shipping wgt approx. 266 lbs.
41000
$ 4430.00
Trouperette, Trouperette II, Trouperette Ill Accessories
45103
Bulb, Trouperette, 1000 Watt - 50 Hr.
45230
Bulb, Trouperette II, 600 watt- 75 hr.
45243
Bulb, Trouperette II, 650 watt- 25 hr.
45246
Bulb, Trouperette III, 1000 watt- 250 hr.
30.00 15.60 19.25 55.00
65258 65247 65356 65274 81390
41102
Xenon Bulbs - Contact factory for prices 1600 watt for Type 83050 Super Trouper
1000 Watt for Type 83051 Super Trouper 700 Watt for Type 4.8050 Trouper
2500 Watt for Type 47050 Gladiator II 3000 Watt for Type 47051 Gladiator Ill
Strong 575 Replacement Bulbs
575 Watt metal Halide Bulb
390.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-109
SYLVANIA/GTE PRODUCTS CORP. STUDIO/THEATRE/TELEVISION
Lighting Center Danvers, MA 01923
(617) 777-1900
Professional Sun Gun Movie Light Lamps
EKT
$ 33.64
FAV
37.68
FBT
41.06
FBV
44.64
FBW
48.53
Miniature Tungsten Halogen 2- Pin Base Lamps BHC/DYS/DYV
DVY DYH
EKD FBD/FBG
$ 22.98
28.30 27.55 30.32 32.45
Minican Base Single Ended Tungsten Halogen Lamps EHT ( 250Q / CL) EHV ( 325Q/CL)
$ 32.06 33.97
Mogul Prefocus Lamps for Follow- Spotlights
DTA
$ 98.32
Two Pin Tungsten Halogen Lamps
EHC/EHB ( 500Q/5CL) $55.01
EHD ( 5000CUTP)
55.01
EH F ( 750Q/4CL)
60.83
EHG ( 750Q/ CL/TP)
60.83
FCV FRST
68.22
FEL ( 01000 / 4CL)
56.54
FEP
63.71
Double Ended Tungsten Halogen Lamps 55/8" MOL DWT ( 1000T6Q) FER ( Q1000/4CL) FEX FEY ( Q2000T8/4CL)
$ 86.34 66.38
117.64 111.53
Double Ended Tungsten Halogen Lamps 6 9/16" MOL
FDB FFT ( 01000T3/1CL) FFW ( 2000T4Q/4CL)
$ 63.60 58.70 70.60
Double Ended Tungsten Halogen Lamps 4 3/8" MOL DYA
$48.51
Double Ended Tungsten Halogen Lamps 3 3/4" MOL DXN DXW FBY
FBZ FCB
$ 42.66 41.28 44.36
43.49 26.81
Mogul Bipost Lamps with 5" LCL
for Fresnel Lens Spotlights
BWA ( Q2000/4CL/BP) $ 130.58
CXZ
119.52
CYV
93.73
CYX ( Q2000T10/4CL)
128.92
DPY ( Q5000T20/4CL)
564.50
Intermediate Wattage Double Ended
Tungsten Halogen Lamps 3 1/8" MOL
DWY
$ 30.11
DXX
27.13
EH P ( 300T4Q/CL)
41.94
FAD
23.72
FBX
31.06
FCA
28.32
FDA
34.25
Universal T-3 Double Ended Tungsten
Halogen 4 11/16" MOL
EHM ( 300T2 1 /2 Q/CL) EHZ ( 300T2Y2Q)
$48.11 54.26
EJG ( 750T3Q/4CL)
43.33
FCL ) 500T30/CL/U)
25.99
FCM ( 1000T3Q/4CL)
33.79
FCZ ( 500T3Q)
38.85
FDF ( 500T3Q/4CL)
33.79
FDN/FRST ( 0500T% I
32.59
FHM/FRST ( Q10007 34)
37.50
Par Reflector Lamps DVVE DXK
FAY FCX FFN ( 1000PAR64Q/VNSP/1) FFP ( 1000PAR64Q/NSP/2) FFR ( 1000PAR64Q/MFL/5) FFS ( 1000PAR64Q/WFL/6)
$ 41.69 44.64
63.40 39.34 82.56 82.56 82.56 82.56
R Type Reflector Lamps and Movie Lights
BAH
$ 3.94
BBA
287
BCA BEP
340 872
BFA
13.51
DAN
10.51
DWC
564
DWD
934
DXC
10.53
DXH ( R-32)
991
DXR/DXS ( No.4)
16.28
DXT ( No. B-4)
21.55
EAL
13.40
EBR
12.13
EBV ( No. 2)
3 19
EBW ( No. B-2)
4 36
ECT
362
FAE
12.74
Screw Base Lamps for Scoop Fixtures
DSE11000T20)
$54.70
DSF11500T20)
63.63
Screw Base Spotlight Lamps BWF ( Q2000/4CL) BWG ( 02000/4)
$141.37 149.36
High Wattage Lamps for Fresnel Lens
Spotlights and Sky Pans
DTY110MQ/4CL)
$1094.55
Low Wattage Lamps for Miniature Spotlights
BEJ BVR CAW/CAX
CBJ/CBC
CBX/CBS CCM/CHD
CEM CEW/CFC
CHK CLS/CLG CLX/CMB
CMV/CMT FEV
$ 14.15 872 713
12.87
12.55 16.70
926 12.98
917 13.40 14.68
21.06 30.17
Medium Bipost Lamps 4" LCL for Ellipsoidal Spotlights BSC 1750T51
BSD (750T5) DZD
EFX
$84.74
79.72 57.81
74.86
Medium Prefocus Lamps with 3 1/2" LCL
for Ellipsoidal Spotlights
DEB 1500T12/8)
$52.30
DNS (5000T12/9(
50.93
DNT(750T12/9)
53.66
DNV )1MT12/21
56.48
EGC/EGD ( 0500/5CUP)
60.83
EGE10500CL/P)
60.83
EGF (Q750/4CUP)
68.22
EGG (0750/CLIP)
68.22
EGJ(01000/4CL/P)
71.62
EGK/FRSTIC11000/4P)
74.01
Medium Prefocus Lamps with 2 3/16"
LCL for Fresnel Lens Spotlights
BFK/BFL(750T20/SP)
$36.17
DGH
40.98
DMX
25.32
DNVV (500T20/64)
55.01
DRB/DRC
31.81
DRS
27.23
BTL ( 500T20/64)
47.22
BTM
47.22
BTN (750T20/SP)
47.00
BTP
47.64
BTR 11 MT2OP/SP)
53.48
EEX
41.81
Medium Bipost Lamps with 2 1/2" LCL for Fresnel Lens Spotlights
EGN
$ 57.48
EGR
74.57
EGT
81.21
Mogul Prefocus Lamps with 3 15/16"
LCL for Fresnel Lens Spotlights
BVT ( 1M/G40/23)
$ 73.70
BVV
73.70
BVW)2MG48 / 5)
91.26
CWZ 11500G40/21)
112.27
VL-110
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ULTIMATE SUPPORT SYSTEMS,
P.O. Box 470 Fort Collins, CO 80522-4700 (303) 493-4488 Telex 4991589
ULTIMATE SUPPT
INC.
LIGHTING STAND
71 - 6
Ul · E
TS- 33, CB- 48, CB- 24, VE -24
LIGHTING STAND COMPONENTS
The on-stage professional utilizes the latest technologies to visually create the
atmosphere he desires. Through the use of dimmers, barn doors, and control modules, the lighting engineer tries to transform adrab set into an exciting arena. However, due to the lack of achievements in lighting stands, these effects are limited by large, heavy tarnished steel bars which sit ominously on an otherwise aesthetic stage. Ultimate Support Systems has changed this by the introduction of aluminum stands; deep etched and clear anodized, to add to, instead of take away from the desired effect.
In addition to being extremely attractive, Ultimate Support Systems are lightweight. Through the use of aluminum alloy tubing, the entire stand as shown weighs only 12 pounds ( 5.45 kg). This feature reduces shipping costs as well as physical wear and tear.
Other features include: large, convenient handknobs and easy-to- use fittings; your choice of bolt and wingnut type crossbar, or heavy walled crossbars for clamp type lights.
But there's more...The Ultimate Lighting Stand is built to last. Fittings are constructed of glass reinforced polycarbonate; one of the toughest plastics available. Ultimate Support Systems' attention to details help to insure that this stand can handle years of on-the- road abuse.
The TS-33 Tripod forms the base for this versatile system and comes with anylon tote bag. The Tripod's excellent stability enables
the lights to be extended over 11' ( 335m) when used in conjunction with the vertical extension.
Ultimate Support Systems gives you the choice...as to how you want to build up your own stand. The modular design allows you to add on the additional parts as you require.
TS- 33 TS 33A
$ 120.00 135.00
Add on's to the TS-33 Tripod include:
(A) CB-48
4' Crossbar ( 1.22 m), with bolts
and wingnuts. Capacity: 8
lights. Two bolts are also provided for attaching power expanders, dimmer packs, etc. Weight: 1-1/2 pounds (. 68 kg).
$40.00
(13) CB-24
2' Crossbar (. 61 m), with bolts and wingnuts. Comes in pairs. Capacity: 4 lights/pr. Weight:
1-1/2 pounds (. 68 kg). $40.00
(C) FIB-48
4' Heavy Crossbar ( 1.22 m).
Heavy walled tubing for clamp
type fixtures. Weight: 2-3/4
pounds ( 1.25 kg).
$36.00
(D) HB-24
2' Heavy Crossbar (. 61 m). Heavy walled tubing for clamp type fixtures. Comes in pairs.
Weight: 3pounds ( 1.36 kg). $36.00
(E)VE-24
2' Vertical Extension (. 61 m).
Extending the TS- 33 Tripod up
to 11 feet ( 3.35 m). Weight: 1
pound (. 45 kg).
$20.00
(F) EXP-550 Expander Bracket for power ex-
panders, dimmer packs, etc. Weight: 1/2 pound (. 23 kg).
$18.00
(G) ABG-100 Accessory Bag. Designed to
hold up to 2 complete sets of
components.
$25.00
After the performance, the eleven foot lighting stand compacts to fit into two small tote bags for easy transportation to the next gig.
SPECIFICATIONS
·Height: 5'0" to 11'2" ( 1.52 to 3.40 m) ·Max. Base Diameter: 62" ( 1.57 m) ·Load Capacity: 100 lbs. ( 45.36 kg) ·Weight ( as shown): 12 lbs. ( 5.45 kg) ·Set up time: 3minutes
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VL-111
INDEX
A
Acme-Lite Mfg. Co .
Amblco, Inc.
Anton/Bauer, Inc.
VL-2-5 VL-7 VL-7
B
Batteries/Belts/Chargers Bogen Photo Corp
Walter S. Brewer Co., Inc. BW Lighting Systems
VL-14, 32, 37, 45, 90 VL-8, 9
VL-10-21 VL-22-31
C
Camera Lights, Portable
VL-5-7, 32, 33, 40, 43, 44, 47, 48
50, 56-59, 68, 69, 90, 97
Cine 60, Inc.
VL-32, 33
Colortran, Inc. Comprehensive Video Supply Corp.
VL-34-37 VL-38, 39
Cool- Lux Lighting Industries, Inc. Costume Armour, Inc. Curtains, Tracks/Acc.
VL-40, 41 VL-42
VL-18, 19, 28, 88, 89
F
Frezzollni Electronics, Inc.
VL-43-45
Gaffer Supplies Gitzo/Kari Heitz, Inc. Grafiex/Subsea Corp The Great American Market
G VL-16-18, 31, 83, 91, 92 VL-46 VL-47 VL-48, 49
K
Kapco Mfg. Co., Inc.
VL-50
Kliegi Bros.
VL-51-55
Kobold/SATNEWS, Inc.
VL-56-78
L
Ladders, Studio Lamps Lighting Accessories
VL-20, 31, 106 VL-17, 18, 110 VL-3, 5-7, 16-20, 31, 38, 50, 83, 96, 106
Lighting Control Media Lighting Control Systems
VL-91, 92 VL-20, 21, 27, 34, 53, 54, 107, 108
Lighting Kits
VL-2, 4, 6, 7, 9, 12, 13, 32, 33, 36, 37, 39-41
43, 55-71, 76-78, 80-82, 93, 94, 98
Light Stands
VL-4, 8, 31, 46, 83, 96, 111
Lowel-Light Mfg., inc. LTM Corp. of America
VL-79-83 VL-84, 85
RI
ModuLight Systems Monopods
VL-86, 87 VL-46
Olesen
o
VL-88, 89
P
Patterns, Lighting
VL-12, 49
Perron Engineering Labs, Inc. Portable Distribution Portable Camera Lighting
VL-90 VL-16, 17 VL-5-7, 14, 32, 33, 40, 43, 44, 47
48, 50, 56-59, 68, 69, 90, 97
Power Light Kits/Acc.
VL-32, 33
R
Rosco Laboratories, Inc
VL-91, 92
s
Scenery & Props
Smith-Victor Sales Corp. Spot Lights
VL-42
VL-93-97 VL-6, 12, 22, 35, 104, 105, 109
Strand Century, Inc
VL-98-108
Strong Infl/Ballantyne of Omaha
VL-109
Studio Distribution/Hardware
VL-19, 20, 29, 30, 88, 89
Studio Lighting
VL-2, 3, 10-12, 15, 21-26, 35, 40, 47, 48
51, 52, 54, 60-67, 72-82, 84-87, 95, 99-105
Studio Lighting Packages
VL-21, 54
Sylvania/GTE Products Corp.
VL-110
U
Ultimate Support Systems, Inc.
VL-111
VL-112
EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES 8/ FURNITURE
The Advance Products Co., Inc American Transport Products Anvil Cases, Inc A & S Flight & Road Case Co
A
Bretford Mfg., Inc Bud Industries, Inc.
Calzone Case Co. Cases, Inc.
Excalibur Industries
E
Fiberbilt HOME, Inc.
H
Kangaroo Video Products, Inc. K & H Products, Ltd Kiwi/Northern Mercantile, Inc KLM Associates, Inc.
Laird Telemedia, Inc. Luxor Corp
L
VE -2, 3 VE -4 VE -5 VE -6
VE -7-11 VE -12-23
Morton System Furnishings/MSF
Packtronics/PSI Peerless Sales Co. Porta-Brace/K & H Products, Ltd Premier Metal Products Co
VE -24 VE -25
VE -26
VE -27
VE -28-32
VE-33, 34 VE-35, 36
VE -37 VE -38
VE -39 VE-40-45
Ouest/Packtronics -- PSI
Smith- Victor Sales Corp. Sony Corp. of America
Soundolier/American Trading & Production Corp Stantron/Unit of Zero Corp Star Case Mfg. Co., Inc.
Telepak San Diego Tenba, Inc Thermodyne Intl, Ltd.
Ultimate Support Systems, Inc
U
Viking Cases
Wheelit, Inc H. Wilson Co The Winsted Corp Index
V
W
VE -46-50
VE -51 VE -3V5E,-5326
VE -53
VE-54, 55
VE -V57E,-568 VE -59-64 VE -65-92
VE -93
VE-94 VE -95 VE -96
VE -97
VE -98
VE-99-104 VE-105-108 VE -109-127
VE-128
c1985 Bill Daniels Co., Inc. Shawnee Mission, KS
VE -1
ADVANCE PRODUCTS CO., INC.
1101 E. Central P.O. Box 2178 Wichita, KS 67201 (316) 263-4231
MODULAR VIDEO CABINETS
Model MVC-2, shown with accessory ROS and TS.
Model MVC-1, shown with accessory PT.
Model MVC-3, shown with accessory ROS.
MVC-1, MVC-2, and MVC-3
MODULAR VIDEO CABINETS
The MVC-1, 2, and 3 accept most popular monitors and playback equipment, providing complete access to both front and back of the electronics.
The MVC Series offers versatility, security, mobility, and attractive storage for video systems. Each module incorporates awelded steel frame for strength, handsome walnut pattern side panels, doors and top, one adjustable shelf, built-in ventilation and accommodations
for hook-up wiring. Each system has an assortment of accessories.
SPECIFICATIONS MVC-1, MVC-2 and MVC-3 Dimensions: Each module overall, 31" wide x33" high x23" deep.
Inside dimensions, 29-1/2" wide x 30-1/2" high x 20-1/2" deep. (Deduct 2-1/2" from inside height for flip- up door.) Casters add 6" to
overall height.
Construction: Welded steel frame using 16- gauge uprights and 20- gauge top and bottom. Side panels of walnut grained pattern with
plastic overlay on 3/8" particle board. All doors walnut grained pattern overlay on 1/2" particle board with T- molded edges, hinges full-length piano type. Master keyed locks on all doors. Pilaster brackets in each module for 1/2" increment adjustments of shelf.
Adjustable steel shelf in each module. Two-inch wiring access holes with plastic grommets supplied in each shelf. Caster sockets arc welded into bottom of each module. Top panel 1/2" walnut grain pattern with T- molded edges.
Casters: 5", ball bearing swivel, two with locking toe brakes. (Standard on models MVC-2 and MVC-3.1
MVC-1: ( Illustrated on accessory Pedestal Table) This module in-
cludes one swing- up locking door and afully adjustable shelf. Wiring
access holes are provided in the bottom of the cabinet and in the
adjustable shelf within the cabinet. The MVC-1 Module can be
stacked or positioned on the Pedestal Table accessory. Arc welded
caster sockets are provided so that casters may be added if desired.
Shpg. Wt. 103 lbs.
MVC-1
$ 369.25
MVC-2: Identical in size to the MVC-1. It is equipped with two con-
ventional piano- hinged doors, both locking. Wiring access holes are
provided both in the bottom and in the adjustable shelf. Heavy-duty
5" casters, two with locking toe brakes are ircleded. Shpg. Wt.
108 lbs.
MVC-2
$ 385.25
MVC-3: Four locking doors insure easy and immediate access to the
back of the video equipment as well as the front. Adjustments can be
made without removing the equipment from the cabinet. The front
monitor door swings up and slides back into the top of the cabinet
leaving aglare shield extending over the monitor screen. Access pro-
visions have been made for equipment hook-up Shpg. Wt. 211 lbs.
MVC-3
$ 718.25
ACCESSORIES
ROS Roll Out Shelf: Designed to position at any height within the
cabinet and to give easy access to the video rec,order,"playback, this
convenience accessory can be used with either the MVC-1. MVC-2 or
MVC-3. The 80- lb. load capacity shelf insures safety for the equip-
ment. Shpg Wt. 13 lbs.
ROS Roll Out Shelf
$ 58.25
ES Extra Shelf: The adjustable steel shelf will add over four square
feet of shelving to the module. Shpg. Wt. 9lbs.
ES Extra Shelf
$ 25.00
TS Tape Storage Drawer: Provides storage for 32-314" video tape
cassettes. Designed to position at any height within the cabinet.
Shpg. Wt. 19 lbs.
TS Tape Storage Drawer
$ 79.00
PT Pedestal Table: Accommodates the MVC-1 at a height of 30"
above the floor. The walnut top mounted on astylish chrome support
will enhance any training room. Shpg. Wt. 35 lbs.
PT Pedestal Table
$ 131.50
A Electrical Assembly: Dual electrical outlets which will mount in the
top or bottom, left or right of the MVC-1, MVC-2 or MVC-3. 20 feet
of 16/3 stranded wire with molded plug. Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
A Electrical Assembly
$ 21.00
VE -2
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ADVANCE PRODUCTS CO., INC.
1101 E. Central P.O. Box 2178 Wichita, KS 67201 (316) 263-4231
VIDEO CABINETS/ TABLES
MVC-5 shown with accessory RROS.
MVC-6 shown with accessory RROS.
Model VT- 52C
Model VT- 27C
Model VT-38C
MVC-4, MVC-5 and MVC-6
MODULAR VIDEO CABINETS
The MVC 4, 5, and 6accommodate the larger video ecuipment. They provide 30% more locking space than the MVC-1, 2, and 3 Series
SPECIFICATIONS MVC-4, MVC-5 and MVC-6
Dimensions: Each module overall, 36" wide x 38-1/2" high x 27" deep. Casters add 6" to overall height. Door openings, 30" wide x 26-3/4" high. Inside, 33-1/2" wide x29-1/4" high x24-1/2" deep.
Construction: Welded steel frame using 16- gauge uprights and 20- gauge top and bottom. Side panels of walnut grained petterr with plastic overlay on 3/8" particle board. All doors, walnut- grained pattern overlay on 1/2" particle board with T- molded edges. Double
hinged, double doors front and rear each with 270° sweep. Hinges full length piano type. Master keyed locks on all doors. Pilaster brackets in each module for 1/2" increment adjustments of shelf. One adjustable steel shelf in each module. Equipped with grornmeted
wiring access holes in cabinets and shelves. Top parel 1/2" walnut grain pattern with T- molded edges.
Casters: 5" ba Ibearing swivel, two with locking toe brakes. (Standard on models MVC-5 and MVC-61.
MVC-4: Consists of the top module of the MVC-6. Use as atab'e top
cabinet. Arc welded caster sockets are provided so that casters may
be added if desired. Shpg. Wt. 120 lbs. MVC-4
$ 398.50
MVC-5: Same as MVC-4 plus it includes heavy-duty 5" casters, two
with locking toe brakes. Shpg. Wt. 127 lbs. MVC-5
$430.25
MVC-6: Locking doors insure easy and immediate access to the back of the video equipment as well as the front. Access provisions have
been made for hook-up. The spacious system offers 27-1/2 cubic feet of locking storage. The top and bottom modules are individually
lockable adding convenience and versatility to the system. Shpg. Wt.
247 lbs. MVC-6
$ 822.25
ACCESSORIES RROS Roil Out Shelf: Positions at any height with:n the cabinets,
giving easy access to the video recorder/playback. Shpg. Wt. 22 lbs.
RROS Rol! Out Shelf
$ 68.25
EES Extra Shelf: The adjustable steel shelf will add 4.8 square feet of
shelving to the cabinets. Shpg. Wt. 11 lbs.
EES Extra Shelf
$ 28.25
TTS Tape Storage Drawer: Provides storage for video tape. Designed to position at any height within the cabinets. Shpg. Wt. 20
lbs. TTS Tape Storage
$ 88.25
A Electrical Assembly: Dual electrical outlets, 20 feet of 16/3
stranded wire with molded plug. Shpg. Wt. 2 lbs.
Television equipment and materials not included.
A Electrical Assembly
$ 21.00
VT SERIES -- VIDEO TABLES
Fully hinged, steel- backed double- locking doors protect tapes and accessories. Each cabinet has 5.75 cubic feet of storage space with an adjustable shelf within the cabinet. The top of the cabinet on the VT- 27C is aconvenient working height of 27" for video recorders and playback units. The VT- 38C offers a monitor shelf 38" above the floor, providing excellent monitor positioning for individual or small group viewing. Small playback units are positioned on the second shelf.
The television receiver or monitor is 52" high on the top shelf of the VT- 52C model for excellent group viewing.
Heavy, ribbed rubber pads on top of each unit reduce noise and provide a non-skid surface. The welded steel tables have charcoal brown enamel finish with walnut wood panels and asculptured satin chrome locking handle. Two keys furnished.
VT- 27C
VT- 38C VT- 52C
27-1/2"H, 18" x30" shelf size, 65 lbs. shpg. wt.. ..S228.00
38"H, 18" x30" shelf size, 75 lbs. shpg. wt.
244.00
52"H, 18" x30" shelf size, 80 lbs. shpg. wt.
253.00
ACCESSORIES VCS Electrical Assembly: 4 power outlets, grounding type, 20 ft.
cord, 3- wire, 1250W. Shpg. Wt. 4lbs
$ 26.50
VTS Tape Storage Rack: Holds twelve 8" dia. 1/2" video tapes. 1/4"
zinc plated steel wire rack with handles and 4 rubber feet.
Shpg. Wt. 3lbs.
$18.00
AV- 552 Safety Belt: Webbed belt for securing the monitor to the
table. 10 ft. long, 600 lb. test. Shpg. Wt. 1lb.
$ 17.00
RUGGED UTILITY TABLE
This rugged utility table with a300 lb. load capacity especially suited
for computer and micro- film reader applications. Spacious walnut
pattern wood top with protective T- molding around edges. The
all- welded steel frame is finished with baked on charcoal brown
enamel. Equipped with decorative casters as standard.
DP- 27 27"H, 20" x36" shelf size, 47 lbs. shpg. wt
$115.00
OPTIONAL: GLIDES: Add suffix " G" to model number. Reduce weight by 3lbs., height by 2". Deduct $ 5.00 from price. 4" CASTERS: Add suffix "- 4" to model number. Add 2 lbs. to
weight, 2" to height. Add $ 5.00 to price. 5" CASTERS: Add suffux "- 5" to model number. Add 4 lbs. to weight, 3" to height. Add $ 10.00 to price.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -3
AMERICAN TRANSPORT PRODUCTS
1622 N. Gower Street Hollywood, CA 90028 (213) 469-8251
CARTS
VFC-100 FOLDING VIDEO CART
Professionals know the convenience of having a high quality, versatile, electronic equipment cart. Available now is the VFC-100, a smooth rolling, all metal constructed vehicle designed to carry the necessary video equipment required for quality field, news gathering, and broadcast production.
Features ·Folds to a mere eleven inches for your storage con-
venience
·Three heavy duty, independently folding, equipment trays
·Three heavy duty cable hooks ·Heavy duty tripod/cable hook ·300 lbs. load capacity
· 1" 16 gauge steel tubing frame
·Heavy duty, all terrain, 10" locking pneumatic wheels, or 10" x1.75" semi- pneumatic wheels ( model VFC-50)
·Two, 4", locking, swivel casters
·2-1/4" ground clearance
·High quality chrome plated finish, or industrial grey enamel ( model VFC-121 and VFC-50)
VFC-121 VFC-50
Model No
Description
Wheel Finish Height Base
Wheels
Tray Dimensions Weight
VFC-100 Folding Video Cart Chrome 48" VFC-121 Folding Video Cart Painted 48" VFC-50 Folding Video Cart Painted 48"
25" 10" Pneumatic 17 3 /4 "x18" 25'· 10" Pneumatic 17 3/4"x18"
22" 10"x 1.75"semi 17 3/4"x18"
60 lbs. 60 lbs. 58 lbs.
List Price
$360.00 $310.00 $290.00
VE -4
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Transit Cases from ANVIL
ANVIL ATA. Cases offer the ultimate in protection. They conform to the Air Transport Association specification 300, Category 1standards for reuseable shipping containers. ANVIL' A.T.A. Cases must withstand the rigors of more than 100 round-trip transitings, on both surface vehicles and aircraft to qualify for this rating. In addition to custom-designed models for individual requirements, ANVIL' maintains adesign library containing literally thousands of stock Case models which can be shipped as is, or modified to meet your requirements, and shipped without delay. Case interiors are custom-designed to provide maximum shock absorption and vibration resistance. Soft, resilient unicellular polyfoam is sculptured to fit around your equipment like a glove. Quality control is assured through numerous inspections during and at the conclusion of the manufacturing process.
A.T.A. VIDEO CASES
We can build a strong cose around any broadcast, in dustrial or educational video product on the market. Just give us the model number of your camera, recorder monitor or any other component or combination- and we'll give you a case that will make sure your video corn Ponents are ready to get the shot when you are, every *imel
ANVIL A.T.A. COMPUTER CASES
Now you can ship indivicluu _ _ · · J_ . .Jmponents, or entire mini or micro computer systems, anywhere in the world without the slightest bit of worry. Our new A.T.A. Computer Case catalog contains models for hundreds of different components and system combinations. And mixing components from different hardware manufacturers is as easy as giving us the brand names and model numbers. We'll recommend the case or cases required to provide the highest degree of protection possible. And we can custom- design your Cases to provide room for software and peripherals, too.
A.T.A. AUDIO-VISUAL CASES
.Vant your A / V shows to come off without a hitch, time after time? Pack your gear in ANVIL' Cases-and relax! Our catalog includes models for motion, slide, strip and overhead projectors, as well as multi- image devices and dissolve units. And we've got your sound system covered too! FORGE Il' carrying Cases are now available for selected film- based items.
\i····01>
ANVIL E.I.A. RACKMOUNT CASES
Standard 19 inch rackmount components can be safeb, and easily moved to your location- shoot ready! ANVIL' of fers several variations on the rackmount design; front and rear removeable lids with or without shock isolation option pull-over -lid design (case within a case design), or the popular mixer/rack arrangement providing rackmount space horizontally opposed to standard vertical rack space. Whichever way you go. ANVIL' has the rack case to make for the fastest set-up and strike.
ANVIL CASES, INC., 4128 Temple City Blvd. · Rosemead, CA 91770
(818) 575-8614 · TWX: 910-587-4935
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -5
id je"e
1111 N GORDON STREET HOLLYWOOD, CA 90038 (213) 466-6181
CASES
A.T.A. --
Our A.T.A. Spec. 300, Category 1 Cases are constructed using the finest materials available. To form the actual shell, we start with high grade 1/4" plywood, laminated with tough ABS plastic, fiberglass, or aluminum. Aluminum edging is secured into place using machine driven steel rivets. Heavy duty recessed twist- latches and recessed spring loaded handles are used on all A.T.A. Cases. Other features include heavy gauge steel ball corners and edge clamps. The interior is lined with 1" polyester foam to custom- fit the equipment and provide protective shock absorption. Definitely a must for excessive truck or air travel.
LITE FLITE --
Designed for the around town user, LITE FLITE Cases are made with high grade 1/8" plywood laminated with ABS, fiberglass, or aluminum. Aluminum edging is secured to panels using machine driven steel rivet. High quality exterior latches and handles are used on LITE FLITE Cases. As in the A.T.A. Case, the interior is 1" polyester foam lining provided for shock protection.
CUSTOM CASES -- Our especially trained staff of case designers are available by telephone between 9:00 and 5:00 and in person to answer any questions in regards to design or specific case requirements. Their expertise is invaluable in designing for, and fulfilling your particular case needs. Contact our salespersons or our design staff at ( 213) 466-6181.
VE -6
COLORS -- ABS Exterior -- Black, Blue, Red, White, Grey, Green, Sky Blue, Orange, Beige, Pink
FIBERGLASS -- ( Available at 10% additional charge) Black, Blue, Orange, Red, Yellow, White, Olive, Grey
CARPET COVERING -- ALUMINUM -- ( Available at 10% additional charge)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BRETFORD
9715 Soreng Ave. Schiller Park, IL 60176 (312) 678-2545
AComplete Line of Quality Products From America's Largest Manufacturers of Communications Support Equipment
Versatility and ruggedness are just two of the valuable qualities built into every Bretford adjustable table. Each meets the application of the day with multiple height adjustments. Traditionally designed with all steel construction and die-cast shelves to offer solid support and years of dependable service. Each features the Quiet-Glide caster system, exclusive arc-welded caster sockets for maximum stability and heavy-duty 4" casters (2 with locking brakes) for smooth, noiseless transport
of loads up to 460 pounds. One ribbed rubber mat for top shelf supplied with each unit. Optional
Electrical Assembly with 2outlets, 20 ft. grounded cord available.
CA2642
1The CA2642 Adjustable Cabinet with 26", 30", 34", 38" and 42" height adjustments. High impact Black, baked enamel finish. Lockable Walnut vinyl-clad steel door with piano hinge. Includes 2 keys. Ships UPS, assembled. Weight: 55 pounds. Dimensions: 24"W x26 to 42"H x18"D $190.00 CA2642E Adjustable Cabinet, with Electrical Assembly. Weight: 57 1 /2 pounds $214.50
A2642E
The A2642 Universal Projection Table adjusts to 5
heights: 26" 30", 34", 38" and 42" high by simply
removing and resetting four bolts. Slate Gray. Ships UPS,
assembled. Weight: 42 pounds. Dimensions: 24"W x26
to 42"H x18" D
$ 105.00
A2642E Adjustable Table with Electrical Assembly.
Weight: 44 1 /2 pounds
$ 129.50
Adjustable Cabinets and
Tables
TVA3654
The TVA3654 Adjustable TV Table
adjusts from 36" to 54" at two inch
increments--ten different height
adjustments in all. Double-welded
top shelf. Slate Gray. Ships assem-
bled. Weight: 50 pounds. Dimen-
s1i7onrs:H2f8r"omW
x36 to Bottom
54"H x24"0, to Middle
shelf $ 165.00
TVA3654E Adjustable TV Table,
with Electrical Assembly. Weight: 52
pounds
$ 189.50
TVCA3654
The TVCA3654 Adjustable TV Cabinet adjusts from 36" to 54" at two inch increments. Black, baked enamel finish. Double welded top shelf. Lockable Walnut vinyl-clad steel door with piano hinge. Includes 2keys. Ships assembled. Weight: 66 pounds. Dimensions: 28"W x36 to 54"H x24"D. Cabinet Dimensions: 25"W x17 1 /2"H x21"D $ 281.00
TVCA3654E Adjustable TV Cabinet,
with Electrical Assembly. Weight: 68
pounds
$305.50
Accessories (See page Ifor complete description of accessories).
5" Caster replacing 4" Caster
$ 10.00
E- Unit, Electrical Assembly 2outlets $24.50
ES- Unit Electrical Assembly 3outlets
$32.00
ES- Unit replacing E- Unit
$ 7.50
TVS Slant Bar for TVA3654 and TVCA3654 $ 10.00
RM1824, Rubber Mats for 24" x18" tops
$ 5.50
RM2428, Rubber Mats for 28" x24" tops
$ 8.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-7
For stability, mobility, and economy, you can't beat Bretford's TV and VTR Cabinets and Stands. Choose from a diverse selection of functional designs for small and large group applications. All feature heavy gauge steel construction and Black, mar- resistant finish with Walnut highlights.
The VTRC54E TV/VTR Cabinet Stand with glare-free,
slanted top shelf. Includes 4" casters ( 2locking), and 2
keys for lock. Weight: 82 pounds. Dimensions: Outside-
28"W x54"H x24"D, Top Shelf-28"W x17"D, Top to
Middle Shelf-24", Cabinet-25"W x17" H x21"D. Ships
assembled
$ 300.50
The MPVC54E TV/VTR Cabinet Stand with electrical assembly and lockable cabinet storage. Designed for large groups, its built-in Slant Bar tilts TV forward to eliminate glare from overhead lights. Includes chrome legs
with 4" ball casters (2brakes), and 2keys for lock. Weight: 88 pounds. Dimensions: Outside- 30"W x54"H x 20"D, Top to Middle Shelf-26", Cabinet-28"W x17"H x18" D. Ships UPS, disassembled $300.50
Accessories
4" Caster replacing 2" caster (VTR20, VTRC30, and
MPVC40 only)
$ 13.00
5" Caster replacing 2" caster (VTR20, VTRC30, and
MPVC40 only)
$ 23.00
5" Caster replacing 4" caster ( MPVC54, VTRC54,
C42)
$ 10.00
E- Unit Electrical Assembly 2outlet, 20-foot grounded
cord
$ 24.50
ES- Unit Electrical Assembly 3outlet, 20-foot grounded
cord
$ 32.00
ES- Unit replacing E- Unit
$ 7.50
SB-Safety Belt Black
$ 22.50
RM2030 Rubber Mat Black for 30"x20" tops . $ 7.50
RM1824 Rubber Mat Black for 24" x18" tops . . .$ 5.50
RM2428 Rubber Mat Black for 28"x24" tops $ 8.00
BRETFORD TV/VTR Cabinets
and Stands
VTRC30E
The VTRC30E TV/VTR Cabinet with electrical assembly and lockable storage cabinet. Recessed top shelf for easy access to VCR on middle shelf. Includes chrome legs, 2" ball casters, and 2keys for lock. Weight: 66%2pounds. Dimensions: Outside30"W x32"H x20"D, lop Shelf-30"W x16"D, Top to Middle Shelf- 13", Cabinet-28"W x10"H x 18"D. Ships UPS, disassembled
$279.50
VE-8
The MPVC40E TV/VTR Cabinet Stand with two-door locking cabinet and electrical assembly. Designed for small to large groups. Recessed top shelf for easy access to VCR on middle shelf. Includes chrome legs, 2" ball casters, and 2keys for lock. Weight: 83 pounds. Dimensions: Outside-30"W x40"H x20"D, Top Shelf-30"W x16"D, Top to Middle Shelf- 13", Cabinet-28"W x 17"H x18"D. Ships UPS, disassembled $301.50
The VTR20 TV/VTR Stand with recessed top shelf for easy access to VTR on middle shelf. Chrome legs with 2" ball casters. Weight: 34 pounds. Dimensions: Outside-30"W x32"H x20"D, Top Shelf-30"W x 16"D, Top to Middle Shelf- 13". Ships UPS, disassembled $ 94.00
The VTR2OE TV/VTR Stand
with electrical assembly. Weight:
36'/z pounds. Ships UPS,
disassembled
. .$ 118.50
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
The C42E TV/VTR Cabinet Stand with electrical assembly and lockable cabinet with Walnut finished, vinylclad steel door. Includes 4" casters (2 locking) and 2keys for lock. Weight: 56 pounds. Dimensions: Outside-24"W x42"H x18"D, Top to Middle Shelf- 14", Cabinet23"W x17"H x17"D. Ships
assembled. $214.50
Bretford kept you in mind when designing these TV and VTR tables. They're mobile, large, and sturdy enough for every application. Constructed of heavy gauge steel with aSlate finish. Top shelf is " Double Welded" for maximum security. Bretford's unique electrical welding process allows features like smooth rounded edges, and die pressed shelves. Quiet-Glide caster system. Arcwelded caster sockets. Slant-top models allow glare free TV viewing. One ribbed rubber mat for top shelf. Ships assembled. E models include electrical unit with 2outlets and 20 ft. grounded extension cord.
The T54 Traditional TV/VTR Table with 3shelves.
Weight: 59 pounds. Deensions: Outside-28"W x54"H x
24"D, Top to Middle Shelf-23", Middle to Bottom
Shelf-20"
$161.00
The 154E Traditional TV/VTR Table with electrical
assembly. Weight: 61% pounds
$185.50
The TS54 Traditional TV/VTR Table with glare-free top
slant shelf. Weight: 59 pounds
$168.00
The TS54E Traditional TV/VTR Table with electrical
assembly. Weight: 61% pounds
$192.50
The 148 Traditional TV/VTR Table with 3shelves
Weight: 57 pounds. Dimensions: Outside-28"W x48"H x
24"D, lop to Middle Shelf-17", Middle to Bottom
shelf-20"
$153.00
The 148E Traditional TV/VTR Table with electrical
assembly. Weight: 59% pounds
$ 177.50
The TS48 Traditional TV/VTR Table with glare-free top
slant shelf. Weight: 55 pounds
$161.00
The TS48E Traditional TV/VTR Table with electrical
assembly. Weight: 57% pounds
$ 185.50
The 142 Traditional TV/VTR Table with 3shelves
Weight: 54 pounds. Dimensions: Outside-28"W x42"H x
24"D, Top to Middle Shelf- 14", Middle to Bottom
Shelf- 1T'
$150.00
The 742E Traditional TV/VTR Table with electrical
assembly. Weight: 56% pounds
$ 174.50
BRETFORD Traditional TV and VTR Tables
Accessories
5" Caster replacing 4" Caster
$ 10.00
E- Unit Electrical Assembly 2outlets, 20 ft.
grounded cord
$24.50
ES- Unit Electrical Assembly 3outlets, 20 ft. grounded cord
$32.00
ES- Unit replacing E-Unit
$ 7.50
Overhead Projector Tables
Whether your overhead projector application requires you to stand-up or sit-down, Bretford has the projector stand to meet your needs. And, our newest line additions guarantee that no matter what size projector you have, we've got the stand to fit it.
From the standard application tables (AOH2741 and AOH2741E) to the top of the line Executive Model (VVS0H29E)-All feature adjustable projector height and will enhance the use of any overhead projector on the market. Emodels feature an Electrical Unit with 2outlets, 20 ft. extension cord, and built-in cord winder.
4The WSOH29E Executive Overhead Projector Work
Station is afunctional and elegant work station. This top
of the line unit features an adjustable projector well (6" to
10" in 1" increments), convenient accessory drawer, a
roo -iy 10 sq. ft. work surface, full width accessory shelf,
and 2" twin-wheel casters. Putty Beige with Oak lami-
nates. Includes electrical assembly. Ships disassembled.
Weight: 112 pounds. Dimensions: 48"W x29"H x30"D,
Projector Opening- 15r w x16%"D
$360.00
The AOH2741 Adjustable Overhead Projector Table
works well for stand-up or sit-down applications. Work
surface adjusts from 27"H to 41"H in 2" increments,
and platform adjusts from 6" to 10" in 1" increments.
Features heavy gauge welded steel construction, smooth
irounded edges, die pressed shelves. " Quiet-Glide" caster
system, 4" casters (2with locking brake) and arch welded
caster sockets. Finished in Black with Walnut vinyl writing
surface. Weight: 73 pounds. Ships assembled. Dimen-
sions: 37"W x27 to 41"H x22/2"D, Projector Opening-
15%"W x18%"D
$ 183.50
The AOH2741E Overhead Projector Table with Electrical
Unit. Weight: 75 pounds
$208.00
A. AOH2741 at full height
for standing applications
B. AOH2741 at lowest
position for sit-down
applications.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-9
Accessories
Casters Replacement or substitute casters are available for most mobile stands, tables, cabinets, or trucks. Included are 1) Rigid Caster Packs for Mobile Utility Trucks; 2) 5" Caster Packs for easy rolling on carpets and rough surfaces, and 3) WS Caster Conversion kits for computer furniture.
Designed to attach to all Bretford Audio-Visual and Video furniture. Available assemblies include- 1) The EUnit ( UL approved) with 2 outlets, 20 ft. 3-wire cord and grounded plug; 2) E-S Unit--same as above with 3 outlets instead of two.
Rubber Mats Ribbed Rubber Mats provide aprotective non-slip surface to keep equipment in place on stands, cabinets, and tables. Available in several pre-cut sizes to fit most Bretford Products.
Contemporary, functional design gets you
right down to business. With features like steel construction, smooth rounded edges, die pressed shelves and " Quiet-Glide" cast-
ers, you'll agree these stands give you the most for your money. Square Lock Design allows fast assembly. Finished in Putty Beige
with Black legs. Ships UPS, disassembled.
Mini Pack Series
The MP42 Mini Pack with 2shelves. Weight: 30 pounds. Ships UPS. Dimensions: Outside-20"W x 42"H x18"D, Top to Bottom Shelf-21" $ 94.00
The MP42E Mini Pack with electrical assembly.
Weight: 32 pounds. Ships UPS
$ 118.50
The MP34 Mini Pack with 2shelves. Weight: 28 pounds. Ships UPS. Dimensions: Outside-20"W x 34"H x18"D, Top to Bottom Shelf- 13" $ 91.00
The MP34E Mini Pack with electrical assembly.
Weight: 30 pounds. Ships UPS
$ 115.50
The MP26 Mini Pack with 2shelves. Weight: 26 pounds. Ships UPS. Dimensions: Outside-20"W x 26"H x18"D, Top to Bottom Shelf- 17" .$ 85.00
The MP26E Mini Pack with electrical assembly. Weight: 28 pounds. Ships UPS $ 109.50
Super strength Safety Belt holds valuable monitors in place on slant top shelves. It features anine foot web strap with buckle and is designed for use on TVA/TR Mobile Equipment Tables.
Slant Sets Two models available. The Model MPS is designed for use with Contemporary Mobile Equipment Tables, and the Model TVS for Adjustable and Traditional TV Tables. Attaches to top shelf and tilts monitor forward to eliminate glare. Slotted design allows you to bolt equipment in place.
BRETFORD Contemporary
Mobile Equipment
Tables
MP3OE
The MP30 Contemporary Mobile Equipment
Table with 2shelves. Weight: 36 pounds. Ships
UPS. Dimensions: 30"W x30"H x20"D, Top to
Bottom Shelf- 14"
$ 117.00
The MP3OE Contemporary Mobile Equipment
Table with electrical assembly. Weight: 38 pounds.
Ships UPS
$ 141.50
Accessories
5" Caster replacing 4" Caster $ 10.00
E- Unit Electrical Assembly 2outlets, 20 ft
grounded cord
$24.50
ES- Unit replacing E- Unit
$ 7.50
ES- Unit Electrical Assembly 3outlets, 20 ft.
grounded cord
$32.00
RM2030 Rubber Mat for 30" x20" tops. $ 7.50
RM1820 Rubber Mat for 20" x18" tops . $ 5.00
SB-Safety Belt Black $22.50
MPS Slant Bar
$ 8.00
VE-10
"tb
MP48E
The MP48 Contemporary Mobile Equipment
Table with three shelves. Weight: 49 pounds.
Ships UPS. Dimensions: Outside-30"W x48"H x
20"D, Top to Middle Shelf- 17", Middle to Bottom
Shelf-20"
$ 132.00
The MP48E Contemporary Mobile Equipment
Table with electrical assembly. Weight: 51 pounds.
Ships UPS
$ 156.50
The MPS48 Contemporary Mobile Equipment
Table with glare-free top slant shelf. Weight: 51
pounds. Ships UPS
$ 140.00
The MPS48E Contemporary Mobile Equipment
Table with electrical assembly. Weight: 53 pounds.
Ships UPS
$ 164.50
MPS54E
The MP54 Contemporary Mobile Equipment
Table with 3shelves. Weight: 52 pounds. Ships
UPS. Dimensions: Outside-30"W x48"H x20"D,
Top to Middle Shelf- 17", Middle to Bottom
Shelf -20"
$ 138.00
The MP54E Contemporary Mobile Equipment
Table with electrical assembly. Weight: 54 pounds.
Ships UPS
$ 162.50
The MPS54 Contemporary Mobile Equipment
Table with glare free-top slant shelf. Weight: 54
pounds. Ships UPS
$ 146.00
The MPS54E Contemporary Mobile Equipment
Table with electrical assembly. Weight: 56 pounds.
Ships UPS
$ 170.50
Universal TV Wall/Ceiling Mounting Systems
TVM1
BRETFORD Video Security Centers
Accessories
RAS Rolling Accessory Shelf Black (For 40's and 70's) $ 57.00
FAS Fixed Accessory Shelf Black (For 40's and 70's) $25.00
RS Rolling Accessory Shelf
(VTRC50E only)
$52.00
FS Fixed Accessory Shelf
(VTRC50E only)
$24.00
E- Unit Electrical Assembly 2outlet, 20 ft. grounded cord $24.50
ES- Unit Electrical Assembly 3 outlet, 20 ft. grounded cord. .$32.00
ES- Unit replacing E- Unit $ 7.50
1The TVM1 Universal Video Mounting Bracket is perfect for every application, from small classrooms to large auditoriums. Installs monitors, receivers on ceiling. Accepts 17" to 26" diagonal screen T. Formed steel construction. Black baked enamel finish with VValnut vinyl-clad steel accents. Allows atilt factor up to 20 degrees. Weight: 27 pounds. Ships UPS, disassembled $ 150.00 The TVM2 Wall Bracket Adaptor allows TVM1 to mount on wall. Weight: 10 pounds. Ships UPS, disassembled $ 42.50
TvM2
Today, you depend on your video equipment more than ever before. It makes good sense to keep it
protected. An attractively designed Video Security
Center by Bretford provides mobility, but what's more, it locks up your entire video investment in one beautiful cabinet. Each center features arolling pull-out shelf for the player/recorder and a monitor shelf. Plus all shelves are adjustable to
accept awide variety of equipment and uses. Cabinets combine heavy gauge steel construction, finished in Black with the warm accent of wooden
doors finished in Walnut, mar- resistant laminate. Doors swing easily on full length piano hinges--fold
back against cabinet for easy access. Positive lock includes 2 keys. Removable, ventilated back panel. Easy rolling, heavy duty 4" ball bearing casters.
Electrical assembly with 2outlets, 20 ft. grounded
cord. Additional shelves available.
Ships disassembled.
The VTRC70E Video Security Center with one rolling
shelf plus 2movable shelves. Weight: 281 pounds.
Dimensions: 33"W x72"H x24"D. Inside- 31"W x60"H
x22"D
$931.50
VI KCAUL
The VTRC40E Video Security Center with one rolling and one movable shelf. Weight: 154 pounds. Dimensions: 33"W x38"H x24"D, Inside-31"W x30"H x22"D $ 528.50
The VTRC50E Midsize Video Security Center with
one rolling shelf and 2adjustable shelves. Weight:
171 pounds. Dimensions: 28"W x55"H x23"D,
Inside-26"W x30"H x22"D
$633.50
The VTRC90 Video Security Center is the state-of-the-art in video cabinetry. Features an open leg design, ajustable monitor shelf, cord organizer/modesty panel, 3outlet electrical assembly with 20 ft. grounded cord. Steel construction with 1" square tubular steel legs. Putty Beige baked enamel finish with oak laminate doors which, when folded back, are held in place against the cabinet. 4" casters (2 with locking brakes). Ships disassembled. Wt.: 160 lbs. Dimensions: 36"W x58"H x25"D, Inside-36"W x32"H x24"D, Shelf-36"W x23"D $399.00
VE-11
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E 355th St. Willoughby, OH 44094 (216) 946-3200
SERIES 2000 UPRIGHT
UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
Available in either plain or louvered side and rear door; solid top.
SERIES 2000 INCLINED PANEL
SERIES 2000 UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
Here are electronic enclosures that do more than house equipment. The sheer square line of the Series 2000, its symmetrical styling is the result of experience and perception Bud designers have. All Series 2000 cabinet racks include welded frame and base, sides, top, and rear door.
Design Features · Anodized aluminum extrusion top trim. · " U" braces on sides of all welded 14 gauge
steel frame for added strength and rigidity. · Door, 20 gauge steel. · Sides and top, 18 gauge. · Front and rear panel mounting rails tapped
10-32 on E.I.A. universal spacing. · Accommodate 19" panels. · Caster brackets pierced for RC- 7758
casters. · One inch diameter knockout holes in base. · Interiors are accessible from front and rear
for easy installation of and maintenance of components. · Readily removable rear door can be mounted right or left.
· Two pairs of fully adjustable mounting rails are included.
· Shipped completely assembled.
Finishes Gray textured ( GT) or royal blue textured ( RB)
INCLINED PANEL CABINET RACKS
Series 2000 Inclined Panel Racks are similar to the upright models in style and construction and can be used in conjunction with them. The front is divided into upright and 20° inclined panel space. Two pairs of fully adjustable mounting rails are in the front upright and sloping panel area, and one pair in the rear.
SERIES 2000
SERIES 2000 UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
Catalog No ·
Cm.log No .
Outside Height (AI
Outside Width MI
Outside Depth IC)
Clear
Inside
Panel
Depth IDI Space IF/
Weight Lbs
E-2000 E-2001
E-2016 E-2017
30'4" 401 /4 "
24 1 /2 ." 24 1 /2 ."
23 1 /4 " 23'4"
20 1/2 " 20 1/2 "
21" 31y,"
119 141
E-2002
E-2018
44'4"
24 1 /2 ."
23'4"
20 1/2 "
35"
149
E-2003 E-2004
E-2019 E-2020
51y." 61 1 /4 '
24 1 /2 ." 241 /4 .
23 1 /4 " 23%
20 1/2 " 20 1/2 "
42" 52'4"
168 195
E-2005 E-2006 E-2007 E-2008 E-2009 E-2010
E-2021 E-2022 E-2023 E-2024 E-2025 E-2026
70 1 /2 "
79 1 /4 " 88" 30,4"
401 /4 " 44'4 -
241 /2 ."
24/21 s" 241 /24 " 241/24"
24 1 /2 ." 24 1 /2 ."
23'4" 23 1 /2 " 23'4" 27 1 /4 " 27 1 /4 " 27 1 /4 "
20 1/2 " 20Y," 20 1/2 " 24" 24" 24"
61'4" 70" 78 1/4 " 21" 31 1/2 " 35"
216 233 260 129 154 159
E-2011
E-2027
51/41 "
241 /4 ."
27 1 /4 "
24"
42"
179
E·2012 E-2013 E-2014
E-2028 E-2029 E-2030
61 1 /4 " 70 1 /2 " 79 1 /4 "
241 /4 ." 241 /2 ." 241 /2 ."
27 1 /4 " 27 1 /4 " 27 1 /4 "
24" 24" 24"
52y," 61 1/2 " 70"
215 234 244
E-2015
E-2031
24 1 /2 ."
27 1 /4 "
24"
78 1/4 "
258
·Supplied with plain sides and plain rear door ·Supplied With louvered sides and louvered rear door
SERIES 30-2000 ( EXTRA DEEP) UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
SERIES 2000 FRONT DOORS FOR UPRIGHT CABINETS
2 tna,blc.,g,
E-30-2000 E-30-2001 E-30-2002 E-30-2003 E302004 E-30-2005 E-30-2006 E-30-2007
Outside Height
30 1 /2 " 401 /4 " 44 1 /2 " 51 1 /4 " 61 1 /4 " 70 1 /2 "
79 1 /2 " 88"
Outside Width 24 1 /2 ." 241 /2 ." 241 /2 ." 241 /2 ." 241 /2 ." 24 1 /2 ."
24 14," 24 1 /2 ."
Outside Depth 321 /4 " 32 1 /4 " 32 1 /4 " 32 1 /4 " 32 1 /4 " 32%"
32 1 /4 " 32 1 /4 "
ICnlseiadre Depth 29 1 /4 " 29 1 /2 " 2914" 294" 29'4" 29 1 /2 "
29Y." 29'4"
Panel SIM«. 21" 31'4" 35" 42" 52Yr" 61'4"
70" 781 /4 "
Wgt Les 150 175 180 217 248 259
303 307
Catalog No Plain E-9000 E-9001 E-9002 E-9003 E-9004 E-9005
Catalog No Louvered E-9020 E-9021 E-9022 E-9023 E-9024 E-9025
Height
WFitisthUFMollowinnegd` Panel Spaces
23 1 /2 " 34"
21" 31 1/2 "
37 1 /2 "
35"
44 1 /2 " 55"
42" 52'4"
63 1 /4 "
61 1/2 "
Wet Lbs
15 18 19 23 27 29
E-9006
E-9026
72 1 /2 "
70"
31
E-9007
E-9027
81/21 "
78 1/2 "
33
Rear door supplied with rack. For replacement rear door, use Series 60 doors
SERIES 2000 INCLINED PANEL CABINET RACKS
-vde
SERIES 2000 INCLINED PANEL CABINET RACKS
Outside Outside Outside Clear Inclined Vertical
Catalog [Halos Height
Width
Depth
Inside
Panel
Panel
Wgt
No ·
No · ( Al
(B)
IC) Depth ID) SpacelE) Spec. ( FI Lbs
SE- 2064 SE - 2067 51 1 /2 " 24 1 /2 ." 23 1 /4 " 20Y,"
10 1/2
29 1/4 " 163
SE- 2065 SE- 2068 51 1 /4
24 1 /2 . 23'4
201 /2
151/4 " 24 1/2 " 161
SE- 2066 SE- 2069 511/2" 241/41," 23 1 /4 " 20 1 /2 " 17 1/2 " 22 1/4 " 164
Supplied with plain sides and plain rear door 'Supplied with louvered sides and louvered rear door
SERIES 30-2000 ( EXTRA DEEP) INCLINED PANEL CABINET RACKS
Catalog No
S-30-2064 S-30-2065 S-30-2066
Outside Height
51'4' 51'4" 51'4"
Outside Width 24 1 /2 ." 241 /2 ." 241 /4 .
Outside Depth 32 1 /4 " 32 1 /4 " 32%
Clear Inside Depth 29'4" 29'4" 29'4
Inclined Panel Space 104 15 1 /4 17Y,
Vertical Panel Space 29 1/4 24 1/2 22 1/4
Wgt Lbs 223 223 223
VE -12
SERIES 2000 FRONT DOORS FOR INCLINED PANEL CABINET RACKS
Catalog Number
Plain
Louvered
E-9038
6-9028
E-9009 E-9010
E-9029 E-9030
Rear door supplied with rack.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Height 32'4" 27" 2514"
Width 21" 21" 21"
Fits Vertical Space of the Inclined Unit
29 1/4 " 24 1/2 " 22 1/4 "
Wgt Lbs
10 1/2 " 9
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E. 355th St. Willoughby, OH 44094 (216) 946-3200
Available in either plain or louvered sides and rear door; solid top.
UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
SERIES 60 UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
These cabinet racks are proof of what Bud designers have striven for and achieved: Quality enclosures that enhance the function, appearance and value of your products. All Series 60 Cabinet Racks include welded frame, sides, top and rear door.
Design Features · " U" braces on sides of all welded 14 gauge
steel frame for durability. · Door, 20 gauge steel. · Sides and top, 18 gauge. · Front and rear panel mounting rails tapped
10-32 on E.I.A. universal spacing. · Accommodate 19" panels. · Caster brackets pierced for RC- 7758
casters. · One inch knockout holes in base. · Interiors are accessible from front and rear
for easy installation and maintenance of components. · One door furnished. May be used on front or rear; mounted to open left or right · Two pairs of adjustable mounting rails are included. · Shipped completely assembled.
Finishes Gray textured ( GT) or royal blue textured ( RB).
INCLINED PANEL CABINET RACKS
Series 60 Inclined Panel Racks are similar to the upright models in style and construction and can be used in conjunction with them. The front is divided into upright and 20° inclined panel space. Two pairs of fully adjustable mounting rails are in the front upright and sloping panel area, and one pair in the rear.
SERIES 60 UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
SIDES
Fits
Upright Rack
With
This
Catalog No
Panel Wgt
Plain Louvered Height Width Space Lbs
60.2560 60-2580 26 1/4 22
21
12 1 /4
60-2561 60-2581 37 1/4 " 22" 31 1 /4 " 17 1 /4
60.2562 60.2582 47 1/4 " 22" 42" 21
60.2563 60.2583 58 1/4 " 22" 52 1 /4 " 26 1 /4
60-2564 60-2584 67 1/4 " 22" 60-2565 60-2585 75 1/4 " 22"
614" 34 70" 34
60.2566 60-2586 84 1/4 " 22" 78 1 /4 " 38
60.2567 60-2587 26 1/4 " 25 1/4 " 21"
14 1 /4
60-2568 60.2588 37 1/4 " 25 1/4 " 31 1 /4 " 20
60-2569 60.2589 47 1/4 " 25 1/4 " 42" 24
60-2570 60-2590 58 1/4 " 25 1/4 " 52 1 /4 " 29 1 /4
60-2571 60.2591 67 1/4 " 25 1/4 " ely,·· 341 /4
60-2572 60-2592 75 1/4 " 25/41 " 70 " 39
60.2573 60-2593 84 1/4." 25/21 " 78
43 it
Soto in mist:mi.
UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
Catalog
Catalog
Outside Outside Outside Clear Inside Panel
Top
Wgt
No
No ·
Height (Al Width 18) Depth ( C) Depth ( DI Space IF) Opening
Lbs
60-2300 60-2301 60-2302 602303 60-2304 60-2305 · 60.2306 60-2307 so- 2308 60.2309 60-2310 60.2311 60-2312 60.2313
60.2700 60.2701 60.2702 60.2703 60.2704 60-2705 60.2706 60.2707 60.2708 60-2709 60-2710 60.2711 60.2712 60-2713
29% 40 1 /4 " 501 /4." 61 1 /4 " 69 1 /4 "
78 1 /4 " 87 1 /4 " 291 /4 " 40 1 /4 " 501 /4 " 61 1 /4.69 1 /4 " 781 /4 " 87 1 /4 "
24 1 /4 . 24 1 /4 ." 24 1 /4 ."
24 1 /4 é" 24 1 /4 s" 24 1 /4 .24 1 /4 4241 /4 ." 24 1 /4 s" 24 1 /4 s" 24 1 /4 s" 24 1 /4 s" 24 1 /4 s" 241 /4 4"
22"
22" 22" 22" 22" 22" 22" 25 1 /4 " 25 1 /4 " 25 1 /4 " 25 1 /4 " 25 1 /4 " 25 1 /4 " 25 1 /4 "
201 /4 "
201 /4 " 201 /2 " 20 1 /4 " 20 1 /4 " 201 /2 " 20 1 /4 " 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"
21"
31 y,"
42" 52 1 /4 " 61 1 /4 " 70" 78 1 /4 "
31 1 /2 " 42" 52 1 /4 61 1 /4 " 70" 28%-
181 /4 ." it 17
181 /4 ." · 17" 181 /4 ." e17" 181 /4 ." · 17" I81 /4 ." et 17" 181 /4i." · 17" 181 /4 ." it 17"
2o.h"
18%." a20'4" 181 /4 ," a20 1 / 4 18%." · 20.4-
e20'e e20 1 / 4 " Ism." a20'6"
112 137 162 189 215 227 244 123 145 170 202 216 231 263
·Supplied with plain sides and plain rear door. * Supplied with louvered sides and louvered rear door
SERIES 30 (EXTRA DEEP) UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
Catalog No
30-2300 30-2301 30.2302 30-2303 30-2304 30-2305 30-2306
Outside Height 29 1 /4 " 40 1 /4 " 501 /4 " 61 1 /4 " 69 1 /4 " 78 1 /4 " 87 1 /4 "
Outside Width 24 1 /4 ." 24 1 /4 ."
24 1 /4 s" 24 1 /4 s" 24 1 /4 ."
241 /4 s" 24 1 /4 ."
Outside Depth 301 /4 " 301 /4 " 301 /4 " 301 /4." 301 /4 " 301 /4 " 30'4"
Clear Inside Depth 29 1 /4 " 29 1 /4 "
29 1 /4 " 29 1 /4 " 29 1 /4 " 29 1 /4 " 29 1 /4 "
Panel Space 21" 31 1 /4 "
42" 52 1 /4 " 61 1 /4 " 70" 78 1 /4 "
Top Opening 1,3m," 2sy."
18%." · 251 / 4 "
181 /4 ," it 25.Y. -
18%," e 25'4" 181 /4 ." 251 / 4 "
181 /4 ." · 25 1 / 4 " 181 /4 ." · 25 1 / 4 "
Wei Lbs 154 174
202 225 245 268 294
FRONT DOORS ( Rear door supplied with racks)
Catalog No
Plain
Louvered Height
Fits Upright Rack With Thie W91 Width Panel Space Lbs
60.2340 60.2540 21 1 /4 ." 18 1 /4 ."
21"
60-2341 60.2541 31' 1 /4 .- 18 1 /4 ."
31 1 /4 "
11 1 /4
60-2342 60-2542 42 1 /4 ." 18 1 /4 ."
42"
15Y,
60 2343 60-2543 52 1 /4 . 18' 1 /4 ."
52/41
19
60.2344 60.2544 61"A. 18 1 /4 ."
61 1 /4 "
22 1 /4
60-2345 60-2545 70 1 /4 ." 18 %,"
20 "
257,
60-2346 60.2546 79 1 /4 ." 18 1 /4 ."
78 1 /4 "
29
these doors can be used as from doors on Sores 60 and [loom. Caluner robes these doors are In, son.. as rear doors 6 46,6.0 on Send. 00 Sr,,., 25)0 an,
Concorde clones they rnay be mounted ro noon WM or non,
PERFORATED TOPS
Cat No
60.2370 602371
Width
Fits Upright
Rack with overall Wei Depth depth of Lbs
21 .1/,." 17"
22"
6
21' 1 /4t " 20 1 /4 " 25 1 / 4 " 7
SERIES 60 INCLINED PANEL CABINET RACKS
INCLINED PANEL CABINET RACKS
Catalog No ·
Outside Outside Outside
Catalog Height Width Depth
No · (A)
181 (CI
Clear Inclined Vertical
Inside Panel
Panel
Depth Space Space
( D/ ( El ( FI
Top Opening
Wgt Lbs
60.2330 60-2331 60-2332
60-2730 60-2731 60.2732
50 1 /4 " 501 /4 " 501 /4 "
24/41 s24 1 /4 ." 24 1 /4 ."
22 " 22" 22"
20 1 /4 " 20 1 /4 " 20 1 /4 "
10 1 /4 " 151 /4 " 17Y,"
29 1 /4 " 24 1 /4 " 22%"
11 1 /4 ." · 181 /4 ." 10" a 181 /4 ."
9%." 113'4."
155 156 154
·Supplied with plain sides and plain rear door · Supplied with louvered sides and louvered rear door
SERIES 30 ( EXTRA DEEP) INCLINED PANEL CABINET RACKS
SIDES
Catalog No
302330 30.2331 30-2332
Outside Height
501 /4 " 501 /4 " 50,6"
Outside Width
24 1 /4 .24 1 /4 ." 241/4s"
Outside Depth 303'."
303',"
Clear Inside Depth 29 1 /4 "
29 1 /4 " 29 1 /4 "
Inclined
Panel Space
10 1 /2 " 15 1 /4 " 17 1 /4 "
Vertical Panel Space
291 /4 "
24 1 /4 "
2V4"
Top Opening
201 /4 ." · 181 /4 ."
18 1 /4 " it 'Ilie/ni -
18 1 /4 ." · 181 /4 4"
Wgt Lbs
196 196
196
Catalog No
Plain
Louvered
60.2574
60-2594
60-2575
60-2595
60-2576
60.2596
Height 4 7%47 1/4.47 1/4 "
Width
22" 22" 22"
Fos Cabinet With Vertical Panel Space
291 /4 "
24 1 /4 -
22 1 /4 "
Specify "L" tor lot 5,0, or " R- for ' WM sett.. determine when loone front of reek
Wgt Lbs
11
91 /4 9
REAR DOOR ( Fits all Inclined Panel Racks) (Supplied)
Catalog
Plain
rL'liLvered
60.2342
60-2542
Height 4 21 /4is"
Width
WLg bst 154"
FRONT DOORS
Catalog No
Plain
Louvered
602350
60-2550
60.2351
60-2551
60-2352
60-2552
Height 24 1/4 ."
Width tIll'Vui" 18' 1 /4 ."
Fits Cabinet With Vertical Panel Space 29 1 /4 "
24 1 /4 " 22 1 /4 "
Wat Lbs 11
91 /4 9
PERFORATED TOPS
Cat No 60-2372 60-2373 60-2374
Width
211 /41s" 21'%," 21 ' 1 /4 s"
Depth 11' 1 /4 s" 10"
91 /4 "
Fits Inclined Panel Rack with This Top Opening
11%." me e 18%."
9%." n181 /4 4"
Order Perfoealed froS. Idos arw, ooas to mend, color of Calorie
Wet Lbs
31 / 4
31 / 4 31 / 4
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -13
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E. 355th St. Willoughby, OH 44094 (21 6) 946-3200
CABINET RACKS
ADD- A- RACK SYSTEM
FOR SERIES 60 AND SERIES 2000 CABINET RACKS
Used to combine two or more enclosures into one integral system.
Design Features: Assembly consists of a welded frame top, bottom and rear door Aluminum extrusions are included for Series 2000.
Bonus Features: The advantage of using this system is economy. When developing aband of enclosures, costs can be dramatically reduced by using one complete unit and several Add-A- Rack assemblies to obtain the optimum width.
Finishes: Order the same color as the cabinet rack.
CONCORDE SERIES
Add- A- Racks For Series 60 Upright Cabinet Racks
Inside Depth 20 1/2 " ' net:le Depth 24"
Inside Depth 29 1/ 4 "
Catalog No
60-2500 60-2501 60-2502 60-2503 60-2504 60-2505 60-2506 60.2507 60-2508 60-2509 60-2510 60-2511 60-2512 60-2513
Used To Add Same Size Unit
To 60-2300 60-2301 60-2302 60-2303 60-2305 60-2305 60-2306 60-2307 60-2308 60.2309 60-2310 60-2311 60-2312 60-2313
Weight Lbs
92 113 115 145 148 152 158 120 132 138 142 164 168 172
Catalog No
Used To Add Same Size Unit
To
60-2900 60-2700
60-2901 60-2701
60-2902 60-2702
60-2903 60-2703
60-2904 60-2704
60-2905 60-2705
60-2906 60-2706
60-2907 60-2707
60-2908 60-2708
60-2909 60-2709
60-2910 60-2710
60-2911 60-2711
60-2912 60-2712
60-2913 60-2713
ADD-A- RACK
Catalog No
Used To Add Same Size Unit
To
30-2900 30-2300
30-2901 30-2301
30-2902 30-2302
30-2903 30-2303
30-2904 30-2304
30-2905 30-2305
30-2906 30-2306
Weight Lbs
133 155 182 207 230 230 269
Add-A- Racks For Series 60 Sloping Panel Cabinets
Catalog No.
60-2530 60-2531 60-2532 60-2930 60-2931 60-2932 30-2530 30-2531 30-2532 30-2930 30-2931 30-2932
Used To Add Same Size Unit
To 60-2330 60-2331 60-2332 60-2730 60-2731 60-2732 30-2330 30-2331 30-2332 30-2730 30-2731 30-2732
Weight Lbs.
119 119 125 119 119 125 163 163 163 163 163 163
Add- A- Racks For Series 2000 Upright Cabinet Racks
Inside Depth 201/2 " Inside Depth 24"
Inside Depth 29 1/4"
Catalog No
Used To Add Same Size Unit
To
Weight Lbs
AE- 2032 E-2000
90
AE- 2033 E-2031
110
AE- 2034 E-2002
113
AE- 2035 E-2003
115
AE- 2036 E-2004
145
AE- 2037 E-2005
148
AE- 2038 E-2036
152
AE- 2039 E-2007
158
AS- 2040 E-2008
120
AE- 2041 E-2009
130
AE- 2024 E-2010
135
AE- 2043 E-2011
138
AE- 2044 E-2012
142
AE- 2045 E-2013
164
AE- 2046 E-2014
168
AE- 2047 £2015
173
Catalog No.
Used To Add Same Size Unit
To
AE- 2048 E-2016
AE- 2049 E-2017
AE- 2050 E-2018
AE- 2051 AE -2052
E-2019 E-2020
AE- 2053 E-2021
AE- 2054 E-2022
AE- 2055 E-2023
AE- 2056 E-2024
AE- 2057 E-2025
AE- 2058 E-2026
AE- 2059 E-2027
AE- 2060 E-2028
AE- 2061 E-2029
AE- 2062 AE- 2063
E-2030 E-2031
Catalog No
AE- 30-2032 AE- 30-2033 AE- 30-2034 AE- 30-2035 AE- 30-2036 AE- 30-2037 AE- 30-2038 AE- 30-2039
Used To Add Same Size Unit
To E-30-2000 E-30-2001 E-30-2032 E-30-2003 E-30-2004 E-30-2005
E-30-2036 E.30-20137
Weight Lbs.
137 160 187 213 238 254 275 296
Add-A- Racks For Series 2000 Sloping Panel Cabinets
Catalog No
ASE- 2084 ASE- 2035 ASE- 2086 ASE- 2087 ASE- 2088 ASE- 2089 AS- 30-2084 AS- 30-2085 AS- 30.2086 ASE- 30-2087 ASE- 30-2088 ASE- 30-2089
Used To Add Same Size Unit
To SE- 2064 SE- 2065 SE- 2066 SE- 2067 SE- 2068 SE- 2069 S-30-2064 S-30-2065 S-30-2066 S-30-2067 S-30-2068
S-30-2069
Weight Lbs.
115 115 120 115 115 120 190 190 190 190 190 190
CONCORCE SERIES UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
Another choice of cabinet racks from Bud with a personality all their own. One that will add a unique but highly sophisticated appearance to your product One that appeals to amarketplace looking for new anti always better ideas. Concorde Cabinet Racks include welded frame, top, sides and rear door.
Design Features · "U" braces on 14 gauge steel frame provide
assured strength and rigidity. · Door, 20 gauge steel.
· Sides and top, 18 gauge. · Front and rear adjustable panel mounting rails,
12 gauge, tapped 10-32 on E.I.A. universal spacing. · Accommodate 19" panels. · Caster brackets pierced for RC- 7758 casters.
· One inch knockout holes in base. · Clear anodized aluminum extrusion frames
the cabinet. Name plate area has suble woodgrain inset
· Interiors are accessible from front and rear for easy installation and maintenance of components.
· Shipped completely assembled.
Finishes Gray textured ( GT) or royal blue textured ( RB).
Accessories
Concorde Cabinet Racks are available with 24" panel space
--. ...--. _..
Catalog No
CFI- 16200 CR -16201 CR·16202 CR -16203 CR·16204 CR -16205 CR.16206
Outside Height 1/11
29%" 40 1 /4 " 50%"
61 y."
69'4" 78%" 87%"
Outside Width 031
24 V,a" 24 Vis" 24Vis" 24 Y,s" 24 Viis" 24'A s" 24 Vis"
Outside Depth IC I
22.%" 22%" 22',.." 22%' 22%" 22%' 22 1 /4 "
Clear Insole Depth 101 20 1 /2 " 20 1 /2 " 20 1 /2 " 20Y," 20 1 /2 " 203V," 20 1 /2 "
Panel Space WI
21" 31 1 /2 " 42" 52V," 61%" 70" 78 14"
Top Opening 18,/,." x17" 18%,," x 17" 18 1A." x17" 18,/,." x17" 18 1/,." e17" 18,/,." x17" 18%,.", 17"
VE-14
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Wgt Lbs 114 135 164 191 212 229 246
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E 355th St Willoughby, OH 44094 (216) 946-3200
CABINET RACKS/ PORTABLE CABINETS
CLASSIC II CABINET RACKS
Refined styling, design simplicity. Rigid plastic extruded front trim frames the front - afew reasons why the Classic II sets your product apart from the conventional.
Classic II Cabinet Racks include welded frame, top, bottom, sides, rear door with flush mounted handle and cam lock.
Design Features · Light weight, yet support heavier than average
loads, since " U" braces on frame provide extra strength and support · Rear door 20 gauge steel. Front door available. Can be mounted to open left or right. · Side panels - 18 gauge steel · Top and bottom - 16 gauge steel · Adjustable front and rear mounting rails 12 gauge, tapped 10-32 on E.I.A. universal spacing · 19" wide panels fit openings · Caster brackets pierced for RC- 7756 casters
Finishes Gray textured ( GT)or royal blue textured(RB).
Accessories
Classic II Cabinet Racks are available with 24" panel space.
U.S. Patent Number 224229 Canadian Patent Number 34884
CLASSIC II UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
Catalog
Height
Width
No. ( Al ( 8)
AGR-9301 36./os"
22"
AGR-9302 47./."
22"
AGR-9303 57"/,·"
22"
AGR-9304 66./or .
22"
AGR-9305 75./or
22"
AGR-9306 82./te"
22"
Meer inside depth, 21W")
Depth ( CI
22" 22" 22" 22" 22" 22"
Panel Space ( D) 31 1/2 "
42" 52 1/2 " 61 1/4 " 70" 77"
Wgt. Lbs. 119 138 154 172 182 196
FRONT DOORS (Rear doors included with rack.)
Catalog No. Fits Rack
Wgt. Lbe,
AGD-931
AGR-9301
16
AGD-932
AGR-9302
20
AGD-933
AGR-9303
23
AGD-934
AGR-9304
26
AGD-935
AGR-9305
28
AGD-936
AGR-9306
31
(Order door to match color of rack.)
CLASSIC II PORTABLE CABINETS
Whether used independently or as a companion to the Classic II cabinet rack, the design of this distinctive cabinet harmonizes perfectly with the most sophisticated systems. While it's portable, it is equally effective for permanent installations.
Design Features · Top, bottom and side panels . 060 aluminum.
Frame, 6063T aluminum extrusions · Accomodate 19" panels · Doors and panels not included but are available
· Ye" aluminum alloy doors attach to mounting rails
· Black thermoplastic flush-type latch
Bonus Features · Recessed brushed chrome handles are attached
to two steel flanges extending the length of the cabinet. This added support assures carrying safety. · Two 16 gauge steel vertically adjustable chassis supports included · Shipped completely assembled Finishes Gray textured ( GT) or royal blue textured (RB).
Top, bottom, soda panels 060 alurnonurn
Frame 6063-T5 alununurn eatruslons.
Cab, nets accommodate
standard tgpanels Recessed handles
SWing out for portabdav
Two 16 gauge vertocallv adiustable chassis supports
Front and rear mounung rads tapped 10 32 W E spacIng
Cleat inSede depth. panel to panel 209 16 overall depth. 21 7, 16 '
CLASSIC II CABINETS
Catalog No AGC-9267 AGC-9268 AGC-9269 AGC-9270 AGC-9271 AGC-9272 AGC-9273 AGC-9274 AGC-9275 AGC-9276 AGC-9277 AGC-9278 AGC-9279 AGC-9280
Hegel (A) 71/4 ." 8' 1/4 ."
101/4 ." 12 1/4 ." 14Y,." 15' 1/4 5"
191/4 ." 21 y." 22 1/4 ." 241/4 ." 261/4 8" 28 1/4 ." 29' Y,."
Panel Space (BI
51/4 "
83'." 10 1/4 " 12 1/2 " 14" 15 1/4 " 17 1/4 " 19 1/4 " 21" 22 1/4 " 24y," 26 1/4 " 28"
Wgt Lbs 28 30 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 43 45
(Clear inside depth, 201/4 ." Overall depth, 21 1/4 ."
CLASSIC II CABINET DOORS (Fit front or rear.) ( No doors supplied)
Catalog No
Height
Fits Cabinet
AGD-367 AGD-368 AGD-369 AGD-370 AGO- 371 AGD-372 AGO- 373 AGO- 374 AGO- 375 AGD-376
51/2 "
81/4 " 10 1/2 " 12 1/4 " 14" 15 1/4 " 17 1/4 " 19y." 21"
AGC 9267 AGC 9268 AGC-9269 AGC-9270 AGC-9271 AGC-9272 AGC-9273 AGC-9274 AGC-9275 AGC-9276
AGO- 377 AGD-378 AGO- 379 AGD-380
22 1/4 " 24 1/2 " 26Y." 28"
AGC-9277 AGC-9278 AGC-9279 AGC-9280
Wgt Lbs
2 21/4 3 31/4 4 41/4 5 5Y, 61/4 61/4 71/4 7y, 8
Doors available in white textured (WH) only
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-15
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E. 365th St. Willoughby, OH 44094 (216) 946-3200
RACKS
DELUXE RELAY RACKS
PRESTIGE RELAY RACKS
VALU RACK
VALU RACK 30" DEEP VALUE PRICED
This cabinet rack is another of our Designer Series available for off- the- shelf delivery. It offers the distinctive styling that enhances the value of its contents. The front is attractively framed by rigid vinyl trim with black inserts and a name plate.
Design Features Entire interior is accessible from front to rear for installing or maintaining components. One pair of horizontally adjustable mounting rails, tapped 10-32 on E.I.A. unive-sal spacing attach to horizontal rail supports. The 20 gauge door has cam lock and flush handle, 18 gauge sides and 16 gauge top and bottom. Mounting brackets in base drilled to accommodate Bud RC7758 casters or RL-7768 levelers.
Bonus Feature Shipped unassembled in two cartons. Qu ck, easy, assembly. No special tools required. Hardware included. NSTA approved packaging.
AVS500 VTR SYSTEM CABINET
This sturdy, all welded, compact, mobile unit provides aconvenient VTR center for a range of AV applications and a housing for electronic devices.
Design Features: Top shelf of upper section houses a monitor or display. Clear dimensions of this are 18" high, 26" wide, 22" deep. Lower shelf designed for tape deck or disc player. Overall 65 1/2 "x30" x24".
Lower section contains two shelves for cassette storage or other material. Top shelf slides out. Area above each shelf is 12". All steel construction.
Bonus Features: Front doors bifold to provide a270° opening for maximum view when V.T.R. system is operating. Flush mounted cam locks on all doors assure tamperproof storage and maximum security. Four 2" casters are included.
Delivered assembled: Weight 255 lbs.
Finish: Black textured.
Finish Royal Blue Textured ( RB)
VALURACK CATALOG NO.
RAIL PART NO.
KDR-2852
9451
KDR-2861 KDR-2870
9452 9453
KDR-2877
9306-PMR
Note: One pair of mounting rails is provided and should meet most of your
requirements. To order additional
pairs of mounting rails, refer to
adjacent chart.
Catalog No
KDR-2852 KDR-2861 KDR-2870 KDR-2877
PH
Panel Heoght
A
Outsode Heoght
B
Outside Wodth
52 1 / 2 " 58,/,"
61'A" 66' 6/,."
70"
75"/,"
77"
82"/,,,"
22 22" 22" 22"
C
Outsode Depth
32 1/4 " 32 1/4 " 32 1/4 " 32 1/4 "
D
Clear Insode Depth 29 1/4 "
29 1/4 "
294"
29'4"
E
Clear Inside McIth
17 ,./. -
Est WeIght
(lbs)
155
17' 54,"
174
17,./,e 193
17' ,/,." 208
RELAY RACKS DELUXE RELAY RACKS
Versatile, economical enclosures house awide range of electronic equipment and control system.
Design Features: Well- ventilated racks take 19"
panels. Rear door has two black thermoplastic catches. If casters are required, specify RC- 7756.
Top, bottom, sides and rear door, 16 gauge steel. Shipped knocked down.
Bonus Features: Contoured front vertical members
include 7/64" panel mounting supports drilled and tapped 10-32 on E.I.A. universal spacing.
Finishes: Royal blue textured ( RB) and Luster Gray (LG).
DELUXE RELAY RACKS
Catalog No. Panel Space Height
CR -1774 363 /4 "x19" 42'/16"
CR -1771 42" x19" 475/16"
CR -1772 61 1 /4 "x19" 665/16"
CR -1780 CR -1773
70" x19" 77" x19"
75 ,/,6"
82 5/16"
CR -2074 363/4"x19" 42 1/16"
CR -2071 42" x19" 475/16"
CR -2072 61V." x19" 665/16"
CR -2075 70" x19" 75°/te"
CR -2073 77" x19" 82 5/16"
Width 22" 22" 22" 22" 22" 22" 22" 22" 22" 22"
Depth 17 1/e" Ina" 17 1/e" 17 1/e" 17 1/8" 22 1/e" 221 / 4 " 22 1/e" 22 1/8" 224"
Weight 78 lbs. 85 lbs. 111 lbs. 121 lbs. 130 lbs. 91 lbs. 101 tbs. 130 lbs. 142 lbs. 151 lbs.
PRESTIGE RELAY RACKS
Design Features: Units consist of framework, top, bottom, two ball- covered sides and ballcornered door. Standard 19" panels installed on any side of framework. Top, bottom, 16 gauge. Door and sides 18 gauge steel Take RC- 7756 casters. Shipped knocked down.
Bonus Features: Easy to assemble. Front and rear panel mounting rails are tapped 10-32 on E.I.A. universal spacing. Front rails only are fully adjustable. Flush mounted handle and cam lock.
Finish: Luster Gray ( I- G).
Will accommodate standard 19" panels
PRESTIGE RELAY RACKS
Catalog No. Panel Space Height Overall Weight
CR -2280
61 1 /4 "
669/18"
147 lbs.
CR -2281
661 /2 "
71 13/16" 153 lbs.
CR -2282
77"
82 5/16"
170 lbs.
Inside clearance
21 1/2"x21 ye"
Overall depth with door
Overall width without side panels
23Y, 8"
22"
Overall width with side panels
24 1/8 "
VE -16
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E. 355th St. Willoughby, OH 44094 (216) 946-3200
UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
SHIELD-A- RACK UPRIGHT CABINET RACKS
Designed to meet FCC emission control requirements. Provides optimum flexibility of component design. Shield-A-Rak offers contemporary styling and rugged construction.
Design Features · Decorative rigid vinyl trim with
woodgrain inserts. · Doors have locking handles for
greater security.
· Two pairs of 12 gauge adjustable mounting rails tapped 10-32 on EIA universal spacing.
· Frame - 16 gauge steel; doors 18 gauge. 19" panels, fit front and rear openings.
· Shipped completely assembled.
Bonus Features
· Most effective shielding method assures an average EMI/RFI shielding of 55 dB, up to a maximum of over 70 dB, through afrequency range from 30 to 1,000 MHz.
· Doors have wire mesh gasketing to provide best shielding. Gasket is attached with clips for easier repair or replacement.
· Heavy duty hinges and multipoint latching mechanisms on door allow uniform pressure on door gasketing for greater shielding effectiveness.
Finishes
Royal blue textured ( RB) and Gray textured ( GT)
RFI SHIELDED
A
CATALOG NO.
SAR-16301 SAR-16302 SAR-16303 SAR-16304 SAR-16305 SAR-16306
HEIGHT (A)
37' 5/16" 48 7/16" 58' 5/16" 76' 1/16" 76 7/16" 83 7/16"
WIDTH (B) 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24"
DEPTH (C) 22" 22" 22" 22" 22" 22"
PANEL SPACE
(D) 31 1/2"
42"
52 1 /2 "
61 1 /4 "
70"
77"
WEIGHT LBS. 156 184 209 228 244 257
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-17
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E. 355th St. Willoughby, OH 44094 (216) 946-3200
OPEN RELAY RACKS
Ideal for installations where easy access to components is a top priority. Each built for years of solid, trouble- free service, as well as obvious ease of service where frequent attention is desired ( i.e. telephone switching systems, etc.).
RR- 1263 SERIES
Design Features: Exceptionally strong structure made up of chassis- type base and supporting angles. Uprights, 7%4"; steel channels, 3" deep; top plate, 11 /2 "x3'/8". Rails tapped 10-32 on E.I.A. universal spacing. Base is 19 1 /4 "x22" and drilled for RC- 7756 casters. Shipped knocked down. Finish: Luster Gray ( LG) and Black Textured ( BT).
Catalog No
RR -1263 RR -1363
RR- 1264 RR- 1364 RR- 1366
Panel Space
31 1 /2 "x19" 36 3/4"x 19"
66 1/2" x 19" 71 3/4" x 19" 77" x 19"
Height
35 5/8"
40 3/8" 70 5/8" 75 7/8" 81 Ye"
Weight
36 lbs.
37 lbs. 46 lbs. 47 lbs. 49 lbs.
RR- 1265 TYPE
Design Features: Heavy-duty rack usually bolted to floor . Base, two 1 /4 "steel angles, 31 /2 "x41 /4 "x20 3/s", cross bars, Vs" x23/32" x 19/is" steel angles. ( Uprights, 3" x 19/32") Panel mounting holes drilled and tapped 12-24 Base is 20 3/s" x 12 3/ 4 ". Shipped knocked down.
Finish: Black Textured (BT).
Catalog No RR- 1265
Panel Space 66 1/2" x 19"
Height 724,"
Weight 64 lbs
RR- 1367 SERIES
Design Features: Extra- sturdy racks made of 14 gauge steel. Eight- inch deep welded " U" member and triangular bracket hold uprights to base ( 12 GA.). Panel mounting rails tapped 10-32 on E.I.A. universal spacing. Chassis type base, 207/e" x26", drilled for RC- 7756 casters. Racks may be bolted together in Add- A- Rack fashion. Shipped knocked down.
Finish: Luster Gray ( LG) and Black Textured ( BT)
Catalog No.
RR- 1367
RR- 1368
RR -1369
Panel Space 61 1/4" x 19"
70" x 19" 77" x 19"
Height 64 5/8" 73 3/8"
803/8"
Base Width
20 7/8"
20 7/8"
20 7/8"
Weight 74 lbs. 77 lbs.
81 lbs.
TABLE TOP RELAY RACK
Design Features: Chassis- type base holds heavy components for table mounting applications.
Supporting angles provide strength, rigidity. Panel
mounting rails tapped 10-32 on E.I.A. universal spacing. Standard 19" panel fits flush with front.
Base, 20 3/e" x 12". Shipped knocked down.
Finish: Luster Gray ( LG) and Black Textured ( BT).
Catalog No.
Panel Space
Height
Weight
RR- 1248 RR- 1249
21" 28"
24" 31"
14 1/4 lbs 16 3/4 lbs
VE -18
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
RACKS
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E. 355th St. Willoughby, OH 44094 (216) 946-3200
CABINETS
THE STYLIST HEAVY- LOAD- BEARING CABINETS
Decorative rigid vinyl trim with woodgrain insert frames the front of this cleanly designed cabinet. Square corners enhance the unit's contemporary styling and, in turn, enhance the appearance and marketability of your product.
Design Features: 16 gauge steel. Rear fitted with louvered panel; 13/4"- high opening for cable access. Front and rear openings accept 19" panels or Stylist doors. Self-adhesive feet furnished. Bonus Features: Full- width box flanges at top and bottom eliminate tilt and sway even when unit is loaded to its full 500- pound capacity. Cold- rolled steel structure is self supporting, no internal framework. Bustle- type door allows placement of panel behind door for meters, knobs, etc.
Finishes: Royal blue textured ( RB) or gray textured ( GT).
CABINET RACKS
DELUXE Design Features: All- welded 16 gauge steel construction. Front uprights are contoured. Ten sizes. All models have hinged top with sliding flush latch. Top cover clearance, 1021 /32" x 15 1 /2 ". 19" wide panel space. Mounting rails tapped 10-32 on E.I.A. universal spacing.
Finish: Luster Gray ( LG)
DELUXE CABINET RACKS
Catalog No.
CR -1726 CR -1741 CR -1740 CR -1742 CR -1739 CR -1743 * CR -1727 * CR -1744 * CR -1728 * CR -1745 *
Overall Height
8"/,." 103A." 12 5A." 14 1/ 2 s" 15 13/ 41 8" 19 5/ 41 ." 22 3A." 28Yi." 33Yie" 36 3/ 41 ."
Panel Space
13 3/.," 10 1/ 2 " 12y." 14" 17y," 21"
31 1/ 2 35"
Clear Inside Depth, 14 3A."
These sizes have rear doors
Wgt Lbs. 23 25 27 28 30 34 38 42
47 50
20-13 1111
PS v3;1_
THE STYLIST
Catalog No. S-1639
Overall Height
Panel Space
51/ 4 "
S-1640 S-1641 S-1642
S-1643 S-1644
8"/16" 101'4," 12 5/i."
14/,."
83/ 4 " 10 1/ 2 " 124"
14"
S-1645
17 3/,,,"
15 1/ 4 "
(Overall width, 20'/i."; overall depth, 15 1/ 4 "; clear inside depth, 143/i.")
Wgt. Lbs. 23 24
26 28 30 32
34
DOORS Catalog No.
Height
Fits Wgt. Lbs.
SD- 539
51/ 4 "
31/ 2
SD- 540
41/ 4
SD- 541
81/ 4 "
51/ 2
SD- 542
10 1/ 2 "
61/ 4
SD- 543
12 1/ 4 "
7
SD- 544
14"
71/ 4
SD- 545
15 1/ 4 "
81/ 2
Order door to match color of cabinet
Cabinet S-1639 S-1640 S-1641
S-1642 S-1643 S-1644 S-1645
HEAVY-DUTY
Design Features: Solidlybuilt, all- steel. Panel mounting rails are part of
sides for easier assembly.
Mounting rails tapped 10 -32 on E.I.A. universal spacing. Hinged rear door has flush catch. Take 19" panels. Racks may be joined, utilizing Bud's Add- A- Rack method. Shipped knocked down.
Finish: Luster Gray ( LG).
HEAVY-DUTY CABINET RACKS
Catalog No
CR -1736
CR -1737
CR -1738
Overall Height
24 1 /2 " 31 1 /2 "
4() 1/4 °
Clear inside depth, 16 ,/,.".
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Panel Space 19y," 26 1/ 4 " 35"
Wgt, Lbs. 49 57 69
VE -19
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E. 355th St. Willoughby, OH 44094 (216) 946-3200
ALUMINUM CHASSIS
From Bud, the widest selection of aluminum chassis in the industry: 63 sizes. Each is welded at stress points for assured, maximum strength and rigidity. Sides folded in at bottom for additional support. Bottom plate easily attached. Natural finish.
CBHoArSrSoImS PLATES
Fits all chassis sizes Used to protect wiring or components, or as dust covers on underside of chassis
HT LENGTH
CHASSIS
WIDTH
ALUMINUM CHASSIS Catalog No Width Length Height Gauge Weight
AC- 1401 AC- 1402 AC- 1403 AC- 1404 AC- 1405 AC- 430 AC- 431 AC- 1406 AC- 432 AC- 1407 AC- 402 AC- 429 AC- 1408 AC- 1409 AC- 403 AC- 401 AC- 421 AC- 404 AC- 422 AC- 1410 AC- 1411 AC- 1412 AC- 1413 AC- 1414 AC- 433 AC- 405 AC- 406 AC- 407 AC- 408 AC- 409 AC- 1415 AC- 411
2'/2" 41 / 2 " 1" . 040 Ye lb.
3'1/2 " 41/2" 1"
040 1/8 lb
31/2 " 4"
51 / 2 " 1"
5"
2"
040 040
1/8 lb 1/4 lb
4"
6"
1Y," 040 1/. lb
4"
6"
3"
040 1/ 21 lb
4"
6"
2"
040 1 / 4 lb
4"
8"
2"
040 1/4 lb
4"
17"
3" . 050 1 lb.
41/2 " 8"
11/2" . 040 1 / 4 lb.
5"
2"
040 1 / 2 lb
5"
3"
040 Y2 lb
5"
11/2" 040
1 / 2 lb
5"
91 / 2 " 11/2" 040
1 / 2 lb
5"
91 / 2 " 2"
040
V2 lb
5"
91 / 2 " 21/2" 040
1 / 2 lb
5"
91 / 2 " 3"
040 5/8 lb
5"
10"
3"
040 5/8 lb
5"
13"
3"
040 3 / 4 lb
5"
13 1/2" 21/ 2 " .040
3/. lb.
51/2 " 5'/2"
5'/2" 1" 9 6' . 1'/2
040
.040
1/5 lb y3 lb
6"
2"
040 y3 lb
6"
14"
3" . 050 11/8 lbs.
6"
17"
3" . 050 11 / 4 lbs.
7"
2"
040 1/2 lb
7"
2" . 040 1/2 lb
7"
11"
2"
040 5/8 lb
7"
12"
3" . 040 7/8 lb.
7"
13"
2" . 040 3/. lb.
7"
15"
2" . 050 1 lb.
7"
15"
3"
050 11/4 lbs
ALUMINUM PANEL CHASSIS
Fasten to mounting rail in racks. Can be used as a vertical chassis where depth is limited or where front service is required. Panel depth 5 9/32". Made of . 057 aluminum alloy. Natural finish.
Catalog No
AC - 141 6 AC- 1417 AC- 423 AC- 1418 AC- 1419 AC- 424 AC- 425 AC- 412 AC- 1420 AC- 1421 AC- 413 AC- 414 AC- 415 AC- 416 AC- 427 AC- 1422 AC- 1423 AC- 426 AC- 417 AC- 1424 AC- 1425 AC- 418 AC- 419 AC- 420 AC- 428 AC- 1426 AC- 1427 AC- 1428 AC- 1429 AC- 1430 AC- 1431
CHASSIS BOTTOM PLATES
Width Length Height Gauge Weight
Aluminum
Natural Finish
7" 17"
2" . 050 11/8 lbs.
Catalog No
Fits Chassis Width Length
7" 17"
21/2" 050 11/4 lbs
BPA-1501
21/ 2 " 41/ 2 "
7" 17" 8" 10"
3" 050 21/ 2 " 040
11/2 lbs 1 lb
BPA-1502 BPA-1503
31/ 2 " 31/ 2 "
4," 51/ 2 "
8" 12"
21/2" 050 11/8 lbs
BPA-1504 4"
5"
8" 12"
3"
050 11/ 4 lbs
BPA-1505 4"
6"
8" 17" 8" 17"
2"
050 11/ 2 lbs
3"
050 13/ 4 lbs
BPA-1506 4"
8"
BPA-1532
4"
17"
81/2" 15" 9" 15"
3" . 050 1Y2 lbs. 3" . 050 11/ 2 lbs.
BPA-1507 BPA-1589
41/2" 8"
5"
7"
10" 12"
3"
050 11/ 4 lbs
BPA-1508
5"
9"
10" 14"
3"
050 1'/3 lbs
BPA-1590 5"
91/2"
10" 17"
2"
050 11/2 lbs
BPA-1591
5"
10"
10" 17"
3"
050 13/ 4 lbs
BPA-1509
5"
13"
10" 17"
4"
057 21/ 2 lbs
BPA-1510
5"
13 1/ 2 "
10" 17"
5" 050 21/. lbs
BPA-1511
51/ 2 " 51/ 2 "
10" 23" 11" 17"
3"
057 23/ 4 lbs
2" 057 2 lbs
BPA-1512 BPA-1513
51/2" 6"
9'1/ 2 "
8-
11" 17"
3"
057 21/4 lbs
BPA-1514 6"
14"
12" 12"
3"
050 11/2 lbs
BPA-1515
6"
17"
12" 17" 12" 17"
2"
050 15/8 lbs
3" . 057 21/ 4 lbs
BPA-1592
7"
7"
BPA-1593
7"
9"
13" 17"
2"
057 25/8 lbs
BPA-1594
7"
11"
13" 17"
3"
057 23/ 4 lbs
BPA-1595. 7"
12"
13" 17" 13" 17"
4" . 057 31/ 4 lbs.
5"
057 31/2 lbs
BPA-1596 7"
13"
BPA-1516 7"
15"
14" 17"
3"
057 23/ 4 lbs
BPA-1517 7"
17"
15" 17"
4"
057 31/ 4 lbs
BPA-1518 8"
10"
15" 17"
6" . 057 41/8 lbs.
BPA-1519 8"
12"
17" 17"
3" . 057 3'/4 lbs
BPA-1520 8"
17"
17" 17"
4" . 057 31/8 lbs
BPA-1521
81/2" 15"
BPA-1522
9"
15"
BPA-1523 10"
12"
PANEL CHASSIS
BPA-1524 10 -
14"
Catalog No
Height
Weight
BPA-1597 10"
17"
CB- 1370
13/ 4 "
3/4 lb
BPA-1525 10"
23"
CB- 1371 CB- 1372
31/ 2 "
11/ 4 lbs 11/ 2 lbs.
BPA-1526 11"
17"
BPA-1527 12"
12"
CB- 1373 CB- 1374
81/ 4 "
2 lbs
2/4lbs.
BPA-1528 12"
17"
BPA-1598 13"
17"
CB- 1375
10 1/ 2 " 23/ 4 lbs.
BPA-1529 14"
17"
CB- 1376
12 1/4" 3 lbs
BPA-1530 15"
17"
CB- 1377
14"
31/4 lbs.
BPA-1531 17"
17"
Wgt in Ozs
1 1 2 2 2 2 4 3 2 3 2 4 4 4 2 3 3 5 6 3 4 4 5 8 8 8 4 6 8 8 8 8 8 10 14 12 10 12 14 15 16 17
VE -20
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E. 355th St. Willoughby, OH 44094 (216) 946-3200
ACCESSORIES
STANDARD PANELS For All Cabinets, Cabinet Racks, Relay Racks And Small Enclosures, Where Applicable.
"SURFACE SHIELD" PANELS
Mill finish aluminum alloy panels. White , pressure- sensitive paper on one side protects and provides surface for laying out drilling or punching position. Available in Ye" and 3/ 16" thickness; 19" width.
SFA-1831-1842 SFA-3161-3172
STEEL, STANDARD ALUMINUM AND HARD ALUMINUM PANELS
Available in 11 gauge steel; 1/8" and 3/16" aluminum alloy. Steel, standard and hard aluminum ( 2024-T3) panels come in 19" widths. Standard 1/8" aluminum panels also available in 24" width.
SURFACE SHIELD 19- INCH ALUMINUM PANELS (3003-H14)
1/8" PANELS Catalog No SFA-1831 SFA-1832 SFA-1833 SFA-1834 SFA-1835 SFA-1836 SFA-1837 SFA-1838
SFA-1839 SFA-1840 SFA-1841 SFA-1842
Height 134" 31/2" 51/4"
83/4" 10 1 /2 " 12 1/4" 14" 15 3 /4 " 17 1/2" 19 1/4" 21"
Weight 3/8 lb. 3/4 lb.
1Ye lbs. 13/4 lbs. 2 lbs. 272 lbs. 23/4 lbs. 31/4 lbs.
35/8 lbs. 4 lbs. 41/4 lbs. 5 lbs.
3/18" PANELS Catalog No SFA-3161 SFA-3162 SFA-3163 SFA-3164 SFA-3165 SFA-3166 SFA-3167 SFA-3168
SFA-3169 SFA-3170 SFA-3171 SFA-3172
Height 13/4" 31 /2 " 51 /4 " 7" 83/4" 10 1/2" 12 1/4" 14"
15 3 /4 " 171/2 19 1 /4 " 21"
Weight 1/4 lb. 11/4 lbs. 1Ye lbs. 21/2 lbs. 3 lbs. 33/4 lbs. 41/2 lbs. 5 lbs.
53/4 lbs. 61/4 lbs. 7 lbs. 71/4 lbs.
2024-T-3 ALUMINUM 19" PANELS Ye" THICK
ALUMINUM 24" PANELS 1 /2 "THICK ( 3003-H14)
Catalog No. PA -1131 PA -1132 PA -1133 PA -1134 PA -1135 PA -1136 PA -1137 PA -1138 PA -1139 PA -1140 PA -1141 PA -1142
Height 13 /4 " 31/2" 514 "
83 /4 " 10 1/2" 12 1/4" 14" 15 3 /4 " 17 1/2" 19 1/4" 21"
Weight Ye lb. 3/4 lb.
1 Ye lbs. 13/4 lbs. 2 lbs. 21/2 lbs. 2/4 lbs. 31/4 lbs. 3% lbs. 4 lbs. 41/4 lbs. 5 lbs.
Catalog No. PA -2401 PA -2402 PA -2403 PA -2404 PA -2405 PA -2406 PA -2407 PA -2408 PA -2409 PA -2410 PA -2411 PA -2412
Height
iya"
31/2 574"
83 /4 " 10 1/2" 12 1/4" 14" 15 3 /4 " 17 1/2" 19 1/4" 21"
Weight
1/2lb.
1 lb. 1 72 lbs. 21/4 lbs.
21/2 lbs. 3 lbs. 31/4 lbs. 31/2 lbs. 4 lbs. 43/4 lbs. 51/4 lbs. 51/2 lbs.
PA and PS SERIES
Finishes: White textured (LWuHs)te,raGnrday
11 GA. STEEL
Catalog No. PS- 1250
Height
ya"
PS- 1251
31/2"
ILGI.
PS - 1252
51/4"
PS- 1253
7"
PS- 1254
83/4"
PS- 1255
10 1/2"
PS- 1256
12 1/4"
PS- 1257
14"
PS- 1258
15 3/ 4 "
PS- 1259
17 1/2"
PS -1260 PS- 1261
19 1/4" 21"
Weight
11/4lbs.
21/4 lbs. 31/4 lbs. 41/2 lbs. 6 lbs. 7 lbs.
81/ 4 lbs. 91/2 lbs. 103/ 4 lbs. 11 Y4 lbs.
13 lbs. 14 1/4 lbs.
19- INCH PANELS
1/8 " ALUMINUM ( 3003-H14)
Catalog No.
Height
Weight
PA -1101
13 /4 "
3/8 lb.
PA -1102 PA -1103
31/2" 51 /4 "
3/4 lb. 1Y8 lbs.
PA -1104 PA -1105
7" 83 /4 "
13 /4 lbs. 2 lbs.
PA -1106
10 1/2
21 /2 lbs.
PA -1107 PA -1108
12 1/4" 14"
23 /4 lbs. 3 lbs.
PA -1109
15 3/4"
31 /4 lbs.
PA -1110 PA- 1111 PA -1112
17 1/2" 19 1/4" 21"
35/8 lbs. 41/4 lbs.
5 lbs.
3/16" ALUMINUM ( 3003-H14)
Catalog No. PA -3101 PA -3102 PA -3103 PA -3104 PA -3105 PA -3106
Height 13/4" 31 /2 " 5 1/4 " 7 81 /4 " 10 1/2"
Weight 3/4 lb
11/4 lbs 13/4 lbs
2'h lbs. 3 lbs. 33/4 lbs.
PA -3107 PA -3108
121/4" 14"
4i/2 lbs 5 lbs.
PA -3109
PA -3110 PA -3111
15 3 /4 "
171 /2 " 19 1/4"
53/4 lbs.
63/4 lbs. 7 lbs.
PA -3112
21"
71/4 lbs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -21
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E. 355th St. Willoughby, OH 44094 (216) 946-3200
ACCESSORIES For Series 2000, Series 60, Valurack, Concorde Series Upright Cabinet Racks.
ACCESSORIES
The following key will indicate the cabinet rack on which the accessories shown on these pages may be used: Valurack ( A), Classic II ( 8), Series 2000 ( C), Series 60 ( 0), Concorde ( E). Match the key letter under the accessory with the proper cabinet rack designation.
POWER OUTLET STRIPS
41.
a/
ma
Power outlet strips can be used in cabinets, on walls or along work or test benches. Silver gray housings; no loose wires can come into contact with conductor wires. Strips snap into adjustable mounting clips. Grounding
type 15 amp., 125 volt receptacles . 15 amp thermal- type circuit breaker with reset. Models 6and 66 have 14 gauge 3wire power cord, others have 12
gauge solid conductor. Both have 6 ft. cords. All components U.L. approved. A- B- C- D- E
Catalog No.
Number of
Outlets
Length
Weight
POS -4
4
17 1 / 2 -
2lbs.
POS -6
6
124" 134 lbs.
POS -66'
6
IVA" 134lbs
POS -7
7
48"
31 / 2 lbs.
POS -9
9
60"
4V. lbs
POS -11
11
72"
434 lbs
'Surge Surpressed
SURGE SUPPRESSOR
SERIES 2000 DESK TOPS 4,
ADJUSTABLE SLIDE DRAWER
Fit cabinets with 19" panel space. Adjustable slides. Support heavy loads even when fully extended. Silver anodized
handles. Panel Finishes White textured (WH) and Luster Gray ( LG)
H-9355 Handle only for drawer. A- B- C- D- E
Cat
Size
Panel
No
Inside
Height Wght.
D-1721 161/ 4 "x6Ye" x163/i6" 834" 23 lbs.
60-2368 16,/,8"x65/16"x19,/ie" 83,4" 24 lbs.
Supports 200 pounds. Easy to install: Just bolt pre- slotted, full-length support channels to cabinet rack's mounting rails.
Finishes: Gray textured ( GT) and Royal blue textured ( RB).
Catalog
Supporting Wgt
No
Fits Series 2000 Channel Lbs
DT- 2960 With 23'4" depth
\\> N DT- 2962 With 27,4' depth
21'4"
21
24 34"
21
SERIES 60 DESK TOPS
DESK TOP DRAWER
Front panel height, 31/2". Hinged drawer top has Formica® bonded to aluminum. Front panel latch locks and releases drawer and top. Mount to " U" braces in cabinet.
Panel Finishes: White textured ( WH) and Luster Gray ( LG).
A- B- C- D- E
Cat No
Size Inside
Wgt
60-2363
16 9 x3x14 '41"
23 lbs
Supports 200 pounds. Easy to install: Just bolt pre- slotted, full-length support channels to cabinet rack's mounting rails.
Finishes: Royal blue textured ( RB), gray textured ( GT).
Cat No
Fits 60 Series
Support Channel Wgt
60-2360 With 22" D
21'4" 21 lbs
60-2362 With 25'h" D
24 ,4" 21 lbs
VE -22
Provides protection to data or word processing equipment and other sensitive electrical equipment from sudden -spikes" or high energy voltage. Prevents equipment damage, lost or distorted data. Clamps transient impulses in 10 Nanoseconds. Maximum " spike" current
2000 amps. 15 amp thermal type, circuit breaker with reset. 14 gauge, 3 wire, 6 foot power cord, all components U.L. approved.
SLIDINGN, DESK TOP
Requires only 134" panel space and 163/ 4 " x 17 5/8"inside. Working area, 11" x 17%". Supports 50 lbs. Formica® surface. Mounts to uprights in Series 60 without brackets. Ball- bearing slide mechanism.
Panel Finishes: White textured ( WH) and Luster Gray ( LG). Top surface is antique white.
Cat No 60-2361
Surface Area Width Depth Panel 17 1/ 4 " 15 1/ 4 " 19" x13/,"
Wgt 11 lbs
SLIDING
DRAWER
ASSEMBLY
Aluminum open chassis Mounting brackets fit on vertical mounting rails Supports 50 lbs Slide mechanism attaches to chassis, moves on ball bearings, has 11 - travel Drawer cannot be removed accidentally Chassis size 16 3/ 4 "x 14" x3" with
flange top and bottom Separate
drawer plate fastens to top or bottom
Finish: Chassis and drawer plate finished in Luster Gray ( LG)
A- B- C- D- E
Cat No Description
Size
Wgt
SD 1717
Sliding Drawer Assembly
16i, In 14
6 lbs
TP 1718 Drawer Plate 16'. x14 1 lbs
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BUD INDUSTRIES, INC.
4605 E. 355th St. Willoughby, OH 44094 (216) 946-3200
PLEXIGLASS DOORS
Fits Series 60, Series 2000, and Concorde Racks. 1/8"smoke gray plexiglass.
Frame is 131 /32" x 11/e" anodized aluminum extrusion with longitudinal grooves for enhanced appearance. Door is magnetically held in closed position. Easily installed or removed through use of spring pin hinges. Inner surface of door is at least 11 /2 "from front of panel.
Door clears panel space when opened 90° or more. Installation hardware furnished.
Catalog Number
V- 9060-A V- 9061-A V- 9062-A V- 9063-A V- 9064-A V- 9065-A V- 9066-A V- 9067-A
Catalog Number
V- 9068-A V- 9069-A V- 9070-A
DOORS/ACCESSORIES
Upright Rack Vertical
Panel Space
21" 31 1/ 2 "
35" 42" 52 1/ 2 " 61'4" 70" 78 3/ 4 "
Weight Lbs.
11 16 17 19 20 23 24 31
Inclined Vertical Panel Space
29 3/ 4 "
12
24 1/ 2 "
13
22 3/ 4 "
12
SHELF ASSEMBLY
Fits Deluxe and Prestige Relay Racks. Useful as a desk or work space. Can't fall or tilt. Will support any reasonable weight. May be attached over panel or direct to panel or direct to panel mounting rails. Triangular mounting brackets slip into channel welded to shelf bottom. Overall height 71 /2 ". Hardware furnished.
Finishes: Gray texture ( GT) and Royal Blue textured ( RB).
Cat No SA- 1719 SA- 1720
Depth 16" 20"
Width 22" 22"
Wgt 13'4 lbs 15 ,4lbs
TURRETS
Any of the three faces may be attached to rails of Series 60 upright racks, or placed on any horizontal surface to obtain ideal viewing angle Takes standard 19" panels
Finishes: Royal blue textured ( RB) and Gray textured (GT)
Cat No 60-2364 60-2365 60-2366
Width Depth 22 1/ 2 ." 17'/." 22'A 6" 14 ,k" 22'A." 20' 3A6"
Sloping Bottom Panel Panel
Height Space Space
12M." 17 1/ 2 " 103/, 6" 124"
14" 10'/2"
14 3/8" 21"
17'h"
Rear Panel Space
83/." 7"
107,"
Wgt Lbs
17 14
20
SHELVES
Supports 200 lbs. One piece 16 gauge steel; flanged front and rear provide added support. Attach to front and back vertical panel mounting rails in cabinets.
Panel Finishes: White textured ) W'-l) and Luster Gray ( LG)
A- B- C- D- E Cat No 60-2380 60-2381
Width 17'/8" 17'4"
Depth 194" 22 3/.
Wgt 8 lbs 8 lbs
RACK SHELVES
Heavy gauge steel. 1" flange adds rigidity, accommodate heavy loads Designed to rest on supporting angles
Finish: Black
Catalog No CB- 1976 CB- 1977
Width 19" 19"
Depth 15" 12"
Wgt 6lbs 5lbs
TRIANGULAR MOUNTING BRACKETS
Heavy gauge steel, 3/4"flanges support chassis Sold in pairs
Finish: Black
Catalog No MB- 1266 MB- 1267 MB- 1268
Height
Depth 9"
Wgt 1/2 lbs 1 lbs 11/2 lbs
CHASSIS MOUNTING BRACKETS
Supports and/or permits chassis to be mounted flush against panel Steel construction MB- 450 and MB- 451 designed
for 4" high chassis Sold in pairs
Finish: Black
Catalog No MB- 458 MB- 448 MB- 459 MB- 449 MB- 460 MB- 450 MB- 451
Height 6'/7" 61/ 2 " 61/ 2 " 61/ 2 " 6'/7" 8'/2" 5'/2"
Depth 8"
10" 11" 12" 13" 10" 13"
Weight 11/ 4 lbs 13/. lbs 2 lbs 2 lbs 21/ 2 lbs 2'/. lbs 3 lbs
ANTI-TILT LEGS
Prevents tipping of cabinets when top section is over balanced. Made of 1" x
2" rectangular tubing. Finished in Gray
Textured ( GT) or Royal Blue Textured (RB). Specify color to match that of cabinet. Equipped with stem levelers. Easily fastened to base of cabinet. Legs project 12" from front of cabinet when
attached. Hardware furnished.
C- D- E
Fits Cabinet with Catalog No Outside Depth of
Wght Pr
ATL-6601 ATL-6602 ATL-6603
22" 251/ 2 " 3034"
6 lbs. 7 lbs. 81/ 2 lbs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -23
CALZONE CASE
225 Black Rock Ave. Bridgeport, CT 06605 (800) 243-5152
CO.
CASES
STANDARD FEATURES OF CASES
· A.T.A. Style
· Patented double angle construction · Unique metal to wood to metal riveting · Hi-density polyester foam
· Heavy grade formica laminate: 1/ 4 "in black, blue, white, red, green, gray, orange or yellow. 1/ 2 "in black, blue, gray (optional aluminum)
· Steel reinforced webbed lid stays ( where applicable) · 1/2 "Plywood casterboards on cases with wheels · Full length piano hinge ( where applicable)
· Rust Resistant sessions hardware featuring recessed, spring loaded catches and handles, stacking or ball corners, and heavy duty corner braces
· Custom extruded, deep grooved aluminum valance · 'A" or 'h" furniture grade plywood.. no knots · Combo cases for multiple units, accessories, etc. · Large variety of rubber or steel casters · Extra compartments and trays · 1/4 "Plyw000d laminate with double angle and valance · Extra handles
· Shock mounting · Security locks
Camera Cases
Construction workers wear goggles to protect their eyes...CALZONE CASE supplies protection for the delicate "eyes" of your video system...the camera.
CALZONE surpasses case industry standards. We construct our products using the same space age materials and technology that developed the units we protect. Advanced FORMICA covers our choice, furniture grade plywood, making atough laminate that far exceeds plastics or fibers. At CALZONE we innovate, not imitate.
Audio Cases
Tape recorders, audio mixers, turntables, whatever, CALZONE has acase aheady designed for most audio equipment. Custom cases are also available
at no extra charge. For aprofessional audio production, choose the case designed and built by professionals...CALZONE.
Projector Cases
From the simplest 8mm projector to the most complicated multi- slide set-up, CALZONE has acase designed to suit every need. We utilize every spare inch of space to give the user as many applications as possible. Projector cases have compartments for reels, cables, etc., and can be custom ordered to hold more than one unit.
Monitor Cases
AV. presentations are only as good as the monitor they are viewed on, and at CALZONE our aim is to get the unit there in operating condition. We construct our A.T.A. style cases by incorporating our patented double angle
aluminum. This metal to wood to metal principle insures a permanent, bonded case for years of trouble free transport. Our custom extruded aluminum valance insures an easy closing fit that keeps your monitor in shape and the elements outside. All this, including our precision cut foam, gets the job done.
VTR Cases
With mobile A.V. showcases being amajor sales tool for advertising companies and corporate presentations, a need has always existed for high quality travel cases for such delicate equipment. These cases must not only withstand abuse from airlines and truckers, but also be available to meet seemingly impossible deadlines. CALZONE CAN DELIVER.
Rackmount Cases
Most equipment used today that is made rack mountable is made that way for areason. Equipment made to fit into racks should not be piled onto one another or lined up on the tops of speakers or other equipment. Whether they be power amps, equalizers, cross-overs or effects, you need to protect the delicate equipment that makes up your sound.
Convoy Cases
Ideal protection for around- town and ground transport of small and mediumsized instruments. 1/ 4 "thick ABS plastic, 1/ 2 "charcoal poly-ether foam lined, heavy duty, spring- loaded handles.
Camera Cases
Projector Cases
Audio Cases
PRO- LINE II SERIES®
Styled after the Calzone A.T.A. approved Escort imise, PRO- LINE II offers durable and attractive road case protection, yet, is priced more within the budgets of today's musician and club performer. PRO- LINE ll is made of the same 1 /4 "luan mahogany plywood as our A.T.A. line and is laminated to an exterior covering of rigid, vinyl tollene. All PRO- LINE II cases are constructed with Calzones patented double-angle, spring- loaded handles, small, recessed Sessions catches and customdesigned steel corners. High density poly-ether foam lines the interior. PRO- LINE II cases are available for most instruments and equipment as well as selected rack mount sizes.
PRO- LINE II is aregistered trademark of the ca/:'ne Case Company.
YE-24
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CASES, INC.
1745 W. 134th St. Gardena, CA 90249 (213) 770-4444
CASES
ENDURA CARRYING CASES
Space- Age molded ' SMC Fiberglass comes available with adjustable
foam inserts, with foam inserts especially die cut to your specifications.
E-2000-1 4" Depth Foam Filled, 9lbs E-2000-2 6" Depth Foam Filled, 11 lbs E-2000-3 8" Depth Foam Filled, 12 lbs. E-2000-22 6" Depth Pre- Cut or Cubed Foam, 11 lbs. E-2000-33 8" Depth Pre- Cut or Cubed Foam, 12 lbs.
Foam Replacements Available
$114.50 119.50 129.50 139.50 149.50
PORTABLE RACK MOUNTABLE EQUIPMENT CASES
FEATURES: ·Attractive for studio use and rugged enough for field operations ·Scuff and scratch resistant ·All hardware is recessed on cases with two or more rack spaces · Front and rear lids are removable for complete access to your equip-
ment · Rack channel is drilled and tapped for 10/32 screw · Depth including the ( 2) 23 / 4 "removable lids is 22" I.D. or more by
special order ·Height available from 2to 44 spaces ( 3.5" to 77") · Depth is optional, can be ordered deeper or narrower · Rack channel on rear optional ·21/ 2 " or 3" casters optional · Logo or stenciling optional ·Available in blue - black - white - yellow ·Certified A.T.A. construction
VID -PRO TRAVEL CASES
CUSTOM DIE CUT FOAM INSERT
TRAVEL CASES AVAILABLE FOR ALL AUDIO, PHOTO AND VIDEO EQUIPMENT
Model ABS-500
FEATURES:
· Special ribbed design for maximum strength
·Molded from thick high- impact plastic
· Has two positive cam action locks
· Strong and attractive - padded carrying handle
· Full length continuous piano hinge
·Strong, precisely radiused valance ( aluminum trim between the lid
and body) ·Standard color - Black - Custom colors available for volume use
·Usable foam to foam ( cavity) dimensions 19L x 15 1/4W x6W ( in)
·Commercial high density shock absorbing foam lines the case
·Case size I.D. - ( wall to wall) 23L x28 3/4 W x8H ( in) · Custom interiors available, contact factory with your spec
requirements
ABS-500
$ 99.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -25
EXCALIBUR
FOR DELICATE EQUIPMENT
The skilled craftsmen at Excalibur are familiar with late model Arri and other fine cameras. They are experienced at fitting camera cases with lining designed for maximum shock isolation and years of service.
Write or call Excalibur for more information.
FOR "ALL KINDS OF STUFF"
The AKS Case -- the professional way to organize and pack all kinds of s -- -- -- that
· you always need at your fingertips
· won't fit easily into other cases...
THE AKS CASE. YOU WON'T KNOW
HOW YOU SURVIVED
WITHOUT IT.
FOR RACKMOUNT
AND SHOCKMOUNT
Excalibur's Rack -- The professional way to transport all your 19" rackmounted gear for easy access and operation. Rack cases are configured for 19" panels with rackmount ears and 18" rackable depth ( without lids). These top- of-the- line cases are available in either
fiberglass or ABS.
Colors: choose blue, grey, black, white, red, green, orange or yellow.
EASY TO ORDER STANDARD SIZES FOR YOUR EQUIPMENT ALL MODELS FOR EVERY APPLICATION FAST DELIVERY PERSONAL SERVICE TOUGH, PROFESSIONAL
CALL FOR CURRENT PRICELISTS. GREAT IDEAS... EXCALIBUR CASES.
1EXCALIBUR
i _ __._.L1, J)-, )) LIL- i
12427 Foothill Blvd., Lake View Terrace, CA 91342 818/899-2547
nberbilt 601 W. 26th St. New York, NY 10001 (212) 675-5820
CASES
411111111111111
A/V & Video Cases
Fiberbilt has designed and engineered awide range of A Vand Video, shipping and carrying cases specifically for hundreds of commonly used pieces of equipment.
Padded Adjustable Cases
Quick, easy, do-it-yourself partitioning methods to fit your particular needs for carrying or shipping cases.
Padded Partitions
A patented system of thickly padded partitions interlock with each other and with the padded sidewalls of the case by means of the tongue- and- groove principle. Slots spaced 1" apart in the padding of the partitions and sidewalls provide for any compartment arrangement to cushion your equipment perfectly with shock absorbing foam padding. The partitions can be rearranged or added to at any tine and the case is fully insulated against heat, cold and dust.
Diced Foam
Diced foam full depth padding " picks out" to provide any shape or size cavity for the ultimate in equipment protection.
An ingenious and very practical new Adapt- A- Case concept lets you "pick out" the contour areas you need from the one- inch : hick layers of grid pattern, partially- cut- through foam. The Adapt- A- Case way to provide snug- fit protection for the most delicate equipment
Protective Carrying Cases
Your product, no matter how delicate, is protected by these strong, attractive, and lightweight carrying cases.
Our stock styles can be obtained with either specially die- cut foam inserts and partitions, or with our patented adjustable partitions.
Special cases in any style or size can be manufactured and customized to your specific needs . . . economically, ever in small quantities.
Protective Shipping Cases
Your product is protected when shipped by lard, sea, or air in one of Fiberbilt's many distinctive and protective shipping cases... rugged, durable, lightweight.
Pick your exterior: Aluminum, Polyolex, or Fiberglass bonded to plywood -- : ogive alightweight, yet tremendously rigid and durable shell. Or, for lower weight and cost, choose a high density polyethylene case. No matter which you select, you've got a rugged exterior designed for heavy cameras, TV monitors and other delicate equipment that you want to travel safely.
Inside choose special padding, contoured foam, partitions or trays, designed by our engineers to cushion your equipment to take the roughest knocks.
Sales Aid Cases
Fiberbilt's design and manufacturing expertise can help you achieve the perfect case to display and protect your product so that it remains in tip top condition.
Our stock cases are designed to display specific products to maximum advantage. Our individually designed cases can do the same job for your product no matter what it is.
Just send us your samples, and we will submit a sketch or layout without charge. Cost estimates also submitted on any quantity -- whether asingle case or thousands. Whatever the product, we have the experience to custom design acase to your exact specifications.
Rack and Shock Mount Cases
Shipping trunks for rack mount electronics, with 2" deep removable covers front and back. A 2" thick layer of shock- absorbing foam between the inner shell and the outer shipping c:ase protects valuable electronic rack units.
Computer Hardware Cases
Fiberbilt manufactures a complete line of cases for shipping and carrying computer equipment. Call for details on a case for your particular piece of equipment.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -27
HOME, INC.
500 W. 9th St. P.O. Box 225
Hermann, MO 65041 (314) 486-31 11
19" Modular Racks
19" FLOOR RACKS
DR SERIES
DR- HD SERIES
* Sturdy welded construction * Extra- sturdy 11 Ga. CRS welded
of 16 Ga. CRS
construction
OPTIONAL SIDE PANELS-- Removable for Multiple Bolt-Together assemblies PANEL MOUNTING-- Adjustable 11 Ga. angles tapped for 10-32 screws on standard
E.I.A. spacing CABLE OPENING-- Provided in bottom panel (5" x 16") REAR DOOR-- Included with lock and handle COLOR-- Your choice of 20 standard baked enamel colors
MODEL NO.
DR- 3675-19-18 DR- 3675-19-22 DR- 4200-19-18 DR- 4200-19-22 DR- 6125-19-18 DR- 6125-19-22 DR- 7000-19-18 DR- 7000-19-22 DR- 7700-19-18 DR- 7700-19-22 DR- HD- 3675-19 DR- HD- 4200-19 DR- HD- 6125-19 DR- HD- 7000-19 DR- HD- 7700-19
PRICE $ 409.60
460.80 422.40 473.60 499.20 601.60 537.60 640.00 563.20 691.20 896.00 921.60 972.80 998.40 1036.80
HEIGHT 42-7/8"
48-1/8"
67-3/8"
76-1/8"
83-1/8" 41-3/8" 46-5/8" 65-7/8" 74-5/8" 81-5/8"
DIMENSIONS
PANEL SPACE
WIDTH
36-7/8"
42-1/8"
61-3/8"
70-1/8"
77-1/8" 36-7/8" 42-1/8" 61-3/8" 70-1/8" 77-1/8"
22-1/8" 23-5/8"
DEPTH 18-1/8"
22" 18-1/8"
22" 18-1/8"
22" 18-1/8"
22" 18-1/8"
22"
24"
STR ASSEMBLED
or K.D. STR-3675 STR -4200 STR - 6125 STR-7000 STR-7700
VE-28
19" Transmitter Racks
STR SERIES
* K.D. or Assembled only
WTE SERIES
* Welded construction only
MATERIAL- 16 Ga. CRS with 11 Ga. bottom panel on STR series and 14 Ga. bottom on WTE series
PANEL MOUNTING ANGLES--ADJUSTABLE STR-16 Ga. punched with 9/32 "holes WTE-11 Ga. drilled and tapped for 1%2"
LOUVERS-- Inside for WTE series Outside for STR series
DOORS-- Front and rear included with locks.
COLOR-- Your choice of 20 standard baked enamel colors
Assembly Charge is $25.00 Per Unit
MODEL NO.
PRICE
$499.20 537.60 627.20 678.40 716.80
WTE WELDED
WTE-3675
WTE-4200 WTE-6125 WTE-7000 WTE-7700
PRICE
$537.60 576.00 678.40 716.80 755.20
HEIGHT
42" 47-1/4" 66-1/2" 75-1/4" 82-1/4"
DIMENSIONS
PANEL SPACE
36-7/8" 42-1/8" 61-3/8" 70-1/8" 77-1/8"
WIDTH STR
22-15/16"
WTE 22-1/8"
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
DEPTH 18-1/2"
HOME, INC.
500 W. 9th St. P.O. Box 225
Hermann, MO 65041 (314) 486-3111
19" FLOOR RACKS
19" Cabinet Relay Racks ( Economy Series)
SCR SERIES
WRE SERIES
* K.D. or Assembled * Welded only
MATERIAL- 16 Ga. CRS
PANEL MOUNTING ANGLES-- FIXED SCR- 16 Ga. punched with 9/32 "holes WRE-11 Ga. drilled and tapped for 1%2"
LOUVERS--WRE series have inside louvers SCR series have outside louvers
REAR DOOR-- Included with lock COLOR-- Your choice of 20 standard baked enamel colors
Assembly Charge is $25.00 Per Unit
SCR ASSEMBLED or K.D. SCR- 3675 SCR- 4200 SCR- 6125 SCR- 7000 SCR- 7700
MODEL NO
PRICE $ 307.20
320.00 371.20 422.40 448.00
WRE WELDED WRE - 3675 WRE-4200
WRE-6125 WRE-7000
WRE-7700
PRICE $332.80
345.60 396.80 448.00 460.80
DIMENSIONS
HEIGHT 41-1/8"
46-3/8" 65-5/8" 74-3/8" 81-3/8"
I PANEL SPACE
36-7/8" 42-1/8" 61-3/8" 70-1/8" 77-1/8"
WIDTH 22-3/8"
19" Channel Racks
RR SERIES
* K.D. or Assembled
DEPTH 181 2
MATERIAL- 16 Ga. CRS base with 11 Ga. bottom CRS channels
PANEL MOUNTING- 11 Ga. channels tapped for 10-32 screws on standard E.I.A. spacings
COLOR-- Your choice of 20 standard baked enamel colors
MODEL NO.
RR ASSEMBLED
or K.D.
RR- 156 RR- 163 RR- 170 RR- 177 RR- 184
PRICE
$204.80 217.60 230.40 243.20 256.00
HEIGHT
61-3/16" 68-3/16" 75-3/16" 82-3/16" 89-3/16"
DIMENSIONS
PANEL SPACE
56-1/8" 63-1/8" 70-1/8" 77-1/8" 84-1/8"
WIDTH 19-5/16"
DEPTH 20"
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -29
HOME, INC.
500 W. 9th St. P.O. Box 225 Hermann, MO 65041 (314) 486-3111
WALL CABINETS
193
19" Swingout Wall Cabinets 193 Series and EC Series
MATERIAL- 16 Ga CRS
PANEL MOUNTING-- Angles tapped for 10-32 screws on 193 series and punched for 9/32" holes on EC series-- standard E.I.A. spacing
FRONT DOOR-- Included with lock. Models also available without front doors.
KNOCKOUTS-- Eight ( 8) 7/8"dia. knockouts in top and bottom of back section of 193 series and (3) 7/8"dia, knockouts on EC series
BRACING- 11 Ga reinforcing angles available when components exceed 250 lbs. (optional)
OPTIONAL SERIES- 193E tsix sizes) features slip loin) hinges
Model No. 193.A 193.B
193.0
193.0 EC 1750 EC- 2100 EC- 2625
Price $256.00 409.60 601.60
716.80 281.60 307.20 332.80
Height 18 ., 31 . 45
4 . 19 .
22' ,, 27 .
Dimensions Panel Space
15 28'.,, 42'., 61' .
21 ,, 26',
Width 20',.
Depth of Sections
Center
Rear
Front
1', 11
2
19" Pull- Out Cabinet Series HTB
MATERIAL- 16 Ga. CRS cabinet with 11 Ga. CRS door frame PANEL MOUNTING-- Angles tapped for 10-32 screws on standard E.I.A. spacing RACK-- Completely removable and mounted on (4) nylon ball bearing slides KNOCKOUTS-- Four (4) 7,," dia. knockouts in top and bottom FRONT DOOR-- Standard with locking handle and 3" frame COLOR-- your choice of 20 standard baked enamel colors
Model No.
HTB·2800 HTB 4200
Price $527.36
616.96
Height 31', ' 45,
Dimensions
Panel Space
Box Width
30"'
44" ,,
21
Box Depth 18 ,
VE -30
DW-3116
19" Fold- Out Cabinet Series STB
MATERIAL- 16 Ga. CRS cabinet with 11 Ga. CRS door and frame PANEL MOUNTING-- Adjustable angles punched with 9/32 "holes on standard E.I.A.
spacing. Supported in slotted brackets, adjustable sy," front to
rear DOOR-- Standard 10j," x20" with flush lock VENTILATION-- Side louvers and grill above door CABINET MOUNTS-- Surface type with adjustable angles COLOR-- your choice of 20 standard baked enamel colors
Model No
ST B 1200
srB 1500
SIB 1800
Price $202.24
207.36 220.16
Height 16
Dimensions Width
23'
Depth 12 15" 18"
Vertical Panel Space
19" Deluxe Wall Cabinet Series DW
MATERIAL- 16 Ga. CRS FLANGES-- Front flanges punched with t" holes on standard E.I.A. spacing SHELF-- Senior Model ( 01N-3116) has welded center shelf FRONT DOOR-- Features locking handle and tamper- proof inside hinges MOUNTING-- Back panel has two wall hanging channels KNOCKOUTS-- Four (4) 74" knockouts provided along bottom of back panel COLOR-- your choice of 20 standard baked enamel colors
DW-1616
Model No.
DW-3116
C0.1616
Price
$261.12
179.20
Depth 16 16
Height 31' 16
Dimensions Panel Space
29" 14
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Width 21" 21'
Shelf Yes No
HOME, INC.
500 W. 9th St. P.O. Box 225 Hermann, MO 65041 (314) 486-3111
19" Desk Cabinet Series DCE
MATERIAL- 16 Ga. CRS PANEL MOUNTING-- DC-- Punched with 9/32" holes
DCE--Drilled and tapped for 1%2!' REAR DOOR-- Standard on DCE series COLOR-- your choice of 20 standard baked enamel Colors
Model Rear Door DCE 700 DCE.875 DCE-1050 DCE-1225 DCE·1400 DCE-1750 DCE.2100 DCE-2450 DCE.2625 DCE-3150 DCE.3500
Price
$128.00 138.24 145.92 158.72 166.40 184.32 192.00 209.92 217.60 243.20 261.12
Height 9', 10',, 12, 14', 16, 19',
23',, 26', 28'. 33',, 37',
Dimensions Panel Space
7',
Width
10*,,
12..
14 ,
17',,
)
21.
24',
26 . 31',
35 .
Depth
19" Turrets Series ERBT
MATERIAL- 18 Ga. CRS SLOPE- 10° internal REAR PANELS-- Removable for easy access to components KNOCKOUTS-- Four (4) 7." knockouts provided in rear of each panel space PANEL MOUNTING-- Flanges recessed 134" at top and punched with ",,," diameter
holes on standard E.I.A. spacing COLOR-- your choice of 20 standard baked enamel colors
Style Single Double Triple
Model No. No.
ERBT-200 ERBT·200 1 ERBT-200.2 ERBT-20i ERBT-201 1 ER87 -201 2 ERBT-202 ERBT·202 1 ER87.202 2
Price $220.16
238.08 217.60 353.28 381.44 348.16 496.64 506.88 494.08
Height Front 15', 17',
15'. 1 1 1', , 17, 13'
Height Back 12 - , 14'., 11 12 . . 14', 1
14', 11
Dimensions Depth
Panel Space
12', 14 . 10', 12'.
10', 12%" 14'4," 10', '
19" Table-Top Rack Series TR
MATERIAL- 16 Ga. CRS, completely welded construction PANEL MOUNTING-- Flanges punched for 10-32 screws on standard E.I.A. spacing COLOR-- your choice of 20 standard baked enamel colors
Width 39"
Model No. TA 121 TA 128
Price $115.20
128.00
Height 24 31"
Dimensions
Panel Space
Width
21',
213' .,'
22
Depth 12 -
DESK CABINETS
DCE
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -31
HOME, INC.
500 W. 9th St. P.O. Box 225 Hermann, MO 65041 (314) 486-3111
PEDESTALS/CONSOLES
TRIPLE PEDESTAL DOUBLE PEDESTAL SINGLE PEDESTAL
Model ERB-202
Model ERB-201
Model ERB-200
$1175.05 $880.64 $611.84
MATERIAL- 18 Ga. CRS of welded construction
PANEL MOUNTING-- Flanges recessed 9/1," and punched with 9/,," holes on standard E.I.A. spacing
BACK PANEL-- Removable with two rows of 6" louvers
KNOCKOUTS-- Five (5) 7/8"knockouts provided in each pedestal
KNEE PANEL-- Provided between each pedestal LEVELERS-- Four leg levelers provided
TOP SURFACE-- Available in four standard, attractive finishes with stainless steel edge trim
LOUVERS-- Two rows of 6" louvers in back and bottom panels
COLOR-- Your choice of 20 standard baked enamel colors
Model No. ERB-202 ERB-201 ERB-200
Height 29%"
Dimensions
Writing Width
Surface Depth
70"
53"
30"
26"
Standard Features:
·Panel Mounting Hardware is supplied with all units. ·All units will be painted Grey Hammertone unless specified. ·Units marked K.D. will be shipped Knockdown unless specified. ·Pie, Wedges and Riser sections available upon request. ·Special paint colors and two- tones are available as optional extra. ·All writing surfaces will be finished in walnut unless specified.
19" Modular Cabinet Consoles
MATERIAL- 14 Ga. CRS frame and base with 11 Ga. CRS mounting angles and 16 Ga. CRS rear door and front panel
PANEL MOUNTING-- Angles tapped for 10-32 screws on standard E.I.A. spacing SLOPE-- Upper panel space on 30° slope
CASTERS- 21/2"diameter with load capacity of 200 lbs. each REAR DOOR-- Provided with center support channel, four groups of six 6" louvers,
spring hinge and two point chrome flush lock TOP PANEL-- Made of perforated metal
WRITING SURFACE-- Included; available in four standard finishes
COLOR-- Your choice of 20 standard baked enamel colors
Price
$916.99
Model No.
CR -1004
Depth 30"
Dimensions Height 50%"
Width 22%"
DSP92 $ 165.10/pr. Detachable side panels ( optional).
Writing Surface
Size
Height
15" x24"
30"
Panel Space 21%"
VE -32
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
KANGAROO VIDEO PRODUCTS, INC.
10845 Wheatlands Ave. " C" Santee, CA 92071-2856 (619) 562-9696
CARRYING CASES
KVP-1A and KVP-1B
Specially designed for the Sony BVV-1 ( with the VA - 1or VA- IV adapters), the KVP-1's are constructed of durable DuPont Cordura nylon, longlasting Evazote closed- cell foam, nickel- plated steel hardware, dependable Velcro closures, and sturdy YKK zippers, the KVP-1A and KVP-1B allow for easy portability of the recorder and its accessories.
The KVP-1's feature hooded openings for easy access to cable ports, convenient openings for attaching external batteries and wireless microphones, and a large pocket for extra batteries and tapes. Also standard are built-in white balance panels, convenient hand and shoulder straps, and afront pocket.
However you decide to use your Betacam, the KVP-1's give you the versatility you need.
Kangaroo Super-ToughT
The Kangaroo Super-Tough is the first camera case that lets you specify the size, to insure asnug fit for maximum protection for your camera or cam-corder.
The top- loading Super-Tough features our exclusive Tri -Fast zipper that lets you open the case three-ways: to either side or all at once. The triple- hemmed, U-shaped aluminum frame, combined with our shockabsorbing Evazote closed-cell foam padding, provides the ultimate in protection without the bulk of a hard case. Zippered inner pockets on both sides hold extra batteries, tripod plate, tapes, headset -- all the accessories right at your fingertips. Convenient stand-up hand straps let you grab the case with one hand, while the padded shoulder strap provides comfort over distances.
The Super-Tough can be ordered to any length, height, and width, to provide custom-sized protection at anoncustom price
KVP-20
The KVP-20, specially designed for the Sony BVW-20, provides the same efficient organization and convenience that goes into all of our Kangaroo Packs. Constructed of the same durable materials that go into all our products, the KVP-20 features a hooded opening for easy access to cable ports, built-in white balance panel, and aconvenient BP-90 battery pocket. Also standard are an ample front pocket and convenient side pocket for carrying tapes.
The KVP-20 is the ideal addition to complete any Betacam system.
Kangaroo Raincover
The first functional raincover designed to completely enclose the camera ( Sony BVW-3, BVP-3) from harsh weather, while enabling the user to change tapes, batteries, etc. without having to remove the cover. The unique zipper system allows opening and closing around any point, while the clear vinyl panel allows all meters and lights to be easily visible. The camera can also be mounted on atripod, and is designed with a built in pouch to accommodate the Anton/Bauer battery. There's even a flap on top allowing the unidirectional microphone to be exposed and protected.
Rain, dust or whatever your environment, you can be sure the Kangaroo Raincover will meet the challenge. ( Other models available 1st quarter, 1985)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-33
KANGAROO VIDEO PRODUCTS, INC.
10845 VVheatlands Ave " C'' Santee, CA 92071-2856 (619) 562-9696
Kangaroo Semi-Tough"
The original side- loading camera case, the Kangaroo SemiTough is ideal for airline travel, or those limited space situations where having your camera with you is amust. The Semi-Tough features a rigid frame of tough aircraft aluminum completely surrounding the camera, while aconvenient detachable pocket holds batteries, tapes, and cables. The Semi-Tough comes complete with hand strap and heavy-duty padded shoulder strap for over-the- shoulder carrying.
The Semi-Tough will fit the Ikegami HL-79 series, Sony BVP 300 series, Hitachi FP-10w/battery, FP-21, FP-22, SK-81, SK-91 and similarly sized color video cameras, complete with the most common 2X extender lens systems.
Kangaroo Video Pack
The Kangaroo Video Pack provides efficient organization and convenient
access for all the gear you need to carry. Designed by a news photographer to meet the rugged demands of ENG field use, the original Kangaroo Video Pack was the first recorder bag to provide straps and pockets to hold tapes, batteries, cables, microphones -- everything you need to get the job done. Even white- balancing is easy with the builtin white- balance panels. Compact enough for one-man operation, versatile enough for two- man crews, with the Kangaroo Video Pack you can pick up and go, knowing that you have everything you need for asimple interview or an all-day SWAT operation.
Kangaroo Nagra Pack
The Kangaroo Nagra Pack, designed for Nagra recorders with 5" or 7" tops, provides the same basic convenience and protection that has gone into all of our video packs. The Nagra Pack features detachable pockets to hold tapes, batteries, wireless microphone, cables, while the front pocket holds four 7- inch tapes or eight 5- inch tapes. A convenient back flap provides quick access to batteries, while the clear rain flap allows use of controls while still providing protection from inclement weather. There's even afront sleeve to hold aclapboard.
The Kangaroo Nagra Pack gives Nagra users the secure, lightweight convenience needed for field recording.
CARRYING CASES
Kangaroo Gripper Strap
The Kangaroo Gripper Strap is aheavyduty shoulder strap that won't slide off nylon parkas, ski jackets, or other slippery material. Padded with our durable Evazote closed-cell foam, the Gripper Strap's unique three-way action gives you important shock-absorbing capability to carry even the heaviest equipment more safely and comfortably than ordinary shoulder straps. The Gripper Strap comes with two sliders for easy attachment and adjustable length It's available in brown, blue, green, orange, and gray. It fits all Kangaroo Video Products carrying cases, and many other bags and cases.
KANGAROO VIDEO PACKS FOR VIDEO TAPE RECORDERS
Model
Fits
Price
KVP 1A
Sony BVV-1 W/VA-1
$ 210.00
KVP 1B
Sony BVV-1 W/VA-1V
210.00
KVP 20
Sony BVW-20
189.00
KVP 50
Sony BVU-50
210.00
KVP 100
Sony BVU-100, VO-3800
210.00
KVP 110
Sony BVU-110
210.00
KVP 220
Panasonic AV-220210.00
KVP 4800
Sony VO-4800
152.00
KVP 4400
JVC CR -4400, Panasonic NV-9400, Hitachi SV-340
210.00
KVP 4400-LU JVC CR-4403LU, RCA HE- 1020, Ampex VPR-4400
210.00
KVP 4700
JVC CR -4700U, JVC-4800, JVC-4900, Panasonic NV-9450 152.00
KVP 6200
JVC BR-6203
120.00
KVP 6800
Sony VO -6800159.00
KANGAROO CASES AND ACCESSORIES
Model
Fits
Price
Kangaroo Super- Tough
Custom-sized aluminum reinforced padded
Camera Case
case for carrying video cameras $250.00
Kangaroo Semi- Tough
Aluminurr reinforced padded case for
Camera Case
video cameras
225.00
Kangaroo Raincover
Sony BVW-3, BVP-300 Series, lkegami
HL 79A, D, E, Sony DXC-M3A
100.00
Kangaroo Nagra Pack
Nagra recorders
210.00
Kangaroo Gripper Strap
Padded, heavy-duty shoulder strap
25.00
Kangaroo Mixer Pockets Shure F.'31
35.00
BVG-100 Time Code Pocket Specify pack
36.00
·Available in Blue, Brown Burgundy, ,r;reen and Orange
VE -34
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Not:ce.
»PORTA -BRACE TM K and H Products, Ltd.
race
P.O. Box 246 Bennington, VT 05257
(802) 442-9118
PORTA-BRACETm CARTS AND CARRIERS FOR ALL YOUR PORTABLE EQUIPMENT
CARTS/CASES
PORTA-BRACErm BACKFRAME-WHEELBASE SYSTEM
This highly versatile system allows equipment to be carried in either of two comfortable and con-
venient ways-- on the back, or on wheels. The backframe is the original Porta-BraceTm Backpack
Carrier, which distributes the weight of recorder and accessories comfortably between shoulders
and hips. The recorder is protected in a fitted Porta-BraceTm case that mounts quickly and securely on the frame. The loaded backframe can then be snapped onto the wheelbase, creating a
compact, easily maneuvered cart. The backframe can also be equipped with a
Porta-BraceTM camera arm, which supports camera at eye level where it can be swung into shoot-
ng position-- or out of the way, freeing hands and face.
1- Frame
' 154.00
Wheelbase
' 76.00
See other page for specific recorder case
CA- LPouch fits under recorder on frame '39.00
Camera Arm available, inquire on correct
size and style for your camera '52.00
CAMERA CASE FOR
SINGLE-TUBE CAMERAS
Each case contains a thick layer of
polyester foam, die cut to fit your camera
PORTA-BRACEne GRIP
model-- fully assembled, with lens, viewfinder, handle, etc., all in place and ready to
The Grip is aversatile, heavy-duty cart for studio or field use. It is compact enough to be loaded into astation wagon or van, yet it will hold an extraordinary amount of equipment in avariety of arrangements. Adjustable shelves can be positioned to accommodate awide range of video systems. Equipment can be secured with a unique strapping system.
Sturdy 16" spoked wheels are mounted on an adjustable axle that can be positioned to balance the loaded cart. An extra set of handles is provided in front, to allow two-person lifting. The Grip comes complete with padded shelves, strapping system, and shock cords. The width of the Grip, between the vertical bars, has been increased to 19 1/2 "to provide more carrying space to accommodate standard modular stack-mounted com-
ponents. Accessories below increase its versatility. Overall size is approximately 27"W x28"L x40"H. Weight
is 60 lbs.
use. Velcroed straps hold the camera securely couched in this foam cavity. The bottom of the case is protected by hardboard, topped by a layer of rigid foam. The light, tough outer shell is made of two layers of cordura nylon, around a layer of pcdyethylene foam padding. The case opens, quickly and fully, with a single heavy-duty zipper around three sides.
Quick-Draw Specials: Model C Cameras Carried
Price
GRIP ACCESSORIES Large Utility Case will hold any number of items-- tapes, mikes, clamps, cables. etc. Main compartment is 51 / 4 "x 11"x 13". Two side pockets are 3"x 41/2 "x 12. Front pockets is 2"x 91 /2 "x 11 1 /2 ". The case attaches between handles or between wheels.
Utility Case is atwo-compartment, nylon zippered case designed to hang in the space between wheels or between handles.
Tripod Quiver holds a tripod snugly, with or without camera attached. The tripod can be quickly removed or left in place for shooting. Two sizes-- for large or small tripods.
lJght stand telescopes. can be raised to 8ft.: 1 / 2 "top stud.
Grip & Accessories
Mod.
No.
Description
List
G1 / PN; GI
S502-529.00
G2/PN; G2 Extra Capacity/Pneumatic
Wheels
523-555.00
GL
Light Stand
63.00
G-QL G- QS G-LCA
Quiver/Large Tripod Quiver/Small Tripod Large Utility Case
59.00 59.00 100.00
CC-8VKC Hitachi VKC-80018501870 CC- 100 JVC S-100tES-62U CC-71 JVC G-71 CC-S9U JVC GX-S9U CC-800 Panasonic PK-750/800/900 CC-801 Panasonic PK-751/755/801/805 CC-802 Panasonic PK-802/956/756 CC-3100 Panasonic WV-3100 CC-3160 Panasonic WV-311013150/3160 CC-3230 Panasonic WV-3230 CC-004 Panasonic WV-3200 CC-3400 Panasonic WV-3400 CC-004 RCA CC-0041006/6X16AFI12X CC-007 RCA CC-007/010/011 CC 015 RCA CC-015
.119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00 119.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice
VE-35
race
PORTA-BRACETM
K and H Products, Ltd. P.O. Box 246
Bennington, VT 05257 (802) 442-9118
RECORDER CASES
Porta-Bracelw cases are made for most portable video recorders. All are designed to provide custom- fitted protection in the field while allowing immediate access to controls, connections, and batteries through weather- protected openings.
The cases are constructed of two layers of sturdy urethanecoated Cordura nylon sandwiched around a polyethylene foam core. Zipper closes case around recorder. Access openings are protected by velcroed flaps; cable connections are protected by velcroed rain boot. All cases have sewn- on accessory front pockets and velcroed cable-organizer straps. A white balance is sewn into cover, also a separate white balance card is provided for use away from recorder. All are equipped for attachment of optional accessory pouches as well.
CASES TO MEET EVERY PROFESSIONAL
PORTABLE VIDEO NEED
HB-20 Shoulder Strap
VB-10 Video Belt
CAMERA CASES FOR 3-TUBE CAMERAS,,."
CA- L
Accessory Pouch
Recorder Cases Available for the Following:
Sony
JVC
Panasonic
BVU-50 BVU-100 BVU-110
CR -4400U
CR-4400LU CR -4700U
NV- 9400
NV- 9450 NV- 8420
VO- 3800
CR -4900U
VO- 4800 VO- 6800
BR- 6200U
Prices: $ 124.00 to approximately $ 200.00 Depending upon options ordered
Heavy- Duty Shoulder Strap HB-20 fits all cases
Video Belt VB-10 fits all cases
Accessory Pouch CA- Lfits all 3 /4 "cases
' 25.00 '15.00 '39.00
The Quick- Draw Professional Case is for everyday use (when your shipping case is just
too bulky to get around). The top- loading, quick-draw case allows you to have it ready to use, with battery attached, in an instant.
Cases rest solidly in trunk or back seat of car. Description: steel- reinforced hardboard
core with 3/4"foam padding covered with Cor-
dura nylon inside and out, aluminum viewfinder guard, interior and exterior pockets, shoulder strap, and leather handle.
Specify Camera Model
RAIN COVERS Specify Camera Model
$ 270.00 $ 97.00
PRODUCTION CASES Designed for video and film work,
this line of general-purpose cases will carry all accessories needed in the field. They take the place of gym bags, cardboard boxes, or milk cartons which traditionally have been used. A large array of accessories can be carried in see-through compartments, movable partitions, and many pockets. Used in combination with PortaBrace-MI recorder cases and camera cases, all needed field equipment can be carried and protected. Constructed on metal frames with hardboard and foam walls, these Cordura · nylon cases won't sag or collapse under heavy loads.
VE-36
PRODUCTION
CASES
Mod
No.
Description
List
PC- 1 Rigid Nylon Case with steel frame
and hardboard core 9x16 x16 $268.00
PC-2 Rigid Nylon Case with aluminum
frame and hardboard core 8-3/4 x
12-3/4 x21-1/2
298.00
PC-3 Rigid Nylon Case with aluminum
frame and hardboard core 8-3/4 x
12-3/4 x27-1/2
325.00
LCA Soft Case with foam core ( not illus-
trated) main compartment 5-1/2 x
11 x13, side pockets 2-1/2 x5-1/2 x
10-1/2, front pocket 2 x 9 x 12. In-
cludes Heavy-duty Shoulder Strap
118.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
KIWI
DIVISION OF NORTHERN MERCANTILE, INC.
6721 NW 36th Avenue Miami, FL 33147 (305) 835-8228 ( 800) 327-7524
CAMERA BAGS Et ACCESSORIES
TRIPOD BAGS
Made of the same fine materials as KIWI camera bags, the TP-21 and TP-22 are designed to protect and store your tripods, lighting umbrellas, or light stands. And because they are available in two different sizes, you can choose the one that best suits your equipment. Both bags can be comfortably carried by their attached, padded handles.
SMALL CAMERA BAG
The EP- 2is asmall, lightweight pouch designed especially to protect your 35mm automatic rangefinder camera or portable radio. The attached belt loops allow you to secure it to your side for hands- free accessibility.
Model
EP- 2 TP21
TP22
Description Size
Extra Pocket Belt Bag
Tripod Bag - Regular (Smoke Only)
Tripod Bag - Large (Smoke Only)
8x5 31-1/2x8-1/2 39-3/4x11
Wt.
5oz. 15 oz. 1lb. 6oz.
Price
$12.95 34.95 44.95
ZOOM HOLSTER
Designed for fast action photography, the Zoom Holster holds and provides quick access to any 35mm SLR with winder and zoom lens attached. It can be secured to your waist through its webbed belt loops, or carried by the CB-9's removable shoulder strap. The top is hinged with VELCRO for easy opening. The Zoom Holster assures you that you'll have your camera available whenever you need it.
HOLDS THESE
(1)
(31
4ITEMS...
Model
CB9
Description
Zoom Holster
Size
8x6x11
Wt.
80z.
Price
$29.95
TRAVEL GEAR
Model
Description
Size
Wt.
·FB95 FK-2
"AC30
·GB80
Expandable Flight Bag "Hang- Up" Travel Kit Attache Case
4- Suit Hanging Garment Bag ·)smoke only)
21x9x11 12x20 16-1 / 2x3-1 / 4 x12-1/2
1-1/2 lbs. 5oz.
1-1/4 lbs.
26x8x44
3lbs.
Price
$44.95 19.95 44.95
99.95
VIDEO CAMERA Et VIDEO COMBINATION BAGS
Model
Description
Size
VCR35 VCR65 VCR50 VCR77
VCR200
Mini Video Camera Bag (No Blue)
Camcorder/Kodavision
Bag ( No Blue)
15x9x10
Small Video Camera Bag
13x10x10
Combination Video Camera/Recorder Bag
(No Blue)
Large Video Camera Bag
17x10x12
Wt.
Price
1lb. 12 oz. $ 69.95
2lbs. 6oz.
84.95
3-3/4 lbs.
109.95
COLORS: SMOKE GREY -- BLACK -- BLUE (Colors may be substituted, unless no substitution is specified)
"CUSTOM- FIT" VIDEO RECORDER BAGS
Model
Description
Size
Wt.
VR1175
VR1250
VR1380 VT101
Panasonic, Etc. VTR Bag
9-1/2)(3 x10-1/2
RCA/ Hitachi VTR Bag 12x5-1 / 2 x10-1/2
JVC/Zenith VTR Bag 10x5x11
Video Transport/Rental
Bag ( No Blue)
21x5- 1/2x16
1lb. 12 oz.
1lb. 6oz. 1lb. 9oz.
2-1/2 lbs.
*New products, prices and specifications not yet available.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Price
$109.95 109.95 109.95 64.95
VE -37
KLM ASSOCIATES, INC.
5161 River Road, Bldg. 2 Bethesda, MD 20816 (301) 986-7944
TROLLEY/MONITOR STAND
Video System Trolley
(Order Ref. VS/1000 and Platform P27)
The VS/1000 will carry a complete video system ( Television receiver! monitor, video recorder and other equipment) as a mobile unit, to give ideal conditions for operating and viewing.
EQUIPMENT ACCOMMODATION The television receiver locates on the adjustable bearer. This unit will hold cabinets from 400mm ( 16") to 1000mm ( 39") wide. Video recorders or other equipment are carried on the platforms which are height adjustable.
Carrying capacity is sufficient to accommodate equipment of up to 115Kg ( 250 lbs.) in weight. Maximum width of the trolley is only 630mm 125") enabling it to pass easily through narrow doorways.
Trolleys may be dismantled for storage or transportation whenever required.
HOW TO ORDER To obtain a complete trolley as illustrated quote: 1xVS/1000 Trolley 1x P27 Platform
E
E
E
E
o e
Extends from 400mm to 1000mm 16m to 39m
Television Monitor Stand
(Order Ref. T/32/EP)
· Robust all steel construction provides an exceptional margin of strength. Safe and stable with equipment of up to 90Kg 1200 lbs.) in weight.
· The top unit is infinitely adjustable and will hold all television cabinets from 400mm 116") to 1000mm ( 39") wide.
· Height adjustment can be made by interchanging the standard 800mm ( 32") column with other lengths available.
The stand, which consists of base, column and top unit, is simple and quick to assemble, and may easily be dismantled for storage or transportation.
The television firmly locates on the adjustable top unit between the arms which extend and lock in position. The set may be screwed to the mounting if required.
bleeds hem 400.... le 1000 am Illo. re III.
12.·
VE -38
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
lii
LAIRD TELEMEDIA
2424 S. 2570 W. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 (801) 972-5900
EQUIPMENT RACKS
6000 SERIES Control Consoles and Equipment Racks
The 6000 Series electronic equipment consoles and vertica rack frames are specifically designed for use in television studios. All 6000 Series racks provide space for standard 19- racknount panels. Ample equipment space aoove the writing st_rface was a primary consideration in the design of the 6000 Series equipment racks.
The Model 6000 Low Bay Control Console consists of a43" high rack with awriting arm and asloped opening above the arm. The sloped opening provides 14" of equipment mounting area. An additional 19.25" of vertical opening is provided below the writing arm. Writing arms are 18" in depth. Arms up to 25" in depth may be ordered.
The Model 6100 High Bay Control Console is similar to a Mocel 6000 Low Bay Console but with an additional 17.5" of vertical rack opening above the sloped opening. This ensures ample equipment space above the writing surface and within easy reach of the operator. The console is 63.625" high.
The Model 6200 Vertical Equipment Rack provides 71.75" of continuous vertical equipment opening. The total height of the Model 6200 is 78".
Up to four consoles or racks may be bolted together and shipped as one unit. Consoles have acontinuous writing arm of the proper width,
e.g. atwo- bay console will have acontinLous arm two bays wide. The writing arm hinges down for shipping. Each section is fastened together with 1/4" bolts.
The 6000 Series consoles and racks can be supplied with standard punched rails for Tinnerman type fasteiers, or with optional 10-32 tapped, permanently installed, nut strips.
The outside base dimensions of each rack frame are 22" wide by 25" deep. To accommodate floor mounting, 4each 1, 2" diameter holes are provided within the confines of the base near the corners of each rack.
Each console and rack contains two cable- access ports in the rear of the base. Each access port has arectangular snap-in plastic grommet with an opening of 1.625" x3.625".
All rack frames are constructed with 14 gauge or heavier steel. All 6000 Series Racks are supplied as standard with rear doors and end bells. The rear doors and end bells are constructed of lignt gauge steel with reinforcing steel structures on the inside.
All 6000 Series equipment is supplied wi:h light gray frames and dark blue end bells and doors. Customer preferred colors are availabe upon request. All external surfaces are p-ofessionally finished using baked- on epoxy or vinyl paint. All inside surfaces are treated or finished sufficiently to prevent corrosion and oxidation. Writing arms are constructec of white formica over pressed wood. They are supported by arectangular steel frame attacned to the console at each end. The support frames are constructed so as to allow ample cutout area in the surface of the writing arm for the mounting of equipment such as special- effects generators, switchers, and keyboards.
Model 6000-1
Low Bay Control Console- with 14" sloped opening above an 18"
writing arm and 19.25" below writing arm. 22"W x25"D x43"H.
6000-1
$ 1090.00
Tapped Rails
120.00
Model 6000-2
Same as above, two bays wide, continuous writing arm.
6000-2
$ 2005.00
Tapped Rails
235.00
Model 6000-3
Same as above, three bays wide, continuous writing arm.
6000-3
$ 2920.00
Tapped Rails
350.00
Model 6100-1
High Bay Control Console- with 14" sloped opening above an 18"
writing arm. 17.50" vertical opening above sloped opening 19.25"
below arm. 22"W x25"D x63.625"H. 6100-1
$ 1470.00
Tapped Rails
180.00
Model 6100-2
Same as above, two bays wide, continuous writing arm.
6100-2
$ 2670.00
Tapped Rails
360.00
Model 6100-3
Same as above, three bays wide, continuous writing arm.
6100-3
$ 3860.00
Tapped Rails
535.00
Model 6100-4
Same as above, four bays wide, continuous writing arm.
6100-4
$ 5285.00
Tapped Rails
715.00
Model 6200-1
Vertical Equipment Rack- with 71.75" vertical opening 22"W x25"D
x 78"H. 6200-1
$ 945.00
Tapped Rails
225.00
Model 6200-2 Same as above, two bays wide. 6200-2
Tapped Rails
$ 1710.00 450.00
Model 6200-3 Same as above, three bays wide.
6200-3 Tapped Rails
$2475.00 675.00
Model CW40 45° Corner Wedge - for low bay.
CW40
$1080.00
Model CW 41 45° Corner Wedge - for high bay.
CW41
$1325.00
For optional writing arm depths: Writing arm up to 25" deep, 1bay. Writing arm up to 25" deep, 2bay. Writing arm up to 25" deep, 3bay. Writing arm up to 25" deep, 4bay.
(Specify depth 19" to 25")
$ 30.00 60.00 94.00
119.00
NOTE: All control consoles and equipment racks include side panels, perforated top panels, rear doors, cable tie down bars, and cable entry
ports.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -39
LUXOR CORPORATION
P.O. Box 830
2245 Delany Road
Waukegan, IL 60085-0830
(312) 244-1800 TWX 910-2350980
TVS Video
For group viewing of 21" monitors with VHS, Beta or 3/4" recorders. Cabinet models feature alocking 271/2 "w x 16"h x19"d compartment for your video tapes and accessories. Rubber grommeted passthrough in middle shelf. A3-outlet, 3wire, UL listed power assembly and 15' cord is included with every TVS. 30"w x16"d top shelf is recessed for easy access to recorder on middle shelf. For extra safety, non-skid, self-adhering strips are included for top surface. Ship knocked-down to save freight. Assembly required.
All models include 3-outlet 15 ft. power cord!
Stands at
VIDEO STANDS
Recoil power cord option. UL listed. 2-outlet, 3- wire 15 foot heavy-duty cord. Extends to desired length and locks. RE- 15, in lieu of standard power cord. Add $ 17.00 to cabinet price, $28.50 when ordering separately.
[A]
ADDITIONAL SHELF A foirth shelf for
use on any TVS Cabinet nodel. Fits
between the bottom shelf and the
standard middle shell.
TVS-S.
$ 21.50
Patent pending
Middle shelf on cabinet models has a rubber shielded wire pass- through.
(AITYS-34 Includes power cord. 34"h
x30"w x20"d with 2" furniture casters.
ris -34
$172.
[DJ TVS-44 Includes power cord. 44 " hx
30"w x20 ' dwith 2" furniture casters.
TVS-44
S193.
(C)TVS-54 Includes power cord.51 1 / 2 " h
x30w x20"d with 4" casters. TVS-54 $ 193,
[DITYS-34C Includes power cord. 34"h
x30"w x20"d with locking cabinet and
2" furniture casters.
TVS-34C
S287.
[B] TVS-44C Includes power cord. 44 " h
x30"w x20"d with locking cabinet and
2" furniture casters.
TVS-44C
S308.
09 TVS-64C Includes power cord.
51 1/2"h x 30"w X 20"cl with locking
cabinet and 4" casters.
NS-MC
$ 308.
t
7
20
.6-30
1.····IMIMI
_t_ 27 J.16
·Heights w,th stanclarC 2 Caste's
VE-40
[F]
SLANT MAR tilts TV monitor forward to
reduce glare. Mounts through existing
holes in top shelf of NS models. Slot In
bar enables anchoring N monitor to
bar.
BAR-8
$9.50
LUXOR SAFETY BELT for securing
monitors Nylon strap 8' x 1" with two
vinyl coated " S" hooks designed to
work with any open cart.
LSB
S17.
VIDEO TAPE ORGANIZER Chrome
with rubber feet. Hclds 28 1/2" or 3/4"
video cassettes. 26 1/ 4 " w x 16"cl x
41/ 4 " h. 10 lbs. VT0-28
$17.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LUXOR CORPORATION
P.O. Box 830 2245 Delany Road Waukegan, IL 60085-0830
(312) 244-1800 TVVX 910-2350980
Prestige Series Video Consoles
Preferred by most Industrial, Library, Educational, Medical and Office Buyers.
Strength and durability of these one-piece welded consoles are unmatched. All models ship fully assembled. Locking wood doors provide
security for valuable video equIpment and tapes. Com-
partments are louvered for ventilation. Designed for most 19" monitors and 1/2" or 3/4"
recorders. Heavy-duty 4"
casters, two with brakes provide high mobility. Wire pass through channels between all shelves.
PS- 762 70" CONSOLE
PS-762 70" VIDEO CONSOLE Our
best seller. Locking rear door for easy access to input/output jacks and power cords. 169 lbs. #PS-762 ...$870,00
PULL-OUT SHELF OPTION (as
shown) This shelf reduces recorder
compartment height to 10". 15 lbs.
#PSS
$58.50
ACCESSORY PUSH/PULL HANDLE
#SSH
$ 39.50
Wire pee. through top tn., bottom
21',. ·
20%· 27's ·
10' w/oplIonal pull.out shell
se -
CONSOLES
PS-500 56" CONSOLES
PS-500 SERIES VIDEO CONSOLES Compact, economical cabinets that accept the new mid-size TV monitors and up to three video recorders. Certain Sony TV monitors can be accommodated with # PS- 500-S.
PS-500 VIDEO CONSOLE with afix-
ed monitor shelf, aroll-out shelf and
a fixed bottom shelf.
#PS- 500
$674.00
PS-510 VIDEO CONSOLE with afix-
ed monitor shelf, aroll-out shelf and
two fixed lower shelves.
#PS- 510
$ 700.00
PS- 500-S VIDEO CONSOLE with a
fixed monitor shelf 26 1/2"clearance
height, a rollout shelf with 8" clear-
1 ance and a fixed shelf with 16"
clearance. #PS-500-S $674.00
- 29'. -
- 29 1 / 4 "
· 27 20
1'0"
;1 1 / 2 "
a' a
PS- 500
PS- 510
41
fi .
Studio Series
Executive
80" VIDEO EDITING CENTER Secures your 25" receiver and up to
four recorders. Shelves glide out for easy access. 34"w x 77"h x 22"d. Compartments are 31 7/8"w x 25"d. Receiver shelf 21 3/ 4 "h. Top compart ment base shelf is 95/8"h. Includes 2 power cords. Locking doors. Shipped in 2 sections. #SS- 780, with two 15"h shelves in bottom compartment, 340 lbs.
$1055.00
#SS-800, with three 95/8"h shelves in bottom compartment. 350 lbs..
$1209.00
SS SERIES ACCESSORIES
SST WALNUT LAMINATE TOP
SS1
S52.
SSH PUSHIPULL HANDLES
SSH
S39.50
40" 3-SHELF VIDEO EDITING
CENTER Designed to accommodate
as many as three 1/2"or 3 /4 " video
recorders. Shelves glide out for easy
access. Cabinet is 34"w x 40"h x
26"d. Compartments are 31 7/8"w x
25"d with 95/8"between shelves. In-
cludes a3-outlet, 3-wire 15 foot power
cord. Locking doors. 175 lbs.
#SS- 403
$ 700.00
40" VIDEO CENTER Accom-
modates most 25" receivers. Bottom
shelf holds 1/2"or 3.7" video recorders
and glides out for easy access.
Cabinet is 34"w x40"h x26"d. Com-
partments are 31 '/8"w x 25"d with
95/8" between bottom and middle
shelf and 21 3 /4 "between middle shelf
and top. Includes a3-outlet. 3-wire 15'
power cord. Locking doors 164 lbs.
#SS- 402
$ 573.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
45" WOOD DOOR CONSOLE Provides security with locking doors and mobility. Designed for applications where high mobility is not required. 29 3 /4 "w x 21 1/4"d x 50"h. Monitor
compartment is 27 1/8"w x 20"d x
22"h. Recorder compartment is 27 ,/8"w x20"cl x97/8"h with roll-out shelf. Storage compartment is 27%"w x20"cf x9"h. Four inch, ball bearing
casters, two with brakes. Includes UL listed 15' power cord. 142 lbs. Assembly required. #ES-45W
$515.00 #ES-45WC, with 2" chrome ball
casters
$515.00
VE -41
LUXOR CORPORATION
P.O. Box 830 2245 Delany Road Waukegan, IL 60085-0830 (312) 244-1800 MX S10-2350980
TV TABLES/ VIDEO CENTERS
TV Tables
All models include 3-outlet 15 ft. cord!
[A] ATV- 56 -- ADJUSTABLE- HEIGHT
TV TABLE. Adjusts to six heights of 56
54. 50". 48". 42", and 40" Wt 65 lbs
ATV- 56
$ 244.00
[B] ATV- 56C -- ADJUSTABLE- HEIGHT
TV TABLE WITH LOCKING CABINET.
Door has walnut woodgrain doors with black
side and back panels. Adjustable to heights
of 56". 54". 50. 48, 42", and 40". Wt. 84
lbs. ATV-56C
6318.00
[C] TVR-54 -- FIXED HEIGHT TV
TABLE. Top shelf tilted forward eight
degrees to reduce glare. Wt. 68 lbs.
TVR-54
6194.00
[D] TVR-54C -- FIXED HEIGHT TV
TABLE WITH LOCKING CABINET. Top
shelf tilted forward eight degrees to reduce
glare. Walnut woodgrain doors with black side
and back panels. Wt. 75 lbs.
TVR-54C
$306.00
Monitors end recorders not included.
2
54
50>
48" 42"
2
4C'
Video Production·
Centers s
Ships U.P.S!
37'
4, -4-24 11 1 / 4 -
16'.
All
f
models
include
power
cord!
4
ENDURA CABINETIZED VIDEO PRODUCTION
CENTER 37"h x18"d x24 " vv. Accommodates Beta or
VHS video recorders. Features air loaded Mono Pod
LMP·74 camera mount with spring-loaded pan head. Big
18" x 24" top surface is a ready stage for close-ups.
Locking steel cabinet safely stores your valuable equip-
ment and accessories. Simple assembly required.
Shown with big wheels which provide smoother, easier
movement over carpeting and rough surfaces. Three
outlet, 15- foot power cord included.
VPC-37
$ 334.
VPC.378 with two 12" big wheels on one end
$361.
ENDURA VIDEO PRODUCTION CENTER 34"h x18"d
x 24"w. Accommodates Beta or VHS video cassette
recorders. Features Mono Pod LM13-74 camera mount
with spring- loaded pan head. Big 18" x24" top surface is
a ready stage for close-ups. Simple assembly required.
Three outlet. 15- toot power co-dincluded.
VP- 34
$ 250.
VP- 34B with two 12" big wheels on one end
5276
Patent pending
4
on cabinet
VE -42
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Cameras and equipment rtot included
LUXOR CORPORATION
AV TABLES
P.O. Box 830
Fixed- Height AV/Utiiity Tables 2245 Delany Road
nialu21;e2z 118L0600085-0x893100-2350980
All models include electric power cord!
Light, strong and attractive, Luxor Endura is the perfect answer for economical, highly mobile equipment transport. Endura tables are made of a structural ABS so strong, that we guarantee it -- indefinitely.
All models are also available with 12" big wheels on one end for easier
mobility over carpeting and rough surfaces.
18'
(A) 42" HIGH ENDURA MOBILE TABLE 42"h x24"w x 18"d 14'. " top to center shelf: 16'." center to lower
shelf. 4" anti- shimmy casters. two
.4-- 24"
Luxor Endura Tables are covered by a
LIFETIME
with brakes.
WARRANTY!
LE-42
$ 112.
LEB-42 with 12" big wheels on one
end
$138.
(B) 34" HIGH ENDURA MOBILE
TABLE 34"h x24"w x18"d. 61/. " top
to center shelf: " center to lower
shelf. 4" anti- shimmy casters, two
with brakes.
LE- 34
$ 109.
LEB-34 with 12" big wheels on one
end
$135.
(C) 26" HIGH ENDURA MOBILE
TABLE (not pictured) 26"h x 24"w x
18"cl. 16'." between upper and lower
shelf. 4" anti- shimmy casters. two
with brakes.
LE- 26
$91.
LEB-26 with 12" big wheels on one
end
$117.
(D) 42 " HIGH ENDURA CABINETIZ-
ED MOBILE TABLE 42"h x 24'w x
18"d. One cabinet with locking door.
4" anti- shimmy casters, two with
brakes. LE-42-C $ 197.
LEB-42-C with 12" big wheels on one
end
$223.
(E) 34" HIGH ENDURA CABI NET 12 -
ED MOBILE TABLE 34"h x 24"w x
18"cl. One cabinet with locking door.
4" anti- shimmy casters, two with
brakes.
LE-34-C
$ 193.
LEB-34-C with 12" big wheels on one
end
$220.
Shown with the big wheel option.
(F) 26" HIGH ENDURA CABINETIZ-
ED MOBILE TABLE 26"h x 24"w x
18"cl. Locking cabinet door. 4" anti
Shimmy casters. two with brakes.
LE- 26-C
$ 175.
LEB-26-C with 12" big wheels on one
end
$202.
Every Luxor AV Table is equipped with a three- outlet and three- wire power assembly haying a 15' cord. UL Usted.
VIDEO TAPE ORGANIZER Cnrome witn rubber
feet Holds twenty 1/2" or 3/4" video cassettes
20 1 / 2 "w x16"cl x4', " h 10 lbs
VT0·20
$ 17.
Patent pending on cabinet.
t
18" 11111
4
34
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-43
LUXOR CORPORATION
STORAGE AND SECURITY CABINETS
P.O. Box 830 2245 Delany oad Waukegan. IL 60035-0830 (31 2) 244-1800 TVVX 910 2350980
Large Capacity Storage
All units complete
with lock & keys
SUDE CAROUSELS file on shelves in sec-
tions. 13 carousels per shelf. Shelves are
355/16 "w x 133/,4"d. Three dividers per
shelf. 37"w x14T/2"d xsr h. Putty. 5-shelf
cabinet. 11" between shelves or adjust
shelves in I/2" increments. 215 lbs.
#67-ST- 5
$748.
5" & 7" REEL AUDIO TAPE CABINET. File
up to 50 reels per shelf in groups. Shelves
are 35"w x10"d. Three dividers per shelf.
If filing only 5" tapes consider the 4-shelf
model. 36"w x11"d x35"h. Putty.
3-shell cabinet. 9" between shelves or ad-
just shelves in 1/ 2 "increments. 101 lbs.
#35-47-3
$ 350.
4-shelf cabinet. 81/2'between shelves or
adjust shelves in Ye increments. 110 lbs.
#35-47-4 $393.
Security
DISC RECORD ALBUMS OF MOUVED OH
PROJECTOR TRANSPARENCIES Wed in
groups with 250 albums or 400 Oil trans-
parencies per shelf. Three dividers per
shelf. 37"w x14 1/2"d x67"h. Putty.
4-shelf cabinet. 14" between shelves or
adjust shelves in 1/ 2 "increments. 140 lbs.
#67-RT-4
$674.
Media Racks
FILE UNJACKETED DISC RECORDS OR UNMOUNTED OH TRANSPARENCIES in indexed swing-out envelopes. 300 envelopes per shelf file up to 300 disc records or 1200 transparencies per shelf. 37"w x14 1 /2 "d x67"h. Putty 4-shelf cabinet. 14" between shelves or adjust shelves in 1/2"increments. 240 lbs. #67-RT-4E $ 1098.
8mm MICROFILM CARTRIDGE CABINET Holds up to 35 reels per shelf. Three dividers per shelf. 37"w x14 1 /2 "d x67"h. Putty. 9-shelf cabinet. 51 /2 "between shelves or adjust shelves in 1 /2 "increments. 275 lbs.
16mm FILM CABINET from 400' through
1600' file individually in chrome plated steel
rack. 24 reels per shelf. Putty.
4-shelf cabinet. 14" oetween shelves or
adjust shelves in 1 /2 "increments. 200 lbs.
#67-16-4 $636.
5-shelf cabinet. 11" between shelves or
adjust shelves in 1 /2 "increments. 2'5 lbs.
#67-16-5
$ 695.
6-shelf cabinet. 9" between shelves or ad-
just shelves in 1/2" increments. 230 lbs.
#67-16-6
S758.
7-shelf cabinet. 71 /2 "between shelves or
adjust shelves in 1 /2 "increments. 245 lbs.
#67-16-7 $817.
#86m7m-FMCI-9CROFILM CARTRIDGE CABINET.
File up to 35 cartridges per shelf in index-
ed adjustable sections. Shelves are 35"w
x10"d. Three dividers per shelf. 36"w x
11"d x35"h. Putty.
5-shelf cabinet. 5" between shelves or ad-
just shelves in Y2 " increments. 119 lbs.
#35-FC-5
$435.
Large
Capacity
Video
Storage
SC-77 - 80" STEEL & WOOD
CABINET Heavy-duty welded steel
construction and wood doors with
walnut laminate. Two modules are lock-
stacked together. Cabinet is 34"w x
80"h x25"d. Compartments are 31%."w
x 24"d with 15 1/2 "between shelves.
Heavy-duty 4" ball bearing casters. two
with brakes. Wt. 194 bs.
SC-77 ·
$ 923.
SSH Set of Push/Pull Handles.... $38.
VE-44
For 16mm reels specify 1-3/16" spacing. For most computer tape reels specify 1-7/8" spacing For Super. 8 film and audio tapes Specify 7/8" spacing.
12" WIDE REEL zIACK available in
three sizes of rack spacrig 17/8"wide
spacing for 6reels. 1" spacing for
9 reels, or ,s "wide spacing for 11
reels. 12"w x 9"h x 73,4"d Spec..fy
rack spacing
R - 12
$ 21.
25" WIDE REEL RACK , vailable in three sizes of rack spacing 178' wide spacing for 12 reels 13..," spac:ng for
18 reels. or 78"woe spacing for 23
reels 25"w x 9'h x 724"d Specify
rack spacing R-25
$ 28.
VIDEO TAPE SECURITY CABINET
File like books on shelves. Capacity is
about 30 videocasse:tes per shelf depending on cassette dimension.
Shelves are 35"w x 10"d. Cabinet is
36"w x11"d x35"h. Charcoal with putty
color doors.
(A) 2- shelf cabinet. 14" between
shelves or adjust shelves in 1/ 2 " in-
crements. Wt. 92 lbs. 35-1/T2
$ 303.
34" LONG REEL RACK available in
(B)3-shelf cabinet. 9" between shelves
three sizes of rack spacing 178'wide
or adjust shelves in Y2 " : ncrements. Wt.
spacing for 15 reels. 1" spacing for
101 lbs.
25 reels. or 78" wiCe spacing 'or 32
35·VT3
$ 345.
reels 34w x 9"h x 734d Specify
rack spacing
35.VTS Extra shelf with 3dividers. 9lbs.
R-34
$ 31
35-VTS
$ 42.50
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VIDEO TAPE SECURITY STORAOE File videocasse:tes and video tape reels like books on ashelf. Holds about 30 videocassettes per shelf depending on cassette dimensions. Shelves are 35%."w x 13"cl. Cabinet is 37"w x 14 1/ 2 "dx67"h. Charcoal with putty col-
or doors.
(A) 4-shelf cabinet 14" between
shelves or adjust shelves in 1/2 " incre-
ments. For 12" da. reels. Wt. 200 lbs.
67-VT4
$684.
(B) 5-shelf cabinet 11" between
shelves or adjust shelves in 1/2 " in-
crements. Wt. 215 lts.
67-VT5
$ 742.
(C) 6-shelf cabinet 9" between shelves
or adjust in 1/ 2 " increments. 230 lbs. 67-VT6 $801.
(D)7-shelf cabinet 7" between shelves
or adjust in 1/ 2 "increments 245 los
67-V77
$ 870.
LUXOR CORPORATION
P.O. Box 830 2245 Delany Road Waukegan, IL 60085-0830 (312) 244-1800 TM 910-2350980
EDIA STORAGE
FOR 6" DEEP
DRAWER MODULES. File
36 Beta or 30 VHS in slip cases
per 19 1 / 2 'drawer 81 Beta or 70 VHS in slip
cases per 39" drawer.
Order code
012
Video
Tape
Storage
FOR 755" DEEP 11
751." DEEP DRAWER
MODULES. File 22 1/2" video
tapes in padded cases per 19 1 /2 "
drawer, 60 per 39" drawer. Files 14 to 16
3/4" video tapes in each 19 1 /4 " drawer -
padded cases, slip cases or small (35.1
type) cartridges; 33 to 44 3/4" video tapes
per 39" drawer.
Order code
#14
Video Tape Transports
Lock up valuable tapes in modular, lock-stacking, cabinets and expand your storage system as your video library grows. Specify color: Gold, Blue, Tangerine, Putty or Walnut.
DOUBLE 5" DRAWER MODULE with
drawer lock and keys. File 144 Beta or
120 VHS video tapes in slip cases. 39"w
x17 1 /2 " d x 11 1 /4 " h. Wt. 82 lbs.
039-25-12
$477.
S1NOLE 5" DRAWER MODULE with
drawer lock and keys. File 36 Beta or 30
VHS videotapes in slip cases. 19 1 /2 " w x
17 1/ 2 " d x6"h. Wt. 30 lbs. M19-15-12
$ 165.
S1NOLE 7X" DRAWER MODULE
with drawer lock and keys. File 22 1 /2 "
video tapes of 16 1 /4 " video tapes.
19 1 /2 " w x 17 1 /2 " d x9"h. Wt. 30 lbs.
019-17-14
$ 186.
S1NOLE 755" DRAWER MODULE with drawer lock and keys. File 44 1/ 2 "
video tapes or 32 1 /4 "video tapes. 39"w x 17 1 /2 "d x81 /4 "h. Wt. 65 lbs. 03917-14 $313.
e
DOUBLE 5" DRAWER MODULE with
drawer lock and keys. File 72 Beta or 60
VHS video tapes in slip cases. 19 1 /2 " w x
17 1/ 2 "d x 11 1 / 2 " h. Wt. 48 lbs.
019-25-12
$234.
ACCESSORY TOP. Walnut woodgrain
laminate. 19 1 /2 " w x 17 1 /2 ' d x '/." h. Wt.
11 lbs.
M19-T
$26.50
RECESSED SASE. 17 1 /2 " w x15Vd x
3"h. Wt. 15 lbs Without casters
·19-R8
$43.
We casters
#19-RB-C
$51.
ACCESSORY TOP. Walnut woodgrain
laminate 39"w x17 1 /2 "d x /". Wt. 20 lbs.
t······" 039-T
$42.50
RECESSED BASE. 36"w x 15 1 /4 "d rh; with 2" casters 5- 1 /2 "h. Charcoal. Wt. 25 lbs. #39-RB, w/o casters $59. #39-RB-C, with casters
Media-Safe Filers
1/T400- VIDEO TAPE TRANSPORT with three double.slant shelves Holds
up to 132 Beta or VHS video cassettes or 96 1 /4 " cassettes 28"w x17"d x46"h Assembly required Wt 71 lbs Putty
Color with woodgrain accent.
VT- 300
$232
With 12 big wheels Wt 85 lbs
VTB-300
8258.
FOR FILING CASSETTES. UP to
25 cassettes, individual compart-
ments. Specify gold, blue or
tangerine.
1-pak. Wt. 6 lbs.
CC- 3
$48.00
6-pak. Wt. 13 lbs.
CC -6
$96.00
12-pak. Wt. 25 lbs.
CC- 12
$ 192.00
FOR FILING CASSETTE/FILM-
STRIP SETS. Up to 12 sets Specify
gold, blue or tangerine.
1-pak Wt 2 lbs
CC- FS- 1
$ 17.00
6-pak Wt 13 lbs.
CC- FS-6
$ 102.00
12-pak Wt 25 lbs.
CC- FS- 12
$ 204.00
FILING CASSETTES IN BOXES.
Files up to 15 cassettes using a
sliding follower. 3- pack. Wt. 10 lbs.
Specify gold, blue or tangerine.
SF- C-3
$48.00
FILING CASSETTES WITHOUT
BOXES. Files up to 18 cassettes in
slots 3- pack Wt. 10 lbs Specify
gold, blue or tangerine.
SF- CB- 3
$48.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
FILING FILMSTRIP/CASSETTE
SETS. Files up to 9filmstrips with ac-
companying cassettes in individual
compartments. 3- pack. Wt. 10 lbs.
Specify gold, blue or tangerine.
SF-FC-3
$48.00
FIUNG FILMSTRIPS. Files up to 18
containers in individual compart-
ments 3- pack Wt 10 lbs Specify
gold, blue or tangerine.
SF- F-3
$48.00
VE-45
vAti MORTON SYSTEM FURNISHINGS
23641 Ridge Route Dr. · '_.aguna Hills. CA 92653 · ( 714) 859-6016
SERIES 100 VERTICAL RACK SYSTEM
SERIES 100
Vertical Rack System
The Series 100 Vertical Rack System is designed to house 19" rack mounted equipment up to 24" in depth. Rack openings are 19-3/16" with 17-25/32" clearance between rails to handle slightly oversized equipment which does not adhere to the EIA RS- 310-C rack standard. All rack rails are manufactured from heavy duty 10 gauge steel and are fully drilled and tapped for 10-32 screws eliminating the need for captive nuts and clips. Decorative black rack screws and protective washers are also available.
The Series 100 is based on our rugged 16 gauge tubular steel framework covered in atough polyester resin- based substrate and finished in durable plast.c laminate. All front and rear edges are trimmed in solid hand- selected oiled oak or walnut giving the look and feel of fine hand-crafted furniture with a contemporary styling.
Removable rear doors with top and bottom black anodized ventila -
tion screens are optionally available. Rear rack rails are also available for cabinets that will house large pieces of equipment which require rear support or rack sides. These rack rails are the same high- quality black anodized tapped steel rails that are used in the standard rack cabinets. The addition of rear rack rails also includes our adjustable mounting system so the depth of the rear rails can be easily changed.
Optional flat or sloped counter assembly may be added to these rack systems at the time of order. Counter is covered in matching plastic laminate with solid oak or walnut trim and has 14" of rack space per bay. The flat counter consumes 2rack spaces in vertical height while the sloped counter requires 4 rack spaces. The standard knee clearance for either countertop is 25-9/16". 24-1/2" of rack space is available below the counter of each bay. Counters must be installed at the factory and can be retrofitted to existing ve ,tical -acks at an additional charge.
Consult factory for details regarding special configurations, pricing and delivery.
Flat Counter Sloped Counter
COUNTER ASSEMBLY
1BAY
S 238.00 298.00
2BAY
S 311.00 390.00
3BAY
S 385.00 482.00
4BAY
5 458.00 573.00
VE -46
SIZE RACK SPACES
4Spaces ; 7.00") 8Spaces ( 14.001 12 Spaces 121.00") 16 Spaces ( 28.00") 20 Spaces ( 35.00") 24 Spaces ( 42.00") 28 Spaces (49.00) 32 Spaces 1.56.00) 36 Spaces (63.00") 40 Spaces (70.00") 44 Spaces (77.00")
Bolt- on Caster Base
Series 100 Vertical Rack System
1BAY
$280.00 319.00 358.00 397.00 436.00 475.00 514.00 553.00 592.00 631.00 670.00
190.00
2BAY
$ 448.00 510.00 573.00 635.00 698.00 760.00 822.00 885.00 947.00
1010.00 1072.00
240.00
3BAY
$ 616.00 701.00 788.00 873.00 960.00
1045.00 1130.00 1217.00 1302.00 1389.00 1474.00
290.00
4 BAY
$ 784.00 892.00
1003.00 1111.00 1222.00 1330.00 1438.00 1549.00 1657.00 1768.00 1876.00
340.00
REAR RACK PER BAY
$ 63.50 72.25 81.00 89.75 98.50
107.25 116.00 124.75 133.50 142.25 151.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
REAR DOOR PER BAY
36.00 42.50 49.00 55.50 61.75 68.00 74.50 81.00 87.25 93.50 100.00
MORTON
SYSTEM FURNKIIINGS
23641 Ridge Route Dr .· Laguna Hills. CA 92651 · 17141 859-6016
SERIES 500 PRODUCTION CONSOLE SYSTEM
SERIES 500 Production Console System
The Series 500 Production Console Systems are ergonomically designed for user comfort and are suitable for most editing and production requirements. Flat console countertop is 19-1/2" deep and 28-3/16" above the floor for comfortable desk height seating. The Series 500 features 14" of rack space (8 rack units) per bay apove countertop and can house equipmert up to 24" deep. Rack openings are 19-3/16" with 17-25/32" clearance between rails to nandle slightly oversized equipment wh ci does not adhere to the EIA RS-310-C rack standard. All rack rails are manufactured from heavy duty 10 gauge steel and are fully drilled and tapped for 10-32 screws eliminating the need for captive nuts and clips. Decorative black rack screws and protective washers are also available.
The Series 500 is based on our rugged 6gauge tubule steel framework covered in atough polyester resin- based substrate and finished
in durable hand- selected oiled oak or walnut giving the look and feel of fine hand-crafted furniture with a contemporary styling.
Removable rear doors with top and bottom black anodized ventilation screens are optionally available. Rear rack rais are standard for consoles that will house large pieces of equipment which require rear support or rack slides. These rack rails are the same high- quality black anodized tapped steel rails that are used for front mounted equipment. The rear rack rails also feature our adjustable mounting system so the depth of the rear rails can be easily changed.
Up to 24-1/2" of rack space ( 14 rack units) is optionally available below countertop to house switcher power supplies, etc. Adjustable rear rack rails are optional for rack space below countertop.
Custom conso'es can be manufactured to almost any desired size and configuration. Consult factory for detads regarding special configurations, pricing and delivery.
Series 500 Production Console System
NUMBER OF BAYS
1 2 3 4
5
6
STANDARD UNIT
RACK SPACE BELOW
COUNTER
REAR RAILS BELOW
COUNTER
COUNTER RACK SPACE
REMOVABLE REAR
DOORS
$ 1085.00 1530.00 1975.00 2420.00 2865.00 3310.00
$ 140.00 224.00 308.00 392.08 476.00 560.00
$ 85.50 171.00 256.50 342.00 427.50 513.00
$ 110.00 220.00 330.00 440.00 560.00 660.00
$ 100.00 200 . CO 300.00 400.00 500.00 600.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -47
MORTON
SYSTEM FURNISHINGS
23641 Ridge Route Dr · Laguna Hills. CA 92653 · ( 714) 859-6016
SERIES 1000 PORTABLE VCR HOUSING SYSTEM
SERIES 1000
Portable VCR Housing System
The Series 1000 Portable VCR Housing System meets the need for 1/2" and 3/4" VCR editing systems by providing space efficient, aesthetically pleasing mobile cabinetry. The Series 1000 is available in two configurations. The Type A housing system was designed for front loading rack mourred 3/4" VCRs up to 24" deep while the Type B system is oriented to house top loading 1/2" and 3/4" VCRs in aconfiguration that facilitates easy access during editing sessions. Front surface is sloped back to allow viewing VCR controls and to change cassettes. Each Type BVCR tray is 28" wide by 18" deep and is mounted on velvet- glide slides rated at 100 pounds per tray. The Series 1000 comes complete with four heavy duty casters for mobility and rear cabling access.
Rack openings for the Type A System are 19-3/16" with 17-25/32" clearance between rails to handle slightly oversized equipment which does not adhere to the EIA RS-310-C rack standard. All rack rails are
manufactured from heavy duty 10 gauge steel and are fu ly drilled and tapped for 10-32 screws eliminating the need for captive nuts and clips. Decorative black rack screws and protective washers are also available.
The Series 1000 is based on our rugged 16 gauge tubular steel framework covered in atough polyester resin- based substrate and finished in durable plastic laminate. All front and rear edges are trimmed in solid hand selected oiled oak or walnut, giving the look and feel of fine hand-crafted furniture with a contemporary styling.
Removable rear door with black anodized ventilation screen is optionally available. The Type A system also features rear rack reds to secure rack slides common to most rack mounted VCRs. Rear rails also include our adjustable mounting system so the depth of the rails can be easily changed.
Consult factory for details regarding special configurations, pricing and delivery.
SERIES 1000 TYPE A PORTABLE VCR RACK SYSTEM
SIZE RACK SPACES
6Spaces ( 10.50") 12 Spaces ( 21.00") 18 Spaces ( 31.50")
BASE UNIT
$ 680.00 740.00 800.00
REMOVABLE REAR DOOR
$ 80.00 89.00 98.00
VE -48
SERIES 1000 TYPE B PORTABLE VCR TRAY SYSTEM
NUMBER OF TRAYS
BASE UNIT
REMOVAELE REAR DOOR
1
$ 770.00
$ 92.00
2
830.00
102.00
3
890.00
112.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MORTON
SYSTEM l'UNISHINGS
23641 Ridge Route Dr. · Laguna Hills, CA 92653 · ( 7)41 859-6016
SERIES 1100 VERTICAL DUPLICATION SYSTEM
SERIES 1100 Vertical Duplication System
The Series 1100 Vertcal Duplication System fulfills the need for space efficient aesthetically pleasing duplication racks. The Series 1100 features sliding trays 19" wide and 16" deep, mounted on 14" velvet- glide slides rated to carry 100 pounds per tray. The standard vertical spacing between trays is 10-1/2 inches.
Standard 19" rack space is optionally available to house time base correctors, monitors, etc. in the same duplication rack. Rear rack rails are also available for rack-furnished systems that will house large pieces of equipment which require rear support or rack slides. The addition of rear rack rails also includes our adjustable mounting system so the depth of the rear rails can be easily changed. Rack openings are 19-3 / 16" with 17-25/32" clearance between rails to
handle slightly oversized equipment which does not adhere to the EIA RS- 310-C rack standard. All rack rails are manufactured from heavy duty 10 gauge steel and are fully drilled and tapped for 10-32 screws eliminating the need for captive nuts and clips. Decorative black rack screws and protective washers are also available.
The Series 1100 is based on our rugged 16 gauge tubular steel framework covered in atough polyester resin- based substrate and finished in durable plastic laminate. All front and rear edges are trimmed in solid hand- selected oiled oak or walnut giving the look and feel of fine hand-crafted furniture with a contemporary styling.
Optional removable rear doors with top and bottom black anodized ventilation screens are also available.
Consult factory for details regarding special configurations, pricing and delivery.
IOF SLIDING VCR TRAYS
PER BAY
1 2 3 4 5 6
Series 1100 Vertical Duplication System
1BAY
NUMBER OF BAYS
2BAY
3BAY
4 BAY
4420.00 525.00 630.00 735.00 840.00 945.00
714.00 893.00 1071.00 1250.00 1428.00 1607.00
$1008.00 1261.00 1512.00 1765.00 2016.00 2269.00
$1302.00 1629.00 1953.00 2280.00 2604.00 2931.00
REMOVABLE REAR DOOR
PER BAY
60.00 68.00 76.00 84.00 92.00 100.00
SIZE RACK SPACES
4Spaces I7.00) 6Spaces ( 10.50) 8Spaces ( 14.00") 10 Spaces ( 17.50) 12 Spaces ( 21.00")
1BAY
$134.00 153.50 173.00 192.50 212.00
OPTIONAL RACK SPACE
2 BAY
$214.00 246.00 277.00 308.00 339.00
3BAY
$294.00 338.50 381.00 423.50 466.00
4BAY
REAR RACK PER BAY
$374.00 431.00 485.00
539.00 593.00
$63.50 68.00 72.25
76.50 81.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -49
usi MORTON SYSTEM FURNISHINGS
23641 Ridge Route Dr. · Laguna Hills, CA 92653 · ( 7(4) 859 -6016
SERIES 1200 PORTABLE EDITING SYSTEM
SERIES 1200 Portable Editing System
The Series 1200 Portable Editing System is designed to meet the needs of off-line editing system users who have a limited amount of floorspace available. The Series 1200 is a complete, self-contained cabinet system available in three types. Type A has two 19" wide sliding trays to house 1/2" top loading and front loading VCRs. Type B has two 28" wide sliding trays for larger top loading 3/4" VCRs while Type C has 24-1/2" of vertical rack space for rack mounted front loading machines. All three versions feature heavy duty rubber casters and dual- level work surfaces.
The Series 1200 is based on our rugged 16 gauge tubular steel frame-
work covered in atough polyester resin- based substrate and finished in durable plastic laminate. All front and rear edges are trimmed in solid hand-selected oiled oak or walnut giving the look and feel of fine hand-crafted furniture with a contemporary styling.
Available options include either an 18" deep flat monitor shelf or 20" deep three- bay monitor rack. Both options are fully adjustable in height and are easily attached with four bolts. The monitor rack option features adjustable rear rack rails to support monitor slides and is available in several rack sizes.
Consult factory for details regarding special configurations, pricing and delivery.
VE -50
TYPE A
SERIES 1200 PORTABLE EDITING SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
19" Wide Sliding Trays 28" Wide Sliding Trays 24-1/2" Vertical Rack Space
BASE UNIT
$ 1155.00 1291.00 1155.00
ADJUSTABLE MONITOR SHELF 18" Deep Monitor Shelf
$ 195.00
ADJUSTABLE THREE BAY MONITOR RACK
SIZE RACK SPACES
THREE- BAY ASSEMBLY
4Spaces ( 7.00") 6Spaces ( 10.50") 8Spaces ( 14.00") 10 Spaces ( 17.50")
12 Spaces ( 21.0131
$ 758.00 801.00 843.00 886.00 928.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PACKTRONICS
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY PSI
7200 Huron River Drive Dexter, MI 48130 (313) 426-4646
VIDEO PACS
PSI CUSTOM FIT RECORDER CASES
Custom fit video recorder cases for popular size video recorder decks. Durable construction with shoulder strap and pocket large enough to hold most spare batteries and accessories. Available in gray only.
CAT / VR1OGN
VR2OGN
Panasonic Style
10-1/2" x8-3/4" x3" RCA/Hitachi
Universal 10-1/2" x9-3/4" x3-3/4"
LIST $79.95
79.95
(1036 x95) (2036 x95)
RECORDER CASE
PSI VIDEO CAMERA CASE
The VC25 is designed for all small cameras. Features removeable center divider, with two extra dividers. Large padded outside pocket holds cables, tapes, batteries and other accessories. Available in gray nylon.
VC25GN
Small Cam. Case
LIST $69.95
(2531 x95)
VIDEO CAMERA CASE
PSI CAMCORDER CASE
The VC35 is designed to fit Betamovie, JVC Camcorders, and other medium size camera systems. Has fully adjustable center and side dividers, complete with a large padded outside pouch for cables,
tapes, batteries and other accessories. Available in gray nylon.
VC35GN
Med. Cam. Case
$79.95
(3536 x95)
PSI VIDEO COMBINATION CASE
The VC45 is acombination camera and recorder carrying case. This case wil hold not only acamera and recorder, but also ahost of other accessories. Removable center and side dividers, with alarge outside padded pouch.
VC45GN
Combocase
LIST $89.95
(4539 x95)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CAMCORDER CASE
VIDEO COMBINATION CASE
VE-51
PEERLESS SALES CO.
1950 Hawthorne Ave. Melrose Park, IL 60160 (312) 865-8870
EDUCATIONAL TELEVISION CARTS
SCHOOLS, HOSPITAL Et SERVICE CARTS SECURITY FASTENERS
1530-000
1519-000
1528-000
1517-00C
1524-000
1513-000
1540-000
Peerless has 3distinct styles of ETV carts available. Each of the 3styles is available with either ametal top or an adjustable tilt, ventilated and insulated top shelf. All ETV carts are 50" high and feature haired leg design for maximum safety and stability. All styles are also now available with heavy duty solid stem 4" casters that bolt in
Place. All units shipped knocked down.
Style Acarts feature three shelves Capacity 25' color TV with two VCR's. or 203 IDS total
Style Bcarts feature two shelves with lower cross braces Capacity 25' color receiver with VCR. or 200 lbs total
Style Ccarts feature two shelves Capacity 19" color or 23' BAN monitor with vCR. or 150 lbs total
STOCK
1530-000
Style ACart w/solid stem casters and adjustable tilt top.
$149.50ea.
STOCK e 1517-000 1521-000
1513-000
Style BCart wisol id stem casters and metal top shell Style CCart w/solid stem casters and achustable tilt top Style CCart wisolid stem casters and metal top shell
$117.75ea. 124.25ea. 105.25ea.
1519-000
Style ACart wisol id stem casters and metal top shelf
137.25ea.
1528-000
Style BCart wlsolid stem casters and adjustable tilt top
136.50ea.
EDUCATION TELEVISION CART ACCESSORIES
1540-000
Jumbo size cart with 8" diameter pneumatic wheels. Has 318 gauge steel shelves. All joints MIG welded. Height 54" capacity 300 lbs. Has flared profile designed for maximum stability
345.00ea.
1550-000
1503.100 1503-200
1550-000
1553-000
3 Wire Heavy Duty 15 foot Extension Cord with 2 grounded
$28.00ea. receptacles mounted in ametal box that attaches easily to the
metal shelf on any Peerless ETV Cart. except 1540
8" Diameter Swivel Caster with jumbo pneumatic tire 8" Diameter Rigid Caster with Jumbo pneumatic tire
45.00ea. 40.00ea.
1551000 1555-000
(
1503-100
1555-000
1503-200
Electrical Outlet Box for jumbo cart. 3wire heavy duty 15' exten. sion cord with 4grounded receptacles mounted in ametal box that attaches easily to shelf
Black Web Safety Belt for jumbo cart
$27.00ea. 10.00ea.
HOSPITAL CART
1719.000
Overbed Style Hospital Cart for 19" color or B/W TV Cart can be positioned so set is conveniently suspended over the bed
d. or nms Y eeoi'vea ·
SERVICE CART
5068-000
All Welded Steel Cart with ladder attached. Ideal for install. ing, removing and servicing TV's in schools, hospitals, hotels and motels. Complete with locking storage cabinet
SECURITY FASTENERS
TRI -SLOT HEAD
BUTTON HEAD
425.00ea.
1719-000
1380
1350
1352
Tamper Proof Screws help prevent theft and pilferage which might occur when using conventional screws. All screws supplied bright zinc plate finish.
Standard package on all sizes is 100 pieces. Service charge of $ 2.50 on all broken packages Tri-stot head screws are available from stock in the following sizes.
1302-010
1303-010 1304-010 1306-010
1307-010 1313-510
V2" Long, 010 type AB sheet metal screw
44 Long, 610 type AB sheet metal screw 1" Long, 010 type AB sheet metal screw 11/2"Long, Bio type AB sheet metal screw
144" Long, # 10 type AB sheet metal screw 7/8' Long, 010-32 machine screw
Use the following tools for installing and removing the above TIP Screws.
1350.010
" Hex Bit. Use with power driver, or 1380 Hand Adaptor
10.60/c 11.25/c 12.15/c 16.35/c 16.90/c 15.45/c 6.00ea.
1360-010 .
Hand adapter use with Hex Bit for installing moderate quantities
BUTTON HEAD SCREW SECURITY KIT
10.00ea.
Latest improvement in Tamper Proof Screws. " Button Head" screws appear to be
round and are generally mistaken for rivet heads, yet can be easily installed and removed with special tool because the head is actually slightly out of round.
1322-006
1/2" Long, 06 type AB sheet metal screw
1133223:500066 2
1322408
1324.006
5/8" Long, N6 type AB sheet metal screw 3A" Long, 06 type AB sheet metal screw 1" Long, $16 type AB sheet metal screw
1323-008
5/8" Long, 08 type AB sheet metal screw
1324-008
3,4" Long. 98 type AB sheet metal screw 1" Long, 98 type AB sheet metal screw
1322-010
1/2" Long, # 10 type AB sheet metal screw
1323-010 .. 1324-010
3/4" Long, # 10 type AB sheet metal screw 1' Long, 010 type AB sheet metal screw
133226-00160
"L1Vot ng, 610 type AB sshheett metal screw
11333342--000160
1333-010 1334-010
11/"2" LLoonngg,, 0088--3322 mmaacchhiinnee ssccrreeww
v2 - Long. 10.32 machine screw
34" Long. 10.32 machine screw 1" Long, 10-32 machine screw
1330-500 . . Button Head Screw Security Kit, con. tains 1each tool for 116. 98. 010 machine screws. 100 pos. 06-32 x l/2". 50 pcs. 96-32 x 1", sheet metal screws 50 pcs. each 116 x5/8" , ". 1", 08 x5/8" , ". I", If 10 x 1/2 ". 3/4 "
VE-52
Tool for above " Button Head" Fasteners has V." Hex. Use with power driver or 1360 Hand Adaptor.
90.00ee.
1352-006 1352-008 1352-010
Button Head Tool for 06 screws Button Head Tool for 08 screws Button Head Tool for 010 screws
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
7.65/c 8.30/c 9.10/c 10.50/c 13.10/c 13.35/c 15.75/c 16.00/c 19.00/c 21.65/c 29.00/c 6.30/c 182 .8.900 / /c c
185..0 500 //cC
20.00ea. 20.00ea. 20.00ea,
C D)L H170 co S IS
CAMS
Standard Models in many sizes Modifications for special needs Custom Built for complete specials Facilities from sheet metal to finishing Quick Series: Various sizes and models of
racks and cases stocked for immediate delivery.
Accessories: panels, fans, blowers, slides, shelves,
drawers, outlet strips, chassis, hardware, etc.
Premier equals quality, good delivery and low prices.
MI
write for complete catalog and prices
PREMIER METAL PRODUCTS COMPANY
381 CANAL PLACE, BFONX, NEW YORK 10451 ( 212) 993-9200 16641 ORANGE WAY, FONTANA, CA. 92335 ( 714) 829-3089
VE -53
QUESTm/PACKTRONICS
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY PSI
7200 Huron River Drive Dexter, MI 48130 (313) 426-4646
OC -1SMALL VIDEO CAMERA CARRIER
Designed for video cameras up to 12" x6-1/4" x4". Built to give the ultimate protection with close- cell foam and rugged Cordura. The unit may be " docked" or attached onto the side of any Quest recorder case or carried on the shoulder.
QC- 1
LIST $43.95 (5521 x95)
BLACK 5560
GRAY 5561
NAVY 5562
VIDEO PACS
QUEST VZ-SERIES
The Quest VZ-Series bags are designed to carry avideo camera and
accessories. The VZ-M is asmall camera and accessory bag. Holds cables, batteries, and tapes in front pocket. The VZ-C is a video camera bag for Camcorders. Beta Movie and other medium size video cameras. Both models feature repositionable dividers, exterior
pocket, adjustable padded shoulder strap, and easy grip carry
handles. VZ-M: 7"H x10-1/2"L x7"D VZ-C: 9-1/4"H x14-1/4"L x 7"D.
LIST
VZ-M $69.95
VZ-C
99.95
(5534 x95) (5549 x95)
GRAY
5525 5549
NAVY BROWN
5526
5527
5550
5551
BLACK
5528 5552
QUEST COMBINATION BAG -- Fast Access Cable Port
One of Quest's latest developments, designed to accommodate both avideo recorder and video camera. Adjustable interior compartments separate camera, recorder and accessories. Quick- release " BonnieFasteners" to carry tripod. Double carrying handle on top with shoulder strap " Smart- Belt" is integrated for waist- belt carrying. Protective port for cable outlet. Features the " Fast Access" cable port on the side.
Video Combo. Bag
LIST $ 129.95
(5567 x95)
GRAY 5586
NAVY 5587
BLACK 5585
QUEST VIDEO RECORDER PACKS
Unparalleled protection for delicate electronics with the Quest Video Recorder Packs. Custom fit bags feature exterior pouch for accessories, protective port for cables, super- tough XYY zippers and the unique Quest dual strap system. VZ-U: 10-1/2"H x9-3/4"W x3-3/4"D VZ-P: 10-1/2"H x8-3/4"W x3-3/4"D VZ-J: 10"H x11"W x5"D
LIST
VZ-U $99.95
(RCA/Hitachi)
VZ-P
99.95
(Panasonic)
VZ-J
99.95
(JVC)
(5550 x95) (5550 x95) (5550 x95)
GRAY NAVY BROWN BLACK
5541
5542
5543
5544
5545 5546
5547
5548
5534 5535
5533
VE-54
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
QUEST VZ-SERIES
GUEST COMBINATION BAG
QUEST VIDEO RECORDER PACKS
QUEST' /PACKTRONICS
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY PSI
7200 Huron River Drive Dexter, MI 48130 (313) 426-4646
QUEST DUFFEL BAG
Perfect for on- location shooting, or anytime you need to carry large and numerous items. The Quest Duffel Bag is acavernous 28-1/2'L x 14-1/2'W x 11'D, and carries light stands, tripods and other accessories with ease. Made of super- touch Cordura. Zippered end pockets.
LIST Duffel $ 159.95 Bag
(5779 x95)
NAVY 5731
BLACK 5730
VIDEO PACS/ ACCESSORIES
QUEST DUFFEL BAG
VCR RENTAL CASE
The Quest VCR Rental Case is made with tough, weather- proofed Cordura nylon, with layers of thick padding underneath. This pack holds even the largest table- top Beta of VHS VCR's portable VCR's with AC adaptor or tuner, or disc players. 21-1/2'L x 17-1/2'W x 8-1/2'D.
LIST VCR Rental $89.95
(5545 x00)
NAVY 5529
BLACK 5530
VCR RENTAL CASE
QUEST PORTABLE TYPEWRITER/COMPUTER CASE
Custom fit cases for popular personal typewriters and small portable computers. Fits the Brother Personal Typewriters and Canon Typestar Typewriter, TRS-100 and Epson portable computers. Exterior material from super-touch Cordura nylon, with foam padding for " shock" protection. Convenient carrying handles.
Brother Personal Canon
Typestar
LIST $25.95
(81312 x95) (8C12 x95)
BLACK 5698B
5698C
BURGUNDY 5699B
5699C
GUEST PORTABLE TYPEWRITER/COMPUTER
CASE
QUEST ATTACHE CASE
Soft sided designer attache for the stylish professional. Spacious interior features pockets for hand-held computers, pens, etc. Zipped side- pocket for papers and top- loading compartment for those last minute items.
Attache
LIST $99.95
(5752 x95)
BROWN 5711
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
QUEST ATTACHE CASE VE-55
SMITH-VICTOR
27740 Hopkins Ave. Valencia, CA 91355 (805) 257-4447
VCR BAG
Camera cable access
Change cassette and record
Adjustable back straps
VCR BAG
It's in the bag! A tough bag designed especially to protect your video recorder and give you easy access.
The bag is custom designed in three styles to give acustom fit to most major brands of VCRs and accessories. Engineered so you can change cassettes and record without the VCR ever leaving the bag. There are separate compartments for an extra cassette, stick battery and cable storage. Use as a " backpack" or with the shoulder strap for handsoff portability.
Ballistic Nylon ( the same fabric used in bullet-proof vests) is stitched and double stitched to create ahandsome, almost indestructible bag that is water resistant and cleans easily. Durable closed cell foam padding ( its extra density providing extra protection) surrounds the VCR on all sides. Each pocket has aspecially designed cap cover that sheds moisture and dirt. Generous Velcro® ciosures and heavyduty hardware combine with the functional styling to make storing and handling your VCR abreeze.
A first class bag with first class features offered at a reasonable price, Smith-Victor Fotima VCR bags come in three models. Get the best value-- no other VCR bag on the market does the job better.
·Separate compartments for recorder, cassette, stick battery and cables
·Camera cable access ·Change cassette without removing VCR from bag ·Adjustable back straps ·Adjustable removable padded shoulder strap ·Weather resistant cap covers with Velcro® closure strips ·Ballistic Nylon fabric ·Durable, extra dense, closed cell foam padding
·Quick release buckle and heavy-duty zippers with functional oversized pull-tabs on recorder compartment
·Hi- impact plastic feet ·Smith-Victor warranty against defective materials and
workmanship ·Available in Brick Red, Silver Grey, Safari Green, Smoke
Grey, or Blue with black trim
Model VCR 821
Interior dimensions: 93/4"long, 33/4"wide, 10" high. Fits
PanasorÊc PV 5500 and similar designs by other
manufacturers.
$69.95
Model VCR 822
Interior dimensions: 10-3/4" long, 4-1/2" wide, 10-1/8"
high. Fits RCA VGP 170 and similar designs by other manu-
facturers.
$74.95
Model VCR 823
Interior dimensions: 9" long, 3-3/4" wide, 12-1/8" high.
Fits Sony SL 2000 Beta Portable and similar designs by
other manufacturers. Utilizes shoulder strap furnished with
recorder.
$64.95
VE -56
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
S
INTI "Y
Sony Drive
Park Ridge, NJ 07656
Sony Video Communications ( 201) 930-1000
MODULAR VIDEO CONSOLE SYSTEM
LI
SU- 501 SU- 502
SU- 511/512/ 513/514
SU -501 VIDEO CONSOLE
A special console ideally suited for use in offices, showrooms or
reception areas. The upper section of the unit contains a slide- out
equipment shelf with a locking door that disappears into the console
when open. The lower section is aroomy, locking drawer that can be
used to store tapes or accessories.
$400.00
SU -502 VIDEO CONSOLE
A companion unit to the SU -501 console that has exactly the same
features plus an elevated pedestal large enough to accommodate up to
19" monitors.
$500.00
SU -511/512/513/514
An incredibly versatile system of custom designed video consoles for
users of Sony Type 5 U-matic and other video equipment. The completely modular EIA standard system can be assembled in countless different configurations to suit individual requirements. It's aK- D ( knockdown) design that assembles easily in minutes and can easily be expanded via convenient add-on options.
SU -511 SU -512
SU -513 SU -514
$435.00 130.00
330.00 120.00
MODULAR CONSOLE COMPONENTS
SU -511 Basic Single Bay Console
Basic console: 2side panels with vents ( dark grey), 1back panel with
vents and handgrips ( black), 1top panel ( light grey), 2feet ( black), 3
structural members, 1blank panel 31 /2 "x19" ( dark grey), 1blank panel
10 1 /2 "x19" ( dark grey)
$435.00
SU -512 Single Bay Table
Single Table: 2slide supports ( dark grey), 1padded front piece, 19"
wide, with simulated leather covering ( dark brown)
$130.00
SU -513 Single Bay Add- On Module
Add- On Module: 1center panel ( light grey), 1back panel with vents and handgrips ( black), 1top panel ( light grey), 1foot ( black), 1blank panel 3V2 " x 19" ( dark grey), 1blank panel 10 1 /2 "x 19" ( dark grey)
$330.00
SU -514 Single Bay Add- On Table
Add- on- table: 1center support ( dark grey), 1padded front piece, 19"
wide, with simulated leather covering ( dark brown)
$120.00
SU -515 Twin Bay Table
2 side supports ( dark grey), 1padded front piece 38" wide, with
simulated leather covering ( dark brown), 38" wide table panel with cut
out for RM-440 ( light grey), mounting hardware included
$210.00
RMM-501 Type 5 Mounting Kit
Hardware kit for mounting Type 5U-matic units. Kit includes: Pair of
3- section ball bearing steel chassis slides; chassis slide mounting
hardware; chassis slide mounting adaptors for non- Sony Consoles;
pair of rack handle brackets; filler strip; necessary screws
$200.00
RM-502 Panel for RM-500/RM-V5
2 unit mounting panel with cut-out for either RM-500 or RM-V5;
screws included
$40.00
RMM-503 Mounting Brackets for RM-580
Pair of brackets to rack mount RM-580; screws included
$35.00
RMM-504 Panel for RM-440
4unit mounting panel with cut-out for RM-440; screws included$45.00
RMM-505 Mounting Brackets for RM-550 and RM-V5
Brackets for side- by- side rack mounting of RM-550 and RM-V5 $30.00
RMM-506 Mounting Bracket for SLO-383
5unit bracket to rack mount SLO-183
$140.00
BLP-501 Unit Blank Panel
13 /4 "x19" Light grey filler panel with predrilled mounting holes $20.00
BLP-502 2 Unit Blank Panel
31 /2 "x19" Light grey filler panel with predrilled mounting holes $23.1:10
BLP-503 3 Unit Blank Panel
514" x19" Light grey filler panel with predrilled mounting holes $25.01:1
BLP-504 1Unit Padded Panel
13 /4 "x19" foam padded panel with simulated leather PVC covering
and predrilled mounting holes
$35.00
BLP-505 2 Unit Padded Panel
3½" x19" foam padded panel with simulated leather PVC covering
and predrilled mounting holes
$40.00
BLP-506 Mounting Conversation Kit
Special hardware to modify standard 5 unit height upper console
section to accept 6unit height equipment
$40.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -57
SONY".
Sony Video Communications
Sony Drive Park Ridge, NJ 07656
(201) 930-1000
MODULAR VIDEO CONSOLE SYSTEM
20,'."
SU -511 Basic Single Bay Console
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SU-512 Single Bay Table
SU -513 Single Bay Add- On Module (2 units are illustrated)
SU -514 Single Bay Add-On Table
e g
----,''
,
SU -511 Basic Single Bay Console Basic console 2side panels with vents (dark grey). 1back petrel with vents and handgrips (black), 1top panel (light grey). 2feet (black), 3structural members. 1blank panel 31/:" x19" (dark grey). 1blank panel 10 1/2 "x19" (dark grey)
SU -512 Single Bay Table Single Table 2side supports (dark grey). 1padded front piece, 19" wide, with simulated leather covering (dark brown)
SU -513 Single Bay Add- On Modulo Add- On Module 1center panel (light grey), 1back panel with vents and handgnps (black). 1top panel (light grey), 1loot (black), 1blank Panel 31/2 "X19" (dark grey). 1blank panel 10 1/2 "x19" (dark grey)
t
à,
SU -514 Single Bay Add- On Table Add- on- table 1center support (dark grey). 1padded front piece. 19 - wide. with simulated leather covering (dark brown)
SU -515 Twin Bay Table
-- 2side supports (dark grey). 1padded
front pace 38" wide. with simulated
r
leather covering (dark brown), 38" wide table panel with cut out for RM-440 (light
grey). mounting hardware included
RMM-504 Panel tor RIA -440 4 unit mounting panel wily cut-out for RM-440, screws included
..,....' ---,.
RUM- SOB Mounting (-rackets for RSA- 550 A RM-V5 Brackets for side- by-side rack mounting of RM-550 and AM- VS (
BLP-56 I1Unit Blank Panel I : " x 19" Light grey filler oanel with predrilled mounting holes
SIP- 502 2UnN Blank Panel 31/2"x 19" Light grey fiDer panel with predrilled mounting holeS
Ble-1503 1Unit Blank Panel 51 /2 "x19" Light grey filler panel with
predrilled mounting holes
S1LP-5041 Unit Padded Panel 1 /2 " x 19 " foam padded panel with
simulated leather PVC covering and pednued mounting holes
il
IR.P-505 2Unit Padded Panel
31 /2 - x 19" foam padded panel with
simulated leather PVC covering and
predrilled mounting holes
o o o ii
e
BLP- SOS Mounting
,- Conversion Klt
';'1 Special hardware to
modify standard 5und
/
height upper console
section to accept 6unit
height equipment
RMM-501 Type 5
Mounting Klt
I
Hardware Vot for mount-
'tog Type 5U-mate
--r
units Kit includes Pair of 3- section ball bear-
ing steel chassis shdes
chassis slide mounting
hardware. chassis slide
mounting adaptes for
:4 .
non- Sony Consoles.
pan of rack handle
brackets, filler strip.
necessary screws
N
AM- 502 Panel for RM-50011VM-V5
.
2unit mounting panei with cut-out for
either RM-500 or RM-V5. screws included
.
RMM- 503 Mounting Brackets for RIA -580 Pair of brackets to rack mount RM-580. screws included
·
VE-58
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SOUNDOLIER
A DIVISION OF
AMERICAN TRADING & PRODUCTION CORP.
9380 Watson Ind. Park
St. Louis, MO 63126
(314) 962-9870
I
CABINETS
Cabinet Relay Racks400
Series
SERIES 100 cabinet relay racks are designed for standard 19" ( 4£33mm) panels. Constructed of 16 ga. CRS throughout. Rear door lock and low profile handle included. Panel mounting angles are tapped to accept 10-32 pan head screws included. Louvers are internal type for improved ventilation. Iron phosphate coated for rust prevention and paint adhesion. Knockouts located at rear top and bottom. If no color is specified, Soundolier light satin beige will be furnished. Complete list of colors available. Shipped knocked down. Hardware and instructions included.
Options:
Series 110 Front Door -- mounted on aridged continuous hinge. May be ordered with or without cabinet. See specification chart for model numbers.
Series PT Panel Trim -- stainless steel trim for covering panel mounting hardware. Complete with fasteners. Specify model PT- 36, PT- 42, PT- 61, PT- 70 or PT- 77.
Transmitter Racks
SERIES 200 Transmitter Racks are designed to mount standard 19" (483mm) panels. Constructed of 16 ga. CRS throughout. Front and rear door handles and locks provided ( locks keyed differently for security). Modern internal louvers for improved ventilation. The 11 ga. panel mounting angles are tapped for 10-32 screws ( included) and are adjustable to any distance from front to rear. Panel angles are mounted to three sturdy channel slides on each side. Knockouts are located at rear top and bottom. If no color is specified, Soundolier light satin beige will be furnished. Complete list of colors available. Shipped knocked down. Hardware and instructions included.
Optional Accessories for Series 100 and 200 TMC-10 Television monitor adaptor-- Provides
mounting space. TMC-15 Television monitor adaptor-- Provides
mounting space.
10-5/8" 15-7/8"
vertical vertical
Sectional Wall Mounting Cabinets
SERIES 300 Sectional Wall Cabinets are designed for standard 19" (483mm) rack panels. Entire cabinet is constructed of 16 ga. CRS. Back and front sections are one piece construction with angle braces at each corner. All seams and miters are electric welded and ground smooth. Center cabinet is strengthened with 16 ga. braces at each corner. Three larger models have 11 ga. mounting supports on back section. Removable pin hinges for easy assembly and hinges are bolted to cabinet section for greater strength. Knockouts and internal louvers are two Soundolier exclusives. Center section and rear section are secured with locking rods and alignment pins. Front section is complete with cylinder lock. All models have tapped panel mounting rails and 10-32 pan head screws for panel mounting. If no color is
specified, Soundolier light satin beige will be furnished. Complete list of colors available. Shipped completely assembled.
Desk Top Cabinet
SERIES 400 desk top cabinets are completely assembled and constructed from 16 ga. CRS throughout. Each unit is equipped with a locking rear door which is mounted on sturdy slip joint hinges. Internal louvers and recessed panel angles give this compact cabinet a "clean look." The panel mounting angles are tapped for 10-32 screws. Designed to mount most Soundolier cabinet accessories. If no color is specified, Soundolier light satin beige will be furnished. Complete list of colors available.
Series 300
SERIES 100
MODEL NO.
100-36
100-42
100-61
10070
100-77
WIDTH
22% (568mm)
22% (568mm)
22% (568mm)
22% (568mm)
2234 (568mm)
Series 100
Series 200
HEIGHT
41 1/ 26(1043mm)
46,',6 (1176mm)
65%6" (1655mm)
74 ,6" (1888mm)
81Y,," (2065mm)
DEPTH
18 1,4" (470mm)
18Y2" (470mm)
18112" (470mm)
18 1h" (470mm)
18112" (470mm)
PANEL SPACE
36 ,·6"
(938mm)
42346 (1072mm)
61'h6" (1561mm)
70Y16 " (1783mm)
77346 (1961mm)
OPTIONAL FRONT DOOR 110-36
110-42
110-61
110-70
110-77
SERIES 200
MODEL NO.
WIDTH
WA20:1-36
2234" (568mm)
WA200-42
22%" (568mm)
WA200-6I
22%' (568mm)
WA2C0-70
2234" 1568mm)
WA200-77
22318" (568mm(
HEIGHT
411/16" (1043mm)
46Y,6 (1176mm)
6544 (1662mm)
74y,6" (1888mm)
81;',6" 12065mm)
DEPTH
18(12" (470mm)
18 1h" (470mm)
18 1h" (470mm)
18 1h" (470mm)
18)12" (470mm)
PANEL SPACE 361(4 4" (938mm)
42(4 6" (1072mm)
1(1(1,," (1561mm)
70(44" (1783mm)
773/14" (1961mm)
SERIES 300
MODEL NO
WIDTH
300-17 (524mm)
300-21
2°Y11 "
(524mm)
300-26 (522°4%m.m. )
300-28 300-42
(522Ce4%m"m) (522%4m1"m)
300-61 (522Ih4m1"m)
HEIGHT
(5220i(m"m)
24" (610mm)
(724"3m4"m) 31"
(787mm) 45"
(1143mm)
6414 " i1632mm)
REAR SECTION DEPTH
4W1,12'
(114mm)
41/2" (114mm)
4)12" (114mm)
4(12" (114mm)
4(4" (114mm)
4'h" (114mm)
CENTER SECTION DEPTH
11' (279mm)
11" (279mm)
11" (279mm)
11" (279mm)
11' (279mm)
11" (279mm)
FRONT SECTION DEPTH
7 151mm)
7' (51mm)
2" (51mm
2" (51mm)
7' (51mm)
2" (51mm)
PANEL SPACE
IN
(446mm)
21 1/16 " (53.5mm)
21( 6. (668mm)
28 1/ 24 ' (713mm) ,
42 1/ 26" .1068mm)
61(46" ,1557mm)
SERIES 400
MODEL
WIDTH
400-12
22Y," 1565mm
400-17
22 1/ 2" (565mm)
400-24
22%.. 1565mm)
400-31
22 1/ 2" (565mm)
HEIGHT
15 1/2" (394mm)
20(4" (527mm)
273'," (705mm)
343'." 883mm)
DEPTH
15%" (391mm)
1534" (391mm)
1534" (391mm)
1534" (391mm)
PANEL SPACE
12(4" (314mm)
17%" (448mm)
24%" (625mm)
34" 1803mm)
NOTE: ALL PRICES FOB SHIPPING POINT
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-59
SOUNDOLIER
A DIVISION OF AMERICAN TRADING & PRODUCTION CORP.
9380 Watson Industrial Park St. Louis, MO 63126 (314) 962-9870 TWX 910-760-1650
Series 500 Multi Racks
SERIES 500 Multi Racks are designed for standard 19" 14£33mm) rack panels and for maximum flexibility. Multi Racks can be readily joined together and because of its open side construction, wiring is simple and convenient. Each basic rack is supplied with arear door complete with cylinder lock and low profile handle and slip-jointed hinges. Panel mounting rails are adjustable, manufactured of 11 ga. CRS and tapped for 10-32 screws. Construction of all other parts is 16 ga. CRS. Combination knockouts are located on the top, bottom and rear flanges. To facilitate cable entry, three 2-13/16" ( 71mm) diameter holes are located toward the rear of the base of the rack.
Multi Racks are shipped welded and assembled. All metal surfaces receive an iron phosphate coating prior to finishing for rust prevention and maximum paint adhesion. If no color is specified, Soundolier light satin beige will be furnished. (Complete list of colors available)
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES: SERIES 510 Front doors are easily field installed with either right or left hand hinging. The basic rack is furnished with a series of small knockouts on each side of the front return. These knockouts are easily removed and will accept the 10-32 self tapping screws furnished with the door. Complete with continuous piano hinge, lock and low profile handle.
SERIES 230 Mounting rails-- While each basic rack is supplied with one set of mounting rails, extra sets are available at customer's option.
SERIES 540 Side panels-- One pair of side panels is required to close either asingle basic rack or multiple racks attached. The side panels install easily by hooking them over internal side channels in the basic rack.
SERIES 502 Multi racks are basically the same as Series 500 multi racks but are 25-1/2" ( 648mm) deep for extra equipment area. TMC-10 Television monitor adaptor -- Provides 10-5/8" vertical mounting space. TMC-15 Television monitor adaptor-- Provides 15-7/8" vertical mounting space.
SERIES 500
Series WA 100 Cabinet Relay Racks -- Welded Construction
SERIES WA 100 Cabinet relay racks are constructed of 16 ga. CRS and are completely welded for additional strength and neater appearance. The panel mounting angles are tapped for 10-32 screws. The rear door is attached by slip-jointed hinges and includes lock and low profile handle. The entire cabinet receives an iron phosphate coating for rust prevention and excellent paint adhesion. If no color is specified, Soundolier Satin Beige will be furnished. Complete list of colors available.
SERIES WA100
CABINETS
MODEL NO.
500-61
DESCRIPTION BASIC RACK*
50261
BASIC RACK*
500-70
BASIC RACK*
502-70
BASIC RACK*
500-77
BASIC RACK*
502-77
BASIC RACK'
510-61 1110-611
510-70 1110-701
510-77 (110-771
530-61 (230-61-T)
530-70 1230-70-11
530-77
[230- 77- TI
FRONT DOOR FRONT DOOR FRONT DOOR MID. RAILSMTG RAILS** MID RAILS-
540-61
SIDE PANELS
542-61
SIDE PANELS
540-70
SIDE PANELS
542-70
SIDE PANELS
54077
SIDE PANELS
542-77
SIDE PANELS
WIDTH
(526283m`"m)
(526273;m6m" ) 22%
(568mm)
(5n673'm16m" )
(526283mem)
(526e7m16m)
21 34'
(540mm) 2134"
(540mm) 21y,"
(540mm)
-
-
-
1831" (460mm)
(62358%m1"m) 18K,"
(460mm)
(6235814m"m)
1831" (460mm)
(_62358Wmm.)
HEIGHT
65%16 (1665mm)
(16656%56m"m)
74%6 (1883mm)
74(4o
(1883mm)
81Y,6" (2065mm)
81 %6" (2065mm)
6334" (1607mm)
72 1/16" (1830mm)
79Y,6" (20)8mm)
61V (1556mm)
70" (1778mm)
77" (1956mm)
65y,6" (1E62mm)
(16656%26m"m)
74%" (1883mm)
7431" (1883mm)
81 14" (2061mm)
8134" (2061mm)
DEPTH 18 1k" (470mm)
25w
(648mm) 1831"
(470mm) (62458(4m"m)
11331" (470mm)
25" (648mm)
1" (25mm)
1" (25mm)
1" (25mm)
-
-
%" (16mm)
W. (16mm)
%' (16mm)
W. (16mm)
%' (16mm)
Ki. (16mm)
PANEL SPACE 61y,6" (1561mm) 6B',' (1561mm)
me
(1783mm)
me
(1783mm) 77.346"
(1961mm) 77%6"
(1961mm) -
-
"BASIC RACK INCLUDES REAR DOOR AND 1PAIR TAPPED ADJUSTABLE MOUNTING RAILS - ADDITIONAL MOUNTING RAILS ARE OPTIONAL
MOOEL NO.
WA100-36
WA100-42
WA100-61
WA100-70
WA100-77
WIDTH
22(4" (568mm)
2234" (568mm)
2234" (568mm)
2231" (568mm)
2231," (568mm)
HEIGHT 41 1/16" (1041mm)
46%6 (1176mm)
653;6' (1665mm)
74y,6" (1888mm)
81%6" (2065mm)
DEPTH 18 ,k" (470mm) 18 1b" (470mm) 1831" (470mm) 1831" (470mm)
1831" (470mm)
PANEL SPACE 36 1(46" (938mm)
42%6" (1072mm)
617/16" (1561mm)
70(46' (1783mm)
77%6" (1961mm)
Series 200 Transmitter Racks
SERIES 200 Transmitter racks are designed to mount standard 19" (483mm) panels. Constructed of 16 ga. CRS throughout. Front and rear door handles and locks provided ( locks keyed different for security). Modern internal louvers for improved ventilation. The 11 ga. panel mounting angles are tapped for 10-32 screws ( included) and are adjustable to any distance from front to rear. Panel angles are mounted to three sturdy channel slides on each side. Knockouts are located at rear top and bottom. If no color is specified, Soundolier Satin Beige will be furnished. Shipped knocked down. Hardware and instructions included. Complete list of colors available.
MODEL NO.
200-36 TOO-42 200-61 200.70 200-77
WIDTH
2231" (568mm)
2231" (568mm)
2231 (568mm)
2231" (568mm)
223(3" (568mm)
HEIGHT 41 1/,6" (1043mm)
463;6" (1176mm)
65%6 (1665mm)
74y,6" (1888mm)
81V,6" (2065mm)
DEPTH
1831" (470mm)
1831" (470mm)
1831" (470mm)
1831" (470mm)
1834" (470mm)
PANEL SPACE 36'%' (938mm) 42%6" (1072mm) 6V/16" (1561mm) 70%6" (1783mm)
7 R16"
(1961mm)
VE -60
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SOUNDOLIER
A DIVISION OF AMERICAN TRADING & PRODUCTION CORP.
9380 Watson Industrial Park St. Louis, MO 63126 (314) 962-9870
Phono Drawers PD Series phono drawers are constructed of 16 gauge CRS and designed to mount in standard 19" ( 483mm) rack panel space. The chassis is mounted on slides with nylon bearing rollers. The chassis is complete with 1/4" ( 6mm) thick walnut grain hardboard base. Partial and full drawer extension models are available. Mounting hardware is supplied. Finish is Satin Beige. Other colors are available.
FP Series phono drawers are the same as the PD series but are designed with aflush appearance to complement our select series cabinets. Slide has atilt- up action for removal of chassis. Two standard colors are offered: Royal Blue (No. 35) or Satin Beige ( No. 31). Suffix model number with color number. Other colors are available.
Storage Drawers SD Series storage drawers are ideal for tapes, records, microphones and other accessories. Constructed in 16 gauge CRS and designed for standard 19" ( 483mm) rack panel space. Complete with nylon bearing rollers. Available in a choice of panel space sizes, overall depth and either partial or full drawer extension. Mounting hardware is supplied. Finish is Satin Beige. Other colors are available.
FP Series storage drawers are the same as the SD series but are designed with aflush appearance to complement our select series cabinets. Slide has a tilt- up action for removal of drawer. Two standard colors are offered: Royal Blue ( No. 35) or Satin Beige ( No. 31). Suffix model number with color number. Other colors are available.
Blank Panels and Vent Panels S19 Series panels are constructed of 1/16" ( 2mm) CRS. Two sides of the panel are formed for rigidity. The panel mount holes are oblong for adjustment and neater appearance. Finish is Satin Beige. Other colors are available.
S219 Series panels are same as S19 and will fit any Soundolier cabinet but they are designed to maintain the flush appearance of select series cabinets. Two standard colors are offered: Royal Blue ( No. 35) or Satin Beige ( No. 31). Suffix model number with color number. Other colors are available.
A19 Series panels are constructed of 1/8" ( 3mm) aluminum. Panel mount holes are oblong for adjustment and neater appearance. Panels are painted on one side. Finish is Satin Beige. Other colors are available.
SVP19 Series vent panels are constructed of 22 gauge perforated CRS. Two sides are formed for rigidity. Panel mount holes are oblong for adjustment and neater appearance. Finish is Satin Beige. Other colors are available.
SVP219 Series are same as SVP19 and will fit any Soundolier cabinet but they are designed to maintain the flush appearance of select series cabinets. Two standard colors are offered: Royal Blue ( No. 35) or Satin Beige ( No. 31). Suffix model number with color number. Other colors are available.
CABINET ACCESSORIES
PD/FP SERIES
10011 P010111 P010.1116
Pll 101/6F,
P01014 PO10-146
X04,4SEP
PAtal SPACE 101F(267mm)
10V(267mm)
to+î(267..)
101}-(267mnu
10 8-1267mm/ 108i1267mml
KILN 16%1417mm)
16,»1417mm)
16%,-017mml
14%-136641m)
14%13/55mmi 14%1366mm)
MAIER EXTENSOR 12-1305mml 161406mm)
161406mml 10-1254mml 14 -(356mml
141356mml
SD/FP SERIES PANELS
MODEL 507 14 007 145 $07 145FP $07·18 007.186 SO7 11:6FP 5010.14 S01014S S010145EP
soickni
811101115 S010-11.6FP
PANEL SPACE
r(178mm ) r(178mm)
neamm ) 7-1178mm) 7-1178/nm) 7'1178mm) 101}1267mm)
1E4-1267mm)
10,L-1267 .mI 1014-(267mm1 101}1267mml 10Xi1267mm)
SEPTH
le/a -1366mm) 14'%-i366mm)
11.352-1366mm) 16%-(417mml 164(417mm) 164),,-(417mm) 14%"13S6mnu 14 .44 -1366mm) WIM -136X/mm) 16%1417mm) 16%1417mm) 16%-M17mm)
DRAWER EXTENSOR 10-1254mm) 14-1356mm) 14-13564141) 121335mm) 161406mm) 16-14C6mml 10-1254mm) 14-(356mml 14-1356mm) 12-(305mm) 16-14C6mm) 16-140Smm)
PANEL SPACE ILL-144mml 311-18944m) 5,4-033mm) 7-078mml
84L-1222mm) 10S-1267mm) 121,-1311mm) 1413564,ml 154/1400mml 17 S1 -144541 .1 1914-1489mm) 21 -1S33mml 24S-1622mml 281711mrn)
oie SERIES
CRS S19-1 S1S3 S19- S SIS-7 519-8 SISIO
sien
S19-14 519-15
S19-17 S1S19 S19-21
_
3219 SERIES
CRS 5219-1 $219-3 0219-5 $219-7 0219-8 $219-10 $219-12 $219-14 $219.1S $219-17 5219.19 0219-21 S219-24 $219-28
All SERIES ALUMINUM AIS) A19-3 A145 A19.7 A19-8 A19.10 A19-12 A19-14
A19-15
itio.17
A1S19 A19.21
-
SAM SERIES VENT SVP19-1 $VP19-3 SVP19-5 SVP19-7 SVP1941 SVP1940 SVP19-12
-
-
-
507211 SERIES VENT SVP219-1 SVP219-3 SVP219-5 $vP219-7 SVP21941 SVP219-10 51/P219-12
-
-
-
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -61
SOUNDOLIER
A DIVISION OF AMERICAN TRADING & PRODUCTION CORP.
9380 Watson Industrial Park St. Louis, MO 63126 (314) 962-9870
AC Power Panels
Model ACR-193 is an AC master power panel for standard 19" (483mm) rack mounting requiring only 3-1/2" ( 89mm) of vertical panel space. Panel is constructed of 16 gauge CRS and standard color is Soundolier Satin Beige ( No. 31). Complete list of colors available. The main switch is aDPST rocker type and switches both sides of the power line. A red jewel, neon pilot lite indicates whether AC power is on or off. Eight outlets are provided, six controlled by main switch and two non- switched outlets. Each outlet is grounded. A 15 amp fuse is provided. Back of panel has a7/8" ( 22mm) hole which accepts 1/2" ( 13mm) conduit fittings.
Model ACK-193 is identical to ACR-193 except akey switch is used for security. Two keys are provided.
Model ACR-293 and ACK-293 are the same as those above except they have areturn on all four sides to maintain flush appearance of Soundolier select series cabinets.
PANEL RATING SWITCH RATING OUTLETS SWITCHED OUTLETS UNSWITCHED PILOT LITE PANEL SIZE
SPECIFICATIONS ACR-I93/293 15 AMPS 15 AMPS 6 2 YES
19 x3Y, ( 483 x89mm)
ACE- I93/293 15 AMPS 15 AMPS 6 2 YES
18 x3)/2 1483 x89mm)
CABINET ACCESSORIES
ACS- 1
CT1020
ACR-193 Model ACS- 1is an AC Power Strip assembly designed for Soundolier equipment cabinets. This versatile unit provides six UL listed duplex outlets with grounded UL listed power cord. When used in conjunction with power panels ( listed above), acomplete AC Power System can be assembled for each cabinet.
Roller Truck
Model CT1020 roller truck is constructed of 16 gauge CRS and is designed for Soundolier's 100, 200, WA100 and WA200 series cabinets only. Finish is Satin Beige. Complete list of colors available. The roller truck is complete with four 3" ( 76mm) ball bearing casters. Two casters are the rigid type and two are the swivel type. The swivel casters are also the locking type. The total load capacity is 400 lbs (181kg). Dimensions- 24-13/16" ( 630mm) x21" ( 533mm).
5Channel Monitor Panels
Model MVX-193 monitor panel for standard 19" ( 483mm) rack mounting requiring only 3-1/2" ( f39mm) of vertical panel space. Panel is constructed of 16 gauge CRS and standard color is Soundolier Satin Beige ( No. 31). Complete list of colors available. Unit can be used with any multi- channel sound system. It provides aural and visual monitoring with the turn of a switch. A double pole, six position switch is wired to supply five program channels with asixth "off" position. Each channel connects to two screw terminals on the rear of the panel. A 70 volt or 25 volt line may be monitored. A 3" (76mm) speaker is used for aural monitoring connected through a potentiometer for level selection. Potentiometer and channel selector are on ablack plate with white nomenclature. Speaker grille is slightly raised. The VU meter has along life thermoplastic case. The meter movement is amoving coil design and has atype A meter scale.
Model MVX-293 is identical to MVX-193 except it has a return on all four sides to maintain flush appearance of Select Series cabinets and Soundolier Royal Blue ( No. 35) is offered as asecond standard color.
Model MX- 193 is identical to MVX-193 except the VU meter is not provided.
Model MX- 293 is identical to MVX-293 except the VU meter is not provided.
Model MVX-195 is identical to the MVX-193 except a high compliance Soundolier 4" ( 102mm) FC104 speaker is used for better aural monitoring. A high quality Soundolier HT-82 line transformer is also used. Panel height is 5-1/4" ( 133mm).
Model MVX-295 is identical with the MVX-293 except a high compliance Soundolier 4" ( 102mm) FC104 speaker is used for better aural monitoring. A high quality Soundolier HT-82 line transformer is also used. Panel height is 5-1/4" ( 133mm).
Model MVX-1910 is identical to MVX-193 except the panel is 10-1/2" (267mm) high and the monitor speaker is an 8" ( 203mm) unit.
Model MVX-2910 is identical to MVX-293 except the panel is 10-1/2" (267mm) high and the monitor speaker is an 8" ( 203mm) unit.
Model MX- 1910 is identical to MVX-1910 except aVU meter is not provided.
Model MX- 2910 is identical to MVX-2910 except aVU meter is not provided.
"11mu
.1
I
MVX-193
MX- 193
MVX-1910
MX- 1910
VE-62
MONITOR PANELS CHANNELS MONITOR VOLUME CONTROL LOUDSPEAKER SIZE VU METER METER ADJUST PANEL SIZE PANEL MATERIAL TERMINALS
MVX-I93/293 5
YES 3 ( 76mml
YES YES '9' x3,0483 x89mm) CRS SCREW
SPECIFICATIONS
MX- I93/293
MVX-I95/295
MVX-I910/2910
MX- I910/2910
5
5
5
5
YES
YES
YES
YES
3(76mm)
4002mm)
8I203mm)
81203mm)
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
19 x3)/2 (483 x89mm) IT x5)41483 x133m,) 19 x10p483 x267mm) 19 x10)/21483 x267mm)
CRS
CRS
CRS
CRS
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
SCREW
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SOUNDOLIER
A DIVISION OF AMERICAN TRADING & PRODUCTION CORP.
9380 Watson Industrial Park St. Louis, MO 63126 (314) 962-9870
AWR-3/AWR-5S Series Amplifier Wall Cabinets
AWR-3/AWR-5 Series is designed as an amplifier wall cabinet for standard 19" ( 483mm) panel mounting space of 3-1/2" ( 89mm) ( 5-1/4" or 133mm for AWR-5S) on atiltout door/chassis assembly. Mounting holes are EIA standard. On the right side of the chassis is blank panel
area 1-1/2" ( 38mm) x5" ( 127mm) 6-3/4" or 171mm for
AWR-5S) where additional switches may be mounted.* The front door and the door frame are constructed of 14
gauge CRS. Keylock is flush and comes with two keys.
Door is attached to frame with apiano hinge. Door stops are welded on the door frame preventing the door from
closing improperly. Backbox is constructed of 16 gauge CRS with 7knockouts on bottom panel. Tampering is prevented by attaching door frame to backbox internally.
Shipped complete, finished inside and out with Soundolier Satin Beige. Other colors are available.
MODEL AWR-3 AWR-35 AWR-3-4 AWR-5S
TYPE RECESSED SURFACE RECESSED SURFACE
WIDTH
r
(559mm)
24 ,43" (616mm)
22" (559mm)
24 ,43" (616mm)
HEIGHT
16'4, 6" (408mm)
18%" (484mm)
16 14,6 (408mm)
18 ,44" (464mm)
DEPTH
5. 6. (141mm)
5" (150mm)
4" (102mm)
7% (193mm)
PANEL SPACE 3,4,
(99mm) 4"
(89mm)
(89mm) 5Y,'
(133mm)
NOTE: AWR-3-4 Does not contain switch panel area
CABINETS Et ACCESSORIES
.
40*
Blank Panel
area
1-1/2" ( 38mm) x5" ( 127mm) for mounting
additional controls
Select Series Louvered Panels
These louvered panels are designed to replace solid panels in select series cabinets. Top panels are available for racks, consoles and turrets. Back panels are available for turrets
only, and side panels are available for racks only. Nine internal louvers constitute aset of louvers. There are 2or 4 sets of louvers per panel, depending on panel size.
Wirlot.lenot.. 1.1.101·001/e.
401·OMII.WIX »········.······*
«mow...* mareemadioi
woo.* ······*....w
S219- 15L
S219-8L
Shelf Assembly Model SH19-7 shelf assembly is constructed of 16 gauge CRS and is easily mounted to the panel mount rails of all standard 19" ( 483mm) racks. Requires 7" ( 178mm) of panel space. Ideal for mounting equipment that does not have an attached rack mount panel. Shelf area dimensions -- 17-1/2" ( 445mm) x 14" ( 356mm) x7" ( 178mm) high. Finish is Satin Beige. Other colors are available.
Select Series Casters CS-8PR Swivel casters must be used with select series racks and consoles which have caster plates ready to mount CS-8PR casters. Each CS-8PR includes 2 swivel casters. An individual rack or console requires 4casters or two CS-8PRs. Adjoining cabinets require only 2 casters lone CS-8PRI at juncture.
DK19-3 Rack Mounted Writing Surface A hard board laminated writing or component surface to fit our standard 19" ( 483mm) 100, 200, WA100 and WA200 series racks. This assembly requires only 3-7/16" ( 87mm) of vertical panel space Surface is 17-1/2" ( 445mm) wide and 12" ( 305mm) deep. Surface is supported by a heavy gauge CRS bracket. Hardware furnished.
AS100/AS120 Amplifier Shelves These shelves are designed to support electronic equipment. They are wall mounted by use of keyhole type screw holes. Wiring holes are provided on bottom of shelf for convenient wiring access. Front of shelf has a 3/8" (10mm) retaining lip. Construction is of heavy gauge CRS. Model AS100 is 14-1/4" ( 362mm) wide x 10-3/32" (256mm) deep. Model AS120 is 20" ( 508mm) wide x 12-1/2" ( 318mm) deep.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-63
SOUNDOLIER
A DIVISION OF AMERICAN TRADING & PRODUCTION CORP.
9380 Watson Industrial Park St. Louis, MO 63126 (314) 962-9870
Heavy Duty Slope Front Consoles
Select series 1044 Slope Front Console is an example of Soundolier's top quality engineering
and modern futuristic design. This unit has awide variety of applications. The modular design allows for easy installation of assemblies, and the modern color schemes complement any building interior. Basic unit consists of a16 gauge CRS frame with 11 gauge CRS mounting angles, alouvered full length locking rear door which is easily removed, aremovable top and lower front panel and pontoon base. Mounting angles are tapped 10-32 on universal E.I.A. hole spacing and are movable from front to rear. Caster plates are provided. The writing surface may be easily removed for access to standard 19" ( 483mm) E.I.A. mounting rails.
Plastic laminate writing surface is off-white or teakwood color. Three 7/8" ( 22mm) knockouts are provided on the rear portion of the writing shelf. The frame, mounting angles, pontoon base and shelf assembly are finished in Soundolier textured flat black baking enamel. Standard colors for tops, sides and doors of this series will be Soundolier Royal Blue ( No. 35) or Satin Beige ( No. 31). Suffix model number with color number. Complete list of colors available.
MODEL NO. 1044 1044LS
DESCRIPTION Slope Front Console 1044 w/o Writing Surface
VERTICAL PANEL SPACE 19-3/8" ( 492mm) Top Front 24-5/8" ( 625mm) Bottom Front
Model 1047 Slope Front Console
Model 1047 Slope Front Console is the same basic design as Model 1044, except that it will not mount awriting surface. Modular in design, it can be joined with other 1047 or 1044 consoles, or 1044-45 wedge sections. The basic unit consists of a16 gauge CRS frame painted textured flat black baking enamel with 11 gauge. CRS mounting angles and a louvered full length locking rear door which is easily removed. Additionally, the top and lower front panels and pontoon base are removable. Mounting angles are tapped 10-32 on universal E.I.A. hole
spacing and are movable from front to rear. Caster mounting plates are tapped for easy installation of Soundolier CS-8PR casters. Side panels and casters are optional. Color selections
include Soundolier Royal Blue ( No. 35) or Satin Beige ( No. 31). Complete list of colors available. Extruded aluminum side trim and decorative insert panel must be ordered
separately.
MODEL NO. 1047
VERTICAL PANEL SPACE 19-3/8" ( 492mm) Top Front 28-1/8" ( 714mm) Bottom Front
Console and Turret 45° Wedge Sections
Model 1044-45 wedge section is for use with 1044 and 1047 Slope Front Consoles. Models 714-45 and 719-45 wedge sections are for use with 700-14 and 700-19 desk turrets respectively. Each wedge section is a complete self supporting unit. They have no front openings or mounting angles. One wedge section used with appropriate consoles or turrets will produce a45° corner installation. Two adjoining wedge sections will produce a90° corner installation. The 1044-45 wedge section used with 1044- LS consoles and 144-45 or 144-90 writing surface will produce a45° or 90° corner writing surface. The basic frame is 16 gauge CRS painted textured flat black baking enamel. The 1044-45 has apontoon base painted flat black. It has aremovable louvered full length locking rear door and top panel. The 714-45 or 719-45 have removable top and back panel. Door, top and back panels are available in Soundolier Royal Blue ( No. 35) or Satin Beige ( No. 311. Complete list of colors available. The decorative insert panel must be ordered separately.
144 Series 45° and 90° Writing Surfaces
144 Series writing surfaces are designed to be used with Soundolier's 1044LS slope front consoles and 1044-45 corner wedge sections. The writing surface frame is constructed of 16 gauge CRS steel with choice of teakwood ( TKS) or white ( WHS) laminate writing surface. Versions for 45 degree or 90 degree console configurations are available. Six 1/2" ( 13mm) knockouts are provided on the rear portion of each writing surface. The 16 gauge CRS frame is painted in Soundolier textured flat black baking enamel to match the 1044LS consoles.
MODEL NO.
WHS144-45 TKS144-45 WHS144-90 TKS144-90
DESCRIPTION
45 degree writing surface with white laminate writing insert Same as above but with teakwood laminate writing insert 90 degree writing surface with white laminate writing insert Same as above but with teakwood laminate writing insert
VE-64
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CONSOLES
1044 1047 1044-45 TKS144-45 TKS144-90
Sr
IROINI
gOtt
MODULAR DESK CONSOLES · NIIR/V CR Res · Celle( CONSOLEtSot ·VIDDEUOBPBRIONDGUC/TDIUONPL·ICPOASITI-NPGRORDAUCCKTSION· ·
ggiuM111\-
EDITING · END · EFP ·
STANTRON VIDEO CENTER Designed primarily for
production and post- production facilities, the modular " add-on" features
give maximum flexibility in designing console arrangements.
tem
For aFREE " ALL NEW" STANTRON VIDEO CENTER
CATALOG = 200, please call or write.
STANTRON
marling address, P.O. Box 9158VC No. Hollywood, CA 91609 U.S.A.
factory
Toll Free: 1--800-821-0019 No. Calif. Toll Free: 1-800-821-0020 So. Calif. please call 1-213-875-0800
TWX: 910-499-2177
6900-6919 Beck Ave., No. Hollywood, CA 91605 U.S.A.
STA IRON
gat% atilt
C MOLES · VTR / VCR RACKS MODULAR DE LES · DUBBING RACKS · CAfBorINVIEDTEOCPRODUCTION · POST -PRODUCTION ·
EDITING · END · UP · . .
The STANTRON VIDEO CENTER series modular " add-on" features allow for maximum flexibility in designing console arrangements for professional, educational, industrial and communication VIDEO CENTERS.
For aFREE copy of the "ALL- NEW" STANTRON VIDEO CENTER CATALOG = 200,
please write or call STANTRON
mailing address:
P.O. Box 9158VC No. Hollywood, CA 91609 U.S.A.
Toll Free: 1-800-821-0019 No. Calif. Toll Free: 1-800-821-0020 So. Calif. please call: 1-213-875-0800 TWX: 910-499-2177
factory, 6900 -6918 Beck Ave., No. Hollywood, CA 91605
· ........
Unc of Zero Corp
NEW
I
(Ill
MODULAR DESK ceivsoi_Es· YIRPICR RACKS · CABINE1 CONSOLES · DUBPBRIONDUGC/IIDOINI·PLIFCeAtIeIN·G RENgG e· ER··
iot· 10E0 PRODUCIICH · POSI-
fies
SIANTRON VIDEO CENTER modular - add-on' leatu
tratortlert
bility in creating comole arrangeMents lot TOUR VIDEO EQUIPMENT. In,
FrRnEaEtlloqVl`IlgDfEardOederC:eEsN1s,T-8E0PR0.C-0A6T2B1AO-LX0O0G911958·l1HGovH.eoiC.teaHoonrllclayolwllolofdr,eeC:A19-810600-9871U.-So.oA2..0··
·So.
ANT0, 70R,0 co,0 pleasecall: 1-213-815-0800 · IW1l: 910-499O-2111 ·
ALL NEW
STANTRON
VIDEO CENTER
CABINET CONSOLES · VTR/VCR RACKS MODULAR DESK CONSOLES · DUBBING RACKS ·
for · VIDEO PRODUCTION · POST- PRODUCTION · EDITING · ENG · EFP
"ALL- NEW" STANTRON VIDEO CENTER, designed to complement YOUR VIDEO EQUIPMENT. Modular " add-on" features allow maximum flexibility and versatility in creating console arrangements Write or call for FREE STANTRON VIDEO CENTER CATALOG 200.
Urot of Zero Corp
mailing address: P.O. Box 9158VC No. Hollywood. CA 91609 U.S.A.
Toll Free: 1--800-821-0019 No. Calif. Toll Free: 1-800-821-0020 So. Calif. please call 1-213-875-0800
TWX: 910-499-2117
factory: 6900-6918 Beck Ave., No. Hollywood, CA 91605
VE -65
\
BASIC MODULES
INTRO
TO THE
VIDEO CENTER
BASIC MODULES
On this page -- and the following page -- we have displayed the Basic Modules of our VIDEO CENTER modular consoles, modular cabinets, modular racks and monitor bridge desks. These products have been designed -- primarily -- for VIDEO CENTER production and post- production facilities. There is a choice of " inplace," portable or mobile options. Our modular, "add-on," design features allow for maximum flexibility in designing console arrangements for editing, dubbing or production within professional, educational, industrial and communication VIDEO CENTERS. With our 30 years
of extensive manufacturing experience, ( totally spent within the electronics industry), we have " designed- in" the structural strength and aesthetic features required by our valued customers. All products displayed within this catalog ( with the exception of some hardware items) are manufactured within our 60,000 square foot plant, where -- during the aforementioned period of thirty years -- we have produced thousands of cabinets for television and radio broadcasting facilities, as well as audio-video
production facilities.
VE-66
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BASIC MODULES
STANTRON
VIDEO ENTER
BASIC MODULES
"ALL- WELDED" SLOPING FRONT CONSOLE CABINETS
"KNOCK-DOWN"
VERTICAL VIDEO CABINET
PATENTS PENDING
"ALL- WELDED" MONITOR/DESK
VIDEO CABINET
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -67
FLAT DESK CONSOLES
VIDEO CENTER
FLAT DESK CONSOLES
A
B
·
"CUSTOM" SIZES AVAILABLE
PATENTS PENDING
,INCHES A
B '1·1711:11-n.
:Wr MONITOR BRIDGE PRICE Z:4-ETGull'T PRICE 'I:ZITZIAT
30" 45 1/ 2
762 1156 VCF1)3045-· $422.40 88 lb. $634.70 138 lb.
**
30" 67 3/ 4 " 762 1721 VCF1:13067-* $451.00 117 lb. $759.00 192 lb. 42" 45 1/ 2 " 1067 1156 VCF104245-* $462.00 100 lb. $674.30 150 lb.
42" 67 3/ 4 " 1067 1721 VCF04267-* $495.00 140 lb. $803.00 215 lb.
48" 45 1/ 2 " 1219 1156 VCFD4845-* $498.30 116 lb. $710.60 166 lb.
48" 67 3/ 4 " 1219 1721 VCF04867-* $517.00 155 lb. $825.00 230 lb.
'IF MONITOR BRIDGE IS DESIRED, ADD -MB I.E. VCF03045-MB
HEIGHT INCrH--ES Imm
31'
800
29½' 1149
WITH
I 2 CASTER I LEVELER
CATALOG NO.
VCC2
VCH158
PRICE
$42.46/SET 4 $ 7.81/SET 4
VE -68
A. Monitor Bridge may be mounted to the rear or front; If Monitor Bridge is mounted to the rear, the "Anti-Tip" extension must be attached to the bottom rear. Apair of "Anti-Tip" extensions are included with each desk.
B. Monitor Bridge height is adjustable in one inch increments.
C. Finish: Frames: Tan Textured -=-VC7T Accessories: Brown Textured e---VC16T
D. Laminate Top: Pecan pattern. E. Positive- latching device on all sliding shelves used in
VTR/VCR racks.
NOTE: For " custom- size" desks -- per your requirements -- contact our sales engineering department.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
FLAT DESK
CONSOLES
STANTRON
VID
ENTER
FLAT DESK CONSOLES
The VIDEO CENTER PRODUCTS illustrated are representative of what can be designed using the STANTRON BASIC modules.
You can design your own console by selecting the BASIC modules and accessories that fit your requirements.
FOR ASSISTANCE .. . FOR PLACING ORDERS -- PLEASE CALL -- P.O. Box 9158 VC No. Hollywood, CA 91609 (213) 875-0800 ( 800) 821-0019 TVVX 910-499-2177
VCAS5000
$677.60
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
1Set
VCED3045-MB VCC2
DESK W/ BRIDGE 2" CASTERS
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 138 lb.
VCAS5001
(JD
$2,028.40
QUANTITY
1
1
1Pr. 1Set 1Set 4
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
VCFD3045-MB
DESK W/ BRIDGE
VCRK5131
RACK
VCSP30
SIDE PANELS
VCC5
5" CASTERS
VCC2
2" CASTERS
VCSS31 11
SLIDING SHELVES
PPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 331 lb.
VCAS5002
$2,055.90
QUANTITY
1
1
2Set 2 1Pr 2 2
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
VCFD3045-MB
DESK W/BRIDGE
VCRK2731 VCC2
RACK CASTERS
VCSS31-11
SLIDING SHELVES
VCSP30
SIDE PANELS
VCSB240022
SLOPING BASE
VCAS241022
CABINET ASSEMBLY
PPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 334 lb.
VCAS5003
$1,688.50
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
VCFD3045-MB DESK W/BRIDGE
1
VCRK2731
RACK
2Set
VCC2
2" CASTERS
2
VCSS31-11
SLIDING SHELVES
2
VCSB240018
SLOPING BASE
2
VCAS241018
CABINET ASSEMBLY
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT 284 lh
VCAS5004
$1,664.30
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
VCFD3045-MB DESK W/ BRIDGE
2Set
VCRK2731 VCC2
RACK 2" CASTERS
2
VCSS31-11
SLIDING PANELS
1Pr.
VCSP30
SIDE PANELS
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 270 lb.
VCAS5005
$2,055:90
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
VCED3045-MB DESK W/ BRIDGE
1
VCRK2731
RACK
2Set
VCC2
2" CASTERS
2 1Pr.
VCSS31 .11 VCSP30
SLIDING SHELVES SIDE PANELS
2
VCSB240022
SLOPING BASE
2
VCAS241022
CABINET ASSEMByL
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT 334 lb.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -69
SLOPING DESK
CONSOLES
STANTRON
VIDED ENTER
SLOPING DESK
CONSOLES
g A
PATENTS PENDING
"CUSTOM" SIZES AVAILABLE
10 ° REFERENCE
·W/MONITOR BRIDGE
1
INCHES
MM CATALOG
APPROX.
APPROX.
A
B
A
B
NUMBER
PRICE
WEIGHT
PRICE WEIGHT
30" 45 1/ 2 " 762 1156 VCS03045-* $478.50 88 lb. S69O.8q 138 lb.
30" 67 3/ 4 " 762 1721 VCSD3067-*-- 519.20 114 lb. _827.20 189 lb. 42" 45 1/ 2 " 1067 1156 VCSD4245-* 509.30 1061b. 721.60 1561h.
42- 67 3/4" 1067 1721 VCSD4267-· 552.20 141 lb. -- 860.20 2161b.
48" 45 1/ 2 " 1219 1156 VCS04845-· 532.40- 116 lb. 744.70_1_166113
48" 67 3/ 4 " 1219 1721 VCSD4867-* 576.40 154 113. --884.401 229 lb.
·IF MONITOR BRIDGE IS DESIRED, ADD - MB I.E. VCR13045-MB
HEIGHT
INCHES MM
31"
800
29 1 /2 " 749
WITH
2" CASTER LEVELER
CATALOG NO.
VCC2 VCH158
PRICE
$42.46 per set of 4 I 7.81 per set of 4
VE-70
A. Monitor Bridge may be mounted to the rear or front; If Monitor Bridge is mounted to the rear, the "Anti- Tip" extension must be attached to the bottom rear. Apair of "Anti-Tip" extensions are included with each desk.
B. Monitor Bridge height is adjustable in one inch increments.
C. Finish: Frames: Tan Textured :I--VC7T Accessories: Brown Textured =-VC16T
D. Laminate Top: Pecan pattern. E. Positive- latching device on all sliding shelves used in
VTR/VCR racks. NOTE: For " custom- size" desks -- per your requirements --
contact our sales engineering department.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SLOPING DESK
CONSOLES
STANTRON
VID D ENTER
SLOPING DESK
CONSOLES
The VIDEO CENTER PRODUCTS illustrated are representative of what can be designed using the STANTRON BASIC modules.
You can design your own console by selecting the BASIC modules and accessories that fit your requirements.
FOR ASSISTANCE ... FOR PLACING ORDERS... -- PLEASE CALL -- P.O. Box 9158 VC No. Hollywood, CA 91609 (213) 875-0800 ( 800) 821-0019 TWX 910-499-2177
VCAS5006
$732.60 "
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
VCSD3045-MB DESK W/BRIDGE
1Set VCC2
2" CASTERS
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 138 lb.
VCAS5007
$2084.50
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
VCS03045-MB DESK W/BRIDGE
1
VCRK5131
RACK
1Set VCC5
5" CASTERS
4
1Pr. 1Set
VCSS31-11
VCSP30 VCC2
SLIDING SHELVES SIDE PANELS
2" CASTERS
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 335 lb.
VCAS5008
$2112.00
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
VCSD3045-MB DESK W/BRIDGE
1
VCRK2731
RACK
2Set VCC2
2" CASTERS
2
VCSS31-11
SLIDING SHELVES
1Pr.
VCSP30
SIDE PANELS
2
VCSB240022
SLOPING BASE
2
VCAS241022
CABINET ASSEMBLY
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 336 lb.
VCAS500
$1744.60
QUANTITY
1 1 2Set 2 2 2
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
VCSD3045-MB DESK W/BRIDGE
VCRK2731
RACK
VCC2 VCSS31-11
2" CASTERS SLIDING SHELVES
VCSB240022 VCSA241022
SLOPING BASE CABINET ASSEMBLY
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 284 lb.
VCAS5010
$1720.40
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
VCS03045-MB DESK W/ BRIDGE
1
VCRK2731
RACK
2Set 2 1Pr.
VCC2 VCSS31-11 VCSP30
2" CASTERS SLIDING SHELVES SIDE PANELS
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 270 lb.
VCAS5011
$1744.60
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
VCSD3045-MB DESK W/BRIDGE
1
VCRK2731
RACK
2Set 2
VCC2 VCSS31-11
2" CASTERS SLIDING SHELVES
2
VCSB240022
SLOPING BASE
2
VCAS2410 22
CABINET ASSEMBLY
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 284 lb.
/
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -71
MOBILE VTR/VCR
RACKS
VID O CENTER
MOBILE VTR/VCR
RACKS
B A
26" (660 mm) PATENTS PENDING
15" .1(381 mm)
ANTI- TIP FEATURE addEixttieonndasl o8utinacnhes
(22003 mm) -1k
o
INCHES
A
B
27 1/2" 23"
27 1/ 2 " 31"
51 1/ 2 " 23"
51 1/ 2 " 31"
63 1/ 2 " 23"
63 1/ 2 " 31"
75 1/ 2 " 23"
75 1/2" 31"
MM
A
B
648 584
648 787
1308 584
1308 787
1613 584
1613 787
1918 584
1918 787
CATALOG NUMBER
VCRK2723 VCRK2731 VCRK5123 VCRK5131
VCRK6323 VCRK6331
VCRK1523 VCRK7531
PRICE WITHOUT CASTERS
$231.00 $234.30 $251.90 $255.20 $260.70 $264.00 $272.80 $276.10
APPROX. WEIGHT
35 lb. 36 lb. 50 lb. 51 lb. 56 lb. 57 lb. 65 lb. 66 lb.
*CASTERS AND LEVELERS AVAILABLE
INCHES
DIA. HOT. 2" 23/ 4 " 4" 45/e"
1 mm
DIA. 50.8
HOT.
69.9
WITH BRAKE
YES
CATALOG PRICE
NUMBER 1 PER SET VCC2 $42.46
101.6 117.5 YES VCC4 $37.13
5" 6" 127.0 152.4 YES VCC5 $42.90
APPROX. WEIGHT
41b.
10 lb.
11 lb.
ASET OF 4LEVELERS VCH158 $ 7.81 1/2lb.
NOTE: ASET OF 4CASTERS WILL HAVE 2CASTERS WITH BRAKE.
A. Included on all VTR/VCR racks is our unique "Anti-Tip" feature. This feature should be used whenever any sliding component is pulled out to the front.
B. Sliding shelves used with the VCR/VTR racks have a "positive-latching" device. This accessory cannot move forward until the " positive- latch" is depressed.
C. All accessories may be adjusted vertically in one inch increments.
D. Choice of casters or levelers
VE -72
VCAS501 2
$885.50
QUANTITY
1 1Set 3 1
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
VCRK5131
RACK
VCC5 VCSS31-11
5- CASTERS SLIDING SHELVES
VCFS31
FIXED SHELF
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 152 lb.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MOBILE VTR/VCR
RACKS
STANTRON
VID
ENTER
MOBILE VTR/VCR
RACKS
VCAS5013
$985.60
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
1Set
VCRK5131 VCC5
RACK 5" CASTERS
4
VCSS31-11
SLIDING SHELVES
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 149 lb.
VCAS5014
$669.90
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
VCRK6331
RACK
1Set
VCC5
5" CASTERS
5
VCFS31
FIXED SHELF
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 145 lb.
A. Included on all VTR/VCR racks is our unique "Anti-Tip" feature. This feature should be used whenever any sliding component is pulled out to the front.
B. Sliding shelves used with the VCR/VTR racks have a "positive- latching" device. This accessory cannot move forward until the " positive- latch" is depressed.
C. All accessories may be adjusted vertically in one inch increments.
D. Choice of casters or levelers
The VIDEO CENTER PRODUCTS illustrated are representative of what can be designed using the STANTRON BASIC modules.
You can design your own console by selecting the BASIC modules and accessories that fit your requirements.
FOR ASSISTANCE ... FOR PLACING ORDERS . -- PLEASE CALL -- P.O. Box 9158 VC No. Hollywood, CA 91609 (213) 875-0800 ( 800) 821-0019 TWX 910-499-2177
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-73
MOBILE
VTR/VCR RACKS
STANTRON
VIDEO CENTER
MOBILE VTR/VCR
RACKS
VCAS5015
$980.10
QUANTITY
1
1Set 4
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
VCRK6323
RACK
VCC5
5" CASTERS
VCSS23-11
SLIDING SHELVES
PPROXIMATE WEIGHT. 129 lb
VCAS501 6
$719.40
QUANTITY
1
CATALOG NO.
VCRK6323
DESCRIPTION
RACK
6
VCFS23
FIXED SHELVES
1Set
VCC5
5' CASTERS
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT. 13516
A. Included on all VTR/VCR racks is our unique " Anti- Tip" feature. This feature should be used whenever any sliding component is pulled out to the front.
B. Sliding shelves used with the VCR/VTR racks have a "positive- latching" device. This accessory cannot move forward until the " positive- latch" is depressed.
C. All accessories may be adjusted vertically in one inch increments.
D. Choice of casters or levelers
The VIDEO CENTER PRODUCTS illustrated are representative of what can be designed using the STANTRON BASIC modules.
You can design your own console by selecting the BASIC modules and accessories that fit your requirements.
FOR ASSISTANCE ... FOR PLACING ORDERS .. . -- PLEASE CALL -- P.O. Box 9158 VC No. Hollywood, CA 91609 (213) 875-0800 ( 800) 821-0019 TVVX 910-499-2177
VE -74
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MOBILE VTR/VCR
RACKS
STANTRON
VIDEO ENTER
MOBILE VTR/VCR
RACKS
VCAS5017 $ 1050.50
QUANTITY
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
VCRK6323
RACK
4
VSCC23-11
SLIDING SHELVES
1
VCFS23
FIXED SHELF
1Set
VCC5
5" CASTERS
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT 165 lb
VCAS5018
$572.00
QUANTITY
1
4 1Set
CATALOG NO
DESCRIPTION
VCRK5123
RACK
VCFS23
FIXED SHELVES
VCC5
5- CASTERS
PPROXIMATE WEIGHT 129 lb
A. Included on all VTR/VCR racks is our unique "Anti-Tip" feature. This feature should be used whenever any sliding componént is pulled out to the front.
B. Sliding shelves used with the VCR/VTR racks have a "positive- latching" device. This accessory cannot move forward until the " positive- latch" is depressed.
C. All accessories may be adjusted vertically in one inch increments.
D. Choice of casters or levelers
VCAS5018 $572.00
The VIDEO CENTER PRODUCTS illustrated are representative of what can be designed using the STANTRON BASIC modules.
You can design your own console by selecting the BASIC modules and accessories that fit your requirements.
FOR ASSISTANCE ... FOR PLACING ORDERS ... -- PLEASE CALL -- P.O. Box 9158 VC No. Hollywood, CA 91 609 (213) 875-0800 (800) 821-0019 TVVX 910-499-2177
Prices arid Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -75
ALL-WELDED SLOPING FRONT
CABINETS
VIDEO CENTER
-- 1 -10 1 / 2 " (267 mm)
28"
(711 mm)
19 1 /4
NM Imml
z
..
1591 ount)
46 3 /4 "
(1187 mm)
25 5/8'
( 651 mm)
ITEM
CONSOLE SIDES REAR PANEL BOTTOM PANEL TOP PANEL
CATALOG NUMBER
VCSF30025
PRICE
$212.40
VCSS300251
$ 64.25 ea.
VCP31L
$ 23.85
VCP21
$ 16.45
VCP17
_ $ 14.60
-- FINISH: CHOICE OF STANTRON COLORS. -- LAMINATE: PECAN
WEIGHT APPROX
108 lb. 29 lb. 13 lb.
9lb. 8lb.
VE-76
INFORMATION REGARDING SLOPING FRONT CONSOLES
A. Material: I. Cabinet- corner post: 14 ga. steel 2. Mouldings and braces: 16 ga. steel 3. Panel mounting angles: 12 ga. steel
B. Manufacturing/assembly procedure: 1. " Butt -welding" and seam welding 2. Electronically -controlled spot-welding
C. 19" wide panel space ( for standard 19" formed or flat panels) available at front, rear, and top.
D. Panel mounting hole spacing: EIA and WE. E. Panel mounting holes TAPPED 10-32 thread. E. May be bolted together in any quantity for multiple installation or developing
console assemblies. G. Panel mounting angles:
I. Two pair provided, one pair at front, one pair at rear. 2. May be positioned to any depth from front to back or back to front by
loosening the bolt that holds them to the STANTRON " UNICHANNEL." 14. Pontoon base features:
1. Bolted to cabinet bottom. 2. Will accept casters ( catalog VCC3, load capacity 800 lbs. per set of four;
casters are recessed. Casters add 1" to height.) 3. Has provisions for bolting to floor. ( By reversing) I. Other accessories, such as drawers, work/writing surfa ces,etc. ,are availle ab/
Pt ices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ALL-WELDED SLOPING FRONT
CABINETS
VIDEO CENTER
ALL-WELDED SLOPING FRONT
CABINETS
(11 .) VCAS5022 $1199.00
VCAS5024 $1917.30
The Video Center Products illustrated are representative of what can be designed using the Stantron Basic modules.
You can design your own console by selecting the Basic modules and accessories that fit your requirements. A broad selection of accessories are shown and described.
VCAS5019
$2011.90
QUANTITY
3 2 3 3 3 1 3 3 3Sets
CATALOG NO
DESCRIPTION
VCSF30025
CABINET
VCSS30025
SIDE PANEL LOUVRED
VCP31L
REAR PANEL LOUVRED
VCP21
BOTTOM PANEL
VCP21
FRONT PANEL
VCEDF3
EDITOR DESK FLAT
VCSB240022 VCAS241022
SLOPING BASE CABINET ASSEMBLY
VCC3
3 ' CASTER
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 709 lb.
VCAS5020
$2329.80
QUANTITY CATALOG NO
DESCRIPTION
3
VC
CABINET
2
VSS300251.
SIDE PANEL LOUVRED
3
VCP311
REAR PANEL LOUVRED
3
V:P21
BOTTOM PANEL
3
VCP21
FRONT PANEL
1
VCSD44
SLOPING DESK
1
VCSWD22
SWITCHER DESK
3
VSB240022 SLOPING BASE
3
VCAS241022
CABINET ASSEMBLY
3Sets VCC3
3 CASTER
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 715 lb.
VCAS5021
$2204.40
QUANTITY CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
3
VCSF30025
CABINET
2
VCSS30025L
SIDE PANEL LOUVRED
3
VCP31L
REAR PANEL LOUVRED
3
VCP21
BOTTOM PANEL
3
VCP21
FRONT PANEL
1
VCSD44
SLOPING DESK
1
VCSWD22
SWITCHER DESK
3
VCAS241022
CABINET ASSEMBLY
3Sets VCC3
3" CASTER
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 720 lb.
VCAS5022
$1199.00
QUANTITY CATALOG NO
DESCRIPTION
2
VCSF30025
CABINET
2
VCSS30025L
SIDE PANEL LOUVRED
2
VCP31L
REAR PANEL LOUVRED
2
VCP21
BOTTOM PANEL
2
VCP21
FRONT PANEL
1
VCEDF2
EDITOR DESK FLAT
2Sets VCC3
3' CASTER
VCLT2
LAMINATE TOP
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT. 419 lb.
VCAS5023
$1477.30
QUANTITY CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
2
VCSF30025
CABINETS
2
VCSS30025L
SIDE PANEL LOUVRED
2
VCP311
REAR PANEL LOUVRED
2
VCP21
BOTTOM PANEL
2
VCP21
FRONT PANEL
1
VCEDF2
EDITOR DESK FLAT
2
VCSB240022 SLOPING BASE
2
VCAS241022
CABINET ASSEMBLY
2Sets VCC3
3" CASTER
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 543 lb.
VCAS5024
(i) $1917.30
QUANTITY CATALOG NO
DESCRIPTION
2
VCSF30025
CABINETS
2
VCSS30025L
SIDE PANEL LOUVRED
2
VCP3I L
REAR PANEL LOUVRED
2
VCP21
BOTTOM PANEL
2
VCP21
FRONT PANEL
1
VCSD44
SLOPING DESK
2
VCSB240022 SLOPING BASE
4
VCAS241022 CABINET ASSEMBLY
1
VCAT44
ANTI- TIP BASE
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 629 lb.
P.1,es and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -77
WEDGE ORGAN- STYLE
CONSOLE
WEDGE ORGAN- STYLE
CONSOLE
VCAS5025
QUANTITY
4 2 2 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 4Sets
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
VCSF30025
CABINET
VCSF34525
WEDGE CABINET
VCSS30025L
SIDE PANEL LOUVRED
VCP31L
REAR PANEL LOUVRED
VCP21
BOTTOM PANEL
VCP21
FRONT PANEL
VCP3
FRONT PANEL
VCWD44525
WEDGE DESK
VCSB240022
SLOPING BASE
VCAS241022
CABINET ASSEMBLY
VCC3
3" CASTER
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 1315 lb.
INFORMATION REGARDING WEDGE/ORGAN-STYLE CONSOLES
The above console is only one of many configurations that can be designed, using our Wedge Cabinet - part =VCSF34525 and Sloping Front Cabinet -- part =VCSF30025. Please submit your ideas to our salesengineering department. They will assist you In designing an Organ- style Console that fits your unique requirements.
FOR ASSISTANCE ... FOR PLACING ORDERS ... --PLEASE CALL -- P.O. Box 9158 VC No. Hollywood, CA 91609 (213) 875-0800 ( 800) 821-0019 TVVX 910-499-2177
VE -78
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
1/2" and 3/4" DUBBING RACKS
STANTRON
VIDEO- ENTER
1/2" and 3/4" DUBBING RACKS
FOR */21 "FORMAT *3/4"FORMAT ** 1/2"FORMAT **/43 " FORMAT
A
CATALOG NO
23"
VCDR23
31"
VCDR31
23"
VCMDR23
31"
VCMDR31
PRICE
$345.40 $348.70 $238.70 $244.20
APPROX. WEIGHT
86 lb. 88 lb. 50 lb. 52 lb.
A. Finish: Tan ;--VC7T/Brown VC16T "'B. Includes two side panels. C. Includes four levelers r----VCH158 **D. Racks used for multiple assemblies ( sides not included).
IMPORTANT: When using any sliding components, the " Anti- Tip" tubular steel base must be ordered.
® VCAS5026 $1,097.80
VCAS5027 $1,156.10
VCAS5026
$1,097.80
QUANTITY 1 1 1
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
VCDR31
DUBBING RACK
VCAT31
ANTI- TIP BASE
VCFS31
FIXED SHELF
VCSS31-2
SLIDING SHELF
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT 222 Ib.
VCAS5027
$1,156.10
QUANTITY
1
1 5
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
VCDR31 VCAT31
DUBBING RACK ANTI- TIP BASE
VCSS31-2
SLIDING SHELF
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 236 lb.
EXAMPLE OF A MULTIPLE DUBBING RACK ASSEMBLY
FOR ASSISTANCE FOR PLACING ORDERS .. . -- PLEASE CALL -- P.O. Box 9158 VC No. Hollywood, CA 91609
(213) 875-0800 ( 800) 821-0019
TVVX 910-499-2177
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -79
ALL-WELDED VERTICAL FRONT
CABINETS
VIDEO-CENTER
ALL-WELDED VERTICAL FRONT
CABINETS
.. '1111111111111111116e-e'',
,, (.3',': i
"NNN-N,-.-...-..,. .-,_..
.
1
A
k, s '
m% -
`51 r5m1
,12 5.,,,,n,
· 19 1 /4 "
14151 men)
231(u"
1591 nun)
QUANTITY Of_OAYS
WIDE
ONE TWO THREE ONE TWO THREE ONE TWO THREE ONE TWO THREE ONE TWO THREE ONE TWO THREE ONE TWO THREE ONE TWO THREE
CATALOG NUMBER
VCAS21-1 VCAS21-2 VCAS21-3 VCAS28-1 VCAS28-2 VCAS28-3 VCAS35-1 VCAS35-2 VCAS35-3 VCAS43-1 VCAS43-2 VCAS43-3 VCAS52-1 VCAS52-2 VCAS52-3 VCAS61-1 VCAS61-2
VCAS61-3 VCAS70-1 VCAS70-2 VCAS70-3 VCAS78-1 VCAS78-2 VCAS78-3
INCHES A
21" 21" 21" 28" 28" 28" 35" 35" 35" 43 3/ 4 " 43 3/4" 43 3/ 4 " 52 1/ 2 " 52 1/2" 52 1/2" 61 1/ 4 " 61 1/ 4 "
61 1/4" 70"
70" 70" 78 3/ 4 " 78 3/ 4 " 78 3/ 4 "
Mm A
533 533 533 711 711 711 889 889 889 111 111 111 1334 1334 1334 1556 1556
1556 1778 1778 1778 2000 2000 2000
PRICE
$ 383.90 $ 674.30 $ 964.70 $ 426.80 $ 750.20 $1,072.50 $ 466.40 5 808.50 $1,150.60 5 502.70 $ 878.90 $1,254.00 5 531.30
$ 921.80 $1,311.20
$ 587.40 $1,015.30
$1,443.20 $ 636.90 $1,097.80
$1,557.60 5 677.60 $1,160.50 $1,643.40
APPROX. WEIGHT
149 lb. 252 lb. 378 lb. 160 lb. 280 lb. 420 lb. 205 lb. 358 lb. 511 lb. 205 lb.
409 lb. 585 lb. 263 lb. 455 lb. 648 lb. 287 lb. 497 lb.
798 lb. 322 lb. 557 lb. 793 lb. 349 lb. 599 lb. 850 lb.
DESCRIPTION:
A. Each cabinet includes: One cabinet frame. One rear louvred door. One rear connector panel. One top perforated panel. One set of 3" dia. casters.
B. Each assembly includes one pair of side panels louvred.
C. Finish: Choice of colors.
D. Vertical mounting angles front and rear have 10-32 thread tapped holes
VCAS5028
QUANTITY
-- 1 1 1
1 Set
DESCRIPTION
VCAS52-1 VCP21 VCSWD22 VCAT22 VCC5
$1,008.70
CATALOG NO.
CABINET ASSEMBLY FRONT VERTICAL PANEL SWITCHER DESK ANTI- TIP BASE 5" CASTER
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 323 lb.
CID VCAS5029 $ 1,931.60
QUANTITY
1 2 2 1 1Set 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
VCAS61-2 CABINET ASSEMBLY
VCP21
FRONT VERTICAL PANEL
VCP5 VCDC21
FRONT FILLER PANEL CABINET
VCC3LK
3" CASTER
VCP25T VCP14P VCPW19
LAMINATE TOP PERFORATED PANEL REAR POWER PANEL
VCP12
VCP3 VCPS19
FRONT VERTICAL PANEL FRONT VERTICAL PANEL POWER STRIP
VCS044
SLOPING DESK
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 623 lb.
VE -80
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ALL-WELDED VERTICAL FRONT
CABINETS
ALL-WELDED VERTICAL FRONT
CABINETS
VCAS5030
$1,060.40
QUANTITY CATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
VCAS61-2 CABINET ASSEMBLY
2
VCP21
FRONT VERTICAL PANEL
1
VCP5
FRONT VERTICAL PANEL
2Sets VCC3
CASTERS
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 518 lb.
VCAS5031
$1,401.40
QUANTITY ZATALOG NO.
DESCRIPTION
1
VCAS61-2
CABINET ASSEMBLY
2
VCP21
FRONT VERTICAL PANEL
2
VCP5
FRONT FILLER PANEL
1
VCSD44
SLOPING DESK
2Sets VCC3
CASTERS
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 520 lb.
The VIDEO CENTER PRODUCTS illustrated are representative of what can be designed using the STANTRON BASIC modules.
You can cesign your own console by selecting the BASIC modules and accessories that fit your requirements.
FOR ASSISTANCE... FOR PLACING ORDERS ... -- PLEASE CALL --
P.O. Box 9158 VC No Hollywood, CA 91609 (213) 875-0800 ( 800) 821-0019 TWX 910-499-2177
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -81
VTR MONITOR BRIDGE
CONSOLES
VIDEO CENTER
VTR MONITOR BRIDGE
CONSOLES
·NOTE: TOTAL WIDTH IS 23 1 /4 "(590.6 Min)
· The Monitor Bridge is adjustable in height from 19" to 32" ( 483 mm to 813 mm).
· Base Cabinet panel space: 19 1 /4 "wide x21" height (front/rear) (485.8 mm x534 mm).
· Monitor Bridge Cabinet will accept: · A10 1 /2 "x19" (266.7 mm x482.6 mm) wide panel with aTV monitor. ·A 51 /4 "x19" ( 133.4 mm x482.6 mm) wide panel with awave form monitor and avector scope (side by side). ·An additional 31 /2 "x19" ( 88.9 mm x482.6 mm) panel for operational equipment.
·A Vertical Accessory Panel 31 /4 "wide x19 1 /4 "high (79.4 mm x488.6 mm) is included. The upper half of this panel has agrille opening for your speaker. The lower half is available for mounting of optional equipment such as microphone jacks, switches, etc.
·Vertical Supports may be used as electrical raceways.
· Base Cabinet and Monitor Bridge Cabinet both have removable rear perfcrated panels for ventilation and access to equipment. Part eVCP14P. Laminate top for base cabinet is included.
· 3" swivel casters (2with brake) are included.
· Finish: · Vertical supports: · Cabinets: · Laminate Top:
Bright chrome Black textured --zVC8T Black
·NOTE: Finish must be submitted when placing order.
*Shipped Assembled: Important! Submit VTR clearance dimensions. Add dimension number to suffix of catalog :e. i.e.: VCMB9000-24. This number would allow for a24" (610 mm) clearance between the Base Cabinet top and bottom of Monitor Bridge Cabinet. If, after receipt of cabinet adifferent clearance is desired, our adjustability feature may be utilized. If no clearance dimension is submitted with the order, we/ will ship with a19" (483 mm) VTR clearance.
VE -82
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
"KNOCK-DOWN" VERTICAL CABINETS
VIDEO CENTER
"KNOCK-DOWN" VERTICAL CABINETS
These Single Bay, Double Bay and Triple Bay Assemblies are now available on STANTRON's FIVE DAY DELIVERY* program.
19'/8 - WIDE PANEL SPACE
(485.8 mm)
FINISH: Frame -- STANTRON VC16T DARK BROWN
Door & Panels -- STANTRON VC6T
·THE FIVE DAY DELIVERY CYCLE STARTS FROM THE DATE OF APPROVED CREDIT AND WRITTEN CONFIRMATION OF THE WIDER. (The five day cycle does not include Saturday, Sunday or Holidays.)
GENERAL INFORMATION
·
EACH SINGLE BAY CABINET ASSEMBLY INCLUDES:
· One Cabinet Frame
· One Rear Connector Panel
· One Rear Door Louvred
· Two Side Panels
· One Top Panel Louvred
· Mounting Hardware
·
EACH DOUBLE BAY CABINET ASSEMBLY INCLUDES:
· Two Cabinet Frames · Two Rear Doors Louvred · Two Tcp Panels Louvred
· Two Rear Connector Panels · Two Side Panels · Mounting Hardware
EACH TRIPLE BAY CABINET ASSEMBLY INCLUDES:
· Three Cabinet Frames
· Three Rear Doors Louvred
· Three Top Panels Louvred
N
· Three Rear Connector Panels · Two Side Panels · Mounting Hardware
ORDERING INFORMATION
CATALOG NUMBER
VCK021-* VCKD35-* VCKD43-* VCKD52-* UCKD61-* VCKD70-* YCKD18-*
INCHES A
21" 35" 43 34" 52 1 /2 " 61'4" 70" 183 /4 "
MM
A
533 889 1111 1334 1556 1778 2000
*Indicates number at bays wide Example: VCKD35-1 ( Single Bay)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -83
"KNOCK-DOWN" VERTICAL CABINETS
VIDEO CENTER
"KNOCK-DOWN" VERTICAL CABINETS
These Single Bay, Double Bay and Triple Bay Assemblies are now available on STANTRON's FIVE DAY DELIVERY . program.
SINGLE BAY ASSEMBLY
DOUBLE BAY ASSEMBLY
TRIPLE BAY ASSEMBLY
·THE FIVE DAY DELIVERY CYCLE STARTS FROM THE DATE OF APPROVED CREDIT AND WRITTEN CONFIRMATION OF THE ORDER ,The five day cycle does not Include Saturday, Sunday or Holldays I
DOUBLE BAY ASSEMBLY NUMBER
VCKD21-2
VCKD35-2 VCKD43-2 VCKD52-2
VCKD61-2 VCKD70-2
I VCKD78-2
ASSEMBLY NUMBERS AND PRICES
SINGLE BAY ASSEMBLY
NUMBER
VCKD21-1
VCKD35-1
VCK043-1
VCKD52-1 VCKD61-1 VCK070-1
VCKD78-1
PRICE
$509.92 631.15 668.76 706.53 772.88 839.40 895.77
APPROXIMATE SHIPPING WEIGHT
184 Lbs.
253 Lb. 285 Lbs.
314 Lbs.
328 Lbs. 383 Lbs. 419 Lbs.
PRICE
$ 888.13 1105.41 1174.93 1231.47 1355.86 1449.03 1539.34
APPROXIMATE SHIPPING WEIGHT
390 Lbs.
470 Lbs. 496 Lbs.
550 Lbs. 604 Lbs. 672 Lbs. 726 Lbs
TRIPLE BAY ASSEMBLY
NUMBER
VCKD21-3 VCKD35-3 VCKD43-3 VCKD52-3 VCKD61-3 VCKD70-3 VCKD78-3
PRICE
$1273.35 1579.67 1681.11 1756.41 1903.72 2058.66 2182.88
APPROXIMATE SHIPPING WEIGHT
434 Lbs.
739 Lbs. 757 Lbs.
781 Lbs. 853 Lbs.
956 Lbs. 1029 Lbs.
4
VE- 84
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ALL-WELDED MONITOR DESK
CABINETS
STANTRON
VIDEO ENTER
ALL-WELDED
MONITOR DESK CABINETS
22 1/8"
(562 mm)
A B
INCHES
WITH * LESS
SIDE
SIDE
A
13
A
B
NUMBER
PANELS PRICE
PANELS APPROX. PRICE WEIGHT
83 /4 " 12%4' 222 313 VCAS240822-* $177.10 $124.30 56 lb.
101 /2 " 14%." 268 357 VCAS241022-* $182.60 $125.40 61 lb.
1214" 15456" 311 402 VCAS241222-* $192.50 $130.90 66 lb.
14" 17%." 356 446 VCAS241422-* ea» $135.30 69 lb.
15 3 /4 " 19%." 400 491 VCAS241522-* $204.60 $137.50 74 lb.
17 1h" 21%." 445 535 VCAS241722-* $211.20 $140.80 79 lb.
Less side panel , Add - Sto Suffix. I.E.: VCAS241222-LS
(486 mm)
(591 mm)
NOTE: This cabinet may he used "by itself" OR -- in conjunction with other STANTRON VIDEO CENTER Assemblies.
DESCRIPTION
A. Each cabinet includes: One cabinet frame, One rear perforated panel, One top panel, 2side panels per assembly.
B. This is an ALL- WELDED, MODULAR CABINET, sides are removable. When ordering for multiple assemblies, order one cabinet with sides, the other cabinets " less sides." ( Suffix "- LS". I.E.: VCAS241222-LS)
C. Vertical mounting angles front and rear have 10-32 thread tapped holes.
EXAMPLES OF USAGE WITH OTHER ASSEMBLIES
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -85
TV/VTR/VCR EDITING CONSOLE
18"
(457 mm)
STANTRON
VIDEO ENTER
\%14.
25"
635 MMI
DESCRIPTION
·Amobile MONITOR BRIDGE TV/VTR/
VCR Console; can be used for editing
VARIABLE
purposes .... etc....
22" to 34" ·Monitor Bridge height can be ad-
(559 mm to 864 mm) justed from floor- level 57" to 69"
(147 mm to 1778 mm). Athree out-
let power strip is included and in-
stalled at the rear panel space. Two
sliding shelves are supplied. Casters
are included.
·Finish: Tan VC7T
·Laminate: Pecan
35/4"
(895 mm)
VC8000-L
$698.50 (as shown)
Approx. Weight 208 lbs.
28%2"
(718 mm)
VC8000 $631.40 lw/o Laminate)
Approx. Weight 206 lbs.
TV/VTR/VCR EDITING CONSOLE
TV/VTR/VCR CONSOLE/CABINET
·TV/VTR/VCR Basic cabinet ·Two sliding shelves included ·Casters included ·3outlet power strip included ·Laminate top included ·Finish: Tan VC1T ·Laminate: Pecan
VE -86
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ACCESSORIES
VIDEO CENTER
ACCESSORIES
N.,------
SLIDING SHELF
-----..
A -- ------", 23" ( 584 mm
SUPPORTING SHELF
USED ON SLOPING FRONT CONSOLE
%.
· Positive- latch feature · Ball bearing slides
· Used with VTR VCR Racks · 100 lb. capacity · Finish Brown -1-">VC16T
A
CATALOG NUMBER
PRICE
APPROX WEIGHT
For 23" RACK
VCSS23-11
$169.40
21.1b.
For 31" RACK
VCSS31-11
171.60
24 113.
SLIDING SHELF
'ee
A _--- .. ,-,-.-.-.,*
58243r"nm -·11
· 100 lb. capacity. · Positive- latch feature.
· Finish: Brown eVC16T · Used with VTR/VCR Racks. · Laminate: Pecan · Ball Bearing Slides.
A
CNAUTMABLEORG
PRICE
AWPEPIRGOHXT.
For 23" RACK
VCSS23-2
$139.70
18 HI
For 31" RACK
VCSS31-2
143.00
20 lb.
FIXED SHELF
22"
(559 mrn)
/PI 17 3/ 4 "
MM)
· Supports rack mounted and non- rack mounted VTR VCR in the sloping panel space of the Sloping Front Cabinet
CATALOG NUMBER VCSH30025
PRICE $50.60
APPROX. WEIGHT 14 lb.
LAMINATE TOP
ON TOP OF SLOPING CONSOLE
21 3/8"
(543 mm
A QUANTITY CABINETS
1
2 3
CATALOG NUMBER VCLT1 VCLT2 VCLT3
· Laminate Pecan
PRICE 4 86.80
113.30 138.60
APPROX WEIGHT 15 lb 30 lb 45 lb
LEVELERS
A For 23" RACK
For31" RACK
CATALOG NUMBER VCFS23 VCFS31
· Used with VTR/VCR racks · Finish: Brown = VC16T · Laminate: Pecan
PRICE $69.30
72.60
APPROX WEIGHT 14 Ib. 18 lb.
· Leveling screw. · Provides bearing surface on uneven floors
CNAUTMABLEORG VCH158
PPERRICSEET $7.81
ACCESSORIES
STANTRON
VIDEO ENTER
ACCESSORIES
FIXED SHELF WITH EXTENSION SHELF
_______--*r
23"
'584 mm)
10" (254 mm)
· Used with VTR ,VCR racks · Extension shelf allows for additional work area · Laminate: Pecan
A For 23" RACK For 31" RACK
CATALOG NUMBER
VCX23 VCX31
PRICE
$128.70 130.90
APPROX. WEIGHT
16 lb.
19 lb.
SLOPING BASE
USED WITH VCF2400 CABINET
22 1/8"7 -
563 mM)
· Used with Monitor- Desk Cabinet. · 19 slope allows for better viewing. · Material: Heavy Ga. Steel. ·Attaching hardware included
CATALOG NUMBER
VCSB240022
PRICE
APPROX. WEIGHT
ANTI-TIP TUBULAR STEEL BASE
SUGGESTED USAGE: WHEN USING SLIDING COMPONENTS PULLED OUT TO FRONT
A
-4->------i<-
--- 30 7/8"
(784 mm)
ANTI-TIP FEATURE
·,.···.t"· 8" (203 MM)
CASTERS
(57 mm) (51 Mm)
ïT33/ 4 " ,95 mm)
3" ·
(76 mm)
( 102 mm) ( 127 mm)
I *KEY
A
E
SELECTION CHART
ITEM
FLAT and SLOPING DESK CONSOLE VTR/VCR RACKS SLOPING FRONT CABINET
VERTICAL FRONT CABINET DUBBING RACKS "K D" CABINETS ANTI- TIP TUBULAR STEEL BASE
ORDERING CHART
WHEEL DIAMETER
2" 51 mm 3" 76 mm 4" 102 mm 5" 127 mm
CAPACITY SET of 4
300 lb.
CATALOG NUMBER
900 lb.
460 lb. VCC4
500 lb. VCC5
MAY BE USED WITH
ABEG
Cor
WITH BRAKES
PRICE
YES $42.46
**NO 45.65
YES 37.13
YES 42.90
APPROX. WEIGHT
4lb. 8lb. 10 lb. 11 lb
·· EXCEPTION: VTR Monitor Bridge Cabinet will include 2casters with brake.
USED WITH:
1 Sloping Front Cabinets 2 Dubbing Rack (23" or 31" width) 3 Vertical Video Cabinets/All-Welded 4 Vertical Video Cabinets/"K-D"
· LEVELERS INCLUDED · See choice of casters on this page.
INCHES A
22%2" 44Vis" 66'%x"
23" 46" 69" 31" 62" 93"
mm A
563 1126 1688
584 1168 1753
787 1575 2362
·USED WITH
1 3 4 1 3 4 1 3 4
2 2 2 2 2 2
NUMBER OF BAYS
ONE TWO THREE ONE
TWO THREE
ONE TWO THREE
CATALOG NUMBER
PRICE
APPROX WEIGHT
VCAT22 $ 145.20 20 lb.
VCAT44 151.80 30 lb.
VCAT66 155.10 38 lb.
VCAT23 145.20 21 lb.
VCAT46 151.80 31 lb.
VCAT69 156.20 39 lb.
VCAT31 147.40 24 lb.
VCAT62 155.10 29 lb.
VCAT93 158.40 421ib
VE -88
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ACCESSORIES
VIDEO CENTER
ACCESSORIES
"SWITCHER" DESK
SLOPING DESK
(550 mm)
83"4"
(222 min(
(101 mm)
· Heavy-duty laminate construction · Canti-levered installation
·Laminate: Pecan · Padded edge
INCHES
mm
INCHES
mm
19 18 486 mm 14'
357 mm
CATALOG NUMBER
VCSW022
$271.70
APPROX WEIGHT
18 lb.
63 /4 "
(222 mm)
NUMBER OF BAYS
WIDE
ONE TWO THREE
. e
INCHES
22%,"
44%."
66'%2"
,
MM
563 1126 1688
(101 mm)
· Heavy-duty laminate construction ·Canti-levered installation
·Laminate: Pecan · Padded edge
CATALOG NUMBER
VCSD22 VCSD44 VCSD66
PRICE
$247.50 332.20 402.60
APPROX WEIGHT
18 lb. 34 lb. 50 lb
"EDITOR" DESK/SLOPING -- or -- " SWITCHER" DESK
(May be used for a controller or swItcheri
"EDITOR" DESK/FLAT
(1 78 mm
(406 mm
234-
,70 MM)
1559 me(
CATALOG NUMBER
VCEDS22 *VCEDS22-PE
PRICE
$108.90 128.70
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT
13 lb.
13 lb.
·With padded edge
REAR/BACK/MODESTY PANEL
USED WITH
CATALOG NUMBER
APPROX. PRICE WEIGHT
VCRK2723
VCRP2723 $32.56 9lb.
VCRK2731
VCRP2731 33.44 12 lb.
VCRK5123
VCRP5123 52.14 19 lb.
VCRK5131
VCRP5131 53.02 22 III.
VCRK6323
VCRP6323 59.84 23 lb.
VCRK6331
VCRP6331 62.70 26 lb.
VCRK7523
VCRP7523 70.07 27 lb.
VCRK7531
VCRP7531 71.83 30 lb.
VCDR23
VCRP23 70.07 27 lb.
VCDR31
VCRP31 71.83 30 lb.
DESK WIDTH:
· Removable ·Conceals cords/cables
45 1/ 2 "
VCRP45
DESK WIDTH:
39.99
\
· Finish. Brown 2--VC7T
67 3/ 4 "
VCRP67 50.71 25 lb.
\
NUMBER OF BAYS
WIDE
ONE
TWO
TH,REE
A
r
INCHES
22%:"
4431e"
661ço"
MM
563 1126 1688
· Heavy-duty laminate construction ·Canti-levered installation ·Laminate: Pecan
CATALOG NUMBER
VCEDF-1
VCEDF-2
VCEDF-3
PRICE
$235.40 255.20 286.00
APPROX. WEIGHT
61 lb. 90 lb. 114 lb
,
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -89
ACCESSORIES
ST/INTRON
VID S CENTER
ACCESSORIES
EDITOR - SLIDING WRITING SHELF
VCSS25 or VCSS30
31/ 2 "
(89 mm)
EDITOR - SLIDING WRITING SHELF WITH DRAWER
(89 mm)
VCLTD25 or VCLTD30
INFORMATION REGARDING ABOVE ITEMS
· Used with: · Recessed flush into cabinets · Sloping front cabinets · Pulls out on slides · Vertical front cabinets · Laminate: Pecan · " K-11" cabinets
CATALOG NUMBER
VCSS25
VÇLT025 VCSS30 VCLTD30
MAY BE USED WITH
SLOPING AND VERTICAL CABINETS
SLOPING CABINETS VERTICAL CABINETS
"K-D" CABINET "K-0" CABINET
PRICE
8124.81_
104.98 136.49 116.67
APPROX. WEIGHT
37 lb.
31 lb. 38 lb. 35 lb.
PANEL SCREWS
· 10-32 thread · Phillips head · Bright nickle plated · " Pressed-on" nylon washer
protects panel finish
CATALOG NUMBER
VCH99
VCH I00
USE WITH
Ye" DEEP FORMED PANEL
Ye" THICK FLAT PANEL
LENGTH INCHES mm
· 11 /4 " 28.6 % " 15.9
PRICE PER 100
$19.47 19.14
APPROX. WEIGHT PER 100
1/ 2 lb.
1/ 2 lb.
PACKAGED BLOWERS
71, 4"
(184 mm)
51 4 " (133mm
· .0· 10 810."-
,,,exxx
re. 6000001 or00,'0 0
row° 000.1000
roe. one°
cote°
19"
(482.6 mm)
SPECIFICATIONS
A. Motors: 1. Double-shielded precision ball bearing. 2. Bearings meet Fed. Spec. = FF-B- 171A. 3. Lubricant used has range from - 29"C. to + 148°C., providing protection exceeding Mil -G-3278 requirements under severehi gh temperature conditions. 4. 115 volt, 50/60 cycle current is standard. 5. 1.6 AMPS, 122 WATTS. 6, All standard motors meet specifications = CC-M-636A 7. MOTOR SPEED: 3050 RPM
B. Filter: 1. Permanent 2. Washable and reusable 3. Easily removable
C. Front Grille: 1. Chrome plated 2. Easily removed 3. 19" wide
D. Blower case painted zinc chromate primer plus greyename l. E. Rotating parts neoprene shock-mounted and isolated from enc losure F. Minimum of 36" type SI 3-wire cord, internally grounded, secure ly
locked to case by strain- relief bushing.
CATALOG NUMBER
VCPB300A
PRICE
$293.70
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT
18 lb.
VENTILATION GRILLE
· Material: aluminum extrusion · Decorative brushed finish · Filter included
· Used with: · Sloping front cabinet · Vertical front cabinet · " K- D" cabinet
A
INCHES
mm
31/ 2 "
89
51/ 4 " 7" 81/ 4 " 10 1/ 2 " 12 1/ 4 "
133 178 222 267 ' 311
CATALOG NUMBER
VCVGR3
VCVGR5 VCVGR7 VCV6118 VCVGR10 VCVGR12
PRICE
$57 .70
64.24 67.21
72.77 78.87 85.53
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT 3 lb.
31/ 2 lb. 4lb.
41/ 2 lb. 5lb. 6lb.
e
VE -90
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ACCESSORIES
VIDEO CENTER
ACCESSORIES
POWER PANEL
19"
1482.6 MR)
EXHAUST or INTAKE FAN ASSEMBLIES
· Combined power panel and outlet strip.
· Rack mountable. · On/ off switch. · 15 amp circJit breaker.
USED WITH
19" WIDE PANEL SPACE 23" WIDE RACK 31" WIDE RACK
· Rear has duplex outlet. · 3- wire 15 ft. line cord. · May be used in conjunction with
other power strips.
CATALOG NUMBER
VCPW19 VCPW23 VCPW31
PRICE
$85.80 86.35 86.90
APPROX. WEIGHT
3lb.
3% lb.
4lb.
POWER STRIP
19"
(482.6 mm)
31/2 ' '83 mM)
· Rack mountable · u U' ground outlets
USED WITH
19" WIDE PANEL SPACE 23" WIDE RACK 31" WIDE RACK
· 15 3-wire line cord. · 15A, 125VAC, 60 HZ, 1875 watts rated
CATALOG NUMBER
VCPS19 VCPS21 VCPS31
PRICE
$60.50 55.50 61.60
APPROX. WEIGHT
3lb. 31/ 2 lb.
4lb.
CATALOG NUMBER
VCTU4 VCTU6 VCTU7 VCTU8 VCTU9 VCTU10 VCTUll VCTU12 VCTU13
COLOR
Light blue Light tan Medium tan Black White Orange Medium green Light green Light grey
TOUCH-UP PAINT IN AEROSOL CANS
PRICE:
$13.20
WEIGHT:
16 OZ. CAN
CATALOG NUMBER
VCTU14 VCTU15 VCTU16 VCTU17 VCTU18 VCTU19 VCTU20 VCTU21
COLOR
Dark grey Medium blue Dark brown Fire red Autumn gold Bamboo Caramel Royal blue
MODEL NO. VCTA530
· STANTRON TUBE AXIAL FAN has been designed for flushing and cooling VIDEO CENTER cabinets. The FAN can be used for both exhaust or in take since 111 flow direction is established by mounting position.
· Two finger guards, one on each side, are provided with each FAN and unit cost includes installation.
· When ordering, specify VCTA530-EX for exhausting air Cr VCTA530 IN for intake of air.
· IMPORTANT: When ordering, specify where fan is to be installed. If installed in door, indicate top or bottom.
DIMENSIONAL DATA
PANEl
FINGER. GUARD
FAN
à
71. TERM _ BLOCK
FINGER h. GUARD
NO. VCTA530-EX EXHAUST FAN ASSEMBLY
PANEL ...
FINGER GUARD FAN
FILTER
e 11RM BLOCK 4
z.
/
DIA.
FINGER GUARD
NO. VCTA530-IN INTAKE FAN ASSEMBLY
CATALOG AUMBER
VCTA530-EX
VCTA530-IN
PRICE
$160.60 165.00
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT
5lb.
5lb.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -91
ACCESSORIES
STANTRON
vosa ENTER
ACCESSORIES
VIDEO EQUIPMENT SHEL:
VIDEO EQUIPMENT STORAGE DRAWER
· Bolts directly to mounting angles
· Support equipment within cabinet · Finish: Black only
CATALOG NUMBER
VCES22 VCES25 VCES30
MAY BE USED WITH
MONITOR-DESK CABINET SLOPING/VERTICAL CABINETS "K-D" CABINET
PRICE
$20.90 23.10 25.30
APPROX. WEIGHT
7lb. 12 lb. 15 lb.
VIDEO EQUIPMENT S _ IDING S-IELF
·Sliding shelf supports equipment within cabinet · Moves in and out on slides · Finish: Black only.
CATALOG NUMBER
VCSL22 VCSL25 VCSL30
MAY BE USED WITH
MONITOR-DESK CABINET SLOPING/VERTICAL CABINETS "K-D" CABINET
PRICE
$45.52 48.87 56.11
APPROX. WEIGHT
10 lb. 16 lb. 18 lb.
VIDEO EQUIPM-ENT SJPPORTING ANGLE
·Supports equipment within cabinet · Bolts directly to mounting angles
· Cad plate finish
CATALOG NUMBER
VCSA22 VCSA25 VCSA30
MAY BE USED WITH
MONITOR-DESK CABINET SLOPING/VERTICAL CABINETS "K·D" CABINET
PRICE
$25.30 27.50 30.80
APPROX. WEIGHT
5lb. 6lb. 7lb.
· Ideal for Storing: · Tapes
·Spare parts
·Video equipment
· Instruction manuals · Roller bearing slides ·Attractive flush pull handle
· Finish: Choice of colors
USE WITH SLOPING FRONT and VERTICAL FRONT CABINETS
CATALOG NUMBER
VCE0325 VCED525 VCED725 VCED825 VCE01025 VCED1225 VCED1425
f
A
i
INCHES
MM
31 /2 "
89
51 /4 "
113
7"
179
83 /4 "
222
101 /2 "
260
121 /2 "
311
14"
356
PRICE
$72.66 76.35 77.45 78.55 82.96 88.06 86.26
APPROX. WEIGHT
20 lb. 22 lb. 23 lb. 25 lb. 27 lb. 28 lb. 30 lb.
USE WITH " KNOCK-DOWN" CABINETS
CATALOG NUMBER
VCED330 VCED530 VCED730 VCED830 VCED1030 VCED1230 VCED1430
[
A
1
INCHES
mm
31e
89
51 /4 "
113
7"
179
83 /4 "
222
10Y2"
260
121 /4 "
311
14"
356
PRICE
$81.43 85.84 89.19 88.04 89.14 87.36 94.64
APPROX. WEIGHT
21 lb. 22 lb. 24 lb. 26 lb. 28 lb. 31 lb. 33 lb.
VE -92
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
STAR CASE
648 Supenor Ave.
Munster, IN 46321 1219) 922-4440
MFG.
CO.,
INC.
CASES
If it's Audio, Video, Computer or anything, Star Case has probably built a case for it. Star
Case has always had the reputation of making " State of the Art" cases. Our quality exceeds far beyond that of our competitors. Star Case is the only company to offer 3ATA rated cases, and 3 lightweight carrying case lines.
ULTRASTAR ·Custom fiberglass laminate ·Appropriate foam density
· Custom design and options available
·8 different colors available ·Custom Ultrastar hardware · Custom large tongue and groove
· Exclusive 14mm construction
Superstar Cases-- Same features as above but use 1/4" plywood instead of 1 / 2".
STANDARD ATA · Custom fiberglass laminate ·Appropriate foam density
· Custom design and options available
·8 different colors available · Custom step-down hardware · Standaro tongue and groove · Exclusive 8mm construction
TRANSPORT II · Custom fiberglass laminate ·Appropriate foam density · Custom design and options avail-
able · Black only · Exterior mounted hardware · Standard tongue and groove · Exclusive 4mm construction
MOVER Il · Custom fiberglass laminate ·Appropriate foam density · Custom cesign and options avail-
able · Black only
· Exterioi military straps · " Shoe- Box" style D case · Exclusive 4mm construction
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -93
TELEPAK SAN DIEGO
8360 Clairemont Mesa Blvd Suite 102 San Diego, CA 92111 (619) 268-8559
CASES
TELEPAK
Designed and constructed with the user in mind, Telepak offers the field productionist the best in soft, over-theshoulder protective carrying case.
Many User- Friendly Features
· Non- slip shoulder strap pad ·Adjustable shoulder strap ·Velcro secured microphone straps ·Adjustable, quick release hand strap ·Washable white balance flap · Cable restraint loops for protecting connectors and
fittings ·Velcro straps for cable routing and control ·Quick out cinch straps for easy removal of VCR ·Velcro enclosure pockets for carrying production
accessories · Bad weather hood surrounding the VCR panel
Rugged Constructmon Features
·Shock absorbina, cross- linked polyethylene foam · Rust- proof slides ·Water repellent, 100% nylon ·Vinyl white card · Indestructible TLlf Buks ·Web nylon fo- straps and loops ( tensile strength 6,000
lbs.) · Magic grip, non- slip shoulder pad ·Woven, nylon hook and napped looped Velcro ·Accessory compartments integrally manufactured as part
of the case
Telepak' carrying cases are custom- designed for portable recorders of every major manufacturer. TelepakTM carrying cases are available from video product dealers throughout the U.S.
Feature Products T- Scope -- Tektronix 1740/50 waveform/vector pak
T-20 -- Sony BVW-20 T- GAF -- Grip and gaffer pak T- Mini GAF -- Half size gaffer pak T-68 -- Sony V06800 T-GRA -- Nagra recorder pak
VE -94
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TENBA, INC.
503 Broadway New York City, NY 10012 (21 2) 96 6-101 3
VB VIDEO BAG
VIDEO BAGS
TENBA VIDEO BAGS
TENBA Video Bags are engineered with the same attention to construction and adaptability as the rest of our line. Padded with 1/2" closed cell waterproof foam, they are designed to give the extra protection that sensitive video equipment demands. Video bags are available in black, grey, brown and blue.
Patents D 273534 and D 273533. Other patents pending.
V212 --
V842 «_
DESCRIPTION
US LIST
11 x10-1/2 x4-1/2", expands to 9", weighs 1lb. 9oz. Outfit bag
holds newest Matsushita built and JVC VCRs with divider for extra battery or microphone or Hitachi built and older Matsushita S150.00 VCRs. Front pocket expands to hold all smaller cameras and NiCad batteries, microphones or tapes. Flattens to as small as 1" when camera is removed.
8-1/2 x 10-1/2 x 3-1/4"; weighs 1 lb. 2 oz. Form Fit case for newest generation Matsushita built 4 head VCRs. Front pocket $115 .® holds spare batteries, tapes or NiCads.
V843
al V844
,
k ei ,
(e `guaiiIIIIIIIM VB
0` ._._._--.1." .-4.--...=
11 x10-1/2 x3-1/2"; weighs 1lb. 3oz. Form Fit case for Hitachi' built and 2head Matsushita built VCRs. Front pocket holds spare $115 -°° batteries, tapes or NiCads.
9x10 x2-3/4"; weighs 1lb. 3oz. Form Fit case for the latest JVC 4 head VCRs. Front pocket holds spare batteries, tapes or $115.00 NiCads.
15 x9-1/2 x5"; weighs 1lb. 5oz. Holds the new Sony Beta movie $90.00 camera.
VM 13 x6x4-1/2"; weighs 1lb. 5oz. Holds the new JVC video movie $90.00 amera and the new Kodak and Polaroid 8mm movie cameras.
TENBA 10
16 x 10 x 8", large gadget bag with movable padded dividers Suitable for microphones, batteries and other accessories. $99.99 Weighs 2 lbs. 6oz.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -95
THERMODYNE INTERNATIONAL LTD.
20850 S. Alameda Long Beach, CA 90810 (213) 603-1976
CASES
The ribbed plastic shell of Thermodyne cases is tough- as- steel, yet pliant and super shock- absorbent.
Ribbing permits the case to " concertina" slightly in impact, absorbing kinetic energy.
These cases outlast metal, fiberglass and wood cases and protect contents better.* Even the prices are better.
Thermodyne cases meet numerous specs and maintain awatertight seal. Many options available. Over 100,000 Thermodyne case supplied to USAF, McDonnell Douglas, Texas Instruments, Hitachi, Sony, Hughes, JVC, Canon, ABC-TV, CBS, NBC, etc.
SHOK-STOP CASES available in 106 sizes Suitable for computers! peripherals, instrumentation, optics, etc. Sizes up to 82 x17 x10
RACK- PACK CASES for shipping and operating rack- mount instruments in the field.
,------\
LOW-COST CUSTOM TRANSIT CASES to meet your particular requirements.
*Test lab reports available on request
VE -96
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ULTIMATE SUPPORT SYSTEMS,
P.O. Box 470 Fort Collins, CO 80522 4700 (303) 493-4488 Telex 4991 589
ULTIMATE SUPPT
INC.
STANDS/TABLES
·
Ind
US- 22 UTILITY STAND The US- 22, smallest of the Ultimate Support Systems' utility stands, weighs 4-1/2 pounds ( 2.04 kg), securely holds up to 75 pounds ( 34 kg) of equipment; 1" ( 2.54 cm) diameter aluminum alloy tubing construction. Features allow the entire stand to fit into aslender 33-1/2" (. 85 m) long bag when disassembled. The US-22, when set up, has aheight of 30-1/4" (.77 m). The perfect stand for: keyboards, mixing boards, lighting consoles, rack equipment, etc. The two support bars can be placed in any of four positions to accommodate various equipment widths. The aluminum is deep etched and clear anodized to provide alook that complements any product it upholds. The feet are double- capped and skid resistant; all nuts are locking type; rubber pads are included to keep equipment from slidmg.
The US-22 is covered by alimited one year warranty. A waterproof nylon tote bag is included for traveling ease.
SPECIFICATIONS
·Height: 30-1/4" (. 77 m) ·Tabletop Dimensions: 28-1/4" x
14-1/8" (. 72 x . 36 m) ·Load Capacity: 75 pounds ( 34 kg) ·Breakdown Dimensions: 33-3/8" x
4" dia. (. 85 x . 1m dia.) ·Weight: 4-1/2 pounds ( 2.04 kg) ·Set up time: 2minutes
US- 22
$80.00
US-44 UTILITY STAND The US-44 Utility Stand is constructed of 1-1/2" dia. ( 3.81 cm) aluminum alloy tubing. The products' 6-1/2 pound ( 2.95 kg) structure securely holds up to 75 pounds ( 34 kg) of equipment. The tubing goes through a special etching and anodizing process to create arich matte look to complement any piece of equipment it upholds. The top dimensions are 15-3/4" x34-1/8"(.40 x . 87 m). The two support bars can be placed in any of four positions for various equipment widths. When set up, the
US-44's36" (. 91 m) height is perfect for mounting keyboards, lighting consoles, mixing boards, etc. The entire stand disassembles to slip into a slender 40" ( 1m) long waterproof
nylon tote bag, which is included.
Additional features include: double capped skid resistant feet, locking
type nuts, and rubber pads to keep equipment from sliding.
SPECIFICATIONS
·Height: 36" (. 91 m) ·Tabletop Dimensions: 15-3/4" x
34-1/8" (. 40 x . 87 m) ·Load Capacity: 75 pounds ( 34 kg) ·Breakdown Dimensions: 39-1/4" x
5-1/4" dia. ( 1.00 x . 13 m dia.) ·Weight: 6-1/2 pounds ( 2.95 kg) ·Set up time: 2minutes
US-44
$ 105.00
VT-44 VERSA TABLE The VT-44 is ideal for elevating large synthesizers and keyboards; mixing consoles, lighting controls, and other paraphernalia. The VT-44 is constructed of lightweight aluminum alloy tubing. The deep etch and clear anodize gives the quality appearance that complements any type of equipment that is placed on it. The VT-44 features individually adjusting legs ( seven height settings). Coupled with the absence of long braces, this enables the VT-44 to straddle rows of theater seats, sit securely on uneven ground and tilt to adjust to individual preferences. The table top is constructed of 1/8" ( 3.2 mm) oil tempered hardboard and is covered with heavy black vinyl. The edging is constructed of vinyl clad metal, providing tough protection all around. The table top dimensions are 22" by 44" (. 56 x1.12 m). Height can be adjusted in 2-1/4" ( 5.8 cm) increments between 20" and 33" (.51 m and . 84 m). A brace under the center of the table top gives asolid working surface capable of supporting 250 pounds ( 113.4 kg) of equipment. Spring buttons and ball- lock pins make setup and breakdown asnap.
Double capped skid resistant feet are glued on to stay in place. The VT-44 comes with atough waterproof nylon tote bag for easy transportation and storage.
SPECIFICATIONS
·Height: 20" - 33" (. 51 - . 84 m)
·Tabletop Dimensions: 22" x44" (. 56
x1.12 m)
·Load Capacity: 250 pounds ( 113.4
kg)
·Breakdown Dimensions: 22" x44" x
2-1/2"(.56 x1.12 x . 064 m)
·Weight: 15-1/4 pounds ( 6.9 kg)
·Set up time: 1minute
VT-44
$210.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -97
VIKING
10480 Oak Street, NE St. Petersburg, FL 33702 (813) 577-1216
CASES
COMBO CAMERA/VTR
RACK CASES
VIDEO PROJECTOR WITH CONTROLLER
STACKER
·Reel-to-reel system cases ·Triple stack 35mm projector cases ·Video tape recorder cases
·Video camera cases ·BB rack style cases ·Monitor ( TV) cases ·Shock- mounted BB rack style cases ·Projector and screen cases ·Shock mounted broadcast racks
Wherever you look on a Viking case, you'll see superior strength and workmanship. Wood panels laminated with tough, scratch resistant ABS or stucco aluminum are supported by adouble edged aluminum extrusion crimped at intervals for a permanent, non-yielding bond; a construction technique far stronger than conventional gluing, stapling or riveting.
Viking's heavy duty valances contribute to long life and a tight fit. And all but the smallest Viking cases are equipped with heavy duty steel recessed hardware including spring loaded handles, twist locks and corners. All Viking hardware is attached with steel rivets and backed with steel washers; your assurance of greater strength and impact resistance.
CARRYLITE CASES
The Carrylite is 25% less expensive arid 30% lighter than our ATA case. Carrete is rugged...built of dependable heavy gauge ABS for exceptional strength yet still a beautiful and versatile way to carry your valuable equipment. Carrylite is adaptable in size for audio/visual, video, computers, and musical instruments.
VE -98
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
P.O. Box 7350 Toledo, OH 43615
(41 9) 531-4900
VIDEO EQUIPMENT CARTS
Model EFP-17 Folding All- Terrain Field Production Cart
The Wheelit EFP-17 folding camera cart is
the big brother to ENG-1. EFP-17 is alarger,
smoother folding vehicle designed to assemble all of the necessary portable video equipment required for quality field produc-
tion. It features aseparate shelf to support your monitor for playback or viewing as the
action happens. The monitor platform is
positioned forward to place the recorder controls at the fingertips of the operator. With optional elevator column and head, taping may be accomplished directly from the cart. Large 12 inch inflatable pneumatic wheels dampen vibration and allow basic dolly moves over general terrain. Wheelit EFP-17 folds to 15-1/2 inches and only the camera and monitor need be removed for storage. The equipment board is predrilled in 1inch increments for quick adjustment.
EFP-17 Specifications Equipment platform Monitor platform
Camera platform* Folded size Load capacity Wheel base Wheels ( inflatable) Casters Straps Shipping
17" x29" 15" x21" x41"H
6" x17" x37"H 42" x28" x15"
175 lbs. 16"
12" pneumatic 5" swivel w/lock
1ea. 8', 2ea. 5' Assm. 57 lbs. truck
*NOTE: Camera platform is predrilled for elevator column.
Accessories: Receptacle and Cord Reel, Elevator Column, Friction Head, or Fluid Head
EFP-17
$ 429.00
The Challenger Model DG/H4/TM
DG/H4 Specifications
Load Capacity
25 lbs.
Minimum Height
34"
Maximum Height
70"
Elevation Adjustment
16"
Geared Center Post
13/8" Dia.
Leg Diameters
11/8" -- 11/4"
Head Tilt Angles
60° up- 90° Down
Spring Loaded Head
2Springs
Head Pan Rotation
360°
Weight
8lbs.
Material Er Finish
Clear and Black
Anodized Alum.
Self- Locking Gear Mechanism
DG/H4/TM Friction Head Et Column $ 145.00
Model FM -25
Specifications ·Camera platform 4" x41 / 4 " ·Accommodates cameras up to 25 lbs. · Dual handle capability · Positive tilt lock and pan lock · Leakproof and dustproof sealing · Easily visible bubble level gauge
EFP-17 W/COLUMN Et HEAD
IFP-20
·Camera screw 3/8"-16 Er 1/4"-20 · Extremely smooth pan Et tilt movements ·Weight: 5lbs. · Height: 5" · Fits ball on flat top tripod. · Low profile design. ·Rugged construction. · Reliable operation. ·Compatible with European standards. ·Unique quick release camera
mounting screw with slot to allow camera balancing. ·Tilt: + 90°
DG/TM/FM-25 Fluid Head Et Column $350.00
(Includes Head and Elevator Column Assig)
Model IFP-20 (Non- Folding) Industrial Field Production Cart
Wheelit IFP-20 is a heavy duty industrial, non- folding camera cart designed to assemble all of the necessary video equipment required for quality industrial video production. This Wheelit vehicle will accommodate camera, video cassette recorder with electric editing, monitor, camera control unit, AC adaptors, batteries and/or battery packs. Taping can be accomplished directly from the vehicle with the addition of an optional elevator column and head. The large inflatable pneumatic tires offer smooth transportation over rough terrain.
IFP-20 Production Cart $308.00
DAVIS Et SANFORD THE CHALLENGER
FLUID HEAD
MODEL DG/H4/TM
MODEL DG/TM/FM-25
IFP-20 Specifications Upper platform* Center platform
Lower platform Load capacity Wheel base Wheels ( inflatable) Casters
Straps Shipping ( 3crt.)
29" x19" x40"H 29" x19" x28"H
18" x24' x10"H 200 lbs. 21"
12" pneumatic 5" swivel w/lock
3ea. 8' K/D, 75 lbs. UPS
*NOTE: Upper platform is pre- drilled for elevator column.
Accessories: Receptacle and Cord Reel, Elevator Column, Friction Head, or Fluid Head
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -99
P.O. Box 7350 Toledo, OH 43615 (419) 531-4900
VIDEO EQUIPMENT CARTS
Model ENG -1Mobile Camera Cart
The EN G-1 mobile camera cart was develop-
ed for the video industry as the ideal vehicle
for transporting and employing portable
video recording equipment. The unit accom-
modates most VTR and camera CCU's as
well as their AC adaptors and battery packs.
Addition of the optional elevator column and
friction or cam link head converts the ENG-1
into one of the most versatile production
tools available. ENG-1 folds to a slim 12
inches for transportation and storage. The
equipment board is pre- drilled in 1- inch
increments for rapid adjustment.
$285.00
ENG-1 Specifications
Equipment platform
14" x29"
Camera platform
6" x14" x35"H
Wheel base
16"
Wheels
12"
Casters
4" swivel
Load capacity
150 lbs.
Straps
2ea., 4'
Folded size
23" x42" x12"
Shipping
Assm. 45 lbs. UPS
*NOTE: Camera platform is pre- drilled for
optional column.
Accessories: Receptacle and Cord Reel, Elevator Column,
Friction Head, or Cam Head.
Model GR -3Video Cart
The Model GR -3 is the smaller offspring of
the ENG-1. This folding video cart is
designed to store, transport, and operate
your portable 1/2" VCR equipment. This
lightweight, affordable cart is ruggedly built
with 8" semi- pneumatic wheels and 4" front
swivel casters. The GR -3 is standard with
spring head and telescoping column which
will accommodate cameras up to 7 pounds.
With model GR -3Wheelit, there is no need to
carry or set-up equipment on location; it's all
there on your cart when you are ready to
shoot. The cart can be folded with your
equipment in place.
$325.00
GR -3 Specifications Equipment platform
Wheel base
Wheels Casters
Load capacity Straps Folded size
Column height Shipping
13" x33"
16"
8" 4" swivel
100 lbs. 3each, 5' 21" x41" x10"
43" min., 82" max. Assm.391bs. UPS
Accessories: Receptacle and Cord Reel.
mom'
MODEL ENG-1 WITH COLUMN AND HEAD
Model CAM -10 Video Cassette Cart
Wheelit Model CAM -lois designed to accept all 1 / 2" and 1/4" portable VCR equipment as well as their AC adaptors and battery packs. The upper shelf of the CAM- 10 is parallel to the ground and is large enough to accept a full size monitor or asmall VCR and monitor combination. The lower shelf can be placed in a horizontal position or can be firmly locked into a slanted position to hold a recorder and/or battery pack. The Model CAM- 10 comes complete with elevator column and anti- dumping spring head and will handle TV cameras up to 15 pounds.
$435.00
CAM- 10 Specifications Top platform Bottom platform Wheel base Wheels
Casters Load capacity Straps Column height Folded size
Shipping
16" x24" x36"H 15" x18" x6"H 16" 10"
4" 150 lbs. 2ea. 6', 1ea. 5' 45" min., 60" max. 25" x40" x12"
Assm. 58 lbs. truck
Accessories: Receptacle and Cord Reel.
Ç t 'Ne ir
MODEL GR -3
MODEL CAM- 10
VE -100
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
-.----D
P.O. Box 7350
Toledo, OH 43615 (419) 531-4900
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT CARTS
MODEL 430
TRANSPORTER SERIES
Models 430/4102/3302
Indoor/Outdoor Carts
Models 430, 4102 and 3302, the work horses of the Wheelit line, are designed as general purpose indoor/outdoor carts. These nonfolding transporters are standard with four inch casters, large rear wheels, and two equipment straps.
Models 430 and 4102 are ideal for operation
of projection equipment from the back of a
room, over the heads of an audience. The
430 has an extra wide top platform for larger
equipment. Model 3302 is best suited to
operation of audio/visual equipment from a
center aisle audience arrangement.
430
$ 160.00
4102
149.00
3302
138.00
Model 430 Specifications Upper platform Lower platform Load capacity Wheel base Wheels Casters Straps Shipping
30" x20" x41"H 19" x21" x13"H
150 lbs. 17" 12"
4" swivel w/lock 1ea. 8', 1ea. 6'
K/D, 58 lbs. truck
Model 4102 Specifications
Upper platform
21" x19" x41"H
Lower platform
19" x21"x 13"H
Load capacity
150 lbs.
Wheel base
17"
Wheels
12"
Casters
4" swivel w/lock
Straps
2ea. 6'
Shipping
K/D, 53 lbs. truck
Model 3302 Specifications
Upper platform
21" x19" x33"H
Lower platform
19" x21" x13"H
Load capacity
140 lbs.
Wheel base
17"
Wheels
10"
Casters
4" swivel w/lock
Straps
2ea. 6'
Shipping
K/D, 47 lbs. UPS
Accessories Receptacle and Cord Reel.
MODEL 4102
VAGABOND SERIES
Models 2727/4327/5330 Universal Carts
Wheelit Model 2727 is designed for universal transportation and utilization of audio/visual and electronic instrument equipment. This non- folding Wheelit features dual caster locks, tilt back handles, and 10- inch wheels.
The rigid tri -level Wheelit Model 5330 and the
4327 are designed for indoor transportation
and utilization of video tape recording and
playback equipment. The tallest Wheelit
incorporates two tilt screws for positioning
the monitor to standing eye level without
adjustment.
2727
$ 143.00
4327
187.00
5330
204.00
Model 2727 Specifications
Top platform
19" x27" x27"H
Bottom platform
18" x24" x9"H
Load capacity
150 lbs.
Wheel base
21"
Wheels
12"
Casters
4" swivel w/lock
Straps
1ea. 8'
Shipping 12 crt.)
K/D, 48 lbs. UPS
Model 4327 Specifications
Top platform
19" x27" x43"H
Center platform
19" x27" x28"H
Bottom platform
18" x24" x9"H
Load capacity
160 lbs.
Wheel base
21"
Wheels
12"
Casters
5" swivel w/lock
Straps
1ea. 8', 1ea. 6'
Shipping 12 crt)
K/D, 65 lbs. UPS
Model 5330 Specifications
Top platform
19" x30" x53"H
Center platform
19" x30" x34"H
Bottom platform
18" x24" x9"H
Load capacity
160 lbs.
Wheel base
21"
Wheels
12"
Casters
5" swivel w/lock
Straps
1ea. 8', 1ea. 6'
Shipping 12 cril
K/D, 75 lbs. UPS
Accessories Receptacle and cord reel.
MODEL 3302
MODEL 2727
MODEL 4327
-----,e00011111 allaffl· delta,
MODEL 5330
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -101
P.O. Box 7350 Toledo, OH 43615 (419) 531-4900
PORTAGE SERIES
Models S-4218/4218/TV-503
Indoor/Outdoor Carts
Wheelit Model 4218 is designed for indoor/ outdoor transportation of video player and monitor unit. The 5" casters and 12" rear wheels assure a smooth ride and stability over questionable terrain. The model 4218 folds to a thin 12" to store in a closet or automobile trunk. As with all folding Wheelits, the platforms lock into the upright position with positive assurance. The Model S-4218 increases the utility and load capacity by adding a15" x18" bottom platform to the model 4218. This bottom platform locks into a slanted position when the cart is folded.
Wheelit Model TV- 503 is a non- folding cart
that features atop platform for placement of
atelevision monitor for the viewers' standing
line of vision. The top platform incorporates
two leveling screws for tilting the monitor ten
degrees. For presentation to a seated
audience, the top platform is folded down
and viewing equipment is placed upon the
second shelf for proper eye level.
S-4218
$ 253.00
4218
231.00
TV- 503
242.00
Model S-4218 Specifications
Upper platform
18" x25" x42"H
Center platform
18" x25" x30"H
Clearance
11"H x25 3/4 "W
Lower platform
15" x18" x8"H
Wheel base
16"
Wheels
12"
Casters
5" swivel w/lock
Load capacity
180 lbs.
Straps
1ea. 8', 1ea. 6'
Folded size
46"x 24" x12"
Shipping
Assm. 69 lbs. truck
Model 4218 Specifications
Upper platform
18" x25" x42"H
Center platform
18" x25" x30"H
Clearance
11"H x25 3/4 "W
Wheel base
16"
Wheels
12"
Casters
5" swivel w/lock
Load capacity
180 lbs.
Straps
1ea. 8', 1ea. 6'
Folded size
46"x 24" x12"
Shipping
Assm. 62 lbs. truck
Model TV- 503 Specifications
Upper platform
24" x19" x50"H
Center platform
24" x19" x36"H
Clearance
13"H x25 3/4 "W
Lower platform
19" x21" x14"H
Wheel base
17"
Wheels
12"
Casters
4" swivel w/lock
Load capacity
160 lbs.
Straps
1ea. 8', 2ea. 6'
Folded size
non- folding
Shipping
Assm. 70 lbs. truck
Accessories Receptacle and Cord Reel.
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT CARTS
MODEL S-4218
MODEL 4218
MODEL TV- 503
VE -102
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
P.O. Box 7350 Toledo, OH 43615 (419) 531-4900
WORK STATION CARTS
FOLDING SLIM- LINE SERIES
Models 3628/S- 3628/2916/S-2916 Work Station Carts
Wheelit Folding Slim- Line Model 3628 is designed for indoor/outdoor transportation of office machines, lab equipment, and
electronic monitoring mardware. The large upper platform is positioned at aconvenient working height for technicians on the move. Wheelit Model S-3628 has an additional lower platform to handle extra pieces of equipment. Both carts fold in seconds for fast and efficient storage.
Model 2916 was designed with the salesperson in mind. This rugged cart weighs only
33 lbs., folds to 10 inches, and yet has aload capacity of 150 lbs. Its platform height of 29" makes it the ideal working desktop. The thick
sound- absorbing particle board with vinyl edge molding makes it the preferred demonstration cart. Model S-2916 has an additional lower platform for equipment
accessories.
3628 S-3628 2916 S-2916
$ 193.00 215.00 160.00 182.00
Model 3628 Specifications
Top platform Folded size Load capacity Wheel base Wheels Casters Straps Shipping
20" x28" x36" H 42" x25" x12" 180 lbs. 16" 12"
5" swivel w/lock 1ea., 6'
Assm. 48 lbs. truck
Model S-3628 Specifications
Top platform Lower platform Folded size
Load capacity Wheel base Wheels Casters Straps
Shipping
20" x28" x36"H 15" x18" x7"H
42" x25" x12"H
200 lbs. 16" 12"
5" swivel w/lock 1ea., 6'
Assm. 54 lbs. truck
Model 2916 Specifications
Top platform Folded size Load capacity Wheel base Wheels
Casters Straps Shipping
24" x16" x29" 38" x24" x10"
150 lbs. 16" 10"
4" swivel w/lock 1ea., 6'
Assm. 40 lbs. UPS
MODEL 2916
MODEL S-2916
Model S-2916 Specifications
Top platform Lower platform Folded size Load capacity Wheel base Wheels Casters
Straps Shipping
24"x 16"x 29"H 15" x18" x6"H
38" x24" x10"H 170 lbs. 16" 10"
4" swivel w/lock
1ea., 6' Assm. 48 lbs. UPS
Accessories: Receptacle and Cord Reel.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MODEL 3628
flaireee----
MODEL S-3628
VE-103
P.O. Box 7350 Toledo, OH 43615 (419) 531-4900
ALL PURPOSE CARTS
FOLDING ACTION SERIES
Models C-402/68-402P/69-22VTR
All Purpose Carts
Wheelit Model C-402 is an all purpose utility vehicle designed for transportation of video tape equipment, audio/visual equipment,
photography equipment, and business machines. Model C-402 has become a
particular favorite of photographers because it offers an abundant carrying capacity.
Construction of Wheelits 68-402P and 69-22 VTR is similar; however, basic differences will be found in the length of the wheel bases and the dimensions of the platforms. The upper and lower platforms are spaced so that a VT monitor and recorder can be interchanged to accommodate different viewing heights. Folded, these Wheelits fit into most automobile trunks. Heavy duty equipment straps are standard.
C-402 68-402-P 69-22VTR
$ 242.00 259.00 270.00
Model C-402 Specifications
Upper platform Center platform Lower platform Load capacity Wheel base Wheels Casters Folded size Straps Shipping
21" x16" x40"H 21" x12" x18"H
19"x 6"x 4"H 150 lbs. 16" 12"
4" swivel w/lock 15"x 38"x 25" 2ea., 6'
Assm. 56 lbs. truck
Model 68-402P Specifications
Upper platform Center platform Lower platform Load capacity Wheel base Wheels Casters Folded size Straps Shipping
24" x16" x40"H 24" x15" x18"H 19"x 8Y2"x 5"H
175 lbs. 19" 12"
5" swivel w/lock 17" x38" x25"
1ea., 8', 1ea., 6' Assm. 65 lbs. truck
Model 69-22VTR Specifications
Upper platform
24" x18" x40"H
Center platform
24" x18" x14"H
Lower platform Load capacity
19" x11" x5"H 175 lbs.
Wheel base
22"
Wheels Casters
12" 5" swivel w/lock
Folded size
20" x38" x25"
Straps
2ea., 9'
Shipping
Assm. 70 lbs. truck
Accessories: Receptacle and Cord Reel.
MODEL C-402 MODEL 69-22VTR
VE -104
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
MODEL 68-402P
·4 0
9e-
P° \('
F ee'
$75.00
HWC/h. wilson co. offers you VERSATILITY, STABILITY and SECURITY for your Video Equipment
VSC29M $480.00
VSC42W $ 682.00
VS40 with VSC29W
VTR29MC $ 243.00 WKD42 with WKDC
VC- 1-DA $ 1010.00 W48S $162.00
VS69 with VSC42M Et VSS18W
$1004.00 1200-C
$262.00 VC- 3-DA
$1226.00
$99.00
$127.00
#60
$555.00
$65.00
HWC/h.wilson co.
Prices and Specificatiore. Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-105
FIWC1h.wilson co.
555 W. Taft Drive South Holland, IL 60473 (312) 339-5 111 ( 800) 342-5492
NEW Modular RACK & STACK Video Furniture System in Metal or Wood
... in any combination you desire!
It's the modular system you can design to your needs with options you select; sturdy metal mobile racks with shelves and cabinets in metal or wood. Comfortably secures your video equipment including your largest 25" video monitor.
VIDEO FURNITURE
VS69 with VS29M and VSS24M
Three- sided racks and extended base designed for stability and protection.
Video System Mobile Rack Modules
All racks constructed of heavy- gauge steel with 37-1/2" wide x27-1/2" deep bases. VS40, VS54 equipped with 4" casters; VS69, VS78 with 5" casters. Two lock. Reinforced back panel has 2-1/2" dia. openings for
electrical cords. Provisions for electrical assembly make it a self-contained mobile unit. Brown enamel finish. Accepts both wood and metal VSC29, VSC42 cabinets
and VSS18, VSS24 shelves.
Model No.
Description
Floor to Top of Base lin.)
Ship Wt. (lbs.)
Price
VS40 40"H Rack Module
7
VS54 54·H Rack Module
7
VS89 69"H Rack Module
8
VS78
78'H Rack Module
8
188 195 233 251
8499.00 530.00 588.00 580.00
Shelves include re
5" casters available on VS40, VS54.
ELECTRICAL ASSEMBLIES
Model No.
Ship Description Wt. ( lbs.)
Price
WE4.U.L. 4outlets WE8-U.L. 6outlets
2
$27.00
3
30.00
CSA Approved Electricals Available.
Video System Metal and Wood Cabinets
Choose between heavy-duty metal or wood modular cabinets. VSCM models made of heavy- gauge steel with almond enamel finish. Features lockable doors and equipment retaining lip on cabinet top. VSCW models made from laminated wood with highpressure surfaces with lockable tambour door. VSC29M and VSC29W comes equipped with 5-1/2" deep pull-out tray and adjustable pull-out shelf. VSC42M and VSC42W has same features as 29", high cabinets plus extra adjustable pull-out shelf. All VSCM's,
VSCW's provide electrical openings and vents.
Model No.
VSC29M VSC42M VSC29W VSC42W
Description
28- 1 /4 "H x31 1 /4 W x24"D Metal Cabinet 41- 1 /4 "H x31 1 /4 "W x24"D Metal Cabinet 28- 1 /4 "H x31'/."W x24"D Wooden Cabinet 41- 1 /4 "H x31 1 /4 "W x24"D Wooden Cabinet
Cabinet Dims. (Interior)
Ship Wt. ( lbs.)
Price
25 1/ 4 "H x25- 1/ 4 "W x23"D
110
38 1/ 4 "H x25- 1/ 4 "W x23"D
121
25'h " H x28- 1/ 4 "W x21- 1/ 4 "D 130
38'h"H x28- 1/ 4 "W x21- 1/ 4 "D 160
$480.00 800.00 505.00 682.00
Video System Shelves
VSSM models made of heavy gauge steel with brown enamel finish. VSSW models are 3/4" laminated with oak grain high-pressure surfaces. All shelves come complete with equipment retaining lip and bolts for fastening to sides of rack modules.
VS89
with VSC29W, VSS18W and VSS184A
Model No.
VSS18M VSS24M VSS18W VSS24W
Description
18"D x31 1/2 "W Metal Shelf 24"D x31 1/2 W Metal Shelf 18"D x31 1/ 2 "W Wooden Shelf 24"D x31 1/2 "W Wooden Shelf
Ship Wt. (Lbs.)
22 25 25 28
Price
$82.00 88.00 80.00 68.00
Caution...DO NOT EX. CEED THE ATTACHMENT HEIGHT OF THE RACK MODULE.
VE -106
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HWCI h.wilson
555 W. Taft Drive South Holland, IL 60473 (312) 339-5 111 MOO) 342-5492
co.
VIDEO CONSOLES/MOUNTS
VC- 2-DA
VC- 3-DA
H.Wilson Video Consoles
Elegant, pract.cal. All feature durable, 3/4" laminated wooa with beautifu. walnut grain surfaces that resist heat and scratches
VC- I-DA Top unit holds Lp to a 21" video
monitor plus VCR. Has flow- through ventilation. Lower cabinet has slide-out shelf. Extra shelf available. Cabinets may be independently locked. Features semi-concealed 4" swivel casters. Ships factory assembled. Model VC- 1-DA: 66"H x30"W x24"D Shp. wt. 313 lbs. Price $ 1010.00 VC-S Sliding Pull- Out Shelf: Shp. wt. 15 lbs. Price $ 66.00
TV CAMERA/VIDEO MOUNTS
VC- 2-DA Handsome,
- - ··
stationary console houses both your video monitor and
4 1 1 .-- I
VCR. Doors lock. Factory
assembled.
Model VC- 2-DA: 34"H x30"W x24"D. Shp. wt. 153 lbs.
Price $468.00
VC- S Sliding Pull- Out Shelf: Shp. wt 15 lbs.
Price $66.00
VC-3-DA Perfect con-
sole for your largest video
monitor and VCR. Pull- Out Shelf makes VCR easily ac· cessible. Features large
storage area. Doors lock. Semi- concealed 4" swivel
casters. Factory assembled. Model VC.3-DA: 32"H x30"W x24"D Shp wt 160 lbs.
Price $555.00 VC- S Slide- Out Shelf. Shp. wt 15 lbs. Price $66.00
Choice of two great camera mounts to hold your lightweight secur.ty cameras. Model 060 attaches directly to your wall or ceiling or it can be attached to astandard square four-outlet electrical box. Has adownward tilt of about 25* and afull 360° rotation. Model # 50 comes completely assembled and is easy to mount on your wall. Has a60° lateral and a20° vertical adjustment.
200-C
VC -4 -DA Compact, well-ventilateo, single
cabinet, locking console. 51" height perfect for
monitor viewing. Pull-out shelf
for VCR; readily accessible.
Drawer for cassettes, camera,
accessories. Semi- concealed
4" swivel casters. Factory
assembled.
Model VC- 4-DA: 51"H x30"W x
24"D. Shp. wt. 220 lbs. Price $732.00
r.
'
O
Choice of four great TV mounts. Model # 55 attaches to your wall and will hola TV
receiver up to 30 lbs. Has a60" lateral and a20* vertical adjustment. Model # 700
holds TV up to 75 lbs. Rotates 60' and tilts up to 8°. Model #900 is aheavy-duty
wall mount-- holds TV up to 200 lbs.
Swivel and tilt capability. Model # 200 is a
ceiling mount and holds TV up to 200 lbs. TV bolts to supports. Rotates 60° and
tilts up to 15°. All are made of heavy gauge steel, dark brown finish.
Model No,
50 55 5055 60 200-C 700 900
Description
Camera Mount TV Mount Camera & TV Mourt Package Ceiling/Wall Mount Ceiling Mount Wall Mount for Commercial TV Heavy- Duty TV Wail Mount
Ship Wt. ( Lbs.)
3 4 7 3 25 10 15
Price
70.00 75.00 130.00 65.00 127.00 99.00 127.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -107
HWCih.wilson co 555 W. Taft Drive South Holland, IL 60473 · ( 312) 339-51 11 ( 800) 342-5492
VIDEO TABLES/ CENTERS/CABINETS
SUPER- RUGGED table for video systems
A basic, super- rugged, three- shelf table especially designed to support your heaviest video equipment. Has been tested to securely hold more than 450 lbs. Features 1" chromeplated tubular steel legs and 18-gauge steel shelves · 33% heavier than used for conventional tables. Shelves have rolled retaining lip that adds strength, enhances safety. Top shelf has anon- slip rubber mat. Shelf heights may be infinitely adjusted and the patented corner clips clamp the shelves to the legs with agrip that's stronger than a weld. Table rolls surely and easily on 4" swivel, ball- bearing casters. Two may be locked for in- place stability. Web strap available for securing monitor.
Model WKD-Basic Table
Model No.
Ht. (In.)
Shelf Size (In.)
Ship Wt. (Lbs.)
Price
WKD54 WKD48 WKD42
54
21x30
57
48
21x30
56
42
21x30
55
$183.00 181.00 171.00
Specify " E" for electrical assembly with 20' cord, two grounded
receptacles, U.L. listed. Add 3 lbs. to shipping wt and add $25.00. CSA approved add $35.00.
Model AWS Stability Strap holds video monitor securely to
shelf. Shp. Wt. 1lb.
Price $20.00
Cabinet Kit for WKD Table
Add 30"Wx19"Hx21"D of lockable storage to your WKD
Basic Table with the WKDC Cabinet Kit. Mounts between
two shelves. You get a steel back panel, two side panels,
and a pre- hung door with lock and two keys. Same brown
color as shelves.
Model WKDC. Shp. Wt. 26 lbs.
Price $ 91.00
Add-a-Shelf
Need more equipment support surface? Add an extra shelf. Same construction, finish, height adjustment features as shelves for Basic Table. Corner clamps included.
Model WKDS: Shp, Wt. 10 lbs.
Price $47.00
Compact Video Center
Takes just 18"x24" of floor space. Locking cabinet.Rolls with
ease on 2" hooded ball swivel casters Top shelf adjusts to give 6-5/8", 10-5/8" or 17-3/4" clearance between shelves.
Ht. Model (In.)
Shelf
Approx.
Size (In.) Ship.W1.(lbs)
Price
VTR40
40 1
18x24
54
$196.00
VTR4OE
40*
18x24
56
$ 221.00
·With top shelf at highest position "E" model comes with electrical assembly Top shelf has non- slip rubber mat
Video Tables and Cabinets
Choose tables with flat or 5° slanted tops. All have non- slip rubber mats. Shelves have raised rims, except for SPEC 48. Cabinet models lock. 4" casters throughout; two lockable.
Model No.
Description
Top to Middle Ht. Shelf (In.) On.)*
Middle to Bottom Shelf One
Shelf Ship. Size Wt. (In.) ( Lbs.)
Price
W54S
Top shelf
54 25
W54TV
slants 5° Top shelf flat
54 26 1/ 2
W48S
Top shelf
48 19
slants 5°
W48TV
Top shelf flat
48 20 V2
SPEC48S For extra wide 48 20 1/2
TV, top shelf
slants 5°
W42TV Top shelf flat 42 12 1/ 2
For TV and
general use
17 V2
24x28 59
17 1/2 17 1/ 2
24x28 62 24x28 56
17 V2 17 1/2
24x28 57 25x34 69
17/2
24x28 55
$169.00 $165.00 $162.00
9%2.00 $206.00
$154.00
TV CABINETIZED TABLES
W54SC
W54C W48SC
W48C W42TVC
Top Shelf slants 5° Top shelf flat Top shelf slants 5° Top shelf flat Top shelf flat
54 25
54 26 1/ 2 48 19
48 20 1/ 2 42 12 ,2
17V2
17 1/ 2 17 1/ 2
17 1/2 17 1/ 2
VIDEO TABLES AND CABINETS
VTR29
Open table tor 29
video equip
VTR29MC Fully enclosed 29
2locking doors
20 1/ 2 20 1/ 2
24x28
24x28 24x28
24x28 24x28
78
$283.00
78
$249.00
75
$248.00
76
$242.00
74 $239.00
18)(40 46 1hx40 65
$131.00 $243.00
Specify " E" for electrical assembly; add $25.00. · Oearance between shelves.
Accessories WEA Electric Assembly- 20' power cord with double receptacle; UL listed; $30.00 CSA approved $35.00. 5" Casters; $28.00. AWS Web Strap to hold receiver securely to top shelf 11' $20.00. W15058 Tape Rack holds 24 video tapes; $38.00.
VE -108
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
The Wasted. Corporation
9801 James Circle · Phone: ( 612) 888-1957 · Minneapolis, MN 55431
For full- line catalog of editing, production and dubbing consoles, tape and film trucks, film and videotape storage systems
PHONE TOLL- FREE 1-800-328-2962
Winsted makes it easy to...
EDIT...
PRODUCE IT...
The secret of a smooth- running video center is to have everything you need where you want it. Winsted makes that happen with the industry's most complete line of editing and production consoles, dubbing units, tape and film trucks and space- saving storage systems for film and videotape.
STORE IT!
No matter what VTR equipment you use, Winsted's Matchmaker Systems offer a unit to match your requirements. Our designs are based on consultations with professional video users like yourself. You have chosen
your video equipment carefully, to meet your specific needs. Now choose the video furniture system that fits your equipment.. quality systems from Winsted
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -109
The Winged Corporation
DUBBING RACKS Et STORAGE
THE " DUBBING" GROUP
I. MODEL 04500 STATIONARY DUPLICATING CENTER. All shelves
are on ball bearing rollers for easy pullout of machines, and vertically adjustable in 1" increments. Steel construction with
beige and cocoa brown finish with walnut woodgrain shelves. Units can be bolted togethet for economical duplication system. Overall dimensiors are 72"H x20"D x30W.
J. MODEL D4601 SPACE SAVING DUPLICATING CONSOLES. Four pullout VTR shelves. Rack cabinet gives
14" of rack space for switching and monitor equipment. All shelves verti-
cally adjust in 1" increments. Overall dimensions a.e 72"H x20"D x30W.
K. MODEL 09200 DUPLICATION CENTER. For 1/2" formats. All 6
shelves pull out for easier operation and are adjustable in 1" increments. Console rolls on 5" industrial casters ( 2locking). Overall dimensions are 72-- H x20"D x 22W.
L. MODEL 139301 MOBILE 3/4" DUPLICATION CONSOLE. Rugged all steel construction. VTR drawers pull out on ball bearing rollers. All shelves vertically adjust in 1" increments. Console moves on heavy duty 4"
industrial casters ( 2 locking). Overall dimensions 72"H x26"D x30W.
WI T7104 $419.00
Írir 17700 $464 00
i01 T7400 $439.00
iP1 High Density Storage System
THE " STORAGE" GROUP
M. MODEL T7104 VIDEO CASSETTE STORAGE. For 1/2" video cassettes. All shelves are adjustable in 1" incre-
ments. Hold 270 Beta tapes. All steel construction with beige and cocoa brown finish. Overall dimensions 843"H x FD x36W.
N. MODEL T7700 VIDEO TAPE
STORAGE. System holds 102 1" video tapes. 12" deep cabinet also holds
10-12/2" ard 7" quad tapes. By adding more cabinets the system can grow into aHigh Density Storage. Overall dimensions 881-1 x5"D x36W.
O. MODEL T7400 U-MATIC TAPE
STORAGE SYSTEM. For 3/4" U-Matic tapes. Bolt together construction with
adjustable shelves. Holds 161 video cassettes. Inside dimensions 83"H x8"D x34-1/2W. Overall dimensions 88"H x
8"D x36W.
P. MODEL T7400 TYPE HIGH DENSITY STORAGE SYSTEM. This is an
example of Winsted's High Density Storage System for 3/4" U-Matic tapes. Also available for all other tape formats.
Movable cabinets roll easily on steel tracks.
VE -110
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
The. Ulinsted Corporation VIDEO Et EDITING CONSOLES
[Al E9303 $1415.00
1B1 E9301 $1568.00
ICI L9300 $1957.00
[DI B3101 $2046.00
THE " EDITING I GROUP
A. MODEL E9303 EDITING CONSOLE. Shelves adjust in 1" increments for perfect working height. All steel VTR shelves pull out with 12" safety stop. Editor shelf has 12" pullout work surface for scripts and schedules. Removable back panels con-
ceal a 2" x 28" cable raceway. Overall dimensions 56"H x28"D x60W.
B. MODEL E9301 CONSOLE. Rugged steel constructioi. All shelves adjust in 1" increments for comfortable working height. Model shown is bolted together as "in line" console Editor shelf pulls out 12"
for better viewing of screens and dials. Console rolls on 5" industrial casters 12 locking). Overall dimensions 72"H x28"D x 60W.
C. MODEL 1.9300 LOW PROFILE EDITING CONSOLE. Same rugged construction as all other Winsted Consoles. Console shown with three 14" rack cabinets. Other rack cabinets and configurations are available. Includes decorative walnut woodgrain side panels and MP, 2 pull out VTR shelves and one editor shelf. Overall dimensions 46"H x 45"D x 62"W.
D. MODEL B3101 VTR CONSOLE.
Holds any 1" VTR. Overhead bridge adjusts up or down, has 10-1/2" rack space for monitor and 1/2 rack cabinets for vector scope and wave form monitor.
Base cabinet has turntable that rotates 360° for easier servicing and viewing, recessed master on/off switch, 19-1/4" rack height for TBC and pull out drawer for
manuals and tools. Overall dimensions are 78"H x28"D x32-3/4W.
1E1 R3400 $289.00
1F1 48029 $259.00
[G] R3500 $298.00
[H1 R3601 $669.00
THE "VIDEOCENTER" GROUP
E. MODEL R3400 LOW PROFILE MOBILE VIDEO CENTER. Designed for
smaller groups or individuals. Top shelf is set back for easy access to VTR. Lockable base cabinet holds tapes or valuable video equipment. Center rolls easily on 4" industrial casters 12 locking). Overall dimensions are 42"H x22"D x36W.
F. MODEL 48029 ECONOMICAL MINI VIDEO CONSOLE. Wooden recorder shelf and steel monitor shelf. Each adjusts in 1" increments for greater working comfort. Rolls effortlessly on 3" indus-
trial casters 12 . ocking). Includes 3-outlet electrical assembly with 3-wire 6-foot
cord. Overall dimensions are 42"H x22"D x36'W.
G. MODEL R3500 STANDAR D HEIGHT
VIDEO CENTER. Ideal for conference rooms and large groups. Lockable lower cabinet for video tapes and equipment. All steel construction with beige and cocoa brown finish. Console moves easily on 4" industrial casters 12 locking). Overall size 54"H x22"D x32"W.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
H. MODEL R3801 VIDEO CONSOLE. Provides complete equipment security Top section has pull out VTR shelf foi easier player operation and adjustable monitor shelf holds most 21" monitors. Ventilated locking rear panel provides full access to rear of video equipment. Bottom cabinet stores tapes and other video accessories. Overall dimensions are 60"H x20-1/2"D x30W.
VE-111
The tested Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
Maael H8800 41113.00
MODULAR VIDEO CONSOLES
SYSTEM/85... Modular Video Consoles
Snap on & off back and side panels give you complete machine accessibility
Ei Model H8800. For use with Sony's 800 Series VTR's and 801 edit controller. Includes one G8502 basic console. one G8500
add-on console. two 85041 tops. two 85080 sloped editor shelves. one 88180 editing panel. one 85147 blank panel. one 85141 blank panel and two 85149 blank panels. Overall 41 -H x42. Dx 43W.
Wt. 298 lbs
. $1118.00
Model H8500. Not shown.) Same as H8800 set up for -Type 5" VTR's and RM 440 controllers.
Wt 298 lbs
$ 1133.50
Î31 Model H8502. For use with Sony's -Type 5- VTR's and RM 440 controllers. Includes one G8502 basic console. two
G8500 add-on consoles. two 85041 tops. one 85040 top. two
85080 sloped editor shelves. one 85180 editor panel, one 85147
blank panel. three 85140 blank panels. three 85149 blank panels. one 85141 blank panel and one 85142 blank panel. Overall 41"H
x
x61W.
Wt. 349 lbs.
$ 1489.25
Model H8802. Not shown.) Same as H8502 set up for Sony's 800
series VTR's and 801 edit controller.
Wt. 349 lbs..
$ 1466.00
Model G8503. Includes one G8502 basic console. two G8500 add-on consoles, three 85002 add-on top modules, one pair
of 85122 side panels. two 85041 tops. one 85040 tot). two 85080 sloped editor shelves. three 85149 blank panels and one 85142 blank panel. Overall 54 -H x42 D x61 -W
Wt. 375 lbs.
$1712.00
Model .117.150:1 514a9 25 rp Model i3600 L2-1 41915.00 VE -112
Model 08503 - $ 1712 00
RACK SLIDE KITS. Order separately. Not included in console prices.
RACK SLIDE KITS FOR 85001 SLOPED UPPER CABINET
Model F8500. Rack slide kit for Sony sType 5VTR s
WI 8 lbs
$195.00
El Model F8800. Rack slide kit for Sony's 800 Series VTR's.
WI 8 lbs
.. $198.00
RACK SLIDE KITS FOR G8501 LOWER BASE MODULE Ej Model F8501. Rack slide kit for Sony's Type 5VTR 's
Wt 8 lbs
$195.00
El Model F8801. Rack slide kit for Sony's 800 Series VTR's.
WI 8 lbs
$ 198.00
NOTE: For additional types of rack slide kits consult your dealer
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
The lilinsted Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
CUSTOM CONSOLES WITH CASTERS, WEDGES & PULL-OUT SHELVES
[-AI Model H8508. For non- rack mounted Type 5 and 800 Series
VTRs. Consists of one 85000 base console. one G8501 base console with side panels, two G8590 12 1/ 2 "high cabinets with steel pull-out shelves, two 85081 angled editor shelves. two 85041 cabinet tops. two 85164 filler tops, one pair 85122 side panels, two 85149 19Y." blank panels, one 85148 151<i" blank panel, one 85152 5Y" blank panel, one 85180 mounting panel for " Sony" RM 440 controller. Overall dimensions: 42"H x44"D x43W.
Wt. 269 lbs.1358.00
$
'WI Model G8527. Three bay console with wedges. Consists of: one G8501 base module with sides, two 85000 base modules.
three 85001 slope modules, three 85003 14" add-on top modules.
three 85161 cabinet wedges. two 85081 angled editor shelves. two 85041 tops, one 85040 top, one pair 85121 side panels, one
pair 85123 side panels, and two 85149 19/12"blank panels. Measures 62/14"H x61"W x44"D.
Wt. 354 lbs.
$1948.00
rc Model G8523. Console includes: one 85000 base module.
-- one G8501 base module with side panels. two 85003 14"
add-on top modules. two 85085 15Y4·· flat editor shelves. two 85041 tops. two 85164 filler tops and one pair of 85122 side panels (Order back panels separately). Measures 42"H x44"D x43W.
Wt. 255 lbs
$1009.00
1-61 Model H8804. For use with Sony's 800 Series VTRs Includes one G8502 basic console. two G8500 add-on consoles.three
85002 add-on top modules. two 85041 tops, one 85040 top, one pair of 85122 side panels. two 85082 extended editor shelves. two 85142 blank panels. two 85147 blank panels, two 85143 panels. Overall dimensions 54"H x 47'/2"D x 61 .W. ( Order back panels separately.)
Wt. 378 lbs.
$1750.00
Model H8504. (Not shown.) Same as H8804 set up for Sony's Type 5VTRs and RM 440 Controller
Wt. 378 lbs
$ 1773.25
Model H8501. For use with Sony's " Type 5" VTR's. Includes one G8502 basic console. one G8500 basic add-on console. two 85041 tops, two 85080 sloped editor shelves, one 85180 editing panel, one 85141 blank panel, one 85147 blank panel. one
85580 pull-out shelf, two 85149 blank panels, two 85140 blank panels. and three pair of 85780 casters. Overall dimensions: 44"H x42/'"D x43W.
Wt. 299 lbs.
$1298.50
Model H8801. (Not shown.) Same as H8501 set up for 800 Series VTRs and 801 controller.
Wt. 299 lbs.
$1283.00
CONSOLES
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Model 85580. Pull-out shelf as shown in Model H850 -.
Wt. 10 lbs
$89.00
Model 85780. Heavy-duty 3- industrial casters and caster braces as shown in Model H8501.
Wt. 5 lbs..
$ 32.00
Model 98700. Six-outlet electrical powe· slop Wt. 4 lbs
$69 00
Model H81501 $1211111.50 ·,2,
-,,i
c Model G8523 $1009 00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -113
Th2. tilinsteil Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
CONSOLES/CABINETS
COMBINATION CONSOLES WITH 19" & 30" DOUBLE BAY AND CORNER SYSTEMS
Model G8517 82323.75
(WI Model G8300. Ideal AB Roil con-
sole. For use with large, top loading
VTRs. Consists of: one G8310 base with
side panels, one 83000 base module. two
83002 sloped modules, one pair 83207 !·5
rack rails, one pair 83208
rack rails
two 83087 steel pull-out shelves. one
83081 stationary steel shelf, one G8340
wood editor shelf. one 85147 blank panel,
one 85142 blank panel. one 85140 blank
panel, one 83147 blank panel and one
83140 blank panel. Measures 42"H x
62 -W x45D.
Wt. 320 lbs.
41832.00
r& Model G85 13. Shown set up with -- Cross Point Latch 6124 Spec:al Effects Generator. Consult your dealer or Winsted when using other types of special
effects generators and edit controlle-s.
Console includes one G8530 doubie bay console, one pair 85120 base side panels, one 85188 mounting kit for Cross Point Latch 6124 SEG. two 85001 add-on slope modules, one pair of 85121 side panels for slope module. two 85002 add-on top modules, one pair of 85122 side panels for top module, two 85041 tops, one 85147 blank panel, one 85141 blank panels, and 85140 blank panel. Measures 58('H x 43',4"W x
46D.
Wt. 294 lbs.
81264.75
rci Model G85 17. For use with Sony's 800 Series VTRs and E800 editor. In-
cludes one G8502 basic console. two
G8500 add-on consoles, one 85006 editor console, one 85202 corner kit, two 85040 tops, two 85041 lops. one 85080 angled editor shelf, three 85149 blank panels. one 85147 blank panel, one 85142 blank panel and one 85140 blank panel.
Wt. 475 lbs.
$2323.75
Model H8806. d\lot shown.) Same as G8517 but set up for Sony's 801 edit controller.
Wt 475 lbs
42262.76
Model H8506. ( Not shown.) Same as G8517 set up for Sony's Type 5VTRs and RM440 controller.
Wt. 475 lbs
$2276.00
fa Model G8320. Combination 19 - and 30 - console. Includes: one G8310
base module with side panels. one 85000 base module, one 85082 flat editor shelf, two 83580 steel pull-out shelf. one 85041 top and one 83044 top. Measures 29)4 -H x52"W x45"D.
Wt. 285 lbs.
$ 1147.50
ri E Model G8321. ncludes one G8310
-- base with side panels. one 85000 base. one 85001 sloped module, one
83001 sloped module, one pair 83208 ,15 tack rails, two 83087 steel pull-out shelves, one 85082 flat editor shelf, one pair 85121 side panels. one 85041 top one 83041 top. one 85149 blank panel. one 85145 blank panel and two 85140 blank panels. Measures 42 ' H x53W'W x51"D.
Wt. 302 lbs
$1583.60
[el G8322. Corner unit console. Shown
-- with a combination of 19" and 30" modules. Winsted modules can be arranged as you like to fit your application. Flat work surfaces are custom made for each design. Please consult your dealer or factory for help in designing the perfect
corner console for your needs.
[elj
Model 08321
$1583 50
VE-114
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
The Illittsted Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
DELUXE WOOD TRIM CONSOLES
DELUXE WOOD TRIM CONSOLES
Rich oak trim panels for a distinctive touch
w Model H8520. Wood-trim editing console includes: two 85000 base mod-
ules. one 85200 chrome leg, two 85001 sloped modules. two 85081 angled editor shelves. one 85180 controller panel. two 85149 blank panels. one 85148 blank panel. two 85140 blank panels, one pair
85520 wood side panels for base, one pair 85521 wood side panels for sloped module and one 85542 wood two- bay top. Measures 42Y·H x44 -D x44 -W.
Wt. 295 lbs.
$1529.50
pe Model G8521. Three bay wood-trim console includes: three 85000 base
modules. one 85200 chrome leg. three 85001 sloped modules. three 85003 14 add-on modules. two 85081 angled editor shelves. three 85149 blank panels. one 85142 blank panel, one pair 85220 wood side panels for bases, one pair 85521 wood side panels for slope modules, one pair 85523 wood side panels, and one 85543 three- bay wood top. Measures
x44 -D x62"W
Wt. 535 lbs .
$2167.00
g Model G8323. Designed for Sony's
3000 editor. Consists of one G8310 base with side panels, three 85000 base modules, one 83001 sloped module, three 85001 sloped modules, one 83003 14" top module, three 85003 14 - top modules, one pair 83207 24" one-half rack rails, one Pair 83208 10%2" one-half rack rails, one pair 83209 14 - one-half rack rails, one G8341 3000 editor shelf. three G8540 flat shelves, one pair 85121 side panels, one pair 85123 side panels. four 85147 blank panels, two 85041 tops. one 85040 top and
one 83040 top. Measures 54"H x 52 -D x 92W.
Wt. 585 lbs
$2809.00
WOOD SIDE PANELS
M Model 85543. Wood top for 3- bay -- console.
Wt. 73 lbs.
$ 195.00
r2-1 Model 85542. Wood top for two- bay console.
Wt. 52 lbs.
$ 155.00
Model 85522. Wood panels for 10%2 module
Wt 14 lbs
$100.00 pr.
Model 85523. Wood side panels for 14" module
Wt. 16 lbs
$105.00 pr.
r4-1 Model 85521. Wood side panels for -- slope module
Wt 16 lbs
$110.00 pr.
11) Model 85520. Side panel for base module.
Wt. 31 lbs
$279.00 pr.
NOTE: Other tops can be custom-made for your
system. Consult your dealer or Winsted for pricing and delivery
ni Mead MS
$1815,00
31 ne e0018"22
Model 85523 $106 00
Model 85521 $110 00
Model 86542 5155 00
Model 85520 $279 00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -115
The Illinsted Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
VERTICAL RACK CABINETS & ACCESSORIES- Standard EIA 19" rack widths with rear service door
A Model V8502 5329 00
Model V8501 5682 00
c Model V8506 $535 00
RACKS/ACCESSORIES
Model V8502. Vertical rack with 24 h1" of rack space. Open bottom and vented sides for air flow. 30"H x 22"W x 26"D.
Wt. 81 lbs.
$329.00
Back Panel for V8502. Wt. 10 lbs.
Model 85100
$59.00
Casters and Braces for V8506. V8501 and V8502 Wt 8 lbs
Model 85780
$28.00 pr.
ADD- A- RACK
Basic frames can be bolted together, without side panels, to create an economical bank of equipment racks. Side panels are then installed at each end.
Model V8500 Basic 70" Rack without side panels
Wt. 136 lbs
$623.00
Model 85124 Side Panels ( Pair)
Wt. 55 lbs
$159.00
gl Model V8501. Vertical rack cabinet with 70" of rack space. Vented top and
bottom. 79±1 x22 .W x26D.
Wt. 160 lbs.
$ 682.00
Rear Door for V8501. Wt. 31 lbs
Model 85300
$ 128.00
Muffin Fan for V8501 Wt. 5 lbs Model 10705
$69.00
re-I Model V8506. Vertical rack cabinet
has 35" of usable rack space. Gray and tan baked enamel finish, with vented sides and base for cooling. 42"H x26"D x 22W.
Wt. 90 lbs.535.00
$
Rear Door for V8506. Wt. 25 lbs.
Model 85301
$83.00
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Pull-out Shelf. Extends afull 20. For
V8500 type vertical racks. 85000 base module, 85002 top module and 85003 top module Wt. 12 lbs.
Model 85083
$169.00
Stationary Shelf. V8500 type vertical racks, 85000 base module, 85002 top module and 85003 top module. Wt. 10 lbs.
Model 85086
$65.00
Muffin Cooling Fan With mounting bracket. eki,' universal mount, finger guard and 24" cord with plug. Delivers 105 CFM. For 115
volt system. Wt. 5 lbs. ( Not shown )
Model 10705
$59.00
ADD- A- RACK
Li I Model 85083 $169.00
rff, l Model V8510. Duplication center. Consists of two V8500 70" rack frame
and one 85124 set of side panels. Order rear doors and blank panels separately. 79"H x26"D x43W.
Wt. 265 lbs.
$1205.00
Power Panel. Mounts in any 19" rack mount cabinet. Six rear outlets. 15 amp circuit breaker and On/Off switch in front. Three-wire 15 power cord. 1Y4"H x 19"W Wt. 4 lbs.
Model 98700 . . $69.00
Flat Extended Shelf. Offers 15*, space Wt 12 lbs Not shown.)
Model 85085
of rack $98.00
Model 98700
$89.01)
VE-116
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
The. Ulinsteil Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
TAPE AND FILM TRUCKS
HEAVY DUTY TAPE AND FILM TRUCKS
Give you ready access to tape & film anywhere
III Video Tape Truck. Includes shelf backstops plus sliding supports to
hold tapes upright. Wt. 76 lbs.
Model U5000
$ 355.00
El Economical U-Matic Tape Truck.
Holds 162 uncased or 132 cased ·U-Matic tapes. Rolls easily on 4" casters. 45 .H x 17 D x31W. Wt. 71 lbs.
Model 50089
$289.00
Tape Truck. For 1" tape transport Wt 76 lbs
Model U5003
$355.00
U-Matic Tape Truck. Holds up to -- 128 Y." tapes upright in a molded plastic holder Wt. 94 lbs.
Model U5002
$457.00
El Tape Truck. Convenient transport for .1 or 2" video tape. Wt. 77 lbs.
Model U5001.
$371.00
wi Film Truck. Holds 54 reels of 16mm film in 1-1/16" wide wire supports. Open bottom shelf holds additional films or equipment. Wt. 83 lbs.
Model U5300 $454.00
rd] Mobile Hanger Truck. Offers light-
- weight mobility and compact storage
for Scotch
and V video cassette
hanger system shipper/storage case. Can
be adapted for unboxed bulk or boxed cas-
settes. Each of six hanger rails holds 18
boxed videocassettes. End pocket included Wt. 75 lbs.
Model U5005
$441.00
111 rci model U6003 4356.00
mode u5000 4356.00
Model LI5001 $371 OC
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
D Videocassette Divider. Molded plastic divider holds 16 cased h" videocassettes. Designed for use with U5001 tape truck. 10'%"H x74'D x32W W. Beige. Carton of 5 Wt 3 lbs.
Model 70981 price each
$14.00
5or more $13.00 ea.
ni Model 70981 $13.00 in qty.
CI Film Rack. Chrome- plated rack holds 27 reels of 16mm films. Fits film truck
shelf or can be used separately. 1-1/16" . · spacing. Wt. 9 lbs.
Model 10964
984.00
Eïl
End Pocket. Ideal for duplication
orders or master videocassette.
Hooks onto the end frame of any tape
truck. 10"H x
x 10W. Cocoa brown.
Model 10964 s64.00
Wt. 4 lbs. Model 50082
$37.00
Motel 50082 $37.00
$454 00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
$441 00
VE -117
The Ulinsted Corporation
TAPE CABINETS
9801 James Circle
Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
OPEN SHELF TAPE CABINETS
re Model T7400. Ideal videotape storage system for Y4 - U-Matic videocassettes.
Eight inch deep cabinet holds 161 videocassettes. Order molded plastic dividers
for videocassettes separately ( Mode)
70983- see Optional Accessories). Seven shelves. Overall: 88"H x 8"D x36W. ( In-
side dimensions: 34 h1 "W x83"H)
Wt 120 lbs
$439.00
Add-on Unit. Model T7403. For side- toside installation.
Wt. 105 lbs
4409.00
Model 74080. Extra Shelf. Wt 4 lbs
$26.00
ri s Model T7700. Video tape storage sys' tern holds 102 1" video tapes. Deeper 12" cabinet depth takes 1" broadcast
tapes. 7--10" quad tapes and ki" U-Matic videocassettes. Order molded plastic dividers for videocassettes separately
(Model 70983- see Optional Accessories). Six shelves. Overall: 88'H x 12"D x 36W. ( Inside dimensions: 34(/2"W x83"H).
Wt. 125 lbs
$464.00
Add-On Unit. Model T7703. For side-to-
side installation.
Wt. 110 lbs.
$426.00
Model 77080. Extra Shelf. Wt. 5 lbs.
$29.00
rdi Model T7600. " Super Pak" videocassette tape storage system. Holds 207 3/4. videocassettes. For maximum capacity tapes are stored and labeled on end. Order labels separately ( Model 10940see Optional Accessories). Nine shelves. Overall: 88"H x 100 x 36"W. ( Inside dimensions: 34("W x83"H).
Wt. 139 lbs.
$459.00
Add-on Unit. Model T7603. For side- to-
side installation.
Wt 118 lbs
$421.00
51 Model T7800. Quad Tape Storage - System. A 16 -- deep cabinet that is
perfect for 2" quad and holds 55 tapes. Five shelves. Overall: 88"H x 16 -D x 36"W. ( Inside dimensions: 34 12"W x84"H).
Wt. 165 lbs
$519.00
Add- On Unit. Model T7803. For side- toside installation.
Wt. 150 lbs
$479.00
For the organization & storage of all tape formats
Model 78080. Extra Shelf
Wt. 6 lbs...
$31.00
r7 E Model 70300. Locking cabinet doors
- provide security for valuable master tapes. Doors fit all of the Winsted " T"
series tape cabinets ( except T7200 and T7500 models) and can be added to any existing " T" unit. Full length door hinge
and two-point locking system. NOTE: Install cabinet doors only on cabinets that are securely fastened to awall. Dimensions: 84 1 "H x 1V4"D x 34W. Beige baked enamel finish.
Wt. 61 lbs.189.00
$
rp Model T7104. Beta or VHS Storage.
- Holds 270 Beta tapes or 240 VHS.
Ideal for 1/2"videocassette storage. Order molded plastic dividers for videocassettes separately ( Model 70985). Overall: 88"H x 5"D x 36W. ( Inside dimensions: 34 1 W
x83"H).
Wt. 137 lbs ( BETA)
$419.00
Model T7100. Wt. 135 lbs. ( VHS)
$398.00
Add- On Unit. Model T7107. For side-to-
side installation.
Wt. 127 lbs. ( BETA)
$399.00
Add-On Unit. Model T7103. For side-toside installation.
Wt 120 lbs. ( VHS)...
$378.00
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
rfl Model 70983. Molded plastic divider insert ( h" tapes) for use in T7400.
T7600. or T7700.
#70983 Individual Dividers,
Wt 3 lbs
$14.00 Sor more $ 13.00 ea.
[1] Model 70986. Plastic cassette holder (4« .tapes) for use in T7100 or T7104
cabinets.
4#70986 Individual Dividers.
Wt 2 lbs
$13.00 5or more $ 12.00 ea.
Model 77400 $439.00 2 Model 70966
412 00 ,r`
VE -118
Model 17600 4459 00
E' Mocel 7030Q $189 00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
'F Model 17104 $419 00
The llested Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
TAPE CABINETS/TRUCKS
THE BROADCAST GROUP
irr _At 471
I
a l crim m ,u me i=e
afid# 111::::71 e 11e r e
orT117.irArrnli !rye 4-rde
,Ai Model T7500
`--' $627 00
r17 ere'r
''r
Ine-P erier irIrrlerrrr"
15 :Aode(;)U5701
···· f.r.
11
s, I
LEJ Model MOE) it6119.01)
r-;d Model 72000 $173.00
rhel Model T7500 Tape Cabinet. All steel -- cabinet holds 216 ( Ampex ACR-25 type) tape cartridges. Instant, easy tape re-
trieval with Winsted exclusive " Pik-Quik" system. Overall dimensions: 88"H x 8"D x 36W.
Wt. 185 lbs.
$627.00
â Model 75000 Mini Cabinet. Tape storage unit holds 108 ( Ampex ACR-25
type) tape cartridges in a minimum of space. Can easily be wall mounted. Easy tape access. Overall dimensions: 42"H x 73'4"D x34W.
Wt. 69 lbs
$228.00
ra Model U5700 Tape Truck. Combina-
tion tape truck holds 96 Ampex ACR25 cartridges plus 1" or 2" videotapes. Full access from both sides of truck. Heavyduty, all-steel construction. Overall dimen-
sions: 52 -H x 16"D x36 -W
Wt. 127 lbs.
$589.00
r61 Model U5701 Programming Truck.
Big capacity tape truck holds 216 Ampex ACR-25 tape cartridges with " PikOuik" cartridge removal system. Easy ac-
cess from both sides of truck. Rolls effortlessly, even when fully loaded. Overall
dimensions: 54"H x22 -D x36 -W.
Wt. 205 lbs.
$780.00
rÈ Model U5600 Tape Truck. Combina-
tion tape truck helps set up daily spot
programming schedules quickly and. effi-
ciently. Holds 96 RCA TCR-100 tape car-
tridges plus 1" or 2" video tapes. Safe,
convenient tape transport. Overall dimen-
sions: 52"H x 16"D x36 -W
Wt. 122 lbs..589.00
$
rn Model U5601 Programming Truck.
-- Holds 168 RCA TCR-100 tape cartridges with " Pik-Quik cartridge removal system. Cartridge shelves are angled for full view tape selection plus safe transport. Ideal for mobile tape storage. Overall dimensions: 54 -H x 16"D x36 -W.
Wt. 145 lbs..
$670.00
ra Model 72000 Mini Cabinet. Holds 84 -- RCA TCR-100 tape cartridges in a
minimum of space. Can easily be wall mounted. Convenient cartridge storage with easy tape access. Overall dimensions: 42"H x4i, Dx 34W.
Wt. 40 lbs
$ 173.00
57'1 Model 77200 Tape Cabinet. Safe.
'-' convenient storage cabinet holds 168 RCA TCR-100 type cartridges. Instant "Pik-Quik" tape retrieval system. Use cabinets individually or bolt together for modular storage. Overall dimensions: 88"H x
4,. D x36"W
Wt. 120 lbs
$501.00
Model T7200 $501 00
Model 05601 $876 00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-119
Ttt WinsteiI orporatioR
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
MOVABLE STORAGE SYSTEMS
TYPICAL CABINET INSTALLATIONS Stationary Units In Bac,
I I f=4
·
Movable units ( In Front)
MOVABLE STORAGE SYSTEMS In avariety of designs and 5" to 36" depths to serve your special storage needs
Winsted Shelf Storage System. Offer organization and storage for most any tape or film storage system. Choose from stock or custom shelving at affordable prices. All designs are completely flexible -- can be adapted to avariety of configurations and setups to serve your special storage needs. What's more, Winsted shelving grows as your needs grow. Both stock and custom installations can be expanded, or relocated as your needs change.
[11 " Super Density" Movable Cabinets. Offered in a range of cabinet depths for maximum storage in a limited space. Front
row cabinets move side to side on floor tracks for easy access to rear storage. Ideal for " VHS," -BETA." U-matic and broadcast tape storage.
ri Space- Saving Pull-Out Cabinets. Ideal for " high access" tape storage. May be installed in room alcoves or set- backs. Save floor space, too, by eliminating unnecessary aisles. Gives you 100% storage space efficiency. Units bolt together for any length system. Cabinets pull-out effortlessly on alow- profile track.
[II High Capacity Tape Storage System. Affords compact storage in a limited space. Offered in a full range of cabinet
depths to meet every storage need. Cabinets move laterally on low- profile rails for easy access to all records instantly, effortlessly.
TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS
VE-120
--
HOW IT WORKS
Sliding cabinets in two unit or tnree unit conf.gurations. pull-out for trie saying access to tapes ideal for previously unusable storage space
WA _ K- IN CENTER AISLE COMBINATIONS Cabinets are installed directly opposite each other and use acommon track and center aisle Units pull out from left or rign: to provide fast access to stored material All steel construction
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
HIGH CAPACITY CABINET INSTALLATION
Cabinets roll on low-profile rails for easy access to all contents. Stationary, movable and movable with mechanical
assist models are available
The lilinsted Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431
(612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
VERTICAL EQUIPMENT
RACKS & ACCESSORIES
(W Vertical Rack Cabinet. Offers 70 - of ventilated rack space- standard EIA 19 rack width. Optional rear access door. Cast-
er base with screw down floor levelers. Ventilated top with extra room for fan. Sturdy, heavy gauge steel construction. Baked enamel finish in Beige and Grey. Measures 79"H x22:4"W x26"D.
Wt 160 lbs
Model V8501
$682.00
Vertical Equipment Rack. Not shown.) Same as V8501 with rear
door Wt 191 lbs Model V8504
$810.00
r& Vertical Rack Cabinet. With 35" of rack space. Ventilated '-' bottom and sides for cooling air flow. Same construction as V9801. 42"H x26"D x22W. Wt. 90 lbs.
Model V8506
$535.00
Rear Door, For V9806. Wt. 25 lbs. Model 85301
$ 98.00
BLANK PANELS
19 wide in Grey enamel Model 85140 1%4 - Blank Panel Model 85141 3'4 - Blank Panel Model 85142 5%" Blank Panel Model 85143 7 ' Blank Panel Model 85144 8kC Blank Panel Model 85145 1OL Blank Panel Model 85146 12!. Blank Panel
$ 7.75 $ 9.00 $ 11.00 $ 13.50 $ 15.75 $ 18.00 $ 22.00
Panel Bolts & Clips with Captive Nuts
Model G8051. 50 Panel Bolts & Clips Model G8101. 100 Panel Bolts & Clips
$25.00 $ 50.00
RACKS/ACCESSORIES
Model v1501 $682.00
Modal V8506 $535.00
IMPORTANT NOTE: Order Blark Paiels Sepz.rately·
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Muffin Cooling Fan. (Not shown.) With
mounting bracket, ei" universal mount, finger guard and 24" cord with plug. Delivers 105 CFM. For 115 volt system. Wt.
5 lbs. Model 10705
$59.00
Chassis Support Brackets. ( Not shown.) For installation requiring additional equipment support 1X'i - x 1/1ó - x21. Wt. 4 lbs
Model 85240
$14.00
rfl Power Panel. Mounts in any 19" rack
mount cabinet. Six rear outlets. 15
amp circuit breaker, pilot light and On/Off
switch in front. Three-wire 15' power cord.
1" x 19 -W. Wt 4 lbs.
Model 98700
$89.00
rgi ADD- A- RACK. Basic frames can be bolted together, with outside panels,
to create an economical bank of equip-
ment racks. Side panels are then installed
at each end.
Model V8520 Basic 70" rack without side
panels
Wt. 136 lbs.
$398.00
Model 85124 Side Panels ( Pair)
WI 55 lbs
$159.00
Pull-Out Shelf. Full extension ( 20 -) - pull-out shelf for V9803. Measures
IX" x20Y," x 17W'W. Wt. 10 lbs.
Model 85083
8189.00
Stationary Shelf. Bolt in steel shelf for V9803 WI 8 lbs
Model 85086 . $85.00
rifl Rack Slide Kit. For use with Sony's '-' Type 5VTRs Wt 7lbs
Model F8501
$195.00
r- 51 Rack SU( a Kit. For use with Sony's
800 Series VTRs. Wt. 7 lbs.
Model F8801
$198.00
rîl Model 8f4)96 $65.04
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
[I ADD- A- RACK
1, Model F8601 $195.00
_
VE -121
The. Ulifisted r.orporatioit
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
CONSOLES/CABINETS
RACK MOUNT CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
El Model P9201. One C9200 frame, one 98006 rack mount cabinet ( 19 /1i" rack
space), one 98008 rack mount cabinet (22 3,4" rack space). one 98081 switcher cabinet ( 15k," rack-space), two pair 98242 frame brackets. one 92080 monitor shelf, one pair 98245 match plates, and one pair 98246 spacer brackets. 56"H x 36"D x 22"W overall.
Wt. 163 lbs
$918.00
Model P9202 (Not shown). Same as P9201 with 10" wheels.
Wt 186 lbs
$1030.00
Rack Mount Cabinet. Standard EIA 19'*
width equipment cabinets. Shipped unassembled with one pair of 98247 support brackets, one pair of attachment brackets for 93580. 92581. 92080. and 93080 shelves, and equipment mounting hardware. Beige enamel finish
rip Model 98006. Rack space- 19ki 22"H x 18"D x 20"W.
Wt. 30 lbs
$ 174.00
ra Model 98008. Rack space- 2n". 25 /12-H x 18 ' D x20"W.
Wt. 33 lbs.
$184.00
ri51 Model 98004. Rack space- 14** 16Y4"H x 18"D x20"W.
Wt. 26 lbs
$159.00
ri E Model 98001. Rack space- 7's e4"1-1 x 18"D x20"W
Wt. 20 lbs.
$139.00
wi Model 98000. Rack space- 34''. 64'"H x 18"D x20W.
Wt 19 lbs
$124.00
r61 Model 98002. Rack space- 10'4". 13%4"H x 18"D x20"W
Wt 21 lbs
$152.00
El Model 98700. Power Panel. Mounts in any 19" rack mount cabinet. Six rear
outlets. 15 amp circuit breaker and On/Off switch in front. Three-wire 15 power cord. 14 H x 19 -W.
Wt. 4 lbs
$89.00
Model 98247. Chassis Support Brackets. For installations requiring additional brackets to those included with cabinets. 14 - x 1') x
Wt 3 lbs
$ 13.00
E Model C9200. 22" basic frame with back panels. 56"H x260 x22 W
Wt. 55 lbs.
$ 287.00
roi Model 9900.4
$159.00
rins Model 98008 tl $ 184 00
;6) Model 98006 8174.00
Model 98001 8139.00
Model 96000 $124.00
ral Model 91e302 $162.00
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES m Switcher Cabinet. Bolts to any Win -
sled rack mount cabinet. 15') rack space. Wt. 13 lbs.
Model 98081
$ 114.00
r4 Model 98040
L " $39.00
51 Model 98242. Frame Brackets. For mounting cabinets on C9200 frame at
any height.
Wt. 4 lbs
$28.00
[1] Model 98245. Match Plates. For vertically stacking rack mount cabinets.
Wt. 4 lbs.
$12.00
Model 98242 L"--1 $28.00
1-4-1 Model 98040. Cabinet Top. To top off your enclosed cabinet.
Wt. 7lbs.
$39.00
M ,),Iel 98245 $12 00
re Mod& 98247 $13 00
VE-122
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
ry}
Model C9200 4287.00
The Winsted Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
COMPACT 1" VTR CONSOLES A total system designed for any 1" VTR
VTR CONSOLES
e
*MM. erieemilai-mar
1:11 Model B3101. Complete with 30000 base cabinet. 30720 turntable, B3103
monitor bridge, and two six-outlet electrical assemblies. 78 -H x28"D x32%"W.
Wt. 306 lbs
$2046.00
Model B3100. Same as above without 30720 turntable.
Wt. 255 lbs
$1816.00
Model B3102. Same as above ( B3101) with 30320 turntable pull-out VTR shelf (For servicing NEC TT- 7000 and RCA
TR-800).
Wt 324 lbs
$2166.00
4 Model 83101 $2046.00
E; Model B3200 Console. Designed for the compact new 1" VTR. Top rack
cabinet nas 14" of rack space. Lower rack cabinet has variable rack space, please specify 14" or 19" when ordering. Dec-
orative side panels with an all steel frame. Overall dimensions are 75"H x 26"D x
32 -W.
Wt. 42/ lbs
$ 1478.00
Model 30000. Base cabinet, master On Off switch, pull-out drawer. 4" locking casters and six-outlet electrical assembly. 26"H x28'D x26 1 /5"W.
Wt. 150 lbs
$889.00
Model B3000. Same as above with 30720 turntable
Wt 201 lbs
$ 1161.00
Model 83001. Same as above ( 133000) with 30720 turntable and 30320 turntable
Pull-out VTR shelf ( for NEC TT- 7000 and RCA TR-800)
Wt 219 lbs
$1281.00
761 Model R3800. Mini Base Console. Low profile foi offices or point of sale
areas. Locking doors for equipment secur-
ity. Console can accommodate two VCR's on pull-out shelves or use as mobile cart
for new compact 1" VTR's. Three-outlet
e:ectrical assembly optional. Overall di-
meisions: 37 -H x260 x24W.
W7. 220 lbs
· $719.00
D Model R
5719 00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -123
The Meted Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2952
MOBILE CONSOLES
mod.el 1,1350e $298 06
F- Model 131601 -$669 00
MOBILE VIDEO CENTERS Mobile consoles to organize & store your video equipment
Aj Low- Profile Video Center. Designed ' for smaller groups and individual use. Monitor shelf is set back slightly to permit easy access to VTR shelf. Top shelf is 15"D x 32 'W Cabinet is 34 ' hi x 22"D x 32"W Wt 88 los.
Model R3400 $ 289.00
Full Shelf Low- Profile Video Center Not
shown). Same as R3400 Top shelf is a full 22"D x 32"W. Lockable base cabinet is 17:2 H x 22 .D x 32 .'W Overall dimensions: 34"H x22"D x32 W Wt 98 lbs
Model R3401
$ 296.00
rE-fl Standard Height Video Center. Ideal -- for large groups Upper shelf accommodates up to a 25 monitor. Top shelf is 22 D x 32 W Lower cabinet is 17'i H x 22"D x 32"W. Overall dimensions: 54 H x22 D x32 .W. Wt 100 lbs
Model R3500 $298.00
Three Shelf Video Center. Same features R3500 with the addition of acenter
h.e;f for asecond VTR or supplies. Center shelf is 22 0 x 28' W Cabinet is 17 1/ ' H x 22 D x 32 W Overa I: 54 H x 22 ' D x 32 W wt. 112 lbs. ( Not shown).
Model R3501 $334.00
rc1 Executive Video Console. Holds any
'VTR machine and monitor of up to 25 . Convenient shelf stores tapes and other video accessories. VTR shelf pulls
uut for easy access to controls. Accessory equipment shelf adjusts up or down. Locking cabinet doors for extra security -- swing back out of the way a full 250 degrees. Rear opening provides access to cords, cables and control adjustments. Decorative swivel casters make moving easy. 35 -H x22-1) x29 -W Wt. 162 lbs
Model 37502 $485.00
[I) Compact Mini Editing Station. De-
signed to accommodate
or Sony s
front loadmg Y. - editing system Slide-out
shelf for editing controller. Monitor bridge
tilts up to 5 degrees and adjusts to three
heights. Slide-out shelves ( full 13 - exten-
sion) for VCR sor storage. Locking flip- up
doors and rear access panel for equipment
security. Overall dimensions: 56 -H x26 -D
x2E5 " W. Wt. 259 lbs.
Model R38C2
$858.00
E Mobile Split- Top Tables. Both keyboard and monitor tops are 16 - deep in either 30 . or 42" width. Keyboard tor) adjusts from 23" to 33 high on 1" centers. Monitor top is fixed at 36 high. Tops are 1 thicK with bumper edge. Cantilever legs have double wall panel leg and chrome base wi:h 2- casters, two locking.
Mobile models have 15 - deep base shelf and modesty panel with 1;" d ameter cable cutouts.
Model 48005. 36"H x28 D x30 W Brown w/Walnut Top
Wt 89 lbs
$ 295.00
Model 48008. 36 -H x 28"D x 42 -W Tan w/Oak Top.
Wt. 91 lbs
$ 325.00
FF-1 Compact Portable Video Center. Pro- vides complete mobility, ease of oper-
ation, and key- lock security. Top section takes most 19 - ( some 21 -)monitors and VTR unirs. Locking swing- away doors. Ventilated locking rear panel for full access to video equipment. Bottom section provides safe storage for your expensive video accessories. 60"H x 22 -D x 32 -W. Wt 179 bs
Model R.3601
$669.00
rdl Mobile Micro Computer Station. Unit "--" ' consists of monitor shelf and work surface which adjusts on 1- centers. Moni:or shelf is 14 - x 36" with retaining rim front and rear. Work surface is 20 - x 36" with vinyl T-edge and rear retaining rim. 10 -D base shelf has foot guard. 3" casters. two locking. Dark Brown enamel finish with Teak top. Overall: 42"H x 20 -D x 36 -W. Wt 89 lbs.
Model 48029 $259.00
VE-124
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Tie lilinsted Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
STATIONARY AND MOVABLE DUBBING RACKS
STATIONARY & MOVABLE
DUBBING RACKS FOR 1/2" 81 3/4" FORMATS
El Model D4500. Stationary type with five walnut woodgrain pull-out VTR
shelves. Shelves are mounted on ballbearing rollers for easy pull-out. Overall: 72"H x20"D x32W.
Wt. 194 lbs.
$817.00
g Model D4600. Stationary type with six Pull-out VTR shelves. Overall: 72"H x
20"D x32W.
Wt. 212 lbs
$911.00
rdi Model D4502. Stationary type with
- four pull-out VTR shelves. one 98002 rack mount cabinet with one pair 98240 adapter brackets. Walnut woodgrain laminate VTR shelf. Overall: 72"H x 20"D x 32W.
Wt. 226 lbs.
$897.00
Model 45000. Caster base for all 04500 and D4600 models. Two position mounting, screw type floor levelers. Overall: 4"H x28"D x32W.
Wt. 32 lbs.
$179.00
rio Model 09300. Extended C9302 " L" frame with 4" casters ( 2locking), four
all-steel pull-out C9310 VTR drawers, and one 93580 monitor shelf. 71"H x 26"D x 30W.
Wt. 337 lbs.
$1207.00
ri E Model D9202. Extended C9202 * I"
- frame with 5" casters ( 2 locking), five 92585 VTR shelves, one 98004 rack mount cabinet, one pair 98242 frame brackets. 72"H x260 x22W.
Wt. 190 lbs
$1046.00
Model D9200. Extended C9205 -L.." frame with 5 casters ( 2 locking). Six 92585 pull-out VTR shelves. Cocoa Brown frame with walnut woodgrain shelves. Beige brackets. 72"H x26"D x22W.
Wt. 161 lbs.
$874.00
rdi Model D9303. Basic C9300 frame.
- three pull-out C9310 VTR drawers and one 93580 monitor shelf. 56"H x26"D x 30"W.
Wt. 203 lbs.
4965.00
ADD-A- RACK
Basic rack frames can be bolted together without side panels to form an economical "in line" duplicating center. Side panels are installed at each end. Shelves can be installed at 1" increments to fit exact equipment needs.
Model 04501. Basic rack without side panels.
Wt 89 lbs
$263.00
Model 45121. Side panels ( Pr.)
Wt. 55 lbs
$84.00
Model 45580. Pull-out shelves Wt. 18 lbs
S94.00
fÉîj Model 04000 LJ $911.01)
Model 04502 117397 00
rgi Model 011202 $1041.00
17.F1 Model 03200 8874 00
Model 04500 $817.00
Model 09303 $955 00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE -125
The lilinsterl. Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
LOW PROFILE EDITING ti PRODUCTION CONSOLES
For operator convenience and over-the-top viewing
rj1 Model L9300. Two 93021 short frames, two 92100 back panels. one pair of 93200 leg extensions. two 93081 monitor
rack mount shelves, three 98002 rack mount cabinets ( 10W rack space each), one C9311 pull-out editor shelf, two C9310 pull-out VTR drawers, one pair 93521 wood side panels and one 93540 wood top. Overall dimensions: 46"H x45 -D x62W.
Wt. 440 lbs.
$1957.00
rgl Model L9309. Includes one 93021 short frame. one 93100 -- back panel, one 92021 short frame, one 92100 back panel,
two C9210 pull-out VTR shelves, one C9311 pull-out editor shelf, one 92581 monitor shelf. one 93580 monitor shelf. one 93200 leg
extension and one pair of 93521 wood side panels. Overall dimen-
sions: 32"H x52"W x45D.
Wt. 326 lbs
$1352.00
rél Model L9306. Two 92021 short frames, two 92100 back
panels, one 93021 short frame, one 93100 back panel, two
92586 editor shelves, two C9310 pull-out VTR drawers. two 92581
flat monitor shelves. one 93582 editor shelf. two 98006 rack mount
cabinets ( 19 41 " of rack space each), one pair of 93200 leg exten-
sions and one pair of 93521 wood side panels. Overall dimensions:
54 -H x45"D x76W.
Wt. 456 lbs.
$2047.00
MD Model L9307. Two 93021 short frames, two 93100 back
panels, one C9311 pull-out editor shelf, one C9312 pull-out
switcher shelf, three 98002 rack mount cabinets ( 10:4" of rack
space). two 93081 monitor/rack mount shelves, one pair of 93520
wood sides, one 93540 wood top. one C9200 " L" frame, one pair
of 93200 rear leg frame extensions, and three C9210 pull-out VTR
shelves. Dimensions of editing console are 46"H x45 -D x62W. VTR console is 56 -H x26 -D x22 -W.
Wt. 593 lbs.
$2801.00
EDITING AND PRODUCTION CONSOLES
r-A , 4M1o9d5o7l00L9300
VE-126
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
The Wasted. Corporation
9801 James Circle Minneapolis, MN 55431 (612) 888-1957 ( 800) 328-2962
MOBILE EDITING CONSOLES
MOBILE EDITING CONSOLES
11
rEo Model E9306 $2073 00
I I
re Model E9303
' $ 1415 00
Interchangeable shelf and drawer modules adjust up and down in 1" increments to best suit your needs.
[k] Model E9303. Includes two complete sets of C9300 - L .frames with " 5"
swivel casters ( 4 locking) three 93580 monitor shelves, one 93582 editor shelf,
one mini- monitor shelf 93084, and two allsteel C93/0 VTR drawers Frames can be
joined to make an " in- lire console Overall dimensions: 56"H x28"D x60"W
Wt. 300 lbs.
$1415.00
frgi Model E9306. Three complete C9300
"L" frames with 5" swivel casters ( 6
lock)ng), three 93580 monitor shelves. one 93582 editor shelf. four all-steel C9310
drawers, and one 93084 mini- monitor shelf. Each of three consoles shown set-
up. Individual consoles are 56"H x28"D x 30"W ove ,all.
Wt. 428 lbs
$2073.00
rEi Model P9207.1ncludes two C9200 " L frames. Iwo C9210 pull-out VTR shelves. one 92586 editor shelf and two 92581 monitor shelves. Overall dimensions: 56 -H x44 -W x28 -D
Wt 266 lbs
$1211.00
Model P9302. One C9300 " L frame with 5 casters 2 locking), one 93581 extended monitor shelf. two C9310 VTR drawers and one C9311 editor shelf. Overall cimensions: 56 -H x26 -D x42W.
Wt 206 lbs.
$1071.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VE-127
INDEX
The Advance Products Co., Inc American Transport Products Anvil Cases, Inc.
A & S Flight & Road Case Co
A
B
Bretford Mfg., Inc. Bud Industries, Inc.
VE-2, 3 VE-4 VE-5 VE-6
VE -7-11 VE-12-23
C
Cabinet Racks/Acc
VE-12-23, 28-31, 39, 46-49, 53, 59-63, 65
66, 80, 81, 83, 84, 87-92, 109, 116, 121, 122
Cabinets/Stands/Tables, Mobile
VE-2, 3, 7-11, 16, 38, 40-45
50, 52, 65, 66, 68-71, 82, 86, 105-108, 111, 117, 119, 123, 124
Calzone Case Co . Carts, Video
VE-24 VE-4, 35, 99-104
Cases, Inc.
VE-25
Cases, Shipping & Carrying
VE-5, 6, 24-27, 33-37
Consoles
51, 53-56, 93-96, 98 VE-32, 39, 46, 47, 53, 57, 58, 64, 65, 67, 76-78
Consoles, Mobile
109, 112-115 VE-82, 109, 111, 122-124
Desk Cabinets Desk Consoles, Mobile Dubbing Racks
D
VE-31, 85 VE-50, 65, 66, 68-71, 109, 111, 126, 127
VE-65, 79, 109, 110, 125
E
Excalibur Industries
VE -26
Laird Telemedla, Inc. Luxor Corp
VE-39 VE-40-45
M
Media Storage
Morton System Fumishings/MSF
VE -44, 45 VE -46-50
Packtronics/P.S.I. Peerless Sales Co. Porta-Brace/K & H Products, Ltd
Premier Metal Products Co.
P
CI
Quest/Packtronics - P.S.I.
R
Racks, Mobile VTR/VCR
VE-51 VE-52 VE-35, 36 VE-53
VE-54, 55
VE -65, 72-75, 106. 110, 127
S
Smith- Victor Sales Corp.
Sony Corp. of America Soundoller/American Trading & Production Corp.
Stantron/Unit of Zero Corp Star Case Mfg. Co., Inc.
VE-56
VE-57, 58 VE-59-64 VE-65-92
VE-93
Telepak San Diego Tenba, Inc
Thermodyne Intl, Ltd.
VE-94 VE-95 VE-96
Fiberbilt
H
HOME, Inc.
VE -27 VE -28-32
U
Ultimate Support Systems, Inc Utility Stands/Tables
V
Videotape Storage Viking Cases
VE -97 VE -97
VE-44, 45, 109, 110, 117-120 VE-98
Kangaroo Video Products, Inc. K & H Products, Ltd. KIWI/Northern Mercantile, Inc. KLM Associates, Inc.
VE-33, 34 VE-35, 36
VE-37 VE-38
Wall Cabinets Wheelit, Inc H. Wilson Co The Winsted Corp.
VE-30, 120 VE-99-104 VE-105-108 VE-109-127
VE -128
ANTENNA SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
A
Alpha Technologies
Barco Electronic n.v./Elector USA, Inc Blonder-Tongue Labs, Inc Bogner Broadcast Equipment Corp.
VRF-2
Leader Instruments Corp. Lemco Tool Corp. LRC Electronics, Inc
VRF-3 VRF-4-17
VRF-18
Metrotech Corp
VRF-100 VRF-101, 102 VRF-103-107
VRF-108
Carlon Electrical Sciences, Inc. Catel/United Scientific Corp. Channell Commercial Corp. Comm/Scope Marketing, Inc.
G
General Cable Co General Instrument Corp.
I
Iris Video Conference Systems, Inc
Jensen Sound Laboratories
VRF-19, 20 VRF-21-29 VRF-30, 31 VRF-32-43
VRF-44 VRF-45-95
VRF-96
Pyramid Industries, Inc
S
Scientific-Atlanta, Inc
Tektronix, Inc. Telemet/Geotel, Inc Texscan Corp Times Fiber Communications, Inc. Trans USA Corp
VRF-97
U
UNR-Rohn/Div. UNA, Inc.
VRF-109-112
VRF-113-139
VRF-140 VRF-141 VRF-142-149 VRF-150-160 VRF-161-164
VRF-165-169
Keystone Electronics Corp.
VRF-98, 99
Wavetek Corp Wide Band Engineering Co., Inc. Winegard Co. Communication Systems
VRF-170-180 VRF-181-187 VRF-188-191
1985 Bill Daniels Co., Inc. Shawnee Mission, KS
VRF-1
ALPHA TECHNOLOGIES
1305 Fraser Street, D-6 Bellingham, WA 98226 USA (206) 671-7703
POWER SUPPLIES
AP SERIES CATV STANDBY POWER SUPPLIES
Alpha Standby Power Supplies protect your CATV system against powerline disturbances and complete loss of utility power. In addition, they are designed to operate in harsh outdoor environments with wide temperature fluctuations. Continuity and quality of supply is maintained independently of commercial power or weather.
Reliability is the key to the value of a standby power supply-- reliability through design, workmanship and many years of product experience.
Cable operators, large and small, have recognized Alpha's commitment to this unsurpassed reliability -- over 20,000 Alpha Standby Power Supplies are now installed across North America and Europe.
Operation of the Alpha Standby Power Supply: The unit consists of a Ferroresonant Regulator, Battery Charger, Bank of Batteries, Inverter, Transfer Switch and Line Monitor as shown in the Block Diagram.
During normal operation, power passes through the Transfer Switch to the Ferroresonant Regulator, which feeds the CATV system. This regulator provides line and load regulation and prevents high speed line transients from entering the cable system. Simultaneously the automatic temperature- compensated charger maintains the batteries at full capacity. Standby time and battery life are maximized. When the line voltage falls below apreset level, the Line Monitor activates the Transfer Switch. This switch connects the battery driven inverter to the regulator, at the same time providing positive isolation from the power line. To ensure uninterrupted service, transfer takes place in less than one cycle. Frequency and phase relation to the line are preserved through crystal control and phase- lock circuitry.
In case of prolonged power outages, an adjustable Low Battery Voltage Shutdown prevents irreversible damage to the batteries. Transfer back to utility power is delayed by 20-30 seconds to allow for line settling.
All Circuit functions are designed with one goal in mind...to provide your system with the cleanest, most reliable power, continuously.
LINE MONITOR
LINE
TRANSFER SWITCH
FERRORESONANT REGULATOR
60/30V CATV PLANT
BATTERIES BLOCK DIAGRAM
POLE MOUNT
PEDESTAL MOUNT
POWER MODULES FOR AP SERIES STANDBY POWER SUPPLIES
The AM Series power Modules are the operational heart of all ALPHA Standby Power Supplies. They contain the Battery Charger, the Inverter, the Transfer Switch and all necessary Control Electronics to provide the back-up power function in a compact, smoothly functioning and reliable package.
All AM Series modules fit any available AP Series enclosures and all options. Mounting is by means of a simple, one screw tie down. Should service be required the entire module can be removed after a few screw terminal connections are undone. To ensure uninterrupted service while performing this procedure, Alpha highly recommends the use of the Model AP- 60S Service Power Supply, shown below.
The modules have the following features and specifications:
FEATURES: ·Three prong grounded line cord input · Barrier terminal strip for battery, output and options connections ·Output current meter, 0-15 AMPS iron vane type ( except AM-8801) ·Battery fuse ( 30 AMP) or breaker ( 40 AMP) ·Output fuse or breaker ( 15 AMP) · ' Line On' and ' Standby' indicator lights ( except AM-8801) ·Optional elapsed time meter · Front panel pushbutton for test/reset functions with APM, RSM
or RPM · Heavy duty high temp insulation transformer for high reliability ·Upward compatibility through easy to exchange plug-in boards ·Positive line- disconnect through mechanical relay-- no back- feed ·High output float/equalize type charger-- temperature
compensated ·Phase- synchronized transfer and re- transfer from line to standby
·Crystal controlled clock for accurate frequency during outage ·Output waveform virtually unchanged during inverter operation ·Completely overload and short-circuit protected-- automatic
recovery ·Easy service-- all components mounted on chassis and two P.C.
boards
SHORT FORM SPECIFICATIONS:
Model Input Voltage VA, · Inpul Iwren, AMI' · ()Input Voilage VA) · Output Iurrenl AMP" Output Power VA ··
AM-660 ISE) 1201140) 8141 Ilet0 12(101 71016110,
AM-660.14 120
109)60 10 ,
AM- 960.511 12012 ,10 1015/ 30/60 151121 90017201
AM-8801 110 9 120 10 1200
AM- 880T
12 -10
·Nominal, 601-1,50Hz " Maximum
MODEL AP6OS--SERVICE POWER SUPPLY
The Model AP6OS is the ideal service companion to the AP Series Power Supplies. It is simply plugged into one of the enclosure's utility outlets and connected to the Service Power Inserter, located in the output filter. The switch is thrown and cable power is derived from the Service Power Supply. The Standby Module can now be serviced, removed or replaced, ensuring a complete fix of the problem.
The Model AP6OS also makes an excellent emergency or bench power supply.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR MODEL AP6OS
'n r;it 'V'Z e raurrun.4 · / Ws suer
1,0,, Volta,
10/60
. 11.Notnonal
1,pul Ltarenr 1.1 AMP% Maalernall
Ilesulawm ·1 111.1.,,,IloadOverbad and 1.1,,.,erc
Sae 11511 · 11,/ · 1011i.n4,1
215
200
Weem 111,
VRF-2
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BARCO ELECTRONIC n.v.
DISTRIBUTED EXCLUSIVELY BY ELECTOR USA, INC.
'.0. Box 699 - 30 Chapin Rd. 'me Brook, NJ 07058 201) 882-0584
TV DEMODULATOR
REMOTE CONTROL
Fég Fl FlUEMI091 FIFIMP31
InnleilFigFI
BARCO
Electronic
Tv01034
TVDM 34 TV DEMODULATOR DFF-AIR TELEVISION DEMODULATOR
Digital search tuning system using the latest voltage synthesis techniques
" 32 channel memory capacity Sequential channel selection
7 segment LED display of the selected channel Tuning indication with LED bar indicating the position of the channel in the band Mono- and multi-standard version 2video and 1audio output Built-in monitoring loudspeaker ·Headphone and loudspeaker connection ·19" rackmountable ( 2 units height) I Fully modular construction for fast and easy servicing Standard equipped with two front handles
Applications The TVDM 34 demodulator accepts TV off- air signals to deliver video 3nd audio output signals. This demodulator can be used as a ;eparate unit or in combination with a BARCO monitor ( CS, CM), :hus transforming it into a receiver monitor and with the 3ARCOVISION video projector.
Versions Mono- standard: BG, 1; others on special request Vlulti-standard: BG-DK-I-L-MN; others on special request
Dption Nired remote control: 2 x 16 preselections, volume control, off
Accurate program searching rile digital search tuning system uses the latest voltage synthesis :echniques.
3y pressing the " f -->" button ( search), the system moves through aach band, stopping whenever atransmitter is located.
rhis transmitter is automaticaly stored in the memory on the displayed program selection channel, retaining it for future use, even after mains supply interruptions. Over- programming to another pre;election channel is possible with the " X-- Y" button, when using :he optional wired remote control. LED indicators show the tuning :ange and the band being searched.
O1 / 4 presettable fine tuning facilitates precise tuning on the chosen :ransmitter.
A sequential channel selector is provided with atwo digit 7segment LED display of the selected channel.
Memory information is protected during mains supply interruptions.
Volume control for the built-in audio monitoring facility.
For multi-version 6 switches allow standard selection for the first 6 programs of the
sequential channel selector. The others being preset for the BG standard.
Inputs and Outputs Aerial input 75 ohm ( unbalanced)
Video out: 2 x BNC-sockets 1Vpp CVBS Audio out: 1xDIN socket
1.2 Vpp/10 kohm External loudspeaker: DIN socket 8 ohm, 6 W sinus Input for wired remote control
SPECIFICATIONS Tuner: Tuning range:
Tuning voltage.
Noise figure:
VHF band I: 48 - 1101V1Hz band III: 108 - 296MHz
UHF band IV/V: channels 21-69 from 0-28 V for band I, band Ill, band IV/V
VHF band I: < 8.5dB band III: < 8dB
UHF band IV/V: < 10dB
Power supply: Voltage: Frequency: Consumption:
110/220V fuse switchable 50-60Hz 25 watt
Dimensions: Front plate: Cabinet:
W 483mm H 89mm W 483mm H 90mm* D 250mm
*inclusive feet
98-25350 TVDM 34 Off- Air Demodulator....
S800.00
94-23086 Remote Control Unit
75.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-3
BLONDER- TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
EARTH STATION ANTENNA
MODEL 6053 3.7 METER ANTENNA W/PRIME FOCUS FEED Features · Lightweight reflector reduces size of cartons and shipping
costs. Easily transported to installation site.
· Individual reflector panels are interchangeable and field replaceable.
·Antenna meets proposed FCC 2° spacing requirement.
· Feed can be rotated thru 360° of polarization adjustment from the rear of the antenna.
·Textured front panel diffuses sunlight and reduces solar heating at the focal point.
The Blonder- Tongue Model 6053 is a 3.7 meter Earth Station Antenna featuring a segmented, fiberglass reflector, dual polarized prime focus feed, and aT- Bar Azimuth/ Elevation Mount. The Model 6053 is designed for receiveonly applications in the 3.7-4.2 GHz range and is especially well suited as alow cost, easily installed SMATV antenna. The antenna is capable of video programming anywhere in the continental United States from domestic satellites.
The parabolic reflector consists of 10 identical self- aligning sections of lightweight compression- molded fiberglass (FR P) material resulting in an excellent strength- to- weight ratio, easy assembly and trouble- free ground installation.
The Model 6053 antenna comes complete with reflector, T- Bar mount and prime focus feed. The T- Bar mount's pointing accuracy is within .2° at awind velocity of 65 MPH and is designed to withstand winds of 125 MPH with optional braces. The antenna can be easily erected at asite with no special tools or equipment.
Specifications
Electrical
Operating Frequency Range
37to 42 GHz
Feed Type
Prime Focus
Gain at Midband
41 7dB
VSWR
125 1
Polarization
Dual. linear Polarization Adjustment
360" continuous
Cross- Polarized Suppression
30 dB minimum on axis
Isolation between Ports
30 dB minimum for dual linear operation
Beamwidth at Midband
15' First Sidelobe Level
-18 dB. typical
Radiation Pattern. Averaged
29-25 loge
1 er
·8 dEli
7. 8 92'
32-25 tog 8
92' 8 · 48'
-10 dB,
48"
e 180"
Antenna Noise Temperature ( referenced for OMT
port) typical
Elevation
Ta
5°
47"K
10°
38"K
20"
28"K
24'K
00'
23"K
Feed Flange
CPR-229G
Environmental Temperature Range
Operational - 40"C to ·i6O'C Wind Loading @ 0°C (. 32°P)
Operational 104 km/h (65 mvn) wind gusting to 136 krn/h (85 mi/h)
Survival Standard 177 km/h ( 110 mi/h)
without braces Optional 200 km ,h ( 125 mi/h)
with high wind braces
Meets or exceeds MIL- STD- 810B Atmospheric Conditions
Impervious to salt, pollutants, and corrosive contaminants as encountered in coastal and industrial areas
Mechanical
Mount Configuration Azimuth, Elevation T- Bar Mount
Aligns to any satellite within the visible geostationaty orbit serving the continental U S
Reflector 10 segment fiberglass ( FRP) 37M (12 ft Idiameter
Shipping Dimensions
Reflector Back-up Structure Feed Complete Antenna Optional
Inground Mast
Cu Ft 100 16 14 130
2
Lbs 575 475
50 1100
250
Options High wind braces In- ground mast
Note Model 6053 antenna complies with FCC Rule Para 25.209 and CCIR Recommendation 465 and Report 391.1
6053 Dual polarity vv/T-Bar mount
$2318.00
VRF-4
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BLONDER- TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
EARTH STATION ANTENNAS
4.6 METER EARTH STATION ANTENNAS Model 6048 with Prime Focus Feed
FEATURES ·Elevation- Over- Azimuth Mount for ease of operation · Prime Focus Feed for minimum system cost · Protected environment for LNCs · Designed for minimum shipping and installation costs · No panel alignment or testing required · Minimum site preparation required · Easy installation, minimum maintenance
4.6 Meter Antenna Blonder- Tongue's field- proven 4.6- meter earth station antenna now includes a standard elevation- over- azimuth mount for ease of operation and pointing accuracy. The antenna is designed for receiveonly applications in the 3.7 to 4.2 GHz range and is especially well suited for CATV operations receiving video programming from domestic satellites.
The parabolic reflector is made of twelve precision die- stamped aluminum panels for consistent surface accuracy. The twelve panels are uniform and completely interchangeable, allowing convenient handling, lower shipping costs and easy installation. After a foundation has been prepared, two men can install the antenna in less than one day. No special tools are required and no part weighs more than 100 pounds ( 45 kg).
Elevation- Over- Azimuth Mount The 4.6- meter earth station has a standard elevation- over- azimuth mount, engineered to provide continuous satellite arc coverage from any location in the contiguous United States. Pointing the antenna is rapid and accurate. Complete 360° azimuth coverage does not require alignment of the foundation to a specific heading, eliminating the possibility of installation errors associated with foundation centerlines.
Economical Pier Foundation Kit A cast pier foundation kit is available as an economical alternative to a concrete slab foundation. The pier foundation is designed for steady 100 mph windloads. It consists of three cast pier inserts. A steel framework bolts the inserts into a triangle which is lowered into three augered holes containing prepared re- bar cages. The holes are then filled with concrete. Installing the pier foundation is less time consuming and less expensive than pouring a concrete slab foundation.
NOTE: When ordering antennas with pier foundation kits please specify: Model 6049 for Prime Focus Feed Antenna/Pier Foundation Kit.
High- Performance Prime Focus Feed Blonder- Tongue's standard prime focus feed offers consistent high quality and unusual economy in a mid- sized earth station antenna. Sidelobe performance is excellent meeting 29-25 log O sidelobe specifications. The feed system provides dual- polarization capability in the 3.7 to 4.2 GHz range, and can be manually rotated to any position.
6048 6049
AZ/EL mount w/ anchor bolts AZ/ EL mount w/pier foundation kit
$5107.00 5345.00
4.6 METER ANTENNA WITH PRIME FOCUS FEED
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical, Prime Focus Feed
Operating Frequencies
37 to 42 GHz
Gain at Midband ( referenced to OMT port)
Receive
430 clBi minimum at 395 GHz
VSWR
131maximum
Polarization
Receive- only, dual linear
Polarization Adjustment
360' continuous
Cross-Polarized Suppression
35 dB minimum on axis
Isolation between Ports. Receive
35 dB minimum for dual linear operation
Bearnwidth at Midband ( nominal)
3 dB
Receive 11°
First sidelobe Level
-20 dB
Prime Focus Radiation Pattern Averaged Sidelobe
Envelope'
Receive ( where Ois angle off axis)
29-25 log 8dBi 2°
7°
·8dEli 7° · 8._92°
32-25 log da for 92" t 0 48°
-10 dEll 48° t 0t 180'
Antenna Noise Temperature ( referred to OMT
port) typical
Elevation
Ta
5°
50K
10°
34K
15"
27K
20"
24K
30°
20K
40°
18K
Feed Interface
Receive
CPR 229F Flange
General Antenna Type
Prime focus or cassegrain
Antenna Diameter 46m ( 15 1ft
Reflector Construction 12 panels, precision die- stamped
Mount Configuration Elevation- over- Azimuth
Satellite Coverage Any satellite located between 5' and 90°
elevation from any location Net Weight ( approximate)
544 kg ( 1200 lbs) Shipping Weight ( approximate)
1043 kg ( 2300 lbs)
Shipping Volume ( approximate) 57m' ( 200 I?)
Environmental
Wind Loading·· Operational
Pointing Accuracy in 96 km/h ( 60 mph) wind
Gusting to 137 km/h ( 85 mph) .20" RMS @ 15° C ( 59° F)
25" RMS @ -40° (- 40° F)
Temperature Operational -40° C to · 65 . C (-40° Fto · 149° F)
Survival ( steady state wind velocities) ·No ice
160 km/h ( 100 mph) from any direction
(94 @ 15° C ( 59° F)
151 krn/h
mph) from any direction
@ 0° C ( 32° F)
ra 145 km/h ( 90 mph) from any direction -40° C (- 40° F)
.5 CM ( 2 in.) Radial Ice
112 km/h ( 70 mph) from any direction
@ 0° C ( 32 ° F) Solar Radiation
1.1 mw/mm ,( 710 mw/in')
Atmospheric Conditions
Salt, pollutants, and corrosive contaminants as
encountered in coastal and moderate industrial
areas
Options Pier Foundation Kit
-- All conditions assume adjustable components securely clamped
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-5
BLONDER- TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
SINGLE CHANNEL PROFESSIONAL ANTENNAS
BTY* SERIES VHF Single Channel Professional Antennas
STOCK NOS. 4866S and 4867S-0 ·Patented* off- center driven element provides excellent 75 ohm
match without use of fragile capacitors as required in gamma match antennas ·UPS shippable for reduced freight and handling cost · Hard drawn, heavy wall aluminum boom for added strength. Square boom design assures positive lock with mast mounting bracket ·End- sealed aluminum elements for maximum vibration dampening. Lo- Band elements are fiber filled ·Antennas constructed to withstand 125 mph winds · Elements are permanently affixed to an aluminum mounting block. Block has square interior aperture to completely encircle boom for optimum element alignment while preventing rotation · Heavy duty bracket has serrated teeth for added grip to mast. Bracket accepts mast sizes up to 2" in outside diameter ·B- T Cantilever Mount available for rear mounting on a tower or mast. Unique design permits vertical or horizontal orientation of mast
BTY series single channel 5and 10 element antennas are high quality, professional VHF/FM antennas designed for CATV and MATV installations. These antennas are designed with a two piece boom permitting the antennas to be shipped via UPS to reduce freight and handling costs. They are available for channels 2 thru 6, FM and 7 thru 13. NOTE: BTY-FM antenna has two driven dipoles for atotal of six elements. BTY VHF antennas feature high gain and a narrow beamwidth at the individual channel. Two piece, square boom construction and end- sealed aluminum elements provide added strength, excellent wind resistance and exceptional weathering properties. The heavy duty mounting bracket is positioned at the antenna's center of gravity for balanced mounting to the mast. BTY antennas can also be rear mounted vertically or horizontally on a tower leg or mast ( 1-1/4" to 2-1/2" OD) using a B-T Model 5760 Cantilever Mount. BTY Series antennas feed 75 ohm coaxial cable downleads.
*Pat. No. 4,218,686. Other Pat. Pend.
Material and Finish
Boom - 6063-T6 aluminum tubing, 1-1/4" Sq.; . 062 wall thickness. Elements - 6063-T52, 1/2" Dia. aluminum tubing; . 049 wall thickness. Element Mounting Block - solid extruded aluminum; 1-3/4" x2-3/4" x1 . Mast Mounting Bracket- 14 gauge steel with electroless nickel plating. 6063-T6 is a hi- strength aluminum/magnesium/titanium alloy. Output Connector: 1-"F" Type Shipping Weight: 13.2 lbs. ( Max.) Shipping Size: 4" H x5-1/2"W x85"L ( Max.)
SPECIFICATIONS Electrical/5 Element Gain Over Isotropic: 112 dBi
Gain Over 1/2 Wave Dipole: 9dB VSWR: 1.32 Return Loss: 17 dB Front To Back Ratio: 20 dB Impedance: 75 ohms Beamwidth (-3dB):
Vertical: 70° Horizontal: 63° Bandwidth: 8MHz, TV channels
23 MHz, FM
Attenuation Of Undesired Side Lobes: 22 dB
Accessories Supplied: Mast mounting bracket assembly, Weather Boot
Electrical/10 Element Gain Over Isotropic: 13.2 dBi
Gain Over 1/2 Wave Dipole: 11 dB VSWR: 1.22 Return Loss: 20 dB
Front To Back Ratio: 21 dB Impedance: 75 ohms Beamwidth 1-3dB):
Vertical: 49° Horizontal: 51° Bandwidth: 8MHz, TV channels
Attenuation Of Undesired
Side Lobes: 25 dB Accessories Supplied: Mast
mounting bracket assembly, Weather Boot
MECHANICAL
Model No.
Stock No.
Maximum Ch. Element No. Width
Boom Length
Turning Radius
Wind Resistance
Lbs.'
No In. Cm In. Cm In. Cm Ice
1/2" Ice
BTY-10-7 4867S-7
7 33 84 131 333 64 163 52.56 70.27
BTY-10-8 4867S-8
8 32 81 126 320 63 160 50.83 68.33
BTY-10-9 4867S-9 9 32 81 122 310 62 157 49.44 66.38
BTY-10-10 4867S-10 10 31 79 118 300 60 152 48.00 64.44
BTY-10-11 4867S-11 11 31 79 115 292 58 147 47.00 63.00
BTY-10-12 4867S-12 12 29 74 110 279 56 142 45.00 60.55
BTY-10-13 4867S-13 13 28 71 106 269 53 135 43.88 58.60
BTY-5-2 4866S-2
2 106 269 128 325 60
BTY-5-3 4866S-3
3 97 246 116 295 54
BTY-5-4 4866S-4
4 85 216 105 268 48
BTY-5-5 4866S-5
5 75 191 96 244 44
BTY-5-6 4866S-6
6 71 180 96 244 44
BTY-5-FM 4866S- FM FM 64 163 120 305 68
152 49.84 137 45.67 122 41.85 112 38.73 112 38.73 173 47.06
66.16 61.78 56.44 52.00 52.00 63.73
*Thrust in lbs. transferred to supporting structure based on 100 miles per hour sustained wind on antenna.
CANTILEVER ANTENNA MOUNT
STOCK NO. 5760 The Blonder-Tongue Model 5760 Cantilever Mount consists of a heavy duty square aluminum boom and all clamping hardware required for rear- end mounting of Blonder- Tongue antennas, Nos. 4866, 4867, 4871. The use of cantilever end- mounting is widespread in CATV systems since the antennas are usually attached to tower legs rather than to masts. The cantilever is designed to be mounted parallel to and below the antenna boom. Boom is 1-1/4" square aluminum tubing 16063-T6), 64-3/8" long. Mounting plates and brackets are #41 gauge stainless steel.
VRF-6
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BLONDER-TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
YH-SERIES VAGI ANTENNAS
...Extra rugged for the highest quality systems.
·Extra heavy duty construction ·Superior high-gain performance ·VSWR 1.5 ( 14dB R.L.) ·Bandwidth 6MHz
The most rugged single-channel TV antennas available. Boom and all elements are made of heavy-duty, hard drawn aluminum tubing. Internal vibration dampers are sealed into all elements over four feet long. One piece dampers run the full length of the element to eliminate fatigue producing vibrations, greatly increasing the life of the antenna. A gamma matching system with acompletely encapsulated, moisture and weatherproof capacitor provides direct 75-ohm coaxial feed with no external matching baluns. Maximum transfer of received signals from the antenna to the feed cable is assured. No holes are drilled in the boom. Elements are clamped on. Element ends are sealed with caps. Wind noise is minimized.
MECHANICAL DETAILS ·Boom - 0.058" wall thickness, 6061-T6 hard drawn . aluminum,
1-1/2" outside diameter ·Elements- 0.058" wall thickness, 6061-16 hard drawn aluminum,
3/4" outside diameter. Low band elements are fiber filled ·Element-to- Boom Connection- 3-1/2" x3" x 1" solid aluminum
block ·Boom-to-Mast Mounting - 6" x7", 1/4" solid aluminum plate with
four 3/8" cadmium plated U-bolts ·Accepts mast sizes from 2" to 2-1/2" outside diameter ·Wide element spacing provides typical gain 2dB higher than com-
petitive models
RUGGEDIZED SINGLECHANNEL ANTENNAS
5Element YH Series Antenna
Capped Element Ends Minimize Wind Noise
At; ,v41111"P"
"Gamma Match for Outstanding Match Characteristics"
"Double
Safety U- Bolt Assembly"
10 Element YH Series Antenna
"Vibration Dampener Solid Aluminum Center Sleeves"
·
Model
No.
YH-25 YH-35 YH-45 YH-55 YH-65 YH-FM5
YH-75 YH-85 YH-95 YH-105 YH-115 YH-125 YH-135
YH-210 YH-310 YH-410 YH-510 YH-610 YH-FM10
YH-710 YH-810 YH-910 YH-1010 YH-1110 YH-1210 YH-1310
Ream
Width
No. Gain F-8 -3d6
W.
Wind Resistance
Lbs. ··
EL dal Redo E H
No
1/ 2 "
Ice Ice
5Element la-Band-Stock Nos. 4746 & Ch. No. or FM
2 5 10.7 23dB 52° 63° 103" 127 48.9 81.3
3 5 10.7 23dB 52° 63° 93" 11r 44.4 73.5
4 5 10.7 23dB 52° 63° 85" 101" 42 67.5
5 5 10.7 23dB 57 63° 74- 89" 39 63
6 5 10.7 23dB 52° 63° 69" 83" 34.8 56.4
FM 5 10.7 23dB 57 63° 66" 98" 37.5 59.4
5Element MI-Band-Stock Non 4758 & Ch. No. or FM
7 5 10.7 23dB 52° 63° 33" 55" 25.5 37.8
8 5 10.7 23d8 52° 63° 32" 54 24.9 36.9
9 5 10.7 23dB 52° 63° 31" 10 5 10.7 23dB 52° 63° 30"
52" 24.3 36.3
sr 217 35.1
11 5 10.7 23dB 57 63° 29" 47 23.4 34.5
12 5 10.7 23dB 52° Kr 28" 48" 23.1 33.9
13 5 10.7 23dB 52° 63° 27" 47" 22.2 32.7
10 Element Lo-Band-Stack lin& 4749 & Ch Ma.
2 10 13.6 27dB 38° 48° 103" 268- 125.7 215.4
3 10 116 27dB 38° 48° 97 257* 117.3 201.6
4 10 13.6 27dB 38° 48° 85" 227' 111.3 191.4
5 10 116 27dB 38° 48° 74" 197' 101.7 180.3
6 10 13.6 27dB 38° 48° 69" 187* 96 165.3
FM 10 13.6 27dB 38° 48° 66" 182- 100.5 174 NI Element Hi-Band-Slack Mos. 4759 & Ch. No.
7 10 13.6 27dB 38° 48° 33" 119" 51.3 75.9
8 10 116 27d& 38° 48° 37 115" 50.7 74.4
9 10 116 27dB 38° 48° 31" 114" 49.2 72.6
10 10 13.6 27dB 38° 48° 30" 112" 47.4 69.9
11 10 13.6 27dB 38° 48° 29" 105" 46.8 68.7
12 10 116 27dB 38° 48° 28" 103" 46.2 67.5
13 10 13.6 27d8 38° 48° 27- lor 44.4 64.8
Y-FM- 2
YSB Mount
Y-FM -2OMNIDIRECTIONAL FM ANTENNA
Stock No. 4808 ·Full 88-108MHz Frequency Range The Y-FM-2 is a twin dipole FM antenna. Two 1/2 wave dipole elements mounted 90° to one another on the antenna mast give this antenna an omnidirectional reception pattern. Maximum transfer of received signals is assured by aweatherproof gamma match. An F-type connector accepts cable sizes from RG-59/U to .412 aluminum. Elements are attached to the boom ( not supplied) with solid aluminum blocks. Element ends are sealed with end caps to minimize wind noise.
YSB MOUNTING ASSEMBLY
Stock No. 4760 ·Stack antennas of the same channel for increased gain.
'Supplied with load support struts. Boom shipped in two sections with all connecting hardware supplied. "Thrust in lbs. transferred to supporting structure based on 30 lbs. per square foot wind pressure 1100 miles per hour sustained wind on round boom antennas, 80 miles per hour sustained wind on square boom antennas).
Bracket for stacking BTY and YH-Series antennas. Connects vertical and horizontal members of stacking frame. Six units required for horizontal quad array. Dimensions: 1/4" x6" x7" flat aluminum plate with four 3/8" diameter U-bolts. U-bolts adjustable to take any tubing from 1-1/2" 0. D. to 2-1/2" O.D.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-7
BLONDER- TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
PROFESSIONAL VHF BROADBAND ANTENNA HI- BAND, 10 ELEMENT Stock No. 4871
DESIGN FEATURES ·Patented* off- center driven elements provide excellent 75 ohm
match without use of fragile capacitors as required in gamma match antennas.
· Hard drawn, heavy wall aluminum boom for added strength. Square boom design assures positive lock with mast mounting bracket.
·End- sealed aluminum elements provide maximum vibration dampening.
· Elements are permanently affixed to an aluminum mounting block. Block has square interior aperture to completely encircle boom for optimum element alignment while preventing rotation.
· Heavy duty bracket has serrated teeth for added grip to mast. Bracket accepts mast sizes up to 2" outside diameter.
For CATV and MATV installations. It has a 10 element, broadband design for VHF channels 7 to 13 and features high gain and narrow beamwidth. The output feeds a75 ohm downlead. The antenna has a two piece boom permitting less expensive UPS shipment, easier handling and reduced shelf space. Two piece, square boom construction and end- sealed aluminum elements provide added strength, excellent wind resistance and exceptional weathering properties. The heavy duty mounting bracket is positioned at the antenna's center of gravity for balanced mounting to the mast. The antenna can also be rear- end mounted vertically or horizontally on a tower leg or mast using a B- T Model 5760 Cantilever Mount.
ELECTRICAL Gain Over Isotropic: 12.2dBl Gain Over 1/2 Wave Dipole: 11dB ( Ch. 7); 10dB ( Ch. 13) VSWR: 1.6:1 Return Loss: 14dB Impedance: 75 ohms Beamwidth (- 3dB) Horizontal: 50.5° ( Ch. 7); 42° ( Ch. 13) Attenuation of Undesired Side Lobes: 20dB Bandwidth: 174-216MHz. 1/2dB flatness
MECHANICAL Maximum Element ( Reflector) Width: 35-1/2" ( 88.75 cm) Boom Length: 104" ( 261 cm) Turning Radius: 84" ( 210 cm) Wind Resistance: 52 lbs. 123.6Kg(t ( No Ice); 76 lbs. 134.5Kg(t
11/2" Ice) Maximum Cross Sectional Area: 1.3 sq. ft. ( 0.117m 2 ) Operational/Survival Wind Velocity: 125 mph ( 200 kph) ( No Ice)
tThrust in lbs. transferred to supporting structure based on 100 miles per hour sustained wind on antenna.
VHF AND UHF ANTENNAS
For CATV systems using UHF channels. Each antenna is designed to receive asingle UHF channel, and provide higher gain and narrower
beamwidth at the channel of interest than broadband UHF antennas. Heavy- gauge aluminum is used for durability and light weight. The mounting assembly is on rear of the antenna allowing it to be mounted directly to vertical tower members. This feature prevents
the mast from interacting with the elements and interfering with the antennas' performance.
MECHANICAL Boom: 0.058" wall thickness, 6063-T 832 aluminum, 3/4" O.D. Elements: 1/4" solid, 2011-T3 aluminum
Center Sleeve: 1-9/16" x 1" x3/4" solid aluminum block Mounting Assembly: 3-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/2" bracket with single
3/8" x2-1/2" cadmium plated U- bolt Cable Connector: type F Mast Size: accepts up to 2" O.D. mast Wind Resistance: 100 MPH
ELECTRICAL Gain: 13.6dB Front/Back Ratio: 27dB Bandwidth: 6MHz Impedance: 75 ohms
Return Loss: 14dB R.L. ( VSWR 1.5) Beamwidth: I-3dB points) Vertical: 48° Horizontal: 38° 1") Specify Channel
ANTENNA STACKING DATA
Stacking single channel antennas ( using more than one antenna for the same channel) increases gain and improves directivity. Some typical stacking arrays are shown below. To operate properly, single channel antennas in an array must be separated by aminimum of one wave length at the center frequency of the channel or a multiple of it. Dimensions A and B on the illustration are determined by this formula:
One wavelength ( in air) =
11811 Channel Frequency in MHz
inches
5Element VHF Antenna Stacking Dimensions:
Channel
2 3 4 5 6 FM 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Dimension A 8'8" 710" 7'2" 6'3" 510" 5'0" 2'9" 2'8" 2'7" 2'6" 2'5" 2'4" 2'4"
Dimension B 174" 158" 144" 126" 118" 100" 5'6" 5'4" 5'2" 5'0" 410" 4'9" 4'8"
10 Element VHF Antenna Stacking Dimensions:
Channel
2 3 4 5 6 FM 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Dimension A 174" 158" 144" 126" 118" 100" 5'6" 5'4" 5'2" 5'0" 410" 4'9" 4'8"
Dimension B 174" 158" 144" 126" 118" 100" 5'6" 5'4" 5'2" 5'0" 410" 4'9" 4'8"
10 Element UHF Antenna Stacking Dimensions:
2 bay vertical array Approximately 3 dB gain increase improves vertical pattern
a
f ·tl+
A
4 bay horizontal array Approximately 6 dB gain increase improves vertical 8 horizontal pattern
'Cr. 14
Cr. )4
;
CM ,41
tw
CI. 54
t
C 6.1
4.9
Y-10 UHF ANTENNAS Stock No. 4778-11
·Sold Aluminum Reflector and Director Elements
2 bay horizontal array Approximately 3 dB gain increase improves horizontal pattern
4 bay vertical way Approximately 6 dB gain increase improves vertical pattern
Splitter/Combiner
; A -
·High- Quality Gamma Match Gives Accurate 75- ohm Match ·Simple Installation
Cable lengths between antennas and splitter/combiner must be equal. Use SBL-2UN splitter
VRF-8
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BLONDER- TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
GALAXY III PLUS SERIES PREAMPLIFIERS
·Designed for multi- set home or MATV system use ·Ultra low noise, mast- mounted preamp · High gain post amplifier permits relatively long cable runs from the
antenna without signal degradation ·Split band amplifier eliminates low band interference with high
band in VHF ·Individually packaged in full- color display box with all mounting
hardware and cable connectors The Galaxy Ill Plus Series are two- unit amplification systems that can provide all the gain required for optimum television signal distribution in amulti-set home or amoderate size MATV installation. The system consists of alow noise, mast- mounted preamplifier and ahigh output indoor post amplifier/power supply. This arrangement allows each component to be optimized for its particular function and results in the best possible system performance. All mast mounting hardware for the preamplifier and all cable connectors required are supplied with the unit. The Galaxy Ill Plus Series employs the most modern technology for protection from lightning and power line surges. Skyliner III Plus Two unit VHF amplification system for multi- set home or moderate size MATV installations. Vaulter Ill Plus Two unit UHF/VHF amplification system for multi- set home or moderate size MATV installations. Used with separate VHF and UHF antennas. Suburban Ill Plus Same as Vaulter Ill Plus except for use with combined UHF/VHF antenna.
Galaxy Ill Plus
As has been the practice in previous B- T preamplifiers, the Galaxy Ill series preamps employ a sharp cut-off filter at the input to reduce interference from strong local FM transmitters. As a result, the FM band gain drops to about 10 dB below the low- band gain at 95 MHz and above. Since this filter is at the input, noise figure at FM is also degraded somewhat. Thus the Galaxies can be considered to pass FM for most stronger signal applications, but will not be suitable for critical weak signal FM preamplification.
PREAMPLIFIERS
GALAXY III SERIES PREAMPLIFIERS
The Only Home Preamplifier with All These Features: ·All new transformer and power adder simplify hook-up and
mounting · Lowest UHF noise figure of any preamp available plus lower VHF
noise figure ·Three way split- band amplifier sections ( VHF 2-6, 7-13, and UHF)
to eliminate low band signal interference with high band and to optimize dynamic range ·All UHF models fully operational thru ch. 83 ·Each Galaxy III is protected from lightning and power line surges · Dual models have a built-in splitter for two TV set feed from one preamp · Units available for use with single or dual antennas · Includes heavy duty mast mounting hardware to insure secure installation ·Individually packaged in colorful display box
A complete new look line of superior performance rated, mast mounted preamplifiers for any home installation requirement. Galaxy Ill units feature modern design; a high- impact polypropylene case; simplified mounting and all- channel range Ithru ch. 83 on UHF). A compact indoor transformer and power adder are included with all models.
Horizon Ill VHF amplifier for weak signal areas, 300 OHM downlead, 300 OHM output.
Horizon Ill Dual Same as Horizon Ill with two outputs for two TV sets.
Horizon Ill Jr. Economy VHF amplifier for medium signal areas. 300 OHM downlead, 300 OHM outputs for two TV sets.
Skyliner Ill VHF amplifier for weak signal areas. 75 OHM downlead, 75 OHM output.
Skyliner Ill Jr. Economy VHF amplifier for medium signal areas. 75 OHM downlead, 75 OHM output.
Skyliner Ill Dual Same as Skyliner Ill with two 75- ohm outputs for two TV sets.
Able U2 Ill UHF amplifier for weak signal areas. Amplifies channels 14-83, 300 OHM downlead, 300 OHM output.
Able U2 Ill Dual Same as Able U2 Ill with two outputs for two TV sets.
Able U2 III 75 UHF amplifier for weak signal areas. Amplifies channels 14-83, 75 OHM downlead, 75 OHM output.
Cross Country Ill All channel amplifier. Single 300 OHM UHF/VHF antenna input, 300 OHM downlead, 300 OHM output.
Suburban Ill All channel amplifier. Single 300 OHM UHF/VHF antenna input. 75 OHM downlead, 75 OHM output.
Voyager Ill All channel amplifier. Separate 300 OHM UHF and VHF antenna inputs. 300 OHM downlead, 300 OHM output.
Voyager Ill Dual Same as Voyager Ill, but with outputs for two TV sets.
Vaulter Ill All channel amplifier. Separate 300 OHM UHF and VHF antenna inputs. 75 OHM downlead, 75 OHM output.
Vaulter Ill Dual Same as Vaulter Ill, but with outputs for two TV sets.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR F-9
BLONDER- TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
SCMA SINGLE CHANNEL VHF PREAMPLIFIER Stock No. 4761 - (*) · Low Noise Figure GUARANTEED · Best Adjacent Channel Overload Rejection · High Gain with Flat 6 MHz Bandpass
The SCMA is a very low noise, single- channel VHF and FM preamplifier. All solid state design featuring two " field effect" transistors provides a guaranteed ultra high signal-to-noise ratio. The actual noise figure of each individual unit is indicated on the case. Excellent gain and the ability of the unit to accept a wide range of input signal levels makes the SCMA ideal for difficult signal areas. The unit has exceptional immunity to overloads caused by strong adjacent channel signals. A full six MHz bandpass insures excellent color operation. Standard units have a 75- ohm F connector input and either F type output connector or . 412" aluminum cable output connector." A 20 dB output monitor jack (backmatched) permits the unit's performance to be checked without interrupting service. The unit mounts on the antenna mast and power diplexed on the downlead, eliminating the need for aseparate power lead. Current required is -21 VDC at 65 ma. Mounting hardware and cable connectors supplied.
*Specify Channel "Specify Output Connector ( including type of . 412 cable). SPECIFICATIONS Noise Figure: Channels 2-6, FM; less than 3.0 dB, Channels 7-13; less than 2.5 dB. Gain: Channels 2-6; 29 dB, Channels 7-13, 26 dB; FM, 24 dB. Minimum Recommended Input for TASO Grade 1 (Excellent Picture): -10 dBmV. Operating Temperature Range: -40°to + 140°F.
PREAMPLIFIERS
BROADBAND PREAMPLIFIERS CMA-(13B, HB, AND LB) Broadband TV Preamplifiers Stock No. 4948 ) 1
· High Gain and Input Capability · Provides Superior Performance with Wideband Antennas ·Available in Broad Band, High Band or Low Band to Meet Any
Requirement
These companions to Blonder- Tongue's famous line of channelized low- noise preamplifiers combine exceptionally high signal- handling capability and gain with good input match to make them ideal for use with wideband antennas. A 300- ohm input connector and a75- ohm type F, output connector permits the use of coaxial downlead without the necessity of a separate balun. A rugged metal case, wide operating temperature range, and mast- mounting design combine to make it ideal for tower installations. A backmatched output- monitoring jack is included for monitoring the units performance without interrupting service. Mounting hardware and a BTF-591 cable connector are supplied. *Specify Band
SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Range -- BB: 54-216 ( Ch. 2-13); LB: 54-88 ( Ch. 2-6); HB: 174-216 ( Ch. 7-13). Input Capability ( typical) -- BB: + 25 dBmV ( each of 7channels); LB: + 28 dBmV ( each of 3channels); HB: + 26 dBmV (each of 4 channels). Gain -- BB: 26 dB typical, 23 dB min.; LB: 26 dB typical, 24 dB min.; HB: 26 dB typical, 24 dB min. Input Match (300 ohm) -- BB: 11 dB RL typical, 8 dB RL min.; LB: 10 dB RL typical, 8 dB RL min.; HB: 12 db RL typical, 10 dB RL min. Output Match ( 75 ohm) -- BB: 8 dB RL typical, 5 dB min. LB: 11 dB RL typical, 8 dB min.; HB: 9 dB RL typical, 6 dB min. Noise Figure (All models): 5.5 dB typical, 7.0 dB max. Power Requirement:-- 21 VDC, 50 ma diplexed on downlead. Blonder- Tongue 1536 power supply recommended.Dimensions:5" Lx3-7/8" W x2-5/16" H.
SCMA-U-75 SINGLE CHANNEL UHF PREAMPLIFIER
Stock No. 4526-11
· Low Noise Figure GUARANTEED · Unit Optimized for Single UHF Channel
This ultra- low noise UHF preamplifier is optimized for a single UHF channel. A unit's channel number and noise figure at that channel are indicated on its case. Beside its very low noise figure and excellent gain, each SCMA-U provides exceptional immunity ot overloads caused by strong adjacent channels. Current required is 24ma at -21 VDC. All required mounting hardware and cable connectors are supplied. * Specify Channel
SPECIFICATIONS Noise Figure: 3.5 dB +/- 1 dB typical ( actual guaranteed noise figure indicated on case). Gain: Channels 14-69, 22 dB; 40-69, 21.5 dB; 70-83, 21 dB. Minimum Recommended Input for TASO Grade 1 ( excellent) picture: Channels 14-39, 300pV (- 10.5 dBmV); 40-60, 330pV (-9.6 dBmV); 70-83, 335pV (-9.5 dBmV). Use Model 1526 Power Supply.
POWER SUPPLIES AND PROTECTORS 1526 POWER SUPPLY Stock No. 1526
·RF Feed Thru -- Powers One Side of RF Thru Line Only · Short Circuit Proof Regulator · Compact, Lightweight Design
Delivers a regulated and surge- protected - 21 volts DC at 40 ma. Designed primarily for powering a single SCMA-U mast mounted preamplifier. AC outlet provided for looping AC power from one power supply to another. UHF VHF feed thru for duplexing power on coaxial cable. BTF-591 cable connectors supplied. RF thru loss: UHF, 0.5 dB; VHF 0.3 dB.
VRF-10
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BLONDER- TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
PROCESSORS
0.
I
eee
DYNAMATIC" CATV PROCESSOR Stock No. 4455(*)
· Lower Adjacent Channel lntermod Trap Reduces Adjacent Channel Distortion and Intermodulation Products.
· Front Panel Auto/Manual Switch Facilitates Proof of Performance Testing without Altering Previous Level Settings.
The DYNAMATIC is a CATV Channel Processor with automatic gain control and fully solid state circuitry. It is intended to amplify and stabilize the level of a single VHF channel in CATV headend systems. It is available for TV channels 2 thru 13, FM, A-1, A-2. A thru I, IF, and CH D inverted.
The combination of a low noise, high gain amplifier with high output capability and wide AGC window assures a large dynamic range providing a stable quality signal, free of distortion and intermodulation products.
Frequency Range: ch. 2-13, Midband ( specify channel) Thru-loss at visual carrier: 3.0 typical
Amplitude response flatness between 0.75 MHz to 5.0 MHz above lower boundary frequency ( Pix -0.5 MHz to Pis +3.75 MHz): + /- 0.5dB typical (FCC spec is + /- 2dB)
Notch filter attenuation, manual front panel control: OdB to 12dB ( additional 4d8 with rear panel control, with increased thru-loss) Aural carrier ALC range indicator: LED indicates aural carrier ratio is being maintained Aural carrier ALC range: 12dB or 16dB
Channel sample level requirements: + 10 to + 30dBmVIAGC'd in Audiomatic) Temperature range: 0to 50 C ( 32 Fto 122 FI for 1dB change in A/V ratio when using max notch depth. No change when using less than max notch depth.
Power requirement: 117 VAC, 60Hz, 0.11 amp: ( DC Auxiliary -24VDC, 0.15 amp) Power Supply: No change in aural carrier level with AC power input between 100 VAC and 130 VAC
Battery backup operation: Automatically transfers to external- 24 VDC battery power in event of AC powerline failure or AC voltage drop below 100 VAC Size: 19' rack x 13/ 4 "panel space x53/ 4 "deep Aural Notch Filter shapes CONVENTIONAL Amplitude response of standard ( symmetrically shaped) aural carrier notch filter (rolls off on color subcarrier. Does not meet CATV FCC specs)
AUDIOMATIC The tandem system of BPF-c, AUDIOMATIC, and DYNAMATIC meets the required FCC amplitude response specifications.
Gain: VHF 52dB ( min.) 57dB ( typ.)
FM 47dB ( min.) 52dB ( Typ.)
Bandpass Flatness: ( Pis - 0.5 MHz Pix + 3.75 MHz) 0-35dB Gain Control Range: + /- 0.25dB Typ., + /- 0.9dB max. ( 6 MHz BW) 0-35dB Gain Control Range + /- 0.4dB Typ. 0-40dB Gain Control Range + /- 0.6dB Tyr). FM: ( 91 MHz to 108 MHz) + /- 1.5d8 Typ., + /- 2.0cIB max.
Maximum Output: 66.0dBmV Typ. for 1/2d8 sync compression
Alternate Channel Rejection: -27c18 Typ. ( + /-9 MHz from channel center) ( use with BPFb Bandpass Filter and Audiomatic input for adjacent channel operation)
Power Requirements: 117 VAC, 60Hz, 0.11 amp ( DC Auxiliary. -24 VDC. 0.15a)
Test and Monitor Points: EXTERNAL: OUTPUT. -30d8
Recommended Maximum Output Operating Level: 60dBmV for all distortion products-60dB ( aural carrier - 15dB, color subcarrier-25dB)
Output Level Range: 40-60 BmV min.
AGC Range: 40dB
AGC Stiffness ( output change for + /- 20dB input change): =0.2 at 60dBmV output =0.3 at 50dBmV output =0.6 at 40dBmV output
Noise Figure ( full gain): 5.5dEl typ.
Input Return Loss: 13dB Typ. on channel
Ouput Return Loss: 18d8 Typ. 54-216 MHz
Semiconductor Complement: 3 IC's, 1FET, 12 Transistors, 19 Diodes
Mechanical: Line Cord: 3 wire grounded; 3 wire convenience outlet. Connectors: BTF-100, F- type, Female " G/F" at output test. Fuse: 1/8 amp, S)o-Blo. Dimensions: 19"L x 13 /4 "H x5-1/8"D. Shipping Weight: 5pounds.
I') Specify Channel
AUDIOMATIC' AURAL LEVEL CONTROL*
Stock No. 4461 ' U.S. Pat. 4,081,839
·Compatible With Any Channel Processor · IC ALC Unaffected by Chroma Subcarrier ·Hi- CI Asymmetrical Helical Resonator Notch
Filter Controls Aural Carrier Level
The AUDIOMATIC Model 4461 is a self-contained automatic sound control system that continually monitors the Aural- Visual Carrier ratio of an incoming channel signal, and by processing this information, automatically varies the depth of a Hi- C2 Helical Resonator notch filter to maintain an constant, pre-set ratio. The AUDIOMATIC is designed to automatically maintain a constant Aural- Visual Carrier ratio at the output of any Channel Processor.
. F
· ti
MCA- bVHF PROCESSOR, HIGH OUTPUT, SINGLE CHANNEL, AGC CONTROLLED
Stock No. 4454
· Interchangeable broadband amplifier board to facilitate maintenance
·Adjustable sound trap for lower distortion
·Lightning and -line voltage surge protected
·True peak detector AGC
·Wide Dynamic Range
The MCA- b channel processor is a high- output VHF TV amplifier with automatic gain control and all solid-state circuitry. It is intended to amplify and stabilize the level of a single VHF- channel in MATV headend systems.
The MCA- bfeatures high output even on adjacent channels through use of built-in intermodulation notch filter and built-in aural carrier level control notch filter.
Electrical: Maximum output for ½ dB sync compression: 68.5 dBmV ( 2.7 volts) min.: 70.5 dBmV ( 3.3 volts) typ. with sound at - 15dB Recommended output operating level for color operation in alternate or adjacent channel systems ( 920 KHz beat at -55 dB, adjacent channel beat at -50 dB), with sound carrier adjusted to - 15 dB, color subcarrier - 25 dB: 68.0 dBmV ( 2.5 volts) min.; 69.5 dBmV ( 3.0 volts) typ.
Gain: 55.0 dB min.: 60.0 dB typ. Noise Figure at Full Gain: 5.5 dB typ.
Output Level Control Range: 20 dB min. AGC Range: 40 dB min. AGC Stiffness ( output change for + /- 20 dB input change): Less than + /0.25 dB at 69 dBmV output; less than + /- 0.5 dB at 59 dBmV output Maximum input with level set at 69 dBmV output: 43 dBmV
Bandpass Flatness, 6 MHz BW lover 35 dB gain control range): + /- 1.0 db max.; + /- 0.5 dB typ. Alternate channel rejection ( Use with BPFa Bandpass Filter at input for adjacent channel operation): -26 dB ( + /- 9 MHz from channel center) Input Match: 16 dB return loss typ.
Output Match: 18 dB return loss typ. greater than 9 MHz from channel center; 18 dB return loss typ. on channel Power Requirement: 117 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.11 amp. Test and Monitor Points: External: Output, - 30 dB; Internal: AGC, 9.5V Semi- conductor Complement: 1- IC, 1-FET, 7-transistors, 13 diodes
Mechanical: Line Cord: 3- wire grounded; 3- wire convenience outlet. Connectors: BTF-100, F- type, Female. Fuse: 1/8 amp. Slo-Blo. Dimensions: 19"L x13/ 4 "H x4"D. Shipping Weight: 4 pounds.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-11
BLONDER- TONGUE
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
LABS,
INC.
CHANNEL CONVERTER/ FILTERS/MODULATORS
MUC-3 UHF TO VHF SINGLE CHANNEL CONVERTER
STOCK NO. 1468
·Uniform gain independent of the channel conversion for stable operation.
· High input capability with low noise figure for wide dynamic range over entire UHF band.
· Local oscillator is easily adjustable thru front panel for fine tuning. ·Rigid extruded aluminum base and sturdy aluminum cover for
added protection of components. ·Sealed RF can minimizes radiation and isolates RF module from
undesired signals.
The Masterline MUC-3 is asingle channel UHF to VHF converter with a temperature compensated, highly stable L- C oscillator. Each converter is factory tuned for a specific customer- selected conversion.
FORBIDDEN CONVERSIONS
UHF Channel to VHF Channel
22,23,24,25
7
25,26,27,28
8
28,29,30,31
9
31,32,33,34
10
34,35,36,37
11
37,38,39,40
12
40,41,42,43
13
NOTE: The Forbidden Conversions listed would lead to picture impairment in single stage converters. Special conversions such as
UHF to subchannels, midband, superband, hyperband, and European versions are also not available in the MUC-3 Converter.
Other models provide these options.
UX-3 SINGLE CHANNEL UHF TO VHF CONVERTER
STOCK NO. 1424
· High frequency crystals minimize total number of potentially interfering spurious harmonics
·Custom built/conversion compatability verified
Crystal- controlled, solid-state, UHF to VHF amplified converter. Gain: 4-13 dB ( depending on conversion). Noise figure: 9-15 dB (depending on conversion). 75- ohm input and 75- ohm loop-thru outputs. BTF connectors ( male connectors supplied). Crystal: + /- 0.005%. Power Requirements: 117V, 60Hz, 0.065A. Size: 9"L x 4-5/8"W x3-1/4"H. Specify UHF input and VHF output channels, when ordering. Custom built. If UHF channel frequency minus VHF frequency is greater than 500 MHz use Model 8214 Ux-3 . 002% converter for compliance with FCC CATV specs.
ESHM MODULATOR FOR CATV AND PRIVATE CABLE SYSTEMS
Stock No. 5928
·Heterodyne conversion process provides proper vestigial sideband selectivity for use in adjacent channel color systems
·Removable converter module for easy, in-field channel change, without opening modulator housing
·SAW filter provides flat group delay and maintenance-free bandpass characteristics
·Three light indicator system shows proper video modulation and over or under modulation
·Aural/Visual IF loop-thru allows IF scrambling or alternate source of composite IF. Separate aural and video loop-thru is available
·Wide range of available frequencies-- TV channels 2-13, midband IA -Il, superband ( J-W).
The ESHM is an all solid-state heterodyne audio/video modulator. It generates modulated visual and aural RF carrier output on any single VHF 12-131, Midband ( A-Il, or Superband ( J- W) channel of a closed circuit CATV or SMATV system. It requires only standard baseband video and audio inputs. The ESHM also features excellent modulation qualities for use with character generators. The heterodyne conversion system provides proper vestigial sideband selectivity for use in adjacent channel color systems. The modulator uses aSAW ( Surface Acoustic Wave) filter which provides flat group delay and maintenance- free bandpass characteristics.
A combined IF loop-thru accommodates the use of an alternate source of combined IF, as well as IF scrambling equipment. Optionally, separate aural and visual IF loop-thrus can be provided for the ESHM in order to use alternate scrambling systems. The modulator accepts standard NTSC signals ( Sync negative, 0.5-2.5 p- p) from video sources such as a satellite receiver, video tape recorder, TV demodulator, or TV camera. All level controls and modulation indicators are located on the front panel for ease of operation.
The ESHM has aremovable heterodyne module, ( slide-out drawer), which permits qualified service personnel to easily change channels in the field, without removing the entire modulator from the headend rack.
A three- light indicator system pinpoints correct video modulation as well as under or overmodulation. An audio overmodulation indicator is also provided.
ESHM CHANNEL CONVERSION REPLACEMENT MODULE
Stock No. 5938 Slide- out drawer allows changing of channels in the field quickly and easily without removing the entire modulator from aheadend rack or opening the modulator housing. Specify channel when ordering.
VRF-12
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BLONDER- TONGUE
One Jake brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
LABS ·INC.
CATV DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
DA 400-33
DA- 33
e--
DA -51
DA 400-33 CATV DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER Stock No. 4475
· Full 53 Channel Bandwidth; 40 MHz to 400 MHz
· Uses Two Ultra Reliable, Push-pull Hybrid Integrated Circuits
·Wide Range, Continuous Gain and Slope Controls
· Regulated Power Supply
· Surge Protected Amplifier and Power Supply Sections
The DA 400-33 is ahigh- output, 53 channel CATV Distribution Amplifier. The unit uses push-pull hybrid IC amplifiers and has cable slope compensation from 40 MHz to 400 MHz. The DA 400-33 features again control adjustable from 15 to 33 dB ( continuously variable).
The DA 400-33 is designed for awide variety of applications. It is primarily used for the CATV distribution of N/ FM signals in the 40 to 400 MHz frequency range. Other applications include use as an instrumentation amplifier to increase the output level of asweep or signal generator; as apreamplifier for CAN signal level meters for making FCC required signal leakage measurement
CAN INDOOR DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
DA -51 2/3 WIDEBAND DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS
·Specifically Designed for CATV " DROP" Distrubution Systems ·Wide Frequency Range for Incorporating MID- SUPER Bands with VHF/FM
Designed for TV signal distribution systems tha tuse a CATV " drop" as a signal source. 50 to 300 MHz bandpass. An excellent amplifier for apartment buildings fed from aCATV system wide frequency range allows the DA -51 to be used in systems incorporating MID and SUPER band channels with the standard VHF and FM channels. Push- Pull Hybrid IC output. Has high output capability of 56 dBmV on each of 12 channels. Two models of the DA -51 are available: DA -51-3 with aslope control covering 50-300 MHz, and DA -51-2 with aslope control operating between 50-220 MHz.
LP- 30
LP- 51
LP- 30 CATV LINE EXTENDER AMPLIFIER Stock No. 4618
·Push- Pull Hybrid IC for High Output Capability
·50 to 300 MHz Bandpass -- 30 Channel Capability
· Input and Output Adaptors Permit Use of Aluminum Cable Connectors
· Backniatched Input and Output Test Points for Uninterrupted Service
The LP-30 CATV Line Extender Amplifier is designed for direct insertion in CATV trunktines Designed primarily for buried systems, this amplifier's input and output connectors are both located on the same end of the unit. This feature facilitates vertical installation in CATV equipment pedestals. Adaptors are supplied to permit use of aluminum cable connectors.
The LP-30 may be powered from either the input or output side of the thru-line and has a6amp, thru-power capability. Gain and cable slope adjustments located on the font panel. Gain is continuously adjustable between 10 and 30 dB. Cable slope may be varied between afixed minimum of 6dB and amaximum of 20 dB. Input and output test jacks are provided for signal and amplifier performance monitoring.
LP 45P IN- LINE AC POWERED AMPLIFIER
· High Output and Gain Provide Exceptional Stability ·Added Flexibility -- Wide Range Gain and Tilt Controls
DA -21 CATV DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
· Ideal CATV Distribution Amplifier in Small Apartment Buildings The latest in CAN distribution amplifiers. 50-300 MHz response. Includes many features found only in higher priced units.
DA -30 WIDEBAND DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER · Flat Response -- 50-300 MHz. ·40 dBmV Output per Channel for 21 Channels. · Front Panel Gain and Slope Controls. · Slim Line Design -- Easy to Install.
Designed specifically for apartment building and other multi- set installations served by CATV. Features flat response from 50 to 300 MHz for distributin of VHF, MID, and SUPER band channels. Good output capability and wide gain and slope control ranges make it easy to adapt to any system. Front panel gain and slope controls.
DA -33 WIDEBAND AMPLIFIER
The LP-45P amplifier is designed for VHF/FM CATV distribution systems in which AC power is duplexed on the TV signal distribution cable. The unit accepts power from either its input or output sides. It will pass power straight through or can be used to block power from either side. Connectors are standard 75-ohm, F- type. Test points tisolated from AC power) are provided on both the input and output. This amplifier tea:ures all solid state, printed circuit board construction. Split- band amplifier design permits separate gain and band slope adjustment ( low band with FM and high band). Wide trunkline spacing and elimination of temperature equalizers is possible, ow ng to the wide dynamic range of the LP-45P.
LP-51 CATV LINE EXTENDER AMPLIFIER Stock No. 4421-12) (31'
·Push- Pull Hybrid IC for High Output Capability
·Wide Range, Continuous Slope and Gain
· Input and Output Adaptors Permit Use of Aluminum Cable Connectors
· Selector Allows Powering from Input or Output and Provides Thruline for Powering Subsequent Units in Cascade
·Ultra- Wide Bandwidth 0.5 MHz-300 MHz
· Push- Pull Hybrid IC Amplifier
· Exceptionally High Output
The DA -33 features extremely wide bandwidths; 0.5 MHz to 300 MHz, wide range continuous gain control and surge protected amplifier and power supply sections. It is ideal for increasing the output level of sweep generator or signal generator to test very lossey devices under test, such as long lengths of coaxial cables, coaxial relay isolation, etc. The DA -33 is also used as apreamplifier for CATV signal level meter (SLM) used to make FCC required signal leakage measurements. It may also be employed as asub-channel return amplifier. In this case external multiplexers such as Blonder- Tongue MSVM are required to bypass VHF in the forward & rection.
The DA -33 is also used aboard ship where its coverage of the short wave and communications bands is desired.
The LP- 5/ is abroadband CATV Line Extender Amplifier designed for direct insertion in CAN branchlines. The amplifier's input and output connectors are both located at the sane end of the unit. This feature facilitates vertical installation in CATV pedestals. Adaptors are supplied to permit the use of avariety of aluminum cable connectors. Slope controls are available that hinge at 220 MHz or 300 MHz.
The LP- 51 may be powered from either the input or output side of the thru-line. A power seector jumper board allows installers to block power from either the input connector or to pass power through the amplifier. The voltage necessary to power the amplifier ranges from 20 to 60 VAC, and is selectable externally with ajumper board.
The line extender has high output capability through the use of apush-pull integrated circuit in the output stage. Push-pull design results in cancellation of second order distortion products ( typically to 65dB below rated output); triple beat suppression, 64dB. *12) 50-220MHz 131 50-300MHz
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-13
BLONDER- TONGUE
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
LABS,
INC.
VIDEO/AUDIO MODULATOR PRODUCTS
TVM 4930 Television Modulator
Stock No. 4930
$ 1979.53
The TVM is an all solid-state, high quality, audio video modulator that generates TV channel RF carriers using video and audio sources. The unit accepts standard polarity video ( sync negative) of . 5-2VP-P level. The TVM features a loop-thru video input and abalanced line level bridging input provided for the audio. Level controls and modulation indicators are provided on the front panel. Aural intercarrier phased locked to 4.5 MHz.
· Switch Selectable VID/4.5 MHz Optional Input
· Wide Frequency Range; Ch 2 thru 13, Sub and Midband
· Balanced Low Impedance MIC Input with XLR Connector
· Vestigial Sideband Filtering Suitable for
Adjacent Channel Color Systems
Various options are available in the TVM. These include:
Option 2
$ 468.58
CHANNEL LOCK MODULE: Visual carrier
channel lock to an amplified and filtered off-
the- air channel to eliminate co- channel beat.
Option 3
$ 292.88
FCC GROUP DELAY PRE- CORRECTION
NETWORK: Envelope delay and chroma
delay meet FCC Group Delay specifications.
Option 4
$ 190.39
VIDEO LPF: Video low pass filter removes
spurious signals above 4.2 MHz from video
sources to protect adjacent channels from
interference.
Option 5
$ 292.88
A/V AGC: Audio/Video AGC controls the
audio and video level to prevent overmodu-
lation or undermodulation of aural and visual
carrier respectively.
Option 7 No charge when ordered with 4930 AURAL/VIDEO SEPARATOR: Takes composite video/4.5 MHz from a microwave receiver output and provides 4.5 MHz aural input to aural mixer and video to video modulator. Microphone input circuitry and 4.5 MHz phase lock circuits are deleted. High-level audio input is included for bench testing when 4.5 MHz aural is not available.
NOTE: A maximum of two options may be selected from Options 3, 4, 5, and 7. Audio AGC portion of Option 5 is not functional
with Option 7. Use Option 6with Option 7.
Frequency Range, Standard: TV Channel 2 to Channel 13; Special: Sub- band, IF, and Midband channels.
Visual Carrier Output: + 57 dBmV.
Y5-2
CH 3
OFF- AIR CO- CHANNEL
VIDEO I AUDIO
TVM-4930
OUTPUT CH 3 (FREQUENCY
LOCKED TO OFF - AIR CH 3)
(1 3
CHANNEL SAMPLE INPUT
kiwy __Li:ATTENUATE
TRAP
AURAL CARRIE F AT LEAST -( 941
BELOW , SuAL CARRIER
Ce MCA- b ·60 Odb4w
Y5-5
YI0-7
YI0-9
YI0-11 V
YI0 -13 V
IDEO IN AUDIO IN
SINGLE
A
CHANNEL
AMPLIFIERS
WITH AGC
2
A
TVM 4930 Typical Applications
VIDEO IN AUDIO IN
fivm
13
MS- 2V
8
SPUTTER/COMBINER
TO DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
AVMTa Modulator
Stock No. 4923
$ 1068.81
The AVMTa is an all solid-state, audio video modulator that provides a modulated visual and modulated aural carrier RF output on
any single VHF TV channel 2-13. It can be used to put sound and color video on any unused channel of aclosed circuit, MATV or CATV system. The AVMTa works with
standard video sources such as a TV camera, video tape recorder, or TV demodulator. The wide range audio input can be directly driven from an AM or FM tuner tape recorder, or Hi Impedance dynamic or crystal microphone. The AVMTa may also be used for carrier substitution.
The model number of the AVMTa indicates its channel of operation, e.g., AVMTa-4 is a
channel 4 unit. All AVMTa's are designed for rack or cabinet mounting.
Frequency Range, Standard: SUB Channels B-1 to B-6; VHF Channels 2 to 13; Special
Order: Midband.
Spurious Beats in adj. channel at + 50 dBmV output: -50 dB min., - 65 dB typ.; All
other spurious outputs up to 300 MHz.: - 60 dB, - 65 dB typ.
VCM: Video Channel Modulator
Stock No. 4926
$ 442.71
The VCM-4926 solid-state video channel modulator is designed to provide low cost
modulated visual carrier RF output on any single TV channel 2-13. It may be used as a carrier substitution generator.
The VCM contains avestigial sideband filter,
suitable for adjacent channels operation and also assures quality performance for both
monochrome and color TV channels. The operating RF output level is at least + 20 dBmV with acontrol provided on the front panel for adjustment over a 14 dB range. The VCM accepts video inputs from a line, film chain, camera or TV demodulator. The
video signal before modulation is DC restored at tips of sync, thus preventing variations in the RF output due to changes in the picture content.
*Specify Channel
VRF-14
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BLONDER- TONGUE
Dne Jake Brown Road Did Bridge, NJ 08857 201) 679-4000
LABS
INC
AUDIO/VIDEO MODULATOR
o
MAVM Audio/Video Modulator Stock No. 5923
FEATURES
· Heterodyne Conversion Process Insures Optimum Vestigial Sideband Selectivity for Adjacent Channel Color Systems
· I.F. Loop Thru Allows Replacement of Standard I.F. Output with Alternate Source of Composite I.F. or Allows Use in All- Call Alert Systems
·Field Replaceable Heterodyne Converter Board for Easy In- Field Channel Conversion
·Calibrated Video and Audio LED Indicators
·Video and Audio Level Controls
MAVM Audio/Video Modulator MAVM Converter Module
$811.46 268.94
The MAVM is an all solid state heterodyne audio/visual modulator that provides amodulated visual and aural RF carrier output on any single VHF ( 2-13), Midband ( A-1), or Superband ( J- W) channel. The Modulator can be used to put sound and color video on any unused channel of aclosed circuit MATV or SMATV system. The heterodyne conversion system which is employed insures optimum vestigial sideband selectivity for adjacent channel color systems.
I.F. loop-thru capability in the MAVM supplies apadded I.F. output before channel conversion. This feature provides the capability to replace standard internally generated I.F. and " all call" capability.
The MAVM has afield replaceable heterodyne converter board which permits qualified service personnel to change channels in the field.
The Modulator accepts standard polarity ( sync negative) of 0.7-2.5Vp-p level from video sources such as asatellite receiver, TV camera , video tape recorder or TV demodulator. All level controls and modulation indicators are located on the front panel for ease of operation.
RF Frequency Range: Output Level: Output Level range: Aural/Visual Carrier Ratio Control: Visual Carrier Frequency Tolerance: Aural Carrier Frequency: Spurious Output ( except for video siOebands) at 35 dfinW output: IF Output Level: IF Input Level:
Output Return Loss: IF Output Return Loss: IF Input Return Loss lntermod Distortion: ( 3 lone 920 beat)
SPECIFICATIONS
TV Channels 2-13. Midband Channels A-1, Superband Channels J- W .40 dBmV. Typical 35dBmV Min. 10 dB, continuously adjustable by the front panel output level control -9 dB to -30 013. continuously adjustable by the front panel Output level control 10 KHz Typical 45 MHz above visual carrier ± 500 Hz 64 dB down. Typical ( A/V carrier radio 17 di3)
Set at 30 dBmV 35 dBmV Max.. A/V carrier radio 15dB. Color subcarrier @ - 25dB. for 920 beat (External IF in) > 55 dB down 12 dB 10 d13 12 dB 60 dB. 35dElmV output. A/V carrier ratio- 15 dB. color subcarrier - 25 dB
VISUAL Video Input for 87.5 ,odepth of modulation: Video Modulation Depth: Vestigial Sideband Response: Video Input Return Loss: Visual Carrier to Noise Ratio in 4 MHz Bandwidth: P- P Video to RIAS Hum Ratio: Differential Gain: @ 87.5% Modulation Differential Phase: @ 87.5% Modulation
0.7V p- p Min Set @ 875% adjustable to 96% Typical Optimized for adjacent channel operation 18 dB 60 dB
60 dB ±0.25 dB
±1°
AURAL Input Audio for 25 KHz Peak Deviation: Aural Overmodulation LED Deviation: 4.5 MHz Intercarrier Stability: Power Requirements: Fuse: Temperature Range:
50mV RMS 25 KHz ± 2 KHz ±25 KHz. 1)*C 10 50°C 100-130 VAC. 60 Hz. 08 A
3 AG. 125V. 1/8A Slo-B10 o°C to 50 °C
MECHANICAL Dimensions: Weight: Connectors Audio In: Video In: RF Out: I.F. In and Out:
19"W x
4.0
51/ 2 lbs. ( Approximate)
RCA phono "F" type "F" type "r type
Mounting brackets are included with the MAVM for installing the unit in a standard 19" EIA equipment rack.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-15
BLONDER- TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
MVB-15 VHF/FM Distribution Amplifier
Stock No. 1445
Low noise, high gain. oluadband VHF and FM
amplifier leaturing the exclusive patented ICEF circuit
for increased input capability while combining low dis-
tortion with alow noise figure. Full band FM amplifica-
tion when tunable FM trap is not used. 75- ohm input and
ilpul
$63.89
MUVB-15 UHF VHF FM Distribution Amplifier
Stock No. 1444
Amplifies all VHF and UHF channels thru ch 83 plus FM. Low noise, high gain distribution amplifier for large home or small MATV systems Features 10EF circuit separate VHF and UHF sections and tunable FM trap Single UHF VHF 75- ohm input and output $87.28
MVB-25 VHF Distribution Amplifier
Stock No. 1498
· Designed Specifically for VHF MAN Installations
· Patented' ICEF Circuit Increases Input Capability
· Provides Snow- Free Reception in Weak Signal Areas
· Switchable FM Stop Filter Eliminates Interference from Strong FM Signals when Necessary
The MVB-25 is a medium gain, low noise, VHF
broadband amplilier. It features the exclusive, patented
inductively coupled emitter feedback ( ICEF) circuit that
increases input capability while combining low distortion
with alow noise figure.
$91.10
MUVB-25 UHF/VHF
Distribution Amplifier
Stock No. 1499
· Superior UHF Gain to 890 MHz -- Ideal for Translator Reception
· Extra Low- Noise Figure for Snow- Free Pictures
· Accepts Inputs from Separate UHF and VHF Antenna Cables or from aSingle UHF VHF Antenna Cable
· Switchable FM MID Band Stop Filter -- Removes Interference from FM and Communications Band.
The MUV8-25 is amedium gain. low noise, broad-
band amplifier with both UHF and VHF amplifiers. The
VHF section ol the amplifier features the exclusive
patented' inductively coupled emitter feedback ( ICEF)
circuit that increases input capability while combining
low distortion with alow- noise figuiu
$128.42
MVB-35 VHF FM Distribution Amplifier
Stock No. 1450
· Designed for Medium Size VHF MAN Installations
· Separate Gain Control for High and Low Bands · Split Band Input Amplifiers · Switchable FM Bandstop Filter Prevents FM
Overload
The MVB-35 is amedium gain, low noise VHF broadband amplifier It includes patented' inductively coupled emitter feedback circuit tor wide dynamic range.
$147.77
MUVB-35 UHF/VHF/FM Distribution Amplifier
Stock No. 1451
· Full UHF Gain to 890 MHz -- Ideal for Translator Reception
· VHF Split Band Amplifiers Reduce Distortion
· Separate Gain Controls for High and Low Band VHF and UHF
· Switchable FM Bandstop Filter Prevents FM Overload
MUVB-35 is amediuni gain, broadband UHF
VHF FM amplifier designed for use in medium size
-on-channel - MATV systems II features wide dynamic
range. excellent stability and low noise. A switchable
input mode permits the use of either acombined UHF
VHF antenna or separate UHF and VHF antennas in a
system
$281.65
MATV DISTRIBUTION
AMPLIFIERS
MVB-45 VHF/FM Distribution Amplifier
ED
Stock No 1446
· Dynamic Range Increasing Type Gain Control Maintains Signal- to- Noise Ratio at Reduced Gain Settings
· Separate Gain Control for High and Low Band
· High Input Capability with Low Noise Figure · Switchable FM Bandstop Filter Prevents FM
Overload
Pie MVB 45 is abroadband VHf FM MATV distribu-
tion amplifier featuring high gain and high output with low noise assuring awide dynamic range. It consists of independent high and low band input amplitiers. main amplifier with three stages of RF amplification, and power supply Switchable combined or split inputs are provided tor use with either asingle antenna ( low band. FM. high band) or for separate low band and high band antennas.
$332.59
MASTERLINE PLUS' MVB-56 VHF FM Distribution Amplifier
Stock No. 1447
· Automatic Overload Protection. Stabilizes Output Levels Over a Wide Range of Input Signal Levels to Prevent Overload
· High Output Capability and Low Noise Figure for Wide Dynamic Range
· Dynamic Range Increasing Type Gain Control · Selectable Manual Gain Control or Automatic
Level Control for each band · FM Bandstop Filter can be " Switched In" to
Prevent FM Signal Overload or " Switched Out - when High FM Sensitivity is Desired
The MVB-56 is asolid state broadband VHF FM MATV Amplifier with automatic overload protection to stabilize the output signal level. This very high gain unit consists of amain amplifier with three RF amplification stages. independent high and low band input amplifiers. automatic overload protection circuitry, independent variable high and low band gain controls. Signals can be provided by either asingle antenna ( low band. FM. high band) or by separate low band and high band antennas sinipncuets the MBV-56 has switchable. combined or split
·U .S Pal. No. 3.413.563 $423.71
MASTERLINE PLUS' MVB-62 VHF/FM Distribution Amplifier
Stock Na. 1455 · Dynamic Range- Increasing Type Gain Control · Automatic Overload Protection · Integrated Circuit Design for Added Reliability · - 30 dB Test Point for Ease of Monitoring the MVB-62 is a 75 ohm solid slate. low noise high output VHF distribution amplifier with automatic overload protection to stabilize the output signal It is designed for large MATV systems using an oh- the-air signal source. The unit features independent ( LB HB) automatic level controls. high output capability and alow noise figure. Switchable. combined or split inputs permit signals from asingle antenna ( LB:1-1B FM) or separate antennas. The MVB-62 has switch selectable Manual Gain Control or Automatic Level Control in each band.
$673.92
VRF-16
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
BLONDER- TONGUE LABS, INC.
One Jake Brown Road Old Bridge, NJ 08857 (201) 679-4000
VARIFLEX SYSTEM II
The vARiFLEx System
generation modular
headend designed for mec , arge MATV applica-
tions The plug-in modular approach simplifies installa-
tion by eliminating interconnecting cables The system
consists of abroadband VHF FM Amplifier mounted on a
VARIFLEX System II Specifications
, plate The Amplifier has both automatic and manual
-,, controls The base plate accepts amaximum of eight cartridges on non- adjacent VHF channel assignments Amplified channel filters passive channel f,Iters and UHF to VHF single channel down converters are avail-
able An input separator module can be added when a single broadband antenna is used to feed several filters A locking security cover is available to enclose the complete system
Amplifier Stock No. 1477 · Gain
· Bandpass Flatness 54-88, 88-108. 174-216 MHz
· Noise Figure ( Full Gain)
· Input Return Loss
· Output Return Loss
· Output Capability Flat ( 7Ch. crossmodulation a -46 dB) Block Tilt - 6dB ( LB 6dB below HB)
:LB FM 45.5 dB
HB
47.5 dB
:LB. FM 1.0 dB
HB
1.2 dB
(0-18 dB gain control range)
:LB = 6.4 dB
HB = 5.4 dB
:LB 17 dB
HB 11.5 dB
:LB 13dB
HB - 15dB
55 5dBmV 57.5 dBmV
· Gain Control Range ( minimum) · AGC Stiffness
(18 dB input change of 7Ch. @ 56 dBmV output) · Hum Modulation (117 VAC, 25 C) · Power Capability ( INPUT)
· Power Requirement
18 dB ·08dB
-58 dB
:265 mA @ - 21 VDC Any combination of VARIFLEX II Amplified Filters. Filters or Converters
:117 VAC. 60 Hz. 0.25A
Amplified Filter Stock No. 1476 - l· I
· Gain
· Bandpass Flatness (6 MHz Bandwidth)
· Noise Figure (Full Gain)
· Input Return Loss
Filter Stock No. 4576 -( ·)
LB 12.5 dB HB 12 dB
FM 11dB LB 1.0 dB HB 1.0 db FM 1.5 dB
LB 9.2 dB
HB 8.3 dB LB 11 dB HB 13.5 dB FM 7.5 dB
(0-20 dB gain control range)
· Recommended Input Range (For rated output and 9dB into ALC range of VARIFLEX II Amplifier)
· Gain Control Range · Selectivity
· Power Requirement
'soft; ,ty Channel
8.0 dfirnV to 26 dBmV ( Use Filter # 4576 for higher level inputs)
:20 dB minimum
:LB 30 dB
9MHz from
HB 35 dB
center of channel
FM 13 dB ( 6MHz from band edge)
-21 VDC. 17 mA. diplexed to RF output
· Selectivity TV Channels 2-13
FM
· Return Loss · Attenuation Range
40 dB down 9MHz from channel ,enter
20 dB down 6MHz from band edge 13 dB RL (input) 6dB ( min loss) to 24 dB
· Bandpass TV Channels 2-13
FMA FMB
6MHz ( - 075 dB Flatness) 88-108 MHz 92 -108 MHz
Specify Channel
Converter Stock No. 1490 ( 1
· All UHF to VHF Conversions except
Channels
22-25 to 7 34-37 to 11 25-28 to 8 37-40 to 12 28-31 to 9 40-43 to 13 31-34 to 10
· Gain Attenuation : Adjustable from . 13 dB to - 12 dB · Return Loss : Input = 16 dB
Output = 18 dB · Selectivity : 18 dB down to 6MHz from band edge · Power Requirement : - 21 VDC ( supplied from amplifier)
VHF Separator Stock No 4578
· Impedance · Return Loss
· Insertion Loss · Isolation between outputs
75 ohms 18 dB RL ( Input)
03 dB 20 dB min
''''Specify Channel
Cover Stock No. 4579
· Dimensions · Material · Finish
· Weight
· Accessories
- 10"W x 61/4"H 20 Gauge Turnplate ( coaled sleet) Black Textured
51 /4 lbs Double bit tumbler lock and two keys
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-17
BOGNER®
401 Railroad Ave. Westbury, NY 11590 (51 6) 997-7800
TV BROADCAST ANTENNAS
FEATURES ·Full broadcast quality and versatility ·Every unit fully tested ·Wide variety of standard patterns and gains
Bogner broadcast quality broadband slot antennas are designed for translator and low/medium power TV broadcasters. Bogner antennas are fully comparable in quality and versatility to the finest highpower antennas available to broadcasters today, but are substantially lower in cost. This is achieved through use of the inherently simple Bogner single slot per bay design, standardization of radiation patterns, and the utilization of modular construction and modern manufacturing techniques.
Antennas with any of twelve horizontal patterns, and a choice of vertical patterns, gains, and power input ratings up to 10kW, can be delivered in avery short period of time after order. These antennas are available for any High VHF ( Band Ill) channel up to 8MHz wide (between 170 and 230 MHz); for any one, or for any group of contiguous, UHF ( Bands IV and V) channels up to 30 MHz wide (between 470 and 890 MHz); or for any SHF group up to 42 MHz wide ( 1990 to 2700 MHz).
TV Transmitting Antennas ( Low and Medium Power)
M DS 2150 TO 2183 MHz BAND,
0 AND A PATTERNS
(other directional patterns 25% additional)
Model
Price
B4S0, B4SA
8 3,960.00
B8S0, B8SA
6,675.00
B16S0, B16SA
12,800.00
B24S0, B24SA
17,800.00
ITFS/MMDS 2500 TO 2690 MHz BAND,
ANY 42 MHz GROUP
(1.25 max. VSWR over full 2500 to 2690 MHz band
5% additional)
B4S I I
8 7,600.00
B8S 1I B16S 1I
10,000.00 16,000.00
B25S II
22,000.00
First null fill and electrical beam tilt available on all MDS and ITFS antennas, except ( B4S I11at no additional charge.
Combined MDS and MMDS and dual polarized antennas available. Consult factory.
Model B4U 1 B8U 1 B16U 1
UHF SLOT ANTENNAS* Power Rating (To 11/2 KW)t (To 3KW1t (To 3KW1t
Price 6,996.00 12,100.00 20,200.00
B24U 1 I
( To 3KW1t
B4U 1IM
(To 3KW1t
B8U 1IM ( To 6KWIt
B8U 111.1 ( To 10 KW1t
816U 11M ( To 10 KWIt
B24U IM ( To 10 KWIt
B16U I1H ( To 15 KWItt
B24U IIH ( To 30 KW1tt
DEICERS for B4U I1
DEICERS for 88U I1
DEICERS for B16U II
DEICERS for B24U ( I LPS1 ( To 1KWIt
LPS2 ( To 1KW)t
LPS3 ( To 1KW11
LPS4 ( To 1KW11
28,600.00 7,600.00
14,700.00 17,700.00 24,000.00 32,500.00 29,900.00 44,500.00
1,350.00 2,700.00 4,300.00 4,800.00 3,800.00 3.400.00 3,100.00 2,960.00
First null fill and electrical tilt available on B8U, B16U, and B24U models at no additional charge.
VHF HI BAND SLOT ANTENNAS ( CH 7-13)**
Power
Model
Rating
Price
B2V II
( To 3KW)t
8.860.00
B4V 1I
(To 3KWIt
19,800.00
B6V ( I
( To 3KW)t
28,100.00
B2V ( 1M ( To 5KW1t
10,700.00
B4V 11N1 ( To 10 KWIt
21,660.00
B6V 11M ( To 10 KWIt
30,900.00
B6V 111-I ( To 30 KWItt
38,200.00
DEICERS for B2V I1
1,900.00
DEICERS for 84V 11 DEICERS for B6V 11
3,800.00 5,700.00
Electrical beam tilt on B4V and B6V models, and first null fill on B6V models, available at no additional charge.
VHF LO BAND DIPOLE ANTENNAS
Model BVP
(CH 2-8 and FMI
Price I 2,503.00
B2VP B4VP B6VP B2VM/N B4VM/N B6VM/N B2VK/L
6,360.00 13,960.00 21,400.00 13,950.00 28,860.00 44,960.00 21,400.00
B4VK/L B6VK/L B2VJ B4VJ
43,860.00 66,100.00 28,850.00 58,300.00
B6VJ
88,150.00
Dipole arrays include dipoles, interconnecting cables and power divider for installation on customer supplied tower. tPeak visual input power, plus 20% aural at 40°C
ambient
ttPeak visual input power, plus 10% aural at 40°C
ambient
For special horizontal patterns or higher input power consult factory. Lightning rod $ 125.00 ( not available for dipoles)
*UHF SLOT ANTENNA OPTIONS MULTICHANNEL COVERAGE STANDARD VSWR under 1.10:1 over one 8MHz channel; no additional charge OPTION A VSWR under 1.30:1 over 30MHz; total additional charge $ 1,200.00 for B4U II, $2,150.00 for
88U 11, $4,300.00 for 816U II, $ 5,000A0 for B24U I) OPTION B VSWR under 1.20:1 over 30MHz; total additional charge $ 1,750.00 for 84U II, $3,250.00 for
88U II, 46,500.00 for B16U 11, 47,500.00 for B24U I1 OPTION C VSWR under 1.30:1 over greater than 30MHz band but under 8% band ( ratio of highest to lowest
frequency under 1.08); total additional charge $2,700.00 for B4U ( 1, $ 5,400.00 for B8U $10,800.00 for 816U II, $ 12,000.00 for B24U I1 OPTION D VSWR under 1.30:1 over greater than 30MHz band Dut under 15% Dana ( ratio cf highest to lowest frequency greater than 1.08 but under 1.15); total additional charge $3,800.00 for B4U 1I. $7,000.00 for BBU 11, $ 14,000.00 for 816U 1I, $ 16,000.00 for B24U 11 ( This option available for 0 and A patterns only)
"VHF SLOT ANTENNA OPTIONS ) CH 7-13) OPTION E Multichannel coverage for up to 3adjacent channels with VSWR under 1.20:1 add 20% HARSH ENVIRONMENT PACKAGE OPTION F Steel fully hot dip galvanized supporting pipe and director elements, stainless steel slot cavity cor-
rosion resistant coatings and completely copper feed system; additional charge:
B4U II, $ 1000 B2V 11, $2000
88U 11, $ 1500 B4V 11, $4000
B16U 11, 43000 B6V 11, 46000
B24U I1, 44500
VRF-18
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CARLON
25701 Science Park Drive
Cleveland, OH 44122 (216) 831 -4000 Telex 98-5300
CARLON PLUS 40® RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT ( Heavy Wall EPC)
The most widely used rigid conduit in the United States, UL listed for use underground, encased in concrete or direct buried, and for use exposed or concealed in most conduit applications above ground. It is rated for use with 90°C conductors and is sunlight resistant. ( See NEC Article 347 and other sections for approved locations.) Special compounds are used which reduce emission of smoke and HCL in fire situations, and impart better weathering characteristics.
NON-METALLIC CONDUIT PIPE
CARLON PLUS A' THIN WALL RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT ( EPT)
Carlon Plus A® , UL listed ( concrete encasement only) for use with 90°C conductors, complies with UL Standard 651A. It is used primarily in underground installations encased in concrete.
ND LISTED
PLUS 40 HEAVY WALL
® LISTED
NOM .SIZE
ye 1" 1,/.." 11/ 2 " 2" 21/ 2 " 3" 31/ 2 " 4" 5" 6"
CATALOG NO . O.D. 1. D. WALL
49005 49007 49008
. 840 . 622 . 109 1.050 . 824 . 113 1.315 1.049 . 133
49009
1.660 1.380 . 140
49010 49011
1.900 2.375
1.610 . 145 2.067 . 154
49012
2.875 2.469 . 203
49013 49014 49015 49016
3.500 4.000 4.500 5.563
3.068 . 216 3.548 . 226 4.026 . 237 5.047 . 258
49017
6.625 6.065 . 280
WT .PER 100' PLAIN END
17 23 34 46 55 76 120
156 186 220 298 387
FEET PER BUNDLE
100 100 100
50 50 50 10
10 10 10 10 10
Rigid Non- Metallic Conduit is normally supplied in standard lengths of 10 feet including one coupling. For specific requirements it may be produced in lengths
shorter or longer than 10 feet, with or without couplings. Couplings may be integrally formed ( as shown) or attached.
CARLON PLUS 80' RIGID NON-METALLIC EXTRA HEAVY WALL CONDUIT ( EPC-80)
Carlon Plus 80® conduit is designed for above ground and underground applications where an extra heavy wall PVC conduit is needed. Frequently used where subject to severe physical abuse such as for pole risers, bridge crossings, and in heavy traffic areas. UL listed for use with 90°C conductors and is sunlight resistant.
PLUS A THIN WALL
PART NO . 49111 49113 4911 5
Nom. Size
O.D. 2 375 3 500 4 500
ID . 2 175 3 250 4 200
W ell 100 125 150
Wt. Per 100'
Pin. End
Ft. Pet. Bundle
53
10
96
10
148
10
Rigid Non- Metallic Conduit is normally supplied in standard lengths of 10 feet
including one coupling ( attached). For specific requirements it may be produced in lengths shorter or longer than 10 feet, with or without couplings.
SNAP STRAP CONDUIT WALL HANGERS ONE AND TWO HOLE
New, high strength clamp solves bowing problems resulting from the expansion and contraction of conduit caused by varying temperature changes.
ONE HOLE
Part No.
Size
E9780
E978E
a/4
E9'78F
1
Pkg. Qty. 100 100 100
TWO HOLE
Part No.
Size
E978G
11 /4
E978H
11/2
E978J
2
Pkg Qty. 100 100 100
DIMENSIONS OF STANDARD RADIUS ELBOWS
For use with non-metallic solvent weld fittings. Both ends plain. Special radius elbows available on request.
PLUS 80 EXTRA HEAVY WALL
ND LISTED
NOM .SIZE
34»
11/ 2 " 11/ 2 " 2" 21/2" 3" 4" 5"
CATALOG NO . 49405 49407
49408 49409 49410 49411 49412 49413 49415 49416
0. D. I.D. WALL
. 840 . 546 . 147 1.050 . 742 . 154
1.315 . 957 . 179
1.660 1.278 . 191
1.900 1.500 . 200
2.375 2.875
1.939 . 218 2.323 . 276
3.500 2.900 . 300
4.500 3.826 .337
5.563 4.813 . 375
WT .PER 100' PLAIN END 21 29
42 58 70 96 145 194 284 394
FEET PER BUNDLE
100 100
100 50 50 10 10 10 10 10
Rigid Non- Metallic Conduit is normally supplied in standard lengths of 10 feet. Couplings may be integrally formed ( as shown) or attached. For specific requirements it may be produced in lengths shorter or longer than 10 feet, with or
without couplings.
OFFSETS
Applicable to 90 ·-45*-30 ° Elbows
Size
35 1 1% 1% 2
3 314 4 5
A .840 1 050 1.315 1 660 1.900 2 375 2 875 3.500 4.000 4.500 5.563 6 625
Min. 4 4ia 5% 7% 8% 914 10% 13 15 16 24 30
C
1 VI 1.7/8 2 2 2 3 3.1/8
3-3/8 3-5/8 3%
Part No.
E9940 E994E E994F
Size
1
Pkg. 01Y. 100 50
50
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-19
CARLON
25701 Science Park Drive Cleveland, OH 44122 (216) 831-4000 Telex 98-5300
STANDARD COUPLINGS Socket type for joining non-metallic conduit.
Port No. 89400 8940E E940F E940G E940H E940J E9406 89401 E940M E940N E940P E94011
Size
0
IX 10 2 2', 3 31, 4 5 6
A 852 1064 1330 1677 1918 2 393 2890 3 515 4015 4 515 5593 6 658
B 836 1046 1310 1655 1894 2 369 2868 3492 3992 4 491 5 553 6 614
0 758 948 1210 1535 1755 2 190 2688 3 375 3 780 4 265 5097 6 115
00
C
N
I0, ·,,.
4
I
14
%
1% 'o
1.0, t '4
2 N.. 1'4
X
2.0, 334.
I4, '4 4.,,
34 ,,,
40
10
X
5%, 2 %
614
1%,
7%
2%,
X
L I 0 1% 2 20 2% 2", 3%, 3962 3% 3% 4 Yie 4%
FEMALE ADAPTORS For adapting non-metallic conduit to threaded fittings, metallic
systems. Female threads on one end, socket end on other.
Part No E9420 E942E E942F E942G E942H EO42J 8942K E9421. E942M 894214 E942P E942R
Size
I. 1 IX I', 2 2% 3 34, 4 5 6
A 852 1064 I330 1677 1918 2393 2890 3515 4015 4 515 5593 6658
B 836 1046 I310 1655 1894 2 369 2868 3 492 3992 4 491 5 553 6 614
D 620 822 1046 1377 1607 2064 2450 3 000 3 500 4000 5047 6 055
OD 1 114, 1% 1. 14, 2%, 210, 30, 31%, 4'4 50, 614 7y,
C
T
14
0 I%
1
0
1'4
1'/,
1
1%
10
144 %
1%
10
2
I 0
11,, 1Yle
2%
1Yio
2 24,, 2%, 2'%, 34. 30 33.
3%
TERMINAL ADAPTORS For adapting non-metallic conduits to boxes, threaded fittings, metallic systems. Male threads on one end, socket end on the other.
Pad No. E9430 E943E E943F E943G E943H E943J E943K 89431 E943M E943N E943P E943R
Size 34 0
1 IX 134 2 2% 3 3% 4 5 6
A 852 1064 1330 1677 1918 2393 2890 3 515 4 015 4515 5593 6 658
8 836 1046 1310 1655 1894 2 369 2868 3492 3992 4491 5 553 6 614
0 597 800 1018 1332 1566 2000 2376 2954 3440 3940 4 815 5860
00
C
S
1% . 0, .4,
1"/,,
I% "4. "4.
24,,
I %
2%,
I%
X
2,4,, 1%,
14
3%,
114
0
4
1
414
24,o
1%
5%,
2%
0
60
1
72,
2%
1
L 1%,
1/4,, 114, 24,, 20 214 3%, no 3X 3 "11, 3%
END BELLS For termination of non-metallic conduit into a manhole.
Part No Size A
B
0 ODK
C
N
LR
E997F 1 1330 I310 1049 1"/., 1% 1% 2
3/4 X
E997G E9971.1
1X 1671 1655 1380 1.'/,, 2 1% 1918 1894 1610 2%, 20
1% 233 1% 3
4
X
434 X
E997J 2 2393 2369 2067 2.0, 3
I% 2% 4% X
E997K 89971. E997M E997N E997P E997R
22, 2890 2888 2069 2..4 3'h 1X 3 '4. 5%, X
3 3515 3492 3078 3.4,
1%
34 2
X
334 4015 3992 3558 4%, 4.4,, 1.4,, 04 2%, If
4 4515 4491 4036 49,,
11%, 34 2%, 34
5 5593 5553 5057 5. 14,
14/,, 30 2`./,, %
6 6658 6614 6075 6.0, 733 2%, "/,, 24, "%,
'FebrIceled end bell meet.on opeciol order only.
SOCKET CAPS Caps available 1/2" to 1-1/2". Plugs available 1-1/2" to 6".
Pert No 89580 E958E E958F E958G E958H
Size 14
IX I%
A 848 1058 1325 1670 I912
B 836 1046 1310 1655 1894
OD
1%, 1% 114,, 2.%,
C "4.
14,, 1%, 1%, 110,
1%.
1'%, 1"4, 114,, 114,,
COUPLERS/ADAPTORS
ADAPTORS FOR NON-METALLIC ENCLOSURES
Adapts non-metallic conduit to all electrical boxes by inserting adaptor through knockout and cementing into Carlon couplings.
Port No. 19960 E996E E996F E996G 899614 E996J 8996K 89961 E998M E996N
Size 'h 34
1'4 I %
234 3 3% 4
o
662 824 1049 1380 1610 2067 2469 3068 3 548 4 026
5" end ti" evelletle on mead mime/
oo
840 1050 1315 1660 1900 2375 2 875 3 500 4000 4 500
X cm
I.
10, 1.0, I% 11%, 200., 2»,,, 3%, 4% 4%
' 0,
1%, "14.
1%, 1.4, 10 1 X 2 2%
"4,
"V., 114,
IS 1% 10, 1.43, 2%, 24,,
5%
233
EXPANSION COUPLINGS (EXPANDS TO A MAXIMUM OF 6")
E945 Series Expansion couplings are designed to compensate for temperature variations of 120°F in exposed applications per 200 feet of conduit. E955 Series Expansion couplings are for use in extremely short runs. If installed at lowest anticipated temperature, coupling should be in full open position. If installed at intermediate temperature, adjust coupling proportionately. See instructions on label. Be sure to secure barrel portion of expansion coupling only.
NOTE: When encased in concrete, conduit is immobilized by the concrete and will conform to the expansion rate of the concrete.
Part No. E9450 E945E E945F E945G E945H E945J
Size y2 3/ 4
1 11/ 4 11/ 2 2
Part No. E945K E945L E945M E945N E945P E945R
Size 21 /2 3 31 /2 4 5 6
Cat. No.
E945D E945E E945F E945G E945H E945J E945K E945L E945M E945N E945P E945R
Size
y2
3/ 4
1 11/ 4
1y,
2 21/2 3 31/ 2 4 5 6
EXPANSION FACTORS
Sched 40 Conduit Ave. OD
Lay Lengths Stop to Stop Stop to Stop Total Closed Total Open
Available Length
ExpansionContraction
.840
12 1/ 4
18 3/ 4
63/8
1050
12 1/ 4
18 3/ 4
63/ 4
1315
12 3/ 4
19 1/ 4
63/,
1660
12 3/,
19 1/ 4
63/,
1900
123/4
19 1/ 4
63 /4
2.375
13 1/2
1374
63 /4
2875
14
20 3/ 4
63/,
3500
16 1/2
23
61 /4
4000 4500 5563
16 1/2 17 1/2 18 1/2
23
24
24 /2
61/, 6y2
6
6625
201/2
26 1/ 2
6
SHORT EXPANSION COUPLINGS (EXPANDS TO A MAXIMUM OF 2")
Part No.
E9550 E955E E9 55F E955G E955H E955J
Size
1 11 /2
2
VRF-20
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CATEL
DIVISION UNITED SCIENTIFIC CORP.
4800 Patrick Henry Drive Santa Clara, CA 95054 (408) 988-7722 TVVX 910-338-2263
PROCESSOR SYSTEMS
FMU 2150C SATELLITE STEREO PROCESSOR SYSTEMS
FEATURES ·Warner Music TV Compatible ·Composite Video Et- Subcarrier
Input ·Frequency Agile ( Synthesized) FM
Stereo Output ·Dual Tone Decoders ·VTR Control/Audio and Video
Switching ·Independent 600 ohm Mono Out-
put ·Status Indicators and Front Panel
Metering
Description The Catel FMU 2150C is asingle unit processor in a 1-3/4" rack mount, which is designed for the Warner MTV Service or any other satellite subcarrier service using separate L + R and L -- R subcarriers.
The processor features astate of the art Frequency Agile FM stereo modulator which can be programmed on any frequency in the 88-108 MHz range. Frequencies in the 50-200 MHz range can also be accommodated on special order.
A comprehensive tone decoding/ switching section provides all necessary tone decoding for the dual 19 kHz tones transmitted for commercial insertions. All video and audio switching functions are contained within the unit. An internal Matrix/ Stereo generator converts L and R audio from commercial inserts to true stereo.
Front panel diagnostics include asubcarrier presence indicator, tone decoder and switching status, and an L + R VU meter which can be used to monitor deviation of the main program audio, or the commercial substitution audio.
*Dolby registered Trade Mark of Dolby Laboratories
SPECIFICATIONS: SUBCARRIER INTERFACE Input Frequencies
5.8 MHz ( L -- R) 6.62 MHz IL + R), supplied by satellite receivers as part of the composite baseband signal. Input Configuration 75 ohm, BNC connector Input Sensitivity -30 to - 16 dBV ( 0dBV = 1Volt P.P. Video) or subcarrier amplitudes of 30 to 150 mV P.P. in baseband video Input Deviation Acceptance
±-75 kHz APL ±-237 kHz PPL TV MODULATOR INTERFACE Output Configuration 600 ohm, unbalanced, screw terminal strip
OuotpdutBmLeavtelAPL
FM STEREO INTERFACE Output Frequency
Synthesized, 87 to 108 MHz std., or 50 to 200 MHz on special order Frequency Stability
±.001% phaselocked Output Configuration
Built in directional coupler, BNC Output Level
+25 to + 45 dBmV ( adjustable) including built in directional coupler
loss Spurious Products
>65 dB
FMU 2150C
AUDIO CHARACTERISTICS Within t 0.5 dB of transmitted signal from 30 Hz to 15 kHz
Pre- Emphasis 75 µ Sec, modified to 25 i2 Sec by Dolby*B encoder, at uplink location
Distortion _0.3% THD at 1kHz
Stereo Separation ?30 dB at 1kHz
TONE SWITCHING Tone Frequencies
19 kHz + 10 Hz Trigger Sensitivity
<15 kHz peak deviation of carrier by tone VTR Relay One set form C contacts, 2A rating at 30V DC, momentary closure Commercial Insert Relay One set form C contacts, 2A rating, closed for duration of tone. ( Audio switching performed electronically inside unit.)
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Dimensions
19"W x 1-3/4"H x9"D Shipping Weight
15 lbs. Operating Temperature
+10 to + 40°C Power Requirements
115 or 230VAC ( specify) 16 watts
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-21
CATEL
DIVISION UNITED SCIENTIFIC CORP.
4800 Patrick Henry Drive Santa Clara, CA 95054 (408) 988-7722 TWX 910-338-2263
MONITOR TUNER
103.5. - . roonoll1
CATES.
gig Gie
· s( ( ) 1.1.
CLISTOMIZIECI RCIR CABLE
CT-558 " CABLE CUSTOMIZED" AM/FM HEADEND MONITOR TUNER
FEATURES ·AM/FM Reception ·Total Digital Tuning--Down/Up Frequency Seeker ·Quartz PLL Frequency Synthesis ·7Memory Presets ·Signal Strength Indicator with 10dB steps ·50dB Stereo Separation ·Multi-function Display Lights up to Indicate Correctly
Tuned Station, Frequency Selected, Memory Function, Stereo Mode, and Signal Strength
The CATEL CT- 558 AM/FM Stereo-- quartz PLL synthesized tuner is customized for headend rack mounting and was selected from the H.H. Scott superior line of high fidelity stereo tuners for its exceptional performance and reliability. This tuner is the epitome of tuners available on the market today.
CATEL has customized the CT- 558 in only 3-1/2" of rack space for close monitoring of your premium FM audio service. Modifications include an output level of OdBm at 600 ohms which can be connected to the audio portion of aTV modulator for background music.
This state of the art tuner featuring quartz PLL frequency synthesis includes a microprocessor- controlled memory permitting insertion of from one to seven stations for instant recall by the touch of a numbered button. Additional enhancements include auto-scan tuning, fluorescent display for display readout, signal strength and center tuning, stereo indicator, active hi- blend filter, mode selector, 9.8dB f/1.7uV sensitivity, a varactor diode tuning
The CATEL CT-558 tuner is truly aprofessional component with sensitivity and reliability as inherent characteristics.
SPECIFICATIONS:
FM Tuner Section Tuning Range: 87.9 to 107.9MHz Usable Sensitivity: - 55dBmV ( 1.7uV) 50dB Quieting Sensitivity: ( Mono) -48dBmV ( 4uV)
(Stereo) -28dBmV ( 40uV) Audio Output Level: OdBm at 600 ohms Signal to Noise Ratio: ( Mono) 78dB
(Stereo) 72dB Total Harmonic Distortion: 0.04% at 1kHz ( stereo)
0.03% at 1kHz ( mono) Frequency Response: 25Hz to 15kHz + 0.5dB, - 1.5dB Stereo Separation: 50dB at 1kHz Spurious Rejection: 65dB at 98MHz Image Rejection: 60dB at 98MHz AM Suppression Ratio: 70dB Capture Ratio: 1.2dB Alternate Channel Selectivity: 60dB at 400kHz
AM Tuner Section Tuning Range: 530 to 1620kHz Usable Sensitivity: 250uV/m ( Bar Ant) Audio Output Level: 0.25V, 2K ohm Signal to Noise Ratio: 52dB Image Rejection: 45dB
General: Power Requirement: 120V 60Hz Power Consumption: 35 watts Dimensions: 19"W x3-1/2"H x11-1/4"D Shipping Weight: 3.5kg ( 8.25 lbs)
VRF-22
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CATEL
DIVISION UNITED SCIENTIFIC CORP.
4800 Patrick Henry Drive Santa Clara, CA 95054 (408) 988-7722 TVVX 910-338-2263
TELEVISION MODULATOR
TM- 2400 TV MODULATOR
FEATURES
· I.F. modulation at moderate price
·In- the- field channel change
·Output level of + 54 dBmV standard, to 60 dBmV optional · Meter for both video and sound modulation levels ·Low differential gain: + /- 0.5 dB
·Low differential phase: + /- 1.0 degree
·Automatic white limiter · High impedance or 600 ohm audio input · 6 to 440 MHz frequency range
·Ten pole band pass filter ·Available on most international standards
DESCRIPTION:
The TM- 2400 TV modulator brings the advantages of IF modulation within reach of almost any CATV and CCTV system. Technical performance meets the most stringent broadcast, CATV and CCTV requirements. It can be used with film chains, cameras, VTRs or TV demodulators. For microwave, asecond version ( TM- 2400B) is available with composite video and 4.5 MHz intercarrier input. The TM-2400 is available in CCIR standard B, G, I, K, M and N, and is compatible with NTSC, PAL or SECAM VIDEO.
In addition, the TM- 2400 is the only unit in its price range with easy, in- the- field channel change, afeature usually found only on more expensive modulators.
As aresult, users can change the operating channel by simply changing a P.C. board assembly. Aural and visual circuits are also modular, to make field maintenance easier. Since the IF design allows modulation at a fixed frequency, filters are optimized for a true vestigial side band signal.
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATION
Frequency Range
VISUAL
All Channels With Modular Converter
AURAL
All Channels With Modular Converter
Input Level
Min 05 Volt Peak to Peak for 87 5% Modulation
Min -- 10 dEim for 100% Modulation ( ± 25 kHz Deviation)
Input Impedance Output Impedance
75 Ohms. Unbalanced. Terminating 75 Ohms
5.000 Ohms, Unbalanced. and KO Ohms. Balanced
75 Ohms
Output Level Capability + 60 dBmV
Adjustable from 12 to 27 dB Below Visual Carrier
Recommended Output
+54 dBmV ( Factory Set) + 39 dBmV ( Factory Set)
Output Control Range
20 dB. Continuously Variable
15 dB, Continuously Variable
Frequency Response
30 Hz to 42MHz at ± 1dB
Within ± 1dB of Pre- emphasis Curve. 50 to 15 kHz
Frequency Stability
0 005%
1kHz
Hum and Noise
60 dB Down at 87% Modulation
60 dB Down with ± 25 kHz Deviation
Distortion Modulation Range
0 to 92% APL. Variable
re 1% at Full Deviation ± 25 kHz
Spurious Beats
Minimum 60 dB Below Video Carrier + 54 dBmV (Aural Carrier
+ 39 dBmV)
Color Response
±05dB Max Dill Gain ± 10Degree Max Dill Phase
Power Input
105 to 125 VAC, 60 Hz, 25 Watts (230 V. 50 Hz optional)
Dimensions
31 /2 x 12 x 19' Rack Mounted
Shipping Weight
17 Pounds
Connectors
Video BNC. Audio Cannon XL. R F F
Optional Extras
Non-standard Connectors, Group Delay Network ( Meets FCC Specifications 73 687 with GDF2300 Group Delay Pre- distortion Network
SPECIFICATIONS CCIR M/NTSC Contact factory for other standards, specs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR F-23
CATEL
DIVISION OF UNITED SCIENTIFIC CORP.
4800 Patrick Henry Drive Santa Clara, CA 95054 (408) 988-7722 TVVX 910-338-2263
GOYIM dieri
CTPA 20 Television Modulator
111111
00F3ÉJ @C:33E!!3 EiMEnü
CTM20
CTM20 Color Television Modulator
FEATURES ·Microcomputer Control · Extensive Control and Monitoring Capa-
bility ·Central Control Serial Data Interface ·Totally Modular Expansion ·Multiple Audio/Visual Switching ·Internal Message Generator ·Complete Scrambler Interface ·Surface Acoustic Wave ( SAW) IF Filtering · Bar Graph Modulation Indicators ·Calibrated Detent Modulation Controls ·Self Test Mode ·Audio/Video/IF AGC Signal Level
Normalizing
The CTM20 is a high performance digitally controlled modulator designed for all applications in CATV system headends, local origination, terrestrial microwave service, and satellite TVRO signal remodulation for cable distribution. The modulator incorporates an on- board microcomputer control system, complete audio, video, and IF signal switching, and provisions for controlling operating levels, signal switching, and the monitoring of system performance from a central terminal or under local control.
System Design Flexibility The modulator is designed to give total configuration control to the system operator. All options for the modulator can be readily field installed by the equipment user. System revisions, updates, or reconfiguration can be made from the central control computer and through the option hardware within the modulator.
SAW Vestigial Sideband Filter
A surface acoustic wave IF filter is utilized in the CTM20. Inherently linear phase and aflat amplitude response across the channel passband are achieved with the SAW filter, insuring excellent video signal transparency and waveform fidelity. The exceptional shape factor obtained with the SAW filter affords excellent adjacent channel protection. Auxiliary video and IF filters with attendant all- pass delay correction circuits are not required with the SAW filter.
Phase Equalization The SAW IF filter exhibits an inherently flat group delay characteristic across the channel passband. The shaped group delay characteristic specified for color television transmission is provided by an all- pass phase equalizer in the video module.
Control and Monitoring System A microcomputer based control system contained Wthin the CTM20 provides extensive controlling and monitoring capability. All switching functions as well as modulation levels and the channel output level are controllable from a headend terminal. Up to four audio and three video signal sources may be accepted by each modulator. A video message generator option locatec within the modulator offers preprogrammed, custom messages as the fourth video s;gnal source.
Local control of the modulator's audio, video, and IF switching is accomplished by means of parallel, hardwired switch input lines to the modulator's control module.
Audio and video modulation levels are internally precalibrated to normalized values. Adjustment of detent type front panel controls permits local override of the preset levels or central controller command if desired.
Control Features AGC -- Automatic level control of selected audio, video, and IF signal inputs is optionally available within the CTM20. These options serve to normalize the modulator's modulation characteristics and carrier level under all conditions of signal switching, and provide the means for remote programming and monitoring of these functions.
Signal Switching The internal signal switching provisions within the CTM20 will accommodate multiple signal sources ( both baseband and IF) and various modes of switch program control. All commands for signal switching are processed by the microcomputer located within the modulator and permit the control of switching functions by local commands generated at the headend site, by automatic prioritized signal selection, or by override of both these through central controller commands.
COLOR TELEVISION MODULATOR
Baseband Switching The audio/video switches respond to the microcomputer generated commands, with switching decisions based on 4 data input types: ·hardwired, parallel data switch commands
into the modulator ·presence of video at each of 4audio/video
switch locations in the modulator ·the priority level of each switch relative to
all other switches ·central controller serial data input com-
mands to the modulator Audio switching normally will follow the associated video switch unless otherwise specified by central controller command. The hardwired, parallel data inputs permit audio override to energize the emergency audio alert switch or to switch off all audio sources. IF Switching The substitute IF signal switching control may be enabled by either local, hardwired input line commands, or by the central controller data input. Automatic switching to an external IF signal source may be initiated by the loss of a selected video input signal source if so desired. Signal Scrambling A scrambler interface for both IF and baseband encoders is included in the CTM20 chassis. Separate picture and sound carrier loop through connectors provide the interface to IF scramblers. Video loop through connectors at the video output bus allow baseband scrambling of the CTM20 switch selected video source. An aural subcarrier input provides for sound security in baseband encoding systems. Monitoring Features Self Test Mode The self contained local monitoring system provides aself test mode that is automatically initiated with power up of the modulator, or at the request of the local keyboard. Ten parameters are sequentially checked against internal preset limits contained in ROM. The measured parameters are: ·Audio, video, VSB filter, and converter
module currents ·Audio and video modules local 5 and 15
volt regulator outputs ·Audio module and output converter AFC
levels
VRF-24
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CATEL
DIVISION UNITED SCIENTIFIC CORP. 4800 Patrick Henry Drive Santa Clara, CA 95054 (408) 988-7722 TWX 910-338-2263
COLOR TELEVISION DEMODULATOR
C010f *television *Demodulator
CTD10
Color Television Demodulator
FEATURES ·Synchronous/Envelope Detection ·Zero Carrier Chopper ·Video Squelch ·Switchable Sound Traps ·Split Carrier/ Intercarrier Sound ·Audio Squelch · Balanced Audio Output · DC and AC Input Powering
The CTD10 Series Demodulators are solid state and have been designed for use in cable system applications. The demodulated signal is available for monitoring, video processing, or remodulation for transmission over cable system or microwave systems.
Synchronous/Envelope Detection Both synchronous and envelope video demodulation are available in the CTD10. Selection of the desired detection mode may be chosen by fiont panel control, or remotely from rear panel contacts. Logic circuitry automatically enables the envelope detection mode with removal of the optional synchronous detector module. Rear panel terminal jumpering also permits automatic transfer to envelope detection with synchronous detection phase unlock.
SPECIFICATIONS Input Level Range:
-20 dBmV to + 30 dBmV VHF Channels -10 dBmV to + 30 dBmV UHF Channels Operating Channels: Any standard VHF 2 thru 13 Any standard UHF 14» thru 83» Sub- Low Cable Channels T 7-T11 Cable Channels 14 thru 36 ( A-W) Noise Figure: 6dB Channels T7 thru T11 Et 2thru 6 7dB Channels 7thru 13 12 dB Channels 14» thru 83» Input Impedance: 75 ohms nominal Input VSWR: 16 dB ( 1.37:1) 6MHz Channel width, over specified input level range
CTD10
AGC Type: Keyed AGC, sync tip referenced
AGC Control: ± 0.5 dB maximum video variation over specified input level range
Image Rejection: 60 dB VHF, 50 dB UHF
IF Rejection: 60 dB
Adjacent Channel Rejection: 60 dB
IF Frequency: 45.75 MHz Visual Carrier, 41.25 MHz Aural Carrier
Video Output Impedance:
75 ohms, 30 dB min return loss Video Output Level:
Adjustable to 1.5 VP- P, sync tip to peak white Video Frequency Response: al Envelope detector ± 0.5 dB, 30 Hz- 3.58 MHz b) Synchronous detector, sound traps in: + 0.5 dB, 30 Hz- 4.18 MHz cl Synchronous detector sound traps out: ± 0.5 dB, 30 Hz, - 4.5 MHz Envelope Delay: a) Sound traps in circuit, Chroma/ Lumin-
ance delay within + 25 nsec of complement of FCC transmitter nominal delay ID) Sound traps out of circuit, Chroma/ Luminance delay within ± 25 nsec ( synchronous detector only) Linearity: 2% Synchronous, 5% Envelope Detection Differential Gain: ± 1% Synchronous ± 2.5% Envelope Detection Differential Phase: ± 0.5° Synchronous ± 1.0° Envelope Detection
Chopper: Position adjustable within vertical blanking interval, width adjustable between 30 »sec and 60 » sec
Chopper Carrier Cutoff:
55 dB
Video Squelch: Activation selectable from one or more of
3 modes a) Carrier loss I)) Adjustable threshold carrier level cl Synchronous Detection Phase Unlock
Audio Output Level: Adjustable to 2.0 VR MS across 600 ohms (Before deemphasis starts). The main output is balanced or unbalanced to ground depending on the selected option.
The monitor output is always unbalanced to ground Audio Frequency Response: ± 0.5 dB from 30 Hz to 15 kHz Audio Deemphasis: 75 psec Audio Harmonic Distortion: 0.5%, 30 Hz to 15 kHz, 25 kHz deviation at specified maximum audio
output level 4.5 MHz Output:
Adjustable to 0.2 VP- P, 75 ohms source impedance, 1:25:1 VSWR AC Powering Input: 100 to 130 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 30 watts
DC Powering Input: 21.5 to 30.0 VDC, 800 mA, negative ground
Option Code C DC Powering Input:
21.5 to 28.0 VDC, 1.5A, floating ground Ambient Temperature:
0 to + 55°C operating Dimensions:
Standard 19" rack mount, 5-1/4"H, 16" chassis depth Weight: 24 lbs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR F-25
CATEL
DIVISION OF UNITED SCIENTIFIC CORP.
4800 Patrick Henry Drive Santa Clara, CA 95054 (408) 988-7722 TVVX 910-338-2263
FM MODULATOR
FMX-2100
FM Modulator
FEATURES ·Direct modulation of RF carrier ·Oven regulated VCO for high stability ·Fully solid state ·Crystal controlled output on any VHF or
HF frequency ·Pre- emphasis or optional flat response ·Output plus 46 dBmV...continuously vari-
able over 15 dB range ·Meter indicates percentage of modulation
The FMX-2100 FM Modulator is a modular packaged frequency modulation cable transmitter designed specifically for CATV and CCTV applications. When used with the
SM-2200 Stereo Gererator it makes possible the origination of stereo programming. With
direct audio sources such as AM/FM Liners, tape decks, microphone preamplifiers and short wave receivers, it can add varied FM signals to the cable system. In addition to the
re-transmission of audio signals the wide band ( plus or minus 75 kHz) deviation makes
the unit ideal for multiplexed voice or data transmission.
The crystal controlled output of the FMX is normally on acustomer selected frequency in the 88 to 108 MHz frequency range. It is also available, at added cost, on any other HF or VHF frequency on special order. The unit is fully solid state and employs an oven regulated VCO for greater stability. Up to ten FMX-2100 Modulators can be powered from asingle PS- 2000 Regulated Power Supply.
SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Output:
50 to 55, 87 to 108, 170 to 174 MHz. Other frequencies to 200 MHz are available on special order Output Impedance: 75 Ohms Output Level: +45 dBmV Output Control: Continuously Variable Frequency Stability: 0.005%, Crystal Controlled Response: Response: Within ± 1dB of Pre- emphasis Curve, 50 to 15 kHz or 50 to 60 kHz, ± 1 dB without Pre- emphasis
(Hi Z input) Modulation Frequency Range:
30 Hz to 100 kHz
Modulation Capability: 75 kHz Deviation
Hum and Noise: 60 dB Below Maximum Output
Power Requirements: + 12.6 VDC e150 ma
Multiplexing: Cate) SM-2200 Available, See Data Sheet
Input Impedance/Level:
5000 Ohms Unbalanced and 600 Ohms Balanced Standard, -- 10 dBm for 100% Modulation Modulation: Oven Regulated VCO
Distortion: less than or equal to 1% at 100% Modulation ( 1kHz)
Spurious Signals: 60 dB Below Maximum Output
Dimensions: 3-1/2" x4" x 12" Deep
Weight: 3 lbs.
Connectors: "F" Standard
Options: 1. Special Frequencies 2. 25 » Sec, 50 » Sec 3. TTL, Current loop or EIA data interfaces, and TV Sync interface.
VRF-26
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CATEL
DIVISION UNITED SCIENTIFIC CORP.
4800 Patrick Henry Drive Santa Clara, CA 95054 (408) 988-7722 T1NX 910-338-2263
MODULATORS/DEMODULATORS
WFMM 3000 MODULATOR
SERIES 3000 Signal Transmission Systems for Broadband Coax and Fiber
can be created by pairing back to back input and output converters with an IF AGC and
filter module ( 3720 Wideband IF Processor).
Series 3000 is a new family of professional quality signal transmission systems, using plug-in modules, for broadband communications.
Combining CATEL's over 15 years of experience with innovative ideas in electronic design, Series 3000 gives broadband coax users superior performance, high reliability, and unequalled convenience. These advantages are described below, using, as an example, the new WFMS-3000 broadband video/FM transmission system.
The WFMS-3000 is a complete, 70 MHz IF based, broadband system featuring sophisticated circuitry and compliance with international standards. The system provides virtually transparent transmission of wideband signals such as video ( PAL/ NTSC/ SECAM), high speed PCM Multiplex Data, and Analog FDM Multiplex signals.
Modular Flexibility The basic Series 3000 housing is a 5-1/4" EIA, rack mount frame and power supply that accepts up to eight separate Series 3000 modules. Three modules typically make up any basic sub system. So, two sub systems can be combined in one cabinet, with two individual module slots left free for auxiliary functions. For instance, an FM modulator and demodulator can form a full modem. Any 3000 Series module can be used in any slot because all slots have identical universal connectoring, and all systems are user programmable by means of rear panel BNC jumpers. True modular performance is guaranteed because modules can be replaced without need for systems adjustments to meet full specs.
Wide Frequency Range In step with the latest bandwidth expansions of broadband coax systems, operating frequencies in the Series 3000 cover 5 octaves, from sub- low to hyperband frequencies. In the WFMS-3000 system, for exampte, double conversion input and output converters are used to cover the 14 to 130 MHz range, and single conversion converters cover the 130 to 450 MHz range.
To enhance the frequency agility of the Series 3000 Systems, afrequency translator
Fiber Optics and Data I/O Compatible Cabinet space in all Series 3000 systems is provided for modules that can interface the system to fiber optics links, high speed data buses, Ti Multiplexers and FDM Multiplexers. Or, the extra slots can be used for auxiliary functions. In atypical television link application, they are taken up by an Audio Modulator and an Audio Demodulator.
User Programmable Options The circuit boards on all Series 3000 PC boards have a variety of options, such as different clamping, emphasis, supplementary phase equalization, and signal filtering modes which are implemented via Jumpers. Therefore, system modules can be customized for specific installations.
AC or DC Operation Series 3000 systems can be AC or DC powered. The standard AC mode provides both 110 and 220 volts, selectable by aswitch on the rear panel of the Power Supply Module, which comes as part of the basic Series 3000 cabinet.
Front Panel Diagnostics A major feature of the Series 3000 is the use, on module front panels, of LED performance indicators and alarms, BNC connectors or test jacks and screwdriver adjustments. You are able to see, at aglance, the status of your system, easily make any signal tests needed and quickly make any necessary adjustments. The front panel features of the WRMS system are described below.
Sub- Carrier Audio Modulator The 3303 Sub- Carrier Modulator is used to carry audio as a4.5 MHz ( NTSC), or a 5.5 MHz ( PAL/SECAM) sub- carrier above video. This module accepts audio and avideo loop, and presents composite video to the Video Input Processor Module. Front panel controls are provided for deviation adjustments ( monitored by a 4 segment LED indicator), and sub- carrier superimposition level.
Input Video Processor The 3101 Video Input Processor provides clamping, CCIR pre- emphasis, video gain and DC disposition to the IF Modulator. A video presence indicator is provided as a diagnostic aid.
WFMD 3000 DEMODULATOR
Wideband FM Modulator The Wideband IF Modulator is available in two versions: Model 3102 ( NTSC), and Model 3104. The 3104 is particularly well suited to high speed data applications, as well as PAL/ SECAM television signals. These modules are phase- locked on 70 MHz, to ensure precise channel centering. Test points for incoming processed video and modulated IF, an AFC alarm and an LED deviation indicator are provided for diagnostics.
Output Converter The 3105 ( 14 to 130 MHz) and 3106 ( 130 to 450 MHz) Output Converts accept the 70 MHz IF signal and translate it to the desired frequency. A - 20dB test connector is provided for convenient monitoring of the output signal.
Input Converter The 3205 ( 14 to 130 MHz) and 3206 ( 130 to 450 MHz) Input Converters translate the received channel frequency to the 70 MHz IF. A 70 MHz test point is provided for observing the 70 MHz IF signal.
Wideband FM Demodulator The 3202 Wideband IF Demodulator provides the select vity to the system through phase corrected IF filters. A spare phase equalizer is built into the module, which can be user programmed into the IF path to fine tune any desired specification for special applications. AGC is combined with limiting, to reduce AM to PM conversions and ensure consistent performance over the specified input level range. Front panel diagnostics include alow input level indicator, as well as a test point for the demodulated baseband signal.
Sub- Carrier Audio Demodulator The 3401 Sub- Carrier Demodulator is a particularly versatile module. Designed to accept a composite ( video + sub-carrier) signal, this unit delivers ademodulated audio signal, afiltered video signal with sub- carrier removed, and the original composite video signal. An elaborate, phase- equalized low pass filter, with buffering amplifiers, is used to ensure minimal degradation of the filtered video signal.
More detailed instructions about all these front panel features are available in the instruction manuals furnished with each Series 3000 system.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-27
CATEL
DIVISION UNITED SCIENTIFIC CORP.
4800 Patrick Henry Drive Santa Clara, CA 95054 (408) 988-7722 TVVX 910-338-2263
MODULATORS/DEMODULATORS
VFMS-2000 System
FEATURES ·Greater than 60 dB Signal to Noise ·Improved Impulse Noise Immunity · Longer Transmission Runs with Less Dis-
tortion · No Gain and Tilt Compensation Required · Low Maintenance, Solid State Design ·Minimum Cross- Modulation Effect
· High Output Levels ·Improved Group Delay Performance ·Ideal for PCM Multiplex · Lower Cost than Comparable AM Systems ·Minimum Effect from Intruded Signals
The Catel VFMS Video FM Transmission System consists of aVFMM-2000 Video FM Modulator and a VFMD-2000 FM Video Demodulator. Frequency range available is from 16 to 340 MHz with standard bandwidth of 14 MHz. INTSC) or 16 MHz PAL/ SECAM.
Due to the noise immunity advantages inherent in FM, this system is capable of long distance transmission of high speed data, television pictures of facsimile with minimum distortion.
SPECIFICATIONS VFMS-2000 Video FM System Frequency Range:
16 MHz, to 340 MHz-- System ( Specify) Channel Bandwidth:
14 MHz ( NTSC), 16 MHz ( PAL) Video Frequency Response:
+ 0.5 dB 30 Hz to 4.2 MHz NTSC, 25 Hz to 5.5 MHz ( PAL/SECAM) Chrominance-Luminance Delay: -I- 50 nsec ( 62-340 MHz Systems) Differential Gain: ± 0.5 dB
Differential Phase: + 2°, 3.58/4.43 MHz
Signal to Noise Ratio: 60 dB Min. Back to Back ( Unweighted) + 15 dBmV Receive Level
Field Squarewave Tilt: 2% Max.
Operating Temperature: +10 to + 40°C, Ambient
VFMM-2000 Video FM Modulator Input Level:
1.0V Peak- Peak, ( Adjustable) Input Impedance:
75 Ohm Unbalanced 20 dB Return Loss Deviation: 800 kHz, Sync tip to peak white Output Impedance: 75 Ohm Unbalanced 16 dB Return Loss Output Level: + 54 dBmV, ( Adjustable)
VFMM VIDEO FM MODULATOR WITH AUDIO MODULE
Frequency Stability:
+ 0.1% Spurious Output:
Min. of 60 dB Below Peak Carrier Level Outside 14 MHz Bandwidth
VFMD-2000/BPF-2100 Video FM Demodulator Input Level:
+ 10 dBmV Min. to + 30 dBmV Max. Input Impedance:
75 Ohm Unbalanced 16 dB Return Loss Output Level: 1V Peak to Peak ( Adjustable) Output Impedance: 75 Ohm Unbalanced 20 dB Return Loss
PS- 2500 BP Power Supply Input:
110/220 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 60W Max.
Outputs: + 12.6 VDC -15.0 VDC
Regulation Electronic
Protection: Input-- Fused Output-- Electronic Short Circuit Pro-
tected Options:
Video bandwidths to 20 MHz Enhanced deviation High level launch to + 80 dBmV Low level receive to - 10 dBmV, Preamp Et Equalizer 12, 24 or 48 VDC power supplies
FMX-2100 Audio Modules
Output Level: +45 DbmV ( AdjJstable)
Frequency Range: 14-200 MHz
Audio Frequency Response: + 1dB of 75 Microsecond Pre- emphasis
,;urve 50 Hz to 15 kHz Deviation:
+ 75 kHz Max. Harmonic Distortion:
Less than 1% ( 50 Hz to 15 kHz)
VFMD VIDEO FM DEMODULATOR WITH AUDIO MODULE
Hum and Noise: 60 dB below 100% Modulation
Input Level: -10 dBm
Input Impedance: 5000 Ohms unbalanced or 600 Ohms
balanced Spurious Signals:
60 dB below max. output Frequency Stability:
+ 0.005% Power Requirements:
+12.6 VDC 220 mA max. ( Powered by PS2500 Power Supply)
FMRX-2200 Frequency Range:
4 MHz to 200 MHz ( Specify) Sensitivity:
3 Microvolts for 30 dB Quieting UHF) Selectivity:
Less than 150 kHz at 30 dB down Less than 250 kHz at 50 dB down Passband: 200 kHz AM Rejection: 50 dB Capture Ratio: 2.5 dB Spurious Response: -80 dB Minimum Audio Output: + 10 dBm at 600 Ohms Audio Frequency Response: + 1dB of 75 Microsecond De- emphasis CJrve, 50 Hz to 15 kHz Harmonic Distortion: Less than 1% ( 50 Hz to 15 kHz) Hum arci Noise: -60 dB Minimum Power Requirements: 12.6 VDC, 115 mA ( Powered by PS2500 Power Supply) Options: 50 Microsecond Pre and De- emphasis
Flat Response Stereo Capability
VRF-28
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CATEL
DIVISION OF UNITED SCIENTIFIC CORP.
4800 Patrick Henry Drive Santa Clara, CA 95054 (408) 988-7722 TVVX 910-338-2263
COLOR TELEVISION MODULATOR
=lee.
FMX-2100 with tamper- guard cover
.....
Three FM channels plus power supply
FMX-2100 module
FEATURES
·Ceramic filters and integrated circuits in the intermediate frequency stages
·No drift, crystal controlled input and output · Each module delivers full output...no post amplifier or filter-
ing required ·On channel or off set operation
· Light emitting diodes...provide constant performance monitoring ·20 channels in only 10 Y2" of rack space
·Optional squelch and special selectivity available · Redundant powering concept...provisions for emergency power · Uses both limiting and automatic gain control ·Separate level control for each channel
20 channel off- air FM system with other CAFM equipment
CAFM
Today, with the increasing emphasis on additional sources of CATV revenue, agrowing number of operators are finding that expansion of FM services is an effective, yet relatively simple and inexpensive way to increase subscribers and profits. The combination of greater variety in both TV and FM, plus the improvement in FM reception, results in an extremely attractive and saleable home entertainment package.
First of all, the availability of awide variety of high quality FM signals can attract people who are not too interested in more television channels but who are critical music listeners. Many FM fans will be happy to pay a premium for improved reception and added variety. Secondly, CAFM can increase the revenue from existing subscribers. This can be asignificant source of profit, since the cable is already in place. If FM was not in your original package, you may be able to qualify for new rates because CAFM brings real benefits to the community. The Catel CAFM package can also strengthen applications for new franchises. To implement such a program, a majority of systems use the Catel CAFM program. The Catel CAFM program involves the use of modular, rack mount equipment ( see Figure 1) to add as many as 50 channels of off- air and locally originated FM programming, and such special services as time and weather broadcasts. And, since Catel CAFM equipment is modular, you can start small and add other services as the market grows.
Catel FM equipment is specifically designed to satisfy the requirements of any size CATV system. With few exceptions, the product modules described below are 12" D x 31/2" H; module widths vary from 2" to 8". Catel has standard, 19" wide cabinets with 16" of module space. These hold various module combinations to give you maximum budget and design flexibility in both initial system setup and later system expansion.
FM MODULATORS
FMX-2100: Generates signals from direct audio sources. Standard frequencies: 88-108 MHz; special frequencies 14-300 MHz. FEATURES: · Direct modulation of RF carrier ·Oven regulated FCO for high stability · Fully solid state ·Crystal controlled output on any VHF or HF frequency ·Pre- emphasis available ( optional) ·Output plus 45dBmV... continuously variable over 15 dB range · Meter indicates percentage of modulation
AM- 2000: Converts audio frequency signals to 4.5 MHz aural subcarrier frequency or to any other frequency in the 4.5-14 MHz range. FEATURES · Fully solid state ·Oven regulated FCO for high stability · Frequency range 2-14 MHz ·Meter indicates percentage of modulation ·Output plus 40 dBmV with 15 dB range · Modular construction · Direct modulation of RF carrier
FM DEMODULATORS
Crystal- controlled units for any frequency from 4.5-300 MHz. Stereo: FMRX-2100; Monaural: FMRX-2200, or FMRX-2400.
STEREO GENERATOR
SM-2200: Produces L- Rdouble sideband suppressed carrier, Lplus R and 19 MHz pilot signals from left and right audio sources.
TIME/WEATHER
WWV ( FMW-2100) or NOAA ( FMT-2100): Units include receiver with FM Modulator and power supply to provide NBS or NOAA broadcasts in the FM band.
FM REPEATER
AM/FM RECEIVER
FMR-2000: Uses crystal- controlled RF modules for superior, individ-
ual channel processing of off- air FM signals. The FMRM-A adds monaural TV sound to your system.
KT-5500: Cable customized AM/FM Tuner for use as " off air" audio source for FM or TV Modulators, or for use as amonitor of your CAFM services.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-29
CHANNELL COMMERCIAL CORP.
620 W. Foothill Boulevard Glendora, CA 91740 (818) 963-1694 800-423-1863 Telex 670-368
PEDESTAL HOUSING SINGLE AND DUAL GRADE PLANT
FEATURES COMMON TO ALL MODELS ·Aesthetically pleasing housing -- low profile design ·Complete 360° access working area ·High security locking system ·Constructed of high quality ABS plastic ·Corrosion proof ·Never needs painting ·Unaffected by severe temperatures from -60°F to + 160°F ·Vented to minimize condensation ·Top of pedestal easily removed and replaced · " T.V." identification permanently molded into top hood
PEDESTAL HOUSING
CPH-1006
CPH-1022
CPH -1022
22- inch cover height provides extra working space; strand bracketry provides cost effective installation of all active equipment.
Dimensions Weight
Basic Unit
10' dia., 27"- 29" above grade 13 lbs. with stake Shipped complete with stake attached, hasp lock and designated drop holes in base
NOMENCLATURE
CPH-1022
Basic light green color, hasp lock
CPH-1022C
Beige color, hasp lock
CPH-1022DG
Dark green color, hasp lock
CPH-1022B
With bracket
CPH-1022LK
With lock
CPH-1022CBLK Beige color, bracket, and lock
CPH-1016
CPH -1016
Strand bracketry provides cost effective installation of all active
equipment.
Dimensions Weight Basic Unit
10" dia., 21" - 23" above grade 11 lbs. with stake Shipped complete with stake attached, hasp lock and designated drop holes in base
NOMENCLATURE
CPH-1016
Basic light green color, hasp lock
CPH-1016C
Beige color, hasp lock
CPH-1016DG
Dark green color, hasp lock
CPH-1016B CPH-1016LK
With bracket With lock
CPH-1016CBLK Beige color, bracket, and lock
CPH-1006
Strand bracketry provides cost effective installation of all passive devices.
Dimensions Weight Basic Unit
10" dia., 16"- 18" above grade
8.4 lbs. with stake Shipped complete with stake attached, hasp lock and designated drop holes in base
NOMENCLATURE Dimensions
NOMENCLATURE
CPH-1006
Basic light green color, hasp lock
CPH-1006C CPH-1006DG
Beige color, hasp lock Dark green color, hasp lock
CPH-1006B
With bracket
CPH-1006LK
With lock
CPH-1006CBLK Beige color, bracket and lock
CPH-1730
CPH -1730
Prepackaged, with accessories factory installed. Universal bracketry permits cost effective installation of large active equipment.
Dimensions Weight Basic Unit
17" wide, 30" long, 17" above grade 50 lbs. Shipped complete with ground skirt, lock and dual
mounting bracket
NOMENCLATURE DCPH-1730BLK Basic light green color, lock DCPH-1730CBLK Beige color, lock
VRF-30
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CHANNELL COMMERCIAL CORP.
620 W. Foothill Boulevard Glendora, CA 91740 1818) 963-1694 800-423-1863 Telex 670-368
PEDESTAL HOUSING Cont'd
SINGLE AND DUAL GRADE PLANT
FEATURES COMMON TO ALL MODELS
·Aesthetically pleasing housing-- low profile design ·Complete 360° access working area ·High security locking system
·Constructed of high quality ABS plastic ·Corrosion proof ·Never needs painting
·Unaffected by severe temperatures from - 60°F to + 160°F ·Vented to minimize condensation ·Top of pedestal easily removed and replaced · " T.V." identification permanently molded into top hood
PEDESTAL HOUSING
DCPH -1016
Dual strand bracket permits cost effective installation of combination
passive devices.
Dimensions Weight
10" dia., 21" - 23" above grade 11 lbs. with stake
Basic Unit
Shipped complete with stake attached, hasp lock
and designated drop holes in base
NOMENCLATURE
DCPH-1016 DCPH-1016C DCPH-1016DG DCPH-1016B
DCPH-1016LK
DCPH-1016CBLK
Basic light green color, hasp lock Beige color, hasp lock Dark green color, hasp lock
With dual bracket With lock
Beige color, bracket and lock
CPH-816
CPH -816
Strand bracketry provides cost effective installation of combination passive devices.
Dimensions Weight
Basic Unit
8" dia., 20" - 22" above grade 8 lbs. with stake
Shipped complete with stake attached and hasp lock
NOMENCLATURE
CPH-816
Basic light green color, hasp lock
CPH-816C
Beige color, hasp lock
CPH-816DG CPH-816B
Dark green color, hasp lock With bracket
CPH-8161K
With lock
CPH-816CBLK
Beige color, bracket and lock
DCPH -1730
DCPH-1730
Concealed high security locking system. Prepackaged, with accessories factory installed. Dual strand bracketry permits cost effective installation of large active equipment.
Dimensions Weight Basic Unit
17" wide, 30" long, 17" above grade 50 lbs. Shipped complete with ground skirt, lock and dual mounting bracket
NOMENCLATURE
DCPH-1730BLK Basic light green color, lock
DCPH-1730CBLK Beige color, lock
CPH-658
DCPH-1006
CPH -658
Horizontal/Vertical slotted " L" bracket provides versatile mounting of all passive devices.
Dimensions
6.5" dia., 11"-18" above grade
Weight
4.5 lbs. with stake
Basic Unit
Shipped complete with stake attached and hasp lock
NOMENCLATURE
CPH-658
Basic light green color, hasp lock
CPH-658C
Beige color, hasp lock
CPH-658DG
Dark green color, hasp lock
CPH-658B
With bracket
CPH-6581K
With lock
CPH-658T
With trap holders
CPH-658CBLKT Beige color, bracket, lock and trap holders
DCPH -1006
Design allows separation of A and B cable sides. Dual strand bracket permits cost effective installation of two passive devices.
Dimensions Weight
Basic Unit
10" dia., 11" - 14" above grade 8.4 lbs. with stake
Shipped complete with stake attached, hasp lock
and designated drop holes in base
NOMENCLATURE
DCPH-1006 DCPH-1006C DCPH-1006DG
Basic light green color, hasp lock
Beige color, hasp lock Dark green color, hasp lock
DCPH-1006B
With dual bracket
DCPH-1006LK
With lock
DCPH-1006CBLK Beige color, bracket and lock
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-31
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING, INC.
COAXIAL CABLE
P.O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 ( 800) 438-3331 Telex 802-166 PARAMETER I COAXIAL CABLE SOLID COPPER
Solid copper center conductor; expanded polyethylene dielectric; solid aluminum sheath.
Similar in construction to plain version, except with outer jacket of black linear low density polyethylene.
JSS Similar to J except with Migra -Heal compound between jacket and aluminum sheath.
JASS
Similar to JSS, except with corrugated chrome plated steel armor applied longitudinally and with flooding compound between the armor and the inner jacket. The armor is coated on outside with heat sealable film which bonds to outer jacket and seals edges to form an effective moisture barrier and provide mechanical protection.
J- M109
412 SERIES P-1 75-412
Center Conductor Diameter
Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric Diameter Over Outer Conductor Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.080 in. ± 0.001 in. 0.362 in. 0.412 in. ± 0.006.in. 0.025 in.
2.03 mm ± 0.03 mm 9.19 mm 10.46 mm ± 0.15 mm 0.64 mm
Jacket Versions P-1 75-412J Et P-1 75-412JSS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.512 in. 0.050 in.
Armored Versions P-1 75-412JASS
13.00 mm 127 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor Nominal Shield Thickness Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.590 in. 0.008 in.
0.670 in.
0.040 in.
14.99 mm 0.20 mm
17.02 mm
1.02 mm
Messenger Versions P-1 75-412J- M109
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0.109 in.
2.77 mm
500 SERIES
P-1 75-500
Center Conductor Diameter Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric Diameter Over Outer Conductor Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.100 in. ± 0.001 in. 0.450 in. 0.500 in. ± 0.007m. 0.025 in.
2.54 mm ± 0.03 mm 11.43 mm 12.70 mm ± 0.18 mm
0.64 mm
Jacket Versions P-1 75-500J Et P-1 75-500 JSS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.600 in. 0.050 in.
15.24 mm 1.27 mm
Armored Versions P-1 75-500JASS
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor Nominal Shield Thickness
Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket Nominal Thickness of
Outer Jacket
0.675 in. 0.008 in.
0.755 h.
0.040 in.
17.15 mm 0.20 mm
19.18mm
1.02 mm
Messenger Versions P-1 75-500J - M109
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0.109 in.
2.77 mm
Similar to J, except " Figure 8" construction with galvanized steel messenger.
J- M250
Similar to J, except " Figure 8" construction with galvanized steel messenger.
750 SERIES
P-1 75-750
Center Conductor Diameter
0.148 in. ± 0.001 in.
3.76 mm ± 0.03 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric
0.686 in.
17.42 mm
Diameter Over Outer Conductor
0.750 in. ± 0.010.in.
19.05 mm ± 0.25 mm
Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.032 in.
0.81 mm
Jacket Versions P-1 75-750J Et P-1 75-750JSS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
0.850 in.
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.050 in.
Armored Versions P-1 75-750JASS
21.59 mm 1.27 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor Nominal Shield Thickness Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.950 in. 0.008 in.
1.03 in.
0.040 in.
24.13 mm 0.20 mm
26.16 mm
1.02 mm
Messenger Versions P-1 75-750J - M250
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0.250 in. (Strand)
6.35 mm (Strand)
VRF-32
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING, INC.
P.O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 ( 800) 438-3331 Telex 802-166
PARAMETER COPPER CLAD
CA
COAXIAL CABLE
Copper clad aluminum center conductor; expanded polyethylene dielectric; solid aluminum sheath.
JCA
Similar in construction to CA, except with outer jacket of black linear low density polyethylene. JCASS Similar to JCA except with Migra -Heal compound between jacket and aluminum sheath.
JACASS
Similar to JCASS except wtih corrugated chrome plated steel armor applied longitudinally and with flooding compound between the armor and inner jacket. The armor is coated on outside with heat sealable film which bonds to outer jacket and seals edges to form an effective moisture barrier and provide mechanical protection.
JCA -M109
JCA-M250
Similar to JCA, except " Figure 8" construction with galvanized steel messenger.
COAXIAL CABLE
412CA SERIES P-1 75-412CA
Center Conductor Diameter
0.080 in. ± 0.001 in
2.03 mm 0.03 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric
0.362 in.
9.19 mm
Diameter Over Outer Conductor
0.412 in. ± 0.006.in
10.46 mm ± 0.15 mm
Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.025 in.
0.64 mm
Jacket Versions P-1 75-412JCA Et P-1 75-412JCASS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.512 in. 0.050 in.
13.00 mm 1.27 mm
Armored Versions P-1 75-412JACASS
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor
0.590 in
14.99 mm
Nominal Shield Thickness Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
essenger Versions
0.008 in
0.670 in.
0.040 in.
- - -
0.20 mm 17.02 mm
1.02 mm
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0.109 in.
2.77 mm
500CA SERIES P-1 75-500CA
Center Conductor Diameter
0.100 in. + 0.001 in.
2.54 mm ± 0.03 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric
0.450 in.
11.43 mm
Diameter Over Outer Conductor
0.500 in. ± 0.007.in.
12.70 mm ± 0.18 mm
Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.025 in.
0.64 mm
acket Versions P-1 75-500JCA Et P-1 75-500JCASS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
0.600 in.
15.24 mm
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.050 in.
1.27 mm
Armored Versions P-1 75-500JACASS
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor
0.675 in.
17.15 mm
Nominal Shield Thickness
0.008 in.
0.20 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket
0.755 in.
19.18 mm
Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.040 in.
1.02 mm
essenger Versions P-1 75-500JCA-M109
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0.109 in.
2.77 mm
750CA SERIES P-1 75-750CA
Center Conductor Diameter Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric
0.148 in. ± 0.001 in. 0.686 in.
3.76 mm ± 0.03 mm 17.42 mm
Diameter Over Outer Conductor
0.750 in. ± 0.010.in
19.05 mm + 0.25 mm
Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0032 in
081 mm
Jacket Versions P-1 75-750JCA Et P-1 75-750JCASS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.850 in 0.050 in.
21.59 mm 1.27 mm
Armored Versions P-1 75-750JACASS
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor Nominal Shield Thickness Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.950 in 0.008 in
1.03 in
0.040 in.
24 13 mm 0.20 mm
26.16 mm
1.02 mm
Messenger Versions P-1 75-750-M250
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0.250 in. (Strand)
6.35 mm (Strand)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-33
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING, INC.
P.O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 ( 800) 438-3331 Telex 802-1 66
PARAMETER III ° COAXIAL CABLE SOLID COPPER
PLAIN
Solid copper center conductor; expanded polyethylene dielectric; solid aluminum sheath.
COAXIAL CABLE
412 SERIES PARAMETER Ill® COAXIAL CABLE
P-3 75-412
Center Conductor Diameter Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric Diameter Over
Outer Conductor
Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.089 in. ± 0.001 in. 0.362 in 0.412 in. ± 0.006m. 0.025 in.
2.26 mm ± 0.03 mm 9.19mm 10.46mm ± 0.15 mm 0.64 mm
Jacket Versions P-3 75-412J and P-3 75-412JSS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0512 in 0050 in
Armored Versions P-3 75-412JASS
13 00mm 127 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor
Nominal Shield Thickness
Nominal Diameter Over
Outer Jacket
Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.590 in 0.008 in
0.670 in.
0.040 in.
14.99 mm 0.20 mm
17.02 mm
1.02 mm
Messenger Versions P-3 75-412J- M109
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0.109 in
277 mm
Similar in construction to plain version except with outer jacket of black linear low density polyethylene. JSS Similar to Jexcept with Migra -Heal compound between jacket and aluminum sheath.
JASS
Similar to JSS except with corrugated chrome plated steel armor applied longitudinally and with flooding compound between the armor and inner jacket. The armor is coated on outside with heat sealable film which bonds to outer jacket and seals edges to form an effective moisture barrier and provide mechanical protection. J- M109
Similar to J except " Figure 8" construction with galvanized steel messenger.
500 SERIES PARAMETER III COAXIAL CABLE
P-3 75-500
Center Conductor Diameter Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric
0.111 in. ± 0.001 in 0.450 in.
282 mm ± 003 mm 11 43 mm
Diameter Over Outer Conductor
0.500 in. j0007in
12.70mm ± 0.18 mm
Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.025 in.
0.64 mm
Jacket Versions P-3 75-500J and P-3 75-500JSS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
Armored Versions
0.600 in.
0050 in
P-3 75-500JASS
15 24 mm 127 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor Nominal Shield Thickness Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.675 in. 0.008 in.
0.755 in.
0.040 in.
17.15 mm 0.20 rrm
19.18 mm
1.02 mm
Messenger Versions P-3 75-500J- M109
Diameter ot Steel Messenger
0.109 in
277 mm
750 SERIES PARAMETER III' COAXIAL CABLE
P-3 75-750
Center Conductor Diameter
Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric Diameter Over Outer Conductor Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.169 in ±0.001 in
0.678 in 0750 in ± 0.010.in 0.036 in.
4.29 mm ± 0.03 mm 17 22 mm 19.05 mm ± 0.25 mm
0.91 mm
Jacket Versions P-3 75-750J and P-3 75-750JSS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
0.850 in.
21 59 mm
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.050 in.
1.27 mm
Armored Version* P-3 75-750JASS
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor
0.950 in.
Nominal Shield Thickness
0.008 in.
Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket
1.03 in.
Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.040 in.
24.13 mm 0.20 mm
26.16 mm
102 mm
Messenger Versions P-3 75-750J- M250
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0250 in. (Strand)
6.35 mm (Strand)
VRF -34
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING, INC.
P.O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 ( 800) 438-3331 Telex 802-166 PARAMETER Ill® COAXIAL CABLE COPPER CLAD
CA
Copper clad aluminum center conductor; expanded polyethylene dielectric; solid aluminum sheath.
JCA
Similar in construction to CA, except with outer jacket of black linear low density polyethylene.
JCASS Similar to JCA except with Migra -Heal compound between jacket and aluminum sheath.
JACASS
Similar to JCASS except with corrugated chrome plated steel armor applied longitudinally and with flooding compound between the armor and the inner jacket. The armor is coated on outside with heat sealable film which bonds to outer jacket and seals edges to form an effective moisture barrier and provide mechanical protection.
COAXIAL CABLE
412CA SERIES P-3 75-412CA
Center Conductor Diameter Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric Diameter Over Outer Conductor Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.089 in. ± 0.001 in. 0.362 in. 0.412 in. ± 0.006m. 0.025 in.
2.26 mm ± 0.03 mm 9.19mm 10.46 mm ± 0.15 mm 0.64 mm
Jacket Versions P-3 75-412JCA Et P-3 75-412JCASS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.512 in. 0050 ,n
Armored Versions P-3 75-412JACASS
13.00 mm 127 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor Nominal Shield Thickness Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.590 in 0.008 in
0.670 in
0.040 in.
14.99 mm 0.20 mm
17.02 mm
1.02 mm
Messenger Versions P-3 75-412JCA-M109
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0 109 in
277 mm
500CA SERIES P-3 75-500CA
Center Conductor Diameter Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric Diameter Over Outer Conductor Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.111 in ± 0001 0450 in. 0500 in. ± 0.007.in. 0.025 in.
282 mm ± 003 mm 11 43 mm 12 70 mm ± 0 18 mm
0.64 mm
Jacket Versions P-3 75-500JCA Et P-3 75-50CIJCASS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
0.600 in.
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.050 in.
Armored Versions P-3 75-500JACASS
15.24 mm 1.27 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor Nominal Shield Thickness Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.675 in. 0.008 in.
0.755 in.
0.040 in.
17.15 mm 0.20 mm
19.18 mm
1.02 mm
Messenger Versions P-3 75-500JCA-M109
Diameter ot Steel Messenger
0.109 in.
2.77 mm
JCA-M109
Similar to JCA, except " Figure 8" construction with galvanized steel messenger.
625CA SERIES P-3 75-625CA
Center Conductor Diameter Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric Diameter Over Outer Conductor Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.169 in. ± 0001 tn 0.678 in. 0.750 in. ± 0.036 in.
4.29 mm ± 0.03 mm 17 22 mm 19.05 mm 0.25 mm 0.91 mm
Jacket Versions P-3 75-625JCA Et P-3 75-625JCASS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.850 in. 0.050 in.
21.59 mm 1.27 mm
Armored Versions P-3 75-625JACASS
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor Nominal Shield Thickness Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.950 in 0.008 in.
1.03 in
0.040 in.
24.13 mm 0.20 mm
26 16 mm
1.02 mm
Messenger Versions P-3 75-625JCA-M109
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0.250 in. (Strand)
6.35 mm (Strand)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-35
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING, INC.
P.O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 ( 800) 438-3331 Telex 802-166 PARAMETER Ill® COAXIAL CABLE COPPER CLAD
Copper clad aluminum center conductor; expanded polyethylene dielectric; solid aluminum sheath.
JC,6
COAXIAL CABLE
750CA SERIES P-3 75-750CA
Center Conductor Diameter
0.169 in. ± 0.001 in.
4.29 mm 0.03 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric
0.678 in.
17.22 mm
Diameter Over Outer Conductor
0.750 in. ± 0.010 in.
19.05 mm 0.25 mm
Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.036 in.
0.91 mm
Jacket Versions P-3 75-750JCA Et P-3 75-750JCASS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
0.850 in.
21.59 mm
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.050 in.
-3 75-75OJACASS
127 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor Nominal Shield Thickness
0.950 in. 0.008 in.
24.13 mm 0.20 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket
1.03 in.
26.16 mm
Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.040 tn.
Messenger Versions - -
-
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0.250 in. (Strand)
1.02 mm 6.35 mm (Strand)
Similar in construction to CA, except with outer jacket of black linear low density polyethylene.
JCASS Similar to JCA, except with Migra -Heal compound between jacket and aluminum sheath.
JACASS
875CA SERIES P-3 75-875CA
Center Conductor Diameter
0.194 in. j0.001 in.
4.93 mm ± 0.03 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric
0.797 in.
20.24 mm
Diameter Over Outer Conductor
0.875 in. ± 0.010.in.
22.23 mm ± 0.25 mm
Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0039 in
0.99 mri
Jacket Versions P-3 75-875JCA ft P-3 75-875JCASS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
0.975 in.
24.77 mm
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.050 in.
1.27 mm
Armored Versions P-3 75-875JACASS
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor
1.047 in.
26.59 mm
Nominal Shield Thickness
0.008 in.
0.20 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket
1.127 in
28.63 mm
Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0.040 in.
1.02 mm
Messenger Versions P-3 75-875JCA-M250
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0.250 in. (Strand)
6.35 mm (Strand)
Similar to JCASS, except with corrugated chrome plated steel armor applied longitudinally and with flooding compound between the armor and the inner jacket. The armor is coated on outside with heat sealable film which bonds to outer jacket and seals edges to form an effective moisture barrier and provide mechanical protection.
JCA-M250
Similar to JCA, except " Figure 8" construction with galvanized steel messenger.
1000CA SERIES P-3 75-1000CA
Center Conductor Diameter
0.220 in. ± 0.002 in.
5.59 mm ± 0.05 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric
0.890 in.
22.61 mm
Diameter Over Outer Conductor
1.000 in. ± 0.015.in.
25.40 mm ± 0.3 mm
Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.055 in
1.40 mm
Jacket Versions P-3 75-1000JCA Et P-3 75-1000JCASS
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
1.10 in.
27.94 mm
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.050 in.
1.27 mm
sP-3 75-1000JACASS
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor
1.20 in
30.48 mm
Nominal Shield Thickness
0.008 in
0.20 mm
Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket
1.28 in.
32.51 mm
Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
Messenger versions -
Diameter of Steel Messenger
0.040 in.
5-1
-
0.250 in. (Strand)
1.02 mm 6.35 mm (Strand)
VRF-36
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING, INC.
P.O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 ( 800) 438-3331 Telex 802-166
QUANTUM REACH® SUPER LOW LOSS COAXIAL CABLE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION Copper covered aluminum center conductor; Double- Clad tu center conductor corrosion protection; microcellular gas expanded polyethylene dielectric with surface coated adhesive bonding agent; RF welded aluminum outer conductor; jacket of black medium density polyethylene with optional co- extruded tracer stripe.
JCA
CENTER CONDUCTOR Copper clad aluminum
DOUBLE CLAD CENTER CONDUCTOR TREATMENT Inhibits water migration and corrosion
ALUMINUM OUTER CONDUCTOR Contiuous RF welded
construction to
eliminate signal leakage. Flexible for improved handling properties.
DIELECTRIC New micro cellular structure provides lower attenuation.
DIELECTRIC ADHESIVE Inhibits water migration and connector pull-out. Enhances handling characteristics.
NEW POLYETHYLENE JACKET Medium density polymer.
Stronger and tougher than conventional jackets.
JCASP
ASPHALT FLOODING COMPOUND
Similar in construction to JCA ( above) except with asphaltic flooding compound which inhibits cable corrosion in the event of severe jacket damage.
JACASP
FLOODING COMPOUND
CORRUGATED
CHROME PLATED STEEL ARMOR
Similar in construction to JCASP ( above) except wtih corrugated chrome plated steel armor applied longi-
tudinally and with flooding compound between the armor and the inner jacket. The armor is bonded to the outer jacket and enhances cable longevity in burial applications.
COAXIAL CABLE
500 SERIES QUANTUM REACH®
QR-500JCA
Center Conductor Diameter Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric Diameter Over Outer Conductor Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.117 in j0.001 in. 0.476 in 0.500 in ± 0005 in 0.012 in
Jacket Versions QR-500JCASP
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
0.580 in.
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0040 in.
Armored Versions GR-500JACASP
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor
0.655 in.
Nominal Shield Thickness
0.008 in.
Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket
0735 in
Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0040 in
860 SERIES QUANTUM REACH®
QR-860JCA
Center Conductor Diameter Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric Diameter Over Outer Conductor Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
ow 0.203 in ±
in
0.828 in.
0.860 in ±0.010 in
0.016 in.
Jacket Versions GR-860JCASP
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
0.960 in.
, Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.050 in.
Armored Versions GR-860JACASP
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor
1.060 in.
Nominal Shield Thickness
0.008 in.
Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket
1140 in.
Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
0040 in
1125 SERIES QUANTUM REACH® SUPERTRUNK' CABLE
QR-1125JCA
Center Conductor Diameter Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric Diameter Over Outer Conductor Nominal Outer Conductor Thickness
0.263 in. ± 0.001 in. 1.081 in 1.125 in. ± 0.010 in.
0.021 in.
Jacket Versions GR-1125JCASP
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
1.225 in.
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0050 in
Armored Versions QR-1125JACASP
Nominal Diameter Over Corrugated Armor Nominal Shield Thickness
1300 in. 0.010 in.
Nominal Diameter Over Outer Jacket Nominal Thickness of Outer Jacket
1.380 in. 0.040 in
2.97 mm ± 0.03 mm 12.09 mm 12.70 mm 0.13 mm
0.305 mm
14.73 mm 102 mm
16.64 mm 0.20 mm
18.67 mm 1.02 mm
5.16 mm ± 003 mm 2103 mm 21 84 mm ± 025mm
0.41 mm
24.38 mm 1.27 mm
26.92 mm 0.20 mm
28.96 mm 102 mm
6.68 mm ± 0.03 mm 2746 mm 28.58 mm ± 0.25 mm 0.53 mm
31.12 mm 127 mm
33.02 mm 0.25 mm 35.05 mm 102 mm
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-37
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING,INC.
P.O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 (800) 438-3331 Telex 802-166
COAXIAL CABLE
F595SSV
F2-59SSV
F6SSVM
59 SERIES SOLID POLYETHYLENE DIELECTRIC -- NON- BONDED FOIL Basic Construction Center Conductor: Nom. 0.025" copper covered steel; Dielectric: Solid natural polyethylene; Inner Shield: Aluminum- polypropylene- aluminum laminated nonbonded tape with overlap; Outer Shield: 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; Jacket: Black polyethylene flooded
design only; Nom. 0.D.: 0.242"
Model No. S5967EF S2-5967EF
Model No. S5995EF
67°/o Braid Coverage See basic construction, polyethylene jacket.
See basic construction, except dual, polyethylene jacket.
95°/o Braid Coverage See basic construction, polyethylene jacket.
6SERIES SOLID POLYETHYLENE DIELECTRIC -- NON- BONDED FOIL
Basic Construction Center Conductor: Nom. 0.029" in copper covered steel; Dielectric: Solid natural polyethylene; Inner Shield: Aluminum- polypropylene-aluminum laminated nonbonded tape with overlap; Outer Shield: 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; Jacket: Black polyethylene flooded
design only; Nom. 0.D.: 0.272"
Model No. S660EF S2-660EF
Model No. S690EF
60% Braid Coverage See basic construction, polyethylene jacket.
See basic construction, except dual polyethylene jacket
90% Braid Coverage See basic construction, polyethylene jacket.
F2-6SSVM
59 SERIES CELL- O- AIR FOAM DIELECTRIC -- SUPER- SHIELD
Basic Construction Center Conductor: Nom. 0.032" copper covered steel; Dielectric: Gas expanded polyethylene; Inner Shield: Aluminum- polypropylene-aluminum laminated tape with overlap bonded to the dielectric; 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; non-bonded aluminum- polyethylene-aluminum
tape with overlap; 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; Jacket Black polyvinylchloride or polyethylene ( flooded) (available in beige and white upon request); Nom. 0.D.: 0.265"; Messenger: Single -- 0.051" galvanized steel, Dual -- 0.072" galvanized steel
Model No. F59SSV
See basic const ,uction, vinyl jacket.
F59SSVM Vinyl jacket, 0.051" messenger.
F2-59SSV Dual, vinyl jacket.
F2-59SSVM Dual, vinyl jacket, 0.072" messenger.
F59SSEF Flooded, polyethylene jacket.
F2-59SSEF Dual, flooded, polyethylene jacket.
VRF-38
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING, INC.
P.O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 ( 800) 438-3331 Telex 802-166
DROP WIRE
F59TSV
F2-6TSV
7111111111111111111111111111111
F6TSVM
59 SERIES CELL- 0-AIR
FOAM DIELECTRIC -- TRI -SHIELD
Basic Construction Center Conductor: Nom. 0.032" copper covered steel; Dielectric: Gas expanded polyethylene; Inner Shield: Aluminum- polypropylenealuminum laminated tape with overlap bonded to the dielectric; 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; non- bonded aluminumpolypropylene- aluminum tape with overlap; Jacket: Black polyvinylchloride ( available in beige and white upon request); Nom. 0.D.: 0.246"; Messenger: Single -- 0.051" galvanized steel, Dual -- 0.072" galvanized steel
Model No. F59TSV F59TSVM
F2-59TSV F2-59TSVM
67°/o Braid Coverage See basic construction, vinyl jacket. Vinyl jacket, 0.051" messenger.
Dual, vinyl jacket. Dual, vinyl jacket, 0.072" messenger.
6SERIES CELL- O-AIR
FOAM DIELECTRIC -- TRI -SHIELD
Basic Construction Center Conductor: Nom. 0.040" copper covered steel; Dielectric: Gas expanded polyethylene; Inner Shield: Aluminum- polypropylenealuminum laminated tape with overlap bonded to the dielectric; 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; non- bonded aluminumpolyvinylchloride-aluminum tape with overlap; Jacket: Black polyvinylchloride ( available in beige and white upon request); Nom. 0.D.: 0.278"; Messenger: Single -- 0.051" galvanized steel
Model No. F6TSV F6TSVM
F2-6TSV
60% Braid Coverage See basic construction, vinyl jacket. Vinyl jacket, 0.051" messenger.
Dual, vinyl jacket.
F2-59TSVM
6SERIES CELL- 0- AIR
FOAM DIELECTRIC -- SUPER- SHIELD
Basic Construction Center Conductor: Nom. 0.040" copper covered steel; Dielectric: Gas expanded polyethylene; Inner Shield: Aluminum- polypropylenealuminum laminated tape with overlap bonded to the dielectric; 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; non- bonded aluminum polypropylene-aluminum tape with overlap; 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; Jacket: Black polyvinylchloride or polyethylene ( flooded) (available in beige and white upon request); Nom. 0.D.: 0.300"; Messenger: Single -- 0.051" galvanized steel, Dual -- 0.072" galvanized steel
Model No.
F6SSV
See basic construction, vinyl jacket.
F6SSVM Vinyl jacket, 0.051" messenger.
F2-6SSV Dual, vinyl jacket.
F2-6SSVM Dual, vinyl jacket, 0.072" messenger.
F6SSEF Flooded, polyethylene jacket.
F2-6SSEF Dual, flooded, polyethylene jacket.
11 SERIES CELL- 0-AIR FOAM DIELECTRIC -- SUPER- SHIELD
Basic Construction Center Conductor. Nom. 0.064' .copper covered steel; Dielectric: Gas expanded polyethylene; Inner Shield: Aluminum- polypropylenealuminum laminated tape with overlap bonded to the dielectric; 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; non- bonded aluminumpolyethylene-aluminum tape with overlap; 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; Jacket: Black polyvinylchloride or polyethylene ( flooded) (available in beige and white upon request); Nom. 0.D.: 0.405"; Messenger: Single -- 0.072" galvanized steel
Model No. F11SSV See basic construction, vinyl jacket. F11SSVM Vinyl jacket, 0.072" messenger. F11SSEF Flooded, polyethylene jacket.
Reprinted with permission from materials 1982, M/A-COM Comm/Scope
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-39
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING, INC.
P.O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 ( 800) 438-3331 Telex 802-166
PARAMEDROP DROP WIRE
F5967BV
F2-5995BV F5967BVM
F2-5967BVM
59 SERIES CELL- 0- AIR FOAM DIELECTRIC -- BONDED FOIL Basic Construction Center Conductor: Nom. 0.032" copper covered steel; Dielectric: Gas expanded polyethylene; Inner Shield: Aluminum- polypropylene-aluminum laminated tape with overlap bonded to dielectric; Outer Shield: 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; Jacket: Black polyvinylchloride or polyethylene ( flooded) ( available in beige and white upon request); Nom. 0.D.: 0.242"; Messenger: Single -- 0.051" galvanized steel, Dual -- 0072" galvanized steel
Model No. F5967BV F5967BVM F2-5967BV F2-5967BVM F5967BEF F2-5967BEF
Model No. F5995BV F5995BVM F2-5995BV F5995BEF
67% Braid Coverage See basic construction, vinyl jacket. Vinyl jacket, 0.051" messenger. Dual, vinyl jacket. Dual, vinyl jacket, 0.072" messenger. Flooded, polyethylene jacket. Dual, flooded, polyethylene jacket.
95% Braid Coverage See basic construction, vinyl jacket. Vinyl jacket, 0.051" messenger. Dual, vinyl jacket. Flooded, polyethylene jacket.
DROP WIRE
6SERIES CELL- 0- AIR FOAM DIELECTRIC -- BONDED FOIL Basic Construction Center Conductor. Nom. 0.040" copper covered steel; Dielectric: Gas expanded polyethylene; Inner Shield: Aluminum- polypropylene-aluminum laminated tape with overlap bonded to dielectric; Outer Shield: 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; Jacket: Black polyvinylchloride or polyethylene ( flooded) ( available in beige and white upon request); Nom. 0.D.: 0.272"; Messenger: Single -- 0.051" galvanized steel, Dual -- 0.072" galvanized steel
Model No. F660BV F660BVM F2- 6606V F2-660BVM F660BEF F2-660BEF
Model No. F690BV F690BVM F2- 6906V F2-690BVM F690BEF F2-690BEF
60% Braid Coverage See basic construction, vinyl jacket. Vinyl jacket, 0.051" messenger. Dual, vinyl jacket. Dual, vinyl jacket, 0.072" messenger. Flooded, polyethylene jacket. Dual, flooded, polyethylene jacket.
90% Braid Coverage See basic construction, vinyl jacket. Vinyl jacket, 0.051" messenger. Dual, vinyl jacket. Dual, vinyl jacket, 0.072" messenger. Flooded, polyethylene jacket. Dual, flooded, polyethylene jacket.
11 SERIES CELL- 0-AIR FOAM DIELECTRIC -- BONDED FOIL Basic Construction Center Conductor: Nom. 0.064" copper covered steel; Dielectric: Gas expanded polyethylene; Inner Shield: Aluminum-polypropylene-aluminum laminated tape with overlap bonded to dielectric; Outer Shield: 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire; Jacket: Black polyvinylchloride or polyethylene ( flooded) ( available in beige and white upon request); Nom. 0.D.: 0.405"; Messenger: Single -- 0.072" galvanized steel, Dual -- 0.109" galvanized steel
Model No. F1160BV F11608VM
F2-1160BV F2-1160BVM F1160BEF
60% Braid Coverage See basic construction, vinyl jacket. Vinyl jacket, 0.072" messenger.
Dual, vinyl jacket. Dual, vinyl jacket, 0.109" messenger. Flooded, polyethylene jacket.
Reprinted with permission from materials 1982, M/A-COM Comm/Scope
VRF-40
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING, INC.
P.O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 ( 800) 438-3331 Telex 802-1 66
DROP WIRE
59 FOAM SERIES ( Standard Shield, Tri -Shield, Super- Shield)
Physical Dimensions
Component Nominal Center Conductor Diameter
Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric Nominal Diameter Over First Shield (Tape)
Nominal Diameter Over Second Shield ( Braid) Nominal Diameter Over Third Shield (Tape)
Nominal Diameter Over Fourth Shield ( Braid) Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
Nominal Diameter of Steel Messenger
STANDARD SHIELD
Inches
mm
0.032
0.81
0.144
3.66
0.148 0.152
(nonbonded) 3.76 (bonded) 3.86
0.173 0.177
(nonbonded) 4.39 (bonded) 4.50
N/A
N/A
0.242
6.15
0.035
0.89
0.051 0.072
(single) (dual)
1.30 1.83
TRI -SHIELD
Inches
mm
0.032
0.81
0.144
3.66
0.152
ass
0.177
4.50
0.186
4.72
N/A
0.246
6.25
0.030
0.76
0.051 (single) 1.30 0.072 (dual) 1.83
SUPER- SHIELD
inches
mm
0.032
0.81
0.144
3.66
0.152
3.86
a177
4.50
0.186
4.72
0.212
5.39
0.265
6.73
0.030
0.76
0.051 (single) 1.30 0.072 (dual) 1.83
59 SOLID SERIES
Electrical Characteristics
Physical Dimensions
Nominal Capacitance Nominal Impedance Nominal Velocity of Propagation
16 2pf/ft
53 nf/km
75 ohms
82%
Component Nom. Center Conductor Diameter
Nom. Diameter Over Dielectric
Inches 0.025
0.144
mm 0.64
ass
Mechanical Characteristics
Minimum Breaking Strength of Messenger
0.051 0.072
180 lbs 365 lbs
82 kg, 166 kg,
Nominal Diameter Over First Shield (Tape)
0.148 (nonbonded) 0.152 (bonded)
Nominal Diameter Over Second Shield ( Braid)
0.173 (nonbonded) 0.177 (bonded)
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
0.242
3.76 ( nonbonded) ass (bonded)
4.39 (nonbonded) 4.50 (bonded)
6.15
Attenuation at 68°F. ( 20°C.
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.030
0.76
Frequency (MHz) 5
55 / Channel 2 83 / Channel 6 187 / Channel 9 211 / Channel 13 250 300 350 400 450
Maximum (c113/100 ft.) 0.68 2.05 2.45 3.60 3.80 4.10 4.45 4.80 5.10 5.40
Maximum (dB/100 m) 2.23 6.73 8.04 11.81 12.47 13.45 14.60 15.75 16.73 17.72
Reprinted with permission from materials 1982, M/A-COM Comm/Scope
Electrical Characteristics
Nominal Capacitance Nominal Impedance Nominal Velocity of Propagation
20.5 pf/ft
67 nf/km
75 ohms
66%
Attenuation at 68°F. (20°C.)
Frequency (MHz) 5
55 / Channel 2 83 / Channel 6 187 / Channel 9 211 / Channel 13 250 300 350 400 450
Maximum (dB/100 ft.) 0.82 2.55 als 4.60 4.90 5.25 5.80 6.20 6.60 7.00
Maximum (dB/100 m) 2.69 8.37 10.33 15.09
16.08 17.22 19.03 20.34 21.65 22.97
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-41
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING, INC.
P O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 ( 800) 438-3331 Telex 802-166
DROP WIRE
6 FOAM SERIES ( Standard Shield, Tri -Shield, Super- Shield)
Physical Dimensions
Component Nominal Center Conductor Diameter
Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric
Nominal Diameter Over First Shield (Tape) Nominal Diameter Over Second Shield ( Braid) Nominal Diameter Over Third Shield (Tape) Nominal Diameter Over Fourth Shield (Braid) Nominal Diameter Over Jacket Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness Nominal Diameter of Steel Messenger
STANDARD SHIELD
inches
mm
0.040
1.02
0.180
4.57
0.184 (nonbonded)
0.186
(bonded)
4.67 4.72
0.210 (nonbonded) 5.33
0.212
(bonded)
5.39
N/A
N/A
0.272
6.91
0.035
0.89
0.051 0.072
(single) (dual)
1.30 1.83
TRI -SHIELD
Inches
MM
0.040
1.02
0.180
4.57
0.186
4.72
0.212
5.39
0.218
5.54
N/A
0.278
7.06
0.030
0.76
0.051 (single) 1.30 0.072 (dual) 1.83
SUPER- SHIELD
Inches
mm
0.040
1.02
0.180
4.57
0.186
4.72
0.212
5.39
0.218
5.54
0.244
6.20
0.300 0.030
7.62 0.76
0.051 (single) 1.30 0.072 (dual) 1.83
6 SOLID SERIES
Electrical Characteristics
Nominal Capacitance Nominal Impedance Nominal Velocity of Propagation
16.2 pf/ft
53 nf/km
75 ohms
82%
Physical Dimensions
Component Nom. Center Conductor Diameter
Inches 0.029
mm 0.74
Mechanical Characteristics
Minimum Breaking Strength of Messenger
0.051 0.072
180 lbs i 365 lbs
82kg, 166kg,
Nom. Diameter Over Dielectric
0.180
Nominal Diameter Over First Shield (Tape)
0.184 (nonbonded) 0.186 (bonded)
Nominal Diameter Over Second Shield (Braid)
0.210 (nonbonded) 0.212 (bonded)
4.57
4.67 (nonbonded) 4.72 (bonded)
5.33 (nonbonded) 5.39 (bonded)
Frequency (MHz) 5
55 / Channel 2 83 / Channel 6 187 / Channel 9 211 / Channel 13 250 -300 350 400 450
Attenuation at 68°F. I20°C.
Maximum (dB/100 ft.) Maximum (dB/100 m)
0.52
1.70
1.60 1.95 2.85 3.05
5.25 6.40 9.35 10.00
3.30 3.55 3.85 4.15 4.40
10.82 11.64 12.63 13.61 14.43
Reprinted with permission from materials 1982, M/A-COM Comm/Scope
Nominal Diameter Over Jacket Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness
0.272 0.030
6.91 0.76
Electrical Characteristics
Nominal Capacitance Nominal Impedance Nominal Velocity of Propagation
20.5 pf/ft
67 nf/km
75 ohms
66%
Attenuation at 68°F. I20°C.)
Frequency (MHz)
Maximum (dB/100 ft.)
5
0.64
55 /Channel 2 83 / Channel 6 187 / Channel 9 211 / Channel 13
2.10 2.55
atio
4.05
250
4.40
300
4.80
350
5.20
400
5.50
450
5.80
Maximum (dB/100 m) 2.10 6.89 8.36
12.46 1328 14.43 15.74 17.06 1804 19.02
VRF-42
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
COMM/SCOPE MARKETING, INC.
P.O. Box 1729 Hickory, NC 28603 (704) 324-2200 ( 800) 438-3331
Telex 802-166
11 FOAM SERIES ( Standard Shield, Super-Shield)
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS Component Nominal Center Conductor Diameter
Nominal Diameter Over Dielectric
Nominal Diameter Over First Shield (Tape)
Nominal Diameter Over Second Shield ( Braid) Nominal Diameter Over Third Shield (Tape)
Nominal Diameter Over Fourth Shield ( Braid) Nominal Diameter Over Jacket
Nominal Jacket Wall Thickness Nominal Diameter of Steel Messenger
STANDARD SHIELD
Inches
mm
0.064
1.63
0.280
7.11
0.286 0.289
0.310 0.313
(nonbonded) (bonded)
(nonbonded) (bonded)
7.26 7.34
nu 7.95
N/A
N/A
0.405
10.29
0.045
1.14
0.072 0.109
(single) (dual)
1.83 2.77
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Minimum Breaking Strength of Messenger
0.072 0.109
365 lbs. 1800 lbs.
166 kg, 818 kgr
DROP WIRE
SUPER- SHIELD
Inches
mm
0.064
1.63
0.280
7.11
0.289
7.34
0.313 0.319 0.343 0.405
0.035 0.072 0.109
(single) (dual)
7.95 8.10 ari 10.29
0.89 1.83 2.77
MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Nominal Capacitance Nominal Impedance Nominal Velocity of Propagation
16.2 pf/ft
53 nf/km
75 ohms
82%
Frequency (MHz) 5
55 / Channel 2 83 / Channel 6 187 / Channel 9 211 / Channel 13 250 300 350 400 450
ATTENUATION at 68°F ( 20°C.)
Maximum (dB/100 ft.)
0.29 0.96 1.18 1.75 1.90 2.05 2.25 2.40 2.60 2.75
Maximum (dB/100 m) 0.95 3.15 3.87 5.74 6.23 6.72 7.38 7.87 8.53 9.02
S59 HEC HEAD END CABLE CONSTRUCTION Center Conductor: 22 AWG (. 0253") silver plated copper center conductor
Dielectric: Solid natural polyethylene
Shield: 1. Aluminum- polypropylene- aluminum laminated bonded
tape 2. Two layers of 34 AWG tinned copper braid, each 95%
coverage
Jacket: Black polyvinylchloride with imprinted identification
Nominal Dimensions
Conductor: Diameter Over 1st Shield: .153 inches
0.0253 inches Diameter Over 2nd Shield: .177 inches
Dielectric:
Diameter Over 3rd Shield: .202 inches
0.144 inches Diameter Over Jacket: .265 inches
Transmission Data
Frequency (MHz) 5 55 83 187 211 250 300 350 400 450
Maximum Attenuation (68.1F.)
(dB/100 It.)
(dB/100 m)
082
269
255
837
315
10 33
460
15 09
490
16 08
525
17 22
580
19 03
620
20.34
660
21 65
700
22.97
Reprinted with permission from materials © 1982, M/A-COM Comm/Scope
Nominal Impedance: 75 ohms 2ohms Capacitance: 21.0 ±-1pf/ft. (67 nf/km) Velocity of Propagation: 66% Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-43
GENERAL CABLE COMPANY
P.O. Box 700 One Woodbridge Center Woodbridge, NJ 07095
MC' COAXIAL CABLES Attenuation Chart ( dB/100 ft.) Maximum Attenuation at 68°F
Frequency
FEEDER
TRUNK & SUPER TRUNK
MHZ . 440" . 500" .650" . 750" 1.00"
5 30 55 83 100 175 211 250 270 300 312 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 550
.17 .41 .56 .69 .75 1.01 1.11 1.21 1.26 1.33 1.36 1.39 1.44 1.49 1.54 1.59 1.64 1.68 1.72 1.81
.14 .35 .48 .59 .65 .86 .95 1.03 1.08 1.14 1.16 1.19 1.23 1.28 1.32 1.36 1.40 1.44 1.48 1.55
.65 .28 .38 .47 .51 .69 .76 .83 .86 .91 .93 .95 .99 1.02 1.06 1.09 1.13 1.16 1.19 1.25
.10 . 07 .25 . 18 .34 . 24 .41 . 30 .45 . 33 .60 . 45 .66 . 49 .72 . 54 .75 . 56 .79 . 60 .81 . 61 .83 . 62 .86 . 65 .88 . 67 .91 . 70 .94 . 72 .97 . 74 1.00 . 76 1.03 . 78 1.08 . 82
Submarine Armored MC' Coaxial Cable
Designed to offer submarine protection at afraction of the cost of conventional steel wire armor, our new submarine armored cable uses copper wire armor to give MC' cable the weight and tensile strength needed for successful underwater applications.
The construction, available in (. 500"), (. 750") and ( 1.00") sizes, is manufactured as follows:
Bare coaxial cable is jacketed with polyisobutylene flooding compound beneath the black polyethylene jacket ( General Cable Specifications 7004, 7007 and 7008). A layer of copper wires is helically stranded around the cable. The cable is covered with an asphalt flooding compound which includes rubber, and jacketed with black polyethylene.
MC' Coaxial Cable Flooding Compounds For Jacketed Cable
In general, aluminum resists the corrosive effects of the atmosphere extremely well. Tests performed by the American Society for Testing Materials ( ASTM) and by our research laboratory have shown that aluminum samples are not severely affected even by long-term exposure to asalt fog atmosphere. However, the environment of an operating cable television system differs significantly from these test conditions. The aluminum is coupled to galvanized steel strand, usually by stainless steel lashing wire. Movement of the cable against these materials occurs due to thermal changes. In the presence of an industrial or marine environment, severe corrosion can occur to bare cables and jacketed cables are recommended. In other environments, bare cables are often sufficient.
COAXIAL CABLES
Once the aluminum is jacketed, its corrosion susceptibility is increased if the jacket is damaged. In situations where differences in the oxygen concentration can arise, i.e., low oxygen under the jacket and high oxygen at the location of the jacket failure, this moisture becomes the electrolyte of a differential aeration cell. Corrosion resulting from adifferential aeration cell or limited supply of oxygen where moisture has migrated under the jacket is progressive. The addition of chlorides to this situation ( salt air environment) accelerates the attack in terms of severity and extent.
Buried installations, although soils vary significantly in their corrosiveness, in general represent more severe environments than unprotected aluminum can withstand and jackets must be employed. If jacket damage exists, extensive corrosion damage occurs as a result of stray currents or galvanic cells. To prevent this damage, we recommend our burial flooding compound, which entirely covers the aluminum sheath, and prevents migration of moisture between the sheath and the jacket. In the event of minor jacket damage, it will tend to flow into the damaged area and often continues to isolate the aluminum sheath from the environment, thereby minimizing corrosion.
Aerial installation exposes cable to a less severe environment than direct burial. However, the cable is exposed to temperature cycling not encountered underground. This temperature cycling can make the burial flooding compound difficult to use. Shrinkback of the jacket, and flow of the flooding compound from cable ends on hot days have been reported by system operators. We recommend our aerial flooding compound, an asphalt compound which includes rubber. Though it completely covers the aluminum sheath, its flow is minimized.
Coaxial Cable . 440", . 500", . 650", . 750", 1.00", MC'
1. CABLE DESIGN MC' coaxial cables will be manufactured in the following constructions:
1.1 Bare. The cable shall consist of asolid inner conductor of either copper or copperclad aluminum, disc spacers, sleeve insulation and an outer conductor of aluminum. The inner conductor shall be annealed copper or copperclad aluminum. A thin adhesive coating will be applied overall. The dielectric shall consist of compartments of air and thermoplastic discs with adielectric sleeve overall. The discs are uniformly spaced and hold the inner conductor centered within the sleeve and the aluminum outer conductor. The discs are bonded to both the coated inner conductor and the dielectric sleeve. The outer conductor shall consist of an electrical grade welded aluminum tube drawn down in acompression fit over and bonded to the sleeve in order to prevent moisture migration. 1.2 Jacketed Aerial. A black medium density polyethylene jacket shall be extruded over the cable ( described in 1.1). When flooding is specified for aerial application, a rubber- modified asphalt flooding compound will be applied between the outer conductor and the jacket.
1.3 Jacketed for Direct Burial. A black medium density polyethylene jacket shall be extruded over the cable ( described in 1.1). A clear, viscous flooding compound shall be applied which will flow to fill any minor construction damage in the overlying jacket.
1.4 Figure 8 ( Messengered). The support wire and the coaxial cable (described in 1.1) shall be parallel and covered by a black high molecular weight polyethylene jacket to form afigure 8cross section. The support wire shall be either solid galvanized steel on the . 440", .500" sizes or aflooded stranded 7wire EHS galvanized steel.
1.5 GP Armored. The construction described in 1.3 shall be covered by a steel tape, corrugated and longitudinally folded around the jacket with positive overlap. Flooding compound shall be applied to cover both sides of the corrugated steel tape. A black medium density polyethylene jacket shall be applied over the flooded steel tape.
VRF-44
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
SUPER VU- FINDER ANTENNAS
te.eefe
·on the ground and then put up in one piece. Installation requires only positioning on the mast and tightening the nuts on the U- bolt assembly.
All Channel Model VU-937S
For deepest fringe reception areas
Features · Unsurpassed Color Reception ·Heavy- Gauge Aluminum Construction ·Quick, Easy Installation · Excellent Match Provides Highest Output ·Center- of- Gravity Balance ·Positive Locking Fold- Out Elements ·Coloraxial Convertible
SUPER VU- FINDER Antennas are an improved series of all- channel, 300- Ohm Coloraxial convertible units. Engineered for highest gain, reliability and ease of installation, each model provides premium reception of color and black and white TV signals on VHF and UHF channels as well as FM stereo.
All elements and corner reflectors fold out and positively snap into place. Once in place, they stay there ( special attention given in Paralog design to critical point- of- element support-- full 360° crimped support sleeve and lock-tight Paralog insulators used on all models). New U- bolt assembly positioned at the center of gravity grips and holds reliably. No twisting on the mast. Positive electrical contact prevents flashing and golden armour coating maintains good electrical contact through years of exposure to the elements.
UHF Breakaway Butterfly
UHF elements are designed for maximum gain on standard UHF channels. Breaking away the elements at the score line will extend the range for higher gain through 890 MHz.
4 4 4 1
Each SUPER VU- FINDER cascades a UHF Corner- Reflector Yagi section and VHF Paralog section for outstanding gain, high front- to- back ratios and excellent match.
The VHF and UHF sections are directly connected with apermanent die- stamped isolator to deliver maximum strength VHF and UHF to the downlead terminals. Excellent match 1VSWR: VHF 1.8:1, UHF 1.5:1 eliminates phase shift which adversely affects color reception.
The antennas are installer engineered for quick and reliable installation. The mechanical features include unitized construction, space-age insulators, snap- out corner reflector, rugged square boom, dual boom construction on larger models, new steel U- bolt assemble and heavy gauge aluminum snap- out elements. They only require 6 inches of vertical mast space for mounting.
Model VU-931S through 934S are shipped completely assembled and ready to install. Large models VU- 935S, 936S and 937S are assembled
SUPER VU- FINDER Specifications
25
15
45
60
70 43
UHF CHANNEL Norm& Response
Response w.th ElernenniPoken Off
FM Breakaway
Super VU- Finder Models except VU-931S, VU- 932S now come with FM blocking elements which reduce FM up to 12 dB. To receive FM at full gain, break off element at score mark. Antenna gain curves are shown for full FM gain ( block elements removed).
Power Zoom, Model VU -8PZ
Extends UHF section of Super VU- Finder antennas by 33.5 inches to provide additional UHF gain. Can be shipped UPS.
Model
Reception Area
Impedance (ohms)
Elements
VHF
UHF
D P0 P
BeamWidth (Degrees)
Front-toBack
Ratio (dB)
Boom Length (Inches)
Turning Radius (Inches)
Weight (Lbs.)
VU 931S Local
300
4 5 1 7 75 ° Lo
8 Lo
50
45 ° Hi
12 Hi
50 ° U
18 U
60
4.5
vu 932S Metropolitan
300
5 5 1 13 75 ° Lo
14 Lo
68",
67
55
41 ° Hi
16 Hi
45 ° U
20 U
VU 933S Suburban
300
7 6 1 19 72 ° Lo
16 Lo
102Yr
77
7
36 ° Hi
18 Hi
40 ° U
20 U
vu 9345 Suburban to Fringe
300
8 9 1 19 10 ° Lo
18 Lo
114
35 ° Hi
20 Hi
35 ° U
20 U
17
8
VI1 ,9355 Deep Fringe
300
9 11
I 31
3e68 ° Lo Hi
20 Lo 20 Hi
141Yr
90
12
30 ° U
22 U
VU.936S Deeper Fringe
300
9 15 1 35 65 ° Lo
21 Lo
171Yr
109
15
33 ° He
22 Hi
30 ° U
22 U
VU-937S Deepest Fringe
300
13 13
3e I 37
68 ° Lo Hi
23 Lo 23 Ho
-
30 ° U
24 U
'Without VU-8P2 When using VU-EIPZ add 8parasitic: to UHF element count.
194
113
18
D Driven Elements
Convert to
Coax With
Accepts Power Zoom
Comes with FS-I314.FM
STO-82
Yes
Yes
STO 82
Yes
Yes
STO -82
Yes
Yes
STO - 82
Yes
Yes
STO -82
Yes
Yes
S1082
Yes
Yes
STO-82
Yes
Yes
P = Parasitic Elements
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-45
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
MODEL J- 283X J- SERIES ALL- CHANNEL ANTENNA
ANTENNAS
VRF-46
For applications requiring a VHF broadband or an All- Channel
VHF/UHF rugged antenna, these All- Channel units are built to the same high standards as the cut- channel antennas. Log periodic bi-conical design gives performance exceeding the physical size of the antenna. The unique design gives flat response which is essential to the reception of quality color. Extra- heavy-duty construction; seamless chrome- aluminum tubing; ends sealed against entry of moisture; protected with a special anti- corrosion finish for all
weather- resistant installations.
SPECIFICATIONS-- J- 283X ANTENNA
Gam ( dB): Impedance: Front-to- Back Ratio: Beamwidth ( degrees): Elements: Boom Length (inches): Turning Radius ( inches): Weight ( lbs.): Mast Size (inches): Connector:
See Gain Curves 75 SI, 15:1 VSWR VHF: 18 dB; UHF: 20 dB VHF: ( Lo) 70°, ( Hi) 45 0;UHF: 55° 8V, 7U 90% 65 20 1% to 2 Ftype
Wind Load
85 mph
100 mpn
Thrust ( lbs )
Pin Ice
1/ 4 " Ice
90
152
122
208
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
DISH ANTENNAS
General Instrument's family of top quality dish antennas is available in 8', 10', 12' and 15' sizes. Assembly is easy and quick due to interchangeable dish sections and a feed assembly that requires no focal length adjustment. The deep dish design gives low noise temperature performance and the unique reflector manufacturing process assures maximum surface accuracy and efficiency.
SPECIFICATIONS
Model No.
Group
SA081 SA108 SA102
SA122 SA156
F/D Ratio
40 30 30 33 35
Midband Gain (dBil
38.1 40.3 40.3 42.2 44.2
-3dB Beam Width (Degrees)
2.2 1.8 1.8
1.5 1.2
-15dB Noise Temp
Beam
at 30°
Width
Elevation
(Degrees) (° K)
4.5
32
3.8
22
3.8
22
3.2
21
2.4
20
Nominal Diameter
8' 10' 10' 12' 15'
SATELLITE TV SYSTEM
MRS-2 SATELLITE RECEIVER
The General Instrument Model MRS- 2satellite receiver is acost effective realization of state-of-the-art block downconversion technology with today's most requested features.
FEATURES
· Detent tuning with illuminated channel indication · Built-in matrix/discrete stereo processor with mode select switch
and narrow/wide bandwidth
·Push button control for all popular polarization devices: " pulsed" rotating probes ( including skew control), ferromagnetic, pin- diode with interface
·Switchable ( 3/41 RF modulator included · FCC approved
·Built-in motor drive ( east- west) control switch with illuminated meter for indication of relative dish position
·Signal strength meter with ultra- sensitive dual mode to aid the dish alignment
SPECIFICATIONS
RF/IF Input Frequency: 950MHz to 1450MHz Input Impedance: 75 ohms Input Level: - 60 to - 20dBm Bandwidth: 500M Hz IF Frequency: 70MHz IF Bandwidth: 24MHz Image Rejection: 23dB nominal Threshold Level: Better than 8dB C/N VIDEO De- Emphasis: CC1R 405-1, 525 lines Frequency Response: to 4.2MHz
Dispersion Removal: 2IRE maximum Output Level: 1V p- p Output Impedance: 75 ohms Output Polarity: negative/positive sync
AUDIO Subcarriers lA or BI: 5.0-8.0MHz tunable Bandwidth: 240kHz wide/ 160kHz narrow
Mode Select: - Mono sub Aonly -Matrix stereo -Discrete stereo
Frequency Response: 50Hz to 15kHz De- Emphasis: 75 u.s. Output Level: 150mV/ 10K min. Harmonic Distortion: 1% maximum MODULATOR: Switchable for chan. 3/4
POWER SUPPLY: External power module: 115VAC, input; 18.5VAC, 750mA output
MECHANICAL: 2.5" x13.5" x10"
ANTENNA POLAR MOUNT
The polar mounts for General Instrument dish antennas are designed for ease of installation and operation as well as long life. The mount is used to aim the dish antenna at the individual satellites by rotation on a single axis.
They are available with amanually operated handcrank or in amotorized version which allows for remote control in aiming at satellites. The General Instrument polar mounts are precision instruments which, when properly installed, will travel through the complete polar arc with pinpoint accuracy.
SATELLITE SYSTEMS
8- Foot Systems -- 1Piece Aluminum Antenna
SATV081M2 System with 8- foot antenna, manually operated polar mount with pedestal base,
Price
feed with electronic polarizer, 120° LNB,
MRS- 2receiver
$2180.00
SATV081M2M System with 8- foot antenna, motoized
polar mount with pedestal base, feed with
electronic polarizer, 120° LNB, MRS 2
receiver
2620.00
10-Foot Systems -- 8Piece Steel Antenna
SATV108M2
System with 10- foot antenna, manually operated polar mount with pedestal base, feed with electronic polarizer, 120° LNB,
MRS- 2receiver
$2570.00
SATV108M2M System with 10- foot antenna, motorized
polar mount with pedestal base, feed with
electronic polarizer, 120° LNB, MRS- 2
receiver
2995.00
10-Foot Systems -- 2 Piece Aluminum Antenna
SATV102M2
System with 10-foot antenna, manually
operated polar mount with pedestal base,
feed with electronic polarizer, 123° LNB,
MRS- 2receiver
$3495.00
SATV102M2M System with 10- foot antenna, motorized
polar mount with pedestal base, feed with
electronic polarizer, 120° LNB, MRS- 2
receiver
3930.00
12 -Foot Systems -- 2 Piece Aluminum Antenna
SATV122M2 System with 12-foot antenna, manually
operated polar mount with pedestal base, feed with electronic polarizer, 120° LNB,
MRS- 2receiver
$3745.00
SATV122M2M System with 12- foot antenna, motorized
polar mount with pedestal base, feed with
electronic polarizer, 120° LNB, MRS- 2
receiver
4180.00
System Upgrades
100° LNB instead of 120°, add to system price
$95.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-47
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
SATELLITE RECEIVER
SATELLITE COMMANDER RECEIVER STCM-4
Features
· Block down conversion compatible ( 950-1450 MHz input) ·24 Channel frequency agile tuning with digital display ·Video clamping · Front panel bar graph signal strength meter ·6.8 MHz and 6.2 MHz audio subcarriers ·8dB threshold · 15V DC output through coaxial cable to power alow noise
amplifier/block converter (LNB) ·70 MHz receiver IF permits the use of readily available
terrestial interference filters
The Model STCM-4 Satellite Commander receiver is specifically designed for SMATV and CATV applications. It features frequency agile 24- Channel electronically synthesized tuning and adigital Channel display. Very low distortion and an 8.0 dB threshold are insured by eliminating amplitude noise from the signal through a limiter- discriminator. For a relative indication of the strength of the input signal, abar type meter is located on the frnnt panel. The receiver provides uC power for the LNB through the coaxial signal cable. Both 6.8 and 6.2 MHz audio subcarriers are standard. A single RF input is available for either horizontal or vertical polarization and tunes either the 12 odd or 12 even channels, depending on the polarization of the input.
MODEL STCM-4
Specifications for Satellite Receiver, Model STCM-4
24 Channel frequency agile for satellites transmitting at 3.7 to 4.2 GHz
RF INPUT
Input Frequency Input Level Input Connector Type Input Return Lass Local Oscillator Spurious
at Input Port Noise Figure Impedence
950 to 1450 MHz -30 to - 60 dBm Modified " F" Female 14 dB minimum
-80 dBm maximum 15dB maximum 75 Ohm
IF
IF Frequency IF Bandwidth Threshold Impedance
COMPOSITE BASEBAND OUTPUT
Output Voltage
Connector Type
70 MHz 27 MHz 8 dB 50 Ohm
IV p- p minimum up to 10 feet of coaxial cable, 1K Ohm load ROC Female
VIDEO CHAnACTERISTICS 1REF lui IKE.)
Video Level Control Range
Impedance Energy Dispersal Rejection
Gain/Frequency Response
Field Time Distortion Line Time Distortion Short Time Ringing
12T Pulse) Differential Gain
110-90% APL) Differential Phase
(10-901 APL)
Chrominance -Luminance Delay Inequality
De- emphasis
IV p- p ad3ustable c/-3 dB 75 Ohm unbalanced -30 dB minimum +1-0.6%. maximum 1% maximum 1% maximum
K Factor of 2% maximum +/-2% maximum
+/-1 Degree maximum
50 ns maximum CCIR NEC 405-1
A,010 CHARACTERISTICS
Sub- carrier Frequency Frequency Response
50 Hz to 15 KHz Output Level Impedance Harmonic Distortion De- emphasis
iowER CHARACTERISTICS
i.ower ,%, nsumq'tton
Both 6.8 MHz and 6.2 MHz
+/- 0.5 dB 0 dBm at 1 KHz adjustable 600 Ohm balanced 1% maximum 75 usec
115 Vac ./- 10%, GO Hz ·/- 3Hz 50 Watts maximum
MF-:HANICAI. CUARACTERIST1CS Size Weight
19" W x 13" D x 3.5" H (48.1 cm x 33.0 cm x 8.9 cm)
Net. 11.5 lbs.
VRF-48
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
rgetlIiIr·
r
,
'eguep,,e,
.11111110l0 IOC TIPONE T 1000
MODEL 1000 BROADBAND DATA MODEM Features ·Frequency- Agile Point-to- Point Modem ·16 Data Rates: From 110 BPS to 19.2 KBPS ·50 kHz per Data Channel ·Sensitivity of - 16 dBmV ± 10 dB ·Synchronous or Asynchronous
The Metronet 1000 Broadband Data Modem is designed to interconnect computers and computer terminal devices over acoaxial cable network. Units are available for either full- duplex or half-duplex operation. The modem interfaces with user devices at any of 16 data rates, from 110 BPS to 19.2 KBPS, in either the synchronous or asynchronous mode. Metronet 1000 is also available for single or dual cable operation. With the dual cable operation, a second R.F. connector is provided for the dual cable and the diplex filter is not used. A choice of 156.25 MHz or 192.25 MHz
offset between send and receive channels is available with either the single or dual cable option.
The modem is frequency-agile through dip-switch setting. Up to 102* modems can operate in full- duplex mode, and 204* modems in half- duplex mode, on a6MHz TV channel pair. A high receive- level sensitivity permits operation at relatively low signal levels. This, coupled with a narrow bandwidth of 50 kHz per data channel, allows serving a large number user without system overload. No other point-to-point modem has this narrow bandwidth capability.
The Metronet 1000 Modem is part of General Instrument's family of communication products. It is designed by broadband communications experts to provide you with the best in technology and performance for your network needs.
MODEL 1600 BROADBAND T-1 MODEM Features ·T-1 Point- to- Point Modem ·Voice Trunking Applications ·High Speed Data Communication ·Sensitivity of 0dBmV ± 10 dB · Synchrono...
The Metronet 1600 Broadband T-1 Modem is designed to provide high speed ( 1.544 MBPS) for voice trunking ant' high speed data transfer. All units are capable of full- duplex operation and are used for synchronous transmission. This modem is used in point-to-point applications and has DS- 1digital interface.
The modem has abandwidth of 3MHz per carrier and is capable of full- duplex communication within a 6 MHz channel pair. The unit features a wide variety of
input/output channel pairs which allow it to be used with subsplit, midsplit or highsplit systems. It can also be used on single or dual cable systems. With the dual cable option, asecond R.F. connector is provided for the dual cable and the diplex filter is not used. The offset of 156.25 MHz or 192.25 MHz between send and receive channels is available with either single or dual cable option.
The Metronet 1600 Modem is part of General Instrument's family of communication products. It is designed by broadband communications experts to provide you with the best in technology and performance for your network needs.
*When used with the Metronet 8000 Transverter, which provides aguard band at each edge of the TV channel, to ensure compatibility with video signals on the same cable.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-49
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIP.
MODEL 8000 RF FREQUENCY TRANSVERTER Features ·Six MHz Block Translation ·Compatible with Sub- Split, Mid- Split, High- Split and
Dual Cable Systems ·Works with all Metronet Modems ·Compact Unit Designed for Rack Mounting
The Metronet 8000 R.F. Frequency Transverter is a frequency translator designed to convert, with proper gain, the low-frequency upstream TV channels to the high-
frequency downstream TV channels. The primary application for the transverter is with Metronet Broadband Data Modems, to allow for both upstream and downstream transmission of data.
The standard input ranges of the transverter are channels T-7 to 2A ( 5.75 to 59.75 MHz) and channels 60-16 ( 108 to
136 MHz). The output range is offset by either 156.25 MHz or 192.25 MHz to accommodate sub-split, mid-split or high- split systems. The standard output ranges for a 156.25 MHz offset are channels 21 to 13 ( 162 to 215 MHz). The standard output ranges for a 192.25 MHz offset are channels 11 to 28 ( 198 to 252 MHz) and channels 37 to 41 (300 to 330 MHz).
Metronet 8000 is suitable for single or dual cable operation. Two R.F. connectors are provided. For single cable operation, the headend diplex filter can be used to separate the forward and reverse signals.
The Metronet 8000 is part of General Instrument's family of communication products. It is designed by broadband communications experts to provide you with the best technology and performance for your network needs.
MODEL 9000 TRANSVERTER REDUNDANCY SWITCH
Features ·Automatic or Manual Transverter Switching ·Compatible with Sub- Split, Mid- Split, High- Split and
Dual Cable Systems ·Built- In Visual Alarm Indicators ·Contacts for External Alarm Indicator ·Compact Unit Designed for Rack Mounting
The Metronet 9000 redundancy switch provides automatic switching from the primary to abackup M8000 frequency transverter. If the transverter output level falls below an established threshold due to a degradation in gain or frequency drift, the unit will switch to the backup
transverter and provide visual indication of failure. In addition, contacts are provided for activation of external
devices or alarms.
VRF-50
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV REMOTE CONTROLLER
LCC-91 TV Remote Controller
For Homes Without Cable TV
FEATURES · Remote control lets you change television channels from the
comfort of your chair. ·Turn your TV set on and off -- even fine tune the pic:ure-- without
touching the dial. · Up to 91 channel capacity, approved by the F.C.C., and U.L. · Eliminates wear and tear on your TV's tuner due to its advanced
microprocessor technology. 4 Wireless hand controller switches stations. · Lighted digital display on converter indicates the channel you're
tuned to. ·Simple do-it-yourself installation in minutes. ·Works with virtually all TV models. Receives VHF arid UHF signals
from aTV antenna.
TV Remote Controller Receiver Unit
Power Source Power Consumption Channel Covera_e Controls
Antenna input Impedance Output Impedance to TV Sell Output Channels Components
LED Display height Weight Dimensions Gain jAGC attack point 3d6m)
AC 120V 60 Hz
14W
VHF 2-13. UHF 14.83. Cable midband A.I
Search up/down. 90.1 on/Oit Switch. Irne tunir
VHF. UHF. Modband
300- ohms balanced
75 ohms
Channel 3or 4. adjustable by end user
9IC s. 25 Transistors. 32 Diodes. 2LED s IPhoto Diode
560
4lbs 4oz
9./2
x21/4 is x
VHF 748 min/2108 can UHF 1048 min/25a max Mrdband 008 mlniludp me,
Handheld Transmitter
Power Source Controls
211.rieºlOpera5on _Weight Ormenslors
One 9V Transistor Battery Power on/ott switch, direct channel number selection search up/down, tile _tur
20 feet or more
5oz including battery 3w,l 1'1,5 d
LCC-58 TV Remote Controller
For Homes With Cable TV
(Formerly Model DRX-105)
FEATURES · Remote control lets you change television channels from the
comfort of your chair. ·Turn your TV set on and off -- even fine tune the picture-- without
touching the dial. · Up to 58 channel capacity, approved by the F.C.C., U.L.
and C.S.A. · Saves wear and tear on your TV's tuner due to its advanced micro-
processor technology. ·Wireless hand controller switches channels. · Lighted digital display on the converter indicates the channel you're
tuned to. ·Rich wood- grain finish looks attractive in any room's decor. · Simple do-it-yourself installation in minutes. ·Works with all TV models and compatible with virtually all cable
systems.
TV Remote Controller Receiver Unit
Power Source Power Consumption Channel Coverage
Frequency Assignments Controls Input Impedance Output Impedance ( to TV Set) Output Channels Components LED Display Height Weight Dimensions Gain
AC 120V, 60 Hz
16W
VHF ( low) VHF ( high) Midband Superband Hyperband Extended
54-88MHz 174-216MHz 120-174MHz 216-300M Hz 300-40241Hz
72-120MHz
Channels 2-6 Channels 7-13 Channels 14-22 Channels 23-36 Channels 37-53 Channels 54-61
Standard. IRC. HRC switchable by user
Search up/down, power on/off switch. fine tuning
75 ohms
75 ohms
2or 3 ( Specify channel when ordering.)
7IC's, 14 Transistors, 23 Diodes, 2LED's, 1Photo Diode
.560"
4lbs . 4oz.
91/ 2 "w x21/ 4 "h x81/ 4 "d
id8 min.. 7013 max
Handheld Transmitter
Power Source Controls
Range of Operation Weight Dimensions
One 9V Transistor Battery Power on/off switch, direct channel number selection, search up/down, fine tuning_
20 feet or more
5Oz. including battery 3-wx 1-hx5-d
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-51
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIP.
DE-SNOWER PREAMPLIFIERS
VHR-TV/FM BROADBAND MODEL DSB-587 75- OHM Jerrold's DSB-587 is ahigh output VHF preamplifier with the added feature of abuilt-in turnable FM trap. Gain: 28 dB. Output capability at +40 dBmV per channel for 7channels at -46 dB cross- modulation, is sufficient to drive asmall distribution system. The FM trap may be tuned to insert 10 dB of attenuation on aband 1.25 MHz wide within the FM band. If there is no strong FM band. Uses remote power supply, Model 587. Lightning protected. 75- ohm input. Four F-659 connectors supplied.
UHF- TV BROADBAND MODEL DSU-I1 75- OHM
Jerrold Model DSU-I1 is a high-gain, low- noise, 75-ohm UHF- TV preamplifier. The use of unique stripline constructed transistors with low radial lead inductance optimizes noise figure over the UHF band. Housed in arugged mast mounting aluminum casting, the preamplifier is ready for immediate installation.An indoor mounting power supply DSU-PS is also supplied. The 75-ohm input impedance makes this unit aperfect match to the J-275 antenna for system applications. Four F-659 connectors supplied.
VHF-TV/FM SINGLE CHANNEL DSS-SERIES 75- OHM The " De-Snower" DSS-Series is Jerrold's highest gain line of single- channel preamplifier systems, Models DSS-2 through DSS-13 for VHF television channels, and Model DSS-FM for the full FM radio band. These systems are used with cut- to- channel antennas such as Jerrold J-55 and J- 105- Series Ruggedized Antennas for large MATV systems in fringe to extreme fringe locations. The preamplifier is enclosed in aweatherproof aluminum housing which has auniversal bracket for either mast or indoor mounting. When ordering, specify channel number or FM.
Models
Frequency Range (MHz)
Cain (dB)
Noise Figure (dB)
Frequency Response
(dB)
Max. Output Each Channel
(dBmV)
Minimum Input
(for 30 dB C/N
Impedance
in dBmV)
(All Terminals) Match (dB)
Power Supply Model
NMI! Consumption
Watts
DSB -587
54-216
28
CISS-1·1
TV: 6
30
FM :20
30
OSU II
470-800
26
800-890
23
·Specify TV channel number or FM .
6.5 (10) 6.0 (Hi)
4.0 4.5
470: 6.5 800: 7.0 890: 7.5
±-.75 ±-.75 ±-1.25
+40 (7ch. --46 dB Xmod)
+54 (5% sync clip) -1-45 (3ch. 3rd
order --40)
+40 (3 ch. --46 dB Xmod)
--22.5 ( lo) --23 ( hl)
--25
--22
75
12
587
5
75
In: 7
587
5
Out: 10
75
6
OSU -PS
5
S NGLE CHANNEL CONVERTERS VHF- TV TO VHF- TV CONVERTERS SCON-Series Now Including Sub- VHF to Midband
·Zener-regulated full- wave power supply ·Crystal- controlled oscillator with input buffer circuit
· Double conversion compatibility
Jerrold SCON-Series are VHF- to- VHF converters and are solid-state, crystalcontrolled modular units. The accompanying chart indicates possible conversions. Standard SCON's comprise an oscillator- mixer assembly with one input and output filter. Filters IFLC or FHC) are factory tuned for specified channels. SCON Sub- toMid comprises input filter, oscillator- mixer- assembly and outboard filter Model PBFMid. All filters are factory tuned to channels specified. Ordering information:
Specify model, then channel conversions. For example: T8to C should read SCON Sub- to- Mid T8- C.
Specifications
tH8v.Hcy Stab tr
C^vnn,
-nt
058
, n
ng tHH.8 tan,
UN? : 4to 83 to VHF 2 t, 11
¡Table of Prohibited Conversions
UHF
TO
VHF
19
6
22 23 24 25 52 53 81 82 83
7
25 26 27 28 56 57
8
28 29 30 31 60 61
9
16 31 32 33 34 64 65
10
34 35 36 37 68 69
II
21 37 38 39 40 72 73
12
40 41 42 43 76 77 78
13
VRF-52
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (6021294-1600
CORP.
TV SIGNAL MODULATOR
11/0015101. MOCallIktO·
UNI -MOD II MODEL UMAUDIO- VIDEO MODULATOR
· Monochrome or Color Operation
· Front Panel Control and Metering of Aural and Visual Modulation
·Adjacent Channel Operation Made Possible by Unique Helical Resonator Bandpass Filter
·Crystal Controlled Visual Carrier ·4.5 MHz Aural Offset Automatic Frequency Controlled with Inte-
grated Circuitry
· Loop Thru
Jerrold's Uni -Mod Modulator Model UM-* is an audio- video unit
designed for adjacent channel operation in MATV and CCTV sys-
tems. The unit modulates separate RF carriers with video and audio
program information, then combines and filters the signals to con-
form with a standard TV channel format. Uni -Mods are available
with outputs on sub- channels T-8 thru T-13, standard VHF- TV chan-
nels 2thru 13 and Mid- Band Channels A thru I. Output level is suf-
ficient to drive a medium size distribution system directly and
sharp skirt filtering allows mixing with off- the- air channels. ( See the
mixing diagram.) Flat video response and low differential phase and
gain specifications give the Uni -Mod excellent video performance.
Meter face simplicity allows even the non- technical operator to set up
and produce quality pictures.
*Specify TV channel.
Video
Input Impedance Input Type Input Level
Frequency Response Differential Gain Differential Phase Metering Control
75 ohms, VSVVR: 1.5:1 ( 14 dB return loss).
Composite video, sync negative 0.5 V P-P ( for 87.5% modulation) + /- 0.5 dB to 4.2 MHz 2 dB at 3.58 MHz, full modulation
5° at 3.58 MHz, full modulation Peak depth of Modulation Depth of Modulation
Audio Input Impedance Input Type Input Level Frequency Response
Harmonic Distortion Metering Control
600 ohms, unbalanced Baseband audio
50 mV RMS 1-35 dBm) for full deviation 100 Hz to 15 kHz, + /- 1dB to std. 75 usec. pre- emphasis
3% Deviation Amount of Deviation
RF Output Impedance Output Level
Visual Carrier
Aural Carrier Output Frequency
Visual Carrier
Aural Carrier
Output Control Range Spurious Output
Radiation
General lemperature Range Power Requirements Dimensions
75 ohms, VSWR: 1.5:1 114 dB return loss)
+62 dBmV, adjustable - standard VHF +40 dBmV, sub and mid VHF 10 to 15* dB below visual, adjustable
VHF channel 12-13, T8-713 and A- Icrystal controlled, . 005%) 4.5 MHz above visual carrier, AFC- controlled within + /- 3 kHz 10 dB - 60 dB, except lower adjacent channel, which is - 52 dB - 80 dB, meets FCC radiation requirements 76.605 ( a) 12 Aural carrier factory- set for 15 dB below visual.
0°C 132 °F) to 50°C ( 122°F) 117 V, 60 Hz, 17 W 19" W x31/ 4 " H x71/ 4 " D
TELEVISION DEMODULATOR, MODEL DM- 283A FOR MATV, CCTV AND CATV APPLICATIONS · All Channel
·Push Button Channel Selection
·Quality Color Et Black Et White Signals
· Front Panel LED Indicators
·Automatic Noise Cancellation ( ANC)
· AFT
·AGC
The Television Demodulator, Model DM- 283A, provides quality baseband video and audio signals from any selected TV channel ( 2to 83).
The DM- 283A offers high video output level capability. AFT, AGC, and ANC features assure excellent output signals under awide range of operating conditions and input levels.
Front panel controls include push button express tuning and illuminated on- off power and AFT switches. LED indicators display status of AFT and power functions.
DM- 283A SPECIFICATIONS
Circuitry Design Channel Selection
AFT
AGC ANC Noise Figure Minimum Input Level Antenna Inputs Color Video Quality Video IF Characteristics
IF Stages Audio Outputs ( Dual) Video Outputs ( Dual) Power Circuit Protection
Power Supplies Cabinet Construction
Dimensions Weight
100% Solid State Push button express tuning. varactor type system, preset fine tuning with band select. VHF channels 2-13, UHF channels 14-83 Automatic Fine Tuning with defeat switch and precise tracking across all 83 channels Automatic Gain Control, Amplified Type Automatic Noise Cancellation VHF: Better than 6dB UHF: Better than 12.5 dB -36 dBmV 75 Ohm. F-59 Connectors Low Chrominance to Luminance Differential Gain and Phase Bandwidth 3.8 MHz at - 6dB: Adjacent Channel Rejection: Picture. 50 dB: Sound, 60 dB SAW filter '' IF' with IC amplifier 600 Ohms at 0dBm, unbalanced, 0.25V P- PMax. 1.0V P- PAdjustable. into 75- Ohm Load, Negative Sync. 120 VAC, 60 Hz. approx 20W Dissipation Dual buffered and short circuit protected video, audio and 4.5 MHz aural outputs Regulated power supplies Baked light gray finish with silk screened black anodized recessed control panel 3-1/2"H x19"W x13"D ( rack mountable) 14 lbs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-53
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
411
·
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
·
"
fre.011011L
1592C
1596C
SWS-2UV
Model 1592C VHF Splitter, 2-Way
A convenient- size, two-way splitter for use in systems requiring afrequency range of 5-300 MHz. Shipped bulk, less connectors.
Models 1596C and 1596CDP UHF/VHF Splitter, 2- Way
Model 1596C is a hybrid, two-way splitter with extended bandpass from 5-890 MHz. This 75- ohm splitter uses precision printed circuits, packaged in azinc cast housing. The housing provides better than 80 dB shielding. Model 1596C is bulk packed, less connectors. Model 1596CDP is display packaged with three F-659 connectors.
Model SWS-2 VHF Splitter, 2-Way
Two-way indoor/outdoor hybrid splitter/combiner, 5-400 MHz equipped with axial ( face- mounted) F- type fittings for wall mounting. Shipped bulk, less connectors.
Model SWS-2UV
UHF/VHF Splitter, 2-Way Same as above, except 5-890 bandwidth.
Model 1593C VHF Splitter, 3-Way
Three-way indoor/outdoor hybrid splitter / combiner with grounding screw, 5-400 MHz. Equipped with radial ( side- mounted) F- type fittings
for surface mounting. Shipped bulk, less connectors.
--. --......--....---
MODEL NUMBER
NO OF OUTPUTS
BANDWIDTH , MHZ ,
MAX INSERTION
VHF
lOSS 10131
uriF
1502C 2
5 300 3 5 N A
MIN ISOLATION BE1WEEN OUTPUTS ' OB
VHF
20 -
UHFN A
MIN RETURN
VHF
LOSS AB1
,,HF
20 N A
SHIELDING ( OBI
80
Sr,PeING WE G. , .07
6
$9.55
1590C 2
5 890 3 5 38
-2'08
19 I7
80
e
$4.15
SWS-2 2
5 400 3 5 N.A 30 _ N,A 20 NA 80
4
1593C
1594C
1597B
Model 1594C VHF Splitter, 4-Way
Same as above, except 4- way.
SWS-4
Model SWS-4 VHF Splitter, 4- Way
Four-way indoor/outdoor hybrid splitter / combiner, 5-400 MHz. Equipped with axial F- typed fittings for wall mounting. Shipped bulk,
less connectors.
Model SWS-4UV UHF/VHF Splitter, 4-Way Same as above, except 5-890 bandwidth.
Models 1597B, 1597BDP UHF/VHF Hybrid Splitter, 4-Way
Model 1597B is a75- ohm, four-way UHF/VHF hybrid splitter with subchannel capability. The hybrid network is constructed on a printed circuit board which is mounted in a zinc cast housing. Shielding is better than 80 dB.
The unit is designed for mixing four separate inputs to obtain a common output or splitting a common input into four separate outputs. It is for indoor surface mounting. Model 1597BDP is display packed with five F-659 connectors.
$5.20
$10.20
SWS-2UV
1593C
2
5890 3 5
-- -- 40
3
5.400
- IAT 3--5-2-Al 7- 0 N, A
20
30
le
NA
17
20
17
NA
80
80
A
3
$7.63
1594C 4
5 400 --70- --
N'A 30 N'A 20 N'A
80 4
$16.15
1597B 4
5 890 7 0 84 20 18 13 4
BO e
$9.66
$8.65
SWS.4 4
5 400 70
-- N-- ' A
SW5.4UV A
5890 7 2 80
-- 30- -- NA
T.--
20
N'A
80
6
-- 2-0 18 13 14
80 6
Model LGB-4
Grounding Block
Jerrold Model LGB-4 is a grounding block assembly for positive
grounding of lead-in cable shield. The LGB-4 can be mounted in any
position on aflat surface, indoors, or outdoors; two wood screws are supplied for this purpose. F- 61A connectors.
The ground connection is made with a heavy gauge copper wire
connected to agrounding rod or to anearby cold water pipe.
$1.63
Model T-6000 ei Jerrold All- Channel Matching Transformers
Model T-6000 matching transformer provides excellent balance ( 40
dB, VHF) and is ideal for TV set mounting in all signal areas. The T-6000 matches 75- ohm coaxial cable to a300- ohm TV set and is a must for reducing local pickup ( ghosts) in MATV systems. It also incorporates an exclusive Jerrold fitting to accept our Snap- fit SF- 59
cable connector, designed to prevent damage where sets are moved frequently. Model T-6000 is bulk- packed 25 per carton with instruc-
tions, less connectors.
$1.66
Model T-6000DP
Same as T-6000 except individually display card packaged, with 12
display cards per shipping carton. Each display card contains aT-6000
transformer, F-659 connector, 1082 ferrule, and ET- 659 expansion
tool.
$2.16
Model T-6789 in-All- Channel Matching Transformer
Model T-6789 75/300- ohm matching transformer incorporates
superior T-6000 performance into an indoor/outdoor design, readily
adaptable to either an outdoor antenna or aTV set. Design improvements include atighter coaxial fitting seal, soldered spade- tip lugs for better connection, and twinlead conductor which resists bending or
twisting to protect UHF signals. Model T-6789 is bulk- packed 25 per
carton with instructions, less connectors.
$4.18
Model T-6789DP
Same as T-6789, except individually display card packaged ( 12 cards
per carton) with F-659 connector, 1082 ferrule, ET- 659 expansion tool,
plastic strap, and weatherboot.
$5.69
VRF-54
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
INTERNAL DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER
'
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIP.
· Ideal as MATV Distribution Amplifier with CATV Feed ·Heat- Dissipating Housing Design · Input/Output Test Points The 3770 P- P Push-pull design provides suppression of second order harmonics (- 65 dB). Triple beat suppression is -70 dB. Slope is variable, 0 to 8 dB.
MODEL 3455 VHF/FM AMPLIFIER
MODEL IDA -45 35- CHANNEL, PUSH-PULL INTERNAL DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER, 2-WAY CAPABLE
FEATURES · Die-cast aluminum housing ·Radiation- shielded design · Input/output connectors compatible with CATV cables ·Surge- protected input terminal · Meets or exceeds FCC technical requirements ( Part 761 · Fully adaptable to two- say communications ·Operates with any CATV service -- flat, block tilt or sloped · Compatible CATV/MATV interface · Push-pull amplifier design for up to 35- channel service · Integrated circuit design
FEATURES
· Solid State, Low Noise · High Output Capability · Diode Lightning Protection
·Tunable FM Trap Jerrold's 3455 Gibraltar is ahigh gain ( 30 dB) broadband amplifier for medium-sized distribution systems. Accepts combined Hi Band and Lo Band VHF inputs and includes separate 10 dB gain controls for the Hi and Lo Bands.
Jerrold Model IDA -45 Internal Distribution Amplifier is aprofessional quality product meeting the most exacting specifications for RF distribution. Fully solid-state including integrated circuits, two-way capable with high gain, ultralinear broadband characteristics and excellent shielding, the IDA -45 is designed to interface CATV systems and internal distribution systems. However, input to the amplifier may also be from antennas or local origination. The amplifier is housed in a maximum heat dissipative, rugged, die-cast aluminum housing which provides shielding of 90 dB. Circuit design is based on the push-pull principle providing for amplification of up to 35 channels.
Gain and slope controls are accessible with the removal of the top cover. The amplifier provides the necessary plugs and adapters to accet awide range of accessories including:
· SEE equalizers to compensate for cable tilt proceeding the amplifier.
·JXP attenuators to compensate for excessive input signal level.
· IOC plug-in automatic overload control to compensate for input sig-
nal level fluctuations. ·IDF plug-in sub- channel splitting filters fro two-way system appli-
cations. · IRA plug-in sub- channel return amplifier for 5to 30 MHz return sig-
nal amplification.
GIBRALTAR BROADBAND AMPLIFIERS
MODEL 3770 P- P WIDE BAND VHF PUSH-PULL AMPLIFIER
FEATURES
·Wide Band ( 40-300 MHz)
(216 to
· Includes Entire Mid- Band ( 120-174 MHz) and Super Band
300 MHz)
·Push- Pull Design for 30- Channel Operation
MODEL 3880 VHF/FM AMPLIFIER
FEATURES ·Solid- State, Low Noise · High Output Capability · Diode Lightning Protection ·Tunable FM Trap
The Jerrold Model 3880 is asuper- high gain ( 55 dB) and output + 60 dBmV) VHF-TV/FM, split- band, solid-state amplifier for use in large Master Antenna TV distribution systems.
MODEL 3662 VHF/FM BROADBAND AMPLIFIER WITH AUTOMATIC OVERLOAD CONTROL
FEATURES ·Automatic Control for Input Variations of Up to 20 dB · Separate Lo and Hi Band Control ·Operates at Full Output Rating ·Switch Selectable AOC or MAN Operation · Lightning Protected · Universal Rack or Surface Mounting Bracket
Jerrold Model 3662 is the only broadband MATV amplifier with output signal levels automatically controlled. This exclusive AOC feature permits use of the full output capability of a broadband amplifier without fear of overload due to input signal fluctuations. Prevents overloading the amplifier when input levels increase. Increases amplifier gain to compensate for signal fades. Prevents system crossmodulation even if only one channel level increases or fades.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-55
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
Model DC-( 1B Directional Couplers
Models DC- 8B, DC- 12B and DC- 16B are aseries of extended bandwidth directional couplers encased in radiation- proof cast housings.
DC- 12B and DC- 16B are very efficient, back- matched and compact directional couplers covering the entire spectrum from 5to 806 MHz.
Model DC- 8B fully covers the frequency range 5 to 300 MHz with reduced performance in the UHF range above 300 MHz. Three F-659's
are supplied. Specifications -- DC- 1113 Series
$22.40 ea.
Model Passband ( MHz) Insertion Loss ( dB)
Tap Loss ( dB)
Isolation ( dB)
Match ( all terminals dB) Radiation ( dB)
DC- 88 5,300
1 1
8 5 20
22
-80
DC- 12B
5-806
VHF 0 7
UHF 09
VHF 12 5 UHF 120
VHF 30 UHF 24
VHF 20 UHF 18
--80
DC- 168
5-806 VHF 0.6 UHF 0.8
VHF 16 2 UHF 155
VHF 35 UHF 26 VHF 20 UHF. 18
--80
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
Model DCT1-( Directional Coupler Taps UHF/VHF
The DCT1-1 Iseries of in line taps are housed in compact aluminum
die castings and are all channel 15-890 MHz) units. They are surface
mounted directional coupler taps available in 5values of isolation and
are designed for indoor use.
Electrical Specifications -- DCT1 Series
$6.03 ea.
Model
Frequency Range
isolation In to Tap 5-400 MHz
400-890 MHz
Isolation Out to Tap 5-400 MHz
400-890 MHz
insertion Loss ( max) 5-400 MHz
400-890 MHz
Return Loss All Ports 175 )
DCT1-10
DCT1-14
DCT1-19
DCT1-24
DCT1-30
5890 MHi 5 890 MFir 5890 MR/ 5-890 MR/ 5-890 MR/
10 dB z ' 140 8 z 1 19 dB z 1 24 dB -1- 1 30 dB , 1
> 30 cB > 22 dB
> -i2, dB >26 dB
>39 dB >31 dB
>44 dB >36 clB
>46 dB >38 dB
1 cB 2'dB
06dB 14dB
0 4 dB 12dB
04 dB 12dB
04dB 12dB
>·:. dB
>14 dB
>14 dB
>14 dB
>14 dB
Model DCT4-( Directional Coupler Taps UHF/VHF, 4-Way
Features · Directional Coupler Design ·Two- Way Compatible ·5Values of Isolation
· Low Insertion Loss ·CATV Compatibility · UHF Capability to 806 MHz ·Completely Shielded --
more than 80 dB · Back Matched
·AC Isolation
DCT4 Series of Directional Coupler Taps are broadband 15-806 MHz)
low- loss, high isolation units designed for indoor use. Five models are available providing average attenuation values of 10, 14, 19, 24 and 30 dB. DCT-4's do not pass AC or DC power. The housing is a die cast alloy housing which provides aminimum of 80 dB RF shielding. The housing has a chromate conversion finish which deters Galvanic corrosion. " F" fittings are not supplied. DCTs are designed for surface
mounting.
Specifications -- DCT4 Series
$29.40 ea.
Model
Frequency Range ( MHz)
Tap Attenuation 101
5-300 MHz 470-806 MHz
insertion L055 (OBI 5-300 MHz 470-806 MHz
Match ( dB) 5-300 MHz 470-806 MHz
isolation ( OBI Tap to Out 5-300 MHz Between 5-300 MHz Outlets 470-806 MHz
Shielding OBI
Weight ( oz I
Dimensions
DCT4-10 5-806
DCT4-14 5-806
DCT4-19 5-806
OCT4-24 5-806
DCT4-30 5-806
9 3-11 3 12 7-14 7 18 0-20 0 23 0-25 0 29.0-31.5 9 7-12 4 12 4-15 4 18 0-21 0 22 0-26 0 24 0-30 0
37 4 4
1 9 3 2
09 1 7
07 1 2
05 1 2
13-17 14
14-16 14
14-17 14
14-17 14
14-17 14
30
26
30
35
44
30
30
30
30
30
15
15
15
15
15
80
80
80
80
80
i
7
7
7
7
Units Identical in sze. 3',. x27/8 x1... (8 26 cm x730 cm x381 cm)
Model DFT-Series Directional Coupler Flush Tap
DFT taps surpass the most stringent requirements of internal distribution systems in buildings, whether equipped with a CATV feed of
MATV headend. For CATV internal distribution systems, DFTs are compatible with 30- channel, 2- way service and surpass cable TV technical requirements. For MATV, the DFT-Series is recommended for both VHF and VHF- UHF distribution.
The printed board directional coupler circuitry used in the DFT provides uniform tap isolation 17 dB, 13 dB, 19 dB, 25 dB, 31 dB) with directivity of 16 dB from 5to 300 MHz. Therefore minimum isolation between outlets is 30 dB 12 xtap isolation + 16 dB directivity). The 13, 19, and 31 dB taps are also recommended for all- channel MATV
systems with typical directivity of 10 dB to 806 MHz.
The DFT installs easily in any standard single gang outlet box ( 2" minimum deptn recommended), with CAC- 59 or -6 coaxial cable.
Where conduit and box size permit, CAC- 11 may be used. May be used with standard electrical wall outlet plate or order matching ivory cover plate 1213-353) separately. The output "F" connector accepts regular " F" or snap- fit " SF" cable connectors ( not supplied).
Specifications -- DFT Series
$ 12.46 ea.
Speuhcalsons Peu,, ,,y Bee sotanun 5 300 MHz
- 30C MHz -1 806 6111/
.806 MH1 " lie. 1.1., s', -,
OFT- 7 5-300
7 5 '1 N A h A
OFT- 13 5-806
14 3
OFT- 19 5-806
19 2
OFT- 25 OFT·31 5-806 5-806 25 5 31 0
08
05
05
13 0
17 5
235
1 0
07
07
18 00 n11 InItirli an rnodA18
05 280 07
14 dB nu ' mum all models
80 OB m.n.m.n, 0 mooes
30 oB nunenun, any oronnanon
VRF-56
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION 4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DEMODULATOR TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIP.
-
e: soto SW , AG < N ,G .
04/0681 .
e
JHPM-Series 2- Volt Output
770.2.-· 12' ,01.10 212.3i AGC 14101. 1702232 2·61·11310
° F lee
TH PM- Series, 4- Volt Output
PREPACKAGED COMMANDER FEADENDS FEATURES ·Includes all Commander units needed to provide the channel
carriage you specify ·Commander units, combining devices, and accessories at your
headend site installed in racks and fully wired ·Headend completely engineered, assembled, and tested to
function as a reliable system ·Simplifies installing top quality headends, from the most basic to
the most complex
All you need do to your custom headend system is provide Jerrold with a listing of channel carriage. Jerrold will design your system, considering any special functions such as channel switching, and carry the design through to installation of equipment in open frame relay racks, complete wiring of the equipment, and thorough system testing. If you prefer, units can be installed in closed cabinets instead of relay racks.
Each item of Jerrold equipment first passes through its quality control cycle to assure that it meets its published specifications. After system assembly, measurements of the following parameters are made on each channel at the combined output: spurious output level, frequency accuracy of video carriers, video carrier-to- noise ratio, video passband flatness, and system output return loss. The combined system output level is also set at this time.
Your custom headend will be fully documented with "as- built" wiring and racking diagrams, and with the results of the system tests. Talk to your Jerrold representative about price and delivery.
le4la ià us, SOU0 ere/
-··
roe POWER_Aldne"
e
UH PM- Series, 4- Volt Output
SINGLE CHANNEL AGC Amplifiers for VHF- TV, UHF- TV and FMI
·Stable High Output ·Automatic Gain Control ·Matched Input and Output ·High Gain ·UL Listing ·Reversible Mounting Brackets
Jerrold's complete line of single- channel AGC amplifiers for VHF- TV, UHF- TV and the FM band comprises the JHPM, THPM and UHPM-Series: The JHPM-Series provides arated 2- volt output ( + 66 dBmV) on any specified VHF channel ( 2through 13) or + 60 dBmV for each of three FM channels. A full 4- volt output 1+ 72 dBmV) is supplied or any specified VHF channel ( 2 through 13) ( also mid- band channel D) by the THPM-Series, or + 60 dBmV for each of three FM channels. The UHPM-THPM-Series, or + 60 dBmV for each of three FM channels. The UHPM-Series provides a full 4- volt output (+ 72 dBmV) on a specified standard UHF channel ( 14-70)
Specifications - Single Channel Amplifiers
C111111. 1121.010714 indent..
MON, CAP·1111127 VV. 22 02 11a, OM 10·2·221.1 MI. ell OnIef DM, -.· a re., »TIT mme IV. 24C1
22111· 722.1 .12. 'Tv. Wm.»,
ACC 11.· 311.4.1
1.21111. 211211111,1212
622220.1101
·121011,2212on le. In.. 0211121 1,2·1·0126.I, 021. 1,211.C.2.
RIC01,11.12.22 C01001 Oftwalpe
Se« Canoresuon 9.110 UM lomer 66p.m inlenne6
ornetK1
211. 224.011 WI... Pro./
Rut CoadIldoe, nund Gaoler - 10410.
Cola 323t.ior - 17 041,
·77 2 11
6166,1 0 211,
114 IOW/ 12 2 VI
Id lo, 64 11.2
Se de ou II
63 411. 1111220111.
-16 to · 30 22 NI -79 1114e
onn, channel ronlor 15 II
Ifin 14 22 1,1in 1. 22
63 11.7 060
-22 02 -N 22 -60 dB
1.12.
24 1011 14,1/
20.· 26, - 6011 ol 22 h111/
0 SOIL 92 10 104 6111/
20 11.2 11.2 VI O. of 3thar.
·TV 2.13 ··1214.2·20 27 6 111114 Ilrl 0 011,
71 Mr 14.11 21
44 to 72 22,212
4l 22 311 all
Si 02 42 O.
144nuo , 115 011,
12182,. 111··11·2011.
-25 011 nun id 22 1114.
26 10 - 10 22 MI 2·9 Y. Irport «1.01 re.,
M I,
75 11
1010 14 12 en 10 all
-
1,11n 14 22 141n 12 22
60 660.0 0 al
-SS 22 -24 ell -.40 N
2111.112
114-104 11141
20 VW - Ito - OH 01 III 1211.
0 S 02. 92 1.3 102 MU
2111 111.2 11.11 71 .22 N 3 .2aolo
/2111121 Cy 14 70 6·16/ , 10 02,
72 ,12.12·121
42 1. 82 0.2 , 3 ol,
42 te 72 41.2
42 de 31 212
26 a
Yon. I1.111,
10 011 me I 020·Iner10/111 ,n
-22 22, en., .122 MU
-TS 2281 30 In114 1renn ann., [ Met
72 II
72 It
10 to 14 an 111/6 10 dll
1. 8 22 1. 10 fa
II tle..
-SO all
Moe(11 11,201.11112.6,
1.111 1·0111171. 0,112.11122 032131 111onor.lo 1.1.11n2.rootalo,
117r 6010.1210
117r 60.12 111
It/ r. foul, wr
117r Gan: 12 r·
19- 142 on, 111,14 4 un, · 34 -,, 11.2 C011
II/ v 60 2/.22 Vo
214,21111,12 Vr1 ,2417. Si Mr.
s a.211
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-57
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
J- SERIES VAGI ANTENNAS, VHF- TV AND FM 75- OHM
MODEL J-55-LO
·Extra heavy-duty construction ·High gain performance
·Choice of models · High reliability · Low maintenance-- Long life
J- Series Models are heavy-duty 75- ohm commercial quality master antennas for TV distribution systems. Available in both cut-tochannel yagi and broadband models. Single channel antennas feature sharp directivity for high gain, and excellent front- to- back ratios. All cut- to- channel models have abuilt- on silver-plated 75- ohm coaxial cable connector with asealed capacitor- tuned gamma match
network for optimum signal transfer. Broadband models are of true log- periodic design assuring extremely flat response and matched output over the entire band. Both types provide the finest reception
of color, black- and- white, and FM.
J- Series antennas are of extra- heavy-duty construction from seamless chrome- aluminum tubing, end- sealed against entry of moisture, and have a special anti- corrosion finish, to assure a maintenancefree, weather- resistant installation. J- Series yagis are the answer to any system requirement where high reliability or long life is a must. Operational/survival wind velocity specification lice- free) for J- Series
Antennas is 125 mph.
LECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TYPE
MODEL I NUMBER
NUMBER OF I GAIN
CHANNEL ELEMENTS
(dB) *
FRONT- TO- I BOOM BACK RATIO LOIN ( in.)
Cut-to- Channel Lo- Band
FM- Band Hi- Band
155-2 155.3 155-4 155-5 155-6
155- FM
1105-7 1105-8 1105-9 1105-10 1105-11 1105.12 1105-13
2 3 4 5 6
FM
7 8
9 10 11 12 13
5
8
5
6-7
10
10.5
Broadband Lo- Band Hi- Band
155- Lo
2thru 6 log- periodic
8
1105- Hi
7thru 13 log- periodic
8.5
IMPEDANCE ( all models): 75 ohms. VSWR: Less than 1.5:1
AVERAGE SHIPPING WEIGHT: Cut- to- Channel Models- 10 1 /2 lbs. Broadband Models -- 14 lbs.
'Relative to a tuned half- wave dipole.
97
83.75
18
83
75
66
18
74
92.75
92.75
92.75
20
86.00
86.00
79.62
77.38
22
90
22
101
ANTENNAS
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
J- Series Antennas may be stacked both vertically and horizontally for greater gain and directivity. For best results, strictly adhere to the array spacing given. ( See the following figure and table.)
The gamma feeds of all antennas within the array must face in the same direction for proper polarity. Broadband models must be assembled exactly as described in the installation instructions, and all down leads must exit from the bottom of the crossarms to maintain proper phasing and polarity.
Splitting harnesses may be made from 75- ohm cable such as Jerrold CAC with Jerrold F-659 fittings. Harness legs should be as short as possible with direct routing and no sharp bends. Each cable length attached to the splitter must be of equal length for satisfactory results. Use Jerrold Model 1596B- Two- Way Splitter or 1597A Four- Way Splitter mounted in an indoor housing. Model HB-3.
A _A__ --Ala-
2-BAY VERTICAL ARRAy --.I
2- MY AORIZONTAL ARRAY
QUAD ARRAY
I SYMBOL ,-
INDICATES SPLITTER I596B OR
15978
SA
·- ear vERTIC·L APRA,'
ARRAY SPACING
Model suflil indicates channel)
155.2 155-3 155-4 155-5 155-6 155- FM 1105-7 1105-8 (105-9 1105-10 1105-11 1105.12 1105-13
Dimension -A" (in inches) 140 127 116 102 94 80 54 52 50 48 46 45 4461
ARRAY SPACING
Dimirenisnigone:1
208 188 172 150 140 120
74 72 70 67 65 63
MODEL NUMBER
TAROS · ( lbs 1
Re lee
V. Ice
MODEL NUMBER
TNIUST· illes.)
N. Ice
Vo' Ice
155 1
52
80
1105 1
35
55
/55-3
46
72
1105 8
335
525
/55-4
40
66
1105 9
315
50
155-5
36
60
1105 ,10
30
485
155-6
32
54
1105.11
285
465
155- FM
32
54
1105-I?
2/ 5
44
1105 13
26
42
·Thrus1 In pounds trans rrrr d to the supporting structure, based on 30 PSI
THRUST DATA
VRF-58
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
ANTENNAS
10- ELEMENT VAGI ANTENNAS, MODEL Y-101, - 103, - 104
TEN -ELEMENT VAGI ANTENNAS
Y 101 SERIES Triple- driven narrow- bandwidth models covering 60 to 108 MHz including TV channels 4, 5and 6and having 1-1/4 in. crossarms, 5/8 in. dia. elements and 3/4 in. dia. reinforcing sleeves.
Y 102 SERIES Twin and triple- driven moderate- bandwidth models covering 108 to
163 MHz and having 1-1/4 in. crossarms, 5/8 in. dia. elements and 3/4 in. dia. reinforcing sleeves.
Y 103 SERIES Twin- driven broad- bandwidth models covering 152 to 440 MHz including individual and combined TV channels 7thru 13, and having 1-1/4 in. crossarms, 1/2 in. dia. elements and 5/8 in. dia. reinforcing sleeves.
Y 104 SERIES Extra- rugged, twin- driven, narrow- bandwidth models covering 43 to 88 MHz including TV channels 2thru 6, and having 2 in. crossarms, 3/4 in. dia. elements and 7/8 in. dia. reinforcing sleeves, for use in extreme ice and windloading environment.
Y-SERIES VAGI MOUNTING KITS (For up to 4-1/2 in. 0.0. masts or tower- legs, see Note below. Order masts separately from Accessory listing below).
MODEL DESCRIPTION
Y-MB-4 Two, 4ft. Y-B-4 booms, four Y-TC-1 tower- clamps, and two Y-MC- 1mast- clamps
Y-MB-8 Two 8ft. Y-B-8 booms, four Y-TC-1 tower- clamps, and two Y-MC- 1mast- clamps
Y-MB- 10 Two 10 ft. Y-B-10 booms, four Y-TC-1 tower- clamps, and two Y-MC- 1mast- clamps
Y-MB- 14 Two 14 ft. Y-B-14 booms, four Y-TC-1 tower- clamps, and two Y-MC- 1mast- clamps
NOTE: For tower- legs up to 7-1/2 in. 0.0. specify Y-TC-2
tower- clamps when ordering.
Y-SERIES MOUNTING ACCESSORIES MODEL DESCRIPTION
Y-B-4
4ft. boom of 1-1/2 in. " U" channel
Y-B-8
8ft. boom of 1-1/2 in. " U" channel
Y-B-10 10 ft. boom of 1-1/2 in. " U" channel
Y-B-14 14 ft. boom of 1-1/2 in. " U" channel
Y-MC- 1 Mast- clamp for up to 2-3/4 in. 0.0. masts
Y-MM- 6 6ft. mast of 2-1/4 in. O.D. tubing
Y-MM-8 8ft. mast of 2-1/4 in. O.D. tubing
Y-MM- 12 12 ft. mast of 2-1/4 in. 0.D. tubing
Y-MM- 18 18 ft. mast of 2-1/4 in. 0.0. tubing
Y-MM- 20 20 ft. mast of 2-1/4 in. O.D. tubing
Y-TC-1 Tower- clamp for up to 4-1/2 in. 0.0. legs
Y-TC-2 Tower- clamp for up to 7-1/2 in. 0.0. legs
7943-13 Mast- coupling, undrilled and without hardware
Six-foot Diameter Reflector, PB-61-BB
Eight- foot
Diameter Reflector, PB-81-BB
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Clmenels
Cale (did
Min.
Mn.,
VSVM· · Mu.
11P8W ( Deg Nem.1 t· Plane tler./ , it Plane ( Vert
Return lets Min IRS/
1,13.61.11B P8.81.811 PB.62.138 1.13 82 BB
14 thru 83 10 teru 83 14 thru 83 14 ltrii 113
150 18 5 17.5 210
19 8 227 222 252
I 6 I 6 I 6 I 6
'Referenced to an Isotropic Source. "75-ohm Impedance.
20
17
16
12
7
17
5
12
I
12 7 12 7 12 7 12 7
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Refl ccccc Diem (I1 ) My.
Height
Ihmensiens Meth
Depth'
Weight Ilit 1
Net
Shipping
lbst· ·
Ns Ice
ta" lee
PE1.61-BB P1381 BB PB-62.88 P8.82 BB
6
1
725
75 5
130
70
120
187
002
8
1
965
995
18.0
100
155
389
805
6
2
72.5
150.5
110
95
115
355
764
8
2
965
199 0
180
155
210
738
1530
'Depth of Reflector Only. -- Thrust Exerted on Supporting Structure Resulting From 86 mph Wind.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR F-59
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
J- SERIES YAGI ANTENNAS UHF, 75- OHM
·EXTRA HEAVY-DUTY CONSTRUCTION
·QUICK, RELIABLE INSTALLATION
·HIGH GAIN PERFORMANCE ·EXCELLENT MATCH
_e rte,
I 7
ANTENNAS
The Jerrold J- 275D-· series of antennas are rugged UHF antennas designed to provide the finest reception of color as well as black and white signals for MATV systems.
Each Model J-275D-° consists of awide- band, diamond- loop driver, two vertically spaced reflectors and 13 tuned directors. The diamond driver is an original Jerrold design providing a matched 75- ohm impedance throughout the UHF range. Dual reflectors increase both horizontal and vertical directivity of the driver and provides front- toback ratios of 20 dB or better. Directors are tuned for specified channels to provide gain of 12 dB over a referenced dipole. See gain curves.
The J-275D-* can be used as asingle- channel yagi ( specify channel) or as a broadband ( specify highest channel to be received). For example, where channels 17, 29 and 48 are to be received, specify J-275D-48.
UHF
SIBGIIICOGBMilfAMMIMILS111 I1Os2MPt1IS.mNI1eBItrRPsiOMeiCC1eaI11slI2lIi0SM1s1OCai1Min1MfMIaiIZlzlMZOzIIMiSMMMMImLIBmIZMMaIII
E
Z0»ES1IO1IM1IB1IRMIIBBMZMMUIIMIMMMMBBURRMZMBZIRMIZIIUUMMMMMBB IMBMZZBUWBMMZM1RZ1MZ1W1W1MZ11M11·I311I111B·3B11I»1BM1M1BIMOIIMBIMBMB
U 25
35
45
AO
70 OS
CHANNEL
STACKING INFORMATION 11750-Smies ontennes muy be -stacked" both venicelly and hon zontally for greeter fl and directivity. Tatde 1 - Arr../ Spacing 'maid« physical dimensions for beet results.
· y--
·
3.404NJ2n
'sa,
,,D569C,1D3 R
Table 1 -- Array Spacing of " J Series" UHF
CHANNELS 14-27 28-35 36-42 43-50 51-60 61-70 71-83
DIMENSION
36"
32"
30"
28"
26"
24"
24"
(Inches)
PARABOLIC ANTENNAS
D-1338BB SERIES UHF ANTENNASD-1338
I Model
Jerrold Model D-1338BB is a high- gain, ruggedized UHF antenna
featuring anew broadband diamond-- loop driver ( patent applied for) which provides 14 dB of gain at'470 MHz rising to 17 dB at 890
MHz relative to an isotropic source. Front- to- back ratio is 15 dB or
better. The 4-foot diameter reflector is made of 1/8 inch steel wires spaced only 1 inch apart and welded to 1/4 inch thick cross-
members and outer ring. The entire antenna is protected with anti-
oxide primer and vinyl alkyd paint. Each unit will withstand up to
125- mile- per- hour winds and adverse environment conditions. All
models mount with apair of clamp brackets designed for 11/2 to 41/2 -
inch mast or tower leg. Shipping weight is 25 pounds.
Model CYD-1470
CORNER REFLECTOR VAGI CYD-SERIES, 300- OHM
Jerrold's new series of Sharpshooter Antennas are Corner Reflector Yagis designed to provide high gain and excellent color reception on UHF channels. The CYD-Series is comprised of four models with the model number indicating frequency range by channel designation. Any CYD" can be added on to an existing VHF antenna without aseparate combiner required for asingle downlead. DYD's are also
Coloraxial Convertible with a separate STO-82 for single coaxial downlead.
Specifications
Model CYD
. 1430
Gam dB. Impedance VSWR Reamendth (Pewee Diplex to VHF STO Convertele Length ( Inches)
Wright ( lbs 1 Tormng Radon (Inches) Clements
11-15 300 II5 20" 35 Yes Yes 79
2 52
22
1446
12-13'S 300 Ils
25°-50' Yes Yes 79 2 52
22
1470
911Va 300 118
35'45' Yes Yes 79 2 52
22
7083
14 15 300 II5 22' 30" No Yes 70
2 48
40
*Except the CYD-7083
(Inches)
40"
35"
33"
31"
29"
27"
27"
Specifications -- J-2750-* Antenna
CHANNELS GAIN IMPEDANCE FRONT- TO- BACK RATIO
Any specified channel from 14 through 83 See chart 75 ohms VSWR. Less than 1.51 20 dB
Wincllad
85 mph 100 mph
No Ice 34 46
Thrust Vbs.)
V." Ice 52 71
RUGGEDIZED OMNI-DIRECTIONAL FM ANTENNAS, OFM-SERIES Jerrold Model OFM-1 is an extremely rugged, single, 75- ohm coaxial output antenna for receiving the entire FM band. Model OFM-2 is a
dual- bay array of OFM-1s. The antenna is constructed of heavy-wall, tubular aluminum elements secured to a sealed aluminum casting
which contains amatching network. The VSF-type output terminal accepts aluminum jacketed coaxial cable or may be adapted to an F-type fitting. Supplied with dual- bay array, Model OFM-2 is a low- loss, weatherproof combiner and an appropriate 75-ohm stacking harness. The integral mounting bracket fits two to three- inch- diameter tubular masts.
VRF-60
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714
(602) 294-1600
RECEIVERS/ HEADEND AMPLIFIERS
C4R
MODEL C4R SATELLITE COMMANDER RECEIVER Features ·24 Channel Frequency Agile ·Used with alow noise block downconverter ·Multiple audio subcarriers ·Bar type Signal Strength Meter · 1.75 inch rack height
The Jerrold Satellite Receiver is designed for use with a low noise block downconverter at the dish to eliminate the need for high cost cable from the dish to the headend. This system design also eliminates the costly duplication of downconverters in each receiver. The Model C4R employs an input frequency of 950 to 1450 MHz, an industry standard designed to be compatible with the future 12 GHz satellite products. In addition, the 9501450 MHz input range eliminates inband interference and interference from UHF band transmissions. The Model C4R features electronically synthesized tuning and adigital channel display. The electronic tuning will not drift and does not require manual adjustments. A bar meter is located on the front panel for a relative indication of the strength of the signal input. The C4R provides asignal RF input and will tune either the 12 odd or the 12 even channels depending on whether the input is horizontally or vertically polarized. It also provides 300mA power for the C4LNB-120 or an LNA and separate block downconverter model BDC. This receiver has two standard audio sub- carriers, 6.8 and 6.2 MHz. Alternate subcarriers may be ordered separately as ASUB-* ( Special Order). ASUB-* Plug-in audio subcarrier. Specify frequency 4.5 to 7.5 MHz.
MODEL HPAS HEADEND AMPLIFIER MODEL HPAS-8 HEADEND AMPLIFIER WITH 8-WAY COMBINER/SPLITTER
FEATURES ·Adjustable Level Control Level Trunks Independently ·Two -20dB Test Point Outputs use for " Test" and " Monitor" ·Simultaneous- Sweep Input Port Isolated for True " Flatness" ·Two Front Panel AC Outlets Power Test Equipment ·Available with Built- In 8-Way Combiner/Splitter -- Excellent to
Amplify and Distribute Phaselock Reference
· Full Bandwidth 50 to 450M Hz
The HPAS Headend Amplifier is a rack mounted low gain amplifier designed to overcome the high combining losses in large headends. The amplifier provides from up to 14 dB of gain. A level control allows the amplifier output to be attenuated up to 6dB. Therefore, the adjustment range of the amplifier is 8 to 14dB.
SPECIFICATIONS: MODELS HPAS, HPAS-8
Bandwidth
50-450 MHz All Ports
Return Loss RF Input RF Output Sweep Input -20 dB Test
Gain
RF IN to RF OUT
16 dB min. 18 dB min. 18 dB min. 18 dB min.
14 dB min.
Loss RF IN to -20dB Test Sweep IN to RF OUT
Flatness RF IN to RF OUT RF IN to -20 dB Test Sweep IN to RF OUT
20 · 1dB below RF OUT 10 · 2dB
0.5 dB max. '0.5dB max. ·0.25 dB max.
Gain Control Range
0-6 dB reduction, min.
Noise Figure
9.0 dB max.
Power Dimensions
105to 135V, 50 to 60 Hz 19" rack mount, 3-1/2" height
RETURN CHANNEL DIPLEX FILTERS
TF-30DHE Subsplit ( 5-32/52-450MHz) Diplex Filter TF-108DHE Midsplit ( 5-116/168-450MHz) Diplex Filter TF-176-DHE High Midsplit ( 5-174/250-450MHz) Diplex Filter FEATURES · Low Insertion Loss nearly Transparent to System · High 40dB Isolation Excellent Band Separation ·450MHz Full Bandwidth Rating · 1-3/4" Rack Mounted Space Saving
The TF series diplex filters are placed after the composite output of the headend. In two-way systems they are used to extract the return signals. In one-way systems they are installed to reduce noise ingress
from the unused return band. Jerrold recommends the use of adiplex
filter on each trunk output regardless of whether two-way operation is planned.
SPECIFICATIONS: MODEL TF-30DHE, TF-108DHE
MODEL
TF-30DH E
TF-108DHE
Passband
Max. Insertion Loss
5-32MHz and 52-400MHz
0.6dB
5-116MHz and 168-400MHz
0.6dB
Stopband Stopband Attenuation Isolation Between High-
pass and Lowpass Ports
Terminal Match return loss, 75 ohm impedance (minimum)
32-52MHz 25dB min.
40dB min.
20dB
116-168MHz 25dB min. 40dB min.
20dB
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-61
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
PROCESSORS
JE wnot. O
·
COMMANDER PROCESSORS MODELS C4P SERIES
FEATURES SAW Filter · Attenuates adjacent channels for improved performance ·Eliminates more than 20 adjustable coils and trimmers to provide
high mechanical and thermal stability ·Any number of equal level adjacent channels permitted
Built-in Features ·IF switching with loss- of- signal sensing and AGC for substitute
signals ·Override alert switching ·Easy access front panel test points ·Standby for 30 Vdc backup power
The Commander processor takes signals from off-air channels, super trunks or return signals in atwo-way system, amplifies them, filters out interfering signals, and converts the signals to any cable output channel.
Commander processors provide output in the non-phaselock, incremental phaselock, or harmonic phaselock modes.
The front end system employs athree- pole helical resonator input filter followed by a low- noise, high linearity pre-amplifier. This is followed by a double balanced mixer and a precision delayed AGC. This front end design ensures acombination of alow noise figure and excellent input overload performance. It eliminates the need for external filters even when adjacent signal levels are high.
The IF amplifier provides independent amplification and AGC for picture and sound. This enables the sound level to be adjusted and regulated independently of the picture level.
SPECIFICATIONS:
RF Input Channels
Output Channels RF Input and Output
Terminal Impedance RF Input and Output Terminal Match Input Level Range, Any Channel Maximum Output Level Output Level Range. Any Channel
Spurious Output Frequency Conversion Accuracy Noise Figure. at Full Gain
17-T13, 2-13. 141-611' 2H-69H", 14-83 ' Special Order
17-113, 2-13, 141-611 2H-69H
75 ohms
16 dB min return loss (1:1.38 VSWR)
--20 to + 30 dBmV
.60 dBmV
10dB. continuously adjustable from · 50 to .60 dBmV
--60dB at .60 dBmV output
± 14 kHz, from 3? to 120°F
5dB or better for sub and lo-band channels;
6dB or better for mid, high and super-band channels;
9to 12 dB or better for UHF channels
Carrier- to- Noise Ratio at + 10 dBmV 60 dB or better at VHF;
Input
57 dB or better at UHF
Sound Limiting
10 dB or better at -- 25 dBmV sound carrier input
Sound Carrier Level. Adjustable
--5 to -- 25 dB relative to output video carrier
IF Video Carrier
45.75 MHz
IF Sound Carrier
41.25 MHz
IF Output Level IF Input Level
.30 dBmV
+23 to +37 dBmV. for ± 05dB output change
AGC Stiffness
± 0.5 dB max. at .60 dBmV out for input changes from --20 to +30 dBmV
Adjacent Channel Rejection
60 dB or better
Band Edge Rejection
20 dB or better
Intermodulation ( Overload) at Input Cross- Modulation at Input
Image Rejection Response Flatness
--80dB or better for equal level adjacent channels, each at .10 dBmV
--80 dB or better with any number of channels, each at + 10 dBmV: --70 dB or better with any number of channels, each at .20 dBmV
VHF, 60 dB or better. UHF 40 dB.
+0.5/-1.0 dB from -- 0.75 to +4.18 MHz relative to Dix carrier
Group Delay
Chroma Delay K Factor
PHASELOCK Phaselock Capability
Reference Signal Level
± 25ns video thru color sub-carrier; ± 75 ns, from --0.75 to .4.0 MHz
± 25 nanoseconds 2% max
Off-the-air single-channel or comb generator .10 to +30 dBmV (CW); .20 to · 30 dBmV ( modulated carrier)
Capture Range
40 kHz minimum
GENERAL
Standby Carrier Modes ( Optional)
a. CW b. external video -- 1Vp- p
for 87.5% mod. c. external 4.5 MHz sound
Standby Carrier Output Level
0to -- 10 dB relative to normal video level
Standby Carrier Delay ( Turn-on) 0, or 5, or 25 seconds ( switchable)
AC Power Requirements
100 to 130 V. 50 to 60 Hz. 25 W
DC Power Requirements
23-30 V DC, 900 mA max.
Dimensions
19" wide, 3.5" high, 17" deep (48.26 cm, 8.89 cm, 43.18 cm)
Shipping Weight
21 lbs. ( 9.52 kg)
Mounting
19" standard Relay rack or cabinet
Operating Temperature Range
3? to 120°F (0* to 48.9°C)
VRF-82
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
COMMANDER DEMODULATOR
MODEL C4D DEMODULATOR ·True Nyquist response SAW FILTER ·Enhanced envelope detection circuit ·Automatic Video/Sound squelch ·Front panel adjustable chroma gain control The C4D is the first CATV demodulator to have its waveform characteristics tested and guaranteed prior to shipment. The C4D will have a K-factor less than 2%, chroma delay less than 50 nsec, and multiburst flatness less than -41dB.
Balanced and unbalanced ( 600 ohms) audio outputs are available from barrier- strip terminals or from astandard XLR broadcast audio connection. The SAW filter also acts to reject signals from incoming adjacent channels. Any number of equal level adjacent channels are permitted. The C4D offers -80 dB intermodulation and cross modulation at 10 dBmV input levels. This enables a greater than 60 dB carrier-to- noise ratio at the demodulator output.
FEATURES First true Nyquist response SAW filter in aCATV product. ·The Nyquist characteristic is required for accurate
demodulation of the vestigial sideband signal to assure that timing is preserved and that distortions are not introduced.
·The precise Nyquist response is inherent to the SAW filter and will not change with time or temperature. This assures both long and short term stability.
·The single SAW filter improves maintenance because it reduces 30 adjustable components in our former demodulator to just five adjustments.
Enhanced envelope detection ·The C4D contains a specially enhanced envelope
detection circuit. This circuit employs acomplementary diode detector network in which asecond diode corrects non-linear effects in the envelope detector. A standard envelope detector cannot adequately handle high depth of modulation-- resulting in degraded differential phase and gain and degraded hue and color saturation in the picture. The C4D's enhanced envelope detector and synchronous detectors can handle an index of modulation up to video clamping without phase and gain losses. e The enhanced envelope detector is inherently more reliable than synchronous detectors. Synchronous detectors cannot handle all signal conditions. Therefore, whenever asynchronous detector is used, sensing and switching circuits must be added to switch to aback-up envelope detector. The C4D avoids the reliability penalties of the sensing and switching circuits. Nutornatic video/sound squelch e The C4D provides automatic video/sound and subcarrier squelch so that noise will not enter the system if the input signal is lost.
DEMODULATOR
SPECIFICATIONS:
RF Input
Input Channels
T-7 thru T-13, 2thru 13, 141 thru
Input Impedance Input Return Loss
Input Level Range Noise Figure, Full Gain
431, or 02H thru 43H, 14-83 UHF 75 Ohms 16 dB Minimum -20 to + 30 dBmV
5dB Max Sub and VHF Low Ch
6dB Max Mid High and Super
Band VHF Ch
Carrier to Noise Ratio
at + 10 dBmV Input Image Rejection lntermodulation at Input
9-12 dB Max UHF Ch 60 dB Min-- VHF 57 dB Min-- UHF 60dB Min, VHF, 40 dB Min UHF
-80 dB or better for Equal Level
Cross Modulation at Input
Adjacent Channels at + 10 dBmV -80 dB or better for Equal Level
Adjacent Channels at + 10 dBmV
-70 dB or better for Equal Level
I. F. Output Level AGC Regulation
Adjacent Channels at + 20 dBmV +30 dBmV ±0.5 dB Max Change for Input
Video
Variation from -20 to + 30 dBmV
Output Type Rear Panel
Two 75 Ohm. Type " F"
Connectors
Output Return Loss
30 dB Min. All Outputs
Output Level at 87.5% Depth of
Modulation
Amplitude Response Differential Gain
1Volt P- PPreset. Adjustable to 2Volts P- PMin - 1dB Max. 30 Hz to 4MHz
-2% Max. 87.5% Depth of
Differential Phase
Modulation, 10%-90% APL 0.5 Degrees Max., 87.5%
K- Rating
12.5 T Pulse Chroma Delay Field Square Wave Tilt
Depth of Modulation, 10%-90% APL
2% Max.
50 ns. 1% Max.
Video Signal to Noise Ratio
56 dB VHF
+ 10 dBmV RF Input Level
53 dB UHF
Residual 4.5 MHz, Non- Combined
Operation
-60 dB Max.
Audio
Output Type
Rear Panel
600 Ohm Balanced, Type " XLR"
Front Panel
Connector and screw terminals 600 Ohm Single Ended, screw
terminal Low Impedance, Tip
Output Level
Jacks Adjustable + 6 dBm Max ± 25
Distortion
kHz Deviation 1% Max. 50 Hz to 15,000 Hz 25
kHz Deviation, + 6dBm Output
Flatness
Max 4 1dB 50 Hz to 15,000 Hz,
4.5 MHz
Including 75 ,u sec De- Emphasis
Outputs
a. Separate 75 Ohm Type " F"
Connector
b. Combined with 2nd Video
Output, Switch Provided for
Addition or Removal of 4.5 MHz
from Video Output No. 2as
Output Level
Required 0.1V P- P Nominal, Adjustable to
0.5V P- P Max Combined and
General
Separated Outputs
AC Power Requirements
DC Power Requirements Dimensions Shipping Weight
Mounting Operating Temp. Range
100 to 130 V, 50 to 60 Hz, 25 W 23-30 Vdc 900 mA Max 19" wide 3.5" high 17" deep 21 lbs
19" standard relay rack or cabinet
32° to 120°F ( 0to 48.9°C)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VR F-63
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
MODULATOR
eit im 0 1.- °I
COMMANDER IV MODULATOR C4M
TV Signal Modulator for broadcast quality adjacent channel operation, monochrome or color
·Spurious outputs down - 70 dB at + 60 dBmV output · Extremely low differential phase and gain ·Front- panel metering for video depth of modulation and audio
deviation ·White- level limiter prevents over- modulation ·Front- panel test points ·No outboard filters required ·Automatic gain control ·Ease of maintenance-- slide- out drawer allows maintenance with-
out interrupting service
· Plug-in modular construction ·Crystal- controlled oscillator with new pulse- integrating AFC
·Complete override control for emergency alert ·Provides for maximum system reliability with external standby
power ·Only 31 / 2 "of rack space ·Optional phase lock: single channel or incremental
To complement the Commander IV heterodyne processor, Jerrold engineers designed the new modulator to provide comparable signal fidelity and compatible IF switching and output configurations. The Commander IV modulator comprises five active modules, two of which are unique to the modulator. The other three, CAX, CPR, and ICC, are identical to those used in the Commander Ill heterodyne processor. ( See processor information.) The two unique modules are: Audio Modulator, Model CAM; and Video Modulator and Delay Predistorter, Model CVM. The audio- modulator section provides a4.5 MHz sub- carrier which is frequency- modulated by the audio wave- form, after standard preemphasis. The center frequency of the sub- carrier is stabilized to meet ( or better) the + /- kHz FCC requirement. To accomplish this, a new pulse- integrating discriminator is employed in which a crystal oscillator is used to maintain constant pulse width. The result of the improved pulse- width control is greater precision and reliability in stabilizing the frequency.
Ordering Information Commander IV modulator is designated CMM-. A Commander IV modulator equipped with phase lock is designated by Model No. CMMP-. When ordering, the model number and output channel must be specified. For example, a Commander IV modulator for channel 4 output must be specified as Model No. CMM-4. If phase lock is required the designation is CMMP-4. Refer to the price sheet for complete ordering information. Test kit, model COM IV-TK is available for test and maintenance.
MODEL HC-8F EIGHT-WAY COMBINER/SPLITTERS
The HC- 8F is afull bandwidth 5to 450MHz 8- way combiner/splitter. It may be used as acombiner to merge the signals from up to eight channels or as a splitter to distribute phaselock reference or emergency alert signals to multiple channels. Jerrold employs adirectional coupler circuitry in the HC-8F because this technique provides greater channel- to- channel isolation. High isolation provides protection for adjacent channel interference. Very high isolation such as the 35dB level offered in the HC-8F is critical for any application where signals are fed to an AML system. The HC-8F input ports are balanced so that if the input signals have equal levels, they will remain equal when combined. Regardless of which input port is used a 16dB difference in level is maintained. SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Range: 5-450MHz. Insertion Loss ( min.): 15.8dB. Isolation ( min.): 30dB. Impedance: 75 ohms. Match: 20dB. Dimensions: 19"L x 1-3/4"W x 1-1/2"H. Weight: 1lb. 13 oz.
VHF SINGLE- CHANNEL FILTERS, PBF-SERIES
Jerrold Model PBF-* filters are single- channel VHF, high- Q, passband devices which overcome many headend overload problems. They also may be used effectively on the output of headend equipment to eliminate spurious signals generated by the particular equipment. These devices feature low insertion loss and have a high degree of selectivity. The next higher " SND" and next lower " PIX" frequencies of adjacent channels are attenuated by more than 30 dB. These filters are ultra stable; i.e., there is no perceptible frequency shift throughout atemperature range from -40°F to + 140°F. This filter, which features a helical resonator design, can be rackmounted and requires only one and three-quarter inches of vertical rack space lone panel increment). PBF filters are available in any of the following channels: Sub- Band, 17 thru T13; Lo- VHF, 2 thru 6; Mid- Band, A thru I; Hi- VHF, 7 thru 13; Super Band, J thru W. Order Model PBF- and specify channel. Example: for channel 3, order Model PBF-3.
*Specify channel. SPECIFICATIONS-- PBF-SERIES Center Frequency: Sub-, Mid-, Super, and Standard TV Channel Assignments. Bandwidth: At 0.5 dB pts. 5.5 MHz + /- 150 KHz. Insertion Loss: 1.0 dB Max. ( Low Band), 1.6 dB Max. ( High Band). Impedance: 75 ohms, 18 dB return loss Input/Output. Skirt Selectivity: Upper adjacent sound carrier- 32 dB, Lower adjacent picture carrier- 43 dB. Environment: -40°F to 140°F, 95% relative humidity. Physical: 19" rack mounting; 1 ( one) EIA rack increment (1 3 /4 "). Connectors: F-61A ( Female), Chroma Delay: 35 nsec. max (Ch. 2-R).
VRF-64
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
SCRAMBLING COMPATIBLE, SAW FILTER MODULATOR
· 0 1. 0
seem. a "Dov
C4MS MODULATOR C4MPS PHASELOCK MODULATOR
Scrambling compatible · Compatible with both Jerrold RF and baseband encoders at no
extra cost ·SAW filter eliminates adjacent channel interference · IF loop-throughs provides separate video IF and sound IF to
scrambler ·Scrambled video input for use with Jerrold baseband encoders
Built-in IF switching ·Loss-of- signal sensing provides program substitution when signal
loss is detected · Remote switching operates on external command as required for
emergency override ·Alert ready. Built-in IF switch provides full video and audio override
for emergency announcements ·Second switch option. First IF switch is standard. Second switch
(CIS) is available to allow both timer- controlled programming changes and emergency override ·Optional video switching. Switch from one video input to another upon loss of signal or external command
MODULATOR
Industry Best Performance
The C4MS and C4MPS offer these excellent performance standards:
· Depth of modulation
To 95% without distortion
·Output level
60 dBmV
·Spurious output
- 60 dB at 60 dBmV
· K factor
Less than 2%. The first CATV modulator
to have its waveform guaranteed
Easy operation
· Built-in meter offers five functions. Unique circuit accurately
measures depth of video modulation regardless of picture content. (Most other meters are content- sensitive.)
·White level limiter prevents over- modulation
· Front panel test points. More test points than competitive equipment
· Front panel controls provide ready access for signal adjustments
· Front panel status indicators show input signal,, input power, B + power, and phaselock
·Center drawer slides out and tilts up to allow access to IF, AGC,
and video modulator circuits without interrupting service
· Plug-in output module. Change to any channel using plug-in output converters
·Automatic gain control. Full AGC for IF input
·Standby power. Upon loss of AC power, the modulator will switch to a back-up 24-30 VDC power source
·Circuit isolators. Conveniently located push- in jumpers can be removed to isolate circuits for testing
C4MS Modulator C4MPS Phaselock Modulator
from $1500.00 to $ 2125.00 from $1900.00 to $2365.00
RF
Output Channels RF Output Term., Irnpedence RF Output Unquote Notch Recommended output Level Output Level Range Spur.ous Output
Output Frequency OPPUNICy Sound Carnee Love. Adjustable
IF Ye. Carrier if Sound Carrier IF Output Level IF hope Level
Overell Group Way
Yestepal Sedeband Responso
T-7 thn, T.13 211Ini 13. 141411 iled 75 Ams 16 dB ram relus, loss 111 30 VSW11) 10 Am,/mae 10 dB continuously adjustable from + 50 to 160 011.0
- 60 dB at .OEM6 output
:telly from 12° to 120.
-5 to - 25 A realm to output rodeo carrier
4515 MIlt
41.25 MHO
+30 dime
+23 to + 37 Mee tor output change
5 48
conforms to FCC requorements for color broadcast
-20 08 at channel edge -40 dB at adjacent audio moor trequences and all other frequenees
AUDIO
Awl. Input Type Audoo Input Lae
Audio Frequency Response Hermon. Chstortron 1-1X- Nam and Noose
CarrIl Preque.CV
600 onms belanced Cannon X1.11 type rennet« tontinuously odostetdc 250 onV .me min for ±25 kits denetoon. et Irole or lom
mittiin ,i40 5011010 iS RHO
I% max. et -1-25 500 dowieteon. SO 110 to 15 kHz 60 dB nun below 3-25 PHs devout.. SO 110 to 15 lee 43 Mlle 'el eto
4.5 MHz AURAL
45 MN: Input Type Input Terminal Match CS MN, ingot Level
METERING
Video Modulation
Sound Modulation
ACC rioltege le P.m Lock 11101 LOCI Phase Lock Capability Reference % gaol Level
Capture Range
75 ohms. unbalanced 15 dB min. rrrrrr loss 316 mV rms ( 10 dOmV) mon
indicates goal percent dePth e modulation, troth. -13%. loo any composite rodeo wrrrrrr indicates lee dermal's«. within .5% up to -± 35 kale Omenoe indicates operating pent of AUX IF AGC system. ondeutes pos. supply OC «dugs 'negates mel soignee
0011tedir singl.chonnel or comb pmeretor .10 to . 30 dB., (Cm),
20 to 30 dim,/ ( modulated earner) .40 kHz no.nornurn
GENERAL
Standby Carrier Modes (Opturnetl
Standby Carrier Output Level Steadby Carner Delay (Tans-uni AC Power Requorownents OC Power Requoteenents Ditnelitiffl
Shown Weoght Mounting Operating Tem..
a Co
b
Ir.dvo IYP-P tO.
07 5% mod
c edema, 45 Mler sound
0 to - 10 dl really@ to menu, video level
0, or 5, or 25 seconds tevitchable
100 to 130 V. SO to 60 M. 25 W
23.30 V DC. 900 onA maa
high. lb" wee, 33 .
17" deep
148.26 cm. 11.19 cm, 43.18 cm)
21 tbs. (9.52 kg)
Ir mound rood oeell 00 cabinet
32° to 120°F (0° to 411.9°C)
VIDEO
Yod. Input Lanel Vide, Input Type Mee Input Impedes« Yee° Input kletch Overall Amplitude Response Chfferential Gain
Differential Phase
AM Hum and Noise
Sync Compression
Tilt or Sag of 60 Ha Seam Were Modulation Menge white Level Lund, Adjustable 11 le.
0.5 V pep for 17.5% mod. composéte NTSC rod.. negative sync
75 obms 30 di mon. return loss. 25 Ne to 6 MID oithln -± 101, 25 No to 4.11 Moe 10.25 di met. feu 87 6% depth of modern... 10% to 90% AIL
gu mer. tor 87.5% depth al modulation. 10% to 90% APL de de min. below 07,5% depth pi modulation t r oli,1.1 .rio:. for 87.5% depth of
1% max
to 95% 80% to 95% modulatoon depth
2% mar
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-65
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
REFERENCE GENERATOR/ ALERT CONTROLLER
MODEL CPG PHASELOCK REFERENCE GENERATOR
FEATURES · HRC or IRC Coherent Operation · High Output Level
When multiple channels are carried on a cable system, distortion products result at harmonic multiples of the picture carrier frequencies and at mathematical sums and differences between carriers. Coherent operation controls carrier spacing so that the beats from one channel fall directly on the picture carrier of the other channels where they are overwhelmed by the strength of the carrier signal.
Two reference formats are available: The HRC system ( harmonically related carriers) offers the mathematically purest signal because it makes both second and third order beats invisible. On Jerrold's set- top converters 5H is the same as channel 55H; 6H, the same as 56H.
The IRC system ( incrementally related carriers) eliminates third- order distortion. Because second order beats are not usually a limitation with push-pull amplifiers, the improvement is as good as with the HRC system. The advantage of IRC phaselock is that the traditional broadcast, mid and super channel assignments remain unchanged.
Therefore. IRC is compatible with existing set-top converters and may be employed in systems which have a no- converter tier of service. Broadcast channels 5and 6do not align with the IRC scheme and must be moved for phaselock operation to channels 551 and 561.
The phaselock circuitry available for Commander IV heterodyne processors and modulators has been designed for maximum reliability and flexibility of operation. To insure fault-free operation of the phaselock circuitry, a lock- in range of ± 40KHz has been provided. Reliable operation is guaranteed regardless of: broadcast referencesignal offset and drift, comb- generator-frequency accuracy, or internal- oscillator drift. If the reference signal ever becomes unavailable, each Commander modulator and processor contains a back-up crystal oscillator.
Model
CPG SPECIFICATIONS
Output Frequence
Output Level Level
CPG -1-400 55.25-397.25 MHz 6.00 MHz spacing
34 dBmV, each of four outputs
CPG-H-450 54-450 MHz 6.00 MHz spacing
same as above
MODEL C4E COMMANDER ALERT OVERRIDE CONTROLLER
FEATURES · Provides Override Switching Control Signal and Emergency Audio
Signal Received over a Standard Telephone Line ·Includes User Programmed Security Code · Provides Three Time Out Functions
Every Commander III and IV modulator and processor has an override capability built-in. This standard feature allows normal programming to be overridden at IF for emergency announcements.
The C4E emergency override controller consists of atelephone auto answer and tone detector in one unit. The C4E System consists of both the override controller and amodulator with high level output at IF.
A touch tone telephone supplies the necessary audio tone source to activate/- deactivate the override function. The C4E activates the override function upon correct input of a user- programmed multidigit code which is entered on the telephone touch tone keypad. The high level output IF modulator supplies the telephone audio to all channels. An optional character generator or studio camera may be employed to provide avideo message as well.
The override message may be terminated after apre- determined time delay or after the star character on the telephone keypad is depressed for at least 3 seconds.
The IF signal is distributed to each channel by means of a splitting network which may consist of SWS-2, SWS-4 and HC- 8F splitters.
C4E SPECIFICATIONS
OUTPUTS: Override Alert AC Operate Aucho
Telephone Line
rForm Ccontact a ramp
1Form Ccontact cg Iamp
600 ohm output Switched ON during override tram phone line plus a600 ohm phone line audio out
Audible acknowledge tones to, Auto
Answer and Override
AUTO ANSWER: Ring Detector
Ring Counter Line Sere
Audio Coupler
Programmable Wr long 1600 mst or
snort 1300 ms iring PulSeS Programmable 1to 7rings
Adtustable from 30 seconds W 90 seconds · 10% Registration 083985 62455 PC Eand ringer equivalence 0aamp 108
CALL DOWN DECODER
DIME Detector
Responds to two-tone simultaneous
SIgnal
input Lever
Per Tone Voltage
High Range 10 to 10 0ARMS
Low Range 025 to 25ARMS
Twist Tolerance
15 dB max if tones are with ± 18%
of frequency and voltages are within
specilied input tanges
Response Time
650 ms n20%
DIAL TONE DETECTOR-- LOW FREQUENCIES
Input Frequencies Simultaneous 350 Ho nI% and 440
Ho oI%
Input Level
Per Tone Fortage
Nigh Range 10 to 10 0OROS
Low Range 025 to 25ARMS
Twist Tolerance
10 dB max with tone voltages within
specohcaten range
Response Time
650 ms n20%
DIAL TONE DETECTOR--NIGN FREQUENCY
input Frequency
600 00 n2%
Jumper enabled and
retuneable
Input Level
040to 050 OROS
Twist Tolerance
10 dB
Response Time
one second · 20%
OVERRIDE DECODER Input Level
Signaling Speed Signal Type Address Coding Interdegit Timing
Smad Twist Tolerance
Two tone DM signals at aHigh or
Low Range Per Tone Voltage
Nigh Range 10 lo 10 0VRMS
Low Range 025 lo 25VRMS 10 PPS mar
DTMF 2of 13 3to 8digits owner programmable Factory set for 2seCS and owner
changeable lo 270 ms 608 minimum
15 di max with tones Within
n18% frequency and per lone voltages within specs
POWER'
Power Supply
12 to 16 5VDC 120 or 240 VAC
·50160 HO
Current Drain
Standby Idling
16 Ma at 13 5VDC
40 ma MIS al 120 Vac
20 ma RAG al 240 VAC
Operating Message 1Orna at 136 VDC
aa ma RAIS at 120 SAC
22 ma RIAS al 240 VAC
Overrode Mode
400 ma at 136 VDC
78 ma RMS at 120 VAC
39 ma RAIS at 240 VAC
DIMENSIONS:
175 11x19 Well D
TEMPERATURE RANGE
Operating
30°C to · 70°C I·22°F to · 158°F1
Storage
55°C to · 85°C I.67°F to · 185°F i
VRF-66
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
"SJ" SERIES MAINSTATION
STARLINE " SJ" SERIES 20/450
PUSH-PULL MAINSTATIONS
The Starline " SJ" Series is the CATV industry's most widely used mainstation amplifier. The Starline " SJ" Series utilizes Jerrold's exclusive quad technology and is capable of 450 MHz performance. The Starline " SJ" Series is capable of amplifying 60 standard forward channels and by use of plug-in filters is capable of two-way subsplit ( 5-32 MHz return and 52-450 MHz forward passbands) or midsplit ( 5-108 MHz return and 172-450 MHz forward passbands) configuration.
FEATURES ·60 Channel Capability
Designed for all CATV markets ·All modules and accessories have been upgraded to 450 MHz
performance ·The Versatility of the Quad
Jerrold's convenient amplifier circuit. The quad gives you achoice: greater cable spacing for new transportation or distribution systems...with fewer active electronics per mile; or traditional cable spacing for extensions or rebuilds...with fewer AGC amplifiers required ·The Exclusivity of Total Level Compensation With variable equalizer, 8 dB gain control, independent slope control, and/or plug-in thermal compensation for the manual stations.. allows cost-effective designs, easier installations, reduced maintenance and operating expenses · Return feeder connect/disconnect option ·Two- Way Upgradable: Plug-in filters and return amplifiers make for easy upgrade to subsplit or midsplit systems ·Variable equalizers for 220, 270, 300, 330, 350, 400 or 450 MHz systems ·Rotatable feedermaker for 1to 4feeder outputs ·Circuit breaker protection on all feeder ports, model CB- 5 ·Very Low Power Consumption Maximum of 31 watts per mainstation with SJSW power supplies ·Jerrold's new SJSW " Super Switcher" power pack: For ultradependable delivery of basic- and premium- program services-- at the lowest power cost possible!
"SJ" SERIES HOUSING
STARLINE " SJ" SERIES HOUSING
The Starline 20 housing, model SJAH is a 7 port aluminum housing designed for both trunk and trunk feeder/feeder applications. The housing includes separate RFI and weather gaskets. Input and output test point apertures eliminate the need to open the housing to measure forward and return levels. The input and output platforms are designed for high isolation, 120 dB radiation wells at input and output connector ports, and seizure of coaxial cable center conductors. This allows electronic packages to be installed or removed without removing coaxial cables.
POWER PACK MODEL " SJSW"
STARLINE " SJ" SERIES HOUSING AND POWER SUPPLY COMBINATIONS
HOUSING FEATURES ·7 port aluminum housing · RFI and weather gaskets · Input dnd output test point apertures · 120 dB radiation well at input and output connector ports · Electronic packages can be removed without removing cables
POWER SUPPLY FEATURES ·SJSW " super switcher" provides high efficiency and lowest power
cost possible · Heavy duty surge arrestor standard, model SJSA-145
STARLINE " SJ" SERIES POWER SUPPLIES
The primary design criteria for Jerrold power supplies is reliability. The SJSW-* incorporates heavy-duty components selected for long life and surge protection is standard ( model SJSA-1451. Choose either 30 volt or 60 volt. Jerrold power supplies have an extended- voltage operating- range feature which allows the amplifier station to continue to operate during over voltage conditions, thus providing continuous service to subscribers. Current limiting circuitry and fuse assembly protect the power supply and amplifier modules. Easily accessible test points allow simple set-up and performance checks. Current limiting is insured by acurrent sensing and limiting circuit. When aload current exceeds a predetermined threshold, this unique circuit effectively "blocks" any excessive current from flowing through the power supply-- without interrupting the " normal" current flow. When the excessive load condition causing the current is removed or abates, the circuit automatically returns to its quiescent state.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-67
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
STARLINE " SJ" SERIES ELECTRONIC PACKAGES
There are " 5" basic electronic package configurations of the Starline "SJ" Series to meet your system design requirements; trunk amplification, trunk and bridging, and trunk terminating or intermediate bridging with one to four bridging outputs; with automatic gain and slope control available for trunk amplification and trunk and bridging styles.
Feeder Disconnect SJ-"S/E electronics packages are designed to accommodate an optional feeder connect/disconnect switch, model SEP -30S. This module has three positions: connect, disconnect, and remote. The SEP3O-S may be remotely operated from an external controller (model STSM) when in the remote position.
Thermal Compensation All trunk amplifier modules are equipped with thermal compensation to maintain optimal system performance over temperature swings
from -40°F to + 140°F.
AGC/ASC Trunk Amplifier With Bridging Amplifier This electronic package provides amplification for trunk and bridging. The push-pull trunk amplifier module SJAS is a dual pilot gain and slope control amplifier. AGC and ASC can be turned on or off independently for ease of operational set-up and maintenance using asimple 5step procedure which eliminates seasonal rebalancing. The push-pull bridger amplifier module SJBM utilizes manual gain and slope controls and has aplug-in pad ( model JXP-°) facility.
The amplifier modules are mounted in atwo-way connector chassis which provides up to 4 bridger outputs.
Mainstation Electronic Packages
Model
Upper Freq. Design
Spectrum
Return Feeder Disconnect Capability
SJ-1SS' / 450 300-450
Yes
Si 1SS/450 300-450
Yes
SJS-IAS/E 220-300
Yes
SJS-1AS' / E 220-300
Yes
SJ ,1SS / 330 220-330
Yes
SJ 1SS·i 330 220-330
·,e,
Connector Chassis
(Note 2)
SCD-F-SS2 SCD-F-SS2 SCD-2WDS SCD-2WDS SCO-F.SS2 SCD-E-SS2
Trunk Amplifier Module
SJAS-450 SJAS-450 SJAS-400A SJAS-400A' SJAS 330 SJAS- 330'
Standard Pilot
Carrier Channels
4and 36 ilWi NOTE 1 4and 1 NOTE 1
4 and 36 iiWi NOTE r
Bridger Amplifier Module
SJBM-450 SJBM-450 SJBM 400 SJBM-400 SJBM 330 SJBM - 330'
.ASC/AGC module tuned to customer order. 2. Contains input, output and distribution filters, except 300 MHz models.
Manual Trunk Amplifier With Bridging Amplifier This electronic package provides amplification for trunk and bridging. The push-pull trunk amplifier module SJMM utilizes manual gain control. This module is thermally controlled to compensate for changes in gain and for changes in attenuation and slope in 18 dB of cable preceding the amplifier due to environmental variations.
The SJ BM bridger amplifier and the SCD connector chassis are used in these models.
Mainstation Electronic Packages
Model
Upper Fret Design
Spectrum
SJ -2SS/450 SJS-2AS E SJ.2SS/330
300-450 220-300 220-330
Return Feeder Disconnect Capability
Yes Yes Yes
Connector Chassis
INote I)
SCD-F-SS1 SCD-2WDS SCD-F-SS1
Trunk Ampliher Module
SJMM-450 SJMM-400A SJMM-330
Standard Pilot
Carrier Channels
^, A ', A N/A
Bridger Amplifier Module
SJBM-450 SJBM-400 SJBM-330
1. Contains input, output and distribution filters, except 300 MHz models.
ASC/AGC Trunk Amplifier This electronic package provides amplification for trunk only. It utilizes the AGC/ASC trunk module SJAS.
The amplifier module is mounted in a two-way connector chassis, model SCL. This connector chassis is for trunk only applications. The SCL-F-SS contains subsplit input and output filters, while the SCL-F-MS contains midsplit filters.
Menstation Electronic Packages
Model
SI · 355/450 OMS I
ass'
Upper Frequency
Design Spectrum
300 450 MHz
Return Feeder Disconnect
I. 4
Connector Chassis
tNote it
,CI v.. ·
Trunk Amplifier Module Channels
`,..A , ,'
Standard Pilot
Carriers
Bridger Amplifier Module
, . t,, n 36 (WI
N A
%OE I ------p 1,
ri// TO 1 T : 1,r: W I
NA N A N A NA NA
1 ASC/AGC module tuned to customer order. ( Recommend 7and 36 Ifor SJ-3MS· / 4501.
2. Contains input and output filters, except 300 MHz models.
Manual Gain Control Trunk Amplifiers This electronic package provides amplification for trunk only. It utilizes the manual gain control trunk modules SJMM.
The amplifier module is mounted in a two-way connector chassis, model SCL. This connector chassis is for trunk only applications.
Mainstation Electronic Packages
Model
,. ASS T S. .: MS :,
Upper Frequency
Design Spectrum
Return Feeder Disconnect
..1,r
ti A
Connector Chassis
(Note 1) SCI F S" SCI I N,
Trunk Amplifier Module Channels
SWM 4,0
Standard Pilot
Carriers
Bridger Amplifier Module
NA
N A
1. Contains input and output filters, except 300 MHz models.
Trunk Termination/Intermediate Trunk Bridging Amplifier This electronic package provides amplification for bridging only. It utilizes a push-pull distribution amplifier module SJDL with manual gain aild slope control. This module is thermally controlled to compensate for changes in gain and for changes in attenuation and slope in 20 dB of cable due to environmental variations.
For intermediate trunk bridging applications, an external directional coupler, model STC-8F or STC-12F is required.
Mainstation Electronic Packages
Model
Si SSS/450 SJS-55."E
Sr 555.3311
Upper Frequency
Design Spectrum 220-450 Mil/
".30 MN,
Return Feeder Disconnect
Yes Yes les
Connector Chassis
(Noir 1) SCD F SS '.;, P ?WFS ' ' SS
Trunk Amplifier Module Channels
N A '. A
Standard Pilot
Carriers
N A N A N A
Bridger Amplifier Module
SJDI 450 SJD .400 SJDl 330
1 Contains input and distribution filter; output filter included but not required.
VRF-68
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
System Performance Specifications: SJS 300 Basic Mainstations- Operating to 300 MHz
STATION FUNCTION STATION MODEL NUMBER PASSBAND RESPONSE FLATNESS ( See Note 1) Trunk Amplifier Bridger or Distribution Amplifier MINIMUM FULL GAIN, without equalizers ( See Note 2) Trunk Amplifier Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
RECOMMENDED OPERATING GAIN at 300 MHz. without equalizer Trunk IN to Trunk Out Trunk IN to Bridger ( Distribution) OUT TYPICAL OPERATING LEVELS for 35 channels, with equalizers Trunk IN Trunk OUT Bridger ( Distribution) OUT DISTORTION CHARACTERISTICS ( typical for op. levels) 2nd Order Beats. Chs. 2. 20(G). 13
Trunk Amplifier Bridger or Distribution Amplifier Composite Triple Beat* Trunk Amplifier Bridger or Distribution Amplifier HUM MODULATION ( by 60 Hz line) MAXIMUM NOISE FIGURE, without equalizers at 54 MHz at 300 MHz
MANUAL GAIN CONTROL RANGE. minimum Trunk Amplifier
Bridger or Distribution Amplifier OPTIONAL INPUT LEVEL PADDING
MANUAL SLOPE CONTROL RANGE, minimum in Bridger or Distribution Amplifier ( Ch. 2/36)
AUTOMATIC SLOPE AND GAIN CONTROL: For changes in cable ( ref. to 300 MHz)
and/or changes in input level of Amplifier output at pilot frequency holds at CONTROL CARRIERS
AGC factory-tuned to Ch. retunable in the field to Ch. Operating Level, minimum/maximum dBmV ASC factory- tuned to Ch. retunable in the field to Ch. Operating Level, minimum/maximum dBmV THERMAL COMPENSATION for ambient changes in amplifier over ° F and in cable span of: Trunk output holds within:
TERMINAL MATCH at 75 ohm impedance POWER REQUIREMENT ( in Station Housing)
60 VSystem 30 VSystem
DC OPERATING VOLTAGE
Watts Amps Watts Amps
AC BYPASS CAPABILITY, maximum
Trunk, each way
Feeders, each
OVERALL DIMENSIONS SHIPPING WEIGHT
TR. AMP. W/ASC BR. AMP. SJS-1AS
±0.15 dB ±0.4 dB
26 dB 47 dB
25 dB 42 dB
9dBmV 32 dBmV 49 dBmV
82 dB 70 dB
92 dB 66 dB
7dB 7dB
8dB 9dB
3-6 dB
+3/-4 dB +5/-2 dB ±0.5 dB
4 2or 3 27/40
11 10 or 12 29/40
-
SJSW 30.3 0.55 31.3 1.22
8A 5A
TR. AMP. BR. AMP.
TR. AMP. W/ASC -
TR. AMP. -
SJS-2AS
SJS-3A
SJS-4A
40 to 300 MHz. all stations
±0.15 dB ±0.4 dB
±0.15 dB -
±0.15 dB -
26 dB 47 dB
26.5 dB -
26.5 dB -
25 dB 42 dB
25 dB -
25 dB -
9dBmV 32 dBmV 49 dBmV
9dBmV 32 dBmV
-
9dBmV 32 dBmV
-
82 dB 70 dB
83 dB -
83 dB
92 dB 66 dB
94 dB -
70 dB. all stations
94dB -
7dB 7dB
7dB 7dB
7dB 7dB
8dB
8dB
8dB
9dB
-
-
by SXP-· in chassis, SXP-0 factory inserted
3-6 dB
-
+3/-4dB
+5/-2 dB
-
±0.5 dB
4
2or 3
26/40
11
-
10 or 12
-
-
28/40
-
-40/ + 140
-
-40/ + 140
18 dB
18 dB
±0.75 dB
-
±0.75 dB
16 dB minimum return loss, all terminals
SJSW 27.4
0.5 28.4 1.1
SJSW 16.7 0.3 17.2 0.67
SJSW 13.7 0.25 14.2 0.55
-27V, all stations
8A
8A
8A
5A
-
-
18 3,4" Lx5 1 /4 "Dx8'4" W, 476x 133x225 mm
22 lbs.
TERMJINT. TR. BR. AMP. SJS-5AS
±0.5 dB
42 dB
40 dB 11 dBmV
49 dBmV
70 dB
66 dB
8.5 dB 9dB 8dB
3-6 dB
-40/ + 140
20 dB ±1.5 dB
SJSW 15.2 0.28 15.7
.61
5A
C.W. signals and spectrum analyzer.
NOTES: 1. Trunk amplifier specifications are for flat response and flat output levels. 2. Bridger and distribution specifications are for 6 dB slope ( Ch. 2 to Ch. 36) for response and output levels referenced to Ch. 36. 3. For 21 channels, composite triple beat rating increases 3dBm V ( ref. 35 channels composite triple beat). 4. For 12 channels, composite triple beat rating increases 6dBm V ( ref. 35 channels composite triple beat). 5. Manual slope control on SJS-1AS/ Eand SJS-3A/ Eis factory set to -3dB at 300 MHz.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-69
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION 4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
System Performance Specifications: SJ 330 High Gain Mainstations-Operating to 330 MHz
STATION FUNCTION
STATION MODEL NUMBER PASSBAND RESPONSE FLATNESS ( See Note 1) Trunk Amplifier. Bridger or Distribution Amplifier MINIMUM FULL GAIN, without equalizers ( See Note 2) Trunk Amplifier Bridger or Distribution Amplifier RECOMMENDED OPERATING GAIN at 330 MHz, without equalizer Trunk IN to Trunk Out Trunk IN to Bridger ( Distribution) OUT TYPICAL OPERATING LEVELS for 40 channels, with equalizers Trunk IN Trunk OUT Bridger ( Distribution) OUT DISTORTION CHARACTERISTICS ( typical for op. levels) 2nd Order Beats, Chs. 2, 20(9), 13
Trunk Amplifier Bridger or Distribution Amplifier Composite Triple Beat Trunk Amplifier Bridger or Distribution Amplifier Cross Modulation Trunk Bridger
HUM MODULATION ( by 60 Hz line) MAXIMUM NOISE FIGURE, without equalizers
at 54 MHz at 330 MHz MANUAL GAIN CONTROL RANGE, minimum Trunk Amplifier Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
OPTIONAL INPUT LEVEL PADDING MANUAL SLOPE CONTROL RANGE,
minimum in Bridger or Distribution Amplifier ( Ch. 2/36) AUTOMATIC SLOPE AND GAIN CONTROL: For changes in cable ( ref. to 330 MHz) and/or changes in input level of Amplifier output at pilot frequency holds at CONTROL CARRIERS
AGC factory-tuned to Ch. retunable in the field to Ch. Operating Level, minimum/maximum dBmV ASC factory- tuned to Ch retunable in the field to Ch. Operating Level, minimum/maximum dBmV THERMAL COMPENSATION for ambient changes in amplifier over ° F
and in cable span of: Trunk output holds within: TERMINAL MATCH at 75 ohm impedance POWER REQUIREMENT ( in Station Housing)
60 VSystem
30 VSystem
Watts Amps Watts Amps
DC OPERATING VOLTAGE AC BYPASS CAPABILITY, maximum
Trunk, each way
Feeders, each
OVERALL DIMENSIONS SHIPPING WEIGHT
TR. AMP. W/ASC BR. AMP.
SJ-1SS/330
±0.25 dB ±06 dB
31 dB 47 dB
29 dB 45 dB
7dBmV 34 dBmV 43/50 dBmV
82 dB 69 dB
88 dB 63 dB
85 dB 59 dB
7 5dB 85dB 0-8dB 0-9 dB
0-8dB +3/-4 dB +5/-2 dB ±05 dB
4 2or 3 27/40
36 35-37 29/40
SJSV/ 38
0.65 42.9 1.30
8A 5A
TR. AMP. BR.TUIP.
TRW./AASMPC.
TR. AMP.
SJ-2SS/330
SJ-3SS/330
SJ-4SS/330
52 to 330 MHz, all stations
±0.25 dB ±06 dB
±0.25 dB
±0.25 dB
31 dB 47 dB
31 dB
31 dB
29 dB 45 dB
29 dB
29 dB
7dBmV 34 dBmV 43/50 dBmV
7dBmV 34 dBmV
7dBmV 34 dBmV
82 dB 69 dB
82 dB
82 dB
90 dB 63 dB
90 dB
92 dB
87 dB 59 dB
87 dB 70 dB, all stations
89 dB
7.5 dB 8.5 dB
7.5 dB 8.5 dB
7.5 dB 8.5 d8
0-8 dB
0-8 dB
0-8 dB
0-9 dB
by SXP-· in chassis, SXP-0 factory inserted
0-8 dB
-3/-4 dB +5/-2 dB ±0.5 dB
4
2or 3
27/40
36
35-37
28/40
-40/ + 140
-40/ + 140
18 dB
18 dB
±0.75 dB
±0.75 dB
16 dB minimum return loss, all terminals
SJSW 37 0.62 40.9 1.24
SJSW 20
0.33 21.78
.66
SJSW 19
0.32 21.12
.64
-27V, all stations
8A
8A
8A
5A
18 3 /4 " Lx5 1 /4 "Dx8 1/." W, 476x133x225 mm 22 lbs
TERM.IINT. TRA.MPB.R.
SJ-5SS/330
±0.6 dB 47 dB 42 dB
9.5 dBmV 43/50 dBmV
69 dB 63 dB 59 dB 1.0 dB 9.0 dB 0-8 dB 0-8 dB
140 20 dB ±15 dB SJSW
19 0.32 21.12 .64
5A
NOTES: 1. Trunk amplifier specifications are for flat response and flat output levels. 2. Bridger and distribution specifications are for 7dB slope ( Ch. 2to Ch. 41 for response and output levels referenced to Ch. 41).
3. Manual slope control in SJ-1-330 and SJ-3-330 is factory set to -3dB at 330 MHz.
VRF-70
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION 4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
System Performance Specifications: SJ 450 Basic Mainstations- Operating to 450 MHz
STATION FUNCTION STATION MODEL NUMBER
PASSBAND
RESPONSE FLATNESS ( See Note 1) Trunk Amplifier
Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
MINIMUM FULL GAIN, without equalizers Trunk Amplifier ( See Note 3)
Bridger or Distribution Amplifier ( See Note 2)
RECOMMENDED OPERATING GAIN at 450 MHz. without equalizer Trunk IN to Trunk OUT
Trunk IN to Bridger ( Distribution) OUT TYPICAL OPERATING LEVELS for 60 channels, with equalizers Trunk IN Trunk OUT
Bridger ( Distribution) OUT
DISTORTION CHARACTERISTICS ( for typical op. levels)
2nd Order Beats, Chs. 2. 20. 13 Trunk Amplifier
Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
Composite Triple Beat Trunk Amplifier
Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
Cross Modulation Trunk
Bridger
HUM MODULATION ( by 60 Hz line)
MAXIMUM NOISE FIGURE. without equalizers at 54 MHz
at 450 MHz
MANUAL GAIN CONTROL RANGE, minimum Trunk Amplifier
Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
OPTIONAL INPUT LEVEL PADDING MANUAL SLOPE CONTROL RANGE,
minimum in Bridger or Distribution Amplifier ( Ch. 2/61)
AUTOMATIC SLOPE AND GAIN CONTROL: For changes in cable ( ref. to 450 MHz)
and/or changes in input level of Amplifier output at pilot frequency holds at
CONTROL CARRIERS AGC factory- tuned to Ch.
retunable in the field to Ch.
Operating Level, minimum/maximum dBmV
ASC factory-tuned to Ch. ref unable in the field to Ch. Operating Level, minimum/maximum dBmV THERMAL COMPENSATION for ambient changes in amplifier over ° F
and in cable span of: Trunk output holds within:
TERMINAL MATCH at 75 ohm impedance POWER REQUIREMENT ( in Station Housing)
60 VSystem
30 VSystem
DC OPERATING VOLTAGE
Watts Amps
Watts Amps
AC BYPASS CAPABILITY, maximum
Trunk, each way
Feeders, each
OVERALL DIMENSIONS SHIPPING WEIGHT
TR. AMP. W/ASC BR. AMP.
SJ-1SS/450
±0.25 dB ±0.6 dB
26 dB 47 dB
25 dB 40 dB
9dBmV 32 dBmV 47 dBmV
82 dB 70 dB
80 dB 59 dB
86 dB 58 dB
7.5dB 8.5 dB
8dB 9dB
3-9 dB
+2/-4 dB +5/-2 dB ±0.5 dB
4 2or 3 27/40 36 I ( W) 35 1-37 I 29/40
-
SJSW 30.3 0.55 31.3 1.22
8A 5A
TR. AMP. BR. AMP.
TR. AMP. W/-ASC
TERMJINT. -
SJ-2SS/450
SJ-3SS/450
SJ-4SS/450
40 to 450 MHz. all stations
±0.25 dB ±0.6 dB
26 dB 47dB
±0.25 dB -
26.5 dB
±0.25 dB -
26.5 dB
25 dB 40 dB
9dBmV 32 dBmV 47 dBmV
25 dB -
9dBmV 32 dBmV
-
25 dB -
9dBmV 32 dBmV
-
82 dB 70 dB
83 dB -
83 dB -
82 dB 59 dB
82 dB -
84 dB
88 dB 58 dB
7.5 dB 8.5 dB
88 dB -
70 dB. all stations
7.5 dB 8.5 dB
90 dB -
7.5 dB 8.5 dB
8dB
8dB
8dB
9dB
-
-
by SXP- in chassis, SXP-0 factory inserted
3-9 dB
-
-2/-4 dB
-
-
+5/-2 dB
-
±0.5 dB
-
4
-
-
2or 3
-
-
26/40
-
36 1 ( W)
-
35 1-37 I
-
-
28/40
-
-40/+ 140
-
-40/ + 140
18 dB
-
18 dB
±0.75 dB __
-
±0.75 dB
16 dB minimum return loss, all terminals
SJSW 27.4 0.5 28.4 1.1
SJSW 16.7
0.3 17.28 0.67
SJSW 13.7 0.25 14.2
0.55
-27V, all stations
8A
8A
8A
5A
-
-
18 3 /4 " Lx5 1 /4 ** Dx8 1/5"W. 476x133x225 mm 22 lbs.
TR. BR. AMP.
SJ-5SS/450
±0.6 dB
39 dB
37 dB 12 dBmV
47 dBmV
70 dB -
59 dB
58 dB
13 dB 10 dB
8dB
3-9 dB -
-
-40/ + 140 20 dB ±1.5 dB
SJSW 15.2 0.28 15.7 .61
5A
Notes: 1. Trunk amplifier specifications are for flat response and fat output levels. 2. Bridger and distribution specifications are for 9dB slope ( Ch. 2to Ch. 61 for response and output levels referenced to Ch. 61). 3. Manual slope control in SJ-1SS/450 and SJ-3SS/450 is factory set to -2dB at 450 MHz.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-71
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
CABLE EQUALIZERS FOR MAINSTATIONS
Forward Equalizers The forward cable equalizers used in all Starline " SJ" mainstations include fourteen sub-series: SEP-224°, SEP -225°, SEP -274°, SEP-275, SEP -304°, SEP -305, SEP -334°, SEP-335°, SEP -354, SEP-355°, SEP -404°, SEP -405, SEP -454° and SEP-455*. These equalizers plug into connector chassis model SCD-2WD, SCD2WDS, SCL-2WD, and SCD-2WFS. Specific functions are described below.
Model SEP -224 Series- For 220MHz One-Way Applications
This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of 40-220MHz and is utilized in one-way mainstations that do not use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters.
MODEL Passband RRRRR nse Flatness Max. Insertion Loss
SEP-22411.
SEP -2241
-
40-220 MHz 40-220 MHz
n.-0.15 dB
-:11.1 dB
2.3 dB
1dB
SEP -224H
SEP.224ST
40-220 MHz 40-220 MHz -
±-0.1 dB
st-0 15 dB _.
1.2 dB
1.5 dB
Variable Equalization RRRRR at 260 MHz
211 dB
10-16 dB
15-22 dB
19-26 dB
Terminal Match. return loss, 75 II impedance ( minimum)
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
All equalizers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dielectric, coaxial cable.
Model SEP -225 Series- For 220MHz Two-Way Mainstations ( With Filters) This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of 52-220MHz and is utilized in two-way mainstations that use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters.
MODEL Passband Response Flatness Max. Insertion Loss Variable Equalization Range at 260 MHz Terminal Match, return loss 75 ( 1 impedance ( minimum)
SEP -2251 52.220 MHz
-0 1dB IdB
10 16 dB
SEP -225H 52.220 MHz
-t0.1 dB 1.2 dB
15-22 dB
16 dB
16 dB
SEP -2250T 52 220 MHz
-±0.15 dB 2 08
19-26 dB
16 d8
All equalizers are designed fo 0.5 inch oute diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dielectric, coaxial cable.
Model SEP -274 Series- For 270MHz One-Way Applications This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of
40-270MHz and is utilized in one-way mainstations that do not use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters. ( For midsplit mainstations use this equalizer series.)
MODEL Passband Response Flatness Max. Insertion Loss Variable Equalization Range at 270 MHz Terminal Match. return loss, 75 II impedance ( minimum)
SEP-274TL
SEP -2741
40-270 MHz 40-270 MHz
±-0.15 dB
±0.1 dB
2.6 dB
1.3 dB
2-11 dB
10-16 dB
15 dB
18 dB
SEP -274N 40-270 MHz
It-0.1 dB 1.3 dB
15-22 dB
18 dB
SEP -2145T 40-270 MHz
±-0.15 dB 1.6 dp
19-26 dB
16 dB
All equalizers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diame er, aluminum sheathed, foam dielectric, coaxial cable.
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
Model SEP -275 Series- For 270MHz Two-Way Mainstations ( With Filters) This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of
52-270MHz and is utilized in two-way mainstations that use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters.
MODEL
Passband Response Flatness Max. Insertion Loss Variable Equalization Range at 270 MHz Terminal Match. return loss, 75 (1 impedance ( minimum)
SEP -275L 52-270 MHz
-- C).1 dB 1.3 dB
10-16 dB
18 dB
SEP -275H 52.270 MHz
-t0.1 dB 1.3 dB 15-22 dB
18 dB
SEP -27557 52-270 MHz
-±-0.15 dB
1.6 dB 19-26 dB
16 dB
All equalizers are designed fo 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dielectric, coaxial cable.
Model SEP -304 Series- For 300MHz One-Way Applications This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of 40-300MHz and is utilized in one-way mainstations that do not use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters. ( For midsplit mainstations use this equalizer series.)
MODEL
SEP-30471 SEP-3041 SEP-304H SEP-304S1
Passband
40-300 MHz 40-300 MHz 40-300 MHz 40-300 MHz
Response Flatness
±0 15 dB ±0.1 dB
±0 1dB ±0.15 dB
Maximum Insertion Loss
2.5 dB
1.3 dB
13dB
1.6 dB
Variable Equalization Range at 300 MHz
2-11 dB
10-16 dB 15-22 dB 19-26 dB
Terminal Match, return loss. 75 ohm impedance (minimum)
15 dB
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
All equalizers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dielectric, coaxial cable.
Model SEP -305 Series- For 300MHz Two-Way Mainstations ( With Filters) This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of
52-300MHz and is utilized in two-way mainstations that use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters.
MODEL
Passband Response Flatness
Maximum Insertion Loss
Variable Equalization Range a) 300 MHz
Terminal Match, return Issu, 75 ohm impedance (minimum)
SEP-305L 52-300 MHz
±0 10 dB 13dB
10-16 dB
16 dB
SEP-305H 52-300 MHz
±0 10 cl13 13dB
15-22 dB
16 dB
SEP-305ST 52-300 MHz
±0 15dB 15dB
19-26 dB
16 dB
All equa izers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dielectric, coaxial cable.
Model SEP -334 Series- For 330MHz
Two-Way Mainstations ( With Filters) This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of
330MHz and is utilized in two-way mainstations that use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters.
MODEL
Passband
Response Flatness
Maximum Insertion Loss
Variable Equalization Range at 350 MHz
Terminal Match, return loss. 75 ohm impedance (minimum)
SEP -3341 40-330 MHz
±0 15 dB 1.3 dB
10-16 dB
18 dB
SEP-334H 40-330 MHz
±0 15dB 1.3 dB
15-22 dB
18 dB
SEP -334S1 40-330 MHz
±0.15 dB 1.7 dB
19-26 dB
16 dB
All equalizers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dielectric, coaxial cable.
VRF-72
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave.
Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1 600
FORWARD EQUALIZERS ( Cont'd.)
Model SEP -335 Series -- For 330MHz Two- Way Mainstations ( With Filters) This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of 52-330MHz and is utilized in two-way mainstations that use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters.
MODEL
Passband
Response Flatness
Maximum Insertion Loss
Variable Equalization Range at 400 MHz
Terminal Match, return loss. 75 ohm impedance (minimum)
SEP -335L 54-330 MHz
±0 15 dB 13013
10-16 dB
18 dB
SEP -335H 54-330 MHz
±0.15 dB 1.3 dB
15-20 dB
18 dB
SEP-335ST I 54-330 MHz
±0.2 dB 1 7 a
20-28 dB
15 dB
All equalizers are designed fo 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dilectric, coaxial cable.
Model SEP -3M Series -- For 350MHz One-Way Applications This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of 40-350MHz and is utilized in one-way mainstations that do not use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters. ( For midsplit mainstations use this equalizer series.)
MODEL Passband Response Flatness Maximum Insertion Loss
SEP-354TL SEP-354L SEP-354H SEP-354S1
40-350 MHz 40-350 MHz 40-350 MHz 40-350 MHz
± 2dB
±.15 dB ± 15 dB
± 2dB
20dB
1.3 dB
1.3 dB
1.6 dB
Variable Equalization Range at 300 MHz
5-11 dB
10-16 dB 15-20 dB 20-26 dB
Terminal Match, return loss, 75 ohm impedance (minimum)
16 dB
18 dB
18 dB
16 dB
All equalizers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dilectric, coaxial cable.
Model SEP -355 Series -- For 350MHz Two-Way Mainstations ( With Filters) This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of 52-350MHz and is utilized in two-way mainstations that use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters.
MODEL
Passband
Response Flatness Maximum Insertion Loss
Variable Equalization Range at 300 MHz
Terminal Match, return loss, 75 ohm impedance (minimum)
SEP-355L 52-350 MHz
± . 15 dB 1.3 dB
10-16 dB
18 dB
SEP -355H 52-350 MHz
i- . 15 dB 1.3 dB
15-20 dB
18 dB
SEP-355ST 52-350 MHz
± . 2dB 1.6 dB
20-26 dB
16 dB
All equalizers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dilectric, coaxial cable.
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
Model SEP -404 Series -- For 400MHz One-Way Applications This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of 40-400MHz and is utilized in one-way mainstations that do not use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters. ( For midsplit mainstations use this
equalizer series.)
MODEL Passband Response Flatness Maximum Insertion Loss
SEP-404TL SEP-404L SEP-404H SEP-404S1
40-400 MHz 40-400 MHz 40-400 MHz 40-400 MHz
±02 dB ±0.15 dB ±0 15 dB ±0.2 dB
20dB
13dB
13dB
16dB
Variable Equalization Range at 400 MHz
5-11 dB
10-16 dB 15-20 dB 20-26 dB
Terminal Match, return loss. 75 ohm impedance (minimum)
16 dB
16 nB
16 dB
16 dB
All equalizers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dilectric, coaxial cable.
Model SEP -405 Series -- For 400MHz Two-Way Mainstations ( With Filters) This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of 52-400MHz and is utilized in two-way mainstations that use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters.
MODEL
Passband
Response Flatness
Maximum Insertion Loss
Variable Equalization Range at 400 MHz
Terminal Match, return loss. 75 ohm impedance (minimum)
SEP-405L 52-400 MHz
±0.15 dB 13dB
10-16 dB
16 dB
SEP-405H 52-400 MHz
±0.15 dB 1.3 dB
15-20 dB
16 dB
SEP-405ST 52-400 MHz
±0 16 a 16dB
20-26 dB
16 dB
All equalizers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dilectric, coaxial cable.
Model SEP -454 Series -- For 450MHz One-Way Applications This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of 40-450MHz and is utilized in one-way mainstations that do not use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters. ( For midsplit stations use the following equalizer series.)
MODEL
SEP-454TL
Passband
40-450 MHz
Response Flatness
±02dB
Maximum Insertion Loss
2.0 dB
Variable Equalization Range at 450 MHz
5-11 dB
Terminal Match, return loss. 75 ohm impedance (rnamum)
16 dB
All equalizers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dilectric, coaxial cable.
Model SEP -455 Series -- For 450MHz Two- Way Mainstations ( With Filters) This series of variable cable equalizers operates within apassband of 52-450MHz and is utilized in two-way mainstations that use model TF-30/TF-30F trunk filters.
MODEL
Passband
Response Flatness Maximum Insertion Loss
Variable Equalization Range at 450 MHz Terminal Match, return loss. 75 ohm impedance (minimum)
SEP-455-L 52-450 MHz
± 5dB 13dB
10-16 dB
16 dB
SEP -455-H 52-450 MHz
± 15 dB 1.3 dB
15-20 dB
16 dB
SEP-455- ST 52-450 MHz
± 15 dB 16dB
20-26 dB
16 dB
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-73
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
RETURN EQUALIZERS
RETURN EQUALIZERS Trunk return cable equalizers used in all standard Starline "SJ" mainstations include two sub-series: SEP-30C3 and SEP -108*.
These equalizers couple and attenuate the return trunk and feeder signals before amplification by the trunk return amplifier. Two facilities for plug-in pads, model SXP-*, provide for the additional attenuation to the trunk return amplifier. These equalizers plug into connector chassis model SCD-2WDS, SCD-2WFS or SCL-2WD. Specific functions are described below.
MODEL SEP-30C3-- FOR TWO-WAY SUBSPLIT MAINSTATIONS This variable cable equalizer operates within apassband of 5-32MHz and is utilized in two-way subsplit mainstations that use model TRA-30M or TRA-30A trunk return amplifiers.
%simnel
MODEL
SEP SOCS 5.32 MHz
Response Fowles.
t0.2 dB
Mee. Reunion Lem., 30 MHz · Trunk ·Feeder
1.5 de 3.5 de, -, 0.2 dB max.
Varible Equelizer Renee at 30 MHz lequwelent torwerd specing et 300 NH,)
3-7 de 110.21 dB)
Iseletion Between Trunk and Feeder Inputs
30 dB min.
Tiemrpreitdhaeneclet(himicnkirmeutmu)rn1 IodnB, 75 St
8
Return Signet Attenuation Feeders
SXP. plug.,n factlinn for both trunk
and feeder return path. SXP.0 units factory·onserted Note: Where feeder coupler section le not used, intent
SOP- 15
All equalizers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dielectric, coaxial cable.
MODEL SEP-108*C SERIES-- FOR TWO-WAY MIDSPLIT MAINSTATIONS This series of variable cable equalizers operates within a passband of 5-116MHz and is utilized in two-way midsplit mainstations that use model TRM-110 or TRA-108A trunk return amplifiers.
MODEL Pesebend Response ileums
Mee. Insertion Loss, et 108 MHz - Trunk -Feeder
SE11 108LC
5.116 MHz
el2 dB
3.1 dB 811±0.5 dB
SEP-1111111C
5-116MHz
e.2 dB
3.8 dB 8.810.5 dB
Variable Eizieelizer Rile et 108 MHz ledurvelent forwerd specula at 300 MHz)
holotion Between Trunk and Feeder Inputs
5.11 dB 19-19 dB)
1014 dB 11025 dB)
35 dB min.
Terminal Mock, return lote. 75 11 ,mpedence ( minimum)
18 d8
Return Signal Attmenetiee Fecdities
SNP , plug-in lecility for both trunk
end feeder return path; SOP- 0 units factory maned. Note: Where feeder coupler section Is not used. Ineon SOP- 15
RETURN FEEDER DISCONNECT SWITCH AND EQUALIZER
RETURN FEEDER DISCONNECT SWITCH AND EQUALIZER
Model SEP -30S incorporates adiode switch in the reverse feeder path, a reverse trunk and feeder combiner, and a sub-split reverse trunk equalizer. Trunk and feeder paths are provided with SXP, plug-in pad, facilities.
Local control of the feeder switch is provided by a3posi-
tion slide switch; with " on", " remote", or " off" positions. In the " on" position, the return feeders are connected to the return trunk path. In the " off" position, the return feeder path is disconnected and terminated in 75 ohms. In the " remote" position, the switch is controlled by aTTL compatible logic signal supplied thru the seventh port of the starting twenty housing. The SEP -30S must be used in conjunction with the SCD-2WDS/SCD-2WFS connector chassis, which is wired to provide the proper inputs.
To order Starline " SJ" Series electronics with SCD2WDS/SCD-2WFS connector chassis for feeder disconnect, order SJ-450-*S/E for 300-450MHz systems,
SJS-*S/E for 300 or 400MHz systems for SJS-*AS/E for 220, 270, or 300MHz systems.
Pentland
MODEL
SE113011 5-32 14Hz
Response Aetna.,
0.2 de
Mos. Insertion loss · Trunk -Feeder Connected
4.5 dB 5dB
Varible Equalizer Renee et 30 MHz (equivalent forward swing at 300 MHz)
3.7 dB 110-21 del
lueletion Between Trunk end Disco.meted Feeder
50 dB
Ten111114i Mete. Return Loss, 75 SI impedance ( minimum)
18 dB
Return Seal Attenseetion Fealities
SOP` plug-in Wilde for both trunk and feeder return putt; SNP.° units lactorynnerted. Note: Where feeder coupler section is not used, insert SS P-15
Remote >rite Control Input
TTL Compatible
DC Opereting Volta"
·27V al 0.01 A
Lqualizer is designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dielectric, coaxial cable.
All equalizers are designed for 0.5 inch outer diameter, aluminum sheathed, foam dielectric, coaxial cable.
VRF-74
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TRA-30M
TRUNK RETURN AMPLIFIERS The trunk return amplifiers used in all Starline " SJ" Series mainstations include four models: TRA-30M-TRA-30A, TRA-108M and TRA-108A. Specific functions are described below:
MODEL TRA-30M -- FOR SUBSPLIT MAINSTATIONS The model TRA-30M trunk return amplifier with manual gain control, for all " SJ" Series mainstations, will amplify 4 channels in the 5-32 MHz band. This push-pull amplifier is thermally controlled to compensate for changes in amplifier gain and for changes in attenuation and slope in 18 dB of cable due to environmental variations. The TRA-30 M trunk return amplifier plugs into the manual return trunk compartment of connector chassis model SCL-2WD, SCD-2WD and SCD-F-SS and SCL-F-SS. Each unit is shipped with jumper cable ST-RJC.
MODEL TRA-30A--FOR SUBSPLIT MAINSTATIONS The model TRA-30A trunk return amplifier with AGC for models "SJ"-2 and " SJ"-4 mainstations, will amplify 4channels in the 5-30 MHz band. This push-pull amplifier utilizes a pilot- control carrier at 31.5 MHz to operate the AGC. The AGC can be turned on or off for ease of operational set-up and maintanance. The model TRA-30A trunk return amplifier plugs into connector chassis model SCL-2WD, SCD-2WDS and SCD-F-SS and SCL-FSS. Each unit is shipped with jumper board ST-RJB.
MODEL TRM-110 -- MANUAL GAIN CONTROL TRUNK RETURN AMPLIFIER FOR MIDSPLIT MAINSTATIONS The model TRM-110 trunk return amplifier with manual gain control for all " SJ" Series mainstations, will amplify 12 channels in the 5-116 MHz band. This push-pull amplifier is thermally controlled to compensate for changes in gain and for changes in attenuation and slope in 18 dB of cable due to environmental variations. The 7RM-110 trunk return plugs into the manual return trunk compartment of connector chassis model SCL-2WD, SCD-F-SS and SCL-F-SS and SCD-2WDS. Each unit is shipped with jumper cable ST-RJC.
MODEL TRA-108A AGC TRUNK RETURN AMPLIFIER FOR MIDSPLIT MAINSTATIONS The model TRA-1(18A trunk return amplifier with AGC, for models "SJ"-2 and " SJ"-4 mainstations, will amplify 12 channels within a 5-116 MHz passband. This push-pull amplifier utilizes a pliot-control carrier at 115 MHz to operate the AGC. The AGC can be turned on or off for ease of operational set-up and maintenance. The TRA-108A trunk return amplifier plugs into connector chassis model SCL-2WD, SCD-2WDS and SCD-F-SS and SCL-F-SS. Each unit is shipped with ajumper board ST-RJB.
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
RETURN CARRIER GENERATORS The return carrier generators used with Starline Series mainstations with installed AGC trunk return amplifiers include three models; RCPG-1-31.5, RCPG-1-115 and RCPG-2-48/ 180. The return carrier generator produces anoise band centered about a specified frequency to serve as a reference for the AGC circuitry in the trunk return amplifiers. The noise band can be attenuated by a3 dB output level control and by plug-in pads SXP-". Each trunk cable branch that has one or more mainstations containing an automatic return amplifier requires a generator at the extremity of the cable. Model RCF-"N, return carrier filters are required in selected mainstations with automatic trunk return amplifiers.
MODEL RCPG-1-31.5 FOR SUBSPLIT SYSTEMS The model RCPG-1-31.5 return carrier generator for subsplit Starline Series mainstations with automatic trunk return amplifiers, will produce apilot signal centered at 31.5 MHz. This pilot signal serves as a reference for the AGC circuitry in the trunk return amplifier.
MODEL RCPG-1-115-- FOR MIDSPLIT SYSTEMS The RCPG-1-115 return carrier generator for midsplit Starline Series mainstations with automatic trunk return amplifiers, will produce a pilot signal centered at 115 MHz. This pilot serves as a reference for the AGC circuitry in the trunk return amplifier.
MODEL RCPG-2-48/180--FOR HIGH SPLIT MIDSPLIT SYSTEMS The RCPG-2-48/ 180 return carrier generator used with Starline Series mainstations with automatic trunk return amplifiers, will produce two pilot signals; one at 48 MHz and another at 180 MHz
RCF-31.5N
RETURN CARRIER FILTERS The return carrier filters used in Starline " SJ" mainstations include two models: RCF-31.5N and RCF-115N. These filters attenuate the return AGC pilot signal in selected mainstations to prevent abuildup of pilot levels on the return path to the headend. Model RCF-*N filters are utilized at points in the return trunk signal path where two or more branches of the trunk combine. These filters are installed in the mainstation(s), with the AGC trunk return amplifier, model TRA-"A, closest to the combination point in each branch leaving one branch without the filter for passing the return carrier to operate the succeeding AGC return amplifiers.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-75
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
RETURN CARRIER FILTERS ( cont'd)
The Model RCF-· return carrier filter installs in the manual trunk return compartment of connector chassis model SCD-2WDS, SCLF-SS, SCL-F-MS, SCD-F-SS. Specific functions are described below:
MODEL RCF -31.5N -- FOR SUBSPLIT MAINSTATIONS
The Model RCF-31.5N return carrier filter for subsplit mainstation electronics, " SJ" Styles 2and 4will pass return trunk signals within aband of 5-30MHz while attenuating the return pilot carrier 3dB. The number of filters required for a system depends upon the trunk branching design of the specific system.
MODEL RCF -115N -- FOR MIDSPLIT MAINSTATIONS
The Model RCF-115N return carrier filter for midsplit mainstation electronics, " SJ" Styles 2and 4will pass return trunk signals within a band of 5-108MHz, while attenuating the return pilot carrier 3dB. The number of filters required for asystem depends on the trunk branching design for the specific system.
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
FRP-6
MODEL FRP-6--JUMPER BOARD FOR SUBSPLIT MAINSTATIONS
The model FRP-6 jumper board with 6dB attenuation for subsplit mainstations, " SJ" Style 5with installed trunk return amplifier model TRA-30M, is required to attenuate signals to the trunk return amplifier. This jumper board plugs into model TRA-30M.
MODEL FRB- 108-- JUMPER BOARD FOR SUBSPLIT
AND MIDSPLIT MAINSTATION ELECTRONICS
The Model FRB- 108 jumper board with SXP-" facility for subsplit and midsplit mainstation electronics, model " SJ" 5Station with installed trunk return amplifier, model IRA- 30M or TRM-110, is required to provide return path continuity and additional attenuation to the return trunk amplifier. This jumper board plugs into the return equalizer compartment of connector chassis SCD-2WFS, SCD-2WDS or SCD-2W. ( Shipped with SXP-0 installed.)
MODEL ST-RJB -- JUMPER BOARD FOR TWO-WAY MAINSTATIONS
The ST-RJB jumper board for two-way Starline " SJ" mainstations is required when trunk return amplifiers, TRA-30A and TRA-108A, are installed. This jumper board, shipped with those trunk return amplifiers, is installed in connector chassis models SCD-F-SS, SCL-F-SS, SCL-F-MS, SCD-2WDS, SCL-2WD, SCD-2W, and SCL-2W.
MODEL ST-RJC--JUMPER CABLE FOR TWO-WAY
MAINSTATIONS
The ST-RJC coaxial jumper cable for two-way Starline " SJ" main stations is required when trunk return amplifiers, TRA-30M and TRM-110, are installed. This coaxial jumper, shipped with those trunk return amplifiers, is installed in connector chassis models SCD-F-SS, SCL-F-SS, SCL-F-MS, SCD-2WDS, SCL-2WD, SCD-2W, and SC L- 2W.
FEEDERMAKERS FOR MAINSTATIONS MODEL FM-* F
FM-" Ffeedermakers are rotatable. They provide a choice of which feederline ports will be active.
The two-way feedermakers used in all Starline " SJ" Series main stations include four models. These plug-in feedermakers create 1to 4 feederline outputs at any distribution amplifier location equipped with connector chassis model SCD-2WD, SCD-F-SS and SCDF-MS.
Model I'ass Fla.d r' num. Lou
1Isoldnan
Formal& Itetrl,
FM If
5.150 OM 03 Om.
200e
FM 2F 5450 Mt
5300 35de·O 5013
300450 37 01.:05 OD
00 de 18 de
30 ell 111 de
--, f
FM If
5300
670PD 40 3540 05 08
2840
le Id
300450
3771e0s5e0e1
2000
le 411
5300 6711 , 05de
300-450 70:05 de
20 de II dB
2010 10 de
VRF-76
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
iottMODEL SXP-T-- FOR SXP- PADS
This tool makes it asimple task to install or remove SXP-pads.
SXP-T
PLUG-IN PADS FOR MAINSTATIONS AND LINE EXTENDERS MODEL SXP --FOR STARLINE " SJ" AND " SLR" SERIES This series of fixed value plug-in pads provides additional flat attenuation within a passband of 5-450MHz. These pads plug into model SCD-2WD, SCL-F-SS and SCL-FMS, SCD-F-SS, SEP -30S, SEP -30C3, SEP-108 - series, LPF-30, DF-30E-UH, FRB- 108 and SLR-series. Installation facilitated by using an SXP-T tool.
MODEL JXP --FOR STARLINE " JN", " SJ" AND ' JLE" MODULES This series of fixed value plug-in pads provides additional flat attenuation within a passband of 5-450MHz. These pads plug into models SJBM and SJDL.
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
MODEL TF -108F-- FOR MIDSPLIT MAINSTATIONS
The model TF-108F trunk filter, for mid-split mainstations, will pass forward trunk signals within a band of 168450MHz and pass return trunk signals within a band of 5-116MHz. Model TF-108F trunk filters plug into the input and output filter sections of connector chassis model SCD2WD, SCD-2WDS and SCL-2WD. Two are required for each station. The SCL-F-MS is shipped with two of these filters installed.
MODEL DF -30E-- FOR TWO-WAY DISTRIBUTION MAINSTATIONS
The model DF-30F distribution filter for two-way mainstations will pass forward signals within a band of 52450MHz and return feeder signals within a band of 532MHz. The DF-30F two-way distribution filter plugs into the bottom of connector chassis model SCD-2WD and SCD-2WDS. The SCD-F-SS is shipped with one of these filters installed.
MODEL DF-30E-UH -- FOR DUAL CABLE CROSSOVER APPLICATIONS
The model DF-30E-UH distribution filter in aStarline utility housing is used in a dual trunk single feeder mid-split system at crossover between mainstation.
MODEL SJSA-145
MODEL SSA- 145
CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR MAINSTATIONS MODEL CB -5--AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER The model CB-5 circuit breaker used in the SCD-2WD, SCD-2WDS and SCD-F-SS connector chassis is required for each operating feederline that is powered. This circuit breaker plugs into the socket provided on the SCD-2WD, SCD-2WDS and SCD-F-SS connector chassis.
TF- 108F
DF -30F
DF-30E-UH
FILTERS FOR MAINSTATIONS MODEL TF -30F --FOR SUBSPLIT MAINSTATIONS The model TF-30F trunk filter, for sub-split mainstations, will pass forward trunk signals within aband of 52-450MHz and pass return trunk signals within a band of 5-32MHz. Model TF -30F trunk filters plug into the input and output filter sections of connector chassis model SCD-2WD, SCL-2WD, SCD-2WDS. Two are required for each station; except for " SJ" Style 5. The SCD-F-SS and SCL-FSS connector chassis are shipped with two of these installed.
SURGE ARRESTORS
FOR SJSW-30 OR SJSW-60 POWER PACKS, MODEL SJSA -145 Replacement surge arrestor for SJSW-I I increases protection to 20,000 amp surge discharge currents ( 80 amps for 1/2 wave 60Hz) without interruption of service.
FOR STARLINE " SJ" MAINSTATIONS WITHOUT SJSW-1 IPOWER SUPPLY
Provides same excellent surge protection as the SJSA145. The SSA- 145 is mounted in the SCD-2W, SCD-2WDS, SCD-2W-FS and SCL-2W connector chassis.
FOR 30 AND 60V JLE LINE EXTENDERS, MODEL A0 -36 JLE housings provide receptacles at main input and output for optional insertion of AO-36-- useable for protection against line voltage surges in both 30V and 60V systems. Supplied 2per package.
FOR 60V STARLINE TWENTY MAINSTATIONS, MODEL A0 -6
Model A0-6 surge arrestor for 60V stations protects the electronics against surge voltages and AC transients on trunk and feeder- lines. This surge arrestor fits into the seized center conductor locations in the Starline " SJ" housing and is recommended to be used on all feed.. ports.
FOR 30V MAINSTATIONS, tvlOuZ't. AO -'
Model AO 3surge arrest( r
t' 'e. 4. 1.r
ut rvi
lation to model AC- 6, except · Is
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
"r·
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Feemont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294 1600
STARLINE X SERIES AMPLIFIIERS
The Starline X Series is the only mainstation amplifier that cost effectively meets today's modern system needs and provides future growth capabilities. The Starline X Series has been designed to utilize all ampli'ier technologies and provide more basic features related to reliability, installation ease, and maintenance. In addition, the X-Seres offers more advanced features than any other mainstation amplifier ever available. The Starline X allows yoi.. to optimize the tradeoffs between system performance, desired system features, and cost, so tnat you can customize your system to meet your objectives of cost and performance optimization.
FEATURES Reliability ·Redundancy options
Power supply Forward trunk amplifier Return trunk amplifier Bridget amplifier ·Complete station bypass · Return feeder ingress control · Return trunk ingress control ·Advanced status monitoring ( System Commander) ·Superior heat sinking ·Heavy duty surge protector ( 80 ampere follow-on current) Large system size ·Power doubled X-1500 increases cascadeability High channel capacity ·80 channel, 550 MHz ·60 cnannel, 450 MHz · Dual cable, single housing X-2000 Institutional systems · High split forward 234-450 MHz and return 5-174 MHz ·Trunk and feeder capability ·Dual pilot return amplifier ·Capable of uninterruptible data communications path ·Unequa led system reliability ( see above) Ease of installation and reduced maintenance · Right angle housing entry ports ·30 dB d;rectional coupler test points ·Modular design · Double hinged housing ·Redundancy minimizes emergency maintenance · Replaceable surge protectors ·Advanced status monitoring ( System Commander) Future growth capabilities ·Start with the basics, expand to advanced capabilities, as required, by simply plugging in the appropriate modules · Power doubling modules · Feedforward modules ·Return data traffic controller
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
STARLINE X SERIES HOUSING AND POWER SUPPLY COMBINATIONS
HOUSING Installation Features
·Right angle entry ports ·Double- hinged cover ·Bolt-on rotatable brackets ·Large, well spaced ports ·Direct AC powering port ·Test point accessible through housing ·Visual inspection of center conductor seizure
Reliability Features ·Made from corrosion resistant 360 aluminum to insure long life ·120 dB of port-to- port isolation ·Separate R.F.I. and weather gasket · RF port surge arrestor facilities ·Large heat sink areas · Large ground contact areas for chassis, insures extended system
stability · Large fins for maximum heat dissipation
The all new Starline X- Series housing was designed with the cable system operator in mind. Extreme care was taken to produce a housing that would save time and money when being installed and, at the same time, insure an extended lifetime of high reliability. In addition to the right angle entry ports, which simplify pedestal mounting, the double- hinged housing, bolt-on surface mounting brackets, well spaced ports and visual inspection of center conductor seizure are features that were specifically designed to ease equipment installation.
Long-term reliability is insured by built-in features like the large heal dissipating fins, expanded heat sink surface areas, separate R.F.I and weather gaskets, corrosion resistant 360 aluminum alloy anc improved ground contact areas for chassis- housing interface.
POWER SUPPLY COMBINATIONS
FEATURES ·Redundant DC power packs provide the utmost in reliability ·High efficiency switching circuit cuts power bills ·Status indicator lights on XNPD-60R ·Status monitoring available to report power pack status to headenc
The Starline X Series power supply was designed with reliability ir mind. This was achieved in two ways: by designing a rugged powe supply and then adding aback-up power supply in case the priman supply should fail. The standard Starline X Series power supply, Model XNPA-60, con sists of a heavy duty transformer, a DC regulator and fused A( inputs. The redundant Starline X Series power supply, Model XNPA-60R consists of the same heavy duty transformer and DC regulator plu an additional DC regulator module. The redundant DC regulato module contains a relay that switches to the back-up supply whei failure of the primary supply is sensed. The primary module has pilot light to indicate when the back-up supply is operating. Whei used in conjunction with the Starline Status Monitor, the operatini status of the D.C. supply is reported back to the headend. Thi XNPA-60R, therefore, provides uninterrupted service, while indicat ing afailure which can be scheduled for maintenance at alater time
VRF-78
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION 4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
Starline X-1000-450 MHz System Performance Specifications
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
Station Description
Passband ( Forward)
MHz
Response Flatness:
--Trunk Amplifier
-i- dB
--Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
Minimum Full Gain:
--Trunk Amplifier
dB
--Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
Gain Control Range:
--Trunk Amplifier
dB
--Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
Slope Control Range @ 450 MHz
--Trunk Amplifier
dB
--Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
Control Accuracy
Control Pilots
--ASC: Tuned to Channel
--
Tuneable to Channels
--
Operating Range Min/Max
--AGC: Tuned to Channel
--
Tuneable to Channels
--
Operating Range Min/Max
± dB dB dB
Return Loss. at 75 ohm Impedance
dB
Noise Figure
dB
Rec. Oper. Levels. w/Equalizers: --Trunk In --Trunk Out --Bridger or Dist. Amp Out
dBmV
Distortion Char. at Rec. Oper. Level ( 60 Channels)
--Composite Triple Beal
-- dB
:Trunk
:Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
--Cross Modulation -- dB
:Trunk
:Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
--Second Order
-- dB
:Trunk
:Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
Hum Modulation, by 60 Hz Line -- dB
Chroma Delay :CH -2 :CH -3 :T-7 :T-10 :Other Channels
n·sec
Station Powering: --At 60 Volts A.C. Input
--Operating Range --AC. Bypass Capability. Maximum
:Trunk, each Port :Feeder. each Port
Watts Amperes
Vrms
Amperes Amperes
Notes A B C D
E, F
G
H. I H
H. I, J
AGC/ASC Tr. Amp. with Br. 50-450 MHz
0.4 0 75
26 45
0-8 0-9
2-8 2-8 0.5
4 I 2or 3 21/29 36 I 35 Ior 371 27/35
16 7.5
9 25/31 39/47
Man. Tr. Amp. with Br. 50-450 MHz
0 4 0.75
26 45
0-8 0-9
2-8 2-8 0.75
-- _ -- _ -- -- 16 7.5
9 25/31 39/47
AGC/ASC Tr. Amp. 50-450 MHz
0 4
Man. Tr. Amp. 50-450 MHz
0.4
26
26
0-8 --
2-8
0.5
4 I 2or 3 21/29 36 I 35 Ior 37 I 27/35
16 7.5
9 25/31
0-8
2-8 -- 0.75
-- -- -- -- 16 7.5
9 25/31
--
Intermediate Terminating
Bridger 50-450 MHz
0.75
45
-- 0-9
-- 3-9 0.75
-- -- -- _ -- -- 16 7.5
9 -- 39/47
87 57
85 57
85 69 70
6 4 8 6 2
30.3 0.60
44-60
10 5
89 57
87 57
85.5 69 70
6 4 8 6 2
27.9 0.56
44-60
10 5
89
87
85.5
:
--
70
6 4
8 6 2
17 7 0.38 44-60
10
90 --
88 --
86 -- 70
6 4 8 6 2
15.3 0.33 44-60
10 --
-- 57 -- 57 -- 69 70
18.5 0.39 44-60 10 5
NOTES: A. For return amplifier specifications refer to the appropriate return amplifier.
B. Single station measures at recommended operating gain, with slope compensated by cable. Trunk system flatness is N/10+ 1typical at balance temperature.
C. Measured from trunk input to trunk output or single bridger output at 450 MHz without equalizer.
D. Range is referenced from minimum full gain. E. AGC/ASC trunk amplifier output level accuracy, at pilots, for -- 3dB, + 4dB of input level change at 50 MHz and 450 MHz.
F. Manual trunk amplifier output level accuracy, at 450 MHz, from ambient over the range of -- 40°C to + 60°C for 18 dB cable spans. G. Measured in station without equalizer at maximum gain, flat slope.
H. Standard channels, flat, per NCTA test methods, or sloped where indicated by dual levels. I. Measured with C.W. signals and spectrum analyzer. J. Any combination of channels 2, 20 ( g), and 13.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-79
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION 4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
Starline X-1500-550 MHz System Performance Specifications
Station Description
Passband ( Forward)
MHz
Response Flatness: --Trunk Amplifier --Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
-1- dB
Minimum Full Gain:
--Trunk Amplifier
dB
--Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
Gain Control Range:
--Trunk Amplifier
dB
--Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
Slope Control Range @ 550 MHz
--Trunk Amplifier
dB
--Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
Control Accuracy
Control Pilots --ASC: Tuned to Channel
--
Tuneable to Channels
--
Operating Range Min/Max
--AGG: Tuned to Channel
--
Tuneable to Channels
--
Operating Range Min/Max
-!-, dB dB dB
Return Loss. at 75 ohm Impedance
dB
Noise Figure
dB
Rec. Oper. Levels. w/Equalizers --Trunk In --Trunk Out --Bridger or Dist. Amp Out
dBmV
Distortion Char. at RecToper. Level ( 77 Channels)
--Composite Triple Beat :Trunk
-- dB
:Bridger
--Cross Modulation
--dB
:Trunk
:Bridger
--Second Order
--dB
:Trunk
:Bridger or Distribution Amplifier
Hum Modulation. by 60 Hz Line
--dB
Chroma Delay :CH- 2
:CH- 3
:T-7 :T-10 :Other Channels
n'sec
Station Powering: --At 60 Volts A.G. Input
--Operating Range --A.C. Bypass Capability, Maximum
:Trunk. each Port :Feeder. each Port
Watts Amperes
Vrms
Amperes Amperes
Notes A B C D
E. F
G
H. I H
H. I. J
AGC/ASC Tr. Amp. with Br. 50-550
0 3 0 60
25 41
0-8 0-6
2-8 2-8 0 5
4 I 2or 3 21/29 62 I N/A 27/35
16 9
10 25/31 35/45
87 64
89 66
86 73 70
6 4 8 6 2
43.8 0.84
44-60
10 5
Man. Tr. Amp. with Br. 50-550
.3 0.60
25 41
0-8 0-6
2-8 2-8 0.75
16 9
10 25/31 35/45
89 64
91 66
86.5 73 70
6 4 8 6 2
41 8 0 80
44-60
10 5
AGC/ASC Jr. Amp.
50-550
0.3 --
25 --
0-8
2-8 -- 0.5
4 I 2or 3 21/29 62 I N/A 27/35
16 9
10 25/31
--
89 --
91 --
86.5 -- 70
6 4 8 6 2
24.5 0.50
44-60
10
Man. Tr. Amp. 50-550
0.3 --
25 --
0-8
2-8 -- 0.75
16 9
10 25/31
--
90 --
92 -- 87 -- 70
6 4 8 6 2
22.4 0.45
44-60 10
NOTES: VRF-80
A. For return amplifier specifications refer to the appropriate return amplifier. B. Single station measured at recommended operating gain, with slope compensated by cable. Trunk system flatness is N/10 + 1
typical at balance temperature. C. Measured from trunk input to trunk output or single bridger output at 550 MHz without equalizer. D. Range is referenced from minimum full gain. E. AGC/ASC trunk amplifier output level accuracy, at pilots, for- 3dB, + 4dB of input level change at 50 MHz and 550 MHz. F. Manual trunk amplifier output level accuracy, at 550 MHz, from ambient over the range of -- 40°C to + 60°C for 18 dB cable spans. G. Measured in station without equalizer at maximum gain, flat slope. H. Standard channels, flat, per NCTA test methods, or sloped where indicated by dual levels. I. Measured with C.W. signals and spectrum analyzer. J. Any combination of channels 2, 20 ( g), and 13.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
SINGLE CABLE CONNECTOR CHASSIS
STARLINE X- SERIES SINGLE CABLE CONNECTOR CHASSIS
FEATURES ·Tested to 600 MHz ·30 dB directional coupler test points insure accurate measurements · MG connectors insure high reliability and response consistency · Dedicated trunk input and output filters available in subsplit and
highsplit ·Complete station bypass ( optional) · Heavy duty 80 amp. follow on surge protection ·Separate trunk and feeder power disposition switches ·Built-in Feedermaker for 1to 3outputs ·Standard chassis shipped with thermal breakers on all feeder lines
Jerrold's new Starline X single cable chassis offers the latest in stateof-the-art amplifier design. The dedicated input and output filters are tested for 600 MHz operation ( subsplit: 5-33/50-600 and highsplit: 5-174/234-600 MHz available). 30 dB directional coupler test points provide accurate readings regardless of system passive location, and the new feedermaker system is shipped with all the components required for 1, 2or 3outputs ( XFM-3 can be ordered to configure a4 output station). The new Starline X- Series single cable chassis can be ordered with Jerrold's exclusive complete station bypass feature. This valuable, optional feature provides the ultimate in system reliability by insuring an uninterruptible path for video and data signals.
DUAL CABLE CONNECTOR CHASSIS
STARLINE X- SERIES DUAL CABLE CONNECTOR CHASSIS AND INPUT/OUTPUT FILTERS
CHASSIS FEATURES ·All modules plug-in ·Totally passive for reliability · Standard heavy duty surge protector
·Return amplifiers may be installed in the forward direction for ease of system alignment
·Separate trunk and feeder power disposition switches · Fuse holders for feeder lines · MG connectors insure high reliability
The dual cable connector chassis of the Starline " X" Series Mainstation provides plug-in facilities for all modules. The connector chassis is highly reliable since it contains only passive electrical components; wiring interconnections, holders for feeder fuses, and power direction plugs. All chassis types provide wiring interconnections for the optional status monitor module.
The Starline X- Series dual cable chassis provides the ultimate in flexibility for system design.
TRUNK INPUT FILTER
DUAL CABLE CONNECTOR CHASSIS AND INPUT/OUTPUT FILTERS
INPUT/OUTPUT FILTER FEATURES ·AC filter circuit ·Diplex filters for subsplit, midsplit and highsplit return ·Plug-in variable equalizers for slope adjustment ·Plug-in pads to attenuate level ·Plug-in notch filters for return carrier channels The input and output modules extract the AC voltage from the trunk input, control the passband of each trunk, and accept plug-in attenuators. The output module includes adirectional coupler which provides the input to the bridger amplifier. The " A" cable usually carries both RF signals and AC to power the mainstation. When AC is entering the mainstation, an AC filter circuit in the input or output module separates the AC voltage from the RF signals. When the AC is leaving the mainstream, the outgoing AC is recombined with the trunk RF signals. Both the input and output modules contain an identical AC filter circuit.
Passband control is provided by diplex filters. Jumper modules without filters allow the full passband through. Modules with filters split the signals for two-way transmission. Subsplit, midsplit and highsplit modules are available.
The XIF input filter provides facilities for plug-in equalizers and pads.
The XOF output filter module has facilities for plug-in return carrier filters which are used to attenuate the return carrier when two return branches combine into one.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-81
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
STARLINE X- SERIES POWER DOUBLING AMPLIFIER MODULES ( 450 and 550 MHz)
Jerrold power doubling amplifier modules are designed with parallel output integrated circuit gain blocks which provide a5dB improvement in distortion performance in addition to increased reliability.
The 550 MHz amplifier modules provide the industry's widest bandwidth with performance characteristics comparable to 450 MHz products.
All power doubling amplifier modules offer superior heat sinking in the newly designed double-width modules.
STARLINE X- SERIES BRIDGER FILTER MODULES
The bridger filter controls the directional flow of signals and contains diode switches which control the insertion into the return trunk of signals from the feeder lines. The diode switches are controlled by the status monitor module.
The bridger filter receives forward signals from the bridger amplifier and directs them to the feedermaker. It receives return signals from the feedermaker and directs them through areturn feeder disconnect switch and combines them with the return trunk.
The XBF-450-30X, XBF-30X and XBF-174X Bridger Filters have a three position switch which can open, close or route the feeder return signals through a6dB attenuator. Use of the 6 dB attenuated path offers filtering of ingress without data interruption.
The XBF-450-30W has asingle switch which controls the entire 5to 32 MHz bandwidth. The XBF-450-30W can be used in both subsplit and X-2000 midsplit applications. The XBF-450-30S provides two return signal paths, 5-15 MHz for data, and 18-30 MHz for two video channels, and each return path has an independent control switch. The XBF-450-30S can be used in subsplit system applications only.
Both the XBF-450-30X and XBF-450-30W couple signals generated by the status monitor into the return path. They also couple return signals from the trunk with the return signals from the feeder. For trunk only, X-2000 status monitoring applications, the signals generated by the status monitor are coupled into the return trunk by using the bridger coupler, Model XBC-12, instead of a bridge filter.
STARLINE X-SERIES RETURN AMPLIFIERS
Jerrold offers the widest selection of return amplifiers in the CATV industry. Amplifiers for subsplit, midsplit and highsplit upstream systems are available in both automatic and manual models.
The XTRA-30 has automatic gain control and thermistor adjusted slope control for subsplit systems ( 5-33 MHz). The XTRM-33 is the manual amplifier ( manual gain control and thermistor adjusted slope control) for subsplit systems.
Midsplit systems ( 5-110 MHz) use the XTRA-110 and XTRM-110 return amplifiers. The XTRA-110 has automatic slope control and manual gain control and the XTRM-110, manual gain and thermistoradjusted slope control.
Jerrold offers two different automatic slope and gain control return amplifiers for highsplit ( 5-174 MHz) systems. The XTRA-174A is used with X-1000 and X-1500 highsplit mainstations, and has control pilots at 51 and 176 MHz. The XTRA-174 has control pilots at 48 and 180 MHz for use with X-2000 mainstations. The XTRM-174 is the manual return amplifier for all highsplit applications.
All return amplifiers can also be ordered with fail-safe ( FS) or fail-safe and bypass ( TFS) options. The fail-safe option provides a bypass around the return amplifier, in case of failure or loss of voltage. The "TFS" option offers bypass in addition to return trunk shut-off.
«NOW
RETURN CARRIER FILTER
STARLINE X-SERIES RETURN CARRIER FILTERS
The Return Carrier Filters used in the Starline X and JN Series mainstations are available for three system architectures: Subsplit, Midsplit and Highsplit. XCF-* ( used in X-2000 applications) and XRPF-* ( used in X-1000 or X-1500 applications) are used to maintain the return pilot carrier at the desired signal level in the first mainstation after combining points in the return system, where the two branches utilize automatically controlled return amplifiers. If only one branch utilizes automatically controlled return amplifiers, an XCF-" or XRPF-* are not required. The return carrier filter plugs into the output filter module of the Starline X Series mainstation. To closely estimate the quantity required, determine the number of return pilot generators used in aparticular trunk design and subtract one from that quantity.
VRF-82
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
STARLINE X- SERIES FORWARD AND RETURN EQUALIZERS
The Starline X- Series of fixed and variable equalizers are designed to compensate for slope variations due to cable attenuation at the input of atrunk amplifier. Both forward and return equalizers plug into the input filter of the amplifier station.
SPECIFICATIONS: XFE Series Fixed Forward Trunk Equalizers for Tilt Trunk Operation
PRIS111100
52400MO, Ma. loss Flatness Moon
52 450 M00 Model Lei FieseiS MAIO
52 550400 1.400 Loss Fulness Malen
8
XII 0 05 10 5 ill
0FE 0 05 005 18
OF 0 05 005 ilf
3
111( 404 3 1 5 ·015 ill
OF 454 1 IS EO 15 II
>FE 5S4 3 20 s0 i5 115
6
0E-404 6 12 :0 15 III
0E454 6 00 i0 15 /8
XFE.554 6 20 SOIS 18
UW802811018
11
12
XFE 404 9 1 8 :0 15 18
XFE 454 9 18 -El) IS 18
400 554-5 20 sl 0 15 18
Of 404 12 20 e0 IS 18
110 454 ,12 20 :0 15 18
XFE 554.12 10 tO 15 18
15
XFF 404 15 10 x0 15 18
OF 454 15 20 x0 15 lè
XFF 5S4 15 00 SOIS II
11
4FE.404 M 10 ,0 15 18
413 454 . 10 SR 15 18
01-554 13 10 SOTS 18
1
it
400 404 21 20 .0 35 18
IEFE 4. 21 20 00 15 18
OF S. I· 10 ell /5 18
SPECIFICATIONS: XE Series Variable Forward Trunk Equalizers for
Flat Trunk Operation
60 SSSSS 0
40 330 %Orr
/0.50 Range Loss
Fulness Maids
52 330 1414,
Model Range loss
Flatness WIEN
40 400 1.4Ne
Alo00 Range loss 3..00eis alalcn
52.400 MOO
610040
Flange WU Flatness 0100,
40 450 Um,
Model Range Losi 0141:000
Moe
52.450 610:
MoOel Range Lois
Ma,
TM 018 11 334't 511 10 s0 IS
USE XF 3301
0 40411 5/1 20 ·0 15
USE XE 4001
XF 45411 5 II 10 se Te lb USE XE 4.11
Lae
XE 3341 10 15 22 .0 15
it 3351 10 15 ' s0 15 18
0 4041 10 16 Il
se ie
X( 4051 10 16 I 1 E0 15 0
0 4541 10 16 IS 1075 28
XE 4551 10 16
ilidlum
xt 334414 13 19 12 1015 18
0 3354 13 13 , 1 10 15 II
04-404M 15 19 · 2 sO 15 18
XE-40514 15 . I 2 SO IS 111
0-4501 15 19 1 5 10 / 5 18
XE 4558 ..5 I 5
18
009 0 3340 I/ 21 1 1 s0 15 III 41 3350 1, 2, , 2 20 15 NI xt 4040 1/ 11 iS ,0 2
0 4057 II 22
.0 1 0 0 4540 Il12 14 E02 18
0 4550 t111
.
Super NMI, 001
AVAN Ali. f
MOT 404,14810
XE 4045' 21 26 1 6 ,0 2
0 40551 2, 26 I 6 ·0 1 10 0 4545T 21 26 24 re 0 70 ll 4455T il26 1 4
16
SPECIFICATIONS: Return Equalizers
8115.101000
5006 Passbang Egualuer
Range Reuleve 0040/440 MOO
e To Forward. 330 AINt
Amponer 300 SIMI Soaeng inserhon Loss 111.: i pypprty. fiatneSS TeEnnas Marco 1Mon I 15
NIA = Rol 40040/18
MIDI 05.11 0110· 1141 5-124 MOO
11 5-2008 10 5,1988 10.1808
I606 ·0 108 11141,
xRE 124m 5.114 MOO
Ill 5-2608 17.2438 18-3200
I606 .0 10e 18111
CONVENTIONAL 101081011
OAF 110L 5110 NNE
010 1104, 5-110 MO:
II 5-2618 10 5-1908 101108
18 5,16.18 1/108 16 2118
1611 ·0 08
1808
1 608 ·0 08 1618
911108515 40E 30 530 MHz
II 5 208 10 5 2406 10 209
I209 ·0 188 1808
800·308 5 30 011,
0 5 2628 10 2308 10 1301
1209 ·0 015 1/928
STARLINE X- SERIES ACCESSORIES
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
STARLINE X- SERIES FEEDERMAKERS SINGLE CABLE CHASSIS ( X-1000 or X-1500 Mainstations)
Jerrold's new single cable connector chassis is designed with a revolutionary new feedermaker system. Simplicity of use and low cost are the key factors of the product's design. All mainstation electronic packages are configured with athree ( 3) output feedermaker (two forward and one back). From this configuration, through the various placements of the jumper ( XFM-0) and splitter ( XFM-3), a total of six ( 6) different feedermaker arrangements can be constructed without having to order any additional feedermaker components. Only when a four ( 4) output feedermaker is required ( typically less than 20% of the overall requirements) is it necessary to order additional components. In the case of a four ( 4) output feedermaker, a splitter ( XFM-3) must be ordered in addition to the mainstation electronic package. The terminal match, at 75 ohms impedance, at the input to the feedermaker circuitry or any utilized output port is 18 dB or better. The minimum isolation between any two output ports is 21 dB or better.
1SSItl
Redundancy Splitter
Redundancy Splitter, Model XRS-SPL, is used on the input and output of amplifier modules when operating in the redundant mode (not required when using XRTA-* or XRBA-* modules). The XRSSPL is bolted into the Starline X Connector chassis.
Test Probe Adaptor
MODEL XTP-30F: Female Fto female MG test probe adaptor with 30 dB attenuation built-in. Test probe to connect field strength meter to test points on Starline X-2000 & JN Series Mainstations.
MODEL XTP-OF: Female F to female MG test probe adaptor with 0 dB of attenuation. Test probe to connect field strength meter to test points of Starline X Single Cable Chassis mainstations.
DUAL CABLE CHASSIS ( X-2000 Mainstation)
XFM feedermakers receive the output of the bridger or distribution amplifier and create from one to four feeder lines. The feedermaker also inserts AC power on the lines. The feedermaker is symmetrical and plugs into its socket in any of four positions. The position of the feedermaker governs which feeder ports will receive the output signals.
Each feeder line has a thermal circuit breaker which limits the AC current to 5amperes. The breaker resets automatically.
XFM Feedermakers can be used as JFM-" replacements for JN Series mainstations.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-83
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
STARLINE " JLE" SERIES LINE EXTENDERS
TWO WAY MODELS Line Extender Model JLE- 7- t - 2W Mini -Bridger Model JLE-6- t - 2W Mini -Bridger Model JLE-5-6P-2W
FEATURES · Low noise figure ·High output capability ·Very low power consumption · Reliable operation during over voltage conditions ·Current limiting circuitry protects the power supply · DC over voltage sensing protects the amplifier module ·Interchangeable accessories and modules
The JLE-7 and JLE-6 utilize quad technology. The JLE- 7is intended for use as atypical feeder line extender, and the JLE- 6is ideally suited for short haul minibridger applications or for ' stretched feeder' situations. Both the JLE-7 and JLE-6 have increased gain for more economical system design.
The JLE-5 station has very high gain ( 48dB) making it exceptionally suitable for use as avery economical trunk-terminating bridging amplifier in 300M Hz or lower bandwidth systems. It can be the source of avery long feeder line before aconventional line extender is needed or, through an external splitter of the SSP- type, several feeder lines can be established.
All three models are characterized by high output capability, well-filtered 2-way circuitry, and 60 or 30 volt AC operation capability via a slide switch factory-set for 60 V. This switch together with the LOCAL/REMOTE switch allows application of any one of four AC input ranges as specified. Bypass circuitry for up to 5 amperes rms together with acircuit breaker Model CBJ-5, factory- inserted in the "5" model, optional for the " 6" and "7" models, allows powering of additional line extenders. The power supply is protected by currentlimiting circuitry and the RF module by an over-voltage sensing circuit. A 0.75 fuse gives protection against high current drain. Additional protection against line voltage surges is provided by insertion of surge arrestor Models A0-36 in the input of the line extender.
Optional, high or low gain sub- channel amplifiers Models JRA-30H and JRA-30L are available and can be plugged into the main module in either direction.
The amplifier housing is designed for maximum heat dissipation, has awoven wire gasket between body and lid for efficient ground continuity and RF shielding, and asilicone rubber gasket for weather protection. Two clamp and bolt assemblies are provided on the housing for strand- mounting and additional tapped holes permit the installation of auxiliary brackets for surface mounting. The input and output ports have extrusions for the secure interfacing of cable connectors with heat-shrunk tubing or sealing tape. The ports are protected by factory- inserted plastic cap plugs, to be discarded when installing the cable connectors. The input and output terminal platforms have special receptacles for surge arrestors. R.F. input and output test fittings, accessible through plug-sealed ports in the housing cover, and accept Jerrold standard test adaptor Model SPD-30F for signal measurements without having to open the housing. 0- rings on the test port plugs prevent ingress of moisture and dirt. A station data card is provided in the housing cover for the recording of signal parameters measured and optional accessories installed.
The amplifier module can be plugged into the housing in either direction as required by signal flow and hence provides easy access and maintenance from the street side, away from private property. Module covers have access holes for the gain and slope controls, the Local/Remote slide switch, B + and Rectifier Test points, and the two RF test terminals. Thru-holes in the module allow closing of terminal screws on the center conductors of the input and output cables, without having to remove the module.
VRF-84
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
System Performance Specifications: JLE Line Extenders-- Operating to 450 MHz
MODEL PASSBANDS
RESPONSE FLATNESS MIN. FULL GAIN, at 450 MHz with 9dB slope; see Note 2. TYPICAL OPERATING GAIN, see Note 3. MANUAL GAIN CONTROL RANGE (JXP-0 is factory- inserted.) MANUAL SLOPE CONTROL RANGE
NOISE FIGURE, with JXP-0 and without equalizer. at 450 MHz Min. Full Gain Referenced to Highest Channel.
DISTORTION CHARACTERISTICS with 9dB slope ( see Note 4) without equalizer, with typical output level of:
2nd Order Beats. Chs. 2, 20 ( G). 13 Composite Triple Beat. for 60 chs.
MAX. CHROMA DELAY
Forward
Return
HUM MODULATION. by 60 Hz source
OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE TERMINAL MATCH. at 75 impedance, input and output
A.C. INPUT RANGE. switchable by slide switches to 30 or 60 Vand to LOCAL or REMOTE: factory- set to 60 Vand LOCAL, all models
POWER REQUIREMENTS ( Power Factor = 0.95) 60-V. Lobal 52 Vmin. input .
Remote 44 Vmin. input:
30-V. Local 26 Vmin. input.
Remote 22 Vmin. input.
A.0 BYPASS CAPABILITY A.C. DISPOSITION: STOP or THRU. by Model CBJ-5 SURGE PROTECTORS. optional by Models A0-36 D.C. OUTPUT OF BUILT-IN POWER PACK HOUSING: Model JLE-HSG
NET WEIGHT
Watts Amperes Watts Amperes Watts Amperes Watts Amperes
TYPes Overall Dimensions: Mounting
JLE-6-450-2W
52-450 MHz 5-32 MHz
JLE-7-450-2W
±0.75 dB, all Models.
41 dB
33 dB
37 dB
l
29 dB
6dB min., all Models additional gain reduction by optional Models JXP-*
0to 9dB referenced to 450 MHz additional compensation for attenuation vs. frequency by optional equalizer Models SEE*, and vs. temperature by optional compensator Models CTF-·
10 dB Ref. to Ch. 61
9dB Ref. to Ch. 61
47 dBmV 72 dB 59 dB
47 dBmV 72 dB 59 dB
Ch. 2 7ns; Ch. 3: 4ns; Ch. 4: 2ns; all other forward channels less than ins.
Ch. T7 and T8: 4ns; Ch. T9: 7.5ns; Ch. T10: 15ns.
60 dB or better, all Models
--40° to + 60°C. all Models
16 dB min return loss
60V LOCAL 60V REMOTE 30V LOCAL 30V REMOTE
52-60 V 44-52 V 26-30 V 22-26 V
all Models
20 3
17.2
41
.348
20 3
17.2
.485
.412
20 3
17.2
82
.696
20 3
172
97
.825
5A continuous y. all Models
optional
145V d.c. ( striking) ± 20%. usable in all Models.
27 to 27.5 V. all Models.
Die-cast Aluminum, all Models.
12.5 x 8 x 5inches, all Models.
Strand. Pedestal. or Wall all Models
12 lbs all Models
Order equalizer SEE- · per system requirements. Order JRA-30 return amplifiers per system requirements.
NOTES: 1. Specifications apply to module installed in housing. 2. Min. Full Gain Specification is referenced to use without optional Models SEE-" or optional temperature compensator Models CTF-"; for
relevant insertion losses see pertinent catalog sheets. 3. Typical Operating Gain is referenced to use with equalizer and temperature compensator and with factory- inserted JXP-0. 4. 9dB Slope implies Channel 2level operated 9dB below Channel 61.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-85
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
System Performance Specifications: JLE Line Extenders-- Operating to 450 MHz
MODEL PASSBANDS
RESPONSE FLATNESS MIN. FULL GAIN, at 450 MHz, see Note. 2 TYPICAL OPERATING GAIN, see Note 3. MANUAL GAIN CONTROL RANGE (JXP-0 is factory- inserted.) MANUAL SLOPE CONTROL RANGE
NOISE FIGURE: with JXP-0 and without equalizer. at 450 MHz Min. Full Gain Referenced to Highest Channel.
DISTORTION CHARACTERISTICS without equalizer, with typical output level of: see Note 4
2nd Order Beats, Chs. 2, 20 ( g), 13 Composite Triple Beat Cross Modulation
MAX CHROMA DELAY
Forward
Return
HUM MODULATION, by 60 Hz source
OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE
TERMINAL MATCH, at 75 ohm impedance, input and output
A.G. INPUT RANGE, switchable by slide switches to 30 or 60 Vand to LOCAL or REMOTE factory- set to 60 Vand LOCAL, all Models
POWER REQUIREMENTS ( Power Factor = 0.95) 60-V, Local 52 Vmin. input:
Remote 44 Vmin. input:
30-V, Local 26 Vmin. input:
Remote 22 Vmin. input:
A.C. BYPASS CAPABILITY A.C. DISPOSITION: STOP or THRU, by model CBJ-5 SURGE PROTECTORS, optional by Models A0-36 D.C. OUTPUT OF BUILT-IN POWER PACK HOUSING: Model JLE-HSG
NET WEIGHT
Watts Amperes Watts Amperes Watts Amperes Watts Amperes
Type: Overall Dimensions: Mounting
JLE-7-452-2W
JLE-7-452 HS- 2W
5-30 MHz 52-450 MHz
5-176 MHz 250-450 MHz
±0.75 dB, all Models.
9dB slope
33 dB
3dB slope
28 dB
6dB min., all Models additional gain reduction by optional Models JXP-·
0to 9dB referenced to 450 MHz additional compensation for attenuation vs. frequency by optional equalizer
Models SEE-·, and vs. temperature by optional compensator ModeS CTF-"
13 dB Ref. to Ch. 61
13 dB Ref. to Ch. 61
9dB slope 47 dBmV
71 dB
59 dB ( 60 Chs.) 56 dB ( 60 Chs.)
3dB slope 47 dBmV
N.A. 61 dB ( 33 Chs.) 61 dB ( 33 Chs.)
3ns or less
3ns or less
60 dB or better, all Models
-40° to ± 60°C, all Models
16 dB min. return loss
60V LOCAL
60V REMOTE 30V LOCAL
30V REMOTE
52-60 V
44-52 V 26-30 V
22-26 V
all Models
13.2 0.27 13.2 0.315 13.2 0.54 13.2 0.63 5A continuously, all Models optional 145V d.c. ( striking) ± 20%, usable in all models. 24 Vto 24.5 V. all Models. Die-cast Aluminum, all Models. 12.5x8x5 inches, all Models. Strand, Pedestal, or Wall; all Models 12 lbs.. alt Models.
Order equalizer SEE-* per system requirements. Order JRA-30 return amplifiers per system requirements.
NOTES:
1. Specifications apply to module installed in housing. 2. Min. Full Gain Specification is referenced to use without optional Models SEE-* or optional temperature compensator Models CTF-*; for
relevant insertion losses see pertinent catalog sheets. 3. Typical Operating Gain is referenced to use with equalizer and temperature compensator and with factory- inserted JXP-0. 4. 9dB Slope implies Channel 2level operated 9dB below Channel 61, and 3dB Slope implies Channel 29 level operated 3dB below Channel
61.
VRF-86
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
System Performance Specifications: XRLE Line Extenders -- Operating to 550 MHz
MODEL PASSBANDS
RESPONSE FLATNESS MIN. FULL GAIN, with 9dB slope: see Note 2. TYPICAL OPERATING GAIN, see Note 3. MANUAL GAIN CONTROL RANGE (JXP-0 is factory- inserted.) MANUAL SLOPE CONTROL RANGE
NOISE FIGURE: with JXP-0 and without equalizer. at 450 MHz Min. Full Gain Referenced to Highest Channel.
DISTORTION CHARACTERISTICS with 9dB slope ( see Note 4) without equalizer, with typical output level of:
2nd Order Beats, Chs. 2, 20 ( G). 13
Composite Triple Beat, for 60 Chs. and 77 Chs. Cross Modulation, for 60 Chs. and 77 Chs.
MAX. CHROMA DELAY
Forward
Return
HUM MODULATION, by 60 Hz source OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE RANGE TERMINAL MATCH, at 75 ohm impedance, input and output A.G. INPUT RANGE, switchable by slide switches
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Local 60 Vinput:
Remote 48 V input:
A.C. BYPASS CAPABILITY A.C. DISPOSITION: STOP or THRU, by model CBJ-5 SURGE PROTECTORS, optional by Models A0-36 D.C. OUTPUT OF XESW-60 POWER PACK HOUSING: Model XRLE-HSG
NET WEIGHT
Watts Amperes Watts Amperes
Type: Overall Dimensions: Mounting
XRLE-7-450-2W
XRLE-7-550-2W
5-30 MHz 52-450 MHz
5-30 MHz 52-550 MHz
± .5
± . 75
32 dB
31 dB
28 dB
27 dB
6dB min., all Models additional gain reduction by optional Models JXP-*
0to 9dB referenced to 450 MHz and 550 MHz additional compensation for attenuation vs. frequency by optional equalizer Models SEE-·. and vs. temperature by optional compensator Models CTF-·
10 dB Ref. to 450 MHz
10 dB Ref. to 550 MHz
47 dBmV 71.5 dB 65 dB 66 dB
45 dBmV 73 dB 65 dB 66 dB
Ch. 2: 7ns. Ch. 3: 4ns; Ch. 4: 2ns: all other forward channels less than 1ns.
Ch 17 and 78: 4ns: Ch. T9: 7.5 ns: Ch. T10: 15ns.
60 dB or better, all Models
-40° to ± 60°C, all Models
16 dB min. return loss
60V LOCAL 60V REMOTE
42 60 RMS 35 48 RMS
26.2
26.2
0.44
0.44
26.2
26.2
0.55
0.55
5A continuously, all Models
optional
145V d.c. ( striking) ± 20%, usable in all models.
+24 V. all Models.
Die-cast Aluminum, all Models.
14j,,x8%x4'/,, inches, all Models.
Strand, Pedestal, or Wall all Models
15 lbs all Models.
Order equalizer XEE-* per system requirements. Order JRA-30 return amplifiers per system requirements.
NOTES: 1. Specifications apply to module installed in housing. 2. Min. Full Gain Specification is referenced to use without optional Models XEE-'' for relevant insertion losses see pertinent catalog sheets. 3. Typical Operating Gain is referenced to use with equalizer and temperature compensator and with factory- inserted JXP-0. 4. 9 dB Slope implies Channel 2 level operated 9 dB below Highest Channel.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-87
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
CABLE EQUALIZERS FOR LINE EXTENDER, MODELS JLE AND SLR
The fixed cable equalizers, used in all JLE amplifiers and SLR- series line extenders, include seven sub- series. These equalizers plug into line extender amplifier modules. Specific functions are described below:
Model SEE- O- FOR ALL LINE EXTENDERS The model SEE- 0 is a shorting bus factory- inserted in all SLR- series line extenders.
Model SEE- 174- FOR 174 MHz RETURN AMPLIFIER This series of fixed cable equalizers operates within a passband of 5174 MHz.
MODEL Passband
SEE- 174-4
SEE- 174-8 SEE- 174-12 5-174 MHz
SEE- 174-16
Maximum Insertion Loss
Fixed Equalization at 174 MHz
Terminal Match return loss, 75 ohm impedance (Minimum)
1dB 4± 0.5 dB
18 dB
1dB
1dB
1dB
8± 0.5 dB 12± 0.5 dB 16± 0.5 dB
18 dB
18 dB
18 dB
Model SEE- 220 SERIES- FOR 220 MHz LINE EXTENDERS This series of fixed cable equalizers operates within apassband of 4°220 MHz.
MODEL Passband
SEE- 220-6
SEE- 220-12 SEE- 220-18 40-220 MHz
SEE- 220-24
Maximum Insertion Loss
1.5 dB
1dB
1dB
1dB
Fixed Equalization at 174 MHz
Terminal Match return loss, 75 ohm impedance (Minimum)
6± 0.5 dB 16 dB
12± 0.5 dB 18± 0.5 dB 24± 0.5 dB
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
·Measured at 220 MHz through 0.412 inch coaxial cable.
Model SEE- 270 SERIES- FOR 270 MHz LINE EXTENDERS This series of fixed cable equalizers operates within apassband of 4°270 MHz.
MODEL Passband
SEE- 270-6
SEE- 270-12 SEE- 270-18 40-270 MHz
SEE- 270-24
Maximum Insertion Loss
Fixed Equalization at 174 MHz
Terminal Match return loss, 75 ohm impedance (Minimum)
1dB 6±0.5 dB
16 dB
1dB
1dB
1dB
12± 0.5 dB 18 ± 0.5 dB 24±0.5 dB
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
*Measured at 270 MHz through 0.412 inch coaxial cable.
Model SEE- 300 SERIES- FOR 300 MHz LINE EXTENDERS This series of fixed cable equalizers operates within apassband of 40-
300 MHz.
MODEL
SEE- 300-6 SEE- 300-12 SEE- 300-18 SEE- 300-24
Passband
40-300 MHz
Maximum Insertion Loss
1dB
1dB
1dB
1dB
Fixed Equalization at 174 MHz
6± 0.5 dB
12 ± 0.5 dB 18±0.5 dB 24± 0.5 dB
Terminal Match return loss, 75 ohm impedance (Minimum)
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
Model SEE- 350 SERIES- FOR 350 MHz LINE EXTENDERS This series of fixed cable equalizers operates within apassband of 40350 MHz.
MODEL
SEE- 350-6
SEE- 350-12
SEE- 350-18
SEE- 350-24
Passband
40-350 MHz
Maximum
Insertkin Loss
1dB
1dB
1dB
1dB
Axed Equaization at 174 MHz
6-± 0.5 dB
12 ± 0.5 dB
18±- 0.5 dB
24-± 0.5 dB
Terminal Match return loss, 75 ohm impedance
(Minimum)
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
*Measured at 350 MHz through 0.500 inch coaxial cable.
Model SEE- 400 SERIES- FOR 350 and 400 MHz LINE EXTENDERS This series of fixed cable equalizers operates within a passband of 40-400 MHz.
MODEL Passband
SEE- 400-6
SEE-400-12
SEE- 400-18
40-400 MHz
SEE- 400-24
Maximum Insertion Loss
Fixed Equalzation at 174 MHz
1dB 6 -± 0.5 dB
1dB 12 ± 0.5 dB
1dB 18 -± 0.5 dB
1dB 24 ± 0.5 dB
Terminal Match return loss, 75
ohm impedance (Minimum)
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
*Measured at 400 MHz through 0.500 inch coaxial cable.
Model SEE- 450 SERIES- FOR 450 MHz LINE EXTENDERS This series of fixed equalizers operates within a passband of 40450 MHz.
MODEL Passband
SEE- 450-6
SEE-450-12
SEE- 450-18
40-450 MHz
SEE-450-24
Maximum Insertion Loss
Fixed Equalzation at 174 MHz
Terminal Match return loss, 75 ohm impedance (Minimum)
1dB 6± 0.5 dB
1dB 12 ± 0.5 dB
1dB 18± 0.5 dB
1dB 24± 0.5 dB
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
*Measured at 450 MHz through 0.500 inch coaxial cable.
Model XEE-450 SERIES- FOR 450 MHz LINE EXTENDERS This series of fixed cable equalizers operates within apassband of 40-
450 MHz.
MODEL
XEE-450-6
XEE-450-12
XEE-450-18
XEE-450-24
Passband
40-450 MHz
Maximum
Insertion Lass
1.5 dB
1dB
1dB
1dB
Axed Equaizabon at 174 MHz
6± 0.5 dB
12 ± 0.5 dB
18± 0.5 dB
24± 0.5 dB
Terminal Match return ioss, 75 ohm impedance (Minimum)
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
16 dB
*Measured at 450 MHz through 0.500 inch coaxial cable.
Model XEE-550 SERIES- FOR 550 MHz LINE EXTENDERS This series of fixed cable equalizers operates within apassband of 40550 MHz. The chart for this series is identical to that for the XEE-450 series except for the passband range, and maximum insertion loss on the XEE-550-6 is 1 dB. Note: Substitute 550 for 450 on the model numbers in above chart.
*Measured at 300 MHz through 0.500 inch coaxial cable.
VRF-88
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
STARLINE MODELS JLE AND SLR ACCESSORIES THERMAL EQUALIZER FOR LINE EXTENDERS
Model CTF-* Thermal Equalizers for Manual Gain Control JLE Amplifiers and SLR
Line Extenders.
There are now four thermal equalizers available: The CTF-11A, CTF-20, CTF-20B and CTF-30. These thermal equalizers are designed to compensate for attenuation changes in cable due to environmental
variations.
MODEL
Passband
Nominal Attenuation.
at
MHz
at · 25°C ambient
at - 40°C ambient
at · 60°C ambient
Slope from 40
to
MHz
at · 25°C
Flatness
Thermal Compensation
Thermal Match. at 75 ohms
CTF-11A
3.0 dB 5.0 dB 2.0 dB
0.7 dB
± . 25 dB 11 dB of taploaded cable'
20 dB minimum
CTF-20
CTF-30
40-450 MHz
3.0 dB 7.0 dB 2.0 dB
0.7 dB
· . 25 dB 20 dB of trunk cable 0.5"
18 dB minimum
5.0 dB 9.8 dB 3.1 dB
1.0 dB
± . 25 dB 30 dB of taploaded cable ·
18 dB minimum
CTF-20B··
3.5 dB 6.8 dB 2.3 dB
0.7 dB
t . 25 dB 20 dB of trunk cable 0.5"
18 dB minimum
· 0.412 inch outer di meter aluminum sheathed cable ·· For use with JLE-7 452
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
"SSP" SERIES SPLITTERS AND DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
DRA-30
JRA-30H
DISTRIBUTION RETURN AMPLIFIERS FOR LINE EXTENDERS
DRA and JRA amplifier models plug into their respective line extender main amplifier modules and amplify the 5to 32 MHz subchannel band.
JLE-2W SERIES
Model Number
JRA-301 JRA-30H
Passband Minimum Full Gain
532 MHz
15 dB
24 dB
Rated Output Cross- Mod 1-57 dB or better) for 2channels for 4channels
55 dBmV per channel 50 dBmV per channel
2nd Order Beats (-70 dB or better)
Triple Beat 1-70 dB or better) Hum Modulation ( by 60 Hz line)
-68 dB
Maximum Noise Figure, without equalizers at 30 MHz
Input Level Padding or gain control
Slope, rising from 5to 30 MHz
7dB
6dB
9dB gain control
+3 dB fixed
Terminal Match, return loss, 75)2 impedance ( minimum)
DC Operating Voltage
Power Requirements
18 dB
24.0 to 24.5 V
Switch selection 30V local or remote. 2.6
Watts
Ambient Temperature Range
-400F to + 1400F
SLR-2W SERIES
DRA-30
DRA-301
5-32 MHz
22 db
10 dB
55 dBmV per channel 50 dBmV per channel
46 dBmV
48 dBmV 46.5 dBmV
-80 dB
-70 dB
6dB
7dB
by SXP-I IISXP-0 factory-insened)
+2 dB fixed
flat
20 dB
24.3V, 60 mA
Tapped primary, 3.0 Watts
-40 0Fto + 140 0F
SSP-Series splitters and directional couplers for Starline Distribution Systems include six models: SSP-3, SSP-7, SSP-9, SSP-12, SSP-16, and SSP-3-636. These AC power passing, two-way devices operate within an r.f. passband of 5-600 MHz and are enclosed in die cast 360 aluminum alloy housings that are equipped for strand, pole, and pedestal mounting. The SSP-Series employs a swivel center conductor seizure mechanism and arotatable faceplate to insure the units can be configured in awide variety of input/output and RF/AC combinations including: strand mount, reverse strand mount, pole mount, and pedestal mount. These features allow for flexible installation and reduce the necessity for " cable loops." Each leg is fused for 15 amps with the user afforded the option of fusing the system passives for individual layout requirements.
Model SSP-3-Hybrid Splitter Model SSP-3 is ahybrid splitter used to create two outputs, each 5.0 dB lower than the input.
Model SSP-7-Directional Coupler Model SSP-7 is adirectional coupler used to create two outputs, 3.1 dB and 8.0 dB lower than the input.
Model SSP-9-Directional Coupler Model SSP-9 is adirectional coupler used to create two outputs, 2.5 dB and 10.2 dB lower than the input.
Model SSP-12-Directional Coupler Model SSP-12 is adirectional coupler used to create two outputs, 2.0 dB and 13.2 dB lower than the input.
Model SSP-16-Directional Coupler Model SSP-16 is adirectional coupler used to create two outputs, 1.6 dB and 16.5 dB lower than the input.
Model SSP-3-636-Dual Hybrid Splitter Model SSP-3-636 is adual hybrid splitter used to create three outputs, two 9.0 dB and the other 4.8 dB lower than the input.
DESCRIPTION
PASSBAND MAXIMUM TAP LOSS 0181
MAXIMUM INSERTION LOSS 10211 ISOLATION TERMINAL MATCH CURRENT CAPACITY FUSING
SSP-3
2- way Sptalar
450
:50
600
44
50
44
50
sop- 7
Derecho al CoupIr
5 45e
450
600
211
80
75
3 I
SPA
UP.12
so16 18
>ed. al CHAPO ,
Drecnonal Coupe
Deedeonai Lowly
5600 MHz
5 450
100
IX
450 600 102
25
450 128 I 5
450 BOO 132
20
5 450 163
· 2
450 600
165 / 6
20 OR MINIMUM
056M NIMUM
10 AMPS EACH LEG
15 AMPS EACH LES
SSF-3.631 3 way Spime,
450 79
·Two LEGS
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-89
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION 4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600 e*
MODEL SSP-PI V.
"SSP" SERIES POWER INSERTER
Model SSP-Pl is afuse- equipped network for combining RF with AC power from power supplies JSPS-* or STPS-60 to coaxial cable. The unit can be used for 30V and 60V powered systems. Model SSP-PI
installs on the coaxial cable and passes up to 10 amps in each direction; atotal of 14 amps common - with each direction fused for 15 amps. The user can choose optional fuse values as determined by the individual system configuration. Model SSP-Pl is housed in adie cast aluminum alloy housing designed to provide maximum installation flexibility. Swivel center conductor seizure mechanisms and a rotatable faceplate insure the SSP-PI can be configured in a wide variety of input/output and RF/AC combinations including strand mount, reverse strand mount, and pedestal mount. This increased versatility allows for easier installation and reduces the necessity for " cable loops".
MODEL PASSBAND MAX INSERTION LOSS
TERMINAL MATCH ( min.) RF/AC ISOLATION AC POWERING CAPABILITY FUSING
SSP-PI 5-600 MHz 5-450 MHz 05dB 20 dB >70 dB 10 amps each leg 14 amps total 15 amps each leg
450-600 MHz 07dB 20 dB > 60 dB
MODEL SSP-PI PORT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
PEDESTAL MOUNT
STRAND MOUNT
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
STPS-60 60 VOLT STAND-BY POWER SUPPLY STANDARD FEATURES: · " Cycle Charge" low maintenance battery charging system · Plug-in modular construction · Auxiliary AC input facility · Status Monitor capability · Input/Output surge arrestors · Circuit breaker protection · RE) Filter -- Provides minimum of 40 dB RF isolation ·Built-in load current meter · Synchronized, time variable " delay back to line" · AC convenience outlet · External status indicator lamp · Adjustable battery voltage
Operating from a 120 volt commercial AC power source, or for up to three hours from self-contained batteries, the Jerrold Model STPS-60 stand-by power supply provides constant square wave voltage to power CATV Distribution Systems. The STPS-60 has been designed for optimum reliability utilizing afield proven inverter to drive a ferro -resonant transformer during commmercial power outages. In the normal mode power is derived directly from the ferroresonant transformer.
Options: Jerrold JTSM Status Monitoring system · Pedestal mount for surface mount applications · Spare modules · Battery heater
STARLINE A.C. POWER SUPPLY Power supplies for Starline distribution systems include two models, JSPS-30 and JSPS-60. These constant- voltage, square- wave power sources are especially designed for CATV systems where coaxial cables have to carry both RF energy and AC power.
This series of power supplies has a constant- voltage power transformer, asecondary voltage external indicator light, aU/L listed circuit- breaker assembly, a self- healing, gas- filled surge protector at the input, an AC test point, and a 115 V AC auxiliary socket. Housed in weatherproof, sheet- aluminum, louvered cabinet which has a padlock facility and is equipped with appropriate mounting brackets, the power supply can be mounted on a utility pole or cross- arm, or on any surface where a115 V, 60 Hz, 3- wire source is available.
An optional 200 msec. time- delay relay, Model PDT 30/60, is available for installation to protect the cable system from turn- on transients, after power company outages.
An optional lightning arrestor can be installed in the JSPS-*, it will protect the unit against line surges.
e3F At.
MODEL
JSPS-30
JSPS-60
ifeAllem
Primary
95-130 V, 60 Hz 450 W
95-130 V, 60 Hz 1050 W
Secondary ( For 115 V ac Primary)
30 vrms, ±2%, at 12A
60 V rms, ± 2%, at 14A
Line Regulation
30 V rms,
60 V rms, ± 2%
151.
95-130 V input
95-130 V input
FEEDERLINE EQUALIZERS FOR STARLINE
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
Model FFE-8-* is a coaxial cable equalizer designed to compensate for feeder cable tilt, and thus provide improved " window" specifications. The equalizer circuit is contained in the same type of housing assembly as an FFT type tap, less the house drop fittings. Five models are available for 260,300, 400, 450, and 550 MHz systems.
4404 wed
03 ten 9440 C99·91.050 44044. fMal
3.110 54 UM MO MO 300 IIM
550 1.100
MO WM 5304
400 1004 450 116.1 MD MU
0 00 55de
5013
5MI
fit.0·14 5400604
0 911 5500
05di
5.450
at. 5006
0906
333 5000
Line Regulation
Surge Protection, Breakdown Voltage
RF/AC Isolation
+2-0%, 12 to 4A +2-0%, 14 to 4A
Load
Load
145 V dc, ± 12%, non- polarized
>40 dB
STARLINE POWER SUPPLY ACCESSORIES Model PDT- 30/60- Time Delay Relay The Model PDT-30/60 is a 200 msec. time delay relay for use in Starline power supply models JSPS-30 and JSPS-60.
It will protect the cable system from turn- on transients of the regulating transformer, after power company outages.
It must not be used in apower supply that is mounted on apedestal.
VRF-90
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION 4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
DIRECTIONAL- COUPLER- TYPE, TOTAL TWO-WAY CAPABILITY
FFT-G Series FFT-F Series
600MHz 450MHz
FEATURES ·Strand or pedestal mounting · Swivel center conductor
· Seizure mechanism ·Weather seal gasket · Separate RF gasket ·Umbrella-type cover design
Tap- To- Tap Isolation ( Nominal) 50-450MHz 25dB 10-50M Hz 28dB " F" Series 5-600MHz 20dB ( min) " G" Series
Return Loss ( In, Out, Taps) 10-400 MHz 20 dB min. " FEr G" 400-450 MHz 18 dB min. Series
Current Capacity 7amps continuous
TAPS AND CONNECTORS
SPECIFICATIONS: FFT*- 0F, 5-450 MHz FFT8-'6, 5-600 MHz
Ia.« No
FITS 478 IF - 8 5F ·70/ -72f -14F -17F ·TOF ·23F ·26F ·29F 32F ·35F ,38F ·41F
Noelool 201/
Rolm
32 68 84 97 115 14 3 165 190 225 255 293 320 345 375 406
FFT4 77F
-10F -12F ·14F
-I55F I7F 20f
-23F ,26F 29F 32F 35F 38F 41F
68 103 125 140
154 170 205 225
260 292 315 351 380 400
F7E0T1OG
146 17G 206 23G 26G 290 326 356
708 142 186 20 225 26 1 292 322 347
5MHz
N44:
M4o
290 I90 150 100 0 75 050 040 230 030 035 035 035 030
030
360 260 180 130 0 130 060 040 040 050 040 040 040 030 030
330 210 160
100 090 050 030 020 020 020 030 020 030
370 250
160 110 100
070 050 040 030 030 030 030 030
5 1111:
470 130 090 080 080 080 080 000
500 150
100 100 100 100 100 100
50 liNz Max
INSERTION LOS 1481
308 Mhz
Ma,
Mn
400 1211z
Men
Mn
450 MHz
Nom
Moo
Nomau too 14 Ost 1mamos re ,
10.50 MHz
50-400 400054
MHz
MH:
--
--
--
300
340
50
390
380
410
410
420
23
23
23
200
240
40
270
250
290
270
310
23
23
25
1 30
150
60
781)
1 70
190
180
200
25
25
25
080
110
10
140
120
150
130
160
25
25
25
0 70
070
90
100
090
I 10
100
120
25
25
25
030
050
40
070
050
080
0/0
090
35
35
35
030
040
40
050
045
060
050
070
36
42
36
020
030
30
040
035
050
040
060
40
43
40
020
040
30
040
030
050
040
060
40
45
40
030
030
40
040
040
050
050
060
40
50
40
030
030
40
040
040
050
040
060
50
50
50
020
030
30
040
030
050
040
060
50
50
50
025
030
35
040
040
050
040
060
50
50
50
030
030
40
040
040
050
040
060
50
50
50
310 210
130 100 0/0 040
020 OM 0t5 015 020 015 020
340 230 150 700 090 060 030
030 030 030 030 030 030
58 MHz
350 130
070 070 0/0 070 070 070
370 150 090 090 090 090 090 090
340 230 150 120 090 060 030
030 020 025 030 025 030
3/0 260 160 130 I00 070 050 040 040 040 040 040 040
31/8 Slim
380 140 080 070 070 070 070 070
400 160 100 090 080 080 080 080
60
370
60
280
60
170
40
150
10
130
70
090
50
070
30
060
30
050
30
050
45
0 SO
35
050
40
050
411118113
410
160 100 OM 070 070 070 070
430 180 120 700
080 080 080 080
300 260 170 151) 120 080 070
040 040 040 050 035 040
380 300 190 170 140 t00 090 070 060 060 060 060 060
0111811to
440 200 130 1 10
080 On 080 080 _
470 220 150 130 100 100 100 100
23 27 27 27 28 30 40 43 40 45 50 50 50
18.50
26 28 40 40 50 50 SO SO
23 25 25 25 30 35 40 45 45 50 50 50 50
56050
32 36 710 40 45 45 45 45
23 25 25 25 30 35 40 43 40 45 50 50 50
(51101
45
26 30 36 35 40 40 40 40
Hum Modulation at 7amps, 60 volts Square wave supply -- 70dB below signal
All specifications applicable -- -40 to + 140°F (-40 to + 60°C)
Net Weight 1lb. ( 453gm) for FFT2 and FFT4 1lb. 1oz. ( 481.9gm) for FFT8
External Dimensions 5-5/8"L x4-1/32"W x2-7/8"H (14.28cm x10.24cm x7.3cm)
SPECIFICATIONS: 5-600 MHz
Mod., No
Nomoul
Top Vol,.
5MHz
MS.
Moo
50 MHz
Milo
Mi.
INSERTION LOSS 081
300 Mhz
SI..
1241
450 MN:
00.
Um
600 MHz
Mi.
Moo
bp To Om
L.ª.1.2112_1_.
10-50 MN:
50-450 450-600
MHz
MHz
SPIS
,0
72
28
30
30
32
32
34
41
43
48
50
23
23
23
70
103
16
18
I 7
19
79
21
22
24
25
27
23
23
23
12
122
14
15
10
7 3
12
14
15
17
18
20
25
25
25
74
738
06
07
05
06
07
08
08
tO
7 7
13
21
30
25
17
169
06
07
05
06
07
08
0/
08
08
10
30
40
35
20
20
07
10
04
05
05
06
05
07
06
08
40
45
40
23
23
03
05
03
04
04
06
05
07
06
06
40
45
40
26
26
03
05
02
03
03
05
04
06
06
08
45
50
45
20
ASSEMBLED 1N ME 81C0
I
·29
292
07
10
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
50
50
45
32
32
07
10
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
011
50
50
50
35
35
07
10
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
50
50
50
SII4
77
12
tO
102
30
31
32
32
35
37
43
05
49
51
23
23
23
14
143
14
15
14
16
15
17
17
79
22
24
27
25
25
ts5
153
12
14
74
15
14
16
14
76
1 0
20
27
25
25
17
173
07
09
05
07
06
08
10
72
t 1
I 3
28
30
30
20
201
07
10
04
05
OS
07
08
10
09
11
30
35
35
-23
23
07
1 0
04
05
05
07
07
09
08
t 0
40
40
40
-26
26
05
06
03
04
04
05
05
07
06
08
40
45
40
Ire
·29
296
05
06
03
04
04
05
05
07
06
08
45
45
40
-32
325
07
10
03
04
04
05
05
07
06
08
50
50
45
-35
35
07
10
03
04
04
05
05
07
06
OB
50
50
50
SPT-SERIES TAPS (2 Er 4 Port
600MHz)
·23 different models to accommodate system design needs and
lower construction costs.
SPT2-·
12 values
4-35dB
SPT4-·
11 values
7-35dB
·Umbrella- type cover design shields internal components, house
drop ports, traps, etc. by preventing build-up of rain water. ·Barbed collars in feeder- line nipples insure retention of heat shrink
tubing. ·Unique, water proof, self-sealing " F" ports -- no " breathing"
· Minimal insertion loss to decrease active electronics requirements
through ports even if house- drop is disconnected.
and further cut costs.
·Non- seizing metal- metal connections. All threads are coated with
·Strand or 4" pedestal mounting. Strand mounting clamp is provided with unit.
·Swivel center conductor seizure mechanism to allow for aerial or pedestal installations, eliminating the need to remove the seizure
water repellent, anti- seize lubricant. Four stainless steel captive bolts deter seizing of bolts to bottom plate. · Factory pressure testing of all assemblies insures maximum durability and reliability under the most severe environmental condi-
screws. A detent in the swivel mechanism provides proper align-
tions.
ment for either installation mode.
· Numbered ports for easy system audits.
· Modular design provides interchangeability of tap assembly bottom plates without removing housing from cable.
Tap- To- Tap Isolation 10-600MHz 20dB minimum
· Hostile environment corrosion protection by surface chromate con-
version and special baked resin coating over die cast housing and
bottom plate made of high silicon 360 aluminum alloy.
·Weather seal gasket of molded neoprene prevents entry of moist-
ure and dust.
· Separate RF gasket insures FCC interference specification compli-
ance.
Prices and Specifications
Subject
Return Loss ( In, Out) 10-600MHz 20dB minimum
Return Loss ( Taps)
10-600MHz 18dB minimum Current Capacity 7amps continuous to Change Without Notice.
Hum Modulation
at 7 amps, 60 volts
square wave supply
-70dB below signal
External Dimensions
3.96"W x3.96"H x2.3"D
Net Weight
12 oz.
VRF-91
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1 600
CONNECTORS FOR 0.412- INCH CABLES
AND
0.500- INCH
DIAMETER
Cable-to- Equipment- Housing Connectors with Intra-Shield®
FEED- THROUGH TYPE Model VSF-412S -For . 412" ±. 008" OD Cable with . 022/.025" Wall Thickness
Model VSF-500S - For . 500" ±. 010" OD Cable with . 025/.030" Wall Thickness
Cable center conductor is fed through connector and seized inside the equipment housing. Integral radiation sleeve. Use model CPT412 or CPT- 500, as appropriate, to prepare cable end.
CONNECTORS
CONNECTORS FOR 0.750- INCH DIAMETER ALUMINUM CABLE
11111111111. 1110111.!
Cable-to- Equipment- Housing Connectors with Intra-Shield®
FEED- THROUGH TYPE Reducer pin is crimped to center conductor. Pin is fed through the connector and seized inside the equipment housing. Integral radiation sleeve. Use model CPT- 750 to prepare cable end. Model VSF-1750S (Silver Colored)- For . 750" +. 010" OD Cable with Shield I.D. of 0.67" or greater. Model VSF-1750S is shipped with two reducer pins, asilver one for high density polyethylene and agold one for polystyrene/fused disc cables. Model VSF-2750S (Gold Colored)- For . 750" + . 010" OD Cable with Shield I.D. less than 0.67". Model VSF-2750S is shipped with one gold pin.
STINGER TYPE Model VSF-412S5 - For . 412" . 008" OD Cable with . 075-.095" CC and . 022/.025" Wall Thickness Model VSF-500SS - For . 500" ±. 010" OD Cable with . 098-.119" CC and . 025/.030" Wall Thickness
Cable center conductors are seized by the fitting. Integral radiation sleeves. Use model CPT-412 or CPT- 500, as appropriate, to prepare cable end.
STINGER TYPE Cable center conductor is seized by the fitting. Pin is 0.075" dia., length 1-1/4". Integral radiation sleeve. Use model CPT- 750 to prepare cable end.
Model VSF-1750SS (Silver Colored) - For . 750" + . 010" OD Cable with 0.150-0.179" CC and with Shield I.D. less than 0.67" or greater.
Model VSF-2750SS (Gold Coloredl- For . 750" + . 010" OD Cable with 0.150-0.179" CC and Shield I.D. less than 0.67".
Cable-to -Cable Splice Connectors with Intra -Shield®
Model SC-412SS- For . 412" ±. 008" OD Cable with . 075"-.095" CC and . 022/.025" Wall Thickness
Model SC- 5005S -For . 500" ± . 010" OD Cable with . 098-.119" CC and . 025/.030" Wall Thickness
Cable center conductor is seized by the fitting. Pin is 0.075" dia., length 1-1/4". Integral radiation sleeve. Use model CPT-412 or CPT500, as appropriate, to prepare cable ends.
Cable-to -Cable Splice Connectors with Intra-Shield®
Cable conductors are seized by the fitting. Integral radiation sleeve. Use model CPT-750 to prepare cable ends.
Model SC-1750SS (Silver Colored)- For . 750" + . 010" OD Cable with 0.150-0.179" CC and with Shield I.D. of 0.67" or greater.
Model SC-2750SS ( Gold Colored) - For . 750" + . 010" OD Cable with 0.150-0.179" CC and with Shield I.D. less than 0.67".
Cable -to-"F" Adaptors with Intra-Shield®
Model F-412SS- For . 412" ±. 008" OD Cable with . 075-.095" CC and . 022/.025" Wall Thickness
Model F-500SS -For . 500" ±. 010" OD Cable with . 098-.119" CC and . 025/.030" Wall Thickness Cable center conductor is seized by the fitting. Integral radiation sleeve. Use model CPT-412 or CPT- 500 to prepare cable end.
Cable-to -"F" Adaptors with Intra -Shield®
Cable center conductor is seized by the fitting. Integral radiation sleeve. Use model CPT-750 to prepare cable end.
Model F-1750SS (Silver Colored) - For . 750" + . 010" OD Cable with 0.150-0.179" CC and with Shield I.D. of 0.67" or greater.
Model F-2750SS (Gold Colored)- For . 750" + . 010" OD Cable with 0.150-0.179" CC and with Shield I. D. less than 0.67".
VRF-92
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. rucson, AZ 85714 :602) 294-1600
TERMINATORS
CONNECTORS/ ADAPTORS/TOOLS
F, G, MG ADAPTORS AND WEATHER BOOTS
STR-75D AC BLOCKING TERMINATOR A VSF-style 70- ohm terminator that can be inserted directly into an unused mainstation or line extender port with both RF and AC present. Completely weatherproof. Pin length is 1-1/8" with breakpoint at 3/4".
rR-75-FCW AC BLOCKING TERMINATOR Ô, 75- ohm terminator designed to mate with afemale- Ffitting that is arrying RF and AC. Completely weatherproof.
ADAPTORS
VHH-1 Male coupling connector for joining two equipment housings. Eliminates need for jumper cable. Provides a completely weather- and
I radiation- proof connection. Pin length is 1-5/8", each end.
VSF-59A Male-VSF to female- F adaptor. Allows connection of RG-59/U or RG-6/U cable with F- fitting to distribution equipment housing. Pin Length is 1-1/16".
?BA-- SERIES 4
Universal splice connector utilizing FFT tap housing. Accepts any
two cables equipped with VSF-type connectors. Allows 90° or 180°
splicing. Facilitates splicing of different size cables. Can be used as a
dummy tap.
4
PMG-61 CHASSIS ADAPTOR Male- MG chassis- mount fitting. Accepts female- MG connectors. Mounts in 3/8" diameter hole.
PGL ADAPTOR Right-angle adaptor, female- Fto ma le- G .
GFA ADAPTOR Female- G to female- F adaptor. This is an elongated version of the GF-81 and is used as atest probe of Starline 20 distribution amplifiers and Channel Commander II headend equipment.
PMG-61F ADAPTOR Male- MG to female- F adaptor adapts afemale- MG to accept a male- Fconnector. Used as atest probe for Starline 300 mainstations and Commander IV headend processors.
MG- 61F ADAPTOR Female- MG to female- Fadaptor. Couples amale- MG to amale- F fitting. Used as atest probe for Starline 300 mainstations and Commander IV headend processors.
SMG-61 CHASSIS ADAPTOR Female- MG chassis- mount fitting. Accepts male- MG connectors. Mounts in 3/8" diameter hole.
17.1-.1-11e 411 MeenZ
VSL Male-VSF to female-VSF 90° adaptor. Used where space restrictions make right angle connections between cable and equipment desirable, such as in pedestal installations. Female end accepts any maleVSF fitting. Center conductor is seized by tightening hex- plug on the end of the VSL. VSL pin length is 3/4".
VIODEL VSL-M Vlale-G to female-VSF 90° adaptor. Used in 7th- port Starline 20 ieries mainstation applications, such as above AK-7situations.
PGF ADAPTOR Female- F to male- G adaptor, elongated for use as atest probe for Starline 20 distribution amplifiers and Channel Commander Il headend processors.
DS- 56 Used to provide weather seal over " F" connectors installed on RG-59/U, RG-6/U and CAC-6 cables.
TOOLS
AD.APTER
r
AK- 7A "A" cable 7th port adaptor kit. Used in dual trunk midsplit systems to sdapt " A" cable Starline 20- Series mainstation for crossover to " B" able.
C1K-7B 'B" cables 7th port adaptor kit. Used in dual trunk midsplit systems :o adapt " 8" cable Starline 20- Series mainstation to receive crossver signals from " A" cable.
CPT-412, CPT-500, CPT- 750 CORING TOOLS These cable coring tools are designed to remove polyethylene and polystyrene foam dielectrics from 0.412", 0.500" and 0.750" diameter aluminum cables, respectively, without harming center conductor or sheath. This allows proper assembly of Jerrold's IntraShield CD connectors to the cable for maximum RFI integrity. The tools may be hand- operated or the handle may be removed, exposing a triangular shaft which may be inserted in any drill with a 3/8" chuck.
CT-412, CT- 500, CT-750 CUTTING TIPS Replacement cutting tips for the CPT-412, CPT- 500 and CPT-750.
PL- 602H CRIMPING TOOL A high quality tool for crimping ferrules 1026, 1051 and 1082. Also used for integral ferrule connectors. Models F- 59A and F- 56A.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-93
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
STARCOM 450
CHANNEL CONVERTERS
36- CHANNEL
9- CHANNEL MODEL JSM SET- TOP
MODEL JSX SET- TOP
MODEL JRX REMOTE
MODEL DRC
MODEL DRZ 66- CHANNEL CONVERTER W/ CORDLESS REMOTE CONTROL MODEL DRC
FEATURES
. 450 MHz Capacity . Digital Reliability . Revenue Generating Cordless Remote Option · A/B Switch Option · Field Selectable HRC/IRC Assignment · Quality Performance · Automatic Fine Tuning · Attractive Styling
MODEL JSM 9- CHANNEL MIDBAND CONVERTER
FEATURES
· Reliability · Economically Priced · Modular Construction . Easy Installation · Quality Performance · Attractive Styling · Pushbutton Selection
MODEL DRZ/DIC
MODELS JSX/JRX 36- CHANNEL CONVERTERS
FEATURES
· Reliability . Economically Priced · Modular Construction · Easy Installation . Quality Performance · Attractive Styling · Corded Remote Option · TV On/Off Option
MODEL DRZ/DIC 66- CHANNEL CONVERTER/ DESCRAMBLER W/MODEL DRC REMOTE CONTROL
FEATURES
. Digital Reliability . Incremental Revenue Opportunities · Signal Security
· Automatic Fine Tuning · Video and Audio Suppression · Cordless Remote Option · Parental Keylock Option
VRF-94
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP.
R.F. SYSTEMS DIVISION
4229 S. Fremont Ave. Tucson, AZ 85714 (602) 294-1600
MODEL DRZ-A 66- CHANNEL ADDRESSABLE CONVERTER W/MODEL DRC REMOTE CONTROL
FEATURES ·Optimum system security · Product line flexibility
and upgradability · Increased revenue opportunities ·Growth capabilities · Enhanced parental control
MODELS JSX-DIC/JRX-DIC/JSM-DIC 9- CHANNEL and 36-CHANNEL MIDBAND CONVERTER DESCRAMBLERS
FEATURES · Reliability · Economy ·Signal security ·Quality performance ·Attractive styling · Parental keylock operation
MODELS JSX-A/JRX-A/JSM-A 36- CHANNEL ADDRESSABLE CONVERTERS
FEATURES · Proven reliable · Economical · Lower costs for service and operation · Growth capability ·Additional revenue possibilities ·Security for signal and converter ·Attractive styling · Parental control option
MODEL SV IMPULSE PAY- PER- VIEW TRANSMITTER W/MODEL DRC REMOTE CONTROL
FEATURES ·Impulse pay- per- view · Unique subscriber authorization · Field upgradable · Event charge indicator · Ultimate security · Increased revenue opportunities
MODEL DS/E DIGITAL SCRAMBLER/ENCODER
FEATURES · Multiple scrambling levels · Random scrambling modes · Digital circuitry throughout · Fold down front panel ·Thumbwheel switch settings · Local or remote control
MODEL PR -A ADDRESSABLE PROM PROGRAMMER
FEATURES ·User friendly · Flexibility ·Auto increment ·PROM ( Programmable Read Only Memory) chip coded · Unique identification code ·Converter operation/Parental control modes ·Time-out interval · Dedicated modular personality cards ·5" CRT display and simple interactive keyboard components
(hardware)
HOUSE DROP EQUIPMENT
STARBASE
JRX-A REMOTE (CORDED)
SBD-A
PR- A
MODEL SBD -A ADDRESSABLE DESCRAMBLER
FEATURES ·Add-on addressability · Encapsulation of sensitive circuitry · Dynamic scrambling ·Self- powered ·Parental control option
MODEL SB -200 ADD -ON DESCRAMBLER
FEATURES ·Add-on multi- level pay programming ·Upgrades non- scrambled CAN systems · Preserves existing converter base ·Self- powered · Encapsulated circuitry · Parental control option
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-95
915 Washington Street
P.O. Box 8346 Reading, PA 19603 (215) 378-9198
REMOTE VIDEO SYSTEM
Two-Way Telecommunication In A Portable Package
Now, with a minimum of
expense and training, full motion color video conferencing is
within reach.
411111000.--
IRIS RM-1. A totally self-contained, live origination/videoconferencing module, designed for use on cable and broadband local area network systems. Wherever there is aneed for frequent face-
to-face contact between people from different sites, IRIS provides the solution. Without the
downtime and expense of employee travel
$9725.00
And, there is no need for exotic operator training. The applications are almost limitless:
· School Districts Telecourses
e Campus Based Institutions
· MedC icao l n Facis litiu es ltation · Government Facilities
Video-Visiting · Businesses with Multiple LocatiGoovnersnme·ntMsunicipal and County
Administration Training
Specifications
RM-1 Module Single tube, color camera
Tripod Microphones ( 4) Weight 52 lbs. Height 13.5" Width 20.0" Depth 12.7"
(16.7" when closed for transportation)
Inputs Video- 1.0v pp NTSC composite/75 ohms Audio- 4 microphones, 25-600 ohms
or
3 microphones, 25-600 ohms 1line, switchable 600 ohms/less than 10k ohms RF -broadband RF cable input
Outputs Video-oaseband, 10y pp NTSC composite/75 ohms
Audio- 600 ohm, line output
or
RF-modLlated 6 MhZ audio/video frequency in sub, low, high, mid bands ( channel specified by users) Level -- + 40 dBm V to + 54 dBm V
VRF-96
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
JENSEN SOUND LABORATORIES
4136 North United Parkway Schiller Park, IL 6017E (312) 671-5680 ( 800) 323-0707
AUDIO/VIDEO RECEIVER
AVS-1500ST AUDIO Ei VIDEO RECEIVER
Features ·High accuracy frequency synthesis tuners for AM, FM
and TV broadcast and cable TV ·Micro-touch controls for all audio and video functions ·Full complement of audio and video functions allows
control of all media: broadcast, disc, and tape · " Last function" memory returns to previous channel,
function and volume when power switch is engaged; memory continues for 1day when unit is unplugged ·Direct access wireless remote control for all primary functions ·Adjustable DNR', stereo synthesis, and acoustic enhance signal processing allows optimum audio performance with all media
Surprisingly simple in appearance, the AVS-1500ST is essentially four components in one: adigitally synthesized AM/FM tuner; a 50 watt per channel high performance integrated amplifier; an advanced technology, cable ready digitally synthesized, 133 channel video tuner; and amicroprocessor controlled input/output switcher. Added to this is the convenience of a direct-access wireless remote control for all primary audio and video functions.
Far from simply combining audio and video, the AVS-1500ST adds signal processing capabilities which afford the user the opportunity to optimize every aspect of the home entertainment experience. Features such as the adjustable DNRTM Dynamic Noise Reduction System to provide high performance, low noise audio from standard videocassettes. Simulcast, aunique feature which allows simultaneous operation of both the audio and video tuners for easy reception of simulcast broadcasts. A special stereo synthesis circuit permits standard television broadcasts and monaural videocassettes to be experienced with much of the enjoyment of true stereo. The acoustic enhance function enables the user to simulate the acoustic experience of aconcert hall environment.
The headphone control system of the AVS-1500ST further expands its usefulness in a unique fashion. Separate amplifiers and switching circuitry combine to permit the enjoyment of audio functions through headphones at the
AVS-1500ST
same time that the main outputs are being used for broadcast TV or video.
The AVS-1500ST is the beginning of the ultimate home entertainment system.
SPECIFICATIONS
Continuous Power Output, RMS, both channels driven into 8ohms,
less than . 05%
THD
50 W
Audio Signal to Noise Ratio:
Phono ( MM)
86 dB
Tape
90 dB
Video 1, Video 2
90 dB
Audio Output Level/Impedance:
Tape, Video 1, Video 2
150 mV/10 k-ohm
Video Input Level/Impedance:
Video 1, Video 2
1OV/75 ohm
Video Output Level/Impedance:
Video 1, Monitor
1OV/75 ohm
RF Output
Switchable CH3-4
Tuner Section
FM:
Type ... Frequency Synthesized, PLL Signal to Noise Ratio at 65 dBf:
Stereo
74 dB
THD at 65 dBf, 1.0 kHz:
Stereo
0 15%
Stereo Separation at 1.0 kHz
45 dB
AM Suppression Ratio
60 dB
Capture Ratio
10dB
Antenna Input:
Balanced
300 ohms
Unbalanced
75 ohms
AM:
Type . ... Frequency Synthesized, PLL Signal to Noise Ratio at 50 dB
TV:
Type
Digital Frequency Synthesized System, NTSC American
Standard
Tuning Range . . . . VHF CH 2-13, UHF CH 14-83, CATV CH A-WW
Audio Bandpass
65 Hz- 15 kHz
Antenna Input
VHF / CATV
75 ohm
UHF
300 ohm
General Power Requirements Power Consumption
Dimensions Weight
AC 120V 60 Hz 150W
17"W x4-5/8"H x18"D 27 lbs.
An accessory kit containing a broad range of adaptors and connectors is included.
AVS-1500ST
$ 1050.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-97
o
KEYSTONE
ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
246 East 2nd Street Plainfield, NJ 07060 (201) 753-4400
ENGINEERS Et MANUFACTURERS OF CO-AXIAL COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS
KEYSTONE ELECTRONICS CORPORATION is an engineering and manufacturing firm serving cable television, SMATV, mini- cable, private cable, closed circuit television and telecommunications industries.
In our 9th year of servicing, we continue to provide:
PRODUCTS: · Pay TV security traps ·Key lock traps ( video Et sound) ·Audio carrier only traps · Band pass Et band reject fitters · High pass Et low pass Er band pass filters · Diplex filters · Indoor tap with gain in FM band ·Cable isolator ·Ground blocks with/without cable
isolator or high pass filter
ENGINEERING FOR: · Feasibility studies · System design ·Auditing Et technical evaluation · System engineering · Reliability engineering
All our products are designed for outdoor and indoor applications. For outdoor, our products are housed in zinc housing for maximum protection against corrosion. Airtight sealing of housing eliminates all probability of water leakage or moisture condensation. Our competition cannot make this claim.
We are the leading manufacturer for keylock traps, tier traps, band-pass and band reject filters, and in- line audio carrier traps for outdoor installation. These traps prevent objectionable programming language going into subscriber home.
We can custom design aproduct to meet your specific requirements. Please give us acall. At Keystone, we worry about you.
MODEL 106 OUTDOOR SUBSCRIBER CHANNEL TRAP
The Series 106 trap circuits remove video signal. ( Sound traps available on special order.) Weatherproof housing, pre- assembled, one end has ' F' fitting attached, other end has short double shielded (foil and braid) 59U cable ' F' fitting eliminating need for a jumper cable. Simply insert channel trap into existing 59U drop line. ( Fits standard indoor moldings.) No splices.
SPECIFICATIONS ·Trap Attenuation Bandwidth at 50dB ( min.): 10 kHz · Return Loss: ± 10MHz from Trap: 18dB ·Insertion Loss: 450 MHz: 0.25 dB; -±6MHz from trap Freq.: 1.5dB ·Temperature Stable: -40 Fto + 140 F ·AC- DC: Burnout Protected ·Connectors: Female ' F' connector case; Male ' F' connector on 59U
cable
SERIES 106
Mechanical: ·Zinc Diecast Housing ·Zinc Plate -- Yellow irridite finish ·Stable: - 40 to + 140 F, Jumper cable with ' F' Fitting attached
Model 106/Channel No., Single/Multi-Channel Trap ·Applicable for any 2, 3or 4, 5or 6channels in any band
150-450 MHz)
Model 106/LP, Low- Pass Filter · Passes 2 thru 6, Rejects all other channels Model 106/HP, High- Pass Filter · Passes 7 thru 13, 175.25-216 MHz, Rejects all other channels
SERIES 106
Model 106/S, Super- Band Trap
· Channels
Rejection
217.25-300 MHz
-30 dB
K thru W
- 50 dB
Model 106/M, Mid- Band Trap · Channels
120-156 MHz A thru G H
7
Pass all other channels.
· Rejection
-50 dB -45 dB -35 dB -3 dB
VR F-98
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
o
KEYSTONE
ELECTRONICS CORPORATION
246 East 2nd Street Plainfield, NJ 07060 (201) 753-4400
PARENTAL CONTROL MULTI- CHANNEL KEY- LOCK PROGRAM SWITCHES
KE/501VS
VIDEO AND AUDIO The Model KE/501VS is designed with aKey- Lock to permit parental programming control. When the Key is removed, pay channel is trapped. The KE/501VS Multi- Channel Trap series removes Video and Audio, and is available for Chs. 2-6, Midband and Chs. 7- EE. The KE/501VS is equipped with female " F" fittings on each side and 2 mounting ears for screw attachment. Size 2-1/2"L x2"W x1-1/2"D.
MODEL KE/500V
VIDEO ONLY The Model KE/500V, similar to the KE/501VS, is also designed with a Key- Lock to permit parental programming control. The basic difference between the KE/501VS and KE/500V is that this MultiChannel Trap series removes Video only.
The KE/501VS and KE/500V are also available in any combination of four channels, combining Lowband, Midband, Highband or Superband chs. with no adjacent channel problems.
Going Into Pay- Cable? Keystone designs and mass produces traps
and filters for control of per- channel pay-cable TV. Traps are designed to remove Chs. 2through 6, Mid- Band and 7through EE. Filters pass signals in the same range. Keystone supplies pay-cable traps and filters in subscriber configurations, and also in trunk/distribution housings. Subscriber models include outdoor video traps for drop cable attachment; and indoor traps that feature key- locks, two-way splitting, or removal of audio and video for parental control.
Trunk/Distribution Channel Traps. 12 Amp AC power passing for system marketing prior to pay TV turn- on and individual subscriber
trapping. Model 502 Trunk/Distribution Traps are capable of trapping out any Channel between 2-5, Mid- Band and 7 through EE. This
series permits master control of pay-cable programs in your trunk or distribution networks. The Model 502 circuits are contained in an RFI
shielded cast aluminum housing suitable for standard fitting installations. Size: 7-3/4"L x6"W x3"D.
SUBSCRIBER DROP PROTECTION DEVICES Keystone has designed additional protection features in conventional grounding blocks. These features are: cable isolator and elimination of CB ingress into the system. The cable isolating feature breaks the physical continuity of inner and outer sheaths of the drop cable at the ground- block. This prevents travel of low frequency surges and power line disturbances to subscriber terminals. Catastrophie failure of expensive subscriber terminals is minimized.
Another version of ground- block has a high-pass filter, 50-450MHz and rejecting 0.5 to 35 MHz signals. This eliminates ingress of CB interference into the subscriber drop. Unnecessary service calls are eliminated.
A third version of ground- blocks has incorporated asurge protector to prevent surge reaching the TV set -- or backward to the line extender.
The construction is of zinc die-cast with yellow irridite finish and
machined " F" type connectors with weatherproofing.
When ordering specify
KE-700 CI
Cable isolator only
KE-701 GBLA Ground block with lightning arrestor
KE-702 HPF Ground block with high pass filter
KE-703 CGH Ground block with cable isolator, high pass filter
KEYLOCKS/TRAPS
KEYSTONE PROGRAM SWITCH
KE/500 V
KE/500V
KE/501VS
525ST
KE-700CI
MODEL 525ST
TWO-WAY SPLITTER TRAP Keystone's Model 525ST is available for Chs. 2through 6, Mid- Band and Chs. 7 through EE. Output ' S' provides all programs on the cable, including the pay-cable channel. Output ' T' passes all programming less the pay channel. Insertion Loss: 3.5dB. The Model 525ST is equipped with female ' F' type fittings and two mounting ears. Size: 2" square x 1-1/2"D.
MODEL 526, FM SPLITTER Our Model 526 is a special splitter with a trap for FM band in one output ( To TV Set) and abandpass filter for FM band in other output (To FM Receiver). TV and FM bands are isolated by 55dB. TV signal pickup by FM receiver and FM signals pickup by TV receiver are thus prevented from interfering with each other. This splitter is of great value where video carriers are HRC frequencies and FM stations are off frequencies on cable spectrum. This also prevents overloading of FM tuner by video carriers. This splitter also provides 2.5dB higher signals in all bands. Ch. 6, A Er B excepted. Conventional 2-way splitter has 3.5dB loss.
MODEL KE FM MXX 75/300 OHM MATCHING TRANSFORMER WITH FM BAND PASS ONLY This matching transformer is designed for FM receivers. The bandpass filter prevents TV signal pickup to travel back to the television set. It only permits FM signals to FM receiver, preventing tuner overloading.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-99
LEADER INSTRUMENTS CORP.
380 Oser Avenue Hauppauge, NY 11788 (516) 231-6900 TINX 510-227-9669
A11111111111111111111111111111._
jo
etb
I. si
CATV/M ATV TEST INSTRUMENTS
LFC-944B
·
LFC-945B
LSG -202 SYNTHESIZED AM/FM SIGNAL GENERATOR
An all-purpose wide- band Signal Generator, the LSG-202 combines easy entry of operating parameters with storage of up to 100 test setups. Frequency and attenuation are set by keypad entry or increment- decrement control of individual digits, making it easy to
enter parameters and make changes. Setting resolution is 100 Hz for frequency and 0.1 dB for attenuation.
All parameters can be preset and recalled from the front panel keypad.
AM ( 0-90%) and FM ( 0-100 kHz) modulation is available by external signals or internal signals at 300 Hz, 400 Hz, 1kHz or 3kHz. Battery backup of memory prevents accidental loss of programmed data. And for communication operations, the reverse power protection feature prevents damage by an accidentally keyed transmitter.
All front panel programming operations can be remotely controlled. This type of control speeds lab routines by reducing setup time. It also adapts the unit to production- line and inspection routines
LSG-202
$4995.00
LFC-944B VHF/UHF FIELD STRENGTH METER
The LFC-944B is a portable battery operated field strength meter designed for testing and measuring the performance of CATV and
MATV systems. It provides for measuring levels of - 40 to + 60 dBmV
on VHF channels and -30 to + 40 dBmV on UHF channels. The meter
scale is also calibrated to make measurements in microvolts. An
accurate attenuator provides up to 70 dB attenuation in 10 dB steps.
Accurate detent tuning is provided for VHF channels and UHF tuning
for channels 14 to 83 is with acontinuous control. The LFC-944B is supplied with asturdy carrying case.
LFC-944B
$525.00
LFC -945B CATV LEVEL METER
The LFC-945B CATV Level Meter is arugged, accurate instrument for measuring signal levels in CATV and MATV Systems. It covers the two frequency ranges 40 to 300 MHz and 470 to 890 MHz with accuracies of -4-7- 1.5 dB and +/- 2 dB respectively. Tuning of individual channels is facilitated by large dials marked with both fre-
quency and channel, an electronic fine tuning control and abuilt-in sound amplifier and a loudspeaker which enables separate field strength measurements of the audio and video signals.
LSW -359
Three 20 dB switchable attenuators and a25 dB meter scale provide an input signal range of -35 to + 60 dBm ( 0dBm = 1mV).
The LFC-945B will also measure AC voltages on the cable system from 0to 50 VAC with an accuracy of + /- 5% f.s.
Power is supplied by rechargeable NiCad cells and the power switch is automatically set to off when the protective cover is closed.
The LFC-945B weighs just 8.8 lbs. and is supplied with a battery charger, rechargeable batteries, 300:75 ohm balun and nylon web carrying/operation strap.
LFC-945B
$775.00
LSW-359 1.5 GHz SWEEP GENERATOR
A wide band Sweep Generator, the LSW-359 covers the frequency range of 1MHz to 1.5 GHz in three bands. It features four modes to select the range of swept frequencies:
Full Band: In which the entire band is swept. For example, 450 MHz to 1GHz for band 2.
Start/Stop: Two controls determine the starting and ending frequencies for the range swept. Frequencies are indicated on a slide- rule dial.
Delta FSweep: One control sets the center frequency, another sets the sweep width centered on that frequency. Sweep width is variable from 200 kHz to 500 MHz.
CW: The generator operates as aCW signal source with calibrated output frequency and optional 1- kHz sine wave amplitude modulation.
A unique marker system offers a pulse-type marker in full- band operation. The frequency of the marker is read off the slide- rule dial.
In addition, harmonic comb- type birdy markers are available in all modes of frequency selection. The birdies are spaced at 1, 10, 50 and/or 100 MHz and are staggered in amplitude for ease in identification. All markers are bypassed ( post- detector injected) so that
marker amplitude is independent of the characteristics of the device under test.
Attenuation is 60 dB in 10 dB increments augmented by a17 dB DC voltage controlled attenuator.
Sweep rates are continuously variable from 10 mS to 100 S and can be automatically triggered, synchronized from the power line, or triggered manually for single- sweep operation. In the single-sweep mode, apen lift contact closure permits operation with X-Y plotters.
All major functions can be remote- controlled to make the LSW-359 an extremely versatile sweeper for lab and production uses.
LSW-359
$3995.00
VRF-100
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LEMCO TOOL CORPORATION
R.D. 42 Box 330A Cogan Station, PA 17728 (717) 494-0620
CABLE REEL TRAILERS
6354
CABLE REEL TRAILERS Standard Equipment ·License Plate Bracket ·Safety Chains · 1-7/8" Ball Coupler · Reflectors ·Primed and Painted High- Visibility Orange · Light Group
Drop Axle and Springs Provide · Lower Center of Gravity ·Smoother Cable Transport
MODEL
Reel Capacity (Dia. xWidth) (Inches)
Overall Dimensions xW xH)
(Inches)
Tires
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (Pounds)
Shipping Weight (Pounds)
5254 54 x56
96 x70 x44 B78-13
2000 2CC
6354 57 x63
107 x89 x40 E78-14
2240 375
MODEL 6566KD KNOCK DOWN TRAILER
When disassembled, several trailers can be transported in apick-up truck, or be stored in asmall area. Supplied with a reversible mechanism that accepts either a 2" ball coupler or pintle eye. Standard equipment includes license plate bracket, safety chains, light group, and high visibility orange finish. Assembly instructions and operating procedures supplied.
MODEL
6566KD
Reel Capacity (Dia. xWidth) (Inches)
66x 65
Overall Dimensions
(L X W X H) (Inches)
120 x96 x49
Tires
E-78-14, Class B
Gross Vehicle ( not included)
Weight Rating
(Pounds)
3,000
Shpg. Wt.
(Pounds)
450
6366 66 x63
107 x89 x46 E-78-14 2,240 390
6372 72 x63
107 x89 x52 E-78-14 2,240 405
MODEL NO. 6366 TRAILER
MODEL 6366P
6366B
HITCH TYPE Adjustable Pintle Eye
2" Ball Coupler
MODEL NO. 6372 TRAILER
MODEL
6372P
6372B
HITCH TYPE Adjustable Pintle Eye
2" Ball Coupler
Standard equipment on both Model Nos. 6366 and 6372: · License Plate Bracket
· Safety Chains ·Adjustable Pintle Ring ·Leaf Springs
· Reflectors
·Light Group · Primed and Painted High- Visibility Orange
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-101
LEMCO TOOL CORPORATION
R.D. P2 Box 330A Cogan Station, PA 17728 (717) 494-0620
CABLE CADDIES/ REEL ACCESSORIES
T-255
T-254
T-253
1220 REEL BUCK Will easily handle 18" and 22" diameter reels of strand and cable ree diameters from 36" to 54". Foot and handle design hold main framt up and away from irregular surfaces. Fabricated of steel tubing. Wt. 70 lbs. Primed and painted.
Rugged -- Truly designed for construction site usage.
Safe -- Arbor sleeves slip over arbor, keeping the handles in control
· Use on Ground, Truck or Warehouse
· Collapsible for easy Storage
· Labor Saving Lifetime Tool The Reel Buck is 35" high and 64" in length.
REEL HANDLING DEVICES The Cable Caddies shown here are for use in paying- out Drop Cable during customer installations. They can be carried ( rolled) to walk- off cable or placed and cable can be pulled out.
Drop Cable Manufacturers recommend that when paying- out cable the spool should rotate. Cable damage will result fthe cable is pulled off from adead spool or over an end of aspool. The resulting damage may be hidden. Do not twist to jerk the cable. Fabricated of sturdy steel tubing and painted utility orange these devices will yield years of service. Three sizes are made available to meet your requirements.
MODEL NO.
T-253 T-254 T-255
MAXIMUM REEL SIZE (Dia. ) x ( Width)
14" x12"
18" x16"
26" x15"
CAPACITY (Lbs. ) 225 200 170
WT. (Lbs.; 5-3/4
9
10
T-256 DROP REEL JACK The Drop Reel Jack supports up to four reels of drop cable and
used in multiple wiring installations, i.e. -- apartment buildings. Tht unit is supplied with springs which serve as abraking device to avoic inadvertent pay- out. Maximum reel size is 18- inch diameter anc 16- inch width. The unit is fabricated of steel tubing and painted Assembly instructions are supplied. Wt. 33 lbs.
VRF-102
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LRC ELECTRONICS, INC.
901 South Avenue, Box 111 Horseheads, NY 14845 (607) 739-3844
One Piece Drop- Cable Connectors For RG-59/U Cable
F-59CH
F 590S
9111MINIIIK
FS-59
ADAPTORS Male lo " F" Female Accepts 18-24 AWG conductor
11114C-FF
CONNECTORS/ TERMINATORS
RA-659
General usage for toil-braid cable Attached Cnmp Ring Hex Tool- C1601
General usage tor toil- braid loll- braid cable He, Tooi·CT601
Sealed Und Seals to Jacket and to temale F Use on standard 242 0 D
He> Tool·CT601
F59CD
FS- 590S
Ale-n .a
Special design for large double braid cable Hex Tool·CT601
F59CDB
Sealed Und Seals to Jacket and to emale F Use on toil-braid tal-braid IIO
One Piece Drop- Cable Connectors For RG-6/U Cable
Special design tor large double braid cable He, Tool-CT601
F·56CH
F-560 S
FS-56
Hi
General usage tor tool- brad cable Attached Cnmp Ring Hex Tool-CT601
General usage on foil-braid. toil braid cable
Hex Tool- MCI-60S
FS- 550S
Sealed Und Seals to Jacket and to Female F Use on standard 280 0 D
Hex Tool- 0'601
F56C
Sealed Und Seals lo Jacket and to Female F Use on tod-braed tpl·braid cable
Hex Tool·CT601
General usage with attached Crimp Ring Tool- CT603
MISC. " F" CONNECTORS
GROUNDING DEVICES Accepts I8-22-AWG Center Conductors
08-91
00841
GL-111
0 e
.Âit
.0
.
SPLICE Accepts 18-24 AWG Center Conductors
Fel
E
iiito
Fayse WCR250 1111111>
TOOL C1603
QUICK DISCONNECT ADAPTOR Push-on- accepts 18-24 AWG connectors
PF-59
F-56P
F41/591WCR55o
4011ln wwwwww.1 TOOL CTRII
F-59P
PF-595 ....--
MISCELLANEOUS Male I
Fil
F-60 ;
TOOL C1603
TOOL CT425
ATTENUATORS
DC- 300 MHz usable to 1GHz Accuracy 5% or · 5db mpedance 75 ohms in and out Return Loss 20 db mer
Applies directly. without the use Of a F-71 or a Jumper Solid construction
AP-3F91 AP-6F1A
AP- 10F91 AP-20FAI
AP-3FF AP4FF
AR1OFF AP-2OFF
TERMINATORS, SECURITY DEVICES
GENERAL TERMINATORS
TRF Sal LOCKING TERMINATORS
TRUFA
LIP
F-port ternynabon
·tpo,trerflsoarrue ·used yeah secunly shoat] ·avaaable mama feast. as 19F SMP
· "F" port termnatece -brass body ·wadable Rabaul resistor as CL F · 'ran, ternanabon
amount body ayetabte MAW reset°, asCL FA
onstallaton loot lor Ocang lernanators
SECURITY SHIELD'
FCS - 3S
FCS - 3S - P
FCS·eS
FC
-P
FCS· ST FCS·ST·P FCS·eT FCS· 9T· P
SECURITY SHIELD TOOL
ATTACHMENT
MATERIAL'
Steel
750
080
750
080
steel
1025
080
don
1025
080
ihreaded-on
steel
750
09?
xon
750
080
slea
1075
138
oron
I075
120
SST - 59- U
use to alma,' I" 511e cconectors and general Remnants onto secunly Sheds
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-103
LRC ELECTRONICS, INC.
901 South Avenue Box 111, Horseheads, NY 14845 (607) 739-3844
MISC. ALUMINUM CONNECTORS
F625E (Aluminum)
5/8-24 ENTRY TO FFEMALE 1- 1 / 4 "pin fits most amplifiers, taps, etc.
For 2" pin, add suffix - TC
ETE625
5/8 ENTRY TO ENTRY For direct coupling of housings.
For 2" pin, add suffix - TC
ETE625-R 625TRB TRB-F 625-P
5/8 ENTRY TO ENTRY With rotating coupler. For 2" pin, add suffix - TC
5/8 ENTRY TERMINATOR AC Blocking
1- 1 / 4 "Terminal pin fits most amplifiers, taps, etc.
For 2" pin, add suffix - TC
TERMINATOR-AC- BLOCKING Sealed construction mates with F625 Eand
cable to Fseries
KS625
PORT PLUG thd - 24
ENTRY ADAPTER
Stainless steel insert prevents
seizing of Aluminum connectors
OD ' 3/18-20
ID 5/8-24
MISC. CABLE ADAPTORS
Cable To FF
Cable To Bulk Head FF
female "F-accepts 18-22 AVVG conductors
(ff) --
bulkhead mount female accepts 18-22 AWG conductors shipped with two mountIng nuts
Cable To FM
Cable To Terminator
TAPS AND CONNECTORS
SPLICE BLOCK AND UNIVERSAL CONNECTORS
HSB TSB
HOUSING SPUCE BLOCK Female splice adapter: splices any two chassis mounting connectors with standard %- 24 threads; enables the joining of one size cable to another size or type cable. Facilitates athru splice of 90° or 180° splice. Accepts center conductor up to . 185 diameter.
THROUGH SPLICE BLOCK Female splice adaptor: splices any two chassis mounting connectors with standard 'hi- 24 threads; enables the joining of one size cable to another size or type cable. Facilitates athru splice only. Accepts center conductor up to . 185 diameter.
EU -90 EU- 90 3
ENTRY UNIVERSAL- 90' Right angle entry designed for use in apedestal or in tight spaces where cable cannot be bent. Can be used with any chassis mount fitting with standard %- 24 threads. Use two together for 180 ' entry or EU -90-3.0 or EU -90 4.5 to extend away from the housing. Accepts center conductor up to . 185 diameter.
ENTRY UNIVERSAL,-9cr-r Same as EU -90 except with alonger body to extend away from the housing. Use with one EU -90 for 180' entry with a center conductor 3inches: center to center. Accepts center conductor up to . 185 diameter.
EU- 90 4-5
ENTRY UNIVERSAL, -- 90°-- 4.5 "
Same as EU -90 except with alonger body to extend away from the housing. Use with one EU -90 for 180° entry with a center conductor 4.5 inches: center to center. Accepts center conductor up to . 185 diameter.
B SERIES INTEGRAL MANDREL CONNECTORS
FEATURES The design of the LRC El series connector incorporates an internal mechanism which seizes both the center conductor and the aluminum sheath in one operation by the tightening of a single nut, thus making installation easier and faster.
The electrical parameters of this connector series make them more than adequate for today's and tomorrow's cable system.
ENTRY CONNECTOR
feed thru
rnale mates wrth F-61 and F-81 freIngs Cable To " N" Male
AC blocking Cable To " N" Female
ENTRY CONNECTOR pin type
U.S. Patent No. 4,346,958
75 ohm ' N' also available in 5.9 ohm
Cable To " UHF" Male
75 chm Also available in 50 ohm
Cable To "UHF" Female
mates with UHF female Also available in the M senes mod r5ed UHF. 75 ohm)
mates wIth UHF male Also avallable in the M senes Mx)dtbed UHF 75 ohm)
VRF-104
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SPLICE CONNECTOR
U.S. Patent No. 4,346,958
ENTRY CONNECTOR extension
U.S. Patent No. 4,346,958
LRC ELECTRONICS, INC.
901 South Avenue, Box 111 Horseheads, NY 14845 (607) 739-3844
CONNECTORS
N SERIES INTEGRAL MANDREL
FEATURES The same mechanical features that made the LAC EFI series one of the most used connectors in CATV are retained in the present design, which now incorporates electrical parameters that make these connectors usable to 500 MHz and beyond.
This series uses a separate seizing mechanism for the center 7;onductor and the shield.
ENTRY CONNECTOR
I
feed thru
ENTRY CONNECTOR pin type
SPLICE CONNECTOR
MC 2 SERIES CONNECTORS For General Cables MC 2Series Cables
FEATURES · LAC patented seizing mechanism U.S.
Patent No. 4,346,958 ·Time proven positive stops ·2" pin terminal ( standard) · Identifying part number stamped
permanently on connector
MATERIALS ·Connector body: 6262 aluminum for
maximum corrosion resistance ·Connector finish; clear indite ·Mandrel: cadmium plated steel ·Terminal: silver plated brass for
excellent RF contact
ENTRY CONNECTOR extension
These pin type entry connectors are unique in the industry in that they have athreaded center conductor pin which affords maximum pull strength for the center conductor. The stresses of the center conductor are absorbed in the connector itself and none is transferred to the equipment that the connector is used on.
ENTRY CONNECTOR pin type
thread- on center conductor terminal
SPLICE CONNECTOR thread- on center
conductor terminal
SPECIFICATIONS -- 1-1/4" pin terminal ( 2" available) -- integral mandrel -- 5/8" -24 entry thread -- available for 875 and 1" cable only
SERIES INTEGRAL MANDREL
FEATURES rhe feed thru connector in the " K" Series offers a30 dB minimum .eturn loss from 0-850 MHz ( LAC will supply test data.)
dentifying part numbers are stamped permanently on the main body )f each connector for easy identification.
ENTRY CONNECTOR SPECIFICATIONS feed thru -- integral mandrel -- sealed unit with proper cable preparation
1 -- 5/8" - 24 entry thread -- not available for . 750, . 875, 1.000 application, not practical. Please consult LAC Engineering
ENTRY CONNECTOR extension
SPECIFICATIONS -- nominal 3" extension -- 2" pin terminal standard
-- auto seized center conductor -- integral mandrel -- 5/8" - 24 entry thread
1/C2 WOES FEED THRU ENTRY. PIN TYPE ENTRY EXTENSION SPLICE FF Fr BULKHEAD FM TERMINATOR N mALE N FEMALE UHF MALE UHF FEMALE
440
ROO
TIM
EMI 440 MC? _ EMI 500 MC2 _
·
E , 440 MC?
El SOO·MC2
EMI 05,0 MC? El -ASO -MC?
( I 750 MI
LI.440-51C2LB _ 61-500.51C2 LB
El 650 51C2 LB I Al ISO- MI, LI,
St 440 MC2
57- 500- MC?
5. 650 54C2
51 750 M,
AI 440 47 MC2 XI 440 FF MC2 ,
Al 500- FT MC2 HI 500-44 MC?
A, 650 FE 51C2 650 FF MC?
AI 750-11 55. 61 , 750-FF 7.0 ·
Al 440 75170C,
500-45154C2
A, 650 FM 51C2
A, 750 FM 55 2
Al 4410 11+Ii NIC1 · AI 500 TAB 51C2
Al 650 MO MC2
AI 750- IOU MC.
Al 440 NM MC, · AI 500 NM MC?
AI-650 6054 51C2
750.NIN 50
AI 44040 MC? AI . 0 1.114A10 AA,
Al SCOW MC2
AI-650 N4 16C2
AI 750 NI 547 2
1
500.061.154 MC2
AI-650-UHEM MC2 LA7 7,0 OW.
AI .0 Me A W. ,
At s00 UBE MC2
AI 650-UNFF 51C2
An 750 tkéleF MC2
Ci , o0o 7.4C2 El I000-MC?LIL
5, ,000 MCI A/ 0000 FF 51, BI 1000 FF 54C2 At 1007., F7.4 rot 2 Al WOO IRS ML? AI 7000 NM 502 AI woo NF MC., A/ 1000 01,10 A/ 1000 7,74FF RIt
OR SERIES CONNECTORS for Comm/Scope OR Series Cable
FEATURES · Positive stops · Positive grounding to outside of cable
sheath · Integral mandrel ·Auto seized center conductor · Silver plated terminal
OR SERIES
SOO
MO
1125
FEED THRU
EMI- 500-OR
ENTRY PIN TYPE
Et- 500- OR
El-860-0R
Et- 1125-OR
ENTRY EXTENSION
El-500-0R/LB
EI-860-0R/LB
EI-1125-0R/LB
SPLICE
SI -500-OR
SI -860-OR
SI -1125-OR
FF
AI-500-FF -OR
AI-860-FF -OR
AI- 1125-FF -OR
FF BULKHEAD
BI- 500-FF-OR
BI-860-FF -OR
131- 1125-FF -OR
FM
AI- 500- FM-OR
A1-1360- FM-OR
AI- 1125- FM-OR
TERMINATOR
AI-500-TRB-OR
AI-860-TRB-OR
AI-1125-TRB-OR
N MALE
AI- 500- NM- OR
AI-860- NM-OR
AI- 1125- NM-OR
N FEMALE
AI- 500- NF- OR
AI-860- NF-OR
AI- 1125- NF-OR
UHF MALE
A1-500-UNFM-OR
AI-860-UHFM-OR
AI-1125-UHFM-OR
UHF FEMALE
AI-500-UHFF-OR
AI-860-UHFF-OR
A1-1125-UNFF-OR
·Feed thru connector Is not apractical application in this see
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-105
LRC ELECTRONICS, INC.
901 South Avenue, Box 111 Horseheads, NY 14845 (607) 739-3844
TAPS AND CONNECTORS
CABLE A
GROUP
CCS HATFIELD: GID I, CHEMA FOAM CERRO: OX *,POLYETHYLENE * COMM/SCOPE: PARAMETER I. ALUMAGARD SYSTEMS: 11 & 12, 21 &22 TIMES: ALUMIFOAM *,ALUMIFOAM II
·NOT IN CURRENT PROOUCTION
11110111:0 FEEDTHRU ENTRY, PIN TYPE ENTRY EXTENSION SPUCE FF FF BULKHEAD FM TERMINATOR N MALE N FEMALEUHF MALE UlIF FEMALE
412 EMI-412-B
El-41241 EI-412-B4.51
SI -41243 AI-412-FFB BI-412 -FF -B AI-412-FM43 AI-412-TRB-B AI-412- NM-B AI-412- NF- B A1-412-UHFLI-B AI-412-UHFF-B
On EMI- 500-B
21-500-B El-500-B/LB
SI -5013-B Al-500-FF -8 BI- 500-FF -B AI-500- FM-B AI-500-TREFB AI- 500-NIA- B A1-503-NF- 13 A1-500-UHFM-B AI-500-UHFF-B
V/ PERMS FEEDTHRU ENTRY. PINTYPE ENTRY EXTENSION SPLICE FF FF BULKHEAD FM TERMINATOR
412 EMI -412-W EFI-412P-W EFI-412PW/LB SPI-412-W AI-412- FF- W BAI-412- FF- W AI-412-PUW AI 412-TREI-W
BOO EMI -500-W EFI-500P-W EFI-500PW LB SPI- 500W AI-500- FF-W BAI- 500-FF-W AI- 500-FM -W AI-500 TRB W
an MI
700 EMI- 75043
El- 750-B El-75040LS
SI -75043 AI- 750- FP-B B1-750-FF41 A1- 750-FM-8 AI-750-TRB-B AI- 750- NIA-B A1- 7513-NF- B AI-750-UHFM-B AI-75O411IFF-B
700 EL11-750-W EFI-750P-W EFI 750P,AFLB SFI-750-W AI- 750- FF-W BAI- 750- FF-W AI- 750-FM-W A1-750-TREI-W
PI
NM
_
US
11110 _
EFI- 1000P-W
SFI-1000-W Al 1000-FF-W HAI 1000- FF-W Al 10013-FM-W ,
CABLE pp GROUP L-)
CERRO: CERROFOAM * COMM/SCOPE: CELL-O-AIR * TIMES: DYNAFOAM *,DYNAPLUS *
·NOT IN CURRENT PRODUCTION
»NS FEED THRU
412
,
EMI- 412-B3
ENTRY, PIN TYPE
EI-412433
ENTRY EXTENSION EI-4124334.8
SPLICE
SI -412433
FF
AI-412-FF -133
FF BULKHEAD FM
BI-412 -FF -133 AI-412-FIA -B3
TERMINATOR
AI-412-TRB-133
N MALE
A1-412-NM433
NFDAALE
AI-412 -NF -133
UHF MALE
AI-412-UHFIA-153
UHF FEMALE
AI-412-UHFF-B3
MO
igi
200
WI
1000
r% CABLE
GROUP `../
GENERAL CABLE: FUSED DISC* FUSED DISC III FUSED DISC M Ill
·401 IN CURRENT PRODUCTION
100001MS
412
US
FEEDTHRU
EMI-412- SW
EMI -WO-SW
ENTRY, PIN TYPE
EFI-412P-SW
EFI-500P-SW
ENTRY EXTENSION EFI-412P-SW,LB EFI-500P-SWLEI
SPLICE
DI-412-5W
SFI-500-SW
FF
AI-412-PF-SW A1-500-FP- SW
FF BULKHEAD
BAI-412-FF-SW BAI-500-FF -SW
FM
AI-412-FM- SW AI-500-FM- SW
TERMINATOR
A1-412-TREMSW AI- 500-11113-5W
Oaf
710 EMI- 750-SW EFI-750P-SW EFI-750P-SW/B SFI-750-SW AI- 750-FF -SW BAI -750-PF-SW AI- 750-FM-SW A1-750-TRB-SW
OM
1000 '
EFI-1003P-SW
SPI -10005W AI- 1000-FF-SW BAI -10013-FF -SW AI- 1000-FIA-SW
FUSEDOMC FEED THOU ENTRY. PIN TYPE WEEP/EXTENSION SPLICE FF FEBULKHEAD FM TERMINATOR II MALE NFEMALE UHF MALE UHF FEMALE
418
In
EMI-412-FDAN
EMI- 60040M
EFI-412P-P0661
EF1-500P-EDAY
EFI412P-FOW LB EFI-500P-FEAVLB
5F1-112-FOW
SFI-S00-POW
A1-412-FF-FOAN 111-500-FF-FDAV
BAI-112-FF-FONV BAISOOFF-FIDIN
A1-412- EM- F0 W AI-503-FM-FDW
AI-412 TRB-FOW Al-SOC-TAB ED W
A1-412- 61M-POW Al-SOC-NM -POW
A1-412-NE - PO W AI-500-NF.FDW
AI-412-UHFM.FD WAI.500-UHEM ED W
A1-412-UHEE -ED VP AI-SOO-UWE ED W
Piemerem
FEEOTIPRU ENTRY. PIN TYPE ENTRY EXTENSION SPLICE FE FE BULKHEAD Flà TERMINATOR II HALE N FEMALE UHF MALE UHF FEMALE
412 EMI-412-F0 8
EI-412-B3 E1412031.13
SI -412-03 Al- 4124E433 01- 612 -FF -83 A1- 412 -PLI -B3 AI-412- TAB-83 AI- 412- NU- 03 A1- 412-61F-133 A1-412-1./HFIA-B3 A1-412-UPIFF-B3
In EIAI-503-FD B3
EI-500-133 EI50-0- 133,U3
SI -500-83 AI- 500-FF -B3 BI-500-FF -B3 Al- SOS-FU- RS AI-500-TRB-B3 AI- 500- NIA- B3 A1- 500-19F-133 AI-500-UHFM-R3 A1-500-UHEE-B3
NI III
100 EMI-150E0/W EFI-75013-FOW EFI-750P-FOW LB SE1-150-FOW A1-750-FF-FEINV B.61-750-FF-FDAN AI- 150- FM- POW AI-75CP TRB.FD W A1-750-NM-FOW AI- 75041F FOW A1-750-UHFIA-FD W AI-750-UHFF-FDW
710 EMI- 750 F13 133
E1-750-133 D750834.0
51-150-B3 A1- 750- FE- B3 131-15OFF-133 A1- 150-FIA -B3 A1-793.113B.B3 A1-750-611.1-133 A1- 7513- NE- B3 AI-750-UHFM-133 A1-150-UMFF-13.3
WS WI
1010
EFI-10017P-FONV
SEI-1030-POW A1-1000-FE-FONV BA1-1000-FE-FOW AI- 1000-FM FDW
Al- I000-NH- POW AI- 1000-NF POW AI 1000-UHEIA EWA AI 1000-UPIFF·FD W
MN
EFI-100CR-FDAV
SF1-11:03413AV A1-10011-FF-FCPW BAI-1000-FF-FEMN A1-101:0-FIA-FOW
A1-10013-611A-FEIMI A1- 1000-61F-POW Al-ICCOUHFIA-FDAY A1-1000-UNFF.FOW
VRF -106
12.1100200001111 FEED TIRO ENTRY-PIN TYPE ENTRY EXTENSION ._ SPLICE FF FE BULKHEAD FM TERMINATOR PUPAL( N FEMALE UHF MALE UHF FEMALE
IS EMI- WS-13 El- II S-EI EI-I 15-66'LB ell 5-8 /11-11.54F-13 B1-11 5-FE-B AI- 11 5-FIA-0 AI- 11 S- TAB- B A1- II6-NM-B AI- 11 5-NF-B AI- 11 5-UHFAI-13 AI- 11 SUPIFF-B
Ulm EMI- 13.0-13
EI-13.16B EI-13 0- BIB
SI-13 0-0 AI- 13.0-FF -B el- no- FE-El Al- 13.0-F61-13 A1-13.0-TRE6B A1- 13.0-NIA-B A1- 13.0-NP -B AI- 13 0-UHFM-B AI- 13 O-UFIFF - B
14.00.2 EM1-14 S-B
El- 111S-B El- INS-BIB
SI- IN S- B Al- INS-FF-8 B1-14 S-FF.B A1-14 SFIA-B A1-1-116-TRB-B AI- 14.5-61M-B /11-14.5411F-13 Al- 1N 5-UHFIA-B Al- 14 5-UNFF-13
111.002 EMI- 16.5-B El- 16S-B EI-16 S-BIO
51.16 5-B A1- 113.5-PF -13 51-16 5-PF -B Al- 16 S- PM-B AI- 16 5- TOO- B Al- 16 SNM-B AI- 16 5- 64F-B Al- 16 SUPIFIA-B A,IONUHFF-B
Moue
War
EIM-19 OB
EI-I9 0-13
EFI-1013013-FOW
El- 19 CPBLB
SI -19 0-B
SE1-10016POW
AI- 19 0- FP-B
A1- 1000-FF-FOIN
BI.19 0-FF -13
BA1-1000-FE-POW
AI- 19 0-FAI-B
A1-1000-FUFEMN
AI.19 0-TRI3-13
AI IS
A1- 1000-NM-FOIN
A,19 0-NP -El
AI- 1000- NP- POW
N-19 0-UNFM-B A1-1000-1.91FM-F016
Al- 19 OUHFF-13 A1-1000-UHFE-POW
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
LRC ELECTRONICS, INC.
901 South Avenue, Box 111 Horseheads, NY 14845
TAPS AND CONNECTORS
(607) 739-3844
CABLE
ñ
COMM/SCOPE PARAMETER II *
GROUP LJ
NOT IN CURRENT PRODUCTION
B SERIES
412
500
625
750
1
875
1000
FEED THRU
EMI-412-63
ENTRY, PIN TYPE
El-412-83
ENTRY EXTENSION EI-412-83/LB
SPUCE
SI-412-B3
FF
A1-412- FF- 63
FF BULKHEAD
BI-412-FF -133
FM
AI-412- FM- B3
TERMINATOR
AI-412-TRB-B3
N MALE
AI-412-NM -63
N FEMALE
AI-412- NF -63
UHF MALE
AI-412-UHFM-B3
UHF FEMALE
AI-412-UHFF-83
CABLE C GROUP
CCS HATFIELD: GID III CERRO: GXX * COMM SCOPE: PARAMETER III SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA: GID III SYSTEMS: 31 & 32 TIMES: LUMIFOAM III & T-4 CAPSCAN: 4
NOT IN CURHE Nt PRODUCTION
W SERIES
412
500
625
750
875
1000
FEEDTHRU
EMI -412-W2
EMI-500-W2
EMI-750-W2
ENTRY, PIN TYPE
EFI-412P-W2
EFI-500P-W2
EFI-750P-W2
EFI-1000P-W2
ENTRY EXTENSION EFI-412P-W2/LB EFI-500P-W2/LB
EFI-750P-W2/LB
SPLICE
SFI-412-W2
SFI-500-W2
SFI-750-W2
SFI-1000-W2
FF
AI-412- FF-W2 AI-500- FF-W2
AI- 750- FF-W2
AI- 1000- FF- W2
FF BULKHEAD
BAI-412- FF-W2 BAI-500- FF-W2
BAI- 750- FF-W2
BAI- 1000- FF- W2
FM
AI-412-FM -W2 AI-500-FM -W2
AI- 750-FM-W2
AI- 1000-FM -W2
TERMINATOR
AI-412-TRB-W2 AI-500-TRB-W2
AI-750-TRB-W2
B SERIES
412
500
825
750
876
FEED THRU
EMI- 412-83
EMI-500-83
EMI-625-83
EMI- 750-B3
EMI-875-B3
ENTRY, PIN TYPE
EI-412-B3
EI-500-133
EI-625-B3
EI-750-83
El-875-83
ENTRY EXTENSION EI-412-133/LB
El- 50043/B
EI-625-B3/LB
EI-750-83&B
EI-875-B3/LB
SPLICE
SI -412-B3
SI -500-83
SI-625-133
SI -750-83
SI -875-B3
_FF
AI- 412-FF -B3
AI-500-FF -83
AI-625-FF-B3
AI- 750-FF-B3
AI-875-FF -B3
FF BULKHEAD
BI-412 -FF -B3
BI-500-FF -83
81-625-FF-B3
BI- 750-FF-83
BI-875-FF-133
FM
AI-412- FM- B3 AI- 500- FM- B3 AI-625- FM-83 AI- 750-FM-83 AI-875- FM-83
TERMINATOR
AI-412-TR8-83 AI-500-TAB- 83 AI-625-TRB-B3 AI-750-TRB-B3 AI-875-TRB-B3
N MALE
AI-412- NM-83 AI- 500- NM- 83 AI-625- NM- B3 AI- 750- NM- B3 AI-875- NM- B3
N FEMALE
AI-412-NF- B3
AI-500-NF- B3
AI-625- NF-B3
AI- 750- NF-B3
AI-875- NF- 83
UHF MALE
AI-412-UHFM-B3 AI-500-UHFM-B3 AI-625-UHFM-83 AI-750-UHFM-83 AI-875-UHFM-B3
-UHF FEMALE
AI-412-UHFF-93 AI-500-UHFF-B3 AI-625-UHFF-83 AI-750-UHFF-83 AI-875-UHFF-B3
1000
W SERIES
412
500
825
750
875
1000 '
FEED THRU
EMI -412-W3
EMI -500-W3
EMI -750-W3
ENTRY, P1N TYPE
EFI-412P-W3
EFI-500P-W3
EFI-750P-W3
EFI-1000P-W3
ENTRY EXTENSION EFI-412P-W3/LB EFI-500P-WILB
EFI-750P-W3/LB
SPLICE
SFI-412-W3
SFI-500-W3
SFI-750-W3
SFI-1000-W3
FF
AI-412- FF-W3 AI- 500- FF-W3
AI-750- FF-W3
AI- 1000- FF-W3
FF BULKHEAD
BAI-412- FF-W3 BAI-500- FF- W3
BAI- 750- FF-W3
BAI- 1000- FF- W3
FM
AI-412-FM -W3 AI-500-FM -W3
AI-750-FM -W3
AI- 1000-FM -W3
TERMINATOR
AI-412-TRB-W3 AI-500-TRB-W3
AI-750-TRB-W3
KSERIES
CCS HATFIELD: GID I. CHEMA FOAM
CABLE A CERRO: Ge POLYETHYLENE-- COMM/SCOPE: PARAMETER I, ALUMAGARD' ·
GROUP I-1 SYSTEMS: 11 & 12,21 & 22 TIMES: ALUMIFOAM*;ALUMIFOAM II "NOT IN CURRENT PRODUCTION
CABLE GROUP L-
CCS HATFIELD: GID III CERRO GXX'· COMMJSCOPE .PARAMETER III SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA GIO III SYSTEMS 31 832 TIMES LUMIFOAM III 87-4 CAPSCAN 4
K SERIES FEED THRU ENTRY, PIN TYPE ENTRY EXTENSION SPLICE FF FF BULKHEAD FM TERMINATOR N MALE N FEMALE UHF MALE UHF FEMALE
500 EMI- 500-K
EI-500-K EI-500-K/LB
S1- 500-K AI- 500-FF -K BI-500-FF-K AI- 500- FM-K AI-500-TRB-K AI-500- NM- K AI-500- NF- K AI-500-UHFM-K AI-500-UHFF-K
750
EI-750-K EI-750-K/LB
SI -750-K AI- 750-FF -K BI- 750-FF-K AI- 750- FM-K AI-750-TRB-K AI- 750-NM- K AI- 750-NF- K AI-750-UHFM-K AI-750-UHFF-K
1000
El- 1000-K EI-1000-K/LB
SI-1000-K AI- 10004F-K BI- 1000-FF -K AI- 1000- FM-K AI-1000-TRB-K AI- 1000- NM- K AI- 1000- NF- K AI-1000-UHFM-K AI-1000-UHFF-K
K SERIES
412
FEED THRU
ENTRY, PIN TYPE
ENTRY EXTENSION
SPLICE
FF FF BULKHEAD FM
No,6/Wee at in''''''
TERMINATOR
NMALE
NFEMALE
UHF MALE UHF FEMALE
1
500
820
750
875
1000
EMI- 500-K3
EMI-625-K3
·
EI-500-K3
EI-1325-K3
E1750-K3
E14175113
EI-1000-K3
EI-500-K3iLB
E1625-K31LB
El-750-K3/LB
El-875-K3/LB E1-1000-KUB
S15C043 A1-500-FF-03
SI-625-K3 AI-625-FF-K3
SI-750-K3 A1-750-FF-K3
SI-075-U A1-1375-FF-K3
SI -1000-03 A1- 1000-FF -03
BI-500-FF -03
BI-625-FF-K3
BI-750-FF-K3
BI-11175-FF-K3 B1- 1000-FF -113
A4500- FM-K3 AI-625- FM-K3 A1-750-FM-11.3 AI-875- FM-K3 AI- 1000- FM- K3
A1-500-TRB-K3 AI-625TRB-K3 AI-750-TRB-K3 AI-875TRB-K3 AI- T000- TAB-03 AI-SOD-NM-IQ A1-625-NM-K3 A1- 756N14-113 AI-875NM-K3 AI- 1000-NM- 03 A1500- 1,1F-K3 A/-625-NF-K3 /11-750-NF-K3 A1-1375-NF-03 AI.1008NF-03 AI-500-UHFM-K3 A1625-UHFM-113 A1-7501UHFM-113 A1875-UHF611(3 AmOODuriFM-03
A1-500-UHFF-03 AI-625UHFF-K3 AI-750-UHFF-K3 A1-875-UHFF-K3 A1-1000-UHFF-03
'Feed leeu cOnneClor IS eel ap.a.,+O. cn
Please COnsull LUC Englneer.ng
All K Spnes connectors CORI< wah Z Pins
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-107
METROTECH CORPORATION
P.O. Box 7201 Mountain View, CA 94039 (415) 965-9208 Telex 171408
TEST EQUIPMENT
MODEL 810 LINE TRACER
FEATURES ·Significantly improved line identification · Push button depth indication · Left/right guiding system · Digital signal strength indicator ·Automatic sensitivity control · Human engineered for convenient operation
Pipe and cable locating and tracing is not an exact science, therefore, most instrument operators must learn certain skills to properly locate and trace underground utilities. Metrotech's Model 810 Line Tracer narrows the gap between required skill and technology to provide you with an automatic instrument that will yield easier, more accurate traces than obtainable from any other device, even on the first time out, with training time reduced by 50-80%. The LCD Signal Strength Indicator greatly improves the operator's ability to trace targeted conductors in congested underground areas.
The 810 has no drift electronics to provide long term frequency stability for perfect tracking with low susceptibility to external noise interference. The system also has high rejection to all power line frequencies and harmonics. Also, at the touch of abutton, the 810's computing circuits will give you depth readings from afull standing position, without the need for 45 degree angular measurements. The instrument is human engineered to offer you convenience, safety, and accuracy.
Metrotech Model 810 is the most complete underground line tracer for. . .
Electrical
·Traces in service lines using the Metroclamp or inductively ·Traces both base and jacketed concentric neutral ·Cable identification in congested areas
Telephone
· Cable ID in congested areas · Digital depth indication · Excellent tracing distance
Gas
· Easily traces large and small diameter lines · Digital depth indication ·No 60Hz interference · Structure identification in congested areas
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Note to Communication Users The Model 810, as with all Metrotech instruments, will not introduce noises or false tones into active circuits being traced. A combination of frequency, waveform, and low power of the unique signal assures that no noises will be induced into communication lines.
Transmitter Nominal Output Power
Mode Switching: Output Frequency: Frequency Tolerance: Self Testing:
Battery Type: Size, H- W- L: Weight: -
250 mw. Inductive: 250 mw. Direct ( 2.7k ohms- A. or 50 ohms- B) Automatic 83.075 kHz, unmodulated .002%
Battery & Output power, Inductive & Direct modes 6NEDA 13F " D" cells, alkaline 7.5x3x8.5 in. ( 19.1x7.6x21.6 cm.) 3.875 lbs ( 1.76 kg.)
Receiver
Nominal Sensitivity: Noise Sensitivity: Sensitivity Controls: Function Switching:
Visual Readout Provisions:
Audio Output:
Accuracy, Location Accuracy, Depth:·
0.15 microvolts, AUX Input, to assure lock- in. Zero when locked
Fully Automatic
4- position selector: OFF, BATT TEST, OPERATE ( incl. DEPTH mode), AUX ( provides continuous digital reading either with internal signal field sensor or Model 4820 Metroclamp when attached to AUX jack on rear panel).
Left- Right indicator shows centerline and highly compressed left- right responses. Digital Depth Aux display is 3- digit, high contrast LCD. . 5" (1.27 cm) height, with internal in. cm. selector strapping.
Internal speaker provides proportional audio 650 Hz, 76 dbA average level 3ft. (. 9m). Steady signal corresponds to Right indications and pulsed signal for Left. Jack provided for alternate audio to earphones ( nom. 500-2K ohms).
1-3% of depth. Note: Left- Right sensitivity is approx. . 04 in. ( 1mm) at 18" depth.
-. 10% good conditions, 20% poor conditions.
Depth Range:
Battery Type:
Battery Test: Size H- W- L: Probe Extended Weight: -
13 ft. ( 4m) min., with automatic overrange indication. 4NEDA 1604A alkaline (typical 9V alkaline transistor batteries). Range included on Left- Right indicator 32.25x6x12.38 in. ( 81.92x15.2x31.4 cm.) 4.125 lbs ( 1.87 kg.)
Overall Unit
Temperature Range, Operating:
13 to 117F (- 25 to 65 C)
Battery Life: Shipping Weight
(Gross Wt.):
100-125 operating hours. nominal 19.5 lbs ( 8.85 kg.): deduct 1.5 (. 68 kg.) without clamp
Case Dimensions, H- W- L 8x16x23 in. ( 20.3x40.6x58.4 cm.) Shipping Carton, H-W- L: 17.25x10.5x24.25 in. ( 43.8x26.7x61.6 cm.)
*Actual performance may be affected by improper signal drive method, concentration of utilities, and poor ground conditions such as moist or highly conductive soil.
**All weights include batteries.
Ordering Information
The Model 810 comes complete with transmitter ( including internal inductive coil), receiver, direct connect cable with ground plate, padded carrying case and batteries. Optional Metroclamp and headphones are available.
Water
·Structure identification in congested areas ·Human engineered-- no bend, no squat, no stoop ·Automatic guidance for easier tracing
VRF-108
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PYRAMID INDUSTRIES, INC.
P.O. Box 23169 Phoenix, AZ 85063 (602) 269-6431
UNDERGROUND MATERIALS
CATV 1500
Dimensions: 23-1/2"W x 10-1/2"D x43"H
Components: Closure will house a maximum number of electronic components: Amplifiers, thermal equalizers, splitters, directional couplers, line extenders or power supply.
Features: Each closure is made of heavy- gauge steel, with extra- heavy mill- galvanized coating. Split front and back covers permit 360 degrees accessibility. Hinges are stainless steel " piano" type and run the full length of the covers. Each set of doors has alocking hasp and louvers for ventilation.
Closure Mounting Hardware: Furnished with 42- inch anchor posts and hardware.
Finish: Phosphatized; green, baked- on enamel.
CATV 2100
Dimensions: 5-3/4"W x5-3/4"D x20"H
Components: Designed to house avariety of smaller modern equipment.
Features: Low silhouette design ideal for front- lot installations. Furnished with padlock hasp. Closure is made of heavy- gauge steel, with extra- heavy mill- galvanized coating. Closure provided with knockout for installation of optional cylinder lock with dust cover.
Closure Mounting Hardware: Can be used with 24- inch or 42- inchlong anchor post ( optional), depending on local soil conditions. Also available with pole mounting kit.
Finish: Phosphatized; green, baked- on enamel.
Mounting Bracket No. 9235-1000 Dimensions: 22"W x3.0"H x2.0"D
Standard package - 2 pair per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
Mounting Bracket No. 9431-1000 Dimensions: 1.0"W x2-1/2"H x2-1/2"D Angle Standard package - 10 per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
Pole Mounting Kit No. 9832-0000 (w/mounting hardware) Dimensions: 5.0"W x5-3/4"H x2.0"D Standard package - 2 per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
Mounting Bracket No. 9431-2000
Dimensions: 4-1/8"W x3-1/2"H
"n
Standard package - 10 per carton
(Includes screws and nuts.)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
Vit
PYRAMID INDUSTRIES, INC.
P.O. Box 23169 Phoenix, AZ 85063 (602) 269-6431
UNDERGROUND MATERIALS
CATV 1001 Dimensions: 6-1/2"W x6-1/2"D x42"H
Components: Multi- tap, splitter, line extender.
Features: Easily accessible from either side. Designed for self-supporting field installation. Made of heavy gauge steel, with extra- heavy millgalvanized coating. Front cover provided with knockout for installation of optional cylinder lock with dust cover. Closure Mounting Hardware: Furnished with one 42- inch anchor post and mounting hardware.
Finish: Phosphatized; green baked- on enamel.
CATV 1100 Dimensions: 8-1/4"W x8-1/4"D x26"H
Components: Designed to accept line extenders, spkters or couplers.
Features: Low silhouette design ideal for front- lot installations, Furnished with padlock hasp. Closure is made of heavy- gauge steel, with extra- heavy mill- galvanized coating. Closure provided with knockout for installation of optional cylinder lock with dust cover.
Closure ° Mounting Hardware: Can be used with 24", 32" and 42" anchor post ( optional), depending on local soil conditions. Also available with pole mounting kit.
Finish: Phosphatized, green baked- on enamel.
Mounting Plate No. 9361-2000
Dimensions: 9-3/4"W x5-1/2"H Standard package - 3 per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
Mounting Bracket No. 9362-0000 ( Optional)
Dimensions: 3"W x 13-7/8"H x 1-3/4"D Standard package - 6 per carton (Includes screws and nuts.
Mounting Bracket No. 9351-2000
Dimensions: 5-1/2"W x 1.0"H x 1.0"D Angle Standard package - 5per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
CATV 2400 Dimensions: 4-1/2"W x4-1/2"D x20")4
Components: Designed to house miniaturized equipment. ( Complete listing on adjacent page.) Features: Low silhouette design ideal for 4ront-lot installations. Furnished with padlock hasp. Closure is made of heavy- gauge steel, with extra- heavy mill- galvanized coating. Clostre provided with knockout for installation of optional cylinder lock with dust cover.
Closure Mounting Hardware: Can be used with 24- inch or 42- inch- long anchor post ( optional), depending on soil conditions. Also available with pole mounting kit.
Finish: Phosphatized; green, baked- on enamel.
Mounting Bracket No. 9351-3000
Dimensions: 5-1/2"W x2.0"H x 1.0"D Standard package - 5 per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
Mounting Bracket No. 9431-1000
Dimensions: 1.0"W x2-1/2"H x2-1/2"D Angle Standard package - 10 per carton ---.10/ (Includes screws and nuts.)
VRF-110
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
PYRAMID INDUSTRIES, INC.
P.O. Box 23169 Phoenix, AZ 85063 (602) 269-6431
UNDERGROUND MATERIALS
CATV 1205
Dimensions: 10-1/2"W x 10-1/2"D x39"H. Components: Trunk and bridging amplifier, power supply unit, or combination of line extender, directional coupler and multi- tap unit. Features: CATV 1205-- Designed for self-supporting field installation. Cover is removable to permit 360 degrees access. The closure is made of heavy- gauge steel, with extra- heavy mill- galvanized coating. Closure Mounting Hardware: Furnished with two anchor posts, hardware and padlock hasp. Finish: Phosphatized; green, baked- on enamel. CATV 1200 -- less covers
Mounting Bracket No. 9381-1000 Dimensions: 9-3/8"W x 16"H Standa·d package - 5per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
Mounting Bracket No. 9371-0000 Dimensions: 9-3/8"W x 16.0"H x2-1/2"D Standard package - 1per cartor (Includes screws and nuts.)
CATV 1305
Dimensions: 16-3/4"W x 10-1/2"D x39"H Components: Closure will house the maximum number of electronic components that might be required at one mounting station: Trunk and bridging amplifier, line extender, thermal equalizer, splitter and directional coupler. Features: CATV 1305-- Designed for self-supporting field installation. Cover is removable to permit 360 degrees accessibility, for ease of installation and service. The closure is made of heavy- gauge steel, with extra- heavy mill- galvanized coating. Closure Mounting Hardware: Furnished with two anchor posts, hardware, and padlock hasp. Finish: Phosphatized; green, baked- on enamel. CATV-1300 -- less covers
Mounting Bracket No. 9412-0000 Dimensions: 15-3/8"W x 16.0"H x '- 1/4"D Standard package - 2 per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
Mounting Bracket No. 9361-4000
Dimensions: 9-3/8"W x 16.0"H x 1-1/4"D Standard package - 2 per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
Mounting Bracket No. 9411-1000
Dimensions: 15-3/8"W x3.0"H x2-1/2"D 2 pair per carton ( Includes screws and nuts.)
Mounting Plate No. 9381-2000
Dimensions: 9-318"W x2.0"H Standard package - 3 Pair per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
Mounting Bracket No. 9421-1000
Dimensions: 15-3/8"W x3.0"H x3-1/2"D 2 pair per carton supplied ( Includes screws and nuts.)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-111
PYRAMID INDUSTRIES, INC.
P.O. Box 23169 Phoenix, AZ 85063 (602) 269-6431
CATV 3011/3111/3200
Dimensions: CATV 3100 21-1/4"L x 10-3/4"W x 10"D ( ID). CATV 3111 44-3/4"L x12"W x10"D ( ID). CATV 3200 12"L x9"W x 10"D (ID).
Components: CATV 3011 -- Directional- coupler, multi- tap, or line extender, and trunkline coupler. CATV 3111 -- Trunkline or bridging trunkline coupler. CATV 3200 -- Directional- coupler or multi- tap. Features: Below ground installation with easy top access. Excellent for front- lot locations where traffic is moderate. All units equipped with rugged steel cover plates. Durable bell-jartype interior housing protects equipment from flooding and water damage. Multi- purpose inner- security bracket for fastening cover plate to closure, securing inner housing and for attaching TamperLock. Heavy- gauge steel, with mill- galvanized coating. Internal housing thermal- formed ABS. Mounting Plate/Bracket: Furnished with bracket and necessary screws and nuts, stainless steel 300 series grade. ( CATV 3200 supplied less bracket.) Closure Mounting Hardware: Available with anchor posts ( optional) and additional mounting brackets. Finish: Phosphatized; cover plate, green baked- on enamel; housing, black, with CT- 1coating.
CATV 3011 Mounting Bracket No. 9881-1100 Dimensions: 2-1/2"W x7-3/8"H Standard package - 5 per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
UNDERGROUND MATERIALS
CATV 3111 Mounting Bracket No. 9884-1000 Dimensions: 11-3/4"W x4.0"H x 1-1/4"D Standard package - 1Pair per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
CATV 3200 Mounting Bracket No. 9311-1000 Dimensions: 2-1/2"W x4-3/8"H Standard Package - 5per carton (Includes screws and nuts.)
ANCHOR POSTS
For use with CATV Closures Order No. 9831-0000 for 42" Anchor Posts Order No. 9836-1000 for 32" Anchor Posts Order No. 9833-1000 for 24" Anchor Posts Two galvanized and painted anchor posts, plus mounting hardwarE for use when extra stability is desired.
VRF-112
CATV 3011 Mounting Bracket No. 9881-2000
Dimensions: 10-1/2"W x3.0"H x 1-3/4"D Standard package - 1Pair/ctn. (Includes screws and nuts.)
CYLINDER LOCK ASSEMBLY WITH STAINLESS STEEL DUST COVER
Lock: Order No. 9881-4100 Key: Order No. 9881-4110 Spring clip furnished for quick, easy mounting. Cam lock is intei changeable with all makes of CATV Closures.
(One key is supplied per 10 locks ordered.)
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
ANTENNAS
SINGLE ANTENNAS, SERIES GCA
For installations that require amoderately narrow beamwidth antenna, one of the Series QCA Single Antennas will provide superior reception through its excellent front-to- back ratio and sidelobe suppression. The wide bandwidth of this antenna permits all VHF channels to be covered by only three antennas.
Mounting hardware is available to permit no- drilling, single point mounting on round or angle tower sections or on wooden poles. No bracing or other supports are required.
SPECIFICATIONS
·Minimum Front- to- Back Ratio: 25 dB ( all models) ·Minimum Sidelobe Suppression -OCA-UHF; 30 dB, All Others; 25
dB ·Output Connector:Type-N Male ·Output Impedance: 50 ohms unbalanced ·Wind Survival at 0°C ( + 32°F) Air Temperature, No Ice: 160 km/h
(100 mi/h) 25mm ( 1in.) Radial Ice: 113 km ( 70 mi/h)
Antenna Separation QCD-2/ - 2-6: 3556mm ( 140 in.) QCD-4: 2667m -n ( 105 in.) QCD-7: 1143mm ( 45 in.)
ANTENNA MODEL
Channel Max VSWR Min Gain ( dBi) Beamwidth-- H
Beamwidth -- V
OCA-2-6
2-6 1.5:1 8.5 70° 95°
GCA-2
2-3 1.5:1 9.5 60° 95°
CICA -4
46 1.51 95 60' 95'
Channel Max VSWR Min Gain ( dBi) Beamwidth -- H
Beamwidth -- V
OCA-7
7-13 1.5:1 11.5 50° 65°
laCA-UHF
14-83 1.25:1 12.5 500 65°
OCA- FM
FM 1.5:1 9.5 60° 95°
TWO- ANTENNA ARRAY, SERIES OCD
The Series OCD combines two Series OCA antennas in a precision horizontal array. For an installation where co- channel interference can be a problem using the single Series OCA antenna, the narrower bandwidth and better co- channel performance of the Series QCD makes it the ideal antenna for this condition. Included with the Series QCO Array is atwo-way power combiner, all necessary assembly and mounting hardware and instruction.
SPECIFICATIONS
·Max VSWR: 1.5:1 ·Min Front-toBack Ratio: 25 dB ·Min Sidelobe Suppression: 18 dB ·Output Connector ( Power Combiner): Type- Ffemale ·Output Impedance: 75 ohms unbalanced ·Wind Survival at 0°C ( + 32°F) Air Temperature , No Ice: 160 km/h
(100 mi/h), 25mm ( 1in.) Radial Ice: 113 km/h ( 70 mi/h)
Channel Min. Gain ( dBi) Beamwidth -- H Beamwidth -- V
OCD-2-6 OCD-2
2-6 10.5 36° 95°
2-3 11.5 34 0 95°
GCD-4
4-6 11.5 34° 95°
GCD-7
7-13 13.5 32° 95°
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-113
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta GA 30348 (404) 44" - 4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
ANTENNAS/RECEIVER
FOUR- ANTENNA ARRAY, SERIES GCS
Production of co- channel interference through very narrow beamwidth and high sidelobe suppression makes the Series QCS Four- Antenna Array the superior " problem- area" antenna. Four models receive channels in the VHF television band, while one model is available to receive all UHF television channels.
The QCS Array consists of four Series OCA antennas arranged in a diamond- shaped array that exhibits very narrow beamwidth, high sidelobe suppression, and high gain. A precision high- strength backing structure positions and supports each of four antennas for optimum performance. A four-way power combiner is supplied with the array as are all hardware and mounting clamps.
SPECIFICATIONS · Max VSWR: 1.5:1 ·Min Front-to- Back Ratio: 25 dB ·Min Sidelobe Suppression: QCS-UHF: 13 dB, All Others: 25 dB ·Output Connector ( Power Combiner): Type- F Female ·Output Impedance: 75 ohms unbalanced ·Wind Survival at 0°C ( + 32°F) Air Temperature, No Ice: 160 km/h
(100 mi / h), 25mm (1in.) Radial Ice: 113 km/h ( 70 mi/h)
ANTENNA MODEL
Channel Min. Gain ( dBil Beamwidth -- H Beamwidth -- V
QCS-2-6 26 14
28°
30°
QCS-2 2-3 15 25 ° 30
QCS-4 4-6 15 25" 30'
Channel Min. Gain ( dBi) Beamwidth -- H
Beamwidth -- V
QCS-7 7-13 17 20°
22 0
OtOS-UHF 14-83 17 25° ( Ch 14) 17° ( Ch 70) 28° ( Ch 14) 20° ( Ch 70)
DUAL -BEAM FEED ANTENNAS
Scientific-Atlanta's dual- beam feed for 4.6-, 5-, and 7- meter earth station antennas eliminates the need to purchase acomplete receiving system to expand program offerings. An easy-to- install retrofit kit is also available for antennas now in the field. The feed enables simultaneous reception of two adjacent domestic C- band satellites separated by 3° to 4° of geosynchronous arc, without compromising current 32-25 log tal sidelobe specifications.* Because of this special design consideration, existing licensed sites are assured contained protection from terrestrial interference. Each feed is equipped with dual- polarization adjustments. Molded plastic enclosures for standard LNAs or Scientific-Atlanta's LNCs provide important protection against environmental corrosion and insect damage. *3° spacing only for 7- meter antenna.
MODEL 6602 VIDEO RECEIVER Features · Frequency Agility provides selection of any one of 24
channels with one receiver ·Automatic Polarization Switching for any selected fre-
quency with Optional Coaxial Replay · Internally programmable for single line selection of one
of any six frequencies. Remote Code access to any one of 24 transponder frequencies when interfaced with Scientific-Atlanta 1:N video protection switch or compatible equipment ·Threshold Extension Demodulation provides enhanced picture quality at lower signal levels for reduced system cost ·Easy- access plug-in downconverter ·Adaptable for microwave applications ·Optional Audio Demodulators for future audio services · Solid-state reliability
VRF-114
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
ANTENNAS
SERIES 9000 2, 8and 3.2 METER ANTENNAS
FEATURES · Ku- band Compatible ·Side- lobe Performance Meets FCC Proposed Regulations for 2°
Satellite Spacing · Interchangeable Reflector Panels · Reflector Edge Feed Rotation Panels · Full Arc Coverage ·Simplified Alignment and Pointing · Independent of Foundation Alignment · Meets AISC Building Code Standards
The Series 9000, 2.8- and 3.2- meter earth station antennas represent an advancement in the design and manufacture of high-performance, low-cost antennas for audio, video, and digital receive- only applications at 4 and 12 GHz. These antennas, used in conjunction with the appropriate LNA or LNC, will provide high- quality signals for many applications throughout the United States.
The 2.8- meter antenna consists of eight interchangeable reflector panels and can be expanded to 3.2 meters by adding sixteen extender panels. The 3.2- meter antenna offers 1.6 dB additional gain. Panels are manufactured using an improved die- stamping technique that produces an extremely precise surface tolerance, yielding high efficiency even at Ku- band. Excellent side- lobe performance meets FCC regulations for 2° satellite spacing.
No special tools, panel alignment, or testing are required for installation, maintenance, or repair. The feed rotation design allows polarization to be accurately aligned from the edge of the dish, preventing RF blockage from atechnician working on the assembly.
Simplified and reduced- cost installation is another advantage of the Series 9000 design. No crane or handling equipment is necessary, and an innovative foundation assembly reduces both excavation and concrete requirements.
Two mounts have been developed for the 2.8- and 3.2- meter reflectors. Both the elevation- over-azimuth ( el/az) and the polar mount configurations provide structural integrity, full arc coverage, and simplified alignment and pointing, in addition to being totally independent of foundation alignment. For versatility, the Series 9000 reflector and hub are common to both the el / az and motorized polar mount bases.
4.6-METER ANTENNA, MODEL 8346PF/8346CS/8346DF
FEATURES ·Prime Focus for Minimum System Cost · El/Az Mount Permits Low Cost Instaltation ·Optional Cassegrain Feed for high efficiency RF Performance · Protected Environment for LNAs · Designed for Minimum Maintenance ·Stamped Aluminum Reflector Panels for Consistent Surface
Accuracy ·Designed for Minimum Shipping and Installation Costs ·No Panel Alignment or Testing Required ·Minimum Site Preparation required ·Optional Cast Pier Foundation ·Optional Dual Beam Feed
For receive- only applications in the 3.7 to 4.2 GHz range, ScientificAtlanta's Model 8346, 4.6- Meter earth station antenna can be easily installed in awide variety of locations w th aminimum of site preparation. This antenna system is especially suited to the needs of the CATV operator receiving video programming from domestic satellites. Sidelobe performance meets FCC specifications for 2° satellite spacing. For higher gain requirements, an optional Cassegrain feed is available. Both of these feed systems, furnished for receive- only operation, provide for dual polarization capability in the 3.7 to 4.2 GHz range, and may be manually rotated to any position. Receive/ transmit operation can also be provided with aspecial feed.
The reflector, parabolic in shape, is made up of 12 interchangeable aluminum panels, precisely die- stamped for consistent surface accuracy. This factory- produced accuracy guarantees complete interchangeability, and the concept of modularity provides benefits in handling ease, lower shipping cost, and ease of installation. Two men can install this antenna easily in less than one day.
For reception of two adjacent satellites that are 3°-4° apart on the geosynchronous arc, Scientific-Atlanta provides a dual beam feed option for the Model 8346 antenna.
A cast pier foundation kit is available as an optional mounting arrangement. Each foundation kit consists of three cast pier inserts. A steel framework bolts these three inserts into a triangular shape which is then lowered into three augered holes to be filled with concrete.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-115
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441 - 4000 TWX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
HEADEND EQUIPMENT
e
Pemba,Me* OW
·
*
«I ·
VIDEO RECEIVER, MODEL 6650 The Model 6650 Video Receiver is a low cost, high performance satellite television receiver, designed for use with the Scientific-
Atlanta Series 360 Low Noise Converter ( LNC). The LNC converts the entire 500 MHz satellite band to UHF frequencies between 270 - 770 MHz at the antenna feed. This eliminates the need for microwave
components in the receiver design, resulting in significant cost reduction for multiple receiver applications.
The Model 6650 uses Phase- Locked Demodulation ( PLD) to enhance video and audio quality at low signal levels. Techniques employed in designing PLD for the Model 6650 have substantially improved receiver performance, even in the presence of multiple subcarriers. Impulse noise in the video signal is reduced near the threshold level,
and high picture quality is extended to considerably lower operating signal levels than with conventional demodulation.
The Model 6650 allows for selection of any one of 24 satellite channels simply by turning asingle dial on the front panel. For remote operation,
the Model 6650 is 6or 24 channel programmable with optional Logic Interface Board. Compatible interface equipment is available for use with cue tones or timing devices. Because of its modular design, the Model 6650 Video Receiver includes provisions to accept optional plug-in subcarrier printed wiring boards for a variety of system applications, including terrestrial microwave interface.
The power supply has adequate capacity to provide power to aSeries 360 Low Noise Converter via the center conductor of the coaxial cable or with a twisted pair.
The carefully selected down conversion frequency permits the use of long lengths of coaxial cables for applications where the antenna and
receiver need to be separated.
RACK ADAPTOR FOR MODEL 6650
3.7 to 4.2 GHz LOW NOISE AMPLIFIER, SERIES 300 Scientific-Atlanta has developed aseries of Low Noise Amplifiers for Satellite earth stations. These amplifiers are designed using GaAs FET technology for optimum noise performance. These amplifiers have noise temperatures of 80 to 120K with 50 dB gain and operate over the 3.7 - 4.2 GHz frequency band. Low Noise Amplifiers with 60 dB gain are also available on request. All units come with integral isolator to protect against antenna mismatch, as well as having internal output isolation. Standard units come with regulated power supply permitting dc voltage to vary from + 15 V to + 25V dc without performance degradation, and are powered through the center conductor of the RF cable. All units are fully weatherproofed to assure long operation outdoors and have waveguide pressurization capability.
3.7 to 4.2 GHz LOW NOISE CONVERTER, SERIES 360 The Series 360 Low Noise Converter ( LNC) is designed for use with the Series 6650 Video Receiver to provide low cost, high performance satellite television reception. The LNC is a combination of a low noise GaAs FET amplifier and a microwave downconverter for optimum noise performance. The Series 360 LNC converts the entire 500 MHz satellite band to UHF from 270 to 770 MHz at the antenna feed, eliminating the need for expensive microwave components in the receiver and allowing the use of low-cost UHF coaxial cable from the antenna to the headend. The result is a low-cost earth station electronics subsystem. The LNC combines a low- noise GaAs FET amplifier with the block downconversion process for optimum noise performance. Internal output isolation and an integral isolator protect against antenna mismatch. The amplifier, amicrowave oscillator, microwave filters and apower supply regulator are arranged within a precision- cast housing that provides extra protection against the elements. The LNC is powered from the headend through its external connectors or through the center conductor of the coaxial cable. The Series 360 is available in 80K, 90K, 100K and 120K noise temperature ranges. The Series 361 LNC is available for use with Ku- Band satellite systems.
VRF-116
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TWX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
RECEIVER/ COMBINING NETWORK
MODEL 9530/9530A SATELLITE RECEIVER
FEATURES
·Microprocessor Controlled ·Block Downconverter System ·Front Panel/Pushbutton Frequency and Level Controls ·LED Readout For: Relative RF Signal Level, Transponder Number,
Fine Tuning, and Audio Frequency and Relative Audio Level Display
·Volatile and Non- Volatile Memory for Set- Up Instructions ·Tunable Audio ·Single or Dual LNC Select Switch ·Front Panel Reverse Polarization Switch ·AFC LED Indicator ·U.L. Listed ·Composite and Baseband Outputs ·Built- In Infra- Red Detector for Remote Control ( 9530A only) ·Soft Touch Front Panel Pushbuttons ·Fine Tuning to minimize Terrestrial Interference ·Video Inversion Switch ·Compact size
·70 MHz IF Monitor Port ·70 MHz IF Loop-Thru for Terrestrial Interference Traps ·Built- In Power Inserter on each RF Input
The Model 9530 is a rack mounted receiver requiring only 3/4 of standard ( 3.5 x 12.5 inches) rack space. This compactness is achieved through the use of microchips which control all receiver functions, thereby alleviating the need for independent circuits and larger circuit boards. The 9530A is atable top model affording the same compact 3.5 x12.5 inch size. The 9530A table-top receiver is packaged with adecorative cover and surface- protecting rubber feet.
OPTIONS 9530/9530A ·Second Tunable Audio ·18, 25, or 30 MHz IF Filters ( 30 MHz Std.) ·Threshold Extension
9530A ·Auxiliary AC On/Off Relay and Convenience Outlet ·Infra- Red Remote Control Transmitter ·TV Modulator ( Switch- Selectable CH 3or 4)
MODEL 68-12/68-12TS COMBINING NETWORK
Both Model 68-12 and Model 68-12TS combining networks provide the means to combine twelve separate signal sources, such as signal processors, modulators, etc., into one signal source. The Model 68-12TS combining network provides four front panel and four rear panel test connectors. These front panel connectors can be used for test connections, monitoring points, sweep inputs, or as needed to satisfy astation or system configuration.
SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Range: 50-440MHz. Input Return Loss: 17dB. Output Return Loss: 16dB. Isolation between ports: 30dB. Impedance: 75 ohms unbalanced. Test Point ( 68-12TS only): -20dB ± 1c18. Dimensions: Standard 19"W x3.5"H x0.5"D. Weight: Net 1.8 lb. Shipping: 2.5 lb.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-117
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
HEADEND EQUIPMENT
COAXIAL CABLE, 50- OHM
Coaxial cable provides the 4 GHz output signals from the low noise amplifier to the receiver input with minimum attenuation and distortion.
The 50- ohm cable provides rugged strength and flexibility in addition to superior electrical performance. The design includes acopper- clad aluminum center conductor, corrugated copper outer conductor, and a protective black polyethylene jacket. Both extruded spiral polyethylene and high density polyethylene tube design are offered as dielectric insulators.
In addition for short cable runs where additional flexibility may be required, cellular polyethylene dielectric foam filled cable is available.
CABLE CONNECTORS
Both Type- N male and Type- N female connectors are available with spiral polyethylene and high- density tube polyethylene 50- ohm dielectric coaxial cable. All connectors are furnished with a 3.2mm (1/8 in.) pipe- threaded pressurizing port sealed with a pipe plug and gasket. The pipe plug may be removed to allow installation of valves, pressure gauges, etc.
SPECIFICATIONS
·7/8", 50- ohm Dielectric: Nominal size: 22.2mm ( 9.875 in.) · Impedance: 50 ohms · Propagation Velocity: 85-91.5% · Attenuation: 2.96dB/30m ( 100 ft.) · Bend Radius: 3m ( 10 ft.) · Weight ( Net): 0.74 kg/m ( 0.5 lb/ft.)
·1/2" Foam Dielectric · Nominal Size: 12.7mm ( 0.5 in.) · Impedance: 50 ohms · Propagation Velocity: 80% · Attenuation: 8.0 dB/30m ( 100ft.) · Bend Radius( 127mm ( 5in.) · Weight ( Net): 0.25 kg/ m ( 0.17 lb/ft.)
POWER DIVIDERS
Power dividers are used to provide input signals to several receivers from one antenna / LNA combination and are specifically designed for the 3.7 to 4.2 GHz frequency range. The input is divided across apair of quarter- wavelength lines etched on copper- coated board. Internal termination provides port- to- port isolation.
SPECIFICATIONS · Frequency Range: 3.7 to 4.2 GHz · RF Input: Type- N female · RF Output: Type- N female · Input/Output Impedance: 50 ohms unbalanced · Insertion Loss: 1.5 + 10 log N dB IN = number of ports) · Number of Ports: 4, 8, or 16
A range of VHF/UHF power splitters is available for use with the LNC and 6650, 6651 receiver systems.
SPECIFICATIONS
·Frequency Range: 270 - 770 MHz · RF Input: Type- Ffemale · RF Output: Type- F female · Input/Output Impedance: 75 ohms unbalanced · Insertion Loss: 1.5 + 10 log N dB IN = number of ports) · Number of Ports: 2 or 4
POWER INSERTER, 75- OHM
A power inserter, Scientific-Atlanta Part No. 233967, is available for powering the LNC over the coaxial cable.
SPECIFICATIONS · Frequency Range: 270 - 770 MHz · Insertion Loss: 0.5 dB maximum · VSWR: 1.3 maximum · RF Impedance: 75 ohms · DC Current: 1A maximum · Connectors: Type- Ffor RF screw terminals for dc
VRF-118
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC,
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
MODEL 6150
MODEL 6150 SIGNAL PROCESSOR
FEATURES · Fully modular ·All solid-state · Low power consumption ·Converter modules for all standard channels · Battery operation optional · Extensive list of optional switching and processing modules Completely modular in construction, the Model 6150 signal processor represents the ultimate in headend signal- processor technology, convenience, and reliability. Spurious outputs from the processor are virtually eliminated from 5 to 450 MHz through the use of double balanced mixers and hybrid amplifiers. Double notches at each of the nearest adjacent channel carriers ( upper adjacent picture carrier) lower adjacent sound carrier, and lower adjacent color subcarrier, increase adjacent channel rejection to at least 60 dB. An all- pass phase equalizer in the video IF amplifier holds group delay to a minimum. The standby carrier oscillator has several modes of operation including CW, internally modulated with a 15 kHz keying pulse, and an external mode. The external mode greatly facilitates emergency audio override for community alert requirements. It also allows the operator to utilize his headend as asource of modulated signals with which to measure the cross modulation in the distribution system. Output frequencies from sublow through hyperband are standard. A plug-in UHF to IF input converter is also standard, eliminating the need for separate UHF- VHF converters in most instances. Several options to the basic Model 6150 signal processor are available that will permit automatic switching, spectrum inversion, signal phase- locking, DC power operation, etc.
Four Model 6130 signal processors rack mounted in a standard 19" rack
MODEL 6130 SIGNAL PROCESSOR
FEATURES · Cable quality · Compact package may stand alone or be rack mounted ·SAW filter · For use in CATV, MAW, and ETV systems ·VHF, UHF, midband, and superband input channels available
HEADEND EQUIPMENT
·VHF, midband, and superband output channels available ·Crystal controlled frequency accuracy ·Output Power: + 50 to + 60 dBmV ·Spurious Output: -60dB ( relative to video carrier at + 60dBmV) · Front panel monitor/test point · Front panel output level control · Input signal and power status monitoring · Built-in high-level IF switch Developed primarily for mini- cable applications,* the Model 6130 signal processor offers the advantages of heterodyne signal processing in alow-cost and compact unit. Due to its unique design, up to four processors may be mounted in astandard 19" rack width. Through the use of double- balanced mixers and hybrid circuits, spurious outputs are virtually eliminated from 5 MHz to 450 MHz. The Model 6130 signal processor is not modular and does not offer many of the options available in the Model 6150 processor.
Alliaraselbeemilemallesaimbialik
·
MODEL 6250
MODEL 6250 TELEVISION DEMODULATOR
FEATURES · Fully modular ·All solid-state · Low power consumption ·Operates with all standard channels · Battery operation optional · Synchronous detector optional · Performance options available Precision demodulation of any standard VHF, UHF, sublow, midband or superband television channel is provided by the Model 6250 television demodulator. Outputs are baseband, video, audio, and an aural subcarrier. Video delay characteristics match those of the average home television receiver as defined by the FCC, thereby permitting demodulation of signals transmitted with standard group delay predistortion. Audio output is a very high quality balanced line for use by subsequent amplifiers. In addition, a front- panel audio monitor jack with level control is furnished. In applications such as microwave retransmission of the received television signal, an aural subcarrier can be added to the video output. The sound signal will then be at a frequency above the spectrum occupied by the video signal. Envelope detection is used in the standard version of the demodulator. An optional synchronous detector is available to essentially eliminate the quadrature distortion found in all vestigial sideband envelope detectors. Thus unsymmetrical ringing and smear as well as crosstalk between video sideband components are removed from the resultant demodulated signal. Most of the demodulator circuits, including power supply, are contained in easily accessible solid-state plug-in modules. Some are interchangeable with those of the Model 6150 signal processor and Model 6350 television modulator, thereby reducing spares inventory requirements.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-119
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
MODEL 6350 TELEVISION MODULATOR
FEATURES ·Al) Solid State ·SAW Filter Technology · Low Power Consumption ·Covers All Standard and Non- Standard Television Channels · Many Options Available · Monitor/Test Connector · Fully Modular The Model 6350 television modulator generates a high quality vestigial sideband TV signal. Advanced circuit design results in unexcelled picture and sound fidelity from color or black and white video inputs and from either audio or 4.5 MHz subcarrier inputs. Scientific Atlanta's pioneering application of the SAW* filter results in unequalled vestigial sideband response characteristics. The SAW filter provides superior adjacent channel performance while retaining excellent group delay characteristics. Vestigial sideband filter adjustments are virtually eliminated and temperature stability is excellent. A delay predistortion network is provided to conform with the standard FCC predistortion requirements. Most of the modulator circuits ( including power supply) are contained in solid-state plug-in modules, easily accessible from the front panel. Some of the modules are interchangeable with those of the Model 6150 signal processor and Model 6250 television demodulator, thereby reducing inventory requirements for spare parts. *Surface Acoustic Wave
OPTIONS Phase Lock -- permits phase- locking the modulator output to an interfering local off- air station. Video Switching -- allows automatic switchover to a secondary video source when primary video is lost. Audio Switching -- permits switchover to an alternate audio source. An additional switch input is provided to permit switching emergency override audio. Audio Modulation Limiter -- limits sound deviation to 25 kHz on all audio inputs. High- Level IF Switching -- An alternate high-level IF signal can be switched into the modulator output converter with option HIFS. Video AGC -- provides aconstant output level of 1V p- pwith input level variations of 0.5 to 2V p- p. Video Switch/AGC -- provides a constant output level of 1V p- p from either the primary or alternate video input signal. IF Automatic Gain Control -- With IFAGC installed, amplification and automatic gain control of an external High Level IF input is provided. This option is used with the HIFS option. IF Loopthrough -- furnishes a composite IF output signal for processing by a scrambler. DIFLA -- furnishes separate audio and video IF signals prior to the vestigial sideband filter for use with pulse- sync suppression scrambler systems.
HEADEND EQUIPMENT
DIFLB -- provides separate audio and video IF signals after the vestigial sideband filter for use with sinewave suppressed scrambler systems. Standby Battery -- permits a standby negative ground 24V DC battery to be automatically connected as the power source upon loss of AC power. DC Operation -- permits modulator operation from a DC source of positive ground 19V to 32V. Operation from the AC line is not possible with this option, and there is no standby protection. Spectrum Inversion -- inverts the video and audio carriers, with the video carrier 4.5 MHz above the audio at RF. Signal, Voltage Metering -- installs a metering module in the front panel of the modulator.
MODEL 6330 TELEVISION MODULATOR
FEATURES ·Cable- Quality Modulator · Low Cost ·For Use in Mini- Cable and CATV · Ideal for Private Television Earth Stations ·Standard VHF, Midband, Superband Channels Available · Minimum Rack Space Requirements ·Monitor/Test Port Standard ·Composite IF Loop-Through ( SIFL) Standard The Model 6330 television modulator offers exceptional performance on all VHF, midband, and superband channels at avery low price. Its compact size allows for a cost effective approach to configuring headend racks since up to four 6330s can be mounted in astandard 19" rack width. The modulator is ideally suited for mini- cable and CATV applications.* The 6330 modulator employs extensive use of integrated circuit technology to ensure state-of-the-art performance and reliability. A surface acoustic wave ( SAW) vestigial sideband filter as well as a composite IF loop- through are provided as standard features. Optional features include dual IF loopthrough ( DIFL) and Spectrum Inversion ( SI). The 6330 provides excellent differential gain and phase response. It meets FCC predistortion requirements and offers excellent group delay characteristics. Front panel features include audio over-deviation and white clip indicators, video carrier output level control and a -20dB test point.
The Model 6330 modulator is not modular and does not offer many of the options available on the Model 6350 modulator.
VRF-120
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
TRUNK STATIONS
ELECTRICAL FEATURES · Switching Regulated Power Supply with Automatic
Transient Protection, Overvoltage Protection, and Current Limiting. Operates at 30V or 60V ac · - 20 dB Directional Coupler Test Points Throughout ·CW or Modulated Carrier Pilot Channels are Totally Immune to Adjacent Channel Variations ·Absolute Automatic Level and Slope Compensation ·Plug- In Hybrids · Stepped Pad and Equalizer to Prevent Unauthorized Adjustments
MECHANICAL FEATURES
·Compatible with Push-Pull/Feedforward Electronics ·No Motherboard--All Controls and Functional Com-
ponents are Located Within the Plug- In Modules ·A360 Aluminum Die-Cast Housing · Positive Cable Seizures Optimize Return Loss and Do
Not Damage Cable Center Conductor or Connector Pin ·Optional Housing Protective Coating · Housing Reversible for Tandem Mounting and Street
Side Access
TRUNK AMPLIFIERS
Scientific-Atlanta offers a complete line of 300, 400, 450, and 550 MHz trunk stations in either a conventional push-pull configuration or the distortion improving feedforward configuration. Designed to plug into a standard trunk housing, amplifier modules can be simply exchanged to obtain increased channel capacity or upgrade to feedforward. This upward compatible design combined with reverse options, results in our ability to accommodate the most demanding of system requirements while not limiting the stations to any particular configuration. Status Monitoring and/or Reverse Switching features can be added quite simply whenever the need arises. The same is true of reverse electronics.
MODULE FLEXIBILITY Standard trunk amplifier modules are equipped with a built-in thermal slope and gain compensator that can be augmented with an automatic control module. Status monitoring/reverse switching and reverse options are compatible with forward modules allowing future upgrades without obsoleting existing equipment. Diplex filters plug in, as do the stepped pads/equalizers, and accessories.
TRUNK STATION CONFIGURATIONS One advantage of modular station design is the flexibility it provides the system planner. With the modular concept employed in Scientific-Atlanta's 6500 series trunk station, the system planner may select from a broad range of standard modules in configuring a particular trunk station to a specific need. The system frequency range; need for automatic slope and gain control; reverse and bridging requirements are representative functions which dictate trunk station configuration.
Once the trunk station has been configured, it assumes a model number which aids in the identification of its function in the completed system. It will be helpful to the system operator to become familiar with these model numbers; familiarity will be an asset as model numbers become the language of system employees.
All amplifier station model numbers carry a suffix preceded by a slash (/) i.e., 6540A/400. This suffix designates the upper frequency limit of the forward system.
TRUNK STATION
MODEL NO.
DESIGNATOR
DESCRIPTION
6540
This model number pertains to all stan-
dard trunk stations having a lower forward
frequency limit of 54 MHz. ( Sub- Split)
6560
This model number pertains to all standard trunk stations having a lower forward frequency limit of 174 MHz. ( Mid-Split)
6570
This model number pertains to all standard trunk stations having a lower forward frequency limit of 234 MHz. ( High- Split)
6840
This model number pertains to feedforward trunk stations having a lower forward frequency limit of 54 MHz.
A
Designates that the forward amplifier
employs automatic pilot operated slope
and gain control.
Designates that the forward amplifier is thermal in operation. (Thermal is built into all trunk amplifier modules.)
Designates that the station utilizes a bridger module.
PERFORMANCE
As a leader in the cable industry, Scientific-Atlanta's charter is to set system performance standards that provide each system with the utmost in signal quality while constantly improving overall system reliability.
Designates that the station is equipped with a reverse trunk module.'
G
Designates that the station automatically
controls gain in the reverse trunk module.
Used only in 6560 station models.'
SIMPLIFIED INSTALLATION AND SET-UP An accurate switch selectable built-in thermal slope and gain compensating network provides a continuous reference for pad and equalizer selection. Plug-in trim networks facilitate selective adjustment of the system fre-
Designates that the station automatically controls slope in the reverse trunk module. Used only in 6560 station models.'
quency response without altering the basic amplifier
Designates that station is a terminating
module alignment.
trunk.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-121
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
TRUNK STATIONS ( Cont'd)
Designates that a reverse pilot generator
module is used.
X
Designates that a status monitor/reverse
switching transponder module is utilized.
TRUNK STATION MODEL 6540M (Specify Forward Upper Frequency)
6540M/(***) is the most basic of trunk station models. It is composed of the trunk station housing which comes fitted with internal wiring harness, power transformer, a trunk amplifier module, and a switching regulated power supply.
Operational gain is 22 dB with all losses included. Plugin pad and equalizer are used for output level and tilt adjustment. Thermal gain and tilt compensation is standard.
TRUNK STATION MODEL 6540A (Specify Forward Upper Frequency)
6540A/( -- )is comprised of the same station components of the 6540M, plus the addition of the Automatic Control Module. Trunk gain and tilt are automatically controlled by continuous monitoring of two pilot channels. Thermal gain and tilt compensation is
standard.
TRUNK STATION MODEL 6540B (Specify Forward Upper Frequency)
6540B/(***) provides additional bridging along trunk routes in locations which are between standard trunk amplifier locations. The 654013/( -- )may be used as a terminating trunk ( 6540TB) at standard 22 dB spacing. In the latter configuration, the trunk is terminated within the station and signal is fed directly to the bridger module. The station is comprised of the trunk station housing which comes fitted with internal wiring harness and power transformer, an intermediate/terminating trunk module, a bridger module, and a regulated power supply. Tilt and output level adjustments in both ITT trunk and bridger modules are accomplished with separate plug-in pads and equalizers for each module.
TRUNK STATION MODEL 6540MB (Specify Forward Upper Frequency)
6540MB/(***) is the most basic of trunk/bridger station models. It is comprised of the trunk station housing which comes fitted with internal wiring harness and power transformer, a trunk amplifier module, a bridger module, and a regulated power supply. The high level bridger provides up to four feeder output ports by means of plug-in feeder makers. Operational gain in the trunk is 22 dB with plug-in pad and equalizer used for output level and tilt adjustment. Bridger output level and tilt adjustments are likewise accomplished with separate plug-in pad and equalizer. Thermal gain and tilt compen-
sation is standard.
TRUNK STATION MODEL 6540AB (Specify Forward Upper Frequency)
6540AB/(***) is comprised of the same station components as the 6540MB, plus the addition of the Automatic Control Module. Trunk gain and tilt are automatically controlled by continuous monitoring of dual pilot channels. Thermal gain and tilt compensation is standard; pilot channel operation is switch selected.
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
31plem Filters. Sub.Spht F
Series 6500 Olsolbutlon Sob- Spilt Trunk Stmt..
OP Amplifier Stalens Shape. wan Hous.. a. Ocnver Sup.
Lipper Frequent', Lane of Staten Must Appear as parl ot Each Staten Model Number ( Example 0540A0A1C01 For Status Mormon. Transpo.er Add X to Steen Model Num60, (Example 6540ABX/600,
Model 6540M 65.00 6.013 65401013 6540A13 5540MR
654000
6500MBR
6540000
650000
65.010 0
Deserted. Then., Trunk Arne.,
Auto... Trunk Arnplrher InterrnselaletTernu.Ing Arnerlder wet HO Level &ledger
Thermal Trunk Ampkter 04t6h Hen Level (lodger kaOrllalle Trunk Amok. enth Ugh Level Bodge,
Thermal Trunk Arnorter out Thermal Reverse AMIN.. and Deek 0dIers Ategmala Trunk Amok. re. Thermal Reverse Ampeer and Dee, Freers
Thermal Trunk Amen. «eh He Love Bodge T.rmal Reverse Amiable, and CIO. Freers Autornerc Trunk Amp.. «eh He Lete, Brege T.rmal Reverse Amok. and Dtplek Fees
Interne.» Trunk Arnold. wan ugh Lev., Brew, Reverse Memo-Male Trunk Amplitter and Ogle. Freers
Termnaling Trunk Arnold., wen ugh Level Beidger 16, , a1 Reverse A.M., and Del.. ,Oers
iOi .rr.
à
Tt .0
1 Tt 2e'
3j ji
1u ' 21 = IE
11
r r0.ei" ei0.0.E
li o Le
O
eI ,f·
g se s<
aà a:t eigarei
1
1
1
I 1
t
1
I
I 1
1
2
1 t
2
I
1
1
3
1
t 1
3
I I
I 3
1
1
2
SUB- SPLIT GUIDE
The addition and activation of sub-split reverse (5-30
MHz) is easily accomplished with the modular conven-
ience of reverse amplifiers and accessories. Even in cases where the forward system is in place and opera-
ting, activation of the reverse path may be accomplished with minimal disturbance to the active, forward signal path. To add sub-split reverse to any 6500 series trunk station, add the equipment listed after each station model which is to be upgraded ( refer to Figures 1and 2 for module and accessory locations). An " R" suffix
added to the trunk station model number specifies that reverse trunk amplifier module and diplex filters are to be included. Plug-in pads and equalizers must be called out separately. To add sub-split reverse to any 6500 line extender, refer to Line Extender Reverse Kit.
6540M 6540A
Becomes 6540MR with addition of reverse equipment. Install as follows: 1-233180 Reverse Trunk Module 2--DFS30 Diplex Filters 1--EC)30T(*) Reverse Equalizer 1--PP( 0)Plug- In Pad
Becomes 6540AR with addition of reverse equipment. Install as follows: 1-233180 Reverse Trunk Module 2--DFS30 Diplex Filters 1--ECI30T(*) Reverse Equalizer 1-- PP(*) Plug- In Pad
6540MB
Becomes 6540M BR with addition of reverse equipment. Install as follows:
1-233180 Reverse Trunk Module 3--DFS30 Diplex Filters 1--EQ30T(*) Reverse Equalizer 1-- PP(*) Plug- In Pad
6540AB 6540B
Becomes 6540ABR with addition of reverse equipment. Install as follows: 1-233180 Reverse Trunk Module 3--DFS30 Diplex Filters 1--E030T(*) Reverse Equalizer 2-- PP(*) Plug- In Pads
Becomes 6540BR with addition of reverse equipment. When used as a terminating trunk (6540TBR), install as follows: 1-233180 Reverse Trunk Module 2--DFS30 Diplex Filters 1--E030T(*) Reverse Equalizer 2-- PP(*) Plug- In Pads
VRF-122
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
TRUNK STATIONS ( contd)
--OR--
When used as an intermediate trunk: 1-232470 Reverse Intermediate Trunk Module 3-- DFS30 Diplex Filters 1-- EQ307 Il Reverse Equalizer
2-- PP (-) Plug- In Pads
"The reverse equalizer and plug-in pads are required to complete the trunk station; however, they are not shipped with the reverse modules. The appropriate value must be specified when ordering.
The 6540BR may be used as an intermediate trunk without reverse path amplification in those locations where reverse feeder is not required. To accomplish this, install reverse through cable RC- 100 in place of the sub- split intermediate trunk module 232470.
300 MHz Specifications
Freuttencz Response Minimum Tua Gen th OPWar.. Gain 01121 Gaon Control Range
Select+. ( e) Equalizabon Range ( 3)
Selectabte (9)
Chap. till Renge (9) Automate S.. and Gain inter. Eguakaallon Nommai TM ( 13 ( IS) Nase Fpure ( 2)031(22) Thermal Corn...Ion 131 Hum Module. ( 121
Relurn Loss Maairnurn AC Duo Gwent Cu,* Glequirements at 24V 40 Tese Pont
Frawd Trunk
h4 300 Md(
al3
25 dB
22 dB
30 ro 24 dB
saldB 5508 ai 300 MHz
Foie, 8 dB 22 dB 70 OB 16 OB 10A 39A -20 2,40
Foneard Trunk artat Bradw,r
54 300 Mho t 5 dB t5) 46 cde 38 OB
Tb.. Truie(
5.30 MHz I 25 aB 14 dB Ob
o to sae
0.15 00
i0 ro aB fa dB 55 dB ai 300 NINz Ire Ego+. 95 4113 (2011211 22 dB 70 as
16 dB 4A 62A Ba) -202140
0 Io 15 dB
- 1008 9 OB
w 5 dB an te dB
824 1141 20 t1et13
Revene Feder 5.30 Mt. 5dB ) 5) 14 dB ( 5,1 ,1
0 ro + 5dB
9 OB 151 5 dB 70 dB 16 dB
330 MHz Specifications
Frequency Response 54-330 MHz Minimum Full Gain ( 1) Typecal Operating Gam ( 1) (2) Gain Control Range
Selectable (8) Equalization Range ( 3)
Selectable (9) Output TM Range (9) Automatic Slope and Gain ( 10) Nominal Tilt ( 13) ( 15) Noise Figure (2) ( 13) (22) Thermal Compensation ( 3) Hum Modulation ( 12)
Output Level Recommended Tilt
Return Loss Maximum AC Thru Current Current Requirements at 24V dc Test Point
Forward Trunk ±03 dB 25 dB (4) 22 dB (4)
0 to 20 dB
0 to 24 dB
±2.7 dB 0 dB 9 dB 22 dB 70 dB +32 dBinV 3 dB True Tilt 16 dB 10A 39A -20 1dB
Forward Trunk and Bridger ± 05 dB ( 5) 42 dB ( 11) 36 dB
0 to 20 dB
4.0 tO 10 dB ± 2.7 dB
0 dB 12 dB 22 dB 70 dB +46 dBmV 7dB True Tilt 16 dB 4A 62A - 20 ± 1dB
Reverse Trunk and Feeder Specifications Same as 300 MHz
300/330 MHz Notes
1 Includes ail losses with amplifiers in normal
operating configuration
2 At 20°C 168°F) a Cable equivalent at upper frequency 4 Gain specifications with forward trunk in normal
operating COnflguratan 5 Single feeder output
In 1 dB steps. 7 15 upper frequency cable equivalent steps a dB of cable change at upper frequency
9 Gain for reverse trunk or feeder only is 3 dB
greater
10 Cerner to distortion ratio
11 With O dB equalizer installed in forward trunk or
forward int/terrn trunk module
12 Includes forward trunk and bridger
la Cabre shape - for cable ( down tilt)
for
equalization (up hft)
14 Thermal AGC/ASC
15. 12 dB spacing
16 22 dB spacing 17 Does not include 3 dB loss for optional plug-in
thermal network
10 Includes bridger equalizer for 7 dB tilt 19 Includes bridger pad for typical operating gain
20 Includes chplex triter loss
400 MHz Specifications
% moud Trunk
Fequency Response Minimum Full Gain (1) Typical Operating Gain( 1) (21 Gain Control Range
Selectable ( 81 Equa)ezation Range ( 3)
Selectable (91 Auto Slope and Gain ( 10) Nominal Tilt Output Tin Range (91 Nose Figure (2) (13) (221 Thermal Compensation ( 3 1 Return LOSs M.rnum AC Thru Current Current Requirements at 24V do Test Point
Forward Trunk
and Bridger
Revente Trunk
54-400 MHz t 25 dB 54-400 MHz 0 75 dB 5,30 MHz 2 25 dB
25 dB
42 dB
14 dB
22 dB
35 clEi
Reverse Feeder 5-30 MHz 25 dB 14 dB
0 to 20 dB
0 to 24 dB 3 08
0 de
-11 dB 22 dB 16 dB 10A 436 -20 dB O 1 dB
0 Io 20 dB
3 dB 4.2 dB 40 to 10 de 13 de 22 dB 16 de 5A 76A -20 dB e 1 dB
0 to 14 dB
0 to 15 dB
--15dB
9- dB
55 dB
16 de
1.0A
-20 dB 0 1 dB
0 to 14 dB
0 to 15 dB
--15 dB
9- dB 55 013 16 dB
NOTES.
1 Includes all IOSSes wern amplifiers in normal operating
configuration
2 AI20°C (68.F) 3 Cable trouvaient at upper frequency
4 3 dB true tilt 5 7 dB true tilt
6 Carrier-to-average composite triple boat unmodulated carriers. fallIng on any channel
7 Any L ti, lulling on any channel
8 ln 1 dB seps
9 rs de upper trequency cable equivalent steps
10 dB of cable change at upper frequency
11 Gain Ibo reverse trunk Or feeder only is 3 dB Great°, ,2 0 dB pad installed 13 Carrer to distortion rate 14 Till ...th 0 dB equalizers instaile0
15 includes tonvard trunk and bridger
16 capte shape - for cable (down tin), 4. for equalization (up titt)
17 Thermal AGC/ASC 18 12 dB spacing
19 22 dB spacing 20 Optional for thermal use 3 value higher equalizer and 3
dB loyarr pad value
450 MHz Specifications
Frequency Response Matimum Full Gain ( 1) ( 2) Operatoria) Gain ( I) ( 21 Gain Convoi Range
Selectable 181
Equalizaten Range (3) Saietta/Die (9)
Automate Slope and Gain ( 10) Nomma) Tat ( 13) ( 15)
Output Tir Range (91 Nose Figure ( 21 ( 13) ( 221 Tlwrmal COMperlealert 13) Hum Moduler. ( 121 Return LoSS Maximum AC Thru Current Current Requirements at 24V oc Test Point
Fonvard Trunk
H:Bridger
54 450 tarie 26 0I3 22 413
2 dB 54450 MHz t 5 dB ( 51 43 de 35 de
Reveree Trunk
Reverse Feeder
5.30 MHz e 25 00 5.30 MHz 2 5 dB
14 dB
ra de
0 Io 20 dB
0 lo 20 dB
0 to ta dB
0 to 14 dB
0 to 24 dB 24 dB -1 dB 9 dB 18 de 70 dB
16 dB 10A 45A -20 21 dB
t4 dB 0 de 4 to IO dB 9 dB 18 dB 70 do
16 dB 6A 75A - 20 21 dB
0 Io 15 dB
· 15 00
9 dB 55 dB 70 dB 16 dB
98A - 20 21 dB
0 to 15 dB
- 15 dB
9 dB 55 dB 70 do te dB
550 MHz Specifications
Fonwerd Trunk
Fonvard Rank
and Bridger
Revente Trunk
Reverse Feeder
Frequency Response ratrumum Full Gam (1)
54-550 MHz 2 2 dB
26 dB
54-550 MHz 2 5 dB 43 dB
5-30 MHz 2 25 dB 5-30 MHz 2 5 dB
14 dB
14 dB
Operational Gain ( 1)121
22 dB
35 dB
Gain Control Range
Selectable ( 81
0 to 20 dB
0 to 20 dB
0 to 14 dB
0 to 14 dB
Equaleatan Range ( 3) Selectable (91
AocaTialic Sica. and Gain ( IO) Nominal Tilt ( 13) 05) Output Tilt Range (91
0 Io 24 dB 24 dB -1 dB -
-
0 ki 15 dB
2 4 dB
-
0 dB
- 15 dB
4 to 10 dB
-
0 to 15 dB -
- 15 dB -
Noise Figure ( 21(131 (221
8 dB
95 dB
9 dB
9 dB
Thermal Compensai,. ( 3)
18 dB
18 dB
55 dB
55 dB
Hum Modulaire, ( 121
70 dB
70 dB
70 dB
70 dB
Return Loss Maximum AC Thru Current
16 dB 106
16 dB
as
16 dB
_
16 dB
_
Codent Requirements at 24V dc
5A
MA
i 1A
Test Point
-200100 - 20 2 1 dB - 20 ± 1 dB
450/550 MHz Notes
contigu... 2 Al 204C ( 6(444, 3 Gable puma., al upper troque./
Garn SpaCa·cabons euh lonvard nune Operaleng configurahon 5 Single lee4e, ouroa 6 ln IdB stops 7 15 dB toper frendenre · able °bue.. dePs dB or ce. chante ai uPbet trequencY 9 Gain Io reverse 'mnk iO leede1 onio is 3 cdT Weber 10 Carrer lo diecoon raho Il Wah 0 dB equaltzer instar. in Werard Irunk or lorward latnerre trunl· mentne
12 'm'unes long. Inn. and tender 13 cane ahane - to, cable (down Inn · lo· equalitabon
la Thae11m11a/I AGclASc 15 12 dB spacing «, 22 dB spacing IT Does nor inch.. 3 dB 105410. ophonal plug in thermal
113 Bock.« tanagra .511.44*16, 7dB rin
20 Includes Opter tirer loss 21 IrKluPOS . wara inblerrn 'hoir moclub 22 None M1gure is 3 dB ower to morse culs or leude
oniy
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-123
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TM( 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
rl I
SERIES 6570 HIGH -SPLIT SYSTEM
SERIES 6560 MID -SPLIT SYSTEM
Available in 450 and 550 MHz, high-split offers a reverse bandwidth of 5-174 MHz and aforward bandwidth of 234 MHz up to 550 MHz.
The Mid- Split System provides increased channel capacity in the reverse direction ( 5-108 MHz) and fewer channels in the forward direction ( 174 MHz- upper frequency).
As in sub- split, each mid- split station model is suggestive of its function in the system. In ordering, the "(""·)" in station model number is replaced by the appropriate upper frequency limit in the forward direction: 300 MHz, 330 MHz, 400 MHz, 450 MHz, or 550 MHz.
Sod« 8500 Distribution Mid- 8.112 Trunk Station.
All Amolde, Stations Shipped voth Housing and Power SuooIv
Upper Frequency Limn of Station Must Appear as pert of Etch Station Modal Number;·
l ; ;
; ·
s:
'Example 65ECIAGED la>
3 r E° °
".; I ; z
i
·. ·z
i I ;
! 1.
1 I - E.
·
E · E Er E r
Model
65600AG
6560AG 6560MS
Description
Thermal Forward with keverse Autornatec Gain and Mid- Split Deer Fillers
Aulornatc Foward with Reverse Automatic Gen and Mid- Split Gisler Filters
Thermal Forward with Reerse Automatic Slope and Mid-Spirt Disler Filters
. ill if
1
I
2
1
1
1
2
I
2
6.dAS
Automatic Forward with Reverse Automatic Slope and Mid- Split
,
I
2
Doles Filters
6560MGB Thermal Forward with Hgh Level Bridger Reverse Automatic
1
1
I
3 1
Gain and Mid- Split Dopes Fillers
655/1aCB
Automatic Forward with High Level Bridger Reverse Automatic Gain and Mid- Split Gobs Filters
1
1 1
I
3 I
6560MSB Thermal Forward with High Level Bridger Reverse Automatic
1
I
1 1
3
Slope and Mid- Split Dip. Filters
656/1ASB
Automatic Forward with High Lmel Bridger Reverse Automatic Slope. and Mid Split Does Filters
1
III
3 1
6560IB
intermediate Trunk with High Level Bridger Reverse Intermediate
1 13
1
Trunk, and Mid- Split Dipere Filters
6560TBP
Termmating Trunk with High Level Bridger Pilot Garner Generator and Md - Split Diplex Filters
1 1
1
2 I
6560MBP Thermal Forward with H gh Level Bridger. Pilot Carrier Generator
1
1
and MreSpht Dare Filters
1
2 1
656048P
Automatic Forward with High Level Breger , Fria Carnet Generator and Md -Split Diplex Filters
1
1 I
I
2 1
BRIDGERS
Any standard mid- split trunk station may be equipped with bridging capability with the addition of a bridger module. The station model number is addended with " B"; that is a6560AS becomes 6560ASB when bridging is added.
Series 8503/450 Dietrib.lon High-Spih 460 MHz Trunk Stetiore· All Amolifer Stations Shipped with Housing and Power Supply
Model
Defiption
6570MR/450
Thermal Forward Trunk with Temperature Compensating Reverse Trunk and High- Split Diples Filters
6570AR/450
Automatic Forward Trunk with Temperature Compensating Reverse Trunk and High- Split DO. Filters
6570MBR/450 Thermal Forward Trunk with High Level Bridge/ Temperature Compensating Reverse Trunk and High- Split Doles Filters
6570ABRP150 Automatic Forward Trunk with High Level Bridger. Temperature Compensating Reverse Trunk and High- Split Choler Fillers
6570IBR/450
Intermediate Forward Trunk with High Level Bridget, Reverse Intermediate Trunk and High- Split Gisler Filters
65701DR/450 Terminating Forward Trunk and High Level Bridger Reverse Intermediate Trunk and High- Split Ckplex Filters
·High- split may be used for 400MHz systems by equalizing the 450 MHz atetione to 400 MHz.
··Fteduiree aslope end pain driver, refer to Acceuories for selection.
Pipleeriltre. NW%
à 5
-e 1e8 JlE.,.e,. à i <
1;= f]EU$li
.1.
.-
3,
1 l<
,III
f
à .0
J· L4 IIJ5.
,
1
2
,
1
2
1
1
3
I
1 1 1
3
1
1 3
1 1
1 2
High- Split Trunk Station With Temperature Compensating Reverse
450 MHz Specifications
Fonvard Trunk
234 MHz- 450 MHz
Frequency Response
02 dB
Mrnimurn Full Gain ( 1)
26 dB
Operational Gain ( 1) (2)
22 dB
Gen Control Range
Selectable (81
0 to 20 dB
Equaluallon Range ( 3)
Selectable (9)
0 to 24 dB
Auto Slope and Gain
dB Cable Change at High End 04dB
Nominal Station Tin ( 1) (2) - 5 dB
Norse Fgt.. (2) ( 13/ (22)
8 dB
Thermal Compensation ( 3)
18 dB
Hum Modular,. ( 12)
70 dB
Return Lo.
16 dB
Masomum AC Thru Current
104
Current Requirements at 24V dc 5 ( 161
Test Pant
Magnitude - 20 Or dB
Frequency Response
205 dB
bsrwerd Trunk and Bridger 234.450 MHz r07 dB ( 5) 44 dB 35 dB ( 51
Reverse Trunk Reverse Rieder
5M fiz.174 MHz 5 MH1.1 74 MHz
± 35 dB
05 dB
20 dB 17 dB ( II)
20 dB 17 dB ( 5) ( 11)
0 to 20 dB
0 to 17 dB
0 to 17 dB
3 to 24 dB
3 to 18 dB
3 to 18 dB
24 dB
0 dB
9, dB (201 (21) 18 dB 70 dB 16 dB
6A 854 ( 14) ( 16)
-15 dB 110 dB (251 ( 26) 70 dB 16 dB
17A ( 14) ( 16)
-15 dB 110 dB ( 5) 1251 ( 26) 70 dB 16 dB
--
-20 01dB 005 dB
-20 2 1dB - 24 2 1dB ( 27)
05 dB
205 dB
rotes)
1 lncludes all losses wan amplifiers in normal operating configuration
2 Al 20°C (68°F)
3 Cable equwalent al upper lrequency 4 Gain speohcalans with forward trunk in normal
operating configuraten 5 Single feeder output 6 In 1dB slims 7 15 dB upper frequency cable equivalent slaps
8 dB of cable change at upper frelotEdEV 9 Gain for reverse trunk. or feeder-only is 3 dB
greater tO Carver to dhstorlan ratio It We 0 dB equalizer installed in forward trunk or
forward interrnedlateaerminating trunk module
12 Includes forward trunk and bridger
13 Cable shape - for cable (down 511), · for egualizabon ( up
14 Thermal AGC/ASC for forward amplifier
15 12 dB spacing
16 22 dB spacing
17 Does not include 3 dB loss for optional plug- re thermal
network 18 Includes bugger equalizer for 7dB tilt 19 Includes breger pad for typical operating gain 20 Includes chplex triter loss 21 includes forward ontermachaterlerminating trunk module 22 Base figure is 3 dB lower for reverse trunk- or feeder-only 23 Reverse thermal compensation os selectable by plug-in
drivers Drivers am available for 6 dB, 12 dB. 18 dB, 24 da
and 30 dB of cable at 174 MHz 24 Requires reverse Ini.len lest probe (Part No 276982)
VRF-124
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA,
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
INC.
o
RF Vti SE TRUNK AMPS_ efE *SC
',gook* 'seen,
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
MG« 4PLIT 11..PtSATLIVIE courstasearo
Rue« AttPLFIER
AGC OR ASC MID- SPLIT REVERSE TRUNK AMPLIFIER MODULES 232660/232670
The Model 232660 and 232670 Reverse Trunk Amplifiers
are complementing reverse transmission amplifiers for the 5-108 MHz mid-split system. Each model is designed
to compensate for losses introduced by coaxial cable spans while introducing minimum levels of noise and non-linear distortion. The amplifiers install in a standard trunk housing and interface with forward trunk and
bridger modules. Inputs are provided to accept 5-108 MHz reverse signals from both trunk and feeder. Circui-
try for automatic gain control (AGC) is included in the Model 232660 and circuitry for automatic slope control (ASC) is included in Model 232670. In the AGC module the slope is thermally controlled and in the ASC module gain is thermally controlled. The two amplifier models
are designed to be alternated in cascaded stations throughout the system. Both AGC and ASC versions operate from pilots generated in the first reverse station of a cascade.
HIGH- SPLIT REVERSE TRUNK AMPLIFIER WITH THERMAL COMPENSATION MODULE 234600
The Model 234600 High-Split Reverse Amplifier with Thermal Compensation Module serves as a primary reverse amplifier for single cable 5-174 MHz trunk opera-
tion. The reverse amplifier installs in a standard trunk housing and provides gain for reverse trunk transporta-
tion and origination of feeder signals. Plug-in drivers allow thermal slope and gain compensation for various
lengths of cable. The design accuracy of the thermal networks and use of reverse trunk amplifiers in every forward amplifier station provide accurate level control over long cascades.
MID- SPLIT REVERSE PILOT CARRIER GENERATOR
MODULE 232690
The Model 232690 Reverse Pilot Carrier Generator
Module is used in the 5-108 MHz mid-split system to
generate low and high pilots for automatic slope and
SUB- SPLIT REVERSE INTERMEDIATE BRIDGING
gain correction. The reverse pilot carrier generator
AMPLIFIER MODULE 232470
module also serves as the first reverse amplifier in the upstream cascade. The module generates, filters, and sums two stable pilot carriers which are combined with
The Model 232470 Sub-Split Reverse Intermediate Bridging Amplifier module is designed to be used with the Forward Intermediate Trunk Module. The reverse inter-
5-108 MHz inputs from the feeder. After the pilots are
mediate module provides no reverse transmission gain,
combined with the 5-108 MHz feeder inputs, the combin-
ed signals are amplified and routed through a pad and
equalizer to the output of the module. The plug-in equalizer and plug-in pad are installed at the output of
but completes the reverse trunk path with a minimum of insertion loss. In addition, the module accepts an input from the feeder and couples the feeder signal into the trunk path through a directional coupler; a plug-in hybrid
the module to allow optimum set-up where trunk splits occur. A range of plug-in equalizers permit precise cable
equalization and a range of plug-in pads permit proper output adjustment. A separate plug-in pad in the feeder path permits feeder-trunk match-up. Potentiometers are
amplifier in the feeder input provides gain to overcome loss of the directional coupler. A plug-in pad in the feeder allows feeder levels to be matched to those of the trunk. Provision for a plug-in feeder disconnect switch makes the module compatible with computer-
provided to permit individual pilot level adjustment.
operated systems.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-125
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
ITCRU40 REGULATED POWER SUPPLY
MODUlent«
11.1:046
MID- SPLIT REVERSE INTERMEDIATE/TERMINATING TRUNK AMPLIFIER MODULE 232680
The Model 232680 Mid-Split Reverse Intermediate/
Terminating Trunk Amplifier Module is used with the Forward Intermediate/Terminating Trunk Module. When used in an intermediate station, the module provides no reverse trunk transmission gain, but completes the reverse trunk path with a minimum of insertion loss. In
addition, the module accepts an input from the feeder and couples the feeder signal into the trunk path through a directional coupler; a plug-in hybrid amplifier in the feeder input provides gain to overcome loss of the directional coupler. A mid-split terminating station typically requires a pilot carrier generator be used as the first reverse module of the upstream cascade. However, in
the case where a short sub-trunk (not more than two cascaded stations) exists, the mid-split reverse intermediate/terminating module may be used instead.
POWER SUPPLY MODULE 276910
The Model 276910 Switching Regulated Power Supply Module is used in all Scientific-Atlanta trunk stations to convert station ac input voltage to awell- regulated dc voltage for station module powering. The switching
regulated supply provides improved efficiency over a linear power supply which results in cost savings in both equipment and operating expense. The switching regulated supply is a constant power device, meaning that it automatically adjusts its internal operating parameters for most efficient use of different levels of voltage and current within a system. The switching regulated supply automatically determines load power requirements and adjusts its operation so that only that amount of power is provided.
HIGH- SPLIT REVERSE INTERMEDIATE/TERMINATING AMPLIFIER MODULE 234620
The Model 234620 High-Split Reverse Intermediate/ Terrnmating Amplifier Module is used with the Forward Intermediate/Terminating Trunk Module. When used in an intermediate station, the module provides no reverse trunk gain, but completes the reverse trunk path with a minimum of insertion loss. In addition, the module accepts an input from the feeder and couples the feeder signal into the trunk path through a plug-in combiner; a plug-. n hybrid amplifier in the feeder input provides gain to overcome loss of the combiner. When the high-split reverse intermediate/terminating amplifier module is used in a terminating station where trunk input is not required, the plug-in combiner can be replaced with ajumper and signal from the feeder is routed through the hybrid amplifier directly into the trunk path.
6501/6502 POWER SUPPLY MODULES 276705 and
276715 Power supply modules 276705 and 276715 are used in the 6501/6502 distribution amplifier station to convert sta-
tion ac input voltage to a well-regulated dc voltage for station powering. The switching regulated supply (276715) provides improved efficiency over the standard linear power supply (21b105) which results in cost savings in operating expense. The switching regulated supply is a constant power device, meaning that it automatically ad-
justs its internal operating parameters for most efficient use of different levels of voltage and current within a
system. The switching regulated supply automatically determines load power requirements and adjusts its
operation so that only that amount of power is provided.
VRF-126
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
eioleremez,;,,,,
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER, MODELS 6501 and 6502
FEATURES
· Upgradable to Bi-directional With the Installation of a Sub-Split Reverse Amplifier Printed-Circuit Board, Diplex Filters, Pad, and Equalizer
· Simplified Setup Procedure · Plug- In Forward Hybrids ·Selectable Transformer Taps and Built-ir Voltage
Indicator · 30- or 60-Volt Operation · Plug- In Transient Protectors · Symmetrical Module and Housing Permits Mounting
for Easy Maintenance · Field Replaceable Power Supply Module · Flat-20 dB Directional Coupler Test Points · Reverse Injection Test Point · Optional Switching Regulated Power Supply Module · Plug- In DC Powered Thermal Network · Plug-In Frequency Response Trim Networks · Innovative Cable Seizures Provide Positive Connection
and Ensure Good Return Loss
HIGH-GAIN UPGRADE TRUNK AMPLIFIER
MODULES 232840 ( 330 MHz) AND 280200 ( 450 MHz)
Designed to drop into existing trunk station locations, the high gain amplifier features 28 dB of forward gain, permitting fast and inexpensive system upgrades from 216 MHz to 330 or 300 MHz to 450 MHz. Circuitry for automatic gain and slope operations is included and is driven from switch-selectable built-in thermal networks or a separate carrier level operated Automatic Control Module. The trunk module is designed to compensate
for losses introduced by coaxial cable spans while introducing minimum levels of noise and non-linear distortion. Plug-in diplex filters for the input and output provide
signal routing for split frequency two-way operation.
r -
·
US 51.1 011100740 AMPL IF IER
·
NSIONN ....NI N.IN bLI1 ....NI nat 'pore
.1;11....v .....u.mo Wu +um oes
Model 650IM 6501MS 650IFAM 6501MH
6502M 6502MS 6502MM 6502MH
65024 650242 6502AM 6502A/4 6501IAL 65112ML 6502AL
8822
à
I
I J
1
iiii
J 8
s 1 1 e. e.
III Ji
el 2. t
Description
X 1 I ... sii
Manual Forward Meader
I
Manual FOINVI. »VI II. Mel 5-33 AlHz He Gon
,
Reverse Ameba. and Doplea Freer
Manual Forward Arnold. wan 5-108 MHz Reverse
Arnold. and Dopes ForWr
I
Manual Forward Arnold., we, 5-174 MHz Reverse
Ampleher and Molex Flhers
1
H.gn Gaon Manual Forward Arnold,.
Hegh Gaon Manual Fonvard An:Adler wdh 5-30 MHz Reverse Arnold.. and Deem F.ltres
He Gaon Manual Fo·ward Arnololow wan 5-108 MHz Reverse Amplifier and Mole» Goners
Hoph Gaon Manual Forward Arnalder woe, 5.174 MHz ROW. Arnplolorer and MOM. F.aers
Hrph Gaon autornanc Am>,
1
Hen Gen Aulornaloc Forware Arngold
h 5-30 MHz
Reverse Arnaldo.. and Doplea Freers
I
High Gaon Arnornanc Forwano Anspaher woth 6108 MHz Reverse Arnaldo« and D plea FreersI
Hogh Gaon Adlornac Forward Arnaldo. wan 6174 11.111z , Reverae Ampédoer and Dees Foam
Manual Fonvard Amebae vent 5-30 MHz Low Gem flew,,. Arnow., and Choler Fdler
He Gam Manual Forward 'Impeller wah 630 MHz Low Gain Reverse AlTpllt. and Dopes Flaws
Hrph Gen AMPTIBIK Forward Annaolan «eh 633 MHZ Low Gaon Reverse Arnold.. and Do. Fete,'
110V ac power -- plus any al above 6502 Sutures
1 ,
2
I
n
2
1
1
2
1
I .
2 2
1 1
I I
I
2
1
1
I 1
2 2
2
2
2
2
I 1
1 1
I 1 I
34450 NH. High Para Flit., 174450 NH. Nib Pow RIM 9.34-430 NH. FINN P. Aker
BRIDGING AMPLIFIER MODULE 276990 ( 300, 330 MHz) 234290 ( 400 MHz) 233170 ( 450 MHz) 344000 ( 550 MHz)
The Model 276990, 234290, 233170, and 344000 are the bridging amplifiers for the Series 6500 trunk station in the frequency ranges of 300-550 MHz.
The bridger module is designed to provide gain and isolation between trunk and feeder systems in a common station. Four symmetrical plug-in feeder makers permit feeder activation from all or a combination of four ports--two on either end of the station housing. Feeder ports can be independently powered through plug-in fuses. A single plug-in diplex filter before the feeder maker provides signal routing for sub-split, two-way operation. A single output test point before the feeder maker permits consistent set-up regardless of the number of feeders activated.
Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-127
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TWX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
·
suss Pe.,
r
AINC.01,
450, 550 MHz TRUNK AMPLIFIER MODULES 234420/344070
SERIES 6800 FEEDFORWARD STATIONS
FEATURES Push/Pull Feedforward Trunk · Forward Capability of 54 to 550 MHz · Feedforward Amplification for Higher Gain and Less
Distortion · Forward Operation Gain of 22, 26, or 30 dB · Built-in Hybrid Redundancy · Optional Status Monitoring · Optional Plug-in Interstage Filter · Directional Coupler Test Points on Input and Output · Plug-in Equalizers and Pads · Provisions for Interstage Trimming · Versatile Housing for Aerial or Underground · Precision Automatic Control System Operates off CW
Carriers or Modulated Channels · 50-60 Hz Powering · Feedforward Trunk Module Compatible with Existing
Distribution Trunk Housing
TRUNK AMPLIFIER MODULES 149680, 231120, 234420, AND 344070 Trunk modules 149680, 231120, 234420, and 344070 are the forward amplifiers for the Series 6500 Trunk Station in frequency ranges from 300 MHz to 450/550 MHz. Circuitry for automatic gain and slope operation is included and is driven from switch-selectable built-in thermal networks or a separate carrier level operated Automatic Control Module. The trunk module is designed to compensate for losses introduced by coaxial cable spans while introducing minimum levels of noise and non-linear distortion. Plug-in diplex filters for the input and output provide signal routing for split frequency two-way operation. Provision for plug-in interstage trim networks permit simple system frequency response error correction without affecting basic module alignment.
Irs
,E0f ,AWARO /filne AMPLOWP YOSULE 2·03.0
Push/Pull Feedforward Distribution Amplifier
· Forward Capability of 54 to 550 MHz · Forward Operational Gain of 32 dB
· Built-in Hybrid Redundancy · Reverse Capability · Field- Replaceable Feedforward Blocks · Directional Coupler Test Points on Input and Output · Plug-in Equalizers and Pads · Plug-in Surge Protectors · 50-60 Hz Powering · Switching- Regulated Power Supply · Optional Plug-in Thermal Network · Optional Plug-in Trim Network
Distribution Equipment Feectiorivard Trunk Stations
Series 6800 Feedloneard Trunk Stations All Amplifier Staleons Slopped w,01 Housing and Power Supply
Upper Frequency LLiimmit of Station Must Appear · Parr or Each Slation Model Number (Example 68.2ABRSISOI
Model 684(1-A
Description8 Automatic Feedfonvard Trunk Amplifier
li It li
g t gq II J e ; e;
1.!e i e4 :!
-ii1 -i:tim
82 0.8 02
i il Ie
' g
1
'''. ' '
1 jr
1 .
e 0
1
1
6841)-AB Automatic Feedlonvard Trunk Amplifier with Feedronvard Bridge,
6841)-AR
Aulornalic Feedlonvard Trunk Amplifier Volh Thermal Reverse Amplifier and Choler Fillers
68441-ABR Aulornahc Feedforward Trunk Amplifier end, Feedfonvand Bridger Thermal Reverse Amplifier and Durex Filters
'Add "0" for 22 dB gain, " 1 for 26 dB gain, 2 lip 30 dB gain
1
I
1
I 12
1
I 1 13
FEEDFORWARD TRUNK AMPLIFIER MODULES 22 dB 450 MHz- 280360 550 MHz- 343900 26 dB 450 MHz- 343880 550 MHz -- 343910 30 dB 450 MHz- 343890 550 MHz- 343920
SERIES 6800 450/550 MHz
Feedforward trunk amplifiers offer significantly improved signal distortion characteristics over conventional pushpull amplifiers. Advantages include increased amplifier spacing and improved cascadeability, while in many instances reducing the total cable system cost. Additionally, the feedforward design utilizes redundant amplifier hybrids, improving overall system reliability.
The trunk module features plug-in hybrid and feedforward amplifiers, built-in directional coupler test points on both input and output, superior hybrid amplifier heat sinking, plug-in pads, equalizer, and a series of interstage trim networks, switch-selectable thermal or carriercontrolled slope and gain, ac power directors for power pass or block from input or output, and total access for ease or maintenance in the field.
VRF-128
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA,
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348
(404) 441-4000
TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
INC.
igeopootwano 1014001fal AMPUMER
11111.111»11111111,
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
AUTOMAtIC C 100.1.t
FEEDFORWARD BRIDGING AMPLIFIER MODULE, High- Gain 450 MHz, 280210 Low- Gain 450 MHz, 280220 High- Gain 550 MHz, 280230 Low-Gain 550 MHz, 280240
The Series 6800 feedforward bridging modules are the forward bridger amplifiers for use where superior distortion performance is required. Model 280210 high-gain feedforward bridger is used with the 22 dB feedforward
trunk amplifier and Model 280220 low-gain feedforward bridger is used with the 26 and 30 dB trunk amplifiers.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODULES 276440 and 277360
The Model 276440 and 277360 Automatic Control Modules are used in the forward system to provide carrier level control of the slope and gain circuits in the trunk amplifier module. The automatic control module
samples the band of signals at the trunk amplifier output, monitors the level of a selected high band carrier (high pilot) and a selected low band carrier (low pilot), and provides error correction input to the trunk amplifier slope and gain circuits in the event level changes occur. The closed loop system ensures a constant trunk amplifier output level despite changes in signal level prior to the station. The automatic control module operates from either modulated carriers by detecting the peak carrier level during the sync interval or from unmodulated CW carriers. Channels selected for automatic control operation cannot be scrambled by sync suppression.
INTERMEDIATE/TERMINATING TRUNK MODULE 232900 ( 300, 330, 400 MHz) 234430 ( 450 MHz) 344030 ( 550 MHz)
The Forward Intermediate/Terminating Trunk Module is used in the forward system to provide additional feeder between normally spaced trunk amplifier stations or to terminate the trunk system where existing trunk requirements end. In the intermediate configuration the trunk
signal is passed through the module (without amplification) where a sample is tapped off, equalized, amplified, and routed to a standard bridger module. In the terminating configuration the input signal is equalized, amplified, and routed to a standard bridger module. The module is configured for intermediate or terminating operation by means of a plug-in rotatable signal director. Plug-in diplex filters for the input and output provide signal routing for split frequency two-way operation in
the intermediate configuration, with a single plug-in
diplex filter at the input being required for two-way operation in the terminating configuration. Because the intermediate/terminating module plugs into the station housing in the position of a standard trunk amplifier module, a terminating trunk station can directly be converted to a standard trunk station in the event future additions to a terminated trunk cascade arise.
SUO-16PLIT AVMS« *IIIIPURIER
»Me. Mt.
SUB- SPLIT REVERSE AMPLIFIER MODULE 233180 The Model 233180 Sub-Split Reverse Amplifier Module serves as the primary reverse amplifier for single cable 5-30 MHz reverse trunk operation. The Sub-Split Reverse Amplifier Module installs in a standard trunk housing and provides gain for reverse trunk transportation and origination of feeder signals. Built-in thermally controlled slope and gain circuits are designed to compensate for level changes that occur in a single span of cable. The design accuracy of the thermal networks, the low frequency of operation, and use of reverse trunk amplifiers in every forward amplifier station provide accurate level control over long cascades without the need for pilot systems.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-129
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
6502 AUTOMATIC CONTROL MODULE 276695
The 6502 automatic control module is used in the forward system to provide carrier level control of the slope
and gain circuits in the distribution amplifier module. Automatic control module 276695 is used in the distribution amplifier and provides AGC systems up to 450 MHz. The automatic control module samples the band of signals of the distribution amplifier output, monitors a high band carrier (high pilot), and provides error correction input to the slope and gain circuits in the event level changes occur. The closed loop system ensures a constant distribution amplifier output level despite change in signal level prior to the station. The automatic control module operates from either modulated carriers by detecting the peak carrier level during the sync interval or from unmodulated CW carriers.
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER 450/550 MHz, MODEL 6810 FEEDFORWARD
FEATURES
· Forward Capability of 54 to 550 MHz · Forward Operational Gain of 32 dB · Built-in Hybrid Redundancy · Reverse Capability · Field-Replaceable Feedforward Blocks · Directional Coupler Test Points on Input and Output · Plug-in Equalizers and Pads · Plug-in Surge Protectors · 50 - 60 Hz Powering ·Switching- Regulated Power Supply · Optional Plug-in Thermal Networks ·Optional Plug-in Trim Networks
Scientific-Atlanta's Model 6810 450/550 MHz feedforward distribution amplifiers offer significantly improved signal distortion characteristics over conventional push-pull line extenders. Advantages include increased amplifier spacing and improved cascadeability, while in many instances reducing the total cable system cost. Additionally, the feedforward design utilizes redundant amplifier hybrids, improving overall system reliability.
LAN INDOOR DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER, MODEL 6822
Scientific-Atlanta's Model 6822 is an indoor local area network (LAN) distribution amplifier that meets the performance and reliability requirements for high quality data and video intrafacility systems. Available to 450 MHz, the Model 6822 offers 115V ac powering, selection of the three reverse splits, and optional AGC or thermal
compensation. Our standard modular approach accommodates ease of maintenance while supporting the addition of thermal or automatic compensation at a future
date.
/wadable In a 050/550 MHz fortvae confgurahon. the tolldang table hsts opens for the Model 6810
Model 6810 Feedfonvard Ample°, Slatens
All statens sheet.] mth houseg ..nd swathing regulated power supply
tipper trequency lee of Ratan must appear as part 04 each slaten model number ( example 6810041450(
Model
Dem.-II:Mon
68/004
Manual Feedlonvard At-elder
6810MR
Manual Feedfonvard Melee, vath 5-30 MHz Reverse Ample.> 'oath :3,plex Fears
68104
40/000,00 Feedfonvard Ampl her
68/OAR
Automate Feedfonvard Amoleer teth 5-30 MHz Reverse Amphher and Choler Fates
VRF-130
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
5.30 MHz Low Pass Filter
i 76 E or 7.
I i
1
Automatic Control
tSr.
7,
..
E
t
S
o
S
I
à
g
E
E
2
1
I
1
I
I
I
2
1
1
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
STATUS MONITORING/REVERSE SWITCHING SYTEM, MODEL 6581
FEATURES
· Compatible with Existing Scientific-Atlanta Trunk Amplifier Stations
·Audio and visual Alarms Identify Failure Type and Location
· Reduces Fault Finding Time and Cost · Identifies Potential Problem Areas · Sequentially Polls up to 2048 Trunk Stations for
Change in Status · Permits High-Quality Live Remote Broadcasts to Cable
Customers · Selectively Activates/Deactivates Reverse Feeder or
Reverse Trunk Paths, thus Reducing Overall System Noise and Ingress During Periods when Reverse Paths are not used · Identifies the Source of RF Ingress oy Deactivating Suspect Trunk Station Feeder · Maintains System Integrity · Provides a Hard Printout of Failure Type and Address · Permits Operator Interrupt via Keyboard at any Time · Permits Operator to Modify Status Monitoring Program Stored on Floppy Disk ·Compatible with Former Model 6580 Status Monitoring System · IBM Personal Computer retains all Ihe Features of a Personal Computer and can run all Software and Interface with all Hardware Designed for the IBM Personal Computer
Model 6581 Status Monitoring/Reverse Switching System automatically monitors signal levels and power throughout the trunk system. The system continually polls up to 2048 trunk stations, and can activate or deactivate reverse feeder paths or reverse trunk paths in specific trunk stations containing a reverse switch and amplifier status transponder. Reverse feeder switching reduces return path noise and facilitates highquality, live remote video transmission.
An IBM Personal Computer and RF Subsystem, located at the headend, controls the system. Data concerning trunk station status changes or specific trunk station addresses is displayed on the computer terminal and can be printed for reference.
AMPLIFIER STATUS TRANSPONDER MODULE, PART NUMBERS 277080 and 277090
The Trunk Station Status Transponder module is a transceiver that responds to status polling and switching commands issued from the system communications control unit. Module 277080 is the HRC model, while Module 277090 is the IRC or standard model. Each transponder module is assigned afield-selectable digital address to permit selective station polling for out-oftolerance conditions such as high or low pilot level, ac or dc power, and reverse switch status.
ACCESSORIES
FORWARD- REVERSE TRIM NETWORKS In amplifier cascades, frequency response variations are controlled with use of interstage trim networks. A broad selection should be on hand at the outset of balance and alignment procedures.
Part Number
276754 277(61 035959 143185 231381 231382 231383 231385 732206 232531 732532 232533 232535 732537 234341 279450 233190 234499 233108 233109 233110 279440 279445 279400
Operating Frequency (NH.)
450 450 300 300 300-450 300-450 300450 300-450 450 300 300 300 300 300450 300-450 300450 30 30 1013 1013 108 174 174
300-450
Name
Where used
(PP- 1 LPP-1ES HFD-S PAD- 2
LPP-1S MPP-IS LFP-1S PAD- IS PAD- 1 HFP-25 LFP-2S DP-2S
PAD-2S VHP-2S
MFP-1S FHTP-2S TPR-1
TPR-3 RLTT-25 RHTT-2S RIND-2S
COR-2 IISRT·2
EWE°
6554,6555 6554)6555 Forward Trunk Fonvard Trunk
Fonvard Trunk Forward Trunk Formed Trunk
Forward Trunk Fonvard Trunk Forward Trunk
Forward Trunk Forward Trunk Faward Trunk Forward Trunk
Forward Trunk Fonvard Trunk Remese Trunk
Reverse Trunk Reverse Trunk Reverse Trunk
Reverse Trunk Rmerm Trunk Reverse Trunk Bregor
Demription
Line Extender Forward Trutt Ltne Extender Forward Inn, wall pad socket High Frequency Dap with pad socket Interstage Pad eerbefe no other trim is used Low Peak · Peak enth pad socket Mbd Peak · Peak with pad socket Low Frequency Peak wen pad socket Interstape Pad where no other Pm is used Interstage Pad where no other trim is used He Frequency Peak wan pad socket Low Frequency Peak wah pad sccket Low lo Mid Frequency De with pad socket Interstage Pad vent pad socket where no other trim is used High Frequency Peaking wen pad socket MO Frequency Peaking with pad socket High Umle Peak oath pad socket Triple Peaking Peaking Mid- Split Cold Tnrn with pad socket Mid- Split Hot Trirn with pad socket MO·Split Dipletter Trim mth pad socket High- Se Reverse Koh Split Rarer. with Thermal Fonvard Turnable EqUell.2e,
NOTES:
All networks with " S" suffix have plug-in pad sockets.
Networks with a " 2" in their name are for use in 300 MHz trunk modules. All have 2 dB insertion loss.
Networks with a " 1" in their name are for use in 330 to 450 MHz system. All have 1dB insertion loss. These may be used in 300 MHz trunk module with 1dB pad installed in trim.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-131
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TWX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
LINE EXTENDER/DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIER REVERSE KITS Forward line extenders and distribution amplifiers can be converted to sub-split two-way operation with the reverse kit.
,rnmeeenetesseeeeiresie
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
MID- SPLIT REVERSE INTERSTAGE TRIM NETWORK
As amplifiers are cascaded, small frequency response variations can accumulate. Plug-in trim networks are available to compensate for these cascaded effects.
Selection and assignment of reverse interstage trim networks are as follows:
Ho Trim 233109
Cold Trim 233108
Dip exer Trim 233110
2 dB Pad 143185
Each series of four reverse trunk modules requires
one of each type trim network. The sequence in which they are installed is of little significance.
The 2dB pad ( Part No. 143185) is shipped in place in each mid-split reverse trunk module and is removed to allow installation of the other trims required.
AC POWER SUPPLY Capable of furnishing either 30V or 60V, the Model 6509 Power Supply is used to supply power through the cable to trunk and line extender stations in the system. The unit can be mounted outside on a pole and is completely weatherproof. Total surge protection is built into the
solid-state design.
FORWARD INTERSTAGE TRIM NETWORK, FOR 6554/6555 LINE EXTENDERS
As line extenders are cascaded, small frequency response variations can accumulate. A plug-in trim network is available to compensate for this effect.
MODULE PLUG-IN CABLE EQUALIZERS Plug-in equalizers are required at the input of all forward trunk, bridger, line extender, and distribution amplifiers. They are also required at the output of all reverse trunk, line extender, and distribution amplifiers. Equalizer values are expressed in terms of cable attenuation in dB at the upper frequency. All forward equalizers are selected according to the upper frequency attenuation of the cable on the input side of the forward amplifier. Reverse equalizers are selected according to the upper frequency attenuation of the cable on the output side of the reverse amplifier.
HIGH- SPLIT DRIVERS
High-split reverse amplifier, Part No. 234600, contains circuitry for slope/gain temperature compensation. Plugin high-split drivers are required for proper operation of this circuitry. Drivers are available to permit temperature compensation for 6, 12, 18, 24, and 30 dB of cable. Both a slope and a gain driver is required for each Part No. 234600 temperature compensating high-split reverse amplifier. Slope and gain drivers are selected based on post amplifier cable loss at 174 MHz.
PLUG-IN PADS
Plug-in pads are required in all bridger amplifiers, at the
input of all forward modules, and at the output of all reverse modules. Where reverse is activated through a
bridger, an additional pad is required in the bridger path
LINE EXTENDER THERMAL COMPENSATORS For use in 6554/6555 line extender amplifiers.
of the reverse trunk module.
VRF-132
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
JUMPER
PLUG-IN JUMPER Used in place of the plug-in combiner in the Intermediate/Terminating Trunk, Sub-Split Reverse Trunk, and High-Split Reverse Trunk modules.
-0 co
7ie' 'Po z rn
DIPLEX FILTERS Diplex filters are used in the trunk amplifier, bridger amplifier, and line extender amplifier modules for routing of forward and return signals. Forward trunk and line extender modules accept two plug-in diplex filters and the bridger amplifier accepts one. Diplex filters plug into the respective modules in place of diplex jumpers which are shipped standard in all modules.
Molex Filter Specifications
Flatness Insertion Loss Chrornonance-toLuminance Delay
5.30 /411a
201 dI3 02 dB 6 ns (110)
54.550 MHz 5.108 NH. 174.550 MHz 5.174 NH. 234.550 NH.
201 dB 02 dB 2 ns ICH2)
z01 dB 02 dB 1nn (CH6)
ZOI dB 02 dB 1 ns (CH?)
201 dB 02dB 1 nn (CHI)
SOI dB 02dB Inn (CHM)
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
MD SPLIT DUAL DEEP NOTCH 0014F
2.0105
DUAL DEEP NOTCH PILOT FILTER DDNF Used in mid-split reverse paths where one reverse pilot source intersects alternate pilot sources. The DDNF is plugged into the input of the last reverse trunk module before any intersection where pilot addition would occur.
MODEL 6501 and 6502 FORWARD THERMAL COMPENSATORS These compensators provide thermal slope and gain compensation over a temperature range of -- 40°C to +60°C (- 40°F to + 140°F).
ACM BYPASS ASSEMBLY The ACM bypass assembly plugs into the trunk station housing in place of the ACM to allow status monitoring to be used in forward thermal trunk stations.
BRIDGER FEEDER MAKERS Bridger feeder makers are available in one, two, three,
or four output configurations. One of the four types is required with each bridger module to activate trunk sta-
tion feeder ports.
EXTERNAL DIPLEX FILTER ASSEMBLY
The external diplex filter assembly is used at the headend to separate forward and reverse signals in a twoway system. The assembly consists of a standard plugin diplex filter installed in a passive housing. Specifications are identical to the standard diplex filters.
REVERSE THROUGH RETURN CABLE RC- 100 This cable allows reverse signals to pass through a trunk station when no reverse trunk amplification or feeder input is required. Order Part No. 35860.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-133
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA,
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
INC
TV SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION
LONG REACH TEST- POINT ADAPTOR
This 75 ohm push- in adapter permits a test cable to be connected to test points in a trunk station or line extender module. Available in two configurations, these adapters are long enough to reach through the module housing to the test point inside. The push-in test point adapter exhibits negligible insertion loss.
DROP ADAPTOR
This 75 ohm adapter permits a semi-permanent RG-59 test cable to be connected to the trunk station test point and run to the bottom of the pole for easy access. The drop adapter screws into the standard trunk station external test points. The drop adapters exhibit negligible insertion loss. For " Slim Line" trunk housing, order Part No. 231390. For other trunk housing application, order
CABLE SEIZURE WRENCH
Machined from high grade stainless steel, the wrench is used to loosen or secure the cable seizure fittings in the trunk and 6554/6555 line extender station housings. The steel pins are field replaceable.
TEST PROBE, 3dB
This probe is used for reverse signal injection in the 6501/6502 Distribution Amplifier. It is also useful for testing reverse feeder input levels to bridging amplifier Module Number 233170.
TRUNK STATION TEST CABLE
This cable allows simple connection of test equipment to module coaxial connectors located in the trunk station amplifier housing.
TRUE TILT CORRECTION NETWORK
During initial set-up of the system, the true tilt correction network allows conversion of true tilt signals to a flat response. The network is connected in cascade with a short length of 75 ohm test cable attached to an FSM or spectrum analyzer. This results in a flat overall signal amplitude ( frequency response observed when the signais are properly tilted). Measurements can thus be made without lengthy, error- producing calculations to ascertain flatness of response.
LINE TERMINATOR LT-75
The line terminator terminates a branch of a reverse trunk cable split when only one branch of the split is used for reverse transmission. The line terminator plugs into the output reverse amplifier module socket and terminates the unused branch of the cable split.
FUSE EXTRACTOR
The fuse extractor is used to insert/remove bridger module output fuses. Order Part No. 172510.
CIRCUIT BREAKER
Circuit breakers can be used in place of bridger module output fuses. The circuit breaker plugs in directly in place of the standard fuse.
SPECIFICATIONS
Hold Current 4A
Trip Current 8A
Trip Time
10-60 seconds
011
TANDEM MOUNTING BRACKETS
These brackets are used in applications where dual cable construction requires tandem mounting of trunks,
line extenders, and taps/passives.
PLUG-IN FILTERS
Low pass/high pass filters are required in all 6501/6502 hybrid amplifiers. A plug-in filter is not required in the sub-split (5-30 MHz) discrete module as it is hard wired
to the chassis. Forward filters reject reverse carriers; reverse filters reject forward carriers.
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Range Return Loss Insertion Loss Frequency Response Isolation ( Relection)
REVERSE SUB- SPLIT
5-30 MHz 22 dB 0.35 dB 0.2 dB 45 dB
REVERSE MID- SPLIT
5-108 MHz 21 dB 0.4 dB 0.3 dB 35 dB
REVERSE HIGH- SPLIT
5-174 MHz 18 dB 0.4 dB 0.6 dB 45 dB
LOAD PAD ASSEMBLY LPA-75
This 75 ohm termination mates with the coaxial female connectors located in the trunk station amplifier housing
module sockets. This assembly is employed to terminate critical module output cables when operational modules are not used. The load pad assembly is primarily used to terminate trunk feeds to the bridger and automatic
control modules when these modules are not included
as part of the station.
FORWARD S- S
Frequency Range Return Loss Insertion Loss Frequency Response Isolation ( Rejection)
54-450 MHz 19 dB 0.3 dB 0.25 dB 45 dB
VRF-134
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
FORWARD M- S
174-450 MHz 22 dB 0.3 dB 0.1 dB 25 dB
FORWARD H- S
234-450 MHz 20 dB 0.3 dB 0.3 dB 50 dB
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
TAPS AND CONNECTORS
DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
TAPS AND PASSIVES
FEATURES
· Modular design allows changing of board and cover without removal of housing from cable
·Versatile housing design permits aerial or pedestal mounting · Subscriber ports cast into housing provide added strength, prevent
leakage
· 1.00" spacing between ports gives more room for drop installation and use of traps
· Center seizure mechanism rotates to either the aerial or pedestal input/output port to eliminate need to remove center conductor seizure screw
·Tough die-cast housing · Housing halves sealed with neoprene rubber 0-rine type gasket ·Collars on input/output ports facilitate use of heat- shrink tubing · Housing halves joined by captive bolts ·Subscriber ports sealed with apuncture- seal ·Umbrella- effect housing design prevents accumulation of water at
joints
· Center conductor seizure screw can be tightened with 1/4" Hex Nut Driver or straight- blade screwdriver
·Center conductor seizure screw designed to minimize scoring and damage to the cable center conductor
·Subscriber ports designed to accept heat- shrink ·Optional weather resistant protective coating ·Optional RFI gasket
Ordering Information
2- Way Tap. Order by Part No, from table below: Maximum Insertion Loss ( dB)
Model No. ·
SAT2F-41 SAT2F-38
SAT2F-35 SAT2F-32 SAT2F-29 SAT2F-26 SAT2F-23 SAT2F-20 SAT2F-17
SAT2F-14 SAT2F-11
SAT2F-8 SAT2F-4
Tap Value
5-400
400-500
Minimum 5 30 50 300 333 400 450 560 Tap- to- Output
t1.0 dB
1.0 dB MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz
Isolation
41.0
41.0 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 6 .7 . 8
50
38.0
38.0 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 6 .7 . 8
48
35.5
35.5 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 6 .7 . 8 .9
43
32.0
32.0 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 .8 . 9
41
29.0
29.0 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 .8 . 9
39
26.0
26.0 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 .8 .9
37
23.0
23.5 . 4 . 5 . 5 . 6 . 7 . 8 .9 1.0
36
20.5 17
20.5 . 4 . 6 . 6 . 7 . 7 . 8 .9 1.0 17 . 5 . 6 . 6 . 8 .8 . 9 1.0 1.1
3ao3
14
14 . 9 . 9 . 9 1.0 1.0 1.2 1.3 1.4
28
11
11
1.5 1.5 1.4 1.8 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.2
8 4
84.5
3.1 3.0 3.0 3.3 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.8 Terminating
2223
*Add "W" to model number if environrnental coating is desired.
4- Way Tap. Order by Part No. from table below: Maximum Insertion Loss 1dB)
Model No.* SAT4F-41
SAT4F-38 SAT4F-35
SAT4F-32 SAT4F-29 SAT4F-26
SAT4F-23 SAT4F-20 SAT4F-17 SAT4F-14
SAT4F-11 SAT4F-8
Tap Value
Minimum
5-400
400-500
5 30 50 300 330 400 450 550 Tap- to- Output
1.0 dB 710dB MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz
Isolation
41.0
41.5 . . 5 . 6 .7 . 8
45
38.5
38.5 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 6 .7 . 8 -
45
35.0
35.5 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 6 .7 . 8
43
32.0
32.5 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 6 .7 . 8 .9
41
29.0
29.5 . 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 6 .
. .9
39
26.0
26.5 . 4 . 5 . 5 . 6 . 7 . 8 .9 1.0
37
23.5
23.5 . 4 . 6 . 6 . 7 . 7 . 8 .9 1.0
35
20.5
20.5 . 5 . 6 . 6 . 8 . 8 . 9 1.0 1.1
31
17.5
17.5 . 9 9 9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
29
14.5
14.5
1.5 1.5 1.6 1.8 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.2
28
11.5
11.5
3.1 3.0 3.0 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.7 3.8
25
8.0
8.5
Terminating
'Add '' W" to model number if environmental coating is desired.
8-Way Tap. Order by Part No. from table below: Maximum Insertion Loss ( dB)
Tap Value
Model No.· . 1.5 dB ± 1.5 dB
SAT8F-35 35.5
36.5
SAT8F-32 32.0
32.5
SAT8F-29 29.0
29.0
SAT8F-26 26.0
27.0
SAT8F-23 23.5
23.5
SAT8F-20 20.5
21.5
SAT8F-17 17.5
17.5
SAT8F-14 14.5
14.5
SAT8F-11 11.5
11.5
Minimum
5 30 50 300 330 400 450 560 Tap- to- Output
MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz MHz Isolation
. 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . 8 1.0
43
. 3 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . 8 1.0
40
. 4 . 5 . 5 . 6 . 7 .8 . 9 1.1
38
. 4 . 6 . 6 . 7 . 7 . 8 1.0 1.1
35
. 5 . 6 . 6 . 8 . 8 .9 1.0 1.2
32
. 9 . 9 . 9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.6 1.8 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.4
22e9
3.1 3.0 3.0 3.3 3.3 3.5 3.7 4.0
27
Terminating
*Add "W" to model number if environmental coating is desired.
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA- TAPS
FEATURES
·Modular design allows changing of board and cover without removal of housing from cable
·Versatile housing design permits aerial or pedestal mounting ·Subscriber ports cast into housing provide added strength, prevent
leakage
· 1.00" spacing between ports gives more room for drop installation and use of t-aps
·Center seizure mechanism rotates from either the aerial or pedestal input/output port to eliminate need to remove center conductor seizure screw
·Tough die-cast housing
·Housing halves sealed with neoprene rubber 0- ring type gasket ·Collars on input/output ports facilitate use of heat- shrink tubing ·Housing halves joined by captive bolts ·Subscriber pots sealed with apuncture- seal ·Umbrella- effect housing design prevents accumulation of water
at joints ·Center conductor seizure screw can be tightened with 1/4" hex
nut driver or straight-alade screwdriver ·Center conauctor seizure screw designed to minimize scoring and
damage to the cable center conductor ·Subscriber ports aesigned to accept heat- shrink ·Weather resistant protective coating
2 WAY TAPS
Model No. SATW2F-41
SA TW2F-38 SA TW2F-35 SATYV2F - 32
SA fW2f - 29 SATW2F-26 SATW2F-23
SATW2F-20 SATW2F-17 SATVV2F-14 SATVV2F-11
SATW2F-8 SATW2r-4
Tap Loss at
Tap- to- Output
30 MHz 300 MHz 333 MHz 400 MHz Isolation Imin.1
.5 . 5 . 6 . 7
50
.5 . 5 . 6 . 7
50
.5
..5s
..s5
.5
.6 .6
.6
.7 .7
.7
50 47
44
.5 . 5 . 6 . 7
41
.6 . 6 .6 . 6
.7 .7
..88
38 35
.6 . 6 . 7
.8
32
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
30
1.8
1.8
1.9
2.0
29
.3.8
3.8
3.9
4.0
26
-
-
-
-
4--WAY TAPS
Model iNo.
SATVV4F-41 SATIN4F-38
SATW4F-35 SATVV4F-32 SATW4F-29 SATW4F-26 SATW4F-23
SATWOr--20 SAIW4F-17 SATW4F-14 SATVV4F-11
SATVV4F-8
Tap Loss at
Tap- to- Output
30 MHz 300 MHz 330 MHz 400 MHz Isolation ( min. 1
.5 . 5 . 6 . 7
50
.5 . 5 . 6 . 7
50
.5 . 5 . 6 . 7
50
.5 . 5 . 6 . 7
47
.5 . 5 . 6 . 7
44
.6 . 6 . 7 . 8
41
.6 .6 . 7
.8
38
.6
.6 . 7
.8
35
1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
32
1.8
1.8
1.9
2.0
30
3.8
3.8
3.9
4.0
29
-
-
-
-
-
8- WAY TAPS
Model No.
Tap Loss at
Tap- to- Output
30 MHz 3C0 MHz 330 MHz 400 MHz Isolation ( min.)
SATW8F-41 . 5 . 5 . 6 . 7
50
SATW8F-38 . 5 . 5 . 6 . 7
50
SATWOF 35 . 5 . 6 . 7
50
SAT \iV8F-32 . 5 . 5 . 6 . 7
47
SATW8F-29 . 5 SATW8F-26 . 6
.5 .6
.7 .7
..08
44 41
SATW8F-23 . 6 . 6 . 7 . 8
38
SATW8F-20 1.0
1.0
1.1
1.1
35
SA -W8F-17
1.8
1.8
1.9
2.0
32
SATVV8F-14 3.8
3.8
3.9
4.0
30
SA TW8F-11 - - - - -
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-135
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
SET TOP TERMINALS
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
SET- TOP TERMINAL, SERIES 8500 Features · Handsome, High- Tech Exterior · Bright LED Display · Extra Surge Protection · Lighting Path Protection · Coded Serial Communications Protects Against Internal
Tampering ·Advanced Automatic Manufacturing Technique ·Well Ventilated · UL Listed · Protective Pads
The Series 8500 Scientific-Atlanta set- top terminals are available in three unique set- top models, all offering fully electronic, microprocessor- based control. Series 8500 set- top terminals operate at frequencies up to 440 MHz and can deliver 128 channels in a dual cable system.
The Series 8500 Programmable set-top terminal includes a long list of standard product line features, including pro-
grammable frequency allocation and a built-in infrared remote control receiver.
The Series 8500 Programmable set-top terminal with Descrambling uses dynamic switched sync suppression for signal security. Dynamic switched sync suppression is an important Scientific-Atlanta innovation providing economical security that is extremely difficult to defeat.
The Series 8500 Addressable set-top terminal is an advanced electronic set- top terminal providing headend control for service level authorizations and pay- per- view events. The addressable CATV system includes computer capability, software programs, several headend pieces, and personnel orientation. Scientific-Atlanta offers several versions of addressable control systems, with complete hardware and software, site preparation, and personnel training.
·The System Manager II/LAMS is a linkable computer
patzt
system designed to interface in a real-time fashion with
a host billing system.
·The System Manager Iis astand-alone system for cable
u.
operators with less than 20,000 subscribers. Its data base
ie·
includes subscriber information and inventory records.
SERIES 8500 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT Features · Remote Control Receiver Standard On All Series 8500
Set- Tops · Duplicates All Keypad Functions · Dual Message Pulse Infrared System Eliminates False
Activation · Ultra Lightweight
Control Key Functions -- Both the Set-Top Terminal and Remote Control Unit have the following keys:
Increment/Decrement Keys-- Steps up or down consecutively through all authorized channels.
·The Addressable Control Unit ( ACU) is a microcomputer- based, addressable headend system. The ACU data base is keyed to converters only, and is designed to interface with a host computer containing both business and billing software. It can also be used in apartially automated addressable control system where subscriber data base information is managed from a manual filing system.
SERIES 8500 PROGRAMMABLE WITH DESCRAMBLING Features · Dynamic Switched Sync Suppression · Full Line Headend Scrambling Accessories ·Custom- Manufactured Timing Chips That Cannot Be
Purchased Commercially ·All Series 8500 Standard Product Features
OFF Key -- Switched ac feature permits on/off control of the television from the set- top unit.
AU ( Authorize) Key -- To request channels subject to parental discretion, press this key and enter a5- digit secret code.
PRG ( Program) Key-- To program favorite channel memory, press this key and enter desired channel number.
RCL Key -- Steps through up to 20 favorite channels in
memory.
VRF-136
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
TERMINAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
SET- TOP TERMINAL, SERIES 8500
Feature Summary
Feature
Programmable Frequency Allocation Unauthorized Channel Default to Barker Parental Control Function Automatic Dual Cable Switching Increment/Decrement Favorite Channel Memory Remote Control Receiver Switched AC for TV Dynamic Switched Sync Suppression Scrambling Central Control of Authorizations Central Execution of Pay- Per-View Functions Global Authorization and Deauthorization Pay- Per-View Preview Advance Pay- Per-View Program Load Non-Volatile Memory System Security- Legal Terminal Test Svetarn Semirev-Refreqh Timer Stone'
Programmable
Programmable With Descrambling
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Addressable
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
SYSTEM MANAGER I
FEATURES
· Uses IBM Personal Computer · Integrated Subscriber and Converter Control Software · Pre-Formatted CRT Display Screens for Easy, Accurate
Computer Entries · Pay- Per-View Management · Inventory Programs · Flexible Management Report Capability ·Added System Security · Applications Engineering and Consulting.
SYSTEM MANAGER II/LAMS
FEATURES
· Uses Hewlett-Packard Micro 1000 Computer · Can be Interfaced with a Host Billing Computer ·Software Uses Pre- Formatted CRT Display Screen
Format ·Efficient Structure for Pay- Per-View Management ·Added System Security · Extensive Customer Support
ADDRESSABLE CONTROL UNIT, SERIES 8552
FEATURES
· Individual Converter Enable/Disable · Individual Converter Channel Authorization/
Deauthorization (change of service level) ·Advance Pay-Per-View Event Loading ·Global Authorization of a Pay-Per-View Event (only pre-
loaded converters) · Refresh Timer Signal · Legal Terminal Test · Display Service Levels for Each Device
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-137
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600 One Technology Parkway Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TVVX 810-766-4912 Telex 0542898
ADDRESSABLE TERMINAL
MODEL 8550 ADDRESSABLE SET- TOP TERMINAL The Model 8550 addressable set- top terminal is designed to maximize the benefits of addressability by providing the CATV operator exceptional security and downloading flexibility. The high-performance Model 8550 and its related control equipment offer user-friendly and efficient software, large capacity for premium programming and pay- per- view events, remote diagnostic capabilities, subscriber conveniences, business management interface and extensive security features.
Enhanced Security Dynamic switched sync suppression, a Scientific Atlanta innovation, provides signal securty that is virtually impossible to defeat. This scrambling / descrambling method uses a custom- manufactured timing chip to dynamically control the restoration of the video sync tip. The timing delay for every video frame changes randomly among four values, making internal tampering or reproducible scrambling defeats extremely difficult.
The Operator's Addressable The advanced design of the Model 8550 set- top terminal has eliminated the need for a PROM. All authorizations and frequency allocations are down- loaded into the terminal's non-volatile memory from the addressable computer at the headend. ( The non-volatile memory is sealed inside the 8550 and is not affected by power outages or by unplugging the set-top in the subscriber's home.) Additions and deletions of program tiers, single channels, pay- per- view events and program promotions can be accomplished without the expense of service calls. In addition, the cable operator may enable or disable the remote control receiver remotely from the headend.
Subscriber Convenience The Model 8550 set- top terminal provides user- definable parental control. When a set- top is tuned to a channel which has been placed under parental control, an appropriate barker channel will tune in until the correct five- digit authoKzation code is entered. Objectionable programming never enters the home since even audio is denied.
With the Model 8550, parental guidance channels can be defined and redefined by the subscriber utilizing an edit function, or by the cable operator downloading from the headend. The five- digit code can be changed by downloading anew code from the control computer.
Hardware and Software Support Scientific-Atlanta provides extensive customer support for addressable systems. Services available include system design, applications engineering, site preparation, installation, training and factory repair. Also available are several versions of computer hardware and software systems, geared for different sized CATV operations with varying requirements. The System Manager series features addressable management systems which can be integrated with host billing computers, as well as stand-alone control systems.
SPECIFICATIONS Environmental Temperature: Relative Humidity:
Electrical Input Bandwidth: Number of Channels:
Output Channels: Channel Frequency
Response: Gain: Noise Figure: Return Loss
Input:
Output: Isolation Input/Output: Spurious Response
Input: Output: Frequency Accuracy: Frequency Stability: AC Input Range: Power Consumption: Power Supply Surge Protection: RF Input Surge Protection: Distortion at 15 dBmV; 60 channel load Flat Input:
0-45°C 5-95%
54 to 450 MHz 66 with single cable; 128 with dual cable 3or 4
± 2dB Oto + 9dB 13 dB typical
7 dB minimum on tuned channel 11 dB minimum 60 dB
-37 dBmV ( up to 470 MHz) -57 dBmV in channel
100 kHz + 100 kHz 115V AC -± 10% 20 watts maximum
Yes Yes; MOV
Second Order: - 57 dB Cross Modulator: - 57 dB Composite Triple Beat: - 57 dB
Input Level:
Mechanical Dimensions: Weight: Keyboard Type: Display Type:
-7 to + 20 dBmV
10.4" x8" x2.1" 5.5 pounds 16 position, X-Y matrix LED, 0.5" x0.26"
VRF-138
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
SCIENTIFIC-ATLANTA, INC.
Box 105600
One Technology Parkway
Atlanta, GA 30348 (404) 441-4000 TWX 810-766-4912
Telex 0542898
AMINElk
ADDRESSABLE TRANSMITTER/ CHANNEL CONVERTER
ACCESSORIES, SERIES 8500
ADDRESSABLE TRANSMITTER ( ATX), SERIES 8500
The ATX, located at the headend, accepts converter control data from the ACU and transmits the data over the cable system. It operates at a standard frequency of 108.2 MHz. The unit also generates converter control signals needed to keep all legal Series 8500 Addressable set-top terminals active. Output data is transmitted as an FSK-modulated digital signal at the data rate of 19,200 baud. One ATX is required in each headend. Two ATXs can be installed in tandem for system redundancy at each site.
Dual Cable Switch Model No. 8554-002
External switching device for dual cable systems. Corrosion- resistant.
Torx Handle Model No. 8550-093
For use with special Torx bits for Series 8500 security screws.
Ton( Bit Model No. 8550-094
36- CHANNEL CONVERTER, MODEL 6780
FEATURES
· The 36-Channel Converter delivers High-Quality Picture over Range of Input Frequencies from 54 MHz to 300 MHz
· Sturdy Rotary Dial Selects Channels 2 through 37 · Fine Tuning Dial Adjusts Converter to Zero Frequency
Error · Handsome Dark Brown and Simulated Woodgrain Ex-
terior Blend Well in the Modern Home · Rugged Construction Ensures Mechanical Integrity
and Long Life Under Normal Home Use · AC Cord is Safety-Tested for up to 35 Pounds Pull · Corrosion-Resistant Construction · Operates in Temperatures Ranging from 54°F to
110°F, and Stores Without Damage in Temperatures from -- 40°F to 140°F · FCC Certified. UL Approved
PROM Removal Tool Model No. 8550-096
Permits easy and quick removal of PROMs from set-top terminal.
PROM Insertion Kit Model No. 8550-097
Allows easy installation of PROM without pin damage. ATX Cable for Redundancy
Model No. 8553-001 Facilitates operation of dual ATXs.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-139
TEKTRONIX, INC.
P.O. Box 500 Beaverton, OR 97077 (503) 627-7111 Telex 151754
TELEVISION DEMODULATORS
The 1450-1 is compatible with System M Television Transmission, the 1450-2 is compatible with System B/G, and the 1450-3 is compatible with System I.
1450-2
1450-1/1450-2/1450-3
Measurement- Quality Performance for Negligible Distortion
Synchronous Detection Elminates Ouadature Distortion
Envelope Detection for Accurately Determined Differential Phase
Surface Acoustic Wave Filter Provides Precise Nyquist Slope; Excellent Long and Short-Term Stability
Digital Readout of Input Power Level for Easy, Accurate Field Strength Readings
Constant-Bandpass Characteristics Over Wide Dynamic Range
Any Single VHF or UHF Channel Operation
UHF and VHF Tunable Down Converters
Conforms to EIA Standard RS- 462 (System M Only)
The 1450-1 ( System M), 1450-2 ( System B,G) and 1450-3 ( System I) Demodulator Mainframes are combined with a Tektronix Television Down Converter ( TDC) to provide an accurate link between your transmitter's RF signals and video baseband measuring equipment. Unique components work together to identify and eliminate any possible demodulation distortion in reproduced signal characteristics. You see a transparent picture of your transmitter's performance and signal output.
High Performance Spectrum Analyzers for your RF measurements are described on pages 202216.
Tunable or Fixed-Channel Down Converters For demodulating an RF signal at a TV channel frequency, the 1450 Series demodulator mainframes must be used with aTektronix TDC. Three compatible TDCs are available for each system and provide a selection between tunable and fixed- channel performance. The TDC Fixed- Channel Down Converter supports your specified systern channel number. Tunable Down Converters available for VHF and UHF channels are the TDC1 and TDC2 respectively.
Democulation of the transmitter IF signal may be accomplished by using only the mainframe.
Synchronous and Envelope Detection The 1450 Series demodulators allow you to select either synchronous or envelope detection. Each method has advantages, yet both are required for full measurement capability. For instance, synchronous detection is necessary for measurements that can be seriously affected by quadrature distortion.
The 1450 Series demodulators have two synchronous video detectors operating in phase quadralure. One detects the in- phase signal; the other detects the quadrature component of the video signal iThe quadrature component is a measure of change in visual carrier phase resulting from a change of video level.)
However, if incidental phase modulation is presert on the picture carrier, the amount of differential phase measured on asynchronously de;ected signal will be erroneous. Because of this, an envelope detector is necessary to determine the actual differential phase present. The envelope detector has linear transfer characteristics down to 3% carrier and so provides optimum modulation depth indication
Tektronix- Developed Surface Acoustic Wave Filter the 1450 Series demodulators feature a SAW (surface acoustic wave) filter developed by Tektronix. It provides more precise Nyquist slope characteristics without group delay distortion, improves long-term and short-term stability, and lowers maintenance costs compared to conventional fi'ter network circuitry.
In conventional demodulators, the more precisely the bandpass characteristics approach an ideal Nyquist curve, the more complex the filter network required. In the 1450 Series demodulator mainframes however, the bandpass characteristics are determined by just a single component, the SAW filter. Precision is the result.
Conventional tuned IF circuitry must be meticulously ad ;usted and is subject to change with mechanical and thermal shock. But the SAW filter is in a sealed unit and accurately provides the critical selectivity characteristics of the demodulator --and requires no adjustments.
ORDERING INFORMATION, SYSTEM M
1450-1 Television Demodulator ( Order one vi-
sion IF option)14,400
$
Option 01 -- 37 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 03 -- 45.75 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 10 -- Wide Bandwidth Audio 20 Hz to 55 kHz · 0 4 dB +$170
For demodulation of RF signals, one of the following three down converters must be plugged into the 1450-1 mainframe.
Order one vision IF option and either Option 1' or 14.
TDC Fixed Channel Down Converter -- (Steulate channel
number when ordering )
$3.550
TDC-1 -- Tunable Down Converter VHF Band
$7,660
TOC-2 -- Tunable Down Converter UHF Band
57.660
Option 01 -- 37 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 03 45.75 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 11 -- System M Countries
NC
Option 14 -- System M Countries
NC
ORDERING INFORMATION, SYSTEM BIG
1450-2 Television Demodulator ( Order both
Option 02 and Option 09)
$ 11,900
Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 09 -- · 90 ns/ 170 ns Group Delay
NC
Option 10 -- Wide Bandwidth Audio 20 Hz to 55 RHz · 04dB +$165
For demodulation of RF signals, one of the fallowing three down converters must be plugged into the 1450-2 mainframe. Order both Option 02 and Option 12.
TDC Fixed Channel Down Converter -- ( StipUilate channel
number when ordering )
$3,550
TDC-1 -- Tunable Down Converter VHF Band $7,660
TDC-2 -- Tunable Down Converter UHF Band
$7,660
Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 12 -- System BiG/I countries
NC
ORDERING INFORMATION, SYSTEM I
1450-3 Television Demodulator ( Order Op-
tion 02)
$ 13,145
Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 10 -- Wide Bandwidth Audio 20 Hz to 5510-1z 0 4 dB +$165
For demodulation of RF signals, one of the following three down converters must be plugged into the 1450-3 mainframe. Order both Option 02 and Option 12.
TDC Fixed Channel Down Converter -- ( Stiplulate channel
number when ordering.)
$3.550
TDC-1 -- Tunable Down Converter VHF Band ..... $7,660
TDC-2 -- Tunable Down Converter UHF Band
$ 7,660
Option 02 -- 38.9 MHz Vision IF
NC
Option 12 -- System BiGil countries
NC
VRF-140
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TELEMET
DIVISION OF GEOTEL, INC 185 Dixon Avenue Amityville, L.I., New York 11701 (516) 842-2300 TVVX 510-227-9850
MODEL 3710 Broadcast Demodulator
Broadcast Demodulator Model 3710 is the most comprehensive, precision testing instrument available today for checking video quality of the television broadcast signal; and it has its own built-in tester for self checking calibration.
3710-A1 3710-A2
3710-A3 3710-M
Broadcast Demodulator -- VHF -- 5my sensitivity Broadcast Demodulator -- UHF -- 5my sensitivity
Broadcast Demodulator -- VHF -- 1my sensitivity Broadcast Demodulator -- UHF -- 1rny sensitivity
$ 9,300.00 9 700.00
9 700.00 10,000.00
MODEL 4500 Demodulator
Demodulator 4500 accepts the broadcast signal and converts it to
base band without distorting the original picture quality. It houses a plug-in VHF front end module that is selected and ordered separately
for the particular VHF channel required. This VHF module is Telemet type D-xx-A1, where xx denotes the VHF channel number ( e.g. D- 02- Al for Channel 21. It contains acrystal- controlled oscillator and FET mixer. Also a 2- stage a.g.c. controlled VHF amplifier, using silicon insulated- gate field effect transistors.
4600-B1
D-xx-Al D-xx-Al D-xx-Al D-xx-Al
VHF Demodulator ( Off- air)
VHF Plug-in ( Channels 2-13) Sub- Band Plug-in ( Channels T7-7111 Mid- Band Plug-in IChannels A-1) Super- Band Plug-in ( Channels J- V)
$ 2,110.00
675.00 865.00 865.00 865.00
MODEL 4501 Broadcast Demodulator
Broadcast Demodulator 4501 is for use in the measurement of the characteristics of broadcast television signals, including chrominance -luminance relative gain and delay, K rating, burst amplitude and modulation depth, differential phase and gain, intercarrier frequency stability ( using an external counter) and other distortions.
4501-A1 4501-A2 4501-A3
4501-A4
VHF Precision Demodulator -- 5my sensitivity UHF Precision Demodulator -- 5my sensitivity VHF Precision Demodulator ( Channel 2-13) with low
input sensitivity of 1my UHF Precision Demodulator, input sensitivity of 1my
46,000.00 6 275.00 6275.00 6 525.00
MODEL 4503 Demodulator Tester
Demodulator Tester 4503 provides afast sure method of determining the on- going frequency response of a broadcast TV demodulator.
4503-A1 VHF Precision Demodulator Tester 4503-A2 UHF Precision Demodulator Tester
4800.00 925.00
MODEL 4504 Synchronous Detector
Synchronous Detector Model 4504 is designed to measure transmitter parameters, especially the incidental phase modulation of the visual carrier. The Model 4504 can be used with the Telemet broad-
cast test demodulator Model 4501 and other suitable test demodulators.
4604-A1 Synchronous Detector
$1,885.00
VIDEO BROADCAST TEST EQUIPMENT
II 9.'11 1
¿'i°
r-moi" -· el" · least
[. · ·
4111111111111111111111111111111111116,,
Option:
4500432
Demodulator supplied at -- 48 VDC UHF Demodulator ( Off-air, fixed, tuned, single channel)
$225.00 2 960.00
the..
·
van.
u,e , f,,f 1100tt ¿SO) kierret
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-141
TEXSCAN CORPORATION
2446 N. Shadeland Indianapolis, IN 46219 (317) 357-8781
CHARACTER GENERATOR
SPECTFtAGEN III ( SG Ill)
SpectraGen ill is alow-cost character generator with afull spectrum of features and programming flexibility. Texscan MSI invites you to compare the SpectraGen Ill with any other single channel, low-cost unit available.
Only the SpectraGen Ill can provide you with 150 pages of basic RAM expandable to 812 pages. Only the SpectraGen Ill gives you 32 keyboard-selectable colors for colored upper and lower case characters, backgrounds and ecging. Only the Spect'aGen Ill has 32 graphic symbols for display enhancements. Only the SpectraGen Ill can provide full, remote, off-line editing capabilty when used in conjunction with a Flexicaster. On y the SpectraGen Ill has six independently programmable display regions, a 16 x 32 character matrix and areal time clock with events switching. The SpectraGen Ill accepts up to four serial inputs, such as: weather, AP, UPI, Reuters, NOAA and keyboard. Stockwriters and Dow Jones optional.
The SpectraGen Ill is entirely self-contained in aconvenient keyboard housing that fits easily on adesk or shelf top. All keyboard functions are clearly labeled. A single keystroke addresses most functions, making the SpectraGen Ill one of the most convenient character gene-ators to operate.
In the past, low-cost character generators have been stripped- down versions of other models; not the SpectraGen Ill. This unit offers all the software features of aTexscan NISI Fexicaster. The only important thing we've dropped is the price.
FEATURES · Single channel output · 150 to 650 page RAM memory capacity · 16 x32 character matrix · 32 keyboard selectable character color/ background color combinations · Line or page control of character colors and backgrounc colors · Four character heights: single, doubie, triple, and quad · Two character widths: single and double ·32 keyboard graphic symbols · Graphic line separators · Character edgirg · Upper and lower case standard Helvetica font · Six independent aisplay regions per 21- line screen display · Auto centering ·24 hour battery memory protection · Four page display modes: Bang, Splash, Crawl and Page- print · Three page display speeds: Slow, Medium and Fast · Three crawl speeds, plus pause · Real Time Clock control or display · Programmable page display attributes · Four serial I/O ports for Weather, AP, UPI, Reuters, NOAA and Keyboard · Editing features · Line and page shift up, down, left and right e Cursor home, right, left, up and down · Character repeat · Erase to end of line/end of page · Character insert/character delete · Line insert/line delete · Word wrap line justification · Word or line flash · Capable of animation · Each page offers weekly calendar event · 68 nanoseconds dot clock with character cellular matrix of 16 x32 · Two line levels ,nand four out for externals.
OPTPONAL Interactive public access
SPECIFICATIONS
Data Inputs Four serial data inputs configured as baudot or ASCII current loop, RS- 232, or TTL at data rates from 55 to 6900 baud. Video Outputs Two video outputs per one channel system. Level is 1.0 v. P- Pnominal at 75 ohms impedance. Standard is RS- 170 A 525- line NTSC color video signal.
Memory Capacity Up to 242K bytes dynamic RAM usable memory storage, organized in 8- bit bytes, and configured by user into pages of 1to 21 lines in depth.
Interfaces Accomodated Keyboard, local weather sensors, NOAA, AP and UPI. Dimensions 15"D x5-1/4"H x20"W
Power Requirements 70 Watts
Housing Aluminum, self-contained housing with built-in keyboard. Characters Resident font with 92 ASCII, upper and lower case characters plus 32 special graphic characters in a high- resolution 16 x32 pixel matrix. Heights are 20, 40, 60 and 80 scan lines. Widths show 16 or 32 characters per line. Maximum screen display is 21 lines of 32 characters. Helvetica font is standard. Character Colors are pre-programmed into 32 keyboard selectable character color/background color combinations on a line or page basis.
Display Attributes All page display attributes are programmable by the page. Page display times are from 1/2 to 99 seconds, display speeds are slow, medium or fast plus pausing crawl with up to six independent display regions per 21 line screen display. Real Time Clock control or display function.
Editing/Cursor Functions Line and page shift, up and down, right and left. Skip page, Erase page or line. Erase to end of line or page. Character insert or delete. Word or line flash. Line insert or delete. Character repeat. Cursor home, and Word wrap.
Memory Protection A Battery pack preserves system memory up to 24 hours in case of system failure.
COLOR CHARACTERS
Texscan MSI now offers in their full product line, 32 combinations of character, background and edging colors.
All colors are keyboard selectable, by the press of one key, on aline by line or full page basis. These colors apply to alphanumerics as well as graphic characters.
Texscan MSI selected color combinations on the basis of aesthetics, making text easy and pleasing to read. Colors range from a subdued black on grey, for newspaper applications, to bright color combinations for eye-catching display advertisements.
Other sets of color combinations are available. Consult the factory for details.
SG III -- Character Generator SG III -- GLT -- Genlock Titter SG IV -- High Resolution SG III GLT with 32 nanoseconds --
32 x64 matrix
VRF-142
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEXSCAN CORPORATION
2446 N. Shadeland Indianapolis, IN 46219 (317) 357-8781
MODEL VSM-1D SPECTRUM ANALYZER
·4-450 MHz Frequency Range · Dynamic Range of 40 dB on Screen ·Portable Operation · Typical + /- 1 MHz Dial Accuracy · 8 MHz Fixed Calibrated Dispersion More than 13 years of proven reliability and performance back the Texscan VSM-1D ( 75 ohm) portable spectrum analyzer. This low cost instrument provides accurate coverage of the frequency range from 4to 450 MHz, with up to 40 dB on-screen amplitude displayed to an accuracy of + /- 1.5 dB. Truly portable, and weighing only 26 lbs. ( including battery), this rugged, fie d- ready package allows up to 2-1/2 hours of continuous operation with an internal rechargeable battery. The VSM-1D, in addition to battery or external DC power, also provides for direct conversion of 117 VAC power by utilizing an external charger/converter. Both the CRT and the front panel of this unit is securely protected ( when not in use) by an integral latching cover. Three pre-set frequency bands eliminate time-consuming operator adjustments in the VSM-1D by automatically setting center frequency and dispersion controls. A 40 dB on-screen display range and asensitivity which exceeds- 40 dBmV enables easy detection of interfering signals, and adial accuracy of + /- 1MHz ( typical) further enhances accurate signal measurements.
MODEL 9900D SWEEP SYSTEM
°Checks for illegal connections to asystem · + /-0.25 dB flatness -- measurement by comparison · Measure return loss, gain or insertion loss -- switch selectable · Variable tilt to simplify testing
TEST EQUIPMENT
·Sweep cable to 450 MHz and 32 dB · Sweep test in the yard or on the pole -- only 23 lbs. and battery operated · Scope, attenuators, sweep generator, and bridge -- all in one instrument · Variable bridge available. Sweep test cable, amplifiers, passives all with asingle instrument -- now to 450 MHz -- and it's portable. The 9900 Series of sweep test sytems has been used for testing CATV cable for more than 12 years. This is the newest member of the club. Now the 9900 Series is portable. The same basic measurement capability that you are used to from the 9900, 9900A, and 9900B is provided by the new 9900D but at one-third the weight and size-- yet battery operated to use in the yard, at the pole, or in the system. The instrument incorporates a 4 to 450 MHz sweep generator, oscilloscope, return loss bridge, attenuators, frequency markers, and dual trace comparator to provide comparison sweep testing with a single instrument. Test your amplifiers and passives on the bench; test your cable on the reel in the yard, or take the 9900D up in a bucket to test the cable system on the pole. You can even use it to sweep the drop cable of asubscriber to determine if there are illegal connections. The sweep output can even be tilted to compensate for linear slope loss in the test piece and achieve aflat response on the oscilloscope.
MODEL VSM -5D SPECTRUM ANALYZER
·4-450 MHz Frequency Range · Built- In Markers ( 1-10-50 MHz) ·Portable Operation · Selectable Resolution · Optional Digital Storage The VSM-5D spectrum analyzer covers the frequency range from 4 to 450 MHz and provides up to 70 dB of accurate, on-screen amplitude measurement. Truly portable, the VSM-5D allows achoice of AC, external DC, or internal rechargeable battery operation. The VSM-5D's logical control panel layout with three presettable frequency bands facilitates quick learning of all the specialized functions and speeds testing procedures. An integral latching cover is designed to securely protect both the CRT and the controls of the VSM-5D while the unit is not in use. Signal dispersions can be varied from below 3kHz per division to as much as 45 MHz per division, allowing the operator to closely examine narrow band signals and to see the complete 4to 450 MHz spectrum visually on the CRT. 60 dB dynamic display ranges make these units ideally suited for specification testing and alignment in a wide range of applications in both the laboratory and the field. A built-in, 1, 10, and 50 MHz harmonic marker combination enables the operator to identify displayed signal frequencies, and to set center frequency and scan width. An advanced oscillator design and a500 Hz crystal IF filter enhance the VSM-5D's resolution, allowing the measurement of signals separated by only 20 kHz in frequency and 60 dB in amplitude.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-143
TEXSCAN CORPORATION
2446 N. Shadeland Indianapolis, IN 46219 (317) 357-8781
TEST EQUIPMENT
MODEL VSM-2D SPECTRUM ANALYZER
·4-1000 MHz Frequency Range · Dynamic Range of 70 dB on Screen · Built- In Markers ( 1-10-50 MHz) · Portable Operation · AM /FM Audio Recovery · Optional Digital Storage The VSM-2D spectrum analyzer covers the frequency range of 4 MHz to 1 GHz and provides 120 dB of accurate amplitude measurement. A portable spectrum analyzer, the VSM-2D allows a choice of AC, external DC, or internal rechargeable battery operation. A color- keyed front panel and alogical control layout simplify the selection of settings, and often monitored frequency bands can be preset by screwdriver controls which are easily accessible on the front panel. An integral latching cover is designed to protect both the CRT and the controls of the VSM-2D while the unit is not in use. Signal dispersions of this instrument can be varied from less than 2 kHz per division to as much as 100 MHz per division, allowing the operator to closely examine narrow band signals and to scan the complete 1,000 MHz spectrum visually on the CRT. Also provided is the ability to make system hum measurements with a resolution of 2% per division. DC blocking of the input protects the input attenuator and mixer against inadvertent application of system powering voltages. Phase locking in the VSM-2D is provided by a stable internal reference ( below 200 kHz per division dispersion) which stabilizes the first local oscillator, yielding low residual FM performance during the investigation of narrow band dispersions. A 70 dB dynamic display range makes the VSM-2D ideally suited for specification testing and alignment in awide range of applications. A built-in 1, 10, 50 MHz harmonic marker combination enables the operator to identify displayed signal frequencies and provides center frequency and scan width settings of unparalleled accuracy. An audio recovery system, including AM / NBFM detectors and audio amplifiers with speaker, allows the user to audibly monitor the displayed carrier signal modulation. An advanced oscillator design and a 500 Hz crystal IF filter enhance the resolution, allowing the measurement of signals separated by only 20 kHz in frequency and 60 dB in amplitude.
MODEL MDC-3MICROWAVE CONVERTER
·2.1 GHz, 3.7 GHz and 12.7 GHz conversion in one converter ·Spectrum analysis at microwave for less than $ 10,000.00 · Microwave sweep generator for less than $ 6,000.00 · Optional filter kit to simplify measurements.
The MDC-3 provides microwave spectrum analysis at CARS band, MDS, and TVRO frequencies without amicrowave spectrum analyzer. Not only is spectrum analysis possible, in conjunction with the VSM-5B, but the MDC-3 also converts low- frequency sweepers to microwave. Faulty pointing of CARS antennas are easily corrected while monitoring the output with the MDC-3 and a VSM-5B. Deviation adjustment of CARS transmitters is easily and precisely accomplished by observing the sideband distribution on aspectrum analyzer. CARS or TVRO systems can be easily checked for spurious or interfering signals. The MDC-3 is asmall and lightweight unit which can be operated in the field with Texscan's VSM-1A, VSM-2A, or VSM-5B portable spectrum analyzers. The MDC-3 can be powered directly from these instruments, operating from their internal batteries with the retractable front panel power cord of the MDC-3. The optional filter kit adds increased accuracy and usefulness to the MDC-3. This filter kit is necessary to use the converter for microwave sweep generator operation. The unit has acalibrated insertion loss so that absolute signal strength measurements can be made and the local oscillator for each of the three bands can be individually adjusted. Other frequency bands are available on an optional basis.
MODEL 7272 SIGNAL LEVEL METER
·400 MHz coverage in 6bands · Patented peak detector eliminating errors due to modulation · Rugged construction designed for field use · Advanced design rotary attenuator · Optional UHF plug-in converter · Voltmeter and ohmmeter capability built in. Model 7272 Signal Level Meter-- featuring 5to 405 MHz coverage without plug-ins, + 1.0 dB accuracy, new easy reading dial, manual gain control, video output, built-in speaker and volt/ohmmeter, and patented peak detector. With the optional UHF plug-in converter, the 7272 provides the technician with the most complete and versatile Signal Level Meter in the industry. Besides versatility, accuracy and convenience, the ruggedness of the 7272 is still there. And the 7272 offers the widest level measurement range available. The incorporation of preselection filters for each band reduces the number of carriers present at the first mixer, thereby eliminating the effect of internally generated disorders on measurement accuracy. This feature plus the superior rejection characteristics of the IF are unavailable with other manufacturer's meters. The 7272's built-in volt/ohmmeter eliminates the need to carry a second VOM up the pole or in the bucket truck. The VOM is an integral part of the 7272 with the leads stored in the non- detachable lid, ready when you need them.
VRF-144
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEXSCAN CORPORATION
2446 N. Shadeland Indianapolis, IN 46219 (317) 357-8781
TEST EQUIPMENT
9557 HEADEND UNIT
9558 PORTABLE UNIT
MODEL 9552 T/R SWEEP SYSTEM
· Low Cost · Easy Operation · Rack Mount Headend Transmitter ·Selectable Sweep Widths and Rep Rates · Digital Storage · Flat or Tilted Sweep Output · Portable, Battery Powered Receiver · Calibrated Display, 1or 2dB/Div.
The 9552T Transmitter employs a very fast sweep rate so that the interfering signal is only present in any video channel's bandwidth for less time than the length of one horizontal line. The sweep signal is 20 to 25dB higher in amplitude than the picture carriers resulting in a swept output display uncluttered by video carriers riding on the trace. The system will interface with most two-way radios for a "sweepwhen-triggered" operation. The DBG-1 option is used to eliminate the possibility of the sweep transmitter affecting wideband fast acting AGC circuits on long cascades.
The 9552R Receiver is synchronized to the transmitter with a time base triggered by the leading edge of the sweep signal. A sample of the sweep signal is used to generate avariable marker which appears as two pips 6MHz apart riding on the swept display. This marker presentation provides a convenient reference for standard TV channel width. The receiver is rugged, portable, and battery operated. Digital storage provides continuous updated display.
MODELS 9557/9558 TWO-WAY TEST SET
· Battery operation of remote receiver · Simplified two-way system alignment · Field proven reliability.
SIMPLICITY IN TWO-WAY SYSTEM ALIGNMENT The Texscan 9557/9558 two-way test set permits alignment of the return path amplifier system with a single stop at the amplifier location. It is no longer necessary to shuttle a sweep or signal generator to various points at the extremities of the distribution system. The reverse alignment system greatly simplifies this complex task.
The reverse path alignment system consists of aheadend unit and a battery- operated remote unit which functions in conjunction with a field strength meter or spectrum analyzer.
The system functions by sending a pilot signal in the forward direction ( VHF). This signal is nulled by the headend when it receives the Sub band signals at the proper levels. The Sub band signals are inserted in the return patch by the remote unit. The null is detected by the FSM or spectrum analyzer.
MODEL VS-60CZ SWEEP SIGNAL GENERATOR
· 1-10-50MHz Harmonic Markers Standard · Optional Single Frequency Markers · 1to 1,000MHz Frequency Coverage · + /-0.25dB Flatness · 1and 10dB Step Precision Attenuator Output Control
In the 1to 1000MHz range, there is simply no better instrument on the market for such a wide variety of sweep applications than the VS-60CZ. This dependable worry-free " workhorse" has proven itself as an indispensible tool. A field- proven performer, the Texscan VS-60CZ packs the capabilities of a high stability, narrow band sweeper, and the flexibility of awide band sweeper into one versatile instrument. The VS-60CZ's 0.05 to 60Hz sweep rate range is compatible for testing almost any bandwidth. An internal automatic level control maintains the RF output amplitude at 0.25dB over the entire frequency range. Internal pushbutton activated harmonic and single frequency ( optional) markers are available, and provisions for combining external RF signals for use as markers are also included.
MODELS FDM 3, 4, 5 RF LEAKAGE MONITORING SYSTEM ( Not Shown)
·The FDM 3, 4monitors discrete frequencies-- minimizes erroneous results · Crystal controlled stability · Narrow ( 20 kHz) bandwidth provides low level reception · Speaker and meter outputs · Built-in squelch -- prevents triggering on noise · Go/No Go indicator at FCC leakage level -- using optional antenna · Optional customer specified test frequencies · Vehicle mount makes routine patrolling easy.
The leakage monitoring system can detect radiation leakage when it's still at a level too low to interfere with other communication systems.
Basically, the System is a crystal controlled, FM, transmit- receive system designed for rapid and convenient location of signal leakage in a cable system. The portable, battery operated receiver will activate visible and audible alarms if it receives leakage signals greater than the adjustable sensitivity threshold. The optional vehicle mounting bracket and whip antenna permit leakage monitoring during routine truck runs.
The FDM 3, 4, 5 leakage monitoring system provides complete radiation protection. Monitoring discrete frequency bands for leakage results in testing with alow probability error. Narrow receiver bandwidth and speaker output produces a leakage monitor system with high probability of detection and low false alarm rate. The FDM-5 headend unit injects asignal at 107.9 MHz at the headend. The FDM-2 receiver, vehicle mounted or hand held, is transported throughout the plant cable runs searching for leakage. If leakage is found, the FDM 3, 4, 5 can be used to make calibrated measurements to determine the severity of the leak.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-145
TEXSCAN CORPORATION
2446 N. Shadeland Indianapolis, IN 46219 (317) 357-8781
TEST EQUIPMENT
MODEL TFC-7A TUNED FREQUENCY COUNTER
·Designed specifically for proof of performance testing · 0 dBmV sensitivity -- 5 to 405 MHz coverage · Measures selected channel with adjacent channel 10 dB larger · Preselection/stripper--removes video modulation prior to counting · Simple operation-- lightweight.
Measures video carrier frequency and audio-video carrier spacing accurately in the presence of modulation.
Texscan's highly accurate Model TFC-7A Tuned Frequency Counter uses abroadband preselector/stripper to remove modulation and an accurate counter for Proof-of- Performance measurements. The TFC7A provides precise count accuracies in fully loaded 52 channel systems-- even with adjacent channels 10 dB greater than the desired. The TFC-7A gives precision frequency measurements at any test point in the system-- with measurements down to 0dBmV.
For operator convenience, intercarrier spacing is measured at the push of a button, eliminating the requirements for two separate carrier readings and subtraction of the results. A digital LED read-out provides simplified frequency tuning. Input attenuators control signal input to the counter, maintaining optimum operation from high-level head-end to low-level output test points.
Additional features of the TFC-7A include a special RF output capability of + 40 dBmV which may be used as acounted variable marker for accurate adjustment of processor bandpass limits, adjacent channel sound and video traps, and other alignments where precise frequency measurement is required. Also, adetected video output of 4MHz bandwidth, allows close examination of sync pulses and other transmitted information. Providing added versatility, the TFC-7A will also function as a broadband, high-level frequency counter for signals above + 20 dBmV. This feature lends itself to applications with tracking sweep generators and other single frequency unmodulated frequency counter applications.
The Texscan DU- 127 X-Y, wide screen oscilloscope combines low cost and high performance and is an excellent choice for laboratory and repair test systems. The DU- 127 features alarge 12 inch diagonal CRT with abright, stable, focused trace for ease of viewing. It has high sensitivity, high resolution, good writing speed, and high output light level. The DU- 127 is compatible with any sweep generator since it accommodates pulse, birdy or intensity markers. The combination of 1 mV/ DIV sensitivity and extremely low drift make this instrument a workhorse.
RCB-3/75
er
MODEL RCB-3/75 REFLECTION COEFFICIENT BRIDGES
·Tests return loss of cable, amplifiers, passives and taps ·Accurate to 1GHz The Texscan reflection coefficient bridge is a broadband RF comparator which, when used in conjunction with asweep generator and oscilloscope, provides an accurate display of reflection or VSWR versus frequency. Component and/or device mismatch is easily and accurately determined. The RCB-3/75 is an ideal device for laboratory testing of amplifiers, filters, taps, passives, attenuators and other coaxial components. The bridge provides a DC output which is proportional to the unknown element's reflection coefficient.
MODEL 9644A VARIABLE BRIDGES
·Measures Structural Return Loss Independent of Average Cable Impedance · Accurate to 450 MHz. The 9644A Variable Bridge is recommended for Structural Return Loss testing of 75 ohm coaxial cable. It is specifically designed for use with Texscan's Model 9900D Sweep System, but may also be used in conjunction with a separate sweep generator, attenuator set, and display scope. The built-in reference termination has adjustable resistance and reactance, which allows Structural Return Loss to be measured independently of average cable impedance.
DU- 127
MODEL DU -127 X-Y OSCILLOSCOPE
·Large 12 inch diagonal CRT-- for reduced eye fatigue · 25 kHz horizontal and vertical bandwidth -- for excellent marker presentation whether they're vertical or tilted · Excellent sensitivity-- 1mV/division both horizontally and vertically.
The DU- 127 combines high performance, low cost and wide bandwidth in awide screen display ideal for laboratory sweep testing.
Bridge Kits KRCB-3 ( 50 ohms) ( VS-60C) KRCB-3/75 ( 75 ohms) ( VS-60CZI
Each bridge can be purchased separately or as a kit with calibrated mismatches included. A kit consists of a bridge and five calibrated MF -75 mismatches, representing VSWR values of 1.0:1 ( 2 each), 1.2:1, 1.5:1, and 2.0:1.
VRF-146
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEXSCAN CORPORATION
2446 N. Shadeland Indianapolis, IN 46219 (317) 357-8781
TEST EQUIPMENT
UM ,
41-
new,
BROADBAND AMPLIFIER
VSX-92S ·7dB Noise Figure · 26dB Gain · ± 1.0dB ( 40-890MHz) VSX-92S AMPLIFIER The VSX-92S wideband RF amplifier is designed to amplify lowlevel signals. This portable, lightweight, solid-state amplifier extends the range of signal level meters, spectrum analyzers and similar test equipment. The battery-operated VSX-92S incorporates two hybrid broadband amplifiers, aflatness-compensation network, and avoltage regulator. TBC-12 BATTERY CHARGER The TBC-12 Battery Charger is designed to charge the battery system used in the VSX-92S. This instrument charges the battery in approximately 12 hours. For optimum battery cycle life, the charger should be disconnected within 14 hours.
PRECISION ROTARY ATTENUATORS
·Housed in Lightweight Irridited Aluminum · Attenuation from 9to 70dB · Low VSWR · Wideband Accuracy
ROTARY ATTENUATORS The Rotary Attenuator Models RA- 70F, RA- 71F, RA- 73F, RA-734F, RA-74F are laboratory-type precision instruments for bench use or inclusion in test equipment. Model RA- 70F provides 0 to 10dB of attenuation in 1dB steps from DC to 1000MHz. Model RA-71F provides 0to 70dB of attenuation in 10dB steps from DC to 1000MHz. Model RA-73F provides 0to 1dB of attenuation in 0.1dB steps from DC to 500MHz. Model RA-734F provides 0to 11dB of attenuation in 0.1dB steps from 0to 500MHz. Model RA-74F provides 0to 50dB in 1dB steps with accuracies from DC to 1000MHz.
REFERENCE DIPOLE ANTENNA
AFS-1
·Replaceable Dipole Elements · Fiberglass Mast · Calibrated Down- lead
AFS-1 ANTENNA The AFS-1 is acalibrated, adjustable half-wave dipole specifically designed for making required FCC radiation tests from 50 to 400MHz. This unit is passive, requiring no batteries, and it is provided with a mast to make measurements 20 feet above the ground.
A calibration chart for setting antenna length for the resonance at any carrier frequency in the VHF band is supplied with the antenna. The antenna can be used with asignal level meter and preamplifier to make the FCC required radiation test on CATV systems. The AFS-1 is provided with calibration data and test information, allowing accurate data to be recorded when used with aVSX-92S amplifier and a spectrum analyzer, or signal level meter.
SWITCHABLE AND BENCH MOUNT ATTENUATORS
SA SERIES/BMA SERIES ·Finger Tip Controlled Rocker Switches · Selectable Attenuation ·Can Be Bench or Panel Mounted · 500MHz Coverage · Single Unit Operation · Accurate Reduction of High Level Signals · Accuracy up to 1000MHz.
MODEL SA-70F and SA-78F The SA Series Switchable Attenuators provide selectable attenuation by finger tip control of nine rocker type switches. This 75 ohm attenuator is equipped with Type Fconnectors and may be placed on the bench or panel mounted. Provides coverage up to 500MHz.
MODEL BMA- 577 and BMA 567 A " packaged attenuator", the BMA series, may be used in measurement- by-comparison test applications and for reduction of high-level signals from sweep generators to oscilloscopes and spectrum analyzers.
The advantages of the " packaged attenuator" concept are convenience of operation ( single unit versus apair of non-attached attenuators) and a neater test bench-- plus accurate reduction of highlevel signals for measurement- by-comparison tests.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-147
TEXSCAN CORPORATION
2446 N. Shadeland Indianapolis, IN 46219 (317) 357-8781
TEST EQUIPMENT
TUNABLE BANDPASS FILTERS
VF SERIES ·Octave tuning bandwidth ·3% or 5% bandwidth available ·3or 5section available ·Low insertion loss
For measurement of low level signals in the presence of high level signals-- like triple beat measurements.
No cross mod or triple beat measurement should be made without filtering the input to your spectrum analyzer of field strength meter. This is necessary to reduce the number of carriers present at the analyzer input. If the overloading effect of these signals is not removed, it is not possible to make the measurement with reliability or accuracy. Texscan's line of VF tunable filters are specifically designed for this application. In fact, any time you are looking for a low level signal in the presence of high level signals, a filter is necessary; for example, radiation surveys, signal surveys, carrier to noise measurements, co- channel, etc. Various models in the series cover a frequency range from 48MHz to 400MHz with each model covering more than an octave. These units are available with either a three or five section response and have a3dB bandwidth of 5% or 3% with low insertion loss values from 0.2dB through 1.5dB. VSWR is less than 1.5:1.
FIXED ATTENUATOR PADS ·Accurate to 1200MHz ·Calibration data supplied standard ·Lab attenuators ·Color coded
FP -75
The FP-75 Fixed Attenuator Pad is available in a wide range of attenuation values and provides accurate attenuation to 1200MHz. Each of the pads is color coded for easy identification of the value of attenuation and calibration points are clearly marked on the body of the pads. The FP-75 is provided with calibration points at 30M Hz and at 1000MHz.
MINIMUM LOSS PADS ·Converts system impedance level simply and accurately ·Performance through 1000MHz
ZM SERIES
Most signal and sweep generators have anominal source impedance of 50 or 75 ohms. However, these impedance levels can be conveniently changed to some other impedance for specific applications using ZM series pads. Providing good performance through 1000MHz, these pads provide asimple and accurate means of converting system impedance levels. Texscan's minimum loss, coaxial pads are resistive " L" pads, which provide the minimum loss possible for resistive matching between impedance levels. When ordering, be sure to specify input impedance, connector type and sex, and output impedance, connector type, and sex. Model ZM-57F ( Male F, 75 ohms; Female BNC, 50 Ohms) or ZM-57M (Female F, 75 ohms; Male BNC, 50 Ohms).
DETECTORS ·Accurate to 1000MHz ·Efficient operation
The CD-75F in- line detector is designed for efficient operation in the 200kHz to 1GHz range, which provides a halfwave output with positive or negative polarity as specified by the customer. The standard unit Model DC-75F is equipped with an F-type input connector and an F- type output connector.
LOGARITHMIC AMPLIFIER LN -70 ·70dB Dynamic range with ± 0.5dB accuracy ·A calibrated digital readout with ± 0.1dB resolution is provided ·Selectable noise filtering for accurate measurement at low signal
levels ·Selectable sensitivity of 10, 5, 2, 1, and 0.5dB per volt are provided ·Tracking adjustments to calibrate to various detectors
The LN -70 logarithmic amplifier will display a full 70dB range for inputs of + 20dBm. The frequency range of the device is that of the RF detector. The DC offset control allows the generation of a reference line on the scope display which indicates the amount of gain or loss. The digital readout has an ± 80dB range and resolution
of -±0.1dB.
CD-75F DC BLOCKS ·Accurate to 1000MHz ·Less than 0.1dB insertion loss at 300MHz
BLOCKING NETWORK The DB-75 Blocking Network passes RF signals in the 5 MHz to 1000MHz range, and blocks DC and 60 Hz voltages. The blocking network can be used in any application where high- frequency signal components must be separated from 60 Hz voltage. Insertion loss is less than 0.1dB at 300 MHz. Available with type F, BNC, or N connectors.
VRF-148
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TEXSCAN CORPORATION
2446 N. Shadeland Indianapolis, IN 46219 (317) 357-8781
XRPR CABLE POWER UNITS Features
Turn On Time Delay -- Delays power turn on to the cable to minimize transients.
AC Input Circuit Breaker -- Metal oxide varistor and gas filled surge protectors plus low pass filters are standard.
Optional Transient Clipper and Thyrite Arrestor -- For severe transient conditions and lightning protection.
30 and 60 V Units Available -- Dual mounted units also available.
Painted Housing and Louvered Cabinet -- With locking capability.
Power Couplers and Splitters -- Available as internally mounted options.
DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
The Theta-Com XRPR AC power sources continue to be the workhorses of the CATV industry. Ruggedness, reliability and ease of maintenance characterize these supplies. They are available in two basic versions; a60 volt 14 ampere unit and aswitchable 30 volt/60 volt unit. Each can be purchased as a single unit or in a dual mounted configuration.
Providing 2% regulation, standard units are supplied with a self- healing, non- polarized gas filled surge protector, metal oxide varistor, low pass output filter, and turn on time delay. In addition to the standard surge protectors, optional protection is available. A transient clipper can be incorporated in the AC output to prevent power supply transients from entering the cable system. This option is recommended in locations which suffer from severe power transients. And for lightning protection, athyrite arrestor is also available. Burn- In is not required due to a lack of 'infantile failures'.
These AC supplies are designed to be compatible with the Theta- Corn T series and Phoenician II distribution system but are equally at home providing power for any distribution equipment.
Specifications XRPR
Specification/Model
XRPR 60/14
XRPR 30/60
XRPR 30/60 E
(2)
Voltage Input ( Nominal)
115 VRMS/60 Hz
115 VRMS/60 Hz
220 VRMS/50 Hz
Current- Input at 115V + 14A (4)
8Amps
4Amps
5Amps
Voltage Output
60 VRMS
30 or 60 VRMS
60 VRMS
Current- Output
14 Amps
14 or 7Amps
10 or 5Amps
Regulation- Line %
-± 2
± 2
± 2
-Load %
± 2
± 2
± 2
Turn On Time Delay ( Sec)
6 -4- 3
6 ± 3
6 ±3
(1)
Surge Protector
145 Volt
145 Volt
145 Volt
Dimensions In. ( Cm)
18 x11 x7 ( 46 x28 x18)
Weight Lbs. ( Kg)
49 (22.3)
39 ( 17.7)
1 39 ( 17.7)
NOTES 1. An adjustable ( 1to 10 seconds) time delay relay kit is available to
retrofit supplies in the field. 2. Dual units are available ( 24 x 12 x8-1/2") ( 61 x31 x22cm) in all
types but cannot be supplied with optional couplers or splitters. 3. The transient clipper cannot be supplied with the optional coup-
lers. 4. Input currents vary with line voltage and load current. Numbers
above are maximums, consult factory for typical numbers for
various operating conditions.
OPTIONS 1. Power Coupler-- A power coupler to couple AC power to the
CATV system is available for any single mounted supply ( 3). 2. Splitter--A splitter to feed power into two inputs is available for
any single mounted supply. 3. Transient Clipper-- A 91 volt transient clipper is available ( 3).
4. Thyrite Arrestor-- A thyrite lightning arrestor is available. 5. Transient Clipper Tester-- This feature can be purchased with the
transient clipper to allow testing of the clipper while mounted in
the supply. Only available for the 60/14 supply.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-149
TIMES FIBER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
RF CABLE PRODUCTS DIVISION
P.O. Box 384 358 Hall Avenue Wallingford, CT 06492 (203) 265-8400 TVVX 710-476-0763
CABLE
UNJACKETED TRUNK AND FEEDER CABLE T4'
Unjacketed T4 cable is recommended for aerial installations in noncorrosive environments.
·A center conductor coating that is moisture blocking yet strips clean.
·A hard foam dielectric which provides firm support for the fullwall seamless aluminum outer conductor, achieves excellent core-toouter conductor adhesion, and has superior handling characteristics.
Unjacketed T4 cable is available with acopper- clad or solid copper center conductor. A hard foamed polyethylene dielectric, bonded to the center conductor with amoisture blocking adhesive, supports the fullwall seamless aluminum outer conductor.
DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS ·Center conductor -- Electrical grade 10% nominal ( by volume)
copper- clad aluminum ( ASTM B-556 Class 10A). ·Conductor coating -- Proprietary moisture blocking polymer ad-
hesive. ·Dielectric -- Foamed polyethylene ( Federal Specification LP-390
and ASTM D-1248 prior to foaming). ·Outer conductor -- Seamless fullwall high purity electrical grade
aluminum tube, alloy 1060 ( ASTM B-221).
Cable Type
Copper- Clad Aluminum Center Conductor
Unjacketed Unjacketed, color coded
PART NUMBERS Cable Size
0.625
0.875
21171 21170
21191 21190
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS Cable Size
Cable Type
0.625
0.875
Dimensions Conductor Insulation Outer Conductor
Nominal Weight
(per 1000 ft.) Nominal Weight
(per reel) Nominal Length
(per reel) Maximum Pull Force Minimum Bend Radius
Reel Size ( inches) (Flange xTraverse xHub)
0.136 in. 0.563 in. 0.625 in.
120 lb.
386 lb.
2300 ft. 280 lb. 8.8 in.
42 x18x 18
0.194 in. 0.797 in. 0.875 in.
224 lb.
658 lb.
2350 ft. 475 lb. 12.3 in.
54 x24 x30
JACKETED TRUNK AND FEEDER CABLE T4
Jacketed T4 cable incorporates the same features, construction and materials as unjacketed shown opposite.
Jacketed T4 cable is recommended for aerial installations in urban and coastal environments where corrosion is more likely to occur. This cable will withstand more abrasion and mechanical abuse than an unjacketed cable.
A protective jacket of low density high molecular weight black polyethylene is extruded over the outer conductor.
·Jacket -- Abrasion resistant low density high molecular weight black polyethylene ( Federal Specification LP-390 and ASTM D-1248 jacketing material).
PART NUMBERS
Cable Size
Cable Type
0.625
0.875
Copper- Clad Aluminum Center Conductor
Jacketed Heavy jacket Extra heavy jacket Jacketed, color coded Heavy jacket, color coded Extra heavy jacketed, color coded
21172 21930 21933 21176
21936
21938
21192 21950 21953 21196
21956
21958
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cable Size
Cable Type
0.625
0.875
Dimensions Conductor
Insulation Outer Conductor Jacket Heavy Jacket Extra Heavy Jacket Nominal Weight
(per 1000 ft.)
Jacket Heavy Jacket Extra Heavy Jacket Nominal Weight ( per reel)
Jacket Heavy Jacket Extra Heavy Jacket Nominal Length ( per reel) Maximum Pull Force
Minimum Bend Radius
Reel Size ( inches) (Flange xTraverse xHub) Jacket Heavy Jacket Extra Heavy Jacket
0.136 in. 0.563 in. 0.625 in. 0.725 in. 0.765 in. 0.875 in.
163 lb. 182 lb. 239 lb.
485 lb. 539 lb. 682 lb. 2300 ft. 280 lb. 8.8 in.
42 x18x 18 48 x24 x30 54 x24 x30
0.194 in. 0.797 in. 0.875 in. 0.975 in. 1.015 in. 1.125 in.
283 lb. 308 lb. 382 lb.
797 lb. 924 lb. 1098 lb. 2350 ft. 475 lb. 12.3 in.
54 x24 x30 63 x26 x40 63 x26 x40
NOTE: Standard colored stripes are red, yellow, green, blue, purple, white, and slate. For other color combinations, please contact acustomer service representative or your area salesman.
YRF-150
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TIMES FIBER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
RF CABLE PRODUCTS DIVISION
P.O. Box 384 358 Hall Avenue Wallingford, CT 06492 (203) 265-8400 TVVX 710-476-0763
CABLE
ARMORED TRUNK AND FEEDER CABLE T4
Recommended Applications Armored T4 cable is recommended for direct burial installations where the cable is exposed to increased mechanical abuse and rodent attack.
FEATURES ·A center conductor coating that is moisture blocking yet strips
clean. ·A hard foam dielectric which provides firm support for the fullwall
seamless aluminum outer conductor, achieves excellent core-toouter conductor adhesion, and has superior handling characteristics. ·A flooded jacketed cable with an additional jacket over aflooded steel tape.
Construction Armored T4 cable is available with a copper- clad or solid copper center conductor. A hard foamed polyethylene dielectric, bonded to the center conductor with amoisture blocking adhesive, supports the fullwall seamless aluminum outer conductor. A combination layer of aflooding compound, apolyethylene jacket, a helically wound steel tape, another layer of flooding compound, and apolyethylene jacket form a complete mechanical and corrosion- resistant shield.
Details of Construction and Materials ·Center conductor -- Electrical grade 10% nominal ( by volume)
copper- clad aluminum ( ASTM B-556 Class 10A). ·Conductor coating -- Proprietary moisture blocking polymer ad-
hesive. ·Dielectric -- Foamed polyethylene ( Federal Specification LP-390
and ASTM D-1248 prior to foaming). ·Outer conductor -- Seamless fullwall high purity electrical grade
aluminum tube, alloy 1060 ( ASTM B-221). ·Self- healing flooding compound -- Low molecular weight poly-
isobutylene which cold flows for self healing. ·Jacket -- Abrasion resistant low density high molecular weight
black polyethylene ( Federal Specification LP- 390 and ASTM D-1248 jacketing material). ·Armor -- 0.010 in. thick steel tape SAE/AISI 1010 steel.
PART NUMBERS
Cable Size
Cable Type
0.525
0.875
Jacketed Heavy jacket Extra heavy jacket
Jacketed, color coded Heavy jacket, color coded
21175 21932 21935
21178
21813
21195 21952
--
21198
21815
NOTE: Standard colored stripes are red, yellow, green, blue, purple, white, and slate. For other color combinations, please contact a customer service representative or your area salesman.
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cable Size
Cable Type
0.625
0.875
Dimensions Conductor Insulation Outer Conductor 1st Jacket Armor 2nd Jacket
Heavy Jacket Extra Heavy
Jacket Nominal Weight
(per 1000 ft.) Armored
Heavy Jacket Extra Heavy
Jacket Nominal Weight
(per reel) Armored Heavy Jacket
Extra Heavy Jacket
Nominal Length (per reel) Maximum Pull Force Minimum Bend
Radius
Reel Size ( inches) (Flange xTraverse
xHub) Armored Heavy Jacket Extra Heavy Jacket
0.136in. 0.563 in. 0.625 in. 0.725 in. 0.745 in. 0.845 in. 0.895 in.
1.005 in.
282 lb. 309 lb.
375 lb.
769 lb. 843 lb.
1063 lb.
2300 ft. 280 lb.
11.8 in.
48 x24 x30 54 x24 x30
63 x26 x40
0.194 in. 0.797 in. 0.875 in. 0.975 in. 0.995 in. 1.095 in. 1.145 in.
1.255 in.
440 lb. 476 lb.
560 lb.
1234 lb. 1319 lb.
1591 lb.
2350 ft. 475 lb.
15.3 in.
63 x26 x40 63x 26 x40
66 x36 x42
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-151
TIMES FIBER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
RF CABLE PRODUCTS DIVISION
P.O. Box 384 358 Hall Avenue Wallingford, CT 06492 (203) 265-8400 TVVX 710-476-0763
CABLE
ARMORED TRUNK AND FEEDER CABLE T4 PLUSTM
Armored T4 Plus cable is recommended for direct burial installations where the cable is exposed to increased mechanical abuse and rodent attack.
FEATURES ·A flooded steel tape and jacket are layered over the standard
flooded jacketed cable for increased mechanical strength. ·A cold flowing, self- healing ( underground) or non- dripping ( aerial)
flooding compound provides an additional layer of corrosion pro-
tection. ·Cable jackets have sequential footage markers for easy determina-
tion of the amount of cable remaining on the reel. ·A tough jacket of linear low density polyethylene provides in-
creased abrasion resistance and can be cut and removed easily for connector installation. ·A fully bonded composite construction increases pull strength and resists sidewall pressure damage during installation. ·Bonding of the jacket to sheath provides improved handling characteristics and prevents concealment of aluminum sheath damage. ·Controlled bonding of the core provides high core-to- sheath adhesion ( to -40°C) dramatically improving protection against
connector pull-outs due to extreme temperature variations and allows the use of standard connectors. ·Bonding of the dielectric to center conductor prevents moisture ingress and can be easily stripped without leaving a harmful
residue. ·A reduced bend radius of approximately 8x the outside diameter
of the cable allows easy accommodation to vault and pedestal
placements. ·Available with increased bandwidth of 5to 550 MHz.
Armored T4 Plus cable is available with acopper- clad or solid copper center conductor. A hard foamed polyethylene dielectric supports the fullwall seamless aluminum outer conductor. A composite construction is obtained by bonding the individual components together, center conductor to dielectric and dielectric to outer conductor, with proprietary polymer adhesives. A combination of alayer of aflooding compound, a polyethylene jacket, a helically wound steel tape, another layer of flooding compound, and apolyethylene jacket form acomplete mechanical and corrosion- resistant corrosive shield.
DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS ·Center conductor - Electrical grade 10% nominal ( by volume)
copper- clad aluminum ( ASTM B-556 Class 10A); solid copper (ASTM B-3). ·Conductor coating - Proprietary moisture blocking polymer adhesive. ·Dielectric - Foamed polyethylene ( Federal Specification LP-390 and ASTM D-1248 prior to foaming). ·Dielectric coating - Clean stripping proprietary polymer adhesive. ·Outer conductor - Seamless fullwall high purity electrical grade aluminum tube, alloy 1060 ( ASTM B-221). ·Self- healing flooding compound - Cold flowing, low molecular weight polyisobutylene for self healing. ·Jacket - Abrasion resistant linear low density black polyethylene (Federal Specification LP-390 and ASTM D-1248 jacketing material). ·Armor - A 0.010" thick steel tape per SAE/AISI 1010 steel.
Cable Type
Copper- Clad Aluminum Center Conductor
Armored Armored, color coded Solid Copper Center Conductor Armored Armored, color coded
0.412
22403 22413
22423 22433
PART NUMBERS
Cable Size
0.500
0.625
0.750
22503 22513
22523 22533
22603 22613
22703 22713
22723 22733
0.875
22803 22813
1.000
22903 22913
Cable Type
Dimensions Conductor Insulation Outer Conductor
1st Jacket Armor 2nd Jacket
Nominal Weight
(per 1000 ft.) Nominal Weight (per reel) Nominal Length (per reel) Maximum Pull Force Minimum Bend Radius Reel Size ( inches)
(Flange xTraverse xHub)
0.412
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS Cable Size
0.500
0.625
0.750
0.088 in. 0.362 in. 0.412 in. 0.480 in. 0.500 in. 0.600 in.
158 lb.
560 lb.
2850 ft. 180 lb. 8.4 in.
42 x18 x18
0.109 in. 0.450 in. 0.500 in. 0.570 in. 0.590 in. 0.690 in.
198 lb.
575 lb.
2350 ft. 240 lb. 9.7 in.
42 x18 x18
0.136 in. 0.563 in. 0.625 in. 0.695 in. 0.715 in. 0.815 in.
266 lb.
732 lb.
2300 ft. 350 lb. 11.4 in.
48x 24 x30
0.165 in. 0.678 in. 0.750 in. 0.830 in. 0.850 in. 0.950 in.
348 lb.
967 lb.
2400 ft. 470 lb. 13.3 in.
54x 24 x30
0.875
0.194 in. 0.797 in. 0.875 in. 0.955 in. 0.975 in. 1.075 in.
428 lb.
1206 lb.
2350 ft. 530 lb. 15.0 in.
63 x26 x40
1.000
0.220 in. 0.890 in. 1.000 in. 1.090 in. 1.110 in. 1.210 in.
562 lb.
1508 lb.
2150 ft. 610 lb. 16.9 in.
66 x36 x42
VRF-152
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TIMES FIBER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
RF CABLE PRODUCTS DIVISION
P.O. Box 384 358 Hall Avenue Wallingford, CT 06492 (203) 265-8400 TVVX 710-476-0763
CABLE
JACKETED MESSENGERED TRUNK AND FEEDER CABLE T4 PLUSTM
RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS Jacketed messengered T4 Plus cable is recommended for aerial feeder installations where strand installation is not practical.
FEATURES ·A strong integral galvanized steel wire supports the cable in aerial
installations. ·A tough jacket of linear low density polyethylene provides in-
creased abrasion resistance and can be cut and removed easily for connector installation. ·A fully bonded composite construction increases pull strength and resists sidewall pressure damage during installation. · Bonding of the jacket to sheath provides improved handling characteristics and prevents concealment of aluminum sheath damage. ·Controlled bonding of the core provides high core- to- sheath adhesion ( to -40°C) dramatically improving protection against connector pull-outs due to extreme temperature variations and allows the use of standard connectors. · Bonding of the dielectric to center conductor prevents moisture ingress and can be easily stripped without leaving a harmful residue. ·A reduced bend radius of approximately 8x the outside diameter
of the cable allows easy accommodation to vault and pedestal placements. ·Available with increased bandwidth of 5to 550 MHz.
Jacketed messengered T4 Plus cable is available with acopper- clad or solid copper center conductor. A hard foamed polyethylene dielectric supports the fullwall seamless aluminum outer conductor.
A composite construction is obtained by bonding the individual components together, center conductor to dielectric and dielectric to outer conductor, with proprietary polymer adhesives. A galvanized steel wire is integrally attached to the cable by aweb of polyethylene
that is part of the protective polyethylene jacket over the outer conductor and messenger wire.
DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS
·Center conductor -- Electrical grade 10% nominal ( by volume) copper- clad aluminum ( ASTM B-556 Class 10A); solid copper
(ASTM 8-31. ·Conductor coating -- Proprietary moisture blocking polymer ad-
hesive. ·Dielectric -- Foamed polyethylene ( Federal Specification LP- 390
and ASTM D-1248 prior to foaming). ·Dielectric coating -- Clean stripping proprietary polymer adhesive.
·Outer conductor -- Seamless fullwall high purity electrical grade aluminum tube, alloy 1060 ( ASTM B-221).
·Messenger -- Galvanized 0.109 in. solid steel wire ( ASTM A-3261 or agalvanized 0.188 in. stranded wire ( ASTM A-475).
·Jacket -- Abrasion resistant linear low density black polyethylene (Federal Specification LP- 390 and ASTM D-1248 jacketing mat-
erial).
NOTE: Conventional strand installation of cable offers more mechanical protection than messengered cable. However, where
strand installation is not possible, messengered cable offers
the next best approach if care is taken to follow the hardware manufacturers' installation instructions and proper cable sags
and tensions are used.
PART NUMBERS
Cable Type
Copper- Clad Aluminum Center Conductor
Jacketed messengered
Solid Copper Center Conductor Jacketed messengered
0.412
22405 22425
Cable Size 0.500
22505 22525
0.625 22605
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cable Size
0.412
0.500
0.625
Dimensions Conductor Insulation Outer Conductor Jacket Messenger
Nominal Weight (per 1000 ft.) Nominal Weight ( per reel) Nominal Length ( per reel) Maximum Pull Force Minimum Bend Radius Messenger Break Strength Reel Size ( inches)
(Flange xTraverse xHub)
0.088 in. 0.362 in. 0.412 in.
0.480 in. 0.109 in.
0.109 in. 0.450 in. 0.500 in.
0.580 in. 0.109 in.
0.136 in. 0.563 in. 0.625 in.
0.725 in. 0.188 in.
(stranded)
121 lb. 455 lb.
2850 ft. 540 lb. 3.0 in. 1800 lb.
145 lb. 451 lb.
2350 ft. 540 lb. 4.0 in. 1800 lb.
252 lb. 712 lb.
2300 ft. 600 lb. 5.0 in. 3990 lb.
42x18x18 42x18x18 54x24x30
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-153
TIMES FIBER COMMUNICATIONS,
RF CABLE PRODUCTS DIVISION
P.O. Box 384 358 Hall Avenue Wallingford, CT 06492 (203) 265-8400 TWX 710-476-0763
JACKETED TRUNK AND FEEDER CABLE T4 Plus'
RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS Jacketed T4 Plus cable is recommended for aerial installations in urban and coastal environments where corrosion is more likely. This cable will withstand more abrasion and mechanical abuse than an unjacketed cable. FEATURES ·A tough jacket of linear low density polyethylene provides in-
creased abrasion resistance and can be cut and removed easily for connector installation. ·A fully bonded composite construction increases pull strength and resists sidewall pressure damage during installation.
· Bonding of the jacket to sheath provides improved handling characteristics and prevents concealment of aluminum sheath damage.
·Controlled bonding of the core provides high core- to-sheath adhesion ( to -40°C) dramatically improving protection against connector pull-outs due to extreme temperature variations and allows the use of standard connectors.
· Bonding of the dielectric to center conductor prevents moisture ingress and can be easily stripped without leaving a harmful residue.
·A reduced bend radius of approximately 8x the outside diameter of the cable allows easy accommodation to vault and pedestal placements.
·Available with increased bandwidth of 5to 550 MHz.
INC.
CABLE
Jacketed T4 Plus cable is available with acopper- clad or solid copper center conductor. A hard foamed polyethylene dielectric supports the fullwall seamless aluminum outer conductor. A protective jacket of tough linear low density polyethylene is extruded over the sheath. A composite construction is obtained by bonding the individual components together, center conductor to dielectric, dielectric to outer conductor, and sheath to jacket, with proprietary polymer adhesives.
DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS ·Center conductor - Electrical grade 10% nominal ( by volume)
copper clad aluminum ( ASTM B-556 Class 10A); solid copper (ASTM B-3). ·Conductor coating - Proprietary moisture blocking polymer adhesive. ·Dielectric - Foamed polyethylene ( Federal Specification LP-390 and ASTM D-1248 prior to foaming). ·Dielectric coating - Clean stripping proprietary polymer adhesive. ·Outer conductor - Seamless fullwall high purity electrical grade aluminum tube, alloy 1060 ( ASTM B-221). ·Jacket adhesive - Proprietary non- residue polymer adhesive. ·Jacket* - Abrasion resistant linear low density black polyethylene (Federal Specification LP- 390 and ASTM D-1248 jacketing material).
*Sequential footage marking on outer jacket available upon request.
Cable Type
Copper- Clad Aluminum Center Conductor
Jacketed Heavy jacket (0.065 in.) Jacketed, color coded Heavy jacket, color coded Solid Copper Center Conductor Jacketed Jacketed, color coded Heavy jacket, color coded
0.412
22401 22411
22421 22431
PART NUMBERS
0.500
Cable Size
0.625
0.750
22501
22506 22511 22516
22521 22531 22536
22601
22606 22611 22616
22701
22706 22711 22716
22721 22731 22736
0.875
22801
22806 221311 22816
1.000
22901
22906 22911 22916
CABLE TYPE
Dimensions Conductor Insulation Outer Conductor Jacket Heavy Jacket
Nominal Weight (per 1000 ft.)
Jacketed Heavy Jacket
Nominal Weight (per reel)
Jacketed Heavy Jacket
Nominal Length (per reel) Maximum Pull Force Minimum Bend Radius Reel Size ( inches) (Flange xTraverse xHub)
Jacketed Heavy Jacket
VRF-154
0.412
0.088 in. 0.362 in. 0.412 in. 0.470 in. 0.542 in.
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
0.500
Cable Size 0.625
0.750
0.109 in. 0.450 in. 0.500 in. 0.560 in. 0.630 in.
0.136 in. 0.563 in. 0.625 in. 0.685 in.
0.755 in.
0.165 in. 0.678 in. 0.750 in. 0.820 in. 0.880 in.
74 lb.
981b. 124 lb.
146 lb. 178 lb.
206 lb. 238 lb.
0.875
0.194 in. 0.797 in. 0.875 in. 0.945 in. 1.005 in.
266 lb. 303 lb.
1.000
0.220 in. 0.890 in. 1.000 in. 1.080 in. 1.130 in.
377 lb. 412 lb.
286 lb.
2850 ft. 180 lb. 2.5 in.
3051b. 401 lb.
2350 ft. 240 lb. 3.5 in.
446 lb. 529 lb.
2300 ft. 350 lb. 4.5 in.
626 lb. 703 lb.
2400 ft. 470 lb. 6.0 in.
36 x18 x16
36x 18 x16 42 x18 x18
42 x18x 18 48 x24 x30
54 x24 x30 54 x24 x30
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
757 lb. 9121b.
2350 ft. 530 lb. 7.0 in.
54 x24 x30 63 x26 x40
1011 lb. 1086 lb.
2150 ft. 610 lb. 8.0 in.
63 x26 x40 63 x26 x40
TIMES FIBER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
RF CABLE PRODUCTS DIVISION
P.O. Box 384 358 Hall Avenue Wallingford, CT 06492 (203) 265-8400 TVVX 710-476-0763
CABLE
UNJACKETED TRUNK AND FEEDER CABLE T4 PIusTM
RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS Unjacketed 14 Plus cable is recommended for aerial installations in a non- corrosive environment.
FEATURES ·A full wall seamless aluminum tube provides maximum strength,
shielding integrity, and low sheath resistance. ·A fully bonded composite construction increases pull strength and
resists sidewall pressure damage during installation. ·Controlled bonding of the core provides high core-to-sheath
adhesion ( to -40°C) dramatically improving protection against connector pull-outs due to extreme temperature variations and allows the use of standard connectors. ·Bonding of the dielectric to center conductor prevents moisture ingress and can be easily stripped without leaving a harmful residue. ·A reduced bend radius of approximately 8x the outside diameter of the cable allows easy accommodation to vault and pedestal placements. ·Available with increased bandwidth of 5to 550 MHz.
Construction Unjacketed T4 Plus cable is available with a copper- clad or solid copper center conductor. A hard foamed polyethylene dielectric supports the fullwall seamless aluminum outer conductor. A composite construction is obtained by bonding the individual components together, center conductor to dielectric and dielectric to outer conductor, with proprietary polymer adhesives.
DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS ·Center conductor -- Electrical grade 10% nominal ( by volume)
copper- clad aluminum ( ASTM B-556 Class 10A); solid copper (ASTM B-3). ·Conductor coating -- Proprietary moisture blocking polymer adhesive. ·Dielectric -- Foamed polyethylene ( Federal Specification LP- 390 and ASTM D-1248 prior to foaming). ·Dielectric coating -- Clean stripping proprietary polymer adhesive. ·Outer conductor -- Seamless fullwall high purity electrical grade aluminum tube, alloy 1060 ( ASTM B-221).
Cable Type
Copper- Clad Aluminum Center Conductor Unjacketed Unjacketed, color coded
Solid Copper Center Conductor Unjacketed Unjacketed, color coded
PART NUMBERS
0.412
22400 22410
22420 22430
0.500
22500 22510
22520 22530
Cable Size
0.625
0.750
22600 22610
22700 22710
--
22720
--
22730
0.875
22800 22810
-- --
1.000
22900 22910
Cable Type
Dimensions Conductor Insulation Outer Conductor
Nominal Weight (per 1000 ft.) Nominal Weight (per reel) Nominal Length
(per reel) Maximum Pull Force Minimum Bend Radius Reel Size ( inches) (Flange xTraverse xHub)
0.412
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Cable Size
0.500
0.625
0.750
0.088 in. 0.362 in. 0.412 in.
58 lb.
240 lb.
2850 ft. 180 lb.
3in.
36x 18 x16
0.109 in. 0.450 in. 0.500 in.
78 lb.
258 lb.
2350 ft. 240 lb.
4in.
36 x18 x16
0.136 in. 0.563 in. 0.625 in.
121 lb.
388 lb.
2300 ft. 350 lb.
5in.
42 x18 x18
0.165 in. 0.678 in. 0.750 in.
171 lb.
530 lb.
2400 ft. 470 lb.
7in.
48 x24 x30
0.875
0.194 in. 0.797 in. 0.875 in.
225 lb.
661 lb.
2350 ft. 530 lb.
8in.
54x 24 x30
1.000
0.220 in. 0.890 in. 1.000 in.
325 lb.
948 lb.
2300 ft. 610 lb.
9in.
63 x26 x40
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-155
TIMES FIBER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
CABLE
RF CABLE PRODUCTS DIVISION
P.O. Box 384 358 Hall Avenue Wallingford, CT 06492 (203) 265-8400 TVVX 710-476-0763
JACKETED FLOODED TRUNK AND FEEDER CABLE T4 PLUS TM
RECOMMENDED APPLICATIONS Jacketed flooded T4 Plus cable is recommended for underground, both conduit and direct burial installations. Asphaltic flooding compound may also be used for aerial applications.
FEATURES ·A cold flowing, self- healing ( underground) or non- dripping ( aerial)
flooding compound provides an additional layer of corrosion protection. ·Cable jackets have sequential footage markers for easy determina-
tion of the amount of cable remaining on the reel. ·A tough jacket of linear low density polyethylene provides in-
creased abrasion resistance and can be cut and removed easily for connector installation. ·A fully bonded composite construction increases pull strength and resists sidewall pressure damage during installation. ·Bonding of the jacket to sheath provides improved handling characteristics and prevents concealment of aluminum sheath damage. ·Controlled bonding of the core provides high core-to- sheath adhesion ( to -40°C) dramatically improving protection against connector pull-outs due to extreme temperature variations and allows the use of standard connectors. ·Bonding of the dielectric to center conductor prevents moisture ingress and can be easily stripped without leaving a harmful
residue. ·A reduced bend radius of approximately 8x the outside diameter
of the cable allows easy accommodation to vault and pedestal
placements. ·Available with increased bandwidth of 5to 550 MHz.
Construction Jacketed flooded T4 Plus cable is available with acopper- clad or solid copper center conductor. A hard foamed polyethylene dielectric supports the fullwall seamless aluminum outer conductor. A composite construction is obtained by bonding the individual components together, center conductor to dielectric and dielectric to outer
conductor, with proprietary polymer adhesives. A layer of flooding compound is applied over the outer conductor, and a protective jacket of linear low density polyethylene is extruded over the flooding
compound.
JACKETED FLOODED TRUNK AND FEEDER CABLE Tem
FEATURES ·A center conductor coating that is moisture blocking yet strips
clean. ·A hard foam dielectric which provides firm support for the full-
wall seamless aluminum outer conductor, achieves excellent core- to- outer conductor adhesion, and has superior handling characteristics. ·A protective layer of flooding compound for additional corrosion protection.
T4' PART NUMBERS
Cable Type
Copper- Clad Aluminum Center Conductor
Jacketed flooded polyisobutylene Heavy jacket flooded ( 0.065 in.) Extra heavy jacket flooded Jacketed flooded, asphalt* Jacketed flooded, polyisobutylene, color coded Heavy jacket flooded polyisobutylene, color coded Extra heavy jacket, flooded, color coded Jacketed flooded, asphalt* color coded
Cable Size 0.625 0.875
21174 21931 21934 21993
21177
21937
21939
21803
21194 21951 21954 21995
21197
21957
21959
21805
T4 PLUS' PART NUMBERS
Cable Type
Copper- Clad Aluminum Center Conductor Jacketed flooded polyisobutylene Heavy jacket flooded ( 0.065 in.) Jacketed flooded, asphalt* Jacketed flooded, polyisobutylene, color coded Heavy jacket flooded, polyisobutylene, color coded Jacketed flooded, asphalt* color coded
Solid Copper Center Conductor
Jacketed flooded polyisobutylene Jacketed flooded, asphalt* Jacketed flooded, polyisobutylene, color coded Heavy jacket flooded polyisobutylene, color coded Jacketed flooded, asphalt*, color coded
0.412 22402 22-404 22412
22414
0.500
22502 22507 22504 22512
22517 22514
22422 22424 22432
22-434
22522 22524
22532
22537 22534
Cable Size
0.625
0.750
22602 22607 22604 22612
22617 22614
22702 22707 22704 22712
22717 22714
22722 22724
22732
22737 22734
May also be used for aerial applications due to non- dripping compound.
0.875
22802 22807 22804 22812
22817 22814
1.000
22902 22907 22904 22912
22917 22914
VRF-156
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TIMES FIBER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
RF CABLE PRODUCTS DIVISION P.O. Box 384 358 Hall Avenue Wallingford, CT 06492 (203) 265-8400 TVVX 710-476-0763
14 DROP LOW COVERAGE BRAID CABLE
The Low Coverage Braid T4 drop cable is recommended for use in areas where low RF signal noise is present and ease of connector installation is not critical.
FEATURES
·A bonded dielectric that blocks moisture yet pulls off easily leaving no residue on the conductor.
·An environmentally resistant black PVC jacket that provides long drop life.
· Uniform web dimensions that allow easy messenger wire senaration.
Description
Single ( Black) Single ( Beige or White*)
Single Flooded
Single Messengered
Siamese ( Black)
Siamese ( Beige or White*) Siamese Messengered
DROP CABLE
PART NUMBERS
RG-59 Size 2045
2070 2074
2047 2048
RG-6 Size ' RG-11 Size
2060
2062
2091 2086
2082
2064 2096
2066
2055
2050
2084
Single- Low coverage braid T4 drop cable has a copper- clad steel center conductor with a hard foamed polyethylene dielectric. An aluminum- polypropylene- aluminum ( APA) laminated tape is longitudinally wrapped with an overlap around the dielectric. An aluminum wire braid is then applied over the APA tape, and a protective PVC jacket is extruded over the braid to environmentally seal the construction.
Flooded- The same as the single, except with a layer of flooding compound between the braid and PVC jacket.
*Beige and white cables are not recommended for long term outdoor storage or installation.
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
Conductor DieWctric Unsealed APA Tape Outer Conductor Alummum Brad Outer Cots:loom Jacket Messenger Jacketed mth Mmsenger Siamese Messenger (Smmesel Siamese mob Messenger
Number of Braid Ends
Cable Weight per 1000 It
Single Single Messengered Single Flooded Siamese Siamese Messengered
RG.59 Size
eon° . 0146,n 0.150 in. 0 175 m 0.238 In eos1 on. 0.393 in. 0321 .. 0072 in. 0698m.
2
23 lb 35 lb 22 lb 46 lb 66 lb
RG.6 Size
00403 in 0185 In. 0189 in 0214 in 0.275 in 0051 In 0.030m 0.595 in. 0072 In 0.772 ni.
2
2916 4116 28 lb 5916 7916
RG-I1 Size
00641 in 0285 In 0289in 0314 in 0407 In 0109 in 0631 m
3
6316 89 lb
Messengered - The same as the single, except with a galvanized steel wire integrally attached by aPVC web that is part of the jacket that covers the braid and messenger wire.
Siamese- The same as the single, except two singles are attached by a PVC web.
Fis MHz
5 30 50 108
216 240 270 300
325 350 375 400
..-- ..
450 500 550 600
mme
Nominal DC Resistance (ohms per 100010
Loop Center Conductor
Nominal Capacitance 165 pF per It
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Attenuation at 68°F-dB per 100 ft.
RG.59 Size
Nominal
Maximum
079 146 1.74 2.46
0.83 113 183 258
348 167 369 4.11
42e
4.44 4.60 4.75
366 186 4.09 432
449 466 9.83 499
5.09 531 5.57 5.83
129 /58 5.86 6.12
RG-6 Size
Nominal
Maxiontnn
oko 1.11 132 195
063 I16 139 205
278 293 3.12 3.29
292 108 127 146
3.43 316 3.69 181
3.60 174 3.87 0.00
4.05 4.27 0.49 4.69
4.25 4.49 472 493
110-1 ISize
Nominal
Maximum
038 070 0.87 I29
040 074 091 1.36
165 196 208 220
195 206 219 2.31
229 239 2.47 2.56
2.41 251 2.60 269
2.73 2.88 3.03 118
266 3.03 119 3.34
629 482
440 304
217 12 I
Siamese Messengered - The same as the siamese, except a galvanized steel wire is integrally attached by a PVC web.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-157
TIMES FIBER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
RF CABLE PRODUCTS DIVISION
P.O. Box 384 358 Hall Avenue Wallingford, CT 06492 (203) 265-8400 TWX 710-476-0763
T4 DROP MEDIUM COVERAGE BRAID CABLE
The Medium Coverage Braid T4 drop cable is recommended for use in areas where moderate RF signal noise is present and easy connector installation is required.
FEATURES ·A bonded dielectric that blocks moisture yet pulls off easily leaving
no residue on the conductor. ·An environmentally resistant black PVC jacket that provides long
drop life. ·Uniform web dimensions that allow easy messenger wire
separation.
Description
Single ( Black)
Single ( Beige or White*)
Single Flooded
Single Messengered
Siamese ( Black)
Siamese ( Beige or White*)
Siamese Messengered
DROP CABLE
PART NUMBERS
RG-59 Size 2045
RG-6 Size 2060
2070 2074
2091 2086
2047 2048
2064 2096
2055
2050
2084
RG-1 1Size 2062
--2082
2066 ._.
---
Single- Medium coverage braid T4 drop cable has a copper- clad steel center conductor with ahard foamed polyethylene dielectric. A sealed aluminum- polypropylene- aluminum ( APA) laminated tape is longitudinally wrapped with an overlap around the dielectric. An aluminum wire braid is then applied over the sealed APA tape, and a protective PVC jacket is extruded over the braid to environmentally seal the construction. Flooded- The same as the single, except with a layer of flooding compound between the braid and PVC jacket.
Messengered -The same as the single, except with a galvanized steel wire integrally attached by aPVC web that is part of the jacket that covers the braid and messenger wire.
Siamese- The same as the single, except two singles are attached by aPVC web.
'Beige and white cables are not recommended for long term outdoor storage or installation.
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Donenstons
Conductor Drelectnc Unsealed APA Tape Outer Conductor Aluminum Brae Outer Conductor Jacket Messenger Jacketed .01 Messenger Siamese Messenger ISamese1 Searnese verth Messenger
Number of Brad Ends
Cable Werght per 1000 It
Sunk Smote Meuengered Songle Flooded Starnes. Samarse Messengered
RG-59 Size
00320 In 0 146 rt. 0 150 In 0175 In 0238 in 0.051 In 0.393 rn 0521 in 0.072 sn 0Mt in
2
23 lb 35 lb 12 lb 46 lb 66 lb
RG..6 Size
00403 In 0 185 In
0 189 In 0214 In 0275 In 0051 m 0430m 0595 In 0072 In 0772 rn
2
2916 41 lb 28 lb 59 lb 791b
*4 Braid end cable available upon request.
RG.11 Size
00641 In 0285 In 0289 In 0314 in 0407 In 0 109 en 0631 in
3
63 73 8913
F ..... nefr MHz 5 30 50 108
216 210 270 300
325 350 375 400
450 500 550 600
SI% per 10.FVanance
Nominal DC Rmiedance (ohms per 100010
Loop Center Conductor
Nominal Capadiarice 165 giF milt
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Attenuation at 68°F- dB per 100 ft.
RG.59 Size
Nominal
Maximum
0.79 146 174 246
013 1.53 I83 258
148 367 189 411
366 186 4.09 412
4.28 444 4.60 875
4.49 .166 4.83 899
5.04 131 5.57 5.83
5.29 5.58 5.86 6.12
RG4 Sloe
Nominal
MallinIIMI
060 1.11 I32 I95
063 116 139 205
278 293 112 329
2.92 3.08 127 146
143 156 169 381
3.60 174 3.87 4.00
805 4.27 4.49 469
4.25 4.49 4/2 493
RG-I1 Size
Pdominal
Maximum
038 0.70 0.87 I29
040 070 091 I36
105 1.96 2.08 2.20
I95 206 219 231
2.29 2.39 2.47 /56
201 2.51 260 269
2.73 /88 3.03 118
286 3.03 3.19 334
62.9 482
000 304
217 12 I
Siamese Messengered -The same as the siamese, except a galvanized steel wire is integrally attached by a PVC web.
VRF-158
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TIMES FIBER COMMUNICATIONS,
RF CABLE PRODUCTS DIVISION
P.O. Box 384 358 Hall Avenue Wallingford, CT 06492 (203) 265-8400 TVVX 710-476-0763
INC.
T4 DROP HIGH COVERAGE BRAID CABLE
The High Coverage Braid T4 drop cable is recommended for use in areas where moderate to high RF noise level is present.
FEATURES ·A bonded dielectric that blocks moisture yet pulls off easily leaving
no residue on the conductor. ·An environmentally resistant black PVC jacket that provides long
drop life. · Uniform web dimensions that allow easy messenger wire
separation.
Description
Single ( Black)
Single ( Beige or White*)
Single Flooded
Single Messengered
Siamese ( Black)
Siamese ( Beige or White*)
Siamese Messengered
DROP CABLE
PART NUMBERS
RG-59 Size 2045
RG-6 Size 2060
RG-11 Size 2062
2070 2074
2091 2086
--2082
2047 2048
2064 2096
2066
2055
2050
2084
Single - High coverage braid T4 drop cable has a copper- clad steel center conductor with a hard foamed polyethylene dielectric. A sealed aluminum- polypropylene- aluminum ( APA) laminated tape is longitudinally wrapped with an overlap around the dielectric. An aluminum wire braid is then applied over the sealed APA tape, and a protective PVC jacket is extruded over the braid to environmentally seal the construction. Flooded - The same as the single, except with a layer of flooding compound between the braid and PVC jacket.
Messengered - The same as the single, except with a galvanized steel wire integrally attached by aPVC web that is part of the jacket that covers the braid and messenger wire.
·Beige and white cables are not recommended for long term outdoor storage or installation.
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
RG-59 Size
Conductor Dielectric Unsealed APA Tape Outer Conductor Aluminum Braid Outer Conductor Jackel Messenger Jacketed with Messenger Siamese Messenger ( Siamese) Siamese with Messenger
Number ol Braid Ends
Cable Wee ,Per 1000 f.
Single Single Messengered Single Fkaded Siamese Siamese Messengered
00320m. 0 146 in.
0150 in 0175 in.
0.238 in. 0051 in. 0.393 in. 0.521 en. 0072 in. 0698in.
2
23 lb 35 lb 22 lb 46 lb 66 lb
RG-6 Size
00403 in 0 185 in. 0 189 in 0214 in 0.275 . 0051 .
0 es4o3s0i.n.
0.072 in. 0.772 in.
2
2916 41 lb 28 lb 59 lb 7916
RG.I1 Size 00641 in 0285 .
00a.o23e81o94i.n.
0 109 . 0631 m
3 63 lb 89 lb
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Attenuation at 68°F- dB per 100 ft.
Siamese - The same as the single, except two singles are attached by a PVC web.
Frequency MHz
5 30 50 108
216 240 270 300
325 350 375 400
450 500 550 600
per
anance
Nominal DC Resi·tance (ohms per 1000 ft)
Loop Center Conductor
Nominal Capacitance 165 pF per It
RG-59 Size
Nominal
Maximum
079 I46 I74 246
0.83 153 1.83 2.58
348 367 389 411
366 186 409 422
428 444 460 475
4.49 4.66 4.83 499
5.04 5.31 5.57 5.83
5.29 5.58 186 6.12
HG-6 Size
Nominal
Maximum
ese
o63
1.11
I16
122 195
o1e2s9
/78 2.93 3.12 3.29
/s9e2e
127 3.46
343 3.56 3.69 3.81
160 174 187 400
405 4.27 4.49 4.69
4t.o2o5
4.72 493
8G- II Size
Nominal
Maximum
0.38 070 0.87 119
040 0.74 091 I36
1.85 196 2.08 220
195 2.06 219 231
229 2.39 2.47 216
241 2.51 260 269
273 2.88 303 318
206 3.03 3.19 334
629 482
440 304
217 11 I
Siamese Messengered - The same as the siamese, except a galvanized steel wire is integrally attached by a PVC web.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-159
TIMES FIBER COMMUNICATIONS, INC.
DROP CABLE
RF CABLE PRODUCTS DIVISION P.O. Box 384 358 Hall Avenue Wallingford, CT 06492 (203) 265-8400 TWX 710-476-0763
T4 DROP QUADSHIELD CABLE
Quadshield T4 drop cable is recommended for use in areas where a high to very high RF noise level is present.
FEATURES ·A bonded dielectric that blocks moisture yet pulls off easily leaving
no residue on the conductor. ·An environmentally resistant black PVC jacket that provides long
drop life ·Uniform web dimensions that allow easy messenger wire separa-
tion
PART NUMBERS
Description
Single ( Black) Single ( Beige or White*) Single Flooded Single Messengered (Black) Siamese ( Black) Siamese ( Beige or White*) Siamese Flooded Siamese Messengered (Black)
RG-59 Size
2245 2270 2274
2247 2248 2255 2252
2250
RG-6 Size
2260 2291 2286
2264 2296 2256 2253
2284
RG-11 Size
2262 ----
2282
2266 ----
Single -- Quadshield T4 drop cable has a copper- clad steel center conductor with a hard foamed polyethylene dielectric. A sealed aluminum- polypropylene- aluminum ( APA) laminated tape is longitudinally wrapped with an overlap around the dielectric. A medium coverage aluminum wire braid is applied over the sealed APA tape, an unsealed APA tape is applied over the braid, a low coverage aluminum wire braid is applied over the unsealed tape, and a protective PVC jacket is extruded over the braid to environmentally seal the construction. Flooded -- The same as the single, except with a layer of flooding compound between the braid and PVC jacket.
Messengered -- The same as the single, except with a galvanized steel wire integrally attached by aPVC web that is part of the jacket that covers the braid and messenger wire.
Siamese -- The same as the single, except two singles are attached by a PVC web.
* Beige and white cables are not recommended for long term outdoor storage or installation.
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Ihmenuuna
Conductor Chelet Ira Sealed APA Tope Fite ()Wm Condui ror Alurnanurn Brad Second Outer Condo tot APA Tope Third Outer Conductot Aluminum Ronal Fourth () per Conductor Jacket Messenger Jacketed srPh Messenger Soarnese Messenger IStarnesel Stamese wah Messenger
Nurnbet ol Brad Ends
Second Outer Conductor Fourth Outer Condt ucor
Coble Welsh! per 1000 It
Single Songle Messenpoed Single Flooded Slane,. Siamese Messeroga·red
1tti·59 Sue
0032 on 0 146 on
0 153 on
0 178 on 0 182 on
0207 on 0262 on 0051 on 0417 on 0569 on 0072 on 0346 on
3 2
27 lb 39 lb 2616 54 11. 74 16 5116
F26·6 Side
0040 no 0 185 on
0 192 on
0 21; on 0 221 on
0246 on 0300 on 005I on 0 455 on 0646 on 0072 on 0822 on
4 2
34 16 46 lb 32 lb 6816 ga lb
14G-1 ISi,.
0061 on 028i on 0292 on 031; on 0321 on 0 346 Ill 0434 on 0 109 en 0654 on
a 3
70 lb 9611 , 68 lb
Forguem, Mllo
30
50 108
216
240 270
300
325 350 375
400
·Pt per 14PF
450 500 550 600
e
Nominal IX- Resintance lichens pm 1000111
Lout ,
Center Condon nor
Nominal Capacitance 165 pF gip it
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS Attenuation at 68°F - dB per 100 ft.
RG.59 Size
Nominal
Maximum
079 146 I74 246
0.83
I53 I83 258
398 367 389 4 II
366 386 409 432
428 444
460 475
409 466
483 499
504
531 557 1.83
529
558
586 612
RG-6 Side
Nominal
Maximum
060 III I32 Irer
063 I 16 I39 205
2 RI 293 312 329
292 308 327 346
343 356 369 381
360 370 387 900
405 427
449
469
425 449
472 493
RG-I ISi,,
Nominal
Maximum
038
070 087 129
040 079 091
136
I85 I96
208
220
195
206 219
231
229 239 297 2.56
241 151 260 269
273 288
303 318
286 303 319
334
545 482
357 304
16.1 12 I
Siamese Messengered -- The same as the siamese, except a galvanized steel wire is integrally attached by a PVC web.
VRF-160
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TRANS USA CORPORATION
158 Tices Lane High View Industrial Park East Brunswick, NJ 088816 (201) 254-3020 Telex 138-122
DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS Distribution amplifiers are designed to amplify signal voltage to overcome the inherent distribution system losses and provide adequate signal level to receiver.
due, *444.
ae0.4t. fteer:::>""i4%p..,, /
DISTRIBUTION AMP/ TRANSFORMERS/SPLITTER
MATCHING TRANSFORMER WITH FILTER MODEL MT-102 Matching transformer with high pass filter -- designed to block interference caused by C.B., Ham Radio, Two-way Communication, Industrial Equipment, Auto Ignition, Xray, etc.
SPECIFICATIONS
· Frequency Range: 50-450 MHz · Insertion Loss: . 9dB max. · Balance Ratio: 30 dB min. · Return Loss: 18 dB min. · Cut-off Frequency: 50 MHz · Filter Attenuation: 35 dB min. (5-35 MHz)
FEATURES
· Heavy Duty Twin Lead · Soldered and Crimped Lugs · Brass Connector · P.C. Board · Totally Shielded Housing
EAGLE SERIES
Eagle series distribution amplifiers are designed mainly for CATV systems. It can handle 30 channels present simultaneously with no perceptible distortion. Ideal for multi outlet home or garden apartments which hook up to a
CATV system or to amaster antenna system.
EAGLE SERIES DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS SPECIFICATIONS
Models
DA7508 0A75113 DA7524 DA7530 DA75011-4
Band meth MHz
50-400 50-400 50-400 50-400 50-400
Own dB
e
113
24
30 1(4)
Man Output tIBMV
52 52
52 52 52
None Flours dB 7 7
7 8 7
Impedance ohm 75 75 75 75 300
V.S.W.R. Input and Output
1.5:1 1.5:1 1.5:1 1.5:1 1.5:1
Phan«. dB
± 0.5 ± 0.5 ± 0.5 ± 0.5 ± 0.5
MATCHING TRANSFORMER MODEL MT-101 75 to 300 ohm matching transformer -- designed to handle the most difficult of direct pick-up problems.
SPECIFICATIONS
· Frequency Range: 5-450 MHz · Insertion Loss: . 5dB max. · Balance: 40 dB min. · Return Loss: 18 dB min.
· Response: ±. 25 dB max. · Isolation: 1000V min.
FEATURES
· Heavy Duty Twin Lead · Soldered and Crimped Lugs · Brass Connector · PC Board · 3Capacitors · Metal Case with Plastic Cover
TF-7
TV FM SPUTTER MODEL TF-7 TV/FM Splitter -- designed to separate TV and FM signals. Eliminates the interference between FM and TV set.
SPECIFICATIONS
· Frequency Range: TV -- 5-88 & 120-300 MHz; FM -- 88-110 MHz
· Insertion Loss: TV -- . 7dB max.; FM -- 3dB max. · FM Rejection on TV Output: 35 dB min. · TV Rejection on FM Output: 25 dB at Ch. 2and 7 · Return Loss: 18 dB min.
FEATURES
· Brass Connector · Epoxy Sealing · Chrome Plated
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-161
TRANS USA CORPORATION
158 Tices Lane High View Industrial Park East Brunswick, NJ 08881 6 (201) 254-3 020 Telex 138-1 22
SPLITTERS
MODEL TF -7A
MODEL TF -7A TV FM SPLITTER
SPECIFICATIONS: Frequency Range: Insertion Loss:
Isolation:
Impedance:
5-450 MHz TV 0.5 dBmax. FM 4dB max. TV- FM 120-150 MHz 22 dB min.
150-300 MHz 35 dB min. 300-450 MHz 30 dB min. 75 ohm
Same features as TF -7
MODEL OS- 201
MODEL OS- 201
OUTDOOR 2- WAY HYBRID SPLITTER
SPECIFICATIONS:
Bandwidth:
5-450 MHz
Insertion Loss:
3.2 dB max.
Frequency Response: · . 25 dB
Isolation Between Output: 30 dB min.
Return Loss:
20 dB min.
FEATURES: ·Weatherproof and corrosion resistant die cast A-360 aluminum
alloy housing · Built-in grounding block ·Stand mounted or wall mounted · Epoxy sealing
ritGs PASS
· FILTER
MODEL FCB-1
MODEL FCB-1
HIGH PASS FILTER
SPECIFICATIONS: Frequency Range: Cut Off Frequency: Insertion Loss: Filter Feature: Impedance:
54-450 MHz 50 MHz 1dB 35 dB 75 ohm
MODEL OS- 401
MODEL OS- 401
OUTDOOR 4- WAY HYBRID SPLITTER
SPECIFICATIONS:
Bandwidth:
5-450 MHz
Frequency Response: · . 25 dB
Insertion Loss:
7dB max.
Return Loss:
20 dB min.
Isolation:
30 dB min.
FEATURES: ·Weatherproof and corrosion resistant die cast A-360 aluminum
alloy housing · Built-in grounding block ·Stand mounted or wall mounted ·Epoxy sealing
VRF-162
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
TRANS USA CORPORATION
158 Tices Lane High View Industrial Park East Brunswick, NJ 088816 (201) 254-3020 Telex 138-122
SPLITTERS
SP- 204
2-WAY HYBRID SPLITTERS MODELS SP-203, SP-204 Indoor 2-way hybrid splitters. Designed to divide signal into two, provide high isolation between outputs.
SPECIFICATIONS
Bandwidth: 5-450 MHz Insertion Loss: 3.2 dB max. Frequency Response: -· . 25 dB Isolation Between Output: 30 dB min. Return Loss: 20 dB min.
FEATURES
· Totally Shielded Housing · Brass Connector · Epoxy Sealing
SPECIFICATIONS ( SP-401) Bandwidth: 5-450 MHz Frequency Response: ±. 25 dB Insertion Loss: 7dB max. Return Loss: 20 dB min. Isolation: 30 dB min.
3, 4-WAY INDOOR/OUTDOOR HYBRID SPLITTERS MODELS SP-303, SP-403 To divide signal into 3, 4outputs.
FEATURES
· Nickel Plated Die Cast Housing · Totally Weather Shielded · Stainless Steel Bottom Plate · Epoxy Sealing
SPECIFICATIONS ( SP-303) Bandwidth: 5-450 MHz Frequency Response: -t.25 dB Insertion Loss: 3.5 dB max., 1port
7.0 dB max., 2ports
Return Loss: 20 dB min. Isolation: 30 dB min.
3, 4-WAY HYBRID SPLITTERS MODELS SP-301, SP-401 3, 4- Way indoor hybrid splitters -- to divide signal into 3, 4
outputs.
SPECIFICATIONS ( SP-301) Bandwidth: 5-450 MHz Frequency Response: 1.25 dB Insertion Loss: 3.5 dB max., 1port; 7.0 dB max., 2ports Return Loss: 20 dB min. Isolation: 30 dB min.
SP- 403
SPECIFICATIONS ( SP-403)
Bandwidth: 5-450 MHz Frequency Response: ±. 25 dB Insertion Loss: 7dB max. Return Loss: 20 dB min. Isolation: 30 dB min.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-163
TRANS USA CORPORATION
158 Tices Lane High View Industrial Park East Brunswick, NJ 088816 (201) 254-3020 Telex 138-122
SP- 201
2-WAY HYBRID SPLITTERS
MODEL: SP- 201, SP-202-
Indoor/Outdoor
SPECIFICATIONS
FEATURES:
· Bandwidth: 5-450MHz
· Insertion loss: 3.2dB max. ·Frequency response: ± . 25dB
·Nickel plated die cast housing · Built-in grounding block
(SP- 201)
· Isolation between output: 30dB min.
· Return loss: 20dB min.
·Totally weather shielded ·Stainless steel bottom plate ·Epoxy sealing
SPLITTERS/TAPS
1- WAY DIRECTIONAL TAPS
FEATURES · Brass connector ·Totally shielded housing ·Epoxy sealing ·Nickel plated
MODEL IT -10, IT -12
SPECIFICATIONS · Bandwidth: 1-450MHz ·Return loss: 20dB min. · Isolation: 30dB min.
·Tap Values ·Insertion Loss:
0.8
12
18
20
24
28
32
dB
10
0.7
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
dB
SP- 802
8-WAY HYBRID SPLITTER
MODEL SP- 802- Indoor/Outdoor
SPECIFICATIONS · Bandwidth: 5-450MHz ·Frequency response: ±. 25dB ·Insertion loss: 10dB · Return loss: 20dB min. ·Isolation: 30dB min.
FEATURES
· Nickel plated die cast housing ·Totally weather shielded ·Stainless steel bottom plate ·Epoxy sealing
2- WAY DIRECTIONAL TAP
FEATURES · Brass connector ·Totally shielded housing ·Chrome plated
MODEL IT -20
SPECIFICATIONS · Bandwidth: 1-450MHz · Return loss: 20dB min.
r·Tap Values: ·Insertion Loss:
0.8
12
18
20
24
28
3.2
1.2
0.7
0.8
0.5
0.5
32 dB 0.5 dB
S-777
4- WAY DIRECTIONAL TAP
FEATURES · Brass connector ·Totally shielded housing · Epoxy sealing ·Chrome plated
MODELS S-777, S-377, S-337 75 to 75 ohm and 75 to 300 ohm Coax Cable Switch
SPECIFICATIONS · Frequency range ·Output impedance
· Input impedance ·Insertion loss ·Return loss
· Isolation
S-777
75 ohm 75 ohm 75 ohm 0.2 dB 20 dB 60 dB
5-890 MHz
S-377
S-337
75 ohm 300 ohm 75 ohm 75 ohm
300 ohm 300 ohm
0.6 dB 0.6 dB
20 dB
20 dB
60 dB
60dB
MODEL IT -40
SPECIFICATIONS · Bandwidth: 1-400MHz · Return loss: 20dB min.
·Tap Values ·Insertion Lose
12
18
20
24
28
32
dB
3.5
1.5
0.75
0.5
0.5
0.5
dB
VRF-164
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
UNR-ROHN
DIVISION OF UNR, INC.
P.O. Box 2000 6718 West Plank Road Peoria, IL 61656 (309) 697-4400 TWX 910-652-0646
ROHN NO. 25G TOWER
General Purpose Communication or Heavy- Duty TV Tower. The 25G will satisfy atremendously wide range of tower needs.
Built on a12-1/2" equilateral triangular design with continuous steel "zig-zag" cross- bracing entirely electric welded and fabricated in precision equipment. The 8 " zig-zag" braces per 10' section mean more than usual strength.
CONSTRUCTION Unequalled Sturdiness...Extra heavy-duty 1-1 /4" steel tubing is used for side rails, resulting in far greater strength and sturdiness than ordinarily found in this size tower. SUPERIOR STRENGTH.
FINISH Famous ROHN Hot- Dip Galvanized long- life finish.
SPECIAL FEATURES The No. 25G uses double- bolted joints.., proven the best method of joining tower sections for sturdiness and dependability. The extra strength of the No. 25G allows it to be self-supporting provided a house bracket is used and can go 35 feet above this bracket under normal conditions. Under most guyed conditions the No. 25G is suitable to heights of 200 feet. Where special conditions or unusual antenna loading requirements must be met, we suggest you contact the Engineering Department for complete information. Assembly bolts and nuts are located within 1leg of each tower section.
SELF-SUPPORTING HEIGHTS FOR 25G TOWER*
WIND LOAD
Factor of Safety- 1.5
No. Ant.
2Ft. 2
Factor of Safety- 2.3
No. Ant.
2Ft.2
10.0 PSF ( 50 MPH) 14.4 PSF ( 60 MPH) 20.0 PSF ( 70.7 MPH)
72.4' 60.4'
51.3'
64.8' 52.9'
43.8'
58.4 48.7'
41.4'
50.9' 41.3'
34.1**
*See Installation Instruction ** Recommended
TOWERS
#25 TOWER
Part Number
Wt.
25G
10' tower section
40
20BG 25AG ST25AG 25AG1
3' top section for use as home TV top section 9' top section for use as home TV top section
8-1/2
31
5' short top section for use as home TV top section
18
Top section for use with communication antenna. Mast support
tube is 1-1/4" galvanized pipe, threaded on top and projecting
12" above apex of side rails
31
25AG2 25AG3
Top section for use with communication antenna. Mast support
tube is 2-1/4" O.D. tubing, 36" total length, extending 18"
above aoex of side rails
31
Top section for use with communication antenna. Mast support
tube is 2-1/4" 0.D. tubing, extending 12" above apex of side
rails. A 2" 0.D. antenna stub will fit snugly inside support tube . 31
25AG4
8' top section for use with communication antenna. Upper end terminates in 11" dia, flat, circular plate with 2-1/4" dia, hole in
25AG5
center
31
Top section for use with communication antenna. Mast support
25TG
tube is 2-3/4" 0.0. and 2-9/16" I.D. tubing, 18" total length
31
10' tapered base section
60
·25RG
10' insulator section for 25G tower ( includes three # 10470 post
insulators)
74
25ACL
10' anti- climb section ( for #25 and #20 towers)
115
25ACL3
3' anti- climb metal sheets for attaching to tower section
65
25JBK
Joint bolt kit
1/2
APL25G
Beacon plate
14
SB25G
3'4" short base section for concrete
10
·SBH25G 3'4" hinged short base section for concrete
14
·SDB25G Single drive base
20
·BPC2OG Concrete Base Plate
13
·BPC25G Concrete base plate
27
3/4X12PP Pier pin ( for BPC25G or 25TG --one required)
1
·BPH25G Hinged base plate for concrete
21
1/2X12138 Concrete base bolt with double nuts ( for BPH25G -- four
·FR25G ·PR25G ·BP25G ·DR25G DT25 RP25G
required) Flat roof mount Peak roof mount Base plate ( for use with drive rods) 2' drive rods ( set of 3) Drive tool Rotor post
1/2 24 14 7 8 1 3
RP25GCM Rotor post
2
AS25G
Accessory shelf. Triangular plate for mounting Ham "M" rotor
or mast bearing. Mounts inside of tower. When using Model
400 Rotor, plate must be redrilled
4
GA25G
Guy assembly ( bracket with torque bars)
10
GB25G
Guy bracket only
6
HB25AG
Adjustable house bracket ( 0to 15")
8
HB25BG
Adjustable house bracket 10 to 24")
11
HB25CG
Adjustable house bracket ( 0to 36")
17
HBU
Universal house bracket ( 6" to 30")
15
EB2525G TB50 TB75
Eave bracket ( universal)
7
Tower bushing for 25AG and ST25AG tops ( 1-1/4" I.D. x2" 0.D.11/2
Tower bushing for 25AG and ST25AG tops ( 1-1/2" (. D. x2" 0.0.(1/2
AB
Amateur bearing for use with 25AG4 top ( 2" x4" x10"
TB3 TB4
hardware) Heavy duty thrust bearing, recommended for 2" 0.0. tubing Heavy duty thrust bearing, recommended for 3" O.D. tubing
1 .2-1/2
3
BPL25G
(Disc.)
Top plate with guy lugs for mounting AB or TB3 bearing
7
BAS25G
UHF25G SA253UA
Bearing/accessory shelf section for mounting AB or TB3 bearing and rotor Side arm mount for UHF and FM antennas Side arm bracket for top antenna mounting alongside beacon
.18 4
(2-1/2" 0.D. tubing, 36" total length)
15
SA25G67 67" side arm with 1-1/4" I.D. support tube for mounting TV
receiving antenna ( not recommended and must be guyed to
resist twist)
25
TA25
Torque arm stabilizer assembly
35
25TDM2
Top dish mount w/2" 0.0. mast ( extends 2' above top plate)
34
25TDM2SP Top dish mount w/2" standard pipe ( extends 3' above top
plate)
44
25TDM2EH Top dish mount w/2" EH pipe ( extends 3' above top plate)
53
25TDM25SP Top dish mount w/2-1/2" standard pipe ( extends 3' above top
plate)
DM25G2
Face dish mount w/2" ( 2-3/8" 0.0.1 5' long standard pipe
4528
WP25G SR245 EF2545
Work platform ( for #25 and #20 towers)
10
Safety ring
8
Aluminum erection fixture, 12' long ( fits all models with 1-1/4"
side rails)
18
P2545
Pole only for EF2545
10
H2545
Head only for EF2545
8
*Towers mounted on these bases must be bracketed or guyed.
Part Number 25G030BRKT 25G040BRKT 25G050BRKT 25G060BRKT
25G070BRKT 25G080BRKT
30' Complete Bracketed Tower 40' Complete Bracketed Tower 50' Complete Bracketed Tower 60' Complete Bracketed Tower
70' Complete Bracketed Tower 80' Complete Bracketed Tower
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-165
UNR-ROHN
DIVISION OF UNR, INC.
P.O. Box 2000 6718 West Plank Road Peoria, IL 61656 (309) 697-4400 TWX 910-652-0646
ROHN® NO. 45 COMMUNICATION TOWER
This tower is an 18 inch triangular pattern suitable for heights to 300 feet with proper guying. A true multi-user tower.
DESIGN ROHN No. 45 tower is designed in an 18 inch equilateral triangular pattern. The three legs of the tower are of heavy, 14 gauge, special quality steel. The cross bracing is the ROHN " zig-zag" design using a continuous, solid steel rod, electric welded to side rails every 15 inches. All sections are 10 feet in length.
USAGE This tower is suitable for mounting communication antennas or other equipment under normal conditions for heights up to amaximum of 300 feet. See specification sheets for complete guying and wind load information.
I45
TOWERS
145 TOWER
Part Number
Wt.
45G
10' tower section
70
45AG
9' top section
52
45AG1
Top section. Mast support tube is 1-1/4" gab". pipe, threaded
on top and projecting 12" above apex of side rails
60
45AG2
Top section. Mast support tube is 2-3/8" O.D. tubing, 36"
total length, extending 18" above apex of side rails
60
45AG3
Top section. Mast support tube is 2-1/4" 0.D. tubing,
extending 12" above apex of side rails. A 2" 0.D. antenna
stub will fit snugly inside support tube
60
45AG4
7' top section. Upper end terminates in flat, triangular plate
with 3-1/8" dia, hole in center
52
45AG5 45TG
Top section. Mast support tube is 2-3/4" 0.D. and 2-9/16" I.D. tubing, 18" total length
10' tapered base section
so so
·45RG
10' insulator section for 45G tower ( includes 3 # 10470
insulators)
104
45ACL
10' anti- climb section
165
45ACL3
3anti-climb metal sheets for attaching to tower section
100
5545G
20' adaptor section for joining 45G and 55G sections
160
45JBK
Joint bolt kit
3/4
APL45G
Beacon plate
17
SB45G
5' short base section for concrete
35
·BPC45G 3/4X12PP
Concrete base plate Pier pin ( for BPC45G or 45TG - one required)
391
·BPH45G
Hinged base plate for concrete
53
1 /2X12BB Concrete base bolt with double nuts ( for BPH45G - four
required)
1/2
·FR45G
Flat roof mount
34
AS455G
Accessory shelf. Plate for mounting Ham " M" rotor or mast
bearing. Mounts inside of tower. When using Model 400
GA45G
rotor, plate must be redrilled Guy assembly ( bracket with torque bars)
z8o
GB45G
Guy bracket only
16
HBU
Universal house bracket ( 6" to 30")
15
TB50
Tower bushing for 45AG top ( 1-1/4" I.D. x2" 0.D.)
1/2
TB75
Tower bushing for 45AG top ( 1-1/2" I.D. x2" 0.D.)
1/2
AB
Amateur bearing for use with 45AG4 top ( 2" x4" x10"
hardware)
1
TB3
Heavy duty thrust bearing, recommended for 2" O.D.
tubing
2-1/2
TB4
Heavy duty thrust bearing, recommended for 3" O.D. tubing .... 3
BPL45G
Top plate with guy lugs for mounting AB, TB3 or TB4 bearing .. 17
SA253UA Side arm assembly, 2-1/2' to 3' extension, with 2-1/4"
support tube
28
SAB45G2 Discontinued ( Replaced by SA253UA)
15
SA45G224 Discontinued ( Replaced by SA253UA)
fl
··TA45
Torque arm stabilizer assembly
56
·"45TDM2
Top dish mount w/2" O.D. mast ( extends 3' above top plate) 60
"·45TDM2SP ··45TDM2EH
Top dish mount w/2" standard pipe ( extends 5' above top plate) Top dish mount w/2" EH pipe ( extends 5' above top plate)
aaos
··45TDM25SP Top dish mount w/2-1/2" standard pipe ( extends 5' above
top plate)
90
··45TDM25EH Top dish mount w/2-1/2" EH pipe ( extends 5' above top
plate)
110
DM45G2
Face dish mount w/2" ( 2-3/8" 0.D.) 5' long standard pipe
52
DM454
Face dish mount w/4" ( 4-1/2" 0.D.) 5' long standard pipe
se
WP45G
Work platform
14
SR245
Safety ring
8
EF2545
Aluminum erection fixture, 12' long ( fits all models with
1-1/4" side rails) ( use to raise one 10' section at atime)
18
P2545
Pole only for EF2545
10
H2545
Head only for EF2545
*Towers mounted on these bases must be bracketed or guyed. **This item Is not to be used without proper design consideration.
/55
ROHN® NO. 55 COMMUNICATION TOWER
GENERAL USE This tower lends itself to awide variety of uses commonly encountered in the communications field. Adaptability to varying heights and loading requirements are two of the strong points for this model.
DESIGN This tower was engineered to provide excellent strength in heights up to 400 ft. in a30 lb. per sq. ft. wind load. When properly installed and guyed, this tower will support approximately 10 sq. ft. of antenna. Because of this rugged design the No. 55 tower satisfies a broad range of communication uses, particularly where unusual wind loading and height requirements exist.
CONSTRUCTION Constructed on an 18-1/2" equilateral triangle pattern, utilizing 1-1/2" high- strength tubing for the side rails. The " zig-zag" cross bracing is formed from acontinuous 7/16" solid steel rod electrically welded every 15-3/4" on the side rails. Each 10' section is sleeve joined to the other and double bolted to provide superior strength.
055 TOWER
Part Number 55G 55TG
·55ACL ·55ACL3 5545G 55JBK
APL55G SB55G BPC55G 3/4X12PP GA55G GB55G ·BPL55G
·AB
"TB3
·TB4 ·SA2r33UA
TA55 "55TD M2 ·55TDM2SP
·55TDM2EH ·55TDM25SP
·55TDM25EH ·DM55G2 "DM554
EF5565 EF6520
EF6520RH SR55 WP55G
Wt.
10' tower section
100
10' tapered base section
156
10' welded anti-climb section
185
3anti- climb metal sheets for attaching to tower section
100
20' adaptor section for joining 45G and 55G sections
186
Joint bolt kit
1
Beacon plate
18
5' short base section for concrete
45
Concrete base plate
40
Pier pin ( for BPC55G or 55TG - one required)
1
Guy assembly ( bracket with torque bars)
28
Guy bracket only
19
Top plate with guy lugs for mounting AB, TB3 or TB4
bearing
25
Amateur bearing for use with appropriate top ( 2" x4"
x10" hardware)
1
Heavy duty thrust bearing, recommended for 2" 0.D.
tubing
2-1/2
Heavy duty thrust bearing, recommended for 3" 0.D. tubing . .. . 3
Side arm assembly, 2-1/2' to 3' extension, with 2-1/4" 0.1).
support tube
28
Torque arm stabilizer assembly
60
Top dish mount w/2" 0.D. mast ( extends 3' above top plate) 60
Top dish mount w/2" standard pipe ( extends 5' above top plate)
so
Top dish mount w/2" EH pipe ( extends 5' above top plate)
90
Top dish mount w/2-1/2" standard pipe ( extends 5' above
top plate)
95
Top dish mount w/2-1/2" EH pipe ( extends 5' above top plate) 110 Side face dish mount w/2" ( 2-3/8" 0.D.) 5' long standard pipe .46
Side face dish mount w/4" ( 4-1/2" 0.D.) 5' long standard pipe 69
16' aluminum erection fixture for #55 or 10' #65 sections
70
16' heavy duty aluminum erection fixture for #55 or 20'
#65 sections
100
Erection fixture ( same as above) with rotating head
115
Safety ring
10
Work platform
15
Note: Erection fixtures should be used to raise one 10' or 20' section at a time. This item is not to be used without proper design consideration.
VRF-166
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
UNR-ROHN
DIVISION OF UNR, INC.
P.O. Box 2000 6718 West Plank Road Peoria, IL 61656 (309) 697-4400 TVVX 910-652-0646
TOWERS
ROHN NO. 80 COMMUNICATION TOWER
This tower is designed specifically for microwave installations, heavy duty communications, TV and FM broadcast and meterological equipment installations.
CONSTRUCTION The No. 80 tower is constructed in an equilateral triangular pattern with steel legs and crossbracing in apattern as indicated by the insert. The triangular size is 41" on leg centers and the diameter of the tower legs vary to meet the requirements of the installation. This feature permits considerable flexibility in supplying atower tailored to specifically meet and adequately handle the equipment to be installed. Cross- bracing is of tubular steel with bolted construction.
FINISH All components of this tower are completely hot dip galvanized after fabrication to protect all areas of the tower. A minimum of 2ounces of zinc of square feet of surface is applied throughout including bolts.
RATING This tower is rated for installation up to 800 feet using variable size and weight of tubular steel components. Each tower is individually engineered to handle aparticular job.
180 TOWER
Part Number
wt.
83P
20' standard tower section
435
83PH
20' standard tower section
520
84
20' standard tower section
585
84H
20' standard tower section
685
845H
20' standard tower section
715
85
20' standard tower section
730
85H
20' standard tower section
900
83PX
83PHX 84X 84XTA 84HX 84HXTA
84 HXTA3 845HX 85X 85HX
20' X- braced tower section
20' X- braced tower section 20' X- braced tower section 20' X- braced tower section ( for use with TA80H) 20' X- braced tower section 20' X- braced tower section ( for use with TABOH)
3' extension for 84HXTA tower section 20' 84HX transition section with 85 feet 20' X- braced tower section 20' X- braced tower section
560
640 680 1110 800 1230
225 830 846 1015
84HC
15' standard tower section
545
84HXC
15' X- braced tower section
620
Et3ACL
Anti- climb panels
596
84ACL
Anti- climb panels
600
BOTB
5' welded tapered base section
393
85TB
5' welded tapered base section
465
80TBKD
5' knocked down tapered base section
400
80TBI
5' welded tapered base section ( drilled to fit base insulator)
360
86TBI
5' welded tapered base section ( drilled to fit base insulator)
450
80TBKDI
5' knocked down tapered base section
(drilled to fit base insulator)
525
3/4 X16B B Concrete base bolt with double nuts ( 12 required) 15/16 X16PP Pier pin for tapered bases ( one required)
1-1/2 3
DP80A
Drainage plates ( set of 3)
20
DP85A
Drainage plates ( set of 3)
44
GA80
Guy assembly ( bracket with torque bars)
115
GA85
Guy assembly ( bracket with torque bars)
140
*TA838
8" channel type torque arm ( 7-1/2')
336
*TA8310
10" channel type torque arm ( 7-1/2')
420
`TA8312
12" channel type torque arm 17-1/2')
680
·TA848
8" channel type torque arm ( 7-1/2')
340
·TA8410
10" channel type torque arm ( 7-1/2')
425
*TA8412
12" channel type torque arm ( 7-1/2')
686
·TA858
8" channel type torque arm ( 7-1/2')
346
*TAM°
10" channel type torque arm ( 7-1/2')
430
·TA8512
12" channel type torque arm ( 7-1/2')
595
*TA8OH
Heavy duty microwave torque arm ( 15')
740
*TA85H
Heavy duty microwave torque arm ( 15')
745
"DM8OF
Dish mount, face mounted, with 4" ( 4-1/2" 0.D.) 5' long pipe 200
*DM8OFTBC Dish mount ( same as above) with tie back clips
205
"DM8OFTBT Dish mount ( same as above) with tie back tube
265
APLEt3M
Beacon plate for inside or outside tower
(for sections 83P and 83PH)
50
APL84M
Beacon plate for inside or outside tower ( for sections 84 and 84H). . 50
APL85M
Beacon plate for inside or outside tower ( for sections 85 and 85H) 50
APL6A
Beacon plate ( leg mounted) and two cap plates with nuts and
bolts ( for sections 83P, 83PH, 84 and 84H)
20
APL7A
Beacon plate ( leg mounted) and two cap plates with nuts and
bolts ( for sections 85 and 85H)
24
CP6A
Cap plates ( set of 3w/nuts and bolts) for sections 83P, 83PH,
84 and 84H)
7
CP7A
Cap plates ( set of 3w/nuts and bolts) for sections 85 and 85H
11
180 LBOH
1..80F L8OFH LBOIF
L80IFH
Ladder, standard, leg mounted- 10' or 20' sections Ladder, heavy, leg mounted- 10' or 20' sections
Ladder, standard, face mounted -- 10' or 20' sections Ladder, heavy, face mounted- 10' or 20' sections Ladder, standard, inside corner mounted- 20' sections
Ladder, heavy, inside corner mounted- 20' sections
4/ft. 8/ft.
4/ft. 8/ft. 4/ft.
8/ft.
S80
Step bolts, one leg
1/ft.
SOL8OH SOH8OH
Ladder step- off assembly for bypassing heavy duty torque arm,
consisting of two platforms and 30' face mounted
standard ladder
213
Ladder step- off assembly for bypassing heavy duty torque arm,
consisting of two platforms and 30' face mounted heavy
ladder
331
SM80 SM85
Shims ( set of 151 Shims ( set of 151
For heavy 1/8" braces on standard sections For heavy 1/8" braces on X- braced sections
add 90/ wt. add 1800 wt.
This item is not to be used without proper design consideration.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-167
UNR-ROHN
DIVISION OF UNR, INC.
P.O. Box 2000 6718 West Plank Road Peoria, IL 61656 (309) 697-4400 TVVX 910-652-0646
TOWERS
Part Number
SELF-SUPPORTING TOWER SSVN SERIES
Standard Welded Tower Sections
1W
1WB 2W 2WB 2WST 3WN
3WNB 3WNST
18' straight section
10' straight section 20' tapered section 10' straight section 20' straight section 20' tapered section
10' straight section 20' straight section
Wt.
116 65
180
90
190 230 125 250
4N
5N 6N
7N 8N
9N
10N 11N
Standard Knock Down ( Tapered) Tower Sections
20' section 20' section 20' section 20' section 20' section 20' section 20' section 20' section
Lugs for step bolts welded to one leg of section included in prices -- approx. 15" spacing
12N 13N
14N 15N 16N
20' section 20' section
20' section 20' section 20' section
Lugs for step bolts welded to all 3 legs of section included in prices -- approx. 15" spacing
435 540 480 545 700 720 830 1410
1515 1700 2470 3156 3305
Standard Knock Down ( Straight) Tower Sections
4N B 4NST 5NB 5NST 6NST 7NST 8NST 9NST 1ONST
11NST
10' section 20' section 10' section 20' section 20' section 20' section 20' section 20' section 20' section
20' section
Lugs for step bolts welded to one leg of section included in prices -- approx. 15" spacing
250 480 300 590 530 605 796 935 1110
1746
SSV SELF-SUPPORTING COMMUNICATION TOWERS
Designed for a minimum wind load of 30 psf. Towers requiring higher wind or ice loads are no problem due to the tower's amazing versatility.
·Standard designs available in heights to 500 feet depending on loading. Special towers available depending on specific requirements.
·The SSV series make use of primarily knock-down construction for on-site assembly, which reduces shipping costs.
·Towers for minimal loadings are available in welded construction in heights up to 60 feet, shipped in 20 foot sections.
·All components and hardware are Hot Dip Galvanized after fabrication with azinc coating per E.I.A. Standards.
·All ROHN SSV series towers are engineered, designed and fabricated to meet or exceed latest E.I.A. specifications.
Heavy Duty Knock Down ( Tapered) Tower Sections
6N
7N 8N 9NH
10NH 11N
20' section
20' section 20' section 20' section
20' section 20' section
Lugs for step bolts welded to one leg of section included in prices-- approx. 15" spacing
12NH
13NH 14NH 15NH 16NH
20' section
20' section 20' section 20' section 20' section
Lugs for step bolts welded to all 3 legs of section included in prices -- approx. 15" spacing
Heavy Duty Knock Down ( Straight) Tower Sections
6NST 20' section 7NST 20' section 8NST 20' section 9NHST 20'section 10NHST 20' section
11NST 20'section
Lugs for step bolts welded to one leg of section included in prices -- approx. 15" spacing
VRF-168
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
480 545 700 840 945 1410
1730 1960 2735 3530 3680
530 605 796
1045 1220
1746
UNR-ROHN
DIVISION OF UNR, INC.
P.O. Box 2000 6718 West Plank Road Peoria, IL 61656 (309) 697-4400 TWX 910-652-0646
SSV CONTINUED
SSV SELF SUPPORTING TOWER
Anchor Bolts for Standard and Heavy Duty Sections
Part Number
Individual Anchor Bolts ( 12 required per tower)
3/8X18AB For sections 1and 2
1 / 2X24AB For section 3
5/8X30AB For sections 4, 5, 6, 7, 8and 9 3/4X36AB For section 10
7/8X42AB For sections 11, 12 and 13
1X48AB 1X72AB
For sections 14, 15N and 16N For sections 15NH and 16N H
Wt.
3/4 1-1/2
3 5-1/2
13 18
Anchor Bolt Assemblies
6NAB
For sections 6N, 7N, 8N, 9N and 9HN
(consists of 12-5/8X30AB w/templates)
45
10NAB
For sections 10N and 10NH
(consists of 12 - 3/4X36AB w/templates)
70
11NAB
For sections 11N, 12N, I2NH, 13N and 13NH
(consists of 12 - 7 / 8X42 w/templates)
120
14NAB 15NHAB
For sections 14N, 14NH, 15N and 16N ( consists of 12 - 1X48A13
w/templates)
165
For sections 15NH and 16N H
(consists of 12 - 1X72AB w/templates)
225
TOWERS
Accessories for Standard and Heavy Duty Sections
Tapered Tops
1TT
For sections 1W. IWB or 2W
34TTTTN
5TTN 6TT
For sections 2WB. 2WST or 3WN For sections 3WN8, 3WNST or 4N For sections 4NB, 4NST or 5N For sections 5N13, 5NST or 6N
4' Short Base Sections
SB2
For section 2W
SB3
For section 3WN
SB4
For section 4N
SB5
For section 5N
WT. 18 20 21 23
25
45
6e5o
105
Beacon Plates and Cap Plates APL1W2WA Beacon plate for section 1W or 2W APL3WNA Beacon plate for section 3WN
26 23
APL4A
Beacon plate for section 4N
13
APL4HA
Beacon plate and two cap plates for sections 5N or 6N
15
APL5A
Beacon plate and two cap plates for sections 7N, 8N, 9N or 10N 15
APL6A
Beacon plate and two cap plates for section 11N
16
APL7A
Beacon plate and two cap plates for sections 12N, 13N or 14N
17
CP4A CP5A
CP6A CP7A
Cap plates ( set of 3w/nuts and bolts) for section 6N
15
Cap plates ( set of 3w/nuts and bolts) for sections 7N, 8N, 9N
or 10N
15
Cap plates ( set of 3w/nuts and bolts) for section 11N
15
Cap plates ( set of 3w/nuts and bolts) for sections 12N, 13N
or 14N
15
BCA5A BCA6A BCA7A
Beacon plate, cap plate and antenna support tube for sections
6NST, 7N, 8N, 9N or ION
36
Beacon plate, cap plate and antenna support tube for section 11N 37
Beacon plate, cap plate and antenna suport tube for sections
12N, 13N or 14N
39
Side Arm Brackets for Top Antenna Mounting Alongside Beacon
SAB1W
For section 1W
15
SAB2W
For section 2W
15
SAB3WN For section 3WN
15
SAB45N
For sections 4N or 5N
15
SA32PL
For sections 6and 7
100
SA325PL
For sections 8, 9and 10
100
SA33PL
For section 11
100
Type 1W Side Arm Booms for SSVN Sections**
SSV256B 6' boom for sections 2through 5
61
SSV259B 9' boom for sections 2through 5
81
SSV66B
6 boom for section 6
69
SSV679B 9' boom for sections 6and 7
89
SSV6712B 12' boom for sections 6and 7
110
SSV715B 15' boom for section 7
133
SSV89B
9' boom for section 8
92
SSV8912B 12' boom for sections 8and 9
113
SSV891015B 15' boom for sections 8, 9and 10
136
SSV91018B 18' boom for sections 9and 10
147
·· Boom lengths mentioned above are the total length of the boom. Each boom includes an antenna mast kit w/2" ( 2-3/8" 0.0.1 3' long standard pipe and hard-
ware, plus kit w/hardware for mounting boom to required section. NOTE: Total required boom length is determined by section number, section width at mounting elevation and amount of the boom needed as side arm to extend beyond face of tower on one side. ( See appropriate drawings for face widths of tower sections
and Dwg. C-710348 for boom installation information).
Miscellaneous
LSSVN
Ladder, leg mounted
4/ft
LSSVNIX Ladder, inside corner mounted, for X- braced sections 7NST
through 16
8/ft.
DMSSL
Leg dish mount w/4" ( 4-1/2" 0.0.1 5' long standard pipe
135
DMSSLTB Leg dish mount ( same as above) with tie back clips
150
RMBSS
Reflector mount ( for leg mounting)
130
EFSSV
Erection fixture, 16' long ( for use w/sections 2through 10 only) . .90
EFSSVRH Erection fixture ( same as above) with rotating head
100
NOTE: Erection fixtures should be used to raise 10' or 20' sections only (one section at a time).
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-169
WAVETEK CORP.
9191 Tower Centre Drive San Diego, CA 92122 (619) 450-9971
TEST EQUIPMENT
TVRO/BENCH SWEEP SYSTEM MODEL 1084
Model 1084 is an economical sweep generator that features simple operation, 1% display linearity, and digital readout.
Versatile Testing With Adjustable Bandwidths From 200kHz to 1GHz Model 1084 has three operating modes ( CW, F, and Full Sweep) to facilitate both broadband and narrowband measurements. In the CW mode, frequency is selected by the frequency control and is displayed by the frequency indicator with 1MHz resolution. In the .1Fmode, center frequency is selected by the frequency control and sweep width is controlled by a100MHz step selector and 100MHz vernier. In the Full Sweep mode, the instrument sweeps from 3.5 to 4.5GHz. The frequency control then controls a variable pinball marker. The marker frequency is identified by the four- digit vacuum fluorescent display.
Test Made Simple At Any Sweep Rate Simple pushbutton control of the sweep characteristics of Model 1084 is achieved through the use of digital front- panel circuitry.
The instrument is equipped with two sweep modes and three sweep rates. The single sweep mode, which is manually initiated by the trigger button, enables the unit to sweep through asingle cycle. The recur mode allows the unit to automatically sweep through continuously repeating cycles. Sweep time is continuously variable from 0.01 to 100 sec. sweep. Additionally, aline- locked sweep rate may be selected ( sweep time equals one-half line period).
Accurate Frequency Location Wavetek's Model 1084 includes a built-in marker system to aid in simple location of frequency and sweep width. Birdy bypass markers with frequencies of 1, 10, and 100MHz located harmonically through the spectrum are tools for the operator to accurately locate any given frequency with 1MHz resolution. This crystal- controlled system eliminates guessing or the need for calibrated external marker inputs except for those measurements requiring identification of specific frequencies with resolutions better than 1MHz. An external marker input is provided and is controlled via an external frequency source for those applications.
Power Level Accurately Displayed For compatibility with both small signal and medium- power testing, the unit has an output level of + 13dBm and is continuously
adjustable to - 60dBm. Output level is read from athree- digit vacuum fluorescent display with . 1dBm resolution. Additionally, the instrument's level system has a 10dB/step attenuator for coarse level settings, and an 11dB vernier which utilizes an electronic P.1. N. diode attenuator. This enables the user to finely adjust signal level for extremely accurate measurements.
System Level Correction Inaccuracies found in test setups caused by high-frequency rolloff of system components, such as adaptors, cables or " lossy" connectors, can be compensated for via the slope control on the rear panel of the instrument. Simply connect all system components except for the device under test. Look at the detected response of the network and adjust the slope control I + 1dB / GHz) to compensate for inherent system errors which typically result in undesirable high-frequency rolloff. Then insert the device under test in the setup. Absolute gain or loss measurements can now be made.
Signal Generator Measurements Possible In many communications systems, the sweep test at some point loses its effectiveness and signal generators take over where the sweep generator leaves off. Model 1084 Sweep Generator not only is acost-effective sweep source, but, through avery simple interface to aphase- locking counter, can take up the slack in system testing and replace asignal generator for some measurements. This makes it unnecessary to purchase two RF sources and reduces the chance of error caused by testing the same device with signals of differing purity. Thus, the system not only has phase- locking capabilities, but can also adapt the instrument to the IEEE-488 bus.
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 1084
FREQUENCY
Range
35 to 45 GHz
Sweep Width
'IF 500 kHz to 1000 MHz Full Sweep 35 to 45GHz
Readout
31 /2 digit LED
Resolution
1 MHz
Operating Modes CW. .1F. and Full Sweep
Accuracy
CW. Center Frequency of F.
and Variable marker. ± 10 MHz
Frequency accuracy can be improved
to ± 1MHz at a specific frequency
Sweep width at 100 MHz intervals
± 10 MHz
Display Linearity 1% at maximum sweep width
Drill < 800 kHz for 10 minutes
NOTE A: a consul', rernperarote AIN; 5 now warm up
RF OUTPUT
Impedance
50
Output Connector
Type N
Power Level Range + 13 to - 60 dBm ( 50 If
Attenuation Continuously adiustable in 10 dB steps
with a 11 dB vernier Output level is displayed on a 3digit readout with 0 1
dB resolution
Accuracy
Step attenuator
± ( 0 3dB + 1% of attenuation) Vernier attenuallon ± 0 5dB
Output FlatnessdB
t0 5
SPECTRAL PURITY
Harmonic Oudt Elcput > 30
Nonharmonics
Non-delectable
Residual FM ( CW Mode) < 10 kHz peak
SWEEP CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Modes
Recur rIng and single sweep
Sweep Time
Fast
0010 to 1sec ( typical)
Slow
1to 100 sec ( typical)
Line
···· 1/ 4 of AC line period
Horizontal Output
0 to 10 volts Impedance 1000 O
Blanking
RF output is blanked during sweep retrace
MARKER SYSTEM
RF Markers Birdy bypass marker system is controlled by front- panel switch
which provides selection of harmonic markers in these combinations
100 MHz only 100 MHz and 10 MHz. or 100 MHz. 10 MHz. & 1MHz
Accuracy
Width
approximately Aidotoutsota5b0010eW fkr5;m:
Amplitude
approximately 1Amdviutsotalblyfp ropm
Variable Marker
(Full Sweep Mode Only) The 10- turn potentiometer and 31/2 digit frequency display function aS
variable marker The marker produces
a bright spot on the display by momentarily delaying the sweep ramp
for approximately 2 msec Accuracy is ± 10 MHz
REMOTE PROGRAMMING
Frequency Rear-panel lack permits remote control
of center frequency, sweep width and external frequency modulation
Level
Rear- panel lack permits externat control of RF output level over greater
than 10 dB range
Trigger
TTL input, during high to low transition Also. by contact closure to ground
OUTPUTS Pen Litt Blanking
Sweep Reference Power Supply
Contact cl_osiu5rve dduurninngg
sswweeeepp + 15V during retrace.
0 to 10V
Output of 1V/100 MHz
+ 18V. - 18V. and common. External current limited to 10 mA
GENERAL
Dimensions
28.6 cm ( 11 1/4 in ) wide. 13.3 cm ( 51/4 in ) high.
26.7 cm ( 10 1/2 in.) deep
Weight
4.9 kg ( 10.4 lb.) net. 68 kg ( 15 lb.) shipping.
Power
90 to 110V: 105 to 125V: 190 to 220V, or 210 to 250V. 50 to 400 Hz. approximately 35 watts.
VRF-170
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WAVETEK CORP.
91 91 Tower Centre Drive San Diego, CA 921 22 (61 9) 450-9971
TEST EQUIPMENT
MODELS 1067/1075/1801-B 1to 500 MHz BENCH SWEEP SYSTEM
A complete system is available for sweep testiig amplifiers, filters, and passives. With a good sweep system you can maintain your system components and avoid lengthy factory repair cycles. A Bench Sweep System also permits you to check components before they are installed in your system.
A Bench Sweep system is comprised of a sweep and marker generator, a comparator, and an oscilloscope The WAVETEK 400 MHz system offers you a choice of the Basic Model 1067 Sweep Generator or the more flexible Model 1801B Laboratory Style Sweeper. The sweeper is used in conjunction with the Model 1075 Comparator and the 1901C Large Screen Oscilloscope. The sweep generators both contain built-in marker generator systems, and can be purchased separately for use with existing scopes or comparators.
The Sweep Generator Comparator system can also be purchased for use with your own oscilloscope.
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 1067
RF SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Range
1to 40U MHz (1 lo 500 MHz optional)
Dial Calibration
50 MHz interve s (frequency vernier included)
Accuracy , nCW Mode (al 25"C)
5% of full sweep
Sweep Width
200 kHz to 400 MHz
wilog taper continuou;ly adjustable
Display Linearity
Spurious Signals Fundamental Harmonic Nonharmonic
(10 to 400 MHz) -30 dE1 below Output
30 dB below output
Residual FM (CW model
less than 20 kHz
Stability
100 kHzI5 minutes -
2MHz/8 hours ( af:er hour warm-up at constant temperature and allowing a
5minute stabilizing period after afrequency change)
Blanking
Retrace blanking of the
RF Output provided for sweep
operation Removed for CW operation
Impedance
75 ohms ( 50 ohms available at no extra coe
Outpu, Amplitude ( Max ) + 10 dBrrV
Level Calibration
50 dB in 10 dB steps,
vernier with + 710
- 7dBmV calibrated in 1dB intervals
Accuracy Vernier ± 10dB Step At tenuator ± 02dB/10 dB step
Output Flatness
n0 25 dB ( Measured with Wavetek 0171 detecior and includes an AC- DC bl=k (100 V max ) in RF output line
Output Connector
Type
SWEEP SPECIFICATIONS
Sweep Modes
Repetitive sweep. singe sweep. externally triggered
sweep, line- locked sweep
Sweep Time Horizontal Output
Continuously variable from less than 0 5Hz
to more than 60 Hz
10V p-ptriangular waveform symmetrical
about ground
MARKER SYSTEM
RP Markers
Putse and Birdy-type markers
are provided by plug-in -A Option Six sockets are pro-
vided for these options Birdy marker modules use
one socket, pulse markers use two
Accuracy Pulse Birdy
002% ( a! leading edge) 0 005% ( at center)
Width Purse Birdy
Amplitude
80 us adjustable, 100 lo 400 kHz
Adjustable approximately from 2mVpp to 2Vpp
REMOTE PROGRAMMING
A rear- panel ziorriector is provided for remote control eil frequency, sweep width and the 20 dB vernier level control. The
connections can also be used to provide external AM cr Fli1 Also provided is access lo ± 18 V ( 30 mAi. blanking and scope horizontal signals 10 drive the Model 1075 Cornparator
MECHANICAL Dimensions
Weight
28 6cm ( 11 V. in ) wide. 10 2cm ( 4in ) high.
26 7cm ( 10 1 /2 in ( deep
37kg ( 8 25 lbs net. approximately 55kg
(12 lbs shipping
115 or 230 VAC ± 10%. 50 to 60 Hz. 25 VA max
ENVIRONMENTAL
Spec,ficafinns apply at 25 °C ± 5°C Instrument will OPeraie from 0°C to 50 °C
MODEL 1076 SWEEP COMPARATOR
The Model 1076 Sweep Comparator allows easy, accurate measurement of frequency response characteristics of 75- ohm amplifiers and passive devices, by simultaneously displaying the input and output of the device on an oscilloscope screen. Calibrated attenuators allow the traces to be superimposed, permitting measurement of gain or loss at any frequency. A logarithmic detector allows measurement of return loss to 40 dB, using a bridge.
The 1076 is used in conjunction with a sweep generator, which provides RF, markers, and DC power. Frequency response of the 1076 is 1to 1000 MHz. Gain may be measured to 79.9 dB on 0.1 dB steps; loss is measurable to at least 65 dB.
The sweep is switched alternately between the reference channel and the channel containing the unit under test. The reference channel is closely matched to the test channel, including the length of the cables connecting to the unit under test, so that the only difference between the channels is the presence of the unit under test. Gain is measured by attenuating the test channel until the traces match; loss is measured by attenuating the reference channel. An RF post amplifier drives the internal detector. The detector output may be shaped to provide logarithmic or quasi- linear response.
The 1076 plugs directly into the Wavetek Models 1067, 1067-522, 1801B, and 1081.
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 1076
Frequency
1to 1000 MHz.
Gain Measurement Range 79.9 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
Loss Measurement Range 65 dB minimum with 1millivolticliv.
oscilloscope.
Impedance
75-ohm,
Connectors
75-ohm BNC.
Error Display ( LEDS) Excess sweep input will overload internal RF Post Amplifier
DENTOD Out Low impedance, 5000 Ohms nominal 0.5 to 0.7 volt, positive.
Scope Display Linear, normal and log ( 30 dB).
Power
Supplied by associated sweep generator.
Balance Adjustment Range ± 1dB level; ± 1dB slope.
GAIN/LOSS ACCURACY Error - dB
2-500 MHz 1-1000 MHz
Balance Ref. to Test ± 0.05 0.1 dB attenuator ± 0.1 1. dB attenuator ± 0.2 10 dB attenuator ± 0.5 Maximum error ± 0.85 dB
± 0.15 ± 02 ± 0.25 ± 1. ± 1.60 dB
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Wit' put Notice.
VRF-171
WAVETEK CORP.
91 91 Tower Centre Drive San Diego, CA 921 22 (61 9) 450-9 971
TEST EQUIPMENT
·
low MODEL 1905
1905
MODEL 1901C, 12- INCH MODEL 1905, 9- INCH DISPLAY SCOPES
1901C
The Model 1905 is a low cost, electromagnetic, X-Y display scope, ideal for use in displaying the sweep response of passive or active
circuits. High performance and low cost make this scope an excellent
choice for engineering laboratories, bench application, production facilities, educational institutions, and original equipment manufacturers.
MODEL 1901C
VERSATILITY
The 1901C Display Scope is designed to display sweep system
The Model 1905 weighs only 15 lbs. It is a versatile unit which
responses. It is an excellent display for Bench Sweep Systems as well
occupies asmall area of bench space. In addition to its compact size,
as set Top Converter Sweep Displays. The large 12" display lets you
it has a rugged exterior and carrying handle for easy portability to a
easily see amplifier responses over wide 300 to 400 MHz sweep
site location. The simple straightforward design of the magnetic
ranges. This dedicated display ( no internal sweep) is available with
deflection tube is ideal for point- by- point image construction. There
P-7 phosphor as well as the standard P-1. This unit also has an automatic blanking circuit preventing phosphor damage by blanking the
is no degradation of spot size as is normally found in electrostatic deflection tubes.
CRT when the horizontal input is removed.
ULTRASTABLE DISPLAY
SPECIAL MARKER DISPLAY
The Model 1905 features alarge 9- inch diagonal CRT with abright,
The 1901C has aZaxis modulation circuit that is designed to accept
stable, focused trace for ease of viewing. An automatic blanking
standard Birdy Markers and produce pinball ( bright spot) markers on
circuit prevents phosphor damage by blanking the CRT when the
the sweep display. This is extremely useful when using a variety of
horizontal input or the vertical input is removed.
markers such as those available with the 1402A converter sweeper. It also is easier to identify markers on the steep response of traps or other pass band type responses.
STABLE DISPLAY
The 1901C provides avery stable display. After ahalf hour warm-up, the trace will drift less than a half division in an eight hour period. This eliminates annoying trace repositioning while working on amplifiers or converters for an extended period of time.
PHOSPHORS
The standard phosphor for Model 1905 is P-1, a green phosphor. Other phosphors are available on special order.
CRT DISPLAY Phosphor
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 1905
23 cm diagonal ( 9 in.)
P-1 is standard Other phosphors are available on
special order.
Drift Typically less than 1/ 2 div for 8 houe (at a constant temperature after 1/ 2 hour warmup)
Protection Circuit
OPTIONS A: P-4 medium short persistence phosphor (white).
Graticule 1.2 cm/div.. 10 vertical. 14 horizontal.
Deflection
Magnetic.
Acceleration Voitage
8KV nominal.
Autobanking protects the phosphors in the event of loss Of deflection signal.
Either horizontal or vertical signals of
about 4div. (< 60 Hz) will cause "unblanking"
B: P-7 Long persistence phosphor. C: Clear faceplate ( instead of grid). D: Amber faceplate ( normally used
with P-7 Phosphor) without grid.
VERTICAL
SensitIvoy 4- position step attenuator for 1.10 and
100 mV and 1V/div,. continuously variable vernier between steps.
Impedance
374 k II
Bandwidth
DC to 15 kHz.
Z AXIS
Sensitivity
Adjustable from 1to 10V pp for full intensity modulation via 'ear panel contrast control.
Input Impedance
20 k
E: Amber faceplate with grid.
Coupling
Switchable ac-dc ( when ac coupled. maximum dc voltage plus ac peak not
to exceed 200V).
Bandwidth Flat from dc to 1MHz; 3dB down at 3.5 MHz. 10 dB down at 10 MHz.
Polarity
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 1901C
DISPLAY CRT Phosphor VERTICAL Sensitivity
Bandwidth Drift
Polarity
12 inch diagonal ( 30 CM). P-1 (meaium persisterice - green)
4position step attenuator ter 1. 10 and= mV and 1 V/div. continuously variable
vernier between steps. DC to 15 kHz
Typica ly less than 1 / 2 din for 8hours
tar aconstant temperature after 1/ 2 hour warm-up). Front- panel switch for
inve·sion of vertical ¡ gnat
HORIZONTAL
Sensitivity
Continuously adjustable from 01 V/div to over 10 Vichy
MARKER ADDER
Input Signal
Pulse or birdy
Sensitivilty ( Max )
Typically 0.5 V/div.
¡continuously adjustable with
rear- panel control)
Polarity
Rear- panel switch provides polarity reversal.
Input Impedance
Approximately 15 K ohms
Linearity
3%
Input Connector
BNC. rear panel
Drift
Typtiatcaallcyonlesstsantthatnem1 /2perdiavt.ufroer
8 hours after 1 /2
hour warmup).
Polarity
Switchable for inversion of vertical signal
HORIZONTAL
Sensitivity
Continuo4sly adjustable from 0.1V/div. to over 10 Vichy.
Impedence > 320 k
Bandwidth
DC to 1.5 kHz.
Coupling Linearity
Switchable ac-dc (when ac coupled. max. dc voltage plus ac peak not to
exceed 200V). 3%
Positive going voltage intensifies the trace. Internally changeable for positive blanking.
Input Connec -or
BNC, rear panel
GENERAL
Dimensions
29.8 cm ( 11 V. in wide. 24.8 cm ( 93/(i in.) high.
25.7 cm ( 10% in.) deep.
Weight 6.8 kg 05 lb) net 10 kg ( 22 lb) shipping.
Power
115/230V ± 10%. 50/60 Hz approximately 75 watt'.
OPTIONS
Non-standard phosphors are available on special order. Consult factory for Pricing
Input Connector
VRF-172
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without NotBiNcCe..rear panel.
WAVETEK CORP.
91 91 Tower Centre Drive
San Diego, CA 92122
(6 19) 450-9971
TEST EQUIPMENT
by a100 MHz/Step selector and a100 MHz vernier. In the Full Sweep mode, the start frequency is fixed at 1MHz and the stop frequency is fixed at 1 GHz. The ten-turn potentiometer and the 3-1/2 digit
frequency display operate as a 1to 1000 MHz variable marker.
+60 to -10 dBmV OUTPUT POWER
Model 1081 has an output power range of + 60 to - 10 dBmV. The output is continuously adjustable with a 10 dB/Step attenuator and an 11 dB vernier. Output level is displayed on a3digit readout with 0.1 dB resolution.
MARKER SYSTEM
MODELS 1081/1076 1to 1000 MHz
BENCH SWEEP SYSTEM
EXTENDED RANGE BENCH SWEEPING For bench sweep requirements exceeding the 1to 400 MHz range, the Model 1081 1to 1000 MHz Sweeper, and the Model 1076 Sweep Comparato· offer precision and ease of use previously unavailable. This system accurately displays measurements such as loss, gain, and return loss, while eliminating errors typically created in other systems by amplifier and display drift. Using aModel 1081 Sweeper, acalibrated dual- channel switching RF comparator, and a large- screen oscilliscope this system simultaneously compares a test and reference channel, allowing continuous monitoring of both the input signal ( reference channel) and the resulting output signal ( test channel) during testing. This 1 to 1000 MHz bench sweep system allows alignment and adjustment of system components, including amplifiers, filters, passives and cable. The addition of asuitable return loss bridge, such as the Wavetek Model FB40-75 extends further the usefulness of this system by allowing the direct reading of return loss. The Model FB40-75 connects directly to the Model 1076 Comparator.
MODEL 1081 1000 MHz SWEEP GENERATOR
Model 1081 is an economical, 1to 1000 MHz sweep generator that features simple operation, 1% display linearity, digital readout, and a unique "auto- zero" circuit that improves frequency accuracy and virtually eliminates frequency drift. CW, à F, FULL SWEEP The con- pact 1081 has three operating modes: CW, h,F and Full Sweep. Frequency in the CW mode is set by aten-turn potentiometer and displayed with aresolution of 1MHz on a3-1/2 digit display. In the AF mode, center frequency is selected by the ten-turn potentiometer; the sweep width range of 200 kHz to 1000 MHz is controlled
The birdy bypass marker system is controlled by afront- panel switch which provides selection of harmonic markers at 1, 10 and 100 MHz. Differences in marker amplitudes make identification of markers easy. Marker width is adjustable for optimum wide and narrow band operation. A calibrated variable marker is provided in the Full Sweep mode. External marker input is standard.
SWEEP GENERATOR
SCOPE
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 1081
FREQUENCY
Range
1lo 1000 MHz
Sweep Width
F200 kHz to 1000 MHz Full Sweep 1to 1000 MHz
Readout Resolution
3digit LED 1 MHz
Operating Modes CW. .1F. and Full Sweep
Accuracy
CW. Center Frequency of .1F,
and Variable marker. ± 10 MHz
Frequency accuracy can be improved
to ± 1MHz at a specific frequency
Sweep width at 100 MHz intervals
± 10 MHz
Display Linearity 1% al maximum sweep width.
Drift < 200 kHz for 10 minutes
NOTE Ar Constant re , [4,1,,P Wre, ' no, va. ,
RF OUTPUT
Impedance
75 II
Output Connector
Female BNC
Power Level Range + 60 to - 10 dBmV.
Attenuation
Continuously adjustable in 10 dB steps with a 11 dB vernier Output level is
displayed on a 3digit readout with 0.1 dB resolution.
Accuracy
Step attenuator ±10.3 dB + 1% of attenuation)
Vernier attenuation. ± o5dB
Output Flatness ± 025 dB
SPECTRAL PURITY
Harmonic Output
1to 20 MHz. < 20 dBc 20 to 100 MHz: < 30 dBc
in 1to 2000 MHz band
Nonharmonics
1to 500 MHz <50 dBc below 400 MHz. 400 to 1000 MHz <35 dBc
Residual FM ( CW Mode) < 10 kHz peak
SWEEP CHARACTERISTICS
Sweep Modes
Recurring and single sweep
Sweep Time
Fast
0010 to 1sec ( typical)
Slow
1to 100 sec ( typical)
Line ,.... 1 /2 of AC line period
Horizontal Output 0 lo 10 volts Impedance 1000 il
Blanking
RF output is blanked during sweep retrace
MARKER SYSTEM
RF Markers Birdy bypass marker system is controlled by front -panel switch
which provides selection of harmonic markers in these combinations
100 MHz only 100 MHz and 10 MHz. Or 100 MHz, 10 MHz. and 1MHz
Accuracy
O W6
Width
Adjustablefr5cm approximately 100 to 500 kHz
Amplitude
Adjustable from
approximately 1mV to 15V p- p
External Marker
BNC input accepts CW signal for conversion to birdy marker Input level
must be at least 100 mV into 50 If
Variable Marker (Full Sweep Mode Only)
The 10- turn potentiometer and 31/ 2 digit frequency display function as a 1to 1000 MHz variable marker
The marker produces a bright spot on the display by momentarily delaying
the sweep ramp for approximately 2 msec Accuracy ic 10 MHz
REMOTE PROGRAMMING
Frequency
Rear -panel jack permits remote control 01 center frequency, sweep width and external frequency modulation
Level
Rear-panel jack permits external control of RF output level over greater
than 10 dB range
Trigger TTL input, during high to low transition
Also, by contact closure to ground
OUTPUTS Pen Lift Blanking
Sweep Reference Power Supply
Contact closure during sweep
- 15V during sweep + 15V during retrace
0 to 10V
Output of 1V/100 MHz
+ 18V, - 18V. and common. External current limited to 10 mA
GENERAL
Dimensions
28 6 cm 111 V. in ) wide.
13.3 cm ( 5% in.) high.
26 7cm ( 10 1/ 2 in ) deep
Weight
4.9 kg ( 10 1/. lb ) net.
68 kg ( 15 lb ) Shipping
Power
90 to 110V. 105 to 125V.
190 lo 220V. or 210 to 250V
50 to 400 Hz. approximately 35 watts
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-173
WAVETEK CORP.
9191 Tower Centre Drive San Diego. CA 921 22 (619) 450-9971
TEST EQUIPMENT
MODEL SAM I450 MHz FULL PERFORMANCE METER
The SAM Iis a very popular meter. This is due primarily to its excellent accuracy and reliability. This accuracy and reliability is designed in. The basic approach is the up-convert/down-convert system used in all SAM's. The internal controls are designed to eliminate critical tuning. IF is designed with ceramic filters to eliminate coils that can shake loose and change tuning.
Another reason for the SAM's popularity is ts flexibility. It will perform almost every test that the SAM Ill will. The spectrum analyzer feature of the SAM Ill is available as an option on the SAM I. This option, when coupled with an external oscilloscope, expands the testing capability of the SAM I.
There are many additional features that combine to make this agreat meter!
SPECIHCATIONS MODEL SAM I
MEASUREMENT RANGES
Frequency
4MHz to 300 Wiz or 4MHz to 450 Wiz. 470 MHz to 890 MHz optiona
Amplitude
--40 dBmV to + 60 dBmV
Temperature OFahrenheit to ' 20 Fahrenheit
Hum
0.5% to 5%
Voltage
5.100 volts AC- DC.
ACCURACY Frequency Amplitude
± 1MHz.
+0.5 dB at room temperature: ' .0 clB over temperature when calibrated at that temperature.
Hum Volts
± 0.3%. 10%
GENERAL IF Bandwidth
Video Output Power
Battery Life
Size Weight
280 kHz at 3dB pont. E00 kHz at 40 dB poirt
Approx. 1vol:.
Internal Nicad batteries; external 110 VAC/60 Hz
or 200VAC/50 Hz.
Typically 8hours. continuous operator.
7 high x11" wide x10" deep.
11155.
FURNISHED ACCESSORIES Instruction Menu&
Shoulder Strap Voltmeter Leads Sam Bag Carry-criie
CALIBRATOR Frequency Amplitude
1'50 MHz ± 2MHz + 20 dBmV ± 025 dB over
temperature range
ANALYZER
Amplitude Range
43 dB on screen; -- 40 dBmV to + 60 dBmV.
Frequency Range
4MI* to 300 MHz or 4MHz to 450 MHz.
Rate
Variable 2Hz to 40 Hz, plus manual.
Dispersion
Variable from 0 15 MHz.
Horizontal Output + 0.5 to + 9volts.
Vert cal Output
0-3 vOlts.
ORDERING INFORMATION When crdenng the Sam ISignal Level Meter, plea.>e specify the lollowing models
Model
Description
Sam I
300 MHz SAMwith Spectrum Analyzer
Sam I - UHF
300 MHz Sam with Spectrum Analyzer and UHF option (470MHz to 890 MHz)
Sam I - 450
45(1 MHz Sarnwith Spectrum Analyzer
Sam I - 4501U(..F
450 MHz Sam with
Spectrium Analyzer and UHF option
(470 MHz to 890 MHz).
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Sky -iSirandhook
MODEL SAM III 450 MHz MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLED METER
The Model SAM Ill is the first in a new generation of completely microprocessor- controlled signal level meters. Utilizing state-of-theart electronic tuning, coupled with on- board computer memory, the SAM III allows rapid keyboard access to any frequency or channel across the entire CATV spectrum.
This new electronic design has been combined with time- proven mechanical packaging and features, to create the ultimate in asignal level meter.
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL SAM III
MEASUREMENT RANGES
Frequency
4 MHz to 450 MHz. 470 MHz tO 890 MHz optional.
Amplitude Temperature Hum Voltage
- 40 to + 60 dBmV. 0 to 120 degrees F.
0.5% to 5%. 5-100 volts AC- DC.
ACCURACY Frequency
± 100 KHz
Amplitude
± 0.5 dB at room temperature. ± 1.0 dB over temperature, when
calibrated at the temperature.
Hum Volts
± 0.3%. 10%.
GENERAL IF Bandwidth
280 kHz at 3dB point, 600 kHz at 40 dB point.
Video output Power
Approx 1volt.
Internal Ni-Cad batteries. External 110 VAC,/60 cycle.
220 VAC/50 cycle.
Battery life Size Weight
Typically 5 hours. 7" x 11" x 10". 11 lbs.
CALIBRATOR Frequency Amplitude
150 MHz ± 2 MHz +20 dBmV ± . 25 dB
ANALYZER
Amplitude range
40 dB on screen -- 40 to + 60 dBmV
Frequency range
4 MHz to 450 MHz:
470 MHz to 890 MHz optional.
Rate
Variable 2 Hz to 40 Hz Plus manual.
Dispersion
Variable from 0.15 MHz to 450 MHz.
Horizontal output
+05 to + 9volts
Vertical output
0-3 volts.
KEYBOARD PROGRAMMING
Standard Channels. VHF
Video 2 to 60. Audio 2 to 60. UHF 14 to 83.
HRC Channels
Video 2 to 60 Audio 2 to 60
Frequency
Preset for 0.1 MHz steps, 4 MHz to 450 MHz,
470 MHz to 890 MHz
FURNISHED ACCESSORIES Instruction Manual Shoulder Strap Voltmeter leads Sam Bag Carry-case
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Sky- 1Strandhook
VRF-174
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WAVETEK CORP.
9191 Tower Centre Drive
San Diego, CA 92122 (619) 450-9971
TEST EQUIPMENT
MODEL SAM IIID 450MHz COMPUTER CONTROLLED METER
The SAM IIID is a computer controlled version of the Sam III. Utilizing the advarced microprocessor techriques employed in the SAM Ill, the remote control is accomplished through a standard RS-232 interface. This allows remote activation and control of the instrumeit. The controller might be as simple as a terminal, or as complex as an extensive computer system.
Provisions are made for remote measurements of signal level, hum, battery status, and temperature, in addition to automatic power on/off of the unit.
Access to the SAM IIID may be through telephone lines equipped with the correct modems, or through two-way cable systems, equipped with the proper interface.
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL SAM IV
MEASUREMENT RANGES
4MHz to 450 MHz 4/0 MHz to 890 MHz optional
Amplitude - 40 dBmV to +60 dBmV
Temperature
0degrees Fahrenheit to + 120 degrees Fahrenheit
Hum
05% to 5%
Voltage
5to 100 volts AC- DC
ACCURACY Frequency
± 100 kHz
Amplitude
±05dB at room temperature
V Hum olts
± 0130::/ /
GENERAL IF Bandwidth Resolution
280 kHz at 3dB Point 600 kHz at 40 dB point
Sufficient to measure two FM signals of equal
amplitude 400 kHz apart Sufficient
to measure asound carrier in the presence
of an upper video 40 dB greater than the sound carrier
Video Output Power Size
CALIBRATOR Frequency Amplitude ANALYZER Amplitude Range Frequency Range Rate Dispersion
1volt for full scale reading 110/220 VAC 7in high x19 in wide x12 in deep
150 MHz ± 2MHz +20 dBmV ± 02508 Over temperature range
50 dB on screen -40 dBmV to + 60 dBmV
4MHz lo 450 MHz 470 to 890 MHz optional
Variable 2Hz to 40 Hz plus manual
Variable from 0 15 MHz to 450 MHz
MODEL SAM IV 450 MHz HEAD- END COMPUTER CONTROLLED METER
The SAM IV Signal Level Meter is a computer-controlled, rackmounted measurement system, with abuilt-in display for spectrum analysis.
The SAM IV features direct entry keyboard tuning to any of 60 factory set standard channels, and 60 HRC format channels, either video or audio, across the standard 4to 450 MHz band.
In addition, any frequency from 4 to 450 MHz may be accessed through the keyboard, . n0.1 MHz increments.
A unique feature of the SAM IV enables the operator to tune up to the next channel with the touch of a button. The NEXT button automatically selects the next higher channel in the channel configuration being used ; either Standard or HRC).
Channel configurations are available for some countries. Please consult the factory for specific standards.
MODEL SAM JR. FULL RANGE METER
The SAM Jr. is ameter that fills in the line of signal level meters. The Jr.'s capabilities fall in between the LM- 13 installer's meter and the
SAM Ifull performance meter. The basic electronic design is quite
similar to the SAM Iand SAM III, which are very high quality and popular meters. The SAM Jr. has the same RF front end as these
other two meters with only a slightly relaxed amplitude accuracy specification. This is very important as the RF front end is a prime factor in meter accuracy and reliability.
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL SAM JR.
Frequency Range
10 MHz to 300 MHz
Or 50 MHz to 450 MHz.
470 MHz to 890 MHz optional.
Amplitude - 35 dBmV to + 60 dBmV.
Amplitude Accuracy ± 0.75 dB.
Temperature Accuracy ± 2dB.
Batteries
Rechargeable Nickel Cadmium.
Size
61 /2 " high x83/i"wide x61 /2 "deep.
Weight
5lbs 12 ounces.
FURNISHED ACCESSORIES Instruction Manual Shoulder Strap Sam Bag Carry-Case Battery Charger ( 110/230 VAC. 50/60 HZ)
ORDERING INFORMATION When ordering the Sam Jr Signal Level Meter,
please specify the following models'
Model
Description
Sam Jr.
10 MHz to 300 MHz Sam Jr.
Sam Jr. - 450
50 MHz to 450 MHz Same
Sam Jr. - UHF
10 MHz to 300 MHz. 470 MHz to 890 MHz Sam Jr,
Sam Jr. - 450/UHF
50 MHz to 450 MHz,
470 MHz to 890 MHz Sam Jr
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Sky- 1St randhook
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-175
WAVETEK CORP.
9191 Tower Centre Drive San Diego, CA 92122 (619)450-9971
TEST EQUIPMENT
7500 SERIES ATTENUATORS
FEATURES · Broadband operation · Low VSWR · Highly accurate ·OEM, lab, and field use
The 7500 Series Attenuators are miniature turret type units that operate over wide frequency ranges.
They are ideal for bench setups, field use or incorporation into test instruments.
The 7500 Series ( 75 ohm) units cover the dc to 1000 MHz range. They are designed primarily for the CATV industry and have VSWRs of less than 1.1 up to 500 MHz ( 26dB return loss.)
Units having 1dB, 10dB, 35dB, and 70dB of attenuation, variable in 0.1, 1, 5, and 10dB steps, are available in either 50- ohm or 75- ohm versions.
Model 7580 is adual concentric type attenuator that provides atotal of 80dB attenuation, variable in 1dB steps.
All units are direct reading, ruggedly constructed, and have provisions for panel mounting.
7500 SERIES ( 75 OHM) ATTENUATORS
MODEL
7510
7535
7570 112
7580
',eaten, Range Impedance
fiOn LOSS acc o ta, a ·
vSwz,
Ma, Mph, Power Angie between Step,
0 to 10(X,Mn, 75 ohm, 2 clEl ma. o 2 dB lo 1000 MHZ
1 I ma. to 500MHz 1 ma. to 1000MHz IOr. SO ·
Oro WOO MHz
0 'a lOGO MO/
75 ohms
75 ohms
2 dB ma.
"iceman
o 5813 10 500 MHz 08 10 1000 MHz
t 5 dB lo 5012 MHz r I0E110 1000 MHz
ttma. 10 500MHz 12 or... To 1000MHz
Ilma. to 500 MHz 12 rna. to t000MHz
IOw
5r,
45 .
45·
Connecro..
BNC tamale IF Medal.,
BNC M/884 IF /Wadable,
·N ,.ect ' a
rh1n tete.ence lo the mnahurn ' lass posMOn
BNC entrain If 8,e8.1801e)
5.'000 MHz
15 ohms
116,00.
r 5 OB ID 500 MHz ·1dB lo IMO MHZ
Imat. to 500MHz 12 ma. to 1000MHZ
5.
SO . 10 dB 45 . 0-70 de
HNC 1ernaw il Avaaade,
MODEL 1075 COMPARATOR
OPTIONS
A-1: Single frequency markers
A-2: Harmonic Markers
A-3: External Marker
A-4: IF Markers Crystals for above
13.2: Pilot Carrier Notches 13.3: Tilt Control
MODEL 1075
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Range Operating Modes Impedance VSWR Gain/Loss Range
5to 400 MHz Ch A, Ch B. Auto
75 ohms 125 ( 19 dB return loss) 59 9dB In 0 1dB steps
Garn/LoSs Accuracy
Balance ( Ch Ato Ch BI 0148 Attenuator 10 dB Attenuator Total Mrrumum Error Total Mammum Error
ERROR ±0 1dB ±0 1dB ±02dB)10 dB
±O 1dB ± 14dB
Insertion Loss
Less than 1dB
Connectors
Type F
Caltratron Adjustment Range ± 1dB level Ch B ± 1dBtrItCh A8 ChB
Isolaton Between Ports
greater than 60 dB 0 200 MHz
greater than 50 dB 0 308 MHz
Slope Adjustment Range 0to aoprox - 20 CIB
OPTIONS D-171 RF Detector FB40-75 Return Loss Bridge
MODEL 1801B ADVANCED SWEEP GENERATOR
OPTIONS 41111111111111111111111111L
Al: Single Frequency Marke , rs A-2: Harmonic Markers
--
it ICIII CES
A-4: 1kHz Square Wave A-5: Pen Lift A-6: IF Markers
Crystals for above
A.7: Pilot Carrier Notches
8 rim
*HMI, MM.
l m a · 018
a
A.8: UHF Option ( 450-650)
IMF
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL 1801B
MODEL 7580.1 ATTENUATOR SET
The Model 7580.1 ( 75 ohm) attenuator set consists of 10dB, 1dB, and 0.1dB turret type attenuators, mounted in acabinet ideally suited for bench- top use.
The total attenuation range is 0 to 81dB with a fixed 1dB insertion loss. Attenuation accuracy is + 1.0dB from dc to 400 MHz, and ± 2.0dB from dc to 1,000 MHz. Maximum input power is 0.5W.
BNC connectors are standard; however, Ffittings are available at no additional cost.
SPECIFICATIONS
AIIHnualiOn
Frequency Range Impedance
to 81 dB In 1dB steps
DC lo 1000 MHz
75 ohm
Inserhon Loss
1dB ( Mm Allen) +1dB may
Accuracy ± tdB to 500 MHz. 2, 2dB to 1000 MHz
VSWR Max Input Power
12 1dc to 500 MHz. 13 1dc to 1000 MHz
0 5 Watt
Connectors
BNC
Drmensen
10 2cm ( 4 In ) X 17 8cm ( 7In) Wrcle. X IO2cm ( 4 illl Deep
RF FREQUENCY
Frequency Range
1to 500 MHz 450 to 950 MHz lophonall
Dra) Calrbratron
10 MHz/dry WO 5MHz vernrer
Accuracy
10 MHz or 2% of selected frequency ( whichever is greater)
Sweep Wrdin
200 kHz to 500 MHz
Display Linearity
2%
Spurrous Signals - 30 dB above 10 MHz -35 dB minimum available on special order)
RF OUTPUT
Impedance
75 ohms
Output Amplitude + 57 dBmV. 07V rms, maximum
Output Flatness ±025 dB for 1MHz to 500 MHZ. ±0 35 dB for 1MHz 10 950 MHz
Attenuation Continuously adjustable from + 57 dBmV to - 33 dBmV 70 dB In 10 dB steps plus a20 dB PIN diode attenuator calibrated in 1dB Increments
Accuracy ± 0.5 dB to 500 MHz -± 10dB he 950 MHz
Reference Attenuator Internally adjustable from
005 dB t005 dB above and below output level
SWEEP MODES Rectory-1g, single sweep, external trigger, manual. and Imelock
Sweep Time Continuously variable from 10 to 100 ms and from 1to 100s, plus aspecial variable 1to 10 ms sweep lime range with an associated variable 1to tos repetition rate for lest rng of operating CATV systems
MARKERS Provlsrons for up to 6 crystal-
controlled, plug-in birdy by-pass markers, plus rear panel external marker Input Markers may be either single frequency ( Option A-1) or harmonic type ( Option A-2) Pulse type markers are also available ( Option A-61
Accuracy
0005% ( b.rdy) 002% ( pulse)
Width
Adjustable from apprommately 15 kHz to 400 KHz In 4steps
Amplitude
Adjustable from approximately
1mV p-pto IV p- p
Note Markers may be transmitted with RF seal
Power
11501 230V ± 10% ( evadable for (00 to 200V at no extra cost). 50 lo
60 Hz. approxrmately 20 watts
VRF-176
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WAVETEK CORP.
9191 Tower Centre Drive San Diego, CA 92122 (619) 450-9971
TEST EQUIPMENT
MODEL 1880 SYSTEM ANALYZER
The Model 1880 CATV System Analyzer is a 4 to 450 MHz field- portable test system designed to perform both FCC compliance tests and routine day-to-day system measurements.
A unique microprocessor control system replaces the complexity of a traditional spectrum analyzer, allowing rapid, precision measurements ranging from headend amplitude checks to subscriber drop composite triple beat. Measurements, such as Carrier-to- Noise, Hum, FM Deviation, Cross- Modulation and Composite- Triple- Beat are performed anywhere on the system with pushbutton ease.
Any portion of the spectrum may be viewed instantly, while split-screen capability allows two separate sections of the band to be viewed simultaneously. This allows rapid amplifier setup, and immediate verification of correct parameters. For example, Channel 2 and Channel 60 may be viewed in 10 MHz frequency spans at the same time, in areal-time display; and the channels may be called up with direct keyboard entry by converter number.
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL 1880
Frequency Range
4to 450 MHz
Frequency Accuracy
Center Frequency ± 100 kHz.
Span
± 10%.
Amplitude Accuracy ± 1.0 dB.
Measurement Range
110 dB.
>60 dB or screen.
Resolution
0.1 dB.
Pre- Programmed Channels
2to 60.
Temperature -- 10 to + 120 °F --2010 + 50 °C.
Power
Battery, rechargeable sealed lead-acid. operating
life approximately 21 / 2 hours.
Display
5- in, diagonal. electromagnetic. Alphanumeric with
analog assist, developed by
the microprocessor.
Weight
30 lb. ( 13.5 kg).
AUTOMATED FUNCTIONS
Carrier- to- Noise
53 dB max
± 1da
Hum Modulation
5%
<.5% residual
FM Deviation
200 kHz max
<5 kHz residual.
Cross Modulation
43 to 62 dB
± 2da
2ndl3rd Order (Composite Triple Beat)
>70 dB max ±3 dB
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
BU -1
Bucket-bucket for use with
astandard bucket truck.
C-1
Polaroid Camera for making
permanent records for the 1880.
PP- 75
55 to 440 MHz Precision
Preselector for use with
extended amplitude range
measurements.
BC- 3
Heavy duty battery charger/AC
adaptor for continuous 110/220
VAC, 50/60 cycle operation.
ACCESSORIES FURNISHED Test Cable Instruction Manual View.ng Hood Vehicle Cable BC- 1
MODELS 1855/1865 CABLE SYSTEM SWEEP
The Model 1855/65 Sweep Recovery System consists of a microprocessor controlled transmitter and receiver. The transmitter is installed at the headend and provides asweep every 5seconds at a speed unnoticed by your subscribers. The portable, battery operated receiver is taken into the field and used to evaluate the swept response at any point in the system.
This Recovery System provides an easy to use technique to maintain or audit your cable system. It can cut service calls by indicating changes in the trunk which affect the swept response even though the pilots may be at the proper level. The " signature" of the swept response will indicate:
11 Moisture in the cable. 2) Bad grounds on amplifier modules. 3) Corroded or loose RF cable fittings. 4) Mismatches from kinked or squeezed cable. 5) Low gain amplifiers. 6) Suck outs within the frequency response.
It will aid in locating these problems as they develop, so they may be corrected before the entire system is down.
This results in improved signal quality through easy- to-do, daily, preventative maintenance.
The recovery system can also be used for the annual FCC proof. It provides a fast easy method for headend, in- channel flatness measurements with no auxiliary signal generators or counters, and does so, while the CATV System is still " On the Air". It is also used for the 24 hour tests.
The receiver is as easy to use as asimple radio receiver. The internal microprocessor does all the work. Once the receiver is set up and calibrated at the headend, the technician simply takes it into the field, connects it to the output test point of the first trunk amplifier, turns it on and observes the swept responses from the headend to, and including, the first amplifier. Two level cursors automatically provide a2dB window of where the swept response should be. The technician merely adjusts the slope and gain controls of the amplifier to get the flattest pattern between the cursors ( see figure # 11.
If the response is correct, he turns the receiver off and contirmes to the next amplifier. If he has aproblem it can be analyzed by using the keyboard. A push button will automatically provide a readout ( in dBmV) of the peak- to- valley response. Other buttons on the keyboard allow the measurement of frequency to help in locating faults. See description of the 1865 for complete information on the cursor measurement system.
OC - 9
DC- 20
·IMIWO
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-177
WAVETEK CORP.
9191 Tower Centre Drive San Diego, CA 92122 (619) 450-9971
TEST EQUIPMENT
ACCESSORIES
PA- 20 AMPLIFIER
The PA- 20 is ageneral purpose amplifier. This battery powered unit is ideal for field work. Current consumption is less than 20 milliamps. The low power consumption provides more than ten hours of battery life. The PA- 20 is alow noise amplifier. The low noise figure makes it an ideal preamp for spectrum analyzers or field strength meter applications.
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEL PA-20
Frequency
50-250 MHz Useful 5-300 MHz.
Gain Flatness Noise Impedance Power Battery Life
19.5 dB. ± 0.25 dB. 7dB typical.
75 ohms. 4-9 Volt batteries
10 hours continuous operation.
Size Weight
4"high x5"wide x1Y. ' sdeep. 1lb
CABLE EQUALIZERS AND CABLE SIMULATORS
These devices are useful to compensate for true tilt devices or long cable drops for " easements", when using WAVETEK SLM or Sweep Recovery Systems.
Models are available to 300 or 400 MHz, and in 3 or 6 dB versions. They all follow the tilt characteristics of cable to within ± 0.5 dB. The chart will aid in your selection.
EQUALIZERS E - 3 - 300 E - 3 - 400 E 6 - 300 E - 6 - 400
LOSS AT 50 MHz 3 dB 3 dB 6 dB 6 dB
LOSS AT 300 MHz
LOSS AT 400 MHz
O
SIMULATORS
S - 3 - 300
S - 3 - 400 S - 6 - 300 S - 6 - 400
LOSS AT 50 MHz typical 1.9 dB 1.4 dB 3.8 dB 3 dB
TRUE TILT 50-300 MHz
3 dB
6 dB
TRUE TILT 50-400 MHz
3 dB
6 dB
MATCHING PADS MODELS M175 Et M157
·Low VSWR · Broad Frequency Range
· Flat Response
TRANSFORMS IMPEDANCE
Most RF communication equipment is designed for 50- ohm transmission, although several 75 ohm applications do exist in CATV
and other related areas. All of the standard Wavetek Sweep/Signal Generators are available with either 50 or 75 ohm calibrated output systems. Matching pads are available to convert equipment with 50 ohm output to 75 ohm output or vice versa.
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Range
DC to 1000 MHz
Impedance
50 to 75 ohms.
VSWR
1.15 to 1.
Insertion Loss
5.7 ± 0.1 dB
Maximum Input Power
1watt.
BNC Connectors
M157
50 ohm male; 75 ohm female.
M175
50 ohm female; 75 ohm male
RF DETECTORS SERIES 150/170
LOW VSWR
The series 150 and 170 Detectors are designed for applications requiring low VSWR and flat frequency response across broad operating ranges.
50 AND 75 OHM UNITS
The Models D151 and D152 are 50-ohm units with typical VSWR's of 1.2 at 1000 MHz. The D151 has a 1000 MHz upper limit and the D152 can be operated up to 2GHz.
The Model D171 is a 75 ohm detector that operates over the frequency range of 200 kHz to 1000 MHz with aresponse of + 0.3 dB and areturn loss of greater than 23 dB. This is accomplished through use of the Wavetek designed 75 ohm BNC connector and associated frequency compensating circuitry.
Model D153 has a frequency range of 1.0 to 12,400 MHz with a VSWR typically less than 1.20.
RF DETECTORS SERIES 150/170
MODEL
D151
D152
D153
D171
Frequency Range ( MHz) Impedance ( ohms) VSWR
02 to 1000 50 I15
Man Input
3OV
Output Polarity
Negative
Frequency Response (dB) ± 03
Connectors RF Input DC Output
Dimensions - Diameter Length
Male BNC Female BNC I4cm ( 9116 in) 57cm ( 2% ini
02 to 2000 50 1 5
3OV Negative s 0 5
10to 12.400
02 1000
50
75
12 to45GHz 13 to 70 GHz 14to 12 4GHz
115 (23 dB
return loss)
100 mW
3OV
Negative
Negative
s02per octave ± 03 to 8GHz ±05 overall
Male BNC Female BNC
Male N Female BNC
14cm ( 9/16 in I 21cin ( 083 in ) 57 crn 12% in) 63tin ( 247 in)
Male BNC ( 75 Oh.) Female BNC
14 cm (9/16 in ) 57cm (2% in )
DC BLOCKS MODELS B171 Et B172
·Prevents Equipment Damage · Low VSWR ·Minimum Insertion Loss
PROTECTS AGAINST BURNOUT
DC Blocks are designed to stop dc and attenuate any 60 Hz signals that are present in a signal while passing the RF portion with minimum insertion loss or additional VSWR. CATV line amplifiers are commonly powered through the RF cable itself. This voltage can cause severe damage when connected to 75 ohm systems not having internal dc blocking networks.
MOUNT PERMANENTLY
Model 8171 is ideally suited for series insertion into any existing line having a BNC connector, while the 8172 cable/block assembly is suited for permanent mounting in test equipment as a precaution against burnout. The standard B172 is supplied with a9- inch cable. (Other cable lengths are available on special order.)
Frequency Range Impedance VSWR Insertion Loss DC Breakdown Voltage BNC Connectors
B171
SPECIFICATIONS
1MHz to 1000 MHz 75 ohms. 1 1to 1 0 2dB 100V.
B172
75 ohms male panel mounting female
Dimensions B171
1.4 cm (9/16 in.) chameter. 4.8 cm ( 17)8 in ) length
B172
1.4 cm ( 9/16 in.) diameter. 22.8 cm (9 in.) length (with BNC and cable).
75 ohms male & female
VRF-178
Prices and Specifications Su b¡ect to Change Without Notice.
WAVETEK CORP.
9191 Tower Centre Drive San Diego, CA 92122 (619) 450-9971
TEST EQUIPMENT
,1011·1014.1,1100 ..001111l II, ·
4.
o
o
CO.
ern..
0.1..k·
MODEL ST- 1 " CUCKOO" RADIATION DETECTOR
This is asystem that provides alow-cost method of patrolling cable systems for signal leakage. The system utilizes an ordinary FM radio for patrolling, and aspecial signal transmitter in the headend.
The ST- 1produces asignal which is continuously tuneable from 86 to 110 MHz. The signal can be switched to either a 1kHz tone or a double tone similar to a Cuckoo Clock. The amplitude can be automatically switched over 5 different output levels, 5 dB apart. The different output levels produce a beeping sound on the radio. This sound increases in volume the closer you get to a signal leakage point.
To see how this stepping helps you, refer.to Figure # 1. As you approach a leakage point, the first signal you hear is the high-level signal. The closer in you get, the more leak you pick up. When you are by the leak, you will even pick up the signal when it is attenuated to 20 dB. The signal remains at each level for 1/3 of a second, which works out nicely for patrolling at about 30 MPH or slower.
This system enables you to equip every service vehicle to patrol for leakage produced by illegals, minor breaks, loose housings and other problems that might soon become major. If you have an FM radio in your car, just drive around town and check your system.
The " Cuckoo" system is one of the most popular ideas introduced to CATV testing. The reason for its popularity is that it pays for itself in reduced troubleshooting time and increased system performance. You turn it on and leave it on. The system is always available when you're ready for it. Leaks are easy to find. Operators report finding underground faults, illegal hookups, bad connectors, all with portable radios.
The sensitivity of the system depends on the radio you purchase. It is very easy to find radios which are much better than 1 uV. We recommend operating the signal at about 5 dB above normal FM level. The advantage in running near the FM band is that the band of frequencies that most concerns the FCC is the VHF OMNIRANGE for aircraft, starting at 108 MHz. This system allows you to put a carrier just below this point, and lets you check for radiation.
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL ST- 1
Output
+ 35 dBmV ( min ).
Frequency Tuning Range
86-110 MHz
FM Deviation ± 75 KHz
Output Level Control Range
20 dB
FM Modulation Frequency 1000 Hz ( aPProx)
AM Modulation
Four 5dB Steps
AM Modulation Step
Rep Rate
Approx 0 33 Sec/Step
Incidental FM Modulation ± 10 KHz ( max )
Supply Voltage
110 Vac
"141.110.1-reEet MCC.
Vv10.411,sx
e.01.1.1 ?it; RP.
, ST- 1C
MODELS ST- 1C, CR -1B RADIATION DETECTOR
A COMPLETE LOW-COST SYSTEM THAT DETECTS RADIATION
The ST- 1C operates in the same manner as the ST- 1. The difference between the two units is that the ST- 1C is crystal controlled. The purpose of this transmitter is to operate the CR -1B receiver.
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL ST- 1C
Output
+ 35 dBmV
Frequency
107 997 MHz
FM Deviation
-± 25 kHz
Output Level Control Range
20 d8
FM Modulation Frequency
1050 Hz
AM Modulation
Four 5dB Steps
AM Modulation Step
Rep Rate Supply Voltage
Approx 0 33 Sec/Step l0 v
CR-1B CRYSTAL CONTROLLED RECEIVER
The CR -16 has two major advantages over the FM radios. The first advantage is that you don't have to tune it. You are always sure you
are on frequency. There is no possibility of someone listening to a rock station instead of doing radiation patrol. The second advantage is the tone squelch circuit. The tone squelch circuit disables the audio until a 1050 Hz tone is received. While the CR -1B is tone squelched the receiver gain stays at maximum. Although the gain is high no bothersome noise is heard. When the receiver picks up the 1050 Hz tone from the transmitter, it automatically activates the audio. The CR -1B can be vehicle mounted or used as a portable unit. It is powered from batteries or vehicle + 12 or 110 VAC supplies. The receiver has a built-in antenna as well as provisions for using an external antenna.
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL CR -1B
Frequency Sensitivity Tone Squelch Antenna Power
107.997 MHz. 1uV will activate tone Squelch
1050 Hz Activated Internal whip and external jack
110 VAC. + 12 VDC. or internal batteries. Four C Cells.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-179
WAVETEK CORP.
9191 Tower Centre Drive San Diego, CA 92122 (619) 450-9971
TEST EQUIPMENT
·
MODELS SP-2, CM- 1000 FREQUENCY COUNTERS
CM- 1000
A frequency counter will not properly count TV signals. This problem
is due to the complex modulation. The SP-2 is designed to process the signals so that afrequency counter will read them. The two main measurements that must be made are video carrier accuracy and inter- carrier accuracy. The video carrier must be within ± 25 kHz of assigned frequency. The intercarrier frequency must be 4.5 MHz
1kHz. The SP-2 processes the video carrier and removes 90% of the modulation. This instrument also compares the video carrier to
the aural and provides the resultant 4.5 MHz signal at the front panel. The SP-2 signal processor is completely solid state. Integrated circuits are used extensively to minimize components and increase reliability. The input circuits are AC blocked to minimize effects of 30 volt AC supplies. The instrument's input is your system's signals. The SP-2processes these signals and provides 3main outputs. Output 1
is the intercarrier signal which is the 4.5 MHz differential between the video and sound carriers. This is very useful for aligning modulators as well as doing FCC proofs. The second output is the video carrier with modulation suppressed. The third output is for hum modulation tests. The Hum Mod output is a high quality video detector. Detection is accomplished in an integrated circuit and provides more than 2volts of video signal with only 20 uV of noise. This large ratio
makes Hum Modulation measurements much more convenient than with low level video outputs from FIELD STRENGTH meters.
The SP- 2 has measurement capability for measuring the standard twelve channels plus all the MID band and SUPER band channels J, K, and L. SP- 2's may be ordered to measure other SUPER band channels by deleting MID band channels.
CM- 1000
The CM- 1000 is part of a new generation of low cost frequency counters. This counter is ideal for CATV application. The frontpanel F connectors interface easily with most CATV instrumentation. This counter is extremely tolerant of video modulation, and this tolerance makes it an ideal companion for the SP-2signal processor. This unit is normally powered from 115 volt AC, and covers a frequency range of 5 Hz to 1000 MHz. This wide band coverage is very useful for working on SUPER band headend units, their local oscillators, and UHF applications.
RD- 1TUNED DIPOLE
The RD- 1 is a tuned dipole with a 16 dB gain battery operated amplifier. It is designed to test compliance with FCC CATV radiation specifications. The RD- 1is the most convenient dipole to use, no matter what you pay. The adjustable dipole whip antennas can be set for frequencies from 50 MHz to 250 MHz which covers the standard TV band, MID band, and SUPER band through channel 0. The whips are easily field replaceable and are available from stock.
The signal level to be measured for radiation and signal leakage tests are in the range of - 30 to - 50 dBmV. Most signal level meters do a poor job below -30 dBmV and can't measure anything below -40 dBmV. The RD- 1contains alow noise, battery operated preamplifier to solve this problem. In many areas cf the country, it is necessary to
measure small leakage signals in the presence of strong local signals. Provisions have been made on the RD- 1to permit you to place a bandpass filter between the dipole and preamplifier to correct this problem. The amplifier may also be used separately as aportable field instrument.
The pamphlet that is provided with the RD- 1lists the length of the dipole in inches for all channels to be measured. The chart also indicates the signal level to be measured to pass the FCC 20 microvolts per meter specifications. This eliminates the need for cumbersome formulas and calculations You simply refer to the chart to find your pass-fail point in dBmV for every channel.
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL RD- 1
Dipole Tuning Amplifier Noise Figure Amplifier Bandwidth
Power Amplifier Gain Weight
SC. MHz to 250 MHz 6dB
±0 5dB 50-250 MHz. ur. eable 5-300 MHz 4-9 volt batteries 16dB 2lbs
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL CM- 1000
Frequency Range
Direct
5 Hz to 60 MHz
Prescaled
25 MHz to 1GHz.
Sensitivity
Direct
+25 dBmV.
Prescaled
+40 dBmV.
Input Impedance
Direct
1MEG OHM
Prescaled
50 OHM
Overload Protection
Direct
100 Volt Max.
Prescaled
5 Volt Max.
Aging
1PPM Per Year.
Display
9 digit. 0 4- LED
Size
3,4H x
x
Weight
2 lbs.
VRF-180
SPECIFICATIONS MODEL SP- 2
Frequency Range Input Sensitivity
Input Impedance
50 MHz to 270 MHz Normal operation Irom + 16 dBmV to + 60 dBmV
75 ohms
Video Carrier Output
At least 100 mV
Inter Carrier Output
into 50 ohms. At least 100 mV
into 100 Kohms.
Power
Internal - 12 volt
rechargeable battery;
Battery Life
External - 110 VAC 2watts. 10 hours.
Hum Mod Output
2volts video minimum
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WIDE BAND ENGINEERING CO., INC.
HYBRID POWER DIVIDER/
P.O. Box 21652 1838 East University Drive Phoenix, AZ 85036
(602) 254-1570
COMBINERS/RF SWITCHES
HYBRID SPLITTER/COMBINERS
Models A66 and A67 are hybrid splitter/combiners with exceptional bandwidth and performance for instrumentation and communications. Applications include signal splitting, combining, mixing, and phasing. Effects of impedance changes, shunts, or disconnections at one or more ports have aminimum effect on the insertion loss or impedance match through the other ports due to the high port- to- port isolation. This high isolation also minimizes intermodulation problems caused by mixing between signal sources. Each Model A66 or A67 is individually tuned for optimum performance.
PRECISION HYBRID DIVIDER/COMBINERS
MODELS AVAILABLE Models A66 and A67 are 2- way and 4-way hybrids covering 1-500MHz Model A66GA is ahigher performance version of the A66 with higher isolation for critical applications.
Model A66L is alow frequency version covering . 3-100MHz.
Model
A66
A66GA A66 L A67
N- Way
2 2
4
Freq Range MHz
1-500 2-300 1-500 2-400 .3-100 1-50 1-500 2.5-300
VSWR (max)
1.5:1 1.2:1 1.5:1 1.3:1 1.5:1 1.15:1 1.5:1 1.2:1
Loss (max) back- back
(dB)
.7
.30
. .,) .5 .2 1.0 .5
Isolation (with matched
input termination)
(dB)
20
35 20
40
35
40
20
30
When ordering specify: A) Model Numbe , BI Impedance, C) Connectors
Response Flatness
dB
1 .25 f.1 1 .25 -.15
..06 1 .25
max
power to
input
max power
to output
e
ó 3
.25 watts
Size (See Back Cover)
A
A
A
B
A64 SOLID STATE SWITCH
Model A64 is an ultra wide band PIN diode solid state switch for transfering both low and high level signals with negligible distortion, high isolation, and minimum loss.
SPECIFICATIONS Switch Type: SPDT Frequency: 1-500MHz, useable . 3-1000MHz Impedance: 50 or 75 ohm ( specify when ordering) Loss: . 5dB max; . 2dB typical Isolation:
Freq MHz I 1 I 5
" I 1" I 3" I 5"
dB min - 100 - 90 f - 80 - 75 - 60 - 55
VSWR: 1-500MHz 1.3:1 ( 18dB RL), 5-500MHz 1.1:1 ( 26dB RL) Response Flatness: 1-500MHz + /- 15dB; 5-300MHz + /-. 1dB Power:
When ordering specify: A) Model Number, BI Impedance, Cl Connectors
SOLID STATE SWITCH
i5500
ohm ohm
1MHz 5-500 MHz
75 ohm 1MHz
75 ohm 5-500 MHz
roux levels pernritted with neoliaible distortion
cw Power
Peak Volts
Max c-w Volts
dBrn
50 mW
2
1.0 W
11
1.5
-117
7 +30
75 mW 3.5
2.3
+19 (+63 dBmV)
.75 W
11
7.5
+29 (+77 dBmV)
Switching Time: 0-.5ms DC Bias: 1+ and (- I12V at 50mA Enclosure: 3-5/8" x 1-1/2" x 1-1/4" cast aluminum, blue finish
A64MP PIN DIODE TRANSFER SWITCH
Frequency Range: 1.5-500MHz ( usable . 3-700MHz)
VSWR: 1.2:1 max
Loss: 1.3dB typical
Isolation: 50dB min ( 65dB min at 300MHz)
Max Signal Level: 1V rms for minimum distortion
Enclosure: 1-1/8" x 1-3/8" x2-1/4" cast aluminum
Schematic:
1: SO
+ 12 VDC - 12 VDC
When ordering specify: Al Model Number, BI Impedance, Cl Connectors
UHF SWITCHES
A64U have specifications of a single switch head of the A49U RF Comparator.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-181
WIDE BAND ENGINEERING CO., INC.
P.O. Box 21652 1838 East University Drive Phoenix, AZ 85036 (602) 254-1570
DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS/ FILTERS
A73 SERIES DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
A73 Series Directional Couplers are of reciprocal hybrid ferrite circuitry, featuring broad bandwidth with outstanding directivity and flatness.
APPLICATIONS Line Monitoring: Power split from the line is - 20dB down for sampling without altering line characteristics, for level measuring, VSWR
alarms, etc.
Power Measurements: Insertion in the line allows level measurements with simple lower level detectors or field strength meters and power measuring equipment. By reversing the coupler in the line or using the A73D types, an indication of impedance match and/or reflected power can be measured by comparing the forward to reflected power
levels.
Load Source Isolator: Using adirectional coupler in the line, asignal can be taken from the source to the tap with high attenuation ( direct-
ivity) between the tap and the load.
MODELS AVAILABLE A73-20 types are for 1-500M Hz signals up to 5-10 watts. GA and GB versions have a higher minimum directivity for more critical measurement applications.
A73-20P and A73-20PA are 1-100 and 10-200MHz couplers for precision measurements up to 50 watts. Xversions have ahigher minimum directivity.
DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS
A73D-20P and A73D-20PA are dual versions of the above for simultaneous measurement of forward and reflected power. X versions have a higher minimum directivity. A73M is a 1-500MHz, 50 watt non- directional coupler providing a transformer tap -30dB down from the line.
Model
Freq
Range MHz
Coupler Type
In Line Power
Minimum Directivity
IdB)
1-500
5-300
MHz
MHz
In Line Loss (dB)
Response Flatness
of - 20 dB port id131
VSk 'ZR
Size (See Back Cover I
A73-20 A73-20GA A73-20 G B A73- 20P A730- 20P A73-20PX A730-20PX A73-20PA 473D-20PA A73-20PAX A73D-20PA X A73N1
1-500 1-100
10-200 1-500
single
single dual
single dual
single dual
single dual NA
5W cw
(IOW cw
5-300 MHz)
50W cw `75 ohm limited
to IOW cw)
50W cz.
20
30
30
40
40
typical 45
35 dB mirs 40 dB min typical
45 dB min
35 dB min 40 dB min typical
45 dB min
.4 max .2
.15 .3 .15 .3 .15 .3 .15 .3
none
1
:- .1
5-300 MHz 1".25
1-500 MHz
1.11 5-500 i. 5:1 1-500
1.11 max 1.04:1 Ivuical
.25
1.1:1
A A
A A
B A
-- ES A B A B
A
_
When ordering specify: Al Model Number, B) Impedance, C) Connectors
RF FILTERS
Models A60 Hi- Pass/ Lo- Pass, A6OD Hi- Lo Diplexer, and A71 Band-
pass are high density, flat hi- pass, lo- pass, or band-pass filter series, from 1-700MHz, totally impedance matched throughout the bandpass. Although some filters must be custom designed, WBE has many standard proven designs that may meet your requirements promptly without extra development. Hi- pass, Lo- pass, and Band-pass filters
are specified by the customer using the following terms:
A) Matched Bandwidth: Minimum impedance matched bandpass frequency boundaries. Usually 1.2:1 max VSWR
BI Loss: Maximum loss allowable in dB throughout matched band-
pass C) Rejection: Specific minimum rejection outside bandpass with dB
attenuation and frequency required. 20dB or 30dB points suggested with other critical areas to be considered.
A 4-
A B
OdB_1
A71 SERIES
A60 SERIES
Warranty: 1year
When ordering or requesting quotations specify: A) Model Number, B) Impedance, C) Connectors, D) Size Requirements, El Exact Requirements.
VRF-182
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WIDE BAND ENGINEERING CO., INC.
IMPEDANCE BRIDGES/
P.O. Box 21652 1838 East University Drive
DC BLOCKS/RF TERMINATIONS
Phoenix, AZ 85036
(602) 254-1570
RF IMPEDANCE BRIDGES
Models A56 and A57 are both widely used broad band balun transformer type RF IN -RF OUT impedance bridges with the unknown port balanced against areference termination. Return loss is read directly as insertion loss through the bridge. This method is superior to simpler resistor- diode ( RF IN- DC OUT) bridges since models A56 and A57 function independent of input level and do not require diode square law corrections, special scope graticules and calibrated mismatches. Models A56 and A57 are frequently used with an automatic RF Comparator ( A49), RF Analyzer ( A51) or Wideband RF Amplifier ( A52) and afixed or variable attenuator for automatic direct reading comparison, and can be amplified to display return loss levels even below 50dB.
MODELS AVAILABLE Models A57 and A57U are provided with areference port for balancing the bridge against an external termination. ( Total of 4 ports). Models A57T and A57TU have a built-in fixed termination without a reference port. ( Total of 3ports). Model A56 is primarily for coaxial cable impedance testing ( SRO. Termination is variable with two dials for reading of ohms resistance and + or - pF correction capacitance. Type "N" female fitting standard on " unknown" port. ( Total of 3 ports). Models A57GA, A57TGA and A56GA are high precision versions with aminimum guaranteed directivity of 50dB from 5-500MHz. Measured lab data is included with each " GA" model.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Range: A57, A57T, A56 1-500MHz; A57U, A57TU 1-900MHz. Impedance: 50 or 75 ohm ( specify when ordering). Bridge Type: Return Loss, direct reading, balun-null. Directivity or " Balance" ( Terminated Loss- Bridge Loss): A57 / A57T, A56 40dB min. ( 1.02:1 residual VSWR) 1-500MHz, 50dB min. ( 1.006:1 residual VSWR) 10-300MHz; A57U / A57TU 40dB min. ( 1.02:1 residual
VSWR) 1-900MHz. Bridge Loss RF IN -RF OUT: 12dB nominal or 6dB per leg ( RF IN- Test Port or RF OUT- Test Port). Short- Open Error: 1dB max. Service: Shock protected, suitable for factory test or for calibration of lab instruments. Enclosure: Cast aluminum, blue finish. Connectors: Model A56 has standard type"N" female on unknown port. Weight: A56 8-1/2 oz.; A57 / A57T 3oz.; A57U/A57TU 3oz. Size: A56 C; A57 / A57T B; A57U/A57TU A
When ordering specify: Al Model Number, BI Impedance Cl Connectors
NEW PRODUCTS
Low Frequency Bridges
The units listed are representative of the types of Bridges available. If the units here do not meet your specific requirements, we will be most happy to quote to your specific Frequency Range and Directivity desired.
A57/30 and A57T/30 Frequency: 30kHz - 30MHz; Directivity: 40dB min.
A57LS and A57TLS Frequency: 300kHz - 100MHz; Directivity: 40dB min. 300kHz - 100MHz, 50dB min. 1 - 50MHz
A57LL and A57TLL Frequency: 190kHz - 30MHz; Directivity: 50dB min.
Converted Bridges RF In and RF Out ports are 50 ohms with Reference and/or Test Ports 75 ohms; or RF In and RF Out ports are 75 ohms with Reference and/or Test Ports 50 ohms. Specify when ordering.
A57C and A57TC Frequency: 1-500MHz; Directivity: 40dB min.
A57GAC and A57TGAC Frequency: 1-500MHz Directivity: 40dB min. 1-500MHz, 50dB min. 5-500MHz
PRECISION DC BLOCK
Model A74 Precision DC Block is acapacitive block which provides up to 200 volts protection for RF Bridges, Detectors or other RF Equipment susceptible to damage by AC or DC power entering the RF Port. The excellent impedance match allows it to be useful in measurement applications where general purpose DC Blocks are inadequate.
SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Range: 2-350MHz VSWR: 1.02:1 max Impedance: 50 or 75 ohm ( specify when ordering) Enclosure: 1-1/2" x 1-1/8" x7/8" cast alumirum, blue finish
When ordering specify: A) Model Number, B1 Impedance, C) Connectors
RF TERMINATIONS Several precision terminations are available. VSWR: 1.01:1 max 0-500MHz ( 45dB return loss); 1.006:1 max 0-300MHz ( 50dB return loss)
Model A56T5OB A56T75B A56T75F A56T5OS A56T75S A56T50 A56T75
Type Fixed Fixed Fixed
Fixed Fixed Variable R C
Variable R C
Impedance 50 ohm 75 ohm 75 ohm
50 ohm 75 ohm 50 ohm
75 ohm
Connector Male BNC Male BNC
Male F Male N Male N Female N Female N
Weight 1oz. 1oz.
1oz. 2oz. 2oz. 81 /2 oz. 81 /2 oz.
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-183
WIDE BAND ENGINEERING CO., INC.
P.O. Box 21652 1838 East University Drive Phoenix, AZ 85036 (602) 254-1570
RF DETECTORS/ IMPEDANCE TRANSFORMERS
MODEL A61 HIGH OUTPUT RF DETECTOR
Model A61 provides a flat DC voltage gain better than 10dB over conventional detectors. The unit replaces most detectors where easily increased gain is desired. The unit basically consists of a specially designed voltage doubling wide band RF transformer, loaded at the secondary by afrequency compensating termination network. More gain in voltage is realized by applying adual microwave diode voltage doubling network at this termination. Additional DC output is gained from raising the diodes operating point in the square law region with respect to the RF input level. The detector is shunted by only 100 pF for exceptionally high frequency response on the DC side. For additional flatness, anetwork isolates the DC or Video output from the reactive effects or "suckouts" normally associated with various cable lengths connected between the detector and the scope, recorder, or other device. Additional external capacitance at the DC output may be used to reduce the high frequency video response for noise and transient reduction without the usual resonance distortion effects reflected back to the RF Termination. Some applications include sweep display, RF measurements, and signal monitoring.
MODEL A33 DETECTORS
These detectors are half wave and full wave voltage doubling detectors. A special feature is DC isolation between the RF line and the detector circuit.
MODELS AVAILABLE Model A61: Special high output detector, increases gain 10dB +
Model A33: Half wave detector Model A33D: Dual diode voltage doubling version of A33, increases
DC voltage gain 6dB Model A33T: In line half wave detector Model A33TD: Dual diode voltage doubling version of A337, increases DC voltage gain 6dB
Model
Freq MHz
Detector Circuitry
Special High Output
Half Wave, Single Diode
Dual Diode, Voltage Doubling
Configuration
Internally Terminated
RF In, DC Out
In Line RF In, RF Out, DC Out
VSWR
Flatne s ( dB)
3-300 1-500 MHz MHz
In Line Loss (dB)
A61
1-500
X
X
1.5:1*
1- .1
±.5
NA
A33 .5-500 A33D .5-500
X
X
X
X
1.1:1 1.1:1
±.1 ±.1
i. 1 NA
±.1
NA
A33T A33TD
1-500 1-500
X X
X
1.1:1
-1 .1
1 .25
.25
X
1.1:1
±.1
±.25
.1
*1.1:1 5-300 MHz
Warranty: 1year When ordering specify: A) Model Number, B) Impedance, C) Connectors, DI Positive or Negative DC Polarity
Typical DC Gain -30 dBm
15 dB 0 dB 6 dB 0 dB 6 dB
Size (See Back Cover)
B
A
A
A
A
50/75 OHM IMPEDANCE CONVERTER
Model A65 uses a specially designed, individually tuned broadband transformer for 50 ohms to 75 ohms or 75 ohms to 50 ohms with virtually no loss 1.15dB typical). This device replaces the conventional MLP ( minimum loss pad) where extra padding is unnecessary. Model A65 is frequently attached directly to a50 ohm test instrument for use in asystem requiring a75 ohm impedance. The unit is also valuable when attached to both ports of a device under test of opposite impedance than the measuring system. When Model A65 is used on each end of atwo port device or on both generator and detector, again of approximately 11dB is added to the circuit when substituted for two resistive MLPs.
SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Range: 1-500MHz VSWR: 1.2:1 max 1-500MHz; 1.1:1 max 2-500MHz;
1.05:1 max 10-500MHz Loss: . 25dB max . 8-500M Hz; . 16dB max 20-500M Hz Power: 5W cw Enclosure: 1-1/2" x 1-1/8" x7/8" cast aluminum, blue finish Weight: 2 oz. Warranty: 1year
A65GA: Same as A65 except VSWR: 1.03:1 max 20-500MHz A65U: Frequency Range: 10-900MHz, VSWR: 1.1:1 max, 1.05:1
typical, Loss: . 5dB max
When ordering specify: Al Model Number, B) 50 ohm connector, Cl 75 ohm connector
VRF-184
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WIDE BAND ENGINEERING CO., INC.
P.O. Box 21652 1838 East University Drive Phoenix, AZ 85036 (602) 254-1570
RF ANALYZERS/ COMPARATOR
RF SWITCHER/COMPARATOR, 1-500MHz
1-500MHz RF ANALYZERS
MODEL A49 RF COMPARATOR
Model A49 is a totally solid state, dual channel RF Comparator for comparison of gain, loss, and impedance with an attenuator or master reference, the technique used in the more advanced network analyzers. The Model A49 has the stability and high isolation required for measuring insertion loss in steps of . 01dB to SRL and shielding effectiveness testing beyond -80dB. With both ports balanced, measurement error can be reduced to that of the standard alone without compensating for errors resulting from dual trace scopes, detector tracking, scale accuracy, linearity, drift, etc.
SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Range: 1-500MHz ( usable . 5-1000MHz) Switch Configuration: DPDT (2separate SPDT heads) Impedance: 50 or 75 ohms ( specify when ordering) VSWR: 1.1:1 typical Flatness: + /-. 1d8 Isolation: 45dB min at 300MHz, 50dB per switch typical Path Selection: Path Aonly, Path Bonly, or Path A and Path Bsimultaneous at 30Hz line locked switch rate Channel Match: .1dB max Phase Control: Rear chassis mounted phase adjust and phase reverse controls. Size: 3-1/2" x 19" EIA Panel x5" deep Finish: Grain satin panel, blue enclosure Power: 115VAC, 60Hz, 15W Weight: 4-1/2 lbs Warranty: 2years When ordering specify: A) Model Number, B) Impedance, C) Connectors
A49U: Frequency Range: 1-900MHz. Other specifications: See A49. When ordering specify: A) Model Number, B) Impedance, C) Connectors
A49 RF Comparator
Model A51 Combines{ A52 RF Sweep Amplifier A61 High Output Detector
MODEL A51 RF ANALYZER
For professional measurements of gain, loss, impedance, and response comparison. The user selects the accessory equipment such as attenuators, sweep signal generators, RF bridges and oscilloscope. The A51 is ideal for low cost reliable test and alignment stations or for high precision laboratory measurements dependent on the precision or economy of the accessory equipment. This system allows substitution or future upgrading and makes use of existing equipment without being " locked- in" to ahigh priced package analyzer. Panel connectors for the comparator, amplifier, and detector are provided for normal interconnection as asystem, or these components may be used individually.
OVERALL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS Frequency Range: 1-500MHz ( usable . 5-600MHz) Impedance: 50 or 75 ohm ( specify when ordering)
Flatness: + /-. 5dB /-. 25dB 5-300MHz) Range: . 01dB to 100dB depending on setup ( i.e. . 5V RF Input equals
1mV per scope division at -80dB attenuation). Size: 3-1/2" x19" EIA Panel x5" deep
Enclosure: Heavy gauge aluminum, blue finish Power: 115VAC, 60Hz, 22W
Weight: 6lbs Warranty: 2years
MODELS AVAILABLE
Model
Amplifier Type
A51/40
A52/40(40dB)
A51/20
A62/20 ( 20dB)
A51/30
A52 / 30(30dB)
Model A51/50 A51/60
Amplifier Type A52/50(50dB) A72/60 ( 60dB)
A51U / 30 Frequency Range: 1-900MHz. Contains the A49U, A52U/30 and choice of A33, or A33D detector. When ordering specify: A) Model Number, B) Detector Polarity, C) Impedance, D) Connectors
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-185
WIDE BAND ENGINEERING CO., INC.
P.O. Box 21652 1838 East University Drive Phoenix, AZ 85036
(602) 254-1570
RF SWEEP AMPLIFIERS/ MINIATURE AMPLIFIERS
RF AMPLIFIERS, 1-500 MHz
WBE RF Sweep Amplifiers are extremely flat response, low noise, wide band amplifiers for post amplification in critical sweep frequency measurement set-ups. Available in 50 or 75 ohm impedances, these units are excellent general purpose lab amplifiers amplifying signals for receivers, frequency counters, spectrum analyzers, oscilloscopes, markers and detectors and are rugged enough for mobile applications. Line filtering and double shielding prevent ambient and power line interference.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Range: 1-500 MHz ( usable . 5-600 MHz)
Output Capability: . 7V min output for 1dB gain
Impedance: 50 or 75 ohms ( specify when ordering)
compression ( saturation 1V)
Noise Figure: 7dB max, 5dB typical
Hum Modulation: . 5% max
Input VSWR: 1.5:1 max, 1.2:1 typical
Power: 115V AC, 60 Hz, 10W
MODELS AVAILABLE
Gain
Flatness ldB)
Model
dB
1-500 MHz
5-300 MHz
EIA Panel
A62/20
20
+ /-. 15
+ / -. 1
1-.3/4" x19"
A52/30
30
+ /-. 22
+ /-. 15
1-3/4" x19"
A52/40
40
+ /- 30
+ /-. 20
1-3/4" x19"
A52/50
50
+ I-45
+/-.25
1-3/4"x 19"
A72/60
60
+ /-. 60
+ /-. 30
3-1/2"x 19"
When ordering specify: A) Model Number, BI Impedance, Cl Connectors
Depth Behind Panel
2-1/2"
2-1/2" 2-1/2" 2:1/2" 5"
MODEL A52U/30
Frequency Range: 1-900 MHz
Output Capability: . 7V min output for 1dB gain
Gain: 30dB nominal
compression ( saturation 1V)
Flatness: + / -. 5dB
Hum Modulation: . 5% max
Impedance: 50 or 75 ohms ( specify when ordering)
Power: 115V AC, 60 Hz, 10W
Noise Figure: 7dB max, 5dB typical
EIA Panel: 1-3/4" x19"
Input VSWR: 1.5:1 max, 1.2:1 typical
Depth Behind Panel: 2-1/2"
When ordering specify: Al Model Number, BI Impedance, Cl Connectors
A82 SERIES MINIATURE RF AMPLIFIERS
Series A82 satisfies applications that require the following specifications in arugged miniature package. Series A82 is ideal for direct antenna mounting. Applications include airborne equipment, test instrumentation, sweep equipment, spectrum analyzers, frequency counters, telemetry, radio astronomy, wide band communications, or a convenient all around test bench amplifier. Each stage is transformer coupled for highest power output with minimum distortion. Selective feedback is used to maintain flatness and impedance match over the entire bandwidth.
MODELS AVAILABLE Models A82 and A82A are amplifiers of ultra wide bandwidth, extreme flatness, and excellent impedance match. Models A82H, A82L, and A82LA offer amore limited or specific bandpass with less stringent flatness specifications. Models A82 / RP, A82A/ RP, A82H / RP, A82L/ RP, and A82LA/ RP are remote power option amplifiers which may be remotely powered through the output connector.
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Impedance: 50 or 75 ohms ( specify when ordering)
Noise Figure: 7dB max, 4.5dB typical
Input VSWR: 1.5:1 max, 1.2:1 or less typical
Reverse Attenuation: - 30dB typical
except at band edge
Enclosure: Cast aluminum, blue finish
Gain: 20dB stable + / -. 5dB - 40 to 170°F
Warranty: 1year
Model A82
Freq Range (F ulI
Specification) MHz
1-500
Approximate 3 dB points (MHz )
.3-650
Ga in Flatness
1- .15
Output Capability in V output
for 1 dB
Compression
.7
Power
Requirement s
-12 VDC
ID
trA
28
Size (See Back Cover)
A
Weight oz.
2 1/2
A82A
1-500
.3-650
-1 .15
.7
28
B
3
A82H
4-450
1.5-550
1 .5
.7
28
B
3
A82L
.1-50
.050-150
1 .5
1.0
50
B
3
A82LA
.4-30
.3-100
1.5
1.0
50
B
3
When ordering specify: Al Model Number, BI Impedance, C) Connectors
REMOTE POWER ACCESSORIES Model A82PIN: Power Injection Network contains network for injecting the DC into the RF amplifier " downline" and remotely powering any of the A82/ RP Series. . 5-500 MHz, 50 ohm, 1.2:1 max VSWR, . 25dB max loss, 60dB min RF -DC Isolation, BNC connectors
standard, 2-1/4" x 1-1/8" x7/8". Model A82RPS: Remote Power Supply for remote powering of any A82/ RP Series amplifier. A82R PS
contains power injection network comparable to A82PIN and a DC power supply. 4-11/16" x3-11/16" x2-7/32", 6 ft. line cord, BNC
Connectors on RF IN and RF OUT.
VRF-186
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WIDE BAND ENGINEERING CO., INC.
PRICE LIST
P.O. Box 21 652 1838 East University Drive Phoenix, AZ 85036 (602) 254-1 570
Connectors: VHF equipment is stock fitted with either 50 ohm BNC or 75 ohm type " F" ( F61A or F61AS) connectors. UHF equipment is stock fitted with type BNC connectors ( type " F"
connectors are not recommended for 1-900MHz instruments). Other connectors are available at additional cost per connector ( see price list). Special customer furnished connectors are installed at no additional charge.
General Information
Chassis Sizes: (referenced in catalog charts)
A.7/8" x 1-1/8" x2-1/4 B.1-1/8" x 1-3/8" x2-1/4" C.4-3/8" x2-3/8" x 1-1/4" D.3-5/8" x 1-1/2" x 1-1/4"
Price
Price
Model #
50 ohm
75 ohm
Measurements: WBE specifications and data for 50 or 75 ohm impedance measurements, direc-
tivity, etc., requiring aprecision termination are referenced to General Radio GR874 type precision termination and adaptors. For certain high precision items such as A66GA, A56GA, A73GB, etc., attenuation/gain data are referenced to Weinschel attenuators. If customer has a preferred termination, WBE will reference to the customer supplied equipment and return same with order.
Model #
Price 50 ohm
Price 75 ohm
Model #
Price 50 ohm
Price 75 ohm
RF SWEEP AMPLIFIERS
A62/20 $253.00
A52/30
338.00
A52/40
421.00
A52/50
531.00
A72/60
640.00
A52U / 30
628.00
$ 268.00
356.00 444.00
560.00 674.00
650.00
MINIATURE RF AMPLIFIERS
A82
162.00
A82A
151.00
A82L
123.00
A82LA
111.00
A82/ RP
162.00
A82A / RP
151.00
A82L/RP
123.00
A82LA / RP
111.00
174.00
161.00 133.00 120.00 174.00
161.00 133.00 120.00
ACCESSORIES A82P ) N
A82RPS
55.00 102.00
61.00 110.00
RF COMPARATORS A49
A49U
457.00 512.00
478.00 544.00
RF ANALYZERS A51/40 A51/20 A51/30 A51/50 A51/60 A51U / 30
878.00 710.00 794.00 988.00 1097.00 1140.00
925.00 749.00 837.00 1040.00 1155.00 1196.00
VARIABLE IMPEDANCE BRIDGES
1-500M Hz
A56
445.00
A56GA
482.00
A56GATD
525.00
448.00 485.00 528.00
IMPEDANCE BRIDGES 1-500MHz
A57
$ 258.00
A57GA
311.00
A57GATD
397.00
$271.00 323.00 408.00
A577 A57TGA A57TGATD
258.00 311.00 354.00
IMPEDANCE BRIDGES 1-900MHz
A57U
357.00
A57UTD
501.00
A57TU A57TUTD
357.00 429.00
270.00 322.00 365.00
370.00 514.00 369.00 441.00
IMPEDANCE BRIDGES
130kHz - 100MHz Range)
A57/30
$311.00
A57 / 30TD
397.00
A57LS
258.00
A57LSTD
344.00
A57LL
395.00
A57LLTD
481.00
$323.00 408.00
271.00 367.00 411.00 497.00
A57T / 30 A57T/30TD A57T LS A57TLSTD A57TLL
A57TLLTD
311.00 354.00 258.00 301.00 395.00 438.00
322.00
365.00 270.00
323.00 410.00 453.00
IMPEDANCE BRIDGES
150/75 ohm Conversion built-in I
A57C
$309.00
A57GAC
361.00
A57GACTD
447.00
A57TC
A57TGAC A57TGACTD
308.00 360.00 403.00
DC Blocking
15.00
(when ordered on bridge)
15.00
VARIABLE TERMINATIONS
A56T50
50 ohm
A56T75
75 ohm
$ 107.00 107.00
PRECISION FIXED TERMINATIONS
1-500M Hz 1-900M Hz (Add U to above Models)
$43.00 72.00
MISMATCHES 1-500M Hz (Special Order Only)
56.00
DC BLOCK A74
$ 31.00 $40.00
RF DETECTORS A61 A33
A33D A33T A33TD
99.00 50.00
55.00 55.00 63.00
102.00 53.00
58.00 60.00 68.00
50/75 OHM IMPEDANCE CONVERTERS
A65
$ 50.00
A65GA
63.00
A65U
69.00
Model S
50 ohm with data without data
75 ohm with data without data
DIRECTIONAL COUPLERS A73-20 $ 86.00
A73-20GA
144.00
A73-20GB
244.00
A73- 20P
108.00
A73D-20P
186.00
A73-20PA
121.00
A73D-20PA
223.00
A73- 20P X
144.00
A73D-20PX
258.00
A73-20PAX
160.00
A73D-20PAX
320.00
A73M
93.00
$ 62.00 $ 98.00
119.00
161.00
220.00 _
83.00
120.00
148.00
206.00
95.00
135.00
186.00
247.00
119.00
155.00
220.00
275.00
136.00
172.00
282.00
340.00
62.00
114.00
$ 72.00 135.00
96.00 170.00 113.00 209.00 130.00 237.00 147.00 302.00
82.00
PRECISION HYBRID DIVIDER/COMBINERS
A66
$ 85.00 $ 60.00
A66GA
119.00
94.00
A66L
82.00
56.00
A67
152.00
119.00
$ 98.00 135.00 93.00
164.00
$ 72.00 110.00 69.00
138.00
RF SWITCHES A64 A64U A64MP
$ 144.00 $ 120.00 $ 159.00 $ 135.00
117.00
132.00
204.00
178.00
226.00
202.00
CONNECTOR OPTIONS BNC male $7.00
Fmale . 025 pin
7.00
Fmale Push
3.00
N female
N male GR874
$ 9.00
11.00 45.00
SMA female
SMA male TNC female
TN Cmale
$ 7.00 11.00 7.00 11.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-187
WINEGARD CO.
3000 Kirkwood Burlington, IA 52601 (31 9) 75 3-01 21
ANTENNAS
TV M AN Tm
VHF- UHF FM ANTENNAS
Invite comparisons with this complete line of nine VHF- UHF antennas.
· Dual action director/reflector screen serves as reflector for UHF signals and director for VHF signals · Unique driven element combines signals from VHF and UHF sections with very low loss · All 82 channel models include free VHF- UHF band separators for making TV set connections · Die- cut impedance correlators allow close spacing of antenna elements for astrong, compact antenna that will better withstand wind and ice loading · All aluminum parts are 100% protected against corrosion and industrial deposits · Exclusive wrap- around mast clamps with four locking jaws cannot crush antenna boom or mast · High tensile aluminum elements are not affected by ice loading or strong winds · Completely automatic hardware, locks tightly into place, unfolds in seconds.
TV -7010
[\, TV- 7000
TV- 7000
TV- 7010 TV- 7020 TV- 7022 TV- 7030 TV- 7035 TV- 7040 TV- 7042 TV- 7052
TV- Man Line Ant V/U
TV- Man Line Ant V/U TV- Man Line Ant V/U TV- Man Line Ant V/U TV- Man Line Ant V/U TV- Man Line Ant V/U TV- Man Line Ant VHF TV- Man Line Ant V/U 82 Channel Ant
TV- 7020
$22.75 35.25 46.50 50.50 56.50 63.00 82.25 96.25
105.25
MODEL NO. TOTAL ELEMENTS VHF ELEMENTS UHF ELEMENTS BOOM LENGTH TURNING RADIUS MAXIMUM WIDTH OVERALL HEIGHT
TV- 7052 43 15 28 160" 96" 111" 30"
TV- 7042 37 14 23
140" 96" 111" 20"
TV- 7040 32 17 15
140" 82" 111" 18"
TV- 7035 27 15 12 117" 74" 111" 5"
TV- 7030 23 13 10 100"
111" 5"
TV- 7022 20 8
12
8464-
111"
15"
TV- 7020 18 10
8
8464-
111"
5"
TV- 7010 14 6 8 55" 52"
100" 5"
TV- 7000 9 5 4
29" 51" 100"
5"
TV MAN VHF- FM antennas combine simple, straightforward mechanical design with Winegard tried and tested electronic features for the best low priced antennas ever produced. These five TV MAN VHF- FM models have been carefully selected for their performance ability in aprice range long deprived of antennas with quality mechanical construction.
TV MAN antennas, combined with CP-Series preamplifiers, cover an even wider range of reception conditions.
TV- 5000 TV- 5020 TV- 5030 TV- 5040
TV- Man Line Ant VHF TV- Man Line Ant VHF TV- Man Line Ant VHF TV- Man Line Ant VHF
$27.50 47.75 57.75 80.50
TV- 5020
TOTAL ELEMENTS BOOM LENGTH TURNING RADIUS MAXIMUM WIDTH OVERALL HEIGHT
TV- 5040 24
168" 113" 111" 18"
TV- 5030 17
117" 76" 111" 5"
TV- 5000
TV- 5020 13
93" 68" 111" 5"
TV- 5000 7
35" 52" 100" 5"
VRF-188
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
WINEGARD
3000 Kirkwood Street Burlington, IA 52601 (319) 753-0121
CO.
TV ANTENNAS
CHROMSTAR 11"*"
Winegard has combined its most popular antenna features with new and evolutionary design changes to provide advanced excellence in construction and performance.
Whether you need long distance reception or picture- perfect close- in reception, Winegard offers aChromstar II model that will be ideal for your location.
POWERFUL VHF PERFORMANCE
When it comes to reception on Channels 2-13, Chromstar II antennas come through with the finest performance yet. This can make a big difference in picture quality when weak signals are a problem - so much, in fact, that in many areas asmaller model than usual may be used for excellent results.
Many features combine to give Chromstar Il red-hot performance including our famous Electro -Lens ® director system combined with cross- phased, end- fire driven elements; low- Q dual directors.. all of which give increased capture area and provide for peaking the antenna on each VHF channel.
POWERFUL UHF PERFORMANCE Outstanding UHF reception is accomplished by precise director spacing combined with a highly efficient corner reflector system. Weak UHF signals are captured and reflected with minimal loss to the driven element for increased uniform gain on all UHF frequencies on Channels 14-69.
FINEST OUTDOOR FM ANTENNA For FM and FM stereo reception from stations near or far, the Chromstar II CS- 6065 is amust. Same rugged construction features as outdoor TV antennas including built-in, weatherproof downlead/ preamplifier housing. Designed to cut distortion; separate adjacent channels and reduce or eliminate fading and noise.
HIGH PERFORMANCE RUGGEDIZED VAGIS Chromstar II single channel and broadband yagis are designed for high gain, pinpoint directivity and perfect 75 ohm or 300 ohm impedance match, for maximum transfer of signal and perfect color pictures. Superb front- to- back ratio... no back lobes.
UHF MODEL CS- 9065
UHF MODEL CS- 9085
UHF MODEL CS- 9095
BROAD LO BAND AND SINGLE CH.
CS- 2026
(Channels 2-6) Replaces CH- 2026
BROAD HI BAND AND SINGLE CH.
CS- 2073
(Channels 7-13)
VHF MODEL CS- 5100
VHF MODEL CS- 5200
FM 88-108MHz
Elements Dimensions Recommended Preamplifiers
10 123"L x70"W CP-3000, CP-3700
CP-3800
SINGLE CHANNEL VHF YAG IS
Elements Dimensions
Recommended Preamplifiers
9
144-3 / 4"L x110W CP-3000, CP-3700
CP-3800
UHF
Elements Dimensions Recommended Preamplifiers
22 45-1/2"L x16"W CP-4300, CP-4700
Fringe CP-4800
FM UHF VHF Elements Dimensions Recommended Preamplifiers
Elements Dimensions Recommended Preamplifiers
32- 13V- 19U 72"L x108W CP-8300, CP-8700,
CP-9000 Fringe CP-8900,
CP-8800
43- 12V- 31U 90"L x110"W CP-8300, CP-8700,
CP-9000 Fringe CP-8900,
CP-8800
FM VHF
Elements Dimensions Recommended Preamplifiers
Elements Dimensions Recommended Preamplifiers
13 53-3/4"Lx 110W CP-3000, CP-3700
CP-3800
36 159"Lx 110"W CP-3000, CP-3700
CP-3800
10 126-1/2"L x34"W CP-3000, CP-3700
CP-3800
39 73-1/2"L x24"W CP-4300, CP-4700
Fringe CP-4800
49 93-1/2"L x24"W CP-4300, CP-4700
Fringe CP-4800
VHF MODEL CS- 4051
VHF MODEL CS- 4052
43- 19V- 24U 89-1/2"L x110"W CP-8300, CP-8700,
CP-9000 Fringe CP-8900,
CP-8800
55-20V- 35U 114"Lx 110"W CP-8300, CP-8700,
CP-9000 Fringe CP-8900,
CP-8800
53-22V- 31U 114"L x110W CP-8300, CP-8700,
CP-9000 Fringe CP-8900,
CP-8800
64- 26V- 38U 142"L x110"W CP-8300, CP-8700,
CP-9000 Fringe CP-8900
CP-8800
61- 29V- 32U 133-1/2"L x112"W CP-8300, CP-8700,
CP-9000 Fringe CP-8900,
CP-8800
70- 30V- 40U 177"L x110"W CP-8300, CP-8700
CP-9000 Fringe CP-8900,
CP-8800
MOD. CS-8096
VHF/UHF MOD. CS- 8098
18 76"L x110W CP-3000, CP-3700
CP-3800
26 111"Lx 110"W CP-3000, CP-3700
CP-3800
40 156"Lx 110"W CP-3000, CP-3700
CP-3800
45 199-1/2"Lx 110"W CP-3000, CP-3700
CP-3800
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
FM MODEL CS- 6065
VRF-189
WINEGARD CO.
ANTENNAS
3000 Kirkwood Burlington, IA 52601 (319) 753-0121
TV- 6000
TV- 6010
SR-20TA
TT
SR -20TA TV ANTENNA
Solid-state VHF- UHF travel TV antenna for
side mounting on travel trailers and RVs. Gives best possible color and black and white reception on all 82 TV channels. Mast mounts on side of vehicle and is raised to the receiving position manually. Antenna may be rotated and lowered over roof so no parts can be damaged by tree limbs or wires.
Preamplifier circuit board is coated with sealant to provide corrosion and salt spray protection. All components enclosed to meet RVIA electrical standards. Package includes both 117VAC and 12VDC power supplies, 46" mast, TV set cord with band separator and 15' of coaxial cable.
RV- 1000 RV TV ANTENNA REPAIR KIT
Repair kit for Winegard RV models RVH-2K, RVH-3, RVH-4. Small quantities of most used repair parts.
RVH-2K AMPLIFIED RV ANTENNA
Winegard has designed the RVH-2K exclusively for recreational vehicles -- modern space age design and compact rugged construction gives the RVH-2K a pleasing appearance and years of trouble free service. Sensar's solid state circuitry amplifies TV signals to pull in VHF and UHF stations up to 60 miles or more away, depending on terrain. Power supply mounts flush in wall, provides TV outlet on- off switch and pilot light. Power supply requires 12VDC.
Permanent corrosion resistant finish of the RVH-2K insures lifetime installation that will not rust, corrode or stain finish of vehicle. Easy to install -- requires only simple hand tools. UL listed. Carton contain Sensar
antenna, 20' coaxial cable, power supply, mounting hardware and antenna lift.
RVH-3 RV AND VAN TV ANTENNA
Same as RVH-2K shown above except 12VDC power supply has a 12 volt receptacle for TV outlet and includes aVHF- UHF, MSJ-6 band separator with TV set cord attached.
RVH-4 NON-AMPLIFIED RV ANTENNA
RA- 3330 SIGNAL AMPLIFIER
300 ohm TV signal amplifier mounted on wall plate. Designed for use on any 300 ohm non- amplified RV antenna such as RVH-4, RV- 7020, etc. Connects to 12V DC power supply of vehicle. Provides up to five times the input signal for improved picture quality and greater range.
TV -6000 FM ANTENNA
TV MAN, 4 element flat yagi for FM and FM / stereo reception. Recommended for suburban areas where a moderately directive antenna is required. Completely factory preassembled, unfolds in seconds for easy installation.
TV-6010 OMNIDIRECTIONAL FM ANTENNA
For receiving signals in all directions. Compact design is recommended for city and suburban reception areas. Popular turnstile design features unique one piece construction for easy installation. ( was FM- 3T)
KU -420 UHF ANTENNA
Four bay bow- tie UHF antenna for channels 14 thru 83. Ships UPS.
KU -4202 UHF ANTENNA
Eight bay bow- tie similar to KU-420. Features 2.5dB more gain, excellent directivity and front- to- back ratio for channels 14 thru 83.
U-800 UHF ANTENNA
25 element yagi with corner reflector for regular UHF band, channels 14 thru 50.
T-876 UHF ANTENNA ( TRANSLATOR)
16 element yagi with corner reflector for UHF band, channels 50 thru 83. Similar to U-800.
SINGLE CHANNEL AND BROADBAND VAGIS
"K" series 5 and 10 element VHF cut- tochannel and broadband yagi antennas. Full size, wide spread precision tuned elements. "K" series yagis are completely factory preassembled with lock- tight reflector hardware and wrap- around mast clamp. All elements and boom are constructed of gold finish aluminum -- all hardware dichromate tridite or triple thick cadmium plated.
SM -2200 SCANNER ANTENNA
Designed for peak performance on LO. HI and UHF public service bands. Vertically polarized with omni-directional pattern. Antenna is gold anodized. Mounts below TV antenna or on separate mast. Includes 65' coaxial cable with Motorola plug attached.
FM TRAP
Amplified models are equipped with a special FM curcuit to prevent overload from strong local stations. Circuit may be easily switched out when FM amplification is desired.
SR -20A HOME TV ANTENNA
Winegard's ultra- compact Sensar 82- channel TV antenna provides perfect color and black and white reception in most viewing areas. The Sensar antenna has elegant modern styling which blends with the decor of any home setting. Compact, unobtrusive design does not require elaborate mounting hardware, yet Sensar installations are stronger than conventional antennas with comparable performance. Unique bi-directional characteristics of a Sensar antenna provides excellent reception in areas where stations are in different directions. Eliminates the need for an antenna rotor in most locations. Recommended for viewing areas up to 50 miles from transmitters.. even farther depending on mounting height and signal strength. The SR-20A features built-in solid state modular amplifier, plus power- supply and band separator. Requires 117VAC power. Ships UPS.
SR- 20A
RVH-2K
TV- 6000 TV- 6010
KU- 420 KU- 4202 U-800 T-876
TV- Man Line Ant FM TV- Man Line Ant FM
TV- Man Line Ant FM UHF Ant UHF Ant UHF Ant
$22.50 28.50
$ 29.75 66.75 37.50 31.75
300 ohm version of the RVH-2K designed for use on recreational vehicles. The modern
space-age design and compact construction give the RVH-4 an appealing look and years of trouble free service. Pulls VHF, UHF and
FM signals in from 40 miles away. Includes
antenna, lift assembly, rotating handle, elevating crank assembly, and 15' of antenna lead-in wire.
SM-2200
SR- 20A
RV- 1000 RVH-2K RVH-3 RVH-4
Scanner Ant
82 Ch Ant
RV Parts Kit RV Ant RV Antenna RV Antenna
$34.25
$90.25
$104.25 168.25 180.75 119.00
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
VRF-190
WINEGARD CO.
3000 Kirkwood Street Burlington, IA 52601 (319) 753-0121
CHROMSTAR II PREAMPLIFIERS
PREAMPLIFIERS
Winegard's PA series preamplifiers provide the systems installer with the latest high technology, RF circuitry available. Noise figure, gain and VSWR specifications are carefully engineered
to maintain the highest signal quality while providing sufficient levels to overcome downlead loss and drive the system amplifiers to their rated outputs. Models which amplify VHF feature a selectable FM trap that reduces FM signals 188 to 108MHz) -- 15dB to prevent overload from strong local stations. PA series circuitry is designed for maximum stability and housed in a rugged extruded aluminum housing for years of maintenance free service. Mounting hardware provided. UL listed.
EXCLUSIVE HOUSING
GAIN 1081 CHANNEL P8-1375 P8.4975 PA 8275
2
7
29
26
1 3
-0 7
29
25
13 23 -1 0 23
26
-08 30 31
49
83
-06
-1 0
29
25
?6
16
DOWN LEAD CARTRIDGE
PREAMPLIFIER CARTRIDGE
PA- 1375 75 ohm input and output channels 2thru 13 amplified
UHF bypassed
PA- 4975 75 ohm input and output channels 14 thru 83 amplified
VHF bypassed
PA- 8275 75 ohm input and output channels 2thru 83 amplified
PA 1375
PA 4975
PA 8275
8ANDPASS
VHF ·J() to 210MHz UHF 460 to 900MHz
NOISE FIGURE
MAO TOTAL OUTPUT
VHF
2 OdB
UHF
NA
VHF 64z1BmV 11 5V1
UHF
NA
MAX TOTAL
VHF
INPUT
UHF
80 000uv NA
VSWR OUTPUT VHF UHF
12 1 12 1
FM TRAP SELECTABLE
15c1B
50 to 220MHz 460 tO 900MHz
NA 1OdB
NA
62d8mV 11 3V)
NA
45 030uv
13 1
1 2 1
50 to 220MHz 460 to 900MHz
2 OdB 1OdB 630BmV (14 VI 62d8mV ( 13VI
80 000u v
45 000u v
12 1
1 2 1
NA
-15c18
RESPONSE
IMPEDANCE WHY OUTPUT
·25dB per 6MHz Channel
75 ohm unbalanced
75 ohm unbalanced
MOUNTING TYPE
Mast
ACC FURNISHED
Mtg hardware 4 F-50 Conn Boot 1Power Supply
DOWNLEAD/PREAMP HOUSING FEATURES
·Preattached to all Chromstar antennas · Includes downlead circuit board with installer choice of 300 or 75 ohm
connection. Protects connections from water, salt. etc. ·Molded of clear, G- E Lexan(à) to prevent breakage, insured protection
against ultra-violet rays and chemical deposits ·New snap- lock feature eliminates use of inconvenient small screws ·Accepts addition of any Chromstar II preamplifier and/or " TP" channel
trap · If preamplifier is removed, downlead can be reconnected to terminal
board so antenna owner is not without reception ·The universal housing, CPH-1, can be attached to any make antenna or
mast ·Selectable FM trap reduces FM signal to prevent overload from strong
stations
CHROMSTAR II PREAMPLIFIERS HELP TO SOLVE TOUGH RECEPTION PROBLEMS
Size and cost limit the gain available from TV antennas, therefore where more gain is required an antenna mounted preamplifier is the best solution. Antenna mounted preamplifiers increase signal levels at the point of signal interception and improve picture quality throughout the system. Because preamplifiers are located on or near the antenna downlead terminals, they have at their input the best quality signals available.
Winegard Chromstar II preamplifiers are available with specifications to meet every local reception requirement. The Chromstar II line features models for use in mixed strong local and fringe signal areas which need high input levels to prevent overload and models for deep fringe areas which require high gain and low noise to boost signals to auseable level and preserve picture quality. Combinations of these specifications are also available for VHF and UHF channels to give the user a perfect custom installation for his particular area.
HIGH INPUT MODELS
CF WOO ce 37 ,
CP -4700
CcPp4."1300
CP38 00
HIGH GAIN. LOW NOISE MODELS CcFp-.4«0,30 CP-8780 CP -8800 CP -1800
CP48100
SPECIAL PURPOSE
S , oeils VHF and UHF kWOO Her antennas ether than Munster III
...
WV/
«A WO I. lie.1
OM NV VI
.111..·
CF- 2830 CP 2870
CF-2X40 CP-2837
CF. -21147
GAIN Ayo Id8I
VHF
156
UHF
-40
-1 0 159
150
158
2-3000
-16
150
198
260
279
18 0 29 0
15 5
28 0
17 0
-2 5
203
215
140
147
196
40
180
1M8A4X114TOTAL OUTPUT· VHF
12
--
11
10
UHF
10
1 1
--
078
10
10
12
10
10
1 2
08
075
08
09
09
10
08
ii
MAC. TOTAL INPUT 111·1131
VHF UHF
018
-018
018 018
004
--
0160
004
020
0075
018
004
017
008 0039
008
013
0200
018
008
016
NOISE FIGURE Iln del
VHF
31
--
31
34
UHF
73
73
--
40
34
30
30
31
35
30
42
39
40
22
85
78
40
72
RANDPASS
VHF
UHF
INPUT CONNECTIONS
OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
49701-2896CIAHHzz atlAelnlumareds*ltshelhaA abmai nli rd i'lloF al1411°H 16a4n7r e):ur eesqpur'oPgreimwsnwhItahsoeylecrWa>di eloMmi'sat ?onTotulso ctral PFM st attons
300 ohm. No.Strup Screw Type
300 ohm 303 ohm 303 ohm 75 ohm 75 ohm 75 ohm
,` ''
oh..m.m
303 ohm 75 ohm
75 ohm
308 ohm
75 ohm
75 ohm
75 ohm
25 ohm
ANTENNA
FM TRAP
YES
NA
YES
YES
NA
YES
YES
YES
YES
NA
POWER REQUIREMENTS
117VAC. 60Hz. 43Watts
1157.0VAWCa.tt6s)11z
117VAC. 60H2. 43 Watts
ACCESSORIES FURNISHED
Power Supply. Mount mg Bracket and Hardware. 3F-59 Connectors enth all 75 ohm ou put models
-7Ch VMS. LOO 05% Cross IMOdblm mien opun
Prices and Specifications Subject to Change Without Notice.
CHROMSTAR IITM PREAMPLIFIER
CROSS REFERENCE
PREAMPLIFIER
C.I.A.'S.* II PEPLACIMFNI
PREAMPLIFIER
HOUSING
AC- 2230 AC- 2950 AC- 9130
AC- 4950 AC- 4990 AC -8230 AC- 8950 AC- 9990 AC- 9880 AC- 9820 AH -0100 GA- 3000 GA- 3700 GA- 3800 GA- 2830 GA- 2870 GA- 2880 GA- 4700 GA- 4800 GA- 4830 GA- 8300 GA- 8700 GA- 8780 GA- 8800 GA- 8900 GA- 9000
CP-3000 CP-3700 CP-3800 CP-4700 CP-4800 CP-8300
CP-8700 CP-8800 CP-8900 CP-9000 CPH-1 CP-3000 + CPH-1 CP-3700 + CPH-1 CP-3800 + CPH-1 CP-2830 + CPH-1 CP-2870 + CPH-1 CP-2880 + CPH-1 CP-4700 + CPH-1 CP-4800 + CPH-1 CP-4830 + CPH-1 CP-8300 + CPH-1 CP-8700 + CPH-1 CP-8780 + CPH-1 CP-8800 + CPH-1 CP-8900 + CPH-1 CP-9000 + CPH-1
NOTE: Both housing and preamp must be ordered to replace each GA series preamp.
VRF-191
INDEX
Adaptors
VRF-93, 104, 134
Alpha Technologies
VRF-2
Amplifiers, Bridging
VRF-68-71, 125, 127, 129
Amplifiers, Signal Distribution
VRF-13, 16, 17, 55, 57, 67-71
78-82, 89, 127-130, 161
Amplifiers, Trunk
VRF-68-71, 75, 121-129
Antenna Array Spacing Antenna Preamplifiers Antenna, Reference
VRF-58
VRF-9, 10, 191 VRF-147
Antenna Stacking Data
VRF-8
Antenna Thrust Data
VRF-58
Antennas, Earth Station
VRF-4, 5, 47, 115
Antennas, Omnidirectional FM
VRF-7, 60, 190
Antennas, Parabolic
VRF-60
Antennas, Single Channel
VRF-6, 7
Antennas, TV
VRF-6-8, 18, 45, 46, 58-60, 113, 114, 188-190
Antennas, Yagi
VRF-7, 58-60, 190
Attenuators
VRF-77, 132, 147, 148, 176
Aural Level Controller
VRF-11
Keystone Electronics Corp.
VRF-98, 99
Leader Instruments Corp Leakage Monitoring System Lemco Tool Corp
Line Extenders
Line Tracer Logarithmic Amplifier
LRC Electronics, Inc.
VRF-100 VRF-145 VRF-101, 102
VRF-13, 84-87
VRF-108 VRF-148
VRF-103-107
Management Systems, Cable Matching Transformers Metrotech Corp Modems Modulators/Converters, TV
Monitor Tuner
VRF-137 VRF-54, 99, 161
VRF-108 VRF-49
VRF-12, 14, 15, 23, 24, 53, 64, 65, 120
VRF-22
Barco Electronic n.v./Elector USA, Inc. Blocking Network Blonder-Tongue Labs, Inc
Bogner Broadcast Equipment Corp
VRF-3 VRF-148, 178, 183
VRF-4-17
VRF-18
Cable
Cable Equalizers Cable Reels & Trailers Carlon Carrier Generators
Carrier Level Controllers Catel/United Scientific Corp. Channel Converters Channel Traps Channell Commercial Corp.
Character Generator Combining Network Comm/Scope Marketing, Inc. Conduit, Fittings, Couplings, Adaptors Connectors Coring Tools
VRF-32-44, 118, 150-160
VRF-72-74, 83, 88, 90, 132, 178 VRF-101, 102 VRF-19, 20
VRF-66, 75, 125
VRF-129, 130 VRF-21-29
VRF-12, 50, 52, 94, 139 VRF-98, 99 VRF-30, 31
VRF-142 VRF-117 VRF-32-43 VRF-19, 20 VRF-92, 93, 103-107
VRF-93
Demodulators, TV Detectors Directional Couplers
VRF-3, 25, 27, 28, 53, 63, 97, 119, 140, 141
VRF-148, 178, 184 VRF-56, 89, 164, 182
Emergency Alert Controller
VRF-66
Oscilloscope Pedestals & Accessories Power Dividers Power Inserters Power Supplies
Preamplifiers, TV Pyramid Industries, Inc.
VRF-146 VRF-30, 31, 109-112
VRF-118, 181 VRF-90, 118
VRF-2, 10, 67, 90, 126, 132, 149
VRF-52 VRF-109-112
Radiation Detectors Receiver, Video Reel Buck
Reflection Coefficient Bridge
Remote Controllers, TV
VRF-179 VRF-114, 116
VRF-102
VRF-146
VRF-51
Satellite Receivers
VRF-47, 48, 61, 114, 116, 117
Satellite Stereo Processor Systems
VRF-21
Scientific-Atlanta, Inc.
VRF-113-139
Scramblers/Decoders
VRF-95
Signal Level Meter
VRF-100, 144, 174, 175
Spectrum Analyzers
VRF-143, 144
Splitters
VRF-54, 83, 89, 99, 161-164
Splitter/Combiners
VRF-61, 64, 99, 161-164, 181
Status Monitoring System
VRF-131
Subscriber Drop Materials VRF-13, 95, 98, 99, 136-138
Subscriber Terminals
VRF-95, 136-138
Surge Arrestors
VRF-77
Sweep Comparator
VRF-171
Sweep Signal Generators
VRF-100, 145, 173, 176
Sweep System
VRF-143, 145, 170-173, 177
System Analyzer
VRF-177
Feedermakers
VRF-76, 83, 133
Field Strength Meter
VRF-100
Filters
VRF-61, 75, 76, 77, 81, 82, 133, 134, 148, 182
Filters, Single Channel
VRF-64
FM Modulators/Demodulators
VRF-26, 27, 28, 29
FM Repeater
VRF-29
Frequency Counter
VRF-146, 180
Frequency Transverter
VRF-50
General Cable Co General Instrument Corp
Grounding Block
VRF-44 VRF-45-95
VRF-54
Headend Amplifiers Headend Equipment Headends, Custom House Drop Materials
Housings
VRF-61 VRF-17 VRF-57 VRF-13, 95, 98, 99, 136-138
VRF-67
his Impedance Bridges
VRF-96 VRF-183
Jensen Sound Laboratories VRF-192
VRF-97
Taps & Connectors Tektronix, Inc. Telemet/Geotel, Inc. Terminators
Test Equipment Texscan Corp
Thermal Equalizer Times Fiber Communications, Inc Tools, Hand
Towers Trans USA Corp
Transmitter, Addressable Tuners TV Signal Processors Two-Way Test Equipment
VRF-91, 106, 107, 135 VRF-140 VRF-141
VRF-103, 134, 183
VRF-100, 108, 141, 143-148, 170, 187 VRF-142-149
VRF-89 VRF-150-160 VRF-93, 134, 139
VRF-165-169 VRF-161-164
VRF-139 VRF-22, 97 VRF-11, 21, 62, 119
VRF-145
Underground Materials UNR-Rohn Variable Bridges Video Conferencing Wavetek Corp Wide Band Engineering Co., Inc Winegard Co Wire, Drop
VRF-109-112 VRF-165-169
VRF-146 VRF-96
VRF-170-180 VRF-181-187 VRF-188-191 VRF-39-43, 157-160
Newly Released Guides for Your Reference Collection
Home Video Marketplace, 1984-85 1st Edition
200 pages ( approx.)
Soft 845.00
ISBN 0-86729-142-7 Now, for the first time, you can buy acomplete directory of the
major buyers and sellers of video cassette and disc programs for the home market.
This new resource identifies program producers/distributors, wholesalers and retailers-- including major department store and specialty chains that sell video programming. Additional sections list production houses, duplicators, equipment dealers and other providers of services to the video producer. Each listing includes address, phone number, contact names and descriptive information. Clear organization and indexing make the directory easy- to- use, and a professional resource section rounds out the comprehensive coverage.
Whether you're looking for adistributor of how-to programs in your area, trying to market your latest video production, or interested in the latest professional resource, you'll find the names you need in Home Video Marketplace.
Dictionary of Computer Graphics
by Dr. John Vince
200 pages, 1984.
ISBN 0-86729-134-6
834.95
An invaluable tool for all those involved in computer graphics,
this dictionary provides clearly written technical information about such terms as animation, cartesian, frame store, intensity illumination, pixel, programming, quantel, raster, vertex, windowing and more. Many entries are illustrated, showing both the equipment and the output of computer graphics.
Dr. John Vince is senior computing lecturer, Middlesex Polytechnic, UK.
The Producer's MasterguideTM 1984
by Shmuel Bension 770 pages, 1984.
Soft 869.95
This directory provides useful information about the major production centers throughout the U.S., Canada and the UK-- including topography, climate, economy, movie/TV commissions, permit and fee requirements, transportation facilities, etc.-- as well as the names, addresses and telephone numbers of services from aerial photography and casting directors to sound effects and writing services ( arranged geographically). In addition, the guide provides details of production wage scales and working conditions of more than
60 local, national and international unions and guilds. Brief articles bring readers up to date on feature production
ventures, completion bonds, production insurance, copyright registration and the MPAA rating system. A resource for anyone involved in film, TV, video, cable or satellite productions.
The Video Register 1984-85
436 pages, 1984. ISBN 0-86729-118-4 ISSN 0190-3705
Soft 834.50
Here is asure-fire way to pinpoint your customers, suppliers or colleagues more easily. Now in its seventh edition, this video industry directory is updated and expanded every year to keep up with rapid changes in the field.
New this year, you'll find several hundred additional listings of organizations using video for internal training and communications, bringing the total to 2700. Also expanded is the Production/Post-Production section. Plus, there are more
than 500 manufacturers, more than 400 dealers, more than 300 program/distributors, more than 700 consultant/producers, more than 175 resources and more than 700 cable access/local origination centers.
The Rockamerica Guide to Video/Music
497 pages, appendices, glossary, 1984.
Soft 860.00
This the only up to date reference source of video music --thousands of listings -- including: · Record company video contacts · Directors and producers · New York production listings · Los Angeles production listings ·Television distribution outlets ·Video music related publications ·Video music glossary ·Short essays about the music video business · National and international listings
The Teleconferencing Resources Directory.
1983-84
Audio and Video Conferencing Equipment. Facilities and Services
148 pages, glossary, bibliography. 1983.
ISBN 0-86729-073-0 ISSN 0739-2966
847.50
Comprehensive and easy-to- use, this handy reference guide
locates hundreds of teleconferencing suppliers, including: permanent rentable video conference facilities; consultants and system designers; transmission services; training and information sources; and manufacturers of such specialized equipment as speakerphones and freeze-frame TV as well as
manufacturers of basic audio and video equipment. All the sources you need to conduct an audio, audio-enhanced or video conference are neatly organized by more than 60 indexes. Company listings include detailed information on whom to contact and specific services provided.
Return to: Knowledge Industry Publications, Inc., 701 Westchester Avenue, White Plains, NY 10604
Home Video Marketplace @$45.00 The Teleconferencing Resources Directory, 83-84 @$ 47.50
The Rockamerica Guide to Video/Music @$ 60.00 The Video Register @$34.50 The Producer's Masterguide'" 1984 @$ 69.95 Dictionary of Computer Graphics @$34.95
Name Title
Organization
Address
City
State
Zip
Please send your free Video Brochure
A postage and handling charge of $ 1.50 per book is added unless order is prepaid. New York residents add appropriate sales tax. Orders from individuals must be prepaid.
Payment enclosed
Charge my credit card
VISA
Amex
Expiration date
Card number
P.O. number
Signature
MASTERCARD
For faster service call TOLL FREE 800/248-5474 ( In NY state 914/328-9157).
INDEX
A
AC Multiple Outlet Strips
VT- 147, 208-210
Adaptors, Video
VT-34, 35, 196, 199
VRF-93, 104, 134
Alignment Tape
VR-59
Amplifiers, Bridging
VRF-68-71, 125, 127, 129
Amplifiers, Signal Distribution
VRF-13, 16, 17, 55, 57, 67-71
78-82, 89, 127-130, 161
Amplifiers, Trunk
VRF-68-71, 75, 121-129
Analyzers
VT- 51
Antenna Array Spacing
VRF-58
Antenna Preamplifiers
VRF-9, 10, 191
Antenna, Reference
VRF-147
Antenna Stacking Data
VRF-8
Antenna Thrust Data
VRF-58
Antennas, Earth Station
VRF-4, 5, 47, 115
Antennas, Omnidirectional FM
VRF-7, 60, 190
Antennas, Parabolic
VRF-60
Antennas, Single Channel
VRF-6, 7
Antennas, TV
VRF-6-8, 18, 45, 46, 58-60, 113, 114, 188-190
Antennas, Yagi
VRF-7, 58-60, 190
Attenuators
VRF-77, 132, 147, 148, 176
Audio Distribution Amplifiers
VT-25, 29, 42, 67, 75, 84, 125
160, 162, 163, 193
Audio Mixers Audio/Program Monitoring
VT- 166-169 VT- 155, 203, 214, 215
Audio Transformers
VR-56
Audio-Video Synchronizer
VR-112
Aural Level Controller
VRF-11
Automation Equipment
VT-30, 164
B
Batteries/Belts/Chargers/Acc.
VC-5, 8, 16-19, 34-50, 54, 56
72-74, 150, 151, 176, 177, 220-223, 250, 277,
VL-14, 32, 37, 45, 90
Border Generators
VP- 72
Blocking Network
VRF-148, 178, 183
C
Cabinet Racks/Acc
VE-12-23, 28-31, 39, 46-49,
53, 59-63, 65,66, 80, 81, 83, 84, 87-92, 109, 116, 121, 122
Cabinets/Stands/Tables, Mobile
VE-2, 3, 7-11, 16, 38, 40-45
50, 52, 65, 66, 68-71, 82, 86, 105-108, 111, 117, 119, 123, 124
Cable
VC- 10, 20-25, 268, 273, 291
VT-34-36, 188, 196, 199
VRF-32-44, 118, 150-160
Cable Equalizers
VRF-72-74, 83, 88, 90, 132, 178
Cable Reels
VT-72, 73
Cable Reels & Trailers
VRF-101, 102
Camera Boom
VC-285
Camera, Cinematography
VC- 118
Camera, Color
VM-35
Camera Control Unit
VC- 19
Camera Enclosures/Mounts
VC-67-69, 134, 137, 138, 175, 201
203, 206, 207, 211, 237, 238, 278-281
Camera, Lights, Portable
VL-5-7, 32, 33, 40, 43, 44, 47, 48, 50
56-59, 68, 69, 90, 97
Camera Poles
VC- 54
Cameras, Accessories/CCTV
VC-52, 53, 70, 79-87, 102-105
108, 132-134, 149, 190-199, 202, 240-249, 265, 266, 283
Cameras, Accessories/Color
VC-53, 90-101, 108, 109, 111-118
139-147, 156, 170, 174, 178-189, 257, 258, 261-265, 267-269
C (cont'd)
Cameras, Medical
VC-53, 106, 107, 123, 124
Carrier Generators
VRF-66, 75, 125
Carrier Level Controllers
VRF-129, 130
Carts, Video
VE-4, 35, 99-104
Cases, Shipping & Carrying
VE-5, 6, 24-27, 33-37, 51
53-56, 93-96, 98
Cassette Albums
VA- 19
Cassette Labels
VR-14
CCTV Accessories
VC-202, 206-215, 236-239
Channel Converters
VRF-12, 50, 52, 94, 139
Channel Processor
VT- 19
Channel Traps
VRF-98, 99
Character Generators
VP-39, 40, 43, 46, 52-57, 68, 82-87
91-94, 97, 100, 105, 106, 108, 109
VRF-142
Character & Graphics Generator
VP-7, 8, 11, 24-27, 99, 107
110, 111, 123-125
Chargers - See Batteries/Belts/Chargers
Clock Systems
VP- 10, 22, 90
Clocks/Timers
VP- 10, 48, 49, 89, 90
Color Correction
VT-50, 187
Colorizer Combining Network
VP-82 VRF-117
Commercial Insert System
VT-30, 136
Conduit, Fittings, Couplings, Adaptors
VRF-19, 20
Connectors, Video
VT-34, 36, 189, 196, 199
VF1F-92, 93, 103-107
Consoles
VE-32, 39, 46, 47, 53, 57, 58, 64, 65, 67, 76-78, 109, 112-115
Consoles, Desk-Top
VC- 215
Consoles, Mobile
VE-82, 109, 111, 122-124
Controls, CCTV
VC- 136, 213, 214, 238, 239, 247, 248
Controllers, Auto Search
VR-24, 67, 98
Coring Tools Curtains, Tracks/Acc
VRF-93 VL-18, 19, 28, 88, 89
Cranes
VC- 286
D
Data Reader
VT-88
Demagnetizers
VA- 12, 17, 56
Demodulators, TV
VRF-3, 25, 27, 28, 53, 63, 97, 119, 140, 141
Desk Cabinets
VE-31, 85
Desk Consoles, Mobile
VE-50, 65, 66, 68-71, 109, 111, 126, 127
Detectors
VRF-148, 178, 184
Digital Disk Recorders
VR-2
Digital Programming Products
VT- 149
Directional Couplers
VRF-56, 89, 164, 182
Dollies
VC-9, 26, 27, 59, 125, 129, 161, 231-235, 251, 286, 290
Dubbing Racks
VE-65, 79, 109, 110, 125
Dubbing Systems
VA- 76, 77
Duplication System
VR-99
Duplicator, VHS Hi-Fi Video Tape
VR-42, 43
E
Edit Controllers
VR-38, 39, 51, 64, 72, 98 VP-31, 34
Editing Systems
VA-99
VP-30, 32, 33, 44, 47, 66, 67, 101-103, 132-134
Editing Recorders, 1/2"
VA-44, 45, 64, 97
Editing Recorders, 3/4" Effects Memory System
VA-32, 33, 71,94 VT- 159
Emergency Alert Controller
VRF-66
Encoders/Decoders
VA-48-50
VT- 13, 24, 48, 50, 123, 124
Enhancers
VT-47, 86, 187, 205-207
INDEX (cont'd)
Feedermakers
VRF-76, 83, 133
Fiber Optic Modules
VT-58, 61
Fiber Optic Systems
VT- 14, 70, 71, 131
Field Strength Meter
VRF-100
Film Chains - See Multiplexers
Filters
VRF-61, 75, 76, 77, 81, 82, 133, 134, 148, 182
Filters, Single Channel
VRF-64
FM Modulators/Demodulators
VRF-26, 27, 28, 29
FM Repeater
VRF-29
Frame Store
VC- 2
VR-30
Frequency Counter
VRF-146, 180
Frequency Transverler
VRF-50
Graphics, Systems Grounding Block
G
VP-7, 8, 12, 25, 95, 99, 107, 110, 111, 123-126 VRF-54
H
Head Cleaners
VA-4, 17, 18, 25, 59, 60
Headend Amplifiers
VRF-61
Headend Equipment
VRF-17
Headends, Custom
VRF-57
Heads
VC-3, 9, 26, 27, 57-59, 89, 125, 127, 128, 171, 172, 231-235
251, 253, 254, 286, 288, 289
VR-59
House Drop Materials
VRF-13, 95, 98, 99, 136-138
Housings Hum Eliminators
VRF-67 VT-6, 24
Image Correction Impedance Bridges Interactive TV Systems Intercom Systems Intercommunications Master Stations Interface Amplifier Interphase
VT- 53 VRF-183 VM-38, 91 VC-51, 61, 270
VT- 157 VT-82
VT- 104, 105
Ladders, Studio
VL-20, 31, 106
Lamps
VL-17, 18, 110
Laserdisc Players
VR-81, 82
Leakage Monitoring System
VRF-145
Learning System, Visual/Voice Response
VM-119
Lens Adaptors/Attachments
VC- 11, 260
Lenses
VC- 15, 30-33, 60, 75-78, 202, 208, 209, 215, 216-219
239, 255, 256, 267, 268
Light Stands
VL-4, 8, 31, 46, 83, 96, 111
Lighting Accessories
VL-3, 5-7, 16-20, 31, 38, 50, 83, 96, 106
Lighting Control Systems
VL-20, 21, 27, 34, 53, 54, 107, 108
Lighting Kits
VL-2, 4, 6, 7, 9, 12, 13, 32, 33, 36, 37, 39-41
43, 55-71, 76-78, 80-82, 93, 94, 98
Line Extenders
VRF-13, 84-87
Line Tracer
VRF-108
Logarithmic Amplifier
VRF-148
Machine Control Systems/Master Control Switchers
VT- 12, 20
28, 83, 94-96, 101, 102, 105, 126, 138, 192, 200, 201
M (cont'd)
Management Systems, Cable
VRF-137
Matching Transformers
VRF-54, 99, 161
Media Storage
VE-44, 45
Microcomputer/Gen Locker, Acc Microphones
VP- 123-125 VC-6, 7, 270
Mobile Television Production System Modems
VT- 161 VRF-49
Modulators/Converters, TV
VRF-12, 14, 15, 23, 24, 53, 64, 65, 120
Monitor Comparator
VM-13
Monitor Mounts
VM-74, 75, 92
Monitor Tuner
VRF-22
Monitoring Panels
VT-97
Monitors, Color
VM-2-5, 7-9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19, 25, 45, 49-54----
55, 57, 60-62, 71, 72, 79, 85-88, 93, 97-99, 113-116, 120-125
Monitors, Monochrome
VM-5, 10, 14, 16-18, 26, 27, 44, 52
73, 89, 90, 96, 101
Monopods
VL-46
Mono-Stereo Coherency Evaluator
VT- 155
Mounting Hardware
VC-59, 68, 69, 138, 175, 201, 203-205
211, 212, 226, 238, 273, 282
Multiplexers/Film Chains
VC-28, 29, 157, 164, 167, 168
Oscilloscopes
o
VM-11, 40, 43, 66-70, 80
VRF-146
Paint Systems
VP- 11, 23, 24, 95, 112
Pan & Tilts/Scanners
VC- 135, 200, 210, 211,236
Party Line User Stations
VT- 158, 194
Patterns, Lighting
VL-12, 49
Pedestals & Accessories
VC-58, 128, 129, 233-235, 287
VRF-30, 31, 109-112
Portable Camera- Lighting
VL-5-7, 14, 32, 33, 40, 43, 44, 47
48, 50, 56-59, 68, 69, 90, 97
Portable Distribution
VL-16, 17
Power Converters
VT- 197
Power Dividers
VRF-118, 181
Power Inserters
VRF-90, 118
Power Light Kits/Acc
VL-32, 33
Power Line Conditioners
VT-211, 212
Power Supplies
VRF-2, 10, 67, 90, 126, 132, 149
Preamplifiers, TV
VRF-52
Production Switchers, Acc.
VP-2, 6, 9-21, 23, 35-38, 41, 59-65
70, 71, 74-81, 98, 104, 113-119, 122
Projection Systems, Video
VM-6, 28-34, 37, 39, 48, 53
63-65, 82, 102-104, 117, 118
Projection TV
VR-58
Prompters/Systems
VC-55, 163, 227-230, 271, 272
Pulse & Video Delay Lines
VT-7-9, 132
Racks Mobile,VTRNCR
VE-65, 72-75, 106, 110, 127
Radiation Detectors
VRF-179
Receivers/Monitors, Color
VM-58, 59, 78, 79, 86, 87
93-95, 100, 123, 124
Receiver, Video
VRF-114, 116
Recorder/Cameras, Acc.
VC- 14, 110, 148, 154, 155,269
Recorders/Reproducers
VR-107-110
Reel Buck
VRF-102
INDEX (cont'd)
R (cont'd)
Reflection Coefficient Bridge
VRF-146
Relays
VT-37
Remote Controllers, TV
VRF-51
Rewinders, Video Cassette
VR-13, 60
Roll Effects Systems
VT- 134
Routing Switchers
VT-25, 29, 38, 39, 62-65, 76-78, 89-93
98-100, 126-128, 190, 191, 202
Satellite Receivers
VRF-47, 48, 61, 114, 116, 117
Satellite Stereo Processor Systems
VRF-21
Scenery & Props
VL-42
Scramblers/Decoders
VRF-95
Screens, Video Projection
VM-20-23, 127
Sensors, Video
VC-71, 138
Signal Distribution System Signal Level Meter
VT-26, 27 VRF-100, 144, 174, 175
Signal Processing Equipment
VT-5, 6, 16, 17, 23, 24, 47, 48
50, 56, 57, 68, 69, 85, 86, 98, 103, 104, 108, 115, 117, 129, 134
142, 150, 152, 153, 156, 162, 181, 194, 205-207
Slide Projectors, Video
VC-2
Special Effects Systems
VP-2, 6, 23, 70, 71, 80, 81, 96, 98, 104, 122
Spectrum Analyzers
VRF-143, 144
Spike & Noise Suppressors
VT- 213
Splicers, Video Tape
VR-13, 17, 18, 115
Splitters
VRF-54, 83, 89, 99, 161-164
Splitter/Combiners Spot Lights Squeezer
VRF-61, 64, 99, 161-164, 181 VL-6, 12, 22, 35, 104, 105, 109
VR-85
Status Monitoring System
VRF-131
Studio Distribution/Hardware
VL-19, 20, 29, 30, 88, 89
Studio Lighting
VL-2, 3, 10-12, 15, 21-26, 35, 40, 47, 48
51, 52, 54, 60-67, 72-82, 84-87, 95, 99-105
Studio Lighting Packages
VL-110
Subscriber Drop Materials
VRF-13, 95, 98, 99, 136-138
Subscriber Terminals Surge Arrestors
VRF-95, 136-138 VRF-77
Surge Suppressors Sweep Comparator
VT-42, 148 VRF-171
Sweep Signal Generators
VRF-100, 145, 173, 176
Sweep System
VRF-143, 145, 170-173, 177
Switchers
VM-34
Sync & Test Signal Generators
VT- 13, 16, 17, 50, 111, 116
118, 137, 150, 151, 172-178, 183
System Analyzer
VR F-177
Tape Erasers
VR-15, 17, 18, 22, 23, 28 56, 59, 60 90, 91
106 113, 114
Tape Loaders
VR-13, 14
Taps & Connectors
VRF-91, 106, 107 135
Telecine Cameras
VC- 119-122
Telecine Converter
VC- 10
Telecine Film & Slide Projectors ... VC- 152, 153, 158, 159, 165, 167, 168
Teleconferencing Systems
VM-54, 81
Tele-Slide Converter Television Receivers, Color
VC- 10 VM-46, 47 78, 100
Terminal Equipment
VT-32, 37, 52, 103, 104, 119-124
Terminators
138, 156, 193, 194 VRF-103, 134, 183
Test Equipment/Meters
VT- 13, 15-17, 48, 50, 51, 110-114
116, 118, 137, 139, 140, 150, 151, 154, 170-185
VRF-100, 108, 141, 143-148, 170-187
Test Slides & Charts
VC-66, 169, 224, 225
Thermal Equalizer
VRF-89
Time Base Correctors
VT-4, 49, 54, 55, 74, 109, 135, 136, 141
T (cont'd)
Time Code Readers/Generators/Acc.
VP-3-5, 27, 29, 40, 42
43, 46, 50-54, 57, 68, 120, 121, 128
Time Code Synchronizer/Controllers
VP-28, 45, 54,96
Time- Lapse Video Cassette Recorders/Players, VHS
VR-73-75
Time Processors
VP-39, 58
Titler, Video
VR-67
Tools, Hand
VRF-93, 134, 139
Towers
VRF-165-169
Transmission Systems
VC-249, 276, 282, 284
Transmitter, Addressable
VRF-139
Transport Control Products
VP-3-5
Tripods/Acc
VC-3, 4, 9, 26, 27, 58, 59, 88, 89, 125-127, 129
160-162, 171-173, 231-235, 251, 252, 259, 274, 275, 286, 290
Tubes, Camera
VC- 12, 13, 62-65
Tuners Turntable Controller
VRF-22, 97 VT-82
TV Line Equalizers
VT-9, 33, 75
TV Signal Processors Two-Way Test Equipment
VRF-11, 21, 62, 119 VRF-145
Underground Materials Utility Stands/Tables Utility Switchers
u
VRF-109-112 VE-97 VP- 21
V
Variable Bridges Vectorscopes Video Cassette Acc
Video Cassettes, Blank Recording
VRF-146 VM-42, 68, 107, 110-112, 126
VR-52, 67, 100
VR-3, 10, 11, 14, 16, 27
53-55, 79, 88, 104, 111
Video Cassette Changer
VR-21, 80
Video Cassette Recorders/Players, Beta
VR-58, 96, 97
Video Cassette Recorders/Players, 3/4"
VR-32-37, 68-72, 92-95
Video Cassette Recorders/Players, VHS
VR-31, 40, 41, 44-50
58, 61-66, 84, 105
VM-35, 55
Video Conferencing
VC- 131
VRF-96
Video Controllers
VP-22, 127
Video Corrector
VP-82
Video Disc Recorder/Player
VR-85. 101-103
Video Distribution Equipment
VT-22, 25, 29, 32, 41, 44, 45
66, 67, 75, 84, 87, 103, 121, 125, 129, 137, 152, 160, 162
163, 186, 189, 192-195, 204
Video Filters
VT- 10, 11, 18, 132
Video Interface Products
VT- 198
Video Matting
VP- 129-131
Video Measurement Products
VT-51
Video Patch Systems
VT-2, 3, 46, 188, 189
Video Pointers
VP-88
Video Printer
VR-57
Video Processors
VT-47, 53, 68, 86, 117, 129, 133, 136, 142, 149, 198
Video Presentation Systems
VM-24, 35, 36, 56, 76, 77, 83, 84, 106
Video Source Identifiers
VT- 151, 153
Videotape Storage
VE-44, 45, 109, 110, 117-120
Video Tape, Blank Recording
VR-9, 10, 26, 53, 88, 104
Video Tape Evaluators/Cleaners
VR-25, 86, 87
Video Tape Recorders, 1"
VR-5-8, 20, 29
Video Tape Reels/Acc.
VR-83, 89
Videotizer
VM-105
Video Tuner/Timer
VP- 126 VR-67
Wall Cabinets Waveform Monitors Wire, Drop
VE-30, 120 VM-42, 68, 108-112, 126
VR F-39-43, 157-160
PDF Compressor 8.2.14.09 Foxit FXPDFA 1.2